2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE
Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL
Item
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine
Coolant with Bittering Agent (US
only)
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A
(Canada); or equivalent (yellow
color)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft
SAE 5W-20 Super Premium
Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Premium Cooling System Flush
VC-1
Specification
WSS-M97B51-A1
Fill Capacity
9.2L (9.7 qt)
WSS-M2C930-A
-
ESR-M14P7-A
-
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Cooling System Pressure Test Specifications
Cooling System
Radiator Cap Pressure Test Specification
Pressure release cap
Thermostat Opening Temperatures
Thermostat starts to open
Thermostat fully open
Specification
124 kPa (18 psi)
89-124 kPa (13-18 psi)
86°C (187°F)
96°C (205°F)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
A/C condenser-to-radiator bolts
Block heater
Compressor-to-condenser bracket bolt
N.m
Coolant pump boltsa
Cooling fan motor and shroud bolts
Degas bottle-to-fender bolt
Engine oil filter (1)
Exhaust clamp
lb-ft
lb-in
10
40
7
-
30
-
89
62
-
6
9
-
-
53
80
-
40
30
-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:49
11:34:44 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Oil cooler bracket bolt
Oil pan drain plug
Primary timing chain guide bolts
Primary timing chain tensioner bolts
Thermostat housing bolts
Thermostat housing cover bolts
Variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid
housing bolts (1)
Y-pipe nuts
(1) Refer to the procedure in this service information.
6
27
10
10
10
10
-
20
-
53
89
89
89
89
-
40
30
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ENGINE COOLING
CAUTION: The engine cooling system is filled with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine
Coolant. Mixing coolant types degrades the corrosion protection of
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine coolant.
NOTE:
Stop-leak style pellets/products must not be used as an additive in this engine
cooling system. The addition of stop-leak style pellets/products can clog or
damage the cooling system, resulting in degraded cooling system performance
and/or failure.
The cooling system components are the:
radiator.
bypass tube.
pressure relief cap.
degas bottle.
radiator draincock.
coolant pump.
engine coolant temperature indicator unit.
thermostat (cold side).
variable speed fan motor assembly.
fan control module.
engine block coolant weep hole.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:44 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Locating Engine Block Coolant Weep Hole
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
The engine is equipped with an engine block coolant weep hole. If the inner coolant pump shaft seal fails,
coolant will be diverted out the weep hole in the LH side of the engine block. This prevents any coolant from
entering the crankcase.
Engine coolant provides freeze protection, boil protection, cooling efficiency and corrosion protection to the
engine and cooling components. In order to obtain these protections, the engine coolant must be maintained at
the correct concentration and fluid level in the degas bottle.
When adding engine coolant, use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water.
To maintain the integrity of the coolant and the cooling system:
add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant. Do not mix coolant types.
do not add/mix orange-colored Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSS-M97B44-D or green colored Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M97B44-A or equivalent. Mixing coolants may degrade the coolant's corrosion
protection.
do not add alcohol, methanol or brine, or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.
These can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally
equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not
yet available.
NOTE:
In the following illustration, Black arrows indicate hot, white arrows indicate
cold.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:44 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Coolant Flow Diagram, 3.5L
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Part Number
8C633
8005
8B273
8B274
6050
6083
8A586
9N271
9K461
8501
6010
8W005
18C553
18B539
8A080
Description
Lower degas bottle hose
Radiator
Lower radiator hose
Upper radiator hose
Cylinder head
Cylinder head gasket
Thermostat housing
Heater inlet tube
Lower intake manifold
Coolant pump
Engine block
Upper degas bottle hose
Heater hose assembly
Heater core
Degas bottle
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
ENGINE COOLING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
73III Automotive Meter
Tool Number
105-R0057 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:44 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Battery/Antifreeze Tester
014-R1060 or equivalent
Pressure Test Kit
014-R1072 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware or
equivalent scan tool
MATERIAL
Item
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with
Bittering Agent (US only)
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A (Canada); or equivalent
(yellow color)
Specification
WSS-M97B51-A1
Principles of Operation
Engine coolant flows primarily from the engine to the radiator circuit and back to the coolant pump. From the
coolant pump, coolant is sent through the engine block and cylinder heads. A separate circuit from the engine
also feeds the heater core with coolant. On most engines, the coolant pump is operated by engine rotation
through a pulley which is driven by the accessory drive belt to circulate the coolant. Some engines use a belt
driven by a pulley attached to the camshaft, and some engines use a sprocket driven by the timing chain to
operate the coolant pump. The coolant thermostat is a control valve actuated by coolant temperature. When the
thermostat is closed, coolant flow bypasses the radiator circuit and returns to the coolant pump. When the
thermostat is opened, coolant is allowed to flow through the radiator circuit in order to transfer engine generated
heat to the outside air.
NOTE:
The vehicle is equipped with either a degas bottle or an expansion tank.
The degas bottle, if equipped, holds surplus coolant and removes air from the cooling system, which reduces hot
spots. It also allows for coolant expansion and system pressurization, replenishes coolant to the cooling system
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:44 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
and serves as the location for service fill.
The coolant expansion tank, if equipped, holds surplus coolant, allows for coolant expansion and replenishes
coolant to the cooling system. It is equipped with a non-pressurized cap which allows coolant to be added to the
tank to keep it filled to prescribed levels.
The cooling fan draws air through the radiator to help cool the system coolant as it passes through the radiator.
The thermostat monitor is a function of the PCM and is designed to verify correct thermostat operation. The
monitor will be executed once per drive cycle and has a monitor run duration of 300-800 seconds. If a
malfunction occurs, DTC P0125 or P0128 is set, and the malfunction indicator lamp will be illuminated.
For vehicle/engine specific information, refer to ENGINE COOLING in Description and Operation.
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do
not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is operating
or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure;
steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
CAUTION: The engine cooling system is filled with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine
Coolant. Mixing coolant types degrades the corrosion protection of
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant. Do not mix coolant types.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in engine or cooling system
damage.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a degas bottle system have the pressure relief cap on
the degas bottle and no radiator cap. Vehicles equipped with a coolant
expansion tank system have the pressure relief cap on the radiator.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually check the engine coolant level at the degas bottle or coolant expansion tank when the system is
cold.
3. Make sure the pressure relief cap is installed correctly.
4. Record any cooling system DTCs retrieved. Refer to the PCM DTC CHART in this service information
for DTC descriptions.
NOTE:
Take note of any coolant odor or steam coming from cooling system
components.
5. If the system coolant is filled correctly and no DTCs associated with fail-safe cooling are retrieved, verify
the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:44 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Refer to the coolant flow diagram in ENGINE COOLING in Description and
Operation .
6. Inspect to determine if any of the following mechanical or electrical concerns apply.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Leaks or weeps at:
Hoses
Tubes
Clamp joints
Quick connect
couplings (if
equipped)
Gaskets
O-rings
Thermostat
housing
Radiator
Pressure relief
cap
Coolant pump
Heater core (wet
floor or coolant
odor in vehicle)
Heater control
valve
Heated throttle
body (TB) or
heated TB adapter
(if equipped)
Coolant crossover
manifold
assembly (if
equipped)
Oil cooler (if
equipped)
Degas bottle (if
equipped)
Coolant
expansion tank (if
equipped)
Electrical
Inoperative or damaged:
Electric cooling
fan (if equipped)
Electronically
actuated fan
clutch
Electronically
actuated fan
clutch controller
Wiring,
connectors, relays
or modules
Engine coolant
temperature
(ECT) sensor (if
equipped)
Cylinder head
temperature
(CHT) sensor (if
equipped)
Intake air
temperature (IAT)
sensor (if
equipped)
Mass air flow
(MAF) sensor
Vehicle speed
sensor (VSS)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:44 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Heated PCV (if
equipped)
Fuel pressure
regulator coolant
bowl (if equipped,
natural gas
engine)
Cylinder block
core plugs (if
equipped)
Cylinder head
core plugs (if
equipped)
Block heater (if
equipped)
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Cracked or damaged:
Hoses
Tubes
Hose clamps
Heater control
valve (if
equipped)
Thermostat
housing
Radiator
Pressure relief
cap
Cooling fan
Fan clutch (if
equipped)
Coolant pump
Degas bottle (if
equipped)
Coolant
expansion tank (if
equipped)
Oil cooler (if
equipped)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:44 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Coolant crossover
manifold
assembly (if
equipped)
Cylinder block
core plugs (if
equipped)
Cylinder head
core plugs (if
equipped)
Block heater (if
equipped)
Restricted airflow
through the A/C
condenser/radiator
Drive belt loose, worn
or installed incorrectly
Broken or weak drive
belt tensioner
Excessive white or light
gray exhaust smoke
(may have burnt coolant
odor)
Coolant in engine oil
Engine oil in coolant
Coolant in automatic
transmission fluid (if
equipped)
Automatic transmission
fluid (if equipped) in
coolant
7. If the inspection reveals an obvious concern that can be readily identified, repair it as necessary. Test the
system for normal operation.
8. Inspect the coolant condition in the following sequence:
1. Inspect the coolant color.
If Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant has a clear or pale yellow color, this indicates
higher water content than required. Test the engine coolant freezing point range with the
Battery/Antifreeze Tester. The freezing point should be in the range -45°C to -23°C (-50°F to
-10°F). If the vehicle is driven in cold climates less than -36°C (-34°F), it may be necessary
to increase the coolant concentration to get adequate freeze protection. Recommended
coolant concentration is 50/50 ethylene glycol to distilled water.
A pale green color indicates incorrect coolant (green in color) may have been added to the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
system. Use of incorrect (green in color) coolant degrades the corrosion protection of
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant. Flush the system and refill with the correct
mixture of distilled water and Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant.
NOTE:
If Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets are used, darkening of the
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden
tan will occur.
Dark brown could indicate a commercially available stop leak may have been used. Flush the
system and refill with the correct mixture of distilled water and Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant.
A light or reddish brown color indicates that rust may be present in the cooling system. Flush
the system and refill with the correct mixture of distilled water and Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant.
An iridescent sheen on top of the coolant could indicate a trace of oil is entering the system.
For information on engine diagnosis, refer to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
A milky brown color may indicate that engine oil is entering the cooling system. Pressure test
the cooling system. Refer to component tests in this service information. If engine oil is
suspected, the cause of the leak may be internal to the engine. Refer to ENGINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
A red, orange or light green colored sheen on top of the coolant may indicate that
transmission fluid is entering the cooling system. The cause may be a leaky radiator. Pressure
test the cooling system. Refer to COMPONENT TESTS.
2. If the engine coolant appearance is acceptable, test the engine coolant freezing point range with the
Battery/Antifreeze Tester. The freezing point should be in the range -45°C to -23°C (-50°F to -10°
F). If the vehicle is driven in cold climates less than -36°C (-34°F), it may be necessary to increase
the coolant concentration to get adequate freeze protection. Recommended coolant concentration is
50/50 ethylene glycol to distilled water.
Maximum coolant concentration is 60/40 for cold weather areas.
Minimum coolant concentration is 40/60 for warm weather areas.
3. Adjust coolant range and level if necessary:
If coolant is low, add specified coolant mixture only.
If the engine coolant tests too weak, remove some of the engine coolant and add undiluted
engine coolant until the readings are within acceptable levels.
If the engine coolant tests strong, remove some of the engine coolant and add distilled water
until the readings are within acceptable levels.
9. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause and test the system for
normal operation before proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
10. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
11. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
12. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
13. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
14. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics PCM.
15. If the DTCs recovered are related to the concern, go to the PCM DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
16. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to SYMPTOM CHART table.
PCM DTC CHART
DTC
Description
P0217
Engine Coolant Overtemperature Condition
P1285
Cylinder Head Overtemperature Condition
P1299
Cylinder Head Overtemperature Protection
Active
P0125
Insufficient Coolant Temp For Closed Loop
Fuel Control
P0128
Coolant Thermostat (Coolant Temp Below
Thermostat Regulating Temperature)
P0480
Fan 1, 2 or 3 Control Circuit, Respectively
P0481
P0482
All Other DTCs
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Go to Pinpoint Test c .
Go to Pinpoint Test c .
REFER to the Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article.
REFER to the Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article.
Symptom Chart
SYMPTOM CHART
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Loss of coolant
The engine overheats
Coolant hoses or tubes
Hose clamps
Coolant pump O-ring seal or gasket
Thermostat O-ring seal or gasket
Thermostat housing
Radiator
Transmission fluid cooler (in
radiator) (if equipped) (may leak
internally or externally)
Degas bottle (if equipped)
Coolant expansion tank (if equipped)
Pressure relief cap
Coolant pump leaking from weep
hole
Auxiliary coolant pump (if equipped)
Heater core
Heater control valve (if equipped)
Coolant crossover manifold assembly
(if equipped)
Engine gaskets (may leak internally
or externally)
Oil cooler (if equipped) (may leak
internally or externally)
Heated throttle body (TB) or heated
TB adapter (if equipped)
Heated PCV (if equipped)
Fuel pressure regulator coolant bowl
(if equipped, natural gas engine)
Cylinder block core plugs (if
equipped)
Cylinder head core plugs (if
equipped)
Block heater (if equipped)
Go to Pinpoint Test
A.
Low coolant level
External engine coolant leak
Airlock in system
Pressure relief cap installation
Restricted airflow through the A/C
condenser/radiator
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
The engine does not
reach normal operating
temperature
Go to Pinpoint Test
C.
Low coolant level
Thermostat
Mechanical fan clutch always
engaged
Electric cooling fan always on
Engine coolant temperature indicator
system (gauge)
ECT sensor (if equipped)
CHT sensor (if equipped)
Block heater power cable
CHECK continuity in
all 3 power cable
circuits. If any circuit
measures greater than 5
ohms, INSTALL a new
power cable.
Block heater
CHECK the resistance
of the block heater. If
the resistance does not
measure between 12.5
and 17.0 ohms,
INSTALL a new block
The block heater does
not operate correctly
-
Internal engine coolant leak
Coolant condition/concentration
Accessory drive components
Non-OEM engine enhancement
components
Electric cooling fan (if equipped)
Mechanical cooling fan (if equipped)
Mechanical cooling fan clutch (if
equipped)
Radiator
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature (ECT)
indicator system (gauge)
ECT sensor (if equipped)
Cylinder head temperature (CHT)
sensor (if equipped)
Heater core
Coolant pump
Coolant flow restriction
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
heater.
The electric cooling fan
(s) or electronically
controlled fan clutch is
inoperative in one or
more speeds or does not
operate correctly (if
equipped)
Wiring
Relays
Fuses
Fan control module
Cooling fan motor(s)
Cooling fan resistor(s)
Electric fan clutch
REFER to the
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article.
Wiring
Relays
REFER to the
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article.
Foreign material contamination
Fan motor
REMOVE the foreign
material from the
cooling fan and shroud.
TEST the system for
normal operation. If
still noisy, INSTALL a
new cooling fan
assembly.
Fan blade detached from fan motor
INSTALL a new
cooling fan assembly.
Fan clutch
CARRY OUT the Fan
Clutch Test - Minimum
Speed Requirement
component test.
The electric cooling fan
(s) stay(s) on all the
time (if equipped)
Noisy electric cooling
fan operation (if
equipped)
Noisy mechanical fan
operation (if equipped)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: Loss of Coolant
Normal Operation
The engine cooling system is a closed system that provides for coolant expansion and contraction and also
changes in pressure as coolant warms and cools with engine operation. Various gaskets, seals, hoses and clamps
are used to contain coolant within the cooling system and keep other fluids and contaminants from entering the
cooling system.
Coolant loss can be attributed to either external or internal leaks anywhere within the cooling system.
For vehicle/engine specific information, refer to ENGINE COOLING in Description and Operation.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Coolant hoses or tubes
Hose clamps
Thermostat O-ring seal or gasket
Coolant pump O-ring seal or gasket
Thermostat housing
Heater control valve (if equipped)
Radiator
Transmission fluid cooler (in radiator) (if equipped)
Pressure relief cap
Coolant pump leaking from weep hole
Auxiliary coolant pump (if equipped)
Heater core
Heated throttle body (TB) or heated TB adapter (if equipped)
Coolant crossover manifold assembly (if equipped)
Engine gaskets
Oil cooler (if equipped)
Degas bottle (if equipped)
Coolant expansion tank (if equipped)
Heated PCV (if equipped)
Fuel pressure regulator coolant bowl (if equipped, natural gas engine)
Cylinder block core plugs (if equipped)
Cylinder head core plugs (if equipped)
Block heater (if equipped)
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (if equipped)
PINPOINT TEST A: LOSS OF COOLANT
WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do
not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is operating
or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure;
steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
A1 CARRY OUT INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
Carry out the Inspection and Verification procedure in this service information.
Were any concerns found?
YES : REPAIR as needed. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to A2 .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
A2 CHECK THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
NOTE:
Allow the engine to cool before checking the engine coolant level.
Key in OFF position.
Visually inspect the engine coolant level at the degas bottle or the coolant expansion tank.
Is the engine coolant level within specifications?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : ADJUST the engine coolant level as necessary. Go to A3.
A3 PRESSURE TEST THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Pressure test the engine cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Pressure Test in COMPONENT
TESTS in this service information.
Does the engine cooling system leak?
YES : REPAIR or INSTALL new components. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : If the vehicle is equipped with a coolant expansion tank, go to A4. If the vehicle is equipped
with a degas bottle, go to A5.
A4 CHECK THE PRESSURE RELIEF CAP
Carry out the pressure relief cap pressure test. Refer to Pressure Relief Cap Pressure Test in
COMPONENT TESTS in this service information.
Is the pressure relief cap OK?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : INSTALL a new pressure relief cap. TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK THE ENGINE COOLANT FOR AN INTERNAL LEAK
Inspect the engine coolant in the degas bottle or coolant expansion tank for signs of engine oil or
transmission fluid.
Is engine oil or transmission fluid evident in the coolant?
YES : If engine oil is evident, go to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article
for engine diagnosis. If transmission fluid is evident, INSTALL a new radiator. REPAIR the
transmission as necessary. Refer to the appropriate Automatic Transmission article for the
procedure. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to A6.
A6 CHECK THE ENGINE OIL AND TRANSMISSION FLUID FOR COOLANT
Remove the oil level indicators from the engine and the transmission.
Is coolant evident in the oil or transmission fluid?
YES : If coolant is in the engine oil, go to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
article. If coolant is in the transmission fluid, INSTALL a new radiator. REPAIR the transmission
as necessary. Refer to the appropriate Automatic Transmission article for the procedure.
NO : Go to A7.
A7 CHECK THE COOLING SYSTEM FOR COMBUSTION GASES
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Use U-View® Combustion Leak Tester part number 560000 or
equivalent.
Using a cooling system combustion gas leak tester, following the instructions supplied with the
tester, check the coolant for combustion gases.
Are combustion gases present?
YES : Go to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article for engine diagnosis.
NO : The cooling system is operational.
Pinpoint Test B: The Engine Overheats
Normal Operation
The engine cooling system functions to maintain engine temperatures during operation. Correct coolant flow
through the engine, radiator and remainder of cooling system passages and components is essential to
maintaining a correct engine temperature.
Engine coolant flows primarily from the engine to the radiator circuit and back to the coolant pump. From the
coolant pump, coolant is sent through the engine block and cylinder heads. A separate circuit from the engine
also feeds the heater core with coolant. On most engines, the coolant pump is operated by engine rotation
through a pulley which is driven by the accessory drive belt to circulate the coolant. Some engines use a belt
driven by a pulley attached to the camshaft, and some engines use a sprocket driven by the timing chain to
operate the coolant pump. The coolant thermostat is a control valve actuated by coolant temperature. When the
thermostat is closed, coolant flow bypasses the radiator circuit and returns to the coolant pump. When the
thermostat is opened, coolant is allowed to flow through the radiator circuit in order to transfer engine generated
heat to the outside air.
Engine overheating generally occurs when there is a disruption in the ability to control either coolant flow at the
correct rate, the inability to transfer heat from the engine through the coolant (including low coolant), or an
inability to transfer engine generated heat to the outside air through the radiator.
For vehicle/engine specific information, refer to ENGINE COOLING in Description and Operation.
DTC P0217 Engine Coolant Overtemperature Condition
DTC P1285 Cylinder Head Overtemperature Condition
DTC P1299 Cylinder Head Overtemperature Protection Active
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Low coolant level
External engine coolant leak
Airlock in system
Pressure relief cap installation
Restricted airflow through the A/C condenser/radiator
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Internal engine coolant leak
Coolant condition/concentration
Accessory drive components
Non-OEM engine enhancement components
Electric cooling fan (if equipped)
Mechanical cooling fan blade (if equipped)
Mechanical cooling fan clutch (if equipped)
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) indicator system (gauge)
ECT sensor (if equipped)
Cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (if equipped)
Heater core
Coolant pump
Coolant flow restriction
PINPOINT TEST B: THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do
not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is operating
or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure;
steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
B1 CARRY OUT INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
Carry out the Inspection and Verification procedure in this service information.
Were any concerns found?
YES : REPAIR as needed. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to B2 .
B2 CHECK FOR DTCs
NOTE:
Refer to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article for correct
scan tool hook-up procedure.
Check for DTC P0217, P1285 or P1299.
Is DTC P0217, P1285 or P1299 present?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : Actual engine overheating has not been verified. CHECK the ECT gauge operation. REFER
to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING CHIMES article.
If any other DTCs are retrieved, REFER to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES
article.
B3 CHECK FOR AN AIRFLOW OBSTRUCTION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Check the radiator or A/C condenser for an obstruction such as leaves or cardboard.
Is an obstruction present?
YES : REMOVE the obstruction. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to B4.
B4 CHECK THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
NOTE:
Allow the engine to cool before checking the coolant level.
Key in OFF position.
Visually check the engine coolant level in the degas bottle or coolant expansion tank.
Is the engine coolant level within specification?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : ADJUST the engine coolant level as necessary. Go to B5.
B5 PRESSURE TEST THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Pressure test the engine cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Pressure Test in COMPONENT
TESTS in this service information.
Does the engine cooling system leak?
YES : REPAIR or INSTALL new components. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Vehicles equipped with an expansion tank, go to B6. Vehicles equipped with a degas bottle,
go to B7.
B6 CHECK THE PRESSURE RELIEF CAP
Carry out the pressure relief cap pressure test. Refer to Pressure Relief Cap Pressure Test in
COMPONENT TESTS in this service information.
Is the pressure relief cap OK?
YES : Go to B7.
NO : INSTALL a new pressure relief cap. TEST the system for normal operation.
B7 CHECK THE ENGINE COOLANT FOR AN INTERNAL LEAK
Inspect the engine coolant in the degas bottle or coolant expansion tank for signs of engine oil or
transmission fluid.
Is engine oil or transmission fluid evident in the coolant?
YES : If engine oil is evident, go to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article
for engine diagnosis. If transmission fluid is evident, INSTALL a new radiator. REPAIR the
transmission as necessary. Refer to the appropriate Automatic Transmission article for the
procedure. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to B8.
B8 CHECK THE ENGINE OIL AND TRANSMISSION FLUID FOR COOLANT
Remove the oil level indicators from the engine and the transmission.
Is coolant evident in the oil or transmission fluid?
YES : If coolant is in the engine oil, go to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
article. If coolant is in the transmission fluid, INSTALL a new radiator. REPAIR the transmission
as necessary. Refer to the appropriate Automatic Transmission article for the procedure.
NO : Go to B9.
B9 CHECK THE COOLING SYSTEM FOR COMBUSTION GASES
NOTE:
Use U-View® Combustion Leak Tester part number 560000 or
equivalent.
Using a cooling system combustion gas leak tester, following the instructions supplied with the
tester, check the coolant for combustion gases.
Are combustion gases present?
YES : Go to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article for engine diagnosis.
NO : Go to B10.
B10 CHECK COOLANT CONDITION
Check the coolant for dirt, rust or contamination and check the coolant concentration.
Is the coolant condition OK?
YES : Vehicles equipped with an electric cooling fan, go to B11 . Vehicles equipped with only a
mechanical cooling fan, go to B12 .
NO : FLUSH the engine cooling system. REFER to COOLING SYSTEM FLUSHING. TEST
the system for normal operation.
B11 CHECK THE ELECTRIC COOLING FAN OPERATION
Start the engine.
Place the climate control function selector in the MAX A/C position and the blower motor switch
in the HI position.
Did the electric cooling fan operate?
YES : If the vehicle is also equipped with a mechanical cooling fan, go to B12. Otherwise, go to
B13.
NO : DIAGNOSE the electric cooling fan operation. REFER to INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE
ENGINES article.
B12 CHECK THE MECHANICAL COOLING FAN OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
If the vehicle is equipped with a viscous fan clutch, carry out the Fan Clutch Tests in
COMPONENT TESTS. If the vehicle is equipped with an electronically actuated fan clutch, refer
to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article.
Is the cooling fan operation OK?
YES : Go to B13.
NO : INSTALL a new fan clutch. TEST the system for normal operation.
B13 CHECK THE COOLANT PUMP OPERATION
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to run for 10 minutes (hot side thermostat equipped vehicles) or 30 minutes (cold
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
side thermostat equipped vehicles). Place the climate control function selector in the MAX HEAT
position. Feel the heater outlet hose.
Is the heater outlet hose hot?
YES : Go to B14.
NO : INSTALL a new coolant pump. TEST the system for normal operation.
B14 CHECK THE THERMOSTAT OPERATION
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to run for 10 minutes (hot side thermostat equipped vehicles) or 30 minutes (cold
side thermostat equipped vehicles). Feel the upper radiator hose (hot side thermostat equipped
vehicles) or the lower radiator hose (cold side thermostat equipped vehicles).
Is the upper (hot side thermostat equipped vehicles) or lower (cold side equipped vehicles)
radiator hose hot?
YES : CHECK the engine coolant temperature gauge operation. REFER to INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING CHIMES article.
NO : Go to B15.
B15 VISUALLY INSPECT THE THERMOSTAT
Carry out the Thermostat Visual Inspection in COMPONENT TESTS.
Is the thermostat damaged?
YES : INSTALL a new thermostat. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new thermostat. TEST the system for normal operation. If the engine still
overheats, INSTALL a new radiator. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test C: The Engine Does Not Reach Normal Operating Temperature
Normal Operation
The engine cooling system functions to maintain engine temperatures during operation. Correct coolant flow
through the engine, radiator and remainder of cooling system passages and components is essential to
maintaining a correct engine temperature.
Engine coolant flows primarily from the engine to the radiator circuit and back to the coolant pump. From the
coolant pump, coolant is sent through the engine block and cylinder heads. A separate circuit from the engine
also feeds the heater core with coolant. On most engines, the coolant pump is operated by engine rotation
through a pulley which is driven by the accessory drive belt to circulate the coolant. Some engines use a belt
driven by a pulley attached to the camshaft, and some engines use a sprocket driven by the timing chain to
operate the coolant pump. The coolant thermostat is a control valve actuated by coolant temperature. When the
thermostat is closed, coolant flow bypasses the radiator circuit and returns to the coolant pump. When the
thermostat is opened, coolant is allowed to flow through the radiator circuit in order to transfer engine generated
heat to the outside air.
Concerns of engine inability to reach normal operating temperature typically occur when the rate of coolant
flow through some coolant circuits (radiator, heater core) is more than expected given the conditions, or when
the cooling fans operate all the time (electric fans) or the fan clutch is always engaged (engine driven fans).
Heat is not allowed to build in the engine because a heat exchanger is removing too much heat, including the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
radiator, heater core and oil cooler. In addition, perceived concerns that the engine does not reach normal
operating temperature can be related to a low coolant level or trapped air which does not allow for hot coolant
to be available at the heater core, an inoperative climate control system, or for concerns perceived or related to
an incorrect engine temperature gauge indication.
For vehicle/engine specific information, refer to ENGINE COOLING in Description and Operation.
DTC P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temp for Closed Loop Fuel Control
DTC P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Coolant Temp Below Thermostat Regulating Temperature)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Low coolant level
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) indicator system (gauge)
Engine cooling fan
PINPOINT TEST C: THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE
WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do
not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is operating
or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure;
steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
C1 CARRY OUT INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
Carry out the Inspection and Verification procedure in this service information.
Were any concerns found?
YES : REPAIR as needed. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to C2.
C2 CHECK FOR DTCs P0125 or P0128
NOTE:
Refer to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article for correct scan
tool hook-up procedure.
Check for DTC P0125 or P0128.
Is DTC P0125 or P0128 present?
YES : If the vehicle is equipped with an electric cooling fan, go to C3. If the vehicle is equipped
with only a mechanical cooling fan, go to C4.
NO : The cooling system is operational. If an inoperative engine coolant temperature gauge is
suspected, CHECK the engine coolant temperature gauge operation. REFER to INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING CHIMES article. If an inoperative
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
climate control system is suspected, CHECK the climate control system operation. REFER to
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS
article. If any other DTCs are retrieved, REFER to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE
ENGINES article.
C3 CHECK THE ELECTRIC COOLING FAN OPERATION
Allow the engine to cool.
Make sure the A/C switch is OFF (if equipped).
Start the engine.
Check the electric cooling fan.
Is the electric cooling fan on all the time?
YES : DIAGNOSE the electric cooling fan operation. REFER to the INTRODUCTION GASOLINE ENGINES article.
NO : If the vehicle is also equipped with a mechanical cooling fan, go to C4. Otherwise, go to C5.
C4 CHECK THE MECHANICAL COOLING FAN OPERATION
Carry out the Cooling Fan Clutch Component Test. For a mechanical cooling fan clutch, refer to
COMPONENT TESTS in this service information. For an electronic cooling fan clutch, refer to
the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article.
Is the cooling fan clutch OK?
YES : Go to C5.
NO : INSTALL a new cooling fan clutch. TEST the system for normal operation.
C5 CHECK THE COOLANT LEVEL
NOTE:
Allow the engine to cool before checking the coolant level.
Visually check the engine coolant level in the degas bottle or coolant expansion tank.
Is the engine coolant level within specification?
YES : INSTALL a new thermostat. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test A to diagnose a coolant leak.
Component Tests
Pressure Test - Degas Bottle Systems
WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do
not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is operating
or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure;
steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a degas bottle system have the pressure relief cap on
the degas bottle and no radiator cap. Vehicles equipped with a coolant
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
expansion tank system have the pressure relief cap on the radiator.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Check the engine coolant level. Adjust the coolant level as necessary.
3. Attach the Radiator/Heater Core Pressure Tester to the degas bottle nipple and overflow hose. Install a
pressure test pump to the quick connect fitting of the test adapter.
CAUTION: Do not pressurize the cooling system beyond the maximum pressure
listed in SPECIFICATIONS in this service information or cooling
system components may be damaged.
NOTE:
If the plunger of the pressure tester is depressed too fast, an erroneous
pressure reading will result.
4. Slowly depress the plunger of the pressure test pump until the pressure gauge reading stops increasing
and note the highest pressure reading obtained. If the pressure reading exceeds the maximum cap pressure
listed in the SPECIFICATIONS , install a new pressure relief cap.
5. If the system does not hold pressure, remove the pressure relief cap and wash in clean water to dislodge
all the foreign material from the gasket. Check the sealing surface in the filler neck of the degas bottle for
nicks or cuts. Install the pressure relief cap.
6. Pressurize the engine cooling system as described in Step 4 above. Observe the gauge reading for
approximately 2 minutes. Pressure should not drop during this time. If the pressure drops within this time,
inspect for leaks and repair as necessary.
7. If no leaks are found and the pressure drops. the pressure relief cap may be leaking. Install a new pressure
relief cap and retest the system.
8. If no leaks are found after a new pressure relief cap is installed, and the pressure drops, the leak may be
internal to the radiator transmission cooler (if equipped). Inspect the coolant for transmission fluid and the
transmission fluid for coolant. Repair as necessary.
9. If there is no contamination of the coolant or transmission fluid, the leak may be internal to the engine.
Inspect the coolant for engine oil and the engine oil for coolant. Refer to ENGINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article to diagnose the engine.
10. Release the system pressure by loosening the pressure relief cap. Check the coolant level and adjust as
necessary.
Pressure Test - Coolant Expansion Tank Systems
WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do
not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is operating
or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure;
steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a degas bottle system have the pressure relief cap on
the degas bottle and no radiator cap. Vehicles equipped with a coolant
expansion tank system have the pressure relief cap on the radiator.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Remove the pressure relief cap. Top off the radiator as needed. Fit the pressure tester to the radiator fill
neck.
CAUTION: Do not pressurize the cooling system beyond 138 kPa (20 psi) or
cooling system components may be damaged.
NOTE:
If the plunger of the pressure tester is depressed too fast, an incorrect
pressure reading will result.
3. Pump the cooling system to a maximum of 138 kPa (20 psi) and hold for 2 minutes. If the pressure drops
within this time, inspect for leaks and repair as necessary.
4. If no leaks are found and the pressure drops, the leak may be internal to the radiator transmission cooler
(if equipped). Inspect the coolant for transmission fluid and the transmission fluid for coolant. Repair as
necessary.
5. If there is no contamination of the coolant or transmission fluid, the leak may be internal to the engine.
Inspect the coolant for engine oil and the engine oil for coolant. Refer to ENGINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article to diagnose the engine.
Cap
1. Inspect the pressure relief cap and seals for damage or deterioration. Install a new pressure relief cap if
necessary.
2. Fit the pressure relief cap to the Radiator/Heater Core Pressure Tester Kit using the correct adapter.
NOTE:
If the plunger of the pressure tester is depressed too fast, an incorrect
pressure reading will result.
3. Slowly pump the pressure tester until the pressure gauge stops increasing and note the highest pressure
reading. Release the pressure and repeat the test. Install a new pressure relief cap if the pressure is not
within specification. Refer to the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS table in this service information.
Thermostat
A new thermostat should be installed only after the following tests and checks have been carried out:
Pinpoint Test A, B or C
Thermostat Visual Inspection
Thermostat Visual Inspection
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
1. Remove the thermostat.
2. Examine the thermostat for signs of damage including:
Valve not fully seated (light visible through the valve)
Foreign material lodged in the main valve
Bent or broken frame or flange
Bent or broken spring
Bent or broken valve or valve stem
Wax leaking from wax reservoir or a bulge in the reservoir
Any other damage or distortion
NOTE:
If no damage is found during the inspection, do not attempt to open the
thermostat using hot water or other heat sources. This method is not an
accurate means to test the function of the thermostat and may damage the
thermostat.
3. If damage is found during the inspection, remove any foreign material or broken pieces and install a new
thermostat.
4. If no damage is found during the inspection, continue troubleshooting the system concern. Go to the
Symptom Chart for further instructions.
Radiator Leak Test, Removed From Vehicle
CAUTION: Never leak test an aluminum radiator in the same water that copper/brass
radiators are tested in. Flux and caustic cleaners may be present in the
cleaning tank and they will damage aluminum radiators.
NOTE:
Always install plugs in the oil cooler fittings before leak testing or cleaning any
radiator.
NOTE:
Clean the radiator before leak testing to avoid contamination of tank.
1. Leak test the radiator in clean water with 138 kPa (20 psi) air pressure.
Fan Clutch Test
1. Turn the engine OFF and wait until the fan comes to a complete stop.
2. Spin the fan blade by hand. A light resistance should be felt. If there is no resistance or very high
resistance, the minimum and maximum fan speeds must be checked. For an electronically actuated fan
clutch, refer to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article. For a viscous fan clutch, carry
out the following:
Fan Clutch Test - Minimum Speed Requirement
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
1. Use a suitable marker to mark the coolant pump or fan pulley and one of the fan blades.
2. Make sure the A/C is OFF, if equipped.
WARNING: Do not operate the engine with the hood open until the fan blade has
been examined for possible cracks and separation. A damaged fan
can separate during operation. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury.
3. Start the engine and run it at approximately 2,000 RPM for 5 minutes or until there is a noticeable
reduction in fan noise to allow the fan clutch to go into disengaged mode.
4. Aim a laser photo tachometer at the coolant pump or fan pulley. Run the engine to achieve 3,000 RPM at
the coolant pump or fan pulley.
5. With the coolant pump or fan pulley at 3,000 RPM, aim the laser photo tachometer at the fan blade.
Monitor and record fan speed.
6. The fan blade speed must be less than the specified RPM at 3,000 RPM coolant pump or fan pulley RPM.
Refer to SPECIFICATIONS table in this service information for correct fan speed.
7. Turn the engine off.
8. If the fan blade speed was greater than specified, install a new fan clutch.
Fan Clutch Test - Maximum Speed Requirement
1. Use a suitable marker to mark the coolant pump or fan pulley and one of the fan blades.
2. Block off areas on each side of the radiator in the engine compartment, the front of the radiator grille and
the bumper. Close the hood. This will raise the temperature of the air striking the fan clutch and should
cause the fan blade to operate at maximum speed.
3. Place the climate control function selector switch in the MAX A/C position and the blower motor switch
in the HI position, if equipped.
WARNING: Do not operate the engine with the hood open until the fan blade has
been examined for possible cracks and separation. A damaged fan
can separate during operation. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Do not open the hood to check the coolant pump or fan pulley
temperature. This will lower the temperature of the air reaching the fan
clutch and void the test. Aim the infrared thermometer through the wheel
well or from under the vehicle.
4. Start the engine and run it at approximately 2,000 RPM until normal operating temperature has been
achieved. Using an infrared thermometer, monitor the coolant pump or fan pulley. Run the engine until
the coolant pump or fan pulley is at least 96°C (205°F).
NOTE:
Do not open the hood to check the coolant pump or fan pulley or fan blade
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
speed. This will lower the temperature of the air reaching the fan clutch
and void the test. Aim the laser photo tachometer through the wheel well
or from under the vehicle.
5. Aim a laser photo tachometer at the coolant pump or fan pulley. Run the engine to achieve 3,000 RPM at
the coolant pump or fan pulley.
6. With the coolant pump or fan pulley at 3,000 RPM, aim the laser photo tachometer at the fan blade.
Monitor and record fan blade speed.
7. The fan blade speed must be greater than the specified RPM at 3,000 RPM coolant pump or fan pulley
RPM. Refer to SPECIFICATIONS in this service information for correct fan speed.
8. Open the hood and allow the engine to idle momentarily to lower engine temperature. Turn the engine off
and remove the blocks from the radiator, grille and bumper.
9. If the fan blade speed is less than specified, install a new fan clutch.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
COOLING SYSTEM DRAINING, FILLING AND BLEEDING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
RADKITPLUS
MATERIAL
Item
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with
Bittering Agent (US only)
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A (Canada); or equivalent
(yellow color)
Tool Number
078-00497
Specification
WSS-M97B51-A1
Draining
WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do
not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is operating
or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure;
steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: The coolant must be recovered in a suitable, clean container for reuse. If
the coolant is contaminated, it must be recycled or disposed of correctly.
Using contaminated coolant may result in damage to the engine or cooling
system components.
CAUTION: The engine cooling system is filled with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine
Coolant. Mixing coolant types degrades the corrosion protection of
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant.
NOTE:
Stop-leak style pellets/products must not be used as an additive in this engine
cooling system. The addition of stop-leak style pellets/products can clog or
damage the cooling system resulting in degraded cooling system performance
and/or failure.
NOTE:
Less than 80% of coolant capacity can be recovered with the engine in the
vehicle. Dirty, rusty or contaminated coolant requires replacement.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Release the pressure in the cooling system by slowly turning the pressure relief cap 1/2 turn
counterclockwise. When the pressure is released, remove the pressure relief cap.
3. Place a suitable container below the radiator draincock.
Open the draincock and allow to drain.
Close the draincock after draining.
4. When the coolant is drained, make sure drain plugs are installed and tight.
Filling and Bleeding with RADKITPLUS
1. Using the special tool, install the RADKITPLUS and follow the manufacturer's instructions to fill and
bleed the cooling system.
Filling and Bleeding without RADKITPLUS
CAUTION: Engine coolant provides freeze protection, boil protection, cooling
efficiency and corrosion protection to the engine and cooling components.
In order to obtain these protections, the engine coolant must be
maintained at the correct concentration and fluid level in the degas bottle.
When adding engine coolant, use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and
distilled water.
To maintain the integrity of the coolant and the cooling system:
Vehicle cooling systems are filled with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Engine Coolant. Always fill the cooling system with the same coolant
that is present in the system. Do not mix coolant types.
Do not add/mix orange-colored Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
Coolant or equivalent, meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44-D or
green colored Premium Engine Coolant. Mixing coolants may
degrade the coolant's corrosion protection.
Do not add alcohol, methanol or brine, or any engine coolants mixed
with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. These can cause engine damage
from overheating or freezing.
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft
Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling
process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community's regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Stop-leak style pellets/products must not be used as an additive in this engine
cooling system. The addition of stop-leak style pellets/products can clog or
damage the cooling system resulting in degraded cooling system performance
and/or failure.
1. Open the degas bottle cap and fill the degas bottle to the MAX fill line.
2. Close the degas bottle cap.
CAUTION: If the engine overheats or the fluid level drops below the minimum fill
line, shut off the engine and add fluid to the degas bottle maximum
fill line once the engine cools. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in damage to the engine.
3. Start the engine and let idle for 10 minutes or until the engine reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Repeat Step 3 if necessary.
5. Start the engine and turn the heater to the MAX position.
CAUTION: If the engine overheats or the fluid level drops below the minimum fill
line, shut off the engine and add fluid to the degas bottle maximum
fill line once the engine cools. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in damage to the engine.
6. Run the engine at 2,500 RPM for 10 minutes.
7. Repeat Step 6 if necessary.
WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is
operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under
pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap
is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury.
8. Check the engine coolant level in degas bottle and fill as necessary.
COOLING SYSTEM FLUSHING
MATERIAL
Item
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with
Bittering Agent (US only)
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A (Canada); or equivalent
(yellow color)
Premium Cooling System Flush
VC-1
Specification
WSS-M97B51-A1
ESR-M14P7-A
1. To remove rust, sludge and other foreign material from the cooling system, use cooling system flush that
is safe for use with aluminum radiators, For additional information, refer to SPECIFICATIONS. This
cleaning restores cooling system efficiency and helps prevent overheating. A pulsating or reversed
direction of flushing water will loosen sediment more quickly than a steady flow in the normal coolant
flow direction. In severe cases where cleaning solvents will not clean the cooling system efficiently, it
will be necessary to use the pressure flushing method using cooling system flusher. Dispose of old
coolant and flushing water contaminated with antifreeze and cleaning chemicals in accordance with local,
state or federal laws.
2. Remove the radiator. For additional information, refer to RADIATOR.
CAUTION: Radiator internal pressure must not exceed 138 kPa (20 psi). Damage
to the radiator can result.
3. Backflush the radiator with the radiator in an upside-down position with a high-pressure hose in the lower
hose location and backflush.
4. Remove the thermostat. For additional information, refer to THERMOSTAT.
5. Backflush the engine. Position the high-pressure water hose into the engine through the engine return and
backflush the engine.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
BLOCK HEATER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Exploded View Of Block Heater With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
030104
6B018
6A051
Description
Block heater cover
Block heater electrical connector
Block heater
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to COOLING SYSTEM DRAINING,
FILLING AND BLEEDING.
3. Remove the RH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
4. Remove the block heater cover.
NOTE:
Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from
rotating or hot components, or damage to the wiring may occur.
5. Disconnect the block heater electrical connector.
6. Remove the block heater.
To install, tighten to 40 N.m (30 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
8. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to COOLING SYSTEM
DRAINING, FILLING AND BLEEDING.
THERMOSTAT
MATERIAL
Item
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with
Bittering Agent (US only)
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A (Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M97B51-A1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
(yellow color)
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Thermostat With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
W500014
2
3
4
8594
8575
Description
Thermostat housing cover bolt (2
required)
Thermostat housing cover
O-ring seal
Thermostat
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to COOLING SYSTEM DRAINING,
FILLING AND BLEEDING.
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly and outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR
DISTRIBUTION AND FILTERING article.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and position aside the thermostat housing cover.
To install, tighten to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
4. Remove the O-ring seal and thermostat.
Clean and inspect the O-ring seal. Install a new seal if necessary.
NOTE:
Lubricate the thermostat O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to COOLING SYSTEM
DRAINING, FILLING AND BLEEDING.
THERMOSTAT HOUSING
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with
Bittering Agent (US only)
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A (Canada); or equivalent
(yellow color)
WSS-M97B51-A1
Fig. 5: Identifying Thermostat Housing With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Part Number
8W005
8B273
8B274
18K580
18K579
W503279
8565
8A571
8A587
Description
Vent hose
Lower radiator hose
Upper radiator hose
Heater core outlet hose
Heater core inlet hose
Thermostat housing bolt (3 required)
O-ring seal
O-ring seal
Thermostat housing
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to COOLING SYSTEM DRAINING,
FILLING AND BLEEDING.
2. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
AND FILTERING article.
3. Disconnect the 5 coolant hoses from the thermostat housing and position them aside.
4. Remove the 3 thermostat housing bolts.
To install, tighten to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
NOTE:
Do not pull the other end of the coolant tube out of the engine block when
separating the thermostat housing.
5. Separate the thermostat housing from the coolant tube and remove the thermostat housing.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Lubricate the new O-ring seals with clean engine coolant.
7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to COOLING SYSTEM
DRAINING, FILLING AND BLEEDING.
COOLANT PUMP
REMOVAL
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces, that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can
cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Drain the cooling system.
3. Remove the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
4. Remove and discard the engine oil filter.
5. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the variable camshaft timing (VCT)
assemblies as shown in illustration.
Fig. 6: Aligning Timing Marks On Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Assemblies
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center (TDC)
position.
6. Install the special tool onto the flats of the LH camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Installing Special Tool Onto Flats Of LH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The special tool will hold the camshafts in the TDC position.
7. Install the special tool onto the flats of the RH camshafts.
Fig. 8: Installing Special Tool Onto Flats Of RH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH VCT housing.
Fig. 9: Locating RH VCT Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH VCT housing.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Locating LH VCT Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove and discard the VCT housing seals.
Fig. 11: Locating VCT Housing Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the 2 bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner.
Fig. 12: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove the 2 bolts and the lower LH primary timing chain guide.
Fig. 14: Locating Lower LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Remove the primary timing chain.
Fig. 15: Locating Primary Timing Chain
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Remove the 2 bolts and the upper LH primary timing chain guide.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Locating Upper LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the RH primary timing chain guide lower bolt.
Fig. 17: Locating RH Primary Timing Chain Guide Lower Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The RH primary timing chain guide must be repositioned to allow the
coolant pump to be removed.
17. Loosen the RH primary timing chain guide upper bolt.
Rotate the guide and tighten the bolt.
Fig. 18: Locating RH Primary Timing Chain Guide Upper Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
18. Place clean lint-free shop towels in the oil pan opening to prevent coolant from entering the oil pan during
coolant pump removal.
19. Remove the 8 bolts and the coolant pump.
Fig. 19: Locating Coolant Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces.
1. Install the coolant pump and the 8 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown in illustration to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
Fig. 20: Identifying Coolant Pump Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Remove all of the shop towels from the oil pan opening.
CAUTION: Any coolant that has accumulated in the oil pan must be drained
from the pan and any residual coolant cleaned from the front of the
engine and oil pan. Failure to remove all traces of the coolant can
result in oil contamination and severe engine damage.
3. Remove the oil pan drain plug and allow any accumulated coolant to drain.
Remove any residual coolant from the front of the engine and the oil pan using regulated
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
compressed air and clean lint-free shop towels.
Install the oil pan drain plug and tighten to 27 N.m (20 lb-ft).
4. Loosen the RH primary timing chain guide upper bolt.
Position the RH primary timing chain guide and install the lower bolt.
Tighten the 2 bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
Fig. 21: Locating RH Primary Timing Chain Guide Lower Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the primary timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT
assemblies and the crankshaft sprocket.
Fig. 22: Aligning Timing Marks On VCT Assemblies & Crankshaft Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the upper LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Locating Upper LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Install the lower LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
Fig. 24: Locating Lower LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
Fig. 25: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Reset the primary timing chain tensioner.
Rotate the lever counterclockwise.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Using a soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger.
Align the hole in the lever with the hole in the tensioner housing.
Install a suitable lock pin.
Fig. 26: Compressing Plunger Using A Soft-Jawed Vise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to rotate the crankshaft slightly to remove slack from
the timing chain and install the tensioner.
10. Install the primary tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
Remove the lock pin.
Fig. 27: Locating Primary Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. As a post check, verify correct alignment of all timing marks.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 28: Verifying Correct Alignment Of All Timing Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install new VCT housing seals.
Fig. 29: Locating VCT Housing Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) housing
are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts.
Failure to follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
13. Install the LH VCT housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown in illustration to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 30: Identifying LH VCT Housing Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) housing
are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts.
Failure to follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
14. Install the RH VCT housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown in illustration to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Identifying RH VCT Housing Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing
the oil filter.
15. Install a new engine oil filter.
Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
16. Install the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
17. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
COOLING FAN MOTOR AND SHROUD
Fig. 32: Exploded View Of Cooling Fan Motor & Shroud With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
13A506
8B274
14A464
4
W503924
5
6
7
8C607
W503924
-
Description
Wiring harness retainer
Upper radiator hose
Cooling fan motor and shroud electrical
connector
Cooling fan motor and shroud bolt (2
required)
Cooling fan motor and shroud
Oil cooler bracket bolt (if equipped)
Oil cooler bracket (if equipped)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
AND FILTERING article.
2. If equipped, detach the 2 block heater wiring clips from the radiator support.
Fig. 33: Identifying Block Heater Wiring Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Detach the wiring harness retainers and position the harness aside.
Position aside the upper radiator hose from the cooling fan motor and shroud.
Disconnect the cooling fan motor and shroud electrical connector.
If equipped, remove the bolt and position aside the oil cooler bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
7. Remove the 2 bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
RADIATOR
Fig. 34: Exploded View Of Radiator (Without A/C)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
8B274
8C633
8B273
8A194
Description
Upper radiator hose
Lower degas bottle hose
Lower radiator hose
Upper radiator support bracket (2
required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 35: Exploded View Of Radiator (With A/C) With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
5
6
7
8
9
Part Number
19710
8005
19D738
W707400
Description
A/C condenser bolt (2 required)
A/C condenser
Radiator
Pin-type retainer (2 required)
Compressor-to-condenser discharge line
bracket bolt
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to COOLING SYSTEM DRAINING,
FILLING AND BLEEDING.
2. Remove the cooling fan motor and shroud. For additional information, refer to COOLING FAN
MOTOR AND SHROUD.
3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
4. Disconnect the upper radiator hose and lower degas bottle hose from the radiator.
5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the radiator.
6. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line bracket bolt.
To install, tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
7. Lift and remove the tabs from the radiator support and position the radiator towards the engine.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
8. Detach the 2 pin-type retainers from the radiator.
9. Remove the 2 A/C condenser bolts from the radiator and separate the condenser from the radiator.
To install, tighten to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
10. Remove the radiator.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
12. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to COOLING SYSTEM
DRAINING, FILLING AND BLEEDING.
DEGAS BOTTLE
Fig. 36: Exploded View Of Degas Bottle With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part Number
8W005
8C633
N807658
N807658
8A080
8100
Description
Upper degas bottle hose
Lower degas bottle hose
Degas bottle-to-fender bolt (2 required)
Degas bottle-to-washer bottle screw
Degas bottle
Pressure relief cap
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system.
Do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is
operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under
pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap
is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Cooling - Edge & MKX
1. Release the pressure in the cooling system by slowly turning the pressure relief cap one half turn
counterclockwise. When the pressure is released, remove the pressure relief cap.
2. Using hose clamp pliers, clamp the lower degas bottle hose.
3. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the coolant from the degas bottle.
4. Disconnect the upper degas bottle hose and position it aside.
5. Disconnect the lower degas bottle hose and position it aside.
6. Remove the degas bottle-to-washer bottle screw.
7. Remove the 2 bolts and the degas bottle.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
9. Fill the degas bottle. For additional information, refer to COOLING SYSTEM DRAINING, FILLING
AND BLEEDING for the recommended coolant mixture and fill level.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:34:45 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Lock Repair/Replacement Specifications
Ignition Cylinder Lock Kit
Door Lock Kit
Lubricants
Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5
Multi-Purpose Grease XG-4 and/or XL-5
Specification
F85Z-11582-AA
F87Z-7821990-BA
ESB-M1C93-B
ESB-M1C93-B
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Door latch bolts
Door latch striker screws
Exterior door handle reinforcement bolt
Exterior door handle reinforcement screw
Hood latch bolts
Hood latch striker bolts
Liftgate latch bolts - manual and power liftgate
Liftgate release switch molding nuts - manual liftgate
Liftgate release switch molding bolts - power liftgate
Liftgate striker bolts
Nm
8
23
8
2
11
11
9
12
12
30
lb-ft
17
22
lb-in
71
71
18
97
97
80
106
106
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
Hood Latch
The hood latch components consist of the following:
Hood latch release handle and cable
Hood latch
Front Doors
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:39
10:58:35 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
The front door components consist of the following:
Door ajar switch (part of the front door latch)
Door lock control switch
Door lock cylinder (driver door only)
Exterior front door handle bezel
Exterior front door handle reinforcement
Exterior front door handle strap
Front door latch
Front door lock actuator (part of the front door latch)
Interior front door handle actuating cable
Interior front door handle
Keyless entry keypad (driver door only)
Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative lock cylinder and building a new lock
cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet
to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle.
Rear Doors
The rear door components consist of the following:
Door ajar switch (part of the rear door latch)
Exterior rear door handle bezel
Exterior rear door handle reinforcement
Exterior rear door handle strap
Interior rear door handle actuating cable
Interior rear door handle
Rear door latch
Rear door lock actuator (part of the rear door latch)
Manual Liftgate
The manual liftgate consists of the following components:
Liftgate ajar switch (part of the liftgate latch)
Liftgate release switch (located on the exterior of the liftgate)
Liftgate latch
Power Liftgate
The power liftgate consists of the following components:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Liftgate ajar switch (part of the liftgate latch)
Liftgate release switch (located on the exterior of the liftgate)
Liftgate latch
Power Lock/Unlock
The power lock/unlock feature requests all of the vehicle doors locked or unlocked upon a customer request
from either door lock control switch in the vehicle. The power door locking system functions independently of
ignition status or vehicle speed.
Autolocks
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
all the doors are closed,
the ignition is in the RUN position,
the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
the vehicle attains a speed greater than 20 km/h (12 mph) for greater than 2 seconds.
The autolock feature repeats when:
any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the RUN position and the vehicle speed is 15 km/h
(9 mph) or lower, and
the vehicle attains a speed greater than 20 km/h (12 mph) for greater than 2 seconds.
Auto-Unlock
NOTE:
The doors will not auto-unlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked
before the driver door is opened.
The auto-unlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
the ignition is in the RUN position, all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed
greater than 20 km/h (12 mph),
the vehicle has come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the OFF or ACC position, and
the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being transitioned to the OFF or ACC
position.
Smart Unlock
The smart unlock feature prevents the doors from locking with the key in the ignition lock cylinder. When the
SJB receives a lock command from a door lock control switch only, and the key is in the ignition lock cylinder
with one of the front doors open, the SJB commands the doors to lock, then unlock.
The vehicle can still be locked by locking the doors with the push button rods, the door lock cylinder or an RKE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
command from an integrated key or the keyless entry keypad.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
The remote keyless entry (RKE) system uses an integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT). The IKT incorporates
both the passive anti-theft system (PATS) functions and the RKE transmitter functions in a single device.
The RKE transmitter is programmed automatically during PATS programming. During PATS programming,
the instrument cluster (IC) obtains the transmitter identification code (TIC) from the IKT and sends the TIC
data over the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) to the SJB.
The SJB accepts programming of up to 4 IKTs. In addition to the IKTs, 4 conventional keyfobs can also be
programmed to the vehicle if requested by the customer. For information on programming the IKTs, refer to
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming
Using Diagnostic Equipment in ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article. For
information on programming the conventional keyfobs, refer to Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Programming.
Fig. 1: Identifying Key With Power Liftgate
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 2: Identifying Key Without Power Liftgate
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
The IKT initiates the following electronic system functions:
Unlocks the driver door
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Unlocks all doors
Locks all doors
Opens the power liftgate (if equipped)
Arms/disarms the perimeter alarm (if equipped)
Activates/deactivates the panic alarm
Commands the interior lamps on (when unlocking) and off (when locking)
Recalls the memory seat position associated with a particular remote entry device (when enabled)
Sounds the horn once when LOCK is pressed twice within 3 seconds, and the doors are closed
Sounds the horn twice when LOCK is pressed twice within 3 seconds, and any door is ajar
The IKT has a normal operating range of 10 m (33 ft).
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Lock/Unlock Control - Unlock
The RKE feature provides lock/unlock functions independently of key position, vehicle speed, or transmission
position. The RKE feature provides a stepped (if enabled) process for unlocking the doors. Upon receipt of the
first request for unlocking the doors, the RKE control feature requests the SJB to unlock the driver door only. If
another unlock request is received within 3 seconds of the first, the RKE feature requests the SJB to unlock all
the doors. This feature can be disabled, so that all the doors unlock on the first press of the unlock button. Refer
to Stepped Unlock Programming for programming information.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Lock/Unlock Control - Lock
The RKE feature requests that all the doors be locked when the LOCK button is pressed. On any press of the
LOCK button with all doors closed, the SJB provides one flash of the turn signals. If any door is ajar, no flash
occurs. As soon as the last door is closed, the SJB provides the flash of the turn signals. If 2 presses of the
LOCK button are received within 3 seconds, the horn chirps once and the turn signals flash twice to indicate
that all the doors are closed and locked. If any door is ajar when the second lock request is received within 3
seconds of the first, the RKE transmitter feature requests the SJB chirp the horn twice without flashing the turn
signals to indicate it locked all the doors but one or more doors are ajar. When the key is in the ON or START
position, the turn signal flashes and horn chirp confirmations do not occur.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Power Liftgate
The RKE feature provides a power liftgate open/close function independently of key position. The power
liftgate button must be pressed twice within 3 seconds for the power liftgate to open or close.
Panic Alarm
The panic alarm feature provides audible and visual alarms which are evident from the exterior of the vehicle.
The panic alarm feature requests that the turn signals are flashed and the horn sounds until deactivation. The
flashing of the outputs occurs simultaneously. Activation of the panic alarm is accomplished by pressing the
PANIC button on an integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) whenever the key is in the OFF position. At all other
times this feature is disabled. Deactivation of an active panic alarm is accomplished by any of the following
actions:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
a second press of the IKT PANIC button
the key is switched out of the OFF position
a period of 2 minutes and 45 seconds has elapsed since the initial activation
Keyless Entry Keypad
The keyless entry keypad carries out the following functions:
Unlocks the driver door
Unlocks all the doors
Locks all doors
Enables/disables auto-unlocking
Enables/disables autolocking
Arms/disarms the perimeter alarm (if equipped)
Recalls the memory seat position associated with a particular customer key code (when enabled)
Programs/erases the customer key code
Illuminates the keyless entry keypad lamp and issues illuminated entry on/off requests
The keypad feature operates independently of key position status, vehicle speed, or transmission position. When
an keypad button is pressed, the keypad buttons illuminate to provide better visibility. If the lock all doors
command is entered or 5 seconds have elapsed since the last button press, the illumination is turned off.
Each vehicle equipped with a keypad is programmed with a 5-digit entry code. This code is provided to the
customer through a wallet card in the Owner's Literature. In addition, this code is available through a scan tool
and is also printed on the SJB label. When entering codes each digit must be entered within 5 seconds of the
previous button press.
Locking the Doors with the Keyless Entry Keypad System
It is not necessary to enter the factory set or personal code prior to locking all doors. To lock all doors, press the
7/8 and 9/0 controls at the same time.
Unlocking the Doors with the Keyless Entry Keypad System
To unlock the driver door, enter either the factory set code or a personal code; each digit must be pressed within
5 seconds of the prior digit. The interior lamps illuminate.
To unlock all doors, enter either the factory set code or a personal code (driver door unlocks) and press the 3/4
button within 5 seconds.
Anti-Scan Feature
To provide added security, the keypad is disabled for 1 minute after 35 button presses without a valid entry code
being entered. The keypad flashes during this 1-minute mode with all functionality disabled except for 7/8 and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
9/0 still being allowed to lock the vehicle.
Anti-scan is turned off after 1 minute of keypad inactivity, the UNLOCK button is pressed on an IKT, or the
ignition is switched to the RUN position.
Perimeter Lighting Feature
Vehicles equipped with perimeter lighting can have this feature activated or deactivated. For information on
programming the perimeter lighting feature, refer to Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming.
NOTE:
On vehicles with autolamps, the perimeter lighting feature does not activate in
daylight conditions.
The headlamps, park lamps, and tail lamps illuminate when the unlock control on the IKT is pressed. The
illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lamps if:
The ignition switch is turned to the RUN position
The IKT lock control is pressed
The vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped)
After 25 seconds have elapsed since the perimeter lighting was activated
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
LOCKS, LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Principles of Operation
Power Locks
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The SJB monitors the door lock control switches. When the SJB receives an unlock/lock command from either
door lock control switch, the SJB energizes a relay to supply the correct power and grounds for the door lock
actuators.
Liftgate Release
The liftgate release switch operates the liftgate latch electronically. When the switch is pressed, the SJB
processes the input and releases the liftgate latch.
The doors must be unlocked electronically in order for the SJB to release the liftgate latch. When this condition
is met and the SJB receives the input from the liftgate release switch, the SJB provides power to the latch
release motor.
Keyless Entry Keypad
The SJB monitors the keyless entry keypad input. When the correct codes are entered into the SJB, the SJB
carries out functions associated with the code entered. Based on input from the keypad, the SJB:
locks all doors.
unlocks the driver door.
unlocks all doors.
enters programming mode.
enables/disables the autolock feature.
enables/disables the auto-unlock feature.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
The SJB receives input from programmed integrated keyhead transmitters (IKTs). Based on input from the IKT,
the SJB:
locks all doors.
unlocks the driver door.
unlocks all doors.
activates/deactivates the panic alarm.
arms/disarms the perimeter alarm (if equipped).
if equipped, issues a command over the communication network to the liftgate/trunk module (LTM) to
open the power liftgate.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
if equipped, activates the memory positions.
turns the interior lamps on (when unlocking) and off (when locking), provided the defeat switch on the
dimmer switch is not active.
sounds the horn once when LOCK is pressed twice within 3 seconds, and the doors are closed.
sounds the horn twice when LOCK is pressed twice within 3 seconds, and any door is open.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the headlamp output
circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut
down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is
stored at that time for the fault. The circuit will then reset after a customer demand of the function (switching
the component on, battery saver being energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the
module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that
was stored on the first failure will not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module will not
allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal until a successful on-demand self-test proves that
the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs
present), the continuous DTC will have been cleared and the circuit function will return.
Each circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based on each circuits'
capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the circuit sets along
with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the
fault itself has been corrected. If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level, then DTCs B106F and
B1342 set along with the associated continuous DTC. These DTCs cannot be cleared and the module must be
replaced.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the handles, locks, latches and entry systems are the liftgate lock
actuator circuit CPL10 (GN/WH) and the keypad illumination circuit CPK28 (WH/GN).
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Door/liftgate handles
Latches
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse(s):
5 (10A)
14 (10A)
17 (20A)
Wiring, terminals and
connectors
Door lock actuators
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Door lock control
switches
Integrated keyhead
transmitter (IKT)
Keyless entry keypad
SJB
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs for the SJB.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
DTC Charts
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
B1137
Data Not Programmed
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
B1138
Memory Full
The smart junction box (SJB) limit of 4 integrated
keys is exceeded. PROGRAM a maximum of 4
integrated keys. REFER to Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using
Diagnostic Equipment in ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Invalid Transmitter Identification
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Code
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
All other DTCs MODULES article.
B1139
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
B1138
B1139
B1624
B1626
B2276
B2425
B2666
B273A
B273B
B2A25
B2A26
Action
The SJB limit of 4 integrated keys is exceeded.
PROGRAM a maximum of 4 integrated keys.
REFER to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
in ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (PATS) article. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Memory Full
Invalid Transmitter Identification
Code
Lamp Keypad Output Open Circuit
Lamp Keypad Output Short Circuit
to Ground
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
PROGRAM all of the customer's IKTs (minimum
of 2). REFER Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic
Equipment in ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTITHEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Less Than 2 Transmitters
Programmed
Remote Keyless Entry Out of
Synchronization
Liftgate Release Switch Circuit
Failure
Liftgate Release Output Circuit
Shorted to Ground
Liftgate Release Output Circuit Open
or Shorted to Battery Voltage
Trim Panel Lock Switch Circuit
Failure
Keypad Switch Circuit Failure
All other DTCs -
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication with
the smart junction box
(SJB)
No communication with
the instrument cluster
(IC)
All door locks are
inoperative
A single/more than one
door lock is inoperative
The door locks operate
only one way
All door locks are
inoperative from one
switch
The liftgate latch release
is inoperative/does not
operate correctly
The doors do not
lock/unlock using the
keyless entry keypad
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
Action
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Door lock actuator
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Door lock control
switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Door lock control
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Liftgate release
switch
Liftgate latch
Liftgate/trunk module
(LTM)
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Keyless entry keypad
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
IC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
The keyless entry keypad
illumination is
inoperative/does not
operate correctly
The remote keyless entry
(RKE) transmitter is
inoperative
An individual
button/feature is
inoperative from the
remote keyless entry
(RKE) transmitter
The remote keyless entry
(RKE) transmitter has
poor range performance
The smart unlock does
not operate correctly
The autolock does not
operate correctly
The memory seat does
not operate correctly
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Keyless entry keypad
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
Integrated keyhead
transmitter (IKT)
IKT battery
IKT button pressed a
substantial amount of
times while outside
the range of the
vehicle
IKT programming
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Door locks
Horn system
Power liftgate release
Turn signal system
IKT
Go to Pinpoint Test K .
IKT
IKT battery
Aftermarket systems
High power devices
TV/radio transmission
towers
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
Key-in-ignition
switch
Door ajar switch input
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Programming
Door ajar switches
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test N .
ACTIVATE the remote memory.
REFER to Remote Memory
Activation. TEST the system for
normal operation. If the remote
SJB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
using the remote keyless
entry (RKE) transmitter
The RKE two step door
unlocking does not
operate correctly
Memory seat module
Two step door
unlocking is disabled
memory is still inoperative, REFER
to SEATING article to diagnose the
memory seat.
PROGRAM the two step door
unlocking. REFER to Stepped
Unlock Programming. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: All Door Locks Are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article, Power Door Locks for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) fuse 17 (20A) provides voltage for the power lock/unlock system. Ground for the
power lock/unlock system is provided to the SJB through circuit GD133 (BK). The SJB contains internal relays
that are energized depending on input received.
When the SJB receives a lock request from the door lock control switch, the SJB provides power to the door
lock actuators through circuit CPL11 (GY/BN). Ground for the LH front door actuator is provided through
circuit CPL51 (BU/GN) and ground for the remaining door lock actuators is provided through circuit CPL52
(VT/GY). When the SJB receives an unlock request, power and ground are reversed on the previously listed
circuits.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SJB
PINPOINT TEST A: ALL DOOR LOCKS ARE INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
A1 CHECK THE RECORDED SJB DTCs FROM ON-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
Is DTC B2A25 present?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test E .
NO : Go to A2.
A2 VERIFY THE OPERATION OF BOTH DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCHES
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Press the LOCK and UNLOCK button on both door lock control switches while observing the door
lock operation.
Are the door locks inoperative from both switches?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test D .
A3 VERIFY ALL DOOR LOCKS ARE INOPERATIVE
Press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons from a door lock control switch while observing the door
locks.
Are all the door locks inoperative from both switch positions (lock and unlock)?
YES : VERIFY the SJB fuse 17 (20A) is OK. If OK, go to A4.
If not OK, go to A6.
NO : Go to Symptom Chart.
A4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Fig. 3: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-7, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL11 (GY/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: LH Front Door Lock Actuator C525
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280D-6, Circuit CPL11 (GY/BN) & LH Front
Door Lock Actuator C525-4
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-6, circuit CPL11 (GY/BN), harness side and the
LH front door lock actuator C525-4, circuit CPL11 (GY/BN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A6 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL11 (GY/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Install a new SJB fuse 17 (20A).
Operate the door lock actuators by pressing LOCK on the door lock control switch.
Is the SJB fuse 17 (20A) OK?
YES : REPAIR circuit CPL51 (BU/GN) or CPL52 (VT/GY) for a short to ground. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A7 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test B: A Single/More Than One Door Lock Is Inoperative
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article, Power Door Locks for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
When the smart junction box (SJB) receives a lock request from the door lock control switch, the SJB provides
power to the door lock actuators through circuit CPL11 (GY/BN). Ground for the LH front door actuator is
provided through circuit CPL51 (BU/GN) and ground for the remaining door lock actuators is provided through
circuit CPL52 (VT/GY). When the SJB receives an unlock request, power and ground are reversed on the
previously listed circuits.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Door lock actuator
SJB
PINPOINT TEST B: A SINGLE/MORE THAN ONE DOOR LOCK IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
B1 CHECK THE DOOR LATCH FOR BINDING
Lock and unlock the inoperative door lock using the door lock rod.
Does the door lock and unlock?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : INSTALL a new door latch. REFER to Door Latch.
B2 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL11 (GY/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Door Lock Actuator
Fig. 5: Measuring Voltage Between Inoperative Door Lock Actuator, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The SJB only supplies voltage to the actuator momentarily. It is
important to monitor the meter while pressing the door lock control
switch.
While pressing the door lock control switch in the LOCK position, measure the voltage between the
inoperative door lock actuator, harness side and ground as follows:
Inoperative
ConnectorDoor Lock
Circuit
Pin
Actuator
CPL11
LH front
C525-4
(GY/BN)
CPL11
RH front
C603-4
(GY/BN)
CPL11
LH rear
C704-4
(GY/BN)
CPL11
RH rear
C804-4
(GY/BN)
Is the voltage momentarily greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
B3 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL52 (VT/GY) OR CIRCUIT CPL51 (BU/GN) FOR VOLTAGE
Fig. 6: Measuring Voltage Between Inoperative Door Lock Actuator, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The SJB only supplies voltage to the actuator momentarily. It is
important to monitor the meter while pressing the door lock control
switch.
While pressing the door lock control switch in the UNLOCK position, measure the voltage between
the inoperative door lock actuator, harness side and ground as follows:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Inoperative
ConnectorCircuit
Door Lock
Pin
Actuator
CPL51
LH front
C525-3
(BU/GN)
CPL52
RH front
C603-3
(VT/GY)
CPL52
LH rear
C704-3
(VT/GY)
CPL52
RH rear
C804-3
(VT/GY)
Is the voltage momentarily greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new door latch. REFER to Door Latch.
NO : Go to B4.
B4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL51 (BU/GN) OR CIRCUIT CPL52 (VT/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Fig. 7: Measuring Resistance Between SJB, Harness Side & Inoperative Door Lock Actuator,
Harness Side
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB, harness side and the inoperative door lock actuator,
harness side as follows:
Inoperative
SJB
Door Lock
Connector- Actuator Circuit
Pin
ConnectorPin
LH front CPL51
C2280d-28
C525-3 (BU/GN)
RH front CPL52
C2280d-27
C603-3 (VT/GY)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
C2280d-27
C2280d-27
LH rear
C704-3
RH rear
C804-3
CPL52
(VT/GY)
CPL52
(VT/GY)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
B5 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test C: The Door Locks Operate Only One Way
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article, Power Door Locks for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box SJB sends voltage signals to the door lock control switches through circuits CPL42
(GY/YE) and CPL43 (VT/GY) for the lock and unlock requests, respectively. When the LOCK or UNLOCK
switch is pressed, the voltage signal is routed to ground.
The SJB contains internal relays that are energized depending on input received. When the SJB receives a lock
or unlock request from the door lock control switch, the SJB energizes the appropriate relay(s) to lock or unlock
the doors.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Door lock control switch
SJB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST C: THE DOOR LOCKS OPERATE ONLY ONE WAY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
C1 CHECK THE RECORDED SJB DTCs FROM ON-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
Is DTC B2A25 present?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test E .
NO : Go to C2.
C2 VERIFY THE OPERATION OF BOTH DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCHES
Key in OFF position.
Press the LOCK and UNLOCK button of both door lock control switches while observing the door
lock operation.
Do the door locks operate only one way from both switches?
YES : Go to C4.
NO : Go to C3.
C3 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL42 (GY/YE) (LOCK INPUT) OR CIRCUIT CPL43 (VT/GY)
(UNLOCK INPUT) FOR AN OPEN (SINGLE SWITCH INOPERATIVE)
Disconnect: Suspect Door Lock Control Switch
Unlock the doors from the working door lock control switch.
Fig. 8: Connecting Fused (5A) Jumper Wire Between LH Door Lock Control Switch C505-1,
Circuit CPL42 (GY/YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Observe the door locks while connecting a fused (5A) jumper wire between the LH door lock
control switch C505-1, circuit CPL42 (GY/YE), harness side and the LH door lock control switch
C505-4, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side; or between the RH door lock control switch C605-1,
circuit CPL42 (GY/YE), harness side and the RH door lock control switch C605-4, circuit GD140
(BK/GN), harness side.
Remove the jumper wire.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Connecting Fused (5A) Jumper Wire Between LH Door Lock Control Switch C505-3,
Circuit CPL43 (VT/GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Observe the door locks while connecting a fused (5A) jumper wire between the LH door lock
control switch C505-3, circuit CPL43 (VT/GY), harness side and the LH door lock control switch
C505-4, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side; or between the RH door lock control switch C605-3,
circuit CPL43 (VT/GY), harness side and the RH door lock control switch C605-4, circuit GD140
(BK/GN), harness side.
Do the doors lock and unlock with the jumper wire?
YES : INSTALL a new door lock control switch. REFER to Door Lock Control Switch. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the input circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
C4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL42 (GY/YE) (LOCK INPUT) OR CIRCUIT CPL43 (VT/GY)
(UNLOCK INPUT) FOR AN OPEN (BOTH SWITCHES INOPERATIVE)
Disconnect: LH Door Lock Control Switch C505
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
If the doors do not lock, measure the resistance between the SJB C2280c-17, circuit CPL42
(GY/YE), harness side and the LH door lock control switch C505-1, circuit CPL42 (GY/YE),
harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
If the doors do not unlock, measure the resistance between the SJB C2280c-4, circuit CPL43
(VT/GY), harness side and the LH door lock control switch C505-3, circuit CPL43 (VT/GY),
harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
C5 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test D: All Door Locks Are Inoperative From One Switch
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article, Power Door Locks for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) sends voltage signals to the door lock control switches through circuits CPL42
(GY/YE) and CPL43 (VT/GY) for the lock and unlock requests, respectively. When the LOCK or UNLOCK
switch is pressed, the voltage signal is routed to ground. Ground for the LH door lock control switch is provided
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
through circuit GD133 (BK), and the RH side through circuit GD140 (BK/GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Door lock control switch
PINPOINT TEST D: ALL DOOR LOCKS ARE INOPERATIVE FROM ONE SWITCH
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
D1 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) OR GD140 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Inoperative Door Lock Control Switch
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the LH door lock control switch C505-4, circuit GD133 (BK),
harness side and ground; or between the RH door lock control switch C605-4, circuit GD140
(BK/GN), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new door lock control switch. REFER to Door Lock Control Switch. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test E: DTC B2A25 - Trim Panel Lock Switch Circuit Failure
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article, Power Door Locks for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) sends voltage signals to the door lock control switches through circuits CPL42
(GY/YE) and CPL43 (VT/GY) for the lock and unlock requests, respectively. When the LOCK or UNLOCK
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
switch is pressed, the voltage signal is routed to ground. Ground for the LH door lock control switch is provided
through circuit GD133 (BK), and the RH side through circuit GD140 (BK/GN).
DTC B2A25 (Trim Panel Lock Switch Circuit Failure) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to ground from the lock or unlock request input circuits. This DTC may also set if either of
the door lock control switches are pressed for longer than 2 minutes.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Door lock control switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST E: DTC B2A25 - TRIM PANEL LOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT FAILURE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
E1 CHECK THE RECORDED SJB DTCs FROM ON-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
Is DTC B2A25 present?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : Go to Symptom Chart.
E2 CHECK THE LH DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH
Disconnect: LH Door Lock Control Switch C505
Repeat the SJB on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B2A25 retrieved again?
YES : LEAVE the switch disconnected. Go to E3.
NO : INSTALL a new LH door lock control switch. REFER to Door Lock Control Switch. TEST
the system for normal operation.
E3 CHECK THE RH DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH
Disconnect: RH Door Lock Control Switch C605
Repeat the SJB on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B2A25 retrieved again?
YES : LEAVE the switch disconnected. Go to E4.
NO : INSTALL a new RH door lock control switch. REFER to Door Lock Control Switch. TEST
the system for normal operation.
E4 CHECK THE LOCK INPUT CIRCUIT OR THE UNLOCK INPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT
TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280c-17 & SJB C2280c-4, CPL42 (VT/GY) &
CPL43 (VT/GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280c-17, circuit CPL42 (GY/YE), harness side and
ground; and between the SJB C2280c-4, circuit CPL43 (VT/GY), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E5 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test F: The Liftgate Latch Release Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article, Power Door Locks for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) does not release the liftgate unless the doors have been unlocked electronically or
the request is initiated from a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
The SJB sends a voltage signal to the liftgate release switch through circuit CPL45 (BN). When the switch is
activated, the signal is routed to ground through circuit GD149 (BK/GY). When the SJB detects a request from
the liftgate release switch, the SJB provides voltage through circuit CPL10 (BN/BU) to the liftgate latch
(vehicles equipped with a manual liftgate) or the liftgate/trunk module (LTM) (vehicles equipped with a power
liftgate). For vehicles with a manual liftgate, ground for the liftgate latch is provided through circuit GD149
(BK/GY).
DTC B2666 (Liftgate Release Switch Circuit Failure) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets
when the SJB detects a short to ground on the liftgate release switch input circuit CPL45 (BN). The DTC
is also set if the liftgate release switch is actuated for longer than 2 minutes.
DTC B273A (Liftgate Release Output Circuit Shorted to Ground) - is a continuous DTC that sets when
the SJB detects a short to ground on the liftgate latch release output circuit CPL10 (GN/WH).
DTC B273B (Liftgate Release Output Circuit Open or Shorted to Battery Voltage) - is a continuous and
on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open or short to voltage on the liftgate latch release
output circuit CPL10 (GN/WH).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals and connectors
Liftgate release switch
Liftgate latch
LTM
SJB
PINPOINT TEST F: THE LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
F1 RETRIEVE THE RECORDED SJB AND LTM DTCs FROM THE CONTINUOUS AND ONDEMAND SELF-TESTS
Check for recorded SJB and LTM DTCs from the continuous and on-demand self-tests.
Are any DTCs recorded?
YES : For SJB DTC B2666, go to F2.
For SJB DTC B273A, go to F4.
For SJB DTC B273B, go to F6 (manual liftgate) or Go to F7 (power liftgate).
For all other SJB DTCs, REFER to DTC Charts.
For any LTM DTCs, REFER to BODY CLOSURES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to F11.
F2 REPEAT THE SJB CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND SELF-TESTS FOR DTC B2666
Disconnect: Liftgate Release Switch C4353 (Manual Liftgate) or C4216 (Power Liftgate)
Clear the DTCs, then repeat the SJB continuous and on-demand self tests.
Is DTC B2666 recorded?
YES : Go to F3.
NO : INSTALL a new liftgate release switch. REFER to Liftgate Release Switch - Manual or
Liftgate Release Switch - Power. TEST the system for normal operation.
F3 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL45 (BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280C-7, Circuit CPL45 (BN), Harness Side &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280c-7, circuit CPL45 (BN), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F15.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
F4 REPEAT THE SJB CONTINUOUS SELF-TEST FOR DTC B273A
Disconnect: Liftgate Latch C479 (Manual Liftgate) or Power Liftgate Module C4174b (Power
Liftgate)
NOTE:
DTC B273B may set and should be ignored when carrying out this
step.
Clear the DTCs, then repeat the SJB continuous self-test.
Is DTC B273A present?
YES : Go to F5.
NO : For a manual liftgate, INSTALL a new liftgate latch. REFER to Liftgate Latch - Manual.
TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
For a power liftgate, go to F14.
F5 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL10 (GN/WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280D-15, Circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), Harness
Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-15, circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F15.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
F6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD149 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN (LATCH)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Liftgate Latch C479
Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the liftgate latch C479-2, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to F7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
F7 CHECK FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LTM C4174b (If Equipped)
Key in ON position.
Fig. 17: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the LTM C4174b-12, circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground; or between the liftgate latch C479-1, circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to F8.
NO : Go to F9.
F8 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL10 (GN/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Key in ON position.
Fig. 18: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280D-15, Circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between the SJB C2280d-15, circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to F15.
F9 CHECK FOR SJB OUTPUT
Key in OFF position.
Unlock the doors with the door lock control switch.
Fig. 19: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The SJB only supplies voltage for the liftgate latch release
momentarily. It is important to monitor the meter while activating the
liftgate release switch.
While activating the liftgate release switch, measure the voltage between the LTM C4174b-12,
circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), harness side and ground (power liftgate); or between the liftgate latch
C479-1, circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), harness side and ground (manual liftgate).
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the switch is activated?
YES : For a manual liftgate, INSTALL a new liftgate latch. REFER to Liftgate Latch - Manual.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
For a power liftgate, go to F14.
NO : Go to F10.
F10 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL10 (GN/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the LTM C4174b-12, circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), harness side and
the SJB C2280d-15, circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), harness side (power liftgate); or between the liftgate
latch C479-1, circuit CPL10 (GN/WH), harness side and the SJB C2280d-15, circuit CPL10
(GN/WH), harness side (manual liftgate).
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F15.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
F11 CHECK CIRCUIT GD149 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN (SWITCH)
Disconnect: Liftgate Release Switch C4353 (Manual Liftgate) or C4216 (Power Liftgate)
Fig. 21: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the liftgate release switch C4353-4 (manual liftgate), circuit
GD149 (BK/GY), harness side and ground; or between the liftgate release switch C4216-4 (power
liftgate), circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F12.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
F12 CHECK THE LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH
Unlock the doors with the door lock control switch.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 22: Connecting Fused (5A) Jumper Wire Between Liftgate Release Switch C4353-3,
Circuit CPL45 (BN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For manual liftgate vehicles, connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the liftgate release switch
C4353-3, circuit CPL45 (BN), harness side and the liftgate release switch C4353-4, circuit GD149
(BK/GY), harness side.
Fig. 23: Connecting Fused (5A) Jumper Wire Between Liftgate Release Switch C4216-3,
Circuit CPL45 (BN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For power liftgate vehicles, connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the liftgate release switch
C4216-3, circuit CPL45 (BN), harness side and the liftgate release switch C4216-4, circuit GD149
(BK/GY), harness side.
Does the liftgate latch release?
YES : INSTALL a new liftgate release switch. REFER to Liftgate Release Switch - Manual or
Liftgate Release Switch - Power. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : LEAVE the jumper wire connected. Go to F13.
F13 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL45 (BN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 24: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280c-7, circuit CPL45 (BN), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F15.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
F14 CHECK FOR CORRECT LTM OPERATION
Disconnect all the LTM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the LTM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new LTM. REFER to BODY CLOSURES article. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
F15 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test G: The Doors Do Not Lock/Unlock Using The Keyless Entry Keypad
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article, Remote Keyless Entry and Alarm for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) monitors for a ground signal on the reference circuits CPK29 (GY/BU), CPK30
(VT/GN), and CPK31 (YE/GN) for the keyless entry keypad. When an individual keypad button is pressed, an
individual or combination of the reference circuits is routed to ground. The SJB then determines which button
was pressed based on which circuit(s) are grounded. The keypad is grounded through circuit GD133 (BK).
Once the SJB determines that the 5-digit personal entry code, or the factory set 5-digit entry code has been
entered on the keypad, the SJB then energizes the driver door unlock relay to unlock the driver door.
To unlock all the doors, the 3/4 button must be pressed within 5 seconds of the 5-digit code being entered.
To lock all the doors, the 5-digit code does not need to be entered. Press the 7/8 and 9/0 buttons at the same
time.
DTC B2A26 (Keypad Switch Circuit Failure) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the
SJB detects a short to ground on any of the keypad input circuits. This DTC may also set if any of the
keypad buttons are pressed for longer than 2 minutes.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Keyless entry keypad
SJB
PINPOINT TEST G: THE DOORS DO NOT LOCK/UNLOCK USING THE KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
G1 CHECK THE SJB KEYCODE PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Observe the SJB PID (KEYCODE). Read and record the 5-digit factory set entry code.
Enter the 5-digit factory set entry code on the keyless entry keypad, then press the 3/4 button.
Do the doors unlock?
YES : The system is operating as designed. INFORM the customer of the correct system operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to G2.
G2 RETRIEVE THE RECORDED SJB DTCs FROM THE RUN-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Check for recorded SJB DTCs from the on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B2A26 recorded?
YES : Go to G3.
NO : Go to G5.
G3 REPEAT THE SJB RUN-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Disconnect: Keyless Entry Keypad C500
Clear the DTCs, then repeat the SJB on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B2A26 recorded?
YES : Go to G4.
NO : INSTALL a new keyless entry keypad. REFER to Keyless Entry Keypad. TEST the system
for normal operation.
G4 CHECK CIRCUITS CPK29 (GY/BU), CPK30 (VT/GN) AND CPK31 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT
TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Measure the resistance between the keypad, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CPK29
C500-7
(GY/BU)
CPK30
C500-5
(VT/GN)
CPK31
C500-1
(YE/GN)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G10.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
G5 CHECK THE SJB KEY_PAD PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Press each keyless entry keypad button while observing the SJB PID (KEY_PAD).
Does the PID display the correct values?
YES : Go to G10.
NO : Go to G6.
G6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Keyless Entry Keypad C500
Fig. 25: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the keyless entry keypad C500-2, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
G7 CHECK THE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
Connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the keyless entry keypad harness side, while monitoring
the SJB PID (KEY_PAD) as follows:
Keyless
Keyless
Entry
Entry
SJB PID
Keypad
Keypad (KEY_PAD)
Value
Connector- ConnectorPin/Circuit Pin/Circuit
C500-7
C500-2
CPK29
GD133
1/2
(GY/BU)
(BK)
C500-5
C500-2
CPK30
GD133
7/8
(VT/GN)
(BK)
C500-1
C500-2
9/0
CPK31
GD133
(YE/GN)
(BK)
Does the PID display the correct values?
YES : INSTALL a new keyless entry keypad. REFER to Keyless Entry Keypad.
NO : Go to G8.
G8 CHECK CIRCUITS CPK29 (GY/BU), CPK30 (VT/GN) AND CPK31 (YE/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the SJB, harness side and the keyless entry keypad, harness side as
follows:
Keyless
SJB
Entry
Connector- Circuit Keypad
Pin
ConnectorPin
CPK29
C2280c-5
C500-7
(GY/BU)
CPK30
C2280c-18
C500-5
(VT/GN)
CPK31
C2280c-6
C500-1
(YE/GN)
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
G9 CHECK CIRCUITS CPK29 (GY/BU), CPK30 (VT/GN) AND CPK31 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT
TO EACH OTHER
Measure the resistance between the keypad, harness side as follows:
Keypad
Keypad
Connector- ConnectorPin/Circuit Pin/Circuit
C500-7
C500-5
CPK29
CPK30
(GY/BU) (VT/GN)
C500-7
C500-1
CPK29
CPK31
(GY/BU) (YE/GN)
C500-5
C500-1
CPK30
CPK31
(VT/GN) (YE/GN)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G10.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
G10 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test H: The Keyless Entry Keypad Illumination Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article, Remote Keyless Entry and Alarm for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
When the smart junction box (SJB) detects that a keyless entry keypad button is pressed, the SJB provides
voltage for the keyless entry keypad illumination through circuit CPK28 (WH/GN). Ground for the keyless
entry keypad illumination is provided through circuit GD133 (BK).
DTC B1624 (Lamp Keypad Output Open Circuit) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open or short to voltage on the keyless entry keypad illumination output circuit CPK28 (WH/GN).
DTC B1626 (Lamp Keypad Output Short Circuit to Ground) - is a continuous DTC that sets when the
SJB detects a short to ground on the keyless entry keypad illumination output circuit CPK28 (WH/GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals and connectors
Keyless entry keypad
SJB
PINPOINT TEST H: THE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD ILLUMINATION IS INOPERATIVE/DOES
NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
H1 CHECK THE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD OPERATION
Press the 7/8 and 9/0 buttons simultaneously on the keypad.
Does the doors lock using the keyless entry keypad?
YES : Go to H2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test G .
H2 CHECK THE RECORDED SJB DTCs FROM THE ON-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
Is DTC B1624 or B1626 present?
YES : For DTC B1624, go to H3.
For DTC B1626, go to H9.
NO : Go to H11.
H3 CHECK THE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD ILLUMINATION
Key in OFF position.
Check the keyless entry keypad illumination.
Is the keyless entry keypad illumination always on?
YES : Go to H8.
NO : Go to H4.
H4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Keyless Entry Keypad C500
Fig. 26: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the keyless entry keypad C500-3, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
H5 CHECK FOR CIRCUIT CPK28 (WH/GN) FOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE
NOTE:
The SJB sends out a constant reference voltage on circuit CPK28 (WH/GN)
for its own circuit diagnostics. This voltage is 10 volts +/- 1 volt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 27: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the keyless entry keypad C500-6, circuit CPK28 (WH/GN), harness
side and ground.
Is 10 volts (+/- 1 volt) present?
YES : Go to H6.
NO : Go to H7.
H6 CHECK FOR SJB OUTPUT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Fig. 28: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the keyless entry keypad C500-6, circuit CPK28 (WH/GN), harness
side and ground while active commanding the SJB PID (KY_PAD_LMP) ON.
Is the voltage greater than 11 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new keyless entry keypad. REFER to Keyless Entry Keypad. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to H11.
H7 CHECK CIRCUIT CPK28 (WH/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 29: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the keyless entry keypad C500-6, circuit CPK28 (WH/GN),
harness side and the SJB C2280c-11, circuit CPK28 (WH/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
H8 CHECK CIRCUIT CPK28 (WH/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Key in ON position.
Observe the keypad illumination.
Is the keypad still illuminated?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to H11.
H9 CHECK THE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Keyless Entry Keypad C500
NOTE:
DTC B1624 may set and should be ignored when carrying out this
step.
Clear the DTCs, then repeat the SJB on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B1626 recorded?
YES : Go to H10.
NO : INSTALL a new keyless entry keypad. REFER to Keyless Entry Keypad. TEST the system
for normal operation.
H10 CHECK CIRCUIT CPK28 (WH/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 30: Measuring Resistance Between Keyless Entry Keypad C500-6, Circuit CPK28
(WH/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the keyless entry keypad C500-6, circuit CPK28 (WH/GN),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to H11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
H11 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test I: The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Is Inoperative
Normal Operation
Remote locking and unlocking of the doors, opening the power liftgate (if equipped), and activating the panic
alarm is accomplished by the smart junction box (SJB) receiving a command message from the remote keyless
entry (RKE) integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT). The IKTs and SJB also utilize a rolling code to prevent the
code from being "captured" by a code grabber. The system advances the counter in the RKE transmitter and
SJB every time an IKT button is pressed.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
DTC B1139 (Invalid Transmitter Identification Code) - is a continuous DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an invalid TIC from an IKT.
DTC B2425 (Remote Keyless Entry Out of Synchronization) - is a continuous DTC that sets when the
SJB detects the rolling counter received from an RKE transmitter is 1,024 times greater than the rolling
counter stored in the module.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
IKT
IKT battery
IKT button pressed a substantial amount of times while outside the range of the vehicle
IKT programming
SJB
PINPOINT TEST I: THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) TRANSMITTER IS INOPERATIVE
NOTE:
All IKTs must be present to begin diagnosis of the RKE system.
NOTE:
Aftermarket or dealer-installed systems may adversely affect the RKE system
operation. These systems should be disconnected before diagnosing any RKE
concerns.
I1 CHECK FOR THE CORRECT RKE TRANSMITTERS
NOTE:
Make sure the IKTs are those provided with the original equipment
manufacturer (OEM) system and not from an aftermarket system, or a
dealer-installed system that may have been installed on the vehicle.
Check that the correct IKTs are used with the vehicle.
Are all the correct IKTs present?
YES : Go to I2.
NO : The system cannot be tested without the correct IKTs. INFORM the customer that all the
correct IKTs must be present to proceed with diagnosis of the system.
I2 CHECK THE RECORDED SJB AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC) DTCs FROM THE ONDEMAND SELF-TEST
Check the recorded results from the SJB and IC self-test.
Are any DTCs recorded?
YES : For SJB DTC B2425, go to I3.
For IC DTC B1139, go to I4.
For IC DTC B1137, go to Pinpoint Test J .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
For all other DTCs, REFER to DTC Charts.
NO : Go to I4.
I3 RESYNCHRONIZE THE INOPERATIVE IKT
Key in OFF position.
Key in ON position.
Leave the IKT key in the RUN position for a minimum of 6 seconds.
Key in OFF position.
Press any button on the IKT.
Does the IKT operate?
YES : The system is OK. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to I4.
I4 MAKE SURE THE RKE TRANSMITTER SIGNAL IS BEING RECEIVED
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Press a button on the IKT while observing the SJB PID (TIC_LAST).
Does the transmitter identification code (TIC) show up on the scan tool screen when a button
is pressed?
YES : Go to I5.
NO : Go to I6.
I5 CHECK IF THE RKE TRANSMITTERS ARE PROGRAMMED
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Press a button on the IKT and compare the SJB PID (TIC_LAST) with the PIDs (TIC_1, 2, 3, 4, 7,
8, 9, or 10).
Does the TIC displayed match any of the TICs stored in memory?
YES : Go to I7.
NO : PROGRAM all of the IKTs. REFER to ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (PATS) article. INFORM the customer that any IKTs not present need to be
programmed. TEST the system for normal operation.
I6 CHECK THE IKT BATTERY
Using a thin coin, open the IKT.
Do not clean off any grease from the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board.
Verify the correct battery is used (CR2032).
Remove the IKT battery and measure the voltage.
Is the voltage greater than 2.5 volts?
YES : Go to I7.
NO : INSTALL a new battery (make sure the battery is seated correctly). DO NOT reprogram the
IKT (weak or dead batteries do not erase TICs from memory). TEST the system for normal
operation.
I7 CHECK FOR NORMAL OPERATION WITH A KNOWN GOOD IKT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Use the customer's second IKT, and press a button on the IKT while observing the SJB PID
(TIC_LAST).
Does the TIC show up on the scan tool when a button is pressed?
YES : REPLACE the inoperative IKT. PROGRAM the new IKT. REFER to ANTI-THEFT PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to I8.
I8 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test J: DTC B1137 - Data Not Programmed
Normal Operation
When an integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) key is programmed, the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter
identification code (TIC) data from the key is received by the instrument cluster (IC). The IC then sends the TIC
data to the smart junction box (SJB) over the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). The SJB stores
the TIC data in memory and sends an acknowledgment back to the IC that the TIC data was successfully
programmed.
DTC B1137 (Data Not Programmed) - is a continuous DTC that sets when the IC sends the RKE TIC
data to the SJB over the MS-CAN network, and it does not receive a response from the SJB that the TIC
data has been stored.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
IKT programming
MS-CAN network
SJB
PINPOINT TEST J: DTC B1137 - DATA NOT PROGRAMMED
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:35 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
J1 CHECK FOR THE CORRECT RKE TRANSMITTERS
NOTE:
Make sure the IKTs are those provided with the original equipment
manufacturer (OEM) system and not from an aftermarket system, or a
dealer-installed system that may have been installed on the vehicle.
Check that the correct IKTs are used with the vehicle.
Are all the correct IKTs present?
YES : Go to J2.
NO : The system cannot be tested without the correct IKTs. INFORM the customer that all the
correct IKTs must be present to proceed with diagnosis of the system.
J2 CHECK FOR COMMUNICATION WITH THE IC AND SJB
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Network Test
Does the IC or SJB fail the network test?
YES : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
NO : Go to J3.
J3 REPROGRAM THE IKT KEYS
Erase and program all of the IKT keys using the scan tool method. Refer to ANTI-THEFT PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article.
Erase all IC DTCs.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: IC Self-Test
Is DTC B1137 retrieved again?
YES : Go to J5.
NO : Go to J4.
J4 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE RKE TRANSMITTER
Press any button on the suspect IKT key.
Does the RKE transmitter operate?
YES : The system is operating normally. The concern may have been caused by an improperly
programmed IKT key.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test I .
J5 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test K: An Individual Button/Feature Is Inoperative From The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Transmitter
Normal Operation
When any integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) button is pressed, the SJB receives and processes the command
to provide the appropriate output.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Door locks
Horn system
Power liftgate release
Turn signal system
IKT
PINPOINT TEST K: AN INDIVIDUAL BUTTON/FEATURE IS INOPERATIVE FROM THE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) TRANSMITTER
NOTE:
The panic feature will only operate when the key is in the OFF or LOCK
positions.
K1 VERIFY THE DOOR LOCK OPERATION
Press the LOCK and UNLOCK button on the driver door lock control switch while observing the
door lock operation.
Do the door locks operate correctly?
YES : Go to K2.
NO : Go to Symptom Chart.
K2 VERIFY THE HORN OPERATION
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Select the SJB PID (HORN) and active command the horn on.
Does the horn sound when commanded on?
YES : Go to K3.
NO : REFER to HORN article.
K3 VERIFY THE HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
Place the hazard switch in the ON position.
Do the hazard lamps operate correctly?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
YES : For vehicles with power liftgate, go to K4.
For vehicles with a manual liftgate, REPLACE the inoperative IKT and PROGRAM all of the
IKTs. REFER to ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article. INFORM
the customer that any IKTs not present need to be programmed. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : REFER to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article.
K4 VERIFY THE LIFTGATE RELEASE OPERATION
Press the liftgate release button on the liftgate.
Does the liftgate open?
YES : REPLACE the inoperative IKT and PROGRAM all of the IKTs. REFER to ANTI-THEFT PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article. INFORM the customer that any IKTs not
present need to be programmed. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Pinpoint Test L: The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Has Poor Range Performance
Normal Operation
The remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter sends a radio signal to the smart junction box (SJB) based on the
user selected RKE transmitter button. The SJB then carries out the selected action.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
IKT
IKT battery
Aftermarket systems
High power devices
TV/radio transmission towers
SJB
PINPOINT TEST L: THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) TRANSMITTER HAS POOR RANGE
PERFORMANCE
NOTE:
All RKE transmitters must be present to begin diagnosis of the RKE system.
NOTE:
Aftermarket or dealer-installed systems may adversely affect RKE system
operation. These systems should be disconnected before diagnosing any RKE
concerns.
L1 CHECK FOR THE CORRECT RKE TRANSMITTERS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure the RKE transmitters are those provided with the original
equipment manufacturer (OEM) system and not from an aftermarket
system or a dealer-installed system.
Check that the correct RKE transmitters are used with the vehicle.
Are all the correct RKE transmitters present?
YES : Go to L2.
NO : The system cannot be tested without the correct RKE transmitters. INFORM the customer
that all the correct RKE transmitters must be present to proceed with diagnosis of the system.
L2 CHECK ALL THE RKE TRANSMITTERS FOR POOR RANGE PERFORMANCE
NOTE:
The 10 m (33 ft) measurement of range is not the standard but is a
guideline that clearly indicates a vehicle is experiencing poor range
performance.
Check all the RKE transmitters for poor range performance (less than 10 m [33 ft]).
Do all RKE transmitters experience poor range?
YES : Go to L4.
NO : Go to L3.
L3 CHECK THE IKT BATTERY
Using a thin coin, open the IKT.
Do not clean off any grease from the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board.
Verify the correct battery is used (CR2032).
Remove the IKT battery and measure the voltage.
Is the voltage greater than 2.5 volts?
YES : REPLACE the inoperative integrated key and PROGRAM all the integrated keys. REFER to
ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article. INFORM the customer that
any RKE transmitters not present need to be programmed. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new battery (make sure the battery is seated correctly). DO NOT reprogram the
IKT (weak or dead batteries do not erase TICs from memory). TEST the system for normal
operation.
L4 CHECK THE LOCATION OF THE VEHICLE AND THE APPROACH ANGLES AROUND
THE VEHICLE
Make sure the poor performance is consistent in nature and is not from one approaching angle.
The RKE transmitter range performance may be degraded in certain locations. For example, if the
vehicle is within 0.8 km (0.5 miles) of high-power devices or radio/TV towers, the operating
distance of the RKE transmitters may be reduced.
Is the poor range performance consistent around the vehicle?
YES : Go to L5.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation.
L5 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test M: The Smart Unlock Does Not Operate Correctly
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) automatically unlocks all the doors after the doors are locked with a door lock
control switch if the key is in the ignition lock cylinder and a front door or the liftgate is ajar.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Key-in-ignition switch
Door ajar switch input
SJB
PINPOINT TEST M: THE SMART UNLOCK DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
M1 CHECK THE COURTESY LAMP OPERATION
Open and close the front doors and liftgate while checking the courtesy lamp operation.
Do the courtesy lamps operate correctly?
YES : Go to M2.
NO : REFER to INTERIOR LIGHTING article.
M2 CHECK THE KEY-IN-IGNITION CHIME
Insert the key in the ignition lock cylinder.
Open the driver door.
Does the key-in-ignition chime operate correctly?
YES : Go to M3.
NO : REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING
CHIMES article.
M3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test N: The Autolock Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article, Remote Keyless Entry and Alarm for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) energizes the lock relay based on input from the ajar switches, the ignition switch,
the transmission range (TR) sensor and the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). The SJB locks the doors when the
following conditions are met:
all the doors are closed
the ignition switch is in the ON position
the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
the vehicle attains a speed greater than 20 km/h (12 mph) for longer than 2 seconds.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals and connectors
Programming
Door ajar switches
SJB
PINPOINT TEST N: THE AUTOLOCK DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
N1 VERIFY THE AUTOLOCK FEATURE IS ENABLED
Verify the autolock feature is enabled. Refer to Autolock and Horn Chirp Programming.
Is the autolock feature enabled?
YES : Go to N2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : PROGRAM the autolock feature. REFER to Autolock and Horn Chirp Programming.
N2 CHECK THE COURTESY LAMP OPERATION
Open and close the doors while checking the courtesy lamp operation.
Do the courtesy lamps operate correctly?
YES : Go to N3.
NO : REFER to INTERIOR LIGHTING article.
N3 CHECK THE SJB PID (IGN_R_ECU)
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Monitor the SJB IGN PID (IGN_R_ECU).
Does the PID indicate RUN?
YES : Go to N4.
NO : REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article.
N4 RETRIEVE THE RECORDED SJB DTCs FROM THE CONTINUOUS SELF-TESTS
Check for recorded SJB DTCs from the continuous self-tests.
Is DTC U0155 recorded?
YES : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
NO : Go to N5.
N5 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD CODE PROGRAMMING
Programming a Personal Code and Keypad Association to Memory Seats and Mirrors (If Equipped)
NOTE:
If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses), the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables the keypad for one
minute (only the lock control will operate on the keypad) and the keypad lamp
will flash. The anti-scan feature will turn off after one minute of keypad
inactivity, or after pressing the UNLOCK control on the integrated keyhead
transmitter (IKT), or after the ignition key has been turned to the ON position.
NOTE:
The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting.
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad.
3. Enter the new 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within five seconds of
each other.
4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit to indicate which driver should be
set in a memory recalled by the personal entry code:
Pressing the 1/2 button recalls driver 1 settings
Pressing the 3/4 button recalls driver 2 settings
Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a sixth digit does not set a driver
and will not recall a memory setting
5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm the new code is programmed.
Erasing the Personal Codes
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses), the
keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables the keypad for one
minute (only the lock control will operate on the keypad) and the keypad lamp
will flash. The anti-scan feature will turn off after one minute of keypad
inactivity, or after pressing the UNLOCK control on the IKT, or after the ignition
key has been turned to the ON position.
Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release.
Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button on the keypad for 2 seconds.
All personal codes are now erased and only the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code will work.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
NOTE:
This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is
programmed automatically during the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)
programming. For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming
Using Diagnostic Equipment in ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article to program the IKT.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
NOTE:
Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the
sequence and the transmitters will not be programmed.
1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10
seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks
and then unlocks all the doors.
NOTE:
If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been
programmed, the programming sequence ends (the doors lock and unlock
to confirm that programming is complete).
3. Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock and then
unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each RKE transmitter.
4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
The key transitions to the OFF position.
20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed.
The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed.
5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed RKE
transmitter(s), wait several seconds and press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer
to Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. (Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE
transmitters are attempted to be programmed.)
REMOTE MEMORY ACTIVATION
1. Position the driver seat and mirrors to the desired position.
2. Press the set button on the driver door panel.
3. Within 5 seconds press the 1 or 2 button on the driver door panel to associate with the driver 1 or driver 2
position.
4. Press the set button again.
5. Within 5 seconds press a button on the associated integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT).
6. Within 5 seconds press the 1 or 2 button on the driver door panel to associate with the driver 1 or driver 2
position.
7. If a second memory setting is desired, repeat the procedure with the second IKT.
REMOTE MEMORY DEACTIVATION
1. Press the set button on the driver door panel.
2. Within 5 seconds press any button on the integrated key that you wish to deactivate and then press the set
button on the driver door panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
3. If a second memory setting is desired to be deactivated, repeat the procedure with the second integrated
key.
AUTOLOCK AND HORN CHIRP PROGRAMMING
Programming the Autolock Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE:
The autolock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the autounlock feature.
NOTE:
The autolock feature of the Smart Junction Box (SJB) can also be configured
ON or OFF with the scan tool. For additional information on module
configuration, refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
NOTE:
When programming the autolock feature using the door lock control switch
method the following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the
procedure will need to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait
30 seconds between programming sessions.
NOTE:
Prior to beginning, make sure the ignition key is in the OFF position and
all vehicle doors are closed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position.
Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
Turn the ignition key from the ON to the OFF position.
Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
Turn the ignition key to the ON position. The horn chirps once to indicate that programming mode is
entered.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock button on the door lock control switch, then the
lock button. The horn chirps once if the autolocks are disabled or twice (one short chirp followed by a
honk) if the autolocks are enabled.
7. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The horn chirps once to signal that the programming is
complete.
Programming the Autolock Feature Using the Keyless Entry Keypad
NOTE:
The autolock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the autounlock feature.
NOTE:
The autolock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan
tool. For additional information on module configuration, refer to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and close all vehicle doors.
Enter the factory set 5-digit keyless entry keypad code.
Press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button.
Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn chirps once if the autolocks are disabled or
twice (one short chirp followed by a honk) if the autolocks are enabled.
Programming the Autolock Feature Using the Instrument Cluster Message Center
NOTE:
The autolock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the autounlock feature.
NOTE:
The autolock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan
tool. For additional information on module configuration, refer to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article.
1. With all the vehicle doors closed, turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position.
2. Press the SETUP button on the message center switch until AUTOLOCK OFF is displayed.
3. Press the RESET button to select ON or OFF. If the autolocks are enabled, the message center will have
brackets around the display. If the autolocks are disabled, the message center will have brackets
around the display.
Programming the Auto-Unlock Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE:
The auto-unlock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the
autolock feature.
NOTE:
The auto-unlock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the
scan tool. For additional information on module configuration, refer to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article.
NOTE:
When programming the auto-unlock feature using the door lock control switch
method the following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the
procedure will need to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait
30 seconds between programming sessions.
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Prior to beginning, make sure the ignition key is in the OFF position and
all vehicle doors are closed.
Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position.
Press the unlock button on the door lock control 3 times.
Turn the ignition key from the ON to the OFF position.
Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
5. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. The horn chirps once to indicate that programming mode is
entered.
6. To enable/disable the auto-unlock feature, press the lock button on the door lock control switch then the
unlock button. The horn chirps once if auto-unlock is disabled or twice (one short chirp followed by a
honk) if auto-unlock is enabled.
7. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The horn chirps once to signal that the programming is
complete.
Programming the Auto-Unlock Feature Using the Keyless Entry Keypad
NOTE:
The auto-unlock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the
autolock feature.
NOTE:
The auto-unlock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the
scan tool. For additional information on module configuration, refer to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article.
1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and close all vehicle doors.
2. Enter the factory set 5-digit keyless entry keypad code.
3. Press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8
button. While still holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button a second time.
4. Release the 3/4 button. The horn chirps once if auto-unlock is disabled or twice (one short chirp followed
by a honk) if auto-unlock is enabled.
Programming the Auto-Unlock Feature Using the Instrument Cluster Message Center
NOTE:
The auto-unlock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the
autolock feature.
NOTE:
The auto-unlock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the
scan tool. For additional information on module configuration, refer to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article.
1. Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position.
2. Press the SETUP button on the message center switch until AUTOUNLOCK OFF is displayed.
3. Press the RESET button to select ON or OFF. If auto-unlock is enabled, the message center will have
brackets around the display. If auto-unlock is disabled, the message center will have brackets
around the display.
LIFTGATE LATCH MANUAL RELEASE
1. Remove the liftgate latch access cover from the center of the liftgate trim panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Identifying Liftgate Latch Access Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Portions of the liftgate sheet metal are removed for clarity.
2. Vehicles with manual liftgate, press the liftgate latch manual release lever to the left to release the liftgate
latch.
Fig. 32: Pressing Liftgate Latch Manual Release Lever To Left To Release Liftgate Latch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Portions of the liftgate sheet metal are removed for clarity.
3. Vehicles with power liftgate, press the liftgate latch manual release lever down to release the liftgate
latch.
Fig. 33: Pressing Liftgate Latch Manual Release Lever Down To Release Liftgate Latch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
PERIMETER LIGHTING FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Programming the Perimeter Lighting Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will
need to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds
between programming sessions.
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position.
Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the OFF position.
Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The horn chirps one time to indicate that programming mode
is entered.
NOTE:
The unlock button must be pressed twice within 5 seconds.
6. Within 30 seconds of entering the programming mode, press the unlock button on the door lock control
switch twice to enable/disable the perimeter lighting feature. The horn chirps once if the perimeter
lighting is disabled or a chirp followed by a honk if the perimeter lighting is enabled.
7. Programming ends when the ignition switch state changes or times out after 2 minutes.
STEPPED UNLOCK PROGRAMMING
1. With the ignition in the OFF mode, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter simultaneously for 4 seconds.
The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the mode change.
2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HOOD LATCH AND COMPONENTS - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 34: Identifying Hood Latch and Components
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
N808727
16700
16916
Description
Hood latch bolts (2 required)
Hood latch
Hood latch release handle and cable
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedures in this service information.
HOOD LATCH
Material
Item
Specification
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5
ESB-M1C93-B
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the hood latch bolts.
1. Remove the 2 hood latch bolts and position the hood latch aside.
To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the hood latch release cable and remove the hood latch.
NOTE:
When the hood latch is installed, the latch adjustment must be checked to
make sure the latch is installed and aligned correctly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Lubricate the hood latch after installation.
HOOD LATCH RELEASE HANDLE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the hood latch. For additional information, refer to Hood Latch.
2. Disconnect the hood latch release cable locator from the radiator grille opening panel reinforcement.
3. Disconnect the hood latch release cable locator from the LH inner fender.
NOTE:
The hood latch release handle and cable assembly must be pulled through
the dash panel into the passenger compartment.
4. Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly.
1. Remove the hood latch release handle screw.
2. Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 35: Identifying Hood Latch Release Handle & Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
FRONT DOOR HANDLES, LOCKS AND LATCHES - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 36: Identifying Front Door Handles, Locks & Latches With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
W705830
2
W506965
3
78218B08/78218A14
4
7822404
5
W708514
6
5406082
Description
Front door latch bolts (3 required)
Exterior front door handle
reinforcement screw
Exterior front door handle bezel
(RH/LH)
Exterior front door handle strap
Exterior front door handle
reinforcement bolt
Front door lock cylinder
7
7826684/7826685
Exterior front door handle
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
8
78235A86/78235A87
9
7822600/7822601
10
78221A00
11
7821812/7821813
12
7821852/7821853
13
7822152/7822153
14
7822135
15
7822008
16
W710993
reinforcement (RH/LH)
Front door panel component
module assembly (RH/LH)
Interior front door handle (RH/LH)
Interior front door handle actuating
cable
Front door latch (RH/LH)
Front door lock actuating rod
(RH/LH)
Exterior front door handle actuating
rod (RH/LH)
Front door lock cylinder actuating
rod (if equipped)
Striker
Door latch striker screws (2
required)
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedures in this service information.
REAR DOOR HANDLES, LOCKS AND LATCHES - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 37: Identifying Rear Door Handles, Locks & Latches With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
W705830
2
W506965
3
4
78218B08
7822404
5
W708514
6
7826684/7826685
7
78235A88/78235A89
Description
Rear door latch bolts (3 required)
Exterior rear door handle
reinforcement screw
Exterior rear door handle bezel
Exterior rear door handle strap
Exterior rear door handle
reinforcement bolt
Exterior rear door handle
reinforcement (RH/LH)
Rear door panel component module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
8
7822600/7822601
9
78221A00
10
7821812/7821813
11
7826460/7826461
12
7826596/7826597
13
7822008
14
W710993
assembly (RH/LH)
Interior rear door handle (RH/LH)
Interior rear door handle actuating
cable
Rear door latch (RH/LH)
Rear door lock actuating rod
(RH/LH)
Exterior rear door handle actuating
rod (RH/LH)
Striker
Door latch striker screws (2
required)
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedures in this service information.
INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the door trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
NOTE:
Front door shown, rear door similar.
2. Disconnect the interior door handle from the door window regulator and motor assembly.
Fig. 38: Disconnecting Interior Door Handle From Door Window Regulator & Motor Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Front door shown, rear door similar.
3. Remove the interior door handle.
Disconnect the interior door handle actuating cable from the interior door handle.
Remove the interior door handle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 39: Disconnecting Interior Door Handle Actuating Cable From Interior Door Handle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE
Fig. 40: Identifying Exterior Door Handle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
78218A14/78218B08
2
7822404
3
N807169
Description
Exterior door handle bezel
(LH/RH)
Exterior door handle strap
Exterior door handle reinforcement
screw
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
4
W651011
Plug
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the plug from the rear of the door.
2. Loosen the exterior door handle reinforcement screw and remove the exterior door handle bezel.
NOTE:
Pull the exterior door handle strap outward and to the rear to release it
from the exterior door handle reinforcement.
3. Remove the exterior door handle strap.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
DOOR HANDLE REINFORCEMENT
Fig. 41: Exploded View Of Exterior Front
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
7826684/7826685
2
7822152/7822153
3
7822135
Description
Exterior front door handle
reinforcement (RH/LH)
Exterior front door handle actuating
rod (RH/LH)
Front door lock cylinder actuating rod
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
4
(if equipped)
Front window regulator and motor
assembly
-
Fig. 42: Exploded View Of Exterior Rear
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
7826684/7826685
2
7826596/7826597
3
-
Description
Exterior rear door handle
reinforcement (RH/LH)
Exterior rear door handle actuating rod
(RH/LH)
Rear window regulator and motor
assembly
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the exterior door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Door Handle.
2. Remove the door trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
3. Remove the door window regulator and motor assembly. For additional information, refer to GLASS,
FRAMES & MECHANISMS article.
4. If equipped, disconnect the upper lock cylinder actuating rod.
5. Disconnect the lower exterior door handle reinforcement actuating rod.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Front door shown, rear door similar.
6. Remove the exterior door handle reinforcement.
1. If equipped, disconnect the keyless entry keypad wiring harness retainer.
2. Release the exterior door handle reinforcement locking clips from the door window regulator and
motor assembly.
3. Remove the exterior door handle reinforcement.
Fig. 43: Identifying Exterior Door Handle Reinforcement Locking Clips & Keyless Entry Keypad
Wiring Harness Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
DOOR LATCH
Material
Item
Multi-Purpose Grease
XG-4 and/or XL-5
Specification
ESB-M1C93-B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 44: Exploded View Of Front Door Latch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
78221A00
2
7822152/7822153
3
7822135
4
5
7821852/7821853
7821812/7821813
6
-
Description
Interior front door handle actuating
cable
Exterior front door handle actuating
rod (RH/LH)
Front door lock cylinder actuating rod
(if equipped)
Front door lock actuating rod (RH/LH)
Front door latch (RH/LH)
Front window regulator and motor
assembly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 45: Exploded View Of Rear Door Latch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
78221A00
2
7826596/7826597
3
4
7826460/7826461
7821812/7821813
5
-
Description
Interior rear door handle actuating
cable
Exterior rear door handle actuating rod
(RH/LH)
Rear door lock actuating rod (RH/LH)
Rear door latch (RH/LH)
Rear window regulator and motor
assembly
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the door trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Remove the door window regulator and motor assembly. For additional information, refer to GLASS,
FRAMES & MECHANISMS article.
3. Disconnect the interior door handle actuating cable.
4. If equipped, disconnect the door lock cylinder actuating rod.
5. Disconnect the door handle reinforcement actuating rod.
NOTE:
Front door shown, rear door similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
6. Release the door latch rear locking clip.
Fig. 46: Locating Door Latch Rear Locking Clip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Front door shown, rear door similar.
7. Release the door latch front locking clip.
1. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector.
2. Release the door latch front locking clip.
Fig. 47: Locating Door Latch Front Locking Clip & Door Latch Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the door latch with the door lock actuating rod.
9. If necessary, disconnect the door lock actuating rod.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Lubricate the door latch to striker surfaces after installation.
DOOR LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and
building a new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock
cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle.
1. Remove the exterior door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Door Handle.
NOTE:
Door handle reinforcement shown removed for clarity.
2. Using a suitable tool, release the retaining tab and remove the front door lock cylinder.
Fig. 48: Identifying Retaining Tab & Front Door Lock Cylinder
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
LIFTGATE LATCH - MANUAL
Material
Item
Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
Specification
ESB-M1C93-B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 49: Identifying Liftgate Latch - Manual With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
N807675
7843150
W709726
7843252
Description
Liftgate latch bolts (3 required)
Liftgate latch
Liftgate striker bolts
Liftgate striker
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the 3 liftgate latch bolts.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Remove the liftgate latch.
NOTE:
Lubricate the liftgate latch after installation.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
LIFTGATE LATCH - POWER
Material
Item
Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
Specification
ESB-M1C93-B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 50: Identifying Liftgate Latch - Power With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
N807675
7843150
W709726
7843252
Description
Liftgate latch bolts (4 required)
Liftgate latch
Liftgate striker bolts
Liftgate striker
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the 4 liftgate latch bolts.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Remove the liftgate latch.
NOTE:
Lubricate the liftgate latch after installation.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - MANUAL
Fig. 51: Identifying Liftgate Release Switch - Manual With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W705760
2
13508
3
-
4
14018
Description
Liftgate release switch molding nuts (6
required)
Liftgate release switch molding
Liftgate release switch electrical
connector (part of 14A583)
Liftgate release switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ORNAMENTATION article.
Disconnect the liftgate release switch molding electrical connector.
Remove the 5 liftgate release switch molding nuts.
To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch.
Disconnect the liftgate release switch electrical connector.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - POWER
Fig. 52: Identifying Liftgate Release Switch - Power With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W505423
2
13508
3
-
4
14018
Description
Liftgate release switch molding bolts (2
required)
Liftgate release switch molding
Liftgate release switch electrical
connector (part of 14A583)
Liftgate release switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
2.
3.
4.
5.
ORNAMENTATION article.
Disconnect the liftgate release switch electrical connector.
Remove the 2 liftgate release switch molding bolts.
To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
Fig. 53: Exploded View Of Ignition Lock Cylinder
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
11582
Description
Ignition lock cylinder
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to ANTITHEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a suitable tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 54: Exploded View Of Door Lock Control Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
Description
Interior front door handle finish panel
Interior front door handle finish panel
screw cover
Door lock control switch
Interior front door handle finish panel
screw
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the cover, remove the screw and position the interior front door handle finish panel aside.
Disconnect the door lock control switch electrical connector.
Release the locking clips and remove the door lock control switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Handles, Locks, Latches & Entry Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 55: Exploded View Of Keyless Entry Keypad
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
-
3
4
14A626
W651011
Description
Keyless entry keypad retaining clips (2
required) (part of 14A626)
Keyless entry keypad electrical connector
(part of 14631)
Keyless entry keypad
Upper access plug
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the upper access plug.
2. Using a long, flat blade screwdriver, or suitable tool through the upper access hole, release the rear
keyless entry keypad retaining clip and position the keyless entry keypad aside.
3. Remove the keyless entry keypad.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:36 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Engine Emission Control - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Engine Emission Control - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
Material
Item
Specification
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP (US); Motorcraft
WSS-M2C929-A
SAE 5W-30 Super Premium
Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Fill Capacity
-
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
PCV fitting screws
6
lb-in
53
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL
NOTE:
Do not permanently remove or render inoperative any part of the vehicle
emission control system including related hardware. Failure to comply may
violate applicable state and federal laws.
The engine emission control system consists of the PCV system.
The PCV system consists of the:
crankcase ventilation tube.
PCV fitting.
PCV valve.
The PCV system uses intake manifold vacuum to ventilate blow-by fumes from the crankcase and return the
vapors to the intake manifold for combustion. The PCV valve varies the amount of blow-by gases returned to
the intake manifold based on available engine vacuum. The PCV valve also prevents the entry of combustion
backfiring into the crankcase.
Vehicle Emission Vacuum Routing
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:09
11:26:04 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Engine Emission Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Identifying Vehicle Emission Vacuum Routing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
6A505
9F805
3
9G641
4
5
6
9S455
6A666
6582
7
9G676
8
9E857
9
-
10
9K007
Description
LH valve cover
Air cleaner outlet pipe
Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
purge valve
Upper intake manifold
PCV valve
RH valve cover
EVAP canister vent solenoid and dust
separator assembly
EVAP canister
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (part of
9S284)
Fuel tank
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL
Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:04 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Engine Emission Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Identifying Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System Components
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
6A664
3
-
4
5
6
7
9F695
9J469
6A666
-
Description
PCV fitting screws (2 required)
Crankcase ventilation tube
Crankcase ventilation tube spring clamp
(part of 6K817)
PCV fitting
PCV fitting O-ring seal
PCV valve
PCV valve O-ring seal (part of 6A666)
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures in this article.
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:04 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Engine Emission Control - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the PCV valve.
CAUTION: A new positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve must be installed if
removed from the valve cover. During removal, damage will occur to
the locking mechanism on the PCV valve.
NOTE:
To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
2. Rotate the PCV valve counterclockwise and remove from the valve cover.
Discard the PCV valve.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:04 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Fuel Charging & Controls - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Fuel Charging & Controls - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
Material
Item
Specification
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft
WSS-M2C930-A
SAE 5W-20 Super Premium
Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Fill Capacity
-
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Fuel rail bolts
Throttle Body (TB) bolts
10
10
lb-in
89
89
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
FUEL CHARGING AND CONTROLS
Sequential Multi-Port Fuel Injection (SFI)
The fuel charging and controls system consists of the:
Throttle Body (TB).
fuel injectors.
fuel rail.
The fuel charging and controls system is:
a Sequential Multi-Port Fuel Injection (SFI) system.
pulse-width modulated.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) controlled.
Fuel is metered into each intake port in a sequential firing order. Fuel injectors pulse to follow engine firing
order, in accordance with engine demand, on a tuned intake manifold.
The basic fuel requirement of the engine is determined from the data supplied to the PCM by the MAF sensor,
which measures the amount of air being drawn into the engine.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:25:32
11:25:28 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Fuel Charging & Controls - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
The various sensors detect any changes in the operating conditions and send signals to the PCM. This permits
the PCM to control the opening duration (pulse width) of the fuel injectors and maintain optimum exhaust
emission control and engine performance for all operating conditions.
Throttle Body (TB)
The TB:
controls air supply to the intake manifold by electronically positioning the throttle plate.
is not adjustable.
Fuel Injectors
The fuel injectors:
are electronically operated by the PCM.
atomize the fuel as the fuel is delivered.
each have an internal solenoid that opens a needle valve, which injects fuel into the intake port in the
cylinder head.
are deposit resistant.
Fuel Rail
The fuel rail:
receives fuel from the fuel supply tube.
delivers fuel to the fuel injectors.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
FUEL CHARGING AND CONTROLS
Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
THROTTLE BODY
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:25:28 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Fuel Charging & Controls - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Throttle Body With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
3
4
W503285
9E926
9E936
Description
Electronic throttle control electrical
connector (part of 12B637)
Throttle body (TB) bolt (4 required)
TB
TB gasket
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: The throttle body (TB) must be removed from the vehicle to be cleaned. Do
not hold the throttle plate open with any object that could scratch the bore
or plate while servicing or cleaning the TB.
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
AND FILTERING article.
2. Disconnect the electronic throttle control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the throttle body (TB).
Discard the TB gasket.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
NOTE:
Install a new TB gasket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:25:28 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Fuel Charging & Controls - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
FUEL RAIL AND FUEL INJECTOR - EXPLODED VIEW
Fig. 2: Exploded View Of Fuel Rail & Fuel Injector With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
9J279
2
14A464
3
4
W503279
9F792
Description
Fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect
coupling
Fuel injector electrical connector (6
required) (part of 12B637)
Fuel rail bolt (4 required)
Fuel rail
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:25:28 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Fuel Charging & Controls - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
5
6
9N976
9F593
7
9229
8
9229
Fuel injector clip (6 required)
Fuel injector (6 required)
Upper fuel injector O-ring seal (6
required)
Lower fuel injector O-ring seal (6
required)
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures in this article.
FUEL RAIL
Material
Item
Specification
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (in Canada Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 WSS-M2C930-A
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12) or
equivalent
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article.
2. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
3. Remove the upper intake manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
4. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to FUEL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
5. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 4 fuel rail bolts.
7. Remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly.
8. Remove the 6 fuel injector clips and the 6 fuel injectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:25:28 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Fuel Charging & Controls - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Remove and discard the 12 fuel injector O-ring seals.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. The
use of ordinary O-rings seals can cause the fuel system to leak. Do
not reuse the O-ring seals.
NOTE:
The upper and lower O-ring seals are not interchangeable.
NOTE:
Install new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine
oil.
1. Install the 6 fuel injectors and the 6 fuel injector clips into the fuel rail.
2. Install the fuel rail and fuel injectors as an assembly.
3. Install the 4 fuel rail bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors.
5. Connect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to FUEL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
6. Install the upper intake manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
7. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:25:28 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE
Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Bracket-to-catalytic converter bolts
Catalytic converter support bracket-to-engine block bolts
Catalytic converter support bracket-to-engine block nut
Catalytic converter support bracket-to-transmission bolts
Catalytic converter-to-exhaust manifold nuts
Catalytic converter-to-exhaust manifold studs
Exhaust flexible pipe-to-exhaust Y-pipe nuts
Exhaust Y-pipe-to-catalytic converter nuts
Power steering rack shield bolts
Roll restrictor bolt
Roll restrictor shield nuts
Torca® clamp
Universal joint (U-joint) flange bolts
20
40
40
48
40
25
40
40
15
90
11
47
70
lb-ft
15
30
30
35
30
18
30
30
11
66
8
35
52
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The exhaust system consists of:
an exhaust flexible pipe.
two muffler assemblies.
one resonator assembly.
muffler brackets with isolators bolted to the body.
an exhaust Y-pipe.
a catalyst monitor sensor mounted to each catalytic converter.
a LH and RH catalytic converter.
The exhaust system provides an exit for exhaust gases and reduces engine noise by passing exhaust gases
through the catalytic converters, a muffler assembly and resonator. Rubber exhaust hanger isolators attach the
exhaust system to the mounting hooks.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter plays a major role in the emission control system. The catalytic converter operates as a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:52
11:37:48 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
gas reactor. Its catalytic function is to speed the heat-producing chemical reaction of components in the exhaust
gases in order to reduce air pollutants.
The catalyst material inside the catalytic converter consists of a ceramic substrate.
Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use leaded fuel in a vehicle equipped with a catalytic converter. In a
vehicle that is continually misfueled, the lead in the fuel will be deposited
in the catalytic converter and completely blanket the catalyst. Lead reacts
with platinum to "poison" the catalyst. Continuous use of leaded fuel can
destroy the catalyst and render the catalytic converter useless.
CAUTION: The addition of lead to the catalytic converter can also solidify the
catalyst, causing excessive back pressure in the exhaust system and
possibly causing engine damage.
CAUTION: Extremely high temperatures of 1,100°C (2,012°F) or above due to misfiring
or an over-rich fuel/air mixture will cause the ceramic substrate to sinter or
burn, destroying the catalytic converter. Do not continue to operate the
vehicle if the engine is misfiring, there is a power loss, or other unusual
operating conditions, such as engine overheating and backfiring.
The catalytic converter is designed to provide a long life. No maintenance is necessary for the catalytic
converter.
Sound Insulators and Shields
Sound insulators and shields, attached to the underbody, protect the vehicle from exhaust system heat and
should be inspected at regular intervals to make sure they are not dented or out of position. If a sound insulator
and shield is damaged or shows evidence of deterioration, it should be replaced. The sound insulators and
shields for the muffler, muffler pipe, resonator and catalytic converter pipe are installed separately.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Electronic Vibration Analyzer or
100-F027 (014-00344)
equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect the components of the exhaust system and related controls that may affect exhaust gas
quality or loss of power.
3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage. Refer to the following chart.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Exhaust pipe pinched or crushed
Damaged muffler
Broken or damaged exhaust hanger brackets
Damaged catalytic converter
Cracked exhaust manifold
Loose or damaged heat shields
4. Verify that the exhaust system is installed correctly, with clamps correctly located and tightened to
specification.
5. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom. Go to Symptom Chart - Exhaust System or
Go to Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH).
Symptom Chart - Exhaust System
Symptom Chart - Exhaust System
Condition
Vehicle has low or no
power - vehicle
performance complaint
Possible Sources
Action
INSPECT the exhaust
components for damage.
REPAIR or INSTALL
new components as
necessary. TEST the
system for normal
operation. If the concern is
still present, REFER to the
Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article.
CHECK drain holes for
debris. PARK the vehicle
inside to thaw. TEST the
vehicle for normal
operation. If the concern is
still present, REFER to the
Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article.
Exhaust pipe pinched or crushed
Damaged catalytic converter
Loose obstruction in exhaust
Restricted exhaust (possible
frozen condensate in muffler)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Burning smell - usually
occurs at idle, with
possible traces of smoke
Odor - described as a
sulfur or rotten egg smell
Visible rust on surface of
exhaust pipes
INSPECT the exhaust
system for debris or
missing heat shields.
REPAIR or INSTALL
new components as
necessary. TEST the
system for normal
operation after the repair.
At times, a slight sulfur
smell is normal for
catalytic converters. The
cause is the sulfur content
in the gasoline being used.
ADVISE the customer no
repair is required.
REFER to the
Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article.
Surface rust is a
characteristic of materials
used on exhaust systems.
Exposure to heat or road
salt may result in surface
rust. INSPECT for
perforations. If there are
no perforations, the
condition is normal.
Foreign material caught in
exhaust system
Missing heat shields
Catalytic converter
Excessive sulfur content in fuel
Rich fuel conditions
Misfire conditions
Catalytic converter/exhaust
system
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
NOTE:
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) symptoms should be identified using the
diagnostic tools that are available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of
their uses and a glossary of common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article. Since it is possible any one of multiple systems may be
the cause of a symptom, it may be necessary to use a process of elimination
type of diagnostic approach to pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the
causal system for the symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article for the next likely system and continue diagnosis.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
INSPECT the exhaust system
for loose or missing heat
shields or foreign material
trapped between the heat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Rattle, squeaks or buzz
type noise - from the
bottom of the vehicle
shields and the exhaust
system components. If any
heat shields are loose,
INSTALL worm gear clamp
7L5Z-5A231-AA and tighten
to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). If the heat
shields are missing,
INSTALL new heat shields or
exhaust system components as
necessary. If a rattle, noise or
buzz condition persists,
INSTALL a new heat shield
or component as necessary.
TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
Loose or damaged heat shield
VERIFY that the exhaust
isolators are correctly
installed. INSPECT the
exhaust isolators for wear or
damage. INSTALL new
isolators as necessary. TEST
the system for normal
operation after the repair.
INSPECT the exhaust system
components for damage or
broken hangers. INSTALL
new components as necessary.
CHECK for loose or damaged
exhaust hanger brackets or
fasteners. TIGHTEN the bolts
to specification or INSTALL
new components as necessary.
TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
MOVE the exhaust system to
simulate the bouncing action
of the vehicle, checking for
exhaust-to-body contact while
moving the exhaust system.
Using a rubber mallet, TAP
on the exhaust components to
duplicate the noise concern.
Lightly TAP on the muffler,
then the catalytic converter.
DETERMINE if there are
loose or broken baffles in the
Loose or damaged exhaust
isolators
Damaged exhaust isolator
hanger bracket
Loose or damaged catalytic
converter or muffler
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
muffler or a loose or broken
element in the catalytic
converter. REPAIR or
INSTALL new components as
necessary. TEST the system
for normal operation after the
repair.
Drone or clunk type
noise - from the bottom
of the vehicle
Whistles, boom, hum or
ticking type noise noise tends to change as
the engine warms. The
noises are often
accompanied by
exhaust fumes
INSPECT for signs of exhaust
components-to-body contact.
If necessary, CARRY OUT
the Exhaust System
Alignment.
INSPECT the exhaust
isolators for wear or damage.
INSTALL new isolators as
necessary. TEST the system
for normal operation after the
repair.
INSPECT for signs of exhaust
components-to-body contact.
If necessary, CARRY OUT
the Exhaust System
Alignment.
INSPECT the entire exhaust
system for leaks. CHECK for
punctures, loose or damaged
clamps/fasteners, gaskets,
sensors or broken welds.
EXAMINE the chassis for
grayish-white or black
exhaust soot, which indicates
exhaust leakage at that point.
To magnify a small leak, have
an assistant hold a rag over
the tailpipe outlet while
listening for a leak. REPAIR
or INSTALL new components
as necessary. TEST the
system for normal operation
after the repair.
MOVE the exhaust system to
simulate the bouncing action
of the vehicle, checking for
exhaust-to-body contact while
moving the exhaust system.
Exhaust grounded to chassis
Loose or damaged exhaust
isolators
Exhaust grounded to chassis
Exhaust system leak
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Hissing or rushing
noise - high frequency
sound. Vehicle
performance is
unaffected
Pinging noise - occurs
when exhaust system is
hot, engine turned off
Vibration - occurs at
idle and at low speeds.
Also accompanied by a
clunk or buzz type
noise
Using a rubber mallet, TAP
on the exhaust components to
duplicate the noise concern.
Lightly TAP on the muffler
and the catalytic converter.
DETERMINE if there are
loose or broken baffles in the
muffler, or a loose or broken
element in the catalytic
converter. REPAIR or
INSTALL new components as
necessary. TEST the system
for normal operation after the
repair.
Catalytic converter
CONFIRM the drain holes are
the noise source. INSTALL
new components as necessary.
TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
CHECK the exhaust system
for leaks. Using a rubber
mallet, TAP on the exhaust
components to duplicate the
noise concern. Lightly TAP
on the muffler and the
catalytic converter. Determine
if there are loose or broken
baffles in the muffler, or a
loose or broken element in the
catalytic converter. REPAIR
or INSTALL new components
as necessary. TEST the
system for normal operation
after the repair.
Cool down pinging is a result
of the exhaust system
expanding and contracting
during heating and cooling.
This is a normal condition.
INSPECT the exhaust
isolators for wear or damage.
INSTALL new isolators as
necessary. TEST the system
for normal operation after the
repair.
Exhaust muffler/resonator
drain hole enlarged due to
corrosion
Exhaust system. Exhaust flow
through pipes
Catalytic converter/exhaust
system
Loose or damaged exhaust
isolator
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Engine drumming noise
- normally
accompanied by
vibration
Sputter type noise noise worse when cold,
lessens or disappears
when the vehicle is at
operating temperature
Thumping noise - from
the bottom of the
vehicle, worse at
acceleration
Engine vibration - is
felt with increases and
decreases in engine
RPM
Drumming noise occurs inside the
vehicle during idle or
high idle, hot or cold.
Damper broken or out of
position
Exhaust system grounded to
chassis
INSPECT the exhaust isolator
hanger brackets for wear or
damage. INSTALL or
REPAIR as necessary. TEST
the system for normal
operation after the repair.
CHECK for the correct
damper orientation .
RELOCATE to the correct
position and tighten the nuts
to specification. INSPECT for
missing or damaged damper.
INSTALL new components as
necessary. TEST the system
for normal operation after the
repair.
CARRY OUT the Exhaust
System Alignment.
INSPECT the exhaust system
for loose or damaged
fasteners, Torca® clamps, or
isolators. CARRY OUT the
Exhaust System Alignment.
INSPECT the exhaust system
for leaks or damage. REPAIR
as necessary. TEST the
system for normal operation
after the repair.
CHECK the exhaust system to
chassis clearance. CHECK the
exhaust system isolators for
damage. REPAIR as
necessary. TEST the system
for normal operation after the
repair.
CARRY OUT the Exhaust
System Alignment. REPAIR
as necessary. TEST the
system for normal operation
after the repair.
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Loose or damaged exhaust
isolator hanger brackets
Damaged or misaligned
exhaust system
Damaged or worn exhaust
system
Misaligned exhaust system
Strain on exhaust system
isolators
Exhaust system vibration
excites the body resonances
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Very low-frequency
drumming is very RPM
dependent
inducing interior noise
Pinpoint Test
PINPOINT TEST A: DRUMMING NOISE
A1 CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
Key in START position.
Increase the engine RPM until the noise is the loudest. Note the engine RPM.
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 1: Exhaust System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Add approximately 9 kg (20 lb) of weight to the exhaust system. First place the weight at the tail
pipe and test, then at the front pipe.
Key in START position.
Increase the engine RPM and listen for the drumming noise. Note the engine RPM if the noise
occurs.
Key in OFF position.
Using a vibration analyzer (VA), determine the amount of vibration that occurs with the drumming
noise.
Is the noise/vibration reduced or eliminated, or does the noise/vibration occur at a different
RPM?
YES : REFER to Exhaust System Alignment. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : CONDUCT a diagnosis on other suspect systems. REFER to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
EXHAUST SYSTEM ALIGNMENT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Loosen all fasteners joining the exhaust system components.
3. Beginning at the front of the vehicle, align the exhaust system to establish the maximum clearance. Make
sure all fit pipes are pushed all the way into the preceding pipe and the notches are correctly lined up with
the tabs.
4. Beginning at the front of the vehicle, tighten all fasteners and clamps to specification. For additional
information, refer to SPECIFICATIONS.
5. Start the engine and check the exhaust system for leaks.
TORCA® CLAMP
1. Remove the nut from the Torca® clamp.
2. Grind the spot weld from the Torca® clamp and remove the clamp.
3. Clean the uneven surface area and position a Torca® clamp.
Fig. 2: Locating Uneven Surface Area
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the clamp position is no more than 27.5 mm (1.08 in) or less
than 25.5 mm (1 in) from the inlet of the resonator pipe.
4. Make sure the back of the slot is covered by the clamp and the button is fully seated inside the notch.
Fig. 3: Making Sure Back Of Slot Is Covered By Clamp & Button Is Fully Seated Inside Notch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
With Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the clamp until the exhaust system has been aligned.
5. Tighten the Torca® clamp.
Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
EXHAUST SYSTEM - EXPLODED VIEW
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Exhaust System With Torque Specifications (1 Of 3)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
W710656
3
W705443
4
5F263
5
5G228
6
7
5E213
9451
8
W705443
9
W705443
10
11
12
13
9451
5G274
5G203
5G213
14
W712458
Description
LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connector
LH catalytic converter support bracketto-transmission bolts (2 required)
LH catalytic converter-to-exhaust
manifold nut (4 required)
Gasket
Bracket-to-LH catalytic converter bolt (2
required)
LH catalytic converter
Gasket
Exhaust Y-pipe-to-LH catalytic converter
nut
Exhaust flexible pipe-to-exhaust Y-pipe
nut (2 required)
Gasket
Exhaust Y-pipe
Exhaust flexible pipe
Muffler and tailpipe
LH catalytic converter-to-exhaust
manifold stud (4 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Exploded View Of Exhaust System With Torque Specifications (2 Of 3)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
15
14A464
16
W710512/ W705443
17
5G228
18
W705443
19
5F263
Description
RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connector
RH catalytic converter support bracketto-engine block bolt (2 required) (front
wheel drive [FWD] nut)
Bracket-to-RH catalytic converter bolt (2
required)
RH catalytic converter-to-exhaust
manifold nut (4 required)
Gasket
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
20
5E211
21
W705443
22
5E241
23
5F262
24
25
5221
5F262
26
W712458
RH catalytic converter
Exhaust Y-pipe-to-RH catalytic converter
nut (2 required)
Gasket
Exhaust flexible pipe isolators (2
required)
Torca® clamp
Muffler and tailpipe isolator (4 required)
RH catalytic converter-to-exhaust
manifold stud (4 required)
Fig. 6: Exploded View Of Exhaust System With Torque Specifications (3 Of 3)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Item
Part Number
27
W711918
28
4K357
29
W500210
30
31
32
33
W700101
6C038
W706674
Description
U-joint flange bolts (4 required) (all
wheel drive [AWD] only)
Front driveshaft (AWD only)
Power steering rack shield bolts (2
required)
Power steering rack shield
Roll restrictor shield nut (2 required)
Roll restrictor shield
Roll restrictor bolt
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER - LH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Always install new fasteners and gaskets. Clean flange faces prior to new
gasket installation to make sure of correct sealing.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe.
4. Remove the 2 catalytic converter support bracket-to-transmission bolts.
To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. Remove the 4 nuts and the LH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts and gasket.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install a new gasket and nuts.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER - RH
All vehicles
NOTE:
If necessary, the catalytic converter heat shield can be serviced
separately.
NOTE:
Always install new fasteners and gaskets. Clean flange faces prior to new
gasket installation to make sure of correct sealing.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the catalyst monitor sensor. For additional information, refer to ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS article.
3. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Y-Pipe.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
NOTE:
Index-mark the driveshaft for installation.
4. Remove and discard the 4 U-joint flange bolts and separate the front driveshaft and secure it with a length
of mechanic's wire.
To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
5. Remove the intermediate shaft. For additional information, refer to FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
article.
6. Remove the 2 catalytic converter support bracket-to-engine block bolts.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
All vehicles
7. Remove the 2 bolts and the power steering rack shield.
To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
8. Remove the catalytic converter support bracket-to-engine block bolt and nut.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
All vehicles
9. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor shield.
To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
10. Remove the roll restrictor bolt and rotate the engine forward.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Locating Roll Restrictor Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the 2 bracket-to-RH catalytic converter bolts.
To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
12. Remove the 4 nuts and the RH catalytic converter.
Discard the 4 RH catalytic converter nuts and gasket.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install a new gasket, nuts and studs.
EXHAUST FLEXIBLE PIPE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Do not excessively bend, twist or allow the exhaust to hang from the
flexible pipe or damage to the exhaust system may occur.
NOTE:
Always install new fasteners and gaskets. Clean flange faces prior to new
gasket installation to make sure of correct sealing.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust flexible pipe-to-exhaust Y-pipe nuts.
Discard the gasket.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
3. Remove the Torca® clamp. For additional information, refer to Torca® Clamp.
4. Separate the 2 exhaust flexible pipe isolators and remove the exhaust flexible pipe.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install a new gasket and nuts.
6. Start the engine and check for exhaust leaks.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
EXHAUST Y-PIPE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Do not excessively bend, twist or allow the exhaust to hang from the
flexible pipe or damage to the exhaust system may occur.
NOTE:
Always install new fasteners and gaskets. Clean flange faces prior to new
gasket installation to make sure of correct sealing.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove and discard the 4 exhaust Y-pipe-to-LH and RH catalytic converter nuts.
Discard the gaskets.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
3. Remove and discard the exhaust Y-pipe-to-exhaust flexible pipe nuts and remove the exhaust Y-pipe.
Discard the gasket.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install new gaskets and nuts.
5. Start the engine and check for exhaust leaks.
MUFFLER AND TAILPIPE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the isolators. They may cause
deterioration of the rubber.
NOTE:
Oil or grease-based lubricants on the isolators may cause the exhaust hanger
isolator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Support the muffler and tailpipe with a suitable jackstand.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Exhaust System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Supporting Muffler & Tailpipe With A Suitable Jackstand
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the Torca® clamp. For additional information, refer to Torca® Clamp.
NOTE:
Do not damage or tear the isolators during removal.
4. Using soapy water, separate the 4 muffler and tailpipe isolators from the vehicle.
5. Separate the muffler and tailpipe from the exhaust flexible pipe and remove the muffler and tailpipe.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Inspect and replace any isolators damaged or torn during the removal process.
7. Start the engine and check for exhaust leaks.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:37:48 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
2008 HVAC
Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
A/C Cooling Coil Coating
YN-29
A/C System Flushing Solvent
YN-23
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
WSH-M1C231-B
(R-134a Systems)
YN-12-D
R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN- WSH-M17B19-A
16-R (Canada)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
A/C Compressor
Type
Fill Capacity
118 ml (4 fl oz)
0.60kg
(21 oz)
Specification
10S20C
A/C Pressure Relief Valvea
Open pressure
Close pressure
Evaporator Temperature Sensor
ON temperature
OFF temperature
Refrigerant System Dye
R-134a Leak Detection Dye 164-R6060 or 164R6081
3,447-4,137 kPa
(500-600 psi)
2758 kPa (400 psi)
3°C (37°F)
2°C (36°F)
-
a Manifold gauge set pressures may vary slightly depending on the distance between the service gauge port
valve and the A/C pressure relief valve, the A/C cycling switch or the pressure cutoff switch location.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
Climate Control System
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:34
11:13:28 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Take the following precautions when repairing an air conditioning system
containing R-134a:
Always wear safety goggles.
Avoid contact with liquid refrigerant R-134a. R-134a vaporizes at
approximately -25°C (-13°F) under atmospheric pressure and will
freeze skin tissue.
Never allow refrigerant R-134a gas to escape in quantity in an
occupied space. It will displace the oxygen needed to support life.
Never use a torch in an atmosphere containing R-134a gas. R-134a is
non-toxic at all normal conditions, but it decomposes when exposed
to high temperatures such as a torch flame. During decomposition it
releases irritating and toxic gasses (as described in the MSDS sheet
from the manufacturer). Decomposition products are hydrofluoric
acid, carbon dioxide and water.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the vehicle or air conditioning (A/C) components, the
following precautions must be observed.
The A/C refrigerant of all vehicles must be identified and analyzed
prior to refrigerant charging. Failure to do so can contaminate the
shop bulk refrigerant and other vehicles.
Do not add R-12 refrigerant to an A/C system that requires the use of
R-134a refrigerant. These 2 types of refrigerant must never be mixed.
Doing so can damage the A/C system.
Charge the A/C system with R-134a refrigerant gas while the engine
is running only at the low-pressure side, to prevent refrigerant
slugging from damaging the A/C compressor.
Use only R-134a refrigerant. Due to environmental concerns, when
the A/C system is drained, the refrigerant must be collected using
refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Federal, State/Provincial
and/or local laws REQUIRE that R-134a be recovered into appropriate
recovery equipment and the process be conducted by qualified
technicians who have been certified by an approved organization,
such as ASE, MACS, HRAI, etc. Use of a recovery machine dedicated
to R-134a is necessary to reduce the possibility of oil and refrigerant
incompatibility concerns. Refer to the instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer when removing refrigerant from or charging
the A/C system.
Refrigerant R-134a must not be mixed with air for leak testing or used
with air for any other purpose above atmospheric pressure. R-134a is
combustible when mixed with high concentrations of air and higher
pressures.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
A number of manufacturers are producing refrigerant products that
are described as direct substitutes for refrigerant R-134a. The use of
any unauthorized substitute refrigerant can severely damage the A/C
components. If repair is required, use only new or recycled
refrigerant R-134a.
CAUTION: To avoid contamination of the air conditioning (A/C) system, the following
precautions must be observed.
Never open or loosen a connection before recovering the refrigerant.
When loosening a connection, if any residual pressure is evident,
allow it to leak out before opening the fitting.
Evacuate a system that has been opened to install a new component
or one that has discharged through leakage before charging.
Seal open fittings with a cap or plug immediately after disconnecting
a component from the system.
Clean the outside of the fittings thoroughly before disconnecting a
component from the system.
Do not remove the sealing caps from a new component until ready to
install.
Refrigerant oil will absorb moisture from the atmosphere if left
uncapped. Do not open an oil container until ready to use and install
the cap immediately after using. Store the oil in a clean, moisture-free
container.
Install a new O-ring seal before connecting an open fitting. Coat the
fitting and O-ring seal with PAG oil before connecting.
When installing a refrigerant line, avoid sharp bends. Position the
line away from the exhaust or any sharp edges that can chafe the
line.
Tighten threaded fittings only to specifications. The steel and
aluminum fittings used in the refrigerant system will not tolerate
overtightening.
When disconnecting a fitting, use a wrench on both halves of the
fitting to prevent twisting of the refrigerant lines or tubes.
Do not open a refrigerant system or uncap a new component unless
it is as close as possible to room temperature. This will prevent
condensation from forming inside a component that is cooler than
the surrounding air.
The electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) system heats or cools the vehicle depending on the HVAC
module - EMTC control panel selection.
The HVAC module - EMTC control panel selections determine heating or cooling, air distribution and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
enables blower motor operation.
The temperature control setting determines the air temperature.
The blower motor switch varies the blower motor speed.
During A/C operation the system also reduces the relative humidity of the air.
The dual automatic temperature control (DATC) system maintains the selected vehicle interior temperature by
heating and/or cooling the air.
During A/C operation the system also reduces the relative humidity of the air.
The driver may override the automatic mode of operation.
The temperature control setting determines the air temperature.
The blower motor control override buttons vary the blower motor speed.
The driver side and passenger side temperature settings can be individually controlled.
The system consists of the following components:
A/C compressor
A/C compressor clutch assembly
A/C condenser core with A/C receiver/drier
A/C evaporator core
Connecting refrigerant lines
Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV)
A/C pressure transducer
Heater core and evaporator core housing
HVAC module - EMTC or HVAC module - DATC
Blower switch (EMTC systems)
Temperature blend door actuators
Floor/defrost/panel door actuator
Air inlet door actuator
Blower motor resistor or speed control module
Blower motor
Ambient temperature sensor
In-vehicle temperature sensor
Solar radiation sensor
Evaporator temperature sensor
External Temperature Display
The external temperature is displayed when the EXT button is pressed. While the actual external temperature
can vary continuously, the value that is displayed will update at a specific rate depending on whether or not the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
engine is "hot" and whether or not the vehicle is moving.
When the external temperature is rising, the display will update slowly. Updates (when the actual external
temperature is higher than currently displayed value) will be limited to 0.6°C (1°F) every 20 seconds while the
vehicle is moving at 40 kph (25 mph) or greater for more than 90 seconds or 0.6°C (1°F) every 20 minutes if the
vehicle is not moving at this speed. This is to prevent the heat from the engine compartment from affecting the
accuracy of the display.
When the external temperature is dropping, the display will update quickly.
Updates (when the actual external temperature is lower than currently displayed value) will only be limited to
0.6°C (1°F) every 2 seconds (regardless of vehicle speed). Consequently, the display will essentially follow the
drop experienced by the external temperature thermistor.
Climate Control System Operation
Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) System
The electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) system operation is determined by the settings on the
HVAC module - EMTC. The EMTC system is composed of the HVAC module - EMTC, blower motor resistor,
mode door actuator, air inlet door actuator and temperature blend door actuator to control the various functions.
The blower motor switch:
sets the blower motor speed.
directs the blower motor path to ground through the blower motor resistor to allow blower motor
operation in LO, MED LO and MED HI.
directs the blower motor path directly to ground, bypassing the blower motor resistor to allow blower
motor operation in HI.
The A/C request button:
can command the A/C compressor ON (when the function selector switch is in PANEL, FLOOR/PANEL,
FLOOR/DEFROST and FLOOR) when the A/C request switch is pressed. Indicator illuminates when
A/C request switch is toggled ON.
is inoperative in MAX A/C, OFF and DEFROST.
indicator illuminates when the function selector switch is in MAX A/C and cannot be toggled.
indicator does not illuminate in OFF and cannot be toggled.
indicator does not illuminate in DEFROST but can be toggled ON or OFF. The A/C compressor will
operate regardless of indicator status if the outside air temperature is above 6°C (43°F).
is serviced only with the climate control module.
The function selector knob:
selects airflow direction.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
The air recirculation button:
selects either recirculated or outside air source.
recirculates air in any mode except DEFROST, if requested.
is disabled in MAX A/C or OFF mode where recirculated air only is used.
is disabled in DEFROST mode where outside air only is used.
is serviced only with the climate control module.
The temperature selector knob:
selects full warm and full cool as well as blended outlet temperatures.
The HVAC module - EMTC also includes:
a rear window DEFROST button. Refer to GLASS, FRAMES & MECHANISMS article.
Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) System
The dual automatic temperature control (DATC) system operation is determined by the settings on the HVAC
module - DATC. The DATC system automatically maintains a selected temperature for vehicle interior
comfort. The DATC system is composed of the HVAC module - DATC, blower motor speed control, mode
door actuator, air inlet door actuator, temperature blend door actuator, in-vehicle temperature sensor, ambient
temperature sensor, evaporator temperature sensor and solar radiation sensor to control the various functions.
The HVAC module - DATC will display outside air temperature when the EXT button is pressed.
When the HVAC module - DATC is set to AUTO:
the air distribution direction, blower motor speed and A/C compressor operation are automatically
controlled based on the temperature(s) selected.
The HVAC module - DATC manual override settings:
allow the air distribution direction to be manually selected.
allow the blower motor speed to be manually selected.
allow RECIRCULATION mode to be manually selected in all modes except DEFROST. The A/C request
can be cancelled by pressing the A/C request switch, turning the indicator OFF.
allow A/C compressor operation to be manually selected except in DEFROST.
The HVAC module - DATC also includes:
a rear window DEFROST button. Refer to GLASS, FRAMES & MECHANISMS article.
heated/cooled seat controls. Refer to SEATING article.
System Airflow Description - Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) System
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Max A/C
When MAX A/C is selected:
the air inlet door actuator closes off outside air and admits only recirculated air.
the recirc button is disabled and the indicator is illuminated.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the instrument panel A/C registers.
blended air temperature is available.
the A/C request button is illuminated and will be disabled.
the blower motor is ON.
PANEL
When PANEL is selected:
the recirc request button is enabled. If the recirc request button is selected (indicator ON), the air inlet
door actuator closes off outside air from entering the passenger compartment. If the recirc request button
is not selected (indicator OFF), the air inlet door actuator admits only outside air into the passenger
compartment.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the instrument panel A/C registers.
blended air temperature is available.
the A/C request button is enabled. The A/C compressor will operate and the indicator will illuminate if
the A/C request button is selected.
the blower motor is ON.
PANEL/FLOOR
When PANEL/FLOOR is selected:
the recirc request button is enabled. If the recirc request button is selected (indicator ON), the air inlet
door actuator closes off outside air from entering the passenger compartment. If the recirc request button
is not selected (indicator OFF), the air inlet door actuator admits only outside air into the passenger
compartment.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the floor duct and the instrument panel A/C registers. A
small amount of airflow from the side window demisters and defrost duct will be present.
blended air temperature is available.
the A/C request button is enabled. The A/C compressor will operate and the indicator will illuminate if
the A/C request button is selected.
the blower motor is ON.
OFF
When OFF is selected:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
the recirc request button is disabled.
the air inlet door actuator closes off outside air and admits only recirculated air.
the A/C request button is disabled.
the blower motor is OFF.
FLOOR
When FLOOR is selected:
the recirc request button is enabled. If the recirc request button is selected (indicator ON), the air inlet
door actuator closes off outside air from entering the passenger compartment. If the recirc request button
is not selected (indicator OFF), the air inlet door actuator admits only outside air into the passenger
compartment.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the floor duct. A small amount of airflow from the defroster
duct and side window demisters will be present.
blended air temperature is available.
the A/C request button is enabled. The A/C compressor will operate and the indicator will illuminate if
the A/C request button is selected.
the blower motor is ON.
FLOOR/DEFROST
When FLOOR/DEFROST is selected:
the recirc request button is enabled. If the recirc request button is selected (indicator ON), the air inlet
door actuator closes off outside air from entering the passenger compartment. If the recirc request button
is not selected (indicator OFF), the air inlet door actuator admits only outside air into the passenger
compartment.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the floor duct, the defroster duct and the side window
demisters.
blended air temperature is available.
the A/C request button will toggle the indicator on and off. To reduce fogging, the A/C compressor will
operate automatically, regardless of indicator status.
the blower motor is ON.
DEFROST
When DEFROST is selected:
the air inlet door actuator opens, admitting only outside air into the passenger compartment.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the defroster duct and side window demisters. A small
amount of airflow from the floor duct will be present.
blended air temperature is available.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
to reduce fogging, the A/C compressor will operate automatically, regardless of indicator status.
the blower motor is ON.
System Airflow Description - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) System
AUTO
When AUTO is selected:
the temperature control setting is manually set to the desired setting.
the air inlet door actuator is automatically controlled by the HVAC module - DATC, based on the
temperature setting.
the mode door actuators are automatically controlled by the HVAC module - DATC based on the
temperature setting.
the A/C compressor is automatically controlled by the HVAC module - DATC based on the temperature
setting.
the blower motor is ON. The blower motor speed is automatically controlled by the HVAC module DATC based on the temperature setting, but can be manually overridden.
OFF
When OFF is selected:
the air inlet door actuator closes off outside air and admits only recirculated air.
the A/C request button is disabled.
the blower motor is OFF.
PANEL
When PANEL is selected:
the recirc request button is enabled. If the recirc request button is selected (indicator ON), the air inlet
door actuator closes off outside air from entering the passenger compartment. If the recirc request button
is not selected (indicator OFF), the air inlet door actuator admits only outside air into the passenger
compartment.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the instrument panel A/C registers.
blended air temperature is available. Only when A/C compressor operation has been selected by pressing
the A/C request button (indicator ON), can the airflow temperature be cooled below the outside air
temperature.
the A/C request button is enabled. The A/C compressor will operate and the indicator will illuminate if
the A/C request button is selected.
the blower motor is ON.
PANEL/FLOOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
When PANEL/FLOOR is selected:
the recirc request button is enabled. If the recirc request button is selected (indicator ON), the air inlet
door actuator closes off outside air from entering the passenger compartment. If the recirc request button
is not selected (indicator OFF), the air inlet door actuator admits only outside air into the passenger
compartment.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the floor duct and the instrument panel A/C registers. A
small amount of airflow from the side window demisters and defrost duct will be present.
blended air temperature is available. Only when A/C compressor operation has been selected by pressing
the A/C request button (indicator ON), can the airflow temperature be cooled below the outside air
temperature.
the A/C request button is enabled. The A/C compressor will operate and the indicator will illuminate if
the A/C request button is selected.
the blower motor is ON.
FLOOR
When FLOOR is selected:
the recirc request button is enabled. If the recirc request button is selected (indicator ON), the air inlet
door actuator closes off outside air from entering the passenger compartment. If the recirc request button
is not selected (indicator OFF), the air inlet door actuator admits only outside air into the passenger
compartment.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the floor duct. A small amount of airflow from the defroster
duct and side window demisters will be present.
blended air temperature is available. Only when A/C compressor operation has been selected by pressing
the A/C request button (indicator ON), can the airflow temperature be cooled below the outside air
temperature.
the A/C request button is enabled. The A/C compressor will operate and the indicator will illuminate if
the A/C request button is selected.
the blower motor is ON.
FLOOR/DEFROST
When FLOOR/DEFROST is selected:
the recirc request button is enabled. If the recirc request button is selected (indicator ON), the air inlet
door actuator closes off outside air from entering the passenger compartment. If the recirc request button
is not selected (indicator OFF), the air inlet door actuator admits only outside air into the passenger
compartment.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the floor duct, the defroster duct and the side window
demisters.
blended air temperature is available.
the A/C request button is enabled. The A/C compressor will operate automatically and the indicator will
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
illuminate if the A/C request button is selected.
the blower motor is ON.
DEFROST
When DEFROST is selected:
the recirc request button and indicator is disabled. Regardless of button and indicator status, the air inlet
door actuator admits only outside air into the passenger compartment.
the floor/defrost/panel door directs airflow to the defroster duct and side window demisters. A small
amount of airflow from the floor duct will be present.
blended air temperature is available.
to reduce fogging, the A/C compressor will operate automatically, regardless of indicator status.
the blower motor is ON.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Fluke 77 III Automotive Meter
105-R0056 or equivalent
R-134a Manifold Gauge Set
176-R032A or equivalent
A/C Flush Adapter Kit
219-00074 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
A/C Flush and Purge Fitting Kit
219-00024 or equivalent
Pressure Test Kit
014-R1072 or equivalent
Principles of Operation
There are 4 main principles involved with the basic theory of operation:
Heat transfer
Latent heat of vaporization
Relative humidity
Effects of pressure
Heat Transfer
If 2 substances of different temperature are placed near each other, the heat in the warmer substance will
transfer to the colder substance.
Latent Heat of Vaporization
When a liquid boils (converts to gas) it absorbs heat without raising the temperature of the resulting gas. When
the gas condenses (converts back to a liquid), it gives off heat without lowering the temperature of the resulting
liquid.
Relative Humidity
The amount of moisture (water vapor content) that the air can hold is directly related to the air temperature. The
more heat there is in the air, the more moisture the air can hold. The lower the moisture content in the air, the
more comfortable it is. Removing the moisture from the air lowers its relative humidity and improves personal
comfort.
Effects of Pressure on Boiling or Condensation
As the pressure is increased on a liquid, the temperature at which the liquid boils (converts to gas) also
increases. Conversely, when the pressure on a liquid is reduced, its boiling point is also reduced. When in the
gas state, an increase in pressure causes an increase in temperature, while a decrease in pressure will decrease
the temperature of the gas.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Compressor Anti-Slugging Strategy (CASS)
Liquid refrigerant may accumulate in the A/C compressor under certain conditions. To alleviate damage to the
A/C compressor, the compressor anti-slugging strategy (CASS) is utilized.
CASS is initiated only under specific conditions:
Ignition is OFF for more than 8 hours
Ambient temperature is above -4°C (25°F)
Battery voltage is above 8.5 volts during engine cranking
When these conditions are present, the PCM will activate the A/C control relay prior to cranking of the engine.
The A/C control relay engages the A/C compressor for approximately 4-15 A/C compressor revolutions or a
maximum of 2 seconds (depending upon vehicle application), allowing the liquid refrigerant to be pushed from
the A/C compressor. CASS is initiated by the PCM regardless of the HVAC - EMTC or the HVAC - DATC
system settings.
The Refrigerant Cycle
During stabilized conditions (A/C system shutdown), the refrigerant pressures are equal throughout the system.
When the A/C compressor is in operation it increases pressure on the refrigerant vapor, raising its temperature.
The high-pressure and high-temperature vapor is then released into the top of the A/C condenser core.
The A/C condenser, being close to ambient temperature, causes the refrigerant vapor to condense into a liquid
when heat is removed from the refrigerant by ambient air passing over the fins and tubing. The now liquid
refrigerant, still at high pressure, exits from the bottom of the A/C condenser and enters the inlet side of the A/C
receiver/drier. The receiver/drier is designed to remove moisture from the refrigerant.
The outlet of the receiver/drier is connected to the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV). The TXV provides the
orifice which is the restriction in the refrigerant system and separates the high and low pressure sides of the A/C
system. As the liquid refrigerant passes across this restriction, its pressure and boiling point are reduced.
The liquid refrigerant is now at its lowest pressure and temperature. As it passes through the A/C evaporator, it
absorbs heat from the airflow passing over the plate/fin sections of the A/C evaporator. This addition of heat
causes the refrigerant to boil (convert to gas). The now cooler air can no longer support the same humidity level
of the warmer air and this excess moisture condenses on the exterior of the evaporator coils and fins and drains
outside the vehicle.
The refrigerant cycle is now repeated with the A/C compressor again increasing the pressure and temperature of
the refrigerant.
A thermistor which monitors the temperature of the air that has passed through the evaporator core controls A/C
clutch cycling. If the temperature of the evaporator core discharge air is low enough to cause the condensed
water vapor to freeze, the A/C clutch is disengaged by the vehicle PCM.
The high-side line pressure is also monitored so that A/C compressor operation will be interrupted if the system
pressure becomes too high or is determined to be too low (low charge condition).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
The A/C compressor thermal protection switch will interrupt compressor operation if the compressor housing
exceeds temperature limits.
The A/C compressor relief valve will open and vent refrigerant to relieve unusually high system pressure.
Fig. 1: Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) Type Refrigerant System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Description
A/C evaporator core
A/C evaporator core temperature sensor
Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV)
A/C charge valve port (low side)
A/C suction line
A/C compressor
A/C pressure relief valve
A/C pressure transducer
Low-pressure vapor
High-pressure vapor
Low-pressure liquid
High-pressure liquid
Compressor discharge line
A/C desiccant cartridge
A/C condenser core with A/C receiver/drier
Condenser-to-evaporator line
A/C charge valve port (high side)
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the climate control system to duplicate the condition.
2. Inspect to determine if one of the following mechanical or electrical concerns apply:
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Loose, missing or
damaged A/C
compressor drive belt
Loose or disconnected
A/C clutch
Broken or binding
door/actuator
Broken or leaking
refrigerant lines
Obstructed in-vehicle
temperature sensor
Disconnected in-vehicle
temperature aspirator
hose
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse(s):
15 (10A)
37 (10A)
45 (5A)
66 (40A)
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 35 (10A)
Blower motor
inoperative
A/C compressor
inoperative
Circuitry open/shorted
Disconnected electrical
connectors
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Cooling fan inoperative
3. As pinpoint tests and measurements are being carried out, be sure to inspect for any disconnected, loosefitting or incorrectly installed component, module and in-line electrical connectors and pins.
4. If the inspection reveals obvious concerns that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
5. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
7. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM, HVAC module - dual automatic temperature control (DATC).
8. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication from one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
9. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the HVAC module - DATC.
NOTE:
Some PCM DTCs may inhibit A/C operation. If any PCM DTCs are retrieved,
diagnose those first. Refer to Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
10. If the HVAC module - DATC DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the HVAC MODULE DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL DTC CHART. If the PCM DTCs retrieved are
related to the concern, go to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
11. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart - Climate Control System.
HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - Diagnostic Methods
The dual automatic temperature control (DATC) system must be diagnosed by first retrieving any DTCs, if
present.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
An on-demand (hard fault) DTC indicates that the fault is currently present. An on-demand DTC suggests
a wiring fault, disconnected connector or component failure.
A continuous (intermittent) DTC alone (corresponding on-demand DTC is not present) indicates that the
fault is an intermittent condition and may not be currently present. A continuous only DTC suggests a
poor wiring connection, loose pin or terminal or intermittent component failure.
On-demand (hard fault) or continuous (intermittent fault) DTCs can be retrieved using a scan tool. If using a
scan tool, refer to the scan tool operating manual.
On-demand DTCs can also be retrieved by carrying out the Dual Automatic Temperature Control Module OnDemand Self Test. To retrieve and/or clear continuous DTCs, carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic
Temperature Control (DATC) - Retrieve Continuous DTCs procedure. Always carry out the HVAC Module Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self Test before retrieving continuous DTCs.
If no DTCs are present, go to Symptom Chart - Climate Control System or Go to Symptom Chart - Noise,
Vibration and Harshness (NVH) for the appropriate diagnostic action.
HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self Test
The HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self Test will retrieve ondemand (hard fault) DTCs only, it will not retrieve continuous DTCs. Continuous DTCs can be cleared when
exiting the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self Test. Make sure to
retrieve continuous DTCs by carrying out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Retrieve Continuous DTCs procedure before clearing any continuous DTCs.
The HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self Test will not
detect concerns associated with data link messages like engine coolant temperature or vehicle speed
signals. A scan tool must be used to retrieve these concerns.
The HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self Test will detect
concerns in the system control functions and will display on-demand (hard fault) DTCs for concerns that
are present during the self-test. The vehicle interior temperature should be between 4°C-38°C (40°F-100°
F) when carrying out the self-test. If the temperatures are not within the specified ranges, false DTCs may
be displayed.
The self-test can be initiated after cycling the ignition switch from OFF to ON. Normal operation of the
climate control system stops when the self-test is activated.
To enter the self-test, press the OFF and DEFROST buttons simultaneously and release, then press the
AUTO button within 2 seconds. The display will show a flashing "----" for a maximum of 20 seconds,
after which "8888" will be displayed if there are no on-demand DTCs present. If DTCs are present, the
HVAC module - DATC will display the on-demand DTCs. Record all DTCs displayed.
If any DTCs appear during the self-test, carry out the diagnostic procedure. Refer to the HVAC
MODULE - DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL DTC CHART and follow the
ACTION for each DTC given.
If a condition exists, but no DTCs appear during the self-test, go to Symptom Chart - Climate Control
System condition: The DATC System is Inoperative, Intermittent or Incorrect Operation.
Always exit the self-test before powering the system down (system turned OFF).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Continuous DTCs will be deleted after 80 ignition switch ON cycles after the intermittent fault occurs.
HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - Retrieve Continuous DTCs
The HVAC module - DATC will retrieve only continuous (intermittent) DTCs when carrying out this
procedure.
Retrieval of continuous DTCs can be initiated after cycling the ignition switch from OFF to ON. Normal
operation of the climate control system stops when retrieving continuous DTCs.
To retrieve continuous DTCs, press the OFF and DEFROST buttons simultaneously and release, then
press the RECIRC button within 2 seconds. The display will show a flashing "----" for a maximum of 20
seconds, after which "8888" will be displayed if there are no continuous DTCs present. If DTCs are
present, the HVAC module - DATC will display the continuous DTCs present. Record all DTCs
displayed.
If any DTCs appear, carry out the diagnostic procedure. Refer to the HVAC MODULE - DUAL
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL DTC CHART and follow the ACTION for each DTC
given.
If a condition exists but no DTCs appear, go to Symptom Chart - Climate Control System condition:
The Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) System is Inoperative, Intermittent or Incorrect
Operation.
To exit and retain all continuous DTCs, press any button except DEFROST. The HVAC module DATC will exit the retrieved continuous DTCs mode and retain all continuous DTCs.
To exit and clear all continuous DTCs, press the DEFROST button. The HVAC module - DATC will exit
the retrieve continuous DTCs mode and all continuous DTCs will be cleared.
Always exit the procedure before powering the system down (system turned OFF).
Continuous DTCs will be deleted after 80 ignition switch ON cycles after the intermittent fault occurs.
HVAC Module Cold Boot Process
The purpose of the cold boot process is to allow the HVAC module to reinitialize. To carry out the cold boot
process, follow the steps below.
NOTE:
HVAC module - DATC only.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clear the DTCs.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Disconnect the HVAC module electrical connectors.
Inspect module connectors for:
corrosion.
pushed-out connectors.
incorrectly seated connector.
5. Wait one minute.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:28 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
6. Connect the HVAC module electrical connectors.
7. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
8. Select any position except OFF on the HVAC module.
The HVAC module will now initialize.
HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) DTC Chart
NOTE:
Some PCM DTCs may inhibit A/C operation. If any PCM DTCs are retrieved,
diagnose those first. Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
HVAC MODULE - DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action to Take
Air Temperature Internal Sensor
B1251
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Circuit Open
Air Temperature Internal Sensor
B1253
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Circuit Short to Ground
Air Temperature External Sensor
B1255
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Circuit Open
Air Temperature External Sensor
B1257
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Circuit Short to Ground
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
If the DTC returns and the DTC is not present in
other modules, MEASURE the voltage between
ground and: HVAC module - dual automatic
temperature control (DATC) C228a-12, circuit
CBP37 (WH) and HVAC module - DATC C228a13, circuit SBP15 (WH/RD).
B1317
Battery Voltage High
B1318
Battery Voltage Low
B1342
ECU is Faulted
If the voltage is less than 16 volts, INSTALL a
new HVAC module - DATC. REFER to
CLIMATE CONTROL article.
If the voltage is greater than 16 volts,
INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC.
REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
If the DTC returns and the DTC is present in other
modules, REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If the
DTC returns, INSTALL a new HVAC module DATC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
B1947
B2014
B226C
B226D
B226E
B2426
B2427
B2795
B2796
B295A
B295B
B295C
B295D
B295E
B295F
Climate Control A/C Post
Evaporator Sensor Circuit Short to
Ground
Climate Control A/C Post
Evaporator Sensor Open Circuit
Left Blend Door Motor Stall
Right Blend Door Motor Stall
Mode Blend Door Motor Stall
Passenger Solar Radiation Sensor
Circuit Open
Passenger Solar Radiation Sensor
Circuit Short to Ground
Driver Solar Radiation Sensor
Circuit Short to Ground
Driver Solar Radiation Sensor
Circuit Open
Driver Blend Door Potentiometer
Feedback Circuit Open
Driver Blend Door Potentiometer
Feedback Circuit Short to Ground
Passenger Blend Door
Potentiometer Feedback Circuit
Open
Passenger Blend Door
Potentiometer Feedback Circuit
Short to Ground
Mode Door Potentiometer
Feedback Circuit Open
Mode Door Potentiometer
Feedback Circuit Short to Ground
U0073
Control Module Communication
Bus A Off
U0140
Lost Communication With Body
Control Module (GEM)
U0155
Lost Communication With
Instrument Panel Cluster Control
Module
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If the
DTC returns, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to
diagnose the network concern.
CLEAR The DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If the
DTC returns, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to
diagnose the lost communication with the smart
junction box (SJB).
CLEAR The DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If the
DTC returns, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to
diagnose the lost communication with the instrument
panel cluster.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
U0246
Lost Communication With Seat
Control Module (DCSM)
U2050
No Application Present
U2051
One or More Calibration Files
Missing/Corrupt
CLEAR The DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If the
DTC returns, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to
diagnose the lost communication with the heated seat
module.
REFLASH the HVAC module - DATC. REFER to
MODULE CONFIGURATION article. If the DTC
returns, INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC.
REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
REFLASH the HVAC module - DATC. REFER to
MODULE CONFIGURATION article. If the DTC
returns, INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC.
REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
Symptom Chart - Climate Control System
Symptom Chart - Climate Control System
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication
with the HVAC module
- dual automatic
temperature control
(DATC)
Air inlet door is
inoperative
Incorrect/erratic
direction of airflow
from outlets
The temperature
control is
inoperative/does not
operate correctly
Fuse(s)
Circuitry open
HVAC module - DATC
communication network
Action
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
Circuitry open/shorted
HVAC module - DATC
HVAC module - electronic
manual temperature
control (EMTC)
Air inlet door
actuator/linkage
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Circuitry short/open
Door actuator
Defrost/panel/floor door
actuator/linkage
LH or RH blend door
actuator/linkage
HVAC module - EMTC or
HVAC module - DATC
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Circuitry open/shorted
Door actuator
LH or RH blend door
actuator/linkage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
The DATC system is
inoperative,
intermittent or incorrect
operation
HVAC module - EMTC or
HVAC module - DATC
Fuse(s)
Circuitry open
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
Low engine coolant level
Engine overheating
Plugged or partially
plugged heater core
Temperature blend door is
binding or stuck
Temperature blend door
actuator
Heater hose is kinked or
binding
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Open fuse
Circuitry short/open
PCM
HVAC module - EMTC or
HVAC module - DATC
A/C compressor
A/C control relay
A/C evaporator
temperature sensor
A/C pressure transducer
Battery junction box (BJB)
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
Circuitry shorted
PCM
HVAC module - EMTC or
HVAC module - DATC
A/C compressor
A/C control relay
A/C evaporator
temperature sensor
A/C pressure transducer
Go to Pinpoint Test K .
Insufficient, erratic or
no heat
The air conditioning
(A/C) is
inoperative/does not
operate correctly
The air conditioning
(A/C) is always on
The blower motor is
Fuse(s)
Circuitry open
A/C blower motor switch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
inoperative - EMTC
The blower motor does
not operate correctly EMTC
The blower motor is
inoperative - DATC
The blower motor does
not operate correctly DATC
The dual temperature
control is
inoperative/does not
operate correctly
The temperature set
point does not repeat
after turning the
ignition switch OFF
The temperature
display will not switch
between Celsius and
Fahrenheit
Blower motor relay
A/C blower motor
HVAC module - EMTC
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
Circuitry open/shorted
A/C blower motor resistor
A/C blower motor switch
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
Fuse(s)
Circuitry open/shorted
Blower motor relay
A/C blower motor
HVAC module - DATC
Blower motor speed
control
Go to Pinpoint Test N .
Circuitry open/shorted
Blower motor speed
control
HVAC module - DATC
A/C blower motor relay
Go to Pinpoint Test O .
CHECK that the A/C system
pressure is above 290 kPa (42
psi). If the pressure is below 290
kPa (42 psi), REFER to
Fluorescent Dye Leak
Detection. CHECK the
temperature blend doors/actuators
for a binding or broken condition.
If no condition is found,
INSTALL a new HVAC module DATC.
CHECK circuit SBP15 (WH/RD)
for a short or open and repair as
necessary. If OK, INSTALL a
new HVAC module - DATC.
If the instrument cluster does not
switch between English and
Metric, REFER to
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER &
PANEL ILLUMINATION
article.
If only the HVAC module DATC does not switch between
Temperature blend
door/actuator
broken/binding
HVAC module - DATC
Low A/C refrigerant
charge
Open fuse
Circuitry short/open
HVAC module - DATC
HVAC module - DATC
Instrument cluster module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
English and Metric, INSTALL a
new HVAC module - DATC.
Inaccurate external
temperature display
HVAC module - DATC
Ambient temperature
sensor
REFER to Description and
Operation of the External
Temperature Display. If the
external temperature display is not
operating as described and no
DTC is present, CARRY OUT the
ambient temperature sensor
component test in this service
information. If the sensor tests
OK, CARRY OUT the HVAC
Module Cold Boot Process. If the
condition returns, INSTALL a
new HVAC module - DATC.
REFER to CLIMATE
CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
NOTE:
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) symptoms will be identified using the
diagnostic tools that are available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of
their uses and a glossary of common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION &
HARSHNESS article. Since it is possible any one of multiple systems may be
the cause of a symptom, it may be necessary to use a process of elimination
type of diagnostic approach to pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the
causal system for the symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article for the next likely system and continue diagnosis.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Noisy A/C compressor
clutch
A/C compressor clutch air
gap
INSTALL a new A/C
compressor. REFER to
CLIMATE CONTROL
article. TEST the system for
normal operation.
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: DTC B1251 or B1253 - Air Temperature Internal Sensor Circuit Open or Short to
Ground
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the in-vehicle air temperature sensor receives a ground from the HVAC module - dual
automatic temperature control (DATC) through circuit RH111 (GY/BU). A 5-volt reference voltage is supplied
to the in-vehicle air temperature sensor from the HVAC module - DATC through circuit VH414 (GN/BU).
DTC B1251 Air Temperature Internal Sensor Circuit Open - The module senses no voltage drop on the
sensor reference voltage circuit, indicating an open circuit.
DTC B1253 Air Temperature Internal Sensor Circuit Short to Ground - The module senses excessive
voltage drop on the sensor reference voltage circuit, indicating a short directly to ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
In-vehicle air temperature sensor
HVAC module - DATC
PINPOINT TEST A: DTC B1251 OR B1253 - AIR TEMPERATURE INTERNAL SENSOR CIRCUIT
OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
A1 CHECK THE SENSOR RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor C233
Carry out the In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor component test in this service information.
Does the in-vehicle temperature sensor test OK?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : INSTALL a new in-car temperature sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST
the system for normal operation.
A2 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE - DATC SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Press the AUTO button.
Fig. 2: Measuring Voltage Between In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor C233-2 & C233-1, Circuit
VH414 (GN/BU) & RH111 (GY/BU)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between in-vehicle temperature sensor C233-2, circuit VH414 (GN/BU),
harness side and C233-1, circuit RH111 (GY/BU), harness side.
Is the voltage between 4.7 and 5.1 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new in-vehicle sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If code
returns, go to A7.
NO : If diagnosing DTC B1251, go to A3.
If diagnosing DTC B1253, go to A5.
A3 CHECK CIRCUIT VH414 (GN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Fig. 3: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-3, Circuit VH414 (GN/BU) &
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor C233-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-3, circuit VH414 (GN/BU),
harness side and in-vehicle temperature sensor C233-2, circuit VH414 (GN/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH414 (GN/BU) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TEST the system for normal operation.
A4 CHECK CIRCUIT RH111 (GY/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-10, Circuit RH111 (GY/BU) &
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor C233-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-10, circuit RH111 (GY/BU),
harness side and in-vehicle temperature sensor C233-1, circuit RH111 (GY/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A7.
NO : REPAIR circuit RH111 (GY/BU) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK CIRCUIT VH414 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO CIRCUIT RH111 (GY/BU)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Fig. 5: Measuring Resistance Between In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor C233-2 & C233-1,
Circuit VH414 (GN/BU) & RH111 (GY/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between in-vehicle temperature sensor C233-2, circuit VH414 (GN/BU),
harness side and C233-1, circuit RH111 (GY/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to A6.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH414 (GN/BU) for a short to circuit RH111 (GY/BU). CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
A6 CHECK CIRCUIT VH414 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-3, Circuit VH414 (GN/BU) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-3, circuit VH414 (GN/BU),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to A7.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH414 (GN/BU) for a short to ground. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selftest. TEST the system for normal operation.
A7 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1255 or B1257 - Air Temperature External Sensor Circuit Open or Short to
Ground
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the ambient air temperature sensor receives a ground from the HVAC module - dual
automatic temperature control (DATC) through circuit RH111 (GY/BU). A 5-volt reference voltage is supplied
to the ambient air temperature sensor from the HVAC module - DATC through circuit VH407 (YE/GN).
DTC B1255 Air Temperature External Sensor Circuit Open - The module senses no voltage drop on the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
sensor reference voltage circuit, indicating an open circuit.
DTC B1257 Air Temperature External Sensor Circuit Short To Ground - The module senses excessive
voltage drop on the sensor reference voltage circuit, indicating a short directly to ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Ambient air temperature sensor
HVAC module - DATC
PINPOINT TEST B: DTC B1255 OR B1257 - AIR TEMPERATURE EXTERNAL SENSOR CIRCUIT
OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
B1 CHECK THE SENSOR RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Ambient Temperature Sensor C198
Carry out the Ambient Temperature Sensor component test in this service information.
Does the ambient temperature sensor test OK?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : INSTALL a new ambient temperature sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TEST the system for normal operation.
B2 CHECK THE HVAC - DATC SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Press the AUTO button.
Fig. 7: Measuring Voltage Between Ambient Temperature Sensor C198-2 & C198-1, Circuit
VH407 (YE/GN) & RH111 (GY/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ambient temperature sensor C198-2, circuit VH407 (YE/GN), harness
side and C198-1, circuit RH111 (GY/BU), harness side.
Is the voltage between 4.7 and 5.1 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new ambient sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If code returns,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
go to B7.
NO : If diagnosing DTC B1255, go to B3.
If diagnosing DTC B1257, go to B5.
B3 CHECK CIRCUIT VH407 (YE/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-2, Circuit VH407 (YE/GN) &
Ambient Temperature Sensor C198-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-2, circuit VH407 (YE/GN), harness
side and ambient temperature sensor C198-2, circuit VH407 (YE/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH407 (YE/GN) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TEST the system for normal operation.
B4 CHECK CIRCUIT RH111 (GY/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 9: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-10, Circuit RH111 (GY/BU) &
Ambient Temperature Sensor C198-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-10, circuit RH111 (GY/BU),
harness side and ambient temperature sensor C198-1, circuit RH111 (GY/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B7.
NO : REPAIR circuit RH111 (GY/BU) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TEST the system for normal operation.
B5 CHECK CIRCUIT VH407 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT TO CIRCUIT RH111 (GY/BU)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance Between Ambient Temperature Sensor C198-2 & C198-1,
Circuit VH407 (YE/GN) & RH111 (GY/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ambient temperature sensor C198-2, circuit VH407 (YE/GN),
harness side and C198-1, circuit RH111 (GY/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH407 (YE/GN) for a short to circuit RH111 (GY/BU). CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
B6 CHECK CIRCUIT VH407 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-2, Circuit VH407 (YE/GN) &
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-2, circuit VH407 (YE/GN), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B7.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH407 (YE/GN) for a short to ground. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selftest. TEST the system for normal operation.
B7 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Pinpoint Test C: DTC B2426, B2427, B2795 or B2796 - Solar Radiation Sensor Circuit Open or Short to
Ground
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the solar radiation sensor receives a ground through circuit GD115 (BK/GY). A 5-volt
reference voltage is supplied to the solar radiation sensor from the HVAC module - dual automatic temperature
control (DATC) through circuit VH417 (YE/OG) (LH) and circuit VH416 (VT/GY) (RH).
DTC
B2426
B2427
B2795
Description
Fault Trigger Conditions
The module senses no voltage drop on
Passenger Solar Radiation Sensor Circuit
the sensor reference voltage circuit,
Open
indicating an open circuit.
The module senses excessive voltage
Passenger Solar Radiation Sensor Circuit drop on the sensor reference voltage
circuit, indicating a short directly to
Short to Ground
ground.
The module senses no voltage drop on
Driver Solar Radiation Sensor Circuit
the sensor reference voltage circuit,
Short to Ground
indicating an open circuit.
The module senses excessive voltage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
B2796
Driver Solar Radiation Sensor Circuit
Open
drop on the sensor reference voltage
circuit, indicating a short directly to
ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Solar radiation sensor
HVAC module - DATC
PINPOINT TEST C: DTC B2426, DTC B2427, DTC B2795 OR DTC B2796 - A/C SOLAR RADIATION
SENSOR OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO GROUND
C1 CHECK THE SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Solar Radiation Sensor C286
Fig. 12: Checking Sensor Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the solar radiation sensor terminals 1 and 4 and terminals 3 and 4.
Is continuity present and the resistance greater than 0 ohm?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : INSTALL a new solar radiation sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the
system for normal operation.
C2 CHECK THE SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Press the AUTO button.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between solar radiation sensor C286-4, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side
and:
DTC B2426 or B2427 , C286-1, circuit VH416 (VT/GY), harness side.
DTC B2795 or B2796 , C286-3, circuit VH417 (YE/OG), harness side.
Are the voltages between 4.7 and 5.1 volts?
YES : Go to C6.
NO : If diagnosing DTC B2426 or B2796, go to C3.
If diagnosing DTC B2427 or B2795, go to C5.
C3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD115 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between solar radiation sensor C286-4, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C4.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD115 (BK/GY) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
C4 CHECK CIRCUIT VH417 (YE/OG) OR VH416 (VT/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-4 & C228A-5, Circuit VH416
(VT/GY) & VH417 (YE/OG)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between:
DTC B2426 , HVAC module - DATC C228a-4, circuit VH416 (VT/GY), harness side and
solar radiation sensor C286-1, circuit VH416 (VT/GY), harness side.
DTC B2796 , HVAC module - DATC C228a-5, circuit VH417 (YE/OG), harness side and
solar radiation sensor C286-3, circuit VH417 (YE/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C6.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH417 (YE/OG) or VH416 (VT/GY) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
C5 CHECK CIRCUIT VH417 (YE/OG) OR VH416 (VT/GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Fig. 16: Checking Circuits For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
DTC B2427 , solar radiation sensor C286-1, circuit VH416 (VT/GY), harness side.
DTC B2795 , solar radiation sensor C286-3, circuit VH417 (YE/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to C6.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH417 (YE/OG) or VH416 (VT/GY) for a short to ground. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
C6 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Pinpoint Test D: DTC B1947 or B2014 - Climate Control A/C Post Evaporator Sensor Circuit Open or
Short to Ground
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the evaporator temperature sensor receives a ground from the HVAC module - dual
automatic temperature control (DATC) through circuit RH111 (GY/BU)/(BK). A 5-volt reference voltage is
supplied to the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor from the HVAC module - DATC through circuit
VH406 (VT/BN)/(LG/BK).
DTC B1947 Climate Control A/C Post Evaporator Sensor Circuit Short To Ground - The module senses
excessive voltage drop on the sensor reference voltage circuit, indicating a short directly to ground.
DTC B2014 Climate Control A/C Post Evaporator Sensor Open Circuit - The module senses no voltage
drop on the sensor reference voltage circuit, indicating an open circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Evaporator temperature sensor
HVAC module - electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) or HVAC module - DATC
PINPOINT TEST D: DTC B1947 OR DTC B2014 - CLIMATE CONTROL A/C POST EVAPORATOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be installed independently of the
heater core and evaporator core housing.
D1 CHECK THE SENSOR RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Evaporator Temperature Sensor C296
Carry out the evaporator temperature sensor component test in this service information.
Is the resistance within the specified values for the temperatures?
YES : Go to D2.
NO : INSTALL a new heater core and evaporator core housing. REFER to CLIMATE
CONTROL article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
D2 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE - DATC SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Press the AUTO button.
Fig. 17: Measuring Voltage Between Evaporator Temperature Sensor C296-2, Circuit
(LG/BK) & C296-1, Circuit (BK)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between evaporator temperature sensor C296-2, circuit (LG/BK), harness side
and C296-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
Is the voltage between 4.7 and 5.1 volts?
YES : Go to D7.
NO : If diagnosing DTC B2826, go to D3.
If diagnosing DTC B2827, go to D5.
D3 CHECK CIRCUIT VH406 (VT/BN)/(LG/BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-6 & C296-2, Circuit VH406
(VT/BN) & (LG/BK)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-6, circuit VH406 (VT/BN), harness
side and evaporator temperature sensor C296-2, circuit (LG/BK), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH406 (VT/BN)/(LG/BK) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
D4 CHECK CIRCUIT RH111 (GY/BU)/(BK) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 19: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-10 & C296-1, Circuit RH111
(GY/BU) & Circuit (BK)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-10, circuit RH111 (GY/BU),
harness side and evaporator temperature sensor C296-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D7.
NO : REPAIR circuit RH111 (GY/BU)/(BK) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selftest. TEST the system for normal operation.
D5 CHECK CIRCUIT VH406 (VT/BN)/(LG/BK) FOR A SHORT TO CIRCUIT RH111 (GY/BU)/
(BK)
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance Between Evaporator Temperature Sensor C296-2 & C296-1,
Circuit (LG/BK) & Circuit (BK)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between evaporator temperature sensor C296-2, circuit (LG/BK), harness
side and C296-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D6.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH406 (VT/BN)/(LG/BK) for a short to circuit RH111 (GY/BU)/(BK).
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
D6 CHECK CIRCUIT VH406 (VT/BN)/(LG/BK) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 21: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-6, Circuit VH406 (VT/BN) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-6, circuit VH406 (VT/BN), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D7.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH406 (VT/BN)/(LG/BK) for a short to ground. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
D7 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern
returns, INSTALL a new heater core and evaporator core housing. REFER to CLIMATE
CONTROL article. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Pinpoint Test E: Air Inlet Door is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Manual Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the HVAC module - electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) or HVAC module
- dual automatic temperature control (DATC) supplies ground to the air inlet door actuator motor through
circuit CH208 (GN/OG)/(GN) to rotate the air inlet door actuator 180 degrees to the outside air position, or
circuit CH207 (BU/GY)/(BN) to rotate the air inlet door actuator 180 degrees to the recirculated air position.
Ignition voltage is supplied to the air inlet door actuator through circuit CBP37 (WH)/(GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Air inlet door actuator
HVAC module - DATC
HVAC module - EMTC
Stuck or damaged linkage or door
PINPOINT TEST E: AIR INLET DOOR IS INOPERATIVE
E1 CHECK THE DOOR ACTUATOR OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a or HVAC Module - EMTC C2357a
Remove the door actuator and disengage the actuator driveshaft from the actuator door.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Mark the door actuator driveshaft position.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 22: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire Between EATC C228A-23 & C2357A-15, Circuit
GD115 (BK/GY) & CH207 (BU/GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
This step positions the actuator for the following steps.
Connect a fused jumper wire between HVAC module - DATC C228a-23 or HVAC module EMTC C2357a-23, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-15 or
HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-15, circuit CH207 (BU/GY), harness side.
Remove the fused jumper wire.
Fig. 23: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire Between EATC C228A-23 & C2357A-16, Circuit
GD115 (BK/GY) & CH208 (GN/OG)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a second fused jumper wire between: HVAC module - DATC C228a-23 or HVAC module
- EMTC C2357a-23, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-16
or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-16, circuit CH208 (GN/OG), harness side.
Remove the fused jumper wire.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 24: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire Between EATC C228A-23 & C2357A-15, Circuit
GD115 (BK/GY) & CH207 (BU/GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper wire between HVAC module - DATC C228a-23 or HVAC module EMTC C2357a-23, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-15 or
HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-15, circuit CH207 (BU/GY), harness side.
Does the actuator motor rotate 180 degrees in the previous steps (360 degrees total)?
YES : INSPECT for binding or broken linkage. If no condition is found, go to E7.
NO : Go to E2.
E2 CHECK THE ACTUATOR MOTOR FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Air Inlet Door Actuator C2363
Key in ON position.
Fig. 25: Measuring Voltage Between Ground & Air Inlet Door Actuator C2363-7, Circuit
(GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and air inlet door actuator C2363-7, circuit (GY), harness
side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR circuit CBP37 (WH)/(GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to E3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
E3 CHECK THE ACTUATOR MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 26: Measuring Resistance Between EATC C228A-15 & C228A-16, Circuit CH207
(BU/GY) & CH208 (GN/OG)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-15 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-15, circuit CH207
(BU/GY), harness side and air inlet door actuator C2363-1, circuit (BN), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-16 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-16, circuit CH208
(GN/OG), harness side and air inlet door actuator C2363-3, circuit (GN), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E4.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH207 (BU/GY)/(BN) or CH208 (GN/OG)/(GN) for an open. TEST the
system for normal operation.
E4 CHECK THE ACTUATOR MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 27: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Air Inlet Door Actuator C2363-1 &
C2363-3, Circuit (BN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and:
air inlet door actuator C2363-1, circuit (BN), harness side.
air inlet door actuator C2363-3, circuit (GN), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E5.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH207 (BU/GY)/(BN) or CH208 (GN/OG)/(GN) for a short to ground.
TEST the system for normal operation.
E5 CHECK THE ACTUATOR MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Fig. 28: Measuring Resistance Between Air Inlet Door Actuator C2363-1 & C2363-3, Circuit
(BN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between air inlet door actuator C2363-1, circuit (BN), harness side and air
inlet door actuator C2363-3, circuit (GN), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E6.
NO : REPAIR circuits CH207 (BU/GY)/(BN) and CH208 (GN/OG)/(GN) for a short together.
TEST the system for normal operation.
E6 CHECK THE ACTUATOR CONNECTION
NOTE:
Clear the DTCs.
Disconnect the actuator connector.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out connectors.
incorrectly seated connector.
Connect and correctly seat the actuator connector.
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
NOTE:
DATC systems only.
DATC systems only.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new actuator. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs.
E7 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
NOTE:
DATC systems only.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC or HVAC module - EMTC. REFER to
CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Pinpoint Test F: Incorrect/Erratic Direction of Airflow From Outlet(s)
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Manual Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, to rotate the blend door actuator, the HVAC module - electronic manual temperature
control (EMTC) or HVAC module - dual automatic temperature control (DATC) supplies voltage to the
actuator motors through the door actuator clockwise circuits, and supplies ground through the door actuator
counterclockwise circuits. To reverse the actuator rotation, the HVAC module - EMTC or HVAC module DATC reverses the voltage and ground circuits.
The actuator feedback resistors are supplied a ground from the HVAC module - EMTC or HVAC module DATC by the door actuator return circuits and a 5-volt reference voltage on the door actuator reference circuits.
The HVAC module - EMTC or HVAC module - DATC reads the voltage on the blend door actuator feedback
circuits to determine the door actuator position, by the position of the actuator feedback resistor wiper arm.
Door Actuator Clockwise Circuits
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
(HVAC module - EMTC) Blend - CH233 (VT/BN)/(OG/BK)
(HVAC module - DATC) LH Blend - CH238 (YE/OG)/(RD/YE)
(HVAC module - DATC) RH Blend - CH213 (BN/GN)/(VT)
Defrost/Panel/Floor - CH228 (YE/GN)/(GY/BK)
Door Actuator Counterclockwise Circuits
(HVAC module - EMTC) Blend - CH234 (YE/GN)/(VT)
(HVAC module - DATC) LH Blend - CH239 (BU/WH)/(WH)
(HVAC module - DATC) RH Blend - CH212 (BU/OG)/(OG/BK)
Defrost/Panel/Floor - CH229 (WH/BU)/(BU)
Door Actuator Return Circuits
(HVAC module - EMTC) Blend - RH111 (GY/BU)/(BK)
(HVAC module - DATC) LH Blend - RH111 (GY/BU)/(BK)
(HVAC module - DATC) RH Blend - RH111 (GY/BU)/(BK)
Defrost/Panel/Floor - RH111 (GY/BU)/(BK)
Door Actuator Reference Circuits
(HVAC module - EMTC) Blend - LH111 (BN/WH)/(OG)
(HVAC module - DATC) LH Blend - LH111 (BN/WH)/(OG)
(HVAC module - DATC) RH Blend - LH111 (BN/WH)/(OG)
Defrost/Panel/Floor - LH111 (BN/WH)/(OG)
Door Actuator Feedback Circuits
(HVAC module - EMTC) Blend - VH439 (GY/VT)/(RD)
(HVAC module - DATC) LH Blend - VH440 (BU/BN)/(YE)
(HVAC module - DATC) RH Blend - VH441 (WH/BN)/(RD)
Defrost/Panel/Floor - VH436 (YE/VT)/(BU/RD)
DTC
Description
B226C
Left Blend Door Motor Stall
B226D
Right Blend Door Motor Stall
B226E
Mode Blend Door Motor Stall
Fault Trigger Conditions
The module senses no change in
actuator feedback voltage when the
actuator motor has been energized.
The module senses no change in
actuator feedback voltage when the
actuator motor has been energized.
The module senses no change in
actuator feedback voltage when the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
B295A
Driver Blend Door Potentiometer Feedback
Circuit Open
B295B
Driver Blend Door Potentiometer Feedback
Circuit short to ground
B295C
Passenger Blend Door Potentiometer
Feedback Circuit Open
B295D
Passenger Blend Door Potentiometer
Feedback Circuit short to ground
B295E
Mode Door Potentiometer Feedback Circuit
Open
B295F
Mode Door Potentiometer Feedback Circuit
short to ground
actuator motor has been energized.
The module senses no voltage drop
on the actuator feedback circuit,
indicating an open or short to
voltage.
The module senses excessive
voltage drop on the actuator
feedback circuit, indicating a short
directly to ground.
The module senses no voltage drop
on the actuator feedback circuit,
indicating an open or short to
voltage.
The module senses excessive
voltage drop on the actuator
feedback circuit, indicating a short
directly to ground.
The module senses no voltage drop
on the actuator feedback circuit,
indicating an open or short to
voltage.
The module senses excessive
voltage drop on the actuator
feedback circuit, indicating a short
directly to ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator
LH blend door actuator
RH blend door actuator
HVAC module - DATC
HVAC module - EMTC
Stuck or bound linkage or door
PINPOINT TEST F: INCORRECT/ERRATIC DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW FROM OUTLET(S)
F1 CHECK THE AIRFLOW
Key in ON position.
Check the air discharge temperature in full COOL and full WARM and airflow in the all modes.
Is the air discharge temperature and airflow correct in each setting?
YES : The system is operating normally.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
NO : For DATC systems:
DTC B226C, go to F2.
DTC B226D, go to F3.
DTC B226E, go to F4.
DTC B295A, B295C or B295E, go to F9.
DTC B295B, B295D or B295F, go to F11.
If the RECIRC button does not change the air inlet door position, go to Pinpoint Test E .
For EMTC systems:
If the airflow is incorrect, follow diagnostics for defrost/panel/floor door actuator. Go to F2.
If the temperature control is inoperative/does not operate correctly, follow diagnostics for the LH
blend door actuator. Go to F2.
If the MAX A/C selection does not change the air inlet door position, go to Pinpoint Test E .
F2 CHECK THE LH BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a or HVAC Module - EMTC C2357a
Fig. 29: Connect A Fused Jumper Wire For 5 Seconds Between EATC Module C228A-13,
Circuit SBP15 (WH/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
This step positions the actuator for the following steps.
Connect a fused jumper wire for 5 seconds between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-13 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-13, circuit SBP15
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
(WH/RD), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-22, circuit CH238 (YE/OG),
harness side or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-22, circuit CH233 (VT/BN), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-23 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-23, circuit GD115
(BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-21, circuit CH239 (BU/WH),
harness side or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-21, circuit CH234 (YE/GN), harness side.
Fig. 30: Connect A Fused Jumper Wire For 5 Seconds Between EATC Module C228A-13,
Circuit SBP15 (WH/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper wire for 5 seconds between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-13 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-13, circuit SBP15
(WH/RD), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-21, circuit CH239 (BU/WH),
harness side or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-21, circuit CH234 (YE/GN), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-23 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-23, circuit GD115
(BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-22, circuit CH238 (YE/OG),
harness side or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-22, circuit CH233 (VT/BN), harness side.
Fig. 31: Connect A Fused Jumper Wire For 5 Seconds Between EATC Module C228A-13,
Circuit SBP15 (WH/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper wire for 5 seconds between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-13 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-13, circuit SBP15
(WH/RD), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-22, circuit CH238 (YE/OG),
harness side or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-22, circuit CH233 (VT/BN), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
HVAC module - DATC C228a-23 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-23, circuit GD115
(BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-21, circuit CH239 (BU/WH),
harness side or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-21, circuit CH234 (YE/GN), harness side.
Does the actuator motor move at least 90 degrees in the clockwise and counterclockwise
direction in the previous steps?
YES : DATC systems, INSPECT for binding or broken linkage. If no condition is found, CARRY
OUT the actuator component test in this service information. If the actuator tests OK, go to F14.
EMTC systems, INSPECT for binding or broken linkage. If no condition is found, CARRY OUT
the actuator component test in this service information. If the actuator tests OK, go to F9.
NO : Go to F5.
F3 CHECK THE RH BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228b
Fig. 32: Connect A Fused Jumper Wire For 5 Seconds Between EATC Module C228A-13,
Circuit SBP15 (WH/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
This step positions the actuator for the following steps.
Connect a fused jumper wire for 5 seconds between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-13, circuit SBP15 (WH/RD), harness side and HVAC
module - DATC C228b-25, circuit CH213 (BN/GN), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-23, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module
- DATC C228b-26, circuit CH212 (BU/OG), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 33: Connect A Fused Jumper Wire For 5 Seconds Between EATC Module C228A-13,
Circuit SBP15 (WH/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper wire for 5 seconds between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-13, circuit SBP15 (WH/RD), harness side and HVAC
module - DATC C228b-26, circuit CH212 (BU/OG), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-23, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module
- DATC C228b-25, circuit CH213 (BN/GN), harness side.
Fig. 34: Connect A Fused Jumper Wire For 5 Seconds Between EATC Module C228A-13,
Circuit SBP15 (WH/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper wire for 5 seconds between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-13, circuit SBP15 (WH/RD), harness side and HVAC
module - DATC C228b-25, circuit CH213 (BN/GN), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-23, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module
- DATC C228b-26, circuit CH212 (BU/OG), harness side.
Does the actuator motor move at least 90 degrees in the clockwise and counterclockwise
direction in the previous steps?
YES : INSPECT for binding or broken linkage. If no condition is found, CARRY OUT the actuator
component test in this service information. If the actuator tests OK, go to F14.
NO : Go to F5.
F4 CHECK THE DEFROST/PANEL/FLOOR DOOR ACTUATOR OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a or HVAC Module - EMTC C2357a
Fig. 35: Connect A Fused Jumper Wire For 5 Seconds Between EATC Module C228A-13,
Circuit SBP15 (WH/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
This step positions the actuator for the following steps.
Connect a fused jumper wire for 5 seconds between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-13 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-13, circuit SBP15
(WH/RD), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-20 or HVAC module - EMTC
C2357a-20, circuit CH228 (YE/GY), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-23 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-23, circuit GD115
(BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-19 or HVAC module - EMTC
C2357a-19, circuit CH229 (WH/BU), harness side.
Fig. 36: Connect A Fused Jumper Wire For 5 Seconds Between EATC Module C228A-13,
Circuit SBP15 (WH/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper wire for 5 seconds between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-13 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-13, circuit SBP15
(WH/RD), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-19 or HVAC module - EMTC
C2357a-19, circuit CH229 (WH/BU), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
HVAC module - DATC C228a-23 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-23, circuit GD115
(BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-20 or HVAC module - EMTC
C2357a-20, circuit CH228 (YE/GY), harness side.
Fig. 37: Connect A Fused Jumper Wire For 5 Seconds Between EATC Module C228A-13,
Circuit SBP15 (WH/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper wire for 5 seconds between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-13 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-13, circuit SBP15
(WH/RD), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-20 or HVAC module - EMTC
C2357a-20, circuit CH228 (YE/GY), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-23 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-23, circuit GD115
(BK/GY), harness side and HVAC module - DATC C228a-19 or HVAC module - EMTC
C2357a-19, circuit CH229 (WH/BU), harness side.
Does the actuator motor move at least 90 degrees in the clockwise and counterclockwise
direction in previous steps?
YES : DATC systems, INSPECT for binding or broken linkage. If no condition is found, CARRY
OUT the actuator component test in this service information. If the actuator tests OK, go to F14.
EMTC systems, INSPECT for binding or broken linkage. If no condition is found, CARRY OUT
the actuator component test in this service information. If the actuator tests OK, go to F9.
NO : Go to F5.
F5 CHECK THE ACTUATOR MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: For DTC B226C or LH Blend Door Actuator, LH Blend Door Actuator C2091
Disconnect: For DTC B226D, RH Blend Door Actuator C2092
Disconnect: For DTC B226E or Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator, LH Defrost/Panel/Floor Door
Actuator C2278
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 38: Measuring Resistance Between EMTC Module C2357A-22 & C2357A-21, Circuit
CH233 (VT/BN) & CH234 (YE/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
For DTC B226C or blend door actuator.
Measure the resistance between:
HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-22, circuit CH233 (VT/BN), harness side and blend door
actuator C2091-7, circuit (OG/BK), harness side.
HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-21, circuit CH234 (YE/GN), harness side and blend door
actuator C2091-6, circuit (VT), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-22, circuit CH238 (YE/OG), harness side and LH blend door
actuator C2091-7, circuit (RD/YE), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-21, circuit CH239 (BU/WH), harness side and LH blend door
actuator C2091-6, circuit (WH), harness side.
Fig. 39: Measuring Resistance Between EMTC Module C228B-25 & C228B-26, Circuit
CH213 (BN/GN) & CH212 (BU/OG)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
For DTC B226D.
Measure the resistance between:
HVAC module - DATC C228b-26, circuit CH212 (BU/OG), harness side and RH blend door
actuator C2092-6, circuit (VT), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
HVAC module - DATC C228b-25, circuit CH213 (BN/GN), harness side and RH blend door
actuator C2092-7, circuit (OG/BK), harness side.
Fig. 40: Measuring Resistance Between EMTC Module C228a-20 & C228a-19, Circuit CH228
(YE/GY) & CH229 (WH/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
For DTC B226E or defrost/panel/floor door actuator.
Measure the resistance between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-20 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-20, circuit CH228
(YE/GY), harness side and defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-7, circuit (GY/BK),
harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-19 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-19, circuit CH229
(WH/BU), harness side and defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-6, circuit (BU), harness
side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
F6 CHECK THE ACTUATOR MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 41: Measuring Resistance Between Ground (EMTC) Blend Door Actuator C2091-7 &
C2091-6, Circuit (OG/BK) & Circuit (VT)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between ground and:
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-7, circuit (OG/BK), harness side.
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-6, circuit (VT), harness side.
DTC B226C , LH blend door actuator C2091-7, circuit (RD/YE), harness side.
DTC B226C , LH blend door actuator C2091-6, circuit (WH), harness side.
DTC B226D , RH blend door actuator C2092-6, circuit (VT), harness side.
DTC B226D , RH blend door actuator C2092-7, circuit (OG/BK), harness side.
DTC B226E or defrost/panel/floor door actuator, defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-7,
circuit (GY/BK), harness side.
DTC B226E or defrost/panel/floor door actuator, defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-6,
circuit (BU), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) for a short to ground. TEST the system for normal operation.
F7 CHECK THE ACTUATOR MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 42: Measuring Voltage Between Ground (EMTC) Blend Door Actuator C2091-7 &
C2091-6, Circuit (OG/BK) & Circuit (VT)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and:
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-7, circuit (OG/BK), harness side.
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-6, circuit (VT), harness side.
DTC B226C , LH blend door actuator C2091-7, circuit (RD/YE), harness side.
DTC B226C , LH blend door actuator C2091-6, circuit (WH), harness side.
DTC B226D , RH blend door actuator C2092-6, circuit (VT), harness side.
DTC B226D , RH blend door actuator C2092-7, circuit (OG/BK), harness side.
DTC B226E or defrost/panel/floor door actuator, defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-7,
circuit (GY/BK), harness side.
DTC B226E or defrost/panel/floor door actuator, defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-6,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
circuit (BU), harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit(s) for a short to power. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to F8.
F8 CHECK THE ACTUATOR MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 43: Measuring Resistance Between (EMTC) LH Blend Door Actuator C2091-7, Circuit
(OG/BK) & Circuit (RD/YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between:
(EMTC) For LH blend door actuator, LH blend door actuator C2091-7, circuit/ (OG/BK),
harness side and LH blend door actuator C2091-6, circuit (VT), harness side.
DTC B226C or LH blend door actuator, LH blend door actuator C2091-7, circuit (RD/YE),
harness side and LH blend door actuator C2091-6, circuit (WH), harness side.
DTC B226D , RH blend door actuator C2092-6, circuit (VT), harness side and RH blend
door actuator C2092-7, circuit (OG/BK), harness side.
DTC B226E or defrost/panel/floor door actuator, defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-7,
circuit (GY/BK), harness side and defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-6, circuit (BU),
harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : CARRY OUT the actuator component test in this service information. If the actuator tests
OK, go to F13.
NO : REPAIR circuit(s) for a short together. TEST the system for normal operation.
F9 CHECK THE ACTUATOR FEEDBACK CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a or HVAC Module - EMTC C2357a
Disconnect: DATC Systems Only, HVAC Module - DATC C228b
Disconnect: LH Blend Door Actuator C2091
Disconnect: DATC Systems Only, RH Blend Door Actuator C2092
Disconnect: Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator C2278
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 44: Measuring Resistance Between EMTC Module C2357A-11 & C2357A-10, Circuit
LH111 (BN/WH) & RH111 (GY/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
For DTC B295A (DATC) or blend door actuator (EMTC).
Measure the resistance between:
HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-11, circuit LH111 (BN/WH), harness side and blend door
actuator C2091-3, circuit (OG), harness side.
HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-10, circuit RH111 (GY/BU), harness side and blend door
actuator C2091-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-7, circuit VH439 (GY/VT), harness side and blend door
actuator C2091-5, circuit (RD), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-11, circuit LH111 (BN/WH), harness side and LH blend door
actuator C2091-3, circuit (OG), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-10, circuit RH111 (GY/BU), harness side and LH blend door
actuator C2091-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-7, circuit VH440 (BU/BN), harness side and LH blend door
actuator C2091-5, circuit (YE), harness side.
Fig. 45: Measuring Resistance Between RH Blend Door Actuator C2092-3, C2092-1 & C20925
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
For DTC B295C.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-11 circuit LH111 (BN/WH), harness side and RH blend door
actuator C2092-3, circuit (OG), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-10 circuit RH111 (GY/BU), harness side and RH blend door
actuator C2092-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
HVAC module - DATC C228b-24 circuit VH441 (WH/BN), harness side and RH blend door
actuator C2092-5, circuit (RD), harness side.
Fig. 46: Measuring Resistance Between Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator C2278-3, C2278-1
& C2278-5
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
For DTC B295E or defrost/panel/floor door actuator.
Measure the resistance between:
HVAC module - DATC C228a-11 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-11, circuit LH111
(BN/WH), harness side and defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-3, circuit (OG), harness
side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-10 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-10, circuit RH111
(GY/BU), harness side and defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-1, circuit (BK), harness
side.
HVAC module - DATC C228a-8 or HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-8, circuit VH436
(YE/VT), harness side and defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-5, circuit (BU/RD),
harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F10.
NO : REPAIR circuit(s) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
F10 CHECK THE ACTUATOR FEEDBACK CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 47: Measuring Voltage Between (EMTC) Blend Door Actuator C2091-3, C2091-1 &
C2091-5
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and:
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-3, circuit (OG), harness side.
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-5, circuit (RD), harness side.
(EMTC) Defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2092-5, circuit (BU/RD), harness side.
DTC B295A , LH blend door actuator C2091-5, circuit (YE), harness side.
DTC B295C , RH blend door actuator C2092-5, circuit (RD), harness side.
DTC B295E defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-5, circuit (BU/RD), harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR circuit(s) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : DATC systems, go to F12.
EMTC systems, go to F11.
F11 CHECK THE ACTUATOR FEEDBACK CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 48: Measuring Resistance Between (EMTC) Blend Door Actuator C2091-3, C2091-1 &
C2091-5
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between ground and:
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-3, circuit (OG), harness side.
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-5, circuit (RD), harness side.
(EMTC) Defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2092-5, circuit (BU/RD), harness side.
DTC B295A , LH blend door actuator C2091-5, circuit (YE), harness side.
DTC B295C , RH blend door actuator C2092-5, circuit (RD), harness side.
DTC B295E defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-5, circuit (BU/RD), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F12.
NO : REPAIR circuit(s) for a short to ground. TEST the system for normal operation.
F12 CHECK THE ACTUATOR FEEDBACK CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 49: Measuring Resistance Between (EMTC) Blend Door Actuator C2091-3 & C2091-5,
Blend Door Actuator C2091-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between:
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-3, circuit (OG), harness side and blend door actuator
C2091-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-5, circuit (RD), harness side and blend door actuator
C2091-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
(EMTC) Blend door actuator C2091-5, circuit (RD), harness side and blend door actuator
C2091-3, circuit (OG), harness side.
(EMTC) Defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-5, circuit (BU/RD), harness side and
defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
(EMTC) Defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-5, circuit (BU/RD), harness side and
defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-3, circuit (OG), harness side.
DTC B295A , LH blend door actuator C2091-5, circuit (YE), harness side and LH blend
door actuator C2091-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
DTC B295A , LH blend door actuator C2091-5, circuit/ (YE), harness side and LH blend
door actuator C2091-3, circuit (OG), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
DTC B295C , RH blend door actuator C2092-5, circuit (RD), harness side and RH blend
door actuator C2092-1, circuit (OG), harness side.
DTC B295C , RH blend door actuator C2092-5, circuit (RD), harness side and RH blend
door actuator C2092-3, circuit (BK), harness side.
DTC B295E , defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-5, circuit (BU/RD), harness side and
defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
DTC B295E or defrost/panel/floor door actuator, defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-5,
circuit (BU/RD), harness side and defrost/panel/floor door actuator C2278-3, circuit (OG),
harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F14.
NO : REPAIR circuit(s) for a short together. TEST the system for normal operation.
F13 CHECK THE ACTUATOR CONNECTION
NOTE:
DATC systems only.
Clear the DTCs.
Disconnect the actuator connector.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out connectors.
incorrectly seated connector.
Connect and correctly seat the actuator connector.
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
NOTE:
DATC systems only.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new actuator. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs.
F14 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
NOTE:
DATC systems only.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC or HVAC module - EMTC. REFER to
CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Pinpoint Test G: DTC: B1318 - Battery Voltage Low
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the HVAC module - dual automatic temperature control (DATC) receives a ground
through circuit GD115 (BK/GY). The HVAC module - DATC is supplied constant battery voltage through
circuit SBP15 (WH/RD) and ignition switched voltage through circuit CBP37 (WH).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
HVAC module - DATC
PINPOINT TEST G: DTC: B1318 - BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
G1 CHECK CIRCUIT GD115 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Fig. 50: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-23, Circuit GD115 (BK/GY) &
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-23, circuit GD115 (BK/GY),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G2.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD115 (BK/GY). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the
system for normal operation.
G2 CHECK CIRCUITS SBP15 (WH/RD) AND CBP37 (WH) FOR AN OPEN
Key in ON position.
Fig. 51: Measuring Voltage Between EATC Module C228A-13 & C228A-12, Circuit SBP15
(WH/RD) & CBP37 (WH)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between HVAC module - DATC C228a-13, circuit SBP15 (WH/RD), harness
side, HVAC module - DATC C228a-12, circuit CBP37 (WH), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose the network
concern.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuses 15 (10A) and 37 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR
circuit SBP15 (WH/RD) or CBP37 (WH) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test H: The DATC System is Inoperative, Intermittent or Incorrect Operation
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the HVAC module - dual automatic temperature control (DATC) receives a ground
through circuit GD115 (BK/GY). The HVAC module - DATC is supplied constant battery voltage through
circuit SBP15 (WH/RD) and ignition switched voltage through circuit CBP37 (WH).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
For a complete explanation of the DATC system functions, refer to Description
and Operation in this service information.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
HVAC module - DATC
PINPOINT TEST H: THE DATC SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE, INTERMITTENT OR INCORRECT
OPERATION
H1 VERIFY AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, press the AUTO button.
Does the indicator above the AUTO button illuminate and the selected temperature for both
the driver and passenger appear in the display window?
YES : Go to H2.
NO : Go to H11.
H2 CARRY OUT THE HVAC MODULE - DATC SELF-TEST
Key in ON position.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control Module (DATC) Self-Test in
this service information. Record the DTCs displayed, if any.
Were any DTCs displayed as a result of the self-test?
YES : REFER to the HVAC MODULE - DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DTC CHART. CARRY OUT the necessary diagnosis and REPAIR as required.
NO : Go to H3.
H3 CHECK THE VACUUM FLUORESCENT DISPLAY
Exit the self-test. Refer to the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control Module
(DATC) Self-Test in this service information. Observe the button indicators and function symbols
displayed on the vacuum fluorescent display while changing the temperature, blower speed and
functions.
Are the display and indicators correct and complete without any missing elements?
YES : Go to H4.
NO : Go to H14.
H4 CHECK THE BLOWER MANUAL OVERRIDE OPERATION
Press the blower motor speed override control fully up and fully down.
Does the blower motor speed increase from low speed to high and high speed to low?
YES : Go to H5.
NO : If the blower motor is inoperative, go to Pinpoint Test N .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
If the blower motor does not operate correctly, go to Pinpoint Test O .
H5 VERIFY THE DEFROST OVERRIDE OPERATION
Press the override button for defrost operation.
Is outside air being discharged from the windshield defroster nozzle and the side window
demisters?
YES : Go to H6.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test F .
H6 VERIFY THE FLOOR OVERRIDE OPERATION
Press the mode override button until floor mode is indicated.
Is outside air being discharged from the floor duct?
YES : Go to H7.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test E .
H7 VERIFY THE PANEL OVERRIDE OPERATION
Press the mode override button until panel mode is indicated.
Is outside air being discharged from the instrument panel registers?
YES : Go to H8.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test F .
H8 VERIFY THAT THE A/C CLUTCH DOES NOT ENGAGE IN THE PANEL MODE
In panel operation and with the A/C OFF, listen for the compressor clutch to engage.
Does the A/C clutch engage with the PANEL override button pressed?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test K .
NO : Go to H9.
H9 VERIFY A/C CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT IN THE A/C MODE
Make sure the ambient air temperature is above 6°C (43°F).
Press the override button for A/C operation.
Does the A/C clutch engage when the A/C override button is pressed?
YES : Go to H10.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test J .
H10 VERIFY THE RECIRC OVERRIDE OPERATION
While in PANEL mode, press the RECIRC override button.
Is recirculated air being discharged from the instrument panel registers?
YES : The test is complete. The system is functioning normally.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test E .
H11 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE - DATC MODULE FUNCTIONS
Press each function button and observe the display.
Does the HVAC module - DATC carry out and display any functions?
YES : Go to H14.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to H12.
H12 CHECK CIRCUIT GD115 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Fig. 52: Measuring Resistance Between EATC Module C228A-23, Circuit GD115 (BK/GY) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - DATC C228a-23, circuit GD115 (BK/GY),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H13.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD115 (BK/GY). TEST the system for normal operation.
H13 CHECK CIRCUITS SBP15 (WH/RD) AND CBP37 (WH) FOR AN OPEN
Key in ON position.
Fig. 53: Measuring Voltage Between EATC Module C228A-13 & C228A-12, Circuit SBP15
(WH/RD) & CBP37 (WH)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between HVAC module - DATC C228a-13, circuit SBP15 (WH/RD), harness
side, HVAC module - DATC C228a-12, circuit CBP37 (WH), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to H14.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuses 15 (10A) and 37 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR
circuit SBP15 (WH/RD) or CBP37 (WH) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TEST the system for normal operation.
H14 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Pinpoint Test I: Insufficient, Erratic or No Heat
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, warm coolant flows from the engine through the heater core and back to the engine.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Plugged heater core
Coolant level
Temperature blend door
PINPOINT TEST I: INSUFFICIENT, ERRATIC OR NO HEAT
I1 CHECK FOR CORRECT ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the engine coolant level when hot and cold.
Is the engine coolant at the correct level (hot/cold) as indicated on the engine coolant recovery
reservoir?
YES : Go to I3.
NO : Go to I2.
I2 CHECK THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
Pressure test the cooling system for leaks. Refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
Does the engine cooling system leak?
YES : REPAIR the engine coolant leak. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to I3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
I3 CHECK FOR COOLANT FLOW TO THE HEATER CORE
Run the engine until it reaches normal operation temperature. Select the FLOOR position on the
control assembly. Set the temperature control to full warm and the blower to the lowest setting.
Fig. 54: Checking Coolant Flow To Heater Core
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Using a suitable thermo-couple temperature measuring device, check the heater core inlet hose to
see if it is hot.
Is the heater core inlet hose hot?
YES : Go to I4.
NO : REFER to ENGINE COOLING article to check cooling system function.
I4 CHECK FOR A PLUGGED OR RESTRICTED HEATER CORE
Fig. 55: Check Plugged Or Restricted Heater Core
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Using a suitable thermo-couple temperature measuring device, measure the heater core outlet hose
temperature.
Is the heater core outlet hose temperature similar to the inlet hose temperature (within
approximately 6-17°C [10-30°F])?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test F and diagnose for a blend door actuator.
NO : INSTALL a new heater core. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test J: The Air Conditioning (A/C) is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Manual Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, when A/C is requested, in the dual automatic temperature control (DATC) system, a
message is sent over the medium-speed controller area network (MS-CAN) bus to the instrument cluster, then
from the instrument cluster through the high-speed controller area network (HS-CAN) bus to the PCM; or in
electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) systems, voltage is sent to the instrument cluster through circuit
CH434 (GY/YE), then a message is sent from the instrument cluster through the HS-CAN bus to the PCM.
Ignition voltage is provided to the A/C clutch relay switch. When the PCM energizes the relay, ignition voltage
is supplied to the A/C clutch through circuit CH401 (VT/WH). Ground is supplied for the A/C clutch through
circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PCM
HVAC module - DATC
HVAC module - EMTC
A/C evaporator discharge temperature sensor
A/C pressure transducer
A/C compressor
A/C control relay
Battery junction box (BJB)
PINPOINT TEST J: THE AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY
CAUTION: It is important to install relays in their correct position in the battery
junction box (BJB). Installing a relay incorrectly may cause wiring shorts
or damage to modules. While carrying out diagnostics on BJB relays, have
only one BJB relay removed at a time. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in damage to the vehicle circuitry or to control modules.
NOTE:
Some PCM DTCs may inhibit A/C operation. If any PCM DTCs are retrieved,
diagnose those first. Refer to Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
NOTE:
When disconnecting and reconnecting the pressure transducer electrical
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
connector, make sure that the connector-locking device is in place and that the
locking device and connector are correctly and fully seated.
NOTE:
Before carrying out the following test, check that the A/C system pressure is
above 290 kPa (42 psi). If the pressure is below 290 kPa (42 psi), refer to
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection.
J1 CHECK THE A/C PRESSURE SENSOR (ACP_PSI) PCM PID
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ACP_PSI PCM PID
With the manifold gauge set connected, compare the pressure readings of the manifold gauge set
and the ACP_PSI PID.
Are the pressure values of the manifold gauge set and the ACP_PSI PID similar?
YES : Go to J2.
NO : INSTALL a new A/C pressure transducer. TEST the system for normal operation.
J2 CHECK THE POST EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT (PEVAP_TMP)
HVAC PID
Allow the vehicle exterior and interior to stabilize to an ambient temperature above 16°C (60°F).
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PEVAP_TMP HVAC PID
Does the PEVAP_TMP HVAC PID read similar to the ambient temperature?
YES : DATC systems, go to J3.
EMTC systems, go to J4.
NO : CARRY OUT the A/C evaporator discharge temperature sensor component test in this service
information. If the sensor tests OK, go to J13. If the sensor does not test OK, INSTALL a new
heater core and evaporator core housing. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
J3 CHECK THE AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH STATUS (CC_AC) HVAC PID WITH THE
A/C ON
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: CC_AC HVAC PID
Press the PANEL and A/C manual override buttons on the HVAC module - DATC.
Does the CC_AC HVAC PID read ON?
YES : Go to J5.
NO : Go to J13.
J4 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE - EMTC A/C SIGNAL WITH THE A/C ON
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Instrument Cluster C220
Key in ON position.
Select PANEL mode and press the A/C button on the HVAC module - EMTC.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 56: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between instrument cluster C220-23, circuit CH434 (GY/YE), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 30 ohms?
YES : Go to J5.
NO : Go to J7.
J5 CHECK THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CYCLING SWITCH (ACCS) PCM PID
WITH THE A/C ON
Key in OFF position.
NOTE:
Connect: Instrument Cluster C220
NOTE:
EMTC systems only.
EMTC systems only.
Key in ON position.
NOTE:
EMTC systems only.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ACCS PCM PID
With the engine running, press the PANEL and A/C manual override buttons on the HVAC module
- DATC or select MAX A/C on the HVAC module - EMTC.
Does the ACCS PCM PID read ON?
YES : Go to J6.
NO : Go to J14.
J6 CHECK THE AIR CONDITIONING CLUTCH (WAC/ACCR) PCM PID WITH THE A/C ON
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: WAC/ACCR PCM PID
Does the WAC/ACCR PCM PID read ON?
YES : Go to J9.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to J14.
J7 CHECK CIRCUIT CH434 (GY/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - EMTC C2357a
Fig. 57: Measuring Resistance Between EMTC Module C2357A-2, Circuit CH434 (GY/YE) &
IC C220-23
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-2, circuit CH434 (GY/YE),
harness side and IC C220-23, circuit CH434 (GY/YE), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to J8.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH434 (GY/YE) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
J8 CHECK CIRCUIT CH434 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 58: Measuring Voltage Between EMTC Module C2357A-2, Circuit CH434 (GY/YE) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between HVAC module - EMTC C2357a-2, circuit CH434 (GY/YE), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to J14.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH434 (GY/YE) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal
operation.
J9 CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT THE A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH FIELD COIL
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: A/C Compressor Clutch Field Coil C100
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, press the PANEL and A/C manual override buttons on the HVAC module
- DATC or select MAX A/C on the HVAC module - EMTC.
Fig. 59: Measuring Voltage Between A/C Compressor Clutch Field Coil C100-1, Circuit
CH401 (VT/WH) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between A/C compressor clutch field coil C100-1, circuit CH401 (VT/WH),
harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to J10.
NO : CARRY OUT the A/C Control Relay Component Test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT
TESTING article. If the relay tests OK, go to J11.
J10 CHECK THE GROUND AT THE A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH FIELD COIL
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 60: Measuring Resistance Between A/C Compressor Clutch Field Coil C100-2, Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
GD120 (BK/GN) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between A/C compressor clutch field coil C100-2, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new A/C compressor. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
J11 CHECK THE RELAY SWITCH FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: A/C Clutch Relay
Key in ON position.
Fig. 61: Measuring Voltage Between A/C Clutch Relay Socket & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between A/C clutch relay socket and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to J12.
NO : VERIFY BJB fuse 35 (10A) is OK. If OK, INSTALL a new BJB. TEST the system for
normal operation.
J12 CHECK CIRCUIT CH401 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 62: Measuring Resistance Between A/C Clutch Relay Socket, Circuit CH401 (VT/WH) &
A/C Compressor Clutch Field Coil C100-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between A/C clutch relay socket, circuit CH401 (VT/WH) and A/C
compressor clutch field coil C100-1, circuit CH401 (VT/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to J14.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH401 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
J13 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
NOTE:
DATC systems only.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC or HVAC module - EMTC. REFER to
CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
J14 CHECK THE PCM MODULE CONNECTION
Check the DTCs.
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
incorrectly seated connector.
Connect and correctly seat all the PCM connectors.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been cause by a loose or
corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test K: The Air Conditioning (A/C) is Always On
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Manual Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, when A/C is requested, in the dual automatic temperature control (DATC) system, a
message is sent over the medium-speed controller area network (MS-CAN) bus to the instrument cluster, then
from the instrument cluster through the high-speed controller area network (HS-CAN) bus to the PCM; or in
electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) systems, voltage is sent to the instrument cluster through circuit
CH434 (GY/YE), then a message is sent from the instrument cluster through the HS-CAN bus to the PCM.
Ignition voltage is provided to the A/C clutch relay switch. When the PCM energizes the relay, ignition voltage
is supplied to the A/C clutch through circuit CH401 (VT/WH). Ground is supplied for the A/C clutch through
circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PCM
HVAC module - DATC
HVAC module - EMTC
A/C evaporator discharge temperature sensor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
A/C pressure transducer
A/C control relay
A/C compressor
PINPOINT TEST K: THE AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) IS ALWAYS ON
NOTE:
When disconnecting and reconnecting the pressure transducer electrical
connector, make sure that the connector-locking device is in place and that the
locking device and connector are correctly and fully seated.
K1 CHECK THE A/C PRESSURE SENSOR (ACP_PSI) PCM PID
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: A/C Pressure PCM PID
With the manifold gauge set connected, compare the pressure readings of the manifold gauge set
and the ACP_PSI PID.
Are the pressure values of the manifold gauge set and the ACP_PSI PCM PID similar?
YES : Go to K2.
NO : INSTALL a new A/C pressure transducer. TEST the system for normal operation.
K2 CHECK THE POST EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT (PEVAP_TMP)
HVAC PID
Allow the vehicle exterior and interior to stabilize to an ambient temperature above 16°C (60°F).
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PEVAP_TMP HVAC PID
Does the PEVAP_TMP HVAC PID read similar to the ambient temperature?
YES : Go to K3.
NO : CARRY OUT the A/C evaporator discharge temperature sensor component test in this service
information. If the sensor tests OK, go to K11. If the sensor does not test OK, INSTALL a new
heater core and evaporator core housing. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
K3 CHECK THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CYCLING SWITCH (ACCS) PCM PID
WITH THE A/C OFF
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ACCS PCM PID
Does the ACCS PCM PID read ON?
YES : DATC systems, go to K4.
EMTC systems, go to K5.
NO : Go to K7.
K4 CHECK THE AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH STATUS (CC_AC) HVAC PID WITH THE
A/C OFF
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: CC_AC HVAC PID
Does the CC_AC HVAC PID read ON?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to K10.
NO : Go to K11.
K5 CHECK HVAC - EMTC A/C REQUEST OUTPUT
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Instrument Cluster (IC) C220
Key in ON position.
Select the OFF position on the HVAC module - EMTC.
Fig. 63: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between IC C220-23, circuit CH434 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K11.
NO : Go to K6.
K6 CHECK CIRCUIT CH434 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - EMTC C2357a
Fig. 64: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between IC C220-23, circuit CH434 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K10.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH434 (GY/YE) for a short to ground. TEST the system for normal
operation.
K7 CHECK THE AIR CONDITIONING CLUTCH (WAC_ACCR) PCM PID WITH THE A/C
OFF
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: WAC_ACCR PCM PID
Does the WAC_ACCR PCM PID read ON?
YES : REFER to Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
NO : Go to K8.
K8 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH FIELD COIL
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: A/C Compressor Clutch Field Coil C100
Key in ON position.
Select the OFF position on the HVAC module - EMTC.
Fig. 65: Measuring Voltage Between A/C Compressor Clutch Field Coil C100-1, Circuit
CH401 (VT/WH) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between A/C compressor clutch field coil C100-1, circuit CH401 (VT/WH),
harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to K9.
NO : INSTALL a new A/C compressor. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
K9 CHECK CIRCUIT CH401 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: A/C Clutch Relay
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:29 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 66: Measuring Voltage Between A/C Compressor Clutch Field Coil C100-1, Circuit
CH401 (VT/WH) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between A/C compressor clutch field coil C100-1, circuit CH401 (VT/WH),
harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : REPAIR circuit CH401 (VT/WH) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : INSTALL a new A/C clutch relay. Check the A/C clutch diode. INSTALL a new diode if
necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
K10 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
NOTE:
DATC systems only.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC or HVAC module - EMTC. REFER to
CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
K11 CHECK THE PCM CONNECTION
Clear the DTCs.
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
incorrectly seated connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Connect and correctly seat all the PCM connectors.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test L: The Blower Motor is Inoperative - EMTC
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Manual Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the blower motor relay coil receives ignition voltage through circuit CBP45 (YE). The
coil receives ground from the HVAC module - electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) through circuit
CH123 (VT/GN) if any function selector position but OFF is selected. Voltage is supplied to the relay switch
contact through circuit CH402 (YE/GN). When the relay coil is energized, voltage is delivered to the blower
motor through circuit CH402 (YE/GN)/(BK). Ground for the blower motor is provided through circuit CH430
(VT/OG)/(BK/RD) from the blower resistor or the blower switch (HI). The blower resistor and blower switch
are grounded through circuit GD116 (BK/VT).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
HVAC module - EMTC
Blower motor
Blower motor relay
Blower motor switch
PINPOINT TEST L: THE BLOWER MOTOR IS INOPERATIVE - EMTC
CAUTION: It is important to install relays in their correct position in the battery
junction box (BJB). Installing a relay incorrectly may cause wiring shorts
or damage to modules. While carrying out diagnostics on BJB relays, have
only one BJB relay removed at a time. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in damage to the vehicle circuitry or to control modules.
L1 CHECK CIRCUIT (BK/RD) FOR GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor C288
Turn the function selector switch to the PANEL position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Turn the blower motor switch to the HI position.
Fig. 67: Measuring Resistance Between A/C Blower Motor C288-2, Circuit (BK/RD) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between A/C blower motor C288-1, circuit (BK/RD), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to L4.
NO : Go to L2.
L2 CHECK CIRCUIT CH430 (VT/OG)/(BK/RD) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Blower Motor Switch C2357b
Fig. 68: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor switch C2357b-2, circuit CH430 (VT/OG), harness
side and blower motor C288-1, circuit (BK/RD), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to L3.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH430 (VT/OG)/(BK/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
L3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 69: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Switch C2357B-3, Circuit GD116
(BK/VT) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor switch C2357b-3, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new blower motor switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD116 (BK/VT) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
L4 CHECK A/C BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT (BK) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 70: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between A/C blower motor connector C288-1, circuit (BK), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new blower motor. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to L5.
L5 CHECK CIRCUIT CH402 (YE/GN)/(BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor Relay
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 71: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Relay Socket, Circuit CH402 (YE/GN)
& Blower Motor C288-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor relay socket, circuit CH402 (YE/GN) and blower
motor C288-1, circuit (BK), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to L6.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH402 (YE/GN)/(BK) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
L6 CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
Connect: Blower Motor C288
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 72: Connecting Fused Jumper Lead Between Blower Motor Relay Socket, Circuit CH402
(YE/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper lead between blower motor relay socket, circuit CH402 (YE/GN) and
circuit CH402 (YE/GN).
Does the blower motor operate?
YES : Go to L7.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 66 (40A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit CH402
(YE/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
L7 CHECK THE RELAY COIL SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 73: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between blower motor relay socket, circuit CBP45 (YE) and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to L8.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 45 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit CBP45 (YE)
for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
L8 CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 74: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between blower motor relay socket, circuit CH123 (VT/GN) and circuit
CBP45 (YE).
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new blower motor relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to L9.
L9 CHECK CIRCUIT CH123 (VT/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC - Module EMTC C2357a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 75: Measuring Resistance Between & Blower Motor Relay Socket, Circuit CH123
(VT/GN) EATC Module C228A-24
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between and blower motor relay socket, circuit CH123 (VT/GN) HVAC
module - EMTC C2357a-24, circuit CH123 (VT/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to L10.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH123 (VT/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
L10 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - EMTC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test M: The Blower Motor Does Not Operate Correctly - EMTC
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Manual Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Under normal operation, the blower motor is provided a ground from the blower resistor through circuit CH430
(VT/OG)/(BK/RD). The resistor gets a ground from circuit GD116 (BK/VT) in the lowest blower setting. In
MED-LO and MED-HI the resistor gets a ground from the blower motor switch through circuit CH428
(GN/WH)/(RD) or CH429 (GY/BN)/(BN), depending on selected speed. In HI, the blower motor is grounded
directly through the blower motor switch from circuit CH430 (VT/OG)/(BK/RD) to circuit GD116 (BK/VT).
The blower switch receives its ground from circuit GD116 (BK/VT)/(GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Blower motor resistor
Blower motor switch
PINPOINT TEST M: THE BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - EMTC
M1 CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Key in ON position.
Turn the function selector switch to the PANEL position.
Select all blower speed positions.
Does the blower motor operate in any position?
YES : If the blower motor does not operate in HI, go to M2.
If the blower motor does not operate in MED-HI, go to M3.
If the blower motor does not operate in MED-LO, go to M4.
If the blower motor does not operate in LO, go to M5.
For all other symptoms, go to M8.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test L .
M2 CHECK CIRCUIT CH430 (VT/OG)/(BK/RD) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor Switch C2357b
Disconnect: Blower Motor C288
Disconnect: Blower Motor Resistor C2185
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 76: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor switch C2357b-2, circuit CH430 (VT/OG), harness
side and blower motor C288-1, circuit (BK/RD), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to M6.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH430 (VT/OG)/(BK/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
M3 CHECK CIRCUIT CH429 (GY/BN)/(BN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor Switch C2357b
Disconnect: Blower Motor Resistor C2185
Fig. 77: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Switch C2357B-1 & C2185-2, Circuit
CH429 (GY/BN) & Circuit (BN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor switch C2357b-1, circuit CH429 (GY/BN), harness
side and blower motor resistor C2185-2, circuit (BN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to M6.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH429 (GY/BN)/(BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
M4 CHECK CIRCUIT CH428 (GN/WH)/(RD) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor Switch C2357b
Disconnect: Blower Motor Resistor C2185
Fig. 78: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Switch C2357B-4 & C2185-3, Circuit
CH428 (GN/WH) & Circuit (RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor switch C2357b-4, circuit CH428 (GN/WH), harness
side and blower motor resistor C2185-3, circuit (RD), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to M6.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH428 (GN/WH)/(RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
M5 CHECK BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR GROUND CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT)/(GN) FOR
AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor Resistor C2185
Fig. 79: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Resistor C2185-1, Circuit GD116
(BK/VT)/(GN) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor resistor C2185-1, circuit GD116 (BK/VT)/(GN),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to M6.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD116 (BK/VT)/(GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
M6 CHECK BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR CIRCUIT (BK/RD) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 80: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Resistor C2185-4, Circuit (BK/RD) &
Blower Motor C288-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor resistor C2185-4, circuit (BK/RD), harness side and
blower motor C288-1, circuit (BK/RD), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : CARRY OUT the blower motor resistor component test in this service information. If the
resistor tests OK, go to M7.
NO : REPAIR circuit (BK/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
M7 CHECK BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 81: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Switch C2357B-3, Circuit GD116
(BK/VT) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor switch C2357b-3, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new blower motor switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD116 (BK/VT) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
M8 CHECK CIRCUITS CH430 (VT/OG)/(BK/RD), CH428 (GN/WH)/(RD) AND CH429 (GY/BN)/
(BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor C288
Disconnect: Blower Motor Switch C2357b
Disconnect: Blower Motor Resistor C2185
Place the blower switch in the lowest setting.
Fig. 82: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Blower Motor Resistor, C2185-3, C2185-2
& C2185-4
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and blower motor resistor:
C2185-3, circuit (RD), harness side.
C2185-2, circuit (BN), harness side.
C2185-4, circuit (BK/RD), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to M9.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
M9 CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR SHORTS TOGETHER
Fig. 83: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Resistor C2185-2, C2185-4 & C2185-4
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between blower motor resistor:
C2185-3, circuit (RD), harness side and C2185-2, circuit (BN), harness side.
C2185-3, circuit (RD), harness side and C2185-4, circuit (BK/RD), harness side.
C2185-2, circuit (BN), harness side and C2185-4, circuit (BK/RD), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new blower motor switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuits. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test N: The Blower Motor is Inoperative - DATC
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the blower motor relay coil receives a ground from the HVAC module - dual
automatic temperature control (DATC) through circuit CH123 (VT/GN). The coil receives ignition voltage
through circuit CBP45 (YE). Voltage is supplied to the relay switch contact through circuit CH402 (YE/GN).
When the relay coil is energized, voltage is delivered to the blower motor control module through circuit
CH402 (YE/GN)/(BK). Ground for the blower motor speed control is provided by circuit GD116 (BK/VT)/
(BK/RD). The HVAC module - DATC provides a blower target speed signal to the blower motor speed control
through circuit VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) to control the blower speed. The actual blower speed signal is provided
to the HVAC module - DATC through circuit CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) from the blower motor speed control.
Ground for the motor is provided through circuit (BU) from the blower motor speed control.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Blower motor relay
Blower motor speed control
HVAC module - DATC
Blower motor
PINPOINT TEST N: THE BLOWER MOTOR IS INOPERATIVE - DATC
CAUTION: It is important to install relays in their correct position in the battery
junction box (BJB). Installing a relay incorrectly may cause wiring shorts
or damage to modules. While carrying out diagnostics on BJB relays, have
only one BJB relay removed at a time. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in damage to the vehicle circuitry or to control modules.
N1 VERIFY THE BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 95
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Press the PANEL button on the HVAC module - DATC. Adjust the blower motor setting to LO and
then to HI.
Is the blower motor inoperative in all settings?
YES : Go to N2.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test O .
N2 CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR SPEED TARGET POSITION (BLWR_T#) HVAC PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: BLWR_T# HVAC PID
Observe the BLWR_T# HVAC PID while increasing and decreasing the blower speed.
Does the BLWR_T# HVAC PID reading change in all speeds between 0% and 100%?
YES : Go to N3.
NO : Go to N16.
N3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE BLOWER MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor C288
Key in ON position.
Fig. 84: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and blower motor C288-2, circuit (BK), harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to N9.
NO : CARRY OUT the blower motor relay component test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT
TESTING article. If the relay tests OK, go to N4.
N4 CHECK THE RELAY SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 96
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 85: Measuring Voltage Between Ground & Blower Motor Relay Socket, Circuit CH402
(YE/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and blower motor relay socket, circuit CH402 (YE/GN).
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to N5.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 66 (40A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit CH402
(YE/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
N5 CHECK THE RELAY COIL SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor Relay
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 97
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 86: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and blower motor relay socket, circuit CBP45 (YE).
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to N6.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 45 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit CBP45 (YE)
for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
N6 CHECK THE HVAC - DATC MODULE OUTPUT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 98
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 87: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between blower motor relay socket, circuit CBP45 (YE) and blower motor
relay socket, circuit CH123 (VT/GN).
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : REPAIR circuit CH402 (YE/GN)/(BK) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to N7.
N7 CHECK CIRCUIT CH123 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 99
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 88: Measuring Voltage Between Ground & Blower Motor Relay Socket, Circuit CH123
(VT/GN) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and blower motor relay socket, circuit CH123 (VT/GN) and
ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR circuit CH123 (VT/GN) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to N8.
N8 CHECK CIRCUIT CH123 (VT/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 100
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 89: Measuring Resistance Between & Blower Motor Relay Socket, Circuit CH123
(VT/GN) EATC Module C228A-24
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between and blower motor relay socket, circuit CH123 (VT/GN) HVAC
module - DATC C228a-24, circuit CH123 (VT/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to N16.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH123 (VT/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
N9 CHECK FOR GROUND TO THE BLOWER MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor C288
Key in ON position.
Select the highest blower speed setting.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 101
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 90: Measuring Voltage Between Blower Motor C288-1 & C288-2, Circuit (BK) & Circuit
(BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between blower motor C288-2, circuit (BK), harness side and blower motor
C288-1, circuit (BU), harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new blower motor. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : Go to N10.
N10 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT)/(BK/RD) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor Speed Control C271
Fig. 91: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Speed Control Module C271-4, Circuit
(BK/RD) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor speed control C271-4, circuit (BK/RD), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to N11.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD116 (BK/VT)/(BK/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
N11 CHECK CIRCUITS VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) AND CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) FOR A SHORT TO
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 102
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
GROUND
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228b
Fig. 92: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Speed Control Module C271-1 &
C271-3
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and:
blower motor speed control C271-1, circuit (RD), harness side.
blower motor speed control C271-3, circuit (BN), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to N12.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) or CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) for a short to ground.
TEST the system for normal operation.
N12 CHECK CIRCUITS (BU), VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) AND CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) FOR A SHORT
TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 93: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and:
blower motor speed control C271-1, circuit (RD), harness side.
blower motor speed control C271-3, circuit (BN), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 103
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
blower motor speed control C271-5, circuit (BU), harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR circuit VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD), CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) or (BU) for a short to
voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to N13.
N13 CHECK CIRCUITS VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) AND CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) FOR A SHORT
TOGETHER
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 94: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Speed Control Module C271-1 &
C271-3, Circuit (RD) & Circuit (BN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor speed control C271-1, circuit (RD), harness side and
blower motor speed control module C271-3, circuit (BN), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to N14.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) or CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) for a short together. TEST
the system for normal operation.
N14 CHECK CIRCUIT (BU) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 95: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor C288-2 & C271-5, Circuit (BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor C288-1, circuit (BU), harness side and blower motor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 104
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
speed control C271-5, circuit (BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to N15.
NO : REPAIR circuit (BU) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
N15 CHECK CIRCUITS VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) AND CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 96: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Speed Control Module C271-1 &
C271-3, EATC Module C228B-16 & C228B-15
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between:
blower motor speed control C271-1, circuit (RD), harness side and HVAC module - DATC
C228b-16, circuit VH101 (WH/VT), harness side.
blower motor speed control C271-3, circuit (BN), harness side and HVAC module - DATC
C228b-15, circuit CH102 (YE/BU), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new blower motor speed control. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
TEST the system for normal operation. If the condition returns, INSTALL a new HVAC module DATC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) or CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) for an open. TEST the
system for normal operation.
N16 CHECK THE MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 105
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Pinpoint Test O: The Blower Motor Does Not Operate Correctly - DATC
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Automatic Climate Control System for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the blower motor relay coil receives a ground from the HVAC module - dual
automatic temperature control (DATC) through circuit CH123 (VT/GN). The coil receives ignition voltage
through circuit CBP45 (YE). Voltage is supplied to the relay switch contact through circuit CH402 (YE/GN)/
(BK). When the relay coil is energized, voltage is delivered to the blower motor speed control through circuit
CH402 (YE/GN)/(BK). Ground for the blower motor speed control is provided by circuit GD116 (BK/VT)/
(BK/RD). The HVAC module - DATC provides a blower target speed signal to the blower motor speed control
through circuit VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) to control the blower speed. The actual blower speed signal is provided
to the HVAC module - DATC through circuit CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) from the blower motor speed control.
Ground for the motor is provided through circuit (BU) from the blower motor speed control.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Blower motor speed control
Blower motor relay
HVAC module - DATC
PINPOINT TEST O: THE BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - HVAC - DATC
CAUTION: It is important to install relays in their correct position in the battery
junction box (BJB). Installing a relay incorrectly may cause wiring shorts
or damage to modules. While carrying out diagnostics on BJB relays, have
only one BJB relay removed at a time. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in damage to the vehicle circuitry or to control modules.
O1 VERIFY THE BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Key in ON position.
Press the panel button on the HVAC module - DATC. Adjust the blower motor setting to LO and
then to HI.
Does the blower motor operate at any setting?
YES : Go to O2.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test N .
O2 CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR SPEED TARGET POSITION (BLWR_T#) HVAC PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: BLWR_T# HVAC PID
Observe the BLWR_T# HVAC PID while increasing and decreasing the blower speed.
Does the BLWR_T# HVAC PID reading change in all speeds between 0% and 100%?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 106
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
YES : If the blower motor is always on, CARRY OUT the blower motor relay component test.
Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING article. If the relay tests OK, go to O7.
All other symptoms, go to O3.
NO : Go to O9.
O3 CHECK CIRCUITS (BU), VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) AND CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) FOR A SHORT
TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Disconnect: Blower Motor Speed Control C271
Disconnect: Blower Motor C288
Key in ON position.
Fig. 97: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and:
blower motor speed control C271-1, circuit (RD), harness side.
blower motor speed control C271-3, circuit (BN), harness side.
blower motor speed control C271-5, circuit (BU), harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR circuit VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD), CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) or (BU) for a short to
voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to O4.
O4 CHECK CIRCUITS (BU) AND CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 107
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 98: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Speed Control Module C271-5 &
C271-3
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and:
blower motor speed control C271-5, circuit (BU), harness side.
blower motor speed control C271-3, circuit (BN), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to O5.
NO : REPAIR circuit (BU) or CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) for a short to ground. TEST the system for
normal operation.
O5 CHECK CIRCUITS VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) AND CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) FOR A SHORT
TOGETHER
Fig. 99: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Speed Control Module C271-1 &
C271-3, Circuit (RD) & Circuit (BN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor speed control C271-1, circuit (RD), harness side and
blower motor speed control C271-3, circuit (BN), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to O6.
NO : REPAIR circuit VH101 (WH/VT)/(RD) or CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) for a short together. TEST
the system for normal operation.
O6 CHECK CIRCUIT CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 108
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 100: Measuring Resistance Between Blower Motor Speed Control Module C271-3 &
C228B-15, Circuit (BN) & CH102 (YE/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between blower motor speed control C271-3, circuit (BN), harness side and
HVAC module - DATC C228b-15, circuit CH102 (YE/BU), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new blower motor speed control. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
TEST the system for normal operation. If the condition returns, INSTALL a new HVAC module DATC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH102 (YE/BU)/(BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
O7 CHECK CIRCUIT CH402 (YE/GN)/(BK) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Blower Motor Relay
Disconnect: Blower Motor C288
Key in ON position.
Fig. 101: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and blower motor C288-2, circuit (BK), harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR circuit CH402 (YE/GN)/(BK) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 109
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to O8.
O8 CHECK CIRCUIT CH123 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - DATC C228a
Fig. 102: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Blower Motor Relay Socket, Circuit
CH123 (VT/GN) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and blower motor relay socket, circuit CH123 (VT/GN)
and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to O9.
NO : REPAIR circuit CH123 (VT/GN) for a short to ground. TEST the system for normal
operation.
O9 CHECK MODULE CONNECTION
Carry out the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process.
Carry out the HVAC Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) On-Demand Self
Test.
Operate the system.
Does the concern return?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module - DATC. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 110
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Component Tests
Temperature Sensor - Evaporator Discharge
Fig. 103: Temperature Sensor - Evaporator Discharge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Ambient Temperature
-10°C (14°F)
-5°C (23°F)
0°C (32°F)
5°C (41°F)
10°C (50°F)
15°C (59°F)
20°C (68°F)
25°C (77°F)
30°C (86°F)
35°C (95°F)
40°C (104°F)
45°C (113°F)
50°C (122°F)
55°C (131°F)
60°C (140°F)
Approximate Resistance
8,255 ohms
6,298 ohms
4,852 ohms
3,773 ohms
2,961 ohms
2,343 ohms
1,869 ohms
1,502 ohms
1,216 ohms
991 ohms
813 ohms
671 ohms
557 ohms
466 ohms
391 ohms
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 111
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 104: In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Ambient Temperature
-10°C (14°F)
-5°C (23°F)
0°C (32°F)
5°C (41°F)
10°C (50°F)
15°C (59°F)
20°C (68°F)
25°C (77°F)
30°C (86°F)
35°C (95°F)
40°C (104°F)
45°C (113°F)
50°C (122°F)
55°C (131°F)
60°C (140°F)
Approximate Resistance
9,683 ohms
7,345 ohms
5,628 ohms
4,354 ohms
3,399 ohms
2,677 ohms
2,125 ohms
1,700 ohms
1,370 ohms
1,112 ohms
909 ohms
747 ohms
618 ohms
514 ohms
430 ohms
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Fig. 105: Ambient Temperature Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 112
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Ambient Temperature
-50°C (-58°F)
-40°C (-40°F)
-30°C (-22°F)
-20°C (-4°F)
-10°C (14°F)
0°C (32°F)
10°C (50°F)
20°C (68°F)
25°C (77°F)
30°C (86°F)
40°C (104°F)
50°C (122°F)
60°C (140°F)
70°C (158°F)
80°C (176°F)
90°C (194°F)
100°C (212°F)
110°C (231°F)
120°C (248°F)
Approximate Resistance
19,336 ohms
10,732 ohms
6,177 ohms
3,672 ohms
2,248 ohms
1,413 ohms
915 ohms
608 ohms
500 ohms
413 ohms
287 ohms
203 ohms
147 ohms
108 ohms
80 ohms
61 ohms
47 ohms
36 ohms
28 ohms
Defrost/Panel/Floor Door and Blend Door Mode Actuator
Fig. 106: Defrost/Panel/Floor Door and Blend Door Mode Actuator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Actuator Pins
3 and 5
1 and 5
1 and 3
Approx. Resistance
1.2K-4.8K ohms
1.2K-4.8K ohms
6K ohms
Blower Motor Resistor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 113
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 107: Blower Motor Resistor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Blower Motor Resistor Pins
4 and 3
4 and 2
4 and 1
Approx. Resistance
0.25-0.29 ohm
0.88-1.02 ohm
2.0-2.30 ohms
Blower Motor Switch - HVAC - Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC)
Fig. 108: Blower Motor Switch - EMTC
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Blower Motor Switch Position
LOW
MED-LO
MED-HI
HI
Continuity Between Pins
None
3 and 4
3 and 1
3 and 2
Heater Core
NOTE:
Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater
cores are good and did not require the installation of a new heater core. If
a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by
following the plugged heater core component test before the heater core
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 114
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater
system thoroughly as follows:
1. Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the
heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core.
NOTE:
Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and
overtightening of non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the heater
hose connection and damage the heater core.
2. Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level.
2. Start the engine and turn on the heater.
3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core inlet and outlet hoses to see
if they are hot.
4. If the outlet only is not hot:
the heater core may have an air pocket.
the heater core may be plugged.
5. If the inlet only is not hot:
the thermostat may not be working correctly.
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test.
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure
testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube.
Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install the 2 plugs BT-7422-B and the adapter BT7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 115
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 109: Heater Core With Adapter & Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core.
Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes.
If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater hoses do
not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test.
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle.
2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core.
3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the
Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Fig. 110: Bench Testing Heater Core
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Evaporator/Condenser Core - On-Vehicle Leak Test
1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 116
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
For evaporator core testing only.
2. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) from the evaporator core.
NOTE:
For condenser core testing only.
3. Disconnect the condenser-to-evaporator line spring lock coupling and the compressor-to-condenser
discharge line middle fitting.
NOTE:
For evaporator core testing only.
4. Connect the appropriate test fitting to the evaporator core TXV connection.
NOTE:
For condenser core testing only.
5. Connect the appropriate test fittings to the condenser-to-evaporator line spring lock coupling, condenser
side and the compressor-to-condenser discharge line middle fitting, condenser side.
NOTE:
The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when
connected to the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off
valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens
when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter that will activate the
valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open.
6. Connect the red and blue hoses from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the test fittings on the evaporator
core or condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
7. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for a
minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45minute evacuation is necessary to remove any refrigerant from oil left in the evaporator core or condenser
core. If the refrigerant is not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and
appear as a refrigerant leak.
8. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the gauge and
manifold set are open and the vacuum pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low
pressure gauge. If the pressure rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting
connections and gauge set connections before installing a new evaporator core or condenser core.
9. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump. Observe the low
pressure gauge; it should remain at the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark.
If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the evaporator core or
condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 117
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
NOTE:
For evaporator core testing only.
10. If the evaporator core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new evaporator core.
NOTE:
For condenser core testing only.
11. If the test indicates a leak, as verified by the above procedure, inspect and install new O-rings at the
condenser line fittings as necessary. Retest the system. If the test again indicates a leak, install a new
condenser core.
A/C Compressor - External Leak Test
1. Disconnect the evaporator outlet line spring lock coupling and the compressor-to-condenser discharge
line middle fitting.
2. Connect the appropriate test fittings to the evaporator outlet line spring lock coupling, compressor side
and the compressor-to-condenser discharge line middle fitting, compressor side.
3. Connect the high and low pressure lines of a manifold gauge set or a refrigerant recovery/recycling
station such as the R-134a A/C service center to the corresponding fittings on the A/C Pressure Test
Adapter.
4. Attach the center hose of a manifold gauge set to a refrigerant container standing in an upright position.
5. Open the low pressure gauge valve, the high pressure gauge valve and the valve on the refrigerant
container to allow the refrigerant vapor to flow into the A/C compressor.
6. Using the Refrigerant Leak Detector, check for external compressor leaks.
7. If an external leak is found, inspect and install new as necessary the O-rings at the compressor line
fittings. Retest the system. If the test again indicates a leak, install a new compressor.
8. When the leak test is complete, recover the refrigerant from the compressor.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM TESTS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
R-134a Refrigerant Center
Tool Number
176-00002 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 118
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
R-134a Refrigerant Center
023-00174 or equivalent
R-134a Manifold Gauge Set
023-00047 or equivalent
Procedure 1 - Ambient Temperature at or Below 38°C (100°F)
NOTE:
The system performance can be evaluated and diagnosed by analysis of the
compressor suction and discharge pressures. The following procedure is used
to determine if the system is operating at normal pressures.
NOTE:
The procedure varies depending on the ambient (shop) temperature. If the
ambient temperature is 38°C (100°F) or lower, follow Procedure 1. If the ambient
temperature is over 38°C (100°F), follow Procedure 2.
NOTE:
If the A/C compressor cycles at any time during this test, refer to the diagnostic
table.
1. Drive the vehicle or run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
2. Connect a manifold gauge set or refrigerant service center with high-pressure and low-pressure gauges to
the refrigerant system.
3. Set the climate controls.
If equipped with manual climate control, set the A/C controls for normal A/C-PANEL mode, full
COOL temperature, FRESH air, HI blower. If the vehicle has a fresh air/recirc button, set it to
FRESH. If the vehicle has an A/C switch or compressor on switch, set it to A/C ON.
If equipped with electronic automatic temperature control (EATC), set temperature to 15°C (60°F)
(lowest possible temp setting) with the dual function disabled (if equipped). Manually set blower
on HI. If the vehicle has a fresh air/recirc button, set it to FRESH. If the vehicle has an A/C switch
or compressor on switch, set it to A/C ON.
4. Open all vehicle windows and leave the hood open for the test. Open the rear doors.
5. Confirm the compressor clutch is engaged and the engine cooling fan(s) are operating or engaged. Allow
the vehicle to idle until the suction (low-side) and discharge (high-side) pressures are stable or fluctuate in
a range that repeats.
6. Record the ambient (shop) temperature.
7. Record the discharge pressure. If the pressure is fluctuating, record the average value.
8. Determine if the discharge pressure falls within the normal operating limits using the Normal Refrigerant
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 119
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Discharge Pressures chart.
Fig. 111: Normal Refrigerant Discharge Pressures Chart - Relative Humidity 30-60%
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Record the suction pressure. If the pressure is fluctuating, record the average value.
10. Determine if the suction pressure falls between normal operating limits using the Normal Refrigerant
Suction Pressures chart.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 120
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 112: Normal Refrigerant Suction Pressures Chart - Relative Humidity 30-60%
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Proceed to the diagnostic table.
Procedure 2 - Ambient Temperature Above 38°C (100°F)
NOTE:
The system performance can be evaluated and diagnosed by analysis of the
compressor suction and discharge pressures. The following procedure is used
to determine if the system is operating at normal pressures.
NOTE:
The procedure varies depending on the ambient (shop) temperature. If the
ambient temperature is 38°C (100°F) or lower, follow Procedure 1. If the ambient
temperature is over 38°C (100°F), follow Procedure 2.
1. Drive the vehicle or run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
2. Connect a manifold gauge set or refrigerant service center with high-pressure and low-pressure gauges to
the refrigerant system.
3. Set the climate controls.
If equipped with manual climate control, set the A/C controls for normal A/C-PANEL mode, full
COOL temperature, FRESH air, MED LO blower. If the vehicle has a fresh air/recirc button, set it
to FRESH. If the vehicle has an A/C switch or compressor on switch, set it to A/C ON.
If equipped with EATC, set temperature to 15°C (60°F) (lowest possible temp setting). Manually
set blower to MED LO (3 to 4 bars). If the vehicle has a fresh air/recirc button, set it to FRESH. If
the vehicle has an A/C switch or compressor on switch, set it to A/C ON.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 121
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
4. Open all vehicle windows and leave the hood open for the test. Open the rear hatch and/or rear doors (if
equipped).
5. Confirm the compressor clutch is engaged and the engine cooling fan(s) are operating or engaged. Allow
the vehicle to idle until the suction (low-side) and discharge (high-side) pressures are stable or fluctuate in
a range that repeats.
6. Record the ambient (shop) temperature.
7. Record the discharge pressure. If the pressure is fluctuating, record the average value.
8. Determine if the discharge pressure falls within the normal operating limits using the Normal Refrigerant
Discharge Pressures chart.
Fig. 113: Normal Refrigerant Discharge Pressures Chart - Relative Humidity 10-40%
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Record the suction pressure. If the pressure is fluctuating, record the average value.
10. Determine if the suction pressure falls between normal operating limits using the Normal Refrigerant
Suction Pressures chart.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 122
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 114: Normal Refrigerant Suction Pressures Chart - Relative Humidity 10-40%
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Proceed to the diagnostic table.
Diagnostic Table
NOTE:
The following table is used to guide diagnosis of the refrigerant system if
operating pressures are outside normal limits.
1. Refer to the chart below.
High
Low
Component
(Discharge) (Suction)
- Causes
Pressure Pressure
High or
Condenser Clutch
High inadequate
Cycling
airflow.
Normal Engine High
to High overheating.
Refrigerant
Normal to
overcharge Normal
High
air in
refrigerant.
A/C suction
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 123
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
line Normal partially
to High restricted or
pluggeda .
Low
refrigerant
charge, A/C
suction line partially
Low or restricted or
Normal to
Clutch
b
Low
Cycling plugged
A/C cycling
switch sticking
closed (if
equipped).
Evaporator
discharge air
temperature
sensor or
A/C pressure
transducer poor
connection
at A/C clutch
connector.
A/C
electrical
Erratic Operation or
Compressor Not
circuit
erratic - see
Running
A/C
Electrical
Circuit
Wiring
Diagram.
Refer to
appropriate
SYSTEM
WIRING
DIAGRAMS
article.
Compressor
Normal to
High - low
Low
performance.
Normal to
Low
Additional Possible Cause
Components Associated With
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 124
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Inadequate Compressor
Operation
Compressor Drive Belt loose
Compressor Clutch - slipping
Clutch Coil Open - shorted,
or loose mounting
Control Assembly Switch dirty contacts or sticking
open
Clutch Wiring Circuit - high
resistance, open or blown
fuse
Compressor Operation
Interrupted by Engine
Computer
Additional Possible Cause
Components Associated With a
Damaged Compressor
Incorrect Clutch Air-gap
Refrigerant Leaks
a Low pressure reading will be normal to high if pressure is taken at accumulator and if restriction is
downstream of service access valve.
b Low pressure reading will be low if pressure is taken near the compressor and restriction is upstream of
service access valve.
FLUORESCENT DYE LEAK DETECTION
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Cordless/Rechargable True UV LED Light
023-00182 or equivalent
ES
R-134a Leak Detection Dye
164-R6060
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 125
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set
219-00069 or equivalent
R-134a Manifold Gauge Set
023-00047 or equivalent
R-134a Refrigerant Center
023-00174 or equivalent
R-134a Refrigerant Center
176-00002 or equivalent
Fluorescent Dye Detection
NOTE:
Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a fluorescent dye
installed in the refrigerant system from the factory. The location of leaks can be
pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the fluorescent dye under a UV
lamp. Since more than one leak can exist, make sure to inspect each
component, line and fitting in the refrigerant system for a leak.
1. Check for leaks using a Rotunda-approved UV lamp.
Inspect all components, lines and fittings of the refrigerant system.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
3. Repair the refrigerant system leak(s).
4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
5. After the leak(s) is/are repaired, remove any traces of fluorescent dye with a general purpose oil solvent.
6. Verify the repair by running the vehicle for a short period of time and rechecking the area of the leak with
a Rotunda-approved UV lamp.
Fluorescent Dye Injection - Using an R-134a Refrigerant Management Center and Dye/Lubricant Injector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 126
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Fluorescent refrigerant system dye is added to the refrigerant system at the
factory to assist in refrigerant system leak diagnosis using a Rotunda-approved
ultraviolet blacklight. It is not necessary to add additional dye to the refrigerant
system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of refrigerant has
been removed from the system. Additional refrigerant system dye should only
be added if more than 50% of the refrigerant system lubricant capacity has been
lost due to a fitting separation, hose rupture or other damage.
NOTE:
Before using the dye/lubricant injector from the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector
Kit-Set for the first time, refer to the manufacturer's instructions on evacuation
of any non-condensable gases from the hoses.
NOTE:
Only connect the dye/lubricant injector when fluorescent dye is to be injected.
The injector has a one-way check valve that will prevent refrigerant system
recovery and evacuation.
NOTE:
Refrigerant system pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C
(75°F) with the engine off.
1. Connect an R-134a Refrigerant Center or a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the refrigerant system service
port valves.
NOTE:
The dye/lubricant injector is included as part of the 219-00069 R-134a
Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set.
2. Verify that the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed.
Fig. 115: Verifying Valves On Dye/Lubricant Injector Are Closed
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Fill the fluorescent dye injector reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 oz) of fluorescent dye.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 127
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 116: Filling Fluorescent Dye Injector Reservoir With 7 ml (0.25 oz.) Of Fluorescent Dye
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-pressure service gauge port valve and the R-134a
Refrigerant Center or R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
5. Open all valves and inject the fluorescent dye into the refrigerant system.
6. When fluorescent dye injection is complete, close all valves.
7. Recover the refrigerant from the dye/lubricant injector.
8. Remove the dye/lubricant injector from the low-pressure service gauge port valve and the R-134a
Refrigerant Center or R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
Fluorescent Dye Injection - Using an R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set
NOTE:
Fluorescent refrigerant system dye is added to the refrigerant system at the
factory to assist in refrigerant system leak diagnosis using a Rotunda-approved
ultraviolet blacklight. It is not necessary to add additional dye to the refrigerant
system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of refrigerant has
been removed from the system. Additional refrigerant system dye should only
be added if more than 50% of the refrigerant system lubricant capacity has been
lost due to a fitting separation, hose rupture or other damage.
NOTE:
Before using the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set for the first time, refer to
the equipment manufacturer's instructions on evacuation of non-condensable
gases from the hoses.
NOTE:
Refrigerant system pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C
(75°F).
1. Verify that the valves on the deluxe injector loop kit are closed.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 128
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 117: Verifying Valves On Dye/Lubricant Injector Are Closed
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Fill the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 oz) of fluorescent dye.
Fig. 118: Filling Fluorescent Dye Injector Reservoir With 7 ml (0.25 oz.) Of Fluorescent Dye
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set between the high-pressure and low-pressure service
gauge port valves.
NOTE:
Make sure all tools and hoses are clear of the engine cooling fan and drive
belt before starting the engine.
4. Start the engine.
5. Open the high-pressure service valve.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 129
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 119: Installing R-134A Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set Between High-Pressure & Low-Pressure
Service Gauge Port Valves
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Open all valves and inject the fluorescent dye into the refrigerant system.
Fig. 120: Opening All Valves & Inject Fluorescent Dye Into Refrigerant System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Close the high-pressure service valve to allow the pressure inside the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector KitSet to equalize with the suction side of the refrigerant system.
Fig. 121: Identifying High-Pressure Service Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Close the valves on the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set while the A/C
compressor is operating.
8. Close the valves on the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 130
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 122: Closing Valves On R-134A Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Leave all valves on the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set closed when
not in use.
9. Disconnect the high-pressure and low-pressure service valves and remove the R-134a Loop/Add On
Injector Kit-Set from the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTION
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Heated Pentode Halogen Leak
Detector
023-00178 or equivalent
NOTE:
Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to
be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the
Heated Pentode Halogen Leak Detector will indicate this gas all the time. Odors
from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner or other
cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. Using a fan to ventilate the area
to be tested before proceeding with the leak detection procedure is helpful in
removing small traces of contamination from the air, but the fan should be
turned off during actual testing.
NOTE:
R-134a is heavier than air, and will tend to move downward from the source of
the leak if present. It is possible that a leak may not be detected if the leak
detector tip is held above the leaking fitting, line or component. Always be sure
to thoroughly leak test below the fitting, line or component for the presence of
R-134a as well as leak testing above and around.
NOTE:
The system pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 131
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
(75°F) with the engine off.
1. Leak test the refrigerant system using the leak detector. Follow the instructions included with the leak
detector for handling and operation techniques.
Fig. 123: Leak Test Refrigerant System Using Leak Detector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
Repair the system.
Test the system for normal operation.
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) SYSTEM RECOVERY, EVACUATION AND CHARGING
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
1.2 CFM Vacuum Pump
023-00162 or equivalent
4.0 CFM Vacuum Pump
023-00163 or equivalent
Automatic Refrigerant Charging
Meter
023-00155 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 132
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
R-134a Manifold Gauge Set
023-00047 or equivalent
R-134a Refrigerant Management
023-00181 or equivalent
Machine (SAE J-2788 Compliant)
R-134a Refrigerant Management
199-00067 or equivalent
Machine (SAE J-2788 Compliant)
R-134a Refrigerant Management
265-00012 or equivalent
Machine (SAE J-2788 Compliant)
Material
Item
Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
WSH-M1C231-B
YN-12-D
Refrigerant System Recovery
NOTE:
An air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery
of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant
at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer
the customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the
customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment
that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All
contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all
equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer procedures and instructions.
NOTE:
Ford Motor Company recommends use of an R-134a Refrigerant Management
Machine to carry out recovery. If an R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is
not available, refrigerant system recovery may be accomplished using a
separate recovery station.
NOTE:
Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 133
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's
refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service
equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer to
Refrigerant Identification Testing.
2. Connect an R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service gauge port
valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the equipment
manufacturer. Note the amount of oil removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same
amount back into the system once repairs are complete.
4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Center has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF the power supply.
5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the vacuum is not
lost, disconnect the recovery equipment.
6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for 2
minutes.
7. Carry out the required repairs.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using an R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE:
Ford Motor Company recommends use of an R-134a Refrigerant Management
Machine to carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant
system. If an R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available,
evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump and R-134a
Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE:
Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a
leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's
refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service
equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
1. Connect an R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service gauge port
valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer.
2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as
close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45
minutes.
3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system
vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the
system again.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using an R-134a Manifold Gauge Set
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 134
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Ford Motor Company recommends use of an R-134a Refrigerant Management
Machine to carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If an R-134a
Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system
evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump and R-134a
Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE:
Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a
leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's
refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service
equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port valves.
2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the Vacuum
Pump.
3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves.
4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa
(29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum
Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service gauge port
valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump.
6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is
not held for 5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Charging Using an R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE:
Ford Motor Company recommends use of an R-134a Refrigerant Management
Machine to carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If an R-134a Refrigerant
Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system charging may be
accomplished using a separate Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE:
Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a
leak that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant
system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment,
hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional information,
refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Connect an R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service gauge port
valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions provided
by the equipment manufacturer.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 135
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Refrigerant System Charging Using an R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant Charging Motor
NOTE:
Ford Motor Company recommends use of an R-134a Refrigerant Management
Machine to carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If an R-134a Refrigerant
Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system charging may be
accomplished using a separate Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE:
Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a
leak that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant
system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment,
hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional information,
refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a supply
tank following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating instructions.
3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating
instructions.
4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select MAX A/C
operation and allow the refrigerant charge to complete.
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) SYSTEM FLUSHING
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
A/C Flush Adapter Kit
219-00074 or equivalent
A/C Flush and Purge Fitting Kit
219-00024 or equivalent
A/C Flush and Purge Machine
219-00022 (part of 219-00023) or
equivalent
Material
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:30 AM
Page 136
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Item
Specification
A/C System Flushing Solvent
YN-23
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
WSH-M1C231-B
YN-12-D
WARNING: Take the following precautions when repairing an air conditioning system
containing R-134a:
Always wear safety goggles.
Avoid contact with liquid refrigerant R-134a. R-134a vaporizes at
approximately -25°C (-13°F) under atmospheric pressure and will
freeze skin tissue.
Never allow refrigerant R-134a gas to escape in quantity in an
occupied space. It will displace the oxygen needed to support life.
Never use a torch in an atmosphere containing R-134a gas. R-134a is
non-toxic at all normal conditions, but it decomposes when exposed
to high temperatures such as a torch flame. During decomposition it
releases irritating and toxic gasses (as described in the MSDS sheet
from the manufacturer). Decomposition products are hydrofluoric
acid, carbon dioxide and water.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: An air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the
recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's
bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is
contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried out the
last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the
A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated
A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as
hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer
procedures and instructions.
CAUTION: Receiver/drier desiccant bag, thermostatic expansion valve (TXV), and
hoses with mufflers should be removed when flushing the air conditioning
(A/C) system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to
correctly remove any residual-flushing agent. These components are
typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses without
mufflers can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign
material. The 3.785L (1 gal) of A/C System Flushing Solvent YN-23 and
FL1-A filter used in A/C Flush and Purge Machine 219-00022 are intended
for use on one vehicle only. They may be used to flush both the A/C
condenser core and the A/C evaporator core on an individual vehicle, but
under no circumstances should they be used on more than one vehicle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 137
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Only the A/C Flush and Purge Machine 219-00022 and A/C Systems
Flushing Solvent, is approved for use on Ford vehicles. No other flushing
device or solvent is approved for flushing heat exchangers (air
conditioning [A/C] condenser, A/C evaporator). Use of any other flusher or
solvent may cause damage to the A/C system and the flushing unit.
NOTE:
Prior to using the A/C Flush and Purge Machine 219-00022 for the first time,
review the operating instructions.
NOTE:
Ford Motor Company has approved a procedure to provide technicians with a
non-CFC method of flushing contaminated A/C system heat exchangers. The
procedure allows the specific components to be cleaned and flushed. The types
of contamination flushed include particle matter that results from A/C
compressor or desiccant failure and gummy residue that can form when
refrigerant oil is overheated during A/C compressor seizure. The flushing
process is a 2-step procedure that involves the use of an A/C Flush and Purge
Machine 219-00022 to:
circulate the flushing solvent through the heat exchanger in the reverse
direction of normal refrigerant flow (back-flushing). Particulate matter
picked up during flushing is filtered from the returning solvent before the
solvent is returned to the reservoir for continued circulation.
remove the flushing solvent from the heat exchanger. In this step of the
procedure, pressurized air 621-862 kPa (90-125 psi) is used to push and
evaporate any remaining flush solvent from the heat exchanger.
1. Remove the desiccant bag. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
2. Disconnect the compressor-to-condenser discharge line middle fitting and remove the condenser-side
condenser-to-evaporator line.
3. Disconnect the condenser-to-evaporator line spring lock coupling.
4. Remove the condenser-to-evaporator line bracket bolt and remove the condenser side condenser-toevaporator line.
5. With the condenser and lines out of the vehicle, reconnect the A/C lines to the condenser inlet and outlet
fittings.
6. Connect the A/C Flush and Purge Machine to the A/C line fittings using the correct adapters from the
A/C Flush and Purge Fitting Kit.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 138
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Fig. 124: Identifying A/C line fittings
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The condenser core must be flushed with the desiccant bag removed. Do
not install a new desiccant bag at this time.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
With the desiccant bag removed, reinstall the receiver/drier plug into the condenser core.
Flush the condenser core for a minimum of 30 minutes.
Turn the A/C Flush and Purge machine to the PURGE mode and run for a minimum of 20 minutes.
Disconnect the A/C Flush and Purge machine and adapters from the condenser core.
Disconnect the A/C lines from the condenser core.
Install the condenser-to-evaporator line and the condenser-to-evaporator line bracket bolt.
Connect the condenser-to-evaporator line spring lock coupling.
Install the compressor-to-condenser discharge line and connect the compressor-to-condenser discharge
line middle fitting.
15. Remove the receiver/drier plug.
NOTE:
Do not charge the refrigerant system after the condenser core is installed.
16. Install a new desiccant bag and reinstall the condenser core. For additional information, refer to
CLIMATE CONTROL article.
17. Remove the front thermostatic expansion valve (TXV). For additional information, refer to CLIMATE
CONTROL article.
18. Connect the A/C Flush and Purge Machine to the evaporator core fitting using the correct adapter from
the A/C Flush Adapter Kit.
19. Flush the evaporator core for a minimum of 20 minutes.
20. Turn the A/C Flush and Purge Machine to the PURGE mode and run for a minimum of 20 minutes.
21. Disconnect the A/C Flush and Purge Machine and adapter from the evaporator core fitting.
22. Install a new front TXV. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
NOTE:
It is necessary to evacuate the refrigerant system for a minimum of one
hour to evaporate any trace amounts of flush solvent that may remain in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 139
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
the system.
23. Evacuate the refrigerant system for one hour. For additional information, refer toAir Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
24. If a new A/C compressor is not to be installed, lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of
clean PAG oil. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding.
25. If a new A/C compressor is not to be installed, evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For
additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM FILTERING FOLLOWING AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) COMPRESSOR
INSTALLATION
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
A/C Flush and Purge Fitting Kit
219-00024 or equivalent
CAUTION: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure,
a new thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) and any hoses containing
mufflers must be installed prior to filtering the air conditioning (A/C)
system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to
correctly remove any foreign material/debris. These components are
typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses without
mufflers can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign
material. The F8VZ-19E773-AB filter is intended for use on one vehicle
only.
1. Remove the desiccant bag. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
NOTE:
The refrigerant system must be filtered with the desiccant bag removed.
Do not install a new desiccant bag at this time.
2. With the desiccant bag removed, reinstall the receiver/drier plug into the condenser core.
NOTE:
Do not install the front bumper cover or evacuate and charge the
refrigerant system at this time.
3. Install the condenser core back into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE
CONTROL article.
4. Disconnect the condenser-to-evaporator line spring lock coupling.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 140
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Discard the O-ring seals.
NOTE:
Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating.
NOTE:
Orient the filter inlet toward the A/C condenser core.
5. Using the correct adapters from the A/C Flush and Purge Fitting Kit and suitable A/C service hoses,
install the pancake filter between the two halves of the condenser-to-evaporator line spring lock coupling.
6. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional information,
refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding.
7. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
8. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Start the engine and allow it
to idle briefly. Select A/C operation and set the blower speed to HI. Verify that the A/C is operating
correctly.
9. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 RPM by running it at lower RPM for short periods (first at 800
RPM, then at 1,000 RPM). Set the engine at 1,200 RPM and run it for one hour with the A/C system
operating.
10. Stop the engine.
11. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,
Evacuation and Charging.
12. Remove the pancake filter, hoses and adapters from the vehicle.
13. Install new O-ring seals and connect the condenser-to-evaporator line spring lock coupling.
14. Remove the condenser core. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
15. Remove the receiver/drier plug and install a new desiccant bag.
NOTE:
Lubricate the receiver/drier plug O-ring seal using residual PAG oil from
inside the integrated receiver/drier.
16. Install the new receiver/drier plug included in the desiccant bag service kit.
17. Install the condenser core. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL article.
18. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
REFRIGERANT OIL ADDING
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Dye/Lubricant Injector
Tool Number
164-R0775
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 141
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Add-On Module Kit
219-00069
Material
Item
Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
WSH-M1C231-B
YN-12-D
Refrigerant Oil Adding
CAUTION: During normal air conditioning (A/C) operation, oil is circulated through
the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each
component. If certain components of the system are removed, some of the
refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil
charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the
system with the new part.
1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation.
PAG Oil Method of
Amount Adding
Add
directly to
See
A/C
A/C
heading
Compressor
compressor
below
before
installation
60 ml (2
fl oz)
Inject to
added to
low-side
Receiver/Drier the
service
Desiccant
amount
port during
Cartridge
collected
system
during
charging
refrigerant
recovery
Component
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 142
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Add
45 ml (1.5 directly to
fl oz)
evaporator
added to core inlet
the
tube or
Evaporator
amount inject to
Core
collected low-side
during
service
refrigerant port during
recovery system
charging
Add
60 ml (2
directly to
fl oz)
condenser
added to
core inlet
the
or inject to
Condenser
amount
Core
low-side
collected
service
during
port during
refrigerant
system
recovery
charging
Evaporator
The
Inject to
Core Orifice amount low-side
or
collected service
Thermostatic during
port during
Expansion
refrigerant system
Valve
recovery charging
60 ml (2
fl oz)
Inject to
added to
low-side
the
A/C Pressure
service
amount
Relief Valve
port during
collected
system
during
charging
refrigerant
recovery
60 ml (2
fl oz)
added to Inject to
low-side
the
Refrigerant
amount service
Hose/Line
collected port during
system
during
refrigerant charging
recoverya
60 ml (2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 143
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
O-ring Leak
Repair
Service Port
Leak Repair
fl oz)
added to Inject to
the
low-side
amount service
collected port during
during
system
refrigerant charging
recoveryb
60 ml (2
fl oz)
Inject to
added to
low-side
the
service
amount
port during
collected
system
during
charging
refrigerant
recovery
a If an excessive amount of refrigerant oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage, the
total system refrigerant oil capacity must be added.
b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the
refrigerant oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired.
Refrigerant Oil Adding for New A/C Compressor Installation
NOTE:
The service A/C compressor for this vehicle is shipped from the factory with
PAG oil installed. The refrigerant oil adding procedure specified for this vehicle
must be followed to avoid installing excessive PAG oil in the refrigerant system.
1. Rotate the new A/C compressor shaft 8 to 10 revolutions while collecting the PAG oil in a clean
measuring cup.
2. Rotate the oil A/C compressor shaft 8 to 10 revolutions while collecting the PAG oil in a separate clean
measuring cup.
3. Remove enough PAG oil from the new compressor measuring cup to make the remaining amount of oil
in the cup match the amount remove from the oil A/C compressor.
4. Add the PAG oil from the new A/C compressor measuring cup to the suction side of the A/C compressor.
Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector
NOTE:
If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the
dye may be added to the dye/lubricant injector along with the refrigerant oil.
1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 144
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector using the correct adapters to match the amount of refrigerant
compressor oil to be injected.
3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed.
Fig. 125: Identifying Valves On Fluorescent Dye/Lubricant Injector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of new refrigerant compressor oil.
Fig. 126: Identifying Deluxe Injector Loop Kit Reservoir
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the refrigerant service
station or manifold gauge set.
6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning
(A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
REFRIGERANT IDENTIFICATION TESTING
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Refrigerant Identifier with AirRadiator
198-00003 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 145
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
Refrigerant Identification
NOTE:
A Refrigerant Identifier with Air-Radiator must be used to identify gas
samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers
prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system.
1. Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Identifier with Air-Radiator to obtain the sample for
testing.
2. The Refrigerant Identifier with Air-Radiator will display one of the following:
If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The
weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital
display.
If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm
will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22
and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display.
If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light,
"Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the
user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will
also be displayed on the digital display.
3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or greater.
The scan tool eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is
not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the scan tool has
determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is 98% or greater by weight) and air concentration
levels are 2% or greater by weight, the scan tool will prompt the user if an air purge is desired.
4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the
refrigerant is indeed contaminated.
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
NOTE:
If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R134a recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will
contaminate the recovered refrigerant supply and may damage the
recovery/recycling equipment.
NOTE:
A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the
A/C system flushing procedure.
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for capturing and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 146
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control System - General Information and Diagnostics - Edge & MKX
storing contaminated refrigerant only.
If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customers initial concern.
3. Flush the A/C system.
4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:13:31 AM
Page 147
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
2008 FORD MOTOR CO.
Edge & MKX
BUZZERS, RELAYS & TIMERS
BUZZERS, RELAYS & TIMERS LOCATION
Component
Accessory Delay Relay
A/C Clutch Relay
Front Blower Motor Relay
Fuel Pump Relay
Heated Mirror Relay
PCM Power Relay
Power Liftgate Chime
Rear Seat Release Relay
Rear Window Defrost Relay
Reversing Lamps Relay
Run/Start Relay
Starter Relay
Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay
Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn Lamp Relay
Location
In smart junction box (SJB). See Fig. 2.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
Base of left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION DEVICES
CIRCUIT PROTECTION DEVICES LOCATION
Component
Location
Battery Junction Box (BJB) (Edge)
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Battery Junction Box (BJB) (MKX)
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Fuel Pump Diode
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
Fuel Pump Diode
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
Smart Junction Box (SJB) (Edge)
Left rear corner of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Smart Junction Box (SJB) (MKX)
Left rear corner of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
CONTROL UNITS
CONTROL UNITS LOCATION
Component
ABS Control Module (Edge)
ABS Control Module (MKX)
Location
Left rear corner of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Left rear corner of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:15
11:44:07 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Module
Antenna Module
Climate Controlled Seat Backrest Module (Driver
Side)
Climate Controlled Seat Backrest Module
(Passenger Side)
Climate Controlled Seat Cushion Module (Driver
Side)
Climate Controlled Seat Cushion Module
(Passenger Side)
Climate Controlled Seat Module (Passenger Side)
Cooling Fan Module (Edge)
Cooling Fan Module (MKX)
Driver Air Bag Module
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC)
Module
Front Blower Motor Speed Controller
Fuel Pump Module
Heated Seat Module (Left Rear)
Heated Seat Module (Passenger Side - Front)
Manual Climate Control Module
Memory Module
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) Module
Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Passenger Air Bag Module
Power Liftgate Module
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (Edge)
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (MKX)
Restraints Control Module
Side Air Bag Module (Left Front)
Side Air Bag Module (Right Front)
Side Air Curtain Module (Driver)
Side Air Curtain Module (Passenger)
Smart Wiper Module (Edge)
Smart Wiper Module (MKX)
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
Behind right kick panel. See Fig. 14.
Behind right kick panel. See Fig. 9.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 19.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 19.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
In steering wheel. See Fig. 11.
Behind center of dash. See Fig. 10.
On blower motor. See Fig. 9.
In fuel tank. See Fig. 15.
Under left rear seat. See Fig. 21.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Behind center of dash. See Fig. 10.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 19.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Behind left rear quarterpanel. See Fig. 15.
Behind right side of dash. See Fig. 10.
In left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
Right front of engine. See Fig. 3.
Right front of engine. See Fig. 5.
Under center console. See Fig. 10.
In left "B" pillar. See Fig. 13.
In right "B" pillar. See Fig. 14.
In left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
In right "D" pillar. See Fig. 16.
Left rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 4.
Left rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 6.
On steering column. See Fig. 31.
MOTORS
MOTORS LOCATION
Component
Location
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Blower Motor
Door Lock Actuator (Left Front)
Door Lock Actuator (Left Rear)
Door Lock Actuator (Right Front)
Door Lock Actuator (Right Rear)
Driver Seat Backrest Motor
Driver Seat Front Height Motor
Driver Seat Horizontal Motor
Driver Seat Rear Height Motor
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Motor
Exterior Rear View Mirror (LH Side)
Exterior Rear View Mirror (RH Side)
Fresh/Recirculation Door Actuator
Liftgate Drive Unit
Lumbar Motor (Driver Seat)
Lumbar Motor (Passenger Seat)
Mode Door Actuator
Passenger Backrest Motor
Passenger Seat Front Height Motor
Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor
Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor
Power Window Motor (Driver Side Front)
Power Window Motor (Left Rear)
Power Window Motor (Passenger Side Front)
Power Window Motor (Right Rear)
Rear Window Wiper Motor (Edge)
Rear Window Wiper Motor (MKX)
Seat Release Actuator (Left Rear)
Seat Release Actuator (Right Rear)
Starter Motor (Edge)
Starter Motor (MKX)
Temperature Blend Door Actuator
Temperature Blend Door Actuator (Driver)
Windshield Washer Pump Motor (Edge)
Windshield Washer Pump Motor (MKX)
Behind right side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Rear of driver's door. See Fig. 22.
Rear of left rear door. See Fig. 24.
Rear of front passenger's door. See Fig. 23.
Rear of right rear door. See Fig. 25.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 19.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 19.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 19.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 19.
On throttle body. See Fig. 8.
In driver's door. See Fig. 22.
In front passenger's door. See Fig. 23.
Middle of HVAC unit. See Fig. 30.
In left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 19.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Left side of HVAC unit. See Fig. 30.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Middle of driver's door. See Fig. 22.
Middle of left rear door. See Fig. 24.
Middle of front passenger's door. See Fig. 23.
Middle of right rear door. See Fig. 25.
In liftgate. See Fig. 26.
In liftgate. See Fig. 27.
Under left rear seat. See Fig. 15.
Under right rear seat. See Fig. 16.
Left rear of engine. See Fig. 4.
Left rear of engine. See Fig. 6.
Middle front of HVAC unit. See Fig. 30.
Left side of HVAC unit. See Fig. 30.
On washer fluid reservoir. See Fig. 4.
On washer fluid reservoir. See Fig. 6.
SENDING UNITS & SENSORS
SENDING UNITS & SENSORS LOCATION
Component
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor (Edge)
Location
Top of accelerator pedal. See Fig. 3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor (MKX)
A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor (Edge)
A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor (MKX)
Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Crankshaft Position Sensor
Crash Sensor (Left Rear)
Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
Front Impact Sensor (Left) (Edge)
Front Impact Sensor (Left) (MKX)
Front Impact Sensor (Right) (Edge)
Front Impact Sensor (Right) (MKX)
Fuel Level Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Keyless Entry Keypad
Knock Sensor
Liftgate Obstacle Detection Strip (Left)
Liftgate Obstacle Detection Strip (Right)
Light Sensor
Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature (MAF/IAT)
Sensor (Edge)
Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature (MAF/IAT)
Sensor (MKX)
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 2
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 3
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 4
Outside Temperature Sensor (Edge)
Outside Temperature Sensor (MKX)
Parking Aid Sensor (Inner Left) (Edge)
Parking Aid Sensor (Inner Left) (MKX)
Top of accelerator pedal. See Fig. 5.
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Rear of right cylinder bank. See Fig. 7.
Rear of left cylinder bank. See Fig. 7.
Lower left rear of engine. See Fig. 7.
Behind left rear quarterpanel. See Fig. 15.
Front of right cylinder bank. See Fig. 8.
Left side of HVAC unit. See Fig. 30.
Left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Top of fuel tank. See Fig. 15.
In fuel tank. See Fig. 15.
Right rear side of engine. See Fig. 8.
Right front side of engine. See Fig. 8.
Left side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Left rear side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 10.
Rear of driver's door. See Fig. 22.
Left rear of engine. See Fig. 7.
Left side of liftgate. See Fig. 27.
Right side of liftgate. See Fig. 27.
Under top center of dash. See Fig. 9.
On intake air duct. See Fig. 4.
On intake air duct. See Fig. 6.
Under right side of front passenger's seat. See Fig.
20.
Under right side of front passenger's seat. See Fig.
20.
Under left side of front passenger's seat. See Fig.
20.
Under left side of front passenger's seat. See Fig.
20.
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Behind left side of rear bumper. See Fig. 17.
Behind left side of rear bumper. See Fig. 18.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Parking Aid Sensor (Inner Right) (Edge)
Parking Aid Sensor (Inner Right) (MKX)
Parking Aid Sensor (Outer Left) (Edge)
Parking Aid Sensor (Outer Left) (MKX)
Parking Aid Sensor (Outer Right) (Edge)
Parking Aid Sensor (Outer Right) (MKX)
Passive Anti-Theft Transceiver
Seat Track Position Sensor (Left Front)
Side Impact Sensor (Driver 1)
Side Impact Sensor (Passenger 1)
Side Impact Sensor (Right Rear)
Stability Control Sensor Cluster
Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Front) (Edge)
Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Front) (MKX)
Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Rear)
Wheel Speed Sensor (Right Front) (Edge)
Wheel Speed Sensor (Right Front) (MKX)
Wheel Speed Sensor (Right Rear)
Behind right side of rear bumper. See Fig. 17.
Behind right side of rear bumper. See Fig. 18.
Behind left end of rear bumper. See Fig. 17.
Behind left end of rear bumper. See Fig. 18.
Behind right end of rear bumper. See Fig. 17.
Behind right end of rear bumper. See Fig. 18.
Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 10.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 19.
In left "B" pillar. See Fig. 13.
Base of right "B" pillar. See Fig. 14.
Behind right rear quarterpanel. See Fig. 16.
Under right rear seat. See Fig. 16.
On steering column. See Fig. 10.
On left front wheel hub. See Fig. 4.
On left front wheel hub. See Fig. 6.
On left rear wheel hub. See Fig. 16.
On right front wheel hub. See Fig. 4.
On right front wheel hub. See Fig. 6.
On right rear wheel hub. See Fig. 16.
SOLENOIDS & SOLENOID VALVES
SOLENOIDS & SOLENOID VALVES LOCATION
Component
A/C Clutch Field Coil (Edge)
A/C Clutch Field Coil (MKX)
EVAP Canister Purge Valve (Edge)
EVAP Canister Purge Valve (MKX)
EVAP Canister Vent Control Solenoid
Fuel Injector 1
Fuel Injector 2
Fuel Injector 3
Fuel Injector 4
Fuel Injector 5
Fuel Injector 6
Heated Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve
Intelligent Torque Control Coupling (ITCC)
Solenoid
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Heated
Fitting
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Location
On A/C compressor. See Fig. 4.
On A/C compressor. See Fig. 6.
Right rear of engine. See Fig. 3.
Right rear of engine. See Fig. 5.
Under left side of vehicle. See Fig. 13.
Top right side of engine. See Fig. 8.
Top right side of engine. See Fig. 8.
Top right side of engine. See Fig. 8.
Top left side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Top left side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Top left side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Top left side of engine. See Fig. 8.
Under right rear of vehicle. See Fig. 16.
Top right rear of engine. See Fig. 8.
Top front of right cylinder bank. See Fig. 8.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 2
Top front of left cylinder bank. See Fig. 7.
SWITCHES
SWITCHES LOCATION
Component
Anti-Theft Hood Switch
Brake Fluid Level Switch (Edge)
Brake Fluid Level Switch (MKX)
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch (Edge)
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch (MKX)
Ignition Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Liftgate Ajar Switch (Edge)
Liftgate Ajar Switch (MKX)
Multifunction Switch
Oil Pressure Switch
Parking Brake Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch (Edge)
Power Steering Pressure Switch (MKX)
Safety Belt Buckle Switch (Driver)
Safety Belt Buckle Switch (Passenger Side)
Washer Fluid Level Switch (Edge)
Washer Fluid Level Switch (MKX)
Location
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
On master cylinder reservoir. See Fig. 4.
On master cylinder reservoir. See Fig. 6.
On brake pedal support bracket. See Fig. 4.
On brake pedal support bracket. See Fig. 6.
On steering column. See Fig. 31.
In left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
Lower right side of liftgate. See Fig. 26.
Lower right side of liftgate. See Fig. 27.
Top of steering column. See Fig. 31.
Lower left side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Top of parking brake lever bracket. See Fig. 13.
Right front of engine. See Fig. 4.
Right front of engine. See Fig. 6.
Integral to driver's seat belt buckle. See Fig. 19.
Integral to front passenger's seat belt buckle. See
Fig. 20.
On washer fluid reservoir. See Fig. 3.
On washer fluid reservoir. See Fig. 5.
MISCELLANEOUS
MISCELLANEOUS LOCATION
Component
ABS Test Connector (C126) (Edge)
ABS Test Connector (C126) (MKX)
A/C Compressor Clutch Diode
A/C Compressor Clutch Diode
Battery (Edge)
Battery (MKX)
Blower Motor Resistor
Clockspring
Coil On Plug (COP) 1
Coil On Plug (COP) 2
Coil On Plug (COP) 3
Location
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 4.
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 6.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
In battery junction box (BJB). See Fig. 1.
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Behind right side of dash. See Fig. 9.
On steering column. See Fig. 31.
Top right side of engine. See Fig. 8.
Top right side of engine. See Fig. 8.
Top right side of engine. See Fig. 8.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Coil On Plug (COP) 4
Coil On Plug (COP) 5
Coil On Plug (COP) 6
Data Link Connector (DLC)
Fusible Link A (Edge)
Fusible Link A (MKX)
Generator (Edge)
Generator (MKX)
Horn (Edge)
Horn (MKX)
Ignition Transformer Capacitor 1
Ignition Transformer Capacitor 2
Joint Connector 1 (Edge)
Joint Connector 1 (MKX)
Joint Connector 2 (Edge)
Joint Connector 2 (MKX)
Joint Connector 3
Joint Connector 4
Joint Connector 5
Joint Connector 6
Joint Connector 7 (Edge)
Joint Connector 7 (MKX)
Joint Connector 8
Joint Connector 9
Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner (Driver)
Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner (Passenger)
Satellite Radio Receiver
Seat Heater Element (Left Front)
Seat Heater Element (Left Rear)
Seat Heater Element (Right Front)
THX Amplifier
Trailer Tow Connector (Edge)
Trailer Tow Connector (MKX)
Top left side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Top left side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Top left side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Under left side of dash. See Fig. 10.
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 4.
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 6.
Left front of engine. See Fig. 4.
Left front of engine. See Fig. 6.
Right front corner of engine compartment. See Fig.
4.
Right front corner of engine compartment. See Fig.
6.
Right rear of engine. See Fig. 8.
Top left rear of engine. See Fig. 7.
Left rear of luggage compartment. See Fig. 17.
Left side of luggage compartment. See Fig. 18.
Left rear of luggage compartment. See Fig. 17.
Left side of luggage compartment. See Fig. 18.
Behind right kick panel. See Fig. 14.
Behind center of dash. See Fig. 9.
Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Left rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Left rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
In left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
Behind right rear quarterpanel. See Fig. 16.
Base of seat belt buckle assembly. See Fig. 20.
Base of seat belt buckle assembly. See Fig. 20.
Left rear of cargo area. See Fig. 15.
In driver's seat cushion. See Fig. 19.
Under left rear seat. See Fig. 21.
In front passenger's seat cushion. See Fig. 20.
Behind right rear quarterpanel. See Fig. 16.
Under center of rear bumper. See Fig. 17.
Under center of rear bumper. See Fig. 18.
CONNECTORS
CONNECTORS LOCATION
Component
C110 (Edge) (8 Pin)
Location
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
C110 (MKX) (8 Pin)
C134 (Edge) (20 Pin)
C134 (MKX) (20 Pin)
C139 (70 Pin)
C140 (16 Pin)
C192 (2 Pin)
C210 (16 Pin)
C211 (20 Pin)
C212 (Edge) (57 Pin)
C212 (MKX) (57 Pin)
C213 (57 Pin)
C214 (20 Pin)
C215 (30 Pin)
C260 (4 Pin)
C263 (6 Pin)
C264 (16 Pin)
C265 (16 Pin)
C300 (20 Pin)
C311 (57 Pin)
C312 (12 Pin)
C313 (10 Pin)
C313 (10 Pin)
C314 (12 Pin)
C315 (14 Pin)
C316 (30 Pin)
C316 (30 Pin)
C327 (2 Pin)
C328 (2 Pin)
C405 (16 Pin)
C406 (edge) (16 Pin)
C406 (16 Pin)
C510 (54 Pin)
C610 (54 Pin)
C700 (14 Pin)
C800 (14 Pin)
C913 (Edge) (2 Pin)
C913 (MKX) (2 Pin)
C919 (8 Pin)
C922 (8 Pin)
C925 (4 Pin)
C934 (6 Pin)
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 6.
Left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 4.
Left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Top left side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Top left side of engine. See Fig. 7.
Top front of engine. See Fig. 8.
Base of left "A" pillar. See Fig. 13.
Base of left "A" pillar. See Fig. 13.
Left rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Left rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Behind right kick panel. See Fig. 14.
Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Behind right side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Behind right side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Behind right side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Behind right side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Under left rear seat. See Fig. 21.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 13.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 13.
Under center floor console. See Fig. 14.
Under front of center floor console. See Fig. 12.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 14.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 20.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 14.
Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 14.
Under driver's seat. See Fig. 13.
Under left rear of vehicle. See Fig. 15.
Behind center of rear bumper. See Fig. 17.
Behind center of rear bumper. See Fig. 18.
Behind left kick panel. See Fig. 13.
Behind right kick panel. See Fig. 14.
In left "B" pillar. See Fig. 13.
In right "B" pillar. See Fig. 14.
Top of liftgate. See Fig. 26.
Top of liftgate. See Fig. 27.
Top of left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
Top of left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
Top of left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
Top of left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
GROUNDS
GROUNDS LOCATION
Component
G100 (Edge)
G100 (MKX)
G101 (Edge)
G101 (MKX)
G102 (Edge)
G102 (MKX)
G103 (Edge)
G103 (MKX)
G104 (Edge)
G104 (MKX)
G105 (Edge)
G105 (MKX)
G106 (Edge)
G106 (MKX)
G107 (Edge)
G107 (MKX)
G108 (Edge)
G108 (MKX)
G109 (Edge)
G109 (MKX)
G110 (Edge)
G110 (MKX)
G111 (Edge)
G111 (MKX)
G200
G201
G202
G203
G204
G205
G206
G207
G300
G301
G302
G400
G401
Location
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 4.
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 6.
Right rear of engine. See Fig. 4.
Right rear of engine. See Fig. 6.
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 4.
Left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 6.
Left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 4.
Left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 6.
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Right front of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Right rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 3.
Right rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 5.
Front of engine. See Fig. 3.
Front of engine. See Fig. 5.
Right front of engine. See Fig. 4.
Right front of engine. See Fig. 6.
Right rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 4.
Right rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 6.
Behind left kick panel. See Fig. 13.
Behind left kick panel. See Fig. 13.
Behind right kick panel. See Fig. 14.
Behind right side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 9.
Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 9.
In steering wheel. See Fig. 11.
Behind left rear seat. See Fig. 15.
In left "B" pillar. See Fig. 13.
In right "B" pillar. See Fig. 14.
In left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
In left "D" pillar. See Fig. 15.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
G402
G403
G404
Behind right rear quarterpanel. See Fig. 16.
Behind right rear quarterpanel. See Fig. 16.
In right "D" pillar. See Fig. 16.
SPLICES
SPLICES LOCATION
Component
S100 (Edge)
S100 (MKX)
S101 (Edge)
S101 (MKX)
S102 (Edge)
S102 (MKX)
S103 (Edge)
S103 (MKX)
S104 (Edge)
S104 (MKX)
S105 (Edge)
S105 (MKX)
S106 (Edge)
S106 (MKX)
S107
S108
S109 (Edge)
S109 (MKX)
Location
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to C110. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to C110. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to C110. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to C110. See Fig. 6.
In battery wiring harness, near breakout to battery.
See Fig. 4.
In battery wiring harness, near breakout to battery.
See Fig. 6.
In battery wiring harness, near breakout to starter
motor. See Fig. 4.
In battery wiring harness, near breakout to starter
motor. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to C110. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to C110. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to battery junction box. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to battery junction box. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to battery junction box. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to battery junction box. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to battery junction box. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to ABS test connector. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to ABS test connector. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
S110
S111 (Edge)
S111 (MKX)
S112 (Edge)
S112 (MKX)
S113 (Edge)
S113 (MKX)
S114 (Edge)
S114 (MKX)
S115 (Edge)
S115 (MKX)
S116 (Edge)
S116 (MKX)
S117 (Edge)
S117 (MKX)
S118 (Edge)
S118 (MKX)
S119
S120 (Edge)
near breakout to ABS test connector. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to left headlight. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to C134. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to C134. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to cooling fan module. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to cooling fan module. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to cooling fan module. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to cooling fan module. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to mass air flow/intake air
temperature sensor. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to mass air flow/intake air
temperature sensor. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to mass air flow/intake air
temperature sensor. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to mass air flow/intake air
temperature sensor. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to A/C pressure transducer sensor.
See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to A/C pressure transducer sensor.
See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to G108. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to G108. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to G110. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to G110. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to G109. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
S120 (MKX)
S121 (Edge)
S121 (MKX)
S122 (Edge)
S122 (MKX)
S123
S124
S125
S126
S127
S128
S129
S130
S131
S200
S201
near breakout to G109. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to G109. See Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to powertrain control module. See
Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to powertrain control module. See
Fig. 6.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to powertrain control module. See
Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to powertrain control module. See
Fig. 6.
In engine control sensor & fuel charge wiring
harness, near breakout to coil on plug No. 3. See
Fig. 8.
In engine control sensor & fuel charge wiring
harness, near breakout to ignition transformer
capacitor No. 1. See Fig. 8.
In engine control sensor & fuel charge wiring
harness, near breakout to fuel injector No. 6. See
Fig. 7.
In engine control sensor & fuel charge wiring
harness, near breakout to fuel injector No. 6. See
Fig. 7.
In engine control sensor & fuel charge wiring
harness, near breakout to fuel injector No. 6. See
Fig. 7.
In engine control sensor & fuel charge wiring
harness, near breakout to fuel injector No. 6. See
Fig. 7.
In engine control sensor & fuel charge wiring
harness, near breakout to fuel injector No. 5. See
Fig. 7.
In engine control sensor & fuel charge wiring
harness, near breakout to C139. See Fig. 7.
In engine control sensor & fuel charge wiring
harness, near breakout to camshaft position sensor
No. 2. See Fig. 7.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C510. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C212. See Fig. 13.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
S202
S203
S204
S205
S206
S207
S208
S209
S210
S211 (Edge)
S211 (MKX)
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
S217
S218
S219
S300
S301
S302
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C212. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C212. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C214. See Fig. 14.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
restraints control module. See Fig. 9.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
restraints control module. See Fig. 9.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to audio
unit. See Fig. 9.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to audio
unit. See Fig. 9.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to invehicle temperature sensor. See Fig. 9.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C210. See Fig. 9.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to joint connector No. 7. See Fig. 4.
In dash panel wiring harness to headlight junction,
near breakout to joint connector No. 7. See Fig. 6.
In steering wheel jumper wiring harness, in
breakout to left steering wheel switch. See Fig. 11.
In steering wheel jumper wiring harness, in
breakout to left steering wheel switch. See Fig. 11.
In steering wheel jumper wiring harness, in
breakout to right steering wheel switch. See Fig. 11.
In steering wheel jumper wiring harness, in
breakout to right steering wheel switch. See Fig. 11.
In air conditioning wiring harness, near breakout to
C263. See Fig. 9.
In air conditioning wiring harness, near breakout to
fresh/recirculation door actuator. See Fig. 30.
In air conditioning wiring harness, near breakout to
fresh/recirculation door actuator. See Fig. 30.
In main wiring harness, near breakout to G205. See
Fig. 9.
In seat heated pad wiring harness, near breakout to
C300. See Fig. 21.
In seat heated pad wiring harness, near breakout to
C300. See Fig. 21.
In seat heated pad wiring harness, near breakout to
left rear seat heater element. See Fig. 21.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
S304
S305
S306
S307
S308
S309
S310
S311
S312
S313
S314
S315
S316
S317
S318
S319
S320
S322
S323
S324
S325
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to left
rear side impact sensor. See Fig. 15.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to left
rear side impact sensor. See Fig. 15.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G300. See Fig. 15.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C700. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to left
front side impact sensor. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to left
front side impact sensor. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to left
front side impact sensor. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G200. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G200. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G200. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G200. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G311. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G311. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G311. See Fig. 19.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G311. See Fig. 19.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G311. See Fig. 19.
In power seats wiring harness, near breakout to
driver side climate controlled seat cushion module.
See Fig. 19.
In power seats wiring harness, near breakout to
driver's safety belt buckle pretensioner. See Fig. 19.
In power seats wiring harness, near breakout to
driver's safety belt buckle pretensioner. See Fig. 19.
In power seats wiring harness, near breakout to
driver's safety belt buckle pretensioner. See Fig. 19.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C311. See Fig. 13.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
S326
S327
S328
S329
S330
S331
S332
S333
S334
S335
S336
S337
S338
S339
S340
S341
S342
S343
S344
S345
S400 (Edge)
C313. See Fig. 14.
In body main wiring harness, in breakout to C314.
See Fig. 14.
In body main wiring harness, in breakout to C314.
See Fig. 14.
In power seats wiring harness, in breakout to
passenger's safety belt buckle pretensioner. See Fig.
20.
In power seats wiring harness, near breakout to
passenger's safety belt buckle pretensioner. See Fig.
20.
In power seats wiring harness, near breakout to
passenger side climate controlled seat module. See
Fig. 20.
In power seats wiring harness, near breakout to
C327. See Fig. 20.
In power seats wiring harness, near breakout to
C327. See Fig. 20.
In power seats wiring harness, near breakout to
C327. See Fig. 20.
In power seats wiring harness, in breakout to C316.
See Fig. 20.
In power seats wiring harness, in breakout to C314.
See Fig. 20.
In power seats wiring harness, in breakout to C314.
See Fig. 20.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C316. See Fig. 14.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to right
rear side impact sensor. See Fig. 16.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to joint
connector No. 9. See Fig. 16.
In power seats wiring harness, in breakout to C311.
See Fig. 19.
In power seats wiring harness, in breakout to C311.
See Fig. 19.
In power seats wiring harness, in breakout to C316.
See Fig. 20.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C214. See Fig. 14.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
C214. See Fig. 14.
In tailgate warning switch wiring harness, in
breakout to liftgate ajar switch. See Fig. 26.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
S400 (MKX)
S401
S402
S403 (Edge)
S403 (MKX)
S404
S405 (Edge)
S405 (MKX)
S406
S407
S408
S409
S500
S501
S502
S503
S504
S600
S601
S602
S603
In tailgate warning switch wiring harness, in
breakout to liftgate/decklid switch. See Fig. 27.
In tailgate warning switch wiring harness, in
breakout to liftgate/decklid switch. See Fig. 27.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to cargo
area power point. See Fig. 15.
In back-up alarm wiring harness, near breakout to
inner right parking aid sensor. See Fig. 17.
In back-up alarm wiring harness, near breakout to
inner right parking aid sensor. See Fig. 18.
In back-up alarm wiring harness, near breakout to
left license plate light. See Fig. 18.
In back-up alarm wiring harness, near breakout to
inner left parking aid sensor. See Fig. 17.
In back-up alarm wiring harness, near breakout to
inner left parking aid sensor. See Fig. 18.
In back-up alarm wiring harness, near breakout to
left license plate light. See Fig. 18.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
G402. See Fig. 16.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to right
rear park/stop/turn light. See Fig. 16.
In body main wiring harness, near breakout to
power liftgate module. See Fig. 15.
In left front window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to C510. See Fig. 22.
In left front window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to left front tweeter. See Fig. 22.
In left front window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to keyless entry keypad. See Fig. 22.
In left front window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to keyless entry keypad. See Fig. 22.
In left front window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to memory set switch. See Fig. 22.
In right front window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to right front tweeter. See Fig. 23.
In right front window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to right front tweeter. See Fig. 23.
In right front window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to right front tweeter. See Fig. 23.
In right front window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to right front door lock actuator. See Fig.
23.
In right front window regulator wiring harness, near
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
S604
S605
S700
S701
S800
S801
S900 (Except Panoramic Vista Roof)
S900 (W/Panoramic Vista Roof)
S901 (Except Panoramic Vista Roof)
S901 (W/Panoramic Vista Roof)
S902 (Except Panoramic Vista Roof)
S902 (W/Panoramic Vista Roof)
S903 (Except Panoramic Vista Roof)
S903 (W/Panoramic Vista Roof)
S904 (Except Panoramic Vista Roof)
S904 (W/Panoramic Vista Roof)
S905 (Except Panoramic Vista Roof)
S905 (W/Panoramic Vista Roof)
S906 (Except Panoramic Vista Roof)
S906 (W/Panoramic Vista Roof)
breakout to right front door lock actuator. See Fig.
23.
In right front window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to right front door lock actuator. See Fig.
23.
In left rear window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to left rear window adjust switch. See Fig.
24.
In left rear window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to left rear speaker. See Fig. 24.
In right rear window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to right rear window adjust switch. See
Fig. 25.
In right rear window regulator wiring harness, near
breakout to right rear speaker. See Fig. 25.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
left vanity mirror light. See Fig. 28.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
left vanity mirror light. See Fig. 29.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
left vanity mirror light. See Fig. 28.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
left vanity mirror light. See Fig. 29.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
left vanity mirror light. See Fig. 28.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
left vanity mirror light. See Fig. 29.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
front interior lights. See Fig. 28.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
front interior lights. See Fig. 29.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
front interior lights. See Fig. 28.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
front interior lights. See Fig. 29.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
front interior lights. See Fig. 28.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
front interior lights. See Fig. 29.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
front interior lights. See Fig. 28.
In interior lights wiring harness, near breakout to
front interior lights. See Fig. 29.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
COMPONENT LOCATION GRAPHICS
NOTE:
Figures may show multiple component locations. Refer to appropriate table for
proper figure references.
Fig. 1: Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Engine Compartment (Edge)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Engine Compartment (Edge)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Engine Compartment (MKX)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Engine Compartment (MKX)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Left Side Of Engine
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Right Side Of Engine
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Dash
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Dash
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Steering Wheel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Center Floor Console
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Left Front Interior Of Vehicle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Right Front Interior Of Vehicle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 15: Left Rear Interior Of Vehicle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Right Rear Interior Of Vehicle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Rear Of Vehicle (Edge)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Rear Of Vehicle (MKX)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 19: Driver's Seat
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 20: Front Passenger's Seat
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 21: Rear Seats
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 22: Driver's Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:07 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Front Passenger's Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:08 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 24: Left Rear Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:08 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 25: Right Rear Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:08 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 26: Liftgate (Edge)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:08 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 27: Liftgate (MKX)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:08 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 28: Roof (Except Panoramic Vista Roof)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:08 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 29: Roof (W/Panoramic Vista Roof)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:08 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 30: HVAC Unit
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:08 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 FORD MOTOR CO. Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Steering Column
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:44:08 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
2008 BRAKES
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
Material
Item
Specification
Fill Capacity
High Performance DOT 3 Motor
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65803-821 ml (1.697-1.735 pt)
Vehicle Brake Fluid
A1
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Brake master cylinder nuts
Brake pedal bracket nuts
Master cylinder brake tube fittings
25
22
28
lb-ft
18
16
21
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ACTUATION
The hydraulic brake actuation system consists of the following components:
Brake master cylinder
Brake fluid reservoir
Brake pedal and bracket assembly
Brake tubes and hoses
Hydraulic control unit (HCU)
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - The brake pedal is connected to the power brake booster, which is connected to
the brake master cylinder. When the brake pedal is pressed, brake fluid is forced from the master cylinder
through the steel tubing and flexible hoses to the front disc brake calipers and the rear disc brake calipers. The
front disc brake caliper pistons are forced outward against the brake pads, which contact the braking surface of
the brake discs. The brake fluid calipers are pressurized by the master cylinder, forcing the disc brake caliper
pistons outward against the brake pads. The brake pads press against the braking surface on the brake discs.
When the brake pedal is released, the pressure is relieved, returning the brake caliper pistons and the brake pads
to the at-rest position.
The dual brake system is split front and rear with the front wheel brakes comprising one circuit and the rear
wheel brakes the other circuit.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:14
10:08:06 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ACTUATION
Refer to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET
Fig. 1: Identifying Brake Pedal and Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
2455
W707144
Description
Brake pedal and bracket
Brake pedal bracket nut (4 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:06 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
3
4
7B096
2N513
Brake booster push rod pin clip
Brake booster push rod pin
CAUTION: Do not remove or loosen the fasteners that hold the 2 brake pedal bracket
halves together. Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage
to the brake pedal bracket.
Fig. 2: Locating Fasteners On Brake Pedal Bracket Halves
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first
removing the stoplamp switch and speed control deactivator switch.
These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest
position. Switch plungers must be compressed for the switch to
rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the
plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the
switch.
1. Remove the stoplamp switch. For additional information, refer to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article.
2. Remove the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL AND
CONSOLE article.
3. Remove the brake booster push rod pin clip and pin, then disconnect the push rod from the brake pedal
arm.
4. Remove the 4 brake pedal bracket nuts.
To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
5. Lift the brake pedal and bracket off of the hangers and remove the brake pedal and bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:06 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Lifting Brake Pedal & Bracket Off Of Hangers & Removing Brake Pedal & Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing
the stoplamp switch or the speed control deactivator switch. These
switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the
brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing
these switches with the brake pedal in any other position will result
in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Material
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:06 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Brake Master Cylinder With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
2B195
2
W520011
3
-
4
2A335 RH/ 2286 LH
Description
Brake master cylinder and reservoir
assembly
Brake master cylinder nut (2 required)
Brake fluid level switch electrical
connector (part of 14A290)
Master cylinder brake tube fittings
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:06 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is
spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet tube. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR
DISTRIBUTION AND FILTERING article.
2. Remove the battery and battery tray. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch electrical connector.
4. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir.
5. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings, plug the brake tubes and the brake master cylinder
ports.
To install, tighten to 28 Nm (21 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 2 brake master cylinder nuts.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. Remove the brake master cylinder and reservoir.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Bleed the master cylinder and brake system. For additional information, refer to BRAKE
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:06 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION
Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS
Item
LH
Front
Camber
-0.50° ± -0.75°
RH
Total/Split
-0.50° ± -0.75°
0° ± 0.75°a
4.4° ± 0.75°
4.4° ± 0.75°
-
-
0° ± 0.75°b
0.10° ± 0.20°
-0.40° ± 0.75°
+0.05° ± -0.20°
-0.40° ± 0.75°
+0.05° ± -0.20°
0° ± 0.75°
0° ± 0.30°
0.10° ± 0.20°
Caster
Toe
Rear
Camber
Thrust angle
Toe
a Camber Total/Split = LH Camber - RH Camber
b Caster Total/Split = LH Caster - RH Caster
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Ball Joint Deflection
Lower
Bushing Fastener Tightening Height
Rear Edge
Rear MKX
Ride Height
Front - Edge with 17-in or 18-in wheels
Front - Edge with 20-in wheels
Front - All MKX vehicles
Rear - Edge with 17-in or 18-in wheels
Rear - Edge with 20-in wheels
Rear - All MKX vehicles
Specification
0-0.2 mm (0-0.08 in)
490 mm (19.29 in)
497 mm (19.57 in)
51 mm (2.01 in)
± 11.9 mm (0.47 in)
50 mm (1.97 in)
± 11.9 mm (0.47)
54 mm (2.13 in)
± 77.9 mm (0.49)
121 mm (4.76 in)
± 14 mm (0.55)
119 mm (4.66 in)
± 14 mm (0.55)
127 mm (5.00)
± 14 mm (0.55)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:37
10:49:34 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Front tie-rod jam nuts
Rear camber adjustment bolts
Rear toe adjustment bolts
Stabilizer bar lower nut
Strut upper mounting plate nuts
N.m
lb-ft
90
150
200
90
30
66
111
148
66
22
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
WHEEL ALIGNMENT ANGLES
NOTE:
When making rear alignment adjustments, it is important to know that when
adjustments are made to the rear toe, the rear camber will also be adjusted (in
the same direction as the toe adjustment). When making adjustments to the rear
camber, the rear toe will also be adjusted (in the opposite direction of the
camber adjustment). It will be necessary to check the rear camber whenever
rear toe adjustments are made and to check the rear toe whenever rear camber
adjustments are made.
Front toe is adjusted through the use of adjustable tie-rod ends. Front camber is adjusted through the use of the
upper strut plate. Rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees will change the camber +0.5 degrees. Front caster is
not adjustable on the vehicle. Rear toe is adjusted through the use of adjustable toe link cams. Rear camber is
adjusted through the use of a cam bolt that attaches the rear lower control arm to the rear subframe.
Camber
Fig. 1: Camber (Viewed from Front)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has
a direct affect on tire wear.
Caster
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Identifying Caster Angles
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
-
Description
True vertical
Positive caster angle
Shock-to-ball joint centerline
Pivot centerline
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the ball joints when viewed from the
side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and
driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear.
Toe
Fig. 3: Identifying Positive Toe (Toe In)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Identifying Negative Toe (Toe Out)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability.
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to
maintain a straight path down a level road.
Shimmy
Shimmy, as observed by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering wheel resulting
from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire contacts pot
holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road
surfaces and observed by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel. For wheel and tire
diagnosis, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Poor returnability and sticky steering is used to describe poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn
or steering correction.
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation, felt by the hands on the steering wheel, that must be overcome to keep the vehicle
going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with hands off the steering wheel.
A vehicle-related drift/pull, on a flat road, will cause a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path
and require constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind, road crown).
Poor Groove Feel
Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel
is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of
steering wheel turn). Efforts may be said to be "flat on center."
Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of gear teeth in
the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the effort from the selfaligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
In the diagnosis of a roadability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and
poor groove feel.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Inspection and Verification
1. Road test the vehicle.
If any suspension alignment or ride height concerns are present, go to SYMPTOM CHART SUSPENSION SYSTEM.
Verify the customer concern by carrying out a road test on a smooth road. If any vibrations are
present, go to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH).
2. Inspect the tires.
Check the tire pressures with all normal loads in the vehicle and the tires cold. Refer to the vehicle
certification (VC) label.
Verify that all tires are sized to specification. Refer to the VC label.
Inspect the tires for incorrect wear and damage. Install new tires as necessary.
3. Inspect the chassis and underbody.
Remove any excessive accumulation of mud, dirt or road deposits from the chassis and underbody.
4. Inspect for aftermarket equipment.
Check for aftermarket changes to the steering, suspension, and wheel and tire components (such as
competition or heavy duty). The specifications shown in this service information do not apply to
vehicles equipped with aftermarket equipment.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Front or rear suspension components
Suspension fastener(s)
Incorrect spring usage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Spring(s)
Shock absorber(s)
Strut(s)
Suspension bushing(s)
Steering system components
Wheel bearing and wheel hub(s)
Non-OEM parts or modifications
5. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported condition is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
6. If the fault is not visually evident, go to SYMPTOM CHART - SUSPENSION SYSTEM or go to
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH).
Symptom Chart - Suspension System
SYMPTOM CHART - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Condition
Possible Sources
Unequal tire pressure
ADJUST the tire pressure.
REFER to the vehicle
certification (VC) label.
-
Camber total split is
not within specification
CHECK the wheel alignment.
REFER to Camber
Adjustment - Front.
ADJUST as necessary.
-
Tires
ROTATE the tires left to
right. REFER to WHEELS
AND TIRES article.
-
Unevenly loaded or
overloaded vehicle
NOTIFY the customer of
incorrect vehicle loading.
-
Steering components
INSPECT the steering system.
INSTALL new components as
necessary. REFER to
STEERING SYSTEM GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
-
Brake drag
REPAIR the base braking
system as necessary. REFER
to FRONT DISC BRAKE
article or REAR DISC
BRAKE article.
Worn, damaged or
incorrect springs
MEASURE the ride height.
REFER to Ride Height
Drift/pull
Action
Front bottoming or riding low
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Measurement. INSTALL
new springs as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article.
-
Worn front strut(s)
INSTALL new struts as
necessary. REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article.
Incorrect tire pressure
(rapid center rib or
inner and outer edge
wear)
ADJUST the tire pressure.
REFER to the VC label.
REFER to WHEELS AND
TIRES article Diagnosis and
Testing for further tire wear
diagnosis.
-
Incorrect tire rotation
intervals
REFER to MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE article.
-
High-speed cornering
Excessive front or rear
toe (inner or outer edge
wear)
Excessive negative or
positive camber (inner
or outer edge wear)
REFER to WHEELS AND
TIRES article Diagnosis and
Testing for further tire wear
diagnosis.
Front or rear
suspension components
INSPECT the front and rear
suspension system. REPAIR
or INSTALL new suspension
components as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for
front suspension or REAR
SUSPENSION article for rear
suspension.
Damaged or worn front
strut mount bearing(s)
INSTALL a new front strut
mount bearing(s) as
necessary. REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article.
-
Binding ball joints
REFER to the Ball Joint
Inspection under Component
Tests.
-
Steering components
INSPECT the steering system.
INSTALL new components as
necessary. REFER to
POWER STEERING article.
Unequal front or rear
CHECK the wheel alignment.
Abnormal/incorrect tire wear
-
Sticky steering, poor
returnability
Steering wheel off-center
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
toe setting (side-toside)
-
REFER to Toe Adjustment Front or Toe Adjustment Rear. ADJUST as necessary.
Steering components
INSPECT the steering system.
INSTALL new components as
necessary. REFER to
STEERING SYSTEM GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Overloaded, unevenly
or incorrectly loaded
vehicle
NOTIFY the customer of
incorrect vehicle loading.
-
Loose wheel nut(s)
TIGHTEN the wheel nut(s) to
specification. REFER to
WHEELS AND TIRES
article.
-
Strut(s) or shock
absorber(s)
INSTALL new struts or shock
absorbers as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for
front suspension or REAR
SUSPENSION article for rear
suspension.
-
Loose stabilizer
bracket-to-frame bolts
TIGHTEN the bolts to
specification. REFER to
FRONT SUSPENSION
article.
-
Worn stabilizer bar
bushings or links
INSTALL new stabilizer bar
bushings or links as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article.
-
Damaged or broken
stabilizer bar
INSTALL a new stabilizer bar
as necessary. REFER to
FRONT SUSPENSION
article.
-
Worn spring(s)
INSTALL new springs as
necessary. REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for
front suspension or REAR
SUSPENSION article for rear
suspension.
Unevenly loaded or
overloaded vehicle
NOTIFY the customer of
incorrect vehicle loading.
Sway or roll
Vehicle leans to one side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Front or rear
suspension components
INSPECT the front and rear
suspension systems.
INSTALL new suspension
components as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for
front suspension or REAR
SUSPENSION article for rear
suspension.
Incorrect drive axle(s)
ride height. Side-toside lean out of
specification
MEASURE the ride height.
REFER to Ride Height
Measurement. INSPECT the
front and rear suspension
systems. REPAIR or
INSTALL new components as
necessary. REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for
front suspension or REAR
SUSPENSION article for rear
suspension.
Overloaded, unevenly
or incorrectly loaded
vehicle
NOTIFY the customer of
incorrect vehicle loading.
-
Ball joint(s)
INSPECT the ball joints.
REFER to the Ball Joint
Inspection under Component
Tests.
-
Damaged or missing
front strut mount
bearing(s)
INSTALL a new front strut
mount bearing(s) as
necessary. REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article.
-
Loose, worn or
damaged front wheel
bearing(s)
INSPECT the wheel bearings.
INSTALL new wheel
bearings as necessary.
-
Loose, worn or
damaged suspension
component(s)
INSTALL new suspension
component(s) as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for
front suspension or REAR
SUSPENSION article for rear
suspension.
-
Loose suspension
fasteners
INSPECT the suspension
fasteners. TIGHTEN to
specification. REFER to
-
Wander
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
FRONT SUSPENSION
article for front suspension or
REAR SUSPENSION article
for rear suspension.
-
Steering components
INSPECT the steering system.
INSTALL new components as
necessary. REFER to
STEERING SYSTEM GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
-
Wheel alignment
(excessive total front
toe out)
ADJUST as necessary.
REFER to Toe Adjustment Front or Toe Adjustment Rear.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
NOTE:
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) symptoms should be identified using the
diagnostic tools that are available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of
their uses and a glossary of common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article. Since it is possible any one of multiple systems may be
the cause of a symptom, it may be necessary to use a process of elimination
type of diagnostic approach to pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the
causal system for the symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article for the next likely system and continue diagnosis.
SYMPTOM CHART - NOISE/VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Squeak or grunt - noise from
the front suspension, occurs
more in cold ambient
temperatures. More noticeable
over rough roads or when
turning
Front stabilizer bar
insulators
Under these conditions, the
noise is acceptable. CHECK
TSBs.
Clunk - noise from the front
suspension, occurs in and out
of turns
Loose front suspension
INSPECT for loose nuts or
bolts. TIGHTEN to
specifications. REFER to
FRONT SUSPENSION
article for front suspension
and REAR SUSPENSION
article for rear suspension.
Clunk - noise from the rear
suspension, occurs when
shifting from REVERSE to
Loose rear suspension
components
INSPECT for loose or
damaged rear suspension
components. REPAIR or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
DRIVE
INSTALL new components as
necessary. REFER to REAR
SUSPENSION article.
Click or pop - noise from the
front suspension. More
noticeable over rough roads or
over bumps
Worn or damaged ball
joint(s)
CARRY OUT a ball joint
inspection under Component
Tests. INSTALL new ball
joint(s) or control arm(s) as
necessary.
Front suspension noise - a
squeak, creak or rattle noise.
Occurs mostly over bumps or
rough roads
Front suspension
components
Loose or damaged front
struts, shock absorber(s)
or shock absorber
bushing(s)
Damaged spring or
spring mount(s)
Damaged or worn
control/radius arm
bushing(s)
Worn or damaged
stabilizer bar bushings
or link(s)
INSPECT the front
suspension. INSTALL new
components as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article.
Loose or damaged rear
shock absorber(s) or
shock absorber bushing
(s)
Damaged spring or
spring mount(s)
Damaged or worn
control arm bushing(s)
Worn or damaged
stabilizer bar bushing(s)
or link(s)
INSPECT the rear suspension.
INSTALL new components as
necessary. REFER to REAR
SUSPENSION article.
Rear suspension noise - a
squeak, creak or rattle noise.
Occurs mostly over bumps or
rough roads
Shudder - occurs during
acceleration from a slow
speed or stop
Incorrect ride height
causing incorrect
driveline angle
REFER to DRIVELINE
SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article for
driveline angle diagnosis.
Shimmy
Loose wheel nut(s)
TIGHTEN the nut(s) to
specification. REFER to
WHEELS AND TIRES
article.
Loose front suspension
fastener(s)
TIGHTEN the fastener(s) to
specification. REFER to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
FRONT SUSPENSION
article.
-
Loose front wheel
bearing(s)
INSPECT the front wheel
bearing(s). INSTALL new
bearing(s) as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article.
-
Strut(s) or shock
absorber(s)
INSTALL new struts or shock
absorbers as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for
front suspension or REAR
SUSPENSION article for rear
suspension.
Shimmy - most noticeable on
coast/deceleration. Also hard
steering condition
Excessive positive
caster
CHECK the wheel alignment.
REFER to Camber
Adjustment - Front.
ADJUST as necessary.
Rough/harsh ride
Incorrect tire pressure
ADJUST the tire pressure.
REFER to the vehicle
certification (VC) label.
-
Strut(s) or shock
absorber(s)
INSTALL new struts or shock
absorbers as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for
front suspension or REAR
SUSPENSION article for rear
suspension.
-
Spring(s)
MEASURE the ride height.
REFER to Ride Height
Measurement. INSTALL
new springs as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for
front suspension or REAR
SUSPENSION article for rear
suspension.
-
Loose, worn or
damaged suspension
component(s)
INSTALL new suspension
component(s) as necessary.
REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for
front suspension or REAR
SUSPENSION article for rear
suspension.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Component Tests
Ball Joint Inspection
1. Prior to inspecting the ball joints for wear, inspect the wheel bearings. Install a new wheel bearing as
necessary. Refer to FRONT SUSPENSION article.
NOTE:
In order to obtain accurate measurements, the suspension must be in full
rebound with the weight of the vehicle supported by the frame.
2. Raise and support the vehicle by the frame to allow the wheels to hang in the rebound position.
3. Inspect the ball joint and ball joint boot for damage.
If the ball joint or ball joint boot is damaged, install a new ball joint as necessary. Refer to FRONT
SUSPENSION article.
CAUTION: Do not use any tools or equipment to move the wheel and tire
assembly or suspension components while checking for relative
movement. Suspension damage may occur. The use of tools or
equipment will also create relative movement that may not exist when
using hand force. Relative movement must be measured using hand
force only.
4. Inspect the ball joint for relative movement by alternately pulling downward and pushing upward on the
wheel and tire assembly, by hand. Note any relative vertical movement between the wheel knuckle and
lower arm at the lower ball joint.
If relative movement is not felt or seen, the ball joint is OK. Do not install a new ball joint.
If relative movement is found, continue with Step 5.
NOTE:
In order to obtain an accurate measurement, the dial indicator should be
aligned as close as possible with the vertical axis (center line) of the ball
joint.
5. To measure ball joint deflection, attach a suitable dial indicator with a flexible arm between the lower
control arm and the wheel knuckle or ball joint stud.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Measuring Ball Joint Deflection While An Assistant Alternately Pulls Outward
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Measure the ball joint deflection while an assistant pushes up and pulls down on the wheel and tire
assembly, by hand.
If the deflection exceeds the specification, a new ball joint must be installed. Refer to FRONT
SUSPENSION article.
If the deflection meets the specification, no further action is required.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
RIDE HEIGHT MEASUREMENT
Front Ride Height Measurement
Fig. 6: Identifying Front Ride Height Measurement
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
-
NOTE:
Description
Ride height = A - B
Measurement A
Measurement B
Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are
inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge) on a flat, level surface as used in
Step 1, adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the lower arm forward bolt.
Lock the surface gauge in this position.
Fig. 7: Identifying Surface Gauge Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge
position (measurement A).
Fig. 8: Identifying Front Ride Height Measurement
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point
is located on the center of the lower ball joint cap.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Lock the surface gauge in this position.
Fig. 9: Identifying Surface Gauge Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge
position (measurement B).
Fig. 10: Identifying Front Ride Height Measurement
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Subtract measurement B from measurement A to obtain the front ride height.
Refer to SPECIFICATIONS.
Rear Ride Height Measurement
Fig. 11: Identifying Front Ride Height Measurement
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
-
NOTE:
Description
Ride height = A - B
Measurement A
Measurement B
Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are
inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Measure the distance between the same flat level surface and the center of the lower arm-to-subframe bolt
(measurement A).
2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower shock bolt (measurement
B).
3. Subtract measurement B from measurement A to obtain the rear ride height.
Refer to SPECIFICATIONS.
CAMBER ADJUSTMENT - FRONT
NOTE:
Front camber is adjusted through the use of the upper strut plate. Rotating the
upper strut plate 180 degrees will change the camber +0.5 degrees.
1. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the camber.
2. Remove and discard the stabilizer bar link lower nut and disconnect the link from the lower arm.
To install, tighten to 90 N.m (66 lb. ft.).
3. Remove and discard the 4 strut upper mounting plate nuts.
To install, tighten to 30 N.m (22 lb. ft.).
4. Using a suitable jack, raise the vehicle body enough to allow the front strut upper plate mounting studs to
clear the frame.
NOTE:
Rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees will change the camber +0.5
degrees.
5. Rotate the upper mounting plate 180 degrees.
6. Recheck the front camber settings.
7. Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe. For additional information, refer to Toe Adjustment Front.
CAMBER ADJUSTMENT - REAR
CAUTION: Before tightening any suspension bushing fasteners, the suspension must
be at the bushing fastener tightening position or incorrect clamp load and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
bushing damage may occur.
NOTE:
When making rear alignment adjustments, it is important to know that when
adjustments are made to the rear toe, the rear camber will also be adjusted (in
the same direction as the toe adjustment). When making adjustments to the rear
camber, the rear toe will also be adjusted (in the opposite direction of the
camber adjustment). It will be necessary to check the rear camber whenever
rear toe adjustments are made and to check the rear toe whenever rear camber
adjustments are made.
1. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the rear camber.
2. Loosen the rear camber adjustment bolt.
3. Rotate the camber adjustment bolt until the camber setting is within specifications.
Fig. 12: Measuring Rear Camber Using Alignment Equipment
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Before tightening any suspension bushing fasteners, the weight of
the vehicle must be resting on the wheels and tires or incorrect
clamp load and bushing damage may occur.
NOTE:
Do not allow the camber cam adjuster to rotate while tightening the bolt.
4. Tighten the camber adjustment bolt to 150 N.m (111 lb. ft.).
5. Recheck the rear camber and toe.
Adjust as necessary.
TOE ADJUSTMENT - FRONT
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel.
2. Turn the engine OFF and, using a suitable steering wheel holding device, lock the steering wheel in the
straight ahead position.
3. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the front toe.
4. Remove the steering gear bellows clamps.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Locating Steering Gear Bellows Clamps
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Loosen the tie-rod jam nuts.
Fig. 14: Locating Tie-Rod Jam Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the tie rod is rotated.
6. Rotate the tie rods until the toe setting is within specifications.
Fig. 15: Rotating Tie Rods Until Toe Setting
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Tighten the jam nuts to 90 N.m (66 lb. ft.).
8. Install the steering gear bellows clamps.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Suspension System - General Information - Edge & MKX
TOE ADJUSTMENT - REAR
NOTE:
When making rear alignment adjustments, it is important to know that when
adjustments are made to the rear toe, the rear camber will also be adjusted (in
the same direction as the toe adjustment). When making adjustments to the rear
camber, the rear toe will also be adjusted (in the opposite direction of the
camber adjustment). It will be necessary to check the rear camber whenever
rear toe adjustments are made and to check the rear toe whenever rear camber
adjustments are made.
1. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the rear toe.
2. Loosen the toe link inboard bolt.
3. Rotate the toe link adjuster cam until the toe setting is within specifications.
CAUTION: Before tightening any suspension bushing fasteners, the suspension
must be at the bushing fastener tightening position or incorrect
clamp load and bushing damage may occur.
NOTE:
Do not allow the toe link adjuster can to rotate while tightening the bolt.
4. Tighten the toe link inboard bolt to 200 N.m (148 lb. ft.).
5. Recheck the rear toe and camber.
Adjust as necessary.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:49:34 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Speed Control - Edge & MKX
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
SPEED CONTROL
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The speed control system consists of the following components:
Speed control switches
Speed control deactivator switch (part of the stoplamp switch)
Stoplamp switch
Speed control indicator
PCM
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
SPEED CONTROL
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Restraint System Diagnostic Tool
418-F395
(2 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:58:01
10:57:56 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The speed control system is controlled by the PCM. The speed control system is designed to maintain a selected
vehicle speed between 48 km/h (30 mph) and the maximum limited vehicle speed. The speed control system is
controlled by the steering wheel mounted switches (ON, OFF, SET+, SET- and RESUME), the stoplamp
switch, and the speed control deactivator switch (part of the stoplamp switch). The steering wheel mounted
switches are hardwired to the PCM through the clockspring.
The speed control functions include:
Turning the speed control system on
Setting and maintaining the desired vehicle speed
Accelerating the vehicle speed
Decelerating the vehicle speed
Turning the vehicle speed control system off
Canceling the speed control
Pressing and releasing the ON switch turns the speed control system on. Pressing and releasing the SET+ or
SET- switch while the vehicle is traveling at the desired speed activates the speed control system.
Tapping the SET+ or the SET- switch while in the set mode respectively, increases or decreases the maintained
vehicle speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) per tap. If the respective button is pressed and held, the vehicle speed
continues to accelerate or decelerate until the button is released.
Pressing and releasing the OFF switch, or switching the ignition switch to the OFF position, turns the speed
control system off. Applying the brake pedal puts the speed control system into the STANDBY mode. Pressing
the RESUME button, when the speed control system is in the STANDBY mode causes the vehicle to accelerate
to the last set speed. Resume does not function if the OFF button is pressed, the ignition switch is in the OFF
position, or if the current vehicle speed is below the minimum operational speed.
The clockspring provides the electrical interface between the steering column wiring and the speed control
switches in the steering wheel.
The speed control deactivator switch (part of the stoplamp switch) is provided as an additional safety feature.
When the brake pedal is applied, the speed control deactivator switch opens and removes the voltage signal
from the PCM input circuit, deactivating the speed control system.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Whenever the speed control system is engaged and active, a speed control icon on the instrument cluster (IC) is
illuminated.
The inputs to the PCM are:
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor
Digital transmission range (TR) sensor
Speed control switch
Speed control deactivator switch (part of the stoplamp switch)
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Smart junction box (SJB)
Parking brake
The outputs of the PCM are:
Speed control indicator lamp
Throttle command
The speed control system throttle position is completely controlled by the PCM through the electronically
controlled throttle body. Speed control electronics are contained entirely within the PCM.
When the speed control system is active, the PCM corrects for deviations in the actual vehicle speed by
proportionally moving the throttle plate. The PCM modulates the throttle to minimize error between the actual
vehicle speed and the desired speed.
The PCM strategy uses the throttle control for smooth accelerations.
The PCM sends a message over the controller area network (CAN) to the instrument cluster (IC) whenever the
speed control telltale should be turned on or off.
In the event of an off command or a deactivation request from any source, the speed control system carries out a
deactivation and immediately returns the throttle to the idle position.
The speed control system provides self-diagnostics. Speed control is disabled anytime an error is detected in the
system. No cluster telltale or message center messages are displayed when faults occur. Fault codes are logged
by the PCM.
An electronically controlled throttle system fault also causes the speed control system to be disabled and the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates, or a message center message is displayed.
Additionally, the following conditions cause the speed control system to deactivate:
Transmission gear selector in a position other than D or OD
Speed control set speed is over-ridden with the accelerator pedal for a period longer than 5 minutes
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Vehicle speed loss from set speed of greater than 16 km/h (10 mph) occurs
Vehicle speed falls below the minimum allowable limit of 48 km/h (30 mph)
Parking brake is applied
Speed control switch is pressed or stuck for longer than 2 minutes
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Throttle body
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 32 (10A)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Speed control switch
Speed control
deactivator switch (part
of the stoplamp switch)
Stoplamp switch
PCM
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
4. Verify the speedometer operates correctly without speed control by test driving the vehicle. If the
speedometer does not operate correctly, refer to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE
CENTER, & WARNING CHIMES article.
5. Verify the stoplamps operate correctly with the ignition switch in the ON position. If the stoplamps do not
operate correctly, refer to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article.
6. Verify the parking brake warning indicator is operating correctly. If the parking brake warning indicator
does not operate correctly, refer to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, &
WARNING CHIMES article.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
7. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
8. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM.
If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to PCM DTC CHART. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
DTC Charts
PCM DTC CHART
DTCs
Description
Cruise Control Multifunction Input A
P0579
Circuit Range/Performance
P0581
Cruise Control Multifunction Circuit High
P1572
Brake Pedal Switch Circuit
P1703
Brake Switch Out of Self-Test Range
All other
DTCs
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
REFER to the INTRODUCTION GASOLINE ENGINES article.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
The speed control is
inoperative
PCM not configured for
speed control
Stoplamp switch
Speed control switch
Digital transmission range
(TR) sensor
Vehicle speed signal
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
The speed control
indicator lamp is always
on
PCM
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Instrument cluster (IC)
PCM
REFER to INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE
CENTER, & WARNING
CHIMES article.
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Speed Control Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Speed Control for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The PCM sends a signal through circuit VES10 (WH) to the speed control switches, which passes through the
clockspring. The return signal is sent to the PCM through circuit RES08 (GN/BN) and the clockspring. When
the brake pedal is applied, the SJB sends a message to the PCM to deactivate the speed control if engaged.
The speed control deactivator switch (part of the stoplamp switch) interrupts circuit CES09 (VT/OG) removing
the voltage signal to the PCM when the brake pedal is applied. This is a redundant signal to the PCM.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
PCM not configured for speed control
Stoplamp switch
Speed control switch
Digital transmission range (TR) sensor
Vehicle speed signal
PCM
PINPOINT TEST A: THE SPEED CONTROL IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
A1 VERIFY PCM CONFIGURATION
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Programmable Parameters
Verify that the speed control is enabled in the PCM.
Is the speed control enabled?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : Enable the speed control in the PCM using the scan tool programmable parameters menu. If
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
no parameter exists, REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article to carry out PCM
programmable module installation (PMI).
A2 RETRIEVE THE RECORDED PCM DTCs FROM BOTH THE CONTINUOUS AND ONDEMAND SELF-TESTS
Review the recorded DTCs from the PCM self-test.
Are any non-speed control DTCs recorded?
YES : REFER to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article. REPAIR all PCM
DTCs and RETEST the speed control.
NO : Go to A3.
A3 CHECK THE SPEED CONTROL COMMAND SWITCH (SCCS) PID
Start the engine.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger
With the engine running, monitor the PCM SCCS PID while pressing the speed control switches as
follows:
Speed
PID
PID
Control Minimum Maximum
Switch
Value
Value
OFF 0.00 volts 1.089 volts
2.192
SET 3.057 volts
volts
3.057
SET +
3.721 volts
volts
3.721
RESUME
4.209 volts
volts
4.209
ON
4.556 volts
volts
No
4.556
4.839 volts
switch
volts
pressed
Are the PCM SCCS PID values OK?
YES : TURN the engine off. Go to A5.
NO : TURN the engine off. Go to A4.
A4 CHECK THE SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: PCM C175b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-56, circuit VES10 (WH), harness side and the
PCM C175b-57, circuit RES08 (GN/BN), harness side while pressing the speed control switches as
follows:
Speed
Resistance
Control
Value
Switch
Less than
OFF
5 ohms
298 - 304
SET ohms
596 - 608
SET +
ohms
1,101 RESUME 1,123
ohms
2,091 2,133
ON
ohms
No
4,279 switch
4,363
pressed
ohms
Are the speed control switch resistance values OK?
YES : Go to A8.
NO : INSTALL a new speed control switch. REFER to SPEED CONTROL SWITCH. TEST the
system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH (BOO) PID
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger
Monitor the PCM BOO PID.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Apply and release the brake pedal.
Does the PID value agree with the brake pedal position?
YES : Go to A6.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test B .
A6 CHECK THE DIGITAL TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SENSOR PID
Connect: PCM C175b
Apply the parking brake.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger
Monitor the PCM TR PID.
Select DRIVE.
Does the PID value agree with the transmission range selector lever position?
YES : Go to A7.
NO : REFER to AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article to diagnose the
digital TR sensor.
A7 CHECK THE VEHICLE SPEED
NOTE:
This step may require an assistant.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ABS Control Module DataLogger
Monitor and record the ABS LF_WSPD PID while driving the vehicle at 48 km/h (30 mph) as
indicated on the speedometer.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger
Monitor and record the PCM VSS (vehicle speed) PID while driving the vehicle at 48 km/h (30
mph).
Does the speed indicated by the ABS control module wheel speed PID match the PCM VSS
PID?
YES : Go to A8.
NO : REFER to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article to diagnose the output
shaft speed (OSS) sensor signal.
A8 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test B: DTC P1572 or P1703 - Brake On/Off Circuit Failure
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Speed Control for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
When the brake pedal is applied, the SJB sends a message to the PCM to deactivate the speed control if
engaged.
The speed control deactivator switch (part of the stoplamp switch) interrupts circuit CES09 (VT/OG) removing
the voltage signal to the PCM when the brake pedal is applied. This is a redundant signal to the PCM.
DTC P1572 (Brake Pedal Switch Circuit) - sets when the PCM does not sense the proper sequence of the
brake pedal input signal from both the speed control deactivator and stoplamp switches when the brake
pedal is pressed and released.
DTC P1703 (Brake Switch Out of Self-Test Range) - sets when there is an open or short in the
deactivator switch circuits or when there is an open or short in the stoplamp circuits.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Speed control deactivator switch (integral to the stoplamp switch)
ABS control module
PCM
PINPOINT TEST B: DTC P1572 OR DTC P1703 - BRAKE ON/OFF CIRCUIT FAILURE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
B1 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE STOPLAMPS
Key in ON position.
Operate the stoplamps.
Do the stoplamps operate correctly?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : REFER to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
B2 CHECK CIRCUIT CCB08 (VT/WH) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: PCM C175b
Key in ON position.
Fig. 2: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the PCM C175b-46, circuit CCB08
(VT/WH), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts with the brake pedal applied?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
B3 CHECK THE SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
While firmly applying and releasing the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the PCM
C175b-47, circuit CES09 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts with the brake pedal released and 0 volts with the brake
pedal firmly applied?
YES : Go to B7.
NO : Go to B4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
B4 CHECK CIRCUIT CBB32 (GN/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C2064
Key in ON position.
Fig. 4: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the stoplamp switch C2064-2, circuit CBB32 (GN/VT), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : VERIFY the battery junction box (BJB) fuse 32 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
B5 CHECK CIRCUIT CES09 (VT/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Fig. 5: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the stoplamp switch C2064-3, circuit CES09 (VT/OG), harness side
and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to B6.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
B6 CHECK CIRCUIT CES09 (VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the stoplamp switch C2064-3, circuit CES09 (VT/OG), harness
side and the PCM C175b-47, circuit CES09 (VT/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to B7.
B7 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test C: DTC P0579 or P0581 - Speed Control Switch Circuit Failure
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Speed Control for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
The PCM sends a signal through circuit VES10 (WH) to the speed control switches, which passes through the
clockspring. The return signal is sent to the PCM through circuit RES08 (GN/BN) and the clockspring.
DTC P0579 (Cruise Control Multifunction Input A Circuit Range/Performance) - may set when the speed
control switch circuits are open, shorted to voltage or ground.
DTC P0581 (Cruise Control Multifunction Circuit High) - may set when a speed control switch is stuck
or the speed control switch circuits are shorted to voltage or open.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Clockspring
Speed control switch
PCM
PINPOINT TEST C: DTC P0579 OR DTC P0581 - SPEED CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT FAILURE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
C1 CHECK THE SPEED CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUITRY FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: PCM C175b
Key in ON position.
Turn the parking lamps on.
Fig. 7: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the PCM C175b-56, circuit VES10 (WH), harness side and ground;
and between the PCM C175b-57, circuit RES08 (GN/BN), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : TURN the parking lamps off. Go to C2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
NO : TURN the parking lamps off. Go to C4.
C2 CHECK CIRCUITS VES10 (WH) AND RES08 (GN/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218a
Key in ON position.
Turn the parking lamps on.
Fig. 8: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the PCM C175b-56, circuit VES10 (WH), harness side and ground;
and between the PCM C175b-57, circuit RES08 (GN/BN), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : TURN the parking lamps off. Go to C3.
C3 CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Connect: Clockspring C218a
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Upper Clockspring C218b
Connect the restraint system diagnostic tools (418-F395) to the upper clockspring air bag
connector.
Connect the battery.
Key in ON position.
Turn the parking lamps on.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the PCM C175b-56, circuit VES10 (WH), harness side and ground;
and between the PCM C175b-57, circuit RES08 (GN/BN), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : INSTALL a new clockspring. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article. DISCONNECT the battery. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : INSTALL a new speed control switch. REFER to Speed Control Switch. DISCONNECT the
battery. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C4 CHECK THE SPEED CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUITRY FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-56, circuit VES10 (WH), harness side and ground;
and between the PCM C175b-57, circuit RES08 (GN/BN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to C7.
NO : Go to C5.
C5 CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Upper Clockspring C218b
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-56, circuit VES10 (WH), harness side and ground;
and between the PCM C175b-57, circuit RES08 (GN/BN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new speed control switch. REFER to Speed Control Switch. INSTALL the
driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to C6.
C6 CHECK CIRCUITS VES10 (WH) AND RES08 (GN/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Clockspring C218a
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-56, circuit VES10 (WH), harness side and ground;
and between the PCM C175b-57, circuit RES08 (GN/BN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new clockspring. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C7 CHECK THE SPEED CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUITRY FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-56, circuit VES10 (WH), harness side and the
PCM C175b-57, circuit RES08 (GN/BN), harness side.
Is the resistance between 4,279 and 4,363 ohms?
YES : Go to C10.
NO : Go to C8.
C8 CHECK CIRCUITS VES10 (GN/BK) AND RES08 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Clockspring C218a
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-56, circuit VES10 (WH), harness side and the
clockspring C218a-15, circuit VES10 (WH), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-57, RES08 (GN/BN), harness side and the
clockspring C218a-14, circuit RES08 (GN/BN), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C9 CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218a pin 15, component side and the upper
clockspring C218b pin 8, component side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218a pin 14, component side and the upper
clockspring C218b pin 9, component side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new speed control switch. REFER to Speed Control Switch. INSTALL the
driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : INSTALL a new clockspring. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C10 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article.
INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Exploded View Of Speed Control Switch - Edge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
9C888
Description
Speed control switch electrical connector
(part of 14A411)
Speed control switch
Fig. 19: Exploded View Of Speed Control Switch - MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
9C888
Description
Steering wheel controls bezel screws (4
required)
Steering wheel controls bezel
Speed control switch
Speed control switch electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Speed Control - Edge & MKX
4
-
(part of 14A441)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
MKX
1. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
2. Remove the 4 screws and the steering wheel control bezel.
All vehicles
3. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:57:56 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Exterior mirror nuts
9
lb-in
80
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
REAR VIEW MIRRORS
The main components of the rear view mirrors are:
Exterior mirror control switch
Exterior mirror cover
Exterior mirror glass
Exterior mirror glass adjustment motors
Exterior mirror plastic housing
Heated exterior mirror glass (optional)
Interior auto-dimming rear view mirror
LH exterior auto-dimming mirror glass (optional)
Memory exterior mirrors (optional)
Puddle lamps (optional)
For information on the puddle lamps, refer to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article.
Power Exterior Mirrors - Power mirrors allow the driver or passenger mirror glass to be positioned
electronically. The position of the power mirror glass is controlled by the exterior rear view mirror control
switch, which is located on the LH front door trim panel. Adjusting the exterior rear view mirror control switch
to the LH or RH position determines which power mirror glass will be controlled.
Heated Exterior Mirrors - The power exterior rear view mirrors are available with a heated mirror glass
option, which heats the mirror glass to remove frost, snow, ice and condensation. The rear window defrost
switch controls the operation of the heated exterior rear view mirrors. The heated exterior rear view mirrors
only operate when the rear window defrost system is on.
Memory Exterior Mirrors - The memory mirror function recalls the preferred positioning of the LH and RH
exterior mirror glass that is retained in the driver seat module (DSM) memory. The memory mirror function is
activated by the door mounted switches or the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter. When a memory
position is recalled by the operator, the LH and RH exterior mirror glass will automatically adjust to the
preferred position. The DSM is capable of setting a DTC for the memory mirror system when a system concern
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:18
11:07:09 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
exists. For information on the DSM and Memory Position Programming, refer to SEATING article.
Auto-Dimming Rear View Mirror(s) - The interior rear view mirror and LH exterior mirror may be equipped
with an auto-dimming feature. This feature automatically reduces the glare caused by headlamps reflecting in
the mirror. The auto-dimming feature is activated when the ignition is in the RUN or ACC position. The interior
rear view mirror adjusts the reflectance level of the interior rear view mirror and LH exterior mirror to eliminate
unwanted glare. The reflectance level of the mirror glass is variable and depends on the amount of rear glare in
relation to ambient light conditions in front of the interior rear view mirror. To provide increased visibility when
backing up, the interior rear view mirror will automatically return to a high reflectance mode whenever the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
REAR VIEW MIRRORS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Principles of Operation
Power Exterior Mirrors
Adjusting the exterior rear view mirror control switch to the LH or RH position determines which power mirror
glass will be controlled.
The exterior mirrors use a jumper harness between the vehicle wire harness connector and the exterior mirror
motor. The exterior mirror jumper harness is integral to the exterior mirror. If a concern with the exterior mirror
jumper harness exists and cannot be repaired, a new exterior mirror must be installed.
Memory Exterior Mirror
The memory exterior mirror feature is controlled by the driver seat module (DSM). The power driver seat
positions are also stored and recalled with the memory exterior mirror positions. The memory exterior mirror
function recalls the preferred positioning of the LH and RH exterior mirror motors when the transmission is in
the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the door mounted switches or the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
are activated. The DSM constantly tracks the position of the LH and RH exterior mirror motors by using the
potentiometers in the LH and RH exterior mirror motors. The position of the LH and RH exterior mirror motors
are stored in the DSM memory as long as the DSM retains power. When a memory position is recalled by the
operator, the DSM powers the LH and RH exterior mirror motors simultaneously and monitors the LH and RH
potentiometer circuits. When the stored memory position is reached, the DSM removes the voltage from the LH
and RH exterior mirror motors. If the exterior mirror control switch is operated during a memory recall, the
DSM stops the recall and responds to the exterior mirror control switch command. The DSM is capable of
setting a DTC for the memory mirror system when a system concern exists.
For information on the DSM and memory position programming, refer to SEATING article.
Heated Exterior Mirror
The heated exterior rear view mirrors only operate when the heated rear window is ON. The heated rear
window switch controls the operation of the heated exterior rear view mirrors. The heated rear window switch is
an integral part of the HVAC module and cannot be replaced separately. The heated exterior rear view mirror
power is supplied by the heated mirror relay.
Auto-Dimming Mirrors
The interior rear view and LH exterior mirror may be equipped with an auto-dimming feature. This feature
automatically reduces the glare caused by headlamps reflecting in the mirror. The auto-dimming feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE. Power is supplied to the auto-dimming interior mirror when the
ignition is in the RUN or ACC position.
The interior auto-dimming rear view mirror has 2 photoelectric sensors that detect forward and rearward light
conditions. Based on those inputs, the interior rear view mirror adjusts the reflectance level of the interior rear
view mirror and LH exterior mirror to eliminate unwanted glare. The reflectance level of the mirror glass is
variable and depends on the amount of rear glare in relation to ambient light conditions in front of the interior
rear view mirror.
When the forward sensor detects daytime conditions, the rearward sensor is inactive and the mirror stays in a
high reflectance mode. When the forward sensor detects nighttime conditions, the rearward sensor is active and
detects glare from the headlights of vehicles approaching from the rear, or other glare producing light sources.
To provide increased visibility when backing up, the interior rear view and LH exterior mirror will
automatically return to a high reflectance mode whenever the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If the forward or rearward sensors are blocked, the interior auto-dimming rear view and LH exterior mirror
might not work correctly.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Inspect the components of the exterior mirror system to determine if any of the following mechanical or
electrical concerns apply:
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Mechanical
Electrical
Exterior mirror
Exterior mirror control
switch
Exterior mirror glass
Interior rear view mirror
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse(s):
12 (7.5A)
31 (10A)
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 28 (15A)
DSM
Heated mirror relay
Exterior mirror control
switch
Exterior mirror motor
Exterior mirror
Exterior mirror glass
Interior rear view mirror
Driver seat module
(DSM)
Loose or corroded
connections
Wiring harness
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
7.
8.
9.
10.
DSM.
Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the DSM.
If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DRIVER SEAT MODULE (DSM) DTC
CHARTt. For all other DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart - Rear View Mirrors or Go to
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH).
DRIVER SEAT MODULE (DSM) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
Mirror Driver Up/Down Motor
B1667
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Stalled
Mirror Driver Right/Left Motor
B1668
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Stalled
Mirror Passenger Up/Down Motor
B1669
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Stalled
Mirror Passenger Right/Left
B1670
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Motor Stalled
Mirror Driver Vertical Switch
B1733
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Circuit Failure
Mirror Driver Horizontal Switch
B1737
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Circuit Failure
Mirror Passenger Vertical Switch
B1741
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Circuit Failure
Mirror Passenger Horizontal
B1745
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Switch Circuit Failure
Mirror Driver Drive Circuit
B2223
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Failure
Mirror Passenger Drive Circuit
B2224
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Failure
Mirror Passenger Horizontal
Feedback Potentiometer Circuit Go to Pinpoint Test D .
B2312
Failure
Mirror Passenger Horizontal
B2314
Feedback Potentiometer Circuit Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Short to Battery
Mirror Passenger Vertical
B2316
Feedback Potentiometer Circuit Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Failure
Mirror Passenger Vertical
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
B2318
B2320
B2322
B2324
B2326
Feedback Potentiometer Circuit
Short to Battery
Mirror Driver Horizontal
Feedback Potentiometer Circuit
Failure
Mirror Driver Horizontal
Feedback Potentiometer Circuit
Short to Battery
Mirror Driver Vertical Feedback
Potentiometer Circuit Failure
Mirror Driver Vertical Feedback
Potentiometer Circuit Short to
Battery
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article.
All other DTCs Symptom Chart - Rear View Mirrors
Symptom Chart - Rear View Mirrors
Condition
Possible Sources
The mirrors are inoperative puddle/approach lamp
The mirrors are inoperative non-memory mirrors
A single mirror is inoperative non-memory mirrors
A single mirror does not
function with switch logic non-memory mirrors
The memory mirror is
Fuse
Circuitry
Exterior mirrors
Action
REFER to INTERIOR
LIGHTING article.
Fuse
Circuitry
Exterior mirror control
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Circuitry
Exterior mirror control
switch
Exterior mirror motor
Exterior mirror motor
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Circuitry
Exterior mirror motor
Exterior mirror control
switch
Exterior mirror
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Fuse
Driver seat module (DSM)
Circuitry
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
inoperative
The heated exterior mirror is
inoperative - both heated
exterior mirrors
The heated exterior mirror is
inoperative - LH heated
exterior mirror
The heated exterior mirror is
inoperative - RH heated
exterior mirror
The auto-dimming mirror does
not operate correctly
Exterior mirror motor
Exterior mirror control
switch
Exterior mirror
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Fuse(s)
Heated mirror relay
Circuitry
HVAC module
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Left heated exterior mirror
glass
Circuitry
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Right heated exterior mirror
glass
Circuitry
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
If possible, REMOVE
the obstruction. If the
obstruction cannot be
removed, go to Pinpoint
Test H to test the autodimming mirror for
correct function.
None. Any light source
the rearward-facing
sensor is exposed to can
be considered glare.
None. Ambient light
conditions are similar to
nighttime.
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
Obstructed rearward-facing
sensor:
stickers, window
decals, tags
non-OEM window
tinting
Obstructed forward-facing
sensor:
stickers, window
decals, tags
non-OEM window
tinting
Light source near or inside
of vehicle
Vehicle inside garage or
tunnel
Fuse
Circuitry
Auto-dimming interior
mirror
LH exterior rear view
mirror
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
NOTE:
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) symptoms should be identified using the
diagnostic tools that are available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of
their uses and a glossary of common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article. Since it is possible any one of multiple systems may be
the cause of a symptom, it may be necessary to use a process of elimination
type of diagnostic approach to pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the
causal system for the symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article for the next likely system and continue diagnosis.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Condition
Possible Sources
Mirror vibrates/loose
Action
Mirror glass adjustment
motor screws loose
Exterior mirror mounting
nuts loose
REMOVE mirror glass and
TIGHTEN mirror glass
adjustment motor screws.
TIGHTEN nuts to 9 N.m (80
lb-in).
PRESS the center of the
exterior mirror glass up,
down, left and right to make
sure that the exterior mirror
glass is seated correctly. If
the exterior mirror glass is
still loose, REMOVE the
exterior mirror glass and
INSPECT the exterior mirror
backing plate for damage. If
the exterior mirror backing
plate is damaged, INSTALL
a new exterior mirror glass.
REFER to Exterior Mirror
Glass.
If possible, REMOVE
aftermarket air
deflector/stone shield, then
ROAD TEST the vehicle. If
concern is no longer present,
ADVISE customer that
aftermarket components
were causing undesired
vibration.
VERIFY gasket is present
and in good condition.
REPOSITION gasket
NOTE:
Compare the LH and RH
exterior mirror glass to
verify that the exterior
mirror glass is loose.
Wind noise
Mirror glass loose
Aftermarket air
deflector/stone shields
Foam gasket between the
exterior mirror and door is
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
missing or damaged
between exterior mirror and
door frame if necessary.
Exterior mirror is not
correctly fitted to the door
VERIFY that there are no
gaps between the exterior
mirror and the door. If
necessary, LOOSEN the
exterior mirror nuts and
REPOSITION the exterior
mirror.
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Mirrors are Inoperative - Non-Memory Mirrors
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Mirrors for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the exterior mirror control switch receives power through circuit SBP12 (GN/RD) and
ground through circuit GD133 (BK). The exterior mirror control switch uses circuit CPM23 (GY) as the
common circuit for both exterior mirror up/down and right/left movement.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Exterior mirror control switch
PINPOINT TEST A: THE MIRRORS ARE INOPERATIVE - NON-MEMORY MIRRORS
A1 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH - CIRCUIT
SBP12 (GN/RD)
Disconnect: Exterior Mirror Control Switch C527
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between exterior mirror control switch C527-3, circuit SBP12 (GN/RD)
harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 12 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST
the system for normal operation
A2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 2: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between exterior mirror control switch C527-1, circuit GD133 (BK) harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A3 CHECK CIRCUIT CPM23 (GY) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 3: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between exterior mirror control switch C527-6, circuit CPM23 (GY) harness
side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to A4.
A4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPM23 (GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 4: Checking Circuit For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between exterior mirror control switch C527-6, circuit CPM23 (GY)
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK CIRCUIT CPM23 (GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: LH Exterior Mirror C516
Fig. 5: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH exterior mirror C516-1, circuit CPM23 (GY) harness side and
exterior mirror control switch C527-6, circuit CPM23 (GY) harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new exterior mirror control switch. REFER to Exterior Mirror Control
Switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test B: A Single Mirror is Inoperative - Non-Memory Mirror
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Mirrors for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the exterior mirror control switch uses circuit CPM23 (GY) as the common circuit for
both exterior mirror down/up and left/right movement.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Exterior mirror control switch
Exterior mirror motor
Exterior mirror
PINPOINT TEST B: A SINGLE MIRROR IS INOPERATIVE - NON-MEMORY MIRRORS
B1 CHECK THE LH EXTERIOR MIRROR
Set the exterior mirror control switch to the LH mirror position.
Use the exterior mirror control switch to operate the LH exterior mirror.
Does the LH exterior mirror operate?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : Go to B4.
B2 CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Exterior Mirror Control Switch C527
Carry out the Exterior Mirror Control Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the exterior mirror control switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : INSTALL a new exterior mirror control switch. REFER to Exterior Mirror Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
B3 CHECK CIRCUIT CPM23 (GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: RH Exterior Mirror C622
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RH exterior mirror C622-1, circuit CPM23 (GY) harness side and
exterior mirror control switch C527-6, circuit CPM23 (GY) harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : CHECK the RH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the exterior
mirror motor for open circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is not OK,
REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new exterior
mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new exterior mirror
motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
B4 CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Exterior Mirror Control Switch C527
Carry out the Exterior Mirror Control Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the exterior mirror control switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : INSTALL a new exterior mirror control switch. REFER to Exterior Mirror Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
B5 CHECK CIRCUIT CPM23 (GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: LH Exterior Mirror C516
Fig. 7: Measuring Resistance
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH exterior mirror C516-1, circuit CPM23 (GY) harness side and
exterior mirror control switch C527-6, circuit CPM23 (GY) harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : CHECK the LH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the exterior
mirror motor for open circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is not OK,
REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new exterior
mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new exterior mirror
motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test C: A Single Mirror Does Not Function with Switch Logic - Non-Memory Mirrors
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Mirrors for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The exterior mirror switch controls the LH exterior mirror movement by switching voltage and ground to
circuits CPM16 (BN/BU), CPM17 (BU/GN) and CPM23 (GY). The exterior mirror switch controls the RH
exterior mirror movement by switching voltage and ground to circuits CPM20 (BN/WH), CPM21 (YE/VT) and
CPM23 (GY).
When the LH/RH exterior mirror motor receives power through circuit CPM16 (BN/BU) or CPM20
(BN/WH) and ground through circuit CPM23 (GY), the LH or RH exterior mirror motor will operate
right.
When LH/RH exterior mirror motor receives ground through circuit CPM16 (BN/BU) or CPM20
(BN/WH) and power through circuit CPM23 (GY), the LH or RH exterior mirror motor will operate left.
When the LH/RH exterior mirror motor receives power through circuit CPM17 (BU/GN) or CPM21
(YE/VT) and ground through circuit CPM23 (GY), the LH or RH exterior mirror motor will operate
upward.
When LH/RH exterior mirror motor receives ground through circuit CPM17 (BU/GN) or CPM21
(YE/VT) and power through circuit CPM23 (GY), the LH or RH exterior mirror motor will operate
downward.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Exterior mirror control switch
Exterior mirror motor
Exterior mirror
PINPOINT TEST C: A SINGLE MIRROR DOES NOT FUNCTION WITH SWITCH LOGIC - NONMEMORY MIRRORS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
C1 CHECK MIRROR MOVEMENT (LEFT/RIGHT)
Operate the LH and RH exterior mirrors in the left and right direction.
Do the exterior mirrors move left and right?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : Go to C3.
C2 CHECK MIRROR MOVEMENT (UP/DOWN)
Operate the LH and RH exterior mirrors in the up and down direction.
Do the exterior mirrors move up and down?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to C4.
C3 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE MIRROR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Exterior Mirror C516 (LH) or C622 (RH)
Fig. 8: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Position the exterior mirror control switch to the LH or RH mirror
position.
While operating the exterior mirror control switch in the RIGHT position, measure the voltage
between ground and exterior mirror:
(LH) C516-3, circuit CPM16 (BN/BU) harness side.
(RH) C622-3, circuit CPM20 (BN/WH) harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : CHECK the LH or RH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the
exterior mirror motor for open or shorted circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper
harness is not OK, REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired,
INSTALL a new exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK,
INSTALL a new exterior mirror motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. TEST the system for
normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to C5.
C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE MIRROR
Disconnect: Inoperative Exterior Mirror C516 (LH) or C622 (RH)
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Position the exterior mirror control switch to the LH or RH mirror
position.
While operating the exterior mirror control switch in the UP position, measure the voltage between
ground and exterior mirror:
(LH) C516-2, circuit CPM17 (BU/GN) harness side.
(RH) C622-2, circuit CPM21 (YE/VT) harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : CHECK the LH or RH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the
exterior mirror motor for open or shorted circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper
harness is not OK, REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired,
INSTALL a new exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK,
INSTALL a new exterior mirror motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : Go to C6.
C5 CHECK CIRCUIT CPM16 (BN/BU) OR CIRCUIT CPM20 (BN/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Exterior Mirror Control Switch C527
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Inoperative LH mirror: Measure the resistance between exterior mirror control switch C527-8,
circuit CPM16 (BN/BU) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-3, circuit CPM16 (BN/BU)
harness side.
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Inoperative RH mirror: Measure the resistance between exterior mirror control switch C527-7,
circuit CPM20 (BN/WH) harness side and RH exterior mirror C622-3, circuit CPM20 (BN/WH)
harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new exterior mirror control switch. REFER to Exterior Mirror Control
Switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
C6 CHECK CIRCUIT CPM17 (BU/GN) OR CIRCUIT CPM21 (YE/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Exterior Mirror Control Switch C527
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Inoperative LH mirror: Measure the resistance between exterior mirror control switch C527-5,
circuit CPM17 (BU/GN) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-2, circuit CPM17 (BU/GN)
harness side.
Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Inoperative RH mirror: Measure the resistance between exterior mirror control switch C527-2,
circuit CPM21 (YE/VT) harness side and RH exterior mirror C622-2, circuit CPM21 (YE/VT)
harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new exterior mirror control switch. REFER to Exterior Mirror Control
Switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test D: The Memory Mirror is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Mirrors for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the exterior mirror control switch receives power from circuit SBP12 (GN/RD) and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
ground from circuit GD133 (BK). The exterior mirror control switch sends input to the driver seat module
(DSM) for the LH exterior mirror by switching power and ground to circuits CPM16 (BU/BN), CPM17
(BU/GN) and CPM23 (GY), and for the RH exterior mirror by switching power and ground to circuits CPM20
(BN/WH), CPM21 (YE/VT) and CPM23 (GY). The DSM controls the vertical movement of the exterior mirror
motors by supplying power and ground signals to the exterior mirror motor up/down circuits CPM26 (WH),
CPM29 (GN), CPM31 (YE/GY) and CPM34 (WH/BN). The DSM controls the horizontal movement of the LH
and RH exterior mirror motors by supplying power and ground signals to the exterior mirror motor left/right
circuits CPM26 (WH), CPM28 (BU/BN), CPM31 (YE/GY) and CPM33 (WH/VT).
The DSM supplies the LH and RH exterior mirror feedback potentiometer reference voltage through circuit
LPM30 (GY/VT) and ground through circuit RPM30 (YE). The DSM receives feedback from the LH exterior
mirror feedback potentiometer through circuit (left/right) VPM35 (YE/BU) and circuit (up/down) VPM36
(BN/YE). The DSM receives feedback from the RH exterior mirror feedback potentiometer through circuit
(left/right) VPM37 (BU/OG) and circuit (up/down) VPM38 (BN/GN).
DTC Description
Fault Trigger Conditions
Open or incorrect mirror motor position
B1667 - Mirror Driver Up/Down Motor Stalled
reported to the DSM during On-Demand Self
Test.
Open or incorrect mirror motor position
B1668 - Mirror Driver Right/Left Motor Stalled
reported to the DSM during On-Demand Self
Test.
Open or incorrect mirror motor position
reported to the DSM during On-Demand Self
B1669 - Mirror Passenger Up/Down Motor Stalled
Test.
Open or incorrect mirror motor position
B1670 - Mirror Passenger Right/Left Motor Stalled
reported to the DSM during On-Demand Self
Test.
Short to ground or battery detected by the
B1733 - Mirror Driver Vertical Switch Circuit Failure
DSM.
Short to ground or battery detected by the
B1737 - Mirror Driver Horizontal Switch Circuit Failure
DSM.
B1741 - Mirror Passenger Vertical Switch Circuit
Short to ground or battery detected by the
Failure
DSM.
B1745 - Mirror Passenger Horizontal Switch Circuit
Short to ground or battery detected by the
Failure
DSM.
Short to ground or battery detected by the
B2223 - Mirror Driver Drive Circuit Failure
DSM.
Short to ground or battery detected by the
B2224 - Mirror Passenger Drive Circuit Failure
DSM.
B2312 - Mirror Passenger Horizontal Feedback
Open or short to ground detected by the DSM.
Potentiometer Circuit Failure
B2314 - Mirror Passenger Horizontal Feedback
Short to battery detected by the DSM.
Potentiometer Circuit Short to Battery
B2316 - Mirror Passenger Vertical Feedback
Open or short to ground detected by the DSM.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Potentiometer Circuit Failure
B2318 - Mirror Passenger Vertical Feedback
Potentiometer Circuit Short to Battery
B2320 - Mirror Driver Horizontal Feedback
Potentiometer Circuit Failure
B2322 - Mirror Driver Horizontal Feedback
Potentiometer Circuit Short to Battery
B2324 - Mirror Driver Vertical Feedback Potentiometer
Circuit Failure
B2326 - Mirror Driver Vertical Feedback Potentiometer
Circuit Short to Battery
Short to battery detected by the DSM.
Open or short to ground detected by the DSM.
Short to battery detected by the DSM.
Open or short to ground detected by the DSM.
Short to battery detected by the DSM.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Exterior mirror control switch
Exterior mirror motor
Exterior mirror
DSM
PINPOINT TEST D: THE MEMORY MIRROR IS INOPERATIVE
D1 RETRIEVE THE DTCs FROM THE DSM
Use the recorded DSM DTCs from the continuous and on-demand self tests.
Are any DTCs retrieved?
YES : If DTC B1667 or B1668 - If other DTCs are present, DIAGNOSE them first. If no other
DTCs are present, INSPECT the LH exterior mirror motor for foreign material, damage or a
binding condition. If no condition is found, Go to D12.
If DTC B1669 or B1670 - If other DTCs are present, DIAGNOSE them first. If no other DTCs are
present, INSPECT the RH exterior mirror motor for foreign material, damage or a binding
condition. If no condition is found, Go to D14.
If DTC B1733, B1737, B1741 or B1745 - CARRY OUT the exterior mirror control switch
component test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING. If the switch tests OK, go to D16.
If DTC B2223, go to D18.
If DTC B2224, go to D21.
If DTC B2312, B2316, B2320 or B2324, go to D24.
If DTC B2314, B2318, B2322 or B2326, go to D28.
NO : Go to D2.
D2 CHECK OPERATION OF THE MIRRORS FROM THE EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL
SWITCH
Operate the mirrors using the exterior mirror control switch.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Do the mirrors operate from the exterior mirror control switch?
YES : Go to D9.
NO : Go to D3.
D3 CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Exterior Mirror Control Switch C527
Carry out the Exterior Mirror Control Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the exterior mirror control switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : INSTALL a new exterior mirror control switch. REFER to Exterior Mirror Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
D4 CHECK CIRCUIT SBP12 (GN/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 14: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and exterior mirror control switch C527-3, circuit SBP12
(GN/RD) harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to D5.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 12 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST
the system for normal operation.
D5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 15: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and exterior mirror control switch C527-1, circuit GD133
(BK) harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
D6 CHECK CIRCUIT CPM23 (GY) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299D
Fig. 16: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between exterior mirror control switch C527-6, circuit CPM23 (GY) harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to D7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
D7 CHECK CIRCUIT CPM23 (GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between exterior mirror control switch C527-6, circuit CPM23 (GY)
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
D8 CHECK CIRCUITS CPM16 (BU/BN), CPM17 (BU/GN), CPM20 (BN/WH), CPM21 (YE/VT)
AND CPM23 (GY) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 18: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between exterior mirror control switch:
C527-2, circuit CPM21 (YE/VT) harness side and DSM C3299D-17, circuit CPM21
(YE/VT) harness side.
C527-5, circuit CPM17 (BU/GN) harness side and DSM C3299D-19, circuit CPM17
(BU/GN) harness side.
C527-6, circuit CPM23 (GY) harness side and DSM C3299D-16, circuit CPM23 (GY)
harness side.
C527-7, circuit CPM20 (BN/WH) harness side and DSM C3299D-18, circuit CPM20
(BN/WH) harness side.
C527-8, circuit CPM16 (BU/BN) harness side and DSM C3299D-20, circuit CPM16
(BU/BN) harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D30.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation.
D9 CHECK CIRCUIT RPM30 (YE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299D
Key in ON position.
Fig. 19: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DSM C3299D-11, circuit RPM30 (YE) harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to D10.
D10 CHECK CIRCUIT LPM30 (GY/VT) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Exterior Mirror C516 and C622
Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299D-1, circuit LPM30 (GY/VT) harness side and
ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to D11.
D11 CHECK CIRCUITS RPM30 (YE) AND LPM30 (GY/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 21: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM:
C3299D-1, circuit LPM30 (GY/VT) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-10, circuit
LPM30 (GY/VT) harness side.
C3299D-11, circuit RPM30 (YE) harness side and RH exterior mirror C516-12, circuit
RPM30 (YE) harness side.
C3299D-1, circuit LPM30 (GY/VT) harness side and LH exterior mirror C622-10, circuit
LPM30 (GY/VT) harness side.
C3299D-11, circuit RPM30 (YE) harness side and RH exterior mirror C622-12, circuit
RPM30 (YE) harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : CHECK the LH or RH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the
exterior mirror motor for open or shorted circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper
harness is not OK, REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired,
INSTALL a new LH or RH exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is
OK, INSTALL a new LH or RH exterior mirror motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor.
CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation.
D12 CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR FOR VOLTAGE FROM THE DSM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Exterior Mirror C516
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DDM DataLogger
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 22: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DTC B1667: Measure the voltage between LH exterior mirror C516-1, circuit CPM29 (GN)
harness side and ground while toggling the LH exterior mirror DSM PID DR_UP to ON; and
between LH exterior mirror C516-2, circuit CPM26 (WH) harness side and ground while toggling
the LH exterior mirror DSM PID DR_DOWN to ON.
Fig. 23: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DTC B1668: Measure the voltage between LH exterior mirror C516-3, circuit CPM26 (WH)
harness side and ground while toggling the LH exterior mirror DSM PID DR_LEFT to ON; and
between LH exterior mirror C516-4, circuit CPM28 (BU/BN) harness side and ground while
toggling the LH exterior mirror DSM PID DR_RIGHT to ON.
Do the voltages momentarily change from 0 volt to greater than 10 volts when the active
command is toggled ON?
YES : CHECK the LH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the exterior
mirror motor for shorted and open circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness
is not OK, REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new
LH exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new LH
exterior mirror motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : Go to D13.
D13 CHECK CIRCUITS CPM26 (WH), CPM28 (BU/BN) AND CPM29 (GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: DSM C3299D
Fig. 24: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DTC B1667: Measure the resistance between DSM:
C3299D-2, circuit CPM26 (WH) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-2, circuit CPM26
(WH) harness side.
C3299D-4, circuit CPM29 (GN) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-1, circuit CPM29
(GN) harness side.
Fig. 25: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DTC B1668: Measure the resistance between DDM:
C3299D-2, circuit CPM26 (WH) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-3, circuit CPM26
(WH) harness side.
C3299D-5, circuit CPM28 (BU/BN) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-4, circuit
CPM28 (BU/BN) harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D30.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
D14 CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR FOR VOLTAGE FROM THE DSM
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: RH Exterior Mirror C622
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DSM DataLogger
Fig. 26: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DTC B1669: Measure the voltage between RH exterior mirror C622-1, circuit CPM34 (WH/BN)
harness side and ground while toggling the RH exterior mirror DSM PID PR_UP to ON; and
between RH exterior mirror C622-2, circuit CPM31 (YE/GY) harness side and ground while
toggling the RH exterior mirror DSM PID PR_DOWN to ON.
Fig. 27: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DTC B1670: Measure the voltage between RH exterior mirror C622-3, circuit CPM31 (YE/GY)
harness side and ground while toggling the RH exterior mirror DSM PID PR_LEFT to ON; and
between RH exterior mirror C622-4, circuit CPM33 (WH/VT) harness side and ground while
toggling the RH exterior mirror DSM PID PR_RIGHT to ON.
Do the voltages momentarily change from 0 volt to greater than 10 volts when the active
command is toggled ON?
YES : CHECK the RH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the exterior
mirror motor for shorted and open circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness
is not OK, REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new
RH exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new RH
exterior mirror motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
for normal operation.
NO : Go to D15.
D15 CHECK CIRCUITS CPM31 (YE/GY), CPM33 (WH/VT) AND CPM34 (WH/BN) FOR AN
OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299D
Fig. 28: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DTC B1669: Measure the resistance between DSM:
C3299D-7, circuit CPM34 (WH/BN) harness side and RH exterior mirror C622-1, circuit
CPM34 (WH/BN) harness side.
C3299D-8, circuit CPM31 (YE/GY) harness side and RH exterior mirror C622-2, circuit
CPM31 (YE/GY) harness side.
Fig. 29: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DTC B1670: Measure the resistance between DSM:
C3299D-6, circuit CPM33 (WH/VT) harness side and RH exterior mirror C622-4, circuit
CPM33 (WH/VT) harness side.
C3299D-8, circuit CPM31 (YE/GY) harness side and RH exterior mirror C622-3, circuit
CPM31 (YE/GY) harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to D30.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
D16 CHECK CIRCUITS CPM16 (BU/BN), CPM17 (BU/GN), CPM20 (BN/WH) OR CPM21
(YE/VT) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Exterior Mirror Control Switch C527
Disconnect: DSM C3299D
Key in ON position.
Fig. 30: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and exterior mirror control switch:
DTC B1733: C527-5, circuit CPM17 (BU/GN) harness side.
DTC B1737: C527-8, circuit CPM16 (BN/BU) harness side.
DTC B1741: C527-2, circuit CPM21 (YE/VT) harness side.
DTC B1745: C527-7, circuit CPM20 (BN/WH) harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to D17.
D17 CHECK CIRCUITS CPM16 (BU/BN), CPM17 (BU/GN), CPM20 (BN/WH) OR CPM21
(YE/VT) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and exterior mirror control switch:
DTC B1733: C527-5, circuit CPM17 (BU/GN) harness side.
DTC B1737: C527-8, circuit CPM16 (BN/BU) harness side.
DTC B1741: C527-2, circuit CPM21 (YE/VT) harness side.
DTC B1745: C527-7, circuit CPM20 (BN/WH) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to D30.
D18 CHECK CIRCUITS CPM26 (WH), CPM28 (BU/BN) AND CPM29 (GN) FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299D
Key in ON position.
Fig. 32: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and DSM:
C3299D-2, circuit CPM26 (WH) harness side.
C3299D-4, circuit CPM29 (GN) harness side.
C3299D-5, circuit CPM28 (BU/BN) harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to D19.
D19 CHECK CIRCUITS CPM26 (WH), CPM28 (BU/BN) AND CPM29 (GN) FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 33: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and DSM:
C3299D-2, circuit CPM26 (WH) harness side.
C3299D-4, circuit CPM29 (GN) harness side.
C3299D-5, circuit CPM28 (BU/BN) harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D30.
NO : Go to D20.
D20 CHECK THE LH EXTERIOR MIRROR FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Exterior Mirror C516
Fig. 34: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between ground and DSM:
C3299D-2, circuit CPM26 (WH) harness side.
C3299D-4, circuit CPM29 (GN) harness side.
C3299D-5, circuit CPM28 (BU/BN) harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : CHECK the LH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the exterior
mirror motor for shorted circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is not OK,
REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new LH
exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new LH
exterior mirror motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
D21 CHECK CIRCUITS CPM31 (YE/GY), CPM33 (WH/VT) AND CPM34 (WH/BN) FOR A
SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299D
Key in ON position.
Fig. 35: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and DSM:
C3299D-6, circuit CPM33 (WH/VT) harness side.
C3299D-7, circuit CPM34 (WH/BN) harness side.
C3299D-8, circuit CPM31 (YE/GY) harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to D22.
D22 CHECK CIRCUITS CPM31 (YE/GY), CPM33 (WH/VT) AND CPM34 (WH/BN) FOR A
SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 36: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and DSM:
C3299D-6, circuit CPM33 (WH/VT) harness side.
C3299D-7, circuit CPM34 (WH/BN) harness side.
C3299D-8, circuit CPM31 (YE/GY) harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D30.
NO : Go to D23.
D23 CHECK THE RH EXTERIOR MIRROR FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: RH Exterior Mirror C622
Fig. 37: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and DSM:
C3299D-6, circuit CPM33 (WH/VT) harness side.
C3299D-7, circuit CPM34 (WH/BN) harness side.
C3299D-8, circuit CPM31 (YE/GY) harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : CHECK the RH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the exterior
mirror motor for shorted circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is not OK,
REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new RH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new RH
exterior mirror motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
D24 CHECK THE LH AND RH EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299D
Fig. 38: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and DSM:
DTC B2312: C3299D-15, circuit VPM37 (BU/OG) harness side.
DTC B2316: C3299D-14, circuit VPM38 (BN/GN) harness side.
DTC B2320: C3299D-13, circuit VPM35 (YE/BU) harness side.
DTC B2324: C3299D-12, circuit VPM36 (BN/YE) harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D26.
NO : Go to D25.
D25 CHECK CIRCUITS VPM35 (YE/BU), VPM36 (BN/YE), VPM37 (BU/OG) AND VPM38
(BN/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: DTC B2312 or B2316: RH Exterior Mirror C622
Disconnect: DTC B2320 or B2324: LH Exterior Mirror C516
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 39: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and DSM:
DTC B2312: C3299D-15, circuit VPM37 (BU/OG) harness side.
DTC B2316: C3299D-14, circuit VPM38 (BN/GN) harness side.
DTC B2320: C3299D-13, circuit VPM35 (YE/BU) harness side.
DTC B2324: C3299D-12, circuit VPM36 (BN/YE) harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : CHECK the LH or RH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the
exterior mirror motor for shorted circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is
not OK, REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new
LH or RH exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a
new LH or RH exterior mirror motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. CLEAR the DTCs.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
D26 CHECK THE LH OR RH MIRRORS FOR AN INTERNAL OPEN
Fig. 40: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DTC B2312 or B2316: Measure the resistance between DSM C3299D-15, circuit VPM37
(BU/OG) harness side and DSM C3299D-14, circuit VPM38 (BN/GN) harness side.
Fig. 41: Measuring Resistance
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DTC B2320 or B2324: Measure the resistance between DSM C3299D-12, circuit VPM36
(BN/YE) harness side and DSM C3299D-13, circuit VPM35 (YE/BU) harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D30.
NO : Go to D27.
D27 CHECK CIRCUITS VPM35 (YE/BU), VPM36 (BN/YE), VPM37 (BU/OG) AND VPM38
(BN/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: DTC B2312 or B2316: RH Exterior Mirror C622
Disconnect: DTC B2320 or B2324: LH Exterior Mirror C516
Fig. 42: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM:
DTC B2312: C3299D-15, circuit VPM37 (BU/OG) harness side and RH exterior mirror
C622-11, circuit VPM37 (BU/OG) harness side.
DTC B2316: C3299D-14, circuit VPM38 (BN/GN) harness side and RH exterior mirror
C622-9, circuit VPM38 (BN/GN) harness side.
DTC B2320: C3299D-13, circuit VPM35 (YE/BU) harness side and LH exterior mirror
C516-11, circuit VPM35 (YE/BU) harness side.
DTC B2324: C3299D-12, circuit VPM36 (BN/YE) harness side and LH exterior mirror
C516-9, circuit VPM36 (BN/YE) harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : CHECK the LH or RH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the
exterior mirror motor for open circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is
not OK, REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new
LH or RH exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a
new LH or RH exterior mirror motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. CLEAR the DTCs.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
D28 CHECK THE LH AND RH EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299D
Key in ON position.
Fig. 43: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and DSM:
DTC B2314: C3299D-15, circuit VPM37 (BU/OG) harness side.
DTC B2318: C3299D-14, circuit VPM38 (BN/GN) harness side.
DTC B2322: C3299D-13, circuit VPM35 (YE/BU) harness side.
DTC B2326: C3299D-12, circuit VPM36 (BN/YE) harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to D29.
NO : Go to D30.
D29 CHECK CIRCUITS VPM35 (YE/BU), VPM36 (BN/YE), VPM37 (BU/OG) AND VPM38
(BN/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DTC B2314 or B2318: RH Exterior Mirror C622
Disconnect: DTC B2322 or B2326: LH Exterior Mirror C516
Key in ON position.
Fig. 44: Measuring Voltage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and DSM:
DTC B2314: C3299D-15, circuit VPM37 (BU/OG) harness side.
DTC B2318: C3299D-14, circuit VPM38 (BN/GN) harness side.
DTC B2322: C3299D-13, circuit VPM35 (YE/BU) harness side.
DTC B2326: C3299D-12, circuit VPM36 (BN/YE) harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : CHECK the LH or RH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the
exterior mirror motor for shorted circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is
not OK, REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new
LH or RH exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a
new LH or RH exterior mirror motor. REFER to Exterior Mirror Motor. CLEAR the DTCs.
TEST the system for normal operation.
D30 CHECK THE DSM FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Disconnect all DSM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all DSM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test E: The Heated Exterior Mirror is Inoperative - Both Heated Exterior Mirrors
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Heated Windows for schematic and connector
information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Mirrors for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
When the rear window defrost switch is depressed on the HVAC module, the HVAC module grounds circuit
CH122 (WH/OG) and the heated mirror relay closes. When the heated mirror relay is closed, power is supplied
to the LH and RH exterior mirrors through circuit CRD13 (GN/VT). The LH exterior mirror receives ground
through circuit GD133 (BK). The RH exterior mirror receives ground through circuit GD140 (BK/GN).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heated mirror relay
HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST E: THE HEATED EXTERIOR MIRROR IS INOPERATIVE - BOTH HEATED
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
E1 CHECK THE POWER TO THE HEATED MIRROR RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Heated Mirror Relay
Key in ON position.
Fig. 45: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated mirror relay pin 5, harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : VERIFY that battery junction box (BJB) fuses 28 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit.
TEST the system for normal operation.
E2 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE OUTPUT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
With the engine running, depress the rear window defrost switch to the ON position.
Fig. 46: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated mirror relay pin 5 harness side and heated mirror relay pin 2
harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : Go to E4.
E3 CHECK THE HEATED MIRROR RELAY
Carry out the Heated Mirror Relay Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the heated mirror relay pass the component test?
YES : Go to E5.
NO : INSTALL a new heated mirror relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
E4 CHECK CIRCUIT CH122 (WH/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module C228B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 47: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module C228B-23, circuit CH122 (WH/OG) and heated
mirror relay pin 2 harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
E5 CHECK CIRCUIT CRD13 (GN/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Exterior Mirror C516
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 48: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH exterior mirror C521-7, circuit CRD13 (GN/VT) harness side
and heated mirror relay pin 3 harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
E6 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Disconnect all HVAC module connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all HVAC module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test F: The Heated Exterior Mirror is Inoperative - LH Heated Exterior Mirror
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Mirrors for schematic and connector
information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Heated Window for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, when the rear window defrost switch is depressed on the HVAC module, the LH
exterior mirror receives power through circuit CRD13 (GN/VT). The LH exterior mirror receives ground
through circuit GD133 (BK).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
LH exterior mirror glass
LH exterior mirror
PINPOINT TEST F: THE HEATED EXTERIOR MIRROR IS INOPERATIVE - LH HEATED
EXTERIOR MIRROR
F1 CHECK CIRCUIT CRD13 (GN/VT) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Exterior Mirror C516
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, depress the rear window defrost switch to the ON position.
Fig. 49: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH exterior mirror C516-7, circuit CRD13 (GN/VT) harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to F2.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
F2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 50: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH exterior mirror C516-6, circuit GD133 (BK) harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : CHECK the LH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the exterior
mirror glass for open circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is not OK,
REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new exterior
mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new exterior mirror
glass. REFER to Exterior Mirror Glass. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test G: The Heated Exterior Mirror is Inoperative - RH Heated Exterior Mirror
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Mirrors for schematic and connector
information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Heated Window for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, when the rear window defrost switch is depressed on the HVAC module, the RH
exterior mirror receives power through circuit CRD13 (GN/VT). The RH exterior mirror receives ground
through circuit GD140 (BK/GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
RH exterior mirror glass
RH exterior mirror
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST G: THE HEATED EXTERIOR MIRROR IS INOPERATIVE - RH HEATED
EXTERIOR MIRROR
G1 CHECK CIRCUIT CRD13 (GN/VT) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: RH Exterior Mirror C622
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, depress the rear window defrost switch to the ON position.
Fig. 51: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between RH exterior mirror C622-7, circuit CRD13 (GN/VT) harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to G2.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
G2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD140 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 52: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RH exterior mirror C622-6, circuit GD140 (BK/GN) harness side
and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : CHECK the RH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the exterior
mirror glass for open circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is not OK,
REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new exterior
mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new exterior mirror
glass. REFER to Exterior Mirror Glass. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test H: The Auto-Dimming Mirror Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Mirrors for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The interior auto-dimming mirror receives power from circuit CBP31 (BU/OG) and ground from circuit GD133
(BK). When the vehicle is placed in REVERSE, voltage is sent to circuit CLS10 (GN/BN) and the interior autodimming mirror will turn the dimming feature off. There are 2 photoelectric sensors: one in the front of the
interior rear view mirror and one mounted on the glass side of the mirror. If the sensors are blocked, the interior
auto-dimming mirror might not work correctly. Always verify both sensors are not physically blocked before
attempting to diagnose auto-dimming mirror concerns.
If equipped with a LH exterior auto-dimming mirror, and the auto-dimming feature is activated, voltage is sent
from the interior mirror to the LH exterior mirror though circuit LRD12 (BU/GY). Ground for the LH exterior
mirror is provided by the interior mirror through circuit RRD12 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Interior auto-dimming mirror
LH exterior mirror glass
LH exterior mirror
PINPOINT TEST H: THE AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
NOTE:
If the transmission range (TR) sensor is malfunctioning and the backup lamps
are on all the time or do not turn on, the auto-dimming interior mirror will not
darken or return to normal view.
H1 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE BACKUP LAMPS
Key in ON position.
Move the selector lever through the entire range.
Do the backup lamps illuminate only in REVERSE?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
YES : If the LH exterior mirror only is always dim, REPAIR circuit LRD12 (BU/GY) for a short to
voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
If the LH exterior mirror only does not dim correctly, go to H10 .
If the interior mirror only does not dim correctly and the LH exterior mirror does dim correctly,
INSTALL a new interior auto-dimming mirror, REFER to Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror. TEST
the system for normal operation.
If the LH exterior mirror and interior mirror (if equipped) does not dim correctly, go to H2 .
NO : REFER to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article to diagnose backup lamps.
H2 VERIFY THAT THE FORWARD AND REARWARD FACING SENSORS ARE NOT
BLOCKED
Visually verify that the forward and rearward facing sensors are not blocked. Sources of blockage
can include:
stickers, window decals or tags.
fold-down screens for TVs or DVD players.
non-OEM window tinting.
Were either of the sensors blocked?
YES : If possible, REMOVE the blockage. TEST the system for normal operation. If the blockage
cannot be removed, REVIEW the operation of the auto-dimming interior mirror with the customer.
NO : Go to H3.
H3 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE INTERIOR AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR - DAYLIGHT
CONDITIONS
Key in ON position.
Fig. 53: Checking Operation Of Interior Auto-Dimming Mirror - Daylight Conditions
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Use a bright lamp to simultaneously illuminate the forward facing sensor and the rearward facing
sensor. The mirror should adjust to a high reflectance mode (mirror will be clear).
Does the mirror adjust to the high reflectance (clear) mode?
YES : Go to H4.
NO : Go to H7.
H4 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE INTERIOR AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR - NIGHT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
TIME CONDITIONS WITH GLARE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 54: Checking Operation Of Interior Auto-Dimming Mirror - Night Time Conditions
With Glare
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Simulate night time conditions with glare:
NOTE:
Covering the sensor with a finger or hand is not adequate.
cover the forward facing sensor with black electrical tape or other dark material.
illuminate the rearward facing sensor. The mirror should darken to a lower reflectance mode.
Did the mirror darken to a lower reflectance (darker) mode?
YES : Go to H5.
NO : Go to H7.
H5 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE INTERIOR AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR - NIGHT
TIME CONDITIONS WITHOUT GLARE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 55: Checking Operation Of Interior Auto-Dimming Mirror - Night Time Conditions
Without Glare
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Simulate night time conditions without glare:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Covering the sensor with a finger or hand is not adequate.
cover the forward facing sensor with black electrical tape or other dark material.
cover the rearward facing sensor. The mirror should adjust to the high reflectance mode.
Did the mirror adjust to the high reflectance (clear) mode?
YES : Go to H6.
NO : Go to H7.
H6 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR - NIGHT TIME
CONDITIONS WITH THE VEHICLE IN REVERSE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 56: Checking Operation Of Interior Auto-Dimming Mirror - Night Time Conditions
With Glare
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Simulate night time conditions with glare:
NOTE:
Covering the sensor with a finger or hand is not adequate.
cover the forward facing sensor with black electrical tape or other dark material.
illuminate the rearward facing sensor.
Select REVERSE.
Did the mirror adjust to a high reflectance (clear) mode?
YES : The system is operating normally at this time. REVIEW operation of the interior autodimming mirror feature with the customer.
NO : Go to H7.
H7 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) FOR VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Interior Auto-Dimming Mirror C911 (without microphone) or C9012 (with
microphone)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 57: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Without microphone: Measure the voltage between interior auto-dimming mirror C911-1, circuit
CBP31 (BU/OG) harness side and ground.
Fig. 58: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With microphone: Measure the voltage between interior auto-dimming mirror C9012-1, circuit
CBP31 (BU/OG) harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to H8.
NO : VERIFY that smart junction box (SJB) fuse 31 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit.
TEST the system for normal operation.
H8 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 59: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Without microphone: Measure the resistance between interior auto-dimming mirror C911-3,
circuit GD133 (BK) harness side and ground.
Fig. 60: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With microphone: Measure the resistance between interior auto-dimming mirror C9012-10,
circuit GD133 (BK) harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
H9 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS10 (GN/BN) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Select REVERSE.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:09 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 61: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Without microphone: Measure the voltage between interior auto-dimming mirror C911-2, circuit
CLS10 (GN/BN) harness side and ground.
Fig. 62: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With microphone: Measure the voltage between interior auto-dimming mirror C9012-3, circuit
CLS10 (GN/BN) harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new interior auto-dimming mirror. REFER to Interior Rear View Mirror.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
H10 CHECK THE INTERIOR MIRROR OUTPUT TO THE LH EXTERIOR MIRROR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Exterior Mirror C516
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 63: Checking Operation Of Interior Auto-Dimming Mirror - Night Time Conditions
With Glare
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Simulate nighttime conditions with glare:
NOTE:
Covering the sensor with a finger or hand is not adequate.
cover the forward facing sensor with black electrical tape or other dark material.
illuminate the rearward facing sensor. The mirror should darken to a lower reflectance mode.
Fig. 64: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH exterior mirror C516-13, circuit LRD12 (BU/GY) and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 1 volt?
YES : Go to H11.
NO : Go to H15.
H11 CHECK CIRCUIT RRD12 (BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 65: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH exterior mirror C516-14, circuit RRD12 (BN) harness side and
ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to H12.
NO : Go to H13.
H12 ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE ON CIRCUIT RRD12 (BN)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Interior Auto-Dimming Mirror C911 (without microphone) or C9012 (with
microphone)
Key in ON position.
Fig. 66: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH exterior mirror C516-14, circuit RRD12 (BN) harness side and
ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new interior auto-dimming mirror. REFER to Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror.
TEST the system for normal operation.
H13 CHECK CIRCUIT RRD12 (BN) FOR GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 67: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH exterior mirror C516-14, circuit RRD12 (BN) harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 15 ohms?
YES : CHECK the LH exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the exterior
mirror glass for shorted or open circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is
not OK, REPAIR the jumper harness. If the jumper harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new
LH exterior mirror. REFER to Exterior Mirror. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new LH
exterior mirror glass. REFER to Exterior Mirror Glass. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to H14.
H14 CHECK CIRCUIT RRD12 (BN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Interior Auto-Dimming Mirror C911 (without microphone) or C9012 (with
microphone)
Fig. 68: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Without microphone: Measure the resistance between interior auto-dimming mirror C911-5,
circuit RRD12 (BN) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-14, circuit RRD12 (BN) harness
side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 69: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With microphone: Measure the resistance between interior auto-dimming mirror C9012-7, circuit
RRD12 (BN) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-14, circuit RRD12 (BN) harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL new interior auto-dimming mirror. REFER to Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
H15 CHECK CIRCUIT LRD12 (BU/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Interior Auto-Dimming Mirror C911 (without microphone) or C9012 (with
microphone)
Fig. 70: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Without microphone: Measure the resistance between interior auto-dimming mirror C911-4,
circuit LRD12 (BU/GY) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-13, circuit LRD12 (BU/GY)
harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 71: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With microphone: Measure the resistance between interior auto-dimming mirror C9012-8, circuit
LRD12 (BU/GY) harness side and LH exterior mirror C516-13, circuit LRD12 (BU/GY) harness
side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H16.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
H16 CHECK CIRCUIT LRD12 (BU/GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 72: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH exterior mirror C516-13, circuit LRD12 (BU/GY) harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL new interior auto-dimming mirror. REFER to Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
EXTERIOR MIRRORS - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 73: Exploded View Of Exterior Mirrors With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
17K707
2
-
3
4
5
17D696
17682 RH/ 17683 LH
17D743 LH/ 17D742 RH
6
N621906
Description
Exterior rear view mirror glass
Exterior rear view mirror motor
mounting screw (3 required)
Exterior rear view mirror motor
Exterior rear view mirror housing
Exterior rear view mirror cover
Exterior rear view mirror mounting nut
(3 required)
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedures in this service information.
EXTERIOR MIRROR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front door sail panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 74: Identifying Front Door Sail Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Disconnect the exterior mirror electrical connector.
Fig. 75: Identifying Exterior Mirror Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 3 nuts and the exterior mirror.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 76: Identifying Bolts & Exterior Mirror
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
EXTERIOR MIRROR GLASS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL
1. Position the exterior mirror glass in a downward position to obtain a gap at the top edge of the mirror.
WARNING: Place a shop towel between the hands and the exterior mirror glass
for protection in case of glass breakage during mirror service.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal
injury.
2. Disengage the exterior mirror glass.
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver between the exterior mirror glass retaining tabs and the exterior
mirror glass backing plate and rotate to separate the retaining tabs from the exterior mirror glass
backing plate.
Continue to insert and rotate the screwdriver until the remaining exterior mirror glass retaining tabs
separate from the exterior mirror glass backing plate.
Carefully pull the top edge of the exterior mirror glass away from the exterior mirror housing.
Fig. 77: Pulling Top Edge Of Glass Away From Exterior Mirror Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. If equipped, disconnect the heated mirror and auto-dimming electrical connectors and remove the exterior
mirror glass.
Fig. 78: Identifying Heated Mirror & Auto-Dimming Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
INSTALLATION
1. If equipped, connect the heated mirror and auto-dimming electrical connectors.
Fig. 79: Identifying Heated Mirror & Auto-Dimming Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
WARNING: Place a shop towel between the hands and the exterior mirror glass
for protection in case of glass breakage during mirror service.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal
injury.
2. Position the exterior mirror glass onto the exterior mirror motor.
NOTE:
An audible click will be heard during installation.
3. Firmly press the exterior mirror glass until it snaps onto the exterior mirror motor.
4. Rotate the exterior mirror glass in all directions after the installation to make sure that all of the exterior
mirror glass retaining clips are completely fastened.
EXTERIOR MIRROR MOTOR
1. Remove the exterior rear view mirror glass. For additional information, refer to Exterior Mirror Glass.
2. Remove the 3 exterior rear view mirror motor screws.
Fig. 80: Identifying Exterior Rear View Mirror Motor Screws
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the exterior rear view mirror motor electrical connector.
4. Remove the exterior rear view mirror motor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Mirror Remover
501-D118
Installer, Rear View Mirror
501-025 (T94P-17700-AH)
REMOVAL
NOTE:
Twisting the interior rear view mirror base from right to left may cause a
stress fracture to the windshield.
1. Remove the wire cover (if equipped).
2. Remove the compass by pulling down on the compass rearmost edge (if equipped).
3. Insert the special tool between the mirror mount and windshield bracket from the bottom.
Fig. 81: Inserting Special Tool
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Release the mirror mount from windshield bracket by pulling the tool away from the windshield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
INSTALLATION
1. Slide the mirror mount over the windshield bracket from the top and adjust the mirror to the upward
position.
Fig. 82: Installing Mirror Mount Over The Windshield Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Using the special tool, press the mirror assembly downward along the windshield until the mount is
seated on the windshield bracket.
Fig. 83: Locating Mirror Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install compass and wire cover (if equipped).
AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR MIRROR
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Mirror Remover
Tool Number
501-D118
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 84: Exploded View Of Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
19A548
17700
Description
Interior auto-dimming mirror electrical
connector (part of 14A005)
Compass module
Interior auto-dimming mirror
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wire cover.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
NOTE:
If equipped, the compass module does not need to be removed prior to
this step.
NOTE:
High level mirror shown, others similar.
3. Insert the special tool between the mirror mount and windshield bracket from the top.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
Fig. 85: Inserting Special Tool Between Mirror Mount & Windshield Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. If equipped, separate the compass module from the mirror assembly by disengaging the compass module
locking tabs.
NOTE:
Twisting the interior rear view mirror base from right to left may cause a
stress fracture to the windshield.
5. Release the mirror mount from the windshield bracket by pulling the tool and mirror down and away
from the windshield.
INSTALLATION
1. Slide the mirror mount over the windshield bracket from the top and adjust the mirror to the upward
position.
Fig. 86: Sliding Mirror Mount Over Windshield Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Quickly press the mirror assembly downward along the windshield until a click is felt. The click indicates
the base is engaged to the windshield bracket.
3. Connect the electrical connector and wire cover.
4. If equipped, install the compass module. Check the compass zone and calibration. For additional
information, refer to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING
CHIMES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
EXTERIOR MIRROR COVER
1. Remove the exterior mirror glass. For additional information, refer to Exterior Mirror Glass.
2. Depress the 4 tabs and remove the exterior mirror cover.
Fig. 87: Locating Tabs On Exterior Mirror Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Fig. 88: Exploded View Of Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
Description
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Rear View Mirrors - Edge & MKX
1
2
17B676
-
Exterior rear view mirror control switch
Front door control switch bezel
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front door control switch bezel.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
Depress the 2 locking tabs.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Fig. 89: Locating Locking Tabs On Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:07:10 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster
4
10
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
10
14
Entertainment Systems
17
AM/FM stereo with CDX6/MP3
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
USB port
Satellite radio information
Family entertainment system
Navigation system
SYNC
Climate Controls
Automatic temperature control
Rear window defroster
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
Message center
17
24
25
28
30
59
59
60
60
63
64
64
68
69
75
75
76
80
81
83
93
Locks and Security
109
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
109
111
124
1
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire information
Tire inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Recreational towing
Driving
Starting
Brakes
Traction Control™/AdvanceTrac威
Transmission operation
Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher switch
Fuel pump shut-off switch
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Lug nut torque
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)
Cleaning
2
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
130
130
141
157
172
184
186
188
201
205
211
215
217
217
222
224
228
240
240
242
242
243
250
256
257
262
264
271
271
272
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data
279
281
283
287
289
294
308
310
311
313
Accessories
316
Index
318
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2007 Ford Motor Company
3
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to
get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The
more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
4
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
5
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to
follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal
injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
6
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Export unique (Non–United States/Canada) vehicle specific
information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may be supplied
that complements this book. By referring to the market unique
supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
7
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Stability Control System
Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
8
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Service Engine Soon
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
MAX
MIN
9
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ⬙Service engine soon⬙
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ⬙Service
engine soon⬙ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
10
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Powertrain malfunction/reduced
power: Illuminates when a
powertrain or a AWD fault has been
detected. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Service
engine soon warning light to come
on, refer to Fuel filler cap in the
Maintenance and Specification chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
!
P
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a
brake system malfunction and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended distances with
the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.
11
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to ON, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound
when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been
detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Traction
Control™/AdvanceTrac威 active:
Illuminates when the Traction
Control™ is active. If the light
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately, refer to the
Driving chapter for more information.
12
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains ON at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to
ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn ON or begins to
flash, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For more
information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system in
the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is engaged. Turns
off when the speed control system
is disengaged.
O/D off: Illuminates when the
O/D
overdrive function of the
OFF
transmission has been turned OFF,
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have the transmission
serviced soon, or damage may occur.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Door ajar: Illuminates when the
ignition is in the ON position and
any door is open.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
13
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake ON chime: Sounds when the parking brake is left ON
and the vehicle is driven. If the warning stays on after the park brake is
off, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Message center activation chime: Sounds when some warning
messages appear in the message center display for the first time.
Overspeed chime (if equipped): Sounds when the vehicle speed
reaches 75 mph (120 km/h) or higher.
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
14
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
15
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
Refer to Message center in the
Driver Controls chapter on how to
switch the display from Metric to
English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
Press and release the message
center INFO button until “TRIP”
appears in the display (this
represents the trip mode). Press the
control again to select Trip A and Trip B features. Press and hold the
RESET button for two seconds to reset.
16
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM In-dash six CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound system
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window controls, radio and moon roof (if equipped) may
be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until
either front door is opened.
THX: Your vehicle may be equipped
with the THX威 II certified premium
audio system. This system creates
optimal acoustic quality for all
seating positions and road
conditions. The system offers an
advanced speaker system, amplifier,
subwoofer and equalization.
1. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until
sound returns. PRESET SAVED will appear in the display. You may store
up to 18 stations, six presets in AM, FM1 and FM2.
17
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite Radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
(Eject): Press to eject the
2.
current CD/MP3. To eject a specific
and the
CD/MP3, press
corresponding memory preset. Press
to auto eject all discs
and hold
in the system.
: In radio mode,
3. TUNE /
turn to go up/down the frequency
band in individual increments.
In MP3 mode, with folder mode
active, turn to advance to the next/previous MP3 folder.
SEEK, SEEK
to
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
tune to the next/previous channel.
/
to scroll through the list of
In CATEGORY MODE, press
available SIRIUS channel categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to
Category Mode under Menu for further information.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
(Phone): Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC which has
special phone features. Refer to the SYNC supplement for further
information. If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC, the display will
read NO PHONE.
4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to scroll through the following
modes:
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SET HOURS, SET MINUTES and
/
to manually adjust. Press
SET AM/SET PM is displayed. Use
MENU again to disengage clock mode.
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio
/
to cycle through the following options:
menu. Press
18
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press
/
to
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song in the
system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 songs. If you attempt to save a song when the
system is full, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to
access the saved songs and press
/
to cycle through the saved
songs. When the song appears in the display that you would like to
replace, press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
• DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
/
to cycle through the saved songs. When the
memory. Press
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
/
to select either
delete the currently listed song, press
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
19
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
RBDS ON/OFF: Press
/
to turn RBDS ON or OFF.
Program Type: If RBDS is ON, press
/
to find the desired
program type, then use
SEEK
or SCAN to search for FM radio
stations broadcasting the desired program type.
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System): Available in FM mode only.
Allows you to search RBDS-equipped stations for certain categories of
music or announcements. With RBDS ON, you may select from: Info
(Information), Alert, Test, Religious, R&B, Classical, Jazz, Oldies,
Country, Top 40, Soft and Rock as described under Program Type
above. When the desired category appears in the display, press
SEEK, SEEK
to initiate the search. The system will cycle
through the FM frequency band searching for stations broadcasting the
selected category type. If the desired program type is not found after
searching the frequency band three times, the search will stop. The
announcement categories are as follows:
• Alert: Searches for RBDS stations actively broadcasting important
messages relating to weather or government emergencies.
• Test: Searches for RBDS stations actively broadcasting a test message.
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
/
to turn on/off.
Use
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Bass: Press
Treble: Press
Balance: Press
speakers.
/
to adjust the bass setting.
/
to adjust the treble setting.
/
to adjust the audio between the right and left
/
to adjust the audio between the front and rear
Fade: Press
speakers.
Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume automatically changes slightly
/
with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise. Use
to adjust. Recommended level is 1–3. Level 7 is the maximum setting.
20
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Occupancy mode (if equipped): Use
/
to select and optimize
sound for ALL SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS.
Compression: Available in CD mode, this feature brings soft and loud
CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press MENU
/
to turn the feature
until compression status is displayed. Press
on/off.
SINGLE PLAY/DUAL PLAY (if equipped): If SINGLE PLAY is ON,
/
for DUAL PLAY. For further information on Single
press
Play/Dual Play, please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system
later in this chapter.
5. Select: These controls are used
in Menu mode to select various
settings/options.
6. Play/Pause: In CD/MP3 mode,
press to pause the playing media.
CDX PAUSE will appear in the
display. Press again to return to the playing media.
OK: Use in various menu selections. Your vehicle may be equipped with
SYNC which has special phone and media features. For further
information, refer to the SYNC supplement.
: In radio or CD/MP3
7. SEEK
mode, press to access the next
strong station or track.
to seek to the
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press SEEK
next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.),
to seek to the next channel in the selected category.
press SEEK
Press and hold SEEK
to fast seek through the next channels.
to view the additional display text
In TEXT MODE, press SEEK
when “>” is active in the display.
/
to select a category.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
8. FWD (Fast Forward): Press
FWD to manually advance in a
CD/MP3 track.
21
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
9. TEXT/SCAN: In radio mode,
when listening to a RBDS-equipped
station, press and hold for a brief
sampling of radio stations.
In CD/MP3 mode, press and release to view the track title, artist name
or disc title. Press and hold for a brief sampling of all tracks on the
current disc.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and toggle between channel name/channel category and
the current song title/artist.
In TEXT MODE, sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
to view the
SEEK
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press
to view the previous display text.
10. REV (Reverse): Press REV to
manually reverse in a CD track.
SEEK: In radio and
11.
CD/MP3 mode, press to access the
previous strong station or track.
SEEK to seek to the
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
previous channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News,
SEEK to seek to the previous channel in the selected
etc.), press
SEEK to fast seek through the previous
category. Press and hold
channels.
SEEK to view the previous display text
In TEXT MODE press
when “<” is active in the display.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
12. SHUFFLE: Press to play all
tracks on the current disc in random
order.
13. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
14. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If
a CD is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the display.
22
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in CD players. Dirty, warped or
damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch
protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further
information.
15. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through FES/DVD (if equipped),
LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode),
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes (satellite radio, if equipped) and SYNC (if
equipped).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
For further information on SYNC, refer to the SYNC supplement.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
16. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a
“nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
17. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label
side up.
18. LOAD: Press to load a CD/MP3.
Press LOAD and a memory preset
to load to a specific slot. Press and
hold to autoload up to six CD/MP3s.
23
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way
to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music device to the audio system.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in
the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
24
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same way manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
USB port (if equipped)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
25
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
USB port inside your center console.
This feature allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks, and also to charge devices.
For further information on this
feature, refer to Using your USB
port in the SYNC supplement.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
26
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
27
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels
over the internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
28
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
Radio Display
ACQUIRING
SAT FAULT
INVALID CHNL
UNSUBSCRIBED
NO TEXT
Condition
Action Required
Radio requires more
No action required.
than two seconds to
This message should
produce audio for the
disappear shortly.
selected channel.
Internal module or
If this message does
system failure
not clear within a short
present.
period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
Channel no longer
This previously
available.
available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
Subscription not
Contact SIRIUS at
available for this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel or tune to
another channel.
Artist information not Artist information not
available.
available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
29
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO TEXT
NO TEXT
NO SIGNAL
UPDATING
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Condition
Song title information
not available.
Action Required
Song title information
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
Category information
Category information
not available.
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
Loss of signal from
You are in a location
the SIRIUS satellite or
that is blocking the
SIRIUS tower to the
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,
vehicle antenna.
tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
Update of channel
No action required. The
programming in
process may take up to
progress.
three minutes.
Satellite service has
Call SIRIUS at
been deactivated by
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio.
subscription issues.
FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
30
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System
(FES) which allows you to listen to audio CDs, MP3 discs, watch DVDs
and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems. The
DVD player is capable of playing standard DVDs, CDs, MP3s and is
compatible with CD-R/W, CD-R and certain CD-ROM media.
Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and
controls as well as the very important safety information.
Quick start
Your Family Entertainment System includes a DVD system, two sets of
wireless infrared (IR) headphones and a wireless infrared (IR) remote
control.
To play a DVD in the DVD system:
The DVD system can play DVD-Video, DVD-R, DVD-R/W discs as well as
audio CDs and video CDs. To ensure proper disc operation, check the
disc for finger prints, scratches and cleanliness. Clean with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert a DVD into the system,
label-side up to turn on the system.
It will load automatically.
3. Press the power button on the
)
DVD player, then press Play (
to begin to play the disc.
If a DVD is already loaded into the
system, press PLAY on the DVD
player.
Note: If sound can be heard, but no video is present, press VIDEO to
select the video source (DVD or aux-inputs).
Press VIDEO to change the source
displayed on the screen. Press
repeatedly to cycle through:
DVD-DISC, DVD-AUX, NON-DVD,
OFF.
31
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Press the power button to turn the
system OFF. The indicator light will
turn off indicating the system is off.
Note: The audio from the DVD system will play over all vehicle speakers
and can be adjusted by the radio volume control.
To play a CD in the DVD system:
The DVD system can play audio CDs, CD-R and CD-R/W, CD-ROM and
video CDs. To ensure proper disc operation, check the disc for finger
prints and scratches. Clean the disc with a soft cloth, wiping from the
center to the edge.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert a CD into the system,
label-side up to turn on the DVD
system. It will load and
automatically begin to play. If there
is already a CD in the system, press
PLAY on the DVD player.
3. The disc will begin to play and
the ’CD Audio Disc’ screen will
display. From this screen, you can
also select from COMPRESSION,
SHUFFLE and SCAN features.
To play an MP3 disc in the DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert an MP3 disc into the
system, label-side up to turn on the
DVD system. It will load and
automatically begin to play. If there
is already a disc in the system, press
PLAY on the DVD player.
32
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
3. The disc will begin to play and
the ’MP3 Audio Disc’ screen will
display and allow you to access the
COMPRESSION, SHUFFLE, SCAN
and FOLDER MODE features.
To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system
The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic
devices such as game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette
recorders, etc.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Press the power button to turn
the DVD system on. The indicator
light next to the power button will
illuminate.
3. Connect an auxiliary audio/video
source by connecting RCA cords
(not included) to the RCA jacks on
the left hand side of the system.
• Yellow (1) — video input
• White (2) — left channel audio
input
• Red (3) — right channel audio
input
4. Press MEDIA on the DVD system to change the media source to AUX.
5. Press VIDEO on the DVD system to change the video source to
DVD-AUX. If your source is properly plugged in, it will appear on the
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) screen. If your auxiliary source does not
have a video signal, or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal
from the auxiliary source, the screen will remain black. If the video
source is set to DVD-AUX, the display will automatically turn on if a
video signal is detected.
33
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To listen to audio over the headphones (Dual play mode):
1. You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless
headphones. Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and
Using wired headphones for further information.
• Black (4) — wired headphone output (wired headphones not
included)
2. Press the headphone/speaker
button on the DVD player or press
the 2 and 4 memory presets on the
audio system at the same time.
A green light will illuminate next to either the A or B Headphone Control
Button to indicate which channel is active (able to be controlled).
3. Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel (A or
B). The audio source will be shown on the display. You may change the
active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button.
Note: Channel A can access any possible media source (AM, FM1, FM2,
SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, AUX). Channel B can only access DVD and
AUX sources.
Note: Refer to Single play/Dual play for more information.
Using the infrared (IR) wireless headphones:
1. Press the power control on the earpiece to turn the headphones ON.
2. Select Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using
the A/B control on the ear piece.
3. Adjust the headphone volume using the rotary dial on the earpiece.
Using wired headphones (not included):
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
1. Connect the wired headphones in to the headphone jacks on either
A or
B. Headphones
side of the DVD system. Each side is labeled
plugged into jack A will listen to Channel A and headphones plugged into
jack B will listen to Channel B.
34
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. Adjust the volume levels using
the volume controls on the DVD
system.
To adjust display brightness:
To decrease/increase the brightness
level on the display screen, press
the brightness control on the DVD
system. A display will appear at the
bottom of the screen indicating the
brightness level. The brightness display will only appear when the menu
is not displayed.
DVD player controls
16
1
2
3
ENTER
MENU
6
4
5
A
RETURN
MEDIA
B
VIDEO
VOLUME
14
15
10
12
13
7
11
9
8
1. Headphone control A/B: Press
to select either the A or B
headphone source. Then press
MEDIA to select the desired playing
media for that headset. When a
headphone channel has been selected (A or B), selections will affect the
source on that channel only.
35
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Note: Headphone A can access any possible media (AM, FM1, FM2, SAT
(if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). Headphone B can only access DVD
and DVD-AUX.
For further information, refer to Single play/Dual play later in this
section.
/
(Stop/Eject): Press once
2.
to stop and press a second time to
eject a disc from the DVD system.
(Reverse): Press and
3.
release for the previous chapter or
track. Press and hold to reverse
search a DVD, Video CD, or FES CD in DVD/CD mode.
(Fast forward): Press and
4.
release for the next chapter or
track. Press and hold to forward
search a DVD, Video CD, or FES CD in DVD/CD mode.
/
(Play/Pause): Press
5.
(Play) to select DVD mode (and to
turn the DVD system on if it is off).
If a disc is present, it will resume or begin to play. Press (Pause) while
playing a disc to pause a DVD or CD.
6. On/Off: Press to turn the DVD
system On/Off.
7. VIDEO: Press repeatedly to cycle
through the following video state
options which will be indicated on
the bottom right hand corner of the
display: DVD DISC, DVD-AUX,
NON-DVD and Off (no indicator). If you select the DVD-AUX video
source, the display will turn off if there is no video signal detected. When
a video signal is detected on the auxiliary video input, and the display is
in the DVD-AUX video mode, the display will automatically turn on.
8. Infrared (IR) Receiver & Transmitter: System sensor which reads
the signals from the remote control and sends audio signals to the
infrared (IR) wireless headphones.
36
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
9. LCD screen: The eight inch diagonal screen rotates down to view and
up into housing to store when not in use. Ensure that the screen is
latched into the housing when being stored.
10. Volume: When in Single Play,
press to increase ( ) or decrease
(
) the volume over all speakers.
When in Dual Play, press to increase
) or decrease ( ) the volume
(
for the wired headphones. (Wireless headphone volume is controlled
with the rotary dial on the right ear piece.)
/
(Headphones/Speakers): Press once for Dual Play
11.
(Headphone mode- the rear speakers are muted) and press again for
Single Play (same media playing through all speakers). You can also
press the 2 and 4 memory preset buttons on the audio system at the
same time to perform the same function. For further interaction
information, refer to Single Play/Dual play.
12. MEDIA: Press repeatedly to
select from the various possible
playing media sources (AM, FM1,
FM2, SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). The media will show in
the status display on the top of the screen when in Dual Play mode.
When in Single Play mode, the media source will be displayed on the
radio.
Note: Channel A can access any possible media source (AM, FM1, FM2,
SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). Channel B can only access
DVD and DVD-AUX sources.
13. RETURN: Press to return to the
playing media or to resume
playback.
14. MENU: When playing a DVD,
press MENU once to enter the DVD
disc menu (if available) and press
twice to enter the system set-up menu. From the set-up menu, you may
select from Angle, Aspect Ratio, Language, Subtitles, Disc resume,
Compression, Restore Defaults and Back. For more detailed information,
refer to Menu mode.
37
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
15. ENTER: Press to select/confirm
the current selection.
16. Cursor /Brightness controls:
Use the cursor controls to make
various selections when in any
menu. When not in a menu, and in
/
to adjust
DVD mode, press
the brightness. A display bar will appear at the bottom of the screen
indicating the brightness levels.
Remote control
Unless otherwise stated, all operations can be carried out with the
remote control. Always point the remote control directly at the player.
Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player.
38
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
1. Power control: Press to turn the FES (Family Entertainment
System) ON/OFF.
2. Cursor controls: Use in various active menus to advance the cursor
up/down/left/right. When not in a Menu, the left and right cursor controls
decrease and increase the display brightness.
3. DISPLAY: Press to access the on-screen display of the FES functions
and adjustments.
4. RETURN: Press to return to the previous menu screen.
5. ANGLE (DVD dependent): Press to select the angle to view the scene.
6. Channel A/B: Press to select either A or B headphones and then use
the MEDIA control to select the desired playing media for the headphones.
7. VOL (Volume): When in Single Play, press to increase ( ) or
decrease ( ) the volume over all speakers. When in Dual Play, press to
increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the volume for the wired headphones.
(Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the
right ear piece.)
39
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
8. Fast Forward/Next: In DVD mode, press and hold for a quick
advance within the DVD. Press and release to advance to the next
chapter. In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the next track.
9. Play/Pause: Press to play or pause a DVD.
10. SHUFFLE: Press to play all tracks on the current CD/MP3 disc in
random order.
11. STOP: Press to stop the current DVD or CD/MP3.
12.
/
Speaker/Headphone (Single/Dual Play): Press to toggle
between Single Play (same media playing through all speakers) and Dual
Play (headphone mode — the rear speakers are muted). You can also
press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time
to perform the same function.
13. Keypad: Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD/MP3
track or DVD chapter to be played.
14. C (Cancel): Press to cancel/clear the numeric input (i.e. chapter
number).
15. MEDIA: Press to cycle through the possible media sources: AM,
FM1, FM2, SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, LINE IN (if equipped),
DVD-AUX.
Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources.
16. VIDEO: Press to cycle through video states: DVD-DISC, DVD-AUX,
NON-DVD, Off.
17. EJECT: Press to eject a disc from the FES.
18. Fast reverse/Previous: When a DVD is playing, press and hold for a
quick reverse within the DVD. Press and release for the previous
chapter. Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the previous track.
19. MENU: Press to access the DVD disc menu for selections. Press
MENU again when in the DVD disc menu to access the system set-up
menu.
20. SUBTITLE (DVD dependent): Press to turn the subtitle feature ON
or OFF.
21. LANGUAGE (DVD dependent): Press to select the desired
language.
22. ENTER: Press to select the highlighted menu option.
23. ILLUMINATION: Press to illuminate the remote control and
backlight all of the buttons.
40
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Battery replacement
Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit. Since all batteries
have a limited shelf life, replace them when the unit fails to control the
DVD player.
Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries.
The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with
the unit.
41
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Headphones
Wireless headphones
The driver should never use the headphones while driving the
vehicle. Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing
audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens, which could
result in a crash causing serious injury. Give your full attention to
driving and to the road.
Your FES system is equipped with
two sets of battery powered,
infrared wireless headphones. Two
AAA batteries are needed to operate
the headphones. (Batteries are
included.)
Additional infrared wireless
headphones may be purchased for
use with the system. Also, wired
headphones may be purchased and
plugged in where indicated on the
left and right hand sides of the
system. Refer to Wired
Headphones below.
42
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To install the batteries, remove the screw at the bottom of the cover.
Then, lightly press down on top and slide the cover off.
When replacing the batteries, use two new batteries (alkaline
recommended) and install them with the correct orientation as indicated
in the battery housing.
43
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To operate the headphones:
• Press POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones. A red
indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON. Press
POWER again to turn the headphones off.
• Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the
headband adjustment.
• Select the desired audio source (Channel A or B) for each set of
wireless headphones by using the A/B selection switch on the ear
piece.
• Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level.
Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use. After
approximately one minute of not being in use (no infrared signal is
received), the wireless headphones will automatically turn off. They will
also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature.
If this happens, simply turn the headphones on again and continue use.
44
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Wired headphones
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
The driver should never use the headphones while driving the
vehicle. Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing
audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens, which could
result in a crash causing serious injury. Give your full attention to
driving and to the road.
You may purchase wired headphones for your FES (Family
Entertainment System). Plug them into the 3.5 mm headphone jack(s)
located on the left and right sides of the system. (Channel A is located
on the left side and Channel B is located on the right side.) These
headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode.
To listen to the audio on wired headphones (not included), connect the
wired headphones into the headphone jacks on the sides of the DVD
system. The wired headphone jack for Channel A is located on the left
side of the FES and is labeled
A. Headphones plugged into this
headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the
Channel A source. The wired headphone jack for Channel B is located on
B. Headphones plugged into
the right side of the FES and is labeled
this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be
the Channel B source.
Adjust the headphone volume using
the volume control on the DVD
system.
Operation
Single play/Dual play
Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones
and wired headphones (not included) to allow the rear seat passengers
to listen to the radio (and other media sources) over the headphones.
This enables the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of
sources a variety of ways.
45
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Single Play: Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening
to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers. When the
DVD system is on, and the same source is playing through the front and
rear speakers, SINGLE PLAY will appear in the front radio display.
Dual Play: Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen
to a different playing media than the front seat passengers. With the
DVD and Rear Seat Controls turned ON, the rear seat passengers may
choose to listen to the radio, CD, MP3, DVD, or DVD-AUX media sources
over headphones while the front speakers play the chosen selection for
the front audio system, they may listen to another over the headphones.
DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio display.
When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen
to the same audio source, SHARED MODE will appear on the radio.
Note: If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio, the rear seat
passengers can also listen to the radio, however they will be limited to
listening to the same radio channel.
Press
/
on the DVD player to
listen to audio over the headphones.
The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the
A or B headphone control buttons will illuminate. The system can output
two different audio sources over the headphones. These are called
Channel A and Channel B. Both Channel A and Channel B can be
listened to on the wired headphones (not included) or on the infrared
(IR) wireless headphones.
Press the Headphone Control button
A to change the audio source for
Channel A.
Press MEDIA to change the audio
source for Channel A. This
information will display on the DVD
system screen.
Press the Headphone Control button
B to change the audio source for
Channel B.
Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B. This information
will display on the DVD system screen. Channel B can listen to either
the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs (DVD-AUX).
46
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Operation with an aftermarket audio system (Headphone only
mode)
When the Family Entertainment System (FES) detects that the original
radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the
vehicle, the Family Entertainment System will work in a state referred to
as “Headphone Only Mode”.
While operating in Headphone Only Mode, the system will have limited
functionality.
• The system will only output audio to the headphones. It will not be
capable of providing audio to the speakers.
• The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD-DISC
and DVD-AUX, regardless of headphone channel (A or B).
• When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode,
both headphone channels (A&B) will be connected to FES-DISC.
Menu mode
Press MENU once on the DVD system to access the DVD disc menu if
available.
Press MENU twice to access the DVD set-up menu and the following
features:
1. ZOOM
2. ANGLE
3. ASPECT RATIO
4. LANGUAGE
5. SUB TITLES
Angle mode
Select ANGLE to select various
angles of view for the DVD.
47
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
This is disc dependent — some
DVD discs may have more viewing
angles to select from. Once you
have made your selection, press
ENTER to confirm. The system
default is Angle 1.
Aspect ratio
Select ASPECT RATIO to select the
viewing size and shape of the video
displayed on the LCD screen. This is
disc dependent.
You can select from: WIDE, LETTER
BOX or PAN SCAN. Once you have
made your selection, press ENTER
to confirm. The LCD screen display
will immediately change to your
selection after the system resumes
playback of the DVD. The system
default is WIDE (16:9).
Language
Select LANGUAGE to select the
language you would like to use for
audio output (English, Spanish,
French). This is disc dependent.
48
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Once you have made your selection,
press ENTER to confirm. The
system default is English.
Subtitles
Select SUBTITLES to turn the
subtitle option on or off. The system
default is OFF.
Once you have made your selection,
press ENTER to confirm. This is
disc dependent.
Audio CDs
To play audio CDs on your DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the DVD system is ON.
3. Insert an audio CD into the DVD system, label side up.
49
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
4. The track and elapsed time will
appear in the status bar. Use the
DVD cursor controls on the bezel to
highlight which track you would like
to play. You can also use the cursor
controls to highlight
COMPRESSION, SHUFFLE or
SCAN. Once you have highlighted
the desired track or function, press ENTER on the DVD bezel to confirm
your selection.
COMP (Compression): Compression brings soft and loud CD passages
together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press to
turn the feature ON/OFF
SHUFFLE: Press to hear all tracks on the current CD in random order.
Press again to stop.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current CD. Press
again to stop.
Playing MP3 discs
To play an MP3 disc on your DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the DVD system is ON.
3. Insert the MP3 disc into the DVD system, label side up.
4. The folder, track and elapsed
time will appear in the status bar.
The screen will list the Artist, Title,
Album and File Name.
COMP (Compression):
Compression brings soft and loud
CD/MP3 passages together for a
more consistent listening level when
in CD mode. Press to turn the feature ON/OFF
SHUFFLE: Press to hear all tracks on the current MP3 folder in random
order. Press again to stop.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current MP3 folder.
Press again to stop.
FOLDER LIST: Press access folder mode and to go to the previous/next
folder in the MP3 disc.
50
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
MP3 disc quality factors
Several factors can effect disc playback quality:
• Disc capacity — Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity.
We do not recommend using high capacity discs containing 700MB of
storage.
• Disc type — Some CD-RW discs may operate inconsistently and may
cause an error message to appear. We recommend burning MP3 files
onto CD-R discs.
• Disc finalization — The disc may be left open for the purpose of
adding sessions to it at a later time, but be sure to close each session
or the disc will not play.
• Bit rate — The player supports bit rates from 32–320 kbps, as well as
variable bit rate MP3 files, but lower bit rates will have a noticeable
effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low
fidelity music material. We recommend that you encode MP3 files
using a high quality encoder.
• PC configuration — Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your
computer’s resources. Follow the PC configuration recommendations
of the encoder software vendor. We recommend that you avoid
running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding
to avoid undesirable noise and distortion.
CD, MP3 and CD player care
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
• Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player (if
equipped).
• Always store discs out of direct sunlight. Excessive heat may damage
or warp discs.
• Use care when handling and playing CD-R and CD-RW discs, which
are more susceptible to damage from heat, light and stress than are
regular CDs.
• Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat, with the
playing surface facing down, in order to prevent damage to the disc or
the player.
• Never insert any object other than a compact disc (CD) or digital
versatile disc (DVD) into the player, as doing so may damage the
player and may cause injury to you.
51
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• Do not disassemble the player. The laser used in disc playback is
extremely harmful to the eyes.
The FES DVD system is designed to play commercially pressed 12
cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs and digital versatile discs (DVD)
only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and
re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD and DVD players. Irregular shaped CDs or DVDs,
CDs or DVDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the FES DVD system. The label may peel and cause the CD
or DVD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs or DVDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs or DVDs.
Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Playing a DVD
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the navigation system is on.
3. Insert a DVD label-side up into the system.
4. Use the DVD bezel controls to:
Press to play or pause a DVD.
Press to stop or eject a DVD.
Press and release to go to the
previous chapter. Press and hold for
a fast reverse search.
Press and release to go to the next
chapter. Press and hold for a fast
forward search.
Press when not in menu mode to
adjust brightness, or when in menu
mode to navigate through the menu
selections.
52
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Press to adjust volume levels.
Slow play
1. With a DVD playing, press pause.
2. Press and hold the reverse or
advance button to enter into slow
play mode. Once in slow play mode,
press and release the reverse or advance button repeatedly to cycle
through 1/4 and 1/2. These will display on the status bar on top of the
screen as the screens cycle through at this rate.
Frame by frame
1. With a DVD playing, press pause.
2. Press the right cursor button. The
DVD will advance one frame. Each
press of the right cursor button will
advance the DVD video by one
frame.
Headphone/auxiliary jacks
There are wired headphones (not included) and auxiliary jacks on the
left and right side of your DVD system. They can be used to plug in
wired headphones or to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices
such as game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette recorders,
etc.
53
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
On the left side of the system is the
Headphone A input jack. This
headphone will listen to the media
selected on the Channel A source.
When you need to make any
adjustments to the media, volume,
etc, ensure that the Channel A
source is highlighted. For more
information, refer to Headphone
adjustments.
Also located here are the various
auxiliary jacks which can be used to plug in a VCR, camcorder, video
games, etc. The specific jacks are as follows:
1. Yellow: video input
2. White: left channel audio input
3. Red: right channel audio input
4. Black: wired headphone jack ( not included)
The B headphone jack (5) is located
on the right side of the DVD system.
Plug in wired headphones (not
included) here.
Note: The B headphones can only
access DVD and AUX modes. They
cannot access radio sources.
Audio displays
Your DVD system interacts closely with the front audio system. Status
messages will appear in the radio display showing the DVD status. Some
possible radio display messages:
• SINGLE PLAY or DUAL PLAY
• DVD LOAD
• DVD MENU
• DVD STOP
54
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Audio interaction
You can then also use the front audio controls to advance, reverse, play
and pause a DVD. While a DVD is playing you may use the following
controls on the front radio:
• SEEK: Press to advance to the previous (
chapters.
•
) or next (
) DVD
: Press to play a DVD or to pause the DVD.
When the radio displays “DVD MENU”, press PLAY on the radio
(memory preset #6), to play the disc.
Parental control for the DVD system
Your Family Entertainment System (FES) allows you to have control
over the rear seat controls in a few different ways. The DVD system is
automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is ON, which allows the
rear seat passengers to use the DVD system.
There are three levels of control of
the FES buttons. The states are
FULL (enabled), LOCAL or
LOCKED (disabled). To change the level of control, press the memory
preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls. The
control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously.
The three states are described as:
FULL (enabled): The FES has control over the primary (speaker) and
secondary (headphone) audio sources.
LOCAL: The FES has control over the secondary source (headphones)
only. The radio will ignore button presses that affect the primary
(speaker) audio source.
LOCKED (disabled): The FES buttons are locked and all FES button
presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject.
When the DVD system is ON, you
1
2
3
4
5
6
can then press the memory preset
controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to
toggle between Single Play and Dual Play. In Single Play mode, all
speakers listen to the same media. In Dual Play mode, rear seat
passengers can use the infrared wireless, or wired (not included)
headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat
passengers.
55
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
General information
Note: DVDs are formatted by
regions. US and Canada systems can
only play region 1 DVDs and Mexico
systems can only play region 4
DVDs. Systems sold in vehicles
targeted for other parts of the world
would have different regions. If a
playback problem is encountered,
please ensure that you are using a
disc designed for your vehicle. The
region coding can be found stamped
on the disc or on the box, and can say ’region-1’ or ’region 4’, etc. They
may also be marked by a numerical symbol.
Macrovision: This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
MP3: Supply of this product only conveys a license for private,
non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to
use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue generating) real time
broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and /or any other media)
broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in
other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or
audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit http:// www.mp3licensing.com.
Safety information
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the
system and retain for future reference.
56
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the Family Entertainment
System (FES). See your dealer.
Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
The front glass on the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down
screen may break when hit with a hard surface. If the glass
breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact
with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.
The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the
DVD system while the vehicle is in motion. Give full attention to
driving and to the road. Pull off the road in a safe place before
inserting or extracting DVDs from the system. A remote control is
included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the
FES functions without distracting the driver.
Do not expose the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive
periods of time. Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal.
Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game
equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment
System (FES).
Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords
and/or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or
cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation
of seats and/or compartments.
Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and/or cables
when not in use.
Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers. Do not blow on
them or allow them to get wet or dirty.
Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene, paint thinner or
any other solvent.
57
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln-Mercury could void
user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference and radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Care and service of the DVD player
Environmental extremes
DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may
be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability. To avoid these
outcomes, whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to:
• extremely hot or cold temperatures.
• direct sunlight.
• high humidity.
• a dusty environment.
• locations where strong magnetic fields are generated.
Temperature extremes
When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold
place for a long period of time, wait until the cabin temperature of the
vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system.
Humidity and moisture condensation
Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely humid
conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one. Moisture
condensation may cause damage to the DVD and/or player. If moisture
condensation occurs, do not insert a CD or DVD into the player. If one is
already in the player, remove it. Turn the DVD player ON to dry the
moisture before inserting a DVD. This could take an hour or more.
Foreign substances
Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD
player compartment. Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind
58
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
onto the media controls or into the system. If liquid is accidentally
spilled onto the system, immediately turn the system OFF and consult a
qualified service technician.
Cleaning the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any
ammonia-based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth. Rub the
screen gently until the dust, dirt or fingerprints are removed. Do not
spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents. Overspray
from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the
screen and cause damage. Do not apply excessive pressure while
cleaning the screen.
Cleaning DVD and CD discs
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the
center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion.
Compatibility with aftermarket audio systems (headphone only mode)
When the Family Entertainment System (FES) detects that the original
radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the
vehicle, the FES will work in a state referred to as “Headphone Only
Mode.” This mode allows the FES to operate as a standalone system,
without interface to the radio.
While operating in Headphone Only Mode, the system will have limited
functionality.
• The system will only output audio to the headphones. It will not be
capable of providing audio to the speakers.
• The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD-DISC
and DVD-AUX, regardless of headphone channel (A or B).
• When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode,
both headphone channels (A and B) will be connected to FES-DISC.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System. Refer to the
Navigation supplement for further information.
SYNC (LATE AVAILABILITY — IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC, a hands-free communications
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
more information, please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC
chapter in the Navigation supplement (if equipped).
59
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC) SYSTEM
WITH HEATED AND COOLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
MAX A/C setting: In order to achieve maximum cooling performance,
, A/C,
, and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C) and the
press
highest blower setting.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
1.
vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and
thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. To exit defrost, select another distribution mode.
2. Passenger side temperature control: Press to increase/decrease
the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle. Allows the
passenger to choose and control a different temperature than the driver,
if desired.
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
3. R
defroster. Refer to the Rear window defroster section in this chapter for
more information.
4. DUAL zone selector: Press to engage/disengage separate passenger
side temperature control.
Passenger heated seat: Press to control the passenger heated
5.
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
60
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
6.
Passenger cooled seat: Press to control the passenger cooled
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
7.
Manual override controls: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is distributed. Press to toggle through the air distribution modes
listed below. The selected mode will illuminate in the display. To return
to full automatic control, press AUTO.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will automatically
provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
: Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window
fogging. Note: You may notice a small amount of air flowing from the
demister and defroster vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, center console
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and center
console vents.
Driver heated seat: Press to control the driver heated seat. Refer
8.
to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Driver cooled seat: Press to control the driver cooled seat.
9.
Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Fan Speed: Press to manually increase or decrease the fan
10.
speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
11.
in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time need to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation can be
engaged manually in any airflow selection except defrost. Recirculation
may turn off automatically in some airflow modes to reduce fog potential.
12. EXT: Press to display outside temperature. Press again to display
cabin temperature settings. Note: Exterior readings are more accurate
when the vehicle is moving.
13. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
automatically in AUTO,
14. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
61
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
15. Driver side temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the
temperature on the driver side of the vehicle in dual zone or the
temperature of both the driver and passenger sides in single zone.
16. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow distribution, A/C
on or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to
reach the desired temperature.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather,
select
(defrost) or
(floor/defrost).
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system OFF or with
(recirculated air) engaged and A/C off.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:
• Automatic operation:
1. Press AUTO for full automatic operation.
2. Do not override A/C or
(recirculated air).
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
• Manual operation:
1. Select
or
.
(recirculated air). Use
(recirculated air)
2. Select A/C and
with A/C to provide colder airflow.
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
4. Set highest fan setting initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
62
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER R
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.
The ignition must be in the 3 (RUN) position to operate the rear window
defroster.
Press the control to turn the rear window defroster on. An indicator light
on the button will illuminate when active. The rear window defroster
turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turned to
the 1 (LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position. To manually turn off the rear window
defroster at any time, press the control again.
If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors,
the same button will activate both.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
CABIN AIR FILTER
The cabin air filter element is designed to reduce the concentration of
airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the air being
supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The presence of a particulate filter
element provides the following benefits:
• Improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration.
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness.
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits.
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or damage to the system.
The access door for the filter is located behind the glove box. For
replacement intervals regarding the cabin air filter, see the scheduled
maintenance information. For more information regarding your filter,
see your authorized dealer.
63
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control to the
to turn on the
first position
parking lamps. Rotate to the second
to turn on the
position
headlamps.
Adaptive headlamps (if equipped)
The headlamp beams move in the same direction as the steering wheel
which provides more visability when driving around curves.
Note: The system has a power-up movement check feature. When the
vehicle is started, the lamps track left to right, then back to center to
alert the driver that the system is working properly.
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds or, if equipped with a
message center, you can select a
delay from 0–180 seconds, after the
ignition switch is turned to OFF. See
Message Center (if equipped) in
the Driver Controls chapter.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to OFF.
Note: Some vehicles may be equipped with a headlamps on with
windshield wipers feature. If the windshield wipers are turned on (for
a fixed period of time) the exterior lamps will turn on with headlamp
control in the Autolamp position.
64
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Fog lamp control
The headlamp control also operates
the fog lamps. The fog lamps can be
turned on when the headlamp
,
or
control is in the
positions and the high beams are
not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn fog lamps on. The fog lamp
will illuminate.
indicator light
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on at reduced intensity output. To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control must be in the OFF or Parking lamps position.
65
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
Certain displays like the message
center and the climate control unit
do not change with the dimmer control till the dash-mounted sensor
senses full night conditions.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full Dome/ON position to reset.
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
66
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the
headlamp bulb center from the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.5
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe an area of high intensity
light. The top of the high intensity
area should touch the horizontal
reference line, if not, the beam will
need to be adjusted using the next
step.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
67
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front row map lamps (if equipped)
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The
front row map lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is OFF.
Map/dome lamp (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened,
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of
the lens.
68
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Rear courtesy lamp
Located in the rear cargo area, the
courtesy lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Number of bulbs
Headlamp high beam
Headlamp low beam
Front sidemarker lamp
Front park/turn signal
lamp
Rear sidemarker lamp
Stop/tail/turn lamp
* Backup lamp
License plate lamp
* High-mount brake lamp
2
2
2
2
2
2
N/A
2
N/A
Trade
number
9005
H11
168
3157NAK
(amber)
194
4157 K
LED
C5W
LED
69
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Function
Number of bulbs
Trade
number
H11
1600XB
Fog lamp (if equipped)
2
Front row map lamp
2
Second row dome/reading
3
1600XB
lamp
Rear courtesy lamp
1
1600XB
Visor vanity lamp - Slide
on Rail system (SOR) (if
2
37
equipped)
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Reach over the front bolster.
Highbeam bulb
70
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Lowbeam bulb
4. Remove the bulb cover. Note: The left side has a side access bulb
cover instead of a back access bulb cover
5. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and then pulling it
straight out.
6. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb.
7. Connect the electrical connector
on the new bulb.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
8. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly.
When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, turn the new bulb
clockwise to install.
9. Install the bulb cover.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Reach over the front bolster.
71
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
4. Remove the bulb cover.
5. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
the lamp assembly.
6. Carefully pull the bulb out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
8. Install the bulb cover.
Replacing front side marker bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the OFF position.
2. Pry the lamp away from the
vehicle at the rear of lamp at the
wheel opening. (Rotate lamp from
the wheel opening away from the
vehicle), as the lamp separates from
the vehicle, slide the lamp towards
the wheel opening to disengage
lamp
3. Rotate the lamp clockwise while
holding the electrical connector in
place with your other hand. After
rotating the lamp 90 degrees
clockwise, pull and disengage the
wire harness and bulb from the
lamp.
4. With the bulb exposed, carefully remove the bulb from the socket by
grasping the bulb and pulling it away from the wire harness.
Replace with a new bulb, and reverse the removal steps to complete the
process.
72
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing tail/stop/turn/sidemarker/backup lamp bulbs
The tail/stop/turn/sidemarker/backup lamp bulbs are located in the same
portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow the
same steps to replace either bulb.
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with a backup lamp assembly containing
integral multiple light emitting diodes (LED). See your authorized dealer
for the replacement LED module.
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then open
the liftgate to expose the lamp
assembly bolts.
2. Remove the two bolts from the
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully remove the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle by
pulling the assembly straight out to
expose the bulb socket. DO NOT
TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and snap in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
7. Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the
lamp assembly with two bolts.
Replacing supplemental liftgate lamp assembly
Your vehicle is equipped with a liftgate lamp assembly containing integral
multiple light emitting diodes (LED). If one or more LEDs burn out, the
complete lamp module has to be replaced. See your authorized dealer for
the replacement LED module.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high-mount stop lamp. It is
designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, see
your authorized dealer.
73
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the two screws and the
license plate lamp assembly from
the liftgate.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out from the lamp assembly.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the fog lamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. From underneath the vehicle,
remove the splash shield and rotate
the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise, to remove from
the fog lamp.
3. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly via the two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
74
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers: When
the wiper control is on, the speed of
the wipers will automatically adjust
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the
wipers will go.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will happen a few seconds
after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down
from the top of the windshield caused by the washing.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper features (if equipped with Autolamp feature)
The exterior lamps will turn on with the ignition on, headlamp control in
the Autolamp position and the windshield wipers are turned on (for a
fixed period of time).
75
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
Select:
2 — Normal speed operation of rear
wiper.
1 — Intermittent operation of rear
wiper.
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer
position.
control to either
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT 2
or OFF position.
TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down to unlock the
steering column.
2. While the lever is in the down
position, move the steering wheel
up or down and in or out until you
find the desired position.
3. While holding the steering wheel
in place, pull the lever up to its
original position to lock the steering
column.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
76
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.
Slide on rod feature
The visor will slide back and forth
on the rod for increased sunlight
coverage. Rotate the visor towards
the side window and extend it
rearward for additional sunlight
coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Forward storage bin (if equipped)
The storage compartment may be
used to store a pair of sunglasses.
Press the release area on the rear
edge of the bin door to open the
storage compartment. The door will
open to full open position.
77
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cupholders
2. Tissue box holder (if equipped)
(located on underside of console
lid)
3. Rear power point
4. Utility compartment with a
Secondary storage bin with coin
holder slots (on hinges inside utility
compartment), power point, AIJ
(Audio Input Jack), and a Multi
Position Bin Divider (2 positions vertical / 1 position horizontal)
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located
on the instrument panel.
A second auxiliary power point is
located in the center console utility
compartment.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or
cigar lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information
on checking and replacing fuses.
78
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
A third auxiliary power point is
located on the rear side of the
center console. The power point is
accessible from the rear seats.
The rear auxiliary power point is
located on the left rear quarter
panel. The power point is accessible
from the liftgate or behind the rear
seat.
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
79
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and pull the switches to open
and close windows.
• Push down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Express down (One Touch Down, Front windows only)
Allows the driver and passenger’s
window to open fully without
holding the control down. Push the
switch completely down to the
AUTO
AUTO
second detent and release quickly.
The window will open fully.
Momentarily press the switch to any
position to stop the window
operation.
Express Up (One Touch Up, Front windows only)
Allows the driver and passenger’s
window to close fully without
holding the control up. Pull the
switch completely up to the second
detent and release quickly. The
window will close fully. Momentarily
press the switch to any position to
stop the window operation.
Note: Refer to the Locks and Security chapter for the Opening front
windows and panoramic roof feature.
80
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Bounce-Back
When the window is moving upward and an obstacle or a rough road
condition interferes with the window’s movement, the window will
automatically reverse direction and move down. This is known as
“bounce-back”. If the ignition is turned OFF (without accessory delay
being active) during bounce-back, the window will move down until the
bounce back position is reached.
Security Override
If during a bounce-back condition, the switch is released to the neutral
position, then held in the one touch up position within two seconds after
the window reaches the bounce-back position, the window will travel
up with no bounce-back protection. If the switch is released before
the window reaches fully closed or the ignition is turned OFF (without
accessory delay being active), the window will stop. Security override
can be used if the window movement is restricted in some way, for
example, if there is ice on the window or seals.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver and front passenger to
operate the power windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver and front
passenger) press the right side of
the control. Press the left side to
restore the window controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the audio system, power windows, and moon roof
(if equipped) operate for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned from the ON to the OFF position or until either front door is
opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
81
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror
Your vehicle is equipped with an interior rear view mirror which has an
auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from
the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state
when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects
bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically adjust (darken)
to minimize glare.
Without voice activated
Navigation System or SYNC
With voice activated Navigation
System or SYNC
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
82
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
Heated outside mirrors
(if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
83
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
light on the
5. The indicator
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal.
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
84
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by 1
mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached and
press the SET + control.
85
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will
not erase your vehicle’s
previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use steering wheel controls and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
These controls allow you to operate some radio control features.
Radio control features
Press MEDIA to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2, or CD
• DVD/FES (if equipped)
• SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite
Radio mode if equipped).
• LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack)
86
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
In Radio mode:
to access the
• Press
next/previous preset station.
In CD mode:
to listen to the
• Press
next track on the disc.
In Satellite radio mode (if
equipped):
to advance through preset channels.
• Press
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or - to adjust the
volume.
Navigation system hands free
control features (if equipped)
control briefly
Press and hold
icon appears on
until the voice
the Navigation display to use the
voice command feature.
to complete a voice
Press
command.
For further information on the
Navigation system, refer to the Navigation supplement.
87
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
SYNC system hands free control
feature (if equipped)
briefly to use the voice
Press
command feature. You will hear a
tone and LISTENING will appear in
the radio display. Press and
to exit voice command.
hold
to activate phone mode or
Press
answer a phone call. Press and
to end call or exit phone mode.
hold
Press OK to confirm your selection.
For further information on the SYNC system, refer to the SYNC supplement.
Navigation system/SYNC hands
free control features (if equipped)
Press the
control briefly until the
icon appears on the
voice
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
to activate phone mode or
Press
answer a phone call. Press and
to exit phone mode or end
hold
call.
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC system, refer to
the Navigation and SYNC supplements.
PANORAMIC VISTA ROOF™ AND POWER SUNSHADES
(IF EQUIPPED)
The panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade controls are located on
the overhead console.
Do not let children play with the panoramic Vista Roof™ and
power sunshade or leave children unattended in the vehicle.
They may seriously hurt themselves.
When closing the panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade,
you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that
children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the panoramic Vista
Roof™ and power sunshade opening.
88
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: Do not attempt to move the panoramic power sunshades manually
or sunshade damage or malfunction may occur. The sunshade track clips
are designed to release the sunshade crossbar in order to prevent
damage to the system. If this occurs the sunshade crossbar ends may
just need to be slid back into position to regain proper function. See
your authorized dealer for proper panoramic Vista Roof™ or sunshade
operating, diagnostic or repair instructions.
To operate power sunshades:
Press the OPEN portion of the
control to open the sunshade. The
front and rear sunshades open
simultaneously. Press the CLOSE
portion of the control until the
sunshades stop at the “Express
close” position. Firmly press and
hold the control again to fully close the front and rear sunshades.
Note: Closing the sunshade will also close the panoramic Vista Roof™, if
open.
To open the panoramic Vista
Roof™: Press and hold to open
manually. The panoramic Vista
Roof™ is equipped with a one-touch
open feature. Firmly press and
release the rear control. The
panoramic Vista Roof™ will open to
the “comfort” position. Firmly press
and release the control again to fully open. To stop the one-touch open
feature press any control again.
Note: Opening the panoramic Vista Roof™ will also open the sunshades,
if closed.
Note: The panoramic Vista Roof™ will open to the “comfort” position
first before opening all the way. The “comfort” position helps to alleviate
rumbling wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully
opened.
To close the panoramic Vista Roof™: Press and release the front
control until the glass panel stops at the “Express close” position. Firmly
press and hold the control again to fully close.
To vent the panoramic Vista Roof™: From the closed position, press
and release the TILT control. To vent the panoramic Vista Roof™ from
any position, press and hold the TILT control. To close, press and hold
the front control.
89
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: If the panoramic Vista Roof™ is excessively operated, the glass
and shade motors will automatically go into a fail-safe jog mode (manual
intermittent operation) to prevent overheating and/or damage to the
motor. The motors will revert back to normal operation after a period of
idle time.
HOMELINK姞 WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The HomeLink威 Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential injury or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威. It is
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
90
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
1. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威
button you wish to program (located
on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink威 and
hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink威 indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” in this section for Canadian residents.
3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the
door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威
button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed
and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 4 through
6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence again and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with Step 1 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
91
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Step 1 outlined in
the “Programming” section,
replace Step 2 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note Step 2 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 3 in the “Programming” section.
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
92
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step
1 in the “Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow Step 1 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
MESSAGE CENTER
With the ignition in the RUN
position, the message center,
located on your instrument cluster,
displays important vehicle
information through a constant
monitor of vehicle systems. You
may select display features on the message center for a display of status.
The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a
display of system warnings followed by a long indicator chime.
93
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Odometer
• Trip Odometer A or B
• Distance to Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Average Speed
• Compass
• Trip Elapsed Drive Time 1 or 2
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If you RESET this warning
message, this display will return within 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
94
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or liters/100
km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing 100 miles
traveled by gallons of fuel used (kilometers traveled by liters used), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for 2
seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed control to
get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Fuel Information in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
Average Speed
Select this function from the INFO menu to display AVERAGE SPEED
and press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in
order to reset the function). Your average speed from that point will be
displayed until RESET is pressed and held for two seconds again.
Compass display
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
95
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines.
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Turn ignition to the RUN position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press the INFO button repeatedly until the Compass and Odometer
are displayed. (Do not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The top of the message
center must be blank).
Note: If the compass displays ⬙CAL 000000.0 mi⬙ instead of heading
information, the compass will need to be calibrated. Slowly drive the
vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until the ⬙CAL⬙ indicator
changes to display compass heading. This may take up to 3 circles to
complete calibration.
4. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
3 2
1
15
4
14
13
5
12
6
5. Press and hold the RESET until
the message center display changes
to show the current zone setting.
96
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
7 8 9 1011
Driver Controls
6. Release the RESET control, then
slowly press RESET down again.
7. Press the SETUP control
repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location
is displayed on the message center. To exit the zone setting mode press
and release the RESET control.
8. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE indicator changes to
CALIBRATION COMPLETED. This
will take up to three circles to complete calibration.
10. The compass is now calibrated.
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• System Check
• Units (English/Metric)
• Autolamp
• Autolock
• Autounlock
97
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Power Liftgate (if equipped)
• Easy entry/exit seat (if equipped)
• Reverse sensing system (Park Assist) (if equipped)
• Language
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message
for two to four seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report is as follows:
1. DOORS CLOSED
2. ENGINE TEMPERATURE
3. OIL PRESSURE
4. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
5. WASHER FLUID LEVEL
6. FUEL LEVEL
7. DISTANCE TO EMPTY
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
Autolamp delay
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
98
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to select
the new Autolamp delay values of 0,
10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
Autolock
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
1. To disable/enable the autolock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolock ON or OFF.
Autounlock
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
1. To disable/enable the autounlock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP MENU.
2. Press and hold the RESET
control switch to turn the
autounlock ON or OFF.
3. Press the RESET control switch for the next SETUP MENU item or
wait for more than 4 seconds to return to the INFO MENU.
Easy entry/exit (if equipped)
This feature automatically moves the drivers seat backwards for easy exit
from the vehicle.
1. To disable/enable the easy
entry/exit seat feature, select this
function from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the easy entry/exit seat ON or OFF.
99
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Power Liftgate (if equipped)
This feature allows users to open/close the rear liftgate at the touch of a
button.
1. To disable/enable the power
liftgate feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the power liftgate ON or OFF.
Reverse Sensing System (Park aid) (if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
1. To disable/enable the reverse
sensing system feature, select this
function from the SETUP menu or
put the vehicle in R (Reverse).
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the rear park aid OFF or ON.
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Pressing the RESET control
cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish and French.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control for 2 seconds to set the
language choice.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
100
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for several
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
• They will not disappear until a condition is changed.
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition LOCK/OFF-ON cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warnings
Driver door ajar
Passenger door ajar
Rear left door ajar
Rear right door ajar
Park brake engaged
Low fuel level
Check brake system
Low brake fluid level
Liftgate ajar
Low tire pressure
Tire pressure monitor fault
Tire pressure sensor fault
Compass data error
Integrated key programming
status
Status
Warning cannot be reset (PLEASE
CLOSE DOOR) will be displayed
RELEASE PARK BRAKE will be
displayed
Warning returns after 10 minutes
Warning returns after the ignition key
is turned from LOCK/OFF to RUN
Maximum number of Integrated Keys
exceeded
DRIVER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger side door is
not completely closed.
101
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear right door is not
completely closed.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED. Displayed when the manual park brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5
km). If the warning stays on after the park brake is released, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LOW FUEL LEVEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM. Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid
reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
LIFTGATE AJAR. Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE. Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT. Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Tire pressure monitoring system in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
COMPASS DATA ERROR. Displayed when the compass is not
operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
INTEGRATED KEY PROGRAMMING STATUS. Displayed when an
attempt is made to program a fifth Integrated Key to the Remote Key
Entry System. For more information on Integrated Key, refer to Locks
and Security chapter in this manual.
102
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT (IF EQUIPPED)
Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installed
floor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the
brake pedals.
To install floor mats that have a retention post:
Position the floor mat so that the
eyelet is over the pointed end of the
retention post and rotate forward to
lock in. Make sure that the mat does
not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator or the brake pedal.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
MANUAL LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
The liftgate cargo area is only intended for cargo, not for passengers. You
can open and close the liftgate from outside the vehicle. It cannot be
opened from inside the cargo area.
Note: In the event of a power failure, the latch can be accessed and
released through the access panel in the liftgate trim.
To open, push the control button
located above the liftgate outside
handle to unlatch the liftgate, then
pull on the outside handle to access
the cargo area.
• Exercise care when opening or
closing the liftgate in a garage or
other enclosed area. The liftgate
could be damaged against a
garage door, low ceiling or wall.
• Do not hang anything (bike rack, etc.) from the spoiler/glass or
liftgate. Doing so could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its
components.
• Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. Doing so could cause
serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing
carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle.
103
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes
from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate door open, keep the vehicle well ventilated so outside air
comes into the vehicle.
Liftgate ajar signal
If the liftgate is not fully latched, you will receive a “LIFTGATE AJAR”
message on the instrument panel. If you see this message, check the
liftgate door to ensure it is fully latched.
POWER LIFTGATE (PLG) (IF EQUIPPED)
You can power open or close the liftgate with the following controls.
• instrument panel control button
• integrated keyhead transmitter button
• outside liftgate control button
• control button in the rear cargo area
Opening and Closing the power liftgate:
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate
area before using the power liftgate control.
Keep keys out of reach of children. Do not allow children to play
near an open or moving power liftgate.
The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P (Park).
When the liftgate is being power closed, a chime will sound three times
as the liftgate begins to power close. A single chime indicates a problem
with the close request, caused by:
• the ignition is in Run and the transmission is not in Park
• or the Battery Voltage is below the minimum operating voltage
• or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 kph)
A fast continuous chime during power closing indicates there is an
excessive load on the liftgate (snow, bike rack, etc.) or a possible strut
malfunction. If any excessive load is removed and you still have a faster
chime, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
104
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Do not attempt to manually force the liftgate to travel faster than the
power system will permit. This will activate the obstacle detection
feature.
Exercise care, when power opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or
other enclosed area with a low ceiling or close to a wall/garage door. The
liftgate could be damaged from the contact. Disable the power feature
and operate the liftgate manually if necessary.
When power operating the liftgate at temperatures below 32° F (0° C),
the liftgate may stop about 5 inches (12.7 cm) from the full open
position. The liftgate can be fully opened by pushing it upward to the
maximum open position.
The Power Liftgate feature can be
enabled or disabled using the
Message Center. With the control in
the OFF position, power operation
is disabled from the liftgate handle
button and from the rear cargo area button. The integrated keyhead
transmitter and instrument panel switch will operate the liftgate
regardless of the position state of the Message Center. Refer to the
Message Center section in this chapter.
To power open or close the
liftgate from the Instrument
panel:
Press the button, located to the left
of the steering column, once to
power open or close the liftgate.
To power open or close the
liftgate with the integrated
keyhead transmitter:
twice within 3 seconds to
Press
power open or close the liftgate.
Refer to Remote entry system in
the Locks and Security chapter.
105
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To power open the liftgate with
outside liftgate control button:
1. To open, unlock the liftgate with
the integrated keyhead transmitter
or power door unlock control.
2. Push the control button located
above the liftgate outside handle to
unlatch and power open the liftgate.
Note: For the best performance
allow the power system to open the
liftgate after pushing the control. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate
may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and stop the power
system.
To power close the liftgate with
the rear cargo area control
button:
Press and release the control on the
left rear quarter panel to close the
liftgate.
Note: The rear cargo area control
button is disabled when the liftgate
is latched.
Warning, keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear
switch.
Note: The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second
press of the instrument panel, or the rear cargo area control button, or a
second double press of the integrated keyhead transmitter button.
To manually operate the liftgate:
1. Disable the liftgate power function. Refer to the Message Center in
this chapter.
2. Open and close the liftgate as you would a standard liftgate. Refer to
the Manual liftgate in this chapter.
Note: In case of operation in extreme cold -40° F (-40° C), or on
extreme inclines, manual operation of the liftgate is suggested.
106
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Obstacle detection:
The power liftgate system is equipped with an obstacle detection feature.
If the power liftgate is closing, the system will reverse to full open when
it detects an obstacle. A chime will sound 3 times when an obstacle is
detected as the liftgate begins to reopen. Once the obstacle is removed,
the liftgate can be closed under power.
If the power liftgate is opening, the system will stop and a chime will
sound 3 times when an obstacle is detected. Once the obstacle is
removed, the liftgate can again be operated normally.
Resetting the power liftgate:
The power liftgate may not operate properly and may need to be reset if
any of these conditions occur:
• a low voltage or dead battery or disconnected battery
• the liftgate has been left open or unlatched for more than six (6)
hours
To reset the power liftgate:
1. Ensure the battery is properly connected and charged.
2. Manually close and fully latch the liftgate.
3. Power open the liftgate by using the integrated keyhead transmitter,
or the instrument panel control button. The outside liftgate control
button can also be used if the power liftgate is enabled in the Message
Center.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the power liftgate needs to be power opened to the full open
position to reset the power liftgate positions.
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The cargo management system
consists of storage compartments
located in the floor of the rear cargo
area.
1. To open, lift the release handle
and the lid.
2. To close, lower the lid.
107
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
LUGGAGE RACK (IF EQUIPPED)
The load must be placed directly on the luggage rack. The vehicle’s roof
panel is not designed to carry a load.
When loading the luggage rack, it is recommended to evenly distribute
the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Ensure that the load
is securely fastened. The maximum load for the roof rack is 100 lb
(44 kg).
Your fuel economy will decrease when you drive with items on the
luggage rack. When the rack is loaded, check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each refueling stop.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
108
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
Your vehicle is equipped with two
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(IKTs). The IKT functions as both a
programmed ignition key that
operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, and a remote keyless entry
transmitter. Vehicles with a power
liftgate will have a four-button IKT
while vehicles without a power
liftgate will have a three-button IKT.
Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer
supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized
dealer. Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired.
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to
the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were
issued with an adhesive security
label on them that provides
important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you maintain the label in a safe
place for future reference, such as
the inside front cover of this
Owner’s Guide.
109
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Recommended handling of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)
To avoid inadvertently activating the remote entry functions of your
vehicle, it is recommended that the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT) be handled properly when starting and turning off your vehicle.
When inserting the IKT into the
ignition cylinder, place your thumb
on the center thumb rest of the IKT
and forefinger on the logo badge on
the opposite side.
To gain more leverage when rotating
the IKT in the ignition lock cylinder,
you can readjust the location of
your thumb to grasp the IKT on the
control.
outer edge next to the
Likewise, when rotating the IKT to
the 1 (LOCK) position in the
ignition lock cylinder, the bottom
edge of the IKT adjacent to the
control can be utilized.
110
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
POWER DOOR LOCKS
• Press the
doors.
control to unlock all
• Press the
doors.
control to lock all
Smart locks
This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle
if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors or the liftgate and you lock the
vehicle with the power door lock control (on the driver or passenger
door trim panel), all the doors will lock, then all doors will automatically
unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, by locking
the driver’s door with a key, using the lock control on the remote entry
transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter, or locking
the vehicle with the keyless entry keypad.
If both front doors and the liftgate are closed, the vehicle can be locked
from any method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Autolock feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for greater
than 2 seconds.
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 (RUN)
position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
greater than 2 seconds.
111
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock procedure,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all
vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds
or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position. The horn will chirp once
to confirm the procedure is complete.
112
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Keyless entry key pad autolock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Autounlock feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position, all the doors are closed, and
the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20
km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the 1
(LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the 1 (LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
113
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all
vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds
or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position. The horn will chirp once
to confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry key pad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 • 4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
114
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Insert the key and turn to the
lock position (key horizontal) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the
unlock position (key vertical) to
disengage the childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
115
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
There are 2 possible types of IKTs:
• Vehicles equipped with a power
liftgate
• Vehicles not equipped with a
power liftgate
The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
116
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The IKT allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle doors.
• remotely lock all the vehicle doors.
• remotely open the power liftgate (if equipped).
• activate the personal alarm.
• arm and disarm the perimeter anti-theft system.
• operate the illuminated entry feature.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position
except while the key is held in the 4 (START) position. The panic
feature operates with the key in the 1 (LOCK) position.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the authorized
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors/two stage unlock
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
2. Press
doors.
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this
feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned
to the 3 (RUN) position.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on using the dimmer control or
• any door is open.
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously
and
controls on the IKT for four seconds (disabling
pressing the
two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously). The
turn lamps will flash twice to indicate that two-stage unlock was enabled
or disabled.
Opening front windows and panoramic roof (if equipped)
Press
and hold for more than two seconds in order to begin opening
the two front windows and venting the panoramic roof (if equipped).
117
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• The
control can then be released and the windows and panoramic
roof will complete the opening operation.
• If any other remote entry transmitter control is pressed during the
opening operation, both windows and panoramic roof movement will
stop.
Note: The ignition must be in the 1 (LOCK) position and the accessory
delay feature must be not activated in order for this feature to operate.
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. The turn lamps will flash.
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
2. Press
the doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp
and the turn lamps will flash once if all the doors and liftgate are closed.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is not closed, or if the hood is not
closed in vehicles equipped with the perimeter alarm feature, the horn
will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash.
Opening the power liftgate (if equipped)
Press
twice within 3 seconds to fully unlatch and open the liftgate.
Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area before using
power liftgate control.
In order to fully lower and latch the liftgate, press the control twice.
If the liftgate stops mid travel, it may have detected an obstacle, Check
to ensure the liftgate swing zone is free from obstruction and reset the
power assist by manually closing the liftgate. Normal operation can then
be resumed.
Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from
being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent passengers
and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle.
Car finder
Press
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the turn lamps
will flash for a maximum of 3 minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to
the 3 (RUN) position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to timeout in 3
minutes.
118
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) position.
Memory feature
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter allows you to recall the memory
seat/mirror feature.
to automatically move the seat/mirrors to the desired memory
Press
position. Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is
not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat and mirrors to the desired positions.
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
3. Within 5 five seconds, press the
lock or unlock control on the
Integrated keyhead Transmitter and
then press the 1 or 2 control on the
driver’s door panel which you would
like to associate with the seat and
Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if desired.
Deactivating the memory feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door panel.
2. Within five seconds, press the lock or unlock control on the Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter which you would like to deactivate and then press
the SET control on the driver’s door panel again.
3. Repeat this procedure for another Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if
desired.
Replacing the battery
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three-volt
lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.
119
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
IKT near the key ring in order to
remove the battery cover.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the
correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that
the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become
deprogrammed from your vehicle. The IKT should operate normally after
battery replacement.
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your
authorized dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself, refer to
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft
section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform
this procedure yourself.
120
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) illuminate when the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or the keyless entry system keypad is
used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (RUN) position, or
• the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Perimeter lamps illuminated entry
With the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter system, the following items will
illuminate when the
(unlock) control on the transmitter is pressed:
• Head lamps
• Park lamps
• Tail lamps
The lamps will automatically turn off:
• if the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (RUN) position, or
• the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
Note: On some vehicles, the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature
will not activate in daylight conditions.
Deactivating/activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry
You may enable/disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by
your authorized dealer.
You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to
enable/disable the perimeter lamps feature. Note: Before starting, ensure
the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
121
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. Press the power door unlock control twice within 5 seconds. Note:
The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has
been deactivated. The horn will chirp once and honk once (one short
and one long) to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position to exit the procedure.
Note: The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete.
Illuminated exit
• When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the
ignition, the interior dome lamps (and the exterior mirror puddle
lamps, if equipped) will illuminate.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the key is inserted in the ignition.
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control, the
battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors
or the trunk was opened, the battery saver will shut off them off 10
minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
122
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• recall memory seat/power mirrors
positions.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to three of
your own 5–digit personal entry codes.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory seats and mirrors
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit
to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the
personal entry code:
• Pressing 1 • 2 recalls Driver 1 settings.
• Pressing 3 • 4 recalls Driver 2 settings.
• Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a
sixth digit does not set a driver position and will not recall a memory
setting. Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a
memory setting.
5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal keycode
has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
123
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
control on the remote entry transmitter
• pressing the UNLOCK
portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (RUN) position.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: If the two-stage unlocking
feature is disabled, all doors will unlock; for more information regarding
two-stage unlocking, refer to the Two stage unlocking section earlier in
this chapter.
To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time (with
the driver’s door closed). You do not need to enter the keypad code
first.
SECURILOCK™ PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of
coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
124
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters;
additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer.
Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired. The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your
vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself. Refer to Programming
spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitters for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster.
• When the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) position, the indicator
will flash once every 2 seconds to
indicate the SecuriLock™ system
is functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position, the indicator will glow
for 3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock™ system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle will not start and should be taken to an
authorized dealer for service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the 1
(LOCK) position.
125
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds to act as a theft
deterrent when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the 3
(RUN) position.
The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If
the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes
rapidly, have the system serviced by your authorized dealer.
Replacement Integrated Keyless Transmitters (IKT) and coded keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead
Transmitters (IKTs). The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be
programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be IKTs
with remote entry functionality.
If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock™ coded keys are lost or stolen and
you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from
your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard
SecuriLock™ coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program
both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter
portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded
keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be
IKTs with remote entry functionality.
Tips:
• Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or standard
SecuriLock™ keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
126
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
Please read and understand the
entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three seconds, but
no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
4. Within ten seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three seconds, but
no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the second
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. Within twenty seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the
new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The
theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may
repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait twenty seconds
and then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
127
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
The perimeter anti-theft system will help protect your vehicle from
unauthorized entry.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters are brought to the
authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
turn signal lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is in the 1(LOCK)
position, or is removed from the ignition. Either of the following actions
will prearm the alarm system:
control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your
• Press the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
When you press the lock control twice within three seconds on the
remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT, the horn will chirp once
to let you know that all doors, the hood and the liftgate are closed. If
any of these are not closed, the horn will chirp twice to warn you that
a door, the hood or the liftgate is still open.
• Press the driver or passenger
interior door lock control while
the door is open, then close the
door.
• Press the 7 • 8 and 9 • 0
controls on the keyless entry pad
(if equipped) at the same time to
lock the doors (driver’s door must
be closed).
There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes armed.
128
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Each door, the hood, and the liftgate is armed individually, and if any are
open, they must be closed before the open entry point (door, hood, or
liftgate) can enter the 20 second countdown.
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors, the hood and the
liftgate are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the 20
second countdown.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter portion of
your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
• Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad (if equipped).
• Unlock the driver’s door with a key. Turn the key full rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to ensure the alarm disarms.
• Turn ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a valid SecuriLock™ key or
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT).
• Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of
your IKT. This will only shut off the horn and turn lamps when the
alarm is sounding. The alarm system will still be armed.
Pressing the power door UNLOCK control within the 20 second
prearmed mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if:
• Any door, the hood or the liftgate is opened without using the door
key, keypad or the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT.
• The ignition is turned to the 3 (ON) position with an invalid
SecuriLock™ key or IKT.
129
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Adjustable head restraints
To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash, the
driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and/or operate
the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its proper position. The
driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in
motion.
Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.
Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as
possible behind your head.
The head restraints can be moved
up by pulling up on the head
restraint.
130
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Push release button to lower head
restraint.
Adjusting the front power seat
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback,
with your feet on the floor.
131
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not hang objects
off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket (if
equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place
objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and
the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag off” or
“pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer to Front
passenger sensing system section for additional details. Failure to
follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat
sensing system.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the switch in the direction of
the arrows to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Tilt Function
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to tilt the seat forward or
backward.
Power recline (if equipped)
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.
132
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the power lumbar support
The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Press one side of the control to
adjust firmness.
Press the other side of the control
to adjust softness.
Memory seat and mirrors
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat and
outside rearview mirrors, to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat and exterior
mirrors to the desired positions
using the associated controls.
Press the SET control. The SET control light will briefly illuminate.
While the light is illuminated, press control 1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park
(automatic transmission). A memory seat position may be programmed
at any time.
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control and the transmitter is programmed to
a memory seat position or when you enter a valid customer code 1 or 2
on the keypad.
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter..
Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not
in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
133
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Easy-entry/easy-exit feature
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat rearward 2 inches
(5 cm) when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is removed from the ignition cylinder
The seat will move forward (to the original position) when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is placed in the ignition cylinder
Heated and cooled seats
Heated seats
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions, must
exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or other
pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which
may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press once to activate the high heat
setting (3 indicator lights). Continue
pressing to scroll through the other
settings; medium heat (2 indicator
lights), low heat (1 indicator light) or off.
The heated seats will turn off after 15 minutes.
If the vehicle falls below 350 RPMs while the heated seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Cooled seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
134
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To operate the cooled seats:
Press once to activate the high cool
setting (3 indicator lights). Continue
pressing to scroll through the other
settings; medium cool (2 indicator
lights), low cool (1 indicator light) or off.
The cooled seats will turn off after 30 minutes.
If the vehicle falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Climate controlled seats air filter replacement
The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for
more information.
• There is a filter located under
each front seat.
• The filter can be accessed from the first row seat. Move the front
seats all the way back and up to ease access.
To remove an air filter:
• Remove key from ignition.
• Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter until the tabs are
released, then rotate the air filter
toward the front of the vehicle.
135
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Remove filter.
To install a filter:
• First, position the filter in it’s
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in
the housing. Then push in on the
center of the outside edge of the
filter and rotate up into the
housing until it clips into position.
REAR SEATS
Head restraints
Lift the head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible
behind your head.
The head restraints can be moved
up by pulling up on the head
restraint.
136
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Push release button to lower head
restraint.
Folding down the 60/40 rear seats
Note: The head restraints should be placed in the full down position
before folding the seatback down.
Note: Ensure that no objects such as books, purses, or briefcases are on
the floor in front of, on or under the second row seat cushion before
actuating the release lever to cycle the seats to the load-floor position.
To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts, ensure
that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to
the load floor position.
2nd row manual folding seat
To fold down the rear seat, pull up
on the lever on the outboard side of
the seat cushion and let the
seatback rotate downward into the
load floor position.
137
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2nd row EasyFold™ seatback release
Ensure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it down.
Folding the seat while occupied could result in damage to the
seat or injury.
Note: The power feature is operational when the vehicle is in park and
the lifgate has been open for less than 10 minutes.
The control buttons are located on the left-hand rear quarter trim panel
(accessible from the liftgate area).
Press and hold the control
mechanism to lower the seatback.
The top portion lowers the right
(40%) seatback, and the bottom
portion lowers the left (60%)
seatback.
Returning the 2nd row seatback to the upright position
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that the latches are engaged. An unlatched seat
may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Rotate the seatback upward until the seatback latches in the upright
position. The seatback will click when it is locked into position.
138
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Adjusting the second row seatback
Reclining the seatback can
cause an occupant to slide
under the seat’s safety belt,
resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
The second row seat reclines for
additional comfort. To adjust the
second row seatback to the desired
position, while seated, pull the
release lever up and push the
seatback rearward.
Seat mounted armrest and cupholders
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
seat armrest. To fold the armrest
down, release the latch located on
the seatback by pressing down and
pulling forward.
139
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To access the cup holders, lift up
one of the slotted areas on the
cover.
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
Returning the 2nd row armrest to the upright position
Close the cover on the cup holders. Rotate the armrest rearward until
the armrest is in the latched position. The armrest will click when it is
latched into position.
Rear heated seats (if equipped)
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions, must
exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or other
pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which
may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door panels.
140
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the indicated side of the
control for maximum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
• Push the indicated side of the
control for minimum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is in the ON position, activating the high or low heated seat
switch enables heating mode. When activated, they will turn off
automatically when the engine is turned off.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp
141
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
•
•
•
•
Front crash severity sensors.
Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, and in rollovers and side collisions
when the Safety Canopy is activated.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
142
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, this occurs
because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other
occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by
safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash
braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary
injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident
statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the front.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front
passenger airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag. The system is
designed to help protect small (child size) occupants from frontal airbag
deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger
seat contrary to proper child-seating or restraint usage
recommendations. Even with this technology, parents are STRONGLY
encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The
sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and passenger
seat-mounted side airbag (if equipped) when the passenger seat is empty
and the safety belt is unbuckled.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment
and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt section in this chapter.
143
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in rollover and side collisions when the
Safety Canopy is activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with
the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational
The Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning light section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
144
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
145
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or
if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the safety
belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement.
Energy Management Feature — Front Outboard
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a head-on collision.
• The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is
designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner.
This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the Belt and
Retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
146
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have two
types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
147
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a
booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety
seats for children later in this chapter.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety belt
assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision to verify that the ⬙automatic
locking retractor⬙ feature for child seats is still working properly. Safety
belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized dealer and must
be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Failure to
replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
The driver and front passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the
vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front
airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and Safety Canopy™, and safety
belt pretensioners.
148
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
pull on the center button and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Second row comfort guide
The second row outboard
lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
belt comfort guide. This guide is
attached to the head restraint and is
stored in a pocket in the seatback.
It is used to adjust the comfort of
the shoulder belt for smaller
occupants in the outboard second
row seats.
149
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the
belt guide.
2. Slide the guide up or down along
the webbing so that the belt is
centered on the occupant’s shoulder.
Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch (20
cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
150
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an
authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue
to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
151
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8
seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled
while the indicator light is
illuminated and the warning chime
is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and
before the ignition switch is turned indicator chime remain off.
to the ON position...
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder威 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature.
152
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position or less than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
ON...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph (5
km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to
ON...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately 1
minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 3 mph (5
km/h) and more than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
to ON...
Then...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
153
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare events”
“I’m not going far”
“Belts are uncomfortable”
“I was in a hurry”
“Safety belts don’t work”
“Traffic is light”
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
154
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
“I have an airbag”
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Consider...
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate
into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To do so may
adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag system.
One time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the safety belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minder威 is disabled for
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minder威 feature will enable during
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time
disable.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.
155
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in N (Neutral) (manual transmission)
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt-Minder威, this
system is designed to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the
Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. DO NOT START
THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (Approximately 1–2
minutes).
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt nine times, ending in the unbuckled state.
Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three
seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning
light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
156
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important supplemental restraint system precautions
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or
gently and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
157
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying
airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
Do not put anything on or over the airbag module. Placing
objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
authorized dealer.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
158
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the safety belt pretensioner and airbag supplemental
restraint system work?
The safety belt pretensioner and
airbag SRS are designed to activate
when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates
pretensioner activation and airbag
inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not
activate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Front airbags are designed to activate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
159
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
• seat-mounted side airbags . Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag
system later in this chapter
• safety belt pretensioners
• one or more impact and safing sensors
160
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• a readiness light and tone
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components
• Side curtain airbag system. Refer to Safety Canopy™ system later in
this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system. later in this chapter.
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system. later in this chapter.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power, the airbag ignitors and safety belt pretensioners.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat.
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat.
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time.
161
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator
lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel above the
climate controls.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the ON position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator lamp will be unlit and stay
unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
162
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Lit
Empty seat
Small child in child
safety seat or booster
Small child with safety Lit
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Adult
Unlit
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the back seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
163
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Objects
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Passenger Airbag
Small (i.e. 3 ring
Disabled
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy
Lit
Disabled
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small
Lit
Disabled
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
164
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least 2 minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is no
longer illuminated
• If the airbag readiness light remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
Determining if the system is operational
The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the
system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
165
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light
for front and side airbag system)
will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag SRS, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag. See your
authorized dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts
even when an airbag SRS is provided.
166
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• The same warning light,
electronic control and diagnostic
unit as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted on the B pillar (one on each side of the
vehicle).
• Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. If the front passenger sensing system
detects an empty seat, the front passenger seat-mounted side airbag will
be deactivated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
167
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the side airbag has
deployed, the airbag will
not function again. The side
airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness light (same light as used for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned to the RUN position.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
168
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety Canopy™ system
Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying Safety Canopy™.
Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of personal
injury in the event of a collision.
Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety Canopy™ could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Safety Canopy™
system, its fuses, the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the headliner on
a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy™. See your authorized dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety
Canopy™ system is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy™.
169
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the Safety Canopy™ system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy™ system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy™).
The Safety Canopy™ system
consists of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow
Safety Canopy™ deployment.
• The same readiness airbag light, electronic control and diagnostic unit
as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted on the B pillar (one on each side of the
vehicle).
• Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy™ system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy™ will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
170
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The Safety Canopy™ system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy™ inflation or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy™ is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, along the entire side of the vehicle. In certain lateral collisions
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy™ system will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy™ is designed
to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy™ did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy™ is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or
rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover.
If the Safety Canopy™
system has deployed, the
Safety Canopy™ will not
function again unless replaced.
The Safety Canopy™ system
(including the A, B, C, and D
pillar trim and headliner) must
be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the
Safety Canopy™ is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
171
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness airbag light (same light as for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system
may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
172
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury in a crash.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
173
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
174
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh sold
as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s head
hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should never use a
booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster seat with
lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children to ride.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt
does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
175
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
Supplemental Restraint System
section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode.
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to
48 lb (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used for
children up to 60 lb (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide upper
torso restraint for children up to 80 lb (36 kg) using an upper torso
harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a
top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with
LATCH and tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps
and anchors, refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this
chapter. For more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching
safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
attachments in this chapter.
176
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed
in front of an active passenger airbag.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
177
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
178
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2
through 9.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
179
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under the second row
seat gap cover marked with tether anchor symbols (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
Do not use seat anchors as cargo tie downs.
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. For seating
positions with non-adjustable (fixed) head restraints, route the tether
strap over the top of the head restraint.
180
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Locate the correct anchor behind
the gap cover for the selected
seating position.
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
5. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the LATCH anchors or safety belts. Follow the instructions in this
chapter.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach
the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also
be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
181
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The anchors at the center of the
rear seat are further apart than the
sets of lower anchors for child seat
installation at other seating
positions. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at this seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with
attachments on belt webbing) can
be used at this seating position only if the child seat instructions state
that the child seat can be installed to anchors that are spaced up to 20
inches (500 mm) apart. Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if
an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor.
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back. The LATCH
anchors are below the locator
symbols on the seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
182
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
183
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO CROSSOVER VEHICLE OWNERS
Crossover vehicles handle differently
than passenger cars in the various
driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways
and off-road. Crossover vehicles are
not designed for cornering at speeds
as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear seat belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints to
minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide for specific information about equipment
features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
All Wheel Drive (AWD) System (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system. With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front
wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The AWD
system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
184
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
For AWD vehicles, a spare tire of a different size other that the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire size (other than
the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and
default to front wheel drive.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD vehicles.
Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Crossover vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a
longer wheelbase.
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces.
As a result of the above dimensional differences, crossover vehicles often
will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
185
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
186
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
187
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
188
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
189
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see
Dissimilar Spare Tire/Wheel Information section for description):
Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure
as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
190
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
191
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided
by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information
is not found on these labels then you should consult your Ford dealer.
Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer
unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
192
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not
exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (366 cm) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (366 cm) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
193
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
194
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)/ All
Wheel Drive vehicles (front tires
at top of diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
195
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
196
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
197
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
198
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
199
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
200
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
201
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,
your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org
for additional information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
202
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System:
Low Tire
Pressure
Warning Light
Solid Warning
Light
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Check your tire pressure to
ensure tires are properly inflated;
refer to Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light will
turn OFF.
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description on
how the system functions, refer to
When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the light remains ON, have the
system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
Spare tire in
use
TPMS
malfunction
203
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire
Pressure
Warning Light
Flashing Warning
Light
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description of
how the system functions under
these conditions, refer to When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the TPMS warning light still
flashes, have the system inspected
by your authorized dealer.
TPMS
malfunction
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
204
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed rating as
those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the
use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that only
cable chains are used with steel wheels (of the same size and
specifications) as chains may chip aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Install cable chains only on the front wheels.
• Use only cable chains on 18 inch wheels with P245/60R18 tires.
• Do not use tire chains, cables or optional traction devices on 20 inch
wheels and tires.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cable chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the cable chains. If this does not work,
remove the cable chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cable chains when they are no longer needed. Do not
use tire cable chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and cable chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
205
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
206
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
207
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle
weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
208
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit
than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
209
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) (12 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
210
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) (9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow
option package.
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to
maximize vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment
while towing.
When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and on
steep grades, the A/C system may cycle on and off to protect the engine
from overheating. This may result in a temporary increase of interior
temperatures.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide.
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
1,000 miles (1600 km).
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer
to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue
load of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight.
211
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
FWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine
Maximum
Trailer weight Tongue
GCWR-lb. (kg) range-lb. (kg) load-lb. (kg)
(0-Maximum) (0-Maximum)
3.5L Class I
7350 (3334)
0–2000 (0-907) 0–200 (0–91)
towing
(standard)
3.5L Class II
8500 (3855)
0–3500 (0–1588) 0–350 (0–159)
towing
(optional)
AWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine
Maximum
Trailer weight Tongue
GCWR-lb. (kg) range-lb. (kg) load-lb. (kg)
(0-Maximum) (0-Maximum)
3.5L Class I
7550 (3425)
0–2000 ( 0-907) 0–200 (0–91)
towing
(standard)
3.5L Class II
8720 (3955 )
0–3500 (0–1588) 0–350 (0–159)
towing
(optional)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
212
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the hook retainers on the
hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Be sure your trailer conforms to all applicable local and Federal
Regulations regarding trailer braking. If your trailer is equipped with
electronically controlled brakes you will need to have an electronic brake
controller with associated wiring installed to your vehicle by an
authorized dealer.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Do not splice into the vehicle lamp wiring for trailer lamps. Your
vehicle uses an advanced electronic module to control and
monitor your vehicle lamps. Splicing into the wiring or attaching
wiring to the vehicle bulb. may DISABLE the rear vehicle lamps
or cause them not to function properly. Your lamp outage feature
may also be disabled or provide incorrect information.
See your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper
instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
213
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer tow connector (equipped on vehicles with a Class II trailer
tow/prep package)
The trailer tow connector is located under the rear bumper, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
Refer to the following chart for information regarding the
factory-equipped trailer tow connector:
Trailer tow connector
Color
1. Dark Green
2. Yellow
3. Brown
4. White
Function
Right hand turn signal/brake/hazard
flasher
Left hand turn signal/brake/hazard
flasher
Tail lamps/parking lamps
Ground
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components, do not trailer
tow during the first 1,000 miles (1600 km) of a new vehicle.
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components during the first
500 miles (800 km) of trailer towing, drive no faster than 70 mph
(112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Understanding the positions of the 6–speed automatic
transmission section in this chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for more information.
214
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 1,000 miles (1600 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle for personal travel (such as behind a motor home or a
truck).
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to
Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles:
Tow your Front Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground
or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly. If you are
using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment
provider.
215
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles:
Tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or
with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with the front wheels off
the ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the
ground. This will cause damage to your AWD system. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by the
equipment provider.
Note: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, follow
these instructions:
• Tow only in the forward direction
• Release the parking brake
• Place the transmission shift lever in Neutral (N)
• Turn the key in the ignition to the ACC position (refer to Starting in
the Driving chapter). The ACC position also unlocks the steering
wheel.
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)
• Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning
of each day and at each fuel stop.
216
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. LOCK, locks the automatic
transaxle gearshift lever and allows
key removal. This position also shuts
the engine and all electrical
accessories off without locking the
steering wheel. To lock the steering
wheel, remove the key then turn the
steering wheel.
2. ACC, allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate
while the engine is not running. This position also unlocks the steering
wheel.
3. RUN, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
217
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
218
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
3. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
2. Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
219
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to LOCK,
wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still fails to start, press the
accelerator to the floor and try again; this will allow the engine to crank
with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
This vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system which assists in
starting the engine. If the ignition key is turned to 4 (START) and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the engine may continue
cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a/c electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-17°C).
Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in
property damage or physical injury.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
220
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s laboratory (UL ) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ⬙Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.⬙ Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
221
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
of energy per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately 3 hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than 3
hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use
additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
BRAKE
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
222
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
!
P
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
BRAKE
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is released.
!
P
BRAKE
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
223
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Push the parking brake pedal
downward again to release the
parking brake. Driving with the
parking brake on will cause the
brakes to wear out quickly and
reduce fuel economy.
Note: If the vehicle is driven with
the parking brake applied, a chime
will sound.
ADVANCETRAC姞 WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL™ (RSC)
STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system provides stability enhancement
features such as Roll Stability Control™ (RSC), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) and Traction Control (TCS) for certain driving situations.
The system includes an AdvanceTrac威 with RSC on/off button, and a
“sliding car” icon in the instrument cluster.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) will work with the regular brakes in
order to prevent wheel lock during a braking event. This feature will also
help provide better steerability during braking.
During AdvanceTrac威 with RSC operation you may experience the
following:
• A rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving
off
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC indicator light will flash when the system
is activated.
• If your foot is on the brake pedal, you will feel a vibration in the
pedal.
Traction Control
Traction Control helps your vehicle maintain traction, when driving on
slippery and/or hilly road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel
spin. Excessive wheel spin is controlled by momentarily reducing engine
power and/or applying the anti-lock brakes.
If your vehicle should become stuck in deep snow or mud, try switching
the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system off by pressing the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC button momentarily. This will allow your wheels to spin and
your tires to “dig” for traction. If your vehicle seems to lose engine
power while driving in deep sand or very deep snow, switching off the
224
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
AdvanceTrac with RSC stability enhancement feature will restore full
engine power and torque to each wheel.
If the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system is activated excessively in a short
period of time, the brake portion of the system will disable to allow the
brakes to cool down. In this situation, Traction Control will use only
engine power reduction to help control the wheels from over-spinning.
When the brakes have cooled down, the system will again function
normally. Anti-lock braking, RSC and ESC are not affected by this
condition and will function normally during the cool-down period.
During Traction Control events the “sliding car” icon in the instrument
cluster will flash momentarily.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) with RSC system may enhance
your vehicle’s stability during adverse maneuvers.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system helps the driver maintain steering
control. AdvanceTrac威 with RSC will attempt to correct the vehicle
motion by applying brake force at individual tires and, if necessary, by
reducing engine power.
During Electronic Stability Control events the “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily.
Driving maneuvers which may activate AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system
include:
• Taking a turn too fast.
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle.
• Driving over a patch of ice.
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road.
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa.
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa.
• Driving on slick surfaces.
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.)
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC)
The RSC system works in conjunction with the AdvanceTrac威 system to
help maintain roll stability of the vehicle during aggressive maneuvers by
applying brake force to one or more wheels.
225
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
During Roll Stability Control™ (RSC) events the “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily.
Driving conditions that may activate AdvanceTrac威 with RSC include:
• Emergency lane-change
• Taking a turn too fast
• Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC button and icon functionality
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system automatically turns on each time
the engine is started, even if it was turned off when the engine was last
shut down. The “sliding car” icon which is located with the warning
lights in the instrument cluster will illuminate during bulb check at initial
start-up and then go off. This tells you that the system is normal and
active. All functions of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system (RSC, ESC,
Engine Traction Control, and Brake Traction Control) will be tested at
start up. When the system is left active, the “sliding car” icon will flash
only when any of the components of the system are affecting the
vehicle’s performance, otherwise the light will remain off. Consequently,
the “sliding car” icon will not be illuminated during most of your normal
driving.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC button,
located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, allows the driver
to control certain features of the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system
below 45 mph (70 km/h). If the
vehicle is below 45 mph (70 km/h), pressing the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
button will disable RSC, ESC and Engine Traction Control and steadily
illuminate the “sliding car” icon. The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system will
remain enabled when the vehicle speed is above 45 mph (70 km/h) even
if the button has been pressed.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the Traction Control feature will continue to
function, however ESC and RSC are disabled.
All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
operation.
Do not alter or modify your vehicle’s suspension or steering; the
resulting changes to the vehicle’s handling can adversely affect
the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system.
226
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of a AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC event is an indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system, and the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC button has not been pushed, the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on. If the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster remains on while the engine is
running, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power
steering fluid level. Check for a low power steering fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
227
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the RUN position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the RUN position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn
ignition key to LOCK, then remove
the key.
2. Using a screwdriver (or similar
tool), remove the protective cover
to the interlock release access hole
on the console.
3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar
tool) into the access hole and press
downward while pulling the
gearshift lever out of the P (Park)
position and into the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Remove the tool and reinstall the
protective cover.
5. Start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
228
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Automatic Transaxle Adaptive Learning
Your transaxle is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in
the vehicle computer. This feature is designed to increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or
transaxle may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered
normal and will not affect function or durability of the transaxle. Over
time, the adaptive learning process will fully update transaxle operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic
transaxle
P (Park)
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Depress the brake pedal
229
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transaxle
operates in gears one through six.
D (Drive) with Grade Assist
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the side of the gearshift
lever. This will also activate Grade
Assist.
• Transaxle operates in gears one
through five.
• Provides engine braking.
Depending on conditions the
transaxle will automatically
downshift to increase the level of
engine braking while descending
grades.
• Use when driving conditions
cause excessive shifting from O/D
to other gears. Examples: hilly
terrain, mountainous areas and
when engine braking is required.
230
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• O/D OFF lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
O/D
OFF
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp in the instrument cluster will not be
illuminated.
• O/D (overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
L (Low)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Will downshift to the lowest available gear for the current vehicle
speed; allows for first gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
It may be beneficial to turn the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system off so
the wheels are allowed to spin.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
231
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R
(Reverse) and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
The RSS detects obstacles up to six
feet (two meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio will return
to the previous value.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gear selector is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is ON. A control in the message center allows
232
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
the driver to disable the system only when the ignition is ON and the
gear selector is in R (Reverse). Refer to Message center in the Driver
Controls chapter for more information.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system. With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front
wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input from the operator.
All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no
maintenance.
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire
size (other than the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sizes
between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop
functioning and default to front wheel drive and could damage the
system.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for severe off-road use. The
AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in
which driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Driving off-highway with AWD vehicles
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough
roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different
from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds off-highway under high outside
temperatures, use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
233
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac威 with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac威 with Roll
Stability Control™ system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
234
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
AWD Systems (if equipped)
With AWD, the vehicle uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This
increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions
that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
235
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of
time. This will cause the AWD system to overheat. If the rear tires stop
spinning while the front tires spin in deep sand, turn off the vehicle and
allow the AWD system to cool down for a minimum of 15 minutes. After
the system has cooled down, normal AWD function will return. When
driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures,
use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation will maximize
the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs
(for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and
PTU (Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if
necessary.
236
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have
to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do
not “pump” the brakes.
237
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Driving on snow and ice
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transaxle damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since
your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS),
do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
off-highway usage.
238
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
239
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
240
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S.
Ford or Mercury vehicle customers call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle
customers call 1–800–521–4140. Customers will be asked to submit their
original receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer or by calling 1–800–FORD–CLUB.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
241
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
instrument panel by the radio. The
hazard flashers will operate when
the ignition is in any position or if
the key is not in the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
This switch is located behind a
panel on the left side of the cargo
area.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
242
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
15
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black
2A
Grey
Grey
—
3A
Violet
Violet
—
4A
Pink
Pink
—
5A
Tan
Tan
—
7.5A
Brown
Brown
—
10A
Red
Red
—
15A
Blue
Blue
—
20A
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
25A
Natural
Natural
—
30A
Green
Green
Green
40A
—
—
Orange
50A
—
—
Red
60A
—
—
Blue
70A
—
—
Tan
80A
—
—
Natural
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located behind a trim panel on the left side of the
driver’s footwell near the parking brake. To remove the trim panel, slide
the release lever to the right then pull the trim panel out.
243
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
To remove the fuse panel cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.
To reinstall the fuse panel cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until it clicks into
place. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is secure.
To reinstall the trim panel, align the tabs on the bottom of the panel with
the grooves, push the panel shut and slide the release lever to the left to
secure the panel.
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
244
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
15A
15A
4
5
30A
10A
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
20A
10A
10A
15A
15A
10A
7.5A
13
14
15
16
17
5A
10A
10A
15A
20A
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
20A
25A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Passenger front smart window
Not used (Spare)
Family entertainment system
(FES)/Rear seat control, SYNC
Driver front smart window
Keypad illumination, 2nd row
seat, Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS), Brake Shift
Interlock (BSI)
Turn signals
Low beam headlamps (left)
Low beam headlamps (right)
Interior lights, Cargo lamps
Backlighting, Puddle lamps
All wheel drive
Power mirror switch, Driver side
power seat memory, Driver seat
module – Keep alive power (KA)
Not used
Power liftgate module
Climate control
Not used (Spare)
All power lock motor feeds,
Liftgate release, Moon roof
THX system
Rear wiper
Datalink
Fog lamps
Park lamps
High beam headlamps
Horn relay
245
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
10A
20A
5A
5A
5A
10A
32
33
34
35
10A
10A
5A
10A
36
37
38
39
40
41
5A
10A
20A
20A
20A
15A
42
43
44
45
10A
10A
10A
5A
46
7.5A
47
30A Circuit
Breaker
—
48
246
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Demand lamps/Interior lamps
Instrument panel cluster
Ignition switch
Radio
Instrument panel cluster
Overdrive cancel switch
Automatic dimming rear view
mirror
Not used (Spare)
Not used (Spare)
Steering angle sensor
Rear park assist, AWD, Heated
seat module
PATS transceiver
Climate control
THX System
Radio
Not used (Spare)
Delayed accessory function for
radio and lock switch illumination
Not used (Spare)
Rear wiper logic
Customer accessory feed
Front wiper logic, Climate control
relay feed
Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS), Passenger Airbag
Deactivation Indicator (PADI)
Power windows
Delayed accessory relay
Roadside Emergencies
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to
the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Box
Description
Not used
Blower motor relay
Not used
Not used
247
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
5
Fuse Amp
Rating
40A**
60A**
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
40A**
30A**
10A*
20A*
—
—
—
—
—
40A**
30A**
20A**
20A**
—
—
7.5A*
—
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
—
10A*
—
—
10A*
15A*
—
15A*
10A*
248
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Power Distribution Box
Description
Cooling fan (vehicles with trailer
tow)
Cooling fan (vehicles without
trailer tow)
Cooling fan (trailer tow only)
Rear heated seats
Alternator
Trailer tow parking lamps
Not used
Trailer tow parking lamp relay
Not used
Not used
Not used
ABS pump motor
Front heated seats
Cigar lighter/Power point
Panorama moon roof
Fuel pump diode
PCM relay
PCM – Keep alive power (KA)
Trailer tow left stop/turn lamp
relay
Not used
Trailer tow left stop/turn lamp
Rear seat release relay
Fuel pump relay
Rear seat release
Heated mirror
Heated mirror relay
VPWR 1 – PCM
VPWR 3 – PCM
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A*
15A*
—
10A*
—
—
—
40A**
—
30A**
—
—
10A*
—
10A*
—
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
—
10A*
10A*
5A*
5A*
30A**
—
—
—
40A**
30A**
30A**
30A**
30A**
Power Distribution Box
Description
VPWR 2 – PCM
VPWR 4 – PCM
Not used
A/C clutch
Not used
A/C clutch relay
Rear window defroster relay
Rear window defroster
Not used
Starter
Starter relay
Backup lamp relay
Backup lamps
Not used
Trailer tow right stop/turn lamp
Trailer tow right stop/turn lamp
relay
Run/Start relay
PCM ISPR
ABS Run/Start
Adaptive lighting
Fuel pump relay coil
SPDJB Run/Start
Not used
Not used
A/C clutch diode
ABS valves
Front wipers
Power liftgate
Driver power seat
Passenger power seat
249
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Fuse Amp
Location
Rating
62
—
63
40A**
64
20A**
65
20A**
66
20A**
67
—
68
15A*
69
—
70
—
71
10A*
72
—
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge Fuses
Power Distribution Box
Description
Not used
Blower motor
Cigar lighter/Power point
Cigar lighter/Power point
Cigar lighter/Power point
Not used
Fuel pump
Not used
Not used
Stop lamps
Not used
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System and should not be used.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important information. If
the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
250
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
251
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
2. Place the gearshift lever in P
(Park) and turn the engine OFF.
252
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the spare tire and jack
1. Lift the carpeted load floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the spare tire cover (if
equipped).
3. Remove the wing nut securing
the spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Lift and remove the temporary
spare tire from the cargo area.
5. Remove the jack assembly from
the vehicle. Loosen the bag tabs and
remove the jack and lug wrench
from the bag.
6. Fold down the wrench socket
used to loosen the lug nuts and
operate the jack.
Tire change procedure
When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transaxle
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure to place the transaxle in P (Park), set the parking brake
and block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite
(other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
253
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close
to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Remove wheel cover (if
equipped) with the lug wrench tip
and loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
254
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
3. Align the slot on top of the jack
with the sheet metal flange
indicated by the jack locator triangle
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug
against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
6. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
7. Remove the jack and fully tighten
1
the lug nuts in the order shown.
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
3
4
for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
5
2
255
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Stowing the flat/spare tire and jack
1. Fully collapse the jack, fold the wrench socket into the handle and
place them both into the bag making sure to secure the tabs.
2. Place the jack assembly in the spare tire well aligning it with the two
vertical studs.
3. Place the tire in the spare tire well over the jack assembly.
If you are stowing a flat tire, place the tire in the spare tire well with
the valve stem facing down. Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is
able to protrude through a wheel opening.
If you are stowing the spare tire, place the spare in the spare tire
well in its original position.
4. Secure the wheel by replacing the wing nut and turning clockwise.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Lug nut socket
Wheel lug nut torque*
size/Bolt size
lb.ft.
N•m
3
100
135
Lug nut socket size: ⁄4
inch (19 mm) hex
Bolt size: 1⁄2 x 20
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
256
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
JUMP STARTING
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
257
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
258
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
259
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
260
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
261
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On FWD vehicles, if your vehicle is to be towed from the front, ensure
proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the
ground. The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this
fashion.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is recommended that the front wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a
dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transaxle.
On AWD vehicles, it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to
prevent damage to the automatic transaxle, AWD system or vehicle.
262
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
263
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Lincoln or Mercury vehicle to an authorized dealer
for warranty repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your
selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued
satisfaction. Please note that certain warranty repairs require special
training and/or equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair
after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made
using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Lincoln Mercury Customer
Relationship Center at 1-800-521-4140.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized
dealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
264
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized
dealer is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE program (U.S.
only).
265
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
266
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in
achieving satisfaction by following the three-step procedure outlined on
the front page of the Warranty Guide. However, if your warranty concern
has not been resolved using the three-step procedure, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. Initially, the BBB will try to resolve your question or concern
through mediation. Mediation is a process through which a
representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options
for settlement of your claim. If mediation is not successful, customers
with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration
process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after
the hearing. You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept
it. If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must
abide by the accepted decision as well. If the arbitrator has decided in
your favor and you accept the decision, the BBB AUTO LINE program
will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a
timely manner. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are
usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE, you will be asked for your
name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. You will then be mailed a Customer
Claim Form that you will need to complete, provide proof of vehicle
ownership, sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB. Upon
receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program
Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1–800–955–5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
267
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer.
There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible
combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford
ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.
268
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1–800–392–3673.
269
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
270
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
271
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is available
from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your
authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
272
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
273
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
3.5L ENGINE
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
• For plastic headlamp lenses, use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
274
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
PANORAMIC ROOF DEFLECTOR (IF EQUIPPED)
Vacuum the wind deflector cloth to remove insects & loose dirt. Clean
with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner
(ZC-54).
275
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean and damp white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry white
cotton cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner
(ZC-38-A) on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11-A) [In
Canada use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101)] to the wiped
area and spread around evenly.
3. Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean, white, cotton cloth and
press the cloth onto the soiled area–allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
276
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
LEATHER SEATS
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11-A). In Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93).
Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11-D), available from your authorized dealer. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93) or an equivalent
high–quality leather care product.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
CLEANING THE CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner.
Remove fresh spots immediately. Clean the seat with a damp cloth, using
a mild soap and water solution, if necessary.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
277
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11-A)
Motorcraft Leather Care Kit (U.S. only) (ZC-11-D)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Wash and Wax (Canada only) (CXC-95)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
278
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
279
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel near
the steering column.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the secondary hood latch
that is located under the front
center of the hood.
3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod.
280
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.5L V6 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Battery
5. Power distribution box
6. Air filter assembly
7. Transaxle fluid dipstick
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Engine oil filler cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
281
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
282
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
Changing rear window wiper blade
The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position. This reduces
the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash.
To replace the wiper blade:
1. Grab the wiper arm just below
the blade attachment and pull it as
far away from the glass as possible.
Do not use excessive force because
it can break the wiper arm at the
heel. Hold it there until the next
step.
2. Grab the wiper blade with your
other hand and use your fingers to
push the wiper arm tip through the
wiper blade center to separate the
blade from the arm.
3. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
If you find this procedure too
difficult, please see your dealer.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
283
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.
• 3.5L V6 engine
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
284
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 3.5L V6 engine
• If required, add engine oil to the engine. Refer to Adding engine oil
in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until it stops.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
285
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A.
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
286
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
287
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
288
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
N
LE
A
R
TU
D
RE
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLD
FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
289
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B51-A1. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, meeting Ford
specification WSS-M97B44-D, or DEX-COOL威 brand with the
factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product such as
DEX-COOL威 brand with your factory filled coolant can result in
degraded corrosion protection.
290
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on the
reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the
radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
291
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
292
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The
symbol will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
293
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
294
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
295
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
296
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 turn until it stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until at least a few clicks are
heard.
If the check fuel cap light
or a “check fuel cap” message comes on,
the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The light or message can
come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your vehicle.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
light
or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it may
take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light
or “check fuel
cap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up
(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and
highway driving.
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light
or “check fuel cap”
light to turn on as well.
message on may cause the
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap
is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in personal injury.
297
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
(R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
87
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
298
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right
Fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than 1
gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The Service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
information on the Service engine soon
indicator, refer to
Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
299
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
300
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
301
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle may reduce fuel economy at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example; bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
302
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
indicator, charging system
Illumination of the Service engine soon
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
303
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Service
engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the Service engine
soon
indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the Service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
If the Service engine soon
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
indicator on can
continued driving with the Service engine soon
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
indicator is on or not working
test if the Service engine soon
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
304
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If the Service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the Service engine
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
soon
ready for I/M testing; if the Service engine soon
indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
information for the service interval schedules.
305
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir. It should be between the
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in
small amounts, continuously
checking the level until it reaches
the range between the MIN and
MAX lines. Be sure to put the cap
back on the reservoir. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for
the proper fluid type.
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
306
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSAXLE FLUID
Checking automatic transaxle fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes.Your transaxle does not consume
fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transaxle is not
working properly, i.e., if the transaxle slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated areas for normal operating temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is in the add range or does not
show at all on the dipstick.
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 149°F (65°C) on a level surface. The normal operating
temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of
driving.
307
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The transmission fluid should be
within the cross-hatch area if at
normal operating temperature 149°F
(65°C).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transaxle failure. An
overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transaxle component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint
(250 mL) increments through the
filler tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transaxle components.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
308
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Release the clamps that secure
the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and
cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not properly seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
sure that the air cleaner cover tabs
are engaged into the slots of the air
cleaner housing.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
309
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Engine air filter element
Battery
Oil filter
PCV valve
Spark plugs
1
3.5L V6 Engine
FA-1884
BXT-36R
FL-400-SB12
1
2
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
2
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
310
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
—
5.5 quarts (5.2L)
Door latch, hood
latch, auxiliary hood
latch, door hinges,
striker plates, seat
tracks and fuel filler
door hinge
Lock cylinders
Engine oil1
Power steering fluid
Engine coolant–with
trailer tow package
11.7 quarts
(11.09L)
12.83 quarts
(12.14L)
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
—
Door weatherstrips
Engine coolant
—
Brake fluid
XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93-B
Motorcraft Penetrating
XL-1 /
and Lock Lubricant
None
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
XO-5W20-QSP (US)
Premium Synthetic Blend
CXO-5W20–LSP12
Motor Oil (US)
(Canada) /
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
WSS-M2C930-A
with API
Super Premium Motor Oil
Certification
Mark
(Canada)
Motorcraft Premium Gold
VC-7-B /
Engine Coolant with
WSS-M97B51-A1
bittering agent
(yellow-colored)2
Motorcraft MERCON威 V
XT-5-QM /
ATF
MERCON威 V
Multi-Purpose Grease
XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Silicone Spray Lubricant
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Ford part name
Capacity
Item
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Maintenance and Specifications
311
312
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
10.0 quarts (9.5L)3
2.4 pints (1.15L)
12 ounces (0.35L)
4.75 quarts (4.5L)
19.2 gallons
(72.7L)
20.8 gallons
(78.7L)
Automatic
transmission fluid
Rear differential
(AWD) fluid
Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) fluid (AWD)5
Windshield washer
fluid
Fuel tank
(front-wheel drive)
Fuel tank (all-wheel
drive)
—
—
—
ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Ford part number /
Ford specification
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威 V
—
Motorcraft MERCON威 V
ATF4
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
Ford part name
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 V should only use MERCON威 V fluid or fluid that
is specified dual usage MERCON威/MERCON威 V. Refer to scheduled maintenance information to
determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may
cause transmission damage.
5
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
1
Capacity
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Displacement
Required fuel
Firing order
Spark plug gap
Ignition system
Compression ratio
3.5L-DOHC V6 engine
3.5L
87 octane
1–4–2–5–3–6
(0.052–0.056 inch) 1.32–1.42 mm
Coil on plug
10.3:1
Engine drivebelt routing
• 3.5L V6 Engine
1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine.
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine.
313
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
314
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
System
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Description
6F50 6–Speed Automatic Transaxle
Code
J
315
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
GENUINE LINCOLN ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Lincoln Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer. These
quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln’s
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Lincoln
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Following is a list of several Genuine Lincoln Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are
available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online
store at: www.lincolnaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Splash guards
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Ash cup / coin holder
Cargo organization and management
Cross bars
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
316
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
Peace of mind
Mobile-Ease™ hands-free communication system
TripTunes™ advanced portable audio solution
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
317
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
A
Accessory delay ..........................81
AdvanceTrac ..............................224
Air cleaner filter ...............308–310
Air conditioning ..........................60
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................157, 166, 169
and child safety seats ............159
description ..............157, 166, 169
disposal ....................................172
driver airbag ............159, 167, 170
indicator light .........165, 168, 171
operation .................159, 167, 170
passenger airbag .....159, 167, 170
side airbag ...............................166
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................233
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................289
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................222
Anti-theft system ..............124, 128
arming the system ..................128
disarming a triggered
system .....................................129
Audio system (see Radio) .........17
Automatic transaxle
fluid, adding ............................307
fluid, checking ........................307
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................229
fluid, refill capacities ..............311
fluid, specification ..................311
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....24
Auxiliary power point .................78
318
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........311
B
Battery .......................................287
acid, treating emergencies .....287
jumping a disabled battery ....257
maintenance-free ....................287
replacement, specifications ...310
servicing ..................................287
Belt-Minder威 .............................152
Booster seats .............................173
Brakes ........................................222
anti-lock ...................................222
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................223
fluid, checking and adding ....306
fluid, refill capacities ..............311
fluid, specifications .................311
lubricant specifications ..........311
parking ....................................223
shift interlock ..........................228
Bulbs ............................................69
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....311
Cargo management system ......107
Cell phone use ..............................7
Changing a tire .................250, 253
Child safety restraints ..............173
child safety belts ....................173
Child safety seats ......................176
attaching with tether straps ..180
in front seat ............................177
in rear seat ..............................177
Child safety seats - booster
seats ...........................................173
Index
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............274
instrument panel ....................276
interior .............................276–277
plastic parts ............................274
safety belts ..............................276
washing ....................................272
waxing .....................................273
wheels ......................................273
wiper blades ............................275
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ............60
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment .................96
Console ........................................78
overhead ....................................77
Controls
power seat ...............................131
steering column ........................86
Convertible
cleaning ...................................275
Coolant
checking and adding ..............289
refill capacities ................292, 311
specifications ..........................311
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................83
Cupholder(s) .............................139
Customer Assistance ................240
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................268
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................269
Getting roadside assistance ...240
Getting the service you
need .........................................264
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................270
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................268
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................65
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................307
engine oil .................................283
Driving under special
conditions ..................231, 234, 237
sand .........................................235
snow and ice ...........................238
through water .................236, 239
DVD system .................................30
E
Electronic message center .........93
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................257
Emission control system ..........302
Engine ........................................313
cleaning ...................................274
coolant .....................................289
fail-safe cooling .......................293
idle speed control ...................287
lubrication specifications .......311
refill capacities ........................311
service points ..........................281
starting after a collision .........242
Engine block heater .................220
Engine oil ..................................283
change oil soon warning,
message center .......................283
checking and adding ..............283
dipstick ....................................283
319
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
filter, specifications ........286, 310
recommendations ...................286
refill capacities ........................311
specifications ..........................311
Event data recording ....................6
Exhaust fumes ..........................220
F
Fail safe cooling ........................293
Family entertainment system ....30
Floor mats .................................103
Fluid capacities .........................311
Foglamps .....................................65
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
driving off road .......................233
Fuel ............................................294
calculating fuel
economy ............................95, 299
cap ...........................................297
capacity ...................................311
choosing the right fuel ...........298
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................302
detergent in fuel .....................299
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................294, 297, 299
filter, specifications ........294, 310
fuel pump shut-off switch .....242
improving fuel economy ........299
octane rating ...................298, 313
quality ......................................298
running out of fuel .................299
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................294
Fuses ..........................................243
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................299
Gauges .........................................14
H
Hazard flashers .........................242
Head restraints .................130, 137
Headlamps ...................................64
aiming ........................................66
autolamp system .......................64
bulb specifications ....................69
daytime running lights .............65
flash to pass ..............................65
high beam .................................65
replacing bulbs .........................70
turning on and off ....................64
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system .......................................60
Homelink wireless control
system ..........................................90
Hood ..........................................280
I
Ignition ...............................217, 313
Illuminated visor mirror .............77
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................176
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................304
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................276
cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................66
G
J
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............297
Jack ............................................250
320
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
positioning ...............................250
storage .....................................250
Jump-starting your vehicle ......257
K
Keyless entry system ...............123
autolock ...................................111
keypad .....................................123
locking and unlocking doors ..124
programming entry code .......123
Keys ...................................109, 126
positions of the ignition .........217
english/metric button ...............98
system check button ................98
warning messages ...................100
Mirrors ...................................81–82
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................82
fold away ...................................83
heated ........................................83
programmable memory ..........119
side view mirrors (power) .......82
Moon roof ............................88, 117
Motorcraft parts ........278, 294, 310
L
N
Lamps
autolamp system .......................64
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................69
daytime running light ...............65
fog lamps ...................................65
headlamps .................................64
headlamps, flash to pass ..........65
instrument panel, dimming .....66
interior lamps .....................68, 70
replacing bulbs .........................70
Liftgate ......................103–104, 118
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........223
Load limits .................................205
Locks
autolock ...................................111
childproof ................................115
doors ........................................111
Lubricant specifications ...........311
Lug nuts ....................................256
Lumbar support, seats .............133
Navigation system .......................59
M
Message center .....................93–94
O
Octane rating ............................298
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................283
Overdrive ...................................229
P
Parking brake ............................223
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....310
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................143
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................247
Power door locks ......................111
Power liftgate ............................104
Power mirrors .............................82
Power point .................................78
Power steering ..........................227
fluid, checking and adding ....305
fluid, refill capacity ................311
321
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
fluid, specifications .................311
Power Windows ...........................80
R
Radio ............................................17
Rear seat entertainment
system ..........................................30
Relays ........................................243
Remote entry system .......115, 117
illuminated entry ............121–122
locking/unlocking
doors ................................117–118
opening the trunk ...................118
panic alarm .............................118
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................120
replacing the batteries ...........119
Reverse sensing system ...........231
Roadside assistance ..................240
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........151
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..................141, 145–149
Safety Canopy ...................166, 169
Safety defects, reporting ..........271
Safety restraints ........141, 145–149
Belt-Minder威 ...........................152
extension assembly ................150
for adults .........................146–148
for children .....................172–173
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................143
safety belt maintenance .........151
warning light and
chime ...............................151–152
Safety seats for children ..........176
322
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................314
Satellite Radio Information ........28
Seats ..........................................130
child safety seats ....................176
climate control ........................135
easy access/easyout feature ..134
front seats .......................130, 134
heated ......................................140
memory seat ...................119, 134
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ........................................124
Servicing your vehicle ..............279
Spare tire
(see Changing the Tire) ...........253
Spark plugs, specifications ......310,
313
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................311
Speed control ..............................83
Starting your vehicle ........217–219
jump starting ..........................257
Steering wheel
controls ......................................86
tilting .........................................76
SYNC ............................................59
T
Tilt steering wheel ......................76
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....201
Tires ...........................186–187, 250
alignment ................................194
care ..........................................190
changing ..........................250, 253
checking the pressure ............190
Index
inflating ...................................188
label .........................................200
replacing ..................................192
rotating ....................................194
safety practices .......................193
sidewall information ...............195
snow tires and chains ............205
spare tire .........................251, 253
terminology .............................187
tire grades ...............................187
treadwear ........................186, 191
Towing .......................................211
recreational towing .................215
trailer towing ..........................211
wrecker ....................................262
Transaxle
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................307
Transmission .............................228
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....228
fluid, refill capacities ..............311
lubricant specifications ..........311
Turn signal ..................................68
U
USB port ......................................25
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................314
Vehicle loading ..........................205
Ventilating your vehicle ...........220
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
Washer fluid ..............................282
Water, Driving through .............239
Windows ....................................117
power .........................................80
rear wiper/washer .....................76
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................75
checking and adding fluid .....282
replacing wiper blades ...282–283
Wrecker towing .........................262
323
2008 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
324
325
326
327
328
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Azimuth system check object position 1 (P1) and
position 5 (P5), distance from sensor
Azimuth system check object position 2 (P2) and
position 4 (P4), distance from sensor
Azimuth system check object position 3 (P3),
distance from sensor
Specification
30 cm (12 in) rear
91 cm (36 in) rear
152 cm (60 in) rear
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
PARKING AID
The parking aid system calculates the distance to an object around the rear of the vehicle by the use of 4
ultrasonic sensors. The parking aid system detects objects behind the vehicle when the REVERSE (R) gear is
selected.
The parking aid system consists of:
Parking aid sensors (located in the rear bumper cover)
Parking aid module (PAM) and parking aid speaker (both located behind the LR quarter trim panel)
Parking aid disable feature (integral to the instrument cluster (IC) message center)
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
PARKING AID
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:16
11:11:12 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
NOTE:
Both the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) and the high speed
controller area network (HS-CAN) are used for intermodule communication. A
gateway message is transferred from one network to another network through
the instrument cluster. Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
The parking aid sensors detect objects approximately 1.6 m (5.3 ft) from the rear of the vehicle, 50 cm (1.6 ft)
from the rear side of the vehicle, and 16 cm (6 in) above the ground. The parking aid module (PAM) calculates
the distance to an object within the 170 degree semicircular azimuth area around the rear of the vehicle. A 750
Hz variable warning tone is generated from a parking aid speaker which is attached to the PAM. The parking
aid speaker increases the warning tone rate as the vehicle gets nears an obstacle. When an object is detected
within 25 cm (10 in) of the sensors, the warning tone becomes continuous.
The parking aid system is enabled when the ignition switch is in the RUN position and the REVERSE (R) gear
is selected. The parking aid system is disabled if a fault is detected in 1 of the 4 sensors, the parking aid speaker
or the PAM. This condition is indicated by the parking aid disabled warning in the message center. The PAM is
on the MS-CAN and can be diagnosed with a scan tool.
The PAM communicates with the scan tool, the SJB, the audio control module (ACM) and the instrument
cluster (IC) or the MS-CAN. The following chart describes network messages used by the PAM:
PAM NETWORK COMMUNICATION MESSAGES
Broadcast Message
Originating Module
Ignition switch position
SJB
Parking aid disable switch
IC
status
Parking aid system status
PAM
Transmission selector
PCM
(PRNDL) range
Network Type
MS-CAN
Receiving Module
PAM
MS-CAN
PAM
MS-CAN
IC
HS-CAN
IC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Transmission selector
(PRNDL) range (gateway)
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed (gateway)
Parking aid audio volume
cutback request
IC
MS-CAN
PAM
PCM
IC
HS-CAN
MS-CAN
IC
PAM
PAM
MS-CAN
ACM
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical
Smart junction box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Parking aid module (PAM)
Parking aid sensors
Parking aid speaker
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PAM.
NOTE:
Follow the non-network DTC diagnostics (B-codes, C-codes, P-codes)
prior to the network DTC diagnostics (U-codes).
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to PARKING AID MODULE (PAM) DTC
CHART . For all other DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION (PID) CHART
PID
LRI_DIST
LRO_DIST
RRI_DIST
RRO_DIST
LRI_ATTEN
LRO_ATTEN
RRI_ATTEN
RRO_ATTEN
TRANSGR
Description
Left rear inner sensor distance to object
Left rear outer sensor distance to object
Right rear inner sensor distance to object
Right rear outer sensor distance to object
Left rear inner sensor attenuation
Left rear outer sensor attenuation
Right rear inner sensor attenuation
Right rear outer sensor attenuation
Transmission gear position
DTC Charts
PARKING AID MODULE (PAM) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
B1299
Power Supply Sensor Circuit Short to Ground Go to Pinpoint Test E .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
PAM self-test. If DTC B1342 is
retrieved again, INSTALL a new
B1342
ECU is Faulted
PAM. REFER to Parking Aid
Module. CLEAR all DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
The PAM is not configurable.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
PAM self-test. If DTC B2477 is
B2477
Module Configuration Failure
retrieved again, INSTALL a new
PAM. REFER to Parking Aid
Module. CLEAR all DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
C1699
Left Rear Sensor Circuit Short to Vbat
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
C1700
C1701
C1702
C1703
C1704
C1705
C1706
C1707
C1708
C1709
C1710
C1742
C1743
U0140
U0155
U2051
Left Rear Sensor Circuit Failure or Blockage
Left Rear Sensor Circuit Fault
Right Rear Sensor Circuit Short to Vbat
Right Rear Sensor Circuit Failure or Blockage
Right Rear Sensor Circuit Fault
Left Rear Center Sensor Circuit Short to Vbat
Left Rear Center Sensor Circuit Failure
Left Rear Center Sensor Circuit Fault
Right Rear Center Sensor Circuit Short to
Vbat
Right Rear Center Sensor Circuit Failure
Right Rear Center Sensor Circuit Fault
Rear Sounder Circuit Failure
Rear Sounder Circuit Short to Vbat
Lost Communication With Body Control
Module (GEM)
Lost Communication With Instrument Panel
Cluster (IC) Control Module
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Go to Pinpoint TestD .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to
Parking Aid Module. CLEAR all
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
One or More Calibration Files
Missing/Corrupt
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication with
the parking aid module
(PAM)
The parking aid is
inoperative/does not
operate correctly
Continuous or intermittent
tone when no obstacles or
fault codes are present
(certain obstacles may
appear "stealthy" to the
system, depending on
geometric shape, size and
material)
Fuse
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
PAM
Parking aid
sensors alignment
PAM
Rear bumper cover
Dirty or iced over
parking aid sensor
(s)
Action
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article.
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
CLEAN the rear bumper and sensors
with high-pressure water.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
The audio control module
(ACM) volume does not
decrease when
transmission is selected to
reverse and reverse sensing
system is enabled.
Parking aid sensor
bezel(s) or parking
aid sensor(s)
locked into the
rear bumper
incorrectly
Parking aid
sensors are not
aligned correctly
Parking aid sensor
(s)
PAM
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
PAM
REMOVE and correctly INSTALL the
parking aid sensor(s) and or bezel(s) as
necessary. REFER to Parking Aid
Sensor.
CARRY OUT the azimuth system
check and elevation system check.
REFER to Azimuth System Check
and Elevation System Check.
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Parking Aid Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Normal Operation
The parking aid system is enabled when the ignition switch is in the RUN position and the REVERSE (R) gear
is selected. The parking aid module (PAM) receives reverse gear input from the instrument cluster (IC) through
the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Voltage is supplied to the parking aid sensors from the
PAM on circuit LMP07 (BU/WH). The PAM supplies ground to the parking aid sensors on circuit RMP07
(GN/WH). The PAM receives a signal from the parking aid sensors on circuits VMP14 (WH/OG), VMP15
(YE/GN), VMP16 (YE/GY) and VMP17 (YE/OG). The system can be disabled through the message center
which is integral to the IC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Parking aid sensors alignment
PAM
Rear bumper cover
PINPOINT TEST A: THE PARKING AID IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
A1 CHECK THE DTCs FROM BOTH THE CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND PAM SELFTESTS
Check the PAM DTCs from the continuous and on-demand self-tests.
Are any PAM DTCs recorded?
YES : REFER to DTC Charts in this service information.
NO : Go to A2.
A2 CHECK THE PARKING AID SENSORS FOR CORRECT ALIGNMENT
NOTE:
If the vehicle was in a rear end collision, the parking aid sensors may not
be aligned correctly.
Check the bumper for correct alignment.
Carry out the azimuth system check. Refer to Azimuth System Check.
Carry out the elevation system check. Refer to Elevation System Check.
Does the parking aid system pass both system checks?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : REALIGN or INSTALL a new bumper cover. REFER to BUMPERS article. If the vehicle
was in a rear end collision, additional body work may be required to bring the parking aid sensors
into correct alignment.
A3 CHECK FOR CORRECT REVERSE GEAR INPUT
Apply the parking brake.
Key in ON position.
Select REVERSE.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PAM DataLogger
Monitor the PAM TRANSGR PID.
Does the PID indicate YES (transmission in reverse)?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Parking Aid Module. TEST the system for normal
operation.
A4 CHECK THE MESSAGE CENTER FOR PARKING AID DISABLE SWITCH OPERATION
While observing the IC message center, disable and enable the parking aid system.
Does the message center display PARK AID OFF when the parking aid system is disabled,
and display PARK AID ON when the parking aid system is enabled?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING
CHIMES article to diagnose the message center.
A5 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION
Disconnect the PAM connector.
Check for:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Parking Aid Module. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test B: DTCs C1700, C1703, C1706 And C1709 - Parking Aid Sensor Circuit Failure or
Blockage
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Parking Aid for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Voltage is supplied to the parking aid sensors from the parking aid module (PAM) on circuit LMP07 (BU/WH).
The PAM supplies ground to the parking aid sensors on circuit RMP07 (GN/WH). The PAM receives a signal
from the parking aid sensors on circuits VMP14 (WH/OG), VMP15 (YE/GN), VMP16 (YE/GY) and VMP17
(YE/OG).
DTC Description
Fault Trigger Conditions
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
C1700 - Left Rear Sensor Circuit Failure or Blockage any of the left rear parking aid sensor circuits are
open or the sensor signal line is shorted to ground.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
C1703 - Right Rear Sensor Circuit Failure or
any of the right rear parking aid sensor circuits are
Blockage
open or the sensor signal line is shorted to ground.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
any of the left rear center parking aid sensor
C1706 - Left Rear Center Sensor Circuit Failure
circuits are open or the sensor signal line is shorted
to ground.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
any of the right rear center parking aid sensor
C1709 - Left Rear Center Sensor Circuit Failure
circuits are open or the sensor signal line is shorted
to ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PAM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Parking aid sensor(s)
Parking aid bumper harness
PINPOINT TEST B: DTCs C1700, C1703, C1706 AND C1709 - PARKING AID SENSOR CIRCUIT
FAILURE OR BLOCKAGE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
B1 RETRIEVE THE DTCs FROM BOTH THE CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND PAM SELFTESTS
Check the PAM DTCs from the continuous and on-demand self-tests.
Are multiple DTCs recorded?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : For DTCs C1700, C1703, C1706 or C1709, go to B3.
For all other DTCs, REFER to DTC Charts in this service information.
B2 CHECK THE BUMPER WIRING HARNESS
Inspect the bumper wiring harness for opens, shorts, grounds, or corrosion.
Is the bumper wiring harness OK?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : REPAIR or INSTALL a new bumper wiring harness. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selftest.
B3 CHECK THE SENSOR CIRCUITRY FOR OPENS
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Suspect Parking Aid Sensor C4009, C4010, C4011 or C4012
Disconnect: PAM C4014
Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014, harness side and the suspect parking aid sensor,
harness side as follows:
PAM
Sensor
Rear
Connector- Connector- Circuit
DTC
Sensor
Pin
Pin
LH
LMP07
C1700
C4014-9
C4009-1
outer
(BU/WH)
LH
VMP15
C1700
C4014-15 C4009-2
outer
(YE/GN)
LH
RMP07
C1700
C4014-12 C4009-3
outer
(GN/WH)
C1703 RH
C4014-9
C4011-1
LMP07
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
C1703
C1703
C1706
C1706
C1706
C1709
C1709
C1709
outer
RH
outer
RH
outer
LH
inner
LH
inner
LH
inner
RH
inner
RH
inner
RH
inner
C4014-16
C4011-2
C4014-12
C4011-3
C4014-9
C4010-1
C4014-14
C4010-2
C4014-12
C4010-3
C4014-9
C4012-1
C4014-13
C4012-2
C4014-12
C4012-3
(BU/WH)
VMP17
(YE/OG)
RMP07
(GN/WH)
LMP07
(BU/WH)
VMP14
(WH/OG)
RMP07
(GN/WH)
LMP07
(BU/WH)
VMP16
(YE/GY)
RMP07
(GN/WH)
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
B4 CHECK THE SENSOR CIRCUITRY FOR SHORTS TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between the suspect parking aid sensor, harness side and ground as follows:
Rear ConnectorCircuit
Sensor
Pin
LH
VMP15
C1700
C4009-2
outer
(YE/GN)
RH
VMP17
C1703
C4011-2
outer
(YE/OG)
LH
VMP14
C1706
C4010-2
inner
(WH/OG)
RH
VMP16
C1709
C4012-2
inner
(YE/GY)
DTC
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : If all of the parking aid sensors recorded DTCs, go to B5.
If one or more parking aid sensor(s) recorded DTCs, INSTALL a new sensor(s) for the one in
question. REFER to Parking Aid Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
B5 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Disconnect the PAM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Parking Aid Module. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test C: DTCs C1699, C1702, C1705 And C1708 - Sensor Circuit Short To Vbat
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Parking Aid for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Voltage is supplied to the parking aid sensors from the parking aid module (PAM) on circuit LMP07 (BU/WH).
The PAM supplies ground to the parking aid sensors on circuit RMP07 (GN/WH). The PAM receives a signal
from the parking aid sensors on circuits VMP14 (WH/OG), VMP15 (YE/GN), VMP16 (YE/GY) and VMP17
(YE/OG).
DTC Description
C1699 - Left Rear Sensor Circuit Short to Vbat
C1702 - Right Rear Sensor Circuit Short to Vbat
C1705 - Left Rear Center Sensor Circuit Short to
Vbat
C1708 - Right Rear Center Sensor Circuit Short to
Vbat
Fault Trigger Conditions
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the left rear parking aid sensor signal line is
shorted to voltage.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the right rear parking aid sensor signal line is
shorted to voltage.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the left rear center parking aid sensor signal line is
shorted to voltage.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the right rear center parking aid sensor signal line
is shorted to voltage.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Parking aid sensor(s)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Parking aid bumper harness
PAM
PINPOINT TEST C: DTCs C1699, C1702, C1705 AND C1708 - SENSOR CIRCUIT SHORT TO VBAT
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
C1 RETRIEVE THE DTCs FROM BOTH THE CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND PAM SELFTESTS
Check the PAM DTCs from the continuous and on-demand self-tests.
Are multiple DTCs recorded?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : For DTCs C1699, C1702, C1705 or C1708, go to C3.
For all other DTCs, REFER to DTC Charts in this service information.
C2 CHECK THE BUMPER WIRING HARNESS
Inspect the bumper wiring harness for opens, shorts, grounds, or corrosion.
Is bumper wiring harness OK?
YES : Go to C3.
NO : REPAIR or INSTALL a new bumper wiring harness. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selftest.
C3 CHECK THE SENSOR CIRCUITRY FOR SHORTS TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Suspect Parking Aid Sensor C4009, C4010, C4011 or C4012
Disconnect: PAM C4014
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the suspect parking aid sensor, harness side and ground as follows:
Rear ConnectorCircuit
Sensor
Pin
LH
VMP15
C1699
C4009-2
outer
(YE/GN)
RH
VMP17
C1702
C4011-2
outer
(YE/OG)
LH
VMP14
C1705
C4010-2
inner
(WH/OG)
RH
VMP16
C1708
C4012-2
inner
(YE/GY)
DTC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to C4.
C4 CHECK THE PARKING AID SENSORS
Install a known good parking aid sensor(s) for each of the suspect parking aid sensor(s).
Clear the DTCs. Repeat the self-test.
Test the system for normal operation.
Is the concern still present?
YES : If all of the parking aid sensors recorded DTCs, go to C5.
If one or more parking aid sensor(s) recorded DTCs, INSTALL a new sensor(s) for the one in
question. REFER to Parking Aid Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C5 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION
Disconnect the PAM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Parking Aid Module. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test D: DTCs C1701, C1704, C1707 And C1710 - Sensor Circuit Fault
Normal Operation
Voltage is supplied to the parking aid sensors from the parking aid module (PAM) on circuit LMP07 (BU/WH).
The PAM supplies ground to the parking aid sensors on circuit RMP07 (GN/WH). The PAM receives a signal
from the parking aid sensors on circuits VMP14 (WH/OG), VMP15 (YE/GN), VMP16 (YE/GY) and VMP17
(YE/OG).
DTC Description
C1701 - Left Rear Sensor Circuit Fault
Fault Trigger Conditions
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the left rear parking aid sensor has internally failed
or has an incorrect attenuation time.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
C1704 - Right Rear Sensor Circuit Fault
C1707 - Left Rear Center Sensor Circuit Fault
C1710 - Right Rear Center Sensor Circuit Fault
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the right rear parking aid sensor has internally
failed or has an incorrect attenuation time.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the left rear center parking aid sensor has
internally failed or has an incorrect attenuation
time.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the right rear center parking aid sensor has
internally failed or has an incorrect attenuation
time.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Dirty or obstructed parking aid sensor
Parking aid sensor
Parking aid bumper harness
PAM
PINPOINT TEST D: DTCs C1701, C1704, C1707 AND C1710 - SENSOR CIRCUIT FAULT
D1 CHECK THE DTCs FROM BOTH THE CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND PAM SELFTESTS
Check the PAM DTCs from the continuous and on-demand self-tests.
Are parking aid DTCs other than C1701, C1704, C1707 or C1710 recorded?
YES : DIAGNOSE the other DTCs first. REFER to DTC Charts in this service information.
NO : Go to D2.
D2 CHECK THE PARKING AID SENSOR OPERATION
NOTE:
Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear of anything that might
activate the parking aid system.
Clean the rear bumper and sensors with high-pressure water.
Carry out the azimuth system check. Refer to Azimuth System Check.
Carry out the elevation system check. Refer to Elevation System Check.
Does the parking aid system pass both system checks?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a dirty
or blocked parking aid sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to D3.
D3 CHECK THE PARKING AID SENSOR DISTANCE PIDs
Make sure the suspect parking aid sensor(s) is flush-mounted in the bezel.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PAM DataLogger
With the brake pedal applied, shift the transmission into REVERSE (R) and monitor the parking
aid sensor distance PID. The PID will read 255 cm (100 in) on a correctly functioning sensor with
no object behind the vehicle.
Does the PID read 255 cm (100 in)?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : Go to D5.
D4 CHECK THE PARKING AID SENSOR ATTENUATION PIDs
Check the parking aid sensor attenuation PIDs.
Do the attenuation PIDs read between 0 and 16?
YES : Go to D6.
NO : Go to D5.
D5 INSTALL A KNOWN GOOD PARKING AID SENSOR
Install a known good sensor for the suspect parking aid sensor.
Key in ON position.
Clear the DTCs. Repeat the self-test. Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : Go to D6.
NO : INSTALL a new parking aid sensor. REFER to Parking Aid Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
D6 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION
Disconnect the PAM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Parking Aid Module. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test E: DTC B1299 - Power Supply Sensor Circuit Short To Ground
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Parking Aid for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Voltage is supplied to the parking aid sensors from the parking aid module (PAM) on circuit LMP07 (BU/WH).
The PAM supplies ground to the parking aid sensors on circuit RMP07 (GN/WH).
DTC B1299 is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the sensor power supply circuit is shorted to
ground or to circuit RMP07 (GN/WH).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Parking aid sensor(s)
Parking aid bumper harness
PAM
PINPOINT TEST E: DTC B1299 - POWER SUPPLY SENSOR CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
E1 CHECK THE BUMPER WIRING HARNESS
Inspect the bumper wiring harness for opens, shorts, grounds, or corrosion.
Is the bumper wiring harness OK?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : REPAIR or INSTALL a new bumper wiring harness. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selftest.
E2 CHECK THE LH OUTER SENSOR FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Parking Aid Sensor C4009
Key in ON position.
Clear the DTCs. Repeat the on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B1299 still present?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : INSTALL a new LH outer parking aid sensor. REFER to Parking Aid Sensor. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E3 CHECK THE RH OUTER SENSOR FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Parking Aid Sensor C4011
Key in ON position.
Clear the DTCs. Repeat the on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B1299 still present?
YES : Go to E4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new RH outer parking aid sensor. CONNECT the parking aid sensors. REFER to
Parking Aid Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E4 CHECK THE LH INNER SENSOR FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Parking Aid Sensor C4010
Key in ON position.
Clear the DTCs. Repeat the on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B1299 still present?
YES : Go to E5.
NO : INSTALL a new LH inner parking aid sensor. CONNECT the parking aid sensors. REFER to
Parking Aid Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E5 CHECK THE RH INNER SENSOR FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Parking Aid Sensor C4012
Key in ON position.
Clear the DTCs. Repeat the on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B1299 still present?
YES : CONNECT the parking aid sensors. Go to E6.
NO : INSTALL a new RH inner parking aid sensor. CONNECT the parking aid sensors. REFER to
Parking Aid Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E6 CHECK CIRCUIT LMP07 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: PAM C4014
Fig. 1: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-9, circuit LMP07 (BU/WH), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E7.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E7 CHECK CIRCUIT LMP07 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO CIRCUIT RMP07 (GN/WH)
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-9, circuit LMP07 (BU/WH), harness side and the
PAM C4014-12, circuit RMP07 (GN/WH).
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E8 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION
Disconnect the PAM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Parking Aid Module. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test F: DTC C1742 And C1743 - Rear Sounder Circuit Short To Voltage & Rear Sounder
Circuit Failure
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Parking Aid for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
A 750 Hz variable warning tone is generated from the parking aid speaker. The parking aid module (PAM)
increases the speaker warning tone rate as the vehicle gets closer to an obstacle. Circuits CMP09 (BN/BU) and
RMP09 (BU/GN) provide the connection between the PAM and the speaker.
DTC C1742 is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the sounder circuit is open or shorted to
ground.
DTC C1743 is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the sounder circuit is shorted to voltage.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PAM
Parking aid speaker
PINPOINT TEST F: DTC C1742 - REAR SOUNDER CIRCUIT FAILURE AND DTC C1743 - REAR
SOUNDER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
F1 RETRIEVE THE DTCs FROM BOTH THE CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND SELFTESTS
Key in ON position.
Retrieve the PAM DTCs from the continuous and on-demand self-tests.
Is DTC C1742 or C1743 present?
YES : Go to F2.
NO : For all other DTCs, REFER to DTC Charts in this service information.
F2 MEASURE THE PARKING AID SPEAKER RESISTANCE
Disconnect: Parking Aid Speaker C3268
Fig. 3: Measuring Parking Aid Speaker Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the parking aid speaker pin 1, component side and the parking aid
speaker pin 2, component side.
Is the resistance between 40 and 60 ohms?
YES : If DTC C1742 was recorded, go to F3.
If DTC C1743 was recorded, go to F7.
NO : INSTALL a new parking aid speaker. REFER to Parking Aid Speaker. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
F3 CHECK CIRCUIT CMP09 (BN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Connect: Parking Aid Speaker C3268
Disconnect: PAM C4014
Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-2, circuit CMP09 (BN/BU), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F5.
NO : Go to F4.
F4 CHECK CIRCUIT CMP09 (BN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARKING
AID SPEAKER DISCONNECTED
Disconnect: Parking Aid Speaker C3268
Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-2, circuit CMP09 (BN/BU), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuit RMP09 (BU/GN). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REPAIR circuit CMP09 (BN/BU). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
F5 CHECK CIRCUIT CMP09 (BN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Parking Aid Speaker C3268
Fig. 4: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-2, circuit CMP09 (BN/BU), harness side and the
parking aid speaker C3268-2, circuit CMP09 (BN/BU), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
F6 CHECK CIRCUIT RMP09 (BU/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 5: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-6, circuit RMP09 (BU/GN), harness side and the
parking aid speaker C3268-1, circuit RMP09 (BU/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
F7 CHECK THE PARKING AID SPEAKER CIRCUITRY FOR SHORTS TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 6: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the PAM C4014-2, circuit CMP09 (BN/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the PAM C4014-6, circuit RMP09 (BU/GN), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to F8.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
F8 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION
Disconnect the PAM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PAM. The PAM and speaker are serviced as one assembly. REFER to
Parking Aid Module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. CARRY OUT the scan tool data
link test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test G: DTC U0140 - Ignition Switch Position Missing
Normal Operation
The parking aid module (PAM) receives the ignition switch state from the smart junction box (SJB) as a
network message.
DTC U0140 is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets in the PAM when ignition switch state messages are
not received from the SJB.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
SJB
Networked data fault
PINPOINT TEST G: DTC U0140 - IGNITION SWITCH POSITION MISSING
G1 CONFIRM THE DTC WILL SET IN CONTINUOUS MEMORY
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PAM CMDTCs
Clear the DTCs. Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Retrieve continuous PAM DTCs.
Is DTC U0140 present?
YES : Go to G2.
NO : System is operating normally at this time.
G2 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH VOLTAGE PID
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PAM DataLogger
Check the PAM ignition switch voltage PID (IGN_V).
Does the PID match the ignition switch position?
YES : REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article.
NO : Go to G3.
G3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test H: DTC U0155 - PRNDL Missing
Normal Operation
The parking aid module (PAM) receives the transmission selector (PRNDL) state from the instrument cluster
(IC) as a gateway message from the PCM.
DTC U0155 is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets in the PAM when PRNDL messages are not received
from the smart junction box (SJB).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
IC
Networked data fault
PINPOINT TEST H: DTC U0155 - PRNDL MISSING
H1 CONFIRM THE DTC WILL SET IN CONTINUOUS MEMORY
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PAM CMDTCs
Clear the DTCs. Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Retrieve continuous PAM DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Is DTC U0155 present?
YES : Go to H2.
NO : System is operating normally at this time.
H2 VERIFY THE IC PRNDL DISPLAY FUNCTIONS CORRECTLY
Monitor the IC PRNDL display while moving the gearshift lever through the range of positions.
Does the PRNDL match all range positions?
YES : Go to H3.
NO : REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING
CHIMES article to diagnose the PRNDL.
H3 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
Disconnect the IC connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new IC. REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER,
AND WARNING CHIMES article.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test I: The Volume Cutback Is Inoperative
Normal Operation
With the ignition switch in the RUN position and the gear selector in REVERSE (R), the parking aid system
calculates the distance to an object by the use of a radar sensor. A 750 Hz variable warning tone is generated by
the parking aid sounder. A volume cutback request message is sent to the audio control module (ACM) from the
parking aid module (PAM) over the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) to decrease the volume
of the audio system, so that the parking aid sounder may be clearly heard.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PAM
ACM
PINPOINT TEST I: THE VOLUME CUTBACK IS INOPERATIVE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
I1 VERIFY THE PAM COMMUNICATES WITH THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC)
MESSAGE CENTER DISPLAY
Apply the parking brake.
Key in ON position.
Apply the brake pedal and place the gear selector in REVERSE (R).
Disable/enable the parking aid system by pressing the reset button on the message center switch.
Can the PAM be disabled/enabled in the IC message center display?
YES : Go to I3.
NO : Go to I2.
I2 VERIFY THE CORRECT PAM IS INSTALLED
Check to make sure the correct PAM is installed.
Has the PAM been replaced prior?
YES : VERIFY the correct PAM is installed. If correct, go to I3.
NO : INSTALL the correct PAM. REFER to Parking Aid Module. TEST the system for normal
operation.
I3 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION
Disconnect the PAM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Parking Aid Module. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
AZIMUTH SYSTEM CHECK
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Minimum Detectable Object Locations
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The object used in this system check can be fabricated from 9 cm O.D. (3 in I.D)
plastic pipe 100 cm (39 in) in length (available as PVC pipe, or similar from a
hardware or plumbing supply).
NOTE:
The following system check should be carried out with the vehicle on a level
surface. The specified object locations are approximate, not absolute
NOTE:
The parking aid system will default to on when the ignition key is cycled from
OFF to ON.
NOTE:
The scan tool may be used to monitor distance PIDs. The distance PIDs read
between 0 and 255 cm (0 and 8 ft) on a correctly functioning system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn the ignition to the ON position, engine off.
Set the parking brake on.
Place the gear shift in REVERSE (R).
Verify that the parking aid system detects the specified object when placed within the 5 specified
locations (P1, P2, P3, P4, P5). The pipe should be inside of these locations.
The speaker should beep slowly when objects are detected on the outer edges of the detection zone,
and increase as the object is moved closer to the vehicle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
When the object is within 46 cm (18 in) of the rear bumper, the sounder should be on continuously.
ELEVATION SYSTEM CHECK
NOTE:
The following system check should be carried out with the vehicle on a 3.0
m wide by 4.5 m deep (10 ft wide by 15 ft deep) smooth concrete surface,
free of all obstacles and noise from fan and pneumatic tools.
1. Turn the ignition to the ON position, engine off.
Fig. 8: Checking Parking Aid System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the gear shift in REVERSE (R).
4. Verify that no audible alerts are heard. If audible alerts are heard, check to make sure the bumper is
correctly installed and is not tilted downward so that the sensor is pointing at the ground.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
PARKING AID MODULE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Exploded View Of Parking Aid Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
15K866
3
-
Description
Parking aid module (PAM) nut
PAM
PAM electrical connector (part of
14A005)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage may result.
1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Remove the 2 nuts and the parking aid module (PAM).
3. Disconnect the PAM electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
PARKING AID SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Exploded View Of Parking Aid Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
14489
1.
2.
3.
4.
Description
Parking aid sensor electrical connectors
(part of 14N139)
Parking aid sensors
Remove the rear bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
Disconnect the parking aid sensor(s) electrical connector(s).
Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s).
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
PARKING AID SPEAKER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Parking Aid - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Identifying Parking Aid Speaker
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
15K864
2
W705635
3
-
Description
Parking aid speaker
Parking aid speaker push pins (2
required)
Parking aid speaker electrical connector
(part of 14A005)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Remove the 2 push pin and the parking aid speaker.
Disconnect the parking aid speaker electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:12 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
Material
Item
Specification
Dow Urethane Adhesive
Betaseal® Expressa
Dow Urethane One Step Glass
Primer
Betaprime® 5500 / 5500A /
5500SAa
Lacquer Touch-Up Paint (match
color to exterior grid wire)
ESR-M2P100-C
PM-19500-XXXX or PMP-19500XXXX
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-C or XG-1-K (US); CXG-1- ESA-M1C75-B
C (Canada)
Rear Window Defroster Repair
PM-11 (US); CPM-11 (Canada)
Sika Urethane Adhesive
Sika Tack ASAPb
Sika Urethane Metal and Glass
Primer
Sika 206 G+Pb
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
ESR-M14P5-A
ZC-23
Fill Capacity
-
-
-
-
a Dow Automotive 2-hour cure
b Sika 2-hour cure
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Terminal Kit - Back Glass 4F1Z-14421-AA
Specification
-
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Door latch screws
Front door module bolts
Nm
12
9
lb-ft
9
-
lb-in
80
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:36
11:10:31 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Front window glass clamp bolts
Rear door module bolts
Rear window glass clamp bolt
8
9
9
-
71
80
80
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS
The glass, frames and mechanisms consist of the following:
Accessory delay relay
Door window regulator motors
Front door glass top run
Front door window glass
Heated rear window grid
Heated rear window grid relay
Liftgate window glass
Rear door glass top run
Rear door window glass
Rear fixed window glass
Rear quarter glass
Rear window regulator and motor - run and brackets
Smart junction box (SJB)
Window control switches
Window regulators
Windshield glass
The glass, frames and mechanisms include the following:
Edge
Standard power windows, which include one-touch UP, one-touch DOWN and LOCK-OUT feature (LH
front windows only)
MKX
Standard power windows, which include one-touch UP, one-touch DOWN and LOCK-OUT feature (LH
and RH front windows only)
All vehicles
Liftgate glass which includes the rear defrost grid and rear wiper arm
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Standard plastic and laminate safety glass
Windshield glass which is bonded to the opening flange with a urethane sealant
The window regulator control switch:
is located on each door trim panel.
may be used to manually raise or lower all windows from the left front window control switch or the
individual side window from the corresponding individual door switch.
can manually lower the driver side window when the left front window control switch is pressed and held
in the DOWN position.
can automatically lower the driver side window when the left front window control switch is momentarily
pressed to the DOWN position and released.
Global Open - MKX Only
The SJB sends a signal on the global open circuit, to both front door window motors to open or close the
windows based on a signal received from the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter. If the accessory delay
relay is active, the global open feature will not operate.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Principles of Operation
Delayed Accessory Power
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) may also be identified as the generic electronic
module (GEM).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
The SJB controls power to the power windows, the audio system and the power roof opening panel with the
delayed accessory relay. The SJB activates the delayed accessory relay whenever the ignition switch is in the
RUN or the ACCESSORY position, or when the ignition switch is changed from RUN or ACCESSORY to the
OFF/LOCK position and the LH and RH front doors are closed.
The SJB will deactivate the delayed accessory feature when:
the LF door is ajar and the ignition switch is in the OFF/LOCK or key-out position.
the RF door is ajar and the ignition switch is in the OFF/LOCK or key-out position.
ten minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch was changed from ACC or RUN to the OFF/LOCK
position.
LH and RH Front Power Window Control - MKX
The LH and RH front window motors contain integral electronics which must be initialized whenever a new
window motor has been installed. Initialization is required to learn both the full UP and full DOWN positions
and the profile of the glass as it travels through the glass channel. Once initialized, obstacle detection is enabled.
When mechanical repairs have been carried out on either front window regulator or glass run, the applicable
front window motor must be de-initialized, and then initialized. Both the LH and RH front window control
switches send 3 separate signals to the front window motors: up, down and auto. The front window control
switches provide a 12-volt signal to the front window motor to request an up or down operation. When auto up
or auto down is requested, the front window control switches provide a 12-volt signal on the up or down line
and a ground signal on the auto line simultaneously. The up, down and auto feeds to the front window motors
are all low current.
The LH and RH front window motors operate with the ignition switch in the RUN or ACCESSORY positions,
or when the delayed accessory relay is active. The high current required to move the front windows are supplied
through the B+ and motor ground input.
When the LH or RH front window motor is operating in auto up or auto down mode, movement of the front
window can be stopped by pressing the switch to any position (UP, DOWN, auto UP, auto DOWN). The front
window control switches must be released before the window will move again.
The LH and RH front window motors have a security override feature. If an obstacle has been detected in the
window opening as the window glass is moving upward, the window motor will automatically reverse direction
and move the glass toward the fully OPEN position (in both manual up and one-touch up modes). This is known
as "bounce-back". Once the window motor stops the glass at its bounce-back position, and within 2 seconds the
switch is released, then held in the auto UP position, the window motor will move the glass up with no bounceback protection (security override). If the switch is released before the window glass reaches the fully CLOSED
position, the window motor will stop with bounce-back automatically enabled for the next window up
movement. If the ignition switch is turned to OFF or START (without delayed accessory), the window motor
will stop. The only exception is when an obstacle is detected in the window opening while delayed accessory
power is not present. In this case the window motor will bounce back, then stop. Ice, contaminant buildup and
environmentally induced tight spots in the front window seals are all possible conditions that will activate the
bounce-back feature. If an obstruction occurs between 4 mm (0.15 in) and 200 mm (7.87 in) of window
opening, the bounce-back position will be 250 mm (9.84 in) of window opening. If an obstruction occurs at a
position greater than 200 mm (7.87 in) of window opening, the bounce-back position will be 50 mm (1.96 in)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
below where the obstruction occurred.
The LH and RH front window control switches have illumination and illumination ground inputs, which are
used to illuminate the switch when the headlamp switch is turned to the PARK or ON position (the
AUTOLAMP position may also energize this input). These switch inputs do not directly affect operation of the
front windows. The front window control switches use the delayed accessory power input, which is transferred
to the up or down outputs when the corresponding switch contact is closed. The front window control switches
are grounded to the chassis through the main switch ground input, which is transferred to the auto output when
the corresponding front window control switch contact is closed. If the delayed accessory feed to the front
window control switch is missing, the window will not function. If the main ground signal is missing, the auto
functions will be inoperative and the window will also be inoperative.
If there is an open in the LH or RH front window control switch or the associated wiring, the related function
will become inoperative. If the up contact of the switch or the associated wiring develops an open circuit, the
front window will only operate in the down direction, or in the one-touch down mode. If the down contact of
the switch or the associated wiring develops an open circuit, the window will only operate in the up direction or
in the one-touch up mode. If the auto contact of the switch or the associated wiring develops an open circuit, the
window will only move manually up or down.
A new LH or RH front window motor will not operate in one-touch up or one-touch down mode, and the
bounce back feature will be disabled prior to initialization. If the switch is actuated to the auto UP or auto
DOWN position and released, window movement will stop when the up or down contact in the front window
control switch is released. If the front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, or if
a new front window motor is installed, it must be initialized. Refer to Window Motor Initialization.
Once initialized, the front window motors will soft stall into the upper and lower positions contributing to
extended durability of the system. If the front window does not seal completely in the full UP position (very
small gaps/non bounce-back events only), the front window switch can be actuated to the proportional UP
position and the front window will be energized for a fraction of a second to fully seal and this new position
will be learned.
LH Front Power Window Control - Edge
The one-touch UP/DOWN features are identical to the MKX LH front window.
Passenger Window Operation
Passenger windows may be raised or lowered using the LH front window control switch or the corresponding
passenger window control switch. Passenger window control switches receive power when the delayed
accessory relay is active and the LH front window lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. When the LH front
window lock switch is in the LOCK position, the passenger windows will not operate.
Global Open
When the unlock button of the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter is held for 2 seconds, the global open
activates. The smart junction box (SJB) sends a signal to activate the one-touch down operation of both front
windows. The global open feature does not operate if the delay accessory is active.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Rear Window Defrost
The heated rear window control switch is part of the HVAC module located in the instrument panel. When the
heated rear window control switch is pressed, ground is provided to the heated rear window relay coil. The
heated rear window relay supplies voltage to the rear window defrost grid and the LH and RH exterior rear view
mirror defrost grids.
The SJB will deactivate the heated rear window relay when one of the following conditions is met:
The heated rear window control switch is pressed when the feature is active
Ignition switch state is changed from RUN to OFF/LOCK
The 17-minute timer completes
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Door window regulator
and motor
Door glass run
Door window glass
Loose, corroded
connectors
Circuitry
Window control switch
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuses:
1 (40A)
39 (40A)
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuses:
1 (30A)
4 (30A)
17 (20A)
41 (15A)
45 (5A)
Circuit breaker
Delayed accessory relay
Heated rear window
relay
Rear window defrost
grid
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
smart junction box (SJB).
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart. For all
other DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Accessory Delay Relay Coil Circuit
B1302
Failure
B1304
B2947
B2949
All Other
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
If the accessory delay is always on, go to
Pinpoint Test M .
If the accessory delay is inoperative, go to
Pinpoint Test L .
Global Opening/Closing Circuit Open Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Global Opening/Closing Circuit Short
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
to Battery
REFER to the Master DTC Chart in
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
Accessory Delay Relay Coil Circuit
Short To Battery
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
DTCs
MODULES article.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
No communication with the
smart junction box (SJB)
module
Possible Sources
All power windows are
inoperative - MKX
All power windows are
inoperative - Edge
A single power window is
inoperative - LH front,
MKX
A single power window is
inoperative - LH front,
Edge
A single power window is
inoperative - RH front,
MKX
Action
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES
article.
Fuse
Circuitry
Window control
switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Circuit breaker
Circuitry
Accessory delay
relay
Window control
switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Fuse
Circuitry
LH front window
control switch
LF power window
motor
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Circuitry
LH front window
control switch
LF power window
motor
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Fuse
Circuitry
LH or RH front
window control
switch
RH front power
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Circuitry
SJB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
window motor
A single power window is
inoperative - LH or RH
rear, MKX
A single power window is
inoperative - RH front, LH
or RH rear, Edge
The one-touch up/down
feature is inoperative
The global open function is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly - MKX
Fuse
Circuitry
LH or RH front
window control
switch
LH or RH rear
power window
motor
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Circuitry
LH or RH front
window control
switch
LH or RH rear
window control
switch
RH front, LH or RH
rear power window
motor
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Circuitry
LH or RH front
power window
motor
LH or RH front
window control
switch
LH or RH front
motor not initialized
Battery power was
lost while LH or RH
front window was
operating
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
Fuse
Door window
motors not
initialized
RKE transmitters
Circuitry
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Fuse(s)
Circuitry
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
The defrost system is
inoperative
The defrost system will not
shut off automatically
The delayed accessory is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly
The delayed accessory does
not turn off
Rear window defrost
grid
HVAC module
SJB
Battery junction box
(BJB)
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
Circuitry
SJB
HVAC module
Go to Pinpoint Test K .
Door ajar switch
Accessory delay
relay
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
Circuitry
Accessory delay
relay
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: All Power Windows are Inoperative - MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the LH front power window control switch receives power through circuits CBP41
(BU) and CBP47 (GN/BU), which is the delayed accessory relay output from the smart junction box (SJB). The
delayed accessory relay is integral to the SJB module. The LH and RH front power window motors each have
their own separate power feeds and grounds and do not share any circuits with the LH or RH rear power
window motors except through the master window control switch.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
LH front window control switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST A: ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE - MKX
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
A1 CHECK CIRCUITS CBP41 (BU) AND CBP47 (GN/BU) FOR VOLTAGE
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C535A
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C535B
Key in ON position.
Fig. 1: Checking Circuit CBP02 (GN) And CPW30 (GY/YE) For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH front window control switch C535A-3, circuit CBP41 (BU),
harness side and ground; and between LH front window control switch C535B-3, circuit CBP47
(GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts for both measurements?
YES : INSTALL a new LH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : VERIFY the SJB fuse 41 (15A) is OK. If OK, go to A2.
A2 CHECK CIRCUITS CBP41 (BU) AND CBP47 (GN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280D
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance Between LH Front Window Control Switch C535A-3, Circuit
CBP41 (BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window control switch C535A-3, circuit CBP41 (BU),
harness side and SJB C2280D-16, circuit CBP41 (BU), harness side; and between LH front
window control switch C535B-3, circuit CBP47 (GN/BU), harness side and SJB C2280D-32,
circuit CBP47 (GN/BU), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms for both measurements?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test L to diagnose the delayed accessory relay circuit.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test B: All Power Windows are Inoperative - Edge
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the LH front power window control switch receives power through circuit CBP47
(GN/BU), which is the delayed accessory relay output from the smart junction box (SJB). The delayed
accessory relay is integral to the SJB module. The LH front power window control switch is grounded to the
chassis through circuit GD133 (BK).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Wiring, terminals or connectors
LH front window control switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST B: ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE - EDGE
B1 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP47 (GN/BU) FOR VOLTAGE
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C504A
Key in ON position.
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH front window control switch C504A-2, circuit CBP47 (GN/BU),
harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP47 (GN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280D
Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance Between LH Front Window Control Switch C504A-2, Circuit
CBP47 (GN/BU)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:31 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window control switch C504A-2, circuit CBP47
(GN/BU), harness side and SJB C2280D-32, circuit CBP47 (GN/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test L to diagnose the delayed accessory relay circuit.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
B3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C504B
Fig. 5: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window control switch C504B-7, circuit GD133 (BK),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new LH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test C: A Single Power Window is Inoperative - LH Front, MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
NOTE:
A new LH front power window motor will not operate in one-touch up or onetouch down mode until initialized. Refer to Window Motor Initialization.
NOTE:
The LH front power window motor must be initialized whenever a new motor is
installed.
NOTE:
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH
or RH (MKX) or LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window
glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease
or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run.
Normal Operation
The LH front power window control switch receives power from the delay accessory relay through circuit
CBP41 (BU). The LH window motor receives battery power through circuit SBP04 (GN/RD) and ground
through circuit GD133 (BK). When the LH front window control switch is operated in the UP position, the LH
front window motor receives a voltage signal through circuit CPW11 (BU/GY). When the LH front window
control switch is operated in the DOWN position, the LH front window motor receives a voltage signal through
circuit CPW10 (YE/VT). When the LH front window motor receives a ground signal on circuit CPW29
(VT/GY), the LH front window motor will enter one-touch up/down mode.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
LH front window motor
LH front window control switch
LH front window motor not initialized
PINPOINT TEST C: A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - LH FRONT, MKX
C1 CHECK THE POWER TO THE WINDOW MOTOR
Disconnect: LH Front Window Motor C540
Fig. 6: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH front window motor C540-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 4 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. DE-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor
Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
C2 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) FOR AN OPEN
Key in ON position.
Fig. 7: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH front window motor C540-3, circuit CBP41 (BU), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to C3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
C3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window motor C540-4, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
C4 CHECK THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH-TO-LH FRONT WINDOW
MOTOR FEEDS
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C535A
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage Between LH Front Window Motor C540-6, Circuit CPW10
(YE/VT) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window motor C540-6, circuit CPW10 (YE/VT), harness
side and LH front window control switch C535A-7, circuit CPW10 (YE/VT), harness side.
Fig. 10: Measuring Voltage Between LH Front Window Motor C540-2, Circuit CPW29
(VT/GY) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window motor C540-2, circuit CPW29 (VT/GY), harness
side and LH front window control switch C535A-8, circuit CPW29 (VT/GY), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Measuring Voltage Between LH Front Window Motor C540-5, Circuit CPW11
(BU/GY) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window motor C540-5, circuit CPW11 (BU/GY), harness
side and LH front window control switch C535A-4, circuit CPW11 (BU/GY), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
C5 CHECK THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Carry out the LH Front Window Control Switch Component Test. Refer to appropriate
COMPONENT TESTING article.
Did the window control switch pass the component test?
YES : INSTALL a new LH front window motor. REFER to Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door and Window Regulator and Motor - Front Door. INITIALIZE the
LH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : INSTALL a new LH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
INITIALIZE the LH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test D: A Single Power Window is Inoperative - LH Front, Edge
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
NOTE:
A new LH front power window motor will not operate in one-touch up or onetouch down mode until initialized. Refer to Window Motor Initialization.
NOTE:
The LH front power window motor must be initialized whenever a new motor is
installed.
NOTE:
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
or RH (MKX) or LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window
regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window
glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease
or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run.
Normal Operation
The LH front power window control switch receives power from the delay accessory relay through circuit
CBP41 (BU). The LH window motor receives battery power through circuit SBP04 (GN/RD) and ground
through circuit GD133 (BK). When the LH front window control switch is operated in the UP position, the LH
front window motor receives a voltage signal through circuit CPW11 (BU/GY). When the LH front window
control switch is operated in the DOWN position, the LH front window motor receives a voltage signal through
circuit CPW10 (YE/VT). When the LH front window motor receives a ground signal on circuit CPW29
(VT/GY), the LH front window motor will enter one-touch up/down mode.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
LH front window motor
LH front window control switch
LH front window motor not initialized
PINPOINT TEST D: A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - LH FRONT, EDGE
D1 CHECK THE POWER TO THE WINDOW MOTOR
Disconnect: LH Front Window Motor C540
Fig. 12: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH front window motor C540-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to D2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 4 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. DEINITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor
Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
D2 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) FOR AN OPEN
Key in ON position.
Fig. 13: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH front window motor C540-3, circuit CBP41 (BU), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to D3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
D3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window motor C540-4, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
D4 CHECK THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH-TO-LH FRONT WINDOW
MOTOR FEEDS
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C504A
Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window motor C540-6, circuit CPW10 (YE/VT), harness
side and LH front window control switch C504A-1, circuit CPW10 (YE/VT), harness side.
Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window motor C540-2, circuit CPW29 (VT/GY), harness
side and LH front window control switch C504A-7, circuit CPW29 (VT/GY), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window motor C540-5, circuit CPW11 (BU/GY), harness
side and LH front window control switch C504A-5, circuit CPW11 (BU/GY), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
D5 CHECK THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Carry out the LH Front Window Control Switch Component Test. Refer to appropriate
COMPONENT TESTING article.
Did the window control switch pass the component test?
YES : INSTALL a new LH front window motor. REFER to Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door and Window Regulator and Motor - Front Door. INITIALIZE the
LH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : INSTALL a new LH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
INITIALIZE the LH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test E: A Single Power Window is Inoperative - RH Front, MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
NOTE:
A new RH front power window motor will not operate in one-touch up or onetouch down mode until initialized. Refer to Window Motor Initialization.
NOTE:
The RH front power window motor must be initialized whenever a new motor is
installed.
NOTE:
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH
or RH (MKX) or LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window
glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease
or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run.
Normal Operation
The LH and RH front power window control switches receive power from the delay accessory relay through
circuit CBP41 (BU). The RH window motor receives battery power through circuit SBP01 (RD) and ground
through circuit GD140 (BK/GN). When the LH or RH front window control switch is operated in the UP
position, the RH front window motor receives a voltage signal through circuit CPW13 (BN/YE). When the LH
or RH front window control switch is operated in the DOWN position, the RH front window motor receives a
voltage signal through circuit CPW12 (GN/OG). When the RH front window motor receives a ground signal on
circuit CPW31 (GN/WH), the RH front window motor will enter one-touch up/down mode.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
RH front window motor
LH or RH front window control switch
RH front window motor not initialized
PINPOINT TEST E: A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - RH FRONT, MKX
E1 CHECK THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION
Attempt to operate the RH window using the LH front power window control switch.
Does the RH window operate when using the LH front power window control switch?
YES : Go to E7.
NO : Go to E2.
E2 CHECK THE POWER TO THE WINDOW MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: RH Front Window Motor C646
Fig. 18: Measuring Voltage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between RH front window motor C646-1, circuit SBP01 (RD), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 1 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. DEINITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor
Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
E3 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) FOR AN OPEN
Key in ON position.
Fig. 19: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between RH front window motor C646-3, circuit CBP41 (BU), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to E4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
E4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD140 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between RH front window motor C646-4, circuit GD140 (BK/GN), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
E5 CHECK THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH-TO-RH FRONT WINDOW
MOTOR FEEDS
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C535A
Fig. 21: Measuring Resistance Between RH Front Window Motor C646-6, Circuit CPW12
(GN/OG)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RH front window motor C646-6, circuit CPW12 (GN/OG), harness
side and LH front window control switch C535A-2, circuit CPW12 (GN/OG), harness side.
Fig. 22: Measuring Resistance Between RH Front Window Motor C646-2, Circuit CPW31
(GN/WH)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RH front window motor C646-2, circuit CPW31 (GN/WH),
harness side and LH front window control switch C535A-1, circuit CPW31 (GN/WH), harness
side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Measuring Resistance Between RH Front Window Motor C646-5, Circuit CPW13
(BN/YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RH front window motor C646-5, circuit CPW13 (BN/YE), harness
side and LH front window control switch C535A-5, circuit CPW13 (BN/YE), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
E6 CHECK THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Carry out the LH Front Window Control Switch Component Test. Refer to appropriate
COMPONENT TESTING article.
Did the window control switch pass the component test?
YES : INSTALL a new RH front window motor. REFER to Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door and Window Regulator and Motor - Front Door. INITIALIZE the
RH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : INSTALL a new LH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
INITIALIZE the RH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the
system for normal operation.
E7 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) FOR VOLTAGE
Disconnect: RH Front Window Control Switch C648
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 24: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between RH front window control switch C648-2, circuit CBP41 (BU),
harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to E8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
E8 CHECK THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH-TO-RH FRONT WINDOW
CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUITS
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C535A
Fig. 25: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RH front window control switch C648-5, circuit CPW12 (GN/OG),
harness side and LH front window control switch C535A-2, circuit CPW12 (GN/OG), harness side.
Fig. 26: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RH front window control switch C648-4, circuit CPW31
(GN/WH), harness side and LH front window control switch C535A-1, circuit CPW31 (GN/WH),
harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 27: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RH front window control switch C648-3, circuit CPW13 (BN/YE),
harness side and LH front window control switch C535A-5, circuit CPW13 (BN/YE), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new RH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test F: A Single Power Window is Inoperative - LH or RH Rear, MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The LH rear window control switch receives delayed accessory power from the LH front window control switch
through circuit CPW14 (VT/WH) when the window lock switch is set to the UNLOCK position, and the
delayed accessory relay is active. When the LH rear window is operated in the up direction from the LH rear
window control switch, power is sent to the LH rear window motor through circuit CPW21 (BN) and ground
through circuit CPW22 (GN/VT). When the LH rear window is operated in the down direction from the LH rear
window control switch, power is sent to the LH rear window motor through circuit CPW22 (GN/VT) and
ground through circuit CPW21 (BN).
The RH rear window control switch receives delayed accessory power from the LH front window control
switch through circuit CPW14 (VT/WH) when the window lock switch is set to the UNLOCK position, and the
delayed accessory relay is active. When the RH rear window is operated in the up direction from the RH rear
window control switch, power is sent to the RH rear window motor through circuit CPW24 (WH/VT) and
ground through circuit CPW23 (GY). When the RH rear window is operated in the down direction from the RH
rear window control switch, power is sent to the RH rear window motor through circuit CPW23 (GY) and
ground through circuit CPW24 (WH/VT).
Rear Window Operation From LH Front Switch
When the LH rear power window is operated in the up direction from the LH front window control switch,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
power is sent to the LH rear window control switch through circuit CPW16 (BU/OG), which transfers power to
the LH rear window motor through circuit CPW21 (BN). The LH front window control switch provides ground
to the LH rear window switch through circuit CPW15 (YE), which transfers ground to the LH rear window
motor through circuit CPW22 (GN/VT).
During LH rear power window down operation from the LH front window control switch, power is sent to the
LH rear window control switch through circuit CPW15 (YE), which transfers power to the LH rear window
motor through circuit CPW22 (GN/VT). The LH front window control switch provides ground to the LH rear
window switch through circuit CPW16 (BU/OG), which transfers ground to the LH rear window motor through
circuit CPW21 (BN).
When the RH rear power window is operated in the up direction from the LH front window control switch,
power is sent to the RH rear window control switch through circuit CPW18 (GY/VT), which transfers power to
the RH rear window motor through circuit CPW24 (WH/VT). The LH front window control switch provides
ground to the RH rear window switch through circuit CPW17 (BN/GN), which transfers ground to the RH rear
window motor through circuit CPW23 (GY).
During RH rear power window down operation from the LH front window control switch, power is sent to the
RH rear window control switch through circuit CPW17 (BN/GN), which transfers power to the RH rear
window motor through circuit CPW23 (GY). The LH front window control switch provides ground to the RH
rear window switch through circuit CPW18 (GY/VT), which transfers ground to the RH rear window motor
through circuit CPW24 (WH/VT).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
LH front window switch
Rear window motor
Rear window switch
PINPOINT TEST F: A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - LH OR RH REAR, MKX
F1 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE LH REAR OR RH REAR WINDOW CONTROL
SWITCH
Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Window Control Switch C701 (LH) or C801 (RH)
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 28: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Set the LH front window lock switch to the UNLOCK position.
Measure the voltage between the inoperative rear window connector and ground:
for the RH rear window control switch, measure the voltage between RH rear window
control switch C801-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side and ground.
for the LH rear window control switch, measure the voltage between C701-3, circuit CPW14
(VT/WH), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to F4.
NO : Go to F2.
F2 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C535B
Fig. 29: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between LH front window control switch C535B-3, circuit CBP47 (GN/BU),
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to F3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
F3 CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN CIRCUIT CPW14 (VT/WH)
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 30: Measuring Resistance Between Inoperative Rear Window Connector & LH Front
Window Control Switch Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the inoperative rear window connector and the LH front window
control switch connector.
for the RH rear window control switch, measure the resistance between RH window control
switch C801-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side and LH front window control switch
C535B-4, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side.
for the LH rear window control switch, measure the resistance between LH window control
switch C701-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side and LH front window control switch
C535B-4, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new LH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
F4 CHECK THE GROUNDS TO THE INOPERATIVE REAR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 31: Measuring Resistance Between Inoperative Window Control Switch & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the inoperative window control switch and ground:
for the RH rear window control switch, measure the resistance between RH rear window
control switch C801-1, circuit CPW17 (BN/GN), harness side and ground; and between RH
rear window control switch C801-6, circuit CPW18 (GY/VT), harness side and ground.
for the LH rear window control switch, measure the resistance between LH rear window
control switch C701-1, circuit CPW15 (YE), harness side and ground; and between LH rear
window control switch C701-6, circuit CPW16 (BU/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F7.
NO : Go to F5.
F5 CHECK THE CIRCUITS TO THE INOPERATIVE REAR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C535B
Fig. 32: Measuring Resistance Between LH Front Window Control Switch C535B-1, Circuit
CPW15 (YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative LH rear power window, measure the resistance between LH front window
control switch C535B-1, circuit CPW15 (YE) and LH rear window control switch C701-1, circuit
CPW15 (YE), harness side; and between LH front window control switch C535B-2, circuit CPW16
(BU/OG) and LH rear window control switch C701-6, circuit CPW16 (BU/OG) harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 33: Measuring Resistance Between LH Front Window Control Switch C535B-7, Circuit
CPW17 (BN/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH rear power window, measure the resistance between LH front window
control switch C535B-7, circuit CPW17 (BN/GN) and RH window control switch C819-1, circuit
CPW17 (BN/GN), harness side; and between LH front window control switch C535B-8, circuit
CPW18 (GY/VT) and RH rear window control switch C819-6, circuit CPW18 (GY/VT) harness
side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
F6 CHECK THE GROUND TO THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Fig. 34: Measuring Resistance Between LH Front Window Control Switch C535B-6, Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
GD133 (BK)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window control switch C535B-6, circuit GD133 (BK),
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new LH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
F7 CHECK THE INOPERATIVE WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Connect: LH Front Window Control Switch C535B
Key in ON position.
For an inoperative LH rear window, connect a fused jumper wire between LH rear window control
switch C701-2, circuit CPW22 (GN/VT), harness side and LH rear window control switch C701-3,
circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side; and between LH rear window control switch C701-5,
circuit CPW21 (BN), harness side and LH rear window control switch C701-6, circuit CPW16
(BU/OG), harness side. The LH rear window should operate in the downward direction.
Fig. 35: Checking Inoperative Window Control Switch (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH rear window, connect a fused jumper wire between RH rear window control
switch C801-2, circuit CPW23 (GY), harness side and RH rear window control switch C801-3,
circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side; and between RH rear window control switch C801-5,
circuit CPW24 (WH/VT), harness side and RH rear window control switch C801-6, circuit CPW18
(GY/VT), harness side. The RH rear window should operate in the downward direction.
For an inoperative LH rear window, connect a fused jumper wire between LH rear window control
switch C701-2, circuit CPW22 (GN/VT), harness side and LH rear window control switch C701-1,
circuit CPW15 (YE), harness side; and between LH rear window control switch C701-5, circuit
CPW21 (BN), harness side and LH rear window control switch C701-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH),
harness side. The LH rear window should operate in the upward direction.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 36: Checking Inoperative Window Control Switch (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH rear window, connect a fused jumper wire between RH rear window control
switch C801-2, circuit CPW22 (GN/VT), harness side and RH rear window control switch C801-1,
circuit CPW17 (BN/GN), harness side; and between RH rear window control switch C801-5,
circuit CPW24 (WH/VT), harness side and RH rear window control switch C801-3, circuit CPW14
(VT/WH), harness side. The RH rear window should operate in the upward direction.
Did the inoperative window operate correctly?
YES : INSTALL a new LH or RH rear window control switch. REFER to Window Control
Switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to F8.
F8 CHECK THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUITS
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Window Motor C703 (LH) or C828 (RH)
For an inoperative LH rear window, measure the resistance between LH rear window control
switch C701-2, circuit CPW22 (GN/VT), harness side and LH rear window motor C703-2, circuit
CPW22 (GN/VT), harness side.
Fig. 37: Measuring Resistance Between RH Rear Window Control Switch C801-2, Circuit
CPW23 (GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH rear window, measure the resistance between RH rear window control
switch C801-2, circuit CPW23 (GY), harness side and RH rear window motor C828-2, circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
CPW23 (GY), harness side.
For an inoperative LH rear window, measure the resistance between LH rear window control
switch C701-5, circuit CPW21 (BN), harness side and LH rear window motor C703-1, circuit
CPW21 (BN), harness side.
Fig. 38: Measuring Resistance Between RH Rear Window Control Switch C801-5, Circuit
CPW24 (WH/VT)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH rear window, measure the resistance between RH rear window control
switch C801-5, circuit CPW24 (WH/VT), harness side and RH rear window motor C703-1, circuit
CPW24 (WH/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new LH or RH rear window motor. REFER to Window Regulator Motor.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test G: A Single Power Window is Inoperative- RH Front, LH or RH Rear, Edge
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The RH front window control switch receives delayed accessory power from the LH front window control
switch through circuit CPW14 (VT/WH) when the window lock switch is set to the UNLOCK position, and the
delayed accessory feature is active. When the RH front window is operated in the up direction from the RH
front window control switch, power is sent to the RH front window motor through circuit CPW20 (WH/OG)
and ground through circuit CPW19 (VT). When the RH front window is operated in the down direction from
the RH front window control switch, power is sent to the RH front window motor through circuit CPW19 (VT)
and ground through circuit CPW20 (WH/OG).
The LH rear window control switch receives delayed accessory power from the LH front window control switch
through circuit CPW14 (VT/WH) when the window lock switch is set to the UNLOCK position, and the
delayed accessory feature is active. When the LH rear window is operated in the up direction from the LH rear
window control switch, power is sent to the LH rear window motor through circuit CPW21 (BN) and ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
through circuit CPW22 (GN/VT). When the LH rear window is operated in the down direction from the LH rear
window control switch, power is sent to the LH rear window motor through circuit CPW22 (GN/VT) and
ground through circuit CPW21 (BN).
The RH rear window control switch receives delayed accessory power from the LH front window control
switch through circuit CPW14 (VT/WH) when the window lock switch is set to the UNLOCK position, and the
delayed accessory feature is active. When the RH rear window is operated in the up direction from the RH rear
window control switch, power is sent to the RH rear window motor through circuit CPW24 (WH/VT) and
ground through circuit CPW23 (GY). When the RH rear window is operated in the down direction from the RH
rear window control switch, power is sent to the RH rear window motor through circuit CPW23 (GY) and
ground through circuit CPW24 (WH/VT).
Window Operation From LH Front Switch
When the RH front power window is operated in the up direction from the LH front window control switch,
power is sent to the RH front window control switch through circuit CPW13 (BN/YE), which transfers power to
the RH front window motor through circuit CPW20 (WH/OG). Ground is provided to the RH front window
switch through circuit CPW12 (GN/OG), which transfers ground to the RH front window motor through circuit
CPW19 (VT).
During RH front power window down operation from the LH front window control switch, power is sent to the
RH front window control switch through circuit CPW12 (GN/OG), which transfers power to the RH front
window motor through circuit CPW19 (VT). Ground is provided to the RH front window switch through circuit
CPW13 (BN/YE), which transfers ground to the RH front window motor through circuit CPW20 (WH/OG).
When the LH rear power window is operated in the up direction from the LH front window control switch,
power is sent to the LH rear window control switch through circuit CPW16 (BU/OG), which transfers power to
the LH rear window motor through circuit CPW21 (BN). Ground is provided to the LH rear window switch
through circuit CPW15 (YE), which transfers ground to the LH rear window motor through circuit CPW22
(GN/VT).
During LH rear power window down operation from the LH front window control switch, power is sent to the
LH rear window control switch through circuit CPW15 (YE), which transfers power to the LH rear window
motor through circuit CPW22 (GN/VT). Ground is provided to the LH rear window switch through circuit
CPW16 (BU/OG), which transfers ground to the LH rear window motor through circuit CPW21 (BN).
When the RH rear power window is operated in the up direction from the LH front window control switch,
power is sent to the RH rear window control switch through circuit CPW18 (GY/VT), which transfers power to
the RH rear window motor through circuit CPW24 (WH/VT). Ground is sent to the RH rear window switch
through circuit CPW17 (BN/GN), which transfers ground to the RH rear window motor through circuit CPW23
(GY).
During RH rear power window down operation from the LH front window control switch, power is sent to the
RH rear window control switch through circuit CPW17 (BN/GN), which transfers power to the RH rear
window motor through circuit CPW23 (GY). Ground is sent to the RH rear window switch through circuit
CPW18 (GY/VT), which transfers ground to the RH rear window motor through circuit CPW24 (WH/VT).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
LH front window switch
RH front window switch
Rear window motor
Front window motor
Rear window switch
PINPOINT TEST G: A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - RH FRONT, LH OR RH
REAR, EDGE
G1 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE RH FRONT, LH REAR OR RH REAR WINDOW
CONTROL SWITCH
Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Window Control Switch C624 (RH front), C701 (LH rear) or C801
(RH rear)
Key in ON position.
Fig. 39: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Set the LH front window lock switch to the UNLOCK position.
Measure the voltage between the inoperative rear window connector and ground:
for the RH front window control switch, measure the voltage between RH front window
control switch C624-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side and ground.
for the RH rear window control switch, measure the voltage between RH rear window
control switch C801-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side and ground.
for the LH rear window control switch, measure the voltage between C701-3, circuit CPW14
(VT/WH), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to G3.
NO : Go to G2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
G2 CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN CIRCUIT CPW14 (VT/WH)
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C504B
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 40: Measuring Resistance Between Inoperative Rear Window Connector & LH Front
Window Control Switch Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the inoperative rear window connector and the LH front window
control switch connector:
for the RH front window control switch, measure the resistance between RH front window
control switch C624-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side and LH front window control
switch C504B-2, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side.
for the RH rear window control switch, measure the resistance between RH rear window
control switch C819-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side and LH front window control
switch C504B-2, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side.
for the LH rear window control switch, measure the resistance between LH rear window
control switch C701-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side and LH front window control
switch C504B-2, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new LH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
G3 CHECK THE GROUNDS TO THE INOPERATIVE REAR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 41: Measuring Resistance Between Inoperative Window Control Switch & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the inoperative window control switch and ground:
for the RH front window control switch, measure the resistance between RH front window
control switch C624-1, circuit CPW12 (GN/OG), harness side and ground; and between RH
front window control switch C624-6, circuit CPW13 (BN/YE), harness side and ground.
for the RH rear window control switch, measure the resistance between RH rear window
control switch C801-1, circuit CPW17 (BN/GN), harness side and ground; and between RH
rear window control switch C801-6, circuit CPW18 (GY/VT), harness side and ground.
for the LH rear window control switch, measure the resistance between LH rear window
control switch C701-1, circuit CPW15 (YE), harness side and ground; and between LH rear
window control switch C701-6, circuit CPW16 (BU/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G5.
NO : Go to G4.
G4 CHECK THE CIRCUITS TO THE INOPERATIVE REAR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C504A and C504B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 42: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH front power window, measure the resistance between LH front window
control switch C504A-3, circuit CPW12 (GN/OG) and RH front window control switch C624-1,
circuit CPW12 (GN/OG), harness side; and between LH front window control switch C504A-8,
circuit CPW13 (BN/YE) and RH front window control switch C624-6, circuit CPW13 (BN/YE)
harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 43: Measuring Resistance Between LH Front Window Control Switch C504B-1, Circuit
CPW15 (YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative LH rear power window, measure the resistance between LH front window
control switch C504B-1, circuit CPW15 (YE) and LH rear window control switch C701-1, circuit
CPW15 (YE), harness side; and between LH front window control switch C504B-2, circuit CPW16
(BU/OG) and LH rear window control switch C701-6, circuit CPW16 (BU/OG) harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 44: Measuring Resistance Between LH Front Window Control Switch C504B-4, Circuit
CPW17 (BN/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH rear power window, measure the resistance between LH front window
control switch C504B-4, circuit CPW17 (BN/GN) and RH window control switch C801-1, circuit
CPW17 (BN/GN), harness side; and between LH front window control switch C504B-8, circuit
CPW18 (GY/VT) and RH rear window control switch C801-6, circuit CPW18 (GY/VT) harness
side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new LH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
G5 CHECK THE INOPERATIVE WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Key in ON position.
For an inoperative RH front window, connect a fused jumper wire between RH front window
control switch C624-2, circuit CPW19 (VT), harness side and RH front window control switch
C624-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side; and between RH front window control switch
C624-5, circuit CPW20 (WH/OG), harness side and RH front window control switch C624-6,
circuit CPW13 (BN/YE), harness side. The RH front window should operate in the downward
direction.
For an inoperative LH rear window, connect a fused jumper wire between LH rear window control
switch C701-2, circuit CPW22 (GN/VT), harness side and LH rear window control switch C701-3,
circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side; and between LH rear window control switch C701-5,
circuit CPW21 (BN), harness side and LH rear window control switch C701-6, circuit CPW16
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
(BU/OG), harness side. The LH rear window should operate in the downward direction.
Fig. 45: Checking Inoperative Window Control Switch (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH rear window, connect a fused jumper wire between RH rear window control
switch C801-2, circuit CPW23 (GY), harness side and RH rear window control switch C801-3,
circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side; and between RH rear window control switch C801-5,
circuit CPW24 (WH/VT), harness side and RH rear window control switch C801-6, circuit CPW18
(GY/VT), harness side. The RH rear window should operate in the downward direction.
For an inoperative RH front window, connect a fused jumper wire between RH front window
control switch C624-2, circuit CPW19 (VT), harness side and RH front window control switch
C624-1, circuit CPW12 (GN/OG), harness side; and between RH front window control switch
C624-5, circuit CPW20 (WH/OG), harness side and RH front window control switch C624-3,
circuit CPW14 (VT/WH), harness side. The RH front window should operate in the upward
direction.
For an inoperative LH rear window, connect a fused jumper wire between LH rear window control
switch C701-2, circuit CPW22 (GN/VT), harness side and LH rear window control switch C701-1,
circuit CPW15 (YE), harness side; and between LH rear window control switch C701-5, circuit
CPW21 (BN), harness side and LH rear window control switch C701-3, circuit CPW14 (VT/WH),
harness side. The LH rear window should operate in the upward direction.
Fig. 46: Checking Inoperative Window Control Switch (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH rear window, connect a fused jumper wire between RH rear window control
switch C801-2, circuit CPW22 (GN/VT), harness side and RH rear window control switch C801-1,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
circuit CPW17 (BN/GN), harness side; and between RH rear window control switch C801-5,
circuit CPW24 (WH/VT), harness side and RH rear window control switch C801-3, circuit CPW14
(VT/WH), harness side. The RH rear window should operate in the upward direction.
Did the inoperative window operate correctly?
YES : INSTALL a new LH or RH rear window control switch. REFER to Window Control
Switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to G6.
G6 CHECK THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUITS
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Window Motor C608 (RH front), C703 (LH rear) or C828 (RH rear)
For an inoperative RH front window, measure the resistance between RH front window control
switch C624-2, circuit CPW19 (VT), harness side and RH front window motor C608-2, circuit
CPW19 (VT), harness side.
Fig. 47: Measuring Resistance Between LH Rear Window Control Switch C701-2, Circuit
CPW22 (GN/VT)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative LH rear window, measure the resistance between LH rear window control
switch C701-2, circuit CPW22 (GN/VT), harness side and LH rear window motor C703-2, circuit
CPW22 (GN/VT), harness side.
Fig. 48: Measuring Resistance Between RH Rear Window Control Switch C801-2, Circuit
CPW23 (GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
For an inoperative RH rear window, measure the resistance between RH rear window control
switch C801-2, circuit CPW23 (GY), harness side and RH rear window motor C828-2, circuit
CPW23 (GY), harness side.
For an inoperative RH front window, measure the resistance between RH front window control
switch C624-5, circuit CPW20 (WH/OG), harness side and RH front window motor C608-1, circuit
CPW20 (WH/OG), harness side.
Fig. 49: Measuring Resistance Between LH Rear Window Control Switch C701-5, Circuit
CPW21 (BN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative LH rear window, measure the resistance between LH rear window control
switch C701-5, circuit CPW21 (BN), harness side and LH rear window motor C703-1, circuit
CPW21 (BN), harness side.
Fig. 50: Measuring Resistance Between RH Rear Window Control Switch C801-5, Circuit
CPW24 (WH/VT)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH rear window, measure the resistance between RH rear window control
switch C801-5, circuit CPW24 (WH/VT), harness side and RH rear window motor C828-1, circuit
CPW24 (WH/VT), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new RH front, LH or RH rear window motor. REFER to Window Regulator
Motor. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Pinpoint Test H: The One-Touch Up/Down Feature is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
NOTE:
A new LH or RH (MKX) or LH (Edge) front power window motor will not operate
in one-touch up or one-touch down mode until initialized. Refer to Window
Motor Initialization.
NOTE:
The LH or RH front power window motor must be initialized whenever a new
motor is installed.
NOTE:
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH
or RH (MKX) or LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window
regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window
glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease
or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run.
Normal Operation
The LH front power window control switch receives power from the delayed accessory relay through circuit
CBP41 (BU) and is grounded through circuit GD133 (BK). When the LH front window control switch is
pressed to the UP position, the LH front motor receives power through circuit CPW11 (BU/GY). When the LH
front window control switch is pressed to the DOWN position, the LH front motor receives power through
circuit CPW10 (YE/VT). When the LF window motor receives a ground signal on circuit CPW29 (VT/GY), the
LF window motor will enter one-touch up or one-touch down.
The RH (MKX only) front power window control switch receives power from the delayed accessory relay
through circuit CBP41 (BU) and is grounded through circuit GD133 (BK). When the RH front window control
switch is pressed to the UP position, the RH front motor receives power through circuit CPW13 (BN/YE).
When the RH front window control switch is pressed to the DOWN position, the RH front motor receives
power through circuit CPW12 (GN/OG). When the RH window motor receives a ground signal on circuit
CPW31 (GN/WH), the RH window motor will enter one-touch up or one-touch down.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
B(+) power lost during LH or RH front window operation
LH or RH front window motor
LH or RH front window control switch
LH or RH front motor not initialized
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PINPOINT TEST H: THE ONE-TOUCH UP/DOWN FEATURE IS INOPERATIVE
H1 CHECK FOR POWER (B+) LOSS DURING LH OR RH FRONT WINDOW OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Verify if power (B+) was lost during LH or RH front window operation.
Was power (B+) lost while LH or RH front window was in operation?
YES : RAISE the LH or RH front window to the fully CLOSED position. VERIFY the window
glass stalls into the upper header seal. The front window should function normally. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : Go to H2.
H2 DE-INITIALIZE, THEN INITIALIZE THE FRONT MOTOR
De-initialize the front window motor, then carry out the front window motor initialization
procedure. Refer to Window Motor Initialization.
Is the one-touch down feature operating correctly?
YES : The system is operating normally at this time. The front window motor lost initialization.
NO : For LH window, go to H3.
For RH window (MKX only), go to H5.
H3 CHECK THE LH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C535A and C535B (MKX) or C504A and C504B
(Edge)
Carry out the LH Front Window Switch Component Test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT
TESTING article.
Did the LH front window switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to H4.
NO : INSTALL a new LH front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch.
TEST the system for normal operation.
H4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPW29 (VT/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: LH Front Window Motor C540
Fig. 51: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window control switch C535A-8 (MKX) or C504A-7
(Edge), circuit CPW29 (VT/GY), harness side and LH front window motor connector C540-2,
circuit CPW29 (VT/GY).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new LH front window motor. REFER to Window Regulator Motor. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
H5 CHECK THE LH and RH FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Front Window Control Switch C535A, C535B and RH Front Window Control
Switch C648
Carry out the LH and RH front window switch component tests. Refer to appropriate
COMPONENT TESTING article.
Did the LH and RH front window switches pass the component tests?
YES : Go to H6.
NO : INSTALL a new front window control switch. REFER to Window Control Switch. TEST
the system for normal operation.
H6 CHECK CIRCUIT CPW31 (GN/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: RH Front Window Motor C646
Fig. 52: Measuring Resistance Between LH Front Window Control Switch C535A-1, Circuit
CPW31 (GN/WH)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between LH front window control switch C535A-1, circuit CPW31
(GN/WH), harness side and RH front window motor connector C646-2, circuit CPW31 (GN/WH);
and between RH front window control switch C648-4, circuit CPW31 (GN/WH), harness side and
RH front window motor connector C646-2, circuit CPW31 (GN/WH).
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms for both measurements?
YES : INSTALL a new RH front window motor. REFER to Window Regulator Motor. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test I: The Global Open Function is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - MKX
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
When the unlock button of the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter is held for 2 seconds the global open
activates. The smart junction box (SJB) sends a signal on circuit VPW01 (GN/BU) to activate the one-touch
down operation of both front windows.
The global open feature does not operate if the delayed accessory is active.
DTC B2947 Global Opening/Closing Circuit Open - Open or short to ground in the global opening
circuit.
DTC B2949 Global Opening/Closing Circuit Short to Battery - Short to battery in the global opening
circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
RKE transmitters
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SJB
Window motors not initialized
PINPOINT TEST I: THE GLOBAL OPEN FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY - MKX
NOTE:
One-touch up/down must be operational for the global open function to operate
correctly. Make sure one-touch up/down is operational before proceeding with
this diagnostic.
I1 CHECK THE DTCs
Refer to the results from the previous SJB self-test.
Was DTC B2947 or B2949 retrieved?
YES : For B2949, go to I2.
For B2947, go to I5.
NO : VERIFY SJB fuse 41 (15A) is OK. If OK, go to I7.
I2 CHECK CIRCUIT VPW01 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280C
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 53: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280C-10, Circuit VPW01 (GN/BU), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between SJB C2280C-10, circuit VPW01 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to I3.
NO : Go to I9.
I3 CHECK CIRCUIT VPW01 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: LH Front Window Motor C540
Fig. 54: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280C-10, Circuit VPW01 (GN/BU), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between SJB C2280C-10, circuit VPW01 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to I4.
NO : INSTALL a new LH front window motor. REFER to Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door and Window Regulator and Motor - Front Door. INITIALIZE the
LH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal
operation.
I4 CHECK CIRCUIT VPW01 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: RH Front Window Motor C646
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 55: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280C-10, Circuit VPW01 (GN/BU), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between SJB C2280C-10, circuit VPW01 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH and RH front window
motors. REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new RH front window motor. REFER to Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door and Window Regulator and Motor - Front Door. INITIALIZE the
LH front window motor. REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal
operation.
I5 CHECK CIRCUIT VPW01 (GN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280C
Disconnect: LH Front Window Motor C540
Disconnect: RH Front Window Motor C646
Fig. 56: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280C-10, Circuit VPW01 (GN/BU) & LH Front
Window Motor C540-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between SJB C2280C-10, circuit VPW01 (GN/BU), harness side and LH
front window motor C540-2, circuit CPW01 VPW01 (GN/BU), harness side; and between SJB
C2280C-10, circuit VPW01 (GN/BU), harness side and RH front window motor C646-2, circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
VPW01 (GN/BU), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to I6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH and RH front window
motors. REFER To Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
I6 CHECK CIRCUIT VPW01 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 57: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280C-10, Circuit VPW01 (GN/BU), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between SJB C2280C-10, circuit VPW01 (GN/BU), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to I9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH and RH front window
motors. REFER to Window Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
I7 CHECK THE RKE TRANSMITTER OPERATION
Operate the RKE lock/unlock function using all of the RKE transmitters.
Does the RKE lock/unlock function operate correctly with at least one of the RKE
transmitters?
YES : Go to I8.
NO : REFER to HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article to continue
diagnosis of the RKE system. TEST the system for normal operation.
I8 CHECK THE RKE TRANSMITTERS GLOBAL OPEN OPERATION
Operate the global open function using all of the RKE transmitters.
Does the global open function operate correctly with at least one of the RKE transmitters?
YES : PROVIDE new RKE transmitters. REFER to HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES AND
ENTRY SYSTEMS article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to I9.
I9 CHECK THE SJB FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Disconnect all of the SJB connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all of the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Pinpoint Test J: The Defrost System is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Heated Window for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The heated rear window relay, which is integral to the battery junction box (BJB), receives power from circuit
CBP45 (YE). When the heated rear window switch is pressed, the HVAC module grounds circuit CH122
(WH/OG) to activate the heated rear window relay. When the heated rear window relay is activated, power is
sent from the heated rear window relay to the heated rear window grid through circuit CRD06 (BN/YE). The
heated rear window grid is grounded through circuit GD149 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heated rear window relay
HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST J: THE DEFROST SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE
J1 CHECK CIRCUIT CRD06 (BN/YE) FOR POWER
Disconnect: Heated Rear Window Grid C402A
Key in ON position.
Turn the heated rear window control switch on.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 58: Measuring Voltage Between Heated Rear Window Grid C402A-1, Circuit CRD06
(BN/YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated rear window grid C402A-1, circuit CRD06 (BN/YE), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to J4.
NO : INSPECT BJB fuse 39 (40A). If OK, go to J2.
J2 CHECK CIRCUIT CRD06 (BN/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Heated Rear Window Relay
Fig. 59: Measuring Resistance Between Heated Rear Window Grid C402A-1, CRD06
(BN/YE)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated rear window grid C402A-1, CRD06 (BN/YE), harness side
and heated rear window relay pin 87, CRD06 (BN/YE), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to J3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
J3 CHECK THE BJB
Key in ON position.
Fig. 60: Measuring Voltage Between Heated Rear Window Relay Pin 30, Circuit SDC02 (RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated rear window relay pin 30, circuit SDC02 (RD), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to J5.
NO : VERIFY BJB fuse 1 (40A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal
operation.
J4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD149 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Heated Rear Window Grid C402B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 61: Measuring Resistance Between C402B-1, Circuit GD149 (BK/GY), Harness Side &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between C402B-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : CARRY OUT the heated rear window grid wire test. REFER to the component tests.
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to J6.
J5 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP45 (YE) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 62: Measuring Voltage Between Heated Rear Window Relay Pin 85, Circuit CBP45 (YE)
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between heated rear window relay pin 85, circuit CBP45 (YE), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to J6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
J6 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE OUTPUT
Key in ON position.
Turn the heated rear window control switch on.
Fig. 63: Measuring Voltage Between Heated Rear Window Relay Pin 85, Circuit CBP45 (YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated rear window relay pin 85, circuit CBP45 (YE), harness side
and heated rear window relay pin 86, circuit CH122 (WH/OG).
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to J7.
NO : Go to J8.
J7 CHECK THE HEATED REAR WINDOW RELAY
Carry out the Heated Rear Window Relay Component Test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT
TESTING article.
Did the heated rear window relay pass the component test?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new heated rear window relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
J8 CHECK CIRCUIT CH122 (WH/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: HVAC Module - Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) C228B or
HVAC module - Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) C2357A
Fig. 64: Measuring Resistance Between Heated Rear Window Relay Socket, Circuit CH122
(WH/OG)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated rear window relay socket, circuit CH122 (WH/OG), harness
side and HVAC module - EATC C228B-23, circuit CH122 (WH/OG), harness side; or HVAC
module - EMTC C2357A-3, circuit CH122 (WH/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new HVAC module. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test K: The Defrost System Will Not Shut Off Automatically
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Heated Window for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
The heated rear window relay, which is integral to the battery junction box (BJB), receives power from circuit
CBP45 (YE). When the heated rear window switch is pressed, the HVAC module grounds circuit CH122
(WH/OG) to activate the heated rear window relay. When the heated rear window relay is activated, power is
sent from the heated rear window relay to the heated rear window grid through circuit CRD06 (BN/YE). The
heated rear window grid is grounded through circuit GD149 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heated rear window relay
HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST K: THE DEFROST SYSTEM WILL NOT SHUT OFF AUTOMATICALLY
K1 CHECK CIRCUIT CRD06 (BN/YE) FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Heated Rear Window Relay
Key in ON position.
Fig. 65: Measuring Voltage Between Heated Rear Window Relay Pin 87, Circuit CRD06
(BN/YE) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated rear window relay pin 87, circuit CRD06 (BN/YE), harness
side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to K2.
K2 CHECK CIRCUIT CH122 (WH/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 66: Measuring Voltage Between Heated Rear Window Relay Pin 85, Circuit CBP45 (YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated rear window relay pin 85, circuit CBP45 (YE), harness side
and heated rear window relay pin 86, circuit CH122 (WH/OG), harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to K3.
NO : Go to K4.
K3 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: EATC C228B or EMTC C2357A
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 67: Measuring Voltage Between Heated Rear Window Relay Pin 85, Circuit CBP45 (YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated rear window relay pin 85, circuit CBP45 (YE), harness side
and heated rear window relay pin 86, circuit CH122 (WH/OG), harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new HVAC module. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
K4 CHECK THE HEATED REAR WINDOW RELAY
Carry out the Heated Rear Window Relay Component Test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT
TESTING article.
Did the heated rear window relay pass the component test?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new heated rear window relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test L: The Delayed Accessory is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
The accessory delay relay, which is integral to the smart junction box (SJB), receives power from the battery
junction box (BJB) through circuit SDC02 (RD). When the ignition key is turned ON, the SJB activates the
accessory delay relay. The accessory delay relay provides power to the LH front window control switch through
circuit CBP47 (GN/BU). On MKX, the accessory delay relay also provides power to the RH front window
switch and the LH and RH front window motors through circuit CBP41 (BU). The accessory delay relay
remains active for 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned OFF or until either front door is opened.
DTC B1302 Accessory Delay Relay Coil Circuit Failure - Open or short to ground in the accessory delay
relay coil circuit.
DTC B1304 Accessory Delay Relay Coil Circuit Short To Battery - Short to ground on accessory delay
relay coil circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
SJB
Accessory delay relay
Door ajar switches
PINPOINT TEST L: THE DELAYED ACCESSORY IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY
L1 CHECK FOR CORRECT OPERATION OF THE INTERIOR LIGHTS
Open and close the front doors. Verify the interior lights turn on when the doors are open, and off
when the doors are closed.
Do the interior lights operate normally?
YES : Go to L2.
NO : REFER to INTERIOR LIGHTING article to diagnose the interior lighting and door ajar
switches.
L2 CHECK THE ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY
Carry out the Accessory Delay Relay Component Test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT
TESTING article.
Did the accessory delay relay pass the component test?
YES : Go to L3.
NO : INSTALL a new accessory delay relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
L3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article
for the removal and installation procedure. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Pinpoint Test M: The Delayed Accessory Does Not Turn Off
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Windows for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The accessory delay relay, which is integral to the smart junction box (SJB), receives power from the battery
junction box (BJB) through circuit SDC02 (RD). When the ignition key is turned ON, the SJB activates the
accessory delay relay. The accessory delay relay provides power to the LH front window control switch through
circuit CBP47 (GN/BU). On MKX, the accessory delay relay also provides power to the RH front window
switch and the LH and RH front window motors through circuit CBP41 (BU). The accessory delay relay
remains active for 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned OFF or until either front door is opened.
DTC B1304 - Accessory delay relay coil circuit short to battery, short to ground on output.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Accessory delay relay
SJB
PINPOINT TEST M: THE DELAYED ACCESSORY DOES NOT TURN OFF
M1 CHECK FOR STUCK/STICKING ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY
Disconnect: Accessory Delay Relay
Are any delayed accessory features still operative?
YES : Go to M3.
NO : Go to M2.
M2 CHECK THE ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY
Carry out the Accessory Delay Relay Component Test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT
TESTING article.
Did the accessory delay relay pass the component test.
YES : Go to M4.
NO : INSTALL a new accessory delay relay. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for normal
operation.
M3 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP47 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: SJB C2280D
Key in ON position.
Fig. 68: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280D-32, Circuit CBP47 (GN/BU), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between SJB C2280D-32, circuit CBP47 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to M4.
M4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
Component Test
Grid Wire Test
1. Using a bright lamp in the vehicle, inspect the wire grid from the exterior. A broken grid wire will appear
as a brown spot.
2. Run the engine at idle. Set the heated rear window switch to ON. The indicator light should come on.
3. Working in the vehicle with a voltmeter, contact the broad red-brown stripes of the rear glass window
positive lead to battery side and the negative lead to ground side. The meter should read 10-13 volts. A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
lower voltage reading indicates a loose ground connection.
4. Contact a good ground point with the negative lead of the meter. The voltage reading should not change.
5. With the negative lead of the meter grounded, touch each grid line of the heated rear window glass at its
midpoint with the positive lead. A reading of approximately 6 volts indicates the line is good. A reading
of 0 volt indicates the line is broken between the midpoint and the B+ side of the grid line. A reading of
12 volts indicates the circuit is broken between the midpoint of the grid line and ground.
6. Pinpointing the exact position of the break can be accomplished (if the voltmeter reads 0 volt when the
midpoint of the grid line is touched with the positive lead of the voltmeter) by moving the positive lead of
the voltmeter toward the B+ side of the grid line and touching the grid line until the voltmeter reads 12
volts. If the voltmeter reads 12 volts when the midpoint of the grid line is touched with the positive lead
of the voltmeter, simply move the positive lead of the voltmeter toward the ground connection of the grid
line and touch the grid line until the voltmeter reads 0 volt.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
WINDOW GRID WIRE REPAIR
Material
Item
Lacquer Touch-Up Paint
(match color to exterior grid wire) PM-19500XXXXX or PMP-19500-XXXXX
Polypropylene Film Fine Line Tape
(commercially available)
Rear Window Defroster Repair
PM-11 (US); CPM-11 (Canada)
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
ZC-23
NOTE:
Specification
ESR-M2P100-C
ESR-M14P5-A
The grid line material is not embedded into the glass but is baked to the glass
surface and consequently can be scraped off. An undamaged grid line will have
small ridges that project above the surface of the glass and can easily be felt
when running a fingernail across them. Grid lines that have been "razor bladed"
will feel smooth when a fingernail is dragged across the affected area.
Inoperative lines may appear to the eye to be undamaged due to residue
remaining on the glass and will require diagnosis with a voltmeter or 12V test
lamp. For additional information, refer to Diagnosis and Testing in this service
information.
1. Bring the vehicle up to a room temperature of at least 16°C (60°F) or above.
CAUTION: Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the rear window glass as this may cause
damage to the grid lines.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
2. Clean the entire grid line repair area with window cleaner and 0000 steel wool to remove all dirt, wax,
grease, oil or other foreign material.
3. Mark the location of the grid break on the exterior of the rear window glass.
Fig. 69: Locating Grid Break
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Using a polypropylene film fine line tape, mask the area directly above and below the grid break
extending the tape 26 mm (1.02 in) beyond the concern area in both directions. The break area should be
at the center of the mask.
Fig. 70: Masking Grid Break Area
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the brown layer is not broken or missing, apply only the silver grid repair
compound to the break. If both the brown and silver layers of the grid are
broken or missing, apply a coating of the lacquer touch up paint across
the break in the grid line prior to applying the rear window defroster repair
compound. Do not overlap the silver grid line with the paint. Several
applications may be necessary to achieve a color match.
NOTE:
Allow at least 5 minutes of drying time between applications for the touch
up paint or the silver repair coating. Applying fewer coats or not allowing
adequate drying time between coats will produce repaired resistance that
is greater than OEM resistance, resulting in poor defrost performance and
excessive localized heating.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
5. Apply the repair coating to the grid break area in several smooth, continuous strokes. Extend the silver
repair coating at least 6.35 mm (0.25 in) on both sides of the break area.
Apply a minimum of 6 applications of the grid repair compound.
Fig. 71: Applying Repair Coating To Grid Break Area
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The repair coating air-dries in approximately one minute and can be
energized after 5 minutes. Optimum adhesion occurs after approximately
24 hours.
6. Allow the repair area to dry completely and remove the mask.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the grid line with the razor blade. If this
occurs, additional repair may be necessary.
7. Remove any excess repair compound above or below the grid line with a razor blade.
NOTE:
The interior side of the grid lines are not painted, but due to the silver
tarnishing will tend to change the grid to a gold or brown color. The repair
area will be bright silver and will also tarnish over time to match the rest of
the grid.
8. Test the system for normal operation.
LEAD TERMINAL REPAIR
Material
Item
Terminal Kit - Back Glass
4F1Z-14421-AA
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
ZC-23
Specification
ESR-M14P5-A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
1. Bring the vehicle up to room temperature of at least 16°C (60°F) or above.
NOTE:
The new terminal will cover the original terminal location, but it must be
placed so that the terminal conductive areas will be placed on a good
conductive base.
2. Clean the bus bar in the area to be repaired with steel wool (000 to 0000 grade), and then with window
cleaner to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign material.
Fig. 72: Identifying Bus Bar Area To Be Repaired
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not use any type of flame torch or flame heated soldering gun for
this procedure. Use of these tools provide inadequate heat
generation at the tip and the exhaust heat can cause damage to
plastic trim parts in the area. Use only an electric soldering gun with
100 watts or more of power. Before using the soldering gun, be sure
to melt a small amount of rosin core solder to the tip. The solder will
assist in achieving better heat transfer from the soldering gun tip to
the new terminal.
NOTE:
Depending on the original terminal location, and whether the terminal is
covered by pillar trim, will determine where to locate the new terminal.
Some grid line buss-bars may only allow the placement of the terminal
above or below the original tab location due to space limitations. For most
vehicle applications, the replacement tab location will cover the original
tab location, but still allow the replacement tab to attach to the buss-bar
on good conductive material.
3. Place the replacement terminal type A over the original tab location, making sure the conductive areas of
the terminal will be on a good conductive area. Do not place the terminal tab foot on the original location,
which does not have conductive material.
4. Hold the terminal in place with an item such as a regular lead pencil at a 90 degree angle from the
terminal. (Holding at other than a 90 degree angle may allow the terminal to slip when the solder
liquefies.)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The new terminal has pre-applied solder, flux and temperature-sensitive
paint. The paint provides a visual indication when the terminal has
reached the correct temperature to melt solder on the terminal. When the
correct temperature is achieved, the temperature paint will liquefy and
change color.
5. Place the soldering gun tip on the top of the terminal but not on the painted areas of the tab. Energize the
soldering gun and watch for the painted area of the terminal to liquefy and change color. The paint should
liquefy in approximately 25-45 seconds after heating. As soon as the paint color completely changes on
either side of the terminal, de-energize the soldering gun and continue to hold the terminal in place with
the soldering gun and pencil for an additional 30 seconds.
6. Remove the soldering gun and pencil from the terminal. The terminal should be allowed to cool for
another 2 minutes before the wiring lead is attached to the terminal.
7. Attach the electrical lead connection to this terminal, turn on the heated rear window and verify the
operation.
WINDOW MOTOR INITIALIZATION
NOTE:
Initialization is required to learn both the full UP and full DOWN positions and
the profile of the glass as it travels through the glass channel. Once initialized,
obstacle detection is enabled. This procedure is only required for MKX (LH and
RH front) or Edge (LH front only) window motors.
NOTE:
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the
front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, a new
window regulator is installed, a new window glass is installed, a new top run is
installed or for any operation in which grease or lubricants are applied to the
window regulator or glass run.
NOTE:
A new (original factory setting) or de-initialized front window motor will not
operate in one-touch up or one-touch-down mode until initialized. If a new front
window motor has been installed, proceed to the initialization procedure.
NOTE:
If diagnosing a LH or RH front window switch problem, carry out the window
initialization procedure before installing a new window switch.
NOTE:
All front window components (window glass, window regulator, window motor,
seals and glass top run) must be installed and tightened to specification before
carrying out the initialization procedure.
NOTE:
Excessive bounce-back (window reverses direction with no obstructions
present) may indicate that a de-initialization procedure may need to be carried
out.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
De-Initialization procedure
NOTE:
The front window motor must be reset to its original factory settings first, then
carry out the following de-initialization procedure.
1. Turn the ignition key ON.
2. Operate the window control switch in one-touch mode and remove power from the window motor while
the window is moving by one of the following methods:
1. Disconnect the vehicle battery cable while the window is moving .
2. Disconnect the window motor connector while the window is moving .
3. Remove the LH or RH front window motor fuse while the window is moving .
3. This will de-initialize the window motor and reset the window motor to its original factory settings.
4. Carry out the initialization procedure to turn the one-touch-up feature on.
Initialization procedure
WARNING: Keep objects and body parts clear of the glass panel when carrying
out the initialization procedure. During the initialization procedure,
the glass panel closes with high force and cannot detect objects in
its path. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE:
The front window must be in the full OPEN position for this procedure to
operate correctly.
NOTE:
If the initialization procedure is only partially completed, the front window
motor will remain un-initialized and will operate only in proportional
up/down and one-touch-down modes.
5. Turn the ignition key ON.
6. Activate and hold the window control switch in the UP position at the second detent until the window
glass stalls for 2 seconds into the glass top run and release the switch.
7. Activate and hold the window control switch in the DOWN position at the second detent until the
window glass stalls for 2 seconds at the bottom of its travel and release the switch.
8. Test for correct window operation by carrying out the one-touch-up and one-touch-down features.
GLASS RESEAL - WINDSHIELD
Material
Item
DOW AUTOMOTIVE 2-HOUR CURE
Specification
Dow Urethane Adhesive Betaseal® Express
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
SIKA 2-HOUR CURE
Sika Urethane Adhesive Sika Tack ASAP
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
ZC-23
ESR-M14P5-A
1. Remove the cowl panel grille. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY PANELS
article.
2. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM
AND ORNAMENTATION article.
3. Remove the LH and RH sun visors.
4. If equipped, remove the overhead console. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL
AND CONSOLE article.
5. Lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material.
6. Clean the interior and exterior of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner.
7. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to 6 mm (0.24 in).
Fig. 73: Identifying Urethane Applicator Tip Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will
apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead.
NOTE:
Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one
continuous bead.
8. Apply urethane adhesive over top of the existing urethane adhesive.
Apply the urethane to the top and sides of the windshield from the interior of the vehicle.
Apply the urethane to the bottom of the windshield from the exterior of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
testing for air or water leaks.
9. After the urethane has cured, check the windshield seal for air or water leaks through the urethane bead
and add urethane adhesive as necessary.
10. Position the front portion of the headliner.
11. If equipped, install the overhead console. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL
AND CONSOLE article.
12. Install the LH and RH sun visors.
13. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
14. Install the cowl panel grille. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY PANELS article.
15. Clean the interior and exterior windshield glass with glass cleaner.
GLASS RESEAL - REAR
Material
Item
DOW AUTOMOTIVE 2-HOUR CURE
Dow Urethane Adhesive Betaseal® Express
Specification
-
SIKA 2-HOUR CURE
Sika Urethane Adhesive Sika Tack ASAP
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
ZC-23
ESR-M14P5-A
1. Remove the upper and lower liftgate trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM
AND ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Clean the interior and exterior of the rear window glass surface with glass cleaner.
3. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
Fig. 74: Cutting Urethane Adhesive Applicator Tip To Specification
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use either a high ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that applies
the urethane with less effort and continuous bead.
NOTE:
Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one
continuous bead.
4. Apply the urethane adhesive over the top of the existing urethane adhesive from the interior of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before
testing for air or water leaks.
5. After the urethane cures, check the rear glass seal for air or water leaks through the urethane adhesive
bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary.
6. Install the upper and lower liftgate trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM
AND ORNAMENTATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT DOOR
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 75: Exploded View Of Front Door, Glass, Frames & Mechanisms With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Part Number
W709451
W709451
5421453 LH/ 5421452 RH
5421434
5421411 LH/ 5421410 RH
5421597 LH/ 5421597 RH
166193
14A389 LH/ 14553 RH
N811471
W713426
013300 LH/ 203A28 RH
Description
Weatherstrip A-pillar screw
Weatherstrip B-pillar screw
Exterior door window glass molding
Interior door window glass molding
Front door window glass
Door window glass top run
Window motor screw (3 required)
Window motor
Door latch screws (3 required)
Door module bolt (10 required)
Door module
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedures in this service information.
WINDOW GLASS - FRONT DOOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH
or RH (MKX) or LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window
regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window
glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease
or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run.
1. Remove the front door speaker. For additional information, refer to INFORMATION AND
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS article.
2. Remove the 2 access plug hole covers.
3. Reconnect the window control switch.
4. Lower the window until the glass clamp bolts can be accessed through the 2 access holes.
5. Loosen the window glass clamp bolts.
To install, tighten to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
Fig. 76: Locating Window Glass Clamp Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Tape the window in position, then lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the
bottom of the regulator tracks.
7. Lift the window glass out of the door.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH or RH (MKX) or
LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, a new
window regulator is installed, a new window glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any
operation in which grease or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run. For
additional information, refer to Window Motor Initialization.
WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE:
Front door window motor removal shown, rear door window motor removal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
similar.
NOTE:
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH
or RH (MKX) or LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window
regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window
glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease
or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run.
1. Remove the door trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Disconnect the window motor electrical connector.
Fig. 77: Locating Window Motor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Secure the glass in position with tape.
4. Remove the 3 window motor screws.
Fig. 78: Locating Window Motor Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the window motor.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH or RH (MKX) or
LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, a new
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
window regulator is installed, a new window glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any
operation in which grease or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run. For
additional information, refer to Window Motor Initialization.
WINDOW REGULATOR AND MOTOR - FRONT DOOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE:
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH
or RH (MKX) or LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window
regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window
glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease
or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run.
Window operating/not operating
1. Remove the front door speaker. For additional information, refer to INFORMATION AND
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS article.
Window not operating
NOTE:
Cutting the regulator cable should only be done if installing a new window
regulator assembly.
NOTE:
Support window glass before cutting the window regulator cable.
2. Cut the window regulator cable.
Fig. 79: Identifying Window Regulator Cable
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Window operating
3. Reconnect the window control switch.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:32 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Window operating/not operating
4. Remove the access plugs and lower the window until the glass clamp bolts can be accessed through the 2
access holes. Tape the glass in position.
NOTE:
If the window regulator cable was cut previously, support the regulator
before the glass clamp bolts are loosened.
5. Loosen the glass clamp bolts.
To install, tighten to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
Fig. 80: Locating Window Glass Clamp Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the bottom of the regulator tracks.
7. If equipped, remove trim and disconnect the power mirror electrical connector.
Remove the wiring harness pushpins from the door.
Fig. 81: Locating Power Mirror Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector at the A-pillar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 82: Locating Electrical Connector At A-Pillar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the 2 bolts from the electrical harness grommet to the door.
Fig. 83: Locating Electrical Harness Grommet Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Using the speaker hole for access, release the clip on the harness from the inside to disconnect the harness
from the door.
11. Unclip the weatherstrip and feed through the wiring harness between the weatherstrip and door.
12. Remove the 3 door latch screws.
To install, tighten to 12 N.m (9 lb-ft).
Fig. 84: Locating Door Latch Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
13. Remove the access plug from the latch side of door and remove the outside door handle reinforcement
screw.
Fig. 85: Locating Access Plug From Latch Side Of Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Remove the outside door handle. For additional information, refer to HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES
AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
15. Using a suitable tool, release the retaining tab and remove the front door lock cylinder.
16. Remove the screw.
To install, tighten to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
Fig. 86: Identifying Outside Door Handle Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. If equipped, remove the keypad. For additional information, refer to HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES
AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
18. Remove the 10 door module bolts and remove the front door module, transfer parts as necessary.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 87: Locating Door Module Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH or RH (MKX) or
LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, a new
window regulator is installed, a new window glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any
operation in which grease or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run. For
additional information, refer to Window Motor Initialization in this service information.
DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - FRONT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH
or RH (MKX) or LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window
regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window
glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease
or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run.
1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front Door.
2. Remove the front door window glass inner weatherstrip.
Fig. 88: Identifying Front Door Window Glass Inner Weatherstrip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the front door glass top run.
Fig. 89: Identifying Front Door Glass Top Run
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Make sure the top run is fully seated before reinstalling the front door window glass.
The front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the LH or RH (MKX) or
LH (Edge) front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, a new
window regulator is installed, a new window glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any
operation in which grease or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run. For
additional information, refer to Window Motor Initialization.
GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR DOOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 90: Exploded View Of Rear Door, Glass, Frames & Mechanisms With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W709451
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
W709451
5425597 LH/ 5425596 RH
5425860
5425713 LH/ 5425712 RH
5425767 LH/ 5425766 RH
166193
7423394 LH/ 7423395 RH
W713426
Description
Rear door glass weatherstrip C-pillar
screw
Rear door glass weatherstrip D-pillar
Rear door glass weatherstrip
Interior weatherstrip
Rear door window glass
Rear door glass top run
Window motor screws
Window regulator motor
Door module bolts (9 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
10
11
12
13
14
15
5424995 LH/ 5424994 RH
W505821
7825797 LH/ 7825796 RH
7829905
Rear door module
Door latch screw (3 required)
Upper fixed window screw
Lower fixed window screw
Center guide bracket
Fixed glass assembly
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedures in this service information.
WINDOW GLASS - REAR DOOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
1. Remove the door trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Reconnect the window control switch.
3. Lower the window until the glass clamp bolt can be accessed through the access hole, then loosen the
glass clamp bolt.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 91: Locating Glass Clamp Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Tape the window in position, then lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the
bottom of the regulator tracks.
5. Remove the rear door glass interior weatherstrip.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 92: Identifying Rear Door Glass Interior Weatherstrip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the rear door window glass lower fixed window screw.
Fig. 93: Identifying Rear Door Window Glass Lower Fixed Window Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the rear door window glass upper fixed window screw.
Fig. 94: Identifying Rear Door Window Glass Upper Fixed Window Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Position the top run aside as shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 95: Positioning Top Run Aside
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Protect the painted surfaces of the vehicle.
9. With the aid of an assistant (holding the glass in a lowered position to allow clearance), carefully pull the
top of the bracket forward slightly, then upward and completely out of the door towards the inside of the
vehicle.
Fig. 96: Pulling Top Of Bracket Forward Slightly, Then Upward & Completely Out Of Door
Towards Inside Of Vehicle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Slide the glass down, tilt and bring the glass back through the top of the window opening and remove the
glass from the door.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
WINDOW REGULATOR AND MOTOR - REAR DOOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Window operating/not operating
1. Remove the rear door speaker. For additional information, refer to INFORMATION AND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS article.
Window not operating
NOTE:
Cutting the regulator cable should only be done if installing a new window
regulator assembly.
NOTE:
Support window glass before cutting the window regulator cable.
2. Cut the window regulator cable.
Fig. 97: Identifying Window Regulator Cable
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Window operating
3. Reconnect the window control switch.
Window operating/not operating
4. Remove the access plug and lower the window until the glass clamp bolt can be accessed through the
access hole. Tape the glass in position.
NOTE:
If the window regulator cable was cut previously, support the regulator
before the glass clamp bolt is loosened.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
5. Loosen the glass clamp bolt.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 98: Locating Glass Clamp Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the bottom of the regulator tracks.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector at the B-pillar.
Fig. 99: Locating Electrical Connector At B-Pillar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the 2 bolts from the electrical harness grommet to the door.
Fig. 100: Locating Electrical Harness Grommet Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
9. Using the speaker hole for access, release the clip on the harness from the inside to disconnect the harness
from the door.
10. Unclip the weatherstrip and feed through the wiring harness between the weatherstrip and door.
11. Remove the 3 door latch screws.
To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
Fig. 101: Locating Door Latch Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Remove the access plug from the latch side of the door and remove the outside door handle reinforcement
screw.
Fig. 102: Identifying Access Plug From Latch Side Of The Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove the outside door handle. For additional information, refer to HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES
AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
14. Remove the screw.
To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 103: Identifying Outside Door Handle Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. If equipped, remove the door keypad. For additional information, refer to HANDLES, LOCKS,
LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
16. Remove the 9 door module bolts and remove the rear door module, transfer parts as necessary.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 104: Locating Door Module Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
DOOR GLASS RUN AND BRACKET - REAR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The bracket is removed with the rear door glass.
Remove the rear door glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Rear Door.
Remove the rear door speaker.
Remove the rear door glass top run.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
WINDOW GLASS - REAR DOOR, FIXED
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the rear door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Rear Door.
2. Remove the rear door fixed window glass from the door.
3. To install, reverse removal procedure.
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Edge only
1. Pull the switch bezel straight up to unclip it from the door trim panel.
MKX only
NOTE:
LH front shown, all others similar.
2. Pull up on the front edge of the switch bezel and pull forward to unhook it from the door trim panel.
Fig. 105: Pulling Up On Front Edge Of Switch Bezel & Pulling Forward To Unhook It From Door
Trim Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
4. Unclip the window control switch from the switch bezel.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
WINDOW GLASS - REAR QUARTER
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Interior Auto Glass Cut-Out Knife
164-R2450 or equivalent
Kit (Electric)
Pneumatic Knife with Offset
Blade
107-R1511 or equivalent
The Pumper
164-R2459 or equivalent
Material
Item
DOW AUTOMOTIVE 2-HOUR CURE
Dow Urethane Adhesive
Betaseal® Express
Dow Urethane One Step Glass Primer
Betaprime® 5500 / 5500A / 5500SA
SIKA 2-HOUR CURE
Sika Urethane Adhesive
Sika Tack ASAP
Sika Urethane Metal and Glass Primer
Sika 206 G+P
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
ZC-23
Specification
-
ESR-M14P5-A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 106: Identifying Rear Quarter Window Glass
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
29711 LH/ 29710 RH
Description
Rear quarter window glass
REMOVAL
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have
pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
1. Remove the C-pillar, D-pillar and rear quarter trim panels, For additional information, refer to
INTERIOR TRIM AND ORNAMENTATION article.
NOTE:
Lubricate the existing urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool
while cutting.
2. From inside the vehicle, using the special tool, cut the glass starting at the upper C-pillar and work down,
across the D-pillar, then across the bottom.
3. Remove the rear quarter window glass.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
4. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation
information.
1. Dry fit the rear quarter window glass to the existing urethane adhesive bead on the body pinch weld.
2. For a uniform fit, use the 2 alignment pins on the rear quarter window glass to align the rear quarter
window glass in the opening.
3. Remove the rear quarter window glass.
WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a
structural component of the vehicle. Corrosion left unrepaired may
reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE:
Avoid scratching the pinch weld. For minor scratches or exposed metal on
the pinch weld, see the manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm (0.03 in) to 2 mm (0.07 in) base of
original equipment urethane on the pinch weld.
5. If installing the original rear quarter window glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive.
6. Clean the inside of the rear quarter window glass surface with glass cleaner.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the same brand urethane and cure-rate products for
adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer.
For additional information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure.
NOTE:
Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area.
7. If installing a new rear quarter window glass, apply urethane glass primer according to the manufacturer's
instructions. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry.
8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
NOTE:
Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will
apply the urethane with less effort and continuous bead.
9. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld. Make
sure that all gaps in the urethane are smoothed into one continuous bead starting and ending at the bottom
of the rear quarter window glass opening near the center.
WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane seal has cured. Follow
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 95
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
urethane manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect
curing of the urethane seal will adversely affect glass retention.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to
vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE:
Before the urethane has set, partially lower the windows to prevent the
glass from being pushed out of position when a door is closed.
10. After the urethane has cured, check the rear quarter window glass seal for air or water leaks through the
urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary.
11. Install the C-pillar, D-pillar and rear quarter trim panels. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR
TRIM AND ORNAMENTATION article.
WINDOW GLASS - LIFTGATE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Interior Auto Glass Cut-Out Knife
164-R2450 or equivalent
Kit (Electric)
Pneumatic Knife with Offset
Blade
107-R1511 or equivalent
The Pumper
164-R2459 or equivalent
Material
Item
DOW AUTOMOTIVE 2-HOUR CURE
Specification
Dow Urethane Adhesive Betaseal® Express
-
Dow Urethane One Step Glass Primer Betaprime®
5500/5500A/5500SA
-
SIKA 2-HOUR CURE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 96
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Sika Urethane Adhesive Sika Tack ASAP
-
Sika Urethane Metal and Glass Primer Sika 206 G+P
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
ZC-23
ESR-M14P5-A
Fig. 107: Identifying Rear Window Glass
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
5442006
-
Description
Rear window glass
Electrical connector
REMOVAL
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have
pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 97
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
1. Remove the liftgate window wiper arm and motor. For additional information, refer to WIPERS AND
WASHERS article.
2. Remove the liftgate spoiler. For additional information, refer to EXTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
3. Remove the liftgate trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
4. Disconnect the 2 liftgate window defrost electrical connectors.
NOTE:
Lubricate the existing urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool
while cutting.
5. Using the special tool, place the flat side of the knife against the liftgate window glass. Start cutting the
adhesive away from the liftgate window glass at the top and work toward the corners.
6. Using the special tool, distance the liftgate window glass from the body.
Fig. 108: Distance The Liftgate Window Glass From Body Using Special Tool (164-R2450)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Using the special tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the liftgate window glass.
Fig. 109: Distancing Windshield Glass From The Body
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 98
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 110: Measuring Urethane With Appropriate Tool
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation
information.
1. Dry fit the liftgate window glass to the existing urethane adhesive bead on the body pinch weld.
2. For a uniform fit, use the 2 liftgate window glass alignment pins to align the liftgate window glass in the
opening.
3. Remove the liftgate window glass.
WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a
structural component of the vehicle. Corrosion left unrepaired may
reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE:
Avoid scratching the pinch weld. For minor scratches or exposed metal on
the pinch weld, see the manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm (0.03 in) to 2 mm (0.07 in) base of
original equipment urethane on the pinch weld.
5. If installing the original liftgate window glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive.
6. Clean the inside of the liftgate window glass surface with glass cleaner.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for adhesive and
primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. For additional
information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure.
NOTE:
Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area.
7. If installing a new liftgate window glass, apply urethane glass primer according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 99
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
NOTE:
Use either a high ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will
apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead.
9. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld. Make
sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead starting and ending at
the bottom of the liftgate window glass opening near the center.
NOTE:
Before the urethane has set, partially lower the windows to prevent the
glass from being pushed out of position when a door is closed.
10. Install the liftgate window glass on the vehicle using the alignment pins.
WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane seal has cured. Follow
urethane manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect
curing of the urethane seal will adversely affect glass retention.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to
vehicle occupant(s).
11. After the urethane has cured, check the liftgate window glass seal for air or water leaks through the
urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary.
12. Connect the 2 liftgate window defrost electrical connectors.
13. Install the liftgate trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
14. Install the liftgate spoiler. For additional information, refer to EXTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
15. Install the liftgate window wiper arm and motor. For additional information, refer to WIPERS AND
WASHERS article.
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Interior Auto Glass Cut-Out Knife
164-R2450 or equivalent
Kit (Electric)
Pneumatic Knife with Offset
Blade
107-R1511 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 100
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
The Pumper
164-R2459 or equivalent
Material
Item
DOW AUTOMOTIVE 2-HOUR CURE
Specification
Dow Urethane Adhesive Betaseal® Express
-
Dow Urethane One Step Glass Primer Betaprime®
5500 / 5500A / 5500SA
-
SIKA 2-HOUR CURE
Sika Urethane Adhesive Sika Tack ASAP
-
Sika Urethane Metal and Glass Primer Sika 206 G+P
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
ZC-23
ESR-M14P5-A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 101
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 111: Identifying Windshield Glass
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
5403100
Description
Windshield
REMOVAL
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have
pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
1. Remove the A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Remove the sun visors.
3. Remove the interior mirror. For additional information, refer to REAR VIEW MIRRORS article.
4. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner near the windshield header and block with suitable
material. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND ORNAMENTATION article.
5. Remove the cowl panel grille. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY PANELS
article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 102
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Lubricate the existing urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool
while cutting.
NOTE:
Removing the windshield glass requires more than one technician.
6. Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the windshield glass starting at the top center and
working toward the bottom corners.
Fig. 112: Cutting Urethane Adhesive From Glass
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Using the special tool, distance the windshield glass from the body.
Fig. 113: Distancing Windshield Glass From The Body
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Using the Pneumatic Knife with offset blade , cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the
windshield glass.
9. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation
information.
1. Dry fit the windshield glass to the existing urethane adhesive bead on the body pinch weld. Align the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 103
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
windshield glass in the opening for a uniform fit.
2. For a uniform fit, use the 2 alignment pins on windshield glass to align the windshield glass in the pin
holes on the top pinch weld.
3. Use a non-permanent pencil to make alignment marks on the windshield glass at the setting blocks and
the body to aid in the installation alignment of the windshield glass.
4. Remove the windshield glass.
WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a
structural component of the vehicle. Corrosion left unrepaired may
reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE:
Avoid scratching the pinch weld. For minor scratches or exposed metal on
the pinch weld, see the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1-2 mm (0.04-0.08 in) base of original
equipment urethane on the pinchweld.
Fig. 114: Trimming Remaining Urethane Adhesive To Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. If installing the original windshield glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive.
7. Clean the inside of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the same brand urethane and cure-rate products for
adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer.
For additional information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure.
NOTE:
Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area.
8. If installing a new windshield glass, apply urethane glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions.
9. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 104
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
Fig. 115: Cutting Urethane Adhesive Applicator Tip (With Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will
apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead.
10. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld. Make
sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead starting and ending at
the bottom of the windshield near the center.
Fig. 116: Identifying Adhesive Application (With Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Install the windshield glass on the vehicle, aligning it with the markings made previously.
WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane seal has cured. Follow
urethane manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect
curing of the urethane seal will adversely affect glass retention.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to
vehicle occupant(s).
12. After the urethane has cured, check the windshield glass seal for air or water leaks through the urethane
adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary.
13. Install the cowl panel grille. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY PANELS article.
14. Install the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 105
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Edge & MKX
15. Install the interior mirror. For additional information, refer to REAR VIEW MIRRORS article.
16. Install the sun visors.
17. Install the A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:10:33 AM
Page 106
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Front End Body Panels - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Front End Body Panels - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Cowl grille panel extension bolts
Fender cowl bolt
Front fender bolts
Fender-to-stud nut
Hood hinge-to-body bolts
Hood hinge-to-hood bolts
Hood latch bolts
Hood striker bolts
Lower cowl grille panel bolts
Lower cowl panel-to-front of dash bolt
Lower fender bolt
Upper cowl grille panel bolts
Upper fender bolts
Upper rear fender bolt
Wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly bolts
Wiper pivot arm nuts
Nm
6
9
9
9
12
23
10
11
9
20
9
6
9
9
7
20
lb-ft
9
17
8
15
15
lb-in
53
80
80
80
89
80
80
53
80
80
62
-
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT END BODY PANELS - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:51
11:00:47 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Front End Body Panels - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Front End Body Panels With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
W706805
2
W712196
3
4
5
6
16054 RH/ 16055 LH
W505421
W709603
16015 RH/ 16016 LH
Description
Splash shield screw (8 required)
Splash shield pin-type retainer (10
required)
Splash shield
Fender bolt (7 required)
Fender rear nut
Fender
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures in this article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:47 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Front End Body Panels - Edge & MKX
FENDER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the 2 screws and the rocker panel moulding end cap.
Fig. 2: Identifying Rocker Panel Molding End Cap & Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Remove the front fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to Fender Splash Shield.
3. Remove the lower fender bolt.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
Fig. 3: Locating Lower Fender Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the nut from the stud inside the fender well.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:47 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Front End Body Panels - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Identifying Stud Inside Fender Well
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The front bumper cover may be damaged if pulled outward too far
while trying to access the bolts.
5. Remove the front fender bolts.
Remove the front bumper cover corner.
Remove the bolts.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
Fig. 5: Locating Front Bumper Cover Corner & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the upper rear fender bolt cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:47 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Front End Body Panels - Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Locating Upper Rear Fender Bolt Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the upper rear fender bolt.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
Fig. 7: Locating Upper Rear Fender Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the 2 upper fender bolts.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
Fig. 8: Locating Upper Fender Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the fender cowl bolt.
Position the cowl cover aside.
Remove the bolt.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:47 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Front End Body Panels - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Locating Fender Cowl Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the front fender.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
If necessary, transfer parts.
FENDER SPLASH SHIELD
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the fender splash shield screws.
2. Remove the fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:47 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Front End Body Panels - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Exploded View Of Cowl Panel Grille With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
020A26
020A27
3
W712648
4
N804837
5
6
02222
02223
7
17526
Description
RH cowl side outer panel
LH cowl side outer panel
Upper cowl grille panel screws (4
required)
Upper cowl grille panel scrivet (4
required)
RH upper cowl panel
LH upper cowl panel
Wiper pivot arm assembly bolt (2
required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:47 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Front End Body Panels - Edge & MKX
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17508B
W707257
021A37
W707257
W710593
W702751
W710309
02106
Wiper pivot arm assembly
Cowl panel extension bolts (6 required)
LH cowl panel extension
RH cowl panel extension
Lower cowl panel bolt (5 required)
Lower cowl panel nut (3 required)
Lower cowl panel-to-front of dash bolt
Lower cowl panel
Upper and lower cowl grille panel
NOTE:
The upper cowl panel grille must be removed before the lower cowl panel
grille can be removed.
1. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to WIPERS AND
WASHERS article.
Upper cowl panel grille
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the RH cowl side outer panel.
Remove the LH cowl side outer panel.
Remove the 2 scrivets from the RH upper cowl panel grille.
Remove the 2 bolts from the RH upper cowl grille panel and remove the RH upper cowl grille panel.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
6. Remove the 2 scrivets from the LH upper cowl grille panel.
7. Remove the 2 bolts from the LH upper cowl grille panel and remove the LH upper cowl grille panel.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
Lower cowl panel grille
8. Remove the wiper arm and wiper pivot shaft assembly.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Remove the 2 bolts.
To install, tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
9. Remove the 2 bolts from the upper left lower cowl grille panel extension and remove the panel.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
10. Remove the 4 bolts from the upper right lower cowl panel extension and remove the panel.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
11. Disconnect the wiring harness from the retainer on the left front of the lower cowl grille panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:47 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Front End Body Panels - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Identifying Wiring Harness From Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the PCM.
Fig. 12: Identifying Electrical Connectors From PCM
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove the evaporative purge valve and bracket from the center of the lower cowl panel grille and set
aside.
14. Remove the 5 bolts and 3 nuts from inside the lower cowl grille panel.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
15. Remove the bolt from the lower cowl panel-to-front of dash.
To install, tighten to 20 N.m (15 lb-ft).
16. Remove the lower cowl grille panel and PCM from the vehicle.
Upper and lower cowl grille panel
CAUTION: Incorrect installation of the lower/upper cowl panel grille may cause
damage to the windshield. Make sure the cowl panel grille clips are
located under the windshield prior to installation.
17. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Transfer the components as necessary.
Adjust the pivot arms. For additional information, refer to WIPERS AND WASHERS article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:48 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE
Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft
WSS-M2C930-A
SAE 5W-20 Super Premium
Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Fill Capacity
-
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Fuel tank capacity (all wheel drive [AWD] vehicles) 76L (20 gal)
Fuel tank capacity (front wheel drive [FWD]
72L (19 gal)
vehicles)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Evaporative emission (EVAP) shield bolts
Fuel tank bolts
Fuel tank bracket bolts
Fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolts
Fuel tank filler pipe flange screws
Fuel tank filler pipe hose clamps
Inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch bolts
Parking brake cable bracket bolts
Specification
Nm
9
25
25
9
3
4
2
23
lb-ft
18
18
17
lb-in
80
80
27
35
18
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
FUEL TANK AND LINES
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:46
11:38:41 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be
prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot
vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
The fuel system consists of:
an all wheel drive (AWD) saddle-type or front wheel drive (FWD) L-shaped fuel tank.
fuel, vapor and brake tubes in an integrated bundle assembly.
quick connect fuel and vapor tube couplings.
a fuel tank filler pipe assembly, which cannot be modified in any way, that also contains a restrictor plate
to permit only unleaded fuel to be pumped into the tank.
a 1/4 turn-type fuel tank filler cap.
an inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch.
a mechanical returnless fuel system.
a separate fuel level sensor assembly on AWD saddle-type fuel tank.
a fuel pump (FP) module containing:
the electric FP module which provides pressurized fuel to the engine.
a serviceable fuel level sender.
a check valve which maintains system pressure after the pump is shut off.
a pressure relief for overpressure protection in the event of restricted airflow.
a fuel filter providing filtration to protect the fuel injectors from foreign material.
The FP module is controlled by the PCM. Electrical power to the FP module is provided through the IFS switch
located under the LH rear quarter trim panel.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
FUEL TANK AND LINES
Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FUEL TANK AND FILLER PIPE - EXPLODED VIEW
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Fuel Tank & Filler Pipe With Torque Specifications - Front Wheel Drive
(FWD) Vehicle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
9S284
2
-
3
9324A
Description
Fuel tube
Fuel tank jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick
connect coupling (part of 9324A)
Fuel tank jumper tube
Fuel tank jumper tube-to-fuel pump (FP)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
4
-
5
6
W705909
9C335
7
-
8
9
9C385
14407A
10
-
11
-
12
13
14
9H307
9276A
9034A
15
W505253
16
17
9030A
9K007
18
W525937
19
W713928
20
W708004
21
22
23
2A604
2A823
W713928
24
-
25
26
9S284
27
W710330
module quick connect coupling (part of
9324A)
FP module access cover bolt (4 required)
FP module access cover
FP module electrical connector (part of
14407A)
FP module lock ring
Fuel tank wiring harness
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor electrical
connector (part of 14407A)
Fuel tank wiring harness electrical
connector (part of 14407A)
FP module
FP module O-ring seal
Fuel tank filler pipe
Fuel tank filler pipe flange screw (3
required)
Fuel tank filler cap
Fuel tank
Fuel tank filler pipe hose clamp (2
required)
Fuel tank bolt (4 required)
Parking brake cable bracket bolt (2
required)
Rear, RH parking brake cable
Rear, LH parking brake cable
Fuel tank bracket bolt (2 required)
Fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank
quick connect coupling (part of 9S284)
FTP sensor (part of 9S284)
Fuel vapor tube assembly
Fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolt (2
required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Exploded View Of Fuel Tank & Filler Pipe With Torque Specifications - All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Vehicle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
9S284
2
-
3
9324A
4
-
5
-
Description
Fuel tube
Fuel tank jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick
connect coupling (part of 9324A)
Fuel tank jumper tube
Fuel tank jumper tube-to-fuel pump (FP)
module quick connect coupling (part of
9324A)
Fuel level sensor O-ring seal (part of
9275B)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
6
7
9275B
9C335
8
-
9
W705909
10
-
11
-
12
13
14
W705909
9C355
14407A
15
-
16
-
17
18
19
20
9C385
9H307
9276A
9034A
21
W505253
22
9K007
23
W525937
24
25
9030A
W713928
26
W708004
27
28
29
2A604
2A823
W713928
30
-
31
32
9S284
33
W710330
Fuel level sensor
Fuel level sensor access cover
Fuel level sensor electrical connector
(part of 14407A)
Fuel level sensor access cover bolt (4
required)
FP module electrical connector (part of
14407A)
Internal fuel tube-to-FP module quick
connect coupling (part of 9K007)
FP module access cover bolt (4 required)
FP module access cover
Fuel tank wiring harness
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor electrical
connector (part of 14407A)
Fuel tank wiring harness electrical
connector (part of 14407A)
FP module lock ring
FP module
FP module O-ring seal
Fuel tank filler pipe
Fuel tank filler pipe flange screw (3
required)
Fuel tank
Fuel tank filler pipe hose clamp (2
required)
Fuel tank filler cap
Fuel tank bolt (4 required)
Parking brake cable bracket bolt (2
required)
Rear, RH parking brake cable
Rear, LH parking brake cable
Fuel tank bracket bolt (2 required)
Fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank
quick connect coupling (part of 9S284)
FTP sensor (part of 9S284)
Fuel vapor tube assembly
Fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolt (2
required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Exploded View Of Fuel Tank & Filler Pipe - All Vehicles
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
-
2
W712196
3
W706805
Description
LH rear splash shield
Splash shield pin-type retainer (4
required)
Splash shield screw (10 required)
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure.
FUEL TANK
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure.
If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be
prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot
vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
All vehicles
1. Drain the fuel tank. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
2. Remove the muffler and tailpipe. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
3. Remove the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to DRIVESHAFT article.
All vehicles
4.
5.
6.
7.
Install a suitable lifting device under the fuel tank.
Disconnect the fuel tank wiring harness electrical connector.
Disconnect the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor electrical connector.
Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
8. Release the clamp and disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe hose from the fuel tank.
To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the fuel tank jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
10. Remove the 2 parking brake cable bracket bolts and position cables aside.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
CAUTION: Remove all bolts prior to lowering the fuel tank. Fuel tank damage
can occur if all of the bolts are not removed.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
11. Remove the 2 fuel tank bracket bolts and the 4 fuel tank bolts.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
NOTE:
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles require the fuel tank to be positioned
forward, past the rear differential unit (RDU), then lowered.
12. Completely lower and remove the fuel tank.
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Fuel Storage Tanker
Tool Number
164-R3202 or equivalent
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure.
If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be
prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot
vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside.
4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it enters the fuel tank.
Fig. 4: Inserting Suitable Fuel Drain Tube Into Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the fuel tank is completely full, this step will lower the fuel level below
the fuel tank inlet.
5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and drain approximately 1/8 of the fuel from the tank.
6. Remove the 3 fuel tank filler pipe flange retaining screws.
To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
7. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
8. Remove the 10 screws, 4 pin-type retainers and the LH rear splash shield.
9. Release the clamp and disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe from the fuel tank.
To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
10. Remove the 2 fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolts.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe from the vehicle.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Fuel Storage Tanker
Tool Number
164-R3202 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
Wrench, Fuel Tank Sender Unit
310-123
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
The fuel pump (FP) module has a serviceable fuel level sender. For additional
information, refer to Fuel Level Sender.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
INFORMATION article.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside.
4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it enters the fuel tank.
Fig. 5: Inserting Suitable Fuel Drain Tube Into Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the fuel tank is completely full, this step will lower the fuel level below
the FP module mounting flange.
5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and drain approximately 1/8 of the fuel from the tank.
6. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
7. Remove the 4 bolts and the FP module access cover.
NOTE:
Clean the FP module connection, coupling, flange surface and the
immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
8. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
9. Disconnect the fuel tank jumper tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
NOTE:
Place absorbent pads on the floor pan in the immediate area in case of fuel
spills. Carefully remove the FP module from the vehicle to avoid fuel
spillage inside the vehicle.
10. Using the special tool, remove the FP module lock ring.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Removing FP Module Lock Ring Using Special Tool (310-123)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid
damage to the FP module and/or float arm.
11. Carefully lift the FP module out of the fuel tank enough to access and disconnect the internal fuel tube-toFP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
All vehicles
NOTE:
The FP module will have residual fuel remaining internally, drain into a
suitable container.
12. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
NOTE:
Inspect the mating surfaces of the FP module flange and the fuel tank Oring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel
tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE:
Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal. Install a new lock ring if
it is bent, damaged or corroded.
NOTE:
To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
13. Remove the FP module O-ring seal.
NOTE:
Make sure the alignment tab on the FP module and the fuel tank meet
before tightening the FP module lock ring.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Fuel Storage Tanker
164-R3202 or equivalent
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be
prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot
vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When working on or near the evaporative emission (EVAP) system,
disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. The EVAP system
contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor, so an electrical spark may
cause a fire or explosion. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside.
4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it enters the fuel tank.
Fig. 7: Inserting Suitable Fuel Drain Tube Into Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the fuel tank is completely full, this step will lower the fuel level below
the fuel level sensor mounting flange.
5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and drain approximately 1/8 of the fuel from the tank.
6. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
7. Remove the 4 bolts and the fuel level sensor access cover.
NOTE:
Clean the fuel level sensor connection, flange surface and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
8. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector.
NOTE:
Place absorbent pads in the general work area in case of fuel spillage.
9. Release the lock tab, and using a suitable tool, rotate the fuel level sensor counterclockwise
approximately 1/4 turn and lift upward.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Rotating Fuel Level Sensor Counterclockwise Approximately 1/4 Turn & Lift Upward
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The fuel level sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to
the float arm.
CAUTION: Carefully remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank to avoid fuel
spillage inside the vehicle.
10. Carefully lift and remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank.
NOTE:
Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel level sensor flange and the fuel
tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal
contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new fuel level
sensor or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or
corroded.
NOTE:
To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
NOTE:
Upon installation, correctly seat and press down firmly on the fuel level
sensor, rotate it clockwise until the lock arrow on the sensor aligns with
the notch on the tank. Torque should not exceed 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
FUEL LEVEL SENDER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Exploded View Of Fuel Level Sender
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
9H307
9A299
3
-
Description
Fuel pump (FP) module
Fuel level sender
Fuel level sender electrical connector
(part of 9A299)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
1. Remove the fuel pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module.
2. Disconnect the fuel level sender electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
3. Depress the lock tab and slide the fuel level sender upwards and remove.
Fig. 10: Depressing Lock Tab & Sliding Fuel Level Sender Upwards
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
FUEL LINES
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Exploded View Of Fuel Lines With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
-
3
4
9S284
9J280
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
9S284
9
-
10
11
12
13
9S327
9S284
9F931
W707137
Description
Fuel supply tube-to-fuel rail quick
connect coupling (part of 9J280)
Fuel vapor tube-to-evaporative emission
(EVAP) canister purge valve quick
connect coupling (part of 9S284)
Fuel vapor tube
Fuel supply tube
Fuel supply tube retainer clip (part of
9J280)
Fresh air tube-to-fuel vapor vent tube
quick connect coupling (part of 9S284)
Fuel supply tube-to-fuel tube quick
connect coupling (part of 9J280)
Fuel tube
Fuel vapor vent tube retainer clip (part of
9S327)
Fuel vapor vent tube
Fresh air tube
Bundle retainer clip (2 required)
Bundle retainer clip nut (2 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
14
15
16
17
W710330
W705681
9H296
9F931
18
-
19
9E857
20
-
21
9324
22
-
23
9F931
EVAP shield bolt (3 required)
EVAP shield pin-type retainer
EVAP shield
Bundle retainer clip (3 required)
Fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister quick
connect coupling (part of 9S284)
Fuel vapor tube
Fuel tank jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick
connect coupling (part of 9324)
Fuel tank jumper tube
Fuel tank jumper tube-to-fuel pump (FP)
module quick connect coupling (part of
9324)
Fuel tank jumper tube retainer clip
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
3. Disconnect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
4. Disconnect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
5. Release the retainer clip and remove the fuel supply tube.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
6. Remove the 3 bolts, pin-type retainer and the evaporative emission (EVAP) shield.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Disconnect the fresh air tube-to-fuel vapor vent tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
8. Release the retainer clip and remove the fuel vapor vent tube.
9. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling. For additional
information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
10. Remove the 2 nuts and the 2 bundle retainer clips.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
12. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube from the dust separator.
13. Disconnect the fuel tank jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
14. Release the 3 bundle retainer clips and remove the fuel tube, fuel vapor tube and the fresh air tube.
15. Disconnect the fuel tank jumper tube-to-fuel pump (FP) module quick connect coupling. For additional
information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
16. Release the retainer clip and remove the fuel tank jumper tube.
17. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
Fig. 12: Exploded View Of Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch With Torque Specification
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Fuel Tank & Lines - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W504169
2
3
4
5
9341
14489A
-
Description
Inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch bolt (2
required)
IFS switch shield
IFS switch
IFS switch electrical connector
IFS switch shield rivet (3 required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Remove the 3 rivets and the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch shield.
3. Disconnect the IFS switch electrical connector.
CAUTION: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage to the switch will occur.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:38:41 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE
Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Accessory drive belt
Power steering pump drive belt
Specification
6 ribs
4-ribbed
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Accessory drive belt tensioner bolts
Nm
11
lb-in
97
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ACCESSORY DRIVE
This vehicle is equipped with the following components:
V-ribbed serpentine accessory drive belt
Automatic drive belt tensioner
V-ribbed power steering pump drive belt
The accessory drive system provides power to operate components which power other systems. These could
include components such as the generator, power steering pump and A/C compressor. Each of these
components is equipped with a pulley which is driven by the accessory drive belt. The accessory drive belt is
driven by the engine crankshaft pulley. The automatic belt tensioner maintains correct belt tension and
compensates for component wear and changes in system load. System load changes can be caused by the A/C
compressor clutch engaging or disengaging or demand changes on other systems powered by the accessory
drive belt. To maintain correct operation of this system, it is critical that the correct length drive belt be
installed. The pulleys must also be correctly aligned and kept clean.
Accessory Drive Belt Routing
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:52
11:33:47 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
6B209
10300
19D784
8620
6316
Description
Accessory drive belt tensioner pulley
Generator pulley
A/C clutch pulley
Accessory drive belt
Crankshaft pulley
Fig. 2: Power Steering Pump Belt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
6C301
6316
3D639
Description
Power steering pump drive belt
Crankshaft pulley
Power steering pump pulley
Belt Tensioner
Automatic tensioners are calibrated to provide the correct amount of tension to the belt for a given accessory
drive system. Unless a spring or damping band within the tensioner assembly breaks or some other mechanical
part of the tensioner fails, there is no need to check the tensioner for correct tension.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
ACCESSORY DRIVE
Inspection and Verification
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys
have any fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material
and tensioner damping mechanism may occur.
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Drive belt cracking/chunking/wear
Belt/pulley contamination
Incorrect accessory drive belt
Incorrectly routed accessory drive belt
Pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout
Loose or mislocated hardware
Incorrectly routed power steering tubes (rubbing)
Loose accessory drive belt
Damaged pulleys
Tensioner arm misalignment
NOTE:
Modular engine (without A/C) belt tensioner shown, others similar.
NOTE:
Belt tensioner is shown in the free-state position against the arm travel
stops.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Belt Tensioner With Belt Length Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number Description
Belt length
indicator
Acceptable belt
installation and
wear range
Belt
replacement
range
Belt tension
relief point
3. Check that the belt length indicator, if equipped, on the belt tensioner is in the acceptable belt installation
and wear range. If the indicator is in the belt replacement range, either an incorrect belt is installed or the
belt is worn beyond the service limit. Install a new belt as necessary.
4. Eliminate all other non-belt related noises that could cause belt misdiagnosis, such as A/C compressor
engagement chirp, A/C slugging noise, power steering cavitations at low temperatures, Variable
Camshaft Timing (VCT) tick or generator whine.
5. If a concern is found, correct the condition before proceeding to the next step.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Check the belt for cracks. Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 in) can be considered
acceptable. If cracks exceed this standard, install a new belt.
NOTE:
Piling is an excessive buildup in the V-grooves of the belt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Identifying V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Piling
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. The condition of the V-ribbed drive belt should be compared against the illustration and appropriate
action taken.
1. Small scattered deposits of rubber material. This is not a concern, therefore, installation of a new
belt is not required.
2. Longer deposit areas building up to 50% of the rib height. This is not considered a durability
concern, but it can result in excessive noise. If noise is apparent, install a new belt.
3. Heavy deposits building up along the grooves resulting in a possible noise and belt stability
concern. If heavy deposits are apparent, install a new belt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Identifying V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. There should be no chunks missing from the belt ribs. If the belt shows any evidence of this, install a new
accessory drive belt.
9. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and Go to Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Accessory drive belt
cracking (over 15
cracks in a rib over a
distance of 100 mm
[4.0 in])
Accessory drive belt
chunking
Possible Sources
Action
INSPECT the accessory
drive belt. REFER to
Inspection and
Verification. INSTALL a
new accessory drive belt as
necessary.
INSPECT the accessory
drive belt. REFER to
Inspection and
Verification. INSTALL a
new accessory drive belt as
necessary.
INSPECT the accessory
drive belt pulley grooves for
Accessory drive belt
Accessory drive belt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
Damaged pulley grooves
Defective/worn or incorrect
accessory drive belt
Misaligned pulley(s)
Pulley runout
Damaged or worn accessory
drive component or idler
Fluid contamination of
accessory drive belt or pulleys
Accessory drive belt
noise, squeal, chirping
or flutter
Premature accessory
drive belt wear
Damaged pulley grooves
Accessory drive component
failure
Accessory drive belt idler pulley
bearing failure
Defective or incorrect accessory
drive belt
Misaligned pulley(s)
Pulley runout
Damaged accessories
Incorrectly installed drive belt
Fluid contamination
Damaged pulley grooves
REFER to Component
Tests, Drive Belt Noise/Flutter. REPAIR or
INSTALL new parts as
necessary.
REFER to Component
Tests, Belt Tensioner Mechanical and Belt
Tensioner - Dynamics.
INSTALL a new accessory
drive belt tensioner as
necessary.
INSPECT the accessory
drive belt pulley grooves for
damage. INSTALL a new
pulley or component as
necessary.
CHECK the accessory drive
components. INSTALL new
components as necessary.
INSPECT the accessory
drive belt idler pulley for
freedom of rotation and
damage. INSTALL a new
accessory drive belt idler
pulley as necessary.
REFER to Component
Tests, Drive Belt Noise/Flutter and Drive Belt
- Incorrect Installation.
REPAIR or INSTALL new
parts as necessary.
INSPECT the accessory
drive belt pulley grooves for
damage. INSTALL a new
Damaged or worn accessory
drive belt tensioner
damage. INSTALL a new
pulley or component as
necessary.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
pulley or component as
necessary.
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys
have any fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material
and tensioner damping mechanism may occur.
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of a damaged
or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area with a
straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft direction or at an
angle to the straightedge.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on an accessory
pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid engine
acceleration and decelerations, such as:
Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic transmissions.
WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias required to
meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or reoccurring drive belt squeal
can occur:
if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications:
the A/C system is overcharged.
the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak.
if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after several
minutes) exceeds specifications.
if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All
accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory.
if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has been
exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power steering system,
A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with clean water and install a
new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a localized area during routine
vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt and pulleys should be washed with
soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and rinsed with clean water.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive belt
tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will release
tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal installation
wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
NOTE:
The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without
binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
NOTE:
Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear
and may cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt tracks
incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive belt.
Fig. 7: Identifying Drive Belt Incorrect Installation
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Identifying Correct Installation Of Drive Belt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the accessory drive
belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur. Make sure the accessory drive
belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking condition exists, proceed with the
following:
Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting pad
surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting
surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of alignment. Either
of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises.
With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the pulley
forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any interference that
would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference condition and recheck
the accessory drive belt tracking.
Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware to
specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind.
1. With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. Refer to the illustrations under Accessory
Drive .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires
substantial force to release.
2. Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension on the
belt and detach the accessory drive belt from the tensioner. Carry out the following tests:
Using the release tool, move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back
to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is
tension on the tensioner spring.
Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition.
Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and
repair any leaks.
3. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the criteria in the previous step, install a new tensioner.
If the accessory drive belt tensioner meets the criteria in the previous step, proceed to testing the tensioner
dynamically.
4. If the tensioner is saturated with oil and grease internally, install a new tensioner.
Belt Tensioner - Dynamics
The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows:
1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive
tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is
accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive belt tensioner movement is excessive without A/C clutch
cycling or engine acceleration, check belt rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the
belt) can cause excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing
a new belt. If excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive
belt tensioner.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT END ACCESSORY DRIVE (FEAD) - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Exploded View Of Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
8620
2
W503278
3
4
6B209
6C301
Description
Accessory drive belt
Accessory drive belt tensioner bolt (3
required)
Accessory drive belt tensioner
Power steering pump drive belt
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure .
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or
pulleys be lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and
tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt
dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive
belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the generator pulley.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS article.
4. Working from under the vehicle, remove the accessory drive belt.
INSTALLATION
1. Working from under the vehicle, position the accessory drive belt on all pulleys, with the exception of the
generator pulley.
NOTE:
After installation, make sure the accessory drive belt is correctly seated on
all pulleys.
2. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive
belt tensioner clockwise and install the accessory drive belt.
3. Install the RH inner fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS article.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT TENSIONER
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or
pulleys be lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and
tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt
dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive
belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the generator pulley.
3. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS article.
4. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
NOTE:
After installation, make sure the accessory drive belt is correctly seated on
all pulleys.
2. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive
belt tensioner clockwise and install the accessory drive belt on the generator pulley.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:47 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
3. Install the RH inner fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS article
POWER STEERING PUMP BELT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Power Steering Belt Removal
Tool
303-1252/1
Power Steering Belt Installation
Tool
303-1252/2
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or
pulleys be lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and
tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt
dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive
belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the generator pulley.
3. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS article.
4. Position the accessory drive belt off the crankshaft pulley.
5. Install the special tool between the power steering pump belt and pulley, turning the crankshaft bolt
clockwise to remove the power steering belt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:48 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Installing Special Tool (303-1252/1) Between Power Steering Pump Belt & Pulley, Turning
Crankshaft Bolt Clockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the power steering belt on the crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION: After installation, make sure the belt is correctly seated on the
crankshaft and power steering pulleys.
2. Position the power steering belt around the special tool and the power steering pulley. Make sure that the
belt is engaged with the power steering pulley and rotate the crankshaft clockwise to install the power
steering belt.
Fig. 11: Positioning Power Steering Belt Around Special Tool (303-1252/2) & Power Steering Pulley
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:48 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Accessory Drive - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Position the accessory drive belt on the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE:
After installation, make sure the accessory drive belt is correctly seated on
all pulleys.
4. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive
belt tensioner clockwise and install the accessory drive belt.
5. Install the RH inner fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:33:48 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
2008 BRAKES
Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Fill Capacity
High Performance DOT 3 Motor
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65803-821 ml (1.70-1.74 pt)
Vehicle Brake Fluid
A1
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
High Temperature Nickel AntiESE-M12A4-A
Seize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Metal Brake Parts Cleaner
PM-4-A or PM-4-B (US); CPM-4 (Canada)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Brake Disc
Minimum brake disc thickness
Brake Pad
Maximum brake pad taper wear (in any direction)
Minimum brake pad thickness
Specification
16 mm (0.629 in)
3.0 mm (0.118 in)
3.0 mm (0.118 in)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Bleeder screw
Brake caliper anchor plate bolts
Brake caliper flow bolt
Brake caliper guide pin bolts
Brake caliper support plate dust boot shield bolts
Brake flexible hose bracket bolt
Brake tube fitting
Parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts
Parking brake shoe return spring bracket bolt
Nm
8
90
25
26
10
15
17
23
5
lb-ft
66
18
19
11
13
17
-
lb-in
71
89
44
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
REAR DISC BRAKE
The rear disc brake system consists of the following components:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:10
10:06:06 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Brake caliper anchor plate
Brake caliper
Brake disc
Brake disc shield
Brake flexible hose
Brake pads
When mechanical force is applied by the driver to the brake pedal, the force is converted into hydraulic pressure
by the master cylinder. The hydraulic force is directed to the disc brake calipers and transferred to the brake
pads. The brake pads are then forced against the brake friction surfaces by the brake caliper pistons. The friction
of the brake pads on the brake disc causes the slowing or stopping of wheel rotation and the vehicle.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
REAR DISC BRAKE
Refer to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
BRAKE PADS
Material
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:06 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Brake Pads With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
2552 RH/ 2553 LH
5
-
Description
Brake pad shim (2 required) (part of
2200)
Brake pad (2 required) (part of 2200)
Brake pad slide clip (2 required) (part of
2200)
Brake caliper
Brake caliper guide pin bolt (2 required)
(part of 2B296)
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:06 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always install new brake shoes or pads at both ends of an axle to reduce
the possibility of brakes pulling vehicle to one side. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in uneven braking and serious personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is
spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir.
If required, remove the fluid until the brake master cylinder reservoir is 1/2 full.
2. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
CAUTION: Do not pry in the caliper sight hole to retract the pistons, as this can
damage the pistons and boots.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or
damage to the hose can occur.
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside.
Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
NOTE:
Install new brake pads if they are worn past the specified thickness. Refer
to GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .
4. Remove the 2 brake pads, shims and slide clips.
Inspect the brake pads and shims for wear, damage or contamination.
Discard the slide clips.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Protect the caliper pistons and boots when pushing the caliper
piston into the caliper piston bores or damage to components may
occur.
NOTE:
Make sure the caliper piston boot is clean and free of foreign material.
1. If installing new brake pads, using a suitable tool and a worn brake pad, compress the disc brake caliper
pistons into the caliper.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:06 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Compressing Brake Caliper Pistons Into Caliper
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the 2 brake pads, shims and new slide clips to the brake caliper anchor plate.
CAUTION: Make sure that the caliper guide pin boots are fully seated or damage
to the caliper guide pin boots can occur.
NOTE:
Make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted during caliper
installation.
3. Position the brake caliper on the anchor plate and install the 2 guide pin bolts.
Tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft).
4. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
BRAKE CALIPER
Material
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:06 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Exploded View Of Brake Caliper With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
2552 RH/ 2553 LH
2282
3
-
4
5
W711748
2M085
Description
Brake caliper
Brake hose
Brake caliper guide pin bolt (2 required)
(part of 2B296)
Copper washers (2 required)
Brake caliper flow bolt
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:06 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is
spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
2. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and position the brake hose aside.
Discard the 2 copper washers.
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts and the brake caliper.
If a leaking or damaged caliper piston boot is found, install a new disc brake caliper.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Make sure that the caliper guide pin boots are fully seated or damage
to the caliper guide pin boots can occur.
NOTE:
Make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted during caliper
installation.
1. Position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate and brake pads.
2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts.
To install, tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft).
3. Using 2 new copper washers, position the brake hose and install the brake caliper flow bolt.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
5. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
BRAKE CALIPER ANCHOR PLATE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:07 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Brake Caliper Anchor Plate With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
2200
2
W711240
3
-
4
-
5
2552 RH/ 2553 LH
6
-
Description
Brake pad (2 required)
Brake caliper anchor plate bolt (2
required)
Brake caliper anchor plate
Brake pad slide clip (2 required) (part of
2200)
Brake caliper
Brake caliper guide pin bolt (2 required)
(part of 2B296)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
CAUTION: Do not pry in the caliper sight hole to retract the pistons, as this can
damage the pistons and boots.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or
damage to the hose can occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:07 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
2. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside.
Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
To install, tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft).
3. Remove the 2 brake pads, shims and slide clips. Inspect the brake pads for wear or contamination.
4. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts and the anchor plate.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted during caliper
installation.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
BRAKE DISC
Material
Item
High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Metal Brake Parts Cleaner
PM-4-A or PM-4-B (US); CPM-4 (Canada)
Specification
ESE-M12A4-A
-
Fig. 5: Identifying Brake Disc With Torque Specifications
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:07 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
2C026
2
W711240
3
-
Description
Brake disc
Brake caliper anchor plate bolt (2
required)
Brake caliper and anchor plate assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang
from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
2. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly
aside.
Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire.
3. Remove the brake disc.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean and dry the brake disc-to-hub mounting surface and apply a thin coat of anti-seize lubricant where
indicated.
Fig. 6: Locating Brake Disc Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the brake disc onto the wheel hub.
3. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
4. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:07 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
BRAKE DISC SHIELD
Fig. 7: Exploded View Of Brake Disc Shield With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W302607
2
3
2068
2K045 RH/ 2K046 LH
Description
Parking brake shoe return spring bracket
bolt
Parking brake shoe return spring bracket
Brake disc shield
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the wheel hub. For additional information, refer to REAR SUSPENSION article.
2. Remove the parking brake shoe return spring bracket bolt and bracket.
To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Remove the brake disc shield.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
BRAKE CALIPER SUPPORT PLATE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:07 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Exploded View Of Brake Caliper Support Plate With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
2C220
2092
W302608
2A635 LH/ 2A604 RH
6
W500021
Description
Brake caliper support plate
Dust boot
Dust boot shield (part of 2C220)
Dust boot shield bolt (2 required)
Rear parking brake cable
Parking brake cable-to-support plate bolt
(2 required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the brake disc shield. For additional information, refer to Brake Disc Shield.
2. Remove the 2 parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts, disconnect the parking brake cable from the
lever and position the cable aside.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
3. Remove the 2 dust boot shield bolts and the dust shield.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Remove the dust boot.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:07 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Material
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Fig. 9: Identifying Brake Flexible Hose With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
2K573
W711784
3
-
4
5
6
2B223
W500022
2282
Description
Brake caliper flow bolt
Copper washers (2 required)
Brake tube fitting (part of 2265
RH/2C287 LH)
Brake flexible hose retaining clip
Brake flexible hose bracket bolt
Brake flexible hose
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:07 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Rear Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is
spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
2. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and discard the 2 copper washers.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
To install, tighten to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft).
4. Remove the brake flexible hose retaining clip.
5. Remove the brake hose bracket bolt and the brake hose.
To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Bleed the brake caliper. For additional information, refer to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article for component bleeding.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:06:07 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE
Starting System - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Starter motor bolt
Starter motor solenoid battery cable nut
Starter motor solenoid wire nut
Starter motor stud bolt
Transmission manual control lever nut
Nm
27
12
5
27
18
lb-ft
20
9
20
13
lb-in
44
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
STARTING SYSTEM
The starting system consists of the following:
Starter motor
Starter motor relay
Transmission range (TR) sensor
Battery
Ignition switch
PCM
Start diode
When the starter solenoid is energized, a magnetic field is created in the starter solenoid windings. The iron
plunger core is drawn into the starter solenoid coil, and a drive lever and pin connected to the starter drive
engages the drive pinion gear to the flexplate ring gear. When the plunger is pulled all the way in, its contact
disc closes the circuit between the battery and the motor feed terminals. This sends current to the motor, and the
drive pinion gear cranks the flexplate to start the engine. When current flows to the starter motor, the starter
solenoid pull-in coil is bypassed, and the hold-in coil keeps the drive pinion gear engaged with the flexplate.
An overrunning clutch in the starter drive protects the starter motor from excessive speeds during the brief
period before the driver releases the ignition switch from the START position as the engine starts.
The starting system uses a TR sensor located in the transmission. The TR sensor prevents operation of the
starter motor unless NEUTRAL or PARK is selected. The vehicle has one-touch integrated start (OTIS), a
computer-assisted cranking system. This feature assists in starting the engine. If the ignition key is turned to the
START position and released when the engine begins cranking, the engine may continue cranking for up to 10
seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:17
11:41:13 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
One-Touch Integrated Start (OTIS)
Once the ignition is turned to the START position and the vehicle is in NEUTRAL or PARK, the PCM reads
starter motor request (SMR) from the ignition switch and gains control of the starter engagement. The customer
is no longer in the loop after the initial crank request, the customer may release the key to the RUN/START
position. The PCM will disengage the starter motor based on the following events:
The engine is started (RPM threshold)
A set time has been exceeded (calibrated)
The ignition key has been turned to the OFF position
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
STARTING SYSTEM
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
73III Automotive Meter
Tool Number
105-R0057 or equivalent
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Principles of Operation
The starting system is electronically controlled by the passive anti-theft system (PATS). PATS is controlled by
the instrument cluster. PATS recognizes the correct electronically coded ignition key and the instrument cluster
sends a message to the PCM to provide a ground for the starter relay. The energized relay provides voltage to
the starter solenoid with the key in the START position, thereby allowing the starter motor to activate.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery before
disconnecting the starter motor battery terminal lead. If a tool is shorted
at the starter motor battery terminal, the tool can quickly heat enough to
cause a skin burn. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE:
The anti-theft system must be functioning correctly before a logical starting
system diagnosis can be carried out. Address anti-theft system concerns
before continuing.
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the starting system to duplicate the conditions.
2. Inspect to determine if any of the following mechanical or electrical concerns apply.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Starter motor
Starter motor bolts
Flexplate
Electrical
Battery
Open fuse
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 41 (30A)
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse 27 (20A)
Damaged wiring
harness
Starter relay
Anti-theft system
Loose or corroded
connections
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM.
If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to PCM DTC Chart or the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article.
If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to SYMPTOM CHART.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
PCM DTC CHART
DTC
Description
P0512
Starter Request Circuit - Circuit has
Power With the Ignition in the OFF
Position
Source
PCM
P0705
TR Sensor Circuit Failure
PCM
P0706
TR Sensor Circuit Failure
PCM
P0708
TR Sensor Circuit Failure
PCM
P0709
TR Sensor Circuit Failure
PCM
Action
CARRY OUT the Ignition Switch
Component Test. Refer to
COMPONENT TESTING. If
necessary, INSTALL a new ignition
switch. If the ignition switch passed
the component test, REPAIR circuit
CDC35 (BU/WH) for a short to
power.
Refer to the appropriate Automatic
Transmission article for the procedure.
Refer to the appropriate Automatic
Transmission article for the procedure.
Refer to the appropriate Automatic
Transmission article for the procedure.
Refer to the appropriate Automatic
Transmission article for the procedure.
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Source
Action
B1213
Anti-Theft Number of
Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
Programmed Keys is
- PASSIVE ANTIBelow Minimum
THEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
B1342
B1600
B1601
B1602
B1681
B2103
B2141
B2431
U0100
ECU is Defective
Instrument Cluster/PCM INSTALL a PCM. REFER
to ELECTRONIC
ENGINE CONTROLS
article.
Passive Anti-Theft
Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
- PASSIVE ANTISystem (PATS) Key
Transponder Signal is Not
THEFT SYSTEM
Received
(PATS) article.
PATS Received Incorrect Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
Key-Code From Ignition
- PASSIVE ANTIKey Transponder
THEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
PATS Received Invalid Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
Format of Key-Code
- PASSIVE ANTIFrom Ignition Key
THEFT SYSTEM
Transponder
(PATS) article.
PATS Transceiver
Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
Module Signal is Not
- PASSIVE ANTIReceived
THEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
Antenna Not Connected Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
- PASSIVE ANTITHEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
NVM Configuration
Instrument Cluster/PCM There is no PCM ID stored
Failure
in the instrument cluster.
CARRY OUT a parameter
reset of the instrument
cluster and PCM, then
CYCLE the ignition and
make an attempt to start
the vehicle. REFER to
Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) Parameter Reset in
ANTI-THEFT PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (PATS) article.
Transponder
Instrument Cluster/PCM VERIFY if the correct
Programming Failed
PATS key is being used. If
the PATS key is defective,
use a new key for
programming. REFER to
ANTI-THEFT PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (PATS) article.
Lost Communication
Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
With ECM/PCM
U2510
Antenna Not Connected
- PASSIVE ANTITHEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
Instrument Cluster/PCM If DTC U2511 is not
present also, CARRY OUT
a parameter reset of the
instrument cluster and the
PCM and CYCLE the
ignition 3-5 times, making
an attempt to start the
vehicle each key cycle.
REFER to ANTI-THEFT
- PASSIVE ANTITHEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
Symptom Chart
SYMPTOM CHART
Condition
Possible Sources
The engine does not crank
One-touch integrated start
(OTIS) does not operate
correctly
The engine cranks slowly
Unusual starter noise
The starter spins but the
engine does not crank
Action
Battery
Fuse(s)
Starter motor
Circuitry
PCM
Starter motor relay
Ignition switch
Start diode
Anti-theft system
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Circuitry
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Battery
Starter motor
Circuitry
CARRY OUT the Starter
Motor Component Test.
Starter motor mounting
Starter motor
Incorrect starter drive
engagement
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Starter motor
INSPECT the starter motor
mounting and engagement.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
REPAIR as necessary.
-
Damaged flexplate teeth
INSPECT the flexplate for
damaged, missing or worn
teeth. REPAIR as necessary.
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Engine Does Not Crank
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Starting System schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, constant power is supplied to the starter motor relay from the battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 41 (30A). When the ignition switch is turned in the START position and held, with the vehicle in
PARK or NEUTRAL, power flows to the starter motor relay through CDC35 (BU/WH). A ground is supplied
through circuit CDC12 (YE) from the PCM causing the starter motor relay coil to energize and the relay
contacts close. This allows power to be supplied from the starter motor relay contacts which then flows through
circuit CDC25 (BN/GN) to the starter solenoid. The solenoid is grounded at the starter motor. Energizing the
starter solenoid will engage the starter drive into the ring gear and closes the solenoid contacts allowing power
directly from the battery through circuit SDC02 (RD) to the starter motor to start the engine.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Battery
Anti-theft system
Starter relay
Ignition switch
Circuitry
PCM
Start diode
PINPOINT TEST A: THE ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK
A1 CHECK THE BATTERY
Check the battery condition and charge. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND CABLES
article.
Is the battery OK?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : CHARGE or INSTALL a new battery as necessary. REFER to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A2 CHECK FOR PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) DTCs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Passive anti-theft system (PATS) DTCs are the only DTCs of concern
in this step. Only repair retrieved non-PATS DTCs if a customer
concern is reported.
Check for PATS DTCs.
Were any PATS DTCs retrieved?
YES : REFER to ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article to
diagnose the PATS DTCs.
NO : Go to A3.
A3 CHECK THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE
Fig. 1: Checking Battery Ground Cable
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the positive battery post and the battery ground cable connection at
the engine.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : INSTALL a new battery ground cable. REFER to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A4 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR GROUND
Fig. 2: Checking Starter Motor Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between the positive battery post and the starter motor case.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : CLEAN the starter motor mounting flange and make sure the starter motor is correctly
mounted. TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY TO THE STARTER MOTOR
Fig. 3: Checking Power Supply To Starter Motor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between starter motor C197A, circuit SDC02 (RD) and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A6.
NO : INSTALL a new positive battery cable. REFER to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A6 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR B-PIN
Fig. 4: Checking Starter Motor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect one end of a fused (30A) jumper wire to starter motor solenoid C197A, circuit SDC02
(RD). Momentarily connect the other end of the jumper to starter motor C197B, circuit CDC25
(BN/GN).
Did the starter motor engage and the engine crank?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to A7.
NO : INSTALL a new starter motor. REFER to STARTER MOTOR. TEST the system for
normal operation.
A7 CHECK STARTER MOTOR RELAY POWER
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements.
Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
Disconnect: Starter Motor Relay
Fig. 5: Measuring Voltage Between BJB Starter Relay Pin 30, Circuit SDC02 (RD) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between battery junction box (BJB) starter motor relay pin 30, harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A8.
NO : REPAIR or REPLACE the BJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
A8 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR RELAY
Carry out the Starter Motor Relay Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the starter motor relay pass the component test?
YES : Go to A9.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new starter motor relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
A9 CHECK THE CIRCUIT TO THE STARTER MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Starter Motor Solenoid C197B
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance Between BJB Starter Relay Pin 87, Circuit CDC25 (BN/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between starter motor solenoid S-terminal C197B, circuit CDC25 (BN/GN),
harness side and the BJB starter motor relay pin 87, circuit CDC25 (BN/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A10.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC25 (BN/GN). TEST the system for normal operation.
A10 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) FOR VOLTAGE
Connect: Starter Motor Solenoid C197B
Connect: Starter Motor Relay
Disconnect: Starter Diode
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between BJB starter diode cell, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH) and ground with the
ignition switch in the START position.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A13.
NO : Go to A11.
A11 CHECK CIRCUIT SBP27 (BU/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Ignition Switch C250
Fig. 8: Measuring Voltage Between Ignition Switch C250--4 And SBP27 (BU/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ignition switch C250-4, circuit SBP27 (BU/RD), harness side and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A12.
NO : REPAIR circuit SBP27 (BU/RD). TEST the system for normal operation.
A12 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH
Carry out the Ignition Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the ignition switch pass the component test?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new ignition switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article.
TEST the system for normal operation.
A13 CHECK THE STARTER DIODE
Fig. 9: Identifying Starter Diode
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Carry out a Starter Diode Test.
Is the starter diode open or shorted?
YES : INSTALL a new starter diode. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to A14.
A14 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR RELAY ENABLE (STRT_RLY) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID STRT_RLY with the ignition switch in the START position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Does the PID change from DISABLED to ENABLED?
YES : Go to A17.
NO : Go to A15.
A15 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) BETWEEN THE BJB AND THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Starter Relay
Disconnect: PCM C175B
Disconnect: Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280B
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance Between BJB Starter Motor Relay Pin 85 And PCM C175b-35
Circuit CDC35
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the BJB starter motor relay pin 85, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH),
harness side and PCM C175b-35, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A16.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). TEST the system for normal operation.
A16 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) BETWEEN THE BJB AND THE SJB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance Between BJB Starter Motor Relay Pin 85 And SJB C2280B-32
Circuit CDC35
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the BJB starter motor relay pin 85, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH),
harness side and SJB C2280B-32, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
A17 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT DETECTED (SMC_MON) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID SMC_MON with the ignition switch in the START position.
Does the PID change from OFF to ON?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC12 (YE). TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test B: One-Touch Integrated Start (OTIS) Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Starting System schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
When the ignition switch is turned in the START position and released, the PCM receives a starter motor
request (SMR) signal through circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). With the vehicle in PARK or NEUTRAL, power flows
from the PCM to the starter motor relay through circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). A ground is supplied through circuit
CDC12 (YE) from the PCM causing the starter motor relay coil to energize and the relay contacts close. This
allows power from starter motor relay through circuit CDC25 (BN/GN) to the starter solenoid. The solenoid is
grounded at the starter motor. Energizing the starter solenoid will engage the starter drive into the ring gear and
closes the solenoid contacts allowing power directly from the battery through circuit SDC02 (RD) to the starter
motor to start the engine. The customer is no longer in the loop after the initial crank request, the customer may
release the key to the RUN/START position. The PCM will disengage the starter motor based on engine
running (rpm threshold), a set crank time has been exceeded or the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF
position.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Circuitry
PCM
PINPOINT TEST B: ONE-TOUCH INTEGRATED START (OTIS) DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY
B1 CHECK THE STATUS OF ONE-TOUCH INTEGRATED START (OTIS) (OTS_STAT) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID OTS_STAT with the ignition switch in the RUN position.
Is the OTIS PID enabled?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : ENABLE OTIS. TEST the system for normal operation. If OTIS will not enable, INSTALL a
new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST the system for
normal operation.
B2 CHECK THE KEY POSITION FOR START INDICATED (START_KEY) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID START_KEY with the ignition switch in the START position.
Does the PID change from OFF to ON?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : Go to B3.
B3 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH)
Disconnect: Start Diode
Disconnect: PCM C175B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance Between Start Diode Cell Circuit CDC35 And PCM C175B-35
Circuit CDC35
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the start diode cell, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side and
PCM C175B-35, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). TEST the system for normal operation.
B4 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR RELAY ENABLE (STRT_RLY) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID STRT_RLY with the ignition switch in the START position.
Does the PID change from DISABLED to ENABLED?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : Go to B5.
B5 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) BETWEEN THE BJB AND THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: PCM C175B
Disconnect: SJB C2280B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance Between BJB Starter Motor Relay Pin 85 And PCM C175b-35
Circuit CDC35
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the BJB starter motor relay pin 85, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH),
harness side and PCM C175b-35, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). TEST the system for normal operation.
B6 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT DETECTED (SMC_MON) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID SMC_MON with the ignition switch in the START position.
Does the PID change from OFF to ON?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC12 (YE). TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test C: Unusual Starter Noise
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Starter motor
Ring gear
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST C: UNUSUAL STARTER NOISE
C1 CHECK THE STARTER MOUNTING
Inspect the starter mounting bolts for looseness.
Is the starter motor mounted correctly?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : INSTALL the starter motor correctly. REFER to STARTER MOTOR. TEST the system for
normal operation.
C2 CHECK FOR ENGINE NOISE
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 14: Inspecting Starter Motor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a remote starter switch between the starter solenoid B- and S-terminals.
Engage the starter motor and verify the noise is due to the starter operation.
Is the noise due to the starter motor engagement?
YES : Go to C3.
NO : REFER to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to continue
diagnosis.
C3 CHECK FOR UNUSUAL WEAR
Remove the starter motor.
Inspect the ring gear for damaged or worn teeth. Refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
Is the noise due to ring gear tooth damage?
YES : INSTALL a new flexplate ring gear. REFER to ENGINE - 3.5L article. EXAMINE the
starter pinion teeth. If damaged, INSTALL a new starter motor. REFER to Starter Motor. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new starter motor. REFER to STARTER MOTOR. TEST the system for
normal operation.
Component Tests
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery before
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
disconnecting the starter motor battery terminal lead. If a tool is shorted
at the starter motor battery terminal, the tool can quickly heat enough to
cause a skin burn. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
Always make the 73III Automotive Meter connections at the component terminal rather than at the wiring end
connector. Making a connection at the wiring end connector could result in false readings because the meter
will not pick up a high resistance between the wiring connector and the component.
Starter Motor - Motor Feed Circuit
1. Make sure the battery is fully charged; carry out a battery load test. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch.
3. Connect a remote starter switch between the starter solenoid S-terminal and the battery positive (+)
terminal.
4. Connect the 73III Automotive Meter positive lead to the battery positive (+) post. Connect the negative
lead to the starter solenoid M-terminal.
Fig. 15: Identifying S, M & B Terminals, 73III Automotive Meter, Battery, Remote Starter Switch
& Motor Feed Circuit
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part Number
10653
-
Description
S-terminal
Remote starter switch
Battery
73III Automotive Meter
B-terminal
M-terminal
5. Engage the remote starter switch. Read and record the voltage. The voltage reading should be 0.5 volt or
less.
6. If the voltage reading is 0.5 volt or less, go to the starter motor-ground circuit component test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
7. If the voltage reading is greater than 0.5 volt, this is an indication of excessive resistance in the
connections, the positive battery cable or in the starter solenoid. Move the 73III Automotive Meter
negative lead to the starter solenoid B-terminal and repeat the test. If the voltage reading at the B-terminal
is lower than 0.5 volt, the concern is either in the connections at the starter solenoid or in the solenoid
contacts.
Fig. 16: Identifying S, M & B Terminals, 73III Automotive Meter, Battery & Remote Starter
Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part Number
10653
-
Description
S-terminal
Remote starter switch
Battery
73III Automotive Meter
B-terminal
M-terminal
8. Remove the cables from solenoid B-, S- and M-terminals. Clean the cables and connections and reinstall
the cables to the correct terminals. Repeat Steps 3 through 6. If the voltage drop reading is still greater
than 0.5 volt when checked at the M-terminal or less than 0.5 volt when checked at the B-terminal, the
concern is in the solenoid contacts. Install a new starter motor.
9. If the voltage reading taken at the solenoid B-terminal is still greater than 0.5 volt after cleaning the
cables and connections at the solenoid, the concern is either in the positive (+) battery cable connection or
in the positive battery cable itself.
10. Clean the positive (+) battery cable connection. If this does not solve the problem, install a new positive
battery cable.
Starter Motor - Ground Circuit
A slow cranking condition can be caused by resistance in the ground or return portion of the cranking circuit.
Check the voltage drop in the ground circuit as follows:
1. Connect the 73III Automotive Meter positive lead to the starter motor housing (the connection must be
clean and free of rust or grease). Connect the negative lead to the negative (-) battery terminal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
2. Engage the remote starter switch and crank the engine. Read and record the voltage reading. The reading
should be 0.2 volt or less.
3. If the voltage drop is more than 0.2 volt, clean the negative cable connections at the battery, the body
ground connections and the starter ground connection. Retest.
4. If the voltage drop is greater than 0.2 volt, install a new cable. If the voltage reading is less than 0.2 volt
and the engine still cranks slowly, install a new starter motor.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
STARTER MOTOR
Fig. 17: Exploded View Of Starter Motor Components With Torque Specification (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7E395
7H181
3
4
W520103
7A257
Description
Transmission shift cable adjustment lock
Transmission shift cable rotating slide
snap
Transmission manual control lever nut
Transmission manual control lever
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Exploded View Of Starter Motor Components With Torque Specifications (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
5
Part Number
11N087
6
7
W706414
14463
8
9
N805320
14463
10
11
12
13
13A506
W711515
W503320
11000
Description
Starter motor solenoid battery cable
terminal cover
Starter motor solenoid battery cable nut
Starter motor solenoid battery cable (part
of 14B060)
Starter motor solenoid wire nut
Starter motor solenoid wire (part of
14B060)
Wire harness retainer (part of 14B060)
Starter motor stud bolt
Starter motor bolt
Starter motor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery before
disconnecting the starter motor battery terminal lead. If a tool is shorted
at the starter motor battery terminal, the tool can quickly heat enough to
cause a skin burn. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
2. Remove the air cleaner. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION AND
FILTERING article.
3. Disconnect the transmission shift cable and adjustment lock from the transmission manual control lever.
4. Disconnect the transmission shift cable rotating slide snap and position aside the transmission cable.
5. Remove the nut and the transmission manual control lever.
To install, tighten to 18 N.m (13 lb-ft).
6. Remove the starter motor terminal cover.
7. Remove the starter motor solenoid battery cable nut.
To install, tighten to 12 N.m (9 lb-ft).
8. Remove the starter motor solenoid wire nut.
To install, tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
9. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the starter motor stud bolt and position the wiring harness aside.
10. Remove the starter motor bolt, stud bolt and the starter.
To install, tighten to 27 N.m (20 lb-ft).
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:13 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
2008 TRANSMISSIONS
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
WSL-M2C192-A
Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL (US); CXY75W140-1L (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium WSP-M2C197-A
Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL (US); CXY80W90-1L (Canada)
Fill Capacity
530 ml
(18 oz)a
1.15L
(2.43 pt)b
a Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
b Rear Drive Unit (RDU)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
4X4 control module nut
N.m
7
lb-in
62
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) SYSTEMS
The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system consists of the following:
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Rear driveshaft
4X4 control module (coupling device control module) (located behind the RH side instrument panel)
Rear axle with coupling device
Torque from the engine is transferred through the transaxle to the PTU. This torque is transferred from the
driveshaft to the rear axle, which drives the rear halfshafts. The AWD system, referred to as an Active Torque
Coupling (ATC) system, is always active and requires no driver input.
The AWD system continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the torque distribution
between the front and rear wheels. During normal operation, most of the torque is delivered to the front wheels.
If wheel slip between the front and rear wheels is detected, or if the vehicle is under heavy acceleration, the
AWD system increases torque to the rear wheels to prevent or control wheel slip.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:35
10:52:32 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Serviceable components of the PTU are limited to the output shaft seal and flange, intermediate shaft seal and
deflector, and the PTU-transaxle compression seal. No internal components are serviced. There should be no
need to remove the PTU cover. If any of the internal geared components, bearings, case cover or shafts are worn
or damaged, a new PTU must be installed.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) SYSTEMS - ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
73III Automotive Meter
Tool Number
105-R0057 or equivalent
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C
Vehicle Communication Module software with appropriate
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic hardware, or equivalent scan tool
System (IDS)
Principles of Operation
The vehicle is equipped with a four wheel drive (4WD) system, also referred to as active torque control
coupling (ATCC) or intelligent torque control coupling (ITCC) , that is always active and requires no driver
input. The system has no mode select switch. The system combines transparent all-surface operation with all
wheel drive (AWD), and is capable of handling all road conditions, including street and highway driving as well
as off-road and winter driving.
The system continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the torque distribution between
the front and rear wheels. During normal operation, most of the torque is sent to the front wheels. If wheel slip
between the front and rear wheels is detected, or if the vehicle is under heavy acceleration (high-throttle
position), the AWD system increases torque to the rear wheels to prevent or control wheel slip.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
The system consists of a power transfer unit (PTU), 4X4 control module, rear axle and a solenoid-actuated
ATCC device. The module varies the torque sent to the rear wheels by controlling the current sent to the clutch
located inside the rear axle.
The 4X4 control module also provides the brake system with its current clutch duty cycle and whether or not
the brake system may take command of the clutch duty cycle.
NOTE:
The ATCC solenoid is not repairable. If a new component is required, the ATCC
solenoid and rear axle are installed as an assembly. Refer to REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
The PTU is a gearbox that attaches to the transaxle. The RH intermediate shaft passes through the PTU and
engages the differential side gear as in normal front wheel drive (FWD) applications. The transaxle differential
drives the PTU. The PTU then drives the driveshaft at all times. The driveshaft drives one half of the rear axle
clutch pack. The other half of the rear axle clutch pack drives the rear axle ring and pinion.
The active, on-demand AWD system uses data from other systems as inputs to the 4X4 control module. The
4X4 control module uses the inputs to determine the appropriate amount of current to send to the ATCC
solenoid that delivers the desired torque to the rear wheels. Specific inputs to the 4X4 control module are:
Accelerator pedal position via the high-speed controller area network (HS-CAN)
Transaxle range from the PCM via the HS-CAN
Brake system status from the ABS module via the HS-CAN
Wheel speed from all 4 wheels from the ABS module via the HS-CAN
4X4 control module outputs are:
Solid-state clutch (pulse-width modulated signal) to the ATCC solenoid
Percent of torque transfer commanded signal to the ABS module via the HS-CAN
Torque request available signal to the ABS module via the HS-CAN
Heat Protection Mode - During very extreme off-road operation, the AWD system utilizes a heat protection
mode to protect the active torque control coupling (ATCC) solenoid (part of rear axle) from damage. If the
system detects an overheat condition, it enters a locked mode. If the heat in the system continues to rise once in
the locked mode, the 4X4 control module disables the ATCC solenoid. Allow the system to cool down at least
10 minutes with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Active torque control
coupling (ATCC)
solenoid (part of rear
axle)
Power transfer unit
(PTU)
Rear drive unit (RDU)
Halfshafts and CV
joints
Driveshaft and U-joints
Fluid leaks
Wheel/tire size and
brand
Matching tire size and
brand
Tire pressure
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse(s):
11 (10A)
35 (10A)
4X4 control module
Wiring harness
Connector(s)
Circuitry
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the 4X4 control module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the 4X4 Control Module DTC Chart. For all other
DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to SYMPTOM CHART - FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) SYSTEMS table.
DTC Charts
4X4 CONTROL MODULE DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Possible Causes
B1317
Battery Voltage
Generator
High
B1318
Battery Voltage
Blown fuse (B+)
Low
Intermittent open
on power circuit
4X4 control
module connector
B1342
ECU is Faulted
Microprocessor or
internal memory
fault
B2900
VIN Mismatch
P1635
Tire/Axle Out of
Acceptable Range
P1824
4-Wheel Drive
Clutch Relay
Circuit Failure
P1825
4-Wheel Drive
Source
Action
4X4 Control Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Module
4X4 Control CHECK smart junction box
Module
(SJB) fuses 11 (10A) and 35
(10A). If fuses are OK, go to
Pinpoint Test B .
4X4 Control CLEAR the DTCs.
Module
REPEAT the self-test. If
DTC B1342 is retrieved
again, INSTALL a new 4X4
control module. REFER to
4X4 CONTROL
MODULE.
4X4 Control CHECK the PCM
Incorrect VIN
Module
configuration. REFER to
codes received
MODULE
from PCM
CONFIGURATION
article.
4X4 Control Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Incorrect size tire
Module
installed on vehicle
Wheel speed
sensor failure
Flat or underinflated tire
Short to ground on 4X4 Control CHECK SJB fuse 11 (10A).
Module
If the fuse is OK, go to
active torque
Pinpoint Test E .
control coupling
(ATCC) solenoid
(part of rear axle)
high circuit
4X4 control
module failure
4X4 Control CHECK SJB fuses 11 (10A)
4X4 control
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Clutch Relay Open
Circuit
U0100
Lost
Communication
with ECM/PCM
U0121
U0155
U0401
Lost
Communication
with Anti-lock
Brake System
(ABS) Control
Module
Lost
Communication
with Instrument
Cluster (IC)
Control Module
Invalid Data
Received From
module harness
connector
Open in ATCC
solenoid (part of
rear axle) low
circuit
Open in ATCC
solenoid high
circuit
Short to ground on
ATCC solenoid
low circuit
Short to ground on
ATCC solenoid
high circuit
Open coil inside
ATCC solenoid
Short to voltage in
ATCC solenoid
low circuit
4X4 control
module failure
Module
and 35 (10A). If the fuses
are OK, go to Pinpoint Test
E.
4X4 Control Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Controller area
Module
network (CAN)
bus fault
No data received
by 4X4 control
module from PCM
4X4 Control Go to Pinpoint Test D .
CAN bus fault
Module
No data received
by 4X4 control
module from ABS
control module
4X4 Control
High-speed
Module
controller area
network (HS-CAN)
fault
No data received
from the IC by the
4X4 control
module
4X4 Control
Invalid data
Module
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article to
diagnose the lost
communication with the IC.
REFER to
INTRODUCTION -
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
ECM/PCM A
U0415
U2050
Invalid Data
Received From
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Control Module
No Application
Present
U2051
One or More
Calibration Files
Missing/Corrupt
received from
PCM
Data out of range
GASOLINE ENGINES
article to diagnose the
accelerator position, engine
coolant or keep alive
memory fault.
4X4 Control Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Invalid data
Module
received from ABS
module
Data out of range
Application
software is not
present
Application
software update
failed
4X4 control
module failed
Calibration
software not
present
Calibration
software update
failed
4X4 control
module failed
4X4 Control CONFIGURE the 4X4
Module
control module. REFER to
MODULE
CONFIGURATION article
to CARRY OUT
programmable module
installation (PMI). CLEAR
the DTCs. RETRIEVE the
DTCs and VERIFY
successful module
configuration. If DTC
U2050 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new 4X4
control module. REFER to
4X4 CONTROL
MODULE. REPEAT the
self-test.
4X4 Control CONFIGURE the 4X4
Module
control module. REFER to
MODULE
CONFIGURATION article
to CARRY OUT PMI.
CLEAR the DTCs.
RETRIEVE the DTCs and
VERIFY successful module
configuration. If DTC
U2050 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new 4X4
control module. REFER to
4X4 CONTROL
MODULE. REPEAT the
self-test.
Symptom Chart - Four Wheel Drive (4WD) System
SYMPTOM CHART - FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) SYSTEM
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
The concern is
unverifiable; no
DTCs present
The concern
description is
inaccurate
CARRY OUT the All Wheel Drive (AWD)
System Functional Test. Go to Pinpoint
Test A .
The power transfer
unit (PTU) makes
noise
Tire inflation
pressure
Tire and wheel
size
MAKE SURE all tires and wheels are the
same size and brand and the inflation
pressures are correct.
Fluid level
FILL with the correct type and amount of
lubricant. REFER to TRANSFER CASE POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
article.
Internal
components
OPERATE the vehicle in all gears. If there
is noise in the transaxle in NEUTRAL, or in
some gears and not in others, REMOVE and
REPAIR the transaxle. REFER to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50
article. If there is noise in all gears,
INSTALL a new PTU. REFER to
TRANSFER CASE - POWER
TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) article.
Concern with
voltage regulator
or generator
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse 11
(10A)
SJB fuse 35 (10A)
Intermittent open
power circuit
4X4 control
module internal
relay failure
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Invalid data
received from
PCM
Data out of range
REFER to INTRODUCTION GASOLINE ENGINES article to diagnose
the accelerator position, engine coolant or
keep alive memory fault.
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
4X4 control module
battery voltage is
high or low
4X4 control module
received no/invalid
data from PCM
4X4 control module
received no/invalid
data from ABS
module
Invalid data
received from the
ABS module
Data out of range
High-speed controller
HS-CAN bus fault
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
area network (HSCAN)
communications bus
fault
Vehicle has no or
inadequate torque at
rear wheels
Rear axle
REFER to REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
PTU mechanical
failure
REFER to TRANSFER CASE - POWER
TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) article.
Wheels/tires
Active torque
control coupling
(ATCC) solenoid
(part of rear axle)
SJB fuse(s):
11 (10A)
35 (10A)
4X4 control
module
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Circuitry
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Wheels/tires
REFER to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
Brake system
REFER to BRAKE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Wheel bearings
REFER to SUSPENSION SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Halfshafts
REFER to DRIVELINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Wheel speed
sensor(s)
REFER to VEHICLE DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
ABS module
REFER to VEHICLE DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
4X4 control
module
ATCC solenoid
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Vehicle binds in a
turn or resists
turning/pulsates or
shudders in a straight
line
PCM fault
ABS fault
Instrument cluster
(IC) fault
4X4 control
module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Tire/axle out of
acceptable operating
range
(part of rear axle)
Circuitry
Wheels/tires
Wheel speed
sensors
ABS module
4X4 control
module
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: All Wheel Drive (AWD) System Functional Test
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for All Wheel Drive (AWD) schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The all wheel drive (AWD) system continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the
torque distribution between the front and rear wheels. During normal operation, most of the torque is delivered
to the front wheels. If wheel slip between the front and rear wheels is detected, or if the vehicle is under heavy
acceleration, the AWD system increases torque to the rear wheels to prevent or control wheel slip.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
An AWD system concern without on-demand or continuous DTCs present.
PINPOINT TEST A: AWD SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST
NOTE:
This test must be carried out on a hard surface in an area without traffic.
NOTE:
Carry out Inspection and Verification as outlined before carrying out this
pinpoint test.
A1 CHECK FOR WRENCH LIGHT PROVE-OUT
Turn the ignition to the ON position and observe the wrench light.
Does the wrench light illuminate for 3 seconds and then turn OFF?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING
CHIMES article for further diagnosis of the instrument cluster (IC).
A2 CHECK FOR ACTIVE TORQUE CONTROL COUPLING (ATCC) SOLENOID (PART OF
REAR AXLE) LOCK
Drive the vehicle on a dry, hard surface in turns while applying the accelerator pedal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Is driveline wind-up present in turns?
YES : With the ignition switch in ON position, allow the ATCC solenoid to cool down for at least
10 minutes and repeat the test. CHECK for wind-up again. If no wind-up is found, go to A3; if still
present, go to Pinpoint Test F .
NO : Go to A3.
A3 CHECK FOR VALID ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION MONITORING THE
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (AP) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - 4X4 Control Module
Monitor the AP PID while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Does the accelerator pedal position match the AP PID percent value?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : REFER to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article to diagnose the
accelerator pedal position sensor concern.
A4 CHECK 4X4 CONTROL MODULE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR PIDs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - 4X4 Control Module
While driving the vehicle at 48 km/h (30 mph), monitor the following wheel speed sensor PIDs:
Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor (LF_WSPD)
Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (LR_WSPD)
Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor (RF_WSPD)
Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (RR_WSPD)
Are all 4 wheel speeds within 3 km/h (1.8 mph) of each other?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test G .
A5 CHECK VEHICLE ACCELERATION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
Carry out 3 accelerations from 0-48 km/h (0-30 mph) in a straight line (one each with low, medium
and full accelerator pedal application).
Does the vehicle pulsate or shudder while accelerating?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test F .
NO : Go to A6.
A6 CHECK VEHICLE TURNING ABILITY
Drive the vehicle in a fully locked turn, on dry pavement, at 8 km/h (5 mph).
Does the vehicle bind in the turn or resist turning?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test F .
NO : Go to A7.
A7 CHECK FOR TORQUE AT REAR WHEELS USING PWM OUTPUT CONTROL
COMMAND #1 (CLCH_SOL) ACTIVE COMMAND
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - 4X4 Control Module
Using the scan tool, command CLCH_SOL to energize the ATCC solenoid to a constant 100%
applied.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Drive the vehicle in a fully locked turn, on dry pavement, at 8 km/h (5 mph).
Does the vehicle bind in the turn or resist turning?
YES : End the active command. The concern cannot be duplicated at this time. RETURN the
vehicle to the customer.
NO : End the active command. CHECK that the driveshaft rotates when the transaxle is in gear. If
yes, go to Pinpoint Test E . If no, CHECK the PTU. REFER to TRANSFER CASE - POWER
TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) article.
Pinpoint Test B: 4X4 Control Module Battery Voltage is High or Low
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for All Wheel Drive (AWD) schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
If the 4X4 control module observes an overpower or underpower voltage condition, DTCs are set and the 4X4
control module may not allow 4WD operation.
DTC B1317 Battery Voltage High - When the 4X4 control module detects battery voltage greater than 16
volts for at least 10 seconds or ignition run/start voltage greater than 16 volts for at least one second, this
DTC is set.
DTC B1318 Battery Voltage Low - When the 4X4 control module detects battery voltage less than 9
volts for at least 10 seconds or ignition run/start voltage less than 9 volts for at least one second with the
engine running at 1,500 RPM or greater, this DTC is set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuses
Charging/battery system
4X4 control module
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PINPOINT TEST B: 4X4 CONTROL MODULE BATTERY VOLTAGE IS HIGH OR LOW
NOTE:
Carry out Inspection and Verification as outlined before carrying out this
pinpoint test.
B1 CHECK FOR HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE MONITORING THE MODULE SUPPLY
VOLTAGE (VBAT_4X4) PID
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - 4X4 Control Module
Monitor the battery voltage VBAT_4X4 PID.
Is the battery voltage greater than 16 volts?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
YES : REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article for diagnosis of
the battery and charging system.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 CHECK FOR LOW VOLTAGE MONITORING THE MODULE SUPPLY VOLTAGE
(VBAT_4X4) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - 4X4 Control Module
Monitor the battery voltage VBAT_4X4 PID.
Is the battery voltage less than 9 volts?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : Go to B3.
B3 CHECK FOR A BLOWN FUSE
Check the following smart junction box (SJB) fuses:
11 (10A).
35 (10A).
Are the fuses open?
YES : INSTALL a new fuse(s). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to B4.
B4 CHECK FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE AT THE BATTERY
Measure the voltage between the battery positive terminal and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article for diagnosis of
the battery and charging system.
B5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD140 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C281
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-15, circuit GD140 (BK/GN), harness
side and ground.
Fig. 1: Checking Circuit GD126 (BK/WH) For An Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Repeat this measurement while wiggling the harness.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
B6 CHECK POWER TO THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 2: Checking 4X4 Control Module Power Circuits
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between 4X4 control module C281-6, circuit SBP11 (BU/RD), harness side
and ground; and between 4X4 control module C281-5, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and
ground.
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to B7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
B7 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE OPERATION
Disconnect the 4X4 control module.
Check the harness and component side connectors for:
corrosion.
pushed-out/bent pins.
Connect the 4X4 control module and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. REFER to 4X4 CONTROL MODULE. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test C: 4X4 Control Module Received No/Invalid Data From ABS Module
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for All Wheel Drive (AWD) schematic and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
connector information.
Normal Operation
The on-demand four wheel drive (4WD) system uses data from other systems as inputs to the 4X4 control
module. The 4X4 control module uses the inputs to determine the appropriate duty cycle to send to the active
torque control coupling (ATCC) (part of rear axle) solenoid that delivers the desired torque to the rear wheels.
Specific inputs to the 4X4 control module are: accelerator pedal position output from the PCM, transmission
range from the PCM, brake system status and all 4 wheel speeds from the ABS module. Communication
between the 4X4 control module and other modules is obtained through the high-speed controller area network
(HS-CAN). If the 4X4 control module loses communication with, or receives invalid data from any of the
necessary modules, DTCs are set and the 4X4 control module may not allow 4WD operation.
DTC U0415 Invalid Data Received from Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Control Module - When the 4X4
control module receives invalid HS-CAN bus data or invalid wheel speed(s) from the ABS module for
more than 30 seconds, this DTC is set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
ABS module
PINPOINT TEST C: 4X4 CONTROL MODULE RECEIVED NO/INVALID DATA FROM ABS
MODULE
NOTE:
This test must be carried out on a hard surface in an area without traffic.
NOTE:
Carry out Inspection and Verification as outlined before carrying out this
pinpoint test.
C1 CHECK FOR ABS MODULE DTCs
Key in ON position.
Carry out the ABS module self-test.
Review the results of the ABS module self-test.
Are any DTCs present?
YES : REFER to VEHICLE DYNAMIC SYSTEMS article for further diagnosis of the ABS.
NO : Go to C2.
C2 CHECK WHEEL SPEED SENSORS PIDs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - 4X4 Control Module
While driving the vehicle at 32 km/h (20 mph), monitor the following wheel speed sensor PIDs:
Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor (LF_WSPD)
Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (LR_WSPD)
Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor (RF_WSPD)
Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (RR_WSPD)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Do the 4 wheel speed sensors match the speedometer and are they within 3 km/h (1.8 mph) of
each other?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REFER to VEHICLE DYNAMIC SYSTEMS article for further diagnosis of the ABS.
Pinpoint Test D: High-Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communications Bus Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for All Wheel Drive (AWD) schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The on-demand four wheel drive (4WD) system uses data from other systems as inputs to the 4X4 control
module. The 4X4 control module uses the inputs to determine the appropriate duty cycle to send to the active
torque control coupling (ATCC) solenoid (part of rear axle) that delivers the desired torque to the rear wheels.
Specific inputs to the 4X4 control module are: accelerator pedal position output from the PCM, transmission
range from the PCM, brake system status and all 4 wheel speeds from the ABS module. Communication
between the 4X4 control module and other modules is obtained through the high-speed controller area network
(HS-CAN). If the 4X4 control module loses communication with, or receives invalid data from any of the
necessary modules, DTCs are set and the 4X4 control module may not allow 4WD operation.
DTC U0100 Lost Communication with ECM/PCM - When the 4X4 control module detects a missing HSCAN bus message from the PCM for at least 5 seconds, this DTC is set.
DTC U0121 Lost Communication with Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Control Module - When the 4X4
control module detects a missing HS-CAN bus message from the ABS module for at least 5 seconds, this
DTC is set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
4X4 control module
PCM
ABS module
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PINPOINT TEST D: HIGH-SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (HS-CAN)
COMMUNICATIONS BUS FAULT
NOTE:
Carry out Inspection and Verification as outlined before carrying out this
pinpoint test.
D1 CHECK HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) AND THE
4X4 CONTROL MODULE FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Checking High Speed Can Circuits Between DLC And 4X4 Control Module For An
Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-4, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness
side and DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side; and between 4X4 control module
C281-12, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness
side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D2.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. CARRY OUT the Network
Test.
D2 CHECK HS-CAN CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 4: Checking High Speed CAN Circuits For A Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-4, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness
side and ground; and between 4X4 control module C281-12, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side
and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 5,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. CARRY OUT the Network
Test.
D3 CHECK RESISTANCE BETWEEN HS-CAN CIRCUITS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Checking Resistance Between High Speed CAN Circuits
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The PCM and the instrument cluster (IC) must be connected and
operating correctly to obtain the correct resistance between the HSCAN circuits.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-4, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU) harness
side and 4X4 control module C281-12, circuit VDB05 (WH) harness side.
Is the resistance 60 ohms (± 5 ohms)?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. CARRY OUT the Network
Test.
D4 CHECK FOR DTCs U0100 AND U0121 SET TOGETHER
Key in ON position.
Carry out the 4X4 control module self-test.
Review the results of the 4X4 control module self-test.
Are DTCs U0100 and U0121 set together?
YES : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to continue diagnosis of
the communications network.
NO : Go to D5.
D5 CHECK FOR DTC U0100
Refer to the results of the 4X4 control module self-test.
Is DTC U0100 set?
YES : The PCM is not sending any data to the 4X4 control module. REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to for additional PCM diagnosis.
NO : Go to D6.
D6 CHECK FOR DTC U0121
Refer to the results of the 4X4 control module self-test.
Is DTC U0121 set?
YES : The ABS module is not sending any data to the 4X4 control module. REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article for additional ABS module diagnosis.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to D7.
D7 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the 4X4 control module.
Check the harness and component side connectors for:
corrosion.
pushed-out/bent pins.
Connect the 4X4 control module and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. REFER to 4X4 CONTROL MODULE. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test E: Vehicle Has No or Inadequate Torque at Rear Wheels
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for All Wheel Drive (AWD) schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The on-demand four wheel drive (4WD) system uses data from other systems as inputs to the 4X4 control
module. The 4X4 control module uses the inputs to determine the appropriate duty cycle to send to the active
torque control coupling (ATCC) solenoid (part of rear axle) that delivers the desired torque to the rear wheels. If
the 4X4 control module loses communication with, or receives invalid data from any of the necessary modules,
DTCs are set and the 4X4 control module may not allow 4WD operation.
DTC P1824 4-Wheel Drive Clutch Relay Circuit Failure - When the 4X4 control module detects a short
to ground on the ATCC solenoid feedback circuit, this DTC is set.
DTC P1825 4-Wheel Drive Clutch Relay Open Circuit - When the 4X4 control module detects an open or
short to ground on the ATCC solenoid command or feedback circuit for more than 2 seconds, this DTC is
set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Tire/axle out of range
ATCC solenoid (part of rear axle)
4X4 control module
Power transfer unit (PTU)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST E: VEHICLE HAS NO OR INADEQUATE TORQUE AT REAR WHEELS
NOTE:
Carry out Inspection and Verification as outlined before carrying out this
pinpoint test.
E1 CHECK FOR 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DTCs
Key in ON position.
Carry out the 4X4 control module self-test.
Are any DTCs received?
YES : For DTC P1824 or P1825, go to E5.
For all other DTCs, REFER to the 4X4 Control Module DTC Chart in this service information.
NO : Go to E2.
E2 CHECK HIGH-SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (HS-CAN) CIRCUITS
BETWEEN DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) AND 4X4 CONTROL MODULE FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C281
Fig. 6: Checking High Speed Can Circuits Between DLC And 4X4 Control Module For An
Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-4, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness
side and DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side; and between 4X4 control module
C281-12, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness
side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. CARRY OUT the Network
Test.
E3 CHECK HS-CAN CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Checking High Speed CAN Circuits For A Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-4, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness
side and ground; and between 4X4 control module C281-12, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side
and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 5,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. CARRY OUT the Network
Test.
E4 CHECK RESISTANCE BETWEEN HS-CAN CIRCUITS
Fig. 8: Checking Resistance Between High Speed CAN Circuits
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The PCM and the instrument cluster (IC) must be connected and
operating correctly to obtain the correct resistance between the HSCAN circuits.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-4, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU) harness
side and 4X4 control module C281-12, circuit VDB05 (WH) harness side.
Is the resistance 60 ohms (± 5 ohms)?
YES : Go to E5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. CARRY OUT the Network
Test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
E5 CHECK CIRCUITS CCF21 (VT/WH) AND RCF21 (WH/VT) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
WITH ATCC SOLENOID (PART OF REAR AXLE) CONNECTED
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C281
Fig. 9: Checking Circuits CCF21 (VT/WH) & RCF21 (WH/VT) For A Short To Ground
With ATC Solenoid Connected
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-8, circuit CCF21 (VT/WH), harness side
and ground; and between 4X4 control module C281-16, circuit RCF21 (WH/VT), harness side and
ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E8.
NO : Go to E6.
E6 CHECK CIRCUITS CCF21 (VT/WH) AND RCF21 (WH/VT) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
WITH C4004 DISCONNECTED
Disconnect: ATCC Solenoid Jumper Harness C4004
Fig. 10: Checking Circuits CCF21 (VT/WH) & RCF21 (WH/VT) For A Short To Ground
With ATC Solenoid Connected
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-8, circuit CCF21 (VT/WH), harness side
and ground; and between 4X4 control module C281-16, circuit RCF21 (WH/VT), harness side and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E7 CHECKING THE ATCC SOLENOID JUMPER HARNESS WIRES
NOTE:
The active torque control coupling (ATCC) solenoid jumper harness must
be secured to prevent damage to the wiring.
Disconnect: ATCC Solenoid C4347
Inspect the ATCC solenoid jumper harness for damage.
Is the ATCC solenoid jumper harness damaged?
YES : REPAIR or INSTALL a new ATCC solenoid jumper harness. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
NO : INSTALL a new rear axle assembly. REFER to REAR DRIVE AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL
article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E8 CHECK CIRCUITS CCF21 (VT/WH) AND RCF21 (WH/VT) FOR AN OPEN WITH ATCC
SOLENOID CONNECTED
Connect: ATCC Solenoid C4347 and ATCC Solenoid Jumper Harness C4004
Fig. 11: Checking Circuits CCF21 (VT/WH) & RCF21 (WH/VT) For An Open With ATC
Solenoid Connected
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-8, circuit CCF21 (VT/WH), harness side
and 4X4 control module C281-16, circuit RCF21 (WH/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 10 ohms?
YES : Go to E11.
NO : Go to E9.
E9 CHECK CIRCUITS CCF21 (VT/WH) AND RCF21 (WH/VT) FOR AN OPEN AT C4004
Disconnect: ATCC Solenoid Jumper Harness C4004
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance Between 4X4 Control Module C281-8, Circuit CCF21
(VT/WH) & ATCC solenoid jumper harness C4004-1, circuit CCF21 (VT/WH)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-8, circuit CCF21 (VT/WH), harness side
and ATCC solenoid jumper harness C4004-1, circuit CCF21 (VT/WH).
Repeat this measurement while wiggling the harness.
Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance Between 4X4 Control Module C281-16, Circuit RCF21
(WH/VT) & ATCC Solenoid Jumper Harness C4004-2, Circuit RCF21 (WH/VT)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-16, circuit RCF21 (WH/VT), harness
side and ATCC solenoid jumper harness C4004-2, circuit RCF21 (WH/VT), harness side.
Repeat this measurement while wiggling the harness.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E10.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E10 CHECK THE ATCC SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERNAL OPEN
NOTE:
The active torque control coupling (ATCC) solenoid jumper harness must
be secured to prevent damage to the wiring.
Disconnect: ATCC Solenoid C4347
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Checking ATC Solenoid Circuit For An Internal Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ATCC solenoid C4347-1, circuit CCF21 (VT/WH), component
side and ATCC solenoid C4347-2, circuit RCF21 (WH/VT), component side.
Repeat this measurement while wiggling the harness.
Is the resistance less than 10 ohms?
YES : REPAIR or INSTALL a new ATCC solenoid jumper harness. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
NO : INSTALL a new rear axle assembly. REFER to REAR DRIVE AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL
article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E11 CHECK CIRCUIT GD140 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 15: Checking Circuit GD126 (BK/WH) For An Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between 4X4 control module C281-15, circuit GD140 (BK/GN), harness
side and ground.
Repeat this measurement while wiggling the harness.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E12.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E12 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE POWER CIRCUITS
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Checking 4X4 Control Module Power Circuits
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between 4X4 control module C281-6, circuit SBP11 (BU/RD), harness side
and ground; and between 4X4 control module C281-5, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and
ground.
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to E13.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E13 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE OPERATION
Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C281
Check the harness and component side connectors for:
corrosion.
pushed-out/bent pins.
Check the ATCC solenoid jumper harness between the 4X4 control module and the ATCC
solenoid, located on the rear subframe.
Connect the 4X4 control module and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. REFER to 4X4 CONTROL MODULE. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test F: Vehicle Binds in a Turn or Resists Turning/Pulsates or Shudders in a Straight Line
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for All Wheel Drive (AWD) schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The all wheel drive (AWD) system continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the
torque distribution between the front and rear wheels. During normal operation, most of the torque is sent to the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
front wheels. If wheel slip between the front and rear wheels is detected or the vehicle is under heavy
acceleration, the AWD system increases torque to the rear wheels.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Rear axle
Wheels/tires
PCM
ABS module
4X4 control module
Circuitry
PINPOINT TEST F: VEHICLE BINDS IN A TURN OR RESISTS TURNING/PULSATES OR
SHUDDERS IN A STRAIGHT LINE
NOTE:
Carry out Inspection and Verification as outlined before carrying out this
pinpoint test.
F1 CHECK FOR TORQUE AT THE REAR WHEELS
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Active Torque Control Coupling (ATCC) Solenoid (Part of Rear Axle) C4347
Drive the vehicle in a straight line on dry pavement.
Is a pulsation or shudder still present?
YES : REFER to DRIVELINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article for additional
axle diagnosis.
NO : Go to F2.
F2 CHECK TO SEE IF THE ATCC SOLENOID IS BEING COMMANDED ON MONITORING
4WD CLUTCH PWM STATUS (4WDCPWMST) PID
Key in OFF position.
Connect: ATCC Solenoid C4347
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - 4X4 Control Module
Monitor the 4WDCPWMST PID.
Drive the vehicle no faster than 8 km/h (5 mph) in tight turns on dry pavement while monitoring
the ATCC solenoid duty cycle.
Is the duty cycle greater than 20%?
YES : Go to F3.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test G .
F3 CHECK FOR THE CORRECT WHEEL SPEEDS USING THE WHEEL SPEED SENSORS
PIDs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - 4X4 Control Module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
While driving the vehicle at 48 km/h (30 mph), monitor the following wheel speed sensor PIDs:
Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor (LF_WSPD)
Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (LR_WSPD)
Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor (RF_WSPD)
Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (RR_WSPD)
Are all 4 wheel speeds within 3 km/h (1.8 mph) of each other?
YES : Go to F4.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test G .
F4 CHECK FOR VALID ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION MONITORING
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (AP) PID
Key ON, engine OFF (KOEO).
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - 4X4 Control Module
Monitor AP PID while pressing/releasing the accelerator pedal.
Does the accelerator position match the PID percent value?
YES : Go to F5.
NO : REFER to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article to diagnose the engine
control system.
F5 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE OPERATION
Disconnect the 4X4 control module.
Check the harness and component side connectors for:
corrosion.
pushed-out/bent pins.
Check the ATCC solenoid jumper harness between the 4X4 control module and the ATCC
solenoid, located on the rear subframe.
Connect the 4X4 control module and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. REFER to 4X4 CONTROL MODULE. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test G: Tire/Axle Out of Acceptable Operating Range
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for All Wheel Drive (AWD) schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The all wheel drive (AWD) system continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
torque distribution between the front and rear wheels. During normal operation, most of the torque is sent to the
front wheels. If wheel slip between the front and rear wheels is detected or the vehicle is under heavy
acceleration, the AWD system increases torque to the rear wheels.
DTC P1635 Tire/Axle Out of Acceptable Range - When the 4X4 control module detects inappropriate
mini spare or road wheels/tires (greater than 5% at one wheel) installed, this DTC is set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wheels/tires
Wheel speed sensors
ABS module
4X4 control module
PINPOINT TEST G: TIRE/AXLE OUT OF ACCEPTABLE OPERATING RANGE
NOTE:
This test must be carried out on a hard surface in an area without traffic.
NOTE:
Carry out Inspection and Verification as outlined before carrying out this
pinpoint test.
G1 CHECK THE RECENT TIRE USAGE
Check with customer about recent tire usage or installation.
Has a tire been installed on the vehicle recently that was not originally supplied with the
vehicle?
YES : INFORM the customer to only use tires of the type supplied with the vehicle. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to G2.
G2 CHECK TIRE SIZE AND BRAND
Check the tire size and the brand of tire.
Are all 4 tires the same size and brand?
YES : Go to G3.
NO : INSTALL tires that are the same size and brand. INFORM the customer to only use the same
size tires and brand. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
G3 CHECK TIRE AIR PRESSURES
Check the air pressure in all 4 tires.
Are all 4 tires at the recommended air pressure?
YES : Go to G4.
NO : ADJUST the tire air pressures. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. INFORM the
customer to maintain the correct tire air pressure.
G4 CHECK FOR CORRECT WHEEL SPEEDS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - 4X4 Control Module
While driving the vehicle at 48 km/h (30 mph), monitor the following wheel speed sensor PIDs:
Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor (LF_WSPD)
Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (LR_WSPD)
Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor (RF_WSPD)
Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (RR_WSPD)
Are all 4 wheel speeds within 3 km/h (1.8 mph) of each other?
YES : Go to G5.
NO : The ABS module is sending invalid wheel speed data to the 4X4 control module. REFER to
VEHICLE DYNAMIC SYSTEMS article for additional ABS module diagnosis.
G5 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE OPERATION
Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C281
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect the 4X4 control module and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. REFER to 4X4 CONTROL MODULE. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
4X4 CONTROL MODULE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Exploded View Of 4X4 Control Module With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
N621906-S424
7E453
-
Description
4X4 control module nut
4X4 control module and bracket
Electrical connector (part of 14A005)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. From below the RH side instrument panel, remove the hush panel.
2. Disconnect the 4X4 control module harness connector.
3. Remove the 4X4 control module nut.
To install, tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the 4X4 control module and bracket.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:52:32 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
AM/FM antenna base bolt
AM/FM antenna cable bolt
Satellite radio antenna bolt
Satellite digital audio receiver system (SDARS) module nuts
Subwoofer amplifier screws
Subwoofer speaker bolts
7
12
7
7
5
7
lb-in
62
106
62
62
44
62
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Audio Line-Up
The following audio systems are available:
Base
AM/FM single CD with MP3
4 speakers
Premium - Edge
AM/FM 6-CD changer with MP3
4 speakers
Audiophile
AM/FM 6-CD changer with MP3
Four 2-way speakers and a subwoofer (9 speakers total)
Premium - MKX
AM/FM 6-CD changer with MP3
6 speakers in 6 locations (includes separate tweeter speakers)
THX® sound
AM/FM 6-CD changer with MP3
12 speakers in 10 locations
Audio digital signal processing (DSP) module (located behind the subwoofer)
Also available with navigation audio system
Navigation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:20
10:59:14 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Navigation audio control module (ACM)
Voice-activation (includes microphone in the inside rear view mirror)
Available with Premium (MKX), Audiophile (Edge), or THX® sound system (MKX)
All audio systems include the following features:
Speed sensitive volume
Accessory delay
MP3 capability
Audio input jack
The following options are also available:
Satellite audio system
Available with all audio systems
DVD entertainment system
Available with all audio systems
Not available on vehicles with panoramic roof
SYNC
Optional on Edge, standard on MKX
Steering wheel controls
Standard on all audio systems except base
Unique steering wheel controls for vehicles with the SYNC system
Antenna
The antenna system consists of the antenna and the antenna cable. The antenna cable connects the ACM to the
antenna, located on the front of the roof.
Audio Input Jack - Vehicles Without The SYNC System
The audio input jack is used to connect a portable MP3 device to the vehicle. When connected, the audio files
from the MP3 player can be broadcast through the vehicle speakers.
Satellite Audio System
The satellite audio system provides satellite-broadcast audio. The satellite antenna is mounted on the rear
spoiler. The satellite audio system consists of the following components:
Satellite digital audio receiver system (SDARS) module (located behind the liftgate scuff plate trim
panel)
Satellite radio antenna
Satellite radio antenna cable
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
DVD Entertainment System
The DVD entertainment system is available on all vehicles except the base Edge and vehicles equipped with a
panoramic roof. The DVD entertainment system includes the following:
Rear entertainment module (RETM)
A/V ports for connecting a gaming system
2 wireless headphones
A remote control
THX® Audio System
The THX® audio system provides theatre quality sound inside the vehicle. The THX® audio system is only
available for the MKX, and includes the following components:
DSP module
Front center imaging speaker (also referred to as the instrument panel speaker)
2 mid-woofers in the front doors
2 tweeter speakers in the front doors
2 co-axial speakers in the rear doors
2 rear mid-tweeters in the D-pillars
A subwoofer
Navigation System
The navigation system audibly and visually guides the user to a selected destination. The system uses a global
positioning system (GPS) antenna, a vehicle speed input, and other sensor information to accurately establish
the vehicle position. The ACM provides the visual and audible instructions of the maneuvers required to arrive
at the pre-entered destination.
The only external component of the navigation system is the GPS antenna, located in the instrument panel.
SYNC System
The SYNC system is comprised of the following:
Accessory protocol interface module (APIM), located underneath the floor console
SYNC-specific steering wheel controls
Microphone located in the rear view mirror
Universal serial bus (USB) port, located in the center console
Audio input jack, located in the center console
The SYNC system is a hands-free communications and entertainment system that allows the following
interactions:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Send and receive phone calls via a Bluetooth®-enabled phone
Send and receive text messages via a Bluetooth®-enabled phone
Connect media devices (such as an iPod® or USB device) in order to play audio files
Play media files via a Bluetooth®-enabled audio device
Not all features will be available with every phone.
For additional information on audio system operation, including the SYNC system, refer to the Owner's
Literature.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Universal Serial Bus (USB) MaleCCMUSB2-AM-AM-10
A To Male-A Cable
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Audio Control Module (ACM)
The audio system can be operated while the key is in RUN or ACC. The accessory delay feature allows the
audio system to be operated for a preset period of time after the key is turned to OFF and a front door has not
been opened. The audio control module (ACM) sends AC voltage audio signals to the speakers or to the
amplifier, depending on vehicle configuration. The ACM can produce its own DTCs, which can be
communicated to the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN), or can be
retrieved through the ACM self-test by simultaneously pressing presets 3 and 6. The ACM communicates via
the MS-CAN.
THX® Audio System
The THX® audio system provides theatre quality sound in the vehicle. Audio signals are sent to the audio
digital signal processing (DSP) module, which processes the audio signals and sends them to the 13 speakers: 4
door speakers, 2 tweeter speakers, 3 front/center speakers, 2 rear/center speakers, and 2 subwoofer speakers.
The DSP module communicates via the MS-CAN.
Navigation
The navigation module is integrated in the ACM and controls the operation and the interface between the user,
the vehicle subsystems, and the external components. The navigation ACM communicates via the MS-CAN and
can be diagnosed with a scan tool.
The vehicle navigation system guides the user to a pre-entered destination. A map DVD stored in the navigation
ACM is used for calculating the vehicle course. The ACM display audibly and visually instructs the user of the
maneuvers required to arrive at the destination entered.
A voice recognition system allows the user to interface with the system without using the touch screen. A
microphone located in the interior rear view mirror provides a direct input to the navigation ACM.
In order to calculate initial vehicle position, the global positioning system (GPS) antenna is used to track several
available satellites simultaneously.
The wheel pulse signal and transmission gear selected signal are received by the navigation ACM through the
MS-CAN. These signals are used to increase the accuracy of the displayed course.
Satellite Audio
The satellite audio system consists of a satellite digital audio receiver system (SDARS) module, a satellite radio
antenna, and an antenna cable. The satellite radio antenna receives digital audio signals and sends them to the
SDARS module, where the signals are converted to analog and sent to the ACM, the rear entertainment module
(RETM) (if equipped with a DVD entertainment system), or the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) (if
equipped with the SYNC system). The SDARS module communicates via the MS-CAN.
SYNC System
The SYNC system allows interaction with several types of customer devices, including mobile phones and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
media devices. The system is comprised of the APIM, a microphone (located in the interior rear view mirror),
the universal serial bus (USB) cable and port, and the audio input jack. The APIM contains an on-board
Bluetooth® chipset, which enables certain wireless devices to interact with the system.
The APIM consists of 2 internal modules: the consumer interface processor (CIP) and the vehicle interface
processor (VIP). The modules are not replaceable individually, but can be flashed independently, if required.
The CIP interfaces with all of the inputs to the APIM. The CIP contains an analog-to-digital- to-analog
converter, as well as the Bluetooth® chipset. Any consumer-available application upgrades that are available
are loaded directly to the CIP through the USB port.
The VIP provides an interface between the CIP and the vehicle. The main functions of the VIP are controlling
the APIM power management and translating both inbound and outbound signals over the controller area
network (CAN).
The APIM can receive inputs from the following audio sources:
USB port
Audio input jack
SDARS module
Bluetooth®
The USB port can be used for connecting a media device (such as an iPod®) with the device's available cable,
or for directly plugging in a portable mass storage device (such as a "thumb drive"). When playing media files
stored on a mass storage device, the SYNC system will only play files that do not have digital rights
management (DRM) protection. The USB port can also be used for uploading vehicle application upgrades.
The USB port is powered by the APIM, so no external power source is needed to power a device plugged into
the USB port.
The audio input jack can be used for connecting a media device (such as an iPod®) utilizing a 1/8-inch audio
jack. When a device is connected through the audio input jack, only the speaker volume can be controlled by
the ACM. All other functions (such as seek, fast forward, pause, etc.) must be carried out on the device itself.
If the vehicle is equipped with satellite audio, the audio signals from the SDARS module are sent to the APIM,
rather than directly to the ACM. The APIM then relays the satellite audio signals to the ACM, or to the RETM
if the vehicle is equipped with a DVD entertainment system. The RETM then relays the signals to the ACM.
The Bluetooth® interface can accommodate both Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phones and Bluetooth®-enabled
media devices. Any Bluetooth® device used with the SYNC system must first be paired with the system before
it is operational.
Bluetooth® is a secure, short-range radio frequency that allows devices to communicate wirelessly through
radio waves. The operating range of a Bluetooth® signal is a maximum of 32 feet.
Only one Bluetooth® phone and one Bluetooth® device can be connected to the system at any one time. If an
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
additional device of either type is paired with the system and made active, the APIM will disconnect any active
connection and establish a connection with the new device.
It is important to understand that not all mobile phones will have the same level of features when interacting
with the SYNC system. For a list of compatible phones, .
In addition to audio information, metadata may also be sent to the APIM from a device plugged into the USB
port. Metadata consists of such information as artist, album title, song title, and genre. The metadata is used by
the APIM to create indexes that can be used to sort for particular music, based on customer preference. Not all
USB devices will send metadata to the APIM; also, no metadata is transferred when a device is connected
through the audio input jack. When a new media device is connected to the SYNC system, the APIM will
automatically index the information. This may take up to several minutes (depending on the amount of data on
the device), and is considered normal operation. When a device that was previously connected to the SYNC
system is reconnected, the APIM will update the index (rather than creating a new one), which reduces the
amount of time needed to create the index.
The APIM receives both stereo and mono sound inputs, and can also transmit both stereo and mono sound. The
mono function is used to receive the microphone input, and to send sound to the ACM for voice prompts, the
text-to-speech (TTS) feature, ring tones, and any audio received through a connected mobile phone. The TTS
feature speaks information so that it does not have to be read from the display.
The APIM communicates via the MS-CAN.
Voice Recognition For Vehicles With Navigation And The SYNC System
When a vehicle is equipped with both the navigation system and the SYNC system, the interaction between the
audio system components is unique for voice recognition.
Both the navigation ACM and the APIM utilize voice-recognition, but in order for the modules to determine
which one should be acknowledging the voice command, the voice command set is different. This allows the
modules to identify the intended source when the VOICE button is pressed. The VOICE (an icon of someone
speaking), MEDIA, and PHONE (an icon of a phone and an up-and-down arrow) buttons are wired to the
navigation ACM, rather than to the APIM (as they are in non-navigation audio systems).
When the audio system enters voice recognition mode, the ACM sends a CAN message to the APIM to enter
voice recognition mode. The microphone is wired directly to the APIM, which relays the microphone input to
the ACM through dedicated wiring. Control of the voice functions is given to whichever module is indicated by
the first voice command.
Steering Wheel Controls
The steering wheel controls consist of a series of resistors. Each steering wheel control switch function
corresponds with a specific resistance value within the switch. When a switch is pressed, the ACM (or the
APIM) monitors the change in reference voltage to determine the requested function.
Audio Input Jack - Vehicles Without The SYNC System
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
The audio input jack allows for a portable MP3 player to be connected to the vehicle audio system. When a
portable MP3 player is connected, audio from the MP3 player can be played through the vehicle speakers.
Antenna - AM/FM
The roof-mounted antenna receives both AM and FM radio waves. The audio signals are then sent to the ACM
through the antenna cable. An antenna module is integral to the roof-mounted antenna base.
Subwoofer
The Audiophile subwoofer is powered by its own amplifier. The subwoofer in the THX® system is powered by
the THX® amplifier. The enable/clip detection circuit carries out 2 functions: to turn the amplifier on, and to
indicate to the ACM when the subwoofer output distortion signal reaches a damaging level. The ACM then
clips the audio output signal to prevent damage to the subwoofer.
DVD Entertainment System
When a video disc is inserted into the RETM and the PLAY button is pressed, an image is displayed on the
screen and a stereo signal is transmitted to the ACM. The DVD entertainment system allows for single/dualplay mode. The RETM communicates via the MS-CAN.
Single-Play Mode
In single-play mode, any audio input routed through the RETM is broadcast through all of the vehicle speakers.
These audio inputs include the RETM, satellite audio, SYNC audio, and peripheral gaming devices plugged into
the RETM.
Dual-Play Mode (All Audio Systems Except THX®)
In dual-play mode, the ACM continues to control the output to the front speakers, while the RETM mutes the
audio to the rear speakers. The RETM continues to broadcast the rear audio source to the headphones. When the
headphones are set to channel A, all audio sources can be accessed. When the headphones are set to channel B,
only the DVD audio and auxiliary audio sources (such as a gaming system) can be sent to the headphones.
Dual-Play Mode (THX®)
In dual-play mode, the DSP module continues to play the front audio source over the front speakers while
muting the rear speakers. The RETM continues to broadcast the rear audio source to the headphones. When the
headphones are set to channel A, all audio sources can be accessed. When the headphones are set to channel B,
only the DVD audio and auxiliary audio sources (such as a gaming system) can be sent to the headphones.
Noise Suppression Equipment
The radio frequency suppression equipment reduces interference transmitted through the speakers by the engine
ignition and electrical systems. When installing any new radio suppression equipment components, make sure
that a good contact is made at all connections.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Audio Signals
Audio signal flow varies greatly depending on vehicle content.
Stereo signals contain left and right channel information, and are used for most audio signals.
A mono signal is used for the microphone input to the APIM. The mono signal is also used for the voice
prompts, the TTS feature, ring tones, and any audio received through a connected mobile phone. These audio
signals are output from the APIM to the ACM. The mono and stereo outputs from the APIM utilize separate
circuits.
A digital signal is used to transmit data from a media device connected through the USB port to the APIM. The
APIM then converts the signal to analog and relays the signal to the ACM.
A wireless signal is used to broadcast audio signals from a Bluetooth® device to the APIM. As with a digital
signal sent through the USB port, the APIM converts the wireless audio signal to analog and relays it to the
ACM.
Network Communication
The following audio system components communicate via the medium speed controller area network (MSCAN):
Audio control module (ACM)
Navigation ACM
Satellite digital audio receiver system (SDARS) module
Rear entertainment module (RETM)
Audio digital signal processing (DSP) module
Accessory protocol interface module (APIM)
The following messages are utilized by the audio system:
Message
Transmitting Module
Ignition Switch Position
Smart junction box (SJB)
Receiving Module
(s)
ACM
RETM
DSP module
APIM
Audio System Function
Indicates ignition switch
position for powerup/shut-down.
Illumination Dimmer
Level
SJB
ACM
RETM
Controls the backlight
intensity, based on the
position of the dimmer
switch.
Transmission Selector
(PRNDL) Range
Instrument cluster (IC)
ACM
For the navigation system,
this signal is used for
more accurate navigation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Accessory Delay Status
SJB
ACM
RETM
APIM
Volume Cutback
Parking aid module (PAM)
ACM
Vehicle Speed
IC
ACM
DSP module
Navigation Radio Rolling
Wheel Count
IC
ACM
tracking.
When active, this signal
allows the audio
component to be operated
after the vehicle is shut
off and a door has not
been opened.
When active, this signal
causes the ACM to reduce
the audio output when the
parking aid tone is active.
Used by the ACM (or
DSP module) for the
speed-compensated
volume function.
For the navigation system,
this signal is used for
more accurate navigation
tracking.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Audio control module
(ACM)
Antenna
Rear entertainment
module (RETM)
Steering wheel controls
Audio input jack
Universal serial bus
(USB) port
Speaker(s)
Noise suppression
equipment
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse(s):
3 (15A) (RETM,
accessory protocol
interface module
[APIM])
18 (20A) (audio
digital signal
processing [DSP]
module)
28 (5A) (ACM
hot in START)
38 (20A)
(subwoofer or
DSP module)
39 (20A) (ACM)
41 (15A) (delayed
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
accessory)
3. If the fault is visually evident, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
NOTE:
Do not press any buttons on the ACM while the ACM is carrying out the
self-test.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Carry out the self-test diagnostics for the ACM.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to the Speaker Walk-Around Test, the Audio Control
Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode, or the Satellite Audio Bezel Diagnostic Test.
Speaker Walk-Around Test
NOTE:
To enter the speaker walk-around test or ACM self-diagnostic mode, the ACM
must be on and in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
1. To enter the speaker walk-around test, simultaneously press the ACM preset buttons 3 and 6.
2. The speaker walk-around test stops at each speaker and applies sound to each speaker for about 1 to 2
seconds. Each speaker is tested and displayed on the ACM in the following sequence:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Except THX®: RF, LF, LR, RR, SUBWOOFER.
THX®: CSA FRONT, TWEETER LF, TWEETER RF, CENTER REAR, SPEAKER LF,
SPEAKER RF, SPEAKER LR, SUBWOOFER, SPEAKER RR.
3. To exit the speaker walk-around test, turn the key to OFF, turn the ACM off, press preset button 1 for
diagnostics (ACMs without navigation), or press "End Test" (navigation ACM).
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode - All ACMs Without Navigation
NOTE:
To enter the ACM self-diagnostic mode, the ACM must be turned on and in radio
tuner (AM/FM) mode.
1. To enter the following tests, press the desired preset button while in the speaker walk-around test or while
in the ACM self-diagnostic mode.
2. The self-diagnostic mode has the following functions available:
Preset button 1 = On-Demand Self-Test. This button runs the on-demand self-test.
Pressing the MENU DOWN button allows scrolling of any DTCs found during the test while
in this menu.
Preset button 2 = Display Continuous DTCs. This button enables viewing of any continuous DTCs
that have been logged.
Pressing the MENU UP button allows scrolling of any DTCs while in this menu.
While continuous DTCs are being displayed, pressing the EJECT button will clear all present
DTCs.
Preset button 3 = Signal Strength Test. This button displays the signal strength.
Preset button 4 = Software Version Display. This button displays the ACM software version.
Pressing the MENU UP button allows scrolling of all audio subsystem software versions
while in this menu.
Preset button 5 = Display Test. This test illuminates all the display segments for 5 seconds, then
turns all segments off.
Preset button 6 = Configuration Status. This button enables ACM configuration status.
Pressing the MENU button displays the ACM part number while in this menu.
3. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off or turn the key OFF.
4. If the concern remains and the fault is not detected, go to Symptom Chart - Audio System to continue
diagnostics.
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode - Navigation ACM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Bezel Diagnostics Screen Display - Speaker Walk Test Active
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
1. To enter the self-diagnostic mode, press "End Test" during the speaker walk-around test.
Fig. 2: Bezel Diagnostics Screen Display - On-Screen Buttons
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. The following diagnostic modes are available using the on-screen buttons:
On Demand Self Test - provides internal self-test diagnostics and displays all the DTCs resulting
from the self-test.
View DTC's - provides a list of all the DTCs currently stored in memory.
Configuration Status" - displays the current unit configuration.
System Info - provides the navigation module part number and software information.
GPS Info - provides satellite information and vehicle current information.
Speaker Walk Test - carries out a speaker walk-around test.
Multi-disc Test - carries out a test of the CD player mechanism.
Display Test - allows the screen colors to be checked, and allows individual touch sectors of the
display screen to be tested.
Hardkey Test - checks the operation of any ACM button.
Radio Signal Strength - carries out a test of the AM/FM antenna signal.
Exit Diagnostics - exists bezel diagnostics and returns to the previous function.
3. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off, turn the key to OFF, or press "Exit Diagnostics".
4. If the concern remains and the fault is not detected, go to Symptom Chart - Navigation System.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Satellite Audio Bezel Diagnostic Test
NOTE:
To enter the satellite audio bezel diagnostic test, the ACM must be on and in
SAT mode.
1. To enter the satellite audio bezel diagnostic test, simultaneously press and hold the AUX button and
preset button 2 (except navigation), or the SOUND button and preset button 1 (navigation).
2. Upon entering the self-test, the ACM produces 2 continuously alternating tones of different pitch, one for
the right channel, then one for the left.
3. The test continues by displaying any DTCs currently present. If no DTCs are present, NO DTCS will be
displayed. If there are DTCs present, the ACM will auto-scroll through the list of active DTCs.
4. Historical DTCs can be viewed by pressing the AUX button and preset button 2 (except navigation), or
the SOUND button and preset button 1 (navigation) simultaneously while in the active DTC mode.
If any DTCs are present, pressing the AUX button and preset button 2 (except navigation), or the
SOUND button and preset button 1 (navigation) will prompt CLEAR DTCS? on the ACM.
To clear historical DTCs, press preset buttons 1, 2, and 3 consecutively within 4 seconds.
To exit historical DTCs (with or without clearing DTCs), press the AUX button and preset button 2
(except navigation), or the SOUND button and preset button 1 (navigation) simultaneously.
5. If no historical DTCs are present, pressing the AUX button and preset button 2 (except navigation), or the
SOUND button and preset button 1 (navigation) simultaneously while in active DTC mode will display
the DLP software version.
6. To exit the satellite audio bezel diagnostic test, press the AUX button and preset button 2 (except
navigation), or the SOUND button and preset button 1 (navigation) simultaneously while the DLP
software version is displayed, or turn the ACM off.
7. If the concern remains and the fault is not detected, go to Symptom Chart - Audio System.
DTC Charts
NOTE:
For all U-codes listed in this chart, if no related symptoms are observed,
disregard the DTC.
NOTE:
For all U-codes listed in this chart, if DTC B1318 is present, diagnose it before
diagnosing the U-code DTC.
AUDIO CONTROL MODULE (ACM) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
VERIFY that no steering wheel control buttons are
Audio Steering Wheel
stuck and that no steering wheel control button is
B1117
Button Stuck
pressed during the self-test.
If no concern is found, go to Pinpoint Test F .
NOTE:
This DTC applies to the navigation DVD
mechanism, not the DVD entertainment system.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
B1119 (Navigation Audio Disc DVD Player
only)
Thermal Shutdown
The audio control module (ACM) was over
temperature. Navigation operation will resume after
the ACM cools. This is normal operation. CLEAR the
DTCs.
B1136 (Navigation Audio Steering Wheel
only)
Switch #2 Circuit Failure
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
REMOVE the map DVD and CLEAN it. INSPECT
for scratches, fingerprints, or damage, and REPAIR
as necessary. VERIFY a valid map DVD is being
used. If no concern is found, INSERT a known good
map DVD. REPEAT the self-test.
B1140 (Navigation
Map Disk Invalid
only)
B1154
B1155
B1158
Subwoofer #1 Short to
Ground
Subwoofer #1 Short to
Battery
Subwoofer #2 Not
Connected
If the system operates correctly, the concern
was caused by a damaged or invalid map DVD.
If DTC B1140 is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module
(ACM). TEST the system for normal
operation.
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the charging system.
REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
If the charging system is OK, the DTC was set
by a previous low voltage condition. No
concern is found at this time.
If the charging system is not OK, REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article to diagnose the low
battery voltage condition.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC
B1342 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new ACM.
REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
B1318
Battery Voltage Low
B1342
ECU is Faulted
B2103
Antenna Not Connected
B2204 (Navigation GPS Antenna Connection
only)
Open or Short
Phone Transceiver Active
B2274
Circuit Failure
Audio Reverse Aid Mute
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
B2384
B2404
B2405
Input Ckt. Failure
Audio Steering Wheel
Switch Circuit Failure
Audio Disc CD Player
Thermal Shutdown Fault
DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
The ACM was over temperature. Audio operation
will resume after the ACM cools. This is normal
operation. CLEAR the DTCs.
NOTE:
DTC B1342 will also be set.
B2406
Audio Disc CD Player
Internal Fault
Module Configuration
Failure
B2633 (Navigation Driver-Front Microphone
only)
Circuit Failure
B2477
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC
B2406 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new ACM.
REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
Go to Pinpoint Test R .
NOTE:
DTC B1342 will also be set.
B2656
DVD (Digital Versatile
Disk) Error
NOTE:
This DTC refers to the navigation DVD mechanism,
not the DVD entertainment system.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC
B2656 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new ACM.
REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
B2913 (Audiophile Audio Subwoofer Not
only)
Connected
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
NOTE:
For the navigation ACM, the hardkey test can be
used to isolate a stuck button.
B2924
B2965
C1992
Audio Button Stuck
Audio System Speaker
Circuit Fault
Vehicle Speed Circuit
Failure
VERIFY no ACM buttons are stuck and that no ACM
button is pressed during the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC B2924 is
retrieved again, INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to
Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system
for normal operation.
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
P0182
Reverse Input Circuit
U0140
Lost Communication With
Body Control Module
(GEM)
U0155
Lost Communication With
Instrument Panel Cluster
(IC) Control Module
U0159
Lost Communication With
Parking Assist Control
Module (PAM)
U0193
Lost Communication With
Digital Audio Control
Module (SDARS)
U0196
Lost Communication With
Entertainment Control
Module - Rear (AUX)
DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
If a backlighting concern is present, REFER to
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND PANEL
ILLUMINATION article.
If the accessory delay does not function correctly,
REFER to WIPERS AND WASHERS article.
If the speed sensitive volume does not operate
correctly, go to Pinpoint Test Y .
If the navigation is inaccurate, go to Pinpoint Test
P.
Go to Pinpoint Test Q .
For vehicles without a DVD entertainment system, go
to Pinpoint Test H .
For vehicles with a DVD entertainment system, go to
Pinpoint Test I .
CARRY OUT the network test using the scan tool.
U0197
Lost Communication With
Telephone Control Module
If the scan tool communicates with the rear
entertainment module (RETM), go to
Symptom Chart - Audio System to diagnose
the observed symptom.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the
RETM, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
Go to Pinpoint Test S .
CARRY OUT the network test using the scan tool.
U0238
Lost Communication With
Digital Audio Control
module "D" (DSP)
U0249
U2050
U2051
U2473
Lost Communication With
Entertainment Control
Module - Rear "B" (RCU)
No Application Present
One or More Calibration
Files Missing/Corrupt
Unexpected Vehicle Speed
(VSS)
If the scan tool communicates with the audio
digital signal processing (DSP) module, go to
Symptom Chart - Audio System to diagnose
the observed symptom.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the
DSP module, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
Go to Pinpoint Test P .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
For all U-codes listed in this chart, if no related symptoms are observed,
disregard the DTC.
NOTE:
For all U-codes listed in this chart, if DTC B1318 is present, diagnose it before
diagnosing the U-code DTC.
AUDIO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (DSP) MODULE DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
B1158
Subwoofer #2 Not Connected Go to Pinpoint Test C .
CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the charging system. REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
article.
If the charging system is OK, the DTC was set by a
previous over-charge condition. No concern is
found at this time.
If the charging system is not OK, REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article to diagnose the overcharging condition.
CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the charging system. REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
article.
B1317
Battery Voltage High
If the charging system is OK, the DTC was set by a
previous low voltage condition. No concern is found
Battery Voltage Low
at this time.
If the charging system is not OK, REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article to diagnose the low
battery voltage condition.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC B1342
is retrieved again, INSTALL a new audio digital signal
ECU is Faulted
processing (DSP) module. REFER to Audio Digital
Signal Processing (DSP) Module. TEST the system for
normal operation.
Module Configuration Failure REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
Audio Subwoofer Not
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Connected
If the symptom is no audio from all speakers, go to
Subwoofer Speaker Short
Pinpoint Test D .
Circuit
If the symptom is no audio from the subwoofer, go to
Pinpoint Test C .
B1318
B1342
B2477
B2913
B2925
NOTE:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
B292A
B2965
C1992
Subwoofer #2 Speaker Short
Circuit
Despite the DTC description, this DTC applies to the
THX® amplifier clip/enable circuit, not the subwoofer.
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
If the symptom is no audio from all speakers, go to
Audio System Speaker Circuit Pinpoint Test D .
Fault
If the symptom is no audio from one or more (but not all)
speakers, go to Pinpoint Test C .
Vehicle Speed Circuit Failure DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
CARRY OUT the network test using the scan tool.
U0155
Lost Communication With
Instrument Panel Cluster (IC)
Control Module
U0184
Lost Communication With
Radio (ACM)
If the scan tool communicates with the IC, go to
Symptom Chart - Audio System to diagnose the
observed symptom.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the IC,
REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
CARRY OUT the network test using the scan tool.
If the scan tool communicates with the ACM, go to
Symptom Chart - Audio System to diagnose the
observed symptom.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the
ACM, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
CARRY OUT the network test using the scan tool.
If the scan tool communicates with the rear
entertainment module (RETM), go to Symptom
Lost Communication With
Chart - Audio System to diagnose the observed
Entertainment Control Module
symptom.
- Rear (AUX)
If the scan tool does not communicate with the
RETM, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
No Application Present
REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
One or More Calibration Files
REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
Missing/Corrupt
U0196
U2050
U2051
NOTE:
For all U-codes listed in this chart, if no related symptoms are observed,
disregard the DTC.
NOTE:
For all U-codes listed in this chart, if DTC B1318 is present, diagnose it before
diagnosing the U-code DTC.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
SATELLITE DIGITAL AUDIO RECEIVER SYSTEM (SDARS) MODULE DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
B1031
SDARS Satellite Antenna Open
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
B1032
SDARS Satellite Antenna Short
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the charging system.
REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
If the charging system is OK, the DTC was set
by a previous low voltage condition. No
Battery Voltage Low
concern is found at this time.
If the charging system is not OK, REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article to diagnosis the low
battery voltage condition.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC
B1342 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new satellite
digital audio receiver system (SDARS) module.
ECU is Faulted
REFER to Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System
(SDARS) Module. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Module Configuration Failure
REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
For vehicles without a DVD entertainment system, go
Lost Communication With Radio to Pinpoint Test H .
(ACM)
For vehicles with a DVD entertainment system, go to
Pinpoint Test I .
Lost Communication With
Entertainment Control Module - Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Rear (AUX)
For vehicles without a DVD entertainment system, go
Lost Communication With
to Pinpoint Test H .
Telephone Control Module
For vehicles with a DVD entertainment system, go to
Pinpoint Test I .
Lost Communication With
Entertainment Control Module - DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
Rear "B" (RCU)
Lost Communication With Front
DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
Controls Interface Module
Lost Communication With Front
DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
Display Interface Module
No Application Present
REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
B1318
B1342
B2477
U0184
U0196
U0197
U0249
U0255
U0256
U2050
NOTE:
For all U-codes listed in this chart, if no related symptoms are observed,
disregard the DTC.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
For all U-codes listed in this chart, if DTC B1318 is present, diagnose it before
diagnosing the U-code DTC.
REAR ENTERTAINMENT MODULE (RETM) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
The rear entertainment module (RETM) was overAudio Disc DVD Player
B1119
temperature. Operation will resume once the RETM has
Thermal Shutdown
cooled. This is normal operation. CLEAR the DTCs.
The LCD screen was over-temperature. Operation will
B111F
LCD Thermal Shutdown
resume after the LCD screen cools. This is normal
operation. CLEAR the DTCs.
CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the charging system. REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
article.
If the charging system is OK, the DTC was set by a
previous over-charge condition. No concern is found
at this time.
If the charging system is not OK, REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article to diagnosis the
overcharging condition.
CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the charging system. REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
article.
B1317
Battery Voltage High
If the charging system is OK, the DTC was set by a
previous low voltage condition. No concern is found
Battery Voltage Low
at this time.
If the charging system is not OK, REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article to diagnosis the low
battery voltage condition.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC B1342 is
retrieved again, INSTALL a new RETM. REFER to Rear
ECU is Faulted
Entertainment Module (RETM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
Module Configuration Failure REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC B2656 is
DVD (Digital Versatile Disk) retrieved again, INSTALL a new RETM. REFER to Rear
Error
Entertainment Module (RETM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
B1318
B1342
B2477
B2656
B2924
Audio Button Stuck
VERIFY no RETM buttons are stuck and that no RETM
button is pressed during the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test. If DTC B2924 is retrieved again,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
U0140
INSTALL a new RETM. REFER to Rear Entertainment
Module (RETM). TEST the system for normal operation.
If a backlighting concern is present, REFER to
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND PANEL
Lost Communication With
ILLUMINATION article.
Body Control Module (GEM)
If the accessory delay does not function correctly, REFER
to WIPERS AND WASHERS article.
CARRY OUT the network test using the scan tool.
U0184
Lost Communication With
Radio (ACM)
U0193
U2050
If the scan tool communicates with the ACM, go to
Symptom Chart - Audio System to diagnose the
observed symptom.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the
ACM, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
Lost Communication With
Digital Audio Control Module Go to Pinpoint Test I .
(SDARS)
No Application Present
REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
NOTE:
For all U-codes listed in this chart, if no related symptoms are observed,
disregard the DTC.
NOTE:
For all U-codes listed in this chart, if DTC B1318 is present, diagnose it before
diagnosing the U-code DTC.
ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE (APIM) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
B1038
Microphone Input Circuit Failure Go to Pinpoint Test W .
Audio Steering Wheel Button
B1117
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Stuck
Audio Steering Wheel Switch #2
B1136
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Circuit Failure
CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the charging system.
REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
B1317
Battery Voltage High
If the charging system is OK, the DTC was set
by a previous high voltage condition. No
concern is found at this time.
If the charging system is not OK, REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article to diagnosis the
over-charging condition.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the charging system.
REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
If the charging system is OK, the DTC was set
by a previous low voltage condition. No
concern is found at this time.
If the charging system is not OK, REFER to
CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article to diagnosis the low
battery voltage condition.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC
B1342 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new accessory
protocol interface module (APIM). REFER to
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM).
TEST the system for normal operation.
REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
B1318
Battery Voltage Low
B1342
ECU is Faulted
B2477
Module Configuration Failure
Lost Communication With Radio
(ACM)
Lost Communication With
Entertainment Control Module Rear (AUX)
Lost Communication With
Entertainment Control Module Rear "B" (RCU)
Lost Communication With Front
Controls Interface Module
Lost Communication With Front
Display Interface Module
No Application Present
USB #1 Device Error
U0184
U0196
U0249
U0255
U0256
U2050
U261C
Go to Pinpoint Test S .
Go to Pinpoint Test S .
DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISREGARD the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs.
REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
Go to Pinpoint Test U .
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart - Audio System
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication with the
audio control module (ACM)
No communication with the
audio digital signal
processing (DSP) module
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
ACM
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Action
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
No communication with the
satellite digital audio
receiver system (SDARS)
module
DSP module
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SDARS module
No communication with the
rear entertainment module
(RETM)
No communication with the
accessory protocol interface
module (APIM)
The satellite audio is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly - vehicles without
DVD entertainment
The satellite audio is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly - vehicles with
DVD entertainment
The ACM display is blank,
but the ACM operates
The ACM backlighting does
not operate correctly
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
APIM (if equipped)
SDARS module
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
RETM
APIM (if equipped)
SDARS module
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to
Audio Control Module (ACM).
TEST the system for normal
operation.
REFER to INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER AND PANEL
ILLUMINATION article.
REFER to INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER AND PANEL
ILLUMINATION article.
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
RETM
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
APIM
ACM
Backlighting
system concern
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
ACM
The RETM backlighting
does not operate correctly
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
Backlighting
system concern
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
RETM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
The CD player is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly
Poor reception - AM/FM
Continuous seek/scan in
AM/FM
Poor reception - satellite
audio
No sound while in satellite
INSPECT the CD for scratches,
fingerprints, a loose paper label,
incorrect format, or damage.
INSERT a known good CD and
TEST the system.
If the system operates
correctly, the concern was
caused by a damaged CD.
If the system does not operate
correctly, INSTALL a new
ACM. REFER to Audio
Control Module (ACM).
TEST the system for normal
operation.
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Antenna
Antenna cable
Charging system
Ignition system
Noise suppression
equipment
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
RDS/PTY function
setting
Antenna
Antenna cable
Noise suppression
equipment
Antenna module
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Obstructions to the
line of sight
Satellite radio
antenna
Satellite radio
antenna cable
SDARS module
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
Satellite radio
antenna
Satellite radio
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
CD
ACM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
radio mode
Poor quality/distorted/no
sound from one or more
speakers (not all speakers) all audio systems except
THX®
Poor quality/distorted/no
sound from one or more
speakers (not all speakers) THX® audio system
antenna cable
SDARS module
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Speaker
RETM (if
equipped)
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Speaker
Subwoofer
DSP module
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
NOTE:
If DTC B2965 is set in the ACM,
the cause of the concern is a
short to ground or short to
voltage in the circuitry to an
individual speaker. Go to
Pinpoint Test B .
Poor quality/distorted/no
sound from all speakers - all
audio systems except THX®
Poor quality/distorted/no
sound while in SYNC mode
Fuse
With the key in any position except
START, MEASURE the voltage
between the ACM C290a-15,
circuit CBP13 (GY/BN), harness
side and ground.
If any voltage is present,
REPAIR the circuit. TEST
the system for normal
operation.
If no voltage is present,
INSTALL a new ACM.
REFER to Audio Control
Module (ACM). TEST the
system for normal operation.
Go to Pinpoint Test X .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
ACM
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
APIM
ACM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Poor quality/distorted/no
sound from all speakers THX® audio system
The subwoofer is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly - Audiophile
The subwoofer is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly - THX® audio
system
The video system is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly
The video system is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly - no audio
No auxiliary headphone
audio - all audio systems
except THX®
No auxiliary headphone
audio - THX®
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
DSP module
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Subwoofer
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Speaker
DSP module
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Damaged DVD
RETM setting
RETM
Go to Pinpoint Test K .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
RETM
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test K .
INSTALL a set of known good
headphones and OPERATE the
audio system in radio tuner
(AM/FM) dual-play mode.
If the system operates
correctly, the concern was
caused by inoperative
headphones.
If the system does not operate
correctly, INSTALL a new
RETM. REFER to Rear
Entertainment Module
(RETM). TEST the system
for normal operation.
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
Headphones
RETM
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Headphones
RETM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
The video system remote
control does not function
correctly
The steering wheel controls
are inoperative/do not
operate correctly
The speed sensitive volume
does not operate correctly
The audio input jack is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly
The audio does not reduce
when the parking aid tone
sounds
Voice recognition is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly - vehicles without
the SYNC system
Voice recognition is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly - vehicles with the
SYNC system
INSTALL new batteries in the
remote control. TEST the system
for normal operation. If the concern
is still present, CONTACT an
authorized audio repair facility for
further diagnostic test procedures.
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Clockspring
Steering wheel
controls
ACM
APIM (if equipped)
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Instrument cluster
(IC)
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test Y
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Audio input jack
ACM
APIM (if equipped)
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
Parking aid system
concern
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test Q .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Microphone (part of
interior rear view
mirror)
Steering wheel
controls
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test R .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Microphone (part of
interior rear view
mirror)
Steering wheel
Go to Pinpoint Test W .
Remote control
batteries
Video system
concern
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
controls
ACM (if equipped
with navigation)
APIM
Symptom Chart - Navigation
Condition
No global positioning system
(GPS) antenna signal
Navigation screen only
displays Dearborn, Michigan
The position cursor is
inaccurate
Possible Sources
GPS antenna
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
GPS antenna
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
GPS antenna
Vehicle speed sensor
(VSS) signal concern
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test P .
Audible switch
feedback setting
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test N .
REMOVE the map DVD and
CLEAN it. INSPECT for
scratches, fingerprints, or
damage, and REPAIR as
necessary. VERIFY a valid
map DVD is being used. If no
concern is found, INSERT a
known good map DVD. TEST
the system.
If the system operates
correctly, the concern
was caused by a
damaged or inoperable
map DVD.
If the system does not
operate correctly,
INSTALL a new ACM.
REFER to Audio
Control Module
(ACM). TEST the
system for normal
operation.
INSPECT the instrument panel
center trim panel for
The audible switch feedback
is inoperative
Unable to read map disc
Action
Map DVD
ACM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
The screen does not
open/close
The voice guidance is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly
The display screen is
inoperative
Voice recognition is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly - vehicles without
the SYNC system
Voice recognition is
interference with the
navigation screen, and
REPAIR as necessary. If no
interference is found,
INSTALL a new ACM.
REFER to Audio Control
Module (ACM). TEST the
system for normal operation.
Trim panel interference
ACM
Incorrect system setting
Wiring, terminals or
connectors (THX®
only)
DSP module (THX®
only)
ACM
Go to Pinpoint Test O .
VERIFY the operation of the
AM/FM audio.
If the AM/FM audio
system does not operate
correctly, go to
Symptom Chart Audio System.
If the AM/FM audio
system operates
correctly, INSTALL a
new ACM. REFER to
Audio Control Module
(ACM). TEST the
system for normal
operation.
Go to Pinpoint Test R .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
ACM
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Microphone (part of
interior rear view
mirror)
Steering wheel controls
ACM
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Microphone (part of
interior rear view
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
inoperative/does not operate
correctly - vehicles with the
SYNC system
Symptom Chart - SYNC System
Condition
The SYNC system is
completely inoperative
Unable to pair Bluetooth®
device
Go to Pinpoint Test W .
Possible Sources
mirror)
Steering wheel controls
ACM (if equipped with
navigation)
APIM
Action
Audio system concern
Communication network
concern
Customer error
Customer device
APIM
Go to Pinpoint Test S .
Incompatible Bluetooth®
device
Customer error
Customer Bluetooth®
device
APIM
Go to Pinpoint Test T .
NOTE:
If a Bluetooth® device is
able to pair with the
SYNC system, there are
no concerns with the
APIM.
An individual Bluetooth®
device feature is inoperative
The universal serial bus
(USB) port is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly
The steering wheel controls
are inoperative/do not
operate correctly
Customer device
compatibility
Customer USB device
USB cable and port
APIM
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Steering wheel controls
ACM
INSTRUCT the customer
to review the
interoperability list on the .
Not all phone features are
available through SYNC.
This is normal operation.
Go to Pinpoint Test U .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:14 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
The audio input jack is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly
APIM
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Audio input jack
Audio control module
(ACM)
APIM
The SYNC system audible
prompts are inoperative/do
not operate correctly
During a phone call, no
incoming audio is heard in
the vehicle
Voice recognition is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly
During a phone call, no
outgoing audio is heard on
the outside device
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
NOTE:
The audible prompts
include the text-tospeech (TTS) feature,
voice prompts, and ring
tones.
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Customer setting
ACM
APIM
Go to Pinpoint Test V .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Customer setting
ACM
APIM
Go to Pinpoint Test V .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Microphone (part of interior
rear view mirror)
Steering wheel controls
ACM (if equipped with
navigation)
APIM
Go to Pinpoint Test W .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Microphone (part of interior
rear view mirror)
APIM
Go to Pinpoint Test W .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: Poor Reception - AM/FM
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
connector information.
Normal Operation
The antenna receives AM and FM radio waves. The antenna module is integral with the roof-mounted antenna
and receives voltage from the audio control module (ACM) through circuit CME44 (YE/GN).
The noise suppression equipment reduces engine ignition and electrical systems interference transmitted
through the speakers.
DTC B2103 (Antenna Not Connected) - sets during the on-demand self-test when the signal strength is
less than the configured minimum value. The ACM must be tuned to AM during the self-test for this
DTC to set. Also, the DTC will not set when the ACM self-diagnostic mode is run.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
RDS/PTY function setting
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Antenna
Antenna cable
Charging system
Ignition system
Noise suppression equipment
ACM
PINPOINT TEST A: POOR RECEPTION - AM/FM
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
A1 VERIFY THE RDS/PTY SETTING
Verify the RDS/PTY function is set to ALL.
For non-navigation audio systems, press MENU repeatedly until RBDS (ON/OFF) appears
on the display, then press the TUNE UP or TUNE DOWN button until ALL is displayed.
For navigation audio system, while in FM mode, press SHOW OPTIONS, make sure RDS is
active, then press SET PTY and select ALL.
Press the SEEK DOWN or SEEK UP button to scan for a good channel.
Is a good channel found?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. The cause of the concern was that no channel
in the selected category was found.
NO : Go to A2.
A2 CHECK THE AUDIO SYSTEM RECEPTION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Check the ACM reception with the engine running, and with the engine off.
Does the poor reception only occur with the engine running?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : Go to A6.
A3 CHECK THE NOISE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
Check all required noise suppression equipment and the radio frequency interference suppression
bond for security, cleanliness, and metal-to-metal contact.
Are the connections clean, secure, and in metal-to-metal contact?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : CLEAN and SECURE the antenna connections, or INSTALL new noise suppression
equipment as needed. TEST the system for normal operation.
A4 CHECK THE GENERATOR
Key in OFF position.
Check the generator by disconnecting the wiring harness from the voltage regulator.
Start the engine.
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Is the reception OK?
YES : INSTALL a new generator. REFER to GENERATOR AND REGULATOR article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to A5.
A5 CHECK THE IGNITION CIRCUITS
Key in OFF position.
Connect the wiring harness to the voltage regulator.
Check the ignition circuits for correct routing, grounding, and integrity of the connections.
Are the ignition components OK?
YES : USE a jumper cable to ground various parts of the vehicle to the frame (for example: engine,
fenders, quarter panels, stone deflectors, air cleaner, body sheet metal). When the noise is
eliminated, PROVIDE a permanent ground where necessary. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : REPAIR the ignition system as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
A6 CHECK CIRCUIT CME44 (YE/GN) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Antenna C2086
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage Between Antenna C2086-2, Circuit CME44 (YE/GN), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the antenna C2086-2, circuit CME44 (YE/GN), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A8.
NO : Go to A7.
A7 CHECK CIRCUIT CME44 (YE/GN) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240a
Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance Between Audio Unit C240A-5, Circuit CME44 (YE/GN) &
Antenna C2086-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the ACM C240a-5, circuit CME44 (YE/GN), harness side and the
antenna C2086-2, circuit CME44 (YE/GN), harness side; and between the ACM C240a-5, circuit
CME44 (YE/GN), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the ACM and the antenna, and greater than 10,000
ohms between the ACM and ground?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
A8 CHECK THE ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Antenna Coaxial Cable (At ACM)
Measure the resistance of the antenna coaxial cable between the antenna and the ACM.
Is the resistance less than 2 ohms?
YES : Go to A9.
NO : INSTALL a new antenna cable. REFER to Antenna Cable - AM/FM. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
A9 ISOLATE THE ANTENNA
Connect: Antenna Coaxial Cable (At ACM)
Substitute the antenna for a known good antenna.
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Is the reception OK?
YES : INSTALL a new antenna. REFER to Antenna - AM/FM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
NO : INSTALL the original antenna. Go to A10.
A10 SUBSTITUTE THE ANTENNA CABLE
Key in OFF position.
Substitute a known good AM/FM antenna cable.
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Is the reception OK?
YES : INSTALL a new antenna cable. REFER to Antenna Cable - AM/FM. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to A11.
A11 CHECK THE ACM FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test B: Poor Quality/Distorted/No Sound From One Or More Speakers (Not All Speakers) Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Except THX® Audio System
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The audio control module (ACM) directs audio signals to the front door speakers and to the rear entertainment
module (RETM) (if equipped) in the form of a fluctuating AC voltage. The tweeter speakers (if equipped) are
wired in series with the front door speakers. The rear door speakers receive audio signals through the RETM (if
equipped) or directly from the ACM.
If the vehicle is equipped with the DVD entertainment system, the RETM mutes the speaker output to the rear
speakers when the audio system is in dual-play mode. Make sure the audio system is in single-play mode before
diagnosing a symptom of no sound to the rear speakers.
For the navigation system, if the voice guidance setting is set to zero rather than to off, it may appear that the
front speakers intermittently produce no sound. Make sure the voice guidance setting is not set to zero before
addressing a concern with the front speakers.
DTC B2965 (Audio System Speaker Circuit Fault) - sets when an open, a short to ground, or a short to
voltage is detected on the front or rear door speaker circuits. The ACM checks for faults once every
500ms during normal operation, or for any duration during the ACM self-test. The following should also
be noted:
The Audiophile ACM does not check for opens in the front door speakers.
The navigation ACM does not check for opens.
For some ACMs, a short to ground or short to voltage in the circuitry to one of the speakers will cause all
speakers to lose sound due to the built-in overload protection feature of the ACM. In this case, DTC B2965 will
set in the ACM, and this pinpoint test should be followed to isolate the damaged circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Speaker
RETM (if equipped)
ACM
PINPOINT TEST B: POOR QUALITY/DISTORTED/NO SOUND FROM ONE OR MORE
SPEAKERS (NOT ALL SPEAKERS) - EXCEPT THX® AUDIO SYSTEM
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
B1 ISOLATE THE SUSPECT SPEAKER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure the audio system is in single-play mode before beginning this
pinpoint test, or the results will not be accurate.
Key in ON position.
Carry out the speaker walk-around test.
Is the concern with a high-mounted tweeter speaker only?
YES : Go to B13.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 CHECK THE SPEAKER CIRCUITS FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Suspect Speaker
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Measure the AC voltage between the suspect speaker pin 1 and pin 2, harness side as follows:
Suspect Connector- ConnectorSpeaker Pin/Circuit Pin/Circuit
C536-1 or C536-2 or
LH
C570a-1
C570a-2
front
VME07
RME07
(WH)
(WH/BN)
C628-1 or C628-2 or
C612a-1
C612a-2
RH
VME10
RME10
front
(WH/VT) (WH/OG)
C702-1
C702-2
RME09
LH rear VME09
(WH/GN) (BN/YE)
C802-1
C802-2
RME12
RH rear VME12
(BN/WH) (BN/BU)
Is a fluctuating AC voltage present?
YES : INSTALL a new speaker for the suspect speaker. REFER to Door Speaker. CLEAR any
DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : For a front speaker concern, go to B11.
For a rear speaker concern, go to B3.
B3 VERIFY THE PRESENCE OF A DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Key in OFF position.
Check for the presence of a DVD entertainment system.
Is the vehicle equipped with a DVD entertainment system?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to B6.
NO : Go to B4.
B4 CHECK THE REAR SPEAKER CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: ACM C240a
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the suspect speaker pins, harness side and ground as follows:
Suspect ConnectorCircuit
Speaker
Pin
VME09
LH rear C702-1
(WH/GN)
RME09
C702-2
(BN/YE)
VME12
RH rear C802-1
(BN/WH)
RME12
C802-2
(BN/BU)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to B5.
B5 CHECK THE REAR SPEAKER CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the suspect speaker, harness side and the ACM, harness side; and
between the suspect speaker, harness side and ground as follows:
Speaker
ACM
Suspect
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Speaker
Pin
Pin
VME09
LH rear C702-1
C240a-9
(WH/GN)
RME09
C702-2
C240a-22
(BN/YE)
VME12
RH rear C802-1
C240a-10
(BN/WH)
RME12
C802-2
C240a-23
(BN/BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the suspect speaker and the ACM, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the suspect speaker and ground?
YES : Go to B17.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B6 CHECK THE ACM OUTPUT SIGNALS
Disconnect: RETM C949
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Measure the AC voltage between the RETM pins, harness side as follows:
Suspect Connector- ConnectorSpeaker Pin/Circuit Pin/Circuit
C949-27
C949-28
LH rear VME09
RME09
(WH/GN) (BN/YE)
C949-11
C949-12
RH rear VME12
RME12
(BN/WH) (BN/BU)
Is a fluctuating AC voltage present?
YES : Go to B9.
NO : Go to B7.
B7 CHECK THE ACM OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240a
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the RETM, harness side and ground as follows:
Suspect ConnectorCircuit
Speaker
Pin
VME09
LH rear C949-27
(WH/GN)
RME09
C949-28
(BN/YE)
VME12
RH rear C949-11
(BN/WH)
RME12
C949-12
(BN/BU)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to B8.
B8 CHECK THE ACM OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the ACM and the RETM, harness side; and between the ACM,
harness side and ground as follows:
ACM
RETM
Suspect
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Speaker
Pin
Pin
VME09
LH rear C240a-9
C949-27
(WH/GN)
RME09
C240a-22 C949-28
(BN/YE)
VME12
RH rear C240a-10 C949-11
(BN/WH)
RME12
C240a-23 C949-12
(BN/BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the ACM and the RETM, and greater than 10,000
ohms between the ACM and ground?
YES : Go to B17.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B9 CHECK THE RETM OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Suspect Speaker
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the suspect speaker, harness side and ground as follows:
Suspect ConnectorCircuit
Speaker
Pin
VME09
LH rear C702-1
(WH/GN)
RME09
C702-2
(BN/YE)
VME12
RH rear C802-1
(BN/WH)
RME12
C802-2
(BN/BU)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to B10.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
B10 CHECK THE RETM OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the suspect speaker, harness side and the RETM, harness side; and
between the suspect speaker, harness side and ground as follows:
Speaker
RETM
Suspect
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Speaker
Pin
Pin
VME09
LH rear C949-30
C702-1
(WH/GN)
RME09
C949-29
C702-2
(BN/YE)
VME12
RH rear C949-14
C802-1
(BN/WH)
RME12
C949-13
C802-2
(BN/BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the suspect speaker and the RETM, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the suspect speaker and ground?
YES : Go to B18.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B11 CHECK THE FRONT SPEAKER CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240a
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the suspect speaker, harness side and ground as follows:
Suspect Connector- ConnectorSpeaker Pin/Circuit Pin/Circuit
LH
C536-1 or VME07
front
C570a-1
(WH)
C536-2 or RME07
C570a-2 (WH/BN)
RH
C628-1 or VME10
front
C612a-1 (WH/VT)
C628-2 or RME10
C612a-2 (WH/OG)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to B12.
B12 CHECK THE FRONT SPEAKER CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the ACM, harness side and the suspect speaker, harness side; and
between the ACM, harness side and ground as follows:
ACM
Speaker
Suspect
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Speaker
Pin
Pin
LH
C536-1 or VME07
C240a-8
front
C570a-1
(WH)
C536-2 or RME07
C240a-21
C570a-2 (WH/BN)
RH
C628-1 or VME10
C240a-11
front
C612a-1 (WH/VT)
C628-2 or RME10
C240a-12
C612a-2 (WH/OG)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the ACM and the suspect speaker, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the ACM and ground?
YES : Go to B17.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B13 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SUSPECT TWEETER SPEAKER
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Suspect Tweeter Speaker
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Measure the AC voltage between the suspect tweeter speaker pin 1 and pin 2, harness side as
follows:
Suspect Connector- ConnectorSpeaker Pin/Circuit Pin/Circuit
C569-1
C569-2
LH
VME08
RME08
tweeter
(GN/OG) (GY/OG)
C613-1
C613-2
RH
VME11
RME11
tweeter
(VT/OG) (YE/OG)
Is a fluctuating AC voltage present?
YES : INSTALL a new speaker for the suspect tweeter speaker. REFER to Door Speaker. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to B14.
B14 CHECK THE TWEETER SPEAKER CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LF Speaker C570b or RF Speaker C612b
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the suspect tweeter speaker, harness side and ground as follows:
Tweeter
Suspect
Speaker
Circuit
Tweeter
ConnectorSpeaker
Pin
LH
VME08
C569-1
tweeter
(GN/OG)
RME08
C569-2
(GY/OG)
RH
VME11
C613-1
tweeter
(VT/OG)
RME11
C613-2
(YE/OG)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to B15.
B15 CHECK THE TWEETER SPEAKER CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the suspect tweeter speaker, harness side and the respective door
speaker, harness side; and between the suspect tweeter speaker, harness side and ground as follows:
Tweeter
Door
Suspect
Speaker
Speaker
Tweeter
Circuit
Connector- ConnectorSpeaker
Pin
Pin
LH
VME08
C569-1
C570b-1
tweeter
(GN/OG)
RME08
C569-2
C570b-2
(GY/OG)
RH
VME11
C613-1
C612b-1
tweeter
(VT/OG)
RME11
C613-2
C612b-2
(YE/OG)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the suspect tweeter speaker and the door speaker,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
and greater than 10,000 ohms between the suspect tweeter speaker and ground?
YES : Go to B16.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B16 ISOLATE THE DOOR SPEAKER
Connect: Suspect Tweeter Speaker
Install a known good door speaker for the door with the suspect tweeter speaker.
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Does the tweeter speaker operate correctly?
YES : INSTALL a new door speaker. REFER to Door Speaker. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : INSTALL a new tweeter speaker. REFER to Door Speaker. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B17 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Connect: All Disconnected Connectors
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
B18 CHECK FOR CORRECT RETM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Connect: All Disconnected Connectors
Disconnect the RETM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the RETM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new RETM. REFER to Rear Entertainment Module (RETM). TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test C: Poor Quality/Distorted/No Sound From One Or More Speakers (Not All Speakers) THX® Audio System
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The audio control module (ACM) directs the audio signals to the audio digital signal processing (DSP) module,
which processes the audio signals and sends them to the speakers. Each speaker has a signal and return circuit.
DTC Description
B1158 - Subwoofer #2 Not Connected
B2913 - Audio Subwoofer Not Connected
B2925 - Subwoofer Speaker Short Circuit
B2965 - Audio System Speaker Circuit Fault
Fault Set Conditions
May set when an open is detected in the subwoofer
circuit.
May set when an open is detected in the subwoofer
circuit.
Sets when a short to ground is detected in the
subwoofer circuit.
May set when an open or a short to ground is
detected in the front door or rear door speaker
circuits, or in the subwoofer.
The following should also be noted:
The ACM does not set DTC B2965 when the vehicle is equipped with the THX® audio system. Only the
DSP module can set this DTC.
This DTC may not set due to a fault in the circuitry to the rear tweeters.
An open or short to ground in the rear tweeter circuitry may cause both rear tweeters to lose sound.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Speaker
Subwoofer
DSP module
ACM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST C: POOR QUALITY/DISTORTED/NO SOUND FROM ONE OR MORE
SPEAKERS (NOT ALL SPEAKERS) - THX® AUDIO SYSTEM
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
C1 CHECK THE AUDIO SIGNALS TO THE SUSPECT SPEAKER
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Suspect Speaker
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Measure the AC voltage between the suspect speaker pins, harness side as follows:
Speaker
Speaker
Suspect
Connector- ConnectorSpeaker
Pin/Circuit Pin/Circuit
C702-1
C702-2
LR door
VME09
RME09
(WH/GN) (BN/YE)
C536-1
C536-2
LF door
VME28
RME28
(BN/VT) (BN/GN)
C569-1
C569-2
LH
VME07
RME07
tweeter
(WH)
(WH/BN)
C2359-1
C2359-4
LH front
VME07
RME07
imaging
(WH)
(WH/BN)
Center
C2359-2
C2359-5
front
VME06
RME06
imaging
(GN)
(GY/YE)
C2359-3
C2359-6
RH front
VME10
RME10
imaging
(WH/VT) (WH/OG)
C613-1
C613-2
RH
VME11
RME11
tweeter
(VT/OG) (WH/OG)
C628-1
C628-2
RF door
VME29
RME29
(GN/WH) (BU/WH)
C802-1
C802-2
RR door VME12
RME12
(BN/WH) (BN/BU)
Subwoofer C4212-1
1
VME01
C4212-2
RME01
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
(GN/VT)
C4212-3
Subwoofer
VME02
2
(VT)
LH rear C4337-1
center
VME30
imaging (GN/BN)
RH rear C4438-1
center
VME30
imaging (GN/BN)
(GY)
C4212-4
RME02
(YE)
C4337-2
RME30
(VT/BN)
C4438-2
RME30
(VT/BN)
Is a fluctuating AC voltage present?
YES : INSTALL a new speaker for the suspect speaker. REFER to Door Speaker, Instrument
Panel Speaker, or Subwoofer Speaker . CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to C2.
C2 CHECK THE CIRCUITS TO THE SUSPECT SPEAKER FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSP Module C4348b or C4348c
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the suspect speaker, harness side and ground as follows:
Speaker
Suspect
Connector- Circuit
Speaker
Pin
VME09
LR door
C702-1
(WH/GN)
RME09
C702-2
(BN/YE)
VME28
LF door
C536-1
(BN/VT)
RME28
C536-2
(BN/GN)
LH
VME07
C569-1
tweeter
(WH)
RME07
C569-2
(WH/BN)
LH front
VME07
C2359-1
imaging
(WH)
RME07
C2359-4
(WH/BN)
Center
front
C2359-2
VME06
(GN)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
imaging
C2359-5
RH front
imaging
C2359-3
C2359-6
RH
tweeter
C613-1
C613-2
RF door
C628-1
C628-2
RR door
C802-1
C802-2
Subwoofer
C4212-1
1
C4212-2
Subwoofer
C4212-3
2
C4212-4
LH rear
center
imaging
RH rear
center
imaging
RME06
(GY/YE)
VME10
(WH/VT)
RME10
(WH/OG)
VME11
(VT/OG)
RME11
(WH/OG)
VME29
(GN/WH)
RME29
(BU/WH)
VME12
(BN/WH)
RME12
(BN/BU)
VME01
(GN/VT)
RME01
(GY)
VME02
(VT)
RME02
(YE)
C4337-1
VME30
(GN/BN)
C4337-2
RME30
(VT/BN)
C4338-1
VME30
(GN/BN)
C4338-2
RME30
(VT/BN)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to C3.
C3 CHECK THE CIRCUITS TO THE SUSPECT SPEAKER FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO
GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the suspect speaker, harness side and the DSP module, harness
side; and between the suspect speaker, harness side and ground as follows:
Suspect Speaker
LR door
Speaker Connector- Pin
C702-1
C702-2
LF door
C536-1
C536-2
LH tweeter
C569-1
C569-2
LH front imaging
C2359-1
C2359-4
Center front imaging
C2359-2
C2359-5
RH front imaging
C2359-3
C2359-6
RH tweeter
C613-1
C613-2
RF door
C628-1
C628-2
RR door
C802-1
C802-2
Subwoofer 1
C4212-1
C4212-2
Subwoofer 2
C4212-3
C4212-4
LH rear center
C4337-1
imaging
C4337-2
RH rear center
C4338-1
imaging
C4338-2
DSP Module ConnectorPin
C4348c-7
C4348c-6
C4348c-3
C4348c-2
C4348b-9
C4348b-10
C4348b-2
C4348b-1
C4348b-4
C4348b-3
C4348b-6
C4348b-5
C4348b-11
C4348b-12
C4348c-5
C4348c-4
C4348c-18
C4348c-19
C4348c-14
C4348c-15
C4348c-16
C4348c-17
C4348b-13
Circuit
VME09 (WH/GN)
RME09 (BN/YE)
VME28 (BN/VT)
RME28 (BN/GN)
VME08 (GN/OG)
RME08 (GY/OG)
VME07 (WH)
RME07 (WH/BN)
VME06 (GN)
RME06 (GY/YE)
VME10 (WH/VT)
RME10 (WH/OG)
VME11 (VT/OG)
RME11 (YE/OG)
VME29 (GN/WH)
RME29 (BU/WH)
VME12 (BN/WH)
RME12 (BN/BU)
VME01 (GN/VT)
RME01 (GY)
VME02 (VT)
RME02 (YE)
VME30 (GN/BN)
C4348b-14
C4348b-13
RME30 (VT/BN)
VME30 (GN/BN)
C4348b-14
RME30 (VT/BN)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the suspect speaker and the DSP module, and
greater than 10,000 ohms between the suspect speaker and ground?
YES : Go to C4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
C4 ISOLATE THE SUSPECT SPEAKER
Key in OFF position.
Connect: DSP Module C4348b and C4348c
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Substitute a known good speaker for the suspect speaker.
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Is the concern still present?
YES : Go to C5.
NO : INSTALL a new speaker for the suspect speaker. REFER to Door Speaker, Instrument
Panel Speaker, or Subwoofer Speaker . CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
C5 CHECK FOR CORRECT DSP MODULE OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Connect: All Disconnected Connectors
Disconnect all the DSP module connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the DSP module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new DSP module. REFER to Audio Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Module.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test D: Poor Quality/Distorted/No Sound From All Speakers - THX® Audio System
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The THX® amplifier receives voltage through circuits SBP38 (BN/RD) and SBP18 (YE/RD), and ground
through circuit GD148 (BK/YE).
Left and right channel audio signals are sent from the audio control module (ACM) to the audio digital signal
processing (DSP) module through circuits VME07 (WH), RME07 (WH/BN), VME10 (WH/VT), and RME10
(WH/OG). If there is a fault on one of these circuits, the audio quality will be reduced by approximately 25%
for all speakers.
To enable the DSP module, the ACM sends voltage through the enable/clip circuit SME23 (VT/RD). The
circuit acts as both an output (to enable the amplifier) and an input (to detect an amplifier overload condition).
A variable resistor in the DSP module modifies the voltage signal from the ACM. In the event of an overload,
the ACM clips the audio output signal to the amplifier (heard as distortion), in order to prevent damage to the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
amplifier and speakers.
The clip/enable status is based on the following voltages, as detected by the ACM:
Less than 0.4 volts: amplifier disabled
Between 3.8 and 6.7 volts: amplifier enabled
Greater than 8.5 volts: amplifier clipped
NOTE:
Despite their names, DTCs B2925 and B292A apply to the DSP module
clip/enable circuit, not to the subwoofer.
DTC B2925 (Subwoofer Speaker Short Circuit) - sets with DTCs B2965 and B292A when a short to
ground is detected in circuit SME23 (VT/RD).
DTC B292A (Subwoofer #2 Speaker Short Circuit) - sets when an open or short to ground is detected in
circuit SME23 (VT/RD). If an open is detected, DTC B2965 will also be set. If a short to ground is
detected, DTCs B2965 and B2925 will also be set.
DTC B2965 (Audio System Speaker Circuit Fault) - sets when an open or short to ground is detected in
circuit SME23 (VT/RD).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
DSP module
ACM
PINPOINT TEST D: POOR QUALITY/DISTORTED/NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS - THX®
AUDIO SYSTEM
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
D1 CHECK THE DSP MODULE DTCs
Carry out the DSP module continuous and on-demand self-tests.
Is DTC B292A present?
YES : Go to D5.
NO : Go to D2.
D2 CHECK CIRCUITS SBP18 (YE/RD) AND SBP38 (BN/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSP Module C4348c
Measure the voltage between the DSP module, harness side and ground as follows:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
SBP38
C4348c-9
(BN/RD)
SBP38
C4348c-10
(BN/RD)
SBP18
C4348c-11
(YE/RD)
SBP18
C4348c-12
(YE/RD)
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to D3.
NO : VERIFY the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 38 (20A) or fuse 18 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR
the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to appropriate
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article to identify the possible sources of the circuit short.
D3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD148 (BK/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance between the DSP module, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
GD148
C4348c-22
(BK/YE)
GD148
C4348c-23
(BK/YE)
GD148
C4348c-24
(BK/YE)
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
D4 CHECK CIRCUIT SME23 (VT/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Connect: DSP Module C4348c
Disconnect: DSP Module C4348a
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the DSP moduleC4348a-8, circuit SME23 (VT/RD), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage between 3.8 and 6.7 volts?
YES : Go to D6.
NO : Go to D5.
D5 CHECK CIRCUIT SME23 (VT/RD) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240c
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the DSP module C4384a-8, circuit SME23 (VT/RD), harness side
and the ACM C240c-4, circuit SME23 (VT/RD), harness side; and between the DSP module
C4384a-8, circuit SME23 (VT/RD), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the DSP module and the ACM, and greater than
10,000 ohms between the DSP module and ground?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR and DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
D6 CHECK THE AUDIO SIGNALS TO THE DSP MODULE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Measure the AC voltage between the audio circuits at the DSP module as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME07
C4348a-1
(WH)
RME07
C4348a-2
(WH/BN)
VME10
C4348a-3
(WH/VT)
RME10
C4348a-4
(WH/OG)
Is a fluctuating AC voltage present?
YES : Go to D10.
NO : Go to D7.
D7 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS TO THE DSP MODULE FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240a
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the DSP module, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME07
C4348a-1
(WH)
RME07
C4348a-2
(WH/BN)
VME10
C4348a-3
(WH/VT)
RME10
C4348a-4
(WH/OG)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to D8.
D8 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS TO THE DSP MODULE FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the DSP module, harness side and the ACM, harness side; and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
between the DSP module, harness side and ground as follows:
DSP
ACM
Module
Connector- Circuit
ConnectorPin
Pin
VME07
C4348a-1 C240a-8
(WH)
RME07
C4348a-2 C240a-21
(WH/BN)
VME10
C4348a-3 C240a-11
(WH/VT)
RME10
C4348a-4 C240a-12
(WH/OG)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the DSP module and the ACM, and greater than
10,000 ohms between the DSP module and ground?
YES : Go to D9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
D9 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Connect: All Disconnected Connectors
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). CLEAR any DSP
module DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR any DSP module DTCs present.
D10 CHECK FOR CORRECT DSP MODULE OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Connect: All Disconnected Connectors
Disconnect all the DSP module connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the DSP module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new DSP module. REFER to Audio Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Module.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test E: The Subwoofer Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Audiophile
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The subwoofer amplifier receives voltage through circuit SBP38 (BN/RD) and ground through circuit GD148
(BK/YE). The subwoofer speakers and subwoofer amplifier are integral to the enclosure and cannot be repaired
individually.
To enable the subwoofer amplifier, the audio control module (ACM) sends voltage through the enable/clip
circuit SME23 (VT/RD). The circuit acts as both an output (to enable the amplifier) and an input (to detect an
amplifier overload condition). A variable resistor in the subwoofer amplifier modifies the voltage signal from
the ACM. In the event of an overload, the ACM clips the audio output signal to the amplifier (heard as
distortion), in order to prevent damage to the amplifier and speakers.
The clip/enable status is based on the following voltages, as detected by the ACM:
Less than 0.4 volts: amplifier disabled
Between 3.8 and 6.7 volts: amplifier enabled
Greater than 8.5 volts: amplifier clipped
An open in circuit SME23 (VT/RD) will cause the subwoofer to produce no sound, because the enable signal
will not reach the subwoofer amplifier. A short to ground or short to voltage can cause severe distortion to be
heard in the subwoofer.
DTC B1154 (Subwoofer #1 Short to Ground) - sets when a short to ground is detected on circuit RME22
(GN/WH) or circuit VME22 (VT/GN). This DTC only sets during the on-demand self-test.
DTC B1155 (Subwoofer #1 Short to Battery) - sets when a short to voltage is detected on circuit RME22
(GN/WH) or circuit VME22 (VT/GN). This DTC only sets during the on-demand self-test.
DTC B2913 (Audio Subwoofer Not Connected) - sets when the ACM does not detect the subwoofer
through circuit SME23 (VT/RD) during the subwoofer connection test (part of the ACM self-test).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Subwoofer
ACM
PINPOINT TEST E: THE SUBWOOFER IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY AUDIOPHILE
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
E1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBP38 (BN/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Subwoofer C4208
Fig. 7: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the subwoofer C4208-5, circuit SBP38 (BN/RD), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : VERIFY the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 38 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit.
CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to
appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article to identify the possible sources of the circuit
short.
E2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD148 (BK/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the subwoofer C4208-2, circuit GD148 (BK/YE), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
E3 CHECK CIRCUIT SME23 (VT/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Fig. 9: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the subwoofer C4208-1, circuit SME23 (VT/RD), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage between 3.8 and 6.7 volts?
YES : Go to E6.
NO : Go to E4.
E4 CHECK CIRCUIT SME23 (VT/RD) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240c
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the subwoofer C4208-1, circuit SME23 (VT/RD), harness side and
ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to E5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
E5 CHECK CIRCUIT SME23 (VT/RD) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 11: Checking Circuit For Open Or Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the subwoofer C4208-1, circuit SME23 (VT/RD), harness side and
the ACM C240c-4, circuit SME23 (VT/RD), harness side; and between the subwoofer C4208-1,
circuit SME23 (VT/RD), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the subwoofer and the ACM, and greater than
10,000 ohms between the subwoofer and ground?
YES : Go to E9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
E6 CHECK THE AUDIO SIGNAL TO THE SUBWOOFER
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Subwoofer C4208
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Checking Audio Signal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the AC voltage between the subwoofer C4208-7, circuit VME22 (VT/GN), harness side
and the subwoofer C4208-8, circuit RME22 (GN/WH), harness side.
Is a fluctuating AC voltage present?
YES : INSTALL a new subwoofer. REFER to Subwoofer Speaker. CLEAR any DTCs present.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to E7.
E7 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240c
Key in ON position.
Fig. 13: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the subwoofer C4208-7, circuit VME22 (VT/GN), harness side and
ground; and between the subwoofer C4208-8, circuit RME22 (GN/WH), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to E8.
E8 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the subwoofer, harness side and the ACM, harness side; and
between the subwoofer, harness side and ground as follows:
Subwoofer
ACM
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Pin
Pin
VME22
C4208-7
C240c-1
(VT/GN)
RME22
C4208-8
C240c-2
(GN/WH)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the subwoofer and the ACM, and greater than
10,000 ohms between the subwoofer and ground?
YES : Go to E9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
E9 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Connect: All Disconnected Connectors
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test F: The Steering Wheel Controls Are Inoperative/Do Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
There are 4 different steering wheel controls configurations:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Non-navigation, without the SYNC system
VOL-, VOL+, SEEK-, SEEK+, MEDIA
Non-navigation, with the SYNC system
VOL-, VOL+, SEEK-, SEEK+, VOICE, MEDIA, PHONE, OK
Navigation, without the SYNC system
VOL-, VOL+, SEEK-, SEEK+, VOICE, MEDIA
Navigation, with the SYNC system
VOL-, VOL+, SEEK-, SEEK+, VOICE, MEDIA, PHONE
The VOL-, VOL+, SEEK+, SEEK-, and MEDIA buttons are always wired to the audio control module (ACM).
Voltage is sent from the ACM to the steering wheel controls through circuit VME14 (GY/YE), and the ACM
grounds the reference voltage through circuit RME24 (BU/WH).
For vehicles equipped with navigation, but not the SYNC system, the VOICE button is wired to the ACM.
For vehicles equipped with the SYNC system, the VOICE (an icon of someone speaking), PHONE (an icon of a
phone with an up and down arrow), and OK buttons are wired directly to the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM) unless the vehicle is equipped with navigation, in which case there is no OK button, and the
VOICE and PHONE buttons are wired to the ACM. Voltage is sent from the APIM (or ACM if equipped with
navigation) to the steering wheel controls through circuit VME54 (BU/OG), and the APIM (or ACM if
equipped with navigation) grounds the reference voltage through circuit RME54 (WH/VT).
When a switch is pressed, the voltage is routed through a specific resistor value for each function. The ACM (or
APIM) then uses this reference voltage to determine which control input function has been selected.
DTC B1117 (Audio Steering Wheel Button Stuck) - set by the ACM or the APIM (depending on vehicle
configuration) when a steering wheel control button is detected as active for greater than 120 seconds
during normal operation, or for any duration during the self-test.
DTC B1136 (Audio Steering Wheel Switch #2 Circuit Failure) - set by the ACM or the APIM (depending
on vehicle configuration) when the reference voltage to the steering wheel controls is out-of-range. This
can be caused by a number of different failures on the steering wheel controls circuit, except for a short to
ground in circuit RME54 (WH/VT). This DTC only applies to the VOICE, PHONE, and OK buttons.
DTC B2404 (Audio Steering Wheel Switch Circuit Fault) - set by the ACM when the reference voltage to
the steering wheel controls is out-of-range. This can be caused by a number of different failures on the
steering wheel controls circuit, except for a short to ground in circuit RME24 (BU/WH). This DTC only
applies to the VOL-, VOL+, SEEK+, SEEK-, and MEDIA buttons.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Clockspring
Steering wheel controls
ACM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
APIM (if equipped)
PINPOINT TEST F: THE STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS ARE INOPERATIVE/DO NOT
OPERATE CORRECTLY
F1 DETERMINE THE INOPERATIVE STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Determine which steering wheel controls are inoperative by pressing each steering wheel control
button individually while operating the audio system in various modes (AM/FM, SYNC, etc.).
Is the concern with the VOL-, VOL+, SEEK-, SEEK+, or MEDIA button?
YES : Go to F2.
NO : Go to F3.
F2 MONITOR THE STEERING WHEEL CONTROL PIDs (EXCEPT NAVIGATION/SYNC
SWITCHES)
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ACM DataLogger
Monitor the steering wheel controls PIDs while pressing each steering wheel controls button as
follows:
Steering
Wheel
PID
Control
Button
VOL- VOL_DN
VOL+ VOL_UP
SEEK- SEEK_DN
SEEK+ SEEK_UP
MEDIA MODE_SW
Do the PID values agree with the switch positions?
YES : Go to F8.
NO : If only one PID value is incorrect or the PID value always reads one particular switch
position, INSTALL new steering wheel controls. REFER to Steering Wheel Controls. CLEAR
any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
Otherwise, go to F3.
F3 MONITOR THE STEERING WHEEL CONTROL PIDs (NAVIGATION/SYNC SWITCHES)
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ACM DataLogger (With Navigation)
or APIM DataLogger (Without Navigation)
Monitor the steering wheel controls PIDs while pressing each steering wheel controls button as
follows:
Steering
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Wheel
PID
Controls
Button
VOICE VOICE_SW
PHONE PHONE_SW
OK
(without
OK_SW
navigation
only)
Do the PID values agree with the switch positions?
YES : For vehicles with navigation, go to F8.
For vehicles without navigation, go to F9.
NO : If only one PID value is incorrect or the PID value always reads one particular switch
position, INSTALL new steering wheel controls. REFER to Steering Wheel Controls. CLEAR
any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
Otherwise, go to F4.
F4 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT TO THE CLOCKSPRING FOR A SHORT
TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218a
Disconnect: ACM C240a or APIM C3342
Key in ON position.
Fig. 14: Measuring Voltage Between Clockspring C218A-13, Circuit VME14 (GY/YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For a concern with the VOL-, VOL+, SEEK-, SEEK+, or MEDIA buttons, measure the voltage
between the clockspring C218a-13, circuit VME14 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 15: Measuring Voltage Between Clockspring C218A-6, Circuit VME54 (BU/OG)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For a concern with the VOICE, PHONE (or SEND), or OK (or END) buttons, measure the voltage
between the clockspring C218a-6, circuit VME54 (BU/OG), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to F5.
F5 CHECK THE CIRCUITS TO THE CLOCKSPRING FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO
GROUND
NOTE:
Circuits RME14 (BU/WH) and RME54 (WH/VT) do not need to be checked
for a short to ground.
Key in OFF position.
For a concern with the VOL-, VOL+, SEEK-, SEEK+, or MEDIA buttons, measure the resistance
between the ACM, harness side and the clockspring, harness side; and between the ACM, harness
side and ground as follows:
ACM Clockspring
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Pin
Pin
VME14
C240a-18 C218a-13
(GY/YE)
RME24
C240a-19 C218a-12
(BU/WH)
For a concern with the VOICE, PHONE, or OK buttons, measure the resistance between the ACM
(with navigation) or APIM (with the SYNC system, without navigation), harness side and the
clockspring, harness side; and between the ACM (with navigation) or APIM (with the SYNC
system, without navigation), harness side and ground as follows:
ACM or
APIM Clockspring Circuit
Connector- Connector-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Pin
C240a-17
or C334214
C240a-16
or C334215
Pin
C218a-6
VME54
(BU/OG)
C218a-4
RME54
(WH/VT)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the ACM (or APIM) and the clockspring, and
greater than 10,000 ohms between the ACM (or APIM) and ground?
YES : Go to F6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
F6 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT TO THE STEERING WHEEL
CONTROLS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218b
Disconnect: Steering Wheel Controls C2999
Key in ON position.
For a concern with the VOL-, VOL+, SEEK-, SEEK+, or MEDIA buttons, measure the voltage
between the clockspring C218b-10, circuit VME14 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
For a concern with the VOICE, PHONE, or OK buttons, measure the voltage between the
clockspring C218b-3, circuit VME54 (BU/OG), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to F7.
F7 CHECK THE CIRCUITS TO THE STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS FOR AN OPEN OR
SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
Circuits RME14 (BU/WH) and RME54 (WH/VT) do not need to be checked
for a short to ground.
Key in OFF position.
For a concern with the VOL-, VOL+, SEEK-, SEEK+, or MEDIA buttons, measure the resistance
between the clockspring, harness side and the steering wheel controls, harness side; and between
the clockspring, harness side and ground as follows:
Steering
Clockspring Wheel
Connector- Controls Circuit
ConnectorPin
Pin
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
C218b-10
C218b-11
VME14
(GY/YE)
RME24
C2999-4
(BU/WH)
C2999-2
For a concern with the VOICE, PHONE, or OK buttons, measure the resistance between the
clockspring, harness side and the steering wheel controls, harness side; and between the
clockspring, harness side and ground as follows:
Steering
Clockspring Wheel
Connector- Controls Circuit
ConnectorPin
Pin
VME54
C218b-3
C2999-6
(BU/OG)
RME54
C218b-5
C2999-7
(WH/VT)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the clockspring and the steering wheel controls,
and greater than 10,000 ohms between the clockspring and ground?
YES : INSTALL a new clockspring. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal
operation.
F8 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Connect: All Disconnected Connectors
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
F9 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Disconnect the APIM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pints
Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Wait 2 minutes for the APIM to re-initialize.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test G: The Audio Input Jack Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation - Vehicles Without the SYNC System
Audio signals are sent from the audio input jack to the audio control module (ACM). There are no external
power or ground circuits to the audio input jack.
Vehicles With The SYNC System
Audio signals are sent from the audio input jack to the accessory protocol interface module (APIM). The signals
are then sent to the ACM. There are no external power or ground circuits to the audio input jack.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Audio input jack
ACM
APIM (if equipped)
PINPOINT TEST G: THE AUDIO INPUT JACK IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Before carrying out this pinpoint test, make sure the MP3 device is operating
correctly.
G1 CHECK THE AUDIO INPUT JACK AUDIO
Connect: Known Good MP3 Device (to Audio Input Jack)
Using the known good MP3 device, attempt to play a file using the audio input jack.
Does the file play correctly?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may be with the customer device.
NO : Go to G2.
G2 DETERMINE THE VEHICLE CONTENT
Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the SYNC system.
Is the vehicle equipped with the SYNC system?
YES : Go to G3.
NO : Go to G4.
G3 CHECK THE APIM AUDIO OUTPUT
Attempt to play an audio file using either the universal serial bus (USB) port or a Bluetooth®
device.
Is the audio output OK for devices connected through the USB port or Bluetooth®?
YES : Go to G4.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test S .
G4 CHECK THE AUDIO INPUT JACK CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Audio Input Jack C3312
Disconnect: ACM C240b or APIM C3342 (if equipped)
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the audio input jack, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME46
C3312-1
(BU/GN)
RME46
C3312-2
(WH/GN)
RME45
C3312-3
(YE/GN)
VME45
C3312-4
(BU)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to G5.
G5 CHECK THE AUDIO INPUT JACK CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the audio input jack, harness side and the ACM (or APIM, if
equipped), harness side; and between the audio input jack, harness side and ground as follows:
Audio
ACM or
Input Jack APIM
Circuit
Connector- ConnectorPin
Pin
C240b-6 or VME46
C3312-1
C3342-47 (BU/GN)
C240b-14
RME46
C3312-2 or C3342(WH/GN)
48
C240b-8 or RME45
C3312-3
C3342-46 (YE/GN)
C240b-7 or VME45
C3312-4
C3342-45
(BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the audio input jack and the ACM (or APIM), and
greater than 10,000 ohms between the audio input jack and ground?
YES : Go to G6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
G6 SUBSTITUTE THE AUDIO INPUT JACK
Install a known good audio input jack.
Operate the audio system using a device plugged into the audio input jack.
Does the system operate correctly?
YES : INSTALL a new audio input jack. REFER to Audio Input Jack. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : INSTALL the original audio input jack. For vehicles without the SYNC system, go to G7.
For vehicles with the SYNC system, go to G8.
G7 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
G8 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the APIM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pints
Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Wait 2 minutes for the APIM to re-initialize.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test H: The Satellite Audio Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Vehicles Without DVD
Entertainment
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The satellite digital audio receiver system (SDARS) module receives voltage through circuit CBP13 (GY/BN)
and ground through circuit GD148 (BK/YE). Digital signals are received by the satellite radio antenna and sent
to the SDARS module, which converts the signals to analog and send them to either the audio control module
(ACM) or the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) (if equipped).
If there is an open in the satellite antenna circuit, there will be no satellite audio. The ACM display will indicate
a satellite antenna concern (the method varies according to the type of ACM) when the audio system is operated
in satellite radio mode. To diagnose an open in the satellite antenna circuit, go to Pinpoint Test J .
The SDARS module transmits left and right channel audio signals. When there is a fault on any of these
circuits, the audio quality is reduced. If the circuits for a specific channel are shorted together, loss of audio on
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
that entire channel will occur. This can be detected by using the SDARS module tones test.
DTC U0184 (Lost Communication With Radio [ACM]) - set by the SDARS module when certain
medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) messages are missing from the ACM.
DTC U0193 (Lost Communication With Digital Audio Control Module [SDARS]) - set by the ACM
when certain MS-CAN messages are missing from the SDARS module.
DTC U0197 (Lost Communication With Telephone Control Module) - set by the SDARS module when
certain MS-CAN messages are missing from the APIM.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Subscription status
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SDARS module
APIM (if equipped)
ACM
PINPOINT TEST H: THE SATELLITE AUDIO IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY - VEHICLES WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
H1 VERIFY AN ACTIVE SUBSCRIPTION
Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode and observe the display.
Does the display read CALL SIRIUS?
YES : The subscription has expired. INFORM the customer to contact Sirius to re-activate the
subscription.
NO : If the display indicates a satellite antenna fault, go to Pinpoint Test J .
Otherwise, go to H2.
H2 CHECK FOR NON-NETWORK DTCs
Carry out the SDARS module self-test using the scan tool.
Are any non-network DTCs present?
YES : For DTC B1031 or DTC B1032, go to Pinpoint Test J .
For all other DTCs, REFER to DTC Charts in this service information.
NO : Go to H3.
H3 CHECK FOR COMMUNICATION WITH THE ACM AND APIM
Carry out the network test using the scan tool.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Does the scan tool communicate with the ACM and the APIM (if equipped)?
YES : Go to H4.
NO : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no
communication with the ACM or APIM.
H4 CHECK FOR LOST COMMUNICATION DTCs
Key in ON position.
Using the scan tool, clear any ACM and SDARS module continuous DTCs.
Key in OFF position.
Key in ON position.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
Retrieve the ACM and SDARS module continuous DTCs.
Is DTC U0184 (SDARS module), U0193 (ACM), or U0197 (SDARS module, if equipped with
the SYNC system) present?
YES : For DTC U0184, go to H13.
For DTC U0193, go to H11.
For DTC U0197, go to H12.
NO : Go to H5.
H5 CHECK THE SATELLITE AUDIO OUTPUT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SDARS Module Tones Test
Carry out the SDARS module tones test.
Are alternating LH/RH tones audible?
YES : Go to H11.
NO : If the vehicle is equipped with the SYNC system, go to H6.
Otherwise, go to H9.
H6 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE SYNC SYSTEM AUDIO
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Connect: Known Good MP3 Device (To Audio Input Jack)
Using the ACM buttons, press AUX until "SYNC LINE IN" appears on the display (except
navigation), or press MEDIA, select "USER DEVICE", and press "SOURCE" repeatedly until
"LINE IN" appears (navigation).
Using the known good device, attempt to play a file through the audio input jack.
Does the SYNC system audio operate correctly?
YES : Go to H7.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test S .
H7 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS TO THE APIM FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: APIM C3342
Disconnect: SDARS Module C4344
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the SDARS module, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME41
C4344-5
(GN/OG)
VME42
C4344-6
(VT/BN)
RME41
C4344-11
(BU/BN)
RME42
C4344-12
(YE/BU)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to H8.
H8 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS TO THE APIM FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the APIM, harness side and the SDARS module, harness side; and
between the APIM, harness side and ground as follows:
SDARS
APIM
Module
ConnectorCircuit
ConnectorPin
Pin
VME41
C3342-10 C4344-5
(GN/OG)
VME42
C3342-7
C4344-6
(VT/BN)
RME41
C3342-11 C4344-11
(BU/BN)
RME42
C3342-8 C4344-12
(YE/BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the APIM and the SDARS module, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the APIM and ground?
YES : Go to H11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
H9 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS TO THE ACM FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240b
Disconnect: SDARS Module C4344
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the ACM, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME52
C240b-1
(BU)
RME52
C240b-2
(GY/OG)
VME53
C240b-9
(VT/GN)
RME53
C240b-10
(BN/WH)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to H10.
H10 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS FROM THE SDARS MODULE FOR AN OPEN OR
SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the SDARS module, harness side and the ACM, harness side; and
between the SDARS module, harness side and ground as follows:
SDARS
ACM
Module
ConnectorConnectorPin/Circuit
Pin/Circuit
C4344-5
C240b-1
VME41
VME52
(GN/OG)
(BU)
C4344-6
C240b-9
VME42
RME52
(VT/BN) (GY/OG)
C4344-11 C240b-2
RME41
VME53
(BU/BN) (VT/GN)
C4344-12
RME42
C240b-10
RME53
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
(YE/BU)
(BN/WH)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the SDARS module and the ACM, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the SDARS module and ground?
YES : Go to H11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
H11 ISOLATE THE SDARS MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Connect: ACM C240b
Connect: APIM C3342 (If Equipped)
Install a new SDARS module. Refer to Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS)
Module.
Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
Does the system operate correctly?
YES : The concern was caused by an inoperative SDARS module. The system is operating
correctly at this time.
NO : If equipped with the SYNC system, go to H12.
Otherwise, go to H13.
H12 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
Disconnect the APIM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Wait 2 minutes for the APIM to re-initialize.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, go to H13.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
H13 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test I: The Satellite Audio Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Vehicles With DVD
Entertainment
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The satellite digital audio receiver system (SDARS) module receives voltage through circuit CBP13 (GY/BN)
and ground through circuit GD148 (BK/YE). Digital signals are received by the satellite radio antenna and sent
to the SDARS module, which converts the signals to analog and sends them to either the rear entertainment
module (RETM), or the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) (if equipped).
The satellite audio signals utilize separate circuitry from the remaining audio signals. This allows the audio
control module (ACM) to distinguish between satellite audio and SYNC or DVD audio, in order to provide for
more dual-play options.
If there is an open in the satellite antenna circuit, there will be no satellite audio. The ACM display will indicate
a satellite antenna concern (the method varies according to the type of ACM) when the audio system is operated
in satellite radio mode. To diagnose an open in the satellite antenna circuit, go to Pinpoint Test J .
Circuits VME41 (GN/OG), RME41 (BU/BN), VME42 (VT/BN), and RME42 (YE/BU) transmit left and right
channel audio signals. When there is a fault on any of these circuits, the audio quality is reduced. If the circuits
for a specific channel are shorted together, loss of audio on that entire channel will occur. This can be detected
by using the SDARS module tones test.
DTC Description
U0184 - Lost Communication With Radio (ACM)
U0193 - Lost Communication With Digital Audio Control
Module (SDARS)
U0196 - Lost Communication With Entertainment Control
Fault Set Conditions
Set by the SDARS module when certain
medium speed controller area network (MSCAN) messages are missing from the ACM.
Set by the ACM or the RETM when certain
MS-CAN messages are missing from the
SDARS module.
Set by the SDARS module when certain
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Module - Rear (AUX)
U0197 - Lost Communication With Telephone Control
Module
MS-CAN messages are missing from the
RETM.
Set by the SDARS module when certain
MS-CAN messages are missing from the
APIM.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Subscription status
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SDARS module
RETM
APIM (if equipped)
ACM
PINPOINT TEST I: THE SATELLITE AUDIO IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY - VEHICLES WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
I1 VERIFY AN ACTIVE SUBSCRIPTION
Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode and observe the display.
Does the display read CALL SIRIUS?
YES : The subscription has expired. INFORM the customer to contact Sirius to re-activate the
subscription.
NO : If the display indicates a satellite antenna fault, go to Pinpoint Test J .
Otherwise, go to I2.
I2 CHECK FOR NON-NETWORK DTCs
Carry out the SDARS module self-test using the scan tool.
Are any non-network DTCs present?
YES : For DTC B1031 or DTC B1032, go to Pinpoint Test J .
For all other DTCs, REFER to DTC Charts in this service information.
NO : Go to I3.
I3 CHECK FOR COMMUNICATION WITH THE ACM AND APIM
Carry out the network test using the scan tool.
Does the scan tool communicate with the ACM, the RETM, and the APIM (if equipped)?
YES : Go to I4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no
communication with the ACM or APIM.
I4 CHECK FOR LOST COMMUNICATION DTCs
Key in ON position.
Using the scan tool, clear any ACM and SDARS module continuous DTCs.
Key in OFF position.
Key in ON position.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
Retrieve the ACM and SDARS module continuous DTCs.
Is DTC U0184 (SDARS module), U0193 (ACM), U0196 (SDARS module), or U0197 (SDARS
module, if equipped with the SYNC system) present?
YES : For DTC U0184, go to I16.
For DTC U0193, go to I13.
For DTC U0197, go to I14.
For DTC U0196, go to I15.
NO : Go to I5.
I5 CHECK THE SATELLITE AUDIO OUTPUT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SDARS Module Tones Test
Carry out the SDARS module tones test.
Are alternating LH/RH tones audible?
YES : Go to I13.
NO : Go to I6.
I6 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE DVD AUDIO
Insert a known good DVD, and operate the audio system in DVD mode.
Observe the audio output from the DVD.
Does the DVD audio operate correctly?
YES : If the vehicle is equipped with the SYNC system, go to I7.
Otherwise, go to I11.
NO : Go to Symptom Chart - Audio System to diagnose the observed symptom.
I7 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS TO THE APIM FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SDARS Module C4344
Disconnect: APIM C3342
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between the SDARS module, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME41
C4344-5
(GN/OG)
VME42
C4344-6
(VT/BN)
RME41
C4344-11
(BU/BN)
RME42
C4344-12
(YE/BU)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to I8.
I8 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS TO THE APIM FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the SDARS module, harness side and the APIM, harness side; and
between the SDARS module, harness side and ground as follows:
SDARS
APIM
Module
Connector- Circuit
ConnectorPin
Pin
VME41
C4344-5 C3342-10
(GN/OG)
VME42
C4344-6
C3342-7
(VT/BN)
RME41
C4344-11 C3342-11
(BU/BN)
RME42
C4344-12 C3342-8
(YE/BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the SDARS module and the APIM, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the SDARS module and ground?
YES : Go to I9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
I9 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS FROM THE APIM TO THE RETM FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Disconnect: RETM C949
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between the RETM, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME41
C949-5
(GN/OG)
RME41
C949-6
(BU/BN)
VME42
C949-21
(VT/BN)
RME42
C949-22
(YE/BU)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to I10.
I10 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS FROM THE APIM TO THE RETM FOR AN OPEN OR
SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the APIM, harness side and the RETM, harness side; and between
the APIM, harness side and ground as follows:
APIM
RETM
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Pin
Pin
VME41
C3342-40
C949-5
(GN/OG)
RME41
C3342-41
C949-6
(BU/BN)
VME42
C3342-42 C949-21
(VT/BN)
RME42
C3342-43 C949-22
(YE/BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the APIM and the RETM, and greater than 10,000
ohms between the APIM and ground?
YES : Go to I13.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
I11 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS FROM THE SDARS MODULE FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SDARS Module C4344
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: RETM C949
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the SDARS module, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME41
C4344-5
(GN/OG)
VME42
C4344-6
(VT/BN)
RME41
C4344-11
(BU/BN)
RME42
C4344-12
(YE/BU)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to I12.
I12 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS FROM THE SDARS MODULE FOR AN OPEN OR
SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the SDARS module, harness side and the RETM, harness side; and
between the SDARS module, harness side and ground as follows:
SDARS
RETM
Module
Connector- Circuit
ConnectorPin
Pin
VME41
C4344-5
C949-5
(GN/OG)
VME42
C4344-6
C949-21
(VT/BN)
RME41
C4344-11
C949-6
(BU/BN)
RME42
C4344-12 C949-22
(YE/BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the SDARS module and the RETM, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the SDARS module and ground?
YES : Go to I13.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
I13 ISOLATE THE SDARS MODULE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Connect: RETM C949
Connect: APIM C3342 (If Equipped)
Install a new SDARS module. Refer to Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS)
Module.
Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
Does the system operate correctly?
YES : The concern was caused by an inoperative SDARS module. The system is operating
correctly at this time.
NO : If equipped with the SYNC system, go to I14.
Otherwise, go to I15.
I14 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
Disconnect the APIM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Wait 2 minutes for the APIM to re-initialize.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, go to I15.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
I15 CHECK FOR CORRECT RETM OPERATION
Disconnect the RETM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the RETM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new RETM. REFER to Rear Entertainment Module (RETM). TEST the
system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, go to I16.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
or corroded connector.
I16 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test J: Poor Reception/No Sound - Satellite Audio
Normal Operation
Digital signals are received by the satellite radio antenna and sent to the satellite digital audio receiver system
(SDARS) module, which then converts the signals and provides analog audio signals to the audio control
module (ACM), the accessory protocol interface module (APIM), or to the rear entertainment module (RETM),
depending on vehicle configuration.
A short to ground typically has no effect on the antenna signal. However, an open in the antenna circuit will
result in no sound from the satellite radio system. A short to voltage in the antenna circuit can have varying
effects on the system.
DTC B1031 (SDARS Satellite Antenna Open) - sets when an open or high resistance is detected in the
satellite antenna circuit. This DTC can be either continuous or on-demand.
DTC B1032 (SDARS Satellite Antenna Short) - sets when a short to ground or short to voltage is detected
in the satellite antenna circuit. This DTC can be either continuous or on-demand.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Obstructions to the line of sight
Satellite radio antenna cable
Satellite radio antenna
SDARS module
PINPOINT TEST J: POOR RECEPTION/NO SOUND - SATELLITE AUDIO
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
J1 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE SATELLITE AUDIO SYSTEM
Drive the vehicle to an open location, free of obstacles.
Operate the audio system in satellite audio mode.
Is the reception OK?
YES : The system is OK at this time. ADVISE the customer that the satellite signal can be affected
by obstructions to the satellite radio antenna line of sight.
NO : Go to J2.
J2 CHECK FOR A SATELLITE ANTENNA FAULT MESSAGE
Operate the audio system in satellite audio mode and observe the ACM display.
Does the ACM display indicate a satellite radio antenna fault?
YES : Go to J3.
NO : For vehicles without a DVD entertainment system, go to Pinpoint Test H .
For vehicles with a DVD entertainment system, go to Pinpoint Test I .
J3 CHECK THE SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CABLE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Satellite Radio Antenna Connection (At SDARS Module)
Disconnect: Satellite Radio Antenna Connection (At Satellite Radio Antenna)
Measure the resistance of the satellite radio antenna cable between the SDARS module and the
satellite radio antenna connection.
Is the resistance less than 1 ohm?
YES : Go to J4.
NO : INSTALL a new satellite radio antenna cable. REFER to Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio.
CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
J4 SUBSTITUTE THE SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Install a known good satellite radio antenna.
Operate the audio system in satellite audio mode.
Is the reception OK?
YES : INSTALL a new satellite radio antenna. REFER to Antenna - Satellite Radio. CLEAR any
DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to J5.
J5 CHECK FOR CORRECT SDARS MODULE OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the SDARS module connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
pushed-out pins
Connect the SDARS module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SDARS module. REFER to Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System
(SDARS) Module. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test K: The Video System Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The rear entertainment module (RETM) routes audio signals to the audio control module (ACM). In single-play
mode, the ACM plays the DVD audio on all speakers. In dual-play mode, the audio to the rear speakers is
muted and the RETM continues to control the rear audio source to the headphones.
If the vehicle is equipped with satellite audio and/or the SYNC system, the audio signals from these sources are
routed through the RETM to the ACM. This allows for single-play and dual-play to include these audio sources.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
RETM
ACM
PINPOINT TEST K: THE VIDEO SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
Before diagnosing the RETM, make sure a known good DVD is installed.
K1 IDENTIFY THE SYMPTOM
Operate the audio system in DVD single-play mode and observe the DVD audio.
Does the DVD audio operate correctly?
YES : Go to K2.
NO : If the vehicle is equipped with satellite audio or the SYNC system, go to K3.
Otherwise, go to K4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
K2 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE DVD VIDEO
Operate the audio system in DVD single-play mode.
Does the DVD video operate correctly?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern was caused by an incorrect
system setting. INFORM the customer that pressing the power button or the VIDEO button while a
DVD is playing can cause the display to go blank.
NO : Go to K6.
K3 CHECK THE RETM AUDIO PASS-THROUGH
Operate the audio system in satellite audio or SYNC mode.
Does the satellite audio (or SYNC) audio operate correctly?
YES : Go to K6.
NO : Go to K4.
K4 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS TO THE ACM FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240b
Disconnect: RETM C949
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the ACM, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME17
C240b-1
(GN)
RME17
C240b-2
(GY)
VME18
C240b-9
(VT)
RME18
C240b-10
(YE)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to K5.
K5 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS TO THE ACM FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the ACM, harness side and the RETM, harness side; and between
the ACM, harness side and ground as follows:
ACM
RETM Circuit
Connector- ConnectorMicrosoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Pin
Pin
C240b-1
C949-10
C240b-2
C240b-9
C240b-10
VME17
(GN)
RME17
C949-9
(GY)
VME18
C949-26
(VT)
RME18
C949-25
(YE)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the ACM and the RETM, and greater than 10,000
ohms between the ACM and ground?
YES : Go to K6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
K6 CHECK FOR CORRECT RETM OPERATION
Disconnect all the RETM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the RETM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new RETM. REFER to Rear Entertainment Module (RETM). TEST the
system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, Go to K7
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
K7 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:15 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test L: No Auxiliary Headphone Audio - THX®
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The audio control module (ACM) receives audio input from the rear entertainment module (RETM). The audio
signals are then routed to the audio digital signal processing (DSP) module. In dual-play mode, the rear speaker
audio is muted and the RETM controls the rear audio source to the headphones.
It is important to note that if the vehicle is equipped with the SYNC system, the headphones must be set to
channel A in order to listen to SYNC media. Channel B only allows audio from the RETM, which can be either
DVD audio or audio from a peripheral device plugged into the RETM.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Headphones
RETM
PINPOINT TEST L: NO AUXILIARY HEADPHONE AUDIO - THX®
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
Before diagnosing this condition, make sure the headphone batteries are OK.
L1 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE BASE AUDIO SYSTEM
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Does the audio system operate correctly?
YES : Go to L2.
NO : Go to Symptom Chart - Audio System.
L2 CHECK THE ACM OUTPUT TO THE RETM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: RETM C949
NOTE:
Make sure the headphones are set to "Radio" as their audio source.
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) dual-play mode.
Measure the AC voltage between the RETM pins, harness side as follows:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Connector- ConnectorPin/Circuit Pin/Circuit
C949-11
C949-12
VME12
RME12
(BN/WH) (BN/BU)
C949-27
C949-28
VME09
RME09
(WH/GN) (BN/YE)
Is a fluctuating AC voltage present?
YES : Go to L5.
NO : Go to L3.
L3 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS FROM THE ACM FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240a
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the ACM, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME09
C240a-9
(WH/GN)
VME12
C240a-10
(BN/WH)
RME09
C240a-22
(BN/YE)
RME12
C240a-23
(BN/BU)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to L4.
L4 CHECK THE AUDIO CIRCUITS FROM THE ACM FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the ACM, harness side and the RETM, harness side; and between
the ACM, harness side and ground as follows:
ACM
RETM
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Pin
Pin
VME09
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
C240a-9
C240a-10
C240a-22
C240a-23
C949-27 (WH/GN)
VME12
C949-11
(BN/WH)
RME09
C949-28
(BN/YE)
RME12
C949-12
(BN/BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the ACM and the RETM, and greater than 10,000
ohms between the ACM and ground?
YES : Go to L5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
L5 ISOLATE THE HEADPHONES
Connect: ACM C240a
Connect: RETM C949
Install a set of known good headphones.
NOTE:
Make sure the headphones are set to "Radio" as their audio source.
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) dual-play mode and listen through the
headphones.
Do the headphones operate correctly?
YES : The concern was caused by inoperative headphones. The system is OK at this time.
NO : Go to L6.
L6 CHECK FOR CORRECT RETM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the RETM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the RETM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new RETM. REFER to Rear Entertainment Module (RETM). TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test M: No Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Signal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Normal Operation
The global positioning system (GPS) antenna provides information from the GPS satellite system to the GPS
receiver in the navigation module (part of the navigation audio control module [ACM]). This information is
used to calculate vehicle position and direction of travel.
DTC B2204 (GPS Antenna Connection Open or Short) - sets when an open or short to ground is detected
in the GPS antenna circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
GPS antenna
ACM
PINPOINT TEST M: NO GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) ANTENNA SIGNAL
M1 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Move the vehicle outside of any enclosed structure to an area that is unobstructed by trees, tall
buildings, and bridges.
Fig. 16: Checking Operation Of Navigation System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Operate the audio system in navigation mode.
Does the GPS icon appear, then disappear?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. NOTIFY the customer that obstructions to the
line of sight may affect the GPS antenna.
NO : Go to M2.
M2 CHECK THE ACM DTCs
Retrieve the ACM continuous and on-demand DTCs.
Is DTC B2204 recorded?
YES : Go to M4.
NO : Go to M3.
M3 CHECK THE GPS ANTENNA MOUNTING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Verify the GPS antenna is installed correctly and no aftermarket equipment is obstructing the
antenna.
Is the GPS antenna mounted correctly?
YES : Go to M4.
NO : Correctly INSTALL the GPS antenna. REFER to Global Positioning System (GPS)
Antenna. TEST the system for normal operation.
M4 SUBSTITUTE THE GPS ANTENNA
Install a known good GPS antenna.
Move the vehicle outside of any enclosed structure to an area that is unobstructed by trees, tall
buildings, and bridges.
Fig. 17: Checking Operation Of Navigation System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Operate the audio system in navigation mode.
Does the GPS icon appear, then disappear?
YES : INSTALL a new GPS antenna. REFER to Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna.
CLEAR any DTCs present. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL the original GPS antenna. Go to M5.
M5 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Pinpoint Test N: The Audible Switch Feedback Is Inoperative
Normal Operation
The audible switch feedback settings are controlled by the audio control module (ACM). The audible switch
feedback can be set to ALL, TOUCH SCREEN, or NONE, depending on user preference.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Audible switch feedback setting
ACM
PINPOINT TEST N: THE AUDIBLE SWITCH FEEDBACK IS INOPERATIVE
N1 CHECK THE SWITCH DISPLAY
Turn the ACM on.
Press the MENU button.
Fig. 18: Checking Switch Display
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Select the FEEDBACK tab.
Is NONE highlighted on the audible feedback settings?
YES : SELECT "ALL BUTTONS". TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to N2.
N2 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 95
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test O: The Voice Guidance Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Normal Operation
The voice guidance settings are controlled by the audio control module (ACM). The voice guidance volume can
be adjusted or turned off depending on user preference.
For the THX® audio system, the ACM sends the voice guidance signal to the audio digital signal processing
(DSP) module through circuits VME22 (VT/GN) and RME22 (GN/WH).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Incorrect system setting
Wiring, terminals or connectors (THX® only)
DSP module (if equipped)
ACM
PINPOINT TEST O: THE VOICE GUIDANCE IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY
O1 CHECK THE VOICE GUIDANCE SETTINGS
Operate the audio system in navigation mode.
Press the MENU button.
Fig. 19: Checking Switch Display
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Select the FEEDBACK tab.
Select DEFAULT SETTING.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 96
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Verify the operation of the voice guidance.
Does the voice guidance operate correctly?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern was caused by a customerselected setting.
NO : If the vehicle is equipped with THX® audio, go to O2.
Otherwise, go to O4.
O2 CHECK THE VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUITS TO THE DSP MODULE FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240c
Disconnect: DSP Module C4348a
Key in ON position.
Fig. 20: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the DSP module C4348a-15, circuit VME22 (VT/GN), harness side
and ground; and between the DSP module C4348a-16, circuit RME22 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to O3.
O3 CHECK THE VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUITS TO THE DSP MODULE FOR AN OPEN OR
SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the DSP module and the ACM, harness side; and between the DSP
module, harness side and ground as follows:
ACM
DSP
ConnectorCircuit
Module
Pin
ConnectorMicrosoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 97
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Pin
C4348a-15
C4348a-16
VME22
(VT/GN)
RME22
C240c-2
(GN/WH)
C240c-1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the DSP module and the ACM, and greater than
10,000 ohms between the DSP module and ground?
YES : Go to O5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
O4 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
O5 CHECK FOR CORRECT DSP MODULE OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect all the DSP module connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the DSP module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new DSP module. REFER to Audio Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Module.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test P: The Position Cursor Is Inaccurate
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 98
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Normal Operation
The primary source of vehicle location for the navigation system is the audio control module (ACM) receiving
the position signal through the global positioning system (GPS) antenna.
In addition, the ACM receives the wheel pulse signal from the instrument cluster (IC), which gateways the
signal from the ABS module. This secondary signal is used to calculate vehicle position when the GPS signal is
lost. It also supports the adaptive learning function of the ACM, whereby the ACM can compensate for longterm differences between the GPS signal location, and the actual distance traveled by the vehicle.
DTC B2204 (GPS Antenna Connection Open or Short) - sets when an open, short to ground, or short to
voltage is detected in the GPS antenna circuit. If DTC B2204 is present, go to Pinpoint Test M .
DTC U0155 (Lost Communication With Instrument Panel Cluster [IC] Control Module) - sets when the
ACM is missing messages from the IC for greater than 5 seconds. For this symptom, the message in
question is the wheel pulse data message.
DTC U2473 (Unexpected Vehicle Speed [VSS]) - sets when the calculated vehicle distance traveled
based on the wheel pulse signal does not agree with the GPS antenna location. To do this, the ACM
compares the wheel pulse signal during a 4-second range and compares it with the change in GPS antenna
location. If the ACM finds that the variation is greater than 0.5% after carrying out this check 4 times, it
sets DTC U2473. When DTC U2473 is set, the adaptive learn function is disabled. This DTC is also set
when the navigation rolling wheel count signal is missing for greater than 2 seconds with the key in RUN.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
VSS signal concern
ACM
PINPOINT TEST P: THE POSITION CURSOR IS INACCURATE
P1 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Move the vehicle outside of any enclosed structure to an area that is unobstructed by trees, tall
buildings, and bridges.
Fig. 21: Checking Operation Of Navigation System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 99
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Operate the audio system in navigation mode.
Does the GPS icon appear, then disappear?
YES : Go to P2.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test M .
P2 CHECK THE ACM DTCs
Retrieve the continuous DTCs from the ACM self-test.
Is DTC U2473 or U0155 present?
YES : Go to P3.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test M .
P3 CHECK FOR COMMUNICATION WITH THE IC
Carry out the network test using the scan tool.
Does the scan tool communicate with the IC?
YES : Go to P4.
NO : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no
communication with the IC.
P4 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test Q: The Audio Does Not Reduce When The Parking Aid Tone Sounds
Normal Operation
The parking aid module (PAM) sends the volume cutback message to the audio control module (ACM) via the
medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). When the ACM receives this message, it reduces the
speaker output so that the parking aid tone can be heard more clearly.
DTC U0159 (Lost Communication With Parking Assist Control Module [PAM]) - sets when the volume
cutback message is missing for greater than 5 seconds. When the message is missing, the ACM defaults
to no volume cutback when the parking aid tone is sounding.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 100
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Parking aid system concern
ACM
PINPOINT TEST Q: THE AUDIO DOES NOT REDUCE WHEN THE PARKING AID TONE
SOUNDS
Q1 CHECK THE ACM CONFIGURATION
Apply the parking brake.
Place an object behind the vehicle within the range of the parking aid sensors. Refer to PARKING
AID article.
Key in ON position.
Place the transmission in REVERSE (R).
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ACM DataLogger
Monitor the RPA_STAT (Parking Aid Input Status) PID while the parking aid tone is sounding.
Does the RPA_STAT PID read "Enabled" while the parking aid tone is sounding?
YES : Go to Q2.
NO : REFER to PARKING AID article to continue diagnosis of the parking aid system.
Q2 CHECK FOR COMMUNICATION WITH THE PAM
Carry out the network test using the scan tool.
Does the scan tool communicate with the PAM?
YES : Go to Q3.
NO : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no
communication with the PAM.
Q3 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test R: Voice Recognition Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Vehicles Without The
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 101
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
SYNC System
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the VOICE switch is pressed, it changes the reference voltage from the audio control module (ACM) on
circuit VMN54 (BU/OG), and the ACM enters voice recognition mode. A microphone located in the interior
rear view mirror receives the voice command and sends a signal to the ACM through circuits VMM13 (YE/GN)
and RMM13 (BU). Power to the interior rear view mirror is provided through circuit CBP41 (BU). Ground is
provided through circuit GD133 (BK).
The microphone test is available through the integrated diagnostic system (IDS). Running this test causes the
ACM to produce a test tone. If the system is operating correctly, the microphone detects the tone and produces a
signal to the ACM indicating the tone was heard.
DTC B2633 (Driver-Front Microphone Circuit Failure) - set by the ACM during the microphone test
when the ACM does not receive an adequate signal from the microphone when the test tone is sounded.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Steering wheel controls
Microphone (part of the interior rear view mirror)
ACM
PINPOINT TEST R: VOICE RECOGNITION IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY - VEHICLES WITHOUT THE SYNC SYSTEM
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
R1 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Press the VOICE button on the steering wheel controls.
Does the audio system enter voice recognition mode?
YES : Go to R2.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test F \ to diagnose the steering wheel controls system.
R2 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Interior Rear View Mirror C911
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 102
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Fig. 22: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the interior rear view mirror C911-1, circuit CBP41 (BU), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to R3.
NO : VERIFY the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 41 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit.
TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article to identify the possible sources of the circuit short.
R3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 23: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C911-10, circuit GD133 (BK), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to R4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
R4 CHECK THE MICROPHONE CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 103
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: ACM C240b
Key in ON position.
Fig. 24: Checking Circuits For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the interior rear view mirror C911-4, circuit VMM13 (YE/GN),
harness side and ground; and between the interior rear view mirror C911-5, circuit RMM13 (BU),
harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to R5.
R5 CHECK THE MICROPHONE CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the inside rear view mirror, harness side and the ACM, harness
side; and between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and ground as follows:
Interior
ACM
Rear View
Mirror ConnectorConnector- Pin/Circuit
Pin/Circuit
C911-4
C240b-11
VMM13
VMN01
(YE/GN) (BU/BN)
C911-5
C240b-12
RMM13
RMN01
(BU)
(GN)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the ACM, and
greater than 10,000 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and ground?
YES : Go to R6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
R6 ISOLATE THE INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 104
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Connect: ACM C240b
Install a new interior rear view mirror. Refer to REAR VIEW MIRRORS article.
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Press the VOICE button on the steering wheel controls, and attempt several voice commands.
Does the voice recognition operate correctly?
YES : The fault was caused by an inoperative inside rear view mirror. The system is now operating
correctly.
NO : Go to R7.
R7 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test S: The SYNC System Is Completely Inoperative
Normal Operation
The accessory protocol interface module (APIM) receives voltage at all times from circuit SBP03 (BU/RD), and
ground through circuit GD148 (BK/YE). The wake-up signal is sent to the APIM by the audio control module
(ACM) via the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN).
DTC U0184 (Lost Communication With Radio [ACM]) - set by the APIM when it is missing messages
from the ACM over the MS-CAN for greater than 5 seconds.
DTC U0196 (Lost Communication With Entertainment Control Module - Rear [AUX]) - set by the APIM
when it is missing messages from the rear entertainment module (RETM) over the MS-CAN for greater
than 5 seconds.
DTC U0197 (Lost Communication With Telephone Control Module) - set by the ACM when it is missing
messages from the APIM over the MS-CAN for greater than 5 seconds.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Audio system concern
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 105
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Communication network concern
Customer error
Customer device
APIM
ACM
PINPOINT TEST S: THE SYNC SYSTEM IS COMPLETELY INOPERATIVE
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
S1 CHECK THE AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Press the AUX button repeatedly until "SYNC LINE IN" appears on the display (except
navigation), or look for the presence of the "USER DEVICE" tab (navigation).
Is "SYNC LINE IN" available when pressing the AUX button (except navigation), or is the
"USER DEVICE" tab present (navigation)?
YES : Go to S2.
NO : Go to S3.
S2 CHECK THE SYNC SYSTEM OPERATION
Connect: Known Good MP3 Device (To Audio Input Jack)
NOTE:
Using the ACM buttons, press AUX until "SYNC LINE IN" appears on the display (except
navigation), or press MEDIA, select "USER DEVICE", and press "SOURCE" repeatedly until
"LINE IN" appears (navigation).
Using the known good MP3 device, attempt to play a file using the audio input jack.
Disconnect: Known Good MP3 Device (From Audio Input Jack)
Connect: Known Good USB Device (To USB Port)
Using the ACM buttons, press AUX until "SYNC USB" appears on the display (except navigation),
or press MEDIA, select "USER DEVICE", and press "SOURCE" repeatedly until "USB" appears
(navigation).
NOTE:
Make sure no universal serial bus (USB) device is plugged-in, and no
Bluetooth® device is active for this step.
If a USB mass storage device is used to play the audio files, the
SYNC system will only play audio files that do not have digital rights
management (DRM) protection.
Using a known good MP3 device or a mass storage device, attempt to play a file using the USB
port.
Disconnect: Known Good USB Device (From USB Port)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 106
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Using a known good Bluetooth® device capable of streaming audio, attempt to pair to the APIM
using Bluetooth®, and attempt to play an audio file using Bluetooth® connection. Refer to the
Owner's Literature.
Do all of the SYNC inputs function correctly?
YES : The SYNC system is operating correctly. REVIEW the system operation with the customer.
If the customer device still does not operate correctly, the fault is with the customer device.
NO : If only some of the inputs are inoperative, go to Symptom Chart - SYNC System to
diagnose the observed symptom.
If all inputs have poor quality/distorted sound, go to Pinpoint Test U .
S3 CHECK FOR SCAN TOOL COMMUNICATION
Carry out the network test using the scan tool.
Does the APIM pass the network test?
YES : Go to S4.
NO : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
S4 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the APIM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pints
Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Wait 2 minutes for the APIM to re-initialize.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test T: Unable To Pair Bluetooth® Device
Normal Operation
When a new Bluetooth® device is added, the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) and the Bluetooth®
device must be paired together. Most Bluetooth® devices will pair with the SYNC system, although
functionality will vary. To determine if a Bluetooth® device is supported, retrieve the consumer interface
processor (CIP) software level using the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level
Check , and verify the customer device is on the compatibility list for the current CIP software level.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 107
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Pairing a Bluetooth® device is accomplished through the "Add Device" selection of the phone menu. When
pairing a device, the SYNC system generates a unique personal identification number (PIN) that must be
entered on the Bluetooth® device in order for the pairing process to be successful. There are also some devicespecific actions that must take place. For additional information on the pairing process, refer to the Owner's
Literature.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Incompatible Bluetooth® device
Customer error
Customer Bluetooth® device
APIM
PINPOINT TEST T: UNABLE TO PAIR BLUETOOTH® DEVICE
T1 CHECK THE BLUETOOTH® CONNECTION
NOTE:
Carrying out a Master Reset will return all preference settings to the
factory defaults, erase all the phone book and call histories and delete any
devices paired with the SYNC system.
NOTE:
Refer to www.syncmyride.com for a list of compatible devices.
Using a known good Bluetooth® device, attempt to pair to the SYNC system using Bluetooth®.
Refer to the Owner's Literature.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: APIM DataLogger
Monitor the BT_PAIR (Bluetooth® device paired) and BT_CONN (Bluetooth® device connected)
PIDs.
Do the BT_PAIR and BT_CONN PIDs both read "Yes"?
YES : The SYNC system is operating correctly at this time. CARRY OUT a SYNC system Master
Reset.
For vehicles without navigation, PRESS the "PHONE" button on the steering wheel controls,
SCROLL until "SYSTEM SETTINGS" displays on the screen, PRESS "OK", SCROLL until
"ADVANCED" displays on the screen, PRESS "OK", SCROLL until "MASTER RESET" displays
on the screen, and PRESS "OK" twice.
For vehicles with navigation, PRESS "PHONE" on the ACM display, SELECT the "SETTINGS"
tab, PRESS "ADVANCED", SELECT "Master Reset", and PRESS "YES".
REVIEW the pairing process with the customer. If the customer device still does not pair, the fault
is with the customer device.
NO : Go to T2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 108
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
T2 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the APIM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pints
Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Wait 2 minutes for the APIM to re-initialize.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test U: The Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Normal Operation
The universal serial bus (USB) port is connected to the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) through the
USB cable. The USB port can be used for mass storage devices, or for connecting a media device.
If supported by the user device, the USB can provide charging. Because of this feature, when a USB device is
plugged into the USB port, the SYNC system does not automatically switch to the device.
The USB cable and port are not serviceable separately.
DTC U261C (USB #1 Device Error) - sets when the APIM detects an over-current or over-temperature
condition in the USB circuit. This can be caused by a fault in the USB cable or port, or by the customer
USB device.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Customer USB device
USB cable and port
APIM
PINPOINT TEST U: THE UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) PORT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT
OPERATE CORRECTLY
U1 CHECK THE USB CONNECTION
Connect: Known Good USB Device (To USB Port)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 109
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Using the ACM buttons, press AUX until "SYNC USB" appears on the display (except navigation),
or press AUX until "SYNC USB" appears on the display (except navigation), or press MEDIA,
select "USER DEVICE", and press "SOURCE" repeatedly until "USB" appears (navigation)
NOTE:
If a USB mass storage device is used to play the audio files, SYNC
will only play audio files that do not have digital rights management
(DRM) protection.
Using a known good MP3 device or a mass storage device, attempt to play a file using the USB
port.
Does the known good device successfully play an audio file using the USB connection?
YES : The SYNC system is operating correctly. REVIEW the operation of the USB port with the
customer. If the customer device still does not operate correctly, the fault is with the customer
device.
NO : Go to U2.
U2 INSPECT THE USB CABLE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: USB Cable (At APIM)
Inspect the USB cable for damage.
Connect: USB Cable (At APIM)
Key in ON position.
Using the ACM buttons, press AUX until "SYNC USB" appears on the display (except navigation),
or press AUX until "SYNC USB" appears on the display (except navigation), or press MEDIA,
select "USER DEVICE", and press "SOURCE" repeatedly until "USB" appears (navigation).
Using a known good MP3 device or a mass storage device, attempt to play a file using the USB
port.
Does the known good device successfully play an audio file using the USB connection?
YES : The concern was caused by the USB connection not being seated correctly. The system is
now operating correctly.
NO : Go to U3.
U3 ISOLATE THE USB CABLE AND PORT
Disconnect: Known Good USB Device (From USB Port)
Install a new USB cable and port. Refer to Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port.
Connect: Known Good USB Device (To USB Port)
Using the ACM buttons, press AUX until "SYNC USB" appears on the display (except navigation),
or press AUX until "SYNC USB" appears on the display (except navigation), or press MEDIA,
select "USER DEVICE", and press "SOURCE" repeatedly until "USB" appears (navigation).
Using a known good MP3 device or a mass storage device, attempt to play a file using the USB
port.
Does the known good device successfully play an audio file using the USB connection?
YES : The concern was caused by an inoperative USB cable. The system is now operating
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 110
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
correctly.
NO : Go to U4.
U4 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the APIM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pints
Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Wait 2 minutes for the APIM to re-initialize.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test V: The SYNC System Audible Prompts Are Inoperative/Do Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The text-to-speech (TTS) and voice prompt features speak certain text information and interaction requests in
order to minimize driver distraction by having to look at the audio control module (ACM) while driving. The
ring tone alerts the driver to an incoming call.
Audible prompts can range from a simple tone to more elaborate spoken text, based on the customer setting.
When interaction mode is set to standard, detailed guidance is provided. When interaction mode is set to
advanced, most prompts are tones only and minimal audible guidance is provided. Refer to the Owner's
Literature for further information on voice interaction.
The audio signals for the TTS and voice prompt features, the ring tones, and audio from the outside device
during a phone call, are sent from a accessory protocol interface module (APIM) to the ACM through circuits
VMN14 (WH/VT) and RMN14 (GY/BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Customer setting
Wiring, terminals or connectors
ACM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 111
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
APIM
PINPOINT TEST V: THE SYNC SYSTEM AUDIBLE PROMPTS ARE INOPERATIVE/DO NOT
OPERATE CORRECTLY
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
V1 CHECK THE AUDIBLE PROMPT SETTING
Operate the audio system in SYNC mode.
Verify the audible prompts are enabled. Refer to "SYNC Voice Recognition Feature" in the
Owner's Literature.
Press the VOICE button on the steering wheel controls and observe the SYNC voice prompt.
Does the SYNC system produce a voice prompt correctly?
YES : The concern was caused by a customer setting. ADVISE the customer on the operation of
the TTS feature.
NO : Go to V2.
V2 CHECK THE AUDIBLE PROMPT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240b
Disconnect: APIM C3342
Key in ON position.
Fig. 25: Checking Audible Prompt Circuits For A Short To Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the APIM C3342-3, circuit VMN14 (WH/VT), harness side and
ground; and between the APIM C3342-4, circuit RMN14 (GY/BN), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to V3.
V3 CHECK THE AUDIBLE PROMPT CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 112
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the APIM, harness side and the ACM, harness side; and between
the APIM, harness side and ground as follows:
APIM
ACM
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Pin
Pin
VMN14
C3342-3
C240b-4
(WH/VT)
RMN14
C3342-4
C240b-5
(GY/BN)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the APIM and the ACM, and greater than 10,000
ohms between the APIM and ground?
YES : Go to V4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
V4 CHECK FOR A VOLTAGE SIGNAL FROM THE APIM
Connect: ACM C240b
Connect: APIM C3342
Operate the audio system in SYNC mode, and verify the audible prompts are enabled. Refer to
"Voice Prompts" in the Owner's Literature.
While pressing the VOICE button repeatedly, measure the AC voltage by backprobing between the
ACM C240b-4, circuit VMN14 (WH/VT), harness side and the ACM C240b-5, circuit RMN14
(GY/BN), harness side.
Is an AC voltage produced each time the VOICE button is pressed?
YES : Go to V5.
NO : Go to V6.
V5 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 113
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
or corroded connector.
V6 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the APIM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Wait 2 minutes for the APIM to re-initialize.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test W: Voice Recognition Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Vehicles With The
SYNC System
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the VOICE button (represented by an icon of someone speaking) is pressed, it changes the reference
voltage on circuit VMN54 (BU/OG), and the audio system enters voice recognition mode. If the vehicle is
equipped with navigation, the VOICE switch is wired to the audio control module (ACM). If the vehicle is not
equipped with navigation, the VOICE switch is wired to the accessory protocol interface module (APIM). A
microphone located in the interior rear view mirror receives the voice command and sends a signal to the APIM
through circuits VMM13 (YE/GN) and RMM13 (BU). Power to the interior rear view mirror is provided
through circuit CBP41 (BU). Ground is provided through circuit GD133 (BK). The microphone is also used to
detect outgoing audio during a phone call.
The microphone test (with navigation only) is available through the scan tool. Running this test causes the ACM
to produce a test tone. If the system is operating correctly, the microphone detects the tone and produces a
signal to the ACM indicating the tone was heard.
If the vehicle is equipped with navigation, the APIM receives the microphone input, and also broadcasts it to the
ACM through circuits VMN01 (BU/BN) and RMN01 (GN). This allows voice commands specific to the
navigation system to be handled directly by the ACM. The first voice commands spoken determine which
system handles the voice commands.
DTC B1038 (Microphone Input Circuit Failure) - set by the APIM during the on-demand self-test if the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 114
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
APIM does not detect the microphone.
DTC B2633 (Driver-Front Microphone Circuit Failure) - set by the ACM during the microphone test
when the ACM does not receive an adequate signal from the microphone when the test tone is sounded.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Steering wheel controls
Microphone (part of the interior rear view mirror)
ACM (if equipped with navigation)
APIM
PINPOINT TEST W: VOICE RECOGNITION IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY - VEHICLES WITH THE SYNC SYSTEM
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
W1 VERIFY THE OPERATION OF THE STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Press the VOICE button on the steering wheel controls.
Does the audio system enter voice recognition mode?
YES : Go to W2.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test F to diagnose the steering wheel controls system.
W2 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE VOICE RECOGNITION
Press the VOICE button on the steering wheel controls.
Wait for the SYNC system to acknowledge the VOICE button being pressed.
While still in voice recognition mode, speak the command "PHONE", and observe the audio
system.
Does the SYNC system acknowledge the command "PHONE"?
YES : If the vehicle is equipped with navigation, go to W3.
Otherwise, the system is operating correctly at this time. ADVISE the customer on the correct
operation of the voice recognition system.
NO : Go to W6.
W3 CHECK THE MICROPHONE SIGNAL TO THE ACM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 115
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
ACM C240a must remain connected for this step to produce accurate
results.
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Press the VOICE button on the steering wheel controls.
Fig. 26: Checking Microphone Signal To ACM
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
While speaking a command, measure the AC voltage between the ACM C240b-11, circuit VMN01
(BU/BN), harness side and the ACM C240b-12, circuit RMN01 (GN), harness side.
Is a fluctuating AC voltage present?
YES : Go to W12.
NO : Go to W4.
W4 CHECK THE MICROPHONE CIRCUITS TO THE ACM FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: APIM C3342
Key in ON position.
Fig. 27: Checking Microphone Circuits To ACM For A Short To Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the ACM C240b-11, circuit VMN01 (BU/BN), harness side and
ground; and between the ACM C240b-12, circuit RMN01 (GN), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 116
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to W5.
W5 CHECK THE MICROPHONE CIRCUITS TO THE ACM FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the ACM, harness side and the APIM, harness side; and between
the ACM, harness side and ground as follows:
ACM
APIM
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Pin
Pin
VMN01
C240b-11 C3342-12
(BU/BN)
RMN01
C240b-12 C3342-13
(BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the ACM and the APIM, and greater than 10,000
ohms between the ACM and ground?
YES : Go to W11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
W6 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012
Key in ON position.
Fig. 28: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the interior rear view mirror C9012-1, circuit CBP41 (BU), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to W7.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 117
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : VERIFY the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 41 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit.
TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article to identify the possible sources of the circuit short.
W7 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 29: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C9012-10, circuit GD133 (BK),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to W8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
W8 CHECK THE MICROPHONE CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: APIM C3342
Key in ON position.
Fig. 30: Checking Circuits For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the interior rear view mirror C9012-4, circuit VMM13 (YE/GN),
harness side and ground; and between the interior rear view mirror C9012-5, circuit RMM13 (BU),
harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 118
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to W9.
W9 CHECK THE MICROPHONE CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the inside rear view mirror, harness side and the APIM, harness
side; and between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and ground as follows:
Interior
Rear View APIM
Mirror Connector- Circuit
Pin
ConnectorPin
VMM13
C9012-4
C3342-5
(YE/GN)
RMM13
C9012-5
C3342-6
(BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the APIM, and
greater than 10,000 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and ground?
YES : Go to W10.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
W10 ISOLATE THE INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR
Connect: APIM C3342
Install a new interior rear view mirror. Refer to REAR VIEW MIRRORS article.
Operate the audio system in SYNC mode.
Press the VOICE button on the steering wheel controls, and attempt several voice commands.
Does the voice recognition operate correctly?
YES : The fault was caused by an inoperative inside rear view mirror. The system is now operating
correctly.
NO : Go to W11.
W11 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
Disconnect the APIM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Wait 2 minutes for the APIM to re-initialize.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 119
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
W12 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test X: Poor Quality/Distorted/No Sound While In SYNC Mode
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The accessory protocol interface module (APIM) sends left and right channel analog audio signals through
circuits VME52 (BU), RME52 (GY/OG), VME53 (VT/GN), and RME53 (BN/WH). If the vehicle is equipped
with a DVD entertainment system, these audio signals are sent to the rear entertainment module (RETM), then
to the audio control module (ACM). In vehicles without a DVD entertainment system, the audio signals are sent
directly to the ACM.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
RETM (if equipped)
ACM
APIM
PINPOINT TEST X: POOR QUALITY/DISTORTED/NO SOUND WHILE IN SYNC MODE
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 120
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
X1 VERIFY THE OPERATION OF THE SYNC AUDIO SOURCES
Connect: Known Good MP3 Device (To Audio Input Jack)
NOTE:
Using the ACM buttons, press AUX until "SYNC LINE IN" appears on the display (except
navigation), or press MEDIA, select "USER DEVICE", and press "SOURCE" repeatedly until
"LINE IN" appears (navigation).
Using a known good MP3 device, attempt to play a file using the audio input jack, and listen to the
audio output.
Disconnect: Known Good MP3 Device (From Audio Input Jack)
Connect: Known Good USB Device (To USB Port)
Using the ACM buttons, press AUX until "SYNC USB" appears on the display (except navigation),
or press MEDIA, select "USER DEVICE", and press "SOURCE" repeatedly until "USB" appears
(navigation).
NOTE:
Make sure no universal serial bus (USB) device is plugged-in, and no
Bluetooth® device is active for this step.
If a USB mass storage device is used to play the audio files, SYNC
will only play audio files that do not have digital rights management
(DRM) protection.
Using a known good MP3 device or a mass storage device, attempt to play a file using the USB
port.
Disconnect: Known Good USB Device (From USB Port)
Using a known good Bluetooth® device capable of streaming audio, attempt to pair to the APIM
using Bluetooth®, and attempt to play an audio file using the Bluetooth® connection. Refer to the
Owner's Literature.
Is there poor quality/distorted/no sound from each SYNC audio source?
YES : If the vehicle is equipped with a DVD entertainment system, go to X2.
Otherwise, go to X3.
NO : If the concern is only with some of the audio sources, go to Symptom Chart - SYNC System
to diagnose the observed symptom.
If all audio sources operate correctly, the concern is with the customer device.
X2 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE DVD AUDIO
NOTE:
Make sure a known good DVD is inserted in the RETM before
carrying out this step.
Operate the audio system in DVD mode.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 121
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Observe the audio output.
Is there poor quality/distorted sound while in DVD mode?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test K .
NO : Go to X3.
X3 CHECK THE CIRCUITS FROM THE APIM FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ACM C240b (Without DVD Entertainment)
Disconnect: RETM C949 (With DVD Entertainment)
Disconnect: APIM C3342
Measure the voltage between the APIM pins, harness side as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VME53
C3342-23
(VT/GN)
RME53
C3342-24
(BN/WH)
VME52
C3342-25
(BU)
RME52
C3342-26
(GY/OG)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to X4.
X4 CHECK THE CIRCUITS FROM THE APIM FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the APIM, harness side, and the ACM or RETM (if equipped with
DVD entertainment), harness side; and between the APIM, harness side and ground as follows:
ACM or
APIM
RETM
Circuit
ConnectorConnectorPin/Circuit
Pin/Circuit
C3342-23
C240b-9 or VME53
VME53
C949-20 (VT/GN)
(VT/GN)
C3342-23
C240b-10 RME53
RME53
or C949-19 (BN/WH)
(BN/WH)
C3342-23 C240b-1 or VME52
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 122
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
VME52
C949-4
(BU)
(BU)
C3342-23
C240b-2 or RME52
RME52
C949-3 (GN/OG)
(GN/OG)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the APIM and the ACM (or RETM), and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the APIM and ground?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to X5.
X5 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
Connect: All Disconnected Connectors
Disconnect the APIM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Wait 2 minutes for the APIM to re-initialize.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present and the vehicle is equipped with a
DVD entertainment system, go to X6. If the concern is still present and the vehicle is not equipped
with a DVD entertainment system, go to X7.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
X6 CHECK FOR CORRECT RETM OPERATION
Disconnect the RETM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the RETM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new RETM. REFER to Rear Entertainment Module (RETM). TEST the
system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, go to X7.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 123
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
X7 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test Y: The Speed Sensitive Volume Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Audio System/Navigation for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The speed sensitive volume function adjusts the volume based on the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) signal from
the instrument cluster (IC). The IC does not generate the VSS signal; it gateways the signal from the PCM.
For vehicles without THX® sound, the audio control module (ACM) receives the VSS signal from the IC. For
vehicles with THX® sound, the audio digital signal processing (DSP) module receives the VSS signal from the
IC and controls the speed sensitive volume based on the ACM setting.
DTC U0155 (Lost Communication With Instrument Panel Cluster Control [IC] Module) - sets when the
VSS signal is lost for greater than 5 seconds. When the signal is lost, the ACM turns the speed sensitive
volume feature off. The smart junction box (SJB) and HVAC module also receive this signal, and should
demonstrate symptoms if the VSS signal is lost. If no symptoms are present, this DTC can be ignored, as
it may have been set by a low battery voltage condition.
DTC U0184 (Lost Communication With Radio [ACM]) - set by the DSP module when expected medium
speed controller area network (MS-CAN) messages are missing from the ACM lost for greater than 5
seconds. This includes the speed sensitive volume setting. If the speed sensitive volume setting message
is missing, the DSP module turns the speed sensitive volume feature off.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Speed sensitive volume setting
VSS signal concern
ACM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 124
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Y1 CHECK THE SPEEDOMETER OPERATION
Drive the vehicle and observe the speedometer.
Does the speedometer operate correctly?
YES : Go to Y2.
NO : REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING
CHIMES article to diagnose the inoperative speedometer.
Y2 CHECK THE SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SETTING
Turn the speed sensitive volume off.
For vehicles without navigation, press MENU until the speed sensitive volume prompt is
reached, then press TUNE DOWN until the feature is turned off.
For vehicles with navigation, press SOUND, select the SCV tab, and turn the feature off.
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Drive the vehicle at various speeds and observe the speaker volume.
Set the speed sensitive volume to maximum compensation.
For vehicles without navigation, press MENU until the speed sensitive volume prompt is
reached, then press TUNE UP until the feature is set to setting "7".
For vehicles with navigation, press SOUND, select the SCV tab, then press "7".
Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
Drive the vehicle at various speeds and observe the speaker volume.
Does the volume remain constant with the speed sensitive volume turned off, and increase
and decrease with vehicle speed with the speed sensitive volume set to maximum?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. ADVISE the customer on the correct
operation of the speed sensitive volume feature.
NO : Go to Y3.
Y3 CHECK FOR DTC U0155 (ACM) OR U0184 (DSP)
Key in ON position.
Using the scan tool, clear any ACM and DSP module continuous DTCs.
Key in OFF position.
Key in ON position.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
Retrieve the ACM and DSP module continuous DTCs.
Is DTC U0155 (ACM) or U0184 (DSP) present?
YES : Go to Y4.
NO : If the vehicle is equipped with THX® sound, go to Y5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 125
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Otherwise, go to Y6.
Y4 CHECK FOR COMMUNICATION WITH THE ACM AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC)
Carry out the network test using the scan tool.
Does the scan tool communicate with the ACM and the IC?
YES : If the vehicle is equipped with THX® sound, go to Y5.
Otherwise, go to Y6.
NO : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no
communication with the ACM or IC.
Y5 CHECK FOR CORRECT DSP MODULE OPERATION
Disconnect all the DSP module connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the DSP module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Y6 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Audio Control Module (ACM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 126
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
AUDIO UNIT PART NUMBER RETRIEVAL
Audio Systems Without Navigation
NOTE:
The terms "Audio Control Module (ACM)" and "audio unit" refer to the same
component.
1. Turn the ACM on.
2. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds. The speaker walk-around test will begin.
3. Before the speaker walk-around test is complete, press preset button 6.
NOTE:
This step will cause the ACM to auto-scroll through configuration 1,
configuration 2, EEPROM number, and ACM part number.
4. Press the TUNE UP button.
NOTE:
Step 4 may need to be repeated until the ACM part number can be
recorded.
5. Record the ACM part number.
6. Turn the ACM off.
Navigation Audio System
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn the ACM on.
Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds. The speaker walk-around test will begin.
Before the speaker walk-around test is complete, press END TEST on the display screen.
Select SYSTEM INFO from the menu.
Record the ACM part number.
Turn the ACM off.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEIVER ELECTRONIC SERIAL NUMBER (ESN) RETRIEVAL
Audio Systems Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously.
The satellite radio receiver Electronic Serial Number (ESN) will be displayed on the screen.
3. Record the satellite radio receiver ESN.
4. Turn the audio system off.
Audio Systems With Navigation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 127
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
1. Turn the audio system on.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Select the SYSTEM INFO tab.
NOTE:
The satellite radio receiver ESN is shown on the lower left corner of the
screen with the text "SR ESN:".
4. Record the satellite radio receiver ESN.
5. Turn the audio system off.
ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE (APIM) SOFTWARE LEVEL CHECK
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Male- CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 or
A to Male-A Cable
equivalent
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information System
(OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level.
The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor
(CIP) software levels.
8. The scan tool displays the following information:
Last Recorded State - Hardware
VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM
Installed date: date the APIM was installed
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 128
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle
HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number
Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled
S/N: APIM serial number
Last Recorded State - Software
Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation
VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Description: a description of the content of the software revision
History - Software
Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation
VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Description: a description of the content of the software revision
Available Software for Programming
Select: allows the software package to be selected
Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision
VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection
CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection
Description: a description of the content of the software revision
9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software level, if
desired.
10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB port, or exit
the OASIS screen.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
AUDIO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (DSP) MODULE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 129
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Exploded View Of Audio Amplifier - THX(R)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W505425-S
2
N811309-S
3
-
4
18A849
Description
Audio digital signal processing (DSP)
module screws (2 required)
Audio DSP module nut
Audio DSP module electrical connectors
(part of 14A005)
Audio DSP module
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Module configuration is only required if a new audio digital signal
processing (DSP) module is being installed.
1. Upload the audio DSP module configuration information to the scan tool. For additional information,
refer to Programmable Module Installation (PMI) in MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
2. Remove the subwoofer speaker. For additional information, refer to Subwoofer Speaker.
3. Disconnect the audio DSP module electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 screws, the nut, and the audio DSP module.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Download the configuration information to the audio DSP module. For additional information,
refer to PMI in MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 130
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
AUDIO INPUT JACK
NOTE:
Vehicle equipped with SYNC shown, others similar.
Fig. 32: Identifying Audio Input Jack Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
19A164
3
-
Description
Audio input jack bezel (part of
78045A06)
Audio input jack
Audio input jack electrical connector
(part of 14B079)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Using a suitable tool, pry the audio input jack bezel out from the floor console storage bin.
Disconnect the universal serial bus (USB) connector, if equipped.
2. Disconnect the audio input jack electrical connector.
3. Release the tabs and remove the audio input jack.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 131
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 33: Identifying Tabs On Audio Input Jack
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
AUDIO CONTROL MODULE (ACM)
Fig. 34: Exploded View Of Audio Unit
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W707628
2
18C815
3
-
Description
Audio control module (ACM) screws (4
required)
ACM
ACM electrical connectors (part of 14401
or 18812)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 132
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the audio control module (ACM) to retrieve the
part number. For additional information, refer to Audio Unit Part Number
Retrieval.
Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed.
1. Upload the ACM configuration information to the scan tool. For additional information, refer to
MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
2. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND CONSOLE article.
3. Remove the 4 screws and the ACM.
Disconnect the electrical connectors and the antenna cable.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Download the configuration information to the ACM. For additional information, refer to
MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
SATELLITE DIGITAL AUDIO RECEIVER SYSTEM (SDARS) MODULE
Fig. 35: Exploded View Of Satellite Radio Receiver With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
Description
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 133
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
1
W707293-S
2
19A397
3
-
4
18C960
Satellite digital audio receiver system
(SDARS) module nuts (2 required)
Satellite radio antenna connector
SDARS module electrical connector (part
of 14A005)
SDARS module
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Module configuration is only required if a new satellite digital audio
receiver (SDARS) module is being installed.
1. Upload the SDARS module configuration information to the scan tool. For additional information, refer
to Programmable Module Installation (PMI) in MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
2. Remove the liftgate scuff plate. For additional information, refer to Interior Trim - Exploded View in
INTERIOR TRIM AND ORNAMENTATION article.
3. Remove the 2 nuts and the SDARS module.
Disconnect the satellite radio antenna connector and the electrical connector.
To install, tighten the nuts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Download the configuration information to the SDARS module. For additional information, refer to
PMI in MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 134
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 36: Exploded View Of Steering Wheel Controls - Edge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
9C888
2
-
Description
Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel controls electrical
connector (part of 14A411)
Fig. 37: Exploded View Of Steering Wheel Controls - MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 135
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
9C888
4
-
Description
Steering wheel controls bezel screws (4
required)
Steering wheel controls bezel
Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel controls electrical
connector (part of 14A411)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
MKX
1. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
2. Remove the 4 screws and the steering wheel controls bezel.
All vehicles
3. Remove the steering wheel controls by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ANTENNA - AM/FM
Fig. 38: Exploded View Of AM/FM Antenna With Torque Specifications
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 136
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
18813
18936
Description
AM/FM antenna base bolt (part of
18812)
AM/FM antenna mast
AM/FM antenna
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the AM/FM antenna mast, if desired.
2. Remove the dome lamp. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR LIGHTING article.
3. Loosen the AM/FM antenna base bolt.
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the AM/FM antenna.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ANTENNA - SATELLITE RADIO
Fig. 39: Exploded View Of Satellite Radio Antenna With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
-
3
10E893
Description
Satellite radio antenna cable bolt (part of
18812)
Satellite radio antenna cable electrical
connector (part of 19A397)
Satellite radio antenna
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 137
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
1. Remove the spoiler. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND ORNAMENTATION
article.
Disconnect the satellite radio antenna electrical connector.
2. Loosen the satellite radio antenna cable bolt.
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
3. Remove the satellite radio antenna.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ANTENNA CABLE - AM/FM
Fig. 40: Antenna Cable-to-Antenna With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
-
2
-
3
18812
Description
AM/FM antenna cable bolt
AM/FM antenna base bolt (part of
18812)
Upper AM/FM antenna cable
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 138
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 41: Upper Antenna Cable-to-Lower Antenna Cable
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
4
5
Part Number
18812
18812
Description
Upper AM/FM antenna cable
Lower AM/FM antenna cable
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Lower antenna cable
1. Remove the audio control module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control Module
(ACM).
Upper antenna cable
2. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
3. Remove the interior dome lamp. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR LIGHTING article.
4. Loosen the AM/FM antenna base bolt and disconnect the antenna cable from the antenna.
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
5. Remove the RH sun visor. For additional information, refer to Headliner in INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 139
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Lower the headliner, as necessary.
6. Remove the AM/FM antenna cable bolt and the antenna cable.
To install, tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Both antenna cables
7. Remove the RH front door scuff plate. For additional information, refer to Interior Trim - Exploded View
in INTERIOR TRIM AND ORNAMENTATION article.
8. Disconnect the upper antenna cable from the lower antenna cable.
9. Release the pin-type retainers and remove the antenna cable.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ANTENNA CABLE - SATELLITE RADIO
Fig. 42: Exploded View Of Satellite Radio Antenna Cable
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
-
Description
Satellite radio antenna cable-to-satellite
radio antenna electrical connector (part of
19A397)
Satellite radio antenna cable-to-satellite
digital audio receiver system (SDARS)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 140
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
3
module electrical connector (part of
19A397)
Satellite radio antenna cable
19A397
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the LH quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Remove the D-pillar trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
3. Remove the liftgate scuff plate. For additional information, refer to Interior Trim - Exploded View in
INTERIOR TRIM AND ORNAMENTATION article.
4. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna cable from the satellite digital audio receiver system (SDARS)
module.
5. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna cable from the satellite radio antenna, and remove the cable.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
DOOR SPEAKER
Fig. 43: Front or Rear Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
18808
Description
Door speaker
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 141
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
2
973791
3
-
Door speaker screws (4 required)
Door speaker electrical connector(s) (part
of door harness)
Fig. 44: Front Door Tweeter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
-
2
W706675-S
3
19B170
Description
Door trim panel
Front door tweeter speaker nuts (2
required)
Front door tweeter speaker
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
All speakers
1. Remove the door trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
Front door tweeter speaker
2. Remove the 2 screws and the front door tweeter speaker from the door trim panel.
Front or rear door speaker
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:16 AM
Page 142
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the 4 screws and the door speaker.
Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
All speakers
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER
Fig. 45: Exploded View Of Instrument Panel Speaker
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
78044A92
18808
3
-
4
W707628-S
Description
Instrument panel speaker cover
Instrument panel speaker
Instrument panel speaker electrical
connector (part of 14401)
Instrument panel speaker screws (4
required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND CONSOLE article.
2. Remove the instrument panel speaker cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 143
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the 4 screws and the instrument panel speaker.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
SUBWOOFER SPEAKER
Fig. 46: Exploded View Of Subwoofer Speaker With Torque Specification - Edge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W505425-S
18C804
3
-
Description
Subwoofer speaker bolts (3 required)
Subwoofer speaker
Subwoofer speaker electrical connector
(part of 14A005)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 144
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 47: Exploded View Of Subwoofer Speaker With Torque Specification - MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W505425-S
18808
3
-
Description
Subwoofer speaker bolts (3 required)
Subwoofer speaker
Subwoofer speaker electrical connector
(part of 14A005)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the quarter panel trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Remove the 3 bolts and the subwoofer speaker.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
To install, tighten the bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
REAR ENTERTAINMENT MODULE (RETM)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 145
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 48: Exploded View Of Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W704875-S
2
3
4
10E947
5
-
Description
Rear entertainment module (RETM)
screws (4 required)
J-hook (part of 10E957)
U-hook (part of 10E947)
RETM
RETM electrical connector (part of
15A657)
REMOVAL
NOTE:
Programmable module installation (PMI) only needs to be carried out if the rear
entertainment module (RETM) is being replaced.
1. Upload the RETM configuration to the scan tool. For additional information, refer to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article.
NOTE:
Open the display to access the screws.
2. Remove the 4 screws.
3. Remove the RETM.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 146
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Pull down on the sides of the RETM to disengage the clips from the bracket.
Using a suitable tool, push the rear most U-hook forward and release the U-hooks.
Hang the RETM on the J-hooks and disconnect the electrical connector.
Remove the RETM from the J-hooks.
INSTALLATION
1. Hang the RETM on the J-hooks.
2. Connect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the RETM from the J-hooks.
NOTE:
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Tilt the RETM, as necessary, to align it correctly.
Align the left side guide pin with the left side locating hole.
Lift up the right side of the RETM and engage the U-hooks.
Install the 4 screws.
Push on the left and right sides of the RETM to engage the clips.
Download the RETM configuration from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article.
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) ANTENNA
NOTE:
The view is shown from the back side of the instrument panel; however, the
instrument panel does not have to be removed to carry out this procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 147
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 49: Exploded View Of Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
10E893
Description
Global positioning system (GPS) antenna
clip (part of 10E893)
GPS antenna
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
MKX
1. Remove the instrument cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
(IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING CHIMES article.
All vehicles
2. Remove the audio control module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control Module
(ACM).
NOTE:
For vehicles without THX® audio, the vehicle will have an upper storage
bin, rather than an instrument panel speaker.
3. Remove the instrument panel speaker. For additional information, refer to Instrument Panel Speaker.
4. Release the clip and remove the global positioning system (GPS) antenna.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 148
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE (APIM)
Fig. 50: Identifying Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
14D212
14D202
4
-
Description
Accessory protocol interface module
(APIM) screws (4 required) (part of
78045A06)
APIM
Universal serial bus (USB) cable
APIM electrical connector (part of
14B079)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Accessory protocol interface module (APIM) reprogramming is only necessary
if a new module is being installed.
1. Verify the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer to Accessory
Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Reprogramming in MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
2. Remove the floor console rear trim panel by pulling straight back to disengage the clips.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 149
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
3. Disconnect the universal serial bus (USB) cable and the electrical connector.
4. Remove the 4 screws and the APIM.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Reprogram the APIM. For additional information, refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) CABLE AND PORT
Fig. 51: Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable-To-Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
Description
Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable-toAccessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) connector (part of 14D202)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 150
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 52: Universal Serial Bus (USB)-To-Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
2
3
Part Number
14D202
Description
USB cable-to-bezel connector
USB cable and port
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL AND
CONSOLE article.
2. Remove the floor console rear trim panel by pulling straight rearward to disengage the clips.
3. Disconnect the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable-to-Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
connector.
4. Disconnect the USB cable-to-bezel connector.
Disengage the push-pin near the connection.
5. Disconnect the USB cable-to-bezel connector.
6. Remove the 3 screws holding the front of the RH panel to the floor console.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 151
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 53: Identifying Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the 2 screws and the APIM and bracket as an assembly.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Fig. 54: Identifying Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the screw holding the upper rear of the RH panel to the floor console.
Fig. 55: Identifying Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the screw holding the lower rear of the RH panel to the floor console.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 152
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Information and Entertainment Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 56: Identifying Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the RH panel from the floor console by sliding it upward to disengage the clips.
11. Disengage the push-pins and remove the USB cable and port.
Fig. 57: Identifying push-pins
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:59:17 AM
Page 153
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION
Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Generator
Specification
78/143 amp (max) @ 620-2,500 engine RPM @
normal engine temperature
12 volt
Rating
Voltage
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
CHARGING SYSTEM
The charging system consists of the following:
Generator
Charging system warning indicator
Necessary wiring and cables
The charging system is a negative ground system. The generator (including an internal voltage regulator) is
belt-driven by the engine accessory drive system. When the engine is started, the generator begins to generate
AC, which is internally converted to DC. This current is then supplied to the vehicle electrical system through
the output (B+) terminal of the generator.
Battery
The battery is a 12V DC source connected in a negative ground system. The battery case is sealed with 2 vent
holes to release gases. The battery has 3 major functions:
Engine cranking power source
Voltage stabilizer for the electrical system
Temporary power source when electrical loads exceed the generator output current
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
CHARGING SYSTEM
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:29
11:42:24 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025B
SABRE Premium Battery and
Electrical System Tester
010-00736 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Principles of Operation
The PCM controlled charging system determines the optimal voltage setpoint for the charging system and
communicates this information to the voltage regulator. This system is unique in that it has 2 communication
lines between the PCM and the generator/regulator. Both of these communication lines are pulse-width
modulated (PWM). The generator communication (GENCOM) line communicates the desired setpoint from the
PCM to the voltage regulator. The generator monitor (GENMON) line communicates the generator load and
error conditions to the PCM. The third pin on the voltage regulator, the A circuit pin, is a dedicated battery
voltage sense line.
The generator charges the battery and at the same time supplies power for all of the electrical loads that are
required. The battery is more effectively charged with a higher voltage when the battery is cold and a lower
voltage when the battery is warm. The PCM is able to adjust the charging voltage according to the battery
temperature by using a signal from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. This means the voltage setpoint is
calculated by the PCM and communicated to the regulator by the GENCOM circuit.
The PCM simultaneously controls and monitors the output of the generator. When the current consumption is
high or the battery is discharged the PCM raises engine speed to increase generator output.
To minimize the engine drag when starting the engine, the PCM does not allow the generator to produce any
output until the engine has started. The PCM turns off the generator during cranking to reduce the starter load
and improve cranking speed. Once the engine starts, the PCM slowly increases generator output to help
establish a stable engine speed.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
The PCM controls the charging system warning indicator by sending a message over the high-speed controller
area network (HS-CAN) to the instrument cluster (IC). The PCM turns the charging system warning indicator
off when generator output begins. The charging system warning indicator is also illuminated by the PCM
whenever the key is ON with the engine OFF.
This is a System 4 charging system, which uses the GENMON and GENCOM lines to control and monitor the
charging system through the PCM. System 4 charging systems are virtually identical in design and therefore,
share the same diagnostics. The circuit numbers and colors may be different, but the functions are the same.
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid and produce explosive gases. Work in a
well-ventilated area. Do not allow the battery to come in contact with
flames, sparks or burning substances. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes, then get
prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Always lift a plastic-cased battery with a battery carrier or with hands on
opposite corners. Excessive pressure on the battery end walls may cause
acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or
damage to the vehicle or battery.
CAUTION: Do not make jumper connections except as directed. Incorrect
connections may damage the voltage regulator test terminals, fuses or
fusible links.
CAUTION: Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the generator
housing and internal diode cooling fins. A short circuit may result and
burn out the diodes.
NOTE:
While carrying out any pinpoint test, disregard any DTCs set while following a
specific pinpoint test. After the completion of a test, be sure to clear all DTCs in
the PCM.
NOTE:
All voltage measurements are referenced to the negative (-) battery post unless
otherwise specified.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Mechanical
Electrical
Battery
Generator drive belt
Generator pulley
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 8 (10A)
Circuitry
Fusible links
Cables
Generator
PCM
Charging system
warning indicator
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
4. Verify the battery condition. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
5. Check the operation of the charging system warning indicator at the instrument cluster (IC). Normal
operation is as follows:
With the key OFF, the charging system warning indicator should be off.
With the key ON and the engine OFF, the charging system warning indicator should be on.
With the engine running, the charging system warning indicator should be off.
6. Turn off the headlamps and the A/C system (if equipped). Turn the climate control blower to low/off.
Check the battery voltage before and after starting the engine to determine if the battery voltage increases.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
7. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
8. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
9. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
10. Carry out the network test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
11. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM and the IC.
12. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the DTC CHART . For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
13. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to SYMPTOM CHART.
NOTE:
DTC P0622 can be set by the loss of the communication lines between the
generator and the PCM. The charging system warning indicator then illuminates
until the engine is operated at greater than 4,500 RPM (approximately wide open
throttle [WOT]) for a minimum of 3 seconds. At this time, the generator selfexcites. The charging system warning indicator remains illuminated, and the
generator operates in a default mode (approximately 13.5 volts) until the engine
is turned off.
DTC CHART
DTCs
Description
Source
Action
B1317
Battery Voltage High
Various Modules Go to Pinpoint Test B .
B1318
Battery Voltage Low
Various Modules Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Battery Voltage Out of
B1676
Various Modules Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Range
P0563
System Voltage High
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
P0620
Generator Control Circuit
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Generator Field Term
P0622
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Circuit
Generator Field Terminal
P0625
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Circuit - Low
Generator Field Terminal
P0626
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Circuit - High
Generator Control Circuit
P065B
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Range/ Performance
All other
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
DTCs
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
The battery is discharged
Action
High key-off current drain(s)
Engine, generator and battery
grounds
Go to Pinpoint Test
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
or battery voltage is low
The charging system
warning indicator is on
with the engine running
and no charging system
DTCs present
The generator is noisy
Radio interference
A.
Positive battery cable
Circuitry
Battery
Generator
Circuitry
PCM
Generator
Instrument cluster (IC)
Accessory drive belt
Loose bolts/brackets
Generator/pulley
Generator
Circuitry
In-vehicle entertainment system
Go to Pinpoint Test
C.
Go to Pinpoint Test
D.
Go to Pinpoint Test
E.
Pinpoint Tests
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If exposed to
these charges, damage can result.
Refer to INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION , the DTC CHART and the SYMPTOM CHART for
direction to the appropriate pinpoint test.
Pinpoint Test A: The Battery is Discharged or Battery Voltage is Low
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Charging System for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The generator output voltage is supplied through the positive battery output (B+), circuit SDC14 (RD) terminal
on the rear of the generator to the battery and electrical system. During normal operation the charging system
warning indicator is off with the key ON engine running (KOER). The charging system warning indicator is on
with the key ON engine OFF (KOEO).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
High key-off current drain(s)
Engine, generator and battery grounds
Positive battery cable
Circuitry
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Battery
Generator
PINPOINT TEST A: THE BATTERY IS DISCHARGED OR BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW
A1 CHECK THE BATTERY CONDITION
Carry out the Battery - Condition Test to determine if the battery can hold a charge and is OK for
use. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Does the battery pass the condition test?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : INSTALL a new battery. REFER to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
A2 CHECK THE GENERATOR OUTPUT
Carry out the Generator On-Vehicle Load Test and No Load Test. Refer to the Component Tests in
this service information.
Does the generator pass the component tests?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test B .
A3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS
Carry out the Battery - Drain Testing. Refer to the Component Tests in this service information.
Are any circuits causing excessive current drains?
YES : REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to A4.
A4 CHECK THE VEHICLE GROUNDS
Key in START position.
Fig. 1: Checking Vehicle Grounds
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With the engine running, measure the voltage drop between the generator housing and the negative
battery terminal.
Is the voltage drop less than 0.1 volt?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to A5.
NO : CHECK the engine ground, generator ground and the battery ground for corrosion. TEST the
system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK THE VOLTAGE DROP IN THE B+ CIRCUIT SDC14 (RD)
Fig. 2: Checking Voltage Drop
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With the engine running, measure the voltage drop between generator B+ C102b circuit SDC14
(RD) and the positive battery terminal.
Is the voltage drop less than 0.5 volt?
YES : CHECK if the customer left any electrical system(s) on or if there is an intermittent
excessive battery draw. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : CHECK for any corrosion in the B+ SDC14 (RD), positive battery cable and/or connections.
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test B: DTCs B1317, P0563, P0620, P0625, P0626 and P065B - Charging System Failure
Refer to appropriate WIRING DIAGRAMS ARTICLE, Charging System for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
With the engine running, the charging system warning indicator is off. The A sense circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) to
the generator field coil is 13-15 volts. This voltage feedback is used by the regulator to maintain the battery
voltage at the desired setpoint. The S (stator) circuit (internal to the generator) is used to monitor generator
operation. This circuit and other regulator internal conditions are checked by the regulator to allow the PCM to
turn off the charging system warning indicator by sending a message over the controller area network (CAN)
bus to the instrument cluster (IC). The positive battery output (B+) circuit SDC14 (RD) is the generator output
voltage supplied to the battery and electrical system.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Generator
IC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
PCM
DTC Description
Fault Trigger Conditions
B1317 - Battery Voltage High
P0563 - System Voltage High
P0620 - Generator Control Circuit
P0625 - Generator Field Circuit - Low
P0626 - Generator Field Circuit - High
P065B - Generator Control Circuit Range
Open, short to ground or battery. Charging
system voltage is below 13 volts or above 16
volts and charging system lamp is
illuminated.
PINPOINT TEST B: DTCs B1317, P0563, P0620, P0625, P0626 AND P065B - CHARGING SYSTEM
FAILURE
NOTE:
Make sure battery voltage is greater than 12.2 volts prior to carrying out this
pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Do not have a battery charger attached during vehicle testing.
B1 CONFIRM THE BATTERY CONDITION
Carry out the Battery Condition Test. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Is the battery OK?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : CORRECT the battery condition and Go to B2.
B2 CHECK THE BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) FUSE 8 (10A)
Check fuse: BJB 8 (10A)
Is BJB 8 (10A) OK?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) and INSTALL a fuse. INSPECT PCM and engine ground
circuits and make sure they are securely attached. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST
the system for normal operation.
B3 CHECK THE GENERATOR B+ CONNECTION
Key in OFF position.
Inspect generator C102b circuit SDC14 (RD) connection. Connection should be tight.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between generator C102b circuit SDC14 (RD) and ground.
Is generator C102b connection tight and does the generator B+ measure battery voltage?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : TIGHTEN the generator B+ connection or REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
B4 MONITOR THE PCM PIDs WITH KEY ON/ENGINE OFF (KOEO)
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Clear the PCM DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger
NOTE:
Many of the PCM PIDs selected will be monitored later in this
pinpoint test.
Select and monitor the following PCM PIDs:
Generator Monitor (GENMON).
Generator Command Duty Cycle (GENCMD).
Generator Voltage Desired (GENVDSD).
Generator Fault Indicator Lamp (GENFIL).
Engine Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
Module Supply Voltage (VPWR).
Monitor the GENMON PID.
Does the PID read 0%?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : Go to B8.
B5 MONITOR THE PCM PID GENMON WITH KEY ON/ENGINE RUNNING (KOER)
Key in START position.
With the engine at idle, wait 15 seconds for the GENVDSD PID to increase to greater than 13
volts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Monitor PID GENMON at idle and 3,000 RPM.
Does the GENMON PID read between 3% and 98% at engine idle speed and at 3,000 RPM?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : Go to B8.
B6 MONITOR THE PCM PIDs GENMON, VPWR AND GENVDSD WITH THE ENGINE AT
3,000 RPM
Turn all electrical accessories (lights, blower motor, etc.) off.
NOTE:
If GENMON PID does not remain below 85%, make sure that the
battery is at an acceptable state of charge and that all electrical
accessories are off.
Increase the engine speed to 3,000 RPM (or road test).
Does the VPWR PID remain within ± 0.5 volt of the GENVDSD PID when the GENMON
PID is less than 85%?
YES : Go to B7.
NO : Go to B17.
B7 MONITOR THE PCM PIDs GENMON, VPWR AND GENVDSD WITH THE ENGINE AT
IDLE
Return the engine speed to idle.
CAUTION: On vehicles with low electrical loads, it may be necessary to
add external loads (devices connected to power points, etc.) to
determine the maximum GENMON value. GENMON value will
not read between 95%-98% on a vehicle with minimal electrical
accessories. As long as there is a significant increase in the
GENMON PID following the procedure below, answer YES to the
question.
Determine the maximum GENMON PID value by lowering engine idle RPM to 500 RPM or less
using output state control (manual transaxle vehicles require the parking brake applied and the
clutch pedal depressed) and turn on all electrical accessories until the VPWR PID is less than the
GENVDSD PID by at least 0.7 volt. Under this condition the GENMON PID should read between
95% and 98%.
Does the GENMON PID read between 95% and 98%?
YES : Go to B19.
NO : Go to B17.
B8 CHECK THE VOLTAGE OUTPUTS FROM THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Generator C102a
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage of the following circuits:
EXPECTED VOLTAGES
Expected
Generator
Circuit
Voltage
Connector
(Approximate)
8-11 volts
CDC15 (should be less
C102a-1
(VT)
than battery
voltage)
CDC10
C102a-2
0 volts
(BU/OG)
SBB08
C102a-3
Battery voltage
(VT/RD)
Are the voltages as indicated for each circuit?
YES : Go to B13.
NO : If a fault is detected in the GENCOM circuit CDC10 (BU/OG) or GENMON circuit CDC15
(VT), go to B9.
If a fault is detected in the A sense circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) circuit, go to B12.
B9 CHECK CIRCUITS CDC10 (BU/OG) AND CDC15 (VT) FOR DAMAGE OR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Generator C102a
Disconnect: PCM C175b
Inspect the following for damaged or pushed-out pins:
Component Connector Circuit
CDC10
PCM
C175b-22
(BU/OG)
CDC15
PCM
C175b-23
(VT)
CDC10
Generator C102a-2
(BU/OG)
CDC15
Generator C102a-1
(VT)
Measure the resistance between PCM C175b-22, circuit CDC10 (BU/OG) harness side and
generator C102a-2, circuit CDC10 (BU/OG) harness side and PCM C175b-23, circuit CDC15 (VT)
harness side and generator C102a-1, circuit CDC15 (VT) harness side.
Are the connectors and pins free of damage and are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B10.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for
normal operation.
B10 CHECK CIRCUITS CDC10 (BU/OG) AND CDC15 (VT) FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between generator C102a-1, circuit CDC15 (VT) harness side and ground and
generator C102a-2, circuit CDC10 (BU/OG) harness side and ground.
Are the voltages approximately 0 volt?
YES : Go to B11.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuits. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for
normal operation.
B11 CHECK CIRCUITS CDC10 (BU/OG) AND CDC15 (VT) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between generator C102a-1, circuit CDC15 (VT) harness side and ground
and generator C102a-2, CDC10 (BU/OG) harness side and ground and measure resistance between
generator C102a-1, circuit CDC15 (VT) harness side and generator C102a-2, circuit CDC10
(BU/OG) harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuits. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : Go to B24.
B12 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB08 (VT/RD) FOR DAMAGE OR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Generator C102a
Inspect C102a-3 for damaged or pushed-out pins.
Measure the resistance of the A sense circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) between the battery and C102a-3
generator connector.
Are the connectors and pins free of damage and are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B24.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for
normal operation.
B13 CHECK FOR SHORTED CIRCUITS
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Generator C102a
Connect: PCM C175b
Key in ON position.
Verify that PID GENMON reads 100%.
Carry out the Wiggle Test of wiring to determine if PID GENMON changes from 100%.
Does PID GENMON change from 100%?
YES : REPAIR short circuit on CDC15 (VT) C102a-1.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to B14.
B14 CHECK THE PCM PID GENMON INPUT TO THE PCM
Fig. 4: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (10A) jumper wire between generator C102a-1, circuit CDC15 (VT), harness side
and ground.
Key in ON position.
Monitor the GENMON PID while performing a wiggle test on the wire harness.
Does the PID read 0%?
YES : Go to B15.
NO : REPAIR open connection on circuit CDC15 (VT). INSPECT generator C102a-1 and PCM
C175e-16 for damage. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B15 COMPARE THE PCM PIDS GENMON AND GENCMD
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Fused (10A) Jumper Wire
Fig. 5: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (10A) jumper wire between generator C102a-1, circuit CDC15 (VT), harness side
and generator C102a-2, circuit CDC10 (BU/OG), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Monitor the GENMON and GENCMD PIDs while performing a wiggle test on the harness.
Does the GENMON PID read within 2% of the GENCMD PID?
YES : Go to B16.
NO : INSPECT C175b-66, circuit GD124 (BK/VT), PCM ground circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
B16 A SENSE CIRCUIT LOAD TEST
NOTE:
This step puts a load on the A sense circuit. If there are corroded or loose
connections, loading the circuit may help show the fault.
Key in ON position.
Using a 12-volt test lamp, check for voltage at C102a-3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD).
Does the test lamp illuminate?
YES : Go to B23.
NO : REPAIR connection on circuit SBB08 (VT/RD). INSPECT generator C102a-3 for damage.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
B17 CHECK THE PCM VPWR PID
Fig. 6: Checking Charging System Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With the engine running, measure the battery voltage.
Monitor the VPWR PID.
Are the battery voltage and PID within 0.5 volt of each other?
YES : Go to B19.
NO : Go to B18.
B18 MEASURE THE PCM INPUT VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: PCM C175b
Connect a fused (10A) jumper wire between C175b-8 and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Fig. 7: Checking Circuits For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between PCM input voltage pins 51, 52 and 53 to PCM ground pin 66.
Are voltages within 0.5 volt of PID VPWR?
YES : Go to B24.
NO : REPAIR high resistance or loose connections between C175b-51 circuit CBB30 (YE/BU),
C175b-52 circuit CBB30 (YE/BU), C175b-53 circuit CBB30 (YE/BU) PCM power circuits or
C175b-10, circuit GD122 (BK), PCM ground circuit.
B19 CHECK THE GENERATOR B+ RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Battery
Disconnect: Generator C102b
Fig. 8: Checking Circuit For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between generator C102b, component side and the generator housing.
Is the resistance greater than 125K ohms?
YES : Go to B20.
NO : INSTALL a new generator. REFER to GENERATOR & REGULATOR article. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
B20 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE VOLTAGE REGULATOR INTERNAL CIRCUITS
TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between generator C102a, component side and ground. Refer to the
following table.
Expected
Resistance
Greater
than
1
1,000K
ohms
Greater
2 than 125K
ohms
Greater
3 than 125K
ohms
Pin
Are the resistance values as indicated?
YES : Go to B21.
NO : INSTALL a new generator. REFER to GENERATOR & REGULATOR article. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
B21 ROAD TEST IN AN ATTEMPT TO VERIFY THE FAULT
Connect: Generator C102b
Connect: Generator C102a
Connect: Battery
Carry out a road test and monitor the following PIDs:
Generator monitor (GENMON).
Generator voltage desired (GENVDSD).
Module supply voltage (VPWR).
Does the GENMON PID read either 0% or 100% during the road test?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : If a road test did not cause the fault to occur, intermittent fault condition may be present. Go
to B22.
B22 USE THE VEHICLE DATA RECORDER (VDR) TO CAPTURE INTERMITTENT FAULT
CONDITION
Connect a VDR to the vehicle and setup to capture the following PIDs:
Generator monitor (GENMON).
Generator command duty cycle (GENCMD).
Generator voltage desired (GENVDSD).
Generator fault indicator lamp (GENFIL).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Engine revolutions per minute (RPM).
Module supply voltage (VPWR).
Set the VDR to trigger if any of the following events occur during vehicle operation (waiting 15
seconds after start):
VPWR PID reads greater than 15.2 volts.
GENMON PID reads 0% or 100%.
Road test the vehicle.
Was a fault captured by the VDR?
YES : RECORD any values from the VDR that may have been captured. If no charging system
DTCs are present, go to Pinpoint Test C . If any charging system DTCs are present, go to B3.
NO : No problem found at this time. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system
for normal operation.
B23 CHECK THE CHARGING SYSTEM CIRCUITS FOR INTERMITTENT FAULTS
Key in OFF position.
Connect: Generator C102b
Connect: Generator C102a
Connect: PCM C175b
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in START position.
With the engine running, monitor the charging system warning indicator lamp and the scan tool for
DTCs.
Does the charging system warning indicator lamp illuminate and does any charging system
DTC get stored into memory?
YES : INSTALL a new generator. REFER to GENERATOR & REGULATOR article. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. This may indicate an intermittent
fault. Go to B19.
B24 CHECK THE CHARGING SYSTEM CIRCUITS FOR INTERMITTENT FAULTS
Key in OFF position.
Connect: Generator C102b
Connect: Generator C102a
Connect: PCM C175b
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in START position.
With the engine running, monitor the charging system warning indicator lamp and the scan tool for
DTCs.
Does the charging system warning indicator lamp illuminate and does any charging system
DTC get stored into memory?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. This may indicate an intermittent
fault. Go to B19.
Pinpoint Test C: The Charging System Warning Indicator is On With the Engine Running and No
Charging System DTCs Present
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Charging System for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
With the engine running, the charging system warning indicator is off. The A sense circuit SBB08 (VT/RD)
from the battery B+ to the generator regulator is 13-15 volts. This voltage feedback is used by the regulator to
maintain the battery voltage at the desired setpoint. The S (stator) circuit (internal to the generator) is used to
monitor generator operation. This circuit and other regulator internal conditions are checked by the regulator to
allow the PCM to turn off the charging system warning indicator by sending a message over the controller area
network (CAN) bus to the instrument cluster (IC). The positive battery output (B+) circuit SDC14 (RD) is the
generator output supplied to the battery and electrical system.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Generator
Circuitry
IC
PCM
PINPOINT TEST C: THE CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR IS ON WITH THE
ENGINE RUNNING AND NO CHARGING SYSTEM DTCs PRESENT
NOTE:
Make sure battery voltage is greater than 12.2 volts prior to carrying out this
pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Do not have a battery charger attached during vehicle testing.
C1 CHECK THE BATTERY CONDITION
Carry out the Battery - Condition Test to determine if the battery can hold a charge and is OK for
use. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Does the battery pass the condition test?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : INSTALL a new battery. REFER to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
C2 CHECK THE GENERATOR B+ CONNECTION
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Inspect generator C102b circuit SDC14 (RD) connection. Connection should be tight.
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between generator C102b circuit SDC14 (RD) and ground.
Is generator C102b connection tight and does the generator B+ measure battery voltage?
YES : Go to C3.
NO : TIGHTEN the generator B+ connection or REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the any DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
C3 CHECK THE VOLTAGE DROP IN THE B+ CIRCUIT SDC14 (RD)
Fig. 10: Checking Voltage Drop
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With the engine running, measure the voltage drop between generator B+ C102b circuit SDC14
(RD) and the positive battery terminal.
Is the voltage drop less than 0.5 volt?
YES : Go to C4.
NO : CHECK for any corrosion in the B+ C102b circuit SDC14 (RD), positive battery cable and/or
connections. REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
C4 CHECK THE DTCs IN THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in START position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Retrieve PCM DTCs
Use the recorded PCM DTCs from the continuous and on-demand self tests.
Are any PCM DTCs recorded?
YES : For all DTCs EXCEPT charging system DTCs, REFER to the INTRODUCTION GASOLINE ENGINES article. If any charging system DTCs are present, go to Pinpoint Test B .
If referred here by the PC/ED, go to C5.
NO : Go to C5.
C5 MONITOR PID GENFIL
With the engine running, monitor PID GENFIL.
Does PID GENFIL show fault?
YES : Go to C6.
NO : REPAIR/INSTALL a new IC, IC-to-PCM connection or the PCM. TEST the system for
normal operation.
C6 MONITOR PID VPWR
With the engine running, monitor PIDS VPWR, GENFIL, GENVDSD.
Is PID VPWR greater than 15.6 volts?
YES : Go to C7.
NO : Go to C8.
C7 CHECK PCM VPWR PID
Fig. 11: Checking Charging System Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With the engine running, measure the battery voltage.
Monitor the VPWR PID.
Are the battery voltage and VPWR PID within 0.6 volt of each other?
YES : Go to C8.
NO : Go to C9.
C8 MEASURE THE PCM INPUT VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: PCM C175b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Connect a fused (10A) jumper wire between C175b-8 and ground.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 12: Checking Circuits For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between PCM input voltage pins 51, 52 and 53 to PCM ground pin 66.
Are voltages within 0.5 volt of PID VPWR?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM.
NO : REPAIR high resistance or loose connections between C175b-51 circuit CBB30 (YE/BU),
C175b-52 circuit CBB30 (YE/BU), C175b-53 circuit CBB30 (YE/BU) PCM power circuits or
C175b-10, circuit GD122 (BK), PCM ground circuit.
C9 MONITOR THE PCM PID GENERATOR MONITOR WITH KEY ON/ENGINE RUNNING
Key in START position.
With the engine at idle, wait 15 seconds for the GENVDSD PID to increase to greater than 13
volts.
Monitor PID GENMON at idle and 3,000 RPM.
Does the GENMON PID read between 3% and 98% at engine idle speed and at 3,000 RPM?
YES : Go to C10.
NO : Go to C11.
C10 MONITOR PID GENVDSD
With the engine running, monitor PID GENVDSD.
Is PID GENVDSD greater than 15.2 volts?
YES : REPAIR connection on circuit SBB08 (VT/RD). INSPECT generator C102a-3 for damage.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. If no problems
are found, INSTALL a new generator. REFER to GENERATOR & REGULATOR article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new PCM.
C11 CHECK FOR SHORTED CIRCUITS
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Generator C102a
Verify that PID GENMON reads 100%.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Carry out the Wiggle Test of wiring to determine if PID GENMON changes from 100%.
Does PID GENMON change from 100%?
YES : REPAIR short circuit on C102a-1 CDC15 (VT).
NO : Go to C12.
C12 CHECK THE PCM PID GENERATOR MONITOR INPUT TO THE PCM
Fig. 13: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (10A) jumper wire between generator C102a-1, circuit CDC15 (VT), harness side
and ground.
Key in ON position.
Monitor the GENMON PID while carrying out a Wiggle Test on the wire harness.
Does the GENMON PID read 0%?
YES : REPAIR open connection on circuit CDC15 (VT) C102a-1 and PCM C175b-23. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new generator. REFER to GENERATOR & REGULATOR article. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test D: The Generator is Noisy
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Charging System for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The generator is belt-driven by the engine accessory drive system.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Accessory drive belt
Loose bolts/brackets
Generator/pulley
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST D: THE GENERATOR IS NOISY
D1 CHECK FOR ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT NOISE AND LOOSE MOUNTING BRACKETS
Key in OFF position.
Check the accessory drive belt for damage and correct installation. Refer to ACCESSORY
DRIVE article.
Check the accessory mounting brackets and generator pulley for looseness or misalignment.
Is the accessory drive OK?
YES : Go to D2.
NO : REPAIR as necessary. REFER to ACCESSORY DRIVE article for diagnosis and testing of
the accessory drive system. TEST the system for normal operation.
D2 CHECK THE GENERATOR MOUNTING
Check the generator mounting for loose bolts or misalignment.
Is the generator mounted correctly?
YES : Go to D3.
NO : REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
D3 CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR ELECTRICAL NOISE
Disconnect: Generator C102b
Key in START position.
With the engine running, use a stethoscope or equivalent listening device to probe the generator.
Is the noise still present?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : INSTALL a new generator. REFER to GENERATOR & REGULATOR article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
D4 CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR MECHANICAL NOISE
With the engine running, use a stethoscope or equivalent listening device to probe the generator and
the accessory drive area for unusual mechanical noise.
Is the generator the noise source?
YES : INSTALL a new generator. REFER to GENERATOR & REGULATOR article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : REFER to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to diagnose the
source of the engine noise.
Pinpoint Test E: Radio Interference
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Charging System for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The generator radio suppression equipment reduces interference transmitted through the speakers by the vehicle
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
electrical system.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Generator
Circuitry
In-vehicle entertainment system
PINPOINT TEST E: RADIO INTERFERENCE
E1 VERIFY THE GENERATOR IS THE SOURCE OF THE RADIO INTERFERENCE
NOTE:
If the OEM audio unit has been replaced with an aftermarket unit, the
vehicle may not pass this test. Return the vehicle to OEM condition before
following this pinpoint test.
Key in START position.
Start and run the engine.
Tune the audio unit to a station where the interference is present.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Generator C102b
Key in START position.
With the engine running, determine if the interference is still present.
Is the interference present with the generator disconnected?
YES : REFER to INFORMATION & ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS article for diagnosis and
testing of the in-vehicle entertainment system.
NO : INSTALL a new generator. REFER to GENERATOR & REGULATOR article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test F: DTC B1318 or B1676 - Battery Voltage Low or Battery Voltage Out of Range
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Charging System for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Various control modules within the vehicle operate at a voltage between 10-17 volts. Voltage to these modules
is supplied through the vehicle harness to the module(s). Ground for the modules is provided by the modules
ground circuit(s). If voltages to these modules rise above 17 volts, DTC B1317 or B1676 may set or if voltage
drops below 10 volts, DTC B1318 or B1676 may set.
DTC B1318 Battery Voltage Out Of Range - If charging system voltage falls below a certain voltage,
some modules within the vehicle may set this DTC. Some modules have a different voltage minimum set
point to set this DTC.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:24 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
DTC B1676 Battery Voltage High - If charging system voltage falls below or above a certain voltage,
some modules within the vehicle may set this DTC. Some modules have a different voltage minimum or
maximum set point to set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Battery
Charging system
Module voltage supply
Module ground
NOTE:
DTC B1317 or B1318 can be set if the vehicle has had a discharged battery, has
been recently jump started or has had the vehicle battery charged.
PINPOINT TEST F: DTC B1318 OR B1676 - BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW OR BATTERY VOLTAGE
OUT OF RANGE
F1 CHECK FOR DTCs
Key in OFF position.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Retrieve all continuous DTCs
Is DTC B1318 or B1676 present in only one module?
YES : If DTC B1317 or B1676 are recorded in only one module, go to F2.
NO : If DTC B1318 or B1676 are recorded in more than one module, go to Pinpoint Test B .
F2 CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE
Measure the battery voltage between the positive and negative battery posts with the key ON
engine OFF (KOEO), and with the engine running, all accessory loads OFF.
Is the battery voltage between 10 and 13 volts with KOEO, and between 11 and 17 volts with
the engine running?
YES : Go to F3.
NO : CHECK and/or REPAIR the charging system as necessary. Go to Pinpoint Test B . TEST
the system for normal operation. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
F3 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Affected module which recorded the DTC B1317 or B1676
Key in ON position.
Measure all of the affected module's power circuits, harness side to ground. Refer to affected
module Wiring Diagrams for schematic and connector information. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAMS article.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to F4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:25 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the module power circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
F4 CHECK THE MODULE GROUNDS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between all of the affected module's ground circuits, harness side to ground.
Refer to affected module Wiring Diagrams for schematic and connector information. Refer to
appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F5.
NO : REPAIR the module ground circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
F5 CHECK THE MODULE FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: All of the affected module connectors
Check the connector and module for:
corrosion.
pushed out or damaged pins.
connector or module damage.
Connect: All of the affected module connectors
Clear all DTCs.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new module. REFER to the removal and installation procedure in the affected
module's service information . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been the result of a
loose connection, may recently have had a discharged battery or may have been jump started.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Component Tests
Battery - Drain Testing
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, charge, recharge or jump start a battery unless
the following information has been read and understood. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the meter, do not crank the engine or operate
accessories that draw more than 10A.
CAUTION: If equipped with the CD6 audio unit, precautions must be taken when the
battery has been disconnected. When reconnecting the battery, make sure
no interruption of power occurs for 30 seconds. If power is interrupted
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:25 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
during the first 30 seconds, permanent damage to the CD6 audio unit will
result.
NOTE:
No factory-equipped vehicle should have more than a 50 mA (0.050 amp) draw.
Check for current drains on the battery in excess of 50 mA (0.050 amp) with all the electrical accessories off
and the vehicle at rest for at least 40 minutes. Current drains can be tested with the following procedure.
NOTE:
Many electronic modules draw 10 mA (0.010 amp) or more continuously.
NOTE:
Use an in-line ammeter between the negative battery post and its respective
cable.
NOTE:
Typically, a drain of approximately one amp is attributed to an engine
compartment lamp, glove compartment lamp or interior lamp staying on
continually. Other component failures or wiring shorts are located by
selectively pulling fuses to pinpoint the location of the current drain. When the
current drain is found, the meter reading falls to an acceptable level. If the drain
is still not located after checking all the fuses, it is due to the generator.
NOTE:
To accurately test the drain on a battery, an in-line ammeter must be used. Use
of a test lamp or voltmeter is not an accurate method due to the number of
electronic modules.
1. Make sure the junction box(es)/fuse panel(s) is accessible without turning on the interior lights or the
underhood lights.
2. Drive the vehicle at least 5 minutes and over 48 km/h (30 mph) to turn on and activate the vehicle
systems.
3. Allow the vehicle to sit with the key off for at least 40 minutes to allow the modules to time out/power
down.
4. Connect a fused jumper wire (30A) between the negative battery cable and the negative battery post to
prevent modules from resetting and to catch capacitive drains.
5. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the negative battery post without breaking the connection of
the jumper wire.
NOTE:
It is very important that continuity is not broken between the battery and
the negative battery cable when connecting the meter. If this happens, the
entire procedure must be repeated.
6. Connect the battery tester between the negative battery cable and the post. The meter must be capable of
reading milliamps and should have a 10 amp capability.
NOTE:
If the meter settings need to be switched or the test leads need to be
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:25 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
moved to another jack, the jumper wire must be reinstalled to avoid
breaking continuity.
NOTE:
Amperage draw varies from vehicle to vehicle depending on the
equipment package. Compare to a similar vehicle for reference.
NOTE:
No factory-equipped vehicle should have more than a 50 mA (0.050 amp)
draw.
7. Remove the jumper wire.
8. Note the amperage draw. Draw varies from vehicle to vehicle depending on the equipment package.
Compare to a similar vehicle for reference.
9. If the draw is found to be excessive, remove the fuses from the smart junction box (SJB) one at a time and
note the current reading. Do not reinstall the fuses until you have finished testing. To correctly isolate
each of the circuits, all of the fuses may need to be removed and then install one fuse, note the amperage
draw, remove the fuse and install the next fuse. Continue this process with each fuse.
10. If the current draw is still excessive, remove the fuses from the battery junction box (BJB) one at a time
and note the current drop. Do not reinstall the fuses until you have finished testing. To correctly isolate
each of the circuits, all of the fuses may need to be removed, then install one fuse, note the amperage
draw, remove the fuse and install the next fuse. Continue this process with each fuse. When the current
level drops to an acceptable level after removing a fuse, the circuit containing the excessive draw has
been located.
11. Check the wiring diagrams for any circuits that run from the battery without passing through the BJB or
the SJB. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article. If the current draw is still
excessive, disconnect these circuits until the draw is found. Disconnect the generator electrical
connections if the draw cannot be located. The generator may be internally shorted, causing the current
drain.
Generator On-Vehicle Tests
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the generator, do not make the jumper wire
connections except as directed.
CAUTION: Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the housing and the
internal diode cooling fins with the key on or off. A short circuit may result
and burn out the diodes.
NOTE:
Battery posts and cable clamps must be clean and tight for accurate meter
indications.
NOTE:
Refer to the battery tester manual for complete directions for testing the
charging system.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:25 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Charging System - General Information - Edge & MKX
1. Turn off all lamps and electrical components.
2. Place the transmission in NEUTRAL and apply the parking brake.
3. Carry out the Load Test and No-Load Test according to the following component tests:
Generator On-Vehicle Tests - Load Test
1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch the tester to the ammeter function.
Connect the positive and negative leads of the tester to the corresponding battery terminals.
Connect the current probe to the generator B+ output terminal, circuit SDC14 (RD).
With the engine running at approximately 2,000 RPM, adjust the tester load bank to determine the output
of the generator. Generator output should be greater than the graph shown below. If not, refer back to the
pinpoint test or Go to Symptom Chart.
Fig. 14: Load Test Output Chart
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Generator On-Vehicle Tests - No-Load Test
1. Switch the tester to the voltmeter function.
2. Connect the voltmeter positive lead to the generator B+ terminal, circuit SDC14 (RD), and the negative
lead to ground.
3. Turn all electrical accessories off.
4. With the engine running at approximately 2,000 RPM, check the generator output voltage. The voltage
should be between 13.2 and 15.5 volts. If not, refer back to the pinpoint test or Go to Symptom Chart.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:42:25 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION
Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft
WSS-M2C930-A
SAE 5W-20 Super Premium
Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Fill Capacity
-
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Fuel tank capacity (all wheel drive [AWD] vehicles) 76L (20 gal)
Fuel tank capacity (front wheel drive [FWD]
72L (19 gal)
vehicles)
Fuel Pressure
Engine running fuel pressure
450 kPa (65 psi)
Specification
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
FUEL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:26
11:39:20 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be
prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot
vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
The fuel system consists of:
a mechanical returnless fuel system.
a fuel rail.
a multi-port fuel injection (MFI) system.
an all wheel drive (AWD) saddle-type or front wheel drive (FWD) L-shaped fuel tank.
fuel, vapor and brake tubes in an integrated bundle assembly.
a fuel tank filler pipe assembly, which cannot be modified in any way.
a 1/4 turn-type fuel tank filler cap.
an inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch.
a separate fuel level sensor assembly on AWD saddle-type fuel tank.
a fuel pump (FP) module containing:
the electric FP module, which provides pressurized fuel to the fuel rail.
a serviceable fuel level sender.
a check valve, which maintains system pressure after the FP module is shut off.
a pressure relief valve for overpressure protection in the event of restricted fuel flow.
an in-tank fuel filter providing filtration to protect the fuel injectors from foreign material.
The FP module is controlled by the PCM. Electrical power to the FP is provided through the IFS switch located
under the left rear quarter trim panel.
The engines are equipped with sequential MFI injection.
The fuel pressure is regulated to a constant pressure by a fuel pressure regulator.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
FUEL SYSTEM
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The following procedure diagnoses a slow to fill concern only. For all other
concerns, refer to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article.
The fuel tank filler pipe assembly is used to refuel the vehicle. The fuel tank filler pipe flapper valve prevents
spitback of fuel during and after refueling. The fuel tank stores the fuel. The fuel tank contains a fuel pump (FP)
module. The FP module consists of a fuel level sender and a FP. The fuel level sender sends a signal to the fuel
gauge informing the driver of how much fuel is in the fuel tank. The FP provides fuel to the fuel tubes which
supply the fuel rail.
During refueling, the fuel tank vents to the atmosphere through the vent and filler pipes, on vehicles without onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) systems. In vehicles equipped with ORVR, the fuel tank and filler pipe
are designed so that when the vehicle is being refueled, fuel vapors in the fuel tank travel to the evaporative
emission (EVAP) canister, which absorbs the fuel vapors and vents the pressure from the fuel tank during
refueling.
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be
prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot
vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
1. Verify the customer's concern by refueling the vehicle and observe the fuel fill rate.
2. Inspect to determine if any of the following mechanical concerns apply.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Bent, kinked or damaged fuel tank filler pipe
Bent, kinked or damaged fuel tank filler pipe vent tube (if
equipped)
Incorrect routing of the fuel tank filler pipe
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Incorrect routing of the fuel tank filler pipe vent tube (if
equipped)
Incorrect position of fuel tank filler pipe clamps
Incorrect position of fuel tank filler pipe vent tube clamps (if
equipped)
Fuel tank mounted vapor tubes bent or damaged
Evaporative emission (EVAP) system tubes or hoses bent or
damaged
Accident damage to the fuel tank
Accident damage to the vehicle effecting the fuel tank filler
pipe-to-body connection
Unauthorized modifications and/or alterations to the vehicle
EVAP system fresh air tube plugged (dirt, spider webbing)
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the EVAP system.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DTC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
CHART. For PCM related DTCs, refer to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article. For
all other DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to SYMPTOM CHART.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DTC CHART
DTC
P0446
P0451
P0452
P0453
P0454
P1443
P1450
P1451
P260F
Description
Evaporative Emission System Vent Control Circuit
Evaporative Emission System Pressure
Sensor/Switch Range/Performance
Evaporative Emission System Pressure
Sensor/Switch Low
Evaporative Emission System Pressure
Sensor/Switch High
Evaporative Emission System Pressure
Sensor/Switch Intermittent
Evaporative Emission System Control Valve
(Low/No Flow)
Unable to Bleed up Fuel Tank Vacuum
Evaporative Emission System Vent Control Circuit
Emission System Monitoring Processor Performance
Action
Go to PINPOINT TEST A.
Go to PINPOINT TEST A.
Go to PINPOINT TEST A.
Go to PINPOINT TEST A.
Go to PINPOINT TEST A.
Go to PINPOINT TEST A.
Go to PINPOINT TEST A.
Go to PINPOINT TEST A.
Go to PINPOINT TEST A.
Symptom Chart
SYMPTOM CHART
Condition
Possible Sources
Slow to fill
All other fuel system
concerns
Action
Fuel tank filler pipe
Fuel tank filler pipe vent
tube, if equipped
Evaporative emission
(EVAP) system
Fuel tank filler pipe
flapper valve (part of the
fuel tank filler pipe
assembly)
Fuel level vent valve, if
equipped (part of the fuel
tank)
Fuel system components
Go to PINPOINT TEST A.
REFER to the INTRODUCTION GASOLINE ENGINES article.
Pinpoint Test A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Pinpoint Test A: Slow to Fill
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, fuel should flow at a steady rate through the fuel tank filler pipe into the fuel tank. As
fuel enters the fuel tank, air is vented through the filler pipe or the on-board refueling vapor recovery (ORVR)
system.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuel tank filler pipe vent tube, if equipped
Fuel tank filler pipe
Evaporative emission (EVAP) system
Fuel tank filler pipe flapper valve (part of the fuel tank filler pipe assembly)
Fuel level vent valve, if equipped (part of the fuel tank)
PINPOINT TEST A: SLOW TO FILL
A1 CARRY OUT INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
Carry out inspection and verification.
Was the cause of the concern found?
YES : REPAIR or INSTALL new components to correct the concern.
NO : Go to A2.
A2 CHECK THE SYSTEM FOR ANY EVAP DTCs
Connect the scan tool.
Check the system for any of the following EVAP DTCs: P0446, P0451, P0452, P0453, P0454,
P1443, P1450, P1451 and P260F.
Are any of these DTCs present?
YES : REFER to INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article to diagnosis the EVAP
system.
NO : Go to A3.
A3 MONITOR THE FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) WHILE FILLING THE FUEL TANK
Monitor the FTP reference value while filling the fuel tank. Refer to INTRODUCTION GASOLINE ENGINES article.
Is FTP within specification?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : Go to A4.
A4 MONITOR THE FTP WHILE FILLING THE FUEL TANK WITH THE EVAP SYSTEM
DISCONNECTED
Disconnect the fuel tank-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling at the EVAP canister.
Monitor the FTP reference value while filling the fuel tank. Refer to INTRODUCTION Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
GASOLINE ENGINES article.
Is FTP within specification?
YES : INSPECT the EVAP system for blockage or restrictions. REPAIR the blockage or
restriction. If the blockage or restriction cannot be repaired, INSTALL new EVAP system
components.
NO : Go to A5.
A5 CHECK THE FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE ASSEMBLY FOR BLOCKAGE OR
RESTRICTION
Remove the fuel tank filler pipe assembly. Refer to FUEL TANK AND LINES article.
Inspect the fuel tank filler pipe and fuel tank filler pipe vent tube (if equipped) for a blockage or
restriction.
Is the fuel tank filler pipe or fuel tank filler pipe vent tube (if equipped) blocked or
restricted?
YES : If possible, REPAIR the blockage or restriction. If the blockage or restriction cannot be
repaired, INSTALL a new fuel tank filler pipe or fuel tank filler pipe vent tube.
NO : INSTALL a new fuel tank. REFER to FUEL TANK AND LINES article.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
NOTE:
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch is located behind a shield and requires
the use of a small screwdriver to release the electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
2. Disconnect the IFS switch electrical connector.
Fig. 1: Identifying IFS Switch Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine stalls.
4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection
supply manifold pressure has been released.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
6. When the fuel system service is complete, connect the IFS switch electrical connector.
NOTE:
It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle
the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check
for leaks prior to starting the engine.
7. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Fuel Pressure Test Kit
310-D009 (D95L-7211A)
Adapter, Fuel Pressure Test
310-180
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When working on or near the evaporative emission (EVAP) system,
disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. The EVAP system
contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor, so an electrical spark may
cause a fire or explosion. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE
RELEASE.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
AND FILTERING article.
4. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to QUICK
CONNECT COUPLING.
5. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Adapter and the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel
rail.
Fig. 2: Identifying Fuel Pressure Test Adapter Fuel Pressure Test Kit
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The air cleaner outlet pipe must be installed prior to completing the fuel
system pressure test.
6. Install the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
AND FILTERING article.
NOTE:
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector was previously
disconnected to release the fuel system pressure and must be
reconnected to test the fuel system pressure.
7. Connect the IFS switch electrical connector.
8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article.
NOTE:
Carry out a key ON engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for fuel leaks
prior to the Fuel System Pressure Test.
NOTE:
After completing the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the
special tool and release any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to
removing the tool.
9. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information,
refer to SPECIFICATIONS.
FUEL TANK DRAINING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Fuel Storage Tanker
Tool Number
164-R3202 or equivalent
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be
prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot
vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE
RELEASE.
3. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
4. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position it aside.
5. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it enters the fuel tank.
Fig. 3: Inserting Suitable Fuel Drain Tube Into Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
7. Remove the rear seats. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
8. Remove the 4 bolts and the fuel level sensor access cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Identifying Fuel Level Sensor Access Cover & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Clean the fuel level sensor connection, flange surface and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
9. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 5: Identifying Fuel Level Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Place absorbent pads in the general work area in case of fuel spillage.
10. Release the lock tab, and using a suitable tool, rotate the fuel level sensor counterclockwise
approximately 1/4 turn, lift and position aside.
Fig. 6: Rotating Fuel Level Sensor Counterclockwise Approximately 1/4 Turn & Lift Upward
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Using the special tool and a suitable fuel drain tube, drain the remaining fuel through the fuel level sensor
aperture.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Draining Remaining Fuel Through Fuel Level Sensor Aperture
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
QUICK CONNECT COUPLING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Disconnect Tool, Fuel Pipe
(5/16")
310-040
MATERIAL
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
Disconnect - Type I
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When working on or near the evaporative emission (EVAP) system,
disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. The EVAP system
contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor, so an electrical spark may
cause a fire or explosion. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use
compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube
or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of
the tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
CAUTION: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and
fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when
working with these components or component damage can occur. Always
install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip
components which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional
information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Depress the locking tab and release the quick connect coupling from the tube.
Fig. 8: Locating Fuel Tube Quick Connect Coupling Button
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect - Type I
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the quick connect
coupling onto the tube.
1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated.
Fig. 9: Installing Quick Connect Coupling Onto Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Pull on the quick connect coupling and the tube to make sure it is securely fastened.
3. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article.
Disconnect - Type II
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When working on or near the evaporative emission (EVAP) system,
disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. The EVAP system
contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor, so an electrical spark may
cause a fire or explosion. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
serious personal injury.
CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use
compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube
or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of
the tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
CAUTION: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and
fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when
working with these components or component damage can occur. Always
install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip
components which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional
information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Release the quick connect coupling primary locking tab.
Fig. 10: Releasing Quick Connect Coupling Lock Tab
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Rotate the primary locking tab to the fully opened position and squeeze the secondary locking tabs to
release the locking mechanism.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Releasing Locking Mechanism
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Push the locking mechanism outward and release the tube.
Fig. 12: Pushing Locking Mechanism Outward And Releasing Fuel Supply Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the quick connect coupling from the tube.
Fig. 13: Removing Quick Connect Coupling From Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect - Type II
1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Installing Quick Connect Coupling Onto Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the quick connect
coupling onto the tube.
2. Depress the locking mechanism until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing and is fully
seated onto the tube.
Fig. 15: Depressing Retainer Clip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Rotate the primary locking tab on the retainer clip to the closed position.
Fig. 16: Rotating Primary Locking Tab On Retainer Clip To Closed Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
4. Pull on the quick connect coupling and the tube to make sure it is securely fastened.
5. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article.
Disconnect - Type III
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When working on or near the evaporative emission (EVAP) system,
disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. The EVAP system
contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor, so an electrical spark may
cause a fire or explosion. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use
compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube
or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of
the tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
CAUTION: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and
fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when
working with these components or component damage can occur. Always
install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip
components which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Squeeze the quick connect coupling retainer locking tabs to release the locking mechanism.
Fig. 17: Releasing Locking Mechanism
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Push the locking mechanism outward to release the tube.
Fig. 18: Pushing Locking Mechanism Outward To Releasing Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the quick connect coupling from the tube.
Fig. 19: Removing Quick Connect Coupling From Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Connect - Type III
NOTE:
Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the quick connect
coupling onto the tube.
1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube.
Fig. 20: Installing Quick Connect Coupling Onto Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Depress the quick connect coupling locking mechanism into the locked position.
Fig. 21: Depressing Quick Connect Coupling Locking Mechanism Into Locked Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Visually inspect and verify that the locking mechanism is flush with the quick connect coupling housing
and that the locking tabs are securely fastened.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 22: Identifying Locking Mechanism And Quick Connect Coupling Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Pull on the quick connect coupling and the tube to make sure it is securely fastened.
5. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article.
Disconnect - Type IV
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When working on or near the evaporative emission (EVAP) system,
disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. The EVAP system
contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor, so an electrical spark may
cause a fire or explosion. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use
compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of
the tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
CAUTION: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and
fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when
working with these components or component damage can occur. Always
install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional
information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Install the special tool on the tube and push into the quick connect coupling locking clip to release the
locking tabs.
Fig. 23: Disconnecting Quick Connect Coupling From Tube Using Special Tool (310-040)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the quick connect coupling from the tube.
Connect - Type IV
NOTE:
Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the quick connect
coupling onto the tube.
1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 24: Installing Quick Connect Coupling Onto Tube Until Fully Seated
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Pull on the quick connect coupling and the tube to make sure it is securely fastened.
3. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article.
Disconnect - Type V
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When working on or near the evaporative emission (EVAP) system,
disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. The EVAP system
contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor, so an electrical spark may
cause a fire or explosion. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use
compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of
the tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
CAUTION: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and
fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when
working with these components or component damage can occur. Always
install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip
components which may cause fuel leaks.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
2. Squeeze the outer edges of the quick connect coupling to release the locking tabs.
Fig. 25: Squeezing Outer Edges Of Quick Connect Coupling To Release Locking Tabs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the quick connect coupling from the tube.
Fig. 26: Removing Quick Connect Coupling From Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect - Type V
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the quick connect
coupling onto the tube.
1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated.
Fig. 27: Installing Quick Connect Coupling Onto Tube Until It Is Fully Seated
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Pull on the quick connect coupling and the tube to make sure it is securely fastened.
3. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article.
Disconnect - Type VI
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When working on or near the evaporative emission (EVAP) system,
disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. The EVAP system
contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor, so an electrical spark may
cause a fire or explosion. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
serious personal injury.
CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use
compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube
or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of
the tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
CAUTION: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and
fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when
working with these components or component damage can occur. Always
install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip
components which may cause fuel leaks.
1. Release the lock tab on the quick connect coupling.
Fig. 28: Positioning Locking Tab Into Unlatched Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Separate the quick connect coupling from the fitting.
Fig. 29: Identifying Quick Connect Coupling
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Connect - Type VI
1. Release the lock tab and install the quick connect coupling onto the fitting.
Fig. 30: Identifying Quick Connect Coupling
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Apply the lock tab into the latched position.
Fig. 31: Positioning Locking Tab Into Latched Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Pull on the quick connect coupling to make sure it is securely fastened.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:39:20 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
2008 TRANSMISSIONS
Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Dye-Lite® ATF/Power Steering Fluid Leak Detection Dye
164-R3701 (Rotunda)
MERCON® V Automatic
MERCON® V
Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US);
CXT-5-LM12 (Canada)
Multi-Purpose Grease
ESB-M1C93-B
XG-4 and/or XL-5
Fill Capacity
-
9.5L (10 qt)
-
SOLENOID OPERATION CHART
Shift Solenoid
Base Selector
Lever Position
P
R
N
D
SSD
SSA
SSB
SSC
(VFS)
(VFS)
(VFS)
(VFS) NH (CB
SSE
PCM Commanded NL (CB NH (3, 5, NL (CB L, R/4, 5, (On/Off)
1, 2, 3, 4)
R)
2, 6)
Gear
6)
NC
P
Off
On
Off
Off
On
R
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
N1
Off
On
Off
On
On
N2
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
N3
Off
On
Off
Off
On
a
1
On
On
Off
Off
Onb
L
2
3
4
5
6
L
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
On
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Offa
Onb
TCC
(VFS)
NL
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
Off
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:38
10:55:22 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
a Turns on above 10 km/h (6 mph).
b Turns off above 10 km/h (6 mph).
CLUTCH APPLICATION CHART
InterDirect (C 3, Overdrive (C Forward (CB Low/ Reverse mediate (CB
5, R)
4, 5, 6)
1, 2, 3, 4)
(CB L, R)
Gear
2, 6)
1st
X
X
2nd
X
X
3rd
X
X
4th
X
X
5th
X
X
6th
X
X
Reverse
X
X
CB = Clutch brake
O/R = Overrunning
LINE PRESSURE CHART
Gear
One-Way
X
O/R
O/R
O/R
O/R
O/R
Line
Pressures at Idlea
P
R
N
D
L
372-413 kPa (54-60 psi)
689-724 kPa (100-105 psi)
372-413 kPa (54-60 psi)
579-600 kPa (84-87 psi)
579-600 kPa (84-87 psi)
Pressure at Wide Open Throttle (WOT) Stalla
P
R
372-413 kPa (54-60 psi)
1,724-2,068 kPa
(250-300 psi)
372-413 kPa
(54-60 psi)
1,655-1,724 kPa
(240-250 psi)
1,655-1,724 kPa
(240-250 psi)
N
D
L
a All pressures are approximate.
STALL SPEED CHART
Engine
3.5L
Stall Speed
2,350-2,650
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
GEAR RATIO CHART
Gear
1st/low
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
Reverse
Ratio
4.484:1
2.872:1
1.842:1
1.414:1
1:1
0.742:1
2.882:1
SHIFT SPEEDS
Throttle Position
Light Throttle
Range
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Medium Throttle
Heavy Throttle
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly bracket bolt
ACL outlet pipe clamp
Battery tray bolts
Catalytic converter nuts
Catalytic converter support bracket bolts
Catalytic converter support bracket nut
Driveshaft bolts
Exhaust Y-pipe assembly clamp
Exhaust Y-pipe assembly nuts
Line pressure tap plug
Lower bumper-to-subframe support nuts
Shift
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
5-6
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
5-6
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
5-6
KM/H
14-19
24-31
32-40
45-56
63-80
37-47
58-71
74-93
108-135
169-211
55-69
84-105
127-158
167-208
179-222
Nm
Main control cover boltsa
lb-ft
MPH
9-12
15-19
20-25
28-35
39-50
23-29
36-44
46-58
67-84
105-131
34-43
52-65
79-98
104-129
111-138
11
5
10
40
20
40
70
40
40
9
10
12
30
30
52
30
30
-
lb-in
97
44
89
177
80
89
106
12
-
106
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Main control valve body boltsa
Manual control lever nut
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor bolt
Power steering rack bolts
Power steering rack heat shield bolts
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)-to-transaxle bolts
PTU support bracket bolts
Roll restrictor bolts
Roll restrictor bracket bolts
Roll restrictor heat shield nut
Roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt
Selector lever cable bracket bolts
Solenoid body boltsa
Stabilizer bar bracket bolts
Starter battery terminal
Starter bolts
Starter solenoid terminal
Subframe nuts
Subframe support bracket bolts
Torque converter bolts
Torque converter housing bolts
Transaxle support insulator bolt
Transaxle support insulator bracket nuts
Transaxle support insulator nuts
Transaxle support insulator through bolt
Transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve bracket nuts
Transmission fluid cooler tube-to-thermal bypass valve fittings
Transmission fluid cooler tube-to-transaxle case bolts
Transmission fluid drain plug
Transmission fluid filler tube nut
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor bolt
18
12
107
6
90
70
90
90
11
103
12
12
79
66
52
66
66
76
-
159
106
53
97
106
106
48
12
26
6
150
103
55
48
55
63
55
175
9
25
9
9
11
12
35
19
111
76
41
35
41
46
41
129
18
-
106
53
80
80
80
97
106
a Refer to the appropriate procedure.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
DIAGNOSTIC STRATEGY
NOTE:
Do not take shortcuts or assume that critical checks or adjustments have
already been made.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Troubleshooting an electronically controlled automatic transaxle is simplified by using the proven method of
diagnosis. One of the most important things to remember is that there is a definite procedure to follow.
Follow the procedures as written to avoid missing critical components or steps.
To correctly diagnose a concern, have the following publications available:
Appropriate Transaxle articles
Introduction - Gasoline Engines article
TSBs
Appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article
These publications provide the information required when diagnosing transaxle concerns.
Use the Diagnostic Flow Chart as a guide and follow the steps as indicated.
Preliminary Inspection
Know and understand the customer's concern.
Verify the concern by operating the vehicle.
Check the fluid levels and condition.
Check for non-factory add-on items.
Check selector lever linkage for correct adjustment.
Check TSB messages regarding the concern.
Diagnostics
Carry out On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) procedures Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) and Key ON Engine
Running (KOER).
Record all DTCs.
Repair all non-transaxle codes first.
Repair all transaxle codes second.
Erase all continuous codes and attempt to repeat them.
Repair all continuous codes.
If only pass codes are obtained, refer to Diagnosis By Symptom for further information and diagnosis.
Follow the diagnostic sequence to diagnose and repair the concern the first time.
DIAGNOSTIC FLOW CHART
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool.
Prior to carrying out the flow test, the following items should be checked:
Know and understand the customer concerns.
Verify the concern by operating the vehicle.
Check the transmission fluid level and condition.
Check for non-factory-installed items and verify correct installation.
Check the selector lever linkage adjustments.
Check TSB messages for vehicle concerns.
Carry out both Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) and Key ON Engine Running (KOER) Self Test.
Record all DTCs.
DIAGNOSTIC FLOW CHART
Test
1) Were any DTCs recorded?
Result
Yes
No
2) Are any continuous test memory codes present?
Yes
No
Action
REPAIR all hard
DTCs. FOLLOW the
pinpoint tests.
REFER to the
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article first, then this
service information,
then Go to Step 2.
REFER to Diagnosis
By Symptom, then
Go to Step 5.
CLEAR codes and
CARRY OUT drive
cycle test, then Go to
Step 3.
Go to Step 4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
3) Did the continuous test memory codes reappear?
Yes
4) Is the concern repaired?
No
Yes
No
5) Are there any electrical concerns?
Yes
No
6) Was the transmission concern corrected when the scan tool
was installed?
Yes
REPAIR all
continuous test
memory codes.
FOLLOW the
pinpoint tests.
REFER to the
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article then the
appropriate
transmission
articles , then this
service information,
then Go to Step 4.
Go to Step 4.
CARRY OUT the
Key ON Engine OFF
(KOEO) and Key
ON Engine Running
(KOER) self test to
verify that no DTCs
are present. CLEAR
memory codes.
REFER to Diagnosis
By Symptom, then
Go to Step 5.
INSTALL the scan
tool. CARRY OUT
KOEO and KOER
tests and drive cycle
test with the scan
tool, then Go to Step
6.
REFER to the
hydraulic and
mechanical routine to
diagnose and repair
the concern, then Go
to Step 7.
REFER to the
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article, intermittent
fault diagnosis and
use the scan tool to
diagnose cause of
concern in the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
No
7) Is the concern repaired?
Yes
No
processor, vehicle
harness or external
inputs (sensors or
switches).
REFER to the
hydraulic and
mechanical routine to
diagnose the
concern, then Go to
Step 7.
CARRY OUT the
final quick test to
verify that no DTCs
are present. CLEAR
memory codes.
Concern should have
been repaired. GO
back through the
Diagnostic Flow
Chart and review
other components
that may have
contributed to the
concern. CHECK
and DIAGNOSE
those components.
Get assistance from
other sources.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
The following items must be checked prior to beginning the diagnostic procedures.
Know and Understand the Concern
In order to correctly diagnose a concern, first understand the customer complaint or condition. Customer contact
may be required in order to begin to verify the concern. Understand the conditions as to when the concern
occurs. For example:
Hot or cold vehicle temperature
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Hot or cold ambient temperature
Vehicle driving conditions
Vehicle loaded/unloaded
After understanding when and how the concern occurs, proceed to verifying the concern.
Verification of Condition
This article provides information which must be used in both determining the actual cause of customer concerns
and carrying out the appropriate procedures.
The following procedures must be used when verifying customer concerns for the transmission.
Determine Customer Concern
NOTE:
Some transaxle conditions may cause engine concerns. An electronic pressure
control short circuit can cause engine misfiring. The
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) not disengaging will stall the engine.
Determine customer concerns relative to vehicle use and dependent driving conditions, paying attention to the
following items:
Hot or cold vehicle operating temperature
Hot or cold ambient temperatures
Type of terrain
Vehicle loaded/unloaded
City/highway driving
Upshift
Downshift
Coasting
Engagement
Noise/vibration - check for dependencies, either RPM dependent, vehicle speed dependent, shift
dependent, gear dependent, range dependent or temperature dependent.
Check Transmission Fluid Level and Condition
If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period of time at highway speeds, in city traffic, in hot weather
or while pulling a trailer, the transmission fluid needs to cool down to obtain an accurate reading.
The transmission fluid level reading on the transmission fluid level indicator will differ depending on operating
and ambient temperatures. The correct reading should be within the normal operating temperature range.
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Under normal circumstances, the transmission fluid level should be checked during normal maintenance. If the
transaxle starts to slip, shifts slowly or shows signs of transmission fluid leaking, the transmission fluid level
should be checked.
1. With the selector lever in PARK, the engine at idle and foot pressed on the brake, move the selector lever
through each gear and allow engagement of each gear. Place the selector lever in the PARK position.
2. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator cap and remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
3. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator with a clean cloth.
4. Install the transmission fluid level indicator back in the transmission fluid filler tube until it is fully
seated, then remove the transmission fluid level indicator. The transmission fluid level should be within
the normal operating range.
Fig. 1: Identifying Transmission Fluid Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
-
2
3
-
Description
Correct transmission fluid level at normal
operating temperature 80°C-93°C (175°
F-200°F)
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
High Transmission Fluid Level
A transmission fluid level that is too high may cause the transmission fluid to become aerated due to the
churning action of the rotating internal parts. This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of
transmission fluid from the vent tube and possible transaxle malfunction and/or damage. If an overfill reading is
indicated, refer to Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill.
Low Transmission Fluid Level
A low transmission fluid level could result in poor transaxle engagement, slipping, malfunction and/or damage.
This could also indicate a leak in one of the transaxle seals or gaskets.
Adding Transmission Fluid
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The use of any other type of transmission fluid than specified could result in
transaxle malfunction and/or damage.
If transmission fluid needs to be added, add transmission fluid in 0.25L (1/2 pt) increments through the
transmission fluid filler tube. Do not overfill the transmission fluid.
Transmission Fluid Condition Check
1. Check the transmission fluid level.
2. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be dark reddish, not brown
or black or have a burnt odor.
3. Hold the transmission fluid level indicator over a white facial tissue and allow the transmission fluid to
drip onto the facial tissue and examine the stain.
4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection.
5. If the stain is a foamy pink color, this may indicate coolant in the transaxle. The engine cooling system
should also be inspected at this time.
6. If transmission fluid contamination or transaxle failure is confirmed by the sediment in the transmission
fluid, the transaxle must be disassembled and completely cleaned. This includes the torque converter,
cooler bypass valve, coolers and cooler tubes.
7. Carry out diagnostic checks and adjustments, refer to Diagnosis By Symptom.
Water in Transmission Fluid
To correctly repair a transmission or transaxle that has had water or coolant introduced into the system,
completely disassemble, clean and replace the following parts:
All internal and external seals
All friction material; clutches and bands
Torque converter
All parts with bonded seals
All solenoids
All transmission fluid filters
Prior to installing the transmission or transaxle, the transmission fluid cooler(s), transmission fluid cooler tubes
and transmission fluid cooler hoses need to be flushed and cleaned.
ROAD TESTING VEHICLE
NOTE:
Always drive the vehicle in a safe manner according to driving conditions and
obey all traffic laws.
NOTE:
If a new or remanufactured transaxle assembly is being installed or a new
solenoid body is installed, the PCM will have to be reflashed with a new
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
solenoid body strategy and identification data file. The solenoid body strategy
drive cycle should also be carried out. Refer to Solenoid Body Strategy.
The Shift Point Road Test and Torque Converter Operation Test provide diagnostic information on shift
controls and torque converter operation.
SOLENOID BODY STRATEGY
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Solenoid Body Identification Procedure
1. Using the scan tool, select Powertrain, Transmission and Transmission Solenoid Body Identification from
the toolbox icon and follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
The solenoid body identification screen displays solenoid body identification information:
Solenoid body identification - 7-digit
Solenoid body strategy - 13-digit
The next screen displays the current solenoid body identification and strategy data file stored in the
PCM. If the solenoid body strategy field is blank, the module contains a partial transmission
solenoid body strategy. This is due to a corrupt or missing file at the time the programmable
parameters were completed.
2. Compare the solenoid body identification and strategy (if available) to the solenoid body service tag or
the replacement solenoid body tag located on top of the transaxle case.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Original Solenoid Body Service Tag
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
-
Description
Thirteen-digit solenoid body strategy
Seven-digit solenoid body identification
Fig. 3: Replacement Solenoid Body Service Tag
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
-
Description
Thirteen-digit solenoid body strategy
Seven-digit solenoid body identification
3. If the solenoid body identification and strategy on the scan tool match the solenoid body service tag or
replacement tag, then the solenoid body identification and strategy are correct for this transaxle and a
solenoid body strategy download is not required. If the solenoid body service tag or replacement tag is
missing or damaged so that it is not readable or does not match the identification or strategy on the scan
tool, remove the main control cover, refer to Main Control Cover.
The 7-digit identification number and the 13-digit strategy number are stamped on the solenoid body.
NOTE:
If the solenoid body information does not match the module information,
transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Solenoid Body Identification Tag
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Inspect the solenoid body identification and strategy stamped on the solenoid body and compare this to
the solenoid body service tag on the transaxle case. If the solenoid body identification and strategy
stamped on the solenoid body does not match the solenoid body service tag or if the solenoid body
identification and strategy stamped on the solenoid body match the solenoid body service tag on the
transaxle case but do not match the solenoid body identification and strategy numbers displayed on the
scan tool, a solenoid body strategy data download is required.
Item
1
2
Part Number
-
Description
Thirteen-digit solenoid body strategy
Seven-digit solenoid body identification
Solenoid Body Strategy Data Download
1. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the toolbox icon
and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the
solenoid body.
NOTE:
If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or
driveability concerns can occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
2. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is
not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may
proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be
connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool.
3. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 8. If the file is not present,
continue with this procedure.
4. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
5. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a
message if it is downloaded successfully.
6. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be
downloaded.
7. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
8. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
9. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields
from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit
and place it over the existing identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Fig. 5: Replacement Solenoid Body Service Tag
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
NOTE:
Part Number
-
Description
Thirteen-digit solenoid body strategy
Seven-digit solenoid body identification
If a drive cycle is not completed, the customer may feel erratic shifts and
driveability concerns.
10. Test drive the vehicle. Refer to Solenoid Body Strategy Drive Cycle.
Solenoid Body Strategy Drive Cycle
Carry out the drive cycle after downloading the solenoid body strategy data file to the PCM.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Always drive the vehicle in a safe manner according to driving conditions and
obey all traffic laws.
The engine and transaxle must be at normal operating temperature.
1. Bring the transaxle to normal operating temperature.
2. With the engine running and the brake applied, move the selector lever through the gears in the following
order, pausing in each gear for 4 seconds: N, R, N, D, R, D, N. Repeat this pattern 2 times. If any
engagements feel soft or harsh, repeat this procedure.
3. Drive the vehicle and accelerate at a moderate throttle so that the upshifts occur at 2,000 RPM up to 80
km/h (50 mph) and brake moderately to a stop. Repeat this pattern 2 times.
4. Drive the vehicle and accelerate at a moderate throttle so that the upshifts occur at 3,000 RPM up to 80
km/h (50 mph) and brake moderately to a stop. Repeat this pattern 2 times.
5. With the engine running and the brake applied, move the selector lever through the gears in the following
order, pausing in each gear for 4 seconds: N, R, N, D, R, D, N. Repeat this pattern 2 times.
SHIFT POINT ROAD TEST
This test verifies that the shift control system is operating correctly.
1. Bring engine and transaxle up to normal operating temperature.
2. Operate vehicle with selector lever in D range.
NOTE:
Shift speed ranges are approximate for all applications. For specific
applications (engine, axle ratio and application) refer to the Automatic
Transmission Specification Issue available from Ford Customer Service
Division.
3. Apply minimum throttle and observe speeds at which upshift occurs and torque converter engages using
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
the shift speeds chart.
SHIFT SPEEDS
Throttle Position
Light Throttle
Range
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Medium Throttle
Heavy Throttle
Shift
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
5-6
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
5-6
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
5-6
KM/H
14-19
24-31
32-40
45-56
63-80
37-47
58-71
74-93
108-135
169-211
55-69
84-105
127-158
167-208
179-222
MPH
9-12
15-19
20-25
28-35
39-50
23-29
36-44
46-58
67-84
105-131
34-43
52-65
79-98
104-129
111-138
4. With vehicle speed above 43 km/h (27 mph), press accelerator pedal to floor, Wide Open Throttle
(WOT). The transaxle should shift from 4th to 3rd, or 4th to 2nd, depending on the vehicle speed. The
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) should release.
5. With vehicle speed above 56 km/h (35 mph), move the selector lever from D (DRIVE) range to L (LOW)
range and remove foot from accelerator pedal. The transaxle should immediately downshift to 2nd gear.
When vehicle speed drops below 32 km/h (20 mph), the transaxle should downshift into 4th gear.
6. If the transaxle fails to upshift/downshift or TCC does not apply and release, refer to Diagnosis By
Symptom for possible causes.
TORQUE CONVERTER DIAGNOSIS
Prior to torque converter installation, all diagnostic procedures must be followed. This is to prevent the
unnecessary installation of new or remanufactured torque converters. Only after a complete diagnostic
evaluation can the decision be made to install a new or remanufactured torque converter.
Begin with the normal diagnostic procedures as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Preliminary Inspection
Know and Understand the Customer's Concern
Verify the Concern - carry out the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test.
Carry out Diagnostic Procedures:
Run OBDs. Refer to Diagnostics.
Repair all non-transmission related DTCs first.
Repair all transmission DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Rerun OBD to verify repair.
Carry out Line Pressure Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures.
Carry out Stall Speed Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures.
Carry out diagnostic routines. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom.
Use the index to locate the appropriate routine that best describes the symptom(s). The
routine will list all possible components that may cause or contribute to the symptom. Check
each component listed, diagnose and repair as required, before installing a new torque
converter.
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test
This test verifies that the TCC control system and the torque converter are operating correctly.
1. Carry out Self Test, refer to the tester manual. Check for DTCs.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine.
3. Bring the engine to normal operating temperature by driving the vehicle at highway speeds for
approximately 15 minutes in Overdrive (Circle D) position.
4. If the vehicle stalls in Overdrive (Circle D) at idle with vehicle at a stop, move the selector lever to
manual L position. If the vehicle stalls, see torque converter operation concerns, refer to Diagnosis By
Symptom. Repair as required. If the vehicle does not stall in Overdrive (Circle D), refer to Diagnosis By
Symptom.
VISUAL INSPECTION
This inspection will identify modifications or additions to the vehicle operating system that may affect
diagnosis. Inspect the vehicle for non-Ford factory add-on devices such as:
Electronic add-on items:
A/C
generator (alternators)
engine turbo
cellular telephone
cruise control
CB radio
linear amplifiers
backup alarm signal
computer
Vehicle modification:
These items, if not installed correctly, will affect the PCM or transmission function. Pay particular
attention to add-on wiring splices in the PCM harness or transmission wiring harness, abnormal tire size
or axle ratio changes.
Leaks, refer to Leakage Inspection.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Correct linkage adjustments, refer to AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION EXTERNAL
CONTROLS article.
Selector Lever Linkage Check
If the selector lever linkage is not correctly adjusted, hydraulic leakage can occur at the manual control valve
and can cause a delay in engagements and/or slipping while operating. Refer to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION EXTERNAL CONTROLS article for selector lever linkage adjustment.
Check TSBs
Refer to all TSBs which pertain to the concern and follow the procedure.
Carry Out On-Board Diagnostic (OBD)s Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) and Key ON Engine Running (KOER) Self Test.
After a road test, with the vehicle warm and before disconnecting any connectors, carry out the Self Test using
the scan tool. Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article for diagnosis and testing of the powertrain
control system.
DIAGNOSTICS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
73III Digital Multimeter
Tool Number
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) With Scan Tool
NOTE:
For detailed instruction and other diagnostic methods using the scan tool or
equivalent, refer to the scan tool tester manual and the Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article.
These Self-Tests should be used to diagnose the PCM and should be carried out in order.
Self Test - Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)
Self Test - Continuous Memory Codes
Self Test - Key ON Engine Running (KOER)
Special Test Modes:
Wiggle Test Mode
Output Test Mode
PCM Reset Mode
Clearing DTCs P1000
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II Drive Cycle
Other Diagnostic Tool Features
For further information on other diagnostic testing features using the scan tool, refer to the Introduction Gasoline Engines article. Other diagnostic methods include the following.
PID Access Mode
Freeze Frame Data Access Mode
Oxygen Sensor Monitor Mode
OUTPUT STATE CONTROL (OSC) MODE
Description
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Output state control allows an off-board diagnostic scan tool direct control of specific transaxle components or
functions. Output state control allows the technician to control the main functions or components of the
transaxle to help the technician more quickly and easily diagnose the transaxle. For example, output state
control may be used to change gears or remain in a specific gear. Output state control may be used to control the
operation of the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) to engage or disengage, or to keep the converter clutch from
engaging at all. Output state control may also be used to help carry out solenoid electrical pinpoint tests by
turning a solenoid off or on by controlling the actual current to the Variable Force Solenoid (VFS) solenoid.
Procedure
NOTE:
Retrieve Continuous Codes and carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) and
Key ON Engine Running (KOER) Self Test before using any output state control.
Any DTCs related to the Transmission Range (TR) sensor, the Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) sensor or the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor must be fixed or
the PCM will not allow the output state control to operate.
Output state control is used to test various transaxle components and functions when the vehicle is either in the
service bay or being driven on the road. Specific vehicle conditions are required for output state control to
control each specific function or component. The following will describe which transaxle functions and
components output state control may control and the specific vehicle conditions necessary for its operation.
Service Bay - Vehicle State No. 1
Vehicle state No. 1 is functional ONLY when the key is in the ON position and the vehicle gear selector is in
PARK or NEUTRAL with the engine OFF. Vehicle state No. 1 is required when using output state control to
carry out electrical pinpoint tests. The following transaxle components may be controlled using output state
control in vehicle state No. 1.
SSA/SS1 - Directs PCM to command Shift Solenoid E (SSE) OFF or ON
SSD_AMP - Controls the current to Shift Solenoid D (SSD), VFS
SSC_AMP - Controls the current to Shift Solenoid C (SSC), VFS
SSB_AMP - Controls the current to Shift Solenoid B (SSB), VFS
SSA_AMP - Controls the current to Shift Solenoid A (SSA), VFS
TCC AMP - Controls the current to the TCC VFS
PCA AMP - Controls the current to the Line Pressure Control (LPC) VFS
The vehicle requirements must be met when sending an output state control value to control each specific
component such as the solenoids stated above. If the vehicle requirements are not met when sending the output
state control value, an error message may appear. When the error message appears, output state control is
cancelled and should be restarted.
After sending the output state control value, if the vehicle requirements are no longer met, the error message
will not appear but the output state control value will be cancelled by the PCM. Use the scan tool to monitor the
PID that corresponds to each output state control function or component to determine if the PCM is using the
output state control value or normal control.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Output state control may be cancelled at any time, using the scan tool, to return the PCM to normal control for a
specific output state control function or component. See instructions for specific scan tool.
Service Bay - Vehicle State No. 2
Vehicle state No. 2 is functional ONLY when the engine is running and the vehicle gear selector is in PARK or
NEUTRAL with engine speed greater than 1,100 RPM. Vehicle state No. 2 is required when using output state
control to carry out a line pressure check. Most, but not all, of the solenoids may be controlled during this
vehicle state. It is recommended to use vehicle state No. 1 when using output state control to control the
solenoids. The following transaxle function and components may be controlled using output state control in
vehicle state No. 2.
LINEDSD - Output state control function to command line pressure to a desired pressure
SSD_AMP - Controls the current to SSD, VFS
SSC_AMP - Controls the current to SSC, VFS
SSB_AMP - Controls the current to SSB, VFS
SSA_AMP - Controls the current to SSA, VFS
The vehicle requirements must be met when sending an output state control value to control each specific
component such as the solenoids stated above. If the vehicle requirements are not met when sending the output
state control value, an error message may appear. When the error message appears, output state control is
cancelled and should be restarted.
After sending the output state control value, if the vehicle requirements are no longer met, the error message
will not appear but the output state control value will be cancelled by the PCM. Use the scan tool to monitor the
PID that corresponds to each output state control function or component to determine if the PCM is using the
output state control value or normal control.
Output state control may be cancelled at any time, using the scan tool, to return the PCM to normal control for a
specific output state control function or component. See instructions for specific scan tool.
Output state control values for SSA_AMP, SSB_AMP, SSC_AMP, SSD_AMP, PCA AMP and TCC AMP to
control the current on the VFS are between zero (0) and one (1) amp. The following are examples.
0 - Commands PCM to control current to zero amps
0.25 - Commands PCM to control current to 1/4 amp or 250 milli-amps
0.50 - Commands PCM to control current to 1/2 amp or 500 milli-amps
0.75 - Commands PCM to control current to 3/4 amp or 750 milli-amps
1 - Commands PCM to control current to 1 amp or 1,000 milli-amps
Output state control will aid in testing the electronic functions of the PCM, VFS and associated circuitry.
Output state control allows the technician to control the PCM commanded current of the VFS and the
commanded state of the on/off solenoid. This allows the technician to accurately test the electronic circuitry by
comparing the commanded current with the actual current or the on/off state with the actual voltage. Shifting
the transmission through the various gears tests the mechanical operation of the VFS. When using output state
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
control to control the VFS current, the technician may measure the circuit current using an inductive pickup or
measure the circuit voltage drop to help verify the proper electrical operation of each VFS solenoid.
The output state control values for LINEDSD to command a desired line pressure are between 414 kPa (60 psi)
and 1,931 kPa (280 psi). The following are examples.
60 psi - Commands PCM to control line pressure to 414 kPa (60 psi)
100 psi - Commands PCM to control line pressure to 689 kPa (100 psi)
150 psi - Commands PCM to control line pressure to 965 kPa (150 psi)
200 psi - Commands PCM to control line pressure to 1,517 kPa (200 psi)
NOTE:
Do NOT command line pressure LOWER than 414 kPa (60 psi) or HIGHER than
1,931 kPa (280 psi) or damage to the transaxle can occur.
Output state control allows the technician to control the PCM commanded Line Pressure. This allows the
technician to accurately test the electronic pressure control system by comparing the output state control
commanded line pressure to the actual line pressure indicated on the pressure gauge. The pressure gauge should
be connected to the line pressure tap on the transmission. The PID corresponding to the commanded Line
Pressure must be monitored to make sure the PCM is using the output state control value for the commanded
Line Pressure. This test will help verify the correct operation of the transmission pump assembly, pump
regulator valve and the operation of the LPC solenoid.
Drive Test
Output state control allows control of 3 transmission functions while driving on the road. Each transmission
function has a unique set of vehicle operating requirements that the technician is required to meet before the
PCM will allow output state control to operate.
TCC_OSC - Commands the PCM to engage or disengage the TCC
GEAR_OSC - Commands the PCM to change gears (upshift or down-shift) or remain in a gear
HRSH_SFT - Commands a slightly higher hydraulic pressure during engagements and upshifts
The vehicle requirements must be met when sending an output state control value to control the specific
functions stated above. If the vehicle requirements are not met when sending the output state control value, an
error message may appear. When the error message appears, output state control is cancelled and should be
restarted.
After sending the output state control value, if the vehicle requirements are no longer met, the error message
will not appear but the output state control value will be cancelled by the PCM. Use the scan tool to monitor the
PID that corresponds to each output state control function or component to determine if the PCM is using the
output state control value or normal control.
Output state control may be cancelled at any time, using the scan tool, to return the PCM to normal control for a
specific output state control function or component. See instructions for specific scan tool.
Drive Test - Torque Converter Clutch Control
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
The output state control values for TCC_OSC to engage or disengage the TCC are as follows:
0 - PCM in normal control of TCC and output state control is cancelled
1 or OFF - Commands PCM to keep the TCC from engaging
2 or ON - Commands PCM to engage the TCC using a normal ramp rate
3 or ON - Commands PCM to engage the TCC using a fast ramp rate
Controlling the TCC will assist the technician in testing the operation of the torque converter for engagements
and disengagements. Also, the technician may find it easier to evaluate upshifts and downshifts by first using
output state control to keep the TCC from engaging.
Vehicle requirements when using TCC_OSC Controlling the TCC.
When sending the TCC_OSC value [1 or OFF], the engine must be running with the transaxle in the DRIVE
position and the vehicle speed must be greater than 5 km/h (3 mph).
When sending the TCC_OSC value [2 or 3 or ON], the engine must be running with the selector lever in the
DRIVE position, transaxle in 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th gear, transaxle temperature between 4°C (40°F) and 121°C
(250°F), the vehicle speed must be below 24 km/h (15 mph) and engine speed greater than 1,100 RPM with
minimal engine load.
Drive Test - Upshift and Downshift Control
NOTE:
Once output state control has successfully commanded the transmission to
shift to the desired output state control gear, the transmission will remain in
that gear until output state control commands a different gear or the vehicle
conditions are no longer correct.
The output state control values for GEAR_OSC to control the transaxle gear changes are as follows:
0 - PCM in normal shift control and output state control is cancelled
1 - Commands PCM to shift to 1st gear - no engine braking
2 - Commands PCM to shift to 2nd gear - with engine braking
3 - Commands PCM to shift to 3rd gear - with engine braking
5 - Commands PCM to shift to 5th gear - with engine braking
6 - Commands PCM to shift to 6th gear - with engine braking
Controlling the gear changes will assist the technician in testing the various clutches and bands and whether the
transmission is slipping in any particular gear. Output state control will command the PCM to upshift or
downshift depending on the output state control gear value the technician selects. The transmission will remain
in the output state control gear selected until another output state control gear value is sent or until output state
control is cancelled and/or the vehicle conditions for using output state control are no longer met.
Vehicle requirements when using GEAR_OSC Controlling Gear Changes
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
When sending a GEAR_OSC value, the engine must be running with the selector lever in the DRIVE position,
and the vehicle speed must be greater than 5 km/h (3 mph).
Additional vehicle conditions required for upshifts:
Vehicle speed must be greater then 32 km/h (20 mph) when commanding an upshift to 5th or 6th gear
Additional vehicle conditions required for downshifts:
Vehicle speed must be less then 32 km/h (20 mph) when commanding a downshift to 1st gear
Vehicle speed must be less then 64 km/h (40 mph) when commanding a downshift to 2nd gear
Vehicle speed must be less then 97 km/h (60 mph) when commanding a downshift to 3rd gear
Vehicle speed must be less then 129 km/h (80 mph) when commanding a downshift to 4th gear
Vehicle speed must be less then 161 km/h (100 mph) when commanding a downshift to 5th gear
Drive Test - Pressure Added for Engagements and Upshifts
The output state control values for HRSH_SHFT to command a slight or moderate increase in hydraulic
pressure to test for firmer engagements and upshifts are as follows:
0 or OFF - PCM in normal pressure control for shifts and engagements and output state control is
cancelled
1 or ON - Commands PCM to moderately increase hydraulic pressure during engagements and upshifts
Setting HRSH_SFT to 1 or ON allows the technician to moderately increase the pressure when performing
engagements such as P-R, P-D, N-R, N-D, R-D and when performing automatic upshifts. This can provide
additional diagnostic information to help the technician determine whether the electronic pressure control
system is providing at least limited control (a normal shift would become firmer). Using output state control to
control HRSH_SHFT to 1 or ON should make a softer engagement or shift more normal and an already normal
shift or engagement firmer by slightly increasing the pressure. This test should only be used to provide
additional diagnostic information and should not be the only scan tool or test to determine a faulty electronic or
hydraulic component.
Using Output State Control and Monitoring PIDs
To confirm that the output state control value was sent by the scan tool and the PCM has accepted the output
state control command, a corresponding PID for each output state control parameter must be monitored. After
SENDING the output state control value, the corresponding PID value should be the same as the output state
control value that was sent. Additional PIDs are listed that may be monitored to help the technician accurately
diagnose the transaxle.
The following is a list of output state control parameters and their corresponding PIDs:
Output State Control Parameter
HRSH_SHFT
Corresponding PID
HRSH_SHFT
Additional PIDs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
LINEDSD
TCC_OSC
GEAR_OSC
SSA_AMP
SSB_AMP
SSC_AMP
SSD_AMP
PCA AMP
TCC AMP
SSA/SS1
LINEDSD
TCC_OSC
GEAR_OSC
SSA_AMP
SSB_AMP
SSC_AMP
SSD_AMP
PCA AMP
TCC AMP
SSA/SS1
PCA, PCA AMP, PCA_F
TCCRAT, TCCMCMD, TSLIP
SHFT_TYP, GEAR, TRANRAT
SSPCA, SSPCA_F
SSPCB, SSPCB_F
SSPCC, SSPCC_F
SSPCD, SSPCD_F
PCA_F
TCCPC, TCCPC_F
SSA/SS1_F
DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS IDENTIFICATION (PID) CHART
Special Tools
Illustration
PID Name
TCCPC
TCC AMP
TCCPC_F
GEAR
GEAR_RAT
TRAN_RAT
LINEDSD
PCA
PCA AMP
PCA_F
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
PID Description
Commanded pressure for the Torque Converter Clutch
(TCC) Variable Force Solenoid (VFS)
Commanded current for the TCC VFS
Fault status for the TCC VFS
Commanded transaxle gear
Theoretical transaxle gear ratio
Actual transaxle gear ratio
Commanded line pressure
Commanded pressure for the Line Pressure Control (LPC)
VFS
Commanded current for the LPC VFS
Fault status for the LPC VFS
Units
Pressure
Amperes
Fault/No Fault
P, R, N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
and 6
Ratio
Ratio
Pressure
Pressure
Amperes
Fault/No Fault
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
SSPCA
SSA_AMP
SSPCA_F
SSPCB
SSB_AMP
SSPCB_F
SSPCC
SSC_AMP
SSPCC_F
SSPCD
SSD_AMP
SSPCD_F
SSA/SS1
SSA/SS1_F
TCC_RAT
TCC
TCC_SLIPACT
TSS_SRC
OSS_SRC
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TCS
TFT
Commanded pressure for the Shift Solenoid A
Pressure
(SSA)/CB1234 VFS
Commanded current for the SSA/CB1234 VFS
Amperes
Fault status for the SSA/CB1234 VFS
Fault/No Fault
Commanded pressure for the Shift Solenoid B (SSB)/C35R Pressure
VFS
Commanded current for the SSB/C35R VFS
Amperes
Fault status for the SSB/C35R VFS
Fault/No Fault
Commanded pressure for the Shift Solenoid C (SSC)/CB26 Pressure
VFS
Commanded current for the SSC/CB26 VFS
Amperes
Fault status for the SSC/CB26 VFS
Fault/No Fault
Commanded pressure for the Shift Solenoid D (SSD)/CBLR, Pressure
C456 VFS
Commanded current for the SSD/CBLR, C456 VFS
Amperes
Fault status for the SSD/CBLR, C456 VFS
Fault/No Fault
Commanded state for Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
ON/OFF
Fault status for SSE
Fault/No Fault
Actual speed ratio of torque converter (1.0 = fully engaged) Ratio
Commanded torque converter slip (0 = engaged desired)
Ratio
Actual difference between engine speed and turbine speed, RPM
measured in RPM.
Actual speed of the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
RPM
(RPM)
Actual speed of the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor (RPM) RPM
Transmission Range (TR) - Switch 1 actual position
Open/Closed
TR - Switch 2 actual position
Open/Closed
TR - Switch 3 actual position
Open/Closed
TR - Switch 4 actual position
Open/Closed
Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Position
Depressed/Not
Depressed
Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT)
Degrees
TRANSAXLE DRIVE CYCLE TEST
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Always drive the vehicle in a safe manner according to driving conditions and
obey all traffic laws.
After carrying out the Self Test, use the following Transaxle Drive Cycle Test for checking continuous codes.
NOTE:
The Transaxle Drive Cycle Test must be followed exactly. Malfunctions must
occur 4 times consecutively for shift error DTC to be set and 5 times
consecutively for continuous Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) code to set.
NOTE:
When carrying out the Transaxle Drive Cycle Test, see the solenoid operation
chart for correct solenoid operation. Refer to Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped
Vehicle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Record and then erase Self Test codes.
Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
Make sure transmission fluid level is correct.
With transaxle in DRIVE, moderately accelerate from stop to 80 km/h (50 mph). This allows the
transaxle to shift into 6th gear. Hold speed and throttle opening steady for minimum of 15 seconds.
With transaxle in 6th gear and maintaining steady speed and throttle opening, lightly apply and release
brake (to operate stoplamps). Then hold speed and throttle steady for additional 5 seconds minimum.
Brake to a stop and remain stopped for minimum of 20 seconds.
Repeat Steps 4 through 6 at least 5 times.
Carry out Self Test and record continuous codes.
If DTCs are present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts. Service all non-transaxle
DTCs first as they can directly affect the operation of the transaxle. Repeat the Self Test and Road
Test to verify the correction. Erase DTCs, carry out drive cycle, and repeat the Self Test after
completing service on the DTCs.
If the continuous test passes (system pass) and a concern is still present, refer to Diagnosis By
Symptom in this article check TSBs for diagnostic concern.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
After On-Board Diagnostic (OBD)
NOTE:
The vehicle wiring harness, PCM and non-transaxle sensors may affect
transaxle operations. Service these concerns first.
After the OBD procedures are completed, service all DTCs.
Begin with non-transaxle related DTCs, then service any transaxle related DTCs. Refer to the Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Charts for information on Condition and Symptoms. This chart will be helpful in
referring to the correct articles(s) and to aid in diagnosing internal transaxle concerns and external non-transaxle
inputs. The pinpoint tests are used in diagnosing electrical concerns of the transaxle. Make sure that the vehicle
wiring harness and the PCM are diagnosed as well. Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article for
diagnosing non-transaxle electronic components. The diagnostic routine hydraulic/mechanical charts will help
in diagnosing internal transaxle concerns and external non-transaxle inputs.
Before Pinpoint Tests
NOTE:
Prior to entering pinpoint tests, check the PCM wiring harness for correct
connections, bent or broken pins, corrosion, loose wires, correct routing,
correct seals and their condition. Check the PCM, sensors and actuators for
damage. Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
NOTE:
If a concern still exists after electrical diagnosis has been carried out, refer to
Diagnosis By Symptom.
If DTCs appear while carrying out the OBDs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts for the
appropriate repair procedure. Prior to entering pinpoint tests, refer to any TSBs for transaxle concerns.
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
DTC CHART
DTC Grouping Component
Description
Condition
P0657
Transaxle Transaxle
Transaxle solenoid
Solenoid Power solenoid power power control provides
Control
control
power to all the
electrical
solenoids. This DTC
circuit failure. sets if the transaxle
solenoid power control
circuit is open.
Symptom
P0705 P0705,
P1702
Transmission TR sensor
PCM is received an
Range (TR) circuit failure. invalid combination of
the 4-bit signal from the
TR sensor.
P0706 P0706,
P0709
TR Sensor
TR sensor
range failure.
TR sensor A circuit
range/performance. TR
sensor stuck in
transition zone
(possible wiring,
connector or TR sensor
issue).
No voltage to
solenoids.
Defaults to 5th
gear.
Only REVERSE
and NEUTRAL
available.
Will turn on
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
(MIL).
Go to Pin
Possible no crank. Go to Pin
Only PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear available.
Harsh
engagements.
Extremely delayed
engagements (until
a DTC is set).
After a DTC is set
and the high side
opened.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor
performance
(due to a 5th
gear drive
away).
No shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Possible no crank. Go to Pin
Only PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear available.
Harsh
engagements.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0708 P0708,
P1702
TR Sensor
TR sensor
PCM is received all 4
circuit failure. TR sensor bits open
(potential sensor
disconnected, wiring,
connector or TR sensor
issue).
P0709
P0709
or
P0706,
P0709
TR Sensor
TR sensor
range failure.
TR sensor A circuit
range/performance. TR
sensor stuck in
transition zone
(possible wiring,
connector or TR sensor
Extremely delayed
engagements (until
a DTC is set).
After a DTC is set
and the high side
opened.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor
performance
(due to a 5th
gear drive
away).
No shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Possible no crank. Go to Pin
Only PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear available.
Harsh
engagements.
Extremely delayed
engagements (until
a DTC is set).
After a DTC is set
and the high side
opened.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor
performance
(due to a 5th
gear drive
away).
No shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Possible no crank. Go to Pin
Only PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear available.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
issue).
P0710
-
Transmission
Fluid
Temperature
(TFT)
TFT sensor
circuit voltage
input too low
or too high.
P0710 P0710,
P0712
TFT
TFT sensor input
indicates a short
to ground or an
open circuit
(could be a
wiring, connector
or sensor issue).
Also see P0712
and P0713.
TFT sensor
TFT sensor input
circuit voltage indicates a short to
input too low. ground or an open
circuit (could be a
wiring, connector or
sensor issue).
P0710 P0710,
P0713
TFT
TFT sensor
TFT sensor input
circuit voltage indicates a short to
too high.
ground or an open
circuit (could be a
wiring, connector or
sensor issue).
P0711
-
TFT
No change in
PCM has detected no
Harsh
engagements.
Extremely delayed
engagements (until
a DTC is set).
After a DTC is set
and the high side
opened.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor
performance
(due to a 5th
gear drive
away).
No shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Torque Converter Go to Pin
Clutch (TCC) and
stabilized shift
schedule may be
enabled sooner
after cold start.
Harsh or soft shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
TCC and stabilized Go to Pin
shift schedule may
be enabled sooner
after cold start.
Harsh or soft shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
TCC and stabilized Go to Pin
shift schedule may
be enabled sooner
after cold start.
Harsh or soft shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
TCC and stabilized Go to Pin
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
TFT sensor
input.
TFT change at lowrange or high-range
during operation.
P0712 P0710,
P0712
TFT
TFT sensor
TFT sensor input
circuit voltage indicates a short to
input too low. ground or an open
circuit (could be a
wiring, connector or
sensor issue).
P0713 P0710,
P0713
TFT
TFT sensor
TFT sensor input
circuit voltage indicates a short to
too high.
ground or an open
circuit (could be a
wiring, connector or
sensor issue).
P0715 P0715,
P0717
Turbine Shaft Insufficient
Speed (TSS) input from TSS
Sensor
sensor.
PCM has
detected TSS
sensor signal
failed to 0 speed
when vehicle
conditions
(mainly output
speed) indicate
TSS sensor
output should be
present.
Electrical failures
(open, short) of
the TSS sensor
wiring, connector
or a failure of the
sensor itself will
cause this failure.
shift schedule may
be enabled sooner
after a cold start.
Harsh or soft shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
TCC and stabilized Go to Pin
shift schedule may
be enabled sooner
after cold start.
Harsh or soft shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
TCC and stabilized Go to Pin
shift schedule may
be enabled sooner
after cold start.
Harsh or soft shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens transaxle
solenoid power
control (removes
power from all
solenoids).
Provides
PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL
and 5th gear
with
maximum
line pressure
and open
TCC
available
(controlled
by the
manual
lever).
Harsh engagements
(due to maximum
line pressure).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0717
P0717
or
P0715,
P0717
TSS
Insufficient
input from TSS
sensor.
P0718
-
P0720 P0720,
P0722
TSS
TSS signal
intermittent.
Output Shaft Insufficient
Speed (OSS) input from
Sensor
OSS sensor.
PCM has
detected TSS
sensor signal
failed to 0 speed
when vehicle
conditions
(mainly output
speed) indicate
TSS sensor
output should be
present.
Electrical failures
(open, short) of
the TSS sensor
wiring, connector
or a failure of the
TSS sensor itself
will cause this
failure.
PCM has detected an
erratic or no TSS
signal.
PCM has
detected OSS
sensor signal
failed to 0 speed
when vehicle
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
Will turn on MIL.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens transaxle
solenoid power
control (removes
power from all
solenoids).
Provides
PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL
and 5th gear
with
maximum
line pressure
and open
TCC
available
(controlled
by the
manual
lever).
Harsh engagements
(due to maximum
line pressure).
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Will turn on wrench
Go to Pin
lamp.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens transaxle
solenoid power
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0721
-
OSS
OSS sensor
signal noisy.
P0722
P0722
or
P0720,
P0722
OSS
Insufficient
input from
OSS sensor.
conditions
(mainly turbine
speed) indicate
OSS sensor
output should be
present.
Electrical failures
(open, short) of
the OSS sensor
wiring, connector
or a failure of the
OSS sensor itself
will cause this
failure.
PCM has detected an
erratic or no OSS
sensor signal.
PCM has
detected OSS
sensor signal
failed to 0 speed
when vehicle
conditions
(mainly turbine
speed) indicate
OSS output
should be
present.
Electrical failures
(open, short) of
the OSS sensor
wiring, connector
or a failure of the
sensor itself will
control (removes
power from all
solenoids).
provides
PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL
and 5th gear
with
maximum
line pressure
and open
TCC
available
(controlled
by the
manual
lever).
Harsh engagements
(due to maximum
line pressure).
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th drive away).
Will turn on MIL.
Will turn on wrench
Go to Pin
lamp.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens transaxle
solenoid power
control (removes
power from all
solenoids).
Provides
PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL
and 5th gear
with
maximum
line pressure
and open
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
cause this failure.
P0729 P0729,
Overdrive SSD stuck off
P0734, Clutch System (SSD or main
P0735 Faults (includes control valve
or
non-electrical body).
P0729, Shift Solenoid
P0734, D (SSD) faults,
P0735,
main control
P0766 valve body and
clutch)
Sixth gear ratio error.
SSD stuck off, both
low/reverse clutch and
overdrive clutch failed
off. This code sets for:
P072C
-
Low/Reverse Low/reverse
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch Variable
Force Solenoid
(VFS) nonelectrical fault.
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch regulator
valve stuck in
default position.
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch boost
valve stuck in
default position.
Low/reverse
TCC
available
(controlled
by the
manual
lever).
Harsh engagements
(due to maximum
line pressure).
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice flares or
neutral conditions
on shifts into 4th,
5th or 6th gears.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting, flares,
neutral conditions
while the code is
being set.
First gear with
engine braking.
Fourth, 5th and 6th
gears are disabled.
Also might get
delayed or no
reverse engagement
(need low/reverse
clutch on to
achieve reverse).
Customer might
notice high engine
speeds (since 3rd
gear is the highest
available gear).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Customer might notice: Refer to D
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Clutch and clutch or OWC
One-Way failed on.
Clutch (OWC)
Faults (covers
just the
clutches)
clutch or OWC
failed on
(transmits torque
both directions).
1st gear is the
only available
gear with this
failure.
P072E P072E,
P073A
or
P072E,
P073A,
P0757
Direct Clutch Shift Solenoid The codes:
System Faults B (SSB) failed
on.
P072E Stuck in
3rd gear.
P073A Stuck in
5th gear.
These codes set
together mean SSB is
failed on, causing the
direct clutch to be stuck
on, 3rd and 5th gear are
the only available gears.
Since the hydraulic
controls prevent direct
clutch and low/reverse
clutch on together in the
forward ranges, the
solenoid can be isolated
from the clutch.
These codes set if:
Non-electrical
failures where
SSB (direct
clutch VFS) is
stuck on
(pressure).
Direct clutch
regulator valve
stuck in spring
compress
position.
Decelerations on
attempted upshifts
(since tie-ups
occur).
Stuck in 1st gear.
High engine RPM.
Low maximum
vehicle speed.
No TCC apply.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
shift into 2nd, 4th
or 6th gears (direct
clutch failing to
release will cause a
tie-up in these
gears).
Customer might
notice a harsh 1-3
shift.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting while the
test is confirming
direct clutch is
failed on.
After a code is
stored, all gears but
3rd and 5th gear
are disabled.
Since only 3rd and
5th gears are
allowed, the
customer might
notice poor launch
performance, lack
of shifts and harsh
engagements.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P072F P072F,
Overdrive Overdrive
The codes:
P073A, Clutch System clutch failed on
P073B Faults (includes (clutch, SSD or
P072F stuck in
or
non-electrical main control
4th gear.
P072F,
SSD faults, valve body).
P073A stuck in
P073A, main control
5th gear.
P073B, valve body and
P073B stuck in
P0767
clutch)
6th gear.
Set together to indicate
the overdrive clutch is
failed on.
Overdrive clutch failed
on, could be due to:
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch VFS
(SSD) nonelectrical failed
stuck on
(pressure).
Overdrive clutch
stuck on due to
mechanical
failure.
Low/reverse
clutch, overdrive
clutch regulator
valve stuck in the
spring
compressed
position.
The codes:
P0733 P0733,
P0735
or
P0733,
P0735,
P0756
Direct Clutch Direct clutch
System Faults failed off.
(includes nonelectrical SSB
faults, valve
body and
clutch)
P0733 - 3rd gear
ratio error.
P0735 - 5th gear
ratio error.
Set together if direct
clutch is detected failed
off.
Direct clutch failed off,
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
shift into 2nd or
3rd gear (overdrive
clutch failing to
release will cause a
tie-up in 2nd or 3rd
gears).
Customer might
notice harsh
engagements,
erratic shifting.
First gear with
engine braking, 1st
gear without engine
braking, 2nd and
3rd gears are
disabled.
Poor launch due to
4th gear drive
away.
Harsh
engagements.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice flares or
neutral conditions
on shifts into 3rd or
5th gears.
PCM will
command 3 shifts
into 3rd or 5th gear
and if the direct
clutch is failed off
the customer will
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
could be due to:
Non-electrical
failures where
SSB (direct
clutch VFS) is
stuck off (no
pressure).
Direct clutch
regulator valve
stuck in default
position.
Direct clutch
mechanical
failure.
P0734 P0729,
Overdrive SSD stuck off The codes:
P0734, Clutch System (SSD or valve
P0735 Faults (includes body).
P0734 - 4th gear
or
non-electrical
ratio error.
P0729,
SSD faults,
P0735 - 5th gear
P0734, valve body and
ratio error.
P0735,
clutch)
P0729 - 6th gear
P0766
ratio error.
Set together mean SSD
is stuck off (see P0766
for details).
notice flares or
neutral conditions
that last one second
or so.
Third and 5th gear
are disabled,
customer might
notice transmission
hangs in 2nd gear
on acceleration
until customer tips
out to closed pedal
(done to protect
overdrive clutch).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice flares or
neutral conditions
on shifts into 4th,
5th or 6th gears.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting, flares,
neutral conditions
while the code is
being set.
First gear with
engine braking,
4th, 5th and 6th
gears are disabled.
Customer might
notice high engine
speeds (since 3rd
gear is highest
available gear).
Also might get
delayed or no
REVERSE
engagement (need
low/reverse clutch
on to achieve
reverse).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0735 P0729,
Overdrive SSD stuck off
P0734, Clutch System (SSD or valve
P0735 Faults (includes body).
or
non-electrical
P0729,
SSD faults,
P0734, valve body and
P0735,
clutch)
P0766
SSD stuck off, both
low/reverse clutch and
overdrive clutch failed
off. This code sets for:
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch VFS nonelectrical fault.
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch regulator
valve stuck in
default position.
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch boost
valve stuck in
default position.
Set together mean SSD
is stuck off (see P0766
for details).
P0735 P0733,
P0735
or
P0733,
P0735,
P0756
Direct Clutch Direct clutch
System Fault failed off.
(includes nonelectrical SSB
faults, valve
body and
clutch)
The codes:
P0733 - 3rd gear
ratio error.
P0735 - 5th gear
ratio error.
Set together if direct
clutch is detected failed
off.
Direct clutch failed off,
could be due to:
Non-electrical
failures where
SSB (direct
Refer to D
Customer may
notice flares or
neutral conditions
on shifts into 4th,
5th or 6th gears.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting, flares,
neutral conditions
while the code is
being set.
1st gear with
engine braking,
4th, 5th and 6th
gears are disabled.
Customer might
notice high engine
speeds (since 3rd
gear is highest
available gear).
Also might get
delayed or no
reverse engagement
(need low/reverse
clutch on to
achieve reverse).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice flares or
neutral conditions
on shifts into 3rd or
5th gears.
PCM will
command 3 shifts
into 3rd or 5th gear
and if the direct
clutch is failed off
the customer will
notice flares or
neutral conditions
that last
approximately one
second.
Third and 5th gears
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
clutch VFS) is
stuck off (no
pressure).
Direct clutch
regulator valve
stuck in default
position.
Direct clutch
mechanical
failure.
P073A P072F,
Overdrive Overdrive
Overdrive clutch failed
P073A, Clutch System clutch failed on on, could be due to:
P073B Faults (includes (clutch, SSD or
or
non-electrical main control
P072F - stuck in
P072F,
SSD faults, valve body).
4th gear.
P073A, main control
P073A - stuck in
P073B, valve body and
5th gear.
P0767
clutch)
P073B - stuck in
6th gear.
Set together to indicate
the overdrive clutch is
failed on.
Overdrive clutch failed
on, could be due to:
Low/reverse
clutch, overdrive
clutch, VFS
(SSD) nonelectrical failed
stuck on
(pressure).
Overdrive clutch
stuck on due to
mechanical
failure.
Low/reverse
clutch, overdrive
clutch regulator
valve stuck in the
spring
compressed
are disabled.
Customer might
notice transmission
hangs in 2nd gear
on acceleration
until customer tips
out to closed pedal
(done to protect the
overdrive clutch).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
shift into 2nd or
3rd gear (overdrive
clutch failing to
release will cause a
tie-up in 2nd or 3rd
gear).
Customer might
notice harsh
engagements,
erratic shifting).
1st gear with
engine braking, 1st
gear without engine
braking, 2nd and
3rd gears are
disabled.
Poor launch due to
4th gear drive
away.
Harsh
engagements.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P073A P072E,
P073A
or
P072E,
P073A,
P0757
position.
Direct Clutch SSB failed on. The codes:
System Faults
P072E - stuck in
3rd gear.
P073A - stuck in
5th gear.
These codes set
together mean SSB is
failed on, causing the
direct clutch to be stuck
on, 3rd and 5th gear are
the only available gears.
Since the hydraulic
controls prevent direct
clutch and low/reverse
clutch on together in the
forward ranges, the
solenoid can be isolated
from the clutch.
These codes set if:
non-electrical
failures where
SSB (direct
clutch VFS) is
stuck on
(pressure).
Direct clutch
regulator valve
stuck in spring
compress
position.
Overdrive Overdrive
Overdrive clutch failed
Clutch System clutch failed on on, could be due to:
Faults (includes (clutch, SSD or
non-electrical valve body).
P072F - stuck in
SSD faults,
4th gear.
valve body and
P073A - stuck in
clutch)
5th gear.
P073B - stuck in
6th gear.
P073B P072F,
P073A,
P073B
or
P072F,
P073A,
P073B,
P0767
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
shift into 2nd, 4th
or 6th gears (direct
clutch failing to
release will cause a
tie-up in these
gears).
Customer might
notice a harsh 1-3
shift.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting while the
test is confirming
direct clutch is
failed on.
After a code is
stored, all gears but
3rd and 5th are
disabled.
Since only 3rd and
5th gears are
allowed, the
customer might
notice poor launch
performance, lack
of shifts and harsh
engagements.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
shift into 2nd or
3rd gears
(overdrive clutch
failing to release
will cause a tie-up
in 2nd or 3rd
gears).
Customer might
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Set together to indicate
overdrive clutch is
failed on.
Overdrive clutch failed
on, could be due to:
Low/reverse
clutch, overdrive
clutch, VFS
(SSD) nonelectrical failed
stuck on
(pressure).
Overdrive clutch
stuck on due to
mechanical
failure.
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch regulator
valve stuck in the
spring
compressed
position.
TCC Solenoid TCC circuit is Open circuit in solenoid
Electrical open.
or wiring.
Faults
P0740 P0740,
P0743
P0741 P0741, TCC System TCC failed off. TCC is mechanically
P1744 Faults (includes
stuck off.
TCC, main
control valve
body and nonelectrical
solenoid faults)
notice harsh
engagements,
erratic shifting.
1st gear with
engine braking, 1st
gear without engine
braking, 2nd and
3rd gears are
disabled.
Poor launch due to
4th gear drive
away.
Harsh
engagements.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Go to Pin
TCC failed off vehicle might run
hotter, lose fuel
economy.
Will turn on MIL.
P0741 and P1744 mean Refer to D
the same thing: a nonelectrical failure that
caused the TCC to fail to
apply. This code sets for:
Non-electrical TCC
solenoid stuck off.
TCC mechanical
failure.
TCC regulator
apply valve stuck
in TCC release
position.
TCC control valve
stuck in TCC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
release position.
P0742 P0742,
P0743
TCC Solenoid TCC circuit is Short to ground in the
Electrical shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
Faults
ground.
P0743
-
P0743 P0740,
P0743
TCC Solenoid TCC is open,
Electrical shorted to
Faults
ground or
shorted to
voltage.
TCC Solenoid TCC circuit is
Electrical open.
Faults
Open, short to ground
or short to power in
solenoid or wiring.
Open circuit in solenoid
or wiring.
TCC functional
failure MIL code.
TCC failed to apply
(less than 80 RPM
slip error lasting at
least 3 seconds
when TCC is
commanded on) 3
consecutive times.
Will turn on MIL.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control, removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear as the only
forward gear with
TCC open).
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
See P0740, P0742 Go to Pin
or P0744.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
TCC failed off vehicle might run
hotter, lose fuel
economy.
Will turn on
Go to Pin
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
wrench lamp.
P0743 P0742,
P0743
TCC Solenoid TCC circuit is Short to ground in the
Electrical shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
Faults
ground.
P0743 P0743,
P0744
TCC Solenoid TCC is shorted Short to power in the
Electrical to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
Faults
P0744 P0743,
P0744
TCC Solenoid TCC is shorted Short to power in the
Electrical to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
Faults
P0748
Line Pressure
Control (LPC)
Solenoid
Electrical
Faults
LPC Solenoid
Electrical
Faults
-
P0748 P0748,
P0960
LPC is open
circuit, shorted
to ground or
shorted to
voltage.
LPC circuit is
open.
Open, short to ground
or short to power in
solenoid or wiring.
Open circuit in solenoid
or wiring.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control, removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear as the only
forward gear with
TCC open).
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Go to Pin
TCC failed off vehicle might run
hotter, lose fuel
economy.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Go to Pin
TCC failed off vehicle might run
hotter, lose fuel
economy.
Will turn on MIL.
See P0960, P0962 Go to Pin
and P0963.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Failed to maximum Go to Pin
line pressure harsh engagements.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0748 P0748,
P0962
LPC Solenoid LPC circuit is Short to ground in the
Electrical shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
Faults
ground.
P0748 P0748,
P0963
LPC Solenoid LPC is shorted Short to power in the
Electrical to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
Faults
P0750 P0750,
P0753
Shift Solenoid SSA circuit is Open circuit in solenoid
A (SSA)
open.
or wiring.
Electrical
Faults
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Failed to minimum Go to Pin
line pressure.
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control, removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
as the only forward
gear with TCC
open).
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Failed to maximum Go to Pin
line pressure harsh engagements.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Forward clutch is Go to Pin
failed off - 5th and
6th gears only
available forward
gears.
Neutral condition
or flare when fault
occurs.
Poor launch due to
5th gear drive
away.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0751 P0751, Forward Clutch Forward clutch Forward clutch failed
P2700 System Faults failed off.
off, could be due to:
(includes nonelectrical SSA
Forward clutch
faults, valve
VFS (SSA) nonbody and
electrical failed
clutch)
stuck off (no
pressure).
Forward clutch
stuck off due to
mechanical
failure.
Forward clutch
regulator valve
stuck in the
default position.
Forward clutch
boost valve stuck
in the default
position.
P0752 P0752, Forward Clutch Forward clutch Forward clutch failed
P2700 System Faults failed on.
on, could be due to:
(includes nonelectrical SSA
Forward clutch
faults, valve
VFS (SSA) nonbody and
electrical failed
clutch)
stuck on
(pressure).
Forward clutch
stuck on due to
mechanical
failure.
Forward clutch
regulator valve
stuck in the
default position.
Will turn on MIL.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice neutral
conditions or flares
on downshifts from
5th or 6th gears as
the test is
determining
forward is failed
off.
Once a code is
stored, all gears
with forward on are
disabled - leaving
5th and 6th gears as
the only forward
gears.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting, harsh
engagements,
neutral conditions,
flares, poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away), harsh
reverse
engagements.
Will turn on MIL.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
shift into 5th or 6th
(forward clutch
failing to release
will cause a tie-up
in 5th or 6th).
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting or being
stuck in 4th gear
while the test is
confirming forward
clutch is failed on.
After a code is
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Forward clutch
regulator valve
stuck in the
spring
compressed
position.
P0753
-
P0753 P0750,
P0753
SSA Electrical SSA is open,
Faults
shorted to
ground or
shorted to
voltage.
SSA Electrical SSA circuit is
Faults
open.
Open, short to ground
or short to power in
solenoid or wiring.
Open circuit in solenoid
or wiring.
P0753 P0750,
P0973
SSA Electrical SSA circuit is Short to ground in the
Faults
shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
ground.
stored 5th and 6th
are disabled.
Customer might
notice higher than
normal engine
speeds and loss of
fuel economy.
Will turn on MIL.
See P0750, P0973, Go to Pin
P0974.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Forward clutch is Go to Pin
failed off - 5th and
6th only available
forward gears.
Neutral condition
or flare when fault
occurs.
Poor launch due to
5th gear drive
away.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control, removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear as the only
forward gear with
TCC open).
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0753 P0750,
P0974
SSA Electrical SSA is shorted Short to power in the
Faults
to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
P0755 P0755,
P0758
SSB Electrical Open circuit in SSB circuit is open.
Faults
solenoid or
wiring.
P0756 P0733,
P0735,
P0756
Direct Clutch Direct clutch
System Fault failed off.
(includes nonelectrical SSB
faults, valve
body and
clutch)
Direct clutch failed off,
could be due to:
Non-electrical
failures where
SSB (direct
clutch VFS) is
stuck off (no
pressure).
Direct clutch
regulator valve
stuck in default
position.
Direct clutch
mechanical
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Forward clutch is Go to Pin
failed off - 5th and
6th gear only
available forward
gears.
Neutral condition
or flare when fault
occurs.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Direct clutch failed Go to Pin
on - only 3rd and
5th gear available.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
Will turn on MIL.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice flares or
neutral conditions
on shifts into 3rd or
5th gear.
PCM will
command 3 shifts
into 3rd or 5th gear,
and if direct clutch
is failed off the
customer will
notice flares or
neutral conditions
that last one second
or so.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
failure.
P0757 P072E,
P073A,
P0757
Direct Clutch SSB failed on.
System Fault
(includes nonelectrical SSB
faults, main
control valve
body and
clutch)
SSB (direct clutch
VFS) failed on, causing
direct clutch failed on.
Since the hydraulic
controls prevent direct
clutch and low/reverse
clutch on together in the
forward ranges we can
isolate the solenoid
from the clutch.
This code sets if:
Non-electrical
failures where
SSB (direct
clutch VFS) is
stuck on
(pressure).
Direct clutch
regulator valve
stuck in spring
compress
position.
Open, short to ground
or short to power in
solenoid or wiring.
P0758
-
P0758 P0755,
P0758
SSB Electrical SSB is open,
Faults
shorted to
ground or
shorted to
voltage.
SSB Electrical Open circuit in SSB circuit is open.
Faults
solenoid or
wiring.
3rd and 5th gear
are disabled,
customer might
notice transmission
hangs in 2nd on
accelerate until
customer tips out to
closed pedal (done
to protect overdrive
clutch).
Will turn on MIL.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
shift into 2nd, 4th
or 6th gears (direct
clutch failing to
release will cause a
tie-up in these
gears).
Customer might
notice a harsh 1-3
shift.
Since only 3rd and
5th gears are
allowed customer
might notice poor
launch performance
lack of shifts, harsh
engagements.
Will turn on MIL.
See P0755, P0976, Go to Pin
P0977.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Direct clutch failed Go to Pin
on - only 3rd and
5th gears available.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0758 P0758,
P0976
P0758 P0758,
P0977
P0760 P0760,
P0763
SSB Electrical SSB circuit is Short to ground in the
Faults
shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
ground.
performance (due
to 3rd gear drive
away).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control, removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear as the only
forward gear with
TCC open).
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
SSB Electrical SSB is shorted Short to power in the
Go to Pin
Direct clutch failed
Faults
to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
on - only 3rd and
5th gear available.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 3rd gear drive
away).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Shift Solenoid SSC circuit is Open circuit in solenoid Incorrect gear selection Go to Pin
C (SSC)
open.
or wiring.
depending on condition
Electrical
mode and manual lever
Faults
position. See solenoid
operation chart.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:23 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0761 P0761,
P2702
Intermediate Intermediate
Clutch System clutch failed
Faults (includes off.
clutch, valve
body and nonelectrical SSC
faults)
Intermediate clutch
failed off, could be due
to:
Intermediate
clutch VFS SSC
non-electrical
failed stuck off
(no pressure).
Intermediate
clutch stuck off
due to
mechanical
failure.
Intermediate
clutch regulator
valve stuck in the
default position.
P0762 P0762,
P2702
Intermediate Intermediate
Clutch System clutch failed
Faults (includes on.
Intermediate clutch
failed on, could be due
to:
Intermediate clutch
is failed off - if
fault occurs while
in 2nd or 6th gear
customer might
notice a neutral
condition before
diagnostics disables
2nd and 6th gear.
Customer might
notice erratic,
delayed or harsh
shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice neutral
conditions or flares
on shifts to 2nd or
6th gear as the test
is determining
intermediate clutch
is failed off.
Once a code is
stored, all gears
with intermediate
clutch on are
disabled (2nd and
6th gear) leaving
1st gear without
engine braking, 1st
gear with engine
braking, 3rd, 4th
and 5th gears.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting, neutral
conditions, flares,
higher engine
speeds on highway
(due to 6th gear
being disabled).
Will turn on MIL.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
clutch, valve
body and nonelectrical SSC
faults)
Intermediate
clutch VFS SSC
non-electrical
failed stuck on
(pressure).
Intermediate
clutch stuck on
due to
mechanical
failure.
Intermediate
clutch regulator
valve stuck in the
spring
compressed
position.
P0763
-
P0763 P0760,
P0763
SSC Electrical SSC is open,
Faults
shorted to
ground or
shorted to
voltage.
SSC Electrical SSC circuit is
Faults
open.
Open, short to ground
or short to power in
solenoid or wiring.
Open circuit in solenoid
or wiring.
deceleration on a
shift into 3rd or 5th
gears (intermediate
clutch failing to
release will cause a
tie-up in 3rd or 5th
gears).
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting or being
stuck in 6th gear
while the test is
confirming C26 is
failed on.
After a code is
stored 1st gear with
engine braking, 1st
gear without engine
braking, 3rd, 4th
and 5th gears are
disabled.
Customer might
notice hanging in
2nd on acceleration
since 2nd-6th
upshifts only occur
at closed pedal (due
to energy
limitations of
overdrive clutch),
harsh reverse
engagements (since
low/reverse clutch
is not on in 2nd
gear).
Will turn on MIL.
See P0760, P0979, Go to Pin
P0980.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Intermediate clutch Go to Pin
is failed off - if
fault occurs while
in 2nd or 6th gears,
customer might
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0763 P0760,
P0797
SSC Electrical SSC circuit is Short to ground in the
Faults
shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
ground.
P0763 P0760,
P0980
SSC Electrical SSC is shorted Short to power in the
Faults
to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
notice a neutral
condition before
diagnostics disables
2nd and 6th gears.
Customer might
notice erratic,
delayed or harsh
shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control, removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear as the only
forward gear with
TCC open).
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Intermediate clutch Go to Pin
is failed off - if
fault occurs while
in 2nd or 6th gear,
customer might
notice a neutral
condition before
diagnostics disables
2nd and 6th gear.
Customer might
notice erratic,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0765 P0765,
P0768
SSD Electrical SSD circuit is Open circuit in solenoid
Faults
open.
or wiring.
P0766 P0729,
Overdrive SSD stuck off
P0734, Clutch System (SSD or main
P0735, Faults (includes control valve
P0766 non-electrical body).
SSD faults,
main control
valve body and
clutch)
SSD stuck off, both
low/reverse clutch and
overdrive clutch failed
off. This code sets for:
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch VFS nonelectrical fault.
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch regulator
valve stuck in
default position.
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch boost
valve stuck in
default position.
P0767 P072F,
Overdrive Overdrive
Overdrive clutch failed
P073A, Clutch System clutch failed on on, could be due to:
P073B, Faults (includes (clutch, SSD or
delayed or harsh
shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Overdrive clutch Go to Pin
failed on, only 4th,
5th and 6th gears
available.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch due to
4th gear drive
away.
Will turn on MIL.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice flares or
neutral conditions
on shifts into 4th,
5th or 6th gears.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting, flares,
neutral conditions
while the code is
being set.
1st gear with
engine braking,
4th, 5th and 6th
gears are disabled customer might
notice high engine
speeds (since 3rd is
highest available
gear).
Also might get
delayed or no
reverse engagement
(need low/reverse
clutch on to
achieve reverse).
Will turn on MIL.
Go to Pin
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0767
non-electrical valve body).
SSD faults,
valve body and
clutch)
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch, VFS SSD
non-electrical
failed stuck on
(pressure).
Overdrive clutch
stuck on due to
mechanical
failure.
Low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch regulator
valve stuck in the
spring
compressed
position.
P0768
-
P0768 P0765,
P0768
SSD Electrical SSD is open,
Faults
shorted to
ground or
shorted to
voltage.
SSD Electrical SSD circuit is
Faults
open.
Open, short to ground
or short to power in
solenoid or wiring.
Open circuit in solenoid
or wiring.
P0768 P0765,
P0982
SSD Electrical SSD circuit is Short to ground in the
Faults
shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
ground.
shift into 2nd or
3rd gears
(overdrive clutch
failing to release
will cause a tie-up
in 2nd or 3rd
gears).
First gear with
engine braking, 1st
gear without engine
braking, 2nd and
3rd gears are
disabled.
Poor launch due to
4th gear drive
away.
Harsh
engagements.
Will turn on MIL.
See P0765, P0982, Go to Pin
P0983.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Overdrive clutch Go to Pin
failed on, only 4th,
5th and 6th gear
available.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch due to
4th gear drive
away.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control, removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0768 P0765,
P0983
SSD Electrical SSD is shorted Short to power in the
Faults
to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
P0770 P0770,
P0773
Shift Solenoid SSE circuit
E (SSE)
failure.
Electrical
Faults
Open, short to ground
or short to power in
solenoid or wiring.
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear as the only
forward gear with
TCC open).
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Overdrive clutch Go to Pin
failed on, only 4th,
5th and 6th gears
available.
Harsh
engagements, poor
launch due to 4th
gear drive away.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
SSE controls routing SSD Go to Pin
pressure to low/reverse
clutch or overdrive
clutch.
For SSE failed off (no
pressure):
Customer might
notice 4th gear
drive away (when
1st gear is
commanded).
After it is
determined on/off
is failed to no
pressure then 1st
gear with engine
braking is disabled.
Customer may
notice nothing or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
may notice 2nd
gear provided when
1st gear selected in
low manual lever
range.
Harsh reverse
engagements since
low/reverse clutch
does not apply in
neutral or drive in
this failure mode.
For SSE failed on
(pressure):
P0771 P0771,
P0774
SSE Non- SSE stuck off.
Electrical
Faults (SSE
and main
control valve
body)
The on/off
solenoid (SSE)
controls the
multiplexing of
SSD (low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch VFS). If
this solenoid fails
off (no pressure),
then 1st gear with
engine braking is
failed to 4th gear.
Also, if clutch
select valve 2
sticks in the
default position,
then 1st gear with
engine braking is
failed to 4th gear
High side is turned
off.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
Harsh
engagements.
No TCC apply.
Will turn on MIL.
Refer to D
If the on/off
solenoid (SSE) is
failed off or valve 2
is stuck in default
position, then the
customer will get
4th gear when 1st
gear with engine
braking is selected.
Customer might
notice 4th gear
drive way in
automatic range
since the control
system commands
1st gear with
engine braking at a
stop (turns
low/reverse clutch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0772 P0772,
P0774
SSE NonElectrical
Faults (SSE
and valve
body)
SSE stuck on.
and reverse is
failed to neutral.
It is not necessary
to distinguish
SSE stuck off
from valve 2
stuck default.
This code means
either:
Nonelectrical
SSE
(on/off
solenoid)
failed off
(no
pressure).
Valve 2
stuck in
default
position.
The on/off
solenoid (SSE)
controls the
multiplexing of
SSD (low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch VFS). If
this solenoid fails
on (pressure) then
1st gear without
engine braking,
1st gear with
engine braking
and 2nd gear are
the only available
gears. Third gear
is failed to 1st
gear without
engine braking,
4th gear is failed
to 1st gear with
engine braking,
5th gear is failed
to neutral and 6th
gear is a tie-up.
on) in case the
customer moves
the manual lever to
reverse. Also, for
valve 2 failures, the
customer might get
a no engagements
when selecting
reverse.
Will turn on MIL.
Refer to D
If the on/off
solenoid (SSE) is
failed on or valve 2
is stuck in spring
compressed
position, then 1st
and 2nd gears are
the only available
gears.
Customer might
notice flares (on
shifts into 3rd
gear), deceleration
(on shifts into 4th
gear) or neutral
conditions (on
shifts into 5th
gear). High engine
RPM (since 2nd
gear is top
available gear).
Will turn on MIL.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Also, if clutch
select valve 2
sticks in the
spring
compressed
position the same
ratio pattern will
occur. This code
means either:
Nonelectrical
SSE
(on/off
solenoid)
failed on
(pressure).
Valve 2
stuck in
spring
compressed
position.
Open, short to ground SSE controls routing SSD Go to Pin
or short to power in
pressure to low/reverse
solenoid or wiring.
clutch or overdrive
clutch.
For SSE failed off (no
pressure):
P0773 P0770,
P0773
SSE Electrical SSE circuit
Faults
failure.
Customer might
notice 4th gear
drive away (when
1st gear
commanded).
After it is
determined on/off
is failed to no
pressure then 1st
gear with engine
braking is disabled.
Customer may
notice nothing or
may notice 2nd
gear provided when
1st gear selected in
low manual lever
range.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Harsh reverse
engagements since
low/reverse clutch
does not apply in
neutral or drive in
this failure mode.
For SSE failed on
(pressure):
P0774
-
SSE Electrical SSE stuck on
Faults
or off.
See P0771 and P0772.
P0774 P0771,
P0774
SSE NonElectrical
Faults (SSE
and valve
body)
SSE stuck off.
The on/off
solenoid (SSE)
controls the
multiplexing of
SSD (low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch VFS). If
this solenoid fails
off (no pressure)
then 1st gear with
engine braking is
failed to 4th.
Also, if clutch
select valve 2
sticks in the
default position,
then 1st gear with
engine braking is
High side is turned
off.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
Harsh
engagements.
No TCC apply.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
See P0771 and
P0772.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Go to Pin
Refer to D
If the on/off
solenoid (SSE) is
failed off or valve 2
is stuck in default
position, then the
customer will get
4th gear when 1st
gear with engine
braking is selected.
Customer might
notice 4th gear
drive way in
automatic range
since the control
system commands
1st gear with
engine braking at a
stop (turns
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0774 P0772,
P0774
SSE NonElectrical
Faults (SSE
and valve
body)
SSE stuck on.
failed to 4th gear
and reverse is
failed to neutral.
Do not
distinguish SSE
stuck off from
valve 2 stuck
default. This code
means either:
Nonelectrical
SSE
(on/off
solenoid)
failed off
(no
pressure).
Valve 2
stuck in
default
position.
The on/off
solenoid (SSE)
controls the
multiplexing of
SSD (low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch VFS). If
this solenoid fails
on (pressure) then
1st gear without
engine braking,
1st gear with
engine braking
and 2nd gear are
the only available
gears. 3rd gear is
failed to 1st gear
without engine
braking, 4th gear
is failed to 1st
gear with engine
braking, 5th gear
is failed to
neutral and 6th
gear is a tie-up.
low/reverse clutch
on) in case the
customer moves
the manual lever to
REVERSE. Also,
for valve 2 failures
the customer might
get a no
engagements when
selecting reverse.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
If the on/off
solenoid (SSE) is
failed on or valve 2
is stuck in spring
compressed
position then 1st
and 2nd are the
only available
gears.
Customer might
notice flares (on
shifts into 3rd
gear), deceleration
(on shifts into 4th
gear) or neutral
conditions (shifts
into 5th gear). High
engine RPM (since
2nd gear is top
available gear).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Also, if clutch
select valve 2
sticks in the
spring
compressed
position the same
ratio pattern will
occur. This code
means either:
Nonelectrical
SSE
(on/off
solenoid)
failed on
(pressure).
Valve 2
stuck in
spring
compressed
position.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
LPC Solenoid LPC circuit is Open circuit in solenoid
Electrical open.
or wiring.
Faults
P0960 P0960,
P0748
P0962 P0962,
P0748
LPC Solenoid LPC circuit is Short to ground in the
Electrical shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
Faults
ground.
Failed to maximum Go to Pin
line pressure.
Harsh
engagements.
Will turn on MIL.
Failed to minimum line Go to Pin
pressure:
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear as the only
forward gear with
TCC open).
Harsh
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0963 P0963,
P0748
LPC Solenoid LPC is shorted Short to power in the
Electrical to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
Faults
P0973 P0973,
P0753
SSA Electrical SSA circuit is Short to ground in the
Faults
shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
ground.
P0974 P0974,
P0753
SSA Electrical SSA is shorted Short to power in the
Faults
to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Failed to maximum Go to Pin
line pressure.
Harsh
engagements.
Will turn on MIL.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control, removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear as the only
forward gear with
TCC open).
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Forward clutch is Go to Pin
failed off - 5th and
6th gears only
available forward
gears.
Neutral condition
or flare when fault
occurs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0976 P0976,
P0758
SSB Electrical SSB circuit is Short to ground in the
Faults
shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
ground.
P0977 P0977,
P0758
SSB Electrical SSB is shorted Short to power in the
Faults
to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
P0979 P0979,
P0763
SSC Electrical SSC circuit is Short to ground in the
Faults
shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
ground.
Poor launch due to
5th gear drive away
Will turn on MIL.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control, removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear as the only
forward gear with
TCC open).
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Direct clutch failed Go to Pin
on - only 3rd and
5th gear available.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch due to
3rd gear drive
away.
Will turn on MIL.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control, removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0980 P0980,
P0763
SSC Electrical SSC is shorted Short to power in the
Faults
to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear as the only
forward gear with
TCC open).
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Intermediate clutch is
Go to Pin
failed off:
P0982 P0982,
P0768
SSD Electrical SSD circuit is Short to ground in the
Faults
shorted to
solenoid or wiring.
ground.
If fault occurs
while in 2nd or 6th
gear, customer
might notice a
neutral condition
before diagnostics
disables 2nd and
6th gears.
Customer might
notice erratic,
delayed or harsh
shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Go to Pin
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
opens the transaxle
solenoid power
control removing
power from all
solenoids (get
PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
as the only forward
gear with TCC
open), harsh
engagements.
Poor launch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P0983 P0983,
P0768
SSD Electrical SSD is shorted Short to power in the
Faults
to voltage.
wiring or solenoid.
P1636
-
ADLR Faults ADLR chip
communication
error.
Lost
communication
with ADLR
solenoid driver.
ADLR is an
internal PCM
chip that controls
the solenoids.
The main micro
communicates
with the ADLR
over a serial
interface, sending
out the desired
solenoid state and
receiving back a
circuit fault
status.
If communication
is lost with the
ADLR, the
solenoid states
become
unknown, so the
control system
forces the
transaxle
solenoid power
performance (due
to 5th gear drive
away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Overdrive clutch Go to Pin
failed on, only 4th,
5th and 6th gears
available.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor launch due to
4th gear drive
away.
Will turn on MIL.
Transaxle solenoid Install a n
ELECTR
power control
CONTRO
turned off,
providing PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear with TCC
open and maximum
line pressure.
Harsh
engagements.
Poor performance
launch (due to 5th
drive away).
No TCC apply.
No shifts.
Will turn on MIL.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
control off.
P163E
-
Transmission Transmission
Identification identification
Block (solenoid version.
strategy data
programmed
into the PCM)
P163F
-
Transmission Transmission
Identification identification
Block (solenoid block
characterization corrupted, not
data
programmed.
programmed
into the PCM)
Transmission
identification
version incorrect
(transmission
identification
version does not
match version in
PCM calibration).
7-digit service
banding code
checksum or total
transmission
identification
block checksum
invalid.
Solenoid and
Clutch
characterization
data unavailable.
Failure Mode
Effects
Management will
increase pressure
and allow only
PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, 1st
gear without
engine braking
and 3rd.
Transmission
identification
data not
programmed.
Solenoid and
Clutch strategy
data unavailable.
Failure Mode
Effects
Management will
increase pressure
and allow only
PARK,
REVERSE,
Refer to S
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
of limits function to
1st gear without
engine braking and
3rd could cause
high engine RPM,
lack of shifts
complaints.
No TCC apply.
Will turn on MIL.
Refer to S
Failure Mode
Effects
Management action
of limits function to
1st gear without
engine braking and
3rd could cause
high engine RPM,
lack of shifts
complaints.
No TCC apply.
Will turn on MIL.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P1700
-
Other Main Multiplex
Control Valve manual valve
Body Faults (valve 3).
(stuck valves)
NEUTRAL, 1st
gear without
engine braking
and 3rd.
This DTC is set if the
multiplex manual valve
sticks in the default
position for reverse
while the manual valve
is in the drive or low
position. Neutral will be
the default condition in
all forward gear ranges
with SSE on. Once the
PCM sees this fault, the
PCM turns off SSE
(SSE off) and allows
the transaxle to achieve
1st, 2nd, and 3rd gears
only.
P1702
-
TR Sensor
Electrical
Faults
TR sensor
P1702 - see P0705 and
circuit failure. P0708.
Refer to D
Customer might
notice neutral
conditions when
1st gear with
engine braking, 1st
gear without engine
braking or 2nd are
commanded.
Erratic shifting as
the OBD isolate the
cause of the neutral
condition to
multiplex manual
valve (valve 3).
High engine speeds
since 3rd is top
available gear,
harsh reverse
engagements (since
low/reverse clutch
is not on in drive at
low speed with this
failure).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Possible no crank, Go to Pin
only PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear available,
harsh engagements.
Extremely delayed
engagements (until
a DTC is set).
After a DTC is set
and the high side
opened - harsh
engagements, poor
performance (due
to a 5th gear drive
away), no shifts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P1702 P0705,
P1702
TR Sensor
P1702 P0708,
P1702
TR Sensor
P1705
TR Sensor
-
TR sensor
PCM is received an
circuit failure. invalid combination of
the 4-bit signal from the
TR sensor (wiring,
connector or TR sensor
issue).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Possible no crank, Go to Pin
only PARK,
REVERSE,
NEUTRAL and 5th
gear available,
harsh engagements.
Extremely delayed
engagements (until
a DTC is set).
After a DTC is set
and the high side
opened - harsh
engagements, poor
performance (due
to a 5th gear drive
away), no shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
TR sensor
PCM is received all 4
Go to Pin
Possible no crank,
circuit failure. TR sensor bits open
only PARK,
(potential sensor
REVERSE,
disconnected, wiring,
NEUTRAL and 5th
connector or TR sensor
gear available,
issue).
harsh engagements.
Extremely delayed
engagements (until
a DTC is set).
After a DTC is set
and the high side
opened - harsh
engagements, poor
performance (due
to a 5th gear drive
away), no shifts.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
TR sensor.
TR sensor not
Carry out KOEO or
Go to Pin
indicating Park or
KOER only.
Neutral during Key ON
Engine OFF (KOEO) or
Key ON Engine
Running (KOER) self
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
test.
TFT out of self-test
range (less than -1°C
[30°F] or greater than
105°C [220°F]).
P1744 P0741, TCC System TCC failed off. TCC is mechanically
P1744 Faults (includes
stuck off.
TCC, main
control valve
body and nonelectrical
solenoid faults)
P1711
-
TFT
TFT sensor.
P1780
-
Transmission TCS.
Control Switch
(TCS)
TCS did not change
states during KOER
Self Test.
P1783
-
Transmission Transmission
Over
over
Temperature temperature.
P1910
-
Reverse Lamp Reverse lamp Reverse lamp control
Transmission over
temperature condition
(greater than 135°C
[275°F] for at least 5
seconds).
Carry out KOEO or
KOER only.
Go to Pin
P0741 and P1744 mean Refer to D
the same thing nonelectrical failure that
caused the TCC to fail to
apply. This code sets for:
Non-electrical TCC
solenoid stuck off.
TCC mechanical
failure.
TCC regulator
apply valve stuck
in TCC release
position.
TCC control valve
stuck in TCC
release position.
TCC functional
failure MIL code.
TCC failed to apply
(less than 80 RPM
slip error lasting at
least 3 seconds
when TCC is
commanded on) 3
consecutive times.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Customer cannot cancel Refer to A
overdrive.
TRANSA
EXTERN
article.
Refer to D
Torque converter
lockup happens
earlier than
expected.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to E
Reverse lamps do
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Control
control.
circuit fault.
P2700
-
Forward Clutch Forward clutch See P0751 and P0752.
System Fault failed on or
(includes non- off.
electrical SSA
faults, main
control valve
body and
forward clutch)
P2700 P0751, Forward Clutch Forward clutch Forward clutch failed
P2700 System Faults failed off.
off, could be due to:
(includes nonelectrical SSA
Forward clutch
faults, valve
VFS (SSA) nonbody and
electrical failed
clutch)
stuck off (no
pressure).
Forward clutch
stuck off due to
mechanical
failure.
Forward clutch
regulator valve
stuck in the
default position.
Forward clutch
boost valve stuck
in the default
position.
P2700 P0752, Forward Clutch Forward clutch Forward clutch failed
P2700 System Faults failed on.
on, could be due to:
(includes nonelectrical SSA
Forward clutch
faults, valve
VFS (SSA) nonbody and
electrical failed
not function
correctly.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
LIGHTIN
See P0751 and
P0752.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Refer to D
Customer may
notice neutral
conditions or flares
on downshifts from
5th or 6th as the
test is determining
Forward is failed
off.
Once a code is
stored, all gears
with Forward on
are disabled leaving 5th and 6th
as the only Forward
gears.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting, harsh
engagements,
neutral conditions,
flares, poor launch
performance (due
to 5th drive away),
harsh reverse
engagements.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
shift into 5th or 6th
gears (forward
clutch failing to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
clutch)
stuck on
(pressure).
Forward clutch
stuck on due to
mechanical
failure.
Forward clutch
regulator valve
stuck in the
default position.
Forward clutch
regulator valve
stuck in the
spring
compressed
position.
P2701
-
Direct Clutch Direct clutch
System Fault failed on.
(includes nonelectrical SSB
faults, valve
body and
clutch)
Direct clutch
failed on due to a
mechanical fault.
Due to the
hydraulic
controls the
clutch can be
isolated from the
solenoid - this
failure code
means direct
clutch is on in 1st
gear under
conditions where
the SSB (direct
clutch VFS)
cannot cause it to
apply.
release will cause a
tie-up in 5th or 6th
gears).
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting or being
stuck in 4th gear
while the test is
confirming forward
clutch is failed on.
After a code is
stored 5th and 6th
are disabled.
Customer might
notice higher than
normal engine
speeds and loss of
fuel economy.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
shift into 2nd, 4th
or 6th gear (direct
clutch failing to
release will cause a
tie-up in these
gears).
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting while the
test is confirming
direct clutch is
failed on.
After a code is
stored all gears but
3rd and 5th are
disabled.
Since only 3rd and
5th gears are
allowed the
customer might
notice:
poor launch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P2702
-
Intermediate Intermediate See P0761 and P0762.
Clutch System clutch failed on
Faults (includes or off.
clutch, valve
body and nonelectrical SSC
faults)
P2702 P0761,
Intermediate Intermediate Intermediate clutch
P2702 Clutch System clutch failed failed off, could be due
Faults (includes off.
to:
clutch, valve
body and non Intermediate
electrical SSC
clutch VFS
faults)
(SSC) nonelectrical failed
stuck off (no
pressure).
Intermediate
clutch stuck off
due to
mechanical
failure.
Intermediate
clutch regulator
valve stuck in the
default position.
P2702 P0762,
P2702
Intermediate Intermediate
Clutch System clutch failed
Faults (includes on.
Intermediate clutch
failed on, could be due
to:
performance.
lack of shifts.
harsh
engagements.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
See P0761 and
P0762.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Refer to D
Customer may
notice neutral
conditions or flares
on shifts to 2nd or
6th as the test is
determining
intermediate clutch
is failed off.
Once a code is
stored, all gears
with intermediate
clutch on are
disabled (2nd and
6th gears) leaving
1st gear without
engine braking, 1st
gear with engine
braking, 3rd, 4th
and 5th gears.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting, neutral
conditions, flares,
higher engine
speeds on highway
(due to 6th gear
being disabled).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice a vehicle
deceleration on a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
clutch, valve
body and nonelectrical SSC
faults)
Intermediate
clutch VFS
(SSC) nonelectrical failed
stuck on
(pressure).
Intermediate
clutch stuck on
due to
mechanical
failure.
Intermediate
clutch regulator
valve stuck in the
spring
compressed
position.
P2703
-
Low/Reverse Low/reverse
Clutch and clutch failed
OWC Faults off.
(covers just the
clutches)
Low/reverse clutch
provides engine braking
in 1st gear and is
required to achieve
reverse.
shift into 3rd or 5th
gears (intermediate
clutch failing to
release will cause a
tie-up in 3rd or 5th
gears).
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting or being
stuck in 6th gear
while the test is
confirming C26 is
failed on.
After a code is
stored 1st gear with
engine braking, 1st
gear without engine
braking, 3rd, 4th
and 5th gears are
disabled.
Customer might
notice hanging in
2nd gear on
acceleration since
2nd gear - 6th gear
upshifts only occur
at closed pedal (due
to energy
limitations of
overdrive clutch),
harsh reverse
engagements (since
low/reverse clutch
is not on in 2nd
gear).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Low/reverse clutch Refer to D
is only tested for
failed off in the low
manual lever
position.
The customer
might notice not
getting engine
braking in 1st gear
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
P2704
P2705
-
-
Overdrive Overdrive
Clutch System clutch failed
Faults (includes off (clutch
non-electrical fault only).
SSD faults,
valve body and
clutch)
OWC Faults OWC failed
(covers just the off.
clutches)
Overdrive clutch
failed off.
Since SSD
(low/reverse
clutch/overdrive
clutch VFS) is
multiplexed we
can isolate
overdrive clutch
failed off
mechanical faults
(set P2704) from
SSD failed to no
pressure (sets
P0766).
OWC holds in 1st
gear without
engine braking. If
the OWC fails
off, 1st gear
without engine
braking is failed
to neutral.
First gear with
engine braking is
with engine
braking, and erratic
shifting as the
OBDs isolates the
fault to low/reverse
clutch failed off.
Once a code is
stored 2nd gear will
be provided in
place of 1st in the
Low manual lever
range.
Customer might
also experience
delayed or no
reverse
engagement.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer may
notice neutral
conditions or flares
on shifts into 4th,
5th, or 6th gear.
4th, 5th and 6th
gears are disabled.
Customer might
notice erratic
shifting, neutral
conditions, flares,
high engine RPM
(since 3rd gear is
top available gear).
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Customer might
notice neutral
conditions when
1st gear without
engine braking is
commanded.
Erratic shifting as
the OBD isolates
the cause of the
neutral condition to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
disabled for this
failure since
low/reverse
clutch is not
intended to hold
power on torque
in 1st gear.
P2783
-
Other Main TCC control
Control Valve valve.
Body Faults
(stuck valves)
TCC control
valve stuck in the
apply position.
When the TCC is
commanded open
there will be no
flow through the
TCC (both apply
and release
circuits will be
exhausted).
Test will run in
3rd or higher
(when valve 2 is
in the latched
position, pointing
SSD at overdrive
clutch) when the
TCC is
commanded
open. SSE is
turned on, if the
control valve is
stuck this will
cause the TCC to
apply even
though the TCC
VFS is off.
the OWC being
failed.
Might also notice
poor launch
performance (due
to 2nd gear drive
away).
Harsh
engagements.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
Refer to D
Erratic shifts,
vehicle disengages
at a stop while in
drive or low, early
TCC apply.
Will turn on
wrench lamp.
TRANSAXLE CONNECTOR LAYOUTS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: PCM Transaxle Connector - C175T
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin Number
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
27
28
29
32
35
38
39
40
41
43
45
47
Circuit Function
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Signal
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Signal
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Range (TR)1
TR2
TR3
Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Supply
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid
TR4
Line Pressure Control (LPC)
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
TSS/OSS Power
TFT Signal Return
TR/TSS/OSS Ground
Transaxle Solenoid Power Control Voltage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Transaxle Vehicle Harness Connector - C168
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Circuit Function
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Supply
TFT Signal Return
Transmission Range (TR)1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TR Sensor Ground
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS)/Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ground
OSS Sensor Signal
Not Used
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid
Transaxle Solenoid Power Control Voltage
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Line Pressure Control (LPC)
TSS Sensor Signal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
20
TSS/OSS Sensor Power Supply
Fig. 8: Solenoid Body-to-Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Internal Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Solenoid Body Main Connector
Pin Number
4
5
6
7
8
NOTE:
TR Sensor Pin Number
5
4
3
2
1
6
Circuit Function
Transmission Range (TR)1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TR Ground
Empty
The Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor connector is on top of the 20-pin
solenoid body connector (next to the Transmission Range (TR) sensor
connector).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Solenoid Body-to-Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Internal Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Solenoid Body Main Connector
Pin Number
9
OSS Sensor Pin Number
3
10
20
1
2
NOTE:
Circuit Function
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS)/Output
Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ground
Circuit
OSS Sensor Signal
TSS/OSS Sensor Power Supply
The Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor connector is below the 20-pin solenoid
body connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Solenoid Body-to-Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Internal Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Solenoid Body Main Connector
Pin Number
9
TSS Sensor Pin Number
1
19
20
3
2
Circuit Function
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS)/Output
Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ground
Circuit
TSS Sensor Signal
TSS/OSS Sensor Power Supply
Fig. 11: Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin Number
Circuit Function
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
1
2
3
4
5
6
Transmission Range (TR) Ground
TR4
TR3
TR2
TR1
Empty
Fig. 12: Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor/Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin Number
1
2
3
Circuit Function
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Ground
TSS Power
TSS Sensor Signal
Fig. 13: Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor/Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin Number
1
2
3
Circuit Function
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Signal
OSS Power
OSS Sensor Ground
PINPOINT TESTS - OSC EQUIPPED VEHICLE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
73III Digital Multimeter
Tool Number
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Anytime an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition,
corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new
components as required.
TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SENSOR DIAGNOSIS CHART
PID: TR_D
Selector Position
PID: TR
TR1
TR2
TR3
PARK
P/N
0
1
1
In Between
REV
0
0
1
REVERSE
REV
0
0
1
In Between
REV
1
0
1
NEUTRAL
NTRL
1
0
1
In Between
NTRL
1
0
0
Drive
Drive
1
0
0
In Between
Drive
0
0
0
TR4
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Low
Low
0
0
0
0
A "In Between" reading could be caused by a selector lever cable or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor misaligned or a TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4.
B TR PIDs: 1= Open TR switch, 0 = Closed TR switch.
C VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return.
Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts
A Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned
so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR PIDs with the scan tool.
B Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned
so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TR PIDs with the scan tool. To
determine the shorted components while observing TR PIDs, unplug the TR and see if the short
goes away. If the short is still present, unplug the transaxle harness and see if the short goes away.
If the short is still present, then the short is in the PCM or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect
circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an
internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
SOLENOID OPERATION CHART
Base Selector
Lever Position
P
R
N
SSA
(VFS)
PCM Commanded NL (CB
Gear
1,2,3,4)
P
Off
R
Off
N
Off
D
1
On
L
2
3
4
5
6
L
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
Shift Solenoid
SSB
SSC
SSD
(VFS)
(VFS) (VFS) NH
SSE
NH (C NL (CB
(CB
(On/Off)
NC
3,5,R)
2,6)
L,R/4,5,6)
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Offa
Ona
On
Off
Offb
Onc
On
Off
On
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Offb
Onc
TCC
(VFS)
NL
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
Off
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position.
b Turns on above 10 km/h (6 mph).
c Turns off above 10 km/h (6 mph).
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart Failed ON or Failed OFF
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or
hydraulically stuck ON/OFF.
SHIFT SOLENOID A (SSA)
Gear Commanded
R
D
Actual Gears Obtained
Failed ON (High Pressure)
Failed OFF (Low Pressure)
R
R
1, 2, 3, 4
5, 6
SHIFT SOLENOID B (SSB)
Gear Commanded
R
D
Actual Gears Obtained
Failed ON (Low Pressure)
Failed OFF (High Pressure)
a
R
N
1, 2, 4, 6
3, 5
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove
voltage to all solenoids.
SHIFT SOLENOID C (SSC)
Gear Commanded
R
D
Actual Gears Obtained
Failed ON (High Pressure)
Failed OFF (Low Pressure)
R
R
2, 6
1, 3, 4, 5
SHIFT SOLENOID D (SSD)
Gear Commanded
R
D
Actual Gears Obtained
Failed ON (Low Pressure)
Failed OFF (High Pressure)
R
Na
1, 2, 3b
4, 5, 6
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove
voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
SHIFT SOLENOID E (SSE)
Gear Commanded
R
D
Actual Gears Obtained
Failed ON (High Pressure)
Failed OFF (Low Pressure)
R
R
a
1, 2
1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
a No engine braking.
Pinpoint Tests
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Transmission Controls - 6 Speed for schematic
and connector information.
PINPOINT TEST A: TRANSAXLE CONTROL SOLENOIDS
NOTE:
Refer to the Transaxle Internal Harness Diagram illustration Transaxle
Connector Layouts.
NOTE:
Refer to the Transaxle Vehicle Harness Connector illustration Transaxle
Connector Layouts.
A1 ELECTRONIC DIAGNOSTICS
Check to make sure the transaxle harness connector is fully seated, terminals are engaged in
connector and in good condition before proceeding.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Carry out the Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) Self Test until continuous DTCs have been displayed.
Enter the Output Test Mode.
Select the mode ALL ON. Push START to turn outputs ON. Push STOP to turn outputs OFF.
Does vehicle enter Output Test Mode?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : PRESS START. If vehicle does not enter Output Test Mode, REFER to the Introduction Gasoline Engines article.
A2 CHECK THE SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Transaxle Vehicle Harness C168
Use a mirror to inspect both ends of the connector for damage or pushed-out pins, corrosion, loose
wires and missing or damaged seals.
Disconnect: PCM Transaxle Electrical C175T
Use a mirror to inspect both ends of the connector for damage or pushed-out pins, corrosion, loose
wires and missing or damaged seals.
Measure the resistance of the suspect solenoid circuit between PCM transaxle electrical C175T and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
transaxle harness C168 using the following chart.
Shift Solenoid
Shift Solenoid A (SSA) CET05 (BU/GN)
Shift Solenoid B (SSB) CET06 (GN/BN)
Shift Solenoid C (SSC) CET07 (GY/OG)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD) CET08 (BN/WH)
Shift Solenoid E (SSE) CET18 (GY/YE)
Line Pressure Control (LPC) CET09 (YE/VT)
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) CET10 (BU/GY)
Transaxle Vehicle
Harness C168
C168-13
C168-16
C168-17
C168-12
C168-1
C168-18
C168-14
PCM Transaxle
C175T
C175T-39
C175T-27
C175T-40
C175T-28
C175T-38
C175T-35
C175T-29
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) for an open. RECONNECT all components. TEST the system for
normal operation.
A3 CHECK THE SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between transaxle vehicle harness C168 and ground.
Transaxle Vehicle
Harness C168
C168-13
C168-16
C168-17
C168-12
C168-1
C168-18
C168-14
Shift Solenoid
SSA CET05 (BU/GN)
SSB CET06 (GN/BN)
SSC CET07 (GY/OG)
SSD CET08 (BN/WH)
SSE CET18 (GY/YE)
LPC CET09 (YE/VT)
TCC CET10 (BU/GY)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) for a short to ground. RECONNECT all components. TEST the system
for normal operation.
A4 CHECK THE SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Measure the voltage between transaxle vehicle harness C168 and ground.
Transaxle Vehicle
Harness C168
C168-13
C168-16
C168-17
Shift Solenoid
SSA CET05 (BU/GN)
SSB CET06 (GN/BN)
SSC CET07 (GY/OG)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
SSD CET08 (BN/WH)
SSE CET18 (GY/YE)
LPC CET09 (YE/VT)
TCC CET10 (BU/GY)
C168-12
C168-1
C168-18
C168-14
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit(s) for a short to power. RECONNECT all components. TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : Go to A5.
A5 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE SOLENOID FIELD CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between transaxle solenoid body C168-15, component side and the suspect
solenoid pin, component side and compare the value to the specifications in the table below.
Transaxle C168 Transaxle C168-15
Component Side Component Side
C168-13
C168-15
C168-16
C168-15
C168-17
C168-15
C168-12
C168-15
C168-1
C168-15
C168-18
C168-15
C168-14
C168-15
Shift Solenoid
SSA CET05 (BU/GN)
SSB CET06 (GN/BN)
SSC CET07 (GY/OG)
SSD CET08 (BN/WH)
SSE CET18 (GY/YE)
LPC CET09 (YE/VT)
TCC CET10 (BU/GY)
SOLENOID RESISTANCE VALUES: SSA, SSB, SSC, SSD, TCC AND LPC
Temperature
°C
°F
Resistance (ohms)
-20 to -10
-4 to 14
3.24-5.13
-10 to 0
14-32
3.43-5.32
0-10
32-50
3.62-5.51
10-20
50-68
3.81-5.70
20-30
68-86
4.00-5.89
30-40
86-104
4.19-6.08
40-50
104-122
4.38-6.27
50-60
122-140
4.57-6.46
60-70
140-158
4.76-6.65
70-80
158-176
4.95-6.83
80-90
176-194
5.13-7.02
90-100
194-212
5.32-7.21
SOLENOID RESISTANCE VALUES: SSE (ON/OFF)
Temperature
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
°C
-20 to -10
-10 to 0
0-10
10-20
20-30
30-40
40-50
50-60
60-70
70-80
80-90
90-100
°F
-4 to 14
14-32
32-50
50-68
68-86
86-104
104-122
122-140
140-158
158-176
176-194
194-212
Resistance (ohms)
15.45-24.35
16.35-25.25
17.25-26.15
18.15-27.05
19.05-27.95
19.95-28.85
20.85-29.75
21.75-30.65
22.65-31.54
23.54-32.44
24.44-33.34
25.34-34.24
Is the resistance within specifications?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article.
RECONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REMOVE the main control cover. REFER to Main Control Cover. INSPECT the solenoid
body for foreign material such as metal shavings on the exposed metal contacts or other
components. CLEAR the solenoid body and RECHECK the resistance values. If the resistance
values are still out of specification, INSTALL a new solenoid body assembly. REFER to Solenoid
Body Assembly. RECONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST B: TFT SENSOR
NOTE:
Refer to the Transaxle Vehicle Harness Connector illustration Transaxle
Connector Layouts.
NOTE:
Refer to the Transaxle Internal Harness Diagram illustration Transaxle
Connector Layouts.
B1 ELECTRONIC DIAGNOSTICS
Check to make sure transaxle vehicle harness connector C168 is fully seated, terminals are fully
engaged in connector and in good condition before proceeding.
Have the above items been checked?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : CARRY OUT checks. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the Self Test.
B2 CHECK THE TFT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Transaxle Vehicle Harness C168
Disconnect: PCM Transaxle C175T
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Use a mirror to inspect both ends of the connector for damage or pushed-out pins, corrosion, loose
wires and missing or damaged seals.
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between PCM transaxle C175T-20, circuit VET27 (BN/YE) and transaxle
vehicle harness C168-2, circuit VET27 (BN/YE).
Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between PCM transaxle C175T-43, circuit RE406 (GY/VT) and transaxle
vehicle harness C168-3, circuit RE406 (GY/VT).
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) for an open. CONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B3 CHECK THE TFT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between transaxle vehicle harness C168-2, circuit VET27 (BN/YE) and
ground.
Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between transaxle vehicle harness C168-3, circuit RE406 (GY/VT) and
ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) for a short to ground. CONNECT all components. TEST the system for
normal operation.
B4 CHECK THE TFT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VPWR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between transaxle vehicle harness C168-2, circuit VET27 (BN/YE) and
ground.
Fig. 19: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between transaxle vehicle harness C168-3, circuit RE406 (GY/VT) and
ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit(s) for a short to voltage. CONNECT all components. TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : Go to B5.
B5 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE TFT SENSORS/HARNESS
Connect: Transaxle Vehicle Harness C168
TEST 1.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance Between PCM Transaxle Electrical Connector C175T Pins 20
& 43, Circuit VET27 (BN/YE) & RE406 (GY/VT)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure and record the resistance between PCM transaxle C175T-20, circuit VET27 (BN/YE) and
C175T-43, circuit RE406 (GY/VT).
Compare the resistance value to the following table ranges:
TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE
°C
°F
-40 to -20
-40 to -4
-19 to -1
-3 to 31
0-20
32-68
21-40
69-104
41-70
105-158
71-90
159-194
91-110
195-230
111-130
231-266
131-150
267-302
Resistance (Ohms)
1076K-269K
309K-91K
104K-35K
40K-15K
17K-4.9K
5.6K-2.5K
3.0K-1.4K
1.7K-0.8K
0.97K-0.56K
TEST 2.
Check for intermittent short or open.
If the resistance was between 0.8k and 100k ohms, carry out the following test. If the transaxle is
warm, allow it to cool. Check the TFT sensor resistance again. Compare the resistance with the
initial resistance. The resistance should decrease if the transaxle was heated and should increase if
the transaxle was allowed to cool. If correct, then change in the resistance occurs, repeat OBD.
Is the resistance in the range?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. CONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new solenoid body. REFER to Solenoid Body Assembly. RECONNECT all
components. TEST the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST C: TSS AND OSS SENSORS
NOTE:
Refer to the Transaxle Vehicle Harness Connector illustration Transaxle
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Connector Layouts.
NOTE:
Refer to the Transaxle Internal Harness Diagram illustration Transaxle
Connector Layouts.
C1 ELECTRONIC DIAGNOSTICS
Check to make sure transaxle vehicle harness C168 is fully seated, terminals are engaged in
connector and in good condition before proceeding.
Have the items above been checked?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : CARRY OUT the checks. CLEAR the DTCs. RERUN the OBD Tests.
C2 ELECTRONIC DIAGNOSTICS
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Monitor the speed sensor PIDs while test driving the vehicle.
Are the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) and Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor signals present and
consistent?
YES : The condition that set the DTC is intermittent and is not currently present. ERASE the
codes. RERUN the OBD Tests.
NO : Go to C3.
C3 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE VEHICLE HARNESS FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect: Transaxle Vehicle Harness C168
Disconnect: PCM Transaxle C175T
Use a mirror to inspect both ends of the connectors for damage or pushed-out pins, corrosion, loose
wires and missing or damaged seals.
Measure the resistance for the speed sensor circuits between the transaxle vehicle harness C168 and
the PCM transaxle C175T.
Speed Sensor Circuit
TSS/OSS power supply LE111 (VT/GN)
TSS/OSS ground RET24 (BN/BU)
TSS sensor signal VET33 (WH/OG)
OSS sensor signal VET26 (BN/GN)
Transaxle Vehicle
Harness C168
C168-20
C168-9
C168-19
C168-10
PCM Transaxle
C175T
C175T-41
C175T-45
C175T-15
C175T-14
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) for an open. CONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal
operation.
C4 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE VEHICLE HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance for the speed sensor circuits between transaxle vehicle harness C168 and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 95
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
ground.
Speed Sensor Circuit
TSS/OSS power supply LE111 (VT/GN)
TSS/OSS ground RET24 (BN/BU)
TSS sensor signal VET33 (WH/OG)
OSS sensor signal VET26 (BN/GN)
Transaxle Vehicle
Harness C168
C168-20
C168-9
C168-19
C168-10
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to C5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) for a short to ground. CONNECT all components. TEST the system for
normal operation.
C5 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE VEHICLE HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO VPWR
Check for voltage from the speed sensor circuits at transaxle vehicle harness C168.
Speed Sensor Circuit
TSS/OSS power supply LE111 (VT/GN)
TSS/OSS ground RET24 (BN/BU)
TSS sensor signal VET33 (WH/OG)
OSS sensor signal VET26 (BN/GN)
Transaxle Vehicle
Harness C168
C168-20
C168-9
C168-19
C168-10
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit(s) for a short to voltage. CONNECT all components. TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : Go to C6.
C6 CHECK THE SOLENOID BODY FOR AN INTERNAL OPEN CIRCUIT
Remove the main control cover. Refer to Main Control Cover.
Disconnect: TSS Sensor
Disconnect: OSS Sensor
Use a mirror to inspect both ends of the connectors for damage or pushed-out pins, corrosion, loose
wires and missing or damaged seals.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 96
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 21: Measuring Resistance Of Solenoid Body Internal Speed Sensor Power Circuit
Between Main Solenoid Body Connector Pin 20 & OSS Sensor Connectors Pin 2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The OSS sensor is above the main solenoid body connector next to
the Transmission Range (TR) sensor, the TSS sensor connector is
below the main solenoid body connector.
Measure the resistance of the solenoid body internal speed sensor power circuit between the main
solenoid body connector pin 20, solenoid body side and the TSS or OSS sensor connectors pin 2,
solenoid body side.
Fig. 22: Measuring Resistance Of Solenoid Body Internal Speed Sensor Power Circuit
Between Main Solenoid Body Connector Pin 9 & OSS Sensor Connectors Pin 3
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The OSS sensor is above the main solenoid body connector next to
the TR sensor.
Measure the resistance of the solenoid body internal speed sensor ground circuit between the main
solenoid body connector pin 9, solenoid body side and OSS sensor connector pin 3, solenoid body
side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 97
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Measuring Resistance Of Solenoid Body Internal Speed Sensor Power Circuit
Between Main Solenoid Body Connector Pin 9 & TSS Sensor Connectors Pin 1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The TSS sensor connector is below the main solenoid body
connector.
Measure the resistance of the solenoid body internal speed sensor ground circuit between the main
solenoid body connector pin 9, solenoid body side and TSS sensor connector pin 1, solenoid body
side.
Fig. 24: Measuring Resistance Of Solenoid Body Internal Speed Sensor Power Circuit
Between Main Solenoid Body Connector Pin 19 & TSS Sensor Connectors Pin 1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The TSS sensor connector is below the main solenoid body
connector.
Measure the resistance of the solenoid body internal circuit for the TSS sensor signal between the
main solenoid body connector pin 19, solenoid body side and TSS sensor connector pin 3, solenoid
body side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 98
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 25: Measuring Resistance Of Solenoid Body Internal Speed Sensor Power Circuit
Between Main Solenoid Body Connector Pin 10 & OSS Sensor Connectors Pin 1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The OSS sensor is above the main solenoid body connector next to
the TR sensor.
Measure the resistance of the solenoid body internal circuit for the OSS sensor signal between the
main solenoid body connector pin 10, solenoid body side and OSS sensor connector pin 1, solenoid
body side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C7.
NO : INSTALL a new solenoid body. REFER to Solenoid Body Assembly. CONNECT all
components. TEST the system for normal operation.
C7 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE SPEED SENSOR CONNECTORS
Connect: PCM Transaxle C175T
Connect: Transaxle Vehicle Harness Connector C168
Key in ON position.
Fig. 26: Measuring Voltage At TSS Sensor Connector Pin 2, Solenoid Body Side Or OSS
Sensor Connector Pin 2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage at TSS sensor connector pin 2, solenoid body side or OSS sensor connector
pin 2, solenoid body side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 99
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to C8.
NO : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article.
CONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal operation.
C8 CHECK FOR REFERENCE SIGNAL VOLTAGE AT THE SPEED SENSOR CONNECTORS
Fig. 27: Measuring Voltage At TSS Sensor Connector Pin 3, Solenoid Body Side
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The TSS sensor connector is below the main solenoid body
connector.
Measure the voltage at TSS sensor connector pin 3, solenoid body side.
Fig. 28: Measuring Voltage At OSS Sensor Connector Pin 1, Solenoid Body Side
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The OSS sensor is above the main solenoid body connector next to
the TR sensor.
Measure the voltage at OSS sensor connector pin 1, solenoid body side.
Is the voltage between 4.5 and 5.5 volts?
YES : Go to C9.
NO : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article.
CONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 100
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
C9 CHECK FOR GROUND AT THE SPEED SENSOR CONNECTORS
Fig. 29: Measuring Resistance Between TSS Sensor Connector Pin 1, Solenoid Body Side &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The TSS sensor connector is below the main solenoid body
connector.
Measure the resistance between TSS sensor connector pin 1, solenoid body side and ground.
Fig. 30: Measuring Resistance Between OSS Sensor Connector Pin 3, Solenoid Body Side &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The OSS sensor is above the main solenoid body connector next to
the TR sensor.
Measure the resistance between OSS sensor connector pin 3, solenoid body side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new speed sensor. REFER to Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor or Output
Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor. TEST the system for normal operation. If the condition is still present,
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article.
NO : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article.
CONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 101
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST D: TR SENSOR
NOTE:
Refer to the Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Connector illustration Transaxle
Connector Layouts.
NOTE:
Refer to the Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart preceding these
pinpoint tests.
D1 VERIFY DTCs
Key in OFF position.
Select PARK.
Carry out the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) Test. DTCs P0705 and P0708 cannot be set by an
incorrectly adjusted selector lever cable.
Are only DTCs P0705, P0708 present?
YES : Go to D3.
NO : Go to D2.
D2 VERIFY SELECTOR LEVER CABLE/LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
Place the transaxle manual control lever in the DRIVE position.
Select DRIVE.
Reconnect the selector lever cable/linkage.
Verify that the selector lever cable/linkage is correctly adjusted. Refer to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION EXTERNAL CONTROLS article.
Is the selector lever cable/linkage correctly adjusted?
YES : Go to D3.
NO : ADJUST the selector lever cable/linkage. REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION EXTERNAL CONTROLS article. Go to D4.
D3 CHECK THE ELECTRICAL SIGNAL OPERATION
Select PARK.
Disconnect: PCM Transaxle C175T
Disconnect: Transaxle Vehicle Harness C168
Use a mirror to inspect both ends of the connectors for damaged or pushed-out pins, corrosion,
loose wires and missing or damaged seals.
Is there damage to the connectors, pins or harness?
YES : REPAIR as required. CLEAR DTCs and RERUN On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) Tests.
NO : Go to D4.
D4 CHECK ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATION TR AND PCM
Key in OFF position.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 102
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Connect: PCM Transaxle C175T
Connect: Transaxle Vehicle Harness C168
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: TR PIDs: TR, TR1, TR2, TR3, and
TR4
Move the TR selector lever into each gear and stop.
Observe any of the following PIDs (vehicle-dependent), TR, TR1, TR2, TR3, and TR4 while
wiggling harness, tapping on sensor or driving the vehicle.
Compare the PIDs to the Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart.
Do the PIDs TR, TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4 match the Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis
Chart, and do they remain steady when the harness is wiggled, the sensor is tapped on or the
vehicle driven?
YES : The problem is not in the digital TR sensor system. REFER to Diagnosis By Symptom for
further diagnosis.
NO : If the PIDs change when wiggling the harness, tapping on the sensor or driving the vehicle,
the problem may be intermittent. Go to D5.
D5 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE VEHICLE TRANSAXLE HARNESS FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: PCM Transaxle C175T
Disconnect: Transaxle Vehicle Harness C168
Measure the resistance for the TR sensor circuits between the transaxle vehicle harness C168 and
the PCM transaxle C175T.
Transaxle Vehicle
Harness C168
C168-4
C168-5
C168-6
C168-7
C168-8
TR Sensor Circuit
TR-1 VET29 (VT/WH)
TR-2 VET30 (YE)
TR-3 VET31 (BU/OG)
TR-4 VET32 (VT)
TR Ground RET24 (BN/BU)
PCM Transaxle
C175T
C175T-17
C175T-18
C175T-19
C175T-32
C175T-45
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal operation.
D6 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE VEHICLE HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance for the TR sensor circuits between the transaxle vehicle harness C168 and
ground.
Transaxle Vehicle
Harness C168
C168-4
C168-5
TR Sensor Circuit
TR-1 VET29 (VT/WH)
TR-2 VET30 (YE)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 103
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
TR-3 VET31 (BU/OG)
TR-4 VET32 (VT)
TR Ground RET24 (BN/BU)
C168-6
C168-7
C168-8
Ground
Ground
Ground
Are all resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D7.
NO : REPAIR shorted circuit(s). RECONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal
operation.
D7 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE VEHICLE HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Measure the voltage for the TR sensor circuits between the transaxle vehicle harness C168 and
ground.
Transaxle Vehicle
Harness C168
C168-4
C168-5
C168-6
C168-7
C168-8
TR Sensor Circuit
TR-1 VET29 (VT/WH)
TR-2 VET30 (YE)
TR-3 VET31 (BU/OG)
TR-4 VET32 (VT)
TR Ground RET24 (BN/BU)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR shorted circuit(s). RECONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to D8.
D8 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN TR/PCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUITS
Measure the resistance between TR sensor and PCM Transaxle C175T.
PCM Transaxle
C175T
C175T-17
C175T-18
C175T-19
C175T-32
C175T-45
TR Sensor Circuit
TR-1 VET29 (VT/WH)
TR-2 VET30 (YE)
TR-3 VET31 (BU/OG)
TR-4 VET32 (VT)
TR Ground RET24 (BN/BU)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Are all resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D9.
NO : REPAIR shorts on circuits having less than 10,000 ohms between other TR/PCM input signal
circuits. RECONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal operation.
D9 CHECK FOR AN INTERNAL SOLENOID BODY OPEN FOR THE TR SENSOR CIRCUITS
Remove the main control cover. Refer to Main Control Cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 104
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Disconnect: TR Sensor Connector
Use a mirror to inspect both ends of the connector for damage or pushed-out pins, corrosion, loose
wires and missing or damaged seals.
Measure the resistance of the TR sensor circuits between the transaxle vehicle harness connector,
component side and the TR sensor connector, solenoid body side.
Transaxle Vehicle
Harness Connector
Pin (Component
Side)
4
5
6
7
8
TR Sensor Circuit
TR-1
TR-2
TR-3
TR-4
TR Ground
TR Sensor
Connector Pin
(Solenoid Body
Side)
5
4
3
2
1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new TR sensor. REFER to Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor.
RECONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new solenoid body. REFER to Solenoid Body Assembly. RECONNECT all
components. TEST the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST E: TRANSAXLE SOLENOID POWER CONTROL CIRCUIT
NOTE:
Refer to the Transaxle Vehicle Harness Connector illustration Transaxle
Connector Layouts.
E1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRANSAXLE VEHICLE HARNESS C168
Disconnect: Transaxle Vehicle Harness C168
Use a mirror to inspect both ends of the connector for damage or pushed-out pins, corrosion, loose
wires and missing or damaged seals.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 31: Measuring Voltage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 105
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage at the transaxle vehicle harness C168-15, circuit CET49 (BN).
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new solenoid body. REFER to Solenoid Body Assembly. RECONNECT all
components. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to E2.
E2 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE SOLENOID POWER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: PCM Transaxle C175T
Fig. 32: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the PCM transaxle C175T-47, circuit CET49 (BN) and transaxle
vehicle harness C168-15, circuit CET49 (BN).
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : REPAIR circuit CET49 (BN) for an open. RECONNECT all components. TEST the system
for normal operation.
E3 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE SOLENOID POWER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Fig. 33: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:24 AM
Page 106
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the transaxle vehicle harness C168-15, circuit CET49 (BN) and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article.
RECONNECT all components. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit CET49 (BN) for a short to ground. RECONNECT all components. TEST the
system for normal operation.
SPECIAL TESTING PROCEDURES
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
The special tests are designed to aid the technician in diagnosing the hydraulic and mechanical portions of the
transaxle.
Engine Idle Speed Check
Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article for diagnosis and testing of the engine idle speed.
Line Pressure Test
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 107
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 34: Identifying Line Pressure Tap & Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
-
Description
Line pressure tap
Transmission fluid drain plug
NOTE:
Carry out the Line Pressure Test prior to carrying out the Stall Speed Test. If the
line pressure is low at stall, do not carry out the Stall Speed Test or further
transaxle damage will occur. Do not maintain Wide Open Throttle (WOT) in any
transaxle range for more than 5 seconds.
NOTE:
Do not mistake the transmission fluid drain plug for the line pressure tap plug
or the transmission fluid will have to be refilled.
This test verifies that the line pressure is within specification.
1. Connect a pressure gauge to the line pressure tap.
2. Start the engine and check the line pressures see the line pressure chart to determine if the line pressure is
within specification.
LINE PRESSURE CHART
Gear
Line
Pressures at Idlea
P
R
N
D
L
379-448 kPa (55-65 psi)
655-724 kPa (95-105 psi)
379-448 kPa (55-65 psi)
552-621 kPa (80-90 psi)
552-621 kPa (80-90 psi)
Pressure at Wide Open Throttle (WOT) Stalla
P
R
N
D
L
379-448 kPa (55-65 psi)
2,034-2,206 kPa
(295-320 psi)
379-448 kPa (55-65 psi)
1,689-1,758 kPa
(245-255 psi)
1,689-1,758 kPa
(245-255 psi)
a All pressures are approximate.
3. If the line pressure is not within specification, go to Pinpoint Test A to diagnose the Line Pressure
Control (LPC) operation. If LPC operation is OK, see the Line Pressure Diagnosis Chart for line pressure
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 108
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
concern causes.
4. When the pressure tests are completed, install the pressure tap plug.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
LINE PRESSURE DIAGNOSIS CHART
Test Results
HIGH at IDLE - ALL RANGES
LOW at IDLE - ALL RANGES
LOW in Park ONLY
LOW in Reverse ONLY
LOW in Neutral ONLY
LOW in Overdrive ONLY
LOW in Drive ONLY
LOW in Manual 1st ONLY
Possible Source
Wiring Harnesses
Line Pressure Control (LPC) Solenoid
Main Regulator Valve
Low Fluid Level
Fluid Inlet Filter/Seal
Main Control Body
Cross Leaks
Gaskets
Pump
Separator Plate
Valve Body
Separator Plate
Reverse Clutch
Valve Body
Forward Clutch
Valve Body
Forward Clutch
Valve Body
Forward Clutch
Forward Clutch
Valve Body
Stall Speed Test
WARNING: Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake
to reduce the risk of vehicle movement during this procedure. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Carry out Line Pressure Test prior to carrying out Stall Speed Test. If the line
pressure is low at stall, do not carry out Stall Speed Test or further transaxle
damage will occur.
The Stall Speed Test checks:
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) operation and installation.
holding ability of the forward clutch.
reverse clutch (the low-reverse bands).
planetary One-Way Clutch (OWC).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 109
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
engine driveability concerns.
Conduct this test with the engine coolant and transmission fluid at correct levels and at normal operating
temperature.
Apply the parking brake firmly for each Stall Speed Test.
STALL SPEED CHART
Engine
3.5L
Stall Speed
2,350-2,650
1. Connect the scan tool.
NOTE:
If the recorded RPM exceeds the maximum limits, release the accelerator
pedal immediately because clutch or band slippage is indicated.
2. In each of the following ranges D, L and R, press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold it just long
enough to let the engine get to WOT. While making this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5
seconds at a time.
3. Note the results in each range.
4. After each range, move the selector lever to NEUTRAL and run the engine at 1,000 RPM for about 15
seconds to cool the torque converter before making the next test.
5. Use the Stall Speed Diagnosis Chart for corrective actions.
NOTE:
The stall speed in REVERSE will be lower.
6. If stall speeds were too high, see the Stall Speed Diagnosis Chart. If stall speeds were too low, first check
engine idle speed and tune up. If engine is OK, remove torque converter and check TCC for slippage.
STALL SPEED DIAGNOSIS CHART
Range
D, L
R
Possible Source
Forward Clutch
Low/Reverse Clutch
Low/One-Way Clutch (OWC)
Low/Reverse Clutch
Direct Clutch
LEAKAGE INSPECTION
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
100W/12 Volt DC UV Lamp
Tool Number
164-R0751 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 110
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Material
Item
Dye-Lite® ATF/Power Steering Fluid Leak
Detection Dye
164-R3701 (Rotunda)
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
NOTE:
Specification
-
MERCON® V
Do not try to stop the fluid leak by increasing the torque beyond specifications.
This may cause damage to the case threads.
Leakage at the transaxle pan-to-case gasket often can be stopped by tightening the attaching bolts to 9 Nm (80
lb-in). If necessary, install a new pan case gasket.
Check the transmission fluid filler tube connection at the transmission case. If leakage is found here, install a
new grommet.
Check transmission fluid lines and fittings between the transmission and the cooler in the radiator tank for wear
or damage. If leakage cannot be stopped by tightening a transmission fluid tube nut, install new parts. When
transmission fluid is found leaking between the case and the cooler line fitting, check for missing or damaged
O-ring, then tighten the fitting to maximum specification.
If the leak continues, install a new cooler tube fitting and tighten to specification. The same procedure should be
followed for transmission fluid leaks between the radiator cooler and the cooler tube fittings. Refer to
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION COOLING article.
Check the engine coolant in the radiator. If the transmission fluid is present in the coolant, the cooler in the
radiator is probably leaking. The cooler can be further checked for leaks by disconnecting the tubes for the
cooler fittings and applying no more than 345 kPa (50 psi) air pressure to the fittings. Remove the coolant
recovery cap to relieve the pressure buildup at the exterior of the transmission fluid cooler tank. If the cooler is
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 111
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
leaking and/or will not hold pressure, install a new cooler.
If leakage is found at the transaxle range selector lever, install a new seal.
If leakage is found at the transaxle internal harness connector, install a new O-ring.
Fluid Leakage in Torque Converter Area
In diagnosing and correcting fluid leaks in the torque converter area, use the following procedures to locate the
exact cause of the leakage. Leakage at the front of the transaxle, as evidenced by fluid around the torque
converter housing, may have several sources. By careful observation it is possible, in many instances, to
pinpoint the source of the leak before removing the transaxle from the vehicle. The paths which the fluid takes
to reach the bottom of the torque converter housing are shown in the illustration. The 5 steps following
correspond with the numbers in the illustration.
Fig. 35: Identifying Torque Converter Fluid Leakage Area
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
1. Transmission fluid leaking by the converter hub seal lip will tend to move along the drive hub and onto
the back of the torque converter. Except in the case of a total seal failure, transmission fluid leakage by
the lip of the seal will be deposited on the inside of the torque converter housing only, near the outside
diameter of the housing.
2. Transmission fluid leakage by the outside diameter of the converter impeller hub seal and the case will
follow the same path that leaks by the inside diameter of the converter hub seal follow.
3. Transmission fluid leakage from the converter cover weld or the converter-to-flexplate stud weld will
appear at outside diameter of torque converter on the back face of the flexplate and in the converter
housing only near the flexplate. If a converter-to-flexplate lug, lug weld or converter cover weld leak is
suspected, remove the converter and pressure check.
4. Transmission fluid leakage from the bolts inside the converter housing will flow down the back of the
torque converter housing. Leakage may be from loose or missing bolts.
5. Engine oil leaks are sometimes incorrectly diagnosed as transaxle converter hub seal leaks. The following
areas of possible leakage should also be checked to determine if engine oil leakage is causing the concern.
1. Leakage at the valve cover gasket may allow engine oil to flow over the torque converter housing
or seep down between the torque converter housing and cylinder block causing oil to be present in
or at the bottom of the torque converter housing.
2. Oil galley plug leaks will allow engine oil to flow down the rear face of the cylinder block to the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 112
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
bottom of the torque converter housing.
3. Leakage at the crankshaft rear oil seal will work back to the flexplate, and then into the torque
converter housing.
4. Leakage at oil pressure sensor will allow engine oil to flow down the rear face of the cylinder block
to the bottom of the torque converter housing.
Leak Check Test
1. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator and note the color of the transmission fluid. Original
factory fill transmission fluid is dyed red to aid in determining if leakage is from the engine or transaxle.
Unless a considerable amount of makeup transmission fluid has been added or the transmission fluid has
been changed, the red color should assist in pinpointing the leak.
2. Remove the torque converter housing cover. Clean off any transmission fluid from the top and bottom of
the torque converter housing, the front of the case and rear face of the engine and oil pan. Clean the
torque converter area by washing with a suitable nonflammable solvent and blow dry with compressed
air.
3. Wash out the torque converter housing, the front of the flexplate and the converter drain plugs. The
torque converter housing may be washed out using cleaning solvent and a squirt-type oil can. Blow all
washed areas dry with compressed air.
4. Start and run the engine until the transaxle reaches its normal operating temperature. Observe the back of
the cylinder block and top of the torque converter housing for evidence of transmission fluid leakage.
Raise the vehicle on a hoist and run the engine at fast idle, then at engine idle, occasionally shifting to the
OVERDRIVE and REVERSE ranges to increase pressure within the transaxle. Observe the front of the
flexplate, back of the cylinder block (in as far as possible) and inside the torque converter housing and
front of the case. Run the engine until transmission fluid leakage is evident and the probable source of
leakage can be determined.
Leak Check Test With Black Light
Dye-Lite® ATF/Power Steering Fluid Leak Detection Dye 164-R3701 (Rotunda) is used to detect a
transmission fluid leak.
1. Add Dye-Lite® ATF/Power Steering Fluid Leak Detection Dye to the transmission fluid. Use one 30.0
mL (1 oz) of dye solution for every 3.8L (4 qt) of transmission fluid.
2. Start and run the engine until the transaxle reaches its normal operating temperature. Observe the back of
the cylinder block and top of the torque converter housing for evidence of fluid leakage. Raise the vehicle
on a hoist and run the engine at fast idle, then at engine idle, occasionally shifting to the DRIVE and
REVERSE ranges to increase pressure within the transaxle. Observe the front of the flexplate, back of the
cylinder block (in as far as possible), inside the torque converter housing and the entire case until fluid
leakage is evident and the probable source of leakage can be determined.
TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 113
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Fig. 36: Transaxle Cooling
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
19712
7F113
3
7F112
4
5
7J081
7H322
Description
Transmission fluid cooler
Transmission fluid cooler outlet tube and
hose assembly
Transmission fluid cooler inlet tube and
hose assembly
Secondary latches
Transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 114
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
6
7
valve
Transmission fluid cooler inlet tube
Transmission fluid cooler outlet tube
7H420
7H420
When internal wear or damage has occurred in the transaxle, metal particles, clutch plate material or band
material may have been carried into the torque converter and transmission fluid cooler. These contaminants are
a major cause of recurring transaxle troubles and must be removed from the system before the transaxle is put
back into use. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning.
Transmission Fluid Cooler Flow Test
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
The selector lever linkage, selector lever cable adjustment, transmission fluid
level and line pressure must be within specification before carrying out this
test. Refer to AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION EXTERNAL
CONTROLS article for selector lever linkage and selector lever cable adjustment
and refer to Special Testing Procedures for line pressure test. The transmission
fluid must be above 82°C (180°F) for the cooler by-pass to open to carry out this
test.
Using a scan tool, run the engine to establish the correct transmission fluid temperature of 82°C (180°F).
Remove the transmission fluid level indicator from the transmission fluid filler tube.
Place funnel in the transmission fluid filler tube.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to JACKING & LIFTING article.
Remove the transmission fluid cooler return tube (rear fitting) from the fitting on the transaxle case.
Connect one end of a hose to the cooler return tube and route other end of the hose up to a point where it
can be inserted into the funnel at the transmission fluid filler tube.
Start the engine and run it at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL position.
When transmission fluid flowing from hose is in a steady stream, a liberal amount of transmission fluid
should be observed. "Liberal" is described as about 1L (1 qt) delivered in 30 seconds. If a liberal flow is
observed, the test is complete.
If the flow is not liberal, stop the engine. Disconnect the hose from the cooler return tube and connect it to
the converter outlet tube fitting (front fitting) on the transaxle case.
Repeat Steps 7 and 8. If flow is now approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, refer to Transmission Fluid
Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning. If the flow is still not approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, repair
the pump and/or the torque converter.
If new transmission fluid cooler tubes need to be installed, refer to TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
COOLING article.
DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 115
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
The Diagnostic Routines give the technician diagnostic information, direction and suggest possible components,
using a symptom as a starting point.
The Diagnostic Routines are divided into 2 categories: Electrical Routines, indicated by 200 series numbers,
and Hydraulic/Mechanical Routines, indicated by 300 series numbers. The Electrical Routines list the possible
electrical components that could cause or contribute to the symptom described. The Hydraulic/Mechanical
Routines list the possible hydraulic or mechanical components that could cause or contribute to the symptom
described.
Diagnosis by Symptom Index Directions
1. Using the Symptom Index, select the Concern/Symptom that best describes the condition.
2. See the routine indicated in the Diagnosis By Symptom Index.
3. Always begin diagnosis of a symptom with:
1. Preliminary inspections.
2. Verifications of condition.
3. Checking the fluid levels.
4. Carry out other test procedures as directed.
NOTE:
Not all concerns and conditions with electrical components will set a DTC.
Be aware that the components listed may still be the cause. Verify correct
function of these components prior to proceeding to the
Hydraulic/Mechanical Routine listed.
4. Begin with the Electrical Routine, if indicated. Follow the reference or action required statements.
Always carry out the OBD tests as required. Never skip steps. Repair as required. If the concern is still
present after electrical diagnosis, then proceed to the Hydraulic/Mechanical Routine listed.
5. The Hydraulic/Mechanical Routines list possible hydraulic or mechanical components that could cause
the concern. These components are listed in the removal sequence and by most probable cause. All
components listed must be inspected to make sure of correct repair.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 116
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Diagnosis by Symptom Index
Routines
Title
Engagement Concerns:
No Forward
No Reverse
Harsh Reverse
Harsh Forward
Delayed/Soft Reverse
Delayed/Soft Forward
No Forward and No Reverse
Delayed/Soft Forward and Reverse
Shift Concerns:
Some or All Shifts Missing
Timing - Early/Late
Timing - Erratic/Hunting
Soft/Slipping
Harsh
No 1st Gear, Engages in Higher Gear
No 1-2 Shift (Automatic)
No 2-3 Shift (Automatic)
No 3-4 Shift (Automatic)
No 4-5 Shift (Automatic)
No 5-6 Shift (Automatic)
No 6-5 Shift (Automatic)
No 5-4 Shift (Automatic)
No 4-3 Shift (Automatic)
No 3-2 Shift (Automatic)
No 2-1 Shift (Automatic)
Soft/Slipping 1-2 Shift (Automatic)
Soft/Slipping 2-3 Shift (Automatic)
Soft/Slipping 3-4 Shift (Automatic)
Soft/Slipping 4-5 Shift (Automatic)
Soft/Slipping 5-6 Shift (Automatic)
Soft/Slipping 6-5 Shift (Automatic)
Soft/Slipping 5-4 Shift (Automatic)
Soft/Slipping 4-3 Shift (Automatic)
Soft/Slipping 3-2 Shift (Automatic)
Soft/Slipping 2-1 Shift (Automatic)
Harsh 1-2 Shift (Automatic)
Harsh 2-3 Shift (Automatic)
Electrical(1)
Hydraulic/
Mechanical
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
209
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
309
210
211
212
213
214
215
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
310
311
312
313
314
315
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 117
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Harsh 3-4 Shift (Automatic)
Harsh 4-5 Shift (Automatic)
Harsh 5-6 Shift (Automatic)
Harsh 6-5 Shift (Automatic)
Harsh 5-4 Shift (Automatic)
Harsh 4-3 Shift (Automatic)
Harsh 3-2 Shift (Automatic)
Harsh 2-1 Shift (Automatic)
Torque Converter Operation Concerns:
Torque Converter: No Apply
Torque Converter: Always Applied/Stalls Vehicle
Torque Converter: Cycling/Shudder/Chatter
Other Concerns
Selector Lever Efforts High
External Leaks
Vehicle Driveability Concerns
Noise/Vibration - Forward or Reverse
Engine Will Not Crank
No Park Range
Overheating
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
250
251
252
350
351
352
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
(1) Carry out electrical routine first.
Diagnostic Routines
ENGAGEMENT CONCERN: NO FORWARD
Possible Component
201 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
No electrical concerns
301 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid Level
Low transmission fluid level
Transmission fluid condition
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal/External)
Damaged or out of adjustment
Reference/Action
Check transmission fluid level and
adjust as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Carry out transmission fluid
condition check. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required. Verify selector lever cable
adjustment. Refer to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 118
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
EXTERNAL CONTROLS article.
Incorrect Pressures
Line Pressure Control (LPC)
solenoid stuck low
Check pressure at line pressure tap.
Carry out Line Pressure Tests and
Stall Speed Tests. Refer to Special
Testing Procedures. See the Line
Pressure Chart for specification. If
pressures are low, check the
following possible components:
Main control valve body
Pump assembly
LPC solenoid
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque specification
Gaskets and Separator Plate damaged, off location
Manual Control Valve - damaged
Adjust bolts to specification.
Inspect gaskets for damage. Install
new as required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Pump Assembly
Bolts out of torque specification
Inspect for damage. Install a new
pump as required.
Porosity/cross leaks/ball missing Inspect for damage. Install a new
or leaking
pump as required.
Components - damaged
Inspect for damage. Install a new
pump as required.
ENGAGEMENT CONCERN: NO REVERSE
Possible Component
202 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
No electrical
concerns
302 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid Level
Low transmission
fluid level
Check transmission fluid level and
adjust as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Transmission fluid Carry out transmission fluid
condition
condition check. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal/External)
Damaged or out of Inspect for damage. Repair as
adjustment
required. Verify selector lever
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 119
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Incorrect Pressures
Line Pressure, Line
Pressure Control
(LPC) Pressure low
Carry out Line Pressure Tests and
Stall Speed Tests. Refer to Special
Testing Procedures. Check
pressure at line pressure tap. See
the Line Pressure Chart for
specifications. If pressures are low,
check the following possible
components:
Main control valve body
Pump assembly
Low/reverse clutch assembly
Direct clutch assembly
Shift Solenoid B (SSB),
Shift Solenoid D (SSD) and
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
solenoids
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gasket and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Manual Control
Valve, Springs stuck, damaged
Multiplex Valve,
Springs - stuck,
damaged
Low/Reverse
Clutch Valve,
Springs - stuck,
damaged
Direct Clutch
Valve, Springs stuck, damaged
Tighten bolts to specification.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Pump Assembly
Bolts out of torque Inspect for damage. Install a new
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 120
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
specification
Porosity/cross
leaks, pump
assembly leaking,
plugged hole
Components
damaged
pump as required.
Inspect for damage. Install a new
pump as required.
Inspect for damage. Install a new
pump as required.
Low/Reverse Clutch Assembly
SSD solenoid stuck Inspect for damage. Install a new
low
solenoid body as required. Refer to
Solenoid Body Assembly.
Low/Reverse
Inspect for damage. Repair as
regulator valve
required.
stuck
Seals, Piston,
Inspect for damage. Repair as
Springs - damaged required.
Clearance check
Inspect for damage. Carry out
out of specification clearance checks.
Friction Elements - Inspect for damage. Repair as
damaged or worn required.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals, Piston,
Spring - damaged
SSB solenoid
Inspect for damage. Repair or
install new as required.
Inspect for damage. Install a new
solenoid body as required. Refer to
Solenoid Body Assembly.
Direct clutch
Inspect for damage. Repair or
regulator valve
install new as required.
Clearance check
Inspect for damage. Carry out
out of specification clearance checks.
Friction Elements - Inspect for damage. Repair as
damaged, clearance required.
check incorrect
ENGAGEMENT CONCERN: HARSH REVERSE
Possible Component
203 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Mass Air Flow
(MAF) Sensor,
Intake Air
Run On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to the
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 121
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Temperature (IAT) A, go to Pinpoint
Test B, go to
Sensor, Throttle
Position (TP) Sensor, Pinpoint Test C and
Idle Speed Control Go to Pinpoint Test
(ISC), Power
E.
Steering Pressure
(PSP) Sensor, Engine
RPM, Line Pressure
Control (LPC)
Solenoid,
Transmission Fluid
Temperature (TFT)
sensor, Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) sensor,
Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) sensor, Shift
Solenoid B (SSB),
Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) or transaxle
solenoid power
control circuit
open/shorted
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Line Pressure, LPC
Solenoid Pressure high
Carry out Line
Pressure and Stall
Speed Tests. Refer to
Special Testing
Procedures. Check
pressure at line
pressure taps. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
high, check the Main
Control Valve Body.
Bolts out of torque
Inspect for damage.
303 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Pump Assembly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 122
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
specification
Install a new pump as
required.
Porosity/cross leaks, Inspect for damage.
pump assembly
Install a new pump as
leaking, plugged hole required.
Components
Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install a new pump as
required.
Main Controls
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gasket and Separator
Plate - damaged, off
location
Low/Reverse
regulator valve stuck, damaged
Low/Reverse boost
valve - stuck,
damaged
Direct regulator
valve - stuck,
damaged
Direct boost valve stuck, damaged
SSB mechanically
stuck - high
SSD mechanically
stuck - high
Main Regulator
Valve - stuck,
damaged
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Low/Reverse Clutch Assembly
SSD solenoid stuck
low
Inspect for damage.
Install a new solenoid
body as required.
Refer to Solenoid
Body Assembly.
Low/Reverse
Inspect for damage.
regulator valve stuck Install a new solenoid
body as required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 123
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Seals, Piston, Springs Inspect for damage.
- damaged
Repair as required.
Clearance check out Inspect for damage.
of specification
Carry out clearance
checks.
Friction Elements - Inspect for damage.
damaged or worn
Repair as required.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals, Piston, Spring Inspect for damage.
- damaged
Repair or install new
as required.
SSB solenoid stuck Inspect for damage.
Install a new solenoid
body as required.
Refer to Solenoid
Body Assembly.
Direct clutch
Inspect for damage.
regulator valve
Repair or install new
as required.
Clearance check out Inspect for damage.
of specification
Carry out clearance
checks.
Friction Elements - Inspect for damage.
damaged, clearance Repair or install new
check incorrect
as required.
ENGAGEMENT CONCERN: HARSH FORWARD
Possible Component
204 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Run On-Board
Inputs/Outputs,
Diagnostic (OBD).
Vehicle Wiring
Refer to the
Harnesses, PCM,
Introduction Gasoline Engines
Mass Air Flow
(MAF) Sensor,
article for diagnosis.
Intake Air
Go to Pinpoint Test
Temperature (IAT) A, go to Pinpoint
Test B, go to
Sensor, Throttle
Position (TP) Sensor, Pinpoint Test C and
Idle Speed Control Go to Pinpoint Test
(ISC), Power
E.
Steering Pressure
(PSP) Sensor, Engine
RPM, Line Pressure
Control (LPC)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 124
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Solenoid,
Transmission Fluid
Temperature (TFT)
sensor, Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) sensor,
Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) sensor, Shift
Solenoid A (SSA) or
transaxle solenoid
power control circuit
open/shorted
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Line Pressure, LPC
Pressure - high
Carry out Line
Pressure and Stall
Speed Tests. Refer to
Special Testing
Procedures. Check
pressure at line
pressure taps. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
high, check the Main
Control Valve Body,
Pump Assembly.
304 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Pump Assembly
Bolts out of torque
specification
Inspect for damage.
Install a new pump as
required.
Porosity/cross leaks, Inspect for damage.
pump assembly
Install a new pump as
leaking, plugged hole required.
Components
Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install a new pump as
required.
Main Controls
Bolts out of torque
Tighten bolts to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 125
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
specification
specification.
Gasket and Separator Inspect for damage.
Plate - damaged, off Install new as
location
required.
Forward Clutch Seal Inspect for damage.
- Leaking Between Install new as
Valve Body and Case required.
Forward clutch
Inspect for damage.
regulator valve Install new as
stuck, damaged
required.
Forward clutch boost Inspect for damage.
valve - stuck,
Install new as
damaged
required.
Main Regulator
Inspect for damage.
Valve - stuck,
Install new as
damaged
required.
Forward Clutch Assembly
Seals, Piston - worn, Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Friction Elements - Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Wave Spring Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
ENGAGEMENT CONCERN: DELAYED/SOFT REVERSE
Possible Component
Reference/Action
205 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD).
Inputs/Outputs,
Refer to the Introduction Transmission Range Gasoline Engines article for
diagnosis. Go to Pinpoint Test A,
(TR) Sensor,
Vehicle Wiring
go to Pinpoint Test B and Go to
Pinpoint Test D.
Harnesses, PCM,
Line Pressure
Control (LPC)
Solenoid,
Transmission Fluid
Temperature (TFT)
sensor
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid Verify solenoid body strategy data
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 126
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
stored in the PCM, download new
identification and strategy as
necessary. Refer to Solenoid Body
Strategy.
305 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid Level
Low transmission
fluid level
Check transmission fluid level and
adjust as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Transmission fluid Carry out transmission fluid
condition
condition check. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal/External)
Damaged, out of
adjustment
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required. Verify selector lever
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Incorrect Pressures
Line Pressure, LPC Check pressure at line pressure tap.
Pressure - low
Carry out Line Pressure and Stall
Speed Tests. Refer to Special
Testing Procedures. If pressures
are low, check the following
possible components: Main
Control Valve Body, Pump
Assembly, Low/Reverse Clutch
Assembly, Direct Clutch
Assembly.
Main Controls
Solenoid Body
Filter Plugged
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Low/Reverse
regulator valve stuck, damaged
Low/Reverse boost
valve - stuck,
damaged
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter as required.
Tighten bolts to specification.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 127
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Direct regulator
valve - stuck,
damaged
Direct boost valve stuck, damaged
Manual Control
Valve, Main
Regulator Valve,
Converter Drain
Back Valve,
Springs - missing,
damaged,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid B
(SSB) stuck low
Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) stuck low
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Repair or
install new as required.
Inspect for damage. Go to
Pinpoint Test A. Install a new
solenoid body as required. Refer to
Solenoid Body Assembly.
Inspect for damage. Install a new
solenoid body as required. Refer to
Solenoid Body Assembly.
Pump Assembly
Pump Assembly worn/cross leaks,
leaking
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Low/Reverse Clutch Assembly
SSD solenoid stuck Inspect for damage. Install a new
low
solenoid body as required. Refer to
Solenoid Body Assembly.
Low/Reverse
Inspect for damage. Install new as
regulator valve
required.
stuck
Seals, Piston,
Inspect for damage. Repair as
Springs - damaged required.
Clearance check out Inspect for damage. Carry out
of specification
clearance checks.
Friction Elements - Inspect for damage. Repair as
damaged or worn required.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals, Piston,
Inspect for damage. Repair or
Spring - damaged install new as required.
SSB solenoid stuck Inspect for damage. Install a new
solenoid body as required. Refer to
Solenoid Body Assembly.
Direct clutch
Inspect for damage. Repair or
regulator valve
install new as required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 128
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Clearance check out
of specification
Friction Elements damaged, clearance
check incorrect
Inspect for damage. Carry out
clearance checks.
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
ENGAGEMENT CONCERN: DELAYED/SOFT FORWARD
Possible Component
Reference/Action
206 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD).
Inputs/Outputs,
Refer to the Introduction Transmission Range Gasoline Engines article for
diagnosis. Go to Pinpoint Test A,
(TR) Sensor,
Vehicle Wiring
go to Pinpoint Test B, go to
Pinpoint Test C and Go to
Harnesses, PCM,
Pinpoint Test D.
Line Pressure
Control (LPC)
Solenoid,
Transmission Fluid
Temperature (TFT)
sensor, Turbine
Shaft Speed (TSS)
sensor
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid Verify solenoid body strategy data
body strategy data stored in the PCM, download new
stored in the PCM identification and strategy as
necessary. Refer to Solenoid Body
Strategy.
306 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid Level
Low transmission Check transmission fluid level and
fluid level
adjust as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Transmission fluid Carry out transmission fluid
condition
condition check. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Selector Lever Linkage
Damaged, out of
Inspect for damage. Repair as
adjustment
required. Verify selector lever
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 129
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
article.
Incorrect Pressures
Line Pressure, Line
Pressure Control
(LPC) Pressure low
Check pressure at line pressure tap.
Carry out Line Pressure and Stall
Speed Tests. Refer to Special
Testing Procedures. If pressures
are low, check the following
possible components: Main
Control Valve Body, Pump
Assembly, and Forward Clutch.
Plugged Solenoid
Body Filter
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Forward Clutch
Regulator Valve
stuck or damaged
Forward Clutch
Boost Valve stuck
or damaged
Main Regulator
Valve - stuck,
damaged, missing
LPC solenoid stuck
low
SSA stuck low
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Tighten bolts to specification.
Main Controls
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Install a new solenoid body. Refer
to Solenoid Body Assembly.
Install a new solenoid body. Refer
to Solenoid Body Assembly.
Pump Assembly
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to specification.
specification
Worn/cross leaks Inspect for wear and leaks. Install
new as required.
Forward Clutch Assembly
Clutch Plates, Seals, Inspect clutches, seals and piston
Piston - worn,
for damage. Install new as
damaged
required.
Wave Spring Inspect for damage. Install new as
damaged
required.
ENGAGEMENT CONCERN: NO FORWARD AND NO REVERSE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 130
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Possible Component
207 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Reference/Action
No electrical
concerns
307 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid Level
Low transmission
fluid level
Check transmission fluid level and
adjust as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Transmission fluid Carry out transmission fluid
condition
condition check. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Halfshaft
Splines - worn,
damaged
Shaft misassembled,
incorrect
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Damaged, out of
adjustment
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required. Verify selector lever
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Line Pressure, Line
Pressure Control
(LPC) Pressure low
Carry out Line Pressure and Stall
Tests. Check pressure at the line
pressure tap. See the Line Pressure
Chart for specifications. If
pressures are low, check the
following possible components:
Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal
Assembly, Main Control, Pump
Assembly, Low/Reverse Clutch
Assembly, Forward Clutch
Assembly.
Plugged, damaged,
not correctly seated
Filter, Seal damaged
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter and seal assembly.
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter and seal assembly.
Solenoid Body
Inspect for damage. Install a new
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal/External)
Incorrect Pressures
Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal Assembly
Main Controls
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 131
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Filter Plugged
Manual Valve
filter as required.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Shift Valves
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to specification.
specification
Gaskets and
Inspect for damage. Install new as
Separator Plate required.
damaged, off
location
Main Regulator
Inspect for damage. Repair as
Valve (only if line required.
pressure is out of
specification) damaged
Components Inspect for damage. Repair as
damaged, check
required.
balls stuck
Pump Assembly
Bolts out of torque
specification
Porosity/cross leaks
- leaking, plugged
hole
Components
damaged - Chain,
Sprocket or Shaft
Broken
Tighten bolts to specification.
Install a new pump assembly.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Output Shaft
Splines - damaged Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Other Possible Components
Turbine Shaft
Pump Shaft,
Sprockets and
Drive Chain
Flexplate
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Sun Gear and Shell Inspect for damage. Repair as
Assemblies
required.
Planetaries
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Final Drive
Inspect for damage. Repair as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 132
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Assembly
required.
ENGAGEMENT CONCERN: DELAYED/SOFT FORWARD AND REVERSE
Possible Component
Reference/Action
209 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD).
Inputs/Outputs,
Refer to Introduction - Gasoline
Transmission Range Engines article for diagnosis. Go
(TR) Sensor,
to Pinpoint Test A, go to
Transmission Fluid Pinpoint Test B, go to Pinpoint
Temperature (TFT) Test C and Go to Pinpoint Test
D.
Sensor, Turbine
Shaft Speed (TSS)
Sensor, Line
Pressure Control
(LPC) Solenoid,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid Verify solenoid body strategy data
body strategy data stored in the PCM, download new
stored in the PCM identification and strategy as
necessary. Refer to Solenoid Body
Strategy.
309 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid Level
Low transmission Check transmission fluid level and
fluid level
adjust as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Transmission fluid Carry out transmission fluid
condition
condition check. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal/External)
Damaged, out of
Inspect for damage. Repair as
adjustment
required. Verify selector lever
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Incorrect Pressures
Line Pressure, LPC Carry out Line Pressure and Stall
Pressure - low
Speed Tests. Refer to Special
Testing Procedures. See the Line
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 133
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Pressure Chart for specifications.
If pressures are low, check the
following possible components:
Main Control, Pump Assembly
and LPC solenoid.
Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal Assembly
Plugged, damaged,
not correctly seated
Filter, Seal damaged
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter and seal assembly.
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter and seal assembly.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Seals, Manual
Valve, Main
Regulator Valve missing, damaged
or misassembled
Tighten bolts to specification.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Worn/cross leaks leaking
Components
damaged
Tighten bolts to specification.
Main Controls
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Repair or
install new as required.
Pump Assembly
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOME OR ALL SHIFTS MISSING
Possible Component
210 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Shift Solenoid A
(SSA), Shift
Solenoid B (SSB),
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC), Shift
Solenoid D (SSD),
Shift Solenoid E
Install a new pump assembly.
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Reference/Action
Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to the Introduction Gasoline Engines article for
diagnosis. Go to Pinpoint Test A,
go to Pinpoint Test C and Go to
Pinpoint Test D.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 134
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
(SSE), Throttle
Position (TP)
sensor, Mass Air
Flow (MAF) sensor,
Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) sensor,
Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) sensor,
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor, Line
Pressure Control
(LPC) Solenoid
310 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid Level
Incorrect
Check transmission fluid level and
transmission fluid adjust as necessary. Refer to
level
Preliminary Inspection.
Transmission fluid Carry out transmission fluid
condition
condition check. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal/External)
Damaged, out of
Inspect for damage. Repair as
adjustment
required. Verify selector lever
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Vehicle Speed Input
Insufficient, erratic Inspect for damage. Repair as
or no input received required. Go to Pinpoint Test C.
by the PCM from
the OSS sensor
Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal Assembly
Plugged, damaged, Inspect for damage. Install a new
not correctly seated filter and seal assembly.
Filter, Seal Inspect for damage. Install a new
damaged
filter and seal assembly.
Main Controls
Regulator and/or
Inspect for damage. Repair or
Boost Valves install new as required.
stuck, damaged,
misassembled
Plugged Solenoid Inspect for damage. Install new as
Body Filter
required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 135
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
End Cover
End Cover Gasket - Inspect for damage. Repair or
leaking
install new as required.
Planetary Gear Sets
Damaged
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Damaged
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Clutches
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
See the appropriate shift concern
and routine:
One-Way Clutch Assembly
Other Components
Output Shafts
(Differential)
Powerflow
Components
Go to Shift
Concerns:
SHIFT CONCERNS: TIMING - EARLY/LATE
Possible Component
211 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Shift Concern: No 1-2,
Routine 220/320
Shift Concern: No 2-3,
Routine 221/321
Shift Concern: No 3-4,
Routine 222/322
Shift Concern: No 4-5,
Routine 223/323
Shift Concern: No 5-6,
Routine 224/324
Shift Concern: No 6-5,
Routine 225/325
Shift Concern: No 5-4,
Routine 226/326
Shift Concern: No 4-3,
Routine 227/327
Shift Concern: No 3-2,
Routine 228/328
Shift Concern: No 2-1,
Routine 229/329
Reference/Action
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 136
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD).
Inputs/Outputs,
Refer to Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article for diagnosis. Go
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
to Pinpoint Test A, go to
Shift Solenoid A
Pinpoint Test B and Go to
(SSA), Shift
Pinpoint Test C.
Solenoid B (SSB),
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC), Shift
Solenoid D (SSD),
Shift Solenoid E
(SSE), Throttle
Position (TP)
sensor, Mass Air
Flow (MAF) sensor,
Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) sensor,
Intake Air
Temperature (IAT)
sensor, Engine
Coolant
Temperature (ECT)
sensor,
Transmission Fluid
Temperature (TFT)
sensor, Turbine
Shaft Speed (TSS)
sensor, Internal
Wire Harness, Line
Pressure Control
(LPC) Solenoid
Carry out Shift Point Road Test.
Refer to Shift Point Road Test
and carry out Torque Converter
Operation Test. Refer to Torque
Converter Diagnosis.
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
311 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Other
Tire Size
Verify solenoid body strategy data
stored in the PCM, download new
identification and strategy as
necessary. Refer to Solenoid Body
Strategy.
See the specification decal and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 137
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
verify vehicle has original
equipment. Changes in tire size
will affect shift timing.
Transmission Fluid Level
Low transmission
fluid level
Check transmission fluid level and
adjust as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Transmission fluid Carry out transmission fluid
condition
condition check. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal/External)
Damaged, out of
adjustment
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required. Verify selector lever
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Plugged Solenoid
Body Filter
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Valves,
Accumulators,
Seals, Springs,
Clips, Check balls damaged, missing,
misassembled
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Tighten bolts to specification.
Main Controls
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
See the appropriate shift concern
and routine for further diagnosis:
Shift Concern: Soft/Slipping
1-2, Routine 230/330
Shift Concern: Soft/Slipping
2-3, Routine 231/331
Shift Concern: Soft/Slipping
3-4, Routine 232/332
Shift Concern: Soft/Slipping
4-5, Routine 233/333
Shift Concern: Soft/Slipping
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 138
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
5-6, Routine 234/334
Shift Concern: Soft/Slipping
6-5, Routine 235/335
Shift Concern: Soft/Slipping
5-4, Routine 236/336
Shift Concern: Soft/Slipping
4-3, Routine 237/337
Shift Concern: Soft/Slipping
3-2, Routine 238/338
Shift Concern: Soft/Slipping
2-1, Routine 239/339
End Cover
End Cover Gasket - Inspect for damage. Repair or
leaking
install new as required.
Planetary Gear Sets
Damaged
Inspect for damage. Repair or
install new as required.
Damaged
Inspect for damage. Repair or
install new as required.
Clutches
Inspect for damage. Repair or
install new as required.
Inspect for damage. Repair or
install new as required.
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
One-Way Clutch Assembly
Other Components
Output Shaft
(Differential)
Powerflow
Components
Vehicle Speed Input
Insufficient, erratic Inspect for damage. Repair as
or no input received required. Go to Pinpoint Test C.
by the PCM from
the OSS or TSS
sensors
Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal Assembly
Plugged, damaged,
not correctly seated
Filter, Seal damaged
SHIFT CONCERNS: TIMING - ERRATIC/HUNTING
Possible Component
212 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter and seal assembly.
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter and seal assembly.
Reference/Action
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 139
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Electrical
Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD).
Inputs/Outputs,
Refer to Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article for diagnosis. Go
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
to Pinpoint Test A, go to
Torque Converter Pinpoint Test B, go to Pinpoint
Clutch (TCC) and Test C, Go to Pinpoint Test D
Shift Solenoid A
and Go to Pinpoint Test E.
(SSA), Shift
Solenoid B (SSB),
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC), Shift
Solenoid D (SSD),
Shift Solenoid E
(SSE), Throttle
Position (TP)
sensor, Output Shaft
Speed (OSS)
sensor, Engine
Coolant
Temperature (ECT)
sensor, Intake Air
Temperature (IAT)
sensor, Mass Air
Flow (MAF) sensor,
Transmission Range
(TR) sensor,
Transmission Fluid
Temperature (TFT)
sensor, Turbine
Shaft Speed (TSS)
sensor
Carry out Shift Point Road Test.
Refer to Shift Point Road Test
and carry out Torque Converter
Operation Test. Refer to Torque
Converter Diagnosis.
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
312 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid Level
Low transmission
fluid level
Verify solenoid body strategy data
stored in the PCM, download new
identification and strategy as
necessary. Refer to Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Check transmission fluid level and
adjust as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 140
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Transmission fluid Carry out transmission fluid
condition
condition check. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal/External)
Damaged, out of
adjustment
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required. Verify selector lever
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Plugged Solenoid
Body Filter
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Valves, Seals,
Clips, Check Ball stuck, damaged,
contaminated
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Tighten bolts to specification.
Main Control Valve Body
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage. Repair or
install new as required.
End Cover
End Cover Gasket - Inspect for damage. Repair or
leaking
install new as required.
Vehicle Speed Input
Insufficient, erratic Inspect for damage. Repair as
or no input received required. Go to Pinpoint Test C.
by the PCM from
the OSS or TSS
sensor
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
See Torque Converter Cycling
(Routine 254/354).
Planetary Gear Sets
Damaged
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required.
Damaged Clutch
Plates, Pistons,
Seals, Return
Springs
Inspect for damage. Repair or
install new as required.
Clutch Assemblies
Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal Assembly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 141
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Plugged, damaged,
not correctly seated
Filter, Seal damaged
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter and seal assembly.
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter and seal assembly.
For Diagnosis Related to a Specific Shift
See the appropriate shift concern
and routine for further diagnosis:
Shift Concern: No 1-2,
Routine 220/320
Shift Concern: No 2-3,
Routine 221/321
Shift Concern: No 3-4,
Routine 222/322
Shift Concern: No 4-5,
Routine 223/323
Shift Concern: No 5-6,
Routine 224/324
Shift Concern: No 6-5,
Routine 225/325
Shift Concern: No 5-4,
Routine 226/326
Shift Concern: No 4-3,
Routine 227/327
Shift Concern: No 3-2,
Routine 228/328
Shift Concern: No 2-1,
Routine 229/329
Shift Concern: Soft/Slip 1-2,
Routine 230/330
Shift Concern: Soft/Slip 2-3,
Routine 231/331
Shift Concern: Soft/Slip 3-4,
Routine 232/332
Shift Concern: Soft/Slip 4-5,
Routine 233/333
Shift Concern: Soft/Slip 5-6,
Routine 234/334
Shift Concern: Soft/Slip 6-5,
Routine 235/335
Shift Concern: Soft/Slip 5-4,
Routine 236/336
Shift Concern: Soft/Slip 4-3,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 142
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Routine 237/337
Shift Concern: Soft/Slip 3-2,
Routine 238/338
Shift Concern: Soft/Slip 2-1,
Routine 239/339
Shift Concern: Harsh 1-2,
Routine 240/340
Shift Concern: Harsh 2-3,
Routine 241/341
Shift Concern: Harsh 3-4,
Routine 242/342
Shift Concern: Harsh 4-5,
Routine 243/343
Shift Concern: Harsh 5-6,
Routine 244/344
Shift Concern: Harsh 6-5,
Routine 245/345
Shift Concern: Harsh 5-4,
Routine 246/346
Shift Concern: Harsh 4-3,
Routine 247/347
Shift Concern: Harsh 3-2,
Routine 248/348
Shift Concern: Harsh 2-1,
Routine 249/349
SHIFT CONCERNS: FEEL - SOFT/SLIPPING
Possible Component
Reference/Action
213 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD).
Inputs/Outputs,
Refer to Introduction - Gasoline
Vehicle Wiring
Engines article for diagnosis. Go
Harnesses, PCM,
to Pinpoint Test A, go to
Pinpoint Test B and Go to
Line Pressure
Control (LPC)
Pinpoint Test C.
Solenoid, Mass Air
Flow (MAF) sensor,
Throttle Position
(TP) sensor, Engine
Coolant
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 143
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Temperature (ECT)
sensor, Intake Air
Temperature (IAT)
sensor,
Transmission Fluid
Temperature (TFT)
sensor, Turbine
Shaft Speed (TSS)
sensor, Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) sensor
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Verify solenoid body strategy data
stored in the PCM, download new
identification and strategy as
necessary. Refer to Solenoid Body
Strategy.
313 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid
Low transmission
fluid level
Check transmission fluid level and
adjust as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Transmission fluid Carry out transmission fluid
condition
condition check. Refer to
Preliminary Inspection.
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal/External)
Damaged, out of
adjustment
Inspect for damage. Repair as
required. Verify selector lever
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Incorrect Pressures
Low LPC pressure Check pressures at line pressure
taps. Carry out Line Pressure and
Stall Speed Tests. Refer to Special
Testing Procedures. See the Line
Pressure Chart for specification. If
pressures are low or all shifts are
soft/slipping refer to Main
Control.
If pressures are OK and a specific
shift is soft/slipping, see the
following chart:
Soft/Slipping Shift 1-2,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 144
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Routine 230/330
Soft/Slipping Shift 2-3,
Routine 231/331
Soft/Slipping Shift 3-4,
Routine 232/332
Soft/Slipping Shift 4-5,
Routine 233/333
Soft/Slipping Shift 5-6,
Routine 234/334
Soft/Slipping Shift 6-5,
Routine 235/335
Soft/Slipping Shift 5-4,
Routine 236/336
Soft/Slipping Shift 4-3,
Routine 237/337
Soft/Slipping Shift 3-2,
Routine 238/338
Soft/Slipping Shift 2-1,
Routine 239/339
Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal Assembly
Plugged, damaged,
not correctly seated
Filter, Seal damaged
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter and seal assembly.
Inspect for damage. Install a new
filter and seal assembly.
Main Controls
Plugged Solenoid Inspect for damage. Install new as
Body Filter
required.
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to specification.
specification
Gaskets and
Inspect for damage. Install new as
Separator Plate required.
damaged, off
location
Sticking or Binding Inspect for damage. Repair or
Valves, Check
install new as required.
Balls, Clips, Springs
- damaged, missing
Pump Assembly
Pump Assembly worn/cross leaks,
leaking
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: FEEL - HARSH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 145
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Possible Component
214 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Run On-Board
Inputs/Outputs,
Diagnostic (OBD).
Vehicle Wiring
Refer to
Harnesses, PCM,
Introduction Line Pressure
Gasoline Engines
Control (LPC)
article for diagnosis.
Solenoid, Mass Air Go to Pinpoint Test
Flow (MAF) sensor, A, go to Pinpoint
Throttle Position
Test B, go to
(TP) sensor, Output Pinpoint Test C and
Shaft Speed (OSS) Go to Pinpoint Test
sensor, Turbine Shaft D.
Speed (TSS) sensor,
Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT)
sensor, Intake Air
Temperature (IAT)
sensor, Power
Steering Pressure
(PSP) switch,
Transmission Fluid
Temperature (TFT)
sensor, Transmission
Range (TR) Sensor,
Shift Solenoid A
(SSA), Shift
Solenoid B (SSB),
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC), Shift Solenoid
D (SSD) and Shift
Solenoid E (SSE)
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Low transmission
Check transmission
314 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid Level
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 146
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
fluid level
Transmission fluid
condition
fluid level and adjust
as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary
Inspection.
Carry out
transmission fluid
condition check.
Refer to Preliminary
Inspection.
Incorrect Pressures
High LPC pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
pressures are high or
all shifts are harsh, go
to Main Control.
Refer to Main
Control. If pressures
are OK and a specific
shift is harsh. See the
appropriate shift
routine in the
following chart:
Shift 1-2,
Routine
240/340
Shift 2-3,
Routine
241/341
Shift 3-4,
Routine
242/342
Shift 4-5,
Routine
243/343
Shift 5-6,
Routine
244/344
Shift 6-5,
Routine
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 147
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
245/345
Shift 5-4,
Routine
246/346
Shift 4-3,
Routine
247/347
Shift 3-2,
Routine
248/348
Shift 2-1,
Routine
249/349
Main Control Valve Body
Plugged Solenoid
Body Filter
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Valves, Springs,
Inspect for damage.
Clips, Check Balls - Repair or install new
stuck, damaged
as required.
Pump Assembly
Pump Assembly worn/cross leaks,
leaking
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 1ST GEAR, ENGAGES IN HIGHER GEAR
Possible Component
Reference/Action
215 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Run On-Board
Inputs/Outputs,
Diagnostic (OBD).
Vehicle Wiring
Refer to
Harnesses, PCM,
Introduction Shift Solenoid A
Gasoline Engines
(SSA), Shift
article for diagnosis.
Solenoid B (SSB), Go to Pinpoint Test
Shift Solenoid C
A, Go to Pinpoint
(SSC), Shift Solenoid Test C and Go to
D (SSD), Shift
Pinpoint Test E.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 148
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Solenoid E (SSE),
Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) sensor and
Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) sensor,
transaxle solenoid
power control circuit
- no voltage at
transaxle connector
Repair as required.
Clear codes. Road
Test and rerun OnBoard Diagnostic
(OBD).
Plugged Solenoid
Body Filter (SSA
Filter Plate)
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Forward Clutch
Regulator Valve,
Springs, Clips stuck, damaged,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid stuck, damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
315 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Inspect for damage.
Repair as required.
Inspect for damage.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A. Repair as required.
Activate solenoid
using the scan tool.
Repair as required.
For diagnosis related See the following
to a specific gear, use routines:
the scan tool to select
the gear
Shift 1-2,
Routine
220/320
Shift 2-3,
Routine
221/321
Shift 3-4,
Routine
222/322
Shift 4-5,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 149
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Routine
223/323
Shift 5-6,
Routine
224/324
Mechanical
Clutches or Seals damaged or worn
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 1-2 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
220 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Reference/Action
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC) and
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor
Run On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A and Go to Pinpoint
Test D.
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control. Refer to
Main Control.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Intermediate
Regulator Valve,
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
320 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Main Control Valve Body
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 150
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Springs, Clips as required.
loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled stuck
off
SSC not functioning Activate solenoid
correctly
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly - Failed Off
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Low/Reverse Clutch Assembly - Failed On
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - overheated Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:25 AM
Page 151
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Pump Assembly
Worn/cross leaks
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Component damaged Inspect for damage.
Install a new pump
assembly as required.
Low One-Way Clutch Assembly
Not overrunning,
damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Planetary Carrier
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 2-3 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
221 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Shift Solenoid B
(SSB) Failed, Shift
Solenoid C (SSC)
Stuck On and
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor
Run On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A and Go to Pinpoint
Test D.
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control. Refer to
Main Control.
321 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 152
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, stuck
off
Intermediate
Regulator and Boost
Valves, Springs,
Clips - loose, stuck,
missing,
misassembled, stuck
on
SSB or SSC not
functioning correctly
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly - Failed Off
Seals - damaged
Piston - damaged
Friction - damaged,
worn
Cylinder Hub -
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 153
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly - Failed On
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 3-4 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
222 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) Failed, Shift
Solenoid B (SSB)
Stuck On and
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor
Run On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A and Go to Pinpoint
Test D.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Overdrive Regulator
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
322 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 154
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
and Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed off
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed on
SSD not functioning
correctly, SSB stuck
on
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Overdrive Clutch Assembly - Failed Off
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Direct Clutch Assembly - Failed On
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 155
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 4-5 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
Reference/Action
223 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD).
Inputs/Outputs,
Refer to Introduction - Gasoline
Vehicle Wiring
Engines article for diagnosis. Go
Harnesses, PCM,
to Pinpoint Test A and Go to
Shift Solenoid B
Pinpoint Test D.
(SSB) Failed, Shift
Solenoid A (SSA)
Stuck On,
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)/Overdrive (O/D) Cancel
Switch
Switch control
Refer to AUTOMATIC
circuit open/shorted, TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
switch damaged
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
323 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to specification.
specification
Gaskets and
Inspect for damage. Install new as
Separator Plate required.
damaged, off
location
Direct Regulator
Inspect for damage. Repair or
and Boost Valves, install new as required.
Springs, Clips loose, stuck,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 156
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
missing,
misassembled,
clutch failed off
Forward Regulator Inspect for damage. Repair or
and Boost Valves, install new as required.
Springs, Clips loose, stuck,
missing,
misassembled,
clutch failed on
SSB not functioning Activate solenoid using scan tool.
correctly, SSA
Refer to Output State Control
stuck on
(OSC) Mode. Go to Pinpoint Test
A. Install a new solenoid body.
Refer to Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download a new
solenoid body strategy into the
PCM. Refer to Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly - Failed Off
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage. Install new as
worn
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage. Install new as
damaged
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage. Install new as
Assembly required.
damaged
Forward Clutch Assembly - Failed On
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage. Install new as
worn
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage. Install new as
damaged
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage. Install new as
Assembly required.
damaged
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 5-6 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 157
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Possible Component
224 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD).
Inputs/Outputs,
Refer to Introduction - Gasoline
Vehicle Wiring
Engines article for diagnosis. Go
Harnesses, PCM,
to Pinpoint Test A and Go to
Shift Solenoid C
Pinpoint Test D.
(SSC) Failed, Shift
Solenoid B (SSB)
Stuck On,
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)/Overdrive (O/D) Cancel
Switch
Switch control
Refer to AUTOMATIC
circuit open/shorted, TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
switch damaged
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
324 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to specification.
specification
Gaskets and
Inspect for damage. Install new as
Separator Plate required.
damaged, off
location
Intermediate
Inspect for damage. Repair or
Regulator and Boost install new as required.
Valves, Springs,
Clips - loose, stuck,
missing,
misassembled,
clutch failed off
Direct Regulator
Inspect for damage. Repair or
and Boost Valves, install new as required.
Springs, Clips loose, stuck,
missing,
misassembled,
clutch failed on
SSC not functioning Activate solenoid using scan tool.
correctly, SSB stuck Refer to Output State Control
on
(OSC) Mode. Go to Pinpoint Test
A. Install a new solenoid body.
Refer to Solenoid Body
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 158
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Assembly. Download a new
solenoid body strategy into the
PCM. Refer to Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly - Failed Off
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage. Install new as
worn
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage. Install new as
damaged
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage. Install new as
Assembly required.
damaged
Direct Clutch Assembly - Failed On
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged Inspect for damage. Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage. Install new as
worn
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage. Install new as
damaged
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage. Install new as
Assembly required.
damaged
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 6-5 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
225 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Shift Solenoid B
(SSB) Failed, Shift
Solenoid C (SSC)
Stuck On,
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor
Run On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A and Go to Pinpoint
Test D.
325 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 159
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Intermediate
Regulator and Boost
Valves, Springs,
Clips - loose, stuck,
missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed on
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed off
SSC not functioning
correctly, SSB stuck
on
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly - Failed On
Seals - damaged
Piston - damaged
Friction - damaged,
worn
Cylinder Hub damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 160
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Direct Clutch Assembly - Failed Off
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 5-4 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
226 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Shift Solenoid A
(SSA) Failed, Shift
Solenoid B (SSB)
Stuck On,
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor
Run On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A and Go to Pinpoint
Test D.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
326 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 161
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed on
Forward Regulator
and Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed off
SSA not functioning
correctly, SSB stuck
on
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly - Failed On
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Forward Clutch Assembly - Failed Off
Seals - damaged
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 162
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 4-3 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
227 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Shift Solenoid B
(SSB) Failed, Shift
Solenoid D (SSD)
Stuck On,
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor
Run On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A and Go to Pinpoint
Test D.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Overdrive Regulator
and Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed on
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
327 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 163
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
failed off
SSB not functioning Activate solenoid
correctly, SSD stuck using scan tool. Refer
on
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Overdrive Clutch Assembly - Failed On
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Direct Clutch Assembly - Failed Off
Seals - damaged
Piston - damaged
Friction - damaged,
worn
Cylinder Hub damaged
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 164
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 3-2 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
228 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC) Failed, Shift
Solenoid B (SSB)
Stuck On,
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor
Run On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A and Go to Pinpoint
Test D.
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control Valve Body.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, stuck
on
Intermediate
Regulator and Boost
Valves, Springs,
Clips - loose, stuck,
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
328 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Main Control Valve Body
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 165
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
missing,
misassembled, stuck
off
SSB or SSC not
Activate solenoid
functioning correctly using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly - Failed On
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly - Failed Off
Seals - damaged
Piston - damaged
Friction - damaged,
worn
Cylinder Hub damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 166
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: NO 2-1 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
229 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Reference/Action
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC) Stuck On,
Transmission Range
(TR) Sensor
Run On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A and Go to Pinpoint
Test D.
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control Valve Body.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Intermediate
Regulator Valve,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, stuck
on
SSC not functioning
correctly, stuck on
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
329 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Main Control Valve Body
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 167
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly - Failed On
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Low One-Way Clutch Assembly
Damaged - Not
holding
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Planetary Carrier
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOFT/SLIPPING 1-2 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
230 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 168
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
330 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control Valve Body.
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to
specification
specification.
Gaskets and
Inspect for damage.
Separator Plate Install new as
damaged, off
required.
location
Intermediate
Inspect for damage.
Regulator Valve,
Repair or install new
Springs, Clips as required.
loose, stuck, missing,
binding,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid C
Activate solenoid
(SSC) not
using scan tool. Refer
functioning correctly to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 169
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Pump Assembly
Worn/cross leaks
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Component damaged Inspect for damage.
Install a new pump
assembly if required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOFT/SLIPPING 2-3 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
231 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
331 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 170
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
not OK, check Main
Control. Refer to
Main Control.
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to
specification
specification.
Gaskets and
Inspect for damage.
Separator Plate Install new as
damaged, off
required.
location
Direct Regulator and Inspect for damage.
Boost Valves,
Repair or install new
Springs, Clips as required.
loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Intermediate
Inspect for damage.
Regulator and Boost Repair or install new
Valves, Springs,
as required.
Clips - loose, stuck,
binding, missing,
misassembled
Multiplex Valve,
Inspect for damage.
Springs, Clips Repair or install new
loose, stuck, missing, as required.
binding
misassembled
Shift Solenoid B
Activate solenoid
(SSB) or Shift
using scan tool. Refer
Solenoid C (SSC)
to Output State
Control (OSC)
not functioning
Mode. Go to
correctly
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 171
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOFT/SLIPPING 3-4 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
232 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
332 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 172
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Overdrive Regulator
and Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) or Shift
Solenoid B (SSB)
not functioning
correctly
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Overdrive Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 173
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
required.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOFT/SLIPPING 4-5 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
233 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
333 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Forward Regulator
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 174
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
and Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid B
(SSB) or Shift
Solenoid A (SSA)
not functioning
correctly
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Forward Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Piston - damaged
Friction - damaged,
worn
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 175
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Cylinder Hub damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOFT/SLIPPING 5-6 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
234 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
334 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Intermediate
Regulator and Boost
Valves, Springs,
Clips - loose, stuck,
binding, missing,
misassembled
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC) or Shift
Solenoid B (SSB)
not functioning
correctly
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 176
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOFT/SLIPPING 6-5 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
235 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Reference/Action
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 177
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Intermediate
Regulator and Boost
Valves, Springs,
Clips - loose, stuck,
binding, missing,
misassembled
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC) or Shift
Solenoid B (SSB)
not functioning
correctly
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
335 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 178
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOFT/SLIPPING 5-4 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
236 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
336 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
Tighten bolts to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 179
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
specification
specification.
Gaskets and
Inspect for damage.
Separator Plate Install new as
damaged, off
required.
location
Direct Regulator and Inspect for damage.
Boost Valves,
Repair or install new
Springs, Clips as required.
loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed on
Forward Regulator Inspect for damage.
and Boost Valves,
Repair or install new
Springs, Clips as required.
loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed off
Shift Solenoid A
Activate solenoid
(SSA) not
using scan tool. Refer
functioning correctly, to Output State
Shift Solenoid B
Control (OSC)
(SSB) stuck on
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Piston - damaged
Friction - damaged,
worn
Cylinder Hub damaged
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 180
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Forward Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOFT/SLIPPING 4-3 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
237 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
337 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Overdrive Regulator
and Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 181
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed off
Shift Solenoid B
(SSB) or Shift
Solenoid D (SSD)
not functioning
correctly
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Overdrive Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Piston - damaged
Friction - damaged,
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 182
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOFT/SLIPPING 3-2 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
238 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
338 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control Valve Body.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Main Control Valve Body
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 183
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
misassembled
Intermediate
Regulator and Boost
Valves, Springs,
Clips - loose, stuck,
binding, missing,
misassembled
Multiplex Valve,
Spring, Clip - loose,
stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid B
(SSB) or Shift
Solenoid C (SSC)
not functioning
correctly
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 184
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
SHIFT CONCERNS: SOFT/SLIPPING 2-1 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
239 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
339 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control Valve Body.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Main Control Valve Body
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 185
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Intermediate
Regulator Valve,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC) not
functioning correctly
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Low One-Way Clutch Assembly
Damaged - not
holding
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Planetary Carrier
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 186
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
SHIFT CONCERNS: HARSH 1-2 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
240 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
340 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control Valve Body.
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to
specification
specification.
Gaskets and
Inspect for damage.
Separator Plate Install new as
damaged, off
required.
location
Intermediate
Inspect for damage.
Regulator Valve,
Repair or install new
Springs, Clips as required.
loose, stuck, missing,
binding,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid C
Activate solenoid
(SSC) not
using scan tool. Refer
functioning correctly to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 187
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Pump Assembly
Worn/cross leaks
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Component damaged Inspect for damage,
missing ball. Install a
new pump assembly
if required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: HARSH 2-3 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
241 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
341 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 188
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control Valve Body.
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to
specification
specification.
Gaskets and
Inspect for damage.
Separator Plate Install new as
damaged, off
required.
location
Direct Regulator and Inspect for damage.
Boost Valves,
Repair or install new
Springs, Clips as required.
loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Intermediate
Inspect for damage.
Regulator and Boost Repair or install new
Valves, Springs,
as required.
Clips - loose, stuck,
binding, missing,
misassembled
Multiplex Valve,
Inspect for damage.
Springs, Clips Repair or install new
loose, stuck, missing, as required.
binding
misassembled
Shift Solenoid B
Activate solenoid
(SSB) or Shift
using scan tool. Refer
Solenoid C (SSC)
to Output State
Control (OSC)
not functioning
correctly
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 189
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: HARSH 3-4 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
242 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 190
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
342 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Overdrive Regulator
and Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) or Shift
Solenoid B (SSB)
not functioning
correctly
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Overdrive Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Piston - damaged
Friction - damaged,
worn
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 191
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub damaged
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: HARSH 4-5 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
243 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
343 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Direct Regulator and
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:26 AM
Page 192
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Forward Regulator
and Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid B
(SSB) or Shift
Solenoid A (SSA)
not functioning
correctly
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Forward Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 193
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: HARSH 5-6 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
244 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
344 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Intermediate
Regulator and Boost
Valves, Springs,
Clips - loose, stuck,
binding, missing,
misassembled
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 194
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC) or Shift
Solenoid B (SSB)
not functioning
correctly
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 195
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: HARSH 6-5 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
245 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
346 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Intermediate
Regulator and Boost
Valves, Springs,
Clips - loose, stuck,
binding, missing,
misassembled
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC) or Shift
Solenoid B (SSB)
not functioning
correctly
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 196
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: HARSH 5-4 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
246 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 197
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
346 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to
specification
specification.
Gaskets and
Inspect for damage.
Separator Plate Install new as
damaged, off
required.
location
Direct Regulator and Inspect for damage.
Boost Valves,
Repair or install new
Springs, Clips as required.
loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed on
Forward Regulator Inspect for damage.
and Boost Valves,
Repair or install new
Springs, Clips as required.
loose, stuck, missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed off
Shift Solenoid A
Activate solenoid
(SSA) not
using scan tool. Refer
functioning correctly, to Output State
Shift Solenoid B
Control (OSC)
(SSB) stuck on
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Piston - damaged
Friction - damaged,
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 198
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Forward Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: HARSH 4-3 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
247 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
347 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 199
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Overdrive Regulator
and Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled, clutch
failed off
Shift Solenoid B
(SSB) or Shift
Solenoid D (SSD)
not functioning
correctly
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Overdrive Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 200
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: HARSH 3-2 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
248 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
348 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control Valve Body.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Main Control Valve Body
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 201
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
location
Direct Regulator and
Boost Valves,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Intermediate
Regulator and Boost
Valves, Springs,
Clips - loose, stuck,
binding, missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid B
(SSB) or Shift
Solenoid C (SSC)
not functioning
correctly
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Direct Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 202
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
SHIFT CONCERNS: HARSH 2-1 SHIFT (AUTOMATIC)
Possible Component
249 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Solenoid Body
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Reference/Action
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
349 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control Valve Body.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Main Control Valve Body
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 203
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
location
Intermediate
Regulator Valve,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
Shift Solenoid C
(SSC) not
functioning correctly
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
Seals - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Piston - damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Friction - damaged, Inspect for damage.
worn
Install new as
required.
Cylinder Hub Inspect for damage.
damaged
Install new as
required.
Return Spring
Inspect for damage.
Assembly - damaged Install new as
required.
Low One-Way Clutch Assembly
Damaged - not
holding
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Damaged
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Planetary Carrier
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 204
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
TORQUE CONVERTER OPERATION CONCERNS: NO APPLY
Possible Component
250 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Torque Converter
Clutch (TCC)
Solenoid, Throttle
Position (TP) sensor,
Transmission Fluid
Temperature (TFT)
sensor, Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) sensor,
Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) sensor and
shorted shift solenoid
350 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Incorrect Pressures
Line pressure
Reference/Action
Carry out Torque
Converter Operation
Test. Refer to
Torque Converter
Diagnosis. Run OnBoard Diagnostic
(OBD). Refer to
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A, go to Pinpoint
Test B and Go to
Pinpoint Test C.
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control Valve Body.
Main Control Valve Body
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
TCC Regulator
Valve, Springs, Clips
- loose, stuck,
missing,
misassembled
TCC Control Valve,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, missing,
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 205
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
misassembled
TCC Solenoid - not Activate solenoid
functioning correctly using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Turbine Shaft
Seals - damaged,
missing
Holes - missing,
plugged
Inspect for damage.
Repair as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair as required.
Seals - damaged,
missing
Holes - missing,
plugged
Inspect for damage.
Repair as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair as required.
Stator Support Assembly
Torque Converter Hub Bushing
Torque converter hub Inspect the bushing
bushing worn
for damage and
install a new torque
converter as required.
TCC worn
Install a new torque
converter as required.
TORQUE CONVERTER OPERATION CONCERN: ALWAYS APPLIED/STALLS VEHICLE
Possible Component
Reference/Action
251 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Carry out Torque
Inputs/Outputs,
Converter Operation
Vehicle Wiring
Test. Refer to
Harnesses, PCM,
Torque Converter
Torque Converter
Diagnosis. Run OnClutch (TCC)
Board Diagnostic
Solenoid
(OBD). Refer to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 206
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A using the scan tool.
Repair as required.
Clear codes. Road
Test and rerun OnBoard Diagnostic
(OBD).
351 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Main Controls
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
TCC Regulator
Valve, Springs, Clips
- loose, stuck,
binding, missing,
misassembled
TCC Control Valve,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
TCC Solenoid - not
functioning correctly
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect gaskets.
Repair as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
TORQUE CONVERTER OPERATION CONCERN: CYCLING/SHUDDER/CHATTER
Possible Component
Reference/Action
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 207
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
252 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Torque Converter
Clutch (TCC)
Solenoid
Carry out Torque
Converter Operation
Test. Refer to
Torque Converter
Diagnosis. Run OnBoard Diagnostic
(OBD). Refer to
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
A using the scan tool.
Repair as required.
Clear codes. Road
Test and rerun OnBoard Diagnostic
(OBD).
Incorrect solenoid
body strategy data
stored in the PCM
Verify solenoid body
strategy data stored in
the PCM, download
new identification
and strategy as
necessary. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Transmission fluid
condition
Prior to carrying out
this action, make sure
all electrical
diagnostics have been
carried out. Inspect
transmission fluid
condition. If burnt,
drain transmission
fluid and converter.
Install new
transmission fluid
and transmission
fluid filter assembly.
Bring vehicle to
normal operating
temperature. Carry
out Transaxle Drive
Solenoid Body
352 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 208
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Cycle Test. Carry out
On-Board Diagnostic
(OBD). If condition
still exists, continue
diagnostics.
Incorrect Pressures
Line pressure
Check pressure at
line pressure tap.
Carry out Line
Pressure Test. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures. See the
Line Pressure Chart
for specifications. If
not OK, check Main
Control. Refer to
Main Control.
Bolts out of torque
specification
Gaskets and
Separator Plate damaged, off
location
TCC Regulator
Valve, Springs, Clips
- loose, stuck,
binding, missing,
misassembled
TCC Control Valve,
Springs, Clips loose, stuck, binding,
missing,
misassembled
TCC Solenoid - not
functioning correctly
Tighten bolts to
specification.
Inspect gaskets for
damage. Repair as
required.
Main Controls
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Inspect for damage.
Repair or install new
as required.
Activate solenoid
using scan tool. Refer
to Output State
Control (OSC)
Mode. Go to
Pinpoint Test A.
Install a new solenoid
body. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Assembly. Download
a new solenoid body
strategy into the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 209
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
PCM. Refer to
Solenoid Body
Strategy.
Turbine Shaft
Seals - damaged,
missing
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Torque converter
damaged
Refer to Torque
Converter.
Stator support
assembly - worn,
damaged
Stator support seals worn, damaged,
leaking
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Inspect for damage.
Install new as
required.
Torque Converter
Stator Support Assembly
OTHER CONCERNS: SELECTOR LEVER EFFORTS HIGH
Possible Component
Reference/Action
261 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
No electrical
concerns
361 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal, External)
Damaged or out of Inspect for damage. Repair as
adjustment
required. Verify selector lever
adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Manual Control Lever
External Retaining Inspect for damage. Repair or
Pin - damaged, Nut install new as required.
- loose, Detent
Spring - bent,
damaged; or Park
Mechanism damaged, incorrect
lever used
Main Control Valve Body
Manual Valve Inspect for damage. Repair or
stuck
install new as required.
Bolts out of torque Tighten bolts to specification.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 210
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
specification
Brake Shift Interlock
Mechanically
damaged
Transmission
Range (TR) sensor
indicating park
Refer to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Go to Pinpoint Test D.
OTHER CONCERNS: EXTERNAL LEAKS
Possible Component
262 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Reference/Action
No electrical
concerns
362 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid Level
High transmission
fluid level
Transmission fluid
condition
Check transmission
fluid level and adjust
as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary
Inspection.
Carry out
transmission fluid
condition check.
Refer to Preliminary
Inspection.
Seals, Gaskets
Leaks: Converter,
Locate source of leak.
Turbine Shaft Speed Repair as required.
(TSS) Sensor,
Halfshaft Axles,
Gasket/Seal Manual
Lever, Fluid Level
Indicator, Main
Control Cover,
Incorrect Hub Seal
Other
Leaks: Cooler
Locate source of leak.
Fitting, Pressure
Repair as required.
Taps, Transaxle
Connector, Transaxle
Pan, Cooler Tubes,
Case Porosity, Case
Cracked
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 211
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Vent - blocked
damaged
OTHER CONCERNS: POOR VEHICLE PERFORMANCE
Possible Component
263 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Inputs/Outputs,
Vehicle Wiring
Harnesses, PCM,
Torque Converter
Clutch (TCC)
Solenoid, Throttle
Position (TP) sensor,
Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) sensor, Mass
Air Flow (MAF)
sensor, Intake Air
Temperature (IAT)
Sensor, Internal
Wiring Harness
Check vent for
damage or blockage.
Repair as required.
Reference/Action
Run On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
Refer to the
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article for diagnosis.
Go to Pinpoint Test
C using scan tool.
Repair as required.
Clear codes. Road
test and rerun OnBoard Diagnostic
(OBD).
Carry out Shift Point
Road Test. Refer to
Shift Point Road
Test and carry out
Torque Converter
Operation Test. Refer
to Torque Converter
Diagnosis.
363 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid
Low transmission
fluid level
Check transmission
fluid level and adjust
as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary
Inspection.
Verify Correct Shift Scheduling, Engagements, Line Pressures and Stall
Speed
Go to the appropriate
Diagnostic Routines
per Index.
Converter Clutch Always Applied
Go to Routine 351.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 212
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
NVH symptoms should be identified using the diagnostic tools that are
available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of their uses and a glossary of
common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article. Since it is
possible any one of multiple systems may be the cause of a symptom, it may be
necessary to use a process of elimination type of diagnostic approach to
pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the causal system for the
symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article for the
next likely system and continue diagnosis.
OTHER CONCERNS: NOISE/VIBRATION - FORWARD OR REVERSE
Possible Component
264 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
No electrical
concerns
364 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
For Noises/Vibrations That Change With Engine Speed
Converter
components
Reference/Action
Locate source of
disturbance. Repair
as required.
Transmission fluid
level (low) - pump
cavitation.
Pump assembly.
Engine Drive
Accessories
Transmission Fluid
Cooler Tubes
grounding out
Flexplate
For Noises/Vibrations That Change With Vehicle Speed
Engine Mounts loose or damaged
Locate source of
disturbance and
repair as required.
Driveline concerns:
Halfshaft
shudder
CV joints
Suspension
Modifications
Output/Halfshaft
Splines - worn or
damaged
Turbine Shaft Speed Inspect for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 213
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
(TSS) sensor incorrectly installed
Repair as required.
Other Noises/Vibrations
Main Controls Valve resonance
Locate source of
disturbance and
repair as required.
Selector Lever Cable Locate source of
- vibration, grounding disturbance and
repair as required.
Transmission Fluid Locate source of
Cooler Tubes disturbance and
grounding
repair as required.
ABS
Refer to VEHICLE
DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
Power Steering Pump Refer to POWER
STEERING article.
OTHER CONCERNS: ENGINE WILL NOT CRANK
Possible Component
Reference/Action
265 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Powertrain Control System
Electrical
Carry out Torque Converter
Inputs/Outputs,
Operation Test. Refer to Torque
Vehicle Wiring
Converter Diagnosis. Run OnHarnesses, PCM,
Board Diagnostic (OBD). Refer to
Transmission Range the Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article for diagnosis.
(TR) Sensor
365 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal, External)
Damaged or out of Inspect for damage. Repair as
adjustment
required. Verify selector lever
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
OTHER CONCERNS: NO PARK RANGE
Possible Component
266 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Reference/Action
No electrical
concerns
366 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 214
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Selector Lever Linkage (Internal/External)
Damaged or out of Inspect for damage. Repair as
adjustment
required. Verify selector lever
cable adjustment. Refer to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
article.
Park Mechanism
Park Brake Pawl, Inspect for damage. Repair as
Parking Pawl
required.
Return Spring,
Park Rod
Abutment, Parking
Pawl Shaft,
Parking Pawl
Actuating Rod,
Manual Control
Lever, Manual
Lever Detent
Spring - damaged
OTHER CONCERNS: TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING
Possible Component
267 - ELECTRICAL ROUTINE
Reference/Action
No electrical
concerns
367 - HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ROUTINE
Transmission Fluid
Incorrect
transmission fluid
level
Transmission fluid
condition
Check transmission
fluid level and adjust
as necessary. Refer to
Preliminary
Inspection.
Carry out
transmission fluid
condition check.
Refer to Preliminary
Inspection.
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Damaged, blocked,
reversed, leaking
Inspect for damage.
Repair as required.
Damaged, blocked,
restricted or
Inspect for damage.
Repair as required.
Auxiliary Cooler
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 215
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
incorrectly installed
Vehicle Concerns Causing Engine Overheating
Refer to ENGINE
COOLING article.
Main Control Valve Body
Torque Converter
Inspect for damage.
Regulator
Repair as required.
Valve/Spring - stuck,
damaged
Torque Converter
Inspect for damage.
Control Valve/Spring Repair as required.
- stuck, damaged
Torque Converter Not Applying
Seized Converter
One-Way Clutch
(OWC)
See Routine 250/350.
Inspect for damage.
Repair as required.
Excessive Towing Loads
Check GVW.
Idle or Driveability Concern
Refer to the
Introduction Gasoline Engines
article.
Incorrect Clutch Application or Oil Pressure Control System
Carry out line
pressure tests. Refer
to Special Testing
Procedures and carry
out shift point road
test. Refer to Shift
Point Road Test.
Repair as required.
See the Line Pressure
Chart, and Clutch
Application Chart for
specifications. Repair
as required.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER BACKFLUSHING AND CLEANING
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line 222-00004
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 216
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Flusher
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
NOTE:
Specification
MERCON® V
Transmission fluid cooler backflushing will be carried out using the Turbo-Tank
Heated Cooler Line Flusher. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included
with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is
present before proceeding.
1. Check and top off fluid level of the Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher tank with transmission fluid.
2. Allow the fluid in the flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F) before using.
3. Install the line adapters on the transmission fluid cooler tubes.
NOTE:
The FRONT transmission fluid cooler tube on the thermal bypass valve is
the transmission fluid cooler pressure tube.
4. Attach the flusher's red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure tube quick disconnect fitting.
5. Attach the flusher's blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return tube quick disconnect fitting.
6. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the transmission fluid cooler tubes and transmission fluid
cooler prior to starting the flushing procedure.
7. Allow the transmission fluid cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the transmission
fluid cooler in a normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes.
8. Clean the transaxle mounted fluid cooler tubes and the thermal bypass valve by hand.
TRANSMISSION FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL
Material
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 217
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
NOTE:
Specification
MERCON® V
In order to completely clean the torque converter, this procedure needs to be
carried out 3 times.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
NOTE:
If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a
paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found
from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is
present, the transaxle will need to be overhauled.
2. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Fig. 37: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 38: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 218
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
4. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid.
Fig. 39: Filling Transaxle With Clean Transmission Fluid
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Start the engine and let it run for 3 minutes. Move the range selector lever into each gear position. Repeat
Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 two more times.
After the transmission fluid has been changed a total of 3 times, check the transmission fluid level for a
final time, making sure that the transmission fluid is at the correct level.
TORQUE CONVERTER
1. A new or remanufactured torque converter must be installed if one or more of the following statements is
true:
A torque converter malfunction has been determined based on complete diagnostic procedures.
Converter bolt holes, impeller hub or bushing are damaged.
Discoloration (due to overheating).
Evidence of transmission assembly or fluid contamination due to the following transmission or
converter failure modes:
Major metallic failure.
Multiple clutches or clutch plate failures.
Sufficient component wear which results in metallic contamination.
Internal torque converter contamination present. For additional information, refer to Torque
Converter Contamination Inspection.
TORQUE CONVERTER CONTAMINATION INSPECTION
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 219
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Do not use water-based cleaners or mineral spirits to clean or flush the torque
converter or transmission damage will occur. Use only clean automatic
transmission fluid designated for the transmission and converter being
serviced.
1. If a new or remanufactured torque converter is not being installed, the following steps must be completed.
2. With the torque converter on a bench, pour a small amount of transmission fluid from the torque
converter onto an absorbent white tissue or through a paper filter and examine the transmission fluid.
3. Observe the color and odor of the fluid. The fluid should be red, not brown or black. Odor may indicate
an overheating condition such as clutch disc or band failure.
4. Examine the stain on the tissue for evidence of particles of any kind. If particles are present in the
transmission fluid, a new torque converter must be installed.
5. If there are no particles or contamination present, drain the remainder of the transmission fluid from the
torque converter.
6. Add 1.9L (2 qt) of clean transmission fluid into the converter and agitate by hand.
7. Thoroughly drain the transmission fluid.
IN-VEHICLE SERVICING
MAIN CONTROL
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 220
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 40: Main Control & Solenoid Body Components (With Torque Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
14A464
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6758
N606678
9C632
9C662
7A020
W520101
7A228
-
Description
Electrical connector - Mass Air Flow
(MAF) sensor
Tube assembly - crankcase vent
Bolt - Air Cleaner (ACL) bracket
Clamp - ACL outlet pipe
ACL assembly
Transmission fluid level indicator
Transmission fluid filler tube nut
Transmission fluid filler tube
Nut - transmission fluid cooler tube (part
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 221
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
W711538
7H420
7A488
W520101
7H322
7J289
W708442
17
18
19
20
21
7G004
7J291
7Z369
7J291
7A100
of 7H420)
Bolt - transmission fluid cooler tube
Transmission fluid cooler tube
Connector - transaxle harness
Nut - bypass valve
Valve - transaxle fluid cooler bypass
Bolt - solenoid body cover (11 required)
Studbolt - solenoid body cover (3
required)
Cover - solenoid body
Bolt - solenoid body
Solenoid body
Bolt - valve body
Valve body
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from
the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
Fig. 41: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 222
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 42: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly.
Fig. 43: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt.
Fig. 44: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet pipe
assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 223
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 45: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Fig. 46: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 47: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine.
9. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 224
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 48: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
10. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 49: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
11. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the
transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 50: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 225
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 51: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove and discard the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and remove the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Fig. 52: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were
removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission
fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring.
Fig. 53: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 226
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Fig. 54: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it
aside.
Fig. 55: Removing Nuts & Pulling Transmission Fluid Cooler Thermal Bypass Valve Straight Up
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Note the location of the studbolts for assembly.
17. Remove the 14 bolts and the main control cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 227
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 56: Main Control Valve Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
1. Slide the lock over.
2. Press the tab and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 57: Pressing Tab & Disconnecting Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) and Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 228
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 58: Locating Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) & Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Electrical
Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid
body may occur.
NOTE:
Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
20. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body.
Fig. 59: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 229
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body
filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not
correctly aligned.
21. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the
filter.
Fig. 60: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body.
Fig. 61: Locating Main Control Valve Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 230
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
If cleaning of the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article. If installing a new
main control assembly continue with this procedure.
NOTE:
Make sure that the manual control lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is
correctly installed in the manual control valve.
1. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the
TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Fig. 62: Main Control Valve Body Bolt Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body
filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not
correctly aligned.
NOTE:
Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:27 AM
Page 231
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages
are not clean.
2. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs.
Fig. 63: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure not to pinch the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS), Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when
installing the solenoid body.
NOTE:
Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
3. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts.
1. 42 mm (1.65 in) bolt
2. 63 mm (2.48 in) bolts
3. 80 mm (3.14 in) bolts
4. 95 mm (3.74 in) bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 232
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 64: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 233
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 65: Tightening Solenoid Body Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Fig. 66: Locating OSS Sensor Wiring Harness & Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the locking tab over.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 234
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 67: Identifying TR Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 68: Identifying TSS Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary.
Fig. 69: Inspecting Transaxle Main Control Cover Seal For Damage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Inspect the 20-pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seal
is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will
occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 235
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Install the studbolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
9. Install the main control cover and loosely install the 14 bolts.
1. Bolt location
2. Studbolt location
Fig. 70: Main Control Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 236
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 71: Main Control Cover Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in
place and install the 2 transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 72: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Assembly & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 237
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 73: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring
or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean transmission fluid and
install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7D285
7J324
Description
Seal
Backing ring
Fig. 74: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Backing Ring & Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install a new bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 238
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 75: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 76: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 77: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 239
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 78: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 79: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Position the ACL assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 80: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Tighten the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the TB.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 240
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 81: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Connect the engine breather to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 82: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 83: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 84: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 241
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
24. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED (TSS) SENSOR
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from
the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
Fig. 85: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe.
Fig. 86: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 242
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 87: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt.
Fig. 88: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet pipe
assembly.
Fig. 89: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 243
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 90: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 91: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine.
9. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside.
Fig. 92: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 244
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
10. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 93: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
11. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the
transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 94: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 245
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 95: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove and discard the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and remove the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Fig. 96: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were
removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission
fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring.
Fig. 97: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 246
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 98: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it
aside.
Fig. 99: Removing Nuts & Pulling Transmission Fluid Cooler Thermal Bypass Valve Straight Up
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
17. Remove the 14 bolts and the main control cover.
Fig. 100: Main Control Valve Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 247
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
1. Slide the lock over.
2. Press the tab and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 101: Pressing Tab & Disconnecting Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) and Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors.
Fig. 102: Locating Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) & Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Electrical
Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid
body may occur.
NOTE:
Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
20. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 248
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 103: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body
filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not
correctly aligned.
21. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the
filter.
Fig. 104: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 249
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
22. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body.
Fig. 105: Locating Main Control Valve Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Remove the bolt and the TSS sensor.
Fig. 106: Identifying TSS Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Route the TSS sensor wiring harness through the cover and the transaxle case.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 250
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 107: Routing TSS Sensor Wiring Harness Through Cover & Transaxle Case
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the TSS sensor in the cover and install the bolt.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Fig. 108: Identifying TSS Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed
in the manual valve.
3. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 251
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 109: Locating TSS, OSS & TR Sensor Wiring Harnesses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Inspect the manual pin to make sure it is correctly installed in the manual valve. If it is not, pull the valve
body off the transaxle case. Correctly install the manual pin in the manual control valve and position the
valve body in place.
Fig. 110: Identifying Manual Pin
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 252
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 111: Tightening TR Sensor Detent Spring Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body
filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not
correctly aligned.
NOTE:
Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before
installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages
are not clean.
6. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 253
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 112: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure not to pinch the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) , Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when
installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur.
NOTE:
Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
7. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts.
1. 42 mm (1.65 in) bolt
2. 63 mm (2.48 in) bolts
3. 80 mm (3.14 in) bolts
4. 95 mm (3.74 in) bolts
Fig. 113: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 254
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 114: Tightening Solenoid Body Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Fig. 115: Locating OSS Sensor Wiring Harness & Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the locking tab over.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 255
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 116: Identifying TR Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 117: Identifying TSS Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary.
Fig. 118: Inspecting Transaxle Main Control Cover Seal For Damage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Inspect the 20-pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seal
is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will
occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 256
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Install the studbolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
13. Install the main control cover and install the 14 bolts.
1. Bolt location
2. Studbolt location
Fig. 119: Main Control Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 257
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 120: Main Control Cover Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in
place and install the 2 transmission fluid cooler line bracket nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 121: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Assembly & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 258
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 122: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring
or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean transmission fluid and
install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7D285
7J324
Description
Seal
Backing ring
Fig. 123: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Backing Ring & Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install a new bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 259
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 124: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 125: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Install the transmission fluid filler tube and the nut.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 126: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 260
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 127: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 128: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Position the ACL assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 129: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Tighten the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the TB.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 261
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 130: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Connect the engine breather to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 131: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 132: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 133: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 262
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
28. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (OSS) SENSOR
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from
the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
Fig. 134: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe.
Fig. 135: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 263
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 136: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt.
Fig. 137: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet pipe
assembly.
Fig. 138: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 264
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 139: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 140: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine.
9. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside.
Fig. 141: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 265
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
10. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 142: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
11. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the
transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 143: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 266
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 144: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove and discard the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and remove the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Fig. 145: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were
removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission
fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring.
Fig. 146: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 267
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 147: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it
aside.
Fig. 148: Removing Nuts & Pulling Transmission Fluid Cooler Thermal Bypass Valve Straight Up
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
17. Remove the 14 bolts and the main control cover.
Fig. 149: Main Control Valve Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 268
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
1. Slide the lock over.
2. Press the tab and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 150: Pressing Tab & Disconnecting Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) and Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors.
Fig. 151: Locating Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) & Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Electrical
Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The solenoid body should be handled with care or damage to the solenoid
body may occur.
NOTE:
Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
20. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 269
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 152: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid
body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not
correctly aligned.
21. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the
filter.
Fig. 153: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 270
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
22. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body.
Fig. 154: Locating Main Control Valve Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Fig. 155: Identifying OSS Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:28 AM
Page 271
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 156: Identifying OSS Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed
in the manual valve.
2. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body.
Fig. 157: Locating TSS, OSS & TR Sensor Wiring Harnesses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Inspect the manual pin to make sure it is correctly installed in the manual valve. If it is not, pull the valve
body off the transaxle case. Correctly install the manual pin in the manual valve and position the valve
body in place.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 272
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 158: Identifying Manual Pin
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Fig. 159: Tightening TR Sensor Detent Spring Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body
filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not
correctly aligned.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 273
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before
installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages
are not clean.
5. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs.
Fig. 160: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure not to pinch the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS), Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when
installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur.
NOTE:
Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
6. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts.
1. 42 mm (1.65 in) bolt
2. 63 mm (2.48 in) bolts
3. 80 mm (3.14 in) bolts
4. 95 mm (3.74 in) bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 274
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 161: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 275
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 162: Tightening Solenoid Body Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Fig. 163: Locating OSS Sensor Wiring Harness & Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the locking tab over.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 276
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 164: Identifying TR Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 165: Identifying TSS Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary.
Fig. 166: Inspecting Transaxle Main Control Cover Seal For Damage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Inspect the 20-pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seal
is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will
occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 277
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Install the studbolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
12. Install the main control cover and loosely install the 14 bolts.
1. Bolt location
2. Studbolt location
Fig. 167: Main Control Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 278
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 168: Main Control Cover Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in
place and install the 2 transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 169: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Assembly & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 279
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 170: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring
or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean transmission fluid and
install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7D285
7J324
Description
Seal
Backing ring
Fig. 171: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Backing Ring & Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install a new bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 280
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 172: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 173: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Install the transmission fluid filler tube and the nut.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 174: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Install the transmission fluid level indicator.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 281
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 175: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 176: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Position the ACL assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 177: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Tighten the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the TB.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 282
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 178: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Connect the engine breather to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 179: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 180: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 181: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 283
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
27. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
HALFSHAFT SEAL - LH
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Adapter for 303-224 (Handle)
Tool Number
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Installer, Halfshaft Seal
307-582A
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Remove the front LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 284
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
3. Inspect the halfshaft hub for wear or damage and install a new halfshaft if necessary.
1. Inspect the differential seal surface.
2. Inspect the halfshaft bushing surface. If this surface is damaged, inspect the halfshaft bushing for
damage.
3. Inspect the differential side gear splines.
Fig. 182: Identifying Differential Side Gear Splines, Halfshaft Bushing & Differential Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal.
Fig. 183: Poking A Small Hole In The Halfshaft Seal Using A Suitable Awl
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 285
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 184: Removing Halfshaft Seal Using A Suitable Dent Puller
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the Cover Axle Seal Installer and Handle.
Fig. 185: Axle Seal Installer & Handle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Using the Cover Axle Seal Installer and Handle, install the LH halfshaft seal.
Fig. 186: Installing LH Halfshaft Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the front LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
article.
4. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
HALFSHAFT SEAL - RH
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Adapter for 303-224 (Handle)
Tool Number
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 286
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Installer, Halfshaft Seal
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
307-582A
Specification
MERCON® V
Fig. 187: Halfshaft & Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 287
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Item
1
2
Part Number
3K183
7H260
Description
Intermediate shaft
Seal assembly - halfshaft
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Remove the RH front wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS & TIRES article.
3. Remove the RH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS article.
4. Inspect the halfshaft hub for wear or damage and install a new halfshaft if necessary.
1. Inspect the differential seal surface.
2. Inspect the halfshaft bushing surface. If this surface is damaged, inspect the halfshaft bushing for
damage.
3. Inspect the differential side gear splines.
Fig. 188: Identifying Differential Side Gear Splines, Halfshaft Bushing & Differential Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal.
Fig. 189: Poking A Small Hole In Halfshaft Seal Using A Suitable Awl
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 288
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 190: Removing Halfshaft Seal Using A Suitable Dent Puller
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the Cover Axle Seal Installer and Handle.
Fig. 191: Axle Seal Installer & Handle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Using the Cover Axle Seal Installer and Handle, install the RH halfshaft seal.
Fig. 192: installing RH Halfshaft Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the RH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS article.
4. Install the RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS & TIRES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 289
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
5. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level.
DIGITAL TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SENSOR
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Installer, Manual Lever
Retaining Pin
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Tool Number
307-592
Specification
MERCON® V
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from
the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
Fig. 193: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 290
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe.
Fig. 194: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly.
Fig. 195: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt.
Fig. 196: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet pipe
assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 291
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 197: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Fig. 198: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 199: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine.
9. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 292
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 200: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
10. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 201: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
11. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the
transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 202: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 293
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
Fig. 203: Locating Selector Lever Cable End From Manual Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
Fig. 204: Identifying Manual Control Lever & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 205: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Remove and discard the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and remove the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 294
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 206: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were
removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission
fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring.
Fig. 207: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Fig. 208: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass
valve straight up and position it aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 295
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 209: Removing Nuts & Pulling Transmission Fluid Cooler Thermal Bypass Valve Straight Up
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Note the location of the studbolts for assembly.
19. Remove the bolts and the main control cover.
Fig. 210: Main Control Valve Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
1. Slide the lock over.
2. Press the tab and disconnect the connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 296
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 211: Pressing Tab & Disconnecting Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) and Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors.
Fig. 212: Locating Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) & Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Electrical
Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid
body may occur.
NOTE:
Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
22. Remove the bolts and the solenoid body.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 297
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 213: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid
body filter.
23. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the
filter.
Fig. 214: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Remove the bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 298
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 215: Locating Main Control Valve Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin.
Fig. 216: Locating TR Sensor Locking Pin
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
TR sensor removed for clarity.
26. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the
abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating
surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and
the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 299
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 217: Making Sure That Park Pawl Actuator Rod Does Not Become Disengaged From Park
Pawl
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged
from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and
disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod.
27. Remove the TR sensor.
1. Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case.
2. Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below, until the plate rests
against the transaxle case. Remove the park pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the
TR sensor.
Fig. 218: Sliding TR Sensor Down & Rotating TR Sensor Detent Plate Counterclockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 300
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
INSTALLATION
1. Install the TR sensor.
1. Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor.
2. Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case.
Fig. 219: Identifying TR Sensor In Transaxle Case
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Using the Manual Retaining Pin Installer, install a new TR sensor locking pin.
Fig. 220: Installing TR Sensor Locking Pin Using Special Tool (307-592)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed
in the manual valve.
3. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 301
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 221: Locating TSS, OSS & TR Sensor Wiring Harnesses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Inspect the manual pin to make sure it is correctly installed in the manual control valve. If it is not, pull
the valve body off the transaxle case. Correctly install the manual pin in the manual control valve and
position the valve body in place.
Fig. 222: Identifying Manual Pin
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the TR sensor detent spring and the bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 302
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 223: Tightening TR Sensor Detent Spring Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body
filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not
correctly aligned.
NOTE:
Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before
installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages
are not clean.
6. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 303
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 224: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure not to pinch the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS), Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when
installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur.
NOTE:
Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
7. Install the solenoid body and the bolts.
1. 42 mm (1.65 in) bolt
2. 63 mm (2.48 in) bolts
3. 80 mm (3.14 in) bolts
4. 95 mm (3.74 in) bolts
Fig. 225: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 304
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 226: Tightening Solenoid Body Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Fig. 227: Locating OSS Sensor Wiring Harness & Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the locking tab over.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 305
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 228: Identifying TR Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 229: Identifying TSS Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary.
Fig. 230: Inspecting Transaxle Main Control Cover Seal For Damage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Inspect the 20-pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seal
is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will
occur resulting in transmission damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 306
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Install the studbolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
13. Install the main control cover and loosely install the bolts.
1. Bolt location
2. Studbolt location
Fig. 231: Main Control Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 307
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 232: Main Control Cover Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in
place and install the nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 233: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Assembly & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 308
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 234: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring
or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean transmission fluid and
install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7D285
7J324
Description
Seal
Backing ring
Fig. 235: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Backing Ring & Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install a new bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:29 AM
Page 309
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 236: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 237: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated
onto the manual control lever shaft. Damage to the manual control lever
shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTE:
Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual
control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park
components will occur.
20. Install the manual control lever and the nut.
Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
Fig. 238: Identifying Manual Control Lever & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 310
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 239: Locating Selector Lever Cable End From Manual Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Install the transmission fluid filler tube and the nut.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 240: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Install the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 241: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Route the coolant hoses to the correct position on the transmission fluid filler tube.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 311
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 242: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Position the ACL assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 243: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Tighten the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the TB.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Fig. 244: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Connect the engine breather to the ACL assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 312
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 245: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 246: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 247: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
TRANSAXLE SUPPORT INSULATOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 313
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Oil Pan Holding Fixture
Tool Number
303-1295
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 314
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 248: Replacing Transaxle Support Insulator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
14A464
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6758
N606678
9C632
9C662
13A506
13A506
W503924
10723
Description
Electrical connector - Mass Air Flow
(MAF) sensor
Tube assembly - crankcase vent
Bolt - Air Cleaner (ACL) bracket
Clamp - ACL outlet pipe
ACL assembly
Fastener - wiring harness
Fastener - wiring harness
Bolts - battery tray
Battery tray
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 315
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
10
11
W711873
W709234
12
6F020
Through bolt - transaxle support insulator
Bolt - transaxle support insulator (4
required)
Transaxle support insulator
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers.
Fig. 249: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 4 nuts and the exhaust flexible pipe and Y-pipe as an assembly.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Fig. 250: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 316
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 251: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Loosen the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt.
Fig. 252: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the 3 bolts from the roll restrictor bracket.
Fig. 253: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Transaxle Bracket Plate Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and the roll restrictor bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 317
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 254: Locating Transaxle Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from
the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
Fig. 255: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe.
Fig. 256: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 318
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 257: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt.
Fig. 258: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet pipe
assembly.
Fig. 259: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove the battery. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
14. Remove the battery tray.
1. Disconnect the wiring harness fasteners.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 319
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
2. Remove the 3 bolts and the battery tray.
Fig. 260: Identifying Wiring Harness Fasteners, Battery Tray & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The Oil Pan Holding Fixture must be carefully aligned to the mounting
bosses on the oil pan. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
damage to the oil pan.
NOTE:
The Oil Pan Holding Fixture and floor jack are used to raise and lower the
engine to access the engine front cover and engine mount bracket
fasteners.
15. Position a floor jack and the Oil Pan Holding Fixture under the oil pan and raise the floor jack high
enough to release the pressure on the transaxle support insulator.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 320
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 261: Positioning Floor Jack & Special Tool (303-1295) Under Oil Pan
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the transaxle support insulator through bolt.
Fig. 262: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Remove the 3 nuts, the bolt and the transaxle support insulator bracket.
Fig. 263: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bracket, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Lower the jack until the transmission fluid cooler tube clears the lower transmission support insulator
bolts.
19. Loosen the battery tray support bracket bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 321
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 264: Identifying Battery Tray Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Remove the top transaxle support insulator bolts.
Fig. 265: Identifying Top Transaxle Support Insulator Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Remove the bottom transaxle support insulator bolts.
Fig. 266: Identifying Bottom Transaxle Support Insulator Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the bottom transaxle support insulator bolts.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 322
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 267: Identifying Bottom Transaxle Support Insulator Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the top transaxle support insulator bolts.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 268: Identifying Top Transaxle Support Insulator Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Tighten the battery tray support bracket bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 269: Identifying Battery Tray Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Using the jack and the Oil Pan Holding Fixture, lift the transaxle into place.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 323
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 270: Positioning Floor Jack & Special Tool (303-1295) Under Oil Pan
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the transaxle support insulator bracket, bolt and the 3 nuts.
Tighten the transaxle support insulator bracket nuts to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Tighten the transaxle support insulator bracket bolt to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Fig. 271: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bracket, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the transaxle support insulator through bolt.
Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 324
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 272: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Install the battery tray.
1. Install the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Connect the wiring harness fasteners to the battery tray.
Fig. 273: Identifying Wiring Harness Fasteners, Battery Tray & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the battery. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
9. Position the ACL assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 274: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 325
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Tighten the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the TB.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Fig. 275: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Connect the engine breather to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 276: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 277: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 326
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
13. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 278: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Position the roll restrictor bracket on the transaxle and install the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 279: Locating Transaxle Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Position the roll restrictor in place, install the bracket and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 280: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Transaxle Bracket Plate Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 327
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
16. Install the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt.
Tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
Fig. 281: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Install the roll restrictor heat shield and the 2 nuts.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 282: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Position the exhaust Y-pipe assembly in place and install a new gasket and 4 new nuts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 283: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 328
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Install the 2 exhaust hangers and tighten the exhaust clamp.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 284: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Check the transmission fluid level and fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
SOLENOID BODY ASSEMBLY
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 329
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 285: Main Control & Solenoid Body Components (With Torque Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
14A464
2
6758
Description
Electrical connector - Mass Air Flow
(MAF) sensor
Tube assembly - crankcase vent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 330
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
N606678
9C632
9C662
7A020
W520101
7A228
-
10
W711538
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
7H420
7A488
14A169
W520101
7H322
7J289
W708442
18
19
20
7G004
7J291
7Z369
Bolt - Air Cleaner (ACL) bracket
Clamp - ACL outlet pipe
ACL assembly
Transmission fluid level indicator
Transmission fluid filler tube nut
Transmission fluid filler tube
Nut - transmission fluid cooler tube (part
of 7H420)
Bolt - transmission fluid cooler tube-totransaxle
Tube - transmission fluid cooler
Connector - transaxle harness
Retainer - transaxle harness
Nut - bypass valve
Valve - transaxle fluid cooler bypass
Bolt - solenoid body cover (11 required)
Studbolt - solenoid body cover (3
required)
Cover - solenoid body
Bolt - solenoid body
Solenoid body
REMOVAL
NOTE:
The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and
solenoid body identification anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new
solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body
service tag on top of the transaxle case.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from
the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 331
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 286: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe.
Fig. 287: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly.
Fig. 288: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt.
Fig. 289: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 332
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
6. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet pipe
assembly.
Fig. 290: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Fig. 291: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 292: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 333
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine.
9. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside.
Fig. 293: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
10. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 294: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
11. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the
transmission fluid filler tube.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 334
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 295: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 296: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove and discard the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and remove the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Fig. 297: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were
removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission
fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 335
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 298: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Fig. 299: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the 2 transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler
thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside.
Fig. 300: Removing Nuts & Pulling Transmission Fluid Cooler Thermal Bypass Valve Straight Up
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Note the location of the studbolts for assembly.
17. Remove the 14 bolts and the main control cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 336
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 301: Main Control Valve Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
1. Slide the lock over.
2. Press the tab and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 302: Pressing Tab & Disconnecting Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) and Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 337
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 303: Locating Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) & Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Electrical
Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid
body may occur.
NOTE:
Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
20. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body.
Fig. 304: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 338
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body
filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not
correctly aligned.
21. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the
filter.
Fig. 305: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body
filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not
correctly aligned.
NOTE:
Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before
installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages
are not clean.
1. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 339
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 306: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure not to pinch the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS), Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when
installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur.
NOTE:
Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
2. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts.
1. 42 mm (1.65 in) bolt
2. 63 mm (2.48 in) bolts
3. 80 mm (3.14 in) bolts
4. 95 mm (3.74 in) bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 340
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 307: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Fig. 308: Tightening Solenoid Body Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Fig. 309: Locating OSS Sensor Wiring Harness & Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
1. Connect the electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 341
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
2. Slide the locking tab over.
Fig. 310: Identifying TR Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 311: Identifying TSS Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary.
Fig. 312: Inspecting Transaxle Main Control Cover Seal For Damage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Inspect the 20-pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seal
is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 342
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
occur resulting in transmission damage.
NOTE:
Install the studbolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
8. Install the main control cover and loosely install the 14 bolts.
1. Bolt location
2. Studbolt location
Fig. 313: Main Control Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 343
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 314: Main Control Cover Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install
the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it.
Fig. 315: Installing New Solenoid Body Strategy Tag Over Existing Solenoid Body Strategy Tag
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in
place and install the 2 transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve bracket nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 344
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 316: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Assembly & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Fig. 317: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring
or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean transmission fluid and
install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7D285
7J324
Description
Seal
Backing ring
Fig. 318: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Backing Ring & Seal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:30 AM
Page 345
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install a new bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 319: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 320: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Install the transmission fluid filler tube and the nut.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 346
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 321: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 322: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 323: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Position the ACL assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 324: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 347
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Tighten the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the TB.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Fig. 325: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Connect the engine breather to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 326: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 327: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 348
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 328: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Refer to Solenoid Body Strategy.
MAIN CONTROL COVER
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 349
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 329: Main Control & Solenoid Body Components (With Torque Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
14A464
2
6758
Description
Electrical connector - Mass Air Flow
(MAF) sensor
Tube assembly - crankcase vent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 350
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
N606678
9C632
9C662
7A020
W520101
7A228
-
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
W711538
7H420
7A488
14A169
W520101
7H322
7J289
W708442
18
7G004
Bolt - Air Cleaner (ACL) bracket
Clamp - ACL outlet pipe
ACL assembly
Transmission fluid level indicator
Transmission fluid filler tube nut
Transmission fluid filler tube
Nut - transmission fluid cooler tube (part
of 7H420)
Bolt - transmission fluid cooler tube
Tube - transmission fluid cooler
Connector - transaxle harness
Retainer - transaxle harness
Nut - bypass valve
Valve - transaxle fluid cooler bypass
Bolt - solenoid body cover (11 required)
Studbolt - solenoid body cover (3
required)
Cover - solenoid body
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from
the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
Fig. 330: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 351
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 331: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly.
Fig. 332: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt.
Fig. 333: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet pipe
assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 352
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 334: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Fig. 335: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 336: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine.
9. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 353
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 337: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
10. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 338: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
11. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the
transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 339: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 354
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 340: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove and discard the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and remove the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Fig. 341: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were
removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission
fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring.
Fig. 342: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 355
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Fig. 343: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the 2 transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve bracket nuts, pull the transmission fluid
cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside.
Fig. 344: Removing Nuts & Pulling Transmission Fluid Cooler Thermal Bypass Valve Straight Up
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Note the location of the studbolts for assembly.
17. Remove the 14 bolts and the main control cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 356
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 345: Main Control Valve Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary.
Fig. 346: Inspecting Transaxle Main Control Cover Seal For Damage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Inspect the 20-pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seal
is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will
occur resulting in transmission damage.
NOTE:
Install the studbolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 357
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
2. Install the main control cover and loosely install the 14 bolts.
1. Bolt location
2. Studbolt location
Fig. 347: Main Control Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 358
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 348: Main Control Cover Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in
place and install the 2 transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve bracket nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 349: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Assembly & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 359
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 350: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring
or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean transmission fluid and
install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7D285
7J324
Description
Seal
Backing ring
Fig. 351: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Backing Ring & Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install a new bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 360
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 352: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 353: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Install the transmission fluid filler tube and the nut.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 354: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Install the transmission fluid level indicator.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 361
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 355: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 356: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Position the ACL assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 357: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Tighten the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the TB.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 362
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 358: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Connect the engine breather to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 359: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 360: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 361: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 363
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
17. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
TRANSAXLE FILLER TUBE
Fig. 362: Transaxle Filler Tube (With Torque Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
7A020
W520101
7A228
Description
Transmission fluid level indicator
Transmission fluid filler tube nut
Transmission fluid filler tube
REMOVAL
NOTE:
The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine.
1. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 364
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 363: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
2. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 364: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
3. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the
transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 365: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 365
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
INSTALLATION
1. Install the transmission fluid filler tube and the nut.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 366: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 367: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 368: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 366
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
MANUAL CONTROL LEVER SHAFT SEAL
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Installer, Manual Lever
Retaining Pin
Tool Number
307-592
Installer, Manual Lever Shaft
Seal
307-581
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from
the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 367
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 369: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe.
Fig. 370: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly.
Fig. 371: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 368
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 372: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet pipe
assembly.
Fig. 373: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Fig. 374: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 369
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 375: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine.
9. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside.
Fig. 376: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
10. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 377: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 370
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
11. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the
transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 378: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
Fig. 379: Locating Selector Lever Cable End From Manual Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
Fig. 380: Identifying Manual Control Lever & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 371
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 381: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Remove and discard the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and remove the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Fig. 382: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were
removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission
fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring.
Fig. 383: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 372
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Fig. 384: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass
valve straight up and position it aside.
Fig. 385: Removing Nuts & Pulling Transmission Fluid Cooler Thermal Bypass Valve Straight Up
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Note the location of the studbolts for assembly.
19. Remove the bolts and the main control cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 373
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 386: Main Control Valve Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
1. Slide the lock over.
2. Press the tab and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 387: Pressing Tab & Disconnecting Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) and Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 374
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 388: Locating Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) & Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Electrical
Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid
body may occur.
NOTE:
Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
22. Remove the bolts and the solenoid body.
Fig. 389: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 375
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid
body filter.
23. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the
filter.
Fig. 390: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Remove the bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body.
Fig. 391: Locating Main Control Valve Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 376
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin.
Fig. 392: Locating TR Sensor Locking Pin
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
TR sensor removed for clarity.
26. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the
abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating
surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and
the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod.
Fig. 393: Making Sure That Park Pawl Actuator Rod Does Not Become Disengaged From Park
Pawl
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged
from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and
disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod.
27. Remove the TR sensor.
1. Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case.
2. Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests
against the transaxle case, remove the park pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the
TR sensor.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 377
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 394: Sliding TR Sensor Down & Rotating TR Sensor Detent Plate Counterclockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Using a suitable tool, remove the manual control lever shaft seal.
Fig. 395: Identifying Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Using the Manual Lever Shaft Seal Installer, install a new manual control lever shaft seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 378
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 396: Installing New Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal Using Special Tool (307-581)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the TR sensor.
1. Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor.
2. Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case.
Fig. 397: Identifying TR Sensor In Transaxle Case
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using the Manual Retaining Pin Installer, install a new TR sensor locking pin.
Fig. 398: Installing TR Sensor Locking Pin Using Special Tool (307-592)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:31 AM
Page 379
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
in the manual valve.
4. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body.
Fig. 399: Locating TSS, OSS & TR Sensor Wiring Harnesses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Inspect the manual pin to make sure it is correctly installed in the manual control valve. If it is not, pull
the valve body off the transaxle case. Correctly install the manual pin in the manual control valve and
position the valve body in place.
Fig. 400: Identifying Manual Pin
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the TR sensor detent spring and the bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 380
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 401: Tightening TR Sensor Detent Spring Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of
the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur.
NOTE:
Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body
filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not
correctly aligned.
NOTE:
Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before
installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages
are not clean.
7. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 381
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 402: Identifying Solenoid Body Filter Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure not to pinch the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS), Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when
installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur.
NOTE:
Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
8. Install the solenoid body and the bolts.
1. 42 mm (1.65 in) bolt
2. 63 mm (2.48 in) bolts
3. 80 mm (3.14 in) bolts
4. 95 mm (3.74 in) bolts
Fig. 403: Locating Solenoid Body Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 382
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 404: Tightening Solenoid Body Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
Fig. 405: Locating OSS Sensor Wiring Harness & Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the locking tab over.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 383
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 406: Identifying TR Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 407: Identifying TSS Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary.
Fig. 408: Inspecting Transaxle Main Control Cover Seal For Damage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Inspect the 20-pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seal
is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will
occur resulting in transmission damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 384
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Install the studbolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
14. Install the main control cover and loosely install the bolts.
1. Bolt location
2. Studbolt location
Fig. 409: Main Control Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 385
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 410: Main Control Cover Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in
place and install the nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 411: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Assembly & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 386
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 412: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring
or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean transmission fluid and
install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7D285
7J324
Description
Seal
Backing ring
Fig. 413: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Backing Ring & Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install a new bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 387
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 414: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 415: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fitting From Thermal Bypass Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated
onto the manual control lever shaft. Damage to the manual control lever
shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTE:
Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual
control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park
components will occur.
21. Install the manual control lever and the nut.
Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
Fig. 416: Identifying Manual Control Lever & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 388
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 417: Locating Selector Lever Cable End From Manual Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Install the transmission fluid filler tube and the nut.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 418: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Install the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 419: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Route the coolant hoses to the correct position on the transmission fluid filler tube.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 389
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 420: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Position the ACL assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 421: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Tighten the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the TB.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Fig. 422: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Connect the engine breather to the ACL assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 390
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 423: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 424: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 425: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
REMOVAL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 391
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
TRANSAXLE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Adapter, Transmission Jack
Tool Number
209-00152
Bar, Engine Spreader
303-1246
Disconnect Tool, Transmission
Cooler Line
307-569
Engine Lifting Bracket
303-1245
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 392
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Powertrain Lift
014-00765
Support Bar, Engine
303-F072
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 393
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from
the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
Fig. 426: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the ACL outlet pipe.
Fig. 427: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the engine breather from the ACL assembly.
Fig. 428: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the ACL assembly bracket bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 394
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 429: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the Throttle Body (TB) and remove the ACL and ACL outlet pipe
assembly.
Fig. 430: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine.
7. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside.
Fig. 431: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 395
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
8. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 432: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity.
9. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the
transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 433: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
Fig. 434: Locating Selector Lever Cable End From Manual Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 396
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
11. Remove the 3 selector lever cable bracket bolts and position aside the selector lever cable.
Fig. 435: Identifying Selector Lever Cable Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Remove the starter motor electrical terminal cover.
Fig. 436: Locating Starter Motor Electrical Terminal Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Position the starter cable boot back and remove the starter terminals from the starter.
Fig. 437: Identifying Wire Terminals From Starter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Disconnect the wiring harness fastener from the starter motor studbolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 397
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 438: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From Starter Motor Stud Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Remove the bolt, studbolt and the starter.
Fig. 439: Identifying Bolt, Stud Bolt & Starter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Disconnect the fuel hose routing clip from the transaxle stud and position the fuel hose aside.
Fig. 440: Identifying Fuel Hose Routing Clip From Transaxle Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 398
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 441: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Remove the top 4 torque converter housing bolts.
Fig. 442: Locating Torque Converter Housing Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Install the Engine Lifting Bracket on the LH cylinder head.
Fig. 443: Special Tool (303-1245) On LH Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Install the Engine Support Bar and Engine Spreader Bar to support the engine.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 399
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 444: Engine Support Bar & Engine Spreader Bar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Remove the transaxle support insulator through bolt.
Fig. 445: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Remove the 3 nuts, the bolt and the transaxle support insulator bracket.
Fig. 446: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bracket, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Remove the RH splash shield.
1. Remove the screws.
2. Remove the pushpin fasteners and the RH splash shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 400
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 447: Locating Push Pin Fasteners & RH Splash Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Remove the 3 pushpin fasteners, the 8 screws and the front splash shield.
Fig. 448: Locating Push Pin Fasteners & Front Splash Shield Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Remove the 3 RH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts.
Fig. 449: Locating RH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Remove the 3 LH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts and separate the front support from the subframe.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 401
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 450: Locating LH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Remove the 3 power steering tube bracket bolts from the subframe and position the power steering tube
aside.
Fig. 451: Power Steering Tube Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Fig. 452: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 402
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 453: Locating Transmission Fluid Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Remove the LH and RH front halfshafts. For additional information, refer toFRONT DRIVE
HALFSHAFTS article.
31. Inspect the halfshaft hubs for wear or damage and replace the halfshaft(s), if necessary.
1. Inspect the differential seal surface.
2. Inspect the halfshaft bushing surface. If this surface is damaged, inspect the halfshaft bushing for
damage.
3. Inspect the differential side gear splines.
Fig. 454: Identifying Differential Side Gear Splines, Halfshaft Bushing & Differential Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
32. Remove the bolts and the power steering rack heat shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 403
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 455: Locating Power Steering Rack Heat Shield Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. Loosen the Y-pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers.
Fig. 456: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
34. Remove the 4 nuts and the Y-pipe assembly.
Fig. 457: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
35. Remove the 4 bolts and position the steering rack aside, using a suitable length of mechanic's wire.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 404
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 458: Locating Steering Rack Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
36. Remove the 4 bolts and position the sway bar aside, using a suitable length of mechanic's wire.
Fig. 459: Locating Stabilizer Bar & Bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 405
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
37. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield.
Fig. 460: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Remove the 3 bolts from the roll restrictor bracket.
Fig. 461: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Transaxle Bracket Plate Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Support the subframe using the Powertrain Lift.
40. Remove the 2 nuts, 4 bolts and the subframe support brackets.
Fig. 462: Locating Subframe Support Brackets, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 406
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
41. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
Fig. 463: Locating Front Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
42. Remove the 2 middle subframe nuts and remove the subframe.
Fig. 464: Locating Middle Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
43. Remove the 3 bolts and the roll restrictor bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 407
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 465: Locating Transaxle Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
AWD vehicles
44. Index-mark the driveshaft, remove the 4 bolts and position the driveshaft aside.
Fig. 466: Locating Driveshaft Aside Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
45. Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor electrical connector.
Fig. 467: Identifying RH Catalyst Monitor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
46. Remove the 2 catalytic converter support bracket bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 408
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 468: Locating Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
47. Remove the 4 RH catalytic converter nuts and the RH catalytic converter.
Fig. 469: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
48. Remove the 5 bolts and the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) support bracket.
Fig. 470: Locating Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Support Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
49. Remove the 5 bolts and the PTU.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 409
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 471: Identifying PTU & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
50. Remove the 2 fasteners and the inspection cover.
Fig. 472: Locating Oil Fasteners On Inspection Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
51. Remove and discard the 3 torque converter bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 410
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 473: Locating Torque Converter Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
52. Remove the 2 secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler tubes at the transmission fluid cooler
thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 474: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
53. Using the Transmission Cooler Line Disconnect Tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from
the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 475: Disconnecting Transmission Cooling Tubes Using Special Tool (307-569)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
54. Using the Transmission Jack Adapter and a suitable transmission jack, support the transaxle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:32 AM
Page 411
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 476: Supporting Transaxle Using Special Tool (209-00152) & A Suitable Transmission Jack
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
55. Remove the 7 torque converter housing bolts and remove the transaxle from the vehicle.
Fig. 477: Locating torque converter housing bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
56. Inspect the torque converter housing mating surface to make sure that the dowel pins did not come out of
the engine block when the transaxle was removed. If the dowel pin is stuck in the torque converter
housing, remove the dowel pin from the torque converter housing.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 412
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 478: Locating dowel pin from torque converter housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
57. Remove manual control lever.
Fig. 479: Manual Control Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
58. Remove and discard the transmission fluid cooler tube bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 413
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 480: Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
59. Remove the 2 transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve bracket nuts, pull the transmission fluid
cooler thermal bypass valve and the transmission fluid cooler tubes straight up and remove the assembly
from the transaxle.
Fig. 481: Removing Nuts & Pulling Transmission Fluid Cooler Thermal Bypass Valve &
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Straight Up
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
60. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seals and backing rings
were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tubes and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the
transmission fluid cooler tube seals or backing rings are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seals and
backing rings.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 414
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 482: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Seals & Backing Rings
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
61. If the transaxle is to be overhauled or if installing a new transaxle, carry out transmission fluid cooler
backflushing and cleaning. For additional information, refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler
Backflushing and Cleaning.
62. If a replacement transaxle assembly is being installed or a new solenoid body is installed, the PCM will
have to be reflashed with a new solenoid body strategy and identification data file. For additional
information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy.
INSTALLATION
TRANSAXLE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Adapter, Transmission Jack
Tool Number
209-00152
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 415
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Bar, Engine Spreader
303-1246
Eye, Engine Lift
303-1245
Support Bar, Engine
303-F072
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 416
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Multi-Purpose Grease
XG-4 and/or XL-5
Specification
MERCON® V
ESB-M1C93-B
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
NOTE:
Prior to installation of a new or overhauled transaxle, the transmission fluid
cooler tubes must be cleaned, otherwise transaxle failure can occur.
NOTE:
Prior to installation of a new or overhauled transaxle, flush out the cooler and
cooler lines. For additional information, refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler
Backflushing and Cleaning.
1. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing rings and seals for damage and install a new backing
rings or seals if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seals with clean automatic
transmission fluid and install the backing rings and seals on the transmission fluid cooler tube.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7D285
7J324
Description
Seal
Backing ring
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 417
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 483: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Backing Ring & Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in
place and install the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve bracket nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 484: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Assembly & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install new transmission fluid cooler tube bolts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 418
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 485: Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Lubricate the torque converter pilot hub with grease and install the torque converter into the transaxle.
NOTE:
Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated
onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever
shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTE:
Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual
control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park
components will occur.
5. Install the manual control lever and nut.
Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 419
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 486: Manual Control Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the transaxle is not positioned on the dowel pins, damage to the
transaxle can occur.
6. If the dowel pins were pulled out of the engine block during removal, install new dowel pins in the engine
block.
Fig. 487: Locating dowel pin from torque converter housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Position the transaxle in place and install the 7 torque converter housing bolts.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Fig. 488: Locating torque converter housing bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 420
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the Transmission Jack Adapter from the transaxle.
Fig. 489: Supporting Transaxle Using Special Tool (209-00152) & A Suitable Transmission Jack
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 490: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Install the 2 secondary latches on the transmission fluid cooler tubes at the transmission fluid cooler
thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 491: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 421
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
11. Install 3 new torque converter bolts.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 492: Locating Torque Converter Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install the inspection cover and the 2 fasteners.
Fig. 493: Locating Oil Fasteners On Inspection Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
13. Position the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) in place and install the 5 PTU-to-transaxle bolts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 422
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 494: Identifying PTU & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Position the PTU support bracket in place and install the 5 bolts.
Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Fig. 495: Locating Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Support Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Position the RH catalytic converter in place and install the 4 nuts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 423
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 496: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Install the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts.
Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
Fig. 497: Locating Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Connect the RH catalyst monitor electrical connector.
Fig. 498: Identifying RH Catalyst Monitor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Line up the index marks on the rear driveshaft to the index marks on the PTU flange made during
removal and install the 4 bolts.
Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 424
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 499: Locating Driveshaft Aside Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
19. Position the roll restrictor bracket on the transaxle and install the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 500: Locating Transaxle Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Position the subframe in place and install the 2 middle nuts.
Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 425
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 501: Locating Middle Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Install the 2 front subframe nuts.
Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
Fig. 502: Locating Front Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Position the subframe support brackets in place and loosely install the bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 426
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 503: Locating Subframe Support Brackets And Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Install the rear subframe nuts.
Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
Fig. 504: Locating Rear Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Tighten the subframe support bracket bolts.
Tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
Fig. 505: Locating Subframe Support Brackets And Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Position the roll restrictor in place, install the bracket and the 3 roll restrictor bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 427
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 506: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Transaxle Bracket Plate Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Install the roll restrictor heat shield and the 2 nuts.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 507: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Position the stabilizer bar in place and install the 4 stabilizer bar bracket bolts.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 428
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 508: Locating Stabilizer Bar & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Position the power steering rack in place and install the 4 power steering rack bolts.
Tighten to 107 Nm (79 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 429
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 509: Locating Steering Rack Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Install the steering rack heat shield and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
Fig. 510: Locating Power Steering Rack Heat Shield Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Position the exhaust Y-pipe assembly in place and install the 4 exhaust Y-pipe nuts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 430
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 511: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Install the 2 exhaust hangers and tighten the exhaust clamp.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 512: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
32. Position the RH halfshaft and intermediate shaft support bracket in the transaxle and in the steering
knuckle. Install 1 stud bolt and 1 bolt.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 513: Locating Stud Bolts & RH Halfshaft/Intermediate Shaft Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 431
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
33. Position the catalytic converter support bracket in place and install the bolt and the nut.
1. Tighten the nut to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
2. Tighten the bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 514: Locating Catalytic Converter Bracket Bolt & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
34. Install the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts.
Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
Fig. 515: Locating Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
35. Install the LH and RH halfshafts. For additional information, refer to FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
article.
36. Position the lower bumper on the subframe and install the 3 LH lower bumper-to-subframe nuts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 432
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 516: Locating LH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
37. Install the 3 RH lower bumper-to-subframe nuts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 517: Locating RH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Install the front splash shield and install the 7 screws and the 3 pushpin fasteners.
Fig. 518: Locating Push Pin Fasteners & Front Splash Shield Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Install the RH splash shield.
1. Install the screws.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 433
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
2. Install the pushpin fasteners.
Fig. 519: Locating Push Pin Fasteners & RH Splash Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
40. Install the transaxle support insulator bracket, install the bolt and the 3 nuts.
Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Fig. 520: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bracket, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
41. Install the transaxle support insulator through bolt.
Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
Fig. 521: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 434
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
42. Remove the Engine Support Bar and Engine Spreader Bar.
Fig. 522: Engine Support Bar & Engine Spreader Bar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
43. Remove the Engine Lift Eye from the LH cylinder head.
Fig. 523: Special Tool (303-1245) On LH Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
44. If a new solenoid body was installed, wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of
the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body
service kit) over it.
Fig. 524: Installing New Solenoid Body Strategy Tag Over Existing Solenoid Body Strategy Tag
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 435
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
45. Install the transmission fluid filler tube and the nut.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 525: Identifying Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
46. Install the transmission fluid level indicator.
Fig. 526: Identifying Transmission Fluid Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
47. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube.
Fig. 527: Identifying Coolant Hoses From Transmission Fluid Filler Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
48. Install the top 4 torque converter housing bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 436
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Fig. 528: Locating Torque Converter Housing Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
49. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
Fig. 529: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
50. Position the fuel hose routing clip on the transaxle stud.
Fig. 530: Identifying Fuel Hose Routing Clip From Transaxle Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
51. Install the starter, bolt and studbolt.
Tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 437
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 531: Identifying Bolt, Stud Bolt & Starter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
52. Install the wiring harness fastener on the starter motor studbolt.
Fig. 532: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From Starter Motor Stud Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
53. Connect the starter motor terminals and position the starter terminal boot over the battery cable terminal.
1. Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
2. Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
Fig. 533: Identifying Starter Motor Wire Terminals & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
54. Install the starter motor electrical terminal cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 438
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 534: Locating Starter Motor Electrical Terminal Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
55. Position the selector lever cable and bracket in place and install the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Fig. 535: Identifying Selector Lever Cable Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
56. Place the selector lever in DRIVE.
Fig. 536: Placing Selector Lever In Drive
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
57. Place the manual control lever in DRIVE.
1. Rotate the manual control lever clockwise until it stops.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 439
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
2. Rotate the manual control lever counterclockwise one detent until it stops.
Fig. 537: Rotating Manual Control Lever Clockwise & Counterclockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
58. Unlock the selector lever cable adjuster.
1. Pry the latch up.
2. Push the lock tab to slide it over.
Fig. 538: Pushing Lock Tab To Slide It Over
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
59. Slide the cable end forward or backward to align it with the manual control lever.
Fig. 539: Sliding Cable End Forward Or Backward To Align It With Manual Control Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 440
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
60. With the adjuster locking tab released, connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever.
Fig. 540: Connecting Selector Lever Cable End To Manual Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
61. Slide the release tab back to lock the adjuster.
Fig. 541: Sliding Release Tab Back To Lock Adjuster
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
62. Install the upper intake manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
63. Install the battery tray.
1. Install the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Connect the wiring harness fasteners to the battery tray.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 441
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 542: Identifying Wiring Harness Fasteners, Battery Tray & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
64. Install the battery. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
65. Position the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Fig. 543: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
66. Tighten the ACL outlet pipe clamp at the TB.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Fig. 544: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
67. Connect the engine breather to the ACL assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 442
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
Fig. 545: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
68. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the ACL assembly.
Fig. 546: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
69. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 547: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
70. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
71. If a new solenoid body is installed, the solenoid body strategy and solenoid body identification will need
to be updated. Refer to Solenoid Body Strategy.
72. If a replacement transaxle assembly is being installed or a new solenoid body is installed, the PCM will
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:33 AM
Page 443
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission - Diagnostics, Servicing, & Removal & Installation - 6F50 Edge & MKX
have to be reflashed with a new solenoid body strategy and identification data file. For additional
information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:55:34 AM
Page 444
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Power Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
2008 BRAKES
Power Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
23
Brake booster nuts
lb-ft
17
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
BRAKE BOOSTER
The power brake actuation system consists of the following components:
Brake booster
Brake booster check valve
Brake booster vacuum supply hose
The brake booster uses engine vacuum from the intake manifold to create a partial vacuum inside the vacuum
booster on both sides of the diaphragm. When the brake pedal is pressed, the booster rod opens a valve,
allowing air to enter the booster on one side of the diaphragm while sealing off the opposite side. This increases
pressure on that side of the diaphragm so that it helps push the rod, which in turn pushes the piston in the master
cylinder. As the brake pedal is released, the valve seals off the outside air supply while opening the vacuum
valve. This restores vacuum to both sides of the diaphragm, allowing everything to return to its original
position.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
POWER BRAKE SYSTEM
Refer to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
BRAKE BOOSTER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:05:35
10:05:31 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Power Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Brake Booster With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
9C490
7B096
W707144
2N513
Description
Manifold vacuum hose assembly
Brake booster
Brake booster push rod spring clip
Brake booster nut (4 required)
Brake booster push rod pin
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first
removing the stoplamp switch and speed control deactivator switch.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:05:31 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Power Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest
position. Switch plungers must be compressed for the switch to
rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the
plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the
switch.
1. Remove the stoplamp switch. For additional information, refer to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article.
CAUTION: The brake booster check valve must be disconnected from the brake
booster (prior to removing the master cylinder) or the master cylinder
seal may be drawn into the brake booster.
2. Disconnect the brake booster check valve from the brake booster to deplete the residual vacuum in the
brake booster.
3. Remove the brake master cylinder. For additional information, refer to HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATION article.
CAUTION: Make sure that the vacuum hose assembly is routed correctly so it
does not make contact with surrounding components or damage to
the hose may occur.
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose and wire harness from the studs and position aside.
Fig. 2: Identifying Vacuum Hose & Wire Harness Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the brake booster push rod pin and clip and disconnect the push rod from the brake pedal.
6. Remove the 4 brake booster nuts.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the brake booster.
CAUTION: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing
the stoplamp switch or the speed control deactivator switch. These
switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the
brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:05:31 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Power Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
these switches with the brake pedal in any other position will result
in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
9. Check the brake booster for correct operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:05:31 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
2008 STEERING
Power Steering - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
MERCON® V Automatic
Transmission Fluid
MERCON® V
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US);
CXT-5-LM12 (Canada)
Fill Capacity
946 ml (2.0 pt)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Driveshaft bolts
Inner tie rod
Middle subframe nuts
Outer tie-rod end nuts
Power steering fluid cooler nuts
Power steering fluid cooler-to-subframe bolt
Power steering fluid reservoir nuts
Power steering pressure switch
Power steering pump bolts
Pressure line bracket-to-steering gear bolts
Pressure line-to-power steering pump banjo bolt
Pressure line-to-steering gear banjo bolt
Return hose bracket-to-subframe bolts
Steering gear heat shield bolts
Nm
70
103
150
48
7
9
8
20
24
9
48
48
9
6
9
103
150
90
Steering gear mounting boltsa
Steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose bracket bolts
Subframe support bracket bolts
Subframe support bracket nuts
Tie-rod jam nuts
lb-ft
52
76
111
35
15
18
35
35
76
111
66
lb-in
62
80
71
80
80
53
80
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
POWER STEERING
The power steering system consists of the following components:
Power steering pump
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:53
10:45:49 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Power steering fluid reservoir
Power steering pressure and return lines/hoses
Power steering fluid cooler
Power steering gear
Inner tie rod
The power steering system uses a vane-type pump to move the fluid from the reservoir to the steering gear and
through the rest of the steering hydraulic system. The power steering pump is mounted to the engine and driven
by the engine accessory drive belt. Power steering fluid flows into the pump from the reservoir. The power
steering fluid is then trapped between the pump vanes and moved to the high-pressure side of the pump creating
a flow of fluid. The restriction of this flow by the steering gear creates the pressure that provides the steering
assist. A combined pressure relief/flow valve is built into the pump to control the maximum pressure and flow
provided to the steering system. This action prevents damage to the system and provides the correct level of
assist during all engine speeds. While under pressure, the power steering fluid flows through the high-pressure
power steering line to the steering gear. The fluid exits the gear and flows through the return line, cooler and
finally to the reservoir. The reservoir slows the fluid, allows air to escape and filters the fluid before returning it
to the pump.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
POWER STEERING
Refer to STEERING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION .
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
POWER STEERING FLUID RESERVOIR
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Power Steering Fluid Reservoir With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W707142
2
3
4
5
3A713B
3E525
3R700
3A006
Description
Power steering fluid reservoir nuts (2
required)
Return hose
Power steering pump supply hose
Power steering fluid reservoir
Power steering fluid reservoir cap
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to
prevent the entry of foreign material or failure of the power steering
components may result.
1. Using a suitable suction device, remove the power steering fluid from the fluid reservoir.
2. Remove the 2 power steering fluid reservoir nuts and lift the reservoir from the mounting studs.
To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the power steering fluid reservoir.
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the power steering pump supply hose from the power steering fluid
reservoir.
Remove the reservoir.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Fill the power steering system. For additional information, refer to STEERING SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION .
POWER STEERING PUMP
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Power Steering Belt Removal
Tool
303-1252/1
Power Steering Belt Installation
Tool
303-1252/2
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Exploded View Of Power Steering Pump With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
3N623
2
3A719
3
3N626
4
5
3E525
W503299
6
-
7
3N824
Description
Pressure line-to-power steering pump
banjo bolt (also part of kit 3A719)
Pressure line kit
Pressure line seals (2 required) (also part
of kit 3A719)
Power steering pump supply hose
Power steering pump bolts (3 required)
Power steering pressure switch electrical
connector
Power steering pressure switch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
8
3A696
Power steering pump
REMOVAL
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to
prevent the entry of foreign material or failure of the power steering
components may result.
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING .
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the power steering fluid from the fluid reservoir.
3. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS .
4. Using the special tool, disengage the power steering pump belt from the power steering pump pulley and
position it aside.
Install the removal tool between the belt and the pulley and turn the crankshaft bolt clockwise to
disengage the belt.
Fig. 3: Installing Removal Tool (303-1252/1) Between Belt & Pulley & Turn Crankshaft Bolt
Clockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
5. Remove the 4 bolts and position the driveshaft aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Locating Driveshaft Aside Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
6. Using a suitable jack, support the rear of the subframe.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, 4 bolts and the subframe support brackets.
Fig. 5: Locating Subframe Support Brackets, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the 2 middle subframe nuts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Locating Middle Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Lower the rear of the subframe.
Release the clamp and disconnect the power steering pump supply hose from the power steering pump.
Disconnect the power steering pressure switch electrical connector.
Remove the pressure line-to-power steering pump banjo bolt and disconnect the pressure line from the
pump.
Discard the 2 seals.
13. Remove the 3 power steering pump bolts and the pump.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. Position the power steering pump and install the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
CAUTION: New seals must be installed any time the power steering pressure
line is disconnected from the power steering pump, or a fluid leak
may occur.
2. Position the pressure line and install the pressure line-to-power steering pump banjo bolt and seals.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connect the power steering pressure switch electrical connector.
Connect the power steering pump supply hose and secure the clamp.
Using the jack, raise the rear of the subframe.
Install the 2 middle subframe nuts.
Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
Fig. 7: Locating Middle Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Install the 2 nuts, 4 bolts and the subframe support brackets.
Tighten the nuts to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
Tighten the bolts to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
Fig. 8: Locating Subframe Support Brackets, Nuts & Bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
AWD vehicles
8. Position the driveshaft and install the 4 bolts.
Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Fig. 9: Locating Driveshaft Aside Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
CAUTION: After installation, make sure the belt is correctly seated on the
crankshaft and power steering pulley or damage to the belt may
occur.
9. Using the special tool, install the power steering belt onto the power steering pump pulley.
Position the belt around the special tool and the power steering pump pulley. Make sure that the
belt is engaged with the pulley and rotate the crankshaft clockwise to install the belt.
Fig. 10: Installing Power Steering Belt Onto Power Steering Pump Pulley Using Special Tool (3031252/2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Install the RH inner fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
11. Fill the power steering system. For additional information, refer to STEERING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION .
POWER STEERING PUMP TO STEERING GEAR PRESSURE LINE
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Fig. 11: Exploded View Of Power Steering Pump To Steering Gear Pressure Line With Torque
Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Item
Part Number
1
3N623
2
3N626
3
W711787
4
5
6
3C750
3A713C
7
3N623
8
37626
9
3A719
Description
Pressure line-to-steering gear banjo bolt
(also part of kit 3A719)
Pressure line-to-steering gear seals (2
required) (also part of kit 3A719)
Pressure line bracket-to-steering gear
bolts (3 required) (also part of kit 3A719)
Return hose (part of kit 3A719)
Clamps (also part of kit 3A719)
Return hose
Pressure line-to-power steering pump
banjo bolt (also part of kit 3A719)
Pressure line-to-power steering pump
seals (2 required) (also part of kit 3A719)
Pressure line kit
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: When repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to
prevent the entry of foreign material or failure of the power steering
components may result.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING .
2. Remove the pressure line-to-steering gear banjo bolt and disconnect the pressure line from the steering
gear.
Discard the 2 seals.
To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the steering gear.
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the return line.
5. Remove the 3 pressure line bracket-to-steering gear bolts.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the purge valve electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Locating Purge Valve Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors and position the wiring harness aside.
Fig. 13: Identifying PCM Electrical Connectors & Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the pressure line-to-power steering pump banjo bolt and disconnect the pressure line from the
pump.
Discard the 2 seals.
To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
9. To install, reverse removal procedure.
Fill the power steering system. For additional information, refer to STEERING SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION .
POWER STEERING FLUID COOLER
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Exploded View Of Power Steering Fluid Cooler With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
3D746
2
W711788
3
W707142
4
5
3A713B
3A713C
Description
Power steering fluid cooler
Power steering fluid cooler-to-subframe
bolt
Power steering fluid cooler nuts (2
required)
Return hose
Return hose
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to
prevent the entry of foreign material or failure of the power steering
components may result.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Using a suitable suction device, remove the power steering fluid from the reservoir.
Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS .
Release the clamps and disconnect the 2 return hoses from the power steering fluid cooler.
Remove the power steering fluid cooler-to-subframe bolt.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the 2 power steering fluid cooler nuts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Fill the power steering system. For additional information, refer to STEERING SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION .
STEERING GEAR
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Fig. 15: Exploded View Of Steering Gear With Torque Specifications
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
3C750
2
3A719
3
3N623
4
3N626
5
6
7
W713071
3504
3C569
8
W500210
9
3F570
10
W711787
Description
Return hose clamp (also part of kit
3A719)
Pressure line kit
Pressure line-to-steering gear banjo bolt
(also part of kit 3A719)
Pressure line seals (2 required) (also part
of kit 3A719)
Steering gear mounting bolt (4 required)
Steering gear
Steering gear turn tube heat wrap
Steering gear heat shield bolts (2
required)
Steering gear heat shield
Pressure line bracket-to-steering gear
bolts (3 required)
REMOVAL
CAUTION: When repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to
prevent the entry of foreign material or failure of the power steering
components may result.
1. Remove the stabilizer bar. For additional information, refer to FRONT SUSPENSION .
2. Remove the pressure line-to-steering gear banjo bolt.
Discard the 2 seals.
3. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the steering gear.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the steering gear heat shield.
5. Remove the 3 pressure line bracket-to-steering gear bolts.
6. Remove and discard the 4 steering gear bolts.
Remove the steering gear.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
When installing a new steering gear, install a new steering gear turn tube
heat wrap.
1. Position the steering gear and tighten the 4 steering gear bolts to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft) in the sequence
shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Identifying Steering Gear Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: New seals must be installed any time the pressure line is
disconnected from the power steering pump and/or the steering gear
or a fluid leak may occur.
2. Install the pressure line-to-steering gear banjo bolt.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Install the 3 pressure line bracket-to-steering gear bolts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Release the clamp and connect the return hose to the steering gear.
5. Install the steering gear heat shield and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
6. Install the stabilizer bar. For additional information, refer to FRONT SUSPENSION .
7. Fill the power steering system. For additional information, refer to STEERING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION .
STEERING GEAR TO FLUID COOLER RETURN HOSE
Material
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Exploded View Of Steering Gear To Fluid Cooler Return Hose With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
3A713A
2
W711787
3
4
5
3C750
3C750
3A713C
Description
Steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose
Return hose bracket-to-subframe bolts (2
required)
Clamp
Clamp
Return hose
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to
prevent the entry of foreign material or failure of the power steering
components may result.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING .
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the power steering fluid from the fluid reservoir.
3. Remove the RH fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS .
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose.
5. Release the clamp and disconnect the steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose from the return line at the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
steering gear.
6. Remove the 2 return hose bracket-to-subframe bolts.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Fill the power steering system. For additional information, refer to STEERING SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION .
TIE ROD - INNER
NOTE:
Left side shown, right side similar.
Fig. 18: Exploded View Of Inner Tie Rod With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part Number
3280
3C650C
3K661
3C650
3A130
6E5C
3K176
Description
Inner tie rod
Inner bellows boot clamp
Bellows boot
Outer bellows boot clamp
Tie-rod jam nut
Outer tie-rod end
Outer tie-rod end nut
Cotter pin
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Power Steering - Edge & MKX
9
32132
Lock-washer
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the steering gear. For additional information, refer to Steering Gear.
2. Mark the pinion shaft and the steering gear housing for correct reference during installation.
Fig. 19: Locating Pinion Shaft And Steering Gear Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Position the steering gear in a soft-jaw vise or damage to the steering
gear may occur.
3. Loosen the tie-rod jam nut.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
4. Remove the outer tie-rod end and the tie-rod jam nut.
To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
NOTE:
It is necessary to remove both bellows boots when removing the RH inner
tie rod.
5. Remove the 4 bellows clamps and the 2 steering gear bellows boots.
6. Using a suitable wrench, hold the piston shaft.
7. Using a suitable wrench, remove the inner tie rod.
To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Using a suitable wrench, hold the piston shaft while tightening the inner
tie rod.
NOTE:
The new lock washer must be crimped after tightening the inner tie rod.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Thoroughly clean and inspect all the parts to be reused. Install new parts as necessary.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:45:50 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster
4
10
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
10
15
Entertainment Systems
18
How to get going
AM/FM stereo with CD
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
USB port
Satellite radio information
Family entertainment system
Navigation system
SYNC
Climate Controls
Manual heating and air conditioning
Automatic temperature control
Rear window defroster
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
Message center
18
22
30
38
39
43
45
74
74
75
75
77
80
81
81
85
86
91
91
92
96
97
99
109
1
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Locks and Security
126
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
126
128
141
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire information
Tire inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Recreational towing
Driving
Starting
Brakes
Traction Control™/AdvanceTrac威
Transmission operation
Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher switch
Fuel pump shut-off switch
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Lug nut torque
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
2
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
145
145
156
171
186
198
200
202
215
219
225
229
231
231
236
238
242
254
254
255
256
256
264
269
270
275
Table of Contents
Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)
277
283
284
Cleaning
285
Maintenance and Specifications
292
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data
294
296
300
302
307
321
323
324
326
Accessories
329
Index
331
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2007 Ford Motor Company
3
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
4
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
5
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to
follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal
injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
6
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Export unique (Non–United States/Canada) vehicle specific
information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may be supplied
that complements this book. By referring to the market unique
supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
7
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Stability Control System
Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
8
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Service Engine Soon
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
MAX
MIN
9
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ⬙Service engine soon⬙
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ⬙Service
engine soon⬙ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
10
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Powertrain malfunction/reduced
power: Illuminates when a
powertrain or a AWD fault has been
detected. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Service
engine soon warning light to come
on, refer to Fuel filler cap in the
Maintenance and Specification chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
!
P
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a
brake system malfunction and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended distances with
the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.
11
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to ON, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound
when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been
detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Traction
Control™/AdvanceTrac威 active:
Illuminates when the Traction
Control™ is active. If the light
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately, refer to the
Driving chapter for more information.
12
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Low tire pressure warning
(if equipped): Illuminates when
your tire pressure is low. If the light
remains ON at start up or while
driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. When the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will
illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does
not turn ON or begins to flash, have the system inspected by your
authorized dealer. For more information on this system, refer to Tire
pressure monitoring system in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter.
Low fuel (if equipped):
Illuminates when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is at or near empty
(refer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter).
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is engaged. Turns
off when the speed control system
is disengaged.
O/D off: Illuminates when the
O/D
overdrive function of the
OFF
transmission has been turned OFF,
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have the transmission
serviced soon, or damage may occur.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Door ajar: Illuminates when the
ignition is in the ON position and
any door is open.
13
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Low washer fluid (if equipped):
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake ON chime: Sounds when the parking brake is left ON
and the vehicle is driven. If the warning stays on after the park brake is
off, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Message center activation chime: Sounds when some warning
messages appear in the message center display for the first time.
Overspeed chime (if equipped): Sounds when the vehicle speed
reaches 75 mph (120 km/h) or higher.
14
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
15
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.
• With Mini Message center
• With Message center
Refer to Message center in the
Driver Controls chapter on how to
switch the display from Metric to
English.
16
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.
• With Mini Message center
Tap on the TRIP/RESET stem to
toggle the display between the trip
and the odometer. Press the stem
again to select Trip A and Trip B
features. Holding the TRIP/RESET stem for two seconds or more will
reset the trip odometer to zero.
• With Message center
Press and release the message
center INFO button until “TRIP”
appears in the display (this
represents the trip mode). Press the
control again to select Trip A and
Trip B features. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to
reset.
17
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Quick start — How to get going
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Listening to the radio
1. If the audio system is off, press
VOL-PUSH to turn the radio on.
Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press AM/FM repeatedly to
choose between AM/FM1/FM2
frequency bands.
/
to manually go
3. Press
up/down the frequency band.
SEEK
to search
Press
down/up the chosen frequency band
for the next strongest station.
To disengage SEEK mode,
/
.
press
4. Once you are tuned to the
desired station, press and hold a
memory preset (1–6) to save the
station. PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will
return signifying the station has been saved. You can save up to six
stations in each frequency band — six in AM, six in FM1 and six in FM2.
To access your saved stations, press the corresponding memory preset.
The memory preset # and the station frequency will appear on the
display.
18
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Listening to satellite radio (if equipped)
1. If the audio system is turned off,
press VOL-PUSH to turn the radio
on. Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press AUX repeatedly to cycle
through auxiliary audio sources.
Select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 to listen
to satellite radio.
SEEK, SEEK
to
3. Press
access the previous or next satellite
channel.
You may also seek by music
category. For further information, refer to CATEGORY listing under the
MENU control on your specific audio system.
4. Once you are tuned to the
desired channel, press and hold a
memory preset (1–6) to save the
channel. PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will
return signifying the station has been saved. You can save up to six
channels in each — six in SAT1, six in SAT2, and six in SAT3.
To access your saved channels, press the corresponding memory preset.
The memory preset # and the channel name will appear on the display.
Listening to a CD/MP3 (if equipped)
1. If the audio system is turned off,
press VOL-PUSH to turn the radio
on. Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press CD to enter CD mode. If a
disc is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last.
19
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
For a single CD system, if a disc
is not already loaded, insert only
one, label side up into the CD slot.
LOADING CD and READING DISC will appear in the display. The first
track on the disc will begin playing.
For an in-dash six CD system, if
a disc is not already loaded, press
LOAD. Select a slot number using
memory presets 1–6. When the
display reads LOAD CD#, load the
desired disc, label side up. If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds,
the system will choose for you. Once loaded, the first track will begin to
play.
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the last
loaded disc will begin to play.
Note: An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 (folder #) T001 (track #)
in the display. An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 (track#) in
the display. Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for
further information.
3. In CD/MP3 mode, you can access the following features:
SEEK, SEEK
to
Press
access the previous/next tracks.
Press and hold REW to manually
reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
Press and hold FF to manually
advance in a CD/MP3 track.
While in folder mode, press
FOLDER to access the previous
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
While in folder mode, press
to access the next
FOLDER
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
20
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in
the display. If you wish to engage
shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random play. Otherwise,
random play will begin when the current track is finished playing. CD
SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
/
(play/pause) when a
Press
CD/MP3 is playing to pause the disc.
CD PAUSE will appear in the
display. Press again to resume play.
4. For a single cd system,
to eject the current disc.
press
The display will read CD EJECT.
For an in-dash six CD system,
. Select the correct slot
press
number using memory presets 1–6. When ready, the system will eject the
disc and the display will read REMOVE CD. If the disc is not removed in
15 seconds, the system will reload the disc.
until the system
To auto eject up to 6 discs, press and hold
begins ejecting all loaded discs. If the discs are not removed, the system
will reload the discs.
21
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM Single CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound system
(if equipped)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window switches, radio and moon roof (if equipped)
may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until
either front door is opened.
/
(Tuner): Press to
1.
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Also use in menu mode
to select various settings.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
next/previous channel.
22
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
/
to tune to the
Entertainment Systems
In CATEGORY MODE, press
/
to scroll through the list of
available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to
Category Mode under Menu for further information.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
(Phone): If your vehicle is
2.
equipped with SYNC (late
availability), press to access SYNC
PHONE features. Refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC
chapter in the Navigation supplement for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC, the display will read NO
PHONE.
3. MENU: Press repeatedly to
access the following settings:
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio
/
to cycle through the following options:
menu. Press
/
to
• CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s title in
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
/
to cycle through the saved titles. When
saved titles and press
the song appears in the display that you would like to replace, press
OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
23
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
memory. Press
/
to cycle through the saved songs. When the
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
delete the currently listed song, press
/
to select either
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all songs from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is
displayed. Use
/
to manually increase/decrease. Press MENU again
to disengage clock mode. Press OK to close and return to the main
menu.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
/
to
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Use
turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets. Press OK to close and
return to the main menu.
RBDS: Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RBDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, INFORM, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
24
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To activate, press MENU repeatedly until RBDS (ON/OFF) appears in
/
/
SEEK
to toggle RBDS ON/OFF. When
the display. Use
RBDS is OFF, you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations
or view the station name or type. Press OK to close and return to the
main menu.
To search for specific RBDS music categories: When the desired
/
to find the desired type,
category appears in the display, press
SEEK, SEEK
or press and hold SCAN to
then press and release
begin the search.
To view the station name or type: When the desired category appears
in the display, press TEXT/SCAN to toggle between displaying the station
type (COUNTRY, ROCK, etc.) or the station name (WYCD, WXYT, etc.).
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting. Use
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
/
to adjust.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting. Use
adjust. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
/
to
/
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting. Use
to adjust the audio between the left (L) and right (R) speakers. Press
OK to close and return to the main menu.
/
to adjust the
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting. Use
audio between the back (B) and front (F) speakers. Press OK to close
and return to the main menu.
SPEED VOL (Speed sensitive volume): Press MENU to reach the
SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder with
increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
/
to adjust. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
Use
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
25
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
TRACK/FOLDER MODE: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode.
SEEK, SEEK
to scroll through all tracks on
In track mode, press
the disc
SEEK, SEEK
to scroll through tracks
In folder mode, press
within the selected folder.
FOLDER, FOLDER
to access the previous/next folder (if
Press
available). Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
/
to
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS is ON, the system will bring the soft
and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
SINGLE PLAY/DUAL PLAY (if equipped): If SINGLE PLAY is ON,
/
for DUAL PLAY. For further information on Single
press
Play/Dual Play, refer to the Family entertainment DVD system later in
this chapter.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through FES/DVD (if equipped),
LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode),
SYNC (late availability - if equipped) and SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes
(satellite radio, if equipped).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System (FES)
please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this
chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC, please refer to the SYNC
supplement or to the SYNC chapter in the Navigation supplement for
further information.
5. SEEK: In radio mode, press
/
to access the previous/next
strong station.
/
to
In CD mode, press
access the previous/next CD track.
26
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
SEEK, SEEK
to
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
SEEK, SEEK
to seek to the
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK
to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
SEEK, SEEK
to view the
In TEXT MODE, press
previous/additional display text.
SEEK, SEEK
to select a category.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
/
(Play/Pause): This
6.
control is operational in CD and
DVD mode (if equipped). When a
CD or DVD is playing in the FES system, press this control to play or
pause the current CD or DVD. The CD/DVD status will display in the
radio display.
OK: Use in various menu selections.
Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features
which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK. For further
information, refer to the SYNC supplement. or to the SYNC chapter in
the Navigation supplement.
For further information on the FES/DVD system (if equipped), refer to
Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter.
7. SHUFFLE: Press SHUFFLE to
engage shuffle mode. SHUFFLE ON
will appear in the display. If you
wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random
play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is
finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
: In folder mode,
8. FOLDER
to access next
press FOLDER
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
27
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
9.
FOLDER: In folder mode,
FOLDER to access the
press
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station, select the desired frequency
band, AM, FM1 or FM2. Tune to the
desired station. Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and
PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 18 stations,
six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
a brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name, and
disc title.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be
to view the
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press
SEEK
to view the previous display text.
28
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop. In CATEGORY
MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the
selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
Note: If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level
when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already loaded
into the system, CD/MP3 play will
begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the
display.
(CD eject): Press to eject a
17.
CD/MP3.
18. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label
side up in the CD slot.
29
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Audiophile AM/FM in-dash six CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound
system (if equipped)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window switches, radio and moon roof (if equipped)
may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until
either front door is opened.
/
(Tune/Disc selector):
1.
In radio mode, press to manually
go up ( ) or down ( ) the radio
frequency. Press and hold for a fast
advance through radio frequencies.
In menu mode, use to select various settings.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to select the desired disc.
30
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
/
to tune to the
next/previous channel.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
/
to scroll through the list of
available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to
Category Mode under Menu for further information.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
2.
(Phone): If your vehicle is
equipped with SYNC (late
availability), press to access SYNC
PHONE features. For further information, please refer to the SYNC
supplement.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC, the display will read NO
PHONE.
3. MENU: Press repeatedly to
access the following settings:
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio
menu. Press
/
to cycle through the following options:
• CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press
/
to
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s title in
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
/
to cycle through the saved titles. When
saved titles and press
the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace,
press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
31
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
/
to cycle through the saved songs. When the
memory. Press
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
/
to select either
delete the currently listed song, press
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all songs from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is
/
to manually increase/decrease. Press MENU again
displayed. Use
to disengage clock mode. Press OK to close and return to the main
menu.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
/
to
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Use
turn on/off. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
32
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
RBDS: Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RBDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, INFORM, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate, press MENU repeatedly until RBDS (ON/OFF) appears in
/
to toggle RBDS ON/OFF. When RBDS is OFF,
the display. Use
you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the
station name or type. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
To search for specific RBDS music categories: When the desired
/
to find the desired type,
category appears in the display, press
SEEK, SEEK
or press and hold SCAN to
then press and release
begin the search.
To view the station name or type: When the desired category appears
in the display, press TEXT/SCAN to toggle between displaying the station
type (COUNTRY, ROCK, etc.) or the station name (WYCD, WXYT, etc.).
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting. Use
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
/
to adjust.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting. Use
adjust. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
/
to
/
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting. Use
to adjust the audio between the left (L) and right (R) speakers. Press
OK to close and return to the main menu.
/
to adjust the
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting. Use
audio between the back (B) and front (F) speakers. Press OK to close
and return to the main menu.
SPEED VOL (Speed sensitive volume): Press MENU to reach the
SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder with
increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
/
to adjust. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
Use
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
33
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Track/Folder mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode.
In track mode, press
SEEK, SEEK
to scroll through all tracks on
the disc
In folder mode, press
SEEK, SEEK
to scroll through tracks
within the selected folder.
FOLDER, FOLDER
to access the previous/next folder (if
Press
available). Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
/
to
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS is ON, the system will bring the soft
and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
/
to select and optimize
ALL SEATS (Occupancy mode): Use
sound for ALL SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS. Press OK to
close and return to the main menu.
SINGLE PLAY/DUAL PLAY (if equipped): If SINGLE PLAY is ON,
/
for DUAL PLAY. For further information on Single
press
Play/Dual Play, refer to the Family entertainment DVD system later in
this chapter.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through FES/DVD (if equipped),
LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode),
SYNC (late availability - if equipped) and SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes
(satellite radio, if equipped).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System (FES)
please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this
chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with the SYNC, please refer to the SYNC
supplement for further information.
5. SEEK: In radio and CD/MP3
mode, press to access the previous
( ) or next ( ) strong station or
track.
34
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
SEEK, SEEK
to
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press
SEEK, SEEK
to seek to the
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK
to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
In TEXT MODE, press
SEEK, SEEK
to view the
previous/additional display text.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
SEEK
to select a category.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
6.
/
Play/Pause: This control
is operational in CD and DVD mode
(if equipped). When a CD or DVD is
playing in the FES system, press this control to play or pause the
current CD/DVD. The CD/DVD status will display in the radio display.
For further information on the FES/DVD system (if equipped), refer to
Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter.
OK: Use in various menu selections.
Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features
which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK. For further
information, refer to the SYNC supplement.
7. SHUFFLE: Press SHUFFLE to
engage shuffle mode. SHUFFLE ON
will appear in the display. If you
wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random
play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is
finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
8. FOLDER
: In folder mode,
press FOLDER
to access next
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
FOLDER: In folder mode,
9.
press
FOLDER to access the
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
35
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station, select the desired frequency
band, AM, FM1 or FM2. Tune to the
desired station. Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and
PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 18 stations,
six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
a brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name, and
disc title.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be
to view the
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
SEEK
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press
to view the previous display text.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop. In CATEGORY
MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the
selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
36
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
Note:If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level
when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a disc is already loaded
into the system, CD/MP3 play will
begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the
display.
17. LOAD: To load a disc into the
system, press LOAD. Select a slot
number using memory presets 1–6.
When the display reads LOAD CD#,
load the desired disc, label side up.
If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds, the system will choose for
you. Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in preset #1 will begin to play.
Note: An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 (folder #) T001 (track #)
in the display. An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 (track#) in
the display. Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for
further information.
(CD eject): To eject a disc
18.
. Select
from the system, press
the correct slot number using
memory presets 1–6. When ready, the system will eject the disc and the
display will read REMOVE CD. If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds,
the system will reload the disc. When only one CD is loaded, press the
eject control only. The system will eject the only disc and will read
REMOVE CD.
37
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To auto eject up to 6 CDs, press and hold
until the system begins
ejecting all loaded discs. If the discs are not removed, the system will
reload the discs.
19. CD slot: When prompted by the
system, insert a CD/MP3 label side
up.
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way
to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music device to the audio system.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
38
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in
the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same way manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
USB port (if equipped)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
39
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
USB port inside your center console.
This feature allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks, and also to charge devices.
For further information on this
feature, refer to Using your USB
port in the SYNC supplement.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
40
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
41
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.
Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less
depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
.mp3 1
1
files may be present, (files with
.mp3 2
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
.mp3 3
2
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
.mp3 4
3
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
.mp3 5
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
.mp3 6
4
.mp3 7
.doc
.ppt
.xls
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
42
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels
over the internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
43
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
Radio Display
ACQUIRING
SAT FAULT
INVALID CHNL
UNSUBSCRIBED
NO TEXT
Condition
Action Required
Radio requires more
No action required.
than two seconds to
This message should
produce audio for the
disappear shortly.
selected channel.
Internal module or
If this message does
system failure
not clear within a short
present.
period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
Channel no longer
This previously
available.
available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
Subscription not
Contact SIRIUS at
available for this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel or tune to
another channel.
Artist information not Artist information not
available.
available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
44
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO TEXT
NO TEXT
NO SIGNAL
UPDATING
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Condition
Song title information
not available.
Action Required
Song title information
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
Category information
Category information
not available.
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
Loss of signal from
You are in a location
the SIRIUS satellite or
that is blocking the
SIRIUS tower to the
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,
vehicle antenna.
tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
Update of channel
No action required. The
programming in
process may take up to
progress.
three minutes.
Satellite service has
Call SIRIUS at
been deactivated by
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio.
subscription issues.
FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
45
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System
(FES) which allows you to listen to audio CDs, MP3 discs, watch DVDs
and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems. The
DVD player is capable of playing standard DVDs, CDs, MP3s and is
compatible with CD-R/W, CD-R and certain CD-ROM media.
Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and
controls as well as the very important safety information.
Quick start
Your Family Entertainment System includes a DVD system, two sets of
wireless infrared (IR) headphones and a wireless infrared (IR) remote
control.
To play a DVD in the DVD system:
The DVD system can play DVD-Video, DVD-R, DVD-R/W discs as well as
audio CDs and video CDs. To ensure proper disc operation, check the
disc for finger prints, scratches and cleanliness. Clean with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert a DVD into the system,
label-side up to turn on the system.
It will load automatically.
3. Press the power button on the
)
DVD player, then press Play (
to begin to play the disc.
If a DVD is already loaded into the
system, press PLAY on the DVD
player.
Note: If sound can be heard, but no video is present, press VIDEO to
select the video source (DVD or aux-inputs).
Press VIDEO to change the source
displayed on the screen. Press
repeatedly to cycle through:
DVD-DISC, DVD-AUX, NON-DVD,
OFF.
46
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Press the power button to turn the
system OFF. The indicator light will
turn off indicating the system is off.
Note: The audio from the DVD system will play over all vehicle speakers
and can be adjusted by the radio volume control.
To play a CD in the DVD system:
The DVD system can play audio CDs, CD-R and CD-R/W, CD-ROM and
video CDs. To ensure proper disc operation, check the disc for finger
prints and scratches. Clean the disc with a soft cloth, wiping from the
center to the edge.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert a CD into the system,
label-side up to turn on the DVD
system. It will load and
automatically begin to play. If there
is already a CD in the system, press
PLAY on the DVD player.
3. The disc will begin to play and
the ’CD Audio Disc’ screen will
display. From this screen, you can
also select from COMPRESSION,
SHUFFLE and SCAN features.
To play an MP3 disc in the DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert an MP3 disc into the
system, label-side up to turn on the
DVD system. It will load and
automatically begin to play. If there
is already a disc in the system, press
PLAY on the DVD player.
47
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
3. The disc will begin to play and
the ’MP3 Audio Disc’ screen will
display and allow you to access the
COMPRESSION, SHUFFLE, SCAN
and FOLDER MODE features.
To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system
The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic
devices such as game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette
recorders, etc.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Press the power button to turn
the DVD system on. The indicator
light next to the power button will
illuminate.
3. Connect an auxiliary audio/video
source by connecting RCA cords
(not included) to the RCA jacks on
the left hand side of the system.
• Yellow (1) — video input
• White (2) — left channel audio
input
• Red (3) — right channel audio
input
4. Press MEDIA on the DVD system to change the media source to AUX.
5. Press VIDEO on the DVD system to change the video source to
DVD-AUX. If your source is properly plugged in, it will appear on the
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) screen. If your auxiliary source does not
have a video signal, or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal
from the auxiliary source, the screen will remain black. If the video
source is set to DVD-AUX, the display will automatically turn on if a
video signal is detected.
48
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To listen to audio over the headphones (Dual play mode):
1. You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless
headphones. Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and
Using wired headphones for further information.
• Black (4) — wired headphone output (wired headphones not
included)
2. Press the headphone/speaker
button on the DVD player or press
the 2 and 4 memory presets on the
audio system at the same time.
A green light will illuminate next to either the A or B Headphone Control
Button to indicate which channel is active (able to be controlled).
3. Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel (A or
B). The audio source will be shown on the display. You may change the
active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button.
Note: Channel A can access any possible media source (AM, FM1, FM2,
SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, AUX). Channel B can only access DVD and
AUX sources.
Note: Refer to Single play/Dual play for more information.
Using the infrared (IR) wireless headphones:
1. Press the power control on the earpiece to turn the headphones ON.
2. Select Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using
the A/B control on the ear piece.
3. Adjust the headphone volume using the rotary dial on the earpiece.
Using wired headphones (not included):
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
1. Connect the wired headphones in to the headphone jacks on either
A or
B. Headphones
side of the DVD system. Each side is labeled
plugged into jack A will listen to Channel A and headphones plugged into
jack B will listen to Channel B.
49
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. Adjust the volume levels using
the volume controls on the DVD
system.
To adjust display brightness:
To decrease/increase the brightness
level on the display screen, press
the brightness control on the DVD
system. A display will appear at the
bottom of the screen indicating the
brightness level. The brightness display will only appear when the menu
is not displayed.
DVD player controls
16
1
2
3
ENTER
MENU
6
4
5
A
RETURN
MEDIA
B
VIDEO
VOLUME
14
15
10
12
13
7
11
9
8
1. Headphone control A/B: Press
to select either the A or B
headphone source. Then press
MEDIA to select the desired playing
media for that headset. When a
headphone channel has been selected (A or B), selections will affect the
source on that channel only.
50
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Note: Headphone A can access any possible media (AM, FM1, FM2, SAT
(if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). Headphone B can only access DVD
and DVD-AUX.
For further information, refer to Single play/Dual play later in this
section.
/
(Stop/Eject): Press once
2.
to stop and press a second time to
eject a disc from the DVD system.
(Reverse): Press and
3.
release for the previous chapter or
track. Press and hold to reverse
search a DVD, Video CD, or FES CD in DVD/CD mode.
(Fast forward): Press and
4.
release for the next chapter or
track. Press and hold to forward
search a DVD, Video CD, or FES CD in DVD/CD mode.
/
(Play/Pause): Press
5.
(Play) to select DVD mode (and to
turn the DVD system on if it is off).
If a disc is present, it will resume or begin to play. Press (Pause) while
playing a disc to pause a DVD or CD.
6. On/Off: Press to turn the DVD
system On/Off.
7. VIDEO: Press repeatedly to cycle
through the following video state
options which will be indicated on
the bottom right hand corner of the
display: DVD DISC, DVD-AUX,
NON-DVD and Off (no indicator). If you select the DVD-AUX video
source, the display will turn off if there is no video signal detected. When
a video signal is detected on the auxiliary video input, and the display is
in the DVD-AUX video mode, the display will automatically turn on.
51
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
8. Infrared (IR) Receiver & Transmitter: System sensor which reads
the signals from the remote control and sends audio signals to the
infrared (IR) wireless headphones.
9. LCD screen: The eight inch diagonal screen rotates down to view and
up into housing to store when not in use. Ensure that the screen is
latched into the housing when being stored.
10. Volume: When in Single Play,
press to increase ( ) or decrease
( ) the volume over all speakers.
When in Dual Play, press to increase
( ) or decrease ( ) the volume
for the wired headphones. (Wireless headphone volume is controlled
with the rotary dial on the right ear piece.)
/
(Headphones/Speakers): Press once for Dual Play
11.
(Headphone mode- the rear speakers are muted) and press again for
Single Play (same media playing through all speakers). You can also
press the 2 and 4 memory preset buttons on the audio system at the
same time to perform the same function. For further interaction
information, refer to Single Play/Dual play.
12. MEDIA: Press repeatedly to
select from the various possible
playing media sources (AM, FM1,
FM2, SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). The media will show in
the status display on the top of the screen when in Dual Play mode.
When in Single Play mode, the media source will be displayed on the
radio.
Note: Channel A can access any possible media source (AM, FM1, FM2,
SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). Channel B can only access
DVD and DVD-AUX sources.
13. RETURN: Press to return to the
playing media or to resume
playback.
52
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
14. MENU: When playing a DVD,
press MENU once to enter the DVD
disc menu (if available) and press
twice to enter the system set-up menu. From the set-up menu, you may
select from Angle, Aspect Ratio, Language, Subtitles, Disc resume,
Compression, Restore Defaults and Back. For more detailed information,
refer to Menu mode.
15. ENTER: Press to select/confirm
the current selection.
16. Cursor /Brightness controls:
Use the cursor controls to make
various selections when in any
menu. When not in a menu, and in
/
to adjust
DVD mode, press
the brightness. A display bar will appear at the bottom of the screen
indicating the brightness levels.
Remote control
Unless otherwise stated, all operations can be carried out with the
remote control. Always point the remote control directly at the player.
Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player.
53
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
1. Power control: Press to turn the FES (Family Entertainment
System) ON/OFF.
2. Cursor controls: Use in various active menus to advance the cursor
up/down/left/right. When not in a Menu, the left and right cursor controls
decrease and increase the display brightness.
3. DISPLAY: Press to access the on-screen display of the FES functions
and adjustments.
4. RETURN: Press to return to the previous menu screen.
5. ANGLE (DVD dependent): Press to select the angle to view the scene.
6. Channel A/B: Press to select either A or B headphones and then use
the MEDIA control to select the desired playing media for the headphones.
7. VOL (Volume): When in Single Play, press to increase ( ) or
decrease ( ) the volume over all speakers. When in Dual Play, press to
increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the volume for the wired headphones.
(Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the
right ear piece.)
54
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
8. Fast Forward/Next: In DVD mode, press and hold for a quick
advance within the DVD. Press and release to advance to the next
chapter. In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the next track.
9. Play/Pause: Press to play or pause a DVD.
10. SHUFFLE: Press to play all tracks on the current CD/MP3 disc in
random order.
11. STOP: Press to stop the current DVD or CD/MP3.
12.
/
Speaker/Headphone (Single/Dual Play): Press to toggle
between Single Play (same media playing through all speakers) and Dual
Play (headphone mode — the rear speakers are muted). You can also
press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time
to perform the same function.
13. Keypad: Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD/MP3
track or DVD chapter to be played.
14. C (Cancel): Press to cancel/clear the numeric input (i.e. chapter
number).
15. MEDIA: Press to cycle through the possible media sources: AM,
FM1, FM2, SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, LINE IN (if equipped),
DVD-AUX.
Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources.
16. VIDEO: Press to cycle through video states: DVD-DISC, DVD-AUX,
NON-DVD, Off.
17. EJECT: Press to eject a disc from the FES.
18. Fast reverse/Previous: When a DVD is playing, press and hold for a
quick reverse within the DVD. Press and release for the previous
chapter. Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the previous track.
19. MENU: Press to access the DVD disc menu for selections. Press
MENU again when in the DVD disc menu to access the system set-up
menu.
20. SUBTITLE (DVD dependent): Press to turn the subtitle feature ON
or OFF.
21. LANGUAGE (DVD dependent): Press to select the desired
language.
22. ENTER: Press to select the highlighted menu option.
23. ILLUMINATION: Press to illuminate the remote control and
backlight all of the buttons.
55
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Battery replacement
Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit. Since all batteries
have a limited shelf life, replace them when the unit fails to control the
DVD player.
Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries.
The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with
the unit.
56
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Headphones
Wireless headphones
The driver should never use the headphones while driving the
vehicle. Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing
audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens, which could
result in a crash causing serious injury. Give your full attention to
driving and to the road.
Your FES system is equipped with
two sets of battery powered,
infrared wireless headphones. Two
AAA batteries are needed to operate
the headphones. (Batteries are
included.)
Additional infrared wireless
headphones may be purchased for
use with the system. Also, wired
headphones may be purchased and
plugged in where indicated on the
left and right hand sides of the
system. Refer to Wired
Headphones below.
57
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To install the batteries, remove the screw at the bottom of the cover.
Then, lightly press down on top and slide the cover off.
When replacing the batteries, use two new batteries (alkaline
recommended) and install them with the correct orientation as indicated
in the battery housing.
58
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To operate the headphones:
• Press POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones. A red
indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON. Press
POWER again to turn the headphones off.
• Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the
headband adjustment.
• Select the desired audio source (Channel A or B) for each set of
wireless headphones by using the A/B selection switch on the ear
piece.
• Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level.
Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use. After
approximately one minute of not being in use (no infrared signal is
received), the wireless headphones will automatically turn off. They will
also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature.
If this happens, simply turn the headphones on again and continue use.
59
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Wired headphones
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
The driver should never use the headphones while driving the
vehicle. Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing
audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens, which could
result in a crash causing serious injury. Give your full attention to
driving and to the road.
You may purchase wired headphones for your FES (Family
Entertainment System). Plug them into the 3.5 mm headphone jack(s)
located on the left and right sides of the system. (Channel A is located
on the left side and Channel B is located on the right side.) These
headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode.
To listen to the audio on wired headphones (not included), connect the
wired headphones into the headphone jacks on the sides of the DVD
system. The wired headphone jack for Channel A is located on the left
side of the FES and is labeled
A. Headphones plugged into this
headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the
Channel A source. The wired headphone jack for Channel B is located on
B. Headphones plugged into
the right side of the FES and is labeled
this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be
the Channel B source.
Adjust the headphone volume using
the volume control on the DVD
system.
Operation
Single play/Dual play
Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones
and wired headphones (not included) to allow the rear seat passengers
to listen to the radio (and other media sources) over the headphones.
This enables the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of
sources a variety of ways.
60
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Single Play: Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening
to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers. When the
DVD system is on, and the same source is playing through the front and
rear speakers, SINGLE PLAY will appear in the front radio display.
Dual Play: Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen
to a different playing media than the front seat passengers. With the
DVD and Rear Seat Controls turned ON, the rear seat passengers may
choose to listen to the radio, CD, MP3, DVD, or DVD-AUX media sources
over headphones while the front speakers play the chosen selection for
the front audio system, they may listen to another over the headphones.
DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio display.
When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen
to the same audio source, SHARED MODE will appear on the radio.
Note: If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio, the rear seat
passengers can also listen to the radio, however they will be limited to
listening to the same radio channel.
Press
/
on the DVD player to
listen to audio over the headphones.
The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the
A or B headphone control buttons will illuminate. The system can output
two different audio sources over the headphones. These are called
Channel A and Channel B. Both Channel A and Channel B can be
listened to on the wired headphones (not included) or on the infrared
(IR) wireless headphones.
Press the Headphone Control button
A to change the audio source for
Channel A.
Press MEDIA to change the audio
source for Channel A. This
information will display on the DVD
system screen.
Press the Headphone Control button
B to change the audio source for
Channel B.
Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B. This information
will display on the DVD system screen. Channel B can listen to either
the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs (DVD-AUX).
61
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Operation with an aftermarket audio system (Headphone only
mode)
When the Family Entertainment System (FES) detects that the original
radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the
vehicle, the Family Entertainment System will work in a state referred to
as “Headphone Only Mode”.
While operating in Headphone Only Mode, the system will have limited
functionality.
• The system will only output audio to the headphones. It will not be
capable of providing audio to the speakers.
• The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD-DISC
and DVD-AUX, regardless of headphone channel (A or B).
• When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode,
both headphone channels (A&B) will be connected to FES-DISC.
Menu mode
Press MENU once on the DVD system to access the DVD disc menu if
available.
Press MENU twice to access the DVD set-up menu and the following
features:
1. ZOOM
2. ANGLE
3. ASPECT RATIO
4. LANGUAGE
5. SUB TITLES
Angle mode
Select ANGLE to select various
angles of view for the DVD.
62
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
This is disc dependent — some
DVD discs may have more viewing
angles to select from. Once you
have made your selection, press
ENTER to confirm. The system
default is Angle 1.
Aspect ratio
Select ASPECT RATIO to select the
viewing size and shape of the video
displayed on the LCD screen. This is
disc dependent.
You can select from: WIDE, LETTER
BOX or PAN SCAN. Once you have
made your selection, press ENTER
to confirm. The LCD screen display
will immediately change to your
selection after the system resumes
playback of the DVD. The system
default is WIDE (16:9).
Language
Select LANGUAGE to select the
language you would like to use for
audio output (English, Spanish,
French). This is disc dependent.
63
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Once you have made your selection,
press ENTER to confirm. The
system default is English.
Subtitles
Select SUBTITLES to turn the
subtitle option on or off. The system
default is OFF.
Once you have made your selection,
press ENTER to confirm. This is
disc dependent.
Audio CDs
To play audio CDs on your DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the DVD system is ON.
3. Insert an audio CD into the DVD system, label side up.
64
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
4. The track and elapsed time will
appear in the status bar. Use the
DVD cursor controls on the bezel to
highlight which track you would like
to play. You can also use the cursor
controls to highlight
COMPRESSION, SHUFFLE or
SCAN. Once you have highlighted
the desired track or function, press ENTER on the DVD bezel to confirm
your selection.
COMP (Compression): Compression brings soft and loud CD passages
together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press to
turn the feature ON/OFF
SHUFFLE: Press to hear all tracks on the current CD in random order.
Press again to stop.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current CD. Press
again to stop.
Playing MP3 discs
To play an MP3 disc on your DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the DVD system is ON.
3. Insert the MP3 disc into the DVD system, label side up.
4. The folder, track and elapsed
time will appear in the status bar.
The screen will list the Artist, Title,
Album and File Name.
COMP (Compression):
Compression brings soft and loud
CD/MP3 passages together for a
more consistent listening level when
in CD mode. Press to turn the feature ON/OFF
SHUFFLE: Press to hear all tracks on the current MP3 folder in random
order. Press again to stop.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current MP3 folder.
Press again to stop.
FOLDER LIST: Press access folder mode and to go to the previous/next
folder in the MP3 disc.
65
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
MP3 disc quality factors
Several factors can effect disc playback quality:
• Disc capacity — Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity.
We do not recommend using high capacity discs containing 700MB of
storage.
• Disc type — Some CD-RW discs may operate inconsistently and may
cause an error message to appear. We recommend burning MP3 files
onto CD-R discs.
• Disc finalization — The disc may be left open for the purpose of
adding sessions to it at a later time, but be sure to close each session
or the disc will not play.
• Bit rate — The player supports bit rates from 32–320 kbps, as well as
variable bit rate MP3 files, but lower bit rates will have a noticeable
effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low
fidelity music material. We recommend that you encode MP3 files
using a high quality encoder.
• PC configuration — Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your
computer’s resources. Follow the PC configuration recommendations
of the encoder software vendor. We recommend that you avoid
running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding
to avoid undesirable noise and distortion.
CD, MP3 and CD player care
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
• Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player (if
equipped).
• Always store discs out of direct sunlight. Excessive heat may damage
or warp discs.
• Use care when handling and playing CD-R and CD-RW discs, which
are more susceptible to damage from heat, light and stress than are
regular CDs.
• Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat, with the
playing surface facing down, in order to prevent damage to the disc or
the player.
• Never insert any object other than a compact disc (CD) or digital
versatile disc (DVD) into the player, as doing so may damage the
player and may cause injury to you.
66
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• Do not disassemble the player. The laser used in disc playback is
extremely harmful to the eyes.
The FES DVD system is designed to play commercially pressed 12
cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs and digital versatile discs (DVD)
only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and
re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD and DVD players. Irregular shaped CDs or DVDs,
CDs or DVDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the FES DVD system. The label may peel and cause the CD
or DVD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs or DVDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs or DVDs.
Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Playing a DVD
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the navigation system is on.
3. Insert a DVD label-side up into the system.
4. Use the DVD bezel controls to:
Press to play or pause a DVD.
Press to stop or eject a DVD.
Press and release to go to the
previous chapter. Press and hold for
a fast reverse search.
Press and release to go to the next
chapter. Press and hold for a fast
forward search.
Press when not in menu mode to
adjust brightness, or when in menu
mode to navigate through the menu
selections.
67
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Press to adjust volume levels.
Slow play
1. With a DVD playing, press pause.
2. Press and hold the reverse or
advance button to enter into slow
play mode. Once in slow play mode,
press and release the reverse or advance button repeatedly to cycle
through 1/4 and 1/2. These will display on the status bar on top of the
screen as the screens cycle through at this rate.
Frame by frame
1. With a DVD playing, press pause.
2. Press the right cursor button. The
DVD will advance one frame. Each
press of the right cursor button will
advance the DVD video by one
frame.
Headphone/auxiliary jacks
There are wired headphones (not included) and auxiliary jacks on the
left and right side of your DVD system. They can be used to plug in
wired headphones or to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices
such as game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette recorders,
etc.
68
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
On the left side of the system is the
Headphone A input jack. This
headphone will listen to the media
selected on the Channel A source.
When you need to make any
adjustments to the media, volume,
etc, ensure that the Channel A
source is highlighted. For more
information, refer to Headphone
adjustments.
Also located here are the various
auxiliary jacks which can be used to plug in a VCR, camcorder, video
games, etc. The specific jacks are as follows:
1. Yellow: video input
2. White: left channel audio input
3. Red: right channel audio input
4. Black: wired headphone jack ( not included)
The B headphone jack (5) is located
on the right side of the DVD system.
Plug in wired headphones (not
included) here.
Note: The B headphones can only
access DVD and AUX modes. They
cannot access radio sources.
Audio displays
Your DVD system interacts closely with the front audio system. Status
messages will appear in the radio display showing the DVD status. Some
possible radio display messages:
• SINGLE PLAY or DUAL PLAY
• DVD LOAD
• DVD MENU
• DVD STOP
69
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Audio interaction
You can then also use the front audio controls to advance, reverse, play
and pause a DVD. While a DVD is playing you may use the following
controls on the front radio:
• SEEK: Press to advance to the previous (
chapters.
•
) or next (
) DVD
: Press to play a DVD or to pause the DVD.
When the radio displays “DVD MENU”, press PLAY on the radio
(memory preset #6), to play the disc.
Parental control for the DVD system
Your Family Entertainment System (FES) allows you to have control
over the rear seat controls in a few different ways. The DVD system is
automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is ON, which allows the
rear seat passengers to use the DVD system.
There are three levels of control of
the FES buttons. The states are
FULL (enabled), LOCAL or
LOCKED (disabled). To change the level of control, press the memory
preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls. The
control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously.
The three states are described as:
FULL (enabled): The FES has control over the primary (speaker) and
secondary (headphone) audio sources.
LOCAL: The FES has control over the secondary source (headphones)
only. The radio will ignore button presses that affect the primary
(speaker) audio source.
LOCKED (disabled): The FES buttons are locked and all FES button
presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject.
When the DVD system is ON, you
1
2
3
4
5
6
can then press the memory preset
controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to
toggle between Single Play and Dual Play. In Single Play mode, all
speakers listen to the same media. In Dual Play mode, rear seat
passengers can use the infrared wireless, or wired (not included)
headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat
passengers.
70
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
General information
Note: DVDs are formatted by
regions. US and Canada systems can
only play region 1 DVDs and Mexico
systems can only play region 4
DVDs. Systems sold in vehicles
targeted for other parts of the world
would have different regions. If a
playback problem is encountered,
please ensure that you are using a
disc designed for your vehicle. The
region coding can be found stamped
on the disc or on the box, and can say ’region-1’ or ’region 4’, etc. They
may also be marked by a numerical symbol.
Macrovision: This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
MP3: Supply of this product only conveys a license for private,
non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to
use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue generating) real time
broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and /or any other media)
broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in
other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or
audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit http:// www.mp3licensing.com.
Safety information
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the
system and retain for future reference.
71
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the Family Entertainment
System (FES). See your dealer.
Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
The front glass on the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down
screen may break when hit with a hard surface. If the glass
breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact
with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.
The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the
DVD system while the vehicle is in motion. Give full attention to
driving and to the road. Pull off the road in a safe place before
inserting or extracting DVDs from the system. A remote control is
included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the
FES functions without distracting the driver.
Do not expose the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive
periods of time. Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal.
Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game
equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment
System (FES).
Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords
and/or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or
cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation
of seats and/or compartments.
Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and/or cables
when not in use.
Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers. Do not blow on
them or allow them to get wet or dirty.
Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene, paint thinner or
any other solvent.
72
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln-Mercury could void
user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference and radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Care and service of the DVD player
Environmental extremes
DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may
be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability. To avoid these
outcomes, whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to:
• extremely hot or cold temperatures.
• direct sunlight.
• high humidity.
• a dusty environment.
• locations where strong magnetic fields are generated.
Temperature extremes
When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold
place for a long period of time, wait until the cabin temperature of the
vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system.
Humidity and moisture condensation
Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely humid
conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one. Moisture
condensation may cause damage to the DVD and/or player. If moisture
condensation occurs, do not insert a CD or DVD into the player. If one is
already in the player, remove it. Turn the DVD player ON to dry the
moisture before inserting a DVD. This could take an hour or more.
Foreign substances
Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD
player compartment. Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind
73
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
onto the media controls or into the system. If liquid is accidentally
spilled onto the system, immediately turn the system OFF and consult a
qualified service technician.
Cleaning the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any
ammonia-based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth. Rub the
screen gently until the dust, dirt or fingerprints are removed. Do not spray
the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents. Overspray from
these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the screen and
cause damage. Do not apply excessive pressure while cleaning the screen.
Cleaning DVD and CD discs
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the
center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion.
Compatibility with aftermarket audio systems (headphone only mode)
When the Family Entertainment System (FES) detects that the original
radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the
vehicle, the FES will work in a state referred to as “Headphone Only
Mode.” This mode allows the FES to operate as a standalone system,
without interface to the radio.
While operating in Headphone Only Mode, the system will have limited
functionality.
• The system will only output audio to the headphones. It will not be
capable of providing audio to the speakers.
• The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD-DISC
and DVD-AUX, regardless of headphone channel (A or B).
• When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode,
both headphone channels (A and B) will be connected to FES-DISC.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System. Refer to the
Navigation supplement for further information.
SYNC (LATE AVAILABILITY — IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC, a hands-free communications
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
more information, please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC
chapter in the Navigation supplement (if equipped).
74
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
2. Air flow selections: Controls
the distribution of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief
description on each control setting:
MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated
air through the instrument panel
vents and center console vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the
interior air is more economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also
help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and center
console vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, center console
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
: Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
Note: You may notice a small amount of air flowing from the defroster
vents and demister vents.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog or thin ice.
The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window
fogging.
3.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
in the vehicle cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time
needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce
undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation
engages automatically with selection of MAX A/C or can be engaged
manually in any other airflow selection except defrost. Recirculation may
turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A/C.
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
4. R
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
information.
75
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
5. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
automatically in MAX A/C,
6. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
(defrost) or
(floor/defrost)
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
(recirculated
air flow selector in the O (OFF) position or with
air) engaged and A/C off.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:
1. Select MAX A/C.
2. Move temperature control selector to the coolest setting.
3. Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
2.
3.
4.
5.
.
Select A/C.
Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
76
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC) SYSTEM
WITH HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
MAX A/C setting: In order to achieve maximum cooling performance,
press
, A/C,
, and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C) and the
highest blower setting.
1.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and
thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. To exit defrost, select another distribution mode.
2. Passenger side temperature control: Press to increase/decrease
the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle. Allows the
passenger to choose and control a different temperature than the driver,
if desired.
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactive the rear window
3. R
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
information.
4. DUAL: Press to engage/disengage separate passenger side
temperature control.
Passenger heated seat: Press to control the passenger heated
5.
seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
77
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
6.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactive air recirculation in
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation can be
engaged manually in any airflow selection except defrost. Recirculation
may turn off automatically in some airflow modes to reduce fog potential.
7. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in AUTO,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
8.
Manual override controls: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is distributed. Press to toggle through the air distribution modes
listed below. The selected mode will illuminate in the display. To return
to full automatic control, press AUTO.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will automatically
provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
: Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window
fogging. Note: You may notice a small amount of air flowing from the
defroster vents and demister vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, center console
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and center
console vents.
9.
Driver heated seat control: Press to control the driver heated
seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Fan Speed: Press to manually increase or decrease the fan
10.
speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
11. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
12. Driver side temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the
temperature on the driver side of the vehicle in dual zone or the
temperature of both the driver and passenger side in single zone.
13. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow distribution, A/C
on or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to
reach the desired temperature.
78
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
14. EXT: Press to display outside temperature. Press again to display
cabin temperature settings. Note: Exterior readings are more accurate
when the vehicle is moving.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather,
(defrost) or
(floor/defrost).
select
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
(recirculated air) engaged and A/C off.
system OFF or with
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:
• Automatic operation:
1. Press AUTO for full automatic operation.
2. Do not override A/C or
(recirculated air).
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
• Manual operation:
1. Select
or
.
2. Select A/C and
(recirculated air). Use
(recirculated air)
with A/C to provide colder airflow.
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
4. Set highest fan setting initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
2.
3.
4.
5.
.
Select A/C.
Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
79
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER R
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.
The ignition must be in the 3 (RUN) position to operate the rear window
defroster.
Press the control to turn the rear window defroster on. An indicator light
on the button will illuminate when active. The rear window defroster
turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turned to
the 1 (LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position. To manually turn off the rear window
defroster at any time, press the control again.
If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors,
the same button will activate both.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
CABIN AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
The cabin air filter element is designed to reduce the concentration of
airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the air being
supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The presence of a particulate filter
element provides the following benefits:
• Improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration.
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness.
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits.
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or damage to the system. If your
vehicle is not equipped with a cabin air filter, a protective screen has
been provided in its place and must remain installed at all times.
The access door for the filter is located behind the glove box. For
replacement intervals regarding the cabin air filter, see the scheduled
maintenance information. For more information regarding your filter,
see your authorized dealer.
80
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control to the
to turn on the
first position
parking lamps. Rotate to the second
to turn on the
position
headlamps.
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds or, if equipped with a
message center, you can select a
delay from 0–180 seconds, after the
ignition switch is turned to OFF. See
Message Center (if equipped) in
the Driver Controls chapter.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to OFF.
Note: Some vehicles may be equipped with a headlamps on with
windshield wipers feature. If the windshield wipers are turned on (for
a fixed period of time) the exterior lamps will turn on with headlamp
control in the Autolamp position.
81
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Fog lamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the fog lamps. The fog lamps can be
turned on when the headlamp
,
or
control is in the
positions and the high beams are
not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn fog lamps on. The fog lamp
will illuminate.
indicator light
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on at reduced intensity output. To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control must be in the OFF or Parking lamps position.
82
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
Certain displays like the message
center and the climate control unit
do not change with the dimmer control till the dash-mounted sensor
senses full night conditions.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full Dome/ON position to reset.
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
83
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the
headlamp bulb center from the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.5
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe an area of high intensity
light. The top of the high intensity
area should touch the horizontal
reference line, if not, the beam will
need to be adjusted using the next
step.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
84
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front row map lamps (if equipped)
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The
front row map lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is OFF.
Map/dome lamp (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened,
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of
the lens.
85
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Rear courtesy lamp
Located in the rear cargo area, the
courtesy lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Number of bulbs
Headlamp high beam
Headlamp low beam
Front park/turn signal
lamp
Rear sidemarker lamp
Stop/tail/turn lamp
Backup lamp
License plate lamp
* High-mount brake lamp
Fog lamp (if equipped)
86
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
N/A
2
Trade
number
9005
H11
3157NAK
(amber)
194
4157 K
921
C5W
LED
H11
Lights
Function
Number of bulbs
Trade
number
W5W
Map lamp
2
Second row dome/reading
3
578
lamp
Rear courtesy lamp
1
W5W
Visor vanity lamp - Slide
on Rail system (SOR) (if
2
37
equipped)
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Reach over the front bolster.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and then pulling it
straight out.
87
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
5. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb.
6. Connect the electrical connector
on the bulb.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
7. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly.
When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, turn the new bulb
clockwise to install.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Reach over the front bolster.
4. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
the lamp assembly.
5. Carefully pull the bulb out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
88
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing tail/stop/turn/sidemarker/backup lamp bulbs
The tail/stop/turn/sidemarker/backup lamp bulbs are located in the same
portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow the
same steps to replace either bulb:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then open
the liftgate to expose the lamp
assembly bolts.
2. Remove the two bolts from the
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully remove the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle by
pulling the assembly straight out to
expose the bulb socket. DO NOT
TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and snap in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
7. Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the
lamp assembly with two bolts.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high-mount stop lamp. It is
designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, see
your authorized dealer.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Depress the lever and carefully
pry the license plate lamp assembly
(located above the license plate)
from the liftgate.
3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
89
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket
and push in the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
6. To install, carefully press the
lamp assembly into liftgate.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (if equipped)
1. Make sure the fog lamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. From underneath the vehicle,
remove splash shield and rotate the
harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise, to remove from
the fog lamp.
3. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly via the two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
90
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers: When
the wiper control is on, the speed of
the wipers will automatically adjust
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the
wipers will go.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will happen a few seconds
after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down
from the top of the windshield caused by the washing.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper features (if equipped with Autolamp feature)
The exterior lamps will turn on with the ignition on, headlamp control in
the Autolamp position and the windshield wipers are turned on (for a
fixed period of time).
91
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
Select:
2 — Normal speed operation of rear
wiper.
1 — Intermittent operation of rear
wiper.
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer
position.
control to either
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT 2
or OFF position.
TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down to unlock the
steering column.
2. While the lever is in the down
position, move the steering wheel
up or down and in or out until you
find the desired position.
3. While holding the steering wheel
in place, pull the lever up to its
original position to lock the steering
column.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
92
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.
Slide on rod feature
The visor will slide back and forth
on the rod for increased sunlight
coverage. Rotate the visor towards
the side window and extend it
rearward for additional sunlight
coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Forward storage bin (if equipped)
The storage compartment may be
used to store a pair of sunglasses.
Press the release area on the rear
edge of the bin door to open the
storage compartment. The door will
open to full open position.
93
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cupholders
2. Tissue box holder (located on
underside of console lid)
3. Rear power point
4. Utility compartment with a
clamshell tray with coin holder and
a removable divider for organizing
and storing personal items including
a laptop computer, MP3 players,
CDs or handbags.
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located
on the instrument panel.
A second auxiliary power point is
located in the center console utility
compartment.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or
cigar lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information
on checking and replacing fuses.
94
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
A third auxiliary power point is
located on the rear side of the
center console. The power point is
accessible from the rear seats.
The rear auxiliary power point is
located on the left rear quarter
panel. The power point is accessible
from the liftgate or behind the rear
seat.
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
95
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Push down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
AUTO
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to
three inches.
One touch down (AUTO)
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Push the switch completely
down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will
open fully. Momentarily press the
switch to any position to stop the
window operation.
96
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver’s) press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the audio system, power windows and moon roof
(if equipped) operate for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned from the ON to the OFF position or until either front door is
opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror which
has an auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will
change from the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare
(darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the
mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically
adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
Without voice activated
Navigation System or SYNC
97
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
With voice activated Navigation
System or SYNC
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
98
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
Heated outside mirrors
(if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
99
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
light on the
5. The indicator
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal.
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
100
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by 1
mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached and
press the SET + control.
101
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will
not erase your vehicle’s
previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use steering wheel controls and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
These controls allow you to operate some radio control features.
Radio control features
Press MEDIA to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2, or CD
• DVD/FES (if equipped)
• SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite
Radio mode if equipped).
• LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack)
102
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
In Radio mode:
to access the
• Press
next/previous preset station.
In CD mode:
to listen to the
• Press
next track on the disc.
In Satellite radio mode (if
equipped):
to advance through preset channels.
• Press
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or - to adjust the
volume.
Navigation system hands free
control features (if equipped)
control briefly
Press and hold
icon appears on
until the voice
the Navigation display to use the
voice command feature.
to complete a voice
Press
command.
For further information on the
Navigation system, refer to the Navigation supplement.
103
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
SYNC system hands free control
feature (if equipped)
briefly to use the voice
Press
command feature. You will hear a
tone and LISTENING will appear in
the radio display. Press and
hold
to exit voice command.
to activate phone mode or
Press
answer a phone call. Press and
hold
to end call or exit phone mode.
Press OK to confirm your selection.
For further information on the SYNC system, refer to the SYNC supplement.
Navigation system/SYNC hands
free control features (if equipped)
Press
control briefly until the
icon appears on the
voice
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
to activate phone mode or
Press
answer a phone call. Press and
hold
to exit phone mode or end
call.
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC system, refer to
the Navigation and SYNC supplements.
PANORAMIC VISTA ROOF™ AND POWER SUNSHADES
(IF EQUIPPED)
The panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade controls are located on
the overhead console.
Do not let children play with the panoramic Vista Roof™ and
power sunshade or leave children unattended in the vehicle.
They may seriously hurt themselves.
When closing the panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade,
you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that
children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the panoramic Vista
Roof™ and power sunshade opening.
104
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: Do not attempt to move the panoramic power sunshades manually
or sunshade damage or malfunction may occur. The sunshade track clips
are designed to release the sunshade crossbar in order to prevent
damage to the system. If this occurs the sunshade crossbar ends may
just need to be slid back into position to regain proper function. See
your authorized dealer for proper panoramic Vista Roof™ or sunshade
operating, diagnostic or repair instructions.
To operate power sunshades:
Press the OPEN portion of the
control to open the sunshade. The
front and rear sunshades open
simultaneously. Press the CLOSE
portion of the control until the
sunshades stop at the “Express
close” position. Firmly press and
hold the control again to fully close the front and rear sunshades.
Note: Closing the sunshade will also close the panoramic Vista Roof™, if
open.
To open the panoramic Vista
Roof™: Press and hold to open
manually. The panoramic Vista
Roof™ is equipped with a one-touch
open feature. Firmly press and
release the rear control. The
panoramic Vista Roof™ will open to
the “comfort” position. Firmly press
and release the control again to fully open. To stop the one-touch open
feature press any control again.
Note: Opening the panoramic Vista Roof™ will also open the sunshades,
if closed.
Note: The panoramic Vista Roof™ will open to the “comfort” position
first before opening all the way. The “comfort” position helps to alleviate
rumbling wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully
opened.
To close the panoramic Vista Roof™: Press and release the front
control until the glass panel stops at the “Express close” position. Firmly
press and hold the control again to fully close.
To vent the panoramic Vista Roof™: From the closed position, press
and release the TILT control. To vent the panoramic Vista Roof™ from
any position, press and hold the TILT control. To close, press and hold
the front control.
105
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: If the panoramic Vista Roof™ is excessively operated, the glass
and shade motors will automatically go into a fail-safe jog mode (manual
intermittent operation) to prevent overheating and/or damage to the
motor. The motors will revert back to normal operation after a period of
idle time.
HOMELINK姞 WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The HomeLink威 Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential injury or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威. It is
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
106
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
1. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威
button you wish to program (located
on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink威 and
hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink威 indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” in this section for Canadian residents.
3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the
door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威
button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed
and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 4 through
6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence again and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with Step 1 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
107
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Step 1 outlined in
the “Programming” section,
replace Step 2 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note Step 2 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 3 in the “Programming” section.
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
108
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step
1 in the “Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow Step 1 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
MINI MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Selectable features
Press and release the TRIP/RESET stem to scroll and reset the following
functions. Select or reset the function by holding the TRIP/RESET stem
for more than 2 seconds.
Info menu
This menu displays the following control displays:
• Odometer
• Trip Odometer A or B
• Reverse Park Aid (if equipped)
• Autolamp (if equipped)
109
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: Engine can not be running to change the state of Autolamp or
Rear Park Assist (when not in Reverse).
Autolamp (if equipped)
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
using TRIP/RESET stem for the
current display mode.
2. Press and hold the TRIP/RESET
stem for 2 seconds to select the
new Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
Reverse Sensing System (Park assist) (if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
1. To disable/enable the reverse
sensing system feature, select this
function using the TRIP/RESET
stem or put the vehicle in R
(Reverse).
2. Press and hold the TRIP/RESET stem for 2 seconds to turn the rear
park assist OFF or ON.
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the RUN
position, the message center,
located on your instrument cluster,
displays important vehicle
information through a constant
monitor of vehicle systems. You
may select display features on the message center for a display of status.
The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a
display of system warnings followed by a long indicator chime.
110
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Odometer
• Trip Odometer A or B
• Distance to Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Average Speed
• Compass (if equipped)
• Trip Elapsed Drive Time 1 or 2
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If you RESET this warning
message, this display will return within 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
111
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or liters/100
km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing 100 miles
traveled by gallons of fuel used (kilometers traveled by liters used), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for 2
seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed control to
get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Fuel Information in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
Average Speed
Select this function from the INFO menu to display AVERAGE SPEED
and press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in
order to reset the function). Your average speed from that point will be
displayed until RESET is pressed and held for two seconds again.
Compass display (if equipped)
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
112
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines.
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Turn ignition to the RUN position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press the INFO button repeatedly until the Compass and Odometer
are displayed. (Do not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The top of the message
center must be blank).
Note: If the compass displays ⬙CAL 000000.0 mi⬙ instead of heading
information, the compass will need to be calibrated. Slowly drive the
vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until the ⬙CAL⬙ indicator
changes to display compass heading. This may take up to 3 circles to
complete calibration.
4. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
3 2
1
15
4
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
5. Press and hold the RESET until
the message center display changes
to show the current zone setting.
113
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
6. Release the RESET control, then
slowly press RESET down again.
7. Press the SETUP control
repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location
is displayed on the message center. To exit the zone setting mode press
and release the RESET control.
8. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE indicator changes to
CALIBRATION COMPLETED. This
will take up to three circles to complete calibration.
10. The compass is now calibrated.
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• System Check
• Units (English/Metric)
• Autolamp
• Autolock
• Autounlock
114
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Power Liftgate (if equipped)
• Easy entry/exit seat (if equipped)
• Reverse sensing system (Park Assist) (if equipped)
• Language
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message
for two to four seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report is as follows:
1. DOORS CLOSED
2. ENGINE TEMPERATURE
3. OIL PRESSURE
4. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
5. WASHER FLUID LEVEL
6. FUEL LEVEL
7. DISTANCE TO EMPTY
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
Autolamp delay
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
115
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to select
the new Autolamp delay values of 0,
10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
Autolock
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
1. To disable/enable the autolock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolock ON or OFF.
Autounlock
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
1. To disable/enable the autounlock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP MENU.
2. Press and hold the RESET
control switch to turn the
autounlock ON or OFF.
3. Press the RESET control switch for the next SETUP MENU item.
Easy entry/exit (if equipped)
This feature automatically moves the drivers seat backwards for easy exit
from the vehicle.
1. To disable/enable the easy
entry/exit seat feature, select this
function from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the easy entry/exit seat ON or OFF.
116
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Power Liftgate (if equipped)
This feature allows users to open/close the rear liftgate at the touch of a
button.
1. To disable/enable the power
liftgate feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the power liftgate ON or OFF.
Reverse Sensing System (Park aid) (if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
1. To disable/enable the reverse
sensing system feature, select this
function from the SETUP menu or
put the vehicle in R (Reverse).
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the rear park aid OFF or ON.
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Pressing the RESET control
cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish and French.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control for 2 seconds to set the
language choice.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
117
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for several
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
• They will not disappear until a condition is changed.
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition LOCK/OFF-RUN cycle has
been completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warnings
Driver door ajar
Passenger door ajar
Rear left door ajar
Rear right door ajar
Park brake engaged
Low fuel level
Check brake system
Low brake fluid level
Liftgate ajar
Low tire pressure
Tire pressure monitor fault
Tire pressure sensor fault
Compass data error
Integrated key programming
status
Status
Warning cannot be reset (PLEASE
CLOSE DOOR) will be displayed
RELEASE PARK BRAKE will be
displayed
Warning returns after 10 minutes
Warning returns after the ignition key
is turned from LOCK/OFF to RUN
Maximum number of Integrated Keys
exceeded
DRIVER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger side door is
not completely closed.
118
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear right door is not
completely closed.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED. Displayed when the manual park brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5
km). If the warning stays on after the park brake is released, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LOW FUEL LEVEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM. Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid
reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
LIFTGATE AJAR. Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE. Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT. Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Tire pressure monitoring system in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
COMPASS DATA ERROR (if equipped). Displayed when the compass
is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
INTEGRATED KEY PROGRAMMING STATUS. Displayed when an
attempt is made to program a fifth Integrated Key to the Remote Key
Entry System. For more information on Integrated Key, refer to Locks
and Security chapter in this manual.
119
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT (IF EQUIPPED)
Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installed
floor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the
brake pedals.
To install floor mats that have a retention post:
Position the floor mat so that the
eyelet is over the pointed end of the
retention post and rotate forward to
lock in. Make sure that the mat does
not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator or the brake pedal.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
MANUAL LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, not passengers. You can open
and close the liftgate from outside the vehicle. It cannot be opened from
inside the cargo area.
Note: In the event of a power failure, the latch can be accessed and
released through the access panel in the liftgate trim.
To open, push the control button
located above the liftgate outside
handle to unlatch the liftgate, then
pull on the outside handle to access
the cargo area.
• Exercise care when opening or
closing the liftgate in a garage or
other enclosed area. The liftgate
could be damaged against a
garage door, low ceiling or wall.
• Do not hang anything (bike rack, etc.) from the spoiler/glass or
liftgate. Doing so could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its
components.
• Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. Doing so could cause
serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing
carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle.
120
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes
from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate door open, keep the vehicle well ventilated so outside air
comes into the vehicle.
Liftgate ajar signal
If the liftgate is not fully latched, you will receive a “LIFTGATE AJAR”
message on the instrument panel. If you see this message, check the
liftgate door to ensure it is fully latched.
POWER LIFTGATE (PLG) (IF EQUIPPED)
You can power open or close the liftgate with the following controls.
• instrument panel control button
• integrated keyhead transmitter button
• outside liftgate control button
• control button in the rear cargo area
Opening and Closing the power liftgate:
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate
area before using the power liftgate control.
Keep keys out of reach of children. Do not allow children to play
near an open or moving power liftgate.
The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P (Park).
When the liftgate is being power closed, a chime will sound three times
as the liftgate begins to power close. A single chime indicates a problem
with the close request, caused by:
• the ignition is in Run and the transmission is not in Park
• or the Battery Voltage is below the minimum operating voltage
• or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 kph)
A fast continuous chime during power closing indicates there is an
excessive load on the liftgate (snow, bike rack, etc.) or a possible strut
malfunction. If any excessive load is removed and you still have a faster
chime, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
121
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Do not attempt to manually force the liftgate to travel faster than the
power system will permit. This will activate the obstacle detection
feature.
Exercise care, when power opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or
other enclosed area with a low ceiling or close to a wall/garage door. The
liftgate could be damaged from the contact. Disable the power feature
and operate the liftgate manually if necessary.
When power operating the liftgate at temperatures below 32° F (0° C),
the liftgate may stop about 5 inches (12.7 cm) from the full open
position. The liftgate can be fully opened by pushing it upward to the
maximum open position.
The Power Liftgate feature can be
enabled or disabled using the
Message Center. With the control in
the OFF position, power operation
is disabled from the liftgate handle
button and from the rear cargo area button. The integrated keyhead
transmitter and instrument panel switch will operate the liftgate
regardless of the position state of the Message Center. Refer to the
Message Center section in this chapter.
To power open or close the
liftgate from the Instrument
panel:
Press the button, located to the left
of the steering column, once to
power open or close the liftgate.
To power open or close the
liftgate with the integrated
keyhead transmitter:
twice within 3 seconds to
Press
fully unlatch and open the liftgate.
Refer to Remote entry system in
the Locks and Security chapter.
122
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To power open the liftgate with
outside liftgate control button:
1. To open, unlock the liftgate with
the integrated keyhead transmitter
or power door unlock control.
2. Push the control button located
above the liftgate outside handle to
unlatch and power open the liftgate.
Note: For the best performance
allow the power system to open the
liftgate after pushing the control. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate
may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and stop the power
system.
To power close the liftgate with
the rear cargo area control
button:
Press and release the control on the
left rear quarter panel to close the
liftgate.
Note: The rear cargo area control
button is disabled when the liftgate
is latched.
Warning, keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear
switch.
Note: The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second
press of the instrument panel, or the rear cargo area control button, or a
second double press of the integrated keyhead transmitter button.
To manually operate the liftgate:
1. Disable the liftgate power function. Refer to the Message Center in
this chapter.
2. Open and close the liftgate as you would a standard liftgate. Refer to
the Manual liftgate in this chapter.
Note: In case of operation in extreme cold -40° F (-40° C), or on
extreme inclines, manual operation of the liftgate is suggested.
123
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Obstacle detection
The power liftgate system is equipped with an obstacle detection feature.
If the power liftgate is closing, the system will reverse to full open when
it detects an obstacle. A chime will sound 3 times when an obstacle is
detected as the liftgate begins to reopen. Once the obstacle is removed,
the liftgate can be closed under power.
If the power liftgate is opening, the system will stop and a chime will
sound 3 times when an obstacle is detected. Once the obstacle is
removed, the liftgate can again be operated normally.
Resetting the power liftgate:
The power liftgate may not operate properly and may need to be reset if
any of these conditions occur:
• a low voltage or dead battery or disconnected battery
• the liftgate has been left open or unlatched for more than six (6)
hours
To reset the power liftgate:
1. Ensure the battery is properly connected and charged.
2. Manually close and fully latch the liftgate.
3. Power open the liftgate by using the integrated keyhead transmitter,
or the instrument panel control button. The outside liftgate control
button can also be used if the power liftgate is enabled in the Message
Center.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the power liftgate needs to be power opened to the full open
position to reset the power liftgate positions.
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The cargo management system
consists of storage compartments
located in the floor of the rear cargo
area.
1. To open, lift the release handle
and the lid.
2. To close, lower the lid.
124
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
LUGGAGE RACK (IF EQUIPPED)
The load must be placed directly on the luggage rack. The vehicle’s roof
panel is not designed to carry a load.
When loading the luggage rack, it is recommended to evenly distribute
the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Ensure that the load
is securely fastened. The maximum load for the roof rack is 100 lb
(44 kg).
Your fuel economy will decrease when you drive with items on the
luggage rack. When the rack is loaded, check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each refueling stop.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
125
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
Your vehicle is equipped with two
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(IKTs). The IKT functions as both a
programmed ignition key that
operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, and a remote keyless entry
transmitter. Vehicles with a power
liftgate will have a four-button IKT
while vehicles without a power
liftgate will have a three-button IKT.
Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer
supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized
dealer. Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired.
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to
the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were
issued with an adhesive security
label on them that provides
important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you maintain the label in a safe
place for future reference, such as
the inside front cover of this
Owner’s Guide.
126
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Recommended handling of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)
To avoid inadvertently activating the remote entry functions of your
vehicle, it is recommended that the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT) be handled properly when starting and turning off your vehicle.
When inserting the IKT into the
ignition cylinder, place your thumb
on the center thumb rest of the IKT
and forefinger on the logo badge on
the opposite side.
To gain more leverage when rotating
the IKT in the ignition lock cylinder,
you can readjust the location of
your thumb to grasp the IKT on the
control.
outer edge next to the
Likewise, when rotating the IKT to
the 1 (LOCK) position in the
ignition lock cylinder, the bottom
edge of the IKT adjacent to the
control can be utilized.
127
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
POWER DOOR LOCKS
• Press the
doors.
control to unlock all
• Press the
doors.
control to lock all
Smart locks
This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle
if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors or the liftgate and you lock the
vehicle with the power door lock control (on the driver or passenger
door trim panel), all the doors will lock, then all doors will automatically
unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, by locking
the driver’s door with a key, using the lock control on the remote entry
transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter, or locking
the vehicle with the keyless entry keypad (if equipped).
If both front doors and the liftgate are closed, the vehicle can be locked
from any method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Autolock feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for greater
than 2 seconds.
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 (RUN)
position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
greater than 2 seconds.
128
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock procedure,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all
vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds
or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position. The horn will chirp once
to confirm the procedure is complete.
129
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Keyless entry key pad autolock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Autounlock feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position, all the doors are closed, and
the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20
km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the 1
(LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the 1 (LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
130
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all
vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds
or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position. The horn will chirp once
to confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry key pad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 • 4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
131
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Insert the key and turn to the
lock position (key horizontal) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the
unlock position (key vertical) to
disengage the childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
132
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
There are 2 possible types of IKTs:
• Vehicles equipped with a power
liftgate
• Vehicles not equipped with a
power liftgate
The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
133
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The IKT allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle doors.
• remotely lock all the vehicle doors.
• remotely open the power liftgate (if equipped).
• activate the personal alarm.
• operate the illuminated entry feature.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position
except while the key is held in the 4 (START) position. The panic
feature operates with the key in the 1 (LOCK) position.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the authorized
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors/two stage unlock
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
doors.
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this
feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned
to the 3 (RUN) position.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on using the dimmer control or
• any door is open.
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously
pressing the
and
controls on the IKT for four seconds (disabling
two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously). The
turn lamps will flash twice to indicate that two-stage unlock was enabled
or disabled.
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. The turn lamps will flash.
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
2. Press
the doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp
and the turn lamps will flash once if all the doors and liftgate are closed.
134
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Note: If any door or the liftgate is not closed, the horn will chirp twice
and the lamps will not flash.
Opening the power liftgate (if equipped)
Press
twice within 3 seconds to fully unlatch and open the liftgate.
Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area before using
power liftgate control.
In order to fully lower and latch the liftgate, press the control twice.
If the liftgate stops mid travel, it may have detected an obstacle, Check
to ensure the liftgate swing zone is free from obstruction and reset the
power assist by manually closing the liftgate. Normal operation can then
be resumed.
Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from
being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent passengers
and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle.
Car finder
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
Press
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the turn lamps
Press
will flash for a maximum of 3 minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to
the 3 (RUN) position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to timeout in 3
minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) position.
Memory seat feature (if equipped)
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter allows you to recall the memory
seat/mirror feature.
to automatically move the seat/mirrors to the desired memory
Press
position. Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is
not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
135
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat and mirrors to the desired positions.
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
3. Within 5 five seconds, press the
lock or unlock control on the
Integrated keyhead Transmitter and
then press the 1 or 2 control on the
driver’s door panel which you would
like to associate with the seat and
Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if desired.
Deactivating the memory feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door panel.
2. Within five seconds, press the lock or unlock control on the Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter which you would like to deactivate and then press
the SET control on the driver’s door panel again.
3. Repeat this procedure for another Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if
desired.
Replacing the battery
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three-volt
lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
IKT near the key ring in order to
remove the battery cover.
136
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the
correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that
the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become
deprogrammed from your vehicle. The IKT should operate normally after
battery replacement.
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your
authorized dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself, refer to
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft
section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform
this procedure yourself.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) illuminate when the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or the keyless entry system keypad is
used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (RUN) position, or
• the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
137
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Perimeter lamps illuminated entry
With the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter system, the following items will
illuminate when the
(unlock) control on the transmitter is pressed:
• Head lamps
• Park lamps
• Tail lamps
The lamps will automatically turn off:
• if the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (RUN) position, or
• the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
Note: On some vehicles, the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature
will not activate in daylight conditions.
Deactivating/activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry
You may enable/disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by
your authorized dealer.
You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to
enable/disable the perimeter lamps feature. Note: Before starting, ensure
the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
138
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. Press the power door unlock control twice within 5 seconds. Note:
The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has
been deactivated. The horn will chirp once and honk once (one short
and one long) to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position to exit the procedure.
Note: The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete.
Illuminated exit
• When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the
ignition, the interior dome lamps (and the exterior mirror puddle
lamps, if equipped) will illuminate.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the key is inserted in the ignition.
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control, the
battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors
or the trunk was opened, the battery saver will shut off them off 10
minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• recall memory seat/power mirrors
positions (if equipped).
139
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to three of
your own 5–digit personal entry codes.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory seats and mirrors (if equipped)
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit
to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the
personal entry code:
• Pressing 1 • 2 recalls Driver 1 settings.
• Pressing 3 • 4 recalls Driver 2 settings.
• Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a
sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory setting.
5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal keycode
has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
140
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the UNLOCK
control on the remote entry transmitter
portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (RUN) position.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: If the two-stage unlocking
feature is disabled, all doors will unlock; for more information regarding
two-stage unlocking, refer to the Two stage unlocking section earlier in
this chapter.
To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time (with
the driver’s door closed). You do not need to enter the keypad code
first.
SECURILOCK™ PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of
coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters;
additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer.
Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired. The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your
vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself. Refer to Programming
spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitters for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
141
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster.
• When the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) position, the indicator
will flash once every 2 seconds to
indicate the SecuriLock™ system
is functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position, the indicator will glow
for 3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock™ system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle will not start and should be taken to an
authorized dealer for service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the 1
(LOCK) position.
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds to act as a theft
deterrent when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the 3
(RUN) position.
The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If
the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes
rapidly, have the system serviced by your authorized dealer.
142
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Replacement Integrated Keyless Transmitters (IKT) and coded keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead
Transmitters (IKTs). The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be
programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be IKTs
with remote entry functionality.
If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock™ coded keys are lost or stolen and
you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from
your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard
SecuriLock™ coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program
both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter
portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded
keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be
IKTs with remote entry functionality.
Tips:
• Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or standard
SecuriLock™ keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
143
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Please read and understand the
entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three seconds, but
no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
4. Within ten seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three seconds, but
no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the second
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. Within twenty seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the
new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The
theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may
repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait twenty seconds
and then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
144
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Adjustable head restraints
To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash, the
driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and/or operate
the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its proper position. The
driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in
motion.
Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.
Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as
possible behind your head.
The head restraints can be moved
up by pulling up on the head
restraint.
145
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Push release button to lower head
restraint.
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar control is located on the
side of the seat cushion.
Lift up or down to adjust lumbar
support.
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
146
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
Pump the handle upwards to raise
the cushion and pump downward to
lower the cushion to the desired
location.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
Folding down the front passenger seatback (if equipped)
The front passenger seatback can be folded to a horizontal position to
make room for a long load. To fold the seatback:
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Push the head restraint release button and move the head restraint
fully down.
147
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Pull up on the recliner handle
located on the outboard side of the
seat to fold the front passenger
seatback.
4. Without releasing the handle,
push the seatback forward.
5. Move the seat as far forward as
possible.
Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to
occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during
sudden stops.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
148
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback,
with your feet on the floor.
To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not hang objects
off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket (if
equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place
objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and
the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag off” or
“pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer to Front
passenger sensing system section for additional details. Failure to
follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat
sensing system.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the switch in the direction of
the arrows to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Tilt function
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to tilt the seat forward or
backward.
149
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Memory seat and mirrors (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat and
outside rearview mirrors, to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat and exterior
mirrors to the desired positions
using the associated controls.
Press the SET control. The SET control light will briefly illuminate.
While the light is illuminated, press control 1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park
(automatic transmission). A memory seat position may be programmed
at any time.
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control and the transmitter is programmed to
a memory seat position or when you enter a valid customer code 1 or 2
on the keypad.
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter..
Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not
in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
Easy-entry/easy-exit feature (if equipped)
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat rearward 2 inches
(5 cm) when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is removed from the ignition cylinder
The seat will move forward (to the original position) when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is placed in the ignition cylinder
150
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Heated seats (if equipped)
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions, must
exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or other
pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which
may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the ignition is in RUN.
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the control located on the
climate control system panel once
to activate high heat.
• Push twice to activate low heat.
• Push a third time to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. For low
heat, one light will be lit; for high heat, both lights will be lit.
REAR SEATS
Head restraints
Lift the head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible
behind your head.
151
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The head restraints can be moved
up by pulling up on the head
restraint.
Push release button to lower head
restraint.
Folding down the 60/40 rear seats
Note: The head restraints should be placed in the full down position
before folding the seatback down.
Note: Ensure that no objects such as books, purses, or briefcases are on
the floor in front of, on or under the second row seat cushion before
actuating the release lever to cycle the seats to the load-floor position.
To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts, ensure
that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to
the load floor position.
152
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2nd row manual folding seat
To fold down the rear seat, pull up
on the lever on the outboard side of
the seat cushion and let the
seatback rotate downward into the
load floor position.
2nd row EasyFold™ seatback release
Ensure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it down.
Folding the seat while occupied could result in damage to the
seat or injury.
Note: The power feature is operational when the vehicle is in park and
the lifgate has been open for less than 10 minutes.
The control buttons are located on the left-hand rear quarter trim panel
(accessible from the liftgate area).
Press and hold the control
mechanism to lower the seatback.
The top portion lowers the right
(40%) seatback, and the bottom
portion lowers the left (60%)
seatback.
153
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Returning the 2nd row seatback to the upright position
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that the latches are engaged. An unlatched seat
may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Rotate the seatback upward until the seatback latches in the upright
position. The seatback will click when it is locked into position.
Adjusting the second row seatback
Reclining the seatback can
cause an occupant to slide
under the seat’s safety belt,
resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
The second row seat reclines for
additional comfort. To adjust the
second row seatback to the desired
position, while seated, pull the
release lever up and push the
seatback rearward.
154
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seat mounted armrest and cupholders
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
seat armrest. To fold the armrest
down, release the latch located on
the seatback by pressing down and
pulling forward.
To access the cup holders, lift up
one of the slotted areas on the
cover.
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
Returning the 2nd row armrest to the upright position
Close the cover on the cup holders. Rotate the armrest rearward until
the armrest is in the latched position. The armrest will click when it is
latched into position.
155
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, and in rollovers and side collisions
when the Safety Canopy is activated.
156
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, this occurs
because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other
occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by
safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash
braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary
injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident
statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the front.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
157
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front
passenger airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag. The system is
designed to help protect small (child size) occupants from frontal airbag
deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger seat
contrary to proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even
with this technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger
front airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag (if equipped) when the
passenger seat is empty and the safety belt is unbuckled.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment
and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt section in this chapter.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in rollover and side collisions when the
Safety Canopy is activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with
the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational
The Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning light section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
158
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal Safety
System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced,
the system may not function properly in the event of a collision.
Safety belt precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
159
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or
if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the safety
belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement.
160
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Energy Management Feature — Front Outboard
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a head-on collision.
• The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is
designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner.
This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the Belt and
Retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have two
types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
161
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a
booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety
seats for children later in this chapter.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety belt
assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision to verify that the ⬙automatic
locking retractor⬙ feature for child seats is still working properly. Safety
belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized dealer and must
be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Failure to
replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
162
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
The driver and front passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the
vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front
airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and Safety Canopy™, and safety
belt pretensioners.
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
pull on the center button and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Second row comfort guide
The second row outboard
lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
belt comfort guide. This guide is
attached to the head restraint and is
stored in a pocket in the seatback.
It is used to adjust the comfort of
the shoulder belt for smaller
occupants in the outboard second
row seats.
163
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the
belt guide.
2. Slide the guide up or down along
the webbing so that the belt is
centered on the occupant’s shoulder.
Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
164
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an
authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue
to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
165
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8
seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled
while the indicator light is
illuminated and the warning chime
is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and
before the ignition switch is turned indicator chime remain off.
to the ON position...
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder威 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature.
166
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position or less than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
ON...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph (5
km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to
ON...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately 1
minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 3 mph (5
km/h) and more than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
to ON...
Then...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
167
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare events”
“I’m not going far”
“Belts are uncomfortable”
“I was in a hurry”
“Safety belts don’t work”
“Traffic is light”
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
168
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
“I have an airbag”
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Consider...
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate
into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To do so may
adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag system.
One time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the safety belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minder威 is disabled for
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minder威 feature will enable during
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time
disable.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.
169
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in N (Neutral) (manual transmission)
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt-Minder威, this
system is designed to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the
Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. DO NOT START
THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (Approximately 1–2
minutes).
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt nine times, ending in the unbuckled state.
Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three
seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning
light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
170
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important supplemental restraint system precautions
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or
gently and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
171
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying
airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
Do not put anything on or over the airbag module. Placing
objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
authorized dealer.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
172
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the safety belt pretensioner and airbag supplemental
restraint system work?
The safety belt pretensioner and
airbag SRS are designed to activate
when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates
pretensioner activation and airbag
inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not
activate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Front airbags are designed to activate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
173
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
• seat-mounted side airbags . Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag
system later in this chapter
• safety belt pretensioners
• one or more impact and safing sensors
174
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• a readiness light and tone
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components
• Side curtain airbag system. Refer to Safety Canopy™ system later in
this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system. later in this chapter.
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system. later in this chapter.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power, the airbag ignitors and safety belt pretensioners.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat.
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat.
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time.
175
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator
lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel above the
climate controls.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the ON position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator lamp will be unlit and stay
unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
176
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Lit
Empty seat
Small child in child
safety seat or booster
Small child with safety Lit
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Adult
Unlit
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the back seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
177
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Objects
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Passenger Airbag
Small (i.e. 3 ring
Disabled
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy
Lit
Disabled
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small
Lit
Disabled
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
178
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least 2 minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is no
longer illuminated
• If the airbag readiness light remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
Determining if the system is operational
The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the
system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
179
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light
for front and side airbag system)
will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag SRS, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag. See your
authorized dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts
even when an airbag SRS is provided.
180
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• The same warning light,
electronic control and diagnostic
unit as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted on the B pillar (one on each side of the
vehicle).
• Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. If the front passenger sensing system
detects an empty seat, the front passenger seat-mounted side airbag will
be deactivated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
181
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the side airbag has
deployed, the airbag will
not function again. The side
airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness light (same light as used for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned to the RUN position.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
182
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety Canopy™ system
Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying Safety Canopy™.
Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of personal
injury in the event of a collision.
Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety Canopy™ could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Safety Canopy™
system, its fuses, the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the headliner on
a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy™. See your authorized dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety
Canopy™ system is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy™.
183
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the Safety Canopy™ system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy™ system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy™).
The Safety Canopy™ system
consists of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow
Safety Canopy™ deployment.
• The same readiness airbag light, electronic control and diagnostic unit
as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted on the B pillar (one on each side of the
vehicle).
• Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy™ system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy™ will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy™ system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy™ inflation or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
184
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The Safety Canopy™ is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, along the entire side of the vehicle. In certain lateral collisions
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy™ system will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy™ is designed
to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy™ did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy™ is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or
rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover.
If the Safety Canopy™
system has deployed, the
Safety Canopy™ will not
function again unless replaced.
The Safety Canopy™ system
(including the A, B, C, and D
pillar trim and headliner) must
be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the
Safety Canopy™ is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness airbag light (same light as for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system
may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event.
185
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be
positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck,
the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to
the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
186
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury in a crash.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
187
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
188
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s head
hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should never use a
booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster seat with
lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children to ride.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt
does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
189
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
Supplemental Restraint System
section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode.
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to
48 lb (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used for
children up to 60 lb (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide upper
torso restraint for children up to 80 lb (36 kg) using an upper torso
harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a
top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with
LATCH and tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps
and anchors, refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this
chapter. For more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching
safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
attachments in this chapter.
190
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed
in front of an active passenger airbag.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
191
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
192
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2
through 9.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
193
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under the second row
seat gap cover marked with tether anchor symbols (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
Do not use seat anchors as cargo tie downs.
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. For seating
positions with non-adjustable (fixed) head restraints, route the tether
strap over the top of the head restraint.
194
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Locate the correct anchor behind
the gap cover for the selected
seating position.
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
5. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the LATCH anchors or safety belts. Follow the instructions in this
chapter.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach
the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also
be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
195
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The anchors at the center of the
rear seat are further apart than the
sets of lower anchors for child seat
installation at other seating
positions. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at this seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with
attachments on belt webbing) can
be used at this seating position only if the child seat instructions state
that the child seat can be installed to anchors that are spaced up to 20
inches (500 mm) apart. Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if
an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor.
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back. The LATCH
anchors are below the locator
symbols on the seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
196
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
197
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO CROSSOVER VEHICLE OWNERS
Crossover vehicles handle differently
than passenger cars in the various
driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways
and off-road. Crossover vehicles are
not designed for cornering at speeds
as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear seat belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints to
minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide for specific information about equipment
features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
All Wheel Drive (AWD) System (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system. With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front
wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The AWD
system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
198
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
For AWD vehicles, a spare tire of a different size other that the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire size (other than
the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and
default to front wheel drive.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD vehicles.
Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Crossover vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a
longer wheelbase.
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces.
As a result of the above dimensional differences, crossover vehicles often
will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
199
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
200
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
201
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
202
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
203
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see
Dissimilar Spare Tire/Wheel Information section for description):
Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure
as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
204
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
205
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided
by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information
is not found on these labels then you should consult your Ford dealer.
Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer
unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
206
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not
exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (366 cm) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (366 cm) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
207
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
208
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)/ All
Wheel Drive vehicles (front tires
at top of diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
209
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
210
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
211
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
212
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
213
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
214
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
215
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,
your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org
for additional information.
216
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare,
the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the
damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System:
Low Tire
Pressure
Warning Light
Solid Warning
Light
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Tire(s)
1. Check your tire pressure to ensure
under-inflated tires are properly inflated; refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light will turn OFF.
Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use.
use
Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly inflated and
malfunction
your spare tire is not in use and the
light remains ON, have the system
inspected by your authorized dealer.
217
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire
Pressure
Warning Light
Flashing Warning
Light
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in use.
Repair the damaged road wheel and
re-mount it on the vehicle to restore
system functionality. For a
description of how the system
functions under these conditions,
refer to When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this
section.
If your tires are properly inflated and
your spare tire is not in use and the
TPMS warning light still flashes, have
the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
TPMS
malfunction
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
218
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed rating as
those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the
use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that only
cable chains are used with steel wheels (of the same size and
specifications) as chains may chip aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and cable chains:
• Install cable chains only on the front wheels.
• Use only cable chains on 17 inch wheels with P235/65R17 tires.
• Do not use tire chains, cables or optional traction devices with 18 inch
and 20 inch wheels and tires.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cable chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the cable chains. If this does not work,
remove the cable chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cable chains when they are no longer needed. Do not
use tire cable chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and cable chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
219
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
220
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
221
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle
weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
222
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit
than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
223
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x
100) = 1,400 - 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
224
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) (9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow
option package.
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to
maximize vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment
while towing.
When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and on
steep grades, the A/C system may cycle on and off to protect the engine
from overheating. This may result in a temporary increase of interior
temperatures.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide.
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 1,000
miles (1600 km).
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer
to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue
load of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight.
225
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
FWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine
Maximum
Trailer weight Tongue
GCWR-lb. (kg) range-lb. (kg) load-lb. (kg)
(0-Maximum) (0-Maximum)
3.5L Class I
7250 (3289)
0–2000 (0–907) 0–200 (0–91)
towing
(standard)
3.5L Class II
8420 (3819)
0–3500 (0–1588) 0–350 (0–159)
towing
(optional)
AWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine
Maximum
Trailer weight Tongue
GCWR-lb. (kg) range-lb. (kg) load-lb. (kg)
(0-Maximum) (0-Maximum)
3.5L Class I
7450 (3379)
0–2000 (0–907) 0–200 (0–91)
towing
(standard)
3.5L Class II
8620 (3910 )
0–3500 (0–1588) 0–350 (0–159)
towing
(optional)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
226
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the hook retainers on the
hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Be sure your trailer conforms to all applicable local and Federal
Regulations regarding trailer braking. If your trailer is equipped with
electronically controlled brakes you will need to have an electronic brake
controller with associated wiring installed to your vehicle by an
authorized dealer.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Do not splice into the vehicle lamp wiring for trailer lamps. Your
vehicle uses an advanced electronic module to control and
monitor your vehicle lamps. Splicing into the wiring or attaching
wiring to the vehicle bulb. may DISABLE the rear vehicle lamps
or cause them not to function properly. Your lamp outage feature
may also be disabled or provide incorrect information.
See your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper
instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
227
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer tow connector (equipped on vehicles with a Class II trailer
tow/prep package)
The trailer tow connector is located under the rear bumper, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
Refer to the following chart for information regarding the
factory-equipped trailer tow connector:
Trailer tow connector
Color
1. Dark Green
2. Yellow
3. Brown
4. White
Function
Right hand turn signal/brake/hazard
flasher
Left hand turn signal/brake/hazard
flasher
Tail lamps/parking lamps
Ground
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components, do not trailer
tow during the first 1,000 miles (1600 km) of a new vehicle.
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components during the first
500 miles (800 km) of trailer towing, drive no faster than 70 mph (112
km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Understanding the positions of the 6–speed automatic
transmission section in this chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for more information.
228
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 1,000 miles (1600 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle for personal travel (such as behind a motor home or a
truck).
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to
Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles:
Tow your Front Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground
or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly. If you are
using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment
provider.
229
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles:
Tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or
with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with the front wheels off
the ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the
ground. This will cause damage to your AWD system. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by the
equipment provider.
Note: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, follow
these instructions:
• Tow only in the forward direction
• Release the parking brake
• Place the transmission shift lever in Neutral (N)
• Turn the key in the ignition to the ACC position (refer to Starting in
the Driving chapter). The ACC position also unlocks the steering
wheel.
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)
• Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning
of each day and at each fuel stop.
230
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. LOCK, locks the automatic
transaxle gearshift lever and allows
key removal. This position also shuts
the engine and all electrical
accessories off without locking the
steering wheel. To lock the steering
wheel, remove the key then turn the
steering wheel.
2. ACC, allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate
while the engine is not running. This position also unlocks the steering
wheel.
3. RUN, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
231
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
232
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
3. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
2. Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
233
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to LOCK,
wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still fails to start, press the
accelerator to the floor and try again; this will allow the engine to crank
with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
This vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system which assists in
starting the engine. If the ignition key is turned to 4 (START) and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the engine may continue
cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a/c electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-17°C).
Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in
property damage or physical injury.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
234
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s laboratory (UL ) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ⬙Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.⬙ Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
235
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
of energy per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately 3 hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than 3
hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use
additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
BRAKE
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
236
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
!
P
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
BRAKE
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is released.
!
P
BRAKE
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
237
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Push the parking brake pedal
downward again to release the
parking brake. Driving with the
parking brake on will cause the
brakes to wear out quickly and
reduce fuel economy.
Note: If the vehicle is driven with
the parking brake applied, a chime
will sound.
ADVANCETRAC姞 WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL™ (RSC)
STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system provides stability enhancement
features such as Roll Stability Control™ (RSC), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) and Traction Control (TCS) for certain driving situations.
The system includes an AdvanceTrac威 with RSC on/off button, and a
“sliding car” icon in the instrument cluster.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) will work with the regular brakes in
order to prevent wheel lock during a braking event. This feature will also
help provide better steerability during braking.
During AdvanceTrac威 with RSC operation you may experience the following:
• A rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving
off
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC indicator light will flash when the system
is activated.
• If your foot is on the brake pedal, you will feel a vibration in the
pedal.
Traction Control
Traction Control helps your vehicle maintain traction, when driving on
slippery and/or hilly road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel
spin. Excessive wheel spin is controlled by momentarily reducing engine
power and/or applying the anti-lock brakes.
If your vehicle should become stuck in deep snow or mud, try switching
the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system off by pressing the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC button momentarily. This will allow your wheels to spin and
your tires to “dig” for traction. If your vehicle seems to lose engine
power while driving in deep sand or very deep snow, switching off the
AdvanceTrac with RSC stability enhancement feature will restore full
engine power and torque to each wheel.
238
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system is activated excessively in a short
period of time, the brake portion of the system will disable to allow the
brakes to cool down. In this situation, Traction Control will use only
engine power reduction to help control the wheels from over-spinning.
When the brakes have cooled down, the system will again function
normally. Anti-lock braking, RSC and ESC are not affected by this
condition and will function normally during the cool-down period.
During Traction Control events the “sliding car” icon in the instrument
cluster will flash momentarily.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) with RSC system may enhance
your vehicle’s stability during adverse maneuvers.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system helps the driver maintain steering
control. AdvanceTrac威 with RSC will attempt to correct the vehicle
motion by applying brake force at individual tires and, if necessary, by
reducing engine power.
During Electronic Stability Control events the “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily.
Driving maneuvers which may activate AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system
include:
• Taking a turn too fast.
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle.
• Driving over a patch of ice.
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road.
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa.
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa.
• Driving on slick surfaces.
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.)
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC)
The RSC system works in conjunction with the AdvanceTrac威 system to
help maintain roll stability of the vehicle during aggressive maneuvers by
applying brake force to one or more wheels.
During Roll Stability Control™ (RSC) events the “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily.
239
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Driving conditions that may activate AdvanceTrac威 with RSC include:
• Emergency lane-change
• Taking a turn too fast
• Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC button and icon functionality
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system automatically turns on each time
the engine is started, even if it was turned off when the engine was last
shut down. The “sliding car” icon which is located with the warning
lights in the instrument cluster will illuminate during bulb check at initial
start-up and then go off. This tells you that the system is normal and
active. All functions of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system (RSC, ESC,
Engine Traction Control, and Brake Traction Control) will be tested at
start up. When the system is left active, the “sliding car” icon will flash
only when any of the components of the system are affecting the
vehicle’s performance, otherwise the light will remain off. Consequently,
the “sliding car” icon will not be illuminated during most of your normal
driving.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC button,
located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, allows the driver
to control certain features of the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system
below 45 mph (70 km/h). If the
vehicle is below 45 mph (70 km/h), pressing the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
button will disable RSC, ESC and Engine Traction Control and steadily
illuminate the “sliding car” icon. The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system will
remain enabled when the vehicle speed is above 45 mph (70 km/h) even
if the button has been pressed.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the Traction Control feature will continue to
function, however ESC and RSC are disabled.
All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
operation.
Do not alter or modify your vehicle’s suspension or steering; the
resulting changes to the vehicle’s handling can adversely affect
the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system.
240
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of a AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC event is an indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system, and the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC button has not been pushed, the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on. If the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster remains on while the engine is
running, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power
steering fluid level. Check for a low power steering fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
241
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the RUN position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the RUN position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn
ignition key to LOCK, then remove
the key.
2. Using a screwdriver (or similar
tool), remove the protective cover
to the interlock release access hole
on the console.
3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar
tool) into the access hole and press
downward while pulling the
gearshift lever out of the P (Park)
position and into the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Remove the tool and reinstall the
protective cover.
5. Start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
242
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Automatic Transaxle Adaptive Learning
Your transaxle is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in
the vehicle computer. This feature is designed to increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or
transaxle may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered
normal and will not affect function or durability of the transaxle. Over
time, the adaptive learning process will fully update transaxle operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic
transaxle
P (Park)
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Depress the brake pedal
243
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transaxle
operates in gears one through six.
D (Drive) with Grade Assist
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the side of the gearshift
lever. This will also activate Grade
Assist.
• Transaxle operates in gears one
through five.
• Provides engine braking.
Depending on conditions the
transaxle will automatically
downshift to increase the level of
engine braking while descending
grades.
• Use when driving conditions
cause excessive shifting from O/D
to other gears. Examples: hilly
terrain, mountainous areas and
when engine braking is required.
244
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• O/D OFF lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
O/D
OFF
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp in the instrument cluster will not be
illuminated.
• O/D (overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
L (Low)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Will downshift to the lowest available gear for the current vehicle
speed; allows for first gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
It may be beneficial to turn the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system off so
the wheels are allowed to spin.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
245
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R
(Reverse) and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
The RSS detects obstacles up to six
feet (two meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio will return
to the previous value.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gear selector is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is ON. A control in the message center allows
246
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
the driver to disable the system only when the ignition is ON and the
gear selector is in R (Reverse). Refer to Message center in the Driver
Controls chapter for more information.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system. With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front
wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input from the operator.
All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no
maintenance.
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire
size (other than the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sizes
between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop
functioning and default to front wheel drive and could damage the
system.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for severe off-road use. The
AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in
which driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Driving off-highway with AWD vehicles
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough
roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different
from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds off-highway under high outside
temperatures, use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
247
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac威 with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac威 with Roll
Stability Control™ system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
248
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
AWD Systems (if equipped)
With AWD, the vehicle uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This
increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions
that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
249
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of
time. This will cause the AWD system to overheat. If the rear tires stop
spinning while the front tires spin in deep sand, turn off the vehicle and
allow the AWD system to cool down for a minimum of 15 minutes. After
the system has cooled down, normal AWD function will return. When
driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures,
use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation will maximize
the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs
(for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and
PTU (Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if
necessary.
250
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have
to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do
not “pump” the brakes.
251
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Driving on snow and ice
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transaxle damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since
your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS),
do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
off-highway usage.
252
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
253
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
254
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S.
Ford or Mercury vehicle customers call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle
customers call 1–800–521–4140. Customers will be asked to submit their
original receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer or by calling 1–800–FORD–CLUB.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
instrument panel by the radio. The
hazard flashers will operate when
the ignition is in any position or if
the key is not in the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
255
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
This switch is located behind a
panel on the left side of the cargo
area.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
256
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located behind a trim panel on the left side of the
driver’s footwell near the parking brake. To remove the trim panel, slide
the release lever to the right then pull the trim panel out.
To remove the fuse panel cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.
To reinstall the fuse panel cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until it clicks into
place. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is secure.
To reinstall the trim panel, align the tabs on the bottom of the panel with
the grooves, push the panel shut and slide the release lever to the left to
secure the panel.
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
257
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
15A
15A
4
5
30A
10A
6
7
8
9
20A
10A
10A
15A
258
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Not used (Spare)
Not used (Spare)
Family entertainment system
(FES)/ Rear seat control, SYNC
Driver front smart window
Keypad illumination, 2nd row
seat, Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS), Brake Shift
Interlock (BSI)
Turn signals
Low beam headlamps ( left)
Low beam headlamps (right)
Interior lights, Cargo lamps
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
10
11
12
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A
10A
7.5A
13
14
15
16
17
5A
10A
10A
15A
20A
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
20A
25A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
10A
10A
20A
5A
5A
5A
10A
32
33
34
35
10A
10A
5A
10A
36
5A
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Backlighting, Puddle lamps
All wheel drive
Power mirror switch, Driver side
power seat memory, Driver seat
module – Keep alive power (KA)
Not used (Spare)
Power liftgate module
Climate control
Not used (Spare)
All power lock motor feeds,
Liftgate release, Moon roof
Not used (Spare)
Rear wiper
Datalink
Fog lamps
Park lamps
High beam headlamps
Horn relay
Demand lamps/Interior lamps
Instrument panel cluster
Ignition switch
Radio
Instrument panel cluster
Overdrive cancel switch
Automatic dimming rear view
mirror
Not used (Spare)
Not used (Spare)
Steering angle sensor
Rear park assist, AWD, Heated
seat module
PATS transceiver
259
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
37
38
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
20A
39
40
41
20A
20A
15A
42
43
44
45
10A
10A
10A
5A
46
7.5A
47
30A Circuit
Breaker
—
48
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Climate control
Subwoofer/Amp (Audiophile
radio)
Radio
Not used (Spare)
Delayed accessory function for
radio and lock switch illumination
Not used (Spare)
Rear wiper logic
Customer accessory feed
Front wiper logic, Climate control
relay feed
Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS), Passenger Airbag
Deactivation Indicator (PADI)
Power windows
Delayed accessory relay
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to
the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
260
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4
5
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
—
—
—
40A**
60A**
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
40A**
—
10A*
20A*
—
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Box
Description
Not used
Blower motor relay
Not used
Not used
Cooling fan (vehicles with trailer
tow)
Cooling fan (vehicles without
trailer tow)
Cooling fan (trailer tow only)
Not used
Alternator
Trailer tow parking lamps
Not used
Trailer tow parking lamp relay
Not used
Not used
Not used
261
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Fuse Amp
Rating
40A**
30A**
20A**
20A**
—
—
7.5A*
—
23
—
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
10A*
—
—
10A*
15A*
—
15A*
10A*
10A*
15A*
—
10A*
—
—
—
40A**
—
30A**
—
—
262
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Power Distribution Box
Description
ABS pump motor
Front heated seats
Cigar lighter/Power point
Panorama moon roof
Fuel pump diode
PCM relay
PCM – Keep alive power (KA)
Trailer tow left stop/turn lamp
relay
One touch integrated start
(OTIS) diode
Trailer tow left stop/turn lamp
Rear seat release relay
Fuel pump relay
Rear seat release
Heated mirror
Heated mirror relay
VPWR 1 – PCM
VPWR 3 – PCM
VPWR 2 – PCM
VPWR 4 – PCM
Not used
A/C clutch
Not used
A/C clutch relay
Rear window defroster relay
Rear window defroster
Not used
Starter
Starter relay
Backup lamp relay
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
44
45
46
47
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A*
—
10A*
—
48
—
49
10A*
50
10A*
51
—
52
5A*
53
30A**
54
—
55
—
56
—
57
40A**
58
30A**
59
30A**
60
30A**
61
30A**
62
—
63
40A**
64
20A**
65
20A**
66
20A**
67
—
68
15A*
69
—
70
—
71
10A*
72
—
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge Fuses
Power Distribution Box
Description
Backup lamps
Not used
Trailer tow right stop/turn lamp
Trailer tow right stop/turn lamp
relay
Run/Start relay
PCM ISPR
ABS Run/Start
Not used
Fuel pump relay coil
SPDJB Run/Start
Not used
Not used
A/C clutch diode
ABS valves
Front wipers
Power liftgate
Driver power seat
Passenger power seat
Not used
Blower motor
Cigar lighter/Power point
Cigar lighter/Power point
Cigar lighter/Power point
Not used
Fuel pump
Not used
Not used
Stop lamps
Not used
263
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), the indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is
in use. To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system, all road
wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted
on the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, have a flat serviced by an
authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors, refer
to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter.
The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System and should not be used.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important information. If
the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
264
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
265
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
2. Place the gearshift lever in P
(Park) and turn the engine OFF.
Removing the spare tire and jack
1. Lift the carpeted load floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the spare tire cover (if
equipped).
3. Remove the wing nut securing
the spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Lift and remove the temporary
spare tire from the cargo area.
5. Remove the jack assembly from
the vehicle. Loosen the bag tabs and
remove the jack and lug wrench
from the bag.
6. Fold down the wrench socket
used to loosen the lug nuts and
operate the jack.
266
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Tire change procedure
When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transaxle
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure to place the transaxle in P (Park), set the parking brake
and block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite
(other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close
to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Remove wheel cover (if
equipped) with the lug wrench tip
and loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
267
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
3. Align the slot on top of the jack
with the sheet metal flange
indicated by the jack locator triangle
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug
against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
6. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
7. Remove the jack and fully tighten
1
the lug nuts in the order shown.
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
3
4
for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
5
2
Stowing the flat/spare tire and jack
1. Fully collapse the jack, fold the wrench socket into the handle and
place them both into the bag making sure to secure the tabs.
268
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
2. Place the jack assembly in the spare tire well aligning it with the two
vertical studs.
3. Place the tire in the spare tire well over the jack assembly.
If you are stowing a flat tire, place the tire in the spare tire well with
the valve stem facing down. Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is
able to protrude through a wheel opening.
If you are stowing the spare tire, place the spare in the spare tire
well in its original position.
4. Secure the wheel by replacing the wing nut and turning clockwise.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Lug nut socket
Wheel lug nut torque*
size/Bolt size
lb.ft.
N•m
100
135
Lug nut socket size: 3⁄4
inch (19 mm) hex
Bolt size: 1⁄2 x 20
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
269
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
JUMP STARTING
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
270
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
271
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
272
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
273
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
274
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On FWD vehicles, if your vehicle is to be towed from the front, ensure
proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the
ground. The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this
fashion.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is recommended that the front wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a
dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transaxle.
On AWD vehicles, it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to
prevent damage to the automatic transaxle, AWD system or vehicle.
275
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
276
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized dealer for warranty
repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at 1-800-392-3673 (FORD).
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized
dealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
277
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized
dealer is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
278
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish to
contact the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE program (U.S. only).
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or
its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle
with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse
the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of
a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
279
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in
achieving satisfaction by following the three-step procedure outlined on
the front page of the Warranty Guide. However, if your warranty concern
has not been resolved using the three-step procedure, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. Initially, the BBB will try to resolve your question or concern
through mediation. Mediation is a process through which a
representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options
for settlement of your claim. If mediation is not successful, customers
with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration
process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after
the hearing. You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept
it. If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must
abide by the accepted decision as well. If the arbitrator has decided in
your favor and you accept the decision, the BBB AUTO LINE program
will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a
timely manner. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are
usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE, you will be asked for your
name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information
about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. You will then be mailed a Customer Claim Form that you
will need to complete, provide proof of vehicle ownership, sign and return
the Customer Claim Form to the BBB. Upon receipt, the BBB will review
the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1–800–955–5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
280
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer.
There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible
combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford
ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.
281
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1–800–392–3673.
282
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
283
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
284
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is available
from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your
authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
285
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
286
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
3.5L ENGINE
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
• For plastic headlamp lenses, use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
287
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
PANORAMIC ROOF DEFLECTOR (IF EQUIPPED)
Vacuum the wind deflector cloth to remove insects & loose dirt. Clean
with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner
(ZC-54).
288
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean and damp white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry white
cotton cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner
(ZC-38-A) on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11-A) [In
Canada use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101)] to the wiped
area and spread around evenly.
3. Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean, white, cotton cloth and
press the cloth onto the soiled area–allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
289
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11-A). In Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93).
Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11-D), available from your authorized dealer. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93) or an equivalent
high–quality leather care product.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
290
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11-A)
Motorcraft Leather Care Kit (U.S. only) (ZC-11-D)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Wash and Wax (Canada only) (CXC-95)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
291
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
292
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel near
the steering column.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the secondary hood latch
that is located under the front
center of the hood.
3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod.
293
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.5L V6 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Battery
5. Power distribution box
6. Air filter assembly
7. Transaxle fluid dipstick
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Engine oil filler cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
294
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
295
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
Changing rear window wiper blade
The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position. This reduces
the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash.
To replace the wiper blade:
1. Grab the wiper arm just below
the blade attachment and pull it as
far away from the glass as possible.
Do not use excessive force because
it can break the wiper arm at the
heel. Hold it there until the next
step.
2. Grab the wiper blade with your
other hand and use your fingers to
push the wiper arm tip through the
wiper blade center to separate the
blade from the arm.
3. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
If you find this procedure too
difficult, please see your dealer.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
296
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.
• 3.5L V6 engine
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
297
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 3.5L V6 engine
• If required, add engine oil to the engine. Refer to Adding engine oil
in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until it stops.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
298
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A.
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
299
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
300
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
301
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
N
LE
A
R
TU
D
RE
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLD
FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
302
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B51-A1. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, meeting Ford
specification WSS-M97B44-D, or DEX-COOL威 brand with the
factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product such as
DEX-COOL威 brand with your factory filled coolant can result in
degraded corrosion protection.
303
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on the
reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the
radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
304
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
305
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The
symbol will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
306
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
307
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
308
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
309
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 turn until it stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until at least a few clicks are
heard.
or a “check fuel cap” message comes on,
If the check fuel cap light
the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The light or message can
come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your vehicle.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it may
light
or “check fuel
take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light
cap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up
(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and
highway driving.
or “check fuel cap”
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light
light to turn on as well.
message on may cause the
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap
is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
310
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
(R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
87
311
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right
Fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than 1
gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The Service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
information on the Service engine soon
indicator, refer to
Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
312
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
313
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
314
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle may reduce fuel economy at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example; bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
315
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
indicator, charging system
Illumination of the Service engine soon
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
316
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Service
engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the Service engine
indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
soon
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the Service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
If the Service engine soon
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
indicator on can
continued driving with the Service engine soon
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
317
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
indicator is on or not working
test if the Service engine soon
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
indicator is on or the bulb does not
If the Service engine soon
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the Service engine
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
soon
indicator stays on
ready for I/M testing; if the Service engine soon
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
318
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
information for the service interval schedules.
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir. It should be between the
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in
small amounts, continuously
checking the level until it reaches
the range between the MIN and
MAX lines. Be sure to put the cap
back on the reservoir. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for
the proper fluid type.
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
319
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSAXLE FLUID
Checking automatic transaxle fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes.Your transaxle does not consume
fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transaxle is not
working properly, i.e., if the transaxle slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated areas for normal operating temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is in the add range or does not
show at all on the dipstick.
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 149°F (65°C) on a level surface. The normal operating
temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of
driving.
320
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The transmission fluid should be
within the cross-hatch area if at
normal operating temperature 149°F
(65°C).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transaxle failure. An
overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transaxle component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint
(250 mL) increments through the
filler tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transaxle components.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
321
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Release the clamps that secure
the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and
cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not properly seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
sure that the air cleaner cover tabs
are engaged into the slots of the air
cleaner housing.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
322
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Engine air filter element
Battery
Oil filter
PCV valve
Spark plugs
3.5L V6 Engine
FA-1884
BXT-36R (540 CCA– Standard) or
BXT-36R (600 CCA–With trailer
tow package)
FL-400-SB12
1
2
1
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
2
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
323
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
324
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
—
5.5 quarts (5.2L)
Door latch, hood
latch, auxiliary hood
latch, door hinges,
striker plates, seat
tracks and fuel filler
door hinge
Lock cylinders
Engine oil1
Power steering fluid
Engine coolant–with
trailer tow package
11.7 quarts
(11.09L)
12.83 quarts
(12.14L)
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
—
Door weatherstrips
Engine coolant
—
Brake fluid
XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93-B
Motorcraft Penetrating
XL-1 /
and Lock Lubricant
None
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
XO-5W20-QSP (US)
Premium Synthetic Blend
CXO-5W20–LSP12
Motor Oil (US)
(Canada) /
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
WSS-M2C930-A
with API
Super Premium Motor Oil
Certification
Mark
(Canada)
Motorcraft Premium Gold
VC-7-B /
Engine Coolant with
WSS-M97B51-A1
bittering agent
(yellow-colored)2
Motorcraft MERCON威 V
XT-5-QM /
ATF
MERCON威 V
Multi-Purpose Grease
XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Silicone Spray Lubricant
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Ford part name
Capacity
Item
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Maintenance and Specifications
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
10.0 quarts (9.5L)3
2.4 pints (1.15L)
12 ounces (0.35L)
4.75 quarts (4.5L)
19.2 gallons
(72.7L)
20.8 gallons
(78.7L)
Automatic
transmission fluid
Rear differential
(AWD) fluid
Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) fluid (AWD)5
Windshield washer
fluid
Fuel tank
(front-wheel drive)
Fuel tank (all-wheel
drive)
—
—
—
ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Ford part number /
Ford specification
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威 V
—
Motorcraft MERCON威 V
ATF4
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
Ford part name
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 V should only use MERCON威 V fluid or fluid that
is specified dual usage MERCON威/MERCON威 V. Refer to scheduled maintenance information to
determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may
cause transmission damage.
5
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
1
Capacity
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
325
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Displacement
Required fuel
Firing order
Spark plug gap
Ignition system
Compression ratio
3.5L-DOHC V6 engine
3.5L
87 octane
1–4–2–5–3–6
(0.052–0.056 inch) 1.32–1.42 mm
Coil on plug
10.3:1
Engine drivebelt routing
• 3.5L V6 Engine
1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine.
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine.
326
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
327
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
System
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Description
6F50 6–Speed Automatic Transaxle
328
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Code
J
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Splash guards
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Ash cup / coin holder
Cargo organization and management
Cross bars
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
329
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
Peace of mind
Mobile-Ease™ hands-free communication system
TripTunes™ advanced portable audio solution
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
330
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
A
B
Accessory delay ..........................97
AdvanceTrac ..............................238
Air cleaner filter ...............321–323
Air conditioning ..........................77
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................171, 180, 183
and child safety seats ............173
description ..............171, 180, 183
disposal ....................................186
driver airbag ............173, 181, 184
indicator light .........179, 182, 185
operation .................173, 181, 184
passenger airbag .....173, 181, 184
side airbag ...............................180
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................247
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................302
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................236
Anti-theft system ......................141
Audio system
(see Radio) ......................18, 22, 30
Automatic transaxle
fluid, adding ............................320
fluid, checking ........................320
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................243
fluid, refill capacities ..............324
fluid, specification ..................324
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....38
Auxiliary power point .................94
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........324
Battery .......................................300
acid, treating emergencies .....300
jumping a disabled battery ....270
maintenance-free ....................300
replacement, specifications ...323
servicing ..................................300
Belt-Minder威 .............................166
Booster seats .............................187
Brakes ........................................236
anti-lock ...................................236
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................237
fluid, checking and adding ....319
fluid, refill capacities ..............324
fluid, specifications .................324
lubricant specifications ..........324
parking ....................................237
shift interlock ..........................242
Bulbs ............................................86
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....324
Cargo management system ......124
Cell phone use ..............................7
Changing a tire .................264, 267
Child safety restraints ..............186
child safety belts ....................186
Child safety seats ......................190
attaching with tether straps ..194
in front seat ............................191
in rear seat ..............................191
Child safety seats - booster
seats ...........................................187
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............287
331
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
instrument panel ....................289
interior .....................................290
plastic parts ............................287
safety belts ..............................290
washing ....................................285
waxing .....................................286
wheels ......................................286
wiper blades ............................288
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ............77
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash .............................32
AM/FM/CD .................................24
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment ...............113
Console ........................................94
overhead ....................................93
Controls
power seat ...............................148
steering column ......................102
Convertible
cleaning ...................................288
Coolant
checking and adding ..............302
refill capacities ................305, 324
specifications ..........................324
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................99
Cupholder(s) .............................155
Customer Assistance ................254
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................281
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................282
Getting roadside assistance ...254
Getting the service you
need .........................................277
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................283
332
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................281
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................82
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................320
engine oil .................................296
Driving under special
conditions ..................245, 248, 251
sand .........................................249
snow and ice ...........................252
through water .................250, 253
DVD system .................................45
E
Electronic message
center .................................109–110
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................270
Emission control system ..........316
Engine ........................................326
cleaning ...................................287
coolant .....................................302
fail-safe cooling .......................306
idle speed control ...................300
lubrication specifications .......324
refill capacities ........................324
service points ..........................294
starting after a collision .........256
Engine block heater .................234
Engine oil ..................................296
change oil soon warning,
message center .......................296
checking and adding ..............296
Index
dipstick ....................................296
filter, specifications ........299, 323
recommendations ...................299
refill capacities ........................324
specifications ..........................324
Event data recording ....................6
Exhaust fumes ..........................234
F
Fail safe cooling ........................306
Family entertainment system ....45
Floor mats .................................120
Fluid capacities .........................324
Foglamps .....................................82
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
driving off road .......................247
Fuel ............................................307
calculating fuel economy ......112,
313
cap ...........................................310
capacity ...................................324
choosing the right fuel ...........311
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................315
detergent in fuel .....................312
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................307, 310, 313
filter, specifications ........307, 323
fuel pump shut-off switch .....256
improving fuel economy ........313
octane rating ...................311, 326
quality ......................................312
running out of fuel .................312
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................307
Fuses ..................................256–257
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............310
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................313
Gauges .........................................15
H
Hazard flashers .........................255
Head restraints .................145, 152
Headlamps ...................................81
aiming ........................................83
autolamp system .......................81
bulb specifications ....................86
daytime running lights .............82
flash to pass ..............................82
high beam .................................82
replacing bulbs .........................87
turning on and off ....................81
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system .................................75, 77
Homelink wireless control
system ........................................106
Hood ..........................................293
How to get going ........................18
I
Ignition ...............................231, 326
Illuminated visor mirror .............93
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................190
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................318
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................289
cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................83
333
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
J
Lumbar support, seats .............146
Jack ............................................264
positioning ...............................264
storage .....................................264
Jump-starting your vehicle ......270
M
K
Keyless entry system ...............139
autolock ...................................128
keypad .....................................140
locking and unlocking doors ..141
programming entry code .......140
Keys ...................................126, 143
positions of the ignition .........231
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................81
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................86
daytime running light ...............82
fog lamps ...................................82
headlamps .................................81
headlamps, flash to pass ..........82
instrument panel, dimming .....83
interior lamps .....................85, 87
replacing bulbs .........................87
Liftgate ......................120–121, 135
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........237
Load limits .................................219
Locks
autolock ...................................128
childproof ................................132
doors ........................................128
Lubricant specifications ...........324
Lug nuts ....................................269
334
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Message center .................109–111
english/metric button .............115
system check button ..............115
warning messages ...................117
Mirrors ...................................97–98
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................97
fold away ...................................99
heated ........................................99
programmable memory ..........136
side view mirrors (power) .......98
Moon roof ..................................104
Motorcraft parts ........291, 307, 323
N
Navigation system .......................74
O
Octane rating ............................311
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................296
Overdrive ...................................243
P
Parking brake ............................237
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....323
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................157
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................260
Power door locks ......................128
Power liftgate ............................121
Power mirrors .............................98
Index
Power point .................................94
Power steering ..........................241
fluid, checking and adding ....319
fluid, refill capacity ................324
fluid, specifications .................324
Power Windows ...........................96
R
Radio ................................18, 22, 30
Rear seat entertainment
system ..........................................45
Relays ........................................256
Remote entry system .......132, 134
illuminated entry ............137, 139
locking/unlocking doors .........134
opening the trunk ...................135
panic alarm .............................135
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................137
replacing the batteries ...........136
Reverse sensing system ...........245
Roadside assistance ..................254
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........165
Safety belts
(see Safety
restraints) ..................156, 159–163
Safety Canopy ...................180, 183
Safety defects, reporting ..283–284
Safety restraints ........156, 159–163
Belt-Minder威 ...........................166
extension assembly ................164
for adults .........................160–162
for children .............................186
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................157
safety belt maintenance .........165
warning light and
chime ...............................165–166
Safety seats for children ..........190
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................327
Satellite Radio Information ........43
Seats ..........................................145
child safety seats ....................190
easy access/easyout feature ..150
front seats .......................145–146
heated ................................77, 151
memory seat ...................136, 150
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ........................................141
Servicing your vehicle ..............292
Setting the clock
AM/FM single CD .....................24
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ................32
Spare tire
(see Changing the Tire) ...........267
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................323, 326
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................324
Speed control ..............................99
Starting your vehicle ........231–233
jump starting ..........................270
Steering wheel
controls ....................................102
tilting .........................................92
SYNC ............................................74
335
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
T
Tilt steering wheel ......................92
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....215
Tires ...........................200–201, 264
alignment ................................208
care ..........................................204
changing ..................264, 266–267
checking the pressure ............204
inflating ...................................202
label .........................................214
replacing ..................................206
rotating ....................................208
safety practices .......................207
sidewall information ...............209
snow tires and chains ............219
spare tire .........................264, 266
terminology .............................201
tire grades ...............................201
treadwear ........................200, 205
Towing .......................................225
recreational towing .................229
trailer towing ..........................225
wrecker ....................................275
Transaxle
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................320
Transmission .............................242
336
2008 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....242
fluid, refill capacities ..............324
lubricant specifications ..........324
Turn signal ..................................85
U
USB port ......................................39
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................327
Vehicle loading ..........................219
Ventilating your vehicle ...........234
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
Washer fluid ..............................295
Water, Driving through .............253
Windows
power .........................................96
rear wiper/washer .....................92
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................91
checking and adding fluid .....295
replacing wiper blades ...295–296
Wrecker towing .........................275
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
2008 HVAC
Climate Control - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil WSH-M1C231-B
(R-134a Systems)
YN-12-D
R-134a Refrigerant
WSH-M17B19-A
YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN16-R (Canada)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
A/C compressor bolt
A/C compressor discharge fitting bolt
A/C compressor nut
A/C compressor stud
A/C compressor suction fitting bolt
Compressor-to-condenser discharge line bracket bolt
Compressor-to-condenser discharge line fitting nut
Condenser bolt
Condenser inlet fitting bolt
Condenser outlet fitting bolt
Condenser-to-evaporator line bracket bolt
Evaporator outlet line bracket stud bolt
Heater core and evaporator core housing nuts
High-pressure Schrader-type valve
High-pressure service gauge port valve cap
Low-pressure Schrader-type valve
Low-pressure service gauge port valve cap
Receiver/drier plug
Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut
Fill Capacity
118 ml
(4 fl oz)
0.60 kg
(21 oz)
N.m
25
9
25
9
9
7
8
6
6
6
9
11
8
3.4
0.8
2.26
0.8
3
8
lb-ft
18
18
8
-
lb-in
80
80
80
62
71
53
53
53
80
71
30
7
20
7
27
71
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
AIR CONDITIONING
The refrigerant system components include the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:44
11:12:39 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
A/C compressor and clutch assembly
A/C condenser core
A/C evaporator core
Receiver/drier desiccant bag
Connecting refrigerant lines
Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV)
The refrigerant system incorporates an A/C compressor controlled by the PCM through an A/C clutch relay.
The HVAC module sends an A/C request signal to the instrument cluster, which relays the request to the PCM.
An evaporator temperature sensor is used to cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator core
temperature falls below an acceptable temperature.
The HVAC module will send an A/C request signal to the instrument cluster if the following conditions are met:
A mode which requires A/C operation has been manually selected by the driver or automatically selected
by the HVAC module in AUTO mode.
The A/C evaporator temperature sensor is reading an acceptable evaporator core temperature.
When an A/C request is received, the A/C compressor clutch will only be engaged by the PCM through the A/C
clutch relay if all of the following conditions are met:
The engine has been running for more than 5 seconds.
Engine speed is above 425 RPM and below 5,800 RPM.
The A/C pressure transducer is reading an acceptable pressure in the high side of the refrigerant system.
The engine coolant temperature is not excessively high.
The PCM has not detected a wide open throttle (WOT) condition.
An A/C pressure relief valve is installed in the A/C compressor to protect the refrigerant system against
excessively high refrigerant pressures.
Refrigerant flow into the evaporator core is metered by a TXV.
A/C Compressor and Clutch Assembly
NOTE:
A/C compressor components are not serviced separately. The A/C compressor
is serviced only as an assembly.
The A/C compressor has the following characteristics:
A non-serviceable shaft seal.
A pressure relief valve is installed in the rear of the compressor to protect the refrigerant system against
excessively high refrigerant pressures.
The A/C compressor uses PAG oil or equivalent. This oil contains special additives required for the A/C
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:39 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
compressor.
The A/C compressor oil may have some slightly dark-colored streaks while maintaining normal oil
viscosity. This is normal for this A/C compressor because of break-in wear that can discolor the oil.
Use the oil matching procedure specified for this vehicle when installing a new A/C compressor.
When battery voltage is applied to the A/C compressor clutch field coil, the clutch disc and hub assembly is
drawn toward the A/C clutch pulley. The magnetic force locks the clutch plate and hub assembly and the A/C
clutch pulley together as one unit, causing the compressor shaft to rotate. When battery voltage is removed from
the A/C compressor clutch field coil, springs in the clutch plate and hub assembly move the clutch plate away
from the A/C clutch pulley.
A/C Condenser
NOTE:
The A/C condenser for this vehicle is produced from the factory with a
receiver/drier desiccant bag installed in the integrated receiver/drier. This
receiver/drier desiccant bag may become contaminated with moisture if the A/C
condenser is not installed for an extended period of time. Since it cannot be
determined how much time has elapsed between production and installation of
the unit as a service part, the receiver/drier desiccant bag must be removed and
replaced with the separate receiver/drier desiccant bag, which is supplied
together with the A/C condenser service part kit.
The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-tube design heat exchanger located in front of the vehicle radiator.
It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over fins and tubes to extract heat and by condensing
gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled.
The receiver/drier is incorporated onto the LH side of the A/C condenser. The receiver/drier desiccant bag is a
separate component and can be separately removed and installed with the A/C condenser removed from the
vehicle.
Evaporator Core
The evaporator core is an aluminum plate/fin type and is located in the heater core and evaporator core housing.
A mixture of liquid refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the evaporator core through the evaporator core inlet
tube and continues out of the evaporator core through the evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C
compressor operation, airflow from the blower motor is cooled and dehumidified as it flows through the
evaporator core fins.
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
The thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the center rear
of the engine compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the flow of refrigerant from the high-pressure
side of the refrigerant system and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure sides of the refrigerant system.
Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes through the TXV through 2 separate flow paths. An
internal temperature sensing bulb senses the temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core
and adjusts an internal pin-type valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pintype valve decreases the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:39 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at higher temperatures.
Receiver/Drier
NOTE:
Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing
the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a
failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. Damage
to the receiver/drier desiccant bag includes physical damage to the
receiver/drier desiccant bag or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination
results only from a complete loss of refrigerant and equalization of the
refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure for a period longer than
one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present in
the system before repairs are carried out, the receiver/drier desiccant bag
should not be replaced.
The receiver/drier is integral to the A/C condenser. It stores high-pressure liquid refrigerant after it leaves the
condenser core. A receiver/drier desiccant bag installed inside the receiver/drier removes any retained moisture
from the refrigerant. The receiver/drier desiccant bag is a separate component and can be separately removed
and installed with the A/C condenser removed from the vehicle.
Evaporator Temperature Sensor
The evaporator temperature sensor contains a thermistor which receives a reference voltage from the HVAC
module. The thermistor then varies the resistance to the reference voltage based on the evaporator fin
temperature. The resulting voltage is returned to the HVAC module where it is interpreted as an evaporator fin
temperature reading.
The HVAC module maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does
this by switching off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster when the evaporator temperature sensor
reading falls below acceptable levels, and by switching on the A/C request when the evaporator temperature
rises above acceptable levels.
The evaporator temperature sensor electrical connector is located outside of the heater core and evaporator core
housing near the accelerator pedal, with the sensor pigtail leading into the housing to the sensor probe which is
inserted between the evaporator core fins.
The evaporator temperature sensor is not available as a separate component. To install a new evaporator
temperature sensor, a new heater core and evaporator core housing must be installed.
A/C Pressure Transducer
The A/C pressure transducer monitors the compressor discharge pressure and communicates with the PCM. The
PCM will interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event that the A/C pressure transducer indicates high
system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low charge conditions. If the pressure is below a
predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the PCM will not allow the clutch to engage. It is not
necessary to recover the refrigerant before removing the A/C pressure transducer.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:39 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Service Gauge Port Valves
The high-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
The low-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the compressor suction line.
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Service Gauge Port Valves With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
19D702
2
3
4
5
6
19D701
19D701
19D702
Description
Low-pressure service gauge port valve
cap
Low-pressure service gauge port valve
Low-pressure Schrader-type valve
High-pressure Schrader-type valve
High-pressure service gauge port valve
High-pressure service gauge port valve
cap
The fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component.
Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports.
A very small amount of leakage will always be detectable around the Schrader-type valve with the service
gauge port valve cap removed, and is considered normal. A new Schrader-type valve core can be installed
if the seal leaks excessively.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:39 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
The service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent leakage
through the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten the A/C
service gauge port valve caps to the correct torque after they are removed.
Refrigerant System Dye
A fluorescent refrigerant system dye "wafer" is added to the receiver/drier desiccant bag to assist in refrigerant
system leak diagnosis using a Rotunda-approved ultraviolet blacklight. This fluorescent dye "wafer" will
dissolve after about 30 minutes of continued A/C operation. It is not necessary to add additional dye to the
refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of refrigerant has been removed from
the system. Additional refrigerant system dye should only be added if more than 50% of the refrigerant system
lubricant capacity has been lost due to a fitting separation or hose rupture. Refer to CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
AIR DISTRIBUTION AND FILTERING
Air Distribution
There are 2 sources of air available to the air distribution system:
Outside air
Recirculated air
Recirculated air is always used when the climate control assembly is set to the MAX A/C mode on vehicles
equipped with electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) and can be selected in any mode except
DEFROST. Vehicles equipped with dual-zone electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) use
recirculated air only when the RECIRC function is selected in any mode other than DEFROST, or when
required by the HVAC module in the AUTOMATIC mode.
RECIRC is a timed function when selected while operating in FLOOR or FLOOR/DEFROST mode, and will
automatically default back to fresh air inlet in 5 minutes if operating with A/C ON at an ambient temperature
below 10°C (50°F). When operating with A/C OFF, the RECIRC function will always default back to fresh air
inlet in 5 minutes regardless of ambient temperature.
Air distribution within the vehicle is determined by the airflow mode selected, or by the dual-zone EATC
system in the AUTOMATIC mode. The air distribution mode on vehicles equipped with dual-zone EATC can
be overridden by the driver if desired. Airflow mode control doors are used to direct airflow within the heater
core and evaporator core housing. Electric mode door actuators are used to position these airflow mode doors.
Vehicles equipped with dual-zone EATC use 2 separate temperature blend doors. This allows individual
temperature settings to be selected for the RH and LH air outlets. The airflow mode doors are not partitioned for
separate RH and LH airflow positions. Therefore, the airflow mode will always remain similar for the RH and
LH sides of the vehicle regardless of the temperatures selected.
Air enters the passenger compartment from the following outlets:
Instrument panel registers
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:39 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Floor duct outlets
Windshield defroster
Side window demisters
Rear footwell duct
Center console registers
Passenger compartment air is exhausted from the vehicle through open windows or body air vents.
Cabin Air Filter
A cabin air filter is available as standard equipment on dual-zone EATC vehicles. EMTC vehicles are not
equipped from the factory with a cabin air filter, but are equipped with a screen in place of the filter to prevent
any large foreign material from entering the heater core and evaporator core housing. The cabin air filter or
screen can be accessed by removing the glove compartment and removing the cabin air filter access cover.
A cabin air filter can be installed as a dealer accessory on vehicles not originally equipped with a filter, but only
a screen or a filter should be installed, never both.
CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC)
The electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) components are used to select the following:
Air inlet source (outside or recirculated)
Blower motor speed
Discharge air temperature (temperature blend)
Discharge air location (defrost, panel, floor)
A/C compressor operation
Control System Inputs
The EMTC system has 2 system control inputs.
HVAC Module
The HVAC module integrates the temperature control, airflow mode selection, A/C request button, recirculated
air request button and rear defog switch into a single unit.
The temperature control selector setting determines air temperature. Movement of the temperature display from
COOL (blue) to WARM (red) causes a corresponding movement of the temperature blend door and determines
the discharge air temperature that the air distribution system will maintain. The temperature control selector is
an integral part of the HVAC module and cannot be installed separately. The temperature selector knob is
removable and can be separately replaced.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:39 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
The airflow mode setting determines air discharge location. Movement of the airflow mode selector causes a
corresponding movement of the airflow mode doors and determines the air discharge location. The airflow
mode selector is an integral part of the HVAC module and cannot be installed separately. The airflow mode
selector knob is removable and can be separately replaced.
The A/C request button determines A/C compressor operation, except when the airflow mode selector is in the
OFF, MAX A/C or DEFROST mode. The A/C request button is an integral part of the HVAC module and
cannot be installed separately.
The recirculated air request button can select recirculated air in any mode except DEFROST, and fresh air in
any mode except MAX A/C or OFF. The recirculated air request button is an integral part of the HVAC module
and cannot be installed separately.
The rear defog button signals activation of the heated backlight. The rear defog button is an integral part of the
HVAC module and cannot be installed separately.
Blower Motor Switch
The blower motor switch is mounted in the HVAC module and controls blower motor speed by adding or
bypassing resistors in the blower motor resistor in all modes except OFF. The blower motor switch knob is
removable and can be separately replaced.
Control System Outputs
The EMTC system has 4 system outputs.
Blower Motor Resistor
The blower motor switch varies the blower motor ground circuit resistance by adding or bypassing series
resistance in the blower motor resistor. Increased resistance will lower the blower motor speed, and lowered
resistance will increase blower motor speed. When the blower motor is in the HI position, the blower motor
resistor is bypassed.
The blower motor resistor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing.
Temperature Blend Door Actuator
The temperature blend door actuator moves the temperature blend door on command from the HVAC module.
The temperature blend door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and a potentiometer. The potentiometer
circuit consists of a 5-volt reference signal connected to one end of a variable resistor, and a signal ground
connected to the other. A signal return circuit is connected to a contact wiper, which is driven along the variable
resistor by the actuator shaft. The signal returned to the HVAC module from the contact wiper indicates the
position of the temperature blend door. The HVAC module drives the actuator motor in whichever direction is
necessary to make the actuator contact wiper voltage agree with the expected HVAC module contact wiper
voltage value.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:39 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Airflow Mode Door Actuator
The airflow mode door actuator uses a cam and lever assembly to position the airflow mode doors on command
from the HVAC module. The mode door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and potentiometer. The
potentiometer allows the HVAC module to monitor the position of the airflow mode doors. The potentiometer
circuit consists of a 5-volt reference signal connected to one end of a variable resistor, and a signal ground
connected to the other. A signal return circuit is connected to a contact wiper, which is driven along the variable
resistor by the actuator shaft. The signal returned to the HVAC module from the contact wiper indicates the
position of the airflow mode doors.
Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator
The air inlet mode door actuator moves the air inlet door between the fresh and RECIRC positions on command
from the HVAC module. The air inlet mode door actuator is driven to, and will automatically stop at, the full
RECIRC or full fresh air inlet position and does not require a potentiometer circuit to monitor its position.
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC)
The dual-zone electronic automatic temperature control HVAC module analyzes input from the following major
sources:
Temperature, airflow mode, blower, A/C and RECIRC selection (made by the vehicle occupants)
In-vehicle temperature sensor
Ambient temperature sensor
Solar radiation sensor
Evaporator temperature sensor
Vehicle speed
Engine coolant temperature
Using these inputs, the dual-zone HVAC module determines the correct conditions for the following outputs:
A/C compressor operation
Blower speed
Temperature blend door position
Airflow mode door position
Air inlet door position
Control System Inputs
The dual-zone EATC system has 4 control system inputs.
HVAC Module
The HVAC module provides an interface for the vehicle occupants to control the climate control system, or
automatically controls the climate control system in the AUTO mode. The HVAC module has a vacuum
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
fluorescent display for displaying set temperature, airflow direction, blower speed and DTCs. An on-board
diagnostic (OBD) feature is incorporated to supply the technician with DTCs. These DTCs help direct the
technician to the inoperative component.
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
The in-vehicle temperature sensor contains a thermistor, which measures the in-vehicle air temperature and
sends that reading to the HVAC module. An aspirator hose is connected between the heater core and evaporator
core housing and the in-vehicle temperature sensor. The aspirator hose uses airflow through the heater core and
evaporator core housing to create a venturi-type suction to draw in-vehicle air through the in-vehicle
temperature sensor (across the thermistor).
Solar Radiation Sensor (Sunload Sensor)
The solar radiation sensor supplies information to the HVAC module indicating sunload.
Ambient Temperature Sensor
The ambient temperature sensor signal is received by the HVAC module and indicates the outside air
temperature. The ambient temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator on the radiator support bolster.
The ambient temperature sensor signal is not the sole factor considered by the HVAC module for the outside air
temperature display. Therefore, the ambient temperature PID monitored with a scan tool may not exactly match
the HVAC module display. For information regarding the HVAC module outside air temperature display, refer
to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
Control System Outputs
The EATC system has 4 control system outputs.
Blower Motor Speed Control
The blower motor speed control controls the blower motor speed by converting low power signals from the
HVAC module to a high current, variable ground feed for the blower motor. A delay function is used to provide
a gradual increase or decrease in blower motor speed under all conditions.
Temperature Blend Door Actuators
The dual-zone EATC system uses 2 temperature blend door actuators to control 2 separate temperature blend
doors. The temperature blend doors independently vary the LH side and RH side temperature settings, as
desired. The temperature blend door actuators each contain a reversible electric motor and a potentiometer. The
potentiometer circuit consists of a 5-volt reference signal connected to one end of a variable resistor, and a
signal ground connected to the other. A signal return circuit is connected to a contact wiper, which is driven
along the variable resistor by the actuator shaft. The signal returned to the HVAC module from the contact
wiper indicates the position of the temperature blend door. The HVAC module drives the actuator motor in
whichever direction is necessary to make the actuator contact wiper voltage agree with the expected HVAC
module contact wiper voltage value.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Airflow Mode Door Actuator
The airflow mode door actuator uses a cam and lever assembly to position the airflow mode doors on command
from the HVAC module. The mode door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and potentiometer. The
potentiometer allows the HVAC module to monitor the position of the airflow mode doors. The potentiometer
circuit consists of a 5-volt reference signal connected to one end of a variable resistor, and a signal ground
connected to the other. A signal return circuit is connected to a contact wiper, which is driven along the variable
resistor by the actuator shaft. The signal returned to the HVAC module from the contact wiper indicates the
position of the airflow mode doors.
Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator
The air inlet mode door actuator moves the air inlet door between the fresh and RECIRC positions on command
from the HVAC module. The air inlet mode door actuator is driven to, and will automatically stop at, the full
RECIRC or full fresh air inlet position and does not require a potentiometer circuit to monitor its position.
HEATING AND VENTILATION
The heating and ventilation system has the following features:
Controls the temperature and, during A/C operation, reduces the relative humidity of the air inside the
vehicle.
Delivers heated or cooled air to maintain the vehicle interior temperature and comfort level.
Cooling or heating can be adjusted to maintain the desired temperature.
Uses a reheat method to provide conditioned air to the passenger compartment.
All airflow from the blower motor passes through the A/C evaporator core.
Temperature blending is controlled by the temperature blend door(s), which regulate(s) the amount of air
that flows through and around the heater core, where it is then mixed and distributed.
Heater Core
The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and transfer the heat
to air passing through the heater core.
Blower Motor
The blower motor pulls air from the air inlet and forces it into the heater core and evaporator core housing
where it is mixed and distributed.
Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing
The heater core and evaporator core housing directs airflow from the blower motor through the evaporator core
and heater core. All airflow from the blower motor passes through the evaporator core. The airflow is then
directed through or around the heater core by the temperature blend door(s). Vehicles equipped with dual-zone
electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) use a partitioned heater core and evaporator core housing with
2 electric actuator-positioned temperature blend doors. This allows for separate temperatures to be selected for
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
the driver and passenger sides of the passenger compartment. Manual systems use a single electric actuatorpositioned temperature blend door to direct airflow through or around the heater core.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) COMPRESSOR
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) WSH-M1C231-B
YN-12-D
Fig. 2: Exploded View Of Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part Number
W520413
W712610
W712611
12B637
W500215
W500215
19703
19E889
Description
A/C compressor nut
A/C compressor stud
A/C compressor bolt (2 required)
Clutch field coil electrical connector
A/C compressor suction fitting bolt
A/C compressor discharge fitting bolt
A/C compressor
Compressor suction fitting O-ring seal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
9
19E889
Compressor discharge fitting O-ring seal
REMOVAL
CAUTION: If installing a new air conditioning (A/C) compressor due to an internal
failure of the old unit, you must carry out the following procedures to
remove contamination from the A/C system.
If A/C flushing equipment is available, carry out flushing of the A/C
system prior to installing a new A/C compressor. For additional
information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
If A/C flushing equipment is not available, carry out filtering of the
A/C system after a new A/C compressor has been installed. For
additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
Install a new thermostatic expansion valve (TXV), as directed by the
A/C flushing or filtering procedure.
Install a new receiver/drier desiccant bag as directed by the A/C
flushing or filtering procedure.
NOTE:
The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly
sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals
specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog.
NOTE:
Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing
the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a
failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. Damage
to the receiver/drier desiccant bag includes physical damage to the
receiver/drier desiccant bag or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination
results only from a complete loss of refrigerant and equalization of the
refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure for a period longer than
one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present in
the system before repairs are carried out, the receiver/drier desiccant bag
should not be replaced.
1. If flushing of the A/C system has not been carried out, recover the refrigerant. For additional information,
refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS
article.
2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
3. Remove the drive belt from the A/C compressor pulley.
4. Remove the RH fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the A/C compressor nut and stud.
Remove the lower A/C compressor bolt.
Disconnect the field coil electrical connector.
Remove the upper A/C compressor bolt and reposition the A/C compressor to allow access to the
compressor discharge and suction fittings.
9. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting bolt and disconnect the fitting.
Discard the O-ring seal.
10. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting bolt and disconnect the fitting.
Discard the O-ring seal.
11. Remove the A/C compressor.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The service A/C compressor for this vehicle is shipped from the factory
with PAG oil installed. The refrigerant oil adding procedure specified for
this vehicle must be followed to avoid installing excessive PAG oil in the
refrigerant system.
1. If filtering of the A/C system is not to be carried out, lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct
amount of clean PAG oil. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
2. Connect the A/C compressor discharge fitting and install the A/C compressor discharge fitting bolt.
Install a new O-ring seal lubricated in clean PAG oil.
Tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
3. Connect the A/C compressor suction fitting and install the A/C compressor suction fitting bolt.
Install a new O-ring seal lubricated in clean PAG oil.
Tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
4. Install, but do not tighten the upper A/C compressor bolt.
5. Install, but do not tighten the lower A/C compressor bolt.
6. Install the A/C compressor stud.
Tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
7. Position the compressor-to-condenser discharge line and install, but do not tighten the A/C compressor
nut.
8. Tighten the A/C compressor bolts and nut in the sequence shown in illustration.
Tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Tightening A/C Compressor Bolts & Nut In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Connect the field coil electrical connector.
10. Install the RH fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY PANELS
article.
11. Install the drive belt.
12. If filtering of the A/C system is not to be carried out, evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
AIR INLET DUCT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Air Inlet Duct
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
19C603
6
7
19N619
19B735
Description
Fresh air inlet duct screw (5 required)
Fresh air inlet duct (part of 19B555)
Air inlet duct screw (7 required)
Air inlet duct (part of 19B555)
Air inlet mode door actuator electrical
connector
Cabin air filter
Cabin air filter cover
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to HEATER
CORE AND EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING.
2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector.
3. Remove the cabin air filter cover and the cabin air filter (if equipped) or air inlet screen (if equipped).
4. Remove the 5 fresh air inlet duct screws.
5. Detach the 4 fresh air inlet duct clips and remove the fresh air inlet duct.
6. Remove the 7 air inlet duct screws.
7. Remove the air inlet duct.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Fig. 5: Identifying Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
12A647
Description
Ambient air temperature sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
2. Disconnect the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector and remove the ambient air
temperature sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
BLOWER MOTOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Exploded View Of Blower Motor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
19C603
19805
Description
Blower motor electrical connector
Blower motor screw (3 required)
Blower motor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the RH lower instrument panel insulator.
Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector.
Remove the 3 blower motor screws.
Remove the blower motor.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. For additional information, refer to BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL.
BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Blower motor speed control shown in illustration, blower motor resistor similar.
Fig. 7: Identifying Blower Motor Speed Control
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
7806200
7806024
-
4
19C603
5
19E624
5
19A706
Description
Glove compartment damper
Glove compartment
Blower motor speed control screw (2
required)
Blower motor speed control electrical
connector
Blower motor speed control (dual-zone
electronic automatic temperature control
[EATC] vehicles)
Blower motor resistor (electronic manual
temperature control [EMTC] vehicles)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detach the glove compartment damper from the glove compartment.
Remove the glove compartment.
Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector.
Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
5. Remove the blower motor speed control.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH
Fig. 8: Exploded View Of Blower Motor Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
18519
18578
Description
Blower motor switch knob
Blower motor switch nut (part of 18578)
Blower motor switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the climate control module. For additional information, refer to HEATING VENTILATION
AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) MODULE - EDGE.
2. Pull to remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Remove the blower motor switch nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Identifying Blower Motor Switch Knob
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Release the 2 retaining tabs with the index finger on each hand, while depressing the blower motor switch
shaft with the thumbs to remove the blower motor switch.
Fig. 10: Identifying Blower Motor Switch Shaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) WSH-M1C231-B
YN-12-D
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Identifying Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W707400
3
W520413
4
12B637
5
6
7
19D594
8A193
W500215
Description
Upper radiator hose clamp
Compressor-to-condenser discharge line
bracket bolt
Compressor-to-condenser discharge line
fitting nut
A/C pressure transducer electrical
connector
A/C pressure transducer
Radiator bracket
Condenser inlet fitting bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
8
W704005
9
19972
10
11
12
13
19E889
8620
12A581
W520413
14
15
W500215
19972
Compressor-to-condenser discharge lineto-radiator clip
Compressor-to-condenser discharge line
(condenser side)
O-ring seal (3 required)
Accessory drive belt
Clutch field coil electrical connector
Compressor-to-condenser discharge line
bracket nut
A/C compressor discharge fitting bolt
Compressor-to-condenser discharge line
(compressor side)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly
sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals
specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog.
NOTE:
The compressor-to-condenser discharge line consists of 2 separately
serviceable lines. If only one line is to be removed, only carry out the steps
qualified for that line.
Both compressor-to-condenser discharge lines
1. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
3. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
Discard the O-ring seal.
To install, tighten to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
Condenser side compressor-to-condenser discharge line
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
Release the upper radiator hose clamp and disconnect the upper radiator hose from the radiator.
Remove the engine cooling fan. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line bracket bolt.
To install, tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
10. Detach the 2 radiator brackets from the core support and position the radiator rearward.
11. Remove the condenser inlet fitting bolt and disconnect the fitting.
Discard the O-ring seal.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
12. Detach the compressor-to-condenser discharge line-to-radiator clip.
13. Remove the condenser side compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
Compressor side compressor-to-condenser discharge line
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Remove the drive belt from the A/C compressor pulley.
Remove the RH inner fender splash shield.
Disconnect the clutch field coil electrical connector.
Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line bracket nut.
Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting bolt and disconnect the fitting.
Discard the O-ring seal.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
19. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
Both compressor-to-condenser discharge lines
20. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS article.
21. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
CONDENSER CORE
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) WSH-M1C231-B
YN-12-D
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Exploded View Of Condenser Core With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part Number
8A193
W500215
W704652
19710
19E889
Description
Upper radiator hose clamp
Radiator bracket (2 required)
Condenser fitting bolt (2 required)
Condenser bolt (2 required)
Condenser core
O-ring seal (2 required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The A/C condenser for this vehicle is produced from the factory with a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
receiver/drier desiccant bag installed in the integrated receiver/drier. This
receiver/drier desiccant bag may become contaminated with moisture if the A/C
condenser is not installed for an extended period of time. Since it cannot be
determined how much time has elapsed between production and installation of
the unit as a service part, the receiver/drier desiccant bag must be removed and
replaced with the separate receiver/drier desiccant bag, which is supplied
together with the A/C condenser service part kit. For additional information,
refer to DESICCANT BAG.
NOTE:
The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly
sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals
specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog.
1. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
3. Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
4. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
5. Remove the cooling fan. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
6. Release the upper radiator hose clamp at the radiator and disconnect the hose.
7. Release the 2 radiator bracket clips from the radiator support and position the radiator rearward.
8. Release the 2 condenser lines from the clips at the radiator.
9. Remove the condenser outlet and inlet fitting bolts and disconnect the fittings.
Discard the O-ring seals.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
10. Remove the 2 condenser bolts.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
NOTE:
The condenser core must be removed from above the vehicle.
11. Remove the condenser core.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS article.
13. Fill the engine cooling system. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
14. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
DESICCANT BAG
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) WSH-M1C231-B
YN-12-D
Fig. 13: Exploded View Of Desiccant Bag With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
19C836
Description
Receiver/drier plug (part of 19E989 kit)
Receiver/drier desiccant bag
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing
the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a
failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. Damage
to the receiver/drier desiccant bag includes physical damage to the
receiver/drier desiccant bag or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination
results only from a complete loss of refrigerant and equalization of the
refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure for a period longer than
one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present in
the system before repairs are carried out, the receiver/drier desiccant bag
should not be replaced.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
1. Remove the A/C condenser core. For additional information, refer to CONDENSER CORE.
2. Remove the receiver/drier plug.
To install, tighten to 3 N.m (27 lb-in).
3. Using a suitable tool. Grasp and remove the receiver/drier desiccant bag.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Lubricate the O-ring seal on the new receiver/drier plug with clean PAG oil.
EVAPORATOR OUTLET LINE
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) WSH-M1C231-B
YN-12-D
Fig. 14: Exploded View Of Evaporator Outlet Line With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
W520413
N806925
-
4
W707142
Description
Ground strap nut
Evaporator outlet line bracket stud bolt
Evaporator outlet line spring lock
coupling (part of 19835)
Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
5
6
fitting nut
Evaporator outlet line
O-ring seal (5 required)
19835
19E889
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly
sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals
specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog.
NOTE:
Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing
the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a
failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. Damage
to the receiver/drier desiccant bag includes physical damage to the
receiver/drier desiccant bag or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination
results only from a complete loss of refrigerant and equalization of the
refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure for a period longer than
one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present in
the system before repairs are carried out, the receiver/drier desiccant bag
should not be replaced.
1. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
2. Remove the ground strap nut at the RH shock tower.
3. Remove the evaporator outlet line bracket stud bolt.
To install, tighten to 11 N.m (8 lb-ft).
4. Disconnect the evaporator outlet line spring lock coupling.
Discard the O-ring seals.
5. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
Discard the O-ring seals.
To install, tighten to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS article.
8. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
FOOTWELL DUCT - REAR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 15: Exploded View Of Rear Footwell Duct
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
N806113
2
3
18C420
N806113
4
18C420
Description
LH rear footwell duct pin-type retainer (5
required)
LH rear footwell duct
RH rear footwell duct pin-type retainer (4
required)
RH rear footwell duct
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
LH rear footwell duct only
1. Remove the LH front seat. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
2. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL AND
CONSOLE article.
3. Remove the LH front door sill plate.
4. Remove the driver floor carpet pin-type retainers and position the carpet away from the LH rear footwell
duct.
5. Remove the 5 LH rear footwell duct pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the 7 floor console support bracket bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Identifying Floor Console Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The floor console support bracket will have to be repositioned to remove
the LH rear footwell duct.
7. Remove the LH rear footwell duct.
RH rear footwell duct only
8.
9.
10.
11.
Remove the RH floor console side finish panel.
Remove the RH front seat. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
Remove the RH front door sill plate.
Remove the passenger front floor carpet pin-type retainers and position the carpet away from the RH rear
footwell duct.
12. Remove the 5 RH rear footwell duct pin-type retainers.
13. Remove the RH rear footwell duct.
Both rear footwell ducts
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
HEATER CORE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Exploded View Of Heater Core (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
-
Description
Floor duct screw (6 required)
Floor duct (part of 19B555)
Dash panel seal (part of 18529 kit)
Fresh air inlet duct screw (5 required)
Fresh air inlet duct (part of 19B555)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Exploded View Of Heater Core (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Part Number
19C603
18476
Description
Plenum chamber wire harness
Heater core tube bracket screw
Heater core tube bracket (part of 19B555)
Plenum chamber screw (8 required)
Plenum chamber clip (2 required)
Plenum chamber
Heater core
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be pressure leak tested
before it is removed from the vehicle. For additional information, refer to
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS
article.
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to HEATER
CORE AND EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING.
2. Remove the 6 floor duct screws and the floor duct.
3. Remove the heater core tube dash panel seal.
4. Remove the heater tube bracket screw and the heater tube bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Remove the 5 fresh air inlet duct screws and the fresh air inlet duct.
Disconnect the wire harness from the plenum chamber.
Remove the 7 lower facing plenum chamber screws.
Orient the heater core and evaporator core housing with the plenum chamber upright.
Remove the upper facing plenum chamber screw.
Remove the 2 plenum chamber clips and remove the plenum chamber being careful not to allow the
evaporator core to become dislodged from the installed position.
CAUTION: Do not handle the heater core by the inlet and/or outlet tube to
remove. Handling the heater core by the tubes may damage the joints
and lead to failure of the heater core.
11. Remove the heater core in the following sequence.
1. Grasp the heater core by the core-side of the heater tube connections and partially remove it from
the plenum chamber.
2. Grasp the heater core by the top of the core and remove it from the plenum chamber.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to carry out this step if the evaporator core has not
become dislodged from the installed position during this procedure.
12. If the evaporator core has been moved at any point during heater core removal, remove the evaporator
core, verify that the drain seal is installed in the correct position and install the evaporator core in the
correct position.
Fig. 19: Identifying Heater Core
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
HEATER CORE AND EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) WSH-M1C231-B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
YN-12-D
Fig. 20: Exploded View Of Heater Core & Evaporator Core Housing (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
N806113
2
3
18C420
N806113
4
19728
Description
LH rear footwell duct pin-type retainer (5
required)
LH rear footwell duct
RH rear footwell duct front pin-type
retainer (2 required)
Evaporator drain tube
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 21: Identifying Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
5
6
Part Number
W525859
W707142
7
8
19E889
W709450
9
19B555
Description
Heater hose clamp (2 required)
Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV)
fitting nut
O-ring seal (2 required)
Heater core and evaporator core housing
nut (5 required)
Heater core and evaporator core housing
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing
the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a
failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. Damage
to the receiver/drier desiccant bag includes physical damage to the
receiver/drier desiccant bag or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination
results only from a complete loss of refrigerant and equalization of the
refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure for a period longer than
one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present in
the system before repairs are carried out, the receiver/drier desiccant bag
should not be replaced.
NOTE:
The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly
sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals
specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog.
1. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
2. Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
3. Remove the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL AND
CONSOLE article.
4. Remove the 3 driver side carpet pin-type retainers and position the driver side front carpet aside.
5. Remove the 4 LH rear footwell duct pin-type retainers and the LH rear footwell duct.
6. Remove the 2 passenger front carpet pin-type retainers and position the passenger front carpet aside
enough to access the 2 front pin-type retainers on the RH rear footwell duct.
7. Remove the 2 front pin-type retainers on the RH rear footwell duct and detach the RH rear footwell duct
from the heater core and evaporator core housing.
8. Release the 2 heater hose clamps at the heater core and disconnect the heater hoses.
9. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and detach the A/C lines from the TXV.
Discard the O-ring seals.
To install, tighten to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
CAUTION: The retaining clips on the plastic evaporator drain tube elbow will
break if the elbow is removed from inside the vehicle. If the
evaporator drain tube elbow must be removed, the retaining clips
must be detached from below the vehicle. If the plastic evaporator
drain tube elbow does not need to be removed, only detach the
evaporator drain tube from the elbow.
10. Disconnect the evaporator drain tube from the elbow at the floorpan.
11. Remove the 5 heater core and evaporator core housing nuts.
To install, tighten to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
12. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS article.
14. Fill the engine coolant level. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
15. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
HEATING VENTILATION AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) MODULE - EDGE
Fig. 22: Exploded View Of Climate Control Module - Edge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
04302
2
3
4
W505945
19980
78042K50
Description
Upper center instrument panel finish
panel
HVAC module screw (4 required)
HVAC module
HVAC module spacer (2 required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Using a suitable tool, gently pry out the upper center instrument panel finish panel to disengage the clips
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
and remove the panel.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2. Remove the 4 HVAC module screws.
3. Remove the HVAC module.
NOTE:
Be sure the HVAC module spacers are correctly positioned before
installing the HVAC module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
HEATING VENTILATION AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) MODULE - MKX
Fig. 23: Exploded View Of Climate Control Module - MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
W505945
19980
78042K50
Description
HVAC module screw (4 required)
HVAC module
HVAC module spacer (2 required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND CONSOLE article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
2. Remove the 4 HVAC module screws.
3. Remove the HVAC module.
NOTE:
Be sure the HVAC module spacers are correctly positioned before
installing the HVAC module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Fig. 24: Exploded View Of In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
W708268
2
3
7804459
14401
4
-
5
19C734
Description
Lower steering column opening cover
bolt (2 required)
Lower steering column opening cover
In-vehicle temperature sensor electrical
connector
In-vehicle temperature hose and venturi
assembly (part of 19C734 kit)
In-vehicle temperature sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the 2 lower steering column opening cover bolts.
Detach the lower steering column opening cover.
Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor aspirator hose.
Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor electrical connector.
Release the 2 in-vehicle temperature sensor clips and remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
NOTE:
The in-vehicle temperature sensor hose and venturi assembly can be
accessed from below the driver side of the instrument panel.
6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor hose and venturi assembly.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
MODE DOOR ACTUATOR - AIR INLET DOOR
Fig. 25: Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
7806200
7806024
19C603
4
-
Description
Glove compartment damper
Glove compartment
Air inlet mode door actuator electrical
connector
Air inlet mode door actuator screw (2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
5
required)
Air inlet mode door actuator
19E616
Fig. 26: Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator Linkage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
6
7
Part Number
-
8
-
9
-
Description
Air inlet duct grille (part of 19B555)
Air inlet mode door intermediate lever
screw (part of 19E616 kit)
Air inlet mode door intermediate lever
(part of 19E616 kit)
Air inlet mode door lever (part of 19E616
kit)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
It is not required to install the new air inlet door linkage parts included in the air
inlet mode door actuator service part kit if only the mode door actuator requires
replacement and the linkage parts are not broken or binding.
Air inlet mode door actuator and linkage
1. Disconnect the glove compartment damper from the glove compartment.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the glove compartment.
Remove the 3 air inlet mode door actuator screws.
Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector.
Remove the air inlet mode door actuator.
Manually operate and inspect the air inlet mode door and air inlet mode door linkage for incorrect
placement or damage.
Air inlet mode door linkage only
7. Remove the air inlet mode door intermediate lever screw.
8. Remove the air inlet mode door intermediate lever.
9. Working through the air inlet duct grille opening, depress the clip and detach the air inlet mode door lever
from the air inlet mode door.
Fig. 27: Depressing Clip & Detaching Air Inlet Mode Door Lever From Air Inlet Mode Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Air inlet mode door actuator and linkage
NOTE:
The air inlet mode door must be fully seated in the correct position during
installation. If the air inlet mode door is not fully seated, excessive noise
will result when the climate control system is operated.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
MODE DOOR ACTUATOR - DEFROST/PANEL/FLOOR DOOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 28: Exploded View Of Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
19C603
2
-
3
19C772
Description
Defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator
electrical connector
Defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator
screw (3 required)
Defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator can be accessed from below the
driver side of the instrument panel.
NOTE:
It is not required to install the new defrost/panel/floor mode door linkage parts
included in the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator service part kit if only the
mode door actuator requires replacement and the linkage parts are not broken
or binding.
Mode door actuator and linkage
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the 3 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws.
Disconnect the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator electrical connector.
Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator.
Manually operate, and inspect the defrost/panel/floor mode door linkage for incorrect placement or
damage.
Mode door actuator linkage only
5. Remove the mode door linkage.
1. Depress the tab and remove the panel door lever.
2. Remove the floor/defrost door intermediate lever screw and floor/defrost door intermediate lever.
3. Pull straight outward to remove the floor/defrost door lever.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 29: Identifying Floor/Defrost Door Intermediate Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Mode door actuator and linkage
NOTE:
When installing the mode door actuator, make sure that the panel door
lever and floor/defrost intermediate lever are correctly aligned with the
mode door actuator cam.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
REGISTER - CENTER, EDGE
Fig. 30: Exploded View Of Register - Center, Edge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
19893
19893
Description
Center register screw (8 required)
RH center register
LH center register
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND CONSOLE article.
2. Remove the 8 center register screws.
3. Remove the center registers.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
REGISTER - CENTER, MKX
Fig. 31: Exploded View Of Register - Center, MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
19893
Description
Center register
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
PANEL AND CONSOLE article.
2. Release the 8 center register clips and remove the center register assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
REGISTER - DRIVER AND PASSENGER SIDE, EDGE
Fig. 32: Exploded View Of Register - Driver and Passenger Side, Edge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
19893
Description
Register
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Passenger side register shown in illustration, driver side similar.
CAUTION: Do not pry on the outer register trim bezel. The clips on the outer
register trim bezel break if pried on to remove the register.
1. Working through the register vein openings, insert a suitable hook shaped pick behind each of the 4
register clips while gently pulling the register rearward with the hook to disengage the clip.
2. Remove the driver or passenger side instrument panel register.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
REGISTER - DRIVER SIDE, MKX
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 33: Exploded View Of Register - Driver Side, MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W701679
19893
Description
Driver side register screw (4 required)
Driver side register
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the instrument cluster finish panel. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL
AND CONSOLE article.
2. Remove the 4 driver side register screws and the driver side register.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
REGISTER - PASSENGER SIDE, MKX
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 34: Exploded View Of Register - Passenger Side, MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
7804338
W701679
19893
Description
RH instrument panel finish panel
Passenger side register screw (4 required)
Passenger side register
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Disengage the 6 clips and remove the RH instrument panel finish panel.
2. Remove the 4 passenger side register screws and the passenger side register.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR - LH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 35: Exploded View Of Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
W708268
2
3
7804459
14401
4
19C739
5
-
6
19C603
7
19E616
Description
Lower steering column opening cover
bolt (2 required)
Lower steering column opening cover
In-vehicle temperature sensor electrical
connector
In-vehicle temperature sensor aspirator
hose
LH temperature blend door actuator
screw (3 required)
LH temperature blend door actuator
electrical connector
LH temperature blend door actuator
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
It is not required to install the new LH temperature blend door linkage parts
included in the LH temperature blend door actuator service part kit if only the
temperature blend door actuator requires replacement and the linkage parts are
not broken or binding.
LH temperature blend door actuator and linkage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the 2 lower steering column opening cover bolts.
Detach the lower steering column opening cover.
Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor aspirator hose and electrical connector.
Position the instrument panel wire harness away from the LH temperature blend door actuator.
Remove the 3 LH temperature blend door actuator screws.
Disconnect the LH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector.
Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator.
Manually operate, and inspect the LH temperature blend door linkage for incorrect placement, binding or
damage.
LH temperature blend door linkage only
9. Detach the 2 retaining tabs and remove the LH temperature blend door linkage.
Fig. 36: Locating Retaining Tabs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
LH temperature blend door actuator and linkage
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR - RH, DUAL-ZONE EATC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 37: Exploded View Of Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH, Dual-Zone EATC
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
7806200
7806024
-
4
5
6
7804608
-
7
19C603
8
19E616
Description
Glove compartment damper
Glove compartment
RH lower instrument panel insulator pintype retainer (2 required)
RH lower instrument panel insulator
RH lower floor console trim panel
RH temperature blend door actuator
screw (3 required)
RH temperature blend door actuator
electrical connector
RH temperature blend door actuator
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
It is not required to install the new RH temperature blend door linkage parts
included in the RH temperature blend door actuator service part kit if only the
temperature blend door actuator requires replacement and the linkage parts are
not broken or binding.
RH temperature blend door actuator and linkage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Disconnect the glove compartment damper from the glove compartment.
Remove the glove compartment.
Remove the RH lower instrument panel insulator.
Remove the RH lower floor console trim panel.
Remove the 3 RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
Disconnect the RH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector.
Remove the RH temperature blend door actuator.
Manually operate, and inspect the RH temperature blend door linkage for incorrect placement, binding or
damage.
RH temperature blend door actuator linkage only
9. Detach the 2 retaining tabs and remove the RH temperature blend door linkage.
Fig. 38: Locating Retaining Tabs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) WSH-M1C231-B
YN-12-D
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 39:
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
W707142
2
-
3
4
19849
19E889
Description
Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV)
fitting nut
TXV bolt (2 required) (part of 19849
service kit)
TXV
O-ring seal (4 required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing
the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a
failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. Damage
to the receiver/drier desiccant bag includes physical damage to the
receiver/drier desiccant bag or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination
results only from a complete loss of refrigerant and equalization of the
refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure for a period longer than
one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present in
the system before repairs are carried out, the receiver/drier desiccant bag
should not be replaced.
NOTE:
The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 HVAC Climate Control - Edge & MKX
sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals
specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog.
1. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
2. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
Discard the O-ring seals.
To install, tighten to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 TXV bolts.
4. Remove the TXV.
Discard the O-ring seals.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS article.
6. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:12:40 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Roof rack bolts
Spoiler nuts
6
6
lb-in
53
53
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
RADIATOR GRILLE
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Edge Radiator Grille
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W506413-S
2
W505003-S
3
17E898
Description
Isolator-to-bumper cover bolt (2
required)
Isolator-to-radiator grille reinforcement
screw (5 required)
Isolator
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:01
11:02:58 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
4
N800488-S
5
6
7
8
9
8A164
16A912
N800488-S
8B262
17D957
Radiator grille reinforcement-to-radiator
grille nut (11 required)
Radiator grille reinforcement
Radiator grille
Emblem retainer
Emblem
Front bumper cover
Fig. 2: Exploded View Of MKX Radiator Grille
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W506413-S
2
W505003-S
3
17E898
4
N800488-S
5
6
7
8
9
8A164
16A912
8B262
17D957
Description
Isolator-to-bumper cover bolt (2
required)
Isolator-to-radiator grill reinforcement
screw (3 required)
Isolator
Radiator grille reinforcement-to-radiator
grille nut (12 required)
Radiator grill reinforcement
Radiator grille
Emblem retainer
Emblem
Bumper cover
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:58 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
Remove the isolator-to-bumper cover bolts.
Remove the isolator-to-radiator grille reinforcement screws.
Remove the isolator.
Release the isolator from the clips on the bumper cover.
5. Remove the radiator grille and radiator grille reinforcement.
Release the radiator grille reinforcement from the clips on the bumper cover.
6. Remove the radiator grille-to-radiator grille reinforcement nuts and remove the radiator grille.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ROOF RACK
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:58 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Exploded View Of Roof Rack With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Part Number
551A92-3
551A90-1
551A92-4
551A90-2
W712668-S
55128-8
55128-9
W712668-S
02684
02684
NOTE:
Description
Roof rack bolt cover rear (RH)
Roof rack bolt cover front (RH)
Roof rack bolt cover rear (LH)
Roof rack bolt cover front (LH)
Roof rack bolts (8 required)
Roof rack side rail (RH)
Roof rack side rail (LH)
Roof rack retainer bolts (2 required)
Roof rack retainer (RH)
Roof rack retainer (LH)
LH shown, RH similar.
1. Remove the rear roof rack bolt cover.
Lift upward on the rear of the bolt cover and then pull rearward.
Fig. 4: Lifting Upward On Rear Of Bolt Cover & Pulling Rearward
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Remove the front roof rack bolt cover.
Lift upward on the front of the bolt cover and then pull forward.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:58 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Lifting Upward On Front Of Bolt Cover & Pulling Rearward
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 2 front roof rack bolts.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
Fig. 6: Identifying Front Roof Rack Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the 2 rear roof rack bolts.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
Fig. 7: Identifying Rear Roof Rack Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The roof rack side rail has a tab located at the front of the ditch moulding
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:58 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
and it is installed under the windshield moulding. When installing the roof
rack side rail, start at the front of the vehicle and work toward the rear.
5. Remove the roof rack side rail.
Start at the rear of the roof rack side rail working toward the front of the vehicle.
Fig. 8: Identifying Roof Rack Side Rail
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
The 4 roof rack bolts are installed in a specific order starting with the front bolt and working toward
the rear of the vehicle. The bolts must be installed in that order to make sure the roof rack side rail
is correctly aligned.
SPOILER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:58 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Exploded View Of Spoiler With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
W651016-S
W621926-S
010807
7841602
Description
Spoiler nut covers (2 required)
Spoiler nuts (5 required)
Spoiler
Spoiler retainers (4 required)
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector and the rear windshield washer hose from the rear spoiler.
Fig. 10: Identifying Electrical Connector & Rear Windshield Washer Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 5 rear spoiler nuts.
Remove the 2 nut covers.
Remove the 5 nuts.
To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
Fig. 11: Locating Rear Spoiler Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Place a piece of tape on the liftgate to protect the paint.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:58 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Placing A Piece Of Tape On Liftgate To Protect Paint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
There are 4 pin-type retainers on the bottom of the spoiler. When removing
the spoiler it is difficult to access the retainers to release them from the
liftgate. It may be necessary to pry upward on the rear spoiler to release it
from the retainers. Do not pry on the window.
5. Remove the rear spoiler.
Place a pry bar between the liftgate and the spoiler.
Fig. 13: Placing A Pry Bar Between Liftgate & Spoiler
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Replace any retainers broken during removal.
ROCKER PANEL MOULDING
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:58 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Exploded View Of Rocker Panel Moulding
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W706805-S
2
W706805-S
3
4
7810154 RH/ 7810155 LH
78101A04 RH/ 78101A05 LH
Description
Rocker panel moulding rear screw (2
required)
Rocker panel moulding cap front screw
(2 required)
Rocker panel moulding cap
Rocker panel moulding
1. Remove the rocker panel moulding front cap.
Remove the 2 screws.
Remove the front cap.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:58 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 15: Identifying Rocker Panel Molding End Cap & Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
2. Remove the 2 screws from the rocker panel moulding inside the rear wheelhouse.
Fig. 16: Identifying Screws From Rocker Panel Moulding Inside Rear Wheelhouse
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Open the front and rear doors.
4. Release the retainers on the bottom of the rocker panel moulding.
Fig. 17: Identifying Retainers On Bottom Of Rocker Panel Moulding
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Pull outward to release the rocker panel moulding from the body, starting from the front of the vehicle
moving rearward.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:58 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Driveshaft - Edge & MKX
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES
Driveshaft - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Driveshaft runout
Specification
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Center bearing support nuts
Front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts
Rear driveshaft-to-pinion flange bolts
40
70
70
lb-ft
30
52
52
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
DRIVESHAFT
NOTE:
All driveshaft assemblies are balanced. If undercoating the vehicle, protect the
driveshaft to prevent overspray of any undercoating material.
The driveshaft assembly consists of the following:
Rubber isolated center support bearings
Constant velocity (CV) joint at the power transfer unit (PTU)
U-joints at the center supports and pinion flange
Assembly balanced with traditional balance weights
Lubed-for-life joints requiring no periodic lubrication
The driveshaft transfers torque from the PTU to the rear axle. It is attached to the PTU flange with a CV joint.
The 3-piece shaft is connected by a staked U-joint at each center bearing and attached to the rear pinion flange.
The driveshaft joints allow the smooth continuous rotation of the driveshaft through the allowable angle planes
and length variations required in normal vehicle operation. The driveshaft is always turning at front wheel
speed. The driveshaft is not serviceable. A new driveshaft must be installed if worn or damaged.
UNIVERSAL JOINTS
The U-joints consist of the following:
A single spider (cross)
Lubed-for-life design and require no periodic lubrication
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:01
10:11:57 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Driveshaft - Edge & MKX
Nylon thrust washers, located at each base of the bearing cup, which control end play, position the needle
bearing and improve grease movement
Grease seals located at the opening of each bearing cup to retain the grease for the bearing lubrication
Bearing cups that retain the needle bearings and locate the spider on the centerline of the shaft bore to
control shaft runout and balance
The U-joints are staked in place and are not serviced individually. If worn or damaged, install a new driveshaft
assembly.
The 3 U-joints in this driveshaft assembly allow the driveshaft tubes to rotate smoothly through the varying
angles of the power transfer unit (PTU), the center support bearings and the rear drive unit (RDU). The angles
that cause the U-joints to accelerate and decelerate may cause vibration in the driveshaft assembly if the angles
are either too great or too small. Refer to DRIVELINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
DRIVESHAFT
Refer to DRIVELINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
DRIVESHAFT
Fig. 1: View Of Driveshaft
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:57 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Driveshaft - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W711918
2
W520113
3
W711918
4
5
4K357
4A169
Description
Front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolt (4
required)
Center bearing support nuts (4 required)
Universal flange-to-pinion flange bolt (4
required)
Driveshafts
Isolators (8 required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Index-mark both driveshaft flanges.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the constant velocity (CV) joint bolts. Install new bolts
or damage to the vehicle may occur.
2. Remove and discard the 4 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts.
To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Fig. 2: Locating Front Driveshaft-To-Transfer Case Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts for the rear U-joint flange or damage to the
component may occur. Install new bolts.
3. Remove and discard the 4 U-joint flange bolts.
To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:57 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Driveshaft - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Locating U-Joint Flange Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. With the help of an assistant, remove the 4 center bearing support nuts and the driveshaft.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 4: Locating Center Bearing Support Nuts & Driveshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after
installation, index the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to
DRIVELINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:57 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION
Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
High Temperature Nickel AntiSeize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Metal Brake Parts Cleaner
PM-4-A or PM-4-B (US); CPM-4
(Canada)
Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and
Dielectric Compound
XG-3-A
Specification
Fill Capacity
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65- 803 - 821 ml (1.69 - 1.74 pt)
A1
ESE-M12A4-A
-
-
-
ESE-M1C171-A
-
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Front Brake Disc
Maximum brake pad taper wear (in any direction)
Minimum brake disc thickness
Minimum brake pad thickness
Rear Brake Disc
Maximum brake pad taper wear (in any direction)
Minimum brake disc thickness
Minimum brake pad thickness
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Brake caliper bleeder screw
Master cylinder brake tube fittings
Specification
3.0 mm (0.118 in)
26 mm (1.023 in)
3.0 mm (0.118 in)
3.0 mm (0.118 in)
16 mm (0.629 in)
3.0 mm (0.118 in)
N.m
8
28
lb-ft
21
lb-in
71
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has the following components:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:10
10:02:04 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fixed position foot pedal
Vacuum-assisted power brake booster
Diagonal split hydraulic system
Front disc brakes
Rear disc brakes
Drum-in-hat park brake system
ABS hydraulic control unit (HCU).
The brake pedal is connected to the power brake booster, which is connected to the brake master cylinder.
When the brake pedal is pressed, brake fluid is pushed through the doubled-walled steel tubes and flexible hoses
to the front and rear disc brake calipers. The brake fluid enters the disc brake calipers, forcing the caliper
pistons and brake pads outward against the brake disc friction surface, slowing or stopping rotation. When the
brake pedal is released, brake fluid pressure is relieved, returning the front and rear disc brake caliper pistons
and brake pads to the unapplied position.
For information on:
the non-adjustable pedals, refer to HYDRAULIC BRAKE ACTUATION article.
ABS and HCU, refer to VEHICLE DYNAMIC SYSTEMS article.
the master cylinder and fluid reservoir, refer to HYDRAULIC BRAKE ACTUATION article.
the vacuum assisted power brake booster, refer to POWER BRAKE ACTUATION article.
the front brake calipers, refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article.
the rear brake calipers, refer to REAR DISC BRAKE article.
the drum-in-hat integrated parking brake system, refer to PARKING BRAKE AND ACTUATION
article.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
BRAKE SYSTEM
MATERIAL
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Metal Brake Parts Cleaner
PM-4-A or PM-4-B (US); CPM-4 (Canada)
Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric
Compound
XG-3-A
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
ESE-M1C171-A
Principles of Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Brake System
Applying the brake pedal uses lever action to push a rod into the brake booster, which through the use of
vacuum, boosts the force of the rod and then transmits this force into the master cylinder. This produces
hydraulic pressure in the master cylinder. On vehicles not equipped with ABS, the hydraulic pressure is
transmitted by brake fluid through the brake tubes to the individual brake calipers. On vehicles equipped with
ABS, the hydraulic pressure is transmitted by brake fluid through the brake tubes to the ABS hydraulic control
unit (HCU), which then distributes that pressure to the individual brake calipers. The brake calipers use
hydraulic pressure to apply the pads. The application of the brake pads will cause the rotation of the wheels to
slow or stop depending on how much brake pressure is applied. The parking brakes carry out the same function
except that they are mechanically actuated by a cable that connects only to the rear brakes.
Red Brake Warning Indicator
The red brake warning indicator alerts the driver to certain conditions that exist in the brake system. The
instrument cluster performs a bulb check when the ignition key is turned to the RUN position. The conditions
that cause the indicator to illuminate are low brake fluid level, the parking brake is applied or there is a fault in
the ABS (if the yellow ABS warning indicator is also illuminated).
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled
onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE:
Always check the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir before
carrying out the test procedures. If the fluid level is not at the correct level,
clean the reservoir cap before removing, then add clean, specified brake fluid.
NOTE:
Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, make sure the brake warning indicator
operates correctly. If the brake indicator does not operate correctly, refer to
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING CHIMES
article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
The first indication that something may be wrong in the brake system is a change in the feeling through the
brake pedal. The brake warning indicator in the instrument cluster and the brake fluid level in the brake master
cylinder reservoir are also indicators of system concerns.
If a wheel is locked and the vehicle must be moved, open a bleeder screw at the locked wheel to let out enough
fluid to relieve the pressure. Close the bleeder screw. This bleeding operation may release the brakes but will
not correct the cause of the concern. If this does not relieve the locked wheel condition, repair the locked
components before proceeding.
Inspect all hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connectors should be capped. Make sure hoses and their
connections are correctly secured and in good condition with no holes, soft or collapsed areas.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Brake master cylinder
Brake master cylinder
reservoir
Brake booster
Brake booster check
valve
Brake booster vacuum
hose
Brake hoses and tubes
Brake caliper
Brake caliper piston
seals
Brake caliper guide pins
Brake disc
Brake pads
Brake pedal linkage
Wheel bearings
Tires
Electrical
Parking brake switch
Brake fluid level switch
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, go to SYMPTOM CHART - BRAKE SYSTEM table or Go to
SYMPTOM CHART - NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) table.
For low or spongy brake pedal concerns:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
check for fluid leaks. Repair as necessary.
check and, if necessary, refill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
bleed the brake system and retest the brake pedal feel.
if the brake pedal is still low or feels spongy, check the brake pedal mounting for looseness and
correct installation. Check the power brake booster and the master cylinder for loose mounting.
Correct as necessary and retest the system for normal operation.
For a slow or incomplete brake pedal return concern:
inspect for binding, damage, correct installation or interference at the brake pedal.
check the power brake booster for binding, damage and correct installation.
Road Test
The technician should have a thorough knowledge of the brake system operation and accepted general braking
guidelines in order to detect any problems.
Select a road that is reasonably smooth and level. Gravel or bumpy roads are not suitable because the surface
does not allow the tires to grip the road equally. Avoid crowned roads.
A key factor in evaluating brake concerns is the deceleration rate. This varies from vehicle to vehicle and with
changes in operating conditions. It is evident how well the brakes are working after just a few applications.
Brake Pads
NOTE:
It is not required to install new brake pads if the friction material thickness is
within specifications. It is also not required to install new brake pads when the
brake discs are machined.
Remove the brake pads. Refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article for front disc brakes or REAR DISC
BRAKE article for rear disc brakes.
Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake pad friction material. Refer to SPECIFICATIONS.
If there are missing chunks or cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake
pads. Refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article for front disc brakes or REAR DISC BRAKE
article for rear disc brakes.
If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake pads,
Refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article for front disc brakes or REAR DISC BRAKE article for
rear disc brakes.
If the friction material shows taper wear that is not within specifications, verify the caliper guide
pins are functioning correctly. Refer to Brake Caliper Guide Pins.
Brake Discs
NOTE:
Using an impact tool without a torque socket will lead to unevenly tightened
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
wheel nuts. This causes brake disc on-vehicle lateral runout and brake
roughness.
NOTE:
It is generally not required to install new brake discs to address noise issues.
Remove the brake disc. Refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article for front disc brakes or REAR DISC
BRAKE article for rear disc brakes.
Inspect the brake discs and measure the brake disc thickness in a minimum of 4 places around the
circumference of the brake disc. Record the measurements, refer to SPECIFICATIONS.
If the brake disc is cracked or otherwise damaged, install new a brake disc. Refer to FRONT DISC
BRAKE article for front disc brakes or REAR DISC BRAKE article for rear disc brakes.
If any thickness measurement is less than the minimum specification, install a new brake disc.
Refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article for front disc brakes or REAR DISC BRAKE article for
rear disc brakes.
If the diagnosis has revealed vibration in the steering wheel, seat or pedal while braking that varies
with vehicle speed, machine the brake disc. Heavily scored brake discs, similar to that caused by
pads worn down to the backing plate, should also be machined. In order to machine, discs must be
above the minimum thickness specification. Refer to SPECIFICATIONS and BRAKE DISC
MACHINING.
Brake Calipers
Inspect the brake calipers for the following:
Brake fluid leaks
Boots and seals for tears or cracks
Caliper pistons for binding and corrosion
Guide pins for correct operation. Refer to Brake Caliper Guide Pins.
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
NOTE:
Do not use power tools for caliper guide pin bore cleaning. Damage to the bore
may result.
NOTE:
The guide pins are part of the anchor plate.
The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show taper wear or the
guide pins are difficult to move, install a new brake caliper anchor plate. Refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE
article for the front brake caliper anchor plate or REAR DISC BRAKE article for the rear brake caliper anchor
plate.
If the lining is not within specifications, install new brake pads. Refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article for
front disc brakes or REAR DISC BRAKE article for rear disc brakes.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Brake Hoses and Tubes
NOTE:
Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion, which
may result in brake tube failure.
Double-wall steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube fittings must be
correctly double flared to provide strong, leakproof connections. When bending tubing to fit the
underbody or rear axle contours, be careful not to kink or crack the tube.
If a section of the brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be installed with a new tube of the same
type, size, shape and length.
When installing the hydraulic brake tubing, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections to specifications.
After installation, bleed the brake system. Refer to BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING.
Install a new brake flexible hose if the hose shows signs of softening, cracking or other damage.
When installing a new brake hose, position the hose to avoid contact with other vehicle components.
Non-Pressure Leaks
Two parts of the brake system that may have a brake fluid loss that does not appear when the system is under
pressure are the brake master cylinder reservoir and the brake caliper under the following conditions:
Reservoir
Missing or poorly-fitted brake master cylinder filler cap
Missing or damaged brake master cylinder filler cap gasket
Punctured or otherwise damaged brake master cylinder reservoir
Missing, damaged or poorly-fitted sealing grommets between the brake master cylinder and the brake
master cylinder reservoir
The brake master cylinder reservoir grommets are not serviceable and must be installed new as part of a new
brake master cylinder and reservoir assembly. Refer to brake master cylinder in HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATION article.
Brake Caliper
Foreign material in the caliper piston seal groove
Punctured or otherwise damaged caliper piston seal
The brake caliper piston seals are not serviceable and must be installed new as part of a new brake caliper.
Refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article for front disc brakes or REAR DISC BRAKE article for rear disc
brakes.
Brake Master Cylinder - Normal Conditions
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
The following conditions are considered normal and are not indications that the brake master cylinder is in need
of service.
Condition 1: During normal operation of the brake master cylinder, the fluid level in the brake master cylinder
reservoir will fall during brake application and rise during release. The net fluid level (such as after brake
application and release) will remain unchanged.
Condition 2: A trace of brake fluid will exist on the booster shell below the master cylinder mounting flange.
This results from the normal lubricating action of the master cylinder bore and seal.
Condition 3: Fluid level will decrease with pad wear.
Brake Master Cylinder - Abnormal Conditions
Changes in brake pedal feel or travel are indicators that something may be wrong in the brake system. Go to
SYMPTOM CHART - BRAKE SYSTEM table for abnormal condition diagnosis.
Brake Booster
Inspect the brake booster:
for excessive corrosion or damage.
vacuum connections for leakage.
vacuum hoses for kinks or leakage.
check valve for correct operation.
Parking Brake
Check the operation of the parking brake system with the vehicle on a hoist and the parking brake control fully
released. Check the rear brake adjustment or carry out the brake system diagnosis. Refer to PARKING
BRAKE AND ACTUATION article.
Symptom Chart - Brake System
SYMPTOM CHART - BRAKE SYSTEM
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
The red brake warning
indicator and the yellow
ABS warning indicator are
illuminated
DTCs in the ABS
module
REFER to VEHICLE
DYNAMIC SYSTEMS article
to diagnose the ABS module.
The red brake warning
indicator is always/never on
Brake fluid level switch
Parking brake switch
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
REFER to INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE
CENTER, AND WARNING
CHIMES article to diagnose
the red brake warning
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
indicator.
Instrument cluster
Smart junction box
(SJB)
Tires
INSPECT the tires for uneven
or excessive wear, and correct
inflation. REFER to WHEELS
AND TIRES article.
-
Brake pads
INSPECT the brake pads for
contamination, uneven taper or
excessive wear, REFER to
Brake Pads.
-
Brake discs
INSPECT the brake discs and
the hubs for contamination or
damage. INSTALL new brake
discs or hubs as necessary.
REFER to FRONT DISC
BRAKE article for front disc
brakes or REAR DISC
BRAKE article for rear disc
brakes. REFER to FRONT
SUSPENSION article for front
hubs or REAR SUSPENSION
article for rear hubs.
-
Brake calipers and/or
guide pins
INSPECT the brake calipers
and guide pins, REFER to
Brake Calipers and Brake
Caliper Guide Pins.
-
Suspension component
and/or wheel alignment
INSPECT the suspension and
CHECK the wheel alignment.
REFER to SUSPENSION
SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Brake fluid leaks and/or
air in the system
INSPECT the system for leaks.
REPAIR as necessary. FILL
the brake master cylinder
reservoir. BLEED the system.
REFER to BRAKE SYSTEM
BLEEDING.
-
Brake master cylinder
CARRY OUT the Brake
Master Cylinder test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
-
Hydraulic control unit
(HCU)
INSPECT the HCU. REFER to
VEHICLE DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
The brakes pull or drift
Brake pedal goes down fast
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Air in the system
BLEED the system. REFER to
BRAKE SYSTEM
BLEEDING.
-
Brake master cylinder
CARRY OUT the Brake
Master Cylinder test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
-
HCU
INSPECT the HCU. REFER to
VEHICLE DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
Brake pads
INSPECT the brake pads for
uneven taper or excessive
wear, REFER to Brake Pads.
-
Brake calipers and/or
guide pins
INSPECT the brake calipers
and guide pins, REFER to
Brake Calipers and Brake
Caliper Guide Pins.
-
Anti-lock brake control
system
CHECK the anti-lock brake
control system. REFER to
VEHICLE DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
Brake fluid leaks and/or
air in the system
INSPECT the system for leaks.
REPAIR as necessary. BLEED
the system. REFER to
BRAKE SYSTEM
BLEEDING.
-
Brake calipers and/or
guide pins
INSPECT the brake calipers
and guide pins, REFER to
Brake Calipers and Brake
Caliper Guide Pins.
-
Brake flexible hose
INSPECT the brake flexible
hoses for swelling and damage.
INSTALL new as necessary.
REFER to FRONT DISC
BRAKE article for front disc
brakes or REAR DISC
BRAKE article for rear disc
brakes.
-
Brake master cylinder
CARRY OUT the Brake
Master Cylinder test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
-
Brake pads
INSPECT the brake pads for
taper wear, REFER to Brake
Pads.
The brake pedal eases down
slowly
Brakes lock up under light
brake pedal force
Excessive/erratic brake pedal
travel
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
-
Brake pedal
INSPECT the brake pedal for
binding, obstructions and
correct installation. REPAIR as
necessary. CHECK the brake
pedal fasteners for correct
torque. REFER to
Specifications in
HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATION article.
-
Anti-lock brake control
system
CHECK the anti-lock brake
control system. REFER to
VEHICLE DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
Parking brake
component
REPAIR or INSTALL new
components as necessary.
REFER to PARKING
BRAKE AND ACTUATION
article.
-
Brake caliper guide pins
INSPECT the caliper guide
pins for correct operation.
INSTALL new components as
necessary. REFER to Brake
Caliper Guide Pins.
-
Disc brake caliper(s)
INSPECT the brake calipers.
REFER to Brake Calipers.
REPAIR or INSTALL new
brake calipers as necessary.
REFER to FRONT DISC
BRAKE article for front disc
brakes or REAR DISC
BRAKE article for rear disc
brakes.
-
Brake booster
CARRY OUT the Brake
Booster test in COMPONENT
TESTS.
-
Brake master cylinder
CARRY OUT the Brake
Master Cylinder test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
Insufficient engine
vacuum for brake
booster operation
CHECK engine vacuum.
REFER to the Intake Manifold
Vacuum Test in ENGINE
SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Brake booster manifold
VERIFY engine vacuum at the
Brakes drag
Excessive brake pedal effort
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
vacuum hose
booster. REROUTE, REPAIR
or INSTALL new components
as necessary.
-
Brake booster
VERIFY engine vacuum at the
booster. CARRY OUT the
Brake Booster test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
-
Brake booster check
valve
VERIFY engine vacuum at the
booster. CARRY OUT the
Check Valve test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
NOTE:
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) symptoms should be identified using the
diagnostic tools that are available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of
their uses and a glossary of common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article. Since it is possible any one of multiple systems may be
the cause of a symptom, it may be necessary to use a process of elimination
type of diagnostic approach to pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the
causal system for the symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article for the next likely system and continue diagnosis.
SYMPTOM CHART - NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Vibration when the brakes
are applied
-
Tires
CORRECT any wheel and tire
concern before diagnosing the
brake or suspension systems.
REFER to WHEELS AND
TIRES article to diagnose the
tires.
Uneven brake pad
wear
Brake disc pad transfer
Uneven brake disc
wear
Suspension
components
COMPLETE the brake system
inspection described in
INSPECTION AND
VERIFICATION. If the
condition still exists, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
Brake caliper guide
pins
INSPECT the brake caliper guide
pins for correct operation. REFER
to Brake Caliper Guide Pins.
Brake drag
Go to SYMPTOM CHART BRAKE SYSTEM table.
Brake vibration/shudder occurs when the brake
pedal is released
-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Caliper mounting bolts
loose
CHECK the caliper bolts.
TIGHTEN to specifications.
REFER to FRONT DISC
BRAKE article for front disc
brakes or REAR DISC BRAKE
article for rear disc brakes.
-
Damaged or worn
caliper guide pins or
retainers
CHECK the caliper guide pins
and retainers for correct
operation. REFER to Brake
Caliper Guide Pins. INSTALL
new components as necessary.
-
Missing or damaged
anti-rattle clips or
springs
CHECK the brake pads for
missing clips or broken springs.
INSTALL new components as
necessary. REFER to FRONT
DISC BRAKE article for front
disc brakes or REAR DISC
BRAKE article for rear disc
brakes.
-
Loose brake disc shield
TIGHTEN the brake disc shield
bolts to specification. REFER to
FRONT DISC BRAKE article
for front disc brakes or REAR
DISC BRAKE article for rear
disc brakes.
Rattling noise
Clicking noise - with brakes
applied on vehicles
equipped with ABS brakes
ABS hydraulic control
unit (HCU)
Acceptable condition during an
ABS event.
Squealing noise - occurs on
first (morning) brake
application
Brake pads
Acceptable condition. Caused by
humidity and low brake pad
temperature.
Squealing noise - a
continuous squeal
Brake pads worn
below minimum
thickness
INSPECT brake pads for
excessive wear, taper wear or
uneven wear. VERIFY brake pads
are within minimum
specifications. REFER to Brake
Pads.
Squealing noise - an
intermittent squeal brought
on by cold, heat, water,
mud or snow
Brake pads
Acceptable condition.
Groaning noise - occurs at
low speeds with brake
lightly applied (creeping)
Brake pads
Acceptable condition.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Grinding noise - continuous
Brake pads worn
below minimum
thickness
INSPECT the brake pads, brake
discs, and attaching hardware for
damage. VERIFY brake
components are within
specifications. REFER to
SPECIFICATIONS.
Moaning noise
Brake pads
contaminated with
grease or oil
INSPECT the brake pads for
contamination. REPAIR or
INSTALL new components as
necessary. REFER to FRONT
DISC BRAKE article for front
disc brakes or REAR DISC
BRAKE article for rear disc
brakes.
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: Vibration When Brakes are Applied
Normal Operation
During moderate to heavy braking, noise from the hydraulic control unit (HCU) and pulsation in the brake pedal
can be observed. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise during heavy braking or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or
snowy surfaces is acceptable and indicates correct functioning of the ABS. Pedal pulsation alone or steering
wheel nibble when the brakes are applied (frequency is proportional to the vehicle speed) indicates a concern
with a brake or suspension component.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Brake pad(s)
Brake disc(s)
Wheel(s) and tire(s)
Suspension component(s)
PINPOINT TEST A: VIBRATION WHEN THE BRAKES ARE APPLIED
A1 ROAD TEST THE VEHICLE - LIGHT BRAKING
Road test the vehicle. Warm the brakes by slowing the vehicle from 80 to 32 km/h (50 to 20 mph)
using light brake force. At highway speeds of 89-97 km/h (55-60 mph), apply the brake using light
pedal force.
Is there a vibration/shudder felt in the steering wheel, seat or brake pedal?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : Go to A2.
A2 ROAD TEST THE VEHICLE - MODERATE TO HEAVY BRAKING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:04 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Road test the vehicle. At highway speeds of 89-97 km/h (55-60 mph), apply the brake using a
moderate to heavy pedal force.
Is there a vibration/shudder?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : The concern is not present at this time.
A3 CHECK ABS OPERATION
Road test the vehicle and apply the brakes on a dry, firm surface, then apply the brakes on a wet,
snowy or loose surface (such as gravel).
Is the vibration/shudder only present on a wet, snowy or loose surface?
YES : This is a normal operating condition of the ABS.
NO : Go to A4.
A4 CHECK THE FRONT SUSPENSION
Check the front suspension. Refer to SUSPENSION SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
article.
Are all the suspension components in satisfactory condition?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 RESURFACE THE FRONT BRAKE DISCS
NOTE:
Do not use a bench lathe to machine the brake discs. A bench lathe
may cause brake disc on-vehicle lateral runout and brake roughness.
NOTE:
Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions to machine the
brake discs. After machining, make sure the brake disc meets the
thickness specification.
Resurface the front brake discs. Refer to BRAKE DISC MACHINING.
Road test the vehicle.
Is the vibration/shudder present?
YES : Go to A6.
NO : The concern has been repaired.
A6 CHECK THE REAR SUSPENSION
Check the rear suspension. Refer to SUSPENSION SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
article.
Are all the suspension components in satisfactory condition?
YES : RESURFACE the rear brake discs or brake drums. REFER to BRAKE DISC
MACHINING.
NO : REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
Component Tests
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Brake Booster
1. Disconnect the check valve from the brake booster.
2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL.
3. Verify that manifold vacuum is available at the check valve with the engine at idle speed and the
transmission in NEUTRAL.
If manifold vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the check valve and continue with Step 5.
If manifold vacuum is not available, continue with Step 4.
4. Disconnect the check valve from the vacuum hose and verify that manifold vacuum is available at the
hose with the engine at idle speed and the transmission in NEUTRAL.
If manifold vacuum is available, stop the engine, install a new check valve and continue with Step
5.
If manifold vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve
and refer to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to diagnose the no
vacuum condition.
5. Apply the brake pedal several times to exhaust all vacuum from the system.
6. Apply the brake pedal and hold it in the applied position. Start the engine and verify that the brake pedal
moves downward after the engine starts.
If the brake pedal moves, the brake booster is operating correctly
If the brake pedal does not move, install a new brake booster. Refer to POWER BRAKE
ACTUATION article.
7. Operate the engine a minimum of 10 seconds at fast idle. Stop the engine, and let the vehicle stand for 10
minutes. Then apply the brake pedal with approximately 89 N (20 lb) of force. The brake pedal feel
should be the same as that noted with the engine operating. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist),
install a new brake booster check valve and retest. If the brake pedal feels spongy, bleed the hydraulic
system to remove air. Refer to BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING.
Brake Booster Check Valve
The function of the brake booster check valve is to allow manifold vacuum to enter the brake booster and
prevent the escape of vacuum in case manifold vacuum is lost during sustained full throttle operation.
1. Disconnect the vacuum booster hose from the check valve.
2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL.
3. Verify that manifold vacuum is available at the check valve end of the vacuum hose with the engine at
idle speed and the transmission in NEUTRAL.
If manifold vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and
continue this test.
If manifold vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve
and refer to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to diagnose the no
vacuum condition.
4. Connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and run the engine for at least 10 seconds.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
5. Operate the brake pedal to check for power assist.
If power assist is present, continue with this test.
If power assist is not present, refer to Brake Booster test in COMPONENT TESTS.
NOTE:
Do not remove the brake booster check valve from the brake booster in
this step.
6. Stop the engine and disconnect the vacuum booster hose from the brake booster check valve.
7. Apply the brake and verify that there is enough vacuum retained in the brake booster for at least one
power-assisted brake application.
If there is enough vacuum for at least one power-assisted brake application, the check valve is
functioning correctly.
If there is not enough vacuum for at least one power-assisted brake application, continue with this
test.
8. Inspect the brake booster for any signs of damage that may cause a leak.
If any damage is found, install a new brake booster and repeat this test.
If no damage is found, install a new check valve.
Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Plug the outlet ports of the master cylinder.
3. Apply the brakes. If brake pedal height cannot be maintained, the brake master cylinder has an internal
leak and a new brake master cylinder must be installed.
Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
The purpose of the compensator ports in the brake master cylinder is to:
supply additional brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir needed by the brake system due to
brake lining wear.
allow brake fluid to return to the brake master cylinder reservoir when the brakes are released. The
returning brake fluid creates a slight turbulence in the brake master cylinder reservoir. This is a normal
condition and indicates that the compensator ports are not clogged.
Clogged compensator ports may cause the brakes to hang up or not fully release. If clogged compensator ports
are suspected, proceed as follows:
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to JACKING AND LIFTING article.
2. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at all 4 wheels, continue with the test.
If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake
caliper, brake wheel cylinder or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
necessary.
3. Check the brake stoplamp switch and the brake pedal free play to verify that the brake pedal is not
partially applied.
4. Loosen the brake master cylinder nuts and position the brake master cylinder away from the brake
booster.
5. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
If the brake drag is no longer present, install a new brake booster. Refer to POWER BRAKE
ACTUATION article.
If the brake drag is still present, install a new master cylinder. Refer to HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATION article.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
BRAKE DISC MACHINING
NOTE:
Do not use a bench lathe to machine the brake discs. Use an on-vehicle brake
lathe only. Read the entire operating manual and/or view the video shipped with
the lathe before installing, operating or repairing the lathe.
NOTE:
An on-vehicle brake lathe with an automatic runout adjustment feature is
preferred. However, if the lathe is not self adjusting, the lathe oscillation must
be adjusted using a dial indicator. The total indicated runout target is 0.000 mm
(0.000 in). The maximum indicated runout should be no more than 0.050 mm
(0.002 in). If the runout adjustment (automatic or manual) is carried out correctly
prior to machining, then the final brake disc runout will be within specification
and a runout measurement is not necessary after machining.
NOTE:
Do not machine new brake discs.
NOTE:
Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required
because correct adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe will make sure that
these dimensions are within specification.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
NOTE:
Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the
hose may occur.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube from the brake caliper.
2. Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside, as
required.
Support the brake caliper using mechanic's wire.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
3. Install the hub adapter using:
four wheel nuts on a 4-stud wheel hub.
five wheel nuts on a 5-stud wheel hub.
six wheel nuts on a 6-stud wheel hub.
four wheel nuts on a 7- or 8-stud wheel hub.
five wheel nuts on a 10-stud wheel hub.
4. Install the cutting lathe.
5. If the lathe is not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. The total indicated
runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The maximum indicated runout should be no more than 0.050 mm
(0.002 in).
6. Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits and install the chip deflector/silencer.
NOTE:
7.
8.
9.
10.
The depth of the cut should be between 0.10 and 0.40 mm (0.004 and 0.015
in). Lighter cuts will cause the bit to heat up and wear faster. Heavier cuts
will cause poor brake disc surface finish.
Machine the brake disc.
Remove the lathe and the silencer.
Remove the wheel nuts and hub adapter.
Remove the metal shavings.
NOTE:
It is not required to install new brake pads if friction material is within
specifications. For additional information, refer to SPECIFICATIONS.
11. Position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly.
Install the bolts.
For fastener torque specifications, refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article for front disc brakes or
REAR DISC BRAKE article for rear disc brakes.
12. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
MATERIAL
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Pressure Bleed
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid,
resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled
onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE:
When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or
installation of new components, air can get into the system and cause spongy
brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has
been correctly connected.
NOTE:
Pressure bleed the brake system at 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi).
NOTE:
If the hydraulic control unit (HCU) or any component upstream of the HCU
are installed new, carry out the Brake System Pressure Bleeding
procedure, then the anti-lock HCU bleed procedure, followed by another
Brake System Bleed Procedure.
1. Clean all the dirt from around the brake fluid reservoir cap and remove the cap. Fill the brake master
cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Identifying Brake Master Cylinder Fluid Reservoir Cap And Max Fill Line
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various
manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of
the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
2. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir and attach the bleeder tank hose to the
fitting on the adapter.
NOTE:
Bleed the longest line first. Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough
specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation.
3. Remove the RH rear brake caliper bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain tube to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the tube in a container
partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank.
5. Loosen the RH rear brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows,
then tighten the RH rear bleeder screw.
Press and release the parking brake 5 times.
Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
6. Tighten the RH rear brake caliper bleeder screw to 8 N.m (71 lb-in), remove the rubber hose and install
the bleeder screw cap.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the LH rear brake caliper.
Tighten the LH rear brake caliper bleeder screw to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
8. Continue bleeding the front of the system, going in order from the RH front brake caliper and then to the
LH front brake caliper.
Tighten the front brake caliper bleeder screws to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
9. Close the bleeder tank valve. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter. Fill the
reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap.
Manual Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid,
resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled
onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE:
When any part of the hydraulic system is disconnected for repair or installation
of new components, air can get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal
action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it is correctly
connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure
bleeding equipment.
1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
Fig. 2: Identifying Brake Master Cylinder Fluid Reservoir Cap And Max Fill Line
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Bleed the brake system from the longest to the shortest brake line.
2. Remove the RH rear brake caliper bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw.
Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
Loosen the RH rear brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the
assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw.
Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
Tighten the RH rear brake caliper bleeder screw to 8 N.m (71 lb-in), remove the rubber hose and install
the bleeder screw cap.
Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LH rear brake caliper bleeder screw.
Tighten the LH rear brake caliper bleeder screw to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
Remove the RH front brake caliper bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw.
Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container
partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Fig. 3: Locating Rubber Drain Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
9. Loosen the RH front brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the
assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw.
Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
10. Tighten the RH front brake caliper bleeder screw to 8 N.m (71 lb-in), remove the rubber hose and install
the bleeder screw cap.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LH front brake caliper bleeder screw.
Tighten the LH front brake caliper bleeder screw to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
ABS Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid,
resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled
onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE:
This procedure is only required when a new hydraulic control unit (HCU) is
installed.
NOTE:
When any part of the hydraulic system is disconnected for repair or installation
of new components, air can get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal
action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it is correctly
connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure
bleeding equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTE:
Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU.
Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic system
through the bleeder screws.
NOTE:
Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock
control portion of the system bleed.
Connect the scan tool to the vehicle.
Access the ABS HCU bleed function and follow the directions on the scan tool.
Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. For additional information, refer to MANUAL BLEEDING.
Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of 2 scan tool cycles and 2 manual bleed cycles.
COMPONENT BLEEDING
MATERIAL
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid,
resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled
onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE:
When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been
emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from getting
into the system.
NOTE:
When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or new
installation, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action.
This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly
connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure
bleeding equipment.
1. Disconnect the brake master cylinder outlet tubes.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Identifying Brake Lines
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install short brake tubes with ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir and fill the brake
master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
Fig. 5: Identifying Short Brake Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes without air bubbles.
4. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
5. Bleed each brake tube at the brake master cylinder as follows:
1. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
2. Loosen the rearmost brake tube fittings until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant
maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the brake tube fitting.
3. Repeat this operation until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
4. Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Repeat the bleeding operation at the front
brake tube.
6. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the brake tubes.
Tighten to 28 N.m (21 lb-ft).
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid,
resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If spilled, wipe up
immediately before damage to the painted or plastic surface occurs.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper
was disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the brake caliper bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled
with clean, specified brake fluid.
Fig. 6: Attaching Rubber Drain Hose To Disc Brake Caliper Bleeder Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure
on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw.
Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the brake caliper bleeder screw, remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Brake System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Tighten the bleeder screw to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:05 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid (Canada)
CXC-37-(A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H)
(Canada)
Premium Windshield Washer
WSB-M8B16-A2
Concentrate (US)
ZC-32-A or B (US)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Front wiper pivot arm nuts
30
Rear wiper motor screws
11
Rear wiper pivot arm nut
12
Washer reservoir filler neck bolt
7
Washer reservoir nuts
7
Windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly 7
bolts
Fill Capacity
-
-
Nm
lb-ft
22
8
9
-
lb-in
62
62
62
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wiper and washer system consists of the following:
Rear window wiper blade
Rear window wiper pivot arm
Rear window wiper motor
Smart junction box (SJB)
Washer pump
Washer reservoir
Windshield wiper blades
Windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft
Windshield wiper motor
Windshield wiper pivot arms
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:58
11:11:54 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Windshield wiper/wash switch (part of the multi-function switch)
NOTE:
The SJB may also be identified as the generic electronic module (GEM).
If equipped with automatic headlamps, the SJB will illuminate the exterior lamps, including the parking lamps,
when the front wipers are on for more than 10 seconds and the headlamp control is in the AUTOLAMP
position. When the wipers are turned off, the exterior lamps will remain on for 30 seconds before turning off.
Windshield Wiper/Wash Switch - The windshield wiper/washer switch is an integral component of the
steering column multi-function switch. Refer to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article.
Windshield Washer Courtesy Wipe - When the front windshield washer system is activated, the wipers will
cycle 3 times with washer fluid followed by one final courtesy wipe a few seconds later to clear any remaining
fluid that is dripping down from the top of the windshield.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
WIPERS AND WASHERS
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
73III Automotive Meter
Tool Number
105-R00057 or equivalent
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025B or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Principles of Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
The wiper motors receive inputs from the following:
Multi-function switch
PCM
Smart junction box (SJB)
Battery junction box (BJB)
The following components are integrated in the wiper motors:
Windshield wiper motor module
Run/park relay
High/low speed relay
Run/park sense (Hall-effect)
Washer pump relay
High-Speed Windshield Wipers
When the multi-function switch is set to the high-speed position, it supplies ground to the integral high/low
speed relay coil and the integral run/park relay coil, which causes the windshield wiper motor to operate at high
speed. During high-speed operation only, both the integral high/low-speed relay coil ground and the integral
run/park relay coil ground are controlled directly by the multi-function switch. This differs from low speed or
intermittent operation when the integral run/park relay coil is controlled by the microprocessor. When the
switch is placed in the OFF position, the motor continues to operate until the motor returns to the PARK
position and the internal Hall-effect sensor senses the motor magnet. The output to the integral run/park relay
deactivates the relay and disconnects the voltage to the motor.
Since the integral high/low relay coil and the integral run/park relay coil are both controlled by a hard wired
circuit to the multi-function switch, the windshield wipers will still operate in high speed mode if the internal
windshield wiper module fails, but will not automatically park when the multi-function switch is turned to the
OFF position.
Low-Speed Windshield Wipers
When the multi-function switch is set to the low-speed position, it supplies ground to the internal windshield
wiper motor module low-speed inputs and the windshield wiper motor operates at low speed. During low-speed
operation, the integral run/park relay is activated by the microprocessor and supplies 12 volts to the low-speed
brush of the windshield wiper motor. The integral run/park relay coil ground is controlled by the internal
windshield wiper motor module based on inputs received from the multi-function switch. When the switch is
placed in the OFF position, the motor continues to operate until the motor returns to the PARK position and the
internal Hall-effect sensor senses the motor magnet. The output to the integral run/park relay deactivates the
relay and disconnects the voltage to the motor.
Since the integral run/park relay is controlled by the internal windshield wiper motor microprocessor, the wipers
will only operate in high-speed mode if the internal windshield wiper motor module fails, and will not
automatically park when the multi-function switch is turned to the OFF position. This is due to the integral
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
run/park and integral high/low relay coils being directly hard-wired to the switch in high speed. The diode
prevents current flow through the high/low relay coil so the relay remains in the normally closed low-speed
position.
Intermittent Speed Windshield Wipers
When the multi-function switch is set to the intermittent position(s), it supplies ground to the windshield wiper
motor module inputs and the windshield wiper motor operates in intermittent mode. During intermittent
operation, the windshield wiper motor activates the integral run/park relay coil which sends voltage through the
integral high/low relay. The integral high/low relay remains deactivated, supplying the voltage to the low-speed
brush of the windshield wiper motor. The windshield motor continues to operate until the internal Hall-effect
sensor senses the magnet (PARK position) and deactivates the integral run/park relay, which disconnects
voltage from the wiper motor. The windshield wipers remain parked until the windshield wiper motor module
completes a time-out and then repeats the intermittent windshield wiper cycle.
Speed Dependent Windshield Wipers
The speed-dependent feature increases the frequency of wiping to compensate for the extra moisture that
accumulates on the windshield as the vehicle speed increases, when the multi-function switch is in any
intermittent setting except the INT 1 position. The windshield wiper module receives vehicle speed sensor
(VSS) information directly from the PCM. As vehicle speed increases, the speed-dependent feature gradually
shortens the delay between wipes.
The speed-dependent feature is easiest to verify in the INT 2 position. With the vehicle at a standstill and the
multi-function switch in the INT 2 position, the wipers should operate once every 10 seconds. As vehicle speed
increases, the delay between wipes will gradually shorten. For example, by the time the vehicle reaches 100
km/h (62 mph), the wipers should operate every 5 seconds. Speed dependent operation is similar in INT 3, INT
4 and INT 5 modes.
Wiper Activated Headlamps (If Equipped with Autolamp System)
The headlamps will automatically turn on within 10 seconds when the headlamp switch is in the automatic
position and the windshield wipers are activated in any mode except in the MIST or WASH positions. When the
windshield wipers are deactivated, the headlamps will automatically turn off within 30 seconds.
Intermittent Rear Window Wiper System
When the multi-function switch is set to the rear intermittent position(s), it supplies ground to the rear window
wiper motor module input and the wiper operates in intermittent mode. During intermittent operation, the rear
wiper motor momentarily activates the rear window wiper relay (internal), which sends voltage to the motor.
Once the rear window wiper motor is activated, the internal run/park switch connects voltage to the motor,
keeping it operating. When the rear window wiper motor returns to the PARK position, the run/park switch
disconnects voltage internally from the wiper motor input, reconnecting it to the rear window wiper motor
module output. The rear window wiper remains parked until the rear window wiper motor module completes a
time-out and then repeats the cycle.
Washer System
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
The front and rear washer system share the same washer reservoir and washer pump. The front and rear wiper
motor modules each contain an integral washer relay that supplies a ground path for the washer pump whenever
they are inactive. When windshield wash is selected on the multi-function switch, the windshield wiper motor
module activates its integral washer relay which sends voltage to the washer pump to direct fluid to the
windshield. When rear wash is selected on the multi-function switch, the rear wiper motor module activates its
integral washer relay to send voltage to the washer pump to direct fluid to the rear window. If the front or rear
washer button is applied for greater than 10 seconds, the associated wiper motor will default the washer system
to off and the washer system will be inoperative for that ignition cycle.
Software Safe Mode
The windshield wiper motor defaults to software safe mode when the run/park sensor does not sense the Halleffect magnet inside the wiper motor. This can be caused by an obstruction of the windshield wipers, a binding
linkage or loss of the Hall sensor signal. The motor continues to operate in a high/low-speed condition, and
when turned off, the wipers immediately park on the windshield. If necessary, the wipers can be turned on and
off until they return to the PARK position.
WINDSHIELD WIPER CIRCUIT FUNCTION TABLE
MultiFunction Circuit
Switch
CRW07 Circuit CRW08 Circuit CRW19
Position (GY/BN)
(VT/OG)
(BU/OG)
OFF
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
INT 1
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
INT 2
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
INT 3
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
INT 4
OPEN
OPEN
GROUND
INT 5
OPEN
OPEN
GROUND
LOW
OPEN
OPEN
GROUND
HIGH
OPEN
GROUND
GROUND
WASH GROUND OPEN/GROUND OPEN/GROUND
Circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
OPEN
OPEN
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN/GROUND
REAR WIPER CIRCUIT FUNCTION TABLE
Multi-Function Switch Position
Circuit CRW21 (YE/VT)
OFF
OPEN
INT 1
OPEN
INT 2
GROUND
WASH
GROUND
Circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
OPEN
GROUND
GROUND
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
GROUND
GROUND
OPEN/GROUND
Circuit CRW20 (GY/YE)
OPEN
GROUND
GROUND
OPEN
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Windshield washer
hoses
Wiper linkage
Multi-function switch
Electrical
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse:
58 (30A)
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuses:
19 (25A)
43 (10A)
45 (5A)
Circuitry
Windshield wiper motor
Rear wiper motor
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
The windshield wiper motor does not communicate on the network. The
windshield wiper motor provides wiper on/off status directly to the smart
junction box (SJB).
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
SJB.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication from one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
NOTE:
The SJB may also be identified as the generic electronic module (GEM).
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB and PCM.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart or the
INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article for PCM related DTCs. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to SYMPTOM CHART - WIPERS AND
WASHERS table.
Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart
DTC
B2008
Description
Wipers On Signal Circuit Short to Ground
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
For a complete list of SJB DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
Symptom Chart - Wipers and Washers
SYMPTOM CHART - WIPERS AND WASHERS
Condition
Possible Sources
The wipers are inoperative
- windshield
The wipers are inoperative
- rear window
The wipers stay on
continuously - windshield
The wipers stay on
continuously - rear window
The high/low wiper speeds
do not operate correctly windshield
Action
Fuse(s)
Multi-function switch
Circuitry
Windshield wiper motor
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Fuse(s)
Multi-function switch
Circuitry
Rear window wiper motor
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Windshield wiper motor
Multi-function switch
Circuitry
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Rear window wiper motor
Multi-function switch
Circuitry
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Multi-function switch
Circuitry
Windshield wiper motor
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
The intermittent wiper
speed does not operate
correctly - windshield
The intermittent wiper
speed does not operate
correctly - rear window
The wash and wipe
function is inoperative rear window
Circuitry
Multi-function switch
Windshield wiper motor
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Multi-function switch
Circuitry
Rear window wiper motor
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Multi-function switch
Rear window wiper motor
If the washer pump is
inoperative, go to Pinpoint
Test H .
If the washer pump is
operative, INSTALL a new
rear wiper motor. TEST the
system for normal operation.
The wash and wipe
function is inoperative windshield
Windshield wiper motor
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
Circuitry
Washer pump motor
Multi-function switch
Windshield wiper motor
Rear window wiper motor
Circuitry
CARRY OUT the MultiFunction Switch Component
Test. Refer to COMPONENT
TESTING.
-
Multi-function switch
CHECK circuit CRW17
(GY/BN) for a short to
ground.
-
Windshield wiper motor
INSTALL a new windshield
wiper motor. REFER to
Wiper Motor - Windshield.
Circuitry
CARRY OUT the MultiFunction Switch Component
Test. Refer to COMPONENT
TESTING.
The washer pump is
inoperative
If the washer pump is
inoperative, go to Pinpoint
Test H .
If the washer pump is
operative, INSTALL a new
windshield wiper motor.
TEST the system for normal
operation.
The washer pump activates
for 10 seconds whenever
the ignition is turned on front
The washer pump activates
for 10 seconds whenever
the ignition is turned on rear
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Multi-function switch
CHECK circuit CRW20
(GY/YE) for a short to
ground.
Rear wiper motor
INSTALL a new rear wiper
motor. REFER to Wiper
Motor - Rear Window.
The speed dependent
interval mode does not
operate correctly
Circuitry
Windshield wiper motor
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
The wipers will not park at
the correct position
Linkage
Windshield wiper motor
If the wipers immediately
stop on the windshield as
soon as they are turned off,
INSTALL a new windshield
wiper motor.
Pivot arm adjustment
ADJUST pivot arm, REFER
to Wiper Blade and Pivot
Arm Adjustment Windshield.
-
-
The wipers will not park at
the correct position - rear
window
Pivot arm adjustment
ADJUST pivot arm, REFER
to Wiper Blade and Pivot
Arm Adjustment - Rear
Window.
The headlamps do not
illuminate when the wipers
are on
Circuitry
Windshield wiper motor
Smart junction box (SJB)
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Wipers are Inoperative - Windshield
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Wipers and Washers schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the front windshield wiper motor receives power through circuits SBB58 (YE/RD) and
CBP45 (YE). The front windshield wiper motor is grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The front
windshield wiper motor receives open and ground inputs from the multi-function switch through circuits
CRW17 (GN/VT), CRW18 (VT/WH), CRW19 (BU/OG) and CRW08 (VT/OG) to activate the wipers to the
appropriate speeds. The multi-function switch receives ground through circuit GD116 (BK/VT).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Multi-function switch
Windshield wiper motor
PINPOINT TEST A: THE WIPERS ARE INOPERATIVE - WINDSHIELD
A1 CHECK CIRCUITS SBB58 (YE/RD) AND CBP45 (YE) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Windshield Wiper Motor C1552
Key in ON position.
Fig. 1: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between windshield wiper motor C1552-5, circuit SBB58 (YE/RD), harness
side and ground; and between windshield wiper motor C1552-8, circuit CBP45 (YE), harness side
and ground.
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : VERIFY that battery junction box (BJB) fuse 58 (30A) and smart junction box (SJB) fuse 45
(5A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
A2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between windshield wiper motor C1552-6, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and ground; and between windshield wiper motor C1552-3, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and ground.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
A3 CHECK THE MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
Disconnect: Multi-function Switch C202
Carry out the Multi-Function Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the multi-function switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : INSTALL a new multi-function switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article.
A4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 3: Measuring Resistance Between Multi-Function Switch C202-15, Circuit GD116
(BK/VT) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between multi-function switch C202-15, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness
side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK FOR SHORTS IN THE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR HARNESS
Measure the resistance at the windshield wiper motor electrical connector between the circuits
shown in the table.
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
Pin 10, circuit CRW19
(BU/OG)
Pin 11, circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
Pin 1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
Pin 11, circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
Pin 1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
Pin 9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Pin 1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
Pin 9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Pin 9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms for all measurements?
YES : Go to A6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A6 CHECK FOR CORRECT WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect all windshield wiper motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all the windshield wiper motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new windshield wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Windshield.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test B: The Wipers are Inoperative - Rear Window
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Wipers and Washers schematic and connector
information.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the rear window wiper motor receives power through circuits SBB19 (BU/RD) and
CBP43 (GY). The rear window wiper motor is grounded through circuit GD149 (BK/GY). The rear window
wiper motor receives open and ground inputs from the multi-function switch through circuits CRW20 (GY/YE)
and CRW21 (YE/VT) to activate the wiper to the appropriate speeds. The multi-function switch supplies a
ground input to the rear wiper motor on CRW21 (YE/VT) when INT 1 is selected. The multi-function switch
supplies ground to the rear wiper motor on CRW21 (YE/VT) and CRW20 (GY/YE) when INT 2 is selected.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Multi-function switch
Rear window wiper motor
PINPOINT TEST B: THE WIPERS ARE INOPERATIVE - REAR WINDOW
B1 CHECK CIRCUITS SBB19 (BU/RD) AND CBP43 (GY) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Rear Window Wiper Motor C4218
Key in ON position.
Fig. 4: Measuring Voltage Between Rear Window Wiper Motor Circuits, Harness Side And
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between rear window wiper motor C4218-6, circuit SBP19 (BU/RD), harness
side and ground; and between rear window wiper motor C4218-8, circuit CBP43 (GY), harness
side and ground.
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuses 19 (25A) and 43 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the
circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
B2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD149 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 5: Measuring Resistance Between Rear Window Wiper C4218-5, Circuit GD149
(BK/GY), Harness Side And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between rear window wiper C4218-5, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
B3 CHECK THE MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multi-function Switch C202
Carry out the Multi-Function Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the multi-function switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : INSTALL a new multi-function switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article.
B4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance Between Multi-Function Switch C202-15, Circuit GD116
(BK/VT) & Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between multi-function switch C202-15, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
B5 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW21 (YE/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 7: Measuring Resistance Between Multi-Function Switch C202-13, Circuit CRW21
(YE/VT), Harness Side & Rear Window Wiper C4218-3, Circuit CRW21 (YE/VT), Harness
Side
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between multi-function switch C202-13, circuit CRW21 (YE/VT), harness
side and rear window wiper C4218-3, circuit CRW21 (YE/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
B6 CHECK FOR CORRECT WIPER MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect all wiper motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all wiper motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new rear window wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Rear Window.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test C: The Wipers Stay on Continuously - Windshield
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Wipers and Washers schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the windshield wiper motor receives open and ground inputs from the multi-function
switch through circuits CRW17 (GN/VT), CRW18 (VT/WH), CRW19 (BU/OG) and CRW08 (VT/OG) to
activate the wipers to the appropriate speeds.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Windshield wiper motor
Multi-function switch
PINPOINT TEST C: THE WIPERS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY - WINDSHIELD
C1 CHECK THE MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multi-function Switch C202
Carry out the Multi-Function Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the multi-function switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : INSTALL a new multi-function switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article.
C2 CHECK CIRCUITS CRW19 (BU/OG), CRW18 (VT/WH), CRW08 (VT/OG) OR CRW17
(GN/VT) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Windshield Wiper Motor C1552
Fig. 8: Checking Circuits For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Using the following table, measure the resistance between windshield wiper motor C1552 harness
side and ground:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
C1552-10, circuit CRW19
(BU/OG)
C1552-11, circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
C1552-1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
C1552-9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Ground
ground
ground
ground
ground
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to C3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
C3 CHECK FOR CORRECT WIPER MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect all wiper motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all wiper motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new windshield wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Windshield.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test D: The Wipers Stay on Continuously - Rear Window
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Wipers and Washers schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the rear window wiper motor receives open and ground inputs from the multi-function
switch through circuits CRW20 (GY/YE) and CRW21 (YE/VT) to activate the wiper to the appropriate speeds.
The multi-function switch supplies a ground input to the rear wiper motor on CRW21 (YE/VT) when INT 1 is
selected. The multi-function switch supplies ground to the rear wiper motor on CRW21 (YE/VT) and CRW20
(GY/YE) when INT 2 is selected.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Rear window wiper motor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Multi-function switch
PINPOINT TEST D: THE WIPERS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY - REAR WINDOW
D1 CHECK THE MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multi-function Switch C202
Carry out the Multi-Function Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the multi-function switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to D2.
NO : INSTALL a new multi-function switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article.
D2 CHECK CIRCUITS CRW20 (GY/YE) AND CRW21 (YE/VT) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Rear Window Wiper Motor C4218
Fig. 9: Measuring Resistance Between Rear Window Wiper Motor Circuits, Harness Side
And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between rear window wiper motor C4218-4, circuit CRW20 (GY/YE),
harness side and ground; and between rear window wiper motor C4218-3, circuit CRW21
(YE/VT), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
D3 CHECK FOR CORRECT WIPER MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect all wiper motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all wiper motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new rear window wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Rear Window.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test E: The High/Low Wiper Speeds Do Not Operate Correctly - Windshield
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Wipers and Washers schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the windshield wiper motor receives open and ground inputs from the multi-function
switch through circuits CRW17 (GN/VT), CRW18 (VT/WH), CRW19 (BU/OG) and CRW08 (VT/OG) to
activate the wipers to the appropriate speeds.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Windshield wiper motor
Multi-function switch
PINPOINT TEST E: THE HIGH/LOW WIPER SPEEDS DO NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY WINDSHIELD
E1 CHECK THE MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multi-function Switch C202
Carry out the Multi-Function Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the multi-function switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : INSTALL a new multi-function switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
E2 CHECK CIRCUITS CRW19 (BU/OG), CRW08 (VT/OG) AND CRW17 (GN/VT) FOR AN
OPEN
Disconnect: Windshield Wiper Motor C1552
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance Between Multi-Function Switch C202 Harness Side And
Windshield Wiper Motor C1552 Harness Side Circuits
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Using the following table, measure the resistance between multi-function switch C202 harness side
and windshield wiper motor C1552 harness side:
Multi-function Switch C202
C202-16, circuit CRW19
(BU/OG)
C202-9, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
C202-12, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
C1552-10, circuit CRW19
(BU/OG)
C1552-1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
C1552-9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
E3 CHECK CIRCUITS CRW19 (BU/OG), CRW08 (VT/OG) OR CRW17 (GN/VT) FOR A
SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 11: Checking Circuits For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Using the following table, measure the resistance between windshield wiper motor C1552 harness
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
side and ground:
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
C1552-10, circuit CRW19
(BU/OG)
C1552-1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
C1552-9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Ground
ground
ground
ground
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
E4 CHECK FOR SHORTS IN THE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR HARNESS
Measure the resistance at the windshield wiper motor electrical connector between the circuits
shown in the table.
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
Pin 10, circuit CRW19
(BU/OG)
Pin 11, circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
Pin 1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
Pin 11, circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
Pin 1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
Pin 9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Pin 1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
Pin 9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Pin 9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms for all measurements?
YES : Go to E5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
E5 CHECK FOR CORRECT WIPER MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect all wiper motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all wiper motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new windshield wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Windshield.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test F: The Intermittent Wiper Speed Does Not Operate Correctly - Windshield
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Wipers and Washers schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the windshield wiper motor receives open and ground inputs from the multi-function
switch through circuits CRW17 (GN/VT), CRW18 (VT/WH), CRW19 (BU/OG) and CRW08 (VT/OG) to
activate the wipers to the appropriate speeds.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Windshield wiper motor
Multi-function switch
PINPOINT TEST F: THE INTERMITTENT WIPER SPEED DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY WINDSHIELD
F1 CHECK THE MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multi-function Switch C202
Carry out the Multi-Function Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the multi-function switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to F2.
NO : INSTALL a new multi-function switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
F2 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW19 (BU/OG), CRW18 (VT/WH) OR CRW17 (GN/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Windshield Wiper Motor C1552
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Checking Circuits For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Using the following table, measure the resistance between multi-function switch C202 harness side
and windshield wiper motor C1552 harness side:
Multi-function Switch C202
C202-16, circuit CRW19
(BU/OG)
C202-12, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
C202-11, circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
C1552-10, circuit CRW19
(BU/OG)
C1552-9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
C1552-11, circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
F3 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW19 (BU/OG), CRW18 (VT/WH) OR CRW17 (GN/VT) FOR A SHORT
TO GROUND
Fig. 13: Checking Circuits For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Using the following table, measure the resistance between windshield wiper motor C1552 harness
side and ground:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
C1552-10, circuit CRW19
(BU/OG)
C1552-11, circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
C1552-9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Ground
ground
ground
ground
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
F4 CHECK FOR SHORTS IN THE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR HARNESS
Measure the resistance at the windshield wiper motor electrical connector between the circuits
shown in the table.
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
Pin 10, circuit CRW19
(BU/OG)
Pin 11, circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
Pin 1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
Windshield Wiper Motor
C1552
Pin 11, circuit CRW18
(VT/WH)
Pin 1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
Pin 9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Pin 1, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG)
Pin 9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Pin 9, circuit CRW17
(GN/VT)
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms for all measurements?
YES : Go to F5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
F5 CHECK FOR CORRECT WIPER MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect all wiper motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all wiper motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new windshield wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Windshield.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test G: The Intermittent Wiper Speed Does Not Operate Correctly - Rear Window
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Wipers and Washers schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the rear window wiper motor receives open and ground inputs from the multi-function
switch through circuits CRW20 (GY/YE) and CRW21 (YE/VT) to activate the wiper to the appropriate speeds.
The multi-function switch supplies a ground input to the rear wiper motor on CRW21 (YE/VT) when INT 1 is
selected. The multi-function switch supplies ground to the rear wiper motor on CRW21 (YE/VT) and CRW20
(GY/YE) when INT2 is selected.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Rear window wiper motor
Multi-function switch
PINPOINT TEST G: THE INTERMITTENT WIPER SPEED DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY REAR WINDOW
G1 VERIFY REAR WASHER PUMP OPERATION
Key in ON position.
Activate the rear washer pump.
Does the rear washer pump activate?
YES : Go to G2.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test I .
G2 CHECK THE MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multi-function Switch C202
Carry out the Multi-Function Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the multi-function switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to G3.
NO : INSTALL a new multi-function switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article.
G3 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN CIRCUITS CRW20 (GY/YE) AND CRW21 (YE/VT)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance Between Rear Window Wiper Circuits
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between rear window wiper C4218-4, circuit CRW20 (GY/YE), harness
side and rear window wiper C4218-3, circuit CRW21 (YE/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
G4 CHECK FOR CORRECT WIPER MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect all wiper motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all wiper motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new rear window wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Rear Window.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test H: The Washer Pump is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Wipers and Washers schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the windshield washer pump motor is grounded through internal relays in the wiper
motors using circuits CRW14 (BU/WH) and CRW23 (VT/GN). The multi-function switch provides input to the
windshield wiper motor through circuit CRW07 (GY/BN) to activate the washer. The windshield wiper motor
activates the internal relay and then provides power through circuit CRW14 (BU/WH). When the rear window
washer is activated, the multi-function switch provides input to the rear window wiper motor through circuit
CRW20 (GY/YE) to activate the washer. The rear window wiper motor activates the internal relay and then
provides power through circuit CRW23 (VT/GN).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Multi-function switch
Washer pump motor
Windshield wiper motor
Rear window wiper motor
PINPOINT TEST H: THE WASHER PUMP IS INOPERATIVE
H1 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW14 (BU/WH) FOR GROUND
Disconnect: Washer Pump Motor C137
Key in ON position.
Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance Between Washer Pump Motor C137-2, Circuit CRW14
(BU/WH) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between washer pump motor C137-2, circuit CRW14 (BU/WH) harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H3.
NO : Go to H2.
H2 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW14 (BU/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Windshield Wiper Motor C1552
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance Between Windshield Wiper Motor C1552-7, CRW14 (BU/WH)
& Washer Pump Motor C137-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between windshield wiper motor C1552-7, circuit CRW14 (BU/WH),
harness side and washer pump motor C137-2, circuit CRW14 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H13.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
H3 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW23 (VT/GN) FOR GROUND
Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance Between Washer Pump Motor C137-1, Circuit CRW23
(VT/GN) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between washer pump motor C137-1, circuit CRW23 (VT/GN) harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H5.
NO : Go to H4.
H4 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW23 (VT/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Rear Window Wiper Motor C4218
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Measuring Resistance Between Rear Window Wiper Motor C4218-7, Circuit CRW23
(VT/GN), Harness Side And Washer Pump Motor C137-1, Circuit CRW23 (VT/GN), Harness
Side
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between rear window wiper motor C4218-7, circuit CRW23 (VT/GN),
harness side and washer pump motor C137-1, circuit CRW23 (VT/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H14.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
H5 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW14 (BU/WH) FOR VOLTAGE
NOTE:
Holding the multi-function switch to the windshield wiper WASH position
for greater than 10 seconds will default the washer system to OFF for that
ignition cycle.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 19: Measuring Voltage Between Washer Pump Motor C137-2, Circuit CRW14 (BU/WH)
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between washer pump motor C137-2, circuit CRW14 (BU/WH) harness side
and ground while depressing the multi-function switch to the windshield wiper WASH position.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to H9.
NO : Go to H6.
H6 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW14 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Windshield Wiper Motor C1552
Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance Between Washer Pump Motor C137-2, Circuit CRW14
(BU/WH) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between washer pump motor C137-2, circuit CRW14 (BU/WH), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to H7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
H7 CHECK THE MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multi-function Switch C202
Carry out the Multi-Function Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the multi-function switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to H8.
NO : INSTALL a new multi-function switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article.
H8 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW07 (GY/BN) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 21: Checking Circuit For Open Or Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between windshield wiper motor C1552-12, circuit CRW07 (GY/BN),
harness side and multi-function switch C202-10, circuit CRW07 (GY/BN), harness side; and
between multi-function switch C202-10, circuit CRW07 (GY/BN), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between multi-function switch and wiper motor; and
greater than 10,000 ohms between multi-function switch and ground?
YES : Go to H13.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
H9 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW23 (VT/GN) FOR VOLTAGE
Fig. 22: Measuring Voltage Between Washer Pump Motor C137-1, Circuit CRW23 (VT/GN)
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between washer pump motor C137-1, circuit CRW23 (VT/GN) harness side
and ground while depressing the multi-function switch to the rear window wiper WASH position.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new washer pump. REFER to Washer Pump. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to H10.
H10 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW23 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Rear Window Wiper Motor C4218
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Measuring Resistance Between Washer Pump Motor C137-1, Circuit CRW23
(VT/GN) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between washer pump motor C137-1, circuit CRW23 (VT/GN), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to H11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
H11 CHECK THE MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multi-function Switch C202
Carry out the Multi-Function Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the multi-function switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to H12.
NO : INSTALL a new multi-function switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article.
H12 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW20 (GY/YE) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 24: Measuring Resistance Between Windshield Wiper Motor C4218-4, Circuit CRW20
(GY/YE), Harness Side And Multi-Function Switch Circuits, Harness Side
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between windshield wiper motor C4218-4, circuit CRW20 (GY/YE),
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
harness side and multi-function switch C202-14, circuit CRW20 (GY/YE), harness side; and
between multi-function switch C202-14, circuit CRW20 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between multi-function switch and wiper motor; and
greater than 10,000 ohms between multi-function switch and ground?
YES : Go to H14.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
H13 CHECK THE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Disconnect all wiper motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all wiper motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new windshield wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Windshield.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by binding or
incorrect pivot arm adjustment. REFER to WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
- WINDSHIELD. TEST the system for normal operation.
H14 CHECK THE REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR
Disconnect all wiper motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all wiper motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new rear window wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Rear Window.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by binding or
incorrect pivot arm adjustment. REFER to WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
- REAR WINDOW. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test I: The Speed Dependent Interval Mode Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Wipers and Washers schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the windshield wiper motor receives vehicle speed information from the PCM through
circuit VMC05 (VT/OG). The windshield wiper motor electronics then determine the speed of the windshield
wiper motor. The speed dependent wipers function in all INT modes except INT 1.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PCM
Windshield wiper motor
PINPOINT TEST I: THE SPEED DEPENDENT INTERVAL MODE DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY
I1 REVIEW THE DTCs
Review the DTCs from the PCM self-test.
Are any vehicle speed sensor (VSS) related DTCs present?
YES : REFER to the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES article to diagnose the VSS.
NO : Go to I2.
I2 CHECK CIRCUIT VMC05 (VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: PCM C175b
Disconnect: Windshield Wiper Motor C1552
Fig. 25: Measuring Resistance Between PCM C175B-63, Circuit VMC05 (VT/OG) &
Windshield Wiper Motor C125-4
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between PCM C175b-63, circuit VMC05 (VT/OG), harness side and
windshield wiper motor C125-4, circuit VMC05 (VT/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to I3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
I3 CHECK CIRCUIT VMC05 (VT/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 26: Measuring Resistance Between PCM C175B-63, Circuit VMC05 (VT/OG) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between PCM C175b-63, circuit VMC05 (VT/OG), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to I4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
I4 CHECK CIRCUIT VMC05 (VT/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 27: Measuring Voltage Between PCM C175b-63, Circuit VMC05 (VT/OG), Harness Side
And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between PCM C175b-63, circuit VMC05 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to I5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
I5 CHECK FOR CORRECT WIPER MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect all wiper motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Connect all wiper motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new windshield wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Windshield.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test J: The Headlamps Do Not Illuminate When the Wipers are On
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Wipers and Washers schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
If equipped with automatic headlamps, the smart junction box (SJB) will illuminate the exterior lamps,
including the parking lamps, when the front wipers are on for more than 10 seconds. The SJB monitors the front
wiper motor on circuit CRW01 (WH).
DTC B2008 Wipers On Signal Circuit Short to Ground - Short to ground on wiper motor on input circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Windshield wiper motor
SJB
PINPOINT TEST J: THE HEADLAMPS DO NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN THE WIPERS ARE ON
J1 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW01 (WH) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Windshield Wiper Motor C1552
Key in ON position.
Fig. 28: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between windshield wiper motor C1552-2 circuit CRW01 (WH), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new windshield wiper motor. REFER to Wiper Motor - Windshield. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : Go to J2.
J2 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW01 (WH) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280F
Fig. 29: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280F-8 Circuit CRW01 (WH), Harness Side
And Windshield Wiper Motor C1552-2 Circuit, & Between SJB C2280F-8 Circuit CRW01
(WH), Harness Side And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between SJB C2280F-8 circuit CRW01 (WH), harness side and windshield
wiper motor C1552-2 circuit CRW01 (WH); then between SJB C2280F-8 circuit CRW01 (WH),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the SJB and windshield wiper motor and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the SJB and ground?
YES : Go to J3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
J3 CHECK FOR CORRECT MODULE OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they are seated correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the SJB self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT - WINDSHIELD
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers.
2. Verify that the RH and LH windshield wiper blades are located at the alignment marks on the glass.
Fig. 30: Locating RH & LH Wiper Blade Alignment Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure there is no mechanical binding in the linkage preventing the
wiper arms from returning to the fully parked position.
3. If necessary, remove the windshield wiper pivot arm nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and
reposition them to the correct locations.
To install, tighten to 30 N.m (22 lb-ft).
WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT - REAR WINDOW
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear wiper blade is positioned at the first defroster line located on the rear window glass.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:54 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Identifying Rear Wiper Blade
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. If necessary, remove the rear wiper pivot arm nut and the rear wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the
correct location.
To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
WASHER HOSE REPAIR
1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose.
2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose.
3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose.
NOTE:
In difficult cases, clamping may be required.
4. Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) inside diameter black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose,
and clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:55 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 32: Exploded View Of Front Wiper & Washer System With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
17C526
W708841
17526 RH/ 17527 LH
W707532
5
17508
Description
Windshield wiper pivot arm nut covers
Windshield wiper pivot arm nuts
Windshield wiper pivot arms
Windshield wiper mounting arm and
pivot shaft assembly bolts (2 required)
Windshield wiper mounting arm and
pivot shaft assembly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:55 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 33: Exploded View Of Rear Wiper & Washer System With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
W708312
17526
N807658
17D400
Description
Rear wiper pivot arm nut
Rear wiper pivot arm
Rear wiper motor electrical connector
Rear wiper motor screws (3 required)
Rear wiper motor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:55 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 34: Exploded View Of Washer Pump & Reservoir With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
N807658
2
3
17A605
W702751
4
5
17664
17618
Description
Windshield washer reservoir filler neck
retaining bolt
Windshield washer reservoir hoses
Windshield washer reservoir nuts (2
required)
Windshield washer pump
Windshield washer reservoir
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures in this service information.
WIPER PIVOT ARM - FRONT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front wiper pivot arm caps.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:55 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 35: Locating Wiper Pivot Arm Cap
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Remove the front wiper pivot arm retaining nuts and the front wiper pivot arms.
To install, tighten to 30 N.m (22 lb-ft).
Fig. 36: Locating Wiper Pivot Arm Retaining Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
To adjust the windshield wiper pivot arms, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment Windshield.
WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the upper cowl panel grille. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY PANELS
article.
2. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly bolts and the windshield wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
WIPER MOTOR - WINDSHIELD
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:55 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The windshield wiper motor is not serviceable separately. The windshield wiper
motor and the mounting arm and pivot shaft must be replaced together.
1. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. For additional information, refer to Wiper
Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
WIPER PIVOT ARM - REAR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Open the rear wiper pivot arm nut cover.
Fig. 37: Identifying Rear Wiper Pivot Arm Nut Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Remove the nut and the rear wiper pivot arm.
To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
Fig. 38: Identifying Rear Wiper Pivot Arm Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
To adjust the rear wiper pivot arm, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:55 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
Window.
WIPER MOTOR - REAR WINDOW
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear wiper pivot arm. For additional information, refer to Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear.
2. Remove the liftgate interior trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
3. Disconnect the rear wiper motor electrical connector.
4. Remove the 3 rear wiper motor screws.
5. Remove the rear wiper motor.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the rear wiper motor on the liftgate and install the 3 rear wiper motor screws.
Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
2. Connect the rear wiper motor electrical connector.
3. Install the liftgate interior trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
4. Install the rear wiper pivot arm. For additional information, refer to Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear.
WASHER PUMP
MATERIAL
Item
Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
(Canada)
CXC-37-(A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H) (Canada)
Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (US)
ZC-32-A or B (US)
Specification
-
WSB-M8B16-A2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS article.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For
EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the
USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673.
For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:55 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the washer reservoir
before washer pump removal.
2. Remove the washer pump.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the hoses.
3. Remove the washer pump.
Fig. 39: Identifying Electrical Connector, Hoses & Washer Pump
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the washer reservoir.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump
failure.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Fill the washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
WASHER RESERVOIR
MATERIAL
Item
Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
(Canada)
CXC-37-(A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H) (Canada)
Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (US)
ZC-32-A or B (US)
Specification
-
WSB-M8B16-A2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS article.
2. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:55 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Wipers And Washers - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For
EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the
USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673.
For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the washer reservoir
before removal.
3. Disconnect the washer pump hoses.
4. Remove the bolt from the washer reservoir filler neck.
To install, tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
5. Remove the washer reservoir nuts and the washer reservoir.
To install, tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
Fig. 40: Locating Washer Reservoir Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the washer reservoir.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in premature pump
failure.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Fill the washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:11:55 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
The steering column switches consist of the following:
Multifunction switch
Ignition switch
The steering column switches receive driver inputs and send signals to various components. The multifunction
switch controls the windshield wipers, hazard flasher, turn signal, headlamp low/high beam and headlamp
dimmer/flash-to-pass. The ignition switch is used in conjunction with the lock cylinder key to start the vehicle.
When the lock cylinder key is switched to different positions, it moves linkages which enable the ignition
switch to send battery voltage to various components.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025B or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Principles of Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:15
10:48:11 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) may also be identified as the generic electronic
module (GEM).
Ignition Switch - The ignition switch is controlled by the ignition lock cylinder with a key. When the ignition
cylinder is turned using the key, a mechanical connection positions the ignition switch to the selected position
and allows the ignition switch to send voltage to specific components. The ignition switch is contained in the
steering column lock module, if a new ignition switch needs to be installed, then a new lock module must be
installed.
Multi-function Switch - The multi-function switch (flash-to-pass, high beam, turn signal, windshield
wiper/washer and rear wiper/washer) controls the various components electrically. The multi-function switch is
hard-wired to the SJB and controls a ground signal for the high beam, flash-to-pass and turn signal functions.
The multi-function switch is also hard-wired to the smart wiper module and the rear wiper module, and controls
a ground signal for the various wiper and washer functions.
For headlamp and turn signal concerns, refer to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article. For wiper and washer
concerns, refer to WIPERS AND WASHERS article.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the multi-function switch or ignition switch.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Multi-function switch
Ignition switch
Steering column shrouds
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse(s):
27 (20A)
28 (5A)
43 (10A)
45 (5A)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Instrument cluster
Passive anti-theft system
(PATS) module
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart. For all other
DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Source
Action
Smart junction
B2A20
Ignition stuck in START
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
box (SJB)
B2844
Ignition fault
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Unexpected Ignition
U2472
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
State
REFER to the Master DTC Chart in
All Other SJB DTCs
SJB
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
No power in all ignition
switch positions
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Ignition switch
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Smart junction box (SJB)
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Ignition switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Run/start relay
Ignition switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Starter motor relay
Ignition switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to the Ignition Switch Mechanical Component Test in
this service information.
Go to the Multi-function
Switch - Electrical Component
Test in this service information.
No power in ACC
No power in RUN
No power in START
Key
Ignition lock cylinder
Ignition switch rod
Ignition switch
Multi-function switch
The ignition key is hard
to turn
The multi-function
switch does not operate
correctly
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: No Power in All Ignition Switch Positions
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Distribution/SJB for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The ignition switch receives fused battery voltage along circuit SBP27 (BU/RD) from smart junction box (SJB)
fuse 27 (20A). The ignition switch then sends that voltage out to various systems depending on ignition switch
position. The ignition switch has 4 possible states:
OFF - No power on any circuits
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
ACC - Power on circuit CDC33 (VT/GN)
RUN - Power on circuit CDC34 (WH/OG)
START - Power on circuit CDC35 (BU/WH)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Ignition switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST A: NO POWER IN ALL IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
CAUTION: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the
wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
NOTE:
Verify that battery voltage is 10 volts or greater.
A1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT SJB FUSE 27 (20A)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB Fuse 27 (20A)
Measure the voltage between SJB fuse 27 (20A), input side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : Go to A3.
A2 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON CIRCUIT SBP27 (BU/RD)
Connect: SJB Fuse 27 (20A)
Disconnect: Ignition Switch C250
Fig. 1: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between ignition switch C250-4, circuit SBP27 (BU/RD), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new ignition switch. REFER to Ignition Switch. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : VERIFY SJB fuse 27 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBP27 (BU/RD). TEST the
system for normal operation.
A3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect: SJB C2280a
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Check the SJB connectors for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminals.
Connect: SJB C2280a
Connect: SJB C2280b
Make sure the connectors seat correctly, then operate the system and verify the concern is still
present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test B: No Power in ACC
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Distribution/SJB for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the ignition switch is placed in the ACC position, fused ignition voltage is sent to the smart junction box
(SJB) along circuit CDC33 (VT/GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Ignition switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST B: NO POWER IN ACC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the
wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
NOTE:
Verify that battery voltage is 10 volts or greater.
B1 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH
Carry out the Ignition Switch - Electrical Component Test in this service information.
Is the ignition switch OK?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : INSTALL a new ignition switch. REFER to Ignition Switch. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B2 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC33 (VT/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280a
Disconnect: Ignition Switch C250
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance Between Ignition Switch C250-6, Circuit CDC33 (VT/GN) &
SJB C2280a-3
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ignition switch C250-6, circuit CDC33 (VT/GN), harness side and
SJB C2280a-3, circuit CDC33 (VT/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : VERIFY SJB fuses 43 (10A) and 45 (5A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit CDC33 (VT/GN).
TEST the system for normal operation.
B3 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC33 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Measuring Resistance Between Ignition Switch C250-6, Circuit CDC33 (VT/GN) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ignition switch C250-6, circuit CDC33 (VT/GN), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC33 (VT/GN). TEST the system for normal operation.
B4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Check SJB C2208a for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminal.
Connect: SJB C2280a
Make sure the connector is seated correctly, then operate the system and verify the concern is still
present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test C: No Power in RUN
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Distribution/SJB for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the ignition switch is placed in the RUN position, fused ignition voltage is sent to:
the smart junction box (SJB) along circuit CDC34 (WH/OG).
pin 85 of the run/start relay in the battery junction box (BJB) along circuit CDC34 (WH/OG).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Run/start relay
Ignition switch
SJB
BJB
PINPOINT TEST C: NO POWER IN RUN
CAUTION: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the
wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
NOTE:
Verify that battery voltage is 10 volts or greater.
C1 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH
Carry out the Ignition Switch - Electrical Component Test in this service information.
Is the ignition switch OK?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : INSTALL a new ignition switch. REFER to Ignition Switch. TEST the system for normal
operation.
C2 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE SJB
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Key in ON position.
Fig. 4: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280B-45, Circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between SJB C2280b-45, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to C3.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC34 (WH/OG). TEST the system for normal operation.
C3 CHECK FOR IGNITION VOLTAGE AT THE RUN/START RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Connect: SJB C2280b
Disconnect: Run/Start Relay
Key in ON position.
Fig. 5: Measuring Voltage Between Run/Start Relay Cavity 85, Circuit CDC34 (WH/OG) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between run/start relay cavity 85, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to C4.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC34 (WH/OG). TEST the system for normal operation.
C4 CHECK THE RUN/START RELAY
Carry out the Mini ISO Relay Component Test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING
article.
Is the relay OK?
YES : Go to C5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
C5 CHECK FOR BATTERY VOLTAGE AT THE RUN/START RELAY
Fig. 6: Measuring Voltage Between Run/Start Relay Cavity 30, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between run/start relay cavity 30, harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to C6.
NO : VERIFY battery voltage is 10 volts or greater. If OK, REPAIR or INSTALL a new BJB.
TEST the system for normal operation.
C6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Check the connector for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminal.
Connect: SJB C2280b
Make sure the connector is seated correctly, then operate the system and verify the concern is still
present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test D: No Power in START
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Distribution/SJB for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the ignition switch is placed in the START position, fused ignition voltage is sent to the smart junction
box (SJB) along circuit CDC35 (BU/WH).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Ignition switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST D: NO POWER IN START
CAUTION: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the
wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
NOTE:
Verify that battery voltage is 10 volts or greater.
D1 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH
Carry out the Ignition Switch - Electrical Component Test in this service information.
Is the ignition switch OK?
YES : Go to D2.
NO : INSTALL a new ignition switch. REFER to Ignition Switch. TEST the system for normal
operation.
D2 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Ignition Switch C250
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ignition switch C250-7, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side and
SJB C2280b-32, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D3.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). TEST the system for normal operation.
D3 CHECK THE SJB START CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Measure the resistance between SJB C2280b pin-32, component side and SJB C2280e pin-8,
component side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : Go to D5.
D4 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Starter Relay
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280E-8, Circuit CDC35 (BU/WH) & Starter
Relay Cavity 85
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between SJB C2280e-8, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side and starter
relay cavity 85, harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REFER to STARTING SYSTEM article to diagnose the starting system.
D5 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Check SJB connector C2280b and C2280e for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminal.
Connect: SJB C2280b
Connect: SJB C2280e
Make sure the connectors are seated correctly, then operate the system and verify the concern is
still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Pinpoint Test E: B2A20 - Ignition Stuck in START
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Distribution/SJB for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the ignition switch is placed in the START position, fused ignition voltage is sent to smart junction box
(SJB) along circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). The ignition switch is spring-loaded to automatically return to the RUN
position after being placed in the START position.
B2A20 Ignition Stuck in START - The SJB continuously monitors the ignition switch state, if the SJB
receives a START signal for more than 30 seconds, DTC B2A20 will be set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Starter relay
Ignition switch
SJB
PCM
PINPOINT TEST E: B2A20 - IGNITION STUCK IN START
CAUTION: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the
wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
NOTE:
Verify that battery voltage is 10 volts or greater.
E1 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH MECHANICAL FUNCTION
Inspect the ignition switch for mechanical function. Refer to the Ignition Switch - Mechanical
Component Test in this service information.
Is the ignition switch OK?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : INSTALL a new ignition switch. REFER to Ignition Switch. TEST the system for normal
operation.
E2 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH FOR A SHORT
Carry out the Ignition Switch - Electrical Component Test in this service information.
Is the ignition switch OK?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : INSTALL a new ignition switch. REFER to Ignition Switch. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
E3 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Ignition Switch C250
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage Between Ignition Switch C250-7, Circuit CDC35 (BU/WH),
Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ignition switch C250-7, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side and
ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to E4.
E4 CHECK THE SJB FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Measure the voltage between SJB C2280b-32, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), component side and
ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to E8.
NO : Go to E5.
E5 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Fig. 10: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280E-8, Circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), Harness Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between SJB C2280e-8, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to E6.
NO : Go to E8.
E6 ISOLATE THE STARTER RELAY
Disconnect: Starter Relay
Fig. 11: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280E-8, Circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between SJB C2280e-8, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to E7.
NO : INSTALL a new starter relay. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E7 ISOLATE THE PCM
Disconnect: PCM C175b
Fig. 12: Measuring Voltage Between SJB C2280E-8, Circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between SJB C2280e-8, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : INSTALL a new PCM. Refer to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article for the
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E8 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Check SJB connectors C2280b and C2280e for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminal.
Connect: SJB C2280b
Connect: SJB C2280e
Make sure the connectors are seated correctly, then operate the system and verify the concern is
still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB, REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test F: DTCs B2844 and U2472 - Ignition Fault and Unexpected Ignition State
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Distribution/SJB for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The ignition switch receives fused battery voltage along circuit SBP27 (BU/RD) from smart junction box (SJB)
fuse 27 (20A). The ignition switch then sends that voltage out to various systems depending on ignition switch
position. The SJB continuously monitors the ignition switch state.
DTC B2844 Ignition Fault - If the SJB receives an invalid ignition state or cannot receive the ignition
switch state during normal operation, DTC B2844 is set.
DTC U2472 Unexpected Ignition State - If the SJB does not receive the ignition RUN signal, or any
ignition switch signal, while performing an on-demand self test, DTC U2472 is set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Ignition switch
SJB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST F: DTCs B2844 AND U2472 - IGNITION FAULT AND UNEXPECTED IGNITION
STATE
CAUTION: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the
wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
NOTE:
Verify that battery voltage is 10 volts or greater.
F1 RETRIEVE THE DTCs
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test SJB
Carry out the on-demand self test for the SJB. Retrieve and record any DTCs.
Is DTC U2472 present?
YES : Go to F2.
NO : For DTC B2844, go to F5.
For DTC B2A20, go to Pinpoint Test E .
For all other SJB DTCs, REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
F2 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Carry out the Ignition Switch - Electrical Component Test in this service information.
Is the ignition switch OK?
YES : Go to F3.
NO : INSTALL a new ignition switch. REFER to Ignition Switch. CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the
self-test.
F3 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC33 (VT/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Ignition Switch C250
Disconnect: SJB C2280a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance Between Ignition Switch C250-6, Circuit CDC33 (VT/GN) &
SJB C2280A-3
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ignition switch C250-6, circuit CDC33 (VT/GN), harness side and
SJB C2280a-3, circuit CDC33 (VT/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC33 (VT/GN). CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to F4.
F4 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC34 (WH/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance Between Ignition Switch C250-1, Circuit CDC34 (WH/OG) &
SJB C2280B-45
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ignition switch C250-1, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side and
SJB C2280b-45, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC34 (WH/OG). CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to F7.
F5 CHECK THE IGNITION CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Ignition Switch C250
Disconnect: SJB C2280a
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Disconnect: Run/Start Relay
Measure the voltage between ground and:
SJB C2280a-3, circuit CDC33 (VT/GN), harness side.
SJB C2280b-32, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
SJB C2280b-45, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side.
run/start relay cavity 85, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to F6.
F6 CHECK THE IGNITION CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance between:
ignition switch C250-6, circuit CDC33 (VT/GN), harness side and SJB C2280a-3, circuit
CDC33 (VT/GN), harness side.
ignition switch C250-7, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side and SJB C2280b-32, circuit
CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
ignition switch C250-1, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side and SJB C2280b-45, circuit
CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side.
ignition switch C250-1, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side and run/start relay cavity 1,
circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side.
Are any of the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to F7.
F7 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Check SJB connectors C2280a and C2280b for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminal.
Connect: SJB C2280a
Connect: SJB C2280b
Make sure the connectors are seated correctly, then operate the system and verify the concern is
still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Component Tests
Ignition Switch - Mechanical
The following conditions can cause difficulty in operating the ignition switch and lock cylinder:
Burrs on the lock cylinder key
Insufficient lube on the lock cylinder
Binding lock cylinder
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:11 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Burrs or foreign material around the rack-and-pinion actuator in the lock cylinder housing
Insufficient lube on the actuator (do not apply lubricant to the inside of the ignition switch)
Binding ignition switch
If the steering wheel lock is engaged with the wheels loaded against a curb, high effort will be necessary to turn
the key from lock. Turn the steering wheel to either side of the lock to unload the system.
Carry out the following test to determine if the ignition switch and lock cylinder are operating correctly.
1. Inspect the ignition key for any burrs, damage or incorrect cut. Have a new ignition key made as
necessary.
NOTE:
The steering wheel may be locked full left or full right. If the steering wheel
is locked, it will be necessary to apply turning effort to the steering wheel
in the direction of the lock while turning the key.
2. Turn the key to the ACC position and then the RUN position.
If the ignition key turns to the ACC and RUN position, continue with Step 3.
If the ignition key will not turn to the ACC and RUN position, continue with Step 4.
NOTE:
The ignition switch and lock cylinder should return from the START
position back to the RUN position without assistance.
3. Turn the ignition key to the START position and release the key.
If the ignition switch and lock cylinder return from the START position back to the RUN position
without assistance, the ignition switch is operating correctly at this time.
If the ignition switch and lock cylinder do not return from the START position back to the RUN
position without assistance, continue with Step 4.
4. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES AND ENTRY
SYSTEMS article.
5. Rotate the ignition lock cylinder through all of the switch positions.
If the lock cylinder operates correctly, continue with Step 6.
If the lock cylinder does not operate correctly, install a new ignition lock cylinder. Refer to
HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
6. Check for binding or sticking ignition switch actuating rod, burrs around the rack-and-pinion actuator in
the ignition lock cylinder housing or insufficient lubrication.
If there is sufficient lubrication and there are no burrs, binding or sticking conditions, install a new
ignition switch. Refer to Ignition Switch in this service information.
If there is insufficient lubrication, burrs, binding or sticking conditions, repair or lubricate as
necessary.
Ignition Switch - Electrical
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:12 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING article.
Multi-function Switch - Electrical
Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
IGNITION SWITCH
Fig. 15: Exploded View Of Ignition Switch Components
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
Description
Ignition switch electrical connector (part
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:12 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
1
2
11572
3
-
4
-
5
W505002
6
7
8
04459
3530
3K512
9
W707658
of 14401)
Ignition switch
In-vehicle temperature sensor hose (part
of 19C734)
In-vehicle temperature sensor electrical
connector (part of 14401)
Steering column opening cover bolts (2
required)
Steering column opening cover
Upper steering column shroud
Lower steering column shroud
Lower steering column shroud screws (3
required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Depower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). For additional information, refer to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NOTE:
Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the
sides and lifting upwards.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws and the shroud.
NOTE:
The top of the steering column opening cover is held in by tabs that clip
into the instrument panel.
4. Remove the 2 steering column opening cover screws.
Detach the steering column opening cover by pulling straight outward.
5. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector and hose from the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
Remove the steering column opening cover.
6. Disconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
7. Press the 2 locking tabs and remove the ignition switch.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
9. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
STEERING COLUMN MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:12 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Exploded View Of Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
3530
3K512
3
W707658
4
-
5
6
W503521
14K147
Description
Upper steering column shroud
Lower steering column shroud
Lower steering column shroud screw (3
required)
Multi-function switch electrical
connector (part of 14401)
Multi-function switch screws (2 required)
Multi-function switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:12 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the
sides of the shroud and lifting upwards.
Remove the upper steering column shroud.
Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws and the shroud.
Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector.
Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:12 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Exploded View Of Steering Column Lock Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
Description
Multi-function switch electrical
connector (part of 14401)
Ignition switch electrical connector (part
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:12 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
2
-
3
12049
4
3511
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
W505002
9
10
11
04459
3530
3K512
12
W707658
of 14401)
Steering column lock module bolt (2
required)
Steering column lock module assembly
Passive anti-theft system (PATS)
electrical connector (part of 14401)
In-vehicle temperature sensor hose (part
of 19C734)
In-vehicle temperature sensor electrical
connector (part of 14401)
Steering column opening cover bolts (2
required)
Steering column opening cover
Upper steering column shroud
Lower steering column shroud
Lower steering column shroud screws (3
required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Depower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). For additional information, refer to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NOTE:
Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the
sides of the shroud and lifting upwards.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws and remove the shroud.
NOTE:
The top of the steering column opening cover is held in place by tabs that
clip to the instrument panel.
4. Remove the 2 steering column opening cover screws.
Detach the steering column opening cover by pulling straight outward.
5. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector and hose from the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
Remove the steering column opening cover.
6. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the passive anti-theft system (PATS) and ignition switch electrical connectors.
NOTE:
After cutting slots in the steering column lock module bolts, clean all
metal shavings and foreign material from the steering column.
8. Using a suitable tool, cut slots into the heads of the 2 steering column lock module bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:12 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Steering Column Switches - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The steering column lock module bolts are designed to sheer off when
tightened.
9. Remove the 2 steering column lock module bolts using a screwdriver.
Discard the bolts.
To install, tighten 2 new bolts until the bolt heads shear off.
10. Remove the steering column lock module assembly from the steering column.
NOTE:
Align the locating tab on the steering column lock module with the window
of the steering column tube. Verify that the steering column lock module
operates correctly.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
12. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:12 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
2008 BRAKES
Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Fill Capacity
High Performance DOT 3 Motor
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65803-821 ml (1.70-1.74 pt)
Vehicle Brake Fluid
A1
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
High Temperature Nickel AntiESE-M12A4-A
Seize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Metal Brake Parts Cleaner
PM-4-A or PM-4-B (US); CPM-4 (Canada)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Brake disc minimum thickness
Brake pad maximum taper wear (in any direction)
Brake pad minimum thickness
Specification
26 mm (1.023 in)
3.0 mm (0.118 in)
3.0 mm (0.118 in)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Bleeder screw
Brake caliper anchor plate bolts
Brake caliper flow bolt
Brake caliper guide pin bolts
Brake flexible hose bracket bolt
Brake tube fitting
Nm
8
133
25
88
20
17
lb-ft
98
18
65
15
13
lb-in
71
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
FRONT DISC BRAKE
The front brake disc system consists of the following components:
Brake caliper anchor plate
Brake caliper
Brake disc
Brake disc shield
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:47
10:02:44 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Brake flexible hose
When mechanical force is applied by the driver to the brake pedal, the force is converted into hydraulic pressure
by the master cylinder. The hydraulic force is directed to the disc brake calipers and transferred to the brake
pads. The brake pads are then forced against the brake friction surfaces by the brake caliper pistons. The friction
of the brake pads on the brake disc causes the slowing of wheel rotation and the vehicle.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Refer to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
BRAKE PADS
Material
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Brake Pads With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
2001
3
-
4
5
2B120 RH/ 2B121 LH
2C150
Description
Stainless steel shim (2 required) (part of
2001)
Brake pad (2 required)
Brake pad slide (4 required) (part of
2001)
Brake caliper
Brake caliper guide pin bolt (2 required)
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always install new brake shoes or pads at both ends of an axle to reduce
the possibility of brakes pulling vehicle to one side. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in uneven braking and serious personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is
spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir.
If required, remove the fluid until the brake master cylinder reservoir is 1/2 full.
2. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
CAUTION: Do not pry in the caliper sight hole to retract the pistons as this can
damage the pistons and boots.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or
damage to the hose can occur.
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside.
Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
4. Remove the brake pads, brake pad shims and stainless steel shims.
Inspect the brake pads and shims for wear or contamination.
5. Remove the brake pad slides.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Protect the caliper pistons and boots when pushing the caliper
piston into the caliper piston bores or damage to components may
occur.
CAUTION: Make sure that the caliper guide pin boots are fully seated or damage
to the caliper guide pin boots can occur.
1. If installing new brake pads, using a suitable tool and a worn brake, compress the disc brake caliper
pistons into the caliper.
Fig. 2: Compressing Brake Caliper Pistons Into Caliper
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the brake pad slides.
3. Apply a thin coating of the supplied grease to the shims and the shim contact area of the brake pads.
4. Install the stainless steel shims to the brake pads.
NOTE:
The guide pin bolts are different sizes. The longer/bigger bolt is the upper
guide pin bolt.
5. Position the brake caliper and install the 2 guide pin bolts.
Tighten to 88 Nm (65 lb-ft).
6. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
BRAKE CALIPER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Material
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Fig. 3: Exploded View Of Brake Caliper With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
2B120 RH/ 2B121 LH
2C150
2078 RH/ 2B557 LH
W711784
2M085
Description
Brake caliper
Brake caliper guide bolt (2 required)
Front brake hose
Copper washers (2 required)
Brake caliper flow bolt
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is
spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
2. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and position the hose aside.
Discard the 2 copper washers.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Install new copper washers.
NOTE:
The guide pin bolts are different sizes. The longer/bigger bolt is the upper
guide pin bolt.
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts.
To install, tighten to 88 Nm (65 lb-ft).
4. Remove the brake caliper.
NOTE:
During installation, make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
BRAKE CALIPER ANCHOR PLATE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Brake Caliper Anchor Plate With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
2B120 RH/ 2B121 LH
2C150
3
-
4
2001
5
2248
6
2B292 RH/ 2B293 LH
Description
Brake caliper
Brake caliper guide pin bolt (2 required)
Brake pad slide (4 required) (part of
2001)
Brake pad (2 required)
Brake caliper anchor plate bolt (2
required)
Brake caliper anchor plate
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir.
If required, remove the fluid until the brake master cylinder reservoir is 1/2 full.
2. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
CAUTION: Do not pry in the caliper sight hole to retract the pistons as this can
damage the pistons and boots.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or
damage to the hose can occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside.
Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
To install, tighten to 88 Nm (65 lb-ft).
4. Remove the brake pads, brake pad shims and stainless steel shims.
5. Remove the brake pad slides.
6. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts and the anchor plate.
To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
BRAKE DISC
Material
Item
High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Metal Brake Parts Cleaner
PM-4-A or PM-4-B (US); CPM-4 (Canada)
Specification
ESE-M12A4-A
-
Fig. 5: Exploded View Of Brake Disc With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Item
1
2
Part Number
1032
3
2248
Description
Brake caliper and anchor plate assembly
Brake disc
Brake caliper anchor plate bolts (2
required)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang
from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
2. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly
aside.
Support the caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire.
3. Remove the brake disc.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean and dry the brake disc-to-wheel hub mounting surface and apply a thin coat of anti-seize where
indicated.
Fig. 6: Locating Brake Disc Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the brake disc is clean and free of any foreign material.
2. Install the brake disc.
3. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the brake caliper anchor plate bolts.
Tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
4. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
BRAKE DISC SHIELD
Fig. 7: Exploded View Of Brake Disc Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
2K005 LH/ 2K004 RH
3K186 LH/ 3K185 RH
Description
Brake disc shield
Wheel knuckle
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel bearing and wheel hub. For additional information, refer to FRONT SUSPENSION
article.
2. Index-mark the brake disc shield to the wheel knuckle, then align the new brake disc shield to the existing
shield and transfer the index mark.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Locating Index-Mark On Brake Disc Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Cut the brake disc shield and remove it from the wheel knuckle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the brake disc shield onto the wheel knuckle.
2. Align the index marks and install the brake disc shield onto the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the wheel bearing and wheel hub. For additional information, refer to FRONT SUSPENSION
article.
BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE
Material
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Identifying Brake Flexible Hose With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
2K573
W711784
3
-
4
5
6
2B223
W708004
2078
Description
Brake caliper flow bolt
Copper washers (2 required)
Brake tube fitting (part of 2263 RH/2264
LH)
Brake flexible hose retaining clip
Brake flexible hose bracket bolt
Brake flexible hose
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Front Disc Brake - Edge & MKX
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is
spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and discard the 2 copper washers.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Install new copper washers.
2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
To install, tighten to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft).
3. Remove the brake flexible hose retaining clip.
4. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt and the brake flexible hose.
To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:02:44 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Assist handle bolts
B-pillar upper trim panel screw
C-pillar trim panel screw
D-ring safety belt bolt
Liftgate rod nut
Safety belt anchor bolt
Nm
9
9
9
54
11
54
lb-ft
40
8
40
lb-in
80
80
80
-
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
INTERIOR TRIM - EXPLODED VIEW
NOTE:
Edge shown, MKX similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:26
11:02:22 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Interior Trim With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
03598 RH/ 03599 LH
2
-
3
4
5
13208 RH/ 13209 LH
13244 RH/ 13245 LH
24346 RH/ 24347 LH
6
-
7
8
42624
-
Description
A-pillar trim panel
A-pillar trim panel tether (part of 03598
RH/ 03599 LH)
Front door scuff plate
Rear door scuff plate
B-pillar lower trim panel
B-pillar lower trim panel pushpin retainer
(2 required)
Liftgate scuff plate
Quarter trim panel safety belt anchor bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
9
31012 RH/ 31013 LH
10
-
11
12
W712518
13
31458 Upper/ 31459 Lower
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
W712518
31406 RH/ 31407 LH
24346 RH/ 24347 LH
W712518
31004 RH/ 31005 LH
31010 RH/ 31011 LH
Quarter trim panel
Quarter trim panel pushpin retainer (3
required)
B-pillar upper trim panel screw cover
B-pillar upper trim panel screw
B-pillar assist handle bolt cover (2
required)
B-pillar assist handle bolt (2 required)
B-pillar assist handle
B-pillar trim panel safety belt D-ring bolt
B-pillar upper trim panel
C-pillar trim panel screw cover
C-pillar trim panel screw
C-pillar trim panel safety belt D-ring bolt
C-pillar trim panel
D-pillar trim panel
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure.
A-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL
1. Position the door opening weatherstrip aside.
CAUTION: The LH and RH A-pillar trim panels are attached to the A-pillar with a
safety tether. During a side air curtain deployment, the A-pillar trim
panel tether helps prevent the trim panel from striking the occupant.
The tether must be detached from the A-pillar trim panel before the Apillar trim panel can be removed. Failure to detach the tether will
result in damage to the tether or the A-pillar trim panel.
2. Gently pull the upper A-pillar trim panel toward the center of the vehicle to release the A-pillar trim panel
retaining clips.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Pulling A-pillar Trim Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The A-pillar trim panel tether is removed from the A-pillar for clarity.
3. Remove the A-pillar trim panel tether from the A-pillar trim panel.
Carefully route the A-pillar trim panel tether end through the hole in the A-pillar trim panel.
Fig. 3: Identifying A-pillar Trim Panel Tether
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the A-pillar trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the lower A-pillar trim panel in the instrument panel.
WARNING: A new A-pillar trim panel tether must be installed if the tether is
damaged or does not fasten correctly. During a side air curtain
deployment the A-pillar trim panel tether helps prevent the trim from
striking the occupant. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
2. Carefully route the A-pillar trim panel tether end through the hole in the A-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the A-pillar trim panel onto the A-pillar.
4. Install the door opening weatherstrip.
B-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Position the front seats in the full forward position.
NOTE:
Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring
cover does not remain in place, install a new cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
2. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover and remove the safety belt bolt.
To install, tighten to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft).
Fig. 4: Locating Safety Belt Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel.
Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside.
Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel assist handle, if equipped.
Remove the bolt covers.
Remove the bolts.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
Fig. 5: Identifying Upper B-Pillar Trim Panel Assist Handle & Bolt Covers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
Remove the screw cover.
Remove the screw.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
C-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring
cover does not remain in place, install a new cover.
1. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover and remove the safety belt bolt.
To install, tighten to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft).
2. Remove the screw cover.
3. Remove the screw.
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
4. Position the quarter trim panel aside to allow C-pillar trim panel removal.
5. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
Pull outward and downward to remove the panel.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
D-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
1. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel.
2. Remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Disengage the trim panel from the retainers.
Disconnect the speaker wire connector from the trim panel, if equipped.
Fig. 6: Identifying Speaker Wire Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
QUARTER TRIM PANEL
LH side with power liftgate
1. Remove the cover and the switch from the LH quarter trim panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Fig. 7: Identifying LH Quarter Trim Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Remove the power liftgate rod-to-liftgate cover and nut.
To install, tighten to 11 N.m (8 lb-ft).
Fig. 8: Identifying Strut From Liftgate
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
3. Remove the rear cargo load area.
Remove the foam blocks from the spare tire well.
NOTE:
Inspect the safety belt lower anchor bolt cover for damage. If the safety
belt lower anchor bolt cover does not remain in place, install a new cover.
4. Remove the safety belt lower anchor bolt cover and remove the safety belt lower anchor bolt.
To install, tighten to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Make sure the pushpin retainers are removed with the quarter trim panel.
5. Remove the RH or LH quarter trim panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Disconnect the electrical connectors, if equipped.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
DOOR TRIM PANEL - FRONT
NOTE:
MKX shown, Edge similar.
NOTE:
RH door shown, LH door similar.
Fig. 9: Exploded View Of Front Door Trim Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
W712934
22620 RH/ 22621 LH
4
22670
5
W503904
6
7
8
14524 RH/ 14525 LH
17D720 RH/ 17D721 LH
W708412
Description
Front door handle bezel screw cover
Front door handle bezel screw
Front door handle bezel
Front door window control switch bezel
screw cover (MKX only)
Front door window control switch bezel
screw
Front door window control switch bezel
Front door trim sail panel
Front door trim panel screw (6 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
9
23942 RH/ 23943 LH
Front door trim panel
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door handle bezel.
Remove the screw cover.
Remove the screw.
Remove the front door handle bezel.
Disconnect the electrical connectors, if equipped.
MKX only
2. Remove the screw cover.
All vehicles
3. Remove the screw.
4. Remove the 6 front door trim panel screws.
5. Disengage the bottom of the door trim panel from the door.
Pull outward to disengage the push nuts from the retainers.
6. Lift the top of the door trim panel edge upward and out of the beltline molding.
7. Pull the lock rod through the lock rod grommet.
8. Remove the front door trim panel.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
DOOR TRIM PANEL - REAR
NOTE:
MKX shown, Edge similar.
NOTE:
RH door shown, LH door similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Exploded View Of Rear Door Trim Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
W712934
22620 RH/ 22621 LH
4
22670
5
W503904
6
14524 RH/ 14525 LH
7
8
W708412
27406 RH/ 27407 LH
Description
Rear door handle bezel screw cover
Rear door handle bezel screw
Rear door handle bezel
Rear door trim pull handle cup screw
cover (MKX only)
Rear door trim pull handle cup screw
Rear door trim window control switch
bezel
Rear door trim panel screw (6 required)
Rear door trim panel
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear door handle bezel.
Remove the screw cover.
Remove the screw.
Remove the rear door handle bezel.
Disconnect the electrical connector, if equipped.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
MKX only
2. Remove the screw cover.
All vehicles
3. Remove the screw.
4. Remove the 6 trim panel screws.
5. Disengage the bottom of the door trim panel from the door.
Pull outward to disengage the push nuts from the retainers.
6. Lift the top of the door trim panel edge upward and out of the beltline molding.
7. Pull the lock rod through the lock rod grommet.
8. Remove the rear door trim panel.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
LIFTGATE TRIM PANEL
NOTE:
Non-powered liftgate shown, powered liftgate similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Identifying Liftgate Trim Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W711043
2
46404
3
W711043
4
42410
5
W711043
Description
Liftgate lower trim panel screw (4
required)
Liftgate lower trim panel
Liftgate lower trim panel retainer (11
required)
Liftgate upper trim panel
Liftgate upper trim panel retainer (7
required)
1. Remove the power liftgate rod-to-liftgate cover and nut, if equipped.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
To install, tighten to 11 N.m (8 lb-ft).
Fig. 12: Identifying Strut From Liftgate
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The back of the liftgate trim panel is shown indicating the location of the
liftgate trim panel retainers.
2. Remove the liftgate lower trim panel.
Remove the 4 liftgate lower trim panel screws.
Pull outward on the liftgate lower trim panel to release the liftgate lower trim panel retainers.
Fig. 13: Identifying Liftgate Lower Trim Panel Retainers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the liftgate upper trim panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
POWER POINT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Remover, Power Point Socket
501-039 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL
NOTE:
Power point cover may differ depending on location.
1. Open the power point cover.
2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots.
Fig. 14: Installing Special Tool In Power Point Socket Slot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot.
Fig. 15: Positioning Special Tool To Engage In Adjacent Slot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Pulling Power Point Socket Out Of Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer.
HEADLINER
NOTE:
Headliner with roof opening panel shown, headliner without roof opening panel
similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Identifying Headliner With Roof Opening Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Part Number
W504242
04101
04100
W504242
04132
519A58
14334
W504349
Description
Sun visor screws (6 required)
LH sun visor
RH sun visor
Sun visor arm clip screws (2 required)
Sun visor arm clips
Overhead console
Overhead console electrical connector
Rear view mirror electrical connector
Headliner wiring harness
Garment hanger screw
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
11
12
13
14
15
29024
W708761
17409
51944
-
Garment hanger
Headliner pushpin retainer
Headliner washer fluid hose
Headliner
Headliner magnets
REMOVAL
1. If equipped, remove the rear entertainment module (RETM). For additional information, refer to
INFORMATION & ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS article.
2. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to A-Pillar Trim Panel.
3. Remove the LH and RH B-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to B-Pillar Trim Panel.
4. Remove the LH and RH C-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to C-Pillar Trim Panel.
5. Remove the LH and RH D-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to D-Pillar Trim Panel.
6. Remove the LH and RH quarter trim panels. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel.
7. If equipped, remove the power liftgate rod from the power liftgate motor assembly.
Squeeze the clip as shown to release and pull the power liftgate rod assembly upward.
Fig. 18: Squeezing Clip To Release & Position Rod Assembly Upward
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors from the interior rear view mirror and compass.
9. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the wiring harness on the LH A-pillar and remove the harness
from the A-pillar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 19: Identifying Electrical Connectors From Wiring Harness On LH A-Pillar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the overhead console, if equipped. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL
& CONSOLE article.
11. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside.
12. Remove the LH and RH sun visors.
Remove the LH and RH sun visor screws.
If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
13. Disconnect the rear washer fluid hose connector on the RH A-pillar.
Fig. 20: Locating Rear Washer Fluid Hose Connector On RH A-Pillar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Remove the LH and RH garment hangers.
Remove the LH and RH garment hanger screws.
15. Position the liftgate weatherstrip aside.
16. Disconnect the rear washer fluid hose connector on the RH D-pillar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 21: Locating Rear Washer Fluid Hose Routing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Remove the headliner rear pushpin.
18. Lower the headliner and disconnect the electrical connectors on the LH D-pillar.
Fig. 22: Identifying Electrical Connectors On LH D-Pillar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the headliner, an assistant is required for this
step.
19. Remove the headliner through the liftgate opening.
INSTALLATION
Installing a new headliner
1. Using a suitable marking tool, mark the new headliner with the routing and exit points of the wire harness
from the original headliner.
2. Carefully remove the wire harness from the original headliner.
CAUTION: Make sure not to damage the wire harness when cutting the excess
adhesive from the wire harness.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
3. Cut and remove any excessive adhesive from the wire harness.
CAUTION: Make sure to provide enough length to the wire harness connector
ends when positioning the wire harness onto the headliner.
Otherwise, the wire harness connector ends will not be able to be
connected when the headliner is installed into the vehicle.
NOTE:
Headliner with RETM opening shown, all other headliners similar.
4. Position the wire harness onto the new headliner and apply tape to temporarily attach the wire harness
onto the headliner.
Fig. 23: Identifying Wire Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The 3M Duramix 4747 Super Fast Adhesive will set in 22 seconds.
Continually make sure that the wire harness is routed correctly when
applying the adhesive.
NOTE:
Apply adhesive to the entire length of the wire harness when fastening the
wire harness to the headliner. Otherwise, the wire harness can loosen
from the headliner and a vibration or rattle can occur.
5. Obtain 3M Duramix 4747 Super Fast Adhesive commercially and apply onto the headliner and wire
harness.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
6. Transfer parts as needed.
All headliners
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the headliner, an assistant is required for this
step.
7. Install the headliner through the liftgate opening.
8. Connect the electrical connectors on the LH D-pillar.
Fig. 24: Identifying Electrical Connectors On LH D-Pillar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Install the headliner rear pushpin.
10. Connect the rear washer fluid hose connector on the RH D-pillar.
Fig. 25: Locating Rear Washer Fluid Hose Routing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Install the liftgate weatherstrip.
12. Install the LH and RH garment hangers.
Install and tighten the LH and RH garment hanger screws.
13. Connect the rear washer fluid hose connector on the RH A-pillar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Trim & Ornamentation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 26: Locating Rear Washer Fluid Hose Connector On RH A-Pillar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Install the LH and RH sun visors in the following sequence.
1. If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
2. Install and tighten the LH and RH sun visor screws.
15. Install the front and rear door weatherstrips.
16. If equipped, install the overhead console. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL &
CONSOLE article.
17. Connect the electrical connectors on the LH A-pillar and attach the wire harness onto the A-pillar.
Fig. 27: Identifying Electrical Connectors From Wiring Harness On LH A-Pillar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
If equipped, connect the electrical connectors to the interior rear view mirror and compass.
If equipped, install the power liftgate rod.
Install the LH and RH quarter trim panels. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel.
Install the LH and RH D-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to D-Pillar Trim Panel.
Install the LH and RH C-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to C-Pillar Trim Panel.
Install the LH and RH B-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to B-Pillar Trim Panel.
Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to A-Pillar Trim Panel.
If equipped, install the RETM. For additional information, refer to INFORMATION &
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:02:22 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
CABIN AIR FILTER Cabin Air Filter - Edge, MKX
CABIN AIR FILTER
Cabin Air Filter - Edge, MKX
REMOVAL & INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Manufacturer's terminology for this filter is Cabin Air Filter, or Air Inlet Screen.
A cabin air filter is available as standard equipment on dual-zone EATC vehicles. EMTC vehicles are not
equipped from the factory with a cabin air filter, but are equipped with an air inlet screen in place of the filter to
prevent any large foreign material from entering the heater core and evaporator core housing. The cabin air
filter or screen can be accessed by removing the glove compartment and removing the cabin air filter access
cover.
A cabin air filter can be installed as a dealer accessory on vehicles not originally equipped with a filter.
CAUTION: Only a screen or a filter should be installed, never both.
1. The cabin air filter is located behind glove box. Remove glove box.
2. Remove filter cover (7). See Fig. 1
3. Remove cabin air filter (6) See Fig. 1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:14:23
11:14:20 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
CABIN AIR FILTER Cabin Air Filter - Edge, MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Air Inlet Duct
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:14:20 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster
4
10
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
10
14
Entertainment Systems
17
How to get going
AM/FM stereo with CD
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD
Auxiliary input jack
Satellite radio information
Family entertainment system
Climate Controls
Manual heating and air conditioning
Automatic temperature control
Rear window defroster
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
Message center
17
21
27
34
37
40
67
67
69
72
73
73
77
78
83
83
84
87
89
90
96
Locks and Security
108
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
108
110
122
1
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire information
Tire inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Recreational towing
Driving
Starting
Brakes
Traction Control™/AdvanceTrac威
Transmission operation
Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher switch
Fuel pump shut-off switch
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Lug nut torque
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)
Cleaning
2
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
126
126
136
150
164
175
177
180
192
196
202
207
208
208
212
214
217
229
229
230
231
231
239
244
245
250
252
258
259
260
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data
267
269
271
275
277
282
296
298
299
302
Accessories
305
Index
307
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2006 Ford Motor Company
3
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
4
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a
trailer. Additionally, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a
trailer, do not drive over 70 mph (112 km/h) and do not make starts at
full throttle. This style of driving will help the engine and other parts of
your vehicle break in at the heavier loads. For more detailed information
about towing a trailer, refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during the
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these additives
may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage.
5
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
6
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when parked.
Middle East/North Africa vehicle specific information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this
Owner’s Guide for all other required information and warnings.
7
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side
Child Seat
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Powertrain Malfunction
Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
8
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Emission System
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
MAX
MIN
9
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ⬙Service engine soon⬙
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ⬙Service
engine soon⬙ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
10
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Powertrain malfunction/reduced
power: Illuminates when a
powertrain or a AWD fault has been
detected. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Check
engine warning light to come on,
refer to Fuel filler cap in the
Maintenance and Specification chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
!
P
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a
brake system malfunction and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended distances with
the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.
11
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound when a
malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A BeltMinder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and safety restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the BeltMinder威 chime feature.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Traction Control娂/AdvanceTrac威
active: Illuminates when the
Traction Control娂 is active. If the
light remains on, have the system
serviced immediately, refer to the
Driving chapter for more
information.
Low tire pressure warning (if
equipped): Illuminates when your
tire pressure is low. If the light
remains ON at start up or while
driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. Refer to Inspecting and Inflating Your Tires in the Tires,
12
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Wheels and Loading chapter. When the ignition is first turned to ON,
the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If
the light does not turn ON or begins to flash, have the system inspected
by your authorized dealer. For more information on this system, refer to
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter.
Low fuel (if equipped):
Illuminates when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is at or near empty
(refer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter).
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is engaged. Turns
off when the speed control system
is disengaged.
O/D off: Illuminates when the
O/D
overdrive function of the
OFF
transmission has been turned OFF,
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have the transmission
serviced soon, or damage may occur.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock娂 Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Door ajar: Illuminates when the
ignition is in the ON position and
any door is open.
Low washer fluid (if equipped):
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
13
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake ON chime: Sounds when the parking brake is left ON
and the vehicle is driven. If the warning stays on after the park brake is
off, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Message center activation chime: Sounds when some warning
messages appear in the message center display for the first time.
Overspeed chime (if equipped): Sounds when the vehicle speed
reaches 75 mph (120 km/h) or higher.
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
14
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.
• Without Message Center
15
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
• With Message Center
Refer to Message Center in the
Driver Controls chapter on how to
switch the display from Metric to
English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.
• Without Message Center
Tap on the button to toggle the
display between the trip and the
odometer. Holding the TRIP/RESET
button for two seconds or more will
reset the trip odometer to zero.
• With Message Center
Press and release the message
center INFO button until “TRIP”
appears in the display (this
represents the trip mode). Press the
control again to select Trip A and
Trip B features. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to
reset.
16
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Quick start — How to get going
Listening to the radio
1. If the audio system is off, press
VOL-PUSH to turn the radio on.
Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press AM/FM repeatedly to
choose between AM/FM1/FM2
frequency bands.
/
to manually go
3. Press
up/down the frequency band.
SEEK
to search
Press
down/up the chosen frequency band
for the next strongest station.
To disengage SEEK mode,
/
.
press
4. Once you are tuned to the
desired station, press and hold a
memory preset (1–6) to save the
station. PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will
return signifying the station has been saved. You can save up to six
stations in each frequency band — six in AM, six in FM1 and six in FM2.
To access your saved stations, press the corresponding memory preset.
The memory preset # and the station frequency will appear on the
display.
17
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Listening to satellite radio (if equipped)
1. If the audio system is turned off,
press VOL-PUSH to turn the radio
on. Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press AUX repeatedly to cycle
through auxiliary audio sources.
Select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 to listen
to satellite radio.
SEEK, SEEK
to
3. Press
access the previous or next satellite
channel.
You may also seek by music
category. For further information, refer to CATEGORY listing under the
MENU control on your specific audio system.
4. Once you are tuned to the
desired channel, press and hold a
memory preset (1–6) to save the
channel. PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will
return signifying the station has been saved. You can save up to six
channels in each — six in SAT1, six in SAT2, and six in SAT3.
To access your saved channels, press the corresponding memory preset.
The memory preset # and the channel name will appear on the display.
Listening to a CD/MP3 (if equipped)
1. If the audio system is turned off,
press VOL-PUSH to turn the radio
on. Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press CD to enter CD mode. If a
disc is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last.
18
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
For a single CD system, if a disc
is not already loaded, insert only
one, label side up into the CD slot.
LOADING CD and READING DISC will appear in the display. The first
track on the disc will begin playing.
For an in-dash six CD system, if
a disc is not already loaded, press
LOAD. Select a slot number using
memory presets 1–6. When the
display reads LOAD CD#, load the
desired disc, label side up. If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds,
the system will choose for you. Once loaded, the first track will begin to
play.
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in preset #1 will begin to play.
Note: An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 (folder #) T001 (track #)
in the display. An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 (track#) in
the display. Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for
further information.
3. In CD/MP3 mode, you can access the following features:
SEEK, SEEK
to
Press
access the previous/next tracks.
Press and hold REW to manually
reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
Press and hold FF to manually
advance in a CD/MP3 track.
FOLDER to access the
Press
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
to access the
Press FOLDER
next folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
19
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in
the display. If you wish to engage
shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random play. Otherwise,
random play will begin when the current track is finished playing. CD
SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
/
(play/pause) when a
Press
CD/MP3 is playing to pause the disc.
CD PAUSE will appear in the
display. Press again to resume play.
4. For a single cd system,
to eject the current disc.
press
The display will read CD EJECT.
For an in-dash six CD system,
. Select the correct slot
press
number using memory presets 1–6. When ready, the system will eject the
disc and the display will read REMOVE CD. If the disc is not removed in
15 seconds, the system will reload the disc.
until the system
To auto eject up to 6 discs, press and hold
begins ejecting all loaded discs. If the discs are not removed, the system
will reload the discs.
20
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM Single CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound system
(if equipped)
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window switches, radio and moon roof (if equipped)
may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until
either front door is opened.
/
(Tuner): Press to
1.
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Also use in menu mode
to select various settings.
/
to tune to the
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
next/previous channel.
/
to scroll through the list of
In CATEGORY MODE, press
available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to
Category Mode under Menu for further information.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
: Press to mute the
2. MUTE/
playing media. Press again to return
to the playing media.
21
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
3. MENU: Press repeatedly to
access the following settings:
CATEGORY (satellite radio if equipped):: Press MENU until the
currently active category appears in the display (CATEGORY MODE). In
/
to scroll through the list of available
CATEGORY MODE, press
SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press
SEEK, SEEK
or SCAN to select the category. After a category
is selected, press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels
only (i.e. ROCK). To select a different category, press MENU until the
/
to select a different
category appears in the display. Press
category. You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available
SIRIUS categories and channels.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is
/
to manually increase/decrease. Press MENU again
displayed. Use
to disengage clock mode.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
/
to
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Use
turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting. Use
/
to adjust.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting. Use
adjust.
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting. Use
to adjust the audio between the left (L) and right (R) speakers.
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting. Use
audio between the back (B) and front (F) speakers.
22
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
/
/
to
/
to adjust the
Entertainment Systems
SPEED VOL (Speed sensitive volume): Press MENU to reach the
SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder with
increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
/
to adjust.
Use
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
TRACK/FOLDER MODE: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode.
SEEK, SEEK
to scroll through all tracks on
In track mode, press
the disc
SEEK, SEEK
to scroll through tracks
In folder mode, press
within the selected folder.
FOLDER, FOLDER
to access the previous/next folder (if
Press
available).
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
/
to
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS is ON, the system will bring the soft
and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.
SINGLE PLAY/DUAL PLAY (if equipped): If SINGLE PLAY is ON,
/
for DUAL PLAY. For further information on Single
press
Play/Dual Play, refer to the DVD supplement.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through FES/DVD (if equipped),
LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode) and
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes (satellite radio, if equipped). Satellite
radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription. Check
with your authorized dealer for availability.
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
For further information on the FES/DVD system (if equipped), refer to
Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter.
23
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
5. SEEK: In radio mode, press
/
to access the
previous/next strong station.
/
to
In CD mode, press
access the previous/next CD track.
SEEK, SEEK
to
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
SEEK, SEEK
to seek to the
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK
to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
SEEK, SEEK
to view the
In TEXT MODE, press
previous/additional display text.
SEEK, SEEK
to select a category.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
/
(Play/Pause): This
6.
control is operational in CD and
DVD mode (if equipped). When a
CD or DVD is playing in the FES system, press this control to play or
pause the current CD or DVD. The CD/DVD status will display in the
radio display.
For further information on the FES/DVD system (if equipped), refer to
Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter.
7. SHUFFLE: Press SHUFFLE to
engage shuffle mode. SHUFFLE ON
will appear in the display. If you
wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random
play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is
finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
: In folder mode,
8. FOLDER
to access next
press FOLDER
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
24
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
9.
FOLDER: In folder mode,
FOLDER to access the
press
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station, select the desired frequency
band, AM, FM1 or FM2. Tune to the
desired station. Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and
PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 18 stations,
six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
a brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name, and
disc title.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be
to view the
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press
SEEK
to view the previous display text.
25
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop. In CATEGORY
MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the
selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
Note: If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level
when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already loaded
into the system, CD/MP3 play will
begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the
display.
(CD eject): Press to eject a
17.
CD/MP3.
18. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label
side up in the CD slot.
26
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Audiophile AM/FM in-dash six CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound
system (if equipped)
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window switches, radio and moon roof (if equipped)
may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until
either front door is opened.
/
(Tune/Disc selector):
1.
In radio mode, press to manually
) or down (
) the
go up (
radio frequency. Press and hold for
a fast advance through radio frequencies.
In menu mode, use to select various settings.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to select the desired disc.
/
to tune to the
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
next/previous channel.
/
to scroll through the list of
In CATEGORY MODE, press
available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to
Category Mode under Menu for further information.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
27
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. MUTE/
: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to return
to the playing media.
3. MENU: Press repeatedly to
access the following settings:
CATEGORY (satellite radio if equipped): Press MENU until the
currently active category appears in the display (CATEGORY MODE). In
/
to scroll through the list of available
CATEGORY MODE, press
SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press
SEEK, SEEK
or SCAN to select the category. After a category is
selected, press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels
only (i.e. ROCK). To select a different category, press MENU until the
/
to select a different
category appears in the display. Press
category. You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available
SIRIUS categories and channels.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is
/
to manually increase/decrease. Press MENU again
displayed. Use
to disengage clock mode.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
/
to
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Use
turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
RBDS: Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RBDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, INFORM, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate, press MENU repeatedly until RBDS (ON/OFF) appears in
/
to toggle RBDS ON/OFF. When RBDS is OFF,
the display. Use
you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the
station name or type.
28
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To search for specific RBDS music categories: When the desired
/
to find the desired type,
category appears in the display, press
then press and release
SEEK, SEEK
or press and hold SCAN to
begin the search.
To view the station name or type: When the desired category appears
in the display, press TEXT/SCAN to toggle between displaying the station
type (COUNTRY, ROCK, etc.) or the station name (WYCD, WXYT, etc.).
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting. Use
/
to adjust.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting. Use
adjust.
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting. Use
to adjust the audio between the left (L) and right (R) speakers.
/
to
/
/
to adjust the
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting. Use
audio between the back (B) and front (F) speakers.
SPEED VOL (Speed sensitive volume): Press MENU to reach the
SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder with
increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
/
to adjust.
Use
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Track/Folder mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode.
SEEK, SEEK
to scroll through all tracks on
In track mode, press
the disc
SEEK, SEEK
to scroll through tracks
In folder mode, press
within the selected folder.
FOLDER, FOLDER
to access the previous/next folder (if
Press
available).
29
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
/
to
toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS is ON, the system will bring the soft
and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.
ALL SEATS (Occupancy mode): Use
/
to select and optimize
sound for ALL SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS.
SINGLE PLAY/DUAL PLAY (if equipped): If SINGLE PLAY is ON,
press
/
for DUAL PLAY. For further information on Single
Play/Dual Play, refer to the DVD supplement.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through FES/DVD (if equipped),
LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode) and
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes (satellite radio, if equipped).
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
For further information on the FES/DVD system (if equipped), refer to
Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter.
5. SEEK: In radio and CD/MP3
mode, press to access the previous
(
) or next (
) strong station
or track.
SEEK, SEEK
to
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
SEEK, SEEK
to seek to the
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK
to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
SEEK, SEEK
to view the
In TEXT MODE, press
previous/additional display text.
SEEK
to select a category.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
/
Play/Pause: This control
6.
is operational in CD and DVD mode
(if equipped). When a CD or DVD is
playing in the FES system, press this control to play or pause the
30
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
current CD/DVD. The CD/DVD status will display in the radio display.
For further information on the FES/DVD system (if equipped), refer to
Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter.
7. SHUFFLE: Press SHUFFLE to
engage shuffle mode. SHUFFLE ON
will appear in the display. If you
wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random
play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is
finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
: In folder mode,
8. FOLDER
to access next
press FOLDER
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
FOLDER: In folder mode,
9.
FOLDER to access the
press
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station, select the desired frequency
band, AM, FM1 or FM2. Tune to the
desired station. Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and
PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 18 stations,
six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
31
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
a brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name, and
disc title.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be
to view the
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press
SEEK
to view the previous display text.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop. In CATEGORY
MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the
selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
Note:If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level
when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a disc is already loaded
into the system, CD/MP3 play will
begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the
display.
32
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
17. LOAD: To load a disc into the
system, press LOAD. Select a slot
number using memory presets 1–6.
When the display reads LOAD CD#,
load the desired disc, label side up.
If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds, the system will choose for
you. Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in preset #1 will begin to play.
Note: An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 (folder #) T001 (track #)
in the display. An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 (track#) in
the display. Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for
further information.
(CD eject): To eject a disc
18.
. Select
from the system, press
the correct slot number using
memory presets 1–6. When ready, the system will eject the disc and the
display will read REMOVE CD. If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds,
the system will reload the disc.
until the system begins
To auto eject up to 6 CDs, press and hold
ejecting all loaded discs. If the discs are not removed, the system will
reload the discs.
19. CD slot: When prompted by the
system, insert a CD/MP3 label side
up.
33
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Auxiliary input jack
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way
to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music
device to the audio system.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in
the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
34
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same way manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
35
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Dirty, warped or damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further
information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to T255.
36
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
.mp3 1
1
files may be present, (files with
.mp3 2
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
.mp3 3
2
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
.mp3 4
3
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
5
.mp3
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
.mp3 6
4
.mp3 7
.doc
.ppt
.xls
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
37
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels
over the internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
38
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
Radio Display
ACQUIRING
SAT FAULT
INVALID CHNL
UNSUBSCRIBED
NO TEXT
Condition
Action Required
Radio requires more
No action required.
than two seconds to
This message should
produce audio for the
disappear shortly.
selected channel.
Internal module or
If this message does
system failure
not clear within a short
present.
period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
Channel no longer
This previously
available.
available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
Subscription not
Contact SIRIUS at
available for this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel or tune to
another channel.
Artist information not Artist information not
available.
available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
39
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO TEXT
NO TEXT
NO SIGNAL
UPDATING
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Condition
Song title information
not available.
Action Required
Song title information
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
Category information
Category information
not available.
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
Loss of signal from
You are in a location
the SIRIUS satellite or
that is blocking the
SIRIUS tower to the
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,
vehicle antenna.
tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
Update of channel
No action required. The
programming in
process may take up to
progress.
three minutes.
Satellite service has
Call SIRIUS at
been deactivated by
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio.
subscription issues.
FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System (FES)
which allows you to listen to audio CDs, MP3 discs, watch DVDs and to
plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems. The DVD
player is capable of playing standard DVDs, CDs, MP3s and is compatible
with CD-R/W, CD-R and certain CD-ROM media.
Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and
controls as well as the very important safety information.
40
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Quick start
Your Family Entertainment System includes a DVD system, two sets of
wireless infrared (IR) headphones and a wireless infrared (IR) remote
control.
To play a DVD in the DVD system:
The DVD system can play DVD-Video, DVD-R, DVD-R/W discs as well as
audio CDs and video CDs. To ensure proper disc operation, check the
disc for finger prints, scratches and cleanliness. Clean with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert a DVD into the system,
label-side up to turn on the system.
It will load automatically and begin
to play. If a DVD is already loaded in the system, press PLAY on the DVD
player.
The power indicator will turn on
automatically indicating the DVD
system is ON.
Press VIDEO to change the source
displayed on the screen. Press
repeatedly to cycle through:
DVD-DISC, DVD-AUX, NON-DVD,
OFF.
Press the power button to turn the
system OFF. The indicator light will
turn off indicating the system is off.
Note: The audio from the DVD system will play over all vehicle speakers
and can be adjusted by the radio volume control.
To play a CD in the DVD system:
The DVD system can play audio CDs, CD-R and CD-R/W, CD-ROM and
video CDs. To ensure proper disc operation, check the disc for finger
prints and scratches. Clean the disc with a soft cloth, wiping from the
center to the edge.
41
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert a CD into the system,
label-side up to turn on the DVD
system. It will load and
automatically begin to play. If there
is already a CD in the system, press
PLAY on the DVD player.
3. The disc will begin to play and
the ’CD Audio Disc’ screen will
display. From this screen, you can
also select from COMPRESSION,
SHUFFLE and SCAN features.
To play an MP3 disc in the DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert an MP3 disc into the
system, label-side up to turn on the
DVD system. It will load and
automatically begin to play. If there
is already a disc in the system, press
PLAY on the DVD player.
3. The disc will begin to play and
the ’MP3 Audio Disc’ screen will
display and allow you to access the
COMPRESSION, SHUFFLE, SCAN
and FOLDER MODE features.
To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system
The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic
devices such as game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette
recorders, etc.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
42
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. Press the power button to turn
the DVD system on. The indicator
light next to the power button will
illuminate.
3. Connect an auxiliary audio/video
source by connecting RCA cords
(not included) to the RCA jacks on
the left hand side of the system.
• Yellow (1) — video input
• White (2) — left channel audio
input
• Red (3) — right channel audio
input
4. Press MEDIA on the DVD system to change the media source to AUX.
5. Press VIDEO on the DVD system to change the video source to
DVD-AUX. If your source is properly plugged in, it will appear on the
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) screen. If your auxiliary source does not
have a video signal, or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal
from the auxiliary source, the screen will remain black. If the video
source is set to DVD-AUX, the display will automatically turn on if a
video signal is detected.
To listen to audio over the headphones (Dual play mode):
1. You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless
headphones. Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and
Using wired headphones for further information.
• Black (4) — wired headphone output (wired headphones not
included)
2. Press the headphone/speaker
button on the DVD player.
A green light will illuminate next to
either the A or B Headphone Control Button to indicate which channel is
active (able to be controlled).
3. Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel (A or
B). The audio source will be shown on the display. You may change the
active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button.
43
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Note: Channel A can access any possible media source (AM, FM1, FM2,
SAT (if equipped), CD, cassette, DVD, AUX). Channel B can only access
DVD and AUX sources.
Note: Refer to Single play/Dual play for more information.
Using the infrared (IR) wireless headphones:
1. Press the power control on the earpiece to turn the headphones ON.
2. Select Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using
the A/B control on the ear piece.
3. Adjust the headphone volume using the rotary dial on the earpiece.
Using wired headphones (not included):
1. Connect the wired headphones in to the headphone jacks on either
A or
B. Headphones
side of the DVD system. Each side is labeled
plugged into jack A will listen to Channel A and headphones plugged into
jack B will listen to Channel B.
2. Adjust the volume levels using
the volume controls on the DVD
system.
To adjust display brightness:
To decrease/increase the brightness
level on the display screen, press
the brightness control on the DVD
system. A display will appear at the
bottom of the screen indicating the
brightness level. The brightness display will only appear when the menu
is not displayed.
44
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
DVD player controls
16
1
2
3
ENTER
MENU
6
4
5
A
RETURN
MEDIA
B
VIDEO
VOLUME
14
15
10
12
13
7
11
9
8
1. Headphone control A/B: Press
to select either the A or B
headphone source. Then press
MEDIA to select the desired playing
media for that headset. When a
headphone channel has been selected (A or B), selections will affect the
source on that channel only.
Note: Headphone A can access any possible media (AM, FM1, FM2, SAT
(if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). Headphone B can only access DVD
and DVD-AUX.
For further information, refer to Single play/Dual play later in this
section.
/
(Stop/Eject): Press once
2.
to stop and press a second time to
eject a disc from the DVD system.
(Reverse): Press and
3.
release for the previous chapter or
track. Press and hold to reverse
search a DVD, Video CD, or FES CD in DVD/CD mode.
45
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
4.
(Fast forward): Press and
release for the next chapter or
track. Press and hold to forward
search a DVD, Video CD, or FES CD in DVD/CD mode.
/
(Play/Pause): Press
5.
(Play) to select DVD mode (and to
turn the DVD system on if it is off).
If a disc is present, it will resume or begin to play. Press (Pause) while
playing a disc to pause a DVD or CD.
6. On/Off: Press to turn the DVD
system On/Off.
7. VIDEO: Press repeatedly to cycle
through the following video state
options which will be indicated on
the bottom right hand corner of the
display: DVD DISC, DVD-AUX,
NON-DVD and Off (no indicator). If you select the DVD-AUX video
source, the display will turn off if there is no video signal detected. When
a video signal is detected on the auxiliary video input, and the display is
in the DVD-AUX video mode, the display will automatically turn on.
8. Infrared (IR) Receiver & Transmitter: System sensor which reads
the signals from the remote control and sends audio signals to the
infrared (IR) wireless headphones.
9. LCD screen: The eight inch diagonal screen rotates down to view and
up into housing to store when not in use. Ensure that the screen is
latched into the housing when being stored.
10. Volume: When in Single Play,
) or decrease
press to increase (
) the volume over all speakers.
(
When in Dual Play, press to increase
) or decrease (
) the volume
(
for the wired headphones. (Wireless headphone volume is controlled
with the rotary dial on the right ear piece.)
46
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
11.
/
(Headphones/Speakers): Press once for Dual Play
(Headphone mode- the rear speakers are muted) and press again for
Single Play (same media playing through all speakers). For further
interaction information, refer to Single Play/Dual play.
12. MEDIA: Press repeatedly to
select from the various possible
playing media sources (AM, FM1,
FM2, SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). The media will show in
the status display on the top of the screen when in Dual Play mode.
When in Single Play mode, the media source will be displayed on the
radio.
Note: Channel A can access any possible media source (AM, FM1, FM2,
SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). Channel B can only access
DVD and DVD-AUX sources.
13. RETURN: Press to return to the
playing media or to resume
playback.
14. MENU: When playing a DVD,
press MENU once to enter the DVD
disc menu (if available) and press
twice to enter the system set-up menu. From the set-up menu, you may
select from Angle, Aspect Ratio, Language, Subtitles, Disc resume,
Compression, Restore Defaults and Back. For more detailed information,
refer to Menu mode.
15. ENTER: Press to select/confirm
the current selection.
16. Cursor /Brightness controls:
Use the cursor controls to make
various selections when in any
menu. When not in a menu, and in
/
to adjust
DVD mode, press
the brightness. A display bar will appear at the bottom of the screen
indicating the brightness levels.
47
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Remote control
Unless otherwise stated, all operations can be carried out with the
remote control. Always point the remote control directly at the player.
Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player.
1. Power control: Press to turn the FES (Family Entertainment
System) ON/OFF.
2. Cursor controls: Use in various active menus to advance the cursor
up/down/left/right. When not in a Menu, the left and right cursor controls
decrease and increase the display brightness.
3. DISPLAY: Press to access the on-screen display of the FES functions
and adjustments.
4. RETURN: Press to return to the previous menu screen.
5. ANGLE (DVD dependent): Press to select the angle to view the
scene.
6. Channel A/B: Press to select either A or B headphones and then use
the MEDIA control to select the desired playing media for the
headphones.
48
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
7. VOL (Volume): When in Single Play, press to increase (
) or
) the volume over all speakers. When in Dual Play, press to
decrease (
increase (
) or decrease (
) the volume for the wired headphones.
(Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the
right ear piece.)
8. Fast Forward/Next: In DVD mode, press and hold for a quick
advance within the DVD. Press and release to advance to the next
chapter. In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the next track.
9. Play/Pause: Press to play or pause a DVD.
10. SHUFFLE: Press to play all tracks on the current CD/MP3 disc in
random order.
11. STOP: Press to stop the current DVD or CD/MP3.
/
Speaker/Headphone (Single/Dual Play): Press to toggle
12.
between Single Play (same media playing through all speakers) and Dual
Play (headphone mode — the rear speakers are muted).
13. Keypad: Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD/MP3
track or DVD chapter to be played.
14. C (Cancel): Press to cancel/clear the numeric input (i.e. chapter
number).
15. MEDIA: Press to cycle through the possible media sources: AM,
FM1, FM2, SAT (if equipped), CD, CASSETTE, DVD, LINE IN (if
equipped), DVD-AUX.
Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources.
16. VIDEO: Press to cycle through video states: DVD-DISC, DVD-AUX,
NON-DVD, Off.
17. EJECT: Press to eject a disc from the FES.
18. Fast reverse/Previous: When a DVD is playing, press and hold for a
quick reverse within the DVD. Press and release for the previous
chapter. Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the previous track.
19. MENU: Press to access the DVD disc menu for selections. Press
MENU again when in the DVD disc menu to access the system set-up
menu.
49
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
20. SUBTITLE (DVD dependent): Press to turn the subtitle feature ON
or OFF.
21. LANGUAGE (DVD dependent): Press to select the desired
language.
22. ENTER: Press to select the highlighted menu option.
23. ILLUMINATION: Press to illuminate the remote control and
backlight all of the buttons.
Battery replacement
Batteries are supplied with the
remote control unit. Since all
batteries have a limited shelf life,
replace them when the unit fails to
control the DVD player.
Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries.
The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with
the unit.
50
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Headphones
Wireless headphones
Your FES system is equipped with two sets of battery powered, infrared
wireless headphones. Two AAA batteries are needed to operate the
headphones. (Batteries are included.)
Additional infrared wireless headphones may be purchased for use with
the system. Also, wired headphones may be purchased and plugged in
where indicated on the left and right hand sides of the system. Refer to
Wired Headphones below.
To install the batteries, remove the
screw at the bottom of the cover.
Then, lightly press down on top and
slide the cover off.
When replacing the batteries, use
two new batteries (alkaline
recommended) and install them
with the correct orientation as
indicated in the battery housing.
51
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To operate the headphones:
• Press ON/OFF on the ear piece to
turn on the headphones. A red
indicator light will illuminate
indicating the headphones are
ON. Press ON/OFF again to turn
the headphones off.
• Adjust the headphones to
comfortably fit your head using
the headband adjustment.
• Select the desired audio source
(Channel A or B) for each set of
wireless headphones by using the
A/B selection switch on the ear
piece.
• Adjust the volume control to the
desired listening level.
Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use. After
approximately one minute of not being in use (no infrared signal is
received), the wireless headphones will automatically turn off. They will
also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature.
If this happens, simply turn the headphones on again and continue use.
Wired headphones
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
You may purchase wired headphones for your FES (Family
Entertainment System). Plug them into the 3.5 mm headphone jack(s)
located on the left and right sides of the system. (Channel A is located
on the left side and Channel B is located on the right side.) These
headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode.
To listen to the audio on wired headphones (not included), connect the
wired headphones into the headphone jacks on the sides of the DVD
system. The wired headphone jack for Channel A is located on the left
A. Headphones plugged into this
side of the FES and is labeled
headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the
52
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Channel A source. The wired headphone jack for Channel B is located on
the right side of the FES and is labeled
B. Headphones plugged into
this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be
the Channel B source.
Adjust the headphone volume using
the volume control on the DVD
system.
Operation
Single play/Dual play
Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones
and wired headphones (not included) to enable the front and rear seat
passengers to listen to a variety of sources a variety of ways.
Single Play: Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening
to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers. When the
DVD system is on, and the same source is playing through the front and
rear speakers, SINGLE PLAY will appear in the front radio display.
Dual Play: Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen
to a different playing media than the front seat passengers. With the
DVD and Rear Seat Controls turned ON, the rear seat passengers may
choose to listen to the radio, CD, MP3, DVD, or DVD-AUX media sources
over headphones while the front speakers play the chosen selection for
the front audio system, they may listen to another over the headphones.
DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio display.
When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen
to the same audio source, SHARED MODE will appear on the radio.
Note: If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio, the rear seat
passengers can also listen to the radio, however they will be limited to
listening to the same radio channel.
Press
/
on the DVD player to
listen to audio over the headphones.
The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the
A or B headphone control buttons will illuminate. The system can output
two different audio sources over the headphones. These are called
Channel A and Channel B. Both Channel A and Channel B can be
listened to on the wired headphones (not included) or on the infrared
(IR) wireless headphones.
53
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Press the Headphone Control button
A to change the audio source for
Channel A.
Press MEDIA to change the audio
source for Channel A. This
information will display on the DVD
system screen.
Press the Headphone Control button
B to change the audio source for
Channel B.
Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B. This information
will display on the DVD system screen. Channel B can listen to either
the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs (DVD-AUX).
Operation with an aftermarket audio system
(Headphone only mode)
When the Family Entertainment System (FES) detects that the original
radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the
vehicle, the Family Entertainment System will work in a state referred to
as “Headphone Only Mode”.
While operating in Headphone Only Mode, the system will have limited
functionality.
• The system will only output audio to the headphones. It will not be
capable of providing audio to the speakers.
• The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD-DISC
and DVD-AUX, regardless of headphone channel (A or B).
• When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode,
both headphone channels (A&B) will be connected to FES-DISC.
54
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Menu mode
Press MENU once on the DVD system to access the DVD disc menu if
available.
Press MENU twice to access the DVD set-up menu and the following
features:
1. ZOOM
2. ANGLE
3. ASPECT RATIO
4. LANGUAGE
5. SUB TITLES
Angle mode
Select ANGLE to select various
angles of view for the DVD.
This is disc dependent — some
DVD discs may have more viewing
angles to select from. Once you
have made your selection, press
ENTER to confirm. The system
default is Angle 1.
Aspect ratio
Select ASPECT RATIO to select the
viewing size and shape of the video
displayed on the LCD screen. This is
disc dependent.
55
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
You can select from: WIDE, LETTER
BOX or PAN SCAN. Once you have
made your selection, press ENTER
to confirm. The LCD screen display
will immediately change to your
selection after the system resumes
playback of the DVD. The system
default is WIDE (16:9). This is disc
dependent.
Language
Select LANGUAGE to select the
language you would like to use for
audio output (English, Spanish,
French). This is disc dependent.
Once you have made your selection,
press ENTER to confirm. The
system default is English.
Subtitles
Select SUBTITLES to turn the
subtitle option on or off. The system
default is OFF.
56
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Once you have made your selection,
press ENTER to confirm. This is
disc dependent.
Audio CDs
To play audio CDs on your DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the DVD system is ON.
3. Insert an audio CD into the DVD system, label side up.
4. The track and elapsed time will
appear in the status bar. Use the
DVD cursor controls on the bezel to
highlight which track you would like
to play. You can also use the cursor
controls to highlight
COMPRESSION, SHUFFLE or
SCAN. Once you have highlighted
the desired track or function, press ENTER on the DVD bezel to confirm
your selection.
COMP (Compression): Compression brings soft and loud CD passages
together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press to
turn the feature ON/OFF
SHUFFLE: Press to hear all tracks on the current CD in random order.
Press again to stop.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current CD. Press
again to stop.
Playing MP3 discs
To play an MP3 disc on your DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the DVD system is ON.
3. Insert the MP3 disc into the DVD system, label side up.
57
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
4. The folder, track and elapsed
time will appear in the status bar.
The screen will list the Artist, Title,
Album and File Name.
COMP (Compression):
Compression brings soft and loud
CD/MP3 passages together for a
more consistent listening level when
in CD mode. Press to turn the feature ON/OFF
SHUFFLE: Press to hear all tracks on the current MP3 folder in random
order. Press again to stop.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current MP3 folder.
Press again to stop.
FOLDER LIST: Press access folder mode and to go to the previous/next
folder in the MP3 disc.
MP3 disc quality factors
Several factors can effect disc playback quality:
• Disc capacity — Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity.
We do not recommend using high capacity discs containing 700MB of
storage.
• Disc type — Some CD-RW discs may operate inconsistently and may
cause an error message to appear. We recommend burning MP3 files
onto CD-R discs.
• Disc finalization — The disc may be left open for the purpose of
adding sessions to it at a later time, but be sure to close each session
or the disc will not play.
• Bit rate — The player supports bit rates from 32–320 kbps, as well as
variable bit rate MP3 files, but lower bit rates will have a noticeable
effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low
fidelity music material. We recommend that you encode MP3 files
using a high quality encoder.
• PC configuration — Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your
computer’s resources. Follow the PC configuration recommendations
of the encoder software vendor. We recommend that you avoid
running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding
to avoid undesirable noise and distortion.
58
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
CD, MP3 and CD player care
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
• Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player (if
equipped).
• Always store discs out of direct sunlight. Excessive heat may damage
or warp discs.
• Use care when handling and playing CD-R and CD-RW discs, which
are more susceptible to damage from heat, light and stress than are
regular CDs.
• Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat, with the
playing surface facing down, in order to prevent damage to the disc or
the player.
• Never insert any object other than a compact disc (CD) or digital
versatile disc (DVD) into the player, as doing so may damage the
player and may cause injury to you.
• Do not disassemble the player. The laser used in disc playback is
extremely harmful to the eyes.
The FES DVD system is designed to play commercially pressed
12 cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs and digital versatile discs
(DVD) only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable
and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD and DVD players. Irregular shaped CDs or DVDs,
CDs or DVDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the FES DVD system. The label may peel and cause the CD
or DVD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs or DVDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs or DVDs.
Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Playing a DVD
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the navigation system is on.
3. Insert a DVD label-side up into the system.
59
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
4. Use the DVD bezel controls to:
Press to play or pause a DVD.
Press to stop or eject a DVD.
Press and release to go to the
previous chapter. Press and hold for
a fast reverse search.
Press and release to go to the next
chapter. Press and hold for a fast
forward search.
Press when not in menu mode to
adjust brightness, or when in menu
mode to navigate through the menu
selections.
Press to adjust volume levels.
Slow play
1. With a DVD playing, press pause.
2. Press and hold the reverse or
advance button to enter into slow
play mode. Once in slow play mode,
press and release the reverse or advance button repeatedly to cycle
through 1/4 and 1/2. These will display on the status bar on top of the
screen as the screens cycle through at this rate.
Frame by frame
1. With a DVD playing, press pause.
60
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. Press the right cursor button. The
DVD will advance one frame. Each
press of the right cursor button will
advance the DVD video by one
frame.
Headphone/auxiliary jacks
There are wired headphones (not included) and auxiliary jacks on the
left and right side of your DVD system. They can be used to plug in
wired headphones or to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices
such as game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette recorders,
etc.
On the left side of the system is the
Headphone A input jack. This
headphone will listen to the media
selected on the Channel A source.
When you need to make any
adjustments to the media, volume,
etc, ensure that the Channel A
source is highlighted. For more
information, refer to Headphone
adjustments.
Also located here are the various
auxiliary jacks which can be used to plug in a VCR, camcorder, video
games, etc. The specific jacks are as follows:
1. Yellow: video input
2. White: left channel audio input
3. Red: right channel audio input
4. Black: wired headphone jack ( not included)
The B headphone jack (5) is located
on the right side of the DVD system.
Plug in wired headphones (not
included) here.
Note: The B headphones can only
access DVD and AUX modes. They
cannot access radio sources.
61
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Audio displays
Your DVD system interacts closely with the front audio system. Status
messages will appear in the radio display showing the DVD status. Some
possible radio display messages:
• SINGLE PLAY or DUAL PLAY
• DVD LOAD
• DVD MENU
• DVD STOP
Audio interaction
You can then also use the front audio controls to advance, reverse, play
and pause a DVD. While a DVD is playing you may use the following
controls on the front radio:
• SEEK: Press to advance to the previous (
chapters.
•
) or next (
) DVD
: Press to play a DVD or to pause the DVD.
When the radio displays “DVD MENU”, press PLAY on the radio
(memory preset #6), to play the disc.
Parental control for the DVD system
Your Family Entertainment System (FES) allows you to have control
over the rear seat controls in a few different ways. The DVD system is
automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is ON, which allows the
rear seat passengers to use the DVD system.
There are three levels of control of
the FES buttons. The states are
FULL (enabled), LOCAL or
LOCKED (disabled). To change the level of control, press the memory
preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls. The
control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously.
The three states are described as:
FULL (enabled): The FES has control over the primary (speaker) and
secondary (headphone) audio sources.
LOCAL: The FES has control over the secondary source (headphones)
only. The radio will ignore button presses that affect the primary
(speaker) audio source.
LOCKED (disabled): The FES buttons are locked and all FES button
presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject.
62
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
When the DVD system is ON, you
1
2
3
4
5
can then press the memory preset
controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to
toggle between Single Play and Dual Play. In Single Play mode, all
speakers listen to the same media. In Dual Play mode, rear seat
passengers can use the infrared wireless, or wired (not included)
headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat
passengers.
6
General information
Macrovision: This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
MP3: Supply of this product only conveys a license for private,
non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to
use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue generating) real time
broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and /or any other media)
broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in
other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or
audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit http:// www.mp3licensing.com.
Safety information
Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the
system and retain for future reference.
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the Family Entertainment
System (FES). See your dealer.
Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
63
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
The front glass on the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down
screen may break when hit with a hard surface. If the glass
breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact
with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.
The driver must not attempt to operate any function of the DVD
system while the vehicle is in motion. Give full attention to
driving and to the road. Pull off the road and park in a safe place
before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system. A remote control
is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate
the FES functions without distracting the driver.
Do not expose the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive
periods of time. Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal.
Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game
equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment
System (FES).
Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords
and/or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or
cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation
of seats and/or compartments.
Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and/or cables
when not in use.
Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers. Do not blow on
them or allow them to get wet or dirty.
Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene, paint thinner or
any other solvent.
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln-Mercury could
void user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference and radio
communications.
64
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Care and service of the DVD player
Environmental extremes
DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may
be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability. To avoid these
outcomes, whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to:
• extremely hot or cold temperatures.
• direct sunlight.
• high humidity.
• a dusty environment.
• locations where strong magnetic fields are generated.
Temperature extremes
When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold
place for a long period of time, wait until the cabin temperature of the
vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system.
Humidity and moisture condensation
Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely
humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one.
Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and/or player. If
moisture condensation occurs, do not insert a CD or DVD into the
player. If one is already in the player, remove it. Turn the DVD player ON
to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD. This could take an hour or
more.
Foreign substances
Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD
player compartment. Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind
onto the media controls or into the system. If liquid is accidentally
spilled onto the system, immediately turn the system OFF and consult a
qualified service technician.
65
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Cleaning the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any
ammonia-based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth. Rub the
screen gently until the dust, dirt or fingerprints are removed. Do not
spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents. Overspray
from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the
screen and cause damage. Do not apply excessive pressure while
cleaning the screen.
Cleaning DVD and CD discs
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the
center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion.
Compatibility with aftermarket audio systems
(headphone only mode)
When the Family Entertainment System (FES) detects that the original
radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the
vehicle, the FES will work in a state referred to as “Headphone Only
Mode.” This mode allows the FES to operate as a standalone system,
without interface to the radio.
While operating in Headphone Only Mode, the system will have limited
functionality.
• The system will only output audio to the headphones. It will not be
capable of providing audio to the speakers.
• The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD-DISC
and DVD-AUX, regardless of headphone channel (A or B).
• When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode,
both headphone channels (A and B) will be connected to FES-DISC.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System. Refer to the
Navigation supplement for further information.
66
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
2. Air flow selections: Controls
the distribution of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief
description on each control setting:
MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated
air through the instrument panel
vents and center console vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the
interior air is more economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also
help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and center
console vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, center console
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
: Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
Note: You may notice a small amount of air flowing from the defroster
vents and demister vents.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog or thin ice.
The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window
fogging.
3.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
in the vehicle cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time
needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce
undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation
engages automatically with selection of MAX A/C or can be engaged
manually in any other airflow selection except defrost. Recirculation may
turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A/C.
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
4. R
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
information.
67
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
5. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in MAX A/C,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
6. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
(defrost) or
(floor/defrost)
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
air flow selector in the O (OFF) position or with
(recirculated
air) engaged and A/C off.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:
1. Select MAX A/C.
2. Move temperature control selector to the coolest setting.
3. Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
68
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC) SYSTEM
WITH HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
MAX A/C setting: In order to achieve maximum cooling performance,
press
, A/C,
, and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C) and the
highest blower setting.
1.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and
thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. To exit defrost, select another distribution mode.
2. Passenger side temperature control: Press to increase/decrease
the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle. Allows the
passenger to choose and control a different temperature than the driver,
if desired.
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactive the rear window
3. R
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
information.
4. DUAL: Press to engage/disengage separate passenger side
temperature control.
Passenger heated seat: Press to control the passenger heated
5.
seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
69
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
6.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactive air recirculation in
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation can be
engaged manually in any airflow selection except defrost. Recirculation
may turn off automatically in some airflow modes to reduce fog potential.
7. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in AUTO,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
8.
Manual override controls: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is distributed. Press to toggle through the air distribution modes
listed below. The selected mode will illuminate in the display. To return
to full automatic control, press AUTO.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will automatically
provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
: Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window
fogging. Note: You may notice a small amount of air flowing from the
defroster vents and demister vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, center console
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and center
console vents.
9.
Driver heated seat control: Press to control the driver heated
seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Fan Speed: Press to manually increase or decrease the fan
10.
speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
11. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
12. Driver side temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the
temperature on the driver side of the vehicle in dual zone or the
temperature of both the driver and passenger side in single zone.
13. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow distribution, A/C
on or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to
reach the desired temperature.
70
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
14. EXT: Press to display outside temperature. Press again to display
cabin temperature settings. Note: Exterior readings are more accurate
when the vehicle is moving.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather,
select
(defrost) or
(floor/defrost).
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system OFF or with
(recirculated air) engaged and A/C off.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:
• Automatic operation:
1. Press AUTO for full automatic operation.
2. Do not override A/C or
(recirculated air).
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
• Manual operation:
1. Select
or
.
2. Select A/C and
(recirculated air). Use
(recirculated air)
with A/C to provide colder airflow.
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
4. Set highest fan setting initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
71
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER R
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.
The ignition must be in the (3) RUN position to operate the rear window
defroster.
Press the control to turn the rear window defroster on. An indicator light
on the button will illuminate when active. The rear window defroster
turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turned to
the 1 (LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position. To manually turn off the rear window
defroster at any time, press the control again.
If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors,
the same button will activate both.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
CABIN AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
The cabin air filter element is designed to reduce the concentration of
airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the air being
supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The presence of a particulate filter
element provides the following benefits:
• Improves the your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration.
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness.
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits.
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or damage to the system. If your
vehicle is not equipped with a cabin air filter, a protective screen has
been provided in its place and must remain installed at all times.
The access door for the filter is located behind the glove box. For
replacement intervals regarding the cabin air filter, see the scheduled
maintenance information. For more information regarding your filter,
see your authorized dealer.
72
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control to the
to turn on the
first position
parking lamps. Rotate to the second
to turn on the
position
headlamps.
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds or on vehicles equipped
with a message center, you can
select a delay from 0–180 seconds,
after the ignition switch is turned to
OFF.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to OFF.
Note: Some vehicles may be equipped with a headlamps on with
windshield wipers feature. If the windshield wipers are turned on (for
a fixed period of time) the exterior lamps will turn on with headlamp
control in the Autolamp position.
73
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Foglamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the foglamps. The foglamps can be
turned on when the headlamp
,
or
control is in the
positions and the high beams are
not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
will illuminate.
indicator light
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on at reduced intensity output. To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control must be in the OFF or Parking lamps position.
74
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parklamp operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
At dusk and dawn, the brightness
are illuminated to higher than
normal intensity to enhance contrast
and visibility. The system automatically “dims down” as ambient light
reaches the dash-mounted sensor. The interior control lights dim
progressively in four steps until they reach nighttime operating levels.
Certain displays like the message center and the climate control unit do
not change with the dimmer control till the dash-mounted sensor senses
full night conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
75
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the
headlamp bulb center from the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.5
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe an area of high intensity
light. The top of the high intensity
area should touch the horizontal
reference line, if not, the beam will
need to be adjusted using the next
step.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
76
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front row map lamps (if equipped)
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The
front row map lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is OFF.
Map/dome lamp (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened,
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of
the lens.
77
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Rear courtesy lamp
The courtesy lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is pushed past the detent.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must
be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for
Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe
visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function
Headlamp high beam
Headlamp low beam
Number of bulbs
2
2
Front park/turn signal lamp
2
Rear sidemarker lamp
Stop/tail/turn lamp
Backup lamp
License plate lamp
High-mount brake lamp
Foglamp (if equipped)
Map lamp
Second row dome/reading lamp
2
2
2
2
5
2
2
3
78
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Trade number
9005
H11
3157NAK
(amber)
194
4157 K
921
C5W
W5W
H11
12V6W
578
Lights
Function
Number of bulbs
Trade number
Rear courtesy lamp
1
1600XB
Visor vanity lamp - Slide on Rail
2
37
system (SOR) (if equipped)
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Reach over the front bolster.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and then pulling it
straight out.
5. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb.
6. Connect the electrical connector
on the bulb.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
79
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
7. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly.
When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, turn the new bulb
clockwise to install.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Reach over the front bolster.
4. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
the lamp assembly.
5. Carefully pull the bulb out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
Replacing tail/stop/turn/sidemarker/backup lamp bulbs
The tail/stop/turn/sidemarker/backup lamp bulbs are located in the same
portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow the
same steps to replace either bulb:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then open
the liftgate to expose the lamp
assembly bolts.
2. Remove the two bolts from the
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully remove the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle by
pulling the assembly straight out to
expose the bulb socket. DO NOT TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS.
80
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and snap in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
7. Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the
lamp assembly with two bolts.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
1. Remove the two screws and move
the lamp assembly away from the
liftgate.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the
lamp assembly by depressing the
snaps.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
Install the new bulbs in reverse
order.
81
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Push the license plate lamp
assembly to the right and remove
the assembly (located above the
license plate) from the liftgate.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out from the lamp assembly.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing foglamp bulbs (if equipped)
1. Make sure the foglamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. From underneath the vehicle,
rotate the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise, to remove from
the fog lamp.
3. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly via the
two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
82
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers: When
the wiper control is on, the speed of
the wipers will automatically adjust
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the
wipers will go.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper features (if equipped with Autolamp feature)
The exterior lamps will turn on with the ignition on, headlamp control in
the Autolamp position and the windshield wipers are turned on (for a
fixed period of time).
83
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
Select:
2 — Normal speed operation of rear
wiper.
1 — Intermittent operation of rear
wiper.
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer
position.
control to either
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT 2
or OFF position.
TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down to unlock the
steering column.
2. While the lever is in the down
position, move the steering wheel
up or down and in or out until you
find the desired position.
3. While holding the steering wheel
in place, pull the lever up to its
original position to lock the steering
column.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
84
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp. The visor will
slide back and forth on the rod for
increased sunlight coverage.
Slide on rod feature
Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Forward storage bin (if equipped)
The storage compartment may be
used to store a pair of sunglasses.
Press the release area on the rear
edge of the bin door to open the
storage compartment. The door will
open to full open position.
85
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cupholders
2. Tissue box holder (located on
underside of console lid)
3. Rear power point
4. Utility compartment with a
clamshell tray with coin holder and
a removable divider for organizing
and storing personal items including
a laptop computer, MP3 players,
CDs or handbags.
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located
on the instrument panel.
A second auxiliary power point is
located in the center console utility
compartment.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
86
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
A third auxiliary power point is
located on the rear side of the
center console. The power point is
accessible from the rear seats.
The rear auxiliary power point is
located on the left rear quarter
panel. The power point is accessible
from the liftgate or behind the rear
seat.
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
87
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Push down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
AUTO
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Push the switch completely
down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will
open fully. Momentarily press the
switch to any position to stop the
window operation.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches, audio system and moon roof
(if equipped) may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position or until either front door is opened.
88
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
AUTOMATIC DIMMING INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an inside rear view mirror with an
auto-dimming function. The
electronic day/night mirror will
change from the normal (high
reflective) state to the non-glare
(darkened) state when bright lights
(glare) reach the mirror. When the
mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically
adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the inside rear view
mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
lock mirrors in place.
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
89
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Heated outside mirrors
(if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
Note: The appearance of your vehicle’s speed control switches
may vary according to your option package.
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
90
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
light on the
5. The indicator
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal or clutch pedal (if equipped)
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The RESUME control will
not work if the vehicle speed is not
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h).
91
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached and
press the SET control.
92
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
• Turn OFF the ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
Radio control features
Press MEDIA to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2, or CD
• LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack) (if
equipped)
In Radio mode:
to access the
• Press
next/previous preset station.
In CD mode:
to listen to the
• Press
next track on the disc.
93
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or - to adjust the
volume.
Climate control features
Press TEMP + or - to adjust
temperature.
Press FAN + or - to adjust fan
speed.
94
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
PANORAMIC VISTA ROOF姟 AND POWER SUNSHADES
(IF EQUIPPED)
The panoramic Vista Roof娂 and power sunshade controls are located on
the overhead console.
Do not let children play with the panoramic Vista Roof娂 and
power sunshade or leave children unattended in the vehicle.
They may seriously hurt themselves.
When closing the panoramic Vista Roof娂 and power sunshade,
you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that
children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the panoramic Vista
Roof娂 and power sunshade opening.
To operate power sunshades:
Press the OPEN portion of the
control to open the sunshade. The
front and rear sunshades open
simultaneously. Press the CLOSE
portion of the control to close the
front and rear sunshades.
Note: Closing the sunshade will also
close the panoramic Vista Roof娂, if open.
To open the panoramic Vista
Roof娂: Press and hold to open
manually. The panoramic Vista
Roof娂 is equipped with a one-touch
open feature. Firmly press and
release the rear control. The
panoramic Vista Roof娂 will open to
the “comfort” position. Firmly press
and release the control again to fully open. To stop the one-touch open
feature press any control again.
Note: Opening the panoramic Vista Roof娂 will also open the sunshades,
if closed.
Note: The panoramic Vista Roof娂 will open to the “comfort” position
first before opening all the way. The “comfort” position helps to alleviate
rumbling wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully
opened.
95
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To close the panoramic Vista Roof娂: Press and release the front
control until the glass panel stops at the “Express close” position. Firmly
press and hold the control again to fully close.
To vent the panoramic Vista Roof娂: From the closed position, press
and release the TILT control. To vent the panoramic Vista Roof娂 from
any position, press and hold the TILT control. To close, press and hold
the front control.
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the RUN
position, the message center,
located on your instrument cluster,
displays important vehicle
information through a constant
monitor of vehicle systems. You
may select display features on the message center for a display of status.
The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a
display of system warnings followed by a long indicator chime.
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Odometer
• Trip Odometer A or B
• Distance to Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Average Speed
• Compass (if equipped)
• Trip Elapsed Drive Time 1 or 2
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
96
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If you RESET this warning
message, this display will return within 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or
liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing 100 miles
traveled by gallons of fuel used (kilometers traveled by liters used), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for 2
Seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed control to
get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Fuel Information in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
97
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Average Speed
Select this function from the INFO menu to display AVERAGE SPEED
and press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in
order to reset the function). Your average speed from that point will be
displayed until RESET is pressed and held for two seconds again.
Compass display (if equipped)
Select this function from the INFO menu. Press the INFO button
repeatedly until the Compass and Odometer are displayed. (Do not
select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The top of the message center must be blank).
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions.
If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual calibration may be
necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines.
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Turn ignition to the RUN position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press the INFO button repeatedly until the Compass and Odometer
are displayed. (Do not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The top of the message
center must be blank).
Note: If the compass displays ⬙CAL 000000.0 mi⬙ instead of heading
information, the compass will need to be calibrated. Slowly drive the
vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until the ⬙CAL⬙ indicator
changes to display compass heading. This may take up to 3 circles to
complete calibration.
98
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
4. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
3 2
15
1
4
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
5. Press and hold the RESET until
the message center display changes
to show the current zone setting.
6. Release the RESET control, then
slowly press RESET down again.
7. Press the SETUP control
repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location
is displayed on the message center. To exit the zone setting mode press
and release the RESET control.
8. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE indicator changes to
CALIBRATION COMPLETED. This
will take up to three circles to complete calibration.
10. The compass is now calibrated.
99
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• System Check
• Units (English/Metric)
• Autolamp
• Autolock
• Autounlock
• Easy entry/exit seat (if equipped)
• Reverse sensing system (Park Assist) (if equipped)
• Language
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message
for two to four seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report is as follows:
1. DOORS CLOSED
2. ENGINE TEMPERATURE
3. TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM (if equipped)
100
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
4. OIL PRESSURE
5. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
6. WASHER FLUID LEVEL
7. FUEL LEVEL
8. DISTANCE TO EMPTY
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
Autolamp delay
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to select
the new Autolamp delay values of 0,
10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
Autolock
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
1. To disable/enable the autolock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolock ON or OFF.
Autounlock
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
101
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
1. To disable/enable the autounlock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP MENU.
2. Press and hold the RESET
control switch to turn the
autounlock ON or OFF.
3. Press the RESET control switch for the next SETUP MENU item.
Easy entry/exit (if equipped)
This feature automatically moves the drivers seat backwards for easy exit
from the vehicle.
1. To disable/enable the easy
entry/exit seat feature, select this
function from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the easy entry/exit seat ON or OFF.
Reverse Sensing System (Park assist) (if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu to disable the reverse
sensing system feature.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the rear park assist OFF. When R
(Reverse) gear is selected, PARK ASSIST OFF will be displayed.
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Pressing the RESET control
cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish and French.
102
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. Press and hold the RESET
control for 2 seconds to set the
language choice.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for several
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
• They will not disappear until a condition is changed.
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition LOCK/OFF-RUN cycle has
been completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warnings
Driver door ajar
Passenger door ajar
Rear left door ajar
Rear right door ajar
Park brake engaged
Low fuel level
Check brake system
Status
Warning cannot be reset (PLEASE
CLOSE DOOR) will be displayed
RELEASE PARK BRAKE will be
displayed
Warning returns after 10 minutes
103
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Warnings
Status
Low brake fluid level
Warning returns after the ignition key
is turned from LOCK/OFF to RUN
Liftgate ajar
Low tire pressure
Tire pressure monitor fault
Tire pressure sensor fault
Compass data error
Integrated key programming
Maximum number of Integrated Keys
status
exceeded
DRIVER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger side door is
not completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear right door is not
completely closed.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED. Displayed when the manual park brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km). If the warning stays on after the park brake is released, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LOW FUEL LEVEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM. Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid
reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
LIFTGATE AJAR. Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE. Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
104
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT. Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
COMPASS DATA ERROR (if equipped). Displayed when the compass
is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
INTEGRATED KEY PROGRAMMING STATUS. Displayed when an
attempt is made to program a fifth Integrated Key to the Remote Key
Entry System. For more information on Integrated Key, refer to Locks
and Security chapter in this manual.
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT (IF EQUIPPED)
Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installed
floor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the
brake pedals.
To install floor mats that have a retention post:
Position the floor mat so that the
eyelet is over the pointed end of the
retention post and rotate forward to
lock in. Make sure that the mat does
not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator or the brake pedal.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
105
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
LIFTGATE
The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, not passengers. You can open
and close the liftgate from outside the vehicle. It cannot be opened from
inside the cargo area.
Unlock the liftgate (but do not
release it) with the power door lock
system and remote entry
transmitter.
To open the liftgate, pull the liftgate
handle rearward.
Note: Do not hang anything (bike
rack, etc.) from the spoiler/glass.
Doing so could cause serious
damage to the liftgate and its
components.
• Do not open the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area with a low
ceiling. If the liftgate is opened, the liftgate could be damaged against
a low ceiling.
• Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. Doing so could cause
serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing
carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle.
Make sure that the liftgate door is closed to prevent exhaust
fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate door open, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the
vehicle.
106
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The cargo management system
consists of storage compartments
located in the floor of the rear cargo
area.
1. To open, lift the release handle
and the lid.
2. To close, lower the lid.
LUGGAGE RACK (IF EQUIPPED)
The load must be placed directly on the luggage rack. The vehicle’s roof
panel is not designed to carry a load.
When loading the luggage rack, it is recommended to evenly distribute
the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Ensure that the load
is securely fastened. The maximum load for the roof rack is 100 lbs
(44 kg).
Your fuel economy will decrease when you drive with items on the
luggage rack. When the rack is loaded, check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each refueling stop.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
107
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
Your vehicle is equipped with two
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(IKTs). The IKT functions as both a
programmed ignition key that
operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, and a remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer
supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized
dealer. Standard SecuriLock娂 keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired.
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to
the SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were
issued with an adhesive security
label on them that provides
important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you maintain the label in a safe
place for future reference, such as
the inside front cover of this
Owner’s Guide.
108
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
RECOMMENDED HANDLING OF THE INTEGRATED KEYHEAD
TRANSMITTER (IKT)
To avoid inadvertently activating the remote entry functions of your
vehicle, it is recommended that the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT) be handled properly when starting and turning off your vehicle.
When inserting the IKT into the
ignition cylinder, place your thumb
on the center thumb rest of the IKT
and forefinger on the logo badge on
the opposite side.
To gain more leverage when rotating
the IKT in the ignition lock cylinder,
you can readjust the location of
your thumb to grasp the IKT on the
control.
outer edge next to the
Likewise, when rotating the IKT to
the 1 (LOCK) position in the
ignition lock cylinder, the bottom
edge of the IKT adjacent to the
control can be utilized.
109
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
POWER DOOR LOCKS
• Press the
doors.
control to unlock all
• Press the
doors.
control to lock all
Smart locks
This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle
if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors or the liftgate and you lock the
vehicle with the power door lock control (on the driver or passenger
door trim panel), all the doors will lock, then all doors will automatically
unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, by locking
the driver’s door with a key, using the lock control on the remote entry
transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter, or locking
the vehicle with the keyless entry keypad (if equipped).
If both front doors and the liftgate are closed, the vehicle can be locked
from any method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Autolock feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for greater
than 2 seconds.
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 (RUN)
position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
greater than 2 seconds.
110
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock procedure,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all
vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds
or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position. The horn will chirp once
to confirm the procedure is complete.
111
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Keyless entry key pad autolock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Autounlock feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position, all the doors are closed, and
the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the 1
(LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the 1 (LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
112
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all
vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds
or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position. The horn will chirp once
to confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry key pad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 • 4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
113
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Insert the key and turn to the
lock position (key horizontal) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the
unlock position (key vertical) to
disengage the childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
114
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The IKT allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle
doors.
• remotely lock all the vehicle
doors.
• activate the personal alarm.
• operate the illuminated entry
feature.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position
except while the key is held in the 4 (START) position. The panic
feature operates with the key in the 1 (LOCK) position.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the authorized
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors/two stage unlock
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors.
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this
feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned
to the 3 (RUN) position.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on using the dimmer control or
• any door is open.
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
115
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously
and
controls on the IKT for four seconds (disabling
pressing the
two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously). The
turn lamps will flash twice to indicate that two-stage unlock was enabled
or disabled.
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. The turn lamps will flash.
and release again within five seconds to confirm that all the
2. Press
doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and
the turn lamps will flash once if all the doors and liftgate are closed.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is not closed, the horn will chirp twice
and the lamps will not flash.
Sounding a panic alarm
for 1.5 seconds to activate the alarm. The horn will
Press and hold
sound and the turn lamps will flash for a maximum of 3 minutes. The
, by
alarm can be deactivated with a short press and release of
turning the ignition to RUN, or by allowing the alarm to time out after 3
minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) position.
Memory seat feature (if equipped)
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter allows you to recall the memory
seat/mirror feature.
to automatically move the seat/mirror to the desired memory
Press
position. Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is
not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat and mirrors to the desired positions.
116
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
3. Within 5 seconds, press the 1 or 2
control on the driver’s door panel to
associate with the Driver 1 or Driver
2 position.
4. Press the set button again.
5. Within 5 seconds, press a button
on the associated Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter.
6. Within 5 seconds, press the 1 or 2 control on the driver’s door panel to
associate with the Driver 1 or Driver 2 position.
Deactivating the memory feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door panel.
2. Within five seconds, press any control on the Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET
control on the driver’s door panel again.
3. Repeat this procedure for another Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if
desired.
Replacing the battery
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three-volt
lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
IKT near the key ring in order to
remove the battery cover.
117
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the
correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that
the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become
deprogrammed from your vehicle. The IKT should operate normally after
battery replacement.
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your
authorized dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself, refer to
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft
section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform
this procedure yourself.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) illuminate when the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or the keyless entry system keypad is
used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (RUN) position, or
• the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
118
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Perimeter lamps illuminated entry
With the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter system, the following items will
illuminate when the
(unlock) control on the transmitter is pressed:
• Fog lamps
• Park lamps
• Tail lamps
The lamps will automatically turn off:
• if the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (RUN) position, or
• the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
Note: On some vehicles, the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature
will not activate in daylight conditions.
Deactivating/activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry
You may enable/disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by
your authorized dealer.
You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to
enable/disable the perimeter lamps feature. Note: Before starting, ensure
the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
119
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. Press the power door unlock control twice within 5 seconds. Note:
The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has
been deactivated. The horn will chirp once and honk once (one short
and one long) to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position to exit the procedure.
Note: The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete.
Illuminated exit
• When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the
ignition, the interior dome lamps (and the exterior mirror puddle
lamps, if equipped) will illuminate.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the key is inserted in the ignition.
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control, the
battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors
or the trunk was opened, the battery saver will shut off them off 10
minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• recall memory seat/power mirrors
positions (if equipped).
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
120
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to three of
your own 5–digit personal entry codes.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory seats and mirrors (if equipped)
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit
to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the
personal entry code:
• Pressing 1 • 2 recalls Driver 1 settings.
• Pressing 3 • 4 recalls Driver 2 settings.
• Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a
sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory
setting.
5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal keycode
has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
121
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the UNLOCK
control on the remote entry transmitter
portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (RUN) position.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: If the two-stage unlocking
feature is disabled, all doors will unlock; for more information regarding
two-stage unlocking, refer to the Two stage unlocking section earlier in
this chapter.
To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time (with
the driver’s door closed). You do not need to enter the keypad code first.
SECURILOCK姟 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of
coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters;
additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer.
Standard SecuriLock娂 keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired. The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your
vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself. Refer to Programming
spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitters for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
122
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster.
• When the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) position, the indicator
will flash once every 2 seconds to
indicate the SecuriLock娂 system
is functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position, the indicator will glow
for 3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock娂 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle will not start and should be taken to an
authorized dealer for service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the 1
(LOCK) position.
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds to act as a theft
deterrent when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the 3
(RUN) position.
The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If
the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes
rapidly, have the system serviced by your authorized dealer.
123
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Replacement Integrated Keyless Transmitters (IKT) and coded keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead
Transmitters (IKTs). The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be
programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be IKTs
with remote entry functionality.
If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock娂 coded keys are lost or stolen and
you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from
your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard
SecuriLock娂 coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program
both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter
portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded
keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be
IKTs with remote entry functionality.
Tips:
• Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or standard
SecuriLock娂 keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
124
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Please read and understand the
entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three seconds, but
no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
4. Within ten seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three seconds, but
no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the second
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. Within twenty seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the
new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The
theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may
repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait twenty seconds
and then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
125
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Adjustable head restraints
Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.
Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as
possible behind your head.
The head restraints can be moved
up by pulling up on the head
restraint.
126
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Push release button to lower head
restraint.
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar control is located on the
side of the seat cushion.
Lift up or down to adjust lumbar
support.
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
127
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
Pump the handle upwards to raise
the cushion and pump downward to
lower the cushion to the desired
location.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
Folding down the front passenger seatback (if equipped)
The front passenger seatback can be folded to a horizontal position to
make room for a long load. To fold the seatback:
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Push the head restraint release button and move the head restraint
fully down.
128
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Pull up on the recliner handle
located on the outboard side of the
seat to fold the front passenger
seatback.
4. Without releasing the handle,
push the seatback forward.
5. Move the seat as far forward as
possible.
Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to
occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during
sudden stops.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
129
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback,
with your feet on the floor.
To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not hang objects
off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket (if
equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place
objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and
the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag off” or
“pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer to Front
passenger sensing system section for additional details. Failure to
follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat
sensing system.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the switch in the direction of
the arrows to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Tilt function
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to tilt the seat forward or
backward.
130
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Memory seat and mirrors (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat and
outside rearview mirrors, to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat and exterior
mirrors to the desired positions
using the associated controls.
Press the SET control. The SET control light will briefly illuminate.
While the light is illuminated, press control 1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park
(automatic transmission). A memory seat position may be programmed
at any time.
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control and the transmitter is programmed to
a memory seat position or when you enter a valid customer code 1 or 2
on the keypad.
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter..
Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not
in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
Easy-entry/easy-exit feature (if equipped)
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat rearword 2 inches
(5 cm) when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is removed from the ignition cylinder
The seat will move forward (to the original position) when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is placed in the ignition cylinder
131
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Heated seats (if equipped)
The heated seats will only function when the ignition is in RUN.
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the control located on the
climate control system panel once
to activate high heat.
• Push twice to activate low heat.
• Push a third time to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. For low
heat, one light will be lit; for high heat, both lights will be lit.
REAR SEATS
Head restraints
Lift the head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible
behind your head.
The head restraints can be moved
up by pulling up on the head
restraint.
Push release button to lower head
restraint.
132
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Folding down the 60/40 rear seats
Note: The head restraints should be placed in the full down position
before folding the seatback down.
Note: Ensure that no objects such as books, purses, or briefcases are on
the floor in front of, are on, or under the second row seat cushion before
actuating the release lever to cycle the seats to the load-floor position.
To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts, ensure
that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to
the load floor position.
2nd row manual folding seat
To fold down the rear seat, pull up
on the lever on the outboard side of
the seat cushion and let the
seatback rotate downward into the
load floor position.
2nd row EasyFold姟 seatback release (if equipped)
Note: The power feature is operational when the vehicle is in park and
the lifgate has been open for less than 30 minutes.
The control buttons are located on the left-hand rear quarter trim panel
(accessible from the liftgate area).
133
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Press and hold the control
mechanism to lower the seat. The
top portion lowers the 40% seat,
and the bottom portion lowers the
60% seat.
Returning the 2nd row seatback to the upright position
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that the latches are engaged. An unlatched seat
may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Rotate the seatback upward until the seatback latches in the upright
position. The seatback will click when it is locked into position.
Adjusting the second row seatback
Reclining the seatback can
cause an occupant to slide
under the seat’s safety belt,
resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
The second row seat reclines for
additional comfort. To adjust the
second row seatback to the desired
position, while seated, pull the
release lever up and push the
seatback rearward.
134
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seat mounted armrest and cupholders
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
seat armrest. To fold the armrest
down, release the latch located on
the seatback by pressing down and
pulling forward.
To access the cup holders, lift up
one of the slotted areas on the
cover.
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
Returning the 2nd row armrest to the upright position
Close the cover on the cup holders. Rotate the armrest rearward until
the armrest is in the latched position. The armrest will click when it is
latched into position.
135
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System姟
The Personal Safety System娂 provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System娂 consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System姟 work?
The Personal Safety System娂 can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System娂 determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
136
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, and in rollovers and side collisions
when the Safety Canopy is activated.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System娂 to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System娂 to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, this occurs
because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other
occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by
safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash
braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary
injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident
statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the front.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
137
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front
passenger airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag. The system is
designed to help protect small (child size) occupants from frontal airbag
deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger
seat contrary to proper child-seating or restraint usage
recommendations. Even with this technology, parents are STRONGLY
encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The
sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and passenger
seat-mounted side airbag (if equipped) when the passenger seat is empty
and the safety belt is unbuckled.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System娂 to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt section in this chapter.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in rollover and side collisions when the
Safety Canopy is activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with
the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System姟 is operational
The Personal Safety System娂 uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning light section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System娂 is not required.
138
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal Safety
System娂 serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the event of a collision.
Safety belt precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
139
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm.
2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or
140
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the safety
belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement.
Energy Management Feature — Front Outboard
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a head-on collision.
• This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner. This helps
reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the Belt and
Retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have two
types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
141
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a
booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety
seats for children later in this chapter.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety belt
assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision to verify that the ⬙automatic
locking retractor⬙ feature for child seats is still working properly. Safety
belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized dealer and must
be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Failure to
replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
142
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
The driver and front passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the
vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front
airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and Safety Canopy娂, and safety belt
pretensioners.
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
pull on the center button and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Second row comfort guide
The second row outboard
lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
belt comfort guide. This guide is
attached to the head restraint and is
stored in a pocket in the seatback.
It is used to adjust the comfort of
the shoulder belt for smaller
occupants in the outboard second
row seats.
143
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the
belt guide.
2. Slide the guide up or down along
the webbing so that the belt is
centered on the occupant’s shoulder.
Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
144
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an
authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue
to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
145
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
BeltMinder姞
The BeltMinder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The BeltMinder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
BeltMinder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and either
may activate the BeltMinder威 feature. The warnings are the same for the
driver and the front passenger. If the BeltMinder威 warnings have expired
(warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver or front
passenger), the other occupant can still activate the BeltMinder威 feature.
If...
The driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belts are buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position or less than 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned ON...
The driver’s or front passenger’s
safety belt is not buckled when the
vehicle has reached at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition switch has
been turned to ON...
Then...
The BeltMinder威 feature will not
activate.
The BeltMinder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts
are buckled.
The driver’s or front passenger’s
The BeltMinder威 feature is activated
safety belt becomes unbuckled for
- the safety belt warning light
approximately 1 minute while the
illuminates and the warning chime
vehicle is traveling at least 3 mph
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
(5 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes seconds, repeating for approximately
have elapsed since the ignition
5 minutes or until the safety belts
switch has been turned to ON...
are buckled.
146
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare events”
“I’m not going far”
“Belts are uncomfortable”
“I was in a hurry”
“Safety belts don’t work”
“Traffic is light”
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within
25 miles (40 km) of home.
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
BeltMinder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
147
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
“I have an airbag”
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Consider...
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely to
DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection,
WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate
into the buckle to avoid the BeltMinder威 chime. To do so may
adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag system.
One time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the safety belt for that seating position, the BeltMinder威 is disabled for
the current ignition cycle. The BeltMinder威 feature will enable during the
same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time
disable.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder姞 feature
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger BeltMinder威 features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in N (Neutral) (manual transmission)
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
148
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
While the design allows you to deactivate your BeltMinder威, this
system is designed to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the
BeltMinder威 system activated for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the
BeltMinder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2
minutes)
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state.
(Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.)
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the BeltMinder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the BeltMinder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the
light off, then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing 4 times
per second for 3 seconds again.
149
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important supplemental restraint system precautions
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or
gently and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
150
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying
airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the airbag module. Placing objects
on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be
propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
authorized dealer.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
151
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the safety belt pretensioner and airbag supplemental
restraint system work?
The safety belt pretensioner and
airbag SRS are designed to activate
when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates
pretensioner activation and airbag
inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not
activate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Front airbags are designed to activate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
152
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function again
and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
• seat-mounted side airbags (if equipped). Refer to Seat-mounted side
airbag system later in this chapter
• safety belt pretensioners
• one or more impact and safing sensors
• a readiness light and tone
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components
• Side curtain airbag system. Refer to Safety Canopy娂 system later in
this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system. later in this chapter.
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system. later in this chapter.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power, the airbag ignitors and safety belt pretensioners.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
153
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat.
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat.
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator
lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel above the
climate controls.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the ON position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay
lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
154
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator lamp will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Lit
Empty seat
Small child in child safety
seat or booster
Small child with safety
Lit
belt buckled or unbuckled
Adult
Unlit
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the back seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
155
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Objects
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Small (i.e. 3 ring
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy
Lit
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small
Lit
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
156
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least 2 minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is no
longer illuminated
• If the airbag readiness light remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
157
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
Determining if the system is operational
The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the
system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light
for front and side airbag system)
will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
158
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag SRS, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag. See your
authorized dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts
even when an airbag SRS is provided.
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• The same warning light,
electronic control and diagnostic
unit as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted on the B pillar (one on each side of the
vehicle).
• Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. If the front passenger sensing system
detects an empty seat, the front passenger seat-mounted side airbag will
be deactivated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
159
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the side airbag has
deployed, the airbag will
not function again. The side
airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness light (same light as used for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned to the RUN position.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
160
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety Canopy姟 system
Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying Safety Canopy娂. Failure
to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision.
Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety Canopy娂 could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Safety Canopy娂
system, its fuses, the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the headliner on
a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy娂. See your authorized dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety
Canopy娂 system is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy娂.
161
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the Safety Canopy姟 system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy娂 system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy娂).
The Safety Canopy娂 system
consists of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow
Safety Canopy娂 deployment.
• The same readiness airbag light, electronic control and diagnostic unit
as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted on the B pillar (one on each side of the
vehicle).
• Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy娂 system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy娂 will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
162
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The Safety Canopy娂 system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy娂 inflation or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy娂 is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, along the entire side of the vehicle. In certain lateral collisions
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy娂 system will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy娂 is designed
to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy娂 did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy娂 is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or
rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover.
Several Safety Canopy娂 system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
If the Safety Canopy娂
system has deployed, the
Safety Canopy娂 will not
function again unless replaced.
The Safety Canopy娂 system
(including the A, B, C, and D
pillar trim and headliner) must
be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the
Safety Canopy娂 is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
163
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness airbag light (same light as for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system
may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
(including pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
164
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury in a crash.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
165
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across
the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on
the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
166
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt
does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
167
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
Supplemental Restraint System
section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode.
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to
48 lb (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used for
children up to 60 lb (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide upper
torso restraint for children up to 80 lb (36 kg) using an upper torso
harness and a belt-positioning booster.
168
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a
top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with
LATCH and tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps
and anchors, refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this
chapter. For more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching
safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
attachments in this chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed
in front of an active passenger airbag.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
169
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
170
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2
through 9.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
171
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under the second row
seat gap cover marked with tether anchor symbols (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Locate the correct anchor behind
the gap cover for the selected
seating position.
172
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
5. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this
chapter.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach
the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also
be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The anchors at the center of the rear
seat are further apart than the sets of
lower anchors for child seat
installation at other seating positions.
A child seat with rigid LATCH
attachments cannot be installed at
this seating position. LATCH
compatible child seats (with
attachments on belt webbing) can be used at this seating position only if the
child seat instructions state that the child seat can be installed to anchors
that are spaced up to 20 inches (500 mm) apart. Do not attach a child seat
to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor.
173
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back. The LATCH
anchors are below the locator
symbols on the seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
174
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles handle differently
than passenger cars in the various
driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways
and off-road. Utility vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as
high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear seat belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints to
minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide for specific information about equipment
features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
All Wheel Drive (AWD) System (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system. With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front
wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The AWD
system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator.
175
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTE: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
For AWD vehicles, a spare tire of a different size other that the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire size (other than
the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and
default to front wheel drive.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD vehicles.
Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Utility Vehicles can differ from some
other vehicles in a few noticeable
ways. Your vehicle may be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a
longer wheelbase.
176
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Utility Vehicles often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
177
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
178
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
179
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
180
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire
Information section for description): Store and maintain at 60psi
(4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at the
higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
181
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
182
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
183
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided
by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information
is not found on these labels then you should consult your Ford dealer.
Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer
unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not
exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. away from the tire wheel
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
184
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
185
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)/ All
Wheel Drive vehicles (front tires
at top of diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
186
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
187
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
188
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
189
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
190
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
191
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
192
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
193
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following chart
for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System:
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required
Warning Light
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)
1. Check your tire pressure to
under-inflated
ensure tires are properly
inflated; refer to Inflating
your tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to
the manufacturer’s
recommended inflation
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for
at least two minutes over
20 mph (32 km/h) before the
light will turn OFF.
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on
the vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
on how the system functions,
refer to When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this
section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly
malfunction
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the light
remains ON, have the system
inspected by your authorized
dealer.
194
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required
Warning Light
Flashing Warning
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in
Light
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
of how the system functions
under these conditions, refer to
When your temporary spare
tire is installed in this section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly
malfunction
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the TPMS
warning light is still ON, have
the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
195
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that only
cable chains are used with steel wheels (of the same size and
specifications) as chains may chip aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only cable chains on 17 inch wheels with P235/65R17 tires.
• Do not use tire chains, cables or optional traction devices with 18 inch
wheels.
• Install cable chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch
any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cable chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the cable chains. If this does not work,
remove the cable chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cable chains when they are no longer needed. Do not
use tire cable chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and cable chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
196
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
197
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
198
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle
weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
199
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
200
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12
x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
201
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow
option package.
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to
maximize vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment
while towing.
When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and on
steep grades, the A/C system may cycle on and off to protect the engine
from overheating. This may result in a temporary increase of interior
temperatures.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide.
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
500 miles (800 km).
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
202
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer
to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue
load of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight.
FWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine
Rear axle ratio Maximum
Trailer weight
GCWR-lb. (kg) range-lb. (kg)
(0-Maximum)
3.5L Class I
2.77
7250 (3289)
0-2000 (0-907)
towing
3.5L Class II
3.16
8400 (3810)
0–3500 (0–1588)
towing
Notes: For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300 meters
(1000 ft) elevation. For definitions of terms used in this table and
instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load, refer to Vehicle
loading in this chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined
weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not
exceed the GCWR.
In ambient temperatures greater than 38°C (100°F), it is recommended
that the maximum GCW be reduced to 5262 kg (11600 lb.). At these
temperatures, vehicle speed should be kept below 97 km/h (60 mph)
during highway operation. Extended operation above 4000 rpm should
be avoided.
Towing a trailer over 1588 kg (3500 lb.) requires a weight distributing
hitch.
203
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
AWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine
Rear axle ratio Maximum
Trailer weight
GCWR-lb. (kg) range-lb. (kg)
(0-Maximum)
3.5L Class I
2.77
7450 (3379)
0-2000 (0-907)
towing
3.5L Class II
3.16
8590 (3896)
0–3500 (0–1588)
towing
Notes: For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300 meters
(1000 ft) elevation. For definitions of terms used in this table and
instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load, refer to Vehicle
loading in this chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined
weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not
exceed the GCWR.
In ambient temperatures greater than 38°C (100°F), it is recommended
that the maximum GCW be reduced to 5262 kg (11600 lb.). At these
temperatures, vehicle speed should be kept below 97 km/h (60 mph)
during highway operation. Extended operation above 4000 rpm should
be avoided.
Towing a trailer over 1588 kg (3500 lb.) requires a weight distributing
hitch.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
204
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the hook retainers on the
hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Be sure your trailer conforms to all applicable local and Federal
Regulations regarding trailer braking. If your trailer is equipped with
electronically controlled brakes you will need to have an electronic brake
controller with associated wiring installed to your vehicle by an
authorized dealer.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Do not splice into the vehicle lamp wiring for trailer lamps. Your
vehicle uses an advanced electronic module to control and
monitor your vehicle lamps. Splicing into the wiring or attaching
wiring to the vehicle bulb. may DISABLE the rear vehicle lamps
or cause them not to function properly. Your lamp outage feature
may also be disabled or provide incorrect information.
See your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper
instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
205
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first
500 miles (800 km) of towing a trailer, and don’t make full throttle
starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Understanding the positions of the 6–speed automatic
transmission section in this chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
206
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle for personal travel (such as behind a recreational vehicle or
moving truck).
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to the
Wrecker towing section in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not
damaged due to insufficient lubrication.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles:
Do not tow your Front Wheel Drive vehicle with the front drive wheels
on the ground as transaxle damage may occur. It is recommended to tow
your vehicle with the front drive wheels on a dolly or use a car-hauling
trailer.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles:
Do not tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with any wheels on the ground
as vehicle or transaxle damage may occur. It is recommended to tow
your vehicle using a car-hauling trailer.
207
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. LOCK, locks the automatic
transaxle gearshift lever and allows
key removal. This position also shuts
the engine and all electrical
accessories off without locking the
steering wheel. To lock the steering
wheel, remove the key then turn the
steering wheel.
2. ACC, allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate
while the engine is not running. This position also unlocks the steering
wheel.
3. RUN, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
208
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
209
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
3. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
2. Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
210
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to LOCK, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach
-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three
hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night
before starting the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
211
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
BRAKE
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
!
P
normal braking is still effective. (If
your BRAKE warning lamp
BRAKE
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.)
212
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is released.
!
P
BRAKE
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Push the parking brake pedal
downward again to release the
parking brake. Driving with the
parking brake on will cause the
brakes to wear out quickly and
reduce fuel economy.
Note: If the vehicle is driven with
the parking brake applied, a chime
will sound.
213
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
ADVANCETRAC姞 WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL姟 (RSC)
STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system provides stability enhancement
features such as Roll Stability Control娂 (RSC), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) and Traction Control (TCS) for certain driving situations.
The system includes an AdvanceTrac威 with RSC on/off button, and a
“sliding car” icon in the instrument cluster.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) will work with the regular brakes in
order to prevent wheel lock during a braking event. This feature will also
help provide better steerability during braking.
During AdvanceTrac威 with RSC operation you may experience the
following:
• A rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving off
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC indicator light will flash when the system
is activated.
• If your foot is on the brake pedal, you will feel a vibration in the pedal.
Traction Control
Traction Control helps your vehicle maintain traction, when driving on
slippery and/or hilly road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel
spin. Excessive wheel spin is controlled by momentarily reducing engine
power and/or applying the anti-lock brakes.
If your vehicle should become stuck in deep snow or mud, try switching
the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system off by pressing the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC button momentarily. This will allow your wheels to spin and
your tires to “dig” for traction. If your vehicle seems to lose engine
power while driving in deep sand or very deep snow, switching off the
AdvanceTrac with RSC stability enhancement feature will restore full
engine power and torque to each wheel.
If the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system is activated excessively in a short
period of time, the brake portion of the system will disable to allow the
brakes to cool down. In this situation, Traction Control will use only
engine power reduction to help control the wheels from over-spinning.
When the brakes have cooled down, the system will again function
normally. Anti-lock braking, RSC and ESC are not affected by this
condition and will function normally during the cool-down period.
During Traction Control events the “sliding car” icon in the instrument
cluster will flash momentarily.
214
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) with RSC system may enhance
your vehicle’s stability during adverse maneuvers.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system helps the driver maintain steering
control. AdvanceTrac威 with RSC will attempt to correct the vehicle
motion by applying brake force at individual tires and, if necessary, by
reducing engine power.
During Electronic Stability Control events the “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily.
Driving maneuvers which may activate AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system
include:
• Taking a turn too fast.
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle.
• Driving over a patch of ice.
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road.
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa.
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa.
• Driving on slick surfaces.
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.)
Roll Stability Control娂 (RSC)
The RSC system works in conjunction with the AdvanceTrac威 system to
help maintain roll stability of the vehicle during aggressive maneuvers by
applying brake force to one or more wheels.
During Roll Stability Control娂 (RSC) events the “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily.
Driving conditions that may activate AdvanceTrac威 with RSC include:
• Emergency lane-change
• Taking a turn too fast
• Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC button and icon functionality
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system automatically turns on each time the
engine is started, even if it was turned off when the engine was last shut
down. The “sliding car” icon which is located with the warning lights in the
215
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
instrument cluster will illuminate during bulb check at initial start-up and
then go off. This tells you that the system is normal and active. All
functions of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system (RSC, ESC, Engine
Traction Control, and Brake Traction Control) will be tested at start up.
When the system is left active, the “sliding car” icon will flash only when
any of the components of the system are affecting the vehicle’s
performance, otherwise the light will remain off. Consequently, the “sliding
car” icon will not be illuminated during most of your normal driving.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC button,
located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, allows the driver
to control certain features of the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system
below 45 mph (70 km/h). If the
vehicle is below 45 mph (70 km/h), pressing the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
button will disable RSC, ESC and Engine Traction Control and steadily
illuminate the “sliding car” icon. The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system will
remain enabled when the vehicle speed is above 45 mph (70 km/h) even
if the button has been pressed.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the Traction Control feature will continue to
function, however ESC and RSC are disabled.
All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTrac威 with RSC operation.
Do not alter or modify your vehicle’s suspension or steering; the
resulting changes to the vehicle’s handling can adversely affect
the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system.
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of a AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC event is an indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system, and the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC button has not been pushed, the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on. If the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster remains on while the engine is
running, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
216
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power
steering fluid level. Check for a low power steering fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the RUN position unless brake pedal is depressed.
217
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the RUN position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn
ignition key to LOCK, then remove
the key.
2. Using a screwdriver (or similar
tool), remove the protective cover
to the interlock release access hole
on the console. Insert the
screwdriver (or similar tool) to
release the interlock.
3. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
218
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic
transaxle
P (Park)
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
219
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transaxle
operates in gears one through six.
D (Drive) without Overdrive
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the side of the gearshift
lever.
• Transmission operates in gears
one through four.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions
cause excessive shifting from O/D
to other gears. Examples: city
traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads,
trailer towing and when engine
braking is required.
• O/D OFF lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
O/D
OFF
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp in the instrument cluster will not be
illuminated.
• O/D (overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
L (Low)
Provides more engine braking when the accelerator pedal is released
than D (Drive).
220
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac威 with RSC, it may be
beneficial to turn the system off so the wheels are allowed to spin.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R
(Reverse) and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
221
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
The RSS detects obstacles up to six
feet (two meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas). As
you move closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the tone increases. When the
obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will sound
for only three seconds. Once the
system detects an object approaching,
the tone will sound again.
The RSS automatically turns on
when the gear selector is placed in
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON.
A control in the message center
allows the driver to disable the system only when the ignition is ON and
the gear selector is in R (Reverse). Refer to Message center in the
Driver Controls chapter for more information.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system. With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front
wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input from the operator.
All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no
maintenance.
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different size other
than the tire provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire size
222
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
(other than the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sizes between
the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front wheel drive and could damage the system.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for severe off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar
to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle under other
than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which
might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty.
Driving off-highway with AWD vehicles
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough
roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different
from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds off-highway under high outside
temperatures, use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
223
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac威 with Roll Stability
Control娂, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac威 with Roll
Stability Control娂 system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
224
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
AWD Systems (if equipped)
With AWD, the vehicle uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This
increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions
that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of
time. This will cause the AWD system to overheat. If the rear tires stop
spinning while the front tires spin in deep sand, turn off the vehicle and
allow the AWD system to cool down for a minimum of 15 minutes. After
the system has cooled down, normal AWD function will return. When
driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures,
use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation will maximize
the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs
(for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
225
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and
PTU (Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if
necessary.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
226
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have
to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do
not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transaxle damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since
your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS),
do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
227
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
off-highway usage.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
228
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of five years or
60,000 miles (100,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and six years or 70,000 miles (110,000 km) on Lincoln vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $100 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
229
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
instrument panel by the radio. The
hazard flashers will operate when
the ignition is in any position or if
the key is not in the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
230
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
This switch is located behind a
panel on the left side of the cargo
area.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
231
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located behind a trim panel on the left side of the
driver’s footwell near the parking brake. To remove the trim panel, slide
the release lever to the right then pull the trim panel out.
To remove the fuse panel cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.
To reinstall the fuse panel cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until it clicks into
place. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is secure.
To reinstall the trim panel, align the tabs on the bottom of the panel with
the grooves, push the panel shut and slide the release lever to the left to
secure the panel.
232
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover.
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
15A
15A
4
5
30A
10A
6
7
8
20A
10A
10A
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Not used (Spare)
Not used (Spare)
Family entertainment system
(FES)/Rear seat control
Not used (Spare)
Keypad illumination, 2nd row
seat, Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS), Brake Shift
Interlock (BSI)
Turn signals
Low beam headlamps (left)
Low beam headlamps (right)
233
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
9
10
11
12
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A
15A
10A
7.5A
13
14
15
16
17
7.5A
10A
10A
15A
20A
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
20A
25A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
10A
10A
20A
5A
5A
5A
10A
32
33
34
35
10A
10A
5A
10A
234
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Interior lights, Cargo lamps
Backlighting, Puddle lamps
All wheel drive
Power mirror switch, Driver side
power seat memory, Driver seat
module – Keep alive power (KA)
Not used (Spare)
Not used (Spare)
Climate control
Not used (Spare)
All power lock motor feeds,
Liftgate release, Moon roof
Not used (Spare)
Rear wiper
Datalink
Fog lamps
Park lamps
High beam headlamps
Horn relay
Demand lamps/Interior lamps
Instrument panel cluster
Ignition switch
Radio
Instrument panel cluster
Overdrive cancel switch
Compass, Automatic dimming rear
view mirror
Not used (Spare)
Not used (Spare)
Steering angle sensor
Rear park assist, AWD, Heated
seat module
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
36
37
38
Fuse Amp
Rating
5A
10A
20A
39
40
41
20A
20A
15A
42
43
44
45
10A
10A
10A
5A
46
7.5A
47
30A Circuit
Breaker
—
48
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
PATS transceiver
Climate control
Subwoofer/Amp (Audiophile
radio)
Radio
Not used (Spare)
Delayed accessory function for
radio and lock switch illumination
Not used (Spare)
Rear wiper logic
Customer accessory feed
Front wiper logic, Climate control
relay feed
Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS), Passenger Airbag
Deactivation Indicator (PADI)
Power windows
Delayed accessory relay
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to
the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
235
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4
5
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
—
—
—
40A**
60A**
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
40A**
—
10A*
20A*
—
—
—
—
—
236
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Power Distribution Box
Description
Not used
Blower motor relay
Not used
Not used
Cooling fan (vehicles with trailer
tow)
Cooling fan (vehicles without
trailer tow)
Cooling fan (trailer tow only)
Not used
Alternator
Trailer tow parking lamps
Not used
Trailer tow parking lamp relay
Not used
Not used
Not used
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Fuse Amp
Rating
40A**
30A**
20A**
30A**
—
—
7.5A*
—
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
—
15A*
—
—
10A*
15A*
—
15A*
10A*
10A*
15A*
—
10A*
—
—
—
40A**
—
30A**
—
—
10A*
Power Distribution Box
Description
ABS pump motor
Front heated seats
Cigar lighter/Power point
Panorama moon roof
Fuel pump diode
PCM relay
PCM – Keep alive power (KA)
Trailer tow left stop/turn lamp
relay
Not used
Trailer tow left stop/turn lamp
Rear seat release relay
Fuel pump relay
Rear seat release
Heated mirror
Heated mirror relay
VPWR 1 – PCM
VPWR 3 – PCM
VPWR 2 – PCM
VPWR 4 – PCM
Not used
A/C clutch
Not used
A/C clutch relay
Rear window defroster relay
Rear window defroster
Not used
Starter
Starter relay
Backup lamp relay
Backup lamps
237
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
45
46
47
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
15A*
—
48
—
49
10A*
50
10A*
51
—
52
5A*
53
30A**
54
—
55
—
56
—
57
40A**
58
30A**
59
—
60
30A**
61
30A**
62
—
63
40A**
64
20A**
65
20A**
66
20A**
67
—
68
15A*
69
—
70
—
71
10A*
72
—
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge Fuses
238
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Power Distribution Box
Description
Not used
Trailer tow right stop/turn lamp
Trailer tow right stop/turn lamp
relay
Run/Start relay
PCM ISPR
ABS Run/Start
Not used
Fuel pump relay coil
SPDJB Run/Start
Not used
Not used
A/C clutch diode
ABS valves
Front wipers
Not used
Driver power seat
Passenger power seat
Not used
Blower motor
Cigar lighter/Power point
Cigar lighter/Power point
Cigar lighter/Power point
Not used
Fuel pump
Not used
Not used
Stop lamps
Not used
Roadside Emergencies
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), the indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is
in use. To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system, all road
wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted
on the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, have a flat serviced by an
authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors, refer
to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter.
The use of tire sealants may damage your tires. The use of tire
sealants may also damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
and should not be used.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important information. If
the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
239
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
For vehicles equipped with 4WD, it is not recommended that the vehicle
be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire. If
4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above speeds of 10 mph
(16 km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
240
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
2. Place the gearshift lever in P
(Park) and turn the engine OFF.
241
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the spare tire and jack
1. Lift the carpeted load floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the wing nut securing
the spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Lift and remove the spare tire.
4. Remove the spacer and bag
containing the jack assembly.
5. Remove the jack and wrench
from the bag. Fold down the wrench
socket to use to loosen the lug nuts
and operate the jack.
Tire change procedure
When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transaxle
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure to place the transaxle in P (Park), set the parking brake
and block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite
(other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close
to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
242
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Remove wheel cover (if
equipped) with the lug wrench tip
and loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
3. Align the slot on top of the jack
with the sheet metal flange
indicated by the jack locator triangle
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall the
lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the
lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
243
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
6. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
7. Remove the jack and fully tighten
1
the lug nuts in the order shown.
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
3
4
for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
5
2
Stowing the flat/spare tire and jack
1. Fully collapse the jack, fold the wrench socket into the handle and
place the both into the bag making sure to secure the tabs.
2. Place the jack assembly in the spare tire well aligning it with the two
vertical studs.
3. Place the tire in the spare tire well over the jack assembly.
If you are stowing a flat tire, place the tire in the spare tire well with
the valve stem facing down. Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is
able to protrude through a wheel opening.
If you are stowing the spare tire, place the spacer and spare in the
spare tire well in its original position.
4. Secure the wheel by replacing the wing nut and turning clockwise.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Lug nut socket
Wheel lug nut torque*
size/Bolt size
lb.ft.
N•m
100
135
Lug nut socket size:
3⁄4” (19 mm) hex
Bolt size: 1⁄2 x 20
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
244
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
Note: If there is corrosion on the area where the wheel contacts the
hub, apply a thin film of grease or anti-seize compound on that area.
JUMP STARTING
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making
sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles
and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
245
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
246
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
247
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
248
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
249
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On FWD vehicles, if your vehicle is to be towed from the front, ensure
proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the
ground. The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this
fashion.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is recommended that the front wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a
dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transaxle.
On AWD vehicles, it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to
prevent damage to the automatic transaxle, AWD system or vehicle.
250
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
251
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized dealer for warranty
repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at 1-800-392-3673 (FORD).
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized
dealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
252
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized
dealer is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE program (U.S.
only).
253
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
254
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in
achieving satisfaction by following the three-step procedure outlined on
the front page of the Warranty Guide. However, if your warranty concern
has not been resolved using the three-step procedure, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. Initially, the BBB will try to resolve your question or concern
through mediation. Mediation is a process through which a
representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options
for settlement of your claim. If mediation is not successful, customers
with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration
process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after
the hearing. You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept
it. If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must
abide by the accepted decision as well. If the arbitrator has decided in
your favor and you accept the decision, the BBB AUTO LINE program
will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a
timely manner. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are
usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE, you will be asked for your
name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. You will then be mailed a Customer
Claim Form that you will need to complete, provide proof of vehicle
ownership, sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB. Upon
receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program
Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1–800–955–5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
255
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer.
There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible
combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford
ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.
256
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1–800–392–3673.
257
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
258
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
259
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your
authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
260
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WAXING
Applying Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six
months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your
vehicle’s color. Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s
door jamb) to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
261
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• 3.5L engine
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
• For plastic headlamp lenses, use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
262
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32–A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth, or use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
263
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the airbag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
264
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11–A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)
Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45)
265
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Premium Car Wash Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-17-B)
Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32–A)
Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
266
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Owner Information Guide to find out which parts and services
are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
267
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel near
the steering column.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod.
268
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.5L V6 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Battery
5. Power distribution box
6. Air filter assembly
7. Transmission fluid dipstick
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Engine oil filler cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
269
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
270
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
Changing rear window wiper blade
The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position. This reduces
the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash.
To replace the wiper blade:
3. Grab the wiper arm just below
the blade attachment and pull it
away from the glass. Do not use
excessive force because it can break
the wiper arm at the heel. Hold it
there until the next step.
4. Grab the wiper blade with your
other hand and use your fingers to
push the wiper arm tip through the
wiper blade center to separate the
blade from the arm.
5. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
If you find this procedure too
difficult, please see your dealer.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
271
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
• 3.5L V6 engine
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
272
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 3.5L V6 engine
• If required, add engine oil to the engine. Refer to Adding engine oil
in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until it stops.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
273
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A.
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
274
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
275
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
276
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
R
TU
LE
AD
RE
N
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLD
FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
277
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B51-A1. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, meeting Ford
specification WSS-M97B44-D, with the factory-filled coolant.
Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant or any
orange-colored extended life product with your factory filled coolant
can result in degraded corrosion protection.
278
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on
the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill
the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
279
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
280
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The
symbol will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
281
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
282
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
283
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
284
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 turn until it stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until at least a few clicks are
heard.
symbol comes on and stays on after you start the engine, the
If the
fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the engine, remove
the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
285
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
(R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
87
286
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right
Fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding one gallon of fuel is enough to restart the engine. If
the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than one gallon
may be required.
• The
indicator may come on. For more information on the “check
engine” or the “service engine soon” indicator, refer to Warning lights
and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
287
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
288
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
289
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle may reduce fuel economy at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
290
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the
indicator, charging system warning light or the
temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of
engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not
working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
291
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.
indicator to illuminate.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water – the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
indicator should stay off
other temporary malfunctions present, the
the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional
vehicle service is required.
292
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If the
indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the
OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving
with the
indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel
economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned
test if the
out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission
control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle
is considered not ready for I/M testing.
indicator is on or the bulb does not work, the vehicle may
If the
need to be serviced. Refer to the On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position
indicator blinks
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the
eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
the
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
293
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
information for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is
necessary, use MERCON威 ATF.
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir. It should be between the
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in
small amounts, continuously
checking the level until it reaches
the range between the MIN and
MAX lines. Be sure to put the cap
back on the reservoir.
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
294
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSAXLE FLUID
Checking automatic transaxle fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes.Your transaxle does not consume
fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transaxle is not
working properly, i.e., if the transaxle slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated areas for normal operating temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is in the add range or does not
show at all on the dipstick.
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 149°F (65°C) on a level surface. The normal operating
temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of
driving.
295
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The transmission fluid should be
within the cross-hatch area if at
normal operating temperature 149°F
(65°C).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transaxle failure. An
overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transaxle component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint
(250 mL) increments through the
filler tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transaxle components.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
296
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Release the clamps that secure
the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and
cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not properly seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
sure that the air cleaner cover tabs
are engaged into the slots of the air
cleaner housing.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
297
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Engine air filter element
Battery
Oil filter
PCV valve
Spark plugs
1
3.5L V6 Engine
FA-1884
BXT-36R
FL-400-SB12
1
2
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
2
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
298
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
—
—
—
5.5 quarts (5.2L)
Brake fluid
Door weatherstrips
Door latch, hood
latch, auxiliary hood
latch, door hinges,
striker plates, seat
tracks and fuel filler
door hinge
Lock cylinders
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Engine oil1
XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93-B
Motorcraft Penetrating
XL-1 /
and Lock Lubricant
None
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
XO-5W20-QSP (US)
Premium Synthetic Blend
CXO-5W20–LSP12
Motor Oil (US)
(Canada) /
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
WSS-M2C930-A with API
Super Premium Motor Oil
Certification Mark
(Canada)
Multi-Purpose Grease
XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Fill between Min
and Max on
reservoir
Silicone Spray Lubricant
Ford part name / Ford
specification
Ford part name
Capacity
Item
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Maintenance and Specifications
299
300
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Ford part name
Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant with
bittering agent
(yellow-colored)2
Motorcraft MERCON威
ATF
Motorcraft
MERCON威 V
10.0 quarts (9.5L)3
ATF4
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
2.4 pints (1.15L)
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
12 ounces (0.35L)
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft Premium
4.75 quarts (4.5L)
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
19.3 gallons
—
(73.1L)
20.8 gallons
—
(78.7L)
11.7 quarts
(11.09L)
12.83 quarts
(12.14L)
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Capacity
—
—
ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
XT-2-QDX /
MERCON威
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威V
VC-7-B /
WSS-M97B51-A1
Ford part name / Ford
specification
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
1
Fuel tank
(front-wheel drive)
Fuel tank (all-wheel
drive)
Windshield washer
fluid
Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) fluid (AWD)5
Rear differential
(AWD) fluid
Automatic
transmission fluid
Power steering fluid
Engine coolant–with
trailer tow package
Engine coolant
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 V should only use MERCON威 V fluid or fluid that
is specified dual usage MERCON威/ MERCON威 V. Refer to scheduled maintenance information to
determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may
cause transmission damage.
5
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
3
Maintenance and Specifications
301
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Displacement
Required fuel
Firing order
Spark plug gap
Ignition system
Compression ratio
3.5L-DOHC V6 engine
3.5L
87 octane
1–4–2–5–3–6
(0.052–0.056 inch) 1.32–1.42 mm
Coil on plug
10.3:1
Engine drivebelt routing
• 3.5L V6 Engine
1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine.
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine.
302
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
303
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
System
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Description
6F50 6–Speed Automatic Transaxle
304
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Code
J
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessory. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you
the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Splash guards
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Ash cup / coin holder
Cargo organization and management
Cross bars
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
305
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
Peace of mind
Mobile-Ease娂 hands-free communication system
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
Not all accessories are available for all models.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
306
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
A
Accessory delay ..........................88
AdvanceTrac ..............................214
Air cleaner filter ...............296–298
Air conditioning ..........................69
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................150, 158, 161
and child safety seats ............151
description ..............150, 158, 161
disposal ....................................164
driver airbag ............152, 159, 162
indicator light .........158, 160, 163
operation .................152, 159, 162
passenger airbag .....152, 159, 162
side airbag ...............................158
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................222
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................277
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................212
Anti-theft system ......................122
Audio system (see Radio) ...21, 27
Automatic transaxle
fluid, adding ............................295
fluid, checking ........................295
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................219
fluid, refill capacities ..............299
fluid, specification ..................299
Auxiliary Input Jack ...................34
Auxiliary power point .................86
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........299
B
Battery .......................................275
acid, treating emergencies .....275
jumping a disabled battery ....245
maintenance-free ....................275
replacement, specifications ...298
servicing ..................................275
BeltMinder威 ...............................146
Brakes ........................................212
anti-lock ...................................212
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................212
fluid, checking and adding ....294
fluid, refill capacities ..............299
fluid, specifications .................299
lubricant specifications ..........299
parking ....................................213
shift interlock ..........................217
Bulbs ............................................78
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....299
Cargo management system ......107
Cell phone use ..............................7
Changing a tire .................239, 242
Child safety restraints ..............165
child safety belts ....................165
Child safety seats ......................168
attaching with tether straps ..172
in front seat ............................169
in rear seat ..............................169
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............262
instrument panel ....................263
interior .....................................264
interior trim ............................264
plastic parts ............................262
safety belts ..............................264
washing ....................................260
waxing .....................................261
307
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
wheels ......................................261
wiper blades ............................263
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ............69
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash .............................28
AM/FM/CD .................................22
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment .................98
Console ........................................86
overhead ....................................85
Controls
power seat ...............................129
steering column ........................93
Coolant
checking and adding ..............277
refill capacities ................280, 299
specifications ..........................299
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................90
Cupholder(s) .............................135
Customer Assistance ................229
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................256
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ..............257
Getting roadside assistance ...229
Getting the service you
need .........................................252
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................258
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................256
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................295
engine oil .................................271
Driving under special
conditions ..................221, 224, 226
sand .........................................225
snow and ice ...........................227
through water .................225, 228
DVD (if equipped) ......................40
E
Electronic message center .........96
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................245
Emission control system ..........291
Engine ........................................302
cleaning ...................................262
coolant .....................................277
fail-safe cooling .......................281
idle speed control ...................275
lubrication specifications .......299
refill capacities ........................299
service points ..........................269
starting after a collision .........231
Engine block heater .................211
Engine oil ..................................271
change oil soon warning,
message center .......................271
checking and adding ..............271
dipstick ....................................271
filter, specifications ........274, 298
recommendations ...................274
refill capacities ........................299
specifications ..........................299
Exhaust fumes ..........................211
D
F
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................74
308
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Fail safe cooling ........................281
Index
Floor mats .................................105
Fluid capacities .........................299
Foglamps .....................................74
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
driving off road .......................223
Fuel ............................................282
calculating fuel
economy ............................97, 288
cap ...........................................285
capacity ...................................299
choosing the right fuel ...........286
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................291
detergent in fuel .....................287
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................282, 285, 288
filter, specifications ........282, 298
fuel pump shut-off switch .....231
improving fuel economy ........288
octane rating ...................286, 302
quality ......................................287
running out of fuel .................287
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................282
Fuses ..................................231–232
autolamp system .......................73
bulb specifications ....................78
daytime running lights .............74
flash to pass ..............................74
high beam .................................74
replacing bulbs .........................79
turning on and off ....................73
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system .................................67, 69
Hood ..........................................268
How to get going ........................17
I
Ignition ...............................208, 302
Illuminated visor mirror .............85
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................168
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................293
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................263
cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................75
G
J
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............285
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................288
Gauges .........................................14
H
Hazard flashers .........................230
Head restraints .................126, 133
Headlamps ...................................73
aiming ........................................75
Jack ............................................239
positioning ...............................239
storage .....................................239
Jump-starting your vehicle ......245
K
Keyless entry system ...............120
autolock ...................................110
keypad .....................................121
locking and unlocking doors ..122
309
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
programming entry code .......121
Keys ...................................108, 124
positions of the ignition .........208
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................73
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................78
daytime running light ...............74
fog lamps ...................................74
headlamps .................................73
headlamps, flash to pass ..........74
instrument panel, dimming .....75
interior lamps .....................77, 79
replacing bulbs .........................79
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................77
Liftgate ......................................106
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........212
Load limits .................................196
Locks
autolock ...................................110
childproof ................................114
doors ........................................110
Lubricant specifications ...........299
Lug nuts ....................................244
Lumbar support, seats .............127
M
Message center ...........................96
english/metric button .............101
system check button ..............100
warning messages ...................103
Mirrors .........................................89
310
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................89
fold away ...................................89
heated ........................................90
programmable memory ..........116
side view mirrors (power) .......89
Moon roof ....................................95
Motorcraft parts ........265, 282, 298
N
Navigation system .......................66
O
Octane rating ............................286
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................271
P
Parking brake ............................213
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....298
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................137
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................235
Power door locks ......................110
Power mirrors .............................89
Power point .................................86
Power steering ..........................217
fluid, checking and adding ....294
fluid, refill capacity ................299
fluid, specifications .................299
Power Windows ...........................87
R
Radio ......................................21, 27
Index
Relays ........................................231
Remote entry system .......114–115
illuminated entry ............118, 120
locking/unlocking
doors ................................115–116
panic alarm .............................116
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................118
replacing the batteries ...........117
Reverse sensing system ...........221
Roadside assistance ..................229
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........144
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..................136, 139–143
Safety Canopy ...................158, 161
Safety defects, reporting ..258–259
Safety restraints ........136, 139–143
BeltMinder威 ............................146
extension assembly ................144
for adults .........................140–142
for children .....................164–165
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................137
safety belt maintenance .........144
warning light and chime ........145
Safety seats for children ..........168
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................303
Satellite Radio Information ........37
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) .............136
Seats ..........................................126
child safety seats ....................168
easy access/easyout feature ..131
front seats ...............126–127, 132
heated ........................................69
memory seat ...................116, 131
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ........................................122
Servicing your vehicle ..............267
Setting the clock
AM/FM single CD .....................22
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ................28
Spare tire
(see Changing the Tire) ...........242
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................298, 302
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................299
Speed control ..............................90
Starting your vehicle ........208–210
jump starting ..........................245
Steering wheel
controls ......................................93
tilting .........................................84
T
Tilt steering wheel ......................84
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....192
Tires ...........................177–179, 239
alignment ................................185
care ..........................................182
changing ..........................239, 242
checking the pressure ............182
inflating ...................................180
label .........................................191
replacing ..................................183
rotating ....................................186
safety practices .......................185
sidewall information ...............187
311
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
snow tires and chains ............196
spare tire .........................239, 242
terminology .............................179
tire grades ...............................178
treadwear ........................178, 182
Towing .......................................202
recreational towing .................207
trailer towing ..........................202
wrecker ....................................250
Transaxle
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................295
Transmission .............................217
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....217
fluid, refill capacities ..............299
lubricant specifications ..........299
Turn signal ..................................77
312
2007 Edge (edg)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................303
Vehicle loading ..........................196
Ventilating your vehicle ...........211
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
Washer fluid ..............................270
Water, Driving through .............228
Windows
power .........................................87
rear wiper/washer .....................84
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................83
checking and adding fluid .....270
replacing wiper blades ...270–271
Wrecker towing .........................250
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION
Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
Dye-Lite® Gasoline Engine Oil
Leak Detection Dye
164-R3700 (Rotunda)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft
WSS-M2C930-A
SAE 5W-20 Super Premium
Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Threadlock 262
WSK-M2G351-A6
TA-26
Fill Capacity
29.6 ml (1 oz)
-
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ENGINE
NOTE:
When repairing engines, all parts must be contamination free. If
contamination/foreign material is present when repairing an engine, premature
engine failure may occur.
NOTE:
Specifications show the expected minimum or maximum condition. Refer to the
appropriate Engine article for the procedure.
NOTE:
If a component fails to meet the specifications, it is necessary to refinish it or
install a new component. Wear limits are provided as an aid to determine if the
component can be refinished. A new component must be installed when any
component fails to meet specifications and cannot be refinished.
NOTE:
This service information contains information, steps and procedures that may
not be specific to this engine.
This service information covers general procedures and diagnosis and testing of the engine system, except for
exhaust emission control devices, which are covered in the INTRODUCTION - GASOLINE ENGINES
article.
The engine incorporates the following features: Refer to the appropriate Engine article for the procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:12
11:40:08 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Crankcase ventilation or breather system
Exhaust emission control system
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) control system
Some engines incorporate a fail-safe cooling system. Refer to the appropriate Engine article for the procedure.
The engine, fuel system, ignition system, emissions system and exhaust system all affect exhaust emission
levels and must be maintained according to the maintenance schedule. Refer to the scheduled Maintenance
Guide.
Correct engine identification is required to order parts. Refer to the appropriate Engine article for the procedure.
For complete vehicle and engine identification codes, refer to IDENTIFICATION CODES article.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
ENGINE
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
12 Volt Master UV Diagnostic Inspection Kit
164-R0756 or equivalent
(Leak Detector)
Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture
100-002 (TOOL-4201-C) or
equivalent
Engine Cylinder Leak Detection/Air
Pressurization Kit
014-00708 or equivalent
EngineEAR
107-R2100 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
EngineEAR/ChassisEAR
107-R2102 or equivalent
Oil Pressure Gauge
303-088 (T73L-6600-A)
Quick Disconnect Compression Tester
134-R0212 or equivalent
Vacuum/Pressure Tester
164-R0253 or equivalent
software with appropriate
Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and
hardware, or equivalent scan
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
tool
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
Dye-Lite® Gasoline Engine Oil Leak Detection Dye
164-R3700 (Rotunda)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
WSS-M2C930-A
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
There are 2 diagnostic paths that can be followed depending on the type of engine concern. Carry out Inspection
and Verification - Engine Performance or Inspection and Verification - NVH.
Inspection and Verification - Engine Performance
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage. Refer to the following chart.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Engine coolant leaks
Engine oil leaks
Fuel leaks
Damaged or severely worn parts
Loose mounting bolts, studs and nuts
3. If the inspection reveals obvious concerns that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the DTC Chart, refer to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to SYMPTOM CHART - ENGINE table.
Inspection and Verification - NVH
1. NVH symptoms should be identified using the diagnostic tools and techniques that are available. For a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
list of these techniques, tools, an explanation of their uses and a glossary of common terms, refer to
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article.
2. Verify the customer concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition.
3. Check the engine oil level and check the oil for contamination. Low engine oil level or contaminated oil
are a common cause of engine noise. If the oil is contaminated, the source of the contamination must be
identified and repaired as necessary.
4. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage. Refer to the following chart.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Loose mounting bolts, studs and nuts
Damaged or leaking powertrain mounts
Damaged or disconnected vacuum hoses
Obstruction of cooling fan
Obstruction of Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD)
Damaged or disconnected air intake components
5. If the inspection reveals obvious concerns that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
6. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the DLC.
NOTE:
The VCM LED prove out confirms power and ground from the DLC are
provided to the VCM.
7. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no power to the scan tool.
8. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
9. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
10. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
11. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the DTC Chart, refer to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
12. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, continue the inspection and verification if a noise concern
is related to the engine. For vibration concerns and noise concerns such as powertrain mounts, air intake
system and starter Go to SYMPTOM CHART - NVH table.
In some cases, a noise may be a normal characteristic of that engine type. In other cases the noise may
require further investigation. Comparing the noise to a similar year/model vehicle equipped with the same
engine will aid in determining if the noise is normal or abnormal.
Once a customer concern has been identified as an abnormal engine noise, it is critical to determine the
location of the specific noise. Use the EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope (the noise will always be
louder closer to the noise source) to isolate the location of the noise to one of the following:
Fuel injector(s)
Upper end of engine
Lower end of engine
Front of engine
Rear of engine
Fuel injector noise - A common source of an engine ticking noise can be related to the fuel injector(s).
This is normal engine noise that can be verified by listening to another vehicle. If the injector noise is
excessive or irregular, use the EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope to isolate the noise to a specific
fuel injector.
Upper end engine noise - A common source of upper end engine noise (ticking, knocking or rattle)
include the camshaft(s) and valve train. Upper end engine noise can be determined using the
EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope on the valve cover bolts. If the noise is loudest from the valve
cover bolts, then the noise is upper end. The EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope can be used to
further isolate the noise to the specific cylinder bank and cylinder. Removal of the valve covers will be
required to pinpoint the source of the noise.
Lower end engine noise - A common source of lower end engine noise (ticking or knocking) include the
crankshaft, connecting rod(s) and bearings. Lower end noises can be determined by using the oil pan or
cylinder block lug bosses. If the noise is loudest from these areas, then the noise is lower end. If an engine
noise is isolated to the lower end, some disassembly of the engine may be required to inspect for damage
or wear.
Front of engine noise - A common source of noise from the front of the engine (squeal, chirp, whine or
hoot) is the Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) components. To isolate FEAD noise, carry out the
Engine Accessory Test, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article.
Some other noises from the front of the engine (ticking, tapping or rattle) may be internal to the engine.
Use the EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope on the engine front cover to determine if the noise is
internal to the engine. Removal of the engine front cover may be necessary to inspect internal engine
components.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Rear of engine noise - A common source of noise from the rear of the engine (knocking) is the
flywheel/flexplate. Inspection of the flywheel/flexplate will be necessary.
If equipped, the Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) can also be a source of noise from the rear of the
engine (squeal or chirp). The READ consists of the coolant pump and belt.
Some engines have timing drive components at the rear of the engine and may be the source of noise
(ticking, knocking or rattle). Use the EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope on the rear of the engine if
the noise is suspected to be internal to the engine. Some disassembly of the engine may be required to
inspect for damage or wear.
13. After the noise is localized, note the characteristics of the noise, including type of noise, frequency and
conditions when the noise occurs and Go to SYMPTOM CHART - NVH table.
Symptom Chart - Engine Performance
SYMPTOM CHART - ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Condition
Possible Sources
Difficult starting
-
-
-
Damaged charging
system/battery
Burnt valve
Worn piston
Worn piston rings
Worn cylinder
Damaged head gasket
Inoperative or
damaged cooling
system
-
Inoperative or
damaged ignition
system
Air or vacuum leak
Inoperative or
damaged fuel system
Inoperative or
damaged starting
system
Fail-safe cooling
invoked (if equipped)
Action
Refer to the appropriate Engine article for
the procedure. REFER to the Introduction Gasoline Engines article.
REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
INSTALL a new valve in the cylinder head.
TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
INSTALL a new short block. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new cylinder head gasket. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
REFER to ENGINE COOLING article.
REFER to the Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Poor idling
Vacuum leaks
Inoperative or
damaged ignition
system
Inoperative or
damaged cooling
system
Inoperative or
damaged fuel system
-
-
Fail-safe cooling
invoked (if equipped)
-
Incorrect valve
clearance
-
Incorrect valve-tovalve seat contact
Damaged head gasket
Inoperative or
damaged fuel system
Air or vacuum leaks
Inoperative or
damaged cooling
system
Inoperative or
damaged ignition
system
-
Engine runs
rough
-
Fail-safe cooling
invoked (if equipped)
Burnt or sticking valve
Weak or broken valve
spring
Carbon accumulation
in combustion
chamber
Leaking oil
-
Excessive oil
Refer to the appropriate Engine article for
the procedure. REFER to the Introduction Gasoline Engines article.
REFER to ENGINE IGNITION - 3.5L
article.
Refer to the appropriate Engine article for
the procedure.
REFER to the Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article.
ADJUST valve clearance. REFER to
ENGINE - 3.5L article. TEST the system
for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new cylinder head. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new cylinder head gasket. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
Refer to the appropriate Engine article for
the procedure.
REFER to the Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article.
INSTALL a new valve in the cylinder head.
TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
INSTALL a new valve spring. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
ELIMINATE carbon buildup. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
REPAIR oil leakage. TEST the system for
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
consumption
normal operation after the repair.
Inoperative PCV
system
-
Incorrect oil
-
Worn valve stem seal
Worn valve stem or
valve guide
Sticking piston rings
Worn piston ring
groove
Worn piston or
cylinder
-
-
Oil in coolant
Coolant in oil
Insufficient
power
-
Leaking head gasket
Leaking oil cooler (if
equipped)
Damaged cylinder
block
Damaged cylinder
head
Leaking head gasket
Leaking oil cooler (if
equipped)
Damaged cylinder
block
Damaged cylinder
head
Damaged coolant
pump/seal/gasket
Inoperative or
damaged ignition
system
Air intake system
blockage
Lubrication system
blockage
Inoperative or
damaged fuel system
Oil level too high
REPAIR or INSTALL new components as
necessary. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
CHANGE oil to correct specification.
INSTALL a new valve stem seal. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new cylinder head. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new short block. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
INSPECT the engine components. INSTALL
new engine components as necessary. Refer
to the appropriate Engine article for the
procedure. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
INSPECT the engine components. INSTALL
new engine components as necessary. Refer
to the appropriate Engine article for the
procedure. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
Refer to the appropriate Engine article for
the procedure. REFER to the Introduction Gasoline Engines article.
DRAIN oil to correct level. TEST the system
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
for normal operation after the repair.
-
-
Incorrect engine oil
Excessive accessory
drive belt loading
Inoperative or
damaged cooling
system
-
Fail-safe cooling
invoked (if equipped)
-
Damaged or plugged
exhaust system
-
Incorrect tire size
-
Dragging brakes
-
Slipping transmission
-
Incorrect valve
clearance
-
Worn or damaged
valve tappet
Damaged valve guide
Compression leakage
at valve seat
Seized valve stem
-
Weak or broken valve
spring
-
Worn or damaged cam
-
Damaged head gasket
Cracked or distorted
cylinder head
Damaged, worn or
sticking piston ring(s)
-
-
-
INSTALL correct specification engine oil.
TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
Refer to the appropriate Engine article for
the procedure.
REFER to the Introduction - Gasoline
Engines article.
INSPECT exhaust system.
REFER to SUSPENSION SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REFER to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50
article.
ADJUST valve clearance. REFER to
ENGINE - 3.5L article. TEST the system
for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new valve tappet. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new cylinder head assembly.
TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
INSTALL a new valve spring. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new camshaft. TEST the system
for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new head gasket. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new cylinder head assembly.
TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
INSTALL a new short block. TEST the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
system for normal operation after the repair.
Worn or damaged
piston
Symptom Chart - NVH
NOTE:
NVH symptoms should be identified using the diagnostic tools that are
available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of their uses and a glossary of
common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article. Since it is
possible that any one of multiple systems may be the cause of the symptom, it
may be necessary to use a process of elimination type of diagnostic approach
to pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the causal system for the
symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article for the
next likely system and continue diagnosis.
SYMPTOM CHART - NVH
Condition
Possible Sources
Drone type noise
Drumming noise occurs inside the
vehicle during idle
or high idle, hot or
cold. Very lowfrequency
drumming is very
RPM dependent
Engine drumming
noise accompanied by
vibration
Rattle - occurs at
idle or at light
acceleration from
a stop
Whine/moan type
noise - pitch
increases or
Action
Powertrain mount(s)
Engine vibration
excites the body
resonances inducing
interior noise
CARRY OUT the Powertrain/Drivetrain
Mount Neutralizing procedure. TEST the
system for normal operation after the
repair.
CARRY OUT the Powertrain/Drivetrain
Mount Neutralizing procedure. TEST the
system for normal operation after the
repair.
CARRY OUT the Powertrain/Drivetrain
Mount Neutralizing procedure. TEST the
system for normal operation after the
repair.
CHECK the powertrain mounts for
damage. INSTALL new mounts as
necessary. For engine, REFER to ENGINE
- 3.5L article. For transaxle, REFER to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50
article. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
CHECK the powertrain mounts for
damage. INSTALL new mounts as
necessary. For engine, REFER to ENGINE
- 3.5L article. For transaxle, REFER to
Powertrain mount(s)
Powertrain mount(s)
Powertrain mount(s)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
changes with
vehicle speed
Clunk - occurs
when shifting
from PARK or
between
REVERSE and
DRIVE
Accessory drive
bearing hoot occurs at idle or
high idle in cold
temperatures of
approximately 4°
C (40°F) or colder
at the first start of
the day
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50
article. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
Powertrain mount(s)
Idle speed is too high
Accessory drive
belt noise, squeal
or chirping
Accessory drive idler
or tensioner pulley
bearing is experiencing
stick/slip between ball
bearings and the
bearing race
Defective/worn or
incorrect accessory
drive belt
Misaligned pulley(s)
Pulley runout
Damaged or worn
accessory drive
component or idler
Fluid contamination of
the accessory drive
belt or pulleys
Damaged or worn
accessory drive belt
tensioner
Damaged pulley
grooves
CHECK the powertrain/drivetrain mounts
for damage. INSTALL new mounts as
necessary. For engine, REFER to ENGINE
- 3.5L article. For transaxle, REFER to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50
article. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
CHECK for the correct idle speed.
CARRY OUT the engine cold soak
procedure. REFER to NOISE,
VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article.
PLACE the EngineEAR probe directly on
the idler/tensioner center post or bolt to
verify which bearing is making the noise.
INSTALL new parts as necessary. REFER
to ACCESSORY DRIVE article. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
CARRY OUT the Engine Accessory Test.
REFER to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article. INSPECT
components and INSTALL new parts as
necessary. REFER to ACCESSORY
DRIVE article. TEST the system for
normal operation after the repair.
CHECK the coolant pump for excessive
end play. INSPECT the coolant pump for
imbalance with the drive belt off.
INSTALL a new coolant pump as
Clunking noise
Coolant pump has
excessive end play or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
imbalance
Whine or moaning
noise
Whistling noise normally
accompanied with
poor idle
condition
Hissing noise occurs during idle
or high idle that is
apparent with the
hood open
-
Grinding noise occurs during
engine cranking
-
Vehicles with a plastic
intake manifold
CHECK the air cleaner and ducts for
correct fit. INSPECT the air intake system
for leaks or damage. REPAIR as necessary.
TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
CHECK the air intake ducts, air cleaner,
throttle body and vacuum hoses for leaks
and correct fit. REPAIR or ADJUST as
necessary. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
USE the Ultrasonic Leak
Detector/EngineEAR to locate the source.
SCAN the air intake system from the inlet
to each cylinder intake port. DISCARD the
leaking parts, and INSTALL a new
component. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
Acceptable condition. Some plastic
manifolds exhibit this noise, which is the
effect of the plastic manifold.
INSPECT the starter motor for correct
mounting. REPAIR as necessary. REFER
to STARTING SYSTEM article. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
CHECK the starter motor. INSTALL a new
starter motor as necessary. REFER to
STARTING SYSTEM article. TEST the
system for normal operation after the
repair.
INSPECT the starter motor drive for wear
or damage. INSTALL a new starter motor
as necessary. REFER to STARTING
SYSTEM article. TEST the system for
normal operation after the repair.
INSPECT the flexplate for wear or damage.
INSTALL a new flexplate as necessary.
REFER to ENGINE - 3.5L article. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
Air intake system
Vacuum leak
Air intake system
-
necessary. REFER to ENGINE
COOLING article. TEST the system for
normal operation after the repair.
Incorrect starter motor
mounting
Starter motor
Incorrect starter motor
drive engagement
Engine noise,
CHECK for obvious signs of damage or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
front of engine knocking noise
from lower front
of engine
wobble during operation. INSTALL new as
necessary. REFER to ENGINE - 3.5L
article. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
Damaged or separated
crankshaft
pulley/damper
Engine noise,
front of engine ticking, tapping or
rattling noise from
the front of the
engine
Engine noise,
upper end ticking noise near
the fuel rail and
intake manifold
-
Engine noise,
upper end - occurs
mostly with a
warm engine at
light/medium
acceleration
Engine noise,
upper end rattling noise from
the valve train.
Worse when the
engine is cold
-
CHECK for loose or damaged fuel rail clip
(s). REPAIR as necessary. TEST the
system for normal operation after the
repair.
USE the EngineEAR to isolate the noisy
injector(s). INSTALL a new injector(s) as
necessary. REFER to FUEL CHARGING
AND CONTROLS - 3.5L article. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
REMOVE the spark plugs. INSPECT and
INSTALL new as necessary. REFER to
ENGINE IGNITION - 3.5L article. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
Fuel rail clip
Fuel injector
Worn or damaged
spark plugs
Carbon accumulation
in combustion
chamber
Bore scope the cylinder. ELIMINATE
carbon buildup. TEST the system for
normal operation after the repair.
Low oil level
CHECK the oil level. FILL as necessary.
INSPECT the oil for contamination. If the
oil is contaminated, CHECK for the source.
REPAIR as necessary. CHANGE the oil
and filter. TEST the system for normal
Timing drive
components
REMOVE the accessory drive belt. REFER
to ACCESSORY DRIVE article.
USE the EngineEAR to isolate the noise to
the engine front cover.
REMOVE the engine front cover and
INSPECT the timing drive components.
INSTALL new parts as necessary. REFER
to ENGINE - 3.5L article. TEST the
system for normal operation after the
repair.
Thin or diluted oil
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
operation after the repair.
-
-
-
Engine noise,
upper end pinging noise
Worn valve train
components
Worn valve guides
Excessive runout of
the valve seats on the
valve face
-
-
Knock Sensor (KS)
operation
Incorrect spark timing
High operating
temperature
-
Spark plug
-
Catalytic converter
CARRY OUT the Valve Train Analysis
Component Test. INSTALL new parts as
necessary. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
CARRY OUT the Valve Guide Inner
Diameter procedure.
CARRY OUT the Valve Seat Inspection
procedure.
VERIFY with customer the type of
gasoline used. CORRECT as necessary.
TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
CHECK the KS. INSTALL a new KS as
necessary. REFER to ELECTRONIC
ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST the
system for normal operation after the
repair.
CHECK the spark timing. REPAIR as
necessary. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
INSPECT the cooling system for leaks.
CHECK the coolant level. REFILL as
necessary. CHECK the coolant for the
correct mix ratio. DRAIN and REFILL as
needed. VERIFY the engine operating
temperature is within specifications.
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for
normal operation after the repair.
CHECK the spark plugs. INSTALL new
spark plugs as necessary. TEST the system
for normal operation after the repair.
Acceptable noise.
USE the EngineEAR to verify the oil pump
as the source of the noise at low RPM.
Gasoline octane too
low
-
CARRY OUT an oil pressure test. If not
within specifications, REMOVE the engine
oil pan. REFER to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
INSPECT for a blocked oil pick up tube.
TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
Low oil pressure
-
Engine noise,
lower end ticking or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
knocking noise
near the oil filter
adapter
Engine noise,
lower end - light
knocking noise,
also described as
piston slap. Noise
is most noticeable
when the engine is
cold with light to
medium
acceleration. The
noise disappears
as the engine
warms
Engine noise,
lower end - light
double knock or
sharp rap sound.
Occurs mostly
with a warm
engine at idle or
low speeds in
drive. Increases in
relation to engine
load. Associated
with a poor
lubrication history
Engine noise,
lower end - light
knocking noise.
The noise is most
noticeable when
the engine is
warm. The noise
tends to decrease
when the vehicle
is coasting or in
NEUTRAL
Engine noise,
lower end - deep
knocking noise.
The noise is most
noticeable when
the engine is
REPAIR as necessary. REFER to ENGINE
- 3.5L article. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
Oil pump
Excessive clearance
between the piston and
the cylinder wall
INSTALL a new short block. REFER to
ENGINE - 3.5L article. TEST the system
for normal operation after the repair.
Excessive clearance
between the piston and
the piston pin
INSTALL a new short block. REFER to
ENGINE - 3.5L article. TEST the system
for normal operation after the repair.
Excessive clearance
between the
connecting rod
bearings and the
crankshaft
INSTALL a new short block. REFER to
ENGINE - 3.5L article. TEST the system
for normal operation after the repair.
INSTALL a new short block. REFER to
ENGINE - 3.5L article. TEST the system
Worn or damaged
crankshaft main
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
warm, at lower
RPM and under a
light load and then
at float
Engine noise, rear
of engine knocking noise at
rear of engine
Engine vibration vibration felt at all
times
-
Engine vibration at idle, a lowfrequency
vibration (5-20
Hz) or mild shake
that is felt through
the seat/floorpan
bearings
Excessive engine
pulley runout
Damaged or worn
accessory component
Engine vibration is felt with
increases and
decreases in
engine RPM
Damaged
flywheel/flexplate
-
for normal operation after the repair.
CARRY OUT the Flexplate Inspection
procedure.
CARRY OUT the Engine Accessory Test.
REFER to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article. INSTALL a new
engine pulley as necessary. REFER to
ENGINE - 3.5L article. TEST the system
for normal operation after the repair.
CARRY OUT the Engine Accessory Test.
REPAIR or INSTALL a new component as
necessary. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
Using the scan tool, CARRY OUT the
cylinder power balance and the relative
compression test. REPAIR as necessary.
REFER to ENGINE - 3.5L article. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
VERIFY the torque converter-to-crankshaft
pilot clearance is correct. REPAIR as
necessary. RE-INDEX the torque converter
on the flexplate by 120 degrees for a 3-bolt
converter or 180 degrees for a 4-bolt
converter. REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50
article for the transaxle. TEST the system
for normal operation after the repair.
CHECK the powertrain mounts for
damage. INSTALL new mounts as
necessary. For engine, REFER to ENGINE
- 3.5L article. For the transaxle, REFER to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50
article. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
INSPECT the powertrain/drivetrain for
correct clearances. REPAIR as necessary.
Cylinder misfire
Engine or torque
converter out of
balance
Powertrain mount(s)
Engine or transmission
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
grounded to chassis
Engine vibration increases intensity
as the engine
RPM is increased
Engine vibration mostly at
coast/neutral
coast. Condition
improves with
vehicle
acceleration
Engine vibration
or shudder occurs with light
to medium
acceleration above
56 km/h (35 mph)
-
-
TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
CARRY OUT the Neutral Engine Run-Up
(NERU) Test. REFER to NOISE,
VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article.
ROTATE the torque converter, 120 degrees
for 3-bolt or 180 degrees for 4-bolt.
INSPECT the torque converter pilot outer
diameter-to-crankshaft pilot inner diameter.
REPAIR as necessary. REFER to
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50
article. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
CHECK the ignition system. INSTALL
new components as necessary. REFER to
ENGINE IGNITION - 3.5L article. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
INSPECT the spark plugs for cracks, high
resistance or broken insulators. INSTALL a
new spark plug(s) as necessary. REFER to
ENGINE IGNITION - 3.5L article. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
REPAIR or INSTALL a new injector as
necessary. REFER to FUEL CHARGING
AND CONTROLS - 3.5L article. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
repair.
INSPECT the fuel for contamination.
DRAIN the fuel system and refill. REFER
to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Engine out-of-balance
Combustion instability
Worn or damaged
spark plugs
Plugged fuel injector
Contaminated fuel
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Engine Oil Leaks
NOTE:
When diagnosing engine oil leaks, the source of the leak must be positively
identified prior to repair. If the vehicle is driven extensively between adding the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
fluorescent additive and performing the leak test, fan air or wind can spread the
leaking oil and make identifying the location of the leak difficult.
Prior to carrying out this procedure, clean the cylinder block, cylinder heads, valve covers, oil pan and flywheel
with a suitable solvent to remove all traces of oil.
Engine Oil Leaks - Fluorescent Oil Additive Method
Use the 12 Volt Master UV Diagnostic Inspection Kit to carry out the following procedure for oil leak
diagnosis.
1. Add 29.6 ml (1 oz) of gasoline engine oil dye to a minimum of 0.47L (1/2 qt) and a maximum of 0.95L (1
qt) engine oil and fill through the engine oil fill. Thoroughly premix the gasoline engine oil dye or it will
not have enough time to reach the crankcase, oil galleries and seal surfaces during this particular 15
minute test. The additive must be mixed well with oil and added through the oil fill. Check the level on
the oil level indicator to determine what amount of oil to premix. If it is in the middle of the crosshatch
area or below the full mark, use 0.95L (1 qt). If it is at the full mark, use 0.47L (1/2 qt).
2. Run the engine for 15 minutes. Stop the engine and inspect all seal and gasket areas for leaks using the 12
Volt Master UV Diagnostic Inspection Kit. A clear bright yellow or orange area will identify the leak. For
extremely small leaks, several hours may be required for the leak to appear.
3. At the end of test, make sure the oil level is within the upper and lower oil indicator marks. Remove oil as
necessary if it registers above the full mark.
Leakage Points - Underhood
Examine the following areas for oil leakage:
Valve cover gaskets
Cylinder head gaskets
Oil cooler, if equipped
Oil filter adapter
Engine front cover
Oil filter adapter and filter body
Oil level indicator tube connection
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch
Leakage Points - Under Engine, With Vehicle on Hoist
Examine the following areas for oil leakage:
Oil pan gaskets
Oil pan sealer
Engine front cover gasket
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Crankshaft front seal
Crankshaft rear oil seal
Oil filter adapter and filter body
Oil cooler, if equipped
Leakage Points - With Transmission and Flywheel Removed
Examine the following areas for oil leakage:
Crankshaft rear oil seal
Rear main bearing cap parting line
Flexplate mounting bolt holes (with flexplate installed)
Pipe plugs at the end of oil passages
Oil leaks at crimped seams in sheet metal parts and cracks in cast or stamped parts can be detected when using
the dye method.
Compression Test
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is
correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position.
3. Install a compression gauge such as the Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder.
4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and
using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the
highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest
reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression
strokes.
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least
75% of the highest reading. Refer to the COMPRESSION PRESSURE LIMIT CHART.
COMPRESSION PRESSURE LIMIT CHART
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
924 kPa
696 kPa
1,131 kPa
848 kPa
1,338 kPa 1,000 kPa 1,544 kPa 1,158 kPa
(134 psi)
(101 psi)
(164 psi)
(123 psi)
(194 psi)
(146 psi)
(224 psi)
(168 psi)
938 kPa
703 kPa
1,145 kPa
855 kPa
1,351 kPa 1,014 kPa 1,558 kPa 1,165 kPa
(136 psi)
(102 psi)
(166 psi)
(124 psi)
(196 psi)
(147 psi)
(226 psi)
(169 psi)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
952 kPa
(138 psi)
965 kPa
(140 psi)
979 kPa
(142 psi)
933 kPa
(144 psi)
1,007 kPa
(146 psi)
1,020 kPa
(148 psi)
1,034 kPa
(150 psi)
1,048 kPa
(152 psi)
1,062 kPa
(154 psi)
1,076 kPa
(156 psi)
1,089 kPa
(158 psi)
1,103 kPa
(160 psi)
1,110 kPa
(161 psi)
717 kPa
(104 psi)
724 kPa
(106 psi)
738 kPa
(107 psi)
745 kPa
(109 psi)
758 kPa
(110 psi)
765 kPa
(111 psi)
779 kPa
(113 psi)
786 kPa
(114 psi)
793 kPa
(115 psi)
807 kPa
(117 psi)
814 kPa
(118 psi)
827 kPa
(120 psi)
834 kPa
(121 psi)
1,158 kPa
(168 psi)
1,172 kPa
(170 psi)
1,186 kPa
(172 psi)
1,200 kPa
(174 psi)
1,214 kPa
(176 psi)
1,227 kPa
(178 psi)
1,241 kPa
(180 psi)
1,255 kPa
(182 psi)
1,269 kPa
(184 psi)
1,282 kPa
(186 psi)
1,296 kPa
(188 psi)
1,310 kPa
(190 psi)
1,324 kPa
(192 psi)
869 kPa
(126 psi)
876 kPa
(127 psi)
889 kPa
(129 psi)
903 kPa
(131 psi)
910 kPa
(132 psi)
917 kPa
(133 psi)
931 kPa
(135 psi)
936 kPa
(136 psi)
952 kPa
(138 psi)
965 kPa
(140 psi)
972 kPa
(141 psi)
979 kPa
(142 psi)
993 kPa
(144 psi)
1,365 kPa
(198 psi)
1,379 kPa
(200 psi)
1,303 kPa
(202 psi)
1,407 kPa
(204 psi)
1,420 kPa
(206 psi)
1,434 kPa
(208 psi)
1,448 kPa
(210 psi)
1,462 kPa
(212 psi)
1,476 kPa
(214 psi)
1,489 kPa
(216 psi)
1,503 kPa
(218 psi)
1,517 kPa
(220 psi)
1,631 kPa
(222 psi)
1,020 kPa
(148 psi)
1,034 kPa
(150 psi)
1,041 kPa
(151 psi)
1,055 kPa
(153 psi)
1,062 kPa
(154 psi)
1,075 kPa
(156 psi)
1,083 kPa
(157 psi)
1,089 kPa
(158 psi)
1,103 kPa
(160 psi)
1,117 kPa
(162 psi)
1,124 kPa
(163 psi)
1,138 kPa
(165 psi)
1,145 kPa
(166 psi)
1,572 kPa
(228 psi)
1,586 kPa
(230 psi)
1,600 kPa
(232 psi)
1,055 kPa
(153 psi)
1,627 kPa
(154 psi)
1,641 kPa
(238 psi)
1,655 kPa
(240 psi)
1,669 kPa
(242 psi)
1,682 kPa
(244 psi)
1,696 kPa
(246 psi)
1,710 kPa
(248 psi)
1,724 kPa
(250 psi)
1,179 kPa
(171 psi)
1,186 kPa
(172 psi)
1,200 kPa
(174 psi)
1,207 kPa
(175 psi)
1,220 kPa
(177 psi)
1,227 kPa
(178 psi)
1,241 kPa
(180 psi)
1,248 kPa
(181 psi)
1,262 kPa
(183 psi)
1,269 kPa
(184 psi)
1,202 kPa
(186 psi)
1,289 kPa
(187 psi)
-
-
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these
cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not
increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in
cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest
reading is within 75% of the highest reading.
Cylinder Leakage Detection
When a cylinder produces a low reading, use of the Engine Cylinder Leak Detection/Air Pressurization Kit will
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
be helpful in pinpointing the exact cause.
The leakage detector is inserted in the spark plug hole, the piston is brought up to Top Dead Center (TDC) on
the compression stroke, and compressed air is admitted.
Once the combustion chamber is pressurized, a special gauge included in the kit will read the percentage of
leakage. Leakage exceeding 20% is excessive.
While the air pressure is retained in the cylinder, listen for the hiss of escaping air. A leak at the intake valve
will be heard in the Throttle Body (TB). A leak at the exhaust valve can be heard at the tailpipe. Leakage past
the piston rings will be audible at the PCV connection. If air is passing through a blown head gasket to an
adjacent cylinder, the noise will be evident at the spark plug hole of the cylinder into which the air is leaking.
Cracks in the cylinder block or gasket leakage into the cooling system may be detected by a stream of bubbles
in the radiator.
Excessive Engine Oil Consumption
Nearly all engines consume oil, which is essential for normal lubrication of the cylinder bore walls and pistons
and rings. Determining the level of oil consumption may require testing by recording how much oil is being
added over a given set of miles.
Customer driving habits greatly influence oil consumption. Mileage accumulated during towing or heavy
loading generates extra heat. Frequent short trips, stop-and-go type traffic or extensive idling, prevent the
engine from reaching normal operating temperature. This prevents component clearances from reaching
specified operating ranges.
The following diagnostic procedure may be utilized to determine internal oil consumption. Make sure that the
concern is related to internal oil consumption, and not external leakage, which also consumes oil. Verify there
are no leaks before carrying out the test. Once verified, the rate of internal oil consumption can be tested.
A new engine may require extra oil in the early stages of operation. Internal piston-to-bore clearances and
sealing characteristics improve as the engine breaks in. Engines are designed for close tolerances and do not
require break-in oils or additives. Use the oil specified in the Owner's Literature. Ambient temperatures may
determine the oil viscosity specification. Verify that the correct oil is being used for the vehicle in the
geographic region in which it is driven.
Basic Pre-checks
1. For persistent complaints of oil consumption, interview the customer to determine the oil consumption
characteristics. If possible, determine the brand and grade of oil currently in the oil pan. Look at the oil
filter or oil-change station tags to determine if Ford-recommended maintenance schedules have been
followed. Make sure that the oil has been changed at the specified mileage intervals. If vehicle mileage is
past the first recommended drain interval, the OEM production filter should have been changed.
2. Ask how the most current mileage was accumulated. That is, determine whether the vehicle was driven
under the following conditions:
Extended idling or curbside engine operation
Stop-and-go traffic or taxi operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Towing a trailer or vehicle loaded heavily
Frequent short trips (engine not up to normal operating temperature)
Excessive throttling or high engine-RPM driving
Verify that there are no external leaks. If necessary, review the diagnostic procedure under ENGINE
OIL LEAKS in Diagnosis and Testing .
Inspect the crankcase ventilation system for:
disconnected hoses at the valve cover or TB.
loose or missing valve cover fill cap.
missing or incorrectly seated engine oil level indicator.
incorrect or dirty PCV valve.
a PCV valve grommet unseated in the valve cover (if so equipped).
Inspect for signs of sludge. Sludge affects PCV performance and can plug or restrict cylinder head
drainback wells. It can also increase oil pressure by restricting passages and reducing the drainback
capability of piston oil control rings. Sludge can result from either excessive water ingestion in the
crankcase or operation at extremely high crankcase temperatures.
Inspect the air filter for dirt, sludge or damage. A hole in the filter element will allow unfiltered air to
bypass into the air induction system. This can cause premature internal wear (engine dusting), allowing
oil to escape past rings, pistons, valves and guides.
If the engine is hot or was recently shut down, wait at least 5 minutes to allow the oil to drain back. Ask
the customer if this requirement has been followed. Adding oil without this wait period can cause an
overfill condition, leading to excessive oil consumption and foaming, which may cause engine damage.
Make sure the oil level indicator (dipstick) is correctly and fully seated in the indicator tube. Remove the
oil level indicator and record the oil level.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Detailed Pre-checks
1. Check the thermostat opening temperature to make sure that the cooling system is operating at the
specified temperature. If it is low, internal engine parts are not running at specified internal operating
clearances.
2. Verify the spark plugs are not oil saturated. Oil leaking into one or more cylinders will appear as an oil
soaked condition on the plug. If a plug is saturated, a compression check may be necessary at the
conclusion of the oil consumption test.
Oil Consumption Test
Once all of the previous conditions are met, carry out an oil consumption test.
1. Drain the engine oil and remove the oil filter. Install a new manufacturer-specified oil filter. Make sure
the vehicle is positioned on a level surface. Refill the oil pan to a level one liter (quart) less than the
specified fill level, using manufacturer-specified oil.
2. Run the engine for 3 minutes (if hot) or 10 minutes (if cold). Allow for a minimum 5-minute drainback
period and then record the oil level shown on the oil level indicator. Place a mark on the backside of the
oil level indicator noting the oil level location.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
3. Add the final one liter (quart) to complete the normal oil fill. Restart the engine and allow it to idle for 2
minutes. Shut the engine down.
4. After a 5-minute drainback period, record the location of the oil level again. Mark the oil level indicator
with the new oil level location. (Note: Both marks should be very close to the MIN-MAX upper and
lower limits or the upper and lower holes on the oil level indicator. These marks will exactly measure the
engine's use of oil, with a one quart differential between the new marks.) Demonstrate to the customer
that the factory-calibrated marks on the oil level indicator are where the oil should fall after an oil change
with the specified fill amount. Explain however, that this may vary slightly between MIN-MAX or the
upper and lower holes on the oil level indicator.
5. Record the vehicle mileage.
6. Advise the customer that oil level indicator readings must be taken every 320 km (200 mi) or weekly,
using the revised marks as drawn. Remind the customer that the engine needs a minimum 5-minute
drainback for an accurate reading and that the oil level indicator must be firmly seated in the tube prior to
taking the reading.
7. When the subsequent indicator readings demonstrate a full liter (quart) has been used, record the vehicle
mileage. The mileage driven between the 2 readings should not be less than 2,414 km (1,500 mi). The
drive cycle the vehicle has been operated under must be considered when making this calculation. It may
be necessary to have the customer bring the vehicle in for a periodic oil level indicator reading to closely
monitor oil usage.
Post Checks, Evaluation and Corrective Action
1. If test results indicate excessive oil consumption, carry out a cylinder compression test. The cylinder
compression test should be carried out with a fully charged battery and all spark plugs removed. See the
COMPRESSION PRESSURE LIMIT CHART for pressure range limits.
2. Compression should be consistent across all cylinders. Refer to COMPRESSION TEST. If compression
tested within the specifications found in this service information, the excessive oil consumption may be
due to wear on the valve guides, valves or valve seals.
3. A cylinder leak detection test can be carried out using an Engine Cylinder Leak Detection/Air
Pressurization Kit. This can help identify valves, piston rings, or worn valve guides/valve stems,
inoperative valve stem seals or other related areas as the source of oil consumption.
NOTE:
An oil-soaked appearance on the porcelain tips of the spark plugs also
indicates excessive oil use. A typical engine with normal oil consumption
will exhibit a light tan to brown appearance. See Spark Plug Analysis in
this service information for details. A single or adjoining, multiple cylinder
leak can be traced by viewing the tips.
4. If an internal engine part is isolated as the root cause, determine if the repair will exceed cost limits and
proceed with a repair strategy as required.
5. Once corrective action to engine is complete and verifying that all pre-check items were eliminated in the
original diagnosis, repeat the Oil Consumption Test as described above and verify consumption results.
Intake Manifold Vacuum Test
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature. Connect the Vacuum/Pressure Tester to the intake manifold.
Run the engine at the specified idle speed.
The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) depending upon the engine condition and the
altitude at which the test is conducted. Subtract 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8
m (1,000 ft) of elevation above sea level.
The reading should be steady. If necessary, adjust the gauge damper control (where used) if the needle is
fluttering rapidly. Adjust the damper until the needle moves easily without excessive flutter.
Intake Manifold Vacuum Test - Interpreting Vacuum Gauge Readings
A careful study of the vacuum gauge reading while the engine is idling will help pinpoint trouble areas. Always
conduct other appropriate tests before arriving at a final diagnostic decision. Vacuum gauge readings, although
helpful, must be interpreted carefully.
Most vacuum gauges have a normal band indicated on the gauge face.
The following are potential gauge readings. Some are normal; others should be investigated further.
Fig. 1: Potential Vacuum Gauge Readings Chart
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
1. NORMAL READING: Needle between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) and holding steady.
2. NORMAL READING DURING RAPID ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION: When the engine
is rapidly accelerated (dotted needle), the needle will drop to a low reading (not to zero). When the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
throttle is suddenly released, the needle will snap back up to a higher than normal figure.
NORMAL FOR HIGH-LIFT CAMSHAFT WITH LARGE OVERLAP: The needle will register as low
as 51 kPa (15 in-Hg) but will be relatively steady. Some oscillation is normal.
WORN RINGS OR DILUTED OIL: When the engine is accelerated (dotted needle), the needle drops to
0 kPa (0 in-Hg). Upon deceleration, the needle runs slightly above 74 kPa (22 in-Hg).
STICKING VALVES: When the needle (dotted) remains steady at a normal vacuum but occasionally
flicks (sharp, fast movement) down and back about 13 kPa (4 in-Hg), one or more valves may be sticking.
BURNED OR WARPED VALVES: A regular, evenly-spaced, downscale flicking of the needle indicates
one or more burned or warped valves. Insufficient valve clearance will also cause this reaction.
POOR VALVE SEATING: A small but regular downscale flicking can mean one or more valves are not
seating.
WORN VALVE GUIDES: When the needle oscillates over about a 13 kPa (4 in-Hg) range at idle speed,
the valve guides could be worn. As engine speed increases, the needle will become steady if guides are
responsible.
WEAK VALVE SPRINGS: When the needle oscillation becomes more violent as engine RPM is
increased, weak valve springs are indicated. The reading at idle could be relatively steady.
LATE VALVE TIMING: A steady but low reading could be caused by late valve timing.
IGNITION TIMING RETARDING: Retarded ignition timing will produce a steady but somewhat low
reading.
INSUFFICIENT SPARK PLUG GAP: When spark plugs are gapped too close, a regular, small pulsation
of the needle can occur.
INTAKE LEAK: A low, steady reading can be caused by an intake manifold or throttle body gasket leak.
BLOWN HEAD GASKET: A regular drop of fair magnitude can be caused by a blown head gasket or
warped cylinder head-to-cylinder block surface.
RESTRICTED EXHAUST SYSTEM: When the engine is first started and is idled, the reading may be
normal, but as the engine RPM is increased, the back pressure caused by a clogged muffler, kinked
tailpipe or other concerns will cause the needle to slowly drop to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg). The needle then may
slowly rise. Excessive exhaust clogging will cause the needle to drop to a low point even if the engine is
only idling.
When vacuum leaks are indicated, search out and correct the cause. Excess air leaking into the system
will upset the fuel mixture and cause concerns such as rough idle, missing on acceleration or burned
valves. If the leak exists in an accessory unit such as the power brake booster, the unit will not function
correctly. Always fix vacuum leaks.
Oil Pressure Test
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect and remove the oil pressure switch from the engine.
Connect the engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure switch oil galley port.
Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached.
Run the engine at the specified RPM and record the gauge reading.
The oil pressure should be within specifications; refer to the specification chart in the appropriate engine
section.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources:
Insufficient oil
Oil leakage
Worn or damaged oil pump
Oil pump screen cover and tube
Excessive main bearing clearance
Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
Chain tensioner leak
Valve Train Analysis
The following component tests are used to diagnose valve train concerns.
Valve Train Analysis - Engine Off, Valve Cover Removed
Check for damaged or severely worn parts and correct assembly. Make sure correct parts are used with the
static engine analysis as follows.
Valve Train Analysis - Camshafts and Valve Tappets
Check for broken or damaged parts.
Check for loose mounting bolts on camshaft caps.
Check for worn or damaged valve tappets.
Valve Train Analysis - Valve Springs, Valve Tappets Removed
Check for broken or damaged parts.
Valve Train Analysis - Valve Spring Retainer and Valve Spring Retainer Keys, Valve Tappets Removed
Check for correct seating of the valve spring retainer key on the valve stem and in valve spring retainer.
Check for correct seating on the valve stem.
Valve Train Analysis - Valves and Cylinder Head, Valve Tappets Removed
Check for plugged oil drain-back holes.
Check for worn or damaged valve tips.
Check for missing or damaged valve stem seals or guide-mounted valve stem seal.
Check for missing or worn valve spring seats.
Valve Train Analysis - Camshaft Lobe Lift
Check the lift of each camshaft lobe in consecutive order and make a note of the readings.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
1. Remove the spark plugs. Refer to ENGINE IGNITION - 3.5L article.
2. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture so the rounded tip of the dial indicator is on top of
the camshaft lobe and on the same plane as the valve tappet.
3. Rotate the crankshaft using a breaker bar and socket attached to the crankshaft pulley retainer bolt. Rotate
the crankshaft until the base circle of the camshaft lobe is reached.
Fig. 2: Checking Camshaft Lobe Lift
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Zero the dial indicator. Continue to rotate the crankshaft until the high-lift point of the camshaft lobe is in
the fully-raised position (highest indicator reading).
5. To check the accuracy of the original dial indicator reading, continue to rotate crankshaft until the base
circle is reached. The dial indicator reading should be zero. If zero reading is not obtained, repeat Steps 1
through 6.
6. If the lift on any lobe is below specified service limits, install a new camshaft and camshaft valve tappets.
7. Install the spark plugs. Refer to ENGINE IGNITION - 3.5L article.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
SPROCKETS
1. Inspect the sprockets for cracks and worn or chipped teeth.
Fig. 3: Inspecting Sprockets For Damage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
CAMSHAFT BEARING JOURNAL DIAMETER
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
1. Measure each camshaft journal diameter in 2 directions.
Fig. 4: Locating Areas For Measuring Camshaft Journal Diameter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAMSHAFT JOURNAL TO BEARING CLEARANCE - OHC ENGINES
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
NOTE:
The camshaft journals must meet specifications before checking camshaft
journal clearance.
1. Measure each camshaft bearing in 2 directions.
Subtract the camshaft journal diameter from the camshaft bearing diameter.
Fig. 5: Measuring Camshaft Bearing In 2 Directions
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAMSHAFT END PLAY - OHC ENGINES
SPECIAL TOOLS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding 100-002 (TOOL-4201-C) or
Fixture
equivalent
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft end play.
Position the camshaft to the rear of the cylinder head.
Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge.
Move the camshaft to the front of the cylinder head. Note and record the camshaft end play.
If camshaft end play exceeds specifications, install a new camshaft and recheck end play.
If camshaft end play exceeds specification after camshaft installation, install a new cylinder head.
Fig. 6: Recording Camshaft End Play
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAMSHAFT SURFACE INSPECTION
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the contact area. Minor pitting is acceptable outside the
contact area.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Inspecting Camshaft Lobes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAMSHAFT LOBE LIFT
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding 100-002 (TOOL-4201-C) or
Fixture
equivalent
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
1. Use the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure camshaft intake/exhaust lobe lift.
Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest indicator reading from the highest indicator reading to
figure the camshaft lobe lift.
Fig. 8: Using Dial Indicator Gauge With Holding Fixture To Measure Camshaft Intake/Exhaust
Lobe Lift
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAMSHAFT RUNOUT
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding 100-002 (TOOL-4201-C) or
Fixture
equivalent
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Camshaft journals must be within specifications before checking runout.
1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft runout.
Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest indicator reading from the highest indicator reading.
Fig. 9: Measuring Camshaft Runout Using Dial Indicator Gauge With Holding Fixture
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CRANKSHAFT END PLAY
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding 100-002 (TOOL-4201-C) or
Fixture
equivalent
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture.
Position the crankshaft to the rear of the cylinder block.
Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge.
Move the crankshaft to the front of the cylinder block. Note and record the crankshaft end play.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Recording Crankshaft End Play
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE STEM DIAMETER
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
1. Measure the diameter of each intake and exhaust valve stem at the points shown in illustration. Verify the
diameter is within specification.
Fig. 11: Measuring Diameter Of Valve Stem
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE INSPECTION
1. Inspect the following valve areas:
1. The end of the stem for grooves or scoring.
2. The valve face and the edge for pits, grooves or scores.
3. The valve head for signs of burning, erosion, warpage and cracking.
4. The valve margin for wear.
Fig. 12: Inspecting Valves
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE GUIDE INNER DIAMETER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
Valve guides tend to wear in an hourglass pattern. The ball gauge can be
inserted into the combustion chamber side of the valve guide, if
necessary.
1. Use a ball gauge to determine the inside diameter of the valve guides in 2 directions at the top, middle
and bottom of the valve guide.
Fig. 13: Measuring Valve Guide Inner Diameter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Measure the ball gauge with a micrometer.
Fig. 14: Measuring Ball Gauge With Micrometer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. If the valve guide is not within specifications, install a new cylinder head assembly.
VALVE STEM TO VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Clearance Gauge, Valve Guide
303-004 (TOOL-6505-E) or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
equivalent
Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding 100-002 (TOOL-4201-C) or
Fixture
equivalent
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
NOTE:
The valve stem diameter must be within specifications before checking valve
stem-to-valve guide clearance.
NOTE:
If necessary, use a magnetic base.
1. Install a Valve Guide Clearance Gauge on the valve stem and install a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding
Fixture. Lower the valve until the clearance gauge contacts the upper surface of the valve guide.
Fig. 15: Installing Valve Guide Clearance Gauge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Move the Valve Guide Clearance Gauge toward the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture and zero
the Dial Indicator Gauge. Move the Valve Guide Clearance Gauge away from the Dial Indicator Gauge
with Holding Fixture and note the reading. The reading will be DOUBLE the valve stem-to-valve guide
clearance.
VALVE SPRING INSTALLED LENGTH
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
1. Measure the installed length of each valve spring.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Measuring Installed Length Of Valve Spring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE SPRING FREE LENGTH
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
1. Measure the free length of each valve spring.
Fig. 17: Measuring Free Length Of Valve Spring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS
1. Measure the out-of-square on each valve spring.
Turn the valve spring and observe the space between the top of the valve spring and the square.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Measuring Valve Spring Out-Of-Square
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE SPRING STRENGTH
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Pressure Gauge, Valve/Clutch
Spring
NOTE:
303-006 (TOOL-6513-DD) or
equivalent
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
1. Use the Valve/Clutch Spring Pressure Gauge to check the valve spring for correct strength at the specified
valve spring length.
Fig. 19: Using Valve/Clutch Spring Pressure Gauge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE SEAT INSPECTION
Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
NOTE:
After grinding valves or valve seats, check valve clearance.
1. Check the valve head and seat.
Check valve angles.
Check margin width.
Be sure margin width is within specification.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 20: Checking Valve Head And Seat
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Inspect for abnormalities on the valve face and seat. Install a new cylinder head assembly if abnormalities
are found.
VALVE SEAT WIDTH
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
1. Measure the valve seat width. If necessary, grind the valve seat to specification.
Measure the intake valve seat width.
Measure the exhaust valve seat width.
Recheck the valve spring installed length after the seats have been ground, and shim the valve
springs as necessary to achieve the correct installed spring length.
Fig. 21: Measuring Valve Seat Width
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE SEAT RUNOUT
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
1. Use a valve seat runout gauge to check valve seat runout.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 22: Measuring Valve Seat Runout
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
FLEXPLATE INSPECTION
1. Inspect the flexplate for:
1. any cracks.
2. worn ring gear teeth.
3. chipped or cracked ring gear teeth.
Fig. 23: Inspecting Flexplate
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Feeler Gauge Set
NOTE:
Tool Number
303-D027 (D81L-4201-A) or
equivalent
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure all cylinder head surfaces are clear of any gasket material,
silicone sealant, oil and coolant. The cylinder head surface must be clean
and dry before running a flatness check.
NOTE:
Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within
0.005 mm (0.0002 in) per running foot of length, such as Snap-On®
GA438A or equivalent. For example, if the Straightedge is 61 cm (24 in)
long, the machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004 in) from end
to end.
1. Using a Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set, inspect the cylinder head for flatness in the sequence shown
in illustration.
Fig. 24: Inspecting Cylinder Head For Flatness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Feeler Gauge Set
Tool Number
303-D027 (D81L-4201-A) or
equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information for the specification.
Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within
0.005 mm (0.0002 in) per running foot of length, such as Snap-On®
GA438A or equivalent. For example, if the Straightedge is 61 cm (24 in)
long, the machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004 in) from end
to end.
1. Use a Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set to inspect the cylinder block for flatness.
Fig. 25: Inspecting Cylinder Block For Flatness Using Straightedge & Feeler Gauge Set
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD CLEANING AND INSPECTION
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Feeler Gauge Set
Tool Number
303-D027 (D81L-4201-A) or
equivalent
1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable solvent. Use a plastic scraping tool to clean the gasket sealing
surfaces.
NOTE:
New exhaust manifold gaskets, studs, nuts and/or bolts must be installed
when an exhaust manifold is serviced.
NOTE:
Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within
0.005 mm (0.0002 in) per running foot of length, such as Snap-On®
GA438A or equivalent. For example, if the Straightedge is 61 cm (24 in)
long, the machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004 in) from end
to end.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
2. Using the Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set, check the exhaust manifold sealing surface for warpage.
If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.0299 in), install a new exhaust manifold.
Fig. 26: Checking Exhaust Manifold Sealing Surface For Warpage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
SPARK PLUG INSPECTION
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
Install a new spark plug.
Fig. 27: Identifying Spark Plug With Bridged Gap
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Check for oil fouling.
Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
Correct the oil leak concern.
Install a new spark plug.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 28: Identifying Oil Fouled Spark Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell
surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a
fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
Fig. 29: Identifying Spark Plug Carbon Fouling
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
Fig. 30: Identifying Normal Burning Spark Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic
deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong
type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads.
Install a new spark plug.
Fig. 31: Identifying Spark Plug With Pre-Ignition Condition
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of
electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with
an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing.
Install a new spark plug.
Fig. 32: Identifying Overheated Spark Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These
are caused by sudden acceleration.
Install new spark plugs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 33: Identifying Spark Plug With Fused Deposits
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE TAPPET INSPECTION
1. Inspect the valve tappet for damage, especially in the indicated areas. If any damage is evident, inspect
the camshaft lobes and valves for damage. Install new components as necessary.
Fig. 34: Inspecting Valve Tappet
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
POWERTRAIN/DRIVETRAIN MOUNT NEUTRALIZING
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate service information and procedure for special
instructions on loosening and tightening mount fasteners.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners.
3. Lower the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not twist or strain the powertrain/drivetrain mounts or damage to the
mounts may occur.
4. Start the vehicle and move it in forward 0.6-1.2 m (2-4 ft). Then move the vehicle in reverse the same
distance.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine System - General Information - Edge & MKX
5.
6.
7.
8.
Raise and support the vehicle.
Tighten the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners.
Lower the vehicle.
Test the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:40:08 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS
Ford - Edge
USING MITCHELL1'S WIRING DIAGRAMS
For information on using these wiring diagrams, see USING MITCHELL1'S SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article.
AIR CONDITIONING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:14
11:46:02 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:02 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 1: Automatic A/C Circuit (1 of 3)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:02 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:02 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 2: Automatic A/C Circuit (2 of 3)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:02 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:02 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 3: Automatic A/C Circuit (3 of 3)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:02 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:02 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 4: Manual A/C Circuit (1 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 5: Manual A/C Circuit (2 of 2)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 6: Anti-lock Brakes Circuit
ANTI-THEFT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 7: Forced Entry Circuit (1 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 8: Forced Entry Circuit (2 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 9: Passive Anti-theft Circuit
BODY CONTROL MODULES
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 10: Body Control Modules Circuit (1 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 11: Body Control Modules Circuit (2 of 2)
COMPUTER DATA LINES
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 12: Computer Data Lines Circuit (1 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 13: Computer Data Lines Circuit (2 of 2)
COOLING FAN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 14: Cooling Fan Circuit, W/ Trailer Tow
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 15: Cooling Fan Circuit, W/O Trailer Tow
CRUISE CONTROL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 16: Cruise Control Circuit
DEFOGGERS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 17: Defoggers Circuit
ENGINE PERFORMANCE
3.5L
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 18: 3.5L, Engine Performance Circuit (1 of 5)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 19: 3.5L, Engine Performance Circuit (2 of 5)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 20: 3.5L, Engine Performance Circuit (3 of 5)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 21: 3.5L, Engine Performance Circuit (4 of 5)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 22: 3.5L, Engine Performance Circuit (5 of 5)
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 23: Backup Lamps Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 24: Exterior Lamps Circuit (1 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 25: Exterior Lamps Circuit (2 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 26: Trailer Adapter Circuit
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 27: Ground Distribution Circuit (1 of 4)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 28: Ground Distribution Circuit (2 of 4)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 29: Ground Distribution Circuit (3 of 4)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 30: Ground Distribution Circuit (4 of 4)
HEADLIGHTS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:03 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 31: Adaptive Front Lighting Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 32: Headlamps Circuit
HORN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 33: Horn Circuit
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 34: Instrument Cluster Circuit
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 35: Courtesy Lamps Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 36: Instrument Illumination Circuit
MEMORY SYSTEMS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 37: Driver"s Memory Seat Circuit (1 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 38: Driver"s Memory Seat Circuit (2 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 39: Memory Mirrors Circuit
NAVIGATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 40: Parking Assistant Circuit
POWER DISTRIBUTION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 41: Power Distribution Circuit (1 of 5)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 42: Power Distribution Circuit (2 of 5)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 43: Power Distribution Circuit (3 of 5)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 44: Power Distribution Circuit (4 of 5)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 45: Power Distribution Circuit (5 of 5)
POWER DOOR LOCKS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 46: Power Door Locks Circuit (1 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 47: Power Door Locks Circuit (2 of 2)
POWER MIRRORS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 95
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 96
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 48: Electrochromic Mirror Circuit, W/ Microphone
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 97
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 98
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 49: Electrochromic Mirror Circuit, W/O Microphone
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 99
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 100
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 50: Power Mirrors Circuit
POWER SEATS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 101
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 102
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 51: Heated Seats Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 103
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 104
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 52: Power Seats Circuit, 10-Way Passenger Seat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 105
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 106
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 53: Power Seats Circuit, 6-Way Driver Seat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 107
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 108
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 54: Power Seats Circuit, 6-Way passenger Seat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 109
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 110
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 55: Second Row Seat Release Circuit
POWER TOP/SUNROOF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 111
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 112
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 56: Power Top/Sunroof Circuit
POWER WINDOWS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 113
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 114
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 57: Power Windows Circuit
RADIO
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:04 AM
Page 115
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 116
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 58: Base Radio Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 117
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 118
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 59: Premium Radio Circuit, W/ SYNC (1 of 3)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 119
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 120
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 60: Premium Radio Circuit, W/ SYNC (2 of 3)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 121
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 122
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 61: Premium Radio Circuit, W/ SYNC (3 of 3)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 123
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 124
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 62: Rear Entertainment Radio Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 125
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 126
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 63: THX Audio Radio Circuit (1 of 3)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 127
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 128
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 64: THX Audio Radio Circuit (2 of 3)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 129
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 130
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 65: THX Audio Radio Circuit (3 of 3)
SHIFT INTERLOCK
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 131
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 132
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 66: Shift Interlock Circuit
STARTING/CHARGING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 133
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 134
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 67: Charging Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 135
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 136
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 68: Starting Circuit
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 137
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 138
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 69: Supplemental Restraints Circuit (1 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 139
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 140
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 70: Supplemental Restraints Circuit (2 of 2)
TRANSMISSION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 141
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 142
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 71: A/T Circuit (1 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 143
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 144
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 72: A/T Circuit (2 of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 145
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 146
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 73: AWD Circuit
TRUNK, TAILGATE, FUEL DOOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 147
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 148
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 74: Liftgate Release Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 149
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 150
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 75: Power Liftgate Circuit
WARNING SYSTEMS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 151
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 152
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 76: Chime Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 153
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 154
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 77: Tire Pressure Monitoring Circuit
WIPER/WASHER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 155
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 156
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 78: Front Wiper/Washer Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 157
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 158
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS Ford - Edge
Fig. 79: Rear Washer/Wiper Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:46:05 AM
Page 159
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ELECTRICAL Generator and Regulator - Edge & MKX
2008 ELECTRICAL
Generator and Regulator - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Generator pulley ratio
Rating
Voltage regulator type
Specification
2.66:1
78/143 amp (max) @ 620-2,500 engine RPM @
normal engine temperature
Electronic internal with generator
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Generator B+ terminal nut
Generator bolts
Generator nuts
Generator stud
Nm
12
47
47
8
lb-ft
9
35
35
-
lb-in
71
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
GENERATOR
The charging system consists of the following components:
Generator
Integral voltage regulator
The generator is belt-driven by the engine accessory drive system. The generator has an internal voltage
regulator that is not replaced separately. The generator and voltage regulator are repaired as an assembly.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
GENERATOR
Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
GENERATOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:43:24
11:43:20 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ELECTRICAL Generator and Regulator - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Generator Components With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
W712609
W520414
W709986
7H953
10300
6
-
7
8
-
Description
Generator stud
Generator nut
Generator bolt
Generator B+ terminal nut
Generator
Generator electrical connector (part of
14B060)
Generator B+ terminal (part of 14B060)
Pin-type retainer, wiring harness
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the battery. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND CABLES
article.
2. Remove the cooling fan. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and position the accessory drive belt aside.
4. Position the generator B+ terminal protective cover aside, remove the nut and position the generator B+
terminal aside.
To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. Disconnect the generator electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:43:20 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ELECTRICAL Generator and Regulator - Edge & MKX
Detach the pin-type retainer and wiring harness.
Remove the generator stud nut.
To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Remove the generator stud.
To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Remove the RH fender splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS article.
Loosen the generator bolt and remove the generator.
To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:43:20 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
2008 TRANSMISSIONS
Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Fluid
MERCON® V, MERCON® SP, Motorcraft Premium Automatic Transmission Fluid, Motorcraft
Continuously Variable Chain Type Transmission Fluid and FNR5 transmission fluid are not
interchangeable transmission fluids. The use of any transmission fluid other than what is recommended
for the transaxle will cause transaxle damage. Refer to the material specification for the correct
transmission fluid. The transmission fluid should be changed every 96,560 km (60,000 mi) regardless of
normal or special operating conditions.
CAUTION: Do not use water-based cleaners to clean or flush the transmission fluid cooler tubes or
transaxle damage will occur. Mineral spirits can be used to clean the transmission fluid cooler
tubes, providing the transmission fluid cooler tubes are flushed with clean transmission fluid and
blown dry with shop air. Use only clean transmission fluid designated for this transaxle and torque
converter being serviced.
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
MERCON® V Automatic
Transmission Fluid
MERCON® V
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US);
CXT-5-LM12 (Canada)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Air cleaner bolt
Air cleaner outlet pipe clamp
Battery tray bolts
Transmission fluid cooler bracket bolts
Transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve
Transmission fluid cooler tube bolts
Transmission fluid cooler tube fittings
Fill Capacity
9.5L (10 qt)
Nm
11
5
10
10
9
9
25
lb-ft
8
18
lb-in
44
89
89
80
80
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
TRANSAXLE COOLING
The transmission fluid cooling system consists of the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:35
10:53:30 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Oil-to-air transmission fluid cooler
Transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
Transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve
Transmission fluid cooler outlet tube
Transmission fluid cooler return tube
These vehicles are equipped with an external transmission fluid cooler. The transmission fluid cooler is
mounted in front of the engine radiator. The transmission fluid cooling system also consists of a transmission
fluid cooler thermal bypass valve which is mounted on the transaxle main control cover. When the transmission
fluid is below normal operating temperature, transmission fluid travels from the transaxle to the transmission
fluid cooler thermal bypass valve then back to the transaxle. When the transmission fluid is at or above normal
operating temperature, the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve opens allowing transmission fluid to
travel from the transaxle through the transmission fluid cooler then back to the transaxle. The transmission fluid
cooler transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the outside air.
Fig. 1: Identifying Transaxle Cooling System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
-
3
-
4
-
Description
Transmission fluid cooler
Transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
Transmission fluid cooler tube secondary
latches
Transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:30 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
5
6
valve
Transmission fluid cooler outlet tube
Transmission fluid cooler return tube
-
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
TRANSAXLE COOLING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
MATERIAL
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Inspection and Verification
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify the customer concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition.
If the inspection reveals obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
Install new components if a transmission fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling components.
If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s). Go to Symptom Chart Transaxle Cooling or Go to Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH).
Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling
Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling
Condition
Possible Sources
Transaxle
overheating
Clogged
transmission fluid
cooler or
transmission fluid
cooler tubes
Bent or crushed
transmission fluid
cooler tubes
Transmission fluid
Action
INSPECT the transmission fluid cooler,
transmission fluid cooler tubes and transmission
fluid cooler thermal bypass valve for damage or
plugging. INSTALL new components as
necessary.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:30 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
cooler thermal
bypass valve stuck
closed
System leaks
Internal transaxle
concerns
INSPECT transmission fluid cooler and
transmission fluid cooler tubes for leaks.
SERVICE as required.
REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50
article.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
NOTE:
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) symptoms should be identified using the
diagnostic tools that are available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of
their uses and a glossary of common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article. Since it is possible any one of multiple systems may be
the cause of a symptom, it may be necessary to use a process of elimination
type of diagnostic approach to pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the
causal system for the symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article for the next likely system and continue diagnosis.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Condition
Possible Sources
Vibration - a high
frequency (20-80 Hz)
that is felt through the
seat or gear shifter.
Changes with engine
speed
Transmission fluid cooler
tubes grounded
Action
CHECK the transmission
fluid cooler tubes. REPAIR
as necessary.
Check Transmission Fluid Level and Condition (All Vehicles)
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the transmission fluid level indicator
shows the transmission fluid below the minimum transmission fluid level
mark or internal failure could result.
If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period of time, at highway speeds, in city traffic, in hot weather
or while pulling a trailer, the transmission fluid needs to cool down to obtain an accurate reading.
The transmission fluid level reading on the transmission fluid level indicator will differ depending on operating
and ambient temperatures. The correct reading should be within the normal operating temperature range.
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:30 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 80°
C-93°C (175°F-200°F) on a level surface. Normal operating temperature can be
reached after approximately 32 km (20 mi) of driving and can be checked using
the scan tool.
Under normal circumstances the transmission fluid level should be checked during normal maintenance. If the
transaxle starts to slip, shifts slowly or shows signs of transmission fluid leaking, the transmission fluid level
should be checked.
1. With the transaxle in PARK, the engine at idle, foot pressed on the brake, move the selector lever through
each gear and allow engagement of each gear. Place the selector lever in the PARK position.
2. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator cap and remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
3. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator with a clean cloth.
4. Install the transmission fluid level indicator back in the transmission fluid filler tube until it is fully
seated, then remove the indicator. The transmission fluid level should be within the normal operating
range.
Fig. 2: Identifying Transmission Fluid Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number Description
Correct
transmission
fluid level at
operating
temperature
80°C-93°C
(175°F-200°F)
Low
transmission
fluid level
High
transmission
fluid level
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:30 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
High Transmission Fluid Level
A transmission fluid level that is too high may cause the transmission fluid to become aerated due to the
churning action of the rotating internal parts. This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of
transmission fluid from the vent tube and possible transaxle malfunction and/or damage. If an overfill reading is
indicated, refer to AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
Low Transmission Fluid Level
A low transmission fluid level could result in poor transaxle engagement, slipping, malfunction and/or damage.
This could also indicate a leak in one of the transaxle seals or gaskets.
Adding Transmission Fluid
CAUTION: MERCON® V, MERCON® SP, Motorcraft Premium Automatic Transmission
Fluid, Motorcraft Continuously Variable Chain Type Transmission Fluid
and FNR5 Transmission Fluid are not interchangeable transmission fluids.
The use of any fluid other than what is recommended for this transaxle will
cause transaxle damage.
If transmission fluid needs to be added, add transmission fluid in 0.25L (1/2 pt) increments through the
transmission fluid level indicator tube. Do not overfill the transmission fluid. For transmission fluid type, refer
to the MATERIAL specification chart.
Transmission Fluid Condition Check
1. Check the transmission fluid level.
2. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be a dark red color, not
brown or black or have a burnt odor.
3. Hold the transmission fluid level indicator over a white facial tissue and allow the transmission fluid to
drip onto the facial tissue and examine the stain.
4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection.
5. If transmission fluid contamination or transaxle failure is confirmed by the sediment in the bottom of the
transmission fluid pan, repair the transaxle and clean the transmission fluid cooler tubes and the
transmission fluid cooler.
6. If the transaxle is to be overhauled or if installing a new transaxle, the transmission fluid cooler must be
backflushed. Refer to AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Disconnect Tool, Transmission
Cooler Line
307-569
MATERIAL
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Fig. 3: Exploded View Of Transmission Fluid Cooler With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
Description
Transmission fluid cooler tube fasteners
Radiator support
Transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
Transmission fluid cooler mounting
bracket bolts
Transmission fluid cooler mounting
brackets
Transmission fluid cooler
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL
CAUTION: MERCON® V, MERCON® SP, Motorcraft Premium Automatic Transmission
Fluid, Motorcraft Continuously Variable Chain Type Transmission Fluid
and FNR5 Transmission Fluid are not interchangeable transmission fluids.
The use of any transmission fluid other than what is recommended for this
transaxle will cause transaxle damage.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
3. Disconnect the 2 transmission fluid cooler tube fasteners from the radiator support.
Fig. 4: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fasteners On Radiator Support
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Using the special tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid cooler.
Fig. 6: Disconnecting Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes From Transmission Fluid Cooler Using
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Special Tool (307-569)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the 2 transmission fluid cooler support brackets.
Fig. 7: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Support Brackets & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the transmission fluid cooler.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the transmission fluid cooler in place.
2. Install the 2 transmission fluid cooler support brackets and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 8: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Support Brackets & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Connect the transmission fluid cooler tubes to the transmission fluid cooler.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes On Transmission Fluid Cooler
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the secondary latches on the transmission fluid cooler.
Fig. 10: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Connect the transmission fluid cooler tube fasteners to the radiator support.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fasteners On Radiator Support
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
7. Check the transmission fluid level and add transmission fluid as necessary.
TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER TUBES
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Disconnect Tool, Transmission
Cooler Line
307-569
MATERIAL
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Exploded View Of Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
-
Description
Electrical connector - mass air flow
(MAF) sensor
Tube assembly - crankcase vent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
17
18
19
-
20
-
Bolt - air cleaner bracket
Clamp - air cleaner outlet pipe
Air cleaner assembly
Fastener - wiring harness
Fastener - wiring harness
Bolts - battery tray
Battery tray
Transmission fluid cooler tube fasteners
Radiator support
Transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
Transmission fluid cooler
Transmission fluid cooler tube secondary
latches
Transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass
valve
Transmission fluid cooler tube bolts
Transmission fluid cooler tube fittings
Transmission fluid cooler outlet tube
Transmission fluid cooler return tube
Transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass
valve nuts
REMOVAL
CAUTION: MERCON® V, MERCON® SP, Motorcraft Premium Automatic Transmission
Fluid, Motorcraft Continuously Variable Chain Type Transmission Fluid
and FNR5 Transmission Fluid are not interchangeable transmission fluids.
The use of any transmission fluid other than what is recommended for this
transaxle will cause transaxle damage.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
3. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the
air cleaner assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe.
Fig. 14: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly.
Fig. 15: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner
outlet pipe assembly.
Fig. 17: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the battery. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
9. Remove the battery tray.
1. Disconnect the wiring harness fasteners.
2. Remove the 3 bolts and the battery tray.
Fig. 18: Identifying Wiring Harness Fasteners, Battery Tray & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
10. Disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tube fasteners from the radiator support.
Fig. 19: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fasteners On Radiator Support
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler.
Fig. 20: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Using the special tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid cooler.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 21: Disconnecting Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes From Transmission Fluid Cooler Using
Special Tool (307-569)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove the 2 secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler tubes at the transmission fluid cooler
thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 22: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Using the special tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid cooler
thermal bypass valve.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Disconnecting Transmission Cooling Tubes Using Special Tool (307-569)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH side shown, LH side similar.
15. Pull up on the tabs on both sides of the radiator support, position the radiator back and remove the
transmission fluid cooler tubes from the cooling module.
Fig. 24: Locating Tabs On Both Sides Of Radiator Support
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove and discard the 2 transmission fluid cooler tube bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 25: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Inspect the transaxle case to be sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seals and backing rings were
removed with the transmission fluid cooler tubes and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the
transmission fluid cooler tube seals or backing rings are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seals and
backing rings.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 26: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Seals & Backing Rings
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Loosen the 2 fluid cooler tube fittings and remove the 2 fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid
cooler thermal bypass valve and the transaxle.
Fig. 27: Locating Fluid Cooler Tube Fittings
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Remove the 2 nuts and the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 28: Locating Thermal Bypass Valve & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve in place and install the 2 nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 29: Locating Thermal Bypass Valve & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing rings and seals for damage and install new backing
rings or seals if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seals with clean transmission fluid
and install the backing rings and seals on the transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Item
1
2
Part Number Description
7D285
Seal
7J324
Backing ring
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 30: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Backing Ring & Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Position the 2 transmission fluid cooler tubes on the transaxle and tighten the 2 transmission fluid cooler
tube fittings.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 31: Locating Fluid Cooler Tube Fittings
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install 2 new transmission fluid cooler tube bolts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 32: Identifying Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH side shown, LH side similar.
5. Route the transmission fluid cooler tubes through the cooling module and fasten the upper radiator
brackets to the radiator support through the cooling module.
Fig. 33: Locating Tabs On Both Sides Of Radiator Support
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 34: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Install the 2 secondary latches on the transmission fluid cooler tubes at the transmission fluid cooler
thermal bypass valve.
Fig. 35: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Connect the transmission fluid cooler tubes to the transmission fluid cooler.
Fig. 36: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes On Transmission Fluid Cooler
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Install the secondary latches on the transmission fluid cooler.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 37: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Connect the transmission fluid cooler tube fasteners to the radiator support.
Fig. 38: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Fasteners On Radiator Support
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Install the battery tray.
1. Install the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Connect the wiring harness fasteners to the battery tray.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
Fig. 39: Identifying Wiring Harness Fasteners, Battery Tray & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install the battery. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND CABLES article.
13. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Fig. 40: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Fig. 41: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transaxle/Transmission Cooling - Edge & MKX
15. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly.
Fig. 42: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly.
Fig. 43: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 44: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
19. Check the transmission fluid level and add transmission fluid as necessary.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:53:31 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Horn - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Horn bolt
10
lb-in
89
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
HORN
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The horn system consists of the following components:
Horn switches (part of the steering wheel)
Clockspring
Horn relay (part of the SJB)
Horn
For removal and installation of the steering wheel, refer to STEERING COLUMN article.
For removal and installation of the SJB, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
Horn Location
The horn is mounted on the side of the RH wheel well under the front fender splash shield.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
HORN
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:43
11:05:39 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The SJB supplies the control and switched voltage to the horn relay (part of the SJB). When the horn switches
(part of the steering wheel) are pressed, ground is supplied through the clockspring to the horn relay. The horn
relay is then energized, directing voltage to the horn and enabling the horn to sound.
The horn switch is comprised of 2 sets of contacts separated by springs. The lower set is connected to ground
and the upper set is connected to the horn signal circuit. When the driver air bag module is pressed, it pushes
down on the upper set of contacts, collapsing the springs and allowing the contacts to touch. When the contacts
touch, it completes the circuit.
When the vehicle security system is armed, the SJB provides a momentary ground to the horn relay control side
to indicate the system is armed, and an on and off ground when an intrusion is detected or the panic alarm is
activated.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Horn
Steering wheel switch
harness
Horn switches (part of
the steering wheel)
Electrical
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse 24 (20A)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Clockspring
SJB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:39 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool release software.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the vehicle.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication with one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
The horn is inoperative
Action
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Horn
Clockspring
Steering wheel switch harness
Horn switches (part of the
steering wheel)
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
Smart junction box (SJB)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Clockspring
Steering wheel switch harness
Horn switches (part of the
steering wheel)
SJB
The horn is always on
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Horn Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article , Horn/Cigar Lighter for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) supplies the switched and control voltage to the horn relay (part of the SJB).
When the horn switches (part of the steering wheel) are pressed, the switches are grounded to the steering wheel
through circuit GD165 (BK), and the clockspring to the instrument panel cross-car beam through circuit GD116
(BK/VT). Ground is then supplied to the horn relay through circuit CRH02 (BU/WH), energizing the horn
relay. The horn relay then sends voltage to the horn through circuit CRH04 (VT/GN), enabling the horn to
sound. Ground for the horn is supplied through circuit GD123 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Horn
Clockspring
Steering wheel switch harness
Horn switches (part of the steering wheel)
SJB
PINPOINT TEST A: THE HORN IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
A1 CHECK THE SJB OUTPUT
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Select the SJB PID (HORN). Active command the horn on and then off.
Does the horn sound when commanded on?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : Go to A7.
A2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD165 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218b
Fig. 1: Checking Circuit GD165 (BK) For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218b-2, circuit GD165 (BK), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Clockspring C218a
Fig. 2: Checking Circuit GD116 (BK/VT) For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218a-7, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A4 CHECK CIRCUIT CRH02 (BU/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 3: Checking Circuit CRH02 (BU/WH) For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218a-8, circuit CRH02 (BU/WH), harness side
and the SJB C2280b-41, circuit CRH02 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 4: Checking Clockspring For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218a pin 7, component side and the clockspring
C218b pin 2, component side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Checking Clockspring For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218a pin 8, component side and the clockspring
C218b pin 1, component side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A6.
NO : INSTALL a new clockspring. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A6 CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH HARNESS FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Horn Switch C2996 and C2997
Fig. 6: Checking Steering Wheel Switch Harness For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218b-1, circuit CRH02 (BU/WH), harness side
and the horn switch C2996-1, circuit CRH02 (BU/WH), harness side; and between the clockspring
C218b-1, circuit CRH02 (BU/WH), harness side and the horn switch C2997-1, circuit CRH02
(BU/WH), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new steering wheel. REFER to STEERING COLUMN article. INSTALL the
driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
A7 CHECK CIRCUIT GD123 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Horn C131
Fig. 7: Checking Circuit GD123 (BK/GY) For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the horn C131-1, circuit GD123 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A8 CHECK CIRCUIT CRH04 (VT/GN) FOR VOLTAGE
Fig. 8: Checking Circuit CRH04 (VT/GN) For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the horn C131-2, circuit CRH04 (VT/GN), harness side, and the horn
C131-1, circuit GD123 (BK/GY), harness side, while pressing the horn switch.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new horn. REFER to Horn. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : VERIFY the SJB fuse 24 (20A) is OK. If OK, go to A9.
A9 CHECK CIRCUIT CRH04 (VT/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Checking Circuit CRH04 (VT/GN) For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280e-5 , circuit CRH04 (VT/GN), harness side, and the
horn C131-2, circuit CRH04 (VT/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A10.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A10 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test B: The Horn Is Always On
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article , Horn/Cigar Lighter for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) supplies the switched and control voltage to the horn relay (part of the SJB).
When the horn switches (part of the steering wheel) are pressed, the switches are grounded to the steering
wheel, and the clockspring to the instrument panel cross-car beam. Ground is then supplied to the horn relay
through circuit CRH02 (BU/WH), energizing the horn relay. The horn relay then sends voltage to the horn
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
through circuit CRH04 (VT/GN), enabling the horn to sound.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Clockspring
Steering wheel switch harness
Horn switches (part of the steering wheel)
SJB
PINPOINT TEST B: THE HORN IS ALWAYS ON
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
B1 CHECK CIRCUIT CRH04 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Key in ON position.
Does the horn continue to sound?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 CHECK THE HORN SWITCH INPUT
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Connect: SJB C2280e
Does the horn sound continuously?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : Go to B3.
B3 CHECK CIRCUIT CRH02 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Checking Circuit CRH02 (BU/WH) For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218a-8, circuit CRH02 (BU/WH), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
B4 CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Connect: Clockspring C218a
Disconnect: Clockspring C218b
Fig. 11: Checking Clockspring For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-41, circuit CRH02 (BU/WH), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : INSTALL a new clockspring. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
B5 CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Horn Switch C2996 and C2997
Fig. 12: Checking Steering Wheel Switch Harness For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring 218b-1, circuit CRH02 (BU/WH), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new steering wheel. REFER to STEERING COLUMN article. INSTALL the
driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
B6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HORN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Exploded View Of Horn Components (With Torque Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W706805
2
3
4
W605784
13832
Description
Front fender splash shield screws (RH) (5
required)
Horn electrical connector (part of 14290)
Horn bolt
Horn
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Horn - Edge & MKX
2. Remove the 5 RH front fender splash shield screws.
Pull the RH front fender splash shield downward to access the horn.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and the horn.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:05:40 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE
Starting System - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Starter motor bolt
Starter motor solenoid battery cable nut
Starter motor solenoid wire nut
Starter motor stud bolt
Transmission manual control lever nut
Nm
27
12
5
27
18
lb-ft
20
9
20
13
lb-in
44
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
STARTING SYSTEM
The starting system consists of the following:
Starter motor
Starter motor relay
Transmission range (TR) sensor
Battery
Ignition switch
PCM
Start diode
When the starter solenoid is energized, a magnetic field is created in the starter solenoid windings. The iron
plunger core is drawn into the starter solenoid coil, and a drive lever and pin connected to the starter drive
engages the drive pinion gear to the flexplate ring gear. When the plunger is pulled all the way in, its contact
disc closes the circuit between the battery and the motor feed terminals. This sends current to the motor, and the
drive pinion gear cranks the flexplate to start the engine. When current flows to the starter motor, the starter
solenoid pull-in coil is bypassed, and the hold-in coil keeps the drive pinion gear engaged with the flexplate.
An overrunning clutch in the starter drive protects the starter motor from excessive speeds during the brief
period before the driver releases the ignition switch from the START position as the engine starts.
The starting system uses a TR sensor located in the transmission. The TR sensor prevents operation of the
starter motor unless NEUTRAL or PARK is selected. The vehicle has one-touch integrated start (OTIS), a
computer-assisted cranking system. This feature assists in starting the engine. If the ignition key is turned to the
START position and released when the engine begins cranking, the engine may continue cranking for up to 10
seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:07
11:30:03 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
One-Touch Integrated Start (OTIS)
Once the ignition is turned to the START position and the vehicle is in NEUTRAL or PARK, the PCM reads
starter motor request (SMR) from the ignition switch and gains control of the starter engagement. The customer
is no longer in the loop after the initial crank request, the customer may release the key to the RUN/START
position. The PCM will disengage the starter motor based on the following events:
The engine is started (RPM threshold)
A set time has been exceeded (calibrated)
The ignition key has been turned to the OFF position
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
STARTING SYSTEM
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
73III Automotive Meter
Tool Number
105-R0057 or equivalent
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Principles of Operation
The starting system is electronically controlled by the passive anti-theft system (PATS). PATS is controlled by
the instrument cluster. PATS recognizes the correct electronically coded ignition key and the instrument cluster
sends a message to the PCM to provide a ground for the starter relay. The energized relay provides voltage to
the starter solenoid with the key in the START position, thereby allowing the starter motor to activate.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery before
disconnecting the starter motor battery terminal lead. If a tool is shorted
at the starter motor battery terminal, the tool can quickly heat enough to
cause a skin burn. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE:
The anti-theft system must be functioning correctly before a logical starting
system diagnosis can be carried out. Address anti-theft system concerns
before continuing.
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the starting system to duplicate the conditions.
2. Inspect to determine if any of the following mechanical or electrical concerns apply.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Starter motor
Starter motor bolts
Flexplate
Electrical
Battery
Open fuse
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 41 (30A)
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse 27 (20A)
Damaged wiring
harness
Starter relay
Anti-theft system
Loose or corroded
connections
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM.
If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to PCM DTC Chart or the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article.
If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to SYMPTOM CHART.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
PCM DTC CHART
DTC
Description
P0512
Starter Request Circuit - Circuit has
Power With the Ignition in the OFF
Position
Source
PCM
P0705
TR Sensor Circuit Failure
PCM
P0706
TR Sensor Circuit Failure
PCM
P0708
TR Sensor Circuit Failure
PCM
P0709
TR Sensor Circuit Failure
PCM
Action
CARRY OUT the Ignition Switch
Component Test. Refer to
COMPONENT TESTING. If
necessary, INSTALL a new ignition
switch. If the ignition switch passed
the component test, REPAIR circuit
CDC35 (BU/WH) for a short to
power.
Refer to the appropriate Automatic
Transmission article for the procedure.
Refer to the appropriate Automatic
Transmission article for the procedure.
Refer to the appropriate Automatic
Transmission article for the procedure.
Refer to the appropriate Automatic
Transmission article for the procedure.
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Source
Action
B1213
Anti-Theft Number of
Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
Programmed Keys is
- PASSIVE ANTIBelow Minimum
THEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
B1342
B1600
B1601
B1602
B1681
B2103
B2141
B2431
U0100
ECU is Defective
Instrument Cluster/PCM INSTALL a PCM. REFER
to ELECTRONIC
ENGINE CONTROLS
article.
Passive Anti-Theft
Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
- PASSIVE ANTISystem (PATS) Key
Transponder Signal is Not
THEFT SYSTEM
Received
(PATS) article.
PATS Received Incorrect Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
Key-Code From Ignition
- PASSIVE ANTIKey Transponder
THEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
PATS Received Invalid Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
Format of Key-Code
- PASSIVE ANTIFrom Ignition Key
THEFT SYSTEM
Transponder
(PATS) article.
PATS Transceiver
Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
Module Signal is Not
- PASSIVE ANTIReceived
THEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
Antenna Not Connected Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
- PASSIVE ANTITHEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
NVM Configuration
Instrument Cluster/PCM There is no PCM ID stored
Failure
in the instrument cluster.
CARRY OUT a parameter
reset of the instrument
cluster and PCM, then
CYCLE the ignition and
make an attempt to start
the vehicle. REFER to
Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) Parameter Reset in
ANTI-THEFT PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (PATS) article.
Transponder
Instrument Cluster/PCM VERIFY if the correct
Programming Failed
PATS key is being used. If
the PATS key is defective,
use a new key for
programming. REFER to
ANTI-THEFT PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (PATS) article.
Lost Communication
Instrument Cluster/PCM REFER to ANTI-THEFT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
With ECM/PCM
U2510
Antenna Not Connected
- PASSIVE ANTITHEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
Instrument Cluster/PCM If DTC U2511 is not
present also, CARRY OUT
a parameter reset of the
instrument cluster and the
PCM and CYCLE the
ignition 3-5 times, making
an attempt to start the
vehicle each key cycle.
REFER to ANTI-THEFT
- PASSIVE ANTITHEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) article.
Symptom Chart
SYMPTOM CHART
Condition
Possible Sources
The engine does not crank
One-touch integrated start
(OTIS) does not operate
correctly
The engine cranks slowly
Unusual starter noise
The starter spins but the
engine does not crank
Action
Battery
Fuse(s)
Starter motor
Circuitry
PCM
Starter motor relay
Ignition switch
Start diode
Anti-theft system
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Circuitry
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Battery
Starter motor
Circuitry
CARRY OUT the Starter
Motor Component Test.
Starter motor mounting
Starter motor
Incorrect starter drive
engagement
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Starter motor
INSPECT the starter motor
mounting and engagement.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
REPAIR as necessary.
-
Damaged flexplate teeth
INSPECT the flexplate for
damaged, missing or worn
teeth. REPAIR as necessary.
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Engine Does Not Crank
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Starting System schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, constant power is supplied to the starter motor relay from the battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 41 (30A). When the ignition switch is turned in the START position and held, with the vehicle in
PARK or NEUTRAL, power flows to the starter motor relay through CDC35 (BU/WH). A ground is supplied
through circuit CDC12 (YE) from the PCM causing the starter motor relay coil to energize and the relay
contacts close. This allows power to be supplied from the starter motor relay contacts which then flows through
circuit CDC25 (BN/GN) to the starter solenoid. The solenoid is grounded at the starter motor. Energizing the
starter solenoid will engage the starter drive into the ring gear and closes the solenoid contacts allowing power
directly from the battery through circuit SDC02 (RD) to the starter motor to start the engine.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Battery
Anti-theft system
Starter relay
Ignition switch
Circuitry
PCM
Start diode
PINPOINT TEST A: THE ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK
A1 CHECK THE BATTERY
Check the battery condition and charge. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND CABLES
article.
Is the battery OK?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : CHARGE or INSTALL a new battery as necessary. REFER to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A2 CHECK FOR PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) DTCs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Passive anti-theft system (PATS) DTCs are the only DTCs of concern
in this step. Only repair retrieved non-PATS DTCs if a customer
concern is reported.
Check for PATS DTCs.
Were any PATS DTCs retrieved?
YES : REFER to ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article to
diagnose the PATS DTCs.
NO : Go to A3.
A3 CHECK THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE
Fig. 1: Checking Battery Ground Cable
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the positive battery post and the battery ground cable connection at
the engine.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : INSTALL a new battery ground cable. REFER to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A4 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR GROUND
Fig. 2: Checking Starter Motor Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between the positive battery post and the starter motor case.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : CLEAN the starter motor mounting flange and make sure the starter motor is correctly
mounted. TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY TO THE STARTER MOTOR
Fig. 3: Checking Power Supply To Starter Motor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between starter motor C197A, circuit SDC02 (RD) and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A6.
NO : INSTALL a new positive battery cable. REFER to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A6 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR B-PIN
Fig. 4: Checking Starter Motor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect one end of a fused (30A) jumper wire to starter motor solenoid C197A, circuit SDC02
(RD). Momentarily connect the other end of the jumper to starter motor C197B, circuit CDC25
(BN/GN).
Did the starter motor engage and the engine crank?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to A7.
NO : INSTALL a new starter motor. REFER to STARTER MOTOR. TEST the system for
normal operation.
A7 CHECK STARTER MOTOR RELAY POWER
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements.
Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
Disconnect: Starter Motor Relay
Fig. 5: Measuring Voltage Between BJB Starter Relay Pin 30, Circuit SDC02 (RD) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between battery junction box (BJB) starter motor relay pin 30, harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A8.
NO : REPAIR or REPLACE the BJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
A8 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR RELAY
Carry out the Starter Motor Relay Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the starter motor relay pass the component test?
YES : Go to A9.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new starter motor relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
A9 CHECK THE CIRCUIT TO THE STARTER MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Starter Motor Solenoid C197B
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance Between BJB Starter Relay Pin 87, Circuit CDC25 (BN/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between starter motor solenoid S-terminal C197B, circuit CDC25 (BN/GN),
harness side and the BJB starter motor relay pin 87, circuit CDC25 (BN/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A10.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC25 (BN/GN). TEST the system for normal operation.
A10 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) FOR VOLTAGE
Connect: Starter Motor Solenoid C197B
Connect: Starter Motor Relay
Disconnect: Starter Diode
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between BJB starter diode cell, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH) and ground with the
ignition switch in the START position.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A13.
NO : Go to A11.
A11 CHECK CIRCUIT SBP27 (BU/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Ignition Switch C250
Fig. 8: Measuring Voltage Between Ignition Switch C250--4 And SBP27 (BU/RD)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ignition switch C250-4, circuit SBP27 (BU/RD), harness side and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A12.
NO : REPAIR circuit SBP27 (BU/RD). TEST the system for normal operation.
A12 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH
Carry out the Ignition Switch Component Test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the ignition switch pass the component test?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new ignition switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article.
TEST the system for normal operation.
A13 CHECK THE STARTER DIODE
Fig. 9: Identifying Starter Diode
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Carry out a Starter Diode Test.
Is the starter diode open or shorted?
YES : INSTALL a new starter diode. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to A14.
A14 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR RELAY ENABLE (STRT_RLY) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID STRT_RLY with the ignition switch in the START position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Does the PID change from DISABLED to ENABLED?
YES : Go to A17.
NO : Go to A15.
A15 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) BETWEEN THE BJB AND THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Starter Relay
Disconnect: PCM C175B
Disconnect: Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280B
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance Between BJB Starter Motor Relay Pin 85 And PCM C175b-35
Circuit CDC35
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the BJB starter motor relay pin 85, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH),
harness side and PCM C175b-35, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A16.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). TEST the system for normal operation.
A16 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) BETWEEN THE BJB AND THE SJB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance Between BJB Starter Motor Relay Pin 85 And SJB C2280B-32
Circuit CDC35
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the BJB starter motor relay pin 85, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH),
harness side and SJB C2280B-32, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
A17 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT DETECTED (SMC_MON) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID SMC_MON with the ignition switch in the START position.
Does the PID change from OFF to ON?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC12 (YE). TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test B: One-Touch Integrated Start (OTIS) Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Starting System schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
When the ignition switch is turned in the START position and released, the PCM receives a starter motor
request (SMR) signal through circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). With the vehicle in PARK or NEUTRAL, power flows
from the PCM to the starter motor relay through circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). A ground is supplied through circuit
CDC12 (YE) from the PCM causing the starter motor relay coil to energize and the relay contacts close. This
allows power from starter motor relay through circuit CDC25 (BN/GN) to the starter solenoid. The solenoid is
grounded at the starter motor. Energizing the starter solenoid will engage the starter drive into the ring gear and
closes the solenoid contacts allowing power directly from the battery through circuit SDC02 (RD) to the starter
motor to start the engine. The customer is no longer in the loop after the initial crank request, the customer may
release the key to the RUN/START position. The PCM will disengage the starter motor based on engine
running (rpm threshold), a set crank time has been exceeded or the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF
position.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Circuitry
PCM
PINPOINT TEST B: ONE-TOUCH INTEGRATED START (OTIS) DOES NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY
B1 CHECK THE STATUS OF ONE-TOUCH INTEGRATED START (OTIS) (OTS_STAT) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID OTS_STAT with the ignition switch in the RUN position.
Is the OTIS PID enabled?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : ENABLE OTIS. TEST the system for normal operation. If OTIS will not enable, INSTALL a
new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST the system for
normal operation.
B2 CHECK THE KEY POSITION FOR START INDICATED (START_KEY) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID START_KEY with the ignition switch in the START position.
Does the PID change from OFF to ON?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : Go to B3.
B3 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH)
Disconnect: Start Diode
Disconnect: PCM C175B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance Between Start Diode Cell Circuit CDC35 And PCM C175B-35
Circuit CDC35
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the start diode cell, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side and
PCM C175B-35, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). TEST the system for normal operation.
B4 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR RELAY ENABLE (STRT_RLY) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID STRT_RLY with the ignition switch in the START position.
Does the PID change from DISABLED to ENABLED?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : Go to B5.
B5 CHECK CIRCUIT CDC35 (BU/WH) BETWEEN THE BJB AND THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: PCM C175B
Disconnect: SJB C2280B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance Between BJB Starter Motor Relay Pin 85 And PCM C175b-35
Circuit CDC35
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the BJB starter motor relay pin 85, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH),
harness side and PCM C175b-35, circuit CDC35 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit CDC35 (BU/WH). TEST the system for normal operation.
B6 CHECK THE STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT DETECTED (SMC_MON) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger/PID
Monitor the PCM PID SMC_MON with the ignition switch in the START position.
Does the PID change from OFF to ON?
YES : REPAIR circuit CDC12 (YE). TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test C: Unusual Starter Noise
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Starter motor
Ring gear
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST C: UNUSUAL STARTER NOISE
C1 CHECK THE STARTER MOUNTING
Inspect the starter mounting bolts for looseness.
Is the starter motor mounted correctly?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : INSTALL the starter motor correctly. REFER to STARTER MOTOR. TEST the system for
normal operation.
C2 CHECK FOR ENGINE NOISE
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 14: Inspecting Starter Motor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a remote starter switch between the starter solenoid B- and S-terminals.
Engage the starter motor and verify the noise is due to the starter operation.
Is the noise due to the starter motor engagement?
YES : Go to C3.
NO : REFER to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to continue
diagnosis.
C3 CHECK FOR UNUSUAL WEAR
Remove the starter motor.
Inspect the ring gear for damaged or worn teeth. Refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
Is the noise due to ring gear tooth damage?
YES : INSTALL a new flexplate ring gear. REFER to ENGINE - 3.5L article. EXAMINE the
starter pinion teeth. If damaged, INSTALL a new starter motor. REFER to Starter Motor. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new starter motor. REFER to STARTER MOTOR. TEST the system for
normal operation.
Component Tests
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery before
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
disconnecting the starter motor battery terminal lead. If a tool is shorted
at the starter motor battery terminal, the tool can quickly heat enough to
cause a skin burn. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
Always make the 73III Automotive Meter connections at the component terminal rather than at the wiring end
connector. Making a connection at the wiring end connector could result in false readings because the meter
will not pick up a high resistance between the wiring connector and the component.
Starter Motor - Motor Feed Circuit
1. Make sure the battery is fully charged; carry out a battery load test. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch.
3. Connect a remote starter switch between the starter solenoid S-terminal and the battery positive (+)
terminal.
4. Connect the 73III Automotive Meter positive lead to the battery positive (+) post. Connect the negative
lead to the starter solenoid M-terminal.
Fig. 15: Identifying S, M & B Terminals, 73III Automotive Meter, Battery, Remote Starter Switch
& Motor Feed Circuit
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part Number
10653
-
Description
S-terminal
Remote starter switch
Battery
73III Automotive Meter
B-terminal
M-terminal
5. Engage the remote starter switch. Read and record the voltage. The voltage reading should be 0.5 volt or
less.
6. If the voltage reading is 0.5 volt or less, go to the starter motor-ground circuit component test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
7. If the voltage reading is greater than 0.5 volt, this is an indication of excessive resistance in the
connections, the positive battery cable or in the starter solenoid. Move the 73III Automotive Meter
negative lead to the starter solenoid B-terminal and repeat the test. If the voltage reading at the B-terminal
is lower than 0.5 volt, the concern is either in the connections at the starter solenoid or in the solenoid
contacts.
Fig. 16: Identifying S, M & B Terminals, 73III Automotive Meter, Battery & Remote Starter
Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part Number
10653
-
Description
S-terminal
Remote starter switch
Battery
73III Automotive Meter
B-terminal
M-terminal
8. Remove the cables from solenoid B-, S- and M-terminals. Clean the cables and connections and reinstall
the cables to the correct terminals. Repeat Steps 3 through 6. If the voltage drop reading is still greater
than 0.5 volt when checked at the M-terminal or less than 0.5 volt when checked at the B-terminal, the
concern is in the solenoid contacts. Install a new starter motor.
9. If the voltage reading taken at the solenoid B-terminal is still greater than 0.5 volt after cleaning the
cables and connections at the solenoid, the concern is either in the positive (+) battery cable connection or
in the positive battery cable itself.
10. Clean the positive (+) battery cable connection. If this does not solve the problem, install a new positive
battery cable.
Starter Motor - Ground Circuit
A slow cranking condition can be caused by resistance in the ground or return portion of the cranking circuit.
Check the voltage drop in the ground circuit as follows:
1. Connect the 73III Automotive Meter positive lead to the starter motor housing (the connection must be
clean and free of rust or grease). Connect the negative lead to the negative (-) battery terminal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
2. Engage the remote starter switch and crank the engine. Read and record the voltage reading. The reading
should be 0.2 volt or less.
3. If the voltage drop is more than 0.2 volt, clean the negative cable connections at the battery, the body
ground connections and the starter ground connection. Retest.
4. If the voltage drop is greater than 0.2 volt, install a new cable. If the voltage reading is less than 0.2 volt
and the engine still cranks slowly, install a new starter motor.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
STARTER MOTOR
Fig. 17: Exploded View Of Starter Motor Components With Torque Specification (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7E395
7H181
3
4
W520103
7A257
Description
Transmission shift cable adjustment lock
Transmission shift cable rotating slide
snap
Transmission manual control lever nut
Transmission manual control lever
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Exploded View Of Starter Motor Components With Torque Specifications (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
5
Part Number
11N087
6
7
W706414
14463
8
9
N805320
14463
10
11
12
13
13A506
W711515
W503320
11000
Description
Starter motor solenoid battery cable
terminal cover
Starter motor solenoid battery cable nut
Starter motor solenoid battery cable (part
of 14B060)
Starter motor solenoid wire nut
Starter motor solenoid wire (part of
14B060)
Wire harness retainer (part of 14B060)
Starter motor stud bolt
Starter motor bolt
Starter motor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery before
disconnecting the starter motor battery terminal lead. If a tool is shorted
at the starter motor battery terminal, the tool can quickly heat enough to
cause a skin burn. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Starting System - Edge & MKX
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
2. Remove the air cleaner. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION AND
FILTERING article.
3. Disconnect the transmission shift cable and adjustment lock from the transmission manual control lever.
4. Disconnect the transmission shift cable rotating slide snap and position aside the transmission cable.
5. Remove the nut and the transmission manual control lever.
To install, tighten to 18 N.m (13 lb-ft).
6. Remove the starter motor terminal cover.
7. Remove the starter motor solenoid battery cable nut.
To install, tighten to 12 N.m (9 lb-ft).
8. Remove the starter motor solenoid wire nut.
To install, tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
9. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the starter motor stud bolt and position the wiring harness aside.
10. Remove the starter motor bolt, stud bolt and the starter.
To install, tighten to 27 N.m (20 lb-ft).
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:30:03 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Dow Urethane Adhesive
Betaseal® Express
Dow Urethane One Step Glass Primer
Betaprime® 5500/5500A/5500SA
PTFE Lubricant
XG-8
Sika Urethane Adhesive
Sika Tack ASAP
Sika Urethane Metal and Glass Primer
Sika 206 G+P
Silicone Spray Lubricant
XL-6
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
ZC-23
Specification
Fill Capacity
-
-
-
-
ESB-M1C111-B
-
-
-
-
-
ESR-M13P4-A
-
ESR-M14P5-A
-
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Air deflector catcher bracket screws
Air deflector-to-track screws
Front drive tube bracket-to-guide track screws
Front guide track-to-housing fasteners
Front idler track-to-housing fasteners
Front sunshade carrier center screws
Front sunshade carrier outer screws
Rear drive tube bracket-to-housing screws
Rear idler track-to-housing fasteners
Rear shade track-to-drive tube bracket fasteners
Rear shade track-to-housing screws
Rear sunshade carrier-to-housing fasteners
Roof opening panel glass front screws
Roof opening panel glass rear screws
Shade motor retaining screws
Sliding glass motor retaining screws
Nm
2
2
5
5
4
6
5
5
4
5
5
5
8
8
5
5
lb-in
18
18
44
44
35
53
44
44
35
44
44
44
71
71
44
44
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:44
11:09:39 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ROOF OPENING PANEL
The roof opening panel consists of the following:
Air deflector
Concertina blinds
Fixed glass front seal
Fixed glass side seals
Front shade assembly
Front trim panel
Front trim panel seal
Guide track and mechanism
Idler track and mechanism
Motor wiring harness
Overhead console control switch
Rear shade assembly
Roof opening panel fixed glass
Roof opening panel shade motor
Roof opening panel sliding glass
Roof opening panel sliding glass motor
Rear trim ring assembly
Shade motor block and drive tube assembly
Shade track and mechanism
Sliding front panel motor block and drive tube assembly
Sliding glass primary seal
Side trim panel
Side trim panel seals
The roof opening panel consists of an electronically operated sliding glass panel and electronically operated
sunshades that can be opened or closed by pressing a switch located on the overhead console. The sliding glass
panel has one-touch open, one-touch close and one-touch vent open features. The shades have a one-touch-open
feature.
The front and rear shades operate together with a 80 mm (3.14 in) delay in the closing of the rear shade to the
front. The sunshade may be in any position when the sliding glass panel is in the closed position. The shades
will open a proportional amount when the sliding glass panel is in any position between closed and fully open.
With the sliding glass panel in the fully OPEN position, the shades are disabled to prevent wind damage.
When the sliding glass panel is in the fully CLOSED position, pressing the overhead console roof opening panel
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
control switch rearward to the second detent and then releasing it will activate the one-touch open feature and
the glass panel will open to the comfort position. Pressing the switch a second time will move the glass to the
fully OPEN position. The one-touch open feature can be canceled any time the sliding glass is moving by
pressing the roof opening panel control switch in either direction.
With the sliding glass panel in any open position except VENT, rocking the roof opening panel control switch
forward and then releasing it will activate the one-touch close feature. Pressing the roof opening panel control
switch in either direction with the roof opening panel moving will cancel the one-touch close operation and the
motion will immediately stop.
If an obstacle contacts the leading edge of the sliding glass panel during one-touch close operation, the roof
opening panel glass will reverse direction and open to approximately the mid position and stop. The operator
cannot stop this open motion once it has begun.
If an obstacle contacts the leading edge of the roof opening panel glass during one-touch vent close operation,
the roof opening panel glass will reverse direction to the VENT position.
When the sliding glass panel is in the fully CLOSED position, pressing the roof opening panel control tilt
switch and then releasing it will activate the one-touch vent feature. To vent the sliding glass panel from any
position, press and hold the tilt switch. To close, press and hold the roof opening panel control switch in the
forward position.
Global Open - MKX Only - The smart junction box (SJB) sends a signal on the global open circuit, to the roof
opening panel motor, to open or close the windows based on a signal received from the remote keyless entry
(RKE) transmitter. If the accessory delay relay is active, the global open feature will not operate.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
ROOF OPENING PANEL
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
73III Automotive Meter
Tool Number
105-R0057 or equivalent
Principles of Operation
Roof Opening Panel Shade - The roof opening panel assembly uses an integrated motor and module to operate
the roof opening panel shades. The roof opening panel shade can be opened or closed by the shade control
switch. Pressing the shade control switch in either the OPEN or CLOSE position supplies a ground to the roof
opening panel shade motor/module. The shade panels are equipped with express open and close features. A
short press of the shade control switch will cause the shade panel to express open to the full open position or
close to the safety stop position. The shade will not close when the roof opening panel is open.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Any glass opening operation will first fully open the shade panels. Before the
shade panels may be closed, the glass panel must be fully closed.
The roof opening panel shade motor must be initialized when one of the following occurs:
The replacement or removal of the drive system
Excessive false stalls are encountered
The shade(s) are removed or replaced
The shade motor becomes de-initialized (will stutter step open)
The roof opening sliding glass panel motor must be initialized when one of the following occur:
The replacement or removal of the drive system
Excessive false stalls are encountered
The sliding glass panel is removed
The sliding glass motor becomes de-initialized (will stutter step open and have no express operation)
Roof Opening Panel - The roof opening panel assembly uses an integrated motor and module to operate the
roof opening panel sliding glass. The roof opening panel sliding glass can be opened, closed or tilted by the roof
opening panel control switch. Pressing the open, close or tilt switch grounds those inputs to the glass panel
motor/module. Momentarily pressing the tilt switch will cause the glass panel to express open to the VENT
position if the glass panel is closed or cause the glass panel to close to the VENT position if the glass panel is in
the slide open range and the tilt switch is pressed and held. Pressing and holding the control switch forward will
close the glass panel (the safety stop position is skipped in manual mode). The glass panel has express open and
close features that are activated when the switch is momentarily pressed to the double detent OPEN or CLOSE
positions. Express open operation will first open the glass panel to the comfort stop position. Pressing the
switch again will cause the glass to move to the full open position. Pressing the switch again will cause the glass
to move to the full open position. Express close operation will move the glass panel to the full closed position.
NOTE:
Any glass opening operation will first fully open the shade panels. Before the
shade panels may be closed, the glass panel must be fully closed.
The shade motor and sliding glass panel motor have 3 thermal operating modes:
Full function: In their fully functioning state, the motors allow all normal operations of the shades and
glass.
Reduced function: If either motor begins to overheat, it will enter a reduced function mode. No express
operation is possible and it will allow open or close motion in steps of 50.8 mm (2 in).
No function: Excessive heating causes no function mode. The motor will not operate in the close
direction, but will open in steps of 50.8 mm (2 in). Once the open position is reached, the motor shuts
itself down until it is sufficiently cooled.
Global Open - MKX only - When the unlock button of the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter is held for 2
seconds the global open activates. The smart junction box (SJB) sends a signal to activate the one-touch open
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
operation of the roof opening panel. The global open feature does not operate if the delay accessory is active.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Roof opening panel
sliding glass
Roof opening panel
fixed glass
Roof opening panel
front trim
Roof opening panel side
trim
Roof opening panel
blind
Roof opening panel air
deflector assembly
Roof opening panel
track(s)
Roof opening panel seal
(s)
Roof opening panel
shade(s)
Roof opening panel
module assembly
Overhead console
Headliner
Electrical
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 18 (30A)
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse(s):
17 (20A)
41 (15A)
Circuitry
Accessory delay relay
Roof opening panel
switch
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
4. If the concern is not visually evident, determine the symptom. Go to Symptom Chart - Roof Opening
Panel or Go to Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH).
Symptom Chart - Roof Opening Panel
Symptom Chart - Roof Opening Panel
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Roof opening panel primary
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
The roof opening panel
leaks
The roof opening panel
does not open or close
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Circuitry
Roof opening panel switch
Roof opening sliding glass
panel motor/module
Roof opening panel shade
motor not initialized
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Circuitry
Roof opening panel switch
Roof opening panel shade
motor/module
Roof opening panel shade
motor not initialized
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Roof opening panel shade
motor not initialized
Roof opening sliding glass
panel motor/module
Roof opening panel control
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
The roof opening panel
shade does not open or
close - both shades
The express open/close
feature is inoperative
CHECK the roof opening
panel drain channels for
blockage. REFER to Water
Drainage System Check
and Water Leak
Corrections.
Fuse(s)
Circuitry
Roof opening panel switch
Roof opening sliding glass
panel motor/module
Accessory delay relay
The roof opening panel
does not open in the
VENT position
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Roof opening panel drain
channel blockage
seal
Roof opening panel fixed rear
glass urethane seal
Roof opening panel front trim
Windshield
Antenna
Roof opening panel module
assembly
Circuitry
Roof opening sliding glass
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
The global open function
is inoperative
Roof opening panel
reverses during operation
panel motor/module
Smart junction box (SJB)
Remote keyless entry (RKE)
transmitters
Roof opening sliding glass
panel motor not initialized
Mechanism mistimed
Binding or foreign material in
the guide or tracks
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
REFER to Timing
Adjustment.
REMOVE the obstruction or
CLEAN the foreign material
from the guide or tracks.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
NOTE:
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) symptoms should be identified using the
diagnostic tools that are available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of
their uses and a glossary of common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article. Since it is possible any one of multiple systems may be
the cause of a symptom, it may be necessary to use a process of elimination
type of diagnostic approach to pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the
causal system for the symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article for the next likely system and continue diagnosis.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Condition
Possible Sources
The roof opening panel
has excessive wind noise
Action
Roof opening panel primary seal
Roof opening panel front trim
panel seal
Roof opening panel side trim
panel seals
Roof opening panel fixed glass
seal
Air deflector assembly
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Roof opening panel sliding glass
Roof opening sliding glass panel
motor/module
Roof opening panel shade
motor/module
Roof opening sliding glass panel
motor block and drive tube
assembly
Roof opening panel shade motor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
The roof opening panel
rattles
The roof opening panel is
noisy during operation
block and drive tube assembly
Roof opening panel guide tracks
Roof opening panel shade tracks
Roof opening panel rear trim ring
Roof opening panel motor wiring
harness
Roof opening panel air deflector
assembly
Roof opening panel module
assembly
Overhead console
Headliner
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Roof opening panel sliding glass
Roof opening panel guide tracks
Roof opening panel shade tracks
Roof opening sliding glass panel
motor/module
Roof opening panel shade
motor/module
Roof opening sliding glass panel
motor block and drive tube
assembly
Roof opening panel shade motor
block and drive tube assembly
Overhead console
Headliner
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Roof Opening Panel has Excessive Wind Noise
Normal Operation
When the roof opening panel glass is completely closed, it is flush with the roof panel and correctly sealed.
When the roof opening panel glass is in the VENT position, the leading edge of the glass panel should contact
the primary seal.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Damaged or poorly fitting roof opening panel primary seal
Damaged or poorly fitting roof opening panel fixed glass front seal
Damaged or poorly fitting roof opening panel front trim panel seal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Damaged or poorly fitting roof opening panel side trim panel seal
Damaged or poorly fitting roof opening panel fixed glass side seal
Damaged or poorly fitting deflector assembly
PINPOINT TEST A: THE ROOF OPENING PANEL HAS EXCESSIVE WIND NOISE
A1 VERIFY ROOF OPENING PANEL NOISE
NOTE:
It is normal to have some amount of wind noise when the roof
opening panel is in the OPEN position. To determine if the wind noise
is excessive, road test the vehicle at approximately 100 km/h (62
mph) with the roof opening panel closed, a single rear door window
OPEN and all remaining door windows closed while observing the
level of wind noise. If the level of wind noise observed with the roof
opening panel OPEN (with all door windows closed) is greater than
the wind noise observed with a single rear door window open, the
wind noise is excessive.
Road test the vehicle with the roof opening panel in the CLOSED, VENT and OPEN positions.
Is the wind noise present only in the OPEN position?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : Go to A2.
A2 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL GLASS SEALS
NOTE:
When the roof opening panel sliding glass is in the VENT position, it
is important that the leading edge of the glass is in contact with the
sliding glass primary seal.
Check the roof opening panel front trim seal, sliding glass primary seal and fixed glass seal to make
sure they are fitted properly and not damaged.
Are the roof opening panel front trim seal, sliding glass primary seal and fixed glass seal OK?
YES : CHECK for other vehicle conditions that could be causing the excessive wind noise. For
example, aftermarket windshield wipers, side-view mirrors, HVAC door behind glove
compartment, HVAC louvers in instrument panel, or antenna base to trim panel. REPAIR as
necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL or REPAIR the roof opening panel seal(s) in question as necessary. REFER to
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View or Roof Opening Panel Seal - Primary. TEST the system
for normal operation.
A3 CHECK THE SLIDING GLASS PRIMARY SEAL
Make sure the air deflector is not damaged and is securely attached.
Is the air deflector OK?
YES : PARTIALLY close the roof opening panel until the noise is eliminated. If the noise is
eliminated, INFORM the customer that changing glass location will eliminate the wind noise. If the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
wind noise is not eliminated, INSTALL a new air deflector. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Exploded View and Air Deflector. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL new air deflector assembly. REFER to Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View and
Air Deflector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test B: The Roof Opening Panel Leaks
Normal Operation
The roof opening panel module assembly has 2 drain channels which are located under the side trim panels to
direct water externally to the front and rear corners of the roof. There are no drain hoses in this system. When
the roof opening panel glass is completely closed, it is flush with the roof panel and correctly sealed.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Damaged or poorly sealed roof opening panel primary seal
Poorly sealed fixed rear glass
Poorly sealed windshield
Poorly sealed antenna
Poorly sealed front trim panel
Incorrect installation or damaged roof opening panel module assembly
PINPOINT TEST B: THE ROOF OPENING PANEL LEAKS
B1 VERIFY THE LEAK LOCATION
Lower the headliner. Refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND ORNAMENTATION article.
Check the roof opening panel and windshield for leaks.
Is the leak coming from the windshield?
YES : RESEAL the windshield. REFER to GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS article.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 VERIFY THE ROOF OPENING PANEL LEAK LOCATION
Check the front and rear areas of the roof opening panel for leaks.
Is the leak coming from the rear fixed glass panel area of the roof opening panel?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : Go to B3.
B3 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL PRIMARY SEAL CONDITION
Check the roof opening panel primary seal for damage and correct installation. Carefully pull up on
the seal to verify correct adhesion.
Is the roof opening panel primary seal OK?
YES : Go to B5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new roof opening panel primary seal. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Exploded View and Roof Opening Panel Seal - Primary . TEST the system for normal operation.
B4 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL FIXED REAR GLASS URETHANE SEAL
Check the roof opening panel fixed rear glass urethane seal for damage.
Is the roof opening panel fixed rear glass urethane seal OK?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : If the leak is at the front or sides of the fixed glass panel, it is possible to re-seal the area from
the inside by removing the trim ring. If re-sealing the area does not correct the problem or the leak
is at the rear of the fixed glass panel, REMOVE and REINSTALL the existing rear fixed glass
assembly. REFER to Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View and Roof Opening Panel Glass Rear Fixed. TEST the system for normal operation.
B5 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL FRONT TRIM AND ANTENNA SEAL
Check the antenna seal and roof opening panel front trim urethane seal for damage.
Is the roof opening panel front trim and antenna seal OK?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : For the antenna seal, REFER to INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS
article. For the front trim panel, REFER to Roof Opening Panel Trim - Front . TEST the system
for normal operation.
B6 CHECK THE CONDITION OF THE ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE ASSEMBLY
Check the roof opening panel module assembly for damage.
Is the roof opening panel module assembly OK?
YES : INSPECT other areas of the vehicle that may cause water to enter the roof area, such as the
windshield or the rear window.
NO : INSTALL a new roof opening panel module assembly. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Exploded View, Roof Opening Panel Frame and Roof Opening Panel Module . TEST the system
for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test C: The Roof Opening Panel Rattles
Normal Operation
When the roof opening panel glass is completely closed, it is flush with the roof panel. All components should
be secured correctly.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Roof opening panel sliding glass
Roof opening panel air deflector assembly
Roof opening panel guide tracks
Roof opening panel shade tracks
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module
Roof opening panel shade motor/module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor block and drive tube assembly
Roof opening panel shade motor block and drive tube assembly
Roof opening panel module assembly
Roof opening panel rear trim ring
Roof opening panel motor wiring harness
Overhead console
Headliner
PINPOINT TEST C: THE ROOF OPENING PANEL RATTLES
C1 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL TIGHTNESS
Open the roof opening sliding glass panel.
Manually push up and fore/aft on the roof opening sliding glass panel.
Is the roof opening sliding glass panel loose?
YES : TIGHTEN the roof opening sliding glass panel. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Glass Front Sliding. TEST the system for normal operation. If the glass panel still has movement after
tightening the roof opening sliding glass panel screws, the guide shoes for the idler mechanism
and/or front guide track mechanism may be damaged. REPAIR or INSTALL a new idler
mechanism or front guide track and mechanism as necessary. REFER to Roof Opening Panel
Idler Track Mechanism and Roof Opening Panel Guide Track and Mechanism.
NO : Go to C2.
C2 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL REAR TRIM RING
Verify that the roof opening panel rear trim ring is not damaged and is securely fastened.
Is the roof opening panel rear trim ring OK?
YES : Go to C3.
NO : REINSTALL the roof opening panel rear trim ring or INSTALL a new roof opening panel
rear trim ring. REFER to Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View or Roof Opening Panel Trim Fixed Glass, Interior. TEST the system for normal operation.
C3 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL TRACKS
Verify that the roof opening panel guide tracks, shade tracks and idler tracks and mechanism are
not damaged and are securely fastened.
Are the roof opening panel tracks OK?
YES : Go to C4.
NO : REPAIR or TIGHTEN the roof opening panel track that is affected. If the roof opening panel
track cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new roof opening panel track. REFER to Roof Opening
Panel - Exploded View, Roof Opening Panel Guide Track and Mechanism, Roof Opening
Panel Idler Track Mechanism, Roof Opening Panel Idler Track and Mechanism or Roof
Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism. TEST the system for normal operation.
C4 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL SUNSHADES
Check the roof opening panel sunshades for correct installation or damage.
Are the roof opening panel sunshades OK?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to C5.
NO : REINSTALL the roof opening panel shade or INSTALL a new roof opening panel shade.
REFER to Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View and Roof Opening Panel Shade Assembly.
TEST the system for normal operation.
C5 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL AIR DEFLECTOR ASSEMBLY
Check the roof opening panel air deflector assembly for correct installation or damage.
Is the roof opening panel air deflector assembly OK?
YES : Go to C6.
NO : REINSTALL the roof opening panel air deflector assembly or INSTALL a new roof opening
panel air deflector assembly. REFER to Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View and Air Deflector.
TEST the system for normal operation.
C6 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING SLIDING GLASS PANEL AND SHADE MOTORS
Check the roof opening sliding glass panel and shade motors for correct installation or damage.
Are the roof opening sliding glass panel and shade motors OK?
YES : Go to C7.
NO : REINSTALL the roof opening sliding glass panel and/or shade motors. TIGHTEN to the
correct torque specification. If the roof opening sliding glass panel motor or shade motor is still
loose or damaged, INSTALL a new roof opening sliding glass panel motor or shade motor. REFER
to Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View, Roof Opening Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel or
Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades. TEST the system for normal operation.
C7 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING SLIDING GLASS PANEL AND SHADE MOTOR BLOCK
AND DRIVE TUBE ASSEMBLIES
Check the roof opening sliding glass panel motor and shade motor block and drive tube assemblies
for correct installation or damage.
Are the roof opening sliding glass panel and shade motor block and drive tube assemblies
OK?
YES : Go to C8.
NO : REINSTALL the roof opening sliding glass panel or shade motor block and drive tube
assembly. TIGHTEN to the correct torque specification. If the roof opening sliding glass panel or
shade motor block and drive tube assembly is damaged, INSTALL a roof opening sliding glass
panel or shade motor block and drive tube assembly. REFER to Roof Opening Panel - Exploded
View, Roof Opening Panel Motor Block and Drive Tube Assembly - Sliding Front Panel or
Roof Opening Panel Motor Block and Drive Tube Assembly - Shades. TEST the system for
normal operation.
C8 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL ASSEMBLY FOR RATTLES
Check the roof opening panel assembly for any loose parts or for any condition that will cause
rattles.
Are there any conditions that will cause rattles?
YES : CHECK for correct routing of the roof opening panel motor wiring harness. REFER to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Wiring Harness. If the roof opening panel motor wiring harness is OK,
INSTALL a suitable sound damper material to correct the condition. If the rattle still persists,
INSTALL a new roof opening panel module assembly. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Exploded View and Roof Opening Panel Module. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSPECT other areas of the vehicle that may cause rattles in the roof area, such as the
headliner, roof opening panel motor wiring harness, overhead console, rear wiper hose to headliner
or rear dome light. REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test D: The Roof Opening Panel is Noisy During Operation
Normal Operation
The roof opening panel operates smoothly and quietly while opening and closing.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Roof opening panel sliding glass
Roof opening panel air deflector assembly
Roof opening panel sliding glass tracks
Roof opening panel shade tracks
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module
Roof opening panel shade motor/module
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor block and drive tube assembly
Roof opening panel shade motor block and drive tube assembly
Roof opening panel module assembly
Headliner
Overhead console
PINPOINT TEST D: THE ROOF OPENING PANEL IS NOISY DURING OPERATION
D1 VERIFY THE ROOF OPENING PANEL SHADE OPERATION
NOTE:
Before performing this pinpoint test, make sure the front guide tracks
are free from any foreign material.
With the roof opening panel glass fully closed, open and close the shades while observing the
noise.
Is the noise present during shade operation?
YES : Go to D3.
NO : Go to D2.
D2 VERIFY THE ROOF OPENING PANEL OPERATION
With the shades fully open, open and close the roof opening sliding glass panel while observing the
noise.
Is the noise present during sliding glass operation?
YES : If the noise occurs during primary seal engagement only, apply silicone spray lubricant to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
the primary seal. TEST the system for normal operation. If noise is still present, INSTALL a new
primary seal. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Seal - Primary.
If the noise occurs during transition to VENT only, carefully spray PTFE lubricant to the front
mechanism. TEST the system for normal operation.
If the noise occurs only while the air deflector is moving downward, LUBRICATE the air deflector
arm and spring. TEST the system for normal operation. If noise is still present, INSTALL a new air
deflector assembly. REFER to Air Deflector. If noise is still present, INSTALL new front drive
track and mechanisms. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Guide Track and Mechanism .
If the noise sounds like a muffled ratchet/purr, INSTALL a new sliding glass motor block and drive
tube assembly. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor Block and Drive Tube Assembly Sliding Front Panel.
If none of the above conditions apply, INSTALL a new roof opening sliding glass panel motor.
REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : The roof opening panel is operating correctly at this time.
D3 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL FRONT SHADE
With the front shade disconnected, open and close the rear shade.
Is the noise still present?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : INSTALL a new front shade assembly. REFER to Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
and Roof Opening Panel Shade Assembly. TEST the system for normal operation.
D4 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL REAR SHADE
With the front and rear shade disconnected, open and close the shades.
Is the noise still present?
YES : If the noise sounds like a muffled ratchet/purr, INSTALL a new LH and RH shade track
assembly and shade motor block and tube assembly. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Shade Track
and Mechanism and Roof Opening Panel Motor Block and Drive Tube Assembly - Shades.
TEST the system for normal operation. If the noise is still present, INSTALL a new LH and RH
guide track and mechanism. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Guide Track and Mechanism.
If the above condition does not apply, INSTALL a new shade motor. REFER to Roof Opening
Panel Motor - Shades. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new rear shade assembly. REFER to Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View and
Roof Opening Panel Shade Assembly. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test E: The Roof Opening Panel Does Not Open or Close
The roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module must be initialized whenever the roof opening sliding glass
panel motor/module has been removed from the roof opening panel system, a new roof opening sliding glass
panel motor/module has been installed or a new roof opening panel module assembly has been installed. Refer
to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Roof Opening Panel for schematic and connector
information.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Normal Operation
The roof opening panel uses an integrated motor and module to operate the roof opening panel sliding glass.
The roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module receives voltage from the accessory delay relay through
circuit CBP41 (BU) when the key is in the ACC or RUN position and voltage at all times through circuit
SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is supplied to the roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module through circuit
GD133 (BK). The roof opening panel switch receives ground from the roof opening panel motor/module
assembly through circuit GD133 (BK). When the roof opening panel open switch is pressed, the roof opening
panel switch grounds circuit CPR31 (VT/BN) and the roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module opens the
roof opening panel sliding glass. When the roof opening panel close switch is pressed, the roof opening panel
switch grounds circuit CPR40 (YE/OG) and the roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module closes the roof
opening panel sliding glass.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Roof opening panel switch
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module
Accessory delay relay
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor not initialized
PINPOINT TEST E: THE ROOF OPENING PANEL DOES NOT OPEN OR CLOSE
E1 CHECK THE POWER WINDOWS
Key in ON position.
Verify that the power windows operate.
Do the power windows operate?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : REFER to GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS article to diagnose the accessory delay
relay circuit.
E2 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING SLIDING GLASS PANEL MOTOR FOR INITIALIZATION
Carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization procedure. Refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization.
Is the concern still present?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : The system is operating normally at this time. The roof opening sliding glass panel motor was
not initialized.
E3 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Roof Opening Panel Switch C912
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Carry out the roof opening panel switch component test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the roof opening panel switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to E4.
NO : INSTALL a new roof opening panel switch. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Control
Switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
E4 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE ROOF OPENING SLIDING GLASS PANEL
MOTOR/MODULE - CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) AND SBB18 (YE/RD)
Disconnect: Roof Opening Panel Motor/Module C920
Key in ON position.
Fig. 1: Measuring Voltage Between Roof Opening Panel Motor/Module C920-13, Circuit
CBP41 (BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between roof opening panel motor/module C920-13, circuit CBP41 (BU),
harness side and ground; and between C920-1, circuit SBB18 (YE/RD), harness side and ground
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to E5.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 41 (15A) and battery junction box (BJB) fuse 18
(30A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
E5 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING SLIDING GLASS PANEL MOTOR/MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT GD133 (BK)
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance Between Roof Opening Panel Motor/Module C920-8, Circuit
GD133 (BK)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between roof opening panel motor/module C920-8, circuit GD133 (BK),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
E6 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL SWITCH GROUND - CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR
AN OPEN
Fig. 3: Measuring Resistance Between Roof Opening Panel Switch C912-14, Circuit GD133
(BK)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between roof opening panel switch C912-14, circuit GD133 (BK), harness
side and roof opening panel motor/module C920-7, circuit GD133 (BK) harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
E7 CHECK CIRCUITS CPR31 (VT/BN) AND CPR40 (YE/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance Between Roof Opening Panel Switch C912-11, Circuit CPR31
(VT/BN)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between roof opening panel switch C912-11, circuit CPR31 (VT/BN),
harness side and roof opening panel motor/module C920-2, circuit CPR31 (VT/BN) harness side;
and between roof opening panel switch C912-8, circuit CPR40 (YE/OG), harness side and roof
opening panel motor/module C920-4, circuit CPR40 (YE/OG) harness side
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
E8 CHECK CIRCUITS CPR31 (VT/BN), CPR38 (WH/BU) AND CPR40 (YE/OG) FOR A SHORT
TO GROUND
Fig. 5: Measuring Resistance Between Roof Opening Panel Switch C912 Harness Side &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Using the following table, measure the resistance between roof opening panel switch C912 harness
side and ground:
Roof
Opening
Panel Ground
Switch
C912
C920-2,
circuit
Ground
CPR31
(VT/BN)
C920-6,
circuit
Ground
CPR38
(WH/BU)
C920-4,
Ground
circuit
CPR40
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
(YE/OG)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
E9 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR WIRING HARNESS
Using the following table, check the roof opening panel motor wiring harness for loose pins, an
open or a short between roof opening panel motor/module C920 component side and the roof
opening panel motor wiring harness socket:
Roof
Opening
Roof Opening
Panel
Panel
Motor
Motor/Module
Wiring
C920
Harness
Socket
Roof
opening
panel
motor
C920-1, circuit
wiring
SBB18
harness
socket
circuit
SBB18
Roof
opening
panel
motor
C920-13,
wiring
circuit CBP41
harness
socket
circuit
CBP41
Roof
opening
panel
motor
C920-7, circuit
wiring
GD133
harness
socket
circuit
GD133
Roof
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
C920-8, circuit
GD133
C920-2, circuit
CPR31
C920-6, circuit
CPR38
C920-4, circuit
CPR40
opening
panel
motor
wiring
harness
socket
circuit
GD133
Roof
opening
panel
motor
wiring
harness
socket
circuit
CPR31
Roof
opening
panel
motor
wiring
harness
socket
circuit
CPR38
Roof
opening
panel
motor
wiring
harness
socket
circuit
CPR40
Is the roof opening panel motor wiring harness OK?
YES : Go to E10.
NO : INSTALL a new roof opening panel motor wiring harness. REFER to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Wiring Harness. INITIALIZE the roof opening panel motor. REFER to Roof Opening
Panel Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
E10 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING SLIDING GLASS PANEL MOTOR/MODULE FOR
CORRECT OPERATION
Disconnect all roof opening panel motor/module connectors.
Check for:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
corrosion.
bent or pushed-out pins.
Connect all roof opening panel motor/module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module. REFER to Roof Opening
Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel. INITIALIZE the roof opening sliding glass panel motor.
REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test F: The Roof Opening Panel Does Not Open in the VENT Position
The roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module must be initialized whenever the roof opening sliding glass
panel motor/module has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel module
assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module has been
installed or a new roof opening panel module assembly has been installed. Refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization .
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Roof Opening Panel for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The roof opening panel uses an integrated motor and module to operate the roof opening panel sliding glass.
The roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module receives voltage from the accessory delay relay through
circuit CBP41 (BU) when the key is in the ACC or RUN position and voltage at all times through circuit
SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is supplied to the roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module through circuit
GD133 (BK). The roof opening panel switch receives ground from the roof opening panel motor/module
assembly through circuit GD133 (BK). When the roof opening panel tilt switch is pressed, the roof opening
panel switch grounds circuit CPR38 (WH/BU) and the roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module opens the
roof opening panel sliding glass to the VENT position.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Roof opening panel switch
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor not initialized
PINPOINT TEST F: THE ROOF OPENING PANEL DOES NOT OPEN IN THE VENT POSITION
F1 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING SLIDING GLASS PANEL MOTOR FOR INITIALIZATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization procedure. Refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization.
Is the concern still present?
YES : Go to F2.
NO : The system is operating normally at this time. The roof opening sliding glass panel motor was
not initialized.
F2 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Roof Opening Panel Switch C912
Carry out the roof opening panel switch component test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the roof opening panel switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to F3.
NO : INSTALL a new roof opening panel switch. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Control
Switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
F3 CHECK CIRCUIT CPR38 (WH/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Roof Opening Panel Motor/Module C920
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance Between Roof Opening Panel Switch C912-10, Circuit CPR38
(WH/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between roof opening panel switch C912-10, circuit CPR38 (WH/BU),
harness side and roof opening panel motor/module C920-6, circuit CPR38 (WH/BU) harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
F4 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR WIRING HARNESS
Check the roof opening panel motor wiring harness for loose pins, an open or a short between roof
opening panel motor/module C920-6, circuit CPR38, component side and the roof opening panel
motor wiring harness socket.
Is the roof opening panel motor wiring harness OK?
YES : Go to F5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new roof opening panel motor wiring harness. REFER to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Wiring Harness. INITIALIZE the roof opening panel motor. REFER to Roof Opening
Panel Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
F5 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING SLIDING GLASS PANEL MOTOR/MODULE FOR
CORRECT OPERATION
Disconnect all roof opening panel motor/module connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
bent or pushed-out pins.
Connect all roof opening panel motor/module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module. REFER to Roof Opening
Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel. INITIALIZE the roof opening sliding glass panel motor.
REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test G: The Roof Opening Panel Shade Does Not Open or Close - Both Shades
The roof opening panel shade motor/module must be initialized whenever the roof opening panel shade
motor/module has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel module assembly
has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel shade motor/module has been installed or a new
roof opening panel module assembly has been installed. Refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Roof Opening Panel for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The roof opening panel shade uses an integrated motor and module to operate the roof opening panel shades.
The roof opening panel shade motor/module receives voltage through circuit SBB18 (YE/RD). When the key is
in the ACC or RUN position, the roof opening panel motor/module sends a signal to the roof opening panel
shade motor/module. Ground is supplied to the roof opening panel shade motor/module through circuit GD133
(BK). The roof opening panel switch receives ground from the roof opening panel motor/module assembly
through circuit GD133 (BK). When the roof opening panel shade OPEN switch is pressed, the roof opening
panel switch grounds circuit CPR37 (YE/GY) and the roof opening panel shade motor/module opens the roof
opening panel shade. When the roof opening panel shade CLOSE switch is pressed, the roof opening panel
switch grounds circuit CPR32 (YE/GN) and the roof opening panel shade motor/module closes the roof opening
panel shade.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Open in voltage or ground circuit of the overhead jumper harness
Roof opening panel switch
Roof opening panel shade panel motor/module
Roof opening panel shade motor not initialized
PINPOINT TEST G: THE ROOF OPENING PANEL SHADE DOES NOT OPEN OR CLOSE - BOTH
SHADES
G1 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL SHADE MOTOR FOR INITIALIZATION
Carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization procedure. Refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization.
Is the concern still present?
YES : Go to G2.
NO : The system is operating normally at this time. The roof opening panel shade motor was not
initialized.
G2 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Roof Opening Panel Switch C912
Carry out the roof opening panel switch component test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the roof opening panel switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to G3.
NO : INSTALL a new roof opening panel switch. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Control
Switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
G3 CHECK CIRCUITS CPR32 (YE/GN) AND CPR37 (YE/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 7: Measuring Resistance Between Roof Opening Panel Switch C912-5, Circuit CPR32
(YE/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between roof opening panel switch C912-5, circuit CPR32 (YE/GN),
harness side and roof opening panel motor/module C920-5, circuit CPR32 (YE/GN) harness side;
and between roof opening panel switch C912-6, circuit CPR37 (YE/GY), harness side and roof
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
opening panel motor/module C920-3, circuit CPR37 (YE/GY) harness side
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
G4 CHECK CIRCUITS CPR32 (YE/GN) AND CPR37 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance Between Roof Opening Panel Switch C912-5, Circuit CPR32
(YE/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between roof opening panel switch C912-5, circuit CPR32 (YE/GN),
harness side and ground; and between roof opening panel switch C912-6, circuit CPR37 (YE/GY),
harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
G5 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR WIRING HARNESS
Using the following table, check the roof opening panel motor wiring harness for loose pins, an
open or a short between roof opening panel motor/module C920 component side and the roof
opening panel motor wiring harness socket:
Roof
Opening
Roof Opening
Panel
Panel
Motor
Motor/Module
Wiring
C920
Harness
Socket
Roof
opening
C920-1, circuit
panel
SBB18
motor
wiring
harness
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
C920-13,
circuit CBP41
C920-5, circuit
CPR32
C920-8, circuit
GD133
C920-3, circuit
CPR37
socket
circuit
SBB18
Roof
opening
panel
motor
wiring
harness
socket
circuit
CBP41
Roof
opening
panel
motor
wiring
harness
socket
circuit
CPR32
Roof
opening
panel
motor
wiring
harness
socket
circuit
GD133
Roof
opening
panel
motor
wiring
harness
socket
circuit
CPR37
Is the roof opening panel motor wiring harness OK?
YES : Go to G6.
NO : INSTALL a new roof opening motor wiring harness. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor
Wiring Harness. INITIALIZE the roof opening panel motor. REFER to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
G6 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL SHADE MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Disconnect all roof opening panel shade motor connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
bent or pushed-out pins.
Connect all roof opening panel shade motor connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new roof opening panel shade motor. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor Shades. INITIALIZE the roof opening panel shade motor. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor
Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test H: The Express Open/Close is Inoperative
The roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module must be initialized whenever the roof opening sliding glass
panel motor/module has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel module
assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module has been
installed or a new roof opening panel module assembly has been installed. Refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization .
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Roof Opening Panel for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The roof opening panel uses an integrated motor and module to operate the roof opening panel sliding glass.
The roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module receives voltage from the accessory delay relay through
circuit CBP41 (BU) when the key is in the ACC or RUN position and voltage at all times through circuit
SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is supplied to the roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module through circuit
GD133 (BK). The roof opening panel switch receives ground from the roof opening panel motor/module
assembly through circuit GD133 (BK). When the roof opening panel switch is momentarily pressed to the
double detent express open position, the roof opening panel switch grounds circuits CPR31 (VT/BN) and
CPR38 (WH/BU) and the roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module opens the roof opening panel sliding
glass to the express OPEN position. The roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module also sends a signal to
the roof opening panel shade motor/module to open the roof opening panel shade. When the roof opening panel
switch is momentarily pressed to the double detent express close position, the roof opening panel switch
grounds circuits CPR40 (YE/OG) and CPR31 (VT/BN) and the roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module
closes the roof opening panel sliding glass to the CLOSE position.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Roof opening panel switch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor not initialized
PINPOINT TEST H: THE EXPRESS OPEN/CLOSE IS INOPERATIVE
H1 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING SLIDING GLASS PANEL MOTOR FOR INITIALIZATION
Carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization procedure. Refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization.
Is the concern still present?
YES : Go to H2.
NO : The system is operating normally at this time. The roof opening sliding glass panel motor was
not initialized.
H2 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Roof Opening Panel Switch C912
Carry out the roof opening panel switch component test. Refer to COMPONENT TESTING.
Did the roof opening panel switch pass the component test?
YES : Go to H3.
NO : INSTALL a new roof opening panel switch. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Control
Switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
H3 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING SLIDING GLASS PANEL MOTOR/MODULE FOR
CORRECT OPERATION
Disconnect all roof opening panel motor/module connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
bent or pushed-out pins.
Connect all roof opening panel motor/module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module. REFER to Roof Opening
Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel. INITIALIZE the roof opening sliding glass panel motor.
REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test I: The Global Open Function is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Roof Opening Panel for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
When the global open feature is activated, the smart junction box (SJB) sends a signal through circuit VPW01
(GN/BU) to the roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module to open the roof opening panel sliding glass to
the VENT position. The roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module also sends a signal to the roof opening
panel shade motor/module to open the roof opening panel shade. The global open feature does not function
when the delayed accessory is active.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor/module
SJB
Remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitters
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor is not initialized
PINPOINT TEST I: THE GLOBAL OPEN FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE
I1 VERIFY THE POWER WINDOWS ARE OPERATIONAL
Operate the power windows using the global open procedure.
Do the power windows operate correctly?
YES : Go to I2.
NO : REFER to GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS article to diagnose the inoperative
windows.
I2 CHECK CIRCUIT VPW01 (GN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Roof Opening Panel Motor/Module C920
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Fig. 9: Measuring Resistance Between Roof Opening Panel Motor/Module C920-10, Circuit
VPW01 (GN/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between roof opening panel motor/module C920-10, circuit VPW01
(GN/BU), harness side and SJB C2280C-10, circuit VPW01 (GN/BU) harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to I3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INITIALIZE the roof opening panel motor/module. REFER to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
I3 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR WIRING HARNESS
Check the roof opening panel motor wiring harness for loose pins, an open or a short between roof
opening panel motor/module C920-10, circuit VPW01, component side and the roof opening panel
sliding glass wiring harness socket.
Is the roof opening panel motor wiring harness OK?
YES : Go to I4.
NO : INSTALL a new roof opening panel motor wiring harness. REFER to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Wiring Harness. INITIALIZE the roof opening panel motor. REFER to Roof Opening
Panel Motor Initialization. TEST the system for normal operation.
I4 CHECK THE ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTORS/MODULES FOR CORRECT
OPERATION
Disconnect all roof opening panel motor/module connectors.
Check for:
corrosion.
bent or pushed-out pins.
Connect all roof opening panel motor/module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : For an inoperative roof opening sliding glass panel motor, INSTALL a new roof opening
sliding glass panel motor. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel. For an
inoperative roof opening panel shade motor, INSTALL a new roof opening panel shade motor.
REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades. INITIALIZE the roof opening panel
motors/modules. REFER to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR INITIALIZATION
WARNING: Keep objects and body parts clear of the glass panel when carrying out
the initialization procedure. During the initialization procedure, the glass
panel closes with high force and cannot detect objects in its path. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
New roof opening panel glass motor/shade motors must be initialized after
installation.
NOTE:
An de-initialized glass or shade motor will stutter step open when their
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
respective open switches are pressed.
NOTE:
The glass close switch must be held during the entire initialization process or
the sequence will be aborted and the roof will remain in a de-initialized state.
For a new drive assembly
NOTE:
If installing a new roof opening panel shade motor assembly, use the existing
drive assembly procedure.
1. Start the engine.
2. Press and hold the glass close switch.
The glass panel will move toward the front hard-stop, stall and then move backward a few
millimeters and then forward.
The shade panels will move toward their front hard-stops, stall, move back a few millimeters, then
forward.
After the shade panels have finished moving backward and forward, release the glass close switch.
3. Repress and hold the glass close switch while the glass and shades fully open and fully close.
4. Initialization is now complete. Verify successful initialization by carrying out one-touch open, one-touch
close, one-touch vent (glass) and one-touch open for the shades.
If roof opening panel does not operate correctly, repeat Steps 2 through 4.
For an existing drive assembly
5. Start the engine.
6. Press and hold the glass close switch until the glass is in CLOSED position.
7. Release, repress and hold the glass close switch (for at least 10 seconds).
The glass panel will move toward the front hard-stop and stall.
The shade panels will move toward their front hard-stops, stall, move back a few millimeters, then
forward.
After the shade panels have finished moving backward and forward, release the glass close switch.
8. Press and hold the glass close switch.
The glass and shades will fully open together. Then, the glass will close first and then the shades
will return to the fully CLOSED position. When the shades have stopped moving, release the glass
close switch.
9. Initialization is now complete. Verify successful initialization by carrying out one-touch open, one-touch
close, one-touch vent (glass) and one-touch open for the shades.
If roof opening panel does not operate correctly, repeat Steps 6 through 9.
TIMING ADJUSTMENT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Anytime a roof opening panel glass/shade motor is removed, the
cables/mechanisms can experience free-play movement. It is important that the
cables do not move. The mechanisms are timed to be parallel with each other. If
one or both are moved in either direction, they must be re-timed.
Roof Opening Panel - Sliding Glass Panel
1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
2. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening
Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel.
3. Manually move the sliding front glass mechanisms forward until they are flush against the track hardstops.
4. Reinstall the roof opening panel sliding glass motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening
Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel.
5. With the roof opening panel sliding glass still removed, initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization.
NOTE:
Press the glass open switch to move the mechanisms rearward to allow
installation of the sliding glass panel.
NOTE:
It will be necessary to carry out the initialization procedure again after the
glass panel is installed.
6. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
Roof Opening Panel - Shades
7. Remove the roof opening panel shade motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor - Shades.
8. Carefully move the front and rear shades rearward to the fully OPEN position by pushing at the edges
closest to the tracks.
9. Reinstall the roof opening panel shade motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor - Shades.
10. Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization.
WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM CHECK AND WATER LEAK CORRECTIONS
1. The roof opening panel module assembly has 2 drain channels which are located under the side trim
panels to direct water externally to the front and rear corners of the roof. There are no drain hoses in this
system.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
If a drainage system blockage or obstruction is suspected, pour a small amount of water into the suspected
drain channel while observing the front and rear channel openings for any water flow restriction. Attempt
to clear any blockage or obstruction using compressed air at the front or rear opening of the drain channel.
If the blockage or obstruction cannot be cleared, the roof opening panel front trim and/or side trim must
be removed to gain full access to the drain channel. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening
Panel Trim - Front and Roof Opening Panel Trim - Side.
2. For water leak corrections, refer to the Diagnosis and Testing procedure in this service information.
ROOF OPENING PANEL MANUAL OPERATION
1. Remove the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
NOTE:
Roof opening sliding glass panel motor shown, shade motor similar.
2. Insert an Allen wrench into the center of the manual drive hole of the roof opening panel motor(s). Rotate
the Allen wrench counterclockwise to close the roof opening panel glass/shades or clockwise to open the
roof opening panel glass/shades.
Fig. 10: Inserting An Allen Wrench Into Center Of Manual Drive Hole Of Roof Opening Panel
Motor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass and End Caps
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part Number
7851707
18500A18
78503A22
78503A23
7851746 RH/7851945 LH
7850046
78502C22
Description
Fixed glass front seal
Fixed glass assembly
Side trim seals (2 required)
Front trim seal
Side trim panels
Front trim panel
End caps (2 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Air Deflector Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
W790076
2
W790086
3
W79004
3
W790084
4
-
5
W790073
5
W790083
6
7
78500A26
W790085
NOTE:
Description
Air deflector-to-track screws (2 required)
Air deflector arm capture plates (2
required)
Air deflector catcher bracket outer screws
(2 required)
Service replacement fasteners for
W79004 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Air deflector catcher bracket (part of air
deflector assembly)
Air deflector catcher bracket center
screws (4 required)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790073 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Air deflector assembly
Nut plates (2 required)
LH side shown, RH side similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Sliding Glass, Blinds and Primary Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
78500A66 LH/78500A67 RH
2
W790079
3
W790078
4
5
18500A18
18500A18
NOTE:
Description
Concertina blinds (2 required)
Roof opening panel front glass screws (4
required)
Roof opening panel rear glass screws (2
required)
Roof opening panel primary glass seal
Roof opening sliding glass panel
LH shown, RH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Idler Track and Mechanism
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
78502M78 RH/78502M79 LH
2
W790074
2
W790084
3
W790073
3
W790082
4
78503A34 RH/7851071 LH
Description
Idler track mechanism
Front idler track-to-housing fasteners (2
required per side)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790074 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Rear idler track-to-housing fasteners (6
required per side)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790073 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Idler track and mechanism
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 15: Front and Rear Sunshade Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W790074
1
W790084
2
W790073
2
W790082
3
78519A02
4
W790073
4
W790082
5
78519A02
Description
Front sunshade carrier outer screws (2
required)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790074 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Front sunshade carrier center screws (2
required)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790073 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Front sunshade assembly
Rear sunshade carrier-to-housing screws
(2 required)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790073 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Rear sunshade assembly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Rear Trim Ring Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
7850036
Description
Rear trim ring assembly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) and Electrical
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W790077
2
W790077
3
15790
4
15790
5
15A657
Description
Shade motor retaining screws (3
required)
Sliding glass motor retaining screws (3
required)
Shade motor assembly (silver label)
Sliding glass motor assembly (black
label)
Roof opening panel motor harness
assembly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Motor Block and Drive Tube Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
78502C22
2
W790073
2
W790082
3
78502C22
4
W790073
4
W790082
NOTE:
Description
Shade motor block and drive tube
assembly
Rear drive tube bracket-to-housing
screws (2 required)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790073 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Sliding glass motor block and drive tube
assembly
Front drive tube bracket-to-guide track
screws (2 required)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790073 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
LH shown, RH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 19: Guide Tracks and Mechanisms
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W790073
1
W790082
2
78502C07 RH/78502C06 LH
3
W790073
3
W790082
4
W790073
4
W790082
5
78500B01 LH/78500B02 RH
6
W790075
Description
Front guide track-to-housing fasteners (8
required per side)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790073 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Front guide track and mechanism
assembly
Rear shade track-to-housing fasteners (3
required per side)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790073 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Rear shade track-to-drive tube bracket
screws (1 required per side)
Service replacement fasteners for
W790073 (use only if threaded hole
becomes stripped during assembly)
Rear shade track and mechanism
assembly
Stop screw (1 required per side)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Fig. 20: Front Guide Track Mechanism
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
Description
Outer guide foot (PIA to guide track and
mechanism assembly)
Sliding glass bracket (PIA to guide track
and mechanism assembly)
Sliding glass bracket pin (PIA to guide
track and mechanism assembly)
Guide mechanism (PIA to guide track
and mechanism assembly)
Inner guide feet (2 required per side)
(PIA to guide track and mechanism
assembly)
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures in this service information.
AIR DEFLECTOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
There may be a special service replacement fastener available if a screw hole
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
becomes stripped during installation. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel - Exploded View .
1. Position the roof opening panel glass to the full OPEN position.
2. Remove the 2 air deflector-to-track screws and air deflector arm capture plate.
NOTE:
If the nut plate(s) becomes stripped during installation, a new nut
plate can be installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel - Exploded View.
To install, tighten to 2 N.m (18 lb-in).
Fig. 21: Identifying Air Deflector-To-Track Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 6 air deflector catcher bracket screws.
To install, tighten to 2 N.m (18 lb-in).
Fig. 22: Locating Air Deflector Catcher Bracket Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the air deflector assembly.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ROOF OPENING PANEL CONTROL SWITCH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the overhead console. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL AND
CONSOLE article.
2. Disengage the clips and remove the switch from the overhead console.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ROOF OPENING PANEL BLIND
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the roof opening panel to the VENT position.
Detach the top of the concertina blind from the moving glass frame.
Open the roof opening panel to the fully OPEN position.
Detach the bottom of the concertina blind from the guide track and remove the blind.
To install, the blind should be attached to the guide track in the most forward position.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ROOF OPENING PANEL GLASS - FRONT SLIDING
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the roof opening panel to the VENT position.
Detach the top of the concertina blind from the moving glass frame.
Reposition the sliding glass panel to any position rearward of VENT position.
Remove the 4 roof opening panel glass front screws.
To install, tighten to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
Fig. 23: Identifying Roof Opening Panel Glass Front Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the 2 roof opening panel glass rear screws.
To install, tighten to 8 N.m (71 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 24: Identifying Roof Opening Panel Glass Rear Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It is possible for the idler mechanism to move freely once the glass panel
is removed. Do not move the idler rearward or it may disengage from the
idler track.
6. Carefully remove the roof opening panel glass.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization.
ROOF OPENING PANEL GLASS - REAR FIXED
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
The Pumper
164-R2459 or equivalent
Rotunda Interior Auto Glass Cut164-R2450 or equivalent
Out Knife Kit
Material
Item
Specification
Dow Urethane Adhesive
Betaseal® Express
Dow Urethane One Step Glass Primer
Betaprime® 5500/5500A/5500SA
Sika Urethane Adhesive
-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Sika Tack ASAP
Sika Urethane Metal and Glass Primer
Sika 206 G+P
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
ZC-23
ESR-M14P5-A
REMOVAL
1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
2. Remove the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
3. Remove the rear fixed glass interior trim ring. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior.
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that
have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Make sure the cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth
changes to avoid damage to the body and trim panels.
NOTE:
Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when
cutting the urethane adhesive. Using the special tool, place the flat side of
the knife against the rear glass.
NOTE:
Using the special tool 164-R2459 (or equivalent), distance the roof opening
panel fixed glass from the roof module as needed.
4. Refer to the adhesive path illustration and cut as follows:
NOTE:
Use caution when cutting to prevent damage to the fixed glass front
trim seal.
1. From the inside of the vehicle, start at the front and work towards the front corners.
NOTE:
Use caution when cutting to prevent damage to the side trim seals.
2. Continue working along the side and towards the rear corners.
3. Continue around the inside rear adhesive path.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Use caution when cutting along the side to prevent damage to the
side trim seals.
4. From the inside of the vehicle, work along the side of the glass.
5. From the inside of the vehicle, work from the center towards the rear corners.
Fig. 25: Identifying Adhesive Path
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the fixed glass panel assembly.
NOTE:
Make sure the water channel is free from any foreign material.
6. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the roof opening panel module.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
NOTE:
For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation
information.
Avoid scratching the painted surfaces. For minor scratches or exposed
metal, see the manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1-2 mm (0.04-0.08 in) base of original
equipment urethane along the roof opening module surface.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 26: Trimming Pinch Weld Urethane Adhesive
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Clean the inside of the glass surface with glass cleaner.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the same brand of cure-rate products for the adhesive and
primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. Refer to the
Materials Chart in this procedure.
3. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification.
Fig. 27: Cutting Urethane Adhesive Applicator Tip To Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The glass panel must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the
urethane adhesive.
NOTE:
Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will
apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead.
4. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps
in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 28: Making Sure That All Gaps In Urethane Adhesive Are Smoothed Into One Continuous
Bead
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane seal has cured. Follow
urethane manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect
curing of the urethane seal will adversely affect glass retention.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to
vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE:
Before positioning the glass panel, open vehicle windows to prevent the
air pressure of closing doors from affecting the adhesive bond.
5. Apply the fixed glass panel assembly to the roof module. Work the glass panel down using only vertical
pressure.
6. Install the rear fixed glass interior trim ring. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior.
7. Install the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
8. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
ROOF OPENING PANEL GUIDE TRACK AND MECHANISM
REMOVAL
NOTE:
There may be a special service replacement fastener available if a screw hole
becomes stripped during installation. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel - Exploded View .
1. Remove the roof opening panel blind. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Blind.
2. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the air deflector-to-track screw and air deflector arm capture plate on the affected track.
Fig. 29: Identifying Air Deflector-To-Track Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
4. Remove the air deflector catcher bracket outer screw on the affected track.
Fig. 30: Locating Air Deflector Catcher Bracket Outer Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the front shade assembly. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Shade
Assembly.
6. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening
Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel.
7. Move the sliding glass mechanism to the full forward position on the affected track.
8. Remove the front drive tube bracket-to-guide-track screw.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Locating Front Drive Tube Bracket-To-Guide-Track Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Carefully mark the location of the guide track in 3 places before removing
any fasteners. The new guide track must be installed in exactly the same
position.
9. Remove the 8 front track-to-housing screws.
Fig. 32: Locating Front Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Protect the vehicle interior from grease when cable assembly is withdrawn
from the drive tube.
10. Drop the front of the guide track down while sliding the entire track and mechanism assembly forward
and down. The drive cable will slowly withdraw from the drive tube until the entire assembly is free.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Protect the vehicle interior from grease when cable assembly is inserted
into the drive tube.
1. While holding the track and mechanism assembly, slowly insert the sliding glass drive cable into the
drive tube. Insert the shade cable into the track and make sure the front drive tube bracket is fully seated
into the track assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
2. Install the 8 front track-to-housing screws.
Align the track to the marks previously made. Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Fig. 33: Locating Front Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the front drive tube bracket-to-guide-track screw. Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Fig. 34: Locating Front Drive Tube Bracket-To-Guide-Track Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
4. Install the air deflector catcher bracket outer screw on the affected track.
Tighten to 2 N.m (18 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:39 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 35: Locating Air Deflector Catcher Bracket Outer Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
5. Install the air deflector-to-track screw and air deflector arm capture plate on the affected track.
NOTE:
If the nut plate(s) becomes stripped during installation, a new nut
plate can be installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel - Exploded View.
Tighten to 2 N.m (18 lb-in).
Fig. 36: Identifying Air Deflector-To-Track Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Attach the bottom of the concertina blind to the guide track in the most forward position.
NOTE:
Do not install the headliner at this time.
7. Install the front shade assembly but do not carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Shade Assembly.
8. Re-time the roof opening panel. For additional information, refer to Timing Adjustment.
ROOF OPENING PANEL IDLER TRACK MECHANISM
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
2. Remove the roof opening panel side trim. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Trim
- Side.
3. Carefully slide the idler link forward and out of the front of the track.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 37: Sliding Idler Link Forward & Out Of Front Of Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the idler mechanism guide shoes are compressed and aligned
correctly during installation. The guide shoes cannot be serviced
separately.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ROOF OPENING PANEL IDLER TRACK AND MECHANISM
REMOVAL
NOTE:
There may be a special service replacement fastener available if a screw hole
becomes stripped during installation. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel - Exploded View .
1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
2. Remove the roof opening panel side trim. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Trim
- Side.
3. If installing a new roof opening panel idler track, carefully slide the idler link forward and out of the
track.
Fig. 38: Sliding Idler Link Forward & Out Of Front Of Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Carefully mark the location of the idler track in 3 places before removing
any fasteners. The new idler track must be installed in exactly the same
position.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
4. Remove the 6 rear idler track-to-housing screws.
Fig. 39: Locating Rear Idler Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The center rear idler track-to-housing screws will be captured inside the
track rail. In some cases, it may be necessary to lift rails to completely
remove screws from roof threads to allow idler track removal.
5. Completely loosen the 2 center rear idler track-to-housing screws.
Fig. 40: Locating Center Rear Idler Track-To-Housing Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Slide track rearward to disengage front clip and remove assembly.
7. Remove the 2 center rear idler track-to-housing screws from the idler track.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the 2 center rear idler track-to-housing screws into the roof opening module by hand. Make sure
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
they are seated all the way.
2. If slots are not already present in the idler track, the idler track will need to be modified prior to
installation. Using a small die grinder or equivalent, cut 2 clearance slots on the inside edge of the idler
track to the specification shown.
Fig. 41: Identifying Idler Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Position the idler track into the roof module. The slots will allow clearance of the 2 center rear idler trackto-housing screws.
4. Loosen the 2 center rear idler track-to-housing screws as necessary to allow the idler track to slide
forward to engage the front clip.
Align the idler track to the alignment marks made previously.
5. Install the remaining 6 rear idler track-to-housing screws and tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
Fig. 42: Locating Rear Idler Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Tighten the 2 center rear idler track-to-housing screws to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 43: Locating Center Rear Idler Track-To-Housing Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. If installing a new roof opening panel idler track, install the link into the idler track. Make sure the idler
mechanism guide shoes are compressed and aligned correctly during installation.
8. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
9. Test the operation of the roof opening panel. If roof opening panel glass appears to bind or move slowly,
remove the roof opening panel sliding glass and repeat Steps 4 through 8.
10. Install the roof opening panel side trim panel. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Trim - Side.
ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Rotunda Interior Auto Glass Cut164-R2450 or equivalent
Out Knife Kit
Material
Item
Specification
Dow Urethane Adhesive
Betaseal® Express
Dow Urethane One Step Glass Primer
Betaprime® 5500/5500A/5500SA
Sika Urethane Adhesive
Sika Tack ASAP
Sika Urethane Metal and Glass Primer
Sika 206 G+P
-
REMOVAL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
If installing a new roof opening panel module assembly, the following
components will need to be transferred from the original assembly: concertina
blinds, front and rear shade assemblies, roof opening panel sliding glass, roof
opening panel shade motor and roof opening panel sliding glass motor.
1. Remove the ditch moldings and clip strips.
2. Remove the concertina blinds. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Blind.
3. Remove the roof opening sliding glass panel. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
4. Remove the air deflector assembly. For additional information, refer to Air Deflector.
5. Remove the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
6. Remove the roof opening panel front trim. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Trim - Front.
7. Remove the roof opening panel side trim panels. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening
Panel Trim - Side.
8. Disconnect the roof opening panel electrical harness connector.
NOTE:
Do not open the liftgate during this procedure.
NOTE:
Make sure the cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth
changes to avoid damage to the body and trim panels.
NOTE:
Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when
cutting the urethane adhesive. Using the special tool, place the flat side of
the knife against the roof module.
9. Refer to the adhesive path illustration and cut as follows:
NOTE:
Use caution when cutting to prevent damage to the windshield glass
seal.
1. From the outside of the vehicle, start at the center and work towards the front corners and around
the locator pin.
NOTE:
Add wedges as necessary to separate the roof opening panel module
from the body to relieve pressure on the cutting blade.
2. From the outside of the vehicle, continue working along the side and towards the rear corners.
NOTE:
Add wedges as necessary to separate the roof opening panel module
from the body to relieve pressure on the cutting blade.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
3. From the inside of the vehicle, work from the center towards the rear corners and around the rear
locator pin.
Fig. 44: Identifying Adhesive Path On Vehicle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. With the aid of an assistant, remove the roof opening panel module assembly.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
When installing urethane-installed parts, the vehicle must not be driven until the
urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for
each urethane product as the temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or
incorrect curing can adversely affect the retention of the roof opening panel
module assembly.
NOTE:
For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation
information.
NOTE:
Avoid scratching the painted surfaces. For minor scratches or exposed
metal, see the manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving no more than 1 mm (0.03 in) base of
original equipment urethane along the roof opening module body mounting surface.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 45: Trimming Urethane Adhesive Leaving No More Than 1 Mm (0.03 in) base of original
equipment urethane
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the vehicle body roof opening
panel module flanges.
3. Make sure the locator pin holes are cleared of any foreign material which would affect installation of the
new roof opening panel module.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the same brand of cure-rate products for the adhesive and
primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. Refer to the
Materials Chart in this procedure.
4. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification.
Fig. 46: Cutting Urethane Adhesive Applicator Tip To Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will
apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead.
5. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps
in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 47: Making Sure That All Gaps In Urethane Adhesive Are Smoothed Into One Continuous
Bead
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the roof opening panel module assembly.
NOTE:
Make sure the roof opening panel module assembly does not come
into contact with the adhesive bead.
1. With the aid of assistants, hold the roof opening panel module assembly approximately 50.8 mm (2
in) over the body structure.
2. Line up the locator pin to the front hole and rear guide pin to the rear hole.
NOTE:
Make sure the windshield molding does not get pinched under the
roof opening panel module assembly.
NOTE:
Make sure the roof opening panel module is lowered straight down
and does not shift.
3. Carefully lower the roof opening panel module assembly into position on the body.
NOTE:
When installing urethane-installed parts, the vehicle must not be driven
until the urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive
away chart for each urethane product as the temperatures and humidity
vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect the retention of
the roof opening panel module assembly.
7. Firmly apply downward pressure to the entire sealing edges of the roof opening panel module assembly to
make sure it is seated correctly.
8. Install the air deflector assembly. For additional information, refer to Air Deflector.
9. Attach the bottom of the concertina blind to the guide track in the most forward position.
NOTE:
Do not install the headliner at this time.
10. If installing a new roof opening panel module assembly, install the front and rear shade assemblies but do
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
not carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization at this time. For additional information, refer to
Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades.
11. Manually move the sliding front glass mechanisms forward until they are flush against the track hardstops.
12. Carefully move the front and rear shades rearward to the fully OPEN position by pushing at the edges
closest to the tracks.
NOTE:
Do not install the headliner at this time.
13. Install the roof opening panel shade motor but do not carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization
at this time. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades.
NOTE:
Do not install the headliner at this time.
14. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass motor but do not carry out the roof opening panel motor
initialization at this time. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Sliding
Front Panel.
15. Connect the roof opening panel electrical harness connector.
16. Install the antenna. For additional information, refer to INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS article.
17. Install the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
18. With the roof opening sliding glass panel still removed, initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization.
NOTE:
Press the glass open switch to move the mechanisms rearward to allow
installation of the sliding glass panel.
NOTE:
It will be necessary to carry out the initialization procedure again after the
glass panel is installed.
19. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
20. Install the ditch moldings and clip strips.
ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR BLOCK AND DRIVE TUBE ASSEMBLY - SHADES
REMOVAL
NOTE:
There may be a special service replacement fastener available if a screw hole
becomes stripped during installation. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel - Exploded View .
1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
2.
3.
4.
5.
Glass - Front Sliding.
Remove the front and rear shade assemblies. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor - Shades.
Remove the roof opening panel shade motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor - Shades.
Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening
Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel.
Manually move the sliding front glass mechanisms and shade mechanisms rearward.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
6. Remove the LH and RH rear drive tube bracket-to-housing screws.
Fig. 48: Locating LH & RH Rear Drive Tube Bracket-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make note of all the cable wrap locations, they must be reinstalled at the
exact same locations.
7. Cut cable wraps to the shade motor block and drive tube assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 49: Cutting Cable Wraps To Motor Block & Drive Tube Assembly & Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE:
Carefully mark the location of each guide track in 3 places before
removing any fasteners. The guide tracks must be installed in exactly the
same position.
8. Remove the LH and RH rear 12 front guide track-to-housing screws.
Fig. 50: Locating LH & RH Front Guide Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Carefully mark the location of each shade track in 3 places before
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
removing any fasteners. The shade tracks must be installed in exactly the
same position.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
9. Remove the LH and RH 6 rear shade track-to-housing screws.
Fig. 51: Locating LH & RH Rear Shade Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Support the sliding glass motor block and drive tube assembly.
NOTE:
Protect the vehicle interior from cable grease.
10. With the rear of the front guide tracks lowered, carefully pull the front shade guide feet out of the rear of
the front guide tracks to release the cable. Remove the shade tracks and the motor block and tube
assembly as one unit.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
11. Remove the LH and RH rear shade track-to-drive tube bracket screws and pull the motor block tube out
of the shade track.
Fig. 52: Locating LH & RH Rear Shade Track-To-Drive Tube Bracket Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
12. Remove the LH and RH rear shade track stop screws.
Fig. 53: Locating LH & RH Rear Shade Track Stop Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If installing a new LH or RH rear shade track, use the cable supplied with
the replacement unit.
13. Pull the shade cables through the front of the shade track assemblies.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
If installing a new LH or RH rear shade track, use the cable supplied with
the replacement unit.
1. Feed the shade cables through the front of the shade track assemblies.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
2. Install the LH and RH rear shade track stop screws.
Fig. 54: Locating LH & RH Rear Shade Track Stop Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
3. Push the shade motor block tubes into the rear of the shade track assemblies and install the LH and RH
rear shade track-to-drive tube bracket screws.
Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Fig. 55: Locating LH & RH Rear Shade Track-To-Drive Tube Bracket Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Protect the vehicle interior from cable grease.
NOTE:
Make sure the front drive tubes are seated fully into the front guide tracks.
4. Holding the shade tracks and the motor block and tube assembly as one unit, insert the front shade cables
into the mechanisms. Move the mechanisms fully into the front guide tracks.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
5. Install the center rear shade track-to-housing screws but do not tighten at this time.
Fig. 56: Locating Center Rear Shade Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
6. Install the LH and RH 12 front guide track-to-housing screws.
Align the track to the marks previously made. Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Fig. 57: Locating LH & RH Front Guide Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
7. Install the remaining 4 rear shade track-to-housing screws.
Align the track to the marks previously made. Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Fig. 58: Locating Rear Shade Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
8. Install the LH and RH rear drive tube bracket-to-housing screws.
Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 59: Locating LH & RH Rear Drive Tube Bracket-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Be careful not to overtighten cable wraps during assembly to prevent
crimping the cable sheath.
NOTE:
The cable wraps must be reinstalled at the exact same locations.
9. Install new cable wraps to the shade motor block and drive tube assembly.
Fig. 60: Cutting Cable Wraps To Motor Block & Drive Tube Assembly & Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not install the headliner at this time.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
10. Install the front and rear shade assemblies but do not carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization
at this time. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades.
11. Manually move the sliding front glass mechanisms forward until they are flush against the track hardstops.
NOTE:
Do not install the headliner at this time.
12. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass motor but do not carry out the initialization at this time. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel .
13. Carefully move the front and rear shades rearward to the fully OPEN position by pushing at the edges
closest to the tracks.
14. Install the roof opening panel shade motor but do not carry out the initialization at this time. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades.
15. With the roof opening sliding glass panel still removed, initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization.
NOTE:
Press the glass open switch to move the mechanisms rearward to allow
installation of the sliding glass panel.
NOTE:
It will be necessary to carry out the initialization procedure again after the
glass panel is installed.
16. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR BLOCK AND DRIVE TUBE ASSEMBLY - SLIDING FRONT
PANEL
REMOVAL
NOTE:
There may be a special service replacement fastener available if a screw hole
becomes stripped during installation. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel - Exploded View .
1. Remove the roof opening sliding glass panel. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
2. Remove the front and rear shade assemblies. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor - Shades.
3. Remove the roof opening panel shade motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor - Shades.
4. Remove the roof opening sliding glass panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening
Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel.
5. Manually move the sliding front glass mechanisms and shade mechanisms rearward.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make note of all the cable wrap locations, they must be reinstalled at the
exact same locations.
6. Cut cable wraps to the motor block and drive tube assembly and wiring harness.
Fig. 61: Cutting Cable Wraps To Motor Block & Drive Tube Assembly & Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
7. Remove the front drive tube bracket-to-guide track screws.
Fig. 62: Locating Front Drive Tube Bracket-To-Guide-Track Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Carefully mark the location of each guide track in 3 places before
removing any fasteners. The guide tracks must be installed in exactly the
same position.
LH shown, RH similar.
8. Remove the LH and RH rear 12 front track-to-housing screws.
Fig. 63: Locating LH & RH Front Guide Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
9. Remove the LH and RH rear drive tube bracket-to-housing screws.
Fig. 64: Locating LH & RH Rear Drive Tube Bracket-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Carefully mark the location of each shade track in 3 places before
removing any fasteners. The shade tracks must be installed in exactly the
same position.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE:
Support the shade track and shade motor block and tube assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
10. Remove the LH and RH 6 rear shade track-to-housing screws.
Fig. 65: Locating LH & RH Rear Shade Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Protect the vehicle interior from cable grease.
11. Carefully pull the sliding glass front drive tube brackets out of the guide tracks.
NOTE:
It is only necessary to pull the mechanisms halfway out of the guide tracks
to disengage the cables. If the mechanisms are completely removed from
the track, they will need to be reassembled first. For additional
information, refer to Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
12. With the rear of the front guide tracks lowered, carefully pull the front sliding glass mechanisms halfway
out of the guide tracks to disconnect the drive cables and remove the motor block and tube assembly.
Fig. 66: Inserting Drive Cables Into Sliding Glass Mechanisms & Insert Mechanisms Completely
Into Guide Tracks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
1. Insert the drive cables into the sliding glass mechanisms and insert the mechanisms completely into the
guide tracks.
Fig. 67: Inserting Drive Cables Into Sliding Glass Mechanisms & Insert Mechanisms Completely
Into Guide Tracks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
2. Install the center rear shade track-to-housing screws but do not tighten at this time.
Fig. 68: Locating Center Rear Shade Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
3. Install the LH and RH 12 front guide track-to-housing screws.
Align the track to the marks previously made. Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 69: Locating LH & RH Front Guide Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
4. Install the front drive tube bracket-to-guide track screws.
Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Fig. 70: Locating Front Drive Tube Bracket-To-Guide-Track Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
5. Install the remaining 4 rear shade track-to-housing screws.
Align the track to the marks previously made. Tighten all shade track-to-housing screws to 5 N.m
(44 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 71: Locating Rear Shade Track-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
6. Install the LH and RH rear drive tube bracket-to-housing screws.
Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Fig. 72: Locating LH & RH Rear Drive Tube Bracket-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Be careful not to overtighten cable wraps during assembly to prevent
crimping the cable sheath.
NOTE:
The cable wraps must be reinstalled at the exact same locations.
7. Install new cable wraps to the shade motor block and drive tube assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 73: Cutting Cable Wraps To Motor Block & Drive Tube Assembly & Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not install the headliner at this time.
8. Install the front and rear shade assemblies but do not carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization
at this time. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades.
9. Manually move the sliding front glass mechanisms forward until they are flush against the track hardstops.
NOTE:
Do not install the headliner at this time.
10. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass motor but do not carry out the initialization at this time. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel .
11. Carefully move the front and rear shades rearward to the fully OPEN position by pushing at the edges
closest to the tracks.
12. Install the roof opening panel shade motor but do not carry out the initialization at this time. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades.
13. With the roof opening sliding glass panel still removed, initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization.
NOTE:
Press the glass open switch to move the mechanisms rearward to allow
installation of the sliding glass panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
It will be necessary to carry out the initialization procedure again after the
glass panel is installed.
14. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR - SHADES
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The roof opening panel shade motor contains ceramic magnets that may fail at
any time if cracked. Any roof opening panel shade motor that has been dropped
onto a hard surface during removal or installation should be replaced with a
new motor.
1. Remove the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Fig. 74: Locating Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
During installation, it may be necessary to rotate the motor clockwise or
counterclockwise for the gear teeth to set into the drive cable correctly.
3. Remove the 3 motor screws and the motor assembly.
To install, tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 75: Locating Motor Screws & Motor Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization.
ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR - SLIDING FRONT PANEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The roof opening panel sliding glass motor contains ceramic magnets that may
fail at any time if cracked. Any roof opening panel sliding glass motor that has
been dropped onto a hard surface during removal or installation should be
replaced with a new motor.
1. Remove the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Fig. 76: Locating Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
During installation, it may be necessary to rotate the motor clockwise or
counterclockwise for the gear teeth to set into the drive cable correctly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the 3 motor screws and the motor assembly.
To install, tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Fig. 77: Locating Motor Screws & Motor Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization.
ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR WIRING HARNESS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors to the roof opening panel sliding glass motor, shade motor and main
harness.
NOTE:
Make note of all the cable wrap locations attaching the harness to the
drive tubes, they must be reinstalled at the exact same locations.
3. Remove the cable wraps and the wiring harness.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 78: Identifying Cable Wraps & Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Be careful not to overtighten cable wraps during assembly to prevent
crimping the cable sheath.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
ROOF OPENING PANEL SEAL - PRIMARY
REMOVAL
1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
2. Carefully peel off the primary seal.
Clean residual adhesive tape from the housing using a suitable cleaner.
INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 79: Identifying Primary Seal Alignment
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The primary seal seam is placed at the rear centerline.
NOTE:
Make sure the primary seal lip is facing outward.
1. Install the primary seal. Refer to the primary seal alignment figure above.
NOTE:
When the roof opening sliding glass panel is in the VENT position, the roof
opening panel primary seal should contact the leading edge of the sliding
glass.
2. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass - Front Sliding.
Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization.
ROOF OPENING PANEL SHADE ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Front and rear shade assembly
1. Move the glass to the fully CLOSED position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
2. Remove the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
Front shade assembly
NOTE:
The shade is under spring tension.
3. Depress the tabs and slide the guide bar (leading edge of shade) forward to release it from the mechanism
guide shoes and allow the shade to retract completely.
Fig. 80: Depressing Tabs & Sliding Guide Bar (Leading Edge Of Shade) Forward To Release It
From Mechanism Guide Shoes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the 2 front sunshade carrier outer screws.
To install, tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Fig. 81: Locating Front Sunshade Carrier Outer Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the 2 front sunshade carrier center screws and the front sunshade assembly.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 82: Locating Front Sunshade Carrier Center Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Rear shade assembly
6. Open the rear shade to the half open position.
NOTE:
Front guide shown, rear similar.
NOTE:
The shade is under spring tension.
7. Depress the tabs and slide the guide bar (leading edge of shade) forward to release it from the mechanism
guide shoes and allow the shade to retract completely.
Fig. 83: Depressing Tabs & Sliding Guide Bar (Leading Edge Of Shade) Forward To Release It
From Mechanism Guide Shoes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the 2 rear sunshade carrier-to-housing screws and the rear sunshade assembly.
To install, tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 84: Locating Rear Sunshade Carrier-To-Housing Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front and rear shade assembly
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization.
ROOF OPENING PANEL SHADE TRACK AND MECHANISM
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
This procedure is for the rear shade track only. To service the front shade track,
refer to Roof Opening Panel Guide Track and Mechanism.
1. The shade track and mechanisms are removed as an assembly with the shade motor block and drive tube
assembly. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Block and Drive Tube
Assembly - Shades.
ROOF OPENING PANEL TRIM - FRONT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Rotunda Interior Auto Glass Cut164-R2450 or equivalent
Out Knife Kit
Material
Item
Specification
Dow Urethane Adhesive
Betaseal® Express
-
Dow Urethane One Step Glass Primer
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Betaprime® 5500/5500A/5500SA
Sika Urethane Adhesive
Sika Tack ASAP
Sika Urethane Metal and Glass Primer
Sika 206 G+P
-
REMOVAL
1. Position the roof opening sliding glass panel to the fully OPEN position.
2. Remove the antenna. For additional information, refer to INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS article.
NOTE:
A new roof opening panel front trim seal is supplied with the new front
trim panel.
3. Remove the roof opening panel front trim seal.
NOTE:
Make sure the cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth
changes to avoid damage to the body, trim panels or windshield molding.
NOTE:
Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when
cutting the urethane adhesive. Using the special tool, place the flat side of
the knife against the roof module.
4. Refer to the adhesive path illustration and begin cutting at the center of the front trim panel and work
through towards the opposite corners.
Fig. 85: Begin Cutting At Center Of Front Trim Panel And Work Through Towards Opposite
Corners
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Rotate the trim panel up and forward to clear the side trim panel. Cut off or bend the 2 steel alignment
tabs if necessary.
6. Remove the front trim panel assembly and discard.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
When installing urethane-installed parts, the vehicle must not be driven until the
urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for
each urethane product as the temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or
incorrect curing can adversely affect the retention of the trim panel.
NOTE:
For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation
information.
NOTE:
Avoid scratching the painted surfaces. For minor scratches or exposed
metal, see the manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive and pads leaving no more than 0.5 mm (0.01 in)
base of original equipment urethane along the roof opening module surface.
Fig. 86: Trimming Urethane Adhesive Leaving No More Than 0.5 mm (0.01 in) Base Of Original
Equipment Urethane
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the water channel is free from any foreign material.
2. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the roof opening panel module.
Clean residual adhesive tape from the housing using a suitable cleaner.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the same brand of cure-rate products for the adhesive and
primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. For additional
information, refer to the Materials Chart in this procedure.
3. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 87: Cutting Urethane Adhesive Applicator Tip To Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will
apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead.
4. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps
in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead.
Fig. 88: Making Sure That All Gaps In Urethane Adhesive Are Smoothed Into One Continuous
Bead
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the windshield molding does not get pinched under the front
trim panel. The windshield molding should be pulled over the top of the
leading edge of the trim panel during installation.
NOTE:
Position front trim panel to best overall appearance.
5. Apply the front trim panel assembly to the roof module. Work the trim panel down using only vertical
pressure.
6. Install the antenna. For additional information, refer to INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS article.
ROOF OPENING PANEL TRIM - SIDE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Rotunda Interior Auto Glass Cut164-R2450 or equivalent
Out Knife Kit
Material
Item
Specification
Dow Urethane Adhesive
Betaseal® Express
Dow Urethane One Step Glass Primer
Betaprime® 5500/5500A/5500SA
Sika Urethane Adhesive
Sika Tack ASAP
Sika Urethane Metal and Glass Primer
Sika 206 G+P
-
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ditch moldings and clip strip.
2. Remove the end cap.
NOTE:
Protect the painted roof area next to the side trim panel to prevent damage
to the paint.
NOTE:
Make sure the cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth
changes to avoid damage to the body or glass panel seals.
NOTE:
Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when
cutting the urethane adhesive. Using the special tool, place the flat side of
the knife against the roof module.
NOTE:
Position the sliding glass panel as required for necessary access.
3. Begin cutting the urethane at the rear of the side trim panel while bending the trim panel upward as
needed for access. Work forward through all urethane and rubber net pads. Remove and discard the side
trim panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
Fig. 89: Identifying Side Trim Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
When installing urethane-installed parts, the vehicle must not be driven until the
urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for
each urethane product as the temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or
incorrect curing can adversely affect the retention of the trim panel.
NOTE:
For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation
information.
NOTE:
Avoid scratching the painted surfaces. For minor scratches or exposed
metal, see the manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving no more than 0.5 mm (0.01 in) base of
original equipment urethane along the roof opening module surface.
Fig. 90: Trimming Urethane Adhesive Leaving No More Than 0.5 mm (0.01 in) Base Of Original
Equipment Urethane
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the water channel is free from any foreign material.
2. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the roof opening panel module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Be sure to use the same brand of cure-rate products for the adhesive and
primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. Refer to the
Materials Chart in this procedure.
3. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification.
Fig. 91: Cutting Urethane Adhesive Applicator Tip To Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will
apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead.
4. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps
in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead.
Fig. 92: Making Sure That All Gaps In Urethane Adhesive Are Smoothed Into One Continuous
Bead
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Position side trim panel to best overall appearance.
5. Insert the front of the trim panel into the front trim seal then rotate the rear of the side trim panel down to
engage. Apply the side trim panel assembly to the roof module.
6. Install the end cap.
7. Work the glass panel down using only vertical pressure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Roof Opening Panel - Edge & MKX
8. Install the ditch moldings and clip strip.
ROOF OPENING PANEL TRIM - FIXED GLASS, INTERIOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Position the sunshade(s) to the fully OPEN position.
2. Carefully bend/pry the trim ring from its hook-and-loop tape pads.
NOTE:
A piece of paper may assist in keeping the hook-and-loop tape from
sticking while aligning the trim ring. Once the trim ring is in position (front
and rear locating pins lined up), remove the paper and press the trim
firmly in place.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:09:40 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE
3.5L - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Motorcraft High Performance
WSE-M4G323-A6
Engine RTV Silicone
TA-357
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine
Coolant with Bittering Agent
(bittered in US only)
WSS-M97B51-A1
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A
(Canada); or equivalent (yellow
color)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft
WSS-M2C930-A
SAE 5W-20 Super Premium
Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Thread Sealant with PTFE
WSK-M2G350-A2
TA-24
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Engine
Displacement
No. cylinders
Bore/stroke
Fire order
Oil pressure
Spark plug
Compression ratio
Engine weight (without accessory drive
components)
Fill Capacity
-
-
5.2L (5.5 qt) includes filter change
-
Specification
3.5L (4V) (214 CID)
6
92.5/86.7 mm (3.641/3.413 in)
1-4-2-5-3-6
Minimum 30 psi @ 1,500 rpm with engine at
normal operating temperature
AYSF-22FM Gap = 1.29-1.45 mm (0.051-0.057 in)
10.3:1
161 kg (355 lb)
Engine and transaxle weight (without accessory
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:23
11:32:07 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
drive components)
Cylinder Head and Valve Train
Cylinder head gasket surface flatness
Combustion chamber volume
Valve tappet clearance - intake
Valve tappet clearance - exhaust
Valve guide bore inner diameter
Valve stem diameter - intake
Valve stem diameter - exhaust
Valve stem-to-guide clearance - intake
Valve stem-to-guide clearance - exhaust
Valve head diameter - intake
Valve head diameter - exhaust
Valve face runout
Valve face angle
Valve seat width - intake
Valve seat width - exhaust
Valve seat runout
Valve seat angle
Valve spring free length (approx.)
Valve spring compression pressure (N @ spec.
length)
Valve spring installed height
Valve spring installed height pressure (N @ spec.
length)
Valve spring installed pressure - service limit
Camshaft
Theoretical valve lift @ 0 lash
Lobe lift - intake
Lobe lift - exhaust
260.8 kg (575 lb)
a
55.84 cc (3.41 CI)
0.15-0.25 mm
(0.006-0.01 in)
0.300-0.400 mm
(0.0118-0.0157 in)
5.519-5.549 mm
(0.217-0.218 in)
5.479-5.497 mm
(0.2157-0.2164 in)
5.466-5.484 mm
(0.2151-0.2159 in)
0.022-0.070 mm
(0.0008-0.0027 in)
0.035-0.083 mm
(0.0013-0.032 in)
36.82-37.18 mm
(1.44-1.46 in)
30.82-31.18 mm
(1.21-1.22 in)
0.05 mm (0.0001 in)
90.50-91.50 degrees
1.3-1.5 mm
(0.051-0.059 in)
1.4-1.6 mm
(0.055-0.062 in)
0.04 mm
(0.0001 in) MAX
89.0-91.0 degrees
48.4 mm (1.90 in)
510 N @ 27.32 mm
(115 lbs @ 1.08 in)
37.0 mm (1.45 in)
235 N @ 37.0 mm
(53 lbs @ 1.45 in)
10% force loss @ specified height
9.6798 mm (0.38 in)
9.6798 mm (0.38 in)
9.6798 mm (0.38 in)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:07 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Allowable lobe lift loss
0.062 mm (0.0024 in)
31.0375-31.0625 mm
Camshaft journal bore inside diameter - 1st journal
(1.221-1.222 in)
Camshaft journal bore inside diameter 25.9875-26.0125 mm
intermediate journals
(1.023-1.024 in)
30.993-31.013 mm
Camshaft bearing outside diameter - 1st journal
(1.2202-1.2209 in)
Camshaft bearing outside diameter - intermediate 25.937-25.963 mm
journals
(1.021-1.022 in)
Camshaft journal-to-bearing clearance, 1st journal - 0.070 mm
service limit
(0.0027 in) MAX
Camshaft journal-to-bearing clearance, intermediate
0.0755 mm (0.0029 in) MAX
journals - service limit
Runout
0.040 mm (0.0015 in) MAX
0.032-0.170 mm
End play - standard
(0.0012-0.0066 in)
End play - service limit
0.190 mm (0.00748 in) MAX
Cylinder Block
Cylinder bore diameter - grade 1
Cylinder bore diameter - grade 2
Cylinder bore diameter - grade 3
Cylinder bore maximum taper
Cylinder bore maximum out-of-round - limit
Cylinder bore maximum out-of-round - service limit Main bearing bore inside diameter
72.400-72.424 mm (2.8503-2.8513 in)
Head gasket surface flatness
Head gasket surface finish
Crankshaft
Main bearing journal diameter
67.5 mm (2.657 in)
Main bearing journal maximum taper
0.004 mm (0.00015 in)
Main bearing journal maximum out-of-round
0.006 mm (0.00023 in)
Main bearing journal-to-cylinder block clearance
Connecting rod journal diameter
55.983-56.003 mm (2.204-2.205 in)
Connecting rod journal maximum taper
0.004 mm (0.00015 in)
Connecting rod journal maximum out-of-round
0.006 mm (0.00023 in)
Crankshaft maximum end play
0.101-0.291 mm (0.0039-0.0114 in)
Piston and Connecting Rod
92.476-92.490 mm
Piston diameter - single grade
(3.6407-3.6413 in)
0.010 to 0.044 mm
Piston-to-cylinder bore clearance
(0.0003-0.0017 in)
Piston ring end gap - compression (top, gauge
0.15-0.25 mm
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:07 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
diameter)
Piston ring end gap - compression (bottom, gauge
diameter)
Piston ring end gap - oil ring (steel rail, gauge
diameter)
(0.0059-0.0098 in)
0.30-0.55 mm (0.0118-0.0216 in)
0.15-0.45 mm
(0.0059-0.0177 in)
1.230-1.25 mm
Piston ring groove width - compression (top)
(0.0484-0.0492 in)
1.530-1.55 mm
Piston ring groove width - compression (bottom)
(0.0602-0.0610 in)
2.53-2.55 mm
Piston ring groove width - oil ring
(0.0996-0.1003 in)
1.17-1.19 mm
Piston ring width - upper comp ring
(0.0460-0.0468 in)
1.47-1.49 mm
Piston ring width - lower comp ring
(0.0578-0.0586 in)
Piston ring-to-groove clearance (upper and lower
0.040-0.080 mm
compression rings)
(0.0015-0.0031 in)
23.002-23.006 mm
Piston pin bore diameter
(0.9055-0.9057 in)
22.998-23.000 mm
Piston pin diameter
(0.9054-0.9055 in)
Piston pin length
55.975 mm (2.203 in)
0.002 to 0.008 mm
Piston pin-to-piston fit
(0.00007-0.0003 in)
Piston-to-connecting rod clearance
2.7 mm (0.1 in)
0.007-0.021 mm
Connecting rod-to-pin clearance - standard
(0.0002-0.0008 in)
Connecting rod-to-pin clearance - service limit
23.007-23.019 mm
Connecting rod pin bore diameter
(0.905-0.906 in)
Connecting rod length (center-to-center)
152.68 mm (6.01 in)
Connecting rod maximum allowed bend
0.038 mm (0.0014 in)
Connecting rod maximum allowed twist
0.050 mm (0.0019 in)
59.866-59.872 mm
Connecting rod bearing bore diameter - grade 1
(2.3569-2.3571 in)
59.873-59.879 mm
Connecting rod bearing bore diameter - grade 2
(2.3572-2.3574 in)
59.880-59.886 mm
Connecting rod bearing bore diameter - grade 3
(2.3574-2.3577 in)
Connecting rod bearing-to-crankshaft clearance
Connecting rod side clearance (assembled to crank) 0.175-0.425 mm
- standard
(0.0068-0.0167 in)
Connecting rod side clearance (assembled to crank) Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:07 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
- service limit
a Refer to the appropriate procedure in this service information.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
A/C compressor bolts and nut
A/C compressor stud
A/C pressure tube fitting nuts
A/C tube bracket bolt
Accessory drive belt tensioner bolts
Battery cable power feed cable nut
Block heater
Nm
Camshaft bearing cap boltsa
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor bolts
Camshaft sprocket boltsa
Catalytic converter bracket bolt
Catalytic converter bracket nut
Catalytic converter bracket-to-converter bolts
Catalytic converter bracket-to-engine block bolts
Catalytic converter nuts
Catalytic converter-to-exhaust manifold studs
Coolant pump boltsa
Crankshaft rear seal retainer plate boltsa
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor bolt
CKP sensor heat shield nuts
Crankshaft pulley bolta
Cylinder block drain plug (large)
Cylinder block drain plug (small)b
Cylinder head boltsa
Cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
Degas bottle bolts
Engine front cover boltsa
Engine lifting eye bolts
Engine mount brace bolt and nut
Engine mount bracket boltsa
Engine mount studs
Engine mount-to-engine nuts
Engine mount-to-frame bolts
lb-ft
lb-in
25
9
8
8
11
8
40
10
55
40
20
48
40
25
-
18
8
30
41
30
15
35
30
18
-
80
71
71
71
89
-
10
10
40
-
30
-
89
89
-
10
9
24
20
18
63
90
18
15
13
46
66
89
80
-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:07 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Engine oil filterc
Engine oil pressure (EOP) switch
Engine roll-restrictor heat shield nut
Engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt
Engine roll restrictor-to-transaxle through bolt
Exhaust manifold heat shield bolts
Exhaust manifold nutsa
Exhaust manifold studs
Exhaust pipe clamp
Exhaust Y-pipe nuts
Flexplate bolts
Front halfshaft nut
Fuel rail bolts
Generator bolt and nut
Generator B+ terminal nut
Ground wire-to-body bolt
Ground wire-to-engine bolt
Halfshaft carrier bearing bracket bolts - all wheel drive (AWD)
Halfshaft carrier bearing bracket bolts and stud bolt - front wheel drive
(FWD)
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
Heat shield nut and bolt
Ignition coil-on-plug bolts
Intermediate steering shaft bolt
Knock sensor (KS) bolts
Lower ball joint bolts
Lower bumper nuts
Lower intake manifold boltsb
Oil cooler bolts
Oil filter adapter large bolt
Oil filter adapter small bolt
Oil pan boltsa
Oil pan drain plug
Oil pan-to-transaxle bolts
Oil pump bolts
Oil pump screen and pickup tube bolts
Power steering cooler bracket bolt
Power steering pressure (PSP) tube bracket banjo bolt
Power steering pump bolts
Power steering reservoir nuts
18
11
103
90
14
12
40
40
80
350
10
47
6
10
10
40
13
8
76
66
10
9
30
30
59
258
35
30
89
53
89
89
-
55
41
-
48
10
7
23
20
55
9
10
57
10
27
48
10
10
9
48
24
8
35
17
15
41
42
20
35
35
18
-
89
62
80
89
89
89
89
80
71
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Power transfer unit (PTU)
PTU bracket bolts
Radio interference capacitor-to-cowl nut
Radio interference capacitor-to-engine front cover nut
Rear driveshaft-to-PTU flange bolts
Spark plugs
Stabilizer bar link nuts
Starter bolt and stud bolt
Starter B+ terminal nut
Starter S-terminal nut
Subframe bracket bolts
Subframe nuts
Thermostat housing bolts
Tie-rod end nuts
Timing chain guide bolts
Timing chain tensioner bolts
Torque converter-to-flexplate bolts
Transaxle bracket bolts
Transaxle bracket plate bolts
Transaxle mount bracket nuts
Transaxle mount through bolt and nut
Transaxle-to-engine bolts
Valve cover bolts and stud boltsb
90
70
10
10
70
15
90
27
12
5
90
133
10
48
10
10
55
90
90
63
175
48
10
10
-
66
52
52
11
66
20
9
66
98
35
41
66
66
46
129
35
-
89
89
44
89
89
89
89
89
-
Variable camshaft timing (VCT) assembly boltsb
-
-
-
VCT housing boltsa
VCT solenoid bolts
Wiring harness retainer bolt and stud bolt
10
10
-
89
89
Upper intake manifold boltsb
Upper intake manifold bracket-to-engine bolt
Upper intake manifold-to-bracket bolt
a Refer to the appropriate procedure in this service information.
b Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft) plus an additional 180 degrees.
c Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) plus an additional 180 degrees.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ENGINE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
The 3.5L (4V) is a V-6 engine with the following features:
Dual overhead camshafts
Four valves per cylinder
Sequential multi-port fuel injection Sequential Multi-Port Fuel Injection (SFI)
An aluminum lower intake manifold and a composite upper intake manifold
Aluminum cylinder heads
An aluminum, 60-degree V-cylinder block
Timing chain driven coolant pump
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) system
The electronic ignition system with 6 ignition coils
Identification
For quick identification, refer to the safety certification decal.
The decal is located on the LH front door lock face panel.
An engine identification label is also attached to the engine.
The symbol code on the identification tag identifies each engine for determining parts usage; for instance,
engine displacement in liters or cubic inch displacement and model year.
Exhaust Emission Control System
Operation and required maintenance of the exhaust emission control devices used on this engine is covered in
the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
Induction System
The SFI provides the fuel/air mixture needed for combustion in the cylinders. The 6 solenoid-operated fuel
injectors:
are mounted between the fuel rail and the intake manifold.
meter fuel into the air intake stream in accordance with engine demand.
are positioned so that their tips direct fuel just ahead of the engine intake valves.
Valve Train
The valve train uses direct acting mechanical buckets (DAMB). The camshaft lobes are positioned directly
above mechanical buckets which are positioned on top of the valves.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system changes intake camshaft timing dependent on engine speed, load and oil temperature. Oil
pressure advances and retards camshaft timing to improve low-speed and high-speed engine performance,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
engine idle quality and exhaust emissions.
PCV System
All engines are equipped with a closed-type PCV system recycling the crankcase vapors to the upper intake
manifold.
Lubrication System
The engine lubrication system is of the force-feed type in which oil is supplied under full pressure to the
crankshaft, connecting rod bearings, timing chain tensioners and VCT solenoids. The flow of oil to the valve
tappets and valve train is controlled by a restricting orifice located in the head gaskets.
Oil Pump
The lubrication system is designed to provide optimum oil flow to critical components of the engine through its
entire operating range.
The heart of the system is a positive displacement internal gear oil pump.
Generically, this design is known as a gerotor pump, which operates as follows:
The oil pump is mounted on the front face of the cylinder block.
The inner rotor is piloted on the crankshaft post and is driven through flats on the crankshaft.
System pressure is limited by an integral, internally-vented relief valve which directs the bypassed oil
back to the inlet side of the oil pump.
Oil pump displacement has been selected to provide adequate volume to make sure of correct oil pressure
both at hot idle and maximum speed.
The relief valve calibration protects the system from excessive pressure during high-viscosity conditions.
The relief valve is designed to provide adequate connecting rod bearing lubrication under hightemperature and high-speed conditions.
Cooling System
The engine cooling system includes the following:
Radiator
Timing chain driven coolant pump
Electric fan assembly(s)
Degas bottle (aids in maintaining the correct volume of engine coolant)
Coolant thermostat
Coolant hoses
Engine Cylinder Identification
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Engine Cylinder Identification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
ENGINE
For basic engine mechanical concerns, refer to ENGINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
For driveability concerns, refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
VALVE CLEARANCE CHECK
1. Remove the valve covers. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover - LH and Valve Cover - RH.
NOTE:
The valve clearance must be measured with the camshaft at base circle.
The engine will have to be rotated with the crankshaft pulley bolt to bring
each valve to base circle.
2. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location. A midrange clearance is
the most desirable:
Intake: 0.15-0.25 mm (0.006-0.01 in)
Exhaust: 0.300-0.400 mm (0.0118-0.0157 in)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Measuring Each Valve's Clearance Using A Feeler Gauge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The number on the valve tappet reflects the thickness of the valve tappet.
For example, a tappet with the number 3.310 has the thickness of 3.31 mm
(0.13 in).
3. If any of the valve clearances are out of specification, select new tappets using this formula: tappet
thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet thickness - most desirable thickness.
Select the tappets and mark the installation location.
4. If required, install the new selected valve tappets in the marked locations. For additional information,
refer to Valve Tappets.
IN-VEHICLE SERVICING
UPPER INTAKE MANIFOLD
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Identifying Upper Intake Manifold With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
6K817
2
14A464
3
CS16140
4
6K817
5
9D661
6
W503274
Description
PCV hose
Throttle body (TB) electrical connector
(part of 12C508)
Brake booster-to-intake manifold vacuum
hose clamp
Brake booster-to-intake manifold vacuum
hose
Evaporative emissions (EVAP)-to-intake
manifold tube
Upper intake manifold support bracket
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
7
bolt
Engine control wiring harness retainer
(part of 12C508)
-
Fig. 4: Identifying Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
8
9
10
Part Number
W503282
W707083
9S455
11
9H486
Description
Upper intake manifold bolt (5 required)
Upper intake manifold bolt
Upper intake manifold
Upper intake manifold gasket (3
required)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
& FILTERING article.
2. Disconnect the throttle body (TB) electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) tube from the intake manifold.
4. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold.
5. Disconnect the PCV tube from the PCV valve.
6. Detach the wiring harness retainers from the upper intake manifold.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
7. Remove the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt.
8. Remove the 6 bolts and remove the upper intake manifold.
Remove and discard the gaskets.
Clean and inspect all of the sealing surfaces of the upper and lower intake manifold.
INSTALLATION
1. Using new gaskets, install the upper intake manifold and the 6 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 5: Identifying Bolt Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Attach the wiring harness retainers to the upper intake manifold.
4. Connect the PCV tube to the PCV valve.
5. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold.
6. Connect the EVAP tube to the intake manifold.
7. Connect the TB electrical connector.
8. Install the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION &
FILTERING article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
LOWER INTAKE MANIFOLD
Fig. 6: Identifying Lower Intake Manifold With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W503279
2
9439
3
4
5
8A571
W503279
9K461
Description
Thermostat housing-to-lower intake
manifold bolt (3 required)
Lower intake manifold gasket (8
required)
Thermostat housing gasket
Lower intake manifold bolt (10 required)
Lower intake manifold
REMOVAL
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the fuel rail. For additional information, refer to FUEL CHARGING & CONTROLS - 3.5L
article.
4. Remove the air cleaner assembly. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
& FILTERING article.
5. Remove the 3 thermostat housing-to-lower intake manifold bolts.
6. Remove the 10 bolts and the lower intake manifold.
Remove and discard the intake manifold and thermostat housing gaskets.
Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces.
INSTALLATION
1. Using new intake manifold and thermostat housing gaskets, install the lower intake manifold and the 10
bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 7: Installing Lower Intake Manifold Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the 3 thermostat housing-to-lower intake manifold bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Install the air cleaner assembly. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION &
FILTERING article.
4. Install the fuel rail. For additional information, refer to FUEL CHARGING & CONTROLS - 3.5L
article.
5. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
VALVE COVER - LH
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Handle
Tool Number
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Installer, Seal
303-1247/2
Remover, Seal
303-1247/1
Material
Item
Specification
Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
WSE-M4G323-A6
TA-357
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Identifying Valve Cover - LH
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
6853
2
W700497
3
14A464
Description
Crankcase vent tube
Engine control wiring harness retainer
(part of 12C508)
LH variable camshaft timing (VCT)
electrical connector (part of 12C508)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Identifying Valve Cover Components - LH
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
4
5
6
7
8
9
Part Number
6750
6C519
6C535
6C535
6A505
6A559
Description
Oil level indicator
Valve cover stud bolt (11 required)
Spark plug tube seal (3 required)
VCT seal
LH valve cover
LH valve cover gasket
REMOVAL
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the crankcase vent tube.
Remove the LH ignition coils. For additional information, refer to ENGINE IGNITION - 3.5L article.
Remove the oil level indicator.
Disconnect the LH variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid electrical connector.
Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the valve cover and the stud bolts.
Remove the 11 stud bolts and the LH valve cover.
Discard the gasket.
NOTE:
VCT solenoid seal removal shown, spark plug tube seal removal similar.
7. Inspect the VCT solenoid seals and the spark plug tube seals. Remove any damaged seals.
Using the special tools, remove the seal(s).
Fig. 10: Removing Seals Using Special Tools (205-153) & (303-1247/1)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Clean the valve cover, cylinder head and engine front cover sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Installation of new seals is only required if damaged seals were removed
during disassembly of the engine.
NOTE:
Spark plug tube seal installation shown, VCT seal installation similar.
1. Using the special tools, install new VCT solenoid and/or spark plug tube seals.
Fig. 11: Installing VCT Solenoid And/Or Spark Plug Tube Seals Using Special Tools (205-153) &
(303-1247/2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 4
minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To
clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface
prep. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
2. Apply an 8 mm (0.31 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover-to-LH cylinder head joints.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover-To-LH Cylinder Head Joints
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using a new gasket, install the LH valve cover and 11 stud bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 13: Installing LH Valve Cover Stud Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the valve cover and the stud bolts.
Connect the LH VCT solenoid electrical connector.
Install the oil level indicator.
Install the LH ignition coils. For additional information, refer to ENGINE IGNITION - 3.5L article.
Install the crankcase vent tube.
VALVE COVER - RH
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Handle
Tool Number
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Installer, Seal
303-1247/2
Remover, Seal
303-1247/1
Material
Item
Specification
Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
WSE-M4G323-A6
TA-357
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Fig. 14: Identifying Valve Cover - RH
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
Description
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
1
14A464
2
14A464
3
14A464
4
14A464
5
W700497
6
14A464
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch
electrical connector (part of 12C508)
RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connector (part of 12C508)
RH variable camshaft timing (VCT)
electrical connector (part of 12C508)
RH fuel injector electrical connector (3
required) (part of 12C508)
Engine control wiring harness retainer
(part of 12C508)
RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
electrical connector (part of 12C508)
Fig. 15: Identifying Valve Cover Components - RH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
7
8
9
10
11
12
Part Number
6C519
6C520
6C535
6C535
6582
6584
Description
Valve cover stud bolt (10 required)
Valve cover bolt
VCT seal
Spark plug tube seal (3 required)
RH valve cover
RH valve cover gasket
REMOVAL
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the RH ignition coils. For additional information, refer to ENGINE IGNITION - 3.5L article.
Disconnect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector.
Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector and pin-type retainer.
Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Disconnect the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) electrical connector.
Disconnect the 3 RH fuel injector electrical connectors.
Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the RH valve cover and the stud bolts.
Remove the bolt, the 10 stud bolts and the RH valve cover.
Discard the gasket.
NOTE:
VCT solenoid seal removal shown, spark plug tube seal removal similar.
9. Inspect the VCT solenoid seals and the spark plug tube seals. Remove any damaged seals.
Using the special tools, remove the seal(s).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Removing Seals Using Special Tools (205-153) & (303-1247/1)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Clean the valve cover, cylinder head and engine front cover sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Installation of new seals is only required if damaged seals were removed
during disassembly of the engine.
NOTE:
Spark plug tube seal installation shown, VCT seal installation similar.
1. Using the special tools, install new VCT solenoid and/or spark plug tube seals.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Installing VCT Solenoid And/Or Spark Plug Tube Seals Using Special Tools (205-153) &
(303-1247/2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 4
minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To
clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface
prep. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
2. Apply an 8 mm (0.31 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover-to-RH cylinder head joints.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover-To-RH Cylinder Head Joints
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using a new gasket, install the RH valve cover, bolt and the 10 stud bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 19: Installing RH Valve Cover Stud Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the valve cover and the stud bolts.
Connect the 3 RH fuel injector electrical connectors.
Connect the RH VCT electrical connector.
Connect the RH HO2S electrical connector.
Connect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector and pin-type retainer.
Connect the PSP switch electrical connector.
Install the RH ignition coils. For additional information, refer to ENGINE IGNITION - 3.5L article.
LOWER END COMPONENTS - EXPLODED VIEW, CRANKSHAFT PULLEY AND CRANKSHAFT
FRONT SEAL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 20: Exploded View Of Crankshaft Pulley & Crankshaft Front Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
W701512
N806165
6316
6700
Description
Crankshaft pulley bolt
Washer
Crankshaft pulley
Crankshaft front seal
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedures in this service information.
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
3-Jaw Puller
303-D121
Installer, Front Cover Oil Seal
303-335
Replacer, Crankshaft Damper
303-102 (T74P-6316-B)
Strap Wrench
303-D055 (D85L-6000-A)
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
(Canada); or equivalent
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Remove the accessory drive belt and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer to
ACCESSORY DRIVE article.
3. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft bolt and washer.
Discard the bolt.
Fig. 21: Removing Crankshaft Bolt & Washer Using Special Tool (303-D055)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Fig. 22: Identifying Special Tools (303-D121) And Crankshaft Pulley
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate the crankshaft front seal inner lip with clean engine oil.
NOTE:
Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surfaces with clean engine oil.
2. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft pulley.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Installing Crankshaft Pulley
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley washer and new bolt and tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
Fig. 24: Installing Crankshaft Pulley Washer & Bolt Using Special Tools (303-D055)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the accessory drive belt and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer to
ACCESSORY DRIVE article.
CRANKSHAFT FRONT SEAL
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Installer, Crankshaft Vibration
Damper
303-102 (T74P-6316-B)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Installer, Front Crankshaft Seal
303-1251
Remover, Oil Seal
303-409 (T92C-6700CH)
Material
Item
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
-
WSS-M2C930-A
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley.
3. Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface prep.
Fig. 25: Removing Crankshaft Front Seal Using Special Tool (303-409)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Apply clean engine oil to the crankshaft front seal bore in the engine front
cover.
1. Using the Front Crankshaft Seal Installer and Crankshaft Vibration Damper Installer, install a new
crankshaft front seal.
Fig. 26: Installing Crankshaft Front Seal Using Special Tools (303-102) & (303-1251)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley.
LOWER END COMPONENTS - EXPLODED VIEW, FLEXPLATE AND CRANKSHAFT REAR
SEAL
Fig. 27: Exploded View Of Flexplate & Crankshaft Rear Seal - Lower End Components With Torque
Specification
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
W701559
6375
12A227
6701
Description
Flexplate bolt (8 required)
Flexplate
Crankshaft sensor ring
Crankshaft rear seal
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedures in this service information.
FLEXPLATE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
NOTE:
One of the 8 flexplate holes are offset so the flexplate can only be installed
in one position.
3. Remove the bolts and the flexplate.
To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CRANKSHAFT REAR SEAL
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Handle
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Installer, Rear Main Seal
303-1250
303-519 (T95P-6701-EH)
Remover, Crankshaft Rear Oil
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Seal
Slide Hammer
307-005 (T59L-100-B)
Material
Item
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
-
WSS-M2C930-A
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Remove the flexplate. For additional information, refer to Flexplate.
3. Remove the crankshaft sensor ring.
4. Using the Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Remover and Slide Hammer, remove and discard the crankshaft rear
seal.
Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface prep.
Fig. 28: Removing Crankshaft Rear Seal Using Special Tools (303-519) & (307-005)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Lubricate the seal lips and bore with clean engine oil prior to installation.
1. Position the Rear Main Seal Installer onto the end of the crankshaft and slide a new crankshaft rear seal
onto the tool.
Fig. 29: Positioning Special Tool (303-1250) Onto End Of Crankshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Using the Rear Main Seal Installer and Handle, install the new crankshaft rear seal.
Fig. 30: Installing New Crankshaft Rear Seal Using Special Tools (303-1250) & (205-153)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the crankshaft sensor ring.
4. Install the flexplate. For additional information, refer to Flexplate.
ENGINE FRONT COVER
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
3-Jaw Puller
Tool Number
303-D121
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Adapter for 205-529 (Handle)
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Alignment Pins
307-399
Installer, Crankshaft Front Seal
303-1251
Installer, Front Cover Seal
303-335 (T88T-6701-A)
Oil Pan Holding Fixture
303-1295
Remover, Front Hub
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
equivalent
Remover, Halfshaft
205-529
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Remover, Oil Seal
303-409 (T92C-6700CH)
Replacer, Crankshaft Damper
303-102 (T74P-6312-B)
303-D055 (D85L-6000-A)
Strap Wrench
Material
Item
Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
TA-357
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Specification
WSE-M4G323-A6
-
WSS-M2C930-A
-
REMOVAL
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may
cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Recover the A/C system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION & DIAGNOSTICS article.
3. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING &
CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
4. Remove the accessory drive belt, tensioner and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer
to ACCESSORY DRIVE article.
5. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft bolt and washer.
Discard the bolt.
Fig. 31: Removing Crankshaft Bolt & Washer Using Special Tool (303-D055)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Fig. 32: Identifying Special Tools (303-D121) And Crankshaft Pulley
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
Fig. 33: Removing Crankshaft Front Seal Using Special Tool (303-409)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers.
Fig. 34: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the 4 nuts, the exhaust flexible pipe and the Y-pipe as an assembly.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Fig. 35: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield.
Fig. 36: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
11. Remove the roll restrictor through bolt and the 2 roll restrictor-to-transaxle bracket plate bolts.
Fig. 37: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Transaxle Bracket Plate Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Loosen the roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt.
Position the roll restrictor and transaxle bracket plate aside.
Fig. 38: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle bracket.
Fig. 39: Locating Transaxle Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Remove and discard the RH front halfshaft nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 40: Locating RH Front Halfshaft Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Remove the RH stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut.
Fig. 41: Locating Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the RH lower control arm-to-knuckle pinch bolt.
Separate the lower control arm from the knuckle.
Fig. 42: Locating Ball Joint Pinch Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Using the special tool, separate the RH halfshaft from the hub.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 43: Separating RH Halfshaft From Hub Using Special Tool (205-D070)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Using the special tools, separate the RH halfshaft from the intermediate shaft.
Remove the RH halfshaft.
Fig. 44: Separating RH Halfshaft From Intermediate Shaft Using Special Tool (205-529) & (205153)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil.
Install the drain plug and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
20. If equipped, detach the engine block heater harness from the radiator support, the A/C suction tube and
the engine wiring harness.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 45: Identifying Engine Block Heater Harness, Radiator Support, A/C Suction Tube & Engine
Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Remove the engine air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE
AIR DISTRIBUTION & FILTERING article.
22. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover - LH and Valve
Cover - RH.
23. Remove the safety clip from the A/C suction tube fitting.
Disconnect the A/C suction tube fitting and position the tube aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 46: Identifying Safety Clip On A/C Suction Tube Fitting
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Remove the A/C pressure tube bracket bolt.
Fig. 47: Locating A/C Pressure Tube Bracket Bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C pressure tube fitting.
Discard the O-ring seal.
Position the A/C pressure tube aside.
Fig. 48: Locating A/C Pressure Tube Fitting Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Disconnect the 2 engine wiring harness connectors.
Fig. 49: Locating Engine Wiring Harness Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Remove the bolt and the ground wire from the engine front cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 50: Removing/Installing Bolt & Ground Wire From Engine Front Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Remove the nut, the ground wire and the radio interference capacitor wire from the engine front cover
stud.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 51: Removing/installing Nut, Ground Wire & Radio Interference Capacitor Wire From Engine
Front Cover Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Remove the nut, the ground wire and the radio interference capacitor from the cowl stud.
Fig. 52: Removing/Installing Nut, Ground Wire & Radio Interference Capacitor From Cowl Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Disconnect the purge valve electrical connector.
Fig. 53: Locating Purge Valve Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors and position the wiring harness aside.
Fig. 54: Identifying PCM Electrical Connectors & Wiring Harness
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
32. Remove the 3 bolts and position the degas bottle aside.
Fig. 55: Locating Coolant Reservoir Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The area between the front of the engine and the body of the vehicle must
be unobstructed in order to properly remove and install the engine front
cover.
33. Remove the 2 power steering reservoir nuts.
Support the power steering reservoir and hose away from the front of the engine with a length of
mechanic's wire.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 56: Locating Power Steering Reservoir Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
34. Remove the 3 power steering pump bolts.
Support the power steering pump and hose away from the front of the engine with a length of
mechanic's wire.
Fig. 57: Locating Power Steering Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
35. Remove the bolts, the LH and the RH VCT solenoids.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 58: Locating LH & RH VCT Solenoids Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The special tool must be carefully aligned to the mounting bosses on
the oil pan. Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage
to the oil pan.
NOTE:
The special tool and floor jack are used to raise and lower the engine to
access the engine front cover and engine mount bracket fasteners.
36. Position a floor jack and the special tool under the oil pan.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 59: Positioning Floor Jack & Special Tool (303-1295) Under Oil Pan
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The transaxle through bolt must be loosened prior to removing the
engine mount and lowering the front of the engine. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause internal damage to the hydraulic
transaxle mount and possible fluid leakage.
37. Loosen the transaxle mount through bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 60: Identifying Transaxle Mount Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Remove the nut, bolt and engine mount brace.
Fig. 61: Locating Nut, Bolt & Engine Mount Brace
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Remove the 4 engine mount nuts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 62: Locating Engine Mount Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
40. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount.
Fig. 63: Locating Engine Mount Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
41. Remove the 2 bolts and the engine mount bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 64: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
42. Remove the 2 engine mount studs.
Fig. 65: Locating Engine Mount Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
43. Remove the 2 upper engine mount bracket bolts.
Fig. 66: Locating Upper Engine Mount Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
44. Lower the engine to access the lower engine mount bracket bolt.
45. Loosen the lower engine mount bracket bolt and remove the engine mount bracket and bolt as an
assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 67: Locating Lower Engine Mount Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
46. Remove the 22 engine front cover bolts.
Fig. 68: Identifying Engine Front Cover Bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
47. Install 6 of the engine front cover bolts (finger tight) into the 6 threaded holes in the engine front cover.
Tighten the bolts one turn at a time in a criss-cross pattern until the engine front cover-to-cylinder
block seal is released.
Remove the engine front cover.
Fig. 69: Identifying Engine Front Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Raise the engine to the installed position.
CAUTION: Only use a 3M Roloc® Bristle Disk, (2-in white, part number 07528) to
clean the engine front cover. Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes
or any other power abrasive disk to clean the crankshaft rear seal
retainer plate. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make
leak paths.
2. Clean the engine front cover using a 3M Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number 07528) in a
suitable tool turning at the recommended speed of 15,000 rpm.
Thoroughly wash the engine front cover to remove any foreign material, including any abrasive
particles created during the cleaning process.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Place clean, lint-free shop towels over exposed engine cavities.
Carefully remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into
the engine. Any foreign material (including any material created while
cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages or the oil pan,
may cause engine failure.
CAUTION: Do not use wire brushes, power abrasive discs or 3M Roloc® Bristle
Disk (2-in white part number 07528) to clean the sealing surfaces.
These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. They
also cause contamination that will cause premature engine failure.
Remove all traces of the gasket.
3. Clean the sealing surfaces of the cylinder heads, the cylinder block and the oil pan in the following
sequence.
1. Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material.
2. Apply silicone gasket remover and allow to set for several minutes.
3. Remove the silicone gasket remover. A second application of silicone gasket remover may be
required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain.
4. Apply metal surface prep to remove any remaining traces of oil or coolant and to prepare the
surfaces to bond. Do not attempt to make the metal shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is
normal.
5. Make sure the 2 locating dowel pins are seated correctly in the cylinder block.
4. Install the special tools.
Fig. 70: Identifying Special Tool (307-399)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
The engine front cover and bolts 17, 18, 19 and 20 must be installed within
4 minutes of the initial sealant application. The remainder of the engine
front cover bolts and the engine mount bracket bolts must be installed and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
tightened within 35 minutes of the initial sealant application. If the time
limits are exceeded, the sealant must be removed, the sealing area
cleaned and sealant reapplied. To clean the sealing area, use silicone
gasket remover and metal surface prep. Failure to follow this procedure
can cause future oil leakage.
5. Apply a 3.0 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover sealing surfaces including the 3 engine mount bracket bosses.
Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the oil
pan-to-cylinder block joint and the cylinder head-to-cylinder block joint areas of the engine front
cover in 5 places as indicated.
Fig. 71: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover Sealing Surfaces
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure the 2 locating dowel pins are seated correctly in the cylinder
block.
6. Install the engine front cover and bolts 17, 18, 19 and 20.
Tighten in sequence to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Fig. 72: Installing Engine Front Cover & Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the special tools (alignment pins).
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
8. Lower the engine to allow installation of the engine mount bracket and lower bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Install the engine mount bracket and lower bolt as an assembly.
Fig. 73: Locating Lower Engine Mount Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
9. Raise the engine to the installed position.
Install the 2 upper engine mount bracket bolts.
Fig. 74: Locating Upper Engine Mount Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not expose the Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
to engine oil for at least 90 minutes after installing the engine front
cover. Failure to follow this instruction may cause oil leakage.
10. Install the remaining engine front cover bolts. Tighten all of the engine front cover bolts and engine
mount bracket bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten bolts 1 thru 22 to 10 Nm (89 lb-in) and bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten bolts 1 thru 22 to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft) and bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 75 Nm (55 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 75: Identifying Tightening Of Engine Front Cover Bolts & Engine Mount Bracket Bolts In
Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Install the 2 engine mount studs.
Tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb-ft).
Fig. 76: Locating Engine Mount Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install the engine mount bracket and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 77: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Install the engine mount and the 3 bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 78: Locating Engine Mount Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Install the 4 engine mount nuts.
Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Fig. 79: Locating Engine Mount Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Install the engine mount brace, nut and bolt.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:08 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 80: Locating Nut, Bolt & Engine Mount Brace
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Tighten the transaxle mount through bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
Fig. 81: Identifying Transaxle Mount Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
17. Install the LH and RH VCT solenoids and bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 82: Locating LH & RH VCT Solenoids Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Install the power steering pump and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 83: Locating Power Steering Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Install the power steering reservoir and the 2 nuts.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 84: Locating Power Steering Reservoir Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Install the degas bottle and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 85: Locating Coolant Reservoir Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
Fig. 86: Identifying PCM Electrical Connectors & Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Connect the purge valve electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 87: Locating Purge Valve Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Install the radio interference capacitor, the ground wire and the nut to the cowl stud.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 88: Removing/Installing Nut, Ground Wire & Radio Interference Capacitor From Cowl Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Install the radio interference capacitor wire, the ground wire and the nut to the engine front cover stud.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 89: Removing/installing Nut, Ground Wire & Radio Interference Capacitor Wire From Engine
Front Cover Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Install the ground wire and bolt on the engine front cover.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 90: Removing/Installing Bolt & Ground Wire From Engine Front Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Connect the 2 engine wiring harness connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 91: Locating Engine Wiring Harness Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Using a new O-ring seal, connect the A/C pressure tube fitting and install the nut.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 92: Locating A/C Pressure Tube Fitting Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Install the A/C pressure tube bracket and bolt.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Fig. 93: Locating A/C Pressure Tube Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Connect the A/C suction tube fitting.
Install the safety clip onto the fitting.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 94: Identifying Safety Clip On A/C Suction Tube Fitting
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Install the LH and RH valve covers. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover - LH and Valve
Cover - RH.
31. Install the engine air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE
AIR DISTRIBUTION & FILTERING article.
32. If equipped, attach the engine block heater harness to the radiator support, the A/C suction tube and the
engine wiring harness.
Fig. 95: Identifying Engine Block Heater Harness, Radiator Support, A/C Suction Tube & Engine
Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. Align the RH halfshaft splines with the intermediate shaft and push the halfshaft on until the circlip locks
the shafts together.
Pull the inboard halfshaft outward to make sure the circlip is locked.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 96: Pushing Halfshaft On Until Circlip Locks Shafts Together
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the halfshaft nut at this time.
34. Install the RH halfshaft into the hub and install a new halfshaft nut.
Fig. 97: Locating RH Front Halfshaft Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
35. Install the RH lower ball joint into the steering knuckle and install the pinch bolt.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 98: Locating Ball Joint Pinch Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
36. Install the RH stabilizer bar link into the lower control arm and install the nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 99: Locating Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
37. Tighten the RH halfshaft nut to 350 Nm (258 lb-ft).
Fig. 100: Locating RH Front Halfshaft Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Install and the transaxle bracket and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 101: Locating Transaxle Bracket Bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Position the roll restrictor and transaxle bracket plate and install the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 102: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Transaxle Bracket Plate Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
40. Tighten the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 103: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
41. Install the roll restrictor heat shield and the 2 nuts.
Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 104: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
42. Position the Y-pipe assembly in place and install the 4 nuts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 105: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
43. Install the 2 exhaust hangers and tighten the exhaust clamp.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 106: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply clean engine oil to the crankshaft front seal bore in the engine front
cover.
44. Using the special tools, install a new crankshaft front seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 107: Installing Crankshaft Front Seal Using Special Tools (303-102) & (303-1251)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surfaces with clean engine oil.
45. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft pulley.
Fig. 108: Installing Crankshaft Pulley
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
46. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley washer and new bolt and tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 109: Installing Crankshaft Pulley Washer & Bolt Using Special Tools (303-D055)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
47. Install the accessory drive belt, tensioner and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer to
ACCESSORY DRIVE article.
CAUTION: Do not expose the Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
to engine oil for at least 90 minutes after installing the engine front
cover. Failure to follow this instruction may cause oil leakage.
48. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
49. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING &
CABLES article.
50. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION & DIAGNOSTICS article.
TIMING DRIVE COMPONENTS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Camshaft Alignment Tool
Tool Number
303-1248
REMOVAL
NOTE:
During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces,
that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine
failure.
1. Remove the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover.
2. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the variable camshaft timing (VCT)
assemblies as shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 110: Aligning Timing Marks On Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Assemblies
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center (TDC)
position.
3. Install the special tool onto the flats of the LH camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 111: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) Onto Flats Of LH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The special tool will hold the camshafts in the TDC position.
4. Install the special tool onto the flats of the RH camshafts.
Fig. 112: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) Onto Flats Of RH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH VCT housing.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 113: Locating RH VCT Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH VCT housing.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 114: Locating LH VCT Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove and discard the VCT housing seals.
Fig. 115: Locating VCT Housing Seals
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the 2 bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner.
Fig. 116: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
Fig. 117: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the 2 bolts and the lower LH primary timing chain guide.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 118: Locating Lower LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the primary timing chain.
Fig. 119: Locating Primary Timing Chain
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Remove the crankshaft timing chain sprocket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 120: Locating Crankshaft Timing Chain Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove the 2 bolts and the upper LH primary timing chain guide.
Fig. 121: Locating Upper LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Compress the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and install a suitable lockpin to retain the tensioner in
the collapsed position.
Fig. 122: Compressing LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Installing Suitable Lock Pin To
Retain Tensioner In Collapsed Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The VCT bolt and the exhaust camshaft bolt must be discarded and new
ones installed. However, the exhaust camshaft washer is reusable.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
15. Remove and discard the LH VCT assembly bolt and the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt.
Remove the LH VCT assembly, secondary timing chain and the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket as
an assembly.
Fig. 123: Locating LH VCT Assembly Bolt & LH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It is necessary to tilt the special tool toward the rear of the engine to
access the rearmost secondary timing chain tensioner bolt.
16. Remove the 2 bolts and the LH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Fig. 124: Locating LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
17. Compress the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and install a suitable lockpin to retain the tensioner in
the collapsed position.
Fig. 125: Compressing RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Installing Suitable Lock Pin To
Retain Tensioner In Collapsed Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The VCT bolt and the exhaust camshaft bolt must be discarded and new
ones installed. However, the exhaust camshaft washer is reusable.
18. Remove and discard the RH VCT assembly bolt and the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt.
Remove the RH VCT assembly, secondary timing chain and the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket as
an assembly.
Fig. 126: Locating RH VCT Assembly Bolt & RH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It is necessary to tilt the special tool toward the rear of the engine to
access the rearmost secondary timing chain tensioner bolt.
19. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 127: Locating RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH primary timing chain guide.
Fig. 128: Locating RH Primary Timing Chain Guide Lower Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the RH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 129: Locating RH Primary Timing Chain Guide Lower Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It is necessary to tilt the special tool toward the rear of the engine to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
access the rearmost secondary timing chain tensioner bolt.
2. Install the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 130: Locating RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Assemble the RH VCT assembly, the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket and the RH secondary timing chain.
Align the colored links with the timing marks.
Fig. 131: Aligning RH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket & RH Secondary Timing Chain Colored Links
With Timing Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Position the RH secondary timing assembly onto the camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 132: Positioning RH Secondary Timing Assembly Onto Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the new VCT bolt and new exhaust camshaft bolt and the original washers. Tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees.
Fig. 133: Locating RH VCT Assembly Bolt & RH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the lockpin from the RH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Fig. 134: Identifying Lock Pin On RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It is necessary to tilt the special tool toward the rear of the engine to
access the rearmost secondary timing chain tensioner bolt.
7. Install the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 135: Locating LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Assemble the LH VCT assembly, the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket and the LH secondary timing chain.
Align the colored links with the timing marks.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 136: Aligning LH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket & LH Secondary Timing Chain Colored Links
With Timing Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Position the LH secondary timing assembly onto the camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 137: Positioning LH Secondary Timing Assembly Onto Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Install the new VCT bolt and new exhaust camshaft bolt and the original washers. Tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 95
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 138: Locating LH VCT Assembly Bolt & LH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the lockpin from the LH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Fig. 139: Locating Lock Pin On LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install the crankshaft timing chain sprocket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 96
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 140: Locating Crankshaft Timing Chain Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Install the primary timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT
assemblies and the crankshaft sprocket.
Fig. 141: Aligning Timing Marks On VCT Assemblies & Crankshaft Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Install the upper LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 97
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 142: Locating Upper LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Install the lower LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 98
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 143: Locating Lower LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Install the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
Fig. 144: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Reset the primary timing chain tensioner.
Rotate the lever counterclockwise.
Using a soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger.
Align the hole in the lever with the hole in the tensioner housing.
Install a suitable lockpin.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 99
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 145: Compressing Plunger Using A Soft-Jawed Vise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to rotate the crankshaft slightly to remove slack from
the timing chain and install the tensioner.
18. Install the primary tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Remove the lockpin.
Fig. 146: Locating Primary Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. As a post-check, verify correct alignment of all timing marks.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 100
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 147: Verifying Correct Alignment Of All Timing Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Install new VCT housing seals.
Fig. 148: Locating VCT Housing Seals
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 101
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the dowels on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) housing are
fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Failure to
follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
21. Install the LH VCT housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 149: Identifying LH VCT Housing Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the dowels on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) housing are
fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Failure to
follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
22. Install the RH VCT housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 102
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 150: Identifying RH VCT Housing Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Install the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover.
OIL COOLER
Fig. 151: Exploded View Of Oil Cooler With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part Number
W503277
15161
8N021
8B274
15161
6A642
6A636
Description
Oil cooler bolt (6 required)
Coolant hose clamp
Coolant hose
Coolant hose
Coolant hose clamp
Oil cooler
Oil cooler gasket (2 required)
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
3. Remove the LH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 103
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
4. Disconnect the 2 coolant hoses from the oil cooler.
CAUTION: If metal or aluminum material is present in the oil cooler, mechanical
concerns exist. Failure to correct these concerns may cause engine
failure. To diagnose mechanical concerns, refer to ENGINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
5. Remove the 6 bolts and the oil cooler.
Discard the gaskets.
Inspect the oil cooler.
Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces.
INSTALLATION
1. Using new gaskets, install the oil cooler and the 6 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Connect the 2 coolant hoses to the oil cooler.
3. Install the LH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
4. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
OIL FILTER ADAPTER
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
Fig. 152: Exploded View Of Engine With Oil Cooler With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
Description
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 104
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
1
2
3
4
5
6
6714
W708607
6895
6K649
6881
6A636
Engine oil filter
Oil filter adapter bolt
Oil filter adapter bolt
O-ring seal
Oil filter adapter
Oil filter adapter gasket
Fig. 153: Exploded View Of Oil Filter Adapter With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part Number
6714
W708607
6895
6K649
6881
6A636
Description
Engine oil filter
Oil filter adapter bolt
Oil filter adapter bolt
O-ring seal
Oil filter adapter
Oil filter adapter gasket
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Remove and discard the engine oil filter.
3. If equipped, remove the engine oil cooler. For additional information, refer to Oil Cooler.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 105
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil filter adapter.
Discard the gasket and O-ring seal.
Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces.
INSTALLATION
1. Using a new gasket and O-ring seal, install the oil filter adapter.
Tighten the large bolt to 57 Nm (42 lb-ft).
Tighten the small bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
NOTE:
Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing
the oil filter.
2. Install a new engine oil filter.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
3. If equipped, install the engine oil cooler. For additional information, refer to Oil Cooler.
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE (EOP) SWITCH
Material
Item
Thread Sealant with PTFE
TA-24
Specification
WSK-M2G350-A2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 106
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 154: Exploded View Of Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
9278
Description
Engine oil pressure (EOP) switch
electrical connector (part of 12C508)
EOP switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Remove the cooling fan assembly. For additional information, refer to ACCESSORY DRIVE article.
3. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
To install, tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Apply thread sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads prior to installation.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD - LH
Material
Item
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31
Specification
-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 107
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 155: Exploded View Of Exhaust Manifold With Torque Specifications - LH
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W713299
2
9Y427
Description
LH exhaust manifold heat shield bolt (3
required)
LH exhaust manifold heat shield
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 108
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
W701706
9431
9448
W701732
LH exhaust manifold nut (6 required)
LH exhaust manifold
LH exhaust manifold gasket
LH exhaust manifold stud (6 required)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the LH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
2. Remove the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). For additional information, refer to ELECTRONIC
ENGINE CONTROLS article.
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH exhaust manifold heat shield.
4. Remove the 6 nuts and the LH exhaust manifold.
Discard the nuts and gasket.
5. Clean and inspect the LH exhaust manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
6. Remove and discard the 6 LH exhaust manifold studs.
Fig. 156: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other
abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These may cause scratches
and gouges resulting in leak paths. Use a plastic scraper to clean the
sealing surfaces.
7. Clean the exhaust manifold mating surface of the cylinder head with metal surface prep. Follow the
directions on the packaging.
INSTALLATION
1. Install 6 new LH exhaust manifold studs.
Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Failure to tighten the exhaust manifold nuts to specification a second time
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 109
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
will cause the exhaust manifold to develop an exhaust leak.
2. Using a new gasket, install the LH exhaust manifold and 6 new nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the sequence
shown:
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 157: Installing LH Exhaust Manifold Nuts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the LH exhaust manifold heat shield and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft).
4. Install the LH HO2S. For additional information, refer to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS
article.
5. Install the LH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD - RH
Material
Item
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31
Specification
-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 110
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 158: Exploded View Of Exhaust Manifold - RH With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
3
4
5
W701706
9430
9448
W701732
Description
RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
electrical connector
RH exhaust manifold nut (6 required)
RH exhaust manifold
RH exhaust manifold gasket
RH exhaust manifold stud (6 required)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
2. Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. Remove the 6 nuts and the RH exhaust manifold.
Discard the nuts and gasket.
4. Clean and inspect the RH exhaust manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
5. Remove and discard the 6 RH exhaust manifold studs.
Fig. 159: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 111
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These may cause scratches
and gouges resulting in leak paths. Use a plastic scraper to clean the
sealing surfaces.
6. Clean the exhaust manifold mating surface of the cylinder head with metal surface prep. Follow the
directions on the packaging.
INSTALLATION
1. Install 6 new RH exhaust manifold studs.
Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Failure to tighten the exhaust manifold nuts to specification a second time
will cause the exhaust manifold to develop an exhaust leak.
2. Using a new gasket, install the RH exhaust manifold and 6 new nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the sequence
shown:
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 160: Installing RH Exhaust Manifold Nuts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Connect the RH HO2S electrical connector.
4. Install the RH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 112
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
ENGINE MOUNT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Oil Pan Holding Fixture
Tool Number
303-1295
Fig. 161: Identifying Engine Mount Components With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
Description
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 113
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
W807658
W709603
8A080
W520102
6K075
W712334
W712511
W712507
6F012
Degas bottle-to-fender bolt (2 required)
Degas bottle-to-washer bottle bolt
Degas bottle
Engine mount brace nut
Engine mount brace
Engine mount-to-engine nut (4 required)
Engine mount brace bolt
Engine mount-to-frame bolt (3 required)
Engine mount
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 162: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 4 nuts, the exhaust flexible pipe and the Y-pipe as an assembly.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 163: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 114
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield.
To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Fig. 164: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Loosen the roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt.
To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
Fig. 165: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the roll restrictor through bolt and the 2 roll restrictor-to-transaxle bracket plate bolts.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 115
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 166: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Transaxle Bracket Plate Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle bracket.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 167: Locating Transaxle Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The special tool must be carefully aligned to the mounting bosses on
the oil pan. Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage
to the oil pan.
8. Position a floor jack and the special tool under the oil pan.
Fig. 168: Positioning Floor Jack & Special Tool (303-1295) Under Oil Pan
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the 3 bolts and position the engine coolant degas bottle aside.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
10. Remove the nut, bolt and engine mount brace.
To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 116
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 169: Locating Nut, Bolt & Engine Mount Brace
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the 4 engine mount nuts.
To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Fig. 170: Locating Engine Mount Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 171: Locating Engine Mount Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 117
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
OIL PUMP
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Camshaft Alignment Tool
Tool Number
303-1248
REMOVAL
NOTE:
During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces,
that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine
failure.
1. Remove the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover.
2. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the variable camshaft timing (VCT)
assemblies as shown.
Fig. 172: Aligning Timing Marks On Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Assemblies
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center (TDC)
position.
3. Install the special tool onto the flats of the LH camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 118
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 173: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) Onto Flats Of LH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The special tool will hold the camshafts in the TDC position.
4. Install the special tool onto the flats of the RH camshafts.
Fig. 174: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) Onto Flats Of RH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH VCT housing.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:09 AM
Page 119
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 175: Locating RH VCT Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH VCT housing.
Fig. 176: Locating LH VCT Housing
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 120
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove and discard the VCT housing seals.
Fig. 177: Locating VCT Housing Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the 2 bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner.
Fig. 178: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 121
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 179: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the 2 bolts and the lower LH primary timing chain guide.
Fig. 180: Locating Lower LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the primary timing chain.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 122
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 181: Locating Primary Timing Chain
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Remove the crankshaft timing chain sprocket.
Fig. 182: Locating Crankshaft Timing Chain Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Remove the 2 oil pump screen and pickup tube bolts.
Fig. 183: Locating Oil Pump Screen & Pickup Tube Bolts & Rotating Oil Pump Clockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Remove the 3 oil pump bolts.
Rotate the oil pump clockwise and separate the oil pump from the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
Remove the oil pump.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 123
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Discard the oil pump screen and pickup tube O-ring seal.
Fig. 184: Locating Oil Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Install a new oil pump screen and pickup tube O-ring seal prior to
installing the oil pump.
1. Position the oil pump onto the crankshaft and rotate counterclockwise to position the pump onto the oil
pump screen and pickup tube.
Install the 3 bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 185: Locating Oil Pump Screen & Pickup Tube Bolts & Rotating Oil Pump Counterclockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the 2 oil pump screen and pickup tube bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 124
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 186: Locating Oil Pump Screen & Pickup Tube Bolts & Rotating Oil Pump Clockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the crankshaft timing chain sprocket.
Fig. 187: Locating Crankshaft Timing Chain Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the primary timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT
assemblies and the crankshaft sprocket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 125
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 188: Aligning Timing Marks On VCT Assemblies & Crankshaft Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 189: Locating Lower LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
Fig. 190: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Reset the primary timing chain tensioner.
Rotate the lever counterclockwise.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 126
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Using a soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger.
Align the hole in the lever with the hole in the tensioner housing.
Install a suitable lockpin.
Fig. 191: Compressing Plunger Using A Soft-Jawed Vise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to rotate the crankshaft slightly to remove slack from
the timing chain and install the tensioner.
8. Install the primary tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Remove the lockpin.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 127
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 192: Locating Primary Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. As a post-check, verify correct alignment of all timing marks.
Fig. 193: Verifying Correct Alignment Of All Timing Marks
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 128
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Install new VCT housing seals.
Fig. 194: Locating VCT Housing Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the dowels on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) housing are
fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Failure to
follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
11. Install the LH VCT housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 195: Identifying LH VCT Housing Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the dowels on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) housing are
fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Failure to
follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
12. Install the RH VCT housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 129
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 196: Identifying RH VCT Housing Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Install the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover.
REMOVAL
ENGINE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Disconnect Tool, Transmission
Cooler Tube
307-569
Engine Lifting Bracket
303-1245
Heavy Duty Floor Crane
014-00071 or equivalent
Powertrain Lift
014-00765
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 130
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
equivalent
Remover, Front Hub
Remover, Halfshaft (Extension)
205-243 (T89P-3415-A)
Remover, Halfshaft (Plate)
205-290 (T89P-3415-B)
Slide Hammer
100-001 (T50T-100-A)
Spreader Bar
303-D089 (D93P-6001-A3) or
equivalent
Tie-Rod End Remover
211-105
Universal Adapter Brackets
014-0001
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
All vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 131
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Recover the air conditioning system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION & DIAGNOSTICS article.
3. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
4. Drain the engine cooling system. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
5. Remove the accessory drive belt and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer to
ACCESSORY DRIVE article.
6. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose and drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Fig. 197: Identifying Power Steering Cooler Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the degas bottle. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
8. Remove the engine air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE
AIR DISTRIBUTION & FILTERING article.
9. Remove the battery tray. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES
article.
10. Disconnect the battery harness electrical connector.
Fig. 198: Identifying Battery Harness Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the nut and disconnect the power feed from the battery terminal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 132
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 199: Locating Power Feed To Battery Terminal And Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Remove the bolt and the ground wire.
Detach the 2 wiring harness retainers from the cowl.
Fig. 200: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainers From Cowl
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the upper intake manifold.
Fig. 201: Identifying Vacuum Hose From Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Disconnect the upper evaporative emissions (EVAP) tube quick connect coupling from the purge valve.
For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 133
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 202: Locating Upper Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Tube Quick Connect Coupling
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Disconnect the upper radiator hose, lower radiator hose and 2 heater hoses from the thermostat housing.
Fig. 203: Locating Upper Radiator Hose, Lower Radiator Hose & Heater Hoses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the transaxle control cable bracket.
Fig. 204: Locating Wiring Harness Retainer From Transaxle Control Cable Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Disconnect the transaxle control cable from the control lever.
Detach the control cable from the bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 134
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 205: Locating Transaxle Control Cable From Control Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Disconnect the transaxle control electrical connector.
Fig. 206: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. If equipped, detach the engine block heater harness retainers from the radiator support and the A/C
suction tube.
Fig. 207: Identifying Engine Block Heater Harness, Radiator Support, A/C Suction Tube & Engine
Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C pressure tube fitting.
Discard the O-ring seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 135
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 208: Identifying A/C Pressure Tube Fitting Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Remove the safety clip from the A/C fitting.
Disconnect the A/C suction tube fitting.
Fig. 209: Identifying Safety Clip On A/C Suction Tube Fitting
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Disconnect the hose from the power steering reservoir.
Fig. 210: Disconnecting Hose From Power Steering Reservoir
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Disconnect the fuel supply tube. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 136
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 211: Identifying Fuel Supply Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Disconnect the fuel hose routing clip from the transaxle stud and position the fuel hose aside.
Fig. 212: Identifying Fuel Hose Routing Clip From Transaxle Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Disconnect the 2 engine wiring harness electrical connectors.
Detach the electrical connector from the LH valve cover.
Fig. 213: Identifying Engine Wiring Harness Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Remove the oil level indicator.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 137
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 214: Identifying Oil Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the RH valve cover stud bolt.
Fig. 215: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From RH Valve Cover Stud Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Remove the bolt and the ground wire from the engine front cover.
Fig. 216: Removing/Installing Bolt & Ground Wire From Engine Front Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Remove the nut, the ground wire and the radio interference capacitor wire from the engine front cover
stud.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 138
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 217: Removing/installing Nut, Ground Wire & Radio Interference Capacitor Wire From
Engine Front Cover Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers.
Fig. 218: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Remove the 4 nuts and the exhaust flexible pipe and Y-pipe as an assembly.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Fig. 219: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
32. Remove the 3 pin-type retainers, the 7 screws and the radiator splash shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 139
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 220: Locating Push Pin Fasteners & Front Splash Shield Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. Remove the LH inner splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY PANELS
article.
34. Remove the 2 secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Fig. 221: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
35. Using the special tool, disconnect the transmission cooling tubes.
Fig. 222: Disconnecting Transmission Cooling Tubes Using Special Tool (307-569)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
36. Remove the 4 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 140
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 223: Locating Oil Pan-To-Transaxle Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
37. Remove the 2 fasteners and the inspection cover.
Fig. 224: Locating Oil Fasteners On Inspection Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Remove and discard the 3 torque converter bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 141
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 225: Locating Torque Converter Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil.
Install the drain plug and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
Fig. 226: Locating Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
40. Remove and discard the engine oil filter.
Fig. 227: Identifying Engine Oil Filter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
41. Remove the power steering cooler bracket bolt from the RH side of the subframe.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 142
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 228: Identifying Power Steering Cooler Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
NOTE:
Index-mark the driveshaft for installation.
42. Remove the 4 bolts and support the driveshaft with a length of mechanic's wire.
Fig. 229: Locating Driveshaft Aside Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
43. Remove and discard the RH front halfshaft nut.
Fig. 230: Locating RH Front Halfshaft Nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 143
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
44. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield.
Fig. 231: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
45. Remove the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt.
Fig. 232: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
46. Remove and discard the power steering pressure (PSP) tube-to-pump banjo bolt and the 2 seals.
Fig. 233: Locating Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Tube-To-Pump Banjo Bolt & Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 144
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Do not allow the intermediate shaft to rotate while it is disconnected
from the gear or damage to the clockspring can occur. If there is
evidence that the intermediate shaft has rotated, the clockspring
must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
47. Remove and discard the steering intermediate shaft bolt.
Separate the steering intermediate shaft from the steering gear.
Fig. 234: Identifying Steering Intermediate Shaft Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
48. Remove and discard the cotter pins and tie-rod end nuts.
Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles.
Fig. 235: Separating Tie-Rod Ends From Wheel Knuckles Using Special Tool (211-105)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
49. Remove the 2 stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nuts and separate the stabilizer bar links from the lower
control arms.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 145
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 236: Locating Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
50. Remove the lower control arm-to-knuckle pinch bolts and separate the lower control arms from the
knuckles.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 146
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 237: Locating Ball Joint Pinch Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
51. Remove the 3 RH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 147
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 238: Locating RH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
52. Remove the 3 LH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts and separate the lower bumper from the subframe.
Fig. 239: Locating LH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
53. Position the special tool under the subframe assembly.
Fig. 240: Positioning Special Tool (014-00765) Under Subframe Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
54. Remove the 2 nuts, 4 bolts and the subframe support brackets.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 148
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 241: Locating Subframe Support Brackets, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
55. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
Fig. 242: Locating Front Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
56. Remove the 2 middle subframe nuts.
Fig. 243: Locating Middle Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
57. Using the special tool, lower the subframe assembly from the vehicle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 149
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 244: Positioning Special Tool (014-00765) Under Subframe Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
58. If equipped, disconnect the oil cooler coolant hoses.
Fig. 245: Locating Oil Cooler Coolant Hoses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
59. Using the special tools, separate the LH halfshaft from the transaxle and support the halfshaft with a
length of mechanic's wire.
Fig. 246: Separating LH Halfshaft From Transaxle Using Special Tools (100-001), (205-243) &
(205-290)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
60. Remove the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 150
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 247: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
61. Using the special tool, separate the RH halfshaft from the hub.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 151
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 248: Separating RH Halfshaft From Hub Using Special Tool (205-D070)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
62. Remove the bolt, the nut and the RH catalytic converter support bracket.
Fig. 249: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
63. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft assembly.
Fig. 250: Locating Stud Bolts & RH Halfshaft/Intermediate Shaft Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
AWD vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 152
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
64. Remove the 2 RH halfshaft bearing support bracket bolts and the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft
assembly.
Fig. 251: Locating RH Halfshaft Bearing Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
65. Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor electrical connector.
Fig. 252: Locating RH Catalyst Monitor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
66. Remove the 4 nuts and the RH catalytic converter.
Discard the gasket and the nuts.
Fig. 253: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 153
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
67. Remove the 5 bolts and the power transfer unit (PTU) support bracket.
Fig. 254: Locating Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Support Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
68. Remove the 5 bolts and the PTU.
Fig. 255: Identifying PTU & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
NOTE:
Position a block of wood under the transaxle.
69. Install the special tools.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 154
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 256: Positioning A Block Of Wood Under Transaxle Using Special Tools (014-0001) & (01400765)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
70. Remove the transaxle support insulator through bolt and nut.
Fig. 257: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
71. Remove the 3 nuts, the bolt and the transaxle support insulator bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 155
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 258: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bracket, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
72. Remove the nut, bolt and engine mount brace.
Fig. 259: Locating Nut, Bolt & Engine Mount Brace
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
73. Remove the 4 engine mount nuts.
Fig. 260: Locating Engine Mount Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
74. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 156
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 261: Locating Engine Mount Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
75. Lower the engine and transaxle assembly from the vehicle.
76. Position the starter cable boot back and remove the 2 nuts.
Detach the 2 wire terminals from the starter.
Fig. 262: Identifying Wire Terminals From Starter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
77. Disconnect the wiring harness retainer from the starter motor stud bolt.
Fig. 263: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From Starter Motor Stud Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
78. Remove the bolt, stud bolt and the starter.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 157
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 264: Identifying Bolt, Stud Bolt & Starter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
79. Install the special tool on the LH cylinder head.
Fig. 265: Installing Special Tool (303-1245) On LH Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
80. Using the special tools and a suitable engine crane, remove the engine and transaxle from the lift table.
Fig. 266: Removing Engine & Transaxle From Lift Table Using Special Tools (303-D089, 01400071) & Suitable Engine Crane
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
81. Remove the 2 engine-to-transaxle bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 158
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 267: Locating Engine-To-Transaxle Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
82. Remove the 5 transaxle-to-engine bolts.
Separate the transaxle from the engine.
Fig. 268: Locating Transaxle-To-Engine Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAMSHAFT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
3-Jaw Puller
303-D121
Camshaft Alignment Tool
303-1248
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 159
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Disconnect Tool, Transmission
Cooler Tube
307-569
Handle
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Powertrain Lift
014-00765
Remover, Front Hub
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
equivalent
Remover, Halfshaft (Extension)
205-243 (T89P-3415-A)
Remover, Halfshaft (Plate)
205-290 (T89P-3415-B)
Remover, Oil Seal
303-409 (T92C-6700CH)
Seal Remover
303-1247/1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 160
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Slide Hammer
100-001 (T50T-100-A)
Strap Wrench
303-D055 (D85L-6000-A)
Tie-Rod End Remover
211-105
Universal Adapter Brackets
014-0001
Material
Item
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Specification
-
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 161
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
2. Recover the A/C system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION & DIAGNOSTICS article.
3. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
4. Drain the engine cooling system. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
5. Remove the accessory drive belt and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer to
ACCESSORY DRIVE article.
6. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose and drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Fig. 269: Identifying Power Steering Cooler Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the degas bottle. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
8. Remove the engine air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE
AIR DISTRIBUTION & FILTERING article.
9. Remove the battery tray. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES
article.
10. Disconnect the battery harness electrical connector.
Fig. 270: Identifying Battery Harness Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the nut and disconnect the power feed from the battery terminal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 162
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 271: Locating Power Feed To Battery Terminal And Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Remove the bolt and the ground wire.
Detach the 2 wiring harness retainers from the cowl.
Fig. 272: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainers From Cowl
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the upper intake manifold.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 163
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 273: Identifying Vacuum Hose From Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Disconnect the upper evaporative emissions (EVAP) tube quick connect coupling from the purge valve.
For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Fig. 274: Locating Upper Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Tube Quick Connect Coupling
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Disconnect the upper radiator hose, lower radiator hose and 2 heater hoses from the thermostat housing.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 164
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 275: Locating Upper Radiator Hose, Lower Radiator Hose & Heater Hoses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the transaxle control cable bracket.
Fig. 276: Locating Wiring Harness Retainer From Transaxle Control Cable Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Disconnect the transaxle control cable from the control lever.
Detach the control cable from the bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 165
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 277: Locating Transaxle Control Cable From Control Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Disconnect the transaxle control electrical connector.
Fig. 278: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. If equipped, detach the engine block heater harness retainers from the radiator support and the A/C
suction tube.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 166
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 279: Identifying Engine Block Heater Harness, Radiator Support, A/C Suction Tube & Engine
Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C pressure tube fitting.
Discard the O-ring seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:10 AM
Page 167
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 280: Identifying A/C Pressure Tube Fitting Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Remove the safety clip from the A/C fitting.
Disconnect the A/C suction tube fitting.
Fig. 281: Identifying Safety Clip On A/C Suction Tube Fitting
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Disconnect the hose from the power steering reservoir.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 168
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 282: Disconnecting Hose From Power Steering Reservoir
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Disconnect the fuel supply tube. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Fig. 283: Identifying Fuel Supply Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Disconnect the fuel hose routing clip from the transaxle stud and position the fuel hose aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 169
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 284: Identifying Fuel Hose Routing Clip From Transaxle Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Disconnect the 2 engine wiring harness electrical connectors.
Detach the electrical connector from the LH valve cover.
Fig. 285: Identifying Engine Wiring Harness Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Remove the oil level indicator.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 170
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 286: Identifying Oil Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the RH valve cover stud bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 171
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 287: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From RH Valve Cover Stud Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Remove the bolt and the ground wire from the engine front cover.
Fig. 288: Removing/Installing Bolt & Ground Wire From Engine Front Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Remove the nut, the ground wire and the radio interference capacitor wire from the engine front cover
stud.
Fig. 289: Removing/installing Nut, Ground Wire & Radio Interference Capacitor Wire From
Engine Front Cover Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 172
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 290: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Remove the 4 nuts and the exhaust flexible pipe and Y-pipe as an assembly.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Fig. 291: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
32. Remove the 3 pin-type retainers, the 7 screws and the radiator splash shield.
Fig. 292: Locating Push Pin Fasteners & Front Splash Shield Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. Remove the LH inner splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY PANELS
article.
34. Remove the 2 secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 173
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 293: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
35. Using the special tool, disconnect the transmission cooling tubes.
Fig. 294: Disconnecting Transmission Cooling Tubes Using Special Tool (307-569)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
36. Remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil.
Install the drain plug and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 174
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 295: Locating Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
37. Remove and discard the engine oil filter.
Fig. 296: Identifying Engine Oil Filter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Remove the power steering cooler bracket bolt from the RH side of the subframe.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 175
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 297: Identifying Power Steering Cooler Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
NOTE:
Index-mark the driveshaft for installation.
39. Remove the 4 bolts and support the driveshaft with a length of mechanic's wire.
Fig. 298: Locating Driveshaft Aside Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
40. Remove and discard the RH front halfshaft nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 176
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 299: Locating RH Front Halfshaft Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
41. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield.
Fig. 300: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 177
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
42. Remove the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt.
Fig. 301: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
43. Remove and discard the power steering pressure (PSP) tube-to-pump banjo bolt and the 2 seals.
Fig. 302: Locating Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Tube-To-Pump Banjo Bolt & Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not allow the intermediate shaft to rotate while it is disconnected
from the gear or damage to the clockspring can occur. If there is
evidence that the intermediate shaft has rotated, the clockspring
must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
44. Remove and discard the steering intermediate shaft bolt.
Separate the steering intermediate shaft from the steering gear.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 178
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 303: Identifying Steering Intermediate Shaft Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
45. Remove and discard the cotter pins and tie-rod end nuts.
Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles.
Fig. 304: Separating Tie-Rod Ends From Wheel Knuckles Using Special Tool (211-105)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
46. Remove the 2 stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nuts and separate the stabilizer bar links from the lower
control arms.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 179
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 305: Locating Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
47. Remove the lower control arm-to-knuckle pinch bolts and separate the lower control arms from the
knuckles.
Fig. 306: Locating Ball Joint Pinch Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
48. Remove the 3 RH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts.
Fig. 307: Locating RH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 180
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
49. Remove the 3 LH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts and separate the lower bumper from the subframe.
Fig. 308: Locating LH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
50. Position the special tool under the subframe assembly.
Fig. 309: Positioning Special Tool (014-00765) Under Subframe Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
51. Remove the 2 nuts, 4 bolts and the subframe support brackets.
Fig. 310: Locating Subframe Support Brackets, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
52. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 181
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 311: Locating Front Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
53. Remove the 2 middle subframe nuts.
Fig. 312: Locating Middle Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
54. Using the special tool, lower the subframe assembly from the vehicle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 182
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 313: Positioning Special Tool (014-00765) Under Subframe Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
55. If equipped, disconnect the oil cooler coolant hoses.
Fig. 314: Locating Oil Cooler Coolant Hoses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
56. Using the special tools, separate the LH halfshaft from the transaxle and support the halfshaft with a
length of mechanic's wire.
Fig. 315: Separating LH Halfshaft From Transaxle Using Special Tools (100-001), (205-243) &
(205-290)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
57. Using the special tool, separate the RH halfshaft from the hub.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 183
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 316: Separating RH Halfshaft From Hub Using Special Tool (205-D070)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
58. Remove the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts.
Fig. 317: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
59. Remove the bolt, the nut and the RH catalytic converter support bracket.
Fig. 318: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
60. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 184
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 319: Locating Stud Bolts & RH Halfshaft/Intermediate Shaft Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
AWD vehicles
61. Remove the 2 RH halfshaft bearing support bracket bolts and the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft
assembly.
Fig. 320: Locating RH Halfshaft Bearing Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
NOTE:
Position a block of wood under the transaxle.
62. Install the special tools.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 185
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 321: Positioning A Block Of Wood Under Transaxle Using Special Tools (014-0001) & (01400765)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
63. Remove the transaxle support insulator through bolt and nut.
Fig. 322: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
64. Remove the 3 nuts, the bolt and the transaxle support insulator bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 186
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 323: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bracket, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
65. Remove the nut, bolt and engine mount brace.
Fig. 324: Locating Nut, Bolt & Engine Mount Brace
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
66. Remove the 4 engine mount nuts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 187
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 325: Locating Engine Mount Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
67. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount.
Fig. 326: Locating Engine Mount Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
68. Lower the engine and transaxle assembly from the vehicle.
69. If equipped, detach the engine block heater wiring harness retainers and position the harness aside.
70. Disconnect the PCV hose from the PCV valve.
Fig. 327: Identifying PCV Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
71. Disconnect the throttle body (TB) electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 188
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 328: Locating Throttle Body Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
72. Detach the wiring harness retainers from the upper intake manifold.
Fig. 329: Locating Wiring Harness Retainers From Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
73. Remove the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt.
Fig. 330: Locating Upper Intake Manifold Support Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
74. Remove the 6 bolts and the upper intake manifold in the following sequence.
Discard the gaskets.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 189
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 331: Identifying Bolt Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
75. Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor electrical connector.
Fig. 332: Locating RH Catalyst Monitor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
76. Disconnect the PSP switch electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 190
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 333: Locating PSP Switch Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
77. Disconnect the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid electrical connector.
Fig. 334: Locating RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
78. Disconnect the 3 RH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Fig. 335: Locating RH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
79. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the RH valve cover and stud bolts.
80. Disconnect the LH VCT solenoid electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 191
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 336: Locating LH VCT Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
81. Disconnect the 3 LH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Fig. 337: Locating LH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
82. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the LH valve cover and stud bolts.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
83. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 coil-on-plugs.
Fig. 338: Locating Coil-On-Plugs & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 192
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
84. Remove the 11 stud bolts and the LH valve cover.
Discard the gasket.
Fig. 339: Locating LH Valve Cover Stud Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
85. Remove the bolt, the 10 stud bolts and the RH valve cover.
Discard the gasket.
Fig. 340: Locating RH Valve Cover Stud Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
VCT solenoid seal removal shown, spark plug tube seal removal similar.
86. Inspect the VCT solenoid seals and the spark plug tube seals. Install new seals if damaged.
Using the special tools, remove the seal(s).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 193
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 341: Removing Seals Using Special Tools (205-153) & (303-1247/1)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
87. Remove the 3 bolts and the power steering pump.
Fig. 342: Locating Power Steering Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
88. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner.
Fig. 343: Locating Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
89. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft bolt and washer.
Discard the bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 194
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 344: Removing Crankshaft Bolt & Washer Using Special Tool (303-D055)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
90. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Fig. 345: Identifying Special Tools (303-D121) And Crankshaft Pulley
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 195
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
91. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
Fig. 346: Removing Crankshaft Front Seal Using Special Tool (303-409)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
92. Remove the 2 bolts and the engine mount bracket.
Fig. 347: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
93. Remove the 2 engine mount studs.
Fig. 348: Locating Engine Mount Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 196
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
94. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount bracket.
Fig. 349: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
95. Remove the 22 engine front cover bolts.
Fig. 350: Identifying Engine Front Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
96. Install 6 of the engine front cover bolts (finger tight) into the 6 threaded holes in the engine front cover.
Tighten the bolts one turn at a time in a criss-cross pattern until the engine front cover-to-cylinder
block seal is released.
Remove the engine front cover.
Fig. 351: Identifying Engine Front Cover Bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 197
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Only use a 3M Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number 07528) to
clean the engine front cover. Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes
or any other power abrasive disk to clean the engine front cover.
These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths.
97. Clean the engine front cover using a 3M Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number 07528) in a
suitable tool turning at the recommended speed of 15,000 rpm.
Thoroughly wash the engine front cover to remove any foreign material, including any abrasive
particles created during the cleaning process.
CAUTION: Place clean, lint-free shop towels over exposed engine cavities.
Carefully remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into
the engine. Any foreign material (including any material created while
cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages or the oil pan,
may cause engine failure.
CAUTION: Do not use wire brushes, power abrasive discs or 3M Roloc® Bristle
Disk (2-in white part number 07528) to clean the sealing surfaces.
These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. They
also cause contamination that will cause premature engine failure.
Remove all traces of the gasket.
98. Clean the sealing surfaces of the cylinder block in the following sequence.
1. Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material.
2. Apply silicone gasket remover and allow to set for several minutes.
3. Remove the silicone gasket remover. A second application of silicone gasket remover may be
required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain.
4. Apply metal surface prep to remove any remaining traces of oil or coolant and to prepare the
surfaces to bond. Do not attempt to make the metal shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is
normal.
5. Make sure the 2 locating dowel pins are seated correctly in the cylinder block.
99. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the variable camshaft timing (VCT)
assemblies as shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 198
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 352: Aligning Timing Marks On Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Assemblies
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center (TDC)
position.
100. Install the special tool onto the flats of the LH camshafts.
Fig. 353: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) Onto Flats Of LH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The special tool will hold the camshafts in the TDC position.
101. Install the special tool onto the flats of the RH camshafts.
Fig. 354: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) Onto Flats Of RH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 199
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
102. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH VCT housing.
Fig. 355: Locating RH VCT Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
103. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH VCT housing.
Fig. 356: Locating LH VCT Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
104. Remove and discard the VCT housing seals.
Fig. 357: Locating VCT Housing Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
105. Remove the 2 bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 200
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 358: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
106. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
Fig. 359: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
107. Remove the 2 bolts and the lower LH primary timing chain guide.
Fig. 360: Locating Lower LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
108. Remove the primary timing chain.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 201
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 361: Locating Primary Timing Chain
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
LH camshafts
109. Compress the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and install a suitable lockpin to retain the tensioner in
the collapsed position.
Fig. 362: Compressing LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Installing Suitable Lock Pin To
Retain Tensioner In Collapsed Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The VCT bolt and the exhaust camshaft bolt must be discarded and new
ones installed. However, the exhaust camshaft washer is reusable.
110. Remove and discard the LH VCT assembly bolt and the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt.
Remove the LH VCT assembly, secondary timing chain and the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket as
an assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 202
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 363: Locating LH VCT Assembly Bolt & LH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
When the special tool is removed, valve spring pressure will rotate the LH
camshafts approximately 3 degrees to a neutral position.
111. Remove the special tool from the LH camshafts.
Fig. 364: Removing Special Tool (303-1248) From LH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during removal or
engine damage may occur.
112. Verify the LH camshafts are in the neutral position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 203
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 365: Verifying LH Camshafts Are In Neutral Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that they are
assembled in their original positions.
113. Remove the bolts and the LH camshaft bearing caps.
Remove the LH camshafts.
Fig. 366: Identifying LH Camshafts Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
RH camshafts
114. Compress the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and install a suitable lockpin to retain the tensioner in
the collapsed position.
Fig. 367: Compressing RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Installing Suitable Lock Pin To
Retain Tensioner In Collapsed Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The VCT bolt and the exhaust camshaft bolt must be discarded and new
ones installed. However, the exhaust camshaft washer is reusable.
115. Remove and discard the RH VCT assembly bolt and the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt.
Remove the RH VCT assembly, secondary timing chain and the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 204
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
an assembly.
Fig. 368: Locating RH VCT Assembly Bolt & RH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
116. Remove the special tool from the RH camshafts.
Fig. 369: Removing Special Tool (303-1248) From RH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during removal or
engine damage may occur.
117. Rotate the RH camshafts counterclockwise to the neutral position.
Fig. 370: Rotating RH Camshafts Counterclockwise To Neutral Position
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 205
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that they are
assembled in their original positions.
118. Remove the bolts and the RH camshaft bearing caps.
Remove the RH camshafts.
Fig. 371: Identifying RH Camshafts Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE TAPPETS
NOTE:
During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces
that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine
failure.
1. Depending on the valve tappets being serviced, remove the LH and/or the RH camshafts. For additional
information, refer to Camshaft.
NOTE:
If the components are to be reinstalled, they must be installed in the same
positions. Mark the components for installation into their original
locations.
2. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 206
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 372: Identifying Valve Tappets From Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VALVE SPRING, RETAINER AND SEAL
Special Tools
Illustration
NOTE:
Tool Name
Tool Number
Compressor, Valve Spring
303-300 (T87C-6565-A)
Compressor, Valve Spring
303-350 (T89P-6565-A)
Compressor, Valve Spring
303-1249
During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces
that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine
failure.
1. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder being serviced. For additional information, refer to Valve
Tappets.
2. Rotate the crankshaft until the piston for the valve being serviced is at the top of its stroke.
NOTE:
If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss
of air pressure will allow the valve to fall into the cylinder. If air pressure
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 207
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
must be removed, support the valve prior to removal or engine damage
may occur.
NOTE:
If the components are to be reinstalled, they must be installed in the same
positions. Mark the components for installation into their original
locations.
NOTE:
If a valve drops into the cylinder, remove the cylinder head. For additional
information, refer to Cylinder Head - RH or Cylinder Head - LH in this
service information.
3. Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air.
4. Using the Valve Spring Compressors, remove the keys, retainer and spring.
Fig. 373: Removing Keys, Retainer & Spring Using Special Tools (303-1249, 303-350, 303-300)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove and discard the valve stem seal.
Fig. 374: Identifying Valve Stem Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CYLINDER HEAD - RH
Material
Item
Specification
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 208
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
-
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
All vehicles
1. Remove the RH camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshaft.
2. If equipped, remove the heat shield and disconnect the block heater electrical connector.
Remove the block heater wiring harness from the engine.
Fig. 375: Identifying Block Heater Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Fig. 376: Locating RH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the RH camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 209
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 377: Locating RH Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the bolt and the ground cable from the RH cylinder.
Fig. 378: Locating Ground Cable From RH Cylinder
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors (3 shown).
Fig. 379: Locating Fuel Injector Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 210
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 380: Locating Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Disconnect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 381: Identifying LH Catalyst Monitor Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the 2 LH catalytic converter bracket bolts.
Fig. 382: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the 4 nuts (3 shown) and the LH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 211
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 383: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the LH cylinder block drain plug.
Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 212
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 384: Locating LH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
12. Remove the 2 RH catalytic converter bracket bolts.
Fig. 385: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
13. Remove the 4 nuts and the RH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Fig. 386: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 213
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
14. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater.
Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block.
Fig. 387: Locating RH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH exhaust manifold heat shield.
Fig. 388: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the 6 nuts and the RH exhaust manifold.
Discard the nuts and exhaust manifold gaskets.
Fig. 389: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 214
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
17. Clean and inspect the RH exhaust manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
18. Remove and discard the 6 RH exhaust manifold studs.
Fig. 390: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH primary timing chain guide.
Fig. 391: Locating RH Primary Timing Chain Guide Lower Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Fig. 392: Locating RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:11 AM
Page 215
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
21. Remove the 2 bolts and the engine lifting eye.
Fig. 393: Locating Engine Lifting Eye & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Index-mark the location of the bracket on the cylinder head for installation.
22. Remove the bolt and the upper intake manifold bracket.
Fig. 394: Locating Upper Intake Manifold Bracket & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Remove the bolt and the RH CMP sensor.
Fig. 395: Locating RH CMP Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 216
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
24. Remove the 4 bolts and the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly.
Fig. 396: 4 Bolts And Fuel Rail
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Remove the 3 thermostat housing-to-lower intake manifold bolts.
Remove the thermostat housing and discard the gasket and O-ring seal.
Fig. 397: Locating Thermostat Housing-To-Lower Intake Manifold Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Remove the 10 bolts and the lower intake manifold.
Discard the gaskets.
Fig. 398: Locating Lower Intake Manifold Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 217
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
27. Disconnect and remove the CHT sensor jumper harness.
Fig. 399: Identifying CHT Sensor Jumper Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the components are to be reinstalled, they must be installed in the same
positions. Mark the components for installation into their original
locations.
28. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head.
Fig. 400: Identifying Valve Tappets From Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Remove and discard the M6 bolt.
Fig. 401: Identifying M6 Bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 218
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Place clean shop towels over exposed engine cavities. Carefully
remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into the engine.
Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning
gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages or the oil pan, may
cause engine failure.
CAUTION: Aluminum surfaces are soft and can be scratched easily. Never place
the cylinder head gasket surface, unprotected, on a bench surface.
NOTE:
The cylinder head bolts must be discarded and new bolts must be
installed. They are a tighten-to-yield designed and cannot be reused.
30. Remove and discard the 8 bolts from the cylinder head.
Remove the cylinder head.
Discard the cylinder head gasket.
Fig. 402: Identifying Cylinder Head Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or
other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic
scraping tool to remove all traces of the head gasket.
NOTE:
Observe all warnings or cautions and follow all application directions
contained on the packaging of the silicone gasket remover and the metal
surface prep.
NOTE:
If there is no residual gasket material present, metal surface prep can be
used to clean and prepare the surfaces.
31. Clean the cylinder head-to-cylinder block mating surfaces of both the cylinder heads and the cylinder
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 219
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
block in the following sequence.
1. Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material with a plastic scraper.
2. Apply silicone gasket remover, following package directions, and allow to set for several minutes.
3. Remove the silicone gasket remover with a plastic scraper. A second application of silicone gasket
remover may be required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain.
4. Apply metal surface prep, following package directions, to remove any remaining traces of oil or
coolant and to prepare the surfaces to bond with the new gasket. Do not attempt to make the metal
shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is normal.
32. Support the cylinder head on a bench with the head gasket side up.
NOTE:
The straightedge used must be flat within 0.0051 mm (0.0002 in) per foot of
tool length.
33. Inspect all areas of the deck face with a straightedge and feeler gauge. The cylinder head must not have
depressions deeper than 0.0254 mm (0.001 in) across a 38.1 mm (1.5 in) square area, or scratches more
than 0.0254 mm (0.001 in).
CYLINDER HEAD - LH
Material
Item
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Specification
-
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
All vehicles
1. Remove the LH camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshaft.
2. If equipped, remove the heat shield and disconnect the block heater electrical connector.
Remove the block heater wiring harness from the engine.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 220
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 403: Identifying Block Heater Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors (3 shown).
Fig. 404: Locating Fuel Injector Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 405: Locating Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Disconnect the LH camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 221
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 406: Locating LH CMP Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Disconnect the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Fig. 407: Locating LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Electrical Connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 222
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Disconnect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 408: Identifying LH Catalyst Monitor Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the wiring harness retainer bolt from the rear of the LH cylinder head.
Fig. 409: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer Bolt From Rear Of LH Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
Fig. 410: Identifying A/C Compressor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 223
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
10. Remove the nut and disconnect the generator B+ cable.
Fig. 411: Identifying Generator B+ Cable & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Disconnect the generator electrical connector.
Fig. 412: Identifying Generator Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the generator.
Fig. 413: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From Generator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector and the wiring harness pin-type
retainer.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 224
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 414: Locating Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness PinType Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Remove the nut, 2 bolts and the A/C compressor.
Fig. 415: Locating A/C Compressor, Bolts & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Remove the nut, bolt and the generator.
Fig. 416: Locating Generator, Bolts & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the 2 LH catalytic converter bracket bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 225
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 417: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Remove the 4 nuts (3 shown) and the LH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Fig. 418: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH exhaust manifold heat shield.
Fig. 419: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Remove the 6 nuts and the LH exhaust manifold.
Discard the nuts and the exhaust manifold gasket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 226
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 420: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Clean and inspect the LH exhaust manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
21. Remove and discard the 6 LH exhaust manifold studs.
Fig. 421: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Remove the LH cylinder block drain plug.
Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 227
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 422: Locating LH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
23. Remove the 2 RH catalytic converter bracket bolts.
Fig. 423: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
24. Remove the 4 nuts and the RH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 228
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 424: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater.
Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block.
Fig. 425: Locating RH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Remove the 4 bolts and the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 229
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 426: Identifying 4 Bolts And Fuel Rail
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Remove the 3 thermostat housing-to-lower intake manifold bolts.
Remove the thermostat housing and discard the gasket and O-ring seal.
Fig. 427: Locating Thermostat Housing-To-Lower Intake Manifold Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Remove the 10 bolts and the lower intake manifold.
Discard the gaskets.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 230
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 428: Locating Lower Intake Manifold Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Remove the bolt and the LH CMP sensor.
Fig. 429: Locating LH CMP Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Remove the 2 bolts and the upper LH primary timing chain guide.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 231
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 430: Locating Upper LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Remove the 2 bolts and the LH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Fig. 431: Locating LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the components are to be reinstalled, they must be installed in the same
positions. Mark the components for installation into their original
locations.
32. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head.
Fig. 432: Identifying Valve Tappets From Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 232
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
33. Remove and discard the M6 bolt.
Fig. 433: Identifying M6 Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Place clean shop towels over exposed engine cavities. Carefully
remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into the engine.
Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning
gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages or the oil pan, may
cause engine failure.
CAUTION: Aluminum surfaces are soft and can be scratched easily. Never place
the cylinder head gasket surface, unprotected, on a bench surface.
NOTE:
The cylinder head bolts must be discarded and new bolts must be
installed. They are a tighten-to-yield designed and cannot be reused.
34. Remove and discard the 8 bolts from the cylinder head.
Remove the cylinder head.
Discard the cylinder head gasket.
Fig. 434: Identifying Cylinder Head Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 233
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic
scraping tool to remove all traces of the head gasket.
CAUTION: Observe all warnings or cautions and follow all application directions
contained on the packaging of the silicone gasket remover and the
metal surface prep.
NOTE:
If there is no residual gasket material present, metal surface prep can be
used to clean and prepare the surfaces.
35. Clean the cylinder head-to-cylinder block mating surfaces of both the cylinder heads and the cylinder
block in the following sequence.
1. Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material with a plastic scraper.
2. Apply silicone gasket remover, following package directions, and allow to set for several minutes.
3. Remove the silicone gasket remover with a plastic scraper. A second application of silicone gasket
remover may be required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain.
4. Apply metal surface prep, following package directions, to remove any remaining traces of oil or
coolant and to prepare the surfaces to bond with the new gasket. Do not attempt to make the metal
shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is normal.
36. Support the cylinder head on a bench with the head gasket side up.
NOTE:
The straightedge used must be flat within 0.0051 mm (0.0002 in) per foot of
tool length.
37. Inspect all areas of the deck face with a straightedge and feeler gauge. The cylinder head must not have
depressions deeper than 0.0254 mm (0.001 in) across a 38.1 mm (1.5 in) square area, or scratches more
than 0.0254 mm (0.001 in).
OIL PAN
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
3-Jaw Puller
303-D121
Handle
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 234
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Remover, Oil Seal
303-409 (T92C-6700CH)
Seal Remover
303-1247/1
Strap Wrench
303-D055 (D85L-6000-A)
Material
Item
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Specification
-
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
All vehicles
1. Remove the engine from the vehicle. For additional information, refer to Engine.
2. Remove the 8 bolts and the flexplate.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 235
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 435: Identifying Flexplate & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the crankshaft sensor ring.
Fig. 436: Identifying Crankshaft Sensor Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Install the engine stand bolts into the cylinder block only. Do not install
the bolts into the oil pan.
4. Mount the engine on a suitable engine stand.
5. If equipped, remove the heat shield and disconnect the block heater electrical connector.
Detach all of the engine block heater harness retainers and remove the harness.
Fig. 437: Identifying Block Heater Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Disconnect the PCV hose from the PCV valve.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 236
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 438: Identifying PCV Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Disconnect the throttle body (TB) electrical connector.
Fig. 439: Locating Throttle Body Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Detach the wiring harness retainers from the upper intake manifold.
Fig. 440: Locating Wiring Harness Retainers From Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 237
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 441: Locating Upper Intake Manifold Support Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the 6 bolts and the upper intake manifold in the following sequence.
Discard the gaskets.
Fig. 442: Identifying Bolt Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Disconnect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector.
Fig. 443: Locating PSP Switch Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
12. Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 238
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 444: Locating RH Catalyst Monitor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
13. Disconnect the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid electrical connector.
Fig. 445: Locating RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Disconnect the 3 RH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Fig. 446: Locating RH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the RH valve cover and stud bolts.
16. Disconnect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 239
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 447: Identifying LH Catalyst Monitor Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Disconnect the LH VCT solenoid electrical connector.
Fig. 448: Locating LH VCT Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Disconnect the 3 LH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Fig. 449: Locating LH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the LH valve cover and stud bolts.
NOTE:
The A/C compressor must remain bolted to the engine block prior to
installing the oil pan.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 240
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
20. Remove the A/C compressor nut and stud.
Fig. 450: Locating A/C Compressor Nut & Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Remove the 3 bolts and the power steering pump.
Fig. 451: Locating Power Steering Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner.
Fig. 452: Locating Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Remove the 4 nuts (3 shown) and the LH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 241
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 453: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
FWD vehicles
24. Remove the 4 nuts and the RH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Fig. 454: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
25. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater.
Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 242
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 455: Locating RH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Remove the LH cylinder block drain plug.
Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block.
Fig. 456: Locating LH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
27. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 coil-on-plugs.
Fig. 457: Locating Coil-On-Plugs & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Remove the 11 stud bolts and the LH valve cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 243
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Discard the gasket.
Fig. 458: Locating LH Valve Cover Stud Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Remove the bolt, the 10 stud bolts and the RH valve cover.
Discard the gasket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 244
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 459: Locating RH Valve Cover Stud Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
VCT solenoid seal removal shown, spark plug tube seal removal similar.
30. Inspect the VCT solenoid seals and the spark plug tube seals. Remove any damaged seals.
Using the special tools, remove the seal(s).
Fig. 460: Removing Seals Using Special Tools (205-153) & (303-1247/1)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft bolt and washer.
Discard the bolt.
Fig. 461: Removing Crankshaft Bolt & Washer Using Special Tool (303-D055)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 245
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
32. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Fig. 462: Identifying Special Tools (303-D121) And Crankshaft Pulley
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
Fig. 463: Removing Crankshaft Front Seal Using Special Tool (303-409)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
34. Remove the 2 bolts and the engine mount bracket.
Fig. 464: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
35. Remove the 2 engine mount studs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 246
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 465: Locating Engine Mount Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
36. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount bracket.
Fig. 466: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
37. Remove the 22 engine front cover bolts.
Fig. 467: Identifying Engine Front Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Install 6 of the engine front cover bolts (finger tight) into the 6 threaded holes in the engine front cover.
Tighten the bolts one turn at a time in a criss-cross pattern until the engine front cover-to-cylinder
block seal is released.
Remove the engine front cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 247
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 468: Identifying Engine Front Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Remove the 16 oil pan bolts.
Fig. 469: Identifying Oil Pan Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
40. Install 2 of the oil pan bolts (finger tight) into the 2 threaded holes in the oil pan.
Alternately tighten the 2 bolts one turn at a time until the oil pan-to-cylinder block seal is released.
Remove the oil pan.
Fig. 470: Installing 2 Of Oil Pan Bolts (Finger Tight) Into 2 Threaded Holes In Oil Pan
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Only use a 3M Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number 07528) to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 248
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
clean the engine front cover and oil pan. Do not use metal scrapers,
wire brushes or any other power abrasive disk to clean the engine
front cover. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak
paths.
41. Clean the engine front cover and oil pan using a 3M Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number 07528)
in a suitable tool turning at the recommended speed of 15,000 rpm.
Thoroughly wash the engine front cover and oil pan to remove any foreign material, including any
abrasive particles created during the cleaning process.
CAUTION: Place clean, lint-free shop towels over exposed engine cavities.
Carefully remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into
the engine. Any foreign material (including any material created while
cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages or the oil pan,
may cause engine failure.
CAUTION: Do not use wire brushes, power abrasive discs or 3M Roloc® Bristle
Disk (2-in white part number 07528) to clean the sealing surfaces.
These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. They
also cause contamination that will cause premature engine failure.
Remove all traces of the gasket.
42. Clean the sealing surfaces of the cylinder block in the following sequence.
1. Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material.
2. Apply silicone gasket remover and allow to set for several minutes.
3. Remove the silicone gasket remover. A second application of silicone gasket remover may be
required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain.
4. Apply metal surface prep to remove any remaining traces of oil or coolant and to prepare the
surfaces to bond. Do not attempt to make the metal shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is
normal.
5. Make sure the 2 locating dowel pins are seated correctly in the cylinder block.
OIL PUMP SCREEN AND PICKUP TUBE
NOTE:
During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces
that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine
failure.
1. Remove the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Oil Pan.
2. Remove the 3 bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
Discard the O-ring seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 249
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 471: Identifying Oil Pump Screen, Pickup Tube & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CRANKSHAFT REAR SEAL WITH RETAINER PLATE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Heavy Duty Floor Crane
014-00071 or equivalent
Remover, Crankshaft Rear Oil
Seal
303-519 (T95P-6701-EH)
Slide Hammer
307-005 (T59L-100-B)
Spreader Bar
303-D089 (D93P-6001-A3) or
equivalent
Material
Item
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Silicone Gasket Remover
Specification
-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 250
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
ZC-30
NOTE:
During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces
that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine
failure.
NOTE:
This procedure is for removal of the crankshaft rear seal and retainer plate and
requires removal of the oil pan. If only removing the crankshaft rear seal, refer
to Crankshaft Rear Seal.
1. Remove the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Oil Pan.
2. Using the Heavy Duty Floor Crane and Spreader Bar, remove the engine from the stand.
Fig. 472: Identifying Heavy Duty Floor Crane and Spreader Bar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 473: Identifying Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 251
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 474: Identifying CKP Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Using the Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Remover and Slide Hammer, remove and discard the rear crankshaft
seal.
Fig. 475: Removing Crankshaft Rear Seal Using Special Tools (303-519) & (307-005)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the 8 crankshaft rear seal retainer bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 252
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 476: Locating Crankshaft Rear Seal Retainer Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Install the 2 M6 oil pan bolts (finger tight) into the 2 threaded holes in the crankshaft rear seal retainer.
Alternately tighten the 2 bolts one turn at a time until the crankshaft rear seal retainer-to-cylinder
block seal is released.
Remove the crankshaft rear seal retainer.
Fig. 477: Identifying M6 Oil Pan Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Only use a 3M Roloc® Bristle Disk, (2-in white, part number 07528) to clean
the crankshaft rear seal retainer plate. Do not use metal scrapers, wire
brushes or any other power abrasive disk to clean the crankshaft rear seal
retainer plate. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak
paths.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 253
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
8. Clean the crankshaft rear seal retainer plate using a 3M Roloc® Bristle Disk, (2-in white, part number
07528) in a suitable tool turning at the recommended speed of 15,000 rpm.
Thoroughly wash the crankshaft rear seal retainer plate to remove any foreign material, including
any abrasive particles created during the cleaning process.
NOTE:
Place clean, lint-free shop towels over exposed engine cavities. Carefully
remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into the engine. Any
foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces) that enters the oil passages or the oil pan, may cause engine
failure.
NOTE:
Do not use wire brushes, power abrasive discs or 3M Roloc® Bristle Disk
(2-in white, part number 07528) to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. They also cause
contamination that will cause premature engine failure. Remove all traces
of the gasket.
9. Clean the sealing surfaces of the cylinder block in the following sequence.
1. Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material.
2. Apply silicone gasket remover and allow to set for several minutes.
3. Remove the silicone gasket remover. A second application of silicone gasket remover may be
required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain.
4. Apply metal surface prep to remove any remaining traces of oil or coolant and to prepare the
surfaces to bond. Do not attempt to make the metal shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is
normal.
DISASSEMBLY
ENGINE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
3-Jaw Puller
303-D121
Camshaft Alignment Tool
303-1248
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 254
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Handle
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Remover, Crankshaft Rear Oil
Seal
303-519 (T95P-6701-EH)
Remover, Oil Seal
303-409 (T92C-6700CH)
Remover, Seal
303-1247/1
Slide Hammer
307-005 (T59L-100-B)
Strap Wrench
303-D055 (D85L-6000-A)
Material
Item
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Specification
-
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 255
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to the exploded view under the assembly
procedure in this service information.
All vehicles
1. Remove the 8 bolts and the flexplate.
Fig. 478: Identifying Flexplate & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Remove the crankshaft sensor ring.
Fig. 479: Identifying Crankshaft Sensor Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using the special tools, remove and discard the rear crankshaft seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 256
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 480: Removing Crankshaft Rear Seal Using Special Tools (303-519) & (307-005)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Install the engine stand bolts into the cylinder block only. Do not
install the bolts into the oil pan.
4. Mount the engine on a suitable engine stand.
5. If equipped, remove the heat shield and disconnect the block heater electrical connector.
Detach all of the engine block heater harness retainers and remove the harness.
Fig. 481: Identifying Block Heater Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Disconnect the PCV hose from the PCV valve.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 257
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 482: Identifying PCV Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Disconnect the throttle body (TB) electrical connector.
Fig. 483: Locating Throttle Body Electrical Connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 258
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Detach the wiring harness retainers from the upper intake manifold.
Fig. 484: Locating Wiring Harness Retainers From Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt.
Fig. 485: Locating Upper Intake Manifold Support Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the 6 bolts and the upper intake manifold in the following sequence.
Discard the gaskets.
Fig. 486: Identifying Bolt Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:12 AM
Page 259
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
11. Disconnect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector.
Fig. 487: Locating PSP Switch Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
12. Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 488: Locating RH Catalyst Monitor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
13. Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 260
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 489: Locating RH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Disconnect the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid electrical connector.
Fig. 490: Locating RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Disconnect the 3 RH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 261
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 491: Locating RH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the RH valve cover and stud bolts.
17. Disconnect the RH camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 492: Locating RH Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector.
Fig. 493: Locating Knock Sensor (KS) Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Remove the bolt and the ground cable from the RH cylinder.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 262
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 494: Locating Ground Cable From RH Cylinder
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors (3 shown).
Fig. 495: Locating Fuel Injector Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 496: Locating Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Disconnect the LH CMP sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 263
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 497: Locating LH CMP Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Disconnect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 498: Identifying LH Catalyst Monitor Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Disconnect the LH HO2S electrical connector.
Fig. 499: Locating LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Disconnect the 3 LH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 264
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 500: Locating LH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Disconnect the LH VCT solenoid electrical connector.
Fig. 501: Locating LH VCT Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the LH valve cover and stud bolts.
28. Remove the wiring harness retainer bolt from the rear of the LH cylinder head.
Fig. 502: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer Bolt From Rear Of LH Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Remove the nut, the bolt and the heat shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 265
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 503: Identifying Heat Shield, Nut & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Remove the wiring harness retainer stud bolt.
Fig. 504: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer Stud Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Remove the wiring harness grommet.
Fig. 505: Identifying Wiring Harness Grommet
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
32. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 266
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 506: Identifying Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
Fig. 507: Identifying A/C Compressor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
34. Remove the nut and disconnect the generator B+ cable.
Fig. 508: Identifying Generator B+ Cable & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
35. Disconnect the generator electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 267
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 509: Identifying Generator Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
36. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the generator.
Fig. 510: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From Generator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
37. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector and the wiring harness pin-type
retainer.
Remove the wiring harness from the engine.
Fig. 511: Locating Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness PinType Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Remove the nut, 2 bolts and the A/C compressor.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 268
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 512: Locating A/C Compressor, Bolts & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Remove the A/C compressor mounting stud from the oil pan.
Fig. 513: Locating A/C Compressor Mounting Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
40. Remove the nut, bolt and the generator.
Fig. 514: Locating Generator, Bolts & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
41. Remove the 3 bolts and the power steering pump.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 269
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 515: Locating Power Steering Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
42. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner.
Fig. 516: Locating Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
43. Remove the 4 nuts (3 shown) and the LH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Fig. 517: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
44. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH exhaust manifold heat shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 270
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 518: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
45. Remove the 6 nuts and the LH exhaust manifold.
Discard the nuts and exhaust manifold gaskets.
Fig. 519: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
46. Clean and inspect the LH exhaust manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
47. Remove and discard the 6 LH exhaust manifold studs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 271
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 520: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
FWD vehicles
48. Remove the 4 nuts and the RH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts and the gasket.
Fig. 521: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
49. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH exhaust manifold heat shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 272
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 522: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
50. Remove the 6 nuts and the RH exhaust manifold.
Discard the nuts and exhaust manifold gaskets.
Fig. 523: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
51. Clean and inspect the RH exhaust manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
52. Remove and discard the 6 RH exhaust manifold studs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 273
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 524: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
53. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater.
Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block.
Fig. 525: Locating RH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
54. Remove the LH cylinder block drain plug.
Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 274
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 526: Locating LH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
55. Remove the pin-type retainer and the cover.
Fig. 527: Locating Pin-Type Retainer & Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
56. Remove the 2 bolts and the engine lifting eye.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 275
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 528: Locating Engine Lifting Eye & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
57. Remove the bolt and the upper intake manifold bracket.
Fig. 529: Locating Upper Intake Manifold Bracket & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
58. Remove the bolt and the RH CMP sensor.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 276
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 530: Locating RH CMP Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
59. Remove the 2 bolts and the catalytic converter bracket.
Fig. 531: Locating Catalytic Converter Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
60. Remove the 4 bolts and the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 277
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 532: Identifying 4 Bolts And Fuel Rail
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
61. Remove the 3 thermostat housing-to-lower intake manifold bolts.
Remove the thermostat housing and discard the gasket.
Fig. 533: Locating Thermostat Housing-To-Lower Intake Manifold Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
62. Remove the 10 bolts and the lower intake manifold.
Discard the gaskets.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 278
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 534: Locating Lower Intake Manifold Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
63. Disconnect and remove the CHT sensor jumper harness.
Fig. 535: Identifying CHT Sensor Jumper Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
64. Remove the bolt and the LH CMP sensor.
Fig. 536: Locating LH CMP Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
65. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 279
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 537: Identifying CKP Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
66. Remove the EOP switch.
Fig. 538: Identifying EOP Switch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 280
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: A new oil cooler must be installed or severe damage to the engine
can occur.
67. If equipped, remove the 6 bolts and the oil cooler.
Discard the oil cooler and the gaskets.
Fig. 539: Identifying Oil Cooler, Gaskets & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Engine without oil cooler shown, engine with oil cooler similar.
68. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil filter adapter.
Discard the gasket and O-ring seal (on banjo bolt).
Fig. 540: Locating Oil Filter Adapter & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
69. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 coil-on-plugs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 281
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 541: Locating Coil-On-Plugs & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
70. Remove the 11 stud bolts and the LH valve cover.
Discard the gasket.
Fig. 542: Locating LH Valve Cover Stud Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
71. Remove the bolt, the 10 stud bolts and the RH valve cover.
Discard the gasket.
Fig. 543: Locating RH Valve Cover Stud Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
VCT solenoid seal removal shown, spark plug tube seal similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 282
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
72. Inspect the VCT solenoid seals and the spark plug tube seals. Remove any damaged seals.
Using the special tools, remove the seal(s).
Fig. 544: Removing Seals Using Special Tools (205-153) & (303-1247/1)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
73. Remove the crankshaft bolt and washer.
Discard the bolt.
Fig. 545: Removing Crankshaft Bolt & Washer Using Special Tool (303-D055)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
74. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Fig. 546: Identifying Special Tools (303-D121) And Crankshaft Pulley
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 283
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
75. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
Fig. 547: Removing Crankshaft Front Seal Using Special Tool (303-409)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
76. Remove the 2 bolts and the engine mount bracket.
Fig. 548: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
77. Remove the 2 engine mount studs.
Fig. 549: Locating Engine Mount Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
78. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 284
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 550: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
79. Remove the 22 engine front cover bolts.
Fig. 551: Identifying Engine Front Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
80. Install 6 of the engine front cover bolts (finger tight) into the 6 threaded holes in the engine front cover.
Tighten the bolts one turn at a time in a criss-cross pattern until the engine front cover-to-cylinder
block seal is released.
Remove the engine front cover.
Fig. 552: Identifying Engine Front Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
81. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the VCT assemblies as shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 285
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 553: Aligning Timing Marks On Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Assemblies
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center (TDC)
position.
82. Install the special tool onto the flats of the LH camshafts.
Fig. 554: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) Onto Flats Of LH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The special tool will hold the camshafts in the TDC position.
83. Install the special tool onto the flats of the RH camshafts.
Fig. 555: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) Onto Flats Of RH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 286
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
84. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH VCT housing.
Fig. 556: Locating RH VCT Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
85. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH VCT housing.
Fig. 557: Locating LH VCT Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
86. Remove and discard the VCT housing seals.
Fig. 558: Locating VCT Housing Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
87. Remove the 2 bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 287
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 559: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
88. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
Fig. 560: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
89. Remove the 2 bolts and the lower LH primary timing chain guide.
Fig. 561: Locating Lower LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
90. Remove the primary timing chain.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 288
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 562: Locating Primary Timing Chain
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
91. Remove the crankshaft timing chain sprocket.
Fig. 563: Locating Crankshaft Timing Chain Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
92. Remove the 2 bolts and the upper LH primary timing chain guide.
Fig. 564: Locating Upper LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
93. Compress the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and install a suitable lockpin to retain the tensioner in
the collapsed position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 289
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 565: Compressing LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Installing Suitable Lock Pin To
Retain Tensioner In Collapsed Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The VCT bolt and the exhaust camshaft bolt must be discarded and new
ones installed. However, the exhaust camshaft washer is reusable.
94. Remove and discard the LH VCT assembly bolt and the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt.
Remove the LH VCT assembly, secondary timing chain and the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket as
an assembly.
Fig. 566: Locating LH VCT Assembly Bolt & LH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
When the special tool is removed, valve spring pressure will rotate the LH
camshafts approximately 3 degrees to a neutral position.
95. Remove the special tool from the LH camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 290
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 567: Removing Special Tool (303-1248) From LH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during removal or
engine damage may occur.
96. Verify the LH camshafts are in the neutral position.
Fig. 568: Verifying LH Camshafts Are In Neutral Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
97. Remove the 2 bolts and the LH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 291
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 569: Locating LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original positions. If not reassembled in
their original position, severe engine damage may occur.
98. Remove the bolts and the LH camshaft bearing caps.
Remove the LH camshafts.
Fig. 570: Identifying LH Camshafts Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
99. Compress the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and install a suitable lockpin to retain the tensioner in
the collapsed position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 292
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 571: Compressing RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Installing Suitable Lock Pin To
Retain Tensioner In Collapsed Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The VCT bolt and the exhaust camshaft bolt must be discarded and new
ones installed. However, the exhaust camshaft washer is reusable.
100. Remove and discard the RH VCT assembly bolt and the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt.
Remove the RH VCT assembly, secondary timing chain and the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket as
an assembly.
Fig. 572: Locating RH VCT Assembly Bolt & RH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
101. Remove the special tool from the RH camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 293
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 573: Removing Special Tool (303-1248) From RH Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during removal or
engine damage may occur.
102. Rotate the RH camshafts counterclockwise to the neutral position.
Fig. 574: Rotating RH Camshafts Counterclockwise To Neutral Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
103. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 294
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 575: Locating RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
104. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH primary timing chain guide.
Fig. 576: Locating RH Primary Timing Chain Guide Lower Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original positions. If not reassembled in
their original position, severe engine damage may occur.
105. Remove the bolts and the RH camshaft bearing caps.
Remove the RH camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 295
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 577: Identifying RH Camshafts Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the components are to be reinstalled, they must be installed in the same
positions. Mark the components for installation into their original
locations.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
106. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder heads.
Fig. 578: Identifying Valve Tappets From Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 296
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
107. Remove and discard the M6 bolt from each cylinder head.
Fig. 579: Identifying M6 Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Place clean, lint-free shop towels over exposed engine cavities.
Carefully remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into
the engine. Any foreign material (including any material created while
cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages or the oil pan,
may cause engine failure.
CAUTION: Aluminum surfaces are soft and can be scratched easily. Never place
the cylinder head gasket surface, unprotected, on a bench surface.
NOTE:
The cylinder head bolts must be discarded and new bolts must be
installed. They are tighten-to-yield designed and cannot be reused.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
108. Remove and discard the 8 bolts from each cylinder head.
Remove the cylinder heads.
Discard the cylinder head gaskets.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 297
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 580: Identifying Cylinder Head Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or
other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic
scraping tool to remove all traces of the head gasket.
NOTE:
Observe all warnings or cautions and follow all application directions
contained on the packaging of the silicone gasket remover and the metal
surface prep.
NOTE:
If there is no residual gasket material present, metal surface prep can be
used to clean and prepare the surfaces.
109. Clean the cylinder head-to-cylinder block mating surfaces of both the cylinder heads and the cylinder
block in the following sequence.
1. Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material with a plastic scraper.
2. Apply silicone gasket remover, following package directions, and allow to set for several minutes.
3. Remove the silicone gasket remover with a plastic scraper. A second application of silicone gasket
remover may be required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain.
4. Apply metal surface prep, following package directions, to remove any remaining traces of oil or
coolant and to prepare the surfaces to bond with the new gasket. Do not attempt to make the metal
shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is normal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 298
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
5. Make sure the 2 locating dowel pins are seated correctly in the cylinder block.
110. Support the cylinder heads on a bench with the head gasket side up.
NOTE:
The straightedge used must be flat within 0.0051 mm (0.0002 in) per foot of
tool length.
111. Inspect all areas of the deck face with a straightedge and feeler gauge. The cylinder heads must not have
depressions deeper than 0.0254 mm (0.001 in) across a 38.1 mm (1.5 in) square area, or scratches more
than 0.0254 mm (0.001 in).
112. Remove the coolant tube.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Fig. 581: Identifying Coolant Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
113. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS.
Fig. 582: Locating Knock Sensor (KS) Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
114. Remove the 8 bolts and the coolant pump.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:13 AM
Page 299
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 583: Locating Coolant Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
115. Remove the 16 oil pan bolts.
Fig. 584: Identifying Oil Pan Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
116. Install 2 of the oil pan bolts (finger tight) into the 2 threaded holes in the oil pan.
Alternately tighten the 2 bolts one turn at a time until the oil pan-to-cylinder block seal is released.
Remove the oil pan.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 300
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 585: Installing 2 Of Oil Pan Bolts (Finger Tight) Into 2 Threaded Holes In Oil Pan
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
117. Remove the 3 bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
Discard the O-ring seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 301
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 586: Identifying Oil Pump Screen, Pickup Tube & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
118. Remove the 3 bolts and the oil pump.
Fig. 587: Identifying Oil Pump & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
119. Remove the 8 crankshaft rear seal retainer bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 302
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 588: Locating Crankshaft Rear Seal Retainer Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
120. Install the 2 M6 oil pan bolts (finger tight) into the 2 threaded holes in the crankshaft rear seal retainer.
Alternately tighten the 2 bolts one turn at a time until the crankshaft rear seal retainer-to-cylinder
block seal is released.
Remove the crankshaft rear seal retainer.
Fig. 589: Identifying M6 Oil Pan Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Only use a 3M Roloc® Bristle Disk, (2-in white, part number 07528) to
clean the engine front cover, oil pan and crankshaft rear seal retainer
plate. Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes or any other power
abrasive disk to clean the engine front cover, oil pan and crankshaft
rear seal retainer plate. These tools cause scratches and gouges that
make leak paths.
121. Clean the engine front cover, oil pan and crankshaft rear seal retainer plate using a 3M Roloc® Bristle
Disk, (2 inch, white, part number 07528) in a suitable tool turning at the recommended speed of 15,000
rpm.
Thoroughly wash the engine front cover, oil pan and crankshaft rear seal retainer plate to remove
any foreign material, including any abrasive particles created during the cleaning process.
CAUTION: Place clean, lint-free shop towels over exposed engine cavities.
Carefully remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 303
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
the engine. Any foreign material (including any material created while
cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages or the oil pan,
may cause engine failure.
CAUTION: Do not use wire brushes, power abrasive discs or 3M Roloc® Bristle
Disk (2-in white part number 07528) to clean the sealing surfaces.
These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. They
also cause contamination that will cause premature engine failure.
Remove all traces of the gasket.
122. Clean the sealing surfaces of the cylinder block in the following sequence.
1. Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material.
2. Apply silicone gasket remover and allow to set for several minutes.
3. Remove the silicone gasket remover. A second application of silicone gasket remover may be
required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain.
4. Apply metal surface prep to remove any remaining traces of oil or coolant and to prepare the
surfaces to bond. Do not attempt to make the metal shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is
normal.
5. Make sure the 2 locating dowel pins are seated correctly in the cylinder block.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF SUBASSEMBLIES
CYLINDER HEAD
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Compressor, Valve Spring
303-300 (T87C-6565-A)
Compressor, Valve Spring
303-350 (T89P-6565-A)
Compressor, Valve Spring
303-1249
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 304
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Installer, Valve Stem Oil Seal
303-470 (T94P-6510-CH)
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
Fig. 590: Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
6518
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6514
6513
6A517
6505
6507
6A517
6513
6514
10
6518
11
6G004
Description
Intake valve spring retainer key (12
required)
Intake valve spring retainer (6 required)
Intake valve spring (6 required)
Intake valve stem seal (6 required)
Intake valve (6 required)
Exhaust valve (6 required)
Exhaust valve stem seal (6 required)
Exhaust valve spring (6 required)
Exhaust valve spring retainer (6 required)
Exhaust valve spring retainer key (12
required)
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT)
sensor
DISASSEMBLY
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 305
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
All cylinder heads
NOTE:
If the components are to be reinstalled, they must be installed in the same
positions. Mark the components for installation into their original locations.
1. Using the Valve Spring Compressors, remove the keys, retainer and spring.
Fig. 591: Removing Keys, Retainer & Spring Using Special Tools (303-1249, 303-350, 303-300)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Remove the valve from the cylinder head.
3. Remove and discard the valve stem seal.
4. Repeat the above steps for each valve.
RH cylinder head
5. Remove and discard the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor.
Fig. 592: Identifying Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
ASSEMBLY
All cylinder heads
NOTE:
Lubricate the valve stem seal with clean engine oil prior to installation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 306
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
1. Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Installer, install a new valve stem seal.
Fig. 593: Installing New Valve Stem Seal Using Special Tool (303-470)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the valve.
3. Using the Valve Spring Compressors, install the valve spring, retainer and key.
Fig. 594: Removing Keys, Retainer & Spring Using Special Tools (303-1249, 303-350, 303-300)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Repeat the above steps for each valve.
RH cylinder head
5. Install a new CHT sensor.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
ASSEMBLY
ENGINE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 307
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Alignment Pins
307-399
Camshaft Alignment Tool
303-1248
Engine Lifting Bracket
303-1245
Handle
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Heavy Duty Floor Crane
014-00071 or equivalent
Installer, Crankshaft Front Seal
303-1251
Installer, Crankshaft Rear Seal
303-1250
Installer, Crankshaft Vibration
Damper
303-102 (T74P-6316-B)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 308
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Installer, Front Cover Oil Seal
303-335
Installer, Seal
303-1247/2
Spreader Bar
303-D089 (D93P-6001-A3) or
equivalent
Strap Wrench
303-D055 (D85L-6000-A)
Material
Item
Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
TA-357
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with
Bittering Agent (bittered in US only)
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A (Canada); or equivalent
(yellow color)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Thread Sealant with PTFE
TA-24
Specification
WSE-M4G323-A6
-
WSS-M97B51-A1
WSS-M2C930-A
WSK-M2G350-A2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 309
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 595: Identifying Engine Upper Components
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Part Number
12C508
9S455
9F797
9J444
9K461
8A856
9N271
9N271
6010
Description
Engine control harness
Upper intake manifold
Fuel rail
Upper intake manifold bracket
Lower intake manifold
Thermostat housing
Coolant tube
Knock sensor (KS)
Cylinder block
Fig. 596: Identifying Engine Front Components
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part Number
6A0003
W701512
N806165
6316
6700
6C086
Description
Engine mount bracket
Crankshaft pulley bolt
Crankshaft pulley washer
Crankshaft pulley
Crankshaft front seal
Engine front cover
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 310
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
6268
6306
6K254
6K255
6B274
6M256
6K297
8501
6010
Timing chain
Crankshaft timing sprocket
Primary timing chain tensioner
Primary timing chain tensioner arm
LH lower primary timing chain guide
RH primary timing chain guide
LH upper primary timing chain guide
Coolant pump
Cylinder block
Fig. 597: Identifying Engine Lower Components
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Part Number
6675
6622
6621
6010
6D327
12A227
6375
6881
6881
9278
Description
Oil pan
Oil pump screen and pickup tube
Oil pump
Cylinder block
Crankshaft rear seal retainer
Crankshaft sensor ring
Flexplate
Oil filter adapter (without oil cooler)
Oil filter adapter (with oil cooler)
Engine oil pressure (EOP) switch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 311
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 598: Exploded View Of LH Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
6083
2
6C261
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
W12244
6500
6050
6279
W710738
6C524
6256
6C256
6A258
6A505
6A267
6A269
6C271
Description
LH cylinder head gasket
LH variable camshaft timing (VCT)
housing
LH exhaust manifold stud (6 required)
Valve tappet (32 required)
LH cylinder head
LH camshaft bolt (2 required)
LH exhaust camshaft sprocket washer
LH VCT assembly
LH exhaust camshaft sprocket
LH secondary timing chain
LH camshaft cap (8 required)
LH valve cover
LH intake camshaft
LH exhaust camshaft
LH secondary timing chain tensioner
Fig. 599: Exploded View Of RH Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 312
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
W712244
6051
6G004
14B485
5
6B288
6
7
6049
17A084
8
6C260
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
6279
W710738
6256
6C524
6C256
6A266
6A268
12405
6A258
6582
12A375
6C270
Description
RH exhaust manifold stud (6 required)
RH cylinder head gasket
Cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
CHT sensor jumper harness
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor (2
required)
RH cylinder head
Engine lift eye
RH variable camshaft timing (VCT)
housing
RH camshaft bolt (2 required)
RH exhaust camshaft sprocket washer
RH exhaust camshaft sprocket
RH VCT assembly
RH secondary timing chain
RH intake camshaft
RH exhaust camshaft
Spark plug (6 required)
RH camshaft cap (8 required)
RH valve cover
Coil-on-plug (6 required)
RH secondary timing chain tensioner
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
All vehicles
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
The crankshaft rear seal retainer must be installed and the bolts tightened
within 4 minutes of sealant application.
1. Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the sealing surface
of the crankshaft rear seal retainer.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 313
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 600: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Sealing Surface
Of Crankshaft Rear Seal Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the crankshaft rear seal retainer and the 8 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 601: Installing Crankshaft Rear Seal Retainer Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the oil pump and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 602: Identifying Oil Pump & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Using a new O-ring seal, install the oil pump screen and pickup tube and the 3 bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 314
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 603: Identifying Oil Pump Screen, Pickup Tube & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The A/C compressor must be installed on the cylinder block and the 2
bolts tightened prior to installing the oil pan.
5. Install the A/C compressor and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 604: Identifying A/C Compressor Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
The oil pan and the 4 specified bolts must be installed and the oil pan
aligned to the cylinder block and A/C compressor within 4 minutes of
sealant application. Final tightening of the oil pan bolts must be carried
out within 60 minutes of sealant application.
6. Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the sealing surface
of the oil pan.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 315
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the 2
crankshaft seal retainer plate-to-cylinder block joint areas on the sealing surface of the oil pan.
Fig. 605: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Crankshaft
Seal Retainer Plate-To-Cylinder Block
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The oil pan and the 4 specified bolts must be installed within 4 minutes of
the start of sealant application.
7. Install the oil pan and bolts 10, 11, 13 and 14.
Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Loosen the bolts 180 degrees.
Fig. 606: Installing Oil Pan Bolts 10, 11, 13 & 14 In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Align the oil pan to the cylinder block and the A/C compressor.
Position the oil pan so the mounting boss is against the A/C compressor and using a straightedge,
align the oil pan flush with the rear of the cylinder block at the 2 areas shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 316
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 607: Aligning Oil Pan Flush With Rear Of Cylinder Block
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Tighten bolts 10, 11, 13 and 14 in the sequence shown, to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Fig. 608: Installing Oil Pan Bolts 10, 11, 13 & 14 In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Install the remaining oil pan bolts. Tighten all the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten the large bolts (1-14) to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Tighten the small bolts (15 and 16) to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 609: Installing Remaining Oil Pan Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Install the A/C compressor mounting stud and nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 317
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten the stud to 9 Nm (80 lb-in) and the nut to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 610: Locating A/C Compressor Nut & Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install the coolant pump and the 8 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 611: Identifying Coolant Pump Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Install the knock sensor (KS) and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 612: Locating Knock Sensor (KS) Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 318
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Apply clean engine coolant to the O-ring seals prior to installation.
14. Using new O-ring seals, install the coolant tube.
Fig. 613: Identifying Coolant Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Install a new gasket, the RH cylinder head and 8 new bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown in 5 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Stage 3: Tighten 90 degrees.
Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees.
Stage 5: Tighten 90 degrees.
Fig. 614: Installing RH Cylinder Head Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Install the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 319
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 615: Identifying M6 Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Install a new gasket, the LH cylinder head and 8 new bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown in 5 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Stage 3: Tighten 90 degrees.
Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees.
Stage 5: Tighten 90 degrees.
Fig. 616: Installing LH Cylinder Head Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Install the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 320
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 617: Identifying M6 Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The crankshaft must remain in the freewheeling position (crankshaft
dowel pin at 9 o'clock) until after the camshafts are installed and the
valve clearance is checked/adjusted. Do not turn the crankshaft until
instructed to do so. Failure to follow this process will result in severe
engine damage.
19. Position the crankshaft dowel pin in the 9 o'clock position.
Fig. 618: Positioning Crankshaft Dowel Pin In 9 O'clock Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The valve tappets must be installed in their original positions.
NOTE:
Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil prior to installation.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
20. Install the valve tappets.
Fig. 619: Identifying Valve Tappets From Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 321
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during installation
or engine damage may occur.
NOTE:
Coat the camshafts with clean engine oil prior to installation.
21. Position the camshafts onto the RH cylinder head in the neutral position as shown.
Fig. 620: Positioning Camshafts Onto RH Cylinder Head In Neutral Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original positions. If not reassembled in
their original positions, severe engine damage may occur.
22. Install the 8 camshaft caps and the 16 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 621: Installing Camshaft Caps & Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during installation
or engine damage may occur.
NOTE:
Coat the camshafts with clean engine oil prior to installation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 322
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
23. Position the camshafts onto the LH cylinder head in the neutral position as shown.
Fig. 622: Positioning Camshafts Onto LH Cylinder Head In Neutral Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original positions. If not reassembled in
their original positions, severe engine damage may occur.
24. Install the 8 camshaft caps and the 16 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 623: Installing Camshaft Caps & Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: If any components are installed new, the engine valve clearance must
be checked/adjusted or engine damage may occur.
NOTE:
Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts.
25. Using a feeler gauge, confirm that the valve tappet clearances are within specification. For additional
information, refer to Valve Clearance Check.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 323
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 624: Measuring Valve Clearance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Install the RH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 625: Locating RH Primary Timing Chain Guide Lower Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Install the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 626: Locating RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 324
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
28. Rotate the RH camshafts to the top dead center position and install the special tool on the flats of the
camshafts.
Fig. 627: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) On Flats Of Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Assemble the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) assembly, the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket and the
RH secondary timing chain.
Align the colored links with the timing marks.
Fig. 628: Aligning RH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket & RH Secondary Timing Chain Colored Links
With Timing Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Position the RH secondary timing assembly onto the camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 325
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 629: Positioning RH Secondary Timing Assembly Onto Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Install 2 new bolts and the original washer. Tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees.
Fig. 630: Locating RH VCT Assembly Bolt & RH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
32. Remove the lockpin from the RH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 326
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 631: Identifying Lock Pin On RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. Install the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 632: Locating LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts.
34. Rotate the LH camshafts to the top dead center position and install the special tool on the flats of the
camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 327
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 633: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) On Flats Of Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
35. Assemble the LH VCT assembly, the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket and the LH secondary timing chain.
Align the colored links with the timing marks.
Fig. 634: Aligning LH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket & LH Secondary Timing Chain Colored Links
With Timing Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
36. Position the LH secondary timing assembly onto the camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 328
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 635: Positioning LH Secondary Timing Assembly Onto Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
37. Install 2 new bolts and the original washer. Tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees.
Fig. 636: Locating LH VCT Assembly Bolt & LH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Remove the lockpin from the LH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 329
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 637: Locating Lock Pin On LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise 60 degrees to the top dead center position (crankshaft dowel pin at 11
o'clock).
Fig. 638: Identifying Crankshaft Dowel Pin
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
40. Install the crankshaft timing chain sprocket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 330
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 639: Locating Crankshaft Timing Chain Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
41. Install the primary timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT
assemblies and the crankshaft sprocket.
Fig. 640: Aligning Timing Marks On VCT Assemblies & Crankshaft Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
42. Install the upper LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 331
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 641: Locating Upper LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
43. Install the lower LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 642: Locating Lower LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
44. Install the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 332
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 643: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
45. Reset the primary timing chain tensioner.
Rotate the lever counterclockwise.
Using a soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger.
Align the hole in the lever with the hole in the tensioner housing.
Install a suitable lockpin.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 333
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 644: Compressing Plunger Using A Soft-Jawed Vise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to rotate the crankshaft slightly to remove slack from
the timing chain and install the tensioner.
46. Install the primary tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Remove the lockpin.
Fig. 645: Locating Primary Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
47. As a post-check, verify correct alignment of all timing marks.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 334
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 646: Verifying Correct Alignment Of All Timing Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
48. Install new VCT housing seals.
Fig. 647: Locating VCT Housing Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) housing
are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts.
Failure to follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
49. Install the LH VCT housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 648: Identifying LH VCT Housing Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 335
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) housing
are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts.
Failure to follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
50. Install the RH VCT housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 649: Identifying RH VCT Housing Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
51. Install the special tools.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:14 AM
Page 336
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 650: Identifying Special Tool (307-399)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
The engine front cover and bolts 17, 18, 19 and 20 must be installed within
4 minutes of the initial sealant application. The remainder of the engine
front cover bolts and the engine mount bracket bolts must be installed and
tightened within 35 minutes of the initial sealant application. If the time
limits are exceeded, the sealant must be removed, the sealing area
cleaned and sealant reapplied. To clean the sealing area, use silicone
gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the
packaging. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
52. Apply a 3.0 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover sealing surfaces including the 3 engine mount bracket bosses.
Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the oil
pan-to-cylinder block joint and the cylinder head-to-cylinder block joint areas of the engine front
cover in 5 places as indicated.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 337
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 651: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover Sealing Surfaces
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the 2 locating dowel pins are seated correctly in the cylinder
block.
53. Install the engine front cover and bolts 17, 18, 19 and 20.
Tighten in sequence to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Fig. 652: Installing Engine Front Cover & Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
54. Remove the special tools (alignment pins).
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
55. Install the engine mount bracket and the 3 bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 338
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 653: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not expose the Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
to engine oil for at least 90 minutes after installing the engine front
cover. Failure to follow this instruction may cause oil leakage.
56. Install the remaining engine front cover bolts. Tighten all of the engine front cover bolts and engine
mount bracket bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten bolts 1 thru 22 to 10 Nm (89 lb-in) and bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten bolts 1 thru 22 to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft) and bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 75 Nm (55 lb-ft).
Fig. 654: Identifying Tightening Of Engine Front Cover Bolts & Engine Mount Bracket Bolts In
Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
57. Install the 2 engine mount studs.
Tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 339
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 655: Locating Engine Mount Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
58. Install the engine mount bracket and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 656: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply clean engine oil to the crankshaft front seal bore in the engine front
cover.
59. Using the special tools, install a new crankshaft front seal.
Fig. 657: Installing Crankshaft Front Seal Using Special Tools (303-102) & (303-1251)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 340
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surfaces with clean engine oil.
60. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft pulley.
Fig. 658: Installing Crankshaft Pulley
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
61. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley washer and new bolt and tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 (lb-ft).
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
Fig. 659: Installing Crankshaft Pulley Washer & Bolt Using Special Tools (303-D055)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Installation of new seals is only required if damaged seals were removed
during disassembly of the engine.
NOTE:
Spark plug tube seal installation shown, VCT seal installation similar.
62. Using the special tools, install new VCT solenoid and/or spark plug tube seals.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 341
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 660: Installing VCT Solenoid And/Or Spark Plug Tube Seals Using Special Tools (205-153) &
(303-1247/2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 4
minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To
clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface
prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this
procedure can cause future oil leakage.
63. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover-to-RH cylinder head joints.
Fig. 661: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover-To-RH Cylinder Head Joints
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
64. Using a new gasket, install the RH valve cover, bolt and the 10 stud bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 342
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 662: Installing RH Valve Cover Stud Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 4
minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To
clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface
prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this
procedure can cause future oil leakage.
65. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover-to-LH cylinder head joints.
Fig. 663: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover-To-LH Cylinder Head Joints
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
66. Using a new gasket, install the LH valve cover and 11 stud bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 343
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 664: Installing LH Valve Cover Stud Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
67. Install the 6 coil-on-plug assemblies and the 6 bolts.
Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Fig. 665: Locating Coil-On-Plugs & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Engine without oil cooler shown, engine with oil cooler similar.
68. Using a new gasket and O-ring seal, install the oil filter adapter and the 2 bolts.
Tighten the large bolt to 57 Nm (42 lb-ft).
Tighten the small bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 344
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 666: Locating Oil Filter Adapter & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: A new oil cooler must be installed or severe damage to the engine
may occur.
69. If equipped, install a new oil cooler, new gaskets and the 6 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 345
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 667: Identifying Oil Cooler, Gaskets & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply thread sealant with PTFE to the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch
threads.
70. Install the EOP switch.
Tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb-ft).
Fig. 668: Identifying EOP Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
71. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor and install the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 669: Identifying CKP Sensor & Bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 346
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
72. Install LH camshaft position (CMP) sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 670: Locating LH CMP Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
73. Install and connect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor jumper harness.
Fig. 671: Identifying CHT Sensor Jumper Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
74. Using new gaskets, install the lower intake manifold and the 10 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 672: Installing Lower Intake Manifold Bolts In Sequence
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 347
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
75. Using a new gasket, install the thermostat housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 673: Locating Thermostat Housing-To-Lower Intake Manifold Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. The
use of ordinary O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not
reuse the O-ring seals.
NOTE:
The upper and lower O-ring seals are not interchangeable.
76. Install new fuel injector O-ring seals.
Remove the retaining clips and separate the fuel injectors from the fuel rail.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Install new O-ring seals and lubricate with clean engine oil.
Install the fuel injectors and the retaining clips onto the fuel rail.
Fig. 674: Identifying Fuel Injector O-Ring Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
77. Install the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly and install the 4 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 348
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 675: Identifying Fuel Rail And Injectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
78. Install the catalytic converter bracket and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Fig. 676: Locating Catalytic Converter Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
79. Install the RH CMP sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 677: Locating RH CMP Sensor & Bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 349
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
80. Install the engine lifting eye and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 678: Locating Engine Lifting Eye & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
81. Install the cover and the pin-type retainer.
Fig. 679: Locating Pin-Type Retainer & Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
82. Install the LH cylinder block drain plug.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft) plus an additional 180 degrees.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 350
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 680: Locating LH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
83. Install the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 681: Locating RH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
84. Install 6 new RH exhaust manifold studs.
Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
Fig. 682: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to tighten the exhaust manifold nuts to specification a second
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 351
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
time will cause the exhaust manifold to develop an exhaust leak.
85. Using a new gasket, install the RH exhaust manifold and 6 new nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the sequence
shown:
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 683: Installing RH Exhaust Manifold Nuts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
86. Install the RH exhaust manifold heat shield and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft).
Fig. 684: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
87. Using a new gasket, install the RH catalytic converter and the 4 new nuts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 352
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 685: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
88. Install 6 new LH exhaust manifold studs.
Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
Fig. 686: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to tighten the exhaust manifold nuts to specification a second
time will cause the exhaust manifold to develop an exhaust leak.
89. Using a new gasket, install the LH exhaust manifold and 6 new nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the sequence
shown:
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 353
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 687: Installing LH Exhaust Manifold Nuts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
90. Install the LH exhaust manifold heat shield and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft).
Fig. 688: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
91. Using a new gasket, install the LH catalytic converter and 4 new nuts (3 shown).
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 354
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 689: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
92. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Fig. 690: Locating Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
93. Install the power steering pump and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 691: Locating Power Steering Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
94. Install the generator, the bolt and the nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 355
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Fig. 692: Locating Generator, Bolts & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
95. Position the wiring harness onto the engine.
96. Connect the EOP switch electrical connector and the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
Fig. 693: Locating Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness PinType Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
97. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the generator.
Fig. 694: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From Generator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 356
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
98. Connect the generator electrical connector.
Fig. 695: Identifying Generator Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
99. Connect the generator B+ cable and install the nut.
Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
Fig. 696: Identifying Generator B+ Cable & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
100. Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
Fig. 697: Identifying A/C Compressor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
101. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 357
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 698: Identifying Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
102. Install the wiring harness grommet.
Fig. 699: Identifying Wiring Harness Grommet
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
103. Install the wiring harness retainer stud bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 700: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer Stud Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
104. Install the heat shield, the nut and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 358
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 701: Identifying Heat Shield, Nut & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
105. Install the wiring harness retainer bolt on the rear of the LH cylinder head.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 702: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer Bolt From Rear Of LH Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
106. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the LH valve cover and stud bolts.
107. Connect the LH camshaft VCT solenoid electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 359
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 703: Locating LH VCT Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
108. Connect the 3 LH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 360
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 704: Locating LH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
109. Connect the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Fig. 705: Locating LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
110. Connect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 706: Identifying LH Catalyst Monitor Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
111. Connect the LH CMP sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 361
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 707: Locating LH CMP Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
112. Connect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 708: Locating Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
113. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors (3 shown).
Fig. 709: Locating Fuel Injector Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
114. Install the ground cable and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 362
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 710: Locating Ground Cable From RH Cylinder
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
115. Connect the KS electrical connector.
Fig. 711: Locating Knock Sensor (KS) Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
116. Connect the RH CMP sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 712: Locating RH Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
117. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the RH valve cover and stud bolts.
118. Connect the 3 RH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 363
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 713: Locating RH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
119. Connect the RH VCT solenoid electrical connector.
Fig. 714: Locating RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
FWD vehicles
120. Connect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 715: Locating RH Catalyst Monitor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 364
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
121. Connect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector.
Fig. 716: Locating PSP Switch Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
122. Using a new gasket, install the upper intake manifold and the 6 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 717: Identifying Bolt Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
123. Install the upper intake manifold support bracket and the 2 bolts (1 shown).
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 718: Identifying Upper Intake Manifold Support Bracket & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 365
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
124. Connect the RH HO2S electrical connector.
Fig. 719: Locating RH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
125. Attach the wiring harness retainers to the upper intake manifold.
Fig. 720: Locating Wiring Harness Retainers From Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
126. Connect the throttle body (TB) electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 366
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 721: Locating Throttle Body Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
127. Connect the PCV hose to the PCV valve.
Fig. 722: Identifying PCV Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
128. If equipped, position the block heater wiring harness onto the engine and attach all of the harness
retainers.
129. If equipped, connect the block heater electrical connector and install the heat shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 367
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 723: Identifying Block Heater Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
130. Install the special tool on the LH cylinder head.
Fig. 724: Installing Special Tool (303-1245) On LH Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
131. Using the special tools, remove the engine from the stand.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 368
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 725: Removing Engine & Transaxle From Lift Table Using Special Tools (303-D089, 01400071) & Suitable Engine Crane
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lubricate the seal lips and bore with clean engine oil prior to installation.
132. Position the special tool onto the end of the crankshaft and slide a new crankshaft rear seal onto the tool.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 369
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 726: Positioning Special Tool (303-1250) Onto End Of Crankshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
133. Using the special tools, install the new crankshaft rear seal.
Fig. 727: Installing New Crankshaft Rear Seal Using Special Tools (303-1250) & (205-153)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
134. Install the crankshaft sensor ring.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 370
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 728: Identifying Crankshaft Sensor Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
135. Install the flexplate and the 8 bolts.
Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
Fig. 729: Identifying Flexplate & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
ENGINE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Heavy Duty Floor Crane
014-00071 or equivalent
Powertrain Lift
014-00765
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 371
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Spreader Bar
303-D089 (D93P-6001-A3) or
equivalent
Universal Adapter Brackets
014-0001
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
All vehicles
1. Align the transaxle to the engine.
2. Install the 5 transaxle-to-engine bolts.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Fig. 730: Locating Transaxle-To-Engine Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the 2 engine-to-transaxle bolts.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 372
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 731: Locating Engine-To-Transaxle Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Using the special tools, position the engine and transaxle onto the lift table.
Fig. 732: Removing Engine & Transaxle From Lift Table Using Special Tools (303-D089, 014Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:15 AM
Page 373
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
00071) & Suitable Engine Crane
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Position a block of wood under the transaxle.
5. Install the special tools.
Fig. 733: Positioning A Block Of Wood Under Transaxle Using Special Tools (014-0001) & (01400765)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the starter, the bolt and the stud bolt.
Tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
Fig. 734: Identifying Bolt, Stud Bolt & Starter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Connect the wiring harness retainer to the starter stud bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 374
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 735: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From Starter Motor Stud Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Attach the starter motor wire terminals and install the 2 nuts.
1. Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
2. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Position the starter terminal boot over the starter terminal.
Fig. 736: Identifying Starter Motor Wire Terminals & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Raise the engine and transaxle assembly into the vehicle.
10. Install the engine mount and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 737: Locating Engine Mount Bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 375
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Install the 4 engine mount nuts.
Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Fig. 738: Locating Engine Mount Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install the engine mount brace, the nut and the bolt.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 739: Locating Nut, Bolt & Engine Mount Brace
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Install the transaxle support insulator bracket, the 3 nuts and the bolt.
Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 376
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 740: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bracket, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Install the transaxle support insulator through bolt and nut.
Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
Fig. 741: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
15. Position the power transfer unit (PTU) in place and install the 5 bolts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 742: Identifying PTU & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Position the PTU support bracket in place and install the 5 bolts.
Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 377
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 743: Locating Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Support Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the 4 catalytic converter nuts at this time.
17. Using a new gasket, install the RH catalytic converter and 4 new nuts.
Fig. 744: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Install the 2 catalytic converter-to-bracket bolts.
Tighten the 4 catalytic converter nuts to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Tighten the 2 catalytic converter-to-bracket bolts to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 745: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 378
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
19. Connect the RH catalyst monitor electrical connector.
Fig. 746: Locating RH Catalyst Monitor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
A new PTU seal must be installed whenever the intermediate shaft is
removed.
20. Install a new PTU seal. For additional information, refer to TRANSFER CASE - POWER TRANSFER
UNIT (PTU) article.
NOTE:
Prior to installation of the halfshaft, inspect the halfshaft sealing surface
for wear or damage and install new, if necessary.
21. Position the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft assembly in the PTU and in the steering knuckle and install
the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 379
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 747: Locating RH Halfshaft Bearing Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
NOTE:
Prior to installation of the halfshaft, inspect the halfshaft sealing surface
for wear or damage and install new if necessary.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 380
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
22. Position the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft assembly in the transaxle and in the steering knuckle and
install the 2 stud bolts.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 748: Locating Stud Bolts & RH Halfshaft/Intermediate Shaft Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the 2 catalytic converter support bracket bolts at this time.
23. Install the converter support bracket and the 2 bolts.
Fig. 749: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Install the catalytic converter bracket bolt and the nut.
1. Tighten the nut to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
2. Tighten the bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 381
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 750: Locating Catalytic Converter Bracket Bolt & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Tighten the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 751: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
NOTE:
Prior to installation of the halfshaft, inspect the halfshaft sealing surface
for wear or damage and install new, if necessary.
26. Install the LH halfshaft into the transaxle.
Fig. 752: Identifying LH Halfshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 382
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
27. If equipped, connect the oil cooler coolant hoses.
Fig. 753: Locating Oil Cooler Coolant Hoses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Using the special tool, raise the subframe into the installed position.
Fig. 754: Positioning Special Tool (014-00765) Under Subframe Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Install the 2 middle subframe nuts.
Tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
Fig. 755: Locating Middle Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Install the 2 front subframe nuts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 383
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
Fig. 756: Locating Front Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Position the subframe support brackets in place and loosely install the 4 bolts.
Fig. 757: Locating Subframe Support Brackets And Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
32. Install the 2 rear subframe bracket nuts.
Tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
Fig. 758: Locating Rear Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. Tighten the 4 subframe support bracket bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 384
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 759: Locating Subframe Support Brackets And Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
34. Position the lower bumper on the subframe and install the 3 LH nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 760: Locating LH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
35. Install the 3 RH lower bumper-to-subframe nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 761: Locating RH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 385
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
RH side shown, LH side similar.
36. Install the ball joints in the steering knuckles and install the pinch bolts.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 762: Locating Ball Joint Pinch Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH side shown, LH side similar.
37. Position the stabilizer bar links in the lower control arms and install the nuts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 763: Locating Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 386
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
38. Install the tie-rod ends and nuts.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Install new cotter pins.
Fig. 764: Locating Tie-Rod Ends Nuts And Cotter Pin
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not allow the intermediate shaft to rotate while it is disconnected
from the gear or damage to the clockspring can occur. If there is
evidence that the intermediate shaft has rotated, the clockspring
must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
39. Install the intermediate shaft onto the steering gear and install a new bolt.
Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 387
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 765: Identifying Steering Intermediate Shaft Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
40. Using a new banjo bolt and 2 new seals, install the power steering pressure (PSP) tube.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 388
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 766: Locating Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Tube-To-Pump Banjo Bolt & Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
41. Install the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt.
Tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
Fig. 767: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
42. Install the roll restrictor heat shield and the 2 nuts.
Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 389
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 768: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
43. Install a new RH front halfshaft nut.
Tighten to 350 Nm (258 lb-ft).
Fig. 769: Locating RH Front Halfshaft Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
AWD vehicles
44. Line up the index marks on the rear driveshaft to the index marks on the PTU flange made during
removal and install the 4 bolts.
Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 390
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 770: Locating Driveshaft Aside Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
45. Install the power steering cooler bracket bolt to the RH side of the subframe.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 771: Identifying Power Steering Cooler Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
46. Connect the power steering cooler hose.
Fig. 772: Identifying Power Steering Cooler Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing
the oil filter.
47. Install a new engine oil filter.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 391
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 773: Identifying Engine Oil Filter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
48. Install the 3 new torque converter bolts.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 774: Locating Torque Converter Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
49. Install the inspection cover and the 2 fasteners.
Fig. 775: Locating Oil Fasteners On Inspection Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
50. Install the 4 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 392
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 776: Locating Oil Pan-To-Transaxle Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
51. Connect the 2 transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Fig. 777: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
52. Install the 2 secondary latches onto the transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Fig. 778: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
53. Install the LH inner splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY PANELS
article.
54. Install the radiator splash shield, the 3 pin-type retainers and the 7 screws.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 393
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 779: Locating Push Pin Fasteners & Front Splash Shield Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
55. Using a new gasket, install the Y-pipe and exhaust flexible pipe assembly and 4 new nuts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 780: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
56. Install the 2 exhaust hangers and tighten the exhaust clamp.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 394
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 781: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
57. Install the ground wire, the radio interference capacitor wire and the nut to the engine front cover stud.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 782: Removing/installing Nut, Ground Wire & Radio Interference Capacitor Wire From
Engine Front Cover Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
58. Install the ground wire and bolt to the engine front cover.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 783: Removing/Installing Bolt & Ground Wire From Engine Front Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
59. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the RH valve cover stud bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 395
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 784: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From RH Valve Cover Stud Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
60. Install the oil level indicator.
Fig. 785: Identifying Oil Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
61. Connect the 2 engine wiring harness electrical connectors.
Attach the electrical connector to the LH valve cover.
Fig. 786: Identifying Engine Wiring Harness Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
62. Connect the fuel hose routing clip to the transaxle stud.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 396
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 787: Identifying Fuel Hose Routing Clip From Transaxle Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
63. Connect the fuel supply tube. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Fig. 788: Identifying Fuel Supply Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
64. Connect the hose to the power steering reservoir.
Fig. 789: Disconnecting Hose From Power Steering Reservoir
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
65. Connect the A/C suction tube fitting.
Install the safety clip onto the A/C fitting.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 397
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 790: Identifying Safety Clip On A/C Suction Tube Fitting
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
66. Using a new O-ring seal, connect the A/C tube fitting and install the nut.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Fig. 791: Identifying A/C Pressure Tube Fitting Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
67. If equipped, attach the engine block heater harness retainers to the radiator support and the A/C suction
tube.
Fig. 792: Identifying Engine Block Heater Harness, Radiator Support, A/C Suction Tube & Engine
Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
68. Connect the transaxle control electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 398
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 793: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
69. Attach the control cable to the bracket.
Connect the transaxle control cable to the control lever.
Fig. 794: Locating Transaxle Control Cable From Control Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
70. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the transaxle control cable bracket.
Fig. 795: Locating Wiring Harness Retainer From Transaxle Control Cable Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
71. Connect the upper radiator hose, lower radiator hose and 2 heater hoses to the thermostat housing.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 399
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 796: Locating Upper Radiator Hose, Lower Radiator Hose & Heater Hoses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
72. Connect the upper evaporative emissions (EVAP) tube quick connect coupling to the purge valve. For
additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Fig. 797: Locating Upper Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Tube Quick Connect Coupling
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
73. Connect the vacuum hose to the upper intake manifold.
Fig. 798: Identifying Vacuum Hose From Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
74. Install the ground wire and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Attach the 2 wiring harness retainers to the cowl.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 400
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 799: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainers From Cowl
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
75. Connect the power feed to the battery terminal and install the nut.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Fig. 800: Locating Power Feed To Battery Terminal And Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
76. Connect the battery harness electrical connector.
Fig. 801: Identifying Battery Harness Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
77. Install the battery tray. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES
article.
78. Install the engine air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 401
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
AIR DISTRIBUTION & FILTERING article.
Install the degas bottle. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
Install the accessory drive belt and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer to
ACCESSORY DRIVE article.
Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
Fill the power steering system. For additional information, refer to STEERING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Recharge the air conditioning system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION & DIAGNOSTICS article.
CAMSHAFT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Alignment Pins
307-399
Camshaft Alignment Tool
303-1248
Handle
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Installer, Crankshaft Front Seal
303-1251
Installer, Crankshaft Vibration
Damper
303-102 (T74P-6316-B)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 402
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Installer, Front Cover Oil Seal
303-335
Installer, Seal
303-1247/2
Powertrain Lift
014-00765
Strap Wrench
303-D055 (D85L-6000-A)
Material
Item
Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
TA-357
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Specification
WSE-M4G323-A6
-
WSS-M2C930-A
-
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 403
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
cause engine failure.
All camshafts
CAUTION: The crankshaft must remain in the freewheeling position (crankshaft
dowel pin at 9 o'clock) until after the camshafts are installed and the
valve clearance is checked/adjusted. Do not turn the crankshaft until
instructed to do so. Failure to follow this process will result in severe
engine damage.
1. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise until the crankshaft dowel pin is in the 9 o'clock position.
Fig. 802: Rotating Crankshaft Counterclockwise Until Crankshaft Dowel Pin Is In 9 O'clock
Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
LH camshafts
CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during installation
or engine damage may occur.
NOTE:
Coat the camshafts with clean engine oil prior to installation.
2. Position the camshafts onto the LH cylinder head in the neutral position as shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 404
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 803: Verifying LH Camshafts Are In Neutral Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original positions. If not reassembled in
their original positions, severe engine damage may occur.
3. Install the 8 camshaft caps and the 16 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 804: Installing Camshaft Caps & Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
RH camshafts
CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during installation
or engine damage may occur.
NOTE:
Coat the camshafts with clean engine oil prior to installation.
4. Position the camshafts onto the RH cylinder head in the neutral position as shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 405
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 805: Positioning Camshafts Onto RH Cylinder Head In Neutral Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original positions. If not reassembled in
their original positions, severe engine damage may occur.
5. Install the 8 camshaft caps and the 16 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 806: Installing Camshaft Caps & Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All camshafts
CAUTION: If any components are installed new, the engine valve clearance must
be checked/adjusted or engine damage may occur.
NOTE:
Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts.
6. Using a feeler gauge, confirm that the valve tappet clearances are within specification. If valve tappet
clearances are not within specification, the clearance must be adjusted by installing new valve tappet(s) of
the correct size. For additional information, refer to Valve Clearance Check.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 406
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 807: Measuring Valve Clearance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
LH camshafts
NOTE:
Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts.
7. Rotate the LH camshafts to the top dead center position and install the special tool on the flats of the
camshafts.
Fig. 808: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) On Flats Of Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Assemble the LH variable camshaft timing (VCT) assembly, the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket and the
LH secondary timing chain.
Align the colored links with the timing marks.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 407
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 809: Aligning LH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket & LH Secondary Timing Chain Colored Links
With Timing Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Position the LH secondary timing assembly onto the camshafts.
Fig. 810: Positioning LH Secondary Timing Assembly Onto Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Install 2 new bolts and the original washer. Tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:16 AM
Page 408
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 811: Locating LH VCT Assembly Bolt & LH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the lockpin from the LH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Fig. 812: Locating Lock Pin On LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
RH camshafts
NOTE:
Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts.
12. Rotate the RH camshafts to the top dead center position and install the special tool on the flats of the
camshafts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 409
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 813: Installing Special Tool (303-1248) On Flats Of Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Assemble the RH VCT assembly, the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket and the RH secondary timing chain.
Align the colored links with the timing marks.
Fig. 814: Aligning RH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket & RH Secondary Timing Chain Colored Links
With Timing Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Position the RH secondary timing assembly onto the camshafts.
Fig. 815: Positioning RH Secondary Timing Assembly Onto Camshafts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Install 2 new bolts and the original washer. Tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 410
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees.
Fig. 816: Locating RH VCT Assembly Bolt & RH Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Remove the lockpin from the RH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Fig. 817: Identifying Lock Pin On RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All camshafts
17. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise 60 degrees to the top dead center position (crankshaft dowel pin at 11
o'clock).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 411
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 818: Identifying Crankshaft Dowel Pin At 11 O'clock
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Install the primary timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT
assemblies and the crankshaft sprocket.
Fig. 819: Aligning Timing Marks On VCT Assemblies & Crankshaft Sprocket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Install the lower LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 412
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 820: Locating Lower LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Install the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
Fig. 821: Locating Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Reset the primary timing chain tensioner.
Rotate the lever counterclockwise.
Using a soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger.
Align the hole in the lever with the hole in the tensioner housing.
Install a suitable lockpin.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 413
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 822: Compressing Plunger Using A Soft-Jawed Vise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to rotate the crankshaft slightly to remove slack from
the timing chain and install the tensioner.
22. Install the primary tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Remove the lockpin.
Fig. 823: Locating Primary Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. As a post-check, verify correct alignment of all timing marks.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 414
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 824: Verifying Correct Alignment Of All Timing Marks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Install new VCT housing seals.
Fig. 825: Locating VCT Housing Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) housing
are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts.
Failure to follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
25. Install the LH VCT housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 826: Identifying LH VCT Housing Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 415
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) housing
are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts.
Failure to follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
26. Install the RH VCT housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 827: Identifying RH VCT Housing Bolts Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Install the special tools.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 416
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 828: Identifying Special Tool (307-399)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
The engine front cover and bolts 17, 18, 19 and 20 must be installed within
4 minutes of the initial sealant application. The remainder of the engine
front cover bolts and the engine mount bracket bolts must be installed and
tightened within 35 minutes of the initial sealant application. If the time
limits are exceeded, the sealant must be removed, the sealing area
cleaned and sealant reapplied. To clean the sealing area, use silicone
gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the
packaging. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
28. Apply a 3.0 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover sealing surfaces including the 3 engine mount bracket bosses.
Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the oil
pan-to-cylinder block joint and the cylinder head-to-cylinder block joint areas of the engine front
cover in 5 places as indicated.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 417
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 829: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover Sealing Surfaces
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the 2 locating dowel pins are seated correctly in the cylinder
block.
29. Install the engine front cover and bolts 17, 18, 19 and 20.
Tighten in sequence to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Fig. 830: Installing Engine Front Cover & Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Remove the special tools (alignment pins).
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
31. Install the engine mount bracket and the 3 bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 418
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 831: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not expose the Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
to engine oil for at least 90 minutes after installing the engine front
cover. Failure to follow this instruction may cause oil leakage.
32. Install the remaining engine front cover bolts. Tighten all of the engine front cover bolts and engine
mount bracket bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten bolts 1 thru 22 to 10 Nm (89 lb-in) and bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten bolts 1 thru 22 to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft) and bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 75 Nm (55 lb-ft).
Fig. 832: Identifying Tightening Of Engine Front Cover Bolts & Engine Mount Bracket Bolts In
Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. Install the 2 engine mount studs.
Tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 419
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 833: Locating Engine Mount Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
34. Install the engine mount bracket and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 834: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply clean engine oil to the crankshaft front seal bore in the engine front
cover.
35. Using the special tools, install a new crankshaft front seal.
Fig. 835: Installing Crankshaft Front Seal Using Special Tools (303-102) & (303-1251)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 420
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surfaces with clean engine oil.
36. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft pulley.
Fig. 836: Installing Crankshaft Pulley
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
37. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley washer and new bolt and tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
Fig. 837: Installing Crankshaft Pulley Washer & Bolt Using Special Tools (303-D055)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 421
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 838: Locating Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Install the power steering pump and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 839: Locating Power Steering Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Installation of new seals is only required if damaged seals were removed
during disassembly of the engine.
NOTE:
Spark plug tube seal installation shown, VCT seal installation similar.
40. Using the special tools, install new VCT solenoid and/or spark plug tube seals.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 422
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 840: Installing VCT Solenoid And/Or Spark Plug Tube Seals Using Special Tools (205-153) &
(303-1247/2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 4
minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To
clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface
prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this
procedure can cause future oil leakage.
41. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover-to-RH cylinder head joints.
Fig. 841: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover-To-RH Cylinder Head Joints
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
42. Using a new gasket, install the RH valve cover, bolt and the 10 stud bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 842: Installing RH Valve Cover Stud Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 423
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 4
minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To
clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface
prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this
procedure can cause future oil leakage.
43. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover-to-LH cylinder head joints.
Fig. 843: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover-To-LH Cylinder Head Joints
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
44. Using a new gasket, install the LH valve cover and 11 stud bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 844: Installing LH Valve Cover Stud Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
45. Install the 6 coil-on-plug assemblies and the 6 bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 424
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Fig. 845: Locating Coil-On-Plugs & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
46. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the LH valve cover and stud bolts.
47. Connect the 3 LH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Fig. 846: Locating LH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
48. Connect the LH camshaft VCT solenoid electrical connector.
Fig. 847: Locating LH VCT Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
49. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the RH valve cover and stud bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 425
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
50. Connect the 3 RH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Fig. 848: Locating RH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
51. Connect the RH VCT solenoid electrical connector.
Fig. 849: Locating RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
52. Connect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector.
Fig. 850: Locating PSP Switch Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
53. Connect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 426
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 851: Locating RH Catalyst Monitor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
54. Using new gaskets, install the upper intake manifold and the 6 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 852: Identifying Bolt Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
55. Install the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 853: Locating Upper Intake Manifold Support Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
56. Attach the wiring harness retainers to the upper intake manifold.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 427
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 854: Locating Wiring Harness Retainers From Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
57. Connect the throttle body (TB) electrical connector.
Fig. 855: Locating Throttle Body Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
58. Connect the PCV hose to the PCV valve.
Fig. 856: Identifying PCV Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
59. If equipped, attach the engine block heater wiring harness retainers.
60. Raise the engine and transaxle assembly into the vehicle.
61. Install the engine mount and the 3 bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 428
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 857: Locating Engine Mount Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
62. Install the 4 engine mount nuts.
Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Fig. 858: Locating Engine Mount Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
63. Install the engine mount brace, the nut and the bolt.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 859: Locating Nut, Bolt & Engine Mount Brace
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 429
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
64. Install the transaxle support insulator bracket, the 3 nuts and the bolt.
Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Fig. 860: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bracket, Nuts & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
65. Install the transaxle support insulator through bolt and nut.
Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
Fig. 861: Identifying Transaxle Support Insulator Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
NOTE:
A new powertrain transfer unit (PTU) seal must be installed whenever the
intermediate shaft is removed.
66. Install a new PTU seal. For additional information, refer to TRANSFER CASE - POWER TRANSFER
UNIT (PTU) article.
NOTE:
Prior to installation of the halfshaft, inspect the halfshaft sealing surface
for wear or damage and install new, if necessary.
67. Position the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft assembly in the PTU and in the steering knuckle and install
the 2 bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 430
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 862: Locating RH Halfshaft Bearing Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
NOTE:
Prior to installation of the halfshaft, inspect the halfshaft sealing surface
for wear or damage and install new if necessary.
68. Position the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft assembly in the transaxle and in the steering knuckle and
install the 2 stud bolts.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 863: Locating Stud Bolts & RH Halfshaft/Intermediate Shaft Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the 2 catalytic converter support bracket bolts at this time.
69. Install the converter support bracket and the 2 bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 431
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 864: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
70. Install the catalytic converter bracket bolt and the nut.
1. Tighten the nut to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
2. Tighten the bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 865: Locating Catalytic Converter Bracket Bolt & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
71. Tighten the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 866: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 432
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Prior to installation of the halfshaft, inspect the halfshaft sealing surface
for wear or damage and install new, if necessary.
72. Install the LH halfshaft into the transaxle.
Fig. 867: Identifying LH Halfshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
73. If equipped, connect the oil cooler coolant hoses.
Fig. 868: Locating Oil Cooler Coolant Hoses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
74. Using the special tool, raise the subframe into the installed position.
Fig. 869: Positioning Special Tool (014-00765) Under Subframe Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 433
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
75. Install the 2 middle subframe nuts.
Tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
Fig. 870: Locating Middle Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
76. Install the 2 front subframe nuts.
Tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
Fig. 871: Locating Front Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
77. Position the subframe support brackets in place and loosely install the 4 bolts.
Fig. 872: Locating Subframe Support Brackets And Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 434
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
78. Install the 2 rear subframe bracket nuts.
Tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
Fig. 873: Locating Rear Subframe Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
79. Tighten the 4 subframe support bracket bolts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 874: Locating Subframe Support Brackets And Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
80. Position the lower bumper on the subframe and install the 3 LH nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 875: Locating LH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 435
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
81. Install the 3 RH lower bumper-to-subframe nuts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 876: Locating RH Subframe-To-Lower Bumper Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH side shown, LH side similar.
82. Install the ball joints in the steering knuckles and install the pinch bolts.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 436
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 877: Locating Ball Joint Pinch Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH side shown, LH side similar.
83. Position the stabilizer bar links in the lower control arms and install the nuts.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 878: Locating Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
84. Install the tie-rod ends and nuts.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 437
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Install new cotter pins.
Fig. 879: Locating Tie-Rod Ends Nuts And Cotter Pin
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not allow the intermediate shaft to rotate while it is disconnected
from the gear or damage to the clockspring can occur. If there is
evidence that the intermediate shaft has rotated, the clockspring
must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
85. Install the intermediate shaft onto the steering gear and install a new bolt.
Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Fig. 880: Identifying Steering Intermediate Shaft Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
86. Using a new banjo bolt and 2 new seals, install the PSP tube.
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 438
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 881: Locating Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Tube-To-Pump Banjo Bolt & Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
87. Install the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt.
Tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
Fig. 882: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
88. Install the roll restrictor heat shield and the 2 nuts.
Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 439
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 883: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
89. Install a new RH front halfshaft nut.
Tighten to 350 Nm (258 lb-ft).
Fig. 884: Locating RH Front Halfshaft Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
AWD vehicles
90. Line up the index marks on the rear driveshaft to the index marks on the PTU flange made during
removal and install the 4 bolts.
Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 440
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 885: Locating Driveshaft Aside Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
91. Install the power steering cooler bracket bolt to the RH side of the subframe.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Fig. 886: Identifying Power Steering Cooler Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
92. Connect the power steering cooler hose.
Fig. 887: Identifying Power Steering Cooler Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing
the oil filter.
93. Install a new engine oil filter.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:17 AM
Page 441
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 888: Identifying Engine Oil Filter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
94. Connect the 2 transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Fig. 889: Locating Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
95. Install the 2 secondary latches onto the transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 442
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 890: Locating Secondary Latches On Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
96. Install the LH inner splash shield. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY PANELS
article.
97. Install the radiator splash shield, the 3 pin-type retainers and the 7 screws.
Fig. 891: Locating Push Pin Fasteners & Front Splash Shield Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
98. Using a new gasket, install the Y-pipe and exhaust flexible pipe assembly and 4 new nuts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 892: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe, Y-Pipe & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
99. Install the 2 exhaust hangers and tighten the exhaust clamp.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 443
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 893: Locating Exhaust Flexible Pipe Clamp & Exhaust Hangers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
100. Install the ground wire, the radio interference capacitor wire and the nut to the engine front cover stud.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 894: Removing/installing Nut, Ground Wire & Radio Interference Capacitor Wire From
Engine Front Cover Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
101. Install the ground wire and bolt to the engine front cover.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 444
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 895: Removing/Installing Bolt & Ground Wire From Engine Front Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
102. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the RH valve cover stud bolt.
Fig. 896: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From RH Valve Cover Stud Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
103. Install the oil level indicator.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 445
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 897: Identifying Oil Level Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
104. Connect the 2 engine wiring harness electrical connectors.
Attach the electrical connector to the LH valve cover.
Fig. 898: Identifying Engine Wiring Harness Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
105. Connect the fuel hose routing clip to the transaxle stud.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 446
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 899: Identifying Fuel Hose Routing Clip From Transaxle Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
106. Connect the fuel supply tube. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Fig. 900: Identifying Fuel Supply Tube
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
107. Connect the hose to the power steering reservoir.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 447
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 901: Disconnecting Hose From Power Steering Reservoir
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
108. Connect the A/C suction tube fitting.
Install the safety clip onto the A/C fitting.
Fig. 902: Identifying Safety Clip On A/C Suction Tube Fitting
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
109. Using a new O-ring seal, connect the A/C pressure tube fitting and install the nut.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 448
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 903: Identifying A/C Pressure Tube Fitting Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
110. If equipped, attach the engine block heater harness retainers from to the radiator support and the A/C
suction tube.
Fig. 904: Identifying Engine Block Heater Harness, Radiator Support, A/C Suction Tube & Engine
Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
111. Connect the transaxle control electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 449
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 905: Identifying Transaxle Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
112. Attach the control cable to the bracket.
Connect the transaxle control cable to the control lever.
Fig. 906: Locating Transaxle Control Cable From Control Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
113. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the transaxle control cable bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 450
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 907: Locating Wiring Harness Retainer From Transaxle Control Cable Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
114. Connect the upper radiator hose, lower radiator hose and 2 heater hoses to the thermostat housing.
Fig. 908: Locating Upper Radiator Hose, Lower Radiator Hose & Heater Hoses
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
115. Connect the upper evaporative emissions (EVAP) tube quick connect coupling. to the purge valve. For
additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Fig. 909: Locating Upper Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Tube Quick Connect Coupling
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
116. Connect the vacuum hose to the upper intake manifold.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 451
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 910: Identifying Vacuum Hose From Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
117. Install the ground wire and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Attach the 2 wiring harness retainers to the cowl.
Fig. 911: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainers From Cowl
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
118. Connect the power feed to the battery terminal and install the nut.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 452
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 912: Locating Power Feed To Battery Terminal And Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
119. Connect the battery harness electrical connector.
Fig. 913: Identifying Battery Harness Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
120. Install the battery tray. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES
article.
121. Install the engine air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE
AIR DISTRIBUTION & FILTERING article.
122. Install the degas bottle. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
123. Install the accessory drive belt and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer to
ACCESSORY DRIVE article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 453
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Do not expose the Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
to engine oil for at least 90 minutes after installing the engine front
cover. Failure to follow this instruction may cause oil leakage.
124. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
125. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
126. Fill the power steering system. For additional information, refer to STEERING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
127. Recharge the A/C system. For additional information, refer to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION & DIAGNOSTICS article.
VALVE TAPPETS
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
NOTE:
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces
that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine
failure.
NOTE:
The valve tappets must be installed in their original positions.
NOTE:
Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil prior to installation.
1. Install the valve tappets.
Fig. 914: Identifying Valve Tappets From Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 454
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
2. Depending on the valve tappets being serviced, install the LH and/or the RH camshafts. For additional
information, refer to Camshaft.
VALVE SPRING, RETAINER AND SEAL
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Compressor, Valve Spring
303-300 (T87C-6565-A)
Compressor, Valve Spring
303-350 (T89P-6565-A)
Compressor, Valve Spring
303-1249
Installer, Valve Stem Oil Seal
303-470 (T94P-6510-CH)
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
NOTE:
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
Lubricate the valve stem seal with clean engine oil prior to installation.
1. Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Installer, install a new valve stem seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 455
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 915: Installing New Valve Stem Seal Using Special Tool (303-470)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Using the Valve Spring Compressors, install the valve spring, retainer and key.
Fig. 916: Removing Keys, Retainer & Spring Using Special Tools (303-1249, 303-350, 303-300)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the valve tappets. For additional information, refer to Valve Tappets.
CYLINDER HEAD - RH
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
All vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 456
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
1. Install a new gasket, the RH cylinder head and 8 new bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown in 5 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Stage 3: Tighten 90 degrees.
Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees.
Stage 5: Tighten 90 degrees.
Fig. 917: Installing RH Cylinder Head Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 918: Identifying M6 Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The valve tappets must be installed in their original positions.
NOTE:
Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil prior to installation.
3. Install the valve tappets.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 457
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 919: Identifying Valve Tappets From Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install and connect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor jumper harness.
Fig. 920: Identifying CHT Sensor Jumper Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Using new gaskets, install the lower intake manifold and the 10 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 458
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 921: Installing Lower Intake Manifold Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Using a new gasket and O-ring seal, install the thermostat housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 922: Locating Thermostat Housing-To-Lower Intake Manifold Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. The
use of ordinary O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not
reuse the O-ring seals.
NOTE:
The upper and lower O-ring seals are not interchangeable.
7. Install new fuel injector O-ring seals.
Remove the retaining clips and separate the fuel injectors from the fuel rail.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Install new O-ring seals and lubricate with clean engine oil.
Install the fuel injectors and the retaining clips onto the fuel rail.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 459
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 923: Identifying Fuel Injector O-Ring Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly and install the 4 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 924: Identifying Fuel Rail And Injectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Install the RH camshaft position (CMP) sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 925: Locating RH CMP Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Align the bracket with the index mark made during removal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 460
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
10. Install the upper intake manifold bracket and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 926: Locating Upper Intake Manifold Bracket & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Install the engine lifting eye and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 461
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 927: Locating Engine Lifting Eye & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 928: Locating RH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Install the RH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 462
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 929: Locating RH Primary Timing Chain Guide Lower Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Install 6 new RH exhaust manifold studs.
Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
Fig. 930: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to tighten the exhaust manifold nuts to specification a second
time will cause the exhaust manifold to develop an exhaust leak.
15. Using a new gasket, install the RH exhaust manifold and 6 new nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the sequence
shown:
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 463
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 931: Installing RH Exhaust Manifold Nuts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Install the RH exhaust manifold heat shield and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft).
Fig. 932: Locating RH Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Install the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 933: Locating RH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the 4 catalytic converter nuts at this time.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 464
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
18. Using a new gasket, install the RH catalytic converter and 4 new nuts.
Fig. 934: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
19. Install the 2 RH catalytic converter bracket bolts.
Tighten the 4 catalytic converter nuts to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Tighten the 2 catalytic converter bracket bolts to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 935: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
20. Install the LH cylinder block drain plug.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft) plus an additional 180 degrees.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 465
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 936: Locating LH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Using a new gasket, install the LH catalytic converter and 4 new nuts (3 shown).
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 937: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Install the 2 LH catalytic converter bracket bolts.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 938: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Connect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 466
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 939: Identifying LH Catalyst Monitor Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Connect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 940: Locating Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors (3 shown).
Fig. 941: Locating Fuel Injector Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Install the ground cable and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 467
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 942: Locating Ground Cable From RH Cylinder
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Connect the RH CMP sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 943: Locating RH Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Connect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Fig. 944: Locating RH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. If equipped, install the block heater wiring harness onto the engine.
Connect the block heater electrical connector and install the heat shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 468
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 945: Identifying Block Heater Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Install the RH camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshaft.
CYLINDER HEAD - LH
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
All vehicles
1. Install a new gasket, the LH cylinder head and 8 new bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown in 5 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Stage 3: Tighten 90 degrees.
Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees.
Stage 5: Tighten 90 degrees.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 469
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 946: Installing LH Cylinder Head Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 947: Identifying M6 Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The valve tappets must be installed in their original positions.
NOTE:
Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil prior to installation.
3. Install the valve tappets.
Fig. 948: Identifying Valve Tappets From Cylinder Head
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 470
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 949: Locating LH Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the upper LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 950: Locating Upper LH Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install LH camshaft position (CMP) sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 471
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 951: Locating LH CMP Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Using new gaskets, install the lower intake manifold and the 10 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 952: Installing Lower Intake Manifold Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Using a new gasket and O-ring seal, install the thermostat housing and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 953: Locating Thermostat Housing-To-Lower Intake Manifold Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. The
use of ordinary O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not
reuse the O-ring seals.
NOTE:
The upper and lower O-ring seals are not interchangeable.
9. Install new fuel injector O-ring seals.
Remove the retaining clips and separate the fuel injectors from the fuel rail.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Install new O-ring seals and lubricate with clean engine oil.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:18 AM
Page 472
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Install the fuel injectors and the retaining clips onto the fuel rail.
Fig. 954: Identifying Fuel Injector O-Ring Seals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Install the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly and install the 4 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 955: Identifying Fuel Rail And Injectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Install the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 956: Locating RH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 473
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
12. Using a new gasket, install the RH catalytic converter and 4 new nuts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 957: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
13. Install the 2 RH catalytic converter bracket bolts.
Tighten the 4 catalytic converter nuts to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Tighten the 2 catalytic converter brackets to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 958: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
14. Install the LH cylinder block drain plug.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft) plus an additional 180 degrees.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 474
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 959: Locating LH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Install 6 new LH exhaust manifold studs.
Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
Fig. 960: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to tighten the exhaust manifold nuts to specification a second
time will cause the exhaust manifold to develop an exhaust leak.
16. Using a new gasket, install the LH exhaust manifold and 6 new nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the sequence
shown:
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 475
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 961: Installing LH Exhaust Manifold Nuts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Install the LH exhaust manifold heat shield and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft).
Fig. 962: Locating LH Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Using a new gasket, install the LH catalytic converter and 4 new nuts (3 shown).
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 963: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Install the 2 LH catalytic converter bracket bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 476
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 964: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Install the generator, the bolt and the nut.
Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Fig. 965: Locating Generator, Bolts & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Install the A/C compressor, the nut and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 966: Locating A/C Compressor, Bolts & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 477
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
22. Connect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector and the wiring harness pin-type
retainer.
Fig. 967: Locating Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness PinType Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the generator.
Fig. 968: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer From Generator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Connect the generator electrical connector.
Fig. 969: Identifying Generator Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 478
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
25. Connect the generator B+ cable and install the nut.
Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
Fig. 970: Identifying Generator B+ Cable & Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
Fig. 971: Identifying A/C Compressor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Install the wiring harness retainer bolt on the rear of the LH cylinder head.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 972: Identifying Wiring Harness Retainer Bolt From Rear Of LH Cylinder Head
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 479
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
28. Connect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 973: Identifying LH Catalyst Monitor Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Connect the LH HO2S electrical connector.
Fig. 974: Locating LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Connect the LH CMP sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 975: Locating LH CMP Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
31. Connect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 480
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 976: Locating Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
32. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors (3 shown).
Fig. 977: Locating Fuel Injector Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. If equipped, install the block heater wiring harness onto the engine.
Connect the block heater electrical connector and install the heat shield.
Fig. 978: Identifying Block Heater Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
34. Install the LH camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshaft.
OIL PAN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 481
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Alignment Pins
307-399
Handle
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Heavy Duty Floor Crane
014-00071 or equivalent
Installer, Crankshaft Front Seal
303-1251
Installer, Crankshaft Vibration
Damper
303-102 (T74P-6316-B)
Installer, Front Cover Oil Seal
303-335
Installer, Seal
303-1247/2
Spreader Bar
303-D089 (D93P-6001-A3) or
equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 482
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Strap Wrench
303-D055 (D85L-6000-A)
Material
Item
Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
TA-357
Motorcraft Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Silicone Gasket Remover
ZC-30
Specification
WSE-M4G323-A6
-
WSS-M2C930-A
-
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
cause engine failure.
All vehicles
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
The oil pan and the 4 specified bolts must be installed and the oil pan
aligned to the cylinder block and A/C compressor within 4 minutes of
sealant application. Final tightening of the oil pan bolts must be carried
out within 60 minutes of sealant application.
1. Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the sealing surface
of the oil pan.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 483
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the 2
crankshaft seal retainer plate-to-cylinder block joint areas on the sealing surface of the oil pan.
Fig. 979: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Crankshaft
Seal Retainer Plate-To-Cylinder Block
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The oil pan and the 4 specified bolts must be installed within 4 minutes of
the start of sealant application.
2. Install the oil pan and bolts 10, 11, 13 and 14.
Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Loosen the bolts 180 degrees.
Fig. 980: Installing Oil Pan Bolts 10, 11, 13 & 14 In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Align the oil pan to the cylinder block and the A/C compressor.
Position the oil pan so the mounting boss is against the A/C compressor and using a straightedge,
align the oil pan flush with the rear of the cylinder block at the 2 areas shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 484
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 981: Aligning Oil Pan Flush With Rear Of Cylinder Block
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Tighten bolts 10, 11, 13 and 14 in the sequence shown, to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Fig. 982: Installing Oil Pan Bolts 10, 11, 13 & 14 In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the remaining oil pan bolts. Tighten all the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten the large bolts (1-14) to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Tighten the small bolts (15 and 16) to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 983: Installing Remaining Oil Pan Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the A/C compressor mounting stud and nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 485
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Tighten the stud to 9 Nm (80 lb-in) and the nut to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 984: Locating A/C Compressor Nut & Stud
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Install the special tools.
Fig. 985: Identifying Special Tool (307-399)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
The engine front cover and bolts 17, 18, 19 and 20 must be installed within
4 minutes of the initial sealant application. The remainder of the engine
front cover bolts and the engine mount bracket bolts must be installed and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 486
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
tightened within 35 minutes of the initial sealant application. If the time
limits are exceeded, the sealant must be removed, the sealing area
cleaned and sealant reapplied. To clean the sealing area, use silicone
gasket remover and metal surface prep. Failure to follow this procedure
can cause future oil leakage.
8. Apply a 3.0 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover sealing surfaces including the 3 engine mount bracket bosses.
Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the oil
pan-to-cylinder block joint and the cylinder head-to-cylinder block joint areas of the engine front
cover in 5 places as indicated.
Fig. 986: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover Sealing Surfaces
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the 2 locating dowel pins are seated correctly in the cylinder
block.
9. Install the engine front cover and bolts 17, 18, 19 and 20.
Tighten in sequence to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 487
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 987: Installing Engine Front Cover & Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the special tools (alignment pins).
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
11. Install the engine mount bracket and the 3 bolts.
Fig. 988: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not expose the Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
to engine oil for at least 90 minutes after installing the engine front
cover. Failure to follow this instruction may cause oil leakage.
12. Install the remaining engine front cover bolts. Tighten all of the engine front cover bolts and engine
mount bracket bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten bolts 1 thru 22 to 10 Nm (89 lb-in) and bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten bolts 1 thru 22 to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft) and bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 75 Nm (55 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 488
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 989: Identifying Tightening Of Engine Front Cover Bolts & Engine Mount Bracket Bolts In
Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Install the 2 engine mount studs.
Tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb-ft).
Fig. 990: Locating Engine Mount Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Install the engine mount bracket and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 991: Locating Engine Mount Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 489
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Apply clean engine oil to the crankshaft front seal bore in the engine front
cover.
15. Using the special tools, install a new crankshaft front seal.
Fig. 992: Installing Crankshaft Front Seal Using Special Tools (303-102) & (303-1251)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surfaces with clean engine oil.
16. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft pulley.
Fig. 993: Installing Crankshaft Pulley
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley washer and new bolt and tighten in 4 stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 (lb-ft).
Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 490
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 994: Installing Crankshaft Pulley Washer & Bolt Using Special Tools (303-D055)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Installation of new seals is only required if damaged seals were removed
during disassembly of the engine.
NOTE:
Spark plug tube seal installation shown, variable camshaft timing (VCT)
seal installation similar.
18. Using the special tools, install new VCT solenoid and/or spark plug tube seals.
Fig. 995: Installing VCT Solenoid And/Or Spark Plug Tube Seals Using Special Tools (205-153) &
(303-1247/2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 4
minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To
clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface
prep. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
19. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover-to-RH cylinder head joints.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 491
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 996: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover-To-RH Cylinder Head Joints
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Using a new gasket, install the RH valve cover, bolt and the 10 stud bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 997: Installing RH Valve Cover Stud Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 4
minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To
clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface
prep. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
21. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front
cover-to-LH cylinder head joints.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 492
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 998: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Engine Front
Cover-To-LH Cylinder Head Joints
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Using a new gasket, install the LH valve cover and 11 stud bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 999: Installing LH Valve Cover Stud Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
23. Install the 6 coil-on-plug assemblies and the 6 bolts.
Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Fig. 1000: Locating Coil-On-Plugs & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 493
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
24. Install the LH cylinder block drain plug.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft) plus an additional 180 degrees.
Fig. 1001: Locating LH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
25. Install the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 1002: Locating RH Cylinder Block Drain Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
26. Using a new gasket, install the RH catalytic converter and 4 new nuts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 494
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1003: Locating RH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
27. Using a new gasket, install the LH catalytic converter and 4 new nuts (3 shown).
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 1004: Locating LH Catalytic Converter Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Fig. 1005: Locating Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 495
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
29. Install the power steering pump and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 1006: Locating Power Steering Pump Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the LH valve cover and stud bolts.
31. Connect the 3 LH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Fig. 1007: Locating LH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
32. Connect the LH camshaft VCT solenoid electrical connector.
Fig. 1008: Locating LH VCT Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 496
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
33. Connect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 1009: Identifying LH Catalyst Monitor Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
34. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the RH valve cover and stud bolts.
35. Connect the 3 RH coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
Fig. 1010: Locating RH Coil-On-Plug Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
36. Connect the RH VCT solenoid electrical connector.
Fig. 1011: Locating RH Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
FWD vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 497
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
37. Connect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 1012: Locating RH Catalyst Monitor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
38. Connect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector.
Fig. 1013: Locating PSP Switch Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Using new gaskets, install the upper intake manifold and the 6 bolts.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 1014: Identifying Bolt Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 498
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
40. Install the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 1015: Locating Upper Intake Manifold Support Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
41. Attach the wiring harness retainers to the upper intake manifold.
Fig. 1016: Locating Wiring Harness Retainers From Upper Intake Manifold
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
42. Connect the throttle body (TB) electrical connector.
Fig. 1017: Locating Throttle Body Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
43. Connect the PCV hose to the PCV valve.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 499
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1018: Identifying PCV Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
44. If equipped, position the engine block heater harness on the engine and attach all of the harness retainers.
Connect the engine block heater electrical connector and install the heat shield.
Fig. 1019: Identifying Block Heater Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
45. Using the special tools, remove the engine from the stand.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 500
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1020: Removing Engine & Transaxle From Lift Table Using Special Tools (303-D089, 01400071) & Suitable Engine Crane
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
46. Install the crankshaft sensor ring.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 501
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1021: Identifying Crankshaft Sensor Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
47. Install the flexplate and the 8 bolts.
Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:19 AM
Page 502
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1022: Identifying Flexplate & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
48. Install the engine in the vehicle. For additional information, refer to Engine.
OIL PUMP SCREEN AND PICKUP TUBE
NOTE:
During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces
that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine
failure.
1. Using a new O-ring seal, install the oil pump screen and pickup tube and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:20 AM
Page 503
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1023: Identifying Oil Pump Screen, Pickup Tube & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Oil Pan.
CRANKSHAFT REAR SEAL WITH RETAINER PLATE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Handle
Tool Number
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:20 AM
Page 504
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Heavy Duty Floor Crane
014-00071 or equivalent
Installer, Rear Main Seal
303-1250
Spreader Bar
303-D089 (D93P-6001-A3) or
equivalent
Material
Item
Specification
Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
WSE-M4G323-A6
TA-357
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
WSS-M2C930-A
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
NOTE:
During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any
foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces
that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine
failure.
NOTE:
Failure to use Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may
cause the engine oil to foam excessively and result in serious engine
damage.
NOTE:
The crankshaft rear seal retainer must be installed and the bolts tightened
within 4 minutes of sealant application.
1. Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the sealing surface
of the crankshaft rear seal retainer.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:20 AM
Page 505
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1024: Applying Bead Of Motorcraft High Performance Engine RTV Silicone To Sealing
Surface Of Crankshaft Rear Seal Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the rear seal retainer and the 8 bolts in the sequence shown.
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 1025: Installing Crankshaft Rear Seal Retainer Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lubricate the seal lips and bore with clean engine oil prior to installation.
3. Position the Rear Main Seal Installer onto the end of the crankshaft and slide a new crankshaft rear seal
onto the tool.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:20 AM
Page 506
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1026: Positioning Special Tool (303-1250) Onto End Of Crankshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Using the Rear Main Seal Installer and Handle, install the new crankshaft rear seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:20 AM
Page 507
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1027: Installing New Crankshaft Rear Seal Using Special Tools (303-1250) & (205-153)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor and install the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Fig. 1028: Identifying CKP Sensor & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
Fig. 1029: Identifying Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Using the Heavy Duty Floor Crane and Spreader Bar, install the engine onto the stand.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:20 AM
Page 508
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1030: Identifying Heavy Duty Floor Crane and Spreader Bar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Oil Pan.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:32:20 AM
Page 509
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
2008 TRANSMISSIONS
Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL
Item
MERCON® V Automatic
Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US);
CXT-5-LM12 (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL (US); CXY75W140-1L (Canada)
Silicone Gasket and Sealant
TA-30
Thread Sealant with PTFE
TA-24
Specification
MERCON® V
Fill Capacity
-
WSL-M2C192-A
0.53L (18 oz)
WSE-M4G323-A4
-
WSK-M2G350-A2
-
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Ball joint bolt and nut
Brake hose bracket bolt
Driveshaft-to-power transfer unit (PTU) output
flange bolts
Fill plug
Intermediate and halfshaft assembly bolts
Pinion flange nut (1)
PTU cover bolts
PTU-to-support bracket bolts
PTU-to-transaxle bolts
Roll restrictor bracket-to-transmission bolts
Roll restrictor shield
Roll restrictor through bolt (transmission side)
Roll restrictor through bolt (subframe side)
Stabilizer bar link nut
Wheel hub nut (1)
(1) Refer to the procedure.
N.m
lb. ft.
lb-in
55
20
70
41
52
177
-
20
40
-
30
-
177
-
32
70
90
90
11
90
103
90
-
24
52
66
66
66
76
66
-
97
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:51
10:51:47 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system consists of the following:
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Rear driveshaft
4X4 control module
Rear axle with coupling device
The PTU is a gearbox that attaches to the transaxle. The RH intermediate shaft passes through the PTU and
engages the differential side gear as in normal Front Wheel Drive (FWD) applications. The PTU directs power
to the rear driveshaft through a helical gear spline coupled to the transaxle differential case, a helical gear drop
(idler gear) and hypoid/helical ring gear assembly and pinion set. The PTU is sealed from the transaxle and has
its own oil sump.
Serviceable components of the PTU are limited to the output shaft seal and flange, intermediate shaft seal and
deflector, the cover seal and the PTU-transaxle compression seal. The internal components are not serviced. Do
not remove the cover of the PTU. If any of the geared components, bearings, case cover or internal shafts are
worn or damaged, a new PTU must be installed.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
Principles of Operation
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is a gearbox that attaches to the transaxle. The RH intermediate shaft passes
through the PTU and engages the differential side gear as in normal Front Wheel Drive (FWD) applications.
The PTU directs power to the rear driveshaft through a helical gear spline coupled to the transaxle differential
case, a helical gear drop (idler gear) and hypoid/helical ring gear assembly and pinion set. The PTU is sealed
from the transaxle and has its own oil sump.
Serviceable components of the PTU are limited to the output shaft seal and flange, intermediate shaft seal and
deflector, the cover seal and the PTU-transaxle compression seal. The internal components are not serviced. Do
not remove the cover of the PTU. If any of the geared components, bearings, case cover or internal shafts are
worn or damaged, a new PTU must be installed.
Heat Protection Mode - During very extreme off-road operation, the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system utilizes
a heat protection mode to protect the Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid (part of rear axle) from damage.
If the system detects an overheat condition, it enters a locked mode. If the heat in the system continues to rise
once in the locked mode, the 4X4 control module disables the ATC solenoid. Allow the system to cool down at
least 10 minutes with the ignition switch in the ON position.
For concerns with the 4X4 control module or ATC, refer to FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) SYSTEMS
article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Halfshafts and CV joints
Driveshaft and U-joints
Wheel/tire size and brand
Matching tire size and brand
Tire pressure
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and Go to SYMPTOM CHART - POWER
TRANSFER UNIT (PTU).
SYMPTOM CHART - POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
SYMPTOM CHART - POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Tire inflation pressure
Tire and wheel size
MAKE SURE all tires and wheels are
the same size and brand and the
inflation pressures are correct.
-
Fluid level
FILL with the correct type and amount
of lubricant. REFER to POWER
TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
DRAINING AND FILLING.
-
Internal components
OPERATE the vehicle in all gears. If
there is noise in the transaxle in
NEUTRAL, or in some gears and not
in others, REMOVE and REPAIR the
transaxle. Refer to the appropriate
Automatic Transmission article for the
procedure. If there is noise in all gears,
INSTALL a new PTU. REFER to
POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU).
PTU over filled
REFER to ANALYSIS OF
LEAKAGE.
The Power Transfer
Unit (PTU) makes noise
Leaking fluid from the
PTU vent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
PTU intermediate
shaft seal
PTU compression
seal
REFER to ANALYSIS OF
LEAKAGE.
The PTU vent is
plugged (located on
top of the PTU)
INSTALL a new PTU. REFER to
POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU).
Damaged seals
REFER to ANALYSIS OF
LEAKAGE.
Rear axle
REFER to REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
PTU mechanical
failure
REFER to POWER TRANSFER
UNIT (PTU).
Wheels/tires
REFER to WHEELS AND TIRES
article.
-
Brake system
REFER to BRAKE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
-
Wheel bearings
REFER to SUSPENSION SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
-
Halfshafts
REFER to DRIVELINE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
-
Wheel speed sensor
(s)
REFER to VEHICLE DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
-
ABS module
REFER to VEHICLE DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
Leaking automatic
transmission fluid
Leaking gear lubricant
from the seals
Vehicle has no or
inadequate torque at
rear wheels
Vehicle binds in a turn
or resists
turning/pulsates or
shudders in a straight
line
Analysis of Leakage
The PTU may leak different color fluids, red oil leak for an automatic transmission fluid and brown/black gear
lube for PTU fluid. The PTU seals prevent these types of fluids from leaking. It is important to note which color
of fluid is leaking to conduct the most appropriate service procedure.
PTU Leaks From the RH Side
NOTE:
Remove and replace leaking seals using the information found in the
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SEAL AND DEFLECTOR or COVER SEAL replacement
procedure. The specified tools called out in this procedure will allow seal
replacement without causing damage to the Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
casing/drive gear.
If the leak is red automatic transmission fluid, then the PTU intermediate shaft seal needs replacement. This is
inside the bore of the PTU shaft behind the deflector. Refer to the INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SEAL AND
DEFLECTOR procedure.
If the leak is brown/black gear lube, then the PTU larger cover seal needs replacement. This is located on the
PTU cover behind the deflector. Refer to COVER SEAL procedure.
Fig. 1: Identifying Intermediate Shaft Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
-
Description
Intermediate shaft seal (part of kit 7275)
Alignment washer (part of kit 7275)
Cover seal (part of kit 7275)
Seal deflector (part of kit 7275)
PTU Leaks From the LH Side
If the leak is the red automatic transmission fluid, the compression seal needs replacement. This is between the
PTU and transmission. Refer to POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) in the Removal portion of this service
information.
If the leak is brown/black, the PTU is overfilled and venting fluid from the top of the PTU. Flush and fill the
PTU. Refer to POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) DRAINING AND FILLING.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: PTU Leaks From LH Side
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
-
2
-
3
-
Description
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)-to-transaxle
compression seal (7086)
Transfer case driver gear seal (not
serviceable)
Transfer case driver gear seal (not
serviceable)
GENERAL PROCEDURES
POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) DRAINING AND FILLING
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
WSL-M2C192-A
Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL (US); CXY-75W140-1L (Canada)
NOTE:
A new Power Transfer Unit (PTU) must be installed any time the PTU has been
submerged in water.
NOTE:
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is not to be drained unless contamination is
suspected. To drain the PTU fluid, the PTU must be removed from the vehicle.
The fluid that is drained may appear black and have a pungent odor. Do not
mistake this for contaminated fluid. For additional information, refer to POWER
TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) in the Removal portion of this service information.
NOTE:
Fill level checks are done in-vehicle only. Let the vehicle sit 10 minutes after the
road test before checking the fluid level.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
2. Clean the area around the filler plug before removing.
Fig. 3: Locating Fill Plug
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove and discard the filler plug.
4. With the vehicle on a flat, level surface, fill the PTU with lubricant. The fluid must be even with the
bottom of the fill opening.
Fluid capacity is 0.53L (18 oz).
5. Install a new filler plug.
Tighten to 20 N.m (177 lb-in).
IN-VEHICLE SERVICING
COVER SEAL
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Handle, Driver 32 in
Tool Number
205-907
Installer, Halfshaft Oil Seal
308-431
Installer, Shaft Bearing Cup
308-221 (T94P-7025-BH)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Remover, Halfshaft
205-241
Slide Hammer
100-01 (T50T-100-A)
REMOVAL
NOTE:
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) may leak different color fluids, red oil leak for
automatic transmission fluid and brown/black gear lube for PTU fluid. The PTU
seals prevent these types of fluids from leaking. It is important to note which
color fluid is leaking to conduct the most appropriate service procedure. This
procedure will correct a brown/black (gear lube) leak from the RH side of the
PTU. For additional information, refer to ANALYSIS OF LEAKAGE.
NOTE:
This procedure is to be performed through the RH wheel opening. It is not
necessary to remove the exhaust components to complete this repair.
1. Remove the intermediate shaft seal and deflector. For additional information, refer to INTERMEDIATE
SHAFT SEAL AND DEFLECTOR.
NOTE:
There is a bearing inside the PTU directly behind the cover seal. The
bearing is not serviced.
2. Remove the cover seal using the Slide Hammer, the extension from the Halfshaft Remover and a suitable
seal puller inserted into the groove of the seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Removing Cover Seal Using Slide Hammer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Assemble the Driver Handle, the Halfshaft Oil Seal Installer and the Shaft Bearing Cup Installer as shown
in illustration.
Fig. 5: Assembling Driver Handle, Halfshaft Oil Seal Installer & Shaft Bearing Cup Installer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Using the Driver Handle, the Halfshaft Oil Seal Installer and the Shaft Bearing Cup Installer, install the
cover seal in the PTU.
Fig. 6: Installing Cover Seal In PTU
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
3. Install the intermediate shaft seal and deflector. For additional information, refer to INTERMEDIATE
SHAFT SEAL AND DEFLECTOR.
4. Fill the PTU fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
DRAINING AND FILLING.
OUTPUT SHAFT SEAL
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Holding Fixture, Drive Pinion
Flange
Tool Number
205-126 (T78P-4851-A)
Installer, PTU Drive Gear Outer
Oil Seal
308-430
Remover, Output Flange
307-523
Fig. 7: Output Shaft Seal and Flange
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
-
4
5
-
Description
Collapsible spacer (part of 7275 kit)
Output shaft seal (part of 7275 kit)
Output shaft seal deflector (part of 7275
kit)
Output pinion flange (part of 7275 kit)
Pinion flange nut (part of 7275 kit)
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
NOTE:
Index-mark both the driveshaft flanges for installation.
3. Remove the 4 driveshaft-to-Power Transfer Unit (PTU) output flange bolts. Disconnect the driveshaft
from the PTU and position it aside.
Using mechanic's wire, support the driveshaft.
NOTE:
Rotational torque of the PTU rear output shaft flange must be measured
and recorded using a N.m (lb-in) torque wrench for correct pinion bearing
preload when reassembled. This will be the torque-to-turn measurement.
4. Using a suitable torque wrench, measure and record the rotational torque.
Fig. 8: Measuring Rotational Torque Using A Suitable Torque Wrench
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture, hold the output pinion flange. Remove and discard the
pinion nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Holding Output Pinion Flange Using Special Tool (205-126)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Index-mark the output pinion flange to the pinion shaft.
6. Using the Output Flange Remover, remove the output pinion flange.
Fig. 10: Removing Output Pinion Flange Using Special Tool (307-523)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove and discard the output shaft seal deflector.
8. Remove and discard the output shaft seal.
9. Remove and discard the collapsible spacer.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the new collapsible spacer.
2. Using the PTU Drive Gear Outer Oil Seal Installer, install the output shaft seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Installing Output Shaft Seal Using Special Tool (308-430)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using the PTU Drive Gear Outer Oil Seal Installer, install the output shaft seal deflector.
Fig. 12: Installing Output Shaft Seal Using Special Tool (308-430)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Install the output pinion flange to engage the spline as previously marked.
4. Install the output pinion flange.
NOTE:
Refer to the rotational torque previously recorded with the N.m (lb-in)
torque wrench. Tighten the pinion nut in small increments until it is within
0.3 N.m (3 lb-in) of the reference measurement. If 0.3 N.m (3 lb-in) is
exceeded, then the collapsible spacer will be damaged and a new
collapsible spacer will be required.
5. Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture to hold the output pinion flange, install and tighten the
new pinion flange nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Holding Output Pinion Flange Using Special Tool (205-126)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Position the driveshaft using the index mark and install the 4 driveshaft-to-PTU output flange bolts.
Tighten bolts in a star pattern.
Tighten to 70 N.m (52 lb. ft.).
7. Install the exhaust flexible pipe. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
8. Fill the PTU, if necessary. For additional information, refer to POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
DRAINING AND FILLING.
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SEAL AND DEFLECTOR
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Bearing Cup Remover
Tool Number
308-125 (T87P-7120-D)
Handle, Driver 32 in
205-907
Installer, PTU Linkshaft Seal
205-883
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Installer, PTU Linkshaft Seal Dust 205-882
Shield
Remover, Front Wheel Hub
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
equivalent
Remover, Halfshaft
205-241
GENERAL EQUIPMENT
5/8 in (16 mm) washer (used with 308-125)
MATERIAL
Item
Metal Brake Parts Cleaner
PM-4-A or PM-4-B (US); CPM-4 (Canada)
Motorcraft MERCON® LV Automatic
Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLV
Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric
Compound
XG-3-A
Specification
MERCON® LV
ESE-M1C171-A
REMOVAL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) may leak different color fluids, red oil leak for
automatic transmission fluid and brown/black gear lube for PTU fluid. The PTU
seals prevent these types of fluids from leaking. It is important to note which
color fluid is leaking to conduct the most appropriate service procedure. This
procedure will correct a red oil leak (automatic transmission fluid) from the
intermediate shaft seal on the RH side of the PTU. For additional information,
refer to ANALYSIS OF LEAKAGE.
NOTE:
This procedure is to be performed through the RH wheel opening. It is not
necessary to remove the exhaust components to complete this repair.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the RH front wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
3. Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating and remove the front wheel hub nut.
Do not discard the nut at this time.
Fig. 14: Locating Front Wheel Hub Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt and disconnect the hose from the shock absorber.
Fig. 15: Identifying Brake Flexible Hose Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor harness from the shock absorber bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Identifying Wheel Speed Sensor Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the RH brake disc. For additional information, refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article.
NOTE:
Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these
parts.
7. Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
Position the stabilizer bar link aside.
Fig. 17: Identifying Ball Joint-to-knuckle Bolt And Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove and discard the ball joint-to-knuckle bolt and nut.
Separate the lower control arm from the knuckle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Identifying Ball Joint-to-knuckle Bolt And Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Using the Front Wheel Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Fig. 19: Pressing Halfshaft From Wheel Bearing & Hub
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Pull the knuckle outboard and rotate it toward the rear of the vehicle.
Secure the knuckle assembly.
Fig. 20: Identifying Knuckle Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to separate the halfshaft from the intermediate shaft for
this repair.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
11. Remove the 2 intermediate shaft bracket bolts and the intermediate and halfshaft assembly.
Inspect the intermediate shaft for pitting or damage in the seal contact area. Replace if necessary.
Fig. 21: Identifying Bearing Cup Remover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The following instruction will prevent the Bearing Cup Remover from
opening too far which would make removing the intermediate shaft seal
deflector difficult.
12. Place a 16 mm (5/8 in) washer between the components of the Bearing Cup Remover as shown in
illustration.
Fig. 22: Identifying 16 mm (5/8 in) Washer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Using a 5-pound or larger slide hammer eases the removal of the seal
deflector.
13. Using the Bearing Cup Remover, the extension from the Halfshaft Remover, and a suitable slide hammer,
remove the seal deflector.
The seal deflector will have been damaged during removal. Remove all foreign material from the
PTU before continuing with the repair.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Removing Seal Deflector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Using the Bearing Cup Remover, the extension from the Halfshaft Remover, and a suitable slide hammer,
remove the intermediate shaft seal, and if equipped, the alignment washer.
Fig. 24: Removing Intermediate Shaft Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The following illustration shows the correct orientation of the seal components
when installed in the vehicle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 25: View Of Correct Orientation Of Seal Components When Installed In Vehicle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
-
Description
Intermediate shaft seal (part of 7275 kit)
Alignment washer (part of 7275 kit)
Seal deflector (part of 7275 kit)
1. Place the intermediate shaft seal on the PTU Linkshaft Seal Installer and Driver Handle with the spring
side facing away from the tool.
Fig. 26: Placing Intermediate Shaft Seal On PTU Link Shaft Seal Installer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Using the PTU Linkshaft Seal Installer and Driver Handle, install the intermediate shaft seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 27: Installing Intermediate Shaft Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Place the alignment washer on the PTU Linkshaft Seal Installer and Driver Handle with the beveled edge
(white-striped side) facing towards the tool.
Fig. 28: Placing Intermediate Shaft Seal On PTU Link shaft Seal Installer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not use force when installing the alignment washer or damage to the
washer can occur.
4. Using the PTU Linkshaft Seal Installer and Driver Handle, install the alignment washer by hand, pushing
it in until it bottoms against the seal.
When installed, the white-striped side should be facing out.
Fig. 29: Installing Intermediate Shaft Seal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not overheat (melt) the seal deflector. Monitor the temperature of the
deflector with a suitable temperature measuring device, such as a digital
temperature laser or infrared thermometer, while heating. Do not allow the
temperature to exceed 100°C (212°F). Overheating will damage the
deflector. If the deflector is damaged, a new deflector must be used.
NOTE:
Apply a small amount of silicone brake caliper grease and dielectric
compound to the inner lip of the deflector where it installs on the tube
inside the PTU before heating. This will ease the installation of the
deflector.
5. Position the deflector on the PTU Linkshaft Seal Dust Shield Installer using silicone brake caliper grease
and dielectric compound to retain it to the installer. Using a suitable heat gun, heat the deflector to a
minimum of 66°C (150°F) and a maximum of 100°C (212°F) by concentrating the heat across the back of
the installer while rotating, not directly on the deflector itself.
As an alternative method to heating the seal deflector, place the deflector in boiling water for 3 to 5
minutes. Dry off the deflector and install.
Fig. 30: Applying Small Amount Of Silicone Brake Caliper Grease & Dielectric Compound To
Inner Lip Of Deflector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the seal deflector immediately after heating using the PTU Linkshaft Seal Dust Shield Installer and
Driver Handle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Installing Seal Deflector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Make sure the deflector is completely seated all the way around and there are no cracks on the face or
inner diameter white-colored tab. The deflector is correctly installed when the face of the deflector is
recessed 3-5 mm (0.12-0.20 in) into the pocket all the way around.
Fig. 32: Making Sure Deflector Is Completely Seated All The Way Around
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
A slight effort may be required to fully seat the intermediate and halfshaft
assembly as it passes through the alignment washer.
8. Install the intermediate and halfshaft assembly and the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 40 N.m (30 lb. ft.).
Fig. 33: Identifying Intermediate And Halfshaft Assembly And Bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Some residual fluid will collect between the seal and deflector during this
repair. This is a normal condition and should not be misinterpreted as a
leak after the repair is complete.
9. Using brake parts cleaner, thoroughly clean the deflector and intermediate shaft area of any residual fluid
that may have accumulated during the repair.
10. Position the halfshaft and ball joint into the wheel knuckle. Install the new ball joint bolt and nut.
Tighten to 55 N.m (41 lb. ft.).
Fig. 34: Identifying Ball Joint Bolt And Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Position the stabilizer bar link and install the new nut.
Tighten to 90 N.m (66 lb. ft.).
Fig. 35: Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install the RH brake disc. For additional information, refer to FRONT DISC BRAKE article.
13. Position the brake flexible hose bracket to the shock absorber and install the bolt.
Tighten to 20 N.m (177 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 36: Identifying Brake Flexible Hose Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Connect the wheel speed sensor harness to the shock absorber bracket.
Fig. 37: Identifying Wheel Speed Sensor Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the halfshaft nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut
must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the
wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
15. Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Using the previously removed wheel hub nut, seat the
halfshaft into the front wheel hub.
Tighten to 350 N.m (258 lb. ft.).
Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 38: Locating Front Wheel Hub Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The wheel hub nut contains a one-time locking chemical that is activated
by the heat created when it is tightened. Install and tighten the new wheel
hub nut to specification within 5 minutes of starting it on the threads.
Always install a new wheel hub nut after loosening or when not tightened
within the specified time or damage to the components can occur.
16. Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating and install a new wheel hub nut.
Tighten to 350 N.m (258 lb. ft.).
17. Install the RH front wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
18. Top off the transmission fluid as necessary.
REMOVAL
POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 39: Identifying Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W700101
6C038
Description
Roll restrictor shield nuts
Roll restrictor shield
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
7
W706674
W711843
W712830
6P082
W712830
8
9
6P093
W500724
10
11
12
13
7A444
W500741
7251
7086
NOTE:
Roll restrictor through bolt
Roll restrictor through bolt
Roll restrictor bracket bolts
Roll restrictor assembly
Roll restrictor bracket-to-transaxle bolt (3
required)
Roll restrictor bracket-to-transaxle
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)-to-support
bracket bolts (5 required)
PTU support bracket
PTU-to-transaxle bolts (5 required)
PTU
Compression seal
A new intermediate shaft seal and deflector must be installed whenever the
intermediate shaft or Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is removed from the vehicle.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the LH and RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES
article.
3. Remove the intermediate shaft. For additional information, refer to FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
article.
NOTE:
Index-mark the driveshaft for installation.
4. Remove the 4 bolts and support the driveshaft with a length of mechanic's wire.
Fig. 40: Locating Driveshaft Aside Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe and the RH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to
EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
6. Remove the 2 roll restrictor nuts and the roll restrictor shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 41: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the roll restrictor through bolt.
Fig. 42: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the roll restrictor through bolt, 2 roll restrictor bracket bolts and the roll restrictor assembly.
Fig. 43: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Transaxle Bracket Plate Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the 3 roll restrictor bracket-to-transaxle bolts and the roll restrictor-to-transaxle bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 44: Locating Transaxle Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the 5 PTU support bracket bolts and the PTU support bracket.
Fig. 45: Locating Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Support Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Using a long extension, loosen but do not remove the 2 LH side PTU-to-transaxle bolts.
Fig. 46: Locating LH Side PTU-To-Transaxle Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Remove the 3 RH side PTU-to-transaxle bolts and the 2 LH side PTU-to-transaxle bolts previously
loosened.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 47: Locating RH Side PTU-To-Transaxle Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Separate the PTU from the transaxle and remove it from the vehicle.
NOTE:
A new compression seal must be installed whenever the PTU is removed
from the vehicle.
14. Using a suitable tool, remove the compression seal and discard.
Fig. 48: Identifying Compression Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 49: Identifying Power Transfer Unit Assembly With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7086
7251
Description
Compression seal
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
7
W500741
7A444
W500724
6P093
W712830
8
9
10
11
12
13
6P082
W712830
W711843
W706674
6C038
W700101
NOTE:
PTU-to-transaxle bolts (5 required)
PTU support bracket
PTU-to-support bracket bolts (5 required)
Roll restrictor bracket
Roll restrictor bracket-to-transmission
bolt (3 required)
Roll restrictor assembly
Roll restrictor bracket bolt (2 required)
Roll restrictor through bolt
Roll restrictor through bolt
Roll restrictor shield
Roll restrictor shield nuts
A new compression seal must be installed whenever the Power Transfer
Unit (PTU) is removed from the vehicle.
1. Using a suitable tool, install the new compression seal.
Fig. 50: Identifying Compression Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
A new PTU intermediate shaft seal must be installed whenever the
intermediate shaft or PTU is removed from the vehicle.
2. Using a suitable pry bar, move the engine forward. Install a block of wood to hold the engine in the
forward position. Install the PTU with the output flange facing the passenger side, filler plug facing
upward. Rotate the PTU to the transaxle. Install the 5 PTU-to-transaxle bolts.
Tighten to 90 N.m (66 lb. ft.).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Fig. 51: Moving Engine Forward Using A Suitable Pry Bar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Position the PTU support bracket into place and hand-tighten the 5 PTU support bracket bolts.
1. Tighten the bolts to the transaxle to 70 N.m (52 lb. ft.).
2. Tighten the bolts to the engine to 70 N.m (52 lb. ft.).
Fig. 52: Identifying Transaxle Bolts & Engine Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the roll restrictor-to-transmission bracket and the 3 roll restrictor bracket-to-transmission bolts.
Tighten to 90 N.m (66 lb. ft.).
Fig. 53: Locating Transaxle Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
5. Install the roll restrictor through bolt and the 2 roll restrictor bracket bolts.
Tighten to 90 N.m (66 lb. ft.).
Fig. 54: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Transaxle Bracket Plate Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the roll restrictor through bolt
Tighten to 103 N.m (76 lb. ft.).
Fig. 55: Locating Roll Restrictor-To-Subframe Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Install the roll restrictor shield and the 2 roll restrictor nuts.
Tighten to 11 N.m (97 lb-in).
Fig. 56: Locating Roll Restrictor Heat Shield Nuts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the exhaust flexible pipe and RH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to
EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
9. Install the intermediate shaft. For additional information, refer to FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
article.
10. Line up the index marks on the driveshaft to the index marks on the PTU flange made during removal and
install the 4 bolts.
Tighten to 70 N.m (52 lb. ft.).
Fig. 57: Locating Driveshaft Aside Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Fill the PTU, if necessary. For additional information, refer to POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU)
DRAINING AND FILLING.
12. Install the LH and RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES
article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:47 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister bolts
EVAP shield bolts
Fuel tank bolts
Fuel tank bracket bolts
Nm
9
9
25
25
lb-ft
18
18
lb-in
80
80
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS
NOTE:
The vehicle emission vacuum routing diagrams are contained in the Description
and Operation subsection of the Engine Emissions Control part. Refer to
ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL article.
The evaporative emission (EVAP) system consists of the:
EVAP canister purge valve.
EVAP canister.
EVAP canister vent solenoid (includes the dust separator).
fuel vapor tube assembly (includes the fuel tank pressure [FTP] sensor).
fuel tank filler cap.
The EVAP system:
prevents hydrocarbon emissions from reaching the atmosphere.
stores fuel vapors in the EVAP canisters, that are generated during vehicle operation or hot soak, until
they can be consumed by the engine during normal engine operation.
routes the stored fuel vapors to the engine during engine operation.
is controlled by the PCM which, using various sensor inputs, calculates the desired amount of purge flow.
The PCM regulates the purge flow, induced by the application of intake manifold vacuum, by varying the
duty cycle applied to the vapor tube.
The fuel vapors are routed:
from the fuel tank through the vapor vent valve (internal to the tank).
to the EVAP canisters through a vapor tube.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:46
11:19:42 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
from the EVAP canister to the engine when the EVAP canister purge valve is opened by the PCM.
The FTP sensor (part of fuel vapor tube assembly):
monitors the pressure levels in the fuel tank.
communicates the pressure reading to the PCM during the OBD II leak test.
The fuel vapor tube assembly:
is located midway under the vehicle along the LH frame rail.
is used to route the flow of fuel vapors entering the EVAP system.
The EVAP canister:
is located on the underside of the vehicle directly below the driver seat.
contains activated carbon.
stores fuel vapors.
The fuel tank filler cap:
is sealed against the fuel tank filler pipe and does not relieve system pressure.
The EVAP canister vent solenoid:
is normally open.
seals the EVAP system for the inspection and maintenance (I/M 240) test and OBD II leak and pressure
tests.
is mounted to the EVAP canister bracket.
The EVAP canister purge valve:
is normally closed.
regulates the purging of the EVAP canister.
is controlled by the PCM.
is repaired as a separate item.
is mounted to the cowl on a bracket.
The EVAP dust separator:
is attached to the EVAP canister vent solenoid mounted on the EVAP canister bracket.
prevents suspended dust and dirt particles from entering the EVAP system.
is repaired as an assembly with the EVAP canister vent solenoid.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:42 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
The EVAP system monitor:
is a self-test strategy within the PCM which tests the integrity of the EVAP system.
monitors the EVAP system for leaks.
monitors electronic EVAP components for irrationally high or low voltages.
monitors for correct EVAP system operation.
uses negative and positive leak test methods to test and activate the EVAP system.
The engine ON EVAP leak-check monitor:
is executed by the individual components of the enhanced EVAP system. Intake manifold vacuum is
utilized to reach a target vacuum on the EVAP system. The FTP sensor is used by the engine ON EVAP
leak-check monitor to determine if the target vacuum necessary to carry out the leak-check on the EVAP
system has been reached. Once target vacuum on the EVAP system is achieved, the change in EVAP
system vacuum over a calibrated period of time determines if a leak exists.
The Engine Off Natural Vacuum (EONV) EVAP leak-check monitor is executed:
once the engine ON EVAP leak-check monitor is completed and the key is turned OFF. The EONV
EVAP leak-check monitor determines if a leak is present when the naturally occurring change in the fuel
tank pressure or vacuum does not exceed a calibrated limit during a calibrated amount of time. A
separate, low-power consuming microprocessor in the PCM manages the EONV leak-check. The engine
OFF EVAP leak-check monitor is executed by the individual components of the enhanced EVAP system.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS
Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM LEAK TEST
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
VACUTEC Smoke Machine Fuel
Evaporative Emission System
218-0002 or equivalent
Tester
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic software with appropriate
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:42 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
System (IDS)
hardware, or equivalent scan tool
Phase 1 - Leak Verification
1. Run the EVAP Test with the scan tool.
NOTE:
Some small leaks may not be detected using the EVAP Test. If the system
has passed the test but a leak is still suspected, then proceed to Phase 2.
2. If the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) system failed the EVAP Test, then proceed to Phase 2.
Phase 2 - System Leak Check
1. Disconnect the upper vapor tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling. For additional
information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
2. Connect the VACUTEC Smoke Machine Fuel Evaporative Emission System Tester to the upper EVAP
canister purge valve fitting. For additional information, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable was previously disconnected in the vapor tube
quick connect coupling procedure.
3. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING AND
CABLES article.
NOTE:
In the scan tool, the EVAP canister purge valve is referred to as the EVAP
vapor management valve.
4. Open the EVAP canister purge valve with the scan tool.
5. Close the canister vent solenoid with the scan tool.
6. Carefully turn the fuel tank filler cap counterclockwise until the thread disengages and position aside.
NOTE:
If smoke does not exit the fuel tank filler pipe neck area after the system is
pressurized, open the canister vent solenoid with the scan tool to allow
the air to purge. Once smoke is seen at the canister vent solenoid, close
the canister vent solenoid with the scan tool.
7. Introduce smoke from the VACUTEC Smoke Machine Fuel Evaporative Emission System Tester into the
EVAP system and verify that smoke is exiting the fuel tank filler pipe neck area. For additional
information, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.
8. Install the fuel tank filler cap once smoke is observed exiting the fuel tank filler pipe neck area.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:42 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
9. Continue to enter smoke into the system for 60 seconds to obtain pressure.
10. Press and release the remote start button in intervals of 15 seconds ON and 15 seconds OFF while
checking for exiting smoke.
11. Use the halogen light provided with the VACUTEC Smoke Machine Fuel Evaporative Emission System
Tester to follow the EVAP system path and look for smoke exiting at the source of the leak(s).
12. Repair any leaks as necessary.
13. Repeat the leak test until the system passes.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER PURGE VALVE
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
3
9F931
9G641
4
-
5
-
Description
Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
purge valve electrical connector
EVAP canister purge valve bracket
EVAP canister purge valve
EVAP canister purge valve vapor tube
quick connect coupling (part of 9G271)
EVAP canister purge valve vapor tube
quick connect coupling (part of 9D661)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:42 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the 2 EVAP canister purge valve vapor tube quick connect couplings. For additional
information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
3. Depress the tab and remove the EVAP canister purge valve from the bracket.
Fig. 2: Depressing Tab & Removing EVAP Canister Purge Valve From Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:42 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Exploded View Of Evaporative Emission Canister With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
14A464
2
3
4
5
6
7
9E857
9G676
W705681
W710330
-
8
-
Description
Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister vent solenoid electrical
connector
EVAP canister
Fuel vapor tube (part of 9E857)
EVAP canister vent solenoid/dust separator
EVAP canister pin-type retainer
EVAP canister bolt (3 required)
Fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling (part of
9S284)
Fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:42 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
9
10
11
9H296
W710330
W705681
(part of 9S284)
EVAP shield
EVAP shield bolt (3 required)
EVAP shield pin-type retainer
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
NOTE:
Correct placement of the hoist arm to the frame lifting point is essential for
the removal and installation of the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Remove the 3 bolts, pin-type retainer and the EVAP shield.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
6. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. For additional
information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
7. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube to the dust separator.
8. Remove the 3 EVAP canister bolts.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
9. Release the pin-type retainer and remove the EVAP canister.
NOTE:
When installing the EVAP canister, insert the alignment tab into the body
first, then install the pin-type retainer and 3 bolts.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:42 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER VENT SOLENOID
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
9E857
-
3
14A464
4
9G676
Description
Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
Fuel vapor tube (part of 9E857)
EVAP canister vent solenoid electrical
connector
EVAP canister vent solenoid/dust
separator
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:42 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
5
6
7
8
9H296
W710330
W705681
Fuel vapor tube (part of 9E857)
EVAP shield
EVAP shield bolt (3 required)
EVAP shield pin-type retainer
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working
on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component.
Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
The evaporative emission (EVAP) canister vent solenoid and the dust separator
are serviced as an assembly.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
AND CABLES article.
3. Remove the 3 bolts, pin-type retainer and the EVAP shield.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the 2 fuel vapor tubes from the EVAP canister vent solenoid/dust separator.
6. Depress the tab and remove the EVAP canister vent solenoid/dust separator from the EVAP canister
bracket.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test.
FUEL VAPOR TUBE ASSEMBLY
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:42 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Exploded View Of Fuel Vapor Tube Assembly With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
9E857
-
3
4
5
6
7
8
9H296
W710330
W705681
9F931
9S284
-
9
10
11
12
13
14A464
9K007
W712826
W712826
Description
Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
Fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister quick connect
coupling (part of 9S284)
EVAP shield
EVAP shield bolt (3 required)
EVAP shield pin-type retainer
Fuel tube bundle retainer clip (4 required)
Fuel vapor tube assembly
Fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank quick connect coupling
(part of 9S284)
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (part of 9S284)
FTP sensor electrical connector
Fuel tank
Fuel tank bolt (4 required)
Fuel tank bracket bolt (2 required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:42 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Evaporative Emissions - Edge & MKX
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the 3 bolts, pin-type retainer and the evaporative emission (EVAP) shield.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. For additional
information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
5. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
6. Position a suitable lifting device under the fuel tank.
7. Remove the 2 fuel tank bracket bolts and the 4 fuel tank bolts and partially lower the fuel tank.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
8. Release the 4 fuel tube bundle retainer clips and remove the fuel vapor tube assembly.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:19:43 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Bumpers - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Front bumper-to-radiator support nuts
Front lower bumper nuts
Front upper bumper bolts
Front upper bumper-to-radiator support bolts
Power steering cooler pipe mounting nuts
Rear bumper bolts (with trailer hitch only)
Rear bumper nuts
Rear center bumper bolts
Nm
25
25
67
9
7
90
25
40
lb-ft
18
18
49
66
18
30
lb-in
80
62
-
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
BUMPER - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT
NOTE:
MKX shown, Edge similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:12
11:00:08 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Front Bumper With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
W711685
W706350
N623332
W711656
17D957
6
-
7
8
14290
17C882
Description
Upper radiator grille bolt (2 required)
Upper radiator grille scrivet (4 required)
Bumper cover lower screw (4 required)
Splash shield screw (6 required)
Front bumper cover
Bumper cover wiring harness assembly
(part of 17E810)
Wiring harness assembly
Isolator front bumper
Lower front bumper mounting bolt (6
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
9
10
5019
11
W711617
12
W711617
13
17757
14
W711788
required) (part of 5019)
Lower front bumper
Upper front bumper-to-radiator support
bolt (4 required)
Upper front bumper mounting bolt (6
required)
Upper front bumper
Power steering cooler pipe nut (2
required)
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures in this article.
BUMPER COVER - FRONT
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the 2 bolts from the top of the radiator grille.
Fig. 2: Locating Bolts From Top Of Radiator Grill
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 4 scrivets from the top of the radiator grille.
Fig. 3: Locating Scrivets From Top Of Radiator Grille
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
4. Remove the 3 lower pin-type retainers.
Fig. 4: Identifying Lower Pin-Type Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the 6 fender splash shield screws (3 each side).
Fig. 5: Identifying Fender Splash Shield Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the 4 lower screws (2 each side).
Fig. 6: Identifying Lower Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Disconnect the side marker lamp electrical connectors, if equipped.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Identifying Side Marker Lamp Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors, if equipped.
Fig. 8: Identifying Fog Lamp Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the front bumper cover.
Pull the corner of the bumper cover from the bracket.
Fig. 9: Identifying Front Bumper Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
BUMPER - FRONT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
1. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper Cover - Front.
2. Remove the 6 front bumper bolts (3 each side).
To install, tighten to 67 N.m (49 lb-ft).
Fig. 10: Identifying Front Bumper Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 4 upper and lower bumper-to-radiator support bolts (2 each side).
To install, tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb-in).
Fig. 11: Identifying Upper & Lower Bumper-To-Radiator Support Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the front bumper.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
BUMPER - FRONT, LOWER
1. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper Cover - Front.
2. Remove the 2 nuts from the power steering cooler pipe-to-lower front bumper.
To install, tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Locating Nuts From Power Steering Cooler Pipe-To-Lower Front Bumper
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 6 bumper-to-radiator support nuts (3 each side) and remove the lower front bumper.
To install, tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 13: Identifying Bumper-To-Radiator Support Nuts & Lower Front Bumper
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
BUMPER - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Exploded View Of Rear Bumper Without Trailer Hitch With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W713202
1
W713202
2
3
4
5
6
7
W711656
W711656
17K835
N804620
Description
Rear bumper cover scrivet (Edge) (8
required)
Rear bumper cover scrivet (MKX) (10
required)
Splash shield screw (10 required)
Rear bumper cover body brace screw
Rear bumper cover
Wiring harness assembly
Wiring harness assembly
Rear bumper mounting nut (6 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
8
17906
9
W705376
10
17D980
Rear bumper
Rear bumper cover mounting bracket
rivet (5 required)
Rear bumper cover mounting bracket
Fig. 15: Exploded View Of Rear Bumper With Trailer Hitch With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W713202
1
W713202
2
W711656
Description
Rear bumper cover scrivet (Edge) (8
required)
Rear bumper cover scrivet (MKX) (10
required)
Splash shield screw (10 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W711656
17K835
N804620
W712171
W702256
17D826
11
W705376
12
17D980
Rear bumper cover body brace screw
Rear bumper cover
Wiring harness assembly
Wiring harness assembly
Rear bumper mounting nut (2 required)
Rear bumper mounting bolt (2 required)
Rear bumper mounting bolt (4 required)
Rear bumper
Rear bumper cover mounting bracket
rivet (5 required)
Rear bumper cover mounting bracket
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures in this article.
BUMPER COVER - REAR
NOTE:
MKX shown, Edge similar.
1. Remove the scrivets from the rear bumper cover.
Fig. 16: Locating Scrivets From Rear Bumper Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Remove the 10 screws (5 each side) from the rear splash shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Locating Screws From Rear Splash Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the rear bumper cover-to-body brace screw.
Fig. 18: Identifying Rear Bumper Cover-To-Body Brace Screw
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the trailer hitch and parking aid system wiring harness, if equipped.
Fig. 19: Identifying Trailer Hitch & Parking Aid System Wiring Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Disconnect the retainers from the rear bumper cover-to-body brace.
Fig. 20: Locating Retainers From Rear Bumper Cover-To-Body Brace
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
6. Remove the rear bumper cover.
Remove the bumper cover from the bumper cover bracket.
Remove the bumper cover.
Fig. 21: Locating Bumper Cover From Bumper Cover Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
BUMPER - REAR
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper Cover - Rear.
Without trailer tow
2. Remove the 6 bumper mounting nuts (3 each side).
To install, tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb-ft).
With trailer tow
3. Remove the 2 underbody heat shields.
Remove the 6 screws (3 each side).
Remove the 2 pushpin retainers (1 each side).
Disconnect the wiring harness from the heat shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
Fig. 22: Locating Wiring Harness From Heat Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the 4 inside rear bumper bolts (2 each side) and the 2 nuts (1 each side).
To install, tighten rear bumper bolts to 90 N.m (66 lb-ft).
To install, tighten rear bumper nuts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Fig. 23: Identifying Inside Rear Bumper Bolts & Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the 2 rear center bumper bolts.
To install, tighten to 40 N.m (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 24: Identifying Rear Center Bumper Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Bumpers - Edge & MKX
All vehicles
6. Remove the rear bumper.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:00:08 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2008 RESTRAINTS
Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Front impact severity sensor bolt
Inner floor console support bolts
Manual seat track front cross brace screws
Manual seat track rear cross brace screws
Occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt nuts
Passenger air bag module bolts (Edge)
Passenger air bag module nuts (MKX)
Passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module
bolts (MKX)
Passenger air bag module support bracket-to-cross vehicle beam bolts
(MKX)
Power seat track front cross brace nuts
Restraints control module (RCM) bolts
Safety belt buckle pretensioner nut
Safety canopy module bolts (all)
Side air bag module bolts
Side impact sensor (B-pillar) bolt
Side impact sensor (C-pillar) bolt
Nm
lb-ft
lb-in
11
12
5
5
33
8
7
8
9
24
-
44
44
71
62
8
-
71
8
-
71
20
12
40
9
23
11
11
15
9
30
17
8
8
80
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
AIR BAG AND SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
The air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is designed to provide increased collision protection for front
seat and second row outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the 3-point safety belt system. Safety
belt use is necessary to obtain the best occupant protection and to receive the full advantage of the SRS.
This vehicle contains dual-stage deployment (advanced restraint system) driver and front passenger air bag
modules. These vehicles are also equipped with driver and front passenger safety belt retractor pretensioners as
well as safety canopies. These canopies deploy from the A-pillar to the C-pillar during a side impact or if a
rollover condition is detected. Vehicles with safety canopies are also equipped with seat side air bag modules in
the front seats. Seat side air bag modules deploy from the outboard front seat backrest during a side impact. A
unique restraints control module (RCM) that detects a potential rollover condition is another standard feature.
In addition, there are 2 front impact severity sensors mounted to the hood latch bracket, 2 first row side impact
sensors mounted near the base of the B-pillar and 2 second row impact sensors mounted near the base of the CMicrosoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:58
10:12:45 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
pillar. A seat position sensor mounted to the driver seat and a usage detection switch is added to the front driver
and passenger outboard buckles.
Vehicles are also equipped with an occupant classification sensor (OCS) system mounted to the front passenger
seat track assembly. The weight of any occupant or object on the front passenger seat is electronically
communicated to the occupant classification system module (OCSM). The RCM uses this information in
determining if the passenger air bag module or passenger seat side air bag module is to be deployed in the event
of a deployable collision.
The OCS system includes 4 OCS weight sensor bolts, OCSM and a passenger air bag deactivation (PAD)
indicator lamp.
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Components
This vehicle is equipped with following SRS components:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Identifying Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Components
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
04338
2
14B418
3
4
5
14B345
611D10
042D94
6
14B345
7
8
043B13
042D95
9
14B345
10
11
12
611D10
14B345
14B416
13
61203
14
15
16
17
14A664
14B321
14B006
14B006
18
61202
19
14B422
20
-
21
044A74
Description
Passenger air bag cover
Passenger air bag deactivation (PAD)
indicator
First row, passenger, side impact sensor
Passenger side air bag module
Passenger side safety canopy module
Second row, passenger, C-pillar side
impact sensor
Driver air bag module
Driver side safety canopy module
Second row, driver, C-pillar side impact
sensor
Driver side air bag module
First row, driver, side impact sensor
Driver seat track position sensor
Driver safety belt buckle (includes safety
belt buckle switch)
Clockspring
Restraints control module (RCM)
Driver/center front impact severity sensor
Passenger front impact severity sensor
Passenger safety belt buckle (includes
safety belt buckle switch)
Occupant classification system module
(OCSM)
Occupant classification weight sensor
bolts (2 shown in illustration) (4
required)
Passenger air bag module assembly
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
AIR BAG AND SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Flex Probe Kit
Tool Number
105-R025C or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
FLUKE 73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
software with appropriate
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
hardware, or equivalent scan tool
System (IDS)
Principles of Operation
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of a driver and passenger air bag module, safety belt retractor
pretensioners and safety canopies (containing an inflator/squib or gas generator and an air bag), impact sensors,
a restraints control module (RCM), a clockspring, an air bag warning indicator, occupant classification sensor
(OCS) system and a passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator lamp. These components are all
interconnected by a wiring harness and powered by the vehicle's battery. The RCM includes a backup power
supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy the SRS in the event that the ignition circuit is
lost or damaged during impact. The backup power supply will deplete its stored energy approximately one
minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected. If a SRS fault exists, the air bag warning indicator will
illuminate and remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. In addition to the self-test at start up, the RCM
continuously monitors all of its external and internal circuitry for faults.
In a frontal collision, the impact sensors located in the front of the vehicle detect the sudden deceleration and
send an electrical signal to the RCM. The RCM uses the information from the impact sensors and the OCS
system in the deployment determination. If the RCM determines that deployment is required, the RCM sends
voltage and current to the squib(s) causing the solid chemical propellant to undergo a rapid chemical reaction.
This controlled reaction produces harmless nitrogen gas that fills the air bag(s)/safety canopies and/or activates
the safety belt pretensioners to remove slack from the safety belt(s).
The RCM communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current and historical DTCs on the highspeed controller area network (HS-CAN). The RCM also communicates over the HS-CAN to the instrument
cluster (IC) module, PCM and the occupant classification system module (OCSM).
Air Bag Warning Indicator
The air bag warning indicator:
is located in the instrument cluster (IC) module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
lamp and circuitry prove out is a function of the IC module. The IC module will prove out the air bag
warning indicator by lighting the air bag warning indicator for 6 seconds and then turn off.
will flash and/or illuminate based on the message the IC module receives from the RCM.
will illuminate if the IC module does not receive a message from the RCM.
Air Bag Module Second Stage Deployment Check
Because the driver and passenger front air bags each have 2 deployment stages, it is possible that Stage 1 has
deployed and Stage 2 has not.
If a front air bag module has deployed, it is mandatory that the front air bag module be remotely deployed
using the appropriate air bag disposal procedure.
For information on driver air bag module and/or passenger air bag module remote deployment, refer to
Pyrotechnic Device Disposal.
Clockspring
The clockspring:
is mounted on the steering column, behind the steering wheel.
allows for continuous electrical connections between the driver air bag module and the restraints control
module (RCM) when the steering wheel is turned.
Driver Air Bag Module
The driver air bag module:
is installed as an assembly.
is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
cannot be interchanged between Edge and MKX vehicles.
High-Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
This vehicle utilizes a communication system called a high-speed controller area network (HS-CAN). The HSCAN consists of a twisted pair of wires connected to the following:
ABS module
Instrument cluster (IC) module
PCM
Transmission control module (TCM)
Restraints control module (RCM)
Occupant classification system module (OCSM)
Air suspension (vehicle dynamics module [VDM]) (if equipped)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Data link connector (DLC)
The HS-CAN circuits use a bias voltage of approximately 2.5 volts, one is a positive 2.5 volts while the other is
a negative 2.5 volts. The HS-CAN also uses 2 terminating resistors, one contained within the PCM, the other in
the IC module. The terminating resistors are not serviced separately. The terminating resistors have a value of
120 ohms each, for a normal operating system total of 60 ohms. The HS-CAN may operate with only one
terminating resistor and may communicate some messages to some of the control modules with only one circuit
functioning. Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
Impact Sensors
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module
(RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for
deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original
production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed
whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash.
For this vehicle line, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) uses 6 satellite sensors in addition to the restraints
control module (RCM). The RCM is mounted to the center tunnel beneath the console. All vehicles have 2 front
impact severity sensors located in the front-center area of the vehicle, behind the grille mounted on the hood
latch bracket. The first row impact sensors are mounted behind the trim panel near the floor on the B-pillar, the
second row sensors are located on each C-pillar. Mounting orientation is critical for correct operation of all
impact sensors.
Loops/Squibs
All deployable devices contain an initiating device called a squib. The squib is part of the deployment loop. Air
bag/safety canopy modules can contain more than one squib, some vehicles may have up to 4 squibs in one air
bag module. Squibs are often referred to as loops during the diagnostic process.
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System
The occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is found only on the front passenger seat. The front passenger
OCS system is comprised of the following: 4 OCS weight sensor bolts that are mounted to each corner of the
seat track and an occupant classification system module (OCSM) which is mounted to the electrical bracket
underneath the seat cushion pan. All the components that make up the OCS system are all serviced separately.
The weight of any occupant or object on the front passenger seat is electronically communicated to the OCSM.
The RCM uses this information in determining if the passenger air bag module or passenger seat side air bag
module is to be deployed in the event of a deployable collision.
The OCSM will inform the restraints control module (RCM), via a high-speed controller area network (HSCAN), of the weight of any occupant or object on the front passenger seat.
The OCSM monitors the OCS system for faults and communicates on-demand and continuous DTCs via the
data link connector (DLC) with the use of a scan tool.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
The OCS system is also used for operation of the passenger Belt-Minder®. For information on the passenger
Belt-Minder® feature, refer to SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article. To deactivate or reactivate the passenger
Belt-Minder® feature, refer to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING
CHIMES article or the Owner's Literature.
When the front passenger seat is removed for service, the Zero Seat Weight Test must be carried out after the
installation of the front passenger seat. When an OCS system component is installed new, the System Reset
must be carried out after the installation of the front passenger seat. The Zero Seat Weight Test and/or System
Reset must be carried out only as instructed to do so in the appropriate service information. For information on
the Zero Seat Weight Test and/or System Reset, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero
Seat Weight Test or Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
In the event of a deployable crash, a new passenger seat track with OCS weight sensor bolts must be installed.
DTC B1231 must be cleared before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
Refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track or Occupant Classification Sensor - Power
Seat Track.
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator
The passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator is a visual indicator used to inform the front seat occupants
of the passenger air bag deactivation state. The PAD indicator is a stand-alone lamp installed into the vehicle
instrument panel in a position visible to each front seat occupant.
The restraints control module (RCM) controls the state of the PAD indicator through a direct hardwire
connection, based on information provided by the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system. The PAD
indicator illuminates to indicate the passenger air bag module is disabled. An exemption to this is when the
front passenger seat is determined to be empty and the passenger safety belt is unbuckled, therefore indication
of a deactivated passenger air bag module is not necessary. In all other cases, the PAD indicator is unlit when
the passenger air bag module is enabled.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the PAD indicator prove-out period is initiated by the RCM.
The RCM briefly activates the PAD indicator to prove-out the indicator function and verify to the front
occupants correct functional operation of the PAD indicator.
When the OCSM detects a fault that causes DTC B2290 and/or B1013 to set on-demand in the OCS system, the
OCSM sends a message to the RCM. Upon receiving the fault message from the OCSM, the RCM disables the
passenger air bag module, illuminates the PAD indicator indicating the passenger air bag module is disabled
and sends a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator. The
passenger air bag module will remain disabled until the cause for the on-demand DTC has been corrected.
The following table indicates the passenger air bag status and the PAD indicator status based the size of the
front outboard passenger occupant.
PASSENGER AIR BAG AND PAD INDICATOR STATUS
Occupant Size
Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Status
None
Unbuckled
Pass. Air Bag
Status
Disabled
PAD Ind.
Status
Unlit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
None
Infant or Small Child
Adult Sized
Buckled
Buckled/Unbuckled
Buckled/Unbuckled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Lit
Lit
Unlit
Passenger Air Bag Module
The passenger air bag module:
is installed as an assembly.
is mounted in the passenger side of the instrument panel.
cannot be interchanged between Edge and MKX vehicles.
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module
(RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for
deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original
production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed
whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
Prior to removal of the restraints control module (RCM) module, it is necessary
to upload module configuration information to the scan tool. This information
needs to be downloaded into the new RCM module once installed. Refer to
MODULE CONFIGURATION article. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in incorrect operation of the supplemental restraint system (SRS) and
may cause system failure.
NOTE:
When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the
correct RCM is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs
will result.
The RCM carries out the following functions:
deploys the air bag(s)/safety canopies in the event of a deployable collision.
activates the safety belt retractor pretensioners to remove slack from the safety belt in the event of a
deployable collision.
monitors the supplemental restraint system (SRS) for faults.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
sends a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator if a fault
is detected.
communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current or historical DTCs.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected, the RCM will request illumination of the
air bag warning indicator.
When the ignition is cycled (turned OFF and then ON), the IC module will prove out the air bag warning
indicator by lighting for 6 seconds and then turn off. If a current SRS fault exists, the RCM requests
illumination of the air bag warning indicator and will remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. During
that same key cycle, some faults that recover (Loss of Communication with the PCM), the RCM will send a
request to the IC module to turn the air bag warning indicator off IF no other fault is present. The RCM will
also communicate the on-demand (current) and continuous (historical) DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool.
If the RCM requests illumination of the air bag warning indicator and the air bag warning indicator does not
function, the IC module will automatically activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of 5 sets of 5 tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag warning indicator require repair.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy the air bags
in the event that the ignition circuit is lost or damaged during impact. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after power and/or ground has been removed from the RCM.
Safety Belt Buckle Switches
As part of the supplemental restraint system (SRS), the driver and front passenger safety belt buckles are
equipped with safety belt buckle switches. The safety belt buckle switches indicate to the restraints control
module (RCM) whether the safety belts are connected or disconnected. The RCM uses this information in
determining the deployment of the dual-stage driver and passenger air bag modules.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
As part of the supplemental restraint system (SRS), the driver and front passenger safety belt retractors are
equipped with pretensioners. The safety belt retractor pretensioners remove excess slack from the safety belt
webbing. The pretensioners are activated by the restraints control module (RCM) when the module detects a
collision exceeding a programmed limit.
Safety Canopy Module
Vehicles are equipped with safety canopies for protection during side impacts or rollovers.
Safety canopies require a specific headliner. The word AIRBAG will appear on the headliner where it meets
each B-pillar trim panel.
The safety canopy module:
is installed as an assembly.
is mounted above the headliner.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
attaches from the A-pillar frame to the C-pillar frame.
is standard equipment.
cannot be interchanged from side-to-side.
Seat Track Position Sensor
The seat track position sensor is mounted to a bracket attached to the inboard side of the driver seat track. The
seat track position sensor informs the restraints control module (RCM) of the driver seat position. The RCM
uses this information in determining the deployment of the dual-stage driver air bag module.
Side Air Bag Module
NOTE:
References to side air bag modules refer to the seat side air bag module, not to
the steering wheel or instrument panel mounted air bag components of the
supplemental restraint system (SRS).
A side air bag module provides protection of the thorax area (between the neck and abdomen) of the body,
working in conjunction with the head protection provided by a safety canopy module.
The side air bag module:
will deploy upon receiving a flow of current from the restraints control module (RCM), initiated by the
side impact sensor and internal RCM circuitry.
is installed as an assembly.
is mounted in the driver or passenger seat backrest.
is used in conjunction with a safety canopy module.
Secondary Air Bag Warning (Chime)
The secondary air bag warning, is an audible tone controlled by the instrument cluster (IC) module. If a fault is
detected with the air bag warning indicator a DTC will be stored in memory of the IC module. Upon receiving
the message from the restraints control module (RCM) that a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault has been
detected, the IC module will sound the secondary air bag warning chime in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps.
Diagnostic Instructions
The symptom chart can be used to help locate supplemental restraint system (SRS) concerns if no DTCs are
retrieved and the listed symptoms are observed. Whether or not the listed symptoms are observed, always carry
out the following:
1. Run the Self Test to determine what on-demand and continuous memory DTCs are being sensed by the
restraints control module (RCM) and occupant classification system module (OCSM).
2. Retrieve all SRS DTCs and fault PIDs stored in the RCM and OCSM memory.
3. If on-demand DTCs are different than continuous memory DTCs, always diagnose the on-demand DTCs
first.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
A DTC can indicate several concerns. The DTCs are to assist in system diagnosis and are not to be
considered definitive. Always refer to the pinpoint test corresponding to the DTC to determine where the
concern lies and to repair the concern correctly.
Diagnostic Test Options
Scan tool options:
Self Test/On-Demand
Self Test/Continuous Memory and Clear DTCs
Refer to the manufacturer's literature for the scan tool being used for correct scan tool test options.
Self Test/On-Demand
The on-demand Self Test option is used to verify that no electrical concerns exist with the air bag supplemental
restraint system (SRS). Upon entering the self-test, the restraints control module (RCM) and the occupant
classification system module (OCSM) will make an electrical check of each electrical component in the system.
If a concern is detected, a DTC is displayed on the scan tool with a brief description of the DTC. The self-test
should always be carried out after any repair to verify that the repair was successful.
To run the on-demand Self Test, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the scan tool being used.
Select Self-Test.
Select RCM or OCSM.
The module will run the self-test and display on-demand (reflecting hard system concerns) and
continuous memory (historic) DTCs on the scan tool.
Self Test/Continuous Memory and Clear DTCs
During vehicle operation, the restraints control module (RCM) and the occupant classification system module
(OCSM) will detect and store on-demand (reflecting hard system concerns) and continuous memory (historic)
DTCs. The DTC strategy employed by the RCM incorporates a time-out scheme for determining when a
concern exists in the system. This requires a concern may exist for up to one minute in the system before the
RCM will detect it. For the RCM to determine that a concern no longer exists, the concern must be absent for
up to one minute. The actual detection time-outs vary with each DTC. DTCs can be retrieved with a scan tool
using the Self Test option. All DTCs stored in the RCM and OCSM will be displayed on the scan tool along
with a brief description of the DTC. If no DTCs are present, the scan tool will display a SYSTEM PASSED
message. This option can also be used to clear DTCs from the RCM and OCSM memory, as long as the concern
no longer exists.
Once 75 hours of operation have been recorded by the RCM/OCSM since the concern was last detected, all
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
continuous memory DTCs will automatically be removed from memory.
To retrieve or clear DTCs, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the scan tool being used.
Select Self Test.
Select RCM or OCSM (selecting Restraints retrieves DTCs from both modules).
NOTE:
Before proceeding with the clearing operation, make note of the DTCs
displayed. Once cleared, continuous DTCs cannot be retrieved.
6. All DTCs will be displayed on the screen.
7. Clear the DTCs. After clearing the DTCs, cycle the ignition OFF, then ON.
Continuous memory DTCs that have been cleared will not reoccur as "continuous memory" in the
same key cycle. Only new DTCs which were not present before clearing can occur as "continuous
memory" after clearing.
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test
The Zero Seat Weight Test verifies the occupant classification sensor (OCS) measures zero weight for an empty
seat. It is necessary to carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test any time the front passenger seat is serviced or
removed from the vehicle or as directed in the service information procedures. Refer to Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test.
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset
The System Reset active command resets the zero point of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system.
The System Reset active command should only be carried out if a new OCS component is installed or as
directed by service information .
DataLogger PID/Data
The DataLogger PID/Data option allows the scan tool operator to read the state of several PIDs to aid in
diagnosing the system. PIDs are real time measurements of parameters, such as voltages and resistances,
calculated by the restraints control module (RCM) or the occupant classification system module (OCSM) and
sent to the scan tool for display. Many of the PIDs supported by the modules are calculated periodically and are,
therefore, not true real time readings.
To retrieve PIDs, follow these steps:
1. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
3. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the scan tool being used.
4. Select DataLogger.
5. Select RCM or OCSM.
Active Commands
System Reset
System Reset active command sets the zero set point or rezeros the occupant classification sensor (OCS). Refer
to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
Zero Seat Weight Test
The Zero Seat Weight Test verifies the OCS measures zero weight for an empty seat. Refer to Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test.
Instrument Cluster (IC) Module
These commands allow the technician to verify the operation of instrument cluster (IC) module components and
subsystems.
Lamp Fault Codes (LFCs)
This vehicle supports lamp fault codes (LFCs) only when the restraints control module (RCM) is in plant mode.
A new RCM installed to a vehicle will be in plant mode until:
programmable module installation (PMI) has been carried out.
the RCM sees a fault-free supplemental restraint system (SRS) (no DTCs present).
If a LFC is present after completing PMI, a fault is present in the SRS and on-demand DTCs must be retrieved
and diagnosed.
Diagnosing Customer Concerns With On-Demand DTCs
NOTE:
Most supplemental restraint system (SRS) diagnostic procedures will require
depowering and repowering of the SRS. Depowering and repowering requires
disconnecting of the battery and removal of the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse. This reduces the risk of accidental deployment of SRS components while
diagnostic procedures are being carried out.
If the air bag warning indicator is reported ON by the customer when the vehicle comes in for service, connect
the scan tool and follow the Diagnostic Instruction procedures in this service information to identify the
concern.
Once the DTC is known, read the Normal Operation of the pinpoint test for the DTC involved.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Using the scan tool with the use of PIDs and active command(s) may be of assistance in diagnosing the concern.
Follow the depowering procedure as directed in Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering.
Determine the location of components involved in creating the DTC.
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of:
components.
connectors.
splices and wiring harnesses.
insulation on conductors.
Diagnosing Customer Concerns With Continuous Memory DTCs
If the air bag warning indicator was reported ON by the customer but is not present when the vehicle comes in
for service, follow the Diagnostic Instruction procedures in this service information to identify the intermittent
DTC.
Once the DTC is known, read the Normal Operation of the pinpoint test for the DTC involved.
Follow the depowering procedure as directed in Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering.
Determine the location of components involved in creating the DTC.
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of:
components.
connectors.
splices and wiring harnesses.
insulation on conductors.
Refer to the Possible Causes section of the pinpoint test for the DTC involved, which lists the common concerns
that relate to the DTC. Concerns are listed according to priority.
Fault PIDs
There are 2 types of fault PIDs that can be reported by the restraints control module (RCM). The first type,
considered conventional, has only one level of fault reporting and identifies a specific concern for a given
component and points to a particular diagnostic path, example: DTC B1317 (Battery Voltage High).
The second type uses a process within the software of the controller that maps the byte and bit to name a
specific device and fault condition. This process is called Bit-mapping and referred to as fault PIDs in the
diagnosis of the vehicle. This type does not identify the specific concern or component on the first level of fault
reporting, Example: DTC B2293 (Restraint System - Airbag Fault). DTC B2293 can have up to 28 specific ondemand fault PIDs (areas of concern) associated with this DTC.
Those associated fault PIDs are an extension of the information provided by the DTC and are identified by the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
same DTC number. A scan tool must be used to view DTCs and their fault PIDs. Once a scan tool has retrieved
a DTC, use the scan tool to view the fault PIDs. In the diagnostic path, other types of PIDs are sometimes used
to determine the root cause (example: resistance or voltage PIDs).
When viewing of fault PIDs has been carried out, the scan tool can display the PIDs associated with that DTC,
including the status or state that exists (on-demand [active] DTC) or existed (continuous memory [historic])
DTC. Refer to the manufacturer instructions for the scan tool being used on how to view fault PIDs.
Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator
with all supplemental restraint system (SRS) components connected. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is present, the air bag warning
indicator will:
fail to light.
remain lit continuously.
flash.
The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM)
to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a
chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator will need to be
repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern:
All in-seat harness connectors connected?
All air bag modules connected?
Occupant classification system module (OCSM) connected?
All OCS weight sensor bolts connected?
Safety canopy modules connected?
Safety belt pretensioner connectors connected?
All sensors (front and side impact sensors) connected?
Restraints control module (RCM) connected?
RCM fuse installed?
Battery connected?
Air Bag Module Second Stage Deployment Check
Because the driver and passenger front air bags each have 2 deployment stages, it is possible that Stage 1 has
deployed and Stage 2 has not.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
If a front air bag module has deployed, it is mandatory that the front air bag module be remotely deployed
using the appropriate air bag disposal procedure to make sure the second stage has been deployed.
For information on driver or passenger air bag module remote deployment, refer to Pyrotechnic Device
Disposal.
Glossary
Disconnect the Component
Disconnect the component means to disconnect the component vehicle harness connector, not to remove the
component. Do not reconnect a disconnected component unless instructed to do so.
Deactivate the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivate the SRS means to carry out a deactivation procedure. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation.
Depower the SRS
Depower the SRS means to disconnect the battery and remove the restraints control module (RCM) fuse. Refer
to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Deployment Loop
The deployment loop is made up of the RCM, deployable device, air bag(s), safety belt pretensioners (safety
canopies, deployable steering columns, load limiting retractor, adaptive tether, adaptive vent, if equipped) and
associated circuits.
Install a New Component
Install a new component means to remove the existing component and install a new authorized part obtained
from Ford Customer Service Division.
Prove Out the SRS
Prove out the SRS means to turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position and visually monitor the
air bag warning indicator with all SRS components connected. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is present, the air bag warning
indicator will either fail to light or remain lit continuously. The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate
until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This
is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is
inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air
bag warning indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Reactivate the SRS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Reactivate the SRS means to carry out the reactivation procedure. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation.
Reconnect the SRS
Reconnect the SRS means to reconnect all system components. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Reconnect Checklist.
Repower the SRS
Repower the SRS means, turn the ignition ON, install the RCM fuse and connect the battery ground cable.
Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Secondary Air Bag Warning
The secondary air bag warning is an audible fault format that consists of 5 sets of 5 tone bursts, with each set of
5 tone bursts separated by a 5-second quiet period. One tone burst cycle will consist of one-second ON and onesecond OFF. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
Squib
A squib (igniter) is a device designed to convert electrical energy to the heat energy necessary to deploy a
pyrotechnic restraints system device.
Verify the System
Verify the system means to prove out the SRS with all restraint system components in place.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern by checking the air bag warning indicator in the instrument cluster. Prove
Out the System. Refer to step 4 under Repowering Procedure.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Do not disconnect electrical
connectors until directed to do so within the pinpoint test.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Damaged restraints
control module (RCM)
or loose mounting
Damaged front impact
severity sensor(s) or
loose mounting
Damaged side impact
sensor(s) or loose
mounting
Electrical
Open smart junction box
(SJB) fuse 46 (7.5A)
Damaged wiring harness
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Damaged or
disconnected passenger
air bag deactivation
(PAD) indicator
Damaged front
passenger seat track
assembly
Damaged occupant
classification sensor
(OCS) weight sensor
bolt(s) or loose
mounting
NOTE:
Loose, damaged or
corroded connectors
Circuitry open/shorted
Damaged shorting bars
Loose, damaged or
pinched passenger seat
wire harness
The smart junction box (SJB) may also be identified as the generic
electronic module (GEM).
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record on-demand and continuous memory DTCs from the
RCM and OCSM.
8. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) DTC Chart.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:45 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
For all other DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
9. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
DTC Charts
The DTCs can be retrieved from the restraints control module (RCM) and the occupant classification system
module (OCSM) with a scan tool via the data link connector (DLC).
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) DTC CHART
Description
Retrieved From
Action To Take
DTCa
The Air Bag Warning
Restraints
control module Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Continuous lamp Indicator is Illuminated
Continuously
(RCM)
INSTALL a new RCM and impact
sensors. REFER to Inspection and
B1231
Event Threshold Exceeded
RCM
Repair After a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Deployment.
CHECK battery voltage; to be below 18
volts. REFER to CHARGING
B1317
Battery Voltage High
RCM
SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
CHECK battery voltage; to be above 8
volts. REFER to CHARGING
B1318
Battery Voltage Low
RCM
SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to
B1342
ECU (RCM) Is Faulted
RCM
Restraints Control Module (RCM).
Lamp Air Bag Warning
B1868
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Indicator Circuit Failure
PAD Warning Lamp
B1884
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Circuit Failure
PAD Warning Lamp
B1890
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Circuit Short to Battery
B2290
Occupant Classification
System Fault
RCM
NOTE:
If no on-demand or continuous DTC
is present in the OCSM and DTC
B2290 is only present in the RCM as a
continuous DTC, CLEAR all RCM
DTCs and PROVE OUT the system.
NOTE:
On-Demand DTC B2290 is reported
by the RCM indicating the presence
of a fault in the OCS system.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
B2292
B2293
B2294
B2295
B2296
B2432
B2433
B2434
B2435
B2436
B2437
B2438
B2439
B2477
Restraint System - Seatbelt
Pretensioner Fault
Restraint System - Air Bag
Fault
Restraint System - Curtain
Fault
Restraint System - Side
Air Bag Fault
Restraint System - Impact
Sensor Fault
Drivers Seat Belt Buckle
Switch Circuit Open
Drivers Seat Belt Buckle
Switch Circuit Short to
Battery
Drivers Seat Belt Buckle
Switch Circuit Short to
Ground
Drivers Seat Belt Buckle
Switch Resistance Out of
Range
Passengers Seat Belt
Buckle Switch Circuit
Open
Passengers Seat Belt
Buckle Switch Circuit
Short to Battery
Passengers Seat Belt
Buckle Switch Short to
Ground
Passengers Seat Belt
Buckle Switch Resistance
Out of Range
Module Configuration
Failure
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test K .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test N .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test O .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test P .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test Q .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test R .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test S .
RCM
NOTE:
When installing a new RCM, always
make sure the correct RCM is being
installed. If an incorrect RCM is
installed, erroneous DTCs will result.
INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to
Restraints Control Module (RCM).
B2792
Cross Link Between Firing
Loops
Incorrect Module Design
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test T .
INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
C1414
C1946
C1947
C1948
C1982
Level
Front Driver's Seat Track
Position Switch Circuit
Open
Front Driver's Seat Track
Position Switch Circuit
Short to Ground
Front Driver's Seat Track
Position Switch Circuit
Resistance Out of Range
Front Driver's Seat Track
Position Switch Circuit
Short to Battery
RCM
Restraints Control Module (RCM).
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test V .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test W .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test X .
RCM
Go to Pinpoint Test Y .
U0100
Lost Communication With
ECM/PCM
RCM
U0154
Lost Communication With
Restraints Occupant
Classification System
Module
RCM
U0401
Invalid Data received
From ECM/PCM A
RCM
U0455
Invalid Data Received
From Restraints Occupant
Classification System
Module
RCM
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article to diagnose the communication
concern.
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article to diagnose the communication
concern.
RETRIEVE PCM DTCs. If DTCs are
present in the PCM, REFER to
Introduction - Gasoline Engines
article to diagnose the concern. If DTCs
are not present in the PCM and DTC
U0401 is present in the RCM as a ondemand DTC, INSTALL a new RCM.
REFER to Restraints Control Module
(RCM).
REPAIR all on-demand OCS DTCs,
CLEAR all RCM DTCs and PROVE
OUT the system.
If no on-demand or continuous DTCs
are present in the OCSM and DTC
U0455 is only present in the RCM
continuous, CLEAR all RCM DTCs
and PROVE OUT the system.
If no on-demand or continuous DTCs
are present in the OCSM and DTC
U0455 is present on-demand in the
RCM, INSTALL a new OCSM.
REFER to Occupant Classification
System Module (OCSM) - Manual
Seat Track or Occupant
Classification System Module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
U2050
No Application Present
RCM
U2051
One or More Calibration
Files Missing/Corrupt
RCM
(OCSM) - Power Seat Track.
INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to
Restraints Control Module (RCM).
INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to
Restraints Control Module (RCM).
a DTC: Retrieved using scan tool.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR (OCS) SYSTEM DTC CHART
Description
Retrieved From
Action To Take
DTCa
B229B
Occupant Classification
System Obstruction
NOTE:
If no on-demand or continuous DTC is
present in the RCM and DTC B229B is
Occupant
only present in the OCSM as
classification system continuous, RESOLVE and CLEAR all
module (OCSM)
OCSM DTCs and PROVE OUT the SRS.
Go to Pinpoint Test U .
B1013
B1231
B1317
Occupant Classification
System Calibration Fault
Event Threshold Exceeded
Battery Voltage High
OCSM
Go to Pinpoint Test Z .
OCSM
INSTALL a new passenger seat track
assembly with OCS weight sensor bolts.
REFER to SEATING article and
Inspection and Repair After a
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deployment.
OCSM
NOTE:
If no on-demand or continuous DTC is
present in the RCM and DTC B1317 is
only present in the OCSM continuous,
CLEAR all OCSM DTCs and PROVE
OUT the system.
CHECK battery voltage; to be below 18
volts. REFER to CHARGING
SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
B1318
Battery Voltage Low
OCSM
NOTE:
If no on-demand or continuous DTC is
present in the RCM and DTC B1318 is
only present in the OCSM continuous,
CLEAR all OCSM DTCs and PROVE
OUT the system.
CHECK battery voltage; to be above 8
volts. REFER to CHARGING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
B1342
B2290
ECU (OCSM) is Faulted
Occupant Classification
System Fault
OCSM
SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
OCSM
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
C1941
Zero Seat Weight Test
Failure
OCSM
U0100
Lost Communication With
ECM/PCM
OCSM
U0151
Lost Communication With
Restraints Control Module
OCSM
U2023
Fault Received From
External Node
OCSM
U2050
No Application Present
OCSM
REFER to Occupant Classification
Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat
Weight Test.
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article to diagnose the communication
concern.
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article to diagnose the communication
concern.
DTC is set when a module receives
invalid network data from another
module with a faulted input. RETRIEVE
and REPAIR all non-network DTCs in
the other modules on the network.
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article for
a list of all DTCs.
INSTALL a new OCSM.
a DTC: Retrieved using scan tool.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
Air bag warning indicator
is illuminated
continuously
Air bag warning indicator
Fuse
DTC
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Faulty data link
connector (DLC)
Restraint control
module (RCM)
RCM not
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
CARRY OUT programmable module
installation (PMI). REFER to
MODULE CONFIGURATION
article. If the air bag warning indicator
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
flashing at 5 Hz rate
Audible tone - DTCs
retrieved
configured
No communication with
the restraints control
module (RCM)
No communication with
the occupant classification
system module (OCSM)
is flashing or has a continuous light
after carrying out PMI, REFER to DTC
Charts to diagnose the concern.
SRS fault and air
bag warning
indicator fault
Fuse
Circuitry
Scan tool
RCM
Fuse
Circuitry
Scan tool
OCSM
REFER to DTC Charts .
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article to diagnose the no
communication concern.
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article to diagnose the no
communication concern.
Pinpoint Test - Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Pinpoint Test A: The Air Bag Warning Indicator is Illuminated Continuously
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
During normal operation, the instrument cluster (IC) module will illuminate the air bag indicator continuously
for 6 seconds after the ignition switch is placed to the RUN or ON position. If the supplemental restraint system
(SRS) is fault free, the air bag warning indicator will turn off and remain off. If a fault is detected in the SRS,
the air bag warning indicator will illuminate and remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The restraints
control module (RCM) will communicate to the IC module via the high-speed controller area network (HSCAN). The IC module will illuminate the air bag indicator based on messaging from the RCM or if there is no
communication between the RCM and IC module.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
IC module
RCM
PINPOINT TEST A: THE AIR BAG WARNING INDICATOR IS ILLUMINATED CONTINUOUSLY
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and
impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may
result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
SRS components should only be disconnected or reconnected when instructed
to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
A1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Were any continuous memory or on-demand DTCs retrieved?
YES : If on-demand or continuous memory DTCs were retrieved, go to the DTC Charts for
diagnostic direction.
Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved.
NO : If the RCM does communicate with the scan tool, REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
(IC), MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING CHIMES article to diagnose the IC module concern.
If the RCM does not communicate with the scan tool, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose the no communication concern.
Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved.
Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1342 - ECU (OCSM) is Faulted
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is used to classify the front passenger seat occupant in the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
event of a deployable impact. Refer to Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
The occupant classification system module (OCSM) monitors internal circuity, hardware and the 4 OCS weight
sensor bolts and external circuitry for faults. If the OCSM detects a fault with the internal circuitry, internal
hardware, sensor(s) or external circuitry, it will store DTC B1342 in memory and send a message to the
restraints control module (RCM). A short to ground on any one of the sensor reference voltage circuits or an
open on 3 or more of the sensor reference voltage circuits may set this DTC. The RCM will store DTC B2290
in memory and send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
Fault PIDsa
Description
1342_27_OD and 1342_27_CM Memory Fault
1342_28_OD and 1342_28_CM Microcontroller Internal Fault
1342_29_OD and 1342_29_CM Satellite ASIC Fault
1342_30_OD and 1342_30_CM Power Supply Internal Fault
Fault Trigger Condition
When the OCSM senses a
internal hardware failure, a
fault will be indicated.
When the OCSM senses a
internal failure, a fault will
be indicated.
When the OCSM senses a
internal hardware failure, a
fault will be indicated.
When the OCSM senses a
failure with the internal
power supply, a fault will
be indicated.
a Fault PIDs that end in OD indicate an on-demand status and are associated with on-demand DTC B1342. Fault
PIDs that end in CM indicate continuous memory status and are associated with continuous DTC B1342.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Incorrectly wired OCS weight sensors
OCS system component
PINPOINT TEST B: DTC B1342 - ECU IS FAULTED (OCS)
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
B1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - OCSM - Retrieve and
Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - OCSM - View and
Record All B1342 Fault PIDs
Do any OCSM on-demand B1342 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to B2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to B8.
B2 CHECK THE SEAT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the OCS system wiring, terminals and connectors and the
related seat wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors.
Were any wire problems noted?
YES : REPAIR the seat connectors and wiring as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector
information. Go to B9.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NO : Using the fault PIDs recorded in step B1, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 1342_30_OD (Power Supply Internal Fault), go to B3.
For 1342_28_OD (Microcontroller Internal Fault), 1342_29_OD (Satellite ASIC Fault) or
1342_27_OD (Memory Fault), INSTALL a new OCSM. REFER to Occupant Classification
System Module (OCSM) - Manual Seat Track or Occupant Classification System Module
(OCSM) - Power Seat Track. Go to B9.
B3 CHECK THE OCS WEIGHT SENSOR BOLT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt C3324, C3325, C3330 and C3331
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance Between OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 1 C3324-1 & Bolt 2 C3325-1,
CR140 (YE/GN) & CR141 (BN/YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-1, circuit CR140 (YE/GN),
harness side and ground; between OCS weight sensor bolt 2 C3325-1, circuit CR141 (BN/YE),
harness side and ground; between OCS weight sensor bolt 3 C3330-1, circuit CR153 (GN/WH),
harness side and ground; and between OCS weight sensor bolt 4 C3331-1, circuit CR154 (VT/OG),
harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR140 (YE/GN), circuit CR141 (BN/YE), circuit CR153 (GN/WH) or
circuit CR154 (VT/OG). Go to B9.
B4 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN THE OCS WEIGHT SENSOR BOLT CIRCUITS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Measuring Resistance Between OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 1 C3324-1 & Bolt 2 C3325-1,
CR140 (YE/GN) & CR141 (BN/YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor:
bolt 1 C3324-1, circuit CR140 (YE/GN), harness side and C3324-2, circuit RR140 (GN/OG),
harness side; and
bolt 2 C3325-1, circuit CR141 (BN/YE), harness side and C3325-2, circuit RR141 (VT/BN),
harness side; and
bolt 3 C3330-1, circuit CR153 (GN/WH), harness side and C3330-2, circuit RR153
(GY/BU), harness side; and
bolt 4 C3331-1, circuit CR154 (VT/OG), harness side and C3331-2, circuit RR154
(VT/WH), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : REPAIR circuits CR140 (YE/GN) and RR140 (GN/OG), CR141 (BN/YE) and RR141
(VT/BN), CR153 (GN/WH) and RR153 (GY/BU) or CR154 (VT/OG) and RR154 (VT/WH). Go to
B9.
B5 CHECK THE OCS WEIGHT SENSOR BOLT CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance Between OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 1 C3324-1 & Bolt 2 C3325-1,
CR140 (YE/GN) & CR141 (BN/YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
bolt 1 C3324-1, circuit CR140 (YE/GN), harness side and OCSM C3159-2, circuit CR140
(YE/GN), harness side; and
bolt 2 C3325-1, circuit CR141 (BN/YE), harness side and OCSM C3159-10, circuit CR141
(BN/YE), harness side; and
bolt 3 C3330-1, circuit CR153 (GN/WH), harness side and OCSM C3159-8, circuit CR153
(GN/WH), harness side; and
bolt 4 C3331-1, circuit CR154 (VT/OG), harness side and OCSM C3159-17, circuit CR154
(VT/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR140 (YE/GN), circuit CR141 (BN/YE), circuit CR153 (GN/WH) or
circuit CR154 (VT/OG). Go to B9.
B6 CHECK CIRCUITS CR140 (YE/GN), CR141 (BN/YE), CR153 (GN/WH) AND CR154
(VT/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 5: Measuring Voltage Between OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 1 C3324-1 & Bolt 2 C3325-1,
CR140 (YE/GN) & CR141 (BN/YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between OCS weight sensor:
bolt 1 C3324-1, circuit CR140 (YE/GN), harness side and ground; and
bolt 2 C3325-1, circuit CR141 (BN/YE), harness side and ground; and
bolt 3 C3330-1, circuit CR153 (GN/WH), harness side and ground; and
bolt 4 C3331-1, circuit CR154 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to B7.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR140 (YE/GN), circuit CR141 (BN/YE), circuit CR153 (GN/WH) or
circuit CR154 (VT/OG). Go to B9.
B7 CONFIRM THE OCS MODULE FAULT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system sensor electrical connectors and the RCM
electrical connector are connected before carrying out the on-demand self
test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: OCSM C3159
Connect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt Electrical Connectors
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - OCSM - Retrieve and
Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - OCSM - View and
Record All B1342 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B1342 fault PIDs.
Do any OCSM on-demand B1342 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new OCSM. REFER to Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Manual Seat Track or Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) - Power Seat Track.
Go to B9.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of any electrical connector that were disconnected. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
B8.
B8 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the OCS system wiring, terminals and connectors and the
related seat wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - OCSM - Retrieve and
Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - OCSM - View and
Record All B1342 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B1342 fault PIDs.
Does the original OCSM on-demand DTC B1342 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to B2.
NO : CHECK for causes of intermittent open or short to ground on circuit CR140 (YE/GN), circuit
CR141 (BN/YE), circuit CR153 (GN/WH) or circuit CR154 (VT/OG). ATTEMPT to recreate the
hard fault by flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. ACTIVATE other
systems in the same wire harness. Do not install any new SRS components at this time. SRS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint test. REPAIR any
intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to B9.
B9 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test C: DTC B1868 - Lamp Air Bag Warning Indicator Circuit Failure
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
During normal operation, the air bag warning indicator will illuminate continuously for approximately 6
seconds and then go out after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and no air bag fault exists. Control
of the air bag warning indicator is a function of the instrument cluster (IC) module based on information it
receives from the restraints control module (RCM) over the high-speed controller area network (HS-CAN). The
default mode for the air bag warning indicator is on. The RCM sends a message to the IC module to turn the
indicator off if no air bag fault exists. If the RCM detects a problem with the supplemental restraints system
(SRS) it will send a message to the IC module to turn the air bag warning indicator on.
If the IC module detects a problem with the air bag warning indicator, it will send a fault message to the RCM
and the RCM will store DTC B1868 in memory.
DTC B1868 Lamp Air Bag Warning Indicator Circuit Failure - If the RCM receives a message from the
IC module of an air bag warning indicator failure, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
IC module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
RCM
PINPOINT TEST C: DTC B1868 - LAMP AIR BAG WARNING INDICATOR CIRCUIT FAILURE
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
SRS components should only be disconnected or reconnected when instructed
to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
C1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was on-demand DTC B1868 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to C2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. CHECK the IC module for
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
DTCs and REPAIR as needed. REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE
CENTER & WARNING CHIMES article. Go to C4.
C2 CHECK FOR IC MODULE ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - IC Module - Retrieve and
Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Were any continuous memory or on-demand self test DTCs retrieved?
YES : REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING
CHIMES article to diagnosis IC module concerns. Go to C4.
NO : If the IC module does communicate with the scan tool, go to C3.
If the IC module does not communicate with the scan tool, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose the HS-CAN concern. Go to C4.
C3 CHECK THE IC MODULE
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - IC Module - Active
Command - All_Lamp
Does the air bag warning indicator turn on and off when using the active command?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to C4.
NO : INSTALL a new IC module. REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE
CENTER & WARNING CHIMES article. Go to C4.
C4 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test D: DTC B1884 - PAD Warning Lamp Circuit Failure
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the ignition is in the ON position, the passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator prove-out period is
initiated by the restraints control module (RCM). The RCM briefly activates the PAD indicator to verify to the
occupants correct functional operation of the PAD indicator. Refer to Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
If the RCM detects an open or short to ground on the PAD indicator circuit, it will store DTC B1884 in memory
and send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC B1884 PAD Warning Lamp Circuit Failure - If the RCM detects an open circuit or short to ground
on the PAD indicator circuit, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PAD indicator
RCM
PINPOINT TEST D: DTC B1884 - PAD WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT FAILURE
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
D1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was on-demand DTC B1884 retrieved?
YES : If the PAD indicator does illuminate, go to D2.
If the PAD indicator does not illuminate, go to D4.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to D8.
D2 CHECK CIRCUIT CR116 (GN/WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: PAD Indicator C2355
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance Between PAD Indicator C2355-2, Circuit CR116 (GN/WH) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between PAD indicator C2355-2, circuit CR116 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D7.
NO : Go to D3.
D3 CHECK THE RCM FOR LOW RESISTANCE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 7: Checking RCM For Low Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310a pin 19, component side and ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuit CR116 (GN/WH). Go to D9.
NO : Go to D7.
D4 CHECK CIRCUIT CR116 (GN/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Disconnect: PAD Indicator C2355
Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance Between PAD Indicator C2355-2, Circuit CR116 (GN/WH) &
RCM C310A-19
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between PAD indicator C2355-2, circuit CR116 (GN/WH), harness side and
RCM C310a-19, circuit CR116 (GN/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to D5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR circuit CR116 (GN/WH). Go to D9.
D5 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP46 (WH/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage Between PAD Indicator C2355-3, Circuit CBP46 (WH/BU) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between PAD indicator C2355-3, circuit CBP46 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to D6.
NO : REPAIR circuit CBP46 (WH/BU). Go to D9.
D6 CHECK THE PAD INDICATOR LAMP
Key in OFF position.
Deactivate the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and
Reactivation.
Connect: PAD Indicator C2355
Key in ON position.
Fig. 10: Checking PAD Indicator Lamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Connect a fused jumper wire between RCM C310a-19, circuit CR116 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground.
Does the PAD indicator illuminate?
YES : Go to D7.
NO : INSTALL a new PAD indicator. REFER to Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD)
Indicator. Go to D9.
D7 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system sensor electrical connectors and the RCM
electrical connector are connected before carrying out the on-demand self
test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: PAD Indicator C2355 (if previously disconnected)
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b (if previously disconnected)
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was on-demand DTC B1884 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to D9.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of any electrical connector that were disconnected. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
D8.
D8 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was on-demand DTC B1884 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to D2.
NO : CHECK for causes of intermittent open or short to ground on circuit CR116 (GN/WH).
ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key
frequently. ACTIVATE other systems in the same wire harness. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
D9.
D9 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
If previously directed to deactivate the SRS, reactivate the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test E: DTC B1890 - PAD Warning Lamp Circuit Short to Battery
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the ignition is in the ON position, the passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator prove-out period is
initiated by the restraints control module (RCM). The RCM briefly activates the PAD indicator to verify to the
occupants correct functional operation of the PAD indicator. Refer to Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
If the RCM detects a short to battery on the PAD indicator circuit, it will store DTC B1890 in memory and send
a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC B1890 PAD Warning Lamp Circuit Short to Battery - If the RCM detects a short to battery on the
PAD indicator circuit, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PAD indicator
RCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST E: DTC B1890 - PAD WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
E1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was on-demand DTC B1890 retrieved?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to E4.
E2 CHECK CIRCUIT CR116 (GN/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Repowering.
Disconnect: PAD Indicator C2355
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 11: Measuring Voltage Between PAD Indicator C2355-2, Circuit CR116 (GN/WH) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between PAD indicator C2355-2, circuit CR116 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR116 (GN/WH). Go to E5.
E3 CHECK THE RCM
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
NOTE:
DTC B1884 should be retrieved when carrying out the on-demand self
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
test due to an open on circuit CR116 (GN/WH). DTC B1890 should not
be retrieved at this time.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing on-demand DTCs with the PAD indicator disconnected, a
circuit failure fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the PAD warning lamp on-demand DTC change from indicating B1890 to B1884?
YES : INSTALL a new PAD indicator. Go to E5.
NO : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to E5.
E4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was on-demand DTC B1890 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to E2.
NO : CHECK for causes of intermittent short to battery on circuit CR116 (GN/WH). ATTEMPT to
recreate the hard fault by flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently.
ACTIVATE other systems in the same wire harness. Do not install any new SRS components at
this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint test.
REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to E5.
E5 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test F: DTC B2290 - Occupant Classification System Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
DTC B2290 reported by the restraint control module (RCM) is informational only
and indicates the presence of a fault in the occupant classification system
module (OCSM). Refer to DTC Charts when DTC B2290 is reported by the RCM
for diagnostic instructions.
NOTE:
The following pinpoint test must only be used to diagnose DTC B2290 when
reported by the OCSM.
Normal Operation
The occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is used to classify the front passenger seat occupant in the
event of a deployable impact. Refer to Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
The OCSM monitors the 4 OCS weight sensor bolts and circuity for faults. If the OCSM detects a fault with the
sensor(s) or circuitry, it will store DTC B2290 in memory and send a message to the RCM. The RCM will store
DTC B2290 in memory and send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag
warning indicator.
Fault PIDsa
Description
2290_0_OD and 2290_0_CM
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor
No. 4 Circuit Short to Battery
2290_1_OD and 2290_1_CM
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor
No. 4 Circuit Short to Ground
2290_2_OD and 2290_2_CM
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor
No. 4 Comm. Fault/Open
2290_3_OD and 2290_3_CM
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor
No. 4 Internal Fault
2290_4_OD and 2290_4_CM
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor
No. 3 Circuit Short to Battery
2290_5_OD and 2290_5_CM
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor
No. 3 Circuit Short to Ground
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor
Fault Trigger Condition
When the OCSM senses a short to
voltage on the OCS weight sensor bolt
No. 4 circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the OCSM senses a short to
ground on the OCS weight sensor bolt
No. 4 circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the OCSM senses a
communication fault or open circuits
on the OCS weight sensor bolt No. 4,
a fault will be indicated.
When the OCSM senses a internal
fault with the OCS weight sensor bolt
No. 4, a fault will be indicated.
When the OCSM senses a short to
voltage on the OCS weight sensor bolt
No. 3 circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the OCSM senses a short to
ground on the OCS weight sensor bolt
No. 3 circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the OCSM senses a
communication fault or open circuits
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
on the OCS weight sensor bolt No. 3,
a fault will be indicated.
When the OCSM senses a internal
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor
2290_7_OD and 2290_7_CM
fault with the OCS weight sensor bolt
No. 3 Internal Fault
No. 3, a fault will be indicated.
When the OCSM senses a short to
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor voltage on the OCS weight sensor bolt
2290_8_OD and 2290_8_CM
No.2 Circuit Short to Battery No. 2 circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the OCSM senses a short to
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor ground on the OCS weight sensor bolt
2290_9_OD and 2290_9_CM
No.2 Circuit Short to Ground No. 2 circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the OCSM senses a
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor communication fault or open circuits
2290_10_OD and 2290_10_CM
on the OCS weight sensor bolt No. 2,
No.2 Comm. Fault/Open
a fault will be indicated.
When the OCSM senses a internal
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor
2290_11_OD and 2290_11_CM
fault with the OCS weight sensor bolt
No.2 Internal Fault
No. 2, a fault will be indicated.
When the OCSM senses a short to
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor voltage on the OCS weight sensor bolt
2290_12_OD and 2290_12_CM
No.1 Circuit Short to Battery No. 1 circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the OCSM senses a short to
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor ground on the OCS weight sensor bolt
2290_13_OD and 2290_13_CM
No.1 Circuit Short to Ground No. 1 circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the OCSM senses a
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor communication fault or open circuits
2290_14_OD and 2290_14_CM
No.1 Comm. Fault/Open
on the OCS weight sensor bolt No. 1
circuits, a fault will be indicated.
When the OCSM senses a internal
Passenger Seat OCS Sensor fault with the OCS weight sensor bolt
2290_15_OD and 2290_15_CM
No.1 Internal Fault
No. 1 circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
2290_6_OD and 2290_6_CM
No. 3 Comm. Fault/Open
a Fault PIDs that end in OD indicate an on-demand status and are associated with on-demand DTC B2290. Fault
PIDs that end in CM indicate continuous memory status and are associated with continuous DTC B2290.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
OCS system component
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST F: DTC B2290 - OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM FAULT
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
F1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - OCSM - Retrieve and
Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - OCSM - View and
Record All B2290 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2290 fault PIDs.
Do any OCSM on-demand DTC B2290 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to F2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to F36.
F2 CHECK THE SEAT WIRING AND CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the OCS system wiring, terminals and connectors and the
related seat wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors.
Were any problems noted?
YES : REPAIR the seat connectors and wiring as needed. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
F37.
NO : Using the fault PIDs recorded in step F1, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2290_3_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 4 Internal Fault), 2290_7_OD (Passenger Seat
OCS Sensor No. 3 Internal Fault), 2290_11_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.2 Internal Fault)
or 2290_15_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.1 Internal Fault), INSTALL a new OCS weight
sensor bolt. REFER to Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track or Occupant
Classification Sensor - Power Seat Track.
For 2290_14_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.1 Comm. Fault/Open), go to F3.
For 2290_13_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.1 Circuit Short to Ground), go to F7.
For 2290_12_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.1 Circuit Short to Battery), go to F9.
For 2290_10_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.2 Comm. Fault/Open), go to F11.
For 2290_9_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.2 Circuit Short to Ground), go to F15.
For 2290_8_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.2 Circuit Short to Battery), go to F17.
For 2290_6_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 3 Comm. Fault/Open), go to F19.
For 2290_5_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 3 Circuit Short to Ground), go to F23.
For 2290_4_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 3 Circuit Short to Battery), go to F25.
For 2290_2_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 4 Comm. Fault/Open), go to F27.
For 2290_1_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 4 Circuit Short to Ground), go to F31.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
For 2290_0_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 4 Circuit Short to Battery), go to F33.
F3 CHECK CIRCUITS CR140 (YE/GN), VR211 (WH/BN) AND RR140 (GN/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 1 C3324
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance Between OCSM C3159-5, Circuit VR211 (WH/BN) & OCS
Weight Sensor Bolt 1 C3324-3
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCSM C3159-5, circuit VR211 (WH/BN), harness side and OCS
weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-3, circuit VR211 (WH/BN), harness side; between OCSM C3159-2,
circuit CR140 (YE/GN), harness side and OCS weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-1, circuit CR140
(YE/GN), harness side; and between OCSM C3159-5, circuit RR140 (GN/OG), harness side and
OCS weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-2, circuit RR140 (GN/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to F4.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR140 (YE/GN), circuit VR211 (WH/BN) or circuit RR140 (GN/OG). Refer
to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for
schematic and connector information. Go to F37.
F4 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN CIRCUITS CR140 (YE/GN), VR211 (WH/BN) AND
RR140 (GN/OG)
Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 1:
C3324-1, circuit CR140 (YE/GN), harness side and C3324-3, circuit VR211 (WH/BN),
harness side.
C3324-1, circuit CR140 (YE/GN), harness side and C3324-2, circuit RR140 (GN/OG),
harness side.
C3324-3, circuit VR211 (WH/BN), harness side and C3324-2, circuit RR140 (GN/OG),
harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F5.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuits, circuits CR140 (YE/GN), VR211 (WH/BN) and/or RR140
(GN/OG). Go to F37.
F5 CHECK CIRCUIT VR211 (WH/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module C327
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 14: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between OCS weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-3, circuit VR211 (WH/BN), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to F6.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR211 (WH/BN). Go to F37.
F6 CHECK CIRCUIT VR211 (WH/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-3, circuit VR211 (WH/BN),
harness side and ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new OCS weight sensor bolt 1. REFER to Occupant Classification Sensor Manual Seat Track or Occupant Classification Sensor - Power Seat Track. Go to F37.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR211 (WH/BN). Go to F37.
F7 CHECK CIRCUIT VR211 (WH/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND AND A SHORT TO
CIRCUIT RR140 (GN/OG)
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 1 C3324
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-3, circuit VR211 (WH/BN),
harness side and ground; and between OCS weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-3, circuit VR211
(WH/BN), harness side and C3324-2, circuit RR140 (GN/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F8.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR211 (WH/BN) and/or circuit RR140 (GN/OG). Go to F37.
F8 CHECK CIRCUIT CR140 (YE/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance Between OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 1 C3324-1, Circuit CR140
(YE/GN) & OCSM C3159-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-1, circuit CR140 (YE/GN),
harness side and OCSM C3159-2, circuit CR140 (YE/GN), harness side.
Is the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F35.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR140 (YE/GN). Go to F37.
F9 CHECK CIRCUIT RR140 (GN/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 1 C3324
Fig. 18: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-2, circuit RR140 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F10.
NO : REPAIR circuit RR140 (GN/OG). Go to F37.
F10 CHECK CIRCUIT VR211 (WH/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module C327
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 19: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between OCS weight sensor bolt 1 C3324-3, circuit VR211 (WH/BN), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to F35.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR211 (WH/BN). Go to F37.
F11 CHECK CIRCUITS CR141 (BN/YE), VR212 (YE/GN) AND RR141 (VT/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 2 C3325
Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance Between OCSM C3159-4, Circuit VR212 (YE/GN) & OCS
Sensor 2 C3325-3
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCSM C3159-4, circuit VR212 (YE/GN), harness side and OCS
sensor 2 C3325-3, circuit VR212 (YE/GN), harness side; between OCSM C3159-10, circuit CR141
(BN/YE), harness side and OCS sensor 2 C3325-1, circuit CR141 (BN/YE), harness side; and
between OCSM C3159-13, circuit RR141 (VT/BN), harness side and OCS sensor 2 C3325-2,
circuit RR141 (VT/BN), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to F12.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR141 (BN/YE), circuit VR212 (YE/GN) or circuit RR141 (VT/BN). Go to
F37.
F12 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN CIRCUITS CR141 (BN/YE), VR212 (YE/GN) AND
RR141 (VT/BN)
Fig. 21: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 2:
C3325-1, circuit CR141 (BN/YE), harness side and C3325-3, circuit VR212 (YE/GN),
harness side.
C3325-1, circuit CR141 (BN/YE), harness side and C3325-2, circuit RR141 (VT/BN),
harness side.
C3325-3, circuit VR212 (YE/GN), harness side and C3325-2, circuit RR141 (VT/BN),
harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,0000 ohms?
YES : Go to F13.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuits, circuits CR141 (BN/YE), VR212 (YE/GN) and/or RR141
(VT/BN). Go to F37.
F13 CHECK CIRCUIT VR212 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module C327
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 22: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between OCS weight sensor bolt 2 C3325-3, circuit VR212 (YE/GN), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to F14.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR212 (YE/GN). Go to F37.
F14 CHECK CIRCUIT VR212 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 23: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 2 C3325-3, circuit VR212 (YE/GN),
harness side and ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new OCS weight sensor bolt 2. REFER to Occupant Classification Sensor Manual Seat Track or Occupant Classification Sensor - Power Seat Track. Go to F37.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR212 (YE/GN). Go to F37.
F15 CHECK CIRCUIT VR212 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND AND A SHORT TO
CIRCUIT RR141 (VT/BN)
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 2 C3325
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 24: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 2 C3325-3, circuit VR212 (YE/GN),
harness side and ground; and between OCS weight sensor bolt 2 C3325-3, circuit VR212 (YE/GN),
harness side and C3325-2, circuit RR141 (VT/BN), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F16.
NO : REPAIR circuits VR212 (YE/GN) and RR141 (VT/BN). Go to F37.
F16 CHECK CIRCUIT CR141 (BN/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 25: Measuring Resistance Between OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 2 C3325-1, Circuit CR141
(BN/YE) & OCSM C3159-10
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 2 C3325-1, circuit CR141 (BN/YE), and
OCSM C3159-10, circuit CR141 (BN/YE), harness side.
Is the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F35.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR141 (BN/YE). Go to F37.
F17 CHECK CIRCUIT RR141 (VT/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 2 C3325
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 26: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 2 C3325-2, circuit RR141 (VT/BN),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F18.
NO : REPAIR circuit RR141 (VT/BN). Go to F37.
F18 CHECK CIRCUIT VR212 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module C327
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 27: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between OCS weight sensor bolt 2 C3325-3, circuit VR212 (YE/GN), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to F35.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR212 (YE/GN). Go to F37.
F19 CHECK CIRCUITS CR153 (GN/WH), VR226 (YE/GY) AND RR153 (GY/BU) FOR AN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
OPEN
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 3 C3330
Fig. 28: Measuring Resistance Between OCSM C3159-7, Circuit VR226 (YE/GY) & OCS
Weight Sensor Bolt 3 C3330-3
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCSM C3159-7, circuit VR226 (YE/GY), harness side and OCS
weight sensor bolt 3 C3330-3, circuit VR226 (YE/GY), harness side; between OCSM C3159-8,
circuit CR153 (GN/WH), harness side and OCS sensor 3 C3330-1, circuit CR153 (GN/WH),
harness side; and between OCSM C3159-6, circuit RR153 (GY/BU), harness side and OCS sensor
3 C3330-2, circuit RR153 (GY/BU), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to F20.
NO : REPAIR circuits CR153 (GN/WH), VR226 (YE/GY) or RR153 (GY/BU). Go to F37.
F20 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN CIRCUITS CR153 (GN/WH), VR226 (YE/GY) AND
RR153 (GY/BU)
Fig. 29: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 3:
C3330-1, circuit CR153 (GN/WH), harness side and C3330-3, circuit VR226 (YE/GY),
harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
C3330-1, circuit CR153 (GN/WH), harness side and C3330-2, circuit RR153 (GY/BU),
harness side.
C3330-3, circuit VR226 (YE/GY), harness side and C3330-2, circuit RR153 (GY/BU),
harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,0000 ohms?
YES : Go to F21.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuits, circuits CR153 (GN/WH), VR226 (YE/GY) and/or RR153
(GY/BU). Go to F37.
F21 CHECK CIRCUIT VR226 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module C327
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 30: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between OCS weight sensor bolt 3 C3330-3, circuit VR226 (YE/GY), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to F22.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR226 (YE/GY). Go to F37.
F22 CHECK CIRCUIT VR226 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 3 C3330-3, circuit VR226 (YE/GY),
harness side and ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new OCS weight sensor bolt 3. REFER to Occupant Classification Sensor Manual Seat Track or Occupant Classification Sensor - Power Seat Track. Go to F37.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR226 (YE/GY). Go to F37.
F23 CHECK CIRCUIT VR226 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND AND A SHORT TO
CIRCUIT RR153 (GY/BU)
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 3 C3330
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Fig. 32: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 3 C3330-3, circuit VR226 (YE/GY),
harness side and ground; and between OCS weight sensor bolt 3 C3330-3, circuit VR226 (YE/GY),
harness side and C3291-2, circuit RR153 (GY/BU), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F24.
NO : REPAIR circuits VR226 (YE/GY) and/or RR153 (GY/BU). Go to F37.
F24 CHECK CIRCUIT CR153 (GN/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 33: Measuring Resistance Between OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 3 C3330-1, Circuit CR153
(GN/WH) & OCSM C3159-8
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 3 C3330-1, circuit CR153 (GN/WH),
harness side and OCSM C3159-8, circuit CR153 (GN/WH), harness side.
Is the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F35.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR153 (GN/WH). Go to F37.
F25 CHECK CIRCUIT RR153 (GY/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 3 C3330
Fig. 34: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 3 C3330-2, circuit RR153 (GY/BU),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F26.
NO : REPAIR circuit RR153 (GY/BU). Go to F37.
F26 CHECK CIRCUIT VR226 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module C327
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 35: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between OCS weight sensor bolt 3 C3330-3, circuit VR226 (YE/GY), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to F35.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR226 (YE/GY). Go to F37.
F27 CHECK CIRCUITS CR154 (VT/OG), VR227 (VT/GN) AND RR154 (VT/WH) FOR AN
OPEN
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 4 C3331
Fig. 36: Measuring Resistance Between OCSM C3159-16, Circuit VR227 (VT/GN) & OCS
Weight Sensor Bolt 4 C3331-3
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCSM C3159-16, circuit VR227 (VT/GN), harness side and OCS
weight sensor bolt 4 C3331-3, circuit VR227 (VT/GN), harness side; between OCSM C3159-17,
circuit CR154 (VT/OG), harness side and OCS sensor 4 C3331-1, circuit CR154 (VT/OG), harness
side; and between OCSM C3159-15, circuit RR154 (VT/WH), harness side and OCS sensor 4
C3331-2, circuit RR154 (VT/WH), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Are the resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to F28.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR154 (VT/OG), circuit VR227 (VT/GN) or circuit RR154 (VT/WH). Go to
F37.
F28 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN CIRCUITS CR154 (VT/OG), VR227 (VT/GN) AND
RR154 (VT/WH)
Fig. 37: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 4:
C3331-1, circuit CR154 (VT/OG), harness side and C3331-3, circuit VR227 (VT/GN),
harness side.
C3331-1, circuit CR154 (VT/OG), harness side and C3331-2, circuit RR154 (VT/WH),
harness side.
C3331-3, circuit VR227 (VT/GN), harness side and C3331-2, circuit RR154 (VT/WH),
harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,0000 ohms?
YES : Go to F29.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuits, circuits CR154 (VT/OG), VR227 (VT/GN) and/or RR154
(VT/WH). Go to F37.
F29 CHECK CIRCUIT VR227 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module C327
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 38: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between OCS weight sensor bolt 4 C3331-3, circuit VR227 (VT/GN), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to F30.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR227 (VT/GN). Go to F37.
F30 CHECK CIRCUIT VR227 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 39: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 4 C3331-3, circuit VR227 (VT/GN),
harness side and ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new OCS weight sensor bolt 4. REFER to Occupant Classification Sensor Manual Seat Track or Occupant Classification Sensor - Power Seat Track. Go to F37.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR227 (VT/GN). Go to F37.
F31 CHECK CIRCUIT VR227 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND AND A SHORT TO
CIRCUIT RR154 (VT/WH)
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 4 C3331
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 40: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 4 C3331-3, circuit VR227 (VT/GN),
harness side and ground; and between C3331-3, circuit VR227 (VT/GN), harness side and C33312, circuit RR154 (VT/WH), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F32.
NO : REPAIR circuits VR227 (VT/GN) and/or RR154 (VT/WH). Go to F37.
F32 CHECK CIRCUIT CR154 (VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 41: Measuring Resistance Between OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 4 C3331-1, Circuit CR154
(VT/OG) & OCSM C3159-17
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 4 C3331-1, circuit CR154 (VT/OG),
harness side and OCSM C3159-17, circuit CR154 (VT/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F35.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR154 (VT/OG). Go to F37.
F33 CHECK CIRCUIT RR154 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: OCS Weight Sensor Bolt 4 C3331
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 42: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between OCS weight sensor bolt 4 C3331-2, circuit RR154 (VT/WH),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F34.
NO : REPAIR circuit RR154 (VT/WH). Go to F37.
F34 CHECK CIRCUIT VR227 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module C327
Disconnect: OCSM C3159
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 43: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between OCS weight sensor bolt 4 C3331-3, circuit VR227 (VT/GN), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to F35.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR227 (VT/GN). Go to F37.
F35 CONFIRM THE OCS MODULE FAULT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system sensor electrical connectors and the RCM
electrical connector are connected before carrying out the on-demand self
test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: OCSM C3159 (if previously disconnected)
Connect: Affected OCS Weight Sensor Bolt Electrical Connector(s)
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - OCSM - Retrieve and
Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - OCSM - View and
Record All B2290 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2290 fault PIDs.
Does the original OCSM on-demand DTC B2290 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new OCSM. REFER to Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Manual Seat Track or Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) - Power Seat Track.
Go to F37.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of any electrical connector that were disconnected. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
F36.
F36 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - OCSM - Retrieve and
Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - OCSM - View and
Record All B2290 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2290 fault PIDs.
Do any OCSM on-demand DTC B2290 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test.
Using the fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2290_3_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 4 Internal Fault), 2290_7_OD (Passenger Seat
OCS Sensor No. 3 Internal Fault), 2290_11_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.2 Internal Fault)
or 2290_15_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.1 Internal Fault), INSTALL a new OCS weight
sensor bolt. REFER to Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track or Occupant
Classification Sensor - Power Seat Track.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
For 2290_14_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.1 Comm. Fault/Open), go to F3.
For 2290_13_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.1 Circuit Short to Ground), go to F7.
For 2290_12_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.1 Circuit Short to Battery), go to F9.
For 2290_10_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.2 Comm. Fault/Open), go to F11.
For 2290_9_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.2 Circuit Short to Ground), go to F15.
For 2290_8_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No.2 Circuit Short to Battery), go to F17.
For 2290_6_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 3 Comm. Fault/Open), go to F19.
For 2290_5_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 3 Circuit Short to Ground), go to F23.
For 2290_4_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 3 Circuit Short to Battery), go to F25.
For 2290_2_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 4 Comm. Fault/Open), go to F27.
For 2290_1_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 4 Circuit Short to Ground), go to F31.
For 2290_0_OD (Passenger Seat OCS Sensor No. 4 Circuit Short to Battery), go to F33.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. ACTIVATE other systems in the same
wire harness. Do not install any new SRS components at this time. SRS components should
only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring,
terminal or connector concerns found. Go to F37.
F37 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test G: DTC B2292 - Restraint System - Seatbelt Pretensioner Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) continuously monitors the safety belt retractor pretensioner circuits for an
acceptable resistance range, unacceptable voltage and shorts to ground. The RCM will set on-demand and store
DTC B2292 in memory if any of these conditions are detected to be outside of their respectful range. If the
RCM detects a fault, it will send a message to the Instrument Cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag
warning indicator.
As the RCM continuously monitors safety belt retractor pretensioner circuits for resistance, it expects a normal
resistance between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms.
If a loop resistance is between 0.9 and 1.4 or between 3.5 and 5 ohms, there exists a strong potential for an
intermittent fault, a DTC may or may not set. The RCM will also set an on-demand DTC if the loop resistance
is less than 0.9 ohm or greater than 5 ohms.
Fault PIDsa
2292_24_OD and 2292_24_CM
2292_25_OD and 2292_25_CM
2292_26_OD and 2292_26_CM
2292_27_OD and 2292_27_CM
2292_28_OD and 2292_28_CM
Description
Fault Trigger Condition
When the RCM senses a short to
Pretensioner Circuit Short to
ground on either of the passenger
Ground, Front Passenger Side
pretensioner circuits, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM senses a short to
voltage on either of the
Pretensioner Circuit Short to
passenger pretensioner circuits, a
Battery, Front Passenger Side
fault will be indicated.
When the RCM measures
resistance greater than 5 ohms
Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front
between the passenger
Passenger Side
pretensioner circuits, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM measures
resistance less than 0.9 ohm
Pretensioner Circuit Resistance
between the passenger
Low, Front Passenger Side
pretensioner circuits, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM senses a short to
ground on either of the driver
Pretensioner Circuit Short to
pretensioner circuits, a fault will
Ground, Front Driver Side
be indicated.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2292_29_OD and 2292_29_CM
2292_30_OD and 2292_30_CM
2292_31_OD and 2292_31_CM
When the RCM senses a short to
voltage on either of the driver
pretensioner circuits, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM measures
Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front resistance greater than 5 ohms
Driver Side
between the driver pretensioner
circuits, a fault will be indicated.
When the RCM measures
Pretensioner Circuit Resistance resistance less than 0.9 ohm
Low, Front Driver Side
between the driver pretensioner
circuits, a fault will be indicated.
Pretensioner Circuit Short to
Battery, Front Driver Side
a Fault PIDs that end in OD indicate an on-demand status and are associated with on-demand DTC B2292. Fault
PIDs that end in CM indicate continuous memory status and are associated with continuous DTC B2292.
NOTE:
When monitoring fault and/or resistance PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up
to 2 seconds for the scan tool display to update.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Safety belt retractor pretensioner
RCM
PINPOINT TEST G: DTC B2292 - RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SEATBELT PRETENSIONER FAULT
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
G1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2292 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2292 fault PIDs.
Was on-demand DTC B2292 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test.
Using the fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2292_31_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side), go to G2.
For 2292_30_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Driver Side), go to G2.
For 2292_28_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side), go to G8.
For 2292_29_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side), go to G10.
For 2292_27_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance Low, Front Passenger Side), go to G11.
For 2292_26_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side), go to G11.
For 2292_24_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side), go to G17.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
For 2292_25_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side), go to G19.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time.
Using the fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2292_31_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side), 2292_30_CM
(Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Driver Side), 2292_27_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance
Low, Front Passenger Side) or 2292_26_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side), go
to G22.
For 2292_28_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side) or 2292_24_CM
(Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side), go to G24.
For 2292_29_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side) or 2292_25_CM
(Pretensioner Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side), go to G25.
G2 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER RESISTANCE PID
(DR_PTENS)
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DR_PTENS (Pretensioner Circuit
Resistance, Driver Side) Resistance PID
Is the resistance PID value between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms
YES : Go to G21.
NO : Go to G3.
G3 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER RESISTANCE PID
(DR_PTENS) WHILE CARRYING OUT A HARNESS TEST
Continue monitoring the DR_PTENS (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance, Driver Side) resistance PID
while carrying out a harness test of the driver safety belt retractor pretensioner circuits and
accessible connectors (including any inline connectors), by wiggling connectors and flexing the
wire harness.
Does the resistance PID value read between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms while carrying out a harness
test?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR the connector, terminals or wire harness as needed. Refer
to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for
schematic and connector information. Go to G26.
NO : If the driver safety belt retractor pretensioner resistance PID is less than 1.4 ohms, go to G4.
If the driver safety belt retractor pretensioner resistance PID is greater than 3.5 ohms, go to G6.
G4 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER FOR LOW
RESISTANCE FAULT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2292_30_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Driver Side)
2292_31_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2292 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver
pretensioner disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver safety belt retractor pretensioner on-demand fault PIDs change from
indicating a low resistance to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to G20.
NO : Go to G5.
G5 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN DRIVER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
PRETENSIONER CIRCUITS CR120 (BU/OG) AND RR120 (BN/GN)
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 44: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between driver safety belt retractor pretensioner C323-1, circuit CR120
(BU/OG), harness side and C323-2, circuit RR120 (GN/RD), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G21.
NO : REPAIR circuits CR120 (BU/OG) and RR120 (BN/GN). Go to G26.
G6 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323
Connect a fused jumper wire between driver safety belt retractor pretensioner C3201-1, circuit
CR120 (BU/OG), harness side and C3201-2, circuit RR120 (BN/GN), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2292_30_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Driver Side)
2292_31_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2292 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver
pretensioner circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver safety belt retractor pretensioner on-demand fault PIDs change from
indicating an open circuit to a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to G20.
NO : Go to G7.
G7 CHECK CIRCUITS CR120 (BU/OG) AND RR120 (BN/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the fused jumper wire from the driver safety belt retractor pretensioner C323.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 45: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-31, circuit CR120 (BU/OG), harness side and driver
safety belt retractor pretensioner C323-2, circuit CR120 (BU/OG), harness side; and between RCM
C310b-32, circuit RR120 (BN/GN), harness side and driver safety belt retractor pretensioner C3231, circuit RR120 (GN/RD), harness side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to G21.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR120 (BU/OG) or circuit RR120 (GN/RD). Go to G26.
G8 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2292_28_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side)
2292_30_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2292 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver
pretensioner disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Did the driver safety belt retractor pretensioner on-demand fault PIDs change from
indicating a short to ground to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to G20.
NO : Go to G9.
G9 CHECK CIRCUITS CR120 (BU/OG) AND RR120 (GN/RD) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 46: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver safety belt retractor pretensioner C323-2, circuit CR120
(BU/OG), harness side and ground; and between driver safety belt retractor pretensioner C323-1,
circuit RR120 (GN/RD), and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G21.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR120 (BU/OG) or circuit RR120 (GN/RD). Go to G26.
G10 CHECK CIRCUITS CR120 (BU/OG) AND RR120 (BN/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 47: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver safety belt retractor pretensioner C323-2, circuit CR120
(BU/OG), harness side and ground; and between driver safety belt retractor pretensioner C323-1,
circuit RR120 (GN/RD), harness side and ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to G21.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR120 (BU/OG) or circuit RR120 (BN/GN). Go to G26.
G11 CHECK THE PASSENGER RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER RESISTANCE PID
(PS_PTENS)
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PS_TENS (Pretensioner Circuit
Resistance, Passenger Side) Resistance PID
Is the resistance PID value between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms?
YES : Go to G21.
NO : Go to G12.
G12 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER
RESISTANCE PID (PS_PTENS) WHILE CARRYING OUT A HARNESS TEST
Continue monitoring the PS_TENS (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance, Passenger Side) resistance
PID while carrying out a harness test of the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner circuits and
accessible connectors (including any inline connectors), by wiggling connectors and flexing the
wire harness.
Does the resistance PID value read between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms while carrying out the harness
test?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR the connector, terminals or wire harness as needed. Refer
to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for
schematic and connector information. Go to G26.
NO : If the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner resistance PID is less than 1.4 ohms, go to
G13.
If the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner resistance PID is greater than 3.5 ohms, go to
G15.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:46 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
G13 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER FOR LOW
RESISTANCE FAULT
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C303
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2292_26_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side)
2292_27_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance Low, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2292 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger
pretensioner disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner on-demand fault PIDs change from
indicating a low resistance to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to G21.
NO : Go to G14.
G14 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN PASSENGER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
PRETENSIONER CIRCUITS RR122 (BN) AND CR122 (WH/OG)
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 48: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger safety belt pretensioner C303-2, circuit CR122
(WH/OG), harness side and C303-1, circuit RR122 (BN), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G21.
NO : REPAIR circuits CR122 (WH/OG) and RR122 (BN). Go to G26.
G15 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER FOR AN
OPEN
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C303
Connect a fused jumper wire between passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner C303-1, circuit
CR122 (WH/OG), harness side and C303-2, circuit RR122 (BN), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2292_26_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side)
2292_27_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance Low, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2292 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger
pretensioner circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Did the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner on-demand fault PIDs change from
indicating an open circuit to a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to G20.
NO : Go to G16.
G16 CHECK CIRCUITS CR122 (WH/OG) AND RR122 (BN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner fused jumper wire.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 49: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-34, circuit RR122 (BN), harness side and passenger
safety belt retractor pretensioner C303-1, circuit RR122 (BU/RD), harness side; and between RCM
C310b-33, circuit CR122 (WH/OG), harness side and passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner
C303-2, circuit CR122 (WH/OG), harness side.
Is resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to G21.
NO : REPAIR circuit RR122 (BN) or circuit CR122 (WH/OG). Go to G26.
G17 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER FOR A
SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C303
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2292_24_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side)
2292_26_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2292 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger
pretensioner disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner on-demand fault PIDs change from
indicating a short to ground to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to G20.
NO : Go to G18.
G18 CHECK CIRCUITS CR122 (WH/OG) AND RR122 (BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 50: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner C303-2, circuit CR122
(WH/OG), harness side and ground; and between passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner C3031, circuit RR122 (BN), harness side and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G21.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR122 (WH/OG) or circuit RR122 (BN). Go to G26.
G19 CHECK CIRCUITS RR122 (BN) AND CR122 (WH/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C303
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 51: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner C303-1, circuit RR122
(BN), harness side and ground; and between passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner C303-2,
circuit CR122 (WH/OG), harness side and ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to G21.
NO : REPAIR circuit RR122 (BN) or circuit CR122 (WH/OG). Go to G26.
G20 CONFIRM THE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Affected Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323 (Driver) C303 (Passenger)
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
All B2292 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2292 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2292 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new driver or passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner. REFER to SAFETY
BELT SYSTEM article. Go to G26.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. Using the
fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step and CHECK for causes of the
intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and terminals of any
electrical connector that were disconnected.
For 2292_31_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side), 2292_30_CM
(Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Driver Side), 2292_27_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance
Low, Front Passenger Side) or 2292_26_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side), go
to G22.
For 2292_28_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side) or 2292_24_CM
(Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side), go to G24.
For 2292_29_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side) or 2292_25_CM
(Pretensioner Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side), go to G25.
G21 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: All Restraint System Components (if previously disconnected)
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b (if previously disconnected)
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2292 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2292 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2292 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to Restraints Control Module
(RCM). Go to G26.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of any electrical connector that were disconnected.
For 2292_31_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side), 2292_30_CM
(Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Driver Side), 2292_27_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance
Low, Front Passenger Side) or 2292_26_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side), go
to G22.
For 2292_28_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side) or 2292_24_CM
(Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side), go to G24.
For 2292_29_CM (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side) or 2292_25_CM
(Pretensioner Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side), go to G25.
G22 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT PRETENSIONER LOW RESISTANCE OR OPEN
CIRCUIT FAULT
If the fault PID was reported for the driver safety belt retractor pretensioner, monitor the following
on the scan tool:
DR_PTENS (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance, Driver Side) resistance PID.
2292_30_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Driver Side) and 2292_31_OD (Pretensioner
Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side) on-demand fault PIDs.
If the fault PID was reported for the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner, monitor the
following on the scan tool:
PS_PTENS (Pretensioner Circuit Resistance, Passenger Side) resistance PID.
2292_26_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side) and 2292_27_OD
(Pretensioner Circuit Resistance Low, Front Passenger Side) on-demand fault PIDs.
NOTE:
A resistance PID that reads between 0.9 and 1.4 ohms or between 3.5
and 5 ohms may or may not set an on-demand DTC, yet indicates a
strong potential of an intermittent fault condition. Make sure to
thoroughly check wire harness(es), connectors and terminals as they
are the likely source of the fault condition.
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling the connectors (including any inline connectors) and
flexing the wire harness.
Does any safety belt retractor pretensioner on-demand fault PID indicate a fault is present or
is the pretensioner resistance PID less than 1.4 ohms or greater than 3.5 ohms?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
G26.
NO : Go to G23.
G23 CHECK THE HARNESS AND CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect the affected safety belt retractor pretensioner C323 (driver) or C303 (passenger):
inspect connector(s) (including any inline connectors) for corrosion, loose or spread
terminals and loose or frayed wire connections at terminals.
inspect wire harness for any damage, pinched, cut or pierced wires.
Were any concerns found?
YES : REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article,
Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to G26.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. Go to G26.
G24 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER
CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND FAULT
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2292 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2292 fault PIDs.
If the fault PID was reported for the driver safety belt retractor pretensioner, monitor the
2292_28_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side) on-demand fault PID on
the scan tool.
If the fault PID was reported for the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner, monitor the
2292_24_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side) on-demand fault PID
on the scan tool.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When monitoring fault PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up to 2 seconds
for the scan tool display to update.
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling connectors (including any inline connectors) and flexing
the wire harness.
Does any safety belt retractor pretensioner on-demand fault PID indicate a fault is present?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
G26.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. Go to G26.
G25 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER
CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY FAULT
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2292 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2292 fault PIDs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
If the fault PID was reported for the driver safety belt retractor pretensioner, monitor the
2292_29_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side) on-demand fault PID.
If the fault PID was reported for the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner, monitor the
2292_25_OD (Pretensioner Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side) on-demand fault PID.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When monitoring fault PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up to 2 seconds
for the scan tool display to update.
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling the connectors (including any inline connectors) and
flexing the wire harness.
Does the safety belt retractor pretensioner short to battery on-demand fault PID indicate a
fault?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
G26.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. Go to G26.
G26 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test H: DTC B2293 - Restraint System - Air Bag Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) continuously monitors all front air bag module circuits (loop) for an
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
acceptable resistance range, unacceptable voltage and shorts to ground. The RCM will set on-demand and store
DTC B2293 in memory if any of these conditions are detected to be outside of their respectful range. If the
RCM detects a fault, it will send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag
warning indicator.
As the RCM continuously monitors all front air bag module circuits for resistance, it expects a normal
resistance for the driver air bag module loop 1 and 2, between 1.7 and 4.4 ohms.
The normal expected resistance for the passenger air bag module loop 1 and 2 is between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms.
If a loop resistance for the driver air bag loop 1 or 2 is between 0.9 and 1.7 or between 4.4 and 5 ohms, there
exists a strong potential for an intermittent fault, a DTC may or may not set. The RCM will also set an ondemand DTC if the loop resistance is less than 0.9 ohm or greater than 5 ohms.
If a loop resistance for the passenger air bag loop 1 & 2 is between 0.9 and 1.4 or between 3.5 and 5 ohms, there
exists a strong potential for an intermittent fault, a DTC may or may not set. The RCM will also set an ondemand DTC if the loop resistance is less than 0.9 ohm or greater than 5 ohms.
Fault PIDsa
2293_16_OD and 2293_16_CM
2293_17_OD and 2293_17_CM
2293_18_OD and 2293_18_CM
2293_19_OD and 2293_19_CM
2293_20_OD and 2293_20_CM
Description
Fault Trigger Condition
When the RCM measures
Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance resistance less than 0.9 ohm
Low - Loop No. 2, Front
between the passenger air bag
Passenger Side
loop circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM measures
resistance greater than 5 ohms
Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No.
between the passenger air bag
2, Front Passenger Side
loop circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
to voltage on either on the
Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery passenger air bag loop
Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
to ground on either on the
Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground passenger air bag loop
Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM measures
Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance resistance less than 0.9 ohm
Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver between the driver air bag
loop circuits, a fault will be
Side
indicated.
When the RCM measures
resistance greater than 5 ohms
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2293_21_OD and 2293_21_CM
2293_22_OD and 2293_22_CM
2293_23_OD and 2293_23_CM
2293_24_OD and 2293_24_CM
2293_25_OD and 2293_25_CM
2293_26_OD and 2293_26_CM
2293_27_OD and 2293_27_CM
2293_28_OD and 2293_28_CM
2293_29_OD and 2293_29_CM
2293_30_OD and 2293_30_CM
between the driver air bag
Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No.
loop circuits, a fault will be
2, Front Driver Side
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - to voltage on either on the
driver air bag loop circuits, a
Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side
fault will be indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - to ground on either on the
Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side
driver air bag loop circuits, a
fault will be indicated.
When the RCM measures
Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance resistance less than 0.9 ohm
Low - Loop No. 1, Front
between the passenger air bag
Passenger Side
loop circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM measures
resistance greater than 5 ohms
Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No.
between the passenger air bag
1, Front Passenger Side
loop circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
to voltage on either on the
Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery passenger air bag loop
Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
to ground on either on the
Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground passenger air bag loop
Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM measures
Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance resistance less than 0.9 ohm
Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver between the driver air bag
Side
loop circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM measures
resistance greater than 5 ohms
Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No.
between the driver air bag
1, Front Driver Side
loop circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - to voltage on either on the
Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side
driver air bag loop circuits, a
fault will be indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2293_31_OD and 2293_31_CM
to ground on either on the
Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground driver air bag loop circuits, a
Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side
fault will be indicated.
a Fault PIDs that end in OD indicate an on-demand status and are associated with on-demand DTC B2293. Fault
PIDs that end in CM indicate continuous memory status and are associated with continuous DTC B2293.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Clockspring
Driver air bag module
Passenger air bag module
RCM
PINPOINT TEST H: DTC B2293 - RESTRAINT SYSTEM - AIR BAG FAULT
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
to the customer.
H1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2293 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2293 fault PIDs.
Do any RCM on-demand DTC B2293 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test.
Using the fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2293_28_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side), go to
H2.
For 2293_29_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side), go to H2.
For 2293_31_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side), go to H10.
For 2293_30_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side), go to H13.
For 2293_20_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to
H15.
For 2293_21_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H15.
For 2293_23_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H23.
For 2293_22_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H26.
For 2293_24_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side), go
to H28.
For 2293_25_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side), go to H28.
For 2293_27_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side), go to
H34.
For 2293_26_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side), go to H36.
For 2293_16_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go
to H37.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
For 2293_17_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H37.
For 2293_19_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to
H43.
For 2293_18_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H45.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time.
Using the fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2293_28_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_20_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to
H50.
For 2293_29_CM (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or 2293_21_CM (Air
Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H50.
For 2293_31_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_23_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H51.
For 2293_30_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_22_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H53.
For 2293_24_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or
2293_16_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to
H50.
For 2293_25_CM (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or 2293_17_CM (Air
Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H50.
For 2293_27_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or
2293_19_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H52.
For 2293_26_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or
2293_18_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H54.
H2 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 RESISTANCE PID (D_ABAGR)
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: D_ABAGR (Driver Air Bag)
Resistance PID
Is the resistance PID value between 1.7 and 4.4 ohms?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Go to H3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
H3 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 RESISTANCE PID (D_ABAGR)
WHILE CARRYING OUT A HARNESS TEST
NOTE:
Do not remove the driver air bag module from its mounted position at
this time.
Continue monitoring the D_ABAGR (driver air bag) resistance PID while carrying out a harness
test of the driver air bag circuits and accessible connectors (including any inline connectors) by
wiggling and flexing the wire harness, connectors and rotating the steering wheel frequently.
Does the resistance PID value read between 1.7 and 4.4 ohms while carrying out the harness
test?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR the connector, terminals or wire harness or INSTALL a
new clockspring as needed. REFER to Clockspring. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
H56.
NO : If the driver air bag module loop 1 resistance PID is less than 1.7 ohms, go to H4.
If the driver air bag module loop 1 resistance PID is greater than 4.4 ohms, go to H7.
H4 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 LOW RESISTANCE FAULT
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_28_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
2293_29_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and loop 2.
Did the driver air bag module loop 1 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a low
resistance to an open circuit fault?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to H46.
NO : Go to H5.
H5 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 CIRCUITS FOR LOW RESISTANCE
BETWEEN THE CLOCKSPRING AND RCM
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_28_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
2293_29_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module/clockspring disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and
loop 2.
Did the driver air bag module loop 1 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a low
resistance to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H48.
NO : Go to H6.
H6 CHECK THE RCM FOR LOW RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 52: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310A Pin 1 & C310A Pin 2, Component Side
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310a pin 1 and C310a pin 2, component side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuits CR101 (VT/BN) and RR101 (YE/GN). Go to H56.
NO : Go to H49.
H7 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Connect a fused jumper wire between driver air bag module loop 1 electrical connector pin-1,
harness side and pin-2, harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_28_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
2293_29_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module loop 1 circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved on loop
1. Loop 2 will show an open circuit fault due to the driver air bag being disconnected.
Did the driver air bag module loop 1 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a open
circuit to a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to H46.
NO : Go to H8.
H8 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN
THE CLOCKSPRING AND RCM
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Remove the fused jumper wire from driver air bag module loop 1 electrical connector.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218
Connect a fused jumper wire between clockspring C218-1, circuit CR101 (VT/BN), harness side
and clockspring C218-9, circuit RR101 (YE/GN), harness side.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_28_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
2293_29_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module loop 1 circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved on loop
1. Loop 2 will show an open circuit fault due to the driver air bag being disconnected.
Did the driver air bag module loop 1 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a open
circuit to a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to H48.
NO : Go to H9.
H9 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 CIRCUITS CR101 (VT/BN) AND
RR101 (YE/GN) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE CLOCKSPRING AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the fused jumper wire from the clockspring connector.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 53: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310A-1, Circuit CR101 (VT/BN) &
Clockspring C218-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between RCM C310a-1, circuit CR101 (VT/BN), harness side and
clockspring C218-1, circuit CR101 (VT/BN), harness side; and between RCM C310a-2, circuit
RR101 (YE/GN), harness side and clockspring C218-9, circuit RR101 (YE/GN), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR101 (VT/BN) or circuit RR101 (YE/GN). Go to H56.
H10 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_29_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
2293_31_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and loop 2.
Did the driver air bag module loop 1 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a short to
ground to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H46.
NO : Go to H11.
H11 CHECK DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND CLOCKSPRING
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 95
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Clockspring C218
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_29_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
2293_31_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the clockspring
disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and loop 2.
Did the driver air bag module loop 1 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a short to
ground to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H48.
NO : Go to H12.
H12 CHECK CIRCUITS CR101 (VT/BN) AND RR101 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND CLOCKSPRING
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 54: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between clockspring C218-1, circuit CR101 (VT/BN), harness side and
ground; and between clockspring C218-9, circuit RR101 (YE/GN), harness side and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR101 (VT/BN) or circuit RR101 (YE/GN). Go to H56.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 96
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
H13 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE RCM AND CLOCKSPRING
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_29_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
2293_30_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module/clockspring disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and
loop 2.
Did the driver air bag module loop 1 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a short to
battery to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H48.
NO : Go to H14.
H14 CHECK CIRCUITS CR101 (VT/BN) AND RR101 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE RCM AND CLOCKSPRING
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 97
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 55: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between clockspring C218-1, circuit CR101 (VT/BN), harness side and
ground; and between clockspring C218-9, circuit RR101 (YE/GN), harness side and ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR101 (VT/BN) or circuit RR101 (YE/GN). Go to H56.
H15 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 RESISTANCE PID (D_ABAGR2)
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: D_ABAGR2 (Driver Air Bag #2
Resistance) Resistance PID
Is the resistance PID value between 1.7 and 4.4 ohms?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Go to H16.
H16 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 RESISTANCE PID (D_ABAGR2)
WHILE CARRYING OUT A HARNESS TEST
NOTE:
Do not remove the driver air bag module from its mounted position at
this time.
With the driver air bag in its mounted position, continue monitoring the D_ABAGR2 (Driver Air
Bag #2 Resistance) resistance PID while carrying out a harness test of the driver air bag circuits
and accessible connectors (including any inline connectors), by wiggling and flexing the wire
harness, connectors, tilting and rotating the steering wheel frequently.
Does the resistance PID value read between 1.7 and 4.4 ohms while carrying out the harness
test?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR the connector, terminals or wire harness or INSTALL a
new clockspring as needed. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 98
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to H56.
NO : If the driver air bag module loop 2 resistance PID is less than 1.7 ohms, go to H17.
If the driver air bag module loop 2 resistance PID is greater than 4.4 ohms, go to H20.
H17 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 LOW RESISTANCE FAULT
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_20_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
2293_21_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and loop 2.
Did the driver air bag module loop 2 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a low
resistance to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H46.
NO : Go to H18.
H18 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 CIRCUITS FOR LOW RESISTANCE
BETWEEN THE CLOCKSPRING AND RCM
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 99
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_20_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
2293_21_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module/clockspring disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and
loop 2.
Did the driver air bag module loop 2 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a low
resistance to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H48.
NO : Go to H19.
H19 CHECK THE RCM FOR LOW RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 56: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310a pin 5 and C310a pin 6, component side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 100
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuits CR102 (BU) and RR102 (WH). Go to H56.
NO : Go to H49.
H20 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Connect a fused jumper wire between driver air bag module loop 2 electrical connector, pin-1,
harness side and pin-2, harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_20_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
2293_21_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module loop 2 circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved on loop
2. Loop 1 will show an open circuit fault due to the driver air bag being disconnected.
Did the driver air bag module loop 2 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating an open
circuit to a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to H46.
NO : Go to H21.
H21 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
BETWEEN THE CLOCKSPRING AND RCM
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 101
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Remove the fused jumper wire from driver air bag module loop 2 electrical connector.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218
Connect a fused jumper wire between clockspring C218-2, circuit CR102 (BU), harness side and
clockspring C218-10, circuit RR102 (WH), harness side.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_20_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
2293_21_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module loop 2 circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved on loop
2. Loop 1 will show an open circuit fault due to the driver air bag being disconnected.
Did the driver air bag module loop 2 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating an open
circuit to a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to H48.
NO : Go to H22.
H22 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 CIRCUITS CR102 (BU) AND RR102
(WH) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE CLOCKSPRING AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the fused jumper wire from the clockspring connector.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 57: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310A-5, Circuit CR102 (BU) & Clockspring
C218-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310a-5, circuit CR102 (BU), harness side and clockspring
C218-2, circuit CR102 (BU), harness side; and between RCM C310a-6, circuit RR102 (WH),
harness side and clockspring C218-10, circuit RR102 (WH), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 102
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR102 (BU) or circuit RR102 (WH). Go to H56.
H23 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_21_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
2293_23_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and loop 2.
Did the driver air bag module loop 2 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a short to
ground to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H46.
NO : Go to H24.
H24 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND BETWEEN THE RCM AND CLOCKSPRING
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 103
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_21_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
2293_23_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and loop 2.
Did the driver air bag module loop 2 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a short to
ground to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H48.
NO : Go to H25.
H25 CHECK CIRCUITS CR102 (BU) AND RR102 (WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND CLOCKSPRING
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 58: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between clockspring C218-2, circuit CR102 (BU), harness side and ground;
and between clockspring C218-10, circuit RR102 (WH), harness side and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR102 (BU) or circuit RR102 (WH). Go to H56.
H26 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE RCM AND CLOCKSPRING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 104
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_21_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
2293_22_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver air bag
module/clockspring disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and
loop 2.
Did the driver air bag module loop 2 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a short to
battery to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H48.
NO : Go to H27.
H27 CHECK CIRCUITS CR102 (BU) AND RR102 (WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE RCM AND CLOCKSPRING
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 105
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 59: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between clockspring C218-2, circuit CR102 (BU), harness side and ground;
and between clockspring C218-10, circuit RR102 (WH), harness side and ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR102 (BU) or circuit RR102 (WH). Go to H56.
H28 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 RESISTANCE PID (P_ABAGR)
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: P_ABAGR (Passenger Air Bag)
Resistance PID
Is the resistance PID value between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Go to H29.
H29 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 RESISTANCE PID (P_ABAGR)
WHILE CARRYING OUT A HARNESS TEST
NOTE:
Do not remove the passenger air bag module from its mounted position at
this time.
With the passenger air bag in its mounted position, continue monitoring the P_ABAGR (Passenger
Air Bag) resistance PID while carrying out a harness test of the passenger air bag module circuits
and accessible connectors (including any inline connectors), by wiggling connectors and flexing the
wire harness.
Does the resistance PID value read between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms while carrying out the harness
test?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR the connector, terminals or wire harness as needed. Refer
to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for
schematic and connector information. Go to H56.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 106
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NO : If the passenger air bag module loop 1 resistance PID is less than 1.4 ohms, go to H30.
If the passenger air bag module loop 1 resistance PID is greater than 3.5 ohms, go to H32.
H30 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 FOR LOW RESISTANCE
FAULT
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256a
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_24_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side)
2293_25_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger air bag
module disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and loop 2.
Did the passenger air bag module loop 1 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a low
resistance to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H47.
NO : Go to H31.
H31 CHECK THE RCM FOR LOW RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 107
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 60: Checking RCM
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310a pin 3 and C310a pin 4, component side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuits CR103 (GY/BU) and RR103 (VT/GN). Go to H56.
NO : Go to H49.
H32 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256a
Connect a fused jumper wire between passenger air bag module C256a-1, circuit CR103 (GY/BU),
harness side and C256a-2, circuit RR103 (VT/GN), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_24_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side)
2293_25_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger air bag
module loop 1 circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved on loop
1. Loop 2 will show an open circuit fault due to the passenger air bag being disconnected.
Did the passenger air bag module loop 1 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating an
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 108
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
open circuit to a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to H47.
NO : Go to H33.
H33 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
BETWEEN THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 61: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310A-1, Circuit CR103 (GY/BU) & Passenger
Air Bag Module C256A-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310a-1, circuit CR103 (GY/BU), harness side and
passenger air bag module C256a-1, circuit CR103 (GY/BU), harness side; and between RCM
C310a-2, circuit RR103 (VT/GN), harness side and passenger air bag module C256a-2, circuit
RR103 (VT/GN), harness side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR103 (GY/BU) or circuit RR103 (VT/GN). Go to H56.
H34 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 1 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 109
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_25_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side)
2293_27_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger air bag
module disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and loop 2.
Did the passenger air bag module loop 1 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a
short to ground to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H47.
NO : Go to H35.
H35 CHECK CIRCUITS CR103 (GY/BU) AND RR103 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 62: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger air bag module C256a-1, circuit CR103 (GY/BU),
harness side and ground; and between passenger air bag module C256a-2, circuit RR103 (VT/GN),
harness side and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 110
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
REPAIR circuit CR103 (GY/BU) or circuit RR103 (VT/GN). Go to H56.
H36 CHECK CIRCUITS CR103 (GY/BU) AND RR103 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256a
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 63: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger air bag module C256a-1, circuit CR103 (GY/BU), harness
side and ground; and between passenger air bag module C256a-2, circuit RR103 (VT/GN), harness
side and ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR103 (GY/BU) or circuit RR103 (VT/GN). Go to H56.
H37 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 RESISTANCE PID (P_ABAGR2)
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: P_ABAGR2 (Passenger Side Air Bag
#2 Resistance) Resistance PID
Is the resistance PID value between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Go to H38.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 111
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
H38 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 RESISTANCE PID (P_ABAGR2)
WHILE CARRYING OUT A HARNESS TEST
NOTE:
Do not remove the passenger air bag module from its mounted
position at this time.
With the passenger air bag in its mounted position, continue monitoring the P_ABAGR2
(Passenger Side Air Bag #2 Resistance) resistance PID while carrying out a harness test of the
passenger air bag module circuits and accessible connectors (including any inline connectors), by
wiggling connectors and flexing the wire harness.
Does the resistance PID value read between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms while carrying out the harness
test?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR the connector, terminals or wire harness as needed. Refer
to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for
schematic and connector information. Go to H56.
NO : If the passenger air bag module loop 2 resistance PID is less than 1.4 ohms, go to H39.
If the passenger air bag module loop 2 resistance PID is greater than 3.5 ohms, go to H41.
H39 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 FOR LOW RESISTANCE
FAULT
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_16_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side)
2293_17_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger air bag
module disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and loop 2.
Did the passenger air bag module loop 2 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a low
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 112
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
resistance to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H47.
NO : Go to H40.
H40 CHECK THE RCM FOR LOW RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 64: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310a pin 13 and C310a pin 14, component side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuits CR104 (YE/GY) and RR104 (WH/BU). Go to H56.
NO : Go to H49.
H41 CHECK PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 113
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256b
Connect a fused jumper wire between passenger air bag module C256b-1, circuit CR104 (YE/GY),
harness side and C256b-2, circuit RR104 (WH/BU), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_16_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side)
2293_17_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger air bag
module loop 2 circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved on loop
2. Loop 1 will show an open circuit fault due to the passenger air bag module being disconnected.
Did the passenger air bag module loop 2 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating an
open circuit to a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to H47.
NO : Go to H42.
H42 CHECK PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
BETWEEN THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the fused jumper wire from passenger air bag module C256b.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 65: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310A-13, Circuit CR104 (YE/GY) &
Passenger Air Bag Module C256B-1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 114
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310a-13, circuit CR104 (YE/GY), harness side and
passenger air bag module C256b-1, circuit CR104 (YE/GY), harness side; and between RCM
C310a-14, circuit RR104 (WH/BU), harness side and passenger air bag module C256b-2, circuit
RR104 (WH/BU), harness side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR104 (YE/GY) or circuit RR104 (WH/BU). Go to H56.
H43 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE LOOP 2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2293_17_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side)
2293_19_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2293 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger air bag
module disconnected, open circuit faults would normally be retrieved on loop 1 and loop 2.
Did the passenger air bag module loop 2 on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a
short to ground to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to H47.
NO : Go to H44.
H44 CHECK CIRCUITS CR104 (YE/GY) AND RR104 (WH/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 115
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 66: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger air bag module C256b-1, circuit CR104 (YE/GY),
harness side and ground; and between passenger air bag module C256b-2, circuit RR104
(WH/BU), harness side and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR104 (YE/GY) or circuit RR104 (WH/BU). Go to H56.
H45 CHECK CIRCUITS CR104 (YE/GY) AND RR104 (WH/BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256b
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 67: Measuring Voltage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 116
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger air bag module C256b-1, circuit CR104 (YE/GY), harness
side and ground; and between passenger air bag module C256b-2, circuit RR104 (WH/BU),
harness side and ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to H49.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR104 (YE/GY) or circuit RR104 (WH/BU). Go to H56.
H46 CONFIRM THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components and the RCM electrical
connectors are connected before carrying out the on-demand self test. If
not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Install the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2293 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2293 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2293 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new driver air bag module. REFER to Driver Air Bag Module. Go to H56.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. Using the
fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step and CHECK for causes of the
intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and terminals of any
electrical connector that were disconnected.
For 2293_28_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_20_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to
H50.
For 2293_29_CM (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or 2293_21_CM (Air
Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H50.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 117
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
For 2293_31_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_23_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H51.
For 2293_30_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_22_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H53.
H47 CONFIRM THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components and the RCM electrical
connectors are connected before carrying out the on-demand self test. If
not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256a and C256b (if previously disconnected)
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2293 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2293 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2293 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new passenger air bag module. REFER to Passenger Air Bag Module - Edge
or Passenger Air Bag Module - MKX. Go to H56.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. Using the
fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step and CHECK for causes of the
intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and terminals of any
electrical connector that were disconnected.
For 2293_24_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or
2293_16_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to
H50.
For 2293_25_CM (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or 2293_17_CM (Air
Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H50.
For 2293_27_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or
2293_19_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H52.
For 2293_26_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or
2293_18_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H54.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 118
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
H48 CONFIRM THE CLOCKSPRING FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components and the RCM electrical
connectors are connected before carrying out the on-demand self test. If
not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Clockspring C218
Install the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2293 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2293 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2293 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new clockspring. REFER to Clockspring. Go to H56.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. Using the
fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step and CHECK for causes of the
intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and terminals of any
electrical connector that were disconnected.
For 2293_28_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_20_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to
H50.
For 2293_29_CM (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or 2293_21_CM (Air
Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H50.
For 2293_31_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_23_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H51.
For 2293_30_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_22_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H53.
H49 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components and the RCM electrical
connectors are connected before carrying out the on-demand self test. If
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 119
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
If previously removed, install the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Connect: Clockspring C218 (if previously disconnected)
Connect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256a and C256b (if previously disconnected)
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b (if previously disconnected)
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2293 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2293 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2293 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to H56.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. Using the
fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step and CHECK for causes of the
intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and terminals of any
electrical connector that were disconnected.
For 2293_28_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_20_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to
H50.
For 2293_29_CM (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or 2293_21_CM (Air
Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H50.
For 2293_31_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_23_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H51.
For 2293_30_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) or
2293_22_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side), go to H53.
For 2293_24_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or
2293_16_CM (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to
H50.
For 2293_25_CM (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or 2293_17_CM (Air
Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H50.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 120
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
For 2293_27_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or
2293_19_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H52.
For 2293_26_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) or
2293_18_CM (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side), go to H54.
H50 CHECK THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE FOR AN INTERMITTENT
LOW RESISTANCE OR OPEN CIRCUIT FAULT
If the fault PID was reported for the driver air bag module loop 1 or loop 2, monitor the following
on the scan tool:
D_ABAGR (Driver Air Bag) resistance PID.
D_ABAGR2 (Driver Air Bag #2 Resistance) resistance PID.
2293_28_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) and
2293_20_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side) ondemand fault PID.
2293_29_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) and 2293_21_OD (Air
Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side) on-demand fault PID.
If the fault PID was reported for the passenger air bag module loop 1 or loop 2, monitor the
following on the scan tool:
P_ABAGR (Passenger Air Bag) resistance PID.
P_ABAGR2 (Passenger Side Air Bag #2 Resistance) resistance PID.
2293_24_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side)
and 2293_16_OD (Air Bag Inflator Circuit Resistance Low - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger
Side) on-demand fault PID.
2293_25_OD (Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side) and 2293_17_OD
(Air Bag Circuit Open - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side) on-demand fault PID.
NOTE:
A resistance PID that reads between 0.9 and 1.7 ohms for driver air
bag and between 0.9 and 1.4 ohms for passenger air bag or between
4.4 and 5 ohms for driver air bag or between 3.5 and 5 ohms for the
passenger air bag may or may not set an on-demand DTC yet
indicates a strong potential of an intermittent fault condition. Make
sure to thoroughly check wire harness(es), connectors and terminals
as they are the likely source of the fault condition.
NOTE:
Do not remove the driver or passenger air bag module from its
mounted position at this time.
With the driver or passenger air bag in its mounted position, attempt to recreate the fault by
wiggling connectors (including any inline connectors), and flexing the wire harness, tilting and
rotating the steering wheel frequently.
Does any driver or passenger air bag on-demand fault PID indicate a fault or is any air bag
resistance PID less than 1.7 ohms for driver air bag and less than 1.4 ohms for passenger air
bag or greater than 4.4 ohms for driver air bag and greater than 3.5 ohms for passenger air
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 121
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
bag?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
H56.
NO : Go to H55.
H51 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE CIRCUITS FOR AN INTERMITTENT
SHORT TO GROUND FAULT
Monitor the 2293_23_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side) and
2293_31_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) on-demand fault
PIDs.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When monitoring fault PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up to 2 seconds
for the scan tool display to update.
NOTE:
Do not remove the driver air bag module from its mounted position at
this time.
With the driver air bag in its mounted position, attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling connectors
(including any inline connectors) and flexing the wire harness, tilting and rotating the steering
wheel frequently.
Does any RCM on-demand B2293 fault PID indicate a fault is present?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
H56.
NO : Go to H55.
H52 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE CIRCUITS FOR AN INTERMITTENT
SHORT TO GROUND FAULT
NOTE:
Key in ON position.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When monitoring fault PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up to 2 seconds
for the scan tool display to update.
Monitor the 2293_27_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side)
and 2293_19_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side) ondemand fault PIDs.
NOTE:
When monitoring fault and/or resistance PIDs with the scan tool, it may
take up to 2 seconds for the scan tool display to update.
Do not remove the passenger air bag module from its mounted
position at this time.
With the passenger air bag in its mounted position, attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling
connectors (including any inline connectors) and flexing the wire harness.
Does any RCM on-demand B2293 fault PID indicate a fault is present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 122
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
H56.
NO : Go to H55.
H53 CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE CIRCUITS FOR AN INTERMITTENT
SHORT TO BATTERY FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When monitoring fault PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up to 2 seconds
for the scan tool display to update.
Monitor the 2293_30_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Driver Side) and
2293_22_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Driver Side) on-demand fault
PIDs.
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling connectors (including any inline connectors) and flexing
the wire harness, tilting and rotating the steering wheel frequently.
Does any driver air bag module short to battery fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
H56.
NO : Go to H55.
H54 CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE CIRCUITS FOR AN INTERMITTENT
SHORT TO VOLTAGE FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Air Bag Module C256
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When monitoring fault PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up to 2 seconds
for the scan tool display to update.
Monitor the 2293_26_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 1, Front Passenger Side)
and 2293_18_OD (Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery - Loop No. 2, Front Passenger Side) ondemand fault PIDs.
NOTE:
Do not remove the passenger air bag module from its mounted
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 123
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
position at this time.
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling connectors (including any inline connectors) and flexing
the wire harness.
Does any passenger air bag module short to battery fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
H56.
NO : Go to H55.
H55 CHECK THE HARNESS AND CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
If the fault PID was reported for the driver air bag:
remove the driver air bag module.
inspect connector(s) (including any inline connectors) for corrosion, loose or spread
terminals and loose or frayed wire connections at terminals.
inspect wire harness for any damage, pinched, cut or pierced wires.
If the fault PID was reported for the passenger air bag:
disconnect the passenger air bag module C256.
inspect connector(s) (including any inline connectors) for corrosion, loose or spread
terminals and loose or frayed wire connections at terminals.
inspect wire harness for any damage, pinched, cut or pierced wires.
Were any concerns found?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
H56.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
H56.
H56 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 124
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test I: DTC B2294 - Restraint System - Curtain Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) continuously monitors the driver and passenger safety canopy module
circuits (loop) for an acceptable resistance range, unacceptable voltage and shorts to ground. The RCM will set
on-demand and store DTC B2294 in memory if any of these conditions are detected to be outside of their
respectful range. If the RCM detects a fault, it will send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to
illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
As the RCM continuously monitors safety canopy module circuits for resistance, it expects a normal resistance
between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms.
If a loop resistance is between 0.9 and 1.4 or between 3.5 and 5 ohms, there exists a strong potential for an
intermittent fault, a DTC may or may not set. The RCM will also set an on-demand DTC if the loop resistance
is less than 0.9 ohm or greater than 5 ohms.
Fault PIDsa
2294_24_OD and 2294_24_CM
2294_25_OD and 2294_25_CM
2294_26_OD and 2294_26_CM
Description
Fault Trigger Condition
When the RCM measures less
A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain
than 0.9 ohm between the
Circuit Resistance Low, Passenger passenger safety canopy
Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM measures
greater than 5 ohms between
A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain
the passenger safety canopy
Circuit Open, Passenger Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain
to ground on either on the
Circuit Short to Ground, Passenger passenger safety canopy
Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 125
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2294_27_OD and 2294_27_CM
2294_28_OD and 2294_28_CM
2294_29_OD and 2294_29_CM
2294_30_OD and 2294_30_CM
2294_31_OD and 2294_31_CM
When the RCM senses a short
A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain
to voltage on either on the
Circuit Short to Battery, Passenger passenger safety canopy
Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM measures less
A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain
than 0.9 ohm between the
Circuit Resistance Low, Driver
driver safety canopy circuits,
Side
a fault will be indicated.
When the RCM measures
greater than 5 ohms between
A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain
the driver safety canopy
Circuit Open, Driver Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain
to ground on either on the
Circuit Short to Ground, Driver
driver safety canopy circuits,
Side
a fault will be indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain
to voltage on either on the
Circuit Short to Battery, Driver
driver safety canopy circuits,
Side
a fault will be indicated.
a Fault PIDs that end in OD indicate an on-demand status and are associated with on-demand DTC B2294. Fault
PIDs that end in CM indicate continuous memory status and are associated with continuous DTC B2294.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Safety canopy module
RCM
PINPOINT TEST I: DTC B2294 - RESTRAINT SYSTEM - CURTAIN FAULT
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 126
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
I1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2294 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2294 fault PIDs.
Do any RCM on-demand DTC B2294 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test.
Using the fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2294_28_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Driver Side), go to I2.
For 2294_29_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Driver Side), go to I2.
For 2294_30_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Driver Side), go to I9.
For 2294_31_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Battery, Driver Side), go to I11.
For 2294_24_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Passenger Side), go to I12.
For 2294_25_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Passenger Side), go to I12.
For 2294_26_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Passenger Side), go to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 127
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
I19.
For 2294_27_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Battery, Passenger Side), go to I21.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time.
Using the fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2294_28_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Driver Side),
2294_24_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Passenger Side),
2294_29_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Driver Side) or 2294_25_CM (A - B or
A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Passenger Side), go to I24.
For 2294_30_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Driver Side) or
2294_26_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Passenger Side), go to I26.
For 2294_31_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Battery, Driver Side) or
2294_27_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Battery, Passenger Side), go to I27.
I2 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE RESISTANCE PID (DCURTL1)
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DCURTL1 (Curtain Airbag Driver
Loop No.1 Resistance) Resistance PID
Is the resistance PID value between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms?
YES : Go to I23.
NO : Go to I3.
I3 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE RESISTANCE PID (DCURTL1)
WHILE CARRYING OUT A HARNESS TEST
Continue monitoring the DCURTL1 (Curtain Airbag Driver Loop No.1 Resistance) resistance PID
while carrying out a harness test of the driver safety canopy circuits and accessible connectors
(including any inline connectors) by wiggling connectors and flexing the wire harness.
Does the resistance PID value read between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms while carrying out the harness
test?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR the connector, terminals or wire harness as needed. Refer
to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for
schematic and connector information. Go to I28.
NO : If the driver safety canopy resistance PID is less than 1.4 ohm, go to I4.
If the driver safety canopy resistance PID is greater than 3.5 ohms, go to I7.
I4 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY CANOPY FOR LOW RESISTANCE FAULT
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 128
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Canopy C9018
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2294_28_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Driver Side)
2294_29_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2294 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver safety
canopy disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver safety canopy on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a low resistance to
an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to I22.
NO : Go to I5.
I5 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN DRIVER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE CIRCUITS
CR109 (BN/BU) AND RR109 (BU/GN)
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Fig. 68: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver safety canopy C9018-1, circuit CR109 (BN/BU), harness
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 129
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
side and C9018-2, circuit RR109 (BU/GN), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to I23.
NO : Go to I6.
I6 CHECK THE RCM FOR LOW RESISTANCE
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 69: Checking RCM For Low Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b pin 1, component side, and C310b pin 2, component
side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuits CR109 (BN/BU) and RR109 (BU/GN). Go to I28.
NO : Go to I23.
I7 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Canopy C9018
Connect a fused jumper wire between driver safety canopy C9018-1, circuit CR109 (BN/BU),
harness side and C9018-2, circuit RR109 (BU/GN), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 130
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2294_28_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Driver Side)
2294_29_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2294 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver safety
canopy circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver safety canopy on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating an open circuit to
a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to I22.
NO : Go to I8.
I8 CHECK CIRCUITS CR109 (BN/BU) AND RR109 (BU/GN) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE
RCM AND DRIVER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the fused jumper wire from the driver safety canopy C9018.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 70: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-1, Circuit CR109 (BN/BU) & Driver
Safety Canopy C9018-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-1, circuit CR109 (BN/BU), harness side and driver
safety canopy C9018-1, circuit CR109 (BN/BU), harness side; and between RCM C310b-2, circuit
RR109 (BU/GN), harness side and driver safety canopy C9018-2, circuit RR109 (BU/GN), harness
side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to I23.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR109 (BN/BU) or circuit RR109 (BU/GN). Go to I28.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 131
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
I9 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Canopy C9018
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2294_29_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Driver Side)
2294_30_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2294 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver safety
canopy disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver safety canopy on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a short to ground
to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to I22.
NO : Go to I10.
I10 CHECK CIRCUITS CR109 (BN/BU) AND RR109 (BU/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND DRIVER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 132
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 71: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver safety canopy C9018-1, circuit CR109 (BN/BU), harness
side and ground; and between driver safety canopy C9018-2, circuit RR109 (BU/GN), harness side
and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to I23.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR109 (BN/BU) or circuit RR109 (BU/GN). Go to I28.
I11 CHECK CIRCUITS CR109 (BN/BU) AND RR109 (BU/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE RCM AND DRIVER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Canopy C9018
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 72: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver safety canopy C9018-1, circuit CR109 (BN/BU), harness side
and ground; and between driver safety canopy C9018-2, circuit RR109 (BU/GN), harness side and
ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to I23.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:47 AM
Page 133
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
REPAIR circuit CR109 (BN/BU) or circuit RR109 (BU/GN). Go to I28.
I12 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE RESISTANCE PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCURTL1 (Curtain Airbag Passenger
Loop No.1 Resistance) Resistance PID
Is the resistance PID value between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms?
YES : Go to I23.
NO : Go to I13.
I13 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE RESISTANCE PID (PCURTL1)
WHILE CARRYING OUT A HARNESS TEST
Continue monitoring the PCURTL1 (Curtain Airbag Passenger Loop No.1 Resistance) resistance
PID while carrying out a harness test of the passenger safety canopy circuits and accessible
connectors (including any inline connectors), by wiggling connectors and flexing the wire harness.
Does the resistance PID value read between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms while carrying out the harness
test?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR the connector, terminals or wire harness as needed. Refer
to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for
schematic and connector information. Go to I28.
NO : If the passenger safety canopy resistance PID is less than 1.4 ohm, go to I14.
If the passenger safety canopy resistance PID is greater than 3.5 ohms, go to I17.
I14 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE FOR LOW RESISTANCE
FAULT
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Canopy C9019
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 134
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2294_24_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Passenger Side)
2294_25_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2294 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger safety
canopy disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger safety canopy on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a low
resistance to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to I22.
NO : Go to I15.
I15 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN PASSENGER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE
CIRCUITS CR111 (BN/WH) AND RR111 (YE/VT)
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Fig. 73: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger safety canopy module C9019-1, circuit CR111
(BN/WH), harness side and C9019-2, circuit RR111 (YE/VT), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to I23.
NO : Go to I16.
I16 CHECK THE RCM FOR LOW RESISTANCE
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 135
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 74: Checking RCM
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b pin 21, component side, and C310b pin 22,
component side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuits CR111 (BN/WH) and RR111 (YE/VT). Go to I28.
NO : Go to I23.
I17 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Canopy C9007
Connect a fused jumper wire between passenger safety canopy C9019-1, circuit CR111 (BN/WH),
harness side and C9019-3, circuit RR111 (YE/VT), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2294_24_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Passenger Side)
2294_25_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2294 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger safety
canopy circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger safety canopy on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating an open
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 136
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
circuit to a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to I22.
NO : Go to I18.
I18 CHECK CIRCUITS CR111 (BN/WH) AND RR111 (YE/VT) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE
RCM AND PASSENGER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the fused jumper wire from the passenger safety canopy C9019.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 75: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-21, Circuit CR111 (BN/WH) &
Passenger Safety Canopy Module C9019-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-21, circuit CR111 (BN/WH), harness side and
passenger safety canopy module C9019-1, circuit CR111 (BN/WH), harness side; and between
RCM C310b-22, circuit RR111 (YE/VT), harness side and passenger safety canopy module C90192, circuit RR111 (YE/VT), harness side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to I23.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR111 (BN/WH) or circuit RR111 (YE/VT). Go to I28.
I19 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 137
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Canopy C9019
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2294_25_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Passenger Side)
2294_26_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2294 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger safety
canopy disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger safety canopy on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a short to
ground to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to I22.
NO : Go to I20.
I20 CHECK CIRCUITS CR111 (BN/WH) AND RR111 (YE/VT) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 76: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger safety canopy C9019-1, circuit CR111 (BN/WH),
harness side and ground; and between passenger safety canopy C9019-2, circuit RR111 (YE/VT),
harness side and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 138
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to I23.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR111 (BN/WH) or circuit RR111 (YE/VT). Go to I28.
I21 CHECK CIRCUITS CR111 (BN/WH) AND RR111 (YE/VT) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER SAFETY CANOPY MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Canopy C9019
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 77: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger safety canopy C9019-1, circuit CR111 (BN/WH), harness
side and ground; and between passenger safety canopy C9019-2, circuit RR111 (YE/VT), harness
side and ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to I23.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR111 (BN/WH) or circuit RR111 (YE/VT). Refer to appropriate SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector
information. Go to I28.
I22 CONFIRM THE SAFETY CANOPY MODULE FAULT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 139
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Affected Safety Canopy C9018 (Driver) C9019 (Passenger)
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2294 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2294 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2294 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new driver or passenger safety canopy. REFER to Safety Canopy Module. Go
to I28.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. Using the
fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step and CHECK for causes of the
intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and terminals of any
electrical connector that were disconnected.
For 2294_28_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Driver Side),
2294_24_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Passenger Side),
2294_29_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Driver Side) or 2294_25_CM (A - B or
A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Passenger Side), go to I24.
For 2294_30_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Driver Side) or
2294_26_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Passenger Side), go to I26.
For 2294_31_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Battery, Driver Side) or
2294_27_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Battery, Passenger Side), go to I27.
I23 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 140
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
If previously directed to disconnect any SRS component(s):
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect all previously disconnected restraint system component(s), including RCM C310a
and C310b.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2294 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2294 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2294 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to I28.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. Using the
fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step and CHECK for causes of the
intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and terminals of any
electrical connector that were disconnected.
For 2294_28_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Driver Side),
2294_24_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Resistance Low, Passenger Side),
2294_29_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Driver Side) or 2294_25_CM (A - B or
A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Open, Passenger Side), go to I24.
For 2294_30_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Driver Side) or
2294_26_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Passenger Side), go to I26.
For 2294_31_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Battery, Driver Side) or
2294_27_CM (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Battery, Passenger Side), go to I27.
I24 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT SAFETY CANOPY LOW RESISTANCE OR OPEN
CIRCUIT FAULT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2294 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2294 fault PIDs.
If the fault PID was reported for the driver safety canopy, monitor the DCURTL1 (Curtain Airbag
Driver Loop No.1 Resistance) resistance PID on the scan tool.
If the fault PID was reported for the passenger safety canopy, monitor the PCURTL1 (Curtain
Airbag Passenger Loop No.1 Resistance) resistance PID on the scan tool.
NOTE:
A resistance PID that reads between 0.9 and 1.4 ohms or between 3.5
and 5 ohms may or may not set an on-demand DTC yet indicates a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 141
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
strong potential of an intermittent fault condition. Make sure to
thoroughly check wire harness(es), connectors and terminals as they
are the likely source of the fault condition.
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling connectors (including any inline connectors) and flexing
the wire harness.
Does any RCM on-demand B2294 fault PID indicate a fault is present or is any safety canopy
resistance PID less than 1.4 ohms or greater than 3.5 ohms?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
I28.
NO : Go to I25.
I25 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect the affected safety canopy module C9006 (driver) or C9007 (passenger):
inspect connector(s) (including any inline connectors) for corrosion, loose or spread
terminals and loose or frayed wire connections at terminals.
inspect wire harness for any damage, pinched, cut or pierced wires.
Were any concerns found?
YES : REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article,
Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to I28.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
I28.
I26 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT SAFETY CANOPY MODULE SHORT TO GROUND
FAULT
NOTE:
When monitoring fault and/or resistance PIDs with the scan tool, up to a 2second delay for the scan tool display to update should be expected.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
If the fault PID was reported for the driver safety canopy, monitor the 2294_30_OD (A - B or A - C
Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Driver Side) fault PID on the scan tool.
If the fault PID was reported for the passenger safety canopy, monitor the 2294_26_OD (A - B or
A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Ground, Passenger Side) fault PID on the scan tool.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When monitoring fault PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up to a 2-second
delay for the scan tool display to update.
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling connectors (including any inline connectors) and flexing
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 142
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
the wire harness.
Does any safety canopy on-demand fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
I28.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
I28.
I27 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT SAFETY CANOPY MODULE SHORT TO BATTERY
FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
If the fault PID was reported for the driver safety canopy, disconnect the driver safety canopy
module C9018.
If the fault PID was reported for the passenger safety canopy, disconnect the passenger safety
canopy module C9019.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When monitoring fault PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up to a 2-second
delay for the scan tool display to update.
Monitor the 2294_31_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Battery, Driver Side) or
2294_27_OD (A - B or A - C Pillar Curtain Circuit Short to Battery, Passenger Side) fault PIDs on
the scan tool.
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling connectors (including any inline connectors) and flexing
the wire harness.
Does any safety canopy on-demand fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
I28.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
I28.
I28 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 143
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test J: DTC B2295 - Restraint System - Side Air Bag Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
A seat side air bag module provides protection of the thorax area (between the neck and abdomen) of the body,
working in conjunction with the head protection provided by a safety canopy module. Refer to Air Bag and
Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
The restraints control module (RCM) continuously monitors the driver and passenger side air bag module
circuits (loop) for an acceptable resistance range, unacceptable voltage and shorts to ground. The RCM will set
on-demand and store DTC B2295 in memory if any of these conditions are detected to be outside of their
respectful range. If the RCM detects a fault, it will send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to
illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
As the RCM continuously monitors side air bag module circuits for resistance, it expects a normal resistance
between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms.
If a loop resistance is between 0.9 and 1.4 or between 3.5 and 5 ohms, there exists a strong potential for an
intermittent fault, a DTC may or may not set. The RCM will also set an on-demand DTC if the loop resistance
is less than 0.9 ohm or greater than 5 ohms.
Fault PIDsa
2295_24_OD and 2295_24_CM
Description
Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance
Low, Front Passenger Side
Fault Trigger Condition
When the RCM measures less
than 0.9 ohm between the
passenger side air bag module
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM measures
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 144
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2295_25_OD and 2295_25_CM
2295_26_OD and 2295_26_CM
2295_27_OD and 2295_27_CM
2295_28_OD and 2295_28_CM
2295_29_OD and 2295_29_CM
2295_30_OD and 2295_30_CM
2295_31_OD and 2295_31_CM
greater than 5 ohms between
Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front the passenger side air bag
Passenger Side
module circuits, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
to ground on either of the
Side Air Bag Circuit Short to
passenger side air bag module
Ground, Front Passenger Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
to voltage on either of the
Side Air Bag Circuit Short to
passenger side air bag module
Battery, Front Passenger Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM measures less
than 0.9 ohm between the
Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance
driver side air bag module
Low, Front Driver Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM measures
greater than 5 ohms between
Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front
the driver side air bag module
Driver Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
to ground on either on the
Side Air Bag Circuit Short to
driver side air bag module
Ground, Front Driver Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a short
to voltage on either on the
Side Air Bag Circuit Short to
driver side air bag module
Battery, Front Driver Side
circuits, a fault will be
indicated.
a Fault PIDs that end in OD indicate an on-demand status and are associated with on-demand DTC B2295. Fault
PIDs that end in CM indicate continuous memory status and are associated with continuous DTC B2295.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Side air bag module
RCM
PINPOINT TEST J: DTC B2295 - RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SIDE AIR BAG FAULT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 145
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
J1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2295 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2295 fault PIDs.
Do any RCM on-demand DTC B2295 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test.
Using the on-demand fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2295_28_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side), go to J2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 146
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
For 2295_29_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Driver Side), go to J2.
For 2295_30_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side), go to J9.
For 2295_31_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side), go to J11.
For 2295_24_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Passenger Side), go to J12.
For 2295_25_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side), go to J12.
For 2295_26_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side), go to J19.
For 2295_27_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side), go to J21.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time.
Using the fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2295_28_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side), 2295_24_CM (Side
Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Passenger Side), 2295_29_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Open,
Front Driver Side) or 2295_25_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side), go to J24.
For 2295_30_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side) or 2295_26_CM (Side
Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side), go to J26.
For 2295_31_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side) or 2295_27_CM (Side
Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side), go to J27.
J2 CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RESISTANCE PID (DS_AB)
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DS_AB (Driver Side Impact Air Bag
Resistance) Resistance PID
Is the resistance PID value between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms?
YES : Go to J23.
NO : Go to J3.
J3 CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG RESISTANCE PID (DS_AB) WHILE CARRYING
OUT A HARNESS TEST
Continue monitoring the DS_AB (Driver Side Impact Air Bag Resistance) resistance PID while
carrying out a harness test of the driver side air bag circuits and accessible connectors (including
any inline connectors) by wiggling connectors and flexing the wire harness.
Does the resistance PID value read between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms while carrying out the harness
test?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 147
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR the connector, terminals or wire harness as needed. Refer
to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for
schematic and connector information. Go to J28.
NO : If the driver side air bag resistance PID is less than 1.4 ohms, go to J4.
If the driver side air bag resistance PID is greater than 3.5 ohms, go to J7.
J4 CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FOR LOW RESISTANCE FAULT
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Side Air Bag C328
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2295_28_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side)
2295_29_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2295 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver side air
bag disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver side air bag on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a low resistance to
an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to J22.
NO : Go to J5.
J5 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE CIRCUITS CR105
(GN/BU) AND RR105 (GY/YE)
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 148
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 78: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver side air bag C328-1, circuit CR105 (GN/BU), harness side
and C328-2, circuit RR105 (GY/YE), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to J22.
NO : Go to J6.
J6 CHECK THE RCM FOR LOW RESISTANCE
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 79: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B Pin 3, Component Side, & C310B Pin 4
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b pin 3, component side, and C310b pin 4, component
side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuits CR105 (GN/BU) and RR105 (GY/YE). Go to J25.
NO : Go to J23.
J7 CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 149
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Side Air Bag Module C328
Connect a fused jumper wire between driver side air bag C328-1, circuit CR110 (GN/BN), harness
side and C328-2, circuit RR110 (GY/OG), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2295_28_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side)
2295_29_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2295 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver side air
bag module circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver side air bag on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating an open circuit to a
low resistance fault?
YES : Go to J22.
NO : Go to J8.
J8 CHECK CIRCUITS CR105 (GN/BU) AND RR105 (GY/YE) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE
RCM AND DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the fused jumper wire from the driver side air bag C328.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 80: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-3 & C328-1, Circuit CR110 (GN/BN) &
CR105 (GN/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 150
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-3, circuit CR110 (GN/BN), harness side and driver
side air bag C328-1, circuit CR105 (GN/BU), harness side; and between RCM C310b-4, circuit
RR105 (GY/YE), harness side and driver side air bag C328-2, circuit RR105 (GY/YE), harness
side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to J23.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR105 (GN/BU) or circuit RR105 (GY/YE). Go to J28.
J9 CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Side Air Bag Module C328
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2295_29_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Driver Side)
2295_30_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2295 on-demand fault PIDs with the driver side air
bag module disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver side air bag on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a short to ground to
an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to J22.
NO : Go to J10.
J10 CHECK CIRCUITS CR105 (GN/BU) AND RR105 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 151
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 81: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver side air bag C328-1, circuit CR105 (GN/BU), harness side
and ground; and between driver side air bag C328-2, circuit RR105 (GY/YE), harness side and
ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to J23.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR105 (GN/BU) or circuit RR105 (GY/YE). Go to J28.
J11 CHECK CIRCUITS CR105 (GN/BU) AND RR105 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE RCM AND DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 82: Measuring Voltage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 152
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver side air bag C328-1, circuit CR105 (GN/BU), harness side and
ground; and between driver side air bag C328-2, circuit RR105 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to J23.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR105 (GN/BU) or circuit RR105 (GY/YE). Go to J28.
J12 CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RESISTANCE PID (PS_AB)
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PS_AB (Passenger Side Impact Air
Bag Resistance) Resistance PID
Is the resistance PID value between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms?
YES : Go to J23.
NO : Go to J13.
J13 CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG RESISTANCE PID (PS_AB) WHILE
CARRYING OUT A HARNESS TEST
Continue monitoring the PS_AB (Passenger Side Impact Air Bag Resistance) resistance PID while
carrying out a harness test of the passenger side air bag circuits and accessible connectors
(including any inline connectors), by wiggling connectors and flexing the wire harness.
Does the resistance PID value read between 1.4 and 3.5 ohms while carrying out the harness
test?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR the connector, terminals or wire harness as needed. Refer
to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for
schematic and connector information. Go to J28.
NO : If the passenger side air bag resistance PID is less than 1.4 ohms, go to J14.
If the passenger side air bag resistance PID is greater than 3.5 ohms, go to J17.
J14 CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FOR LOW RESISTANCE FAULT
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 153
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Passenger Side Air Bag C327
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2295_24_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Passenger Side)
2295_25_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2295 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger side air
bag module disconnected, an open circuit faults would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger side air bag on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a low resistance
to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to J22.
NO : Go to J15.
J15 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE CIRCUITS
CR106 (VT/GY) AND RR106 (YE/OG)
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Fig. 83: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger side air bag C327-1, circuit CR106 (VT/GY), harness
side and C327-2, circuit RR106 (YE/OG), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to J23.
NO : Go to J16.
J16 CHECK THE RCM FOR LOW RESISTANCE
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 154
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 84: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B Pin 5, Component Side, & C310B Pin 6
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b pin 5, component side, and C310b pin 6, component
side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuits CR106 (VT/GY) and RR106 (YE/OG). Go to J28.
NO : Go to J23.
J17 CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Side Air Bag C327
Connect a fused jumper wire between passenger side air bag C327-1, circuit CR106 (VT/GY),
harness side and C327-2, circuit RR106 (YE/OG), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2295_24_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Passenger Side)
2295_25_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2295 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger side air
bag circuits shorted together, a low resistance fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger side air bag on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating an open circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 155
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
to a low resistance fault?
YES : Go to J22.
NO : Go to J18.
J18 CHECK CIRCUITS CR106 (VT/GY) AND RR106 (YE/OG) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE
RCM AND PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the fused jumper wire from the passenger side air bag C327.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 85: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-5, Circuit CR106 (VT/GY) & Passenger
Side Air Bag Module C327-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-5, circuit CR106 (VT/GY), harness side and
passenger side air bag module C327-1, circuit CR106 (VT/GY), harness side; and between RCM
C310b-6, circuit RR106 (YE/OG), harness side and passenger side air bag module C327-2, circuit
RR106 (YE/OG), harness side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to J23.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR106 (VT/GY) or circuit RR106 (YE/OG). Go to J28.
J19 CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Side Air Bag Module C327
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 156
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
the Following Fault PIDs
2295_25_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side)
2295_26_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side)
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing DTC B2295 on-demand fault PIDs with the passenger side air
bag module disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger side air bag on-demand fault PIDs change from indicating a short to
ground to an open circuit fault?
YES : Go to J22.
NO : Go to J20.
J20 CHECK CIRCUITS CR106 (VT/GY) AND RR106 (YE/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 86: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger side air bag C327-1, circuit CR106 (VT/GY), harness
side and ground; and between passenger side air bag C327-2, circuit RR106 (YE/OG), harness side
and ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to J23.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 157
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
REPAIR circuit CR106 (VT/GY) or circuit RR106 (YE/OG). Go to J28.
J21 CHECK CIRCUITS CR106 (VT/GY) AND RR106 (YE/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 87: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger side air bag C327-1, circuit CR106 (VT/GY), harness side
and ground; and between passenger side air bag C327-2, circuit RR106 (YE/OG), harness side and
ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to J23.
NO : Due to the shorting bar feature in the RCM electrical connector, the fault can exist in either
circuit. Do not remove or defeat the shorting bar.
REPAIR circuit CR106 (VT/GY) or circuit RR106 (YE/OG). Go to J28.
J22 CONFIRM THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 158
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Repowering.
Connect: Affected Side Air Bag C328 (Driver) C3327 (Passenger)
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2295 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2295 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2295 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : REMOVE and INSPECT the seat side air bag module jumper harness, connector terminals
for damage. REFER to Side Air Bag Module. If a concern is found, REPAIR or INSTALL a new
seat jumper harness. Go to J28.
If a concern was not found, INSTALL a new driver or passenger side air bag module. Go to J28.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. Using the
fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step and CHECK for causes of the
intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and terminals of any
electrical connector that were disconnected.
For 2295_28_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side), 2295_24_CM (Side
Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Passenger Side), 2295_29_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Open,
Front Driver Side) or 2295_25_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side), go to J24.
For 2295_30_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side) or 2295_26_CM (Side
Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side), go to J26.
For 2295_31_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side) or 2295_27_CM (Side
Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side), go to J27.
J23 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
If previously directed to disconnect any SRS component(s):
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect all previously disconnected restraint system component(s), including RCM C310a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 159
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
and C310b.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2295 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2295 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2295 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to J28.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. Using the
fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step and CHECK for causes of the
intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and terminals of any
electrical connector that were disconnected.
For 2295_28_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Driver Side), 2295_24_CM (Side
Air Bag Circuit Resistance Low, Front Passenger Side), 2295_29_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Open,
Front Driver Side) or 2295_25_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Open, Front Passenger Side), go to J24.
For 2295_30_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side) or 2295_26_CM (Side
Air Bag Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side), go to J26.
For 2295_31_CM (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side) or 2295_27_CM (Side
Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side), go to J27.
J24 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LOW RESISTANCE OR
OPEN CIRCUIT FAULT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2295 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2295 fault PIDs.
If the fault PID was reported for the driver side air bag module, monitor the DS_AB (Driver Side
Impact Air Bag Resistance) resistance PID on the scan tool.
If the fault PID was reported for the passenger side air bag, monitor the PS_AB (Passenger Side
Impact Air Bag Resistance) resistance PID on the scan tool.
NOTE:
A resistance PID that reads between 0.9 and 1.4 ohms or between 3.5
and 5 ohms may or may not set an on-demand DTC yet indicates a
strong potential of an intermittent fault condition. Make sure to
thoroughly check wire harness(es), connectors and terminals as they
are the likely source of the fault condition.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 160
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling connectors (including any inline connectors) and flexing
the wire harness.
Does any side air bag on-demand fault PID indicate a fault is present or is the side air bag
resistance PID less than 1.4 ohms or greater than 3.5 ohms?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
J28.
NO : Go to J25.
J25 CHECK THE HARNESS AND CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect the affected side air bag C328 (driver) C327 (passenger):
inspect connector(s) (including any inline connectors) for corrosion, loose or spread
terminals and loose or frayed wire connections at terminals.
inspect wire harness for any damage, pinched, cut or pierced wires.
Were any concerns found?
YES : REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article,
Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to J28.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
J28.
J26 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE SHORT TO GROUND
FAULT
If the fault PID was reported for the driver side air bag module, monitor the driver side air bag short
to ground on-demand fault PID 2295_30_OD on the scan tool.
If the fault PID was reported for the passenger side air bag, monitor the passenger side air bag short
to ground on-demand fault PID 2295_26_OD on the scan tool.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When monitoring fault PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up to 2 seconds
for the scan tool display to update.
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling connectors (including any inline connectors) and flexing
the wire harness.
Does any RCM on-demand B2295 fault PID indicate a fault is present?
YES : REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article,
Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to J28.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
J28.
J27 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT SIDE AIR BAG SHORT TO VOLTAGE FAULT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 161
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Affected Safety Canopy Module C328 (Driver) C327 (Passenger)
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When monitoring fault PIDs with the scan tool, it may take up to 2 seconds
for the scan tool display to update.
Monitor the 2295_31_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side) or
2295_27_OD (Side Air Bag Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side) fault PIDs on the scan
tool.
Attempt to recreate the fault by wiggling connectors (including any inline connectors) and flexing
the wire harness.
Does any RCM on-demand B2295 fault PID indicate a fault is present?
YES : DEPOWER the SRS and REPAIR as necessary. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAMS article, Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information. Go to
J28.
NO : The fault is not present and cannot be recreated at this time. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
J28.
J28 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test K: DTC B2296 - Restraint System - Impact Sensor Fault
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 162
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) monitors all of the impact sensor circuits for faults. If the RCM detects
one of the following faults on any of the impact sensor circuits, it will store DTC B2296 in memory and send a
message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
Fault PIDsa
2296_3_OD and
2296_3_CM
2296_5_OD and
2296_5_CM
2296_6_OD and
2296_6_CM
2296_7_OD and
2296_7_CM
2296_8_OD and
2296_8_CM
2296_9_OD and
2296_9_CM
Description
Fault Trigger Condition
When the RCM senses a
short to battery on the
Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short
driver/center front impact
to Battery
sensor circuits, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor
battery on sensor) with the
Communication Fault
driver/center front impact
sensor, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a
short to battery on the
Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery,
passenger second row side
Row No.2 Passenger Side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM senses a
short to ground on the
Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground,
passenger second row side
Row No.2 Passenger Side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Row
battery on sensor) with the
No.2 Passenger Side
passenger second row side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM senses a
short to battery on the
Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery,
driver second row side
Row No.2 Driver Side
impact sensor circuits, a
fault will be indicated.
When the RCM senses a
short to ground on the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 163
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2296_10_OD and
2296_10_CM
2296_11_OD and
2296_11_CM
2296_12_OD and
2296_12_CM
2296_13_OD and
2296_13_CM
2296_14_OD and
2296_14_CM
2296_15_OD and
2296_15_CM
2296_16_OD and
2296_16_CM
2296_17_OD and
2296_17_CM
driver second row side
impact sensor circuits, a
fault will be indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Row
battery on sensor) with the
No.2 Driver Side
driver second row side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM senses a
short to battery on the
Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery,
passenger first row side
Front Passenger Side
impact sensor circuits, a
fault will be indicated.
When the RCM senses a
short to ground on the
Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground,
passenger first row side
Front Passenger Side
impact sensor circuits, a
fault will be indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Front
battery on sensor) with the
Passenger Side
passenger first row side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM senses a
short to battery on the
Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery,
driver first row side impact
Front Driver Side
sensor circuits, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM senses a
short to ground on the
Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground,
driver first row side impact
Front Driver Side
sensor circuits, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Front
battery on sensor) with the
Driver Side
driver first row side impact
sensor, a fault will be
indicated.
Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground,
Row No.2 Driver Side
When the RCM senses a
internal failure with the
2296_18_OD and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 164
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2296_18_CM
2296_19_OD and
2296_19_CM
2296_24_OD and
2296_24_CM
2296_25_OD and
2296_25_CM
2296_26_OD and
2296_26_CM
2296_27_OD and
2296_27_CM
2296_28_OD and
2296_28_CM
2296_29_OD and
2296_29_CM
driver/center front impact
Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor Internal Fault sensor, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor
battery on sensor) with the
Mount/Communication Fault
driver/center front impact
sensor, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a
internal failure with the
Side Crash Sensor 2 Internal Fault, Passenger
passenger second row side
Side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Side Crash Sensor Mount or Communication
battery on sensor) with the
Fault, Row No. 2 Passenger Side
passenger second row side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM senses a
internal failure with the
Side Crash Sensor 2 Internal Fault, Driver Side driver second row side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Side Crash Sensor Mount or Communication
battery on sensor) with the
Fault, Row No. 2 Driver Side
driver second row side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM senses a
internal failure with the
Side Crash Sensor Internal Fault, Front
passenger first row side
Passenger Side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Side Crash Sensor Mount or Communication
battery on sensor) with the
Fault, Front Passenger Side
passenger first row side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 165
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2296_30_OD and
2296_30_CM
2296_31_OD and
2296_31_CM
2296_55_OD and
2296_55_CM
2296_56_OD and
2296_56_CM
2296_57_OD and
2296_57_CM
2296_58_OD and
2296_58_CM
2296_59_OD and
2296_59_CM
When the RCM senses a
internal failure with the
Side Crash Sensor Internal Fault, Front Driver
driver first row side impact
Side
sensor, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Side Crash Sensor Mount or Communication
battery on sensor) with the
Fault, Front Driver Side
driver side first row side
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Passenger Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short to
battery on sensor) with the
Battery
passenger front impact
sensor, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Passenger Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short to
battery on sensor) with the
Ground
passenger front impact
sensor, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Passenger Front Crash Sensor Communication
battery on sensor) with the
Fault
passenger front impact
sensor, a fault will be
indicated.
When the RCM senses a
internal failure with the
Passenger Front Crash Sensor Internal Fault
with the passenger front
impact sensor, a fault will
be indicated.
When the RCM is unable
to communicate (circuit
open, short to ground or
Passenger Front Crash Sensor
battery on sensor) with the
Mount/Communication Fault
driver/center front impact
sensor, a fault will be
indicated.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 166
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
a Fault PIDs that end in OD indicate an on-demand status and are associated with on-demand DTC B2296. Fault
PIDs that end in CM indicate continuous memory status and are associated with continuous DTC B2296.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Impact sensor
Incorrect sensor mounting
RCM
PINPOINT TEST K: DTC B2296 - RESTRAINT SYSTEM - IMPACT SENSOR FAULT
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Do not probe any impact sensor. The impact sensor cannot be tested using a
multi-meter.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
K1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2296 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2296 fault PIDs.
Do any RCM on-demand DTC B2296 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 167
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test.
Using the fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
For 2296_30_OD (Side Crash Sensor Internal Fault, Front Driver Side), INSTALL a new first row
driver side impact sensor. REFER to Side Impact Sensor - B-Pillar. Go to K34.
For 2296_28_OD (Side Crash Sensor Internal Fault, Front Passenger Side), INSTALL a new first
row passenger side impact sensor. REFER to Side Impact Sensor - B-Pillar. Go to K34.
For 2296_26_OD (Side Crash Sensor 2 Internal Fault, Driver side), INSTALL a new second row
driver side impact sensor. REFER to Side Impact Sensor - C-Pillar. Go to K34.
For second row passenger side impact sensor with an internal fault (2296_24_OD (Side Crash
Sensor 2 Internal Fault, Passenger side), INSTALL a new second row passenger side impact
sensor. REFER to Side Impact Sensor - C-Pillar. Go to K34.
For 2296_18_OD (Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor Internal Fault), INSTALL a new driver/center
front impact severity sensor. REFER to Front Impact Severity Sensor. Go to K34.
For 2296_58_OD (Passenger Front Crash Sensor Internal Fault), INSTALL a new passenger front
impact severity sensor. REFER to Front Impact Severity Sensor. Go to K34.
For 2296_17_OD (Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Front Driver Side)/2296_31_OD (Side
Crash Sensor Mount or Communication Fault, Front Driver Side), go to K2.
For 2296_16_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side), go to K4.
For 2296_15_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side), go to K6.
For 2296_14_OD (Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Front Passenger Side), go to K7.
For 2296_13_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side), go to K9.
For 2296_12_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side), go to K11.
For 2296_11_OD (Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Row No.2 Driver Side), go to K12.
For 2296_10_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground, Row No.2 Driver Side), go to K14.
For 2296_9_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery, Row No.2 Driver Side), go to K16.
For 2296_8_OD (Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Row No.2 Passenger Side), go to K17.
For 2296_7_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground, Row No.2 Passenger Side), go to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 168
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
K19.
For 2296_6_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery, Row No.2 Passenger Side), go to
K21.
For 2296_5_OD (Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor Communication Fault), go to K22.
For 2296_4_OD (Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground), go to K24.
For 2296_3_OD (Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery), go to K26.
For 2296_59_OD (Passenger Front Crash Sensor Mount/Communication Fault), go to K27.
For 2296_56_OD (Passenger Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground), go to K29.
For 2296_55_OD (Passenger Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery), go to K31.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to K33.
K2 CHECK CIRCUITS VR217 (GY/YE) AND RR131 (VT/GY) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE
RCM AND FIRST ROW DRIVER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: First Row Driver Side Impact Sensor C3209
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 88: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-27 & C310B-28, Circuit VR217
(GY/YE) & RR131 (VT/GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-27, circuit VR217 (GY/YE), harness side and first
row driver side impact sensor C3209-1, circuit VR217 (GY/YE), harness side; and between RCM
C310b-28, circuit RR131 (VT/GY), harness side and first row driver side impact sensor C3209-2,
circuit RR131 (VT/GY), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 169
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to K3.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR217 (GY/YE) or circuit RR131 (VT/GY). Go to K34.
K3 CHECK THE FIRST ROW DRIVER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Install a known good first row driver side impact sensor.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2296 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2296 fault PIDs.
Were any on-demand B2296 fault PIDs for the first row driver side impact sensor indicating
a fault?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : Fault corrected. Go to K34.
K4 CHECK CIRCUITS VR217 (GY/YE) AND RR131 (VT/GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE FIRST ROW DRIVER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: First Row Driver Side Impact Sensor C3209
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 89: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between first row driver side impact sensor C3209-2, circuit RR131
(VT/GY), harness side and ground; and between C3209-1, circuit VR217 (GY/YE), harness side
and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 170
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K5.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR217 (GY/YE) or circuit RR131 (VT/GY). Go to K34.
K5 CHECK CIRCUIT VR217 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO CIRCUIT RR131 (VT/GY)
BETWEEN THE RCM AND FIRST ROW DRIVER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Fig. 90: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between first row driver side impact sensor C3209-1, circuit VR217
(GY/YE), harness side and C3209-2, circuit RR131 (VT/GY), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuits VR217 (GY/YE) and RR131 (VT/GY). Go to K34.
K6 CHECK CIRCUITS VR217 (GY/YE) AND RR131 (VT/GY) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE FIRST ROW DRIVER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: First Row Driver Side Impact Sensor C3209
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 171
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 91: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between first row driver side impact sensor C3209-2, circuit RR131 (VT/GY),
harness side and ground; and between C3209-1, circuit VR217 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR217 (GY/YE) or circuit RR131 (VT/GY). Go to K34.
K7 CHECK CIRCUITS VR218 (YE/OG) AND RR132 (BU/WH) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE
RCM AND FIRST ROW PASSENGER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: First Row Passenger Side Impact Sensor C3211
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 92: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-29 & C310B-30, Circuit VR218
(YE/OG) & RR132 (BU/WH)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-29, circuit VR218 (YE/OG), harness side and first
row passenger side impact sensor C3211-1, circuit VR218 (YE/OG), harness side; and between
RCM C310b-30, circuit RR132 (BU/WH), harness side and first row passenger side impact sensor
C3211-2, circuit RR132 (BU/WH), harness side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 172
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to K8.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR218 (YE/OG) or circuit RR132 (BU/WH). Go to K34.
K8 CHECK THE FIRST ROW PASSENGER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Install a known good first row passenger side impact sensor.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2296 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2296 fault PIDs.
Were any on-demand B2296 fault PIDs for the first row passenger side impact sensor
indicating a fault?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : Fault corrected. Go to K34.
K9 CHECK CIRCUITS VR218 (YE/OG) AND RR132 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE FIRST ROW PASSENGER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: First Row Passenger Side Impact Sensor C3211
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 93: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between first row passenger side impact sensor C3211-1, circuit VR218
(YE/OG), harness side and ground; and between C3211-2, circuit RR132 (BU/WH), harness side
and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 173
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to K10.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR218 (YE/OG) or circuit RR132 (BU/WH). Go to K34.
K10 CHECK CIRCUIT VR218 (YE/OG) FOR A SHORT TO CIRCUIT RR132 (BU/WH)
BETWEEN THE RCM AND FIRST ROW PASSENGER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Fig. 94: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between first row passenger side impact sensor C3211-1, circuit VR218
(YE/OG), harness side and C3211-2, circuit RR132 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR short between circuits VR218 (YE/OG) and RR132 (BU/WH). Go to K34.
K11 CHECK CIRCUITS VR218 (YE/OG) AND RR132 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE FIRST ROW PASSENGER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: First Row Passenger Side Impact Sensor C3211
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 174
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 95: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between first row passenger side impact sensor C3211-1, circuit VR218
(YE/OG), harness side and ground; and between C3211-2, circuit RR132 (BU/WH), harness side
and ground.
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR218 (YE/OG) or circuit RR132 (BU/WH). Go to K34.
K12 CHECK CIRCUITS VR219 (GN/WH) AND RR133 (GY/BN) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN
THE RCM AND SECOND ROW DRIVER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Second Row Driver Side Impact Sensor C3248
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 96: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-13 & C310B-14, Circuit VR219
(GN/WH) & RR135 (GY/BN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-13, circuit VR219 (GN/WH), harness side and second
row driver side impact sensor C3248-1, circuit VR219 (GN/WH), harness side; and between RCM
C310b-14, circuit RR135 (GY/BN), harness side and second row driver side impact sensor C32482, circuit RR133 (GY/BN), harness side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to K13.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR219 (GN/WH) or circuit RR133 (GY/BN). Go to K34.
K13 CHECK THE SECOND ROW DRIVER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Install a known good second row driver side impact sensor.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 175
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2296 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2296 fault PIDs.
Were any on-demand B2296 fault PIDs for the second row driver side impact sensor
indicating a fault?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : Fault corrected. Go to K34.
K14 CHECK CIRCUITS VR219 (GN/WH) AND RR133 (GY/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE SECOND ROW DRIVER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Second Row Driver Side Impact Sensor C3248
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 97: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between second row driver side impact sensor C3248-1, circuit VR219
(GN/WH), harness side and ground; and between C3248-2, circuit RR133 (GY/BN), harness side
and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K15.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR219 (GN/WH) or circuit RR133 (GY/BN). Go to K34.
K15 CHECK CIRCUIT VR219 (GN/WH) FOR A SHORT TO CIRCUIT RR133 (GY/BN)
BETWEEN THE RCM AND SECOND ROW DRIVER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 176
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 98: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between second row driver side impact sensor C3248-1, circuit VR219
(GN/WH), harness side and C3248-2, circuit RR135 (GY/BN), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuits VR219 (GN/WH) and RR133 (GY/BN). Go to K34.
K16 CHECK CIRCUITS VR219 (GN/WH) AND RR133 (GY/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE SECOND ROW DRIVER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Second Row Driver Side Impact Sensor C3248
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 99: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between second row driver side impact sensor C3248-1, circuit VR219
(GN/WH), harness side and ground; and between C3248-2, circuit RR133 (GY/BN), harness side
and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 177
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR219 (GN/WH) or circuit RR133 (GY/BN). Go to K34.
K17 CHECK CIRCUITS VR220 (VT/OG) AND RR134 (BN/BU) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE
RCM AND SECOND ROW PASSENGER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Second Row Passenger Side Impact Sensor C3249
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 100: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-15 & C310B-16, Circuit VR220
(VT/OG) & RR134 (BN/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-15, circuit VR220 (VT/OG), harness side and second
row passenger side impact sensor C3249-1, circuit VR220 (VT/OG), harness side and between
RCM C310b-16, circuit RR134 (BN/BU), harness side and second row passenger side impact
sensor C3249-2, circuit RR134 (BN/BU), harness side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to K18.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR220 (VT/OG) or circuit RR134 (BN/BU). Go to K34.
K18 CHECK THE SECOND ROW PASSENGER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Install a known good second row passenger side impact sensor.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2296 Fault PIDs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 178
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2296 fault PIDs.
Were any on-demand B2296 fault PIDs for the second row passenger side impact sensor
indicating a fault?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : Fault corrected. Go to K34.
K19 CHECK CIRCUITS VR220 (VT/OG) AND RR134 (BN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE SECOND ROW PASSENGER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Second Row Passenger Side Impact Sensor C3249
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 101: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between second row passenger side impact sensor C3249-1, circuit VR220
(VT/OG), harness side and ground; and between C3249-2, circuit RR134 (BN/BU), harness side
and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K20.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR220 (VT/OG) or circuit RR134 (BN/BU). Go to K34.
K20 CHECK CIRCUIT VR220 (VT/OG) FOR A SHORT TO CIRCUIT RR134 (BN/BU)
BETWEEN THE RCM AND SECOND ROW PASSENGER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 179
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 102: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between second row passenger side impact sensor C3249-1, circuit VR220
(VT/OG), harness side and C3249-2, circuit RR134 (BN/BU), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuits VR220 (VT/OG) and RR130 (GN/BU). Go to K34.
K21 CHECK CIRCUITS VR220 (VT/OG) AND RR134 (BN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE SECOND ROW PASSENGER SIDE IMPACT SENSOR AND RCM
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Second Row Passenger Side Impact Sensor C3249
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 103: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between second row passenger side impact sensor C3249-1, circuit VR220
(VT/OG), harness side and ground; and between C3249-2, circuit RR134 (BN/BU), harness side
and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 180
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR220 (VT/OG) or circuit RR134 (BN/BU). Go to K34.
K22 CHECK CIRCUITS VR213 (VT/GN) AND RR129 (YE/GY) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN
THE RCM AND DRIVER/CENTER FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver/Center Front Impact Severity Sensor C1465
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 104: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-19 & C310B-20, Circuit VR213
(VT/GN) & RR129 (YE/GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-19, circuit VR213 (VT/GN), harness side and
driver/center front impact severity sensor C1465-1, circuit VR213 (VT/GN), harness side; and
between RCM C310b-20, circuit RR129 (YE/GY), harness side and driver/center front impact
severity sensor C1465-2, circuit RR129 (YE/GY), harness side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to K23.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR213 (VT/GN) or circuit RR129 (YE/GY). Go to K34.
K23 CHECK THE DRIVER/CENTER FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Install a known good driver/center front impact severity sensor.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2296 Fault PIDs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 181
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2296 fault PIDs.
Were any on-demand B2296 fault PIDs for the driver/center front impact severity sensor
indicating a fault?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : Fault corrected. Go to K34.
K24 CHECK CIRCUITS VR213 (VT/GN) AND RR129 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND DRIVER/CENTER FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver/Center Front Impact Severity Sensor C1465
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 105: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver/center front impact severity sensor C1465-1, circuit VR213
(VT/GN), harness side and ground; and between driver/center front impact severity sensor C14652, circuit RR129 (YE/GY), harness side and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K25.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR213 (VT/GN) or circuit RR129 (YE/GY). Go to K34.
K25 CHECK CIRCUIT VR213 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO CIRCUIT RR129 (YE/GY)
BETWEEN THE RCM AND DRIVER/CENTER FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 182
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 106: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver/center front impact severity sensor C1465-1, circuit VR213
(VT/GN), harness side and C1465-2, circuit RR129 (YE/GY), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuits VR213 (VT/GN) and RR129 (YE/GY). Go to K34.
K26 CHECK CIRCUITS VR213 (VT/GN) AND RR129 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE RCM AND DRIVER/CENTER FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver/Center Front Impact Severity Sensor C1465
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 107: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver/center front impact severity sensor C1465-1, circuit VR213
(VT/GN), harness side and ground; and between driver/center front impact severity sensor C14652, circuit RR129 (YE/GY), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:48 AM
Page 183
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR213 (VT/GN) or circuit RR129 (YE/GY). Go to K34.
K27 CHECK CIRCUITS VR214 (WH/BU) AND RR130 (GN/BU) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN
THE RCM AND PASSENGER FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Front Impact Severity Sensor C1466
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 108: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-39 & C310B-40, Circuit VR214
(WH/BU) & RR130 (GN/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-39, circuit VR214 (WH/BU), harness side and
driver/center front impact severity sensor C1466-1, circuit VR214 (WH/BU), harness side; and
between RCM C310b-40, circuit RR130 (GN/BU), harness side and passenger front impact
severity sensor C1466-2, circuit RR130 (GN/BU), harness side.
Are resistances less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to K28.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR214 (WH/BU) or circuit RR130 (GN/BU). Go to K34.
K28 CHECK THE PASSENGER FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Install a known good passenger front impact severity sensor.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2296 Fault PIDs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 184
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2296 fault PIDs.
Were any on-demand B2296 fault PIDs for the passenger front impact severity sensor
indicating a fault?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : Fault corrected. Go to K34.
K29 CHECK CIRCUITS VR214 (WH/BU) AND RR130 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Front Impact Severity Sensor C1466
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 109: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger front impact severity sensor C1466-1, circuit VR214
(WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between passenger front impact severity sensor C1466-2,
circuit RR130 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K30.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR214 (WH/BU) or circuit RR130 (GN/BU). Go to K34.
K30 CHECK CIRCUIT VR214 (WH/BU) FOR A SHORT TO CIRCUIT RR130 (GN/BU)
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 185
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 110: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger front impact severity sensor C1466-1, circuit VR214
(WH/BU), harness side and C1466-2, circuit RR130 (GN/BU), harness side.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuits VR214 (WH/BU) and RR130 (GN/BU). Go to K34.
K31 CHECK CIRCUITS VR214 (WH/BU) AND RR130 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
BETWEEN THE RCM AND PASSENGER FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Front Impact Severity Sensor C1466
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 111: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger front impact severity sensor C1466-1, circuit VR214
(WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between passenger front impact severity sensor C1466-2,
circuit RR130 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 186
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Are voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to K32.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR214 (WH/BU) or circuit RR130 (GN/BU). Go to K34.
K32 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Install the original sensor (if known good sensor was installed in a previous step).
Connect: All Previously Disconnected SRS Components
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2296 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2296 fault PIDs.
Does the original RCM on-demand DTC B2296 fault PID indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to K34.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
K33.
K33 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2296 Fault PIDs
Refer to PID list in Normal Operation to view B2296 fault PIDs.
Do any on-demand fault DTC B2296 PIDs indicate a fault?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. The fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test.
Using the fault PIDs recorded, go to the appropriate pinpoint test step.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 187
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
For 2296_30_OD (Side Crash Sensor Internal Fault, Front Driver Side), INSTALL a new first row
driver side impact sensor. REFER to Side Impact Sensor - B-Pillar. Go to K34.
For 2296_28_OD (Side Crash Sensor Internal Fault, Front Passenger Side), INSTALL a new first
row passenger side impact sensor. REFER to Side Impact Sensor - B-Pillar. Go to K34.
For 2296_26_OD (Side Crash Sensor 2 Internal Fault, Driver side), INSTALL a new second row
driver side impact sensor. REFER to Side Impact Sensor - C-Pillar. Go to K34.
For second row passenger side impact sensor with an internal fault (2296_24_OD (Side Crash
Sensor 2 Internal Fault, Passenger side), INSTALL a new second row passenger side impact
sensor. REFER to Side Impact Sensor - C-Pillar. Go to K34.
For 2296_18_OD (Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor Internal Fault), INSTALL a new driver/center
front impact severity sensor. REFER to Front Impact Severity Sensor. Go to K34.
For 2296_58_OD (Passenger Front Crash Sensor Internal Fault), INSTALL a new passenger front
impact severity sensor. REFER to Front Impact Severity Sensor. Go to K34.
For 2296_17_OD (Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Front Driver Side)/2296_31_OD (Side
Crash Sensor Mount or Communication Fault, Front Driver Side), go to K2.
For 2296_16_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground, Front Driver Side), go to K4.
For 2296_15_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery, Front Driver Side), go to K6.
For 2296_14_OD (Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Front Passenger Side), go to K7.
For 2296_13_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground, Front Passenger Side), go to K9.
For 2296_12_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery, Front Passenger Side), go to K11.
For 2296_11_OD (Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Row No.2 Driver Side), go to K12.
For 2296_10_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground, Row No.2 Driver Side), go to K14.
For 2296_9_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery, Row No.2 Driver Side), go to K16.
For 2296_8_OD (Side Crash Sensor Communication Fault, Row No.2 Passenger Side), go to K17.
For 2296_7_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground, Row No.2 Passenger Side), go to
K19.
For 2296_6_OD (Side Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery, Row No.2 Passenger Side), go to
K21.
For 2296_5_OD (Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor Communication Fault), go to K22.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 188
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
For 2296_4_OD (Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground), go to K24.
For 2296_3_OD (Driver/Center Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery), go to K26.
For 2296_59_OD (Passenger Front Crash Sensor Mount/Communication Fault), go to K27.
For 2296_56_OD (Passenger Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Ground), go to K29.
For 2296_55_OD (Passenger Front Crash Sensor Circuit Short to Battery), go to K31.
NO : VISUALLY INSPECT the affected impact sensor and mounting surface for damage,
corrosion or dirt. INSPECT the wiring, terminals and connectors for damage, corrosion or dirt.
CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing the
wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. ACTIVATE other systems in the same wire
harness. Do not install any new SRS components at this time. SRS components should only be
installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal
or connector concerns found. Go to K34.
K34 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test L: DTC B2432 - Drivers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Circuit Open
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) checks the safety belt buckle switch circuits for faults. If the RCM detects
an open circuit fault, it will store DTC B2432 in memory and send a message to the instrument cluster (IC)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 189
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC B2432 Drivers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Circuit Open - If the RCM detects an open on the driver
safety belt buckle circuit, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Driver safety belt buckle switch
RCM
PINPOINT TEST L: DTC B2432 - DRIVERS SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT OPEN
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 190
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
L1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2432 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to L2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to L6.
L2 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3065
Connect a fused jumper wire between driver safety belt buckle switch C3065-1, circuit GD143
(BK/VT), harness side and C3065-2, circuit CR201 (BU/OG).
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing on-demand DTCs with the driver safety belt buckle switch
circuits shorted together, a short to ground fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver safety belt buckle switch on-demand DTC change from indicating B2432 to
B2434?
YES : INSTALL a new driver safety belt buckle. REFER to SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article.
Go to L7.
NO : Go to L3.
L3 CHECK CIRCUIT CR201 (BU/OG) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE RCM AND DRIVER
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 191
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Remove the fused jumper wire from the driver safety belt buckle switch connector.
Fig. 112: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-25, circuit CR201 (BU/OG), harness side and driver
safety belt buckle switch C3065-2, circuit CR201 (BU/OG), harness side.
Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to L4.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR201 (BU/OG). Go to L7.
L4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD143 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 113: Measuring Resistance Between Connector And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver safety belt buckle switch C3065-1, circuit GD143 (BK/VT),
harness side and ground.
Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to L5.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD143 (BK/VT). Go to L7.
L5 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system sensor electrical connectors and the RCM
electrical connector are connected before carrying out the on-demand self
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 192
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Driver Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3065
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2432 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to L7.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
L6.
L6 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2432 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to L2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to L7.
L7 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 193
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test M: DTC B2433 - Drivers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Circuit Short to Battery
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) checks the safety belt buckle switch circuits for faults. If the RCM detects
a short to voltage fault, it will store DTC B2433 in memory and send a message to the instrument cluster (IC)
module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC B2433 Drivers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Circuit Short to Battery - If the RCM detects a short to
battery on the driver safety belt buckle circuit, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Driver safety belt buckle switch
RCM
PINPOINT TEST M: DTC B2433 - DRIVERS SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT SHORT TO
BATTERY
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 194
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
M1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2433 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to M2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to M4.
M2 CHECK CIRCUIT CR201 (BU/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag Module C3628
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3065
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 195
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 114: Measuring Voltage Between connector And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver safety belt buckle switch C3065-2, circuit CR201 (BU/OG),
harness side and ground.
Is voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to M3.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR201 (BU/OG). Go to M5.
M3 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system sensor electrical connectors and the RCM
electrical connector are connected before carrying out the on-demand self
test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Driver Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3065
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2433 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to M5.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of any electrical connector that were disconnected. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
M4.
M4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 196
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag Module C328
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2433 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to M2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to M5.
M5 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test N: DTC B2434 - Drivers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Short to Ground
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) monitors the driver safety belt buckle switch circuits for faults. If the
RCM detects a short to ground fault, it will store DTC B2434 in memory and send a message to the instrument
cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 197
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
DTC B2434 Drivers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Circuit Short to Ground - If the RCM detects a short to
ground on the driver safety belt buckle circuit, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Driver safety belt buckle switch
RCM
PINPOINT TEST N: DTC B2434 - DRIVERS SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SHORT TO GROUND
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 198
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
to the customer.
N1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2434 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to N2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to N5.
N2 CHECK THE DRIVER SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3065
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing on-demand DTCs with the driver safety belt buckle switch
disconnected, a open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver safety belt buckle switch on-demand DTC change from indicating B2434 to
B2432?
YES : INSTALL a new driver safety belt buckle assembly. REFER to SAFETY BELT SYSTEM
article. Go to N6.
NO : Go to N3.
N3 CHECK CIRCUIT CR201 (BU/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND BETWEEN THE RCM
AND DRIVER SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 199
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 115: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver safety belt buckle switch C3065-2, circuit CR201 (BU/OG),
harness side and ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to N4.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR201 (BU/OG). Go to N6.
N4 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Connect: Driver Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3065
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2434 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to N6.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
N5.
N5 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 200
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2434 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to N2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to N6.
N6 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test O: DTC B2435 - Drivers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Resistance Out of Range
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) monitors the driver safety belt buckle switch circuits for faults. If the
RCM detects a current out of range fault, it will store DTC B2435 in memory and send a message to the
instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC B2435 Drivers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Resistance Out of Range - If the RCM detects a current out
of range between buckled and unbuckled on the driver safety belt buckle switch, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 201
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Driver safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly
RCM
PINPOINT TEST O: DTC B2435 - DRIVERS SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH RESISTANCE OUT OF
RANGE
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
O1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 202
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2435 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to O2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to O4.
O2 CHECK THE SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3065
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing on-demand DTCs with the driver safety belt buckle switch
disconnected, a open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver safety belt buckle switch on-demand DTC change from indicating B2435 to
B2432?
YES : INSTALL a new driver safety belt buckle assembly. REFER to SAFETY BELT SYSTEM
article. Go to O3.
NO : Go to O5.
O3 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Driver Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3065
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2435 retrieved?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 203
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to O5.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
O4.
O4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle switch C3065:
Inspect connector(s) (including any inline connectors) for corrosion, loose or spread
terminals and loose or frayed wire connections at terminals.
Inspect wire harness for any damage, pinched, cut or pierced wires.
Repair any concerns found. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article,
Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information.
Connect: All Previously Disconnected Component(s)/Connector(s)
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2435 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to O2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to O5.
O5 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 204
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test P: DTC B2436 - Passengers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Circuit Open
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) checks the passenger safety belt buckle switch circuits for faults. If the
RCM detects an open circuit fault, it will store DTC B2436 in memory and send a message to the instrument
cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC B2436 Passengers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Circuit Open - If the RCM detects an open on the
passenger safety belt buckle circuit, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Passenger safety belt buckle switch
RCM
PINPOINT TEST P: DTC B2436 - PASSENGERS SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT OPEN
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 205
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
P1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2436 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to P2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to P6.
P2 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3066
Connect a fused jumper wire between passenger safety belt buckle switch C3066-2, circuit CR203
(GY/VT), harness side and C3066-1, circuit GD143 (BK/VT), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 206
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing on-demand DTCs with the passenger safety belt buckle
switch circuits shorted together, a short to ground fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger safety belt buckle switch on-demand DTC change from indicating B2436 to
B2438?
YES : INSTALL a new passenger safety belt buckle assembly. REFER to SAFETY BELT
SYSTEM article. Go to P7.
NO : Go to P3.
P3 CHECK CIRCUIT CR203 (GY/VT) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE RCM AND
PASSENGER SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Remove the fused jumper wire from the passenger safety belt buckle switch C3066.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 116: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-26, circuit CR203 (GY/VT), harness side and the
passenger safety belt buckle switch C3066-2, circuit CR203 (GY/VT), harness side.
Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to P4.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR203 (GY/VT). Go to P7.
P4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD143 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 207
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 117: Measuring Resistance Between Connector And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger safety belt buckle switch C3066-2, circuit GD143
(BK/VT), harness side and ground.
Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to P5.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD143 (BK/VT). Go to P7.
P5 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system sensor electrical connectors and the RCM
electrical connector are connected before carrying out the on-demand self
test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3066
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2436 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to P7.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
P6.
P6 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 208
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2436 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to P2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to P7.
P7 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test Q: DTC B2437 - Passengers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Circuit Short to Battery
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) checks the passenger safety belt buckle switch circuits for faults. If the
RCM detects a short to voltage fault, it will store DTC B2437 in memory and send a message to the instrument
cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC B2437 Passengers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Circuit Short to Battery - If the RCM detects a short to
battery on the passenger safety belt buckle circuit, it will set this DTC.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 209
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Passenger safety belt buckle switch
RCM
PINPOINT TEST Q: DTC B2437 - PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT SHORT
TO BATTERY
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 210
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Q1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2437 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to Q2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to Q4.
Q2 CHECK CIRCUIT CR203 (GY/VT) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3066
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module C327
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C303
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 118: Measuring Voltage Between connector And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat belt buckle switch C3066-2, circuit CR203 (GY/VT),
harness side and ground.
Is voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to Q3.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR203 (GY/VT). Go to Q5.
Q3 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system sensor electrical connectors and the RCM
electrical connector are connected before carrying out the on-demand self
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 211
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Connect: Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3066
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2437 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to Q5.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
Q4.
Q4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C303
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module C327
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2437 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to Q2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to Q5.
Q5 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 212
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test R: DTC B2438 - Passengers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Short to Ground
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) monitors the passenger safety belt buckle switch circuits for faults. If the
RCM detects a short to ground fault, it will store DTC B2438 in memory and send a message to the instrument
cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC B2438 Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Switch Circuit Short to Ground - If the RCM detects a short to
ground on the passenger safety belt buckle circuit, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Passenger safety belt buckle switch
RCM
PINPOINT TEST R: DTC B2438 - PASSENGERS SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SHORT TO
GROUND
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 213
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
R1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2438 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to R2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to R5.
R2 CHECK THE PASSENGER SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 214
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3066
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing on-demand DTCs with the passenger safety belt buckle
switch disconnected, a open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger safety belt buckle switch on-demand DTC change from indicating B2438 to
B2436?
YES : INSTALL a new passenger safety belt buckle assembly. REFER to SAFETY BELT
SYSTEM article. Go to R6.
NO : Go to R3.
R3 CHECK CIRCUIT CR203 (GY/VT) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND BETWEEN THE RCM
AND PASSENGER SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 119: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat belt buckle switch C3066-2, circuit CR203
(GY/VT), harness side and ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to R4.
NO : REPAIR circuit CR203 (GY/VT). Go to R6.
R4 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 215
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Connect: Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3066
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2438 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to R6.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
R5.
R5 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2438 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to R2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to R6.
R6 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 216
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test S: DTC B2439 - Passengers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Resistance Out of Range
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) monitors the passenger safety belt buckle switch circuits for faults. If the
RCM detects a current out of range fault, it will store DTC B2439 in memory and send a message to the
instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC B2439 Passengers Seat Belt Buckle Switch Resistance Out of Range - If the RCM detects a current
out of range between buckled and unbuckled on the passenger safety belt buckle switch, it will set this
DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Passenger safety belt buckle switch
RCM
PINPOINT TEST S: DTC B2439 - PASSENGERS SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH RESISTANCE
OUT OF RANGE
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 217
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
S1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2439 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to S2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to S4.
S2 CHECK THE SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3066
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 218
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing on-demand DTCs with the passenger safety belt buckle
switch disconnected, a open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the passenger safety belt buckle switch on-demand DTC change from indicating B2439 to
B2436?
YES : INSTALL a new passenger safety belt buckle assembly. REFER to SAFETY BELT
SYSTEM article. Go to S5.
NO : Go to S3.
S3 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Switch C3066
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2439 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to S5.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
S4.
S4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle switch C3066:
Inspect connector(s) (including any inline connectors) for corrosion, loose or spread
terminals and loose or frayed wire connections at terminals.
Inspect wire harness for any damage, pinched, cut or pierced wires.
Repair any concerns found. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article,
Connector Repair Procedures for schematic and connector information.
Connect: All Previously Disconnected Component(s)/Connector(s)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 219
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC B2439 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to S2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to S5.
S5 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test T: DTC B2792 - Cross Link Between Firing Loops
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) monitors all the deployable devices for a cross link between the circuits of
another deployable device. If the RCM detects a short between the circuits of the deployable devices, it will
store DTC B2792 in memory and send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag
warning indicator.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 220
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fault PIDsa
2792_8_OD and 2792_8_CM
2792_9_OD and 2792_9_CM
2792_12_OD and 2792_12_CM
2792_13_OD and 2792_13_CM
2792_26_OD and 2792_26_CM
2792_27_OD and 2792_27_CM
2792_28_OD and 2792_28_CM
2792_29_OD and 2792_29_CM
2792_30_OD and 2792_30_CM
2792_31_OD and 2792_31_CM
Description
Fault Trigger Condition
When the RCM detects a short
A-B or A-C pillar Curtain,
between the circuits of 2
Passenger Side
deployable devices, a fault
will be indicated.
When the RCM detects a short
A-B or A-C pillar Curtain, Driver between the circuits of 2
Side
deployable devices, a fault
will be indicated.
When the RCM detects a short
between the circuits of 2
Side Airbag Passenger
deployable devices, a fault
will be indicated.
When the RCM detects a short
between the circuits of 2
Side Airbag Driver
deployable devices, a fault
will be indicated.
When the RCM detects a short
between the circuits of 2
Pretensioner Passenger
deployable devices, a fault
will be indicated.
When the RCM detects a short
between the circuits of 2
Pretensioner Driver
deployable devices, a fault
will be indicated.
When the RCM detects a short
between the circuits of 2
Airbag Passenger Front Loop #2
deployable devices, a fault
will be indicated.
When the RCM detects a short
between the circuits of 2
Airbag Passenger Front Loop #1
deployable devices, a fault
will be indicated.
When the RCM detects a short
between the circuits of 2
Airbag Driver Front Loop #2
deployable devices, a fault
will be indicated.
When the RCM detects a short
between the circuits of 2
Airbag Driver Front Loop #1
deployable devices, a fault
will be indicated.
a Fault PIDs that end in OD indicate an on-demand status and are associated with on-demand DTC B2792. Fault
PIDs that end in CM indicate continuous memory status and are associated with continuous DTC B2792.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 221
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
RCM
PINPOINT TEST T: DTC B2792 - CROSS LINK BETWEEN FIRING LOOPS
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
T1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 222
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Datalogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2792 Fault PIDs
Do any RCM on-demand B2792 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to T2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to T4.
T2 CHECK DEPLOYABLE CIRCUITS FOR A CROSS LINK FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Disconnect ALL of the affected deployable devices.
Using the following chart, measure the resistance between the circuits of the affected deployable
devices.
DEPLOYABLE DEVICES
Connector Squib/Loop
Pin
Driver air
bag module
loop 1
Driver air
bag module
loop 2
Driver air
bag
module
loop 1
electrical
connector
Driver air
bag
module
loop 1
electrical
connector
Driver air
bag
module
loop 2
electrical
connector
Driver air
bag
module
loop 2
electrical
Circuit
CR101
(VT/BN)
RR101
(YE/GN)
CR102
(BU)
RR102
(WH)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 223
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
connector
Passenger
air bag
module
loop 1
Passenger
air bag
module
loop 2
Driver side
air bag
module
(seat
harness
connector)
Passenger
side air bag
module
(seat
harness
connector)
Driver
safety
canopy
module
Passenger
safety
canopy
module
Driver
safety belt
retractor
pretensioner
Passenger
safety belt
retractor
pretensioner
CR103
(GY/BU)
RR103
(VT/GN)
C256a-1
C256a-2
CR104
(YE/GY)
RR104
(WH/BU)
C256b-1
C256b-2
CR105
(GN/BN)
RR105
(GY/YE)
C328-1
C328-2
CR106
(VT/GY)
RR106
(YE/OG)
C327-1
C327-2
CR109
(BN/BU)
RR109
(BU/GN)
C9018-1
C9018-2
CR111
(BN/WH)
RR111
(YE/VT)
C9019-1
C9019-2
CR120
(BU/OG)
RR120
(BN/GN)
C3201-2
C3201-1
CR122
(WH/OG)
RR122
(BN)
C3202-2
C3202-1
Are resistances greater than 10,000 ohms between the affected circuits?
YES : Go to T3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuits. Go to T5.
T3 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 224
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Connect: All Previously Disconnected Restraint System Component(s)
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2792 Fault PIDs
Do any RCM on-demand B2792 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to T5.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
T4.
T4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
If a cross link fault for driver air bag loop 1 or loop 2 is present continuous, remove the driver air
bag module. Refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
If a cross link fault for passenger air bag module loop 1 or loop 2 is present continuous, disconnect
the passenger air bag module C256a and C256b.
If a cross link fault for driver side air bag is present continuous, disconnect the driver side air bag
module C328.
If a cross link fault for passenger side air bag is present continuous, disconnect the passenger side
air bag module C327.
If a cross link fault for driver safety canopy module is present continuous, disconnect the driver
safety canopy module C9018.
If a cross link fault for passenger safety canopy module is present continuous, disconnect the
passenger safety canopy module C9019.
If a cross link fault for driver safety belt retractor pretensioner is present continuous, disconnect the
driver safety belt retractor pretensioner C323.
If a cross link fault for passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner is present continuous, disconnect
the passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner C303.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 225
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - RCM - View and Record
All B2792 Fault PIDs
Do any RCM on-demand B2792 fault PIDs indicate a fault?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to T2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to T5.
T5 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test U: DTC B229B - Occupant Classification System Obstruction
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is used to classify the front passenger seat occupant in the
event of a deployable impact. Refer to Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
The occupant classification system module (OCSM) monitors the 4 OCS weight sensors bolts and circuity for
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 226
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
faults. If the OCSM detects an obstruction, an upward force on the passenger seat for 60 seconds, it will store
DTC B229B in memory and send a message to the restraints control module (RCM). The RCM will store DTC
B2290 in memory and send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning
indicator.
DTC B229B Occupant Classification System Obstruction - If the OCSM detects a negative force on one
or more OCS weight sensor bolt(s) (weight sensors), it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Foreign object placed under or contacting the passenger seat
PINPOINT TEST U: DTC B229B - OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM OBSTRUCTION
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 227
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
U1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - OCSM - Retrieve and
Record Continuous Memory DTCs
Was OCSM on-demand DTC B229B retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to U2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to U4.
U2 INSPECT UNDER THE PASSENGER SEAT FOR FOREIGN OBJECTS AND WIRE
HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Position the seat and inspect under and on the sides of the seat for the presence of any foreign
objects contacting the under side and side of the passenger seat. Carry out a thorough visual
inspection of the passenger seat wire harness at or near the OCS weight sensor bolts and the related
seat wiring harness and body wiring harness for correct harness routing.
Were any problems noted?
YES : REMOVE obstruction and/or REPAIR as necessary. Go to U5.
NO : Go to U3.
U3 CONFIRM THE OCS MODULE FAULT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - OCSM - Retrieve and
Record Continuous Memory DTCs
Was OCSM on-demand DTC B229B retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new OCSM. REFER to Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Manual Seat Track or Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) - Power Seat Track.
Go to U5.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
U5.
U4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - OCSM - Retrieve and
Record Continuous Memory DTCs
Was OCSM on-demand DTC B229B retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to U2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:49 AM
Page 228
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to U5.
U5 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test V: DTC C1946 - Front Driver's Seat Track Position Switch Circuit Open
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) monitors the driver seat track position sensor circuits. If the RCM detects
an open circuit, it will store DTC C1946 in memory and send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module
to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC C1946 Front Driver's Seat Track Position Switch Circuit Open - If the RCM detects a open on the
driver seat track position sensor circuit, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Driver seat track position sensor
RCM
PINPOINT TEST V: DTC C1946 - FRONT DRIVER'S SEAT TRACK POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 229
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
OPEN
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
V1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1946 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to V2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 230
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to V6.
V2 CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Track Position Sensor C356
Connect a fused jumper wire between driver seat track position sensor C356-2, circuit VR215
(YE/VT), harness side and C356-1, circuit GD143 (BK/VT), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing on-demand DTCs with the driver seat track position sensor
circuits shorted together, a short to ground fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver seat track position switch on-demand DTC change from indicating C1946 to
C1947?
YES : INSTALL a new driver seat track position sensor. REFER to Seat Position Sensor. Go to
V7.
NO : Go to V3.
V3 CHECK CIRCUIT VR215 (YE/VT) FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE RCM AND DRIVER
SEAT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Remover the fused jumper wire from the driver seat track position sensor C356.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 231
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 120: Measuring Resistance Between RCM C310B-23, Circuit VR215 (YE/VT) & Driver
Seat Track Position Sensor C356-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between RCM C310b-23, circuit VR215 (YE/VT), harness side and driver
seat track position sensor C356-2, circuit VR215 (YE/VT).
Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to V4.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR215 (YE/VT). Go to V7.
V4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD143 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN TO GROUND
Fig. 121: Measuring Resistance Between Driver Seat Track Position Sensor C356-1, Circuit
GD143 (BK/VT) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat track position sensor C356-1, circuit GD143 (BK/VT)
and ground.
Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
YES : Go to V5.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD143 (BK/VT). Go to V7.
V5 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Driver Seat Track Position Sensor C356
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 232
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1946 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to V7.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
V6.
V6 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323
Disconnect: Driver Side Air Bag Module C328
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1946 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to V2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to V7.
V7 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 233
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test W: DTC C1947 - Front Driver's Seat Track Position Switch Circuit Short to Ground
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) monitors the driver seat track position sensor circuits. If the RCM detects
a short to ground, it will store DTC C1947 in memory and send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module
to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC C1947 Front Driver's Seat Track Position Switch Circuit Short to Ground - If the RCM detects a
short to ground on the driver seat track position sensor circuit, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Driver seat track position sensor
RCM
PINPOINT TEST W: DTC C1947 - FRONT DRIVER'S SEAT TRACK POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
SHORT TO GROUND
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 234
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
W1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1947 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to W2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to W5.
W2 CHECK THE SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Seat Track Position Sensor C356
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 235
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing on-demand DTCs with the driver seat track position sensor
disconnected, an open circuit fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver seat track position switch on-demand DTC change from indicating C1947 to
C1946?
YES : INSTALL a new driver seat track position sensor. REFER to Seat Position Sensor. Go to
W6.
NO : Go to W3.
W3 CHECK CIRCUIT VR215 (YE/VT) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND BETWEEN THE RCM
AND SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Fig. 122: Measuring Resistance Between Driver Seat Track Position Sensor C356-2, Circuit
VR215 (YE/VT) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat track position sensor C356-2, circuit VR215 (YE/VT)
and ground.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to W4.
NO : REPAIR circuit VR215 (YE/VT). Go to W6.
W4 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Seat Track Position Sensor C356
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 236
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1947 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to W6.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
W5.
W5 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323
Disconnect: Driver Side Air Bag Module C3051
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1947 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to W2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to W6.
W6 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 237
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test X: DTC C1948 - Front Driver's Seat Track Position Switch Circuit Resistance Out of
Range
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
NOTE:
Due to the seat track position sensor being a Hall-effect type sensor, this
pinpoint test will be diagnosing a current out of range fault instead of the
current DTC definition for a resistance out of range fault.
Normal Operation
The restraints control module (RCM) monitors the driver seat track position sensor circuits. If the RCM detects
a current out of range condition, it will store DTC C1948 in memory and send a message to the instrument
cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC C1948 Front Driver's Seat Track Position Switch Circuit Resistance Out of Range - If the RCM
detects a current out of range between forward and rearward on the driver seat track position switch, it
will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Driver seat track position sensor
RCM
PINPOINT TEST X: DTC C1948 - FRONT DRIVER'S SEAT TRACK POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 238
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
X1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1948 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to X2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to X4.
X2 CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
NOTE:
This pinpoint test step will attempt to change the fault reported by the
RCM by inducing a different fault condition. If the fault reported changes,
this indicates the RCM is functioning correctly and is not the source of the
fault.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 239
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Track Position Sensor C356
Connect a fused jumper wire between driver seat track position sensor C356-2, circuit VR215
(YE/VT), harness side and C356-1, circuit GD143 (BK/VT), harness side.
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
DIAGNOSTIC TIP: When viewing on-demand DTCs with the driver seat track position sensor
circuits shorted together, a short to ground fault would normally be retrieved.
Did the driver seat track position sensor on-demand DTC change from indicating C1948 to
C1947?
YES : INSTALL a new driver seat track position sensor. REFER to Seat Position Sensor. Go to
X5.
NO : Go to X3.
X3 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: Driver Seat Track Position Sensor C356
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1948 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to X5.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of electrical connectors that were disconnected. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by
flexing the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
X4.
X4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 240
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323
Disconnect: Driver Side Air Bag Module C328
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1948 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to X2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to X5.
X5 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go toDTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test Y: DTC C1982 - Front Driver's Seat Track Position Switch Circuit Short to Battery
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 241
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
The restraints control module (RCM) monitors the driver seat track position sensor circuits. If the RCM detects
a short to battery, it will store DTC C1982 in memory and send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module
to illuminate the air bag warning indicator.
DTC C1982 Front Driver's Seat Track Position Switch Circuit Short to Battery - If the RCM detects a
short to battery on the driver seat track position sensor circuit, it will set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
RCM
PINPOINT TEST Y: C1982 - FRONT DRIVER'S SEAT TRACK POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
SHORT TO BATTERY
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position
of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and
the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when making
measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the
connector.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) components should only be disconnected
or reconnected when instructed to do so within a pinpoint test step. Failure to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 242
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
follow this instruction may result in incorrect diagnosis of the SRS.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
Y1 CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1982 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is still present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to Y2.
NO : This is an intermittent fault when present as a continuous memory DTC only (DTC not
retrieved on demand). The fault condition is not present at this time. Go to Y4.
Y2 CHECK CIRCUITS VR215 (YE/VT) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: RCM C310a and C310b
Disconnect: Driver Seat Track Position Sensor C356
Disconnect: Driver Side Air Bag Module C328
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 123: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Seat Track Position Sensor C356-2, Circuit
VR215 (YE/VT) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat track position sensor C356-2, circuit VR215 (YE/VT),
harness side and ground.
Is voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to Y3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 243
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR circuit VR215 (YE/VT). Go to Y5.
Y3 CONFIRM THE RCM FAULT
NOTE:
Make sure all restraint system components, sensor electrical connectors
and the RCM electrical connectors are connected before carrying out the
on-demand self test. If not, erroneous DTCs will be recorded.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Connect: RCM C310a and C310b
Connect: Driver Seat Track Position Sensor C356
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1982 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraints Control Module (RCM). Go to Y5.
NO : In the process of diagnosing the fault, the fault condition has become intermittent. CHECK
for causes of the intermittent fault in the areas previously worked in, particularly the pins and
terminals of any electrical connector that were disconnected. Do not install any new SRS
components at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to
Y4.
Y4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT FAULT
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Disconnect: Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323
Disconnect: Driver Side Air Bag Module C328
Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - RCM - Retrieve and Record
On-Demand and Continuous Memory DTCs
Was RCM on-demand DTC C1982 retrieved?
YES : This is a hard fault. The fault condition is now present. This fault cannot be cleared until it is
corrected and the DTC is no longer retrieved during the on-demand self test. Go to Y2.
NO : CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. ATTEMPT to recreate the hard fault by flexing
the wire harness and cycling the ignition key frequently. Do not install any new SRS components
at this time. SRS components should only be installed when directed to do so in the pinpoint
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 244
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found. Go to Y5.
Y5 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to DTC Charts for pinpoint
test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
Pinpoint Test Z: DTC B1013 - Occupant Classification Calibration Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Supplemental Restraint System for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is used to classify the front passenger seat occupant in the
event of a deployable impact. Refer to Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
The occupant classification system module (OCSM) monitors the OCS weight sensor bolts for a correct
calibration/weight and ID from each sensor. If the OCSM detects an incorrect weight or ID from any of the 4
seat weight sensors, a seat track that is mis-aligned/bent, wire harness connected to the incorrect OCS weight
sensor bolt, an unsuccessful system reset or if an OCS system component has been installed new, it will store
DTC B1013 in memory and send a message to the restraints control module (RCM) which stores DTC B2290 in
memory. The RCM will then send a message to the instrument cluster (IC) module to illuminate the air bag
warning indicator.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring of OCS weight sensor bolts
Wiring, terminals or connectors
OCS system component installed new
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 245
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Passenger seat track
Misrouted harness
Seat track mounting and alignment
Seat track fastener torque
PINPOINT TEST Z: DTC B1013 - OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION CALIBRATION FAULT
NOTE:
Do not install any new OCS system components until directed to do so during
the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
If a new OCS system component has been installed, the OCSM will store DTC
B1013, causing the air bag warning indicator to illuminate during the prove out.
This DTC will clear after a successful system reset.
Z1 CHECK THE SEAT HARNESS WIRING AND CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the OCS system harness wiring, terminals and connectors
and the related seat wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for any
damage, misrouting or pulling on any OCS weight sensor bolt.
Fig. 124: Identifying OCS System Harness Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The OCS weight sensor bolts do not have differently keyed
connectors. Connecting the incorrect connector to a sensor will
cause DTC B1013 to set and may cause other erroneous DTCs to set.
Using the illustration, identify that the sensors are connected correctly. Refer to appropriate
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 246
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for schematic and connector information.
OCS Weight Sensor Bolt Location
OCS weight sensor bolt 1, located at the front outboard
OCS weight sensor bolt 2, located at the rear outboard
OCS weight sensor bolt 3, located at the rear inboard
OCS weight sensor bolt 4, located at the front inboard
Were any wiring or connector concerns noted?
YES : REPAIR the seat connectors and wiring as needed. CARRY OUT the OCS system reset.
REFER to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset. Go to Z3.
NO : Go to Z2.
Z2 CHECK THE SEAT TRACK
NOTE:
Correct seat track alignment on a passenger front manual seat (if
equipped) is critical before removing the seat from the vehicle.
During seat installation, the inboard and outboard tracks must be in
alignment with each other. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in an unsuccessful system reset and incorrect operation of the
OCS system.
NOTE:
Check for a bent or binding power seat track assembly (if equipped).
Position the seat in all positions and check for correct operation after
installation of the seat into the vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in an unsuccessful system reset and incorrect
operation of the OCS system.
NOTE:
The passenger seat bolts must be tightened to the correct
specifications and in the correct sequence. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in an unsuccessful system reset and incorrect
operation of the OCS system. Refer to SEATING article Seat Removal
and Installation.
Loosen the 4 seat track to floor mounting bolts.
Tighten the seat track-to-floor bolts in the following sequence.
A. Tighten the front inboard seat track-to-floor bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
B. Tighten the front outboard seat track-to-floor bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
C. Tighten the rear inboard seat track-to-floor bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
D. Tighten the rear outboard seat track-to-floor bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Carry out the OCS system reset. Refer to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
Did the system reset pass?
YES : Fault corrected. Go to Z3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 247
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new seat track with OCS weight sensor bolts. REFER to SEATING article. Go
to Z3.
Z3 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL SRS DTCs
Key in OFF position.
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the
backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Reconnect all SRS components (if previously disconnected).
If previously directed to depower the SRS, repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at
this time. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test - Restraints
Are any RCM and/or OCSM DTCs retrieved indicating a fault?
YES : Do not clear any DTCs until all DTCs have been resolved. Go to the Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) DTC Chart for pinpoint test direction.
NO : CLEAR all RCM and OCSM continuous memory DTCs. PROVE OUT the SRS. REPAIR is
complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory
saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury or death.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 248
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the smart junction box (SJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse
cover and the RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the appropriate
Wiring service information.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been
removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse
before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or
installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing,
adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact
sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components
include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
See DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery
ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect
auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment.
6. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to
BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover.
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or
placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 249
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
3. Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and
visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is
present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will
sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and occupant classification system module (OCSM) using a
scan tool.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
software with appropriate
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
hardware, or equivalent scan tool
System (IDS)
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 250
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory
saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury or death.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All vehicles
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the smart junction box (SJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse
cover and the RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SJB. For additional information, refer to the appropriate
Wiring service information.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been
removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse
before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or
installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing,
adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact
sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components
include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
See DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 251
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery
ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect
auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment.
6. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to
BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
NOTE:
Repeat this step for both locking pins.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool through the access hole on the backside of the steering
wheel, position the tool against the spring clip and push in, disengaging the clip from the locking pin.
With the spring clip disengaged from the locking pin, gently pull back on that side of the driver air bag
module to release it from the steering wheel.
Fig. 125: Locating Allen Wrench
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not pull the driver air bag module electrical connectors out by the
locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur.
8. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking buttons on the driver air
bag module electrical connectors. With the locking buttons released, remove the electrical connectors and
the driver air bag module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 252
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 126: Releasing Locking Buttons On Driver Air Bag Module Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Then unhook the glove compartment door from the
instrument panel.
If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener.
Edge
10. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts from the cross vehicle beam bracket.
Fig. 127: Locating Passenger Air Bag Module Bolts From Cross Vehicle Beam Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 253
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
11. Through the glove compartment opening, release the 4 LH side deployment door clips. Then release the
foreward-most 5 clips and separate the deployment door and passenger air bag module from the
instrument panel.
Fig. 128: Locating LH Side Deployment Door Clip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the RH
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Fig. 129: Releasing Locking Button On RH Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connector Using
A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the
locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
13. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector.
14. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the LH
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 254
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 130: Releasing Locking Button On LH Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connector Using
A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the
locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
15. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector and remove the passenger air
bag module.
MKX
16. Pull straight out to release the 5 retaining clips and remove the RH instrument panel finish panel.
Fig. 131: Locating Retaining Clips On RH I/P Finish Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Remove the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket from the front of the instrument panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 255
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 132: Locating Screw On LH Duct Assembly Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the LH duct assembly.
Fig. 133: Locating Screw On LH Duct Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the RH duct assembly.
Fig. 134: Locating Screw On RH Duct Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Remove the 4 bolts and the passenger air bag module support bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 256
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 135: Locating Bolts On Passenger Air Bag Module Support Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Remove the 3 nuts from the passenger air bag module.
Fig. 136: Locating Nuts On Passenger Air Bag Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not allow the passenger air bag module to hang from the wiring
harness. Damage to the wiring harness and connectors may occur.
22. Lower the rear of the passenger air bag module off the 3 mounting studs. Move the passenger air bag
module rearward to release the 7 hooks from the instrument panel and rest the module on the cross
vehicle beam.
Fig. 137: Identifying Hooks On I/P
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 257
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
23. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the LH
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Fig. 138: Releasing Locking Button On LH Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connector Using
A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the
locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
24. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector from the passenger air bag
module.
25. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the RH
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Fig. 139: Releasing Locking Button On RH Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connector Using
A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the
locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
26. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Remove the passenger air bag
module from the glove compartment opening.
All vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 258
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
27. From under the rear of the front passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side
air bag module electrical connector.
Fig. 140: Identifying Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
28. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
NOTE:
Do not pull the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector out
by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
29. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the passenger safety canopy
module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 259
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 141: Locating Electrical Connector From Passenger Safety Canopy Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
30. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
NOTE:
Do not pull the driver safety canopy module electrical connector out by the
locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
31. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the driver safety canopy module.
Fig. 142: Locating Electrical Connector From Driver Safety Canopy Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
32. From under the rear of the driver seat, detach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector from
the seat cushion frame. Then slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector
locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical
connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 260
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 143: Identifying Driver Seat Side Air Bag Module Electrical Connector Locking Clip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
33. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SJB.
34. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING &
CABLES article.
Reactivation
All vehicles
1. Remove RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air
bag electrical connector locking clip. Then attach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector
to the seat cushion frame.
Fig. 144: Identifying Driver Seat Side Air Bag Module Electrical Connector Locking Clip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
NOTE:
The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in
the released position when the connector is being installed or connector
damage may occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 261
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be
reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the
electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do
not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage
to the connector or component may occur.
4. With the locking button released, install the driver safety canopy module electrical connector fully into
the driver safety canopy module and seat the locking button.
Fig. 145: Identifying Driver Safety Canopy Module Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
NOTE:
Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
NOTE:
The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in
the released position when the connector is being installed or connector
damage may occur.
NOTE:
The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be
reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the
electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do
not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage
to the connector or component may occur.
6. With the locking button released, install the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector fully
into the passenger safety canopy module and seat the locking button.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 262
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 146: Identifying Passenger Safety Canopy Module Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat
side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
Fig. 147: Identifying Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
MKX
NOTE:
Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the
locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur.
NOTE:
The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must
be in the released position when the connector is being installed or
connector damage may occur.
NOTE:
The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and
cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module.
Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag
module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag
module. Damage to the connector or component may occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 263
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
RH side shown in illustration, LH side similar.
9. Position the passenger air bag module on the cross vehicle beam. With the locking buttons released,
install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and
seat the locking buttons.
Fig. 148: Locating Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
During the passenger air bag module installation, make sure all 7 of the
hooks are fully seated in the instrument panel.
10. Install the passenger air bag module 7 hooks into the instrument panel. Raise the rear of the passenger air
bag module onto the 3 mounting studs.
Fig. 149: Identifying Hooks On I/P
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Install the 3 passenger air bag module nuts.
Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 264
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 150: Locating Nuts On Passenger Air Bag Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the passenger air bag module
bracket and passenger air bag module bolts in this order.
12. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and the 4 bolts.
1. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and 2 bolts to the cross vehicle beam.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
2. Install the inboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Install the outboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Fig. 151: Installing Passenger Air Bag Module Support Bracket Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Install the screw and the RH duct assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 265
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 152: Locating Screw On RH Duct Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Install the screw and the LH duct assembly.
Fig. 153: Locating Screw On LH Duct Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Install the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket in the front of the instrument panel.
Fig. 154: Locating Screw On LH Duct Assembly Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the RH instrument panel finish panel 5 retaining clips are fully
seated in the instrument panel.
16. Install the RH instrument panel finish panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 266
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 155: Locating Retaining Clips On RH I/P Finish Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Edge
NOTE:
Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the
locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur.
NOTE:
The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must
be in the released position when the connector is being installed or
connector damage may occur.
NOTE:
The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and
cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module.
Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag
module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag
module. Damage to the connector or component may occur.
NOTE:
RH side shown in illustration, LH side similar.
17. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into
the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons.
Fig. 156: Locating Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 267
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur.
NOTE:
During air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door
clips are fully seated in the instrument panel.
18. Install the passenger air bag module deployment door rear-most clips into the instrument panel first. Then
install the side deployment door clips working around to the forward-most clips seating each of them
fully into the instrument panel.
NOTE:
To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the 2 passenger air bag
module bolts in this order.
19. Install the passenger air bag module 2 bolts.
1. Install the inboard passenger air bag module bolt.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
2. Install the outboard passenger air bag module bolt.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Fig. 157: Installing Passenger Air Bag Module Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
20. Hook the glove compartment door to the instrument panel. Close the glove compartment door.
If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener.
NOTE:
Do not install the driver air bag module electrical connectors by the
locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur.
NOTE:
The driver air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in
the released position when the connector is being installed or connector
damage may occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 268
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and
cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module.
Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag
module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag
module. Damage to the connector or component may occur.
21. With the locking buttons released, install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the
driver air bag module and seat the locking buttons.
Fig. 158: Locating Driver Air Bag Module Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Audible clicks will be heard when both wire clips are seated in the driver
air bag module.
22. Align the driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 2
driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel wire clips.
When the 2 locking pins are seated in place, there should be an even gap between the driver air bag
module trim cover and the steering wheel.
23. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
24. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover.
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or
placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
25. Connect the battery ground cable.
26. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator
will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present,
the air bag warning indicator will:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 269
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch
has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will
sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator will need to be
repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and occupant classification system module (OCSM) using a
scan tool.
INSPECTION AND REPAIR AFTER A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
DEPLOYMENT
WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road
testing. If tools are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS)
device may not deploy in a crash. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and possibly violate
vehicle safety standards.
NOTE:
After diagnosing or repairing a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the
restraint system diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before
operating the vehicle over the road.
NOTE:
Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone
or in various combinations depending on the impact event.
NOTE:
Always refer to the appropriate service information procedures prior to carrying
out vehicle repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system.
NOTE:
The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle
to the customer.
All vehicles
NOTE:
Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS
components being installed.
1. When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the vehicle
SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new deployable devices, the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:50 AM
Page 270
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and installation of a new RCM. DTCs
must be cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried out.
Vehicles with Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
NOTE:
After installation of new Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
components, carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System
Reset procedure as instructed in the service information. Refer to the
appropriate service information for OCS system removal and installation
procedure.
2. When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
has DTC B1231 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following procedures
for the specified system:
For rail-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary.
Install new OCS system rails.
For weight sensor bolt-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair
as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be cleared
from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset. Do not
install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be cleared.
NOTE:
Most bladder-type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after
deployment. The DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM.
For bladder-type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an OCS
system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed.
All vehicles
3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred, repair or
install new mounting points and mounting hardware as needed.
4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed.
5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters)
must be installed if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or
front passenger safety belt pretensioners. For additional information, refer to SAFETY BELT SYSTEM
article.
6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components:
Steering column (deployable column if equipped)
Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points
Instrument panel braces and brackets
Instrument panel and mounting points
Seats and seat mounting points
Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors. For additional information, refer to
SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 271
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors
7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new
components as needed.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR (OCS) SYSTEM RESET
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
software with appropriate
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
hardware, or equivalent scan tool
System (IDS)
NOTE:
If DTC B2290 is retrieved on-demand from the occupant classification system
module (OCSM) and restraints control module (RCM):
There is a fault with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight
sensor bolt(s) and/or wiring.
The cause for the DTC must be corrected before carrying out the OCS
system reset.
Refer to DTC Charts for diagnostic direction.
The RCM stores DTC B2290 in memory ONLY to identify a problem with
the OCS system.
If DTC B2290 is only present in the RCM and no on-demand or continuous DTC
are present in the OCSM, CLEAR all DTCs from the RCM.
1. Diagnostic Instruction: The Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset procedure should only
be carried out if instructed to do so by the service information.
If the concern is with the passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator operation, refer to Passenger Air
Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System in
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION .
WARNING: The following precautions must be taken before carrying out the
following procedure on the front passenger seat:
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Make sure the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is
stabilized at a temperature in the range of 5°C to 48°C (41°F to
118°F) and is not exposed to temperatures outside that range.
Make sure the front passenger seat is empty and dry.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 272
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete and all
attached components (head restraint, seat side shield) are
correctly installed.
Make sure nothing is placed in the map pockets (if equipped) of
the front passenger seat.
Make sure nothing is underneath the front passenger seat.
Make sure no non-factory installed items (seat covers, DVD
screens) are on or contacting the front passenger seat. If any
non-factory items were installed to the seat, remove the item(s)
and communicate to the customer that any
alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may affect
performance of the OCS system. Refer to the Owner's
Literature.
Make sure the seat is correctly installed in the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation
of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury
or death in a crash.
NOTE:
Correct seat track alignment of the inboard and outboard seat tracks on a
manual seat is critical for a successful system reset. Before removing a
front passenger seat equipped with a manual seat track, mark both tracks
to indicate correct alignment between the inboard and outboard tracks.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in an unsuccessful system
reset and incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS)
system.
NOTE:
Make sure the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system weight sensor
bolt protection brackets are correctly installed to the seat track and that
they not contact the cushion side shield, wire harness or any other
surrounding parts. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
incorrect operation of the OCS system.
NOTE:
In the event of a deployable crash and OCSM DTC B1231 is retrieved ondemand, the DTC must be cleared before carrying out the Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
NOTE:
If a new OCS system component has been installed, the RCM and OCSM
will:
store DTC B1013 and B2290 in memory.
cause the air bag warning indicator to illuminate.
clear after a successful system reset.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 273
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
the RCM stores DTC B2290 in memory.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the off position. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and
visually monitor the air bag warning indicator. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for
approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If no SRS DTCs are present and no new OCS system
components were installed , the air bag warning indicator will remain off. If the SRS indicator
illuminates, indicating a fault is present, use a scan tool to retrieve DTCs and refer to DTC Charts for
diagnostic direction before carrying out the system reset procedure.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
The following seat checks must be made before attempting to carry out an
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset after the seat has been
removed and re-installed for any reason:
Make sure the seat is correctly installed in the vehicle.
Make sure the seat has been tightened to specification as identified
in the appropriate service information.
Make sure the seat track is correctly aligned (manual seat track).
Make sure the OCS weight sensor bolt harness connections are
correct for each sensor at their correct location. Refer to appropriate
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for schematic and connector
information. Refer to the illustration for correct sensor location on
the seat.
OCS Weight Sensor Bolt Location
OCS weight sensor bolt 1, front outboard
OCS weight sensor bolt 2, rear outboard
OCS weight sensor bolt 3, rear inboard
OCS weight sensor bolt 4, front inboard
4. Position the front passenger seat.
Position the seat backrest in the upright (vertical) position.
Position the seat in the middle position of seat track travel.
Position the seat height to its middle position (power seat only).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 274
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 159: Identifying OCS System Harness Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the hysteresis from the front passenger seat by firmly hitting the back of the seat head restraint 3
times.
NOTE:
Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the
ignition switch ON before carrying out the System Reset active command.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON, wait 8 seconds and carry out the System Reset using the scan tool.
If the system passed, go to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight
Test.
NOTE:
Do not install any new OCS system components at this time. OCS
system components should only be installed when directed to do so.
If the system did not pass, proceed to Step 7.
7. Carry out the OCSM self-test.
If DTCs B2290 and B1013 are retrieved on-demand in the OCSM, refer to DTC Charts for
diagnostic direction. Carry out diagnostics for DTC B2290 before any other DTCs.
If any other DTC is retrieved on-demand in the OCSM, refer to DTC Charts for diagnostic
direction.
If only DTC B1013 is retrieved on-demand in the OCSM, refer to DTC Charts for diagnostic
direction.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR (OCS) SYSTEM ZERO SEAT WEIGHT TEST
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
software with appropriate
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
hardware, or equivalent scan tool
System (IDS)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 275
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
WARNING: The following precautions must be taken before carrying out the following
procedure on the front passenger seat:
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Make sure the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is
stabilized at a temperature in the range of 5°C to 48°C (41°F to 118°F)
and is not exposed to temperatures outside that range.
Make sure the front passenger seat is empty and dry.
Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete and all
attached components (head restraint, seat side shield) are correctly
installed.
Make sure nothing is placed in the map pockets (if equipped) of the
front passenger seat.
Make sure nothing is underneath the front passenger seat.
Make sure no non-factory installed items (seat covers, DVD screens)
are on or contacting the front passenger seat. If any non-factory
items were installed to the seat, remove the item(s) and
communicate to the customer that any alteration/modification to the
front passenger seat may affect performance of the OCS system.
Refer to the Owner's Literature.
Make sure the seat is correctly installed in the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of
the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTE:
Make sure the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt
protection brackets are correctly installed to the seat track and that it does not
contact the cushion side shield, wire harness or any other surrounding parts.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in the incorrect operation of the
OCS system.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
The Zero Seat Weight Test is done with the passenger seat positioned in 2
different positions to make sure that there is nothing to affect the performance
and operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system.
NOTE:
The Zero Seat Weight Test verifies the OCS system measures zero weight for an
empty seat. It is necessary to carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test procedure
after a successful System Reset or as directed to do so in the appropriate
service information procedures.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 276
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
If the occupant classification system module (OCSM) has any on-demand DTCs
except C1941 present, the fault condition(s) must be repaired and the DTCs
cleared before carrying out the Zero Seat Weight Test on the front passenger
seat. Failure to follow this instruction will result in an unsuccessful Zero Seat
Weight Test and the incorrect operation of the OCS system.
WARNING: The following precautions must be taken before carrying out the
following procedure on the front passenger seat:
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Make sure the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is
stabilized at a temperature in the range of 5°C to 48°C (41°F to
118°F) and is not exposed to temperatures outside that range.
Make sure the front passenger seat is empty and dry.
Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete and all
attached components (head restraint, seat side shield) are
correctly installed.
Make sure nothing is placed in the map pockets (if equipped) of
the front passenger seat.
Make sure nothing is underneath the front passenger seat.
Make sure no non-factory installed items (seat covers, DVD
screens) are on or contacting the front passenger seat. If any
non-factory items were installed to the seat, remove the item(s)
and communicate to the customer that any
alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may affect
performance of the OCS system. Refer to the Owner's
Literature.
Make sure the seat is correctly installed in the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation
of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury
or death in a crash.
1. Make sure the front passenger seat is empty and there is nothing underneath the seat. Remove any items
from the seat that were not factory installed and make sure that the seat is correctly installed in the
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System in Air Bag
and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
2. Position the front passenger seat in the first position.
Position the seat backrest in the upright position.
Position the seat in the full forward position of seat track travel.
Position the seat height to its highest position (power seat only).
WARNING: Remove binding or resistance between all components of the front
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 277
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
passenger seat as directed in the following procedure. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
3. Remove hysteresis from the front passenger seat by firmly hitting the back of the seat head restraint 3
times.
4. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
WARNING: Make sure nothing is placed on the front passenger seat during the
following procedure. Do not press, touch or lay anything on the front
passenger seat until the following procedure has been completed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation
of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON position.
NOTE:
Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the
ignition switch ON before carrying out the Zero Seat Weight Test active
command.
6. Carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test using the scan tool.
If the system passed, proceed to Step 7.
If the system did not pass (DTC C1941 Zero Seat Weight Test Failure reported), proceed to Step
9.
7. Position the front passenger seat to the second position.
Position the seat in the full rearward position of seat track travel.
Position the seat height to its lowest position (power seat only).
8. Carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test using the scan tool.
If the system passed, repair is complete, Proceed to Step 10.
If the system did not pass (DTC C1941 Zero Seat Weight Test Failure reported), proceed to Step
9.
NOTE:
Check the repair history of the vehicle for any previous repair that required
the removal or service of the passenger seat. The repair history may lead
to an area of concern.
9. Inspect the following for causes of a unsuccessful Zero Seat Weight Test.
Make sure the front passenger seat is empty and there is nothing underneath the seat. Remove any
items from the seat that were not factory installed and make sure that the seat is correctly installed
in the vehicle.
Make sure the seat wiring harnesses are routed and secured correctly and are not twisted, pinched,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 278
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
pulling down or pushing up on any seat component. Refer to Seat Cushion Wire Harness Routing Front Passenger Cushion in the General Procedures portion of SEATING article.
Make sure the OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets are correctly installed to the seat track
and are not contacting the cushion side shield, wire harness or any other surrounding parts.
Make sure the seat track and backrest frame are not bent, twisted or damaged.
Move the seat and backrest to all seating positions. Make sure the seat track does not bind or have
any resistance when moved to all seating positions. Make sure that there are no obstructions
contacting any seat component when the seat is moved to all seating positions.
Make sure the seat is assembled correctly and all fasteners are tightened to specifications.
If a concern was found, repair as necessary, proceed to Step 1.
If no concern was found, install a new passenger seat track assembly with OCS weight sensor
bolts. Refer to SEATING article.
10. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and
visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is
present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will
sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Repair any unresolved DTCs.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool.
PYROTECHNIC DEVICE DISPOSAL
Disposal of Deployable Devices and Pyrotechnic Devices That are Undeployed/Inoperative
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
All inoperative air bag modules and safety belt pretensioners have been placed
on the Mandatory Return List. All discolored or damaged air bag modules must
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 279
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
be treated the same as any inoperative live air bag being returned.
1. Depower the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). For additional information, refer to Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the undeployed/inoperative device. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure
in this service information or SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article.
NOTE:
When installing a new air bag module, a prepaid return postcard is
provided with the replacement air bag module. The serial number for the
new part and the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and
sent to Ford Motor Company.
3. If installing a new air bag module, record the necessary information and return the inoperative air bag
module to Ford Motor Company.
Disposal of Deployable Devices and Pyrotechnic Devices That Are Deployed
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the deployed device. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure in this service
information or SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article.
NOTE:
If a dual stage driver or passenger air bag module has deployed due to a
crash event, the air bag module requires manual deployment to make sure
both stages have deployed before scrapping the vehicle or disposing of
the air bag module. To determine if a vehicle is equipped with dual stage
driver or passenger air bag modules, refer to DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION .
3. Dispose of the deployed device in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped.
Disposal of Deployable Devices and Pyrotechnic Devices That Require Manual Deployment
1. Safety and environmental concerns require consideration and treatment of restraints system deployable
and pyrotechnic devices when disposing of vehicles, deployable devices or pyrotechnic devices.
Deploying deployable and pyrotechnic devices before scrapping a vehicle or the device eliminates the
potential for hazardous exposures or reactions during processing. If special handling procedures are
followed, deployable and pyrotechnic devices can be deployed safely and recycled with the vehicle,
shipped separately to a recycling facility or disposed of safely.
NOTE:
To determine the deployable devices a vehicle is equipped with, refer to
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION .
A vehicle equipped with any of the following deployable devices requires manual deployment of the
devices before scrapping the vehicle or component. For additional information, refer to the appropriate
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 280
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
portion of this procedure.
Driver air bag module
Passenger air bag module
Seat side air bag modules
Safety canopy modules
Side air curtain modules
NOTE:
To determine the pyrotechnic devices a vehicle is equipped with, refer to
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION .
2. A vehicle equipped with any of the following pyrotechnic devices requires manual deployment of the
devices before scrapping the vehicle or component. For additional information, refer to the appropriate
portion of this procedure.
Safety belt buckle pretensioners
Safety belt retractor pretensioners
Adaptive load limiting retractors
Deployable steering column
NOTE:
To determine if a vehicle is equipped with dual stage driver or passenger
air bag modules, refer toDESCRIPTION AND OPERATION .
3. If a dual stage driver or passenger air bag module has deployed due to a crash event, the air bag module
requires manual deployment to make sure both stages have deployed before scrapping the vehicle or
disposing of the air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module, Passenger
Air Bag Module and Seat Side Air Bag Modules - Remote Deployment in this procedure.
Driver Air Bag Module, Passenger Air Bag Module and Seat Side Air Bag Modules - Remote Deployment
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Always carry or place a live safety canopy, or side air curtain module,
with the module and tear seam pointed away from your body. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 281
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Deploy all supplemental restraint system (SRS) devices (air bags,
pretensioners, load limiters, etc.) outdoors with all personnel at least 9.14
meters (30 feet) away to make sure of personal safety. Due to the loud
report which occurs when an SRS device is deployed, hearing protection
is required. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE:
For air bag modules with multiple loops, all the loops on the air bag module
must be deployed.
NOTE:
Some driver and passenger front air bags have 2 deployment stages. After a
collision it is possible that Stage 1 has deployed and Stage 2 has not.
If a front air bag module has deployed, it is mandatory that the front air bag
module be remotely deployed using the appropriate air bag disposal procedure.
NOTE:
A typical air bag disposal is shown in illustration that is similar for all vehicles.
All driver, passenger and seat side air bag modules
1. Make a container to house the air bag module for deployment.
NOTE:
The tires must be of sufficient size to accommodate the air bag
module.
Obtain a tire and wheel assembly and an additional 4 tires (without wheels) of the same size.
With the tire and wheel assembly on the bottom, stack the tires.
Securely tie all of the tires together.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 282
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 160: Placing Air Bag Modules Inside Tire For Deployment
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
3. Remove the air bag module. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure.
NOTE:
If the air bag module does not have a hardwired pigtail, it will be necessary
to cut the wires and connector(s) from the vehicle wire harness and
reconnect to the air bag module.
4. Cut each of the air bag module wires near the electrical connector that connects to the vehicle wire
harness.
5. Remove any sheathing (if present) and strip the insulation from the ends of the cut wires.
NOTE:
Typical driver air bag module with 2 loops shown in illustration, other air
bag modules with multiple loops similar.
6. For air bag modules with multiple loops, twist together a wire from each loop then repeat for the
remaining wires from each loop.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 283
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 161: Locating Air Bag Module Wire Squibs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Make a jumper harness to deploy the air bag module.
Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 9.14 m (30 ft) long and strip both ends of each wire.
At one end of the jumper harness, connect the wires together.
8. Using the end of the jumper harness that the wires are not connected together, attach each wire of the
jumper harness to each wire of the air bag module or to the twisted-together wires if multiple loops. Use
tape or other insulating material to make sure that the leads do not make contact with each other.
Fig. 162: Connecting Jumper Wires To Squibs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Driver air bag modules
NOTE:
Make sure to maintain the connections to the air bag module.
9. With the stack of tires upright and the wheel on the bottom, carefully place the driver air bag module,
with the trim cover facing up, on the wheel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 284
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 163: Placing Driver Air Bag Modules Inside Tires For Deployment
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Passenger and seat side air bag modules
NOTE:
Make sure to maintain the connections to the air bag module.
10. Tip the stack of tires on its side and place the air bag module inside the center tire, making sure that there
are 2 tires beneath the tire containing the air bag module and 2 tires (including the tire and wheel
assembly) above the tire containing the air bag module.
11. Place the tire stack upright, with the wheel on top.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 285
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 164: Identifying Passenger Or Seat Side Air Bag Modules Inside Center Tire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All driver, passenger and seat side air bag modules
12. Remain at least 9.14 m (30 ft) away from the air bag module.
13. From the end of the jumper harness that is not connected to the air bag module, disconnect the 2 wires of
the jumper harness from each other.
14. Deploy the air bag module by touching the ends of the 2 wires of the jumper harness to the terminals of a
12-volt battery.
15. To allow for cooling, wait at least 10 minutes before approaching the deployed air bag module.
16. Dispose of the deployed air bag module in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped.
Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners, Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioners and Adaptive Load Limiting Safety Belt
Retractors - Remote Deployment
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Deploy all supplemental restraint system (SRS) devices (air bags,
pretensioners, load limiters, etc.) outdoors with all personnel at least 9.14
meters (30 feet) away to make sure of personal safety. Due to the loud
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 286
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
report which occurs when an SRS device is deployed, hearing protection
is required. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE:
A typical safety belt buckle and retractor disposal is shown in illustration that is
similar for all vehicles.
1. Make a container to house the safety belt buckle or retractor for deployment.
NOTE:
The tires must be of sufficient size to accommodate the safety belt
buckle or retractor.
Obtain a tire and wheel assembly and an additional 4 tires (without wheels) of the same size.
With the tire and wheel assembly on the bottom, stack the tires.
Securely tie all of the tires together.
Fig. 165: Placing Air Bag Modules Inside Tire For Deployment
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
3. Remove the safety belt buckle or retractor. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure
in SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article.
When deploying a safety belt buckle pretensioner, install a nut and bolt of sufficient length and of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 287
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
the same diameter as was used to retain it to the seat.
NOTE:
If the safety belt buckle or retractor does not have a hardwired pigtail, it
will be necessary to cut the wires and connector(s) from the vehicle wire
harness and reconnect to the safety belt buckle or retractor.
4. Cut each of the safety belt buckle or retractor wires near the electrical connector that connects to the
vehicle wire harness.
5. Remove any sheathing (if present) and strip the insulation from the ends of the cut wires.
6. Make a jumper harness to deploy the safety belt buckle or retractor.
Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 9.14 m (30 ft) long and strip both ends of each wire.
At one end of the jumper harness, connect the wires together.
NOTE:
Typical safety belt retractor pretensioner shown in illustration, other safety
belt buckle pretensioners and load limiting retractors similar.
7. Using the end of the jumper harness that the wires are not connected together, attach each wire of the
jumper harness to each wire of the safety belt buckle or retractor. Use tape or other insulating material to
make sure that the leads do not make contact with each other.
Fig. 166: Attaching Jumper Wires To Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure to maintain the connections to the safety belt buckle or
retractor.
8. Tip the stack of tires on its side and place the safety belt buckle or retractor inside the center tire, making
sure that there are 2 tires beneath the tire containing the safety belt buckle or retractor and 2 tires
(including the tire and wheel assembly) above the tire containing the safety belt buckle or retractor.
9. Place the tire stack upright, with the wheel on top.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 288
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 167: Identifying Passenger Or Seat Side Air Bag Modules Inside Center Tire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remain at least 9.14 m (30 ft) away from the safety belt buckle or retractor.
11. From the end of the jumper harness that is not connected to the safety belt buckle or retractor, disconnect
the 2 wires of the jumper harness from each other.
12. Deploy the safety belt buckle or retractor by touching the ends of the 2 wires of the jumper harness to the
terminals of a 12-volt battery.
13. To allow for cooling, wait at least 10 minutes before approaching the deployed safety belt buckle or
retractor.
14. Dispose of the deployed safety belt buckle or retractor in the same manner as any other part to be
scrapped.
Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners, Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioners and Load Limiting Safety Belt Retractors - InVehicle Deployment
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt
pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Deploy all supplemental restraint system (SRS) devices (air bags,
pretensioners, load limiters, etc.) outdoors with all personnel at least 9.14
meters (30 feet) away to make sure of personal safety. Due to the loud
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 289
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
report which occurs when an SRS device is deployed, hearing protection
is required. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE:
A typical safety belt buckle and retractor disposal is shown in illustration that is
similar for all vehicles.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
2. Access the safety belt buckle or retractor electrical connectors. For additional information, refer to
SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article.
3. Cut each of the safety belt buckle or retractor wires, leaving at least 101.6 mm (4 in) to work with.
4. Remove any sheathing (if present) and strip the insulation from the ends of the cut wires.
5. Make a jumper harness to deploy the safety belt buckle or retractor.
Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 9.14 m (30 ft) long and strip both ends of each wire.
At one end of the jumper harness, connect the wires together.
NOTE:
Typical safety belt retractor pretensioner shown in illustration, other safety
belt buckle pretensioners and load limiting retractors are similar.
6. Using the end of the jumper harness that the wires are not connected together, attach each wire of the
jumper harness to each wire of the safety belt buckle or retractor. Use tape or other insulating material to
make sure that the leads do not make contact with each other.
Fig. 168: Attaching Jumper Wires To Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remain at least 9.14 m (30 ft) away from the safety belt buckle or retractor.
8. From the end of the jumper harness that is not connected to the safety belt buckle or retractor, disconnect
the 2 wires of the jumper harness from each other.
9. Deploy the safety belt buckle or retractor by touching the ends of the 2 wires of the jumper harness to the
terminals of a 12-volt battery.
10. To allow for cooling, wait at least 10 minutes before approaching the deployed safety belt buckle or
retractor.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 290
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
11. Dispose of the deployed safety belt buckle or retractor in the same manner as any other part to be
scrapped.
Safety Canopy Modules and Side Air Curtain Modules - In-Vehicle Deployment
WARNING: Deploy all supplemental restraint system (SRS) devices (air bags,
pretensioners, load limiters, etc.) outdoors with all personnel at least 9.14
meters (30 feet) away to make sure of personal safety. Due to the loud
report which occurs when an SRS device is deployed, hearing protection
is required. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE:
The safety canopy module deployment for a scrapped vehicle will occur in its
installed position in the vehicle.
NOTE:
A typical safety canopy module disposal is shown in illustration that is similar
for all vehicles.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
2. Access the safety canopy/side air curtain module electrical connectors. For additional information, refer
to the appropriate procedure.
3. Cut each of the safety canopy/side air curtain module wires leaving at least 101.6 mm (4 in) to work with.
4. Remove any sheathing (if present) and strip the insulation from the ends of the cut wires.
NOTE:
Typical safety canopy/side air curtain module with 2 loops shown in
illustration, other safety canopy/side air curtain modules with 2 loops are
similar.
5. For safety canopy/side air curtain modules with multiple loops, twist together a wire from each loop then
repeat for the remaining wires from each loop.
Fig. 169: Identifying Safety Canopy/Side Air Curtain Module Wire Squibs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 291
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
6. Make a jumper harness to deploy the safety canopy/side air curtain module.
Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 9.14 m (30 ft) long and strip both ends of each wire.
At one end of the jumper harness, connect the wires together.
7. Using the end of the jumper harness that the wires are not connected together, attach each wire of the
jumper harness to each wire of the safety canopy/side air curtain module or to the twisted-together wires
if multiple loops. Use tape or other insulating material to make sure that the leads do not make contact
with each other.
Fig. 170: Connecting Jumper Harness To Twisted Wires
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. From the end of the jumper harness that is not connected to the safety canopy/side air curtain module,
disconnect the 2 wires of the jumper harness from each other.
9. Deploy the safety canopy/side air curtain module by touching the ends of the 2 wires of the jumper
harness to the terminals of a 12-volt battery.
10. To allow for cooling, wait at least 10 minutes before approaching the deployed safety canopy/side air
curtain module.
11. Dispose of the deployed safety canopy/side air curtain module in the same manner as any other part to be
scrapped.
Deployable Steering Column - In-Vehicle Deployment
WARNING: Deploy all supplemental restraint system (SRS) devices (air bags,
pretensioners, load limiters, etc.) outdoors with all personnel at least 9.14
meters (30 feet) away to make sure of personal safety. Due to the loud
report which occurs when an SRS device is deployed, hearing protection
is required. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to lower or remove the deployable steering column
from the instrument panel to access the deployable steering column
electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 292
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2. Access the deployable steering column electrical connector.
NOTE:
If the deployable steering column does not have a hardwired pigtail, it will
be necessary to cut the wires and connector(s) from the vehicle wire
harness and reconnect to the deployable steering column.
3. Cut each of the deployable steering column wires, leaving at least 101.6 mm (4 in) to work with.
4. Remove any sheathing (if present) and strip the insulation from the ends of the cut wires.
5. Make a jumper harness to deploy the deployable steering column.
Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 9.14 m (30 ft) long and strip both ends of each wire.
At one end of the jumper harness, connect the wires together.
6. Using the end of the jumper harness that the wires are not connected together, attach each wire of the
jumper harness to each wire of the deployable steering column. Use tape or other insulating material to
make sure that the leads do not make contact with each other.
Fig. 171: Connecting Jumper Harness To Wires Of Deployable Steering Column
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remain at least 9.14 m (30 ft) away from the deployable steering column.
8. From the end of the jumper harness that is not connected to the deployable steering column, disconnect
the 2 wires of the jumper harness from each other.
9. Deploy the deployable steering column by touching the ends of the 2 wires of the jumper harness to the
terminals of a 12-volt battery.
10. To allow for cooling, wait at least 10 minutes before approaching the deployed steering column.
11. Dispose of the deployed steering column in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
AIR BAG TRIM COVER - PASSENGER, EDGE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 293
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Upholstery Clip Remover
SGT87810 (or equivalent)
Fig. 172: Identifying Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger, Edge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
04338
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
Description
Passenger air bag cover
Passenger air bag cover window (part of
passenger air bag cover)
Passenger air bag canister hook (part of
canister)
Passenger air bag canister (part of
044A74)
Passenger air bag soft pack (part of
044A74)
REMOVAL
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 294
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Do not use any sharp tools to separate the passenger air bag module trim
cover from the passenger air bag module canister. Sharp tools may
damage the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not unpack or unroll the passenger air bag module soft pack. If the
soft pack becomes unpacked or unrolled, install a new passenger air bag
module assembly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the
passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not manipulate or compromise the passenger air bag module hooks
during the removal or installation procedure. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying
incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a
crash.
1. Remove the passenger air bag module. Refer to Passenger Air Bag Module - Edge or Passenger Air
Bag Module - MKX.
2. Place a mark on top of the passenger air bag module canister for correct installation.
WARNING: Use a non-marring tool to separate the passenger air bag module
cover from the passenger air bag module assembly. Sharp tools may
damage the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying
incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
3. Using an Upholstery Clip Remover or equivalent tool, carefully lift the passenger air bag module cover
from the bottom of the air bag module canister, separating the windows from the canister hooks.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 295
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 173: View Of Passenger Air Bag Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Place an X mark on the old air bag cover to avoid reinstalling.
4. Remove the passenger air bag cover from the canister, separating the top windows from the canister
hooks.
Fig. 174: Identifying Passenger Air Bag Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Place the passenger air bag cover on a clean work surface once it is removed from the shipping package.
WARNING: Carefully inspect the passenger air bag trim cover, canister and soft
pack before assembly. If any foreign objects are found, remove them
before attaching the passenger air bag trim cover to the canister. If
the canister or soft pack is damaged, install a new passenger air bag
module assembly. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly, which increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
2. Match the number of cover windows to the number of canister hooks before attaching the passenger air
bag cover to the canister.
3. Match the top of the passenger air bag cover with the canister mark from the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 296
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
4. Position the canister onto the passenger air bag cover and engage the bottom hooks into the air bag cover
windows.
5. Push the top of the passenger air bag cover to engage the top canister hooks.
Fig. 175: Pushing Top Of Passenger Air Bag Cover To Engage Top Canister Hooks
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Inspect the passenger air bag cover windows-to-canister hooks to verify that every window has a hook
installed and the sides are not tucked or folded against the air bag canister.
Fig. 176: Inspecting Passenger Air Bag Cover Windows-To-Canister Hooks To Verify Every
Window Has A Hook Installed
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Install the passenger air bag module. Refer toPassenger Air Bag Module - Edge or Passenger Air Bag
Module - MKX.
8.
CLOCKSPRING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 297
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 177: Exploded View Of Clockspring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
3530A
2
-
3
3F818
4
-
5
-
6
14A644
7
-
8
-
9
10
11
3530B
-
Description
Upper steering column shroud
Upper steering column shroud tabs (2
required) (part of 3530)
Steering wheel rotation sensor (if
equipped)
Steering wheel rotation sensor ring (part
of 3F818) (if equipped)
Clockspring screws (2 required) (part of
13K359)
Clockspring
Clockspring electrical connector (part of
14401)
Lower steering column shroud screws (3
required) (part of 3530B)
Lower steering column shroud
Steering column tilt lock/unlock handle
Multi-function switch housing
REMOVAL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 298
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a steering wheel rotation sensor and/or adaptive
headlamps, do not allow the clockspring rotor to turn from the straightahead position after the steering wheel is removed. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE:
Make sure the road wheels are in the straight-ahead position.
2. Remove the steering wheel. For additional information, refer to STEERING COLUMN article.
3. Tape the clockspring rotor to the steering column shaft to prevent the clockspring rotor from moving out
of center.
4. Release the 2 tabs and position the upper steering column shroud upward.
5. Remove the 3 screws and the lower steering column shroud.
6. Disconnect the clockspring electrical connector.
7. Remove the tape from the clockspring rotor to the steering column shaft. Do not allow the clockspring
rotor to move from center after tape is removed.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped a with steering wheel rotation sensor and/or
adaptive headlamps, do not allow the clockspring rotor to turn from the
straight-ahead position after the steering wheel is removed. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system
failure.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped a with steering wheel rotation sensor and/or
adaptive headlamps, after the clockspring has been removed, make sure
the arrow on the steering wheel rotation sensor ring is lined up with the
arrow on the steering wheel rotation sensor housing as shown in
illustration.
8. Remove the 2 clockspring screws and remove the clockspring.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 299
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 178: Locating Clockspring Screws & Clockspring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
Vehicle repairs reusing the same clockspring
WARNING: If the clockspring is not correctly centralized, it may fail prematurely.
If in doubt, repeat the centralizing procedure. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
NOTE:
Make sure the road wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system
failure.
1. If the vehicle's clockspring has rotated out of center, follow these steps to center the clockspring.
1. Hold the clockspring outer housing stationary.
NOTE:
Overturning will destroy the clockspring. The internal ribbon wire
acts as the stop and can be broken from its internal connection.
2. While turning the rotor counterclockwise, carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length and
for a slight resistance. Stop turning at this point.
3. Turn the clockspring clockwise (approximately 2.25 turns) until the clockspring rotor wiring and
connector are in the 12 o'clock position. Clockspring is now centered.
Do not allow the rotor to turn from this position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 300
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 179: Centering Clockspring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
NOTE:
Slight rotation of the steering wheel rotation sensor ring is allowed to align
the 2 arrows.
2. Make sure the steering wheel rotation sensor ring arrow is lined up with the steering wheel rotation sensor
housing arrow as shown in illustration.
Fig. 180: Making Sure Sensor Ring Arrow Is Lined Up With Absolute Steering Angle Sensor
Housing Arrow
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the clockspring is left unattended by the technician between centralizing
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 301
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
the clockspring and installing it to the multi-function switch housing, the
centralizing procedure must be repeated. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with a steering wheel rotation sensor and/or
adaptive headlamps, slight rotation of the clockspring rotor might be
needed to seat the clockspring 3 locator pins into the steering wheel
rotation sensor and or adaptive headlamps sensor ring. Very slight
rotation is possible on a new clockspring with the sealing key installed.
NOTE:
Make sure the clockspring is fully seated into the multi-function switch
housing before installing the clockspring screws.
3. Install the clockspring and the 2 screws.
Fig. 181: Installing Clockspring & Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Connect the clockspring electrical connector.
5. Install the lower steering column shroud and the 3 screws.
6. Attach the upper steering column shroud to the lower steering column shroud.
NOTE:
If not installing a new clockspring, and the vehicle is left unattended by the
technician between the installation of the clockspring to the multi-function
switch housing and installing the steering wheel, the centralizing
procedure can be repeated at this time with the clockspring being installed
in the multi-function switch housing. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in component damage and/or system failure.
7. Install the steering wheel. For additional information, refer to STEERING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
If a new clockspring is being installed, and after the steering wheel installation, remove the
clockspring sealing key.
8. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 302
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
Fig. 182: Exploded View Of Driver Air Bag Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3600
3
-
4
43B13
Description
Driver air bag module electrical
connectors (part of 14A664)
Steering wheel
Driver air bag module locking pins (part
of 43B13)
Driver air bag module
REMOVAL
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 303
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not repaint air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers or
deployment doors; new air bag modules must be installed. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in the air bag deploying incorrectly,
which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
NOTE:
Repeat this step for both locking pins.
2. Using a 3 mm (0.11 in) Allen wrench or a suitable tool through the access hole on the backside of the
steering wheel, position the tool against the spring clip and push in, disengaging the clip from the locking
pin. With the spring clip disengaged from the locking pin, gently pull back on that side of the driver air
bag module to release it from the steering wheel.
Fig. 183: Locating Allen Wrench
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not pull the driver air bag module electrical connectors out by the
locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons can occur.
3. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking buttons on the driver air
bag module electrical connectors. With the locking buttons released, remove the electrical connectors and
the driver air bag module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 304
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 184: Releasing Locking Buttons On Driver Air Bag Module Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Do not install the driver air bag module electrical connectors by the
locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons can occur.
NOTE:
The driver air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in
the released position when the connector is being installed or connector
damage may occur.
NOTE:
The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be
reversed when connected to the driver air bag module. Match the electrical
connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force the
electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Damage to the
connector or component may occur.
1. With the locking buttons released, install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the
driver air bag module and seat the locking buttons.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 305
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 185: Locating Driver Air Bag Module Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Audible clicks will be heard when both wire clips are seated in the driver
air bag module.
2. Align the driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 2
driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel wire clips.
When the 2 locking pins are seated in place, there should be an even gap between the driver air bag
module trim cover and the steering wheel.
3. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Fig. 186: Exploded View Of Front Impact Severity Sensor With Torque Specification
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 306
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W712191
2
14B006
3
-
Description
LH and RH front impact severity sensor
bolts
LH and RH front impact severity sensors
LH and RH front impact severity sensor
electrical connectors (part of 14290)
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module
(RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for
deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original
production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed
whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
3. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM)
and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do
so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which
increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
Make sure the hood latch bracket and front impact severity sensor mating
surfaces are clean and free of foreign material.
NOTE:
Note position of the 2 locator tabs on the front impact severity sensor for
installation.
4. Remove the bolt and the front impact severity sensor.
To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:51 AM
Page 307
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM MODULE (OCSM) - MANUAL SEAT TRACK
Fig. 187: Exploded View Of Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
14B422
-
Description
Occupant classification system module
(OCSM) electrical connector (part of
14A698)
OCSM
OCSM screws
REMOVAL
WARNING: Use care when handling the front passenger seat and track assembly.
Dropping the assembly, placing excessive weight on or sitting on a front
passenger seat that is not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged
seat components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 308
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
2. Disconnect the occupant classification system module (OCSM) electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 screws and OCSM.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Install the passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional
information, refer to SEATING article.
6. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCSM.
If installing the original OCSM, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. For
additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight
Test.
If installing a new OCSM, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the SRS. For
additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM MODULE (OCSM) - POWER SEAT TRACK
Fig. 188: Exploded View Of Occupant Classification Module - Power Seat Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
Description
Occupant classification system module
(OCSM) electrical connector (part of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 309
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2
3
14A698)
OCSM
OCSM screws
14B422
-
REMOVAL
WARNING: Use care when handling the front passenger seat and track assembly.
Dropping the assembly, placing excessive weight on or sitting on a front
passenger seat that is not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged
seat components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the front passenger seat. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
Disconnect the occupant classification system module (OCSM) electrical connector.
Remove the 2 screws and OCSM.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install the front passenger seat. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer
to SEATING article.
6. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
7. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCSM.
If installing the original OCSM, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional information,
refer to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test.
If installing a new OCSM, carry out the System Reset procedure. For additional information, refer
to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - MANUAL SEAT TRACK
REMOVAL
WARNING: Use care when handling the front passenger seat and track assembly.
Dropping the assembly, placing excessive weight on or sitting on a front
passenger seat that is not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged
seat components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 310
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the
condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
All occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt(s)
1. Remove the manual seat track. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
NOTE:
After marking the seat track rails, do not change the position of the seat
track.
2. Mark the position of both seat track rails.
Fig. 189: Marking Position Of Both Seat Track Rails
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
3. Remove the nut and safety belt buckle.
Fig. 190: Identifying Nut And Safety Belt Buckle
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 311
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
NOTE:
Outboard front cross brace screws shown in illustration, inboard similar.
4. On the side with the affected OCS I-bolt(s), remove the 2 front cross brace screws.
Fig. 191: Identifying Front Cross Brace Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), disengage the seat adjuster handle spring and
position it aside.
Fig. 192: Identifying Seat Adjuster Handle Spring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Separate the seat adjuster handle from the affected side of the seat track rail with the OCS weight sensor
bolt(s).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 312
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 193: Identifying Seat Track Rail & OCS Weight Sensor Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Outboard rear cross brace screws shown in illustration, inboard similar.
7. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), remove the 2 rear cross brace screws.
Fig. 194: Identifying Rear Cross Brace Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If any occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt nuts are
removed, new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts must be installed.
8. Remove and discard the 2 OCS weight sensor bolt nuts from the affected side of the seat track rail with
the OCS weight sensor bolt(s).
Fig. 195: Identifying OCS Weight Sensor Bolt Nuts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 313
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolt(s) from the seat track rail.
Fig. 196: Identifying Side Plate
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor
(OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to
compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or
OCS weight sensor bolts.
10. Using a suitable tool, clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the spring washer on the
affected OCS weight sensor bolt as shown in illustration.
Fig. 197: Clamping Side Plate To A Bench Or Table Using A Suitable Tool
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Note the position of the OCS weight sensor bolt, spring washer and
retaining clip for installation.
11. Remove and discard the retaining clip from the affected OCS weight sensor bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 314
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 198: Identifying Retaining Clip From Affected OCS Weight Sensor Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Release the clamp and remove the OCS weight sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate.
INSTALLATION
All OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
NOTE:
Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor
(OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to
compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or
OCS weight sensor bolts.
1. Position the spring washer and OCS weight sensor bolt in the side plate. Then clamp the side plate to a
bench or table to compress the OCS weight sensor bolt spring washer.
Fig. 199: Clamping Side Plate To A Bench Or Table Using A Suitable Tool
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clip is seated fully in the
OCS weight sensor bolt groove underneath the OCS weight sensor O-ring
seal.
2. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clips in the OCS weight sensor groove underneath the
O-ring seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 315
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 200: Identifying Retaining Clip From Affected OCS Weight Sensor Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Unclamp the side plate with the installed OCS weight sensor bolt from the bench or table.
Fig. 201: Clamping Side Plate To A Bench Or Table Using A Suitable Tool
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Slight rotational adjustment of the OCS weight sensors bolts may be
necessary to install the OCS weight sensor bolts and side plate to the seat
track rail.
4. Install the side plate and OCS weight sensor bolts to the seat track rail.
Fig. 202: Identifying Side Plate
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 316
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
When installing the side plate to the seat track rail, 2 new OCS weight
sensor nuts must be installed.
5. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts to the seat track rail.
Tighten to 33 Nm (24 lb-ft).
Fig. 203: Identifying OCS Weight Sensor Bolt Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the seat adjuster handle to the seat track rail.
Fig. 204: Identifying Seat Track Rail & OCS Weight Sensor Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Engage the seat adjuster handle spring.
Fig. 205: Identifying Seat Adjuster Handle Spring
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 317
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the 2 rear cross brace screws.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Fig. 206: Identifying Rear Cross Brace Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Install the 2 front cross brace screws.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Fig. 207: Identifying Front Cross Brace Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
10. Install the nut and safety belt buckle.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 318
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 208: Identifying Safety Belt Buckle Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
11. Install the manual seat track. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
12. Install the passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional
information, refer to SEATING article.
13. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component.
If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out
the SRS. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero
Seat Weight Test.
If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the
SRS. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - POWER SEAT TRACK
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 319
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 209: Identifying Power Seat Track With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
61710
61202
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
Description
Power seat track assembly
Safety belt buckle
Safety belt buckle nut (part of 61202)
Seat track front cross brace nuts (2
required) (part of 61710)
Occupant classification sensor (OCS)
weight sensor bolt protection bracket
screws (2 required) (part of 61710)
OCS weight sensor bolt nuts (4 required)
(part of 61710)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 320
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
18
-
OCS weight sensor bolt protection
bracket (part of 61710)
Outboard seat track rail OCS weight
sensor bolt retaining clips (2 required)
(part of 61710)
Inboard seat track rail OCS weight sensor
bolt spring washers (2 required) (part of
61710)
Inboard seat track rail OCS weight sensor
bolt retaining clips (2 required) (part of
61710)
Seat track front cross brace (part of
61710)
Outboard seat track rail OCS weight
sensor bolts (2 required) (part of 61710)
Outboard seat track rail OCS weight
sensor bolt spring washers (2 required)
(part of 61710)
Inboard seat track rail OCS weight sensor
bolts (2 required) (part of 61710)
Outboard seat track riser cover shield
(part of 61710)
Outboard seat track riser cover shield
retainer (part of 61710)
Outboard seat track rail (part of 61710)
Inboard seat track rail (part of 61710)
REMOVAL
WARNING: Use care when handling the front passenger seat and track assembly.
Dropping the assembly, placing excessive weight on or sitting on a front
passenger seat that is not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged
seat components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the
condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 321
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
All occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt(s)
1. Remove the power seat track. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
NOTE:
Inboard seat track rail shown in illustration, outboard similar.
NOTE:
After marking the seat track rails, do not change the position of the seat
track.
2. Mark the position of both seat track rails.
Fig. 210: Marking Position Of Both Seat Track Rails
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
3. Remove the nut and safety belt buckle.
Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
4. Remove the front retainer and outboard seat track riser cover shield.
5. Remove the 2 retainers and occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt protection bracket.
All OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
6. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), remove the nut from the seat track front cross
brace.
NOTE:
If any OCS weight sensor bolt nuts are removed, new OCS weight sensor
bolt nuts must be installed.
7. Remove and discard the 2 OCS weight sensor bolt nuts from the affected side of the seat track rail with
the OCS weight sensor(s).
NOTE:
Outboard side shown in illustration, inboard similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 322
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
8. Separate the front seat track motor cable from the affected seat track rail. Then remove the side plate with
the OCS weight sensor bolts from the seat track rail.
Fig. 211: Identifying Front Seat Track Motor Cable
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor
(OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to
compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or
OCS weight sensor bolts.
9. Using a suitable tool, clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the spring washer on the
affected OCS weight sensor bolt as shown in illustration.
Fig. 212: Clamping Side Plate To A Bench Or Table To Compress Spring Washer On Affected
OCS Weight Sensor Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Note the position of the OCS weight sensor bolt, spring washer and
retaining clip for installation.
10. Remove and discard the retaining clip from the affected OCS weight sensor bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 323
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 213: Identifying Retaining Clip From Affected OCS Weight Sensor Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Release the clamp and remove the OCS weight sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate.
INSTALLATION
All OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
NOTE:
Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor
(OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to
compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or
OCS weight sensor bolts.
1. Position the spring washer and OCS weight sensor bolt in the side plate. Then clamp the side plate to a
bench or table to compress the OCS weight sensor bolt spring washer.
NOTE:
Make sure the OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clip is seated fully in the
OCS weight sensor bolt groove underneath the OCS weight sensor O-ring
seal.
2. Install the OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clip.
Fig. 214: Identifying Retaining Clip From Affected OCS Weight Sensor Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the clamp and side plate from the bench or table.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 324
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 215: Clamping Side Plate To A Bench Or Table To Compress Spring Washer On Affected
OCS Weight Sensor Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Slight rotational adjustment of the front seat track motor cable and OCS
weight sensor bolts may be necessary to install the OCS weight sensor
bolts and side plate to the seat track rail.
4. Install the front seat track motor cable to the seat track rail. Then install the side plate with the OCS
weight sensor bolts to the seat track rail.
Fig. 216: Identifying Front Seat Track Motor Cable
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
When installing the side plate to the seat track rail, 2 new OCS weight
sensor nuts must be installed.
5. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts to the seat track rail.
Tighten to 33 Nm (24 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Outboard side shown in illustration, inboard similar.
6. Install the nut to the seat track front cross brace.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 325
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
7. Install the 2 retainers and OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket.
8. Install the front retainer and outboard seat track riser cover shield.
Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
9. Install the nut and safety belt buckle.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
All OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
10. Install the power seat track. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
11. Install the passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional
information, refer to SEATING article.
12. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component.
If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out
the SRS. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero
Seat Weight Test.
If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the
SRS. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Resetn.
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR
Fig. 217: Exploded View Of Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator - Edge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 326
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Item
Part Number
1
13D730
2
04302
3
-
Description
Passenger airbag deactivation (PAD)
indicator
Instrument panel (I/P) center finish panel
Passenger airbag deactivation indicator
electrical connector (part of 14401)
Fig. 218: Exploded View Of Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator - MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
04302
2
13D730
Description
Instrument panel center finish panel
Passenger air bag deactivation (PAD)
indicator
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 327
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
3
-
4
5
7E391
045A76
6
W706092
7
047A04
PAD indicator electrical connector (part
of 14401)
Console shifter bezel
Center finish console panel
Instrument panel power point/storage bin
retainers
Instrument panel power point/storage bin
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
The passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the hazard
switch/traction control switch assembly.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the console shifter bezel (MKX only).
3. Remove the center finish console panel (MKX only).
4. Remove the 2 retainers from the power point/storage bin (MKX only).
5. Pull and release the instrument panel center finish panel.
6. Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector.
7. Release the 4 tabs (2 upper and 2 lower) on the PAD indicator and remove it from the instrument panel
center finish panel.
Fig. 219: Locating Tabs On Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
9. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 328
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE - EDGE
Fig. 220: Identifying Passenger Air Bag Module - Edge With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
044A74
2
-
3
-
4
5
6
04338
W505422
W505422
Description
Passenger air bag module assembly
Passenger air bag module electrical
connectors (part of 14401)
Passenger air bag cover clips (part of
04338)
Passenger air bag cover
Passenger air bag module inboard bolt
Passenger air bag module outboard bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 329
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Do no install a new passenger air bag module assembly due to a damaged or
discolored passenger air bag cover. The passenger air bag cover can be
serviced separately from the passenger air bag module assembly. For
additional information, refer to Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger, Edge.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
2. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener.
3. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts from the cross-car beam bracket.
NOTE:
Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur.
4. Through the glove compartment opening, release the LH side passenger air bag cover clips. Then release
the foreward-most passenger air bag cover clips and separate the passenger air bag cover and passenger
air bag module from the instrument panel.
5. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the RH
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 330
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 221: Releasing Locking Button On RH Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connector Using
A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the
locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
6. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector.
7. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the LH
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Fig. 222: Releasing Locking Button On LH Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connector Using
A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the
locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
8. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector and remove the passenger air
bag module.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the
locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 331
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must
be in the released position when the connector is being installed or
connector damage may occur.
NOTE:
The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and
cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module.
Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag
module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag
module. Damage to the connector or component may occur.
NOTE:
RH shown in illustration, LH similar.
1. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into
the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons.
Fig. 223: Locating Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
passenger air bag cover. Damage to the air bag module may occur.
NOTE:
During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the passenger
air bag cover clips are fully seated in the instrument panel.
2. Install the passenger air bag module passenger air bag cover rear-most clips into the instrument panel
first. Then install the side passenger air bag cover clips working around to the forward-most clips seating
each of them fully into the instrument panel.
NOTE:
To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the 2 passenger air bag
module bolts in this order.
3. Install the passenger air bag module bolts.
1. Install the inboard passenger air bag module bolt.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 332
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
2. Install the outboard passenger air bag module bolt.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Fig. 224: Installing Passenger Air Bag Module Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Close the glove compartment door.
If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE - MKX
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 333
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 225: Exploded View Of Passenger Air Bag Module With Torque Specifications - MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
04338
W707628
Description
RH instrument panel finish panel
LH duct assembly bracket screw
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 334
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
7
19B680
19B680
W707628
W707628
W701014
8
-
9
10
044A74
-
11
W505422
12
W505422
13
W503922
LH duct assembly
RH duct assembly
LH duct assembly screw
RH duct assembly screw
Passenger air bag module nuts
Passenger air bag module electrical
connectors part of 14401)
Passenger air bag module
Passenger air bag module support bracket
Inboard passenger air bag module-tosupport bracket bolt
Outboard passenger air bag module-tosupport bracket bolt
Passenger air bag module bracket-tocross vehicle beam bolts
REMOVAL
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
2. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Then unhook the glove compartment door from the
instrument panel.
If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 335
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
3. Pull straight out to release the 5 retaining clips and remove the RH instrument panel finish panel.
4. Remove the screw from the LH duct assembly bracket from the front of the instrument panel.
Fig. 226: Locating Screw On LH Duct Assembly Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the LH duct assembly.
Fig. 227: Locating Screw On LH Duct Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the RH duct assembly.
Fig. 228: Locating Screw On RH Duct Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the 4 bolts and the passenger air bag module support bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 336
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
8. Remove the 3 nuts from the passenger air bag module.
NOTE:
Do not allow the passenger air bag module to hang from the wiring
harness. Damage to the wiring harness and connectors may occur.
9. Lower the rear of the passenger air bag module off the 3 mounting studs. Move the passenger air bag
module rearward to release the 7 hooks from the instrument panel and rest the module on the cross
vehicle beam.
Fig. 229: Identifying Hooks On I/P
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the LH
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Fig. 230: Releasing Locking Button On LH Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connector Using
A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the
locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
11. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector from the passenger air bag
module.
12. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the RH
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 337
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 231: Releasing Locking Button On RH Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connector Using
A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the
locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
13. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Remove the passenger air bag
module from the glove compartment opening.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the
locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur.
NOTE:
The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must
be in the released position when the connector is being installed or
connector damage may occur.
NOTE:
The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and
cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module.
Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag
module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag
module. Damage to the connector or component may occur.
NOTE:
RH shown in illustration, LH similar.
1. Position the passenger air bag module on the cross vehicle beam. With the locking buttons released,
install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and
seat the locking buttons.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 338
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 232: Locating Passenger Air Bag Module Electrical Connectors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
During the passenger air bag module installation, make sure all 7 of the
module hooks are fully seated in the instrument panel.
2. Install the passenger air bag module 7 hooks into the instrument panel. Raise the rear of the passenger air
bag module onto the 3 mounting studs.
Fig. 233: Identifying Hooks On I/P
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the 3 passenger air bag module nuts.
Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
NOTE:
To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the passenger air bag module
bracket and passenger air bag module bolts in this order.
4. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket.
1. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and 2 bolts to the cross vehicle beam.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
2. Install the inboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Install the outboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt.
Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 339
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 234: Installing Passenger Air Bag Module Support Bracket Bolts In Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the screw and the RH duct assembly.
6. Install the screw and the LH duct assembly.
7. Install the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket in the front of the instrument panel.
NOTE:
Make sure the RH instrument panel finish panel 5 retaining clips are fully
seated in the instrument panel.
8. Install the RH instrument panel finish panel.
9. Install and close the glove compartment door.
If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener.
10. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 340
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 235: Exploded View Of Restraints Control Module (RCM) With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
W707935
14B321
-
5
W707935
6
W505157
7
8
45B34
7E395
Description
Restraints control module (RCM) bolts
RCM
RCM small connector (part of 14401)
RCM large connector (part of 14A005)
Inner floor console support-to-instrument
panel bolts (2 required)
Inner floor console support bolts (4
required)
Inner floor console support
Selector lever cable
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 341
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module
(RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for
deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original
production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed
whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), it is necessary to carry
out programmable module installation (PMI). For additional information, refer to
MODULE CONFIGURATION article. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in system failure.
NOTE:
When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the
correct RCM is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs
will result.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct RCM fuse is
removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for programmable module installation
(PMI). For additional information, refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
3. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL AND
CONSOLE article.
4. Disconnect the selector lever cable from the ball stud located on the shifter and remove the cable from the
retaining clips.
Fig. 236: Locating Shift Cable From Ball Stud On Shifter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 342
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the inner floor console support.
Remove the bolts from the inner floor console support-to-instrument panel.
Disconnect the electrical connectors from the front inner floor console support.
Remove the inner floor console support.
Press to release the locking tab and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector.
Fig. 237: Locating Locking Tab On Small RCM Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops.
2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
Fig. 238: Disconnecting RCM Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM)
and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do
so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which
increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 343
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
1. Install the RCM and the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
2. Make sure the large RCM connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before
attempting to connect the connector.
Fig. 239: View Of Connector Position Assurance Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Placing the large restraints control module (RCM) electrical wiring
connector into the RCM on an angle, may cause bad electrical connections
and damaged components.
3. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
NOTE:
Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and
seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the connector into
position on the restraints control module (RCM), before using the
lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause component or connector damage.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a
subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
Fig. 240: Large RCM Electrical Wiring Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:52 AM
Page 344
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
4. Connect the large RCM electrical connector.
Using the connector position assurance lever, pivot it toward the RCM, drawing the connector into
the RCM.
Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
Fig. 241: Locating RCM Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector.
6. Install the inner floor console support.
7. Install the 4 bolts (2 each side) to the inner floor console support.
Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
8. Install the screws to the inner floor console support bracket-to-floor instrument panel.
Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
9. Install the selector lever cable in the selector lever housing.
NOTE:
When installing the selector lever cable, make sure that the selector lever
cable locking tabs are locked in place and the cable end is snapped onto
the ball stud. Press the selector lever cable into the bracket and listen for
the cable to click in place. Pull back on the selector lever cable to make
sure that it is locked into the bracket. Also make sure that the selector
lever cable end is correctly installed onto the ball stud. Pull back on the
selector lever cable end to make sure that the cable end is correctly
installed.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 345
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
10. Connect the selector lever cable end to the floor shifter.
11. Attach the electrical connectors to the front inner floor console support bracket.
12. Install the floor console. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE
article.
13. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
14. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete PMI. For additional information,
refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
15. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and
visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator
will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present,
the air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will
sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and occupant classification system module (OCSM) using a
scan tool.
SAFETY CANOPY MODULE
NOTE:
RH shown in illustration, LH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 346
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 242: Identifying Safety Canopy Module With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
042D94 RH/042D95 LH
2
W713437
Description
Safety canopy module
Safety canopy module front tether cord
anchor bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 347
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
W713437
8
W713437
9
W713437
10
-
11
-
12
W713437
13
W713437
14
W713437
15
-
16
W713437
17
W713437
18
-
Safety canopy module front tether cord
anchor pin-type retainer (part of 042D94)
Safety canopy module front tether cord
A-pillar routing pin-type retainer (part of
042D94)
Safety canopy module front tether cord
A-pillar trim bracket routing pin-type
retainers (2 required) (part of 042D94)
A-pillar trim bracket
Safety canopy module A-pillar trim
bracket bolt
Safety canopy module C-pillar bolts (2
required)
Safety canopy module rear tether cord
anchor bracket bolt
Safety canopy module rear tether cord
routing clip pin-type retainer (part of
042D94)
Safety canopy module rear tether cord
anchor bracket pin-type retainer (part of
042D94)
Safety canopy module D-pillar bolt
Safety canopy module front door opening
bolt
Safety canopy module B-pillar bolt
Safety canopy module B-pillar pin-type
retainer (part of 042D94)
Safety canopy module rear door opening
bolt
Safety canopy module rear bolts (2
required)
Safety canopy module electrical
connector (part of 14A005)
REMOVAL
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always carry or place a live safety canopy, or side air curtain module,
with the module and tear seam pointed away from your body. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in the
event of an accidental deployment.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 348
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Anytime the safety canopy or side air curtain module has deployed, a new
headliner and new A-, B-, C- and D-pillar upper trim panels and attaching
hardware must be installed. Remove any other damaged components and
hardware and install new components and hardware as needed. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in the safety canopy or side air
curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: When installing a new headliner on a vehicle equipped with safety canopy
or side air curtain modules, make sure the headliner has the word
AIRBAG on the headliner where it meets each B-pillar trim panel.
Otherwise, you have the wrong headliner. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain module not deploying
or deploying incorrectly, increasing the risk of personal injury or death in
a crash.
WARNING: Before installing a safety canopy or side air curtain module, inspect the
roofline for any damage. If necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked
to its original condition and structural integrity. Install new fasteners if
damaged and remove foreign material. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain deploying incorrectly,
which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Inspect a safety canopy or side air curtain module before installation. If
the module is damaged, the cover has separated or the safety
canopy/side air curtain material has been exposed, install a new module.
Do not attempt to repair the module. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain deploying incorrectly,
which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the safety
canopy or side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the safety canopy or side air curtain module deploying
incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a
crash.
WARNING: Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of a safety
canopy module, side air curtain module or interior trim panel. This will
prevent the safety canopy or side air curtain module from deploying
correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of
serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 349
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the safety
canopy in the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk
of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the safety canopy module deploying incorrectly and increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indictor illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the
condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM & ORNAMENTATION
article.
NOTE:
Do not pull the safety canopy module electrical connector out by the
locking button. Damage to the locking button can occur.
3. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the safety
canopy module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 350
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 243: Releasing Locking Button On Safety Canopy Module Electrical Connector Using A Small
Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Note the pin-type retainer on the safety canopy module front tether cord to
the A-pillar sheet metal for installation.
4. Remove the anchor bolt, then detach the pin-type retainer and the front tether cord anchor from the Apillar.
5. Remove the safety canopy module front tether cord routing pin-type retainer from the A-pillar sheet
metal.
6. Detach the 2 safety canopy module front tether cord A-pillar trim bracket routing pin-type retainers from
the A-pillar trim bracket.
7. Remove the safety canopy module A-pillar trim bracket bolt.
8. Remove the safety canopy module front door opening bolt.
NOTE:
Note the position and the routing of the safety canopy module rear tether
cord and routing clip pin-type retainer for installation.
9. Detach the safety canopy module rear tether cord routing clip pin-type retainer from the upper D-pillar
sheet metal.
NOTE:
Note the position of the safety canopy module rear tether anchor bracket
hook and pin-type retainer in the D-pillar sheet metal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 351
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
10. Remove the bolt, then detach the pin-type retainer and remove the safety canopy module rear tether
anchor bracket from the D-pillar sheet metal.
11. Remove the safety canopy module rear door opening bolt.
12. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the C-pillar.
13. Remove the safety canopy module D-pillar bolt.
14. Remove the 2 safety canopy module rear bolts.
15. Remove the safety canopy module bolt near the B-pillar.
16. Remove the safety canopy module B-pillar pin-type retainer.
17. Move the safety canopy module forward to release the rear bracket hook from the sheet metal and remove
the safety canopy module.
Fig. 244: Moving Safety Canopy Module Forward To Release Rear Bracket Hook From Sheet
Metal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Before installing a safety canopy or side air curtain module, inspect the
roofline for any damage. If necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked
to its original condition and structural integrity. Install new fasteners if
damaged and remove foreign material. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain deploying incorrectly,
which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Inspect a safety canopy or side air curtain module before installation. If
the module is damaged, the cover has separated or the safety
canopy/side air curtain material has been exposed, install a new module.
Do not attempt to repair the module. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain deploying incorrectly,
which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of a safety
canopy module, side air curtain module or interior trim panel. This will
prevent the safety canopy or side air curtain module from deploying
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 352
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of
serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the safety
canopy in the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk
of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the safety canopy module deploying incorrectly and increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. Discard the 2 front J-nuts and install new.
Fig. 245: Identifying 2 Front J-nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Discard the 2 rear J-nuts and install new.
Fig. 246: Identifying 2 Rear J-nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Position the safety canopy module by moving it rearward, installing the rear bracket hook in the sheet
metal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 353
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 247: Moving Safety Canopy Module Forward To Release Rear Bracket Hook From Sheet
Metal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Install the safety canopy module B-pillar pin-type retainer.
Install the front tether cord anchor pin-type retainer.
Install the safety canopy module front tether cord routing pin-type retainer to the A-pillar sheet metal.
Attach the 2 safety canopy module front tether cord A-pillar trim bracket routing pin-type retainers to the
A-pillar trim bracket.
8. Install the safety canopy module rear tether anchor bracket to the D-pillar sheet metal and attach the pintype retainer.
9. Attach the safety canopy module rear tether cord routing clip pin-type retainer to the upper D-pillar sheet
metal.
NOTE:
Make sure that all safety canopy module bolt holes line up with all J-nuts.
10. Install the safety canopy module D-pillar bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Install the safety canopy module A-pillar trim bracket bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
12. Install the safety canopy module bolt near the B-pillar.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Install the 2 safety canopy module rear bolts.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
14. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the C-pillar.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
15. Install the safety canopy module rear door opening bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
16. Install the safety canopy module rear tether cord anchor bracket bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Install the safety canopy module front door opening bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 354
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
18. Install the safety canopy module front tether cord anchor bolt.
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
NOTE:
Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
NOTE:
The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in
the released position when the connector is being installed or connector
damage may occur.
NOTE:
The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be
reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the
electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do
not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage
to the connector or component may occur.
19. With the locking button released, install the safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the
safety canopy module and seat the locking button.
Fig. 248: Identifying Passenger Safety Canopy Module Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Install the headliner. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM & ORNAMENTATION
article.
21. Repower the SRS For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
SEAT POSITION SENSOR
NOTE:
Power seat shown in illustration, manual similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 355
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 249: Exploded View Of Seat Position Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
14B416
3
-
Description
Seat position sensor electrical connector
(part of 14A699)
Seat position sensor
Seat position sensor retaining clip (part
of 14B416)
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the driver seat. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
Power seats
3. Detach the wire harness routing pin-type retainer from the seat position sensor bracket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 356
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 250: Locating Wire Harness Routing Pin-Type Retainer From Seat Position Sensor Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All seats
4. Push apart then inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
Fig. 251: Pushing Apart Then Inward To Release Seat Position Sensor Locking Clip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Slide the seat position sensor rearward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket. Then remove the seat
position sensor.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 357
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
NOTE:
Passenger shown in illustration, driver similar.
Fig. 252: Identifying Side Air Bag Module With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
60508
2
-
3
64416/64810
4
-
5
6
611D10 RH/611D11 LH
W506021
Description
Seat backrest trim cover rear panel
reinforcement board
Seat backrest trim cover rear panel
reinforcement board pin-type retainers
Seat backrest trim cover and foam pad
Side air bag module electrical connector
(part of 14K155)
Side air bag module
Side air bag module bolts (2 required)
REMOVAL
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 358
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its
mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat
side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury
or death in a crash.
NOTE:
If a side air bag deployment took place, a new side air bag module and bolts
must be installed. The side air bag module bracket on the seat back frame
should be inspected and installed new if necessary.
NOTE:
When installing a new side air bag after deployment, refer to SEATING article
for additional information.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the
condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the affected seat and backrest fully up and forward.
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
3. Release the seat backrest trim cover rear panel lower J-clip. Then, release the 2 seat backrest trim cover
rear panel side J-clips.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 359
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 253: Identifying Backrest Trim Cover J-Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The reinforcement board and seat backrest trim cover rear panel can be
positioned aside with the reinforcement board still inside the seat backrest
trim cover rear panel.
4. Detach the 2 pin-type retainers and position aside the seat backrest trim cover rear panel and
reinforcement board.
5. Through the rear of the seat remove and discard the 2 side air bag module bolts. Then, separate the side
air bag module from the seat backrest.
NOTE:
Do not pull the side air bag module electrical connector out by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
6. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the side air
bag module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector and
the side air bag module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 360
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 254: Lifting Up & Releasing Locking Button On Side Air Bag Module Electrical Connector
Using A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Do not install the side air bag module electrical connector by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button may occur.
NOTE:
The side air bag module electrical connector locking button must be in the
released position when the connector is being installed or connector
damage may occur.
NOTE:
The side air bag module electrical connector is unique and cannot be
reversed when connected to the side air bag module. Match the electrical
connector key to the keyway in the side air bag module. Do not force the
electrical connector into the side air bag module. Damage to the connector
or component may occur.
1. With the locking button released, install the side air bag module electrical connector fully into the side air
bag module and seat the locking button.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 361
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 255: Identifying Side Air Bag Module Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between
the side air bag module and the backrest frame. Damage to wire harness
may occur.
NOTE:
When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed.
2. Position the side air bag module in the seat backrest and install the 2 new bolts.
Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
3. Position the seat backrest trim cover rear panel and attach the 2 pin-type retainers.
4. Attach the 2 seat backrest cover rear side J-clips. Then attach the seat backrest cover rear lower J-clip.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - B-PILLAR
NOTE:
RH shown in illustration, LH similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 362
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
Fig. 256: Exploded View Of Side Impact Sensor - B-Pillar With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
13208
13228
W712191
14B345
5
-
6
24356
7
-
Description
Front door scuff plate
Rear door scuff plate
Side impact sensor retaining bolt
Side impact sensor
Side impact sensor electrical connector
(part of 14A005)
Lower B-pillar trim panel
Lower B-pillar trim panel retainers (part
of 24356)
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module
(RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for
deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original
production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed
whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 363
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Position the front seat forward.
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
3. Remove the front door scuff plate.
Pull up to release the 5 retaining clips.
4. Remove the rear door scuff plate.
Pull up to release the 2 retaining clips.
5. Detach the 2 retainers and remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
Fig. 257: Identifying Clips & Lower B-Pillar Trim Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM)
and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do
so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which
increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
Make sure the B-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean
and free of foreign material.
NOTE:
Note the position of the side impact sensor locating tabs for installation.
7. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor.
To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
9. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 364
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - C-PILLAR
NOTE:
RH shown in illustration, LH similar.
Fig. 258: Exploded View Of Side Impact Sensor - C-Pillar With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W712191
14B345
3
-
4
31012
Description
Side impact sensor bolt
Side impact sensor
Side impact sensor electrical connector
(part of 14A005)
Quarter trim panel
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module
(RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for
deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original
production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed
whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 365
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 RESTRAINTS Supplemental Restraint System - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest.
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
3. Position aside the quarter trim panel.
Pull out on the quarter trim panel at the C-pillar to release the retaining clip to access the C-pillar
side impact sensor.
Fig. 259: Pulling Out On Quarter Trim Panel At C-Pillar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector.
NOTE:
Note the position of the 2 side impact sensor locating tabs for installation.
NOTE:
Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean
and free of foreign material.
5. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor.
To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM)
and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do
so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which
increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:12:53 AM
Page 366
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Seating - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Front Seat
Cushion frame-to-seat track bolt
23
Fold-flat or power recliner-to-backrest frame bolt
50
Manual seat track front occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor
5
bolt protection bracket screw
Manual seat track rear OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screw
2
OCS weight sensor bolt nut
33
Power seat track front cross brace nut
20
Power seat track inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screw 2
Power seat track outboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket
6
screw
Recliner motor bolt
8
Recliner-to-seat track bolt
50
Safety belt buckle-to-seat track bolt/nut
40
Safety belt retractor belt anchor nut
47
Seat track-to-floor bolta
Side air bag module bolt
23
Rear Seat
40 percent seat backrest assembly-to-floor nutsa
lb-ft
lb-in
17
37
-
-
44
24
15
-
18
18
-
53
37
30
35
17
71
-
-
-
40 percent seat kneeling assembly-to-floor bolta
-
-
-
40 percent seat kneeling assembly-to-floor nuta
-
-
-
60 percent seat backrest assembly-to-floor nuta
-
-
-
60 percent seat kneeling assembly-to-floor bolta
-
-
-
60 percent seat kneeling assembly-to-floor nuta
-
-
-
60 percent seat rear tie-down-to-floor nuta
Armrest bolt
Cushion frame pivot bracket bolt
Kneeling assembly-to-cushion frame bolt
Safety belt buckle bolt (40 and 60 percent seat)
Safety belt retractor belt and buckle anchor bolt (60 percent seat)
Safety belt retractor nut
25
25
25
65
65
50
18
18
18
48
48
37
-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:33
11:08:15 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
a Refer to appropriate procedure.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
SEATS
Front Seats
The front seats can be equipped with the following systems:
Two-way manual seat track
Four-way manual seat track
Six-way power seat track
Manual recline
Power recline
Backrest, without fold-flat
Backrest with fold-flat (optional, passenger only)
Heated seats
Heated/cooled climate controlled seats
Memory driver seat
Manual lumbar
Power lumbar
Adjustable head restraints
Seat side air bags (standard)
Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system on passenger seat
Driver Seat Module (DSM) - Memory Seat
The power driver seat and power exterior rear view mirrors are controlled by the driver seat module (DSM)
only when the vehicle is equipped with the programmable/recall memory option. The DSM is located on the
driver seat track.
For information on programming memory positions or recalling a stored memory position, refer to Memory
Position Programming.
Memory Recall - Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
When the vehicle is equipped with a memory driver seat, the remote keyless entry (RKE) can be used with a
key that includes an integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT). A personality or memory position for the driver seat
and exterior rear view mirrors can be assigned to an IKT. Up to 2 personalities can be assigned, 1 per IKT. If
the remote memory has been activated and that IKT has been assigned a personality, pushing the button to
unlock the vehicle doors will recall the memory seat and exterior rear view mirror positions.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
For information on diagnosing a RKE concern or associating an IKT to a memory position, refer to
HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES & ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
Easy Entry/Easy Exit
The driver power seat easy entry/exit feature can be enabled/disabled using a scan tool. When enabled, the
feature becomes a user accessible item on the message center allowing the user to turn the feature on and off.
Refer to the Owner's Literature or INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING
CHIMES article for information on the message center.
Heated Seats
This system allows independent seat electrical heating of each front seat on demand.
The components of the system are:
the seat heater mats located on the seat cushion and backrest.
the heated seat module located on the passenger power seat track and cushion frame on manual seat track.
the heated seat switches, located on the HVAC module.
temperature sensors, located in the seat cushion heater mats.
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Climate Controlled Seats
The climate controlled seat system is able to heat and cool the front seats. Each climate controlled seat is
operated by push-buttons on the HVAC module located on the instrument panel. Each front seat temperature is
then monitored and controlled by the dual climate control seat module (DCSM) located on the front passenger
seat track.
The dual climate controlled seat system contains the following components:
HVAC module
DCSM
Thermo-electric device (TED) and blower assembly within each front seat cushion and backrest
Air filter (attached to each TED and blower assembly)
Cushion TED adapter attached to the cushion frame
Cushion and backrest manifolds
Cushion and backrest foam pads
Cushion and backrest trim covers
Manual Lumbar
The front seat manual lumbar is adjusted by a handle mounted on the side of the seat cushion side shield.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Power Lumbar
The driver seat can have an electromechanical backrest pad adjuster. The lumbar switch adjustment is on the
side of the seat cushion side shield and is part of the seat control switch.
Manual Recline
The manual recline can be adjusted by a handle mounted on the outboard side of the cushion side shield.
Front Seats Without Backrest Fold Flat
Manual recliners on seats that do not fold-flat are only serviceable by installing a new backrest frame assembly.
Passenger Seats With Backrest Fold Flat
Front passenger seats can come with a backrest that folds flat, when optioned with manual recline. The recliners
on this backrest will recline the backrest back or fold the backrest forward. Pull up on the recliner handle
allowing the backrest to recline forward. When the backrest reclines fully forward, if the recliner handle is held
up, the backrest can continue to fold forward until it reaches the fold-flat position. Manual recliners on seats that
fold flat are serviced separately from the backrest frame assembly.
Power Recline
The front seats can come with an electromechanical backrest adjuster. The backrest adjustment switch is located
on the side of the seat cushion side shield and is part of the seat control switch.
Power recliners are serviced separately from the backrest frame assembly. The recliner motor can also be
serviced separately.
Seat Side Air Bags
The driver and passenger seat side air bags are attached to the seat backrest frame. If a seat side air bag
deployment has occurred or for more information, refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System
The occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is standard equipment on all front passenger seats. For
diagnosing or servicing the OCS system, refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Rear Seats
WARNING: Synchronize the seat recliners following the steps in the seat removal and
installation procedure any time the seat is removed for service. The
following actions may result in the loss of recliner synchronization that
cannot be corrected and may cause the seat back to fail in a crash:
Dropping the seat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Sitting on the seat when removed
Applying any load to the seat when removed
Removing or loosening any recliner fasteners except for the safety
belt buckle bolt
Install a new seat back frame assembly if the seat recliners cannot be
synchronized. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s) in a crash.
The rear seats are a 60/40 split folding/reclining backrest design. The recliner release handle will allow the
backrest to recline as well as fold the backrest forward. When the backrest is folded forward, the front legs of
the seat will fold down (kneel) creating a level load floor with the luggage area. The 60 percent seat has a fold
down armrest with cup holders. The armrest latches to a striker in the backrest frame.
The rear seats can be equipped with the following systems:
Power fold down backrests
Heated seats
When the rear seats are removed from the vehicle, the inboard and outboard recliners must be synchronized
before installing the seat back into the vehicle. If the recliners are not synchronized, carry out the
synchronization steps in Seat - Rear, 40 Percent or Seat - Rear, 60 Percent. The recliners must not be moved
from this synchronized position until all the seat-to-floor retainers are tightened to specification. Synchronizing
the recliners may require the recliners to be released. Care must be used when working with the recliners as they
are spring loaded and release with high force.
The 60 percent and 40 percent seat backrest frame assemblies include the backrest frame, anchor brackets and
recliners (inboard and outboard). These parts must be serviced as an assembly. To prevent loss of recliner
synchronization, recliner binding or backrest latch/release failure, the recliner bolts must never be loosened or
removed, except for the safety belt buckle bolt. The backrest frame assemblies are assembled on a fixture not
available for service.
The safety belt buckle bolt is the only bolt on either 40 or 60 percent seat recliner that may be removed for
service. To service the safety belt buckle, refer to SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article.
Power Fold Down Backrest
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) may also be identified as the generic electronic
module (GEM).
The optional power fold down backrest, in addition to functioning with the manual recline handle, has a
convenient power fold seat control switch mounted in the LH rear quarter trim panel rear hatch area. When the
switch is pushed, left or right, an electromechanical motor releases that seat's recliners, through a cable
attachment, and a spring load folds the backrest down and kneels the front legs. The seat backrest must then be
manually lifted upright to the seating position with the recliners locked in place.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Heated Seats
This system allows independent seat electrical heating of each rear outboard seat on demand.
The components of the system are:
the seat heater mats located on the seat cushion and backrest.
the heated seat module located under the 60 percent seat.
the heated seat switches, located in the LH and RH rear doors.
temperature sensors, located in the seat cushion heater mats.
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
SEATS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Fluke 73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
Software with appropriate
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
hardware, or equivalent scan tool
System (IDS)
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
High-Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) and Medium-Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
This vehicle utilizes 2 communication systems called high-speed controller area network (HS-CAN) and
medium-speed controller area network (MS-CAN). The memory seat and climate controlled seat communicate
over the MS-CAN. When diagnosing the memory seat or climate controlled seat, use a Vehicle Communication
Module (VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) software with appropriate hardware, or equivalent scan
tool with the latest software update with the capability of communicating over the MS-CAN bus.
Principles of Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Driver and Passenger Power Seats Without Memory
The driver and front passenger power seat motors are hardwired to the seat control switches on each respective
seat. The circuits are normally at ground through the seat control switch. Each individual seat track, recliner (if
equipped) and lumbar (if equipped) motor circuit is switched to voltage when the specific adjustment position is
selected.
Power Driver Seat With Memory
NOTE:
Verify good battery condition before diagnosing the memory seat system. Poor
battery condition may interfere with memory seat operation, even if vehicle
starting is possible.
NOTE:
A memory recall in progress does not prohibit the initiation of another memory
recall; the most recently requested memory recall will be executed.
The memory driver seat feature allows the driver to program a personalized seat position that can be recalled
using the memory switch or a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter (if associated). There are 2 memory
settings possible. The power exterior mirror (if equipped) positions are also stored and recalled with the power
driver seat positions.
For information on programming memory positions or recalling a stored memory position, refer to Memory
Position Programming. For information on RKE transmitter programming, refer to HANDLES, LOCKS,
LATCHES & ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
The driver seat module (DSM) is located under the driver seat. To install a new DSM, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article. Programmable module installation (PMI) must be
carried out when installing a new DSM. Refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
The driver seat control switch provides voltage to the DSM when activated. The neutral position of each driver
seat control switch position is a ground state through the seat control switch contacts. A voltage input causes the
DSM to power the appropriate motor until the input is removed. Ground is the normal state of the motor circuits
through the DSM and is not switched to control the motors. The DSM internally switches the appropriate circuit
from ground to voltage for operating the motors.
As the seat is adjusted, the DSM constantly monitors the motor position sensors to record the current seat
position. The DSM will remove voltage from the motor upon termination of the seat control switch input or if
the DSM does not see movement from the motor by monitoring the position sensor.
The DSM communicates DTC and other information using the medium-speed controller area network (MSCAN) communication bus. It should be noted for diagnostics that because CAN bus communication is more
robust and reliable than other methods, it may be possible to have limited module communication with one of
the CAN bus circuits disconnected or shorted to ground. Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article for information concerning MS-CAN bus communication.
This service information only diagnoses concerns specific to the memory driver seat. To diagnose an exterior
mirror concern, refer to REAR VIEW MIRRORS article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Easy Entry/Exit Feature
The easy entry/exit feature moves the driver seat backwards about 50.8 mm (2 in) when the ignition key is
removed from the ignition switch. The DSM receives a key out command over the MS-CAN communication
network and powers the driver seat rearward. This function will not operate if the seat is less than the 50.8 mm
(2 in) travel distance to the end of the track or the function has been disabled. The DSM will also cancel this
operation if a valid input command is received from the driver seat control switch, memory SET switch or
exterior mirror control switch.
The DSM will record the current driver seat positions before powering the seat for an easy exit operation. This
recorded position will be used to return the driver seat to this position on the easy entry operation. During easy
entry operation, the seat is returned to the position previous to the easy exit operation.
The easy entry/exit feature can be enabled/disabled using a scan tool. When enabled, the feature becomes a user
accessible item on the message center allowing the user to turn the feature on and off. Refer to the Owner's
Literature or INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING CHIMES article for
information on the message center.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
NOTE:
A memory recall in progress does not prohibit the initiation of another memory
recall; the most recently requested memory recall will be executed.
A remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter can be used to recall previously set memory positions but must first
be associated to that memory position. The transmitter associated with personality 1 is capable of recalling
memory position 1 only. Similarly, the associated personality 2 transmitter can recall only memory position 2.
Memory recall occurs when the unlock switch is depressed on the RKE transmitter if it has been associated with
a memory position. The second depression of the unlock switch, which unlocks passenger doors, does not
initiate a memory recall.
For information on diagnosing a RKE concern or associating a RKE transmitter to a memory position, refer to
HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES & ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
Driver Seat Module (DSM) Hard Stop/Soft Stop
A hard stop occurs when one of the memory seat track axes or backrest recline physically reach the end of
travel and can go no further. A soft stop occurs when the seat stops before physically reaching the end of travel.
The hard stop is set by seat design and cannot be changed or adjusted. The soft stop is set by the DSM. The seat
track axes are forward/rearward, front up/down and rear up/down. The backrest axis is recline
forward/backward. To prevent unnecessary stress on the seat and motors, the DSM will set soft stop positions, 2
for each moving axis. The DSM will use a preset distance from the hard stop to determine where the soft stop
will occur. When an axis reaches the hard stop and the switch is held for approximately one second, the DSM
establishes the soft stop for that axis in that direction.
Setting the Soft Stop
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
If a new DSM or driver seat track has been installed, all driver seat track soft
stops must be reset.
Use the following procedure once a new seat track or DSM has been installed.
During the setting procedure, if the seat track stops before the end of travel has been reached, the DSM has
stopped at a previously set soft stop. To set the new soft stop, release the seat control switch and press again in
the same direction until the seat track stops.
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
2. Press the seat control switch horizontal button forward until the seat track stops.
3. Keep the horizontal button pressed forward for one second after the seat track reaches its forward end of
travel. The horizontal forward soft stop has been set, release the switch button.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all seat track axis in both directions.
Heated Seats - Front
Vehicles equipped with front heated seats are equipped with a single-heated seat module to control both front
heated seats. The heated seat module is located under the front passenger seat. The HVAC module includes
both driver and passenger heated seat control buttons and indicators. The heated seat system will function
independently of the vehicle's climate control system. A momentary ground signal is transmitted to the heated
seat module when a heated seat switch button on the HVAC module is depressed and ignition switched voltage
is supplied. Upon receiving each control signal to an input circuit, the heated seat module will decrease one
setting (the sequence is hi, low, OFF, hi, etc.). When a heated seat is set to hi, both LED indicators above that
heated seat's control button will illuminate. When a heated seat is set to low, only one LED indicator above that
switch will illuminate. When activated, the heated seat module supplies voltage to the selected seat's heater
circuit. Each seat's cushion heater mat and backrest heater mat is connected in a series circuit to the heated seat
module and powered by the output circuit for that seat and ground. The heated seat module monitors inputs
from a temperature sensor, located in each seat's cushion heater mat and maintains seat temperature by
regulating current flow to the heater circuits. The heated seat module will remain ON until the heated seat
switch button is depressed to cycle the heated seat module OFF or the ignition switch is set to OFF.
If a fault is detected by the heated seat module, the module will stop supplying voltage to that individual left or
right seat and switch indicator, that the fault was detected on. The faults detected will be: a heater supply circuit
short to battery, ground or open; sensor circuit short to battery or open; heated seat switch stuck closed to
ground. To reset the module, cycle the ignition switch OFF and then ON. After the heated seat module has been
reset, the module will return to an OFF state. The heated seat module does not report DTCs and does not
communicate on any of the controller area networks (CANs).
Heated Seats - Rear
Vehicles equipped with rear heated seats are equipped with a single-heated seat module to control both rear
heated seats. The heated seat module is located under the rear 60 percent seat. The left and right rear heated seat
switches, with indicators, are located in the respective second row door trim panels. A momentary ground signal
is transmitted to the heated seat module when a heated seat switch button is depressed and ignition switched
voltage is supplied. Upon receiving each control signal to an input circuit, the heated seat module will decrease
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
one setting (the sequence is hi, low, OFF, hi, etc.). When a heated seat is set to hi, both LED indicators on the
heated seat switch will illuminate. When a heated seat is set to low, only one LED indicator will illuminate.
When activated, the heated seat module supplies voltage to the selected seat's heater circuit. Each seat's cushion
heater mat and backrest heater mat is connected in a series circuit to the heated seat module and powered by the
output circuit for that seat and ground. The heated seat module monitors inputs from a temperature sensor,
located in each seat's cushion heater mat and maintains seat temperature by regulating current flow to the heater
circuits. The heated seat module will remain ON until the heated seat switch button is depressed to cycle the
heated seat module OFF or the ignition switch is set to OFF.
If a fault is detected by the heated seat module, the module will stop supplying voltage to that individual left or
right seat and switch indicator, that the fault was detected on. The faults detected will be: a heater supply circuit
short to battery, ground or open; sensor circuit short to battery or open; heated seat switch stuck closed to
ground or heated seat switch low and high inputs shorted together. To reset the module, cycle the ignition
switch OFF and then ON. After the heated seat module has been reset, the module will return to an OFF state.
The heated seat module does not report DTCs and does not communicate on any of the controller area networks
(CANs).
Climate Controlled Seat System
NOTE:
Avoid applying voltage directly to a thermo-electric device (TED) for testing its
operation. Doing so may cause damage to the TED or shorten its usable life.
NOTE:
When installing a new dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM), it is
necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). Refer to
MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
DCSM mounted under the front passenger seat. The climate controlled seat system only operates with the
engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with
the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system receives voltage on 2 fused circuits from the
battery junction box (BJB). If one of the voltage circuits to the DCSM is lost, both seats will remain operational
because the circuits are internally connected in the DCSM. If the system shuts down due to a DTC fault, cycling
the ignition to off and then on again will reset the DCSM to function until the DTC resets.
Both climate controlled seats operate independently. If a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate
controlled seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the module and the other will remain operational.
The 4 switches (identified with seat icons) on the HVAC module activate each seat system setting and
illuminate LEDs above each switch to indicate the operating mode, 3 LEDs for HIGH, 2 LEDs for MEDIUM or
1 LED for LOW. The push-buttons with the blue seat icon operate the seat cooling mode and the push-buttons
with the red seat icon operate the seat heating mode.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest is equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air depending on the control switch settings. The air is then directed into the foam
pad and manifold where it is distributed along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the
blower speed dependent on the HVAC seat switch settings.
The temperature differences between the individual heated and cooled settings is minimal. For example, it is
difficult to distinguish between LOW cool and MEDIUM cool settings. Measuring seat temperature at different
settings is possible by monitoring the DCSM PIDs using the scan tool.
The HVAC module communicates climate controlled seat commands to the DCSM using the medium-speed
controller area network (MS-CAN) communication bus. The MS-CAN bus is connected to the data link
connector (DLC) for diagnostic use. No direct connection exists between the DCSM and HVAC for the climate
controlled seat switches. The climate controlled seats can be commanded using the scan tool to verify both
module communication on the MS-CAN bus and operation of the DCSM. This method may be useful for
isolating a control switch concern. It should also be noted that because CAN bus communication is more robust
and reliable than other methods, it may be possible to have limited module communication with one of the CAN
bus circuits disconnected or shorted to ground. Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article for additional information concerning CAN bus communication.
Heating Characteristics
In heat mode, the TED circuits of a given seat are wired in parallel internally in the DCSM.
The climate controlled seat system draws approximately 24 amperes, with both seats heating, until
reaching the set point and then the system operates at a reduced amperage to maintain the climate setting.
In heat mode, the TED can add up to 40°C-60°C (72°F-108°F) to the ambient inlet air temperature as it
passes over the TED.
The system control settings are based on the 3 LEDs above each seat heat switch button on the HVAC.
In the LOW setting, the DCSM is set to maintain TED temperature at approximately 46°C (115°F) (not at
seat surface).
In the HIGH setting, the DCSM is set to maintain TED temperature at 65°C (149°F) (not at seat surface).
When heating, the DCSM will vary the speed of the fans and the TED duty cycle in order to reach and
maintain the temperature determined by the switch setting (closed loop operation). Refer to the following
table for heating mode temperatures.
Seat heating has a maximum operating duration of 15 minutes.
Climate Controlled Seat
Heat State
HIGH
MED
LOW
Initial Temperature
Final Temperature
90°C (194°F)
80°C (176°F)
75°C (167°F)
65°C (149°F)
60°C (140°F)
46°C (115°F)
Cooling Characteristics
In cool mode, the TED circuits of a given seat are wired in series internally in the DCSM.
The climate controlled seat system draws approximately 7 amps when in cool mode on high setting.
In cool mode, the TED can remove up to 8°C (14°F) from the ambient inlet air temperature as it passes
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
over the TED.
The system control settings are based on the 3 LEDs above each seat cool switch button on the HVAC.
When cooling, the DCSM maintains constant speed of the fans and constant TED supply voltage (duty
cycle) in open loop cool mode. Refer to the following table for cooling mode temperatures.
Seat cooling has a maximum operating duration of 30 minutes.
Climate Controlled Seat Cool State
HIGH
MED
LOW
TED Voltage
Vbat
Vbat
Vbat
TED Supply Duty Cycle
100%
75%
50%
The climate controlled seat system is deactivated by one of the following actions:
Selecting the HVAC module climate control seat switch setting to manual OFF.
Turning the vehicle OFF.
If the temperature at one of the TEDs falls below 5°C (41°F), the DCSM will shut down the TEDs and initiate
system recovery mode. If the temperature continues to drop below 2°C (36°F), the DCSM will shut down the
affected seat operation.
Climate Controlled Seat System Recovery Mode
NOTE:
The presence of overtemperature faults (DTCs B2729, B2730, B272A and
B272B) can be induced by incorrect operation of the climate controlled seat
system after an initial heat setting has been attained. If a heat setting is
repeatedly turned OFF and ON in an attempt to increase the seat temperature or
repeatedly toggled between heat and cool modes, an overtemperature condition
can result and the DTCs will be set.
If the temperature at one of the TEDs rises above 110°C (230°F) in the heat mode or 65°C (149°F) in the cool
mode for more than 4 seconds, the DCSM will record an overtemperature DTC, remove voltage from the TEDs
and go into recovery mode (blower only) for 30 seconds to cool down the TEDs. The same will occur if a
temperature difference of 60°C (108°F) or greater is seen between the backrest and cushion TEDs on either
front seat. The DCSM will continue to monitor the TEDs while in recovery mode. If the temperature of the
TEDs does not drop to 105°C (221°F) in the heat mode or 60°C (140°F) in the cool mode after 30 seconds, the
system will continue to cool the TEDs in recovery mode for up to 5 minutes. If the TEDs cool down at anytime
after 30 seconds, but before 5 minutes (checked at 4 second intervals), the system will operate as normal. An
overtemperature DTC will still be recorded even if the system recovers and is operating normally. Recovery
mode is more likely to occur during extreme cabin temperatures with significant seat back sunload. If the
system does not recover within 30 seconds in heat mode or within 5 minutes in cool mode, the DCSM will
disable that seat (fault mode) and remain off until the ignition is cycled. Also, if the DCSM detects temperature
differential fault twice during the same ignition cycle, it will shut down. When a fault causes a shutdown, the
climate controlled seat indicators will turn off for the affected seat and that seat will not be operational until the
next key cycle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Second Row Power-Fold Seat
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) may also be identified as the generic electronic
module (GEM).
For the second row power-fold seat to operate, voltage is supplied by the SJB to the power-fold seat relay,
enabling the seats to then be moved by pressing the second row power-fold seat switch. The second row powerfold seat operates only when the vehicle is in PARK and the liftgate glass or liftgate door is open.
The power-fold seat relay will be provided voltage on the coil side from the SJB for 30 minutes when the
transmission selector is in PARK, and the liftgate, or liftgate glass, is open. The voltage will be disabled 30
minutes after turning the vehicle OFF. If the relay is disabled after 30 minutes, it can be enabled by opening any
door, pressing the unlock key on the key fob, pressing any keyless keypad button or turning the ignition key.
The second row power-fold seat actuators release a locking mechanism allowing the seat backrest to fold down
onto the seat cushion.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse(s):
7 (30A) (rear
heated seats)
16 (30A) (climate
controlled seats or
front heated seats)
27 (10A) (second
row power-fold
seats)
60 (30A) (driver
power seat or
driver memory
seat)
61 (30A)
(passenger power
seat)
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse(s):
5 (10A) (second
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Switch(es)
Seat tracks obstructed or
damaged
Seat backrest obstructed
Lumbar assembly
damaged
Recliner or latch
assembly damaged
(backrest frame)
Thermo-electric device
(TED) assembly filter
dirty (cushion or
backrest)
Second row power-fold
actuator and cable
row power-fold
seats)
12 (7.5A) (driver
memory seat)
35 (10A)
(front/rear heated
seats)
Wiring harness
Loose or corroded
connections
Seat control switch(es)
Power seat motor (seat
track)
Power recliner motor
Power lumbar motor
Memory SET switch
Driver seat module
(DSM)
Seat cushion heater mat
Seat backrest heater mat
Heated seat module
Heated seat switch
TED assembly (cushion
or backrest)
HVAC module
Dual climate controlled
seat module (DCSM)
Second row power-fold
actuator
Second row power-fold
relay
Second row power-fold
switch
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
4. If the concern is with the power seat (non-memory seat) or heated seat and the cause is not visually
evident, verify the symptom and Go to Symptom Chart.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
5. If the concern is with the memory seat or climate controlled seat and the cause is not visually evident,
connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
7. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
8. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
9. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the driver seat module (DSM) or
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM).
10. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to Driver Seat Module (DSM) DTC Chart, go to
Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM) DTC Chart or go to Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC
Chart. For all other DTCs, refer to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
11. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
Driver Seat Module (DSM) DTC Chart
DRIVER SEAT MODULE (DSM) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Retrieved
B1342
B1530
B1534
B1538
ECU is Faulted
On-Demand and
Continuous
Memory SET Switch Circuit
Short to Ground
Memory 1 Switch Circuit Short
to Ground
Memory 2 Switch Circuit Short
to Ground
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
Action
INSTALL a new driver seat module
(DSM) and CARRY OUT
programmable module installation
(PMI). REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K. For
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K. For
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K. For
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
B1663
Seat Driver Front Up/Down
Motor Stalled
On-Demand
B1664
Seat Driver Rear Up/Down
Motor Stalled
On-Demand
B1665
Seat Driver Forward/Backward
Motor Stalled
On-Demand
B1666
Seat Driver Recline Motor
Stalled
On-Demand
B1703
B1707
B1711
B1715
B1719
B1723
B1727
B1731
B1952
B1953
B1956
B1957
Seat Driver Recline Forward
Switch Circuit Short to Battery
Seat Driver Recline Rearward
Switch Circuit Short to Battery
Seat Driver Front Up Switch
Circuit Short to Battery
Seat Driver Front Down Switch
Circuit Short to Battery
Seat Driver Forward Switch
Circuit Short to Battery
Seat Driver Rearward Switch
Circuit Short to Battery
Seat Driver Rear Up Switch
Circuit Short to Battery
Seat Driver Rear Down Switch
Circuit Short to Battery
Seat Rear Up/Down Position
Feedback Circuit Short to
Battery
Seat Rear Up/Down Position
Feedback Circuit Short to
Ground
Seat Front Up/Down Position
Feedback Circuit Short to
Battery
Seat Front Up/Down Position
Feedback Circuit Short to
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
If the motor does not operate, for MKX,
go to Pinpoint Test J, for Edge, go to
Pinpoint Test L. If the motor operates,
for MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K, for
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
If the motor does not operate, for MKX,
go to Pinpoint Test J, for Edge, go to
Pinpoint Test L. If the motor operates,
for MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K, for
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
If the motor does not operate, for MKX,
go to Pinpoint Test J, for Edge, go to
Pinpoint Test L. If the motor operates,
for MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K, for
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
If the motor does not operate, go to
Pinpoint Test J. If the motor operates,
go to Pinpoint Test K.
Go to Pinpoint Test J.
Go to Pinpoint Test J.
For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test J. For
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test L.
For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test J. For
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test L.
For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test J. For
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test L.
For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test J. For
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test L.
For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test J. For
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test L.
For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test J. For
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test L.
On-Demand and For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K. For
Continuous
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
On-Demand and For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K. For
Continuous
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
On-Demand and For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K. For
Continuous
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
On-Demand and For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K. For
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
B1960
B1961
B1964
B1965
B2084
B2143
B2477
U0140
Ground
Seat Recline
Forward/Backward Position
Feedback Circuit Short to
Battery
Seat Recline
Forward/Backward Position
Feedback Circuit Short to
Ground
Seat Horizontal
Forward/Rearward Position
Feedback Circuit Short to
Battery
Seat Horizontal
Forward/Rearward Position
Feedback Circuit Short to
Ground
Memory SET Indicator Short to
Ground
Non Volatile Memory Failure
(EEPROM)
Module Configuration Failure
Lost Communication With
Body Control Module (GEM)
Continuous
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
On-Demand and
Go to Pinpoint Test K.
Continuous
On-Demand and
Go to Pinpoint Test K.
Continuous
On-Demand and For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K. For
Continuous
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
On-Demand and For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test K. For
Continuous
Edge, go to Pinpoint Test M.
On-Demand and
Go to Pinpoint Test n
Continuous
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs. If the DTC resets, INSTALL a
new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI.
Continuous
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
REPEAT the self-test.
Continuous
Continuous
NOTE:
This DTC indicates PMI has not been
done to a newly installed module or
configuration data has been lost.
Presence of this DTC alone does not
prevent basic seat operation from the
seat control switch.
CARRY OUT PMI on the DSM.
REFER to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article. REPEAT
the self-test. If PMI is successful, the
DTC will not be present.
CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the selftest. If the DTC is retrieved again,
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article to diagnose the medium-speed
communication area network (MSCAN) concern.
CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the self-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
U0155
Lost Communication With
Instrument Panel Cluster
Control Module
Continuous
U2050
No Application Present
Continuous
All Other
DTCs
-
test. If the DTC is retrieved again,
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article to diagnose the MS-CAN
concern.
INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY
OUT PMI. REFER to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article. REPEAT the selftest.
REFER to the Master DTC Chart in
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article.
Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM) DTC Chart
DUAL CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT MODULE (DCSM) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Retrieved
Action
Thermoelectric Driver
On-Demand and
B103B
Go to Pinpoint Test AE.
Overcurrent Low
Continuous
Thermoelectric Driver Open
On-Demand and
B103C
Go to Pinpoint Test AF.
Load
Continuous
Blower Driver
On-Demand and
B103D
Go to Pinpoint Test AG.
Overtemperature
Continuous
Driver Thermoelectric Device
On-Demand and
B1111
Control Overtemperature
Go to Pinpoint Test AE.
Continuous
Fault
Passenger Thermoelectric
On-Demand and
Device Control
B1113
Go to Pinpoint Test AH.
Continuous
Overtemperature Fault
Passenger Thermoelectric
On-Demand and
B111B
Go to Pinpoint Test AH.
Driver Overcurrent Low
Continuous
Passenger Thermoelectric
On-Demand and
B111C
Go to Pinpoint Test AI.
Driver Open Load
Continuous
Passenger Blower Driver
On-Demand and
B111D
Go to Pinpoint Test AJ.
Overtemperature
Continuous
INSTALL a new dual climate
controlled seat module (DCSM) and
On-Demand and CARRY OUT programmable module
B1342
ECU is Faulted
installation (PMI). REFER to Dual
Continuous
Climate Controlled Seat Module
(DCSM).
DEPOWER the supplemental restraint
system (SRS). REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
B19A1
Passenger Seat Cushion
Blower Speed Short to Battery
On-Demand and
Continuous
B19A2
Passenger Seat Back Blower
Speed Short to Battery
On-Demand and
Continuous
SYSTEM article. DISCONNECT
passenger seat side air bag module
C327.
DISCONNECT DCSM C3036c and
passenger cushion thermo-electric
device (TED) C3328.
CONNECT the battery ground cable.
With the ignition switch ON,
MEASURE the voltage between
C3036c-3, circuit VHS23 (BN/BU),
harness side and ground. REPAIR the
short to voltage as needed. If OK,
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY
OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module (DCSM).
CARRY OUT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTC.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag
module C327. REPOWER the SRS.
REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
DEPOWER the SRS. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. DISCONNECT
passenger seat side air bag module
C327.
DISCONNECT DCSM C3036c and
passenger backrest TED C3326.
CONNECT the battery ground cable.
With the ignition switch ON,
MEASURE the voltage between
C3036c-4, circuit VHS21 (BU/WH),
harness side and ground. REPAIR the
short to voltage as needed. If OK,
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY
OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module (DCSM).
CARRY OUT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTC.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag
module C327. REPOWER the SRS.
REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
DEPOWER the SRS. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. DISCONNECT
driver seat side air bag module C328
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
B19A3
Driver Seat Cushion Blower
Speed Short to Battery
On-Demand and
Continuous
B19A4
Driver Seat Back Blower
Speed Short to Battery
On-Demand and
Continuous
and passenger side air bag module
C327.
DISCONNECT DCSM C3036c and
driver cushion TED C3327.
CONNECT the battery ground cable.
With the ignition switch ON,
MEASURE the voltage between
C3036c-11, circuit VHS18 (BN/GN),
harness side and ground. REPAIR the
short to voltage as needed. If OK,
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY
OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module (DCSM).
CARRY OUT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTC.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag
module C328 and passenger seat side
air bag module C327. REPOWER the
SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
DEPOWER the SRS. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. DISCONNECT
driver seat side air bag module C328
and passenger seat side air bag module
C327.
DISCONNECT DCSM C3036c and
driver backrest TED C3322.
CONNECT the battery ground cable.
With the ignition switch ON,
MEASURE the voltage between
C3036c-12, circuit VHS16 (BU/GN),
harness side and ground. REPAIR the
short to voltage as needed. If OK,
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY
OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module (DCSM).
CARRY OUT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTC.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag
module C328 and passenger seat side
air bag module C327. REPOWER the
SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
DEPOWER the SRS. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. DISCONNECT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
B19A5
Passenger Seat Cushion
Blower Speed Short to
Ground
On-Demand and
Continuous
B19A6
Passenger Seat Back Blower
Speed Short to Ground
On-Demand and
Continuous
passenger seat side air bag module
C327.
DISCONNECT DCSM C3036c and
passenger cushion TED C3328.
CONNECT the battery ground cable.
MEASURE the resistance between
C3036c-3, circuit VHS23 (BN/BU),
harness side and ground. REPAIR the
short to ground as needed. If OK,
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY
OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module (DCSM).
CARRY OUT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTC.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag
module C327. REPOWER the SRS.
REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
DEPOWER the SRS. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. DISCONNECT
passenger seat side air bag module
C327.
DISCONNECT DCSM C3036c and
passenger backrest TED C3326.
CONNECT the battery ground cable.
MEASURE the resistance between
C3036c-4, circuit VHS21 (BU/WH),
harness side and ground. REPAIR the
short to ground as needed. If OK,
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY
OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module (DCSM).
CARRY OUT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTC.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag
module C327. REPOWER the SRS.
REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
DEPOWER the SRS. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. DISCONNECT
driver seat side air bag module C328
and passenger seat side air bag module
C327.
DISCONNECT DCSM C3036c and
driver cushion TED C3327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
B19A7
Driver Seat Cushion Blower
Speed Short to Ground
On-Demand and
Continuous
B19A8
Driver Seat Back Blower
Speed Short to Ground
On-Demand and
Continuous
B2477
Module Configuration Failure
On-Demand and
Continuous
CONNECT the battery ground cable.
MEASURE the resistance between
C3036c-11, circuit VHS18 (BN/GN),
harness side and ground. REPAIR the
short to ground as needed. If OK,
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY
OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module (DCSM).
CARRY OUT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTC.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag
module C328 and passenger seat side
air bag module C327. REPOWER the
SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
DEPOWER the SRS. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. DISCONNECT
driver seat side air bag module C328
and passenger seat side air bag module
C327.
DISCONNECT DCSM C3036c and
driver backrest TED C3322.
CONNECT the battery ground cable.
MEASURE the resistance between
C3036c-12, circuit VHS16 (BU/GN),
harness side and ground. REPAIR the
short to ground as needed. If OK,
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY
OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module (DCSM).
CARRY OUT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTC.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag
module C328 and passenger seat side
air bag module C327. REPOWER the
SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NOTE:
This DTC indicates PMI has not been
done to a newly installed module or
configuration data has been lost.
CARRY OUT PMI on the DCSM.
REFER to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article. REPEAT
the self-test. If PMI is successful, the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DTC will not be present.
B2729
B272A
B272B
B272C
Cushion Over-Temp Detected
(Driver)
Passenger Cushion OverTemp Detected
Passenger Back Over-Temp
Detected
Driver Differential
Temperature Fault
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
Go to Pinpoint Test AK.
Go to Pinpoint Test AL.
Go to Pinpoint Test AM.
If on-demand, go to Pinpoint Test
AN. If continuous only, and the system
is operating, CHECK the TED cooling
performance on the affected seat and
VERIFY the system is operating
correctly. REFER to Component Test
- Thermo-Electric Device (TED)
Cooling Performance. If a concern is
found, CHECK the affected seat
cushion or backrest for correct
installation of the climate controlled
seat components (TED, manifold, air
ducts and foam pad). CHECK for
airflow restrictions (TED inlets and
outlets, TED-to-manifold connections,
filters and ducts) and REPAIR as
needed. If OK, CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test. TEST the
system for normal operation. The DTC
may have been set by extreme cabin
temperatures or excessive sun-load on
the seat causing the system to enter
recovery mode. Occupant size and
weight characteristics can also be a
factor. If a concern cannot be found or
duplicated, RETURN the vehicle to the
customer.
If on-demand, go to Pinpoint Test
AO. If continuous only, and the system
is operating, CHECK the TED cooling
performance on the affected seat and
VERIFY the system is operating
correctly. REFER to Component Test
- Thermo-Electric Device (TED)
Cooling Performance. If a concern is
found, CHECK the affected seat
cushion or backrest for correct
installation of the climate controlled
seat components (TED, manifold, air
ducts and foam pad). CHECK for
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
B272D
B272E
B272F
B2730
U2050
Passenger Differential
Temperature Fault
Driver Ignition Run/Blower
Circuit Short to Ground (this
DTC sets for an open or short
to voltage)
Passenger Ignition
Run/Blower Circuit Short to
Ground (this DTC sets for an
open or short to voltage)
Back Over-Temp Detected
(Driver)
No Application Present
All Other
DTCs
On-Demand and
Continuous
airflow restrictions (TED inlets and
outlets, TED-to-manifold connections,
filters and ducts) and REPAIR as
needed. If OK, CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test. TEST the
system for normal operation. The DTC
may have been set by extreme cabin
temperatures or excessive sun-load on
the seat causing the system to enter
recovery mode. Occupant size and
weight characteristics can also be a
factor. If a concern cannot be found or
duplicated, RETURN the vehicle to the
customer.
On-Demand and
Continuous
Go to Pinpoint Test AP.
On-Demand and
Continuous
Go to Pinpoint Test AQ.
On-Demand and
Continuous
Go to Pinpoint Test AR.
Continuous
On-Demand and
Continuous
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY
OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module (DCSM).
REPEAT the self-test.
REFER to the Master DTC Chart in
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article.
Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) may also be identified as the generic electronic
module (GEM).
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Retrieved
Third Row Power Fold
B2794
Circuit Failure (applies
On-Demand
to second row seat)
B2A2D
Third Row Power Fold
Circuit Short to Ground
(applies to second row
Continuous
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test AQ.
Go to Pinpoint Test AQ.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
seat)
All Other
DTCs
-
-
REFER to the Master DTC Chart in
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication with the driver
seat module (DSM)
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
Fuse
Circuitry
Front seat control
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test A.
Fuse
Circuitry
Front seat control
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test B.
Fuse
Circuitry
Front seat control
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test C.
Go to Pinpoint Test D.
Fastening
hardware
Seat track
Seat track
Go to Pinpoint Test E.
Seat track
obstructed
Seat track
Go to Pinpoint Test F.
Circuitry
Front seat motors
Front seat control
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test G.
No communication with the dual
climate controlled seat module
(DCSM)
The power seat is inoperative driver, without power recliner
The power seat is inoperative passenger, with power recline
The power seat is inoperative passenger, without power recline
The power seat moves but is loose
The power seat moves but is noisy
The power seat does not make full
travel
The power seat does not move
horizontally/vertically - driver
Fuse
Circuitry
DSM
Action
Fuse
Circuitry
DCSM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
The power seat does not move
horizontally/vertically/recline passenger
The power seat does not move
horizontally/vertically - passenger
The memory seat is inoperative/does
not operate correctly - does not
operate
horizontally/vertically/recline, MKX
The memory seat does not operate
correctly - does not operate using
the memory SET switch, MKX
The memory seat is inoperative/does
not operate correctly - does not
operate horizontally/vertically, Edge
The memory seat does not operate
correctly - does not operate using
the memory SET switch, Edge
The memory seat does not operate
correctly - the seat moves in onesecond intervals
The memory seat does not operate
correctly - the seat does not move to
the correct memory position
Circuitry
Front seat motors
Front seat control
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test H.
Circuitry
Front seat motors
Front seat control
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test I.
Fuse
Circuitry
Seat control switch
Memory seat track
Memory recline
motor
DSM
Go to Pinpoint Test J.
Circuitry
Memory SET
switch
Memory seat track
DSM
Go to Pinpoint Test K.
Fuse
Circuitry
Seat control switch
Memory seat track
DSM
Go to Pinpoint Test L.
Circuitry
Memory SET
switch
Memory seat track
DSM
Go to Pinpoint Test M.
REFER to the Driver Seat
Module (DSM) DTC Chart.
REFER to the Driver Seat
Module (DSM) DTC Chart.
Circuitry
DSM
Circuitry
Memory SET
switch
DSM
Seat track
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
The memory seat does not operate
correctly - does not operate using
the remote transmitter
The memory SET switch indicator is
inoperative/always on
Easy exit/easy entry is
inoperative/does not operate
correctly
The power lumbar is inoperative driver
The power lumbar is inoperative passenger
The heated seats are inoperative front
VERIFY the RKE transmitter
is operating correctly and is
associated to a memory
position. REFER to Owner's
Literature or HANDLES,
LOCKS, LATCHES &
ENTRY SYSTEMS article
for information on
associating a RKE
transmitter. RUN the DSM
self-test and REFER to the
Driver Seat Module (DSM)
DTC Chart to diagnose any
DTCs retrieved.
Circuitry
Memory SET
switch
DSM
Go to Pinpoint Test N.
Circuitry
Key in ignition
switch
Instrument cluster
(IC) module
DSM
Go to Pinpoint Test O.
Circuitry
Seat control switch
Power lumbar
motor assembly
Go to Pinpoint Test P.
Circuitry
Seat control switch
Power lumbar
motor assembly
Go to Pinpoint Test Q.
Fuse
Circuitry
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test R.
Remote keyless
entry (RKE)
integrated keyhead
transmitter (IKT)
is not correctly
associated to a
memory position
Circuitry
IKT
DSM
Smart junction box
(SJB)
Fuse
Circuitry
HVAC module
(heated seat
switch)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
The heated seat is inoperative/does
not operate correctly - driver
The heated seat is inoperative/does
not operate correctly - front
passenger
The heated seat is inoperative driver seat does heat but the heated
seat indicator does not illuminate
when pressed
The heated seat is inoperative - front
passenger seat does heat but the
heated seat indicator does not
illuminate when pressed
The front fold-flat seat backrest does
not operate correctly - the recliners
do not lock in place, release or are
not synchronized
Seat cushion heater
mat
Seat backrest
heater mat
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test S.
Fuse
Circuitry
HVAC module
(heated seat
switch)
Seat cushion heater
mat
Seat backrest
heater mat
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test T.
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
HVAC module
(heated seat
switch)
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test U.
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
HVAC module
(heated seat
switch)
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test V.
RELEASE the fold-flat
recliner cable locking clip,
allowing the cable to selfadjust. POSITION the
backrest upright, locking the
recliners in place. APPLY
force to the backrest,
verifying the recliners are
locked in place. LOCK the
locking clip back in place. If
concern remains, CHECK
Fold-flat recliner
cable
RH fold-flat
recliner
LH fold-flat
recliner
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
cable and recliners for correct
operation and install new as
necessary.
The heated seats are inoperative rear
The heated seat is inoperative/does
not operate correctly - left rear
The heated seat is inoperative/does
not operate correctly - right rear
The heated seat is inoperative - left
rear seat does heat but the heated
seat indicator does not illuminate
when pressed
The heated seat is inoperative - left
rear seat does heat but the heated
seat indicator is on all the time
The heated seat is inoperative - right
rear seat does heat but the heated
seat indicator does not illuminate
when pressed
The heated seat is inoperative - right
rear seat does heat but the heated
Fuse
Circuitry
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test W.
Circuitry
Heated seat switch
Seat cushion heater
mat
Seat backrest
heater mat
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test X.
Circuitry
Heated seat switch
Seat cushion heater
mat
Seat backrest
heater mat
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test Y.
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Heated seat switch
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test Z.
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test AA.
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Heated seat switch
Heated seat
module
Go to Pinpoint Test AB.
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Heated seat
Go to Pinpoint Test AC.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
seat indicator is on all the time
module
Fuse
Circuitry
Medium-speed
controller area
network (MSCAN)
communication
fault
DCSM
HVAC module
VERIFY battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 16 (30A) is OK. If
OK, CARRY OUT the
network test using a scan tool
and VERIFY network
communication of the HVAC
module and DCSM. REFER
to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article to
diagnose a module
communication or network
concern. If OK, CARRY
OUT the DCSM on-demand
self test and RETRIEVE any
DTCs. If any DTC is present,
REFER to the Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module
(DCSM) DTC Chart.
CHECK the climate control
system for correct operation.
REFER to CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL
INFORMATION &
DIAGNOSTICS article for
diagnosis of the HVAC or
climate control system. If
OK, INSTALL a new DCSM
and CARRY OUT PMI.
REFER to Dual Climate
Controlled Seat Module
(DCSM).
Circuitry
HVAC module
DCSM
NOTE:
If a fault occurs setting a
DTC specific to only one
climate controlled seat, the
DCSM will disable only the
affected seat outputs and
allow the other seat to
remain operational. CHECK
for DTCs specific to the
affected climate controlled
seat and if a DTC is
present, REFER to the Dual
Climate Controlled Seat
Module (DCSM) DTC Chart.
All climate controlled seats are
inoperative
A single climate controlled seat is
inoperative - switch indicators may
or may not illuminate
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
A single climate controlled seat does
not operate correctly - poor or
intermittent cooling/heating
A single climate controlled seat does
not operate correctly - exhibits poor
airflow or performance
Go to Pinpoint Test AD.
CARRY OUT the DCSM ondemand self test and retrieve
any DTCs. If any DTC is
present, REFER to the Dual
Climate Controlled Seat
Module (DCSM) DTC
Chart. If no DTC is present,
CHECK the affected seat
cushion or backrest for
correct installation of the
climate controlled seat
components (TED, manifold
air duct and foam pad) and
REPAIR as needed. If OK,
CHECK for airflow
restrictions (TED inlets and
outlets, TED-to-manifold
connections, filters and
ducts) and REPAIR as
needed. CHECK the TED
cooling performance on the
affected seat and VERIFY
the system is operating
correctly. REFER to
Component Test - ThermoElectric Device (TED)
Cooling Performance.
RETEST the system for
normal operation.
CARRY OUT the DCSM ondemand self test and retrieve
any DTCs. If any DTC is
present, REFER to the Dual
Climate Controlled Seat
Module (DCSM) DTC
Chart. If no DTC is present,
CHECK the affected seat
cushion or backrest for
correct installation of the
climate controlled seat
components (TED, manifold
air duct and foam pad) and
REPAIR as needed. If OK,
CHECK for airflow
restrictions (TED inlets and
Excessive sun-load
or extreme cabin
temperatures
Incorrectly
installed thermoelectric device
(TED) or manifold
Airflow blockage
TED
DCSM
Incorrectly
installed TED or
manifold
Airflow blockage
Disconnected air
duct
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
outlets, TED-to-manifold
connections, filters and
ducts) and REPAIR as
needed. RETEST the system
for normal operation.
The power seat is inoperative/does
not operate correctly - both rear,
power fold
The power seat is inoperative/does
not operate correctly - left rear,
power fold
The power seat is inoperative/does
not operate correctly - right rear,
power fold
The second row seat recliner does
not operate correctly
Fuse
Circuitry
Power-fold relay
Power-fold switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test AS.
Circuitry
Power-fold relay
Power-fold switch
Power-fold
actuator
Go to Pinpoint Test AT.
Circuitry
Power-fold relay
Power-fold switch
Power-fold
actuator
Go to Pinpoint Test AU.
CHECK for correct seat
recliner synchronization.
REFER to Seat - Rear, 40
Percent or Seat - Rear, 60
Percent. If recliner
synchronization is OK,
INSTALL new parts as
necessary.
Seat recliner not
synchronized
Seat recliner
damaged
Seat recliner cable
Pinpoint Tests
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Electronic modules are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE:
Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough
inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test.
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when taking measurements. Failure to use the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Refer to Inspection and Verification, Driver Seat Module (DSM) DTC Chart, Dual Climate Controlled
Seat Module (DCSM) DTC Chart, Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart and/or Symptom Chart for
direction to the appropriate Pinpoint Test.
Pinpoint Test A: The Power Seat is Inoperative - Driver, Without Power Recliner
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The driver seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBB60 (GN/RD) and is supplied ground
on circuit GD145 (BK/BU). When pressed, the seat control switch supplies that voltage and ground to a power
seat track motor to move the seat. When pressed in the opposite direction, the seat control switch reverses the
polarity to that same power seat track motor, which moves the seat in the opposite direction. There are 3 power
seat track motors that combine to move the seat cushion horizontally (forward/rearward) and vertically (front
up/down and rear up/down). If a new seat track motor needs to be installed, it is necessary to install an entire
power seat track.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Seat control switch
PINPOINT TEST A: THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE - DRIVER, WITHOUT POWER RECLINER
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
A1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB60 (GN/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Driver Seat Control Switch C352
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 1: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat control switch C352-4, circuit SBB60 (GN/RD), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 60 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST
the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
A2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD145 (BK/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat control switch C352-2, circuit GD145 (BK/BU),
harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:15 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test B: The Power Seat is Inoperative - Passenger, With Power Recline
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The passenger seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBB61 (GY/RD) and is supplied
ground on circuit GD145 (BK/BU). When pressed, the seat control switch supplies that voltage and ground to a
power seat track motor or power recliner motor to move the seat or backrest. When pressed in the opposite
direction, the seat control switch reverses the polarity to that same power seat track motor or power recliner
motor, which moves the seat or backrest in the opposite direction. There are 3 power seat track motors that
combine to move the seat cushion horizontally (forward/rearward) and vertically (front up/down and rear
up/down). There is an additional motor in the power recliner mechanism to move the seat backrest forward and
rearward. If a new seat track motor needs to be installed, it is necessary to install an entire power seat track. The
power recline motor is serviced separately.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Seat control switch
PINPOINT TEST B: THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE - PASSENGER, WITH POWER RECLINE
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
B1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB61 (GY/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Control Switch C3026
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat control switch C3026-5, circuit SBB61 (GY/RD),
harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 61 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST
the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
B2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD145 (BK/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C3026-3, circuit GD145 (BK/BU),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new passenger seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front.
TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test C: The Power Seat is Inoperative - Passenger, Without Power Recline
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The passenger seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBB61 (GY/RD) and is supplied
ground on circuit GD145 (BK/BU). When pressed, the seat control switch supplies that voltage and ground to a
power seat track motor to move the seat. When pressed in the opposite direction, the seat control switch
reverses the polarity to that same power seat track motor, which moves the seat in the opposite direction. There
are 3 power seat track motors that combine to move the seat cushion horizontally (forward/rearward) and
vertically (front up/down and rear up/down). If a new seat track motor needs to be installed, it is necessary to
install an entire power seat track. The power recline motor is serviced separately.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Seat control switch
PINPOINT TEST C: THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE - PASSENGER, WITHOUT POWER RECLINE
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
C1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB61 (GY/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Control Switch C355
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 5: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat control switch C355-4, circuit SBB61 (GY/RD),
harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 61 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
C2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD145 (BK/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C355-2, circuit GD145 (BK/BU),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test D: The Power Seat Moves But is Loose
Normal Operation
The power seat movement should be smooth and the seat cushion should not rock during or after operation.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Loose fastening hardware
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Seat track component
PINPOINT TEST D: THE POWER SEAT MOVES BUT IS LOOSE
D1 CHECK THE FASTENING HARDWARE
Inspect for loose fastening hardware on the affected seat.
Is the fastening hardware loose?
YES : TIGHTEN all fastening hardware to specification. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : IDENTIFY the cause and REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test E: The Power Seat Moves But is Noisy
Normal Operation
The power seat should move quietly during operation. Some noise is acceptable.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Misaligned seat track
Seat track component
Object obstructing seat movement
PINPOINT TEST E: THE POWER SEAT MOVES BUT IS NOISY
E1 CHECK THE TRACK ALIGNMENT
Check the alignment of the track to the floor and the track to the seat.
Is the track out of alignment?
YES : ALIGN the track to the seat and the floor. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : IDENTIFY the cause and REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test F: The Power Seat Does Not Make Full Travel
Normal Operation
The power seat should travel fully horizontal (forward/rearward) and vertical (front up/down and rear up/down).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Obstruction in the seat track
Seat track component
PINPOINT TEST F: THE POWER SEAT DOES NOT MAKE FULL TRAVEL
F1 CHECK FOR AN OBSTRUCTION IN THE SEAT TRACK
Remove the affected seat. Refer to Seat - Front.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Are there any obstructions in the seat track?
YES : REMOVE the obstruction(s) from the track(s).
INSTALL the seat. REFER to Seat - Front. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : IDENTIFY the cause and REPAIR as necessary.
INSTALL the seat. REFER to Seat - Front. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test G: The Power Seat Does Not Move Horizontally/Vertically - Driver
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The driver seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBB60 (GN/RD) and is supplied ground
on circuit GD145 (BK/BU). When pressed, the seat control switch supplies voltage and ground to a power seat
track motor to move the seat. When pressed in the opposite direction, the seat control switch reverses the
polarity to the same power seat track motor, which moves the seat in the opposite direction. There are 3 power
seat track motors that combine to move the seat cushion horizontally (forward/rearward) and vertically (front
up/down and rear up/down). If a new seat track motor needs to be installed, it is necessary to install an entire
power seat track.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Seat control switch
Seat track motor (seat track)
PINPOINT TEST G: THE POWER SEAT DOES NOT MOVE HORIZONTALLY/VERTICALLY - DRIVER
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
G1 CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Operate the driver seat forward and rearward.
Will the seat move horizontally?
YES : Go to G5.
NO : Go to G2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
G2 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Driver Seat Horizontal Motor C362
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 7: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat horizontal motor C362-1, circuit CPS28 (GN), harness
side and C362-2, circuit CPS23 (GN/VT), harness side, while pushing the driver seat control switch
forward and rearward.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. TEST the system for normal
operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to G3.
G3 CHECK HORIZONTAL MOTOR CIRCUIT CPS28 (GN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Driver Seat Control Switch C352
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat control switch C352-6, circuit CPS28 (GN), harness
side and driver seat horizontal motor C362-1, circuit CPS28 (GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
G4 CHECK HORIZONTAL MOTOR CIRCUIT CPS23 (GN/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 9: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat control switch C352-3, circuit CPS23 (GN/VT), harness
side and driver seat horizontal motor C362-2, circuit CPS23 (GN/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
G5 DETERMINE THE SEAT HEIGHT ADJUST FAILURE
Operate the seat front and rear height adjustments.
Does the seat front and rear height adjust up and down?
YES : If only the front height adjust motor operates, go to G6.
If only the rear height adjust motor operates, go to G9.
NO : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
G6 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE REAR HEIGHT MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Driver Seat Rear Height Motor C363
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat rear height motor C363-2, circuit CPS26 (YE/BU),
harness side and C363-1, circuit CPS27 (BU/BN), harness side, while depressing the rear height
adjust switch up and down.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. TEST the system for normal
operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to G7.
G7 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS26 (YE/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Driver Seat Control Switch C352
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat control switch C352-7, circuit CPS26 (YE/BU), harness
side and driver seat rear height motor C363-2, circuit CPS26 (YE/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G8.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
G8 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS27 (BU/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat control switch C352-5, circuit CPS27 (BU/BN), harness
side and driver seat rear height motor C363-1, circuit CPS27 (BU/BN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
G9 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE DRIVER SEAT FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Driver Seat Front Height Motor C382
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 13: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat front height motor C382-1, circuit CPS25 (WH/VT),
harness side and C382-2, circuit CPS24 (GY), while depressing the front height adjust switch up
and down.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. TEST the system for normal
operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to G10.
G10 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS24 (GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Driver Seat Control Switch C352
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat control switch C352-8, circuit CPS24 (GY), harness
side and driver seat front height motor C382-2, circuit CPS24 (GY), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
G11 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS25 (WH/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat control switch C352-1, circuit CPS25 (WH/VT) harness
side, and driver seat front height motor C382-1, circuit CPS25 (WH/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test H: The Power Seat Does Not Move Horizontally/Vertically/Recline - Passenger
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The passenger seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBB61 (GY/RD) and is supplied
ground on circuit GD145 (BK/BU). When pressed, the seat control switch supplies voltage and ground to a
power seat track motor or power recliner motor to move the seat or backrest. When pressed in the opposite
direction, the seat control switch reverses the polarity to the same power seat track motor or power recliner
motor, which moves the seat or backrest in the opposite direction. There are 3 power seat track motors that
combine to move the seat cushion horizontally (forward/rearward) and vertically (front up/down and rear
up/down). There is an additional motor in the power recliner mechanism to move the seat backrest forward and
rearward. If a new seat track motor needs to be installed, it is necessary to install an entire power seat track. The
power recline motor is serviced separately.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Seat control switch
Seat track motor (seat track)
Power recliner motor
PINPOINT TEST H: THE POWER SEAT DOES NOT MOVE HORIZONTALLY/VERTICALLY/RECLINE - PASSENGER
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
H1 CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Operate the passenger seat forward and rearward.
Will the seat move horizontally?
YES : Go to H2.
NO : Go to H3.
H2 CHECK THE RECLINER MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Recline the passenger backrest forward and rearward.
Will the seat backrest recline forward and rearward?
YES : Go to H6.
NO : Go to H13.
H3 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor C332
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 16: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat horizontal motor C332-1, circuit CPS38 (GN/BU),
harness side and C332-2, circuit CPS33 (WH), harness side, while pushing the passenger seat
control switch forward and rearward.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. TEST the system for normal
operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to H4.
H4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS38 (GN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Control Switch C3026
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C3026-9, circuit CPS38 (GN/BU),
harness side and passenger seat horizontal motor C332-1, circuit CPS38 (GN/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
H5 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS33 (WH) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 18: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C3026-4, circuit CPS33 (WH),
harness side and passenger seat horizontal motor C332-2, circuit CPS33 (WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
H6 DETERMINE THE SEAT HEIGHT ADJUST FAILURE
Operate the seat front and rear height adjustments.
Does the seat front and rear height adjust up and down?
YES : If only the front height adjust motor operates, go to H7.
If only the rear height adjust motor operates, go to H10.
NO : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
H7 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE PASSENGER SEAT REAR HEIGHT MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor C3075
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 19: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat rear height motor C3075-2, circuit CPS36 (YE/GY),
harness side and C3075-1, circuit CPS37 (WH/BU), harness side, while depressing the rear height
adjust switch up and down.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. TEST the system for normal
operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to H8.
H8 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS36 (YE/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Control Switch C3026
Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C3026-1, circuit CPS36 (YE/GY),
harness side and passenger seat rear height motor C3075-2, circuit CPS36 (YE/GY), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H9.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
H9 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS37 (WH/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 21: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C3026-12, circuit CPS37 (WH/BU),
harness side and passenger seat rear height motor C3075-1, circuit CPS37 (WH/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
H10 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE PASSENGER SEAT FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Front Height Motor C3074
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 22: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat front height motor C3074-1, circuit CPS35 (VT/GN),
harness side and C3074-2, circuit CPS34 (GY/BU), while depressing the front height adjust switch
up and down.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. TEST the system for normal
operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to H11.
H11 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS34 (GY/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Control Switch C3026
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C3026-2, circuit CPS34 (GY/BU),
harness side and passenger seat front height motor C3074-2, circuit CPS34 (GY/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H12.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
H12 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS35 (VT/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 24: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C3026-6, circuit CPS35 (VT/GN)
harness side, and passenger seat front height motor C3074-1, circuit CPS35 (VT/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
H13 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER MOTOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Recliner Motor C338
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 25: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat recliner motor C338-2, circuit CPS39 (GY/YE),
harness side and C338-1, circuit CPS40 (VT/GY), while pushing the recline switch forward and
rearward.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new seat recliner motor. REFER to Seat Recliner Motor. TEST the system for
normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to H14.
H14 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS39 (GY/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Control Switch C3026
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 26: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C3026-11, circuit CPS39 (GY/YE),
harness side and passenger seat recliner motor C338-2, circuit CPS39 (GY/YE), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to H15.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
H15 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS40 (VT/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 27: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C3026-8, circuit CPS40 (VT/GY)
harness side, and passenger seat recliner motor C338-1, circuit CPS40 (VT/GY), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the passenger seat recliner motor and the
passenger seat control switch?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test I: The Power Seat Does Not Move Horizontally/Vertically - Passenger
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The passenger seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBB61 (GY/RD) and is supplied
ground on circuit GD145 (BK/BU). When pressed, the seat control switch supplies voltage and ground to a
power seat track motor. When pressed in the opposite direction, the seat control switch reverses the polarity to
the same power seat track motor, which moves the seat in the opposite direction. There are 3 power seat track
motors that combine to move the seat cushion horizontally (forward/rearward) and vertically (front up/down
and rear up/down). If a new seat track motor needs to be installed, it is necessary to install an entire power seat
track.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Seat control switch
Seat track motor (seat track)
PINPOINT TEST I: THE POWER SEAT DOES NOT MOVE HORIZONTALLY/VERTICALLY - PASSENGER
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
I1 CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Operate the passenger seat forward and rearward.
Will the seat move horizontally?
YES : Go to I5.
NO : Go to I2.
I2 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor C332
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 28: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat horizontal motor C332-1, circuit CPS38 (GN/BU),
harness side and C332-2, circuit CPS33 (WH), harness side, while pushing the passenger seat
control switch forward and rearward.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. TEST the system for normal
operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to I3.
I3 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS38 (GN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Control Switch C355
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 29: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C355-6, circuit CPS38 (GN/BU),
harness side and passenger seat horizontal motor C332-1, circuit CPS38 (GN/BU), harness side?
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the passenger seat horizontal motor and the
passenger seat control switch?
YES : Go to I4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
I4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS33 (WH) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 30: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C355-3, circuit CPS33 (WH),
harness side and passenger seat horizontal motor C332-2, circuit CPS33 (WH), harness side?
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the passenger seat horizontal motor and the
passenger seat control switch?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
I5 DETERMINE THE SEAT HEIGHT ADJUST FAILURE
Operate the seat front and rear height adjustments.
Does the seat front and rear height adjust up and down?
YES : If only the front height adjust motor operates, go to I6.
If only the rear height adjust motor operates, go to I9.
NO : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
I6 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE PASSENGER SEAT REAR HEIGHT MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor C3075
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat rear height motor C3075-2, circuit CPS36 (YE/GY),
harness side and C3075-1, circuit CPS37 (WH/BU), harness side, while depressing the rear height
adjust switch up and down.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. TEST the system for normal
operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to I7.
I7 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS36 (YE/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Control Switch C355
Fig. 32: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C355-5, circuit CPS36 (YE/GY),
harness side and passenger seat rear height motor C3075-2, circuit CPS36 (YE/GY), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the passenger seat rear height motor and the
passenger seat control switch?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to I8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
I8 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS37 (WH/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 33: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C355-7, circuit CPS37 (WH/BU),
harness side and passenger seat rear height motor C3075-1, circuit CPS37 (WH/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the passenger seat rear height motor and the
passenger seat control switch?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
I9 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE PASSENGER SEAT FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Front Height Motor C3074
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 34: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat front height motor C3074-1, circuit CPS35 (VT/GN),
harness side and C3074-2, circuit CPS34 (GY/BU), while depressing the front height adjust switch
up and down.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. TEST the system for normal
operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to I10.
I10 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS34 (GY/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Control Switch C355
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 35: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C355-1, circuit CPS34 (GY/BU),
harness side and passenger seat front height motor C3074-2, circuit CPS34 (GY/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the passenger seat front height motor and the
passenger seat control switch?
YES : Go to I11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
I11 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS35 (VT/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 36: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat control switch C355-8, circuit CPS35 (VT/GN)
harness side, and passenger seat front height motor C3074-1, circuit CPS35 (VT/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the passenger seat front height motor and the
passenger seat control switch?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test J: The Memory Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Does Not Operate Horizontally/Vertically/Recline,
MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Memory Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING article.
Normal Operation
The driver seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBP12 (GN/RD) and is supplied ground
on circuit GD133 (BK). When pressed, the seat control switch supplies the voltage and ground to the applicable
driver seat module (DSM) inputs. The DSM then supplies voltage and ground to the appropriate power seat
track motor or power recline motor, based on the inputs received from the seat control switch. When pressed in
the opposite direction, the seat control switch reverses the polarity to the DSM inputs, and the DSM likewise
reverses polarity of the appropriate power seat track motor or power recliner motor circuits causing the seat or
backrest to move in the opposite direction. There are 3 power seat track motors that combine to move the seat
horizontally (forward/rearward) and vertically (front up/down and rear up/down). The seat backrest power
recliner uses a single motor to move the seat backrest forward and rearward.
Battery voltage is supplied to DSM circuit SBB60 (GN/RD) and SBP12 (GN/RD). Ground is supplied to DSM
circuit GD145 (BK/BU).
Each motor in the memory power seat track and power recliner contains a Hall-effect position sensor. The DSM
supplies a signal supply circuit to each position sensor and a shared reference signal return circuit. Each position
sensor sends a signal voltage back to the DSM used to monitor the position of the power seat and seat backrest.
The DSM uses this information to return the seat to a stored pre-programmed position when pressing the
memory SET switch or a remote entry transmitter. Refer to Principles of Operation or the Owner's Literature
for information on programming the DSM for storing memory seat positions.
The following pinpoint test diagnoses a memory seat that does not operate in one or more directions when using
the seat control switch. If the memory seat moves in all directions using the seat control switch, go to Pinpoint
Test K.
DTC Description
Fault Trigger Conditions
B1342 - ECU is Faulted
If a programming error is detected,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
the DTC is set.
During self-test, the driver seat
module (DSM) attempts to operate
the appropriate seat track motor and
uses the motor's position sensor to
B1663 - Seat Driver Front Up/Down Motor Stalled
monitor movement. If no motor
B1664 - Seat Driver Rear Up/Down Motor Stalled
movement is sensed, the DTC is set.
B1665 - Seat Driver Forward/Backward Motor Stalled
The DSM will retry motor operation
on the next activation of the seat
control switch. If no movement
continues to be monitored after 250
milliseconds, the DSM disables the
output.
During self-test, the DSM attempts
to operate the recliner motor and
uses the recliner motor position
sensor to monitor movement. If no
motor movement is sensed, the DTC
B1666 - Seat Driver Recline Motor Stalled
is set. The DSM will retry motor
operation on the next activation of
the seat control switch. If no motor
movement is still monitored after
250 milliseconds, the DSM disables
the output.
If voltage is sensed on the switch
B1703 - Seat Driver Recline Forward Switch Circuit Short to input circuit during the DSM selfBattery
test, the DTC is set. If voltage is
B1707 - Seat Driver Recline Rearward Switch Circuit Short sensed on the input circuit for
greater than 2 minutes, the DTC is
to Battery
set as continuous. With the DTC set,
any input signal on the circuit is
ignored.
If voltage is sensed on the switch
input circuit during the DSM self B1711 - Seat Driver Front Up Switch Circuit Short to Battery
test, the DTC is set. If voltage is
B1715 - Seat Driver Front Down Switch Circuit Short to
sensed on the input circuit for
Battery
greater than 2 minutes, the DTC is
set as continuous. With the DTC set,
any input signal on the circuit is
ignored.
If voltage is sensed on the switch
input circuit during the DSM self B1719 - Seat Driver Forward Switch Circuit Short to Battery
test, the DTC is set. If voltage is
B1723 - Seat Driver Rearward Switch Circuit Short to Battery sensed on the input circuit for
greater than 2 minutes, the DTC is
set as continuous. With the DTC set,
any input signal on the circuit is
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
ignored.
If voltage is sensed on the switch
input circuit during the DSM selfB1727 - Seat Driver Rear Up Switch Circuit Short to Battery
test, the DTC is set. If voltage is
B1731 - Seat Driver Rear Down Switch Circuit Short to
sensed on the input circuit for
Battery
greater than 2 minutes, the DTC is
set as continuous. With the DTC set,
any input signal on the circuit is
ignored.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Seat control switch
Missing controller area network (CAN) status information (CAN communication message):
ignition switch status
gear selector position
Memory power seat track
Memory power recliner motor
DSM
PINPOINT TEST J: THE MEMORY SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - DOES NOT
OPERATE HORIZONTALLY/VERTICALLY/RECLINE, MKX
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Verify good battery condition before diagnosing the memory seat system. Poor
battery condition may interfere with memory seat operation, even if vehicle
starting is possible.
J1 CHECK DSM GEAR SELECTED (TRANSGEAR) PID STATES
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/Driver Seat Module
(DSM) PID: TRANSGEAR
Operate the transmission gear selector in all positions while monitoring the following DSM PID
TRANSGEAR states:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
D6_Park
REV
NTRL
DRIVE5
DRIVE1
Do the PID states agree with the selected positions?
YES : Go to J2.
NO : To diagnose a transmission gear selector (PRNDL) status concern, REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
J2 CHECK DSM IGNITION SWITCH STATUS (IGN_SW) PID STATES
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PID: IGN_SW
Cycle the ignition switch in all positions while monitoring the following DSM IGN_SW PID states:
Off
Accessory
Run
Start
Do the PID states agree with the selected positions?
YES : Go to J3.
NO : To diagnose an ignition switch status concern, REFER to STEERING COLUMN
SWITCHES article.
J3 RETRIEVE DSM DTCs
Operate the memory seat and memory mirrors in all directions through the full range of travel.
Place the memory seat and memory mirrors in central travel positions.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/DSM/Retrieve DTCs
Are any DSM DTCs retrieved?
YES : If DTCs B1663, B1664, B1665 and B1666 are all retrieved, go to J12.
If DTC B1663, go to J22.
If DTC B1664, go to J25.
If DTC B1665, go to J28.
If DTC B1666, go to J31.
If DTC B1703, go to J5.
If DTC B1707, go to J5.
If DTC B1711, go to J5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
If DTC B1715, go to J5.
If DTC B1719, go to J5.
If DTC B1723, go to J5.
If DTC B1727, go to J5.
If DTC B1731, go to J5.
If DTC 1342, INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
For any other DSM DTCs, REFER to the Driver Seat Module (DSM) DTC Chart in
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
NO : Go to J4.
J4 MONITOR THE DSM PIDs AND CHECK FOR CORRECT MEMORY SEAT SWITCH
INPUTS
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Driver Power Seat Front Up/Down Switch (SFNT_SW)
Driver Power Seat Forward/Backward Switch (SFWD_SW)
Driver Power Seat Recline Switch Status (SRCL_SW)
Driver Power Seat Rear Up/Down Switch (SREARSW)
Monitor DSM seat switch PIDs while activating the seat switch in all positions.
Do the PID states agree with the switch positions?
YES : Go to J11.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 12 (7.5A) is OK. If SJB fuse 12 (7.5A) fails while
operating the seat control switch, DISCONNECT driver seat control switch C3016 and Go to J9.
If OK, go to J5.
J5 CHECK THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Seat Control Switch C3016
Check the seat control switch. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING article.
Is the seat control switch OK?
YES : Go to J6.
NO : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. REPEAT the
self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J6 CHECK CIRCUIT SBP12 (GN/RD) FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Measure the voltage between seat control switch C3016-5, circuit SBP12 (GN/RD), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to J7.
NO : VERIFY SJB fuse 12 (7.5A) is OK, If OK, REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J7 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 37: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between seat control switch C3016-3, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to J8.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J8 CHECK SEAT CONTROL SWITCH TO DSM CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Key in ON position.
Fig. 38: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the following seat control switch C3016 pins, harness side and
ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
CPS27
C3016-1
(BU/BN)
CPS25
C3016-2
(WH/VT)
CPS23
C3016-4
(GN/VT)
CPS24
C3016-6
(GY)
CPS30
C3016-8
(VT/BN)
CPS28
C3016-9
(GN)
CPS29
C3016-11
(WH/BN)
CPS26
C3016-12
(YE/BU)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J9.
J9 CHECK SEAT CONTROL SWITCH TO DSM CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Seat Control Switch C3016
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 39: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the following seat control switch C3016 pins, harness side and
ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
CPS27
C3016-1
(BU/BN)
C3016-2
CPS25
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
C3016-4
C3016-6
C3016-8
C3016-9
C3016-11
C3016-12
(WH/VT)
CPS23
(GN/VT)
CPS24
(GY)
CPS30
(VT/BN)
CPS28
(GN)
CPS29
(WH/BN)
CPS26
(YE/BU)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J10.
J10 CHECK SEAT CONTROL SWITCH TO DSM CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Fig. 40: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the following seat control switch C3016 pins, harness side and
DSM C3299b pins, harness side:
Seat
DSM
Control Circuit Connector
Switch
- Pin
Connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
- Pin
C3016-1
C3016-2
C3016-4
C3016-6
C3016-8
C3016-9
C3016-11
C3016-12
CPS27
C3299b-17
(BU/BN)
CPS25
C3299b-18
(WH/VT)
CPS23
C3299b-16
(GN/VT)
CPS24
C3299b-6
(GY)
CPS30
C3299b-7
(VT/BN)
CPS28
C3299b-15
(GN)
CPS29
C3299b-19
(WH/BN)
CPS26
C3299b-5
(YE/BU)
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J11 CHECK THE DSM FOR CORRECT OUTPUTS USING A SCAN TOOL AND DSM ACTIVE
COMMANDS
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Front Motor Up (FRONT_UP)
Front Motor Down (FRONT_DWN)
Rear Motor Up (REAR_UP)
Rear Motor Down (REAR_DWN)
Horizontal Motor Forward (HORZ_FWD)
Horizontal Motor Backward (HORZ_BWD)
Recline Motor Forward (RECL_FWD)
Recline Motor Backward (RECL_BWD)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Toggle the DSM active commands ON and OFF while monitoring the seat movement.
Does the driver seat operate correctly?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
NO : If no seat movement, go to J12.
If no front vertical seat movement, go to J22.
If no rear vertical seat movement, go to J25.
If no horizontal seat movement, go to J28.
If no recline seat movement, go to J31.
J12 CHECK DSM CIRCUIT SBB60 (GN/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: DSM C3299a
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 41: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DSM C3299a-1, circuit SBB60 (GN/RD), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to J13.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 60 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J13 CHECK CIRCUITS GD145 (BK/BU) AND GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: DSM C3299c
Fig. 42: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299a-2, circuit GD145 (BK/BU), harness side and ground;
and between DSM C3299b-24, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to J14.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J14 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS03 (VT/GY) AND CPS02 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 43: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-23, circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-11, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to J16.
NO : Go to J15.
J15 CHECK FRONT HEIGHT POWER SEAT MOTOR CIRCUITS CPS03 (VT/GY) AND CPS02
(GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Front Height Power Seat Motor C382
Fig. 44: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-23 circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-11, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J16 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS05 (BU/WH) AND CPS04 (YE/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 45: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-22, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-10, circuit CPS04 (YE/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to J18.
NO : Go to J17.
J17 CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT POWER SEAT MOTOR CIRCUITS CPS05 (BU/WH) AND
CPS04 (YE/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Rear Height Power Seat Motor C363
Fig. 46: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-22, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-10, circuit CPS04 (YE/OG), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J18 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS06 (GN/WH) AND CPS01 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 47: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-9, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-12, circuit CPS01 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to J20.
NO : Go to J19.
J19 CHECK THE HORIZONTAL POWER SEAT MOTOR CIRCUITS CPS06 (GN/WH) AND
CPS01 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Horizontal Power Seat Motor C362
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 48: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-9, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-12, circuit CPS01 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J20 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS07 (GY/BN) AND CPS08 (VT/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 49: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-13, circuit CPS07 (GY/BN), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-21, circuit CPS08 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J21.
J21 CHECK THE DRIVER POWER SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CIRCUITS CPS07 (GY/BN)
AND CPS08 (VT/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Driver Power Seat Recliner Motor C368
Fig. 50: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-13, circuit CPS07 (GY/BN), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-21, circuit CPS08 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat recliner motor. REFER to Seat Recliner Motor. REPEAT the selftest. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J22 CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT POWER SEAT MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Front Height Power Seat Motor C382
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Front Motor Up (FRONT_UP)
Front Motor Down (FRONT_DWN)
Fig. 51: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between front height power seat motor C382-2, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE) and
C382-1, circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side while toggling DSM active commands front motor
up and front motor down, ON and OFF.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when command ON in both directions and no voltage
present when commanded OFF?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J23.
J23 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS03 (VT/GY) AND CPS02 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Key in ON position.
Fig. 52: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DSM C3299b-23, circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side and ground;
and between DSM C3299b-11, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J24.
J24 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS03 (VT/GY) AND CPS02 (GY/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 53: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-11, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE), harness side and front
height power seat motor C382-2, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE), harness side; and between DSM
C3299b-23, circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side and front height power seat motor C382-1,
circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J25 CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Rear Height Power Seat Motor C363
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Rear Motor Up (REAR_UP)
Rear Motor Down (REAR_DWN)
Fig. 54: Measuring Voltage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between rear height power seat motor C363-2, circuit CPS04 (YE/OG),
harness side and C363-1, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side while toggling DSM active
commands rear motor up and rear motor down, ON and OFF.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when commanded ON in both directions and no voltage
present when commanded OFF?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J26.
J26 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS05 (BU/WH) AND CPS04 (YE/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Key in ON position.
Fig. 55: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DSM C3299b-22, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side and ground;
and between DSM C3299b-10, circuit CPS04 (YE/OG), harness side and ground.
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J27.
J27 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS05 (BU/WH) AND CPS04 (YE/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 56: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-22, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side and rear
height power seat motor C363-1, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side; and between DSM
C3299b-10, circuit CPS04 (YE/OG), harness side and rear height power seat motor C363-2, circuit
CPS04 (YE/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J28 CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Horizontal Power Seat Motor C362
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Horizontal Motor Forward (HORZ_FWD)
Horizontal Motor Backward (HORZ_BWD)
Fig. 57: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between horizontal power seat motor C362-2, circuit CPS01 (GN/BU) and
C362-1, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side while toggling DSM active commands horizontal
motor forward and horizontal motor backward, ON and OFF.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when command ON in both directions and no voltage
present when commanded OFF?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J29.
J29 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS01 (GN/BU) AND CPS06 (GN/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 58: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DSM C3299b-9, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side and ground;
and between DSM C3299b-12, circuit CPS01 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J30.
J30 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS01 (GN/BU) AND CPS06 (GN/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 59: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-9, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side and
horizontal power seat motor C362-1, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side; and between DSM
C3299b-12, circuit CPS01 (GN/BU), harness side and horizontal power seat motor C362-2, circuit
CPS01 (GN/BU), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
J31 CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT POWER RECLINER MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Driver Seat Power Recliner Motor C368
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Recline Motor Forward (RECL_FWD)
Recline Motor Backward (RECL_BWD)
Fig. 60: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat power recliner motor C368-1, circuit CPS08 (VT/OG) and
C368-2, circuit CPS07 (GY/BN), harness side while toggling DSM active commands recline motor
forward and recline motor backward, ON and OFF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when command ON in both directions and no voltage
present when commanded OFF?
YES : INSTALL a new seat recliner motor. REFER to Seat Recliner Motor. REPEAT the selftest. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J32.
J32 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS07 (GY/BN) AND CPS08 (VT/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Fig. 61: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DSM C3299b-13, circuit CPS07 (GY/BN), harness side and ground;
and between DSM C3299b-21, circuit CPS08 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to J33.
J33 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS07 (GY/BN) AND CPS08 (VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 62: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-13, circuit CPS07 (GY/BN), harness side and
recliner power seat motor C368-2, circuit CPS07 (GY/BN), harness side; and between DSM
C3299b-21, circuit CPS08 (VT/OG), harness side and recliner power seat motor C368-1, circuit
CPS08 (VT/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test K: The Memory Seat Does Not Operate Correctly - Does Not Operate Using the Memory SET Switch, MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Memory Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The driver seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBP12 (GN/RD) and is supplied ground
on circuit GD133 (BK). When pressed, the seat control switch supplies the voltage and ground to the applicable
driver seat module (DSM) inputs. The DSM then supplies voltage and ground to the appropriate power seat
track motor or power recline motor, based on the inputs received from the seat control switch. When pressed in
the opposite direction, the seat control switch reverses the polarity to the DSM inputs, and the DSM likewise
reverses polarity of the appropriate power seat track motor or power recliner motor circuits causing the seat or
backrest to move in the opposite direction. There are 3 power seat track motors that combine to move the seat
horizontally (forward/rearward) and vertically (front up/down and rear up/down). The seat backrest power
recliner uses a single motor to move the seat backrest forward and rearward.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Battery voltage is supplied to DSM circuit SBB60 (GN/RD) and SBP12 (GN/RD). Ground is supplied to DSM
circuit GD145 (BK/BU).
Each motor in the memory power seat track and power recliner contains a Hall-effect position sensor. The DSM
supplies a signal supply circuit to each position sensor and a shared reference signal return circuit. Each position
sensor sends a signal voltage back to the DSM used to monitor the position of the power seat and seat backrest.
The DSM uses this information to return the seat to a stored pre-programmed position when pressing the
memory SET switch or a remote entry transmitter. Refer to Principles of Operation or the Owner's Literature
for information on programming the DSM for storing memory seat positions.
The following pinpoint test diagnoses a memory seat that does not operate correctly using the memory SET
switch. If the memory seat does not move in all directions using the seat control switch, go to Pinpoint Test J.
DTC Description
Fault Trigger Conditions
B1342 - ECU is Faulted
If a programming error is detected,
the DTC is set.
B1530 - Memory SET Switch Circuit Short to Ground
B1534 - Memory 1 Switch Circuit Short to Ground
B1538 - Memory 2 Switch Circuit Short to Ground
B1663 - Seat Driver Front Up/Down Motor Stalled
B1664 - Seat Driver Rear Up/Down Motor Stalled
B1665 - Seat Driver Forward/Backward Motor Stalled
If any activity is sensed on the
switch input circuit during the DSM
self-test, the DTC is set. If activity is
sensed on the input circuit for
greater than 2 minutes, the DTC is
set as continuous. With the DTC set,
any input signal on the circuit is
ignored.
During self-test, the DSM attempts
to operate the appropriate seat track
motor and uses the motor's position
sensor to monitor movement. If no
motor movement is sensed, the DTC
is set. The DSM will retry motor
operation on the next activation of
the seat control switch. If no
movement continues to be
monitored after 250 milliseconds,
the DSM disables the output.
During self-test, the DSM attempts
to operate the recliner motor and
uses the recliner motor position
sensor to monitor movement. If no
motor movement is sensed, the DTC
is set. The DSM will retry motor
operation on the next activation of
the seat control switch. If no motor
movement is still monitored after
250 milliseconds, the DSM disables
B1666 - Seat Driver Recline Motor Stalled
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
the output.
B1952 - Seat Rear Up/Down Position Feedback Circuit Short
to Battery
If a short to voltage condition is
B1956 - Seat Front Up/Down Position Feedback Circuit Short present on the affected motor's
to Battery
position sensor (Hall-effect)
B1960 - Seat Recline Forward/Backward Position Feedback feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
After a DTC is set, a memory recall
Circuit Short to Battery
is not possible but the seat control
B1964 - Seat Horizontal Forward/Rearward Position
switch can operate the associated
Feedback Circuit Short to Battery
motor in one second increments.
B1953 - Seat Rear Up/Down Position Feedback Circuit Short
to Ground
If a short to ground condition is
B1957 - Seat Front Up/Down Position Feedback Circuit Short present on the affected motor's
to Ground
position sensor (Hall-effect)
B1961 - Seat Recline Forward/Backward Position Feedback feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
After a DTC is set, a memory recall
Circuit Short to Ground
is not possible but the seat control
B1965 - Seat Horizontal Forward/Rearward Position
switch can operate the associated
Feedback Circuit Short to Ground
motor in one second increments.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Faulty memory SET switch
Missing controller area network (CAN) status information (CAN communication message):
ignition switch status
gear selector position
Remote entry transmitter
Memory power seat track
Memory recliner motor
DSM
PINPOINT TEST K: THE MEMORY SEAT DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE
MEMORY SET SWITCH, MKX
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:16 AM
Page 95
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Verify good battery condition before diagnosing the memory seat system. Poor
battery condition may interfere with memory seat operation, even if vehicle
starting is possible.
K1 CHECK DSM GEAR SELECTED (TRANSGEAR) PID STATES
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/Driver Seat Module
(DSM) PID: TRANSGEAR
Operate the transmission gear selector in all positions while monitoring the following DSM PID
TRANSGEAR states:
D6_Park
REV
NTRL
DRIVE5
DRIVE1
Do the PID states agree with the selected positions?
YES : Go to K2.
NO : To diagnose a transmission gear selector (PRNDL) status concern, REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
K2 CHECK DSM IGNITION SWITCH STATUS (IGN_SW) PID STATES
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/Driver Seat Module
(DSM) PID: IGN_SW
Cycle the ignition switch in all positions while monitoring the following DSM IGN_SW PID states:
Off
Accessory
Run
Start
Do the PID states agree with the selected positions?
YES : Go to K3.
NO : To diagnose an ignition switch status concern, REFER to STEERING COLUMN
SWITCHES article.
K3 RETRIEVE DSM DTCs
Operate the memory seat and memory mirrors in all directions through the full range of travel.
Place the memory seat and memory mirrors in central travel positions.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Driver Seat Module (DSM) SelfTest/Retrieve DTCs
Are any DSM DTCs retrieved?
YES : If DTCs B1952, B1956, B1960 and B1964 are all retrieved, go to K10.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 96
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
If DTCs B1953, B1957, B1961 and B1965 are all retrieved, go to K10.
If DTC B1530, go to K5.
If DTC B1534, go to K5.
If DTC B1538, go to K5.
If DTC B1663, go to K11.
If DTC B1664, go to K14.
If DTC B1665, go to K17.
If DTC B1666, go to K20.
If DTC B1952, go to K14.
If DTC B1953, go to K14.
If DTC B1956, go to K11.
If DTC B1957, go to K11.
If DTC B1960, go to K20.
If DTC B1961, go to K20.
If DTC B1964, go to K17.
If DTC B1965, go to K17.
If DTC 1342, INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
For any other DSM DTCs, REFER to the Driver Seat Module (DSM) DTC Chart.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to K4.
K4 MONITOR THE DSM PIDs AND CHECK THE DSM FOR CORRECT MEMORY SET
SWITCH INPUTS
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 97
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Memory 1 recall switch status (MEM_1)
Memory 2 recall switch status (MEM_2)
Memory set switch status (MEM_S)
Monitor the DSM PIDs while activating the memory SET switch, recall 1 and recall 2 buttons.
Do the PID states agree with the switch button positions?
YES : Go to K10.
NO : Go to K5.
K5 CHECK THE MEMORY SET SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Memory SET Switch C503
Fig. 63: Identifying Memory Set Switch Terminals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Use the following table and illustration to check the memory SET switch. Measure the resistance
between the memory SET switch pins, component side, while pressing the indicated switch buttons
and compare the results to the table.
Switch
Pins Ohms
Button
7
Memory
Less
and
SET 1
than 7
2
7
Memory
Less
and
SET 2
than 7
6
7
Memory
Less
and
SET
than 7
5
NOTE:
Refer to multi-meter user's manual for testing diodes.
Use the following table and preceding illustration. Using the diode testing meter function, connect
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 98
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
the meter leads to the memory SET switch pins, component side. Measure the voltages and
compare the results to the table, to check the switch LED indicator.
Positive Negative
Volts
Lead
Lead
Greater
Pin 1
Pin 7
than
0.3
Pin 7
Pin 1
OL
Is the memory SET switch OK?
YES : Go to K6.
NO : INSTALL a new memory SET switch. REFER to Memory Set Switch. REPEAT the selftest. CLEAR the DTCs.
K6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) TO THE MEMORY SET SWITCH FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 64: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between memory SET switch C503-7, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 99
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to K7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
K7 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS14 (GY/VT), CPS15 (VT/WH) AND CPS16 (YE) FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299c
Key in ON position.
Fig. 65: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the following memory SET switch C503 pins, harness side and
ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
CPS15
C503-2
(VT/WH)
CPS14
C503-5
(GY/VT)
CPS16
C503-6
(YE)
Is voltage present on any circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to K8.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 100
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
K8 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS14 (GY/VT), CPS15 (VT/WH) AND CPS16 (YE) FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 66: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the following memory SET switch C503 pins, harness side and
ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
CPS15
C503-2
(VT/WH)
CPS14
C503-5
(GY/VT)
CPS16
C503-6
(YE)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K9.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
K9 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS14 (GY/VT), CPS15 (VT/WH) AND CPS16 (YE) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 101
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 67: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the following memory SET switch C503 pins and DSM C3299c
pins:
Memory
SET
DSM
Switch Circuit C3299c
- Pin
C503 Pin
CPS15 C3299cC503-2
(VT/WH) 16
CPS14 C3299cC503-5
(GY/VT)
14
CPS16 C3299cC503-6
(YE)
17
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
K10 MONITOR THE DSM PIDs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Driver Mirror Left/Right Sensor Pinpoint (DMIR_H)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 102
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Driver Mirror Up/Down Sensor Pinpoint (DMIR_V)
Pedal sensor (PEDLFWD)
Passenger Power Mirror Horizontal Sense (PMIR_H)
Passenger Power Mirror Vertical Sense (PMIR_V)
Driver Power Seat Front Up/Down Sense (SFNT_MT)
Driver Power Seat Forward/Backward Sense (SFWD_MT)
Driver Power Seat Recline Sense (SRCL_MT)
Driver Power Seat Rear Up/Down Sense (SREARMT)
Operate the memory seat and memory mirrors in all directions through the full range of travel while
monitoring the PIDs.
Does each PID indicate the sensor is operational throughout each associated motor's full
range of travel?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the front height PID indicates not sensed, go to K11.
If the rear height PID indicates not sensed, go to K14.
If the horizontal PID indicates not sensed, go to K17.
If the recline PID indicates not sensed, go to K20.
For a memory mirror sensor concern, REFER to REAR VIEW MIRRORS article.
For a memory adjustable pedal sensor concern, REFER to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
K11 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS10 (BU/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Disconnect: Driver Seat Front Height Motor C382
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 103
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 68: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat front height motor C382-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground; and between driver seat front height motor C382-4, circuit VPS10
(BU/GN), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to K12.
K12 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS10 (BU/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 69: Measuring Resistance
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 104
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat front height motor C382-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground; and between driver seat front height motor 382-4, circuit VPS10
(BU/GN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K13.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
K13 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS10 (BU/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 70: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat front height motor C382-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and DSM C3299b-8, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness side; and between driver seat
front height motor C382-4, circuit VPS10 (BU/GN), harness side and DSM C3299b-4, circuit
VPS10 (BU/GN), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 105
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
K14 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS11 (GN/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Disconnect: Driver Seat Rear Height Motor C363
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 71: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat rear height motor C363-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground; and between driver seat rear height motor C363-4, circuit VPS11
(GN/BN), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to K15.
K15 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS11 (GN/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 106
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 72: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat rear height motor C363-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground; and between driver seat rear height motor C363-4, circuit VPS11
(GN/BN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K16.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
K16 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS11 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 73: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat rear height motor C363-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and DSM C3299b-8, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness side; and between driver seat
rear height motor C363-4, circuit VPS11 (GN/BN), harness side and DSM C3299b-3, circuit
VPS11 (GN/BN), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 107
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
K17 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS09 (BN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Disconnect: Driver Seat Horizontal Motor C362
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 74: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat horizontal motor C362-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness
side and ground; and between driver seat horizontal motor C362-4, circuit VPS09 (BN/BU),
harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 108
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to K18.
K18 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS09 (BN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 75: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat horizontal motor C362-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground; and between driver seat horizontal motor C362-4, circuit VPS09
(BN/BU), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K19.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
K19 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS09 (BN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 76: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 109
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between driver seat horizontal motor C362-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and DSM C3299b-8, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness side; and between driver seat
horizontal motor C362-4, circuit VPS09 (BN/BU), harness side and DSM C3299b-14, circuit
VPS09 (BN/BU), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
K20 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS12 (GY/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Disconnect: Driver Seat Recliner Motor C368
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 110
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 77: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat recliner motor C368-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness
side and ground; and between driver seat recliner motor C368-4, circuit VPS12 (GY/OG), harness
side and ground.
Is voltage present on either circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to K21.
K21 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS12 (GY/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 78: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat recliner motor C368-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness
side and ground; and between driver seat recliner motor C368-4, circuit VPS12 (GY/OG), harness
side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to K22.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
K22 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS12 (GY/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 111
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 79: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat recliner motor C368-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness
side and DSM C3299b-8, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness side; and between driver seat recliner
motor C368-4, circuit VPS12 (GY/OG), harness side and DSM C3299b-20, circuit VPS12
(GY/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat recliner motor. REFER to Seat Recliner Motor. REPEAT the selftest. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test L: The Memory Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Does Not Operate Horizontally/Vertically, Edge
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Memory Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING article.
Normal Operation
The driver seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBP12 (GN/RD) and is supplied ground
on circuit GD133 (BK). When pressed, the seat control switch supplies the voltage and ground to the applicable
driver seat module (DSM) inputs. The DSM then supplies voltage and ground to the appropriate power seat
track motor based on the inputs received from the seat control switch. When pressed in the opposite direction,
the seat control switch reverses the polarity to the DSM inputs, and the DSM likewise reverses polarity of the
appropriate power seat track motor circuits causing the seat to move in the opposite direction. There are 3
power seat track motors that combine to move the seat horizontally (forward/rearward) and vertically (front
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 112
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
up/down and rear up/down).
Battery voltage is also supplied to DSM circuit SBB60 (GN/RD) and is supplied ground to DSM circuit GD145
(BK/BU).
Each motor in the memory power seat track contains a Hall-effect position sensor. The DSM supplies a signal
supply circuit to each position sensor and a shared reference signal return circuit. Each position sensor sends a
signal voltage back to the DSM used to monitor the position of the power seat. The DSM uses this information
to return the seat to a stored pre-programmed position when pressing the memory SET switch or a remote entry
transmitter. Refer to Principles of Operation or the Owner's Literature for information on programming the
DSM for storing memory seat positions.
The following pinpoint test diagnoses a memory seat that does not operate in one or more directions when using
the seat control switch. If the memory seat moves in all directions using the seat control switch, go to Pinpoint
Test M.
DTC Description
Fault Trigger Conditions
B1342 - ECU is Faulted
If a programming error is detected,
the DTC is set.
During self-test, the driver seat
module (DSM) attempts to operate
all seat track motors and uses the
B1663 - Seat Driver Front Up/Down Motor Stalled
motor's position sensor to monitor
movement. If no motor movement is
B1664 - Seat Driver Rear Up/Down Motor Stalled
sensed, the DTC is set. The DSM
B1665 - Seat Driver Forward/Backward Motor Stalled
will retry motor operation on the
next activation of the seat control
switch. If no movement continues to
be monitored after 250 milliseconds,
the DSM disables the output.
If voltage is sensed on the switch
input circuit during the DSM selfB1711 - Seat Driver Front Up Switch Circuit Short to Battery
test, the DTC is set. If voltage is
B1715 - Seat Driver Front Down Switch Circuit Short to
sensed on the input circuit for
Battery
greater than 2 minutes, the DTC is
set as continuous. With the DTC set,
any input signal on the circuit is
ignored.
If voltage is sensed on the switch
B1719 - Seat Driver Forward Switch Circuit Short to Battery input circuit during the DSM selfB1723 - Seat Driver Rearward Switch Circuit Short to Battery test, the DTC is set. If voltage is
sensed on the input circuit for
greater than 2 minutes, the DTC is
set as continuous. With the DTC set,
any input signal on the circuit is
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 113
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
ignored.
If voltage is sensed on the switch
input circuit during the DSM selfB1727 - Seat Driver Rear Up Switch Circuit Short to Battery
test, the DTC is set. If voltage is
B1731 - Seat Driver Rear Down Switch Circuit Short to
sensed on the input circuit for
Battery
greater than 2 minutes, the DTC is
set as continuous. With the DTC set,
any input signal on the circuit is
ignored.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Seat control switch
Missing controller area network (CAN) status information (CAN communication message):
ignition switch status
gear selector position
Memory power seat track
DSM
PINPOINT TEST L: THE MEMORY SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - DOES NOT
OPERATE HORIZONTALLY/VERTICALLY, EDGE
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Verify good battery condition before diagnosing the memory seat system. Poor
battery condition may interfere with memory seat operation, even if vehicle
starting is possible.
L1 CHECK DSM GEAR SELECTED (TRANSGEAR) PID STATES
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/Driver Seat Module
(DSM) PID: TRANSGEAR
Operate the transmission gear selector in all positions while monitoring the following DSM PID
TRANSGEAR states:
D6_Park
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 114
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REV
NTRL
DRIVE5
DRIVE1
Do the PID states agree with the selected positions?
YES : Go to L2.
NO : To diagnose a transmission gear selector (PRNDL) status concern, REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
L2 CHECK DSM IGNITION SWITCH STATUS (IGN_SW) PID STATES
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PID: IGN_SW
Cycle the ignition switch in all positions while monitoring the following DSM IGN_SW PID states:
Off
Accessory
Run
Start
Do the PID states agree with the selected positions?
YES : Go to L3.
NO : To diagnose an ignition switch status concern, REFER to STEERING COLUMN
SWITCHES article.
L3 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH STATUS, TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTOR STATUS AND
RETRIEVE DTCs
Operate the memory seat and memory mirrors in all directions through the full range of travel.
Place the memory seat and memory mirrors in central travel positions.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self-Test/DSM/Retrieve DTCs
Are any DSM DTCs retrieved?
YES : If DTCs B1663, B1664 and B1665 are all retrieved, go to L12.
If DTC B1663, go to L20.
If DTC B1664, go to L23.
If DTC B1665, go to L26.
If DTC B1711, go to L5.
If DTC B1715, go to L5.
If DTC B1719, go to L5.
If DTC B1723, go to L5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 115
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
If DTC B1727, go to L5.
If DTC B1731, go to L5.
If DTC 1342, INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
For any other DSM DTCs, REFER to the Driver Seat Module (DSM) DTC Chart.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to L4.
L4 MONITOR THE DSM PIDs AND CHECK FOR CORRECT MEMORY SEAT SWITCH
INPUTS
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Driver Power Seat Front Up/Down Switch (SFNT_SW)
Driver Power Seat Forward/Backward Switch (SFWD_SW)
Driver Power Seat Rear Up/Down Switch (SREARSW)
Monitor DSM seat switch PIDs while activating the seat switch in all positions.
Do the PID states agree with the switch positions?
YES : Go to L11.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 12 (7.5A) is OK. If SJB fuse 12 (7.5A) fails while
operating the seat control switch, DISCONNECT the seat control switch C352 and Go to L9.
If OK, go to L5.
L5 CHECK THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Seat Control Switch C352
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 116
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Check the seat control switch. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING article.
Is the seat control switch OK?
YES : Go to L6.
NO : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. REPEAT the
self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L6 CHECK CIRCUIT SBP12 (GN/RD) FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Fig. 80: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between seat control switch C352-4, circuit SBP12 (GN/RD), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to L7.
NO : VERIFY SJB fuse 12 (7.5A) is OK, If OK, REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L7 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 117
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 81: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between seat control switch C352-2, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to L8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L8 CHECK SEAT CONTROL SWITCH TO DRIVER SEAT MODULE CIRCUITS FOR A
SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Key in ON position.
Fig. 82: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the following seat control switch C352 pins, harness side and ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 118
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
C352-5
C352-7
C352-3
C352-6
C352-1
C352-8
CPS27
(BU/BN)
CPS26
(YE/BU)
CPS23
(GN/VT)
CPS28
(GN)
CPS25
(WH/VT)
CPS24
(GY)
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to L9.
L9 CHECK SEAT CONTROL SWITCH TO DRIVER SEAT MODULE CIRCUITS FOR A
SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Seat Control Switch C352
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 119
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 83: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the following seat control switch C352 pins, harness side and
ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
CPS27
C352-5
(BU/BN)
CPS26
C352-7
(YE/BU)
CPS23
C352-3
(GN/VT)
CPS28
C352-6
(GN)
CPS25
C352-1
(WH/VT)
CPS24
C352-8
(GY)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to L10.
L10 CHECK SEAT CONTROL SWITCH TO DRIVER SEAT MODULE CIRCUITS FOR AN
OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 120
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 84: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the following seat control switch C352 pins, harness side and DSM
C3299b pins, harness side:
Seat
Control
DSM
Switch Circuit Connector
- Pin
Connector
- Pin
CPS27
C352-5
C3299b-17
(BU/BN)
CPS26
C352-7
C3299b-5
(YE/BU)
CPS23
C352-3
C3299b-16
(GN/VT)
CPS28
C352-6
C3299b-15
(GN)
CPS25
C352-1
C3299b-18
(WH/VT)
CPS24
C352-8
C3299b-6
(GY)
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 121
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L11 CHECK THE DSM FOR CORRECT OUTPUTS USING A SCAN TOOL AND DSM
ACTIVE COMMANDS
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Front Motor Up (FRONT_UP)
Front Motor Down (FRONT_DWN)
Rear Motor Up (REAR_UP)
Rear Motor Down (REAR_DWN)
Horizontal Motor Forward (HORZ_FWD)
Horizontal Motor Backward (HORZ_BWD)
Toggle the DSM active commands ON and OFF while monitoring the seat movement.
Does the driver seat operate correctly?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If no seat movement, go to L12.
If no front vertical seat movement, go to L20.
If no rear vertical seat movement, go to L23.
If no horizontal seat movement, go to L26.
L12 CHECK DSM CIRCUIT SBB60 (GN/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: DSM C3299a
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 122
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 85: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DSM C3299a-1, circuit SBB60 (GN/RD), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to L13.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 60 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L13 CHECK CIRCUITS GD145 (BK/BU) AND GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: DSM C3299c
Fig. 86: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299a-2, circuit GD145 (BK/BU), harness side and ground;
and between DSM C3299b-24, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to L14.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 123
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L14 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS03 (VT/GY) AND CPS02 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Fig. 87: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-23, circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-11, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to L16.
NO : Go to L15.
L15 CHECK FRONT HEIGHT POWER SEAT MOTOR CIRCUITS CPS03 (VT/GY) AND
CPS02 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Front Height Power Seat Motor C382
Fig. 88: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-23 circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-11, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 124
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L16 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS05 (BU/WH) AND CPS04 (YE/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 89: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-22, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-10, circuit CPS04 (YE/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to L18.
NO : Go to L17.
L17 CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT POWER SEAT MOTOR CIRCUITS CPS05 (BU/WH) AND
CPS04 (YE/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Rear Height Power Seat Motor C363
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 125
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 90: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-22, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-10, circuit CPS04 (YE/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L18 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS06 (GN/WH) AND CPS01 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 91: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-9, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-12, circuit CPS01 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 126
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to L20.
NO : Go to L19.
L19 CHECK THE HORIZONTAL POWER SEAT MOTOR CIRCUITS CPS06 (GN/WH) AND
CPS01 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Horizontal Power Seat Motor C362
Fig. 92: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-9, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side and
ground; and between DSM C3299b-12, circuit CPS01 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L20 CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT POWER SEAT MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Front Height Power Seat Motor C382
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 127
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Front Motor Up (FRONT_UP)
Front Motor Down (FRONT_DWN)
Fig. 93: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between front height power seat motor C382-2, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE) and
C382-1, circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side while toggling DSM active commands front motor
up and front motor down, ON and OFF.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when commanded ON in both directions and no voltage
present when commanded OFF?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to L21.
L21 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS03 (VT/GY) AND CPS02 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 128
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 94: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DSM C3299b-23, circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side and ground;
and between DSM C3299b-11, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to L22.
L22 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS03 (VT/GY) AND CPS02 (GY/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 95: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-11, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE), harness side and front
height power seat motor C382-2, circuit CPS02 (GY/YE), harness side; and between DSM
C3299b-23, circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side and front height power seat motor C382-1,
circuit CPS03 (VT/GY), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 129
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L23 CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Rear Height Power Seat Motor C363
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Rear Motor Up (REAR_UP)
Rear Motor Down (REAR_DWN)
Fig. 96: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between rear height power seat motor C363-2, circuit CPS04 (YE/OG),
harness side and C363-1, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side while toggling DSM active
commands rear motor up and rear motor down, ON and OFF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 130
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when command ON in both directions and no voltage
present when commanded OFF?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to L24.
L24 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS05 (BU/WH) AND CPS04 (YE/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Key in ON position.
Fig. 97: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DSM C3299b-22, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side and ground;
and between DSM C3299b-10, circuit CPS04 (YE/OG), harness side and ground.
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to L25.
L25 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS05 (BU/WH) AND CPS04 (YE/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 131
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 98: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-22, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side and rear
height power seat motor C363-1, circuit CPS05 (BU/WH), harness side; and between DSM
C3299b-10, circuit CPS04 (YE/OG), harness side and rear height power seat motor C363-2, circuit
CPS04 (YE/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
L26 CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Horizontal Power Seat Motor C362
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 132
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Horizontal Motor Forward (HORZ_FWD)
Horizontal Motor Backward (HORZ_BWD)
Fig. 99: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between horizontal power seat motor C362-2, circuit CPS01 (GN/BU) and
C362-1, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side while toggling DSM active commands horizontal
motor forward and horizontal motor backward, ON and OFF.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when commanded ON in both directions and no voltage
present when commanded OFF?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to L27.
L27 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS01 (GN/BU) AND CPS06 (GN/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 133
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 100: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DSM C3299b-9, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side and ground;
and between DSM C3299b-12, circuit CPS01 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to L28.
L28 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS01 (GN/BU) AND CPS06 (GN/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 101: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DSM C3299b-9, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side and
horizontal power seat motor C362-1, circuit CPS06 (GN/WH), harness side; and between DSM
C3299b-12, circuit CPS01 (GN/BU), harness side and horizontal power seat motor C362-2, circuit
CPS01 (GN/BU), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 134
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test M: The Memory Seat Does Not Operate Correctly - Does Not Operate Using the Memory SET Switch, Edge
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Memory Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The driver seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBP12 (GN/RD) and is supplied ground
on circuit GD133 (BK). When pressed, the seat control switch supplies the voltage and ground to the applicable
driver seat module (DSM) inputs. The DSM then supplies voltage and ground to the appropriate power seat
track motor based on the inputs received from the seat control switch. When pressed in the opposite direction,
the seat control switch reverses the polarity to the DSM inputs, and the DSM likewise reverses polarity of the
appropriate power seat track motor or power recliner motor circuits causing the seat or backrest to move in the
opposite direction. There are 3 power seat track motors that combine to move the seat horizontally
(forward/rearward) and vertically (front up/down and rear up/down).
Battery voltage is supplied to DSM circuit SBB60 (GN/RD) and SBP12 (GN/RD). Ground is supplied to DSM
circuit GD145 (BK/BU).
Each motor in the memory power seat track contains a Hall-effect position sensor. The DSM supplies a signal
supply circuit to each position sensor and a shared reference signal return circuit. Each position sensor sends a
signal voltage back to the DSM used to monitor the position of the power seat. The DSM uses this information
to return the seat to a stored pre-programmed position when pressing the memory SET switch or a remote entry
transmitter. Refer to Principles of Operation or the Owner's Literature for additional information on
programming the DSM for storing memory seat positions.
The following pinpoint test diagnoses a memory seat that does not operate correctly using the memory SET
switch. If the memory seat does not move in all directions using the seat control switch, go to Pinpoint Test L.
DTC Description
Fault Trigger Conditions
B1342 - ECU is Faulted
B1530 - Memory SET Switch Circuit Short to Ground
B1534 - Memory 1 Switch Circuit Short to Ground
If a programming error is detected,
the DTC is set.
If any activity is sensed on the
switch input circuit during the DSM
self-test, the DTC is set. If activity is
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 135
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
B1538 - Memory 2 Switch Circuit Short to Ground
B1663 - Seat Driver Front Up/Down Motor Stalled
B1664 - Seat Driver Rear Up/Down Motor Stalled
B1665 - Seat Driver Forward/Backward Motor Stalled
sensed on the input circuit for
greater than 2 minutes, the DTC is
set as continuous. With the DTC set,
any input signal on the circuit is
ignored.
During self-test, the DSM attempts
to operate the appropriate seat track
motor and uses the motor's position
sensor to monitor movement. If no
motor movement is sensed, the DTC
is set. The DSM will retry motor
operation on the next activation of
the seat control switch. If no
movement continues to be
monitored after 250 milliseconds,
the DSM disables the output.
B1952 - Seat Rear Up/Down Position Feedback Circuit Short If a short to voltage condition is
to Battery
present on the affected motor's
B1956 - Seat Front Up/Down Position Feedback Circuit Short position sensor (Hall-effect)
feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
to Battery
After a DTC is set, a memory recall
B1964 - Seat Horizontal Forward/Rearward Position
is not possible but the seat control
Feedback Circuit Short to Battery
switch can operate the associated
motor in one second increments.
B1953 - Seat Rear Up/Down Position Feedback Circuit Short If a short to ground condition is
to Ground
present on the affected motor's
B1957 - Seat Front Up/Down Position Feedback Circuit Short position sensor (Hall-effect)
feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
to Ground
After a DTC is set, a memory recall
B1965 - Seat Horizontal Forward/Rearward Position
is not possible but the seat control
Feedback Circuit Short to Ground
switch can operate the associated
motor in one second increments.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Faulty memory SET switch
Missing controller area network (CAN) status information (CAN communication message):
ignition switch status
gear selector position
Remote entry transmitter
Memory power seat track
DSM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 136
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST M: THE MEMORY SEAT DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE
MEMORY SET SWITCH, EDGE
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Verify good battery condition before diagnosing the memory seat system. Poor
battery condition may interfere with memory seat operation, even if vehicle
starting is possible.
M1 CHECK DSM GEAR SELECTED (TRANSGEAR) PID STATES
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/Driver Seat Module
(DSM) PID: TRANSGEAR
Operate the transmission gear selector in all positions while monitoring the following DSM PID
TRANSGEAR states:
D6_Park
REV
NTRL
DRIVE5
DRIVE1
Do the PID states agree with the selected positions?
YES : Go to M2.
NO : To diagnose a transmission gear selector (PRNDL) status concern, REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
M2 CHECK DSM IGNITION SWITCH STATUS (IGN_SW) PID STATES
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/Driver Seat Module
(DSM) PID: IGN_SW
Cycle the ignition switch in all positions while monitoring the following DSM IGN_SW PID states:
Off
Accessory
Run
Start
Do the PID states agree with the selected positions?
YES : Go to M3.
NO : To diagnose an ignition switch status concern, REFER to STEERING COLUMN
SWITCHES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 137
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
M3 RETRIEVE THE DSM DTCs
Using the switches, operate the memory seat and memory mirrors in all directions through the full
range of travel.
Place the memory seat and memory mirrors in central travel positions.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/Driver Seat Module
(DSM)/Retrieve DTCs
Are any DSM DTCs retrieved?
YES : If DTCs B1952, B1956 and B1964 are all retrieved, go to M10.
If DTCs B1953, B1957 and B1965 are all retrieved, go to M10.
If DTC B1530, go to M5.
If DTC B1534, go to M5.
If DTC B1538, go to M5.
If DTC B1663, go to M11.
If DTC B1664, go to M14.
If DTC B1665, go to M17.
If DTC B1952, go to M14.
If DTC B1953, go to M14.
If DTC B1956, go to M11.
If DTC B1957, go to M11.
If DTC B1964, go to M17.
If DTC B1965, go to M17.
If DTC 1342, INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
For any other DSM DTCs, REFER to the Driver Seat Module (DSM) DTC Chart.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 138
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to M4.
M4 MONITOR THE DSM PIDs AND CHECK THE DSM FOR CORRECT MEMORY SET
SWITCH INPUTS
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Memory 1 recall switch status (MEM_1)
Memory 2 recall switch status (MEM_2)
Memory set switch status (MEM_S)
Monitor the DSM PIDs while activating the memory SET switch, recall 1 and recall 2 buttons.
Do the PID states agree with the switch button positions?
YES : Go to M11.
NO : Go to M5.
M5 CHECK THE MEMORY SET SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Memory SET Switch C503
Fig. 102: Identifying Memory SET Switch Terminals
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Use the following table and illustration to check the memory SET switch. Measure the resistance
between the memory SET switch pins, component side, while pressing the indicated switch buttons
and compare the results to the table.
Switch
Pins Ohms
Button
7
Memory
Less
and
SET 1
than 7
2
3
Memory
Less
and
SET 2
than 7
2
4
Memory
Less
and
SET
than 7
2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 139
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Refer to multi-meter user's manual for testing diodes.
Use the following table and preceding illustration. Using the diode testing meter function, connect
the meter leads to the memory SET switch pins, component side. Measure the voltages and
compare the results to the table, to check the switch LED indicator.
Positive Negative
Volts
Lead
Lead
Greater
than
Pin 8
Pin 2
0.3
Pin 2
Pin 8
OL
Is the memory SET switch OK?
YES : Go to M6.
NO : INSTALL a new memory SET switch. REFER to Memory Set Switch. REPEAT the selftest. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
M6 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) TO THE MEMORY SET SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 140
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 103: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between memory SET switch C503-2, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to M7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
M7 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS14 (GY/VT), CPS15 (VT/WH) AND CPS16 (YE) FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DSM C3299c
Key in ON position.
Fig. 104: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the following memory SET switch C503 pins, harness side and
ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 141
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
CPS16
(YE)
CPS14
C503-4
(GY/VT)
CPS15
C503-7
(VT/WH)
C503-3
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to M8.
M8 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS14 (GY/VT), CPS15 (VT/WH) AND CPS16 (YE) FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 105: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the following memory SET switch C503 pins, harness side and
ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
CPS16
C503-3
(YE)
CPS14
C503-4
(GY/VT)
CPS15
C503-7
(VT/WH)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 142
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to M9.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
M9 CHECK CIRCUITS CPS14 (GY/VT), CPS15 (VT/WH) AND CPS16 (YE) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 106: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the following memory SET switch C503 pins and DSM C3299c
pins:
Memory
SET
DSM
Switch Circuit C3299c
C503 - Pin
Pin
CPS16 C3299cC503-3
(YE)
17
CPS14 C3299cC503-4
(GY/VT)
14
CPS15 C3299cC503-7
(VT/WH) 16
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 143
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
M10 MONITOR THE DSM PIDs
Place the seat in a central position, using the seat control switch.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DSM PIDs
Driver Mirror Left/Right Sensor Pinpoint (DMIR_H)
Driver Mirror Up/Down Sensor Pinpoint (DMIR_V)
Pedal sensor (PEDLFWD)
Passenger Power Mirror Horizontal Sense (PMIR_H)
Passenger Power Mirror Vertical Sense (PMIR_V)
Driver Power Seat Front Up/Down Sense (SFNT_MT)
Driver Power Seat Forward/Backward Sense (SFWD_MT)
Driver Power Seat Rear Up/Down Sense (SREARMT)
Using the switches, operate the memory seat and memory mirrors in all directions through the full
range of travel while monitoring the PIDs.
Does each PID indicate the sensor is operational throughout each associated motor's full
range of travel?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the front height PID indicates not sensed, go to M11.
If the rear height PID indicates not sensed, go to M14.
If the horizontal PID indicates not sensed, go to M17.
M11 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS10 (BU/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Disconnect: Driver Seat Front Height Motor C382
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 144
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in OFF position.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 107: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat front height motor C382-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground; and between driver seat front height motor C382-4, circuit VPS10
(BU/GN), harness side and ground.
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to M12.
M12 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS10 (BU/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 145
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 108: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat front height motor C382-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground; and between driver seat front height motor 382-4, circuit VPS10
(BU/GN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to M13.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
M13 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS10 (BU/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 109: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat front height motor C382-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and DSM C3299b-8, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness side; and between driver seat
front height motor C382-4, circuit VPS10 (BU/GN), harness side and DSM C3299b-4, circuit
VPS10 (BU/GN), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 146
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
M14 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS11 (GN/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Disconnect: Driver Seat Rear Height Motor C363
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 110: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat rear height motor C363-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground; and between driver seat rear height motor C363-4, circuit VPS11
(GN/BN), harness side and ground.
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 147
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to M15.
M15 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS11 (GN/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 111: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat rear height motor C363-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground; and between driver seat rear height motor C363-4, circuit VPS11
(GN/BN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to M16.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
M16 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS11 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 112: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:17 AM
Page 148
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between driver seat rear height motor C363-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and DSM C3299b-8, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness side; and between driver seat
rear height motor C363-4, circuit VPS11 (GN/BN), harness side and DSM C3299b-3, circuit
VPS11 (GN/BN), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit(s) in question. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
M17 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS09 (BN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: DSM C3299b
Disconnect: Driver Seat Horizontal Motor C362
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 149
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 113: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat horizontal motor C362-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness
side and ground; and between driver seat horizontal motor C362-4, circuit VPS09 (BN/BU),
harness side and ground.
Is voltage present on a circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to M18.
M18 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS09 (BN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 114: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat horizontal motor C362-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and ground; and between driver seat horizontal motor C362-4, circuit VPS09
(BN/BU), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to M19.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
M19 CHECK CIRCUITS RPS13 (GN/OG) AND VPS09 (BN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 150
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 115: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat horizontal motor C362-3, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG),
harness side and DSM C3299b-8, circuit RPS13 (GN/OG), harness side; and between driver seat
horizontal motor C362-4, circuit VPS09 (BN/BU), harness side and DSM C3299b-14, circuit
VPS09 (BN/BU), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat track assembly. REFER to Seat Track. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test N: The Memory SET Switch Indicator is Inoperative/Always On
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Memory Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The memory SET switch indicator is provided voltage, for approximately 5 seconds, from the driver seat
module (DSM) on circuit CPS55 (YE) after the SET switch has been pressed. Ground is supplied at circuit
GD133 (BK). The indicator will turn off after memory switch 1 or memory switch 2 have been pressed or 5
seconds have elapsed.
DTC B2084 Memory SET Indicator Short to Ground - If a short to ground or open condition is present on
the memory SET switch indicator output circuit, the DTC is set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 151
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Memory SET switch
DSM
PINPOINT TEST N: THE MEMORY SET SWITCH INDICATOR IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Verify good battery condition before diagnosing the memory seat system. Poor
battery condition may interfere with memory seat operation, even if vehicle
starting is possible.
N1 RETRIEVE THE DTCs
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/Driver Seat Module
(DSM)/Retrieve DTCs
NOTE:
During the self-test, document when the memory SET switch LED
illuminates and turns off.
Is DTC B2084 present, does memory SET switch LED fail to illuminate when SET button is
pushed or does the memory SET switch LED fail to illuminate during the Self Test?
YES : If DTC B2084 is present or if the memory SET switch LED fails to illuminate during the
Self Test, go to N2.
NO : If the memory SET switch LED is on all the time, go to N6.
N2 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS55 (YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Memory SET Switch C503
Disconnect: DSM C3299c
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 152
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 116: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX vehicles, measure the resistance between memory SET switch C503-1, circuit CPS55
(YE), harness side and ground.
Fig. 117: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge vehicles, measure the resistance between memory SET switch C503-8, circuit CPS55
(YE), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to N3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
N3 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS55 (YE) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 153
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 118: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX vehicles, measure the resistance between memory SET switch C503-1, circuit CPS55
(YE), harness side and DSM C3299c-13, circuit CPS55 (YE) harness side.
Fig. 119: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge vehicles, measure the resistance between memory SET switch C503-8, circuit CPS55
(YE), harness side and DSM C3299c-13, circuit CPS55 (YE) harness side.
Is the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to N4.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
N4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) TO THE MEMORY SET SWITCH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 154
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 120: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX vehicles, measure the resistance between memory SET switch C503-7, circuit GD133
(BK), harness side and ground.
Fig. 121: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge vehicles, measure the resistance between memory SET switch C503-2, circuit GD133
(BK), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to N5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
N5 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS55 (YE) FOR VOLTAGE
Connect: DSM C3299c
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/Driver Seat Module
(DSM) PID: Memory Recall Indicator LED (LED_STATE)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 155
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 122: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX vehicles, measure the voltage between memory SET switch C503-1, circuit CPS55 (YE)
harness side and ground while commanding the memory SET switch LED ON and OFF.
Fig. 123: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge vehicles, measure the voltage between memory SET switch C503-8, circuit CPS55 (YE)
harness side and ground while commanding the memory SET switch LED ON and OFF.
Is voltage present when the command is ON and no voltage present when command is OFF?
YES : INSTALL a new memory SET switch. REFER to Memory Set Switch. REPEAT the selftest. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI). REFER
to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 156
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
N6 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS55 (YE) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Memory SET Switch C503
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 124: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX vehicles, measure the voltage between memory SET switch C503-1, circuit CPS55 (YE)
harness side and ground.
Fig. 125: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge vehicles, measure the voltage between memory SET switch C503-8, circuit CPS55 (YE)
harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 157
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is voltage greater than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to N7.
NO : INSTALL a new memory SET switch. REFER to Memory Set Switch. REPEAT the selftest. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
N7 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS55 (YE) FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DSM C3299c
Fig. 126: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX vehicles, measure the voltage between memory SET switch C503-1, circuit CPS55
(YE), harness side and ground.
Fig. 127: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge vehicles, measure the voltage between memory SET switch C503-8, circuit CPS55 (YE),
harness side and ground.
Is voltage greater than 0.2 volt?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 158
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test O: Easy Exit/Easy Entry is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Normal Operation
The driver seat module (DSM) receives a key out command from the smart junction box (SJB) and a
transmission range selection of park from the PCM, both coming over the medium-speed controller area
network (MS-CAN) communication network and powers the memory driver seat rearward about 2 inches.
When the ignition key is inserted, the memory driver seat goes back to its last known position.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Easy exit/easy entry not enabled
Key-in-ignition warning switch
Driver seat module (DSM)
Missing controller area network (CAN) status information (CAN communication message):
ignition switch status
gear selector position
PINPOINT TEST O: EASY EXIT/EASY ENTRY IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
NOTE:
Verify good battery condition before diagnosing the memory seat system. Poor
battery condition may interfere with memory seat operation, even if vehicle
starting is possible.
NOTE:
The transmission gear selector must be in park for the easy entry/exit feature to
function.
NOTE:
Make sure all memory seat DTC and symptom based faults are corrected before
proceeding with easy entry/exit diagnosis. Verify the PID(s) states agree with
the ignition switch and transmission gear selector in all positions before
proceeding with easy entry/exit diagnosis.
O1 CHECK THE DRIVER POWER SEAT OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 159
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Check the message center to verify the easy entry/exit feature is enabled.
The easy entry/exit feature can be enabled/disabled using a scan tool in module
programming. When enabled, the feature becomes a user accessible item on the message
center allowing the user to turn the feature on and off. Refer to the Owner's Literature or
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING CHIMES article
for information on the message center.
Using the seat control switch, verify the driver power seat operates fully forward and rearward.
NOTE:
During the Self-Test, each memory motor will be requested to move
for one second. If a motor is near the end of travel, that position
sensor feedback will not change as expected for one second
resulting in a false DTC.
Place the memory seat and memory mirrors in central travel positions.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/Driver Seat Module
(DSM)/Retrieve DTCs
Are any DSM DTCs retrieved?
YES : REFER to the Driver Seat Module (DSM) DTC Chart.
NO : If disabled, ENABLE the easy entry/exit feature with the message center. REFER to the
Owner's Literature - Driver Controls for easy entry/exit feature enable/disable instructions. TEST
the system for normal operation. If OK, INSTRUCT the customer on correct system operation.
If easy entry/exit is enabled and the seat does not move horizontally from the seat control switch,
go to Pinpoint Test J for MKX vehicles or Go to Pinpoint Test L for Edge vehicles.
Otherwise, go to O2.
O2 CHECK DSM GEAR SELECTED (TRANSGEAR) PID STATES
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/Driver Seat Module
(DSM) PID: TRANSGEAR
Operate the transmission gear selector in all positions while monitoring the following DSM PID
TRANSGEAR states:
D6_Park
REV
NTRL
DRIVE5
DRIVE1
Do the PID states agree with the selected positions?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 160
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to O3.
NO : To diagnose a transmission gear selector (PRNDL) status concern, REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
O3 CHECK THE GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM/SJB) FOR CORRECT IGNITION
SWITCH POSITION (IGN_SW) STATES
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/GEM/SJB PID: IGN_SW
Insert and remove the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder while monitoring the following
DSM PID IGN_SW states:
Key In
KEY OUT
Monitor the DSM ignition switch position PID with the ignition key in and with the key removed.
Do the DSM PID states agree?
YES : INSTALL a new DSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI). REFER
to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
NO : To diagnose the key-in-ignition warning switch fault, REFER to INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING CHIMES article.
Pinpoint Test P: The Power Lumbar is Inoperative - Driver
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Memory Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBP12 (GN/RD) and is supplied ground on
circuit GD133 (BK). When the lumbar knob on the seat control switch is pressed, voltage and ground are
supplied to the power lumbar motor. When pressing the lumbar knob in the opposite direction, the seat control
switch reverses the polarity to the power lumbar motor, which moves the lumbar mechanism in the opposite
direction.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Seat control switch
Power lumbar motor assembly
PINPOINT TEST P: THE POWER LUMBAR IS INOPERATIVE - DRIVER
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 161
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
P1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBP12 (GN/RD) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Seat Control Switch C3016
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Measure the voltage between seat control switch C3016-5, circuit SBP12 (GN/RD), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to P2.
NO : VERIFY smart junction box (SJB) fuse 12 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST
the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
P2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD133 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 128: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between seat control switch C3016-3, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side and
ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 162
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to P3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
P3 CHECK THE LUMBAR MOTOR
Connect: Seat Control Switch C3016
Disconnect: Power Lumbar Motor C3215
Fig. 129: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
While operating the seat control switch in both directions, measure the voltage between power
lumbar motor C3215-1, circuit CPS18 (BN/GN), harness side and power lumbar motor C3215-2,
circuit CPS19 (GY/VT), harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new power lumbar assembly. REFER to Lumbar Assembly - Power. TEST
the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to P4.
P4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS19 (GY/VT) AND CIRCUIT CPS18 (BN/GN) FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Disconnect: Seat Control Switch C3016
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 163
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 130: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between seat control switch C3016-10, circuit CPS18 (BN/GN), harness
side and ground; and between seat control switch C3016-7, circuit CPS19 (GY/VT), harness side
and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms.
YES : Go to P5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
P5 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS19 (GY/VT) AND CPS18 (BN/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 131: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between seat control switch C3016-10, circuit CPS18 (BN/GN), harness
side and power lumbar motor C3215-1, circuit CPS18 (BN/GN), harness side; and between seat
control switch C3016-7, circuit CPS19 (GY/VT), harness side and power lumbar motor C3215-2,
circuit CPS19 (GY/VT), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 164
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test Q: The Power Lumbar is Inoperative - Passenger
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The seat control switch is powered by battery voltage on circuit SBB61 (GY/RD) and is supplied ground on
circuit GD145 (BK/BU). When the lumbar knob on the seat control switch is pressed, voltage and ground are
supplied to the power lumbar motor. When pressing the lumbar knob in the opposite direction, the seat control
switch reverses the polarity to the power lumbar motor, which moves the lumbar mechanism in the opposite
direction.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Lumbar control switch
Power lumbar motor assembly
PINPOINT TEST Q: THE POWER LUMBAR IS INOPERATIVE - PASSENGER
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
Q1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB61 (GY/RD) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 165
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Disconnect: Seat Control Switch C3026
Measure the voltage between seat control switch C3026-5 , circuit SBB61 (GY/RD), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to Q2.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 61 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST
the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Q2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD145 (BK/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 132: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between seat control switch C3026-3, circuit GD145 (BK/BU), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to Q3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Q3 CHECK THE LUMBAR MOTOR
Connect: Seat Control Switch C3026
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 166
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Power Lumbar Motor C3216
Fig. 133: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
While operating the seat control switch in both directions, measure the voltage between power
lumbar motor C3216-1, circuit CPS20 (VT), harness side and power lumbar motor C3216-2, circuit
CPS21 (WH/OG), harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions
and 0 volts in the rest position?
YES : INSTALL a new power lumbar assembly. REFER to Lumbar Assembly - Power. TEST
the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to Q4.
Q4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS20 (VT) AND CIRCUIT CPS21 (WH/OG) FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Disconnect: Seat Control Switch C3026
Fig. 134: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between seat control switch C3026-10, circuit CPS20 (VT), harness side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 167
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
and ground; and between seat control switch C3026-7, circuit CPS21 (WH/OG), harness side and
ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms.
YES : Go to Q5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Q5 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS20 (VT) AND CIRCUIT CPS21 (WH/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 135: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between seat control switch C3026-10, circuit CPS20 (VT), harness side
and power lumbar motor C3216-1, circuit CPS20 (VT), harness side; and between seat control
switch C3026-7, circuit CPS21 (WH/OG), harness side and power lumbar motor C3216-2, circuit
CPS21 (WH/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test R: The Heated Seats are Inoperative - Front
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 168
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
connector information.
Normal Operation
The heated seat module receives ignition voltage on circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) and is supplied ground on circuit GD133 (BK). When ignition switched voltage is supplied and the
driver or passenger heated seat button on the HVAC module is pressed, a momentary ground signal is sent to
the heated seat module to command the system ON or OFF. Upon receiving a signal, the heated seat module
will decrease one setting (the sequence is hi, lo, OFF, hi, etc.). The heated seat module supplies voltage to the
cushion and backrest heater mats, which are connected in series and operate together. A separate ground to the
heater mats is provided on the backrest heater mat. Temperature is maintained by the heated seat module using
a sensor contained within the cushion heater mat. The heated seat module supplies a reference voltage to the
temperature sensor and monitors the return signal from the temperature sensor for controlling current flow to
the heater mats. The heated seat module is designed to remain ON, heating the seat and maintaining temperature
until switched OFF from the HVAC module or the ignition switch is turned OFF.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heated seat module
PINPOINT TEST R: THE HEATED SEATS ARE INOPERATIVE - FRONT
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
R1 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE HEATED SEAT MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C329
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 169
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Fig. 136: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C329-2, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground; and between heated seat module C329-1, circuit SBB16 (VT/RD), harness side and
ground.
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to R2.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) and smart junction box (SJB) fuse 35
(10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
R2 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT MODULE GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 137: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C329-7, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 170
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to R3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
R3 CHECK THE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 138: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C329-13, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT), harness side
and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to R4.
R4 CHECK THE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 171
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 139: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C329-13, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to R5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
R5 CHECK THE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Passenger Heated Seat C3284
Fig. 140: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C329-13, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT), harness side
and passenger heated seat C3284-3, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to R6.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 172
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
R6 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT GROUND
Fig. 141: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat C3284-4, circuit GD145 (BK/BU), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test S: The Heated Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Driver
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 173
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The heated seat module receives ignition voltage on circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) and is supplied ground on circuit GD133 (BK). When ignition switched voltage is supplied and the
driver heated seat button on the HVAC module is pressed, a momentary ground signal is sent to the heated seat
module on circuit CHS29 (WH/BU) to command the system ON or OFF. Upon receiving a signal, the heated
seat module will decrease one setting (the sequence is hi, lo, OFF, hi, etc.). The heated seat module supplies
voltage to the cushion and backrest heater mats on circuit CHS02 (YE/BU). Ground to the heater mats is
provided on circuit GD145 (BK/BU). The cushion and backrest heater mats are connected in series and operate
together. Temperature is maintained by the heated seat module using a sensor contained within the cushion
heater mat. The heated seat module supplies a reference voltage to the temperature sensor on circuit RHS05
(YE/VT) and monitors the signal from the temperature sensor on circuit VHS26 (VT) for controlling current
flow to the heater mats. The heated seat module is designed to remain ON, heating the seat and maintaining
temperature until switched OFF from the HVAC module or the ignition switch is turned OFF.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heater mat
Heated seat module
HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST S: THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - DRIVER
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
S1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB16 (VT/RD) FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HEATED SEAT MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C329
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 174
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 142: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C329-1, circuit SBB16 (VT/RD) harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to S2.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST
the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S2 CHECK CIRCUIT CHS02 (YE/BU) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Driver Cushion Heater Mat C3283
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 175
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 143: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283-1, circuit CHS02 (YE/BU),
harness side and ground; and between C3283-1, circuit CHS02 (YE/BU), harness side and heated
seat module C329-9, circuit CHS02 (YE/BU) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the driver seat cushion heater mat and
ground; and less than 5 ohms between the driver seat cushion heater mat and the heated seat
module?
YES : Go to S3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S3 CHECK CIRCUIT VHS26 (VT) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 144: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283-2, circuit VHS26 (VT),
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 176
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
harness side and ground; and between C3283-2, circuit VHS26 (VT), harness side and heated seat
module C329-10, circuit VHS26 (VT) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the driver seat cushion heater mat and
ground and less than 5 ohms between the driver seat cushion heater mat and the heated seat
module?
YES : Go to S4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S4 CHECK CIRCUIT RHS05 (YE/VT) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 145: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283-3, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT),
harness side and ground; and between C3283-3, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT), harness side and heated
seat module C329-13, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the driver seat cushion heater mat and
ground and less than 5 ohms between the driver seat cushion heater mat and the heated seat
module?
YES : Go to S5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 177
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S5 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS02 (YE/BU), VHS26 (VT) AND RHS05 (YE/VT) FOR SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 146: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the following driver seat cushion heater mat C3283 pins, harness side
and ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
CHS02
C3283-1
(YE/BU)
VHS26
C3283-2
(VT)
RHS05
C3283-3
(YE/VT)
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to S6.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD145 (BK/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 178
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 147: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283-4, circuit GD145 (BK/BU),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to S7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S7 CHECK CUSHION AND BACKREST HEATER MAT AND SENSOR FOR SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 148: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283 pin 1, component side and
ground; and between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283 pin 2, component side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 179
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to S8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL a new affected cushion or backrest heater mat. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S8 CHECK CUSHION HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Cushion Heater Mat to Driver Seat Backrest Heater Mat Connector
Fig. 149: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283 pin 1, component side and
ground; and between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283 pin 1, component side and driver seat
cushion heater mat to driver seat backrest heater mat connector pin 1, cushion side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the driver seat cushion heater mat and
ground; and between 1.4 and 2.2 ohms between the driver seat cushion heater mat to driver
seat backrest heater mat?
YES : Go to S9.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 180
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S9 CHECK BACKREST HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 150: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat backrest heater mat connector pin 2, component side
and ground; and between driver seat backrest heater mat connector pin 1 and pin 2, component
side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the driver seat backrest heater mat and
ground; and between 1.4 and 2.2 ohms between the driver seat backrest heater mat pins?
YES : Go to S10.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S10 CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN BACKREST AND CUSHION HEATER MAT
Fig. 151: Measuring Resistance
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 181
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283 pin 4, component side and
driver seat cushion heater mat to driver seat backrest heater mat connector pin 2, cushion side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to S11.
NO : INSTALL a new seat cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S11 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 152: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283 pin 2 and pin 3, component
side; and between driver seat cushion heater mat C3283 pin 2, component side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 375,000 ohms and greater than 50 ohms between driver seat
cushion heater mat pins; and greater than 10,000 ohms between driver seat cushion heater
mat and ground?
YES : Go to S12.
NO : INSTALL a new seat cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 182
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S12 CHECK CIRCUIT CHS29 (WH/BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: HVAC Module C228b
Key in ON position.
Fig. 153: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C329-12, circuit CHS29 (WH/BU), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to S13.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S13 CHECK CIRCUIT CHS29 (WH/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 183
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 154: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C329-12, circuit CHS29 (WH/BU), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to S14.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
S14 CHECK CIRCUIT CHS29 (WH/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 155: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C329-12, circuit CHS29 (WH/BU), harness
side and HVAC module C228b-6, circuit CHS29 (WH/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to S15.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 184
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
S15 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE OUTPUT
Connect: HVAC Module C228b
Connect: Heated Seat Module C329
Key in ON position.
Fig. 156: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The following measurement must be taken by back-probing the
heated seat module C329.
NOTE:
The voltage on circuit CHS29 (WH/BU) should drop momentarily
when the driver heated seat control button is pressed.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C329-12, circuit CHS29 (WH/BU), harness side
and ground by back-probing heated seat module connector. Press the driver heated seat control
button on the HVAC module and note the voltage.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts before pressing the driver heated seat control button, then
momentarily drops when the heated seat control button is pressed?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the voltage is greater than 10 volts but did not drop when the driver heated seat button was
pressed, INSTALL a new HVAC module. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
If the voltage is less than 10 volts, INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 185
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Module - Front. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test T: The Heated Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Front Passenger
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The heated seat module receives ignition voltage on circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) and is supplied ground on circuit GD133 (BK). When ignition switched voltage is supplied and the
driver heated seat button on the HVAC module is pressed, a momentary ground signal is sent to the heated seat
module on circuit CHS30 (GY/YE) to command the system ON or OFF. Upon receiving a signal, the heated
seat module will decrease one setting (the sequence is hi, lo, OFF, hi, etc.). The heated seat module supplies
voltage to the cushion and backrest heater mats on circuit CHS07 (GY/BU). Ground to the heater mats is
provided on circuit GD145 (BK/BU). The cushion and backrest heater mats are connected in series and operate
together. Temperature is maintained by the heated seat module using a sensor contained within the cushion
heater mat. The heated seat module supplies a reference voltage to the temperature sensor on circuit RHS05
(YE/VT) and monitors the signal from the temperature sensor on circuit VHS27 (WH/OG) for controlling
current flow to the heater mats. The heated seat module is designed to remain ON, heating the seat and
maintaining temperature until switched OFF from the HVAC module or the ignition switch is turned OFF.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heater mat
Heated seat module
HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST T: THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - PASSENGER
T1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB16 (VT/RD) FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HEATED SEAT MODULE
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control
module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 186
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C329
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 157: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C329-17, circuit SBB16 (VT/RD) harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to T2.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST
the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T2 CHECK CIRCUIT CHS07 (GY/BU) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Passenger Cushion Heater Mat C3284
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 187
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 158: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284-1, circuit CHS07
(GY/BU), harness side and ground; and between C3284-1, circuit CHS07 (GY/BU), harness side
and heated seat module C329-8, circuit CHS07 (GY/BU) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the passenger seat cushion heater mat and
ground; and less than 5 ohms between the passenger seat cushion heater mat and the heated
seat module?
YES : Go to T3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T3 CHECK CIRCUIT VHS27 (WH/OG) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 159: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284-2, circuit VHS27
(WH/OG), harness side and ground; and between C3284-2, circuit VHS27 (WH/OG), harness side
and heated seat module C329-16, circuit VHS27 (WH/OG) harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 188
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the passenger seat cushion heater mat and
ground; and less than 5 ohms between the passenger seat cushion heater mat and the heated
seat module?
YES : Go to T4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T4 CHECK CIRCUIT RHS05 (YE/VT) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 160: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284-3, circuit RHS05
(YE/VT), harness side and ground; and between C3284-3, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT), harness side
and heated seat module C329-13, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the passenger seat cushion heater mat and
ground; and less than 5 ohms between the passenger seat cushion heater mat and the heated
seat module?
YES : Go to T5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T5 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS07 (GY/BU), VHS27 (WH/OG) AND RHS05 (YE/VT) FOR SHORT
TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 189
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 161: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the following passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284 pins, harness
side and ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
CHS07
C3284-1
(GY/BU)
VHS27
C3284-2
(WH/OG)
RHS05
C3284-3
(YE/VT)
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to T6.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD145 (BK/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 190
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 162: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284-4, circuit GD145
(BK/BU), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to T7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T7 CHECK CUSHION AND BACKREST HEATER MAT AND SENSOR FOR SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 163: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284 pin 1, component side and
ground; and between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284 pin 2, component side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to T8.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 191
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL a new affected cushion or backrest heater mat. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T8 CHECK CUSHION HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Mat to Passenger Seat Backrest Heater Mat Connector
Fig. 164: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284 pin 1, component side
and ground; and between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284 pin 1, component side and
passenger seat cushion heater mat to passenger seat backrest heater mat connector pin 1, cushion
side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the passenger seat cushion heater mat and
ground; and between 1.4 and 2.2 ohms between the passenger seat cushion heater mat and
passenger seat cushion heater mat to passenger seat backrest heater mat?
YES : Go to T9.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T9 CHECK BACKREST HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 192
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 165: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat backrest heater mat connector pin 2, component side
and ground; and between passenger seat backrest heater mat connector pin 1 and pin 2, component
side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the passenger seat backrest heater mat
and ground; and between 1.4 and 2.2 ohms between the passenger seat backrest heater mat
pins?
YES : Go to T10.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T10 CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN BACKREST AND CUSHION HEATER MAT
Fig. 166: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284 pin 4, component side
and passenger seat cushion heater mat to passenger seat backrest heater mat connector pin 2,
cushion side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 193
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to T11.
NO : INSTALL a new seat cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T11 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 167: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284 pin 2 and pin 3,
component side; and between passenger seat cushion heater mat C3284 pin 2, component side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 375,000 ohms and greater than 50 ohms between passenger seat
cushion heater mat pins; and greater than 10,000 ohms between passenger seat cushion
heater mat and ground?
YES : Go to T12.
NO : INSTALL a new seat cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T12 CHECK CIRCUIT CHS30 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: HVAC Module C228b
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:18 AM
Page 194
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 168: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C329-15, circuit CHS30 (GY/YE), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to T13.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T13 CHECK CIRCUIT CHS30 (GY/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 169: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C329-15, circuit CHS30 (GY/YE), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to T14.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 195
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T14 CHECK CIRCUIT CHS30 (GY/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 170: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C329-15, circuit CHS30 (GY/YE), harness side
and HVAC module C228b-3, circuit CHS30 (GY/YE), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to T15.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
T15 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE OUTPUT
Connect: HVAC Module C228b
Connect: Heated Seat Module C329
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 196
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 171: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The following measurement must be taken by back-probing the
heated seat module C329.
NOTE:
The voltage on circuit CHS30 (GY/YE) should drop momentarily when
the passenger heated seat control button is pressed.
Measure the voltage between passenger heated seat module C329-15, circuit CHS30 (GY/YE),
harness side and ground by back-probing heated seat module connector. Press the passenger heated
seat control button on the HVAC module and note the voltage.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts before pressing the passenger heated seat control button,
then momentarily drops when the heated seat control button is pressed?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the voltage is greater than 10 volts but did not drop when the passenger heated seat button
was pressed, INSTALL a new HVAC module. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
If the voltage is less than 10 volts, INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat
Module - Front. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 197
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Pinpoint Test U: The Heated Seat is Inoperative - Driver Seat Does Heat But the Heated Seat Indicator Does Not Illuminate
When Pressed
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Upon receiving a signal from the HVAC module, the heated seat module will decrease one setting (the sequence
is hi, lo, OFF, hi, etc.). When the driver heated seat is set to hi, both LED indicators above the driver heated seat
control button will illuminate. When the driver heated seat is set to lo, only the left LED on the driver heated
seat indicator will illuminate. When the driver heated seat is set to OFF, neither driver heated seat LED will
illuminate.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heated seat module
HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST U: THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE - DRIVER SEAT DOES HEAT BUT THE HEATED SEAT
INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN PRESSED
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
U1 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS04 (YE/GY) AND CHS13 (VT/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: HVAC Module C228b
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C329
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 198
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 172: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module C228b-7, circuit CHS04 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground; and between HVAC module C228b-8, circuit CHS13 (VT/BN), harness side and
ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to U2.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
U2 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS04 (YE/GY) AND CHS13 (VT/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 173: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module C228b-7, circuit CHS04 (YE/GY), harness side
and heated seat module C329-5, circuit CHS04 (YE/GY), harness side; and between HVAC
module C228b-8, circuit CHS13 (VT/BN), harness side and heated seat module C329-4, circuit
CHS13 (VT/BN), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 199
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to U3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
U3 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT MODULE HI INDICATOR ON THE HVAC MODULE
Connect: HVAC Module C228b
Key in ON position.
Fig. 174: Checking Heated Seat Module HI Indicator On EATC Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper lead between heated seat module C329-4, circuit CHS13 (VT/BN), harness
side and C329-1, circuit SBB16 (VT/RD), harness side.
Does the right driver heated seat indicator LED illuminate on the HVAC module?
YES : Go to U4.
NO : INSTALL a new HVAC module. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
U4 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT MODULE LOW INDICATOR ON THE HVAC MODULE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 200
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 175: Checking Heated Seat Module Low Indicator On EATC Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper lead between heated seat module C329-5, circuit CHS04 (YE/GY), harness
side and C329-1, circuit SBB16 (VT/RD), harness side.
Does the left driver heated seat indicator LED illuminate on the HVAC module?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new HVAC module. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test V: The Heated Seat is Inoperative - Front Passenger Seat Does Heat But the Heated Seat Indicator Does Not
Illuminate When Pressed
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Upon receiving a signal from the HVAC module, the heated seat module will decrease one setting (the sequence
is hi, lo, OFF, hi, etc.). When the passenger heated seat is set to hi, both LED indicators above the passenger
heated seat control button will illuminate. When the passenger heated seat is set to lo, only the left LED on the
passenger heated seat indicator will illuminate. When the passenger heated seat is set to OFF, neither passenger
heated seat LED will illuminate.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 201
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heated seat module
HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST V: THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE - FRONT PASSENGER SEAT DOES HEAT BUT THE
HEATED SEAT INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN PRESSED
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
V1 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS09 (GY) AND CHS14 (GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: HVAC Module C228b
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C329
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 176: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module C228b-4, circuit CHS09 (GY), harness side and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 202
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
ground; and between HVAC module C228b-5, circuit CHS14 (GN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to V2.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
V2 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS09 (GY) AND CHS14 (GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 177: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between HVAC module C228b-4, circuit CHS09 (GY), harness side and
heated seat module C329-3, circuit CHS09 (GY), harness side; and between HVAC module
C228b-5, circuit CHS14 (GN), harness side and heated seat module C329-6, circuit CHS14 (GN),
harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to V3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
V3 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT MODULE HI INDICATOR ON THE HVAC MODULE
Connect: HVAC Module C228b
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 203
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 178: Checking Heated Seat Module HI Indicator On EATC Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper lead between heated seat module C329-6, circuit CHS14 (GN), harness
side and C329-1, circuit SBB16 (VT/RD), harness side.
Does the right passenger heated seat indicator LED illuminate on the HVAC module?
YES : Go to V4.
NO : INSTALL a new HVAC module. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
V4 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT MODULE LOW INDICATOR ON THE HVAC MODULE
Fig. 179: Checking Heated Seat Module Low Indicator On EATC Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper lead between passenger heated seat module C329-3, circuit CHS09 (GY),
harness side and C329-1, circuit SBB16 (VT/RD), harness side.
Does the left passenger heated seat indicator LED illuminate on the HVAC module?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Front. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 204
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new HVAC module. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test W: The Heated Seats are Inoperative - Rear
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The heated seat module receives battery voltage on circuit SBB07 (WH/RD) and ignition voltage on circuit
CBP35 (YE/GY), and is supplied ground on circuit GD133 (BK). When the left rear heated seat control switch
is pressed with the ignition switch in RUN or START, a ground is supplied on circuit CHS46 (YE/GN) to
command the system ON or OFF in hi heat mode or circuit CHS47 (VT/GN) to command the system ON or
OFF in low heat mode. When the right rear heated seat control switch is pressed with the ignition switch in
RUN or START, a ground is supplied on circuit CHS50 (BU/GY) to command the system ON or OFF in hi
heat mode or circuit CHS51 (YE/GY) to command the system ON or OFF in low heat mode. When commanded
ON, voltage is supplied to the heated seat switch from the heated seat module on either circuit CHS48 (YE) (left
rear) or CHS52 (BU) (right rear) (hi heat mode); or circuit CHS49 (VT) (left rear) or CHS53 (WH/BN) (right
rear) (low heat mode) illuminating the switch indicator. The heated seat module also supplies voltage to the
cushion and backrest heater mats on circuit CHS39 (GN/BU) (left rear) or CHS43 (GY/BU) (right rear) and
ground to the heater mats on circuit GD126 (BK/WH) (left rear) or GD151 (BK/GN) (right rear). The cushion
and backrest heater mats are connected in series and operate together. Temperature is maintained by the heated
seat module using a sensor contained within the cushion heater mat. The heated seat module monitors the
temperature sensors on circuit VHS42 (GN) (left rear) or VHS45 (GY/BN) (right rear) for adjusting the current
flow to the heater mats and uses a ground supplied on circuit RHS41 (GN/BN). The heated seat module is
designed to remain ON, heating the seat and maintaining temperature until switched OFF or the ignition voltage
is switched OFF.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heated seat module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 205
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST W: THE HEATED SEATS ARE INOPERATIVE - REAR
W1 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE HEATED SEAT MODULE
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C3162
Key in ON position.
Fig. 180: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C3162-2, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground; and between heated seat module C3162-1, circuit SBB07 (WH/RD), harness side and
ground.
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to W2.
NO : VERIFY battery junction box (BJB) fuse 7 (30A) and smart junction box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A)
are OK. If OK, REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
W2 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT MODULE GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 181: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-7, circuit GD133 (BK), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 206
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to W3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
W3 CHECK THE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 182: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C3162-13, circuit RHS41 (GN/BN), harness side
and ground.
Is voltage greater than 0.2 volt?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to W4.
W4 CHECK THE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 183: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-13, circuit RHS41 (GN/BN), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to W5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 207
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
W5 CHECK THE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Right Rear Heated Seat C3169
Fig. 184: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-13, circuit RHS41 (GN/BN), harness
side and right rear heated seat C3169-3, circuit RHS41 (GN/BN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test X: The Heated Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Left Rear
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The heated seat module receives battery voltage on circuit CBP35 (YE/GY) and ignition voltage on circuit
SBB07 (WH/RD), and is supplied ground on circuit GD133 (BK). When the left rear heated seat control switch
is pressed with the ignition switch in RUN or START, a ground is supplied on circuit CHS46 (YE/GN) to
command the system ON or OFF in hi heat mode or circuit CHS47 (VT/GN) to command the system ON or
OFF in low heat mode. When commanded ON, voltage is supplied to the heated seat switch from the heated
seat module on either circuit CHS48 (YE) (hi heat mode) or circuit CHS49 (VT) (low heat mode) illuminating
the switch indicator. The heated seat module also supplies voltage to the cushion and backrest heater mats on
circuit CHS39 (GN/BU) and ground to the heater mats on circuit GD126 (BK/WH). The cushion and backrest
heater mats are connected in series and operate together. Temperature is maintained by the heated seat module
using a sensor contained within the cushion heater mat. The heated seat module monitors the temperature sensor
on circuit VHS42 (GN) for adjusting the current flow to the heater mats and uses a ground supplied on circuit
RHS41 (GN/BN). The heated seat module is designed to remain ON, heating the seat and maintaining
temperature until switched OFF or the ignition voltage is switched OFF.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 208
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heater mat
Heated seat module
Heated seat switch
PINPOINT TEST X: THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - LEFT REAR
X1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB07 (WH/RD) FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HEATED SEAT MODULE
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C3162
Fig. 185: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C3162-1, circuit SBB07 (WH/RD) harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to X2.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
X2 CHECK CIRCUIT CHS39 (GN/BU) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Left Rear Cushion Heater Mat C3167
Fig. 186: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167-1, circuit CHS39 (GN/BU),
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 209
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
harness side and ground; and between C3167-1, circuit CHS39 (GN/BU), harness side and heated
seat module C3162-9, circuit CHS39 (GN/BU) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the left rear seat cushion heater mat and
ground; and less than 5 ohms between the left rear seat cushion heater mat and the heated
seat module?
YES : Go to X3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
X3 CHECK CIRCUIT VHS42 (GN) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 187: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167-2, circuit VHS42 (GN),
harness side and ground; and between C3167-2, circuit VHS42 (GN), harness side and heated seat
module C3162-10, circuit VHS42 (GN) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the left rear seat cushion heater mat and
ground and less than 5 ohms between the left rear seat cushion heater mat and the heated
seat module?
YES : Go to X4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
X4 CHECK CIRCUIT RHS41 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 188: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 210
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167-3, circuit RHS41 (GN/BN),
harness side and ground; and between C3167-3, circuit RHS41 (GN/BN), harness side and heated
seat module C3162-13, circuit RHS41 (GN/BN) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the left rear seat cushion heater mat and
ground and less than 5 ohms between the left rear seat cushion heater mat and the heated
seat module?
YES : Go to X5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
X5 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS39 (GN/BU), VHS42 (GN) AND RHS41 (GN/BN) FOR SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 189: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the following left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167 pins, harness
side and ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
CHS39
C3167-1
(GN/BU)
VHS42
C3167-2
(GN)
RHS41
C3167-3
(GN/BN)
Are the voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to X6.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
X6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD126 (BK/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 211
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 190: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167-4, circuit GD126
(BK/WH), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to X7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
X7 CHECK CUSHION AND BACKREST HEATER MAT AND SENSOR FOR SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 191: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167 pin 1, component side and
ground; and between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167 pin 2, component side and ground.
Are the voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to X8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL a new affected cushion or backrest heater mat. TEST the
system for normal operation.
X8 CHECK CUSHION HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater Mat to Left Rear Seat Backrest Heater Mat Connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 212
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 192: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167 pin 1, component side and
ground; and between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167 pin 1, component side and left rear
seat cushion heater mat to left rear seat backrest heater mat connector pin 1, cushion side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the left rear seat cushion heater mat and
ground; and between 1.6 and 2.2 ohms between the left rear seat cushion heater mat and left
rear seat backrest heater mat?
YES : Go to X9.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
X9 CHECK BACKREST HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 193: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between left rear seat backrest heater mat connector pin 2, component side
and ground; and between left rear seat backrest heater mat connector pin 1 and pin 2, component
side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the left rear seat backrest heater mat and
ground; and between 1.6 and 2.2 ohms between the left rear seat backrest heater mat pins?
YES : Go to X10.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
X10 CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN BACKREST AND CUSHION HEATER MAT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 213
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 194: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167 pin 4, component side and
left rear seat cushion heater mat to left rear seat backrest heater mat connector pin 2, cushion side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to X11.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
X11 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 195: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167 pin 2 and pin 3, component
side; and between left rear seat cushion heater mat C3167 pin 2, component side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 300,000 ohms and greater than 50 ohms between left rear seat
cushion heater mat pins; and greater than 10,000 ohms between left rear seat cushion heater
mat and ground?
YES : Go to X12.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
X12 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS46 (YE/GN) AND CHS47 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Left Rear Heated Seat Switch C722
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 214
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 196: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C3162-11, circuit CHS46 (YE/GN), harness side
and ground; and between heated seat module C3162-12, circuit CHS47 (VT/GN), harness side and
ground.
Are the voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to X13.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
X13 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS46 (YE/GN) AND CHS47 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 197: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-11, circuit CHS46 (YE/GN), harness
side and ground; and between heated seat module C3162-12, circuit CHS47 (VT/GN), harness side
and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to X14.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
X14 CHECK BETWEEN CIRCUITS CHS46 (YE/GN) AND CHS47 (VT/GN) FOR A SHORT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 215
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 198: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-11, circuit CHS46 (YE/GN), harness
side and heated seat module C3162-12, circuit CHS47 (VT/GN), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to X15.
NO : REPAIR the circuits. TEST the system for normal operation.
X15 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS46 (YE/GN) AND CHS47 (VT/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 199: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-11, circuit CHS46 (YE/GN), harness
side and left rear heated seat switch C722-6, circuit CHS46 (YE/GN), harness side; and between
heated seat module C3162-12, circuit CHS47 (VT/GN), harness side and left rear heated seat
switch C722-2, circuit CHS47 (VT/GN), harness side
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to X16.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
X16 CHECK HEATED SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT GD126 (BK/WH)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 216
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 200: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between left rear heated seat switch C722-1, circuit GD126 (BK/WH),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to X17.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
X17 CHECK THE RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT SWITCH
Connect the right rear heated seat switch to the left rear heated seat switch connector.
Key in ON position.
Check the left rear heated seat operation.
Does the left rear heated seat operate correctly?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat switch. REFER to Heated Seat Switch - Rear Seat. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Rear Seat. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test Y: The Heated Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Right Rear
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The heated seat module receives battery voltage on circuit CBP35 (YE/GY) and ignition voltage on circuit
SBB07 (WH/RD), and is supplied ground on circuit GD133 (BK). When the right rear heated seat control
switch is pressed with the ignition switch in RUN or START, a ground is supplied on circuit CHS50 (BU/GY)
to command the system ON or OFF in hi heat mode or circuit CHS51 (YE/GY) to command the system ON or
OFF in low heat mode. When commanded ON, voltage is supplied to the heated seat switch from the heated
seat module on either circuit CHS52 (BU) (hi heat mode) or circuit CHS53 (WH/BN) (low heat mode)
illuminating the switch indicator. The heated seat module also supplies voltage to the cushion and backrest
heater mats on circuit CHS43 (GY/BU) and ground to the heater mats on circuit GD151 (BK/GN). The cushion
and backrest heater mats are connected in series and operate together. Temperature is maintained by the heated
seat module using a sensor contained within the cushion heater mat. The heated seat module monitors the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 217
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
temperature sensor on circuit VHS45 (GY/BN) for adjusting the current flow to the heater mats and uses a
ground supplied on circuit RHS41 (GN/BN). The heated seat module is designed to remain ON, heating the seat
and maintaining temperature until switched OFF or the ignition voltage is switched OFF.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heater mat
Heated seat module
Heated seat switch
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - RIGHT REAR
Y1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB07 (WH/RD) FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HEATED SEAT MODULE
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C3162
Fig. 201: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C3162-17, circuit SBB07 (WH/RD) harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to Y2.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y2 CHECK CIRCUIT CHS43 (GY/BU) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Right Rear Cushion Heater Mat C3169
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 218
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 202: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169-1, circuit CHS43
(GY/BU), harness side and ground; and between C3169-1, circuit CHS43 (GY/BU), harness side
and heated seat module C3162-8, circuit CHS43 (GY/BU) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the right rear seat cushion heater mat and
ground; and less than 5 ohms between the right rear seat cushion heater mat and the heated
seat module?
YES : Go to Y3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y3 CHECK CIRCUIT VHS45 (GY/BN) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 203: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169-2, circuit VHS45
(GY/BN), harness side and ground; and between C3169-2, circuit VHS45 (GY/BN), harness side
and heated seat module C3162-16, circuit VHS45 (GY/BN) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the right rear seat cushion heater mat and
ground and less than 5 ohms between the right rear seat cushion heater mat and the heated
seat module?
YES : Go to Y4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y4 CHECK CIRCUIT RHS41 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 219
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 204: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169-3, circuit RHS41
(GN/BN), harness side and ground; and between C3169-3, circuit RHS41 (GN/BN), harness side
and heated seat module C3162-13, circuit RHS41 (GN/BN) harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the right rear seat cushion heater mat and
ground and less than 5 ohms between the right rear seat cushion heater mat and the heated
seat module?
YES : Go to Y5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y5 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS43 (GY/BU), VHS45 (GY/BN) AND RHS41 (GN/BN) FOR SHORT
TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 205: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the following left rear seat cushion heater mat C3169 pins, harness
side and ground:
Connector
Circuit
- Pin
CHS43
C3169-1
(GY/BU)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 220
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
VHS45
(GY/BN)
RHS41
C3169-3
(GN/BN)
C3169-2
Are the voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to Y6.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD151 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 206: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169-4, circuit GD151
(BK/GN), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to Y7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y7 CHECK CUSHION AND BACKREST HEATER MAT AND SENSOR FOR SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 207: Measuring Voltage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 221
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169 pin 1, component side and
ground; and between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169 pin 2, component side and ground.
Are the voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to Y8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL a new affected cushion or backrest heater mat. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Y8 CHECK CUSHION HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater Mat to Right Rear Seat Backrest Heater Mat
Connector
Fig. 208: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169 pin 1, component side and
ground; and between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169 pin 1, component side and right rear
seat cushion heater mat to right rear seat backrest heater mat connector pin 1, cushion side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the right rear seat cushion heater mat and
ground; and between 1.6 and 2.2 ohms between the right rear seat cushion heater mat and
right rear seat backrest heater mat?
YES : Go to Y9.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y9 CHECK BACKREST HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 222
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 209: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between right rear seat backrest heater mat connector pin 2, component side
and ground; and between right rear seat backrest heater mat connector pin 1 and pin 2, component
side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the right rear seat backrest heater mat
and ground; and between 1.6 and 2.2 ohms between the right rear seat backrest heater mat
pins?
YES : Go to Y10.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y10 CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN BACKREST AND CUSHION HEATER MAT
Fig. 210: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169 pin 4, component side and
right rear seat cushion heater mat to right rear seat backrest heater mat connector pin 2, cushion
side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to Y11.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y11 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
OR SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 223
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 211: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169 pin 2 and pin 3,
component side; and between right rear seat cushion heater mat C3169 pin 2, component side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 300,000 ohms and greater than 50 ohms between right rear seat
cushion heater mat pins; and greater than 10,000 ohms between right rear seat cushion
heater mat and ground?
YES : Go to Y12.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion heater mat. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y12 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS50 (BU/GY) AND CHS51 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Right Rear Heated Seat Switch C822
Key in ON position.
Fig. 212: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between heated seat module C3162-14, circuit CHS50 (BU/GY), harness side
and ground; and between heated seat module C3162-15, circuit CHS51 (YE/GY), harness side and
ground.
Are the voltages less than 0.2 volt?
YES : Go to Y13.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y13 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS50 (BU/GY) AND CHS51 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 224
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 213: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-14, circuit CHS50 (BU/GY), harness
side and ground; and between heated seat module C3162-15, circuit CHS51 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to Y14.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y14 CHECK BETWEEN CIRCUITS CHS50 (BU/GY) AND CHS51 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT
Fig. 214: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-14, circuit CHS50 (BU/GY), harness
side and heated seat module C3162-15, circuit CHS51 (YE/GY), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to Y15.
NO : REPAIR the circuits. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y15 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS50 (BU/GY) AND CHS51 (YE/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 225
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 215: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-14, circuit CHS50 (BU/GY), harness
side and right rear heated seat switch C822-6, circuit CHS50 (BU/GY), harness side; and between
heated seat module C3162-15, circuit CHS51 (YE/GY), harness side and right rear heated seat
switch C822-2, circuit CHS51 (YE/GY), harness side
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to Y16.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y16 CHECK HEATED SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT GD145 (BK/BU)
Fig. 216: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between right rear heated seat switch C822-1, circuit GD145 (BK/BU),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to Y17.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y17 CHECK THE RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT SWITCH
Connect the left rear heated seat switch to the right rear heated seat switch connector.
Key in ON position.
Check the right rear heated seat operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 226
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Does the right rear heated seat operate correctly?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat switch. REFER to Heated Seat Switch - Rear Seat. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Rear Seat. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test Z: The Heated Seat is Inoperative - Left Rear Seat Does Heat But the Heated Seat Indicator Does Not Illuminate
When Pressed
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Pressing the left rear heated seat switch once in either the hi or low mode will command ON the left rear heated
seat. Voltage is then supplied to the left rear heated seat switch from the heated seat module on either circuit
CHS48 (YE) (hi heat mode) or circuit CHS49 (VT) (low heat mode) illuminating the switch indicator. Pressing
the left rear heated seat switch again in the mode that is currently on will set the left rear heated seat to OFF and
also turn that LED OFF.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heated seat module
Heated seat switch
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE - LEFT REAR SEAT DOES HEAT BUT THE HEATED SEAT
INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN PRESSED
Z1 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS49 (VT) AND CHS48 (YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Left Rear Heated Seat Switch C722
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C3162
Fig. 217: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 227
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-5, circuit CHS49 (VT), harness side and
ground; and between heated seat module C3162-4, circuit CHS48 (YE), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to Z2.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Z2 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS49 (VT) AND CHS48 (YE) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 218: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between left rear heated seat switch C722-3, circuit CHS49 (VT), harness
side and heated seat module C3162-5, circuit CHS49 (VT), harness side; and between left rear
heated seat switch C722-4, circuit CHS48 (YE), harness side and heated seat module C3162-4,
circuit CHS48 (YE), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to Z3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Z3 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR
Connect: Left Rear Heated Seat Switch C722
Key in ON position.
Fig. 219: Checking Heated Seat Module HI Indicator On EATC Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 228
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Connect a fused jumper lead between heated seat module C3162-4, circuit CHS48 (YE), harness
side and C3162-1, circuit SBB07 (WH/RD), harness side.
Does the hi indicator LED illuminate on the left rear heated seat switch?
YES : Go to Z4.
NO : INSTALL a new rear heated seat switch. REFER to Heated Seat Switch - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Z4 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR
Fig. 220: Checking Heated Seat Module Low Indicator On EATC Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper lead between heated seat module C3162-5, circuit CHS49 (VT), harness
side and C3162-1, circuit SBB07 (WH/RD), harness side.
Does the low indicator LED illuminate on the left rear heated seat switch?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new rear heated seat switch. REFER to Heated Seat Switch - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test AA: The Heated Seat is Inoperative - Left Rear Seat Does Heat But the Heated Seat Indicator is On All the Time
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Pressing the left rear heated seat switch once in either the hi or low mode will command ON the left rear heated
seat. Voltage is then supplied to the left rear heated seat switch from the heated seat module on either circuit
CHS48 (YE) (hi heat mode) or circuit CHS49 (VT) (low heat mode) illuminating the switch indicator. Pressing
the left rear heated seat switch again in the mode that is currently on will set the left rear heated seat to OFF and
also turn that LED OFF.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 229
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Heated seat module
PINPOINT TEST AA: THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE - LEFT REAR SEAT DOES HEAT BUT THE HEATED SEAT
INDICATOR IS ON ALL THE TIME
AA1 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS49 (VT) AND CHS48 (YE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C3162
Did the affected hi or low indicator LED turn off when the heated seat module was
disconnected?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test AB: The Heated Seat is Inoperative - Right Rear Seat Does Heat But the Heated Seat Indicator Does Not Illuminate
When Pressed
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Pressing the right rear heated seat switch once in either the hi or low mode will command ON the left rear
heated seat. Voltage is then supplied to the left rear heated seat switch from the heated seat module on either
circuit CHS52 (BU) (hi heat mode) or circuit CHS53 (WH/BN) (low heat mode) illuminating the switch
indicator. Pressing the right rear heated seat switch again in the mode that is currently on will set the right rear
heated seat to OFF and also turn that LED OFF.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heated seat module
Heated seat switch
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE - RIGHT REAR SEAT DOES HEAT BUT THE HEATED
SEAT INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN PRESSED
AB1 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS53 (WH/BN) AND CHS52 (BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Right Rear Heated Seat Switch C822
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C3162
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 230
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 221: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between heated seat module C3162-3, circuit CHS53 (WH/BN), harness
side and ground; and between heated seat module C3162-6, circuit CHS52 (BU), harness side and
ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AB2.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
AB2 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS53 (WH/BN) AND CHS52 (BU) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 222: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between right rear heated seat switch C822-3, circuit CHS53 (WH/BN),
harness side and heated seat module C3162-3, circuit CHS53 (WH/BN), harness side; and between
right rear heated seat switch C822-4, circuit CHS52 (BU), harness side and heated seat module
C3162-6, circuit CHS52 (BU), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AB3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
AB3 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR
Connect: Right Rear Heated Seat Switch C822
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 231
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 223: Checking Heated Seat Module HI Indicator On EATC Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper lead between heated seat module C3162-6, circuit CHS52 (BU), harness
side and C3162-1, circuit SBB07 (WH/RD), harness side.
Does the hi indicator LED illuminate on the right rear heated seat switch?
YES : Go to AB4.
NO : INSTALL a new rear heated seat switch. REFER to Heated Seat Switch - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
AB4 CHECK THE HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR
Fig. 224: Checking Heated Seat Module Low Indicator On EATC Module
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused jumper lead between heated seat module C3162-3, circuit CHS53 (WH/BN),
harness side and C3162-17, circuit SBB07 (WH/RD), harness side.
Does the low indicator LED illuminate on the right rear heated seat switch?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new rear heated seat switch. REFER to Heated Seat Switch - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test AC: The Heated Seat is Inoperative - Right Rear Seat Does Heat But the Heated Seat Indicator is On All the Time
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 232
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Normal Operation
Pressing the right rear heated seat switch once in either the hi or low mode will command ON the left rear
heated seat. Voltage is then supplied to the left rear heated seat switch from the heated seat module on either
circuit CHS52 (BU) (hi heat mode) or circuit CHS53 (WH/BN) (low heat mode) illuminating the switch
indicator. Pressing the right rear heated seat switch again in the mode that is currently on will set the right rear
heated seat to OFF and also turn that LED OFF.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Heated seat module
PINPOINT TEST AC: THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE - RIGHT REAR SEAT DOES HEAT BUT THE HEATED
SEAT INDICATOR IS ON ALL THE TIME
AC1 CHECK CIRCUITS CHS53 (WH/BN) AND CHS52 (BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Heated Seat Module C3162
Did the affected hi or low indicator LED turn off when the heated seat module was
disconnected?
YES : INSTALL a new heated seat module. REFER to Heated Seat Module - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test AD: A Single Climate Controlled Seat is Inoperative - Switch Indicators May or May Not Illuminate
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DSCM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 233
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
seat switch settings.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Medium-speed controller area network (MS-CAN) fault
HVAC module
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AD: A SINGLE CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE - SWITCH INDICATORS MAY OR
MAY NOT ILLUMINATE
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AD1 CHECK OPERATION OF BOTH CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS AND VERIFY THE
SYMPTOM
Check the operation of both climate controlled seats and verify the symptom.
Is only a single climate controlled seat inoperative?
YES : Go to AD2.
NO : If both seats are inoperative, go to Symptom Chart.
AD2 CHECK FOR DCSM AND HVAC DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/DCSM/Retrieve DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/HVAC module/Retrieve
DTCs
Were any DTCs retrieved during the on-demand self tests?
YES : For DCSM DTCs, go to the Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM) DTC Chart.
For HVAC DTCs, REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
& DIAGNOSTICS article to diagnose the HVAC module fault.
NO : Go to AD3.
AD3 CHECK OPERATION OF THE DCSM USING PIDs
NOTE:
The purpose of this step is to verify the DCSM is able to receive and
process inbound command messages from the communication bus and
demonstrate if the DCSM is operational. This indicates the HVAC module
may not be sending the commands correctly.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DCSM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 234
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Driver Seat
Seat cushion thermal electric device temperature (CSHTEMP)
Seat back thermal electric device temperature (BK_TEMP)
Climate-controlled seat heat command (TED_HEAT_D)
Front Passenger Seat
Passenger Cushion Thermal Electric Device (TED) Temperature (PCSHTMP)
Passenger Back TED Temperature (PBKTMP)
Passenger TED Heat Mode (TED_HEAT_P)
NOTE:
The DCSM active commands TED_HEAT_D (driver seat) and
TED_HEAT_P (passenger seat) are limited to 15 seconds in the ON
state.
Operate the affected climate controlled seat using the active command while monitoring the
appropriate PIDs for that seat.
When the command is in process the TED temperature PIDs on the affected seat should
momentarily increase. If no temperature increase is noted, remove the cushion blower filter
and repeat the active command while physically monitoring the cushion blower for fan
movement.
Do the PID states or cushion blower movement indicate climate controlled seat operation
when using the active command?
YES : Go to AD4.
NO : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
AD4 USE THE HVAC SWITCH AND MONITOR THE DCSM PID FOR A RESPONSE
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DCSM
Driver State Seat Mode (DCCSMOD) (driver seat)
Passenger State Seat Mode (PCCSMOD) (passenger seat)
Key in START position.
NOTE:
Operation of the climate controlled seats repeatedly ON and OFF or
repeatedly switching between heat and cool modes may cause DCSM
DTCs to set, disabling one or both seat system and may require
DTCs to be cleared before seat operation may continue. It is
recommended to allow time between modes for seat temperatures to
return toward ambient temperatures before continuing.
Attempt to operate the affected climate controlled seat in all modes using the appropriate switch on
the HVAC while monitoring the DCSM PID DCCSMOD (driver seat) or PCCSMOD (passenger
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 235
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
seat).
Do all the PID states match the climate controlled seat settings selected on the HVAC
module?
YES : If the fault is intermittent, CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault. INSPECT the
connectors, terminals and wiring. ATTEMPT to recreate the fault by flexing the wire harness and
operating the system. CHECK the electrical connectors for corrosion, poor pin contact or pushedout pins. REPAIR any intermittent concerns found and TIGHTEN any loose DCSM connector
pins. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
NO : INSTALL a new HVAC module. REFER to CLIMATE CONTROL article. REPEAT the
self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Pinpoint Test AE: DTC B103B/B1111 - Thermo-electric Driver Overcurrent Low/Driver Thermo-electric Device Control
Overtemperature Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B103B Thermo-electric Driver Overcurrent Low - If DCSM outputs to the driver seat backrest or
cushion TED (circuit pins G, H, J or K at the DCSM connector) or any components within these circuit
loops are shorted to ground or a TED resistance of less than 0.9 ohm is sensed, the DCSM will shut down
the driver seat system and set this DTC.
DTC B1111 Driver Thermo-electric Device Control Overtemperature Fault - If the DCSM TED driver
integrated circuit temperature exceeds 175°C (347°F), the DCSM will shut down the driver seat system
and set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 236
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Wiring, terminals or connectors
TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AE: DTC B103B/B1111 - THERMO-ELECTRIC DRIVER OVERCURRENT LOW/DRIVER THERMOELECTRIC DEVICE CONTROL OVERTEMPERATURE FAULT
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AE1 CHECK THE TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036a
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Measure the resistance between the following DCSM C3036a pins, harness side and ground.
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CHS02
C3036a-G
(YE/BU)
RHS02
C3036a-H
(BU/OG)
CHS01
C3036a-J
(GY/VT)
RHS01
C3036a-K
(WH/VT)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AE2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 237
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : If the resistances of C3036a-G, circuit CHS02 (YE/BU) and/or C3036a-H, circuit RHS02
(BU/OG) to ground were not greater than 10,000 ohms to ground, go to AE6.
If resistances of C3036a-J, circuit CHS01 (GY/VT) and/or C3036a-K, circuit RHS01 (WH/VT) to
ground were not greater than 10,000 ohms to ground, go to AE7.
AE2 CHECK THE TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the following DCSM C3036a pins, harness side and ground.
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CHS02
C3036a-G
(YE/BU)
RHS02
C3036a-H
(BU/OG)
CHS01
C3036a-J
(GY/VT)
RHS01
C3036a-K
(WH/VT)
Are the voltages less than one volt?
YES : Go to AE3.
NO : If the voltages measured at C3036a-G and/or C3036a-H were not less than one volt, go to
AE8.
If voltages measured at C3036a-J and/or C3036a-K were not less than one volt, go to AE9.
AE3 CHECK THE TED RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 225: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 238
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure the thermo-electric devices (TEDs) are at room
temperature and there is no air blowing across the TEDs. Do not
handle a TED when measuring resistance. These conditions can
cause incorrect readings and lead to incorrect identification of
components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-G, circuit CHS02 (YE/BU), harness side and
DCSM C3036a-H, circuit RHS02 (BU/OG), harness side; and between DCSM C3036a-J, circuit
CHS01 (GY/VT), harness side and C3036a-K, circuit RHS01 (WH/VT), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the resistance between DCSM C3036a-G and C3036a-H was not between 0.9 and 10 ohms,
go to AE5.
If the resistance between DCSM C3036a-J and C3036a-K was not between 0.9 and 10 ohms, go to
AE4.
AE4 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE BACKREST TED
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
Fig. 226: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3322 pin 1 and pin 3, component side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 239
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AE5 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE CUSHION TED
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Fig. 227: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3327 pin 1 and pin 3, component side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:19 AM
Page 240
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AE6 CHECK THE CUSHION TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Fig. 228: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-G, circuit CHS02 (YE/BU), harness side and
ground and between C3036a-H, circuit RHS02 (BU/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 241
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AE7 CHECK THE BACKREST TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
Fig. 229: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-J, circuit CHS01 (GY/VT), harness side and
ground and between C3036a-K, circuit RHS01 (WH/VT), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 242
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
AE8 CHECK THE CUSHION TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Key in ON position.
Fig. 230: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036a-G, circuit CHS02 (YE/BU), harness side and ground
and between C3036a-H, circuit RHS02 (BU/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages less than 1 volt?
YES : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AE9 CHECK THE BACKREST TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 243
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Fig. 231: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036a-J, circuit CHS01 (GY/VT), harness side and ground
and between C3036a-K, circuit RHS01 (WH/VT), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages less than one volt?
YES : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AF: DTC B103C - Thermo-electric Driver Open Load
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 244
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B103C Thermo-electric Driver Open Load - If DCSM outputs to the driver seat backrest or cushion
TED (circuit pins G, H, J or K at the DCSM connector) or any components within these circuit loops are
open, disconnected or a TED resistance greater than 90K ohms is sensed, the DCSM continues normal
operation and sets this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AF: DTC B103C - THERMO-ELECTRIC DRIVER OPEN LOAD
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AF1 CHECK THE TED CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036a
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 245
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Measure the resistance of the following circuits.
DCSM
TED
Connector- Circuit ConnectorPin
Pin
CHS02
C3036a-G
C3327-1
(YE/BU)
RHS02
C3036a-H
C3327-3
(BU/OG)
CHS01
C3036a-J
C3322-1
(GY/VT)
RHS01
C3036a-K
C3322-3
(WH/VT)
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AF2.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AF2 CHECK THE TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the following DCSM C3036a pins, harness side and ground.
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CHS02
C3036a-G
(YE/BU)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 246
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
RHS02
(BU/OG)
CHS01
C3036a-J
(GY/VT)
RHS01
C3036a-K
(WH/VT)
C3036a-H
Is voltage present on any circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AF3.
AF3 CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE TEDs
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 232: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3322 pin 1 and pin 3, component side and between
cushion TED C3327 pin 1 and pin 3, component side.
Are the resistances between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 247
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the resistance of the backrest TED was not between 0.9 and 10 ohms, INSTALL a new
backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTCs.
If the resistance of the cushion TED was not between 0.9 and 10 ohms, INSTALL a new cushion
TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AG: DTC B103D - Blower Driver Overtemperature
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B103D Blower Driver Overtemperature - If the DCSM outputs to the driver seat blower or any
components within these circuit loops are shorted to ground or cause an excessive current draw, the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 248
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DCSM will overheat, shut down the driver seat system and set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AG: DTC B103D - BLOWER DRIVER OVERTEMPERATURE
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AG1 CHECK THE BLOWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 249
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 233: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AG2.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AG2 CHECK THE BLOWER CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT
Fig. 234: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-15, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side and
C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AG3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuits. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 250
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
AG3 CHECK THE BLOWER RESISTANCE
Fig. 235: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3327 pin 2 and pin 4, component side and between
backrest TED C3322 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Are the resistances between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the resistance of the cushion TED was not between 6,000 and 9,000 ohms, INSTALL a
new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
If the resistance of the backrest TED was not between 6,000 and 9,000 ohms, INSTALL a new
backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 251
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AH: DTC B1113/B111B - Passenger Thermo-electric Device Control Overtemperature Fault/Passenger Thermoelectric Driver Overcurrent Low
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B1113 Passenger Thermo-electric Device Control Overtemperature Fault - If the DCSM TED driver
integrated circuit temperature exceeds 175°C (347°F), the DCSM will shut down the passenger seat
system and set this DTC.
DTC B111B Passenger Thermo-electric Driver Overcurrent Low - If DCSM outputs to the passenger seat
backrest or cushion TED (circuit pins A, B, C or D at the DCSM connector) or any components within
these circuit loops are shorted to ground or a TED resistance of less than 0.9 ohms is sensed, the DCSM
will shut down the passenger seat system and set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AH: DTC B1113/B111B - PASSENGER THERMO-ELECTRIC DEVICE CONTROL
OVERTEMPERATURE FAULT/PASSENGER THERMO-ELECTRIC DRIVER OVERCURRENT LOW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 252
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AH1 CHECK THE TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036a
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Measure the resistance between the following DCSM C3036a pins, harness side and ground.
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CHS07
C3036a-A
(GY/BU)
RHS07
C3036a-B
(BU)
CHS06
C3036a-C
(BU/BN)
RHS06
C3036a-D
(WH)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AH2.
NO : If the resistances of C3036a-A and/or C3036a-B to ground were not greater than 10,000
ohms to ground, go to AH6.
If resistances of C3036a-C and/or C3036a-D to ground were not greater than 10,000 ohms to
ground, go to AH7.
AH2 CHECK THE TED CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 253
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between the following DCSM C3036a pins, harness side and ground.
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CHS07
C3036a-A
(GY/BU)
RHS07
C3036a-B
(BU)
CHS06
C3036a-C
(BU/BN)
RHS06
C3036a-D
(WH)
Are the voltages less than one volt?
YES : Go to AH3.
NO : If the voltages measured at C3036a-A and/or C3036a-B were not less than 1 volt, go to AH8.
If voltages measured at C3036a-C and/or C3036a-D were not less than 1 volt, go to AH9.
AH3 CHECK THE TED RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 236: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the TEDs are at room temperature and there is no air
blowing across the TEDs. Do not handle a TED when measuring
resistance. These conditions can cause incorrect readings and lead
to incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-A, circuit CHS07 (GY/BU), harness side and
DCSM C3036a-B, circuit RHS07 (BU), harness side; and between DCSM C3036a-C, circuit
CHS06 (BU/BN), harness side and C3036a-D, circuit RHS06 (WH), harness die and ground.
Are the resistances between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 254
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the resistance between DCSM C3036a-A and C3036a-B was not between 0.9 and 10 ohms,
go to AH5.
If the resistance between DCSM C3036a-C and C3036a-D was not between 0.9 and 10 ohms, go to
AH4.
AH4 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE BACKREST TED
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
Fig. 237: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3326 pin 1 and pin 3, component side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 255
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AH5 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE CUSHION TED
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Fig. 238: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3328 pin 1 and pin 3, component side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AH6 CHECK THE CUSHION TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 256
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 239: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-A, circuit CHS07 (GY/BU), harness side and
ground and between C3036a-B, circuit RHS07 (BU), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AH7 CHECK THE BACKREST TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 257
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 240: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-C, circuit CHS06 (BU/BN), harness side and
ground and between C3036a-D, circuit RHS06 (WH), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AH8 CHECK THE CUSHION TED CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Key in ON position.
Fig. 241: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036a-A, circuit CHS07 (GY/BU), harness side and ground
and between C3036a-B, circuit RHS07 (BU), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages less than one volt?
YES : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 258
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AH9 CHECK THE BACKREST TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
Key in ON position.
Fig. 242: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036a-C, circuit CHS06 (BU/BN), harness side and ground
and between C3036a-D, circuit RHS06 (WH), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages less than one volt?
YES : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 259
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AI: DTC B111C - Passenger Thermo-electric Driver Open Load
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B111C Passenger Thermo-electic Driver Open Load - If DCSM outputs to the passenger seat
backrest or cushion TED (circuit pins A, B, C or D at the DCSM connector) or any components within
these circuit loops are open, disconnected or a TED resistance greater than 90K ohms is sensed, the
DCSM continues normal operation and sets this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AI: DTC B111C - PASSENGER THERMO-ELECTRIC DRIVER OPEN LOAD
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 260
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AI1 CHECK THE TED CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036a
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Measure the resistance of the following circuits.
DCSM
TED
Connector- Circuit ConnectorPin
Pin
CHS07
C3036a-A
C3328-1
(GY/BU)
RHS07
C3036a-B
C3328-3
(BU)
CHS06
C3036a-C
C3326-1
(BU/BN)
RHS06
C3036a-D
C3326-3
(WH)
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AI2.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 261
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AI2 CHECK THE TED CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the following DCSM C3036a pins, harness side and ground.
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CHS07
C3036a-A
(GY/BU)
RHS07
C3036a-B
(BU)
CHS06
C3036a-C
(BU/BN)
RHS06
C3036a-D
(WH)
Is voltage present on any circuit?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AI3.
AI3 CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE TEDs
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 243: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3326 pin 1 and pin 3, component side and between
cushion TED C3328 pin 1 and pin 3, component side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 262
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Are the resistances between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the resistance of the backrest TED was not between 0.9 and 10 ohms, INSTALL a new
backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTCs.
If the resistance of the cushion TED was not between 0.9 and 10 ohms, INSTALL a new cushion
TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AJ: DTC B111D - Passenger Blower Driver Overtemperature
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DSCM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 263
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B111D Passenger Blower Driver Overtemperature - If the DCSM outputs to the passenger seat
blower or any components within these circuit loops are shorted to ground or cause an excessive current
draw, the DCSM will overheat, shut down the passenger seat system and set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AJ: DTC B111D - PASSENGER BLOWER DRIVER OVERTEMPERATURE
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AJ1 CHECK THE BLOWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 264
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 244: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AJ2.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AJ2 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUIT RHS08 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO BLOWER CIRCUIT
CHS08 (BN/YE)
Fig. 245: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-7, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side and
C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AJ3.
NO : REPAIR the circuits. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 265
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AJ3 CHECK THE BLOWER RESISTANCE
Fig. 246: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3328 pin 2 and pin 4, component side and between
backrest TED C3326 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Are the resistances between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the resistance of the cushion TED was not between 6,000 and 9,000 ohms, INSTALL a
new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
If the resistance of the backrest TED was not between 6,000 and 9,000 ohms, INSTALL a new
backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 266
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AK: DTC B2729 - Driver Cushion Over-Temp Detected
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B2729 Cushion Over-Temp Detected - In the heating mode, if the driver seat cushion TED
temperature exceeds 85°C (185°F) for more than 4 seconds, the TED is disconnected or the duct is
blocked, the DCSM will shut down the driver seat system and set this DTC.
DTC B2729 Cushion Over-Temp Detected - In the cooling mode, if the driver seat cushion TED
temperature exceeds 70°C (158°F) for more than 4 seconds, the TED is disconnected or the duct is
blocked, the DCSM will shut down the driver seat system and set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Restricted cushion TED filter
Crushed or restricted cushion foam pad
Crushed or restricted climate controlled seat manifold
Cushion TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AK: DTC B2729 - DRIVER CUSHION OVER-TEMP DETECTED
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 267
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AK1 CHECK THE DCSM FOR DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/DCSM/Retrieve DTCs
Was DTC B2729 retrieved during the self-test?
YES : Go to AK2.
NO : Go to AK4.
AK2 CHECK THE TED THERMISTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036b
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 247: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-7, circuit VHS26 (VT), harness side and ground
and between DCSM C3036b-8, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 268
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AK3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AK3 CHECK THE TED THERMISTOR
Fig. 248: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3327 pin 5 and pin 8, component side. Note the
ambient temperature and refer to the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 269
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AK4 CONFIRM THE FAULT
Verify with the customer that the concern is the seat shuts OFF in heat mode.
NOTE:
A crushed seat cushion foam pad or a crushed climate controlled
seat manifold may be the cause of the fault. It may be necessary to
sit on the seat or place something of reasonable size and weight on
the seat to recreate the fault.
Attempt to recreate the fault. Start the vehicle and set the driver seat to HIGH heat for at least 15
minutes.
Is the customer concern with the seat shutting OFF in heat mode or was the fault recreated?
YES : Go to AK5.
NO : Fault not present. Fault may have been set due to a past failure or incorrect use of the climate
controlled seat system by repeated switching between heat and cool modes. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
AK5 CHECK OPERATION OF THE SEAT
With the engine running, set both front seats to HIGH cool (3 LEDs illuminated on HVAC
module).
Compare the airflow from the driver seat cushion and compare it to the airflow from the passenger
seat cushion.
Is the airflow exhausting from the driver seat cushion comparable to the airflow exhausting
from the passenger seat cushion?
YES : Go to AK14.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 270
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to AK6.
AK6 CHECK THE CUSHION BLOWER FOR AN OBSTRUCTION OR RESTRICTED FILTER
Key in OFF position.
Inspect the blower of the cushion TED assembly for an obstruction or for a restricted filter.
Is the blower obstructed or the filter restricted?
YES : REMOVE the obstruction or INSTALL a new filter. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
NO : Go to AK7.
AK7 CHECK THE CUSHION FAN OPERATION
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, set both front seats to HIGH cool (3 LEDs illuminated on HVAC
module).
Inspect the cushion blower for operation.
Does the cushion blower operate?
YES : Go to AK14.
NO : Go to AK8.
AK8 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Fig. 249: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3265c-11, circuit VHS18 (BN/GN), harness side and
cushion TED C3327-7, circuit VHS18 (BN/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 271
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to AK9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AK9 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUIT RHS03 (GY/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 250: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036c-15, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground.
Is voltage greater than one volt?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 272
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AK10.
AK10 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUIT CHS03 (GN/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 251: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AK11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AK11 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUITS RHS03 (GY/OG) AND CHS03 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 252: Measuring Resistance
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 273
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
cushion TED C3327-2, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side; and between DCSM C3036c-15,
circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side and cushion TED C3327-4, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG),
harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AK12.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AK12 CHECK THE BLOWER RESISTANCE
Fig. 253: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3327 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AK13.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 274
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AK13 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE
Fig. 254: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 7 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3327 pin 7 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : Go to AK14.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AK14 CHECK THE TED INSTALLATION AND FOR CRUSHED SEAT CUSHION
Key in OFF position.
Remove the seat. Refer to Seat - Front.
Remove the seat cushion trim cover. Refer to Seat Cushion Cover - Front.
Inspect the seat cushion for the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 275
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the TED correctly installed?
Is the seat cushion foam pad crushed or restricted?
Is the climate controlled seat manifold crushed or restricted?
Is the TED correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad and
manifold?
YES : CONNECT the battery ground cable.
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI). REFER to
Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : CORRECTLY install the cushion TED or INSTALL a new seat cushion foam pad and/or
climate controlled seat manifold. INSTALL the driver seat. CONNECT the battery ground cable.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AL: DTC B272A - Passenger Cushion Over-Temp Detected
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 276
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B272A Passenger Cushion Over-Temp Detected - In the cooling mode, if the passenger seat cushion
TED temperature exceeds 70°C (158°F) for more than 4 seconds, the TED is disconnected or the duct is
blocked, the DCSM will shut down the passenger seat system and set this DTC.
DTC B272A Passenger Cushion Over-Temp Detected - In the heating mode, if the passenger seat cushion
TED temperature exceeds 85°C (185°F) for more than 4 seconds, the TED is disconnected or the duct is
blocked, the DCSM will shut down the passenger seat system and set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Restricted cushion TED filter
Crushed or restricted cushion foam pad
Crushed or restricted climate controlled seat manifold
Cushion TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AL: DTC B272A - PASSENGER CUSHION OVER-TEMP DETECTED
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AL1 CHECK THE DCSM FOR DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/DCSM/Retrieve DTCs
Was DTC B272A retrieved during the self-test?
YES : Go to AL2.
NO : Go to AL4.
AL2 CHECK THE TED THERMISTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 277
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 255: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-2, circuit VHS27 (WH/OG), harness side and
ground and between DCSM C3036b-3, circuit RHS10 (BU/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AL3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AL3 CHECK THE TED THERMISTOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 278
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 256: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3328 pin 5 and pin 8, component side. Note the
ambient temperature and refer to the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 279
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AL4 CONFIRM THE FAULT
Verify with the customer that the concern is the seat shuts OFF in heat mode.
NOTE:
A crushed seat cushion foam pad or a crushed climate controlled
seat manifold may be the cause of the fault. It may be necessary to
sit on the seat or place something of reasonable size and weight on
the seat to recreate the fault.
Attempt to recreate the fault. Start the vehicle and set the passenger seat to HIGH heat for at least
15 minutes.
Is the customer concern with the seat shutting OFF in heat mode or was the fault recreated?
YES : Go to AL5.
NO : Fault not present. Fault may have been set due to a past failure or incorrect use of the climate
controlled seat system by repeated switching between heat and cool modes. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
AL5 CHECK OPERATION OF THE SEAT
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, set both front seats to HIGH cool (3 LEDs illuminated on HVAC
module).
Compare the airflow from the passenger seat cushion and compare it to the airflow from the driver
seat cushion.
Is the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat cushion comparable to the airflow
exhausting from the driver seat cushion?
YES : Go to AL14.
NO : Go to AL6.
AL6 CHECK THE CUSHION BLOWER FOR AN OBSTRUCTION OR RESTRICTED FILTER
Key in OFF position.
Inspect the blower of the cushion TED assembly for an obstruction or for a restricted filter.
Is the blower obstructed or the filter restricted?
YES : REMOVE the obstruction or INSTALL a new filter. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
NO : Go to AL7.
AL7 CHECK THE CUSHION FAN OPERATION
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, set both front seats to HIGH cool (3 LEDs illuminated on HVAC
module).
Inspect the cushion blower for operation.
Does the cushion blower operate?
YES : Go to AL14.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:20 AM
Page 280
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to AL8.
AL8 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Fig. 257: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-3, circuit VHS23 (BN/BU), harness side and
cushion TED C3328-7, circuit VHS23 (BN/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AL9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AL9 CHECK THE BLOWER CIRCUIT RHS08 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 281
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 258: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036c-7, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side and ground.
Is voltage greater than one volt?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AL10.
AL10 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUIT CHS08 (BN/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 259: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AL11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 282
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AL11 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUITS CHS08 (BN/YE) AND RHS08 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 260: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
cushion TED C3328-2, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side; and between DCSM C3036c-7,
circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side and cushion TED C3328-4, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH),
harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AL12.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AL12 CHECK THE BLOWER RESISTANCE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 283
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 261: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3328 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AL13.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AL13 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE
Fig. 262: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 7 and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 284
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3328 pin 7 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : Go to AL14.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AL14 CHECK THE TED INSTALLATION AND FOR CRUSHED SEAT CUSHION
Key in OFF position.
Remove the seat. Refer to Seat - Front.
Remove the seat cushion trim cover. Refer to Seat Cushion Cover - Front.
Inspect the seat cushion for the following:
Is the TED correctly installed?
Is the seat cushion foam pad crushed or restricted?
Is the climate controlled seat manifold crushed or restricted?
Is the TED correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad and
manifold?
YES : CONNECT the battery ground cable.
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI). REFER to
Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : CORRECTLY install the cushion TED or INSTALL a new seat cushion foam pad and/or
climate controlled seat manifold. INSTALL the passenger seat. CONNECT the battery ground
cable. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 285
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AM: DTC B272B - Passenger Back Over-Temp Detected
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B272B Passenger Back Over-Temp Detected - In the cooling mode, if the passenger seat backrest
TED temperature exceeds 70°C (158°F) for more than 4 seconds, the TED is disconnected or the duct is
blocked, the DCSM will shut down the passenger seat system and set this DTC.
DTC B272B Passenger Back Over-Temp Detected - In the heating mode, if the passenger seat backrest
TED temperature exceeds 85°C (185°F) for more than 4 seconds, the TED is disconnected or the duct is
blocked, the DCSM will shut down the passenger seat system and set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Restricted backrest TED filter
Crushed or restricted backrest foam pad
Crushed or restricted climate controlled seat manifold
Backrest TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AM: DTC B272B - PASSENGER BACK OVER-TEMP DETECTED
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 286
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AM1 CHECK THE DCSM FOR DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/DCSM/Retrieve DTCs
Was DTC B272B retrieved during the self-test?
YES : Go to AM2.
NO : Go to AM4.
AM2 CHECK THE TED THERMISTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036b
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
Fig. 263: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-4, circuit VHS36 (YE/BU), harness side and
ground and between DCSM C3036b-5, circuit RHS20 (GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AM3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 287
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
AM3 CHECK THE TED THERMISTOR
Fig. 264: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3326 pin 5 and pin 8, component side. Note the
ambient temperature and refer to the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : REPAIR the affected open circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 288
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AM4 CONFIRM THE FAULT
Verify with the customer that the concern is the seat shuts OFF in heat mode.
NOTE:
A crushed seat backrest foam pad or a crushed climate controlled
seat manifold may be the cause of the fault. It may be necessary to
sit on the seat or place something of reasonable size and weight on
the seat to recreate the fault.
Attempt to recreate the fault. Start the vehicle and set the front passenger seat to HIGH heat for at
least 15 minutes.
Is the customer concern with the seat shutting OFF in heat mode or was the fault recreated?
YES : Go to AM5.
NO : Fault not present. Fault may have been set due to a past failure or incorrect use of the climate
controlled seat system by repeated switching between heat and cool modes. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
AM5 CHECK OPERATION OF THE SEAT
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, set both front seats to HIGH cool (3 LEDs illuminated on HVAC
module).
Compare the airflow from the front passenger seat backrest and compare it to the airflow from the
driver seat backrest.
Is the airflow exhausting from the front passenger seat backrest comparable to the airflow
exhausting from the driver seat backrest?
YES : Go to AM14.
NO : Go to AM6.
AM6 CHECK THE BACKREST BLOWER FOR AN OBSTRUCTION OR RESTRICTED
FILTER
Key in OFF position.
Inspect the blower of the backrest TED assembly for an obstruction or for a restricted filter.
Is the blower obstructed or the filter restricted?
YES : REMOVE the obstruction or INSTALL a new filter. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
NO : Go to AM7.
AM7 CHECK THE BACKREST FAN OPERATION
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, set both front seats to HIGH cool (3 LEDs illuminated on HVAC
module).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 289
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Inspect the backrest blower for operation.
Does the backrest blower operate?
YES : Go to AM14.
NO : Go to AM8.
AM8 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 265: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-4, circuit VHS21 (BU/WH), harness side and
backrest TED C3326-7, circuit VHS21 (BU/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AM9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 290
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AM9 CHECK THE BLOWER CIRCUIT RHS08 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 266: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036c-7, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side and ground.
Is voltage greater than one volt?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AM10.
AM10 CHECK THE BLOWER CIRCUIT CHS08 (BN/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 267: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 291
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AM11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AM11 CHECK THE BLOWER CIRCUITS RHS08 (VT/WH) AND CHS08 (BN/YE) FOR AN
OPEN
Fig. 268: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
backrest TED C3326-2, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side; and between DCSM C3036c-7,
circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side and backrest TED C3326-4, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH),
harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AM12.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AM12 CHECK THE BLOWER RESISTANCE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 292
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 269: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3326 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AM13.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AM13 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE
Fig. 270: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 7 and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 293
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3326 pin 7 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : Go to AM14.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AM14 CHECK THE TED INSTALLATION AND FOR CRUSHED SEAT BACKREST
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Remove the seat. Refer to Seat - Front.
Remove the seat backrest trim cover. Refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front, Without Fold Flat.
Inspect the seat backrest for the following:
Is the TED correctly installed?
Is the seat backrest foam pad crushed or restricted?
Is the climate controlled seat manifold crushed or restricted?
Is the TED correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad and
manifold?
YES : CONNECT the battery ground cable.
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI). REFER to
Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : CORRECTLY install the backrest TED or INSTALL a new seat backrest foam pad and/or
climate controlled seat manifold. CONNECT the battery ground cable. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 294
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AN: DTC B272C - Driver Differential Temperature Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
A differential fault occurs when the cushion and backrest TEDs on the seat are reporting temperatures to the
DCSM with a difference between them of 60°C (108°F) or greater. This can result from an air flow restriction
or a circuit fault of either TED. If a TED and manifold is clear of obstruction and is operational, the other TED
and circuitry on the seat should be checked. It is important to note that a TED with a higher temperature may be
operating correctly and not be the area of concern. The other TED may be indicating a much lower temperature,
causing the DTC to set.
DTC B272C Driver Differential Temperature Fault - If there is a temperature differential between the
driver backrest and cushion TED of 60°C (108°F) or more for more than 4 seconds, the TED is
disconnected or the duct is blocked, this DTC will set. When this happens the first time in a key cycle, the
DCSM puts the driver seat system into recovery mode (see principles of operation). If the system is able
to recover, it will function normally. If the system is able to recover and it occurs a second time in the
same key cycle, the DCSM will shut down the driver seat system.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 295
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Restricted cushion or backrest TED filter
Crushed or restricted cushion or backrest foam pad
Crushed or restricted cushion or backrest climate controlled seat manifold
Cushion or backrest TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AN: DTC B272C - DRIVER DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE FAULT
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AN1 CHECK THE DCSM FOR DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/DCSM/Retrieve DTCs
Was DTC B2729 or B2730 retrieved in the self-test as an on-demand or a continuous DTC?
YES : For DTC B2729, go to Pinpoint Test AK. For DTC B2730, go to Pinpoint Test AP.
NO : Go to AN2.
AN2 MONITOR THE DCSM TED TEMPERATURE PIDs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DCSM PIDs
Passenger Cushion Thermal Electric Device (TED) Temperature (PCSHTMP)
Passenger Back TED Temperature (PBKTMP)
Seat cushion thermal electric device temperature (CSHTEMP)
Seat back thermal electric device temperature (BK_TEMP)
NOTE:
Make sure the temperature of the climate controlled seats has
stabilized before monitoring the PIDs. Not allowing stabilization can
cause incorrect readings and lead to incorrect identification of
components that are not faulty.
Monitor the TED temperature PIDs with the climate controlled seats OFF. Compare the PID values
of the driver seat to those of the front passenger seat. This can help identify if there is a concern
with the driver seat cushion or backrest PID readings.
Are both driver seat TED temperature PID values within 10°C (18°F) of the ambient
temperature?
YES : Go to AN3.
NO : If the driver seat cushion PID value varies 10°C (18°F) or more from ambient temperature, go
to AN16.
If the driver seat backrest PID value varies 10°C (18°F) or more from ambient temperature, go to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 296
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
AN31.
AN3 CONFIRM THE FAULT IS IN THE SEAT CUSHION OR THE BACKREST
Key in OFF position.
Key in ON position.
NOTE:
A crushed seat cushion foam pad or a crushed climate controlled
seat manifold may be the cause of the fault. It may be necessary to
sit on the seat or place something of reasonable size and weight on
the seat to recreate the fault.
NOTE:
If the seat shuts down before a 15-minute heat cycle has timed-out,
carry out the DCSM self test and go to the Dual Climate Controlled
Seat Module (DCSM) DTC Chart to continue diagnostics.
After cycling the ignition switch and with the engine running, set the driver seat to high heat (3
LEDs illuminated on HVAC module). Allow the seat to heat for at least 15 minutes while
monitoring the TED temperature PIDs of the driver seat. If necessary, when the seat times-out after
15 minutes, set the driver seat to high heat once again.
Do the driver seat cushion TED and backrest TED PIDs vary more than 60°C (108°F) from
each other?
YES : If the driver seat cushion PID value is 60°C (108°F) hotter than the backrest PID value, go to
AN5.
If the driver seat backrest PID value is 60°C (108°F) hotter than the cushion PID value, go to
AN20.
NO : Go to AN4.
AN4 CHECK THE TEDs COOLING PERFORMANCE
Check the TEDs cooling performance on the driver seat. Refer to Component Test - ThermoElectric Device (TED) Cooling Performance.
Did the TEDs pass the component test?
YES : The DTC may have been set by extreme cabin temperatures or excessive sun-load on the
seat causing the system to enter recovery mode. Occupant size and weight characteristics can also
be a factor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. If a
concern cannot be found or duplicated, RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
NO : CHECK the affected seat cushion or backrest for correct installation of the climate controlled
seat components (TED, manifold, air ducts and foam pad). CHECK for airflow restrictions (TED
inlets and outlets, TED-to-manifold connections, filters and ducts) and REPAIR as needed.
CHECK for an intermittent wiring fault. REPAIR as needed. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
AN5 CHECK THE TED INSTALLATION AND FOR A CRUSHED SEAT CUSHION
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 297
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Remove the seat. Refer to Seat - Front.
Remove the seat cushion trim cover. Refer to Seat Cushion Cover - Front.
Inspect the seat cushion for the following:
Is the cushion blower obstructed?
Is the blower filter restricted or plugged?
Is the TED correctly installed?
Is the seat cushion foam pad crushed or restricted?
Is the climate controlled seat manifold crushed or restricted?
Is the TED correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad and
manifold?
YES : Go to AN6.
NO : CORRECTLY install the cushion TED or INSTALL a new seat cushion foam pad and/or
climate controlled seat manifold. CONNECT the battery ground cable. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN6 CHECK BACKREST TED CIRCUIT RHS01 (WH/VT) FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036a
NOTE:
Do not connect the seat side air bag electrical connector at this time.
Position the driver seat in the vehicle and connect the seat-to-floor connectors.
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 298
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 271: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036a-K, circuit RHS01 (WH/VT), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.5 volt?
YES : Go to AN7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN7 CHECK BACKREST TED CIRCUIT CHS01 (GY/VT) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 272: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-J, circuit CHS01 (GY/VT), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 299
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to AN8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN8 CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE BACKREST TED AND WIRING
Fig. 273: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-J, circuit CHS01 (GY/VT), harness side and
DCSM C3036a-K, circuit RHS01 (WH/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : Go to AN10.
NO : Go to AN9.
AN9 CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE BACKREST TED
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
Fig. 274: Measuring Resistance
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 300
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3322 pin 1 and pin 3, component side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN10 CHECK THE BLOWER AND SPEED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Key in ON position.
Fig. 275: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and ground
and between DCSM C3036c-11, circuit VHS18 (BN/GN), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages less than one volt?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 301
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to AN11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN11 CHECK THE BLOWER AND SPEED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 276: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
ground and between DCSM C3036c-11, circuit VHS18 (BN/GN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AN12.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN12 CHECK THE BLOWER AND WIRING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 302
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 277: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to dual
climate controlled seat module (DCSM) C3036c-16, circuit CHS03
(GN/BN) and the negative lead to DCSM C3036c-15, circuit RHS03
(GY/OG) when measuring. Ohmmeter leads incorrectly connected will
result in false readings and lead to incorrect identification of
components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
DCSM C3036c-15, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AN14.
NO : Go to AN13.
AN13 CHECK THE BLOWER
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Fig. 278: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 303
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3327 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN14 CHECK BLOWER SPEED CONTROL AND BLOWER GROUND CIRCUIT
Fig. 279: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to C3036c11, circuit VHS18 (BN/GN), harness side and the negative lead to
C3036c-15, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side when measuring.
Ohmmeter leads incorrectly connected will result in false readings
and lead to incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-11, circuit VHS18 (BN/GN) harness side and
DCSM C3036c-15, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 304
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : Go to AN16.
NO : Go to AN15.
AN15 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Fig. 280: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 7 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3327 pin 7 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 305
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN16 CHECK THERMISTOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036b
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 281: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036b-7, circuit VHS26 (VT), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.5 volt?
YES : Go to AN17.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 306
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
AN17 CHECK THERMISTOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 282: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-7, circuit VHS26 (VT), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AN18.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN18 CHECK THE THERMISTOR AND WIRING
Fig. 283: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-7, circuit VHS26 (VT), harness side and DCSM
C3036b-8, circuit RHS05 (YE/VT), harness side. Note the ambient temperature and refer to the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 307
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AN19.
AN19 CHECK THE THERMISTOR
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Fig. 284: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 308
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between cushion TED pin 5 and pin 8, component side. Note the ambient
temperature and refer to the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN20 CHECK THE TED INSTALLATION AND FOR A CRUSHED SEAT BACKREST
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Remove the seat. Refer to Seat - Front.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 309
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Remove the seat backrest trim cover. Refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front, Without Fold Flat.
Inspect the seat backrest for the following:
Is the backrest blower obstructed?
Is the blower filter restricted or plugged?
Is the TED correctly installed?
Is the seat backrest foam pad crushed or restricted?
Is the climate controlled seat manifold crushed or restricted?
Is the TED correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad and
manifold?
YES : Go to AN21.
NO : CORRECTLY install the backrest TED or INSTALL a new seat backrest foam pad and/or
climate controlled seat manifold. CONNECT the battery ground cable. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN21 CHECK THE CUSHION TED CIRCUIT RHS02 (BU/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036a
NOTE:
Do not connect the seat side air bag electrical connector at this time.
Position the driver seat in the vehicle and connect the seat-to-floor connectors.
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 310
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 285: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036a-H, circuit RHS02 (BU/OG), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.5 volt?
YES : Go to AN22.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN22 CHECK CUSHION TED CIRCUIT CHS02 (YE/BU) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 286: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-G, circuit CHS02 (YE/BU), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AN23.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 311
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN23 CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE CUSHION TED AND WIRING
Fig. 287: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-G circuit CHS02 (YE/BU), harness side and
DCSM C3036a-H, circuit RHS02 (BU/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : Go to AN25.
NO : Go to AN24.
AN24 CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE CUSHION TED
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Fig. 288: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 312
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3327 pin 1 and pin 3, component side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN25 CHECK THE BLOWER AND SPEED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Key in ON position.
Fig. 289: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and ground
and between DCSM C3036c-12, circuit VHS16 (BU/GN), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages less than one volt?
YES : Go to AN26.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 313
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN26 CHECK THE BLOWER AND SPEED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 290: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
ground and between DCSM C3036c-12, circuit VHS16 (BU/GN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AN27.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN27 CHECK THE BLOWER AND WIRING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 314
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 291: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to DCSM
C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN) and the negative lead to DCSM
C3036c-15, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG) when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
DCSM C3036c-15, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AN29.
NO : Go to AN28.
AN28 CHECK THE BLOWER
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
Fig. 292: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 315
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3322 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN29 CHECK BLOWER SPEED CONTROL AND CIRCUIT
Fig. 293: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to C3036c12, circuit VHS16 (BU/GN), harness side and the negative lead to
C3036c-15, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side when measuring.
Ohmmeter leads incorrectly connected will result in false readings
and lead to incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-12, circuit VHS16 (BU/GN) harness side and
DCSM C3036c-15, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 316
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : Go to AN31.
NO : Go to AN30.
AN30 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
Fig. 294: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 7 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3322 pin 7 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 317
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN31 CHECK THERMISTOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036b
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 295: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036b-9, circuit VHS35 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.5 volt?
YES : Go to AN32.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 318
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
AN32 CHECK THERMISTOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 296: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-9, circuit VHS35 (VT/OG), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AN33.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AN33 CHECK THE THERMISTOR AND WIRING
Fig. 297: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-9, circuit VHS35 (VT/OG), harness side and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:21 AM
Page 319
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DCSM C3036b-10, circuit RHS15 (GY/BN), harness side. Note the ambient temperature and refer
to the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat
Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AN34.
AN34 CHECK THE THERMISTOR
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
Fig. 298: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 320
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between backrest TED pin 5 and pin 8, component side. Note the ambient
temperature and refer to the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AO: DTC B272D - Passenger Differential Temperature Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 321
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
A differential fault occurs when the cushion and backrest TEDs on the seat are reporting temperatures to the
DCSM with a difference between them of 60°C (108°F) or greater. This can result from an air flow restriction
or a circuit fault of either TED. If a TED and manifold is clear of obstruction and is operational, the other TED
and circuitry on the seat should be checked. It is important to note that a TED with a higher temperature may be
operating correctly and not be the area of concern. The other TED may be indicating a much lower temperature,
causing the DTC to set.
DTC B272D Passenger Differential Temperature Fault - If there is a temperature differential between the
passenger backrest and cushion TED of 60°C (108°F) or more for more than 4 seconds, the TED is
disconnected or the duct is blocked, this DTC will set. When this happens the first time in a key cycle, the
DCSM puts the passenger seat system into recovery mode (see principles of operation). If the system is
able to recover, it will function normally. If the system is able to recover and it occurs a second time in
the same key cycle, the DCSM will shut down the passenger seat system.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Restricted cushion or backrest TED filter
Crushed or restricted cushion or backrest foam pad
Crushed or restricted cushion or backrest climate controlled seat manifold
Cushion or backrest TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AO: DTC B272D - PASSENGER DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE FAULT
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 322
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AO1 CHECK THE DCSM FOR DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/DCSM/Retrieve DTCs
Was DTC B272A or B272B retrieved in the self-test as an on-demand or a continuous DTC?
YES : For DTC B272A, go to Pinpoint Test AL. For DTC B272B, go to Pinpoint Test AM.
NO : Go to AO2.
AO2 MONITOR THE DCSM TED TEMPERATURE PIDs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DCSM PIDs
Passenger cushion thermal electric device (TED) temperature (PCSHTMP)
Passenger back TED temperature (PBKTMP)
Seat cushion thermal electric device temperature (CSHTEMP)
Seat back thermal electric device temperature (BK_TEMP)
NOTE:
Make sure the temperature of the climate controlled seats has
stabilized before monitoring the PIDs. Not allowing stabilization can
cause incorrect readings and lead to incorrect identification of
components that are not faulty.
Monitor the TED temperature PIDs with the climate controlled seats off. Compare the PIDs of the
front passenger seat to those of the driver seat, this can help identify if there is a concern with the
front passenger seat cushion or backrest PID readings.
Are both front passenger seat TED temperature PIDs within 10°C (18°F) of the ambient
temperature?
YES : Go to AO3.
NO : If the front passenger seat cushion PID varies 10°C (18°F) or more from ambient temperature,
go to AO16.
If the front passenger seat backrest PID varies 10°C (18°F) or more from ambient temperature, go
to AO31.
AO3 CONFIRM THE FAULT IS IN THE SEAT CUSHION OR THE BACKREST
Key in OFF position.
Key in ON position.
NOTE:
A crushed seat cushion foam pad or a crushed climate controlled
seat manifold may be the cause of the fault. It may be necessary to
sit on the seat or place something of reasonable size and weight on
the seat to recreate the fault.
NOTE:
If the seat shuts down before a 15-minute heat cycle has timed-out,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 323
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
carry out the DCSM self test and go to the Dual Climate Controlled
Seat Module (DCSM) DTC Chart to continue diagnostics.
After cycling the ignition switch and with the engine running, set the driver seat to high heat (3
LEDs illuminated on HVAC module). Allow the seat to heat for at least 15 minutes while
monitoring the TED temperature PIDs of the driver seat. If necessary, when the seat times-out after
15 minutes, set the driver seat to high heat once again.
Do the driver seat cushion TED and backrest TED PIDs vary more than 60°C (108°F) from
each other?
YES : If the front passenger seat cushion PID is 60°C (108°F) hotter than the backrest PID, go to
AO5.
If the front passenger seat backrest PID is 60°C (108°F) hotter than the cushion PID, go to AO20.
NO : Go to AO4.
AO4 CHECK THE TED COOLING PERFORMANCE
Check the TEDs cooling performance on the passenger seat. Refer to Component Test - ThermoElectric Device (TED) Cooling Performance.
Did the TEDs pass the component test?
YES : The DTC may have been set by extreme cabin temperatures or excessive sun-load on the
seat causing the system to enter recovery mode. Occupant size and weight characteristics can also
be a factor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. If a
concern cannot be found or duplicated, RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
NO : CHECK the affected seat cushion or backrest for correct installation of the climate controlled
seat components (TED, manifold, air ducts and foam pad). CHECK for airflow restrictions (TED
inlets and outlets, TED-to-manifold connections, filters and ducts) and REPAIR as needed.
CHECK for an intermittent wiring fault. REPAIR as needed. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
AO5 CHECK THE TED INSTALLATION AND FOR A CRUSHED SEAT CUSHION
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Remove the seat. Refer to Seat - Front.
Remove the seat cushion trim cover. Refer to Seat Cushion Cover - Front.
Inspect the seat cushion for the following:
Is the cushion blower obstructed?
Is the blower filter restricted or plugged?
Is the TED correctly installed?
Is the seat cushion foam pad crushed or restricted?
Is the climate controlled seat manifold crushed or restricted?
Is the TED correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad and
manifold?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 324
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to AO6.
NO : CORRECTLY install the cushion TED or INSTALL a new seat cushion foam pad and/or
climate controlled seat manifold. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO6 CHECK THE BACKREST TED CIRCUIT RHS06 (WH) FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DCSM C3036a
NOTE:
Do not connect the seat side air bag electrical connector at this time.
Position the front passenger seat in the vehicle and connect the seat-to-floor connectors.
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 299: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036a-D, circuit RHS06 (WH), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.5 volt?
YES : Go to AO7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 325
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO7 CHECK THE BACKREST TED CIRCUIT CHS06 (BU/BN) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 300: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-C, circuit CHS06 (BU/BN), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AO8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO8 CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE BACKREST TED AND WIRING
Fig. 301: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-C, circuit CHS06 (BU/BN), harness side and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 326
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DCSM C3036a-D, circuit RHS06 (WH), harness side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : Go to AO10.
NO : Go to AO9.
AO9 CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE BACKREST TED
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
Fig. 302: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3326 pin 1 and pin 3, component side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO10 CHECK THE BLOWER AND SPEED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 327
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 303: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and ground
and between DCSM C3036c-3, circuit VHS23 (BN/BU), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages less than 1 volt?
YES : Go to AO11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO11 CHECK THE BLOWER AND SPEED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 304: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
ground and between DCSM C3036c-3, circuit VHS23 (BN/BU), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AO12.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 328
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO12 CHECK THE BLOWER AND WIRING
Fig. 305: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to dual
climate controlled seat module (DCSM) C3036c-8, circuit CHS08
(BN/YE) and the negative lead to DCSM C3036c-7, circuit RHS08
(VT/WH) when measuring. Ohmmeter leads incorrectly connected will
result in false readings and lead to incorrect identification of
components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
DCSM C3036c-7, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AO14.
NO : Go to AO13.
AO13 CHECK THE BLOWER
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 329
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 306: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3328 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO14 CHECK BLOWER SPEED CONTROL AND CIRCUIT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 330
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 307: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to C3036c-3,
circuit VHS23 (BN/BU), harness side and the negative lead to C3036c7, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side when measuring. Ohmmeter
leads incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-3, circuit VHS23 (BN/BU) harness side and
DCSM C3036c-7, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : Go to AO16.
NO : Go to AO15.
AO15 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Fig. 308: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 7 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 331
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3328 pin 7 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO16 CHECK THERMISTOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036b
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 332
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 309: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036b-2, circuit VHS27 (WH/OG), harness side and
ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.5 volt?
YES : Go to AO17.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO17 CHECK THERMISTOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 310: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-2, circuit VHS27 (WH/OG), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AO18.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO18 CHECK THE THERMISTOR AND WIRING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 333
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 311: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-2, circuit VHS27 (WH/OG), harness side and
DCSM C3036b-3, circuit RHS10 (BU/OG), harness side. Note the ambient temperature and refer to
the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AO19.
AO19 CHECK THE THERMISTOR
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 334
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 312: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED pin 5 and pin 8, component side. Note the ambient
temperature and refer to the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 335
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO20 CHECK THE TED INSTALLATION AND FOR A CRUSHED SEAT BACKREST
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Remove the seat. Refer to Seat - Front.
Remove the seat backrest trim cover. Refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front, Without Fold Flat.
Inspect the seat backrest for the following:
Is the backrest blower obstructed?
Is the blower filter restricted or plugged?
Is the TED correctly installed?
Is the seat backrest foam pad crushed or restricted?
Is the climate controlled seat manifold crushed or restricted?
Is the TED correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad and
manifold?
YES : Go to AO21.
NO : CORRECTLY install the backrest TED or INSTALL a new seat backrest foam pad and/or
climate controlled seat manifold. CONNECT the battery ground cable. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO21 CHECK CUSHION TED CIRCUIT RHS07 (BU) FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DCSM C3036a
NOTE:
Do not connect the seat side air bag electrical connector at this time.
Position the front passenger seat in the vehicle and connect the seat-to-floor connectors.
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 336
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 313: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036a-B, circuit RHS07 (BU), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.5 volt?
YES : Go to AO22.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO22 CHECK THE CUSHION TED CIRCUIT CHS07 (GY/BU) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 314: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-A, circuit CHS07 (GY/BU), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AO23.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 337
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO23 CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE CUSHION TED AND WIRING
Fig. 315: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036a-A circuit CHS07 (GY/BU), harness side and
DCSM C3036a-B, circuit RHS07 (BU), harness side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : Go to AO25.
NO : Go to AO24.
AO24 CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE CUSHION TED
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Fig. 316: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3328 pin 1 and pin 3, component side.
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 338
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT
the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO25 CHECK THE BLOWER AND SPEED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Key in ON position.
Fig. 317: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and ground
and between DCSM C3036c-4, circuit VHS21 (BU/WH), harness side and ground.
Are the voltages less than one volt?
YES : Go to AO26.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO26 CHECK THE BLOWER AND SPEED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 339
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 318: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
ground and between DCSM C3036c-4, circuit VHS21 (BU/WH), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AO27.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO27 CHECK THE BLOWER AND WIRING
Fig. 319: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to dual
climate controlled seat module (DCSM) C3036c-8, circuit CHS08
(BN/YE) and the negative lead to DCSM C3036c-7, circuit RHS08
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 340
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
(VT/WH) when measuring. Ohmmeter leads incorrectly connected will
result in false readings and lead to incorrect identification of
components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
DCSM C3036c-7, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AO29.
NO : Go to AO28.
AO28 CHECK THE BLOWER
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
Fig. 320: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3326 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 341
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO29 CHECK BLOWER SPEED CONTROL AND CIRCUIT
Fig. 321: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to C3036c-4,
circuit VHS21 (BU/WH), harness side and the negative lead to
C3036c-7, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side when measuring.
Ohmmeter leads incorrectly connected will result in false readings
and lead to incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-4, circuit VHS21 (BU/WH) harness side and
DCSM C3036c-7, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side.
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : Go to AO31.
NO : Go to AO30.
AO30 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
Fig. 322: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 342
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 7 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3326 pin 7 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO31 CHECK THERMISTOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036b
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 343
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 323: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036b-4, circuit VHS36 (YE/BU), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.5 volt?
YES : Go to AO32.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO32 CHECK THERMISTOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 324: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-4, circuit VHS36 (YE/BU), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AO33.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 344
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AO33 CHECK THE THERMISTOR AND WIRING
Fig. 325: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-4, circuit VHS36 (YE/BU), harness side and
DCSM C3036b-5, circuit RHS20 (GN/BU), harness side. Note the ambient temperature and refer to
the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat
Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 345
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AO34.
AO34 CHECK THE THERMISTOR
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
Fig. 326: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED pin 5 and pin 8, component side. Note the ambient
temperature and refer to the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 346
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AP: DTC B272E - Driver Ignition Run/Blower Circuit Short to Ground
NOTE:
This DTC sets for an open or short to voltage. See DTC setting description
below.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B272E Driver Ignition Run/Blower Circuit Short to Ground - This DTC is set if the blower voltage
or ground circuit opens to both backrest and cushion blowers or if both blower voltage circuits short to
voltage. Only one blower voltage circuit needs to be open for the DTC to be set if battery voltage is less
than 12 volts.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
HVAC module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 347
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Backrest or cushion TED
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AP: DTC B272E - DRIVER IGNITION RUN/BLOWER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AP1 CHECK DCSM CLIMATE-CONTROLLED SEAT HEAT COMMAND (TED_HEAT_D)
PID
Access the cushion and backrest TEDs and remove the filters to watch the TED fans.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DCSM PID
TED_HEAT_D
NOTE:
The DCSM active command TED_HEAT_D is limited to 15 seconds in
the ON state.
Operate the climate controlled seat using the active command while monitoring the cushion and
backrest TEDs for fan movement.
Did both fans turn on?
YES : CARRY OUT the network test. If DTCs are retrieved from the HVAC module, REFER to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article. If no DTCs are retrieved, CARRY
OUT the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process in the Diagnosis and Testing portion of CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION & DIAGNOSTICS article.
NO : Go to AP2.
AP2 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONNECTION AT THE DCSM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Connect: DCSM C3036c
With the engine running and using the switches on the HVAC module, turn the driver climate
controlled seat system on while monitoring the cushion and backrest fans for movement.
If there is fan movement, run the driver climate controlled seat system for a complete cycle
in heat (15 minutes) and cool (30 minutes) until the system times out.
Did the climate controlled seat operate correctly?
YES : The fault is intermittent. CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault at C3036c and REPAIR
the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
NO : Go to AP3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 348
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
AP3 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONNECTION AT THE CUSHION TED
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Connect: Cushion TED C3327
With the engine running and using the switches on the HVAC module, turn the driver climate
controlled seat system on while monitoring the cushion and backrest fans for movement.
If there is fan movement, run the driver climate controlled seat system for a complete cycle
in heat (15 minutes) and cool (30 minutes) until the system times out.
Did the climate controlled seat operate correctly?
YES : The fault is intermittent. CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault at C3327 and REPAIR
the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
NO : Go to AP4.
AP4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONNECTION AT THE BACKREST TED
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
Connect: Backrest TED C3322
With the engine running and using the switches on the HVAC module, turn the driver climate
controlled seat system on while monitoring the cushion and backrest fans for movement.
If there is fan movement, run the driver climate controlled seat system for a complete cycle
in heat (15 minutes) and cool (30 minutes) until the system times out.
Did the climate controlled seat operate correctly?
YES : The fault is intermittent. CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault at C3322 and REPAIR
the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
NO : Go to AP5.
AP5 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUIT CHS03 (GN/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3327
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 349
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 327: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AP6.
AP6 CHECK CUSHION TED BLOWER CIRCUITS CHS03 (GN/BN) AND RHS03 (GY/OG)
FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 328: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
cushion TED C3327-2, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side; and between DCSM C3036c-15,
circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side and cushion TED C3327-4, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG),
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 350
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AP7.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AP7 CHECK BACKREST TED BLOWER CIRCUITS CHS03 (GN/BN) AND RHS03 (GY/OG)
FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 329: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
cushion TED C3322-2, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side; and between DCSM C3036c-15,
circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side and cushion TED C3322-4, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG),
harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AP8.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AP8 CHECK BLOWER RESISTANCE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 351
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 330: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3327 pin 2 and pin 4, component side and between
backrest TED C3322 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Are the resistances between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the resistance of the cushion TED was not between 6,000 and 9,000 ohms, INSTALL a
new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
If the resistance of the backrest TED was not between 6,000 and 9,000 ohms, INSTALL a new
backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AQ: DTC B272F - Passenger Ignition Run/Blower Circuit Short to Ground
NOTE:
This DTC sets for an open or short to voltage. See DTC setting description
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 352
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
below.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
DTC B272F Passenger Ignition Run/Blower Circuit Short to Ground - This DTC is set if the blower
voltage or ground circuit opens to both backrest and cushion blowers or if both blower voltage circuits
short to voltage. Only one blower voltage circuit needs to be open for the DTC to be set if battery voltage
is less than 12 volts.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
HVAC module
Backrest or cushion TED
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AQ: DTC B272F - PASSENGER IGNITION RUN/BLOWER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AQ1 CHECK DCSM PASSENGER TED HEAT MODE (TED_HEAT_P) PID
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 353
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Access the cushion and backrest TEDs and remove the filters to watch the TED fans.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/DCSM PID
TED_HEAT_P
NOTE:
The DCSM active command TED_HEAT_P is limited to 15 seconds in
the ON state.
Operate the climate controlled seat using the active command while monitoring the cushion and
backrest TEDs for fan movement.
Did both fans turn on?
YES : CARRY OUT the network test. If DTCs are retrieved from the HVAC module, REFER to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article. If no DTCs are retrieved, CARRY
OUT the HVAC Module Cold Boot Process in the Diagnosis and Testing portion of CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION & DIAGNOSTICS article.
NO : Go to AQ2.
AQ2 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONNECTION AT THE DCSM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Connect: DCSM C3036c
With the engine running and using the switches on the HVAC module, turn the passenger climate
controlled seat system on while monitoring the cushion and backrest fans for movement.
If there is fan movement, run the passenger climate controlled seat system for a complete
cycle in heat (15 minutes) and cool (30 minutes) until the system times out.
Did the climate controlled seat operate correctly?
YES : The fault is intermittent. CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault at C3036c and REPAIR
the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
NO : Go to AQ3.
AQ3 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONNECTION AT THE CUSHION TED
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Connect: Cushion TED C3328
With the engine running and using the switches on the HVAC module, turn the passenger climate
controlled seat system on while monitoring the cushion and backrest fans for movement.
If there is fan movement, run the passenger climate controlled seat system for a complete
cycle in heat (15 minutes) and cool (30 minutes) until the system times out.
Did the climate controlled seat operate correctly?
YES : The fault is intermittent. CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault at C3328 and REPAIR
the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
NO : Go to AQ4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 354
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
AQ4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONNECTION AT THE BACKREST TED
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
Connect: Backrest TED C3326
With the engine running and using the switches on the HVAC module, turn the passenger climate
controlled seat system on while monitoring the cushion and backrest fans for movement.
If there is fan movement, run the passenger climate controlled seat system for a complete
cycle in heat (15 minutes) and cool (30 minutes) until the system times out.
Did the climate controlled seat operate correctly?
YES : The fault is intermittent. CHECK for causes of the intermittent fault at C3326 and REPAIR
the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
NO : Go to AQ5.
AQ5 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUIT CHS08 (BN/YE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Disconnect: Cushion TED C3328
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3326
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Key in ON position.
Fig. 331: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 355
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AQ6.
AQ6 CHECK CUSHION TED BLOWER CIRCUITS CHS08 (BN/YE) AND RHS08 (VT/WH)
FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 332: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
cushion TED C3328-2, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side; and between DCSM C3036c-7,
circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side and cushion TED C3328-4, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH),
harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AQ7.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AQ7 CHECK BACKREST TED BLOWER CIRCUITS CHS08 (BN/YE) AND RHS08 (VT/WH)
FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 356
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 333: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-8, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side and
backrest TED C3326-2, circuit CHS08 (BN/YE), harness side; and between DCSM C3036c-7,
circuit RHS08 (VT/WH), harness side and backrest TED C3326-4, circuit RHS08 (VT/WH),
harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AQ8.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AQ8 CHECK BLOWER RESISTANCE
Fig. 334: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between cushion TED C3328 pin 2 and pin 4, component side and between
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:22 AM
Page 357
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
backrest TED C3326 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Are the resistances between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT programmable module installation (PMI).
REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : If the resistance of the cushion TED was not between 6,000 and 9,000 ohms, INSTALL a
new cushion TED. REFER to Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
If the resistance of the backrest TED was not between 6,000 and 9,000 ohms, INSTALL a new
backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR
the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable. CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AR: DTC B2730 - Back Over-Temp Detected (Driver)
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Climate Controlled Seats for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Both the driver and front passenger climate controlled seats are independently controlled electronically by the
dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) mounted to the bottom of the passenger seat cushion. The climate
controlled seat system only operates with the engine running, however, if using a scan tool to command the
DCSM, diagnostic testing can be carried out with the ignition switch key ON engine OFF (KOEO). The system
receives voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 16 (30A) supplying battery voltage on circuit SBB16
(VT/RD) into DCSM C3036a pins E and F. If voltage is disconnected from either pin E or F of DCSM C3036a
with the connection remaining on the other circuit, both seats will remain operational because the circuits are
connected internally in the DCSM. However, if a fault occurs setting a DTC specific to either climate controlled
seat, only the affected seat will be disabled by the DCSM and the other will remain operational.
Each driver and front passenger seat cushion and backrest are equipped with a thermo-electric device (TED)
assembly that includes a seat blower (fan motor, serviced as an assembly with the TED). Cabin air is drawn
through the blower and distributed to each of the TED modules located in the seat cushion and backrest. The
TEDs then heat or cool the air. The air is then directed into the foam pad and manifold where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the DCSM uses a set of
flexible algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependent on the HVAC module
seat switch settings.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 358
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
DTC B2730 Back Over-Temp Detected (Driver) - In the cooling mode, if the driver seat backrest TED
temperature exceeds 70°C (158°F) for more than 4 seconds, the TED is disconnected or the duct is
blocked, the DCSM will shut down the driver seat system and set this DTC.
DTC B2730 Back Over-Temp Detected (Driver) - In the heating mode, if the driver seat backrest TED
temperature exceeds 85°C (185°F) for more than 4 seconds, the TED is disconnected or the duct is
blocked, the DCSM will shut down the driver seat system and set this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Restricted backrest TED filter
Crushed or restricted backrest foam pad
Crushed or restricted climate controlled seat manifold
Backrest TED assembly
DCSM
PINPOINT TEST AR: DTC B2730 - BACK OVER-TEMP DETECTED (DRIVER)
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
AR1 CHECK THE DCSM FOR DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/DCSM/Retrieve DTCs
Was DTC B2730 retrieved during the self-test?
YES : Go to AR2.
NO : Go to AR4.
AR2 CHECK THE TED THERMISTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Disconnect: DCSM C3036b
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 359
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 335: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036b-9, circuit VHS35 (VT/OG), harness side and
ground and between DCSM C3036b-10, circuit RHS15 (GY/BN), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AR3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AR3 CHECK THE TED THERMISTOR
Fig. 336: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 360
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3322 pin 5 and pin 8, component side. Note the
ambient temperature and refer to the following table.
Temperature Resistance
2,7820-10°C (321,663
50°F)
ohms
1,83710-20°C (501,140
68°F)
ohms
20-30°C (68- 1,260-806
86°F)
ohms
30-40°C (86- 893-570
104°F)
ohms
40-50°C
630-428
(104-122°F)
ohms
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
YES : REPAIR the affected open circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AR4 CONFIRM THE FAULT
Verify with the customer that the concern is the seat shuts OFF in heat mode.
NOTE:
A crushed seat backrest foam pad or a crushed climate controlled
seat manifold may be the cause of the fault. It may be necessary to
sit on the seat or place something of reasonable size and weight on
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 361
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
the seat to recreate the fault.
Attempt to recreate the fault. Start the vehicle and set the driver seat to HIGH heat for at least 15
minutes.
Is the customer concern with the seat shutting OFF in heat mode or was the fault recreated?
YES : Go to AR5.
NO : Fault not present. Fault may have been set due to a past failure or incorrect use of the climate
controlled seat system by repeated switching between heat and cool modes. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
AR5 CHECK OPERATION OF THE SEAT
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, set both front seats to HIGH cool.
Compare the airflow from the driver seat backrest and compare it to the airflow from the passenger
seat backrest.
Is the airflow exhausting from the driver seat backrest comparable to the airflow exhausting
from the passenger seat backrest?
YES : Go to AR14.
NO : Go to AR6.
AR6 CHECK THE BACKREST BLOWER FOR AN OBSTRUCTION OR RESTRICTED
FILTER
Key in OFF position.
Inspect the blower of the backrest TED assembly for an obstruction or for a restricted filter.
Is the blower obstructed or the filter restricted?
YES : REMOVE the obstruction or INSTALL a new filter. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the
DTCs.
NO : Go to AR7.
AR7 CHECK THE BACKREST FAN OPERATION
Key in ON position.
With the engine running, set both front seats to HIGH cool.
Inspect the backrest blower for operation.
Does the backrest blower operate?
YES : Go to AR14.
NO : Go to AR8.
AR8 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Side Air Bag C328
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Side Air Bag C327
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 362
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: DCSM C3036c
Disconnect: Backrest TED C3322
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing
blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the
battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. Refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING & CABLES article.
Fig. 337: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-12, circuit VHS16 (BU/GN), harness side and
backrest TED C3322-7, circuit VHS16 (BU/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AR9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AR9 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUIT RHS03 (GY/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 363
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 338: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between DCSM C3036c-15, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground.
Is voltage greater than one volt?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : Go to AR10.
AR10 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUIT CHS03 (GN/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 339: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 364
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to AR11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AR11 CHECK BLOWER CIRCUITS RHS03 (GY/OG) AND CHS03 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 340: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between DCSM C3036c-16, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side and
backrest TED C3322-2, circuit CHS03 (GN/BN), harness side; and between DCSM C3036c-15,
circuit RHS03 (GY/OG), harness side and backrest TED C3322-4, circuit RHS03 (GY/OG),
harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AR12.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AR12 CHECK THE BLOWER RESISTANCE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 365
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 341: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 2 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3322 pin 2 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 6,000 ohms and 9,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AR13.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AR13 CHECK THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE
Fig. 342: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 366
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 7 and
the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads
incorrectly connected will result in false readings and lead to
incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.
Measure the resistance between backrest TED C3322 pin 7 and pin 4, component side.
Is the resistance between 290K ohms and 420K ohms?
YES : Go to AR14.
NO : INSTALL a new backrest TED. REFER to Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device.
REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
DISCONNECT the battery ground cable.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
AR14 CHECK THE TED INSTALLATION AND FOR CRUSHED SEAT BACKREST
Key in OFF position.
Depower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Remove the seat. Refer to Seat - Front.
Remove the seat backrest trim cover. Refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front, Without Fold Flat.
Inspect the seat backrest for the following:
Is the TED correctly installed?
Is the seat backrest foam pad crushed or restricted?
Is the climate controlled seat manifold crushed or restricted?
Is the TED correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad and
manifold?
YES : CONNECT the battery ground cable.
INSTALL a new DCSM and CARRY OUT PMI. REFER to Dual Climate Controlled Seat
Module (DCSM). REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NO : CORRECTLY install the backrest TED or INSTALL a new seat backrest foam pad and/or
climate controlled seat manifold. CONNECT the battery ground cable. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs.
CONNECT passenger seat side air bag module C327.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 367
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
CONNECT driver seat side air bag module C328.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Pinpoint Test AS: The Power Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Both Rear, Power Fold
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING article.
Normal Operation
The rear seat power-fold relay is provided voltage on the coil side from the smart junction box (SJB), on pin 2,
circuit CPS 48 (BU), for 30 minutes after turning the vehicle off, when the transmission selector is in PARK
and the liftgate is open. Ground for the coil side of the relay is on pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The rear seat
power-fold relay switched side is supplied voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 27 (10A) on relay pin
3, and is hot at all times. Pushing the double-throw switch to the appropriate rear seat release actuator, left or
right, will provide voltage from relay pin 5 and allow folding of that seat. If the relay is disabled after 30
minutes, it can be enabled as long as the transmission is in PARK by opening any door, pressing the unlock key
on the key fob, pressing any keyless keypad button or turning the ignition key.
DTC B2794 Third Row Power Fold Circuit Failure - If SJB output to the left or right third row folding
seat relay is open or shorted to voltage, the SJB sets this code.
DTC B2A2D Third Row Power Fold Circuit Short To Ground - If SJB output to the left or right third row
folding seat relay is shorted to ground, the SJB sets this DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SJB
Power-fold relay
Rear seat control switch
PINPOINT TEST AS: THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - BOTH REAR,
POWER FOLD
NOTE:
The SJB may also be identified as the generic electronic module (GEM).
AS1 CHECK FOR DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self Test/Generic Electronic Module
(GEM/SJB)/Retrieve DTCs
Are any DTCs present?
YES : If DTC B2794 is present, go to AS2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 368
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
If DTC B2A2D is present, go to AS5.
For all other DTCs, go to Driver Seat Module (DSM) DTC Chart, Dual Climate Controlled
Seat Module (DCSM) DTC Chart, Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart and/or refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
NO : Go to AS2.
AS2 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE POWER-FOLD REAR SEAT
NOTE:
Shifting the transmission out of PARK will disable the voltage supply
from the SJB to the BJB relay.
Operate both power-fold rear seats.
Do both power-fold rear seats operate at all times?
YES : If DTC B2794 is present and the power-fold rear seats operate at all times, go to AS4.
If both power-fold rear seats operate at all times, and no DTCs were present, go to AS3.
NO : If DTC B2794 is present and neither power-fold rear seat operates, go to AS6.
If no DTCs were present and neither power-fold rear seat operates, go to AS3.
AS3 CHECK TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTOR TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) PID
STATES
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger/Transmission Control
Module (TCM) PID: TR
Operate the transmission gear selector in all positions while monitoring the following TCM PID TR
states:
Park
Reverse
Neutral
OverDrive
Low
Do the PID states agree with the selected positions?
YES : If no DTCs were present and neither power-fold rear seat works, go to AS9.
If no DTCs were present and both power-fold rear seat work all the time, go to AS14.
NO : To diagnose a transmission gear selector (PRNDL) status concern, REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
AS4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS48 (BU) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: BJB Power-Fold Relay 25
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 369
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Key in ON position.
Fig. 343: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between SJB C2280c-24, circuit CPS48 (BU), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal
operation.
AS5 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS48 (BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Disconnect: BJB Power-Fold Relay 25
Fig. 344: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between SJB C2280c-24, circuit CPS48 (BU), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 370
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
AS6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: BJB Power-Fold Relay 25
Fig. 345: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between power-fold relay cavity 1 BJB side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AS7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal
operation.
AS7 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS48 (BU) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Connect a jumper wire between power-fold relay 25, cavity 1 BJB side and cavity 2 BJB side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 371
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 346: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between SJB C2280c-24, circuit CPS48 (BU), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AS8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal
operation.
AS8 CHECK THE ULTRA MICRO ISO RELAY
Carry out the component test for ultra micro ISO relay. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT
TESTING article.
Is the ultra micro ISO relay OK?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new ultra micro ISO relay. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the
system for normal operation.
AS9 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS48 (BU) FOR VOLTAGE
Make sure the transmission is in PARK.
Activate the power-fold rear seats by carrying out one of the following within 30 minutes of
checking circuit CPS48 (BU) for voltage.
Open 1 of the 4 doors, rear hatch or rear hatch glass
Turn the ignition switch to accessory or run
Press a keyless entry key pad button
Press a remote keyless entry (RKE) button
Disconnect: BJB Power-Fold Relay 25
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 372
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 347: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
With the SJB power-fold rear seat relay circuit CPS48 (BU) activated, measure the voltage at BJB
power-fold relay 25 cavity 2 BJB side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volt?
YES : Go to AS10.
NO : INSTALL a new SJB. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
AS10 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 373
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 348: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between power-fold relay cavity 1 BJB side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AS11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal
operation.
AS11 CHECK THE ULTRA MICRO ISO RELAY
Carry out the component test for ultra micro ISO relay. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT
TESTING article.
Is the ultra micro ISO relay OK?
YES : Go to AS12.
NO : INSTALL a new ultra micro ISO relay. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the
system for normal operation.
AS12 CHECK BJB FOR VOLTAGE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 374
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 349: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage at power-fold relay cavity 3 BJB side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to AS13.
NO : VERIFY BJB fuse 27 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal
operation.
AS13 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS58 (WH/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Connect: BJB Power-Fold Relay 25
Open the liftgate.
Fig. 350: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 375
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
If the relay is disabled after 30 minutes, it can be enabled by opening
any door, pressing the unlock key on the key fob, pressing any
keyless keypad button or turning the ignition key.
Measure the voltage between rear seat control switch C4351-2, circuit CPS58 (WH/BN), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new rear seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Rear Seat.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
AS14 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS58 (WH/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: BJB Power-Fold Relay 25
Key in ON position.
Using the rear seat control switch, attempt to fold the rear left and right seats down.
Did the rear left and right seats fold down?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to AS15.
AS15 CHECK THE ULTRA MICRO ISO RELAY
Carry out the component test for ultra micro ISO relay. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT
TESTING article.
Is the ultra micro ISO relay OK?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new ultra micro ISO relay. REPEAT the self-test. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test AT: The Power Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Left Rear, Power Fold
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The rear seat power-fold relay is provided voltage on the coil side from the smart junction box (SJB), on pin 2,
circuit CPS 48 (BU), for 30 minutes after turning the vehicle off, when the transmission selector is in PARK
and the liftgate is open. Ground for the coil side of the relay is on pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The rear seat
power-fold relay switched side is supplied voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 27 (10A) on relay pin
3, and is hot at all times. Pushing the double-throw switch to the appropriate rear seat release actuator, left or
right, will provide voltage from relay pin 5 and allow folding of that seat. If the relay is disabled after 30
minutes, it can be enabled as long as the transmission is in PARK by opening any door, pressing the unlock key
on the key fob, pressing any keyless keypad button or turning the ignition key.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 376
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Rear seat control switch
Left power-fold seat actuator
Power-fold relay
PINPOINT TEST AT: THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - LEFT REAR, POWER
FOLD
AT1 CHECK LH SEAT OPERATION
Key in ON position.
Select NEUTRAL.
Press the rear seat control switch to release the left side backrest.
Does the LH seat operate all the time?
YES : Go to AT2.
NO : Go to AT3.
AT2 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS58 (WH/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: BJB Power-Fold Relay 25
Disconnect: Rear Seat Control Switch C4351
Key in ON position.
Fig. 351: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between rear seat control switch C4351-2, circuit CPS58 (WH/BN), harness
side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 0.2 volt?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new power-fold relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
AT3 CHECK THE REAR SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Select PARK.
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 377
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Gain access to the rear seat control switch C4351.
Back probe for voltage between rear seat control switch C4351-1, circuit CPS56 (GN/BN), harness
side and ground.
NOTE:
If the relay is disabled after 30 minutes, it can be enabled by opening
any door, pressing the unlock key on the key fob, pressing any
keyless keypad button or turning the ignition key.
While back probing for voltage, press the rear seat control switch to release the left side backrest.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when rear seat control switch is depressed?
YES : Go to AT4.
NO : INSTALL a new rear seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
AT4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS56 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Left Power-Fold Actuator C3317
Fig. 352: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between left power-fold actuator C3317-1, circuit CPS56 (GN/BN), harness
side and ground while pressing the rear seat control switch to release the left side backrest.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when rear seat control switch is depressed?
YES : Go to AT5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
AT5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD126 (BK/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 378
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 353: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between left power-fold actuator C3317-1, circuit CPS56 (GN/BN), harness
side and C3317-2, circuit GD126 (BK/WH), harness side while pressing the rear seat control switch
to release the left side backrest.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when rear seat control switch is depressed?
YES : INSTALL a new left power-fold actuator. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test AU: The Power Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - Right Rear, Power Fold
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Power Seats for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The rear seat power-fold relay is provided voltage on the coil side from the smart junction box (SJB), on pin 2,
circuit CPS 48 (BU), for 30 minutes after turning the vehicle off, when the transmission selector is in PARK
and the liftgate is open. Ground for the coil side of the relay is on pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The rear seat
power-fold relay switched side is supplied voltage from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 27 (10A) on relay pin
3, and is hot at all times. Pushing the double-throw switch to the appropriate rear seat release actuator, left or
right, will provide voltage from relay pin 5 and allow folding of that seat. If the relay is disabled after 30
minutes, it can be enabled as long as the transmission is in PARK by opening any door, pressing the unlock key
on the key fob, pressing any keyless keypad button or turning the ignition key.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Rear seat control switch
Right power-fold seat actuator
Power-fold relay
PINPOINT TEST AU: THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - RIGHT REAR,
POWER FOLD
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 379
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
AU1 CHECK RH SEAT OPERATION
Key in ON position.
Select NEUTRAL.
Press the rear seat control switch to release the right side backrest.
Does the RH seat operate all the time?
YES : Go to AU2.
NO : Go to AU3.
AU2 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS58 (WH/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: BJB Power-Fold Relay 25
Disconnect: Rear Seat Control Switch C4351
Key in ON position.
Fig. 354: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between rear seat control switch C4351-2, circuit CPS58 (WH/BN), harness
side to ground.
Is the voltage greater than 0.2 volt?
YES : REPAIR circuit CPS58 (WH/BN). TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new power-fold relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
AU3 CHECK THE REAR SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Select PARK.
Key in OFF position.
Gain access to the rear seat control switch C4351.
Back probe for voltage between rear seat control switch C4351-5, circuit CPS57 (GY/BN), harness
side and ground.
NOTE:
If the relay is disabled after 30 minutes, it can be enabled by opening
any door, pressing the unlock key on the key fob, pressing any
keyless keypad button or turning the ignition key.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 380
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
While back probing for voltage, press the rear seat control switch to release the right side backrest.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when rear seat control switch is depressed?
YES : Go to AU4.
NO : INSTALL a new rear seat control switch. REFER to Seat Control Switch - Rear Seat. TEST
the system for normal operation.
AU4 CHECK CIRCUIT CPS57 (GY/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Right Power-Fold Actuator C3334
Fig. 355: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between right power-fold actuator C3334-1, circuit CPS57 (GY/BN), harness
side and ground while pressing the rear seat control switch to release the right side backrest.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when rear seat control switch is depressed?
YES : Go to AU5.
NO : REPAIR circuit CPS57 (GY/BN). TEST the system for normal operation.
AU5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD151 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 356: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between right power-fold actuator C3334-1, circuit CPS57 (GY/BN), harness
side and C3334-2, circuit GD151 (BK/GN), harness side while pressing the rear seat control switch
to release the right side backrest.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 381
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts when rear seat control switch is depressed?
YES : INSTALL a new right power-fold actuator. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit GD151 (BK/GN). TEST the system for normal operation.
Component Test
Component Testing - Thermo-Electric Device (TED) Cooling Performance
NOTE:
This test is intended to check the cooling mode performance of an operational
climate controlled seat backrest or cushion thermo-electric device (TED) and
verify it is cooling inlet air at the TED (ambient cabin air) between 6-8°C (10-14°
F).
NOTE:
Make sure the vehicle is out of direct sunlight and is in an area with a stable air
temperature when testing the climate controlled seat system.
NOTE:
For correct temperature measurements, the seat being tested should be
occupied.
1. Enter DataLogger and monitor the following DCSM PIDs:
CSHTEMP (Cushion Thermal Electric Device [TED] Temperature)
BK_TEMP (Back Thermal Electric Device [TED] Temperature)
PCSHTMP (Passenger Cushion Thermal Electric Device [TED] Temperature)
PBKTMP (Passenger Back Thermal Electric Device [TED] Temperature)
DCCSMOD (Driver Climate Controlled System State)
PCCSMOD (Passenger Climate Controlled System State)
2. Any initial PID value of greater than 205°C (401°F) or less than 2°C (36°F) indicates a system hardware
failure. Do not proceed with this test. Go to Symptom Chart or Dual Climate Controlled Seat Module
(DCSM) DTC Chart for diagnosis.
NOTE:
Typical backrest and cushion TED shown in illustration, others similar.
3. Gain access to the seat backrest and cushion TEDs and use a suitable thermo-couple temperature
measuring device to monitor the air inlet temperature.
Access the backrest TED.
Release the backrest trim cover J-clips at the sides and bottom.
Pull out at the bottom and detach the 2 lower hard back panel pin-type retainers.
Position the backrest trim cover out of the way.
Place the temperature probe near each TEDs air filter.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 382
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 357: Using Scan Tool To Measure Cushion TED PID Temperature
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The engine must be running to operate the climate controlled seat system
and carry out this test.
4. Operate system in high cool mode and measure the temperature at the cushion TED filter using the
thermo-couple device.
Obtain and record the air inlet temperature at the TED.
5. Use a scan tool to measure the cushion TED PID temperature and record the value.
Monitor the MODE PID and verify the system is operating. If during testing the PID value changes
to Blower Only state, the system has entered into recovery mode and voltage to the TEDs is
disabled. If this occurs, the seat has failed the test. Do not continue. Return to the diagnostic
routine.
6. Subtract the cushion TED PID temperature from the cushion air inlet temperature and record the
temperature difference value.
7. Continue to operate the system in high cool mode and use the thermo-couple device to measure the
temperature at the backrest TED filter.
Obtain and record the air inlet temperature at the TED.
Secure the temperature probe at the backrest TED air filter and close the backrest trim cover
before measuring.
8. Use a scan tool to measure the backrest TED PID temperature and record the value.
Monitor the MODE PID and verify the system is operating. If during testing the PID value changes
to Blower Only state, the system has entered into recovery mode and voltage to the TEDs is
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 383
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
disabled. If this occurs, the seat has failed the test. Do not continue. Return to the diagnostic
routine.
9. Subtract the backrest TED PID temperature from the backrest air inlet temperature and record the value.
10. Compare the cushion and backrest calculated temperature values. Both values should be between 6°-8°C
(10.8°-14.4°F) and approximately equal (±1°C [±1.8°F]).
11. If the calculated temperature values are not within these specifications, check the climate controlled seat
components for air duct or filter restrictions, blockages, duct or electrical disconnections and for incorrect
assembly. Repair as needed. If OK, carry out the DCSM self-test and if any DTC is retrieved, go to Dual
Climate Controlled Seat Module (DCSM) DTC Chart for diagnostic direction. Return to the
diagnostic routine.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
MEMORY POSITION PROGRAMMING
Programming Memory Positions
NOTE:
Memory positions can be stored at any time.
NOTE:
Verify good battery condition before diagnosing the memory seat system. Poor
battery condition may interfere with memory seat operation, even if vehicle
starting is possible.
NOTE:
To program the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter, refer to HANDLES,
LOCKS, LATCHES & ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
1. To set memory position(s) move the memory driver seat, memory exterior mirrors (if equipped), memory
adjustable pedals (if equipped) and memory tilt steering column (if equipped) to the preferred position
using the appropriate switch(es).
NOTE:
Once the memory SET switch button is pressed, there is a 5-second time
limit to input a memory position. If a memory position input is not received
within the time limit, the operation is aborted and the memory SET switch
LED (if equipped) is turned OFF.
NOTE:
If one of the following other inputs is received during the time limit, the
operation is aborted and the memory SET switch LED (if equipped) is
turned OFF:
Driver seat control switch
Memory SET switch button
Adjustable pedal control switch (if equipped)
Exterior mirror control switch (if equipped)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 384
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Power tilt steering column switch (if equipped)
2. Press the memory SET switch button, activating the memory SET switch LED (if equipped).
3. Within 5 seconds (before the LED goes out) (if equipped), press memory SET switch button 1 or 2.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to initiate another memory position setting.
Recalling a Stored Memory Position
NOTE:
A memory recall can be initiated only if the vehicle is in PARK or NEUTRAL gear
and the ignition switch is not in START. A memory recall in progress will not be
affected by moving the ignition switch to START or by moving the gearshift
lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
Input from the driver seat control switch, memory SET switch, adjustable pedal
control switch (if equipped), exterior mirror control switch (if equipped) or
power tilt steering column switch (if equipped) during a memory recall will abort
the memory recall.
1. The driver can recall the desired memory driver seat, memory exterior mirror (if equipped), memory
adjustable pedal (if equipped) and memory tilt steering column (if equipped) positions by depressing
either memory SET switch button 1 or 2. Depressing memory SET switch button 1 will initiate a recall of
the positions stored for Memory 1. Depressing memory SET switch button 2 will initiate a recall of the
positions stored for Memory 2.
SEAT WIRE HARNESS ROUTING - FRONT PASSENGER CUSHION
All seat tracks
1. For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to the illustrations with the correct
seat option content.
Manual seat track
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 385
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 358: Cushion Frame From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Description
Wire harness main bundle
Occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt wire harness takeout
Side air bag electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 386
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 359: Cushion Frame With Manual Seat Track Attached From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Inline electrical connector to vehicle harness electrical connector
Occupant classification system module (OCSM) electrical connector
Wire harness with gray tape
Side air bag electrical connector
Wire harness with orange tape
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 387
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 360: Outboard Side of Cushion Frame and Manual Seat Track From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Description
Rear outboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Front outboard OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 388
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 361: Inboard Side of Cushion Frame and Manual Seat Track From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Description
Front inboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Rear inboard OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 389
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 362: Inboard Side of Cushion Frame and Manual Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Description
Safety belt buckle switch electrical connector
1. Make sure the passenger seat cushion wire harness is correctly routed and attached.
Manual seat track with heat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 390
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 363: Cushion Frame From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Wire harness main bundle
Occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt wire harness takeout
Side air bag electrical connector
Cushion heater mat electrical connector
Backrest heater mat electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 391
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 364: Cushion Frame With Manual Seat Track Attached From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Inline electrical connector to vehicle harness electrical connector
Occupant classification system module (OCSM) connector
Wire harness with gray tape
Side air bag electrical connector
Wire harness with orange tape
Heated seat module electrical connector
Cushion heater mat electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 392
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 365: Outboard Side of Cushion Frame and Manual Seat Track From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Description
Rear outboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Front outboard OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:23 AM
Page 393
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 366: Inboard Side of Cushion Frame and Manual Seat Track From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Description
Front inboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Rear inboard OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 394
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 367: Inboard Side of Cushion Frame and Manual Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Description
Safety belt buckle switch electrical connector
1. Make sure the passenger seat cushion wire harness is correctly routed and attached.
Power seat track with heat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 395
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 368: Cushion Frame From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Wire harness main bundle
Occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt wire harness takeout
Side air bag electrical connector
Cushion heater mat electrical connector
Backrest heater mat electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 396
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 369: Cushion Frame With Power Seat Track Attached From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Inline electrical connector to vehicle harness electrical connector
Occupant classification system module (OCSM) electrical connector
Front height motor electrical connector
Cushion heater mat electrical connector
Horizontal motor electrical connector
Heated seat module electrical connector
Side air bag electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 397
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 370: Inboard Side of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Description
Front inboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Attaches to inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket
Rear inboard OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 398
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 371: Front of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Seat control switch and rear height motor takeout must be routed on top of the bracket
Wire harness attachment points
Horizontal motor electrical connector
Safety belt buckle switch electrical connector pin-type retainer attached in place
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 399
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 372: Front Inboard Side of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Description
Safety belt buckle switch electrical connector and wire harness takeout routing attachment
points
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 400
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 373: Front and Outboard Side of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Seat control switch and rear height motor takeout must be routed on top of the bracket
Rear height motor takeout attachment points
Outboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt takeout must be routed
under the bracket
Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt takeout attachment points
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 401
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 374: Outboard of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Rear height motor electrical connector
Rear outboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Front outboard OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Seat control switch electrical connector
1. Make sure the passenger seat cushion wire harness is correctly routed and attached.
Power seat track
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 402
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 375: Cushion Frame From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Description
Wire harness main bundle
Occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt wire harness takeout
Side air bag electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 403
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 376: Cushion Frame With Power Seat Track Attached From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Inline electrical connector to vehicle harness electrical connector
Occupant classification system module (OCSM) electrical connector
Front height motor electrical connector
Horizontal motor electrical connector
Side air bag electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 404
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 377: Inboard Side of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Description
Front inboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Attaches to inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket
Rear inboard OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 405
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 378: Front of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Seat control switch and rear height motor takeout must be routed on top of the bracket
Wire harness attachment points
Horizontal motor electrical connector
Safety belt buckle switch electrical connector pin-type retainer attached in place
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 406
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 379: Front Inboard Side of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Description
Safety belt buckle switch electrical connector and wire harness takeout routing attachment
points
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 407
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 380: Front and Outboard Side of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Seat control switch and rear height motor takeout must be routed on top of the bracket
Rear height motor takeout attachment points
Outboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt takeout must be routed
under the bracket
Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt takeout attachment points
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 408
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 381: Outboard of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Rear height motor electrical connector
Rear outboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Front outboard OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Seat control switch electrical connector
1. Make sure the passenger seat cushion wire harness is correctly routed and attached.
Power seat track with power recline, power lumbar and climate control
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 409
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 382: Cushion Frame From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Wire harness main bundle
Occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt wire harness takeout
Side air bag electrical connector
Power recline electrical connector
Backrest thermo-electric device (TED) electrical connector
Cushion TED electrical connector
Power lumbar electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 410
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 383: Cushion Frame With Power Seat Track Attached From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
Inline electrical connector-to-vehicle harness electrical connector
Occupant classification system module (OCSM) electrical connector
Front height motor electrical connector
Horizontal motor electrical connector
Side air bag electrical connector
Power recline electrical connector
Backrest thermo-electric device (TED) electrical connector
Cushion TED electrical connector
Power lumbar electrical connector
Dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) and 3 electrical connectors
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 411
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 384: Inboard Side of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Description
Front inboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Attaches to inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket
Rear inboard OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 412
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 385: Front of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Underneath
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Seat control switch and rear height motor takeout must be routed on top of the bracket
Wire harness attachment points
Horizontal motor electrical connector
Safety belt buckle switch electrical connector pin-type retainer attached in place
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 413
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 386: Front Inboard Side of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Description
Safety belt buckle switch electrical connector and wire harness takeout routing attachment
points
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 414
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 387: Front and Outboard Side of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Seat control switch and rear height motor takeout must be routed on top of the bracket
Rear height motor takeout attachment points
Outboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt takeout must be routed
under the bracket
Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt takeout attachment points
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 415
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 388: Outboard of Cushion Frame and Power Seat Track From Upright
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Rear height motor electrical connector
Rear outboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Front outboard OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connector
Seat control switch electrical connector
1. Make sure the passenger seat cushion wire harness is correctly routed and attached.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
SEAT - FRONT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
NOTE:
Driver seat shown in illustration, passenger similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 416
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
For seat track-to-floor bolt torque specification and torque sequence, refer to
the steps in this procedure.
Fig. 389: Exploded View Of Front Seat Components With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
66410
2
3
4
5
6
W712888
W712888
W712888
Description
Seat track-to-floor front bolt covers (2
required)
Seat track-to-floor front outboard bolt
Seat track-to-floor front inboard bolt
Electrical connectors (part of 14A005)
Front seat assembly
Seat track-to-floor rear inboard bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 417
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
7
8
W712888
61748
9
61749
10
-
11
62187
12
-
Seat track-to-floor rear outboard bolt
Seat track-to-floor rear inboard bolt cover
Seat track-to-floor rear outboard bolt
cover
Safety belt retractor belt anchor (part of
611B08 RH/ 611B09 LH)
Safety belt retractor belt anchor nut cover
Safety belt retractor belt anchor nut (part
of 611B08 RH/ 611B09 LH)
REMOVAL
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
If servicing a power seat track, if possible, raise the front and rear to its
highest point.
1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut.
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
3. Carefully pull up and out to remove the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut cover from the cushion side
shield for access to the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut.
4. Remove the safety belt anchor nut and separate the safety belt anchor from the seat.
5. Pull forward and remove the 2 seat track-to-floor front bolt covers.
6. Remove the 2 seat track-to-floor rear bolt covers in the following sequence.
1. Push the seat track-to-floor rear bolt cover forward.
2. Lift to disengage the tab at the front of the seat track-to-floor rear bolt cover.
3. Slide back and remove the seat track-to-floor rear bolt cover.
Repeat for the other side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 418
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
7. Remove the 4 seat track-to-floor bolts.
8. Tip the seat back and disconnect the seat electrical connectors.
WARNING: Use care when handling the front passenger seat and track
assembly. Dropping the assembly, placing excessive weight on or
sitting on a front passenger seat that is not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged seat components. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant
classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
Use care when handling the driver seat and track assembly. Dropping the
assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in
damaged components.
9. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat is correctly installed and fastened to
the vehicle. Do not force the alignment to the floorpan mounting holes. If
the seat does not align to the floorpan mounting holes, repair the seat or
floorpan as needed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
All seats
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position the seat in the vehicle.
Tip the seat and connect the electrical connectors.
Align the front inboard seat mounting locator to the guide hole in the floor and position the seat in place.
Start all the seat track-to-floor bolts by hand.
NOTE:
Driver shown in illustration, passenger similar.
5. Install the seat track-to-floor bolts.
1. Install the seat track-to-floor front inboard bolt.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
2. Install the seat track-to-floor front outboard bolt.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
3. Install the seat track-to-floor rear inboard bolt.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 419
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
4. Install the seat track-to-floor rear outboard bolt.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 390: Seat Track Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the 4 seat track-to-floor front and rear bolt covers.
NOTE:
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the
safety belt retractor.
7. Position the safety belt retractor belt anchor onto the seat stud and install the safety belt retractor belt
anchor nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 420
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
8. Install the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut cover to the cushion side shield.
9. Repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the
General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Passenger seat with existing seat track, occupant classification system module (OCSM) and
occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolts
10. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
Passenger seat with new seat track or OCSM or OCS weight sensor bolt(s)
11. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset. For additional information, refer to
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
All seats
12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to safety belt
system in the Diagnosis and Testing portion of SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article.
Make sure the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants after installation.
Verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding.
SEAT - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT
NOTE:
Driver backrest shown in illustration, passenger similar.
NOTE:
Manual recliners without fold-flat backrest are serviced with the backrest frame.
Power recliners without fold-flat backrest are serviced separately.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 421
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 391: Front Seat Backrest, Manual and Power Recline, Without Fold Flat
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
18D507
3
4
5
6
7
8
64811
611A08
610A16
610A16
64417
Description
Backrest heater mat (part of 64811) (if
equipped)
Backrest climate control seat manifold (if
equipped)
Backrest foam pad
Head restraint
Head restraint guide, slave
Head restraint guide, master
Anti-squeak bag
Backrest trim cover
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 422
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
9
10
11
65500
-
12
-
13
14
65500
65500
15
W712240
16
14547
17
-
18
W712240
19
62648
20
61019
21
22
23
24
25
611D11
W506021
-
26
18D507
27
61018
28
625A84
29
30
31
32
61726
14K155
62648
33
625A84
Backrest trim panel
Manual lumbar assembly (if equipped)
Upper support spring
Manual lumbar cable (part of 65500) (if
equipped)
Static lumbar
Power lumbar assembly (if equipped)
Power/manual recliner-to-seat track bolts
(4 required)
Recliner motor (if equipped)
Recliner torque shaft clips (2 required) (if
equipped)
Power recliner-to-backrest frame bolts (4
required) (if equipped)
Inboard power recliner (if equipped)
Backrest frame (with power recline) (if
equipped)
Side air bag module
Side air bag module bolts
RH attachment panel
Screw (4 required)
LH attachment panel
Backrest thermo-electric device (TED)
(if equipped)
Backrest frame (with manual recline) (if
equipped)
Power recline torque shaft cover (if
equipped)
Recliner torque shaft
Recliner motor bolt (if equipped)
Side air bag wire harness
Outboard power recliner (if equipped)
Manual recline torque shaft cover (if
equipped)
NOTE:
Optional backrest on passenger seat only.
NOTE:
Manual recliners with fold-flat backrest are serviced separately.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 423
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 392: Front Seat Backrest, Manual Recline With Fold Flat
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Part Number
14K155
W506021
611D10
610A16
611A08
610A16
60508
64810/64416
Description
Side air bag wire harness
Side air bag module bolts
Side air bag module
Fold-flat backrest frame
Anti-squeak bag
Head restraint guide, slave
Head restraint
Head restraint guide, master
Backrest trim panel
Backrest foam pad/backrest trim cover
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 424
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
11
-
12
62186
13
W712059
14
W500720
15
W712240
16
-
17
62294
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
62186
62187
W714053
62187
62294
65500
Backrest heater mat (part of 64810) (if
equipped)
RH outer fold-flat recliner cover
Fold-flat recliner-to-fold-flat backrest
frame front bolts (2 required)
Fold-flat recliner-to-fold-flat backrest
frame rear bolts (2 required)
Fold-flat recliner-to-seat track bolts (4
required)
RH fold-flat recliner
Inboard fold-flat recliner cover screws (3
required)
RH inboard fold-flat recliner cover
Screw (4 required)
RH attachment panel
LH attachment panel
LH fold-flat recliner
LH inboard fold-flat recliner cover
Scrivet
LH outer fold-flat recliner cover
LH outer fold-flat recliner cover screw
Screw cover
Fold-flat recliner cable
Static lumbar
NOTE:
Driver seat shown in illustration, passenger similar.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 425
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 393: Seat Cushion With Power Seat Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
62901
2
18D507
3
4
5
632A23
63226
6
-
7
18D507
Description
Cushion trim cover
Cushion climate control seat manifold (if
equipped)
Cushion foam pad
Cushion heater mat (part of 632A23)
Cushion support
Cushion thermo-electric device (TED)to-climate control seat cushion adapter
screw (if equipped)
Cushion TED adapter (if equipped)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:24 AM
Page 426
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
8
9
10
11
63100
62294
W714053
62187
12
-
13
14
61203
18D507
15
W505945
16
17
18
19
20
14A699
19E880
21
-
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
61711
14B416
62294
62187
14A701
62187
62294
14711
14711
14711
14C708
33
62294
34
62294
35
14A301
NOTE:
Cushion frame
Recliner side shield screws
Scrivet
Recliner side shield
Safety belt buckle-to-seat track nut (part
of 61203)
Safety belt buckle
Cushion TED (if equipped)
Cushion TED-to-cushion frame screw (3
required) (if equipped)
Screw grommet
Cushion frame-to-seat track rear brackets
Wire clip
Driver seat wire harness
Cushion TED filter (if equipped)
Seat track-to-cushion frame bolts (4
required)
Power seat track assembly
Seat position sensor (driver only)
Seat track cover retainer
Seat track cover
Seat control switch
Cushion side shield
Cushion side shield retainer (3 required)
Power lumbar switch knob (if equipped)
Power seat recliner knob
Seat control switch knob
Driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped)
DSM-to-bracket screw (2 required) (if
equipped)
Bracket-to-seat track screws (if
equipped)
DSM bracket (if equipped)
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 427
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 394: Driver Seat Cushion With Manual Seat Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
62901
632A23
63100
62294
14A699
Description
Cushion heater mat (part of 632A23) (if
equipped)
Cushion trim cover
Cushion foam pad
Cushion frame
Wire clip
Recliner side shield screws
Recliner side shield
Driver seat wire harness
Safety belt buckle-to-seat track bolt (part
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 428
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
9
10
11
61203
61711
12
-
13
14
14B416
610C01
15
62294
16
17
18
19
20
62187
62294
61737
21
61737
22
617B70
NOTE:
of 61203) (manual driver seat track only)
Safety belt buckle
Manual seat track assembly
Seat track-to-cushion frame bolts (4
required)
Seat track position sensor
Manual lumbar adjuster (if equipped)
Manual lumbar adjuster-to-seat track
screw (if equipped)
Manual lumbar cable (if equipped)
Cushion side shield
Cushion side shield retainer (4 required)
Manual recliner handle spring clip
Manual recliner handle
Manual height adjust handle (if
equipped)
Manual lumbar adjust handle (if
equipped)
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Fig. 395: Passenger Seat Cushion With Manual Seat Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 429
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Item
1
Part Number
62900
2
-
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
632A22
63100
61736
62294
62186
14A698
14C724
62294
62187
61202
W520113
61704
18
-
NOTE:
Description
Cushion trim cover
Cushion heater mat (part of 632A22) (if
equipped)
Cushion foam pad
Cushion frame
Manual recliner handle
Manual recliner handle cover spring clip
Cushion side shield screw (4 required)
Cushion side shield
Passenger seat wire harness
Grommet
Screw
Heated seat module (if equipped)
Recliner side shield screws
Recliner side shield
Safety belt buckle
Safety belt buckle nut
Manual seat track assembly
Seat track-to-cushion frame bolts (4
required)
To install a new occupant classification system module (OCSM) or an occupant
classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt, refer to the appropriate
procedure in SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 430
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 396: Passenger Power Seat Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
63100
3
4
62294
14A301
5
62294
6
14B422
Description
Power seat track adjuster assembly (part
of 61710)
Occupant classification sensor (OCS)
weight sensor bolt nuts (4 required)
Cushion side shield bracket screws
Cushion side shield bracket
Occupant classification system module
(OCSM) retainers
OCSM
7
-
Seat track front cross brace nuts (part of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 431
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
8
-
9
14A301
10
11
12
62294
14C724
13
14A301
14
15
62294
14C724
16
62294
17
-
18
-
19
62294
20
12655
21
12656
22
14B422
23
24
25
26
62294
62186
61710)
Seat track front cross brace (part of
61710)
Bracket (with dual climate controlled seat
module [DCSM]) (if equipped)
Bracket screws
Heated seat module screw (if equipped)
Heated seat module (if equipped)
Bracket (with heated seat module) (if
equipped)
DCSM retainers (if equipped)
DCSM (if equipped)
Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt
protection bracket screws
Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt
protection bracket
Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt
protection bracket
Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt
protection bracket screw
OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clips (4
required)
OCS weight sensor bolt spring washers
(4 required)
OCS weight sensor bolts (4 required)
(part of 61710)
Inboard seat track rail (part of 61710)
Outboard seat track rail (part of 61710)
Seat track cover retainer
Seat track cover
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure.
SEAT BACKREST - FRONT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 432
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
2. Remove the cushion side shield in the following sequence.
1. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle.
2. If equipped with manual height adjust, pull and remove the manual height adjust handle.
NOTE:
Release the tension on the manual lumbar cable before removing the
manual lumbar handle.
3. If equipped with manual lumbar, release the 2 clips on the back of the manual lumbar handle then
pull and remove the manual lumbar handle.
4. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s).
5. If equipped with power seat track, slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer.
6. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer.
If equipped with manual seat tracks, remove the cushion side shield.
7. If equipped with power seat tracks, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
Remove the cushion side shield.
3. Remove the screw and the scrivet and the recliner side shield.
Seats with manual lumbar
4. Remove the manual lumbar cable from the manual lumbar adjuster in the following sequence.
1. Remove the manual lumbar adjuster bracket screw.
2. Separate the manual lumbar adjuster from the bracket.
3. Remove the manual lumbar cable from the manual lumbar adjuster.
Passenger seat with fold-flat backrest
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 433
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
5. Separate the recliner cable casing and Z-fitting from the LH fold-flat recliner.
Fig. 397: Separating Recliner Cable Casing & Z-Fitting From LH Fold Flat Recliner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Separate the recliner cable casing and Z-fitting from the RH fold-flat recliner.
Fig. 398: Separating Recliner Cable Casing & Z-Fitting From RH Fold Flat Recliner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All seats
7. Disconnect the following electrical connectors, release any retainers and route out the wire harness for
following components:
Side air bag module (if equipped).
Power lumbar motor (if equipped).
Power recline motor (if equipped).
Thermo-electric device (TED) (if equipped).
Backrest heater mat (if equipped).
8. Remove the 4 recliner-to-seat track bolts and remove the backrest assembly.
If equipped, route out the manual lumbar cable.
INSTALLATION
All seats
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 434
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
1. Position the backrest assembly to the seat track and install the 4 recliner-to-seat track bolts.
Route the manual lumbar cable (if equipped).
Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
2. Route the wire harnesses, connect the electrical connectors and attach the retainers for the following parts.
For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing Front Passenger Cushion.
The side air bag module.
The power lumbar motor (if equipped).
The power recline motor (if equipped).
The TED (if equipped).
The backrest heater mat (if equipped).
Passenger seat with fold-flat backrest
3. Install the Z-fitting to the RH fold-flat recliner and attach the recliner cable casing.
Fig. 399: Separating Recliner Cable Casing & Z-Fitting From RH Fold Flat Recliner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the Z-fitting to the LH fold-flat recliner and attach the recliner cable casing.
Fig. 400: Separating Recliner Cable Casing & Z-Fitting From LH Fold Flat Recliner
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Adjust the fold-flat recliner cable in the following sequence.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 435
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
1.
2.
3.
4.
Release the fold-flat recliner cable locking clip, allowing the cable to self-adjust.
Position the backrest upright, locking the recliners in place.
Apply force to the backrest, verifying the recliners are locked in place.
Lock the locking clip back in place.
Fig. 401: Locating Fold Flat Recliner Cable Locking Clip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Seats with manual lumbar
6. Install the manual lumbar adjuster in the following sequence.
1. Install the manual lumbar cable to the manual lumbar adjuster.
2. Position the manual lumbar adjuster to the bracket.
3. Install the manual lumbar adjuster bracket screw.
All seats
7. Position the recliner side shield and install the screw and scrivet.
8. Install the cushion side shield in the following sequence.
1. Position the side shield to the seat and connect the seat control switch electrical connector (if
equipped).
2. Slide the cushion side shield rearward to engage the cushion side shield retainer to the seat track
bracket.
3. If equipped with power seat track, slide the cushion side shield down in the rear to engage the
retainer.
4. Install the cushion side shield screw(s).
5. Install the manual lumbar handle (if equipped).
6. Install the manual height adjust handle (if equipped).
7. Position the clip on the manual recline handle and install the manual recline handle (if equipped).
9. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 436
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
10. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
SEAT BACKREST COVER - FRONT, WITHOUT FOLD FLAT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its
mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat
side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury
or death in a crash.
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side
air bags cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning
is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat
side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 437
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
NOTE:
The seat backrest trim cover and foam pad have been removed to show
the backrest trim panel retainers.
2. Remove the backrest trim panel in the following sequence.
1. Release the 2 pin-type retainers at the bottom of the backrest trim panel.
2. Slide the backrest trim panel down to release the upper clips.
3. Turn the backrest trim panel to release the middle clips and remove the backrest trim panel.
Fig. 402: Locating Pin-Type Retainers, Upper Clips & Middle Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lower outer J-clips are unfastened to show inner J-clips.
3. Release the backrest trim cover outer and inner J-clips.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 438
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 403: Locating Inner J-Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the head restraint.
1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the
head restraint.
2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint.
Fig. 404: Locating Release Button On Head Restraint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Always install a new slave head restraint guide.
5. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 439
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not
pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame or
damage to the wiring harness can occur.
NOTE:
When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed.
6. Through the rear of the seat, remove and discard the 2 side air bag module bolts. Then separate the side
air bag module from the seat backrest.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Do not pull the side air bag module electrical connector out by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button can occur.
NOTE:
Do not install the side air bag module electrical connector by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button can occur.
NOTE:
The side air bag module electrical connector locking button must be in the
released position when the connector is being installed or connector
damage may occur.
NOTE:
The side air bag module electrical connector is unique and cannot be
reversed when connected to the side air bag module. Match the electrical
connector key to the keyway in the side air bag module. Do not force the
electrical connector into the side air bag module or damage can occur.
7. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the side air
bag module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector and
the side air bag module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 440
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 405: Lifting Up & Releasing Locking Button On Side Air Bag Module Electrical Connector
Using A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
8. Remove the backrest trim cover from the backrest foam pad in the following sequence.
1. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached
to the clips in the backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
2. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad.
If equipped with climate controlled seats, on assembly make sure the manifold is in place
before snapping the backrest trim cover wire back into the backrest foam pad clips.
3. Remove the backrest trim cover.
When installing the backrest trim cover, tuck the hook-and-loop strips into the backrest foam
pad trenches last to get the best trim cover appearance.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 441
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Passenger seat
11. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
SEAT BACKREST COVER - FRONT, WITH FOLD FLAT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its
mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat
side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury
or death in a crash.
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side
air bags cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning
is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat
side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 442
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Only the front passenger seat can come equipped with optional fold-flat
backrest.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
2. Remove the screw and the LH outer fold-flat recliner cover.
3. Remove the RH outer fold-flat recliner cover in the following sequence.
1. Pull to release the clips.
2. Slide up to disengage the retainer and remove.
Seats with heat
4. From under the seat, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector, release any pin-type
retainers and route out the wire harness.
All seats
5. From under the seat, disconnect the side air bag electrical connector, release any pin-type retainers and
route out the wire harness.
6. Remove the 4 fold-flat recliner-to-fold-flat backrest frame bolts and remove the backrest.
To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
NOTE:
The seat backrest trim cover and foam pad have been removed to show
the backrest trim panel retainers.
7. Remove the backrest trim panel in the following sequence.
1. Release the 2 pin-type retainers at the bottom of the backrest trim panel.
2. Slide the backrest trim panel down to release the upper clips.
3. Turn the backrest trim panel to release the middle clips and remove the backrest trim panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 443
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 406: Locating Pin-Type Retainers, Upper Clips & Middle Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lower outer J-clips are unfastened to show inner J-clips.
8. Release the backrest trim cover outer and inner J-clips.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 444
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 407: Locating J-Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the head restraint.
1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the
head restraint.
2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint.
Fig. 408: Locating Release Button On Head Restraint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Always install a new slave head restraint guide.
10. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 445
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad.
11. Separate the backrest trim cover-to-backrest foam pad hook-and-loop strips.
NOTE:
When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not
pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame or
damage to the wiring harness can occur.
NOTE:
When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed.
12. Through the rear of the seat, remove and discard the 2 side air bag module bolts. Then separate the side
air bag module from the seat backrest.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Do not pull the side air bag module electrical connector out by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button can occur.
NOTE:
Do not install the side air bag module electrical connector by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button can occur.
NOTE:
The side air bag module electrical connector locking button must be in the
released position when the connector is being installed or connector
damage may occur.
NOTE:
The side air bag module electrical connector is unique and cannot be
reversed when connected to the side air bag module. Match the electrical
connector key to the keyway in the side air bag module. Do not force the
electrical connector into the side air bag module or damage can occur.
13. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the side air
bag module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector and
the side air bag module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 446
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 409: Lifting Up & Releasing Locking Button On Side Air Bag Module Electrical Connector
Using A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
14. Remove the backrest trim cover in the following sequence.
1. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached
to the clips in the backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
2. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad.
3. If equipped, feed out the backrest heater mat and side air bag module wire harness from the
opening in the side of the backrest trim cover.
4. Remove the backrest trim cover.
15. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing at installation, refer to Seat Wire
Harness Routing - Front Passenger Cushion.
16. Install the front seat. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to Seat Front.
17. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 447
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
SEAT CUSHION - FRONT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
REMOVAL
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
2. Release all wire harness and connector retainers to the cushion frame.
Passenger seat with fold-flat backrest
3. Separate the fold-flat recliner cable holders from the bottom of the cushion frame.
Seats with climate control
4. Disconnect the cushion thermo-electric device (TED).
Passenger seat with manual track and heat
5. Disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector and separate the pin-type retainers from the
cushion frame.
Seats with heat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 448
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
6. Disconnect the 2 heated seat electrical connectors and separate the pin-type retainers from the cushion
frame.
All seats
7. Remove the 4 cushion frame-to-seat track bolts and the cushion assembly.
INSTALLATION
Passenger seat with fold-flat backrest
1. Make sure the fold-flat recliner cable is routed correctly between the power seat track cross tube and
cushion frame.
Fig. 410: Locating Fold Flat Recliner Cable
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All seats
2. Position the cushion assembly and install the 4 cushion frame-to-seat track bolts.
With power seat track, make sure the cushion frame-to-seat track rear brackets are aligned correctly
with the tabs seated in the cushion frame (if equipped).
Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
All passenger seats
3. For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing Front Passenger Cushion.
Passenger seat with fold-flat backrest
4. Attach the 2 fold-flat recliner cable holders to the bottom of the cushion frame.
Seats with heat
5. Route the heated seat wire harness, connect the 2 heated seat electrical connectors and attach the pin-type
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 449
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
retainers to the cushion frame.
Passenger seat with manual track and heat
6. Connect the heated seat module electrical connector and attach the pin-type retainers to the cushion
frame.
Seats with climate control
7. Connect the cushion TED.
All seats
8. Attach any remaining wire harness and connector retainers to the cushion frame.
9. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
10. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
SEAT CUSHION COVER - FRONT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
2. Remove the front seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 450
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
3. Release the cushion trim cover retainers from the cushion frame and remove the cushion trim cover and
cushion foam pad.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
4. Remove the cushion trim cover in the following sequence.
1. Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
2. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad.
For vehicles with climate controlled seats, on assembly make sure the climate controlled seat
manifold is in place before snapping the cushion trim cover wire retainer back into the
cushion foam pad.
3. Remove the cushion trim cover.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Install the front seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front.
For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing
- Front Passenger Cushion.
7. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
8. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
SEAT TRACK
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
REMOVAL
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 451
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
To install a new occupant classification system module (OCSM) or an occupant
classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt, refer to the appropriate
procedure in SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
All seats
Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Remove the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front.
Separate the seat wire harness main feed electrical connector(s) from the seat track brackets.
Disconnect the safety belt buckle switch electrical connector. Separate any retainers holding the wire
harness or electrical connector to the seat track.
5. Disconnect all the seat track motor electrical connectors and separate any retainers holding the wire
harness or electrical connectors to the seat track (if equipped).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Driver seat
6. Disconnect the seat track position sensor and separate any retainers holding the wire harness or electrical
connectors to the seat track.
7. Disconnect the driver seat module (DSM) electrical connectors and separate any retainers holding the
wire harness to the seat track (if equipped).
Passenger seat with manual seat track
NOTE:
Rear inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket shown in
illustration, others similar.
8. Separate the wire harness from the OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets, remove the 4 OCS weight
sensor bolt protection bracket screws and remove the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 452
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 411: Identifying OCS Weight Sensor Bolt Protection Brackets
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Passenger seat with power seat track
9. Remove the cushion side shield in the following sequence.
1. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle.
NOTE:
Release the tension on the manual lumbar cable before removing the
manual lumbar handle.
2. If equipped with manual lumbar, release the 2 clips on the back of the manual lumbar handle then
pull and remove the manual lumbar handle.
3. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s).
4. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer.
5. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer.
6. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
Remove the cushion side shield.
10. Separate the wire harness from the outboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket, remove the 2
outboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screws and remove the outboard OCS weight sensor
bolt protection bracket.
11. Separate the wire harness from the inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket, remove the
inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screw and the inboard OCS weight sensor bolt
protection bracket.
Passenger seat
12. Mark the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connectors so that they can be reconnected in their same
location at installation.
13. Disconnect the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connectors and detach any wire harness retainers to
the seat track.
14. Disconnect the OCSM and detach any wire harness retainers to the seat track.
Passenger seat with power seat track
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 453
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
15. Disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector and detach any wire harness retainers to the seat
track (if equipped).
16. Disconnect the dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM) electrical connectors and detach any wire
harness retainers to the seat track (if equipped).
All seats
17. Separate any retainers holding the seat wire harness or electrical connectors to the seat track.
18. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts and remove the seat track.
All passenger seats
19. To install a new OCSM or an OCS weight sensor bolt, refer to the appropriate procedure in
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
INSTALLATION
Power seat tracks
1. Position the cushion frame-to-seat track rear brackets to the power seat track rear cross tube.
Make sure the locator tabs of the cushion frame-to-seat track rear brackets are aligned correctly to
the cushion frame.
Passenger seat with fold-flat backrest
2. Make sure the fold-flat recliner cable is routed correctly between the power seat track cross tube and
cushion frame.
Fig. 412: Locating Fold Flat Recliner Cable
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All seat tracks
3. Install the 4 cushion frame-to-seat track bolts.
Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 454
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
All passenger seats
4. For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing Front Passenger Cushion.
5. Connect the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connectors, as marked during removal and attach any
retainers holding the wire harness to the seat track.
6. Connect the OCSM and attach any wire harness retainers to the seat track.
Passenger seat with power seat track
7. Position the inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket to the seat track, install the inboard OCS
weight sensor bolt protection bracket screw and attach the wire harness to the inboard OCS weight sensor
bolt protection bracket.
Tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
8. Position the outboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket to the seat track, install the 2 outboard
OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screws and attach the wire harness to the outboard OCS
weight sensor bolt protection bracket.
Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
9. Install the cushion side shield in the following sequence.
1. Position the side shield to the seat and connect the seat control switch electrical connector.
2. Slide the cushion side shield rearward to engage the cushion side shield retainer to the seat track
bracket.
3. Slide the cushion side shield down in the rear to engage the retainer.
4. Install the cushion side shield screw(s).
5. Install the manual lumbar handle (if equipped).
6. Position the clip on the manual recline handle and install the manual recline handle (if equipped).
10. Connect the heated seat module electrical connector and attach any retainers holding the wire harness to
the seat track (if equipped).
11. Connect the DCSM electrical connectors and attach any retainers holding the wire harness to the seat
track (if equipped).
Passenger seat with manual seat track
NOTE:
Rear inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket shown in
illustration, others similar.
12. Position each of the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets, install the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt
protection bracket screws and attach the wire harness to the OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets.
Tighten the front OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Tighten the rear OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 455
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 413: Identifying OCS Weight Sensor Bolt Protection Brackets
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Driver seat
13. Connect the DSM electrical connectors and attach any retainers holding the wire harness to the seat track
(if equipped).
14. Connect the seat track position sensor and attach any retainers holding the wire harness or electrical
connectors to the seat track.
All seats
15. Connect all the seat track motor electrical connectors and attach any retainers holding the wire harness or
electrical connectors to the seat track (if equipped).
16. Connect the safety belt buckle switch electrical connector. Attach any retainers holding the wire harness
or electrical connector to the seat track.
17. Attach the seat wire harness main feed in electrical connector(s) to the seat track brackets.
18. Install the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front.
19. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat with existing seat track
20. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
Passenger seat with new seat track, OCS module or OCS weight sensor bolt
21. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset. For additional information, refer to
the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Driver seat with memory
22. Set the memory seat soft stops. For additional information, carry out Setting the Soft Stops in the
Principles of Operation portion of Seats.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 456
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
SEAT RECLINER MOTOR
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. If equipped with power lumbar, release the tension on the power lumbar cable before removing the seat
from the vehicle.
2. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
3. Remove the cushion side shield in the following sequence.
NOTE:
Release the tension on the manual lumbar cable before removing the
manual lumbar handle.
1. If equipped with manual lumbar, release the 2 clips on the back of the manual lumbar handle then
pull and remove the manual lumbar handle.
2. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s).
3. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer.
4. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer.
5. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
Remove the cushion side shield.
4. Remove the recliner side shield in the following sequence.
1. Remove the recliner side shield screw and scrivet.
2. Pull out and remove the recliner side shield.
NOTE:
The seat backrest trim cover and foam pad have been removed to show
the backrest trim panel retainers.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 457
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
5. Remove the backrest trim panel in the following sequence.
1. Release the 2 pin-type retainers at the bottom of the backrest trim panel.
2. Slide the backrest trim panel down to release the upper clips.
3. Turn the backrest trim panel to release the middle clips and remove the backrest trim panel.
Fig. 414: Locating Pin-Type Retainers, Upper Clips & Middle Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lower outer J-clips are unfastened to show inner J-clips.
6. Release the backrest trim cover outer and inner J-clips attached to the backrest frame.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:25 AM
Page 458
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 415: Locating Inner J-Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Push the backrest foam pad away from the backrest frame.
8. Remove the recliner motor in the following sequence.
1. Remove the clip from the torque shaft on the recliner motor side.
2. Slide the torque shaft out of the recliner and recliner motor.
3. Remove the recliner motor bolt.
To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Disconnect and remove the recliner motor.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat only
11. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
LUMBAR ASSEMBLY - MANUAL
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 459
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
2. Remove the cushion side shield in the following sequence.
1. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle.
2. If equipped with manual height adjust, pull and remove the manual height adjust handle.
NOTE:
Release the tension on the manual lumbar cable before removing the
manual lumbar handle.
3. Release the 2 clips on the back of the manual lumbar handle then pull and remove the manual
lumbar handle.
4. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s).
5. If equipped with power seat track, slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer.
6. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer.
If equipped with manual seat tracks, remove the cushion side shield.
7. If equipped with power seat tracks, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
Remove the cushion side shield.
3. Remove the lumbar cable from the manual lumbar adjuster in the following sequence.
1. Remove the manual lumbar adjuster to bracket screw.
2. Separate the manual lumbar adjuster from the bracket.
3. Remove the lumbar cable from the manual lumbar adjuster.
NOTE:
The seat backrest trim cover and foam pad have been removed to show
the backrest trim panel retainers.
4. Remove the backrest trim panel in the following sequence.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 460
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
1. Release the 2 pin-type retainers at the bottom of the backrest trim panel.
2. Slide the backrest trim panel down to release the upper clips.
3. Turn the backrest trim panel to release the middle clips and remove the backrest trim panel.
Fig. 416: Locating Pin-Type Retainers, Upper Clips & Middle Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lower outer J-clips are unfastened to show inner J-clips.
5. Release the backrest trim cover outer and inner J-clips attached to the backrest frame.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 461
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 417: Locating J-Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Release the manual lumbar hooks from the backrest frame, route out the manual lumbar cable and remove
the manual lumbar assembly.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
8. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
9. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
LUMBAR ASSEMBLY - POWER
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 462
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
NOTE:
The seat backrest trim cover and foam pad have been removed to show
the backrest trim panel retainers.
2. Remove the backrest trim panel in the following sequence.
1. Release the 2 pin-type retainers at the bottom of the backrest trim panel.
2. Slide the backrest trim panel down to release the upper clips.
3. Turn the backrest trim panel to release the middle clips and remove the backrest trim panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 463
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 418: Locating Pin-Type Retainers, Upper Clips & Middle Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lower outer J-clips are unfastened to show inner J-clips.
3. Release the backrest trim cover outer and inner J-clips attached to the backrest frame.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 464
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 419: Locating Inner J-Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the head restraint.
1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the
head restraint.
2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint.
Fig. 420: Locating Release Button On Head Restraint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Always install a new slave head restraint guide.
5. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 465
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not
pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame or
damage to the wiring harness can occur.
NOTE:
When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed.
6. Through the rear of the seat, remove and discard the 2 side air bag module bolts. Then separate the side
air bag module from the seat backrest.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Do not pull the side air bag module electrical connector out by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button can occur.
NOTE:
Do not install the side air bag module electrical connector by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button can occur.
NOTE:
The side air bag module electrical connector locking button must be in the
released position when the connector is being installed or connector
damage may occur.
NOTE:
The side air bag module electrical connector is unique and cannot be
reversed when connected to the side air bag module. Match the electrical
connector key to the keyway in the side air bag module. Do not force the
electrical connector into the side air bag module or damage can occur.
7. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the side air
bag module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector and
the side air bag module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 466
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 421: Lifting Up & Releasing Locking Button On Side Air Bag Module Electrical Connector
Using A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Separate the backrest frame from the backrest foam pad.
Seats with climate control
9. Remove the screw, release the 3 clips, disconnect the electrical connector and remove the backrest
thermo-electric device (TED).
All seats
10. Remove the power lumbar assembly in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the power lumbar motor.
2. Release the power lumbar assembly clip at the top of the backrest frame.
3. Slide the lumbar wire frame up and out at the bottom of the backrest frame.
4. Remove the power lumbar assembly.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
12. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
13. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 467
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
SEAT BACKREST THERMO-ELECTRIC DEVICE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
The backrest thermo-electric device (TED) filter is detachable from the TED
assembly housing and can be replaced without TED removal.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
NOTE:
The seat backrest trim cover and foam pad have been removed to show
the backrest trim panel retainers.
2. Remove the backrest trim panel in the following sequence.
1. Release the 2 pin-type retainers at the bottom of the backrest trim panel.
2. Slide the backrest trim panel down to release the upper clips.
3. Turn the backrest trim panel to release the middle clips and remove the backrest trim panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 468
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 422: Locating Pin-Type Retainers, Upper Clips & Middle Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lower outer J-clips are unfastened to show inner J-clips.
3. Release the backrest trim cover outer and inner J-clips attached to the backrest frame.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 469
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 423: Locating Inner J-Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the head restraint.
1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the
head restraint.
2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint.
Fig. 424: Locating Release Button On Head Restraint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Always install a new slave head restraint guide.
5. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 470
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not
pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame or
damage to the wiring harness can occur.
NOTE:
When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed.
6. Through the rear of the seat remove and discard the 2 side air bag module bolts. Then separate the side air
bag module from the seat backrest.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Do not pull the side air bag module electrical connector out by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button can occur.
NOTE:
Do not install the side air bag module electrical connector by the locking
button. Damage to the locking button can occur.
NOTE:
The side air bag module electrical connector locking button must be in the
released position when the connector is being installed or connector
damage may occur.
NOTE:
The side air bag module electrical connector is unique and cannot be
reversed when connected to the side air bag module. Match the electrical
connector key to the keyway in the side air bag module. Do not force the
electrical connector into the side air bag module or damage can occur.
7. Using a small screwdriver as shown in illustration, lift up and release the locking button on the side air
bag module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector and
the side air bag module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 471
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 425: Lifting Up & Releasing Locking Button On Side Air Bag Module Electrical Connector
Using A Small Screwdriver
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Separate the backrest frame from the backrest foam pad.
Release the 3 clips, disconnect the electrical connector and remove the backrest TED.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
12. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
SEAT CUSHION THERMO-ELECTRIC DEVICE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 472
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
The cushion thermo-electric device (TED) filter is detachable from the TED
assembly housing from underneath the seat cushion.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
2. Remove the front seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front.
3. Release the cushion trim cover retainers from the cushion frame and remove the cushion trim cover and
cushion foam pad.
4. Remove the 3 cushion thermo-electric device (TED)-to-cushion frame screws.
5. Remove the cushion TED-to-climate control seat cushion adapter screw and remove the TED.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing
- Front Passenger Cushion.
7. Install the front seat cushion assembly. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front.
8. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
9. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
DUAL CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT MODULE (DCSM)
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 473
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
When installing a new dual climate controlled seat module (DCSM), it is
necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). For additional
information, refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Before removing the DCSM, carry out the appropriate steps in the PMI procedure. For additional
information, refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
2. Remove the front passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
3. Remove the DCSM.
Disconnect the 3 electrical connectors.
Remove the 2 screws.
Remove the DCSM.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Install the front passenger seat. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer
to Seat - Front.
6. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
7. Install the DCSM software data. Carry out the appropriate steps in the PMI procedure. For additional
information, refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
HEATED SEAT MODULE - FRONT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 474
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
scan tool
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Position the front passenger seat to access the heated seat module.
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
3. From under the front of the front passenger seat, remove the heated seat module.
Vehicles with power seat track, remove the 2 screws and lower the bracket (if equipped).
Disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector.
Remove the screw and heated seat module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
6. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH - FRONT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 475
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. If possible, position the seat all the way up and center the seat in the front door opening.
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
3. Separate the safety belt retractor belt anchor from the seat in the following sequence.
1. Carefully pull up and out to remove the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut cover from the cushion
side shield.
2. Remove the safety belt anchor nut.
To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Separate the safety belt retractor belt anchor from the seat.
4. Remove the seat control switch in the following sequence.
1. Pull out and remove the seat control switch knob(s).
2. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle.
3. If equipped with manual lumbar, pull and remove the manual lumbar handle.
4. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s).
5. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer.
6. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer.
7. Release the cushion side shield clips and separate the seat control switch.
8. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the
General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Passenger seat
7. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
MEMORY SET SWITCH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 476
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 426: Memory SET Switch, Edge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
14776
-
Description
Electrical connector (part of 14631)
Memory SET switch
Driver door trim panel
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 477
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 427: Memory SET Switch, MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
14776
-
Description
Electrical connector (part of 14631)
Memory SET switch
Driver door trim panel
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. Remove the driver door trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
Edge vehicles
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the 4 tabs and remove the memory SET switch through the
front of the door trim panel.
MKX vehicles
3. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the 4 tabs and remove the memory SET switch through the
back of the door trim panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 478
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
All vehicles
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
SEAT - REAR, 40 PERCENT
Fig. 428: Second Row 40 Percent Seat
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W712026
2
3
63386
63386
Description
40 percent seat kneeling assembly-tofloor bolt
Outboard bolt cover
Inboard nut cover (MKX only)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 479
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
4
N801995
5
-
6
N801995
7
-
8
-
40 percent seat kneeling assembly-tofloor nut
Rubber stud cap (Edge only)
40 percent seat backrest assembly anchor
bracket-to-floor nuts (3 required)
Electrical connectors (if equipped) (part
of 14A005)
40 percent seat
REMOVAL
WARNING: Keep hands clear of all moving seat mechanisms when releasing the
recliner lever. The recliners are spring loaded and release with high force.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Follow all seat recliner synchronization steps exactly as indicated. Always
verify correct seat recliner alignment. Any misalignment may adversely
affect seat back and seat retractor performance in a crash. Failure to
follow these steps may result in serious personal injury to the vehicle
occupant(s).
WARNING: Always keep the seat back in the upright position while installing the seat
and when tightening all retainers to specification. Always verify correct
seat recliner alignment. Correct seat recliner alignment is critical for
correct seat and safety belt retractor operation in a crash. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury to the
vehicle occupant(s).
WARNING: Synchronize the seat recliners following the steps in the seat removal and
installation procedure any time the seat is removed for service. The
following actions may result in the loss of recliner synchronization that
cannot be corrected and may cause the seat back to fail in a crash:
Dropping the seat
Sitting on the seat when removed
Applying any load to the seat when removed
Removing or loosening any recliner fasteners except for the safety
belt buckle bolt
Install a new seat back frame assembly if the seat recliners cannot be
synchronized. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s) in a crash.
1. Position the 40 percent seat backrest in the upright position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 480
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the 60 percent and 40 percent seat inboard nut covers (if equipped).
Remove the 40 percent seat kneeling assembly rubber stud cap (if equipped).
Remove the 40 percent seat outboard bolt cover.
Remove the 40 percent seat kneeling assembly-to-floor nut and bolt.
Pivot the 40 percent seat cushion upward.
Disconnect the heated seat (if equipped) and the power-fold actuator (if equipped) electrical connectors.
Remove the 40 percent seat backrest assembly anchor bracket-to-floor nuts.
Remove the 40 percent seat.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Keep hands clear of all moving seat mechanisms when releasing the
recliner lever. The recliners are spring loaded and release with high force.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Follow all seat recliner synchronization steps exactly as indicated. Always
verify correct seat recliner alignment. Any misalignment may adversely
affect seat back and seat retractor performance in a crash. Failure to
follow these steps may result in serious personal injury to the vehicle
occupant(s).
WARNING: Always keep the seat back in the upright position while installing the seat
and when tightening all retainers to specification. Always verify correct
seat recliner alignment. Correct seat recliner alignment is critical for
correct seat and safety belt retractor operation in a crash. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury to the
vehicle occupant(s).
WARNING: Synchronize the seat recliners following the steps in the seat removal and
installation procedure any time the seat is removed for service. The
following actions may result in the loss of recliner synchronization that
cannot be corrected and may cause the seat back to fail in a crash:
Dropping the seat
Sitting on the seat when removed
Applying any load to the seat when removed
Removing or loosening any recliner fasteners except for the safety
belt buckle bolt
Install a new seat back frame assembly if the seat recliners cannot be
synchronized. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s) in a crash.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 481
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Check for recliner synchronization
1. The recliner arm on the outboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
Fig. 429: Recliner Arm On Outboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. The recliner arm on the inboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 482
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 430: Recliner Arm On Inboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Make sure that the outboard and inboard recliners are aligned to the stamped index marks. This
synchronizes the outboard and inboard recliners.
If the outboard and inboard recliner arms align to the stamped index mark on the recliners, the 40
percent seat can be installed. If the recliners are moved from this position or the recliner handle is
actuated before the seat is secured in the vehicle, the recliners must be synchronized again.
If the outboard and inboard recliner arms do not align to the stamped index mark on the recliners,
carry out the recliner synchronization steps.
Recliner synchronization
WARNING: Follow all seat recliner synchronization steps exactly as indicated.
Always verify correct seat recliner alignment. Any misalignment may
adversely affect seat back and seat retractor performance in a crash.
Failure to follow these steps may result in serious personal injury to
the vehicle occupant(s).
WARNING: Keep hands clear of all moving seat mechanisms when releasing the
recliner lever. The recliners are spring loaded and release with high
force. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
4. Using the recliner lever, release the recliners allowing the backrest assembly anchor brackets to pivot
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 483
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
upward.
Fig. 431: Releasing Recliners Allowing Backrest Assembly Anchor Brackets To Pivot Upward
Using Recliner Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The outboard recliner (side with the recliner handle) must be pushed
downward and latched in place first for correct synchronization to occur.
5. Synchronize the outboard and inboard recliners.
1. Push downward on the outboard (side with the recliner handle) backrest assembly anchor bracket
until an audible click is heard and the outboard recliner is latched in place.
NOTE:
It is possible that the inboard recliner may have latched in place
when the outboard recliner was latched in place. Therefore, no
audible click will be heard on the inboard side and the recliner will
already be latched in place.
2. Push downward on the inboard backrest assembly anchor bracket until an audible click is heard and
the inboard recliner is latched in place.
Fig. 432: Pushing Downward On Inboard Backrest Assembly Anchor Bracket Until An Audible
Click Is Heard
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. The recliner arm on the outboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 484
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
illustration.
If the outboard recliner arm does not align to the stamped index mark on the recliner, repeat the
recliner synchronization steps.
Fig. 433: Recliner Arm On Outboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. The recliner arm on the inboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
If the inboard recliner arm does not align to the stamped index mark on the recliner, repeat the
recliner synchronization steps.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 485
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 434: Recliner Arm On Inboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. If the outboard and inboard recliner arms align to the stamped index mark on the recliners, proceed to the
seat installation steps. If the outboard and inboard recliner arms do not align to the stamped index mark
on the recliners or the recliner handle is actuated, repeat the recliner synchronization steps.
Seat installation
WARNING: Always keep the seat back in the upright position while installing the
seat and when tightening all retainers to specification. Always verify
correct seat recliner alignment. Correct seat recliner alignment is
critical for correct seat and safety belt retractor operation in a crash.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury to the vehicle occupant(s).
9. Install the 40 percent seat in the vehicle with the seat backrest in the upright position and the recliners
aligned to the stamped index mark.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 486
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 435: Installing 40 Percent Seat In Vehicle With Seat Backrest In Upright Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Install the seat fasteners and tighten in the sequence shown in illustration.
Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
The outboard and inboard recliner arms must be aligned to the stamped index mark on the
recliners and remain there until the seat-to-floor fasteners are tightened to specification in the
sequence shown in illustration. If the outboard and inboard recliner arms do not align to the
stamped index mark on the recliners or the recliner handle is actuated before the seat-to-floor
fasteners are tightened to specification in the sequence shown in illustration, remove the seat
and carry out the recliner synchronization steps.
Fig. 436: Identifying Seat-To-Floor Fasteners Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Connect the heated seat (if equipped) and the power-fold actuator (if equipped) electrical connector(s).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 487
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
12.
13.
14.
15.
Install the 40 percent seat outboard bolt cover.
Install the 40 percent seat kneeling assembly rubber stud cap (if equipped).
Install the 60 percent and 40 percent seat inboard nut covers (if equipped).
The recliner arm on the outboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
Fig. 437: Recliner Arm On Outboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. The recliner arm on the inboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 488
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 438: Recliner Arm On Inboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Make sure that the 40 percent seat outboard and inboard recliners are aligned to the stamped index marks
and still synchronized. If the outboard and inboard recliner arms do not align to the stamped index mark
on the recliners or the recliner handle is actuated, remove the 40 percent seat and carry out the recliner
synchronization steps.
18. Make sure the safety belt buckles are accessible to the occupants after installation.
SEAT - REAR, 60 PERCENT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:26 AM
Page 489
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 439: Second Row 60 Percent Seat
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
N801995
2
3
63386
4
W712026
5
63386
6
N801995
7
-
Description
60 percent seat kneeling assembly-tofloor nut
Rubber stud cap (Edge only)
Inboard nut cover (MKX only)
60 percent seat kneeling assembly-tofloor bolt
Outboard bolt cover
60 percent seat backrest assembly anchor
bracket-to-floor nut (5 required)
60 percent seat rear tie-down-to-floor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 490
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
8
-
9
-
nuts (2 required)
Electrical connector (if equipped) (part of
14A005)
60 percent seat
REMOVAL
WARNING: Keep hands clear of all moving seat mechanisms when releasing the
recliner lever. The recliners are spring loaded and release with high force.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Follow all seat recliner synchronization steps exactly as indicated. Always
verify correct seat recliner alignment. Any misalignment may adversely
affect seat back and seat retractor performance in a crash. Failure to
follow these steps may result in serious personal injury to the vehicle
occupant(s).
WARNING: Always keep the seat back in the upright position while installing the seat
and when tightening all retainers to specification. Always verify correct
seat recliner alignment. Correct seat recliner alignment is critical for
correct seat and safety belt retractor operation in a crash. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury to the
vehicle occupant(s).
WARNING: Synchronize the seat recliners following the steps in the seat removal and
installation procedure any time the seat is removed for service. The
following actions may result in the loss of recliner synchronization that
cannot be corrected and may cause the seat back to fail in a crash:
Dropping the seat
Sitting on the seat when removed
Applying any load to the seat when removed
Removing or loosening any recliner fasteners except for the safety
belt buckle bolt
Install a new seat back frame assembly if the seat recliners cannot be
synchronized. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s) in a crash.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
NOTE:
When removing the 60 percent seat, the 40 percent seat must be removed first
to gain access to the 60 percent seat backrest assembly anchor bracket-to-floor
nuts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 491
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Remove the 40 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 40 Percent.
Position the 60 percent seat backrest in the upright position.
Remove the outboard bolt cover.
Remove the kneeling assembly rubber stud cap (if equipped).
Remove the kneeling assembly-to-floor nut and bolt.
Pivot the 60 percent seat cushion upward.
Disconnect the heated seat (if equipped) and the power-fold actuator (if equipped) electrical connector.
Remove the 5 backrest assembly anchor bracket-to-floor nuts.
Lift out and remove the load floor from the cargo area.
Through the rear hatch, remove the 2 rear tie-down-to-floor nuts.
Remove the 60 percent seat.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Keep hands clear of all moving seat mechanisms when releasing the
recliner lever. The recliners are spring loaded and release with high force.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Follow all seat recliner synchronization steps exactly as indicated. Always
verify correct seat recliner alignment. Any misalignment may adversely
affect seat back and seat retractor performance in a crash. Failure to
follow these steps may result in serious personal injury to the vehicle
occupant(s).
WARNING: Always keep the seat back in the upright position while installing the seat
and when tightening all retainers to specification. Always verify correct
seat recliner alignment. Correct seat recliner alignment is critical for
correct seat and safety belt retractor operation in a crash. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury to the
vehicle occupant(s).
WARNING: Synchronize the seat recliners following the steps in the seat removal and
installation procedure any time the seat is removed for service. The
following actions may result in the loss of recliner synchronization that
cannot be corrected and may cause the seat back to fail in a crash:
Dropping the seat
Sitting on the seat when removed
Applying any load to the seat when removed
Removing or loosening any recliner fasteners except for the safety
belt buckle bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 492
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Install a new seat back frame assembly if the seat recliners cannot be
synchronized. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s) in a crash.
Check for recliner synchronization
1. The recliner arm on the outboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
Fig. 440: Recliner Arm On Outboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. The recliner arm on the inboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 493
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 441: Recliner Arm On Inboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Make sure that the outboard and inboard recliners are aligned to the stamped index marks. This
synchronizes the outboard and inboard recliners.
If the outboard and inboard recliner arms align to the stamped index mark on the recliners, the 60
percent seat can be installed. If the recliners are moved from this position or the recliner handle is
actuated before the seat is secured in the vehicle, the recliners must be synchronized again.
If the outboard and inboard recliner arms do not align to the stamped index mark on the recliners,
carry out the recliner synchronization steps.
Recliner synchronization
WARNING: Follow all seat recliner synchronization steps exactly as indicated.
Always verify correct seat recliner alignment. Any misalignment may
adversely affect seat back and seat retractor performance in a crash.
Failure to follow these steps may result in serious personal injury to
the vehicle occupant(s).
WARNING: Keep hands clear of all moving seat mechanisms when releasing the
recliner lever. The recliners are spring loaded and release with high
force. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
4. Using the recliner lever, release the recliners allowing the backrest assembly anchor brackets to pivot
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 494
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
upward.
Fig. 442: Releasing Recliners Allowing Backrest Assembly Anchor Brackets To Pivot Upward
Using Recliner Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The outboard recliner (side with the recliner handle) must be pushed
downward and latched in place first for correct synchronization to occur.
5. Synchronize the inboard and outboard recliners.
1. Push downward on the outboard (side with the recliner handle) backrest assembly anchor bracket
until an audible click is heard and the outboard recliner is latched in place.
2. Push downward on the inboard backrest assembly anchor bracket until an audible click is heard and
the inboard recliner is latched in place.
Fig. 443: Pushing Downward On Inboard Backrest Assembly Anchor Bracket Until An Audible
Click Is Heard
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. The recliner arm on the outboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
If the outboard recliner arm does not align to the stamped index mark on the recliner, repeat the
recliner synchronization steps.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 495
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 444: Recliner Arm On Outboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. The recliner arm on the inboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
If the inboard recliner arm does not align to the stamped index mark on the recliner, repeat the
recliner synchronization steps.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 496
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 445: Recliner Arm On Inboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. If the outboard and inboard recliner arms align to the stamped index mark on the recliners, proceed to the
seat installation steps. If the outboard and inboard recliner arms do not align to the stamped index mark
on the recliners or the recliner handle is actuated, repeat the recliner synchronization steps.
Seat installation
WARNING: Always keep the seat back in the upright position while installing the
seat and when tightening all retainers to specification. Always verify
correct seat recliner alignment. Correct seat recliner alignment is
critical for correct seat and safety belt retractor operation in a crash.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury to the vehicle occupant(s).
9. Install the 60 percent seat in the vehicle with the seat backrest in the upright position and the recliners
aligned to the stamped index mark.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 497
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 446: Installing 60 Percent Seat In Vehicle With Seat Backrest In Upright Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Position the 60 percent seat in the vehicle. Install and tighten seat fasteners 1 through 7 in the sequence
shown in illustration.
Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
The outboard and inboard recliner arms must be aligned to the stamped index mark on the
recliners and remain there until the seat-to-floor fasteners are tightened to specification in the
sequence shown in illustration. If the outboard and inboard recliner arms do not align to the
stamped index mark on the recliners or the recliner handle is actuated before the seat-to-floor
fasteners are tightened to specification in the sequence shown in illustration, remove the seat
and carry out the recliner synchronization steps.
Fig. 447: Fastener Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 498
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
11. Through the back hatch, install and tighten seat fasteners 8 and 9 in the sequence shown in illustration.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
The outboard and inboard recliner arms must be aligned to the stamped index mark on the
recliners and remain there until the seat-to-floor fasteners are tightened to specification in the
sequence shown in illustration. If the outboard and inboard recliner arms do not align to the
stamped index mark on the recliners or the recliner handle is actuated before the seat-to-floor
fasteners are tightened to specification in the sequence shown in illustration, remove the seat
and carry out the recliner synchronization steps.
Fig. 448: Fastener Tightening Sequence
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Connect the heated seat (if equipped) and the power-fold actuator (if equipped) electrical connector(s).
Install the load floor to the cargo area.
Install the 60 percent seat outboard bolt cover.
Install the kneeling assembly rubber stud cap (if equipped).
The recliner arm on the outboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 499
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 449: Recliner Arm On Outboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. The recliner arm on the inboard recliner must be aligned to the stamped index mark as shown in
illustration.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 500
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 450: Recliner Arm On Inboard Recliner Must Be Aligned To Stamped Index Mark
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Make sure that the 60 percent seat outboard and inboard recliners are aligned to the stamped index marks
and still synchronized. If the outboard and inboard recliner arms do not align to the stamped index mark
on the recliners or the recliner handle is actuated, remove the 60 percent seat and carry out the recliner
synchronization steps.
19. Install the 40 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 40 Percent.
20. Make sure the safety belt buckles are accessible to the occupants after installation.
SEAT - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Fig. 451: Exploded View Of Rear Seat Cushion, 40 Percent With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
63804
2
-
3
63840
4
666L76
Description
Cushion trim cover
Cushion heater mat (if equipped) (part of
63840)
Cushion foam pad
Outboard cushion frame pivot bracket
cover
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 501
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
5
6
W712172
7
66L75
8
63160
9
N605892
10
605B10
Wave washers
Cushion frame pivot bracket bolts
Inboard cushion frame pivot bracket
cover
Cushion frame
Kneeling assembly-to-cushion frame
bolts
Kneeling assembly
Fig. 452: Rear Seat Backrest, 40 Percent
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
66600
Description
Backrest trim cover
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 502
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
2
-
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
66800
61348
61348
601L60
62418
61348
61349
14
-
15
16
60044
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
610A16
610A16
611A08
60508
666L76
NOTE:
Backrest heater mat (if equipped) (part of
66800)
Backrest foam pad
Screws (4 required)
Outboard upper side shield
Inboard upper side shield
Recliner cable
Recliner handle cover
Outboard lower side shield
Screws (4 required)
Wave washers (2 required)
Pin-type retainer
Inboard lower side shield
Anchor brackets (part of backrest
assembly 613A38)
Safety belt buckle
Safety belt buckle bolt (part of 60044)
Outboard recliner (part of backrest
assembly 613A38)
Inboard recliner (part of backrest
assembly 613A38)
Backrest frame (part of backrest
assembly 613A38)
Head restraint guide (slave)
Safety belt comfort guide
Head restraint guide (master)
Head restraint
Pin-type retainer
Back panel
Child safety seat tether anchor bezel
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 503
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 453: Exploded View Of Rear Seat Cushion, 60 Percent With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
63805
2
-
3
63841
4
666L76
5
-
6
666L75
7
8
W712172
63161
9
N605892
10
605B11
Description
Cushion trim cover
Cushion heater mat (if equipped) (part of
63841)
Cushion foam pad
Inboard cushion frame pivot bracket
cover
Wave washers
Outboard cushion frame pivot bracket
cover
Cushion frame pivot bracket bolts
Cushion frame
Kneeling assembly-to-cushion frame
bolts
Kneeling assembly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 504
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 454: Rear Seat Backrest, 60 Percent
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
666L76
60509
4
237W10
5
6
7
8
9
611A70
67336
67336
Description
Child safety seat tether anchor bezels
Pin-type retainer
Back panel
Safety belt bezel screw cover (part of
611A70)
Safety belt bezel screw
Safety belt bezel
RH armrest detent
Armrest detent-to-backrest frame screws
LH armrest detent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 505
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
10
11
12
13
14
67112
611A08
610A16
610A16
15
-
16
66801
17
-
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
61046
66601
61349
601L60
W712241
61349
61349
62419
61349
61349
611B64
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
60044
60328
19K315
613A68
Armrest
Head restraint
Safety belt comfort guide
Head restraint guide (master)
Head restraint guide (slave)
Backrest frame (part of backrest
assembly 613A39)
Backrest foam pad
Backrest heater mat (if equipped) (part of
66801)
Armrest filler panel
Screw
Backrest trim cover
Pin-type retainer
Pin-type retainers
Pin-type retainer
Armrest bracket trim cover
Recliner cable
Armrest bolt
Screws
Inboard lower side shield
Inboard upper side shield
Recliner handle cover
Outboard lower side shield
Outboard upper side shield
Safety belt retractor
Pin-type retainer
Inboard recliner (part of backrest
assembly 613A39)
Outboard recliner (part of backrest
assembly 613A39)
Anchor brackets (part of backrest
assembly 613A39)
Safety belt buckle bolt (part of 60044)
Safety belt buckle
Heated seat module (if equipped)
Heated seat module bracket (if equipped)
Wire harness (if equipped)
Screws (2 required) (if equipped)
Power fold motor bracket (if equipped)
Power fold motor (if equipped)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 506
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
46
-
47
-
Safety belt retractor belt and buckle
anchor bolt (part of 611B64)
Safety belt retractor nut
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure.
SEAT BACKREST COVER - REAR, 40 PERCENT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
1. Remove the 40 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 40 Percent.
2. Remove the 40 percent cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Rear, 40 Percent.
3. Remove the head restraint.
1. Push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint.
2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint.
3. Remove the safety belt comfort guide.
Fig. 455: Locating Safety Belt Comfort Guide & Release Button On Head Restraint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Always install a new slave head restraint guide.
4. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides.
5. Release the tabs and remove the child safety seat tether anchor bezel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 507
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 456: Locating Tabs On Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor Bezel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Release the backrest trim cover lower J-clip.
Pull the heated seat electrical connector through the backrest trim cover opening (if equipped).
7. At the rear inboard side of the backrest, access the zipper tucked up behind the back panel and unzip the
zipper.
8. Remove the pin-type retainer holding the backrest trim cover around the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) and attaching to the lower rear of the backrest frame.
9. Remove the pin-type retainer from inside the safety belt comfort guide pocket.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad.
10. Release the hook-and-loop strips and invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in
the backrest trim cover attached to the clips in the backrest foam pad.
11. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad and remove the backrest
trim cover.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
SEAT BACKREST COVER - REAR, 60 PERCENT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
1. Remove the 60 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 60 Percent.
2. Remove the 60 percent cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Rear, 60 Percent.
NOTE:
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
3. Remove the bolt and separate the safety belt retractor belt and buckle anchor from the riser.
To install, tighten to 65 Nm (48 lb-ft).
4. Remove the head restraint.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 508
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
1. Push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint.
2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint.
3. Remove the safety belt comfort guide.
Fig. 457: Locating Safety Belt Comfort Guide & Release Button On Head Restraint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Always install a new slave head restraint guide.
5. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides.
6. Remove the armrest bracket trim cover pin-type retainer and the armrest bracket trim cover.
Cycle the armrest up and down to aid trim cover removal.
7. Remove the armrest bolt.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
8. Remove the armrest.
With the armrest upright, tip the outboard side of the armrest to disengage the stop from the
backrest frame channel.
9. Remove the pin-type retainer in the armrest pocket, attaching the backrest trim cover to the backrest.
10. Release the tabs and remove the child safety seat tether anchor bezel.
Repeat for the other child safety seat tether anchor bezel.
Fig. 458: Locating Tabs On Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor Bezel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 509
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
11. Remove the safety belt bezel screw cover, the screw and the safety belt bezel.
During assembly, make sure the safety belt bezel clips in place.
12. Release the backrest trim cover lower J-clip.
Pull the heated seat electrical connector through the backrest trim cover opening (if equipped).
13. At the rear inboard side of the backrest, access the zipper tucked up behind the back panel and unzip the
zipper.
14. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers holding the backrest trim cover around each of the 2 lower anchors and
tethers for children (LATCH) and attaching to the lower rear of the backrest frame.
15. Remove the pin-type retainer from inside the safety belt comfort guide pocket.
16. Pull back the backrest trim cover over the armrest bracket and backrest frame latching wire for the
armrest.
17. Remove the screw at the top and the pin-type retainer at the bottom of the armrest filler panel.
18. Lift the armrest filler panel over the armrest pivot bracket and slide out to the outboard side of the seat.
During assembly, make sure the armrest filler panel clips in place around the backrest trim cover Jclip, at the inboard side.
19. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip from the backrest frame in the armrest pocket.
20. From the back, invert the backrest trim cover up and over the backrest frame and remove the backrest
trim cover and backrest foam pad.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad.
21. Remove the backrest trim cover from the backrest foam pad in the following sequence.
1. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached
to the clips in the backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
2. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad.
3. Remove the backrest trim cover.
Feed the safety belt retractor belt and safety belt buckle through the backrest trim cover and
backrest foam pad.
22. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to safety
belt system in the Diagnosis and Testing portion of SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article.
Verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding.
Make sure the LATCH is accessible to the occupant.
SEAT CUSHION - REAR, 40 PERCENT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
All seats
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 510
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
1. Remove the 40 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 40 Percent.
Seats equipped with heat
2. Disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector. Separate the 2 heated seat electrical connectors
from the backrest assembly.
All seats
3. Release the tab and remove the outboard cushion frame pivot bracket cover.
4. Release the tab and remove the inboard cushion frame pivot bracket cover.
5. Remove the 2 cushion frame pivot bracket bolts and the cushion assembly.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
SEAT CUSHION COVER - REAR, 40 PERCENT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
1. Remove the 40 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 40 Percent.
2. Release all the cushion trim cover-to-cushion frame retainers and remove the cushion foam pad and
cushion trim cover.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad.
3. Remove the cushion trim cover in the following sequence.
1. Feed the heater mat wire harness and electrical connectors back through the cushion trim cover (if
equipped).
2. Release the hook-and-loop strips.
3. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad and remove
the cushion trim cover.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
SEAT CUSHION - REAR, 60 PERCENT
All seats
1. Remove the 60 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 60 Percent.
Seats equipped with heat
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 511
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
2. Disconnect the 2 heater mat electrical connectors. Separate the 2 heater mat electrical connectors from the
backrest assembly.
All seats
3. Release the tab and remove the outboard cushion frame pivot bracket cover.
4. Release the tab and remove the inboard cushion frame pivot bracket cover.
5. Remove the 2 cushion frame pivot bracket bolts and the cushion assembly.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
SEAT CUSHION COVER - REAR, 60 PERCENT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
1. Remove the 60 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 60 Percent.
2. Release all the cushion trim cover-to-cushion frame retainers and remove the cushion foam pad and
cushion trim cover.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad.
3. Remove the cushion trim cover in the following sequence.
1. Feed the heater mat wire harness and electrical connectors back through the cushion trim cover (if
equipped).
2. Release the hook-and-loop strips.
3. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad and remove
the cushion trim cover.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
POWER-FOLD SEAT MOTOR - REAR SEAT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the affected 40 percent or 60 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 40
Percent or Seat - Rear, 60 Percent.
2. Remove 2 screws and the outboard lower side shield.
3. Remove the power fold motor in the following sequence.
1. Remove the 2 screws from the power fold motor.
2. Slide the cable housing out of the recliner.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 512
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
3. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable.
4. Remove the power fold motor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
HEATED SEAT SWITCH - REAR SEAT
NOTE:
RH switch shown in illustration, LH similar.
Fig. 459: Exploded View Of Rear Seat Heated Seat Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
-
Description
Heated seat switch
Electrical connector (part of 14632)
Rear door handle bezel
Rear door handle bezel screw
Rear door handle bezel screw cover
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the door handle bezel on the side of the affected switch in the following sequence.
1. Remove the rear door handle bezel screw cover.
2. Remove the rear door handle bezel screw.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 513
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
3. Separate the rear door handle bezel from the door trim panel.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the clips and remove the heated seat switch from the back
side of the rear door handle bezel.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH - REAR SEAT
Fig. 460: Seat Control Switch Without Power Liftgate
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
-
Description
Electrical connector (part of 14A005)
Seat control switch
Quarter trim panel
Fig. 461: Seat Control Switch With Power Liftgate
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
-
Description
Electrical connector (part of 14A005)
Seat control switch
Power liftgate strut cover
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 514
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Vehicles without power liftgate
1. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
Vehicles with power liftgate
2. Pull out and remove the power liftgate strut cover in the quarter trim panel.
All vehicles
3. Remove the seat control switch.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Squeeze the tab at the top and bottom of the seat control switch and remove from the quarter trim
panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
HEATED SEAT MODULE - REAR SEAT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the second row 60 percent seat front riser-to-floor nut and bolt.
To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
2. Pivot the front of the 60 percent seat cushion upward.
3. Remove the screw, disconnect the electrical connector and remove the heated seat module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
SEAT BACKREST - FRONT, WITHOUT FOLD FLAT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
NOTE:
Driver backrest shown in illustration, passenger similar.
NOTE:
Manual recliners without fold-flat backrest are serviced with the backrest frame.
Power recliners without fold-flat backrest are serviced separately.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 515
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Fig. 462: Front Seat Backrest, Manual and Power Recline, Without Fold Flat
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
18D507
3
4
5
6
64811
611A08
610A16
610A16
Description
Backrest heater mat (part of 64811) (if
equipped)
Backrest climate control seat manifold (if
equipped)
Backrest foam pad
Head restraint
Head restraint guide, slave
Head restraint guide, master
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 516
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
7
8
9
10
11
64417
65500
-
12
-
13
14
65500
65500
15
W712240
16
14547
17
-
18
W712240
19
62648
20
61019
21
22
23
24
25
611D11
W506021
-
26
18D507
27
61018
28
625A84
29
30
31
32
61726
14K155
62648
33
625A84
Anti-squeak bag
Backrest trim cover
Backrest trim panel
Manual lumbar assembly (if equipped)
Upper support spring
Manual lumbar cable (part of 65500) (if
equipped)
Static lumbar
Power lumbar assembly (if equipped)
Power/manual recliner-to-seat track bolts
(4 required)
Recliner motor (if equipped)
Recliner torque shaft clips (2 required) (if
equipped)
Power recliner-to-backrest frame bolts (4
required) (if equipped)
Inboard power recliner (if equipped)
Backrest frame (with power recline) (if
equipped)
Side air bag module
Side air bag module bolts
RH attachment panel
Screw (4 required)
LH attachment panel
Backrest thermo-electric device (TED)
(if equipped)
Backrest frame (with manual recline) (if
equipped)
Power recline torque shaft cover (if
equipped)
Recliner torque shaft
Recliner motor bolt (if equipped)
Side air bag wire harness
Outboard power recliner (if equipped)
Manual recline torque shaft cover (if
equipped)
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 517
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its
mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat
side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury
or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
2. Remove the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front.
NOTE:
The seat backrest trim cover and foam pad have been removed to show
the backrest trim panel retainers.
3. Remove the backrest trim panel in the following sequence.
1. Release the 2 pin-type retainers at the bottom of the backrest trim panel.
2. Slide the backrest trim panel down to release the upper clips.
3. Turn the backrest trim panel to release the middle clips and remove the backrest trim panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:27 AM
Page 518
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 463: Locating Pin-Type Retainers, Upper Clips & Middle Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lower outer J-clips are unfastened to show inner J-clips.
4. Release the backrest trim cover outer and inner J-clips.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 519
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 464: Locating Inner J-Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the head restraint.
1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the
head restraint.
2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint.
Fig. 465: Locating Release Button On Head Restraint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Always install a new slave head restraint guide.
6. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 520
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not
pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame or
damage to the wiring harness can occur.
NOTE:
When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed.
7. Remove the side air bag module.
1. Remove the 2 side air bag module bolts.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
2. Remove the side air bag module with wire harness.
Detach any side air bag module wire harness retainers.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come attached on a new foam pad.
8. Remove the backrest trim cover from the backrest foam pad in the following sequence.
1. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached
to the clips in the backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
2. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad.
If equipped with climate controlled seats, on assembly make sure the climate control seat
manifold is in place before snapping the backrest trim cover wire back into the backrest foam
pad clips.
3. Remove the backrest trim cover.
9. Separate the backrest frame from the backrest foam pad.
If equipped with climate controlled seats, on assembly make sure there is no air gap between the
backrest thermo-electric device (TED) and the backrest foam pad.
Seats with climate control
10. Remove the backrest climate control seat manifold from the backrest foam pad.
11. Separate the wire harness pin-type retainer from the backrest frame, release the 3 clips and remove the
TED.
Seats with power lumbar
12. Remove the power lumbar assembly in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the power lumbar motor.
2. Release the power lumbar assembly clip at the top of the backrest frame.
3. Slide the lumbar wire frame up and out at the bottom of the backrest frame.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 521
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
4. Remove the power lumbar assembly.
Seats with manual lumbar
13. Release the manual lumbar hooks from the backrest frame, route out the manual lumbar cable and remove
the manual lumbar assembly.
Seats with power recline
NOTE:
The recliners are synchronized. Avoid rotating the recliner shaft until fully
installed to keep the recliners synchronized.
14. Remove the power recline motor in the following sequence.
1. Remove the clip from the torque shaft on the power recline motor side.
2. Slide out and remove the torque shaft.
3. Remove the power recline motor bolt.
To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Disconnect and remove the power recline motor.
NOTE:
Manual recliners are only serviced with the backrest frame. Do not remove
the bolts retaining the manual recliners to the backrest frame.
NOTE:
To install a new power recliner, using the torque shaft, rotate both
recliners to their front or rear stop.
15. Remove the 4 bolts and the inboard and outboard power recliners.
To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
All seats
16. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
17. Install the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front.
18. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
19. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
SEAT BACKREST - FRONT, WITH FOLD FLAT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 522
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
NOTE:
Optional backrest on passenger seat only.
NOTE:
Manual recliners with fold-flat backrest are serviced separately.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 523
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 466: Front Seat Backrest, Manual Recline With Fold Flat
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Part Number
14K155
W506021
611D10
610A16
611A08
610A16
60508
64810/64416
Description
Side air bag wire harness
Side air bag module bolts
Side air bag module
Fold-flat backrest frame
Anti-squeak bag
Head restraint guide, slave
Head restraint
Head restraint guide, master
Backrest trim panel
Backrest foam pad/backrest trim cover
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 524
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
11
-
12
62186
13
W712059
14
W500720
15
W712240
16
-
17
62294
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
62186
62187
W714053
62187
62294
65500
Backrest heater mat (part of 64810) (if
equipped)
RH outer fold-flat recliner cover
Fold-flat recliner-to-fold-flat backrest
frame front bolts (2 required)
Fold-flat recliner-to-fold-flat backrest
frame rear bolts (2 required)
Fold-flat recliner-to-seat track bolts (4
required)
RH fold-flat recliner
Inboard fold-flat recliner cover screws (3
required)
RH inboard fold-flat recliner cover
Screw (4 required)
RH attachment panel
LH attachment panel
LH fold-flat recliner
LH inboard fold-flat recliner cover
Scrivet
LH outer fold-flat recliner cover
LH outer fold-flat recliner cover screw
Screw cover
Fold-flat recliner cable
Static lumbar
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do
not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its
mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat
side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 525
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
or death in a crash.
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Only the front passenger seat can come equipped with optional fold-flat
backrest.
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
2. Remove the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front.
3. Remove the LH and RH outer fold-flat recliner covers.
Pull to release the clips.
Slide up to disengage the retainer and remove.
4. Remove the 4 fold-flat recliner-to-fold-flat backrest frame bolts.
To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
If necessary, remove the fold-flat recliner cable.
NOTE:
The seat backrest trim cover and foam pad have been removed to show
the backrest trim panel retainers.
5. Remove the backrest trim panel in the following sequence.
1. Release the 2 pin-type retainers at the bottom of the backrest trim panel.
2. Slide the backrest trim panel down to release the upper clips.
3. Turn the backrest trim panel to release the middle clips and remove the backrest trim panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 526
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 467: Locating Pin-Type Retainers, Upper Clips & Middle Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lower outer J-clips are unfastened to show inner J-clips.
6. Release the backrest trim cover outer and inner J-clips.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 527
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 468: Locating J-Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the head restraint.
1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the
head restraint.
2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint.
Fig. 469: Locating Release Button On Head Restraint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Always install a new slave head restraint guide.
8. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 528
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not
pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame or
damage to the wiring harness can occur.
NOTE:
When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed.
9. Remove the side air bag module.
Remove the 2 side air bag module bolts.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Remove the side air bag module with wire harness.
Detach any side air bag module wire harness retainers.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come attached on a new foam pad.
10. Remove the backrest trim cover.
Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached
to the clips in the backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad.
If equipped, feed out the backrest heater mat wire harness from the opening in the side of the
backrest trim cover.
Remove the backrest trim cover.
11. Separate the backrest frame from the backrest foam pad.
12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
13. Install the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front.
14. Install the front seat. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to Seat Front.
15. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the
SRS. For additional information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
SEAT CUSHION - FRONT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 529
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
NOTE:
Driver seat shown in illustration, passenger similar.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Fig. 470: Seat Cushion With Power Seat Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 530
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Item
1
Part Number
62901
2
18D507
3
4
5
632A23
63226
6
-
7
8
9
10
11
18D507
63100
62294
W714053
62187
12
-
13
14
61203
18D507
15
W505945
16
17
18
19
20
14A699
19E880
21
-
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
61711
14B416
62294
62187
14A701
62187
62294
14711
14711
14711
14C708
33
62294
Description
Cushion trim cover
Cushion climate control seat manifold (if
equipped)
Cushion foam pad
Cushion heater mat (part of 632A23)
Cushion support
Cushion thermo-electric device (TED)to-climate control seat cushion adapter
screw (if equipped)
Cushion TED adapter (if equipped)
Cushion frame
Recliner side shield screws
Scrivet
Recliner side shield
Safety belt buckle-to-seat track nut (part
of 61203)
Safety belt buckle
Cushion TED (if equipped)
Cushion TED-to-cushion frame screw (3
required) (if equipped)
Screw grommet
Cushion frame-to-seat track rear brackets
Wire clip
Driver seat wire harness
Cushion TED filter (if equipped)
Seat track-to-cushion frame bolts (4
required)
Power seat track assembly
Seat position sensor (driver only)
Seat track cover retainer
Seat track cover
Seat control switch
Cushion side shield
Cushion side shield retainer (3 required)
Power lumbar switch knob (if equipped)
Power seat recliner knob
Seat control switch knob
Driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped)
DSM-to-bracket screw (2 required) (if
equipped)
Bracket-to-seat track screws (if
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 531
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
34
35
NOTE:
62294
14A301
equipped)
DSM bracket (if equipped)
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Fig. 471: Driver Seat Cushion With Manual Seat Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
4
62901
632A23
63100
Description
Cushion heater mat (part of 632A23) (if
equipped)
Cushion trim cover
Cushion foam pad
Cushion frame
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 532
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
5
6
7
8
62294
14A699
9
-
10
11
61203
61711
12
-
13
14
14B416
610C01
15
62294
16
17
18
19
20
62187
62294
61737
21
61737
22
617B70
NOTE:
Wire clip
Recliner side shield screws
Recliner side shield
Driver seat wire harness
Safety belt buckle-to-seat track bolt (part
of 61203) (manual driver seat track only)
Safety belt buckle
Manual seat track assembly
Seat track-to-cushion frame bolts (4
required)
Seat track position sensor
Manual lumbar adjuster (if equipped)
Manual lumbar adjuster-to-seat track
screw (if equipped)
Manual lumbar cable (if equipped)
Cushion side shield
Cushion side shield retainer (4 required)
Manual recliner handle spring clip
Manual recliner handle
Manual height adjust handle (if
equipped)
Manual lumbar adjust handle (if
equipped)
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 533
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 472: Passenger Seat Cushion With Manual Seat Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
62900
2
-
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
632A22
63100
61736
62294
62186
14A698
14C724
62294
62187
61202
W520113
61704
Description
Cushion trim cover
Cushion heater mat (part of 632A22) (if
equipped)
Cushion foam pad
Cushion frame
Manual recliner handle
Manual recliner handle cover spring clip
Cushion side shield screw (4 required)
Cushion side shield
Passenger seat wire harness
Grommet
Screw
Heated seat module (if equipped)
Recliner side shield screws
Recliner side shield
Safety belt buckle
Safety belt buckle nut
Manual seat track assembly
18
-
Seat track-to-cushion frame bolts (4
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 534
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
required)
NOTE:
To install a new occupant classification system module (OCSM) or an occupant
classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt, refer to the appropriate
procedure in SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Fig. 473: Passenger Power Seat Track
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
63100
Description
Power seat track adjuster assembly (part
of 61710)
Occupant classification sensor (OCS)
weight sensor bolt nuts (4 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 535
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
3
4
62294
14A301
5
62294
6
14B422
7
-
8
-
9
14A301
10
11
12
62294
14C724
13
14A301
14
15
62294
14C724
16
62294
17
-
18
-
19
62294
20
12655
21
12656
22
14B422
23
24
25
26
62294
62186
Cushion side shield bracket screws
Cushion side shield bracket
Occupant classification system module
(OCSM) retainers
OCSM
Seat track front cross brace nuts (part of
61710)
Seat track front cross brace (part of
61710)
Bracket (with dual climate controlled seat
module [DCSM]) (if equipped)
Bracket screws
Heated seat module screw (if equipped)
Heated seat module (if equipped)
Bracket (with heated seat module) (if
equipped)
DCSM retainers (if equipped)
DCSM (if equipped)
Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt
protection bracket screws
Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt
protection bracket
Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt
protection bracket
Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt
protection bracket screw
OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clips (4
required)
OCS weight sensor bolt spring washers
(4 required)
OCS weight sensor bolts (4 required)
(part of 61710)
Inboard seat track rail (part of 61710)
Outboard seat track rail (part of 61710)
Seat track cover retainer
Seat track cover
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air
curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 536
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE:
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of
faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Driver seat shown in illustration, passenger similar.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
2. Remove the front seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front.
3. Release the cushion trim cover retainers from the cushion frame and remove the cushion trim cover and
cushion foam pad.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad.
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
4. Remove the cushion trim cover from the cushion foam pad in the following sequence.
1. Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
2. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad.
For vehicles with climate controlled seat, on assembly make sure the climate control seat
manifold is in place before snapping the cushion trim cover wire retainer back into the
cushion foam pad.
Seats with climate control
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the cushion climate control seat manifold from the cushion foam pad.
Remove the 3 cushion thermo-electric device (TED)-to-cushion frame screws.
Remove the cushion TED-to-climate control seat cushion adapter screw and remove the TED.
Release the clips and remove the cushion TED adapter from the cushion frame.
Heated seats
9. Remove the screw and the heated seat module.
All seats
10. Release the retainers from the cushion frame and remove the cushion support.
11. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 537
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
12. Install the front seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front.
For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing
- Front Passenger Cushion.
13. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
14. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test. For additional
information, refer to the General Procedures portion of SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
SEAT BACKREST - REAR, 60 PERCENT
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 538
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 474: Rear Seat Backrest, 60 Percent
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
666L76
60509
4
237W10
5
6
7
8
9
611A70
67336
67336
Description
Child safety seat tether anchor bezels
Pin-type retainer
Back panel
Safety belt bezel screw cover (part of
611A70)
Safety belt bezel screw
Safety belt bezel
RH armrest detent
Armrest detent-to-backrest frame screws
LH armrest detent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 539
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
10
11
12
13
14
67112
611A08
610A16
610A16
15
-
16
66801
17
-
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
61046
66601
61349
601L60
W712241
61349
61349
62419
61349
61349
611B64
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
60044
60328
19K315
613A68
Armrest
Head restraint
Safety belt comfort guide
Head restraint guide (master)
Head restraint guide (slave)
Backrest frame (part of backrest
assembly 613A39)
Backrest foam pad
Backrest heater mat (if equipped) (part of
66801)
Armrest filler panel
Screw
Backrest trim cover
Pin-type retainer
Pin-type retainers
Pin-type retainer
Armrest bracket trim cover
Recliner cable
Armrest bolt
Screws
Inboard lower side shield
Inboard upper side shield
Recliner handle cover
Outboard lower side shield
Outboard upper side shield
Safety belt retractor
Pin-type retainer
Inboard recliner (part of backrest
assembly 613A39)
Outboard recliner (part of backrest
assembly 613A39)
Anchor brackets (part of backrest
assembly 613A39)
Safety belt buckle bolt (part of 60044)
Safety belt buckle
Heated seat module (if equipped)
Heated seat module bracket (if equipped)
Wire harness (if equipped)
Screws (2 required) (if equipped)
Power fold motor bracket (if equipped)
Power fold motor (if equipped)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 540
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
46
-
47
-
Safety belt retractor belt and buckle
anchor bolt (part of 611B64)
Safety belt retractor nut
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
WARNING: Synchronize the seat recliners following the steps in the seat removal and
installation procedure any time the seat is removed for service. The
following actions may result in the loss of recliner synchronization that
cannot be corrected and may cause the seat back to fail in a crash:
Dropping the seat
Sitting on the seat when removed
Applying any load to the seat when removed
Removing or loosening any recliner fasteners except for the safety
belt buckle bolt
Install a new seat back frame assembly if the seat recliners cannot be
synchronized. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s) in a crash.
All seats
1. Remove the 60 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 60 Percent.
2. Remove the 60 percent cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Rear, 60 Percent.
NOTE:
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
3. Remove the bolt and separate the safety belt retractor belt and buckle anchor from the riser.
To install, tighten to 65 Nm (48 lb-ft).
4. Remove the head restraint.
1. Push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint.
2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint.
3. Remove the safety belt comfort guide.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 541
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 475: Locating Safety Belt Comfort Guide & Release Button On Head Restraint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Always install a new slave head restraint guide.
5. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides.
6. Remove the armrest bracket trim cover pin-type retainer and the armrest bracket trim cover.
Cycle the armrest up and down to aid trim cover removal.
7. Remove the armrest bolt.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
8. Remove the armrest.
With the armrest upright, tip the outboard side of the armrest to disengage the stop from the
backrest frame channel.
9. Remove the pin-type retainer in the armrest pocket, attaching the backrest trim cover to the backrest.
10. Release the tabs and remove the child safety seat tether anchor bezel.
Repeat for the other child safety seat tether anchor bezel.
Fig. 476: Locating Tabs On Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor Bezel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the safety belt bezel screw cover, the screw and the safety belt bezel.
During assembly, make sure the safety belt bezel clips in place.
12. Release the backrest trim cover lower J-clip.
Pull the heated seat electrical connector through the backrest trim cover opening (if equipped).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 542
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
13. At the rear inboard side of the backrest, access the zipper tucked up behind the back panel and unzip the
zipper.
14. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers holding the backrest trim cover around each of the 2 lower anchors and
tethers for children (LATCH) and attaching to the lower rear of the backrest frame.
15. Remove the pin-type retainer from inside the safety belt comfort guide pocket.
16. Pull back the backrest trim cover over the armrest bracket and backrest frame latching wire for the
armrest.
17. Remove the screw at the top and the pin-type retainer at the bottom of the armrest filler panel.
18. Lift the armrest filler panel over the armrest pivot bracket and slide out to the outboard side of the seat.
During assembly, make sure the armrest filler panel clips in place around the backrest trim cover Jclip, at the inboard side.
19. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip from the backrest frame in the armrest pocket.
20. From the back, invert the backrest trim cover up and over the backrest frame and remove the backrest
trim cover and backrest foam pad.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad.
NOTE:
If a new heater mat or foam pad with heat are needed, the parts will already
be assembled from the factory. There is no need to remove the heater mat
from the foam pad.
21. Remove the backrest trim cover from the backrest foam pad in the following sequence.
1. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached
to the clips in the backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
2. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad.
3. Remove the backrest trim cover.
Feed the safety belt retractor belt and safety belt buckle through the backrest trim cover and
backrest foam pad.
22. Remove the backrest foam pad.
23. Release the retainers and remove the back panel.
24. Remove the safety belt retractor nut, pin-type retainer under the safety belt and the safety belt retractor.
To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
25. Remove 2 screws and the outboard upper side shield.
26. Remove 2 screws and the inboard upper side shield.
27. Remove 2 screws and the outboard lower side shield.
28. Remove 2 screws and the inboard lower side shield.
WARNING: Keep hands clear of all moving seat mechanisms when releasing the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 543
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
recliner lever. The recliners are spring loaded and release with high
force. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE:
Note the position of the safety belt buckle anti-rotation tab for installation.
29. With the recliners released (backrest folded), remove the bolt and safety belt buckle.
To install, tighten to 65 Nm (48 lb-ft).
30. Separate the recliner cable casing at both ends from the recliners.
31. Remove the recliner cable in the following sequence.
1. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable at one end.
2. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable at the other end.
Remove the recliner cable.
Seats with power fold
32. Remove the power fold motor in the following sequence.
1. Remove the 2 screws from the power fold motor.
2. Slide the cable casing out of the recliner.
3. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable.
4. Remove the power fold motor.
Seats with heat
33. Disconnect the electrical connector, remove the screw and the heated seat module.
All seats
34. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to safety
belt system in the diagnosis and testing portion of SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article.
Verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding.
Make sure the LATCH is accessible to the occupant.
SEAT BACKREST - REAR, 40 PERCENT
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 544
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 477: Rear Seat Backrest, 40 Percent
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
66600
2
-
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
66800
61348
61348
601L60
62418
61348
Description
Backrest trim cover
Backrest heater mat (if equipped) (part of
66800)
Backrest foam pad
Screws (4 required)
Outboard upper side shield
Inboard upper side shield
Recliner cable
Recliner handle cover
Outboard lower side shield
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:28 AM
Page 545
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
10
11
12
13
61349
14
-
15
16
60044
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
610A16
610A16
611A08
60508
666L76
Screws (4 required)
Wave washers (2 required)
Pin-type retainer
Inboard lower side shield
Anchor brackets (part of backrest
assembly 613A38)
Safety belt buckle
Safety belt buckle bolt (part of 60044)
Outboard recliner (part of backrest
assembly 613A38)
Inboard recliner (part of backrest
assembly 613A38)
Backrest frame (part of backrest
assembly 613A38)
Head restraint guide (slave)
Safety belt comfort guide
Head restraint guide (master)
Head restraint
Pin-type retainer
Back panel
Child safety seat tether anchor bezel
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
WARNING: Synchronize the seat recliners following the steps in the seat removal and
installation procedure any time the seat is removed for service. The
following actions may result in the loss of recliner synchronization that
cannot be corrected and may cause the seat back to fail in a crash:
Dropping the seat
Sitting on the seat when removed
Applying any load to the seat when removed
Removing or loosening any recliner fasteners except for the safety
belt buckle bolt
Install a new seat back frame assembly if the seat recliners cannot be
synchronized. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s) in a crash.
All seats
1. Remove the 40 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 40 Percent.
2. Remove the 40 percent cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Rear, 40 Percent.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:29 AM
Page 546
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the head restraint.
1. Push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint.
2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint.
3. Remove the safety belt comfort guide.
Fig. 478: Locating Safety Belt Comfort Guide & Release Button On Head Restraint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Always install a new slave head restraint guide.
4. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides.
5. Release the tabs and remove the child safety seat tether anchor bezel.
Fig. 479: Locating Tabs On Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor Bezel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Release the backrest trim cover lower J-clip.
Pull the heated seat electrical connector through the backrest trim cover opening (if equipped).
7. At the rear inboard side of the backrest, access the zipper tucked up behind the back panel and unzip the
zipper.
8. Remove the pin-type retainer holding the backrest trim cover around the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) and attaching to the lower rear of the backrest frame.
9. Remove the pin-type retainer from inside the safety belt comfort guide pocket.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:29 AM
Page 547
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad.
10. Release the hook-and-loop strips and invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in
the backrest trim cover attached to the clips in the backrest foam pad.
11. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad and remove the backrest
trim cover.
12. Remove the backrest foam pad.
13. Release the retainers and remove the back panel.
14. Remove 2 screws and the outboard upper side shield.
15. Remove 2 screws and the inboard upper side shield.
16. Remove 2 screws and the outboard lower side shield.
17. Remove 2 screws and the inboard lower side shield.
WARNING: Keep hands clear of all moving seat mechanisms when releasing the
recliner lever. The recliners are spring loaded and release with high
force. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE:
Note the position of the safety belt buckle anti-rotation tab for installation.
18. With the recliners released (backrest folded), remove the bolt and safety belt buckle.
To install, tighten to 65 Nm (48 lb-ft).
19. Separate the recliner cable casing at both ends from the recliners.
20. Remove the recliner cable in the following sequence.
1. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable at one end.
2. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable at the other end.
Remove the recliner cable.
Seats with power fold
21. Remove the power fold motor in the following sequence.
1. Remove the 2 screws from the power fold motor.
2. Slide the cable casing out of the recliner.
3. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable.
4. Remove the power fold motor.
All seats
22. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Make sure the LATCH is accessible to the occupant.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:29 AM
Page 548
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to safety
belt system in the diagnosis and testing portion of SAFETY BELT SYSTEM article.
SEAT CUSHION - REAR, 40 PERCENT
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Fig. 480: Exploded View Of Rear Seat Cushion, 40 Percent With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
63804
2
-
3
63840
4
666L76
5
6
W712172
7
66L75
8
63160
9
N605892
Description
Cushion trim cover
Cushion heater mat (if equipped) (part of
63840)
Cushion foam pad
Outboard cushion frame pivot bracket
cover
Wave washers
Cushion frame pivot bracket bolts
Inboard cushion frame pivot bracket
cover
Cushion frame
Kneeling assembly-to-cushion frame
bolts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:29 AM
Page 549
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
10
605B10
Kneeling assembly
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
1. Remove the 40 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 40 Percent.
2. Remove the 40 percent seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Rear, 40
Percent.
3. Remove the 2 kneeling assembly-to-cushion frame bolts. Remove the kneeling assembly.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Release all the cushion trim cover-to-cushion frame retainers and remove the cushion foam pad and
cushion trim cover.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad.
5. Remove the cushion trim cover in the following sequence.
1. Feed the heater mat wire harness and electrical connectors back through the cushion trim cover (if
equipped).
2. Release the hook-and-loop strips.
3. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad and remove
the cushion trim cover.
6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
SEAT CUSHION - REAR, 60 PERCENT
NOTE:
A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:29 AM
Page 550
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
Fig. 481: Exploded View Of Rear Seat Cushion, 60 Percent With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
63805
2
-
3
63841
4
666L76
5
-
6
666L75
7
8
W712172
63161
9
N605892
10
605B11
Description
Cushion trim cover
Cushion heater mat (if equipped) (part of
63841)
Cushion foam pad
Inboard cushion frame pivot bracket
cover
Wave washers
Outboard cushion frame pivot bracket
cover
Cushion frame pivot bracket bolts
Cushion frame
Kneeling assembly-to-cushion frame
bolts
Kneeling assembly
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
1. Remove the 60 percent seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Rear, 60 Percent.
2. Remove the 60 percent seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Rear, 60
Percent.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:29 AM
Page 551
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Seating - Edge & MKX
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the kneeling assembly.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Release all the cushion trim cover-to-cushion frame retainers and remove the cushion foam pad and
cushion trim cover.
NOTE:
Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop
strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad.
5. Remove the cushion trim cover in the following sequence.
1. Feed the heater mat wire harness and electrical connectors back through the cushion trim cover (if
equipped).
2. Release the hook-and-loop strips.
3. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad and remove
the cushion trim cover.
6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:08:29 AM
Page 552
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
2008 SUSPENSION
Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and
ESE-M1C171-A
Dielectric Compound
XG-3-A
Wheel and Tire Cleaner
ZC-27-A or B
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Tire Balance Weight
Maximum balance weight (Euro-flange wheel
alloy/chrome)
Maximum balance weight (MC flange
alloy/cladded)
Tire Inflation
Tires
Fill Capacity
-
Specification
180 g (6.4 oz) per inner and outer
135 g (4.8 oz) per inner and outer
See Safety Certification Label located on driver
door jamb.
NOTE:
Use only special tool 204-354 any time tire pressures are measured to be sure that accurate values
are obtained.
For accuracy, Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a
stick-type pressure gauge.
Inflate the tire to the pressure specified on the safety certification sticker located on the driver door or
door pillar.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Sensor strap (worm gear)
Wheel nuts
Nm
3
135
lb-ft
100
lb-in
27
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
WHEELS AND TIRES
Safety Precautions
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:07
10:51:00 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the
driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels
in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always match the tire size to the wheel size during assembly. Incorrect
matching can result in tire bead damage or tire separation from the wheel.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury to
technician or vehicle occupant(s).
WARNING: Before servicing any tire, ask the customer if anyone injected a tire
sealant into the tire. Tire sealants may be flammable and can burn or
explode if exposed to an ignition source. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Replacement wheels must be equivalent to the original equipment wheels
in:
load carrying capacity.
diameter, width and offset.
pilot hole and bolt circle.
Combined load carrying capacity of replacement wheels for a given axle,
must be equal to or greater than that axle's gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) identified on the vehicle's Safety Compliance Certification label.
All other specifications should be evaluated by measurement of both the
original wheel and the replacement wheel. If specifications are not
equivalent, the safety and handling of the vehicle may be degraded, which
may result in serious injury to the vehicle occupant(s).
WARNING: Never use wheels different than the original equipment. Additionally,
never use wheel nuts different than the original equipment. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in damage to the wheel or mounting
system. This damage could cause the wheel to come off while the vehicle
is being driven, which could result in serious personal injury or death to
vehicle occupant(s).
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Keep eyes away from valve stem when deflating tires. Reduce air
pressure in tire as much as possible by pushing in valve core plunger
prior to removing the core. Escaping air can carry particles that can injure
the eyes. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
personal injury.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires that are the same size, load index, speed
rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or the Tire Label, which is located on the B-pillar or
edge of the driver's door. If the information is not found on these labels,
consult a Ford dealer. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford
can affect the safety and performance of the vehicle, which could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power
transfer unit failure.
NOTE:
Do not clean aluminum wheels with steel wool, abrasive-type cleaners or strong
detergents or damage to the wheel finish may occur. Use Wheel and Tire
Cleaner ZC-27-A or -B or equivalent.
Factory-installed tires and wheels are designed to operate satisfactorily with loads up to and including full-rated
load capacity when inflated to recommended inflation pressures.
Correct tire pressure and driving techniques have an important influence on tire life. Heavy cornering,
excessively rapid acceleration and unnecessary sharp braking increase tire wear.
To equalize tire wear, the tires should be rotated at recommended intervals.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
NOTE:
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also identified as the Generic Electronic
Module (GEM).
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) includes:
the SJB, TPMS functionality is integrated within the SJB.
four tire pressure sensors.
four tire pressure sensor cradles.
four tire pressure sensor straps.
an instrument cluster indicator.
a message center (if equipped).
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module
The SJB contains the TPMS functionality. Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System for TPMS fault
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
diagnosis and repair.
The SJB compares the information of each tire pressure sensor transmission against a pressure limit. If the SJB
determines that the tire pressure has fallen below the low limit, the SJB communicates this to the instrument
cluster on the vehicle communication bus.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Pressure Sensor
The SJB monitors the air pressure in the 4 road tires with tire pressure sensors. The sensors transmit radio
frequency signals to the SJB approximately every 60 seconds when the vehicle speed exceeds 32 km/h (20
mph).
The tire pressure sensors are battery operated and are mounted to metal brackets (called cradles) on the wheels
inside the tires. The sensors are mounted 180 degrees from the valve stem.
The tire pressure sensor can be serviced separately from the cradle and the strap.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Pressure Sensor Cradle
The tire pressure sensor cradles are mounted to the wheels with metal straps and have an adhesive strip to aid in
their retention to the wheel.
The sensor cradle is available with the strap in a kit. To service the sensor cradle, the strap must be removed and
discarded.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Pressure Sensor Strap
The sensor strap keeps the sensor and the cradle retained to the wheel. A factory-installed strap is joined
together with a one-time-use buckle and a dealer-installed strap is joined together with a worm gear (similar to a
radiator hose clamp). Both straps should be discarded after removal and should not be reused.
The cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel
diameter.
Instrument Cluster and Message Center
The instrument cluster illuminates the TPMS indicator when it receives a message from the SJB to do so and
displays the appropriate message(s) in the message center (if equipped).
The instrument cluster and message center are diagnosed and serviced in their own respective service
information . Refer to the appropriate Instrumentation and Warning Systems article for the procedure.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
WHEELS AND TIRES
Special Tools
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Illustration
Tool Name
Digital Tire Gauge
Tool Number
204-354
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the
driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels
in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Be sure to follow all warnings when carrying out Inspection and Verification.
Road Test
Verify the customer concern by carrying out a road test on a smooth road. If any vibrations are apparent, go to
Symptom Chart - NVH.
To maximize tire performance, inspect for signs of incorrect inflation and uneven wear, which may indicate a
need for balancing, rotation or front suspension alignment.
Correct tire pressure and driving techniques have an important influence on tire life. Heavy cornering,
excessively rapid acceleration and unnecessary sharp braking increase tire wear.
Replacement tires must follow the recommended:
tire sizes.
speed rating.
load range.
tire construction type.
The use of any other tire/wheel size or type can seriously affect:
ride.
handling.
speedometer/odometer calibration.
vehicle ground clearance.
tire clearance between the body and chassis.
wheel bearing life.
brake cooling.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
New wheels need to be installed when the vehicle's wheels:
are bent.
are cracked.
are dented.
are heavily corroded.
are leaking.
have elongated wheel hub bolt holes.
have excessive lateral or radial runout.
It is mandatory to use only the tire sizes recommended on the tire chart attached to the vehicle. Larger or
smaller tires can damage the vehicle, affect durability and require changing the speedometer calibration. Make
sure wheel size and offsets match those recommended for the tire in use.
1. Inspect the tires for signs of uneven wear. Refer to the following descriptions to identify the type of wear
and Go to Symptom Chart - Tire Wear for the appropriate repair action to be carried out.
2. Check the tires for:
cuts.
stone bruises.
abrasions.
blisters.
embedded objects.
3. Tread wear indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. Install a new tire when the
indicator bands become visible.
Tire Wear
Tire wear is commonly defined as a loss of tread depth. Tire tread wear occurs due to friction with the contact
surface (road/pavement). The tread should wear down uniformly all the way around the circumference of the
tire and all the way across the tread face. When this does not occur, the tire may have abnormal/incorrect wear.
Normal Tire Wear
Normal tire wear is identified as even wear around and across the tread. Because there are many factors (driving
style, road surfaces, type of vehicle, type of tire) that can affect tire wear, there is no absolute mileage
expectation for a normal wear condition. A tire is considered worn-out when the tread has worn to the level of
the tread-wear indicators.
Abnormal/Incorrect Tire Wear
Abnormal/incorrect tire wear is identified as tire wear that is not even around or across the tread and that creates
performance-related issues.
Abnormal/incorrect wear can be caused by numerous factors, some of which include driving style (aggressive,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
passive), climate (hot, cold), road conditions, vehicle loading and maintenance. It is important to determine the
root cause of wear on a vehicle before carrying out repair. Tires exhibiting abnormal/incorrect tire wear may
still be serviceable provided that the minimum tread depth is greater than 1.58 mm (2/32 in) and the tire is not
causing a vehicle performance (noise/vibration) concern.
Some abnormal/incorrect wear patterns look the same all the way around the tread of the tire, other wear
patterns are not consistent and can occur in various spots on the tread area. The underlying causes of the 6 wear
categories are different. Refer to the following descriptions to identify the type of wear and Go to Symptom
Chart - Tire Wear for the appropriate repair action to be carried out.
Inner Edge/Shoulder Wear
Inner edge (or shoulder) wear occurs on the inside edge of the tire and is usually caused by excessive toe out
and/or excessive negative camber. If the tread depth of the outer shoulder is at least 50% greater than the tread
depth of the inner shoulder, the tire is experiencing inner edge/shoulder wear. To determine whether tires have
this type of wear, visually inspect the tires. In some instances, the tread depth of each rib may need to be
measured to compare it to that of the shoulder.
NOTE:
RF tire shown, others similar.
Fig. 1: Identifying Inner Edge/Shoulder Wear
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Outer Edge/Shoulder Wear
Outer edge (or shoulder) wear occurs on the outside edge of the tire and is usually caused by excessive toe in
and/or excessive positive camber. If the tread depth of the inner shoulder is at least 50% greater than the tread
depth of the outer shoulder, the tire is experiencing outer edge/shoulder wear. To determine whether tires have
this type of wear, visually inspect the tires. In some instances, the tread depth of each rib may need to be
measured to compare it to that of the shoulder.
NOTE:
RF tire shown, others similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Identifying Outer Edge/Shoulder Wear
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Heel/Toe Wear
Heel/toe wear (also known as feathering) occurs along the outside or inside edge/shoulder of the tire. To
determine whether tires have this type of wear, visually inspect the tires in both the inside and outside shoulder
ribs. In some instances, the difference in tread depth of leading versus trailing edge of each lug in the inside and
outside shoulder rib may need to be measured.
Fig. 3: Identifying Heel/Toe Wear
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Diagonal Wear
Diagonal wear occurs diagonally across the tread area and around the circumference of the tire. To determine
whether tires have this type of wear, visually inspect the tires to determine if the wear pattern runs diagonally
across the tread and around the circumference of the tire. In some instances, the difference in tread depth along
the diagonal wear pattern may need to be measured.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Identifying Diagonal Wear
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Symptom Chart - Tire Wear
Symptom Chart - Tire Wear
Condition
Inner edge/shoulder wear
Outer edge/shoulder wear
Possible Sources
Action
Excessive toe out
and/or negative camber
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Incorrect wheel and tire
assembly rotation
intervals
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
High-speed cornering
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Excessive toe in and/or
positive camber
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Incorrect wheel and tire
assembly rotation
intervals
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
High-speed cornering
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Excessive toe in/out
Incorrect wheel and tire
assembly rotation
intervals
ROTATE the wheel and tire
assemblies. CHECK the
alignment, ADJUST as necessary.
Heel/toe wear
Diagonal wear
Excessive toe in/out
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Incorrect tire rotation
intervals
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Loose, worn or
damaged suspension
components
REFER to SUSPENSION
SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Symptom Chart - NVH
NOTE:
NVH symptoms should be identified using the diagnostic tools that are
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of their uses and a glossary of
common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article. Since it is
possible any one of multiple systems may be the cause of a symptom, it may be
necessary to use a process of elimination type of diagnostic approach to
pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the causal system for the
symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article for the
next likely system and continue diagnosis.
Symptom Chart - NVH
Condition
Wobble or shimmy
Possible Sources
Bent wheel
Damaged tire
Loose wheel nuts
High-speed shake
Tires/wheels
Vehicle vibration
Tires/wheels
Action
INSTALL a new wheel as
necessary.
INSTALL a new tire as
necessary.
TIGHTEN to specification.
REFER to Component Tests
under Wheels And Tires .
REFER to Component Tests
under Wheels And Tires .
Pinpoint Tests
For a description of the various tire wear patterns, refer to Inspection and Verification
Pinpoint Test A: Inner Edge/Shoulder Wear
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Excessive toe out
Incorrect wheel and tire rotation
PINPOINT TEST A: INNER EDGE/SHOULDER WEAR
A1 MEASURE THE TREAD DEPTH
Using a tread depth gauge or similar tool, measure the inside edge/shoulder tread depth.
Is the tread depth greater than 1.58 mm (2/32 in)?
YES : ROTATE the wheel and tire assemblies.
CHECK and ADJUST the toe to nominal +0.15 degree (toe in). CHECK and ADJUST caster and
camber to nominal. REFER to SUSPENSION SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
NO : INSTALL a new tire(s).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
CHECK and ADJUST the toe to nominal. CHECK and ADJUST caster and camber to nominal.
REFER to SUSPENSION SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Pinpoint Test B: Outer Edge/Shoulder Wear
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Excessive toe in
Incorrect wheel and tire rotation
PINPOINT TEST B: OUTER EDGE/SHOULDER WEAR
B1 MEASURE THE TREAD DEPTH
Using a tread depth gauge or similar tool, measure the outside edge/shoulder tread depth.
Is the tread depth greater than 1.58 mm (2/32 in)?
YES : ROTATE the wheel and tire assemblies.
CHECK and ADJUST the toe to nominal -0.15 degree (toe out). CHECK and ADJUST caster and
camber to nominal. REFER to SUSPENSION SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
NO : INSTALL a new tire(s).
CHECK and ADJUST the toe to nominal. CHECK and ADJUST caster and camber to nominal.
REFER to SUSPENSION SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Pinpoint Test C: Diagonal Wear
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Incorrect wheel and tire rotation
Excessive toe in/out
Incorrect tire inflation
Loose, worn or damaged suspension components
PINPOINT TEST C: DIAGONAL WEAR
C1 MEASURE THE TREAD DEPTH
Using a tread depth gauge or similar tool, measure the tread depth of the wear pattern.
Is the tread depth greater than 1.58 mm (2/32 in)?
YES : If no performance concerns (noise/vibration) are present, the tire can remain in service.
CHECK the air pressure in the tires, ADJUST as necessary.
ROTATE the wheel and tire assemblies.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
INSPECT for loose, worn or damaged suspension components. INSTALL new components as
necessary.
CHECK the alignment and ADJUST as necessary. REFER to SUSPENSION SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
NO : INSTALL a new tire(s).
CHECK the air pressure in the tires, ADJUST as necessary.
ROTATE the wheel and tire assemblies.
INSPECT for loose, worn or damaged suspension components. INSTALL new components as
necessary.
CHECK the alignment and ADJUST as necessary. REFER to SUSPENSION SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Component Tests
Some vehicles may exhibit a wheel and tire vibration caused by excessive runout. Runout measurements of the
wheel and tire assembly can be taken both on and off the vehicle. Runout measurements can be taken both
radially and laterally using a runout gauge. The runout gauge is a delicate, precision instrument and should be
handled as such. The runout gauge should be mounted on a heavy solid base to eliminate gauge movement
when measuring runouts. The measurements are taken using a runout gauge, which defines total runout in 64th
or thousandths of an inch (depending on the brand of gauge used) and locates the high and low points of the
runout.
Radial Runout
Radial runout is the egg-shaped deviation from a perfect circle and is measured perpendicular on a
circumference. On a wheel and tire assembly this usually means measuring the center tire tread rib, although
other tread ribs can be measured as well. The center rib is usually a solid rib, easy to measure and normally
indicative of the condition of the tire as a whole. It is important to keep in mind that any rib with excessive
runout can cause a concern. Total runout is the reading from the gauge. The high spot is the location of
maximum runout.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Identifying Radial Runout
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Description
High spot
Low spot
NOTE:
NOTE:
Warm up the tires prior to taking any measurements. This will eliminate slight
flat spotting. This is done during a road test.
Place the air chuck straight on the valve stem to inflate the tire. Do not
cock the air chuck during the inflation cycle. Doing so may damage the
valve stem and cause air leaks.
1. Make sure that the tire pressures are set to the correct pressure as indicated on the vehicle label.
2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to JACKING AND LIFTING article.
3. Make sure that all 4 positions can be measured. If measurements are to be taken with the wheel and tire
assembly off the vehicle, mount each assembly on a suitable dynamic balancing machine.
4. For future reference of the original wheel and tire assembly's position on the wheel hub, index-mark the
wheel and a wheel stud.
5. Position the runout gauge to take a radial measurement.
Rotate the wheel and tire assembly (or wheel) to locate the low spot.
Adjust the runout gauge to read 0.
Rotate the wheel and tire assembly (or wheel) one complete revolution to make sure that the low
spot has been found and that the runout gauge dial returns to a 0 reading.
Fig. 6: Measuring Radial Runout
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If there is a vast difference in measurements taken from a wheel and tire
assembly checked (on the vehicle) compared to readings taken (off the
vehicle), check for excessive bolt circle runout, excessive hub runout or a
fitting concern between the hub and wheel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
6. While slowly and constantly rotating the wheel and tire assembly (or wheel), measure the radial runout.
Note the variance (runout) from 0 on the dial of the gauge.
If the runout reading of a wheel and tire assembly is not within 1.27 mm (0.050 in), locate and
mark the high spot and proceed to Match Mounting, Step 1 to correct the concern.
If the runout reading of a wheel is not within 1.27 mm (0.050 in), install a new wheel.
Lateral Runout
Lateral runout is a sideways variation causing a twist or wobble and is measured on a side surface. On the wheel
and tire assembly, the lateral runout measurement should be taken as close to the tread shoulder as possible.
Total runout is the reading from the gauge.
Fig. 7: Identifying Lateral Runout
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Tire high spot
Wheel high spot
Tire low spot
Wheel low spot
1. Position the runout gauge to take a lateral measurement.
Rotate the wheel and tire assembly (or wheel) to locate the low spot.
Adjust the runout gauge to read 0.
Rotate the wheel and tire assembly (or wheel) one complete revolution to make sure that the low
spot has been found and that the dial returns to a 0 reading.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Measuring Lateral Runout
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If there is a vast difference in measurements taken from a wheel and tire
assembly checked on the vehicle compared to readings taken off the
vehicle, check for excessive bolt circle runout, excessive hub runout or a
fitting concern between the hub and wheel.
2. While slowly and constantly rotating the wheel and tire assembly (or wheel), measure the lateral runout.
Note the variance (runout) from 0 on the dial of the gauge.
If the runout reading of a wheel and tire assembly is not within 1.27 mm (0.050 in), locate and
mark the high spot and proceed to Match Mounting, Step 1 to correct the concern.
If the runout reading of a wheel is not within 1.27 mm (0.050 in), install a new wheel.
Match Mounting
Match mounting is a technique used to reduce radial and lateral runouts on wheel and tire assemblies. Excessive
runout is a source of ride quality complaints and match mounting can be used to minimize the runout. Match
mounting can be accomplished by changing the position of the tire on the wheel or by changing the position of
the wheel and tire assembly on the hub.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. Refer to Wheel and Tire.
2. Position the wheel and tire assembly on a suitable tire machine and put a reference mark on the tire
sidewall at the valve stem position.
Fig. 9: Locating Mark On Tire Side Wall At Valve Stem Position
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Description
Valve stem
Reference mark
NOTE:
For tires equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the
sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or
dismounting. Dismount the tire from the wheel as instructed in the
Disassembly and Assembly procedure. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in TPMS component damage.
3. Using a suitable tire machine, break the tire down from the wheel.
Position the tire 180 degrees (half-way around) on the rim so the tire reference mark made in Step 2
is opposite the valve stem.
4. Re-inflate the wheel and tire assembly to the specified air pressure and measure the assembly runout
again. Mark the second high spot on the tire.
If the runout is reduced to within specifications, the problem has been solved.
5. If the second runout measurement is still not within specification and both measurements are close to
each other (within 101.6 mm [4 in]), the root cause is probably the tire.
NOTE:
To be SURE that the tire is causing the high runout, there must be 2
runout measurements that are not within specification and the high
spots must be in approximately the same location on the sidewall of
the tire. In other words, the high spot followed the tire when it was
repositioned 180 degrees on the wheel.
If the second high spot is not within 101.6 mm (4 in) of the first high spot, proceed to the next step.
Fig. 10: Identifying High Spotting On Tire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Description
First high spot on the tire
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
2
Second high spot on the tire
6. If the second high spot is still above specification and is within 101.6 mm (4 in) of being opposite the first
high spot on the wheel, the root cause is probably the wheel (the high spot followed the wheel). Dismount
the tire from the wheel, mount the wheel on a balancer and check the wheel runout. Install a new wheel if
the wheel runout exceeds 1.27 mm (0.05 in).
Fig. 11: Identifying High Spotting On Each End Of Tire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
NOTE:
Description
First high spot on the tire
Second high spot on the tire
If the second high spot did not follow the wheel or the tire and the runout
is still not within specification, improvements may be made by rotating the
tire 90 degrees (one-fourth turn).
Fig. 12: Drawing Arrow On Tire Side Wall From Second High Spot Towards First High Spot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Draw an arrow on the tire sidewall from the second high spot towards the first high spot (in the shortest
direction).
Rotate the tire 90 degrees (one-fourth turn) in the direction of the arrow.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Item
1
2
Description
First high spot on the tire
Second high spot on the tire
8. Install the wheel and tire. Refer to Wheel and Tire.
Align the wheel and tire assembly using the index mark made on the wheel and wheel stud during
removal.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Activation Tool, Tire Pressure
Monitor
204-363
Digital Tire Gauge
204-354
Vehicle Communication Module
software with appropriate
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
hardware, or equivalent scan tool
System (IDS)
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also referred to as the Generic Electronic
Module (GEM).
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors the air pressure of all 4 road tires. The wheel-mounted
tire pressure sensors transmit via radio frequency signals, to the SJB. TPMS functionality is integral to the SJB.
These transmissions are sent approximately every 60 seconds when the vehicle speed exceeds 32 km/h (20
mph). The TPMS function compares each tire pressure sensor transmission against a low-pressure limit. If it has
been determined that the tire pressure has fallen below this limit, the SJB communicates this on the vehicle
communication bus to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster then illuminates the TPMS indicator and
displays the appropriate message(s) in the message center (if equipped).
For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire
pressures must be adjusted and the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate.
For vehicles with the same tire pressures for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
Ambient Temperature Change and Tire Pressure
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release
hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these
chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of
the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When
disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous
material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
Tire pressures fluctuate with temperature changes. For this reason, tire pressure must be set to specification
when tires are at outdoor ambient temperatures. If the vehicle is allowed to warm up to shop temperatures, and
the outside temperature is less than shop temperature, the tire inflation pressure must be adjusted accordingly.
If the tires are inflated to specification at shop temperatures, and the vehicle is moved outdoors when the
outdoor ambient temperature is significantly lower, the tire pressure may drop enough to be detected by the
TPMS and activate the TPMS warning lamp.
As the ambient temperature decreases by 6°C (10°F), tire pressure decreases 7 kPa (1 psi). Adjust the tire
pressure by 7 kPa (1 psi) for each 6°C (10°F) ambient temperature drop as necessary to keep the tire at the
specified Vehicle Certification (VC) label pressure. Refer to the following tables to adjust the tire pressure
indoors for colder outside temperatures.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:00 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Tire Pressure Table
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator and Message Center Messages
The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved
by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Illuminates Continuously
NOTE:
If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed
on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any
diagnosis.
NOTE:
For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as E-Series and
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire
rotation. Failure to train the sensors will result in a false low tire pressure event,
which will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate.
1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for the following condition:
Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW
TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When
this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as
indicated on the VC label.
NOTE:
The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary
to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure
information to the SJB.
2. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, carry out the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Sensor Activation procedure .
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Flashes
The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, for the following conditions:
1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. Go to Symptom Chart.
2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when
the instrument cluster has not received any signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the
message center displays TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. Go to Symptom Chart.
3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR
FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the
instrument cluster has been lost. Go to Symptom Chart.
Inspection and Verification
NOTE:
The tire pressure sensors are not designed to be used with aftermarket
wheels.
NOTE:
The use of run-flat tires (tires with steel body cord plies in the tire sidewall)
where not originally equipped, may cause the TPMS to malfunction and is
therefore not recommended.
1. Verify the customer concern by inspecting the vehicle and observing the message center (if equipped) and
the TPMS indicator.
NOTE:
The valve-mounted TPMS sensors and the strap-mounted TPMS sensors
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
are not compatible. Swapping wheels from one vehicle to another with the
different systems will set a TPMS fault.
NOTE:
Swapping wheels between vehicles with the same TPMS will cause a
TPMS fault to be set if the sensors are not trained. Refer to Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training.
NOTE:
Non-OEM modifications made to the vehicle may result in false TPMS
warnings.
2. Inspect to determine if one of the following mechanical or electrical concerns apply:
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Low tire pressure
Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor damaged
or missing
Spare tire installed as a
road wheel
Incorrect TPMS sensor
installed
TPMS sensor installed
incorrectly
Sensors not trained after
a tire rotation on
vehicles with different
front and rear tire
pressures
Non-OEM wheels
installed (aftermarket
rims)
Non-OEM equipped
run-flat tires installed
Other non-OEM
modifications (roll
cages, service barriers,
part racks, ladder racks)
Electrical
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Smart Junction Box
(SJB) damaged
Aftermarket electronic
accessories
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self test diagnostics for the SJB (the TPMS is part of the
SJB).
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) DTC
Chart. For all other DTCs, refer to the Master DTC Chart in MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Source
Action
Pressure Sensor Range Bit
Smart Junction
B106A
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Incorrect State
Box (SJB)
Tire Pressure Sensor Low
DTC B106B can be set during SJB
B106B
SJB
Battery
configuration. Go to Pinpoint Test H .
DTC B106D is only present when a new
SJB is installed, the SJB is incorrectly
flashed or the SJB is incorrectly
Tire Pressure Monitoring
configured. Successfully configuring the
B106D System (TPMS) Initiators Not
SJB
SJB is the only way to clear this DTC.
Configured
VERIFY the SJB is correctly configured. If
DTC B106D is still present, REFER to
MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
B2477
Module Configuration
Failure/Mismatch
SJB
B2868
LF Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
SJB
B2869
RF Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
SJB
B2870
RR Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
SJB
B2871
LR Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
SJB
B2872
B287A
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Tire Pressure System Fault
SJB
SJB
DTC B2477 is only present when a new
SJB is installed, the SJB is incorrectly
flashed or the SJB is incorrectly
configured. Successfully configuring the
SJB is the only way to clear this DTC.
MAKE SURE the SJB is configured
correctly. If DTC B2477 is still present,
REFER to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article.
DTC B2868 is only present when a new
SJB is installed, the SJB is flashed or the
SJB is reconfigured. TRAIN the tire
pressure sensors. REFER to Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training.
DTC B2869 is only present when a new
SJB is installed, the SJB is flashed or the
SJB is reconfigured. TRAIN the tire
pressure sensors. REFER to Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training.
DTC B2870 is only present when a new
SJB is installed, the SJB is flashed or the
SJB is reconfigured. TRAIN the tire
pressure sensors. REFER to Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training.
DTC B2871 is only present when a new
SJB is installed, the SJB is flashed or the
SJB is reconfigured. TRAIN the tire
pressure sensors. REFER to Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training.
NOTE:
If the vehicle has been stationary for
more than 30 minutes, the sensors will
go into a "sleep mode" to conserve
battery power. It will be necessary to
wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the
SJB.
ACTIVATE the TPMS sensors. REFER to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Sensor Activation. Go to
Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
C2780
ECU in Manufacturing Mode
SJB
U0155
Lost Communication with
Instrument Cluster
SJB
All other
SJB DTCs
SJB
DTC C2780 is only present when a new
SJB is installed, the SJB is flashed or the
SJB is reconfigured. TRAIN the tire
pressure sensors. REFER to Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training.
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article to diagnose the no communication
problem.
REFER to the Master DTC Chart in
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article.
Symptom Chart
NOTE:
For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressure (such as E-Series and
certain F-Series), the tire pressures must be adjusted and the tire pressure
sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors
will result in a false low tire pressure event, which will cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator to illuminate.
For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will
not affect the system.
Failure of a TPMS component may not cause the message center to display a
fault message or a DTC to be stored. The Symptom Chart is a starting point to
begin diagnosis of these concerns.
Symptom Chart
Condition
Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
(TPMS) indicator
ON solid and
message center (if
equipped) displays
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
Possible Sources
Spare tire currently in use
Air pressure not set to
specifications listed on
the Vehicle Certification
(VC) label
Sensors not trained
Action
INSTALL the repaired road wheel/tire
in place of the spare tire.
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
ADVISE customer that on vehicles
with different front and rear tire
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
following tire rotation
Smart Junction Box
(SJB) will not enter
sensor training mode
when using the
TPMS sensor
training procedure
TPMS indicator
FLASHES for 70
seconds and then
remains ON solid
when the ignition
key is turned to the
ON position, the
message center (if
equipped) displays
TIRE PRESSURE
SENSOR FAULT
and DTC B2872 is
present
Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
(TPMS) indicator
FLASHES for 70
seconds and then
remains ON solid
when the ignition
key is turned to the
ON position, the
message center (if
equipped) displays
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR FAULT
and DTC B287A is
present
TPMS indicator
FLASHES for 70
seconds and then
remains ON solid
when the ignition
key is turned to the
ON position, the
message center (if
equipped) displays
TIRE PRESSURE
Brake ON/OFF switch
Ignition switch
Vehicle communication
bus
SJB
pressure, the sensors must be trained
as directed in their Owner's Literature.
NOTE:
If the vehicle has been stationary for
more than 30 minutes, the sensors
will go into a "sleep mode" to
conserve battery power. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they
will transmit the latest tire pressure
information to the SJB.
TPMS sensor(s)
TPMS sensor(s) not
trained to the SJB
SJB
ACTIVATE the TPMS sensors.
REFER to Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Sensor Activation.
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
NOTE:
If the vehicle has been stationary for
more than 30 minutes, the sensors
will go into a "sleep mode" to
conserve battery power. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they
will transmit the latest tire pressure
information to the SJB.
All TPMS sensors not
trained to the SJB or all
TPMS sensors are not
installed
Vehicle communication
issue between the SJB
and the instrument cluster
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
ACTIVATE the TPMS sensors.
REFER to Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Sensor Activation.
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article to diagnose the no
communication concern.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
MONITOR FAULT
and there are no
DTCs present
One or more sensors
will not train
SJB
TPMS sensor(s)
Vehicle communication
issue
SJB
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article
to diagnose the SJB.
RETRIEVE and RECORD DTCs.
REFER to TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
DTC CHART .
TRAIN all 4 tire pressure sensors.
REFER to Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Sensor Training.
For any sensor(s) that did not train,
ATTEMPT to activate the same sensor
with the activation tool. If the sensor
still does not respond, MOVE the
vehicle to rotate the wheels at least
one-fourth turn and ATTEMPT to
activate the same sensor again.
If the sensor(s) fail to train a second
time, INSTALL a new sensor(s).
REFER to Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Sensor.
One or more sensors
will not train and no
DTCs are present
TPMS sensor(s)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test D: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator ON Solid and Message Center (if
equipped) Displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE
Normal Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors the air pressure of all 4 road tires. The wheel-mounted
tire pressure sensors transmit via radio frequency signals, to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). TPMS functionality
is integral to the SJB. These transmissions are sent approximately every 60 seconds when the vehicle speed
exceeds 32 km/h (20 mph). The TPMS function (integral to the SJB) compares each tire pressure sensor
transmission against a low-pressure limit. If it has been determined that the tire pressure has fallen below this
limit, the SJB communicates this on the vehicle communication bus to the instrument cluster. The instrument
cluster then illuminates the TPMS indicator and displays the appropriate message(s) in the message center (if
equipped).
This symptom can also be caused by a spare tire currently being used in place of a road tire. Make sure that the
spare tire is not currently in use. On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures, if the sensors are not
trained following a tire rotation, this symptom will also be present. Advise the customer that on vehicles with
different front and rear tire pressures, the sensors must be trained as directed in the Owner's Literature.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Low air pressure in tire(s)
Tire pressure sensor(s)
PINPOINT TEST D: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) INDICATOR ON SOLID AND
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED) DISPLAYS LOW TIRE PRESSURE
NOTE:
Use only the Digital Tire Gauge any time tire pressures are measured to be sure
that accurate values are obtained.
NOTE:
If a warranty case is opened for an actual TPMS fault, document and include the
actual tire pressure data in all warranty communications.
D1 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE
Measure and record the air pressure in all 4 road tires.
Adjust the air pressure for those found to be below the specification listed on the Vehicle
Certification (VC) label.
NOTE:
If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, activate
each TPMS sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Sensor Activation. The TPMS sensor does not transmit when the
vehicle is stationary.
Verify system operation.
Have the TPMS indicator and the message center (if equipped) warnings gone out?
YES : The system is functioning normally, diagnosis is complete. INFORM the customer of correct
tire pressure maintenance as instructed in the scheduled maintenance guide and the Owner's
Literature.
NO : Go to D2.
D2 CHECK THE SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Train all 4 tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training.
Connect the scan tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger SJB
Read and record the following PIDs:
Left Front Tire Pressure (LF_PRES)
Right Front Tire Pressure (RF_PRES)
Left Rear Outer Tire Pressure (LRO_PRES)
Right Rear Outer Tire Pressure (RRO_PRES)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Compare the air pressure readings recorded from the function test to those recorded in D1.
Do the compared tire pressure values match within ±5 psi, and have the TPMS indicator and
the message center (if equipped) warnings gone out?
YES : The system is functioning normally, diagnosis complete.
NO : Before installing a new sensor(s): If a sensor(s) does not respond to the Tire Pressure
Monitor Activation Tool, ATTEMPT to activate the same sensor(s) with the Tire Pressure Monitor
Activation Tool. If the sensor(s) still does not respond, MOVE the vehicle to rotate the wheels at
least one-fourth turn and ATTEMPT to activate the same sensor(s) again.
INSTALL new tire pressure sensors for those with discrepancies or those that fail to activate.
REFER to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor.
Pinpoint Test E: Smart Junction Box (SJB) Will Not Enter Sensor Training Mode When Using the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Procedure
Normal Operation
For the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to enter Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor training mode, the
SJB must receive valid inputs from the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch (OFF-ON-OFF) and ignition switch
(both OFF and RUN), and it must receive valid vehicle speed sensor input (0 km/h [0 mph]). Refer to Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training for the complete sensor training procedure.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Brake ON/OFF switch
Ignition switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST E: Smart Junction Box (SJB) WILL NOT ENTER SENSOR TRAINING MODE
WHEN USING THE Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) SENSOR TRAINING PROCEDURE
E1 CHECK THE SJB BRAKE ON/OFF (GEM_BOO) PID
Connect the scan tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger SJB
Monitor the GEM_BOO PID (SJB reads the brake switch directly).
Press and release the brake pedal while monitoring the PID.
Do the brake pedal PID values match the brake pedal positions?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : REFER to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article to continue diagnosis of the stoplamp switch.
E2 CHECK THE SJB IGNITION SWITCH PIDs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Monitor the following ignition switch PIDs:
Ignition Switch Off (IGN_O_ECU)
Ignition Switch RUN (IGN_R_ECU)
Cycle the ignition switch to the RUN and OFF position while monitoring the PIDs (SJB reads the
ignition switch directly).
Do the ignition switch status PID values match the ignition switch positions?
YES : Go to E3.
NO : REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article to continue diagnosis of the ignition
switch.
E3 CHECK THE SJB VEHICLE SPEED (VSS_GEM) PID
Monitor the VSS_GEM PID (SJB receives vehicle speed from the instrument cluster).
Does the vehicle speed PID value match the speed of the vehicle?
YES : Go to E4.
NO : REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING
CHIMES article to diagnosis of the instrument cluster/vehicle speed concern.
E4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check the connectors for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminals.
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure that they are seated correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self test.
Pinpoint Test F: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator FLASHES for 70 Seconds and Then
Remains ON Solid When the Ignition Key is Turned to the ON Position, the Message Center (if equipped)
Displays TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR or MONITOR FAULT and DTC B2872 or B287A is Present
Normal Operation
If there is a fault with 1, 2 or 3 of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors, DTC B2872 will be
set, the TPMS warning indicator will flash for 70 seconds and then remain ON solid when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
FAULT.
If the Smart Junction Box (SJB) does not get a response from all 4 of the TPMS sensors, DTC B287A will be
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
set and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT.
B2872 Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - When 1, 2 or 3 of the tire pressure sensors are faulted or not
responding, the SJB will set DTC B2872.
B287A Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - When all 4 of the tire pressure sensors are faulted, not responding
or not heard by the SJB, the SJB will set DTC B287A.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
TPMS sensor(s) missing
TPMS sensor(s) not trained to the vehicle
TPMS sensor(s) swapped due to wheel swap
TPMS sensor(s) damaged
Vehicle communication issue
SJB
PINPOINT TEST F: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) INDICATOR FLASHES FOR 70
SECONDS AND THEN REMAINS ON SOLID WHEN THE IGNITION KEY IS TURNED TO THE
ON POSITION, THE MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED) DISPLAYS TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
OR MONITOR FAULT AND DTC B2872 OR B287A IS PRESENT
NOTE:
If a warranty case is opened for an actual TPMS fault, document and include the
actual tire pressure data in all warranty communications.
F1 CHECK THE SENSOR IDs AND SYSTEM STATUS PIDs
Connect the scan tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger SJB
Read and record the following PIDs:
Left Front Tire Transmitter Identifier (LF_ID)
Right Front Tire Transmitter Identifier (RF_ID)
Left Rear Tire Transmitter Identifier (LR_ID)
Right Rear Tire Transmitter Identifier (RR_ID)
Monitor the TPMS system status (TP_STAT) PID.
Does the TP_STAT PID display SENSOR FAULT?
YES : Go to F2.
NO : If the TP_STAT PID displays SYSTEM FAULT, go to F3.
F2 CARRY OUT THE SENSOR TRAINING PROCEDURE
Train all 4 tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training.
Did all of the tire pressure sensors transmit correctly and did the horn sound when each tire
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
pressure sensor transmitted to the SJB?
YES : Using the scan tool, LOCATE the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB
module.
COMPARE these values to those recorded prior to the TPMS sensor training procedure.
Disregarding sensor position, any sensor identifiers that do not match those retrieved from the
module were changed, but not retrained. The sensors are now trained to the vehicle, diagnosis is
complete.
DOCUMENT all TPMS sensor identifiers on the applicable warranty claim.
VERIFY system operation.
NO : Before installing a new sensor(s) : If a sensor(s) does not respond to the Tire Pressure
Monitor Activation Tool, ATTEMPT to activate the same sensor(s) with the Tire Pressure Monitor
Activation Tool. If the sensor(s) still does not respond, MOVE the vehicle to rotate the wheels at
least one-fourth of a turn and ATTEMPT to activate the same sensor(s) again.
If the sensor(s) fails to train a second time, INSTALL a new tire pressure sensor(s). REFER to Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor.
F3 TP_STAT PID EQUALS SYSTEM FAULT WITH DTC B287A PRESENT
Train all 4 tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training.
Did all of the tire pressure sensors transmit correctly and did the horn sound when each tire
pressure sensor transmitted to the SJB?
YES : Using the scan tool, LOCATE the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB
module.
COMPARE these values to those recorded prior to the TPMS sensor training procedure.
Disregarding sensor position, any sensor identifiers that do not match those retrieved from the
module were changed, but not retrained. The sensors are now trained to the vehicle, diagnosis is
complete.
DOCUMENT all TPMS sensor identifiers on the applicable warranty claim.
VERIFY system operation.
NO : Before diagnosing the SJB : If the sensors do not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor
Activation Tool, ATTEMPT to activate the same sensors with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation
Tool a second time. If the sensors still do not respond, MOVE the vehicle to rotate the wheels at
least one-fourth of a turn and ATTEMPT to activate the same sensors again.
If the sensors fail to train a second time, go to F4.
F4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Disconnect all the SJB electrical connectors.
Check the connectors for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminals.
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure that they are seated correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : NOTE: The sensors may not be present. DISMOUNT the tire. REFER to Wheel and Tire.
VERIFY that the sensors are present and mounted to the wheels. If missing, INSTALL new
sensors.
If the sensors are present, INSTALL a new SJB module. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self test.
Pinpoint Test G: DTC B106A - Pressure Sensor Range Bit Incorrect State
Normal Operation
This DTC may be encountered if a sensor designed for a different application is installed. Low pressure
applications utilize a black- or blue-colored sensor, while heavy duty applications utilize a green-colored sensor.
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) will only allow one type of sensor to be trained using the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor training procedure. Make sure the correct sensors are used to avoid
compatibility issues.
B106A Pressure Sensor Range Bit Incorrect State - When an attempt has been made to train a noncompatible sensor, the SJB will set DTC B106A.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Incorrect tire pressure sensor(s) installed
PINPOINT TEST G: DTC B106A - PRESSURE SENSOR RANGE BIT INCORRECT STATE
G1 DETERMINE IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH AN INCORRECT SENSOR
Train all 4 tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training.
Did all of the tire pressure sensors transmit correctly and did the horn sound when each tire
pressure sensor transmitted to the SJB?
YES : CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self test. VERIFY system operation.
NO : Before installing a new sensor(s) : If a sensor(s) does not respond to the Tire Pressure
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Monitor Activation Tool, ATTEMPT to activate the same sensor(s) with the Tire Pressure Monitor
Activation Tool. If the sensor(s) still does not respond, MOVE the vehicle to rotate the wheels at
least one-fourth of a turn and ATTEMPT to activate the same sensor(s) again.
If the sensor(s) fails to train a second time, INSTALL a new tire pressure sensor(s). REFER to Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor.
Pinpoint Test H: DTC B106B - Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery
Normal Operation
If there is a fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), such as a damaged or missing sensor(s),
damaged module or a communication issue within the vehicle, DTCs are set in the Smart Junction Box (SJB),
the TPMS warning indicator will flash for 70 seconds and then remain ON solid when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
FAULT.
The tire pressure sensor is battery powered.
This DTC may be set when attempting to train a tire pressure sensor(s) with a low battery.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Tire pressure sensor battery
Tire pressure sensor(s)
PINPOINT TEST H: DTC B106B - TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR LOW BATTERY
H1 DETERMINE WHICH SENSOR HAS A LOW BATTERY
Train all 4 tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training.
Did all of the tire pressure sensors transmit correctly and did the horn sound when each tire
pressure sensor transmitted to the SJB?
YES : CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self test. VERIFY system operation.
NO : Before installing a new sensor(s) : If a sensor(s) does not respond to the Tire Pressure
Monitor Activation Tool, ATTEMPT to activate the same sensor(s) with the Tire Pressure Monitor
Activation Tool. If the sensor(s) still does not respond, MOVE the vehicle to rotate the wheels at
least one-fourth of a turn and ATTEMPT to activate the same sensor(s) again.
If the sensor(s) fails to train a second time, INSTALL a new tire pressure sensor(s). REFER to Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) SENSOR TRAINING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Activation Tool, Tire Pressure
Monitor
204-363
Vehicle Communication Module
software with appropriate
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
hardware, or equivalent scan tool
System (IDS)
NOTE:
If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go
into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake
them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart
Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation.
NOTE:
The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle,
in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other
vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance
operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and
portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE:
If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool,
attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation
Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels
at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again.
NOTE:
The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does
not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the
horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE
NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated.
NOTE:
For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series
and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire
rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate.
For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will
not affect the system.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position.
The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
NOTE:
It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this
time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place 180
degrees from the valve stem.
6. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will
sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
Fig. 14: Identifying Special Tool On LF Tire Side Wall Opposite (180 Degrees) From Valve Stem
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire
sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF
tire pressure sensor.
Fig. 15: Identifying Position Of Activation Tool
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB
will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated.
8. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete,
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be
verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds
twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on
the applicable warranty claim.
NOTE:
This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the
manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a
newly programmed SJB.
10. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB
On-Demand Self Test.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) SENSOR ACTIVATION
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Activation Tool, Tire Pressure
Monitor
NOTE:
204-363
The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" after 30 minutes of
inactivity to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information
while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit
the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall, 180 degrees from the tire
valve stem.
NOTE:
The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful
response from a tire pressure sensor.
3. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor, activate the
sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the appropriate Symptom Chart under DIAGNOSTIC TESTS .
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WHEEL AND TIRE
Material
Item
Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric
Compound
XG-3-A
Specification
ESE-M1C171-A
Fig. 16: Exploded View Of Wheel Nuts & Tire With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
1012
Description
Wheel nut (5 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
2
-
Wheel and tire assembly
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not use heat to loosen a seized wheel nut or damage to the wheel and
wheel bearing can occur.
1. With the weight of the vehicle on the wheels, loosen the wheel nuts.
2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
3. Remove the 5 wheel nuts.
4. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign material present on the mounting surface of the wheel and
the mounting surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc.
Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are
secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the
wheel. Failure to follow these instructions when installing wheels
may result in the wheel nuts loosening and the wheel coming off
while the vehicle is in motion, which could result in loss of control,
leading to serious injury or death to vehicle occupant(s).
1. Clean the wheel mounting surfaces and apply a thin coat of silicone grease and dielectric compound to
the wheel hub pilot surface (inner wheel lip surface only).
2. Install the wheel and tire assembly.
WARNING: Retighten wheel nuts within 160 km (100 mi) after a wheel is
reinstalled. Wheels can loosen after initial tightening. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle
occupant(s).
CAUTION: Failure to tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern can result in high
brake disc runout, which will speed up the development of brake
roughness, shudder, and vibration.
3. Install the 5 wheel nuts.
Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern.
Tighten to 135 Nm (100 lb-ft).
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
WHEEL AND TIRE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Digital Tire Gauge
Tool Number
204-354
Fig. 17: Exploded View Of Wheel & Tire With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
1508
1007
Description
Tire
Wheel
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Failure to follow the instructions below may result in damage to the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor.
NOTE:
Use only the Digital Tire Gauge any time tire pressures are measured to be sure
that accurate values are obtained.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
A wheel and tire equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor will have the following verbiage stamped or cast on the wheel: SENSOR
MAY BE INSIDE.
NOTE:
The TPMS sensor is mounted to the wheel 180 degrees opposite of the valve
stem and is held in place by a stainless steel strap. The sensor is not mounted
to the valve stem.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheel and Tire.
NOTE:
Do not allow the tire beads to move beyond the wheel mid-plane (middle of
the wheel) when separating the beads from the wheels, damage to the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor may occur.
Fig. 18: Locating Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Tire and valve stem position is critical to prevent damage to the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor when using a paddle-type
bead separator.
NOTE:
Some machines may have a nylon roller bead separator at the 12 o'clock
position instead of the paddle-type bead separator at the 3 o'clock
position.
2. Position the wheel and tire assembly on a suitable tire machine and separate both beads of the tire from
the wheel.
For a paddle-type tire machine, position the valve stem at the 12 o'clock or 6 o'clock position and
the paddle at the 3 o'clock position.
For a roller-type tire machine, align the valve stem with the roller at any position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Fig. 19: Identifying Valve Stem And Paddle Position
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 20: Identifying Valve Stem And Roller
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Index-mark the valve stem and wheel weight positions on the tire.
3. Place the wheel and tire assembly on the turntable of the tire machine with the valve stem between the 5
o'clock and 6 o'clock positions and the machine arm at the 12 o'clock position and dismount the outer
bead from the wheel.
Fig. 21: Identifying Wheel And Tire Assembly On Turntable Tire Machine (Dismounting Outer
Bead)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Reset the wheel and tire assembly on the turntable of the tire machine with the valve stem between the 5
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
o'clock and 6 o'clock positions and the machine arm at the 12 o'clock position and dismount the inner
bead from the wheel.
Fig. 22: Resetting Wheel And Tire Assembly On Turntable Of Tire Machine
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Inspect the TPMS sensor, cradle and strap for damage. Install new parts as necessary.
For information on removal and installation of the TPMS sensor, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor.
When installing a new wheel, reuse the TPMS sensor from the previous wheel if possible. The
TPMS will not have to be trained if the sensor is reused. The new wheel will not come with a
sensor strap. A sensor strap kit will need to be ordered with the new wheel.
ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Damage to the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor may result if the
tire mounting is not carried out as instructed.
NOTE:
Use only a soap and water solution to lubricate the tire. Use of anything
other than soap and water may result in damage to the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor.
NOTE:
Do not mount the tire at this time.
1. Position the wheel on the turntable of the tire machine, then lubricate and position the bottom bead of the
tire on the wheel.
2. Position the wheel to align the valve stem with the machine arm at the 12 o'clock position and mount the
bottom bead of the tire.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Identifying Alignment Position Of Valve Stem With Machine Arm (Bottom Bead Of Tire)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Reposition the wheel to align the valve stem with the machine arm at the 12 o'clock position and mount
the top bead of the tire.
Fig. 24: Identifying Alignment Position Of Valve Stem With Machine Arm (Top Bead)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Use only the Digital Tire Gauge any time tire pressures are measured to
make sure that accurate values are obtained.
4. Using the Digital Tire Gauge, inflate the tire to the pressure specified on the Vehicle Certification (VC)
label located on the driver door or door pillar.
Proceed to Step 5 if the tire beads do not seat at the specified inflation pressure.
WARNING: If there is a need to exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire, in order to seat the beads, follow ALL the steps
listed below. Failure to follow these steps may result in serious
personal injury.
5. The following steps should only be carried out if the tire beads cannot be seated by inflating the tire
up to the maximum inflation pressure listed on the tire sidewall.
1. Relubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area.
2. Install a remote valve and pressure gauge.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
3. Wear eye and ear protection and stand at a minimum of 3.65 m (12 ft) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
4. Inflate tire using the remote valve and pressure gauge until the beads have seated or until the
pressure gauge is 138 kPa (20 psi) more than maximum inflation pressure on tire sidewall. If beads
have not seated, deflate the tire and proceed to the next step.
5. Place the wheel and tire assembly in an OSHA-approved tire safety cage.
6. Inflate the tire using the remote valve and pressure gauge until the beads have seated or until the
pressure gauge is 276 kPa (40 psi) more than maximum inflation pressure on the tire sidewall. Do
not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) above the maximum pressure on tire sidewall. Install a new tire if
the beads do not seat at this pressure.
6. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheel and Tire.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF SUBASSEMBLIES
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) SENSOR
Fig. 25: Exploded View Of Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
1A150/1A189
1A175
14C202
Description
Tire pressure sensor/sensor kit
Sensor cradle
Locking clip (also part of 1A189)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release
hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these
chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of
the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When
disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous
material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be
disposed of accordingly.
NOTE:
Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their
application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor
being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different
colored sensors are not interchangeable.
NOTE:
The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the
cradle.
NOTE:
The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting
or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed.
1. Remove the tire from the wheel. For additional information, refer to Wheel and Tire.
NOTE:
Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or
damage to the sensor locking clip may occur.
2. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip.
Fig. 26: Locating Sensor Locking Clip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or
damage to the sensor may occur.
3. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle.
Fig. 27: Removing Sensor From Cradle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the sensor.
ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Damage to the sensor may occur if excessive force is applied during
sensor installation.
NOTE:
Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make
a "click" noise when correctly seated.
1. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle
and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle.
Fig. 28: Positioning Sensor Into Cradle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct
orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be
inserted backward.
2. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor.
Fig. 29: Locating Locking Clip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting
or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed.
3. Install the tire onto the wheel. For additional information, refer to Wheel and Tire.
NOTE:
A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver
mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor
on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue
with the sensor training procedure.
4. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Sensor Training.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) STRAP AND CRADLE
Material
Item
Wheel and Tire Cleaner
ZC-37-A
Specification
-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Fig. 30: Exploded View Of Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap & Cradle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
1A177/1A193
1A150/1A189
1A175
14C202
Description
Strap/strap kit
Tire pressure sensor/sensor kit
Sensor cradle (also part of 1A193)
Locking clip (also part of 1A189)
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release
hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these
chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of
the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When
disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous
material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be
disposed of accordingly.
NOTE:
Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their
application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor
being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different
colored sensors are not interchangeable.
NOTE:
The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap
kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter, but
all strap kits share the same base part number.
1. Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor. For additional information, refer to Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor .
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that
have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury.
2. Remove a factory-installed strap in the following sequence:
1. Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item on both
sides of the buckle, approximately 25 mm (0.98 in) from the buckle.
2. Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap.
3. Discard the strap.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Fig. 31: Removing Factory Installed Strap
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. To remove a dealer-installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the
worm gear.
Discard the strap.
NOTE:
To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly.
4. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and
prying up.
ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will
make a "click" noise when fully seated.
1. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the
cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle.
NOTE:
Metal scrapers may damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic
scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue.
NOTE:
The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180
degrees from the valve stem.
2. Using wheel and tire cleaner, clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed.
Fig. 32: Locating Sensor & Cradle Area
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the
sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) of the
wheel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor.
3. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop
well 180 degrees from the valve stem.
Fig. 33: Locating Sensor & Cradle Into Wheel Drop Well
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This
will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor.
Fig. 34: Locating Worm Gear And Locking Clip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the
strap and sensor are mounted at the lowest spot possible to avoid
damaging the sensor during wheel and tire disassembly and assembly.
NOTE:
Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm
gear.
5. Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 in) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear.
Tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Wheels & Tires - Edge & MKX
Fig. 35: Identifying Worm Gear Distance From Sensor (With Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting
or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed.
6. Install the tire onto the wheel. For additional information, refer to Wheel and Tire.
NOTE:
A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver
mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor
on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue
with the sensor training procedure.
7. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Sensor Training.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:51:01 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
2008 TRANSMISSIONS
Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Air cleaner assembly bolt
Air cleaner assembly outlet hose clamp
Manual control lever nut
Selector lever bolts
Selector lever cable bracket bolts
Selector lever cable grommet nuts
Selector lever knob screws
N.m
11
5
18
12
12
10
2
lb-ft
8
13
9
9
-
lb-in
44
89
18
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
Fig. 1: Identifying External Controls
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
Description
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:20
10:54:15 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
1
2
3
4
5
7A257
7E395
7B229
-
6
7
8
7K004
7L010
-
Manual control lever
Adjuster locking tab (part of 7E395)
Selector lever cable
Selector lever cable bracket
Selector lever cable grommet (part of
7E395)
Selector lever assembly
Selector lever knob
Transmission control (TC)/overdrive
(O/D) cancel switch (part of 7L010)
The transaxle selector lever linkage consists of:
a selector lever cable that connects the transaxle manual control lever to the selector lever assembly.
a brake shift interlock actuator (BSIA) that is integral to the selector lever assembly.
a transmission control (TC) switch that turns off the operation of 6th gear.
The selector lever assembly:
locks the transaxle selector lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
requires the transaxle selector lever to be in the PARK position to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
Range Selection
This transaxle has 5 range positions: P, R, N, D and L.
Fig. 2: Identifying 5 Range Positions
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Park
In the PARK position:
there is no powerflow through the transaxle.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
the parking pawl locks the final drive.
the engine may be started.
the ignition key may be removed.
Reverse
In the REVERSE position:
the vehicle may be operated in a rearward direction, at a reduced gear ratio.
engine braking will occur.
Neutral
In the NEUTRAL position:
there is no powerflow through the transaxle.
the output shaft is not held and is free to turn.
the engine may be started.
Drive Position With Overdrive (O/D)
DRIVE is the normal position for most forward driving.
DRIVE provides:
automatic shifts - 1st through 6th gears.
apply and release of the torque converter clutch (TCC).
maximum fuel economy during normal operation.
Manual L Position
This position provides:
maximum engine braking.
downshifts to the lowest available gear for the current vehicle speed.
Manual L position allows for 1st gear when the vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Drive with Grade Assist - Transmission Control (TC) Switch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Identifying Overdrive Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Drive with overdrive (O/D) cancel and grade assist is activated when the TC switch is pressed. The TC switch is
located on the selector lever knob. When the TC switch is pressed, the 6th gear or O/D upshift is prevented or
the transaxle shifts down to 5th gear. The TC switch is meant to be used when driving conditions cause
excessive shifting from 6th to other gears such as hilly terrain, mountainous areas or when engine braking is
required.
O/D Cancel
O/D is cancelled.
The transaxle operates in gears 1 through 5.
The O/D OFF lamp illuminates on the instrument cluster.
Grade Assist
Improves vehicle handling in hilly terrain or mountainous areas by providing engine braking and
extending lower gear operation on uphill climbs.
Additional engine braking is provided through the automatic transaxle shift strategy which reacts to
vehicle inputs (vehicle acceleration, accelerator pedal, brake pedal and vehicle speed).
The transaxle will select gears that will provide the engine braking desired, based on the vehicle inputs,
this will increase engine RPM during engine braking.
It is recommended to return to DRIVE mode on flat terrain to provide the best fuel economy and transaxle
function. The transaxle returns to O/D when the TC switch is pressed again or anytime the key is turned OFF.
Gear Availability
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Identifying Gear Availability
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Brake Shift Interlock
The brake shift interlock system consist of the:
BSIA.
ignition switch.
brake pedal position (BPP) switch powered by fuse 71 (10A).
transmission range (TR) sensor.
instrument cluster (IC).
fuse 5 (10A).
smart junction box (SJB).
When the ignition switch is in RUN/START, the solenoid inhibits the selector lever movement (from the PARK
position) if the brake pedal is not depressed.
Inputs to SJB
Fuse(s):
5 (10A)
71 (10A)
Brake pedal position (BPP) switch
Output from SJB
Brake shift interlock actuator (BSIA)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Ignition switch position (RUN/START)
Transmission range (TR) sensor (PARK)
Instrument cluster (IC)
Brake Shift Interlock Operation
The BSIA inhibits the selector lever movement from the PARK position by mechanically blocking the detent
pawl of the selector lever mechanism. When the brake pedal is depressed (BPP switch closed) with the ignition
key in the RUN/START position and the transmission in PARK, the BSIA is energized by the SJB, this allows
the selector lever to be moved out of the PARK position.
Fig. 5: Identifying Brake Shift Interlock Operation
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Proper Operation Requirements
Three requirements for the selector lever to be moved from the PARK position are:
Ignition switch in the RUN/START position
TR sensor in the PARK position
BPP switch closed (brakes applied - brake lamps on)
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
73 III Digital Multimeter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause before proceeding to
the next step.
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. Go to SYMPTOM CHART - EXTERNAL
CONTROLS table or Go to SYMPTOM CHART - NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) table.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Transmission selector lever cable
Manual control lever
Selector lever or selector lever knob
Selector lever slider bunching or binding
Electrical
DTC CHART
DTC
Component
B2572
Brake Shift
Interlock
Description
Brake Shift
Interlock Output
Circuit Failure
Fuse
Smart junction box (SJB) fuse(s):
5 (10A)
71 (10A)
Connections
Wiring harness
Brake pedal position (BPP) switch
Brake shift interlock actuator (BSIA)
Transmission control (TC) switch
Condition
Symptom
The associated
Brake shift
circuitry connected to interlock is
the smart junction box inoperative or
Action
Go to
Pinpoint
Test A .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
B2573
Brake Shift
Interlock
Brake Shift
Interlock Output
Circuit Short to
Ground
(SJB) or fuse, or the
SJB itself may have an
issue causing a brake
shift interlock concern.
The associated
circuitry connected to
the SJB or fuse, or the
SJB itself may have an
issue causing a brake
shift interlock concern.
does not operate
correctly.
Brake shift
Go to
interlock is
Pinpoint
inoperative or
Test A .
does not operate
correctly.
Symptom Chart - External Controls
SYMPTOM CHART - EXTERNAL CONTROLS
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Brake shift interlock
system does not
release/lock
correctly
Brake shift interlock
system does not
release/lock
correctly
-
Transmission
control
(TC)/overdrive
(O/D) cancel switch
does not operate
correctly
Circuitry
open/shorted
Fuse(s)
Brake pedal
position (BPP)
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Brake shift
interlock actuator
(BSIA) damaged
INSTALL a new selector lever assembly.
REFER to SELECTOR LEVER.
Transmission range
(TR) sensor
DIAGNOSE and REPAIR all TR sensor
DTCs. REFER to AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50
article.
Instrument cluster
(IC)
Circuitry
open/shorted
PCM
TC switch
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Selector lever
linkage out of
adjustment
REFER to SELECTOR LEVER CABLE
ADJUSTMENT.
Manual control
lever not aligned
correctly on the
sensor (flat
REMOVE the manual control lever nut and
CHECK the alignment of the manual control
lever.
Selector lever
linkage is out of
correct gear
relationship
-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
surfaces do not line
up)
-
Loose selector
lever cable bracket
CHECK the selector lever cable bracket.
TIGHTEN as necessary.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
NOTE:
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) symptoms should be identified using the
diagnostic tools that are available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of
their uses and a glossary of common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article. Since it is possible any one of multiple systems may be
the cause of a symptom, it may be necessary to use a process of elimination
type of diagnostic approach to pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the
causal system for the symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article for the next likely system and continue diagnosis.
SYMPTOM CHART - NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Vibration - a high frequency
(20-80 Hz) that is felt
through the seat or selector
lever. Changes with engine
speed
Selector lever cable
incorrectly routed, grounded
out or loose
CHECK the selector lever
cable. REPAIR as
necessary.
Electrical Connectors
Fig. 6: Selector Lever Harness Connector C3245 (vehicle harness side)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin Number
1
Circuit
CET53 (BU/OG)
2
3
4
CDC41 (WH/BN)
VLN37 (BU/WH)
GD140 (BK/GN)
Circuit Function
Brake shift interlock actuator (BSIA)
solenoid power circuit
Park position signal to ignition switch
Power to PRNDL bulb
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
5
6
CET34 (BN/GN)
CBP30 (YE/BU)
Transmission control (TC) switch signal
TC switch power circuit
Fig. 7: Selector Lever Harness Connector C3245 (component side)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin Number
Circuit
1
CET53 (OG)
2
3
4
5
6
CDC41 (RD)
VLN37 (BU)
GD140 (BK)
CET34 (WH)
CBP30 (BN)
Circuit Function
Brake shift interlock actuator (BSIA) solenoid
power circuit
Park position signal to ignition switch
Power to PRNDL bulb
Ground
Transmission control (TC) switch signal
TC switch power circuit
Pinpoint Tests
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Transmission Controls schematic and connector
information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Shift Interlock schematic and connector
information.
PINPOINT TEST A: THE BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK SYSTEM DOES NOT RELEASE/LOCK
CORRECTLY
A1 TEST THE BRAKE LIGHTS
Apply the brake pedal and view the brake lights.
Do the brake lights illuminate?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : REFER to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article.
A2 TEST SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) FUSE 5 (10A)
Key in OFF position.
Check fuse: SJB 5 (10A)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : INSTALL a new fuse. Go to A3.
A3 TEST BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK ACTUATOR (BSIA) POWER CIRCUIT
Disconnect: Selector Lever Harness C3245
Key in ON position.
Fig. 8: Measuring Voltage Between Selector Lever Harness Connector C3245-1, Circuit
CET53 (BU/OG) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between selector lever harness C3245-1, circuit CET53 (BU/OG) and ground,
while applying the brake pedal.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to A6.
NO : Go to A4.
A4 TEST THE BSIA POWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280C
Fig. 9: Measuring Resistance Between Selector Lever Harness C3245-1, Circuit CET53
(BU/OG) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between selector lever harness C3245-1, circuit CET53 (BU/OG) and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : REPAIR circuit CET53 (BU/OG) for a short to ground. TEST the system for normal
operation.
A5 TEST THE BSIA POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance Between Selector Lever Harness C3245-1, CET53 (BU/OG) &
SJB C2280C-23
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between selector lever harness C3245-1, circuit CET53 (BU/OG) and SJB
C2280C-23, circuit CET53 (BU/OG).
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit CET53 (BU/OG) for an open.
A6 TEST BSIA GROUND CIRCUIT
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance Between Floor Selector Lever Harness Connector C3245-4,
GD112 (BK/GN) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between floor selector lever harness connector C3245-4, circuit GD112
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
(BK/GN) and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new selector lever. REFER to SELECTOR LEVER.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD112 (BK/GN). TEST the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST B: TRANSMISSION CONTROL (TC)/OVERDRIVE (O/D) CANCEL SWITCH
DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
B1 TEST THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC)
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Using the scan tool, monitor the TCS PID while cycling the transmission control (TC) (O/D cancel)
switch.
Does the TCS PID cycle from depressed to not depressed?
YES : REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING
CHIMES article.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 CHECK SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) FUSE 71 (10A)
Key in OFF position.
Check fuse: SJB 71 (10A)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : Go to B4.
B3 TEST THE TC (O/D CANCEL) SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Selector Lever Harness C3245
Disconnect: SJB Fuse 71 (10A)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance Between Selector Lever Harness Connector C3245-6, Circuit
CBP30 (YE/BU)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between selector lever harness C3245-6, circuit CBP30 (YE/BU) and the
output side of SJB fuse 71 (10A).
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit CBP30 (YE/BU) for an open. RECONNECT all components. TEST the
system for normal operation.
B4 TEST THE TC (O/D CANCEL) SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Selector Lever Harness C3245
Disconnect: SJB Fuse 71 (10A)
Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance Between Selector Lever Harness Connector C3245-6, CBP30
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
(YE/BU) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between selector lever harness C3245-6, circuit CBP30 (YE/BU) and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B6.
NO : REPAIR circuit CBP30 (YE/BU) for a short to ground. RECONNECT all components. TEST
the system for normal operation.
B5 TEST THE TC (O/D CANCEL) SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: PCM C175b
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance Between Selector Lever Harness Connector C3245-5, Circuit
CET34 (BN/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between selector lever harness C3245-5, circuit CET34 (BN/GN) and PCM
C175b-16, circuit CET34 (BN/GN).
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B7.
NO : REPAIR circuit CET34 (BN/GN) for an open. RECONNECT all components. TEST the
system for normal operation.
B6 TEST THE TC (O/D CANCEL) SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance Between Selector Lever Harness Connector C3245-5, CET34
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
(BN/GN) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between selector lever harness C3245-5, circuit CET34 (BN/GN) and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B7.
NO : REPAIR circuit CET34 (BN/GN) for a short to ground. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B7 TEST THE TC (O/D CANCEL) SWITCH
Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance Between Selector Lever Connector C3245-5 & C3245-6,
Component Side
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between selector lever C3245-5 and C3245-6, component side, while
cycling the TC (O/D cancel) switch.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms when pressed and greater than 10,000 ohms when released?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : INSPECT the selector lever wiring harness for damage and repair as necessary. If the selector
lever wiring harness is not damaged, INSTALL a new selector lever knob. REFER to SELECTOR
LEVER KNOB. TEST the system for normal operation.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK OVERRIDE
NOTE:
If it is necessary to use the override procedure to move the selector lever out of
the PARK position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are
not operational. Before driving the vehicle, verify that the brake lights are
working.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the
selector lever from being moved out of PARK when the ignition is in the ON
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position when the
ignition is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.
NOTE:
Relief located at the front of the access panel.
2. Remove the override cap.
Fig. 17: Identifying Override Cap
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using a suitable tool, depress the brake shift interlock override mechanism on the selector lever, apply the
brake, depress the button on the selector lever and move the selector lever into NEUTRAL.
Fig. 18: Depressing The Brake Shift Interlock Override Mechanism
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Start the vehicle.
5. To install, reverse the procedure.
SELECTOR LEVER CABLE ADJUSTMENT
1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 19: Locating Selector Lever Cable End
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Place the manual control lever in DRIVE.
1. Rotate the manual control lever clockwise until it stops.
2. Rotate the manual control lever counterclockwise one detent.
Fig. 20: Rotating Manual Control Lever Clockwise & Counterclockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Place the selector lever in DRIVE.
Fig. 21: Placing Selector Lever In Drive
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Unlock the adjuster.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
1. Pry the latch up.
2. Push the lock tab to slide it over.
Fig. 22: Pushing Lock Tab To Slide It Over
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Slide the selector lever cable end forward or backward to align it with the manual control lever.
Fig. 23: Sliding Cable End Forward Or Backward To Align It With Manual Control Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. With the adjuster locking tab released, connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever.
Fig. 24: Connecting Selector Lever Cable End To Manual Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Slide the release tab back to lock the adjuster.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 25: Sliding Release Tab Back To Lock Adjuster
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Verify that the vehicle starts in PARK and NEUTRAL only and that the reverse lamps illuminate in
REVERSE.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
SELECTOR LEVER CABLE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 26: Identifying Selector Lever Cable With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
14A464
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6758
N606678
9C632
9C662
7E395
W500213
7B229
78061A16
Description
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector
Engine vent tube
Air cleaner assembly bolt
Air cleaner outlet tube clamp
Air cleaner assembly
Selector lever cable
Selector lever cable bracket bolts
Selector lever cable bracket
Selector lever trim ring (MKX only)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
78045A76
78045A06
W706092
78047A04
7K004
W707142
57809
Center console trim cover
Center console side cover
Power outlet trim cover fasteners
Power outlet trim cover
Selector lever assembly
Selector lever cable floor grommet nuts
Selector lever cable floor grommet
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the
air cleaner assembly.
Fig. 27: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe.
Fig. 28: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 29: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt.
Fig. 30: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner
outlet pipe assembly.
Fig. 31: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 32: Locating Selector Lever Cable End
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Release the 2 tabs, remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever cable bracket and position the
cable aside.
Fig. 33: Locating Selector Lever Cable Bracket & Tabs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the 3 bolts and the selector lever cable bracket.
Fig. 34: Identifying Selector Lever Cable Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
MKX only
9. Using a suitable tool, remove the selector lever trim ring.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 35: Locating Selector Lever Trim Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
10. Lift the armrest. Using a suitable tool, remove the center console trim cover.
Fig. 36: Identifying Center Console Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Remove the 2 fasteners and position aside the power outlet trim cover.
Fig. 37: Identifying Fasteners On Power Outlet Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Remove the selector lever cable end from the selector lever.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 38: Identifying Selector Lever Cable End From Selector Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever housing.
Fig. 39: Locating Selector Lever Cable On Selector Lever Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Remove the center console side cover.
Fig. 40: Identifying Center Console Side Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Remove the 2 nuts from the grommet, route the selector lever cable from the engine compartment through
the floor and remove the selector lever cable from the passenger compartment.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:15 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 41: Identifying Grommet Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. Install the selector lever cable, position the grommet in place and install the 2 nuts.
Tighten to 10 N.m (89 lb-in).
Fig. 42: Identifying Grommet Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the center console side cover.
Fig. 43: Identifying Center Console Side Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
When installing the selector lever cable, make sure that the selector lever
cable locking tabs are locked in place and the selector lever cable end is
snapped onto the ball stud. Press the selector lever cable into the selector
lever cable bracket and listen for the cable to click in place. Pull back on
the selector lever cable to make sure that it is locked into the selector
lever cable bracket. Also make sure that the selector lever cable end is
correctly installed onto the ball stud. Pull back on the selector lever cable
end to make sure that the selector lever cable end is correctly installed.
3. Install the selector lever cable in the selector lever housing.
Fig. 44: Locating Selector Lever Cable On Selector Lever Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Place the selector lever in REVERSE.
Fig. 45: Identifying REVERSE
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the selector lever cable end on the selector lever.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 46: Identifying Selector Lever Cable End From Selector Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Place the selector lever in DRIVE.
Fig. 47: Placing Selector Lever In Drive
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Position the power outlet trim cover in place and install the 2 fasteners.
Fig. 48: Identifying Fasteners On Power Outlet Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the center console trim cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 49: Identifying Center Console Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
MKX only
9. Install the selector lever trim ring.
Fig. 50: Locating Selector Lever Trim Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
10. Position the selector lever cable bracket in place and install the 3 bolts.
Tighten to 12 N.m (9 lb-ft).
Fig. 51: Identifying Selector Lever Cable Bracket
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
11. Install the selector lever cable in the selector lever cable bracket.
Fig. 52: Locating Selector Lever Cable Bracket & Tabs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Place the manual control lever in DRIVE.
1. Rotate the manual control lever clockwise until it stops.
2. Rotate the manual control lever counterclockwise one detent.
Fig. 53: Rotating Manual Control Lever Clockwise & Counterclockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Unlock the adjuster.
1. Pry the latch up.
2. Push the lock tab to slide it over.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 54: Pushing Lock Tab To Slide It Over
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Slide the selector lever cable end forward or backward to align it with the manual control lever.
Fig. 55: Sliding Cable End Forward Or Backward To Align It With Manual Control Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. With the adjuster locking tab released, connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever.
Fig. 56: Connecting Selector Lever Cable End To Manual Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Slide the release tab back to lock the adjuster.
Fig. 57: Sliding Release Tab Back To Lock Adjuster
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
17. Connect the selector lever cable on the manual control lever.
Fig. 58: Locating Selector Lever Cable End
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt.
Tighten to 11 N.m (8 lb-ft).
Fig. 59: Locating Air Cleaner Assembly Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body.
Tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb-in).
Fig. 60: Locating Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
20. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly.
Fig. 61: Locating Engine Breather
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
21. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly.
Fig. 62: Locating Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener.
Fig. 63: Locating Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Electrical Connector & Wiring Harness Fastener
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Verify that the vehicle starts in PARK and NEUTRAL only and that the reverse lamps illuminate in
REVERSE.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
SELECTOR LEVER
Fig. 64: Exploded View Of Selector Lever Components With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part Number
78061A16
78045A76
W706092
78047A04
7E395
14A459
N606678
7K004
Description
Selector lever trim ring (MKX only)
Center console trim cover
Power outlet trim cover fasteners
Power outlet trim cover
Selector lever cable
Selector lever electrical connector
Selector lever bolts
Selector lever
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL
MKX only
1. Using a suitable tool, remove the selector lever trim ring.
Fig. 65: Locating Selector Lever Trim Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
2. Lift the armrest. Using a suitable tool, remove the center console trim cover.
Fig. 66: Identifying Center Console Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 2 fasteners and position aside the power outlet trim cover.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 67: Identifying Fasteners On Power Outlet Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the selector lever cable end from the selector lever.
Fig. 68: Identifying Selector Lever Cable End From Selector Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever housing.
Fig. 69: Locating Selector Lever Cable On Selector Lever Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector.
Fig. 70: Locating Selector Lever Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
7. Remove the bolts and the selector lever.
Fig. 71: Locating Selector Lever Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. Install the selector lever and the bolts.
Tighten to 12 N.m (9 lb-ft).
Fig. 72: Locating Selector Lever Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Connect the selector lever electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 73: Locating Selector Lever Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
When installing the selector lever cable, make sure that the selector lever
cable locking tabs are locked in place and the selector lever cable end is
snapped onto the ball stud. Press the selector lever cable into the selector
lever cable bracket and listen for the cable to click in place. Pull back on
the selector lever cable to make sure that it is locked into the selector
lever cable bracket. Also make sure that the selector lever cable end is
correctly installed onto the ball stud. Pull back on the selector lever cable
end to make sure that the selector lever cable end is correctly installed.
3. Install the selector lever cable in the selector lever housing.
Fig. 74: Locating Selector Lever Cable On Selector Lever Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Place the selector lever in REVERSE.
Fig. 75: Identifying REVERSE
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 76: Locating Selector Lever Cable End
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the selector lever cable end on the selector lever.
Fig. 77: Identifying Selector Lever Cable End From Selector Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Place the selector lever in DRIVE.
Fig. 78: Placing Selector Lever In Drive
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Position the power outlet trim cover in place and install the 2 fasteners.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 79: Identifying Fasteners On Power Outlet Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Install the center console trim cover.
Fig. 80: Identifying Center Console Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
MKX only
10. Install the selector lever trim ring.
Fig. 81: Locating Selector Lever Trim Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
11. Place the manual control lever in DRIVE.
1. Rotate the manual control lever clockwise until it stops.
2. Rotate the manual control lever counterclockwise one detent.
Fig. 82: Rotating Manual Control Lever Clockwise & Counterclockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Unlock the adjuster.
1. Pry the latch up.
2. Push the lock tab to slide it over.
Fig. 83: Pushing Lock Tab To Slide It Over
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Slide the selector lever cable end forward or backward to align it with the manual control lever.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 84: Sliding Cable End Forward Or Backward To Align It With Manual Control Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. With the adjuster locking tab released, connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever.
Fig. 85: Connecting Selector Lever Cable End To Manual Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Slide the release tab back to lock the adjuster.
Fig. 86: Sliding Release Tab Back To Lock Adjuster
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Verify that the vehicle starts in PARK and NEUTRAL only and that the reverse lamps illuminate in
REVERSE.
SELECTOR LEVER KNOB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 87: Exploded View Of Selector Lever Knob & Center Console Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
78061A16
78045A76
7C453
4
-
5
6
W790088
7L010
Description
Selector lever trim ring (MKX only)
Center console trim cover
Transmission control (TC) switch
electrical connector
Selector lever knob trim covers (part of
7L010)
Selector lever knob screw (2 required)
Selector lever knob
REMOVAL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
MKX only
1. Using a suitable tool, remove the selector lever trim ring.
Fig. 88: Locating Selector Lever Trim Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
2. Lift the armrest. Using a suitable tool, remove the center console trim cover.
Fig. 89: Identifying Center Console Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Center console side trim cover removed for clarity.
3. Disconnect the transmission control (TC) switch electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 90: Locating Transmission Control (TC) Switch Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove and discard the selector lever knob trim covers by carefully prying out on the bottom front
corners, and then pry out on the top front corner and remove the covers.
Fig. 91: Removing Selector Lever Knob Trim Covers By Carefully Prying Out On Bottom Front
Corners
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Inspect the knob body for damage. Install a new knob body if necessary.
5. Remove and discard the 2 selector lever knob screws. Remove the selector lever knob while routing the
TC switch electrical connector harness out of the selector lever.
Fig. 92: Removing Selector Lever Knob While Routing TC Switch Electrical Connector Harness
Out Of Selector Lever
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. Route the TC switch electrical connector harness through the selector lever and install the shift knob and
2 new screws. Loosely install both screws before tightening.
Tighten to 2 N.m (18 lb-in).
Fig. 93: Routing TC Switch Electrical Connector Harness Through Selector Lever
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Be sure that the selector lever knob bezel is correctly installed on the
selector lever knob.
2. Install new selector lever knob trim covers.
Fig. 94: Identifying Selector Lever Knob Trim Covers
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
EDGE only
3. Route the TC switch electrical connector wires behind the selector lever bezel light bulb wires.
1. TC switch electrical connector wires
2. Selector lever light bulb wires
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 95: Identifying Selector Lever Light Bulb Wires
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
NOTE:
Center console side trim cover removed for clarity.
4. Connect the TC switch electrical connector.
Fig. 96: Locating Transmission Control (TC) Switch Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Install the center console trim cover.
Fig. 97: Identifying Center Console Trim Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Automatic Transaxle/Transmission External Controls - Edge & MKX
MKX only
6. Install the selector lever trim ring.
Fig. 98: Locating Selector Lever Trim Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:54:16 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Ignition - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE
Engine Ignition - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and
ESE-M1C171-A
Dielectric Compound
XG-3-A
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Engine Ignition
Spark plug
Spark plug gap
Fill Capacity
-
Specification
AYFS-22FM
1.29-1.45 mm (0.051-0.057 in)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Ignition coil-on-plug bolts
Spark plugs
7
15
lb-in
62
133
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ENGINE IGNITION
The Electronic Ignition (EI) system is a coil-on-plug ignition system. The coil-on-plug ignition system consists
of:
Camshaft Position (CMP) sensors.
a Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
ignition coil-on-plugs.
spark plugs.
The CMP sensors:
are variable reluctance sensors.
are mounted in the rear of the cylinder head.
are triggered by a 3-plus-1 timing wheel on each intake camshaft.
provides camshaft rotational location information to the PCM.
The CKP sensor:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:28:42
11:28:38 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Ignition - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
is a variable reluctance sensor.
is triggered by a 36-minus-1 tooth trigger wheel mounted on the crankshaft, at the rear of the engine.
provides base timing and crankshaft speed (RPM) to the PCM.
The ignition coil-on-plugs:
change low voltage signals from the PCM to high voltage pulses.
produce the high voltage pulses to the spark plugs.
are connected directly to each spark plug.
have replaceable coil seals.
The spark plugs:
change high voltage pulses into a spark which ignites the fuel and air mixture.
originally equipped on the vehicle have a platinum-enhanced fine wire electrode for long life.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
ENGINE IGNITION
Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ENGINE IGNITION COMPONENTS - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:28:38 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Ignition - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Identifying LH Side Engine Ignition Components (With Torque Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
6758
2
-
3
4
5
6
W708833
12A375
12405
12A384
Description
Crankcase vent tube-to-valve cover
fitting quick connect coupling
Ignition coil-on-plug electrical connector
(3 required) (part of 12A581)
Ignition coil-on-plug bolt (3 required)
Ignition coil-on-plug (3 required)
Spark plug (3 required)
Coil seal (3 required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:28:38 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Ignition - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Identifying RH Side Engine Ignition Components (With Torque Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
4
5
W708833
12A375
12405
12A384
Description
Ignition coil-on-plug electrical connector
(3 required) (part of 12A581)
Ignition coil-on-plug bolt (3 required)
Ignition coil-on-plug (3 required)
Spark plug (3 required)
Coil seal (3 required)
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures in this article.
IGNITION COIL-ON-PLUG
Material
Item
Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric
Compound
XG-3-A
Specification
ESE-M1C171-A
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
LH side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:28:38 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Ignition - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling from the valve cover fitting and position
aside. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
RH side
NOTE:
The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH ignition coilon-plugs.
2. Remove the upper intake manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
Both sides
3. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
NOTE:
When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will
break the seal and ease removal.
4. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs.
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
5. Inspect the coil seals for rips, nicks or tears. Remove and discard any damaged coil seals.
To install, slide the new coil seal onto the coil until it is fully seated at the top of the coil.
Fig. 3: Identifying Coil Seal On Coil
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil-on-plug boots before
attaching to the spark plugs.
SPARK PLUGS
Material
Item
Specification
Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:28:38 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Ignition - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Compound
XG-3-A
ESE-M1C171-A
REMOVAL
LH side
1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling from the valve cover fitting and position
aside. For additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
RH side
NOTE:
The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH spark plugs
only.
2. Remove the upper intake manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
Both sides
3. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
NOTE:
When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will
break the seal and ease removal.
4. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs.
CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs or
damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE:
Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well
before removing the spark plugs.
5. Remove the 6 spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
Both sides
1. Inspect the 6 spark plugs.
Item
1
Part Number Description
Deposits
bridging spark
plug gap
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:28:38 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Ignition - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
6
-
7
-
Wet black
deposits (oil
fouling)
Dry black
deposits
(carbon
fouling)
Normal spark
plug
Pre-ignition
Overheating
Fused spot
deposits
Fig. 4: Identifying Spark Plugs Condition
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:28:38 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE Engine Ignition - 3.5L - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Identifying Spark Plug Gap (With Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or
damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug.
3. Install the 6 spark plugs.
Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coilon-plug boots before attaching to the spark plugs.
4. Install the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs and the 6 bolts.
Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
5. Connect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
RH side
6. Install the upper intake manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
LH side
7. Position and connect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling to the valve cover fitting. For
additional information, refer to FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:28:38 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Floor console center bolts
Floor console front side bolts
Floor console rear bolts
Floor console-to-instrument panel bolts
Front of dash bolt
Instrument panel-to-steering column bracket bolts
LH instrument panel bolts
LH instrument panel-to-body bolt
LH instrument panel-to-floor bolts
RH instrument panel bolt
RH instrument panel-to-body bolt
RH instrument panel-to-floor bolt
Steering column pinch bolt
Torx head bolt
Nm
6
6
6
6
20
22
20
7
22
22
7
22
23
30
lb-ft
15
16
15
16
16
16
17
22
lb-in
53
53
53
53
62
62
-
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
INSTRUMENT PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:39
11:03:35 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Identifying Edge Instrument Panel (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W505002
04459
3
W707628
4
044D70
5
04608
6
04302
7
06024
Description
Steering column cover screw (2 required)
Steering column opening cover
Instrument panel cluster finish panel
screw (2 required)
Instrument panel cluster finish panel
Instrument panel lower center finish
panel
Instrument panel upper center finish
panel
Glove compartment
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
8
9
10
061A58
04480
04481
Glove compartment dampener
RH instrument panel end trim panel
LH instrument panel end trim panel
Fig. 2: Identifying Edge Instrument Panel (2 Of 2) With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
11
12
Part Number
W712386
W712387
13
W711648
14
15
W706246
W710309
Description
LH instrument panel bolt (2 required)
Torx head bolt
Instrument panel-to-steering column
bracket bolt (2 required)
RH instrument panel bolt
Instrument panel-to-front of dash bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
16
17
W712403
3RA27
18
W706246
19
W706246
20
14401
21
14401
22
23
24
14401
04320
LH instrument panel-to-body bolt
Steering column pinch bolt
Instrument panel-to-floor bolt (3
required)
RH instrument panel-to-body bolt
LH instrument panel electrical
connectors
Restraints control module (RCM)
electrical connector
Antenna lead-in
RH instrument panel electrical connector
Instrument panel
Fig. 3: Identifying MKX Instrument Panel (1 Of 2)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W505002
04459
3
W707628
4
044D70
5
N811283
6
047A04
7
04302
8
042A82
9
10
11
12
06024
061A58
04480
04481
Description
Steering column cover screw (2 required)
Steering column opening cover
Instrument panel cluster finish panel
screw (2 required)
Instrument panel cluster finish panel
Instrument panel storage bin screw (2
required)
Instrument panel storage bin
Instrument panel lower center finish
panel
Instrument panel upper center finish
panel
Glove compartment
Glove compartment dampener
RH instrument panel end trim panel
LH instrument panel end trim panel
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Identifying MKX Instrument Panel (2 Of 2) With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
13
14
Part Number
W712386
W712387
15
W711648
16
17
18
19
W706246
W712403
W703845
3RA27
20
W706246
Description
LH instrument panel bolt (2 required)
Torx head bolt
Instrument panel-to-steering column
bracket bolt (2 required)
RH instrument panel bolt
Instrument panel-to-front of dash bolt
LH instrument panel-to-body bolt
Steering column pinch bolt
Instrument panel-to-floor bolt (3
required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
21
W703845
22
14401
23
14401
24
25
26
14401
04320
RH instrument panel-to-body bolt
LH instrument panel electrical
connectors
Restraints control module (RCM)
electrical connector
Antenna lead-in
RH instrument panel electrical connector
Instrument panel
1. For additional information, refer to the appropriate procedure.
INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER FINISH PANEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL.
MKX only
2. Remove the floor console trim ring.
Fig. 5: Identifying Floor Console Trim Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
3. Remove the floor console finish panel.
Open the storage compartment door.
Remove the console finish panel.
MKX only
4. Remove the storage bin.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Remove the 2 scrivets.
Disconnect the power point electrical connector.
NOTE:
The upper and lower center instrument panel finish panels are removed as
one assembly.
5. Using a suitable tool, gently pry out the upper instrument panel center finish panel to disengage the clips.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
6. Using a suitable tool, gently pry out the lower instrument panel center finish panel to disengage the clips.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Separate the upper instrument panel finish panel from the lower instrument panel finish panel.
Edge only
NOTE:
The upper and lower instrument panel center finish panels are removed
separately.
8. Using a suitable tool, gently pry out the upper instrument panel center finish panel to disengage the clips
and remove the panel.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
9. Using a suitable tool, gently pry out the lower instrument panel center finish panel to disengage the clips
and remove the panel.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
All vehicles
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL
Edge only
1. Remove the upper instrument panel center finish panel.
Using a suitable tool, gently pry out the upper center finish panel to disengage the clips.
Remove the upper instrument panel center finish panel.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
All vehicles
2. Lower the steering column to the full down position.
3. Remove the steering column opening cover.
Remove the 2 steering column opening cover screws.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Disengage the steering column opening cover from the retainers.
Disconnect the electrical connector and tube, if equipped.
Fig. 6: Locating Electrical Connector, Tube & Steering Column Opening Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the 2 cluster finish panel screws.
Fig. 7: Locating Cluster Finish Panel Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Disengage the instrument cluster finish panel from the retaining clips and remove the panel.
Disconnect the electrical connectors, if equipped.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Console - Floor.
2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). For additional information, refer to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM .
3. Remove the weatherstripping from the front door openings near the instrument panel.
4. Remove the LH and RH instrument panel end trim panels.
5. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM
AND ORNAMENTATION .
6. Remove the LH and RH cowl panels.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
7. Remove the steering column opening cover.
Remove the 2 steering column opening cover screws.
Disengage the steering column opening cover from the retaining clips.
Disconnect the electrical connector and hose, if equipped.
Fig. 8: Locating Electrical Connector, Tube & Steering Column Opening Cover
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Remove the bolt and the hood opening handle.
Position the handle aside.
Fig. 9: Identifying Hood Opening Handle & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Disconnect the LH bulkhead electrical connector from under the steering column.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Identifying LH Bulkhead Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Disconnect the RH bulkhead electrical connector from under the steering column.
Fig. 11: Identifying RH Bulkhead Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the left cowl panel side.
Fig. 12: Locating Electrical Connectors From Left Cowl Panel Side
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Disconnect the electrical connectors and the antenna lead-in cable from the right cowl panel side.
Remove the harness from the retainers.
Fig. 13: Locating Electrical Connectors & Antenna Lead-In Cable From Right Cowl Panel Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Disconnect the 2 A/C electrical connectors from inside the glove compartment.
Fig. 14: Locating A/C Electrical Connectors From Inside Glove Compartment
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Disconnect the electrical connector from the top of the heater core and evaporator core housing.
Fig. 15: Locating Blower Motor Resistor Or Blower Motor Speed Control Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
15. Disconnect the selector lever cable from the ball stud on the selector lever.
Fig. 16: Locating Shift Cable From Ball Stud On Shifter
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
16. Remove the selector lever cable from the retaining clips.
Fig. 17: Locating Shift Cable From Retaining Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
17. Remove the 4 screws (2 each side) from the inner floor console support.
Fig. 18: Locating Screws From Inner Floor Console Support
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
18. Remove the screws from the front inner floor console support-to-instrument panel.
Fig. 19: Locating Screws From Front Inner Floor Console Support-To-Instrument Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
19. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the front inner floor console.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Fig. 20: Locating Electrical Connectors From Front Inner Floor Console
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
20. Remove the inner floor console support.
21. Disconnect the small restraints control module (RCM) electrical connector.
Fig. 21: Locating Restraints Control Module (RCM) Small Electrical Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
22. Remove the LH pushpin retainer and position the carpet aside.
Fig. 22: Locating LH Push Pin Retainer & Position Carpet Aside
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
23. Remove the LH pushpin retainer from the instrument panel-to-A/C duct.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Locating LH Push Pin Retainer From Instrument Panel-To-A/C Duct
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
24. Remove the 2 LH instrument panel-to-floor bolts.
To install, tighten to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft).
25. Remove the RH pushpin retainer and position the carpet aside.
Fig. 24: Locating LH Instrument Panel-To-Floor Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
26. Remove the screw from the RH instrument panel brace-to-A/C duct.
Fig. 25: Locating Screw From RH Instrument Panel Brace-To-A/C Duct
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
27. Remove the RH instrument panel-to-floor bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
To install, tighten to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft).
28. Remove the 2 nuts and the LH instrument panel brace-to-A/C duct.
Fig. 26: Locating LH Instrument Panel Brace-To-A/C Duct Nuts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
29. Remove and discard the steering column pinch bolt.
To install, use a new steering column pinch bolt and tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
30. Rotate the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position.
Remove the ignition key.
CAUTION: Do not allow the steering column shaft to rotate while the
intermediate shaft is disconnected or damage to the clockspring may
result. If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring
must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM .
31. Detach the steering column shaft from the intermediate shaft.
32. Remove the upper cowl panel grille. For additional information, refer to FRONT END BODY
PANELS .
33. Remove the bolt from the front of dash.
To install, tighten to 20 N.m (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 27: Locating Bolt From Front Of Dash
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
34. Remove the driver seat. For additional information, refer to SEATING .
NOTE:
The Torx head bolt is not completely removed. The bolt is pulled outward
far enough to allow for clearance when removing the instrument panel.
35. Remove the Torx head bolt from inside the LH door.
To install, tighten to 30 N.m (22 lb-ft).
Fig. 28: Locating Torx(R) Head Bolt From Inside LH Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
36. Remove the 2 LH instrument panel bolts from inside the LH door.
To install, tighten to 20 N.m (15 lb-ft).
Fig. 29: Locating Bolts From Inside LH Door
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
37. Remove the 2 instrument panel-to-steering column bracket bolts from the bracket under the steering
column.
To install, tighten to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Fig. 30: Identifying Bolts From Bracket Under Steering Column
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
38. Remove the LH instrument panel-to-body bolt.
To install, tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
Fig. 31: Identifying LH Instrument Panel-To-Body Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
39. Remove the bolt from the RH instrument panel.
To install, tighten to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft).
Fig. 32: Locating Bolt From RH Instrument Panel Cowl Side Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
40. Remove the RH instrument panel-to-body bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:35 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
To install, tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
Fig. 33: Identifying RH Instrument Panel-To-Body Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
41. Remove the bolt and the hood opening handle.
Position the handle aside.
Fig. 34: Identifying Hood Opening Handle & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the instrument panel, this next step requires the
help of an assistant.
42. Remove the instrument panel.
43. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
POWER POINT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Remover, Power Point Socket
501-039 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:36 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL
NOTE:
Power point cover may differ depending on location.
1. Open the power point cover.
2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots.
Fig. 35: Installing Special Tool In Power Point Socket Slot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot.
Fig. 36: Positioning Special Tool To Engage In Adjacent Slot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:36 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Fig. 37: Pulling Power Point Socket Out Of Retainer
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer.
CONSOLE - FLOOR
Fig. 38: Identifying Edge Floor Console With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
Description
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:36 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
1
045A76
2
W706862
3
4
5
6
7
04608
04609
W706862
W706862
045A36
Floor console finish panel
Floor console-to-instrument panel bolt (2
required)
Floor console RH side panel
Floor console LH side panel
Floor console center bolt (2 required)
Floor console rear bolt (2 required)
Floor console
Fig. 39: Identifying MKX Floor Console With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
045A76
2
W706862
3
4
5
6
7
8
04608
04609
W707628
W706862
W706862
045A36
Description
Floor console finish panel
Floor console-to-instrument panel bolt (2
required)
Floor console RH side panel
Floor console LH side panel
Floor console front side bolt (2 required)
Floor console center bolt (2 required)
Floor console rear bolt (2 required)
Floor console
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:36 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
All vehicles
1. Position the selector lever to NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
The seats must be in the full raised position to access the bolts.
2. Position the seats forward and remove the 2 floor console rear bolts.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 floor console side panels.
NOTE:
The seats must be in the full raised position to access the bolts.
4. Position the seats rearward and remove the 2 floor console side panels and 2 floor console center bolts.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
5. Remove the floor console finish panel.
MKX only
6. Remove the storage bin.
Remove the 2 scrivets.
Disconnect the power point electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 floor console front side bolts.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
All vehicles
8. Remove the 2 floor console-to-instrument panel bolts.
To install, tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the floor console electrical connector from the lower right front wiring harness.
10. Remove the floor console.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CONSOLE - OVERHEAD
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:36 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Panel & Console - Edge & MKX
Fig. 40: Exploded View Of Overhead Console
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
519A70
519K22
Description
Overhead console
Overhead console electrical connectors
Overhead console bracket
1. Remove the overhead console.
Pull downward on the overhead console.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:03:36 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION
Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
Additive Friction Modifier
EST-M2C118-A
XL-3 (US); CXL-3 (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium
Rear Axle Lubricant
WSP-M2C197-A
XY-80W90-QL (US); CXY80W90-1L (Canada)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
End play
Wheel bearing end play
Runout
Driveshaft runout
Pilot runout
Wheel hub face runout
Wheel hub flange bolt circle runout
Fill Capacity
1.15L
(2.43 pt)
Specification
0.00 mm (0.000 in) maximum
0.89 mm (0.035 in)
0.15 mm (0.006 in) maximum
0.254 mm (0.010 in) maximum
0.38 mm (0.015 in) maximum
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
DRIVELINE SYSTEM
Driveline System
The driveline system consists of the following components:
Center support bearing
Driveshaft assembly
Front halfshafts
Rear halfshafts
Active torque coupling/rear axle
On front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles, the transaxle transmits power from the engine to the halfshafts.
On all wheel drive (AWD) vehicles, power is transmitted from the engine through the transaxle to the power
transfer unit (PTU). The PTU transfers engine power from the transaxle to the front halfshafts, and through the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:21
10:11:16 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
driveshaft to the active torque coupling/rear axle and halfshafts. For information on the PTU, refer to FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) SYSTEMS article or POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) article.
The engine angle is built into the engine mounts. If the engine angle is out of specification, the engine mounts
must be inspected for damage. Refer to 3.5L article.
Fig. 1: Vehicle Certification (VC) Label Example
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
The vehicle certification (VC) label is located in the driver door jamb. The axle code is on the VC label. Refer
to IDENTIFICATION CODES article.
The axle ratio is 2.93 and the ring gear has a diameter of 174 mm (6.85 in).
The wheel speed sensor rings for FWD vehicles are located on the front halfshafts and are mounted to the rear
inner spindles.
The wheel speed sensor rings are located on the front and rear halfshafts for AWD vehicles.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
DRIVELINE SYSTEM
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Gauge, Clutch Housing
308-021 (T75L-4201-A)
Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding 100-002 (TOOL-4201-C) or
Fixture
equivalent
Dial Indicator/Gauge with Holding 100-D002 (D78P-4201-B) or
Fixture
equivalent
100-F027 (014-00344) or
equivalent
Vibration Analyzer
MATERIAL
Item
Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3 (US); CXL-3 (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL (US); CXY-80W90-1L (Canada);
(Model 60/70 axles)
Threadlock and Sealer
TA-25
Specification
EST-M2C118-A
WSP-M2C197-A
WSK-M2G351-A5
Principals of Operation
Driveline System - General Information
The driveline system enables the power generated by the engine and transferred through the transmission in
front wheel drive (FWD), or the transmission and the power transfer unit (PTU) in all wheel drive (AWD) to
place the vehicle in motion. Rotational torque received from the transmission or PTU is delivered to the front
wheels by halfshafts or the rear axle by way of the driveshaft(s). The U-joints or constant velocity (CV) joints at
the ends of the shafts allow the shafts to rotate smoothly in an allowable angle plane. The rotational torque is
introduced into the axle drive pinion which drives the differential ring gear. The ring gear is bolted to the axle
differential which divides the torque between the left and right axle shafts, while permitting the shafts to turn at
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
different speeds when required, such as when cornering.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
U-joints
Constant velocity (CV) joints
Center bearings
Driveshaft tubes
Mounting brackets
Flanges
Housing and cover damage
Differential bearings
Differential gearsets
Pinion bearings
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and go to SYMPTOM CHART - NOISE,
VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH).
Driveshaft Center U-Joint and Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Inspection
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to JACKING AND LIFTING article. Rotate the
driveshaft by hand. Check for rough operation or seizure of the U-joints or constant velocity (CV) joints. Install
a new driveshaft if it shows signs of seizure, excessive wear or incorrect seating. Refer to DRIVESHAFT
article.
Driveshaft Center Bearing
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to JACKING AND LIFTING article. Rotate the
driveshaft by hand. If the bearing shows signs of roughness or is noisy, install a new driveshaft assembly. Refer
to DRIVESHAFT article.
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
NOTE:
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) symptoms should be identified using the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
diagnostic tools that are available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of
their uses and a glossary of common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article. Since it is possible any one of multiple systems may be
the cause of a symptom, it may be necessary to use a process of elimination
type of diagnostic approach to pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the
causal system for the symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND
HARSHNESS article for the next likely system and continue diagnosis.
SYMPTOM CHART - NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
Condition
Possible Sources
Axle howling or whine front or rear axle
-
-
Axle lubricant low
Axle housing
damage
Damaged or worn
wheel hub bearings
Damaged or worn
differential ring and
pinion
Damaged or worn
differential side or
pinion bearings
Incorrect axle
lubricant level
-
-
Driveline clunk - loud
clunk when shifting from
reverse to drive
-
Excessive backlash
in the axle
-
Damaged or worn
pinion bearings
-
Damaged or worn
U-joints
Action
CHECK the lubricant level. FILL the
axle to specification.
INSPECT the axle housing for
damage. INSTALL a new axle as
necessary. REFER to REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
CHECK for abnormal wheel hub
bearing play or roughness. REFER to
FRONT SUSPENSION article or
REAR SUSPENSION article.
INSPECT and INSTALL a new axle
assembly as necessary. REFER to
REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
INSPECT and INSTALL a new axle
assembly as necessary. REFER to
REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
CHECK the lubricant level. FILL the
axle to specification.
CHECK the axle backlash. INSPECT
and INSTALL a new axle assembly
as necessary. REFER to REAR
DRIVE AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL
article.
INSPECT and INSTALL a new axle
assembly as necessary. REFER to
REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
INSPECT the U-joints for wear or
damage. INSTALL a new driveshaft
as necessary. REFER to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
DRIVESHAFT article.
Driveline clunk - occurs as
the vehicle starts to move
forward following a stop
-
Driveline clunk (front
wheel drive [FWD]
vehicles) - occurs during
acceleration or from cruise
to coast/deceleration
Clicking, popping or
grinding - occurs while the
vehicle is turning
Loose rear axle
mount
Damaged or worn
inner CV joint
Inadequate or
contaminated
lubrication in the
CV joints
Another component
contacting the
halfshaft
-
High pitched chattering noise from the rear axle
when the vehicle is turning
Incorrect or
contaminated
lubricant
Damaged or worn
differential
(differential side
gears and pinion
gears)
Incorrect driveline
angles
Driveshaft is out-ofbalance
-
Buzz - buzzing noise is the
same at cruise or
coast/deceleration
Rumble or boom - noise
occurs at
coast/deceleration, usually
driveshaft speed-related
and noticeable over a wide
range of speeds
Worn driveshaft
constant velocity
(CV) joint or Ujoints with excessive
play
INSPECT the CV joint and U-joints
for a worn condition. INSTALL a
new driveshaft as necessary. REFER
to DRIVESHAFT article.
CHECK the axle for loose bolts.
TIGHTEN to specification. REFER
to REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
INSPECT the inner CV joint and
boot. INSTALL a new CV joint as
necessary. REFER to FRONT
DRIVE HALFSHAFTS article.
CHECK the CV boots and joints for
wear or damage. INSTALL new
components as necessary. REFER to
FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
article.
CHECK the halfshafts and the area
around the halfshafts. REPAIR as
necessary.
CHECK the vehicle by driving in
tight circles (5 clockwise, 5
counterclockwise). DRAIN and
REFILL with the specified rear axle
lubricant and friction modifier as
necessary.
INSPECT and INSTALL a new axle
assembly as necessary. REFER to
REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
CHECK for correct driveline angles.
REPAIR as necessary. REFER to
Driveline Angle Measurement.
CHECK the driveshaft for damage,
missing balance weights or
undercoating. REFER to appropriate
Driveshaft Balancing procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
-
Grunting - normally
associated with a shudder
experienced during
acceleration from a
complete stop
U-joints are binding
or seized
Driveshaft CV joint
binding
Loose rear axle
mount bolts or
suspension fasteners
Incorrect ring and
pinion contact,
incorrect bearing
preload or gear
damage
Incorrect ring and
pinion contact or
damaged teeth on
the coast side of the
ring and pinion
Gear tooth damage
to the drive side of
the ring and pinion
Worn or damaged
pinion bearings
Rear drive axle
assembly
mispositioned
-
Howl - can occur at
various speeds and driving
conditions. Affected by
acceleration and
deceleration
Chuckle - heard at
coast/deceleration. Also
described as a knock
Knock - noise occurs at
various speeds. Not
affected by acceleration or
deceleration
Scraping noise - a
continuous low pitched
noise starting at low
speeds
Driveline shudder - occurs
during acceleration from a
slow speed or stop
-
-
Loose rear axle bolts
Driveline angles out
ROTATE the driveshaft and CHECK
for rough operation or seized Ujoints. INSTALL a new driveshaft as
necessary. REFER to
DRIVESHAFT article.
INSTALL a new driveshaft as
necessary. REFER to
DRIVESHAFT article.
INSPECT the rear suspension and
axle. TIGHTEN the fasteners to
specification. REFER to REAR
DRIVE AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL
article.
INSPECT and INSTALL a new axle
assembly as necessary. REFER to
REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
INSPECT and INSTALL a new axle
assembly as necessary. REFER to
REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
INSPECT and INSTALL a new axle
assembly as necessary. REFER to
REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
INSTALL a new axle assembly as
necessary. REFER to REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
CHECK the axle mounts and the rear
suspension for damage or wear.
REPAIR as necessary. REFER to
REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
CHECK the rear axle for loose bolts.
TIGHTEN the bolts to specification.
REFER to REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
CHECK for correct driveline angles.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
of specification
-
-
Driveline vibration occurs at cruising speeds
-
REFER to Driveline Angle
Measurement.
ROTATE the driveshaft and CHECK
for rough operation or seized Ujoints. INSTALL a new driveshaft as
necessary. REFER to
DRIVESHAFT article.
INSPECT the driveshaft CV joint
and coupling shaft for wear or
damage. INSTALL a new driveshaft
as necessary. REFER to
DRIVESHAFT article.
CHECK for wear or incorrect
seating. INSTALL a new driveshaft
as necessary. REFER to
DRIVESHAFT article.
CHECK the insulator for damage or
wear. ROTATE the driveshaft and
CHECK for rough operation.
INSTALL a new driveshaft as
necessary. REFER to
DRIVESHAFT article.
INSPECT the axle pinion flange.
TIGHTEN the pinion flange bolts to
specification. REFER to
DRIVESHAFT article.
CARRY OUT a runout check.
REPAIR as necessary. REFER to
REAR DRIVE
AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
CHECK the driveshaft for damage,
missing balance weights or
undercoating. CHECK the driveshaft
balance. CARRY OUT a driveline
vibration test. REFER to Driveshaft
Runout and Balancing.
INSPECT the driveshaft CV joint for
wear or damage. INSTALL a new
driveshaft as necessary. REFER to
DRIVESHAFT article.
CARRY OUT a runout check.
REFER to Driveshaft Runout and
Balancing.
U-joints binding or
seized
Binding or damaged
driveshaft CV joint
Worn U-joints
Worn or damaged
driveshaft center
bearing support
-
Loose axle pinion
flange bolts
-
Excessive axle
pinion flange runout
-
Driveshaft is out-ofbalance
-
Binding or damaged
driveshaft CV joint
-
Excessive driveshaft
runout
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
-
-
Driveline angles out
of specification
CHECK for correct driveline angles.
REPAIR as necessary. REFER to
Driveline Angle Measurement.
CHECK the outer CV joint for
correct seating into the hub. REPAIR
as necessary. REFER to FRONT
DRIVE HALFSHAFTS article for
the front CV joints or REAR
DRIVE HALFSHAFTS article for
the rear CV joints.
Incorrectly seated
CV joint in the
wheel hub
Analysis of Leakage
Clean up the leaking area enough to identify the exact source.
A plugged rear drive unit (RDU) housing vent can cause excessive pinion seal lip wear due to internal pressure
buildup.
Verify the RDU lubricant level is at least 3-5 mm (1/8-3/16 in) below the bottom of the fill hole.
Axle Vent
A plugged vent will cause excessive seal lip wear due to internal pressure buildup. If a leak occurs, check the
vent. If the vent cannot be cleared, install a new vent.
Drive Pinion Seal
Leaks at the drive pinion seal originate from the following causes:
Damaged seal
Worn seal journal surface
Any damage to the seal bore (dings, dents, gouges or other imperfections) distorts the seal casing and allows
leakage past the outer edge of the drive pinion seal.
The drive pinion seal can be torn, cut or gouged if it is not installed correctly. The spring that holds the drive
pinion seal against the pinion flange may be knocked out and allow fluid to pass the lip.
Metal chips trapped at the sealing lip can cause oil leaks. These can cause a wear groove on the drive pinion
flange and result in pinion seal wear.
When a seal leak occurs, install a new drive pinion seal and check the vent to make sure it is clean and free of
foreign material.
A new drive pinion flange must be installed if any of these conditions exist.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Drive Pinion Nut
CAUTION: Install the drive pinion nut to the correct torque specifications or damage
to the differential components may occur.
On some high-mileage vehicles, oil may leak through the threads of the drive pinion nut. This condition can be
corrected by installing a new nut and applying threadlock and sealer on the threads and nut face.
Differential Seals
CAUTION: When installing shafts, do not allow splines to contact seals during
installation or damage to the seals may occur.
Halfshaft pilot bearing housing seals are susceptible to the same types of damage as drive pinion seals if
incorrectly installed. The seal bore must be clean and the lip handled carefully to avoid cutting or tearing it. The
seal journal surface must be free of nicks, gouges and rough surface texture.
For information on differential seals, refer to REAR DRIVE AXLE/DIFFERENTIAL article.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
DRIVELINE ANGLE MEASUREMENT
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Anglemaster II Driveline
Inclinometer/Protractor
Tool Number
164-R2402 or equivalent
NOTE:
This procedure does not apply to CV joints, flex couplers or double Carden
joints that are used in some driveshafts. This check is for single-cross and
roller-style joints found in the driveshafts.
NOTE:
Prior to checking driveline angularity, inspect the U-joints for correct operation.
NOTE:
An incorrect driveline angle can cause a vibration or shudder. For additional
information, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article.
NOTE:
Driveline angularity is the angular relationship between the engine crankshaft,
the driveshaft and the rear axle pinion. Factors determining driveline angularity
include ride height, rear spring and engine mounts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
All vehicles
1. Carry out the following preliminary setup steps:
Inspect the U-joints for correct operation.
Park the vehicle on a level surface such as a drive-on hoist, or back onto a front end alignment rack.
Verify the curb position ride height is within specifications with the vehicle unloaded and all of the
tires are inflated to their normal operating pressures.
Calibrate the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor by placing it on a clean, flat level
section of the frame rail and press the ALT-ZERO button.
Vehicles with flat-flanged, split-pin or slip-flanged U-joints
NOTE:
If equipped, remove the snap ring to allow access to the base of the U-joint
cup. Make sure the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor is
seated against the U-joint cup.
NOTE:
Rotate the driveshaft until the flange U-joint cup is parallel with the floor.
This will simplify taking measurements.
2. To check the U-joint operating angle, install the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor. Check
and record the flange angle as angle A.
Fig. 2: Checking Flange Angle (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Checking Flange Angle (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor, measure the slope of the connecting
component. Record the measurements of the component's angle as angle B.
Fig. 4: Checking Driveshaft Angle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Multiple piece driveshafts
NOTE:
Repeat this step for each center support bearing on the driveshaft.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the U-joint snap ring, if equipped, for these
measurements.
4. Using the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor, measure the slope of the components in front
and behind the center support bearing U-joint in the area indicated. Record the front component as angle
A and the rear component as angle B.
Fig. 5: Locating Index Mark On Driveshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
NOTE:
When 2 connected components slope in the same direction, subtract the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
smallest number from the larger number to find the U-joint operating
angle. When 2 connected components slope in the opposite direction, add
the measurements to find the U-joint operating angle.
5. Calculate the difference in the slope of the components to determine the U-joint operating angle.
The U-joint operating angle is the angle formed by 2 yokes connected by a cross and bearing kit.
Ideally, the operating angles on each connection of the driveshaft must:
be equal or within one degree of each other.
have a 3 degree maximum operating angle.
have at least 1/2 of one degree continuous operating angle.
6. If the angle is not within specifications, repair or adjust to obtain the correct angle. Inspect the engine
mounts, transmission mounts, center support bearing mounting, rear suspension, rear axle, rear axle
mounting or the frame for wear or damage.
DRIVESHAFT RUNOUT AND BALANCING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding
Fixture 100-02 (TOOL-4201-C) or equivalent
Mastertech® Series MTS 4000
Driveline Balance and NVH
Analyzer (Vetronix)
257-00018 or equivalent
Driveshaft Inspection
NOTE:
Driveline vibration exhibits a higher frequency and lower amplitude than highspeed shake. Driveline vibration is directly related to the speed of the vehicle
and is noticed at various speeds. Driveline vibration can be perceived as a
tremor in the floorpan or heard as a rumble, hum or boom.
NOTE:
Refer to SPECIFICATIONS for all runout specifications.
NOTE:
Do not make any adjustments before carrying out a road test. Do not
change the tire pressure or the vehicle load.
1. Carry out a visual inspection of the vehicle. Operate the vehicle and verify the condition by reproducing it
during the road test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
The concern should be directly related to vehicle road speed, not affected by acceleration or
deceleration or could not be reduced by coasting in NEUTRAL.
2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
The driveshaft should be kept at an angle equal to or close to the curb-weighted position. Use a
twin-post hoist or a frame hoist with jackstands.
3. Inspect the driveshaft for damage, undercoating or incorrectly seated U-joints. Rotate the driveshaft
slowly by hand and feel for binding or end play in the U-joint trunnions. Remove the driveshaft. For
additional information, refer to DRIVESHAFT article. Inspect the slip yoke splines for any galling, dirt,
rust or incorrect lubrication. Clean the driveshaft or install new U-joints as necessary. Install a new
driveshaft if damaged. After any corrections or new components are installed, recheck for the vibration at
the road test speed.
If the vibration is gone, test drive the vehicle.
If the vibration persists or the driveshaft passes visual inspection, measure the driveshaft runout.
Driveshaft Runout
1. Install the suitable Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture. Rotate the driveshaft by turning the axle
and measure the runout at the front, the center and the rear of the driveshaft.
If the runout exceeds 0.89 mm (0.035 in) at the front or center, install a new driveshaft.
If the front and center is within 1 mm (0.254 in), but the rear runout is not, index-mark the rear
runout high point and proceed to Step 2.
If the runout is within 0.89 mm (0.035 in) at all points, recheck for vibration at road test speed. If
the vibration persists, balance the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to appropriate
Driveshaft Balancing procedure.
NOTE:
Circular pinion flanges can be turned in 90 degree or 1/4 increments. Halfround pinion flanges are limited to 2 positions.
2. Index-mark the driveshaft to the pinion flange. Disconnect the driveshaft and rotate it 180 degrees.
Reconnect the driveshaft. Recheck the runout at the rear of the driveshaft.
If the runout is still over specification, mark the high point and proceed to Step 3.
If the runout is within specification, check for the vibration at the road test speed. If the vibration is
still present, balance the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to appropriate Driveshaft
Balancing procedure.
3. Excessive driveshaft runout can originate in the driveshaft itself or from the pinion flange. To find the
source, compare the 2 high points previously determined.
If the index marks are close together, within 25 mm (1 in), the driveshaft is eccentric. Install a new
driveshaft.
If the marks are on opposite sides of the driveshaft, 180 degrees apart, the slip yoke or pinion
flange is responsible. Check the pinion flange runout. If the pinion flange runout exceeds
specifications, a bent pinion is indicated.
If the pinion flange and pinion runouts are within specifications, road test and check for the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
vibration at the road test speed. If the vibration persists, balance the driveshaft. For additional
information, refer to appropriate Driveshaft Balancing procedure.
Fig. 6: Finding Excessive Driveshaft Runout (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 7: Finding Excessive Driveshaft Runout (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Driveshaft Balancing - Using the Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix)
All vehicles
1. Install the Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix) to the
vehicle.
2. Working under the vehicle, install an accelerometer. The accelerometer can be attached and mounted near
either the transmission or differential end of the driveshaft.
3. Clean an area of the driveshaft and install the reflective tape, then install the photo-tachometer sensor.
The sensor should be placed at approximately a 20-degree angle from perpendicular to the surface of the
reflective tape. Make sure the sensor does not get moved during the balance procedure.
1. Reflective tape.
2. Photo-tachometer sensor.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Driveshaft Balancing - Using the MTS 4000
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Using the Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run a
driveshaft balance test with the driveshaft unmodified.
Vehicles with tapped pinion flanges
5. Label the tapped holes in the pinion flange numerically, starting at the top hole as 1. Mark the remaining
holes 2, 3 and 4. Label in the direction of rotation.
Fig. 9: Labeling Tapped Holes In The Pinion Flange
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Using the Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run a second
test with the 12 mm (0.47 in) test weight set screw in the No. 1 hole, previously marked on the pinion
flange.
7. Remove the test weight, then install the weight combination directed by the Mastertech® Series MTS
4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Identifying Weight Combination
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicles without tapped pinion flanges
8. Using the Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run a second
test with a test weight. Using a metal band, secure the test weight to the end of the driveshaft. The weight
should be placed at the end of the driveshaft tube, as close to the tube-to-yoke weld seam as possible.
Mark the location of the test weight on the driveshaft, as shown in the figure below.
1. Test weight.
2. Tube-to-yoke weld seam.
3. Driveshaft pinion flange.
4. Select the test weight based on driveshaft size. Larger driveshafts use 10 g (0.353 oz.). Smaller
driveshafts use 5 g (0.176 oz.).
Fig. 11: Test Weight, Tube-To-Yoke Weld Seam, And Driveshaft Pinion Flange
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the test weight, then install the recommended weight at the position directed by the Mastertech®
Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix). Using a metal band and epoxy,
secure the test weight to the driveshaft, as shown in the figure below.
1. Test weight.
2. Measure in this direction.
3. Driveshaft diameter.
4. Directional rotation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
5. Balance weight relative to test weight centerline.
6. The results are displayed with respect to the location to where the test weight was placed.
Fig. 12: Identifying Test Weight And Recommended Weight Positions
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
10. Using the Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run a third
test to verify the repair.
Driveshaft Balancing - Hose Clamp Method
1. Install 1 or 2 hose clamps on the driveshaft, near the rear. Position of the hose clamp head(s) can be
determined through trial and error.
2. Mark the rear of the driveshaft into 4 approximately equal sectors and number the marks 1 through 4.
Install a hose clamp on the driveshaft with its head at position No. 1, as shown in the figure below. Check
for vibration at road speed. Recheck with the clamp at each of the other positions to find the position that
shows minimum vibration. If 2 adjacent positions show equal improvement, position the clamp head
between them.
Fig. 13: Marking Rear Driveshaft Into Four Equal Sections
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. If the vibration persists, add a second clamp at the same position and recheck for vibration.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Adding Second Clamp To Driveshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. If no improvement is noted, rotate the clamps in opposite directions, equal distances from the best
position determined in Step 2. Separate the clamp heads about 13 mm (1/2 in) and recheck for vibration at
the road speed.
Fig. 15: Rotating Clamps In Opposite Directions
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Repeat the process with increasing separation until the best combination is found or the vibration is
reduced to an acceptable level.
DRIVESHAFT INDEXING
NOTE:
If indexing the driveshaft does not eliminate the vibration, balance the
driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft Runout and Balancing.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
NOTE:
Do not reuse constant velocity (CV) joint bolts or flange bolts. Install new
bolts or damage to the vehicle may occur.
2. Remove and discard the driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Identifying Driveshaft Flange Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using a suitable pry bar as shown in illustration, separate the driveshaft from the Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) flange.
Fig. 17: Separating Driveshaft Flange From PTU Flange Using A Suitable Pry Bar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Index-mark the shaft for reference.
4. Rotate the flange 90 degrees clockwise.
Fig. 18: Rotating Flange 90 Degrees Clockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Connect the front driveshaft and install the new bolts. For additional information, refer to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Driveline System - General Information - Edge & MKX
DRIVESHAFT article.
NOTE:
Do not reuse the bolts for the pinion yoke. Install new bolts or damage to
the vehicle may occur.
6. Disconnect the rear driveshaft U-joint flange.
Discard the bolts.
Fig. 19: Locating Rear Driveshaft Universal Joint Flange Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Rotate the rear pinion 90 degrees clockwise.
Fig. 20: Rotating Rear Pinion 90 Degrees Clockwise
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Connect the rear driveshaft and install the new bolts. For additional information, refer to DRIVESHAFT
article.
9. Test drive the vehicle.
10. Repeat the procedure if necessary.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:11:16 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Acceleration Control - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Acceleration Control - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Accelerator pedal and sensor assembly mounting nuts
Nm
7
lb-in
62
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ACCELERATION CONTROL
The acceleration controls consist of an accelerator pedal and sensor assembly.
The engine management system electronically operates the accelerator of the engine in response to accelerator
pedal movements initiated by the driver. In the event of a system failure, the engine management system
provides a "limp home" mode which allows the vehicle to be driven with limited performance.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
ACCELERATION CONTROL
Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND BRACKET
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:20
11:27:17 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Acceleration Control - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Accelerator Pedal & Bracket With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
3
90907
9F836
Description
Accelerator pedal sensor electrical
connector (part of 14290)
Accelerator pedal nut (3 required)
Accelerator pedal and sensor assembly
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Release the safety lock tab mechanism on the accelerator pedal sensor
electrical connector prior to disconnecting.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:17 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Acceleration Control - Edge & MKX
1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 3 nuts and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly.
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:17 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
Material
Item
High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with Bittering
Agent (US only)
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A (Canada); or equivalent (yellow
color)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super
Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 (Canada); or
equivalent
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 (US); CXC-51-A (Canada)
Specification
ESE-M12A4-A
Fill Capacity
-
WSS-M97B51-A1
-
WSS-M2C930-A
-
-
-
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor bolt
Catalyst monitor sensor
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor bolt
Cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
Heat shield bolt and nut
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
Knock sensor (KS) bolt
Mass airflow (MAF) sensor screws
PCM nuts
Variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid bolt
Nm
10
48
10
10
10
48
20
2
5
10
lb-ft
35
35
15
-
lb-in
89
89
89
89
18
44
89
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS
The electronic engine controls consist of the:
PCM.
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:57
11:27:53 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
heated oxygen sensor (HO2S).
catalyst monitor sensor.
variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
knock sensor (KS).
The PCM carries out the following functions:
accepts input from various engine sensors to compute the fuel flow rate necessary to maintain a
prescribed air/fuel ratio throughout the entire engine operational range.
outputs a command to the fuel injectors to meter the appropriate quantity of fuel.
The CHT sensor:
sends the PCM a signal indicating cylinder head temperature.
resistance decreases as cylinder head temperature increases.
The CMP sensor:
sends the PCM a signal indicating camshaft position used for fuel synchronization.
The CKP sensor:
sends the PCM a signal indicating crankshaft position.
is essential for calculating spark timing.
The MAF sensor:
uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot
wire causes it to cool.
The HO2S:
creates a voltage signal dependent on exhaust oxygen content.
provides feedback information to the PCM used to calculate fuel delivery.
The catalyst monitor sensor:
monitors oxygen content after it flows through the catalytic converter.
provides a voltage to the PCM used to calculate catalytic converter integrity.
The KS:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:53 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
is used to detect engine detonation.
sends a voltage signal to the PCM.
is able to provide a signal which retards the ignition timing, as necessary.
The VCT oil control solenoid:
is an electrically controlled hydraulic valve that directs engine oil to the camshaft phaser. Once the PCM
transmits a signal, the solenoid moves a valve spool, directing oil into the camshaft phaser cavity. This
action changes valve timing by either inducing an advance or retard condition. The camshaft is, thereby
repositioned in relation to crankshaft timing and allows for optimum engine performance and lower
emissions.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS
Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:53 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
3
4
5
6
W500214
6B288
14A464
W500214
6B288
Description
LH camshaft position sensor (CMP)
electrical connector
LH CMP bolt
LH CMP
RH CMP electrical connector
RH CMP bolt
RH CMP
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
RH sensor
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
AND FILTERING article.
LH sensor
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
AND FILTERING article.
Both sensors
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:53 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
3. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
NOTE:
Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Fig. 2: Exploded View Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
W701542
W701669
6K342
6C070
5
14A464
6
7
6D327
6C315
Description
Heat shield nut
Heat shield bolt
Heat shield
Rubber grommet cover
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
electrical connector
CKP sensor bolt
CKP sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:53 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the LH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
3. Remove the bolt, nut and the heat shield.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Remove the rubber grommet cover.
5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
6. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Fig. 3: Exploded View Of Powertrain Control Module (PCM) With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
3
4
N804795
12A650
12A696
Description
PCM electrical connector (part of
12B637) (3 required)
PCM nut (2 required)
PCM
PCM gasket
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:53 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL
NOTE:
PCM replacement DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys.
1. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation procedure. For additional information, refer to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article.
2. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 2 nuts and the PCM.
Remove the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the gasket and the PCM.
2. Install the 2 PCM nuts.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable
Module Installation procedure. For additional information, refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION
article.
5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS). Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. For additional
information, refer to ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article.
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:53 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
3
W709287
12B579
Description
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector
MAF sensor screw (2 required)
MAF sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:53 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Exploded View Of Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
6G004
Description
Cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
electrical connector
CHT sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the lower intake manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
2. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove and discard the CHT sensor.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Do not reuse the CHT sensor, install a new sensor.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) AND CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:53 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Exploded View Of Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) & Catalyst Monitor Sensor With Torque
Specifications - RH Sensors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
9F472
3
14A464
4
9G444
Description
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical
connector
HO2S
Catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connector
Catalyst monitor sensor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:54 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Exploded View Of Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) & Catalyst Monitor Sensor With Torque
Specifications - LH Sensors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
9F472
3
14A464
4
9G444
Description
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical
connector
HO2S
Catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connector
Catalyst monitor sensor
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures in this article.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen
Sensor
303-476 (T94P-9472-A)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:54 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Material
Item
High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 (US); CXC-51-A (Canada)
Specification
ESE-M12A4-A
-
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
RH sensor
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
Both sensors
2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
NOTE:
If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock
lubricant to assist in removal.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Fig. 8: Identifying Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) & Special Tool (303-476)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:54 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen
Sensor
303-476 (T94P-9472-A)
Material
Item
High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 (US); CXC-51-A (Canada)
Specification
ESE-M12A4-A
-
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
NOTE:
If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock
lubricant to assist in removal.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Fig. 9: Identifying Catalyst Monitor Sensor & Special Tool (303-476)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst
monitor sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) OIL CONTROL SOLENOID
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:54 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Fig. 10: Exploded View Of Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid With Torque
Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W500215
2
6B297
Description
Variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil
control solenoid bolt
VCT oil control solenoid
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
2. Remove the bolt and the variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Material
Item
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with
Bittering Agent (US only)
Specification
WSS-M97B51-A1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:54 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A (Canada); or equivalent
(yellow color)
Fig. 11: Exploded View Of Knock Sensor (KS) With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
9N271
8565
14A464
W500310
12A699
Description
Coolant tube
O-ring seal
Knock sensor (KS) electrical connector
KS bolts (2 required)
KS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the thermostat housing. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
2. Remove the lower intake manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
3. Remove the coolant tube.
Discard the O-ring seal.
4. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector.
5. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS.
To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:54 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Lubricate the new O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:27:54 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Headlamp assembly bolts
Liftgate lamp assembly nuts
Rear lamp screws
4
6
3
lb-in
35
53
27
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
NOTE:
If equipped, the perimeter lighting feature can be enabled or disabled. When
enabled, the exterior lamps are illuminated when the UNLOCK button is pressed
on the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter. Refer to HANDLES, LOCKS,
LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
Battery Saver
NOTE:
Time-out is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles).
The battery saver is internal to the SJB and provides automatic shut-off of the headlamps and parking lamps
after 10 minutes in order to save battery voltage. A timer is started when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position with the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position, or the headlamp switch is placed in the
HEADLAMPS ON position with the ignition switch off. When the time-out period has elapsed, the voltage is
automatically shut off to the lamps by the battery saver.
The battery saver does not control the parking lamps if the headlamp switch is in the PARKING LAMPS ON
position.
Headlamps
The headlamp system is a quad-beam pattern system. It consists of replaceable low and high beam bulbs. The
headlamp assembly has the park/turn indicator lamp integrated into the headlamp assembly. The SJB supplies
voltage to the headlamps when demanded.
NOTE:
Some vehicles are equipped with the adaptive headlighting option. Refer to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:36
11:01:30 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Adaptive Headlighting .
If the headlamps are on when the ignition switch is turned off, the battery saver feature turns off the headlamps
after 10 minutes have elapsed.
Autolamps
The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on/off control of the exterior lamps. The autolamp
system keeps the exterior lamps on for a pre-selected period of time after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position (20 seconds is the factory default setting). The pre-selected time lapse is adjustable up to
approximately 3 minutes.
Headlamps On With Wipers On Feature
On vehicles equipped with autolamps, there is also a feature called the headlamps on with wipers on feature. If
the headlamp switch is in the AUTOLAMPS ON position and the front wipers are on for more than 10 seconds
(except during a mist wipe or while the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash condition), the
exterior lamps are turned on. The exterior lamps are turned off when the ignition switch is changed to the OFF
or ACC position, the headlamp switch is placed in the OFF position, or the front wipers are off for more than 30
seconds. The exception to this is when the exterior lights are on because of darkness determined by the light
sensor.
For the headlamps on with wipers on feature, refer to WIPERS AND WASHERS article.
Stoplamps
The stoplamp switch is located on the brake pedal assembly. The stoplamps are supplied voltage when the brake
pedal is applied.
Turn Signal/Hazard Lamps
The front turn signal lamps are located within the headlamp assemblies. The rear lamps share functionality with
the stoplamps. When the multifunction switch is placed in the LH or RH TURN positions, the SJB routes
voltage to the LH or RH turn signal lamps. The SJB then cycles the voltage on and off approximately 80 times
per minute. If a front or rear turn bulb is inoperative, the SJB cycles the voltage on and off approximately 160
times per minute.
The hazard switch is located on the center instrument panel finish panel. When the hazard switch is pressed, the
SJB supplies voltage to all the turn lamps. The SJB cycles the voltage on and off approximately 80 times per
minute.
Parking Lamps
The SJB supplies voltage to the parking lamps when demanded. The parking lamp system includes the
following:
Front parking lamps
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Front side marker lamps
Rear parking lamps
Rear side marker lamps
License plate lamps
Liftgate lamp assembly (MKX only)
Fog Lamps
The fog lamp switch is integrated into the headlamp switch. When the fog lamp switch is engaged, the SJB
provides ground for the fog lamp relay coil (integrated into the SJB), which then energizes and routes voltage to
the fog lamps. The fog lamps can be turned on when the ignition switch is in the RUN or ACC position, the
parking lamps are on, and the high beam headlamps are off.
Reversing Lamps
When the transmission is placed in REVERSE (R), the PCM provides ground for the reversing lamp relay coil.
The reversing lamps receive voltage when the reversing lamp relay is energized. The reversing lamps are
located within the rear lamp assemblies.
For MKX, the reversing lamps are LEDs integrated into the rear lamp assemblies.
Trailer Tow
When the vehicle's rear stop/turn or parking lamps are illuminated, voltage is also supplied to a corresponding
trailer tow relay (coil side) located in the battery junction box (BJB).
Adaptive Headlighting
Vehicles equipped with adaptive front lighting have a module (located on the bottom of the LH headlamp
assembly) to control the left/right aiming of the headlamp bulbs. Depending on the inputs received (steering
wheel angle and vehicle speed for example), the adaptive front lighting module can change the angle at which
the headlamps are aimed (left or right) to improve nighttime visibility around curves.
There are sensors and motors within each headlamp that the module uses to control the angle of the headlamp
beams and are not repaired separately.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
The SJB can be configured to turn the DRL on for this vehicle. Refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION
article for additional information on this programmable parameter.
The DRL system operates the low beam headlamps at a reduced intensity.
The SJB supplies pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage to illuminate the low beam headlamps at a reduced
intensity when the following conditions are met:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
The ignition switch is in the RUN position.
The headlamps have not been turned on by the autolamp system or the headlamp switch.
The transmission is not in PARK (P).
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
HEADLAMPS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
Exterior Lighting
The SJB monitors the headlamp switch position by sending voltage reference signals on multiple circuits to the
headlamp switch. There is one circuit for each headlamp switch position. At any given time, one of the signal
circuits is routed to ground.
If the SJB does not detect any of the inputs to the headlamp switch are active (routed to ground) for 5 seconds,
the SJB turns on the exterior lights and keeps them on for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off (or
10 minutes from the time the SJB does not detect any headlamp switch input if the ignition switch was already
off). Additionally, if the SJB detects multiple circuits short to ground, the SJB implements a planned strategy
depending on the multiple inputs received.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
If either of these situations occur, the SJB should NOT be ruled immediately as being at fault. This is normal
behavior of the SJB design as it has detected a fault with the inputs from the headlamp switch.
High Beam and Flash-to-Pass
The SJB also monitors the multifunction switch for a flash-to-pass or high beam request. There are 2 voltage
reference circuits which monitor this. When the multifunction switch is in the FLASH-TO-PASS or HIGH
BEAM position, the voltage signal is routed to ground.
NOTE:
The flash-to-pass feature does not require any input from the headlamp switch.
When the SJB receives an input requesting the headlamps on, the SJB supplies voltage to the low beams. If the
low beams are on and the SJB receives a request for high beams (or just a flash-to-pass request), the SJB
energizes an internal relay which routes voltage to the headlamps.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the headlamp output
circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut
down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is
stored at that time of the fault. The circuit then resets after a customer demand of the function (switching the
component on, battery saver being energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the module
shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was
stored on the first failure, does not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module does not
allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal operation until a successful on-demand self-test
proves that the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand
DTCs present), the continuous DTC clears and the circuit function returns.
Each circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based on each circuits'
capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the circuit sets along
with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the
fault itself has been corrected. If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level, then DTCs B106F and
B1342 set along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be
replaced.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the headlamp system are for the LH low beam output and the RH low
beam output circuits.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Smart junction box
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Headlamp switch
Multifunction switch
Headlamp assembly
(SJB) fuse(s):
7 (10A) (LH low
beam)
8 (10A) (RH low
beam)
23 (15A) (high
beams)
Bulb(s)
Bulb holder(s)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
DTC Charts
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Lamp Headlamp Input Circuit
B1472
Short to Ground
Flash To Pass Switch Circuit
B1510
Short to Ground
Autolamp On Circuit Short To
B1696
Ground
Wipers On Signal Circuit
B2008
Short to Ground
B2A22
Headlamp Off Circuit Open
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
ADDRESS any other DTCs first. Go to Pinpoint Test
D.
High Beam Input Circuit Short
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
to Ground
If the low beam is inoperative, go to Pinpoint Test
Right Front Lamp Low Beam
B2A2E
B.
Circuit Open
If the low beam is always on, go to Pinpoint Test D .
Right Front Lamp Low Beam
B2A2F
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Circuit Short to Ground
If the low beam is inoperative, go to Pinpoint Test
Left Front Lamp Low Beam
B.
B2A30
Circuit Open
If the low beam is always on, go to Pinpoint Test D .
Left Front Lamp Low Beam
B2A31
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Circuit Short to Ground
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
All other DTCs MODULES article.
B2A23
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication
with the smart junction
box (SJB)
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
Action
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article.
NOTE:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Due to varying
wattage ratings and
resulting current
draw, certain
aftermarket
headlamp bulbs
may cause the SJB
to shut down the
short circuit
protection,
resulting in the low
beams becoming
inoperative.
Both low beams are
inoperative
Both high beams are
inoperative
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Joint connector
Multifunction switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Joint connector
Headlamp assembly
(MKX)
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Joint connector
Headlamp assembly
(MKX)
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
One high beam
headlamp is
inoperative
CHECK for recorded SJB DTCs.
If DTCs are present, REFER to
DTC Charts in this service
information.
If no DTCs are present, INSTALL
a new SJB. REFER to
MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for
normal operation.
One low beam
headlamp is
inoperative
Incorrect bulbs
SJB
VERIFY that the bulbs meet Ford
specifications. If the bulbs do not meet
Ford specifications, INSTALL the
correct bulbs. RUN the on-demand selftest (required to clear certain DTCs and
reset the SJB). CORRECT any
unresolved DTCs. CLEAR all DTCs.
TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
The headlamp(s) are on
continuously
The flash-to-pass
feature is inoperative
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Joint connector
Headlamp switch
Multifunction switch
Windshield wiper
motor
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Multifunction switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: Both High Beams Are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Headlamps/Autolamps for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the headlamp switch is placed in the HEADLAMPS ON position, the smart junction box (SJB) monitors
the high beam request circuit from the multifunction switch through circuit CLF17 (WH/OG). When the
multifunction switch is placed in the HIGH BEAM position, the signal is routed to ground through circuit
GD116 (BK/VT) (which routes through a joint connector). The SJB then energizes the high beam relay
(integrated into the SJB) which supplies voltage to the headlamps through circuit CLF08 (YE/VT).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Joint connector
Multifunction switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST A: BOTH HIGH BEAMS ARE INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
A1 CHECK THE HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position.
Place the multifunction switch in the HIGH BEAM position.
Does the high beam indicator illuminate?
YES : Go to A6.
NO : Go to A2.
A2 CHECK THE MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multifunction Switch C202
Fig. 1: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the multifunction switch C202-6, circuit CLF17
(WH/OG), harness side and the multifunction switch C202-8, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness
side.
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position.
Do the high beams illuminate?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. INSTALL a new multifunction switch. REFER to STEERING
COLUMN SWITCHES article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to A3.
A3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR CONTINUITY TO GROUND
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results
when checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the multifunction switch C202-8, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : Go to A4.
A4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Joint Connector 6 C2365
Fig. 3: Measuring Resistance Between Multifunction Switch C202-8, Circuit GD116 (BK/VT)
& Joint Connector 6 C2365-D
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the multifunction switch C202-8, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness
side and the joint connector 6 C2365-D, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new joint connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF17 (WH/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the multifunction switch C202-6, circuit CLF17 (WH/OG), harness
side and the SJB C2280b-27, circuit CLF17 (WH/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A6 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF08 (YE/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Fig. 5: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (20A) jumper wire between the SJB C2280e-1, circuit CBB53 (GY/BN), harness
side and the SJB C2280e-2, circuit CLF08 (YE/VT), harness side.
Key in ON position.
Do the high beams illuminate?
YES : VERIFY the SJB fuse 23 (15A) is OK. If OK, go to A7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A7 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test B: One Low Beam Headlamp Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Headlamps/Autolamps for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the smart junction box (SJB) detects the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position and the
multifunction switch in the LOW BEAM position, the SJB provides voltage through circuits CLF04 (BN/BU)
and CLF05 (BU/GN) to the LH and RH low beam headlamps, respectively. Ground is supplied on circuit
GD123 (BK/GY) for RH headlamp. Ground for the LH headlamp is routed through a joint connector through
circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
DTC Description
Fault Trigger Conditions
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
B2A2E - Right Front Lamp Low Beam Circuit Open
an open in the RH low beam output circuit.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
B2A2F - Right Front Lamp Low Beam Circuit Short
the SJB detects a short to ground in the RH low
to Ground
beam output circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
B2A30 - Left Front Lamp Low Beam Circuit Open
an open in the LH low beam output circuit.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
B2A31 - Left Front Lamp Low Beam Circuit Short to
the SJB detects a short to ground in the LH low
Ground
beam output circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Joint connector
Headlamp assembly (MKX)
SJB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST B: ONE LOW BEAM HEADLAMP IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
Due to varying wattage ratings and resulting current draw, certain aftermarket
headlamp bulbs may cause the SJB to shut down the short circuit protection,
resulting in the low beams becoming inoperative. Verify that the bulbs meet
Ford specifications. If the bulbs do not meet Ford specifications, install the
correct bulbs. Run the on-demand self-test (required to clear certain DTCs and
reset the SJB). Correct any unresolved DTCs. Clear all DTCs. Test the system
for normal operation.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
B1 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB SELF-TEST
Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
Is DTCs B2A2F or B2A31 recorded?
YES : For MKX, go to B7.
For Edge, go to B8.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 CHECK THE HEADLAMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR CONTINUITY TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Headlamp
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance Between Inoperative Headlamp, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the inoperative headlamp, harness side and ground as follows:
Connector-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Pin
Edge
LH low
beam
C1111-A
RH low
beam
C1112-A
MKX
LH
headlamp
C1021a-2
RH
headlamp
C1041a-2
Circuit
GD120
(BK/GN)
GD123
(BK/GY)
GD120
(BK/GN)
GD123
(BK/GY)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES :
For MKX, go to B5.
For Edge, VERIFY the SJB fuse 7 (10A) (LH low beam) or fuse 8 (10A) (RH low beam) is OK. If
OK Go to B6.
NO : For RH headlamp, REPAIR circuit GD123 (BK/GY) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
For LH headlamp, go to B3.
B3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN (JOINT CONNECTOR TO GROUND)
Disconnect: Joint Connector 7 C2200
Fig. 7: Measuring Resistance Between Joint Connector 7 C2200-J, Circuit GD120 (BK/GN) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the joint connector 7 C2200-J, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
B4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN (HEADLAMP TO JOINT
CONNECTOR)
Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance Between LH Low Beam C1111-A, Circuit GD120 (BK/GN) &
Joint Connector 7 C2200-E
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge, measure the resistance between the LH low beam C1111-A, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and the joint connector 7 C2200-E, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side.
Fig. 9: Measuring Resistance Between LH Headlamp C1021A-2, Circuit GD120 (BK/GN) &
Joint Connector 7 C2200-A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX, measure the resistance between the LH headlamp C1021a-2, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and the joint connector 7 C2200-A, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new joint connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
B5 CHECK THE SJB HEADLAMP VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position.
Fig. 10: Measuring Voltage Between Inoperative Headlamp, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the inoperative headlamp, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
LH
CLF04
headlamp
(BN/BU)
C1021a-1
RH
CLF05
headlamp
(BU/GN)
C1041a-1
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : REPAIR or INSTALL a new headlamp assembly. REFER to Headlamp Assembly. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : VERIFY the SJB fuse 7 (10A) (LH low beam) or fuse 8 (10A) (RH low beam) is OK. If OK,
go to B6.
B6 CHECK THE SJB HEADLAMP VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Measure the resistance between the inoperative headlamp, harness side and the SJB as follows:
Headlamp
SJB
Connector- Connector- Circuit
Pin
Pin
Edge
LH low
SJB
CLF04
beam
C2280e-13 (BN/BU)
C1111-B
RH low
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
beam
SJB
CLF05
C1112-B C2280e-4 (BU/GN)
MKX
LH
SJB
CLF04
headlamp
C2280e-13 (BN/BU)
C1021a-1
RH
SJB
CLF05
headlamp
C2280e-4 (BU/GN)
C1041a-1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
B7 CHECK THE HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Headlamp
Key in ON position.
Repeat the SJB on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B2A2F or B2A31 retrieved again?
YES : Go to B8.
NO : INSTALL a new headlamp assembly. REFER to Headlamp Assembly. TEST the system for
normal operation.
B8 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF04 (BN/BU) (LH HEADLAMP) OR CIRCUIT CLF05 (BU/GN) (RH
HEADLAMP) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Disconnect: Inoperative Headlamp
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance Between Inoperative Headlamp, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the inoperative headlamp, harness side and ground as follows:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
Edge
LH low
CLF04
beam
(BN/BU)
C1111-B
RH low
CLF05
beam
(BU/GN)
C1112-B
MKX
LH
CLF04
headlamp
(BN/BU)
C1021a-1
RH
CLF05
headlamp
(BU/GN)
C1041a-1
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to B9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. RUN the on-demand self-test (required to clear certain
DTCs). CORRECT any unresolved DTCs. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for normal
operation.
B9 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test C: One High Beam Headlamp Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Headlamps/Autolamps for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
When the smart junction box (SJB) detects the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position and the
multifunction switch in the HIGH BEAM position, the SJB energizes an internal relay. When the relay is
energized, the relay routes voltage through circuit CLF08 (YE/VT) to the high beams. Ground is supplied on
circuit GD123 (BK/GY) for the RH headlamp. Ground for the LH headlamp is routed through a joint connector
through circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Joint connector
Headlamp assembly (MKX)
PINPOINT TEST C: ONE HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
C1 CHECK THE LOW BEAM OPERATION
Check the operation of the low beams.
Do the low beams operate correctly?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test B .
C2 CHECK FOR CONTINUITY TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Headlamp
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance Between Inoperative Lamp, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the inoperative lamp, harness side and ground as follows:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Inoperative ConnectorCircuit
Lamp
Pin
Edge
LH high
GD120
C1020-A
beam
(BK/GN)
RH high
GD123
C1040-A
beam
(BK/GY)
MKX
LH
GD120
C1021a-4
headlamp
(BK/GN)
RH
GD123
C1041a-4
headlamp
(BK/GY)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : For Edge, REPAIR circuit CLF08 (YE/VT) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
For MKX, go to C4.
NO : For the RH headlamp, REPAIR circuit GD123 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for
normal operation.
For the LH headlamp, go to C3.
C3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN (HEADLAMP TO JOINT
CONNECTOR)
Disconnect: Joint Connector 7 C2200
Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance Between LH High Beam C1020-A, Circuit GD120 (BK/GN) &
Joint Connector 7 C2200-A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge, measure the resistance between the LH high beam C1020-A, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and the joint connector 7 C2200-A, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance Between LH High headlamp C1021A-4, Circuit GD120
(BK/GN) & Joint Connector 7 C2200-C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX, measure the resistance between the LH headlamp C1021a-4, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and the joint connector 7 C2200-C, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new joint connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
C4 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF08 (YE/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position.
Place the multifunction switch in the HIGH BEAM position.
Fig. 15: Measuring Voltage Between Inoperative Lamp, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the inoperative lamp, harness side and ground as follows:
Inoperative ConnectorCircuit
Lamp
Pin
LH
CLF08
C1021a-3
headlamp
(YE/VT)
RH
CLF08
C1041a-3
headlamp
(YE/VT)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : REPAIR or INSTALL a new headlamp assembly. REFER to Headlamp Assembly. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test D: The Headlamp(s) Are On Continuously
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Headlamps/Autolamps for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation - Low Beams
The smart junction box (SJB) sends reference signals to the headlamp switch through circuits CLF19 (VT/GN)
(AUTOLAMPS), CLF23 (WH/VT) (OFF), CLS34 (GY) (PARKING LAMPS) and CLF18 (BU/WH)
(HEADLAMPS). At any given time, the headlamp switch routes one of the input circuits to ground through
joint connector 6 through circuit GD116 (BK/VT).
When the SJB detects the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position and the multifunction switch in
the LOW BEAM position, the SJB provides voltage through circuits CLF04 (BN/BU) and CLF05 (BU/GN) to
the LH and RH low beam headlamps, respectively.
On vehicles equipped with autolamps, the SJB also monitors input from the windshield wiper motor through
circuit CRW01 (WH) for the headlamps on with wipers on feature.
High Beams
The SJB sends a reference signal to the multifunction switch through circuits CLF27 (GN/BN) and CLF17
(WH/OG). When the multifunction switch is placed in the FLASH-TO-PASS or HIGH BEAM position, the
voltage signal is routed to ground. When the SJB detects a request for flash-to-pass or high beams (when the
low beams are on), the SJB energizes the high beam relay (integrated into the SJB), which routes voltage
through circuit CLF08 (YE/VT) to the headlamps.
DTC Description
B1472 - Lamp Headlamp Input Circuit Short to
Ground
B1510 - Flash To Pass Switch Circuit Short to
Ground
B1696 - Autolamp On Circuit Short To Ground
B2008 - Wipers On Signal Circuit Short to Ground
B2A22 - Headlamp Off Circuit Open
Fault Trigger Conditions
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
the headlamps on input circuit is short to ground.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
the flash-to-pass request input circuit is short to
ground.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
the autolamps on request input circuit is short to
ground.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
the wipers on input circuit is short to ground.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
the headlamp switch off input circuit open.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
a short to ground on the high beam request input
circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
B2A2E - Right Front Lamp Low Beam Circuit Open
the RH low beam output circuit shorted to voltage.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
B2A30 - Left Front Lamp Low Beam Circuit Open
the LH low beam output circuit shorted to voltage.
B2A23 - High Beam Input Circuit Short to Ground
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Joint connector
Headlamp switch
Multifunction switch
Windshield wiper motor
SJB
PINPOINT TEST D: THE HEADLAMP(S) ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
D1 VERIFY THE HEADLAMP OPERATION
Key in ON position.
Are the high beam headlamps illuminated?
YES : Go to D13.
NO : Go to D2.
D2 CHECK THE SJB HEADLAMP SWITCH PIDs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB Data Logger
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is lined up in the correct position
when monitoring the PIDs.
Monitor the SJB headlamp switch PIDs (HD_LMP_S2 and HEAD_L) while moving the headlamp
switch through all positions. Refer to the following chart.
Headlamp HD_LMP_S2 HEAD_L
Switch
Expected
Expected
Position
Value
Value
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Autolamps AUTOLAMP
OFF
OFF
OFF
Parklamps
Headlamp
HEADLAMP
Do the headlamp switch positions agree with the PIDs?
YES : Go to D9.
NO : Go to D3.
D3 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Headlamp Switch C205
Carry out the headlamp switch component test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING
article.
Is the headlamp switch OK?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : INSTALL a new headlamp switch. REFER to Headlamp Switch. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
D4 CHECK FOR CONTINUITY TO GROUND FROM THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
Fig. 16: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch C205-1, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D7.
NO : Go to D5.
D5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN (JOINT CONNECTOR TO GROUND)
Disconnect: Joint Connector 6 C2365
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance Between Joint Connector 6 C2365-A, Circuit GD116 (BK/VT)
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the joint connector 6 C2365-A, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
D6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN (HEADLAMP SWITCH TO JOINT
CONNECTOR)
Fig. 18: Measuring Resistance Between Headlamp Switch C205-1, Circuit GD116 (BK/VT) &
Joint Connector 6 C2365-J
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch C205-1, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side
and joint connector 6 C2365-J, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new joint connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
D7 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 19: Measuring Resistance Between Headlamp Switch, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
C205-9 (if
equipped CLF19
with
(VT/GN)
autolamps)
CLF18
C205-8
(BU/WH)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
D8 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance Between Headlamp Switch, Harness Side & SJB
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch, harness side and the SJB, harness side as
follows:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Headlamp
SJB
Switch
Connector- Circuit
ConnectorPin
Pin
C205-9 (if
CLF19
equipped
C2280b-50
(VT/GN)
with
autolamps)
CLF23
C205-4 C2280b-47
(WH/VT)
CLS34
C205-3 C2280b-31
(GY)
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D16.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
D9 CHECK FOR SJB DTC B2008
Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
Is DTC B2008 present?
YES : Go to D10.
NO : Go to D12.
D10 CHECK THE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Windshield Wiper Motor C1552
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB Self-Test
Repeat the SJB self-test.
Is DTC B2008 still present?
YES : Go to D11.
NO : INSTALL a new windshield wiper motor. REFER to WIPERS AND WASHERS article.
TEST the system for normal operation.
D11 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW01 (WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280f
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 21: Checking Circuit For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the windshield wiper motor C1552-2, circuit CRW01 (WH),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D16.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
D12 CHECK THE SJB OUTPUT
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Does the LH or RH headlamp continue to illuminate?
YES : REPAIR circuit CLF04 (BN/BU) (LH headlamp) or circuit CLF05 (BU/GN) (RH headlamp)
for a short to voltage as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to D16.
D13 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF08 (YE/VT) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Key in ON position.
Do the high beams continue to illuminate?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to D14.
D14 CHECK THE MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Connect: SJB C2280e
Disconnect: Multifunction Switch C202
Key in ON position.
Do the high beams continue to illuminate?
YES : Go to D15.
NO : INSTALL a new multifunction switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
D15 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF17 (WH/OG) (HIGH BEAM) OR CIRCUIT CLF27 (GN/BN)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
(FLASH-TO-PASS) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 22: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the multifunction switch C202-6, circuit CLF17 (WH/OG), harness
side and ground; and between the multifunction switch C202-4, circuit CLF27 (GN/BN), harness
side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D16.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
D16 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test E: The Flash-To-Pass Feature Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Headlamps/Autolamps for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
The smart junction box (SJB) sends a reference signal to the multifunction switch through circuit CLF27
(GN/BN). When the multifunction switch is placed in the FLASH-TO-PASS position, the voltage signal is
routed to ground. When the SJB detects a request for the flash-to-pass, the SJB provides voltage to the high
beam headlamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Multifunction switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST E: THE FLASH-TO-PASS FEATURE IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
E1 VERIFY THE HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP OPERATION
Key in ON position.
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position.
Place the multifunction switch in the HIGH BEAM position while observing the headlamps.
Do the high beam headlamps illuminate?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test A .
E2 CHECK THE MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multifunction Switch C202
Fig. 23: Checking Multifunction Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the multifunction switch C202-4, circuit CLF27
(GN/BN), harness side and the multifunction switch C202-8, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side.
Do the high beams illuminate?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. INSTALL a new multifunction switch. REFER to STEERING
COLUMN SWITCHES article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to E3.
E3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF27 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 24: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the multifunction switch C202-4, circuit CLF27 (GN/BN), harness
side and the SJB C2280b-43, circuit CLF27 (GN/BN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
E4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
AUTOLAMPS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
For the perimeter lighting feature, refer to HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES AND
ENTRY SYSTEMS article.
NOTE:
For the headlamps on with the wipers on feature, refer to WIPERS AND
WASHERS article.
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
Exterior Lighting
The SJB monitors the headlamp switch position by sending voltage reference signals on multiple circuits to the
headlamp switch. There is one circuit for each headlamp switch position. At any given time, one of the signal
circuits is routed to ground.
If the SJB does not detect any of the inputs to the headlamp switch are active (routed to ground) for 5 seconds,
the SJB turns on the exterior lights and keeps them on for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off (or
10 minutes from the time the SJB does not detect any headlamp switch input if the ignition switch was already
off). Additionally, if the SJB detects multiple circuits short to ground, the SJB implements a planned strategy
depending on the multiple inputs received.
If either of these situations occur, the SJB should NOT be ruled immediately as being at fault. This is normal
behavior of the SJB design as it has detected a fault with the inputs from the headlamp switch.
Autolamps Feature
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
The SJB monitors the light sensor with a voltage reference signal. The light sensor input to the SJB varies with
the ambient light conditions.
When the SJB receives an input from the headlamp switch indicating a request for the autolamps, the SJB
monitors the light sensor for the ambient light condition. If the SJB determines the ambient light level is dark,
the SJB supplies voltage to the exterior lamps.
If the ignition switch is already in the RUN position and the vehicle enters a dark/lighted area (such as when
entering/exiting a non-lighted tunnel during the daytime), the transition from light to dark (or dark to light)
needs to last 15 seconds before the SJB turns the exterior lamps on or off. This strategy is to prevent the exterior
lamps from unnecessarily flashing on and off.
The SJB does react quicker under extreme light conditions. If the SJB has detected a very dark condition, the
exterior lamps are turned on after 1.5 seconds. If the SJB has detected a very high ambient light level, the
exterior lamps are turned off after 4 seconds.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Headlamp switch
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Light sensor
Smart junction box
(SJB)
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
DTC Charts
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
Lamp Headlamp Input Circuit
B1472
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Short to Ground
Autolamp On Circuit Short To
B1696
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Ground
Autolamp Sensor Input Circuit
B1791
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Open
Autolamp Sensor Input Circuit
B1793
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Short to Ground
Wipers On Signal Circuit
B2008
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Short to Ground
ADDRESS any other DTCs first. Go to Pinpoint Test
B2A22
Headlamp Off Circuit Open
G.
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
All other DTCs MODULES article.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Fuse
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
No communication with
the smart junction box
(SJB)
The autolamps are
inoperative
The autolamps are on
continuously
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article.
Light sensor
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Joint connector
Light sensor
Headlamp switch
Windshield wiper
motor
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test F: The Autolamps Are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Headlamps/Autolamps for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
When the smart junction box (SJB) detects the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position, the SJB
monitors the light sensor input. The light sensor determines the amount of light based on the input received
from the ambient lighting conditions. When the ambient light level has reached a point (determined by the
internal programming of the SJB), the SJB provides voltage to the headlamps, parking and license plate lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Light sensor
SJB
PINPOINT TEST F: THE AUTOLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
F1 CHECK THE MANUAL HEADLAMP OPERATION
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position.
Do the headlamps operate correctly?
YES : Go to F2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
NO : REFER to Headlamps.
F2 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LIGHT SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Light Sensor C286 or C287
Key in ON position.
Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position.
Fig. 25: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For vehicles with EATC, measure the voltage between the light sensor C286-2, circuit VLF14
(BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Fig. 26: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For vehicles with manual temperature control, measure the voltage between the light sensor C287aA, circuit VLF14 (BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage approximately 5 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new light sensor. REFER to Light Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
NO : Go to F3.
F3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test G: The Autolamps Are On Continuously
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Headlamps/Autolamps for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) sends a reference voltage signal to the headlamp switch through circuit CLF19
(VT/GN) and a reference voltage signal to the light sensor through circuit VLF14 (BU/BN). Ground for the
light sensor is provided by circuit GD115 (BK/GY).
When the headlamp switch is placed in the AUTOLAMPS ON position, the voltage signal is routed to ground.
When the SJB detects the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position, the SJB monitors the light sensor
input. The light sensor determines the amount of light based on the input received from the ambient lighting
conditions. When the ambient light level has reached a point (determined by the internal programming of the
SJB), the SJB provides voltage to the headlamps, parking and license plate lamps.
DTC Description
B1472 - Lamp Headlamp Input Circuit Short to
Ground
B1696 - Autolamp On Circuit Short To Ground
B1791 - Autolamp Sensor Input Circuit Open
B1793 - Autolamp Sensor Input Circuit Short to
Ground
B2008 - Wipers On Signal Circuit Short to Ground
Fault Trigger Conditions
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
the headlamps on input circuit is shorted to
ground.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
the autolamps on input circuit shorted to ground.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open on the light sensor input circuit.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the SJB detects a short to ground on the light
sensor input circuit.
A n on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects the wipers on input circuit is short to
ground.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:30 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
B2A22 - Headlamp Off Circuit Open
the headlamp switch off circuit open.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Joint connector
Light sensor
Headlamp switch
Windshield wiper motor
SJB
PINPOINT TEST G: THE AUTOLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
G1 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB SELF-TEST
Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
Was DTC B2008, B1791 or B1793 recorded?
YES : For DTC B2008, go to G10.
For DTC B1791, go to G12.
For DTC B1793, go to G16.
NO : Go to G2.
G2 CHECK THE SJB HEADLAMP SWITCH PIDs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB Data Logger
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is lined up in the correct position
when monitoring the PIDs.
Monitor the SJB headlamp switch PIDs (HD_LMP_S2 and HEAD_L) while moving the headlamp
switch through all positions. Refer to the following chart.
Headlamp
Switch
Position
Autolamps
HD_LMP_S2 HEAD_L
Expected
Expected
Value
Value
AUTOLAMP
OFF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
OFF
PARKING
LAMPS
HEADLAMPS
-
OFF
-
-
-
HEADLAMP
Do the headlamp switch positions agree with the PIDs?
YES : Go to G9.
NO : Go to G3.
G3 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Headlamp Switch C205
Carry out the headlamp switch component test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING
article.
Is the headlamp switch OK?
YES : Go to G4.
NO : INSTALL a new headlamp switch. REFER to Headlamp Switch. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
G4 CHECK FOR CONTINUITY TO GROUND FROM THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
Fig. 27: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch C205-1, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G7.
NO : Go to G5.
G5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN (JOINT CONNECTOR TO GROUND)
Disconnect: Joint Connector 6 C2365
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 28: Measuring Resistance Between Joint Connector 6 C2365-A, Circuit GD116 (BK/VT)
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the joint connector 6 C2365-A, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness
side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
G6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN (HEADLAMP SWITCH TO JOINT
CONNECTOR)
Fig. 29: Measuring Resistance Between Headlamp Switch C205-1, Circuit GD116 (BK/VT) &
Joint Connector 6 C2365-J
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch C205-1, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side
and joint connector 6 C2365-J, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new joint connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
G7 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 30: Measuring Resistance Between Headlamp Switch, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CLF19
C205-9
(VT/GN)
CLF18
C205-8
(BU/WH)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
G8 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 31: Measuring Resistance Between Headlamp Switch, Harness Side & SJB
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch, harness side and the SJB, harness side as
follows:
Headlamp
SJB
Circuit
Switch ConnectorMicrosoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
ConnectorPin
Pin
C205-9
C2280b-50
C205-4
C205-3
CLF19
(VT/GN)
CLF23
C2280b-47
(WH/VT)
CLS34
C2280b-31
(GY)
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G18.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
G9 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LIGHT SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Light Sensor C286 or C287
Key in ON position.
Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position.
Fig. 32: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For vehicles with EATC, measure the voltage between the light sensor C286-2, circuit VLF14
(BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Fig. 33: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For vehicles with manual temperature control, measure the voltage between the light sensor C287aA, circuit VLF14 (BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage approximately 5 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new light sensor. REFER to Light Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
NO : Go to G18.
G10 CHECK THE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Disconnect: Windshield Wiper Motor C1552
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB Self-Test
Repeat the SJB self-test.
Is DTC B2008 still present?
YES : Go to G11.
NO : INSTALL a new windshield wiper motor. REFER to WIPERS AND WASHERS article.
TEST the system for normal operation.
G11 CHECK CIRCUIT CRW01 (WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280f
Fig. 34: Checking Circuit For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the windshield wiper motor C1552-2, circuit CRW01 (WH),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G18.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
G12 CHECK CIRCUIT GD115 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Light Sensor C286 or C287
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 35: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with EATC, measure the resistance between the light sensor C286-4, circuit GD115
(BK/GY), harness side and ground.
Fig. 36: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with manual climate control, measure the resistance between the light sensor C287-B,
circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G13.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
G13 CHECK CIRCUIT VLF14 (BU/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 37: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with EATC, measure the voltage between the light sensor C286-2, circuit VLF14
(BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Fig. 38: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with manual climate control, measure the voltage between the light sensor C287-A,
circuit VLF14 (BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to G14.
G14 CHECK CIRCUIT VLF14 (BU/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 39: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with EATC, measure the resistance between the light sensor C286-2, circuit VLF14
(BU/BN), harness side and the SJB C2280b-46, circuit VLF14 (BU/BN), harness side.
Fig. 40: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with manual climate control, measure the resistance between the light sensor C287-A,
circuit VLF14 (BU/BN), harness side and the SJB C2280b-46, circuit VLF14 (BU/BN), harness
side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to G15.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
G15 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LIGHT SENSOR (DTC B1791)
Connect: SJB C2280b
Key in ON position.
Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 41: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with EATC, measure the voltage between the light sensor C286-2, circuit VLF14
(BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Fig. 42: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with manual climate control, measure the voltage between the light sensor C287-A,
circuit VLF14 (BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage approximately 5 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new light sensor. REFER to Light Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
NO : Go to G18.
G16 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LIGHT SENSOR (DTC B1793)
Disconnect: Light Sensor C286 or C287
Key in ON position.
Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 43: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with EATC, measure the voltage between the light sensor C286-2, circuit VLF14
(BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Fig. 44: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with manual temperature control, measure the voltage between the light sensor C287A, circuit VLF14 (BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage approximately 5 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new light sensor. REFER to Light Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
NO : Go to G17.
G17 CHECK CIRCUIT VLF14 (BU/BN) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 45: Checking Circuit For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with EATC, measure the resistance between the light sensor C286-2, circuit VLF14
(BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Fig. 46: Checking Circuit For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
On vehicles with manual temperature control, measure the resistance between the light sensor
C287-A, circuit VLF14 (BU/BN), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to G18.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
G18 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
STOPLAMPS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The SJB monitors the input from the stoplamp switch. When the brake pedal is applied, voltage is routed to the
SJB and the high mounted stoplamp. The SJB then supplies voltage to the stoplamps.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the headlamp output
circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut
down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is
stored at that time of the fault. The circuit then resets after a customer demand of the function (switching the
component on, battery saver being energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the module
shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was
stored on the first failure, does not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module does not
allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal operation until a successful on-demand self-test
proves that the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand
DTCs present), the continuous DTC clears and the circuit function returns.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Each circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based on each circuits'
capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the circuit sets along
with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the
fault itself has been corrected. If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level, then DTCs B106F and
B1342 set along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be
replaced.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the stoplamp system are for the LH rear stop/turn lamp output and
the RH rear stop/turn lamp output circuits.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Stoplamp switch
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 71 (10A)
(stoplamp switch)
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse 6 (20A) (rear
stoplamps)
Bulb(s)
Bulb holder(s)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
DTC Charts
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
Brake Pedal Input Short to
B1485
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
Battery
Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit
B2044
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Short to Ground
Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit If the lamp is inoperative, go to Pinpoint Test I .
B2045
Open
If the lamp is always on, go to Pinpoint Test J .
Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit
B2046
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Short to Ground
Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit If the lamp is inoperative, go to Pinpoint Test I .
B2047
Open
If the lamp is always on, go to Pinpoint Test J .
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
All other DTCs MODULES article.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
No communication with
Possible Sources
Fuse
Action
REFER to MODULE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
the smart junction box
(SJB)
All the stoplamps are
inoperative
One or more stoplamps
are inoperative
The stoplamps are on
continuously
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article.
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
SJB
Fuse
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Stoplamp switch
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Bulb holder
High mounted
stoplamp
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Stoplamp switch
PCM
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test H: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
The stoplamp switch is supplied voltage through circuit SBB71 (WH/RD) from the battery junction box (BJB).
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the smart junction box (SJB) and the
high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Stoplamp switch
PINPOINT TEST H: ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
H1 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB71 (WH/RD) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C2064
Fig. 47: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the stoplamp switch C2064-1, circuit SBB71 (WH/RD), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to H2.
NO : VERIFY the BJB fuse 71 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for
normal operation.
H2 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
Fig. 48: Checking Stoplamp Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the stoplamp switch C2064-1, circuit SBB71 (WH/RD),
harness side and the stoplamp switch C2064-4, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side.
Are the stoplamps illuminated?
YES : INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Pinpoint Test I: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the smart junction box (SJB) and the
high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH).
When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps
through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively.
Ground for the LH and RH rear stoplamps is provided through circuits GD149 (BK/GY) and GD151 (BK/GN),
respectively. Ground for the high mounted stoplamp is provided through circuit GD149 (BK/GY).
DTC Description
B2044 - Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Short to
Ground
B2045 - Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open
B2046 - Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Short to
Ground
B2047 - Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open
Fault Trigger Conditions
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the SJB detects a short to ground on the LH rear
stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage
supply circuit.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the SJB detects a short to ground on the RH rear
stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage
supply circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Bulb holder
High mounted stoplamp
SJB
PINPOINT TEST I: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
I1 DETERMINE THE INOPERATIVE STOPLAMP
Key in OFF position.
Apply the brake pedal and observe the stoplamps.
Is the high mounted stoplamp illuminated?
YES : Go to I4.
NO : Go to I2.
I2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD149 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: High Mounted Stoplamp C904
Fig. 49: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the high mounted stoplamp C904-2, circuit GD149 (BK/GY),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to I3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
I3 CHECK CIRCUIT CCB08 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN (TO HIGH MOUNTED STOPLAMP)
Fig. 50: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp C904-1,
circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new high mounted stoplamp. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
I4 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB SELF-TEST
Check the recorded results from the SJB on-demand self-test.
Are any DTCs present?
YES : For DTCs B2044 or B2046, go to I6.
For DTCs B2045 or B2047, go to I8.
NO : Go to I5.
I5 CHECK CIRCUIT CCB08 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN (TO SJB)
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 51: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the SJB C2280b-40, circuit CCB08
(VT/WH), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to I11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
I6 CHECK THE BULB HOLDER
Disconnect: LH Rear Lamp C412 (DTC B2044)
Disconnect: RH Rear Lamp C415 (DTC B2046)
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB Self-Test
Repeat the SJB on-demand self-test.
Is on-demand DTC B2044 or B2046 retrieved again?
YES : Go to I7.
NO : INSTALL a new bulb holder. CORRECT any unresolved DTCs. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
I7 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19 (VT/OG) FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Fig. 52: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and
ground; or between the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to I11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. RUN the on-demand self-test (required to clear certain
DTCs). CORRECT any unresolved DTCs. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for normal
operation.
I8 CHECK CIRCUIT GD149 (BK/GY) (LH STOPLAMP) OR CIRCUIT GD151 (BK/GN) (RH
STOPLAMP) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp
Fig. 53: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the LH rear lamp C412-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C415-1, circuit GD151 (BK/GN), harness side and
ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to I9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
I9 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE BULB HOLDER
Fig. 54: Measuring Voltage Between LH Rear Lamp C412-3 & C415-3, Circuit CLS18
(GY/BN) & CLS19 (VT/OG)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C412-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C415-3, circuit CLS19
(VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new bulb holder. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to I10.
I10 CHECK THE CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19 (VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Fig. 55: Measuring Resistance Between LH Rear Lamp C412-3, Circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) &
SJB C2280D-25
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the LH rear lamp C412-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side
and the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side; or between the RH rear lamp C4153, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to I11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
I11 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test J: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic
and connector information.
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the smart junction box (SJB), the high
mounted stoplamp and the PCM through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). When the SJB detects the brake pedal
applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and
CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. If equipped with trailer tow, voltage is also supplied to the respective trailer tow
stop/turn relay.
DTC B1485 (Brake Pedal Input Short to Battery) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a
short to voltage from the stoplamp switch input circuit.
DTC B2045 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a
short to voltage on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
DTC B2047 (Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
a short to voltage on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Stoplamp switch
PCM
SJB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
PINPOINT TEST J: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
J1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE ILLUMINATED
Key in OFF position.
Observe the stoplamps with the brake pedal released.
Are all of the stoplamps illuminated?
YES : Go to J3.
NO : Go to J2.
J2 CHECK THE STOPLAMPS VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
YES : If the LH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN). CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
If the RH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS19 (VT/OG). CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to J7.
J3 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C2064
Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
YES : Go to J4.
NO : INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
J4 CHECK THE PCM
Disconnect: PCM C175b
Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
YES : Go to J5.
NO : Go to J6.
J5 CHECK CIRCUIT CCB08 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Does the high mounted stoplamp continue to illuminate?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to J7.
J6 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
pushed-out pins
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
J7 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMPS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The SJB monitors the multifunction switch position by sending multiple voltage reference signals to the
multifunction switch. When the multifunction switch is in the LH or RH TURN positions, or the hazard lamp
switch is pressed, that input signal is routed to ground.
When the SJB receives a request for a turn signal or hazard lamps, the SJB supplies voltage to the appropriate
turn lamps.
The timed on/off cycle is determined by the SJB and is set to flash approximately 80 times per minute if both
the front and rear turn lamps operate correctly. If an individual turn signal lamp is inoperative, the SJB flashes
the remaining turn lamp approximately 160 times per minute.
The timed on/off cycle for the hazard lamps is set to flash approximately 80 times per minute.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the headlamp output
circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut
down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is
stored at that time of the fault. The circuit then resets after a customer demand of the function (switching the
component on, battery saver being energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the module
shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was
stored on the first failure, does not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module does not
allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal operation until a successful on-demand self-test
proves that the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand
DTCs present), the continuous DTC clears and the circuit function returns.
Each circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based on each circuits'
capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the circuit sets along
with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the
fault itself has been corrected. If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level, then DTCs B106F and
B1342 set along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be
replaced.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the turn lamp system are for the LH front turn lamp output and the
RH front turn lamp output circuits. The rear turn lamps utilize the stoplamp circuitry and are also protected. For
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
information regarding the rear stoplamps, refer to Stoplamps.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Multifunction switch
Hazard flasher lamp
switch
Bulb(s)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Smart junction box
(SJB)
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
DTC Charts
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Hazard Switch Signal Short to
B2071
Ground
Right Turn Switch Short to
B2281
Ground
Left Turn Switch Short to
B2282
Ground
Right Front Turn Lamp
B2A27
Circuit Open
Right Front Turn Lamp
B2A28
Circuit Short to Ground
Left Front Turn Lamp Circuit
B2A29
Open
Left Front Turn Lamp Circuit
B2A2A
Short to Ground
All other DTCs
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test N .
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article.
-
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication with the
smart junction box (SJB)
The turn signal lamps are
inoperative
The turn signal lamps are
always on
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
Action
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Multifunction switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test K .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Multifunction switch
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
SJB
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Joint connector
Bulb holder (Edge)
Headlamp assembly
(MKX)
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test M .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Joint connector
Hazard flasher lamp
switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test N .
One turn signal/hazard lamp
is inoperative/always on
The hazard lamps are
inoperative/always on
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test K: The Turn Signal Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) sends reference signals to the multifunction switch through circuit CLS39
(VT/WH) (LH turn input) and circuit CLS41 (GY/YE) (RH turn input). When the multifunction switch is
switched to the LH or RH TURN positions, the voltage signal is routed to ground. When the SJB detects the
multifunction switch in the LH or RH TURN position, the SJB sends voltage to the appropriate turn lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Multifunction switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST K: THE TURN SIGNAL LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
K1 CHECK FOR CORRECT HIGH BEAM OPERATION
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Place the multifunction switch in the HIGH BEAM position while observing the high beam
headlamps.
Do the high beams operate correctly?
YES : PLACE the headlamp switch in the OFF position. Go to K2.
NO : REFER to Headlamps.
K2 CHECK THE MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multifunction Switch C202
Fig. 56: Connecting Fused (5A) Jumper Wire Between Multifunction Switch C202-2 & C2028, CLS39 (VT/WH) & GD116 (BK/VT)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative LH turn signal, connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the multifunction
switch C202-2, circuit CLS39 (VT/WH), harness side and the multifunction switch C202-8, circuit
GD116 (BK/VT), harness side.
Fig. 57: Connecting Fused (5A) Jumper Wire Between Multifunction Switch C202-3, CLS41
(GY/YE) & GD116 (BK/VT)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH turn signal, connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the multifunction
switch C202-3, circuit CLS41 (GY/YE), harness side and the multifunction switch C202-3, circuit
GD116 (BK/VT), harness side.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Do the turn signals in question flash on and off?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. INSTALL a new multifunction switch. REFER to STEERING
COLUMN SWITCHES article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to K3.
K3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS39 (VT/WH) (LH TURN SIGNAL) OR CLS41 (GY/YE) (RH TURN
SIGNAL) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 58: Measuring Resistance Between Multifunction Switch C202-2, Circuit CLS39
(VT/WH) & SJB C2280B-42
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative LH turn signal, measure the resistance between the multifunction switch C2022, circuit CLS39 (VT/WH), harness side and the SJB C2280b-42, circuit CLS39 (VT/WH), harness
side.
Fig. 59: Measuring Resistance Between Multifunction Switch C202-3, Circuit CLS41
(GY/YE) & SJB C2280B-29
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For an inoperative RH turn signal, measure the resistance between the multifunction switch C2023, circuit CLS41 (GY/YE), harness side and the SJB C2280b-29, circuit CLS41 (GY/YE), harness
side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to K4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
K4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test L: The Turn Signal Lamps Are Always On
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) sends reference signals to the multifunction switch through circuits CLS39
(VT/WH) (LH turn input) and CLS41 (GY/YE) (RH turn input). When the multifunction switch is switched to
the LH or RH TURN positions, the voltage signal is routed to ground. When the SJB detects the multifunction
switch in the LH or RH TURN position, the SJB sends voltage to the appropriate turn lamps.
DTC B2281 (Right Turn Switch Short to Ground) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
the RH turn signal switch input is short to ground.
DTC B2282 (Left Turn Switch Short to Ground) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
the LH turn signal switch input is short to ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Multifunction switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST L: THE TURN SIGNAL LAMPS ARE ALWAYS ON
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
L1 CHECK THE MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Multifunction Switch C202
Key in ON position.
Do the turn lamps continue to flash on and off?
YES : Go to L2.
NO : INSTALL a new multifunction switch. REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
L2 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS39 (VT/WH) (LH TURN SIGNAL) OR CIRCUIT CLS41 (GY/YE) (RH
TURN SIGNAL) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 60: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the multifunction switch C202-2 (LH turn lamps), circuit CLS39
(VT/WH), harness side and ground; or between the multifunction switch C202-3 (RH turn lamps),
circuit CLS41 (GY/YE), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to L3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
L3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR any DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test M: One Turn Signal/Hazard Lamp Is Inoperative/Always On
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
When the smart junction box (SJB) detects the multifunction switch in the LH TURN position, the SJB provides
voltage through circuit CLS21 (BU/GN) to the LH front turn lamp. When the SJB detects the multifunction
switch in the RH TURN position, the SJB provides voltage through circuit CLS25 (YE/VT) to the RH front turn
lamp. Circuits GD123 (BK/GY) and GD120 (BK/GN) provide ground for the LH and RH front turn lamps,
respectively. The rear turn lamps are controlled utilizing the rear stoplamp circuitry.
DTC Description
B2A27 - Right Front Turn Lamp Circuit Open
B2A28 - Right Front Turn Lamp Circuit Short to
Ground
B2A29 - Left Front Turn Lamp Circuit Open
B2A2A - Left Front Turn Lamp Circuit Short to
Ground
Fault Trigger Conditions
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open or short to voltage on the RH front turn
lamp voltage supply circuit.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the SJB detects a short to ground on the RH front
turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open or short to voltage on the LH front turn
lamp voltage supply circuit.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the SJB detects a short to ground on the LH front
turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Joint connector
Bulb holder (Edge)
Headlamp assembly (MKX)
SJB
PINPOINT TEST M: ONE TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD LAMP IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
M1 CHECK THE STOPLAMPS
Apply and release the brake pedal while observing the stoplamps.
Do the stoplamps operate correctly?
YES : Go to M2.
NO : REFER to Stoplamps.
M2 DETERMINE IF A TURN LAMP IS ALWAYS ON
Key in ON position.
Monitor the turn lamps.
Is either front turn lamp always on?
YES : Go to M3.
NO : Go to M4.
M3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS21 (BU/GN) (LH TURN) OR CIRCUIT CLS25 (YE/VT) (RH TURN)
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280f
Key in ON position.
Does the front turn lamp in question continue to illuminate?
YES : For the LH front turn lamp, REPAIR circuit CLS21 (BU/GN). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
For the RH front turn lamp, REPAIR circuit CLS25 (YE/VT). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
NO : Go to M11.
M4 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB SELF-TEST
Check the recorded results from the SJB on-demand self-test.
Was DTC B2A28 or B2A2A present?
YES : Go to M5.
NO : Go to M7.
M5 CHECK THE BULB HOLDER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: Inoperative Front Turn Lamp
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB Self-Test
Repeat the SJB on-demand self-test.
Is DTC B2A28 or B2A2A still present?
YES : Go to M6.
NO : INSTALL a new bulb holder. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
M6 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS21 (BU/GN) (DTC B2A2A) OR CIRCUIT CLS25 (YE/VT) (DTC
B2A28) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280f
Fig. 61: Checking Circuits For Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280f-21 (DTC B2A2A), circuit CLS21 (BU/GN),
harness side and ground; or between the SJB C2280f-23 (DTC B2A28), circuit CLS25 (YE/VT),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to M11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. RUN the on-demand self-test (required to clear certain
DTCs). CORRECT any unresolved DTCs. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for normal
operation.
M7 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamps operate correctly before continuing with
diagnostics for the turn lamps.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Turn Lamp
Fig. 62: Measuring Resistance Between Inoperative Turn Lamp, Harness Side & Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the inoperative turn lamp, harness side and ground as follows
Inoperative
ConnectorTurn
Circuit
Pin
Lamp
Edge
GD123
LH front
C1023-1
(BK/GY)
GD120
RH front
C1043-1
(BK/GN)
MKX
LH front
GD123
C1021a-6
headlamp
(BK/GY)
RH front
GD123
C1041a-6
headlamp
(BK/GY)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to M9.
NO : For MKX, REPAIR the ground circuit in question for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
For Edge LH front turn lamp, REPAIR circuit GD123 (BK/GY) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
For the Edge RH front turn lamp, go to M8.
M8 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Joint Connector 7 C2200
Fig. 63: Measuring Resistance Between RH Front Turn Lamp C1043-1, Circuit GD120
(BK/GN) & Joint Connector 7 C2200-C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the RH front turn lamp C1043-1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness
side and the joint connector 7 C2200-C, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new joint connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
M9 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TURN LAMP
Connect: SJB C2280e
Turn the hazard lamps on.
Fig. 64: Measuring Resistance Between Inoperative Turn Lamp, Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the inoperative turn lamp, harness side and ground as follows:
Inoperative
Turn
Lamp
Circuit
ConnectorPin
Edge
LH front CLS21
C1023-3 (BU/GN)
RH front CLS25
C1043-3 (YE/VT)
MKX
LH front
CLS21
headlamp
(BU/GN)
C1021a-5
RH front
CLS25
headlamp
(YE/VT)
C1041a-5
Does the voltage alternate from 0 volts to greater than 10 volts?
YES : For Edge, INSTALL a new bulb holder. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
For MKX, REPAIR or INSTALL a new headlamp. REFER to Headlamp Assembly. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to M10.
M10 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS21 (BU/GN) (LH TURN) OR CIRCUIT CLS25 (YE/VT) (RH TURN)
FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280f
Fig. 65: Measuring Resistance Between Inoperative Turn Lamp, Harness Side & SJB
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the inoperative turn lamp, harness side and the SJB, harness side as
follows:
Inoperative
Turn
SJB
Lamp Connector- Circuit
ConnectorPin
Pin
Edge
LH front
CLS21
C2280f-21
C1023-3
(BU/GN)
RH front
CLS25
C2280f-23
C1043-3
(YE/VT)
MKX
LH front
CLS21
headlamp C2280f-21
(BU/GN)
C1021a-5
RH front
CLS25
headlamp C2280f-23
(YE/VT)
C1041a-5
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to M11.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
M11 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test N: The Hazard Lamps Are Inoperative/Always On
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) sends a voltage reference signal to the hazard lamp switch through circuit CLS32
(BN/YE). The hazard flasher lamp switch is a momentary contact switch. When the hazard flasher lamp switch
is engaged, the voltage signal is routed to ground through circuit GD116 (BK/VT). When the SJB detects a
request for the hazard lamps, the SJB provides on/off voltage to all the turn lamps.
DTC B2071 (Hazard Switch Signal Short to Ground) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to ground from the hazard flasher lamp switch input circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Joint connector
Hazard flasher lamp switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST N: THE HAZARD LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
N1 CHECK THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB SELF-TEST
Check the recorded DTCs from the SJB self-test.
Is DTC B2071 present?
YES : Go to N2.
NO : Go to N4.
N2 CHECK THE HAZARD FLASHER LAMP SWITCH
Disconnect: Hazard Flasher Lamp Switch C2355
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB Self-Test
Repeat the SJB self-test.
Is DTC B2071 still present?
YES : Go to N3.
NO : INSTALL a new hazard flasher lamp switch. REFER to Hazard Flasher Lamp Switch.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
N3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS32 (BN/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 66: Measuring Resistance Between Hazard Flasher Lamp Switch C2355-5, Circuit
CLS32 (BN/YE) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the hazard flasher lamp switch C2355-5, circuit CLS32 (BN/YE),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to N8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
N4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR CONTINUITY TO GROUND
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamps operate correctly before continuing with
diagnostics for the hazard lamps.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Hazard Flasher Lamp Switch C2355
Fig. 67: Measuring Resistance Between Hazard Flasher Lamp Switch C2355-1, Circuit
GD116 (BK/VT) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the hazard flasher lamp switch C2355-1, circuit GD116 (BK/VT),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to N6.
NO : Go to N5.
N5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamps operate correctly before continuing with
diagnostics for the hazard lamps.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Joint Connector 6 C2365
Fig. 68: Measuring Resistance Between Hazard Flasher Lamp Switch C2355-1, GD116
(BK/VT) & Joint Connector 6 C2365-H
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the hazard flasher lamp switch C2355-1, circuit GD116 (BK/VT),
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
harness side and the joint connector 6 C2365-H, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new joint connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
N6 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS32 (BN/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 69: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280B-48, Circuit CLS32 (BN/YE) & Hazard
Flasher Lamp Switch C2355-5
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-48, circuit CLS32 (BN/YE), harness side and the
hazard flasher lamp switch C2355-5, circuit CLS32 (BN/YE), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to N7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
N7 CHECK THE HAZARD FLASHER LAMP SWITCH
Connect: Hazard Flasher Lamp Switch C2355
Fig. 70: Checking Hazard Flasher Lamp Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
While pressing and releasing the hazard flasher lamp switch, measure the resistance between the
SJB C2280b-48, circuit CLS32 (BN/YE), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms with the switch pressed and greater than 10,000 ohms with
the switch released?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to N8.
NO : INSTALL a new hazard flasher lamp switch. REFER to Hazard Flasher Lamp Switch.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
N8 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
PARKING, REAR AND LICENSE PLATE LAMPS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
The SJB monitors the headlamp switch position by sending voltage reference signals on multiple circuits to the
headlamp switch. There is one circuit for each headlamp switch position. At any given time, one of the signal
circuits is routed to ground.
If the SJB does not detect any of the inputs to the headlamp switch are active (routed to ground) for 5 seconds,
the SJB turns on the exterior lights and keeps them on for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off (or
10 minutes from the time the SJB does not detect any headlamp switch input if the ignition switch was already
off). Additionally, if the SJB detects multiple circuits short to ground, the SJB implements a planned strategy
depending on the multiple inputs received.
If either of these situations occur, the SJB should NOT be ruled immediately as being at fault. This is normal
behavior of the SJB design as it has detected a fault with the inputs from the headlamp switch.
When the SJB receives an input from the headlamp switch indicating a request for the parking lamps, the SJB
energizes the parking lamp relay (internal to the SJB), which supplies voltage to the exterior lamps.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Headlamp switch
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse 22 (15A)
Bulb(s)
Bulb holder(s)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
DTC Charts
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
Lamp Park Input Circuit Short
B1578
Go to Pinpoint Test P .
to Ground
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
All other DTCs MODULES article.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication with
the smart junction box
(SJB)
One or more parking, rear
Fuse
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
SJB
Action
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article.
Fuse
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Bulb Holder
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
or license plate lamps is
inoperative
The parking, rear or
license plate lamps are on
continuously
Liftgate lamp
Liftgate release
handle
Headlamp
assembly
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test O .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Headlamp switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test P .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test O: One Or More Parking, Rear or License Plate Lamps Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Parking, Rear and License Lamps for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
When the headlamp switch is placed in the PARKING LAMPS ON position, the smart junction box (SJB)
provides a ground for the parking lamp relay coil (integrated into the SJB). When the parking lamp relay is
energized, voltage is routed through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) to the rear and front parking lamps. Ground is
provided to the rear parking, liftgate and license plate lamps through circuit GD149 (BK/GY) or circuit GD151
(BK/GN). Ground is provided to the front parking and side marker lamps through circuit GD120 (BK/GN) or
circuit GD123 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Bulb Holder
Liftgate lamp
Liftgate release handle
Headlamp assembly
SJB
PINPOINT TEST O: ONE OR MORE PARKING, REAR OR LICENSE PLATE LAMPS IS
INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
O1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE PARKING LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Key in OFF position.
Place the headlamp switch to the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
Are all the parking lamps inoperative?
YES : PLACE the headlamp switch in the OFF position. VERIFY the SJB fuse 22 (15A) is OK. If
OK, go to O6.
NO : If all the front parking lamps are inoperative, go to O2.
If all the rear parking and license plate lamps are inoperative, go to O3.
For all others, go to O4.
O2 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN (FRONT LAMPS)
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Fig. 71: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the SJB C2280e-1, circuit CBB53 (GY/BN), harness
side and the SJB C2280e-6, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), harness side.
Key in ON position.
Do the front parking lamps illuminate?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to O6.
NO : REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
O3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN (REAR LAMPS)
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 72: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the positive battery terminal and the SJB C2280d-20,
circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), harness side.
Do the rear parking lamps illuminate?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to O6.
NO : REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
O4 CHECK THE PARKING LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
If a front parking lamp is inoperative, make sure the front turn signal
operates correctly before continuing diagnostics for the front parking
lamp.
Disconnect: Inoperative Lamp
Measure the resistance between the inoperative lamp, harness side and ground as follows:
EDGE
Inoperative ConnectorCircuit
Lamp
Pin
GD123
LH front
C1023-1
(BK/GY)
GD120
RH front
C1043-1
(BK/GN)
GD149
LH rear
C412-1
(BK/GY)
GD151
RH rear
C415-1
(BK/GN)
LH rear
GD149
C4136-1
side marker
(BK/GY)
RH rear
GD151
C4138-1
side marker
(BK/GN)
Liftgate
release
GD149
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
handle
(BK/GY)
C4353-2
(license
plate lamps)
MKX
Inoperative ConnectorCircuit
Lamp
Pin
LH front
GD123
C1021a-6
(headlamp)
(BK/GY)
RH front
GD123
C1041a-6
(headlamp)
(BK/GY)
LH front
GD120
C151-2
side marker
(BK/GN)
RH front
GD123
C161-2
side marker
(BK/GY)
GD149
LH rear
C412-1
(BK/GY)
GD151
RH rear
C415-1
(BK/GN)
Liftgate
GD149
C4352-2
(rear
(BK/GY)
applique)
LH rear
GD149
C4355-2
side marker
(BK/GY)
RH rear
GD149
C4356-2
side marker
(BK/GY)
LH license
GD149
C452-2
plate
(BK/GY)
RH license
GD149
C462-2
plate
(BK/GY)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to O5.
NO : REPAIR the ground circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
O5 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
Measure the voltage between the inoperative lamp, harness side and ground as follows:
EDGE
Inoperative ConnectorCircuit
Lamp
Pin
CLS30
LH front
C1023-2
(VT/WH)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
CLS30
(VT/WH)
CLS30
LH rear
C412-2
(VT/WH)
CLS30
RH rear
C415-2
(VT/WH)
LH rear
CLS30
C4136-2
side marker
(VT/WH)
RH rear
CLS30
C4138-2
side marker
(VT/WH)
Liftgate
release
CLS30
C4353-1
handle
(VT/WH)
(license
plate lamps)
RH front
C1043-2
MKX
Inoperative ConnectorCircuit
Lamp
Pin
LH front
CLS30
C1021a-7
(headlamp)
(VT/WH)
RH front
CLS30
C1041a-7
(headlamp)
(VT/WH)
LH front
CLS30
C151-1
side marker
(VT/WH)
RH front
CLS30
C161-1
side marker
(VT/WH)
CLS30
LH rear
C412-2
(VT/WH)
CLS30
RH rear
C415-2
(VT/WH)
Liftgate
CLS30
(rear
C4352-1
(VT/WH)
applique)
LH rear
CLS30
C4355-1
side marker
(VT/WH)
RH rear
CLS30
C4356-1
side marker
(VT/WH)
LH license
CLS30
C452-1
plate
(VT/WH)
RH license
CLS30
C462-1
plate
(VT/WH)
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
YES : REPAIR or INSTALL a new bulb holder or component in question. REFER to Headlamp
Assembly, Rear Lamp Assembly - Liftgate, or HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES AND ENTRY
SYSTEMS article for the liftgate release handle. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
O6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test P: The Parking, Rear Or License Plate Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Parking, Rear and License Lamps for schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the parking lamp request input from the headlamp switch through circuit
CLS34 (GY). The SJB provides a ground for the parking lamp relay coil (integrated into the SJB) when a
request for the parking lamps is received. When the parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed through
circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) to the rear and front parking lamps.
DTC B1578 (Lamp Park Input Circuit Short to Ground) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to ground in the parking lamps on input circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Headlamp switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST P: THE PARKING, REAR OR LICENSE PLATE LAMPS ARE ON
CONTINUOUSLY
P1 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB SELF-TEST
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
Was DTC B1578 recorded?
YES : Go to P2.
NO : Go to P4.
P2 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Headlamp Switch C205
Carry out the headlamp switch component test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING
article.
Is the headlamp switch OK?
YES : Go to P3.
NO : INSTALL a new headlamp switch. REFER to Headlamp Switch. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
P3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS34 (GY) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 73: Checking Circuit For A Short To Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch C205-3, circuit CLS34 (GY), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to P6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
P4 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE (TO REAR LAMPS)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Key in ON position.
Do the rear parking lamps continue to illuminate?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to P5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
P5 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE (TO FRONT LAMPS)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Key in ON position.
Do the front parking lamps continue to illuminate?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to P6.
P6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
FOG LAMPS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The SJB monitors the headlamp switch position by sending a voltage reference signal to the headlamp switch.
When the fog lamp switch (part of the headlamp switch) is engaged, the voltage reference signal is routed to
ground.
The fog lamps can be turned on when the following conditions are met:
The ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
The low beam headlamps or the parking lamps are on.
The high beams are off.
When the SJB receives an input from the headlamp switch indicating a request for the fog lamps, the SJB
provides voltage to the fog lamp relay. When the fog lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the fog lamps.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical
Smart junction box (SJB) fuse 21 (15A)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Bulb(s)
Headlamp switch
SJB
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
DTC Charts
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
B2254
Front Fog Lamp Switch Failure Go to Pinpoint Test S .
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
All other DTCs MODULES article.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication with
the smart junction box
(SJB)
Both fog lamps are
inoperative
Fuse
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
SJB
Fuse
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Headlamp switch
Action
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article.
Go to Pinpoint Test Q .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
An individual fog lamp is
inoperative
SJB
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Joint connector
The fog lamps are on
continuously
The fog lamps on
indicator is inoperative
NOTE:
Make sure the fog lamp bulb is OK
before carrying out diagnostics.
Go to Pinpoint Test R .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Headlamp switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test S .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Headlamp switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test T .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Q: Both Fog Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Fog Lamps for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) sends a voltage reference signal to the headlamp switch through circuit CLF21
(GY/VT) to monitor the fog lamp request. When the fog lamp switch is engaged, the voltage signal is routed to
ground.
When the SJB detects the fog lamps on request, the SJB provides ground to the fog lamp relay coil (integrated
into the SJB). When the fog lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed through circuit CLF12 (BN/YE) to the
fog lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Headlamp switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST Q: BOTH FOG LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 95
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Q1 CHECK THE SJB FOG LAMP SWITCH PID
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB Data Logger
Monitor the SJB fog lamp PID (FOG SW) while engaging the fog lamp switch.
Does the PID indicate the fog lamp switch is on?
YES : Go to Q4.
NO : Go to Q2.
Q2 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Headlamp Switch C205
Carry out the headlamp switch component test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING
article.
Is the headlamp switch OK?
YES : Go to Q3.
NO : INSTALL a new headlamp switch. REFER to Headlamp Switch. TEST the system for
normal operation.
Q3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF21 (GY/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 74: Measuring Resistance Between Headlamp Switch C205-6, Circuit CLF21 (GY/VT) &
SJB C2280B-49
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch C205-6, circuit CLF21 (GY/VT), harness side
and the SJB C2280b-49, circuit CLF21 (GY/VT), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to Q5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Q4 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF12 (BN/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 96
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 75: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (15A) jumper wire between the SJB C2280e-1, circuit CBB53 (GY/BN), harness
side and the SJB C2280e-3, circuit CLF12 (BN/YE), harness side.
Key in ON position.
Do the fog lamps illuminate?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. VERIFY the SJB fuse 21 (15A) is OK. If OK, go to Q5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Q5 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test R: An Individual Fog Lamp Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Fog Lamps for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
When the fog lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed through circuit CLF12 (BN/YE) to the fog lamps.
Ground is provided on circuits GD120 (BK/GN) and GD123 (BK/GY) to the LH and RH fog lamps,
respectively.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:31 AM
Page 97
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Joint connector
PINPOINT TEST R: AN INDIVIDUAL FOG LAMP IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
NOTE:
Verify that the headlamps operate correctly before proceeding with this pinpoint
test.
R1 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR CONTINUITY
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Fog Lamp
Fig. 76: Measuring Resistance Between LH Fog Lamp C152-B & C162-B, Circuit GD120
(BK/GN) & GD123 (BK/GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the LH fog lamp C152-B, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side
and ground; or between the RH fog lamp C162-B, circuit GD123 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuit CLF12 (BN/YE) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : For the RH fog lamp, REPAIR circuit GD123 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for
normal operation.
For the LH fog lamp, go to R2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 98
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
R2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Joint Connector 7 C2200
Fig. 77: Measuring Resistance Between LH Fog Lamp C152-B, Circuit GD120 (BK/GN) &
Joint Connector 7 C2200-K
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge, measure the resistance between the LH fog lamp C152-B, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and the joint connector 7 C2200-K, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side and ground.
Fig. 78: Measuring Resistance Between LH Fog Lamp C152-B, Circuit GD120 (BK/GN) &
Joint Connector 7 C2200-E
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX, measure the resistance between the LH fog lamp C152-B, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and the joint connector 7 C2200-E, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new joint connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test S: The Fog Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Fog Lamps for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 99
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
The smart junction box (SJB) sends a voltage reference signal to the headlamp switch through circuit CLF21
(GY/VT) to monitor the fog lamp request. When the fog lamp switch is engaged, the voltage signal is routed to
ground.
When the SJB detects the fog lamps on request, the SJB provides ground to the fog lamp relay coil (integrated
into the SJB). When the fog lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed through circuit CLF12 (BN/YE) to the
fog lamps, and on a separate output, circuit CLF12 (BN/YE) to the headlamp switch for the fog lamps on
indicator.
DTC B2254 (Front Fog Lamp Switch Failure) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a
short to ground on the fog lamp on input circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Headlamp switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST S: THE FOG LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
S1 CHECK FOR RECORDED SJB DTCs
Check the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
Is DTC B2254 present?
YES : Go to S2.
NO : Go to S4.
S2 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Headlamp Switch C205
Carry out the headlamp switch component test. Refer to appropriate COMPONENT TESTING
article
Is the headlamp switch OK?
YES : Go to S3.
NO : INSTALL a new headlamp switch. REFER to Headlamp Switch. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
S3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF21 (GY/VT) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 100
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 79: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch C205-6, circuit CLF21 (GY/VT), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to S6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
S4 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF12 (BN/YE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE (TO HEADLAMP
SWITCH)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280a
Key in ON position.
Do the fog lamps continue to illuminate?
YES : Go to S5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
S5 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF12 (BN/YE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE (TO THE FOG LAMPS)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280e
Key in ON position.
Do the fog lamps continue to illuminate?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to S6.
S6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 101
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR any DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test T: The Fog Lamps On Indicator Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Fog Lamps for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
When the smart junction box (SJB) detects the fog lamps on request, the SJB provides ground to the fog lamp
relay coil (integrated into the SJB). When the fog lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed through circuit
CLF12 (BN/YE) to the fog lamps, and on a separate output, circuit CLF12 (BN/YE) to the headlamp switch for
the fog lamps on indicator.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Headlamp switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST T: THE FOG LAMPS ON INDICATOR IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
T1 CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Headlamp Switch C205
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Select the SJB fog lamps (FOG_LMP) active command. Command the fog lamps on.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 102
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 80: Measuring Voltage Between Headlamp Switch C205-7, Circuit CLF12 (BN/YE) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the fog lamps are illuminated when taking a reading.
Measure the voltage between the headlamp switch C205-7, circuit CLF12 (BN/YE), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new headlamp switch. REFER to Headlamp Switch. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : Go to T2.
T2 CHECK CIRCUIT CLF12 (BN/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280a
Fig. 81: Measuring Resistance Between Headlamp Switch C205-7, Circuit CLF12 (BN/YE) &
SJB C2280A-6
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the headlamp switch C205-7, circuit CLF12 (BN/YE), harness side
and the SJB C2280a-6, circuit CLF12 (BN/YE), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to T3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 103
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
T3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR any DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
REVERSING LAMPS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
The transaxle is hardwired to the PCM which monitors the transmission gear status. When the PCM detects the
transaxle is in REVERSE (R), the PCM provides ground for the reversing lamps relay coil. When the reversing
lamps relay is energized, voltage is routed to the reversing lamps.
Inspection and Verification
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 104
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical
Battery junction box (BJB) fuse 44 (10A)
Bulb(s)
Bulb holder(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
PCM
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
DTC Charts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 105
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
PCM DTC CHART
DTC
P1910
Description
Action
If the reversing lamps are inoperative, go to Pinpoint
Test U .
If the reversing lamps are always on, go to Pinpoint
Test W .
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article.
Reverse Lamp Control
Circuit/Open
All other DTCs Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
The reversing lamps are
inoperative
The individual reversing lamp is
inoperative
The reversing lamps are on
continuously
Action
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Reversing lamps relay
Battery junction box (BJB)
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test U .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Bulb holder
Rear lamps assembly
Go to Pinpoint Test V .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Reversing lamps relay
Auto-dimming interior
mirror
PCM
Go to Pinpoint Test W .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test U: The Reversing Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Fuse and Relay Information for schematic and
connector information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Reversing Lamps for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The PCM monitors the transaxle gear status. When the PCM detects the transaxle in REVERSE (R), the PCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 106
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
provides ground for the reversing lamps relay coil through circuit CLS28 (BU/WH). Voltage is supplied from
the battery junction box (BJB) to the coil and the switched side of the reversing lamps relay. When the reversing
lamps relay is energized, voltage is routed to the reversing lamps through circuit CLS10 (GN/BN).
DTC P1910 (Reverse Lamp Control Circuit/Open) - sets when the PCM detects no voltage on the
reversing lamp relay coil ground control circuit (if the coil voltage supply circuit or the coil ground
control circuit is open).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Reversing lamps relay
BJB
PCM
PINPOINT TEST U: THE REVERSING LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
U1 CHECK FOR PCM TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SENSOR DTCs FROM THE SELF-TEST
Review the DTCs from the PCM KOEO self-test.
Are any TR sensor DTCs present?
YES : REFER to AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
NO : Go to U2.
U2 CHECK THE REVERSING LAMPS RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Reversing Lamps Relay
Key in ON position.
Substitute a known good relay and recheck the reversing lamps operation.
Do the reversing lamps operate correctly?
YES : REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new reversing lamps relay. TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : REMOVE the known good relay. Go to U3.
U3 CHECK THE BJB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 107
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 82: Measuring Voltage Between Reversing Lamps Relay Pin 5, BJB Face Side &
Reversing Lamps Relay Pin 1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the reversing lamps relay pin 5, BJB face side and ground; and
between the reversing lamps relay pin 1, BJB face side and ground.
Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to U4.
NO : INSTALL a new BJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
U4 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS10 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 108
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 83: Connecting Voltage Between Reversing Lamps Relay Pin 5, BJB Face Side &
Reversing Lamps Relay Pin 3
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the reversing lamps relay pin 5, BJB face side and the
reversing lamps relay pin 3, circuit CLS10 (GN/BN), BJB face side.
Do the reversing lamps illuminate?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to U5.
NO : VERIFY the BJB fuse 44 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for
normal operation.
U5 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS28 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: PCM C175t
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 109
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 84: Measuring Voltage Between Reversing Lamps Relay Pin 2, Circuit CLS28 (BU/WH),
BJB Face Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the reversing lamps relay pin 2, circuit CLS28 (BU/WH), BJB face
side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to U6.
U6 CHECK CIRCUITS CLS28 (BU/WH) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Connect: Reversing Lamps Relay
Fig. 85: Measuring Voltage Between PCM C175T-3, Circuit CLS28 (BU/WH), Harness Side
& Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 110
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the PCM C175t-3, circuit CLS28 (BU/WH), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to U7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
U7 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR any DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test V: The Individual Reversing Lamp Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Reversing Lamps for schematic and connector
information.
When the reversing lamps relay is energized, voltage is routed to the reversing lamps through circuit CLS10
(GN/BN). The LH and RH reversing lamps are provided ground through circuits GD149 (BK/GY) and GD151
(BK/GN), respectively.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Bulb holder
Rear lamp assembly
PINPOINT TEST V: THE INDIVIDUAL REVERSING LAMP IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 111
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
V1 CHECK CIRCUIT GD149 (BK/GY) OR CIRCUIT GD151 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Reversing Lamp
Fig. 86: Measuring Resistance Between LH Reversing Lamp C451-1 & C461-1, Circuit
GD149 (BK/GY) & GD151 (BK/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge, measure the resistance between the LH reversing lamp C451-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY),
harness side and ground, or between the RH reversing lamp C461-1, circuit GD151 (BK/GN),
harness side and ground.
Fig. 87: Measuring Resistance Between LH Reversing Lamp C487-2 & C488-2, Circuit
GD149 (BK/GY) & GD151 (BK/GN)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX, measure the resistance between the LH reversing lamp C487-2, circuit GD149
(BK/GY), harness side and ground, or between the RH reversing lamp C488-2, circuit GD151
(BK/GN), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to V2.
NO : REPAIR the ground circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
V2 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS10 (GN/BN) FOR AN OPEN
Apply the parking brake.
Select REVERSE.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 112
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Fig. 88: Measuring Voltage Between LH Reversing Lamp C451-2, Circuit CLS10 (GN/BN) &
RH Reversing Lamp C461-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For Edge, measure the voltage between the LH reversing lamp C451-2, circuit CLS10 (GN/BN),
harness side and ground, or between the RH reversing lamp C461-2, circuit CLS10 (GN/BN),
harness side and ground.
Fig. 89: Measuring Voltage Between LH Reversing Lamp C487-1, Circuit CLS10 (GN/BN) &
RH Reversing Lamp C488-1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For MKX, measure the voltage between the LH reversing lamp C487-1, circuit CLS10 (GN/BN),
harness side and ground, or between the RH reversing lamp C488-1, circuit CLS10 (GN/BN),
harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new bulb holder or rear lamp assembly. REFER to Rear Lamp Assembly.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test W: The Reversing Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Reversing Lamps for schematic and connector
information.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 113
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Normal Operation
The PCM monitors the transaxle gear status. When the PCM detects the transaxle in REVERSE (R), the PCM
provides ground for the reversing lamps relay coil through circuit CLS28 (BU/WH). Voltage is supplied from
the battery junction box (BJB) to the coil and the switched side of the reversing lamps relay. When the reversing
lamps relay is energized, voltage is routed to the reversing lamps through circuit CLS10 (GN/BN).
DTC P1910 (Reverse Lamp Control Circuit/Open) - sets when the PCM detects no voltage on the
reversing lamp relay coil ground control circuit (if the coil ground control circuit is short to ground).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Reversing lamps relay
Auto-dimming interior mirror
PCM
PINPOINT TEST W: THE REVERSING LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
W1 CHECK FOR PCM TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SENSOR DTCs FROM THE SELFTEST
Review the DTCs from the PCM KOEO self-test.
Are any TR sensor DTCs present?
YES : REFER to AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article.
NO : Go to W2.
W2 CHECK THE REVERSING LAMPS RELAY OUTPUT
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Reversing Lamps Relay
Key in ON position.
Do the reversing lamps continue to illuminate?
YES : Go to W3.
NO : Go to W4.
W3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS10 (GN/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror C911 or C9012
Key in ON position.
Do the reversing lamps continue to illuminate?
YES : INSTALL a new auto-dimming interior mirror. REFER to REAR VIEW MIRRORS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 114
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
W4 CHECK THE REVERSING LAMPS RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Substitute a known good relay.
Key in ON position.
Do the reversing lamps continue to illuminate?
YES : REMOVE the known good relay. Go to W5.
NO : REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new reversing lamps relay. TEST the system
for normal operation.
W5 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS28 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Connect: Reversing Lamps Relay
Disconnect: PCM C175t
Key in ON position.
Do the reversing lamps continue to illuminate?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to W6.
W6 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect the PCM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the PCM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR any DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TRAILER LAMPS
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
73III Automotive Meter
Tool Number
105-R0057 or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 115
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn relay and
the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior lighting functions of the
vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the trailer lamps.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate
pinpoint test in this service information.
3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical
Battery junction box (BJB) fuse(s):
9 (20A) (trailer tow parking lamps)
24 (15A) (trailer tow LH stop/turn relay)
46 (15A) (trailer tow RH stop/turn relay)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Trailer tow stop/turn relays
Trailer tow parking lamp relay
Trailer
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. Go to Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Wiring, terminals or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 116
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
The trailer lamps are
inoperative - all
The individual trailer lamp is
inoperative - trailer stop/turn
lamp
The trailer lamps are
inoperative - trailer parking
lamps
The trailer lamps are on
continuously
connectors
Trailer
Go to Pinpoint Test X .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Joint connector
Trailer tow stop/turn relay
Battery junction box (BJB)
Trailer
Go to Pinpoint Test Y .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Joint connector
Trailer tow parking lamp
relay
BJB
Trailer
Go to Pinpoint Test Z .
Go to Pinpoint Test
AA .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Trailer tow relay
Trailer
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test X: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuit RAT08 (WH)/GD149 (BK/GY) for all of the trailer
lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Trailer
PINPOINT TEST X: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 117
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
X1 CHECK CIRCUIT RAT08 (WH)/GD149 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439
Fig. 90: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair
facility.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test Y: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Fuse and Relay Information for schematic and
connector information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 24 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH trailer tow stop/turn relay and BJB
fuse 46 (15A) supplies voltage to the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are
grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear
stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 118
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH
rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer
tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Joint connector
Trailer tow stop/turn relay
BJB
Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER
STOP/TURN LAMP
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
Y1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT06 (YE) OR CIRCUIT CAT09 (GN) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 91: Measuring Voltage Between Trailer Tow C439-2, Circuit CAT06 (YE), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For the LH trailer turn/stoplamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the
trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 119
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 92: Measuring Voltage Between Trailer Tow C439-1, Circuit CAT09 (GN), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For the RH trailer turn/stoplamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the
trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair
facility.
NO : Go to Y2.
Y2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY
Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay
Substitute a known good relay.
Fig. 93: Measuring Voltage Between Trailer Tow C439-2, Circuit CAT06 (YE), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For the LH trailer turn/stoplamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the
trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 120
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 94: Measuring Voltage Between Trailer Tow C439-1, Circuit CAT09 (GN), Harness Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For the RH trailer turn/stoplamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the
trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : REMOVE the known good relay. Go to Y3.
Y3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19 (VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 95: Measuring Voltage Between Trailer Tow LH Stop/Turn Relay Pin 1 & Pin 2, CLS18
(GY/BN) & CLS19 (VT/OG)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 121
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin
1, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay
pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to Y4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y4 CHECK THE BJB
Fig. 96: Measuring Voltage Between Trailer Tow LH Stop/Turn Relay Pin 3, BJB Face Side
& RH Stop/Turn Relay Pin 5,
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, BJB face side and ground; or
between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 5, BJB face side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to Y5.
NO : VERIFY the BJB fuse 24 (15A) (LH stop/turn relay) or fuse 46 (15A) (RH stop/turn relay) is
OK. If OK, INSTALL a new BJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
Y5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR CONTINUITY TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 122
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 97: Measuring Resistance Between Trailer Tow LH Turn Relay Pin 2, Circuit GD120
(BK/GN) & RH Turn Relay Pin 1
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 2, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB
face side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer
stop/turn) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to Y6.
Y6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Joint Connector 7 C2200
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 123
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 98: Measuring Resistance Between Trailer Tow LH Stop/Turn Relay Pin 2, GD120
(BK/GN) & Joint Connector 7 C2200-M
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For the LH trailer turn, measure the resistance between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 2,
circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side and the joint connector 7 C2200-M, circuit GD120
(BK/GN), harness side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 124
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 99: Measuring Resistance Between Trailer Tow RH Stop/Turn Relay Pin 1, GD120
(BK/GN) & Joint Connector 7 C2200-B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For the RH trailer turn, measure the resistance between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 1,
circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side and the joint connector 7 C2200-B, circuit GD120
(BK/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new joint connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test Z: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Fuse and Relay Information for schematic and
connector information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle
parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through circuit GD120
(BK/GN). The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 9 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamp relay
switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed to the trailer tow
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 125
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Joint connector
Trailer tow parking lamp relay
BJB
Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected for accurate test results when
checking ground circuits for continuity to ground.
Z1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT11 (BN) FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
Fig. 100: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair
facility.
NO : Go to Z2.
Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 126
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay
Substitute a known good relay.
Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
Fig. 101: Checking Circuit For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : REMOVE the known good relay. Go to Z3.
NO : REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the
system for normal operation.
Z3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
Make sure the parking lamps are still on.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 127
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 102: Measuring Voltage Between Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay Pin 1, Circuit CLS30
(VT/WH) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH),
BJB face side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to Z4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Z4 CHECK THE BJB
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 128
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 103: Measuring Voltage Between Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay Pin 5, BJB Face Side
& Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 5, BJB face side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to Z5.
NO : VERIFY the BJB fuse 9 (20A) is OK. If OK, INSTALL a new BJB. TEST the system for
normal operation.
Z5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR CONTINUITY TO GROUND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 129
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 104: Measuring Resistance Between Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay Pin 2, Circuit
GD120 (BK/GN) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
BJB face side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to Z6.
Z6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 130
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 105: Measuring Resistance Between Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay Pin 2, GD120
(BK/GN) & Joint Connector 7 C2200-H
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
BJB face side and the joint connector 7 C2200-H, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new joint connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Lamp
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH
rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer
tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH
rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer
tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 131
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Trailer Tow Parking
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle
parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the
trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Trailer tow relay
Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
AA1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CAT06
C439-2
(YE)
CAT09
C439-1
(GN)
CAT11
C439-3
(BN)
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to AA2.
NO : The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair
facility.
AA2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay
Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
C439-2
CAT06
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 132
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
C439-1
C439-3
(YE)
CAT09
(GN)
CAT11
(BN)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn), or circuit CAT11
(BN) (parking lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new trailer tow relay in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
ADAPTIVE HEADLIGHTING
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The headlamp control module (HCM) receives information from the communication network such as vehicle
speed, steering wheel angle and headlamps on status. Based on the information received, the HCM determines
if the headlamps need to be angled left or right as well as the degree of angle.
The HCM does not operate the adaptive headlamps until the vehicle speed is above 5 km/h (3 mph).
When the ignition is placed in the RUN/START position, the HCM runs an initialization check to determine the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 133
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
straight-ahead position of the headlamps. The lamps track left to right, then back to center to signify that the
system is operating correctly.
If the HCM does not receive the required information over the communication network or determines that there
is a fault with the circuitry to the sensors or control motors, it defaults the headlamps to the straight-ahead
position and sets DTC(s).
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Headlamp assembly
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse 51 (5A)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Headlamp control
module (HCM)
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 134
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the HCM.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
DTC Charts
HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE (HCM) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
INSTALL a new HCM. REFER to Headlamp
B1342
ECU Is Faulted
Control Module (HCM). TEST the system for
normal operation.
ECU Output to Left Headlamp
B2609
Go to Pinpoint Test AF .
Stepper Motor Circuit Failure
ECU Output to Right Headlamp
B2612
Go to Pinpoint Test AF .
Stepper Motor Circuit Failure
Left Headlamp Swivel Control
B100B
Go to Pinpoint Test AF .
Failure
Right Headlamp Swivel Control
B100C
Go to Pinpoint Test AF .
Failure
Steering Wheel Angle 1 and 2
C1278
Go to Pinpoint Test AF .
Signal Faulted
Control Module Communication REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS
U0073
Bus A Off
NETWORK article.
Lost Communication With
U0100
Go to Pinpoint Test AB .
ECM/PCM
Lost Communication With
U0126
Go to Pinpoint Test AC .
Steering Angle Sensor Module
Lost Communication With
Instrument Panel Cluster (IC)
U0155
Go to Pinpoint Test AD .
Control Module
CARRY OUT the programmable module installation
U2050
No Application Present
(PMI). REFER to MODULE CONFIGURATION
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 135
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
No communication with
the adaptive front lighting
module
The adaptive front lighting
is inoperative/does not
operate correctly
Fuse
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Headlamp control
module (HCM)
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Headlamp
assembly
HCM
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article.
Go to Pinpoint Test AF .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AB: DTC U0100 - Lost Communication With ECM/PCM
Normal Operation
The headlamp control module (HCM) receives vehicle speed information from the PCM. If the HCM does not
receive communication from the PCM, DTC U0100 is set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
HCM
PCM
PINPOINT TEST AB: DTC U0100 - LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM
AB1 REPEAT THE ON-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: HCM Self-Test
Clear the DTCs and repeat the HCM on-demand self-test.
Is DTC U0100 retrieved again?
YES : Go to AB2.
NO : The vehicle is operating correctly at this time. The HCM may have temporarily lost
communication with the PCM.
AB2 CHECK OTHER MODULES FOR DTC U0100
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Instrument Cluster (IC) Self-Test
Carry out the on-demand self-test for other modules on the high speed controller area network (HSCAN). The IC, ABS module and restraints control module (RCM), for example, communicate on
the HS-CAN.
Is DTC U0100 retrieved from any other module?
YES : Go to AB3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 136
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to AB4.
AB3 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
AB4 CHECK FOR CORRECT HCM OPERATION
Disconnect the HCM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the HCM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new HCM. REFER to Headlamp Control Module (HCM). TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test AC: DTC U0126 - Lost Communication With Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module
Normal Operation
The headlamp control module (HCM) receives steering wheel angle information from the steering angle sensor
module (SASM). If the HCM does not receive communication from the SASM, DTC U0126 is set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
HCM
SASM
PINPOINT TEST AC: DTC U0126 - LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STEERING WHEEL ANGLE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 137
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
SENSOR MODULE
AC1 REPEAT THE ON-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: HCM Self-Test
Clear the DTCs and repeat the HCM on-demand self-test.
Is DTC U0126 retrieved again?
YES : Go to AC2.
NO : The vehicle is operating correctly at this time. The HCM may have temporarily lost
communication with the SASM.
AC2 CHECK THE ABS MODULE FOR DTC U0126
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ABS Module Self-Test
Carry out the on-demand self-test for the ABS module.
Is DTC U0126 retrieved?
YES : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
NO : Go to AC3.
AC3 CHECK FOR CORRECT HCM OPERATION
Disconnect the HCM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the HCM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new HCM. REFER to Headlamp Control Module (HCM). TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test AD: DTC U0155 - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel Cluster (IC) Control
Module
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) communicates the headlamps on status to the instrument cluster (IC) over the
medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). The IC acts as a gateway module and relays the information
through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). The headlamp control module (HCM) receives
headlamps on status information from the IC gateway. If the HCM does not receive communication from the
IC, DTC U0155 is set.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 138
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
HCM
IC
PINPOINT TEST AD: DTC U0155 - LOST COMMUNICATION WITH INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLUSTER (IC) CONTROL MODULE
AD1 REPEAT THE ON-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: HCM Self-Test
Clear the DTCs and repeat the HCM on-demand self-test.
Is DTC U0155 retrieved again?
YES : Go to AD2.
NO : The vehicle is operating correctly at this time. The HCM may have temporarily lost
communication with the PCM.
AD2 CHECK OTHER MODULES FOR DTC U0155
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ABS Module Self-Test
Carry out the on-demand self-test for other modules on the HS-CAN. The PCM, ABS module and
restraints control module (RCM), for example, communicate on the HS-CAN.
Is DTC U0155 retrieved from any other module?
YES : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
NO : Go to AD3.
AD3 CHECK FOR CORRECT HCM OPERATION
Disconnect the HCM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the HCM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new HCM. REFER to Headlamp Control Module (HCM). TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test AE: DTC C1278 - Steering Wheel Angle 1 and 2 Signal Faulted
Normal Operation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 139
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
The headlamp control module (HCM) receives steering wheel angle information from the steering angle sensor
module (SASM). If the HCM receives faulty steering wheel angle data from the SASM, DTC C1278 is set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
HCM
SASM
PINPOINT TEST AE: DTC C1278 - STEERING WHEEL ANGLE 1 AND 2 SIGNAL FAULTED
AE1 REPEAT THE ON-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: HCM Self-Test
Clear the DTCs and repeat the HCM on-demand self-test.
Is DTC C1278 retrieved again?
YES : Go to AE2.
NO : The vehicle is operating correctly at this time. The HCM may have temporarily received
incorrect data from the steering wheel angle sensor module.
AE2 CHECK THE ABS MODULE FOR DTC C1278
Carry out the on-demand self-test for the ABS module.
Is DTC C1278 retrieved?
YES : Go to AE3.
NO : Go to AE4.
AE3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SASM OPERATION
Disconnect the SASM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the SASM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SASM. REFER to Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor in VEHICLE
DYNAMIC SYSTEMS article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
AE4 CHECK FOR CORRECT HCM OPERATION
Disconnect the HCM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 140
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the HCM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new HCM. REFER to Headlamp Control Module (HCM). TEST the system
for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test AF: The Adaptive Front Lighting Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Headlamps/Autolamps for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The headlamp control module (HCM) receives information from the high speed controller area network (HSCAN), such as steering wheel angle, vehicle speed, and headlamps on status. Based on the information
received, the HCM determines what angle (left to right of straight ahead) the headlamps should be.
The HCM does not operate the adaptive headlamps until the headlamps are on and the vehicle speed is above 5
km/h (3 mph). Depending on vehicle speed and steering wheel angle, the HCM determines and positions the
headlamps at an angle to improve visibility while the vehicle is in a turn. At low and high vehicle speeds (8
km/h [5 mph] and 97 km/h [60 mph] for example), the angle of the headlamps is changed minimally. At vehicle
speeds of 32-40 km/h (20-25 mph), the headlamp angle change is greater.
The HCM monitors the position of the headlamps and controls the motors, which changes the angle of the
headlamps.
DTC Description
B2609 - ECU Output to Left Headlamp Stepper
Motor Circuit Failure
B2612 - ECU Output to Right Headlamp Stepper
Motor Circuit Failure
B100B - Left Headlamp Swivel Control Failure
B100C - Right Headlamp Swivel Control Failure
Fault Trigger Conditions
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the HCM detects a failure from the LH headlamp
stepper motor or circuitry.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the HCM detects a failure from the RH headlamp
stepper motor or circuitry.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the HCM detects a failure from the LH headlamp
position sensor or circuitry.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the HCM detects a failure from the RH headlamp
position sensor or circuitry.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 141
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Headlamp assembly
HCM
PINPOINT TEST AF: THE ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT
OPERATE CORRECTLY
NOTE:
Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use
the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
AF1 CHECK THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE HCM SELF-TEST
Check the recorded results from the HCM self-test.
Are any DTCs recorded?
YES : For DTC B2612 or B100C, go to AF3.
For DTC B2609 or B100B, go to AF11.
For all other DTCs, REFER to DTC Charts in this service information.
NO : Go to AF2.
AF2 ACTIVE COMMAND THE HEADLAMP ANGLE
Key in ON position.
Turn the headlamps on.
Select the HCM headlamp angle control (BEAM_CTRL_LFT, BEAM_CTRL_RGT) active
commands. Command the headlamps to the full left and full right positions while observing the
headlamp beam patterns on a wall.
Do the headlamps move left and right?
YES : Go to AF10.
NO : Go to AF11.
AF3 CHECK THE CIRCUITRY BETWEEN THE LH AND RH HEADLAMPS FOR A SHORT
TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LH Headlamp C1021b and RH Headlamp C1041b
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the LH headlamp, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CLF46
C1021b-1
(YE/GY)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 142
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
C1021b-2
C1021b-4
C1021b-5
C1021b-7
C1021b-8
C1021b-10
CLF45
(VT/GY)
LLF43
(GN/VT)
LLF44
(BU/GY)
CLF48
(GN/BN)
CLF47
(BU/GN)
RLF45
(GY/VT)
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to AF4.
AF4 CHECK THE CIRCUITRY BETWEEN THE LH AND RH HEADLAMPS FOR A SHORT
TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the LH headlamp, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CLF46
C1021b-1
(YE/GY)
CLF45
C1021b-2
(VT/GY)
LLF43
C1021b-4
(GN/VT)
LLF44
C1021b-5
(BU/GY)
CLF48
C1021b-7
(GN/BN)
CLF47
C1021b-8
(BU/GN)
RLF45
C1021b-10
(GY/VT)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to AF5.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
AF5 CHECK THE CIRCUITRY BETWEEN THE LH AND RH HEADLAMPS FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 143
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the LH headlamp, harness side and RH headlamp, harness side:
LH
RH
Headlamp Headlamp
Circuit
Connector- ConnectorPin
Pin
CLF46
C1021b-1 C1041b-3
(YE/GY)
CLF45
C1021b-2 C1041b-2
(VT/GY)
LLF43
C1021b-4 C1041b-4
(GN/VT)
LLF44
C1021b-5 C1041b-5
(BU/GY)
CLF48
C1021b-7 C1041b-9
(GN/BN)
CLF47
C1021b-8 C1041b-8
(BU/GN)
RLF45
C1021b-10 C1041b-10
(GY/VT)
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AF6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
AF6 CHECK FOR SHORTED TOGETHER CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE LH AND RH
HEADLAMPS
Measure the resistance between each circuit on the LH headlamp, harness side as follows:
Connector- ConnectorPin Circuit Pin Circuit
C1021b-1
CLF46
(YE/GY)
C1021b-2
CLF45
(VT/GY)
C1021b-4
LLF43
(GN/VT)
C1021b-5
LLF44
(BU/GY)
C1021b-7
CLF48
(GN/BN)
C1021b-8
CLF47
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 144
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
C1021b-2
CLF45
(VT/GY)
C1021b-4
LLF43
(GN/VT)
C1021b-5
LLF44
(BU/GY)
C1021b-7
CLF48
(GN/BN)
C1021b-8
(BU/GN)
C1021b-10
RLF45
(GY/VT)
C1021b-4
LLF43
(GN/VT)
C1021b-5
LLF44
(BU/GY)
C1021b-7
CLF48
(GN/BN)
C1021b-8
CLF47
(BU/GN)
C1021b-10
RLF45
(GY/VT)
C1021b-5
LLF44
(BU/GY)
C1021b-7
CLF48
(GN/BN)
C1021b-8
CLF47
(BU/GN)
C1021b-10
RLF45
(GY/VT)
C1021b-7
CLF48
(GN/BN)
C1021b-8
CLF47
(BU/GN)
C1021b-10
RLF45
(GY/VT)
C1021b-8
CLF47
(BU/GN)
C1021b-10
RLF45
(GY/VT)
C1021b-10
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 145
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
CLF47
(BU/GN)
RLF45
(GY/VT)
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms between each circuit?
YES : Go to AF7.
NO : REPAIR the circuits in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
AF7 CHECK THE RH STEPPER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Remove the LH headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Assembly.
Disconnect: HCM
Fig. 106: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the HCM, harness side and the LH headlamp, component side as
follows:
LH
HCM
Headlamp Circuit
Connector
Connector
Pin 21
Pin 1
CLF46
Pin 30
Pin 2
CLF45
Pin 24
Pin 7
CLF48
Pin 27
Pin 8
CLF47
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AF8.
NO : REPAIR or INSTALL a new LH headlamp. REFER to Headlamp Assembly. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
AF8 CHECK THE RH SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 146
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 107: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the HCM, harness side and the LH headlamp, component side as
follows:
LH
HCM
Headlamp Circuit
Connector
Connector
Pin 13
Pin 4
LLF43
Pin 11
Pin 5
LLF44
Pin 16
Pin 10 RLF45
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to AF9.
NO : REPAIR or INSTALL a new LH headlamp. REFER to Headlamp Assembly. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
AF9 CHECK FOR CORRECT HCM OPERATION (RH HEADLAMP DTCs)
Disconnect the HCM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the HCM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new HCM. REFER to Headlamp Control Module (HCM). TEST the system
for normal operation.
If the concern remains, REINSTALL the original HCM. INSTALL a new RH headlamp. REFER to
Headlamp Assembly. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 147
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
or corroded connector.
AF10 CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL ROTATION SENSOR FOR CORRECT
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
If the PID indicates that the steering wheel rotation sensor is out of
synchronization by 360 degrees, this is an indication that the steering
column shaft was disconnected and the steering wheel was rotated one
full turn prior to reconnecting it. The clockspring may be damaged and
should be checked for correct installation.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Steering Angle Sensor Module
(SASM) DataLogger
Visually inspect the front wheels and make sure they are aligned to the straight-ahead position.
NOTE:
The PID could read +360 degrees or -360 degrees. The PID should
indicate 0 when the wheels are in the straight-ahead position.
Monitor the SASM steering wheel angle (SWA_SEN) PID.
Does the PID indicate the steering wheel at approximately 0 degrees?
YES : Go to AF11.
NO : REMOVE and correctly INSTALL the steering wheel rotation sensor. REFER to VEHICLE
DYNAMIC SYSTEMS article. MAKE SURE the clockspring is also correctly indexed. TEST the
system for normal operation.
AF11 CHECK FOR CORRECT HCM OPERATION (LH HEADLAMP DTCs)
Disconnect the HCM connector.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect the HCM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new HCM. REFER to Headlamp Control Module (HCM). TEST the system
for normal operation.
If the concern remains, INSTALL a new LH headlamp. REFER to Headlamp Assembly. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 148
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
NOTE:
When installing a new SJB, it must be configured for this feature, if originally
equipped. Refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
The SJB controls the daytime running lamps (DRL) by using various inputs to determine whether or not the
DRL should be illuminated. These inputs include:
Ignition switch position
Headlamp switch position
Headlamps on or off
Transaxle gear selection
When the DRL is active, the SJB provides a pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage to the low beam
headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity.
The SJB can be configured to turn the DRL on for this vehicle. Refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION
article for additional information on this programmable parameter.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Make sure the multifunction switch is not in the HIGH BEAM position.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 149
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
3. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
4. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
6. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
7. Check the smart junction box (SJB) and make sure the daytime running lamps (DRL) configuration is
enabled.
8. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
The daytime running lamps
(DRL) are inoperative
Action
Exterior lighting system
input/output
Smart junction box (SJB)
configuration
Ignition switch input
Transaxle gear input
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test
AG .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AG: The Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Are Inoperative
Normal Operation
When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the headlamps are not on (from the autolamp system or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 150
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
manual control from the headlamp switch), the transaxle is not in PARK (P), the smart junction switch (SJB)
provides a pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps
at a reduced intensity.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Exterior lighting system input/output
SJB configuration
Ignition switch input
Transaxle gear input
SJB
PINPOINT TEST AG: THE DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) ARE INOPERATIVE
AG1 VERIFY THE DRL OPERATION
Place the gear selector lever in any gear other than PARK (P).
Are the DRL illuminated?
YES : The system is operating correctly. INFORM the customer of the conditions required for the
DRL to operate correctly.
NO : Go to AG2.
AG2 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE HEADLAMPS
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position and observe the headlamps.
Do the headlamps operate correctly?
YES : Go to AG3.
NO : REFER to Headlamps.
AG3 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH INPUT
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Monitor the SJB ignition switch PID (IGN SW) while cycling the ignition switch through all
positions.
Does the PID agree with the ignition switch positions?
YES : Go to AG4.
NO : REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article to diagnose the input from the
ignition switch.
AG4 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE GEAR INPUT
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: PCM DataLogger
Monitor the PCM transmission gear status PID (TR) while placing the gear selector lever through
all positions.
Does the PID agree with the gear selection?
YES : Go to AG5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:32 AM
Page 151
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
NO : REFER to AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 6F50 article to diagnose the
transmission range input.
AG5 CHECK SJB FOR DRL CONFIGURATION
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB Module Programming
Check the SJB configuration and make sure the DRL feature is enabled.
Is the SJB DRL configuration enabled?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : ENABLE the DRL configuration. TEST the system for normal operation.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
HEADLAMP ADJUSTMENT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Vision 100 Headlamp Aimer
Tool Number
196-00005 or equivalent
Headlamp Aiming
1. The headlamp aiming procedure depends on what type of beam pattern the headlamp is equipped with.
Vehicles may come equipped with VOL or VOR headlamps. To identify the headlamp beam pattern, look
on the headlamp lens. Molded in small letters on the headlamp lens is one of the following:
VOL and SAE
VOR and SAE
2. Once the headlamp beam pattern is identified, aim the headlamps using one of the following methods as
applicable.
Photometric aimers can aim VOL- and VOR- headlamps. This is the preferred method of headlamp
aiming.
Visual or screen method aiming can be used to aim VOL- and VOR- headlamps.
Mechanical aimers cannot be used with VOR- or VOL-type headlamps. Aerodynamic lamps that
can be aimed mechanically have 3 nibs molded into the lens of the lamp.
Photometric Aiming
1. For the photometric aiming procedure, refer to the appropriate photometric headlamp aimer instruction
manual.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 152
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Screen Method Aiming
All headlamp types
NOTE:
Horizontal aim is not necessary for VOL or VOR headlamps.
NOTE:
Consult your state vehicle inspection manual for recommended tolerance
ranges for visual aiming.
NOTE:
The sight shield may need to be positioned or removed for access to the
adjusters.
1. Before starting headlamp adjustment:
check the tire inflation.
check that no other load is in the vehicle other than a half tank of fuel.
check that the headlamps are clean.
check for correct headlamp operation.
check that the vehicle is on level ground.
if the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, make sure that the switch is on.
NOTE:
The vertical wall or screen must be a minimum of 2.4-m (8-ft) wide.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface approximately 7.6-m (25-ft) from the vertical wall or screen directly in
front of it.
Fig. 108: Identifying Distance Between Vehicle And Vertical Wall Or Screen
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The center of the lamp is marked either on the lens (circle, crosshair or
other mark) or on the bulb shield internal to the lamp (crosshair or other
mark).
3. Mark a horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen.
1. Measure the center of the headlamp height to ground and record the measurement.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 153
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
2. Make a 2.4-meter (8-ft) horizontal mark (using masking tape) on the vertical wall or screen at the
same distance from the ground as previously recorded.
Fig. 109: Aiming Headlights
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
This procedure should be done in a dark environment to effectively see
the headlamp beam pattern.
4. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood.
5. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern.
VOR-type headlamps
NOTE:
The appearance of the VOR beam pattern may vary between vehicles.
6. Identify at the top edge of this high intensity area a distinct horizontal cutoff in the beam pattern. If the
top edge of this cutoff is not even with the horizontal reference line, the headlamp beam needs to be
adjusted using the headlamp adjusting screw.
Fig. 110: Identifying High Intensity Area (VOR Type Headlamps)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
VOL-type headlamps
7. For VOL-type headlamps, there is a distinct cutoff in the left portion of the beam pattern. The edge of this
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 154
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
cutoff should be positioned 50.2 mm (2 in) below the horizontal reference line. Adjust the headlamp as
necessary using the headlamp adjusting screw.
1. Horizontal reference line.
2. Top edge of the beam pattern.
3. High intensity zone.
Fig. 111: Identifying VOL-Type Headlamps Beam Pattern
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
FRONT FOG LAMP ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle and is not adjustable.
Consult your state vehicle inspection center for recommended tolerance
ranges for visual aiming.
1. Before starting the fog lamp assembly adjustment:
check the tire inflation.
make sure there are no other loads in the vehicle other than a half tank of fuel.
make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
make sure the fog lamps and headlamps are clean.
make sure the headlamps are operating and are correctly aimed.
NOTE:
The vertical wall screen must be a minimum of 2.4-m (8-ft) wide.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface approximately 7.6 m (25 ft) from the vertical wall or screen directly in
front of it.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 155
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 112: Identifying Distance Between Vehicle And Vertical Wall Or Screen
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. The correct visual aim for the fog lamps is with the top edge of the high-intensity zone 10 cm (4 in)
below the horizontal center of the fog lamps.
Fig. 113: Identifying Correct Visual Aim For Fog Lamps
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
AUTOLAMPS TIME DELAY ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:
The time delay can be programmed through the instrument cluster message
center using the message center buttons (if equipped) or using the following
steps.
NOTE:
Steps 2 through 5 must be carried out within a 10-second period.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start with the ignition switch off and the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position.
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
Place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position. The exterior lamps turn on at this point.
Wait the desired amount of time and place the headlamp switch in the OFF position (maximum of 3
minutes). The exterior lamps turn off and the autolamp time delay is now set.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 156
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Edge shown, MKX similar.
Fig. 114: Identifying Headlamp Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W711676
13005/13006
3
-
Description
Headlamp assembly bolts (4 required)
Headlamp assembly (LH/RH)
Headlamp electrical connectors (part of
14290)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
1. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to BUMPERS article.
2. Remove the 4 bolts and the headlamp assembly.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 157
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
HEADLAMP BULB
Fig. 115: Exploded View Of Headlamp Bulb Edge Low Beam
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
13N021
Description
Headlamp bulb electrical connector (part
of 14290)
Headlamp bulb
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 158
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 116: Identifying Edge High Beam
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
13N021
Description
Headlamp bulb electrical connector (part
of 14290)
Headlamp bulb
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 159
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 117: Identifying MKX Low Beam
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
13N021
3
-
NOTE:
Description
Headlamp bulb access cover (part of
13005/13006)
Headlamp bulb
Headlamp bulb electrical connector (part
of 13005/13006)
The air cleaner assembly is shown removed for clarity.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 160
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 118: Identifying MKX High Beam
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
13N021
3
-
Description
Headlamp bulb access cover (part of
13005/13006)
Headlamp bulb
Headlamp bulb electrical connector (part
of 13005/13006)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass
envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by
its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before
a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may
affect headlamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp
where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the headlamps
with the bulb removed from the headlamp.
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 161
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
MKX
1. Remove the headlamp bulb access cover.
All vehicles
NOTE:
To remove, rotate the headlamp bulb approximately 1/8 turn
counterclockwise.
2. Remove the headlamp bulb.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE (HCM)
NOTE:
The headlamp control module (HCM) can be accessed from under the vehicle.
Fig. 119: Exploded View Of Headlamp Control Module (HCM)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
13C148
Description
Headlamp control module (HCM) screws
(3 required) (part of 13005)
HCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 162
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
3
-
HCM electrical connector (part of 13005)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the 2 screws and position the fender splash shield aside.
Fig. 120: Locating Screws On Fender Splash Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the 3 screws and the HCM.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
FOG LAMP
Fig. 121: Exploded View Of Fog Lamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
Description
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 163
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
1
2
17E811
15K200
3
-
Fog lamp bezel
Fog lamp
Fog lamp electrical connector (part of
14290)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the 2 screws and position the fender splash shield aside.
Fig. 122: Locating Screws On Fender Splash Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Release the tabs and remove the fog lamp bezel.
4. Release the locking tabs and remove the fog lamp.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
FOG LAMP BULB
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 164
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 123: Exploded View Of Fog Lamp Bulb
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
13N021
Description
Fog lamp electrical connector (part of
14290)
Fog lamp bulb
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass
envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by
its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a
new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may
affect fog lamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where
they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the fog lamps with the
bulb removed.
NOTE:
Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the 2 screws and position the fender splash shield aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 165
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 124: Locating Screws On Fender Splash Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fog lamp bulb.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
PARKING LAMP BULB - FRONT
Fig. 125: Exploded View Of Front Parking Lamp Bulb - Edge
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
13411
2
-
Description
Front parking lamp bulb holder
Front parking lamp electrical connector
(part of 14290)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 166
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
3
13466
Front parking lamp bulb
Fig. 126: Exploded View Of Front Parking Lamp Bulb - MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
-
3
13466
Description
Headlamp bulb access cover (part of
13005/13006)
Front parking lamp electrical connector
(part of 13005/13006)
Front parking lamp bulb
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
MKX
1. Remove the headlamp bulb access cover.
All vehicles
2. Remove the front parking lamp holder from the headlamp assembly.
Remove the front parking lamp bulb.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
SIDE MARKER LAMP - FRONT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 167
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 127: Exploded View Of Front Side Marker Lamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
4
13200/13201
-
Description
Side marker lamp electrical connector
(part of 14290)
Side marker bulb holder
Side marker lamp (LH/RH)
Side marker bulb
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the 2 screws and position the fender splash shield aside.
Fig. 128: Locating Screws On Fender Splash Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Release the tabs and remove the side marker lamp.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 168
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
LIGHT SENSOR
Fig. 129: Exploded View Of Light Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
13A018
2
-
Description
Light sensor
Light sensor electrical connector (part of
14401)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Using a suitable tool, remove the light sensor.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 169
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 130: Exploded View Of Stoplamp Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
9G854
Description
Stoplamp switch electrical connector
(part of 14290)
Stoplamp switch
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
NOTE:
The stoplamp switch will be difficult to remove if the switch plunger is not
depressed. A slight rearward force should be adequate to depress the
plunger.
2. With a light force (approximately 1-4 N [1-3 lb]), pull rearward on the brake pedal, rotate the stoplamp
switch 45 degrees clockwise and remove the stoplamp switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: It is very important to not press, pull or touch the brake pedal assembly
during the installation of the stoplamp switch. Failure to follow these
instructions may damage the stoplamp switch.
1. Without movement to the brake pedal assembly, install the stoplamp switch and rotate 45 degrees
counterclockwise.
2. Connect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
HEADLAMP SWITCH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 170
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 131: Exploded View Of Headlamp Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
7804481
11654
3
-
Description
Instrument panel side finish panel
Headlamp switch
Headlamp switch electrical connector
(part of 14401)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
NOTE:
The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
2. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
HAZARD FLASHER LAMP SWITCH
NOTE:
Edge shown, MKX similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 171
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 132: Exploded View Of Hazard Flasher Lamp Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
78044D70
13D733
Description
Instrument panel center finish panel
Hazard flasher lamp switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND CONSOLE article.
2. Release the tabs and remove the hazard flasher lamp switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
PUDDLE LAMP
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 172
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 133: Exploded View Of Puddle Lamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
13B375
2
-
Description
Puddle lamp
Puddle lamp electrical connector (part of
17683)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Release the tab to remove the puddle lamp from the mirror housing.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Fig. 134: Locating Puddle Lamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 173
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
An audible click can be heard when the puddle lamp is fully seated.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Edge shown, MKX similar.
Fig. 135: Exploded View Of Rear Lamp Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W712801
13A505/13A504
3
-
Description
Rear lamp assembly screws (2 required)
Rear lamp assembly (LH/RH)
Rear lamp assembly electrical
connectors (part of 14A005)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The rear lamp assembly is held in place by snap-type retainers. The lamp
should be pulled straight and rearward to remove.
1. Remove the 2 screws and the rear lamp assembly.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 174
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Exterior Lighting - Edge & MKX
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
An audible click should be heard when the rear lamp assembly is fully seated to the quarter panel.
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY - LIFTGATE
Fig. 136: Identifying Rear Lamp Assembly With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
W704141
2
-
3
13A565
Description
Liftgate lamp nuts (8 required)
Liftgate lamp electrical connector (part of
14A583)
Liftgate lamp
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the luggage trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Disconnect the liftgate lamp electrical connector.
3. Remove the 8 nuts and the liftgate lamp.
To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:01:33 AM
Page 175
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Steering Column - Edge & MKX
2008 STEERING
Steering Column - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Steering column shaft bolt
Steering column support bracket nuts
Steering wheel nut
23
28
35
lb-ft
17
21
26
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
STEERING COLUMN
The steering column consists of the following:
Steering wheel
Steering column
Upper and lower steering column shafts
Steering column switches
The steering column is the mechanical linkage between the steering wheel and the steering gear. The steering
wheel is mounted to a shaft, which passes through the center of the steering column. The shaft is centered by
bearings within the steering column. The steering column shaft then connects the steering column to the
steering gear. The upper and lower steering column shaft connections utilize U-joint type couplings. The tilt
function of the steering column is controlled by a mechanical lever on the underside of the steering column,
which uses a cam to lock and unlock the steering column. When the tilt column lever is unlocked, the steering
column can then be adjusted to various positions. The steering column switches (multi-function and ignition)
are mounted to the steering column. These switches are covered by the upper and lower steering column
shrouds.
For steering column switch service information, refer to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
STEERING COLUMN
Refer to STEERING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
STEERING WHEEL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:47:26
10:47:21 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Steering Column - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Identifying Steering Wheel Mounting Bolt And Connector (With Torque Specifications)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
3600/3F563
2
-
3
W711835
Description
Steering wheel (urethane/leather)
Steering wheel switches electrical connector
(part of 14672)
Steering wheel nut
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Position the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position and turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Remove the key.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NOTE:
Mark the steering wheel and column shaft for reference during installation.
3. Remove the steering wheel nut.
To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
4. Disconnect the steering wheel switches electrical connector.
CAUTION: Do not remove the steering wheel by hitting the shaft with a hammer.
Damage to the column may occur.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:47:21 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Steering Column - Edge & MKX
5. Using a suitable puller, remove the steering wheel.
Fig. 2: Removing Steering Wheel Using A Suitable Puller
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Align the steering wheel using the reference mark.
STEERING COLUMN
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:47:21 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Steering Column - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Removing/Installing Steering Column
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
-
3
W505002
4
5
6
04459
3530
3K512
Description
In-vehicle temperature sensor hose (part
of 19C734)
In-vehicle temperature sensor electrical
connector (part of 14401)
Steering column opening cover bolts (2
required)
Steering column opening cover
Upper steering column shroud
Lower steering column shroud
7
W707658
Lower steering column shroud screws (3
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:47:21 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Steering Column - Edge & MKX
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
required)
Multi-function switch electrical
connector (part of 14401)
Ignition switch electrical connector (part
of 14401)
Clockspring electrical connector (part of
14401)
Steering angle sensor electrical connector
(part of 14401)
Wiring harness retainer (part of 14401)
Passive anti-theft system (PATS)
electrical connector (part of 14401)
Fig. 4: Identifying Steering Wheel Assembly (With Torque Specifications)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:47:21 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Steering Column - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
14
15
Part Number
3524
W712961
16
N806423
17
3C611B
18
W704904
19
3C611A
Description
Steering column
Steering column shaft bolt
Steering column support bracket nuts (4
required)
Steering column dust seal
Lower steering column shaft joint cover
nut (2 required)
Lower steering column shaft joint cover
1. Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position and turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Remove the key.
2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). For additional information, refer to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
NOTE:
Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the
sides and lifting upwards.
3. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
4. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws and the shroud.
NOTE:
The top of the steering column opening cover is held in by tabs that clip
into the instrument panel.
5. Remove the 2 steering column opening cover screws.
Detach the steering column opening cover.
6. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector and hose from the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
Remove the steering column opening cover.
7. Disconnect the multi-function switch, ignition switch and clockspring electrical connectors.
8. Disconnect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.
9. Disconnect the passive anti-theft system (PATS) electrical connector.
10. Detach the wiring harness retainer and position the wiring harness aside.
11. Remove the lower steering column shaft joint cover nuts and the cover.
12. Index-mark the steering column shaft position to the steering gear for reference during installation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:47:21 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 STEERING Steering Column - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Index-Marking Steering Column Shaft Position To Steering Gear
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not allow the steering column to rotate while the steering column
shaft is disconnected, or damage to the clockspring may result. If
there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be
removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
13. Remove the steering column shaft bolt and disconnect the shaft from the steering gear.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
14. Remove the 4 steering column support bracket nuts and the steering column.
To install, tighten to 28 Nm (21 lb-ft).
15. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
16. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:47:21 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND PANEL ILLUMINATION
The instrument cluster (IC) and panel illumination is used to provide backlighting to the dimmable and nondimmable switches and control components.
For Edge vehicles equipped with autolamps, if the exterior lamps are activated during daytime sunload
conditions, the message center illumination remains at full intensity and does not dim from the instrument panel
dimmer switch during this condition. If the vehicle travels under a bridge or a tunnel, the low level of ambient
light causes the illumination level of the message center to change to the level set by the instrument panel
dimmer switch. The message center illumination changes back to full intensity when the intense ambient light is
restored.
For MKX vehicles equipped with autolamps, if the exterior lamps are activated during daytime sunload
conditions, the message center, audio control module (ACM), heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC)
module and switch illumination remain at full intensity and do not dim from the instrument panel dimmer
switch during this condition. If the vehicle travels under a bridge or a tunnel, the low level of ambient light
causes the illumination level of the message center, ACM, HVAC module and switch to change to the level set
by the instrument panel dimmer switch. The message center, ACM, HVAC module and switch illumination
change back to full intensity when the intense ambient light is restored.
Dimmable Backlighting
NOTE:
If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the instrument panel dimmer
switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from
the full dim position to the dome ON position. This will make sure that all
displays are visible under all lighting conditions.
The dimmable switches and components are illuminated when the headlamp switch is in either the PARKING
LAMPS ON or HEADLAMPS ON position. The level of intensity is adjustable by rotating the instrument panel
dimmer switch either up to increase intensity or down to decrease intensity.
The dimmable switches and components consist of:
HVAC module - EATC (if equipped)
HVAC module - EMTC (if equipped)
Floor shifter
Heated driver seat switch (if equipped)
Heated passenger seat switch (if equipped)
LH rear heated seat switch (if equipped)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:20
11:04:16 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
RH rear heated seat switch (if equipped)
Message center switch (if equipped)
Memory set switch (MKX)
Window adjust switches (MKX)
Door lock control switches (MKX)
Headlamp switch
Instrument panel dimmer switch
IC
Speed control switches
Steering wheel audio control switches
Hazard/passenger air bag disable/traction control switch
Audio control module (ACM)
Power liftgate release switch
Roof opening panel switch (if equipped)
Rear entertainment module (RETM) (if equipped)
Non-Dimmable Backlighting
The non-dimmable (fixed) lighting switches and components are illuminated when the delayed accessory relay
is energized. The non-dimmable switches and components are illuminated at full lamp intensity.
The non-dimmable lighting switches and components consist of:
Door lock control switches (Edge)
Window adjust switches (Edge)
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND PANEL ILLUMINATION
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
73III Automotive Meter
Tool Number
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communications Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
Dimmable Backlighting
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
When the parking lamps are on, the SJB monitors the input from the instrument panel dimmer switch. The SJB
sends a pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage to the dimmable components and switches based on input
received from the instrument panel dimmer switch.
The SJB also sends a message over the network to the audio control module (ACM), the rear entertainment
module (RETM), the HVAC module - EATC, and the instrument cluster (IC) to indicate the backlighting
intensity level. If the receiving module receives invalid backlighting data from the SJB for 5 seconds or less, the
receiving module defaults the backlighting to the last setting.
If the receiving module does not receive the backlighting status message from the SJB or if the data received is
deemed invalid for more than 5 seconds, the receiving module sets DTC U0140 in continuous memory (except
the HVAC module - EATC) and defaults the backlighting to full intensity.
Fixed Backlighting
For Edge, when the accessory delay relay is energized, switched voltage is supplied to the window control and
door lock switches.
The MKX is not equipped with any fixed backlighting components.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the LED backlighting
output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are
shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC
is stored at that time for the fault. The circuit will then reset after a customer demand of the function (switching
the component on, battery saver being energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that
was stored on the first failure will not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module will not
allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal until a successful on-demand self-test proves that
the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs
present), the continuous DTC will have been cleared and the circuit function will return.
Each circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based on each circuits'
capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the circuit sets along
with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the
fault itself has been corrected. If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level, then DTCs B106F and
B1342 set along with the associated continuous DTC. These DTCs cannot be cleared and the module must be
replaced.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the instrument panel illumination system are for the white lighting
(MKX) and LED backlighting (Edge) output circuits.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Calibration
If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the instrument panel dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate
the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This will make sure
that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical
Smart junction box (SJB) fuse(s):
10 (15A) (dimmable illumination)
41 (15A) (non-dimmable illumination)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Illuminated components
SJB
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool release software.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication with the SJB, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to SYMPTOM CHART table.
DTC Charts
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
B2212
Panel Dim Switch Out of Range Go to Pinpoint Test C .
If the backlighting components are inoperative, go to
LED Backlighting Output
Pinpoint Test A .
B2A32
Circuit Open
If the backlighting components are always on, go to
Pinpoint Test B .
LED Backlighting Output
B2A33
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Circuit Short to Ground
If the backlighting components are inoperative, go to
White Lighting Output Circuit Pinpoint Test A .
B29B7
Open
If the backlighting components are always on, go to
Pinpoint Test B .
White Lighting Output Circuit
B29B8
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Short to Ground
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
All other DTCs MODULES article.
Symptom Chart
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
SYMPTOM CHART
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication
with the smart
junction box (SJB)
The control
illumination is
inoperative - all
hardwired
illumination
The control
illumination is
always on - all
hardwired
illumination
All instrument panel
illumination does not
dim
The steering wheel
control illumination
is inoperative
Action
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article.
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test a .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Instrument panel
dimmer switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Steering wheel control
switch(es)
Steering wheel control
switch harness
Clockspring
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
For MKX, go to Pinpoint Test E .
For Edge, CHECK the operation of the
power windows.
If the power windows operate
correctly, INSTALL a new
window control switch. REFER
to GLASS, FRAMES AND
MECHANISMS article. TEST
the system for normal operation.
If the power windows do not
operate correctly, REFER to
GLASS, FRAMES AND
MECHANISMS article.
The window control
switch illumination
is inoperative
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Window control switch
CARRY OUT the network test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
All networkcontrolled
illumination does not
dim
The instrument
cluster (IC)
illumination is
inoperative
The audio control
module (ACM)
illumination is
inoperative
Medium speed
controller area network
(MS-CAN)
SJB
CHECK the audio control module
(ACM) illumination for correct
operation.
If the ACM illumination operates
correctly, INSTALL a new IC.
REFER to INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE
CENTER, AND WARNING
CHIMES article. TEST the
system for normal operation.
If the ACM illumination does not
operate correctly, REFER to
MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article to continue
diagnosis of the communications
network.
CHECK the IC illumination for correct
operation.
If the IC illumination operates
correctly, REMOVE the ACM.
REFER to INFORMATION
AND ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS article. SEND it to an
authorized repair facility. TEST
the system for normal operation
after the repair.
If the IC illumination does not
operate correctly, REFER to
MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article to continue
IC
ACM
If the scan tool responds with no
communication to any module on
the MS-CAN, REFER to
MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article.
If the scan tool communicates
with the modules on the MSCAN, INSTALL a new SJB.
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION
ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for
normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
diagnosis of the communications
network.
The rear
entertainment
module (RETM)
illumination is
inoperative
The HVAC module EATC illumination
is inoperative
HVAC module
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Floor shifter
LH rear heated seat
switch (if equipped)
RH rear heated seat
switch (if equipped)
Manual temperature
control (if equipped)
Message center switch
(if equipped)
Memory set switch
(MKX)
Window adjust
switches (MKX)
Headlamp switch
Hazard/passenger air
bag disable/traction
control switch (if
equipped)
The individual
component
illumination is
inoperative
REMOVE the RETM. REFER to
INFORMATION AND
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS
article. SEND it to an authorized repair
facility. TEST the system for normal
operation.
CHECK the IC illumination for correct
operation.
If the IC illumination operates
correctly, INSTALL a new
HVAC module. REFER to
CLIMATE CONTROL article.
TEST the system for normal
operation.
If the IC illumination does not
operate correctly, REFER to
MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK article to continue
diagnosis of the communications
network.
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
RETM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
Door lock control
switches
Power liftgate release
switch
Roof opening panel
switch (if equipped)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Control Illumination Is Inoperative - All Hardwired Illumination
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Cluster and Panel Illumination schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Based on input received from the instrument panel dimmer switch, the smart junction box (SJB) sends a pulsewidth modulated (PWM) voltage to the hardwired dimmable illumination sources through circuit VLN37
(BU/WH) (MKX) or circuit VLN04 (VT/GY) (Edge).
DTC Description
B2A32 - LED Backlighting Output Circuit Open
B2A33 - LED Backlighting Output Circuit Short to
Ground
B29B7 - White Lighting Output Circuit Open
B29B8 - White Lighting Output Circuit Short to
Ground
Fault Trigger Conditions
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open on the LED backlighting output circuit.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the SJB detects a short to ground on the LED
backlighting output circuit. This DTC also sets
when fuse 10 (15A) has failed or is removed.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open on the white lighting output circuit.
A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when
the SJB detects a short to ground on the white
lighting output circuit. This DTC also sets when
fuse 10 (15A) has failed or is removed.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SJB
PINPOINT TEST A: THE CONTROL ILLUMINATION IS INOPERATIVE - ALL HARDWIRED
ILLUMINATION
A1 CHECK FOR RECORDED SJB DTCs FROM THE ON-DEMAND SELF-TEST
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
Use the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
Are any DTCs recorded?
YES : For DTC B2A33, B2A32, B29B7 or B29B8, go to A3.
NO : Go to A2.
A2 CHECK THE INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Monitor the SJB PID (DIM_SW_3) while rotating the instrument panel dimmer switch from the
lowest setting to the highest setting.
Does the PID indicate the switch is operating correctly?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : INSTALL a new instrument panel dimmer switch. REFER to INSTRUMENT PANEL
DIMMER SWITCH. TEST the system for normal operation.
A3 CHECK CIRCUIT VLN37 (BU/WH) OR CIRCUIT VLN04 (VT/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 1: Connecting Fused (5A) Jumper Wire Between SJB C2280B-39, Circuit VLN04
(VT/GY) & Battery Positive
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the jumper wire fails, repair circuit VLN04 (VT/GY) for a short to
ground.
For Edge, connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the SJB C2280b-39, circuit VLN04 (VT/GY)
and battery positive.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Connecting Fused (5A) Jumper Wire Between SJB C2280B-52, Circuit VLN37
(BU/WH) & Battery Positive
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the jumper wire fails, repair circuit VLN37 (BU/WH) for a short to
ground.
For MKX, connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the SJB C2280b-52, circuit VLN37
(BU/WH) and battery positive.
Do the backlighting components illuminate?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to A4.
NO : REMOVE the jumper wire. VERIFY the BJB fuse 10 (15A) is OK. REPAIR the circuit in
question for a short to ground. RUN the on-demand self-test (required to clear certain DTCs).
CORRECT any unresolved DTCs. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
A4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. RUN the on-demand self-test (required to clear certain DTCs). CORRECT
any unresolved DTCs. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test B: The Control Illumination Is Always On - All Hardwired Illumination
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Cluster and Panel Illumination schematic and
connector information.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) supplies a pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage signal to the dimmable
illumination sources on circuit VLN04 (VT/GY) (Edge) and VLN37 (BU/WH) (MKX).
DTC B2A32 (LED Backlighting Output Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage on the LED backlighting output circuit.
DTC B29B7 (White Lighting Output Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage on the white lighting output circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SJB
PINPOINT TEST B: THE CONTROL ILLUMINATION IS ALWAYS ON - ALL HARDWIRED
ILLUMINATION
B1 CHECK THE EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Key in OFF position.
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
Observe the exterior lighting components.
Key in ON position.
Are any exterior lighting components illuminated?
YES : REFER to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 CHECK CIRCUITS VLN04 (VT/GY) (EDGE) AND VLN37 (BU/WH) (MKX) FOR A SHORT
TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Key in ON position.
Do the dimmable backlighted components continue to illuminate?
YES : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to B3.
B3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test C: All Instrument Panel Illumination Does Not Dim
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Cluster and Panel Illumination schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the input from the instrument panel dimmer switch by sending a voltage
reference signal through circuit VLN18 (BU/WH) to the instrument panel dimmer switch. The return signal is
sent through circuit CLN27 (WH/BN) back to the SJB. Based on the input from the instrument panel dimmer
switch, the SJB sends a pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage signal to the dimmable illumination sources. If
the SJB detects a concern with the circuitry to the instrument panel dimmer switch, the SJB defaults the
backlighting to a full intensity level.
The SJB also sends a message over the network to the audio control module (ACM), the rear entertainment
module (RETM), the HVAC module - EATC, and the instrument cluster (IC) to indicate the backlighting
intensity level. If the receiving module receives invalid backlighting data from the SJB for 5 seconds or less, the
receiving module defaults the backlighting to the last setting.
If the receiving module does not receive the backlighting status message from the SJB or if the data received is
deemed invalid for more than 5 seconds, the receiving module sets DTC U0140 in continuous memory (except
the climate control module) and defaults the backlighting to full intensity.
DTC B2212 (Panel Dim Switch Out Of Range) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an
out of range condition on the dimmer input switch circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals, or connectors
Instrument panel dimmer switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST C: ALL INSTRUMENT PANEL ILLUMINATION DOES NOT DIM
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE:
Calibrate the instrument panel dimmer switch by rotating the dimmer switch
from the full dim position to the dome ON position before continuing
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
diagnostics.
C1 CHECK THE EXTERIOR LIGHTING OPERATION
Place the headlamp switch in each of its positions while observing the exterior lamps.
Do the exterior lamps operate correctly?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : REFER to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article.
C2 CHECK THE RECORDED RESULTS FROM BOTH CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND
SELF-TESTS
Check for recorded DTCs from the continuous and on-demand self-tests.
Are any DTCs present?
YES : If DTC B2212 is retrieved, go to C4.
For all other DTCs, REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
NO : Go to C3.
C3 CHECK THE INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH INPUT
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Monitor the SJB PID (DIM_SW_3) while rotating the instrument panel dimmer switch from the
lowest setting to the highest setting.
Does the PID indicate the switch is operating correctly?
YES : Go to C9.
NO : INSTALL a new instrument panel dimmer switch. REFER to INSTRUMENT PANEL
DIMMER SWITCH.
C4 CHECK CIRCUIT CLN27 (WH/BN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Disconnect: Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch C2298
Key in ON position.
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage Between Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch C2298-4, Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
CLN27 (WH/BN) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the instrument panel dimmer switch C2298-4, circuit CLN27
(WH/BN), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage indicated?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to C5.
C5 CHECK CIRCUIT VLN18 (BU/WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Fig. 4: Measuring Voltage Between Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch C2298-6, Circuit
VLN18 (BU/WH) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the instrument panel dimmer switch C2298-6, circuit VLN18
(BU/WH), harness side and ground.
Is any voltage indicated?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to C6.
C6 CHECK CIRCUIT CLN27 (WH/BN) FOR AN OPEN OR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 5: Measuring Resistance Between Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch C2298-4, Circuit
CLN27 (WH/BN) & SJB C2280B-33
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the instrument panel dimmer switch C2298-4, circuit CLN27
(WH/BN), harness side and the SJB C2280b-33, circuit CLN27 (WH/BN), harness side; and
between the instrument panel dimmer switch C2298-4, circuit CLN27 (WH/BN), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the instrument panel dimmer switch and the SJB,
and greater than 10,000 ohms between the instrument panel dimmer switch and ground?
YES : Go to C7.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C7 CHECK CIRCUIT VLN18 (BU/WH) FOR AN OPEN OR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance Between Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch C2298-6, Circuit
VLN18 (BU/WH) & SJB C2280B-34
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the instrument panel dimmer switch C2298-6, circuit VLN18
(BU/WH), harness side and the SJB C2280b-34, circuit VLN18 (BU/WH), harness side; and
between the instrument panel dimmer switch C2298-6, circuit VLN18 (BU/WH), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the instrument panel dimmer switch and the SJB,
and greater than 10,000 ohms between the instrument panel dimmer switch and ground?
YES : Go to C8.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C8 CHECK THE INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
Carry out the component test for the instrument panel dimmer switch. Refer to COMPONENT
TESTING.
Is the instrument panel dimmer switch OK?
YES : Go to C9.
NO : INSTALL a new instrument panel dimmer switch. REFER to INSTRUMENT PANEL
DIMMER SWITCH. TEST the system for normal operation.
C9 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test D: The Steering Wheel Control Illumination Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Cluster and Panel Illumination schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) sends a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the steering wheel controls
through circuit VLN04 (VT/GY) (Edge) or circuit VLN37 (BU/WH) (MKX) to the clockspring. The voltage
passes through the clockspring to the steering wheel control switches. Ground to the clockspring is supplied
through circuit GD116 (BK/VT).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Steering wheel control switch(es)
Steering wheel control switch harness
Clockspring
PINPOINT TEST D: THE STEERING WHEEL CONTROL ILLUMINATION IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
D1 CHECK THE OTHER DIMMABLE LIGHTING SWITCHES
Key in OFF position.
Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch to the full illumination position and observe other
dimmable switches (door lock switches, hazard lamp switch, headlamp switch for example).
Are all the dimmable switches inoperative?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test A .
NO : Go to D2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
D2 CHECK CIRCUIT VLN04 (VT/GY) (EDGE) OR CIRCUIT VLN37 (BU/WH) (MKX) FOR AN
OPEN
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218a
Connect the battery ground cable.
Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch to the full illumination position.
Fig. 7: Measuring Voltage Between Clockspring C218A-16, Circuit VLN04 (VT/GY) (Edge)
Or Circuit VLN37 (BU/WH) (MKX)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the clockspring C218a-16, circuit VLN04 (VT/GY) (Edge) or circuit
VLN37 (BU/WH) (MKX), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : TURN the parking lamps off. Go to D3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
D3 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance Between Clockspring C218A-7, Circuit GD116 (BK/VT) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218a-7, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
D4 CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR AN OPEN
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article.
Disconnect: Upper Clockspring Connector C218b
Fig. 9: Measuring Resistance Between Clockspring C218A Pin 16 And Upper Clockspring
C218B Pin 7
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218a pin 16, component side and the upper
clockspring C218b pin 7, component side.
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance Between Clockspring C218A Pin 7 And Upper Clockspring
C218B Pin 2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218a pin 7, component side and the upper
clockspring C218b pin 2, component side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new clockspring. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
D5 CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL HARNESS CIRCUIT VLN04 (VT/GY) (EDGE) OR
CIRCUIT VLN37 (BU/WH) (MKX) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: LH Steering Wheel Switches C2998
Disconnect: RH Steering Wheel Switches C2999
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance Between Upper Clockspring Connector C218B-7, Circuit
VLN04 (VT/GY) & LH Steering Wheel Switches C2998-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the upper clockspring connector C218b-7, circuit VLN04
(VT/GY), harness side and the LH steering wheel switches C2998-2, circuit VLN04 (VT/GY),
harness side; and between the upper clockspring connector C218b-7, circuit VLN04 (VT/GY),
harness side and the RH steering wheel switches C2999-1, circuit VLN04 (VT/GY), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D6.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
D6 CHECK CIRCUIT GD165 (BK) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance Between Clockspring C218B-2, Circuit GD165 (BK) & LH
Steering Wheel Switch C2998-4
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218b-2, circuit GD165 (BK), harness side, and
the LH steering wheel switch C2998-4, circuit GD165 (BK), harness side; and between the
clockspring C218b-2, circuit GD165 (BK), harness side, and the RH steering wheel switch C29993, circuit GD165 (BK), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new speed control switch or steering wheel controls as necessary. REFER to
SPEED CONTROL article or INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS article.
INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL the driver air bag module. REFER to SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM article. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test E: The Individual Component Illumination Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM article for Cluster and Panel Illumination schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) sends a pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage to the dimmable components
through circuit VLN04 (VT/GY) (Edge) or circuit VLN37 (BU/WH) (MKX). Ground is provided through
circuits GD116 (BK/VT), GD126 (BK/WH) and GD139 (BK/YE).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Floor shifter
LH rear heated seat switch (if equipped)
RH rear heated seat switch (if equipped)
Manual temperature control (if equipped)
Message center switch (if equipped)
Memory set switch (MKX)
Window adjust switches (MKX)
Door lock control switches
Headlamp switch
Hazard/passenger air bag disable/traction control switch (if equipped)
Power liftgate release switch
Roof opening panel switch (if equipped)
PINPOINT TEST E: THE INDIVIDUAL COMPONENT ILLUMINATION IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
E1 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE SINGLE ILLUMINATION SOURCE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Inoperative Illumination Source
Key in ON position.
With the parking lamps on, rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch to the full illumination
position.
Measure the voltage between the inoperative illumination source, harness side and ground as
follows:
EDGE
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VLN04
Floor shifter
C3245-3
(VT/GY)
Manual climate
VLN04
C2357a-4
control
(VT/GY)
VLN04
Headlamp switch C205-5
(VT/GY)
Message center
VLN04
C253-1
switch
(VT/GY)
Hazard/passenger
air bag
VLN04
C2355-6
disable/traction
(VT/GY)
control switch
LH door lock
CBP41
C505-2
control switch
(BU)
RH door lock
CBP41
C605-2
control switch
(BU)
Power liftgate
VLN04
C2269-3
release switch
(VT/GY)
Component
MKX
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
VLN37
Floor shifter
C3245-3
(BU/WH)
Memory set
VLN37
C503-3
switch
(BU/WH)
VLN37
Headlamp switch C205-5
(BU/WH)
Component
Message center
C253-1
VLN37
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
switch
(BU/WH)
Hazard/passenger
air bag
VLN37
C2355-6
disable/traction
(BU/WH)
control switch
Power liftgate
VLN37
C2269-3
release switch
(BU/WH)
Roof opening
VLN37
C912-2
panel switch
(BU/WH)
LH front window
VLN37
C535a-6
control switch
(BU/WH)
RH front window
VLN37
C648-1
control switch
(BU/WH)
LH rear window
VLN37
C701-4
control switch
(BU/WH)
RH rear window
VLN37
C801-4
control switch
(BU/WH)
LH door lock
VLN37
C505-2
control switch
(BU/WH)
RH door lock
VLN37
C605-2
control switch
(BU/WH)
LH rear heated
VLN37
C722-5
seat switch
(BU/WH)
RH rear heated
VLN37
C822-5
seat switch
(BU/WH)
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : For LH or RH rear window switches, INSTALL a new switch for the switch in question.
REFER to GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS article.
For all other components, go to E2.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
E2 CHECK ILLUMINATION SOURCE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between the inoperative illumination source, harness side and ground as
follows:
EDGE
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
GD140
Floor shifter
C3245-4
(BK/GN)
Manual climate
GD115
Component
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
control
C2357a-23 (BK/GY)
GD116
Headlamp switch C205-10
(BK/VT)
Message center
GD116
C253-4
switch
(BK/VT)
Hazard/passenger
air bag
GD116
C2355-1
disable/traction
(BK/VT)
control switch
LH door lock
GD133
C505-4
control switch
(BK)
RH door lock
GD140
C605-4
control switch
(BK/GN)
Power liftgate
GD116
C2269-2
release switch
(BK/VT)
MKX
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
GD140
Floor shifter
C3245-4
(BK/GN)
GD133
Memory set switch C503-7
(BK)
GD116
Headlamp switch C205-10
(BK/VT)
Message center
GD116
C253-4
switch
(BK/VT)
Hazard/pad/traction
GD116
C2355-1
control switch
(BK/VT)
Power liftgate
GD116
C2269-2
release switch
(BK/VT)
Roof opening panel
GD133
C912-1
switch
(BK)
LH front window
GD133
C535b-6
control switch
(BK)
RH front window
GD140
C648-6
control switch
(BK/GN)
LH door lock
GD133
C505- 4
control switch
(BK)
RH door lock
GD140
C605-4
control switch
(BK/GN)
LH rear heated seat
GD126
C722-1
switch
(BK/WH)
Component
RH rear heated seat
GD145
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
switch
C822-1
(BK/BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new component in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
Fig. 13: Exploded View Of Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
5404481
14K147
3
-
4
11691
Description
Instrument panel side finish panel
Headlamp switch assembly
Headlamp switch assembly electrical
connectors (part of 14401)
Instrument panel dimmer switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Instrument Cluster And Panel Illumination - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The switch is removed by pushing from behind.
2. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch assembly.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. Release the 4 tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
Fig. 14: Releasing Tabs & Removing Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:04:16 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
PINPOINT TEST A: NO START
WARNING: Stop this test at the first sign of a fuel leak and repair as required.
No open flame. No smoking during fuel delivery checks.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
spark (as related to electronic engine control)
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 1: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:17
11:20:47 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 2: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner 2.3L,
Ranger 2.3L
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
Pin
1
3
3
1
Circuit
SIGRTN
VREF
SIGRTN
VREF
Fig. 3: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 4: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 5: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
E-Series 4.6L,
Edge,
F-150 4.2L,
F-150 4.6L,
Focus,
MKX,
MKZ,
Sable,
Taurus,
Connector
A
Pin
2
3
Circuit
ETCRTN
ETCREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Taurus X
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
All other vehicles
B
B
C
3
5
4
5
3
2
ETCRTN
ETCREF
ETCRTN
ETCREF
ETCRTN
ETCREF
Fig. 6: Data Link Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
13
Circuit
FEPS (Flash EEPROM Programming Signal)
A1 ATTEMPT TO CRANK THE ENGINE
NOTE:
Verify the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch is set (button pushed in). Refer to the
Owner's Literature for location.
Does the engine crank?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
REFER to the STARTING SYSTEM GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES and
diagnose the engine does not crank symptom.
A2 IDENTIFY THE TYPE OF NO START
NOTE:
The purpose of this test step is to identify intermittent no starts in order to
determine the proper repair procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Does the vehicle start?
Yes
The vehicle has an intermittent no start.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to A3.
A3 DETERMINE THE THROTTLE TYPE
Is the vehicle equipped with electronic throttle control?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
GO to A4.
A4 CHECK THE VREF VOLTAGE TO TP SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
TP Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) TP Sensor ( - ) TP Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
A5 CHECK VREF VOLTAGE TO ETBTPS SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
ETBTPS connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ETBTPS ( - ) ETBTPS
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ETCREF
ETCRTN
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to A6.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
A6 CHECK THE FLASH EEPROM PROGRAMMING SIGNAL (FEPS) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
TP Sensor connector connected.
ETBTPS connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) DLC,
Harness Side
FEPS - Pin 13
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 9 V?
Yes
GO to A7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
A7 CHECK THE RPM IN THE PCM
NOTE:
Connect the scan tool to a reliable voltage source that is powered with the key
in the START position (such as directly to the vehicle battery). Also verify that
the vehicle battery is fully charged.
NOTE:
Normal engine cranking speed is between 150 RPM and 350 RPM.
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
Crank the engine while viewing the RPM PID.
Is the RPM between 150 RPM - 350 RPM?
Yes
GO to A8.
No
For base engine concerns, REFER to the ENGINE 4.6L AND 5.4L -- E-SERIES - General
Information and diagnose difficult starting
symptom.
For all others, GO to JD2.
A8 CHECK FOR CKP AND CMP SYNCHRONIZATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Access the PCM and monitor the SYNC PID.
Crank the engine while viewing the SYNC PID.
Does the SYNC PID read YES?
Yes
GO to A9.
No
GO to JD2.
A9 CHECK THE PCM DRIVER SIGNAL TO THE COILS
NOTE:
Test lamp bulb filament wattages vary widely. The intensity and duration of
blinking depends on the test lamp being used.
Connect a test lamp between B+ and each coil driver circuit at the harness connector.
Crank the engine.
Does the test lamp blink consistently for each coil driver (1 blink per engine revolution)?
Yes
GO to A10.
No
For coil-on-plug (COP) ignition testing, GO to JB2.
For coil pack ignition testing, GO to JC2.
A10 CHECK THE FUEL PRESSURE
WARNING: The fuel system remains pressurized when the engine is not running. To
prevent injury or fire, use caution when working on the fuel system.
Refer to the fuel system WARNING information at the beginning of
Pinpoint Test HC.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
While activating the fuel pump on an electronic returnless fuel system a brief
pressure spike may occur.
Key in OFF position.
Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION - GASOLINE
AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for the Fuel System Pressure Release procedure.
Connect the fuel pressure gauge to the Schrader valve using the appropriate fuel pressure test hose and
adaptor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Activate the fuel pump to obtain maximum fuel pressure.
Is the fuel pressure within specification (refer to the fuel pressure chart in Pinpoint Test HC)?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
GO to A11.
A11 CHECK THE FUEL PRESSURE LEAKDOWN
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Activate the fuel pump to obtain maximum fuel pressure.
Exit output test mode.
Monitor the fuel pressure.
Verify the fuel pressure remains within 34 kPa (5 psi) of the maximum pressure for 1 minute after turning
the pump off.
Does fuel pressure remain within 34 kPa (5 psi)?
Yes
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
GO to A12.
A12 CHECK THE FUEL INJECTORS FOR VOLTAGE
NOTE:
A no start condition typically exists only if greater than half of the fuel injectors
are without voltage. Check at least 2 fuel injectors, 1 on each bank on V type
engines.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect 2 fuel injectors.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the VPWR voltage at each fuel injector harness connector.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A13.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
A13 CHECK THE FUEL INJECTORS' ABILITY TO DELIVER FUEL
Cycle the key several times to charge the fuel system.
Disable the fuel pump.
Monitor the fuel pressure gauge while cranking the engine for at least 5 seconds.
Is there a pressure drop greater than 34 kPa (5 psi) while cranking the engine?
Yes
The electronic engine control (EEC) system is not
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
the cause of the no start.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
GO to A14.
A14 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST B: POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) POWER RELAY
NOTE:
The IGN START/RUN and ground circuits, or the B+ and VPWR circuits may be
reversed in the harness connector. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article
Electronic Engine Control Cell for schematic and connector information.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
harness circuits: B+, IGN START/RUN, INJPWRM, ISP-R, PCMRC, VPWR and GND
PCM power relay (12A646)
PCM (12A650)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 7: Injector (INJ) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
All other vehicles
Connector
A
Pin
Circuit
1
VPWR
A
2
VPWR
Fig. 8: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 9: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 10: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
Escape/Mariner,
Grand Marquis
Expedition,
F-Super Duty,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ,
Navigator,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac,
Mountaineer
F-150,
Mark LT
Focus
Connector
A
B
B
A
A
Pin
Circuit
5
2
1
3
87
86
30, 85
VPWR
GND
IGN START/RUN
B+
VPWR
PCMRC
B+
87
85
30, 86
5
1
2, 3
3
2
VPWR
PCMRC
B+
VPWR
PCMRC
B+
VPWR
PCMRC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Mustang
C
All other vehicles
B
Vehicle
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
Expedition,
Navigator
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac,
Mountaineer
F-150 4.6L,
F-150 5.4L,
Mark LT
F-150 4.2L
F-Super Duty
Focus
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
Mustang
Connector
190 Pin
1, 5
87
85
30, 86
87
85
86
30
B+
VPWR
PCMRC
B+
VPWR
GND
IGN START/RUN
B+
Pin
Circuit
B33
B51, B52, B53
B7
B8
INJPWRM
VPWR
ISP-R
PCMRC
150 (50-50-50) Pin B35, B36
140 Pin
B33
B51, B52, B53
B7
B8
170 Pin
B35, B36
B46
B37
190 Pin
B51, B52, B53
B17
B40
190 Pin
B33
B51, B52, B53
B17
B40
170 Pin
E23
B35, B36
B31
B37
190 Pin
B21
B67, B68
B42
B38
140 Pin
B45
B51, B52
B37
B35
170 Pin
E23
B35, B36
B46
VPWR
INJPWRM
VPWR
ISP-R
PCMRC
VPWR
ISP-R
PCMRC
VPWR
ISP-R
PCMRC
INJPWRM
VPWR
ISP-R
PCMRC
INJPWRM
VPWR
ISP-R
PCMRC
INJPWRM
VPWR
ISP-R
PCMRC
INJPWRM
VPWR
ISP-R
PCMRC
INJPWRM
VPWR
ISP-R
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
All other vehicles
170 Pin
B37
B35, B36
PCMRC
VPWR
B1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Is DTC P0685, P0689, or P0690 present?
Yes
For DTCs P0685 or P0690, GO to B8.
For DTC P0689, GO to B11.
No
GO to B2.
B2 CHECK THE B+ AND IGN START/RUN VOLTAGE TO PCM POWER RELAY
Key in OFF position.
PCM Power Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Power Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
B+
Ground
IGN
Ground
START/RUN
Are the voltages greater than 10 V?
Yes
For Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
E-Series,
Escape/Mariner,
Ranger, and
Town Car, GO to B6.
For all others, GO to B3.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
B3 CHECK THE PCMRC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Power Relay
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
PCMRC
PCMRC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
B4 CHECK THE PCMRC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
PCMRC
Ground
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to B5.
B5 CHECK THE ISP-R VOLTAGE AT THE PCM HARNESS CONNECTOR
Key in OFF position.
PCM Power Relay connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
ISP-R
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to B7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPEAT the self-test.
B6 CHECK THE PCM POWER RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Power Relay
Power Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
B+
GND
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to B7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
B7 CHECK FOR AN OPEN VPWR CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE PCM AND POWER RELAY
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Power Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VPWR
VPWR
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM Power relay.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
B8 DTCS P0685 OR P0690: CHECK THE PCMRC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM Power Relay connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) PCM
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
PCMRC
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to B9.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
B9 CHECK THE ISP-R CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
ISP-R
Ground
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to B10.
B10 CHECK THE INJPWRM CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
INJ connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) INJ
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
INJPWRM
VPWR
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B12.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
B11 DTC P0689: CHECK THE ISP-R VOLTAGE AT THE PCM HARNESS CONNECTOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
ISP-R
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to B12.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
B12 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST C: REFERENCE VOLTAGE (VREF)
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
harness circuits: ETCREF, ETCRTN, SIGRTN and VREF
accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor (9F836)
air conditioning pressure (ACP) transducer sensor (19D594)
differential pressure feedback exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) sensor (9J460)
EGR system module (ESM) (9Y456)
fuel rail pressure temperature (FRPT) sensor (9G756)
fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (9C052)
manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor (9F479)
power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (3N824)
throttle position (TP) sensor (9B989)
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 11: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 12: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 13: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Focus
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
C
Pin
Circuit
3, 4
1, 6
6, 9
10, 8
ETCRTN
ETCREF
ETCRTN
ETCREF
1, 3
6, 7
ETCRTN
ETCREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 14: Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 15: Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Edge,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKX,
MKZ
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
Pin
Circuit
1
2
SIGRTN
VREF
1
2
SIGRTN
VREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 16: Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 17: Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Vehicles equipped with
a tube mounted
differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
Pin
Circuit
1
2
VREF
SIGRTN
3
2
VREF
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 18: EGR System Module (ESM) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
6
2
Circuit
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
VREF (Reference Voltage)
Fig. 19: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 20: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 21: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
E-Series 4.6L,
Edge,
F-150 4.2L,
F-150 4.6L,
Focus,
MKX,
MKZ,
Sable,
Taurus,
Connector
A
Pin
2
3
Circuit
ETCRTN
ETCREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Taurus X
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
All other vehicles
B
B
C
3
5
4
5
3
2
ETCRTN
ETCREF
ETCRTN
ETCREF
ETCRTN
ETCREF
Fig. 22: Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
4
Circuit
VREF (Reference Voltage)
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 23: Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
1
2
Circuit
VREF (Reference Voltage)
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
Fig. 24: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 25: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 26: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner 3.0L
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
C
Pin
3
1
2
3
4
2
Circuit
SIGRTN
VREF
SIGRTN
VREF
SIGRTN
VREF
Fig. 27: Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
2
1
VREF (Reference Voltage)
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
Fig. 28: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 29: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner 2.3L,
Ranger 2.3L
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
Pin
3
1
1
3
Circuit
VREF
SIGRTN
VREF
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:48 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
Mustang,
Town Car
E-Series,
F-Super Duty
Escape/Mariner
Expedition,
Navigator
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac,
Mountaineer
F-150,
Mark LT
Focus
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
Ranger
All other vehicles
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
B35, B36
B41, E58, T41
B41, B6, E59
B40, E57
B24, B4, E66
170 Pin
B35, B36
B41, E58, T41
B18, B6, E59
B40, E57
B16, B4, E66
150 (50-50-50) Pin B35, B36
B41, E41, T41
B40, E40
140 Pin
B51, B52, B53
B58, E58
B59, B65, E59
E57
B21, B28, E66
170 Pin
B35, B36
B41, E58, T41
B43, B6, E59
B40, E57
B24, B4, E66
190 Pin
B51, B52, B53
B58, E58, T43
B58, B59, E59
B29, E57
B21, B28, E66
190 Pin
B67, B68
B58, E64, T40
B44, B60, E60
B52, B66, E63
B45, B61, E59
140 Pin
B51, B52
B58, E58
B59, B60, E59
B33, E57
B21, B28, E66
170 Pin
B35, B36
B41, E58, T41
B40, E57
190 Pin
B51, B52, B53
B58, E58
Circuit
VPWR
SIGRTN
ETCRTN
VREF
ETCREF
VPWR
SIGRTN
ETCRTN
VREF
ETCREF
VPWR
SIGRTN
VREF
VPWR
SIGRTN
ETCRTN
VREF
ETCREF
VPWR
SIGRTN
ETCRTN
VREF
ETCREF
VPWR
SIGRTN
ETCRTN
VREF
ETCREF
VPWR
SIGRTN
ETCRTN
VREF
ETCREF
VPWR
SIGRTN
ETCRTN
VREF
ETCREF
VPWR
SIGRTN
VREF
VPWR
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
B59, B65, E59 ETCRTN
B29, B64
VREF
B21, B28, E66 ETCREF
SENSORS CONNECTED TO VREF/ETCREF
Differential
Pressure
TP or
Applications
APP
FTP
Feedback EGR
ETC
or ESM
Crown Victoria/Grand
ETC
X
X
X
Marquis
Edge/MKX
ETC
X
X
Escape/Mariner - 2.3L
TP
X
Escape/Mariner - 3.0L
TP
X
X
E-Series - 4.6L/5.4L
ETC
X
X
X
E-Series - 6.8L
ETC
X
X
Expedition/Navigator
ETC
X
X
Explorer/Explorer Sport
ETC
X
X
X
Trac/Mountaineer
F-150 - 4.2L
ETC
X
X
X
F-150 - 4.6L
ETC
X
X
X
F-150 - 5.4L/Mark LT
ETC
X
X
F-Super Duty
ETC
X
X
Focus
ETC
X
X
Fusion/Milan/MKZ
ETC
X
X
Mustang - 4.0L
ETC
X
X
X
Mustang - 4.6L
ETC
X
X
Mustang - 5.4L
ETC
X
X
X
Ranger - 2.3L
TP
X
Ranger - 3.0L/4.0L
TP
X
X
Taurus/Taurus X/Sable
ETC
X
X
Town Car
ETC
X
X
X
NOTE:
ACP
PSPT
X
FRPT
MAP
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ETCREF and ETCRTN are internally bussed within the PCM and are
dedicated circuits for the APP sensor and the electronic throttle body TP
sensor only. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article Electronic Engine
Controls Cell for schematic and connector information.
C1 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE TO SIGRTN/ETCRTN
NOTE:
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0642 and P0643 are set due to VREF circuit
concerns only. When diagnosing DTC P0642 or P0643, follow the path for VREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
concerns.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the suspect sensor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
For ETCREF concerns.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
( - ) Suspect
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ETCREF
ETCRTN
For VREF concerns.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
( - ) Suspect
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to C19.
No
GO to C2.
C2 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE TO GROUND
For ETCREF concerns.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
ETCREF
Ground
For VREF concerns.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to C18.
No
GO to C3.
C3 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH ALL SENSORS DISCONNECTED
NOTE:
Refer to the Sensors Connected To VREF/ETCREF Chart at the beginning of this
pinpoint test and the Wiring Diagrams article Electronic Engine Controls Cell to
identify the sensors connected to VREF/ETCREF.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect all of the sensors connected to the VREF/ETCREF circuit.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage at the sensor disconnected in C1.
For ETCREF concerns.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
ETCREF
Ground
For VREF concerns.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
No
For electronic throttle control (ETC) concerns, GO GO to C4.
to C8.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For all other VREF concerns, GO to C10.
C4 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the PCM.
For ETCREF concerns.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Suspect
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
ETCREF
ETCREF
For VREF concerns.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Suspect
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VREF
VREF
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
C5 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
For ETCREF concerns.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ETCREF
ETCRTN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
ETCREF
Ground
For VREF concerns.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
C6 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR
For ETCREF concerns.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ETCREF
VPWR
For VREF concerns.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
VPWR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to C7.
C7 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key ON, engine OFF.
For ETCREF concerns.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
ETCREF
Ground
For VREF concerns.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to C20.
C8 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH THE ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CONNECTED
NOTE:
If this sensor was used for the ETCREF measurement in C3, GO to C9.
Key in OFF position.
Connect the electronic throttle body throttle position sensor (ETBTPS).
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
Connector,
(-)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side
ETCREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
The concern is intermittent.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new ETBTPS.
REFER to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C9 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH THE APP SENSOR CONNECTED
Key in OFF position.
Connect the APP sensor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
ETCREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
The concern is intermittent.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new APP sensor.
REFER to the ACCELERATION CONTROL -E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C10 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH THE TP SENSOR CONNECTED
NOTE:
If this sensor was used for the VREF measurement in C3, GO to C11.
Key in OFF position.
Connect the TP sensor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
For additional sensors disconnected, GO to C11.
For no additional sensors disconnected, refer to
PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new TP sensor.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C11 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
CONNECTED
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a differential pressure feedback EGR sensor
or if this sensor was used for the VREF measurement in C3, GO to C12.
Key in OFF position.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
For additional sensors disconnected, GO to C12.
For no additional sensors disconnected, refer to
PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor. REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION
CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C12 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH THE ESM CONNECTED
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with an ESM or if this sensor was used for the
VREF measurement in C3, GO to C13.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
Connect the ESM.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
For additional sensors disconnected, GO to C13.
For no additional sensors disconnected, refer to
PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new ESM.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C13 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH THE MAP SENSOR CONNECTED
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a MAP sensor or if this sensor was used for
the VREF measurement in C3, GO to C14.
Key in OFF position.
Connect the MAP sensor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
For additional sensors disconnected, GO to C14.
For no additional sensors disconnected, refer to
PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new MAP sensor.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
C14 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH THE FRPT SENSOR CONNECTED
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a FRPT sensor or if this sensor was used for
the VREF measurement in C3, GO to C15.
Key in OFF position.
Connect the FRPT sensor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
For additional sensors disconnected, GO to C15.
For no additional sensors disconnected, refer to
PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new FRPT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C15 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH THE FTP SENSOR CONNECTED
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a FTP sensor or if this sensor was used for
the VREF measurement in C3, GO to C16.
Key in OFF position.
Connect the FTP sensor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For additional sensors disconnected, GO to C16.
For no additional sensors disconnected, refer to
PINPOINT TEST Z.
INSTALL a new FTP sensor.
REFER to the EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -E-SERIES EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C16 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH THE ACP TRANSDUCER SENSOR CONNECTED
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with an ACP transducer sensor or if this sensor
was used for the VREF measurement in C3, GO to C17.
Key in OFF position.
Connect the ACP transducer sensor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
For additional sensors disconnected, GO to C17.
For no additional sensors disconnected, refer to
PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP)
Transducer Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
C17 CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE WITH THE PSP SENSOR CONNECTED
Key in OFF position.
Connect the PSP sensor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Suspect
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
The concern is intermittent.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new PSP sensor.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C18 CHECK THE SIGRTN OR ETCRTN CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article Electronic Engine Controls Cell for specific
vehicle application and pin locations.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the PCM.
For ETCRTN concerns.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Suspect
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
ETCRTN
ETCRTN
For SIGRTN concerns.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Suspect
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
SIGRTN
SIGRTN
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to C20.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
C19 CHECK THE SUSPECT SENSOR FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT
Clear the KOEO, KOER, and continuous DTCs.
Key in OFF position.
Connect the suspect sensor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the PCM self-test.
Is the concern still present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
INSTALL a new sensor for the sensor in question.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
The concern is intermittent.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
C20 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new PCM.
REFER toFLASH ELECTRICALLY
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY concern may have been caused by a loose or
MEMORY (EEPROM) , Programming the VID corroded connector.
Block for a Replacement PCM.
PINPOINT TEST DA: INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
integrated mass air flow/intake air temperature (MAF/IAT) sensor (12B579)
harness circuits: IAT and SIGRTN
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Voltage values calculated for VREF equal 5 volts. These values can vary by 15% due to sensor and VREF
variations.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 30: Temperature Sensor Temperature To Voltage Graph
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature
Temperature Sensor Values
°C
°F
Voltage
Resistance (K ohms)
120
248
0.28
1.18
110
230
0.36
1.55
100
212
0.47
2.07
90
194
0.61
2.80
80
176
0.80
3.84
70
158
1.05
5.37
60
140
1.37
7.70
50
122
1.77
10.97
40
104
2.23
16.15
30
86
2.74
24.27
20
68
3.26
37.30
10
50
3.73
58.75
0
32
4.14
95.85
-10
14
4.45
160.31
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 31: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
4
2
1
Circuit
MAF RTN (Mass Air Flow Return)
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
IAT (Intake Air Temperature)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
Town Car
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner 3.0L
Escape/Mariner 2.3L
Expedition,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ,
Navigator
F-150,
Mark LT
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
Circuit
T41
E22
SIGRTN
IAT
190 Pin
B58
B43
SIGRTN
IAT
150 (50-50-50)
Pin
150 (50-50-50)
Pin
140 Pin
B41
B20
B41
B39
B58
B43
SIGRTN
IAT
SIGRTN
IAT
SIGRTN
IAT
190 Pin
E58
E22
SIGRTN
IAT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Focus
190 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
B58
B47
E58
E22
SIGRTN
IAT
SIGRTN
IAT
DA1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, or P1112 present?
Yes
For DTC P0111, GO to DA12.
For KOEO and KOER DTC P0112, GO to DA6.
For KOEO and KOER DTC P0113, GO to DA2.
For continuous memory DTCs P0112, P0113 or
P1112, GO to DA9.
For DTC P0114, GO to DA9.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DA2 DTC P0113: CHECK THE IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
NOTE:
The DTC indicates the sensor signal is greater than the self-test maximum.
MAF/IAT Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
IAT - Pin 1
Ground
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to DA3.
No
GO to DA4.
DA3 CHECK THE IAT SENSOR RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MAF/IAT ( - ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Component
Side
IAT - Pin 1
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance between 1K - 500K ohms?
Yes
GO to DA4.
No
INSTALL a new MAF/IAT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DA4 CHECK THE SIGNAL AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MAF/IAT
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
IAT - Pin 1
IAT
SIGRTN - Pin 2 SIGRTN
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DA5.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DA5 CHECK THE SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
IAT - Pin 1
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 1 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DA14.
DA6 DTC P0112: SIMULATE AN OPPOSITE SIGNAL TO THE PCM
NOTE:
The DTC indicates the sensor signal is less than the self-test minimum.
MAF/IAT Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the IAT PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.2 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new MAF/IAT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DA7.
DA7 CHECK THE IAT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO MAF RTN
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MAF/IAT ( - ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAF RTN - Pin
IAT - Pin 1
4
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DA8.
DA8 CHECK THE IAT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
IAT
SIGRTN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) 12 Volt
Connector,
Vehicle Battery
Harness Side
Negative
IAT
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DA14.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DA9 SELF-TEST DTCS P0112, P0113, P0114 OR P1112: INTERMITTENT CHECK
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the IAT PID.
While observing the PID, carry out the following:
Tap on the sensor to simulate road shock
Wiggle the sensor connector
Is there a large change in the voltage reading?
Yes
DISCONNECT and INSPECT the connector.
If OK, INSTALL a new MAF/IAT sensor. REFER
to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS - GO to DA10.
GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
DA10 CHECK THE ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL (EEC) WIRING HARNESS
Access the PCM and monitor the IAT PID.
While observing the PID, wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working
from the sensor to the PCM.
Is there a large change in the voltage reading?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ISOLATE the concern. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DA11.
DA11 CHECK THE PCM AND VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
MAF/IAT Sensor connector disconnected.
Are the connectors and terminals OK?
Yes
No
The concern is not present at this time.
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
REPAIR as necessary.
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DA12 DTC P0111: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE IAT SENSOR WITH THE ENGINE OFF
NOTE:
Verify the engine temperature is at ambient temperature before continuing with
this test.
Key in OFF position.
IAT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
IAT
( - ) IAT Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DA13.
No
INSTALL a new IAT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DA13 DTC P0111: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE IAT SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
Verify the engine is at operating temperature before taking the IAT reading.
IAT Sensor connector connected.
Run the engine until the engine temperature stabilizes.
Key in OFF position.
IAT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
IAT
( - ) IAT Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
The concern is not present at this time.
CARRY OUT the OBD drive cycle to determine if
fuel, HO2S, catalyst and misfire monitors can be
executed.
REFER to On Board Diagnostic (OBD) Drive
Cycle.
REPEAT the PCM self-test if necessary.
No
INSTALL a new IAT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DA14 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PINPOINT TEST DC: MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
mass air flow (MAF) sensor (12B579)
harness circuits: MAF SIG, MAF RTN, vehicle power (VPWR), power ground (PWRGND), IAT and
SIGRTN
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 32: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
1
2
4
3
5
6
Circuit
IAT (Intake Air Temperature)
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
MAF RTN (Mass Air Flow Return)
MAF (Mass Air Flow)
PWRGND (Power Ground)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
Connector
190 Pin
150 (50-50-50) Pin
Pin
Circuit
B41
B42
MAF
MAF RTN
B32
MAF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Expedition,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ,
Navigator
F-150,
Mark LT
Focus
140 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
190 Pin
190 Pin
B43
B41
B42
MAF RTN
MAF
MAF RTN
E25
E26
B40
B41
E25
E26
MAF
MAF RTN
MAF
MAF RTN
MAF
MAF RTN
DC1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0102, P0103, P0104, P1100, or P1101 present?
Yes
No
For KOER and continuous memory DTC P0102,
P0104, GO to DC5.
For DTC P0103, GO to DC21.
For all other symptoms without DTCs, GO to
For KOEO DTC P1101, GO to DC7.
DC27.
For KOER and continuous memory DTC P1101,
GO to DC2.
For continuous memory DTC P1100, GO to DC19.
DC2 DTC P1101: CHECK FOR MAF SENSOR CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS
Retrieve continuous memory DTCs.
Is a continuous memory MAF DTC present with the KOER DTC P1101?
Yes
GO to DC3.
No
GO to DC5.
DC3 VERIFY CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P0102
Is a continuous memory DTC P0102 present with the KOER DTC P1101?
Yes
GO to DC5.
No
GO to DC4.
DC4 VERIFY CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P0103
Is a continuous memory DTC P0103 present with the KOER DTC P1101?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
All other continuous memory DTCs:
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
GO to DC21.
DC5 KOER AND CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0102, P0104 OR P1101: CHECK THE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM
FOR LEAKS, OBSTRUCTIONS, AND DAMAGE
Key in OFF position.
Check the air inlet system (air cleaner, housing, duct work) for obstructions or blockage.
Check for broken/loose air outlet tube clamps (throttle body and air cleaner assembly ends), cracks/holes
in the air outlet tube, and worn gaskets between the MAF sensor and the air cleaner assembly. Check the
throttle body bore for sludge. Verify the MAF sensor is connected. Repair as necessary.
Are there any concerns found during the visual inspection?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DC6.
DC6 CHECK THE MAF PID
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
Run the engine up to 1,500 RPM for 5 seconds, then bring it back to idle.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAF PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.23 V?
Yes
No
GO to DC9.
GO to DC7.
DC7 CHECK THE MAF SIGNAL SENT TO THE PCM
NOTE:
DTC P1101 can be generated by a low charged vehicle battery or the garage
exhaust ventilation system. Charge the battery as necessary, then remove the
ventilation system and properly vent to the outside atmosphere. Check the air
inlet system (air cleaner, housing, duct work) for obstructions or blockage.
Repeat the KOEO self-test.
Key in OFF position.
MAF/IAT Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAF PID.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage less than 0.2 V?
Yes
No
GO to DC8.
GO to DC9.
DC8 CHECK THE MAF SIGNAL SENT TO THE PCM
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAF PID.
Is the voltage between 0.46 - 2.44 V?
Yes
Unable to identify the concern at this time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to DC9.
DC9 CHECK THE VPWR TO THE MAF SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
MAF/IAT Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 6
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to DC10.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DC10 CHECK THE PWRGND CIRCUIT TO THE MAF SENSOR
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Vehicle
Battery
( - ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Positive
terminal
PWRGND - Pin
5
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DC11.
DC11 CHECK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN THE CIRCUITS IN THE MAF HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
MAF/IAT Sensor connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MAF/IAT ( - ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
PWRGND - Pin
MAF - Pin 3
5
MAF RTN - Pin
MAF - Pin 3
4
MAF - Pin 3
SIGRTN - Pin 2
MAF - Pin 3
IAT - Pin 1
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DC12.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DC12 CHECK THE MAF RTN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
MAF RTN
( - ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
MAF RTN - Pin
4
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DC13.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DC13 CHECK THE MAF RTN CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO PWRGND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
MAF RTN - Pin
4
( - ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
PWRGND - Pin
5
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DC14.
No
REPAIR the short circuit to GND. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DC14 CHECK THE MAF CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO PWRGND IN THE PCM
PCM connector connected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MAF/IAT ( - ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
PWRGND - Pin
MAF - Pin 3
5
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DC15.
No
GO to DC31.
DC15 CHECK THE MAF CIRCUIT VOLTAGE CYCLING INTEGRITY
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAF PID.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A
MAF/IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
MAF RTN - Pin
4
MAF - Pin 3
Point B
MAF/IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
PWRGND - Pin
5
VPWR - Pin 6
Record the PID reading while both jumpers are installed.
Remove the VPWR jumper while observing the MAF PID.
Does the MAF PID change from greater than 4.50 volts to less than 0.26 volt when the VPWR
jumper is removed?
Yes
INSTALL a new MAF/IAT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES . RESET the
GO to DC16.
keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
No
DC16 CHECK THE MAF CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Remove the jumper wire(s).
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
MAF
( - ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
MAF - Pin 3
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DC17.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DC17 CHECK THE PWRGND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
( - ) Vehicle
Connector,
Battery
Harness Side
PWRGND - Pin Negative
5
terminal
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DC18.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DC18 CHECK THE MAF RTN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
MAF RTN
( - ) MAF/IAT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
MAF RTN - Pin
4
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DC31.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DC19 DTC P1100: CHECK THE MAF CIRCUIT FOR INTERMITTENT VOLTAGE TO THE PCM
Check for broken/loose air outlet tube clamps (throttle body and air cleaner assembly ends), cracks/holes
in the air outlet tube, and worn gaskets between the MAF sensor and the air cleaner assembly. Verify the
MAF sensor is connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAF PID.
If idle is not stable, refer to NO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) PRESENT SYMPTOM
CHART INDEX .
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Run the engine up to 1,500 RPM for 5 seconds, then bring it back to idle.
Lightly tap on the MAF sensor and wiggle the harness connector to simulate road shock.
Does the MAF PID go below 0.23 volt or above 4.6 volts?
Yes
INSPECT the MAF/IAT sensor connector. If OK,
INSTALL a new MAF/IAT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES . RESET the GO to DC20.
keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
No
DC20 CHECK THE MAF CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT OPEN OR SHORTS
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAF PID.
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the sensor to the PCM.
Does the MAF PID go below 0.23 volt or above 4.6 volts?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. RESET the keep alive
memory (KAM). REFER toRESETTING THE
KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM) .
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DC21 DTC P0103: CHECK THE MAF SENSOR SCREEN FOR CONTAMINATION
NOTE:
DTC P0103 can be generated by foreign material blocking the MAF sensor
screen, causing an air flow restriction.
Check the MAF sensor screen for contamination or blockage.
Check the air cleaner element and air tubes for proper installation and sealing.
Are any concerns present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DC22.
DC22 DTC P0103: CHECK THE MAF SENSOR SIGNAL HIGH INPUT TO THE PCM
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAF PID.
Is the voltage greater than 2.44 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to DC23.
No
GO to DC25.
DC23 CHECK THE MAF SENSOR SIGNAL SENT TO THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
MAF/IAT Sensor connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A
Point B
MAF/IAT
MAF/IAT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAF RTN - Pin PWRGND - Pin
4
5
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAF PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.1 V?
Yes
CHECK the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector
for damage, corrosion, and water ingress. If OK,
INSTALL a new MAF/IAT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GO to DC24.
GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES . RESET the
keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
No
DC24 CHECK THE MAF CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
MAF
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to DC26.
No
REPAIR the short circuit to PWR. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DC25 CHECK THE MAF SIGNAL SENT TO THE PCM
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
Monitor the MAF signal voltage while increasing the engine RPM from idle to approximately 2,500
RPM, and then back to idle.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAF PID.
Is the voltage between 0.23 - 4.6 V?
Yes
This is an intermittent concern.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to DC23.
DC26 VERIFY THE IDLE CONCERN
PCM connector connected.
MAF/IAT Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Is an idle concern present?
Yes
DISREGARD DTC P0103 at this time. The concern
is elsewhere. RETURN toNO DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) PRESENT
GO to DC31.
SYMPTOM CHART INDEX to diagnose unique
idle concerns.
No
DC27 SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS: CHECK THE CONDITIONS RELATED TO THE MAF SENSOR
Check the air inlet system (air cleaner, housing, duct work) for obstructions or blockage.
Check for broken/loose air outlet tube clamps (throttle body and air cleaner assembly ends), cracks/holes
in the air outlet tube, and worn gaskets between the MAF sensor and the air cleaner assembly. Verify the
MAF sensor is connected.
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary. RESET the keep alive
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
memory (KAM). REFER toRESETTING THE
KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM) .
GO to DC28.
DC28 DTCS P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P2195, P2196, P2197 OR P2198: CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE
MAF SENSOR
NOTE:
A MAF PID value of less than 0.6 volt may indicate an incorrectly installed air
cleaner or a leak in the air inlet system.
Key ON, engine running.
Allow the engine to stabilize at the correct operating temperature.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAF PID.
Check that the MAF PID at idle and NEUTRAL is not greater than 30% of the normal MAF listed in the
REFERENCE VALUES article, Reference Values or not greater than 1.3 volts.
Is the PID value within the expected range?
Yes
GO to DC30.
No
GO to DC29.
DC29 CHECK TO ISOLATE THE MAF SENSOR FROM A LEAN DRIVEABILITY OCCURRENCE
NOTE:
Due to increasingly stringent emission/OBD requirements, a fuel system DTC
on some vehicles can be generated without a noticeable driveability concern
with or without the MAF sensor disconnected. Under these conditions, if the
MAF PID indicates a MAF sensor concern, install a new MAF sensor. Refer to
the ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
Key in OFF position.
MAF/IAT Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine running.
Drive the vehicle on the road.
Is the lean driveability symptom (lack of power, spark knock/detonation, buck/jerk or
hesitation/surge on acceleration) gone?
Yes
INSTALL a new MAF/IAT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES . RESET the
GO to DC30.
keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
No
DC30 VERIFY THE DTC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are any of the following DTCs present:
P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P2195, P2196, P2197, or P2198?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
The concern is elsewhere.
RETURN toNO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODES (DTCS) PRESENT SYMPTOM
CHART INDEX to diagnose performance while
driving concerns.
DC31 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DD: FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR
WARNING: Vehicle fuel systems are pressurized even when the engine is not
running. To avoid fire or personal injury, disable the fuel delivery system
and relieve fuel system pressure before removing any fuel system
component. Refer to the fuel system information at the beginning of
pinpoint HC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE:
With the engine running, the FRP PID value may be 48-70 kPa (7-10 psi) higher
than a fuel pressure reading taken with a mechanical gauge.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
fuel rail pressure temperature (FRPT) sensor (9G756)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
harness circuits: FRP and FRT
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
FRPT SENSOR VOLTAGE AND PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage
Pressure (kPa)
4.5
482
3.9
413
3.4
344
2.8
275
2.2
207
1.6
138
1.1
69
0.5
0
Pressure (psi)
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
FRPT SENSOR TEMPERATURE, VOLTAGE, AND RESISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature
Sensor
°C
°F
Volts
K Ohms
100
212
0.47
2.073
95
203
0.54
2.405
90
194
0.61
2.800
85
185
0.70
3.273
80
176
0.80
3.840
75
167
0.92
4.524
70
158
1.06
5.351
65
149
1.21
6.356
60
140
1.38
7.584
55
131
1.56
9.091
50
122
1.77
10.949
45
113
1.99
13.252
40
104
2.23
16.123
35
95
2.48
19.720
30
86
2.74
24.253
25
77
3.00
30.000
20
68
3.26
37.332
15
59
3.50
46.745
10
50
3.73
58.911
5
41
3.95
74.745
0
32
4.13
95.501
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 33: Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
3
1
4
2
Circuit
FRT (Fuel Rail Temperature)
FRP (Fuel Rail Pressure)
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
VREF (Reference Voltage)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
F-150,
Mark LT
All other vehicles
Connector
150 (50-50-50) Pin E40
E28
E41
E37
190 Pin
E57
E19
E58
E32
170 Pin
E57
E19
E58
E32
Pin
Circuit
VREF
FRT
SIGRTN
FRP
VREF
FRT
SIGRTN
FRP
VREF
FRT
SIGRTN
FRP
DD1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)
Are DTCs P0180, P0181, P0182, P0183, P0190, P0191, P0192 or P0193 present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For DTC P0180, GO to DD24.
For DTC P0181, GO to DD26.
For continuous memory DTCs P0182 or P0183, GO
to DD2.
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0182 or P0183, GO
to DD17.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
For continuous memory DTC P0190, GO to DD3. CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For DTC P0191, GO to DD11.
For continuous memory DTCs P0192 or P0193, GO
to DD16.
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0192 or P0193, GO
to DD3.
DD2 CHECK THE FRPT AND PCM CONNECTORS FOR DAMAGE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FRT PID.
While observing the PID, carry out the following:
Tap on the sensor to simulate road shock
Wiggle the sensor connector
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the sensor to the
PCM
Check the FRPT and PCM connectors for damage and corrosion.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
No
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DD3 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P0190, KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0192 AND P0193: CHECK THE FRPT
SENSOR FOR FUEL LEAKS
NOTE:
Repair any fuel pump DTCs prior to this test.
Key ON, engine running.
Idle the engine for 2 minutes.
Inspect the FRPT vacuum hose between the intake manifold and the FRPT sensor for air leaks and correct
connection.
Key in OFF position.
Remove the vacuum hose from the FRPT.
Inspect the FRPT and vacuum hose for traces of fuel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is any fuel present?
Yes
INSTALL a new FRPT sensor. REFER to the fuel
system WARNING information at the beginning of
Pinpoint Test HC. refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
GO to DD4.
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
DD4 CHECK THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Connect the vacuum hose to the FRPT.
FRPT Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FRPT
( - ) FRPT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF - Pin 2 SIGRTN - Pin 4
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
For DTC P0190, GO to DD12.
For DTC P0192, GO to DD5.
For DTC P0193, GO to DD7.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DD5 INDUCE A HIGH VOLTAGE ON THE FRPT CIRCUIT
Key in OFF position.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A FRPT Point B FRPT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF - Pin 2 FRP - Pin 1
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FRP PID.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage greater than 4.5 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new FRPT sensor. REFER to the fuel
system WARNING information at the beginning of
Pinpoint Test HC. refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
GO to DD6.
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
DD6 CHECK THE FRP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO FRT, SIGRTN, AND GND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Remove the jumper wire(s).
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FRP
SIGRTN
FRP
FRT
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FRP
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DD28.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DD7 CHECK THE FRP CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
FRP
( - ) FRPT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
FRP - Pin 1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DD8.
DD8 CHECK THE FRP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF AND FRT IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FRP
VREF
FRP
FRT
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DD9.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DD9 CHECK THE FRP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FRPT
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FRP - Pin 1
Ground
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DD10.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DD10 INDUCE A LOW VOLTAGE ON THE FRPT CIRCUIT
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A FRPT Point B FRPT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FRP - Pin 1
SIGRTN - Pin 4
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FRP PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.01 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new FRPT sensor. REFER to the fuel
system WARNING information at the beginning of
Pinpoint Test HC. refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
GO to DD28.
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
DD11 DTC P0191: CHECK FOR FUEL PUMP DTCS
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P1233, P1234, P1235, P1236, P1237 or P1238 present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to DD12.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
DD12 INSPECT ALL THE VACUUM HOSES CONNECTED TO THE INTAKE MANIFOLD FOR LEAKS
Key in OFF position.
FRPT Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Allow the engine idle to stabilize.
Inspect all the vacuum hoses connected to the intake manifold for leaks.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are any vacuum hose concerns present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DD13.
DD13 CHECK THE FRPT CONNECTOR FOR DAMAGE OR CORROSION
Key in OFF position.
FRPT Sensor connector disconnected.
Inspect the sensor, wiring, and connector for damage, corrosion, or water intrusion.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DD14.
DD14 CHECK THE FRP PID
NOTE:
The fuel pressure is likely to increase after the fuel pressure is relieved with the
system closed. The rate and amount of the fuel pressure increase is dependent
upon the ambient air and fuel temperatures.
NOTE:
Prepare to record the FRP PID value within 5 seconds after the engine is shut
off and also after the fuel pressure is relieved.
FRPT Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Allow the engine idle to stabilize.
Access the PCM and monitor the FRP PID.
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Record the FRP PID value within 5 seconds of the key off.
Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION - GASOLINE
AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for the Fuel System Pressure Release procedure.
Disable the fuel pump.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Record the FRP PID value within 5 seconds of carrying out the fuel system pressure release procedure.
Is the difference between the recorded FRP PID values greater than 34 kPa (5 psi)?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
GO to DD15.
DD15 COMPARE THE FRP PID TO THE MECHANICAL GAUGE
NOTE:
Most mechanical gauges are referenced to atmospheric pressure. The FRPT
sensor is referenced to manifold pressure. In order to make a valid comparison,
the engine must be off.
NOTE:
The vehicle may exhibit a long crank until the fuel system is pressurized.
Key in OFF position.
Connect a mechanical fuel pressure gauge.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Monitor the mechanical gauge.
Access the PCM and monitor the FRP PID.
Compare the FRP PID value to the mechanical gauge.
Key in OFF position.
Pressurize the fuel system. Refer to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION - GASOLINE
AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for the Fuel System Pressure Release procedure to pressurize the fuel
system.
Key ON, engine running.
Allow the fuel pressure to stabilize.
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Compare the FRP PID value to the mechanical gauge.
Are the FRP PID values within 34 kPa (5 psi) of the mechanical gauge readings?
Yes
GO to DD28.
No
INSTALL a new FRPT sensor. REFER to the fuel
system WARNING information at the beginning of
Pinpoint Test HC. refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DD16 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0192 AND P0193: CHECK THE FRPT CIRCUIT FOR AN
INTERMITTENT CONCERN
NOTE:
Repair any fuel pump DTCs prior to this test.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Access the PCM and monitor the FRP PID.
While observing the PID, carry out the following:
Tap on the sensor to simulate road shock
Wiggle the sensor connector
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the sensor to the
PCM
Check the FRPT connector for damage or corrosion.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DD17 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0182 OR P0183: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE FRPT SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
FRPT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FRPT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
FRT - Pin 3
( - ) FRPT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 4
Is the resistance between 2K - 96K ohms?
Yes
GO to DD18.
No
INSTALL a new FRPT sensor. REFER to the fuel
system WARNING information at the beginning of
Pinpoint Test HC. refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DD18 CHECK THE FRPT FOR INTERNAL SHORTS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FRPT
Sensor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
Component
Side
FRT - Pin 3
Ground
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FRPT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
FRT - Pin 3
FRT - Pin 3
(-)
( - ) FRPT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
FRP - Pin 1
VREF - Pin 2
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
For DTC P0182, GO to DD19.
For DTC P0183, GO to DD21.
No
INSTALL a new FRPT sensor. REFER to the fuel
system WARNING information at the beginning of
Pinpoint Test HC. refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DD19 CHECK THE FRT CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO SIGRTN OR GND IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FRT
SIGRTN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FRT
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to DD20.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DD20 FRPT SENSOR: INDUCE A HIGH VOLTAGE ON THE FRT CIRCUIT
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FRT PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.5 V?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to DD28.
DD21 CHECK THE FRT AND SIG RTN CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
FRT
SIGRTN
( - ) FRPT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
FRT - Pin 3
SIGRTN - Pin 4
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DD22.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DD22 CHECK THE FRT SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO VREF AND FRP
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FRT
VREF
FRT
FRP
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 74
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DD23.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DD23 FOR THE FRPT SENSOR INDUCE A LOW VOLTAGE ON THE FRT CIRCUIT
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A FRPT Point B FRPT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FRT - Pin 3
SIGRTN - Pin 4
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FRT PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 V?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to DD28.
DD24 DTC P0180: CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF DTC P0182 OR P0183
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P0182 or P0183 present?
Yes
GO to DD17.
No
GO to DD25.
DD25 CHECK THE FRT CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN
PCM connector connected.
Access the PCM and monitor the FRT PID.
Carry out a thorough wiggle test on the FRPT sensor harness.
Is the FRT signal stable?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 75
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DD27.
DD26 KOEO AND KOER DTC P0181: CHECK THE FRT PID
NOTE:
Allow vehicle temperatures to stabilize prior to temperature sensor tests.
Key ON, engine OFF.
The normal test range is 0°C to 100°C (32°F to 212°F).
Access the PCM and monitor the FRT PID.
Is the voltage between 0.4 - 4.5 V?
Yes
GO to DD27.
No
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DD27 COMPARE THE PIDS AFTER STABILIZING THE VEHICLE TEMPERATURE
Access the PCM and monitor the FRT, CHT and ECT PIDs.
Are the temperature PIDs nearly equal in value?
Yes
The concern is not present at this time.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DD28 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 76
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PINPOINT TEST DF: VEHICLE SPEED CIRCUIT (VSC) CHECK
WARNING: Strict observance of posted speed limits and driving conditions is
mandatory when proceeding through the following drive cycles.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
harness circuits: VSC
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 34: Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Module Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
Circuit
21
VSC (Vehicle Speed Circuit)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
B29
Circuit
VSC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 77
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DF1 DTCS P0500, P0503, P1500, P1501 AND P1502: CHECK THE VEHICLE SPEED CIRCUIT FOR
INTERMITTENT CONCERNS
NOTE:
The PCM detected an error in the vehicle speed information received from the
ABS control module. This test step checks for the recurrence of this vehicle
speed error.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Clear the DTCs.
Gradually increase the vehicle speed to 80 km/h (50 mph).
Coast to an idle and stop the vehicle.
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs.
Are DTCs P0500, P0503, P1500, P1501 or P1502 present?
Yes
The vehicle speed input is incorrect.
GO to DF2.
No
The vehicle speed input is correct. The concern that
produced the original DTC may be intermittent.
GO to DF5.
DF2 CHECK THE VSC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Module connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VSC - Pin B29 Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to DF3.
No
GO to DF6.
DF3 CHECK FOR AN OPEN VSC BETWEEN THE PCM AND THE ABS CONTROL MODULE
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 78
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( - ) Anti-lock
Brake System
(ABS) Module
Connector,
Harness Side
VSC - Pin B29 VSC - Pin 21
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DF4.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DF7.
DF4 CHECK THE VSC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VSC - Pin B29 Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
REFER to the VEHICLE DYNAMIC SYSTEMS
-- E-SERIES to continue diagnosis of the ABS
control module, speed sensors and wheel speed
GO to DF6.
sensor harness circuits. If these components are
working properly,
GO to DF8.
No
DF5 VISUAL INSPECTION
NOTE:
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for harness, module, and connector
locations.
Key in OFF position.
Visually inspect the VSC circuit harness and connectors at the PCM, ABS, and other VSC user modules
for damage, loose connections, loose grounds, or incorrect routing.
Does the visual inspection reveal a concern?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 79
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
REPAIR as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT time. REFER to the VEHICLE DYNAMIC
the self-test.
SYSTEMS -- E-SERIES to continue diagnosis of
GO to DF7.
the ABS control module, speed sensors and wheel
speed sensor harness circuits.
DF6 VERIFY IF THE VSC IS SHORTED IN THE HARNESS OR ANOTHER MODULE
Key in OFF position.
Determine which, if any, modules are connected to the VSC. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article. If no
other modules are connected to the VSC, go to the YES Action To Take.
One at a time, disconnect the modules associated with the VSC. After disconnecting each module, test
again for a short circuit. (Refer to test step that sent you here). Repeat until each associated module is
disconnected or the short circuit is eliminated.
Does the short circuit remain after all associated modules are disconnected?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DF7.
No
REFER to the Workshop article for further
diagnosis of the appropriate module.
GO to DF7.
DF7 VSC REPAIR VERIFICATION DRIVE CYCLE
NOTE:
Warm the engine to a normal operating temperature before continuing.
NOTE:
Carry out the VSC drive cycle at least 3 times as described below.
Automatic Transmission Drive Cycle:
Place the transmission range selector lever in DRIVE range
Accelerate heavily to 56 km/h (35 mph)
Coast down to an idle and stop the vehicle
Cycle the key OFF and ON
Manual Transmission Drive Cycle:
Accelerate moderately to 64 km/h (40 mph), while shifting from first to second gear
Coast down to an idle and stop the vehicle
Cycle the key OFF and ON
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs.
Are DTCs P0500, P0503, P1500, P1501 or P1502 present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 80
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
REFER to the VEHICLE DYNAMIC SYSTEMS
-- E-SERIES to continue diagnosis of the ABS
control module, speed sensors and wheel speed
The repair has been verified.
sensor harness circuits. If these components are
working properly,
GO to DF8.
DF8 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DG: KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
knock sensors KS1, KS2 (12A699)
harness circuits: KS1+, KS1-, KS2+, and KS2powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:49 AM
Page 81
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 35: Knock Sensor 1 (KS1) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 36: Knock Sensor 1 (KS1) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 82
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 37: Knock Sensor 1 (KS1) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 38: Knock Sensor 1 (KS1) Connector - D
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 83
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 39: Knock Sensor 1 (KS1) Connector - E
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 40: Knock Sensor 1 (KS1) Connector - F
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Edge,
F-Super Duty 6.8L,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner,
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
Connector
A
B
Pin
Circuit
3
4
1
2
KS2+
KS2KS1+
KS1-
1
2
KS1+
KS1-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 84
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Expedition,
Navigator
F-150 4.2L,
Ranger 3.0L
F-150 5.4L,
F-Super Duty 5.4L,
Mark LT
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L,
Ranger 2.3L
MKZ
C
1
2
1
2
2
1
KS1+
KS1KS1+
KS1KS1+
KS1-
B
2
1
KS1+
KS1-
A
1
2
1
2
3
4
2
1
KS1+
KS1KS1+
KS1KS1+
KS1KS1+
KS1-
D
C
Mountaineer 4.6L
E
Mustang 4.6L
E
All other vehicles
F
Fig. 41: Knock Sensor 2 (KS2) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 85
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 42: Knock Sensor 2 (KS2) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 43: Knock Sensor 2 (KS2) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Expedition,
F-Super Duty 5.4L,
Navigator
F-150,
Mark LT
Mustang
Connector
A
All other vehicles
A
B
C
Pin
Circuit
1
2
KS2+
KS2-
2
1
1
2
3
4
KS2+
KS2KS2+
KS2KS2+
KS2-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 86
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
Expedition,
MKZ,
Navigator
F-150 4.6L,
F-150 4.2L
F-150 5.4L,
Mark LT
F-Super Duty,
Mustang 4.6L
Focus
Fusion,
Milan
All other vehicles
Connector
190 Pin
Pin
E31
E30
E49
E48
B29, B64
B51
150 (50-50-50) Pin E32
E20
E40
B35
140 Pin
E31
E30
E49
E48
E57
B51
190 Pin
E49
E48
E57
B51
190 Pin
E31
E30
E49
E48
E57
B51
170 Pin
E31
E30
E49
E48
E57
B35
190 Pin
E46
E47
E63
B67
140 Pin
E49
E48
E57
B51
170 Pin
E49
E48
E57
Circuit
KS2+
KS2KS1+
KS1VREF
VPWR
KS1+
KS1VREF
VPWR
KS2+
KS2KS1+
KS1VREF
VPWR
KS1+
KS1VREF
VPWR
KS2+
KS2KS1+
KS1VREF
VPWR
KS2+
KS2KS1+
KS1VREF
VPWR
KS1+
KS1VREF
VPWR
KS1+
KS1VREF
VPWR
KS1+
KS1VREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 87
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
B35
VPWR
DG1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)
Are DTCs P0325, P0326, P0330, or P0331 present?
Yes
For KOER and continuous memory DTCs P0325,
P0326, P0330 and P0331, GO to DG2.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DG2 KOER AND CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0325, P0326, P0330 AND P0331: CHECK THE INTERNAL
RESISTANCE OF THE KS
KS connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) KS
Connector,
Component
Side
Suspect KS+
( - ) KS
Connector,
Component
Side
Suspect KS-
Is the resistance between 4.39M - 5.35M ohms?
Yes
GO to DG3.
No
INSTALL a new KS.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DG3 CHECK THE KS+ CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) KS
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
Suspect KS+
Suspect KS+
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 88
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to DG4.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DG4 CHECK THE KS- CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) KS
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
Suspect KSSuspect KS-
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DG5.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DG5 CHECK THE KS+ CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) KS
Connector,
Harness Side
Suspect KS+
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DG6.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DG6 CHECK THE KS- CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) KS
Connector,
Harness Side
Suspect KS-
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 89
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DG7.
DG7 CHECK THE KS+ CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) KS
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
Suspect KS+
VPWR
Suspect KS+
VREF
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DG8.
DG8 CHECK THE KS- CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) KS
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
Suspect KSVREF
Suspect KSVPWR
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DG9.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DG9 CHECK THE KS+ CIRCUIT FOR INTERMITTENT CONCERNS
NOTE:
Carefully wiggle all accessible wiring and connectors associated with the KS
circuit.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 90
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) KS
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
Suspect KS+
Suspect KS+
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DG10.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DG10 CHECK THE KS- CIRCUIT FOR INTERMITTENT CONCERNS
NOTE:
Carefully wiggle all accessible wiring and connectors associated with the KS
circuit.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) KS
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
Suspect KSSuspect KS-
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DG11.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DG11 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 91
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DH: THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
TP sensor (9B989)
binding or sticking throttle linkage
harness circuits: TP, SIGRTN, VREF, VPWR, and PWRGND
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 44: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 92
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 45: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner 2.3L,
Ranger 2.3L
Connector
A
All other vehicles
B
Pin
Circuit
2
1
3
2
3
1
TP
SIGRTN
VREF
TP
SIGRTN
VREF
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
Connector
150 (50-50-50) Pin
Ranger
170 Pin
Pin
E41
B47, B48, B49, B50
B40, E40
B35, B36
E19
E58
B47, B48, B49, B50
B40, E57
B35, B36
E61
Circuit
SIGRTN
PWRGND
VREF
VPWR
TP
SIGRTN
PWRGND
VREF
VPWR
TP
DH1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0068, P0121, P0122, P0123, P1120, or P1124 present?
Yes
No
For DTC P0068, GO to DH18.
For DTC P0121, GO to DH24.
For KOEO and KOER DTC P0122, GO to DH14.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
For continuous memory DTC P0122, GO to DH13.
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For DTC P0123, GO to DH9.
For DTC P1120, GO to DH4.
For DTC P1124, GO to DH2.
DH2 KOEO AND KOER DTC P1124: CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTCS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Check for KOEO and KOER DTCs.
Is DTC P0405 present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 93
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to DH3.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DH3 CHECK FOR A STUCK THROTTLE PLATE OR LINKAGE
Key in OFF position.
Visually inspect the throttle linkage and throttle plate for binding or sticking.
Verify the throttle plate and linkage is at closed throttle position.
Does the throttle move freely and return to a closed throttle position?
Yes
The throttle plate and linkage are OK.
GO to DH9.
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DH4 DTC P1120: CHECK THE TP CIRCUIT FOR FRAYED WIRES OR CORROSION ON THE CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
Carry out a visual inspection of the pins on the harness connector at the TP sensor for corrosion.
Carry out a visual inspection of the harness wires between the TP sensor and the PCM for insulation
fraying and corrosion.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DH5.
DH5 CHECK FOR A STUCK TP SENSOR
Key ON, engine OFF.
Slowly move the throttle from the closed throttle position to the wide open throttle position and observe
the TP PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.5 V?
Yes
GO to DH22.
No
GO to DH6.
DH6 CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS AT THE TP SENSOR HARNESS
CONNECTOR
TP Sensor connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 94
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) TP Sensor ( - ) TP Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to DH7.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DH7 CHECK THE TP CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) TP Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
TP
TP
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DH8.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DH8 CHECK THE TP SENSOR VOLTAGE TO THE PCM
PCM connector connected.
TP Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Idle the engine for 2 minutes.
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
Slowly move the throttle from the closed throttle position to the wide open throttle position and observe
the TP PID.
Is the voltage between 0.17 - 0.49 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 95
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
INSTALL a new TP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
If DTC P1120 is still present,
GO to DH22.
DH9 DTC P0123 OR DTC P1124: INDUCE THE OPPOSITE TP SENSOR VOLTAGE
TP Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.17 V?
Yes
GO to DH10.
No
GO to DH11.
DH10 CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS AT THE TP SENSOR VEHICLE
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) TP Sensor ( - ) TP Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new TP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DH11 CHECK THE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF AND VPWR IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 96
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
VPWR
VREF
TP
TP
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DH12.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DH12 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE TP CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
TP
VREF
TP
Observe the digital multimeter (DMM) for an indication of a concern while shaking, wiggling, and
bending the TP circuit between the TP sensor and the PCM.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DH26.
DH13 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P0122: CHECK THE TP CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN
Key ON, engine OFF.
Clear the PCM DTCs.
Key ON, engine running.
Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs.
Is DTC P0122 present?
Yes
GO to DH14.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DH14 KOEO AND KOER DTC P0122: CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS
AT THE TP SENSOR VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
Key in OFF position.
TP Sensor connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 97
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) TP Sensor ( - ) TP Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
GO to DH15.
DH15 CHECK THE TP CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) TP Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
TP
TP
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DH16.
DH16 CHECK THE TP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO PWRGND OR SIGRTN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
TP
PWRGND
TP
SIGRTN
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 98
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DH17.
DH17 INDUCE THE OPPOSITE TP SENSOR VOLTAGE
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A TP
Point B TP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
TP
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.65 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new TP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DH26.
DH18 DTC P0068: CHECK THE RATIONALITY BETWEEN THE TP AND MAF SENSORS
Attempt to start the engine.
Does the engine start?
Yes
GO to DH19.
No
CHECK for major leaks, cracks and openings
between the MAF sensor and the throttle body.
REPAIR as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
If OK,
refer to PINPOINT TEST A.
DH19 CHECK THE TP SENSOR FOR MECHANICAL OPERATION
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
Slowly move the throttle from the closed throttle position to the wide open throttle position and observe
the TP PID.
Is the voltage between 0.49 - 4.65 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 99
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
INSTALL a new TP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DH20.
DH20 CHECK THE TP SENSOR SIGNAL HIGH VERSUS THE ENGINE LOAD WHILE DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the LOAD PID.
Drive the vehicle, exercising the throttle and TP sensor.
Is the TP PID greater than 2.44 volts and the LOAD PID less than 30%?
Yes
LISTEN for air noise around the MAF sensor and
throttle body while the engine is running. REPAIR
as necessary. If OK, INSTALL a new TP sensor.
GO to DH21.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
DH21 CHECK THE TP SENSOR SIGNAL LOW VERSUS THE ENGINE LOAD WHILE DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the LOAD PID.
Drive the vehicle while exercising the throttle and TP sensor near higher gears (preferably overdrive).
Is the TP PID less than 0.24 volt and the LOAD PID greater than 55%?
Yes
If continuous memory DTC P0068 is present,
INSTALL a new MAF sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DH22 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT TP SIGNAL
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
Increase the engine speed to 1,500 RPM for 10 seconds.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 100
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Lightly tap on the TP sensor and wiggle the harness connector to simulate road shock.
Is the voltage between 0.49 V - 4.65 V?
Yes
GO to DH23.
No
INSPECT the TP sensor connector. REPAIR as
necessary.
If OK, INSTALL a new TP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DH23 CHECK THE TP SENSOR HARNESS FOR INTERMITTENT OPENS OR SHORTS
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
Grasp the vehicle harness closest to the TP sensor connector.
Shake and bend a small section of the harness all the way to the bulkhead.
Wiggle, shake, and bend the harness from the bulkhead to the PCM.
Is the voltage between 0.49 V - 4.65 V?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DH24 DTC P0121: CHECK FOR OBSTRUCTION OR STICKING CONCERNS
NOTE:
Do not attempt to clean the throttle bore and plate area. Cleaning damages the
throttle body assembly.
NOTE:
Conditions of sticking or obstruction can either be within the cables or throttle
body assembly.
Disconnect the accelerator cable and speed control cable from the throttle body linkage.
Rotate the throttle body linkage.
Does the throttle body rotate freely without a sticking, binding, or grabbing condition?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new throttle body assembly. REFER to
INSPECT the cable(s). REPAIR as necessary.
the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
REPEAT the self-test. If DTC P0121 is still present, INFORMATION - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 101
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to DH25.
E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DH25 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
While slowly pressing the accelerator from the closed throttle position to the wide open throttle position,
observe the TP PID.
Does the TP PID display a smooth reading during accelerator movement?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new TP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DH26 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DJ: AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
ACET sensor (19C734)
harness circuits: ACET and SIGRTN
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 102
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
°C
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
-20
°F
212
194
176
158
140
122
104
86
68
50
32
14
-4
Voltage
0.47
0.61
0.80
1.05
1.37
1.77
2.23
2.74
3.26
3.73
4.14
4.45
4.66
Resistance (K ohms)
2.08
2.8
3.84
5.34
7.55
10.93
16.11
24.25
37.34
58.99
95.85
160.31
276.96
These values can vary by 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values calculated for VREF are
equal to 5 volts.
Fig. 46: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (12A650)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
1
2
Circuit
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
ACET (Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Connector
140 Pin
Pin
B33, E57
B58, E58
B53
Circuit
VREF
SIGRTN
ACET
DJ1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0537, P0538, P1436, or P1437 present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 103
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0538 or P1437, GO
to DJ2.
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0537 or P1436, GO For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
to DJ6.
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For continuous memory DTCs P0537, P0538,
P1436 or P1437, GO to DJ9.
DJ2 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0538 OR P1437: SIMULATE AN OPPOSITE SIGNAL TO THE PCM
ACET Sensor connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A ACET Point B ACET
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ACET - Pin 2 SIGRTN - Pin 1
Check for self-test DTCs.
Are DTCs P0537 or P1436 present?
Yes
INSTALL a new ACET sensor. CLEAR the DTCs.
GO to DJ3.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
DJ3 CHECK THE ACET AND SIGRTN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Remove the jumper wire(s).
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ACET
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
ACET - Pin 2 ACET - Pin B53
SIGRTN - Pin
SIGRTN - Pin 1
B58, E58
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 104
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to DJ4.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DJ4 CHECK THE ACET CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ACET
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
ACET - Pin 2 Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to DJ5.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
DJ5 CHECK THE ACET CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ACET - Pin B53 VREF - Pin E57
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DJ10.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DJ6 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0537 OR P1436: SIMULATE AN OPPOSITE SIGNAL TO THE PCM
ACET Sensor connector disconnected.
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Are DTCs P0538 or P1437 present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 105
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
INSTALL a new ACET sensor. CLEAR the DTCs.
GO to DJ7.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
DJ7 CHECK THE ACET CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO SIGRTN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ACET
( - ) ACET
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ACET - Pin 2 SIGRTN - Pin 1
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DJ8.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DJ8 CHECK THE ACET CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ACET
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
ACET - Pin 2 Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DJ10.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DJ9 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0537, P0538, P1436 OR P1437: CHECK THE ACET AND SIGRTN CIRCUIT
FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN
NOTE:
The voltage should be between 4.5 and 5.5 volts. The voltage reading changes
suddenly when a concern is detected. For P0537/P1436, a sudden change could
indicate a short to ground. For P0538/P1436, a sudden change could indicate an
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 106
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
open ACET or SIGRTN circuit.
ACET Sensor connector disconnected.
Inspect the connectors for signs of damage, water intrusion, or corrosion.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ACET
( - ) ACET
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ACET - Pin 2 SIGRTN - Pin 1
Key ON, engine OFF.
While monitoring the voltage reading on the digital multimeter (DMM), wiggle, shake, and bend small
sections of the wiring harness while working from the sensor to the PCM.
Key in OFF position.
Is there any change in the voltage reading, or is a concern found?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DJ10 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins.
corrosion.
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new PCM.
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
REFER toFLASH ELECTRICALLY
ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY concern may have been caused by a loose or
MEMORY (EEPROM) , Programming the VID corroded connector.
Block for a Replacement PCM.
PINPOINT TEST DK: ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 107
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
After clearing an APP sensor diagnostic trouble code (DTC) to verify a repair or
an intermittent concern, apply the accelerator pedal before carrying out the selftest. Take 10 seconds to carry out a full sweep of the accelerator pedal from
fully released to fully applied and back to fully released.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor (9F836)
harness circuits: ETCRTN, SIGRTN, ETCREF, APP1, APP2, and APP3
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 47: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 48: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 108
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 49: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Focus
Connector
A
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
B
All other vehicles
C
Pin
5
2
3, 4
1, 6
4
5
7
6, 9
10, 8
8
5
2
1, 3
6, 7
Circuit
APP2
APP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
APP3
APP2
APP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
APP3
APP2
APP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
Mustang,
Town Car
E-Series,
F-Super Duty
Connector
170 Pin
170 Pin
Pin
B41, B6, E59
B24, B4, E66
B35, B36
B28
B17
B5
B18, B6, E59
B16, B4, E66
B35, B36
Circuit
ETCRTN
ETCREF
VPWR
APP3
APP2
APP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
VPWR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 109
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Expedition,
Navigator
140 Pin
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac,
Mountaineer
170 Pin
F-150,
Mark LT
190 Pin
Focus
190 Pin
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
140 Pin
All other vehicles
190 Pin
B28
B17
B5
B59, B65, E59
B21, B28, E66
B51, B52, B53
B27
B26
B25
B43, B6, E59
B24, B4, E66
B35, B36
B28
B17
B5
B58, B59, E59
B21, B28, E66
B51, B52, B53
B27
B26
B25
B44, B60, E60
B45, B61, E59
B67, B68
B29
B28
B59, B60, E59
B21, B28, E66
B51, B52
B27
B26
B25
B59, B65, E59
B21, B28, E66
B51, B52, B53
B27
B26
B25
APP3
APP2
APP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
VPWR
APP3
APP2
APP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
VPWR
APP3
APP2
APP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
VPWR
APP3
APP2
APP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
VPWR
APP2
APP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
VPWR
APP3
APP2
APP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
VPWR
APP3
APP2
APP1
DK1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P1575, P2104, P2121, P2122, P2123, P2126, P2127, P2128, P2131, P2132, P2133, or
P2138 present?
Yes
No
For a lack/loss of power, GO to DK3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 110
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For DTC P1575, GO to DK2.
For all others, GO to DK4.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DK2 DTC P1575: REPEAT THE KOEO SELF-TEST
NOTE:
Make sure the accelerator pedal is not applied during the KOEO self-test.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Are any DTCs present other than P1575?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to DK3.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
DK3 CHECK THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL FOR OBSTRUCTION
Key ON, engine OFF.
Press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and release.
Does the pedal move freely to the floor and back?
Yes
GO to DK4.
No
ISOLATE and REPAIR the obstruction.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DK4 CHECK THE APP SENSOR SIGNAL VOLTAGE RANGES FOR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL FULLY
APPLIED AND RELEASED POSITIONS
Access the PCM and monitor the APP1, APP2 and APP3 PIDs.
Press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and release.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL FULLY APPLIED VOLTAGE VALUES
Vehicle
APP1 APP2 APP3
0.73 - 3.03 - 2.59 E-Series
1.28 4.55 3.89
Expedition, 0.79 - 2.75 - 2.26 Navigator
2.09 4.33 3.73
Explorer,
Explorer Sport 0.60 - 3.07 - 2.57 Trac,
1.57 4.50 3.89
Mountaineer
F-150, Mark 0.60 - 3.07 - 2.57 -
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 111
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
LT
1.57 4.50 3.89
0.28 - 3.45 - 2.95 F-Super Duty
0.97 4.71 4.10
3.69 - 1.75 Focus
4.60 2.40
Fusion, Milan, 1.20 - 2.50 - 2.00 MKZ
2.50 3.94 3.33
0.48 - 2.95 - 2.43 All others
1.76 4.62 4.02
ACCELERATOR PEDAL FULLY RELEASED VOLTAGE VALUES
Vehicle APP1 APP2 APP3
0.70 - 0.30 Focus
0.90 0.50
All
3.43 - 1.13 - 0.64 vehicles 4.69 1.88
1.28
Are all APP signals out of range for the pedal fully applied and released positions?
Yes
No
For continuous memory DTCs P2121 and P2126
with P2131, GO to DK24.
For all others, GO to DK5.
GO to DK5.
DK5 CHECK THE VREF VOLTAGE TO APP SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
APP Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) APP
( - ) APP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ETCREF
ETCRTN
Is the voltage between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
No
For E-Series, Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, F-150,
Mark LT, and Mountaineer, GO to DK6.
For F-Super Duty, GO to DK7.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 112
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For Fusion, Milan, and MKZ, GO to DK10.
For Focus with DTC P2122, P2123, or P2138, GO
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
to DK12.
For Focus with DTC P2127 or P2128, GO to DK16.
For all others, GO to DK11.
DK6 E-SERIES, EXPLORER, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, F-150, MARK LT, MOUNTAINEER: CHECK THE APP
SENSOR FOR THE CORRECT RESISTANCE
NOTE:
Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released when taking the resistance
measurements.
Key in OFF position.
APP Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
(+) APP
(-) APP
Sensor
Sensor Minimum Maximum
Connector, Connector, Resistance Resistance
Component Component (ohms)
(ohms)
Side
Side
APP1
ETCREF
550
1,390
APP1
ETCRTN
1,030
2,590
APP1
APP2
2,125
5,335
APP1
APP3
1,930
4,845
APP2
ETCREF
1,785
4,480
APP2
ETCRTN
1,475
3,705
APP2
APP3
2,520
6,330
APP3
ETCREF
1,620
4,070
APP3
ETCRTN
1,135
2,860
ETCREF ETCRTN
780
1,955
ETCREF ETCREF
0
10
ETCRTN ETCRTN
0
10
Are all the resistances within specifications?
Yes
For DTCs P2121, P2122 or P2123 alone or in
combination, GO to DK12.
For DTCs P2126, P2127 or P2128 alone or in
combination, GO to DK16.
For DTCs P2131, P2132 or P2133 alone or in
combination, GO to DK20.
For DTC P2104 alone, GO to DK30.
No
INSTALL a new APP sensor. REFER to the
ACCELERATION CONTROL -- E-SERIES to
INSTALL a new accelerator pedal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 113
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For a lack/loss of power, the concern is elsewhere.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
For all others, GO to DK24.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DK7 F-SUPER DUTY: CHECK THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL CONFIGURATION AND APP SENSOR HOUSING
Check the configuration of the accelerator pedal and determine the color of the APP sensor housing.
Is the vehicle equipped with an adjustable accelerator pedal?
Yes
GO to DK8.
No
For F-Super Duty with a fixed accelerator pedal and
a white APP sensor housing, GO to DK9.
For all others, GO to DK11.
DK8 F-SUPER DUTY WITH ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL: CHECK THE APP SENSOR FOR THE
CORRECT RESISTANCE
NOTE:
Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released when taking the resistance
measurements.
Key in OFF position.
APP Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
(+) APP
(-) APP
Sensor
Sensor Minimum Maximum
Connector, Connector, Resistance Resistance
(ohms)
Component Component (ohms)
Side
Side
APP1
ETCREF
550
1,390
APP1
ETCRTN
1,030
2,590
APP1
APP2
2,125
5,335
APP1
APP3
1,930
4,845
APP2
ETCREF
1,785
4,480
APP2
ETCRTN
1,475
3,705
APP2
APP3
2,520
6,330
APP3
ETCREF
1,620
4,070
APP3
ETCRTN
1,135
2,860
ETCREF ETCRTN
780
1,955
ETCREF ETCREF
0
10
ETCRTN ETCRTN
0
10
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 114
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are all the resistances within specifications?
Yes
For DTCs P2121, P2122 or P2123 alone or in
combination, GO to DK12.
For DTCs P2126, P2127 or P2128 alone or in
combination, GO to DK16.
For DTCs P2131, P2132 or P2133 alone or in
combination, GO to DK20.
For DTC P2104 alone, GO to DK30.
For a lack/loss of power, the concern is elsewhere.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
For all others, GO to DK24.
No
INSTALL a new APP sensor. REFER to the
ACCELERATION CONTROL -- E-SERIES to
INSTALL a new accelerator pedal.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DK9 F-SUPER DUTY WITH FIXED ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND WHITE APP SENSOR HOUSING: CHECK
THE APP SENSOR FOR THE CORRECT RESISTANCE
NOTE:
Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released when taking the resistance
measurements.
Key in OFF position.
APP Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
(+) APP
(-) APP
Sensor
Sensor Minimum Maximum
Connector, Connector, Resistance Resistance
Component Component (ohms)
(ohms)
Side
Side
APP1
ETCREF
1,080
1,865
APP1
ETCRTN
1,535
2,860
APP1
APP2
2,820
5,225
APP1
APP3
2,775
5,205
APP2
ETCREF
1,995
3,700
APP2
ETCRTN
1,625
3,170
APP2
APP3
3,000
5,835
APP3
ETCREF
1,985
3,735
APP3
ETCRTN
1,440
2,870
ETCREF ETCRTN
805
1,500
ETCREF ETCREF
0
10
ETCRTN ETCRTN
0
10
Are all the resistances within specifications?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 115
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
For DTCs P2121, P2122 or P2123 alone or in
combination, GO to DK12.
For DTCs P2126, P2127 or P2128 alone or in
combination, GO to DK16.
For DTCs P2131, P2132 or P2133 alone or in
combination, GO to DK20.
For DTC P2104 alone, GO to DK30.
For a lack/loss of power, the concern is elsewhere.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
For all others, GO to DK24.
No
INSTALL a new APP sensor. REFER to the
ACCELERATION CONTROL -- E-SERIES to
INSTALL a new accelerator pedal.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DK10 FUSION, MILAN, MKZ: CHECK THE APP SENSOR FOR THE CORRECT RESISTANCE
NOTE:
Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released when taking the resistance
measurements.
Key in OFF position.
APP Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
(+) APP
(-) APP
Sensor
Sensor Minimum Maximum
Connector, Connector, Resistance Resistance
Component Component (ohms)
(ohms)
Side
Side
APP1
ETCREF
650
1,340
APP1
ETCRTN
1,210
2,470
APP1
APP2
2,430
4,960
APP1
APP3
2,390
4,880
APP2
ETCREF
2,020
4,120
APP2
ETCRTN
1,650
3,380
APP2
APP3
3,000
6,130
APP3
ETCREF
2,010
4,110
APP3
ETCRTN
1,450
2,970
ETCREF ETCRTN
900
1,840
ETCREF ETCREF
0
10
ETCRTN ETCRTN
0
10
Are all the resistances within specifications?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 116
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For DTCs P2121, P2122 or P2123 alone or in
combination, GO to DK12.
For DTCs P2126, P2127 or P2128 alone or in
combination, GO to DK16.
For DTCs P2131, P2132 or P2133 alone or in
combination, GO to DK20.
For DTC P2104 alone, GO to DK30.
For a lack/loss of power, the concern is elsewhere.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
For all others, GO to DK24.
INSTALL a new APP sensor. REFER to the
ACCELERATION CONTROL -- E-SERIES to
INSTALL a new accelerator pedal.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DK11 ALL OTHERS: CHECK THE APP SENSOR FOR THE CORRECT RESISTANCE
NOTE:
Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released when taking the resistance
measurements.
Key in OFF position.
APP Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
(+) APP
(-) APP
Sensor
Sensor Minimum Maximum
Connector, Connector, Resistance Resistance
Component Component (ohms)
(ohms)
Side
Side
APP1
ETCREF
600
1,370
APP1
ETCRTN
720
1,660
APP1
APP2
1,300
2,960
APP1
APP3
1,250
2,860
APP2
ETCREF
750
1,720
APP2
ETCRTN
660
1,520
APP2
APP3
1,230
2,810
APP3
ETCREF
710
1,640
APP3
ETCRTN
580
1,340
ETCREF ETCRTN
200
470
ETCREF ETCREF
0
10
ETCRTN ETCRTN
0
10
Are all the resistances within specifications?
Yes
No
For DTCs P2121, P2122 or P2123 alone or in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 117
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
combination, GO to DK12.
For DTCs P2126, P2127 or P2128 alone or in
combination, GO to DK16.
For DTCs P2131, P2132 or P2133 alone or in
combination, GO to DK20.
For DTC P2104 alone, GO to DK30.
For a lack/loss of power, the concern is elsewhere.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
For all others, GO to DK24.
INSTALL a new APP sensor. REFER to the
ACCELERATION CONTROL -- E-SERIES to
INSTALL a new accelerator pedal.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DK12 CHECK THE APP1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
APP Sensor connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) APP
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
APP1
APP1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DK13.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DK13 CHECK THE APP1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) APP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
APP1
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 118
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DK14.
DK14 CHECK THE APP1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) APP
( - ) APP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
APP1
ETCRTN
APP1
ETCREF
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DK15.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DK15 CHECK THE APP1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) APP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
APP1
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DK24.
DK16 CHECK THE APP2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
APP Sensor connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 119
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) APP
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
APP2
APP2
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DK17.
DK17 CHECK THE APP2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
APP2
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DK18.
DK18 CHECK THE APP2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) APP
( - ) APP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
APP2
ETCRTN
APP2
ETCREF
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DK19.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 120
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DK19 CHECK THE APP2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
APP2
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DK25.
DK20 CHECK THE APP3 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) APP
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
APP3
APP3
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DK21.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DK21 CHECK THE APP3 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
APP3
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 121
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DK22.
DK22 CHECK THE APP3 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) APP
( - ) APP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
APP3
ETCRTN
APP3
ETCREF
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DK23.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DK23 CHECK THE APP3 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
APP3
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DK26.
DK24 CHECK FOR THE APP1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO SIGNALS IN THE SAME HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 122
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
APP Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) APP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
APP1
APP1
APP1
APP1
( - ) APP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
APP2
APP3
ETCREF
ETCRTN
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DK27.
DK25 CHECK FOR THE APP2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO SIGNALS IN THE SAME HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) APP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
APP2
APP2
APP2
APP2
( - ) APP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
APP1
APP3
ETCREF
ETCRTN
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DK27.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DK26 CHECK FOR THE APP3 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO SIGNALS IN THE SAME HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 123
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) APP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
APP3
APP3
APP3
APP3
( - ) APP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
APP1
APP2
ETCREF
ETCRTN
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DK27.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DK27 CHECK THE APP SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the sensor to the PCM.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) APP
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
APP1
APP1
APP2
APP2
APP3
APP3
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
For Focus, GO to DK28.
For all others, GO to DK30.
No
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DK28 CHECK FOR DTCS
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Are DTCs P2122 and P2127 present?
Yes
GO to DK29.
No
GO to DK30.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 124
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DK29 SIMULATE THE OPPOSITE SIGNAL
Key in OFF position.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A APP
Point B APP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ETCREF
APP1
ETCREF
APP2
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the APP1 and APP2 PIDs.
Are the voltages greater than 4.5 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new APP sensor.
REFER to the ACCELERATION CONTROL -E-SERIES to INSTALL a new accelerator pedal.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DK30.
DK30 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DL: CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 125
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (6G004)
harness circuits: CHT, VREF, and SIGRTN
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
On applications that do not use an engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor, the CHT sensor is used to
determine the engine coolant temperature. To cover the entire temperature range of both the CHT and ECT
sensors, the PCM has a dual switching resistor circuit on the CHT input. A graph showing the temperature
switching from the COLD END line to the HOT END line, with increasing temperature and back with
decreasing temperature is included. Note the temperature to voltage overlap zone. Within this zone it is possible
to have either a COLD END or HOT END voltage at the same temperature. For example, at 90°C (194°F) the
voltage could read either 0.60 volt or 3.71 volts. Refer to the table for the temperature to voltage expected
values.
Voltage values calculated for VREF = 5 volts. These values can vary by 15% due to sensor and VREF
variations.
Fig. 50: Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor Voltage Graph
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR EXPECTED VALUES
Temperature
CHT Sensor Values
°C
°F
Cold End (volts)
Hot End (volts)
-40
-40
4.89
-
Resistance (K ohms)
965.808
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 126
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
85
90
95
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
-22
-4
14
32
50
68
86
104
122
140
158
176
185
194
203
212
230
248
266
284
302
320
338
356
374
392
410
428
446
464
482
500
4.81
4.67
4.45
4.14
3.73
3.26
2.74
2.23
1.76
1.36
1.04
0.79
0.69
0.60
0.53
0.46
-
3.99
3.86
3.71
3.56
3.41
3.07
2.74
2.41
2.10
1.81
1.55
1.33
1.13
0.96
0.82
0.70
0.60
0.51
0.44
0.35
0.33
513.019
283.664
162.584
96.255
59.175
37.387
24.215
16.043
10.85
7.487
5.268
3.775
3.215
2.75
2.361
2.034
1.523
1.155
0.8866
0.6891
0.5417
0.4301
0.3449
0.2791
0.2278
0.1875
0.155
0.130
0.109
0.092
0.078
0.067
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 127
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 51: Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
1
Circuit
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
CHT (Cylinder Head Temperature)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
Connector
190 Pin
150 (50-50-50) Pin
Expedition,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ,
Navigator
F-150,
Mark LT
140 Pin
Focus
190 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
190 Pin
Pin
B29, B64
E58
E41
VREF
SIGRTN
CHT
Circuit
E40
E41
E33
E57
E58
E41
VREF
SIGRTN
CHT
VREF
SIGRTN
CHT
E57
E58
E41
E63
E64
E15
E57
VREF
SIGRTN
CHT
VREF
SIGRTN
CHT
VREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:50 AM
Page 128
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
E58
E41
SIGRTN
CHT
DL1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0116, P0119, P0125, P0128, P1116, P1285, P1288, P1289, P128A, P1290, or P1299
present?
Yes
For DTCs P1116 or P1288, GO to DL2.
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P1289 or P1290, GO
to DL8.
For continuous memory DTCs P0119, P1289,
P128A, or P1290, GO to DL15.
For KOEO or continuous memory DTC P1299, GO
to DL21.
For continuous memory DTCs P0125 or P0128, GO
to DL22.
For continuous memory DTC P0116, GO to DL24.
For DTC P1285, GO to DL18.
No
For Temperature Warning Indicator Lamp or Gauge
(applications with CHT sensor only) symptom, GO
to DL29.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DL2 SELF-TEST DTCS P1288 OR P1116: CHECK THE COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING: To avoid personal injury do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap
while the engine is operating or hot. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is
loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
The DTC indicates the temperature sensor is out of self-test range. The engine is not at normal operating
temperature.
Check the vehicle coolant level.
Is the cooling system OK?
Yes
GO to DL3.
No
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- ESERIES , for loss of coolant diagnosis.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL3 CHECK IF THE VEHICLE ENGINE STARTS
Attempt to start the engine.
Does the engine start and run normally?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 129
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to DL6.
No
GO to DL4.
DL4 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE CHT SENSOR WITH THE ENGINE OFF
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Key in OFF position.
CHT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CHT - Pin 1
( - ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DL5.
No
INSTALL a new CHT sensor.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL5 CHECK THE CIRCUIT FROM THE MODULE TO THE COMPONENT
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
CHT Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the CHT PID.
Using the data collected from the previous step, compare temperature resistance measured at the sensor to
the PID temperature voltage measured at the PCM.
Does the measured value at the sensor agree with measured PID value at the PCM?
Yes
The concern is elsewhere. RETURN toNO
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
PRESENT SYMPTOM CHART INDEX , for
further direction.
No
GO to DL12.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 130
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DL6 CHECK THE CHT SENSOR OPERATION
Run the engine until the engine temperature stabilizes.
Verify the radiator hoses are hot and the cooling system is pressurized.
Carry out the PCM self-test.
Are DTCs P1116 or P1288 present?
Yes
GO to DL7.
No
The engine temperature was not stabilized. REPAIR
any other DTCs as necessary.
DL7 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE CHT SENSOR
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
The vehicle must be at normal operating temperature.
Key in OFF position.
CHT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CHT - Pin 1
( - ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DL31.
No
INSTALL a new CHT sensor.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL8 DTCS P1289 OR P1290: ACCESS THE CHT PID AND CHECK THE VOLTAGE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the CHT PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 V?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 131
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to DL9.
GO to DL10.
DL9 CHECK FOR A GROUNDED CIRCUIT
CHT Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the CHT PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.6 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new CHT sensor.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DL14.
DL10 CHECK THE CHT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
CHT Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CHT
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
CHT - Pin 1
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 5.5 V?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit to PWR. CHECK the
CHT sensor for damage.
GO to DL11.
No
GO to DL11.
DL11 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE CHT SENSOR WITH THE ENGINE OFF
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Key in OFF position.
CHT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 132
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CHT - Pin 1
( - ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DL12.
No
INSTALL a new CHT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL12 CHECK THE SIGNAL AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CHT
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
CHT - Pin 1
CHT
SIGRTN - Pin 2 SIGRTN
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DL13.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DL13 CHECK THE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO VREF
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
CHT
VREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 133
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DL31.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DL14 CHECK THE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
CHT
SIGRTN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) 12 Volt
Connector,
Vehicle Battery
Harness Side
Negative
CHT
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DL31.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DL15 DTCS P0119, P1289, P1290 OR P128A: INTERMITTENT CHECK
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the CHT PID.
While observing the PID, carry out the following:
Tap on the sensor to simulate road shock
Wiggle the sensor connector
Is there a large change in the voltage reading?
Yes
DISCONNECT and INSPECT the connector. If
OK, INSTALL a new CHT sensor. REFER to the
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 134
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DL16.
DL16 CHECK THE ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL (EEC) WIRING HARNESS
Access the PCM and monitor the CHT PID.
While observing the PID, wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working
from the sensor to the PCM.
Is there a large change in the voltage reading?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DL17.
DL17 CHECK THE PCM AND VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTORS
PCM connector disconnected.
CHT Sensor connector disconnected.
Are the connectors and terminals OK?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DL31.
DL18 SELF-TEST DTC P1285: EARLY WARNING OF ENGINE OVERHEAT CONDITION
WARNING: To avoid personal injury do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap
while the engine is operating or hot. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is
loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
NOTE:
If the electric cooling fan does not operate, return toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS for electric cooling fan DTC. Return
toNO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) PRESENT SYMPTOM CHART
INDEX for symptom diagnosis.
An engine overheat condition is sensed by the CHT sensor.
Check the cooling system for:
correct coolant level
internal or external coolant leaks
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 135
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
blockage of the radiator
cooling fan operation
Is the cooling system OK?
Yes
GO to DL19.
No
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- ESERIES , for loss of coolant diagnosis.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL19 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Run the engine until the engine temperature stabilizes.
Verify the radiator hoses are hot and the cooling system is pressurized.
Carry out the self-test.
Is DTC P1285 present?
Yes
GO to DL20.
No
An engine overheat temperature was not detected.
REPAIR any other DTCs as necessary.
DL20 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE CHT SENSOR
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
The vehicle must be at normal operating temperature.
Key in OFF position.
CHT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CHT - Pin 1
( - ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DL31.
No
INSTALL a new CHT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 136
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL21 SELF-TEST DTC P1299: INDICATES AN ENGINE OVERHEAT CONDITION
WARNING: To avoid personal injury do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap
while the engine is operating or hot. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is
loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Refer toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS for
possible causes and additional DTC description information.
NOTE:
Check the engine coolant level.
Is the engine coolant fill level correct?
Yes
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
to diagnose the engine overheating condition.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
to diagnose the loss of coolant. REPAIR as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL22 SELF-TEST DTCS P0125 OR P0128: CHECK THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
WARNING: To avoid personal injury do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap
while the engine is operating or hot. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is
loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
NOTE:
DTC P0125 or P0128 indicates the engine coolant temperature has not achieved
the required engine operation temperature level, since start-up within a
specified amount of time.
Check the engine coolant level.
Is the engine coolant fill level correct?
Yes
GO to DL23.
No
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
to diagnose the loss of coolant. REPAIR as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL23 CHECK THE SENSOR OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 137
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Run the engine until the engine temperature stabilizes.
Verify the radiator hoses are hot and the cooling system is pressurized.
Access the PCM and monitor the CHT PID.
Is the temperature greater than 77°C (170.6°F)?
Yes
The test is complete.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
to diagnosis engine not reaching normal operating
temperature.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL24 DTC P0116: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE CHT SENSOR WITH THE ENGINE OFF
NOTE:
Verify the engine temperature is at ambient room temperature before continuing
with this test. A soak period of 6 hours may be required. Refer toDIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS for information
concerning P0116.
Key in OFF position.
CHT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CHT - Pin 1
( - ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DL25.
No
INSTALL a new CHT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL25 DTC P0116: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE CHT SENSOR
NOTE:
Verify the engine is at operating temperature before taking the CHT reading.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 138
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CHT Sensor connector connected.
Run the engine until the engine temperature stabilizes.
Key in OFF position.
CHT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CHT - Pin 1
( - ) CHT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
The concern is not present at this time. CARRY
OUT the OBD drive cycle to determine if fuel,
HO2S, catalyst and misfire monitors can be
executed. REFER toON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
(OBD) DRIVE CYCLE . REPEAT the PCM selftest if necessary.
No
INSTALL a new CHT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL26 DTC P0298: ENGINE OIL OVER TEMPERATURE CONDITION
NOTE:
The engine oil temperature protection strategy in the PCM has been activated.
This protects the engine against mechanical damage due to overheating. Refer
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS for
possible causes and additional DTC description information.
Check for an overheating condition and base engine concerns.
Are there any overheating or base engine concerns?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DL27.
DL27 CHECK FOR CHT DTCS
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P1285, P1288, P1289 or P1299 present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 139
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
DISREGARD the engine oil temperature (EOT)
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) at this time.
ADDRESS the next DTC. GO toDIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND
DESCRIPTIONS .
No
GO to DL28.
DL28 ROAD TEST THE VEHICLE AND MONITOR FOR ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Access the freeze frame data (if available) and record the DTC malfunction conditions.
Access the PCM and monitor the CHT PID.
Test drive the vehicle and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
Observe CHT PID.
Does the engine overheat?
Yes
No
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
to diagnose the overheat symptom. REPAIR as
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
necessary.
time.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DL29 ENGINE TEMPERATURE WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ON OR TEMPERATURE GAUGE INDICATES
HOT, BUT ENGINE IS NOT OVERHEATING
NOTE:
The PCM self-test must be carried out prior to entering this pinpoint test.
Was the PCM self-test carried out prior to entering this pinpoint test?
Yes
GO to DL30.
No
The concern is elsewhere. RETURN toPINPOINT
TEST QT for further direction.
DL30 ENGINE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LAMP ON OR TEMPERATURE GAUGE INDICATES HOT WITH
NO DTCS
NOTE:
The engine temperature warning indicator (gauge or lamp) is a warning system
that gives the driver information during an engine overheating condition. The
PCM monitors the CHT sensor and determines if fail-safe cooling mode is
needed. If fail-safe cooling mode is needed, the PCM sends a controller area
network (CAN) message to the instrument cluster to signal an overheating
condition. This causes the instrument cluster indicator to illuminate and forces
the temperature gauge to the H (hot) zone. DTC P1285 is stored in the PCM.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 140
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
For Engine Temperature Warning Indicator system problems, refer to the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC) AND WARNING CHIMES -- E-SERIES .
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Does the engine temperature warning indicator lamp turn OFF (prove out) and\or the temperature
gauge return to the normal zone with the PCM disconnected?
Yes
No
REFER to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC)
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
AND WARNING CHIMES -- E-SERIES to
to diagnose the overheat symptom. REPAIR as
diagnose the incorrect temperature gauge. REPAIR
necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selfas necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selftest.
test.
DL31 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DM: MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor (9F479)
harness circuits: MAP, SIGRTN, VREF
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 141
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 52: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 53: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 142
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 54: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner 3.0L
Connector
A
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
B
All other vehicles
C
Pin
2
3
1
1
2
3
1
4
2
Circuit
MAP
SIGRTN
VREF
MAP
SIGRTN
VREF
MAP
SIGRTN
VREF
Fig. 55: EGR System Module (ESM) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 143
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Pin
4
3
6
2
Circuit
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
MAP (Manifold Absolute Pressure)
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
VREF (Reference Voltage)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
F-150
Focus
Fusion,
Milan
All other vehicles
Connector
Pin
150 (50-50-50) Pin B35, B36
B40, E40
B41, E41, T41
E23
190 Pin
B51, B52, B53
B29, E57
B58, E58, T43
E62
190 Pin
B67, B68
B52, B66, E63
B58, E64, T40
E40
140 Pin
B51, B52
B33, E57
B58, E58
E62
170 Pin
B35, B36
B40, E57
B41, E58, T41
E62
Circuit
VPWR
VREF
SIGRTN
MAP
VPWR
VREF
SIGRTN
MAP
VPWR
VREF
SIGRTN
MAP
VPWR
VREF
SIGRTN
MAP
VPWR
VREF
SIGRTN
MAP
DM1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0106, P0107, P0108, P0109, P012B, P012C, P012D, or P012E present?
Yes
No
For vehicles with an EGR system module (ESM),
KOEO, KOER DTCs P0107, P0108, P012C, or
P012D. GO to DM2.
For vehicles without an EGR system module
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
(ESM), any DTC P0106, KOEO, KOER DTCs
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
P0107 or P0108, GO to DM20.
For vehicles with an EGR system module (ESM)
continuous memory DTCs P0107, P0108, P012C,
P012D or KOEO P0109, or P012E. GO to DM14.
For vehicles without an EGR system module (ESM)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 144
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
continuous memory DTCs P0107, P0108, or KOEO
P0109, GO to DM26.
For vehicles with an EGR system module (ESM)
DTC P0106, or P012B. GO to DM15.
DM2 DTCS P0107 AND P0108: MONITOR THE MAP PID
Key ON, engine running.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Is the voltage between 0.05 - 4.95 V?
Yes
VERIFY the PCM is at the latest calibration level.
REPROGRAM if necessary. If the PCM is at the
GO to DM3.
latest calibration level, the concern is not present at
this time.
No
DM3 VERIFY HARNESS AND CONNECTOR INTEGRITY
Key in OFF position.
ESM connector disconnected.
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the connector, pins and wires attaching to the pins.
Are there any concerns with the wiring or the ESM connection?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DM4.
DM4 MONITOR THE MAP PID
ESM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Is the voltage between 0.05 - 4.95 V?
Yes
The concern is not present at this time.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DM5.
DM5 DETERMINE THE PRESENT MAP PID VOLTAGE
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 145
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage less than 0.05 V?
Yes
GO to DM6.
No
GO to DM9.
DM6 KOEO AND KOER DTC P0107: CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS
AT THE ESM HARNESS CONNECTOR
ESM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ESM
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF - Pin 2 SIGRTN - Pin 6
Is the voltage between 4 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to DM7.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DM7 CHECK THE MAP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO SIGRTN AND GND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ESM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
MAP - Pin 3
Ground
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ESM
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP - Pin 3
SIGRTN - Pin 6
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 146
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DM8.
DM8 INDUCE THE OPPOSITE MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE TO SIMULATE A HIGH CONDITION
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A ESM Point B ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP - Pin 3
VREF - Pin 2
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.6 V?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new ESM.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL GO to DM27.
- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DM9 KOEO AND KOER DTC P0108: CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS
AT THE ESM HARNESS CONNECTOR
ESM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ESM
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF - Pin 2 SIGRTN - Pin 6
Is the voltage between 4 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to DM10.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DM10 CHECK THE MAP AND SIGRTN CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 147
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP
MAP - Pin 3
SIGRTN
SIGRTN - Pin 6
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DM11.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DM11 CHECK THE MAP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ESM
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP - Pin 3
VREF - Pin 2
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DM12.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DM12 CHECK THE MAP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ESM
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP - Pin 3
VPWR - Pin 4
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DM13.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 148
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DM13 INDUCE THE OPPOSITE MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE TO SIMULATE A LOW CONDITION
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A ESM Point B ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP - Pin 3
SIGRTN - Pin 6
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.1 V?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new ESM.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL GO to DM27.
- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DM14 DTCS P0107, P0108 AND P0109: CHECK THE MAP CIRCUIT(S) FOR INTERMITTENT CONCERNS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Carry out a thorough wiggle test on the ESM harness.
Lightly tap on the ESM and wiggle the harness connector to simulate road shock.
Does a sudden change in voltage occur while monitoring the PID?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DM15 DTC P0106: MAP RANGE/PERFORMANCE
NOTE:
If MAP DTC(s) P0107, P0108 or P0109 are present, diagnose those DTC(s) first.
If any mass air flow (MAF) sensor related DTCs are present, diagnose those
DTCs prior to diagnosing MAP DTC P0106. Disregard any DTC(s) generated as a
result of this test.
Key in OFF position.
ESM connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 149
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Point B ESM
Connector,
Component
Side
VREF - Pin 2 VREF - Pin 2
SIGRTN - Pin 6 SIGRTN - Pin 6
Point A ESM
Connector,
Harness Side
Key ON, engine running.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ESM
Connector,
Component
Side
MAP - Pin 3
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage between 1 - 2 V?
Yes
GO to DM19.
No
GO to DM16.
DM16 CHECK THE MAP CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE ESM HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Remove the jumper wires.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP
MAP - Pin 3
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DM17.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DM17 CHECK THE MAP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT IN THE ESM HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 150
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) ESM
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP - Pin 3
SIGRTN - Pin 6
MAP - Pin 3
VREF - Pin 2
MAP - Pin 3
VPWR - Pin 4
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DM18.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DM18 KOEO AND KOER MAP VOLTAGE
NOTE:
The MAP PID should change by at least 1.5 volts from key on engine off to key
on engine running.
Key in OFF position.
ESM connector connected.
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Record the KOEO MAP voltage.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Record the KOER MAP voltage.
Does the MAP PID value change?
Yes
GO to DM19.
No
CHECK the MAP hose for freezing or obstructions.
If OK, INSTALL a new ESM. REFER to the
ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DM19 COMPARE ACTUAL MAP VOLTAGE TO MAP PID VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
ESM connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point B ESM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 151
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Point A ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Harness Side
Side
VREF - Pin 2 VREF - Pin 2
SIGRTN - Pin 6 SIGRTN - Pin 6
MAP - Pin 3
MAP - Pin 3
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ESM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
MAP - Pin 3
Ground
Record the actual MAP voltage values at key on engine off, idle, 1,000 and 2,000 RPM.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Record the MAP PID voltage values at key on engine off, idle, 1,000 and 2,000 RPM.
Does the MAP PID voltage stay within 0.5 volt of the actual MAP voltage?
Yes
The concern is not present at this time.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
CARRY OUT a visual inspection. CHECK for
loose connections, and damaged or corroded pins.
WIGGLE the harness, attempting to RECREATE
the concern.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DM20 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0106, P0107 AND P0108: CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN VREF AND
SIGRTN AT THE MAP SENSOR
MAP Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MAP
( - ) MAP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to DM22.
No
GO to DM21.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 152
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DM21 CHECK FOR VREF VOLTAGE AT THE SENSOR
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MAP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
REPAIR the open SIGRTN circuit.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DM22 CHECK MAP SIGNAL VOLTAGE AT THE SENSOR
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MAP
( - ) MAP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to DM24.
No
GO to DM23.
DM23 CHECK THE MAP CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MAP
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
MAP
MAP
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 153
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DM24.
DM24 CHECK THE MAP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE OR SIGRTN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP
VREF
MAP
SIGRTN
MAP
VPWR
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DM25.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DM25 INDUCE THE OPPOSITE SIGNAL
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A MAP Point B MAP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MAP
SIGRTN
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.1 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new MAP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
No
GO to DM27.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 154
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DM26 DTCS P0107, P0108 AND P0109: CHECK THE MAP CIRCUIT(S) FOR INTERMITTENT CONCERNS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Carry out a thorough wiggle test on the MAP harness.
Lightly tap on the MAP and wiggle the harness connector to simulate road shock.
Does a sudden change in voltage occur while monitoring the PID?
Yes
GO to DM20.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DM27 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DP: OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (OSS) SENSOR/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
(VSS)/TRANSFER CASE SPEED SENSOR (TCSS)
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
OSS/VSS/TCSS (7F293/7M101/7H103)
harness circuits: OSS/VSS, TCSS, and SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 155
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 56: Output Shaft Sensor/Vehicle Speed Sensor (OSS/VSS) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 57: Output Shaft Sensor/Vehicle Speed Sensor (OSS/VSS) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 58: Output Shaft Sensor/Vehicle Speed Sensor (OSS/VSS) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 156
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 59: Output Shaft Sensor/Vehicle Speed Sensor (OSS/VSS) Connector - D
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
F-Super Duty
Connector
A
Focus
B
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
Mustang
C
D
All other vehicles
D
Pin
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
2
Circuit
SIGRTN
OSS/VSS
VPWR
OSS/VSS
PWRGND
VPWR
SIGRTN
OSS/VSS
SIGRTN
OSS/VSS
SIGRTN
OSS/VSS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 157
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 60:
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
1
Circuit
TCSS (Transfer Case Speed Sensor)
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
F-150 4.2L
F-Super Duty,
Mustang,
Ranger
Focus
Fusion,
Milan
Connector
Pin
150 (50-50-50) Pin B35
B47, B48, B49, B50
B41, E41, T41
T4
190 Pin
B51
B67, B68, B69, B70
B58, E58, T43
T14
170 Pin
B35
B47, B48, B49, B50
B41, E58, T41
T3
190 Pin
B67
B69, B70
B58, E64, T40
T2
140 Pin
B51
B67, B68, B69
B58, E58
B65
Circuit
VPWR
PWRGND
SIGRTN
OSS/VSS
VPWR
PWRGND
SIGRTN
OSS/VSS
VPWR
PWRGND
SIGRTN
OSS/VSS
VPWR
PWRGND
SIGRTN
OSS/VSS
VPWR
PWRGND
SIGRTN
OSS/VSS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 158
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
All other vehicles
190 Pin
B51
T16
B67, B68, B69, B70
B58, E58, T43
VPWR
TCSS
PWRGND
SIGRTN
DP1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor
DTCs, refer to the DIAGNOSTIC METHODS -- GASOLINE ENGINES .
Are DTCs P0500, P0503, P0720, P0721, P0722, P0723, P1500, P1501, P1502 or P1900 present?
Yes
For DTCs P0500, P0503, P1500, P1501 or P1502,
with manual shift transfer case,
GO to DP16.
For DTCs P0500, P0720, P0721, P0722, P0723,
P1502 or P1900, with a manual transmission or an
electronic shift transfer case,
GO to DP2.
For DTCs P0503 or P1500, with a manual
transmission or an electronic shift transfer case,
GO to DP13.
For DTC P1501, with a manual transmission or an
electronic shift transfer case,
GO to DP12.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DP2 DTCS P0500, P0720, P0721, P0722, P0723, P1502 AND P1900: VERIFY THE DRIVE CYCLE
Access the PCM and monitor the OSS PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the VSS PID.
Drive the vehicle.
Monitor the PID in all transmission gear ranges while increasing and decreasing the speed.
Does the PID reading increase and decrease with engine and vehicle speed?
Yes
GO to DP3.
No
GO to DP4.
DP3 VISUAL INSPECTION
OSS/VSS connector disconnected.
Inspect the OSS/VSS harness for damage.
Inspect the OSS/VSS vehicle harness connector for damage and proper seating.
If possible, carry out a wiggle test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 159
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DP4 VERIFY THE TYPE OF OSS/VSS SENSOR
NOTE:
The variable reluctance (VR) sensors have 2-wire connectors, Hall-effect
sensors have 3-wire connectors.
Key in OFF position.
Inspect for a Hall-effect or a VR type of OSS/VSS sensor.
Is this a Hall-effect type OSS/VSS sensor?
Yes
GO to DP5.
No
GO to DP7.
DP5 CHECK VOLTAGE TO THE OSS/VSS SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
OSS/VSS connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) OSS/VSS
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to DP6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DP6 CHECK THE VPWR GROUND TO THE OSS/VSS SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) OSS/VSS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 160
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
Harness Side
PWRGND
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DP7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DP7 CHECK THE OSS/VSS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF AND VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
OSS/VSS connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) OSS/VSS
Connector,
Harness Side
OSS/VSS
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to DP8.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DP8 CHECK THE OSS/VSS CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
Hall-effect sensors are not equipped with a SIGRTN circuit. Disregard the
SIGRTN measurement.
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
OSS/VSS connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) OSS/VSS
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
OSS/VSS
OSS/VSS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 161
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
SIGRTN
PWRGND
SIGRTN
PWRGND
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DP9.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DP9 CHECK THE OSS/VSS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) OSS/VSS ( - ) OSS/VSS
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
OSS/VSS
PWRGND
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
For Hall-effect sensors, GO to DP10.
For VR sensors, GO to DP11.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DP10 CHECK THE OSS/VSS SIGNAL OUTPUT TO THE PCM, HALL-EFFECT TYPE SENSOR
NOTE:
The opposite wheel must be held stationary.
PCM connector disconnected.
Raise the vehicle to allow for the rotation of the front drive wheels.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Transmission gear selector in NEUTRAL.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
OSS/VSS
PWRGND
The voltage should rise above 5 volts and fall below 1 volt in a regular cycle. Observe several cycles.
Does the OSS/VSS output voltage rise and fall as specified?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 162
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REMOVE the OSS/VSS sensor and inspect the
target wheel. REPAIR as necessary. If OK,
INSTALL a new OSS/VSS sensor. REFER to the
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
- 4R70E/4R75E -- E-SERIES . CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DP22.
DP11 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE OSS/VSS SENSOR
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) OSS/VSS ( - ) OSS/VSS
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
OSS/VSS
SIGRTN
Is the resistance between 170 - 270 ohms (VSS) or 400 - 1.25K ohms (OSS)?
Yes
GO to DP22.
No
REMOVE the OSS/VSS sensor and inspect the
target wheel. REPAIR as necessary. If OK,
INSTALL a new OSS/VSS sensor. REFER to the
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
- 4R70E/4R75E -- E-SERIES . CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DP12 KOER DTC P1501: CHECK THE VSS PID FOR AN INPUT SIGNAL
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the VSS PID.
Observe the VSS input to the PCM.
Increase the engine speed, not greater than 2,000 RPM, several times while observing the VSS PID.
Is the reading on the PID less than 5 km/h (3 mph)?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time. REFER toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS
GO to DP15.
for possible causes and additional DTC description
information. If DTC P1501 still exists,
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
DP13 DTCS P0503 AND P1500: INSPECT THE VSS AND THE CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 163
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Visually inspect the VSS and harness circuits for any potential failures.
Use the following check list for reference:
loose wires/connectors
pushed out connector pins
damaged wiring harness insulation
incorrect harness routing
incorrect VSS mounting
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DP14.
DP14 CHECK THE PCM VSS PID FOR AN INPUT SIGNAL
NOTE:
For scan tools which have a data record feature, record the data for future
playback to help identify any variations.
Access the PCM and monitor the VSS PID.
Drive the vehicle at several steady state speeds above and below 50 km/h (30 mph).
Are there any indicators of a noisy or intermittent signal with the VSS PID?
Yes
GO to DP15.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time. REPAIR any other DTCs.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
DP15 CHECK THE VSS HARNESS ROUTING
NOTE:
Refer to Pinpoint Test Schematic and Connectors at the beginning of this
pinpoint test.
Check the VSS harness routing:
Verify the harness is not routed adjacent to any high current wires such as ignition wires or
generator wiring.
Verify the VSS harness is shielded and grounded, if applicable.
Measure the resistance of the VSS harness.
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 164
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time. REFER toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS
for possible causes and additional DTC description
information.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
REPAIR as necessary.
DP16 DTCS P0500, P0503, P1500, P1501 AND P1502: VISUAL INSPECTION OF TCSS
NOTE:
The TCSS provides the rotational speed of the output shaft of the transfer case.
The PCM uses this information to control the powertrain behavior and on some
applications it is used as the source for the vehicle speed information.
TCSS connector disconnected.
Inspect the TCSS vehicle harness connector for damage and proper seating.
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DP17.
DP17 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE TCSS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) TCSS
( - ) TCSS
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 1 TCSS - Pin 2
Is the resistance between 1K - 1.25K ohms?
Yes
GO to DP18.
No
INSTALL a new TCSS. REFER to the
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION
- 4R70E/4R75E -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DP18 CHECK THE TCSS SENSOR OUTPUT
NOTE:
The opposite wheel must be held stationary.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 165
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL and the parking brake off, position it on a hoist. Refer to the JACKING
AND LIFTING -- E-SERIES for the locations of the lifting points.
Raise the vehicle.
Measure the frequency between:
( + ) TCSS
( - ) TCSS
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 1 TCSS - Pin 2
Monitor the TCSS signal while rotating the driven wheel as fast as possible.
Does the frequency reading increase and decrease with the wheel speed?
Yes
GO to DP19.
No
REMOVE the TCSS and inspect the target wheel.
REPAIR as necessary. If OK, INSTALL a new
TCSS sensor. REFER to the AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 4R70E/4R75E
-- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DP19 CHECK THE TCSS CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND AND VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
TCSS connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) TCSS
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
TCSS - Pin 2
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to DP20.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DP20 CHECK THE CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 166
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) TCSS
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
TCSS
TCSS - Pin 2
SIGRTN
SIGRTN - Pin 1
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DP21.
DP21 CHECK THE HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) TCSS
( - ) TCSS
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
SIGRTN - Pin 1 TCSS - Pin 2
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) TCSS
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
TCSS - Pin 2
Ground
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DP22.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DP22 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 167
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DR: CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
camshaft position (CMP) sensor (6B288)
harness circuits: CMP, CMP2, SIGRTN, VBPWR, VRSRTN, and VRSRTN2
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 61: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 168
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 62: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 63: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 169
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 64: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - D
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 65: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - E
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 170
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 66: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - F
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Edge,
Expedition,
F-150 4.6L,
F-150 5.4L,
Mark LT,
MKX,
MKZ,
Navigator,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner 2.3L,
Ranger 2.3L
Explorer 4.0L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.0L,
Mountaineer 4.0L,
Mustang 4.0L,
Ranger 4.0L
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
Connector
A
B
C
D
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
F-150 4.2L
E
D
Focus
F
Pin
Circuit
1
2
VRSRTN
CMP
1
2
2
1
SIGRTN
CMP
SIGRTN
CMP
1
3
2
2
1
3
1
2
1
VBPWR
SIGRTN
CMP
VRSRTN
CMP
PWRGND
VPWR
CMP
VBPWR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 171
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
All other vehicles
3
2
1
2
A
SIGRTN
CMP
SIGRTN
CMP
Fig. 67: Camshaft Position 2 (CMP2) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 68: Camshaft Position 2 (CMP2) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Edge,
MKX,
MKZ,
Sable,
Connector
A
Pin
1
2
Circuit
VRSRTN
CMP2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:51 AM
Page 172
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Taurus,
Taurus X
Expedition,
F-150 5.4L,
Mark LT,
Navigator
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
All other vehicles
A
1
2
VRSRTN2
CMP2
B
2
1
1
2
VRSRTN
CMP2
SIGRTN
CMP2
A
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
Connector
190 Pin
Pin
E44
E42
E45
150 (50-50-50) Pin E41
E25
Expedition,
140 Pin
E5
Navigator
E44
E4
E45
Explorer 4.6L,
170 Pin
E44
Explorer Sport Trac 4.6L,
E58
F-Super Duty 5.4L,
E45
Mountaineer 4.6L,
Mustang 4.6L
F-150 4.6L
190 Pin
E4
E45
F-150 4.2L
190 Pin
E45
F-150 5.4L,
190 Pin
E5
Mark LT
E44
E4
E45
Focus
190 Pin
E64
E8
Fusion 3.0L,
140 Pin
E44
Milan 3.0L,
E33
MKZ
E45
Fusion 2.3L,
140 Pin
E58
Milan 2.3L
E45
All other vehicles
170 Pin
E58
Circuit
CMP2
VRSRTN
CMP
SIGRTN
CMP
VRSRTN2
CMP2
VRSRTN
CMP
CMP2
SIGRTN
CMP
VRSRTN
CMP
CMP
VRSRTN2
CMP2
VRSRTN
CMP
SIGRTN
CMP
CMP2
VRSRTN
CMP
SIGRTN
CMP
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 173
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
E45
CMP
DR1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0340, P0344, P0345, or P0349 present?
Yes
For DTCs P0340, P0344, P0345 or P0349, GO to
DR2.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DR2 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0340, P0344, P0345 AND P0349: CHECK IF THE ENGINE STARTS
Attempt to start the engine.
Does the engine start?
Yes
GO to DR3.
No
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
DR3 CLEAR AND ATTEMPT TO RETRIEVE THE DTC
NOTE:
If DTCs P0340, P0344, P0345, or P0349 are present, ignition, alternator noise,
RFI and CKP concerns should be considered.
NOTE:
For vehicles with variable camshaft timing (VCT), concerns with the engine oil
level, oil filter, oil contamination, or the VCT system may cause camshaft
positioning errors.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Clear the PCM DTCs.
Key ON, engine running.
Increase engine speed to greater than 1,500 RPM for 10 seconds. Repeat this 3 times.
Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs.
Are DTCs P0340, P0344, P0345 or P0349 present?
Yes
GO to DR4.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DR4 CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR EXCESSIVE ELECTRICAL NOISE
NOTE:
If the generator/regulator is electrically noisy, the noise decreases when the B+
connector is disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 174
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PCM connector connected.
CMP Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Monitor the generator for an audible electric noise.
Key in OFF position.
Generator/regulator B+ connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine running.
With the engine running, determine if the generator is still noisy.
Does the noise remain constant when the B+ connector is disconnected?
Yes
No
For continuous memory DTCs P0340 or P0344, GO
REFER to the GENERATOR AND
to DR5.
REGULATOR -- E-SERIES to diagnose the
For continuous memory DTCs P0345 or P0349, GO
generator is noisy symptom.
to DR13.
DR5 DETERMINE THE CMP SENSOR PHYSICAL TYPE
Key in OFF position.
Is the CMP sensor a synchronizer (gear driven) type?
Yes
GO to DR6.
No
GO to DR7.
DR6 VERIFY THE CORRECT INSTALLATION OF THE CMP SENSOR
NOTE:
A CMP sensor identifies the cylinder 1 power stroke. A sensor that is
improperly installed/indexed can identify the wrong cylinder as 1, produce a tipin hesitation and generate DTC P0340.
Is the CMP sensor installed correctly?
Yes
GO to DR7.
No
INSTALL the CMP sensor correctly. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES for the
Camshaft Synchronizer removal and installation
procedures.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DR7 DETERMINE THE CMP SENSOR ELECTRONIC TYPE
NOTE:
The variable reluctance (VR) sensors have 2-wire connectors, Hall-effect
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 175
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
sensors have 3-wire connectors.
Is the CMP sensor a VR type?
Yes
GO to DR8.
No
The CMP sensor is a Hall-effect type.
GO to DR19.
DR8 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0340 AND P0344: CHECK THE CMP SENSOR RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
CMP Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CMP
CMP
( - ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
Minimum Maximum
Vehicle
Resistance Resistance
(ohms)
(ohms)
Edge, MKX
586
2,033
F-150 4.6L
1,978
5,590
F-150, Mark
205
579
LT
MKZ
586
2,033
Taurus, Taurus
586
2,033
X, Sable
All others
250
1,000
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DR9.
No
INSTALL a new CMP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DR9 CHECK THE CMP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 176
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
CMP
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to DR10.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR10 CHECK THE CMP AND SIGRTN OR VRSRTN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
CMP
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
( - ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
CMP
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DR11.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR11 CHECK FOR A SHORT IN THE HARNESS BETWEEN THE PCM AND THE CMP SENSOR
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
( - ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 177
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CMP
CMP
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
CMP
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DR12.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR12 CHECK THE CMP SENSOR OUTPUT
Key in OFF position.
Generator/regulator B+ connector connected.
CMP Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine running.
Digital multimeter (DMM) on low voltage AC scale.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CMP
CMP
( - ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
Run the engine at approximately 2,500 RPM.
Is the voltage greater than 0.25 V?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 178
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For Edge,
Expedition,
Explorer 4.6L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.6L,
F-150 5.4L,
F-Super Duty 5.4L,
Fusion,
Mark LT,
Milan,
MKX,
MKZ,
Mountaineer 4.6L,
Mustang 4.6L,
Navigator,
Sable,
Taurus, and
Taurus X, GO to DR25.
For all others, GO to DR26.
INSTALL a new CMP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DR13 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0345 AND P0349: CHECK THE CMP2 SENSOR RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
CMP2 Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CMP2
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CMP2
CMP2
CMP2
( - ) CMP2
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
VRSRTN2
Minimum Maximum
Resistance Resistance
(ohms)
(ohms)
Edge, MKX
586
2,033
F-150, Mark
205
579
LT
MKZ
586
2,033
Taurus, Taurus
586
2,033
X, Sable
All others
250
1,000
Vehicle
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 179
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance value(s) within specifications?
Yes
GO to DR14.
No
INSTALL a new CMP2 sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DR14 CHECK THE CMP2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CMP2
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
CMP2
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to DR15.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR15 CHECK THE CMP2 AND SIGRTN, VRSRTN, OR VRSRTN2 CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
CMP2
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
VRSRTN2
( - ) CMP2
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
CMP2
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
VRSRTN2
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 180
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DR16.
DR16 CHECK FOR A SHORT IN THE HARNESS BETWEEN THE PCM AND THE CMP2 SENSOR
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CMP2
( - ) CMP2
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
CMP2
SIGRTN
CMP2
VRSRTN
CMP2
VRSRTN2
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CMP2
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
CMP2
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
VRSRTN2
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DR17.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR17 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN THE CMP AND THE CMP2 CIRCUITS
CMP Sensor connector disconnected.
CMP2 Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 181
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
CMP
CMP2
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DR18.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR18 CHECK THE CMP2 SENSOR OUTPUT
Key in OFF position.
Generator/regulator B+ connector connected.
CMP2 Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine running.
DMM on low voltage AC scale.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CMP2
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CMP2
CMP2
CMP2
( - ) CMP2
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
VRSRTN
VRSRTN2
Run the engine at approximately 2,500 RPM.
Is the voltage greater than 0.25 V?
Yes
For Edge,
Expedition,
Explorer 4.6L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.6L,
F-150 5.4L,
F-Super Duty 5.4L,
Fusion,
Mark LT,
Milan,
MKX,
MKZ,
No
INSTALL a new CMP2 sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 182
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Mountaineer 4.6L,
Mustang 4.6L,
Navigator,
Sable,
Taurus, and
Taurus X, GO to DR25.
For all others, GO to DR26.
DR19 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0340 AND P0344: CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE CMP SENSOR
CMP Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
VBPWR
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to DR20.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR20 CHECK THE PWRGND OR SIGRTN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Vehicle
Battery
Positive
terminal
Positive
terminal
( - ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
PWRGND
SIGRTN
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 183
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to DR21.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR21 CHECK THE CMP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
CMP
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to DR22.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR22 CHECK FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE PCM AND CMP SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
CMP Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CMP
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
CMP
CMP
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DR23.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR23 CHECK THE CMP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO PWRGND OR SIGRTN IN THE HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 184
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
The measurement may be taken at the PCM or CMP connector, whichever is
easier to access.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CMP
( - ) CMP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
CMP
PWRGND
CMP
SIGRTN
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DR24.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DR24 CHECK THE CMP SENSOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
VBPWR
SIGRTN
PWRGND
Point B CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR
VBPWR
SIGRTN
PWRGND
Key ON, engine running.
DMM on low voltage DC scale.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CMP
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 185
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
terminal
Does the voltage switch between LOW (less than 2 volts DC) and HIGH (greater than 8 volts DC)?
Yes
GO to DR26.
No
INSTALL a new CMP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DR25 CHECK THE VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM
NOTE:
Only diagnose the bank indicated by the DTC.
Check the VCT system for correct operation.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DR26.
DR26 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DS: AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE (ACP) TRANSDUCER SENSOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
ACP transducer sensor (19D594)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 186
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
harness circuits: ACP, VREF, SIGRTN
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 69: Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 70: Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Edge,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKX,
MKZ
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
Pin
Circuit
3
1
2
ACP
SIGRTN
VREF
3
1
2
ACP
SIGRTN
VREF
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 187
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
Mustang,
Town Car
Expedition,
Navigator
Connector
170 Pin
140 Pin
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac
170 Pin
F-150
190 Pin
Focus
190 Pin
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
140 Pin
All other vehicles
190 Pin
Pin
B40, E57
B35
B47
B26
E57
B51
B67
B19
B40, E57
B35
B47
B18
B29, E57
B51
B67
B10
B52, B66, E63
B67
B69
B31
B33, E57
B51
B67
B63
B29, B64
B51
B67
B37
Circuit
VREF
VPWR
PWRGND
ACP
VREF
VPWR
PWRGND
ACP
VREF
VPWR
PWRGND
ACP
VREF
VPWR
PWRGND
ACP
VREF
VPWR
PWRGND
ACP
VREF
VPWR
PWRGND
ACP
VREF
VPWR
PWRGND
ACP
DS1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0532, P0533, P1461, P1462, or P1463 present?
Yes
For DTC P0533, P1461, GO to DS2.
For DTC P0532, P1462, GO to DS8.
For DTC P1463, GO to DS17.
No
For symptoms without DTCs, GO to DS19.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DS2 DTC P0533, P1461: CHECK THE ACP PID
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACP_PRESS PID.
Is the voltage less than 4.9 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 188
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
The ACP transducer sensor voltage is now below
maximum. To determine if an intermittent condition
GO to DS3.
exists,
GO to DS16.
No
DS3 CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS AT THE ACP TRANSDUCER
SENSOR VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Air
( - ) Air
Conditioning Conditioning
Pressure (ACP) Pressure (ACP)
Transducer
Transducer
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
GO to DS4.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DS4 CHECK THE ACP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Air
( - ) Air
Conditioning Conditioning
Pressure (ACP) Pressure (ACP)
Transducer
Transducer
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ACP
VREF
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 189
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to DS5.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DS5 CHECK THE ACP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Air
Conditioning
Pressure (ACP)
Transducer
(-)
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
ACP
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to DS6.
No
REPAIR the short circuit to PWR. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DS6 CHECK FOR AN OPEN ACP CIRCUIT IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Air
Conditioning
Pressure (ACP)
( - ) PCM
Transducer
Connector,
Sensor
Harness Side
Connector,
Harness Side
ACP
ACP
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DS7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 190
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DS7 CHECK THE PCM
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A Air
Point B Air
Conditioning Conditioning
Pressure (ACP) Pressure (ACP)
Transducer
Transducer
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ACP
SIGRTN
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACP_PRESS PID.
Is the voltage less than 4.9 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP)
GO to DS23.
Transducer Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
No
DS8 DTC P0532, P1462: CHECK THE ACP PID
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACP_PRESS PID.
Is the voltage greater than 0.15 V?
Yes
The ACP transducer sensor voltage is now above
the minimum. To determine if an intermittent
condition exists,
GO to DS16.
No
GO to DS9.
DS9 CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS AT THE ACP TRANSDUCER
SENSOR VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Air
Conditioning
( - ) Air
Conditioning
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 191
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Pressure (ACP) Pressure (ACP)
Transducer
Transducer
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
GO to DS10.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DS10 SIMULATE AN OPPOSITE SIGNAL TO THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A Air
Point B Air
Conditioning Conditioning
Pressure (ACP) Pressure (ACP)
Transducer
Transducer
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
ACP
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACP_PRESS PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP)
Transducer Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
GO to DS11.
the self-test.
No
DS11 CHECK THE ACP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GND
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Air
Conditioning
Pressure (ACP)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 192
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Transducer
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
ACP
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DS12.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DS12 CHECK THE ACP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO SIGRTN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Air
( - ) Air
Conditioning Conditioning
Pressure (ACP) Pressure (ACP)
Transducer
Transducer
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ACP
SIGRTN
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DS13.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DS13 CHECK THE ACP CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Air
Conditioning
Pressure (ACP)
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Transducer
Harness Side
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
ACP
ACP
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 193
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to DS14.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DS14 CHECK FOR THE A/C CLUTCH TO ENGAGE
PCM connector connected.
Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
While listening for the A/C clutch to engage, turn the A/C on. Repeat if necessary.
Does the A/C engage when the A/C is turned on?
Yes
GO to DS23.
No
GO to DS15.
DS15 VERIFY THE A/C SYSTEM FUNCTION, INCLUDING THE REFRIGERANT CHARGE
Restore the vehicle.
Verify the A/C system function, including the refrigerant charge. Refer to the CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS -- E-SERIES .
Does the A/C system have the correct refrigerant charge and if so does the A/C system function
correctly?
Yes
GO to DS23.
No
REFER to the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS -- E-SERIES and diagnose the air
conditioning (A/C) is inoperative/does not operate
correctly symptom.
DS16 CHECK THE ACP CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN
NOTE:
A concern is indicated by a sudden change in voltage.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACP PID.
Observe the ACP PID for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following:
Shake, wiggle, and bend the ACP, SIGRTN, and VREF wires between the ACP sensor and PCM
Lightly tap on the ACP transducer sensor to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 194
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DS17 DTC P1463: VERIFY THE A/C CLUTCH CAN DISENGAGE
Turn the A/C and defroster OFF.
Key ON, engine running.
Verify the A/C clutch can disengage.
Is the A/C clutch disengaged?
Yes
GO to DS18.
No
REFER to the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS -- E-SERIES and diagnose the air
conditioning (A/C) is always on symptom.
DS18 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AND GROUND TO THE A/C CLUTCH USING A NON-POWERED TEST LAMP
NOTE:
If voltage and ground to the A/C clutch have already been checked or the A/C
clutch can be heard clicking on when the A/C is turned on, go to the question at
the end of this test step.
Key in OFF position.
A/CCS Switch connector disconnected.
Connect a jumper wire in the A/C low pressure cycling switch harness connector to complete the circuit.
A/CC Assembly connector disconnected.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between the voltage pin and ground pin at the A/C clutch harness
connector.
Key ON, engine running.
Turn the A/C on, and wait 15 seconds.
Monitor the test lamp.
Connect the A/C clutch and A/C cycling switch when done testing.
Does the lamp illuminate, or can the A/C clutch be heard clicking on?
Yes
GO to DS19.
No
REFER to the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS -- E-SERIES and diagnose the air
conditioning (A/C) is inoperative/does not operate
correctly symptom.
DS19 DETERMINE IF A SUFFICIENT A/C PRESSURE CHANGE CAN BE DETECTED BY THE ACP PID
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 195
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine running.
Turn the A/C and defroster OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACP PID.
Turn the A/C and defroster OFF.
Five seconds after A/C clutch engagement, note the voltage. If the clutch does not engage, follow the NO
answer instructions.
Does the PCM-ACP PID change more than 0.3 volt within 5 seconds of clutch engagement?
Yes
The ACP transducer sensor and the PCM can detect
a sufficient change in the A/C pressure.
For symptom without DTC P1463, REFER to the
SYMPTOM CHARTS article, Symptom Charts.
GO to DS20.
For all others, REFER to the CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS -- ESERIES and diagnose the air conditioning (A/C) is
inoperative/does not operate correctly symptom.
No
DS20 CHECK THE A/C SYSTEM PRESSURE AND PRESSURE CHANGE
Key in OFF position.
Install an A/C system manifold gauge set and check the A/C system high pressure reading.
Turn the A/C and defroster OFF.
Key ON, engine running.
Note the A/C high pressure reading.
While monitoring the A/C system high pressure reading, turn the A/C on. Five seconds after clutch
engagement, note the pressure (the pressure should increase).
A/C and defroster OFF.
Does the A/C high pressure reading change more than 207 kPa (30 psi) within 5 seconds of clutch
engagement?
Yes
GO to DS21.
No
REFER to the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS -- E-SERIES and diagnose the air
conditioning (A/C) is inoperative/does not operate
correctly symptom.
DS21 CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS AT THE ACP TRANSDUCER
SENSOR VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 196
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Air
( - ) Air
Conditioning Conditioning
Pressure (ACP) Pressure (ACP)
Transducer
Transducer
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
GO to DS22.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DS22 CHECK THE ACP CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Air
Conditioning
Pressure (ACP)
( - ) PCM
Transducer
Connector,
Sensor
Harness Side
Connector,
Harness Side
ACP
ACP
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP)
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
Transducer Sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
REPEAT the self-test.
the self-test.
DS23 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 197
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DT: POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
PSP sensor (3K215)
harness circuit(s): PSP, SIGRTN and VREF
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 71: Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
3
Circuit
PSP (Power Steering Pressure)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 198
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
1
2
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
VREF (Reference Voltage)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Focus
All other vehicles
Connector
190 Pin
190 Pin
Pin
T29
E24
Circuit
PSP
PSP
Fig. 72: Power Steering Pressure Sensor Voltage To Pressure Graph
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DT1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)
Are DTCs P0552, P0553, or P1550 present?
Yes
No
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0552 or P0553, GO
to DT4.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
For continuous memory DTCs P0552 or P0553, GO
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
to DT8.
For KOEO and KOER DTC P1550, GO to DT2.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 199
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DT2 DTC P1550: MAKE SURE THE STEERING WHEEL IS TURNED
Did you turn the steering wheel at least one half turn within 20 seconds of starting the KOER selftest?
Yes
No
If there are any symptoms with the power steering
system (for example, lack of power assist), REFER
to the STEERING SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION -- E-SERIES to diagnosis the
REPEAT the KOER self-test.
lack of assist or inconsistent assist of steering
system. If no symptoms are present with the power
steering system,
GO to DT3.
DT3 CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN VREF AND SIGRTN AT THE PSP SENSOR
PSP Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PSP
( - ) PSP Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VREF - Pin 2 SIGRTN - Pin 1
Is the voltage between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
GO to DT4.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DT4 CHECK THE PSP CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PSP
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
PSP - Pin 3
PSP
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 200
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DT5.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DT5 CHECK THE PSP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PSP
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
PSP - Pin 3
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to DT6.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DT6 CHECK THE PSP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF, SIGRTN AND GND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PSP
( - ) PSP Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
PSP - Pin 3
VREF - Pin 2
PSP - Pin 3
SIGRTN - Pin 1
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PSP
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
PSP - Pin 3
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 201
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DT7.
DT7 CHECK THE SENSOR OPERATION
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point B PSP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
VREF - Pin 2 VREF - Pin 2
SIGRTN - Pin 1 SIGRTN - Pin 1
PSP - Pin 3
PSP - Pin 3
Point A PSP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
Start engine and allow to idle.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PSP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
PSP - Pin 3
(-)
Ground
Observe the voltage while turning the steering wheel at least 1/2 turn right and left.
Is the voltage reading between 0.3 and 4.7 volts and does the voltage change when the steering
wheel is turned?
Yes
GO to DT9.
No
INSTALL a new PSP sensor. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DT8 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0552 OR P0553: CHECK THE POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT(S) FOR INTERMITTENT CONCERNS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the PSP PID.
Observe the PSP PID for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following. (a concern is
indicated by a sudden change in the voltage):
Shake, wiggle, and bend the PSP, VREF, SIGRTN circuit(s).
Lightly tap on the power steering pressure sensor to simulate road shock.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 202
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is a concern indicated?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DT9 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DU: INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE 2 (IAT2) SENSOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
intake air temperature 2 (IAT2) sensor (12A697)
harness circuits: IAT2 and SIGRTN
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Voltage values calculated for VREF = 5 volts. These values can vary by 15% due to sensor and VREF
variations.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 203
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 73: Temperature Sensor Temperature To Voltage Graph
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature
Temperature Sensor Values
°C
°F
Voltage
Resistance (K ohms)
120
248
0.28
1.18
110
230
0.36
1.55
100
212
0.47
2.07
90
194
0.61
2.80
80
176
0.80
3.84
70
158
1.05
5.37
60
140
1.37
7.70
50
122
1.77
10.97
40
104
2.23
16.15
30
86
2.74
24.27
20
68
3.26
37.30
10
50
3.73
58.75
0
32
4.14
95.85
-10
14
4.45
160.31
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 204
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 74: Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
Circuit
2
1
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
IAT2 (Intake Air Temperature 2)
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
B41, E58, T41
B40, E57
E27
Circuit
SIGRTN
VREF
IAT2
DU1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0097, P0098, P0127, P1114, or P1115 present?
Yes
For DTCs P0097 or P1114, GO to DU4.
For DTCs P0098 or P1115, GO to DU2.
For DTC P0127, GO to DU6.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DU2 CHECK FOR AN OPPOSITE SIGNAL TO THE PCM
The DTC indicates the sensor signal is greater than the self-test maximum.
IAT2 Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A IAT2
Point B IAT2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 205
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
IAT2 - Pin 1
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Access the PCM and monitor the IAT2 PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new IAT2 sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES . CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DU3.
DU3 CHECK THE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO VREF
Key in OFF position.
Remove the jumper wire(s).
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF - Pin
IAT2 - Pin E27
B40, E57
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DU10.
No
REPAIR the short circuit to VREF. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DU4 DTC P1114: SIMULATE AN OPPOSITE SIGNAL TO THE PCM
The DTC indicates the sensor signal is less than the self-test minimum.
IAT2 Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the IAT2 PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.2 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new IAT2 sensor. REFER to the
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 206
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES . CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DU5.
DU5 CHECK THE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
SIGRTN - Pin
IAT2 - Pin E27
B41, E58, T41
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) 12 Volt
Connector,
Vehicle Battery
Harness Side
Negative
IAT2 - Pin E27
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DU10.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DU6 DTC P0127: CHECK CHARGE AIR COOLER PUMP (CAC) OPERATION
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Does the CAC pump run?
Yes
GO to DU7.
No
DIAGNOSE the charge air cooler (CAC) pump.
GO to KP9.
DU7 CHECK THE CHARGE AIR COOLER (CAC) SYSTEM
Check the CAC system for low fluid level, cracked, blocked or misrouted coolant lines, cracked or
blocked heat exchanger.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 207
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is a concern present?
Yes
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- ESERIES , Supercharger Cooling to diagnose a loss
GO to DU8.
of coolant. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
DU8 SIMULATE THE HIGH IAT2 SIGNAL TO THE PCM
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the IAT2 PID.
Observe the PID while disconnecting the IAT2 sensor.
Is the voltage greater than 4.2 V?
Yes
GO to DU9.
No
GO to DU10.
DU9 SIMULATE THE LOW IAT2 SIGNAL TO THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
IAT2 Sensor connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A IAT2 Point B IAT2
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
IAT2 - Pin 1
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the IAT2 PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 V?
Yes
CONNECT the sensor and GO to the
REFERENCE VALUES article, Reference Values.
COMPARE the IAT2 PID to reference values under
different road test conditions. If the sensor is not in
GO to DU10.
range, INSTALL a new IAT2 sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 208
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DU10 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DV: THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
(ETC)
WARNING: Substantial opening and closing torque is applied by this system. To
prevent injury, be careful to keep fingers away from throttle mechanism
when actuated. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE:
The voltage of the TP2 circuit and PID reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts
at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
electronic throttle body (ETB) (9F991)
electronic throttle body throttle position sensor (ETBTPS) (9E928)
harness circuits: ETCRTN, ETCREF, TP1, TP2, TACM+, and TACMpowertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 209
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 75: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 76: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 210
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 77: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
E-Series 4.6L,
Edge,
F-150 4.2L,
F-150 4.6L,
Focus,
MKX,
MKZ,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
Connector
A
B
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
B
All other vehicles
C
Pin
Circuit
4
1
2
3
TP2
TP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
4
6
3
5
6
3
4
5
1
4
3
2
TP2
TP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
TP2
TP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
TP2
TP1
ETCRTN
ETCREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 211
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 78: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 79: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Actuator Control Motor (ETBTACM) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 212
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 80: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Actuator Control Motor (ETBTACM) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
E-Series 4.6L,
Edge,
F-150 4.2L,
F-150 4.6L,
Focus,
MKX,
MKZ,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
B
C
Pin
Circuit
6
5
TACMTACM+
2
1
1
2
2
1
TACMTACM+
TACMTACM+
TACMTACM+
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
Mustang,
Town Car
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
B24, B4, E66
B41, B6, E59
B35
B47
E51
E34
E60
Circuit
ETCREF
ETCRTN
VPWR
PWRGND
TACMTACM+
TP2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:52 AM
Page 213
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
E-Series,
F-Super Duty
170 Pin
Expedition,
Navigator
140 Pin
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac,
Mountaineer
170 Pin
F-150,
Mark LT
190 Pin
Focus
190 Pin
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
140 Pin
E61
B16, B4, E66
B18, B6, E59
B35
B47
E51
E34
E60
E61
B21, B28, E66
B59, B65, E59
B51
B67
E51
E34
E60
E61
B24, B4, E66
B43, B6, E59
B35
B47
E51
E34
E60
E61
B21, B28, E66
B58, B59, E59
B51
B67
E51
E34
E60
E61
B45, B61, E59
B44, B60, E60
B67
B69
E51
E34
E45
E44
B21, B28, E66
B59, B60, E59
B51
B67
E51
TP1
ETCREF
ETCRTN
VPWR
PWRGND
TACMTACM+
TP2
TP1
ETCREF
ETCRTN
VPWR
PWRGND
TACMTACM+
TP2
TP1
ETCREF
ETCRTN
VPWR
PWRGND
TACMTACM+
TP2
TP1
ETCREF
ETCRTN
VPWR
PWRGND
TACMTACM+
TP2
TP1
ETCREF
ETCRTN
VPWR
PWRGND
TACMTACM+
TP2
TP1
ETCREF
ETCRTN
VPWR
PWRGND
TACM-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 214
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
All other vehicles
190 Pin
E34
E60
E61
B21, B28, E66
B59, B65, E59
B51
B67
E51
E34
E60
E61
TACM+
TP2
TP1
ETCREF
ETCRTN
VPWR
PWRGND
TACMTACM+
TP2
TP1
DV1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
NOTE:
Diagnose and repair ETBTPS circuit DTCs before addressing DTC P0068.
Are DTCs P0068, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0221, P0222, P0223, P1124, P2100, P2101, P2107, P2111,
P2112, or P2135 present?
Yes
For DTC P0068, GO to DV12.
For DTCs P0121, P0122, P0123, P0221, P0222,
P0223, P2111, or P2112, GO to DV3.
For DTC P1124, GO to DV2.
For DTC P2100, GO to DV19.
For DTC P2101, GO to DV27.
For DTC P2107, GO to DV18.
For Fusion and Milan with DTC P2135, GO to
DV6.
For all others with DTC P2135, GO to DV7.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DV2 DTC P1124: REPEAT THE KOEO OR KOER SELF-TEST
NOTE:
Make sure the accelerator pedal is not applied during the KOEO and KOER selftests.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the self-test.
Are any DTCs present other than P1124?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to DV3.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 215
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DV3 CHECK THE THROTTLE POSITION (TP) OPEN AND CLOSED VOLTAGES
NOTE:
Certain failure mode effects management (FMEM) operating strategies maintain
limited vehicle function in the event of a PCM, harness, or component concern
and may prevent the throttle plate from opening. If the throttle plate does not
open, follow the NO answer.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP1 and TP2 PIDs.
Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and release.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
VOLTAGES
Accelerator
Pedal
TP1
TP2
Position
Pedal fully
3.7 - 4.7 0.3 - 1.9
released
Pedal fully
0.7 - 2.9 4.1 - 4.7
applied
Are both PIDs within the chart ranges?
Yes
For DTCs P2111 or P2112, GO to DV4.
For all others, GO to DV17.
No
GO to DV4.
DV4 CHECK FOR OBSTRUCTION OF THE THROTTLE BODY
WARNING: Substantial opening and closing torque is applied by this system. To
prevent injury, be careful to keep fingers away from throttle mechanism
when actuated. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Key in OFF position.
Remove the inlet tube from the throttle body.
Visually inspect for throttle plate obstructions or engine deposits.
Slowly, push the throttle plate to wide open and release.
Does the throttle plate move freely to wide open and back?
Yes
No
For continuous memory DTCs P0121, P0122,
P0123, P0221, P0222, or P0223 alone or together,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 216
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to DV5.
For DTCs P2111, P2112 or continuous memory
DTCs P2100, P2101, or P2107 alone or together,
GO to DV19.
For Fusion and Milan with all other DTCs, GO to
DV6.
For all others, GO to DV7.
ISOLATE and REPAIR the obstruction.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DV5 CHECK THE VREF VOLTAGE TO TP
ETBTPS connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ETBTPS ( - ) ETBTPS
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ETCREF
ETCRTN
Is the voltage between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
For Fusion and Milan, GO to DV6.
For all others, GO to DV7.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
DV6 FUSION, MILAN: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE ETBTPS
NOTE:
Do not move the throttle plate during the resistance measurement. Measure the
sensor resistance with the throttle plate at the default position.
Key in OFF position.
ETBTPS connector disconnected.
For Fusion 2.3L and Milan 2.3L, measure the resistance between:
(+)
(-)
ETBTPS ETBTPS Minimum Maximum
Connector, Connector, Resistance Resistance
(ohms)
Component Component (ohms)
Side
Side
ETCREF ETCRTN
2,000
4,000
For Fusion 3.0L and Milan 3.0L, measure the resistance between:
(+)
(-)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 217
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ETBTPS ETBTPS
Minimum Maximum
Connector, Connector,
Resistance Resistance
Component Component
(ohms)
(ohms)
Side
Side
TP1
ETCREF
380
987
TP1
ETCRTN
665
1,890
TP2
ETCREF
608
1,932
TP2
ETCRTN
390
1,187
ETCREF ETCRTN
475
1,365
Are all the resistances within specifications?
Yes
GO to DV8.
No
INSTALL a new ETB. REFER to the FUEL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES to
INSTALL a new throttle body.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DV7 ALL OTHERS: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE ETBTPS
NOTE:
Do not move the throttle plate during the resistance measurement. Measure the
sensor resistance with the throttle plate at the default position.
ETBTPS connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
(+)
(-)
ETBTPS ETBTPS Minimum Maximum
Connector, Connector, Resistance Resistance
(ohms)
Component Component (ohms)
Side
Side
TP1
ETCREF
700
1,800
TP1
ETCRTN
1,300
2,800
TP2
ETCREF
1,000
2,400
TP2
ETCRTN
500
1,500
ETCREF ETCRTN
700
2,100
Are all the resistances within the specifications?
Yes
No
For E-Series 4.6L,
Edge,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 218
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to DV8.
F-150 4.2L,
F-150 4.6L,
Focus,
MKX,
MKZ,
Sable,
Taurus, and
Taurus X, INSTALL a new ETB. REFER to the
FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES to
INSTALL a new throttle body. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
For all others, INSTALL a new ETBTPS. REFER
to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES to
INSTALL a new TP sensor. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DV8 CHECK THE TP1 AND TP2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ETBTPS
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
TP1
Ground
TP2
Ground
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DV9.
DV9 CHECK THE TP1 AND TP2 CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ETBTPS
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
TP1
TP1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 219
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
TP2
TP2
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DV10.
DV10 CHECK THE TP1 AND TP2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ETBTPS
Connector,
Harness Side
TP1
TP2
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DV11.
DV11 CHECK THE TP CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ETBTPS
Connector,
Harness Side
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP2
TP2
( - ) ETBTPS
Connector,
Harness Side
TP2
ETCREF
ETCRTN
ETCREF
ETCRTN
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DV14.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 220
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DV12 DTC P0068: CHECK FOR DTCS
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P0121, P0122, P0123, P0221, P0222, P0223 or P2135 present?
Yes
For DTCs P0121, P0122, P0123, P0221, P0222, and
P0223, GO to DV3.
For Fusion and Milan with DTC P2135, GO to
GO to DV13.
DV6.
For all others with DTC P2135, GO to DV7.
No
DV13 CHECK FOR INLET AIR LEAKS
Check the air inlet system for leaks.
Listen for air noise around the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body while the engine is running.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DV14.
DV14 CHECK FOR A TP2 SIGNAL HIGH VERSUS LOAD WHILE DRIVING THE VEHICLE
ETBTPS connector connected.
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP2 PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the LOAD PID.
Drive the vehicle while exercising the throttle and ETCTP sensor and accessing the PIDS.
Is the TP2 PID greater than 2.44 volts and the LOAD PID less than 30%?
Yes
GO to DC5.
No
GO to DV15.
DV15 CHECK FOR A TP2 SIGNAL LOW VERSUS LOAD WHILE DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP2 PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the LOAD PID.
Drive the vehicle while exercising the throttle and ETCTP sensor and accessing the PIDS.
Is the TP2 PID less than 0.24 volt and the LOAD PID greater than 55%?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 221
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
GO to DV16.
GO to DV17.
DV16 CHECK FOR SELF-TEST DTCS
NOTE:
After retrieving the continuous memory DTCs, diagnose any non-ETC related
DTCs before continuing.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Clear the DTCs.
Drive the vehicle while exercising the throttle.
Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs.
Are any DTCs present?
Yes
No
For continuous memory DTC P0068, CHECK the
MAF sensor and connector for damage and
corrosion. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
For E-Series 4.6L, Edge, F-150 4.2L, F-150 4.6L,
Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Taurus,
and Taurus X with DTC P2135, INSTALL a new
ETB. REFER to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
INFORMATION - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- time.
E-SERIES to INSTALL a new throttle body.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
For all others with DTC P2135, INSTALL a new
ETBTPS. REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES to INSTALL a new TP sensor.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
For all others, GO to DV17.
DV17 CHECK THE TP CIRCUITS FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN
Access the PCM and monitor the TP1 and TP2 PIDs.
Wiggle, shake, and bend the harness from the TP to the PCM.
Are the voltages between 0.49 - 4.65 V?
Yes
GO to DV29.
No
REPAIR as necessary. If DTC P2100 or P2101 is
present,
GO to DV19.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 222
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DV18 DTC P2107: CHECK FOR OTHER SELF-TEST DTCS
NOTE:
The DTC P2107 may set when a failure mode effects management (FMEM)
action is taken. If the FMEM DTC P2110 is present with other DTCs, diagnose
the other DTCs before diagnosing the DTC P2110.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Check for self-test DTCs.
Are any DTCs present other than P2107 and P2110?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
For DTC P2110, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS
and diagnose the DTC.
For DTC P2107, GO to DV23.
DV19 VISUALLY INSPECT THE ETB
NOTE:
Make sure the ETB harness connector is properly connected.
Key in OFF position.
Inspect the ETB for damaged housing, harness connector, and harness.
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DV20.
DV20 CHECK THE TACM FOR A SHORT OR OPEN
ETBTACM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
(+)
ETBTACM
Connector,
Component
Side
TACM+
(-)
ETBTACM
Connector,
Component
Side
TACM-
Is the resistance between 1 ohm - 900 ohms?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 223
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
INSTALL a new ETB. REFER to the FUEL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES to
INSTALL a new throttle body.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DV21.
DV21 CHECK THE TACM HARNESS FOR AN OPEN
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
(+)
( - ) PCM
ETBTACM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
TACM+
TACM+
TACMTACM-
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DV22.
DV22 CHECK THE TACM+ AND TACM- CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
(+)
ETBTACM
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
TACM+
Ground
TACMGround
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DV23.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DV23 CHECK THE HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GND, PWR, ETCREF, AND ETCRTN
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 224
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
(+)
ETBTACM
Connector,
Harness Side
TACM+
TACM+
TACM+
TACM+
TACMTACMTACMTACM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
PWRGND
VPWR
ETCRTN
ETCREF
PWRGND
ETCRTN
VPWR
ETCREF
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DV24.
DV24 CHECK FOR TACM HARNESS CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between:
(+)
(-)
ETBTACM
ETBTACM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
TACM+
TACM-
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
For DTCs P2111 or P2112, GO to DV25.
For all others, GO to DV26.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DV25 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN
ETBTACM connector connected.
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP1 and TP2 PIDs.
Wiggle, shake, and bend the harness from the TP to the PCM.
Are the voltages between 0.49 - 4.65 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 225
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to DV26.
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DV26 CHECK FOR SELF-TEST CODES
ETBTACM connector connected.
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the self-test.
Is DTC P2101 present?
Yes
GO to DV27.
No
GO to DV29.
DV27 CHECK FOR PROPER TACM+ WIRING IN THE HARNESS CONNECTOR
Key in OFF position.
ETBTACM connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
(+)
( - ) PCM
ETBTACM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
TACM+
TACM+
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DV28.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. WIRE the TACM harness
connector per the TACM and PCM connector
diagrams.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DV28 CHECK FOR PROPER TACM- WIRING IN THE HARNESS CONNECTOR
Measure the resistance between:
(+)
ETBTACM
Connector,
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 226
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side
TACMTACM
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DV30.
No
GO to DV29.
DV29 CHECK THE REPAIR THROUGH PROCEDURE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Record and clear the DTCs.
Cycle the accelerator pedal to the floor and back several times.
Check for self-test DTCs.
Are any ETC system related DTCs present?
Yes
GO to DV30.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DV30 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DW: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 227
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
WARNING: While conducting tests on a hot engine take all safety precautions to
prevent skin contact with hot engine components. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
HO2S/O2S (9F472)
HO2S/O2S (9G444)
harness circuits: HO2S, HO2S Heater, VPWR, and SIGRTN
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
The pin numbering for the connector is in reference to the connector lock tab. Not all connector key
combinations are shown.
Fig. 81: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Front (HO2S-Front) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 228
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 82: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Front (HO2S-Front) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 83: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Front (HO2S-Front) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
F-150,
Grand Marquis,
Mark LT,
Mustang,
Ranger,
Town Car
Focus
Connector
A
B
Pin
Circuit
2
4
3
1
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
1
3
VPWR
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 229
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
All other vehicles
C
4
2
1
3
4
2
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
The pin numbering for the connector is in reference to the connector lock tab. Not all connector key
combinations are shown.
Fig. 84: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Rear (HO2S-Rear) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 85: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Rear (HO2S-Rear) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 230
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 86: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Rear (HO2S-Rear) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner,
F-150,
Mark LT
Connector
A
Focus
B
All other vehicles
C
Pin
1
3
4
2
1
3
4
2
2
4
3
1
Circuit
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
E-Series 6.8L,
E-Series 5.4L Cutaway or
stripped chassis
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
E28
E69
E29
E70
T24
T47
T25
T48
B14
B38
B35, B36
Circuit
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S21
HTR21
HO2S12
HTR12
HO2S22
HTR22
HO2S13
HTR13
VPWR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 231
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner 3.0L
Escape/Mariner 2.3L
Expedition,
Navigator
F-150,
Mark LT
B41, E58, T41
E29
E69
E28
E70
E23
E1
E24
E2
B51, B52, B53
B58, E58
150 (50-50-50) Pin E30
E49
E26
E48
T24
T47
T25
T48
B35, B36
B41, E41, T41
150 (50-50-50) Pin E30
E49
T24
T47
B35, B36
B41, E41, T41
140 Pin
E29
E69
E28
E70
B39
B10
B40
B11
B51, B52, B53
B58, E58
190 Pin
E29
E69
E28
E70
T22
T1
T21
T12
B51, B52, B53
B58, E58, T43
190 Pin
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S21
HTR21
HO2S12
HTR12
HO2S22
HTR22
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S21
HTR21
HO2S12
HTR12
HO2S22
HTR22
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S12
HTR12
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S21
HTR21
HO2S12
HTR12
HO2S22
HTR22
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S21
HTR21
HO2S12
HTR12
HO2S22
HTR22
VPWR
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 232
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
F-Super Duty 6.8L Narrow
frame
170 Pin
Focus 2.0L PZEV
190 Pin
Focus 2.0L
190 Pin
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L,
MKZ
140 Pin
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
140 Pin
Fusion 2.3L PZEV,
Milan 2.3L PZEV
140 Pin
E28
E69
E29
E70
B14
B38
B35, B36
B41, E58, T41
E11
E52
T16
T18
T7
T25
B67, B68
B58, E64, T40
E11
E52
T16
T18
B67, B68
B58, E64, T40
E28
E69
E29
E70
E3
E23
E4
E24
B51, B52
B58, E58
E28
E69
E3
E23
B51, B52
B58, E58
E28
E69
E3
E23
E5
E25
B51, B52
B58, E58
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S21
HTR21
HO2S13
HTR13
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S12
HTR12
HO2S13
HTR13
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S12
HTR12
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S21
HTR21
HO2S12
HTR12
HO2S22
HTR22
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S12
HTR12
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S12
HTR12
HO2S13
HTR13
VPWR
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 233
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Ranger 2.3L
170 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
E28
E69
T24
T47
B35, B36
B41, E58, T41
E28
E69
E29
E70
T24
T47
T25
T48
B35, B36
B41, E58, T41
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S12
HTR12
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S11
HTR11
HO2S21
HTR21
HO2S12
HTR12
HO2S22
HTR22
VPWR
SIGRTN
DW1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0040, P0041, P0053, P0054, P0055, P0059, P0060, P0132, P0133, P0135, P0138, P0139,
P0141, P0144, P0147, P0152, P0153, P0155, P0158, P0159, P0161, or P1127 present?
Yes
For DTCs P0040 or P0041, GO to DW2.
For DTCs P0053, P0054, P0055, P0059 or P0060,
GO to DW14.
For DTCs P0132, P0138, P0144, P0152 or P0158,
GO to DW20.
For DTCs P0133 or P0153, GO to DW3.
For DTCs P0135, P0139, P0141, P0147, P0155,
P0159 or P0161, GO to DW9.
For DTC P1127, GO to DW19.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DW2 KOER DTCS P0040 AND P0041: CROSSED SENSOR WIRES
Key in OFF position.
Check the vehicle repair history.
Verify the HO2S connectors are connected to the correct engine bank.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 234
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DW3 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0133 AND P0153: CARRY OUT THE KOER SELF-TEST
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Are DTCs P0040, P0041 or P1127 present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to DW4.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
DW4 CHECK THE HO2S RESPONSE TEST RESULTS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the diagnostic monitoring test results for the HO2S11 and HO2S21.
Is the indicated value greater than the minimum threshold?
Yes
CLEAR the DTCs.
GO to DW3.
No
GO to DW5.
DW5 CHECK FOR UNMETERED AIR LEAKS
NOTE:
Fuel calculations can be affected by unmetered air leaks.
Carefully inspect the following areas for potential air leaks:
hoses connecting to the mass air flow (MAF) sensor assembly
hoses connecting to the throttle body
intake manifold gasket leaks
PCV system
the vacuum lines are disconnected
improperly seated engine oil dipstick, tube or oil fill cap
exhaust leaks at flanges and gaskets
Are any air leaks present?
Yes
REPAIR the source of the air leak. RESET the keep
alive memory (KAM). REFER toRESETTING
GO to DW6.
THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 235
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DW6 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
NOTE:
HO2S is displayed as O2S on the scan tool.
HO2S connector disconnected.
Check the connector (both halves) for any water contamination.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A HO2S Point B HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
VPWR
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Is the voltage greater than 1 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CHANGE the engine oil and oil filter.
GO to DW7.
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
No
DW7 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
A vehicle hoist may be required to access the HO2S harness.
Key in OFF position.
Remove the jumper wire(s).
Visually inspect the HO2S harness for exposed wiring, water contamination, corrosion, and proper
assembly.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
HO2S Signal
SIGRTN
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 236
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DW8.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DW8 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
VPWR
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DW9.
No
GO to DW12.
DW9 DTCS P0135, P0139, P0141, P0147, P0155, P0159 OR P0161: CHECK FOR A SOURCE OF POTENTIAL HO2S
CONTAMINATION
Investigate the following items as potential sources of HO2S contamination:
use of unapproved silicon sealers
fuel contaminated by silicon additives
excessive oil consumption
glycol leaking internally in the engine
lead-contaminated fuel
short drive cycles in cold weather
use of unapproved cleaning agents
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR the source of the contamination.
CHANGE the engine oil and oil filter.
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
GO to DW10.
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
No
DW10 VISUALLY INSPECT THE HO2S HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 237
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PCM connector connected.
Visually inspect the HO2S harness for exposed wiring, water contamination, corrosion, and proper
assembly.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
For DTCs P0139 or P0159, GO to DW11.
For all others, GO to DW12.
DW11 CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR LEAKS AND MODIFICATIONS
Check for leaks in the exhaust system.
Visually inspect the vehicle for aftermarket accessories and performance modifications.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DW25.
DW12 CHECK THE HO2S AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
Verify the harness pins are in the proper location.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
HO2S Signal
SIGRTN
SIGRTN
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DW13.
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DW13 CARRY OUT THE KOEO ON DEMAND SELF-TEST
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Are DTCs P0135, P0141, P0147, P0155 or P0161 present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 238
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to DW14.
No
GO to DW15.
DW14 DTCS P0053, P0054, P0055, P0059 AND P0060: CHECK FOR VPWR IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
If DTCs P0053, P0054, P0055, P0059, or P0060 are present, test their related
circuits individually.
Key in OFF position.
HO2S connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) HO2S
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
SIGRTN
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to DW15.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CHECK the fuses.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DW15 CHECK THE HO2S HEATER FOR SHORTS IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
If DTCs P0053, P0054, P0055, P0059, or P0060 are present, test their related
circuits individually.
Key in OFF position.
HO2S connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HO2S
Connector,
Harness Side
HO2S Heater
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HO2S
( - ) HO2S
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 239
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Heater
VPWR
HO2S Heater
SIGRTN
HO2S Heater
HO2S Signal
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DW16.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DW16 CHECK THE HO2S HEATER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Heater
HO2S Heater
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DW17.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DW17 CHECK THE INTERNAL RESISTANCE OF THE HO2S HEATER
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HO2S
Connector,
Component
Side
HO2S Heater
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR
Is the resistance between 3 - 30 ohms?
Yes
GO to DW18.
No
INSTALL a new HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 240
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
DW18 CHECK THE HO2S HEATER CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO SIGRTN OR GND
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HO2S
Connector,
Component
Side
HO2S Heater
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HO2S
Connector,
Component
Side
HO2S Heater
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DW25.
No
INSTALL a new HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
DW19 KOER DTC P1127: EXHAUST TEMPERATURE OUT OF RANGE
NOTE:
Address all other DTCs before proceeding.
Key ON, engine running.
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Heater PID.
Is the PID state ON?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 241
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CARRY OUT the KOER self-test.
RUN the engine until the PID indicates ON.
CARRY OUT the KOER self-test.
DW20 DTCS P0132, P0138, P0144, P0152 AND P0158: VISUALLY INSPECT THE HO2S HARNESS
NOTE:
Disconnect the suspect HO2S harness connector. Only the suspect HO2S
needs to be diagnosed.
Key in OFF position.
HO2S connector disconnected.
Visually inspect the HO2S harness.
check the connector (both halves) for contamination
make sure the connector pins are fully seated
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DW21.
DW21 CHECK THE HO2S SIGNAL LEVEL TOO HIGH
HO2S connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Is the voltage less than 1.1 V?
Yes
GO to DW22.
No
GO to DW23.
DW22 CARRY OUT A THOROUGH WIGGLE TEST ON THE HO2S HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Carry out a thorough wiggle test on the HO2S harness.
Does the voltage change during the wiggle test?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DW23 CHECK THE HO2S SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO VPWR INSIDE THE SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 242
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
HO2S connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Is the voltage less than 1.1 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
GO to DW24.
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
No
DW24 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) HO2S
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
HO2S Signal
Ground
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DW25.
DW25 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 243
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DX: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
NOTE:
Engine coolant temperature must be greater than 10°C (50°F) to pass the KOEO
self-test and greater than 82°C (180°F) to pass the KOER self-test. to
accomplish this, the engine must be at normal operating temperature.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (12A648)
harness circuits: ECT and SIGRTN
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Voltage values calculated for VREF = 5 volts. These values can vary by 15% due to sensor and VREF
variations.
Fig. 87: Temperature Sensor Temperature To Voltage Graph
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature
Temperature Sensor Values
°C
°F
Voltage
Resistance (K ohms)
120
248
0.28
1.18
110
230
0.36
1.55
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 244
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
212
194
176
158
140
122
104
86
68
50
32
14
0.47
0.61
0.80
1.05
1.37
1.77
2.23
2.74
3.26
3.73
4.14
4.45
2.07
2.80
3.84
5.37
7.70
10.97
16.15
24.27
37.30
58.75
95.85
160.31
Fig. 88: Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
1
Circuit
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
ECT (Engine Coolant Temperature)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
Fusion,
Milan
Connector
150 (50-50-50) Pin E40
E41
E21
140 Pin
E57
E58
E18
Pin
Circuit
VREF
SIGRTN
ECT
VREF
SIGRTN
ECT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:53 AM
Page 245
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
All other vehicles
170 Pin
E57
E58
E18
VREF
SIGRTN
ECT
DX1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0116, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0125, P0128, P0217, P1116, or P1117 present?
Yes
No
For continuous memory DTC P0116, GO to DX14.
For KOEO and KOER DTC P0117, GO to DX12.
For continuous memory DTCs P0117, P0118,
P0119, or P1117, GO to DX16.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
For KOEO and KOER DTC P0118, GO to DX8.
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For continuous memory DTCs P0125, or P0128,
GO to DX19.
For DTC P0217, GO to DX21.
For KOEO and KOER DTC P1116, GO to DX2.
DX2 DTC P1116: CHECK THE COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING: To avoid personal injury do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap
while the engine is operating or hot. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is
loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
The DTC indicates the temperature sensor is out of self-test range. The engine is not at normal operating
temperature.
Check the vehicle coolant level.
Is the cooling system OK?
Yes
GO to DX3.
No
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- ESERIES , for loss of coolant diagnosis.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DX3 CHECK IF THE VEHICLE ENGINE STARTS
Attempt to start the engine.
Does the engine start and run normally?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 246
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to DX6.
GO to DX4.
DX4 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE ECT SENSOR WITH THE ENGINE OFF
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Key in OFF position.
ECT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
ECT - Pin 1
( - ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DX5.
No
INSTALL a new ECT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DX5 CHECK THE CIRCUIT FROM THE MODULE TO THE COMPONENT
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
ECT Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ECT PID.
Using the data collected from the previous step, compare temperature resistance measured at the sensor to
the PID temperature voltage measured at the PCM.
Does the measured value at the sensor agree with the measured PID voltage value at the PCM?
Yes
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
No
GO to DX10.
DX6 CHECK THE ECT SENSOR OPERATION
Run the engine until the engine temperature stabilizes.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 247
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Verify the upper radiator hose is hot and the cooling system is pressurized.
Repeat the KOER self-test.
Is DTC P1116 present?
Yes
GO to DX7.
No
The engine temperature was not stabilized. REPAIR
any other DTCs as necessary.
DX7 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE ECT SENSOR
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
The vehicle must be at normal operating temperature.
Key in OFF position.
ECT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
ECT - Pin 1
( - ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DX25.
No
INSTALL a new ECT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DX8 DTC P0118: CHECK THE ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
The DTC indicates the sensor signal is greater than the self-test maximum.
ECT Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
( - ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 248
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ECT - Pin 1
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to DX9.
No
GO to DX10.
DX9 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE ECT SENSOR WITH THE ENGINE OFF
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Key in OFF position.
ECT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
ECT - Pin 1
( - ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DX11.
No
INSTALL a new ECT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DX10 CHECK THE SIGNAL AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
ECT
SIGRTN
( - ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
ECT - Pin 1
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 249
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DX25.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DX11 CHECK THE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO VREF
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ECT
VREF
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DX25.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DX12 DTC P0117: SIMULATE AN OPPOSITE SIGNAL TO THE PCM
The DTC indicates the sensor signal is less than the self-test minimum.
Possible causes:
grounded circuit in the harness
incorrect harness connections
damaged sensor
damaged PCM
ECT Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ECT PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.2 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new ECT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DX13.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 250
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DX13 CHECK THE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
ECT
SIGRTN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) 12 Volt
Connector,
Vehicle Battery
Harness Side
Negative
ECT
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DX25.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DX14 DTC P0116: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE ECT SENSOR WITH THE ENGINE OFF
NOTE:
Verify the engine temperature is at ambient room temperature before continuing
with this test. A soak period of 6 hours may be required. Refer toDIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS for information
concerning P0116.
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Key in OFF position.
ECT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
ECT - Pin 1
( - ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 251
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
GO to DX15.
No
INSTALL a new ECT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DX15 DTC P0116: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE ECT SENSOR
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
NOTE:
Verify the engine is at operating temperature before taking the ECT reading.
ECT Sensor connector connected.
Run the engine until the engine temperature stabilizes.
Key in OFF position.
ECT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
ECT - Pin 1
( - ) ECT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
The concern is not present at this time. CARRY
OUT the OBD drive cycle to determine if fuel,
HO2S, catalyst and misfire monitors can be
executed. REFER toON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
(OBD) DRIVE CYCLE .
No
INSTALL a new ECT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DX16 DTCS P0117, P0118, P0119 OR P1117: INTERMITTENT CHECK
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ECT PID.
While observing the PID, carry out the following:
Tap on the sensor to simulate road shock
Wiggle the sensor connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 252
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is there a large change in the voltage reading?
Yes
DISCONNECT and INSPECT the connector. If
OK, INSTALL a new ECT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DX17.
DX17 CHECK THE ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL (EEC) WIRING HARNESS
Access the PCM and monitor the ECT PID.
While observing the PID, wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working
from the sensor to the PCM.
Is there a large change in the voltage reading?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DX18.
DX18 CHECK THE PCM AND VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
ECT Sensor connector disconnected.
Are the connectors and terminals OK?
Yes
No
The concern is not present at this time.
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
REPAIR as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
the self-test.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DX19 DTCS P0125 OR P0128: CHECK THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
WARNING: To avoid personal injury do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap
while the engine is operating or hot. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is
loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
The DTC indicates the engine coolant temperature has not achieved the required engine operation
temperature level, since start-up within a specified amount of time.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 253
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Possible causes:
insufficient warm up time
leaking or stuck-open thermostat
low engine coolant
Check the engine coolant level.
Is the engine coolant fill level correct?
Yes
GO to DX20.
No
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- ESERIES , for loss of coolant diagnosis. REPAIR as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DX20 CHECK THE SENSOR OPERATION
Run the engine until the engine temperature stabilizes.
Verify the radiator hoses are hot and the cooling system is pressurized.
Access the PCM and monitor the ECT PID.
Is the temperature greater than 77°C (170.6°F)?
Yes
No
The test is complete.
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO for cooling system diagnosis. REPAIR as necessary.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DX21 DTC P0217: INDICATES AN ENGINE OVERHEAT CONDITION
WARNING: To avoid personal injury do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap
while the engine is operating or hot. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is
loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Check the engine coolant level.
Is the engine coolant fill level correct?
Yes
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
to diagnose the overheating condition. REPAIR as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
to diagnose the loss of coolant. REPAIR as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 254
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DX22 DTC P0298: ENGINE OIL OVER TEMPERATURE CONDITION
NOTE:
The engine oil temperature protection strategy in the PCM is activated. This
protects the engine against mechanical damage due to overheating.
Check for an overheating condition and base engine concerns.
Are there any overheating or base engine concerns?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DX23.
DX23 CHECK FOR ECT DTCS
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P0117, P0118, P1116 or P1117 present?
Yes
DISREGARD the engine oil temperature (EOT)
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) at this time.
ADDRESS the next DTC. GO toDIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND
DESCRIPTIONS .
No
GO to DX24.
DX24 ROAD TEST THE VEHICLE AND MONITOR FOR ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Access the freeze frame data (if available) and record the DTC concern conditions.
Access the PCM and monitor the ECT PID.
Test drive the vehicle and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
Observe the ECT PID.
Does the engine overheat?
Yes
No
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
to diagnose the overheat symptom. REPAIR as
time. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selftest.
DX25 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 255
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DY: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (12A648)
harness circuits: EOT and SIGRTN
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Engine oil temperature must be greater than 10°C (50°F) to pass the KOEO self-test and greater than 66°C
(150°F) to pass the KOER self-test.
Voltage values calculated for VREF = 5 volts. These values can vary by 15% due to sensor and VREF
variations.
Fig. 89: Temperature Sensor Temperature To Voltage Graph
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 256
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Temperature
°C
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
Temperature Sensor Values
Voltage
Resistance (K ohms)
0.28
1.18
0.36
1.55
0.47
2.07
0.61
2.80
0.80
3.84
1.05
5.37
1.37
7.70
1.77
10.97
2.23
16.15
2.74
24.27
3.26
37.30
3.73
58.75
4.14
95.85
4.45
160.31
°F
248
230
212
194
176
158
140
122
104
86
68
50
32
14
Fig. 90: Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 257
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 91: Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Mustang
Connector
A
All other vehicles
B
Pin
2
1
2
1
Circuit
SIGRTN
EOT
SIGRTN
EOT
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Connector
Pin
E58
B35
E57
E27
170 Pin
Circuit
SIGRTN
VPWR
VREF
EOT
DY1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0196, P0197, P0198, P0298, or P1184 present?
Yes
No
For DTCs P0196 or P1184, GO to DY2.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
For DTCs P0197 or P0198, GO to DY3.
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For continuous memory DTC P0298, GO to DY14.
DY2 DTCS P0196 OR P1184: CHECK THE EOT SENSOR OPERATION
NOTE:
Before continuing with this pinpoint test, verify the engine oil condition and
level are within specification.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 258
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Run the engine until the engine temperature stabilizes.
Verify the radiator hoses are hot and the cooling system is pressurized.
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P0196 or P1184 present?
Yes
GO to DY3.
No
The engine temperature was not stabilized. REPAIR
any other DTCs as necessary.
DY3 DTCS P0196, P0197, P0198, P1184 OR P0298: CHECK THE TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the EOT PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.3 V?
Yes
GO to DY4.
No
GO to DY6.
DY4 SIMULATE AN OPPOSITE SIGNAL TO THE PCM
Key ON, engine OFF.
EOT Sensor connector disconnected.
Access the PCM and monitor the EOT PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.2 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new EOT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DY5.
DY5 CHECK THE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) EOT
( - ) EOT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
EOT
SIGRTN
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 259
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) EOT
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
EOT
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DY18.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DY6 CHECK FOR HIGH EOT SENSOR VOLTAGE
Access the PCM and monitor the EOT PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.2 V?
Yes
GO to DY7.
No
GO to DY11.
DY7 CHECK THE EOT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
EOT Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) EOT
( - ) EOT
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
EOT
SIGRTN
Is the voltage greater than 4.2 V?
Yes
GO to DY8.
No
GO to DY10.
DY8 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE EOT SENSOR WITH THE ENGINE OFF
Key in OFF position.
EOT Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 260
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) EOT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
EOT
( - ) EOT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Is the resistance within specification?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new EOT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DY9.
DY9 CHECK THE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORTS TO PWR
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
EOT - Pin E27 VREF - Pin E57
VPWR - Pin
EOT - Pin E27
B35
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DY18.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DY10 CHECK THE SIGNAL AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
( - ) EOT
Sensor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 261
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side
Connector,
Harness Side
EOT - Pin E27 EOT
SIGRTN - Pin
SIGRTN
E58
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DY18.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DY11 INTERMITTENT CHECK
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the EOT PID.
While observing the PID, carry out the following:
Tap on the sensor to simulate road shock
Wiggle the sensor connector
Is there a large change in the voltage reading?
Yes
DISCONNECT and INSPECT the connector.
REPAIR as necessary. If OK, INSTALL a new
EOT sensor. REFER to the ELECTRONIC
GO to DY12.
ENGINE CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES
-- E-SERIES . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
No
DY12 CHECK THE ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL (EEC) WIRING HARNESS
Access the PCM and monitor the EOT PID.
While observing the PID, wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working
from the sensor to the PCM.
Is there a large change in the voltage reading?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DY13.
DY13 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE EOT SENSOR WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the beginning of this test for the resistance specifications.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 262
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Run the engine until the engine temperature stabilizes.
Verify the radiator hoses are hot and the cooling system is pressurized.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) EOT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
EOT
( - ) EOT
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
Is the resistance within specification for the given engine temperature?
Yes
The concern is not present at this time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new EOT sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DY14 DTC P0298: ENGINE OIL OVER TEMPERATURE CONDITION
NOTE:
The engine oil temperature protection strategy in the PCM has been activated.
This protects the engine against mechanical damage due to overheating.
Check for an overheating condition and base engine concerns.
Are there any overheating or base engine concerns?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern. REPAIR as necessary.
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES
GO to DY15.
to diagnose the overheat symptom.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
DY15 CHECK FOR EOT SENSOR HARDWARE
The engine oil temperature protection strategy in the PCM can be activated with or without an EOT
sensor.
Does the vehicle have a EOT sensor?
Yes
GO to DY3.
No
GO to DY16.
DY16 IDENTIFY THE CUSTOMER'S DRIVING HABITS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 263
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Identify the customers driving habits.
Access the freeze frame data (if available) and record the DTC concern conditions.
Does the vehicle appear to have been driven in an incorrect transmission gear or at high RPM for
an extended period?
Yes
ADVISE the customer that improper transmission
gear selection and high RPM for an extended period
GO to DY17.
initializes the engine protection strategy.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
DY17 TYPE OF ENGINE COOLANT SENSOR
NOTE:
When an oil temperature sensor is not present, the PCM uses an oil algorithm to
infer actual temperature based on input from the engine temperature sensor.
Is the vehicle equipped with cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor?
Yes
GO to DL26.
No
GO to DX22.
DY18 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST DZ: UNIVERSAL HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
WARNING: While conducting tests on a hot engine take all safety precautions to
prevent skin contact with hot engine components. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 264
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
Only diagnose the suspect universal HO2S indicated by the DTC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
universal HO2S (9Y460)
harness circuits: UO2S, UO2SGREF, UO2SHTR, UO2SPC, UO2SPCT, and VPWR
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 92: Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
Circuit
UO2SPCT (Universal Oxygen Sensor Pumping Current Trim)
UO2SPC (Universal Oxygen Sensor Pumping Current)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
UO2SGREF (Universal Oxygen Sensor Ground Reference)
UO2S (Universal Oxygen Sensor)
UO2SHTR (Universal Oxygen Sensor Heater)
5
1
4
2
6
3
Pin
E18
E20
E19
E21
E69
E70
E4
E6
Circuit
UO2S11 (Universal Oxygen Sensor Bank 1, Sensor 1)
UO2S21 (Universal Oxygen Sensor Bank 2, Sensor 1)
UO2SGREF11 (Universal Oxygen Sensor Ground Reference
Bank 1, Sensor 1)
UO2SGREF21 (Universal Oxygen Sensor Ground Reference
Bank 2, Sensor 1)
UO2SHTR11 (Universal Oxygen Sensor Heater Bank 1, Sensor
1)
UO2SHTR21 (Universal Oxygen Sensor Heater Bank 2, Sensor
1)
UO2SPC11 (Universal Oxygen Sensor Pumping Current Bank 1,
Sensor 1)
UO2SPC21 (Universal Oxygen Sensor Pumping Current Bank 2,
Sensor 1)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 265
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
E5
UO2SPCT11 (Universal Oxygen Sensor Pumping Current Trim
Bank 1, Sensor 1)
UO2SPCT21 (Universal Oxygen Sensor Pumping Current Trim
Bank 2, Sensor 1)
E7
DZ1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0030, P0040, P0050, P0053, P0059, P0130, P0133, P0134, P0135, P0150, P0153, P0154,
P0155, P1127, P2096, P2097, P2098, or P2099 present?
Yes
For DTCs P0030 or P0050, GO to DZ2.
For DTC P0040, GO to DZ5.
For DTCs P0053, P0059, P0135 or P0155, GO to
DZ6.
For DTCs P0130 or P0150, GO to DZ11.
For DTCs P0133 or P0153, GO to DZ15.
For DTCs P0134 or P0154, GO to DZ18.
For DTC P1127, GO to DZ19.
For DTCs P2096, P2097, P2098 or P2099, GO to
DZ20.
No
For symptoms without DTCs, GO to DZ23.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
DZ2 DTCS P0030 AND P0050: CHECK FOR MISFIRE CONCERNS AND AFTERMARKET EQUIPMENT
Key in OFF position.
Check for the following:
misfire concern
non-factory or aftermarket equipment that may increase the exhaust temperature
Universal HO2S connector disconnected.
Check the universal HO2S connector for damage or corrosion.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DZ3.
DZ3 CHECK THE UO2SHTR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Universal
HO2S
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 266
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
UO2SHTR - Pin
Ground
3
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DZ4.
DZ4 CHECK THE UO2S, UO2SGREF, UO2SHTR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal
( - ) PCM
HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
UO2S - Pin 6
UO2S
UO2SGREF UO2SGREF
Pin 2
UO2SHTR - Pin
HO2S Heater
3
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new Universal HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
REPEAT the self-test.
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
DZ5 DTC P0040: CROSSED SENSOR WIRES
Key in OFF position.
Check the vehicle repair history.
Verify the connectors are connected to the correct engine bank.
Is a concern present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 267
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
DZ6 DTCS P0053, P0059, P0135 AND P0155: CHECK FOR VPWR IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Universal HO2S connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Universal
HO2S
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 4 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to DZ7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CHECK the fuses.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
DZ7 CHECK THE UO2SHTR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Universal HO2S connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal
( - ) PCM
HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
UO2SHTR - Pin
UO2SHTR
3
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DZ8.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 268
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
DZ8 CHECK THE UO2SHTR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal
HO2S
( - ) Vehicle
Connector,
Battery
Harness Side
UO2SHTR - Pin Negative
3
terminal
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal ( - ) Universal
HO2S
HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
UO2SHTR - Pin
UO2S - Pin 6
3
UO2SHTR - Pin UO2SGREF 3
Pin 2
UO2SHTR - Pin
UO2SPC - Pin 1
3
UO2SHTR - Pin UO2SPCT - Pin
3
5
UO2SHTR - Pin
VPWR - Pin 4
3
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DZ9.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DZ9 CHECK THE INTERNAL RESISTANCE OF THE UNIVERSAL HO2S HEATER
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal ( - ) Universal
HO2S
HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
UO2SHTR - Pin
VPWR - Pin 4
3
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 269
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance between 1.8 - 9 ohms?
Yes
GO to DZ10.
No
INSTALL a new Universal HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
DZ10 CHECK THE UO2SHTR CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal
HO2S
Connector,
(-)
Component
Side
UO2SHTR - Pin
Ground
3
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DZ25.
No
INSTALL a new Universal HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
DZ11 DTCS P0130 AND P0150: CHECK THE UO2S AND UO2SGREF CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE
HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Universal HO2S connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal
HO2S
Connector,
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 270
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side Harness Side
UO2S - Pin 6
UO2S
UO2SGREF UO2SGREF
Pin 2
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to DZ12.
DZ12 CHECK THE UO2S, UO2SGREF, UO2SPC, AND UO2SPCT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN
THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal
HO2S
Connector,
Harness Side
UO2S - Pin 6
UO2SGREF Pin 2
UO2SPC - Pin 1
UO2SPCT - Pin
5
(-)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to DZ13.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DZ13 CHECK THE UO2S, UO2SGREF, UO2SPC, AND UO2SPCT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN
THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Universal
HO2S
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
UO2S - Pin 6
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 271
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
UO2SGREF Ground
Pin 2
UO2SPC - Pin 1 Ground
UO2SPCT - Pin
Ground
5
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DZ14.
DZ14 CHECK THE UO2SGREF CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Universal
HO2S
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
UO2SGREF Ground
Pin 2
Is the voltage between 2.4 - 2.6 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new Universal HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
GO to DZ25.
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
No
DZ15 DTCS P0133 AND P0153: CARRY OUT THE KOER SELF-TEST
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Are any DTCs present other than P0133 or P0153?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 272
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to DZ16.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
DZ16 CHECK FOR A SOURCE OF POTENTIAL CONTAMINATION
Investigate the following items as potential sources of universal HO2S contamination:
use of unapproved silicon sealers
fuel contaminated by silicon additives
excessive oil consumption
glycol leaking internally in the engine
lead-contaminated fuel
short drive cycles in cold weather
use of unapproved cleaning agents
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR the source of the contamination.
CHANGE the engine oil and oil filter.
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
GO to DZ17.
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
No
DZ17 CHECK THE UNIVERSAL HO2S RESPONSE TEST RESULTS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the diagnostic monitoring test results for the HO2S11 and HO2S21.
Is the indicated value greater than the minimum threshold?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new Universal HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
DZ18 DTCS P0134 AND P0154: CHECK THE UO2SPC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 273
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
Universal HO2S connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal
( - ) PCM
HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
UO2SPC - Pin 1 UO2SPC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new Universal HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
REPEAT the self-test.
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
DZ19 KOER DTC P1127: EXHAUST TEMPERATURE OUT OF RANGE
NOTE:
Address all other DTCs before proceeding.
Key ON, engine running.
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Access the PCM and monitor the HTR11 and HTR21 PIDs.
Are the PID states ON?
Yes
CARRY OUT the KOER self-test.
No
RUN the engine until the PID indicates ON.
CARRY OUT the KOER self-test.
DZ20 DTCS P2096, P2097, P2098 AND P2099: VISUALLY INSPECT THE UPSTREAM AND DOWNSTREAM HO2S
CONNECTORS
Key in OFF position.
HO2S connector disconnected.
Universal HO2S connector disconnected.
Check for a loose connection, and damaged or corroded terminals.
Is a concern present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 274
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DZ21.
DZ21 CHECK FOR LEAKS IN THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually inspect the exhaust system for the following:
exhaust leaks at flanges and gaskets
HO2Ss not tightened to specification
physical exhaust system concerns
aftermarket exhaust
punctures or cracks in the catalytic converter
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to DZ22.
DZ22 CHECK FOR POTENTIAL SENSOR CONTAMINATION CONCERNS
Investigate the following items as potential sources of universal HO2S contamination:
use of unapproved silicon sealers
fuel contaminated by silicon additives
excessive oil consumption
glycol leaking internally in the engine
lead-contaminated fuel
short drive cycles in cold weather
use of unapproved cleaning agents
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR the source of the contamination.
CHANGE the engine oil and oil filter.
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
GO to DZ25.
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
No
DZ23 CHECK THE UO2SPCT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Universal HO2S connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 275
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal
( - ) PCM
HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
UO2SPCT - Pin
UO2SPCT
5
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to DZ24.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
DZ24 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE CURRENT TRIM RESISTOR IN THE UNIVERSAL HO2S
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal ( - ) Universal
HO2S
HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
UO2SPCT - Pin
UO2SPC - Pin 1
5
Is the resistance between 25 - 330 ohms?
Yes
The concern is elsewhere. RETURN toNO
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
PRESENT SYMPTOM CHART INDEX for
further direction.
No
INSTALL a new Universal HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
DZ25 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 276
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST EM: EMISSION COMPLIANCE
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
Canada and some states or metropolitan areas in the United States require
periodic emission, or inspection/maintenance (I/M) tests. All Ford products are
designed to pass these tests. If a Ford product fails an I/M test, it is probably
because 1) the engine or catalyst temperature was not warm and stabilized
before the test, or 2) the vehicle had idled excessively before the test.
If any new emission components are installed, carry out the following steps before repeating the I/M test
procedure:
Reset the keep alive memory (KAM). Refer toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM) .
To relearn some basic adaptive learning (trim) values, run the engine at 2,500 RPM for 1 minute and idle
the engine for 2 minutes.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 277
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 93: Exhaust Gas Analysis Chart
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Verifying an Excessive Grams Per Mile (GPM) Indication Using a Parts Per Million (PPM) Reading.
For vehicle gas reading(s) that are excessive, compare the actual GPM reading to the gas cut point level needed
to pass testing. This gives an indication of how much the PPM reading has to be reduced (if the actual reading is
twice the cut point, the baseline reading has to be cut in half or more).
Example:
The actual HC produced by a vehicle is 1.6 gpm. The cut point for HC in this example is 0.8 gpm. The
actual reading is twice the cut point.
The HC reading obtained for the same vehicle during the baseline drive averages 440 ppm. In order for
this vehicle to pass the I/M test, the HC reading from the verification trip must be at least half of the
baseline reading, or an average of 220 ppm or less.
This method only gives a general idea of how much the PPM reading needs to be reduced in order for the
vehicle to pass an I/M test that calculates GPM. This test is not exact. Experience still has to be used to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 278
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
determine if the emission readings are reduced enough for the vehicle to pass the I/M test.
EM1 ANALYZE THE I/M TEST REPORT
Analyze the I/M test report for data entry errors.
model
model year
correct calibration, if included on the report
correct test weight, if included on the report (this number is less than the vehicle's GVW)
Analyze the I/M test report results.
identify high and low gas readings.
for reports that include a drive trace, identify during which mode the gas(es) failed. Be aware that if
all gases were high early then decreased, the catalyst may have been cool when testing began.
Has the I/M test report been analyzed?
Yes
GO to EM2.
No
REPEAT the test step.
EM2 EVAP SYSTEM LEAK OR PURGE FLOW TEST (IF THESE TESTS WERE CARRIED OUT)
Does the vehicle fail only an EVAP system leak or purge flow test (if these tests are carried out)?
Yes
This is an EVAP concern only.
GO to EM22.
No
GO to EM3.
EM3 BASELINE THE VEHICLE
NOTE:
Baselining the vehicle exhaust gas readings is important so the baseline
readings can be used for comparison after any repair is made.
Baseline the vehicle using an exhaust gas analyzer. If the vehicle must be driven, be certain any baseline
drive used is repeatable. The same drive cycle will be used to verify any repair.
During the baseline, check for any related symptoms that may be present, such as driveability,
transmission shifting or exhaust smoke concerns.
Has the vehicle been baselined?
Yes
GO to EM4.
No
REPEAT the test step.
EM4 SYMPTOM CHECKS
Check if any of the following symptoms are present:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 279
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
transmission concerns
idle concerns
driveability concerns
exhaust smoke
cooling system concerns
Are any of the symptoms present?
Yes
CARRY OUT the PCM Quick Test. REFER to the
SYMPTOM CHARTS article, QT: Step 1:
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Quick Test.
GO to EM5.
REFER to the Exhaust Gas Analysis Chart at the
beginning of this pinpoint test.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
EM5 PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Carry out the following checks:
vacuum lines for leaks and blockages
electrical connections
proper scheduled maintenance
Ford authorized emission controls and components installed on the vehicle
intake air tube and air cleaner concerns such as obstructions, leaks, or a dirty air cleaner element
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM6.
EM6 CARRY OUT THE PCM QUICK TEST
Carry out the PCM Quick Test to access any PCM DTCs. For the procedure information, refer
toPINPOINT TEST QT .
Is a concern present?
Yes
FOLLOW the Quick Test direction.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM7.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:54 AM
Page 280
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
EM7 CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) LEVELS
Does the vehicle have excessive CO levels?
Yes
Excessive CO levels indicate the engine is running
GO to EM8.
rich.
GO to EM10.
No
EM8 CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE HYDROCARBON (HC) LEVELS
Does the vehicle have excessive HC levels?
Yes
Excessive HC levels with low to normal CO levels
indicate the engine is running lean.
GO to EM9.
GO to EM16.
No
EM9 CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE OXIDES OF NITROGEN (NOX) LEVELS
Does the vehicle have excessive NOx levels?
Yes
No
VERIFY the test step results.
GO to EM20.
EM10 HIGH CO LEVELS: CHECK THE HC LEVELS
Does the vehicle have excessive HC levels?
Yes
CHECK for the engine running rich and incomplete
GO to EM12.
combustion.
GO to EM11.
No
EM11 CHECK THE SECONDARY IGNITION SYSTEM
For ignition coil on plug (COP) equipped vehicles, GO to JB2 and follow the pinpoint test direction.
For ignition coil pack equipped vehicles, GO to JC2 and follow the pinpoint test direction.
Is a concern present?
Yes
FOLLOW the pinpoint test direction.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM12.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 281
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
EM12 CHECK THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM FOR CONCERNS SUCH AS HIGH FUEL PRESSURE AND THE
ABILITY TO HOLD PRESSURE
refer to PINPOINT TEST HC and follow the pinpoint test direction.
Is a concern present?
Yes
FOLLOW the pinpoint test direction.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM13.
EM13 CHECK FOR VACUUM LEAKS/OBSTRUCTION IN THE PCV SYSTEM (SUCH AS OIL CAP, PCV VALVE,
HOSES, CUT GROMMETS, VALVE COVER BOLT TORQUE/GASKET LEAK)
GO to HG2 and follow the pinpoint test direction.
Is a concern present?
Yes
FOLLOW the pinpoint test direction.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM14.
EM14 CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
GO to HF2 and follow the pinpoint test direction.
Is a concern present?
Yes
FOLLOW the pinpoint test direction.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM15.
EM15 CHECK THE BASE ENGINE
Check for base engine concerns. Refer to the ENGINE - 4.6L AND 5.4L -- E-SERIES .
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM27.
EM16 HIGH HC WITH A NORMAL TO LOW CO LEVEL
Check the fuel delivery system for concerns. refer to PINPOINT TEST HC and follow the pinpoint test
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 282
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
direction.
Is a concern present?
Yes
FOLLOW the pinpoint test direction.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM17.
EM17 CHECK THE SECONDARY IGNITION
For ignition coil on plug (COP) equipped vehicles, GO to JB2 and follow the pinpoint test direction.
For ignition coil pack equipped vehicles, GO to JC2 and follow the pinpoint test direction.
Is a concern present?
Yes
FOLLOW the pinpoint test direction.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM18.
EM18 CHECK FOR VACUUM LEAKS/OBSTRUCTION IN THE PCV SYSTEM (SUCH AS OIL CAP, PCV VALVE,
HOSES, CUT GROMMETS, VALVE COVER BOLT TORQUE/GASKET LEAK)
GO to HG2 and follow the pinpoint test direction.
Is a concern present?
Yes
FOLLOW the pinpoint test direction.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM19.
EM19 CHECK THE BASE ENGINE
Check for base engine concerns such as intake manifold leaks, improper compression, or valvetrain or
camshaft damage. Refer to the ENGINE - 4.6L AND 5.4L -- E-SERIES to carry out the intake manifold
vacuum test, compression test, and valve train analysis.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM27.
EM20 HIGH NOX WITH NORMAL TO LOW HC AND CO LEVELS: CHECK THE BASE ENGINE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 283
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Check for base engine concerns such as excessive carbon build up in the combustion chamber. Refer to
the ENGINE - 4.6L AND 5.4L -- E-SERIES to diagnose the abnormal combustion.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM21.
EM21 ADDITIONAL CHECKS
Check the following:
transmission torque converter clutch operation
cooling system concerns such as an aftermarket front fascia covering the intake air or intake air
system modifications
engine running lean concerns such as vacuum leaks or low fuel pressure
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
No
GO to EM27.
EM22 EVAP SYSTEM CONCERN: PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Analyze the I/M test report to determine when the concern is present. Attempt to verify the concern.
Check the following:
fuel filler cap
capless fuel tank filler pipe (if equipped)
EVAP system lines/hoses for proper connections, damage or blockage
fuel vapor storage canister damage
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
After any repair,
GO to EM25.
No
GO to EM23.
EM23 CARRY OUT THE PCM QUICK TEST
Carry out the PCM Quick Test to access any PCM DTCs. For the procedure information, refer
toPINPOINT TEST QT .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 284
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is a concern present?
Yes
FOLLOW the Quick Test direction.
After any repair,
GO to EM25.
No
GO to EM24.
EM24 EVAP SYSTEM CHECK
Check the EVAP system for leaks. Refer to the EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES to carry
out the evaporative emission system leak test.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
After any repair,
GO to EM25.
No
VERIFY the test step results.
If all the test steps are OK, refer to PINPOINT
TEST Z.
For additional symptoms, REFER to the
SYMPTOM CHARTS article.
After any repair,
GO to EM25.
EM25 EVAP SYSTEM REPAIR VERIFICATION
Confirm the vehicle repair.
Reset the keep alive memory (KAM). Refer toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM) .
Be aware that this will set DTC P1000 and reset the On-Board System Readiness test.
To relearn some basic adaptive learning (trim) values, run the engine at 2,500 RPM for 1 minute and idle
the engine for 2 minutes.
Carry out the PCM Quick Test to access any PCM DTCs. For the procedure information, refer
toPINPOINT TEST QT .
Carry out the EVAP system leak test and flow check.
Does the vehicle pass the EVAP system leak test and flow check?
Yes
SAVE any repair documentation that may be
required by local/federal laws.
RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
No
The original concern was not repaired, or another
concern exists.
GO to EM1.
EM26 REPAIR AND VERIFICATION
NOTE:
If the vehicle needs to be driven for the baseline test, it may be necessary to
drive the vehicle first up to 8 km (5 miles) to relearn some additional adaptive
learning (trim) values. Also, during the baseline make sure to use the same
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 285
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
drive mode that was used for the original baseline test.
Confirm the vehicle repair.
Reset the keep alive memory (KAM). Refer toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM) .
Be aware that this will set DTC P1000 and reset the On-Board System Readiness test.
To relearn some basic adaptive learning (trim) values, run the engine at 2,500 RPM for 1 minute and idle
the engine for 2 minutes.
Carry out the PCM Quick Test to access any PCM DTCs. For the procedure information, refer
toPINPOINT TEST QT . Repair any other DTCs.
Carry out the baseline test using the exhaust gas analyzer.
For I/M 240 emission testing areas:
Refer to the beginning of this pinpoint test for information on verifying an excessive grams per
mile indication using a parts per million (PPM) reading.
All others (original gas concentrations reported in parts per million):
Verify the gas levels are within the acceptable range
Are all gases within the acceptable range?
Yes
SAVE any repair documentation that may be
required by local/federal laws.
RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
No
The gas level is still high, or another gas level is
above the acceptable range.
GO to EM1.
EM27 CATALYST DELTA TEMPERATURE TEST
Complete all previous testing.
Run the engine for 2 minutes at 2,500 RPM to heat the exhaust system.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect and ground 1 spark plug wire from each cylinder bank (for coil-on-plug applications,
disconnect the coil connector).
Run the engine at approximately 1,000 RPM.
Disconnect the IAC valve and maintain 1,000 RPM (if equipped).
Measure the surface temperature at both the inlet and outlet of each catalytic converter.
Compare the difference in temperature between the inlet and outlet readings of each catalytic converter.
Does each catalytic converter have a difference of more than 28°C (50°F) between its inlet and
outlet reading?
Yes
The catalytic converter(s) is operating correctly.
CONNECT the spark plug wire(s) and the IAC (if
equipped).
CLEAR the DTCs.
No
For catalytic converter(s) that have less than 28°C
(50°F) difference, testing indicates the catalytic
converter(s) is not working. REPEAT the test to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 286
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
VERIFY the test step results.
If all test steps are OK,
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
For additional symptoms, REFER to the
SYMPTOM CHARTS article.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
verify the results. If the temperature difference is
still less than required, INSTALL a new catalytic
converter.
After any repair,
GO to EM26.
PINPOINT TEST FB: POWER TAKE OFF (PTO)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
PTO switch
harness circuit: PTO, PTOIL
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Connector
Pin
B7
B42
B9
B26
170 Pin
Circuit
PTORPM
PTOIL
PTOENG
PTO
FB1 PTO INDICATOR LAMP
Did you come to this pinpoint test for an always on/ never on PTO indicator?
Yes
GO to FB7.
No
GO to FB2.
FB2 PTO NOT WORKING CORRECTLY: CHECK THE PTO INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION
NOTE:
The following conditions must be met before the PTO engages:
Engine at normal operating temperature
Accelerator pedal is released
TFT within normal operating temperature
Parking brake is applied
Brake pedal is released
Automatic transmission is in the PARK position
Manual transmission - the clutch pedal is released
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 287
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
This step requires operating the PTO component. Refer to the aftermarket
manufacturer for the PTO operating instructions. Follow all safety precautions.
Key ON, engine running.
Activate the PTO switch.
Does the PTO indicator illuminate?
Yes
GO to the aftermarket PTO mechanical manual.
No
GO to FB3.
FB3 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE PTO SWITCH AND THE PTO SWITCH CIRCUIT
Access the PCM and monitor the PTO PID.
Cycle the PTO switch, from off to on to off.
Does the PTO PID change state?
Yes
No
REPAIR the PTO circuit or switch as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to FB4.
FB4 CHECK THE PTO LOAD PID STATE IN THE PCM
Access the PCM and monitor the PTOLOAD PID.
Cycle the PTO switch,
Does the PTO LOAD PID change state?
Yes
No
REPAIR the PTO ENG circuit or switch as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to FB5.
FB5 CHECK THE PTOIR_V PID STATE IN THE PCM
NOTE:
The PTOIR_V PID represents an analog input which reflects the user requested
engine speed.
Access the PCM and monitor the PTOIR_V PID.
Cycle the PTO switch,
Does the PTOIR_V PID change state?
Yes
No
REPAIR the PTO RPM circuit or switch as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 288
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to FB6.
FB6 CHECK THE PTOIL PID STATE IN THE PCM
Access the PCM and monitor the PTOIL PID.
Cycle the PTO switch,
Does the PTOIL PID change state?
Yes
No
VERIFY no DTCs are present. VERIFY the vehicle
conditions in step FB2 are correct for PTO
operation.
GO to FB7.
FB7 PTO INDICATOR LAMP ALWAYS OFF OR ON: CHECK THE PTOIL_F PID
Access the PCM and monitor the PTOIL_F PID.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to the aftermarket PTO mechanical manual.
PINPOINT TEST FD: BRAKE PEDAL INPUTS
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
brake pedal position (BPP) (13480)
brake pedal switch (BPS) (9F924), (9C872)
harness circuits: B+, BPP, BPS
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for specific vehicle application and pin locations.
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
Town Car
E-Series,
F-Super Duty
Escape/Mariner
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
B9
170 Pin
E65
B8
150 (50-50-50) Pin B8
Circuit
BPS
BPS
BPP
BPP
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 289
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Expedition,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ,
Navigator
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac,
Mountaineer,
Mustang
Focus
140 Pin
B47
B46
BPS
BPP
170 Pin
B9
B8
BPS
BPP
190 Pin
Ranger
All other vehicles
170 Pin
190 Pin
B46
B13
B8
B47
B46
BPS
BPP
BPP
BPS
BPP
FD1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)
Are DTCs P0504, P0572, P0573, P0703, P1572, or P1703 present?
Yes
For KOEO or continuous memory DTCs P0504,
P0572, P0573, P0703, P1703 and continuous
memory DTC P1572, GO to FD3.
For KOER DTCs P0703, or P1703, GO to FD2.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
FD2 KOER DTCS P0703 AND P1703: VERIFY THE BRAKE PEDAL WAS APPLIED
Was the brake pedal applied and released during the KOER self-test?
Yes
GO to FD3.
No
REPEAT the KOER self-test. APPLY and
RELEASE the brake pedal during the KOER test.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
FD3 DTCS P0572, P0573, P0703, P1572 AND P1703: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE STOPLAMP
Key ON, engine OFF.
Apply and release the brake pedal and check the stop lamp operation.
Do the stoplamp operate correctly?
Yes
For Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
Sable,
Taurus,
No
REFER to the EXTERIOR LIGHTING -- ESERIES to diagnose the inoperative stoplamp.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 290
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Taurus X, and
Town Car, GO to FD4.
For all others, GO to FD5.
REPAIR as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
FD4 CHECK THE BRAKE SWITCH OPERATION
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the BPP_BOO PID.
Apply and release the brake pedal while monitoring the brake position PID.
Does the PID cycle ON and OFF?
Yes
GO to FD6.
No
REFER to the MODULE COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK -- E-SERIES to diagnose the
powertrain control module (PCM) not responding to
the scan tool. REPAIR as necessary. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
FD5 CHECK FOR BPP CIRCUIT CYCLING
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Apply and release the brake pedal while monitoring the voltage.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
BPP
Ground
Is voltage less than 1 volt with the brake pedal released and greater than 10 volts with the brake
pedal fully applied?
Yes
For Ranger, GO to FD7.
For all others, GO to FD6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
FD6 CHECK FOR BPS CIRCUIT CYCLING
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 291
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Apply and release the brake pedal while monitoring the voltage.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
BPS
Ground
Is voltage greater than 10 volts with the brake pedal released and less than 1 volt with the brake
pedal fully applied?
Yes
No
REFER to the SPEED CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
CARRY OUT the diagnostic steps for DTC P1703
to continue diagnose.
GO to FD7.
FD7 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST FF: POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
power steering pressure (PSP) Switch (3N824)
harness circuits: PSPSW and SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 292
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 94: Positive Crankcase Ventilation Thermal Extension -Harness Side (PCVTE-Harness Side)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 95: Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 293
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 96: Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
Fusion 3.0L,
Grand Marquis,
Milan 3.0L,
Town Car
Edge,
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L,
MKX,
MKZ
Ranger
All other vehicles
Connector
A
Pin
Circuit
2
1
SIGRTN
PSPSW
B
1
PSPSW
C
2
1
1
2
SIGRTN
PSPSW
SIGRTN
PSPSW
C
The PSP and SIGRTN circuits may be reversed in the harness connector. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article
for schematic and connector information.
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Edge,
MKX
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac,
Mountaineer
Connector
190 Pin
170 Pin
Pin
Circuit
B17
PSPSW
B41
B27
SIGRTN
PSPSW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 294
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L,
MKZ
Ranger
140 Pin
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
All other vehicles
190 Pin
140 Pin
170 Pin
170 Pin
E58
E65
E65
SIGRTN
PSPSW
PSPSW
B41
B34
E41
B17
SIGRTN
PSPSW
SIGRTN
PSPSW
E58
B34
SIGRTN
PSPSW
Fig. 97: Shorting Bar For Harness Circuit Without PSP Switch (Typical)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
FF1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)
Are DTCs P1650 or P1651 present?
Yes
For KOEO DTC P1650, GO to FF3.
For KOER DTC P1650, GO to FF2.
For continuous memory DTC P1651, GO to FF7.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
FF2 KOER DTC P1650: CARRY OUT TURNING THE STEERING WHEEL ONE HALF TURN
Did you turn the steering wheel at least one half turn within 20 seconds of starting the KOER selftest?
Yes
GO to FF3.
No
CARRY OUT the KOER self-test.
FF3 DTC P1650: CHECK THE PSP PID
Key ON, engine running.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 295
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Access the PCM and monitor the PSP PID.
Turn the steering wheel back and forth.
Does the PID state change?
Yes
GO to FF7.
No
GO to FF4.
FF4 CHECK THE PSP CIRCUITS TO THE PSP SWITCH FOR CYCLING
Key in OFF position.
PSP Switch connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the PSP PID.
For Fusion/Milan 2.3L, Edge/MKX or MKZ,
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A PSP
Switch
Point B
Connector,
Harness Side
PSPSW
Ground
For all others,
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A PSP
Point B PSP
Switch
Switch
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
PSPSW
SIGRTN
Remove the jumper wire(s).
Does the PID state change?
Yes
INSTALL a new PSP switch. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to FF5.
FF5 CHECK THE PSP AND SIGRTN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 296
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM ( - ) PSP Switch
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
PSPSW
PSPSW
SIGRTN
SIGRTN
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to FF6.
FF6 CHECK THE PSP CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO SIGRTN OR GND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PSP
Switch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
PSPSW
Ground
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PSP
( - ) PSP Switch
Switch
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
PSPSW
SIGRTN
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to FF8.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
FF7 DTC P1651: CHECK THE PSP CIRCUIT(S) FOR INTERMITTENT CONCERNS
NOTE:
Be aware that P1651 could be set if the vehicle is towed with the engine
running, or if a power steering hydraulic concern is present.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 297
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Access the PCM and monitor the PSP PID.
Check for open circuits while carrying out the following (a concern is indicated by a sudden change in the
PCM-PSP PID):
Shake, wiggle, and bend the PSP and SIGRTN circuit(s).
Lightly tap on the PSP to simulate road shock
PSP Switch connector disconnected.
Check the PSP circuit for a short to ground. Shake, wiggle and bend the PSP circuits.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
CONNECT the PSP switch. Unable to duplicate or
identify the concern at this time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
FF8 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST H: FUEL CONTROL
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: While conducting tests on a hot engine take all safety precautions to
prevent skin contact with hot engine components. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 298
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HO2S/O2S (9F472)
HO2S/O2S (9G444)
fuel injector(s) (9F593)
harness circuits: HO2S, HO2S Heater, VPWR, and SIGRTN
vacuum systems
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 98: Identifying HO2S Location (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 99: Identifying HO2S Location (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
The pin numbering for the connector is in reference to the connector lock tab. Not all connector key
combinations are shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 299
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 100: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Front (HO2S-Front) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 101: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Front (HO2S-Front) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 300
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 102: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Front (HO2S-Front) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
F-150,
Grand Marquis,
Mark LT,
Mustang,
Ranger,
Town Car
Focus
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
C
Pin
Circuit
2
4
3
1
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
1
3
4
2
1
3
4
2
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
The pin numbering for the connector is in reference to the connector lock tab. Not all connector key
combinations are shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 301
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 103: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Rear (HO2S-Rear) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 104: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Rear (HO2S-Rear) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 302
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 105: Heated Oxygen Sensor-Rear (HO2S-Rear) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner,
F-150,
Mark LT
Connector
A
Focus
B
All other vehicles
C
Pin
1
3
4
2
1
3
4
2
2
4
3
1
Circuit
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
VPWR
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
Fig. 106: Universal Oxygen Sensor
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 303
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
1
UO2SPC (Universal Oxygen Sensor Pumping Current)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
E-Series 6.8L,
E-Series 5.4L Cutaway
or stripped chassis
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner 3.0L
Escape/Mariner 2.3L
Expedition,
Navigator
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
T48
E70
B38
T47
E69
T25
E29
B14
T24
E28
B35
B41, E58, T41
190 Pin
E2
E70
E1
E69
E24
E28
E23
E29
B51
B58, E58
150 (50-50-50) Pin T48
E48
T47
E49
T25
E26
T24
E30
B35
B41, E41, T41
150 (50-50-50) Pin T47
E49
T24
E30
B35
B41, E41, T41
140 Pin
B11
E70
B10
Circuit
HTR22
HTR21
HTR13
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S22
HO2S21
HO2S13
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR22
HTR21
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S22
HO2S21
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR22
HTR21
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S22
HO2S21
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR22
HTR21
HTR12
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 304
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
F-150,
Mark LT
190 Pin
F-Super Duty 6.8L
Narrow frame
170 Pin
Focus 2.0L PZEV
190 Pin
Focus 2.0L
190 Pin
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L,
MKZ
140 Pin
E69
B40
E28
B39
E29
B51
B58, E58
T12
E70
T1
E69
T21
E28
T22
E29
B51
B58, E58, T43
E70
B38
E69
E29
B14
E28
B35
B41, E58, T41
T25
T18
E52
T7
T16
E11
B67
B58, E64, T40
T18
E52
T16
E11
B67
B58, E64, T40
E24
E70
E23
E69
E4
E29
E3
E28
HTR11
HO2S22
HO2S21
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR22
HTR21
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S22
HO2S21
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR21
HTR13
HTR11
HO2S21
HO2S13
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR13
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S13
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR22
HTR21
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S22
HO2S21
HO2S12
HO2S11
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 305
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
140 Pin
Fusion 2.3L PZEV,
Milan 2.3L PZEV
140 Pin
Ranger 2.3L
170 Pin
Sable PZEV,
Taurus PZEV,
Taurus X PZEV
190 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
B51
B58, E58
E23
E69
E3
E28
B51
B58, E58
E25
E23
E69
E5
E3
E28
B51
B58, E58
T47
E69
T24
E28
B35
B41, E58, T41
E6
E4
B51
B58, E58
T48
E70
T47
E69
T25
E29
T24
E28
B35
B41, E58, T41
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR13
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S13
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
UO2SPC21
UO2SPC11
VPWR
SIGRTN
HTR22
HTR21
HTR12
HTR11
HO2S22
HO2S21
HO2S12
HO2S11
VPWR
SIGRTN
H1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P2195, P2196, P2197, P2198, P2270, P2271, P2272, P2273,
P2274, or P2275 present?
Yes
For DTCs P2270, P2271, P2272, P2273, P2274 or
P2275, GO to H32.
For DTCs P0171, P0174, P2195 or P2197, GO to
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 306
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
H2.
For DTCs P0172, P0175, P2196 or P2198, GO to
H7.
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
H2 DTCS P0171, P0174, P2195 OR P2197: LEAN SYSTEM DTCS
NOTE:
Do not clear the DTCs or reset the keep alive memory (KAM).
Access the PCM and record the engine coolant temperature (ECT) PID from the freeze frame data. The
freeze frame data is used to recreate the concern.
Retrieve and record the self-test DTCs.
Are any DTCs present other than the following: P0171, P0174, P2195 or P2197?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to H3.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
H3 CARRY OUT A VISUAL INSPECTION ON THE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM AND ALL VACUUM HOSES
Key in OFF position.
Check the intake air system for leaks, obstructions, and damage.
Inspect the entire length of all the vacuum hoses for:
proper connections
damage or cracks
damaged or cracked vacuum tees
Verify the integrity of the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) system.
Verify the proper PCV valve part number.
Is a concern present?
Yes
GO to H6.
No
GO to H4.
H4 CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF A VACUUM LEAK
NOTE:
Fuel trim values at idle are more sensitive to a vacuum leak. The vacuum leak
(unmetered air) represents a larger portion of the total air flow at idle than at
part throttle.
NOTE:
The barometric pressure (BARO) PID is not a recommended PID to monitor
when diagnosing a vacuum leak. Barometric pressure is calculated during high
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 307
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
engine load, when the vacuum leak represents a small portion of the total air
flow.
NOTE:
When calculating the total fuel correction in the following steps, if LONGFT1
equals +13% and SHRTFT1 equals +23%, the total fuel correction for bank 1
equals +36%. If LONGFT2 equals +24% and SHRTFT2 equals -3% the total fuel
correction for bank 2 equals +21%.
NOTE:
If the freeze frame ECT PID is available, stabilize the engine at the temperature
recorded by the freeze frame ECT PID. If the freeze frame ECT PID is not
available, maintain the engine coolant temperature between 82°C - 101°C (180°F
- 215°F) and the intake air temperature less than 46°C (115°F).
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the ECT, CHT and IAT PIDs.
Access the PCM and monitor the LONGFT1, SHRTFT1, LONGFT2 and SHRTFT2 PIDs.
Allow the engine to stabilize at the temperature necessary to recreate the concern.
Mathematically add and record the LONGFT PID value to the SHRTFT PID value for each bank, for a
total fuel correction at idle.
Increase the engine speed to 3,500 RPM for 10 seconds. For vehicles with electronic throttle control
(ETC), increase the engine speed to the maximum RPM without activating RPM limiting.
Record the LONGFT1, SHRTFT1, LONGFT2, and SHRTFT2 PID values.
Mathematically add and record the LONGFT PID value to the SHRTFT PID value for each bank, for a
total fuel correction at 3,500 RPM or the maximum allowable RPM for vehicles with ETC.
Is the total fuel correction value difference, between idle and 3,500 RPM or the maximum allowable
RPM for vehicles with ETC, less than 15 percent?
Yes
No vacuum leak is present.
For DTCs P0171 or P0174, GO to H16.
For Sable, Taurus, and Taurus X PZEVs with DTCs
GO to H5.
P2195 or P2197, GO to H15.
For all other vehicles with DTCs P2195 or P2197,
GO to H9.
No
H5 LOCATE THE VACUUM LEAK
NOTE:
Do not clamp or pinch a hard plastic hose. Use a vacuum cap or equivalent to
restrict the hose.
NOTE:
Restricting the EVAP vapor hose while the EVAP emission canister is purging
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 308
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
may shift the SHRTFT. Carry out a visual inspection as necessary.
NOTE:
When monitoring for a decrease in the SHRTFT PIDs in the following steps, if
SHRTFT1 equals +15% and the hose is restricted, SHRTFT1 decreases to -7%.
The total decrease in the SHRTFT PIDs equals 22%.
Locate the vacuum tees for the intake air and PCV systems.
Access the PCM and monitor the SHRTFT1 and SHRTFT2 PIDs.
Restrict the vacuum lines one at a time for 30 seconds. If a vacuum leak is present, the SHRTFT PID
values decrease as the hose is restricted.
Is the decrease in the SHRTFT PIDs greater than 15 percent when one of the vacuum hoses is
restricted?
Yes
GO to H6.
No
INSPECT the intake air system for a vacuum leak in
the intake manifold or intake gaskets. REPAIR as
necessary.
For repair verification, GO to H6.
H6 VACUUM LEAK REPAIR VERIFICATION
NOTE:
If the freeze frame ECT PID is available, stabilize the engine at the temperature
recorded by the freeze frame ECT PID. If the freeze frame ECT PID is not
available, maintain the engine coolant temperature between 82°C - 101°C (180°F
- 215°F) and the intake air temperature less than 46°C (115°F).
Access the PCM and monitor the SHRTFT1 and SHRTFT2 PIDs.
Allow the engine to stabilize at the temperature necessary to recreate the concern.
Record the SHRTFT1 and SHRTFT2 PID values.
Key in OFF position.
Repair the vacuum leak.
Key ON, engine running.
Allow the engine to stabilize at the temperature necessary to recreate the concern.
Access the PCM and monitor the SHRTFT1 and SHRTFT2 PIDs.
Compare the recorded SHRTFT PID values, prior to the vacuum leak repair, to the current SHRTFT PID
values.
Is the decrease in the SHRTFT PIDs greater than 15 percent?
Yes
No
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
A vacuum leak is still present.
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY GO to H5.
(KAM) .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 309
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPEAT the self-test.
H7 DTCS P0172, P0175, P2196 OR P2198: RICH SYSTEM DTCS
NOTE:
Do not clear the DTCs or reset the keep alive memory (KAM).
Access the PCM and record the freeze frame data.
Retrieve and record the self-test DTCs.
Are any DTCs present other than the following: P0172, P0175, P2196 or P2198?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to H8.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
H8 INSPECT THE ENTIRE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM FOR DEBRIS, BLOCKAGE OR OTHER DAMAGE
Check the intake air system for obstructions, restrictions, and damage.
Check the throttle plate for obstructions or sludge.
Check the air filter element and housing for blockage.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
For DTCs P0172 or P0175, GO to H16.
For Sable, Taurus, and Taurus X PZEVs with DTCs
P2196 or P2198, GO to H15.
For all other vehicles with DTCs P2196 or P2198,
GO to H13.
H9 CHECK THE HO2S AND SIGRTN CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the HO2S related to the current DTC.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HO2S
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
HO2S Signal
SIGRTN
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 310
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to H10.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
H10 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO SIGRTN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HO2S
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
SIGRTN
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to H11.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
H11 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HO2S
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
HO2S Signal
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to H12.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
H12 HO2S CIRCUIT TEST (WITH LEAN DTCS)
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A HO2S Point B HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 311
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HO2S Signal
VPWR
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Is the voltage greater than 1.3 V?
Yes
No
GO to H16.
GO to H42.
H13 HO2S CIRCUIT TEST (WITH RICH DTCS)
Disconnect the HO2S related to the current DTC.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.2 V?
Yes
No
GO to H16.
GO to H14.
H14 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE VPWR OR HEATER IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
HO2S Signal
VPWR
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to H42.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
H15 CHECK THE UO2SPC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
Only the suspect UO2S needs to be diagnosed.
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:55 AM
Page 312
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Universal HO2S connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Universal
( - ) PCM
HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
UO2SPC - Pin 1 UO2SPC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to H16.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
H16 CHECK THE FUEL PRESSURE
WARNING: When checking the fuel system remember that the fuel system may still
be pressurized when the engine is switched off. Always follow the
instructions related to fuel system pressure relief. All fuel handling safety
precautions must be observed. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
NOTE:
For vehicle specific fuel pressure ranges, refer to the Fuel System Specification
Chart in pinpoint test HC.
Remove the jumper wire(s).
HO2S connector connected.
Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION - GASOLINE
AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for the Fuel System Pressure Release procedure.
Mechanical fuel pressure gauge connected.
Pressurize the fuel system. Refer to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION - GASOLINE
AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for the Fuel System Pressure Release procedure to pressurize the fuel
system.
Key ON, engine running.
Allow the fuel pressure to stabilize.
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and control the FP PID.
Run the fuel pump to obtain maximum fuel pressure.
Is the fuel pressure within range for the vehicle being diagnosed?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 313
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to H17.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
H17 CHECK THE FUEL SYSTEM FOR PRESSURE STABILITY - FAST LEAKDOWN
NOTE:
When the fuel pump is commanded off, the fuel pressure may substantially
decrease and then stabilize.
NOTE:
During output state control, the fuel pump stays commanded on for only about
5 seconds.
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and control the FP PID.
Run the fuel pump to obtain maximum fuel pressure.
Command the fuel pump off.
Allow the fuel pressure to stabilize.
Record the stabilized reading.
Monitor the fuel pressure for 10 seconds.
Does the fuel pressure remain within 34 kPa (5 psi) of the recorded reading after 10 seconds?
Yes
GO to H19.
No
GO to H18.
H18 CHECK FOR AN EXTERNAL FUEL LEAK
Inspect the fuel tank, lines, and filler pipe for a fuel leak.
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary.
REFER to the fuel system WARNING information
at the beginning of Pinpoint Test HC. refer to
GO to H26.
PINPOINT TEST HC.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
H19 CHECK THE FUEL SYSTEM FOR PRESSURE STABILITY - SLOW LEAKDOWN
Continue to monitor the fuel pressure for 1 minute.
Does the fuel pressure remain within 34 kPa (5 psi) of the recorded reading (MRFS) or greater
than 275 kPa (40 psi) (ERFS) after 1 minute?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 314
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to H20.
No
GO to HC13.
H20 CHECK THE SEPARATION LEVEL OF THE ETHANOL/WATER MIXTURE AND GASOLINE IN THE
FUEL
NOTE:
This step requires the use of a locally obtained 200 ml beaker and a 25 ml
graduated cylinder.
NOTE:
After approximately 3 minutes of standing, the ethanol and water mixes
together and settles to the bottom of the 25 ml graduated cylinder. The gasoline
rises to the top.
Fill the 200 ml beaker with 5 ml of clean water.
Use the pressure relief valve on the mechanical fuel gauge to drain 22 ml of fuel into an approved clean
container.
Pour 20 ml of fuel from the approved clean container into the 25 ml graduated cylinder.
Add enough water from the 200 ml beaker to the 25 ml graduated cylinder to bring the total volume of
liquid to 24 ml.
Insert a stopper plug in the opening of the 25 ml graduated cylinder.
Firmly hold the stopper in place and shake the 25 ml graduated cylinder to mix the water and fuel.
Allow the liquid to stand and separate for approximately 3 minutes.
Record the separation level from the 25 ml graduated cylinder where the ethanol/water mixture and
gasoline meet.
Did the ethanol/water mixture and gasoline separate?
Yes
GO to H21.
No
COMPLETE all steps before continuing. The
ethanol/water mixture will separate from the
gasoline. If the fuel does not appear to separate, then
the fuel is either 100% ethanol or a mixture of
ethanol and water.
H21 CALCULATE THE PERCENTAGE OF ETHANOL IN THE FUEL
NOTE:
Use the illustration as an example for calculating the percentage of ethanol in
the following steps. If the separation level is at 14 ml the calculation becomes;
14 minus 4, then multiply by 5 to equal 50. The percentage of ethanol in the fuel
is 50%.
Key in OFF position.
Take the recorded separation level from the previous step and subtract the amount of water added.
Multiply the new value by 5. This new value is the percentage of ethanol in the fuel.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 315
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 107: Calculating Ethanol In Fuel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item Number
1
2
3
4
Description
Stopper
Gasoline
Separation Point
at 14 ml
Ethanol/Water
Mixture
Record the calculated percentage of ethanol in the fuel.
Is any ethanol present in the fuel?
Yes
For flex fuel vehicles, GO to H22.
For all others, GO to H25.
No
GO to H26.
H22 COMPARE THE FF_INF PID TO THE CALCULATED PERCENTAGE OF ETHANOL
NOTE:
When determining if the FF_INF PID value is within 50% of the calculated
percentage of ethanol, if the calculated percentage of ethanol value is 40% then
the PID value should be between 0 - 90%. The PID value cannot be less than
zero.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FF_INF PID.
Compare the FF_INF PID to the calculated percentage of ethanol.
Is the FF_INF PID value within 50% of the calculated percentage of ethanol?
Yes
GO to H26.
No
GO to H23.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 316
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
H23 RESET THE PERCENT ETHANOL PARAMETER IN THE PCM
NOTE:
Certain customer fueling practices such as only fueling with small amounts of
fuel or repeatedly switching between gasoline and an ethanol blend greater
than E15 may prevent the PCM from learning the correct ethanol content in the
fuel.
Reset the keep alive memory (KAM). Refer toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM) .
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the FF_LRND PID.
Drive the vehicle approximately 11.3 km (7 miles) or until the FF_LRND PID indicates yes.
Is the PID state YES?
Yes
No
GO to H24.
GO to H42.
H24 COMPARE THE UPDATED FF_INF PID TO THE CALCULATED PERCENTAGE OF ETHANOL
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FF_INF PID.
Is the FF_INF PID value within 50% of the calculated percentage of ethanol?
Yes
RETURN the vehicle to the customer. ADVISE the
customer of the correct fueling practices when using
flex fuel. REFER to the Owner's Literature for
additional information. ADVISE the customer to
continue to use the same fuel for the next 2-3
refuels. This practice helps to verify the PCM is
learning the correct percentage of ethanol in the
fuel.
No
A fuel system concern may be present, which
prevents the PCM from learning the correct
percentage of ethanol in the fuel,
GO to HC13.
H25 DETERMINE IF THE PERCENTAGE OF ETHANOL IN THE FUEL IS LESS THAN 25%
Check the recorded calculated percentage of ethanol in the fuel.
Is the calculated percentage of ethanol in the fuel less than 25%?
Yes
GO to H26.
No
REPAIR as necessary. ADVISE the customer of the
correct fuel type required for this vehicle. REFER to
the Owner's Literature for additional information.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 317
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
H26 FLOW TEST
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector connected.
Flow test the injector using the fuel injector tester.
Is the flow rate for each injector within specification?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new fuel injector. REFER to the FUEL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
For DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175, GO to
DC28.
For DTCs P2195 or P2197, GO to H27.
For DTCs P2196 or P2198, GO to H28.
H27 CHECK THE HO2S OUTPUT VOLTAGE
HO2S connector disconnected.
Visually inspect the HO2S circuit for exposed wiring, contamination, corrosion and correct assembly.
Repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) HO2S
Connector,
Component
Side
HO2S Signal
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
Increase the engine speed to 2,000 RPM for 3 minutes.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Monitor the signal voltage during the self-test.
Is the voltage greater than 0.5 volt at any time during the self-test?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to H30.
H28 ATTEMPT TO RETRIEVE DTC P2195 OR P2197
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 318
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HO2S connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A HO2S
Point B Vehicle
Connector,
Battery
Harness Side
Negative
HO2S Signal
terminal
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Are DTCs P2195 or P2197 present?
Yes
GO to H29.
No
GO to H42.
H29 HO2S VOLTAGE CHECK
Key in OFF position.
Remove the jumper wire(s).
HO2S connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine running.
Increase the engine speed to 2,000 RPM for 30 seconds.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) HO2S
Connector,
Component
Side
HO2S Signal
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Monitor the signal voltage during the self-test.
Is the voltage less than 0.4 volt at any time during the self-test?
Yes
GO to H30.
No
INSTALL a new HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 319
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
H30 CARRY OUT A THOROUGH WIGGLE TEST ON THE HO2S HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
HO2S connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the sensor to the PCM.
While monitoring the HO2S PID, does the HO2S stop switching?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to H31.
H31 TEST DRIVE THE VEHICLE WHILE MONITORING THE HO2S PID FOR SWITCHING
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the FUELSYS PID.
Start the engine and let idle until the vehicle goes into the closed loop fuel condition.
Drive the vehicle in a manner consistent with the freeze frame data in an attempt to simulate the original
concern.
Does the HO2S PID switch?
Yes
GO to DC28.
No
INSTALL a new HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
H32 DTCS P2270, P2272, P2271, P2273, P2274 OR P2275: HO2S LACK OF SWITCHES STUCK LEAN OR RICH
NOTE:
Address all continuous memory ignition and misfire DTCs before any KOER
HO2S DTCs.
Key in OFF position.
Visually inspect for:
pinched, shorted, and corroded wiring and pins
oil or water contamination
crossed sensor wires
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 320
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
contaminated or damaged sensor
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
For KOER DTCs P2270, P2271, P2272, P2273,
P2274 or P2275, GO to H34.
For continuous memory DTCs P2270, P2271,
P2272, P2273, P2274 or P2275, GO to H33.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
H33 CHECK FOR KOER DTCS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Clear the DTCs.
Key ON, engine running.
Run the engine at approximately 2,000 RPM. Maintain the engine speed for 3 minutes.
Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs.
Are DTCs P2270, P2271, P2272, P2273, P2274 or P2275 present?
Yes
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
GO to H34.
H34 CHECK THE HO2S SIGNAL LEVEL TOO HIGH
NOTE:
Fuel calculations can be affected by unmetered air leaks.
Key in OFF position.
Carefully inspect the following areas for potential air leaks:
hoses connecting to the mass air flow (MAF) sensor assembly
hoses connecting to the throttle body
intake manifold gasket leaks
PCV system
the vacuum lines are disconnected
improperly seated engine oil dipstick, tube or oil fill cap
exhaust leaks at flanges and gaskets
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to the JACKING AND LIFTING -- ESERIES for the locations of the lifting points.
Visually inspect for:
exhaust leaks at flanges and gaskets
HO2S not tightened to specification
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 321
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
physical exhaust system concerns
aftermarket exhaust
punctures or cracks in the catalyst
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to H35.
H35 CHECK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN CIRCUITS IN THE HO2S HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Disconnect the HO2S harness connector.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
HO2S Signal
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
VPWR
HO2S Signal
HO2S Heater
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to H36.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
H36 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Harness Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 322
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HO2S Heater
VPWR
HO2S Signal
SIGRTN
HO2S Heater
VPWR
HO2S Signal
SIGRTN
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to H37.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
H37 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
PCM connector connected.
HO2S connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Is the voltage greater than 1.5 V?
Yes
For partial zero emission vehicle (PZEV), GO to
H40.
For all others, GO to H39.
No
GO to H38.
H38 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector connected.
HO2S connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A HO2S Point B HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
VPWR
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Is the voltage greater than 1.5 V?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new HO2S. REFER to the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 323
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
GO to H42.
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
H39 CHECK FOR OVER VOLTAGE IN THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
HO2S connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) HO2S
Connector,
Harness Side
SIGRTN
HO2S Signal
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Are the voltages less than 1.5 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
GO to H42.
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
No
H40 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
HO2S connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
VPWR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 324
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to H41.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
H41 CHECK THE HO2S CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
PCM connector connected.
HO2S connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A HO2S Point B HO2S
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HO2S Signal
VPWR
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the HO2S Signal PID.
Is the voltage greater than 1.5 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new HO2S. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
GO to H42.
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
No
H42 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 325
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST HC: FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: The fuel system remains under pressure after the engine is off. Relieve
pressure before repairing. Highly flammable mixtures are present. To
release pressure from the fuel system, carry out the following:
Connect Rotunda fuel pressure gauge 134-R0087 or equivalent.
Gradually open the testing kit valve to relieve the fuel pressure in the
vehicle fuel system and drain the fuel into a suitable container or
return it to the fuel tank.
To avoid unnecessary fuel spillage and fire hazard, any time fuel
lines are disconnected, the ignition switch must be in the OFF
position unless fuel pump operation is required for test purposes.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system
components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental
spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure,
even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or
audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related
component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be
prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 326
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Clean all fuel residue from the engine compartment. If not removed, fuel
residue may ignite when the engine is returned to operation. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Replacement fuel injectors may not be the same color as the original injectors
in the vehicle. Verify the replacement injector is correct for the application by
part number.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
chassis components
engine vacuum
fuel pressure
fuel supply line
fuel supply
fuel filter (9155)
fuel injector(s) (9F593)
fuel pump (9H307)
NOTE:
With the engine running, the FRP PID value may be 48-70 kPa (7-10 psi) higher
than a fuel pressure reading taken with a mechanical gauge.
FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATION CHART (KEY ON, ENGINE OFF VALUES)
External
External
Fuel System FRP PID Fuel FRP PID Fuel Pressure Gauge Pressure Gauge
Type
Pressure (kPa) Pressure (psi)
(psi)
Application
(kPa)
Crown Victoria/Grand ERFS (1)
240-485
35-70
240-485
35-70
Marquis/Town Car
Edge/MKX
MRFS (2)
331-485
48-70
Escape/Mariner
ERFS (1)
240-485
35-70
240-485
35-70
E-Series
ERFS (1)
240-485
35-70
240-485
35-70
Expedition/Navigator MRFS (2)
331-485
48-70
Explorer/Explorer
ERFS (1)
240-485
35-70
240-485
35-70
Sport
Trac/Mountaineer
F-150, Mark LT
ERFS (1)
240-485
35-70
240-485
35-70
F-Super Duty
ERFS (1)
240-485
35-70
240-485
35-70
Taurus/Taurus X/Sable MRFS (2)
331-485
48-70
Focus
MRFS (2)
331-485
48-70
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 327
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fusion/Milan/MKZ
Mustang
Ranger
MRFS (2)
ERFS (1)
MRFS (2)
240-485
-
35-70
-
331-485
240-485
331-485
48-70
35-70
48-70
Fuel System Type Definitions:
(1) Electronic Returnless Fuel System (ERFS):
This type of fuel delivery system does not return fuel to the fuel tank by means of a return line. This system
does not incorporate a mechanical pressure regulator. Pressure is controlled by continuously varying the fuel
pump speed through the fuel pump driver module (FPDM). All vehicles equipped with ERFS use a fuel rail
pressure temperature (FRPT) sensor.
(2) Mechanical Returnless Fuel System (MRFS):
This type of fuel delivery system does not return fuel to the fuel tank by means of a return line. Fuel pressure is
controlled by a mechanical pressure regulator located on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank. Vehicles
equipped with MRFS do not use a fuel rail pressure temperature (FRPT) sensor.
WARNING: If you see or smell gasoline at any time other than during fueling, do not
reset the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
Key in OFF position.
Check for fuel leaks in the engine compartment.
If no leak is present, reset the IFS switch by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch. Refer to the
Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch.
In the closed position, the button can be pressed an additional 1.57 mm (1/16 in) against a spring.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Key in OFF position.
Check for leaking fuel.
HC1 DTC P0148 OR SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS: CHECK THE SYSTEM INTEGRITY
Visually inspect the complete fuel delivery system for damage and leakage.
Check the following:
fuel lines and connections
relays
fuel tank
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 328
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
fuel pump
fuel pressure regulator
fuel pulse damper
fuel rail at injectors
damaged connector pins
electrical connectors not fully engaged
Verify the vehicle has followed the maintenance schedule. A new fuel filter should have been installed
within the last 48,280 km (30,000 miles).
Verify the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch is set (button pushed in). Refer to the Owner's Literature,
Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch.
Verify the fuse integrity.
Verify the battery is fully charged.
Verify clean sufficient fuel.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HC2.
HC2 CHECK ALL SYSTEM RELATED DEVICES (SENSOR, DAMPER OR REGULATOR) FOR LEAKAGE
Key in OFF position.
FP connector connected.
Remove the vacuum hose on each system device connected to the fuel rail.
Inspect for the presence of fuel in the vacuum line of each device connected to the fuel rail.
Key ON, engine running.
Check for manifold vacuum at each system related component with a vacuum line.
Key in OFF position.
Are all vacuum lines for system related devices indicating no fuel present?
Yes
GO to HC3.
No
If the vacuum line connected to a component
indicates that a fuel leak is present, INSTALL a new
component.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HC3 CHECK THE FUEL PRESSURE
Key in OFF position.
Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION - GASOLINE
AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for the Fuel System Pressure Release procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 329
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Mechanical fuel pressure gauge connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Pressurize the fuel system. Refer to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION - GASOLINE
AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for the Fuel System Pressure Release procedure to pressurize the fuel
system.
FP connector connected.
Cycle the key several times to charge the fuel system.
Compare the fuel pressure reading to the Fuel System Specification Chart.
Is the fuel pressure within range?
Yes
GO to HC6.
No
GO to HC4.
HC4 CHECK THE FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for schematic and connector information.
FP connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Vehicle
Battery
Positive
terminal
( - ) FP
Connector,
Harness Side
FPGND
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HC5.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HC5 CHECK THE FUEL PUMP POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
During output state control, the fuel pump stays commanded on for only about
5 seconds.
Verify the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch is set (button pushed in). Refer to the Owner's Literature,
Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch.
FP connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and control the FP PID.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 330
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Be aware that output state control turns off the FP after a calibrated time. If this happens, command the
outputs on again to continue testing.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FP
Connector,
Harness Side
FPPWR
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HC12.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HC6 CHECK THE SEPARATION LEVEL OF THE ETHANOL/WATER MIXTURE AND GASOLINE IN THE
FUEL
NOTE:
This step requires the use of a locally obtained 200 ml beaker and a 25 ml
graduated cylinder.
NOTE:
After approximately 3 minutes of standing, the ethanol and water mixes
together and settles to the bottom of the 25 ml graduated cylinder. The gasoline
rises to the top.
Fill the 200 ml beaker with 5 ml of clean water.
Use the pressure relief valve on the mechanical fuel gauge to drain 22 ml of fuel into an approved clean
container.
Pour 20 ml of fuel from the approved clean container into the 25 ml graduated cylinder.
Add enough water from the 200 ml beaker to the 25 ml graduated cylinder to bring the total volume of
liquid to 24 ml.
Insert a stopper plug in the opening of the 25 ml graduated cylinder.
Firmly hold the stopper in place and shake the 25 ml graduated cylinder to mix the water and fuel.
Allow the liquid to stand and separate for approximately 3 minutes.
Record the separation level from the 25 ml graduated cylinder where the ethanol/water mixture and
gasoline meet.
Did the ethanol/water mixture and gasoline separate?
Yes
No
COMPLETE all steps before continuing. The
ethanol/water mixture will separate from the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 331
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
gasoline. If the fuel does not appear to separate, then
the fuel is either 100% ethanol or a mixture of
ethanol and water.
GO to HC7.
HC7 CALCULATE THE PERCENTAGE OF ETHANOL IN THE FUEL
NOTE:
Use the illustration as an example for calculating the percentage of ethanol in
the following steps. If the separation level is at 14 ml the calculation becomes;
14 minus 4, then multiply by 5 to equal 50. The percentage of ethanol in the fuel
is 50%.
Key in OFF position.
Take the recorded separation level from the previous step and subtract the amount of water added.
Multiply the new value by 5. This new value is the percentage of ethanol in the fuel.
Fig. 108: Calculating Ethanol In Fuel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item Number
1
2
3
4
Description
Stopper
Gasoline
Separation Point
at 14 ml
Ethanol/Water
Mixture
Record the calculated percentage of ethanol in the fuel.
Is any ethanol present in the fuel?
Yes
For flex fuel vehicles, GO to HC8.
For all others, GO to HC11.
No
GO to HC12.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 332
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HC8 COMPARE THE FF_INF PID TO THE CALCULATED PERCENTAGE OF ETHANOL
NOTE:
When determining if the FF_INF PID value is within 50% of the calculated
percentage of ethanol, if the calculated percentage of ethanol value is 40% then
the PID value should be between 0 - 90%. The PID value cannot be less than
zero.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FF_INF PID.
Compare the FF_INF PID to the calculated percentage of ethanol.
Is the FF_INF PID value within 50% of the calculated percentage of ethanol?
Yes
GO to HC12.
No
GO to HC9.
HC9 RESET THE PERCENT ETHANOL PARAMETER IN THE PCM
NOTE:
Certain customer fueling practices such as only fueling with small amounts of
fuel or repeatedly switching between gasoline and an ethanol blend greater
than E15 may prevent the PCM from learning the correct ethanol content in the
fuel.
Reset the keep alive memory (KAM). Refer toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM) .
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the FF_LRND PID.
Drive the vehicle approximately 11.3 km (7 miles) or until the FF_LRND PID indicates yes.
Is the PID state YES?
Yes
GO to HC10.
No
GO to HC18.
HC10 COMPARE THE UPDATED FF_INF PID TO THE CALCULATED PERCENTAGE OF ETHANOL
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FF_INF PID.
Is the FF_INF PID value within 50% of the calculated percentage of ethanol?
Yes
No
RETURN the vehicle to the customer. ADVISE the
customer of the correct fueling practices when using
A fuel system concern may be present, which
flex fuel. REFER to the Owner's Literature for
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 333
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
additional information. ADVISE the customer to
continue to use the same fuel for the next 2-3
refuels. This practice helps to verify the PCM is
learning the correct percentage of ethanol in the
fuel.
prevents the PCM from learning the correct
percentage of ethanol in the fuel,
GO to HC12.
HC11 DETERMINE IF THE PERCENTAGE OF ETHANOL IN THE FUEL IS LESS THAN 25%
Check the recorded calculated percentage of ethanol in the fuel.
Is the calculated percentage of ethanol in the fuel less than 25%?
Yes
GO to HC12.
No
REPAIR as necessary. ADVISE the customer of the
correct fuel type required for this vehicle. REFER to
the Owner's Literature for additional information.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HC12 CHECK THE FUEL PRESSURE LEAKDOWN
NOTE:
When the fuel pump is commanded off, the fuel pressure may substantially
decrease and then stabilize.
NOTE:
During output state control, the fuel pump stays commanded on for only about
5 seconds.
Mechanical fuel pressure gauge connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and control the FP PID.
Run the fuel pump to obtain maximum fuel pressure.
Command the fuel pump off.
Allow the fuel pressure to stabilize.
Record the stabilized reading.
Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 minute.
Does the fuel pressure remain within 34 kPa (5 psi) of the recorded reading (MRFS) or greater
than 275 kPa (40 psi) (ERFS) after 1 minute?
Yes
For ERFS, GO to HC14.
For MRFS, GO to HC15.
No
GO to HC13.
HC13 CHECK THE FUEL INJECTOR FLOW AND LEAKAGE
NOTE:
Observe the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 334
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Check the fuel injectors for leakage and flow rate using the injector flow tester or other method such as
inspecting the intake manifold for fuel.
Are the test results satisfactory?
Yes
For ERFS, GO to HC14.
For MRFS, GO to HC15.
No
INSTALL a new fuel injector as necessary. REFER
to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
REPEAT the self-test.
HC14 COMPARE THE FRP PID TO THE MECHANICAL GAUGE
NOTE:
Most mechanical gauges are referenced to atmospheric pressure. The FRPT
sensor is referenced to manifold pressure. In order to make a valid comparison,
the engine must be off.
NOTE:
The vehicle may exhibit a long crank until the fuel system is pressurized.
Key in OFF position.
Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION - GASOLINE
AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for the Fuel System Pressure Release procedure.
Disable the fuel pump.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Monitor the mechanical gauge.
Access the PCM and monitor the FRP PID.
Compare the FRP PID value to the mechanical gauge.
Key in OFF position.
Pressurize the fuel system. Refer to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION - GASOLINE
AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for the Fuel System Pressure Release procedure to pressurize the fuel
system.
Key ON, engine running.
Allow the fuel pressure to stabilize.
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Compare the FRP PID value to the mechanical gauge.
Are the FRP PID values within 34 kPa (5 psi) of the mechanical gauge readings?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 335
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HC15.
No
INSTALL a new FRPT sensor. REFER to the fuel
system WARNING information at the beginning of
this pinpoint test. REFER to the ELECTRONIC
ENGINE CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES
-- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HC15 MONITOR THE FUEL PRESSURE WHILE ROAD TESTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Strict observance of posted speed limits and attention to driving
conditions are mandatory when carrying out the road test. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
Some concerns may only be present during certain fuel level conditions.
Determine the fuel level at the time of the concern. Access the information from
the customer information worksheet and the customer.
Key in OFF position.
Securely route the mechanical gauge so that the gauge is viewable while road testing the vehicle.
Key ON, engine running.
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Monitor the mechanical gauge.
From a stop, accelerate to 89 km/h (55 mph) at full throttle. Repeat this 3 times.
Is the fuel pressure always greater than 240 kPa (35 psi)?
Yes
For misfire DTC diagnosis, GO to HD8.
For symptoms without DTCs, the concern is
elsewhere. RETURN toNO DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) PRESENT
GO to HC16.
SYMPTOM CHART INDEX for further direction.
For all others, unable to duplicate or identify the
concern at this time.
No
HC16 CHECK THE FUEL SUPPLY LINE FOR RESTRICTION
NOTE:
Observe the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the fuel supply line at the fuel rail.
Disconnect the fuel supply line at the fuel pump.
Check the fuel supply line for restriction.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 336
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Apply 21 to 34 kPa (3 to 5 psi) air pressure to the fuel supply line.
Does air flow freely through the line?
Yes
INSTALL a new Fuel Filter assembly. REFER to
the FUEL TANK AND LINES - GASOLINE
AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
GO to HC17.
No
REPAIR the cause of the restriction.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HC17 VERIFY THE REPAIR
WARNING: Strict observance of posted speed limits and attention to driving
conditions are mandatory when carrying out the road test. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Key ON, engine running.
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Monitor the mechanical gauge.
From a stop, accelerate to 89 km/h (55 mph) at full throttle. Repeat this 3 times.
Is the fuel pressure always greater than 240 kPa (35 psi)?
Yes
The test is complete and no concerns are present.
No
INSTALL a new FP module. REFER to the FUEL
TANK AND LINES - GASOLINE AND DIESEL
-- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HC18 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) .
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 337
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PINPOINT TEST HD: MISFIRE DETECTION MONITOR
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
Mechanical noise caused by the front end accessory drive components,
mechanically driven cooling fans, or rough roads at high RPM with light load
conditions may produce a nonsymmetrical loss of cylinder acceleration, which
may result in a misfire.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the misfire detection monitor.
Clearing the powertrain control module (PCM) diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) erases any PCM recorded
freeze frame data. Make sure to record any PCM freeze frame information before proceeding. Refer
toFREEZE FRAME DATA .
Fig. 109: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 338
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 110: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 111: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 339
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 112: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - D
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 113: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - E
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 340
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 114: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector - F
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Edge,
Expedition,
F-150 4.6L,
F-150 5.4L,
Mark LT,
MKX,
MKZ,
Navigator,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner 2.3L,
Ranger 2.3L
Explorer 4.0L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.0L,
Mountaineer 4.0L,
Mustang 4.0L,
Ranger 4.0L
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
F-150 4.2L
Connector
A
Focus
B
C
D
E
D
F
Pin
Circuit
2
CMP
1
2
2
1
SIGRTN
CMP
SIGRTN
CMP
3
2
1
SIGRTN
CMP
CMP
2
3
1
3
2
CMP
PWRGND
VPWR
SIGRTN
CMP
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 341
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
All other vehicles
A
1
2
SIGRTN
CMP
HD1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306, P0307, P0308, P0309, P0310, P0315,
or P0316 present?
Yes
For DTCs P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304,
P0305, P0306, P0307, P0308, P0309, P0310 or
P0316, GO to HD2.
For DTC P0315, GO to HD21.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
HD2 DTCS P0300 THROUGH P0310 AND P0316: VIEW THE PCM MISFIRE FREEZE FRAME DATA
NOTE:
The misfire freeze frame data may be used to determine the operating
conditions when the misfire DTC was set.
Retrieve and record any available misfire freeze frame data PID values from the PCM.
Compare recorded freeze frame data PID values to the typical reference values in the REFERENCE
VALUES article.
Are any values out of range?
Yes
REFER to the table in Pinpoint Test Z to find
corresponding circuit, and proceed with the
intermittent diagnosis.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to HD3.
HD3 CHECK FOR OTHER NON-MISFIRE CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS
Retrieve all continuous memory DTCs.
Are there any non-misfire continuous memory DTCs present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to HD4.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
HD4 CHECK FOR ANY KOEO SELF-TEST DTCS
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 342
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are any KOEO DTCs present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to HD5.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
HD5 CHECK FOR ANY KOER DTCS
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Are any KOER DTCs present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to HD6.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
HD6 CHECK THE IGNITION SYSTEM FOR CONCERNS
For ignition coil on plug (COP) equipped vehicles, refer to PINPOINT TEST JB and follow the pinpoint
test direction.
For ignition coil pack equipped vehicles, refer to PINPOINT TEST JC and follow the pinpoint test
direction.
Is an ignition related concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HD7.
HD7 CHECK THE FUEL SYSTEM FOR CONCERNS
refer to PINPOINT TEST HC and follow the pinpoint test direction.
Is a fuel system related concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HD8.
HD8 CHECK THE VACUUM SYSTEM
NOTE:
Some vacuum leaks can be heard.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 343
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Visually inspect the vacuum hoses for signs of damage or deterioration. A collapsed vacuum hose may
cause a blockage to one of the various actuators or sensors. If a blockage is found remove the blockage or
install new parts as necessary.
Is the vehicle vacuum system OK?
Yes
No
For vehicles equipped with a differential pressure
feedback EGR system, GO to HD9.
For vehicles equipped with an electric EGR (EEGR)
REPAIR the vacuum system.
system, GO to HD10.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
For vehicles equipped with an EGR system module
(ESM) EGR system, GO to HD11.
For all others, GO to HD15.
HD9 MONITOR THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SYSTEM RELATED PIDS
Key ON, engine running.
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the EGRVR PID.
Record the PID values with the engine idling.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Record the PID values with the engine off.
Compare the recorded PID values to the typical reference values in the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Are any values out of range?
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST HE and diagnose the
EGR system.
No
GO to HD12.
HD10 MONITOR THE EEGR SYSTEM RELATED PIDS
Key ON, engine running.
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature.
Access the PCM and monitor the EGRMC1F, EGRMC2F, EGRMC3F and EGRMC4F PIDs.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Record the PID values with the engine idling.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Record the PID values with the engine off.
Compare the recorded PID values to the typical reference values in the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Are any values out of range?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:56 AM
Page 344
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST KD and diagnose the
EGR system.
No
GO to HD13.
HD11 MONITOR THE ESM SYSTEM RELATED PIDS
Key ON, engine running.
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the EGRVR PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Record the PID values with the engine idling.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Record the PID values with the engine off.
Compare the recorded PID values to the typical reference values in the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Are any values out of range?
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST HH and diagnose the
EGR system.
No
GO to HD14.
HD12 RECREATE THE MISFIRE SYMPTOM WITH THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR
SYSTEM DISABLED
NOTE:
The PCM may store EGR system related DTCs during this procedure.
NOTE:
To recreate the original conditions that set the DTC or caused the symptom, the
vehicle may require driving.
Key in OFF position.
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid connector disconnected.
Access the misfire freeze frame data (if available) and record the operating conditions.
Obtain information from the customer information worksheet or any other available data from the
customer.
Recreate the misfire symptom using the freeze frame and customer information.
Can the symptom be recreated?
Yes
GO to HD15.
No
REMOVE and INSPECT the EGR valve for signs
of contamination, unusual wear, carbon deposits,
binding or other damage. REFER to the ENGINE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 345
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
EMISSION CONTROL -- E-SERIES for more
EGR system information. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HD13 RECREATE THE MISFIRE SYMPTOM WITH EEGR SYSTEM DISABLED
NOTE:
The PCM may store EGR system related DTCs during this procedure.
NOTE:
To recreate the original conditions that set the DTC or caused the symptom, the
vehicle may require driving.
Key in OFF position.
EEGR Assembly connector disconnected.
Access the misfire freeze frame data (if available) and record the operating conditions.
Obtain information from the customer information worksheet or any other available data from the
customer.
Recreate the misfire symptom using the freeze frame and customer information.
Can the symptom be recreated?
Yes
GO to HD15.
No
REMOVE and INSPECT the EEGR for signs of
contamination, unusual wear, carbon deposits,
binding or other damage. REFER to the ENGINE
EMISSION CONTROL -- E-SERIES for more
EGR system information. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HD14 RECREATE THE MISFIRE SYMPTOM WITH THE ESM SYSTEM DISABLED
NOTE:
The PCM may store EGR system related DTCs during this procedure.
NOTE:
To recreate the original conditions that set the DTC or caused the symptom, the
vehicle may require driving.
Key in OFF position.
ESM connector disconnected.
Access the misfire freeze frame data (if available) and record the operating conditions.
Obtain information from the customer information worksheet or any other available data from the
customer.
Recreate the misfire symptom using the freeze frame and customer information.
Can the symptom be recreated?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 346
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HD15.
No
REMOVE and INSPECT the ESM for signs of
contamination, unusual wear, carbon deposits,
binding or other damage. REFER to the ENGINE
EMISSION CONTROL -- E-SERIES for more
EGR system information. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HD15 CHECK FOR BASE ENGINE CONCERNS
NOTE:
The engine temperature may affect the results.
This step determines if there are any base engine concerns that may have caused the misfire DTC or drive
concern.
Key in OFF position.
Carry out the following tests in order to evaluate base engine integrity:
For vehicles equipped with mechanically driven cooling fans only, rotate the cooling fan by hand.
The cooling fan should rotate freely, with no abnormal binding or interference. If binding or
interference is present, remove any foreign materials or repair the cooling fan as necessary.
Refer to the ACCESSORY DRIVE -- E-SERIES and carry out checks in the Visual Inspection
Chart.
Refer to the ENGINE - 4.6L AND 5.4L -- E-SERIES and carry out the Compression Test and
Cylinder Leakage Detection.
Refer to the ENGINE - 4.6L AND 5.4L -- E-SERIES and carry out the Valve Train Analysis.
Visually inspect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve and tube for leaks.
Refer to the ENGINE - 4.6L AND 5.4L -- E-SERIES and carry out Component Tests.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. REFER to the ENGINE 4.6L AND 5.4L -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HD19.
HD16 DTC P1336: IDENTIFY THE CMP SENSOR TYPE
NOTE:
The variable reluctance (VR) sensors have 2-wire connectors, Hall-effect
sensors have 3-wire connectors.
Identify which type of CMP sensor the vehicle uses.
Does the vehicle use a Hall-effect sensor?
Yes
GO to HD17.
No
GO to HD18.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 347
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HD17 CHECK THE CMP SENSOR LOW RANGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
CMP Sensor connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
PWRGND
Key ON, engine running.
Digital multimeter (DMM) on low voltage DC scale.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CMP
Point B CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR
PWRGND
( - ) 12 Volt
Vehicle Battery
Negative
terminal
Does the voltage switch between LOW (less than 2 volts DC) and HIGH (greater than 8 volts DC)?
Yes
A Hall-effect CMP sensor that is installed out of
synchronization may produce a DTC. To verify the
correct CMP sensor installation, REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES , Engine
Synchronizer. If the CMP sensor is installed
properly,
GO to HD19.
No
INSTALL a new CMP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HD18 CHECK THE CMP SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector connected.
CMP Sensor connector disconnected.
DMM on low voltage AC scale.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 348
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine running.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CMP
( - ) CMP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
Run the engine at approximately 2,500 RPM.
Is the voltage greater than 0.25 V?
Yes
GO to HD19.
No
INSTALL a new CMP sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HD19 CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR EXCESSIVE ELECTRICAL NOISE
NOTE:
If the generator/regulator is electrically noisy, the noise decreases when the B+
connector is disconnected.
Key ON, engine running.
Monitor the generator for an audible electric noise.
Key in OFF position.
Generator/regulator B+ connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine running.
With the engine running, determine if the generator is still noisy.
Does the noise remain constant when the B+ connector is disconnected?
Yes
GO to HD20.
No
REFER to the GENERATOR AND
REGULATOR -- E-SERIES and diagnose the
generator is noisy symptom.
HD20 CHECK THE CKP HARNESS FOR INTERMITTENT CONCERNS
NOTE:
Chafed CKP wires or other physical damage to the harness may cause an
intermittent short in the CKP circuit.
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 349
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Visually check for chafed CKP wires or other physical damage to the CKP harness.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HD21.
HD21 DTC P0315: CHECK THE PHYSICAL CONDITION OF THE CRANKSHAFT PULSE WHEEL
NOTE:
DTC P0315 is set when the PCM is unable to learn and correct for the
mechanical variations in the crankshaft pulse wheel tooth spacing (the
allowable correction tolerances are exceeded).
Inspect the crankshaft pulse wheel for damaged teeth.
Inspect the crankshaft pulse wheel for wobble.
Check for a loose crankshaft pulse wheel.
Check the CKP sensor for damage.
Are the CKP sensor and crankshaft pulse wheel OK?
Yes
If the CKP is installed properly,
GO to HD22.
No
REPAIR as necessary. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES and check
for correct CKP sensor installation. RESET the keep
alive memory (KAM). REFER toRESETTING
THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM) .
COMPLETE the Misfire and Fuel Monitors drive
cycle procedure to learn the profile. Refer toON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE
CYCLE . To verify the repair RECREATE the
original conditions that set the misfire DTC or
caused the symptom using the freeze frame data and
customer information. MONITOR the cylinder
misfire data in Mode 6 - On Board Test Results and
VERIFY the misfire count is below 10. REFER to
the scan tool manufacturer's article for specific
information on the Mode 6 - On Board Test Results.
HD22 CHECK THE DAMPER AND PULLEY ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
For engines that have damper mounted pulse rings, it may be necessary to
remove the front cover or other components to observe the crank pulley.
Observe the crank pulley for wobble.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 350
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Examine the electronic ignition (EI) pulse ring fastened to the harmonic dampener.
Does the crank pulley wobble or is the pulse ring loose or damaged?
Yes
INSTALL a new pulley or damper assembly.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES . RESET the keep alive memory (KAM).
REFER toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE
MEMORY (KAM) . COMPLETE the Misfire and
Fuel Monitors drive cycle procedure to learn the
profile. Refer toON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
(OBD) DRIVE CYCLE . To verify the repair
GO to HD23.
RECREATE the original conditions that set the
misfire DTC or caused the symptom using the
freeze frame data and customer information.
MONITOR the cylinder misfire data in Mode 6 - On
Board Test Results and VERIFY the misfire count
is below 10. REFER to the scan tool manufacturer's
article for specific information on the Mode 6 - On
Board Test Results.
No
HD23 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST HE: EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEMS
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
differential pressure feedback exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) sensor (9J460)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 351
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
EGR valve (9D460) (9D475)
EGR vacuum regulator solenoid (9J459)
orifice tube assembly (9D477)
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor pressure hoses
vacuum lines
harness circuits: VREF, DPFE, SIGRTN, EVR, VPWR, VREF and PWRGND
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 115: Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 116: Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 352
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Vehicle
Vehicles equipped with a tube
mounted differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
Pin
3
2
1
1
2
3
Circuit
DPFE
SIGRTN
VREF
DPFE
SIGRTN
VREF
Fig. 117: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
Circuit
2
1
EVR (EGR Vacuum Regulator)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
Connector
150 (50-50-50) Pin
Ranger
170 Pin
Pin
B47
E27
E40
E41
E44
B47
E63
E57
E58
E21
Circuit
PWRGND
EVR
VREF
SIGRTN
DPFE
PWRGND
EVR
VREF
SIGRTN
DPFE
HE1 CHECK FOR DTCS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 353
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are DTCs P0401, P0402, P0403, P0405, P0406, P1405, P1406, P1408, or P1409 present?
Yes
No
For DTCs P0401 and P1408, GO to HE36.
For DTC P0402, GO to HE13.
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0403 and P1409, GO
to HE59.
For symptoms without DTCs, GO to HE57.
For continuous memory DTCs P0403 and P1409,
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
GO to HE64.
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For DTC P0405, GO to HE2.
For DTC P0406, GO to HE6.
For DTC P1405, GO to HE27.
For DTC P1406, GO to HE31.
HE2 DTC P0405: DETERMINE THE PRESENT DPFEGR PID VOLTAGE
NOTE:
Depending on the application, verify a prior repair has not resulted in the
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor being installed backwards or the
vacuum hoses being installed on the opposite ports.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.05 V?
Yes
GO to HE3.
No
An intermittent concern is suspected in the EGR
system.
GO to HE12.
HE3 CHECK THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
(+)
Differential
Pressure
Feedback EGR
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
( - ) Differential
Pressure
Feedback EGR
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 354
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage between 4 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to HE4.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
HE4 CHECK THE DPFE CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO SIGRTN OR GND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
DPFE
SIGRTN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
DPFE
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HE5.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE5 INDUCE THE OPPOSITE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR VOLTAGE
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Is the voltage between 4 - 5.5 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor.
After installing the new differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor, TURN the key to the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds before
No
GO to HE66.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 355
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
starting. This allows the PCM to calibrate itself to
the new differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Failure to do this may result in an incorrect DTC
P0402.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE6 DTC P0406: DETERMINE THE PRESENT DPFEGR PID VOLTAGE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4 V?
Yes
GO to HE7.
No
An intermittent concern is suspected in the EGR
system.
GO to HE12.
HE7 CHECK THE VREF VOLTAGE TO THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
(+)
Differential
Pressure
Feedback EGR
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
( - ) Differential
Pressure
Feedback EGR
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to HE8.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
HE8 CHECK THE DPFE AND SIGRTN CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 356
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( - ) Differential
Pressure
( + ) PCM
Feedback EGR
Connector,
Sensor
Harness Side
Connector,
Harness Side
DPFE
DPFE
SIGRTN
SIGRTN
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HE9.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE9 CHECK THE DPFE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
DPFE
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HE10.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE10 CHECK THE DPFE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
(+)
Differential
Pressure
Feedback EGR
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
DPFE
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 357
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage less than 0.2 V?
Yes
GO to HE11.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE11 CHECK THE DPFEGR PID
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A
Differential
Pressure
Feedback EGR
Point B
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
DPFE
Ground
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Is the DPFEGR PID greater than 4.5 V with the jumper wire removed and is the DPFEGR PID less
than 0.1 V with the jumper wire installed?
Yes
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self- GO to HE66.
test.
No
HE12 CARRY OUT A THOROUGH WIGGLE TEST ON THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR
HARNESS
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the sensor to the PCM.
Is there any change in the voltage reading, or is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
HE13 DTCS P0402 AND P1405: CHECK FOR SIMULTANEOUS PRESENCE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 358
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is DTC P0402 present with DTC P1405?
Yes
GO to HE28.
No
GO to HE14.
HE14 DTC P0402: CHECK FOR EGR FLOW AT IDLE WITH THE EGR VACUUM HOSE DISCONNECTED
NOTE:
A pinched or plugged EGR vacuum hose can trap vacuum between the EGR
vacuum regulator solenoid and EGR valve, not allowing the EGR valve to close.
NOTE:
Disregard DTC P1408 if it is generated as a result of carrying out the KOER selftest with the EGR vacuum source hose disconnected.
Trace each vacuum hose from the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid and verify each hose is connected
correctly.
Verify the EGR vacuum hose is not pinched or plugged and is routed correctly.
Disconnect and plug the vacuum hose connected to the EGR valve.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Does KOER DTC P0402 appear or are you unable to run the KOER self-test due to an engine stall
or no start?
Yes
No
INSPECT the pressure hoses for correct routing,
pinching, icing or other blockage.
If OK, REMOVE and INSPECT the EGR valve and
CONNECT the EGR valve vacuum hose.
tube for signs of contamination, unusual wear,
GO to HE16.
carbon deposits, binding or other damage.
REPAIR as necessary.
GO to HE15.
HE15 CARRY OUT THE KOER SELF-TEST
Clear the DTCs.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Is DTC P0402 present?
Yes
GO to HE18.
No
The test is complete and no concerns are found.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE16 CHECK FOR EGR FLOW AT IDLE WITH THE EGR VACUUM HOSE CONNECTED
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 359
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connect the EGR valve vacuum hose.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Does KOER DTC P0402 appear or are you unable to run the KOER self-test due to an engine stall
or no start?
Yes
GO to HE17.
No
INSPECT the pressure hoses for pinching, icing or
other blockage.
REPAIR as necessary.
GO to HE23.
HE17 CHECK THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR OUTPUT BY APPLYING VACUUM
WITH THE HAND PUMP
Disconnect the pressure hoses at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Connect the vacuum pump to the downstream connection at the sensor (intake manifold side of the sensor
or the smaller diameter pickup tube).
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Apply 27 - 30 kPa (8 - 9 in-Hg) vacuum to the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and hold for 10
seconds.
Quickly release vacuum.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must be between 0.2 and 1.3 volt with the key ON and no vacuum
applied.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must increase to greater than 4 volts with the vacuum applied.
The DPFEGR PID must drop to less than 1.5 volts in less than 3 seconds when the vacuum is
released.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate a concern in the differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor?
Yes
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor.
After installing the new differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor, TURN the key to the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds before
GO to HE18.
starting. This allows the PCM to calibrate itself to
the new differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Failure to do this may result in an incorrect DTC
P0402.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HE18 CHECK EGR FLOW AT IDLE WITH THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR HARNESS CONNECTOR OFF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 360
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor connector connected.
Disconnect the vacuum hose at the EGR valve and connect the hose to the vacuum gauge.
Start the engine.
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid connector disconnected.
Observe the vacuum gauge:
The EGR valve requires vacuum greater than 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) to begin to open.
If the vacuum reading remains greater than 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) after the EGR vacuum regulator
solenoid is disconnected, a concern may be present in the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid.
Does the EGR vacuum remain greater than 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) at idle after the EGR vacuum
regulator is disconnected?
Yes
No
GO to HE19.
GO to HE20.
HE19 INSPECT THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID VENT FOR BLOCKAGE
NOTE:
When the EGR valve is closed, the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vacuum is
vented through the solenoid vent to the atmosphere. A plugged EGR vacuum
regulator solenoid vent does not allow EGR vacuum to vent to the atmosphere.
Key in OFF position.
Remove the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vent cap.
Remove the filter and inspect for blockage or icing.
Is the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vent or vent filter plugged or restricted?
Yes
REPAIR the vent, or if not repairable, INSTALL a
new EGR vacuum regulator solenoid. REFER to the
ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new EGR Vacuum Regulator solenoid.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE20 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID COIL RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) EGR
Vacuum
Regulator
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
( - ) EGR
Vacuum
Regulator
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 361
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Side
VPWR - Pin 1
Side
EVR - Pin 2
Is the resistance between 26 - 40 ohms?
Yes
GO to HE21.
No
INSTALL a new EGR Vacuum Regulator solenoid.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE21 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
EVR
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HE22.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE22 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO VREF
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
EVR
VREF
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HE66.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE23 CHECK THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR OUTPUT BY APPLYING VACUUM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 362
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
WITH THE HAND PUMP
Disconnect the pressure hoses at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Connect the vacuum pump to the downstream connection at the sensor (intake manifold side of the sensor
or the smaller diameter pickup tube).
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Apply 27 - 30 kPa (8 - 9 in-Hg) vacuum to the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and hold for 10
seconds.
Quickly release the vacuum.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must be between 0.25 and 1.3 volts with the key ON and no vacuum
applied.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must increase to greater than 4 volts with the vacuum applied.
The DPFEGR PID must drop to less than 1.5 volts in less than 3 seconds when the vacuum is
released.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate a concern in the differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor?
Yes
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor.
After installing the new differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor, TURN the key to the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds before
GO to HE24.
starting. This allows the PCM to calibrate itself to
the new differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Failure to do this may result in an incorrect DTC
P0402.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HE24 CHECK THE EGR VALVE OPERATION
NOTE:
Typical sensor voltage with no EGR flow is between 0.25 volt and 1.3 volts.
NOTE:
A higher voltage at idle may be due to a non-seating or heavily carbon EGR
valve pintle.
NOTE:
DPFEGR PID voltage must increase as the valve opens and decrease as the
valve closes. A slow return voltage is an indication of a binding or slow closing
EGR valve.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 363
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Disconnect the vacuum hose at the EGR valve and plug the hose.
Connect the vacuum pump to the EGR valve.
Start the engine.
Observe the DPFEGR PID at idle and compare it to the KOEO voltage.
Apply just enough vacuum to the EGR valve to open it without stalling the engine.
Quickly release the vacuum.
Repeat this 3 times.
Observe the DPFEGR PID.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate an open, binding or slow closing EGR valve?
Yes
REMOVE and INSPECT the EGR valve for signs
of contamination, unusual wear, carbon deposits,
binding or other damage.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HE25.
HE25 CARRY OUT A THOROUGH WIGGLE TEST ON THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR HARNESS
NOTE:
An intermittent short to GND in the EGR vacuum regulator circuit causes the
vacuum applied to the EGR valve to be higher than normal when the short is
present. The vacuum available at the EGR valve at idle is normally below 3.4
kPa (1.6 in-Hg) for the valve to begin to open.
NOTE:
A concern is indicated by a sudden jump in the vacuum reading during the
wiggle test.
Key in OFF position.
Remove the vacuum pump.
Connect the vacuum gauge to the EGR valve vacuum hose.
Connect a vacuum gauge to the EGR valve vacuum hose using a vacuum tee.
Key ON, engine running.
Observe the vacuum gauge.
Lightly tap on the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid.
Carry out a thorough wiggle test on the EGR vacuum regulator harness.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
CONNECT the vacuum hose(s).
GO to HE26.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 364
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HE26 INSPECT THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID AND VACUUM HOSES FOR PLUGGING
Key in OFF position.
Remove the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vent cap.
Remove the filter and inspect for blockage or icing.
Inspect the pressure hoses for pinching, icing or other blockage.
Is the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vent or vent filter plugged or restricted?
Yes
No
REPAIR, or if not repairable, INSTALL a new EGR
vacuum regulator solenoid.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE27 DTC P1405: INSPECT THE UPSTREAM PRESSURE HOSE CONNECTIONS
Inspect the upstream hose at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and orifice tube assembly for
a disconnect or a poor connection.
Fig. 118: Typical Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
TYPICAL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SYSTEM
Item
Description
Number
Differential Pressure
1
Feedback EGR Sensor
2
Pickup Tubes
Upstream Pressure
3
Hose
4
To EGR Valve
5
Orifice Tube
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 365
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
6
7
Assembly
Exhaust Manifold
Downstream Pressure
Hose
Is vacuum hose off or poorly connected?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HE28.
HE28 INSPECT THE UPSTREAM PRESSURE HOSE FOR PLUGGING
NOTE:
It is essential that only the correct Ford replacement pressure hose be used.
Visually inspect the upstream pressure hose routing. The hose must not be pinched or have dips in it
where water could settle or freeze.
Remove the upstream pressure hose and carefully inspect for plugging, water, or leaks.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR or INSTALL a new pressure hose as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HE29.
HE29 CHECK THE ORIFICE TUBE ASSEMBLY AND THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR
SENSOR
Inspect the upstream connection on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor for damage or plugging
at the sensor.
Inspect the exhaust manifold side pressure tube at the orifice tube assembly for plugging or damage.
Is the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor or orifice tube assembly plugged or damaged?
Yes
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new Differential Pressure
Feedback EGR sensor or orifice tube assembly as
necessary.
After installing the new differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor, TURN the key to the ON
GO to HE30.
position for approximately 5 seconds before
starting. This allows the PCM to calibrate itself to
the new differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Failure to do this may result in an incorrect DTC
P0402.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 366
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE30 CHECK THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR OUTPUT BY APPLYING VACUUM
WITH THE HAND PUMP
Disconnect the pressure hoses at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Connect the vacuum pump to the downstream connection at the sensor (intake manifold side of the sensor
or the smaller diameter pickup tube).
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Apply 27 - 30 kPa (8 - 9 in-Hg) vacuum to the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and hold for 10
seconds.
Quickly release the vacuum.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must be between 0.25 and 1.3 volts with the key ON and no vacuum
applied.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must increase to greater than 4 volts with the vacuum applied.
The DPFEGR PID must drop to less than 1.5 volts in less than 3 seconds when the vacuum is
released.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate a concern in the differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor.
After installing the new differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor, TURN the key to the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds before
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
starting. This allows the PCM to calibrate itself to
the new differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Failure to do this may result in an incorrect DTC
P0402.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE31 DTC P1406: INSPECT THE DOWNSTREAM PRESSURE HOSE CONNECTIONS
NOTE:
If the concern is currently present, DTC P1408 appears when running the KOER
self-test.
Verify the EGR valve is securely attached and exhaust gases are not leaking from the sealing surface.
Inspect the downstream hose at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and orifice tube assembly
for a disconnect or a poor connection.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 367
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 119: Typical Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
TYPICAL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SYSTEM
Item
Description
Number
Differential Pressure
1
Feedback EGR Sensor
2
Pickup Tubes
Upstream Pressure
3
Hose
4
To EGR Valve
Orifice Tube
5
Assembly
6
Exhaust Manifold
Downstream Pressure
7
Hose
Is vacuum hose off or poorly connected?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HE32.
HE32 INSPECT THE DOWNSTREAM PRESSURE HOSE FOR PLUGGING
NOTE:
It is essential that only the correct Ford replacement pressure hose be used.
Visually inspect the downstream pressure hose routing.
Remove the upstream pressure hose and carefully inspect for plugging, water, or leaks.
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 368
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPAIR or INSTALL a new pressure hose as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HE33.
HE33 CHECK THE ORIFICE TUBE ASSEMBLY AND THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR
SENSOR
Inspect the connections at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor for plugging or damage.
Inspect the intake manifold side pressure tube at the orifice tube assembly for plugging or damage.
Is the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor or orifice tube assembly plugged or damaged?
Yes
REPAIR or INSTALL a new Differential Pressure
Feedback EGR sensor or orifice tube assembly as
necessary.
After installing the new differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor, TURN the key to the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds before
GO to HE34.
starting. This allows the PCM to calibrate itself to
the new differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Failure to do this may result in an incorrect DTC
P0402.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HE34 CHECK THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR OUTPUT BY APPLYING VACUUM
WITH THE HAND PUMP
Disconnect the pressure hoses at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Connect the vacuum pump to the downstream connection at the sensor (intake manifold side of the sensor
or the smaller diameter pickup tube).
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Apply 27 - 30 kPa (8 - 9 in-Hg) vacuum to the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and hold for 10
seconds.
Quickly release the vacuum.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must be between 0.25 and 1.3 volts with the key ON and no vacuum
applied.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must increase to greater than 4 volts with the vacuum applied.
The DPFEGR PID must drop to less than 1.5 volts in less than 3 seconds when the vacuum is
released.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate a concern in the differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 369
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to HE35.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
HE35 CHECK THE DPFE CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( - ) Differential
Pressure
( + ) PCM
Feedback EGR
Connector,
Sensor
Harness Side
Connector,
Harness Side
DPFE
DPFE
SIGRTN
SIGRTN
VREF
VREF
Are the resistances greater than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor.
After installing the new differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor, TURN the key to the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds before
starting. This allows the PCM to calibrate itself to
the new differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Failure to do this may result in an incorrect DTC
P0402.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE36 DTC P0401: CARRY OUT THE KOER SELF-TEST
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Does DTC P1408 appear?
Yes
GO to HE37.
No
GO to HE53.
HE37 KOER AND CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P1408: RETRIEVE CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS
NOTE:
If any DTC other than P1406 appears, note the DTC and refer toDIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS after carrying out this
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 370
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
pinpoint test.
Retrieve all continuous memory DTCs.
Is DTC 1406 present?
Yes
GO to HE31.
No
GO to HE38.
HE38 INSPECT THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR PRESSURE HOSES
Inspect the pressure hoses for a reverse connection at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor or at
the orifice tube assembly.
Inspect the hoses for incorrect routing.
Inspect both hoses for leaks and blockage.
Inspect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and orifice tube assembly for blockage or damage
at the pick-up tubes.
Fig. 120: Typical Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
TYPICAL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SYSTEM
Item
Description
Number
Differential Pressure
1
Feedback EGR Sensor
2
Pickup Tubes
Upstream Pressure
3
Hose
4
To EGR Valve
Orifice Tube
5
Assembly
6
Exhaust Manifold
Downstream Pressure
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 371
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
7
Hose
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR or INSTALL a new pressure hose as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HE39.
HE39 CHECK THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR OUTPUT BY APPLYING VACUUM
WITH THE HAND PUMP
Disconnect the pressure hoses at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Connect the vacuum pump to the downstream connection at the sensor (intake manifold side of the sensor
or the smaller diameter pickup tube).
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Apply 27 - 30 kPa (8 - 9 in-Hg) vacuum to the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and hold for 10
seconds.
Quickly release the vacuum.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must be between 0.25 and 1.3 volts with the key ON and no vacuum
applied.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must increase to greater than 4 volts with the vacuum applied.
The DPFEGR PID must drop to less than 1.5 volts in less than 3 seconds when the vacuum is
released.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate a concern in the differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor.
After installing the new differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor, TURN the key to the ON
CONNECT all the hoses.
position for approximately 5 seconds before
starting. This allows the PCM to calibrate itself to GO to HE40.
the new differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Failure to do this may result in an incorrect DTC
P0402.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE40 CHECK THE VREF VOLTAGE TO THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 372
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
(+)
Differential
Pressure
Feedback EGR
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
( - ) Differential
Pressure
Feedback EGR
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to HE41.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
HE41 CHECK THE DPFE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
DPFE
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HE42.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE42 CARRY OUT THE KOER SELF-TEST WHILE MONITORING THE EGR VACUUM
NOTE:
Since the EGR vacuum hose is disconnected, ignore the DTCs during this
KOER self-test.
PCM connector connected.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor connector connected.
Disconnect the vacuum hose at the EGR valve and connect the hose to the vacuum gauge.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 373
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Monitor the vacuum gauge. Approximately 30 seconds into the test, EGR flow will be requested for a few
seconds. Vacuum at this time should increase to greater than 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) to open the valve.
Does the vacuum increase to 10 kPa (3.0 in-Hg) or greater at any time during the KOER self-test?
Yes
GO to HE43.
No
GO to HE44.
HE43 CHECK THE EGR VALVE FUNCTION BY APPLYING VACUUM WITH THE HAND PUMP
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the vacuum hose at the EGR valve and plug the hose.
Connect the vacuum pump to the EGR valve.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Apply 27 - 30 kPa (8 - 9 in-Hg) vacuum to the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and hold for 10
seconds. If the engine wants to stall, increase the engine speed to approximately 1,000 RPM and hold
steady.
Monitor for the following:
The EGR valve starts opening at about 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) vacuum, indicated by an increasing
DPFEGR PID voltage.
The DPFEGR PID voltage increases until the valve is fully open. The DPFEGR PID voltage must
read at least 2.5 volts with full vacuum applied.
The DPFEGR PID voltage remains steady with steady vacuum. If voltage drops within a few
seconds, the EGR valve or vacuum source may be leaking.
The DPFEGR PID must drop to less than 1.5 volts in less than 3 seconds when the vacuum is
released.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate the EGR valve is operating as described in the test step?
Yes
GO to HE47.
No
GO to HE44.
HE44 PHYSICALLY INSPECT ALL VACUUM LINES BETWEEN THE EGR VALVE, EGR VACUUM
REGULATOR AND VACUUM SOURCE
Key in OFF position.
Inspect all vacuum lines for leaks, kinks, pinches, disconnects, blockage, misrouting or physical damage
of any type.
Inspect the EGR vacuum regulator for cracks or other physical damage.
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:57 AM
Page 374
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPAIR as necessary.
If the EGR vacuum regulator is damaged,
INSTALL a new EGR vacuum regulator.
GO to HE45.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE45 PHYSICALLY INSPECT THE EGR VALVE
Remove and inspect the EGR valve for signs of contamination, unusual wear, carbon deposits, binding or
other damage.
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary.
If repair is not possible, INSTALL a new EGR
valve.
GO to HE46.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE46 CHECK THE ENGINE VACUUM
EGR vacuum regulator vacuum hoses disconnected.
Connect a hand held vacuum gauge to the vacuum source.
Key ON, engine running.
Engine warm and at idle.
Observe the vacuum gauge.
Is the vacuum gauge steadily reading at least 51 kPa (15 in-Hg)?
Yes
GO to HE47.
No
ISOLATE the base engine concern and REPAIR as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE47 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID
Key in OFF position.
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) EGR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 375
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Vacuum
Regulator
Solenoid
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HE48.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE48 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID COIL RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) EGR
Vacuum
Regulator
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR - Pin 1
( - ) EGR
Vacuum
Regulator
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
EVR - Pin 2
Is the resistance between 26 - 40 ohms?
Yes
GO to HE49.
No
INSTALL a new EGR Vacuum Regulator solenoid.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE49 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 376
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side
EVR
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 1 V?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HE50.
HE50 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( - ) EGR
Vacuum
( + ) PCM
Regulator
Connector,
Solenoid
Harness Side
Connector,
Harness Side
EVR
EVR - Pin 2
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HE51.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE51 INSPECT THE EGR SYSTEM FOR LEAKS, RESTRICTIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid connector connected.
PCM connector connected.
Visually inspect the EGR system for signs of intermittent failure.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HE52.
HE52 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID VACUUM FLOW BY GROUNDING THE EVR
CIRCUIT
NOTE:
If the EGR vacuum regulator does not react within 2 seconds, an EGR vacuum
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 377
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
regulator concern may be present.
Disconnect the vacuum hose at the EGR valve and connect the hose to the vacuum gauge.
Key ON, engine running.
Engine warm and at idle.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A EGR
Vacuum
Regulator Point B Vehicle
Solenoid
Battery
Connector,
Harness Side
Negative
EVR - Pin 2
terminal
Does the vacuum gauge indicate 13.5 kPa (4.0 in-Hg) or greater within 2 seconds?
Yes
GO to HE66.
No
INSTALL a new EGR Vacuum Regulator solenoid.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE53 INSPECT THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR PRESSURE HOSES
Visually inspect the upstream pressure hose routing.
Visually inspect the downstream pressure hose routing.
Inspect for a reversed connection at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor or orifice tube
assembly.
The hose must not be pinched or have dips in it where water could settle or freeze.
Inspect both hoses for leaks and blockage.
Inspect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and orifice tube assembly for blockage or damage
at the pick-up tubes.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 378
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 121: Typical Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
TYPICAL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SYSTEM
Item
Description
Number
Differential Pressure
1
Feedback EGR Sensor
2
Pickup Tubes
Upstream Pressure
3
Hose
4
To EGR Valve
Orifice Tube
5
Assembly
6
Exhaust Manifold
Downstream Pressure
7
Hose
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HE54.
HE54 CHECK THE EGR VALVE FUNCTION BY APPLYING VACUUM WITH THE HAND PUMP
Disconnect the pressure hoses at the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Connect the vacuum pump to the downstream connection at the sensor (intake manifold side of the sensor
or the smaller diameter pickup tube).
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Apply 27 - 30 kPa (8 - 9 in-Hg) vacuum to the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and hold for 10
seconds.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 379
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Quickly release the vacuum.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must be between 0.25 and 1.3 volts with the key ON and no vacuum
applied.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must increase to greater than 4 volts with the vacuum applied.
The DPFEGR PID must drop to less than 1.5 volts in less than 3 seconds when the vacuum is
released.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate a concern in the differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor.
After installing the new differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor, TURN the key to the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds before
CONNECT all the hoses.
starting. This allows the PCM to calibrate itself to GO to HE55.
the new differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
Failure to do this may result in an incorrect DTC
P0402.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE55 CHECK THE EGR VALVE FUNCTION BY APPLYING VACUUM WITH THE HAND PUMP
Disconnect the vacuum hose at the EGR valve and plug the hose.
Connect the vacuum pump to the EGR valve.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Apply 27 - 30 kPa (8 - 9 in-Hg) vacuum to the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and hold for 10
seconds. If the engine wants to stall, increase the engine speed to approximately 1,000 RPM and hold
steady.
Monitor for the following:
The EGR valve starts opening at about 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) vacuum, indicated by an increasing
DPFEGR PID voltage.
The DPFEGR PID voltage increases until the valve is fully open. The DPFEGR PID voltage must
read at least 2.5 volts with full vacuum applied.
The DPFEGR PID voltage remains steady with steady vacuum. If voltage drops within a few
seconds, the EGR valve or vacuum source may be leaking.
The DPFEGR PID must drop to less than 1.5 volts in less than 3 seconds when the vacuum is
released.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate the EGR valve is operating as described in the test step?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 380
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HE56.
No
REMOVE and INSPECT the EGR valve for signs
of contamination, unusual wear, carbon deposits,
binding or other damage.
If OK, REMOVE and INSPECT the EGR valve and
tube for signs of contamination, unusual wear,
carbon deposits, binding or other damage.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE56 INSPECT THE EGR VACUUM SIGNAL SUPPLY FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN
Key in OFF position.
Remove the vacuum hose from the EGR valve and connect to a vacuum gauge.
Key ON, engine running.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A EGR
Vacuum
Regulator Point B Vehicle
Solenoid
Battery
Connector,
Harness Side
Negative
EVR - Pin 2
terminal
The solenoid is full ON.
Vacuum gauge should read above 13.5 kPa (4 in-Hg).
Observe the vacuum gauge.
Look for a concern while carrying out the following checks:
Lightly tap on the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid.
Carry out a thorough wiggle test on the EGR vacuum regulator harness.
Inspect the EGR vacuum signal supply for an intermittent concern.
Inspect the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid and vacuum hoses for plugging.
A concern is indicated by a sudden drop in the vacuum reading.
Is a concern indicated?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
Note: In cold climates, the EGR valve may
temporarily freeze shut and thaw when the engine
warms.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 381
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
HE57 EGR DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM: CHECK FOR EGR FLOW WITH THE EGR VACUUM HOSE
DISCONNECTED AND PLUGGED
Carry out the KOER self-test. Repair any other DTCs.
Possible causes for EGR flow at idle with no related DTCs:
EGR valve not fully seating
EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vent restricted
Damaged EGR vacuum regulator solenoid
Disconnect and plug the vacuum hose connected to the EGR valve.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Note the voltage.
Key ON, engine running.
With the engine at idle, observe the DPFEGR PID voltage. Compare to engine OFF voltage.
An increase in voltage at idle indicates the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is sensing EGR
flow.
Is the DPFEGR PID voltage greater at idle by 0.15 V than with the engine off?
Yes
REMOVE and INSPECT the EGR valve for signs
of contamination, unusual wear, carbon deposits,
binding or other damage.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Inspect the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid and
vacuum hoses for plugging.
INSPECT the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vent
for blockage.
GO to HE58.
HE58 DETERMINE THE EGR VALVE VACUUM SUPPLY
Is a concern present in the EGR valve vacuum supply?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new EGR Vacuum Regulator solenoid.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE59 DTCS P0403 AND P1409: CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID COIL RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 382
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) EGR
Vacuum
Regulator
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR - Pin 1
( - ) EGR
Vacuum
Regulator
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
EVR - Pin 2
Is the resistance between 26 - 40 ohms?
Yes
GO to HE60.
No
INSTALL a new EGR Vacuum Regulator solenoid.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HE60 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) EGR
Vacuum
Regulator
Solenoid
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HE61.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE61 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( - ) EGR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 383
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
EVR
Vacuum
Regulator
Solenoid
Connector,
Harness Side
EVR - Pin 2
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HE62.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE62 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
EVR
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to HE63.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE63 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
EVR
PWRGND
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 384
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to HE66.
REPEAT the self-test.
HE64 CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF KOER DTCS P0403 OR P1409
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Are DTCs P0403 or P1409 present?
Yes
GO to HE59.
No
GO to HE65.
HE65 CARRY OUT A THOROUGH WIGGLE TEST ON THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
EVR
PWRGND
Lightly tap on the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid. Wiggle the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid
connector. Carry out a thorough wiggle test on the harness. A concern is indicated by a voltage drop
during the wiggle test.
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
HE66 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 385
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST HF: CATALYST EFFICIENCY MONITOR AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
catalytic converter
exhaust system
HF1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0420 or P0430 present?
Yes
GO to HF2.
No
For symptoms without DTCs, GO to HF6.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
HF2 CHECK FOR OTHER DTCS
NOTE:
Internal deterioration of a catalytic converter is usually caused by abnormal
engine operation upstream of the catalyst. Events that can produce higher than
normal temperatures in the catalyst are particularly suspect. For example,
misfiring can cause higher than normal catalyst operating temperatures.
NOTE:
Make sure the customer has not:
refueled the vehicle with leaded gasoline.
noticed a high vehicle oil consumption. An engine that consumes oil at a
high rate deposits high levels of phosphorus on the catalyst and reduces
the catalyst efficiency.
Check for self-test DTCs.
Are any DTCs present other than the following: P0420, P0430?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 386
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS for pinpoint test
GO to HF3.
direction and REPAIR the misfire DTCs.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HF3 CHECK THE ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL (EEC) WIRING HARNESS
NOTE:
Check the HO2S electrical connectors to make sure the correct HO2S is
connected to the correct electrical connector. The electrical connectors are
color coded to make sure the correct connection is made.
If the electrical connection of the rear HO2S are interchanged/crossed, the
catalyst efficiency monitor test fails.
Visually inspect the HO2S harness connectors for any indication of crossed wiring.
Visually inspect the harness for exposed wiring, corrosion and correct routing.
Visually inspect the PCM connectors for damaged, or pushed out pins, corrosion and loose wires.
Are there any concerns with the wiring or the PCM connection?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the catalyst
monitor drive cycle to verify the repairs.
No
GO to HF4.
HF4 CHECK THE FUEL PRESSURE
WARNING: The fuel system remains pressurized when the engine is not running. To
prevent injury or fire, use caution when working on the fuel system.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Before repairing or installing a new component in the fuel system, reduce
the possibility of injury or fire by following the warning, caution, and
handling directions in pinpoint test HC. refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
Fuel pressure above specification can produce an abnormally rich air/fuel
mixture. This rich air/fuel mixture can cause higher than normal catalyst
operating temperatures.
NOTE:
On electronic returnless fuel system (ERFS), the fuel pressure can be monitored
by the scan tool using the fuel rail pressure (FRP) PID.
Mechanical returnless fuel systems (MRFS):
If applicable, inspect the vacuum hose going to the fuel rail pulse damper for proper installation
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 387
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
and cracks. Repair as necessary.
Connect a Rotunda fuel pressure gauge or equivalent.
Access the PCM and monitor the FRP PID.
Start the engine. Record the fuel pressure.
Compare the recorded fuel pressure reading to the Fuel System Specification Chart found at the
beginning of Pinpoint Test HC. refer to PINPOINT TEST HC.
Key in OFF position.
Is the fuel pressure within specifications?
Yes
The fuel pressure is OK. If applicable, REMOVE
the fuel pressure gauge.
GO to HF5.
No
The fuel pressure is out of specification.
GO to HC3.
HF5 CHECK FOR LEAKS IN THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
NOTE:
If a catalyst is in series with a leaking exhaust system, it can fail the catalyst
efficiency monitor test.
Inspect the exhaust system for leaks, cracks, loose connections, punctures, or non-factory modifications.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs.
CARRY OUT the catalyst monitor drive cycle to
verify the repairs.
No
GO to HF10.
HF6 CHECK FOR RESTRICTIONS IN THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
NOTE:
A slight pressure in the exhaust system is normal, but excessive exhaust back
pressure seriously affects engine operation.
Inspect the following for damage or restrictions:
front and rear exhaust pipes
catalytic converter
muffler and tailpipe assembly
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HF7.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 388
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HF7 CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE EXHAUST BACK PRESSURE
The internal condition of exhaust system and its ability to flow can be checked with an exhaust back
pressure tool.
Is an exhaust back pressure tester available?
Yes
GO to HF8.
No
GO to HF9.
HF8 CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE EXHAUST BACK PRESSURE WITH EXHAUST BACK PRESSURE TOOL
NOTE:
Typical exhaust back pressure, when measured near the exhaust manifold and
at normal engine operating temperature, should not exceed 20.7 kPa (3 psi) at
idle and 55.2 kPa (8 psi) at wide open throttle (WOT) under load.
Install an exhaust back pressure tester and follow the tool manufacturer installation and testing
instructions.
Does the exhaust back pressure test indicate a restriction?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary.
No indication of restrictions or leaks has been
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
detected in the exhaust system.
To continue diagnosis of a symptom (lack of power, To continue diagnosis of a symptom (lack of power,
loss of power, or no start), REFER to the
loss of power, or no start), REFER to the
SYMPTOM CHARTS article Symptom Charts.
SYMPTOM CHARTS article Symptom Charts.
HF9 CHECK MANIFOLD VACUUM FOR AN INDICATION OF EXCESSIVE EXHAUST SYSTEM RESTRICTION
NOTE:
When the engine is first started and is idled, the reading may be normal 51-74
kPa (15-22 in-Hg), but as the engine RPM is increased, the back pressure
caused by a clogged exhaust system causes the needle to slowly drop to 0 kPa
(0 in-Hg). The needle then may slowly rise. Excessive exhaust restriction
causes the needle to drop to a low point even if the engine is only idling.
Attach a vacuum gauge to the intake manifold vacuum source.
Observe the vacuum gauge while increasing the engine RPM.
Does the vacuum gauge indicate an exhaust restriction concern?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary.
No indication of restrictions or leaks has been
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
detected in the exhaust system.
To continue diagnosis of a symptom (lack of power, To continue diagnosis of a symptom (lack of power,
loss of power, or no start), REFER to the
loss of power, or no start), REFER to the
SYMPTOM CHARTS article Symptom Charts.
SYMPTOM CHARTS article Symptom Charts.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 389
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HF10 CARRY OUT THE CATALYST MONITOR DRIVE CYCLE
Carry out the catalyst monitor drive cycle. Refer toON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE
CYCLE .
Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs.
Are DTCs P0420 or P0430 present?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new catalyst between the monitored
HO2S sensors, only for the bank referenced, (P0420
Bank 1), (P0430 Bank 2). Do not install a new
The test is complete and no concerns are present.
unmonitored catalyst unless it is repaired as an
assembly. REFER to the EXHAUST SYSTEM -E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
PINPOINT TEST HG: POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve (6A666) and related vacuum lines
electrically heated PCV valve (6A666) and heater circuit, both PCM and non-PCM controlled
electrically heated PCV tube (9F624) and heater circuit, both PCM and non-PCM controlled
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
PCV thermal extension harness (12A580)
NOTE:
For the electrically heated PCV system only, refer to POSITIVE CRANKCASE
VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM .
Electrically Heated PCV
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 390
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 122: Positive Crankcase Ventilation Heated Fitting (PCVHF) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 123: Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 391
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 124: Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria (PCM controlled PCV
heater),
E-Series 6.8L (PCM controlled PCV heater),
E-Series 4.6L (PCM controlled PCV heater),
Explorer 4.0L (PCM controlled PCV heater),
Explorer Sport Trac 4.0L (PCM controlled
PCV heater),
F-150 4.2L (PCM controlled PCV heater),
F-150 4.6L (PCM controlled PCV heater),
Fusion 3.0L (PCM controlled PCV heater),
Grand Marquis (PCM controlled PCV heater),
Milan 3.0L (PCM controlled PCV heater),
Mountaineer 4.0L (PCM controlled PCV
heater),
Mustang 4.0L (PCM controlled PCV heater),
Mustang 5.4L (PCM controlled PCV heater),
Town Car (PCM controlled PCV heater)
Expedition (Non-PCM controlled heated PCV
tube),
F-150 5.4L (Non-PCM controlled heated PCV
tube),
Mark LT (Non-PCM controlled heated PCV
tube),
Navigator (Non-PCM controlled heated PCV
tube)
F-Super Duty 5.4L (PCM controlled heated
PCV tube)
Connector
A
Pin
Circuit
1
2
PCVHC
IGN START/RUN
B
2
1
GND
IGN START/RUN
C
2
1
PCVHC
IGN START/RUN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 392
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
All other vehicles
A
1
2
GND
IGN START/RUN
Fig. 125: Positive Crankcase Ventilation Heated Fitting (PCVHF) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
1
2
Circuit
PCVHF (Positive Crankcase Ventilation Heated Fitting)
IGN START/RUN
Fig. 126: Positive Crankcase Ventilation Thermal Extension -Harness Side (PCVTE-Harness Side)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
Circuit
GND (Ground)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 393
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
1
IGN START/RUN
This table is only for vehicles equipped with a PCM controlled PCV heater.
Vehicle
E-Series,
F-Super Duty
F-150
Fusion,
Milan
Mustang 5.4L
All other vehicles
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
Circuit
E2
PCVHC
190 Pin
140 Pin
E3
E2
PCVHC
PCVHC
170 Pin
170 Pin
E67
E3
PCVHC
PCVHC
HG1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Check for DTCs P053A, P145E or P1489.
Are any of the above listed DTCs present?
Yes
GO to HG5.
No
For all other symptoms without DTCs, GO to HG2.
HG2 VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE PCV VALVE
NOTE:
If the PCV valve or tube is electrically heated, verify the electrical connection.
On some applications the vehicle may be equipped with a thermal harness that
only provides electrical continuity when the temperature is less than 5°C (40°F)
+/- 4°C (+/- 7°F). Typically this harness is located close to the PCV valve or tube.
NOTE:
If the PCV valve is water heated, verify the coolant hose and clip connections.
Check the PCV valve, hoses and connections for leaks or restrictions.
Verify the PCV valve maintenance schedule has been followed.
Verify the proper PCV valve part number.
Verify the PCV valve is clean.
Verify the fresh air tube and related hoses are clean and routed correctly.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. VERIFY the symptom no
longer exists.
No
For an electrically heated PCV tube, GO to HG4.
For all others, GO to HG3.
HG3 STUCK PCV VALVE CHECK
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 394
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Disconnect the PCV valve from the valve cover.
Shake the PCV valve.
Does the PCV valve rattle when shaken?
Yes
No
REINSTALL the PCV valve.
For PCV systems with electrical heating, GO to
The PCV valve is sticking. INSTALL a new PCV
HG4.
valve. VERIFY the symptom no longer exists.
For PCV systems without electrical heating, GO to
HG12.
HG4 CHECK FOR A PCM CONTROLLED PCV HEATER
NOTE:
If a thermal extension harness is present then the PCV is non-PCM controlled.
Refer to POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM .
Check if the PCV heater is PCM controlled.
Is the PCV heater PCM controlled?
Yes
GO to HG5.
No
GO to HG8.
HG5 CHECK THE HARNESS VOLTAGE TO THE PCM CONTROLLED PCV HEATER
Suspect PCV connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCVHF
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
IGN
START/RUN - Ground
Pin 2
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCV
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
IGN
Ground
START/RUN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 395
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HG6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HG6 CHECK THE HARNESS CIRCUIT TO THE PCM CONTROLLED PCV HEATER
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCVHF
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
PCVHF
PCVHF - Pin 1
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCV
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
PCVHC
PCVHC
Is the resistance greater than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HG7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HG7 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE PCM CONTROLLED PCV VALVE OR TUBE HEATER
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCVHF
( - ) PCVHF
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
IGN
START/RUN - PCVHF - Pin 1
Pin 2
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 396
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) PCV
Connector,
Component
Side
IGN
START/RUN
( - ) PCV
Connector,
Component
Side
PCVHC
Is the resistance between 10 - 35 ohms?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new PCV valve or tube. REFER to the
ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HG13.
HG8 CHECK THE VOLTAGE AND GROUND AT THE HARNESS ELECTRICALLY HEATED PCV VALVE OR
TUBE NON-PCM CONTROLLED
PCV connector disconnected.
PCVTE-Harness Side connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCVTE- ( - ) PCVTEHarness Side, Harness Side,
Harness Side Harness Side
IGN
START/RUN - GND - Pin 2
Pin 1
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
For vehicles with a thermal extension harness, GO
to HG10.
For all others, GO to HG11.
No
GO to HG9.
HG9 CHECK THE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
PCV connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCV
Connector,
(-)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 397
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side
IGN
Ground
START/RUN
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
REPAIR the open GND circuit. TEST the system
for normal operation.
No
REPAIR the open PWR circuit TEST the system for
normal operation.
HG10 VALVE RESISTANCE CHECK WITHOUT AN EXTENSION HARNESS
NOTE:
On some applications the vehicle may be equipped with a thermal harness that
only provides electrical continuity when the temperature is less than 5°C (40°F)
+/- 4°C (+/- 7°F). Typically this harness is located close to the PCV valve or tube.
Disconnect the thermal extension harness from the PCV valve.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCV
Connector,
Component
Side
IGN
START/RUN
( - ) PCV
Connector,
Component
Side
PCVHC
Is the resistance between 10 - 35 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new thermal extension harness PCV.
TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new PCV.
HG11 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE ELECTRICALLY HEATED PCV VALVE OR TUBE
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCV
Connector,
Component
Side
IGN
START/RUN
( - ) PCV
Connector,
Component
Side
GND
Is the resistance between 10 - 35 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 398
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HG12.
No
INSTALL a new PCV valve or tube. REFER to the
ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
HG12 PCV SYSTEM CHECK
Start the engine and warm it until engine temperature is stable.
Disconnect the closure (fresh air) hose from the remote air cleaner or air outlet tube (the tube connecting
the mass air flow sensor and the throttle body).
Place a stiff piece of paper over the hose end. Wait 1 minute.
Does vacuum hold the paper in place?
Yes
The PCV system is OK.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
No
CHECK for vacuum leaks/obstruction in the PCV
system (such as oil cap, PCV valve, hoses, cut
grommets, valve cover bolt torque/gasket leak).
REFER to the vehicle emissions control information
(VECI) label for PCV system components and
routing. REPAIR as necessary.
HG13 CHECK IF A CONCERN OR DTC IS STILL PRESENT
Connect the PCV system.
Clear the DTCs.
Carry out the self-test.
Is the concern or DTC is still present?
Yes
GO to HG14.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
HG14 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 399
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST HH: EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM MODULE (ESM)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
ESM (9Y456)
orifice tube assembly (9D477)
differential pressure feedback exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) sensor pressure hoses
vacuum lines
harness circuits: DPFE, SIGRTN, EVR, VPWR and VREF
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 127: EGR System Module (ESM) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
1
4
6
5
2
Circuit
EVR (EGR Vacuum Regulator)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
DPFE (Differential Pressure Feedback EGR)
VREF (Reference Voltage)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 400
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Vehicle
E-Series,
F-Super Duty
Connector
170 Pin
F-150
190 Pin
Mustang
170 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
Pin
E63
E58
E57
E58
E21
E63
E58
B29, E57
B58, E58, T43
E21
E63
E58
B40, E57
B41, E58, T41
E21
E63
E58
E57
B41, E58, T41
E21
Circuit
EVR
SIGRTN
VREF
SIGRTN
DPFE
EVR
SIGRTN
VREF
SIGRTN
DPFE
EVR
SIGRTN
VREF
SIGRTN
DPFE
EVR
SIGRTN
VREF
SIGRTN
DPFE
HH1 CHECK FOR DTCS
Are DTCs P0401, P0402, P0403, P0405, P0406, P1408, or P1409 present?
Yes
For DTC P0401, GO to HH16.
For DTC P0402, GO to HH12.
For DTCs P0403 and P1409, GO to HH22.
For DTC P0405, GO to HH2.
For DTC P0406, GO to HH5.
For DTC P1408, GO to HH17.
No
For symptoms without DTCs, GO to HH28.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
HH2 DTC P0405: DETERMINE THE PRESENT DPFEGR PID VOLTAGE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.05 V?
Yes
GO to HH3.
No
GO to HH11.
HH3 INDUCE THE OPPOSITE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR SIGNAL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 401
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
ESM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Is the voltage between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor. REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION
GO to HH4.
CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HH4 CHECK THE DPFE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO SIGRTN OR GND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
DPFE
SIGRTN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
DPFE
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HH29.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HH5 DTC P0406: DETERMINE THE PRESENT DPFEGR PID VOLTAGE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:58 AM
Page 402
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HH6.
No
GO to HH11.
HH6 CHECK THE VREF VOLTAGE TO THE ESM
Key in OFF position.
ESM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ESM
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF - Pin 2
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage between 4 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to HH7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HH7 CHECK THE DPFE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ESM
Connector,
Harness Side
DPFE - Pin 5
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to HH8.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HH8 CHECK THE DPFE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 403
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
DPFE
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HH9.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HH9 CHECK THE DPFE AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
DPFE
DPFE - Pin 5
SIGRTN
SIGRTN - Pin 6
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HH10.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HH10 INDUCE THE OPPOSITE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR VOLTAGE
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A ESM Point B ESM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
DPFE - Pin 5
SIGRTN - Pin 6
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.1 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 404
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor. REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION
GO to HH29.
CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HH11 CARRY OUT A THOROUGH WIGGLE TEST ON THE ESM HARNESS
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the sensor to the PCM.
Is there any change in the voltage reading, or is a concern found?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
HH12 DTC P0402: CHECK THE VREF VOLTAGE TO THE ESM
NOTE:
Diagnose and repair all circuit concern DTCs before diagnosing
range/performance or flow concerns. For circuit concern DTC diagnosis, refer
to DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
Key in OFF position.
ESM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ESM
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF - Pin 2
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to HH13.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
HH13 SIMULATE THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR SIGNAL WITH A VACUUM
PUMP
Disconnect the downstream differential pressure feedback EGR sensor port hose at the ESM.
Verify the hose and port are clear and free of obstructions.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 405
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connect a vacuum pump to the downstream differential pressure feedback EGR sensor port.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Apply 27 - 30 kPa (8 - 9 in-Hg) vacuum to the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and hold for 10
seconds.
Quickly release the vacuum.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must be between 0.25 and 1.3 volts with the key ON and no vacuum
applied.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must increase to greater than 4 volts with the vacuum applied.
The DPFEGR PID must drop to less than 1.5 volts in less than 3 seconds when the vacuum is
released.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate a concern in the differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor?
Yes
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor. REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION
GO to HH14.
CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HH14 INSPECT THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID VENT FOR BLOCKAGE
NOTE:
When the EGR valve is closed, the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vacuum is
vented through the solenoid vent to the atmosphere. A plugged EGR vacuum
regulator solenoid vent does not allow EGR vacuum to vent to the atmosphere.
EGR vacuum regulator vacuum hoses disconnected.
Connect a hand vacuum pump to the EGR vacuum regulator source port.
Apply 34 to 51 kPa (10 to 15 in-Hg) vacuum.
Does the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vacuum bleed off?
Yes
GO to HH15.
No
INSTALL a new EGR vacuum regulator solenoid.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HH15 CHECK THE EGR VALVE FOR CARBON BUILD-UP
Remove the ESM.
Visually inspect the EGR valve and valve seat for correct seating, carbon build-up and debris.
Is a concern present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 406
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
HH16 DTC P0401: CARRY OUT THE KOER SELF-TEST
NOTE:
Diagnose and repair all circuit concern DTCs before diagnosing
range/performance or flow concerns.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Is DTC P1408 present?
Yes
GO to HH17.
No
GO to HH18.
HH17 DTC P1408: CHECK THE VREF VOLTAGE TO THE ESM
Key in OFF position.
ESM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ESM
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF - Pin 2
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
GO to HH18.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
HH18 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID VACUUM
ESM connector connected.
Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator vacuum source hose.
Connect a vacuum gauge to the EGR vacuum regulator vacuum source hose.
Key ON, engine running.
Monitor the vacuum gauge.
Is the manifold vacuum greater than 34 kPa (10 in-Hg)?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 407
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HH19.
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HH19 SIMULATE THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR SIGNAL WITH A VACUUM
PUMP
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the downstream differential pressure feedback EGR sensor port hose at the ESM.
Verify the hose and port are clear and free of obstructions.
Connect a vacuum pump to the downstream differential pressure feedback EGR sensor port.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Apply 27 - 30 kPa (8 - 9 in-Hg) vacuum to the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor and hold for 10
seconds.
Quickly release the vacuum.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must be between 0.25 and 1.3 volts with the key ON and no vacuum
applied.
The DPFEGR PID voltage must increase to greater than 4 volts with the vacuum applied.
The DPFEGR PID must drop to less than 1.5 volts in less than 3 seconds when the vacuum is
released.
Does the DPFEGR PID voltage indicate a concern in the differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR sensor. REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONNECT all the hoses.
CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
GO to HH20.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HH20 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID OPERATION
Key ON, engine running.
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Allow the engine idle to stabilize.
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
Access output state control.
Increase the EGR vacuum regulator duty cycle while monitoring the RPM PID.
Does the RPM decrease or the engine stall as the EGR vacuum regulator duty cycle is increased?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 408
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
GO to HH21.
HH21 CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF CARBON BUILD-UP IN THE EGR PASSAGE
NOTE:
In certain vehicle applications, carbon build-up may occur downstream of the
ESM. An inspection is required to make sure the passage in the upper intake
manifold plenum chamber behind the ESM is open to allow exhaust gas flow.
Key in OFF position.
Remove the ESM. REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL -- E-SERIES .
Disconnect the air inlet tube from the throttle body.
Prop open the throttle body.
Apply regulated shop air to the EGR port at the location where the ESM attaches to the upper intake
manifold.
Is a restriction concern present?
Yes
CLEAN the EGR port as necessary and INSTALL
the ESM.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new ESM.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HH22 DTCS P0403 AND P1409: CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID OPERATION
Key ON, engine running.
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Allow the engine idle to stabilize.
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
Access output state control.
Increase the EGR vacuum regulator duty cycle while monitoring the RPM PID.
Does the RPM decrease or the engine stall as the EGR vacuum regulator duty cycle is increased?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to HH23.
HH23 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID
Key in OFF position.
ESM connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 409
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) ESM
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 4
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HH24.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HH24 CHECK THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID COIL RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ESM
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR - Pin 4
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Component
Side
EVR - Pin 1
Is the resistance between 26 - 40 ohms?
Yes
GO to HH25.
No
INSTALL a new EGR Vacuum Regulator solenoid.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HH25 CHECK THE EVR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ESM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
EVR - Pin 1
EVR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 410
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HH26.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HH26 CHECK THE EVR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
EVR
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to HH27.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HH27 CHECK THE EVR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
EVR
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HH29.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HH28 EGR DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM: CHECK FOR EGR FLOW WITH THE EGR VACUUM REGULATOR
VACUUM HOSE DISCONNECTED AND PLUGGED
NOTE:
An increase in DPFEGR PID voltage at idle indicates EGR flow.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 411
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Carry out the KOER self-test. Repair any other DTCs.
Possible causes for EGR flow at idle with no related DTCs:
EGR valve not fully seating
EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vent restricted
Damaged EGR vacuum regulator solenoid
Disconnect and plug the EGR vacuum regulator vacuum source hose.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the DPFEGR PID.
Record the PID voltage.
Key ON, engine running.
With the engine at idle, observe the DPFEGR PID voltage. Compare to engine OFF voltage.
Is the idle DPFEGR PID voltage greater than 0.15 V when compared to the KOEO DPFEGR PID
voltage?
Yes
REMOVE and INSPECT the ESM for signs of
contamination, unusual wear, carbon deposits,
binding or other damage.
REPAIR as necessary.
If no concerns are present, INSTALL a new ESM.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSPECT the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid vent
for blockage.
To continue symptom diagnosis, REFER toNO
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
PRESENT SYMPTOM CHARTS .
HH29 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 412
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PINPOINT TEST HK: VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
VCT solenoid (6L713) or (6B297)
spider assembly right bank (6C260), or left bank (6C261)
harness circuits: VPWR and VCT
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 128: Variable Camshaft Timing Bank 1 (VCT1) Solenoid Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 129: Variable Camshaft Timing Bank 1 (VCT1) Solenoid Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 413
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 130: Variable Camshaft Timing Bank 1 (VCT1) Solenoid Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Edge,
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L,
MKX,
MKZ,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
C
Pin
Circuit
1
2
VPWR
VCT1
2
1
1
2
VPWR
VCT1
VPWR
VCT1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 414
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 131: Variable Camshaft Timing Bank 2 (VCT2) Solenoid Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 132: Variable Camshaft Timing Bank 2 (VCT2) Solenoid Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Edge,
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L,
MKX,
MKZ,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
Pin
Circuit
1
2
VPWR
VCT2
1
VPWR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 415
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
2
VCT2
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Expedition,
Navigator
Connector
140 Pin
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac,
F-Super Duty,
Mountaineer,
Mustang
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L,
MKZ
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
All other vehicles
170 Pin
140 Pin
140 Pin
190 Pin
Pin
B51, B52, B53
E68
E67
B35, B36
E68
E67
Circuit
VPWR
VCT2
VCT1
VPWR
VCT2
VCT1
B51, B52
E68
E67
B51, B52
E67
B51, B52, B53
E68
E67
VPWR
VCT2
VCT1
VPWR
VCT1
VPWR
VCT2
VCT1
HK1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0010, P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0020, P0021, P0022, P052A, P052B, P052C or
P052D present?
Yes
No
For DTCs P0010 or P0020, GO to HK2.
For DTCs P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022, P052A,
For symptoms without DTCs, GO to HK17.
P052B, P052C or P052D, GO to HK17.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
For DTCs P0016 and P0018 with or without P0011,
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
P0012, P0021, P0022, P052A, P052B, P052C or
P052D, GO to HK16.
HK2 DTCS P0010 OR P0020: CHECK FOR VCT DTCS
NOTE:
The engine should be at operating temperature before running the self-test.
Clear the DTCs.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Are DTCs P0010 or P0020 present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 416
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For KOER DTC P0010, GO to HK4.
For KOER DTC P0020, GO to HK10.
GO to HK3.
HK3 CARRY OUT A THOROUGH WIGGLE TEST ON THE VCT HARNESS
Carry out a thorough wiggle test on the VCT harness.
Carry out the KOER self-test.
Are DTCs P0010 or P0020 present?
Yes
For KOER DTC P0010, GO to HK4.
For KOER DTC P0020, GO to HK10.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
HK4 CHECK THE VCT1 SOLENOID RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
VCT1 Solenoid connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) VCT1
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
VCT1
( - ) VCT1
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR
Is the resistance between 5 - 14 ohms?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new VCT1 solenoid. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HK5.
HK5 CHECK THE VCT1 SOLENOID FOR INTERNAL SHORTS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) VCT1
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
VCT1
(-)
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 417
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HK6.
No
INSTALL a new VCT1 solenoid. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HK6 CHECK THE VPWR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) VCT1
Solenoid
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HK7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HK7 CHECK THE VCT1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) VCT1
Solenoid
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VCT1
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to HK8.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 418
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HK8 CHECK THE VCT1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) VCT1
( - ) PCM
Solenoid
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VCT1
VCT1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HK9.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HK9 CHECK THE VCT1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) VCT1
Solenoid
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VCT1
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HK18.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HK10 DTC P0020: CHECK THE VCT2 SOLENOID RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
VCT2 Solenoid connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) VCT2
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
( - ) VCT2
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 419
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
VCT2
VPWR
Is the resistance between 5 - 14 ohms?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new VCT2 solenoid. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HK11.
HK11 CHECK THE VCT2 SOLENOID FOR INTERNAL SHORTS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) VCT2
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
VCT2
(-)
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HK12.
No
INSTALL a new VCT2 solenoid. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HK12 CHECK THE VPWR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) VCT2
Solenoid
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HK13.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 420
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPEAT the self-test.
HK13 CHECK THE VCT2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) VCT2
Solenoid
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VCT2
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to HK14.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HK14 CHECK THE VCT2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) VCT2
( - ) PCM
Solenoid
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VCT2
VCT2
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HK15.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HK15 CHECK THE VCT2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) VCT2
Solenoid
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 421
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VCT2
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HK18.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HK16 CONTINUOUS DTCS P0016, P0018 WITH OR WITHOUT P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022, P052A, P052B, P052C,
P052D: CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE VCT SYSTEM
NOTE:
On 4.6L 3V and 5.4L 3V engines, the VCTADV PID indicates a positive value. For
all others, the VCTADV PID indicates a negative value.
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Clear the DTCs.
For DTC P0016.
Access the PCM and monitor the VCTADV PID.
For DTC P0018.
Access the PCM and monitor the VCTADV2 PID.
Run the engine at idle for 1 minute while monitoring the VCTADV (P0016) or VCTADV2 (P0018) PID.
Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs.
Are DTCs P0016 or P0018 present?
Yes
No
For a VCTADV PID value between -16 and -46
degrees (2.3L, 3.5L), -14 and -36 degrees (3.0L), or
24 and 73 degrees (4.6L 3V, 5.4L 3V), INSTALL a
new VCT solenoid. REFER to the ELECTRONIC
ENGINE CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
-- E-SERIES .
time.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
For all others, REFER to the ENGINE - 4.6L AND
5.4L -- E-SERIES , Timing Drive Components, to
verify the engine timing.
HK17 CONTINUOUS DTCS P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022, P052A, P052B, P052C OR P052D: CHECK THE
OPERATION OF THE VCT SYSTEM
NOTE:
Some vehicles require higher RPMs and loads to actuate the VCT system than
others. The VCTERR PID should be close to 0 whether actuating or not. During
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 422
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
rapid VCT movements, the VCTERR PID may momentarily deviate from 0.
For DTCs P0011, P0012, P052A or P052B.
Access the PCM and monitor the VCTADV PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the VCTADVERR PID.
For DTCs P0021, P0022, P052C or P052D.
Access the PCM and monitor the VCTADV2 PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the VCTADVERR2 PID.
Drive the vehicle exercising the throttle to induce VCT movement.
Does the VCTADV PID indicate VCT movement while the VCTERR PID maintain close to 0?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
No
INSTALL a new VCT solenoid.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HK18 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST HM: SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SYSTEM
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
secondary air injection system relay (14B192)
electric air injection pump (9A486)
secondary air injection bypass solenoid (9H465)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 423
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
harness circuits: B+, VPWR, AIR, AIRM, ground
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
secondary air injection diverter valve (9F491)
vacuum supply
hoses
partial restricted exhaust
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for schematic and connector information.
Fig. 133: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
86
87
30
85
Circuit
AIR (Secondary Air Injection)
AIR_PWR (AIR Pump Power)
B+ (Battery Positive Voltage)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
Fig. 134: Secondary Air Pump Connector
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 424
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
Circuit
2
1
AIR_PWR (AIR Pump Power)
AIR_GND (AIR Pump Ground)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Connector
Pin
B58
B66
B67
B33
B51
B50
B1
140 Pin
Circuit
SIGRTN
CASE GND
PWRGND
VREF
VPWR
AIRM
AIR
HM1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)
Are DTCs P0410, P0412, P0491, P2257, P2258, or P2448 present?
Yes
GO to HM2.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
HM2 VISUALLY INSPECT THE SECONDARY AIR SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND HOSES
Visually inspect the secondary AIR system components, connectors and hoses for:
damaged hoses
obstructions
exhaust damage
restricted secondary AIR pump inlet
water or ice
Are the secondary AIR system components and hoses OK?
Yes
GO to HM3.
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HM3 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE SECONDARY AIR RELAY
Secondary AIR relay removed.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 425
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Secondary
AIR Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 85 Ground
B+ - Pin 30
Ground
Are the voltages greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HM4.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HM4 CHECK THE SECONDARY AIR RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Carry out the relay component test. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams Cell 149 Component Testing.
Does the relay pass the component test?
Yes
GO to HM5.
No
INSTALL a new secondary AIR relay. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HM5 CHECK THE SECONDARY AIR PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Secondary AIR Pump Motor connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Secondary
Air Pump
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
AIR_GND - Pin
Ground
1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HM6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HM6 CHECK THE SECONDARY AIR PUMP CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 426
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Secondary
AIR Relay
Connector,
Harness Side
AIR_PWR - Pin
87
( - ) Secondary
Air Pump
Connector,
Harness Side
AIR_PWR - Pin
2
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HM7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HM7 CHECK THE SECONDARY AIR CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( - ) Secondary
AIR Relay
Connector,
Harness Side
AIR - Pin B1
AIR - Pin 86
AIR_PWR - Pin
AIRM - Pin B50
87
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HM8.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HM8 CHECK THE SECONDARY AIR MONITOR CIRCUIT AND THE SECONDARY AIR PUMP VOLTAGE
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
AIRM - Pin B50 Ground
AIR - Pin B1
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 427
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HM9.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HM9 CHECK THE SECONDARY AIR MONITOR CIRCUIT AND THE SECONDARY AIR PUMP VOLTAGE
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
AIRM - Pin B50 Ground
AIR - Pin B1
Ground
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the open circuit.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HM10.
HM10 MEASURE THE VACUUM AT THE SECONDARY AIR SOLENOID VALVE
CAUTION: Running the secondary AIR pump with OTM longer than 2 minutes may
overheat and damage the secondary AIR pump. Refer to{Output Test
Mode}.
Key in OFF position.
Secondary AIR relay installed.
Secondary AIR Solenoid connector connected.
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Connect a vacuum gauge to the control vacuum outlet at the secondary AIR valve.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Observe the vacuum gauge reading at the secondary AIR valve.
Command the outputs OFF.
Exit output test mode.
Is vacuum present at the secondary AIR diverter valve?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 428
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
INSTALL a new secondary AIR valve.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HM11.
HM11 CHECK THE SECONDARY AIR PUMP OPERATION
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Disconnect the inlet hose from the secondary AIR valve.
Command the outputs ON.
Place your hand over the secondary AIR valve inlet hose.
Command the outputs OFF.
Exit output test mode.
Is there any air flow from the secondary AIR inlet valve hose?
Yes
INSTALL a new secondary AIR valve.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new secondary AIR pump.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
PINPOINT TEST HU: INTAKE AIR SYSTEMS
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
accelerator cable linkage to throttle body (9C799)
air cleaner assembly (including air cleaner element) (9600)
air inlet tube (9F843)
clean air tube hose and resonator (9R504) and (9F593)
intake manifold runner control (IMRC) housing assembly (9U531), (9U524) and (9J447)
IMRC actuator assembly (9J559)
IMRC (9G730)
intake manifold tuning valve (IMTV) (9L490)
IMTV electric actuator assembly (9L490)
speed control cable (9A825)
throttle body assembly (9E926)
harness circuits: IMRC, MONITOR, SIGNAL, SIGRTN, PWRGND, and VPWR
harness circuits: IMTV, MONITOR, SIGNAL, and VPWR
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:20:59 AM
Page 429
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
IMRCM VOLTAGE VALUES
VEHICLE
Focus, 2.0L
F-150 5.4L, Mark LT
All Others
IMRC OFF
0
5
2.5
IMRC ON
5
0
0
Fig. 135: Intake Manifold Runner Control (IMRC) Actuator Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 136: Intake Manifold Runner Control (IMRC) Actuator Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 430
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 137: Intake Manifold Runner Control (IMRC) Actuator Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Expedition 5.4L,
F-150 5.4L,
F-Super Duty 5.4L,
Mark LT 5.4L,
Navigator 5.4L
Explorer 4.6L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.6L,
Mountaineer 4.6L,
Mustang 4.6L
F-150 4.2L
Connector
A
Pin
Circuit
4
3
2
1
IMRCM
IMRC
PWRGND
VPWR
A
3
2
1
IMRC
PWRGND
VPWR
B
4
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
IMRCM
IMRC
PWRGND
VPWR
IMRC
VPWR
IMRC
VPWR
Focus
C
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
C
For most vehicles the IMRCM is integrated into the IMRC connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 431
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 138: Intake Manifold Runner Control Monitor (IMRCM) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 139: Intake Manifold Runner Control Monitor (IMRCM) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 432
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 140: Intake Manifold Runner Control Monitor (IMRCM) Sensor Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Expedition 5.4L,
F-150 5.4L,
F-Super Duty 5.4L,
Mark LT 5.4L,
Navigator 5.4L
F-150 4.2L
Connector
A
B
Focus
C
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
C
Pin
Circuit
2
1
4
PWRGND
VPWR
IMRCM
2
3
4
2
3
1
1
PWRGND
VPWR
IMRCM
PWRGND
VPWR
IMRCM
IMRCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 433
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 141: Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV) Actuator Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 142: Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV) Actuator Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner 2.3L,
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
F-Super Duty 6.8L
Connector
A
B
Pin
Circuit
1
2
IMTV
VPWR
3
1
IMTV
VPWR
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Connector
Pin
Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 434
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Escape/Mariner
150 (50-50-50) Pin
Expedition,
Navigator
140 Pin
F-150,
Mark LT
190 Pin
F-Super Duty 5.4L
170 Pin
F-Super Duty 6.8L
170 Pin
Focus
190 Pin
Fusion,
Milan
140 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
E41
E6
B47
E58
B67
E43
E50
E58
B67
E43
E50
E58
B47
E43
E50
E58
E64
B47
E64
B69
E25
E22
E58
E64
B67
E43
E50
E58
B47
E50
SIGRTN
IMTV
PWRGND
SIGRTN
PWRGND
IMRCM
IMRC
SIGRTN
PWRGND
IMRCM
IMRC
SIGRTN
PWRGND
IMRCM
IMRC
SIGRTN
IMTV
PWRGND
SIGRTN
PWRGND
IMRCM
IMRC
SIGRTN
IMTV
PWRGND
IMRCM
IMRC
SIGRTN
PWRGND
IMRC
HU1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0505, P0506, P0660, P0663, P1512, P1513, P1516, P1517, P1518, P1519, P151A, P1520,
P1537, P1538, P1549, P2004, P2005, P2006, P2007, P2008, P2014, P2015, P2019, P2020, P2070, or
P2071 present?
Yes
For DTCs P0505 or P0506, on vehicles with
electronic throttle control (ETC),
GO to HU51.
For DTCs P0505 or P0506, on vehicles without
ETC,
GO to HU2.
For DTCs P0660, P0663, P1549, P2070 or P2071,
GO to HU42.
No
For vehicles equipped with electronic throttle
control (ETC) that have low idle concerns, difficulty
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 435
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For DTC P151A, Mustang 4.6L, Explorer 4.6L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.6L, and Mountaineer 4.6L.
GO to HU18.
For DTC P151A, all others,
GO to HU17.
For DTCs P1512, P1513, P1516, P1517, P1518,
P1519, P1520, P1537, P1538, P2004, P2005,
P2006, P2007, P2008, P2014, P2015, P2019 or
P2020, GO to HU15.
starting, hesitation, loss of RPM, GO to HU51.
For lack/loss of power, GO to HU42.
For all other symptoms without DTCs, GO to HU2.
HU2 PART THROTTLE SYMPTOM
Are any part throttle concerns present?
Yes
GO to HU7.
No
GO to HU3.
HU3 CHECK THE BASE IDLE SPEED
NOTE:
The vehicle must be at operating temperature and at idle for a minimum of 1
minute.
Key ON, engine running.
Determine if the idle speed is incorrect. Refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article Typical Reference
Value Charts, if necessary.
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
If equipped, read the vehicle tachometer.
Is vehicle idle speed correct?
Yes
GO to HU5.
No
GO to HU4.
HU4 CHECK THE THROTTLE ARM CONTACTS
Key in OFF position.
Check that the throttle arm contacts the return stop.
Is the idle speed high?
Yes
GO to HU9.
No
GO to HU10.
HU5 CHECK FOR BINDING OR STICKING IN THE THROTTLE SYSTEM
Gently cycle the throttle from fully closed to fully open and back to fully closed. Check for sticking or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 436
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
binding during rotation.
Is a stick and bind condition present?
Yes
GO to HU6.
No
GO to HU7.
HU6 ISOLATE THE BINDING AND/OR STICKING CONCERN
NOTE:
Do not attempt to clean the throttle bore and plate area. Cleaning damages the
throttle body assembly.
NOTE:
The sticking or binding condition can either be within the cables or throttle
body assembly.
Disconnect the accelerator cable and speed control cable from the throttle body linkage.
Rotate the throttle body linkage.
Does the throttle body rotate freely without a sticking, binding or grabbing condition?
Yes
REPAIR the cable(s) causing the concern.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new throttle body assembly. REFER to
the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HU7 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the TP PID.
Gently cycle the throttle from fully closed to fully open and back to fully closed.
Does the TP PID display a smooth voltage reading?
Yes
GO to HU8.
No
INSTALL a new TP sensor.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HU8 CHECK THE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM FOR LEAKS, OBSTRUCTIONS AND DAMAGE
NOTE:
The Focus air cleaner element is integral to the air cleaner assembly. Inspect
the air restriction gauge (if equipped) for a restriction indication.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 437
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
Remove the air cleaner element. Check the air cleaner for blockage.
Check for restrictions between the air inlet and the throttle body.
Are any restriction concerns present?
Yes
No
REMOVE the restriction. INSTALL a new air
cleaner element. Refer to the ENGINE IGNITION REINSTALL the air cleaner element.
- 4.6L (2V) AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES .
GO to HU9.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HU9 CHECK THE POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM
NOTE:
A high idle may indicate an incorrect PCV valve size or a vacuum leak.
Check that no cracks or leaks are present.
Remove the PCV valve.
Verify a clean PCV valve.
Verify the proper PCV valve part number.
Are any PCV system concerns present?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new PCV valve. REPAIR as necessary.
For high idle, GO to HU13.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL For all others, CONNECT the PCV valve.
- E-SERIES .
GO to HU10.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HU10 CHECK THE IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE RESPONSE
Key ON, engine running.
The vehicle must be at operating temperature and at idle for a minimum of 1 minute.
IAC connector disconnected.
Does the RPM drop or the engine stall?
Yes
GO to HU12.
No
GO to HU11.
HU11 CHECK THE IAC VALVE RESPONSE
Is the idle speed high?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 438
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
INSTALL a new IAC.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HU13.
HU12 INSPECT THE THROTTLE BODY PLATE HOLE FOR PLUGGING
NOTE:
Only some applications have a throttle plate hole. If not equipped go to the
SYMPTOM CHARTS article, Symptom Charts.
Key in OFF position.
Remove the resonator from the throttle body assembly.
Inspect the throttle plate hole for any restrictions.
Are any restriction concerns present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
The concern is elsewhere. RETURN toNO
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
PRESENT SYMPTOM CHART INDEX , to
diagnose performance while driving concerns.
HU13 CHECK FOR VACUUM LEAKS
Listen for vacuum leaks.
Inspect the entire intake air system from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor to the intake manifold for leaks
such as:
cracked or punctured inlet air tube
loose connections on the inlet air tube at the air cleaner housing or throttle body
IAC valve assembly or gasket
EGR valve gasket leak to intake manifold
intake manifold assembly or gasket
EGR valve diaphragm or control solenoid
vacuum supply connectors and hose
Are any leaks present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HU14.
HU14 CHECK THE THROTTLE BODY FOR EXCESSIVE WEAR
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 439
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Remove the throttle body assembly. Refer to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for removal and inspection.
Check the following:
excessive wear or grooving in the throttle bore
misaligned or worn throttle plate
excessive gap between the throttle bore and plate
Are any concerns present?
Yes
INSTALL a new throttle body assembly. REFER to
the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
The concern is elsewhere. RETURN toNO
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
PRESENT SYMPTOM CHART INDEX , to
diagnose performance while driving concerns.
HU15 DTCS P1512, P1513, P1516, P1517, P1518, P1519, P1520, P1537, P1538, P2004, P2005, P2006, P2007, P2008,
P2014, P2015, P2019 OR P2020: VISUAL INSPECTION
NOTE:
If unable to fully carry out the following inspections, answer NO to the question
in this step.
NOTE:
The IMRC return spring is strong on vacuum systems. Make sure the vacuum
system operates correctly and the plates open and close fully. On vacuum
operated systems the engine must run for 20 seconds to restore vacuum then
return to KOEO for testing.
Some IMRC electrical systems are driven in both directions by the solenoid and
do not use a return spring. They can not be opened manually.
Visually inspect the linkage for possible causes of binding or obstructions. Check the lever/linkage for
movement. There may be some tension in one direction but there should be full travel.
Manually open and close the IMRC plates at the intake manifold while checking for sticking or binding.
Is a mechanical concern present?
Yes
GO to HU16.
No
For Explorer 4.6L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.6L,
Mountaineer 4.6L, and
Mustang 4.6L, GO to HU18.
For all others, GO to HU17.
HU16 CHECK THE IMRC FOR MECHANICAL OPERATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 440
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
The IMRC return spring is strong - approximately 0.34 to 0.45 Nm (3 to 4 in-lb).
NOTE:
Some electric motor applications do not use a return spring and should move
freely when open and closed.
Disconnect the IMRC linkage or remove the actuator assembly from the manifold.
Rotate the IMRC plate lever to fully open and to fully closed, contacting both limits.
Check for sticking or binding during rotation.
Is a mechanical concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary or INSTALL a new IMRC.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
CONNECT the IMRC linkage.
For Explorer 4.6L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.6L,
Mountaineer 4.6L, and
Mustang 4.6L, GO to HU18.
For all others, GO to HU17.
HU17 DTC P151A: CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE IMRC
WARNING: Keep fingers clear of the mechanism. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be at operating temperature and at idle for a minimum of 1
minute.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and control the IMRC PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the IMRC1M PID.
Command IMRC ON then OFF.
IMRCM VOLTAGE VALUES
IMRC IMRC
VEHICLE
OFF
ON
Focus, 2.0L
0
5
F-150 5.4L,
5
0
Mark LT
All Others
2.5
0
Using the table for reference, do the IMRCM voltage values correctly change while the IMRC is
cycled?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 441
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to HU19.
HU18 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF BI-DIRECTIONAL IMRC
WARNING: Keep fingers clear of the mechanism. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be at operating temperature and at idle for a minimum of 1
minute.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and control the IMRC PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the IMRC_F PID.
Command IMRC ON then OFF.
Do the IMRC values correctly change from off to on while the IMRC is cycled and is the IMRCF
PID no?
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to HU19.
HU19 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE IMRC
WARNING: Keep fingers clear of the mechanism. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be at operating temperature and at idle for a minimum of 1
minute.
Key ON, engine running.
Physically monitor the IMRC actuator.
Access the PCM and control the IMRC PID.
Command the outputs ON.
Do the IMRC levers cycle from fully closed and remain fully open while the outputs are on?
Yes
GO to HU28.
No
GO to HU20.
HU20 CHECK THE VPWR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 442
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
IMRC Actuator connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) IMRC
Actuator
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HU21.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HU21 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) IMRC
( - ) IMRC
Actuator
Actuator
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
PWRGND
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HU22.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HU22 VERIFY THE DRIVER CIRCUIT FUNCTION
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) IMRC
( - ) IMRC
Actuator
Actuator
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
IMRC
Does the test lamp illuminate?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 443
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HU27.
No
GO to HU23.
HU23 VERIFY THE DRIVER CIRCUIT FUNCTION WHILE COMMANDING ON IMRC
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and control the IMRC PID.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) IMRC
( - ) IMRC
Actuator
Actuator
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
IMRC
Command the outputs ON.
Does the test lamp illuminate?
Yes
GO to HU26.
No
GO to HU24.
HU24 CHECK THE IMRC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMRC
( - ) PCM
Actuator
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
IMRC
IMRC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HU25.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HU25 CHECK THE IMRC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 444
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) IMRC
Actuator
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
IMRC
Ground
Is the voltage less than 10 V?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit to voltage. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HU53.
HU26 CHECK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN CIRCUITS IN THE IMRC HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector connected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMRC
( - ) IMRC
Actuator
Actuator
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
IMRC
IMRCM
IMRC
PWRGND
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new IMRC actuator.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HU27.
HU27 CHECK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN CIRCUITS IN THE IMRC HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMRC
( - ) IMRC
Actuator
Actuator
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
IMRC
IMRCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 445
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
IMRC
PWRGND
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HU41.
GO to HU53.
HU28 CHECK THE IMRCM PID
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the IMRC1M PID.
Is the IMRCM PID displaying either VREF or approximately 2.5 volts?
Yes
No
GO to HU29.
GO to HU33.
HU29 CHECK THE IMRCM CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR
NOTE:
The vehicle must be at operating temperature and at idle for a minimum of 1
minute.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and control the IMRC PID.
Command the outputs ON.
Access the PCM and monitor the IMRC1M PID.
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
No
GO to HU35.
GO to HU35.
HU30 CHECK THE IMRCM CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
IMRCM Sensor connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) IMRCM
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
(-)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 446
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
IMRCM
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HU31.
No
GO to HU32.
HU31 CHECK THE IMRCM CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE CONTROL MODULE
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) IMRCM
Sensor
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
IMRCM
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit to voltage. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HU53.
HU32 CHECK THE IMRCM CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMRCM ( - ) IMRCM
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
IMRCM
VPWR
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
CHECK for an intermittent concern.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new IMRCM sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES as
necessary.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 447
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HU41.
HU33 CHECK THE IMRCM CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the IMRC1M PID.
IMRCM Sensor connector disconnected.
Does voltage change from less than 1 volt to VREF when disconnecting the IMRCM harness
connector?
Yes
INSTALL a new IMRCM sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES as
necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selftest.
GO to HU41.
No
GO to HU34.
HU34 CHECK THE IMRCM CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMRCM ( - ) IMRCM
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
IMRCM
PWRGND
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HU41.
GO to HU53.
HU35 CHECK THE MONITOR CIRCUIT RESPONSE
IMRCM Sensor connector disconnected.
Access the PCM and monitor the IMRC1M PID.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 448
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
IMRCM
Sensor
Point B
Connector,
Harness Side
IMRCM
Ground
Does voltage change from less than 1 volt to VREF when disconnecting the IMRCM harness
connector?
Yes
GO to HU36.
No
GO to HU39.
HU36 CHECK THE PWRGND CIRCUIT FOR CONTINUITY TO CHASSIS GND
Key in OFF position.
Remove the jumper wire(s).
PCM connector connected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMRCM
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
PWRGND
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HU37.
No
GO to HU38.
HU37 CHECK THE MONITOR CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT OPEN
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMRCM
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
IMRCM
IMRCM
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the component to the
module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 449
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance fluctuating while checking the harness?
Yes
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HU41.
No
INSTALL a new IMRCM sensor. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES as
necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the selftest.
GO to HU41.
HU38 CHECK THE HARNESS PWRGND CIRCUIT FOR CONTINUITY
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMRCM
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
PWRGND
PWRGND
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CHECK the circuit for an intermittent concern.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HU41.
HU39 CHECK THE IMRCM CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Remove the jumper wire(s).
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMRCM
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
IMRCM
IMRCM
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 450
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to HU40.
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HU41.
HU40 CHECK THE MONITOR CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT OPEN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMRCM
( - ) PCM
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
IMRCM
IMRCM
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the component to the
module.
Is the resistance fluctuating while checking the harness?
Yes
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to HU41.
No
GO to HU53.
HU41 VERIFY THE REPAIR
Key ON, engine OFF.
Clear the PCM DTCs.
Access the PCM and monitor the IMRC and IMRC_F PIDs.
Access the PCM and monitor the IMRC1M PID.
Key ON, engine running.
Drive the vehicle, obeying all traffic and safety laws.
Safely carry out 3 acceleration runs from a stop or roll to between 3,000 and 4,000 RPM.
Watch for any PID change.
Carry out the PCM self-test.
Are any DTCs received?
Yes
No
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
The test completed successfully.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
HU42 DTCS P0660, P0663, P1549, P2070 OR P2071: VISUAL INSPECTION OF INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 451
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
VALVE
Inspect the component for signs of damage.
Check the harness and connection.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
GO to HU43.
the self-test.
No
HU43 CHECK THE VPWR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
IMTV Actuator connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) IMTV
Actuator
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10.5 V?
Yes
GO to HU44.
No
REPAIR the open circuit.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HU44 CHECK THE IMTV CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IMTV
( - ) PCM
Actuator
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
IMTV
IMTV
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 452
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HU45.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HU45 CHECK THE IMTV CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
IMTV
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HU46.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HU46 CHECK THE IMTV CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR IN THE HARNESS
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
IMTV
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to HU47.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HU47 CHECK THE IMTV DRIVER CIRCUIT WITH THE PCM CONNECTED
IMTV Actuator connector disconnected.
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) IMTV
Actuator
Connector,
( - ) IMTV
Actuator
Connector,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 453
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
IMTV
Does the test lamp illuminate?
Yes
GO to HU53.
No
GO to HU48.
HU48 CHECK THE IMTV PCM DRIVER CIRCUIT WHEN COMMANDED ON
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) IMTV
( - ) IMTV
Actuator
Actuator
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
IMTV
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Exit output test mode.
Does the test lamp illuminate?
Yes
GO to HU49.
No
GO to HU53.
HU49 CHECK THE IMTV FOR DAMAGE
Key in OFF position.
Remove the IMTV. Refer to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -E-SERIES .
Visually inspect the shutter for damage.
Manually rotate the shutter.
Is a concern present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IMTV actuator. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HU50.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 454
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HU50 CHECK THE IMTV FOR FUNCTIONALITY WHEN COMMANDED ON
IMTV Actuator connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Exit output test mode.
Does the IMTV shutter rotate?
Yes
The concern is an intermittent.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new IMTV actuator. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HU51 PRELIMINARY DIAGNOSIS FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) P0505 OR P0506
Key ON, engine OFF.
Are any DTCs present other than P0505 or P0506?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to HU52.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
HU52 MONITOR THE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM RELATED PIDS
NOTE:
Verify that the vehicle has reached the normal engine coolant operating
temperature of 77°C (170°F). Allow the engine to idle an additional 5 minutes.
NOTE:
The ETC_TRIM PID may not be available on all vehicles.
Access the PCM and monitor the ECT PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the ETC_TRIM PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the IACTRIM and IACKAM2 PIDs.
Mathematically add and record the value of the IACTRIM PID to the IACKAM2 PID value, for the total
IAC value at idle.
Is the ETC_TRIM PID angle equal to 3.5 degrees or is the total IAC value greater than 0.5 lb/min?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 455
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
INSTALL a new throttle body assembly. REFER to
the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
INFORMATION - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -Symptom Charts for further direction.
E-SERIES to INSTALL a new throttle body.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HU53 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST HV: COOLING FAN CLUTCH
WARNING: To avoid the possibility of personal injury or damage to the vehicle, do
not operate the engine until the fan blade has been first examined for
possible cracks and separation. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury or death.
NOTE:
Before starting this pinpoint test, turn the clutch fan assembly by hand and
check for mechanical binding around the fan shroud or surrounding
components. If binding is present, correct the problem then continue with the
pinpoint test. If no binding is present, start the engine and warm up to normal
operating temperature then continue with the pinpoint test.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
cooling fan clutch
harness circuits: fan speed sensor (FSS), FSS PWRGND, FSS VPWR, fan control variable (FCV), and
FCV VPWR
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:00 AM
Page 456
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 143: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
4
5
2
3
6
Circuit
FSS (Fan Speed Sensor)
PWRGND (Power Ground)
VBPWR (Vehicle Buffered Power)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
FCV (Fan Control Variable)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Expedition,
Navigator
F-150
All other vehicles
Pin
B51, B52, B53
B45
B67, B68, B69, B70
B20
B48
B51, B52, B53
E24
B67, B68, B69, B70
B20
B48
B35, B36
E24
B47, B48, B49, B50
E20
E7
Circuit
VPWR
FSS
PWRGND
VBPWR
FCV
VPWR
FSS
PWRGND
VBPWR
FCV
VPWR
FSS
PWRGND
VBPWR
FCV
HV1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 457
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are DTCs P0480, P0483 or P0528 present?
Yes
For KOEO and KOER DTC P0480, GO to HV4.
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0483 or P0528, GO
GO to HV2.
to HV2.
For continuous memory DTCs P0480 or P0528, GO
to HV10.
No
HV2 CHECK THE COOLING FAN CLUTCH FOR MECHANICAL BINDING
NOTE:
The cooling fan clutch uses a viscous coupling. The viscous drag should be
smooth during fan rotation. The amount of resistance is dependent upon the
final cooling fan operational state before engine shutdown.
Key in OFF position.
Manually rotate the cooling fan.
Does the cooling fan clutch rotation feel rough or binding?
Yes
INSTALL a new cooling fan clutch. REFER to the
ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES .
GO to HV3.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HV3 CHECK THE COOLING FAN CLUTCH OPERATION
Key ON, engine running.
Set the heater controls to OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FANSS PID.
Does the FANSS PID indicate any RPM?
Yes
GO to HV4.
No
GO to HV11.
HV4 KOEO AND KOER DTC P0480: CHECK THE COOLING FAN CLUTCH ACTUATOR VALVE SOLENOID
RESISTANCE
NOTE:
If necessary, install terminal adapters on the component side pins to carry out
the resistance measurement.
Key in OFF position.
Cooling Fan Clutch connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 458
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) Cooling
( - ) Cooling
Fan Clutch
Fan Clutch
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
FCV - Pin 6
VPWR - Pin 3
Is the resistance between 6 - 12 ohms?
Yes
GO to HV5.
No
INSTALL a new cooling fan clutch. REFER to the
ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HV5 CHECK THE COOLING FAN CLUTCH ACTUATOR VALVE SOLENOID RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Cooling
Fan Clutch
Connector,
(-)
Component
Side
FCV - Pin 6
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HV6.
No
INSTALL a new cooling fan clutch. REFER to the
ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HV6 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE COOLING FAN CLUTCH ACTUATOR VALVE SOLENOID
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Cooling
Fan Clutch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 3 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 459
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HV7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HV7 CHECK THE FCV CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Cooling
( - ) PCM
Fan Clutch
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
FCV - Pin 6
FCV
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HV8.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HV8 CHECK THE FCV CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Cooling
Fan Clutch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FCV - Pin 6
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HV9.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HV9 CHECK THE FCV CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Cooling
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 460
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fan Clutch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FCV - Pin 6
Ground
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HV19.
HV10 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0480 OR P0528: INTERMITTENT CHECK
NOTE:
Keep the coil arm of the cooling fan clutch secure while checking the wiring
harness. If the coil arm rotates, faulty readings may occur.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FANSS PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the FANVAR_F PID.
While observing the PID wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working
from the cooling fan clutch to the PCM.
Check the cooling fan clutch and the PCM connectors for damage and corrosion.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
No
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
HV11 KOEO AND KOER DTC P0528: CHECK THE VOLTAGE AND GROUND TO THE FSS SENSOR
Cooling Fan Clutch connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Cooling
Fan Clutch
Connector,
Harness Side
( - ) Cooling
Fan Clutch
Connector,
Harness Side
PWRGND - Pin
VBPWR - Pin 2
5
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 461
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
No
GO to HV15.
GO to HV12.
HV12 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE FSS SENSOR
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Cooling
Fan Clutch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VBPWR - Pin 2 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HV14.
No
GO to HV13.
HV13 CHECK THE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT TO THE FSS SENSOR FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Cooling
( - ) PCM
Fan Clutch
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VBPWR - Pin 2 VBPWR
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HV19.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HV14 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT TO THE FSS SENSOR FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 462
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) Cooling
( - ) PCM
Fan Clutch
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
PWRGND - Pin
PWRGND
5
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HV19.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HV15 CHECK THE FSS CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Cooling
( - ) PCM
Fan Clutch
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
FSS - Pin 4
FSS
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HV16.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HV16 CHECK THE FSS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Cooling
Fan Clutch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FSS - Pin 4
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 463
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to HV17.
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HV17 CHECK THE FSS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Cooling
Fan Clutch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FSS - Pin 4
Ground
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HV18.
HV18 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE FSS CIRCUIT
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Cooling
Fan Clutch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FSS - Pin 4
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new cooling fan clutch. REFER to the
GO to HV19.
ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HV19 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 464
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST HX: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM AND MONITOR
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Before repairing or installing a new component in the fuel system, reduce
the possibility of injury or fire by following the warning, caution, and
handling directions in pinpoint test HC. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
Use this pinpoint test only when directed here.
The use of a soap solution around the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler
pipe (if equipped) or the use of the hydrocarbon emission analyzer to determine
an evaporative emission system leak is not recommended. The mandatory
Rotunda Evaporative Emission System Leak Tester for On Board Diagnostic
(OBD) (including the ultrasonic tester) and the Rotunda Vacutec 522 Leak
Detector Smoke Machine are the only devices to be used at this time for
evaporative emission system leak detection.
When using the smoke machine, the fuel level in the fuel tank must be less than
85% full.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
canister vent (CV) solenoid (9F945)
fuel filler cap (9030)
capless fuel tank filler pipe (9034)
fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (9C052)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 465
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
EVAP canister purge (EVAPCP) valve (9C915). Also known as the vapor management valve (VMV).
EVAP system leaks using the Rotunda Vacutec Leak Detector Smoke Machine.
harness circuits: B+, CV, EVAPCP, FTP, FTPREF, SIGRTN, VPWR, VREF and CASE GND
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
For additional information on the EVAP system, refer toEVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEMS ,
or the EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES .
For applications that use the engine off natural vacuum (EONV) EVAP leak check monitor, KAPWR provides
voltage to the CV solenoid instead of VPWR.
Fig. 144: Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 145: Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid Connector - B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 466
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner,
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac,
Mountaineer
Mustang
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
A
Pin
Circuit
2
1
KAPWR
CANV
2
1
1
2
CANV
VPWR
KAPWR
CANV
Fig. 146: EVAP Canister Purge (EVAPCP) Valve Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
1
Circuit
EVAPCP (EVAP Canister Purge)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
For applications that use the engine off natural vacuum (EONV) EVAP leak check monitor, FTPREF provides
voltage to the FTP sensor instead of VREF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 467
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 147: Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 148: Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
E-Series tank design,
F-Super Duty tank design
Connector
A
Mustang
B
All other vehicles
B
Pin
3
1
2
3
2
1
3
1
2
Circuit
FTP
FTPREF
SIGRTN
FTP
SIGRTN
VREF
FTP
FTPREF
SIGRTN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 468
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
E-Series,
F-Super Duty
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
Connector
170 Pin
190 Pin
150 (50-50-50) Pin
Expedition,
Navigator
140 Pin
F-150,
Mark LT
190 Pin
Focus
190 Pin
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
140 Pin
Mustang
170 Pin
Pin
B13
B3
B40
B41
B40
E1
B61
B44
B29
B58
B29, B64
B50
B13
B9
B40
B41
B40
B34
B61
B44
B29
B58
E57
B50
B61
B44
B65
B58
B29
B50
B20
B65
B66
B58
B52, B66
B55
B61
B44
B29
B58
B33
B4
B13
Circuit
CANV
FTP
FTPREF
SIGRTN
VREF
EVAPCP
CANV
FTP
FTPREF
SIGRTN
VREF
EVAPCP
CANV
FTP
FTPREF
SIGRTN
VREF
EVAPCP
CANV
FTP
FTPREF
SIGRTN
VREF
EVAPCP
CANV
FTP
FTPREF
SIGRTN
VREF
EVAPCP
CANV
FTP
FTPREF
SIGRTN
VREF
EVAPCP
CANV
FTP
FTPREF
SIGRTN
VREF
EVAPCP
CANV
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 469
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
All other vehicles
170 Pin
B3
B41
B40
E6
B13
B3
B40
B41
B40
E6
FTP
SIGRTN
VREF
EVAPCP
CANV
FTP
FTPREF
SIGRTN
VREF
EVAPCP
HX1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0442, P0443, P0446, P0451, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0456, P0457, P0460, P0461, P0462,
P0463, P144A, P1450, P1451, or P260F present?
Yes
For DTCs P0442 or P0456, GO to HX46.
For DTC P0443, GO to HX2.
For DTCs P0446 or P1451, GO to HX30.
For DTC P0451, GO to HX39.
For DTC P0452, GO to HX18.
For DTC P0453, GO to HX23.
For DTCs P0455 or P0457, GO to HX40.
For DTC P0460, GO to HX38.
For DTCs P0461 through P0463, GO to HX36.
For DTC P144A, GO to HX49.
For DTC P1450, GO to HX8.
For DTC P260F, GO to HX50.
No
For symptoms without DTCs, GO to HX13.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
HX2 DTC P0443: CHECK THE PCM OUTPUT TO EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
Key in OFF position.
EVAPCP Valve connector disconnected.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) EVAPCP
Valve
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1
( - ) EVAPCP
Valve
Connector,
Harness Side
EVAPCP - Pin
2
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 470
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Command the outputs ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Exit output test mode.
Does the test lamp turn on and off when the output(s) is commanded on and off?
Yes
GO to HX3.
No
GO to HX4.
HX3 CHECK THE EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE SOLENOID RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
EVAPCP Valve connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) EVAPCP ( - ) EVAPCP
Valve
Valve
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
EVAPCP - Pin
VPWR - Pin 1
2
Is the resistance between 2.5 - 7 ohms?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new EVAPCP valve. REFER to the
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HX4 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) EVAPCP
Valve
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 471
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HX5.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX5 CHECK THE EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
EVAPCP
( - ) EVAPCP
Valve
Connector,
Harness Side
EVAPCP - Pin
2
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HX6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX6 CHECK THE EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO PWRGND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
EVAPCP
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HX7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX7 CHECK THE EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE
HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 472
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) EVAPCP
Valve
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
EVAPCP - Pin
Ground
2
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to HX54.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX8 DTC P1450: CHECK FOR VISUAL CAUSES OF EXCESSIVE FUEL TANK VACUUM
NOTE:
If the CV solenoid and the fuel tank assemblies are not accessible during this
step, refer to the EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES and FUEL TANK AND
LINES - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES for removal instructions.
Check for kinks or bends in the fuel vapor hoses/tubes (EVAPCP outlet tube and EVAP canister tube).
Visually inspect the EVAP canister inlet port, CV solenoid filter, and canister vent hose assembly for
contamination or debris.
Check the CV solenoid filter for blockage or contamination.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REMOVE any contamination or debris around the
fuel vapor hose/tubes and CV solenoid assembly.
REMOVE kinks or bends in the EVAPCP outlet
tube, EVAP canister tube, and canister vent hose
assembly.
CLEAR the DTCs.
For repair verification, CARRY OUT the
evaporative emission leak check monitor repair
verification drive cycle. REFER toON BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE CYCLE .
No
GO to HX9.
HX9 CHECK THE FTP SENSOR VOLTAGE WITH THE FUEL FILLER CAP REMOVED OR THE CAPLESS
FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE OPENED
NOTE:
For vehicles with a capless fuel filler pipe, instead of removing the fuel filler
cap, install the supplemental refueling adaptor provided with the vehicle to
open the capless fuel tank filler pipe.
Remove the fuel filler cap.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 473
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FTP PID.
Is the voltage between 2.4 - 2.8 V?
Yes
No
GO to HX13.
GO to HX10.
HX10 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTCS
Check for other 3-wire sensor DTCs (KOEO, KOER, or continuous memory) present with the DTC
P1450.
Are any other DTCs present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to HX11.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
HX11 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE FTP SENSOR
Key in OFF position.
FTP Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FTP
( - ) FTP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
FTPREF
SIGRTN
Are the voltages between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new FTP sensor. REFER to the
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES . For
some vehicles, the FTP sensor is integral to the fuel
GO to HX12.
vapor tube assembly.
CLEAR the DTCs.
For repair verification, CARRY OUT the
evaporative emission leak check monitor repair
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 474
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
verification drive cycle. REFER toON BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE CYCLE .
HX12 CHECK THE FTPREF OR VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
FTPREF
( - ) FTP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
FTPREF
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HX54.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX13 CHECK IF THE ENGINE IDLES
Key ON, engine running.
Does the engine stall or is it unable to maintain idle?
Yes
GO to HX14.
No
GO to HX15.
HX14 CHECK THE EVAP SYSTEM FOR A STUCK OPEN VALVE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the fuel vapor to intake manifold line at the EVAPCP valve and cap the line at the EVAPCP
valve.
Key ON, engine running.
Does the engine stall or is it unable to maintain idle?
Yes
No
The EVAP system is not the cause of the symptom. INSTALL a new EVAPCP valve. REFER to the
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES .
Symptom Charts for further direction.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 475
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
HX15 CHECK FOR BLOCKAGE IN THE FUEL TANK VENT SYSTEM
NOTE:
The CV is normally open and venting to the atmosphere.
Access the PCM and monitor the EVMV PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the FTP PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the EVAPCV PID.
While monitoring the FTP PID, ramp open the EVAPCP valve by incrementally commanding the EVMV
PID to a 1,000 mA.
Does the FTP sensor voltage drop below 2 volts when the EVAPCP valve is commanded fully open?
Yes
CHECK for blockage in the vapor line to the CV
solenoid.
CHECK the CV solenoid filter for blockage or
contamination.
GO to HX16.
CHECK the carbon canister for blockage.
If OK, INSTALL a new CV solenoid. REFER to the
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HX16 CHECK THE EVAP SYSTEM FOR A STUCK OPEN VALVE
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and control the EVMV PID.
Close the EVAPCP by commanding the EVMV PID to 0 mA.
Access the PCM and control the EVAPCV PID.
Close the CV solenoid by commanding the EVAPCV PID to ON (100% duty cycle).
Does the FTPV PID decrease, the engine RPM change, or the engine stall, as an indication that the
EVAPCP valve is stuck open?
Yes
INSTALL a new EVAPCP valve. REFER to the
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HX17.
HX17 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE TEST
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and control the EVAPCV PID.
Close the CV solenoid by commanding the EVAPCV PID to ON (100% duty cycle).
Access the PCM and control the EVMV PID.
While monitoring the FTP PID, ramp open the EVAPCP valve by incrementally commanding the EVMV
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 476
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PID to a 1,000 mA.
Does the FTP PID decrease, the engine RPM change, or the engine stall as an indication that the
EVAPCP valve is opening?
Yes
No
CHECK for blockages between the fuel tank, the
EVAPCP valve, and the engine intake manifold.
For DTC P1450, unable to duplicate or identify the
CHECK for obstructions in the EVAPCP valve
concern at this time.
diaphragm and ports.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
If OK, INSTALL a new EVAPCP valve. REFER to
For all others, CHECK the EVAP system for leaks.
the EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HX18 DTC P0452: CHECK FOR FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR CONTAMINATION
Key in OFF position.
Visually check for liquid fuel contamination of the FTP sensor electrical connector.
Check for a completely submerged FTP sensor (tank-mounted type only) in the liquid fuel. This can
affect the correct FTP voltage reading.
Does the FTP sensor and its connector show any signs of fuel contamination?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
ADJUST the fuel tank overfill.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HX19.
HX19 CHECK FOR LOW FTP SENSOR VOLTAGE
NOTE:
The FTP sensor voltage with no pressure/vacuum on the fuel tank is between
2.4 and 2.8 volts.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FTP PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.22 V?
Yes
GO to HX20.
No
The concern that produced the DTC P0452 is
intermittent.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
HX20 CHECK THE OPPOSITE INDUCED HIGH FTP SENSOR SIGNAL
Key in OFF position.
FTP Sensor connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 477
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A FTP
Point B FTP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
FTP
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FTP PID.
Is the voltage between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new FTP sensor. REFER to the
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES . For
some vehicles, the FTP sensor is integral to the fuel GO to HX21.
vapor tube assembly.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HX21 CHECK THE VREF VOLTAGE TO THE FTP SENSOR
Remove the jumper wire(s).
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FTP
( - ) FTP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
GO to HX22.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
HX22 CHECK THE FTP CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO SIGRTN OR GND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 478
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FTP
SIGRTN
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
Negative
terminal
FTP
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HX54.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX23 DTC P0453: CHECK FOR HIGH FTP SENSOR VOLTAGE
NOTE:
The FTP sensor voltage with no pressure/vacuum on the fuel tank is between
2.4 and 2.8 volts.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FTP PID.
Is the voltage greater than 4.5 V?
Yes
GO to HX24.
No
The concern that produced the DTC P0453 is
intermittent.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
HX24 CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE VREF AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS AT THE FTP SENSOR
VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
Key in OFF position.
FTP Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FTP
Sensor
Connector,
( - ) FTP
Sensor
Connector,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 479
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
SIGRTN
Is the voltage between 4 - 6 V?
Yes
GO to HX25.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST C.
HX25 CHECK THE FTP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FTP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
FTP
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HX27.
No
GO to HX26.
HX26 CHECK THE FTP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VPWR IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
FTP
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HX54.
HX27 CHECK THE FTP CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 480
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
FTP
( - ) FTP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
FTP
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HX28.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX28 CHECK THE FTP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VREF
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VREF
FTP
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HX29.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX29 CHECK THE OPPOSITE INDUCED LOW FTP SIGNAL
PCM connector connected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A FTP
Point B FTP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FTP
SIGRTN
Key ON, engine OFF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:01 AM
Page 481
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Access the PCM and monitor the FTP PID.
Is the voltage less than 0.1 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new FTP sensor. REFER to the
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES . For
some vehicles, the FTP sensor is integral to the fuel GO to HX54.
vapor tube assembly.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
HX30 DTCS P0446 OR P1451: CHECK THE PCM OUTPUT TO THE CV SOLENOID
NOTE:
For applications that use the engine off natural vacuum (EONV) EVAP leak
check monitor, KAPWR provides voltage to the CV solenoid instead of VPWR.
Key in OFF position.
CV Solenoid connector disconnected.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) CV
( - ) CV
Solenoid
Solenoid
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
CANV
KAPWR
CANV
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Exit output test mode.
Does the test lamp turn on and off when the output(s) is commanded on and off?
Yes
GO to HX31.
No
GO to HX32.
HX31 CHECK THE CV SOLENOID RESISTANCE
NOTE:
For applications that use the engine off natural vacuum (EONV) EVAP leak
check monitor, KAPWR provides voltage to the CV solenoid instead of VPWR.
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 482
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CV
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
KAPWR
VPWR
( - ) CV
Solenoid
Connector,
Component
Side
CANV
CANV
Are the resistances between 48 - 65 ohms?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new CV solenoid. REFER to the
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HX32 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE CV SOLENOID
NOTE:
For applications that use the engine off natural vacuum (EONV) EVAP leak
check monitor, KAPWR provides voltage to the CV solenoid instead of VPWR.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CV
Solenoid
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
KAPWR
Ground
VPWR
Ground
Are the voltages greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to HX33.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX33 CHECK THE CANV CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 483
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
CANV
( - ) CV
Solenoid
Connector,
Harness Side
CANV
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to HX34.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX34 CHECK THE CANV CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO PWRGND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CV
Solenoid
Connector,
Harness Side
CANV
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to HX35.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
HX35 CHECK THE CANV CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CV
Solenoid
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
CANV
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to HX54.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 484
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPEAT the self-test.
HX36 DTCS P0461, P0462 AND P0463: CHECK THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC) MODULE FOR DTCS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the IC self-test.
Are any DTCs present?
Yes
REFER to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC)
AND WARNING CHIMES -- E-SERIES to
continue diagnosis.
No
GO to HX37.
HX37 CHECK THE FLI PID
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the FLI PID.
Does the FLI PID match the fuel gauge?
Yes
GO to HX38.
No
GO to HX54.
HX38 DTC P0460: CHECK FOR FUEL TANK FLOAT LEVEL RESPONSE
NOTE:
A dual-container (saddle type) fuel tank has 2 fuel level sensors. The FLI PID in
the PCM is the average value of both fuel level sensors. Some dual-container
tanks may require the fuel level to be greater 3/4 full before the fuel level
equalizes.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the FLI PID.
Key in OFF position.
If the fuel level is less than 1/4 (25% on FLI), add approximately 1/4 tank of fuel.
If the fuel level is greater than 3/4 (75% on FLI), drain approximately 1/4 tank of fuel.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the FLI PID.
Does the FLI PID indicate a movement upward or downward as fuel is either added or drained?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
REFER to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC)
AND WARNING CHIMES -- E-SERIES to
diagnose the incorrect fuel gauge indication
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 485
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
symptom.
HX39 DTC P0451: CHECK THE FTP SENSOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
NOTE:
For vehicles with a capless fuel filler pipe, instead of removing the fuel filler
cap, install the supplemental refueling adaptor provided with the vehicle to
open the capless fuel tank filler pipe.
Key in OFF position.
Remove the fuel filler cap.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FTP PID.
Is the pressure between -0.42 and 0.42 kPa (-1.7 and 1.7 in-H2O)?
Yes
CHECK for kinks or bends in the fuel vapor
hoses/tubes between the fuel tank and dust
separator. CHECK the EVAP canister ports and
canister vent hose assembly for contamination or
debris. CHECK the dust separator for blockage.
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new FTP sensor. REFER to the
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES . For
some vehicles, the FTP sensor is integral to the fuel
vapor tube assembly.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HX40 DTCS P0455 OR P0457: CHECK THE FUEL FILLER CAP OF CAPLESS FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE
NOTE:
If the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe is suspected as an EVAP leak
source during visual inspection, do not disturb the fuel filler cap or capless fuel
tank filler pipe until the repair verification method is complete. If the repair
verification method fails, reposition or install a new fuel filler cap and repeat the
test. For vehicles with a capless fuel tank filler pipe, install and remove the
supplemental refueling adaptor provided with the vehicle to reseal the capless
fuel tank filler pipe and repeat the test. This action isolates the fuel filler cap or
capless fuel tank filler pipe from the rest of the EVAP system as a potential
concern.
For vehicles with a fuel filler cap, visually inspect the fuel filler cap without initially disturbing it.
Verify the fuel filler cap tether is visible and free to move.
Check for missing or loose fuel filler cap.
Check the fuel filler cap for damage.
For vehicles with a capless fuel tank filler pipe, visually inspect the capless fuel tank filler pipe inlet
without initially disturbing it.
Check the capless fuel tank filler pipe inlet for an obstruction that prevents it from sealing.
Check the capless fuel tank filler pipe for damage.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 486
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is a concern present?
Yes
For repair verification, CARRY OUT the Smoke
Machine PHASE 1 - Leak Verification Pressure
Test. REPAIR as necessary.
GO to HX46.
No
GO to HX41.
HX41 CHECK FOR FLI DTCS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P0460, P0461, P0462 or P0463 present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to HX42.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
HX42 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE FUEL GAUGE
NOTE:
A fuel gauge that always indicates a fuel level less than a 1/2 tank or always a
full tank, may be caused by a fuel level input (FLI) concern.
Check operation of the fuel gauge.
Is the fuel gauge functioning properly?
Yes
GO to HX43.
No
CHECK the functionality of the FLI circuit.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
HX43 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM VISUAL INSPECTION
Key in OFF position.
Visually inspect for:
EVAP system lines/hoses (check for proper connections, damage or blockage)
loose fuel vapor hose/tube connections to the EVAP system components
blocked vacuum hose between the EVAPCP valve and the engine intake manifold
damaged fuel tank or fuel filler pipe
Are there any concerns found during the visual inspection?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 487
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
For repair verification, CARRY OUT the Smoke
Machine PHASE 1 - Leak Verification Pressure
Test.
GO to HX46.
No
GO to HX44.
HX44 CHECK THE FTP SENSOR VOLTAGE WITH THE FUEL FILLER CAP REMOVED OR THE CAPLESS
FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE OPENED
NOTE:
For vehicles with a capless fuel filler pipe, instead of removing the fuel filler
cap, install the supplemental refueling adaptor provided with the vehicle to
open the capless fuel tank filler pipe.
Remove the fuel filler cap.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FTP PID.
Is the voltage between 2.4 - 2.8 V?
Yes
GO to HX45.
No
INSTALL a new FTP sensor. REFER to the
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES . For
some vehicles, the FTP sensor is integral to the fuel
vapor tube assembly. REPEAT the test and
VERIFY the results.
For repair verification, CARRY OUT the Smoke
Machine PHASE 1 - Leak Verification Pressure
Test.
GO to HX46.
HX45 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE TEST
Key in OFF position.
Install the fuel filler cap or remove the supplemental refueling adaptor.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the EVAPCV PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the EVMV PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the FTP PID.
Close the CV solenoid by commanding the EVAPCV PID to ON (100% duty cycle).
While monitoring the FTP PID, ramp open the EVAPCP valve by incrementally commanding the EVMV
PID to a 1,000 mA.
Does the FTP PID decrease, the engine RPM change, or the engine stall as an indication that the
EVAPCP valve is opening?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 488
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to HX46.
No
INSTALL a new EVAPCP valve. REFER to the
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES .
REPEAT the test and VERIFY the results.
For repair verification, CARRY OUT the Smoke
Machine PHASE 1 - Leak Verification Pressure
Test.
GO to HX46.
HX46 DTCS P0442 OR P0456: HOOK UP THE SMOKE MACHINE (ROTUNDA VACUTEC)
NOTE:
Removing the Schrader valve from the test port permanently damages the
valve.
NOTE:
The smoke and air flow from the smoke machine will not pass through liquid
fuel. Liquid fuel may be present in the fuel tank filler pipe.
NOTE:
Some vehicles are not equipped with an evaporative emission test port. Use a
suitable hose adapter in the following diagnostic procedures.
Key in OFF position.
Connect the smoke machine power cables to the vehicle battery. Check to see that the smoke machine
power indicator lamp is on, indicating a good battery contact.
For vehicles not equipped with an evaporative emission test port:
Disconnect the fuel vapor to intake manifold line at the EVAPCP valve and cap the line.
Connect a suitable hose adapter to the fuel vapor to intake manifold connection at the EVAPCP
valve.
For vehicles equipped with an evaporative emission test port:
Locate the evaporative emission test port and remove the green cap. The cap is located on or close
to the EVAPCP valve.
Install the EVAP test port adapter (provided with the Vacutec Smoke Machine) to the test port.
Is the smoke machine hook up complete?
Yes
For leak detection, GO to HX47.
For leak repair verification, GO to HX48.
No
REFER to the smoke machine operator article for
additional instructions and for helpful tips.
HX47 CARRY OUT SMOKE MACHINE PHASE 2 - LEAK DETECTION SMOKE TEST
NOTE:
If the leak is not detected from the top, check the EVAP system for leaks from
under the vehicle.
Check the EVAP hoses, EVAPCP valve, CV solenoid, EVAP canister, fuel
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 489
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
tank, fuel filler pipe, around the fuel tank area, and at the fuel filler cap or
capless fuel tank filler pipe inlet.
Wiggle the components and connections to simulate road bumps while
looking for signs of leaking smoke.
If the leak is in the fuel tank filler pipe between the check valve and the fuel filler
cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe inlet, smoke under pressure may not reach
the leak. If leaking smoke is not found, a thorough visual inspection of the fuel
tank filler pipe and fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe inlet should be
done.
Set the smoke machine to SMOKE.
Remove the fuel filler cap or install the supplemental refueling adaptor.
Connect the smoke supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP service port or suitable hose adapter.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and control the EVAPCV PID.
Close the CV solenoid by commanding the EVAPCV PID to ON (100% duty cycle).
For vehicles not equipped with an evaporative emission test port:
Start the smoke machine and verify the connection at the EVAPCP valve is correct and not leaking
Open the EVAPCP valve by commanding the EVMV PID to 1,000 mA
Start the smoke machine. If smoke does not exit the fuel tank filler pipe after the system is pressurized,
command the EVAPCV PID open to allow air to purge the CV solenoid. Once smoke is seen at the CV
solenoid, command the EVAPCV PID close.
Install the fuel filler cap or remove the supplemental refueling adaptor once smoke is observed
exiting the fuel tank neck area.
Continue to smoke the system for 60 seconds to obtain pressure.
Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off while checking for exiting smoke.
Use the halogen spotlight provided with the smoke machine to follow the EVAP system path and
look for smoke exiting at the source of the leak(s).
Is the source of the EVAP leak located?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CONNECT all the disconnected components.
For repair verification, CARRY OUT the Smoke
Machine PHASE 1 - Leak Verification Pressure
Test.
GO to HX48.
No
The test passed.
CONNECT all the disconnected components.
CARRY OUT the Smoke Machine PHASE 1 - Leak
Verification Pressure Test.
GO to HX48.
HX48 CARRY OUT THE SMOKE MACHINE PHASE 1 - LEAK VERIFICATION PRESSURE TEST
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 490
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Position the control lever located on the smoke machine to METER.
Calibrate the smoke machine flow meter using the 0.020 (DTC P0456) or 0.040 (DTC P0442) standard as
follows:
Insert the air supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into the appropriate EVAP system standard
located on the front of the smoke machine.
Press the remote starter button on the smoke machine. Observe the position of the flow meter
indicator ball.
Position the flow meter red pointer flag so that it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP system standard.
Connect the air supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into the EVAP test port or suitable hose adapter.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and control the EVAPCV PID.
Close the CV solenoid by commanding the EVAPCV PID to ON (100% duty cycle).
For vehicles not equipped with an evaporative emission test port, open the EVAPCP valve by
commanding the EVMV PID to 1,000 mA.
Press the remote starter button on the smoke machine. Notice that the ball in the flow meter is all the way
at the top. This indicates the system is being pressurized.
Continue to press the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the ball stops
descending, observe if it is above or below the red pointer flag. If the measurement is below the indicator
flag, the system has passed the pressure test. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, the EVAP
system has an unacceptable leak.
Does the EVAP system pass the smoke machine leak verification pressure test?
Yes
The test passed and no concerns are present.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to HX47.
HX49 DTC P144A: CHECK FOR A BLOCKED FUEL VAPOR TUBE BETWEEN THE FTP SENSOR AND THE
FUEL TANK
Key in OFF position.
Remove the fuel vapor tube assembly. Refer to the EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES .
Visually inspect the fuel vapor tube for a blockage between the FTP sensor and the connection to the fuel
tank or fuel pump module.
Visually inspect the connection at the fuel tank or fuel pump module for a blockage.
Attempt to manually remove the blockage.
Is the blockage visible and can be removed?
Yes
No
REMOVE the blockage. INSTALL the Fuel Vapor INSTALL a new Fuel Vapor Tube assembly.
Tube assembly. REFER to the EVAPORATIVE
REFER to the EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS -Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 491
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
EMISSIONS -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
HX50 DTC P260F: CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF ANY MODULE COMMUNICATION CONCERNS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Check for self-test DTCs in all of the vehicle modules.
Are any communication concerns or communication DTCs present?
Yes
For communication concerns in the PCM,
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
GO to HX51.
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For communication concerns in other modules,
REFER to the applicable Workshop article part to
diagnose the communication DTC.
No
HX51 CHECK THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PROCESSOR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the battery and wait for 1 minute. Refer to the BATTERY, MOUNTING AND CABLES -E-SERIES .
Connect the battery.
Key ON, engine running.
Allow the engine idle to stabilize.
Access the PCM and monitor the FTP PID.
Is the pressure equal to 0 kPa (0 psi)?
Yes
GO to HX53.
No
GO to HX52.
HX52 CHECK FOR SELF-TEST DTC P260F
Idle the engine for 2 minutes.
Carry out the self-test.
Is DTC P260F present?
Yes
GO to HX53.
No
RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
HX53 CHECK THE PCM FOR THE LATEST CALIBRATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 492
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Program the PCM to the latest calibration.
Key ON, engine running.
Idle the engine for 2 minutes.
Carry out the self-test.
Is DTC P260F present?
Yes
GO to HX54.
No
RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
HX54 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST HY: GENERATOR/REGULATOR SYSTEM
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
generator/regulator (10346)
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
HY1 CHECK THE GENERATOR CIRCUITRY AND OPERATION
NOTE:
If the concern is still present after checking the generator circuitry in the
workshop article, return to the PC/ED to continue generator diagnosis.
Check for any generator related DTCs. Refer to the GENERATOR AND REGULATOR -- E-SERIES
to diagnose any generator related DTCs.
Is the charging system diagnosed and repaired in the GENERATOR AND REGULATOR -- ESERIES ?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 493
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
The system is operating correctly at this time.
No
GO to HY2.
HY2 CHECK THE GENERATOR MONITOR SIGNAL
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the GENMON PID.
Is the duty cycle between 5% and 97% and not excessively fluctuating?
Yes
The system is operating correctly at this time.
No
GO to HY3.
HY3 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
NOTE:
When the battery (or PCM) is disconnected and connected, some abnormal
drive symptoms may occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The
charging system set point may also vary. The vehicle may need to be driven to
relearn its strategy.
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST JB: SECONDARY IGNITION (COP)
NOTE:
A malfunctioning ignition system may cause high catalyst temperatures. Check
the components next to the catalyst and muffler for heat damage.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
spark plugs (12405)
secondary side of the coil
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 494
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 149: Coil On Plug (COP) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 150: Coil On Plug (COP) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Edge,
MKX,
MKZ,
Taurus,
Taurus X,
Sable
Escape/Mariner,
Focus,
Fusion,
Milan,
Mustang 5.4L
All other vehicles
Connector
A
Pin
3
Circuit
IGN START/RUN
B
2
IGN START/RUN
B
1
IGN START/RUN
Firing Order for Coil On Plug
Applications
Vehicle
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 495
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
BASE, 4-cylinder applications
BASE, 6-cylinder applications
BASE, 8-cylinder applications
BASE, 10-cylinder applications
1342
142536
13726548
1 6 5 10 2 7 3 8 4 9
JB1 CHECK FOR DTCS
Are DTCs P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306, P0307, P0308, P0309, P0310, or
P050B present?
Yes
For DTCs P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304,
P0305, P0306, P0307, P0308, P0309, P0310 or
P0316, GO to JB3.
For DTC P050B, GO to JB13.
No
For symptoms without DTCs, GO to JB2.
For all other DTCs, GO toDIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND
DESCRIPTIONS .
JB2 VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE IGNITION SYSTEM
Visually inspect the engine compartment to make sure all coils are properly and securely connected.
Examine all the wiring harnesses and connectors for damaged, burned, or overheated insulation, and
loose or broken conditions.
Make sure the vehicle battery is in good condition and all of the accessories are turned off.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to JB3.
JB3 DTC P0301 THROUGH P0310: MISFIRE ON CYLINDERS 1 THROUGH 10
Are DTCs P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306, P0307, P0308, P0309, or P0310 present?
Yes
For Edge,
Escape/Mariner 3.0L,
Explorer 4.6L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.6L,
F-150 4.6L,
F-150 5.4L,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus, and
No
GO to JB6.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 496
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Taurus X, GO to JB4.
For all others, GO to JB5.
JB4 CHECK SPARK DURATION RELATIVENESS
Monitor the spark duration PIDs.
Are the PIDs relative to each other?
Yes
GO to JB10.
No
INSPECT the coil boot(s) for the missing cylinder
(s). INSTALL a new coil boot(s) if necessary.
REFER to the ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V)
AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES , Spark Plugs, and
INSPECT the spark plug(s) for the missing cylinder
(s). MEASURE the resistance of the spark plug(s).
INSTALL a new spark plug(s) if the resistance is
lower than 2,000 ohms or higher than 20,000 ohms.
If the coil boot(s) and spark plugs are OK,
INSTALL a new COP(s) for the missing cylinders.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JB5 CHECK FOR SPARK AT THE CYLINDER(S) INDICATED BY THE DTC(S)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the ignition coil(s) from the spark plug(s).
Connect the Air Gap spark tester 303-D037 (D81P-6666-A) or its equivalent to the suspect coil.
Crank the engine while the accelerator pedal is fully applied.
Observe the spark tester while cranking the engine.
Is a bluish-white spark present?
Yes
GO to JB8.
No
INSPECT the coil boot(s) for the missing cylinder
(s). INSTALL a new coil boot(s) if necessary.
REFER to the ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V)
AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES , Spark Plugs, and
INSPECT the spark plug(s) for the missing cylinder
(s). MEASURE the resistance of the spark plug(s).
INSTALL a new spark plug(s) if the resistance is
lower than 2,000 ohms or higher than 20,000 ohms.
GO to JB7.
JB6 CHECK FOR SPARK AT ALL CYLINDERS
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 497
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Disconnect the ignition coil(s) from the spark plug(s).
Connect the Air Gap spark tester 303-D037 (D81P-6666-A) or its equivalent to the suspect coil.
Crank the engine while the accelerator pedal is fully applied.
Observe the spark tester at each cylinder while cranking the engine.
Is a bluish-white spark consistent between all cylinders?
Yes
GO to JB8.
No
INSPECT the coil boot(s) for the missing cylinder
(s). INSTALL a new coil boot(s) if necessary.
REFER to the ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V)
AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES , Spark Plugs, and
INSPECT the spark plug(s) for the missing cylinder
(s). MEASURE the resistance of the spark plug(s).
INSTALL a new spark plug(s) if the resistance is
lower than 2,000 ohms or higher than 20,000 ohms.
RECORD the cylinder(s) with inconsistent spark.
GO to JB7.
JB7 CHECK THE SECONDARY COIL RESISTANCE FOR THE MISSING CYLINDERS
Key in OFF position.
Suspect coil connector disconnected.
Measure resistance between: Suspect coil connector, IGN START/RUN, component side and ignition coil
spring, located in the ignition coil boot.
Is the resistance between 5,000 and 6,000 ohms?
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new COP.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JB8 CHECK THE SPARK PLUGS
NOTE:
To determine the condition of the spark plugs, refer to the ENGINE - 4.6L AND
5.4L -- E-SERIES and carry out the Spark Plug Inspection.
Key in OFF position.
Remove and inspect the plugs for damage, wear, carbon tracking or deposits and proper plug gap.
Are the plugs OK?
Yes
GO to JB9.
No
REPAIR the plug(s). ADJUST the gap or INSTALL
a new spark plug(s) as necessary. REFER to the
ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V) AND 5.4L (2V)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 498
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
-- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JB9 CHECK THE SPARK PLUG RESISTANCE
Measure the spark plug resistance.
Is the resistance between 2,000 and 20,000 ohms?
Yes
For Edge,
Escape/Mariner 3.0L,
Explorer 4.6L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.6L,
F-150 4.6L,
F-150 5.4L,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus, and
Taurus X, GO to JB14.
For all others, GO to JB10.
No
INSTALL a new spark plug. REFER to the
ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V) AND 5.4L (2V)
-- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JB10 TEST DIRECTION FOR SYMPTOM CHARTS
Were you directed to this pinpoint test?
Yes
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
No
GO to JB11.
JB11 TEST DIRECTION FOR PINPOINT TEST HD
Were you directed to this pinpoint test from pinpoint test step HD6?
Yes
GO to HD7.
No
GO to JB12.
JB12 TEST DIRECTION FOR PINPOINT TEST A
Were you directed to this pinpoint test from pinpoint test step A8?
Yes
GO to A9.
No
The concern is intermittent.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 499
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
JB13 DTC P050B: COLD START PERFORMANCE
Are any other codes besides P050B present?
Yes
REPAIR all other powertrain related diagnostic
trouble codes (DTCs) first.
No
GO to JB14.
JB14 CHECK THE SPARK CAPTURE CIRCUIT
Access the PCM and monitor the IGNPCM_F PID.
Is a concern indicated?
Yes
GO to JB16.
No
GO to JB15.
JB15 CHECK THE IGNITION TIMING PID
Access the PCM and monitor the IGNX_F PIDs.
Is a concern indicated?
Yes
Visually inspect the COP harness for damage,
exposed wiring, water contamination, corrosion, and
GO to JB16.
correct assembly. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
JB16 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 500
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PINPOINT TEST JC: SECONDARY IGNITION (COIL PACK)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
spark plugs (12405)
spark plug wires (12280, 12281)
Fig. 151: Coil Pack Spark Diagram
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Explorer 4.0L, Explorer Sport Trac 4.0L, F150 4.2L, Mountaineer 4.0L, Mustang 4.0L, Ranger.
JC1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 or P050B present?
Yes
For DTCs P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or
P0306, GO to JC13.
For DTC P0300, GO to JC2.
For DTC P050B, GO to JC18.
No
For all other DTCs, GO toDIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND
DESCRIPTIONS .
JC2 VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE IGNITION SYSTEM
Visually inspect the engine compartment to make sure all coils and spark plug wires are properly and
securely connected.
Examine all wiring harnesses and connectors for damaged, burned or overheated insulation and loose or
broken conditions.
Make sure the vehicle battery is in good condition and all accessories are turned off.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
No
For a coil pack using an engine analyzer, GO to
JC3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 501
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
For a coil pack not using an engine analyzer, GO to
JC12.
JC3 CONNECT THE ENGINE ANALYZER
Obtain an engine analyzer to diagnose concerns in the secondary side of the ignition system.
Is the engine analyzer connected?
Yes
No
GO to JC4.
REPEAT Step JC2.
JC4 CHECK FOR THE IGNITION PATTERN
Observe the pattern on a scope while cranking the engine.
Fig. 152: Ignition Firing Pattern (No Spark)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Is the pattern flat, which indicates no spark on all cylinders?
Yes
An IGN/START/RUN circuit concern. CHECK the
condition of the related fuses/fuse links. If OK,
REPAIR the open circuit. If the fuse/fuse link is
GO to JC5.
damaged, CHECK the IGN START/RUN circuit for
a short to ground. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
JC5 CHECK FOR A NORMAL IGNITION PATTERN
NOTE:
Spark plugs may be fired more than once per combustion event. Multi-strike
operating mode is RPM dependent.
Key ON, engine running. If no start, crank the engine.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 502
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 153: Normal Ignition Firing Pattern
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Are the patterns even and is the average value of spark plug firing voltage between 9 kV and 15 kV
(higher during engine crank/no start)?
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to JC6.
JC6 IGNITION PATTERN EVALUATION
Is the ignition pattern normal?
Yes
GO to JC7.
No
GO to JC8.
JC7 TEST DIRECTION
Were you directed to this pinpoint test from pinpoint test step A8?
Yes
GO to A9.
No
GO to JC8.
JC8 CHECK FOR MISSING SPARK PATTERNS
Observe for missing spark pattern.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 503
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 154: Identifying Missing Spark Pattern
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Is the spark pattern inconsistent?
Yes
INSPECT the spark plug wires for missing
cylinders. MEASURE the resistance of the spark
plug wires. INSTALL a new spark plug wire if the
resistance is greater than 7,000 ohms per 30.5 cm (1
GO to JC9.
foot). REFER to the ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L
(2V) AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES . CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to JE2.
No
JC9 CHECK FOR A HIGH SPARK PLUG FIRING VOLTAGE
Observe for a high spark plug firing voltage.
Fig. 155: Identifying High Spark Plug Firing Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Is the average value of the spark plug firing voltage greater than 15 Kv?
Yes
No
INSPECT the spark plug wires for missing
cylinders. MEASURE the resistance of the spark
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 504
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
plug wires. INSTALL a new spark plug wire if the
resistance is greater than 7,000 ohms per 30.5 cm (1
foot). REFER to the ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L GO to JC10.
(2V) AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JC10 CHECK FOR LOW SPARK PLUG FIRING VOLTAGE
Check the spark plug firing voltage average pattern.
Fig. 156: Identifying Low Spark Plug Firing Voltage Pattern
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Is there consistently low spark plug firing voltage or sloping spark line on one or more cylinders?
Yes
INSPECT the spark plug wires for missing
cylinders. MEASURE the resistance of the spark
plug wires. INSTALL a new spark plug wire if the
resistance is greater than 7,000 ohms per 30.5 cm (1
foot). MEASURE the resistance of the spark plug
GO to JC11.
(s). INSTALL a new spark plug(s) if the resistance
is lower than 2,000 or higher than 20,000 ohms.
REFER to the ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V)
AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
JC11 CHECK FOR EVENESS BETWEEN CYLINDERS
Check the spark plug firing voltage average pattern.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 505
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 157: Identifying Unevenness Between Cylinders Pattern
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Is the evenness of spark plug firing voltage greater than 6 kV?
Yes
No
INSPECT the spark plug wires for missing
cylinders. MEASURE the resistance of the spark
plug wires. INSTALL a new spark plug wire if the
resistance is greater than 7,000 ohms per 30.5 cm (1
foot). CHECK for damaged spark plugs or narrow
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
spark plug gaps. MEASURE the resistance of the
spark plug(s). INSTALL a new spark plug(s) if the
resistance is lower than 2,000 or higher than 20,000
ohms. REFER to the ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L
(2V) AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JC12 DTCS P0301 THROUGH P0306: MISFIRE ON CYLINDERS 1 THROUGH 6
Are DTCs P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 present?
Yes
GO to JC13.
No
GO to JC14.
JC13 CHECK FOR SPARK AT THE CYLINDER(S) INDICATED BY THE DTC(S)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the spark plug wire(s) from the spark plug(s).
Connect the Air Gap spark tester 303-D037 (D81P-6666-A) or its equivalent to a spark plug wire.
Crank the engine while the accelerator pedal is fully applied.
Check for spark while cranking the engine.
Is the bluish-white spark present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:02 AM
Page 506
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
INSPECT the spark plug wires for missing
cylinders. MEASURE the resistance of the spark
plug wires. INSTALL a new spark plug wire(s) if
the resistance is greater than 7,000 ohms per 30.5
cm (1 foot). REFER to the ENGINE IGNITION 4.6L (2V) AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES . If the
spark plug wires are OK,
GO to JC15.
GO to JC16.
JC14 CHECK FOR SPARK AT ALL CYLINDERS
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the spark plug wire(s) from the spark plug(s).
Connect the Air Gap spark tester 303-D037 (D81P-6666-A) or its equivalent to a spark plug wire.
Crank the engine while the accelerator pedal is fully applied.
Check for spark while cranking the engine.
Is the bluish-white spark present?
Yes
GO to JC16.
No
INSPECT the spark plug wires for missing
cylinders. MEASURE the resistance of the spark
plug wires. INSTALL a new spark plug wire(s), if
the resistance is greater than 7,000 ohms per 30.5
cm (1 foot). REFER to the ENGINE IGNITION 4.6L (2V) AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES . If the
spark plug wires are OK,
GO to JC15.
JC15 CHECK THE SECONDARY COIL RESISTANCE FOR THE MISSING CYLINDERS
NOTE:
Two adjacent coil towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair.
For 6-tower coil pack (6 cylinder) applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2
and 6, and 3 and 4. For Mustang the matched pairs are 1 and 4, 2 and 5, and 3
and 6. For 4-tower coil pack (4 cylinder) applications, the matched pairs are 1
and 4, and 2 and 3.
Key in OFF position.
Ignition coil pack disconnected.
Disconnect spark plug wires from the coil pack.
Measure the resistance of each matched pair.
Is the resistance between 9,500 and 15,500 ohms?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 507
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
INSTALL a new ignition coil pack.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
JC16 CHECK THE SPARK PLUGS
Key in OFF position.
Check for damaged spark plugs or narrow spark plug gaps.
Are the plugs OK?
Yes
No
REPAIR the spark plug(s). ADJUST the gap or
INSTALL a new spark plug(s) as necessary.
REFER to the ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V)
AND 5.4L (2V) -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to JC17.
JC17 CHECK THE SPARK PLUG RESISTANCE
Measure the spark plug resistance.
Is the resistance between 2,000 and 20,000 ohms?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new spark plug(s). REFER to the
ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V) AND 5.4L (2V)
-- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
JC18 DTC P050B: COLD START PERFORMANCE
Are any other codes besides P050B present?
Yes
REPAIR all other powertrain related diagnostic
trouble codes (DTCs) first.
No
GO to JC19.
JC19 CHECK THE SPARK CAPTURE CIRCUIT
Access the PCM and monitor the IGNPCM_F PID.
Is a concern indicated?
Yes
GO to JC21.
No
GO to JC20.
JC20 CHECK THE IGNITION TIMING PID
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 508
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Access the PCM and monitor the IGNX_F PIDs.
Is a concern indicated?
Yes
Visually inspect the coil pack harness for damage,
exposed wiring, water contamination, corrosion, and
GO to JC21.
correct assembly. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
JC21 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST JD: CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (6C315)
harness circuits: CKP(+) and CKP(-)
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 509
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 158: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 159: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 510
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 160: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner 2.3L,
Focus,
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L,
Ranger 2.3L
Explorer 4.0L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.0L,
Mountaineer 4.0L,
Mustang 4.0L,
Ranger 4.0L
All other vehicles
Connector
A
Pin
Circuit
2
1
CKPCKP+
B
2
1
CKPCKP+
C
1
2
CKPCKP+
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Edge,
F-150,
Mark LT,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
Expedition,
Connector
190 Pin
Pin
Circuit
E47
E46
CKP+
CKP-
150 (50-50-50) Pin E34
E45
140 Pin
E47
CKP+
CKPCKP+
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 511
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ,
Navigator
Focus
190 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
E46
CKP-
E58
E42
E47
E46
CKP+
CKPCKP+
CKP-
JD1 CHECK THE CKP SENSOR SIGNAL SENT TO THE PCM
NOTE:
The battery should be fully charged and the starting system should be
functioning properly.
Disable the inertia switch.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
Crank the engine.
Is the RPM greater than 150 RPM?
Yes
For DTC P1336 with no start, refer to PINPOINT
TEST A.
For DTC P1336, GO to HD16.
For all others, the CKP, PCM, and harness are
working properly.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
No
GO to JD2.
JD2 CHECK THE TIMING COVER, CKP SENSOR AND EXTERNAL TRIGGER WHEEL (OUTSIDE THE
TIMING COVER) FOR OBVIOUS PHYSICAL DAMAGE
Key in OFF position.
Visually check the timing cover, CKP sensor and external trigger wheel (outside the timing cover) for
obvious physical damage.
Do any parts appear physically damaged?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. RESET the keep alive
memory (KAM). REFER toRESETTING THE
GO to JD3.
KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM) . REPEAT the
self-test.
No
JD3 CHECK FOR PROPER CKP BIAS VOLTAGES IN THE PCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 512
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CKP Sensor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CKP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
CKP+
CKP
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Are the voltages between 1 - 3 V?
Yes
No
GO to JD4.
GO to JD6.
JD4 CHECK THE CKP SENSOR RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CKP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CKP+
( - ) CKP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
CKP-
Is the resistance between 250 - 1K ohms?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new CKP sensor.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES . RESET the keep alive memory (KAM).
REFER toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE
MEMORY (KAM) . REPEAT the self-test.
GO to JD5.
JD5 CHECK THE CKP HARNESS SHIELD GROUND
NOTE:
The harness shield protects the CKP signal from electrical noise and is
grounded at one end, typically near the PCM.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 513
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
Carry out the following resistance measurement between the CKP shield and
the ground.
Measure the resistance between:
(+)
CKP_SHLD
Assembly
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
CKP_SHLD
Ground
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to JD6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit.
CHECK for a poor ground connection.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JD6 CHECK FOR SHORT BETWEEN CKP(+) AND CKP(-) IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CKP
( - ) CKP
Sensor
Sensor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
CKP+
CKP-
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to JD7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
JD7 CHECK THE CKP CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CKP
Sensor
Connector,
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 514
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side
CKPCKPCKP+
CKP+
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to JD8.
JD8 CHECK THE CKP CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CKP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
CKP+
CKP-
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to JD9.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
JD9 CHECK THE CKP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
CKP+
CKP-
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Is any voltage present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 515
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to JD10.
JD10 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST JE: INTEGRATED IGNITION COIL PACK A, B, OR C FAILURE
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
ignition coil packs (12029)
ignition coil harness
IGN START/RUN circuit to coil packs
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Fig. 161: Coil Pack Assembly Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 516
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 162: Coil Pack Assembly Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 163: Coil Pack Assembly Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
F-150
Connector
A
Ranger 2.3L
B
Ranger 3.0L
A
Ranger 4.0L
C
All other vehicles
C
Pin
2
3
1
4
3
1
2
2
1
3
4
3
4
2
1
3
2
4
1
Circuit
CD C
CD B
CD A
IGN START/RUN
CD B
CD A
IGN START/RUN
CD C
CD B
CD A
IGN START/RUN
CD C
CD B
CD A
IGN START/RUN
CD C
CD B
CD A
IGN START/RUN
IGNITION COIL TO CYLINDER CORRELATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 517
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Vehicle
Related DTC
Cylinder
Number
Ignition Coil
Coil Driver
(CD)
PCM Pin
2.3L Ranger
P0351
P0352
P0352
P0351
1
2
3
4
A
B
B
A
A
B
B
A
E17
E12
E12
E17
3.0L/4.0L Ranger
P0351
P0353
P0352
P0352
P0351
P0353
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
C
B
B
A
C
A
C
B
B
A
C
E12
E16
E17
E17
E12
E16
All others
P0351
P0353
P0352
P0352
P0351
P0353
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
C
B
B
A
C
A
C
B
B
A
C
E17
E16
E12
E12
E17
E16
JE1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0350, P0351, P0352, or P0353 present?
Yes
GO to JE2.
No
For all other DTCs, GO toDIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND
DESCRIPTIONS .
JE2 DETERMINE WHICH COIL IS NOT FIRING PROPERLY
NOTE:
Electronic ignition engine timing is entirely controlled by the PCM. Electronic
ignition timing is NOT adjustable. Do not attempt to check base timing. You will
receive false readings.
Determine which coil is not firing properly using the information from Pinpoint Test JB or a DTC and the
table at the beginning of this pinpoint test.
Record the suspect cylinder, coil and PCM pin number from the table.
Is the suspect cylinder number, coil driver and PCM pin number recorded?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 518
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to JE3.
No
To obtain the required information, REPEAT step
JE2.
JE3 DTC P0351, P0352, P0353: CHECK IGN START/RUN VOLTAGE TO THE COIL PACK
Suspect coil connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Coil Pack
Assembly
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
IGN
Ground
START/RUN
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to JE4.
No
The IGN START/RUN has a circuit concern.
CHECK the condition of the related fuses/fuse
links. If OK, REPAIR the open circuit. If the
fuse/fuse link is damaged, CHECK the IGN
START/RUN circuit for a short to ground. REPAIR
as necessary. CARRY OUT the misfire monitor
drive cycle. REFER toON BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE CYCLE .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JE4 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE SUSPECT COIL DRIVER (CD) CIRCUIT
Key in OFF position.
Connect a test lamp between IGN START/RUN and the suspect CD circuit (determined from the table) at
the coil pack harness connector.
Crank the engine while the accelerator pedal is fully applied.
Observe the test lamp while cranking the engine.
Does the test lamp blink consistently?
Yes
GO to JE8.
No
GO to JE5.
JE5 CHECK THE SUSPECT CD CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 519
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Coil Pack
( - ) PCM
Assembly
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
Suspect coil
Suspect coil
driver
driver
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to JE6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CARRY out the misfire
monitor drive cycle. REFER toON BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE CYCLE .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JE6 CHECK THE SUSPECT CD CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
Suspect coil
Ground
driver
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CARRY out the misfire
monitor drive cycle. REFER toON BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE CYCLE .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to JE7.
JE7 CHECK THE SUSPECT CD CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 520
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
Suspect coil
Ground
driver
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to JE9.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CARRY out the misfire
monitor drive cycle. REFER toON BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE CYCLE .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JE8 CHECK THE SUSPECT COIL FOR DAMAGE
Key in OFF position.
Remove the spark plug wire from the suspect coil tower (as determined from the table).
Connect the Air Gap Spark Tester 303-D037 (D81P-6666-A) or equivalent to the suspect spark plug wire.
Crank the engine while the accelerator pedal is fully applied.
Observe the spark tester while cranking the engine.
Is a bluish-white spark present?
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new coil pack as needed. REFER to the
ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V) AND 5.4L (2V)
-- E-SERIES . CARRY out the misfire monitor
drive cycle. REFER toON BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE CYCLE .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JE9 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 521
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST JF: INTEGRATED IGNITION COIL ON PLUG COIL A THROUGH J FAILURE
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
ignition coils (12029)
ignition coil harness
ignition coils relay
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 164: Coil On Plug (COP) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 165: Coil On Plug (COP) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Connector
Pin
Circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 522
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Edge,
MKX,
MKZ,
Taurus,
Taurus X,
Sable
Escape/Mariner,
Focus,
Fusion,
Milan,
Mustang 5.4L
All other vehicles
A
1
3
COP
IGN START/RUN
B
1
2
COP
IGN START/RUN
B
2
1
COP
IGN START/RUN
Fig. 166: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
1
2
5
3
Circuit
GND (Ground)
IGN START/RUN
B+ (Battery Positive Voltage)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
IGNITION COIL TO CYLINDER CORRELATION
Vehicle
2.3L Escape, 2.3L Mariner
Related
DTC
Cylinder
Number
Ignition
Coil
P0351
P0352
P0353
1
2
3
A
B
C
Coil
Driver
(CD)
A
D
B
PCM
Pin
E1
E12
E24
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 523
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Focus
2.3L Fusion, 2.3L Milan
6-Cylinder Applications
3.0L Escape, 3.0L Mariner
8-Cylinder Applications
10-Cylinder Applications
P0354
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356
P0357
P0358
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356
P0357
P0358
P0359
P0360
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
C
E
B
D
F
A
C
E
B
D
F
A
D
B
G
F
E
C
H
A
E
G
I
C
B
F
H
J
D
E35
E70
E50
E66
E69
E17
E11
E12
E16
E17
E16
E15
E12
E11
E10
E1
E12
E24
E35
E36
E22
E17
E11
E12
E14
E10
E15
E16
E9
E17
E11
E12
E14
E10
E15
E16
E9
E13
E8
JF1 DETERMINE WHICH COIL IS NOT FIRING PROPERLY
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 524
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
Electronic ignition engine timing is entirely controlled by the PCM. Electronic
ignition timing is NOT adjustable. Do not attempt to check base timing. You will
receive false readings.
Determine which coil is not firing properly using the information from Pinpoint Test JB or a DTC and the
table at the beginning of this pinpoint test.
Record the suspect cylinder, coil and PCM pin number from the table.
Is the suspect cylinder number, coil driver and PCM pin number recorded?
Yes
GO to JF2.
No
REPEAT the test step to obtain the required
information.
JF2 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE SUSPECT COIL DRIVER CIRCUIT
NOTE:
This step may cause fuel pump related DTCs to set. Disregard any fuel pump
related DTCs at this time.
NOTE:
Test lamp bulb filament wattages vary widely. The intensity and duration of
blinking depends on the test lamp being used.
Key in OFF position.
Suspect coil connector disconnected.
Remove the fuel pump fuse to disable the fuel pump.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between the IGN START/RUN and suspect coil driver, harness side.
Observe the test lamp while cranking the engine.
Is the test lamp blinking consistently?
Yes
GO to JF3.
No
GO to JF4.
JF3 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE SUSPECT COIL
Key in OFF position.
Carry out a visual inspection. Closely inspect the coil case and boot for carbon tracking, cracks and torn
or improperly installed boots.
Remove the suspect COP from the spark plug.
Connect the Air Gap Spark Tester 303-DO37 (D81P-6666-A) or equivalent.
Suspect coil connector connected.
Crank the engine.
Observe the spark tester while cranking the engine.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 525
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is a bluish-white spark present?
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new suspect coil. If necessary,
INSTALL a new spark plug. REFER to the
ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V) AND 5.4L (2V)
-- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JF4 CHECK THE IGN START/RUN VOLTAGE TO THE SUSPECT COIL
Key ON, engine OFF.
Suspect coil connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) COP
( - ) Vehicle
Connector,
Battery
Harness Side
IGN
Negative
START/RUN terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to JF5.
No
For Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis, and
Town Car, GO to JF9.
For all others, REPAIR the open circuit.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JF5 CHECK THE SUSPECT COIL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Suspect coil connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) COP
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
Suspect coil
COP
driver
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 526
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to JF6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
JF6 CHECK THE SUSPECT COIL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) Vehicle
Connector,
Battery
Harness Side
Suspect coil
Negative
driver
terminal
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to JF7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
JF7 CHECK THE SUSPECT COIL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) Vehicle
Connector,
Battery
Harness Side
Suspect coil
Negative
driver
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to JF12.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test. If the concern or DTC is still
present,
GO to JF8.
JF8 CHECK THE SUSPECT COIL FOR DAMAGE
PCM connector connected.
Connect the Air Gap Spark Tester 303-D037 (D81P-6666-A) or equivalent to the suspect coil.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 527
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Crank the engine while the accelerator pedal is fully applied.
Observe the spark tester while cranking the engine.
Is a bluish-white spark present?
Yes
No
If necessary, INSTALL a new spark plug. REFER INSTALL a new suspect coil. REFER to the
to the ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V) AND 5.4L ENGINE IGNITION - 4.6L (2V) AND 5.4L (2V)
(2V) -- E-SERIES .
-- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JF9 CHECK VPWR CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE SUSPECT COIL AND IGNITION COILS RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Ignition Coils Relay connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Ignition
( - ) Suspect
Coils Relay
coil Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
IGN
VPWR - Pin 3
START/RUN
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to JF10.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. The open is between the
splice and the ignition coils relay.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
JF10 CHECK THE B+ AND IGN START/RUN VOLTAGE TO IGNITION COILS RELAY
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Ignition
Coils Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
B+ - Pin 5
Ground
IGN
START/RUN - Ground
Pin 2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 528
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are the voltages greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to JF11.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
JF11 CHECK THE IGNITION COILS RELAY GND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Ignition
( - ) Ignition
Coils Relay
Coils Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
B+ - Pin 5
GND - Pin 1
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new Ignition Coils relay. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
JF12 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new PCM.
REFER toFLASH ELECTRICALLY
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY concern may have been caused by a loose or
MEMORY (EEPROM) , Programming the VID corroded connector.
Block for a Replacement PCM.
PINPOINT TEST KA: FUEL PUMP (FP) RELAY
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 529
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
fuel pump relay (9345)
inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (9341)
harness circuits: B+, VPWR, FP, GND, FPM, and FP PWR
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
The VPWR and FP circuits may be reversed in the harness connector. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for
schematic and connector information.
Fig. 167: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 168: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:03 AM
Page 530
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 169: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Expedition,
Focus,
Navigator,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Ranger
Connector
A
All other vehicles
C
B
Pin
Circuit
30
87
85
86
B+
FPPWR
FP
VPWR
3
5
1
2
3
5
1
2
B+
FPPWR
FP
VPWR
B+
FPPWR
FP
VPWR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 531
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 170: Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
Circuit
FPPWR-B (Fuel Pump Power - B)
FPPWR-A (Fuel Pump Power - A)
1
2
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Expedition,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ,
Navigator
Focus
Connector
140 Pin
190 Pin
Ranger
170 Pin
All other vehicles
190 Pin
Pin
Circuit
B30
B62
FPM
FP
B32
B19
B21
B12
B30
B62
FPM
FP
FPM
FP
FPM
FP
KA1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0230, P0231, P0232, or P1641 present?
Yes
No
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0230 or P1641, GO
to KA2.
For continuous memory DTCs P0230 or P1641, GO
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 532
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
to KA32.
For KOEO and KOER DTC P0231, GO to KA24.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
For continuous memory DTC P0231, GO to KA31.
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For KOEO and KOER DTC P0232, GO to KA12.
For continuous memory DTC P0232, GO to KA29.
KA2 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0230 AND P1641: CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF DTC P0685 OR P0690
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P0685 or P0690 present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to KA3.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
KA3 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO FUEL PUMP RELAY
FP Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FP Relay
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KA4.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KA4 CHECK THE FUEL PUMP RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Carry out the FP relay component test. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams Cell 149 Component Testing.
Does the FP relay pass the component test?
Yes
GO to KA5.
No
INSTALL a new FP relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 533
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KA5 CHECK THE FP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FP Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FP
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KA6.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KA6 CHECK THE FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP Relay
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FP
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KA7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KA7 CHECK THE FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP Relay
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FP
FP
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 534
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to KA8.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KA8 CHECK FOR KOEO DTCS
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Are DTCs P0231 or P0232 present?
Yes
GO to KA9.
No
GO to KA34.
KA9 CHECK THE FP PRIMARY CIRCUIT INSIDE THE PCM
PCM connector connected.
FP Relay connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FP_F PID.
Is the PID state YES?
Yes
GO to KA34.
No
GO to KA10.
KA10 CHECK THE FUEL PUMP PRIMARY CIRCUIT INSIDE THE PCM WHILE CRANKING THE ENGINE
Access the PCM and monitor the FP_F PID.
While observing the PID, crank the engine.
Does the PID display indicate a concern during crank?
Yes
GO to KA34.
No
The fuel pump primary circuit is OK in the harness
and PCM.
GO to KA11.
KA11 IS DTC P0231 PRESENT IN THE KOEO SELF-TEST?
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P0231 present?
Yes
GO to KA24.
No
GO to KA12.
KA12 KOEO AND KOER DTC P0232: DOES THE ENGINE START?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 535
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Does the engine start?
Yes
GO to KA13.
No
GO to KA18.
KA13 VERIFY THE FUEL PUMP IS OFF
Key ON, engine OFF.
Wait for 5 seconds.
The fuel pump is located above the fuel tank. Listen for the sound of the fuel pump operating which can
be heard from outside the vehicle.
Is fuel pump off with the key ON?
Yes
GO to KA15.
No
GO to KA14.
KA14 CHECK FOR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTACTS ALWAYS CLOSED
FP Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Is fuel pump off with the key ON?
Yes
INSTALL a new FP relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. The short circuit is
between the FPPWR and FPM circuits or in the
INJPWRM circuit.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KA15 CHECK THE FPM CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
FP Relay connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP Relay
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPPWR
FPM
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. The concern is between
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 536
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
the splice and the PCM.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KA16.
KA16 IS KOEO DTC P0231 PRESENT?
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P0231 present?
Yes
GO to KA34.
No
GO to KA17.
KA17 CHECK THE FPM PRIMARY CIRCUIT INSIDE THE PCM
PCM connector connected.
FP Relay connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FPM PID.
Is the PID state OFF?
Yes
The concern is not present at this time. The FPM
circuit is OK in the harness and PCM. Disregard
DTC P0232 at this time.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
No
GO to KA34.
KA18 CHECK IF THE INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH IS TRIPPED
Is the IFS switch tripped?
Yes
RESET the IFS switch.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KA19.
KA19 CHECK THE INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF
IFS Switch connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IFS Switch ( - ) IFS Switch
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
FPPWR-A - Pin FPPWR-B - Pin
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 537
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
2
1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KA20.
No
INSTALL a new IFS switch. REFER to the FUEL
TANK AND LINES - GASOLINE AND DIESEL
-- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KA20 CHECK THE FP PWR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
FP Relay connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IFS Switch ( - ) FP Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPPWR-A - Pin
FPPWR
2
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KA21.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CHECK for an open
circuit between the IFS switch and the FPM splice.
REFER to the Wiring Diagrams article for
schematic and connector information.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KA21 CHECK THE FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
FP connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPGND
Ground
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 538
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to KA22.
REPEAT the self-test.
KA22 CHECK THE FP PWR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP
( - ) IFS Switch
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPPWR-B - Pin
FPPWR
1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KA23.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KA23 CHECK THE INTERNAL RESISTANCE OF THE FUEL PUMP
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP
( - ) FP
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPPWR
FPGND
Is the resistance less than 10 ohms?
Yes
The fuel pump circuit is OK in the harness and
PCM. Disregard DTC P0232 at this time.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts for further direction.
No
INSTALL a new FP. REFER to the FUEL TANK
AND LINES - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- ESERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KA24 KOEO AND KOER DTC P0231: IS KOEO DTC P0230 ALSO PRESENT?
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P0230 present?
Yes
GO to KA3.
No
GO to KA25.
KA25 DOES THE ENGINE START?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 539
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Does the engine start?
Yes
GO to KA15.
No
GO to KA26.
KA26 CHECK IF THE IFS SWITCH IS TRIPPED
Is the IFS switch tripped?
Yes
RESET the IFS switch.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KA27.
KA27 CHECK THE B+ CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TO THE FP RELAY
FP Relay connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FP Relay
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
B+
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KA28.
No
A B+ circuit concern is present. CHECK the
condition of the related fuse/fuse links. If OK,
REPAIR the open circuit. If the fuse/fuse link is
damaged, CHECK the circuit for a short to ground
before installing a new fuse/fuse link.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KA28 CHECK THE FP PWR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP Relay
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPPWR
Ground
Is the resistance less than 10 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 540
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
INSTALL a new FP relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. The open is between the
splice and the FP relay.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KA29 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P0232: IS A CONTINUOUS DTC P0230 PRESENT?
Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs.
Is DTC P0230 present?
Yes
GO to KA33.
No
GO to KA30.
KA30 CHECK THE FUEL PUMP SECONDARY CIRCUITS FOR A CONCERN
NOTE:
Be aware that DTC P0232 could be set if the IFS switch is tripped then reset, or
if voltage is supplied to the FP PWR circuit when the PCM expects the fuel
pump to be off. The fuel pump prime procedure produces this.
NOTE:
The FPM PID turns ON when a concern is present.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FPM PID.
Observe the FPM PID for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following:
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FPPWR circuit between the FP RLY and the FP
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FP GND
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FPM circuit between the PCM and the splice to the FPPWR circuit
Shake, wiggle, and bend the INJPWRM circuit between the PCM and the splice to the FPPWR
circuit
Lightly tap on the FP, IFS, and FP RLY to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KA31 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P0231: CHECK THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 541
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Point A PCM
Point B
Connector,
Harness Side
FP
Ground
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPM
Ground
The FP turns on and the voltage will be greater than 10 V.
Check for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following. The voltage changes suddenly
when a concern is present.
Shake, wiggle, and bend the B+ supply to the FP relay
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FP PWR circuit between the FP relay and the FPM splice
Lightly tap on the FP relay to simulate road shock
Key in OFF position.
Visually inspect the FP relay and its loom connector for damage and corrosion.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KA32 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P0230: CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF DTC P0685 OR P0690
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P0685 or P0690 present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to KA33.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
KA33 CHECK THE FP PRIMARY CIRCUITS
NOTE:
The PID indicates YES when a concern is present.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 542
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine OFF.
Wait for 5 seconds.
Access the PCM and monitor the FP_F PID.
Observe the FP_F PID for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following:
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FP circuit between the PCM and the FP relay
Shake, wiggle, and bend the VPWR circuit between the electronic engine control power relay and
the FP relay
Lightly tap on the FP relay to simulate road shock
Key in OFF position.
Visually inspect the PCM connector and wires as far back as the main loom for damage.
Visually inspect the FPR connector and wires as far back as the main loom for damage.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KA34 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST KB: FUEL PUMP DRIVER MODULE
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 543
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
fuel pump driver module (FPDM) (9D370) and (9D372)
FPDM power supply relay
inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (9341)
harness circuits: B+, GND, FPC, FPM, FPM2, FP PWR, FP2PWR, FP RTN, FP2RTN, VPWR Fuel,
VPWR Fuel 2, and PWRGND
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 171: Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM2) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
4
6
1
3
5
Circuit
FPRTN (Fuel Pump Return)
FPPWR (Fuel Pump Power)
FPC (Fuel Pump Command)
FPM (Fuel Pump Monitor)
PWRGND (Power Ground)
VPWR Fuel
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 544
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 172: Fuel Pump Driver Module 2 (FPDM2) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
4
6
1
3
5
Circuit
FP2RTN (Fuel Pump 2 Return)
FP2PWR (Fuel Pump 2 Power)
FPC (Fuel Pump Command)
FPM2 (Fuel Pump Monitor 2 - Rear\Secondary Pump)
PWRGND (Power Ground)
VPWR Fuel 2
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for schematic and connector information. For F-150 and Mark LT, the
FPDM PWR relay is integral to the PDJB.
Fig. 173: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 545
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 174: Fuel Pump Driver Module Power (FPDM PWR) Relay Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
Town Car
Connector
A
Escape/Mariner,
F-Super Duty
B
All other vehicles
A
Pin
5
1
2
3
87
85
86
30
5
2
1
3
Circuit
VPWR Fuel
GND
VPWR
B+
VPWR Fuel
GND
VPWR
B+
VPWR Fuel
GND
VPWR
B+
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for schematic and connector information.
Fig. 175: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 546
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
5
2
1
3
Circuit
VPWR Fuel 2
GND (Ground)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
B+ (Battery Positive Voltage)
Fig. 176: Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
1
Circuit
VPWR Fuel - A
VPWR Fuel - B
This applies to applications with an FPDM PWR relay integral to the PDJB.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 547
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 177: Power Distribution Junction Box (PDJB) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
3
Circuit
VPWR Fuel
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
Connector
150 (50-50-50) Pin
F-150,
Mark LT
Mustang 5.4L
190 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
170 Pin
Pin
B12
B21
B62
B30
T18
B12
B21
B12
B21
Circuit
FPC
FPM
FPC
FPM
FPM2
FPC
FPM
FPC
FPM
KB1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P1233, P1234, P1235, P1236, P1237, P1238, or P1641 present?
Yes
For DTC P1233, GO to KB2.
For DTC P1234, GO to KB38.
For DTCs P1235 or P1641, GO to KB20.
For DTC P1236, GO to KB50.
For DTC P1237, GO to KB26.
For DTC P1238, GO to KB56.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 548
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KB2 DTC P1233: IS DTC P1233 PRESENT IN THE KOEO SELF-TEST?
NOTE:
The Mustang 5.4L is equipped with 2 FPDMs. The DTC P1233 applies to the
FPDM mounted on the driver side of the luggage compartment.
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P1233 present?
Yes
GO to KB3.
No
The PCM is now receiving a signal from the FPDM.
One possible cause of DTC P1233 is that the IFS
switch was tripped, then reset.
For a no start (engine cranks), DISREGARD the
DTC at this time. RETURN to the SYMPTOM
CHARTS article Symptom Charts and continue as
directed. After repairing the no start, to diagnose the
intermittent causes of P1233,
GO to KB19.
For all others, GO to KB19.
KB3 DOES THE ENGINE START?
NOTE:
The Mustang 5.4L starts with 1 FPDM disabled.
Does the engine start?
Yes
For Mustang 5.4L, GO to KB4.
For all others, to check the FPM circuit,
GO to KB15.
No
VERIFY the IFS switch is set (button pressed). If
OK,
GO to KB4.
KB4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS TO THE FPDM
FPDM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM
( - ) FPDM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR Fuel - PWRGND - Pin
Pin 5
3
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 549
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
For Mustang 5.4L, to check the FPM circuit,
GO to KB15.
For all others, INSTALL a new FPDM.
REFER to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
GO to KB5.
INFORMATION - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
KB5 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE FPDM
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VPWR Fuel Ground
Pin 5
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
No
There is no voltage to the FPDM.
REPAIR the open circuit. The FPDM ground circuit
For F-150, and
is open.
Mark LT, GO to KB11.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
For all others, GO to KB6.
KB6 CHECK THE B+ VOLTAGE TO THE FPDM POWER SUPPLY RELAY
Key in OFF position.
FPDM PWR Relay connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM
PWR Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
B+
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
No
A B+ circuit concern is present. CHECK the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 550
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
condition of the related fuse/fuse links. If OK,
REPAIR the open circuit. If the fuse/fuse link is
damaged, CHECK the circuit for a short to ground
before installing a new fuse/fuse link.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KB7.
KB7 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE FPDM POWER SUPPLY RELAY
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM
PWR Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KB8.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB8 CHECK FOR GROUND TO THE FPDM POWER SUPPLY RELAY
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM
PWR Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
GND
Ground
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KB9.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB9 CHECK THE VPWR FUEL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM
( - ) FPDM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 551
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR Fuel Pin 5
PWR Relay
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR Fuel
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new FPDM relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KB10.
KB10 ISOLATE THE OPEN IN THE FPDM CIRCUIT
IFS Switch connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM ( - ) IFS Switch
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR Fuel - VPWR Fuel - B
Pin 5
- Pin 1
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM
( - ) IFS Switch
PWR Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VPWR Fuel - A
VPWR Fuel
- Pin 2
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new IFS switch. REFER to the FUEL
TANK AND LINES - GASOLINE AND DIESEL
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
-- E-SERIES . VERIFY the IFS switch is set
REPEAT the self-test.
(button pressed).
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KB11 CHECK THE FUEL PUMP FUSE
NOTE:
These steps are for applications with a FPDM PWR relay integral to the PDJB.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 552
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
Check the FPDM power supply relay fuse. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for schematic and
connector information.
Is the fuse OK?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new fuse. CHECK the associated
circuits for a short to ground before installing the
fuse.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KB12.
KB12 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE IFS SWITCH
IFS Switch connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) IFS Switch
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VPWR Fuel - A
Ground
- Pin 2
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KB14.
No
GO to KB13.
KB13 CHECK THE VPWR FUEL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE IFS AND PDJB
Key in OFF position.
PDJB connector disconnected. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for schematic and connector
information.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IFS Switch ( - ) PDJB
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR Fuel - A VPWR Fuel - Pin 2
Pin 3
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 553
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
CHECK the fuel pump fuse. REPAIR as necessary.
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
If OK, INSTALL a new FP RLY/PDJB.
REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KB14 CHECK THE IFS FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IFS Switch ( - ) IFS Switch
Connector,
Connector,
Component
Component
Side
Side
VPWR Fuel - A VPWR Fuel - B
- Pin 2
- Pin 1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new IFS switch. REFER to the FUEL
REPAIR the open circuit. The VPWR fuel circuit is
TANK AND LINES - GASOLINE AND DIESEL
open.
-- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KB15 CHECK THE FPM CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
FPDM connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPM - Pin 1
FPM
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KB16.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB16 CHECK THE FPM CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:04 AM
Page 554
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPM - Pin 1
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KB17.
KB17 CHECK THE FPM CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPM - Pin 1
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KB18.
KB18 CHECK FOR FPM OUTPUT FROM THE FPDM
NOTE:
It is OK for the voltage to cycle below this range and then return within range.
FPDM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPM
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 555
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage between 0.02 - 1 V?
Yes
GO to KB64.
No
INSTALL a new FPDM.
REFER to the FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KB19 CHECK THE CIRCUITS THAT MAY CAUSE AN INTERMITTENT LOSS OF VOLTAGE TO THE FPDM
NOTE:
Be aware that P1233 could be set if the IFS switch is tripped then reset.
NOTE:
With no concern present, the FPDM sends a 50% duty cycle (all OK) to the PCM
on the FPM circuit. Depending on the scan tool type, the FPM PID may display
50%, or a random value that is fluctuating between 85% and 115%.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FPM PID.
Observe the FPM PID for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following:
Shake, wiggle, and bend the PWRGND circuit to the FPDM
Shake, wiggle, and bend the VPWR fuel circuit to the FPDM
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FPM circuit between the FPDM and the PCM
Shake, wiggle, and bend the B+ and ground circuits to the FPDM power supply relay
Lightly tap on the IFS switch to simulate road shock
Lightly tap on the FPDM to simulate road shock
Lightly tap on the FPDM power supply relay to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KB20 DTC P1235: IS DTC P1235 PRESENT IN THE KOEO SELF-TEST?
NOTE:
The Mustang 5.4L is equipped with 2 FPDMs. The DTC P1235 applies to the
FPDM mounted on the driver side of the luggage compartment.
NOTE:
For ETC applications, check if ETC DTC P2105 is present. An ETC system
concern could cause P1235, and should be diagnosed first.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 556
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P1235 present?
Yes
GO to KB21.
No
GO to KB25.
KB21 CHECK THE FPC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
FPDM connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) FPDM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPC
FPC - Pin 6
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KB22.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB22 CHECK THE FPC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
FPDM2 connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FPC - Pin 6
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KB23.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB23 CHECK THE FPC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 557
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FPC - Pin 6
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KB24.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB24 CHECK THE FPC CIRCUIT IN THE FPDM
FPDM connector connected.
FPDM2 connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPC
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KB64.
No
INSTALL a new FPDM. REFER to the FUEL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KB25 CHECK THE FPC CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT OPEN OR SHORTS
NOTE:
With no concern present, the FPDM sends a 50% duty cycle (all OK) to the PCM
on the FPM circuit. Depending on the scan tool type, the FPM PID may display
50%, or a random value that is fluctuating between 85% and 115%.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FPM PID.
Observe the FPM PID for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following:
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FPC circuit between FPDM and the PCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 558
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Lightly tap on the FPDM to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KB26 DTC P1237: IS DTC P1237 PRESENT IN THE KOEO SELF-TEST?
NOTE:
The Mustang 5.4L is equipped with 2 FPDMs. The DTC P1237 applies to the
FPDM mounted on the driver side of the luggage compartment.
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P1237 present?
Yes
GO to KB27.
No
DTC P1237 is possibly intermittent,
GO to KB33.
KB27 DOES THE ENGINE START?
NOTE:
The Mustang 5.4L starts with 1 FPDM disabled.
FPDM2 connector disconnected.
Does the engine start?
Yes
GO to KB36.
No
GO to KB28.
KB28 CHECK THE FPPWR, FPRTN AND INTERNAL FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
FPDM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM
( - ) FPDM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPPWR - Pin 4 FPRTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance less than 10 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 559
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
ISOLATE the concern,
GO to KB32.
GO to KB29.
KB29 CHECK THE FPRTN CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPRTN - Pin 2 Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KB30.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB30 CHECK THE FPPWR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
FP connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPPWR - Pin 4 Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KB31.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB31 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO FP
NOTE:
During output test mode, the fuel pump stays commanded on for only about 5
seconds.
FPDM connector connected.
FP connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 560
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FP
( - ) FP
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPPWR
FPRTN
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
No
VERIFY the vehicle battery was at a proper charge
during the test.
VERIFY the pump ON command did not time out
INSTALL a new FP. REFER to the FUEL TANK
before the voltage check was made. REPEAT as
AND LINES - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- Enecessary.
SERIES .
If OK, INSTALL a new FPDM. REFER to the
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KB32 ISOLATE THE OPEN CIRCUIT
FP connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP
( - ) FPDM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPPWR
FPPWR - Pin 4
FPRTN
FPRTN - Pin 2
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP
Connector,
Component
Side
FPPWR
( - ) FP
Connector,
Component
Side
FPRTN
Is the resistance less than 10 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 561
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. If the open is internal to
the pump, INSTALL a new FP. REFER to the
FUEL TANK AND LINES - GASOLINE AND
DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KB33 VERIFY THE DTC P1237 IS INTERMITTENT
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FPM PID.
Is the FPM PID 75% (or varying between 250% and 400%)?
Yes
A concern is present.
GO to KB27.
No
CHECK for an intermittent concern,
GO to KB34.
KB34 CHECK THE FPPWR AND FPRTN CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT OPEN OR SHORTS
NOTE:
With no concern present, the FPDM sends a 50% duty cycle (all OK) to the PCM
on the FPM circuit. Depending on the scan tool type, the FPM PID may display
50%, or a random value that is fluctuating between 85% and 115%.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FPM PID.
Observe the FPM PID for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following:
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FPPWR and FPRTN circuits between the FPDM and the FP
Lightly tap on the FP and FPDM to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KB35.
KB35 CHECK THE FPPWR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
The lamp turns on when a concern is present.
Key in OFF position.
FPDM connector disconnected.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 562
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) FPDM
Connector,
Harness Side
( - ) FPDM
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR Fuel FPPWR - Pin 4
Pin 5
Key ON, engine OFF.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern. Shake, wiggle, and bend the FPPWR circuit between
the FPDM and the FP.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KB36 CHECK THE FPPWR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
FPDM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPPWR - Pin 4 Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KB37.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB37 CHECK THE FPRTN CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
FPDM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR Fuel -
( - ) FPDM
Connector,
Harness Side
FPRTN - Pin 2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 563
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Pin 5
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new FPDM. REFER to the FUEL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB38 DTC P1234: IS DTC P1234 PRESENT IN THE KOEO SELF-TEST?
NOTE:
The Mustang 5.4L is equipped with 2 FPDMs. The DTC P1234 applies to the
FPDM2 mounted on the passenger side of the luggage compartment.
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P1234 present?
Yes
GO to KB39.
No
The PCM is now receiving a signal from FPDM2.
One possible cause of DTC P1234 is that the IFS
switch was tripped, then reset.
GO to KB49.
KB39 CHECK THE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS TO THE FPDM2
FPDM2 connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM2
( - ) FPDM2
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR Fuel 2 - PWRGND - Pin
Pin 5
3
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
To check the FPM2 circuit,
GO to KB45.
No
GO to KB40.
KB40 CHECK VOLTAGE TO FPDM2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 564
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM2
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR Fuel 2 Ground
Pin 5
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
REPAIR the open circuit. The FPDM2 ground
circuit is open.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
There is no voltage to the FPDM2.
GO to KB41.
KB41 CHECK THE B+ VOLTAGE TO THE FPDM2 POWER SUPPLY RELAY
Key in OFF position.
FPDM2 PWR Relay connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM2
PWR Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
B+ - Pin 3
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
No
A B+ circuit concern is present. CHECK the
condition of the related fuse/fuse links. If OK,
REPAIR the open circuit. If the fuse/fuse link is
damaged, CHECK the circuit for a short to ground
before installing a new fuse/fuse link.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KB42.
KB42 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE FPDM2 POWER SUPPLY RELAY
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM2
PWR Relay
Connector,
(-)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 565
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KB43.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB43 CHECK FOR GROUND TO THE FPDM2 POWER SUPPLY RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM2
PWR Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
GND - Pin 2
Ground
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KB44.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB44 CHECK THE VPWR FUEL 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( - ) FPDM2
PWR Relay
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR Fuel 2 - VPWR Fuel 2 Pin 5
Pin 5
( + ) FPDM2
Connector,
Harness Side
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new FPDM2 PWR relay. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KB49.
KB45 CHECK THE FPM2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 566
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
FPDM2 connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM2
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPM2 - Pin 1
FPM2
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KB46.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB46 CHECK THE FPM2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM2
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPM2 - Pin 1
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KB47.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB47 CHECK THE FPM2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM2
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPM2 - Pin 1
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 567
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to KB48.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB48 CHECK FOR FPM2 OUTPUT FROM THE FPDM2
NOTE:
It is OK for the voltage to cycle below this range and then return within range.
FPDM2 connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FPM2
Ground
Is the voltage between 0.02 - 1 V?
Yes
GO to KB64.
No
INSTALL a new FPDM2. REFER to the FUEL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KB49 CHECK CIRCUITS THAT MAY CAUSE AN INTERMITTENT LOSS OF VOLTAGE SUPPLY TO THE
FPDM2
NOTE:
Be aware that P1234 could be set if the IFS switch is tripped then reset.
NOTE:
With no concern present, the FPDM2 sends a 50% duty cycle (all OK) to the
PCM on the FPM2 circuit. Depending on the scan tool type, the FPM2 PID may
display 50%, or a random value that is fluctuating between 85% and 115%.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FPM2 PID.
Observe the FPM2 PID for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following:
Shake, wiggle, and bend the PWRGND circuit to the FPDM2
Shake, wiggle, and bend the VPWR fuel 2 circuit to the FPDM2
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FPM2 circuit between the FPDM2 and the PCM
Shake, wiggle, and bend the B+ and ground circuits to the FPDM2 power supply relay
Lightly tap on the IFS switch to simulate road shock
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 568
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Lightly tap on the FPDM2 to simulate road shock
Lightly tap on the FPDM2 power supply relay to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KB50 DTC P1236: IS DTC P1236 PRESENT IN THE KOEO SELF-TEST?
The Mustang 5.4L is equipped with 2 FPDMs. The DTC P1236 applies to the FPDM2 mounted on the
passenger side of the luggage compartment.
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P1236 present?
Yes
GO to KB51.
No
GO to KB55.
KB51 CHECK THE FPC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
FPDM2 connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) FPDM2
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FPC
FPC - Pin 6
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KB52.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB52 CHECK THE FPC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
FPDM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 569
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) FPDM2
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FPC - Pin 6
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KB53.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB53 CHECK THE FPC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM2
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPC - Pin 6
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KB54.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB54 CHECK THE FPC CIRCUIT IN THE FPDM2
FPDM2 connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FPC
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KB64.
No
INSTALL a new FPDM2. REFER to the FUEL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION -
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 570
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KB55 CHECK THE FPC CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT OPEN OR SHORTS
NOTE:
With no concern present, the FPDM2 sends a 50% duty cycle (all OK) to the
PCM on the FPM2 circuit. Depending on the scan tool type, the FPM2 PID may
display 50%, or a random value that is fluctuating between 85% and 115%.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FPM2 PID.
Observe the FPM2 PID for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following:
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FPC circuit between FPDM2 and the PCM
Lightly tap on the FPDM2 to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KB56 DTC P1238: IS DTC P1238 PRESENT IN THE KOEO SELF-TEST?
NOTE:
The Mustang 5.4L is equipped with 2 FPDMs. The DTC P1238 applies to the
FPDM2 mounted on the passenger side of the luggage compartment.
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P1238 present?
Yes
GO to KB57.
No
CHECK for an intermittent concern,
GO to KB63.
KB57 CHECK THE FP2PWR, FP2RTN AND INTERNAL FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Key in OFF position.
FPDM2 connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM2
( - ) FPDM2
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FP2PWR - Pin 4 FP2RTN - Pin 2
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 571
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance less than 10 ohms?
Yes
No
ISOLATE the concern,
GO to KB62.
GO to KB58.
KB58 CHECK THE FP2PWR AND FP2RTN CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
FP connector disconnected. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for schematic and connector
information.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FPDM2
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FP2PWR - Pin 4 Ground
FP2RTN - Pin 2 Ground
Are the voltages less than 1 V?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KB59.
KB59 CHECK THE FP2PWR AND FP2RTN CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM2
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FP2PWR - Pin 4 Ground
FP2RTN - Pin 2 Ground
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KB60.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 572
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KB60 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN THE FP2PWR AND FP2RTN CIRCUITS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FPDM2
( - ) FPDM2
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FP2PWR - Pin 4 FP2RTN - Pin 2
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KB61.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KB61 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE FP
NOTE:
During output test mode, the fuel pump stays commanded on for only about 5
seconds.
FPDM2 connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FP
( - ) FP
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FP2PWR
FP2RTN
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
No
VERIFY the vehicle battery was at a proper charge
during the test.
VERIFY the pump ON command did not time out
INSTALL a new FP. REFER to the FUEL TANK
before the voltage check was made. REPEAT as
AND LINES - GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- Enecessary.
SERIES .
If OK, INSTALL a new FPDM2. REFER to the
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
FUEL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 573
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KB62 ISOLATE THE OPEN CIRCUIT
FP connector disconnected. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for schematic and connector
information.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP
( - ) FPDM2
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FP2PWR
FP2PWR - Pin 4
FP2RTN
FP2RTN - Pin 2
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FP
Connector,
Component
Side
FP2PWR
( - ) FP
Connector,
Component
Side
FP2RTN
Is the resistance less than 10 ohms?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. If the open is internal to
the pump, INSTALL a new FP. REFER to the
FUEL TANK AND LINES - GASOLINE AND
DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KB63 CHECK THE FP2PWR AND FP2RTN CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT OPEN OR SHORTS
NOTE:
With no concern present, the FPDM2 sends a 50% duty cycle (all OK) to the
PCM on the FPM2 circuit. Depending on the scan tool type, the FPM2 PID may
display 50%, or a random value that is fluctuating between 85% and 115%.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the FPM2 PID.
Observe the FPM2 PID for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following:
Shake, wiggle, and bend the FP2PWR and FP2RTN circuits between the FPDM2 and the FP
Lightly tap on the FP and FPDM2 to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 574
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KB64 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST KD: ELECTRIC EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EEGR) SYSTEM
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
EEGR system
EEGR stepper motor (9D475)
harness circuits: EGRMC1, EGRMC2, EGRMC3, EGRMC4 and VPWR
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 575
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 178: Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Assembly Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
6
4
3
1
5
2
Circuit
EGRMC4 (EGR Motor Control 4)
EGRMC3 (EGR Motor Control 3)
EGRMC2 (EGR Motor Control 2)
EGRMC1 (EGR Motor Control 1)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
Fig. 179: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
1
4
2
Circuit
MAP (Manifold Absolute Pressure)
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
VREF (Reference Voltage)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
Focus
Connector
150 (50-50-50) Pin
190 Pin
Pin
B35
E11
E10
E9
E8
B67
E56
Circuit
VPWR
EGRMC4
EGRMC3
EGRMC2
EGRMC1
VPWR
EGRMC4
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:05 AM
Page 576
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Ranger
170 Pin
All other vehicles
140 Pin
E54
E37
E36
B35
E56
E39
E13
E8
B51
E9
E8
E7
E6
EGRMC3
EGRMC2
EGRMC1
VPWR
EGRMC4
EGRMC3
EGRMC2
EGRMC1
VPWR
EGRMC4
EGRMC3
EGRMC2
EGRMC1
KD1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0400, P0403, or P1408 present?
Yes
For DTCs P0400 and P1408, GO to KD9.
For DTC P0403, GO to KD2.
No
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
KD2 DTC P0403: EGR CONTROL CIRCUIT - CHECK THE CONNECTION OF THE EEGR HARNESS
CONNECTOR TO THE EEGR
NOTE:
If the DTC is intermittent, wiggle the harness and connectors when taking
measurements.
Check the connection of the EEGR harness connector to the EEGR.
Are the connector contacts clean and correctly seated?
Yes
GO to KD3.
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KD3 CHECK FOR VPWR AT THE EEGR HARNESS CONNECTOR
Key ON, engine OFF.
EEGR Assembly connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) EEGR
Assembly
Connector,
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 577
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 2
VPWR - Pin 5
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Are the voltages greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KD4.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KD4 CHECK THE EEGR CIRCUIT(S) FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) EEGR
Assembly
Connector,
Harness Side
EGRMC1 - Pin
1
EGRMC2 - Pin
3
EGRMC3 - Pin
4
EGRMC4 - Pin
6
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
EGRMC1
EGRMC2
EGRMC3
EGRMC4
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KD5.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KD5 CHECK THE EEGR CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) EEGR
Assembly
Connector,
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 578
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Harness Side
EGRMC1 - Pin
1
EGRMC2 - Pin
3
EGRMC3 - Pin
4
EGRMC4 - Pin
6
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KD6.
KD6 CHECK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN CIRCUITS IN THE EEGR HARNESS
NOTE:
Refer to the PCM connector pin numbers in the beginning of this pinpoint test.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
EGRMC3
EGRMC3
EGRMC3
EGRMC1
EGRMC1
EGRMC2
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
EGRMC1
EGRMC2
EGRMC4
EGRMC2
EGRMC4
EGRMC4
Are the resistances greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KD7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KD7 CHECK THE EEGR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 579
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) EEGR
Assembly
Connector,
Harness Side
EGRMC1 - Pin
1
EGRMC2 - Pin
3
EGRMC3 - Pin
4
EGRMC4 - Pin
6
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Negative
terminal
Are the voltages greater than 0.1 V?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KD8.
KD8 CHECK THE EEGR COILS FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) EEGR
Assembly
Connector,
Component
Side
EGRMC1 - Pin
1
EGRMC2 - Pin
3
EGRMC3 - Pin
4
EGRMC4 - Pin
6
( - ) EEGR
Assembly
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR - Pin 2
VPWR - Pin 2
VPWR - Pin 5
VPWR - Pin 5
Are the resistances between 15 - 24 ohms?
Yes
GO to KD12.
No
INSTALL a new EEGR assembly.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 580
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KD9 DTCS P0400 AND P1408: CHECK FOR STUCK OR STICKY EGR VALVE OPERATION BY COMPARING
ACTUAL MAP VOLTAGE TO MAP PID VOLTAGE
NOTE:
Repair the following DTCs first, if present: P0102, P0103, P0107, P0108, P1100,
P1101.
Key in OFF position.
MAP Sensor connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point B MAP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
VREF - Pin 2 VREF - Pin 2
SIGRTN - Pin 4 SIGRTN - Pin 4
Point A MAP
Sensor
Connector,
Harness Side
Key ON, engine running.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MAP
Sensor
Connector,
Component
Side
MAP - Pin 1
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage between 1 - 2 V?
Yes
GO to KD10.
No
CHECK the MAP harness for open and short
circuits.
KD10 COMPARE ACTUAL MAP VOLTAGE TO MAP PID VOLTAGE EGR
Key in OFF position.
Remove the jumper wires.
MAP Sensor connected.
Record the actual MAP voltage values at KOEO, idle, 1,000 and 2,000 RPM.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 581
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the MAP PID.
Note the MAP PID voltage.
Key ON, engine running.
Note the MAP PID voltage.
Increase engine speed to 1,000 RPM.
Note the MAP PID voltage.
Increase engine speed to 2,000 RPM.
Note the MAP PID voltage.
Does the MAP PID voltage stay within 0.5 V of the actual MAP voltage?
Yes
The concern is not present at this time.
Make sure the MAP sensor is correctly seated and
the vacuum source is not blocked.
No
GO to KD11.
KD11 CARRY OUT THE KOER SELF-TEST
Is DTC P1408 retrieved again?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new EEGR assembly.
REFER toNO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL CODES (DTCS) PRESENT SYMPTOM
- E-SERIES .
CHART INDEX .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KD12 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 582
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST KE: IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
idle air control (IAC) valve (9F715)
harness circuits: IAC, PWR and B+ (IAC-RC)
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 180: Idle Air Control (IAC) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
1
Circuit
IAC (Idle Air Control)
PWR (POWER)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
Ranger
Connector
150 (50-50-50) Pin
170 Pin
Pin
E39
E33
Circuit
IAC
IAC
KE1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0505, P0506, P0507, P0511, P1504, P1506, or P1507 present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 583
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
For DTCs P0505, P0506, P0511, P1504 or P1507,
GO to KE2.
For DTCs P0507 or P1506, GO to KE15.
No
For all other symptoms without DTCs, GO to KE2.
KE2 DTCS P0505, P0506, P0511, P1504 OR P1507: CHECK FOR INLET AIR LEAKS (OR STARTS ONLY AT PART
THROTTLE)
With the engine running at idle (if possible), listen for vacuum leaks.
Inspect the entire intake air system from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor to the intake manifold for leaks
such as:
damaged or loose IAC air tubes.
cracked or punctured intake air tube.
loose intake air tube at the air cleaner housing or throttle body.
IAC valve or gasket seal.
EGR valve gasket seal.
vacuum supply connector and hose.
PCV valve, connectors and hoses.
Are any leaks present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KE3.
KE3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE IAC SOLENOID
NOTE:
If EGR DTC P0402 is output during the self-test, diagnose it first before
continuing with this pinpoint test.
IAC connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) IAC
Connector,
Harness Side
PWR - Pin 1
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 584
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KE4.
KE4 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE IAC VALVE
Key in OFF position.
IAC connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IAC
Connector,
Component
Side
PWR - Pin 1
( - ) IAC
Connector,
Component
Side
IAC - Pin 2
Is the resistance between 6 ohms - 15 ohms?
Yes
GO to KE5.
No
INSTALL a new IAC valve. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KE5 CHECK THE IAC VALVE FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO THE IAC CASE
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IAC
Connector,
Component
Side
IAC - Pin 2
( - ) IAC
Connector,
Component
Side
IAC Case
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KE6.
No
INSTALL a new IAC valve. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KE6 CHECK THE IAC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
IAC connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 585
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) IAC
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
IAC - Pin 2
IAC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
For IAC-RC applications, GO to KE7.
For all others, GO to KE8.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KE7 CHECK IAC-RC FOR VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
IAC-RC
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KE8.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KE8 CHECK THE IAC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
IAC
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 586
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KE9.
KE9 CHECK THE IAC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
IAC
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KE10.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KE10 CHECK FOR A DROP IN IDLE RPM WITH THE IAC DISCONNECTED
PCM connector connected.
IAC connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature.
Transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL.
Disconnect the IAC valve.
Does the RPM drop or the engine stall?
Yes
GO to KE12.
No
GO to KE11.
KE11 CHECK FOR A STUCK IAC PINTLE
Key in OFF position.
Inspect the entire intake air system for debris, blockage or other damage.
Remove and inspect the IAC valve and check the pintle movement.
Check the air tubes (if equipped) for blockage or damage.
Remove and inspect the air cleaner element for excessive dirt.
Is the IAC valve OK?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 587
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
INSTALL a new IAC valve. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KE12.
KE12 VERIFY THE DTC
Is DTC P0511 or P1504 present in continuous memory or from the KOER self-test?
Yes
GO to KE22.
No
GO to KE13.
KE13 CHECK THE IAC SIGNAL FROM THE PCM
NOTE:
If stalling occurs, place a shim under the hard stop screw to maintain idle
conditions.
NOTE:
With the engine at normal operating temperature, closed throttle and all
accessories off, the IAC duty cycle should be between approximately 22% and
65%.
PCM connector connected.
IAC connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the IAC PID.
Slowly increase the engine speed to 3,000 RPM and return to closed throttle. (Note: If closed throttle
RPM is significantly higher than normal, ignore this step).
Is the percentage between 22 - 65%?
Yes
GO to KE14.
No
INSTALL a new IAC valve. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KE14 VERIFY THE DTC
Is DTC P0506, P0511, P1504 or P1507 present in continuous memory?
Yes
No
INSPECT the throttle body for damage. REPAIR as
necessary. If OK, INSTALL a new IAC valve.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 588
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES . RESET the keep alive memory (KAM).
REFER toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE
MEMORY (KAM) .
GO to KE20.
KE15 DTCS P0507 OR P1506: CHECK FOR INLET AIR LEAKS
Key ON, engine running.
With the engine running at idle, listen for vacuum leaks.
Inspect the entire intake air system from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor to the intake manifold for leaks
such as:
damaged or loose IAC air tubes.
cracked or punctured intake air tube.
loose intake air tube at the air cleaner housing or throttle body.
IAC valve or gasket seal.
EGR valve gasket seal.
vacuum supply connector and hose.
PCV valve, connectors and hoses.
Are any leaks present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KE16.
KE16 CHECK FOR EVAP DTCS
NOTE:
EVAP system malfunctions can cause IAC DTCs or idle speed concerns.
Are any EVAP DTCs present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to KE17.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
KE17 CHECK THE IAC VALVE FOR CORRECT FUNCTION
Key ON, engine running.
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature.
Transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 589
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Disconnect the IAC Valve.
Does the RPM drop or the engine stall?
Yes
GO to KE18.
No
INSPECT the throttle body for damage. REPAIR as
necessary. If OK, INSTALL a new IAC valve.
REFER to the ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROLS - GASOLINE ENGINES -- ESERIES . RESET the keep alive memory (KAM).
REFER toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE
MEMORY (KAM) .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KE18 CHECK THE IAC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
Refer to the PCM connector pin numbers in the beginning of this pinpoint test.
Key in OFF position.
Scan tool connector disconnected.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
IAC
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KE19.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KE19 VERIFY THE SYMPTOM
Is a fast idle symptom currently present?
Yes
GO to KE22.
No
GO to KE20.
KE20 CHECK THE IAC SYSTEM FOR AN INTERMITTENT OPEN OR SHORT
PCM connector connected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 590
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the IAC PID.
Access the PCM and monitor the RPM PID.
With the engine at normal operating temperature, closed throttle and all accessories off, the IAC duty
cycle should be between approximately 22% and 65%.
Observe the PIDs while carrying out the following at idle:
Lightly tap on the and wiggle the harness connector to simulate road shock.
Grasp the vehicle harness closest to the IAC valve. Shake and bend a small section of the harness
from the IAC to the bulkhead and from the bulkhead to the PCM.
Do the IAC or RPM PIDs suddenly change in value, indicating a concern?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern. REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KE21.
KE21 VERIFY THE SYMPTOM
Is an idle quality, starting or stalling symptom currently present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IAC valve. REFER to the
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS GASOLINE ENGINES -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
RETURN toNO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODES (DTCS) PRESENT SYMPTOM
CHART INDEX to diagnose fast idle concerns.
KE22 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 591
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
PINPOINT TEST KF: FAN CONTROL (FC) RELAYS
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
LFC, MFC, HFC relays
harness circuits: HFC, LFC, MFC, VPWR
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Although the PCM output circuits are called low, medium and high fan control (FC), cooling fan operation is
controlled by a combination of these outputs.
Refer toENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS .
Fig. 181: Low Fan Control (LFC) Relay Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
1
Circuit
LFC (Low Fan Control)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
NOTE: The VPWR and LFC circuits may be reversed in the harness connector. Also, the LFC circuit may be
wired to 2 separate relays. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for additional information.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 592
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 182: Medium Fan Control (MFC) Relay Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
1
Circuit
MFC (Medium Fan Control)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
NOTE: The VPWR and MFC circuits may be reversed in the harness connector. Also, the MFC circuit may be
wired to 2 separate relays. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for additional information.
Fig. 183: High Fan Control (HFC) Relay Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
Circuit
HFC (High Fan Control)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 593
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
1
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
NOTE: The VPWR and HFC circuits may be reversed in the harness connector. Also, the HFC circuit may be
wired to 2 separate relays. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article for additional information.
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner 2.3L
Focus
Mustang
Ranger
All other vehicles
Pin
Circuit
B38
B17
B39
B18
B34
E4
E7
E7
B38
B39
HFC
MFC
LFC
HFC
LFC
HFC
LFC
LFC
HFC
LFC
KF1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0480, P0481, P0482, P1474, P1477 or P1479 present?
Yes
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0480 or P1474, GO
to KF3.
For continuous memory DTCs P0480 or P1474, GO
to KF36.
For DTCs P0481, P0482, P1477 or P1479, GO to
KF2.
No
For fans always on: components, GO to KF47.
For fans always on: all others, GO to KF46.
For cooling fan circuits, GO to KF47.
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
KF2 DTCS P0481, P0482, P1477 OR P1479: CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF THESE DTCS
Are DTCs P0481, P0482, P1477, or P1479 present? P0481 or P1479.
Yes
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0481 or P1479,
Escape 3.0L, Mariner 3.0L.
GO to KF27.
For continuous memory DTCs P0481 or P1479,
Escape 3.0L, Mariner 3.0L.
GO to KF44.
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0481 or P1479, all
others,
GO to KF13.
No
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0482 or P1477,
Focus,
GO to KF18.
For continuous memory DTCs P0482 or P1477,
Focus,
GO to KF42.
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0482 or P1477, all
others,
GO to KF8.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 594
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
For continuous memory DTCs P0481 or P1479, all For continuous memory DTCs P0482 or P1477, all
others,
others,
GO to KF38.
GO to KF40.
KF3 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0480 OR P1474: CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE LOW SPEED FC
RELAY
LFC Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) LFC Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KF4.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF4 CHECK FOR LFC CIRCUIT CYCLING
Key ON, engine OFF.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) LFC Relay ( - ) LFC Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 LFC - Pin 2
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Command the high speed fan ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Does the test lamp illuminate on and off when either the low or high speed cooling fan output is
commanded on and off?
Yes
INSTALL a new LFC relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KF5.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 595
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KF5 CHECK THE LFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Remove the test lamp.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) LFC Relay
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
LFC - Pin 2
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KF6.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF6 CHECK THE LFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) LFC Relay
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
LFC - Pin 2
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KF7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF7 CHECK THE LFC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) LFC Relay
( - ) PCM
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
LFC - Pin 2
LFC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 596
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to KF59.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF8 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0482 OR P1477: CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE MEDIUM SPEED FC
RELAY
MFC Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MFC
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KF9.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF9 CHECK FOR MFC CIRCUIT CYCLING
Key ON, engine OFF.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) MFC
( - ) MFC Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 MFC - Pin 2
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Command the high speed fan ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Does the test lamp illuminate on and off when either the low or high speed cooling fan output is
commanded on and off?
Yes
INSTALL a new MFC relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
No
GO to KF10.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 597
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPEAT the self-test.
KF10 CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Remove the test lamp.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MFC
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
MFC - Pin 2
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KF11.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF11 CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MFC
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
MFC - Pin 2
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KF12.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF12 CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MFC
Relay
( - ) PCM
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:06 AM
Page 598
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MFC - Pin 2
MFC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KF59.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF13 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0481 OR P1479: CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH SPEED FC
RELAY
HFC Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) HFC
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KF14.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF14 CHECK FOR HFC CIRCUIT CYCLING
Key ON, engine OFF.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) HFC
( - ) HFC Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 HFC - Pin 2
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Command the high speed fan ON.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 599
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Command the outputs OFF.
Does the test lamp illuminate on and off when either the low or high speed cooling fan output is
commanded on and off?
Yes
INSTALL a new HFC relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KF15.
KF15 CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Remove the test lamp.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) HFC
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
HFC - Pin 2
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KF16.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF16 CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HFC
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
HFC - Pin 2
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KF17.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 600
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KF17 CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HFC
( - ) PCM
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
HFC - Pin 2
HFC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KF59.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF18 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0482 OR P1477: CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE MFC1 RELAY
NOTE:
This application has 2 relays wired to the MFC circuit. This procedure may call
out MFC1 and MFC2 relays. Either of the relays may be used as the number 1,
with the other relay being number 2.
MFC1 Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MFC1
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KF19.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF19 CHECK FOR MFC CIRCUIT CYCLING
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) MFC1
Relay
( - ) MFC1
Relay
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 601
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
MFC
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Command the high speed fan ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Does the test lamp illuminate on and off when either the low or high speed cooling fan output is
commanded on and off?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new MFC1 relay at the end of
diagnostics. Leave the relay disconnected. CLEAR Leave the test lamp connected.
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KF20.
GO to KF24.
KF20 CHECK FOR MFC CIRCUIT CYCLING WITH THE MFC2 RLY DISCONNECTED
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) MFC1
( - ) MFC1
Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
MFC
MFC2 Relay connector disconnected.
Command the low speed fan ON.
Command the high speed fan ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Does the test lamp illuminate on and off when either the low or high speed cooling fan output is
commanded on and off?
Yes
INSTALL a new MFC2 relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KF21.
KF21 CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 602
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) MFC1
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
MFC
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KF22.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF22 CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MFC1
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
MFC
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KF23.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF23 CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MFC1
( - ) PCM
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
MFC
MFC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KF59.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 603
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KF24 VERIFY THERE IS NOT AN OPEN IN THE CIRCUIT SPECIFIC TO THE MFC2 RELAY
Access the PCM and monitor the MFC_F PID.
Command the high speed fan ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Command the low speed fan ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Does the PID indicate a concern (yes) when either the high or low speed cooling fan output is
commanded on and off?
Yes
GO to KF25.
No
INSTALL a new MFC relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF25 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE MFC2 RELAY
MFC2 Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) MFC2
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KF26.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF26 CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE MEDIUM SPEED FC RELAY(S)
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) MFC1
( - ) MFC2
Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
MFC
MFC
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 604
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new MFC relay(s).
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF27 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P0481 OR P1479: CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE HFC1 RELAY
NOTE:
This application has 2 relays wired to the HFC circuit. This procedure may call
out HFC1 and HFC2 relays. Either of the relays may be used as the number 1,
with the other relay being number 2.
HFC1 Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) HFC1
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KF28.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF28 CHECK FOR HFC CIRCUIT CYCLING
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) HFC1
( - ) HFC1
Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
HFC
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Command the high speed fan ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Does the test lamp illuminate on and off when either the low or high speed cooling fan output is
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 605
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
commanded on and off?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new HFC1 relay at the end of
diagnostics. Leave the relay disconnected. CLEAR Leave the test lamp connected.
the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KF29.
GO to KF33.
KF29 CHECK FOR HFC CIRCUIT CYCLING WITH THE HFC2 RLY DISCONNECTED
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) HFC1
( - ) HFC1
Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
HFC
HFC2 Relay connector disconnected.
Command the low speed fan ON.
Command the high speed fan ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Does the test lamp illuminate on and off when either the low or high speed cooling fan output is
commanded on and off?
Yes
INSTALL a new HFC2 relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KF30.
KF30 CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) HFC1
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
HFC
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 606
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KF31.
KF31 CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HFC1
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
HFC
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KF32.
KF32 CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HFC1
( - ) PCM
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
HFC
HFC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KF59.
KF33 VERIFY THERE IS NOT AN OPEN IN THE CIRCUIT SPECIFIC TO THE HFC2 RELAY
Access the PCM and monitor the HFC_F PID.
Command the high speed fan ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Command the low speed fan ON.
Command the outputs OFF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 607
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Does the PID indicate a concern (yes) when either the high or low speed cooling fan output is
commanded on and off?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new HFC1 relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KF34.
KF34 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO HFC2 RLY
HFC2 Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) HFC2
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KF35.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF35 CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE HIGH SPEED FC RELAY(S)
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) HFC1
( - ) HFC2
Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
HFC
HFC
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new HFC relay(s).
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF36 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0480 OR P1474: CHECK THE LFC CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT
OPEN OR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 608
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
If the test lamp does not turn on, command the high speed fan on.
A/C and defrost off.
Left Fan Motor connector disconnected.
Right Fan Motor connector disconnected.
LFC Relay connector disconnected.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) LFC Relay ( - ) LFC Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 LFC - Pin 2
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following. Note that the lamp
turns off when a concern is detected.
Shake, wiggle, and bend the LFC circuit(s).
Shake, wiggle, and bend the VPWR circuit to the LFC relay.
Inspect the LFC relay component for signs of damage.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KF37.
KF37 CHECK THE LFC CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT SHORT TO GROUND
Key ON, engine OFF.
Command the outputs OFF.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following. Note that the lamp
turns on when a concern is detected.
Shake, wiggle, and bend the LFC circuit
Lightly tap on the LFC RLY to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 609
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KF38 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0481 OR P1479: CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT
OPEN OR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE:
If the test lamp does not turn on, command the low speed fan ON.
A/C and defrost off.
Left Fan Motor connector disconnected.
Right Fan Motor connector disconnected.
HFC Relay connector disconnected.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) HFC
( - ) HFC Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 HFC - Pin 2
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the high speed fan ON.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following. Note that the lamp
turns off when a concern is detected.
Shake, wiggle, and bend the HFC circuit(s)
Shake, wiggle, and bend the VPWR circuit to the HFC relay
Lightly tap on the HFC RLY to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KF39.
KF39 CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT SHORT TO GROUND
Key ON, engine OFF.
Command the outputs OFF.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern. Note that the lamp illuminates when a concern is
detected. Wiggle, shake, and bend the HFC circuit(s). Shake, wiggle, and bend the PCM on both high
speed FC relays.
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 610
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KF40 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0482 OR P1477: CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT
OPEN OR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE:
If the test lamp does not turn on, command the high speed fan on.
A/C and defrost off.
Left Fan Motor connector disconnected.
Right Fan Motor connector disconnected.
MFC Relay connector disconnected.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) MFC
( - ) MFC Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 MFC - Pin 2
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following. Note that the lamp
turns off when a concern is detected.
Shake, wiggle, and bend the MFC circuit(s).
Shake, wiggle, and bend the VPWR circuit to the MFC relay.
Inspect the MFC RLY component for signs of damage.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KF41.
KF41 CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT SHORT TO GROUND
Key ON, engine OFF.
Command the outputs OFF.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern. Note that the lamp illuminates when a concern is
detected. Wiggle, shake, and bend the HFC circuit(s). Shake, wiggle, and bend the PCM on both high
speed FC relays.
Is a concern present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 611
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KF42 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0482 OR P1477: CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT
OPEN OR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE:
This application has 2 relays wired to the MFC circuit. This procedure may call
out MFC1 and MFC2 relays. Either of the relays may be used as the number 1,
with the other relay being number 2.
NOTE:
If the test lamp does not turn on, command the high speed fan ON.
AC and defroster OFF.
Left Fan Motor connector disconnected.
Right Fan Motor connector disconnected.
MFC1 Relay connector disconnected.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) MFC1
( - ) MFC1
Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
MFC
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following. Note that the lamp
turns off when a concern is detected.
Shake, wiggle, and bend the MFC circuit between the PCM and both medium speed FC relays
Shake, wiggle, and bend the VPWR circuit to both medium speed FC relays
Lightly tap on the medium speed FC relay that is still connected to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KF43.
KF43 CHECK THE MFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 612
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key ON, engine OFF.
Command the outputs OFF.
Exit output test mode.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern. Note that the lamp illuminates when a concern is
detected. Wiggle, shake, and bend the MFC circuit(s).
Inspect the medium speed FC relay that is disconnected for intermittent concerns.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KF44 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0481 OR P1479: CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT
OPEN OR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE:
This application has 2 relays wired to the HFC circuit. This procedure may call
out HFC1 and HFC2 relays. Either of the relays may be used as the number 1,
with the other relay being number 2.
NOTE:
If the test lamp does not turn on, command the high speed fan ON.
A/C and defroster OFF.
Left Fan Motor connector disconnected.
Right Fan Motor connector disconnected.
HFC1 Relay connector disconnected.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) HFC1
( - ) HFC1
Relay
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
HFC
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following. Note that the lamp
turns off when a concern is detected.
Shake, wiggle, and bend the PCM and both high speed FC relays.
Shake, wiggle, and bend the VPWR circuit to both high speed FC relays
Lightly tap on the high speed FC relay that is still connected to simulate road shock
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 613
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KF45.
KF45 CHECK THE HFC CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Command the outputs OFF.
Exit output test mode.
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern. Note that the lamp illuminates when a concern is
detected. Wiggle, shake, and bend the HFC circuit(s) between the PCM and on both high speed FC
relays.
Inspect the high speed FC relay that is disconnected for intermittent concerns.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KF46 THE COOLING FAN ALWAYS RUNS (NO DTCS): VERIFY THE FAN IS NOT ON BECAUSE OF A/C HIGH
PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT TO THE PCM
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACP PID.
Is the PID state CLOSED?
Yes
The PCM turns the fan on when the medium
pressure, normally open contacts of the ACHP
switch are closed.
GO to KF57.
No
The input is OK.
GO to KF47.
KF47 COOLING FAN CONCERN (NO DTCS): CHECK THE FAN CONTROL PRIMARY CIRCUITS
NOTE:
Chose the PIDs below as appropriate, according to which circuits the vehicle
has.
Verify that the A/C is OFF.
Verify engine temperature is below the temperature where the cooling fan comes on.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the LFC_F, MFC_F and HFC_F PIDs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 614
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Does either PID indicate a concern?
Yes
A concern is present in the primary circuit(s).
GO to KF48.
No
For all except Ranger, the PCM primary circuit(s) is
OK.
To check for secondary wiring,
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- ESERIES , for cooling system diagnosis.
For Ranger:
GO to KF50.
KF48 DOES THE LFCF PID INDICATE A CONCERN?
Does the LFCF PID indicate a concern?
Yes
The low fan control (LFC) circuitry has a primary
circuit concern.
GO to KF3.
No
GO to KF49.
KF49 DOES THE MFCF PID INDICATE A CONCERN?
Does the MFCF PID indicate a concern?
Yes
The medium fan control (MFC) primary circuitry
has a circuit concern.
For Focus, GO to KF18.
For all others, GO to KF8.
No
The high fan control (HFC) primary circuitry has a
circuit concern.
For Escape 3.0L, and
Mariner 3.0L, GO to KF27.
For all others, GO to KF13.
KF50 IS THE SYMPTOM: COOLING FAN ALWAYS RUNS?
Is the symptom: cooling fan always runs?
Yes
GO to KF56.
No
GO to KF51.
KF51 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN CONCERN (WITH NO DTCS): ELECTRIC COOLING FAN FUNCTIONAL
CHECK
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Does the fan operate?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 615
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
All cooling fan circuit checks are OK. RETURN to
the SYMPTOM CHARTS article, Symptom
GO to KF52.
Charts to continue diagnosis.
No
KF52 FAN INOPERATIVE: COMMAND THE LOW SPEED FAN ON AND CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE CF
Key in OFF position.
CF Motor connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CF Motor
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
FAN PWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KF53.
No
GO to KF54.
KF53 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT TO THE COOLING FAN
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CF Motor
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
GND
Ground
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new CF motor. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF54 CHECK THE B+ VOLTAGE TO THE FC RELAY
FC Relay connector disconnected.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 616
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) FC Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
B+
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KF55.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. There is a B+ circuit
concern. CHECK the condition of the related
fuse/fuse links. If OK, REPAIR the open circuit. If
the fuse/fuse link is damaged, CHECK the circuit
for a short to ground before replacing the fuse/fuse
link.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KF55 CHECK THE FAN PWR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) FC Relay ( - ) CF Motor
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FAN PWR
FAN PWR
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new FC relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KF56 CHECK FOR FC RLY CONTACTS ALWAYS CLOSED
NOTE:
Verify the A/C and defrost are off.
FC Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Does the fan run with the key in the ON position?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit to PWR. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new FC relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 617
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KF57 CHECK THE A/CHPSW (MEDIUM PRESSURE, NORMALLY OPEN CONTACTS)
A/CHPSW connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACP PID.
Is the PID state CLOSED?
Yes
GO to KF58.
No
CONNECT the A/CHPSW. REFER to the
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS -- ESERIES , to diagnose the A/C system pressure. If
OK, INSTALL a new A/CHPSW.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KF58 CHECK THE A/CPSW CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) A/CHPSW
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
A/CPSW
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
VERIFY the results of the previous test steps.
RETURN to the SYMPTOM CHARTS article,
Symptom Charts to continue diagnosis.
No
REPAIR the short circuit to GND. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KF59 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 618
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST KG: FUEL INJECTOR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
fuel injector(s) (9F593)
harness circuits: VPWR and INJ 1 - 10
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 184: Injector (INJ) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
All other vehicles
Connector
A
A
Pin
2
1
1
2
Circuit
INJ
VPWR
INJ
VPWR
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
E-Series 6.8L,
F-Super Duty 6.8L
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
E52
E35
E53
Circuit
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 619
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Edge,
F-150 4.2L,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner 3.0L
Escape/Mariner 2.3L
Expedition,
Navigator
Explorer 4.0L,
Explorer Sport Trac
4.0L,
Mountaineer 4.0L,
Mustang 4.0L,
Ranger 4.0L,
Ranger 3.0L
F-150 4.6L,
F-150 5.4L,
Mark LT
E36
E54
E37
E55
E38
E56
E39
190 Pin
E52
E35
E53
E36
E54
E37
150 (50-50-50) E2
Pin
E5
E13
E4
E3
E15
150 (50-50-50) E2
Pin
E3
E4
E5
140 Pin
E52
E35
E53
E36
E54
E37
E55
E38
170 Pin
E52
E35
E53
E36
E54
E37
190 Pin
INJ4
INJ5
INJ6
INJ7
INJ8
INJ9
INJ10
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ5
INJ6
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ5
INJ6
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ5
INJ6
INJ7
INJ8
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ5
INJ6
E52
E35
E53
E36
E54
E37
E55
E38
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ5
INJ6
INJ7
INJ8
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:07 AM
Page 620
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Focus
190 Pin
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L,
MKZ
140 Pin
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
140 Pin
Ranger 2.3L
170 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
E1
E2
E3
E4
E52
E35
E53
E36
E54
E37
E52
E35
E53
E36
E52
E35
E53
E36
E52
E35
E53
E36
E54
E37
E55
E38
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ5
INJ6
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ1
INJ2
INJ3
INJ4
INJ5
INJ6
INJ7
INJ8
KG1 DTCS P0201 THROUGH P0210 OR SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS: CHECK THE VPWR CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
Disconnect the suspect fuel injector harness connector. Only the suspect
injector needs to be diagnosed.
NOTE:
On some vehicles, the injector voltage is only present when the fuel pump relay
is energized. Measure the injector voltage within 2 seconds of the key ON.
Key in OFF position.
INJ connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) INJ
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 621
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KG2.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KG2 CHECK THE INJ CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) INJ
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
Suspect INJ
INJ
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KG3.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KG3 CHECK THE INJ CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) INJ
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
INJ
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KG4.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KG4 CHECK THE INJ CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 622
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) INJ
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
INJ
Ground
Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KG5.
KG5 CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE FUEL INJECTOR
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) INJ
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR
( - ) INJ
Connector,
Component
Side
INJ
Is the resistance between 11 - 18 ohms?
Yes
GO to KG6.
No
INSTALL a new fuel injector. REFER to the FUEL
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION GASOLINE AND DIESEL -- E-SERIES .
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) . REPEAT the self-test.
KG6 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE INJ CIRCUIT
PCM connector connected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) INJ
( - ) INJ
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
VPWR
INJ
Key ON, engine running.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 623
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the test lamp blinking?
Yes
GO to KG7.
No
GO to KG8.
KG7 CARRY OUT A THOROUGH WIGGLE TEST ON THE FUEL INJECTOR HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
INJ connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Engine at normal operating temperature.
Access the PCM and monitor the INJ_F PID.
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the fuel injector to the
PCM.
Are any injector values fluctuating in and out of range?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KG8 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST KJ: SUPERCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 624
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
supercharger bypass actuator
vacuum hoses
KJ1 CHECK FOR DTCS
NOTE:
DTCs P1227 and P1228 are for informational purposes only and are usually
accompanied by other DTCs. If concerns are present with the mass air flow
(MAF) sensor, the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve, or the manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor, DTCs P1227 or P1228 may be set. Diagnose all
other DTCs before diagnosing DTCs P1227 or P1228.
Are DTCs P1227, or P1228 present?
Yes
GO to KJ2.
No
For lack/loss of power, GO to KJ3.
For all other symptoms without DTCs, GO to KJ2.
KJ2 DTCS P1227 OR P1228: VERIFY THE DTC
Record and clear the DTCs.
Drive the vehicle at normal operating temperature with the engine exceeding 2,000 RPM.
Check for DTCs.
Are any other DTCs present?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to KJ4.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
KJ3 CHECK THE IAT2 PID
WARNING: To avoid personal injury do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap
while the engine is operating or hot. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is
loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the IAT2 PID.
Is the temperature greater than 110°C (230°F)?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 625
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CHECK for low fluid level in the charge air cooler
(CAC) system. CHECK for damaged CAC lines.
GO to KJ4.
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- ESERIES , Supercharger Cooling to diagnose a loss
of coolant.
KJ4 CHECK THE SUPERCHARGER BYPASS ACTUATOR VACUUM HOSES
NOTE:
For vehicle specific vacuum hose routing, refer to the VECI label located in the
front of the engine compartment.
Check for holes, cracks, bends or kinks in the vacuum lines going to the supercharger bypass actuator.
Check for any disconnected hoses at the supercharger bypass actuator.
Are any concerns present?
Yes
REPAIR or INSTALL new vacuum lines as
necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KJ5.
KJ5 CHECK THE BYPASS VALVE ACTUATOR
NOTE:
Additional DTCs may set as a result of disconnecting the vacuum line in this
step.
Visually inspect the bypass valve actuator for damage.
Key in OFF position.
Note the position of the supercharger bypass actuator linkage.
Key ON, engine running.
Note the position of the supercharger bypass actuator linkage.
Disconnect the supercharger bypass actuator upper vacuum hose.
Does the supercharger bypass actuator linkage move when the engine is started, and return to the
original position when the supercharger bypass actuator vacuum line is disconnected?
Yes
No
The concern is not present at this time. RETURN
INSTALL a new supercharger bypass actuator.
toNO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(DTCS) PRESENT SYMPTOM CHART INDEX CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
to diagnose lack/loss of power concerns.
PINPOINT TEST KM: AIR CONDITIONING CLUTCH (A/CC) RELAY CIRCUIT
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 626
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
A/CC relay
harness circuits: VPWR, A/CCR, A/CCS
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 185: Air Conditioning Clutch (A/CC) Relay Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 186: Air Conditioning Clutch (A/CC) Relay Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 627
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 187: Air Conditioning Clutch (A/CC) Relay Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Expedition,
F-150,
Mark LT,
Navigator
Focus
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
C
Pin
Circuit
1
2
A/CCR
VPWR
2
1
1
2
A/CCR
VPWR
A/CCR
VPWR
The VPWR and A/CCR circuits may be reversed in the harness connector. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams article
for additional information.
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
E-Series,
F-Super Duty
Edge,
F-150,
Mark LT,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
Expedition,
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
Circuit
E3
A/CCR
190 Pin
B18
A/CCR
150 (50-50-50) Pin
140 Pin
B25
B18
A/CCR
A/CCR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 628
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Navigator
Focus
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
All other vehicles
190 Pin
140 Pin
B2
B64
A/CCR
A/CCR
170 Pin
B14
A/CCR
KM1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Are DTCs P0534, P0645, P1460, P1464 or P1469 present?
Yes
No
For KOEO and KOER DTCs P0645 or P1460, GO
to KM2.
For continuous memory DTCs P0645 or P1460, GO
For all others, GO toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
to KM10.
CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For KOEO and KOER DTC P1464, GO to KM8.
For continuous memory DTCs P0534 or P1469, GO
to KM12.
KM2 KOEO AND KOER DTCS P1460 OR P0645: VERIFY THAT THE ACCS PID IS OFF
NOTE:
Verify the A/C and the defrost are off during KOEO/KOER self-tests. If the
vehicle is not equipped with A/C, the A/CCR circuit is not used and DTC
P1460/P0645 can be ignored.
Key ON, engine running.
A/C and defroster OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACCS PID.
Is the PID state OFF?
Yes
GO to KM3.
No
REFER to the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS -- E-SERIES and diagnose the air
conditioning (A/C) is inoperative/does not operate
correctly symptom.
KM3 CHECK THE VPWR VOLTAGE TO THE A/CC RELAY
Key in OFF position.
A/CC Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 629
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) A/CC
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KM4.
No
REPAIR the open circuit.
START the engine. TURN on the A/C switch.
WAIT for 15 seconds. TURN off the A/C switch.
REPEAT the self-test.
KM4 CHECK THE A/CC RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Carry out the A/CC relay component test. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams Cell 149 Component Testing.
Does the A/CC relay pass the component test?
Yes
GO to KM5.
No
INSTALL a new A/CC relay.
START the engine. TURN on the A/C switch.
WAIT for 15 seconds. TURN off the A/C switch.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KM5 CHECK THE A/CCR (WAC) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) A/CC
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
A/CCR
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KM6.
No
REPAIR the short circuit.
START the engine. TURN on the A/C switch.
WAIT for 15 seconds. TURN off the A/C switch.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 630
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPEAT the self-test.
KM6 CHECK THE A/CCR (WAC) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) A/CC
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
A/CCR
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KM7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit.
START the engine. TURN on the A/C switch.
WAIT for 15 seconds. TURN off the A/C switch.
REPEAT the self-test.
KM7 CHECK THE A/CCR (WAC) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) A/CC
( - ) PCM
Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
A/CCR
A/CCR
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KM14.
No
REPAIR the open circuit.
START the engine. TURN on the A/C switch.
WAIT for 15 seconds. TURN off the A/C switch.
REPEAT the self-test.
KM8 KOEO AND KOER DTC P1464: VERIFY THE A/C AND DEFROST ARE OFF DURING THE SELF-TEST
Verify the A/C and defrost are off during the self-test.
Are the A/C and defrost off during the self-test?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 631
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
GO to KM9.
No
Turn the A/C and defrost off.
REPEAT the self-test where DTC P1464 was
retrieved.
KM9 CHECK THE ACCS PID
Key ON, engine OFF.
A/C and defroster OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACCS PID.
Is the PID state ON?
Yes
No
The ACCS PID indicates the PCM is being
requested to turn the A/C on. REFER to the
The ACCS PID indicates that the ACCS input to the
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL
PCM is low. VERIFY the test step results. Turn off
INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSTICS -- Ethe A/C and defrost. REPEAT the self-test.
SERIES and diagnose the air conditioning (A/C) is
inoperative/does not operate correctly symptom.
KM10 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P1460 OR P0645: CHECK THE A/CCR (WAC) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT
TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with A/C, the A/CCR circuit is not used and the
P1460/P0645 can be ignored.
NOTE:
The A/C clutch clicks on when a concern is present.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Check the A/CCR (WAC) circuit for short to ground while carrying out the following:
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the component to
the module
Lightly tap on the A/CC relay to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. START the engine. TURN on
the A/C switch. WAIT for 15 seconds. TURN off
the A/C switch. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KM11.
KM11 CHECK THE A/CCR (WAC) FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT TO VOLTAGE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 632
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
The A/C clutch clicks off if a concern is present.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Check the A/CCR (WAC) circuit for an open or short to voltage while carrying out the following:
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the component to
the module
Lightly tap on the A/CC relay to simulate road shock
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. START the engine. TURN on
the A/C switch. WAIT for 15 seconds. TURN off
the A/C switch. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KM12 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTCS P0534 OR P1469: CHECK FOR CAUSES OF FAST A/CCS CYCLING
Check the following:
A/C system pressure
A/CCS cycle times
REFER to the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION AND
DIAGNOSTICS -- E-SERIES and diagnose the air conditioning (A/C) is inoperative/does not operate
correctly symptom.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
No
GO to KM13.
KM13 CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT OPEN IN THE A/CCS CIRCUIT
NOTE:
The ACCS PID turns off and on quickly when a concern is present, indicating an
intermittent open.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the ACCS PID.
Turn on the A/C switch.
Check the A/CCR (WAC) circuit for an open or short to voltage while carrying out the following:
Wiggle, shake, and bend small sections of the wiring harness while working from the component to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 633
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
the module.
Lightly tap on the pressure switch (PS) (to simulate road shock).
Inspect the A/CCS connector.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. START the engine. TURN on
the A/C switch. WAIT for 15 seconds. TURN off
the A/C switch. REPEAT the self-test.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KM14 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST KN: VARIABLE SPEED ELECTRIC COOLING FAN
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
variable speed electric cooling fan (8T00)
harness circuits: FCV, B+, GND
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 634
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 188: Cooling Fan (CF) Motor Connector (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
4
2
1
Circuit
FCV (Fan Control Variable)
GND (Ground)
B+ (Battery Positive Voltage)
Fig. 189: Cooling Fan (CF) Motor Connector (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
1
2
Circuit
GND (Ground)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
Town Car
Connector
170 Pin
Pin
E7
Circuit
FCV
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 635
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
All other vehicles
140 Pin
B8
FCV
190 Pin
B48
FCV
KN1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Is DTC P0480 or P0483 present?
Yes
No
For KOEO and KOER DTC P0480, GO to KN2.
For electric cooling fan(s) does not operate (low,
For continuous memory DTC P0480, GO to KN9.
medium, high or variable speed), GO to KN11.
For continuous memory DTC P0483, GO to KN15.
KN2 KOEO AND KOER DTC P0480: CHECK THE B+ AND GND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
CF Module connector disconnected.
Rotate the fan by hand. The fan should rotate freely, with no abnormal binding. If binding is present,
remove any foreign materials or install a new fan assembly as required.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CF
( - ) CF Module
Module
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
B+ - Pin 1
GND - Pin 2
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KN4.
No
GO to KN3.
KN3 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE COOLING FAN MODULE USING GROUND AS A REFERENCE
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CF
Module
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
B+ - Pin 1
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 636
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Yes
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
A B+ circuit concern is present. CHECK the
condition of the related fuse/fuse links. If OK,
REPAIR the open circuit. If the fuse/fuse link is
damaged, CHECK the circuit for a short to ground
before installing a new fuse/fuse link.
KN4 CHECK THE FCV CIRCUIT(S)
Connect the 1.6K ohms resistor between the FCV and B+ circuits at the CF module harness connector
(this simulates cooling fan circuitry).
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P0480 present?
Yes
No
For Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis, and
Town Car, GO to KN5.
For all others, INSTALL a new CF module. REFER
to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to KN6.
KN5 CHECK THE COOLING FAN OPERATION
CF Motor connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A 12 Volt
Vehicle Battery
Positive
terminal
Point B CF
Motor
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR - Pin 2
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A Vehicle
Battery
Negative
Point B CF
Motor
Connector,
Component
Side
GND - Pin 1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 637
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
terminal
Does the cooling fan motor operate correctly?
Yes
INSTALL a new CF module. REFER to the
ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES .
No
INSTALL a new Cooling Fan. REFER to the
ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES .
KN6 CHECK THE FCV CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CF
Module
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FCV - Pin 4
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to KN7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KN7 CHECK THE FCV CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CF
Module
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FCV - Pin 4
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KN8.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 638
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KN8 CHECK FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE PCM AND COOLING FAN MODULE
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM ( - ) CF Module
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
FCV
FCV - Pin 4
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KN16.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KN9 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P0480: CHECK THE B+ AND GND CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERMITTENT
CONCERN
Key in OFF position.
CF Module connector disconnected.
Rotate the fan by hand. The fan should rotate freely, with no abnormal binding. If binding is present,
remove any foreign materials or install a new fan assembly as required.
Connect a non-powered test lamp between:
( + ) CF
( - ) CF Module
Module
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
B+ - Pin 1
GND - Pin 2
Observe the test lamp for an indication of a concern while carrying out the following. Note that the lamp
turns off when a concern is present.
Shake, wiggle, and bend the B+ and GND circuits to the CF
Shake, wiggle, and bend the associated fuse
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KN10.
KN10 CHECK THE FCV CIRCUIT(S) FOR INTERMITTENT CONCERNS
Connect the 1.6 K ohms resistor between the FCV and B+ circuits at the CF harness connector (this
simulates cooling fan circuitry).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 639
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CF
Module
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
FCV - Pin 4
Ground
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the low speed fan ON.
Observe the digital multimeter (DMM) for an indication of a concern while shaking, wiggling, and
bending the FCV circuit between the CF module and the PCM. Note that voltage changes suddenly when
a concern is detected.
Command the outputs OFF.
Exit output test mode.
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
KN11 COOLING FAN MOTOR DOES NOT OPERATE (WITH NO DTCS): COMMAND THE FAN ON TO CHECK
OPERATION
Carry out the KOEO self-test.
Listen to the fan.
Does the fan operate sometime during the KOEO self-test?
Yes
The concern is elsewhere. RETURN toNO
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
PRESENT SYMPTOM CHART INDEX for
further direction.
No
GO to KN12.
KN12 CHECK THE B+ AND GND CIRCUITS TO THE COOLING FAN MODULE
Key in OFF position.
CF Module connector disconnected.
Rotate the fan by hand. The fan should rotate freely, with no abnormal binding. If binding is present,
remove any foreign materials or install a new fan assembly as required.
Measure the voltage between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 640
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) CF
( - ) CF Module
Module
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
B+ - Pin 1
GND - Pin 2
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
No
For Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis, and
Town Car, GO to KN13.
GO to KN14.
For all others, INSTALL a new CF module. REFER
to the ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KN13 CHECK THE COOLING FAN OPERATION
CF Motor connector disconnected.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A 12 Volt
Vehicle Battery
Positive
terminal
VPWR - Pin 2
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Point B CF
Motor
Connector,
Component
Side
Point B CF
Motor
Connector,
Component
Side
GND - Pin 1
Does the cooling fan motor operate correctly?
Yes
INSTALL a new CF module. REFER to the
ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES .
No
INSTALL a new Cooling Fan. REFER to the
ENGINE COOLING -- E-SERIES .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:08 AM
Page 641
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KN14 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE COOLING FAN MODULE USING GROUND AS A REFERENCE
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CF
Module
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
B+ - Pin 1
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
No
A B+ circuit concern is present. CHECK the
condition of the related fuse/fuse links. If OK,
REPAIR the open circuit. If the fuse/fuse link is
damaged, CHECK the circuit for a short to ground
before installing a new fuse/fuse link.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KN15 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P0483: CHECK FOR A COOLING FAN MOTOR OBSTRUCTION OR A
COOLING FAN MOTOR MECHANICAL FAILURE
Is a cooling fan motor obstruction or a cooling fan motor mechanical failure present?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
the self-test.
KN16 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 642
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Replacement PCM.
PINPOINT TEST KP: CHARGE AIR COOLER (CAC) PUMP
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
CAC pump relay (14B192)
CAC pump (8501)
harness circuits: CAC, VPWR and GND
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 190: Charge Air Cooler (CAC) Pump Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
2
1
Circuit
GND (Ground)
PUMPPWR (Pump Power)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 643
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 191: Powertrain Control Module Power (PCM Power) Relay Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
Circuit
5
3
2
1
PUMPPWR (Pump Power)
B+ (Battery Positive Voltage)
CAC (Charge Air Cooler)
VPWR (Vehicle Power)
Pin
Circuit
E64
CAC (Charge Air Cooler)
KP1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Is DTC P1229 present?
Yes
For DTC P1229, GO to KP2.
No
For a boost gauge indicates higher than normal
boost, GO to KP9.
KP2 DTC P1229: CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE CAC PUMP RELAY COIL
Key in OFF position.
CAC Relay connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CAC
Relay
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 644
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VPWR - Pin 1 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KP3.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KP3 CHECK THE CAC PUMP RELAY
Key in OFF position.
Remove the relay from the power distribution box.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CAC
Relay
Connector,
Component
Side
CAC - Pin 2
( - ) CAC Relay
Connector,
Component
Side
VPWR - Pin 1
Is the resistance between 65 - 100 ohms?
Yes
GO to KP4.
No
INSTALL a new CAC relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KP4 CHECK THE CAC PUMP RELAY
Carry out the CAC pump relay component test. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams Cell 149 Component
Testing.
Does the CAC pump relay pass the component test?
Yes
GO to KP5.
No
INSTALL a new CAC relay. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KP5 CHECK FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE PCM AND THE CAC RELAY
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 645
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) PCM ( - ) CAC Relay
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
CAC - Pin E64 CAC - Pin 2
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KP6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KP6 CHECK FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE PCM AND THE CAC RELAY
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
CAC - Pin E64
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the voltage less than 0.5 V?
Yes
GO to KP7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit to PWR. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KP7 CHECK BETWEEN THE PCM AND THE CAC RELAY FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
CAC - Pin E64
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to KP8.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 646
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
KP8 CHECK THE SCICP PID
PCM connector connected.
Access the PCM and monitor the SCICP PID.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Is the SCICP PID on?
Yes
No
If the CAC reservoir is full, there is no air flow
blockage at the CAC radiator, the IAT2 and
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
connecting circuits are not high resistance or open,
time.
CAC hoses are not reversed and DTC P1229 is
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
present in KOEO and KOER,
GO to KP15.
KP9 CHECK THE CAC FOR MECHANICAL OPERATION
Key ON, engine OFF.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Observe the CAC pump.
Command the outputs OFF.
Does the CAC pump run?
Yes
CHECK for low fluid level in the CAC system.
CHECK for cracked or incorrectly routed CAC lines
or airflow blockage at the CAC radiator. REPAIR
the system as necessary. If the symptom still exists,
GO to KP10.
RETURN toNO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODES (DTCS) PRESENT SYMPTOM
CHART INDEX to diagnose boost gauge indicates
higher than normal boost.
No
KP10 CHECK THE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS AT THE CAC PUMP
Charge Air Cooler (CAC) Pump connector disconnected.
Enter output test mode. Refer toOUTPUT TEST MODE (OTM) .
Command the outputs ON.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Charge
( - ) Charge Air
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 647
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Air Cooler
Cooler (CAC)
(CAC) Pump
Pump
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
PUMPPWR GND - Pin 2
Pin 1
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new Charge Air Cooler (CAC) Pump.
REFER to the ENGINE COOLING -- ESERIES , Supercharger Cooling.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to KP11.
KP11 CHECK THE CAC VOLTAGE CIRCUIT TO GND
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) Charge
Air Cooler
( - ) Vehicle
(CAC) Pump
Battery
Connector,
Harness Side
PUMPPWR - Negative
Pin 1
terminal
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KP12.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KP12 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE CAC PUMP GROUND CONNECTION
Charge Air Cooler (CAC) Pump connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) Charge
Air Cooler
(CAC) Pump
Connector,
Harness Side
GND - Pin 2
( - ) Vehicle
Battery
Negative
terminal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 648
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to KP13.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KP13 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE CAC PUMP RELAY
CAC Relay connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CAC
Relay
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
B+ - Pin 3
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to KP14.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CHECK the fuses.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
KP14 CHECK FOR AN OPEN CAC PUMP CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CAC
Relay
Connector,
Harness Side
PUMPPWR Pin 5
( - ) Charge Air
Cooler (CAC)
Pump
Connector,
Harness Side
PUMPPWR Pin 1
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new CAC pump relay.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
KP15 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 649
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
PINPOINT TEST NC: IGNITION ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650).
NC1 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P0320: ERRATIC IGNITION
Verify all 2-way radio installations. Carefully follow the manufacturer's installation instructions regarding
the routing of the antenna and voltage leads.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to NC2.
NC2 NO START CONCERN
Is the customer complaint no start?
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST A.
No
GO to NC3.
NC3 INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Is this an intermittent condition?
Yes
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST JD.
PINPOINT TEST ND: ENGINE RPM\VEHICLE SPEED LIMITER REACHED
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 650
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
NOTE:
Enter this pinpoint test only when directed here.
ND1 DTCS P0219, P0297 OR P1270: EXCESSIVE ENGINE RPM OR VEHICLE SPEED
P0219 (engine over speed), P0297 (vehicle over speed) or P1270 DTCs indicate the vehicle was operated
in a manner which caused the engine or vehicle speed to exceed a calibrated limit.
Excessive engine RPM in NEUTRAL or operated in the wrong transmission gear.
Excessive wheel slippage (water, ice, mud or snow).
Vehicle driven at a high rate of speed.
Was the vehicle operating in any of the above conditions?
Yes
No
REFER toNO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODES (DTCS) PRESENT SYMPTOM
The on-board diagnostics (OBD) system is OK.
CHART INDEX .
RETURN the vehicle to customer with information
If there are no other symptoms, RETURN the
about the DTC.
vehicle to the customer with information about the
DTC.
PINPOINT TEST QA: UNABLE TO ACTIVATE SELF-TEST/NETWORK COMMUNICATION
ERROR
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
unable to communicate with PCM
unable to activate the PCM self-test.
incorrect self-test procedure
harness circuits: ISP-R, PCMRC, PWRGND and VPWR
VREF INFORMATION TABLE
Application
Edge/MKX
Escape/Mariner
Expedition/Navigator
Focus
Fusion/Milan/MKZ
Ranger
Taurus/Taurus X/Sable
All Others
Engine
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
Measure the PCM VREF at:
ETBTPS
TP Sensor or FRPT
ETBTPS
ETBTPS
ETBTPS
TP Sensor
ETBTPS
FRPT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 651
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 192: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 193: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 652
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 194: Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
E-Series 4.6L,
Edge,
F-150 4.2L,
F-150 4.6L,
Focus,
MKX,
MKZ,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Fusion 2.3L,
Milan 2.3L
Fusion 3.0L,
Milan 3.0L
All other vehicles
Connector
A
B
B
C
Pin
Circuit
2
3
ETCRTN
ETCREF
3
5
4
5
3
2
ETCRTN
ETCREF
ETCRTN
ETCREF
ETCRTN
ETCREF
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 653
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 195: Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Pin
4
2
Circuit
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
VREF (Reference Voltage)
Fig. 196: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 654
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 197: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner 2.3L,
Ranger 2.3L
All other vehicles
Vehicle
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
Expedition,
Navigator
Explorer,
Explorer Sport Trac,
Mountaineer,
Mustang
F-150,
Mark LT
F-Super Duty
Connector
A
B
Connector
190 Pin
Pin
Circuit
1
3
3
1
SIGRTN
VREF
SIGRTN
VREF
Pin
B67, B68, B69, B70
B51, B52, B53
B8
B7
Circuit
PWRGND
VPWR
PCMRC
ISP-R
150 (50-50-50) Pin B47, B48, B49, B50
B35, B36
140 Pin
B67, B68, B69, B70
B51, B52, B53
B8
B7
170 Pin
B47, B48, B49, B50
B35, B36
B37
B46
190 Pin
B67, B68, B69, B70
B51, B52, B53
B40
B17
170 Pin
B47, B48, B49, B50
PWRGND
VPWR
PWRGND
VPWR
PCMRC
ISP-R
PWRGND
VPWR
PCMRC
ISP-R
PWRGND
VPWR
PCMRC
ISP-R
PWRGND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 655
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Focus
190 Pin
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ
140 Pin
All other vehicles
170 Pin
B35, B36
B37
B31
B69, B70
B67, B68
B38
B42
B67, B68, B69
B51, B52
B35
B37
B47, B48, B49, B50
B35, B36
VPWR
PCMRC
ISP-R
PWRGND
VPWR
PCMRC
ISP-R
PWRGND
VPWR
PCMRC
ISP-R
PWRGND
VPWR
QA1 CARRY OUT A VEHICLE INSPECTION AND VERIFY THE SELF-TEST PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If the self-test or communication concern occurred after a failed or an aborted
reprogram, the module may be blank. Attempt to reprogram the module again
before continuing with this pinpoint test.
Visually inspect the following for obvious signs of electrical damage:
harness wiring
electrical connections
Verify the correct procedure was used to activate the self-test for the scan tool. Refer toSCAN TOOL
SETUP AND FUNCTIONALITY .
Was the correct self-test procedure used?
Yes
GO to QA2.
No
REFER toSCAN TOOL SETUP AND
FUNCTIONALITY .
QA2 CARRY OUT THE NETWORK TEST
Key ON, engine OFF.
Carry out the network test.
Do all modules indicate pass?
Yes
REFER to Symptom Charts, PINPOINT TEST
QT .
No
If only PCM indicates fail, GO to QA3.
For network test or all other modules indicates fail,
REFER to the MODULE COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK -- E-SERIES to diagnose The
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Does Not
Respond To The Scan Tool Or No High Speed
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 656
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
Communication Symptom.
QA3 CHECK FOR VREF VOLTAGE AT A SENSOR
NOTE:
PCM voltage and ground can be determined by measuring VREF voltage at a
sensor. Refer to the VREF Information Table at the beginning of this pinpoint
test for the vehicle application and the applicable sensor to test.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the applicable sensor.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between the applicable sensor VREF circuit, harness side and the applicable sensor
SIGRTN circuit, harness side.
Is the voltage between 4.5 - 5.5 V?
Yes
REFER to the MODULE COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK -- E-SERIES to diagnose The
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Does Not
Respond To The Scan Tool Or No High Speed
Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
Communication Symptom.
No
For Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
E-Series,
Escape/Mariner,
Ranger, and
Town Car, GO to QA6.
For all others, GO to QA4.
QA4 CHECK THE ISP-R VOLTAGE AT THE PCM HARNESS CONNECTOR
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
ISP-R
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to QA5.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 657
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
QA5 CHECK THE PCM VPWR CIRCUITS FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the PCM.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A PCM
Point B
Connector,
Harness Side
PCMRC
Ground
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Are the voltages greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to QA7.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST B.
QA6 CHECK THE PCM VPWR CIRCUITS FOR VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect the PCM.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Are the voltages greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to QA7.
No
refer to PINPOINT TEST B.
QA7 CHECK THE PCM GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 658
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
PWRGND
Ground
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to QA8.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
QA8 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the network test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST QB: DTCS P0603 OR P1633: KEEP ALIVE POWER (KAPWR)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
battery terminal condition
KAPWR wire routing
harness circuit: KAPWR
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 659
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Vehicle
Edge,
F-150,
Mark LT,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
Expedition,
Fusion,
Milan,
MKZ,
Navigator
Focus
All other vehicles
Connector
190 Pin
Pin
Circuit
B54
KAPWR
150 (50-50-50) Pin B45
140 Pin
B54
KAPWR
KAPWR
190 Pin
170 Pin
B62
B45
KAPWR
KAPWR
QB1 CHECK THE 12-VOLT BATTERY TERMINALS
NOTE:
If the KAPWR is interrupted to the PCM when a breakout box is installed or the
battery is disconnected, DTC P0603/P1633 can be generated on the first powerup.
NOTE:
If DTC P0603 occurred right after or during an unsuccessful reprogramming of
the PCM, clear the DTCs and repeat the PCM self-test. If DTC P0603 is retrieved
again, continue with this pinpoint test.
Inspect the 12-volt battery cables for loose connections and for corrosion.
Are the 12-volt battery terminal connections in good condition?
Yes
No
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to QB2.
QB2 INSPECT THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR CORRECT WIRE ROUTING
Inspect the electronic engine control (EEC) system wiring for correct wire routing.
Check the wiring routing to establish if any of the electrical connectors are being stressed due to poorly
routed wiring. If necessary re-route and secure the wiring.
Visually inspect the wiring and connectors.
Is a concern present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 660
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
GO to QB3.
QB3 CHECK KAPWR TO THE PCM
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) 12 Volt
Connector,
Vehicle Battery
Harness Side
Negative
KAPWR
terminal
While observing the multimeter, grasp the EEC harness and wiggle, shake or bend a small section while
working from the battery to the PCM.
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to QB4.
No
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
QB4 CHECK FOR A REPEAT OF THE DTC
PCM connector connected.
Clear all DTCs that may have been caused by the PCM disconnect.
Test drive the vehicle and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
Carry out the PCM self-test.
Is DTC P0603 or P1633 present?
Yes
GO to QB5.
No
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
QB5 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 661
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST QC: DTC P1000: ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEMS READINESS TEST
NOT COMPLETE
NOTE:
Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P1000 indicates that all the OBD monitors have
not yet been successfully tested. In some areas, this DTC must be cleared to
pass an inspection/maintenance test. The customer should be informed that the
law specifies additional city and highway driving must be done to complete the
check of the OBD system. This additional driving must occur before the vehicle
is tested at the inspection/maintenance station. The amount of driving required
varies with individual driving patterns. To complete this requirement in the
shortest amount of time, refer toON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE CYCLE .
It is not necessary to clear DTC P1000 from the powertrain control module (PCM) by driving the vehicle unless
it is requested by the customer to pass an inspection/maintenance test.
The only way DTC P1000 can be removed from memory is when all the OBD monitors are successfully
completed.
DTC P1000 is set by the PCM under any of the following conditions.
The vehicle is new from the factory and has not yet completed an OBD drive cycle.
The battery or PCM is disconnected.
An OBD monitor concern occurred before completion of an OBD drive cycle.
The PCM DTCs have been cleared with a scan tool as part of a repair process.
The PCM has been flashed and the vehicle has not yet completed an OBD drive cycle.
DTC P1000 may not clear if the vehicle is equipped with a power take off (PTO) and the PTO is engaged
or damaged.
QC1 CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC P1000: CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTCS
NOTE:
Enter this pinpoint test only if DTC P1000 was retrieved from continuous
memory. Ignore DTC P1000 in KOEO or KOER memory.
DTC P1000 indicates all of the OBD monitors have not yet been successfully tested.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:09 AM
Page 662
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are any other DTCs received with P1000?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to QC2.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
QC2 CHECK FOR PTO
Is the vehicle equipped with PTO?
Yes
GO to QC3.
No
GO to QC4.
QC3 CHECK THE PTO PID
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the PTO PID.
Cycle the PTO switch/actuator ON and OFF. (Follow the PTO aftermarket instructions).
Does the PTO PID cycle ON and OFF?
Yes
GO to QC4.
No
GO to FB2.
QC4 REQUEST TO CLEAR DTC P1000
NOTE:
An entire OBD drive cycle has not yet been completed to clear DTC P1000 from
the PCM.
Has the customer requested DTC P1000 be cleared from the PCM memory?
Yes
CARRY OUT an OBD drive cycle. REFER toON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) DRIVE
CYCLE .
No
INFORM the customer that if the law in your area
requires additional driving in order to clear DTC
P1000 from the PCM memory, it must be completed
before an inspection/maintenance test.
PINPOINT TEST QD: DTC P1260: PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
NOTE:
The passive anti-theft system (PATS) uses radio frequency identification
technology to deter a drive away theft. Passive means that it does not require
any activity from the user. The PATS uses a specially encoded ignition key.
Each encoded ignition key contains a permanently installed electronic device
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 663
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
called a transponder. Each transponder contains a unique electronic
identification code. Each encoded ignition key must be programmed into the
vehicle before it can be used to start the engine. DTC P1260 is stored any time
the PCM disables the vehicle because of the PATS.
QD1 CHECK FOR PATS DTCS
Repair all PATS DTCs before P1260. Refer to the ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
(PATS) -- E-SERIES for System Description, Operation and Self-Test.
Are all PATS DTCs diagnosed?
Yes
No
REFER to the ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTITHEFT SYSTEM (PATS) -- E-SERIES to
diagnose any PATS related DTCs.
GO to QD2.
QD2 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER POWERTRAIN DTCS
Repair all powertrain DTCs other than P1260.
Are all other powertrain DTCs diagnosed?
Yes
No
DISREGARD DTC P1260. DIAGNOSE all other
powertrain DTCs. REFER toDIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CHARTS AND
DESCRIPTIONS .
GO to QD3.
QD3 ATTEMPT TO START THE ENGINE
Carry out a keep alive memory reset to clear DTC P1260. Refer toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE
MEMORY (KAM) .
Attempt to start the engine.
Does the engine start?
Yes
No system concerns exist at the present time. For
intermittent no start or start stalls, CHECK for
intermittent PATS concerns. (PATS cannot stall the
engine after 1 second of operation). For intermittent
stalls while driving, VERIFY scan tool-to-PCM
communication during the concern. If a PCM
communication error occurs, the possible causes
are: loss of PWR or GND to the PCM, damaged
PCM PWR relay, or a damaged EEC PWR diode.
REPAIR as necessary.
No
DTC P1260 is not the cause of the No Start. REFER
toNO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(DTCS) PRESENT SYMPTOM CHART
INDEX .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 664
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
PINPOINT TEST QE: ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) SYSTEM
NOTE:
Diagnose and repair the following DTCs throughDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
(DTC) CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS and the Workshop article respectively
before entering this pinpoint test:
P0715
P0720
P0731-P0735
P0102-P0104
P0321
C1165
U1027
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the informational powertrain control module (PCM) diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs).
The informational DTCs are the result of limited operating strategy (LOS) or failure mode effects management
(FMEM) operating strategy that maintains limited vehicle function in the event of a PCM, harness, or
component concern.
Circuit DTCs can be accompanied by the informational DTCs, and should be diagnosed first. Informational
DTCs without circuit DTCs may or may not indicate the actual concern and should be diagnosed as a symptom.
Fig. 198: EGR System Module (ESM) Connector
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 665
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Pin
Circuit
6
2
SIGRTN (Signal Return)
VREF (Reference Voltage)
QE1 CHECK FOR DTCS
NOTE:
For DTC P061B, make sure the air cleaner and air inlet are correctly seated and
properly installed before continuing diagnosis.
Are any DTCs present other than the following: P0600, P060A, P060B, P060C, P060D, P061B,
P061C, P061D, P061F, P062C, P1674, P2104, P2105, P2110, or U0300?
Yes
No
For Focus with DTC P0600, GO to QE2.
For all others with DTC P0600, GO to QE18.
For DTCs P060A, P060C, P060D, P061D, P1674 or
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code U0300, GO to QE2.
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO For DTC P060B, GO to QE3.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
For DTC P061B, GO to QE13.
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For DTC P061C, GO to QE5.
For DTC P061F, GO to QE7.
For DTCs P062C, P2104, P2105 or P2110, GO to
QE8.
QE2 DTCS P060A, P060C, P060D, P061D, P1674 OR U0300: CHECK THE PCM FOR THE LATEST CALIBRATION
Program the PCM to the latest calibration.
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Key in OFF position.
Key ON, engine running.
Use the customer information to recreate the concern.
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P060A, P060C, P060D, P061D, P1674 or U0300 present?
Yes
GO to QE18.
No
The concern is not present at this time.
QE3 DTC P060B: CHECK FOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CONCERNS
Inspect the PCM harness for damage.
Verify the correct operation of the sensors using ETCREF, VREF and related circuits. refer to
PINPOINT TEST C and follow the pinpoint test direction.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 666
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to QE4.
QE4 CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN
Clear the DTCs.
Carry out the self-test.
Is DTC P060B present?
Yes
GO to QE18.
No
The concern is not present at this time.
QE5 DTC P061C: CHECK THE CKP SENSOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Verify correct operation of the CKP sensor and related circuits. refer to PINPOINT TEST JD and follow
the pinpoint test direction.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to QE6.
QE6 CHECK THE CMP SENSOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Verify correct operation of the CMP sensor and related circuits. refer to PINPOINT TEST DR and
follow the pinpoint test direction.
Is a concern present?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to QE7.
QE7 DTC P061F: VERIFY THE CUSTOMER CONCERN
Clear the DTCs.
Use the customer information to recreate the concern.
Carry out the self-test.
Are DTCs P061C or P061F present?
Yes
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 667
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
GO to QE18.
The concern is not present at this time.
QE8 DTCS P062C, P2104, P2105 OR P2110: CHECK FOR DTCS IN OTHER VEHICLE MODULES
Check for self-test DTCs in all of the vehicle modules.
Are any DTCs present?
Yes
REFER to the applicable Workshop article part to
diagnose the DTC.
No
GO to QE9.
QE9 CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF ANY MODULE COMMUNICATION CONCERNS
Check for self-test DTCs in all of the vehicle modules.
Are any communication concerns or communication DTCs present?
Yes
For communication concerns in the PCM,
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
For communication concerns in other modules,
REFER to the applicable Workshop article part to
diagnose the communication DTC.
No
For DTC P062C, GO to QE16.
For DTC P2104, GO to QE10.
For DTC P2105, GO to QE11.
For DTC P2110, GO to QE15.
QE10 DTC P2104: CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF PCM DTCS
Clear the PCM DTCs.
Check for self-test DTCs.
Are any DTCs present other than P2104?
Yes
No
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
refer to PINPOINT TEST DK.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
QE11 DTC P2105: CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF PCM DTCS
NOTE:
P2105 may be set in combination with other DTCs. Diagnose other DTCs first.
Clear the PCM DTCs.
Check for self-test DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 668
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Are any DTCs present other than P2105?
Yes
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
GO to QE12.
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
No
QE12 CARRY OUT A VISUAL INSPECTION
Key in OFF position.
Visually inspect the following for obvious signs of damage:
ETB
PCM
Check the harness for routing, alterations, incorrect shielding, or electrical interference from other
systems. Make sure aftermarket wiring is not routed near the PCM.
Verify aftermarket equipment does not generate radio frequency interference/electromagnetic interference
(RFI/EMI).
Is a concern present?
Yes
ISOLATE the concern and REPAIR as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to QE18.
QE13 DTC P061B: CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF PCM DTCS
NOTE:
An intermittent CKP sensor or harness concern may cause DTC P061B to set.
Check for intermittent CKP sensor and harness concerns.
Clear the PCM DTCs.
Check for self-test DTCs.
Are any DTCs present other than P061B?
Yes
No
For Crown Victoria,
E-Series 4.6L,
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code Explorer 4.0L,
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO Explorer Sport Trac 4.0L,
F-150 4.2L,
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
F-150 4.6L,
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
F-Super Duty 6.8L,
Grand Marquis,
Mountaineer 4.0L,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 669
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Mustang 4.0L,
Mustang 5.4L, and
Town Car, GO to QE14.
For all others, CHECK for an intermittent concern
with an ETC related harness or sensor.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
QE14 CHECK THE MAP INPUT FOR AN OFFSET SIGNAL
Key in OFF position.
Allow the vehicle to cool down.
ESM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) ESM
Connector,
Component
Side
VREF - Pin 2
( - ) ESM
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN - Pin 6
Is the resistance greater than 2K ohms?
Yes
For Crown Victoria,
Grand Marquis,
Explorer 4.0L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.0L,
Mountaineer 4.0L, and
Town Car, GO to QE16.
For all others, CHECK for an intermittent concern
with an ETC related harness or sensor.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
INSTALL a new ESM.
REFER to the ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL - E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
QE15 DTC P2110: CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF PCM DTCS
NOTE:
P2110 sets in combination with other DTCs.
Clear the PCM DTCs.
Check for self-test DTCs.
Are any DTCs present other than P2110?
Yes
No
DISREGARD the current diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) at this time. DIAGNOSE the next DTC. GO
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 670
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
toDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
CHARTS AND DESCRIPTIONS .
GO to QE18.
QE16 CHECK FOR ABS AND WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CONCERNS
NOTE:
Refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article Reference Values for the typical
diagnostic reference values.
ESM connector connected.
Key ON, engine running.
Access the PCM and monitor the ISS_SRC, OSS_SRC and TSS PIDs.
Access the PCM and monitor the VSS PID.
Access the ABS and monitor the LF_WSPD, LR_WSPD, RF_WSPD and RR_WSPD PIDs.
Road test the vehicle under various load conditions while comparing the PIDs. Check for signals that are
intermittent or do not correspond.
Do the PID values correspond with the vehicle operating conditions?
Yes
For Explorer 4.0L,
Explorer Sport Trac 4.0L,
F-150 5.4L,
Mark LT, and
Mountaineer 4.0L, GO to QE17.
For all others, CHECK for an intermittent concern
with an ETC related harness or sensor.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
REFER to the VEHICLE DYNAMIC SYSTEMS
-- E-SERIES to diagnose any ABS concerns.
QE17 CHECK FOR A TRANSFER CASE MECHANICAL CONCERN
Stop the vehicle.
Select 4WD Low.
Does the vehicle shift into 4WD Low?
Yes
CHECK for an intermittent concern with an ETC
related harness or sensor.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
REFER to the AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION - 4R70E/4R75E
-- E-SERIES , Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Systems
to diagnose any transfer case concerns.
QE18 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 671
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST TA: CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
CPP (11A152/7C534)
harness circuits: CPP / CPP BT and SIGRTN / GND
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
Fig. 199: Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Connector - A
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 672
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 200: Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Connector - B
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Fig. 201: Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Connector - C
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 673
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Fig. 202: Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Connector - D
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
Connector
A
F-150
B
Mustang
C
Ranger
B
All other vehicles
D
Pin
2
4
2
1
2
1
5
6
2
1
Circuit
SIGRTN
CPP
GND
CPP
GND
CPP
GND
CPP
GND
CPP
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
Escape/Mariner
F-150
F-Super Duty
Focus
Fusion,
Milan
All other vehicles
Connector
Pin
150 (50-50-50) Pin B41, E41, T41
T27
190 Pin
B39
B58, E58, T43
170 Pin
B34
B41, E58, T41
190 Pin
T26
B58, E64, T40
140 Pin
B18
B58, E58
170 Pin
B41, E58, T41
B33
Circuit
SIGRTN
CPP
CPP-BT
SIGRTN
CPP-BT
SIGRTN
CPP-BT
SIGRTN
CPP-BT
SIGRTN
SIGRTN
CPP
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 674
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
TA1 DTC P0704, P0830: CHECK THE CPP SWITCH
WARNING: Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake
to reduce the risk of vehicle movement during this procedure. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
During self-test, the clutch pedal must be down and gearshift lever in
NEUTRAL.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Access the PCM and monitor the CPP PID.
Does the reading cycle when the CPP switch is activated?
Yes
This may be an intermittent circuit concern.
INSPECT connectors for signs of damage, water
intrusion, corrosion. REPAIR as necessary.
No
GO to TA2.
TA2 CHECK THE SWITCH CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
NOTE:
The CPP switch is located near the clutch pedal.
NOTE:
Measure the CPP switch resistance with the clutch pedal pressed down.
Inspect the switches and brackets for damage. Repair as necessary.
CPP Switch connector disconnected.
For Focus or Escape,
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CPP
Switch
Connector,
Component
Side
CPP
( - ) CPP
Switch
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
For all others,
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CPP
Switch
Connector,
Component
( - ) CPP
Switch
Connector,
Component
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 675
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Side
CPP
Side
GND
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to TA3.
No
INSTALL a new CPP switch. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
TA3 CHECK THE CPP FOR INTERNAL SHORTS
NOTE:
Measure the CPP switch resistance with the clutch pedal released.
For Focus or Escape,
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CPP
Switch
Connector,
Component
Side
CPP
For all others,
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CPP
Switch
Connector,
Component
Side
CPP
( - ) CPP
Switch
Connector,
Component
Side
SIGRTN
( - ) CPP
Switch
Connector,
Component
Side
GND
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
For Focus or Escape, GO to TA5.
For all others, GO to TA4.
No
INSTALL a new CPP switch. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
TA4 CHECK THE CPP AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 676
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
( + ) CPP
( - ) PCM
Switch
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side
Harness Side
CPP
CPP
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CPP
Switch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
GND
Ground
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to TA6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
TA5 CHECK THE CPP AND SIGRTN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
PCM connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
Harness Side
CPP
SIGRTN
( - ) CPP
Switch
Connector,
Harness Side
CPP
SIGRTN
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to TA6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
TA6 CHECK THE CPP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) CPP
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 677
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Switch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
CPP
Ground
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
GO to TA7.
No
REPAIR the short circuit to PWR. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TA7 CHECK THE CPP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) CPP
Switch
(-)
Connector,
Harness Side
CPP
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to TA8.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
TA8 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 678
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Replacement PCM.
PINPOINT TEST TB: TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS)/ TRANSMISSION CONTROL
INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
TCS
TCIL
harness circuits: TCS and TCIL
powertrain control module (PCM) (12A650)
For PCM connector views or reference values, refer to the REFERENCE VALUES article.
Vehicle
E-Series
Connector
170 Pin
Edge,
MKX,
Sable,
Taurus,
Taurus X
Escape/Mariner
F-150,
Mark LT
F-Super Duty
Focus
Fusion
All other vehicles
190 Pin
Pin
Circuit
B43
B27
B16
TCIL
TCS
TCS
150 (50-50-50) Pin B27
190 Pin
B45
170 Pin
190 Pin
140 Pin
170 Pin
TCS
TCS
B27
T30
B16
B29
TCS
TCS
TCS
TCS
TB1 CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)
Is DTC P1780 present?
Yes
GO to TB2.
No
For TCIL never on, GO to TB10.
For TCIL always on, GO to TB8.
TB2 DTC P1780: CHECK THE TCS FUNCTION
NOTE:
Verify the TCS was cycled during self-test.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 679
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Access the PCM and monitor the TCS PID.
Apply and release the TCS and then hold it applied for 3 seconds. Release the switch.
Does the TCS PID change from ON to OFF and does the PID indicate ON when the switch is
applied?
Yes
REPEAT the KOER self-test and cycle the TCS
during the test.
No
GO to TB3.
TB3 CHECK THE TCS VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
TCS
Ground
Monitor the voltage while applying and releasing the TCS several times.
Does the voltage change states?
Yes
GO to TB12.
No
GO to TB4.
TB4 CHECK THE TCS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
TCS connector disconnected.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
TCS
Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10K ohms?
Yes
GO to TB5.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 680
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
REPEAT the self-test.
TB5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TCS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) TCS
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
VPWR
Ground
Is the voltage greater than 10 V?
Yes
GO to TB6.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
TB6 CHECK THE TCS CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS
Key in OFF position.
Measure the resistance between:
( + ) PCM
( - ) TCS
Connector,
Connector,
Harness Side Harness Side
TCS
TCS
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to TB7.
No
REPAIR the open circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
TB7 CHECK THE TCS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS
Key ON, engine OFF.
Measure the voltage between:
( + ) TCS
Connector,
(-)
Harness Side
TCS
Ground
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 681
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Is the voltage less than 1 V?
Yes
INSTALL a new TCS.
REFER to the AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE/TRANSMISSION EXTERNAL
CONTROLS -- E-SERIES .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
TB8 TCIL ALWAYS ON: CHECK THE TCIL FUNCTION
Key ON, engine OFF.
Apply and release the TCS.
Does the TCIL change state?
Yes
Unable to duplicate or identify the concern at this
time.
refer to PINPOINT TEST Z.
No
GO to TB9.
TB9 CHECK THE TCIL CIRCUIT(S) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS
NOTE:
The TCIL turns off when the PCM is disconnected.
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Does the TCIL change state?
Yes
GO to TB12.
No
REPAIR the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
TB10 TCIL NEVER ON: CHECK FOR KOER P1780
Carry out the PCM KOER self-test.
Is DTC P1780 present?
Yes
REPAIR the DTC. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
GO to TB11.
GO to TB2.
No
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:10 AM
Page 682
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
TB11 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TCIL
Key in OFF position.
PCM connector disconnected.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Connect a 5 amp fused jumper wire between the following:
Point A PCM
Point B Vehicle
Connector,
Battery
Harness Side
Negative
TCIL
terminal
Does the TCIL illuminate?
Yes
GO to TB12.
No
CHECK the indicator bulb and the fuse. If OK, the
open is in the wiring between the ignition switch
and the TCIL pin at the harness connector. REPAIR
as necessary.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
TB12 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
Visually inspect for:
pushed out pins
corrosion
Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Carry out the PCM self-test and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER toFLASH
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE
PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY
(EEPROM) , Programming the VID Block for a
Replacement PCM.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The
concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
PINPOINT TEST Z: INTERMITTENT
WARNING: Crown Victoria Police Interceptor vehicles equipped with fire suppression
system, refer to part 419-03 for Important Safety Warnings. Failure to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 683
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose and isolate intermittent concerns for the following:
all electronic engine control (EEC) subsystems
This chart is used to determine which test to run for the suspect circuit. PIDs corresponding to each circuit are
listed. Some circuits do not have an associated PID or the PID may not be available and has to be measured
with a digital multimeter (DMM). More specific information on the PID can be found. If the vehicle has a coil
pack system with a no start condition, carry out the ignition test.
PCM PIDS/SIGNALS
PCM/TCM PIDS/SIGNALS
ACCS
ACET
ACP
AIR
AIRM
APP1
APP2
APP3
BPP/BOO
BPA
Use DMM
CHT
CKP
CMP
CPP/PNP
DPFEGR
ECT
EGRMC1
EGRMC2
EGRMC3
EGRMC4
EGRMDSD
EVR
EOT
EPC, EPCV
EVAPCV
EVAPPDC
EVAPPF
FANDC
Associated Circuit
A/CCS
ACET
ACPSW
AIR
AIRM
APPS
APPS
APPS
BPP
BPS
CD A-J (primary)
CHT
CKP
CMP
CPP
DPFE
ECT
EGRMC1
EGRMC2
EGRMC3
EGRMC4
EGRMC
EVR
EOT
EPC
CV
VMV
VMV
VDF
Test Type
input
input
input
output
input
input
input
input
input
input
output
input
input
input
input
input
input
output
output
output
output
output
output
input
output
output
output
output
output
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 684
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
FANSS
FLI
FP
FPM
FP M
FRP
FRT
FTP
HFC
HOS11
HOS12
HOS13
IAC
IAT
IAT2
IMRC
IMRC1M
IMTV1
IMTV2
KS1
KS2
LFC
MAF, MAF V
MAP V
O2S11
O2S12
O2S13
OSS
PSP
PSPT
PTO
TACM (+)
TACM (-)
TP1
TP2
TCIL
TP
VCT1
VCT2
VPWR
Use DMM
FANSS
FLI
FP
FPM
FPM
FRP
FRT
FTP
HFC
HEGO
HEGO
HEGO
IAC
IAT
IAT 2
IMRC
IMRCM
IMTV1
IMTV2
KS1
KS2
LFC
MAF
MAP
O2S
O2S
O2S
OSS
PSP
PSP
PTO
TACM (+)
TACM (-)
TP1
TP2
TCIL
TP
VCT1
VCT2
VPWR
VREF
input
input
output
input
input
input
input
input
output
input
input
input
output
input
input
output
input
output
output
input
input
output
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
output
output
input
input
output
input
output
output
input
output
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 685
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
VSO
VSS+
WAC
VSS
WAC
output
input
output
Z1 DIRECTION FOR INTERMITTENT DIAGNOSTIC PATH
NOTE:
Proceed with this step only if the powertrain control module (PCM) was not
previously cleared. Record freeze frame data prior to clearing the PCM DTCs.
Clearing the DTCs clears any freeze frame data and eliminates FMEM. This
helps to recreate the original conditions that set the DTCs or caused the
symptom.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Clear the PCM DTCs.
Are the PCM DTCs cleared?
Yes
GO to Z2.
No
RESET the keep alive memory (KAM). REFER
toRESETTING THE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY
(KAM) .
Z2 SELECT THE PIDS AND/OR SIGNALS RELATED TO THE SYSTEM
A list of related PIDs and/or signals are needed for use with the scan tool to monitor the suspect areas.
Obtain the customer symptom description. Use the Reference Value Symptom chart and proceed to the
Reference Value PID/Signal Measurement chart located at the beginning of Reference Values.
Highlight each available PID/signal recommended by the charts under the PID/signal selection menu on
the scan tool.
Are all available PIDs/signals related to the symptom selected?
Yes
GO to Z3.
No
REPEAT the test step. GO to Z2.
Z3 DECISION TO VERIFY THE SYMPTOM
NOTE:
The path to symptom verification is optional, but is recommended for several
reasons. For example: the vehicle is back for a repeat repair, or there is no DTC
present.
Is a concern symptom detected?
Yes
GO to Z10.
No
GO to Z4.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 686
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Z4 COLLECT ANY SYMPTOM RELATED DATA TO AID IN VERIFICATION
NOTE:
Only MIL codes trigger freeze frame data. Refer to the scan tool instruction
article to retrieve the freeze frame information.
Prepare the freeze frame data for use with information from the Symptom Charts.
Check for continuous memory DTCs that should have been recorded from an earlier pinpoint test.
Access the information from the customer information worksheet and the customer if available. Access
any other symptom related data available, such as TSBs and OASIS reports.
Is all available data recorded?
Yes
GO to Z5.
No
GATHER as much data as possible to aid in
isolating the intermittent concern area. REPEAT the
test step. GO to Z4.
Z5 RECREATE THE SYMPTOM USING ALL AVAILABLE DATA
NOTE:
To recreate the original conditions that set the DTC or caused the symptom, the
vehicle may require driving.
With the scan tool, select and monitor the same PIDs as displayed in freeze frame along with any
previously selected PIDs/signals from step Z2. Using the freeze frame data recorded earlier, recreate the
conditions described by each freeze frame PID. Pay special attention to ECT, LOAD, RPM and VSS.
Also, use any available data from the customer, TSBs, and other sources to aid in producing the correct
conditions for recreating the symptom.
When the symptom occurs, press the trigger to begin recording. Refer to the scan tool instruction article
for information on the recorder function.
Can the symptom be recreated?
Yes
GO to Z10.
No
GO to Z6.
Z6 RECREATE THE SYMPTOM
NOTE:
PIDs for output in the Reference Value Charts represent command values only.
Circuit measurements with a digital multimeter indicate the actual output status.
Therefore, in the case of a concern, the PID and circuit reading on the vehicle
may not correspond with each other. PIDs for PCM circuits with a mismatch in
the digital multimeter measurement indicate a possible PCM concern.
The road test is the last attempt to locate the area of concern before physically disturbing vehicle circuits.
The Intermittent Road Test Procedure is a set of instructions for monitoring PIDs/signals with a scan tool
and circuit measurements with a digital multimeter. This is done under 4 different conditions - key
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 687
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
on/engine off, hot idle, 48 km/h (30 mph) and 88 km/h (55 mph). Use the typical diagnostic reference
values to compare with the actual vehicle.
Locate the correct Reference Value Chart.
Setup the vehicle to measure the circuits with a digital multimeter and a scan tool.
Connect a scan tool to the DLC.
Key ON, engine OFF.
With the scan tool, select and monitor PIDs and measure the circuits shown in the Reference Value Chart.
Compare the scan tool PIDs and digital multimeter values to the Reference Value Charts.
Are any values out of range?
Yes
GO to Z10.
No
GO to Z7.
Z7 RECREATE THE SYMPTOM USING THE HOT IDLE ROAD TEST
NOTE:
The engine temperature should be at least 87°C (189°F).
Key ON, engine running.
Continue to monitor the PIDs and circuits as in the previous step.
Are any values out of range?
Yes
GO to Z10.
No
GO to Z8.
Z8 RECREATE THE SYMPTOM DURING AN 48 KM/H (30 MPH) ROAD TEST
Drive the vehicle on a preplanned route.
Continue to monitor the PIDs and circuits as in the previous step.
Are any values out of range?
Yes
GO to Z10.
No
GO to Z9.
Z9 RECREATE THE SYMPTOM DURING AN 88 KM/H (55 MPH) ROAD TEST
Continue to drive the vehicle on the preplanned route.
Continue to monitor the PIDs and circuits as in the previous step.
Are any values out of range?
Yes
No
It is now necessary to physically disturb the selected
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 688
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
vehicle circuits in an attempt to recreate the
intermittent concern.
GO to Z10.
GO to Z10.
Z10 SELECT THE CIRCUITS FROM THE PCM PIDS/SIGNALS CHART
NOTE:
From the same chart, be sure to select and proceed with the appropriate test
type.
NOTE:
The Input Test step should be used on sensing inputs such as temperature,
position or oxygen.
NOTE:
The Output Test step should be used on output devices such as relays, coils or
solenoids.
Remain in the PID/Signal selection menu with the scan tool.
Highlight only the PIDs/signals from step Z2.
Proceed to the PCM PIDS/SIGNALS chart located at the beginning of this test.
Match the selected PIDs/signals to the corresponding circuit in the chart. There may be more than one
circuit to test. If a PID/signal recording was made with the scan tool, it may be helpful to replay it at this
time. Refer to the scan tool instruction article for additional information.
Has a test been chosen?
Yes
For the input test step, GO to Z11.
For the output test step, GO to Z15.
No
To diagnose other driveability symptoms, REFER
toNO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(DTCS) PRESENT SYMPTOM CHART
INDEX .
Z11 KOEO INPUT TEST PROCEDURE FOR THE PCM SENSORS
WARNING: When carrying out any test steps, always be aware of hands, clothing or
tools near cooling fans, belts or hot surfaces.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Using the circuits chosen from the PCM PIDS/SIGNALS Chart, select only the recommended
PIDs/signals to monitor with the scan tool. If a PID is not available for the circuit, use a digital
multimeter to check the value.
Proceed to the area of the suspect wiring or component concern.
Key ON, engine OFF.
If the input is a switch type-component, turn it on manually.
Monitor the PID or DMM while tapping on the component.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 689
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Monitor while wiggling the sensor harness wire from the component to the PCM.
Look for abrupt changes in the values. Compare these actual values to the Typical Diagnostic Reference
Values.
Are there abrupt changes in the PID values that do not compare with the values?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. VERIFY the repair.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to Z12.
Z12 KOER INPUT TEST PROCEDURE FOR THE PCM SENSORS
WARNING: When carrying out any test steps, always be aware of hands, clothing or
tools near cooling fans, belts or hot surfaces.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Key ON, engine running.
Continue to monitor the PIDs and circuits as in the previous step.
Proceed to the area of the suspect wiring or component concern.
If the input is a switch type-component, turn it on manually.
Monitor the PID or DMM while tapping on the component.
Monitor while wiggling the sensor harness wire from the component to the PCM.
Look for abrupt changes in the values. Compare these actual values to the Typical Diagnostic Reference
Values.
Are any values fluctuating in and out of range?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. VERIFY the repair.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to Z13.
Z13 KOEO WATER SOAK TEST PROCEDURE FOR THE PCM SENSORS, EXCLUDING HIGH VOLTAGE
CIRCUITS
WARNING: When carrying out any test steps, always be aware of hands, clothing or
tools near cooling fans, belts or hot surfaces.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Key ON, engine OFF.
Continue to monitor the PIDs and circuits as in the previous step.
Proceed to the area of the suspect wiring or component concern.
If the input is a switch type-component, turn it on manually.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 690
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Monitor the PID or DMM values while lightly spraying a water mist on the component.
Monitor while spraying the sensor harness wire from the component to the PCM.
Look for abrupt changes in the values. Compare these actual values to the Typical Diagnostic Reference
Values.
Are any values fluctuating in and out of range?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. VERIFY the repair.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to Z14.
Z14 KOER WATER SOAK TEST PROCEDURE FOR THE PCM SENSORS, EXCLUDING HIGH VOLTAGE
CIRCUITS
WARNING: When carrying out any test steps, always be aware of hands, clothing or
tools near cooling fans, belts or hot surfaces.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Key ON, engine running.
Continue to monitor the PIDs and circuits as in the previous step.
Proceed to the area of the suspect wiring or component concern.
If the input is a switch type-component, turn it on manually.
Monitor the PID or DMM values while lightly spraying a water mist on the component.
Monitor while spraying the sensor harness wire from the component to the PCM.
Look for abrupt changes in the values. Compare these actual values to the Typical Diagnostic Reference
Values.
Are any values fluctuating in and out of range?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. VERIFY the repair.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to Z15.
Z15 KOER WIGGLE TEST PROCEDURE FOR THE PCM SENSORS
WARNING: When carrying out any test steps, always be aware of hands, clothing or
tools near cooling fans, belts or hot surfaces.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
Remember that PIDs selected from the PCM PIDS/SIGNALS Chart display
commanded values only. A digital multimeter measurement is needed to display
the actual values. Be sure to compare them. Look for fluctuations to occur
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 691
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
during any part of the following test. The output state test may not control some
outputs, such as injectors and ignition coils and may not be available for all
actuators.
Using the circuits chosen from the PCM PIDS/SIGNALS Chart, select only the recommended
PIDs/signals to monitor with the scan tool. If a PID is not available for the circuit, use a DMM to check
the value.
Key ON, engine OFF.
With the scan tool, turn on selected outputs using output state control. Refer to the scan tool instruction
article.
Proceed to the area of the suspect wiring or component concern.
Monitor the PID or DMM while tapping on the component.
Monitor while wiggling the sensor harness wire from the component to the PCM.
Look for abrupt changes in the values. Compare these actual values to the Typical Diagnostic Reference
Values.
Is there a mismatch between command and actual or are any values fluctuating in and out of range
when compared to the Reference Value Charts?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. VERIFY the repair.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to Z16.
Z16 KOER OUTPUT TEST PROCEDURE FOR THE PCM ACTUATORS
WARNING: When carrying out any test steps, always be aware of hands, clothing or
tools near cooling fans, belts or hot surfaces.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
Remember that PIDs selected from the PCM PIDS/SIGNALS Chart display
commanded values only. A digital multimeter measurement is needed to display
the actual values. Be sure to compare them. Look for fluctuations to occur
during any part of the following test. The output state test may not control some
outputs, such as injectors and ignition coils and may not be available for all
actuators.
Key ON, engine running.
Proceed to the area of the suspect wiring or component concern.
Monitor the PIDs with the scan tool and note the values. Compare the scan tool values with values from a
digital multimeter with the engine at idle. Look for fluctuations in the values while tapping on the suspect
component.
If a coil for a coil on plug application is suspect, turn off the key. Gain access to the coil and measure
continuity from the spark plug terminal to the signal terminal while tapping the coil. A large fluctuation in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 692
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
resistance indicates an intermittent open or short.
Monitor while wiggling the sensor harness wire from the component to the PCM.
Look for abrupt changes in the values. Compare these actual values to the Typical Diagnostic Reference
Values.
Is there a scan tool to DMM value mismatch or an idle fluctuation?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. VERIFY the repair.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to Z17.
Z17 KOEO WATER SOAK TEST PROCEDURE FOR THE PCM ACTUATORS, EXCLUDING HIGH VOLTAGE
CIRCUITS
WARNING: When carrying out any test steps, always be aware of hands, clothing or
tools near cooling fans, belts or hot surfaces.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
Remember that PIDs selected from the PCM PIDS/SIGNALS Chart display
commanded values only. A digital multimeter measurement is needed to display
the actual values. Be sure to compare them. Look for fluctuations to occur
during any part of the following test. The output state test may not control some
outputs, such as injectors and ignition coils and may not be available for all
actuators.
Key ON, engine OFF.
With the scan tool, turn on selected outputs using output state control. Refer to the scan tool instruction
article.
Proceed to the area of the suspect wiring or component concern.
Monitor the PID or DMM values while lightly spraying a water mist on the component.
Look for abrupt changes in the values. Compare these actual values to the Typical Diagnostic Reference
Values.
Is there a mismatch between command and actual or are any values fluctuating in and out of range
when compared to the Reference Value Charts?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. VERIFY the repair.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to Z18.
Z18 KOER WATER SOAK TEST PROCEDURE FOR THE PCM ACTUATORS
WARNING: When carrying out any test steps, always be aware of hands, clothing or
tools near cooling fans, belts or hot surfaces.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 693
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Pinpoint Tests - Gasoline Engines
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Key ON, engine running.
Using the circuits chosen from the PCM PIDS/SIGNALS Chart, select only the recommended
PIDs/signals to monitor with the scan tool. If a PID is not available for the circuit, use a DMM to check
the value.
Proceed to the area of the suspect wiring or component concern.
Monitor the PID or DMM values while lightly spraying a water mist on the component.
Monitor while spraying the sensor harness wire from the component to the PCM.
Look for abrupt changes in the values. Compare these actual values to the Typical Diagnostic Reference
Values.
Is there a mismatch between command and actual or are any values fluctuating in and out of range
when compared to the Reference Value Charts?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. VERIFY the repair.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to Z19.
Z19 INSPECT FOR INTERMITTENT MECHANICAL CONCERNS
NOTE:
It is possible for an intermittent mechanical concern to cause a good PCM
system to react abnormally.
An inspection of DTC related mechanical systems should have been carried out in an earlier part. If not,
visually inspect at this time.
Look for possible vacuum lines, wires, cables, linkage or hoses that may become kinked, shorted or
restricted during normal engine operation.
This may include engine/transmission gear changes, acceleration and deceleration, rough roads and
various engine RPM and torque related conditions.
Is a mechanical concern detected?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. VERIFY the repair.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
It is necessary to seek additional help. REFER to the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site, the
OASIS system or the Technical Hotline. A vehicle
data recorder (VDR) or similar recorder may also be
useful.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:21:11 AM
Page 694
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ELECTRICAL Fuse & Relay Information - Edge & MKX
2008 ELECTRICAL
Fuse & Relay Information - Edge & MKX
IDENTIFICATION
CAUTION: When battery is disconnected, vehicle computer and memory systems
may lose memory data. Driveability problems may exist until computer
systems have completed a relearn cycle. See COMPUTER RELEARN
PROCEDURES article in GENERAL INFORMATION before disconnecting
battery.
BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB)
NOTE:
For component location, see appropriate ELECTRICAL COMPONENT
LOCATIONS article.
Fig. 1: Battery Junction Box Components
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
BATTERY JUNCTION BOX COMPONENTS LEGEND
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:54
11:41:51 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ELECTRICAL Fuse & Relay Information - Edge & MKX
Fuse/Relay
Location
Mega
F1
F3
F5
Fuse Amp
Battery Junction Box Description
Rating
100
Not used
Not used
(1)
Cooling fan module - without trailer tow
60
40(1)
Cooling fan module - with trailer tow
F6
40(1)
Cooling fan module - with trailer tow
F7
30(1)
Heated seat module, left rear
F8
10(2)
Generator
F9
F12
F15
20(2)
-
F16
30(1)
F17
20(1)
Trailer tow park lamp relay
Not used
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module
Dual Climate controlled Seat Module (DCSM). Heated seat module
passenger side front
Power point, instrument panel - Edge, Power point, console 1 - MKX
F18
20(1)
Roof opening panel motor assembly
F21
F23
F24
7.5(2)
10(2)
EVAP canister vent control solenoid. Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Not used
Trailer tow left stop/turn lamp relay
F27
10(2)
Rear seat release relay
F28
15(2)
Heated mirror relay
F30
15(2)
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
F31
10(2)
F32
10(2)
F33
F34
F35
F36
F39
F40
F41
15(2)
-
Not Used
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch. Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature
(MAF/IAT) sensor. EVAP canister purge valve. Variable Camshaft Timing
(VCT valves. Heated oxygen sensors
Coil on Plugs, Ignition transformer capacitors - early production
Not used
A/C clutch relay
Not used
Rear window defrost grid
Not used
Starter relay
F44
F45
F46
10(2)
-
40(1)
-
10(2)
40(1)
30(1)
10(2)
Auto-dimming interior mirror, Reversing lamps
Not used
Trailer tow right stop/turn lamp relay
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:51 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ELECTRICAL Fuse & Relay Information - Edge & MKX
F49
10(2)
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
F50
10(2)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module, ABS test connector
F51
5(2)
Headlamp, left-with adaptive headlamps
F52
5(2)
F53
30(1)
F57
40(1)
Fuel pump relay
Smart Junction Box (SJB) - F29, F30, F31, F32, F33, F34, F35, F36, F37,
F46
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module, ABS test connector
F58
30(1)
Smart wiper module
F59
30(1)
F50
30(1)
F61
F62
F63
30(1)
40(1)
Liftgate/Trunk Module (LTM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM) - with memory, Power seat switch, left - without
memory
Power seat switch, right
Not used
Blower motor relay
F64
20(1)
Power point console 2
F65
20(1)
Power point console, rear
F66
20(1)
F67
F68
15(2)
F69
F70
F71
10(2)
F72
(1) Cartridge fuse
Power point, cargo area
Not used
Fuel pump relay
Not used
Not used
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch
Not used
(2) Mini fuse
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB)
NOTE:
For component location, see appropriate ELECTRICAL COMPONENT
LOCATIONS article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:51 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ELECTRICAL Fuse & Relay Information - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Smart Junction Box Components
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
SMART JUNCTION BOX COMPONENTS LEGEND
Fuse
Fuse/Relay
Amp Smart Junction Box Description
Location
Rating
F1
30
Power window motor, passenger side front - MKX
F2
15
Not used
Rear Entertainment Module (RETM) - with DVD rear entertainment center,
F3
15
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) - with SYNC
F4
30
Power window motor, driver side front
F5
10
Keyless entry keypad, Rear seat release relay, Floor shifter
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:51 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ELECTRICAL Fuse & Relay Information - Edge & MKX
F6
20
F7
F8
F9
10
10
15
F10
15
F11
10
F12
7.5
F13
F14
5
10
F15
10
F16
15
F17
20
F18
F19
F20
F21
20
25
15
15
F22
15
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
15
20
10
10
20
5
5
5
10
10
10
5
F35
10
Rear park/stop/turn lamps. Trailer tow left stop/turn lamp relay, Trailer tow right
stop/turn lamp relay, Front park/turn lamps - Edge, Headlamps - MKX
Low beam lamp, left front - Edge, Headlamp, left - MKX
Low beam lamp, right front - Edge, Headlamp, right - MKX
Cargo lamp, Overhead console, Interior lamps
Exterior rear view mirrors, Floor shifter, Message center switch,
Hazard/PAD/Traction switch, Headlamp switch, HVAC module, EMTC - with
manual a/c, Steering wheel switches, Roof opening panel switch, Window adjust
switches, Seat heater switches, Door lock switches, Memory set switch, Power
liftgate release switch
All Wheel Drive (AWD) module
Exterior rear view mirror switch, Driver Seat Module (DSM), Left power seat
switch
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module
Liftgate/Trunk Module (LTM)
HVAC module, EMTC-with manual a/c, HVAC module, DATC - with automatic
a/c
Not used
Door lock actuators, Roof opening panel motor assembly, Power window motors,
Liftgate ajar switch - without power liftgate, Liftgate/Trunk Module (LTM)
Audio Digital Signal Processing (DSP) module
Rear window wiper motor
Data Link Connector (DLC)
Headlamp switch, Fog lamps
Side lamps, Front park/turn lamps - Edge, Headlamps - MKX, Trailer tow park
lamp relay, Rear park/stop/turn lamps, Rear marker lamps, License lamps/liftgate
release switch - Edge, License plate lamps - MKX Illuminated liftgate applique MKX
High beam lamps - Edge, Headlamps - MKX
Horn
Vanity mirror lamps, Overhead console, Interior lamps
Instrument Cluster (C)
Ignition switch
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Instrument Cluster (C)
Floor shifter
Not used
Not used
Not used
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
All Wheel Drive (AWD) module, Parking Aid Module (PAM), Stability control
sensor cluster, Heated seat modules
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:51 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ELECTRICAL Fuse & Relay Information - Edge & MKX
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
F41
F42
F43
F44
F45
F46
F47
5
Passive anti-theft transceiver
Air inlet door actuator, HVAC module, EMTC - with manual a/c, HVAC
10
module, DATC - with automatic a/c
20
Radio amplifier, Audio Digital Signal Processing (DSP) module
20
Audio unit
20
Not used
Audio Control Module (ACM), Roof opening panel, Door lock switches Power
15
window motors, Master window adjust switch, Auto-dimming interior mirror
unit
10
Not used
10
Rear window wiper motor
10
Not used
Smart wiper module, Blower motor relay, Rear window defrost relay, Heated
5
mirror relay
Restraints Control Module (RCM), Hazard/Pad/Traction switch, Occupant
7.5
Classification System Module (OCSM)
30c.b. Master window adjust switch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:41:51 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Clear Silicone Rubber
ESB-M4G92-A
TA-32
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium
Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL (US); CXYWSP-M2C197-A
80W90-1L (Canada); (Model
60/70 axles)
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-C or XG-1-K (US); CXG-1- ESA-M1C75-B
C (Canada)
Fill Capacity
-
1.15L
(2.43 pt)
-
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Differential housing cover bolts
Differential housing-to-front insulator bracket bolts
Filler plug
Front insulator bracket-to-subframe bolts
Pinion nut
Rear driveshaft U-joint flange bolts
Side insulator bracket-to-rear axle differential bolts
23
90
29
90
244
70
90
lb-ft
17
66
21
66
180
52
66
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
REAR DRIVE AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL
The rear drive unit (RDU) consists of the following components:
Dished circular flange
Full-time fluid drive coupling
Aluminium housing with steel housing cover
Matched ring and pinion
Conventional open differential
Rubber bushing isolated mounting points
Cover mounted axle vent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:45
10:10:41 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
Silicone sealant rather than a gasket for the housing cover
The rear axle drive pinion receives power from the engine through the transaxle, power transfer unit (PTU),
driveshaft and active torque coupling, and is engaged on demand. The pinion gear rotates the differential ring
gear, which is bolted to the differential case outer flange. Inside the differential case, 2 differential pinion gears
are mounted on a differential pinion shaft, which is pinned to the case. These differential pinion gears are
engaged with the splined differential side gears. The halfshafts are held in the differential side gears by a
retainer circlip that is located on the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint stub shaft. When each halfshaft is
installed, the driveshaft bearing retainer circlip engages a step in the differential side gear. There are no stub
shaft bearings in the differential housing. As the differential case turns, it rotates the halfshafts and rear wheels.
When it is necessary for one wheel and halfshaft to rotate faster than the other, the faster turning differential
side gear causes the differential pinion gears to roll on the slower turning differential side gear. This allows
differential action between the 2 halfshafts. The active torque coupling is installed new as an assembly with the
rear axle. The pinion seal and the differential halfshaft seals are the only serviced components of the rear drive
axle. If other components of the rear drive axle are worn or damaged, the assembly must be installed new.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
REAR DRIVE AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL
Refer to DRIVELINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
IN-VEHICLE SERVICING
STUB SHAFT SEAL
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Adapter for 303-224 (Handle)
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Installer, Front Axle Oil Seal
205-350 (T95T-3010-A)
Remover, Torque Converter Fluid
307-309 (T94P-77001-BH)
Seal
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
Slide Hammer
100-001 (T50T-100-A)
Material
Item
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-C or XG-1-K (US); CXG-1-C (Canada)
Specification
ESA-M1C75-B
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Stub Shaft Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
4B416
4010
Description
Stub shaft seal
Differential housing
REMOVAL
NOTE:
The rear drive unit (RDU) does not have stub shaft pilot bearings. It has stub
shaft seals only.
1. Remove the halfshaft assembly. For additional information, refer to REAR DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
article.
2. Using the special tools, remove the stub shaft seal.
Fig. 2: Removing Stub Shaft Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Lubricate the new stub shaft seal with grease.
1. Using the special tools, install the stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal.
Fig. 3: Installing Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing Housing Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the halfshaft assembly. For additional information, refer to REAR DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
article.
DRIVE PINION SEAL
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
205-D072 (D97L-4221-A) or
equivalent
2-Jaw Puller
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
Converter Seal Remover
307-309 (T94P-77001-BH)
Holding Fixture, Drive Pinion
Flange
205-126 (T78P-4851-A)
Pinion Seal Replacer
205-133 (T79P-4676-A)
Slide Hammer
100-001 (T50T-100-A)
Material
Item
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-C or XG-1-K (US); CXG-1-C (Canada)
Specification
ESA-M1C75-B
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Drive Pinion Seal With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W711918-S
2
3
4
5
6
4K357
4320
4858
4676
49924
Description
Rear driveshaft flange-to-pinion flange
bolts (4 required)
Driveshaft
Drive pinion nut
Drive pinion flange
Drive pinion seal
Coupler housing
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove and discard the 4 rear driveshaft U-joint flange bolts.
Support the driveshaft.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Locating Rear Driveshaft Universal Joint Flange Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using the special tool, hold the pinion flange and remove and discard the nut.
Fig. 6: Identifying Special Tool (205-126)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Index-mark the location of the pinion to the yoke.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Identifying Index-Mark On Pinion Of Yoke
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Using the special tool, remove the pinion flange.
Fig. 8: Identifying Special Tool (205-D072)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Using the special tools, remove and discard the drive pinion seal.
Fig. 9: Removing Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Make sure that the mating surface is clean before installing the new seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
1. Using the special tool, install the drive pinion seal.
Fig. 10: Installing Seal
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Lubricate the pinion flange splines with grease.
2. Line up the index marks and position the pinion flange.
Fig. 11: Identifying Index-Mark On Pinion Of Yoke
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Using the special tool, install the new pinion nut.
Tighten to 244 Nm (180 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Identifying Special Tool (205-126)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Line up the index marks and install the rear driveshaft U-joint flange with 4 new bolts.
Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Fig. 13: Locating U-Joint Flange Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING COVER
Material
Item
Clear Silicone Rubber
TA-32
Specification
ESB-M4G92-A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL (US); CXY-80W90-1L (Canada)
WSP-M2C197-A
Fig. 14: Exploded View Of Differential Housing Cover Bolts With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W505262-S439
4N282
Description
Differential cover bolt (10 required)
Differential fill plug
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
2. Remove the 10 bolts and the rear differential housing cover.
Drain the differential fluid from the housing.
Fig. 15: Locating Rear Differential Housing Cover Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing and the
differential housing cover are clean and free of oil before installing
the new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be covered
when cleaning the machined surface to prevent damage to the
component.
NOTE:
Make sure the differential vent located on the rear cover is free of
obstruction.
1. Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing and the differential housing cover.
NOTE:
The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of
application of the silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If possible,
allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone
sealant has correctly cured.
2. Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber as shown in the illustration.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Applying Sealant
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the differential housing cover and the 10 bolts.
Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Remove the filler plug, fill the rear axle with 1.15L (2.43 pt) of rear axle lubricant, 3-5 mm (0.118-0.196
in) below the bottom of the filler hole and install the filler plug.
Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft).
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
AXLE ASSEMBLY
Fig. 17: Exploded View Of Axle Assembly
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:41 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W506540-S
2
W500043-S
Description
Differential housing-to-front insulator
bracket bolt (4 required)
Side insulator bracket-to-rear axle
housing bolts (5 required)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to DRIVESHAFT article.
2. Remove the rear halfshafts. For additional information, refer to REAR DRIVE HALFSHAFTS article.
3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar and link. For additional information, refer to REAR SUSPENSION
article.
4. Position a suitable transmission hydraulic jack to the axle housing. Securely strap the jack to the housing.
Fig. 18: Positioning Suitable Transmission Hydraulic Jack To Axle Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Disconnect the active torque coupling electrical connector at the front of the crossmember.
6. Remove the 4 differential housing-to-front insulator bracket bolts.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 19: Locating Differential Housing-To-Front Insulator Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:42 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Edge & MKX
7. Loosen the LH front insulator bracket-to-subframe bolt, and rotate the bracket aside.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
8. Loosen the RH front insulator bracket-to-subframe bolt and the bracket, and rotate the bracket aside.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
9. Remove the 2 RH side insulator bracket-to-rear axle differential bolts and the axle assembly.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 20: Locating RH Side Insulator Bracket-To-Rear Axle Differential Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the 3 LH side insulator or bracket-to-rear axle differential bolts.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 21: Locating LH Side Insulator Or Bracket-To-Rear Axle Differential Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Lower the rear axle assembly.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:42 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
2008 TRANSMISSIONS
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Left rear halfshaft assembled length
Right rear halfshaft assembled length
Specification
863.9 mm (34.01 in)
915.6 mm (36.05 in)
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
Lubricant
Specification
Rear Halfshaft Inboard Constant Velocity (CV) Joint
Constant Velocity Joint Grease
supplied in boot kit 4L537
Rear Halfshaft Outboard CV Joint
Constant Velocity Joint Grease
supplied in boot kit 4L537
Capacity
108 g
(3.80 oz)
88 g
(3.10 oz)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Brake caliper hose bracket bolt
Lower arm outboard bolt
Lower shock absorber nut
Rear wheel hub nut (inner)
Rear wheel hub nut (outer)
Stabilizer bar link nut
Toe link bracket bolt
Toe link outboard bolt
Upper arm outboard bolt
15
150
80
275
175
35
200
150
150
lb-ft
11
111
59
203
129
26
148
111
111
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
REAR DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
Rear Drive Halfshafts
The rear drive halfshafts consist of the following:
Inner constant velocity (CV) joints
Outer CV joints
Interconnecting shafts
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:04
10:10:00 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Convoluted CV joint boots
CV joint boot clamps
Special CV high-temperature grease
Tripod joint housings
Ball and cage housings
Circlip stopper that holds the cross-groove inboard race assembly (inboard CV joint) together
Circlip that retains the splined inboard CV joint to the differential side gear
RH and LH halfshafts that are different lengths, with the LH halfshaft being the longer of the two
The rear drive halfshafts link the rear axle to the rear wheel hubs. The CV joints allow the halfshafts to rotate
smoothly through the required changes in angles between the stationary axle and the varying angles of the rear
wheels including jounce and rebound. The CV joints are either tri-lobed style or the caged-ball type, depending
on inboard or outboard. New halfshaft components are available in kit 4L537 which contains grease, circlips,
boots and clamps.
Handle all halfshaft components carefully during removal and installation and during various component
disassembly and assembly procedures. Never pick up or hold the halfshaft only by the inboard or outboard CV
joint. Do not overangle the CV joints. Damage will occur to an assembled inboard CV joint if it is overplunged
outward from the joint housing. Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts from the hub. Never use
the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Always support the free end of the halfshaft. Do
not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. Handle the halfshaft only by the
interconnecting shaft to avoid pull-apart and potential damage to the CV joints. Excessive pulling force on the
interconnecting shaft between joints of the halfshaft will result in internal joint damage. Axial loads used in
assisting removal must be applied through the inboard joint housing only. Do not drop assembled halfshafts.
The impact will cut the boots from the inside without evidence of external damage. Do not remove the outer CV
joint by pulling on the interconnecting shaft. Inspect all machined surfaces and splines for damage.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
REAR DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
Refer to DRIVELINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HALFSHAFT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Axle Seal Protector
Tool Number
205-816
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Front Hub Remover
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Halfshaft Components With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W712435
W712435
Description
Outer hub bearing nut
Inner hub bearing nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
W520516
W500766
W520414
W520516
W500766
5500
4B402
W712459
W520214
5A486
W500766
W520516
Toe link outboard nut
Toe link outboard bolt
Stabilizer bar link nut
Upper arm outboard nut
Upper arm outboard bolt
Upper control arm
Halfshaft assembly
Lower shock absorber flag bolt
Lower shock absorber nut
Stabilizer bar link
Lower arm outboard bolt
Lower arm outboard nut
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor. For additional information, refer to VEHICLE DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
3. Remove and discard the inner and outer rear wheel hub nuts.
4. Remove the brake caliper hose bracket bolt.
Fig. 2: Locating Brake Caliper Hose Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the rear brake disc. For additional information, refer to REAR DISC BRAKE article.
6. Remove the upper arm outboard bolt.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Locating Upper Arm Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Lift the upper arm from the knuckle.
Fig. 4: Lifting Upper Arm From Knuckle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Support the lower arm and remove the lower shock nut and bolt.
Fig. 5: Supporting Lower Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the stabilizer link upper nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Locating Stabilizer Link Upper Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Remove the outer toe link nut and bolt.
Fig. 7: Locating Outer Toe Link Nut & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Support the wheel knuckle and remove the lower arm nut and bolt.
Fig. 8: Locating Lower Arm Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the rear axle hub assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Separating Halfshaft From Wheel Hub Using Special Tool (205-D070)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not damage the oil seal when removing the axle halfshaft from the
differential.
13. Using a suitable pry bar, remove the halfshaft.
Fig. 10: Removing Halfshaft Using A Suitable Pry Bar
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Position the halfshaft up through the wheel knuckle opening and remove the halfshaft.
Fig. 11: Identifying Halfshaft & Wheel Knuckle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
15. Remove and discard the circlip from the stub shaft.
Fig. 12: Locating Halfshaft Circlip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install a new 28 mm (1.102 in) circlip on the stub shaft.
Fig. 13: Locating Intermediate Shaft Circlip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Make sure the oil seal protector is correctly aligned with the differential oil
seal during installation.
2. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft in the differential.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Installing Halfshaft In Differential Using Special Tool (205-816)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the stub shaft in the rear drive unit.
Make sure the circlip locks in the side gear.
Fig. 15: Installing Stub Shaft In Rear Drive Unit
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Slide the outboard CV joint down through the knuckle.
Fig. 16: Identifying Halfshaft & Wheel Knuckle
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Position the halfshaft outer CV joint through the hub bearing.
6. Using a suitable tool, install the outer halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Locating Halfshaft On Wheel Hub
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Position the upper arm outboard end and install the bolt.
Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
Fig. 18: Locating Upper Arm Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Position the lower arm and install the lower arm bolt and nut.
Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
Fig. 19: Locating Lower Arm Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not tighten the rear wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground.
The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is
lowered to the ground. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel
bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied.
9. Install the 2 new rear wheel hub nuts.
Tighten the inner hub nut to 275 Nm (203 lb-ft).
Tighten the outer hub nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
10. Install the rear toe link bolt.
Tighten to 200 Nm (148 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 20: Locating Outer Toe Link Nut & Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Install stabilizer link upper nut.
Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Fig. 21: Locating Stabilizer Link Upper Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install the lower shock absorber bolt.
Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
13. Install the rear wheel speed sensor. For additional information, refer to VEHICLE DYNAMIC
SYSTEMS article.
14. Install the rear brake disc. For additional information, refer to REAR DISC BRAKE article.
15. Install the brake caliper hose bracket bolt.
Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 22: Locating Brake Caliper Hose Bracket Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
16. Install the tire and wheel. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
CONSTANT VELOCITY (CV) JOINT BOOT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Installer, Constant Velocity Joint
205-343 (T95P-3514-A)
Boot Clamp
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Exploded View Of Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
4B202
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4B478
3L537
4B478
4B422
3B426
3C092
Description
Outboard constant velocity (CV) joint
and interconnecting shaft assembly
Boot clamps (part of 4L537)
CV joint boot (part of 4L537)
Boot clamps (part of 4L537)
Retaining ring
Ball cage (part of 3C092)
Ball (8 required) (part of 3C092)
Inner race (part of 3C092)
Snap ring
Inboard CV joint housing
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the halfshaft assembly. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft .
2. Remove and discard the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint boot clamps.
Fig. 24: Identifying Inboard Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot Clamps
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. With the inboard CV joint boot removed from the housing, remove the retaining ring.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 25: Locating Retaining Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the 8 balls and outer race.
Fig. 26: Locating Outer Race Balls
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the CV joint housing snap ring.
Fig. 27: Locating Retainer Snap Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove and discard the boot.
NOTE:
The outboard CV joint is not removable from the halfshaft. The boot must
be removed or installed from the inboard CV joint side of the shaft.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
7. For the outboard CV joint boot, carry out the following:
1. Remove and discard the boot clamps.
2. Remove and discard the boot.
Fig. 28: Identifying Boot Clamps And Boot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
ASSEMBLY
1. For the outboard CV joint, carry out the following:
1. Slide the boot on the interconnecting shaft.
2. Pack the outboard CV joint with 80 g (2.82 oz) of grease supplied in the boot kit.
3. Spread any remaining grease evenly inside the boot.
4. Install the boot by seating it in the groove in the CV joint housing.
Fig. 29: Identifying CV Joint Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Using the special tool, install the 79.6 mm (3.13 in) boot clamps on the large end of the boot.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 30: Installing Boot Clamps Using Special Tool (205-343)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the small clamp on the small end of the boot.
CAUTION: Install a new circlip every time the halfshaft is removed from the axle
or damage to the component may occur.
CAUTION: Start one end of the circlip in the groove and work the circlip over the
halfshaft and into the groove to prevent the circlip from
overexpanding or damage to the clamp may occur.
4. Install a new retainer circlip.
Fig. 31: Locating Halfshaft Circlip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Position the small clamp on the interconnecting shaft before installing the boot.
6. Position the boot on the interconnecting shaft.
7. Install the inner race and the retainer snap ring.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 32: Locating Retainer Snap Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Install the outer race with 8 balls.
Fig. 33: Locating Outer Race Balls
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Insert the assembly in the housing.
10. Install the retaining ring.
Fig. 34: Locating Retaining Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. For the inboard CV joint, carry out the following steps in sequence:
1. Pack the inboard CV joint housing with 108 g (3.80 oz) of grease supplied in the boot kit.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 TRANSMISSIONS Rear Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
2. Spread any remaining grease evenly inside the boot and CV joint.
3. Install the inboard CV joint housing, seating the boot in the groove in the housing.
12. Set the halfshaft assembled length to specifications. For additional information, refer to
SPECIFICATIONS .
1. Measure the entire assembly length.
2. Push in or pull out on the inner joint as necessary to adjust the halfshaft assembled length.
3. Hold the inner joint to prevent the assembled length from changing and insert a soft, flat tool
between the boot and the joint to equalize the pressure.
Fig. 35: Pushing In Or Pulling Out On Inner Joint As Necessary To Adjust Halfshaft Assembled
Length
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Using the special tool, install the 77.5 mm (3.05 in) boot clamps on the large end of the boot.
Fig. 36: Installing Both Boot Clamps Using Special Tool (205-343)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
14. Install the smaller boot clamp.
15. Install the halfshaft assembly. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:10:00 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB
Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
INTERIOR LIGHTING
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The interior lighting system consists of the following components:
SJB
Liftgate/trunk module (LTM) (if equipped)
Dimmer control switch
Interior/map lamps
Puddle lamps
Cargo lamp
Vanity mirror lamps
Door ajar switches
The interior lighting system consists of 2 subsystems:
Courtesy lamps
Demand lamps
The courtesy lamps are controlled by the SJB. The SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps. The courtesy
lamp subsystem consists of the interior dome lamps, the overhead console lamps, the cargo lamp, and the
puddle lamps (if equipped).
The SJB supplies voltage to the demand lamps. The demand lamps subsystem consists of the front map lamps,
and the left and right vanity mirror lamps.
The SJB supplies power to the interior lighting system. The SJB and the LTM (if equipped) set DTCs if certain
circuit failures exist with the interior lighting system.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:29
11:06:25 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or
equivalent scan tool
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025C or equivalent
Principles of Operation
NOTE:
The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module
(GEM).
The SJB supplies voltage to the interior lighting system. The interior lighting system illuminates the courtesy
lamps to enhance visibility of the interior while a vehicle door is open or ajar, and the vehicle speed is less than
15 km/h (9 mph) or 5 km/h (3 mph) for puddle lamps. The SJB controls all interior lighting functions and
timing by monitoring inputs from the door ajar switches, instrument panel dimmer switch and vehicle speed.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Interior Lighting Delay
The interior lighting delay feature provides temporary illumination of the courtesy lamps after the doors are
opened and then closed. The interior lighting delay feature keeps the courtesy lamps on for a period of 25
seconds after all the doors are closed. If during the 25-second delay time, the SJB detects that the ignition has
been turned out of OFF, or if the vehicle is locked using the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter or the
keypad, the courtesy lamp illumination is discontinued.
Illuminated Entry
The illuminated entry requests the courtesy lamps to be illuminated (when the ignition is off) and either the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed, or the vehicle is unlocked using the keypad. The illuminated entry
requests the courtesy lamps off after 25 seconds have elapsed, the ignition is switched out of off, the RKE
transmitter LOCK button is pressed, or the vehicle is locked using the keypad or door lock cylinder.
Illuminated Exit
The illuminated exit requests the courtesy lamps to be illuminated for 25 seconds when all doors are closed and
the ignition key is removed from the ignition lock cylinder. The illuminated exit requests the courtesy lamps to
be deactivated when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition lock cylinder, 25 seconds have elapsed or a
door or liftgate is opened.
Theater Lighting
The theater lighting option ramps-up the courtesy lamps over 0.7 second when courtesy lamp activation is
requested. The theater lighting feature ramps-down the courtesy lamps over 1.7 seconds when interior lighting
deactivation is requested by any feature other than the panic alarm or battery saver.
Interior Lamp Arbitrator
The SJB chooses between the interior lighting, interior mode, interior lighting delay, illuminated entry,
illuminated exit and battery saver to determine which feature has precedence of activating and deactivating the
interior lamps.
The features are prioritized as follows:
Perimeter alarm/panic alarm
Demand lighting
Battery saver
Interior lighting
Interior light delay
Illuminated entry
Illuminated exit
Battery Saver
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
The SJB provides automatic shut-off of the demand lamps (cargo lamp, vanity lamps, map lamps and cargo
lamp) and courtesy lamps after a time-out period in order to save battery voltage. A timer in the SJB is started
when the ignition is turned to the OFF position, and all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass are closed.
When the time-out period for the lamps has elapsed, the voltage is automatically shut off to the lamps by the
SJB. While the SJB has voltage disabled, if the ignition is turned to any position other than OFF, any door
becomes ajar, or the UNLOCK button of the RKE transmitter is pressed, a valid keypad code is entered, an
unlock request from the cylinder is received, or the dome lamp switch is turned on, the SJB restores voltage and
starts the timer again.
NOTE:
Time-out is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles).
The battery saver time-outs are as follows:
Courtesy lamps = 10 minutes
Demand lamps = 10 minutes
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the headlamp output
circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut
down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is
stored at that time of the fault. The circuit then resets after an ignition cycle or customer demand of the function
(switching the component on, 30-minute battery saver being energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs
several times, the module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the
continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure cannot be cleared by a command to clear the continuous
DTCs. The module does not allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal until a successful ondemand self-test proves that the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully
completed (no on-demand DTCs present), the continuous DTC clears and the circuit function returns.
Each circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based on each circuits'
capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the circuit sets along
with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the
fault itself has been corrected. If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level, then DTCs B106F and
B1342 set along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and a new module must be
installed.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the interior lighting system are for the puddle lamps and courtesy
lamp output circuits.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Courtesy lamps
Map lamps
Cargo lamp
Vanity lamps
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse(s):
9 (15A)
10 (15A)
25 (10A)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Ajar switch(es) (integral
to latch)
Courtesy lamp(s)
Map lamp(s)
Puddle lamp(s)
Cargo lamp
Vanity lamp(s)
Overhead console
Instrument panel
dimmer switch
SJB
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool release software.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
If the scan tool responds with no communication with the SJB, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB and the liftgate/trunk
module (LTM) (if equipped).
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to SYMPTOM CHART.
DTC Charts
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
B1320
Driver Door Ajar Circuit Open Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Passenger Door Ajar Circuit
B1328
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Open
B1336
Door Ajar RR Circuit Open Go to Pinpoint Test C .
B1572
Door Ajar LR Circuit Open
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Lamp Dome Input Circuit
B1688
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Short to Ground
Liftgate Ajar Sw Circuit
B2077
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Failure
If the courtesy lamps are inoperative, go to Pinpoint
Test A .
Interior Lighting Output
B2A35
If the courtesy lamps stay on continuously, go to
Circuit Open
Pinpoint Test C .
Interior Lighting Output
B2A36
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Circuit Short to Ground
If the puddle lamps are inoperative, go to Pinpoint
Puddle Lamp Output Circuit Test I .
B2A39
Open
If the puddle lamps are always on, go to Pinpoint
Test J .
Puddle Lamp Output Circuit
B2A3A
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Short to Ground
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
All other DTCs MODULES article.
LIFTGATE/TRUNK MODULE (LTM) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Action
Liftgate/Decklid Ajar Output Short to
B2718
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Battery
B2721
If interior lamps are inoperative, go to Pinpoint
Liftgate/Decklid Ajar Output Short to Test L .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Ground or Open
If interior lamps are always on, go to Pinpoint
Test C .
REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC
MODULES article.
All other DTCs Symptom Chart
SYMPTOM CHART
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication with
the smart junction box
(SJB)
No communication with
the liftgate/trunk module
(LTM)
The courtesy lamps flash
on and off
The courtesy lamps are
inoperative
An individual courtesy
lamp is inoperative
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Interior lamp
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Door ajar switch
Liftgate ajar switch
Instrument panel
dimmer switch
LTM
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Door ajar switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
The demand lamps are
CONFIGURE the SJB. REFER to
MODULE CONFIGURATION
article. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
The courtesy lamps do not
turn on with one door
open
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article.
Fuse
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
SJB
The courtesy lamps stay
on continuously
REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
article.
The SJB is not
configured
correctly.
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
LTM
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
SJB
Action
Fuse
Wiring, terminals
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
inoperative
An individual demand
lamp is inoperative
The illuminated entry is
inoperative when using
the remote keyless entry
(RKE) transmitter
The battery saver does not
deactivate after time-out
The puddle lamp(s) are
inoperative
The puddle lamps stay on
continuously
The courtesy lamps are
inoperative - from the
instrument panel dimmer
switch
The courtesy lamps do not
turn on with the liftgate
open
or connectors
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Interior lamp
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
RKE system
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test G .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
Fuse
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Exterior mirror
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Instrument panel
dimmer switch
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test K .
Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Liftgate ajar switch
LTM
SJB
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Courtesy Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Interior Lamps schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
Power is supplied to the courtesy lamps through the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 9 (15A), and SJB fuse 25
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
(10A) for the demand lamps. When any door is opened, the ajar switch opens, signaling the SJB. The SJB
monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit
VLN33 (GY/VT). Ground is supplied through circuit GD133 (BK) for the courtesy lamps, and circuit GD126
(BK/WH) for the cargo lamp.
DTC B2A35 (Interior Lighting Output Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an open from the interior lighting circuit.
DTC B2A36 (Interior Lighting Output Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC
that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground from the interior lighting circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SJB
PINPOINT TEST A: THE COURTESY LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
A1 CHECK THE SJB DTCs FROM BOTH THE CONTINUOUS AND THE ON-DEMAND SELFTESTS
Use the recorded results from the SJB continuous and on-demand self-test.
Are any SJB DTCs recorded?
YES : For DTC B2A35 or B2A36, go to A2 .
For all other DTCs, REFER to DTC Charts in this service information.
NO : Go to A3.
A2 CHECK CIRCUIT VLN33 (GY/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280a
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the jumper wire fails, repair circuit VLN33 for a short to ground.
Connect a fused (10A) jumper wire between the SJB C2280a-9, circuit VLN33 (GY/VT), harness
side and battery positive.
Do the courtesy lamps illuminate?
YES : VERIFY the SJB fuse 9 (15A) is OK. If OK, go to A3 .
NO : REPAIR the circuit. RUN the on-demand self-test (required to clear certain DTCs).
CORRECT any unresolved DTCs. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
A3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test B: An Individual Courtesy Lamp Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Interior Lamps schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) provides voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). The courtesy
lamps are grounded through circuit GD133 (BK). The cargo lamp is also on the courtesy lamp circuit. Circuit
VLN33 (GY/VT) provides voltage to the cargo lamp, and is grounded through circuit GD126 (BK/WH).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Interior lamp
PINPOINT TEST B: AN INDIVIDUAL COURTESY LAMP IS INOPERATIVE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
B1 CHECK THE INTERIOR LAMP
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Suspect Interior Lamp
Open the driver door.
Measure the voltage between the suspect interior lamp connector, harness side as follows:
Connector- ConnectorPin/
Pin/
Circuit
Circuit
C930-2
C930-1
Overhead
VLN33
GD133
console
(GY/VT)
(BK)
Rear
C923-1
C923-2
interior
VLN33
GD133
lamp
(GY/VT)
(BK)
C926-1
C926-2
Cargo
VLN33
GD126
lamp
(GY/VT) (BK/WH)
Location
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new interior lamp for the lamp in question. REFER to Interior Lamp. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 CHECK CIRCUIT VLN33 (GY/VT) FOR VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between the suspect interior lamp, harness side and ground as follows:
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
Overhead
VLN33
C930-2
console
(GY/VT)
Rear
VLN33
interior
C923-1
(GY/VT)
lamp
Cargo
VLN33
C926-2
lamp
(GY/VT)
Location
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new interior lamp for the lamp in question. REFER to Interior Lamp. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
NO : REPAIR circuit VLN33 (GY/VT) for the lamp in question. TEST the system for normal
operation.
Pinpoint Test C: The Courtesy Lamps Stay On Continuously
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Interior Lamps schematic and connector
information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Power Liftgate schematic and connector
information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Remote Keyless Entry and Alarm schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
When any door or the liftgate is opened, the ajar switch (or the liftgate/trunk module [LTM], if equipped) opens
the circuit to the smart junction box (SJB). The SJB monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status,
supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT).
DTC Description
B1320 - Driver Door Ajar Circuit Open
B1328 - Passenger Door Ajar Circuit Open
B1336 - Door Ajar RR Circuit Open
B1572 - Door Ajar LR Circuit Open
B1688 - Lamp Dome Input Circuit Short To Ground
B2077 - Liftgate Ajar Sw Circuit Failure
B2A35 - Interior Lighting Output Circuit Open
B2718 - Liftgate/Decklid Ajar Output Short to Battery
Fault Trigger Conditions
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an open from the LH front door ajar
circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an open from the RH front door ajar
circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an open from the RH rear door ajar
circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an open from the LH rear door ajar
circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to ground from the
instrument panel dimmer switch circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an open from the liftgate ajar
circuit.
An on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the courtesy
lamp output circuit.
An continuous and on-demand DTC that
sets when the LTM detects a short to
voltage from the liftgate ajar input circuit
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
B2721 - Liftgate/Decklid Ajar Output Short to Ground or
Open
to the SJB.
An continuous and on-demand DTC that
sets when the LTM detects an open from
the liftgate ajar input circuit to the SJB.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Door ajar switch
Liftgate ajar switch
Instrument panel dimmer switch
LTM
SJB
PINPOINT TEST C: THE COURTESY LAMPS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
C1 CHECK THE SJB DTCs FROM BOTH THE CONTINUOUS AND THE ON-DEMAND SELFTESTS
Use the recorded results from the SJB continuous and the on-demand self-test.
Are any SJB DTCs recorded?
YES : For DTC B1320, B1328, B1336, or B1572, go to C2.
For DTC B1688, go to C5.
For DTC B2A35, go to C7.
For DTC B2077 (manual liftgate), go to C8.
For DTC B2077 (power liftgate), go to C12.
NO : If equipped with a power liftgate, go to C11.
If equipped with a manual liftgate, go to C14.
C2 CHECK THE DOOR AJAR GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Suspect Ajar Switch
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance Between Suspect Door Ajar Switch And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the suspect ajar switch connector, harness side and ground as
follows:
Location
LF
RF
LR
RR
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
GD133
C525-6
(BK)
GD140
C603-6
(BK/GN)
GD126
C704-6
(BK/WH)
GD145
C804-6
(BK/BU)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C3 CHECK THE DOOR AJAR SWITCH OPERATION
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage Between Suspect Door Ajar Switch And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the suspect door ajar switch, harness side and ground as follows:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Location
LF
RF
LR
RR
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CPL26
C525-5
(GN/VT)
CPL31
C603-5
(WH)
CPL36
C704-5
(GN)
CPL39
C804-5
(YE)
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new door latch for the switch in question. REFER to HANDLES, LOCKS,
LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to C4.
C4 CHECK THE DOOR AJAR SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Measure the resistance between the suspect door ajar switch, harness side and the SJB, harness side
as follows:
Suspect
SJB
Door Ajar
Location Connector- Switch Circuit
Pin
ConnectorPin
CPL26
LF
C2280c-14 C525-5
(GN/VT)
CPL31
RF
C2280c-2
C603-5
(WH)
CPL36
LR
C2280c-3
C704-5
(GN)
CPL39
RR
C2280c-15 C804-5
(YE)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C14.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C5 CHECK THE INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch C2298
Are the courtesy lamps still illuminated?
YES : Go to C6.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new instrument panel dimmer switch. REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
AND PANEL ILLUMINATION article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C6 CHECK CIRCUIT CLN28 (GN/BU) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance Between Dimmer Switch C2298-2 Circuit CLN28 (GN/BU) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the instrument panel dimmer switch C2298-2 circuit CLN28
(GN/BU), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to C14.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C7 CHECK CIRCUIT VLN33 (GY/VT) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280a
Key in ON position.
Observe the courtesy lamps.
Are the courtesy lamps still illuminated?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to C14.
C8 CHECK CIRCUIT GD149 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN (MANUAL LIFTGATE)
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Liftgate Latch C479
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Measuring Resistance Between Liftgate Latch C479-3, Circuit GD149 (BK/GY) &
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the liftgate latch C479-3, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C9.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C9 CHECK THE LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH OPERATION (MANUAL LIFTGATE)
Fig. 6: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a (5A) jumper wire between the liftgate latch C479-4, circuit CPL60 (BN/YE), harness
side and the liftgate latch C479-3, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side.
Do the courtesy lamps turn off?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. INSTALL a new manual liftgate latch. REFER to HANDLES,
LOCKS, LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : LEAVE the jumper wire connected. Go to C10.
C10 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL60 (BN/YE) FOR AN OPEN (MANUAL LIFTGATE)
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280C-16, Circuit CPL60 (BN/YE), Harness
Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280c-16, circuit CPL60 (BN/YE), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to C14.
NO : REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C11 CHECK THE LTM DTCs FROM BOTH THE CONTINUOUS AND THE ON-DEMAND
SELF-TESTS
Use the recorded results from the LTM continuous and the on-demand self-test.
Are any LTM DTCs recorded?
YES : For DTCs B2718 or B2721, go to C12.
For all other DTCs, REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
NO : Go to C14.
C12 CHECK THE LTM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LTM C4174b
Fig. 8: Connecting Fused Jumper Wire
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
If the fuse fails, repair the circuit for a short to voltage.
Connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the LTM C4174b-2, circuit CPL60 (BN/YE), harness
side and ground.
Do the courtesy lamps turn off?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to C15.
NO : LEAVE the jumper wire connected. Go to C13.
C13 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL60 (BN/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Fig. 9: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280C-16, Circuit CPL60 (BN/YE), Harness
Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280c-16, circuit CPL60 (BN/YE), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to C14.
NO : REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
C14 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
C15 CHECK FOR CORRECT LTM OPERATION
Disconnect all the LTM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the LTM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new LTM. REFER to BODY CLOSURES article. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test D: The Courtesy Lamps Do Not Turn On With One Door Open
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Remote Keyless Entry and Alarm schematic
and connector information.
Normal Operation
When any door is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the smart junction box (SJB). The SJB monitors
the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status, supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Door ajar switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST D: THE COURTESY LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH ONE DOOR OPEN
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
D1 CHECK THE DOOR AJAR PIDs
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Check the SJB door ajar switch PIDs (D_DR_SW, P_DR_SW, LRDR_SW, and RRDR_SW) while
opening and closing all the doors.
Do all the door ajar switch PID values agree with the door positions?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to D4.
NO : Go to D2.
D2 CHECK THE AJAR SWITCH OPERATION
Disconnect: Suspect Ajar Switch
Do the courtesy lamps illuminate?
YES : INSTALL a new door latch for the ajar switch in question. REFER to HANDLES, LOCKS,
LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to D3.
D3 CHECK THE AJAR SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance Between Suspect Door Ajar Switch And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the suspect ajar switch, harness side and ground as follows:
Location
LF
RF
LR
RR
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
CPL26
C525-5
(GN/VT)
CPL31
C603-5
(WH)
CPL36
C704-5
(GN)
CPL39
C804-5
(YE)
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to D4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
D4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test E: The Demand Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Interior Lamps schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) supplies voltage to the demand lamps on circuit CLN09 (YE/GN). The demand
lamps are grounded through circuit GD133 (BK).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SJB
PINPOINT TEST E: THE DEMAND LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
E1 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE COURTESY LAMPS
Open the driver door.
Do the courtesy lamps illuminate?
YES : Go to E2.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test A .
E2 CHECK CIRCUIT CLN09 (YE/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Checking Circuit For Open
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the fuse fails, repair circuit CLN09 (YE/GN) for a short to ground.
Connect a fused (10A) jumper wire between the SJB C2280d-21, circuit CLN09 (YE/GN), harness
side and battery positive.
Do the demand lamps illuminate when switched on?
YES : VERIFY the SJB fuse 25 (10A) is OK. If OK, go to E3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
E3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test F: An Individual Demand Lamp Is Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Interior Lamps schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) supplies voltage to the demand lamps on circuit CLN09 (YE/GN). The demand
lamps are grounded through circuit GD133 (BK).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Interior lamp
PINPOINT TEST F: AN INDIVIDUAL DEMAND LAMP IS INOPERATIVE
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
F1 CHECK CIRCUIT CLN09 (YE/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Suspect Demand Lamp
Key in ON position.
Measure the voltage between the suspect demand lamp, harness side and ground as follows:
Location
RH
vanity
mirror
lamp
LH
vanity
mirror
lamp
Overhead
console
Rear
interior
lamp
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
C906-1
CLN09
(YE/GN)
C907-1
CLN09
(YE/GN)
C930-3
CLN09
(YE/GN)
C923-3
CLN09
(YE/GN)
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to F2.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
F2 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance between the suspect demand lamp, harness side and ground as follows:
Location
RH
vanity
mirror
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
C906-2
GD133
(BK)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
lamp
LH
vanity
mirror
lamp
Overhead
console
Rear
interior
lamp
C907-2
GD133
(BK)
C930-1
GD133
(BK)
C923-2
GD133
(BK)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new interior lamp for the lamp in question. REFER to Interior Lamp. TEST
the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD133 (BK). TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test G: The Illuminated Entry Is Inoperative When Using The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Transmitter
Normal Operation
The illuminated entry provides interior lighting whenever the smart junction box (SJB) receives a doors unlock
request from the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter. The SJB provides voltage on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT)
for the courtesy lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
RKE system
SJB
PINPOINT TEST G: THE ILLUMINATED ENTRY IS INOPERATIVE WHEN USING THE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) TRANSMITTER
G1 CHECK FOR CORRECT RKE OPERATION
Using the RKE transmitter, lock and unlock the doors.
Do the doors lock and unlock?
YES : Go to G2.
NO : REFER to HANDLES, LOCKS, LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article to continue
diagnosis of the RKE system.
G2 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test H: The Battery Saver Does Not Deactivate After Time-Out
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Interior Lamps schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) provides a battery saver function. The battery saver function provides automatic
shutoff of the interior lamps (courtesy lamps and demand lamps) after a predetermined time has elapsed in order
to save battery power.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SJB
PINPOINT TEST H: THE BATTERY SAVER DOES NOT DEACTIVATE AFTER TIME-OUT
H1 CHECK THE SJB IGNITION SWITCH PID
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: SJB DataLogger
Monitor the SJB ignition switch PIDs (IGN_A_ECU, IGN_O_ECU, IGN_R_ECU and
IGN_S_ECU) while rotating the ignition switch through all positions.
Do the ignition switch PIDs agree with the ignition switch positions?
YES : Go to H2.
NO : REFER to STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article.
H2 CHECK CIRCUIT CLN09 (YE/GN) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280d
Key in ON position.
Operate the demand lamps.
Do the demand lamps illuminate?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
YES : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to H3.
H3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test I: The Puddle Lamp(s) are Inoperative
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Interior Lamps schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) provides voltage to the puddle lamps through circuit CLN25 (VT). The puddle
lamps have separate ground circuits. The LH exterior mirror is grounded through circuit GD133 (BK) and the
RH exterior mirror is grounded through circuit GD140 (BK/GN).
DTC B2A39 (Puddle Lamp Output Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open on the puddle lamp output circuit.
DTC B2A3A (Puddle Lamp Output Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that
sets when the SJB detects a short to ground on the puddle lamp output circuit. This DTC also sets as a
result when the SJB fuse 10 (15A) has failed or is removed.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Exterior mirror
SJB
PINPOINT TEST I: THE PUDDLE LAMP(S) ARE INOPERATIVE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
I1 CHECK THE PUDDLE LAMP OPERATION
Open any door and observe the puddle lamps.
Are both the puddle lamps inoperative?
YES : Go to I2.
NO : Go to I3.
I2 CHECK CIRCUIT CLN25 (VT) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Fig. 12: Connecting Fused (10A) Jumper Wire Between SJB C2280C-12, Circuit CLN25 (VT)
& Battery Positive
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
If the fuse fails, repair circuit CLN25 (VT) for a short to ground.
Connect a fused (10A) jumper wire between the SJB C2280c-12, circuit CLN25 (VT), harness side
and battery positive.
Do the puddle lamps illuminate?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to I5.
NO : REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR the circuit. RUN the on-demand self-test (required to
clear certain DTCs). CORRECT any unresolved DTCs. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for
normal operation.
I3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLN25 (VT) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Suspect Exterior Mirror
NOTE:
The courtesy lamps must be active during this test.
Open any door.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Measuring Voltage Between Suspect Exterior Mirror Connector, Harness Side And
Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the suspect exterior mirror connector, harness side and ground as
follows:
Location
RH
exterior
mirror
LH
exterior
mirror
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
C622-5
CLN25
(VT)
C516-5
CLN25
(VT)
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to I4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
I4 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance Between Suspect Exterior Mirror Connector, Harness Side
And Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the suspect exterior mirror connector, harness side and ground as
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
follows:
Location
RH
exterior
mirror
LH
exterior
mirror
ConnectorCircuit
Pin
C622-6
GD140
(BK/GN)
C516-6
GD133
(BK)
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new exterior mirror in question. REFER to REAR VIEW MIRRORS article.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : REPAIR the circuit in question. TEST the system for normal operation.
I5 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. RUN the on-demand self-test (required to clear certain DTCs). CORRECT
any unresolved DTCs. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
Pinpoint Test J: The Puddle Lamps Stay On Continuously
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Interior Lamps schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) provides voltage to the puddle lamps through circuit CLN25 (VT). The puddle
lamps have separate ground circuits. The LH exterior mirror is grounded through circuit GD133 (BK) and the
RH exterior mirror is grounded through circuit GD140 (BK/GN).
DTC B2A39 (Puddle Lamp Output Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
a short to voltage on the puddle lamp output circuit.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SJB
PINPOINT TEST J: THE PUDDLE LAMPS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
J1 CHECK CIRCUIT CLN25 (VT) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Do the puddle lamps continue to illuminate?
YES : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to J2.
J2 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test K: The Courtesy Lamps Are Inoperative From The Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Interior Lamps schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the instrument panel dimmer switch status on circuit CLN28 (GN/BU)
to determine if the courtesy lamps are requested. Based on the instrument panel dimmer switch status, the SJB
supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps through circuit VLN33 (GY/VT).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Instrument panel dimmer switch
SJB
PINPOINT TEST K: THE COURTESY LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE FROM THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
K1 CHECK THE DIMMABLE BACKLIGHTING DTCs
Key in ON position.
Use the recorded results from the SJB continuous and on-demand self-test.
Are any DTCs recorded?
YES : REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
NO : Go to K2.
K2 CHECK THE INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch C2298
Fig. 15: Checking Dimmer Control Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between the instrument panel dimmer switch C2298-2, circuit
CLN28 (GN/BU), harness side and the instrument panel dimmer switch C2298-4, circuit CLN27
(WH/BN), harness side.
Do the courtesy lamps illuminate?
YES : REMOVE the jumper wire. INSTALL a new instrument panel dimmer switch. REFER to
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND PANEL ILLUMINATION article. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : REMOVE the jumper wire. Go to K3.
K3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLN28 (GN/BU) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: SJB C2280b
Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280B-51, Circuit CLN28 (GN/BU) & Dimmer
Switch C2298-2
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-51, circuit CLN28 (GN/BU), harness side and the
instrument panel dimmer switch C2298-2, circuit CLN28 (GN/BU), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to K4.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
K4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector.
Pinpoint Test L: The Courtesy Lamps Do Not Turn On With the Liftgate Open
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Power Liftgate schematic and connector
information.
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article for Remote Keyless Entry and Alarm schematic
and connector information.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Normal Operation
When the liftgate is opened, the ajar switch (or liftgate/trunk module (LTM), if equipped) opens the circuit to
the smart junction box (SJB). The SJB monitors the ajar circuit, and based on the ajar status, supplies voltage to
the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT).
DTC B2721 (Liftgate/Decklid Ajar Output Short to Ground or Open) - is a continuous and on-demand
DTC that sets when the LTM detects a short to ground from the SJB, or liftgate ajar circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Liftgate ajar switch
LTM
SJB
PINPOINT TEST L: THE COURTESY LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH THE LIFTGATE OPEN
CAUTION: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to
use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
L1 CHECK THE LTM OR THE LIFTGATE LATCH
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: LTM C4174b or Liftgate Latch C479
Do the courtesy lamps illuminate?
YES : If equipped with a power liftgate, go to L4.
If equipped with a manual liftgate, INSTALL a new manual liftgate latch. REFER to HANDLES,
LOCKS, LATCHES AND ENTRY SYSTEMS article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : Go to L2.
L2 CHECK CIRCUIT CPL60 (BN/YE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: SJB C2280c
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance Between SJB C2280C-16, Circuit CPL60 (BN/YE), Harness
Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280c-16, circuit CPL60 (BN/YE), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to L3.
NO : REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
L3 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES
article. TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
L4 CHECK FOR CORRECT LTM OPERATION
Disconnect all the LTM connectors.
Check for:
corrosion
damaged pins
pushed-out pins
Connect all the LTM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new LTM. REFER to BODY CLOSURES article. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
INTERIOR LAMP
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Identifying Front Interior Lamp With Overhead Console
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
13776
54519A70
3
-
Description
Lamp assembly
Overhead console
Overhead console electrical connectors
(part of 17K745)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 19: Exploded View Of Rear Interior Lamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
13783
13776
3
-
Description
Interior lamp lens
Interior lamp
Interior lamp electrical connector (part of
14334)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Front
NOTE:
Do not pull down on the front of the overhead console.
1. Pull down on the rear of the overhead console to remove the overhead console from the retaining clips.
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2. Release the 4 retaining clips and remove the lamp assembly from the overhead console.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 20: Locating Retaining Clips On Lamp Assembly From Overhead Console
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Release the 6 retaining clips and remove the lens from the lamp assembly.
NOTE:
The bulbs can be pushed out from the backside of the lamp
assembly.
Replace the bulb(s) as necessary.
Fig. 21: Locating Retaining Clips On Lens From Lamp Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
REAR
4. Remove the interior lamp lens.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ACCESSORIES & BODY, CAB Interior Lighting - Edge & MKX
Fig. 22: Identifying Rear Interior Lamp Lens
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Release the 2 retaining clips (through the access holes) and remove the interior lamp.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Fig. 23: Locating Electrical Connector Retaining Clips
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Any interior lamps
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:06:25 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION
Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL
Item
Specification
Dye-Lite® ATF/Power Steering
Fluid Leak Detection Dye
164-R3701 (Rotunda)
MERCON® V Automatic
Transmission Fluid
MERCON® V
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US);
CXT-5-LM12 (Canada)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Power Steering Gear
Turning effort
Power Steering Pump
Flow
Minimum capacity
Pressure
Relief pressure
Power Steering Purge Vacuum
Air purge vacuum
Fill Capacity
-
-
Specification
35 N (7.86 lb)
7.25-8.87L/min
(1.91-2.34 gpm)
Fluid @ 74°-80°C
(165°-175°F)
Engine @ 2,000 rpm
5.0L/min
(1.32 gpm)
Fluid @ 74°-80°C (165°-175°F)
Pressure 500 kPa
(725 psi)
827 kPa (120 psi)
Fluid @ 74°-80°C (165°-175°F)
Engine @ 2,000 rpm
11.3-11.8 kPa
(1,638-1,711 psi)
68-85 kPa (20-25 in-Hg)
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
STEERING SYSTEM
The power steering system consists of the following components:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:47
10:46:44 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Power steering pump
Power steering fluid reservoir
Steering gear
Power steering lines
Steering column
Steering column shaft
The power steering system transfers driver inputs at the steering wheel to the front wheels of the vehicle. The
steering column, hydraulic system and linkages that transfer these driver inputs make up the steering system.
Gearing and hydraulic assist are used to significantly reduce steering efforts.
For information on the power steering fluid reservoir, power steering pump, power steering lines and steering
gear, refer to POWER STEERING article.
For information on the steering wheel, steering column and steering column shaft, refer to STEERING
COLUMN article.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
STEERING SYSTEM
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
100W/12 Volt DC UV Lamp
164-R0751
Evacuation Cap, Power Steering
211-265 or equivalent
Vacuum Pump Kit
416-D002 (D95L-7559-A) or
equivalent
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
scan tool
MATERIAL
Item
Dye-Lite® ATF/Power Steering Fluid Leak
Detection Dye
164-R3701 (Rotunda)
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
-
MERCON® V
Principles of Operation
Power Steering - The power steering system uses a vane-type pump to move the fluid from the reservoir to the
steering gear and through the rest of the steering hydraulic system. The power steering pump is mounted to the
engine and driven by the engine accessory drive belt. Power steering fluid flows into the pump from the
reservoir. The power steering fluid is trapped between the pump vanes and moved to the high-pressure side of
the pump, creating a flow of fluid. The restriction of this flow by the steering gear creates the pressure that
provides the steering assist. A combined pressure relief/flow valve is built into the pump to control the
maximum pressure and flow provided to the steering system. This action prevents damage to the system and
provides the correct level of assist during all engine speeds. While under pressure, the power steering fluid
flows through the high-pressure power steering line to the steering gear. The fluid exits the gear and flows
through the return line, cooler and finally to the reservoir. The reservoir slows the fluid, allows air to escape and
filters the fluid before returning it to the pump.
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Fluid level
Tire pressure
Tires
Drive belt
Drive belt tensioner
Steering column alignment
Tie-rod ends
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Suspension components
Steering column shaft U-joints
Steering column shaft bolts
Power steering reservoir baffle
Power steering reservoir screen
Pressure lines, fittings or O-rings
Power steering return hoses and clamps
Steering gear
Power steering pump
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch
3. Inspect the power steering fluid for the following conditions:
Aeration or foam: Purge the power steering system. Refer to POWER STEERING SYSTEM
PURGING.
Overheating or contamination: Flush the power steering system. Refer to POWER STEERING
SYSTEM FLUSHING.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to add power steering fluid to achieve the correct
level.
4. Check the fluid level and clean the power steering components.
With the ignition OFF:
check the power steering fluid level and add fluid as necessary.
wipe off any visible signs of fluid or residue build up.
NOTE:
Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops for an extended amount
of time. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from stop-to-stop several times.
5. Visually inspect the power steering hydraulic line/hose connections for leaks.
If a leak is detected at a threaded fitting or clamp plate joint, tighten to specification. If the leak is
still evident, visually inspect the O-rings or Teflon® seals. Install new O-rings or Teflon® seals as
necessary. Refer to POWER STEERING article.
If a leak is detected at a constant tension spring clamp, verify that the hose is not damaged and fully
installed on the hose fitting. Make sure that the constant tension spring clamp is positioned 2 mm
(0.078 in) from the end of the hose. If the leak remains, install a new constant tension spring clamp.
If a leak is detected at a screw clamp joint, verify that the hose is fully installed on the hose fitting
and the clamp is positioned 2 mm (0.078 in) from the end of the hose before tightening the screw
clamp. If the leak remains, install a new screw clamp. Refer to POWER STEERING article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
If a leak is detected at the Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch, install a new switch as necessary.
6. Visually inspect the power steering components for leaks.
If a leak is detected in the pressure line or return hose, install a new hose. Refer to POWER
STEERING article.
If a leak is detected in the power steering pump, install a new power steering pump. Refer to
POWER STEERING article.
NOTE:
On vehicles with rack-and-pinion steering gear, it may be necessary
to remove the bellows boot clamp from the steering gear bellows
boot to inspect for internal steering gear leaks.
If a leak is detected in the steering gear, repair or install a new steering gear. Refer to POWER
STEERING article.
If a leak is detected in the power steering reservoir, install a new reservoir. Refer to POWER
STEERING article.
7. For information on power steering leak detection, refer to COMPONENT TESTS.
8. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding.
9. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and Go to SYMPTOM CHART - STEERING
SYSTEM or Go to SYMPTOM CHART - NVH.
Steering System Symptom Definitions
Drift/Pull
Pull is described as a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road can cause a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path
and require constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
Drift/pull can be induced by conditions external to the vehicle, such as wind or road camber.
Excessive Steering Wheel Play
Excessive steering wheel play is a condition in which there is too much steering wheel movement before the
wheels move. A small amount of steering wheel free play is considered normal.
Lack of Assist or Inconsistent Assist
Lack of assist or inconsistent assist is experienced when the steering wheel effort is higher than normal. Hard
steering can remain constant through the full turn or occur near the end of a turn. It is important to know the
difference between hard steering/lack of assist and poor returnability/sticky steering.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Hard steering or lack of assist can result from either hydraulic or mechanical conditions. It is extremely
important to know if this concern occurs during driving or during high-effort parking maneuvers.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Poor returnability and sticky steering is used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to center after a
turn or steering correction is completed.
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to
maintain a straight path down a level road.
Symptom Chart - Steering System
SYMPTOM CHART - STEERING SYSTEM
Condition
Possible Sources
Steering has lack of assist or
inconsistent assist
Excessive steering wheel play
Steering system
drift/pull/wander
Poor returnability/sticky
steering
Contaminated power
steering fluid
Steering gear
Power steering pump
Restricted power
steering lines/hoses
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
Steering gear
Steering column
shaft/U-joints
Steering linkage
Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Steering column
shaft/U-joints
Steering gear mounts
Steering gear valve
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
INSTALL a new steering
column shaft. REFER to
STEERING COLUMN
article.
Go to Steering Linkage in
COMPONENT TESTS.
To continue the suspension
diagnosis, REFER to
SUSPENSION SYSTEM GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Binding steering
column shaft/U-joints
Loose, worn or
damaged steering
linkage
-
-
Action
Binding suspension
components
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
-
-
-
Binding steering
column bearing(s)
Binding dash boot seal
Steering gear
INSTALL a new steering
column. REFER to
STEERING COLUMN
article.
INSTALL a new dash boot
seal. REFER to STEERING
COLUMN article.
INSTALL a new steering gear
as necessary. REFER to
POWER STEERING article.
Symptom Chart - NVH
NOTE:
NVH symptoms should be identified using the diagnostic tools that are
available. For a list of these tools, an explanation of their uses and a glossary of
common terms, refer to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article. Since it is
possible any one of multiple systems may be the cause of a symptom, it may be
necessary to use a process of elimination type of diagnostic approach to
pinpoint the responsible system. If this is not the causal system for the
symptom, refer back to NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS article for the
next likely system and continue diagnosis.
SYMPTOM CHART - NVH
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
NOTE:
Some noise during an
extremely cold start (-12.2°C
[-10°F]) is normal and should
improve as the steering
system warms up (usually
within 60 seconds).
Steering system cold start
noise
NOTE:
It may be necessary to
remove the power steering
fluid reservoir to flush
contamination trapped in the
reservoir screen.
Blockage in the power
steering fluid reservoir
caused by power steering
fluid contamination
CHECK the power steering
fluid reservoir for
contamination. FLUSH the
power steering system as
necessary. REFER to POWER
STEERING SYSTEM
FLUSHING.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
-
Steering grunt or shudder
- occurs when turning
into or out of a turn at
low speeds (temperature
sensitive)
-
CHECK for leaks in the
system. REFER to Power
Steering Leak Test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
PURGE the air from the
system. REFER to POWER
STEERING SYSTEM
PURGING.
CHECK for leaks in the
system. REFER to Power
Steering Leak Test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
PURGE the air from the
system. REFER to POWER
STEERING SYSTEM
PURGING.
Go to Steering Gear
Grunt/Shudder in
COMPONENT TESTS.
Air in the steering hydraulic
system (aerated fluid)
Air in the steering hydraulic
system (aerated fluid)
Steering gear or power
steering hoses
NOTE:
Some amount of clonk noise
is considered acceptable. If in
doubt of the acceptability,
compare to another vehicle.
Steering system clonk hydraulic knocking
sound
Power steering pump
moan - loud humming
noise occurs when the
steering wheel is rotated
to the stop position.
Produces a 120-600 Hz
frequency that changes
with rpm
Air in the steering hydraulic
system (aerated fluid)
Low fluid and/or air in the
steering hydraulic system
(aerated fluid)
CHECK for leaks in the
system. REFER to Power
Steering Leak Test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
PURGE the air from the
system. REFER to POWER
STEERING SYSTEM
PURGING.
CHECK for leaks in the
system. REFER to Power
Steering Leak Test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
PURGE the air from the
system. REFER to POWER
STEERING SYSTEM
PURGING. If a pump moan
still exists, INSTALL a new
power steering pump. REFER
to POWER STEERING
article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Power steering fluid
reservoir or screen is
blocked or damaged
Power steering line/hose
grounded to chassis
-
-
-
-
Steering gear clunk occurs only while
cornering over a bump
(can be temperature
sensitive)
Feedback (rattle, chuckle
or knocking noise in the
steering gear) roughness is felt in the
steering wheel when the
vehicle is driven over
rough surfaces
-
-
-
INSPECT the power steering
lines/hoses. REPAIR as
necessary.
CHECK bolts, brackets and
bracket alignment. TIGHTEN
bolts to specification. REPAIR
or INSTALL new brackets as
necessary. REFER to POWER
STEERING article.
INSPECT the isolators for wear
or damage. REPAIR as
necessary.
INSPECT the steering gear for
loose mounting bolts.
TIGHTEN to specification as
necessary. REFER to POWER
STEERING article.
INSTALL a new steering
column shaft. REFER to
STEERING COLUMN
article.
INSPECT and INSTALL new
tie-rod ends as necessary. Go to
Steering Linkage in
COMPONENT TESTS.
TIGHTEN the bolts to
specification or INSTALL new
bolts as necessary. REFER to
POWER STEERING article.
TIGHTEN the bolts to
specification. REFER to
STEERING COLUMN
article.
REPAIR or INSTALL a new
steering column as necessary.
REFER to STEERING
COLUMN article.
Steering gear isolators
Steering gear
Steering column shaft/Ujoints damaged or worn
Loose, damaged or worn
tie-rod ends
Steering gear insulators or
mounting bolts loose or
damaged
Steering column shaft bolts
are loose
INSPECT the reservoir.
FLUSH or INSTALL a new
reservoir as necessary.
Power steering pump
brackets loose or
misaligned
-
Steering column damaged
or worn
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Power steering hiss or
whistle
Steering column shaft-tosteering gear is binding or
misaligned
Grounded or loose steering
column boot at the dash
panel
-
-
-
Steering column rattle
-
Restricted power steering
lines/hoses
Loose bolts or attaching
brackets
Loose, worn or
insufficiently lubricated
column bearings
Steering shaft insulators
damaged or worn
-
Steering gear squeak
REPAIR or INSTALL a new
steering column shaft as
necessary. REFER to
STEERING COLUMN
article.
REPAIR as necessary.
REPAIR or INSTALL a new
steering gear as necessary.
REFER to POWER
STEERING article.
INSTALL new power steering
lines/hoses as necessary.
REFER to POWER
STEERING article.
TIGHTEN the bolts to
specification.
LUBRICATE bearings or
INSTALL new steering column
bearings or steering column as
necessary. REFER to
STEERING COLUMN
article.
INSTALL new insulators.
REFER to STEERING
COLUMN article.
INSPECT the rubber spider
coupling for damage.
INSTALL a new steering
column shaft. REFER to
STEERING COLUMN
article.
If incorrect power steering fluid
is suspected, FLUSH the power
steering system. REFER to
POWER STEERING
SYSTEM FLUSHING. If
noise persists after system
flush, INSTALL a new steering
gear. REFER to POWER
STEERING article.
Damaged or worn steering
gear input shaft and valve
-
Steering column shaft
compressed or extended
Incorrect power steering
fluid in system
NOTE:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
-
-
Steering column squeak,
cracks or grinds
-
Power steering pump
noisy
INSTALL a new steering gear
as necessary. REFER to
POWER STEERING article.
MAKE SURE that the stone
shield is correctly installed and
that it is not making contact
with the steering shaft.
REPOSITION stone shield or
INSTALL a new stone shield
as necessary.
Stone shield (if equipped)
Insufficiently lubricated
steering shaft bushings
LUBRICATE the steering shaft
and shaft tube seals.
Loose or misaligned
steering column shrouds
TIGHTEN or ALIGN the
steering column shrouds.
Steering wheel rubbing
against steering column
shrouds
REPOSITION the steering
column shrouds.
Upper or lower bearing
sleeves out of position
REPOSITION the bearing
sleeves.
INSTALL a new power
steering pump as necessary.
REFER to POWER
STEERING article.
Acceptable condition.
CHECK for a leak in the
system. REFER to Power
Steering Fluid Leak Test in
COMPONENT TESTS.
PURGE the air from the
system. REFER to POWER
STEERING SYSTEM
PURGING.
Power steering pump
Power steering fluid flow
into the bypass valve of the
pump valve housing, with
fluid temperature below 54°
C (130°F)
Power steering pump
relief noise
Power steering pump
whine noise
Steering gear rotary seal
-
VERIFY that the steering gear
is the source of the noise. It
may be necessary to replicate
the customer operating
conditions (fluid temperature,
turning rate of steering
wheel) to get the squeak to
reoccur.
Aerated fluid
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
-
High speed shake or
shimmy - occurs at high
speeds
Damaged power steering
pump
Worn or damaged steering
linkage components
INSTALL a new power
steering pump as necessary.
REFER to POWER
STEERING article.
Go to Steering Linkage in
COMPONENT TESTS.
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: Steering Has Lack of Assist or Inconsistent Assist
NOTE:
Hard steering or lack of assist is experienced when the steering wheel effort
exceeds specifications. Hard steering can remain constant through the full turn,
occur near the end of a turn or differ right to left. It is important to know the
difference between hard steering/lack of assist and poor returnability/sticky
steering.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Power steering fluid contamination
Steering gear
Power steering pump
Power steering hoses
PINPOINT TEST A: STEERING HAS LACK OF ASSIST OR INCONSISTENT ASSIST
A1 CHECK FOR POWER STEERING FLUID CONTAMINATION
Check the power steering fluid for contamination.
Is the power steering fluid contaminated?
YES : FLUSH the power steering system. REFER to POWER STEERING SYSTEM
FLUSHING. CHECK the system for normal operation. If assist concern still exists, go to A2.
NO : Go to A2.
A2 CHECK THE STEERING ASSIST WITH THE ENGINE RPM RAISED
NOTE:
Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops for an extended amount
of time. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
Set the engine at 2,100 rpm and turn the steering wheel fully to the left and right.
Is steering assist normal with the engine rpm raised?
YES : INSTALL a new power steering pump. REFER to POWER STEERING article.
NO : Go to A3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
A3 CHECK FOR A CHANGE OF ASSIST ON LEFT AND RIGHT TURNS
With the engine at idle, turn the steering wheel fully to the left and to the right.
Does the steering assist change when turning from right to left?
YES : INSTALL a new steering gear. REFER to POWER STEERING article.
NO : Go to A4.
A4 CHECK THE STEERING LINES AND HOSES FOR RESTRICTIONS
Inspect the steering lines and hoses for damage, kinks or restrictions.
Are the steering lines or hoses damaged, kinked or restricted?
YES : INSTALL new lines or hoses as necessary.
NO : Go to A5.
A5 MONITOR THE ENGINE RPM CHANGES
NOTE:
Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops for an extended amount of
time. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is on a flat dry surface, all accessories are in
the OFF position and that the steering system is at normal operating
temperature.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Start the engine.
With the engine at idle, raise the power steering fluid temperature to 74-80°C (165-176°F) by
rotating the steering wheel fully to the left and right several times.
While monitoring the Engine Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) PID with the scan tool, turn the
steering wheel quickly to the left stop position and then to the right stop position.
Note the engine rpm during the turns.
Does the engine rpm change (even temporarily) more than 30 rpm when turning the steering
wheel?
YES : INSTALL a new steering gear. REFER to POWER STEERING article.
NO : INSTALL a new power steering pump. REFER to POWER STEERING article.
Pinpoint Test B: Excessive Steering Wheel Play
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Steering linkage
Steering column shaft U-joints
Steering gear
PINPOINT TEST B: EXCESSIVE STEERING WHEEL PLAY
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
B1 CHECK THE STEERING LINKAGE
Carry out the Steering Linkage in COMPONENT TESTS.
Is the steering linkage OK?
YES : Go to B2.
NO : INSTALL new steering linkage components as necessary. Refer to the appropriate Steering
System article for the procedure.
B2 CHECK THE STEERING COLUMN SHAFT
Inspect the steering column shaft U-joints and fasteners for looseness.
Are the U-joints and fasteners OK?
YES : INSTALL a new steering gear as necessary. REFER to POWER STEERING article.
NO : TIGHTEN the steering column shaft fasteners or INSTALL a new steering column shaft.
REFER to STEERING COLUMN article.
Pinpoint Test C: Steering System Drift/Pull/Wander
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Steering gear
Steering column shaft
Steering column shaft U-joints
Steering gear mounts
PINPOINT TEST C: STEERING SYSTEM DRIFT/PULL/WANDER
C1 CHECK THE STEERING COLUMN SHAFT
NOTE:
Be sure to keep the clockspring centered when disconnecting the
intermediate shaft. Refer to the appropriate RESTRAINTS article for the
procedure.
Check the steering column and shaft for grounding.
Disconnect the steering column shaft at the steering column.
Inspect the steering column shaft U-joints for looseness or wear.
Are the steering column shaft U-joints OK?
YES : Go to C2.
NO : INSTALL a new steering column shaft as necessary. REFER to STEERING COLUMN
article.
C2 CHECK THE STEERING GEAR MOUNTING
Check the steering gear mounts for looseness or wear.
Are the steering gear mounts OK?
YES : Go to C3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
NO : INSTALL a new steering gear as necessary. REFER to POWER STEERING article.
C3 CHECK THE STEERING GEAR
Carry out the Steering Gear Valve in COMPONENT TESTS.
Is the steering gear valve OK?
YES : REFER to SUSPENSION SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to diagnose
suspension system drift/pull/wander.
NO : REPAIR or INSTALL a new steering gear as necessary. REFER to POWER STEERING
article.
Component Tests
Power Steering Fluid Leak Test
NOTE:
This test should only be carried out if a leak in the system has not been
detected during a thorough visual inspection. Refer to INSPECTION AND
VERIFICATION.
1. Check the power steering fluid level. If necessary, add the specified power steering fluid.
2. Remove the power steering pump reservoir cap and tightly install the Power Steering Evacuation Cap to
the power steering pump reservoir.
3. Install the Vacuum Pump Kit to the Power Steering Evacuation Cap.
4. Using the Vacuum Pump Kit, apply 68-85 kPa (20-25 in-Hg) of vacuum to the power steering system.
5. Observe the vacuum gauge for 30 seconds. If the vacuum gauge reading drops more than 3 kPa (0.88 inHg) a leak is present.
6. Remove the Vacuum Pump Kit.
NOTE:
Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops for an extended amount of
time. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
7. Start the engine. With the engine at idle, raise the power steering fluid temperature to 74-80°C (165-176°
F) by rotating the steering wheel fully to the left and right several times.
8. Visually inspect the system for leaks. If a leak is evident, repair as necessary. If a leak is not evident, add
the specified UV fluorescent tracer dye to the power steering fluid. Use 14.78 mL (1/2 oz) of dye solution
for every 1.89L (2 qt) of power steering fluid.
NOTE:
Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops for an extended amount of
time. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
9. Start the engine. With the engine at idle, raise the power steering fluid temperature to 74-80°C (165-176°
F) by rotating the steering wheel fully to the left and right several times.
10. Using the 100W/12 Volt DC UV Lamp, inspect the system for traces of UV dye. Repair as necessary.
Steering Gear Valve Test
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to JACKING AND LIFTING article.
Raise the vehicle until the front wheels are off the ground.
NOTE:
Do not hold the steering wheel while carrying out this step.
2. Start the engine.
If the steering wheel rotates in either direction (with no hand input), install a new steering gear.
Refer to POWER STEERING article.
Steering Gear Grunt/Shudder Test
1. Start and run the vehicle to operating temperature.
2. Set engine idle speed to 1,200 RPM.
NOTE:
Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for an extended amount
of time. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
3. Rotate the steering wheel to the RH stop, then turn the steering wheel 90 degrees back from that position.
Slowly turn the steering wheel back and forth approximately one-twelfth of a full turn.
4. Turn the steering wheel another 90 degrees. Slowly turn the steering wheel back and forth approximately
one-twelfth of a full turn.
5. Repeat the test with the power steering fluid at different temperatures.
6. If a light grunt is heard or a low (50-200 Hz) shudder is present, this is a normal steering system
condition.
7. If a loud grunt is heard or a strong shudder is felt, purge the power steering system. Refer to POWER
STEERING SYSTEM PURGING. If a loud grunt or strong shudder still exists, check the power
steering lines/hoses for restrictions or damage and repair as necessary. Refer to POWER STEERING
article. If the lines/hoses are OK, install a new steering gear. Refer to POWER STEERING article.
Steering Linkage Test
NOTE:
Excessive vertical motion of the studs relative to the sockets may indicate
excessive wear.
1. With the vehicle on the ground and the parking brake applied, start the vehicle and carry out the
following:
Have an assistant rotate the steering wheel back and forth 360 degrees and watch for relative
motion of the studs in the steering linkage ball sockets.
Watch for loose steering gear mounting.
2. As an additional check, with the Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) and the front wheels raised off the
ground, grasp the wheel at the front and rear and watch for excessive play or binding in the joints while
trying to steer the wheels.
3. Install new components if necessary. Tighten any worn, damaged or loose components. Refer to the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
appropriate Steering System article for the procedure.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
POWER STEERING SYSTEM FLUSHING
MATERIAL
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
NOTE:
Specification
MERCON® V
Do not mix oil types. Any mixture or any unapproved oil may lead to seal
deterioration and leaks. A leak may ultimately cause loss of fluid, which may
result in a loss of power steering assist.
1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the power steering fluid from the reservoir.
3. Disconnect the return hose from the reservoir.
Remove the clamp.
4. Plug the power steering fluid reservoir inlet port.
5. Attach an extension hose to the return hose.
NOTE:
Do not reuse the power steering fluid that has been flushed from the
power steering system.
6. Place the open end of the extension hose into a suitable container.
NOTE:
Do not overfill the reservoir.
7. Fill the reservoir as needed with the specified fluid.
NOTE:
Do not allow the power steering pump to run completely dry of power
steering fluid. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
8. Start the engine while simultaneously turning the steering wheel to lock and then immediately turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Avoid turning the steering wheel without the engine running as this may
cause air to be pulled into the steering gear.
NOTE:
Do not overfill the reservoir.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
9. Fill the reservoir as needed.
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9, turning the steering wheel in the opposite direction each time, until the fluid exiting
the power steering fluid return hose is clean and clear of foreign material.
11. Remove the extension hose from the return hose.
12. Remove the plug from the fluid reservoir inlet port.
13. Install the power steering return hose to the reservoir.
Install the clamp.
NOTE:
It is necessary to correctly fill the power steering system to remove any
trapped air and completely fill the power steering system components.
If, after correctly filling the power steering system, there is power steering
noise accompanied by evidence of aerated fluid and there are no fluid
leaks, it may be necessary to purge the power steering system. For
additional information, refer to POWER STEERING SYSTEM PURGING.
14. Fill the power steering system. For additional information, refer to POWER STEERING SYSTEM
FILLING.
POWER STEERING SYSTEM PURGING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Evacuation Cap, Power Steering
211-265
Vacuum Pump Kit
416-D002 (D95L-7559-A) or
equivalent
MATERIAL
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
NOTE:
Specification
MERCON® V
If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, premature
power steering pump failure may result. The condition may occur on pre-
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
delivery vehicles with evidence of aerated fluid or on vehicles that have had
steering component repairs.
NOTE:
A whine heard from the power steering pump can be caused by air in the
system. The power steering purge procedure must be carried out prior to
any component repair for which power steering noise complaints are
accompanied by evidence of aerated fluid.
1. Remove the power steering pump reservoir cap. Check the fluid.
2. Raise the front wheels off the floor. Refer to the appropriate Service Information article for the procedure.
3. Tightly insert the Power Steering Evacuation Cap into the reservoir and connect the Vacuum Pump Kit.
Fig. 1: Identifying Power Steering Evacuation Cap And Vacuum Pump Kit
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Start the engine.
5. Using the Vacuum Pump Kit, apply vacuum and maintain the maximum vacuum of 68-85 kPa (20-25 inHg).
6. If equipped with Hydro-Boost®, apply the brake pedal twice.
NOTE:
Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for an extended amount
of time. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
7. Cycle the steering wheel fully from stop-to-stop 10 times.
8. Stop the engine.
9. Release the vacuum and remove the Vacuum Pump Kit and the Power Steering Evacuation Cap.
NOTE:
Do not overfill the reservoir.
10. Fill the reservoir.
Use approved transmission fluid.
11. Start the engine.
12. Install the Power Steering Evacuation Cap and the Vacuum Pump Kit. Apply and maintain the maximum
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
vacuum of 68-85 kPa (20-25 in-Hg).
Fig. 2: Identifying Power Steering Evacuation Cap And Vacuum Pump Kit
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for an extended amount
of time. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
13. Cycle the steering wheel fully from stop-to-stop 10 times.
14. Stop the engine, release the vacuum and remove the Vacuum Pump Kit and the Power Steering
Evacuation Cap.
NOTE:
Do not overfill the reservoir.
15. Fill the reservoir as needed and install the reservoir cap.
16. Visually inspect the power steering system for leaks.
NOTE:
Do not overfill the reservoir.
17. Fill the reservoir as needed and visually inspect the power steering system for leaks.
18. Install the reservoir cap.
POWER STEERING SYSTEM FILLING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Evacuation Cap, Power Steering
211-265
211-327
Fill Adapter Manifold, Power
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
Steering
416-D002 (D95L-7559-A) or
equivalent
Vacuum Pump Kit
MATERIAL
Item
MERCON® V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM (or XT-5-QMC) (US); CXT-5-LM12
(Canada)
Specification
MERCON® V
Fig. 3: Power Steering System Filling Components
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Description
Power steering fluid reservoir
Control valve (vacuum side)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
3
4
Control valve (fluid container side)
Fluid container
NOTE:
If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly,
premature power steering pump failure may result. The condition can
occur on pre-delivery vehicles with evidence of aerated fluid or on
vehicles that have had steering component repairs.
1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
2. Install the Power Steering Evacuation Cap, Power Steering Fill Adapter Manifold and Vacuum Pump Kit
as shown in the illustration.
NOTE:
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The Power Steering Fill Adapter Manifold control valves are in the OPEN
position when the point of the handles face the center of the Power
Steering Fill Adapter Manifold.
Close the Power Steering Fill Adapter Manifold control valve (fluid side).
Open the Power Steering Fill Adapter Manifold control valve (vacuum side).
Using the Vacuum Pump Kit, apply 68-85 kPa (20-25 in-Hg) of vacuum to the power steering system.
Observe the Vacuum Pump Kit gauge for 30 seconds.
If the Vacuum Pump Kit vacuum gauge reading drops more than 3 kPa (0.88 in-Hg), correct any leaks in
the power steering system or the Power Steering Evacuation Cap, Power Steering Fill Adapter Manifold
and Vacuum Pump Kit before proceeding.
NOTE:
The Vacuum Pump Kit gauge reading will drop slightly during this step.
8. Slowly open the Power Steering Fill Adapter Manifold control valve (fluid side) until power steering
fluid completely fills the hose and then close the control valve.
9. Using the Vacuum Pump Kit, apply 68-85 kPa (20-25 in-Hg) of vacuum to the power steering system.
10. Close the Power Steering Fill Adapter Manifold control valve (vacuum side).
11. Slowly open the Power Steering Fill Adapter Manifold control valve (fluid side).
12. Once power steering fluid enters the fluid reservoir and reaches the minimum fluid level indicator line on
the reservoir, close the Power Steering Fill Adapter Manifold control valve (fluid side).
13. Remove the Power Steering Evacuation Cap, Power Steering Fill Adapter Manifold and Vacuum Pump
Kit.
14. Install the reservoir cap.
NOTE:
Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for an extended amount
of time. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
NOTE:
There will be a slight drop in the power steering fluid level in the reservoir
when the engine is started.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 GENERAL INFORMATION Steering System - General Information - Edge & MKX
15. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from stop-to-stop.
16. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Do not overfill the reservoir.
17. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the reservoir with the specified fluid.
18. Install the reservoir cap.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:46:44 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
Material
Item
High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with Bittering
Agent (US only)
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A (Canada); or equivalent (yellow
color)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super
Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 (Canada); or
equivalent
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 (US); CXC-51-A (Canada)
Specification
ESE-M12A4-A
Fill Capacity
-
WSS-M97B51-A1
-
WSS-M2C930-A
-
-
-
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor bolt
Catalyst monitor sensor
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor bolt
Cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
Heat shield bolt and nut
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
Knock sensor (KS) bolt
Mass airflow (MAF) sensor screws
PCM nuts
Variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid bolt
Nm
10
48
10
10
10
48
20
2
5
10
lb-ft
35
35
15
-
lb-in
89
89
89
89
18
44
89
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS
The electronic engine controls consist of the:
PCM.
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:44
11:26:40 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
heated oxygen sensor (HO2S).
catalyst monitor sensor.
variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
knock sensor (KS).
The PCM carries out the following functions:
accepts input from various engine sensors to compute the fuel flow rate necessary to maintain a
prescribed air/fuel ratio throughout the entire engine operational range.
outputs a command to the fuel injectors to meter the appropriate quantity of fuel.
The CHT sensor:
sends the PCM a signal indicating cylinder head temperature.
resistance decreases as cylinder head temperature increases.
The CMP sensor:
sends the PCM a signal indicating camshaft position used for fuel synchronization.
The CKP sensor:
sends the PCM a signal indicating crankshaft position.
is essential for calculating spark timing.
The MAF sensor:
uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot
wire causes it to cool.
The HO2S:
creates a voltage signal dependent on exhaust oxygen content.
provides feedback information to the PCM used to calculate fuel delivery.
The catalyst monitor sensor:
monitors oxygen content after it flows through the catalytic converter.
provides a voltage to the PCM used to calculate catalytic converter integrity.
The KS:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:40 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
is used to detect engine detonation.
sends a voltage signal to the PCM.
is able to provide a signal which retards the ignition timing, as necessary.
The VCT oil control solenoid:
is an electrically controlled hydraulic valve that directs engine oil to the camshaft phaser. Once the PCM
transmits a signal, the solenoid moves a valve spool, directing oil into the camshaft phaser cavity. This
action changes valve timing by either inducing an advance or retard condition. The camshaft is, thereby
repositioned in relation to crankshaft timing and allows for optimum engine performance and lower
emissions.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS
Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Material
Item
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP (US); Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada); or equivalent
Specification
WSS-M2C930-A
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:40 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
3
4
5
6
W500214
6B288
14A464
W500214
6B288
Description
LH camshaft position sensor (CMP)
electrical connector
LH CMP bolt
LH CMP
RH CMP electrical connector
RH CMP bolt
RH CMP
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
RH sensor
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
AND FILTERING article.
LH sensor
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. For additional information, refer to INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION
AND FILTERING article.
Both sensors
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:40 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
3. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
NOTE:
Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Fig. 2: Exploded View Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
W701542
W701669
6K342
6C070
5
14A464
6
7
6D327
6C315
Description
Heat shield nut
Heat shield bolt
Heat shield
Rubber grommet cover
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
electrical connector
CKP sensor bolt
CKP sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:40 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the LH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM article.
3. Remove the bolt, nut and the heat shield.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Remove the rubber grommet cover.
5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
6. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Fig. 3: Exploded View Of Powertrain Control Module (PCM) With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
3
4
N804795
12A650
12A696
Description
PCM electrical connector (part of
12B637) (3 required)
PCM nut (2 required)
PCM
PCM gasket
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:40 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL
NOTE:
PCM replacement DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys.
1. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation procedure. For additional information, refer to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article.
2. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 2 nuts and the PCM.
Remove the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the gasket and the PCM.
2. Install the 2 PCM nuts.
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable
Module Installation procedure. For additional information, refer to MODULE CONFIGURATION
article.
5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS). Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. For additional
information, refer to ANTI-THEFT - PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) article.
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:40 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
3
W709287
12B579
Description
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector
MAF sensor screw (2 required)
MAF sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:40 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Exploded View Of Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
6G004
Description
Cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
electrical connector
CHT sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the lower intake manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
2. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove and discard the CHT sensor.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Do not reuse the CHT sensor, install a new sensor.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) AND CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:40 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 6: Exploded View Of Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) & Catalyst Monitor Sensor With Torque
Specifications - RH Sensors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
9F472
3
14A464
4
9G444
Description
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical
connector
HO2S
Catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connector
Catalyst monitor sensor
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:40 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Exploded View Of Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) & Catalyst Monitor Sensor With Torque
Specifications - LH Sensors
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
14A464
2
9F472
3
14A464
4
9G444
Description
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical
connector
HO2S
Catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connector
Catalyst monitor sensor
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures in this article.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen
Sensor
303-476 (T94P-9472-A)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:41 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Material
Item
High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 (US); CXC-51-A (Canada)
Specification
ESE-M12A4-A
-
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
RH sensor
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
Both sensors
2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
NOTE:
If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock
lubricant to assist in removal.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Fig. 8: Identifying Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) & Special Tool (303-476)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:41 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen
Sensor
303-476 (T94P-9472-A)
Material
Item
High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant
XL-2 (US); CXG-2-B (Canada)
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 (US); CXC-51-A (Canada)
Specification
ESE-M12A4-A
-
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
NOTE:
If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock
lubricant to assist in removal.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Fig. 9: Identifying Catalyst Monitor Sensor & Special Tool (303-476)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst
monitor sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) OIL CONTROL SOLENOID
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:41 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Fig. 10: Exploded View Of Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid With Torque
Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W500215
2
6B297
Description
Variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil
control solenoid bolt
VCT oil control solenoid
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
2. Remove the bolt and the variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Material
Item
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with
Bittering Agent (US only)
Specification
WSS-M97B51-A1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:41 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
VC-7-B (US); CVC-7-A (Canada); or equivalent
(yellow color)
Fig. 11: Exploded View Of Knock Sensor (KS) With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
9N271
8565
14A464
W500310
12A699
Description
Coolant tube
O-ring seal
Knock sensor (KS) electrical connector
KS bolts (2 required)
KS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the thermostat housing. For additional information, refer to ENGINE COOLING article.
2. Remove the lower intake manifold. For additional information, refer to ENGINE - 3.5L article.
3. Remove the coolant tube.
Discard the O-ring seal.
4. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector.
5. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS.
To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:41 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Electronic Engine Controls - Edge & MKX
Lubricate the new O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:26:41 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
2008 SUSPENSION
Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Brake caliper anchor plate bolt
Brake hose bracket bolt
Halfshaft nut (inner)
Halfshaft nut (outer)
Lower arm cam adjuster nut
N.m
Lower arm outboard bolt (1)
Parking brake cable bolt
Shock absorber lower nut
Shock absorber upper nut
Stabilizer bar bracket nut
Stabilizer bar link upper and lower nut
Subframe nut
Subframe bushing brace bolt
Toe link inboard nut
Toe link outboard bolt
Upper arm inboard bolt
Upper arm outboard bolt
Wheel bearing and wheel hub bolt
Wheel knuckle bracket bolt
Wheel knuckle bracket-to-frame bolts
Wheel speed sensor bolt
(1) Refer to procedure.
lb. ft.
lb-in
55
7
275
175
150
-
41
203
129
111
-
62
-
18
80
25
55
35
90
25
200
150
150
150
133
150
47
7
13
59
18
41
26
66
18
148
111
111
111
98
111
35
-
62
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
REAR SUSPENSION
The rear suspension consists of the following components:
Coil springs
Lower arms
Shock absorbers
Stabilizer bar
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:21
10:50:16 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Stabilizer bar bushings
Stabilizer bar links
Toe links
Upper arms
Wheel bearing and wheel hub assemblies
Wheel knuckles
Wheel studs
The rear suspension utilizes an independent design. This suspension system allows the wheels to react to road
imperfections independent of each other. This independent action offers improved isolation from the effects of
jounce and rebound.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
REAR SUSPENSION
Refer to SUSPENSION SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WHEEL BEARING AND WHEEL HUB
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Front Hub Remover
Tool Number
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part Number
W712435
W712435
W520516
W500766
W520516
W5000766
W520414
Description
Halfshaft nut (outer)
Halfshaft nut (inner)
Toe link outboard nut
Toe link outboard bolt
Lower arm outboard nut
Lower arm outboard bolt
Stabilizer bar link upper nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
8
9
Part Number
W712459
W520214
Description
Shock absorber lower flag bolt
Shock absorber lower nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
10
W711241
11
12
13
14
15
2C203
2C190
W500010
-
16
17
W500022
W712754
18
19
W500766
W520516
Brake caliper anchor plate bolts (2
required)
Brake caliper and anchor plate assembly
Brake disc
Wheel speed sensor
Wheel speed sensor bolt
Wheel speed sensor harness clips (part of
2C190) (2 required)
Brake hose bracket bolt
Wheel bearing and wheel hub bolt (4
required)
Toe link outboard bolt
Toe link outboard nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
W711240
2
3
4
5
2C299
2C203
W712754
6
7
8
W500222
2C186 RH/ 2C187 LH
-
Description
Brake caliper anchor plate bolts (2
required)
Brake caliper and anchor plate assembly
Wheel hub and bearing assembly
Brake disc
Wheel bearing and wheel hub bolt (4
required)
Wheel speed sensor bolt
Wheel speed sensor
O-ring (part of 2C186 RH/ 2C187 LH)
REMOVAL
All vehicles
NOTE:
Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense.
New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if
replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or
substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly
to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
NOTE:
Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the
brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
2. Remove the 2 anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside.
Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire.
3. Remove the brake disc.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
NOTE:
Do not discard the inner nut at this time.
4. Remove the outer and inner halfshaft nuts.
Discard the outer nut.
5. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the hub and bearing assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Separating Halfshaft From Hub & Bearing Assembly Using Special Tool (205-D070)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove the brake hose bracket bolt.
7. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and detach the sensor from the wheel knuckle.
8. Unclip the wheel speed sensor harness from the upper arm and position the wheel speed sensor assembly
aside.
9. Remove and discard the upper arm outboard bolt and nut.
Separate the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.
10. Position a suitable screw type jack stand under the lower arm.
11. Remove and discard the shock absorber lower bolt and nut.
12. Remove and discard the stabilizer bar link upper nut.
13. Remove and discard the toe link outboard bolt and nut.
14. With the wheel knuckle supported by the screw type jack stand, remove and discard the toe link outboard
bolt and nut.
15. Position the half shaft up through the wheel knuckle opening.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Positioning Halfshaft Through Wheel Knuckle Opening & Secure Halfshaft Aside
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
16. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and detach the sensor from the wheel bearing and wheel hub.
All vehicles
17. Remove the 4 bolts and the wheel bearing and wheel hub.
Discard the bolts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
NOTE:
Before tightening the upper arm and lower arm bolts, use a jackstand to raise
the rear suspension until the distance between the center of the hub and the lip
of the fender is equal to the measurement taken in the removal procedure (curb
height).
1. Position the wheel bearing and wheel hub and install 4 new bolts.
Tighten to 133 N.m (98 lb. ft.).
AWD vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
2. Position the half shaft through the wheel knuckle and into the wheel bearing and wheel hub.
Fig. 6: Positioning Halfshaft Into Wheel Bearing & Hub
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Position the wheel knuckle onto the toe link and lower arm.
Loosely install the new toe link outboard bolt and nut.
Loosely install the new lower arm outboard bolt and nut.
Loosely install the new shock absorber lower bolt and nut.
Using the jack, raise the suspension and install the upper arm outboard bolt and nut.
Tighten the bolt to 150 N.m (111 lb. ft.).
Tighten the toe link outboard bolt to 150 N.m (111 lb. ft.).
Tighten the lower arm outboard bolt to 150 N.m (111 lb. ft.).
Tighten the shock absorber lower nut to 150 N.m (111 lb. ft.).
Position the stabilizer bar link and install the new upper link nut.
Tighten the nut to 35 N.m (26 lb. ft.).
Install the brake hose bracket bolt.
Tighten the bolt to 7 N.m (62 lb. ft.).
Position the wheel speed sensor and install the bolts.
Tighten the bolt to 7 N.m (62 lb. ft.).
Clip the 2 wheel speed sensor harness retainers to the upper arm.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
FWD vehicles
14. Attach the wheel speed sensor to the wheel bearing and wheel hub and install the bolt.
Tighten to 23 N.m (17 lb. ft.).
All vehicles
15. Install the brake disc.
16. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 55 N.m (41 lb. ft.).
AWD vehicles
NOTE:
Do not tighten the rear halfshaft nut with the vehicle on the ground. The
nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered to the
ground. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE:
Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
17. Position the halfshaft in the hub and use the previously removed halfshaft nut to seat the halfshaft.
Tighten to 275 N.m (203 lb. ft.).
Remove and discard the nut.
NOTE:
Install and tighten the new halfshaft nut to specification within five
minutes of starting it on the threads. Always install a new halfshaft nut
after loosening or when not tightening within the specified time or damage
to the components may occur.
18. Install a new inner halfshaft nut.
Tighten to 275 N.m (203 lb. ft.).
19. Install a new outer halfshaft nut.
Tighten to 175 N.m (129 lb. ft.).
All vehicles
20. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
WHEEL STUDS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Exploded View Of Wheel Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
2C299
1107
Description
Wheel bearing and wheel hub assembly
Wheel stud
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel bearing and wheel hub. For additional information, refer to WHEEL BEARING
AND WHEEL HUB.
2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub.
Discard the wheel stud.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made by the
original wheel stud.
2. Using a suitable press, install the wheel stud.
3. Install the wheel bearing and wheel hub. For additional information, refer to WHEEL BEARING AND
WHEEL HUB.
WHEEL KNUCKLE
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
NOTE:
Tool Name
Front Hub Remover
Tool Number
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
equivalent
All wheel drive (AWD) shown in illustration, front wheel drive (FWD) similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Identifying Wheel Knuckle Components With Torque Specifications (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W712459
W520214
Description
Shock absorber lower flag bolt
Shock absorber lower nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
W520516
W500766
W500766
W520516
5A995 LH/ 5A994 RH
W520516
W500766
W500568
W520516
5A757 RH/ 5A758 LH
W713905
14
W500724
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
W712435
W711241
2C203
2A635
W500021
23
W712435
Lower arm outboard nut
Lower arm outboard bolt
Upper arm outboard bolt
Upper arm outboard nut
Wheel knuckle
Toe link outboard nut
Toe link outboard bolt
Wheel knuckle bracket bolt
Wheel knuckle bracket nut
Wheel knuckle arm bracket
Wheel knuckle bracket-to-frame bolts (3
required)
Wheel knuckle bracket-to-frame bolts (2
required)
Parking brake spring
Parking brake shoe
Inner halfshaft nut
Brake anchor plate bolts (2 required)
Brake caliper and anchor plate assembly
Brake disc
Parking brake cable
Parking brake cable rear bracket bolts (2
required)
Outer halfshaft nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Identifying Wheel Knuckle Components With Torque Specifications (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
24
25
26
27
Part Number
2C190
W500010
Description
Wheel speed sensor bolt (part of 2C190)
Wheel speed sensor
Wheel speed sensor harness clips
Wheel speed sensor bolt
REMOVAL
All vehicles
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the
vehicle resting on the wheel and tires or incorrect clamp load and bushing
damage may occur.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang
from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
2. Remove the 2 anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside.
Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire.
3. Remove the brake disc.
4. Disconnect the parking brake shoe retaining spring and remove the spring and brake shoe assembly.
5. Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the parking brake cable.
6. Remove the nut and disconnect the stabilizer bar link and parking brake cable bracket from the wheel
knuckle.
Discard the nut.
7. Remove the bolt, unclip the 2 retainers and position aside the wheel speed sensor.
8. Remove the brake hose bracket bolt.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
9. Remove and discard the outer and inner halfshaft nuts.
10. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel bearing and wheel hub.
Fig. 10: Separating Halfshaft From Hub & Bearing Using Special Tool (205-D070)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
11. Position a suitable jackstand under the lower arm.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 11: Positioning Suitable Jackstand Under Lower Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Remove and discard the lower shock bolt and nut.
Remove and discard the upper arm outboard bolt and nut.
Remove and discard the lower arm outboard bolt and nut.
Remove and discard the toe link outboard bolt and nut.
AWD vehicles
16. Position the halfshaft through the wheel knuckle opening and secure the halfshaft aside.
Fig. 12: Positioning Halfshaft Through Wheel Knuckle Opening & Secure Halfshaft Aside
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
17. Remove the 5 wheel knuckle bracket-to-frame bolts and the wheel knuckle.
Discard the bolts.
18. Remove and discard the wheel knuckle bracket bolt nut.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the
vehicle resting on the wheel and tires or incorrect clamp load and bushing
damage may occur.
1. Install the wheel knuckle bracket bolt and nut.
Tighten the bolt to 150 N.m (111 lb. ft.).
2. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 5 wheel knuckle bracket-to-frame bolts.
Tighten the bolts to 47 N.m (35 lb. ft.).
AWD vehicles
3. Position the halfshaft into the wheel bearing and hub.
Fig. 13: Positioning Halfshaft Into Wheel Bearing & Hub
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
All vehicles
4. Position the wheel knuckle onto the toe link and lower arm.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the lower arm outboard bolt at this time.
5. Loosely install the lower arm outboard bolt.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the toe link outboard bolt at this time.
6. Loosely install the toe link outboard bolt.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the shock absorber lower bolt at this time.
7. Loosely install the shock absorber lower bolt.
8. Using the jack, raise the suspension and install the upper arm outboard bolt and nut.
9. If installing a new wheel knuckle, tighten the lower outboard bolt in the following sequence.
1. Tighten the bolt to 150 N.m (111 lb. ft.).
2. Loosen the bolt 180 degrees.
3. Tighten the bolt to 80 N.m (59 lb. ft.).
4. Tighten the bolt an additional 90 degrees.
10. If installing the original wheel knuckle, tighten the lower arm outboard bolt to 80 N.m (59 lb. ft.).
Tighten the bolt an additional 90 degrees.
11. Tighten the toe link outboard bolt to 150 N.m (111 lb. ft.).
12. Tighten the shock absorber lower nut to 80 N.m (59 lb. ft.).
AWD vehicles
13. Using a suitable installation tool, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
14. Install the inner halfshaft nut.
Tighten to 275 N.m (203 lb. ft.).
15. Install the outer halfshaft nut.
Tighten to 175 N.m (129 lb. ft.).
All vehicles
16. Install the brake hose bracket bolt.
Tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
17. Position the wheel speed sensor, clip the 2 retainers to the upper arm and install the bolt.
Tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The parking brake cable bracket is fastened to the wheel knuckle with the
same bolt as the stabilizer bar link.
18. Connect the parking brake cable bracket and the stabilizer bar link to the wheel knuckle.
Tighten the bolt to 35 N.m (26 lb. ft.).
19. Connect the parking brake cable and install the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 18 N.m (13 lb. ft.).
20. Install the parking brake shoe and retaining spring.
21. Install the brake disc.
22. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the anchor plate bolts.
Tighten to 55 N.m (41 lb. ft.).
23. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
LOWER ARM
Fig. 14: Exploded View Of Lower Arm With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
5A648
5K978
5K751
W711798
Description
Lower arm
Lower arm cam bolt
Lower arm cam adjuster
Lower arm cam nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the spring. For additional information, refer to SPRING.
2. Remove the cam adjuster nut, cam adjuster and cam bolt.
Discard the cam bolt and nut.
To install, tighten to 150 N.m (111 lb. ft.).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
UPPER ARM
Fig. 15: Exploded View Of Upper Arm With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
5500
W500766
W520516
W500766
W520516
Description
Upper arm
Upper arm inboard bolt
Upper arm inboard nut
Upper arm outboard bolt
Upper arm outboard nut
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the
vehicle resting on the wheel and tires or incorrect clamp load and bushing
damage may occur.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
Position a suitable jackstand under the lower arm and raise the suspension.
Remove and discard the upper arm outboard bolt and nut.
Carefully lower the lower arm and remove the jack.
Position the jackstand under the subframe.
NOTE:
The upper arm inboard bolt cannot be removed without first lowering the
subframe.
6. Remove and discard the 2 subframe bushing brace bolts.
Fig. 16: Locating Subframe Bushing Brace Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove the subframe forward nut.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Locating Subframe Forward Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The upper arm inboard bolt cannot be removed without first lowering the
subframe.
NOTE:
The rear springs are under pressure. The jack must be lowered slowly
while relieving the spring pressure.
8. Remove the subframe rearward nut and lower the jack.
Fig. 18: Locating Subframe Rearward Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove and discard the upper arm inboard bolt and nut and remove the upper arm.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
1. Position the upper arm and loosely install the upper arm inboard bolt and nut.
2. Raise the jack and install the subframe rearward nut.
Tighten to 90 N.m (66 lb. ft.).
3. Install the subframe forward nut.
Tighten to 90 N.m (66 lb. ft.).
4. Install the 2 subframe bushing brace bolts.
Tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb. ft.).
5. Reposition the jack under the lower arm and raise the jack.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
6. Loosely install the upper arm outboard bolt and nut.
7. Remove the jack.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
8. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
9. With the weight of the vehicle on the wheel and tire, tighten the upper arm outboard bolt to 150 N.m (111
lb. ft.).
10. With the weight of the vehicle on the wheel and tire, tighten the upper arm inboard bolt to 150 N.m (111
lb. ft.).
TOE LINK
Fig. 19: Exploded View Of Toe Link With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part Number
W500766
W520516
5K978
5K751
W711798
5500
Description
Toe link outboard bolt
Toe link outboard nut
Toe link inboard cam bolt
Toe link adjuster cam
Toe link inboard nut
Toe link
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the
vehicle resting on the wheel and tires or incorrect clamp load and bushing
damage may occur.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
2. Remove and discard the toe link inboard nut, cam adjuster and cam bolt.
3. Remove and discard the toe link outboard bolt and nut then remove the toe link.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
1. Position the toe link and loosely install the toe link outboard bolt and nut.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
2. Loosely install the toe link inboard bolt and nut.
3. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
4. With the weight of the vehicle on the wheel and tire, tighten the toe link outboard bolt to 150 N.m (111
lb. ft.).
5. With the weight of the vehicle on the wheel and tire, tighten the toe link inboard nut to 200 N.m (148 lb.
ft.).
STABILIZER BAR AND LINK
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 20: Exploded View Of Stabilizer Bar & Link With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
Part Number
W520414
5B493
-
4
5
6
7
5A772
5A486
W520414
-
Description
Stabilizer bar bracket nuts (4 required)
Stabilizer bar bracket (2 required)
Stabilizer bar bushing (part of 5B493) (2
required)
Stabilizer bar
Stabilizer bar link
Stabilizer bar link nut (4 required)
Parking brake cable (part of 2A635)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
2. Remove and discard the stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
To install, tighten to 35 N.m (26 lb. ft.).
3. Remove and discard the stabilizer bar link lower nuts and remove the stabilizer bar links.
To install, tighten to 35 N.m (26 lb. ft.).
4. Remove and discard the stabilizer bar bracket nuts and remove the stabilizer bar brackets and the
stabilizer bar.
To install, tighten to 55 N.m (41 lb. ft.).
5. Inspect the stabilizer bar bushings and install a new bushing(s), if necessary.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
SPRING
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool Name
Front Hub Remover
Tool Number
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 21: Exploded View Of Spring With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W500766
W520516
Description
Toe link outboard bolt
Toe link outboard nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W520516
W500766
5A648
W712459
W520214
W711241
11
12
13
14
15
16
2C203
W712435
2C190
W500010
-
17
18
19
20
W500766
W520516
W712435
Lower arm outboard nut
Lower arm outboard bolt
Lower arm
Spring
Spring lower seat
Shock absorber lower flag bolt
Shock absorber lower nut
Brake caliper anchor plate bolts (2
required)
Brake caliper and anchor plate assembly
Brake disc
Inner halfshaft nut
Wheel speed sensor
Wheel speed sensor bolt
Wheel speed sensor harness clips (2
required)
Upper arm outboard bolt
Upper arm outboard nut
Wheel speed sensor bolt (part of 2C190)
Outer halfshaft nut
REMOVAL
All vehicles
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service
expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if
installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser
quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the
vehicle resting on the wheel and tires or incorrect clamp load and bushing
damage may occur.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang
from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
2. Remove the 2 anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire.
Remove the brake disc.
Remove the nut and disconnect the stabilizer bar link and parking brake cable bracket from the wheel
knuckle.
Discard the nut.
Remove the bolt, unclip the 2 retainers from the upper arm and position aside the wheel speed sensor.
Remove the brake hose bracket bolt and position the hose aside.
3.
4.
5.
6.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
7. Remove and discard the outer and inner halfshaft nuts.
8. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the hub and bearing.
Fig. 22: Separating Halfshaft From Hub & Bearing Using Special Tool (205-D070)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Position a suitable jackstand under the lower arm.
Remove and discard the shock absorber lower nut and flag bolt.
Remove and discard the upper arm outboard bolt and nut.
Remove and discard the toe link outboard bolt and nut.
Remove and discard the lower arm outboard bolt and nut.
AWD vehicles
14. Position the halfshaft through the wheel knuckle opening and secure the halfshaft aside.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 23: Positioning Halfshaft Through Wheel Knuckle Opening & Secure Halfshaft Aside
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
WARNING: The coil spring is under extreme load. Care must be taken at all
times when removing or installing a loaded spring. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
15. Pull outward on the wheel knuckle while lowering the jackstand and remove the spring.
Inspect the spring upper and lower seats, remove and discard seats as necessary.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. If removed, position a new lower seat into the lower arm with the recess in the seat aligned with the
projection on the lower arm.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 24: Positioning Lower Seat Into Lower Arm With Recess In Seat Aligned With Projection On
Lower Arm
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. On installation, position the spring onto the lower arm with the end of the spring 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in)
from the step on the spring seat.
Fig. 25: Positioning Spring Onto Lower Arm With End Of Spring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
WARNING: The coil spring is under extreme load. Care must be taken at all
times when removing or installing a loaded spring. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
3. Pull outward on the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
4. Position the halfshaft into the wheel knuckle opening.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 26: Positioning Halfshaft Into Wheel Bearing & Hub
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
All vehicles
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
5. Raise the jackstand and loosely install the lower arm outboard bolt and nut.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
6. Position the toe link and loosely install the toe link outboard bolt and nut.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
7. Position the upper arm and loosely install the upper arm outboard bolt and nut.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
8. Loosely install the lower shock nut and flag bolt.
9. Lower and remove the jackstand.
AWD vehicles
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
10. Using a suitable installation tool, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
11. Install the inner halfshaft nut.
Tighten to 275 N.m (203 lb. ft.).
12. Install the outer halfshaft nut.
Tighten to 175 N.m (129 lb. ft.).
All vehicles
13. Install the brake hose bracket bolt.
Tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
14. Position the wheel speed sensor, clip the 2 retainers to the upper arm and install the wheel speed sensor
and bolt.
Tighten the bolt to 7 N.m (62 lb-in).
15. Connect the parking brake cable bracket and stabilizer bar link to the wheel knuckle and install the nut.
Tighten the nut to 35 N.m (26 lb. ft.).
16. Install the brake disc.
17. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 anchor plate bolts.
Tighten to 55 N.m (41 lb. ft.).
18. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
19. With the weight of the vehicle on the wheel and tire, tighten the lower shock nut to 80 N.m (59 lb. ft.).
20. With the weight of the vehicle on the wheel and tire, tighten the upper arm outboard bolt to 150 N.m (111
lb. ft.).
21. With the weight of the vehicle on the wheel and tire, tighten the toe link outboard bolt to 150 N.m (111
lb. ft.).
22. With the weight of the vehicle on the wheel and tire, tighten the lower arm outboard bolt in the following
sequence.
1. Tighten to 80 N.m (59 lb. ft.).
2. Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
23. Check and if necessary, align the vehicle. For additional information, refer to SUSPENSION SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article.
SHOCK ABSORBER
REMOVAL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 27: Exploded View Of Shock Absorber With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
W520504
18080
18017
W712459
W520214
Description
Shock absorber upper nuts (2 required)
Shock absorber
Shock absorber upper bushing
Shock absorber lower flag bolt
Shock absorber lower nut
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Edge & MKX
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the
vehicle resting on the wheel and tires or incorrect clamp load and bushing
damage may occur.
NOTE:
The new shock absorber is shipped with a strap securing it in the compressed
position.
1. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
2. Remove and discard the shock absorber upper nuts.
3. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
4. Position a suitable jackstand under the lower arm.
5. Remove the shock absorber lower bolt, flag nut and shock absorber.
Discard the bolt and flag nut.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position the shock absorber and loosely install the shock absorber lower bolt and flag nut.
Remove the jackstand.
Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
With the weight of the vehicle on the wheel and tire, tighten the shock absorber lower bolt to 80 N.m (59
lb. ft.).
5. Install the shock absorber upper nuts.
Tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb. ft.).
6. Install the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:50:17 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
2008 BRAKES
Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Fill Capacity
High Performance DOT 3 Motor
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65803-821 ml (1.69-1.73 pt)
Vehicle Brake Fluid
A1
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
ABS module screws
Brake caliper brake tube-to-hydraulic control unit (HCU) fittings
HCU bracket-to-frame bolts
HCU bracket-to-HCU bolt
Master cylinder brake tube-to-HCU fittings
Stability control sensor cluster nuts
Steering wheel rotation sensor bolts
Wheel speed sensor bolts
Nm
5
22
25
15
27
9
1
7
lb-ft
16
18
11
20
-
lb-in
44
80
9
62
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
ANTI-LOCK CONTROL
ABS With Roll Stability Control (RSC) And Traction Control
The ABS with roll stability control (RSC) and traction control consists of the following components:
Hydraulic control unit (HCU)
ABS module (also controls the RSC system and traction control system)
Stability/traction control switch
Steering angle sensor module (SASM)
Stability control sensor cluster (contains the accelerometer[s], roll rate sensor and yaw rate sensor)
Front wheel speed sensors
Front wheel speed sensor tone rings (integral to the halfshafts)
Rear wheel speed sensors
Rear wheel speed sensor tone rings are:
integral to the halfshaft on all wheel drive [AWD] vehicles.
integral to the wheel hub and bearing assembly on front wheel drive [FWD] vehicles.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:12
10:01:06 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Brake pressure transducer (integral to the HCU)
Brake fluid level switch
The ABS prevents wheel lock-up by monitoring the wheel speed sensors and actuating the valves in the HCU
which modulates the brake pressure to the brake calipers. By preventing the wheels from locking up, the driver
is able to maintain steering control and stop in the shortest possible distance under most conditions. The traction
control system utilizes the same components as the ABS to prevent wheel spin and help maintain vehicle
control during acceleration. The RSC system utilizes the same components as the ABS and the traction control
systems and also monitors the steering wheel rotation sensor and the stability control sensor cluster to assist in
stabilizing the vehicle during abrupt maneuvers.
The front wheel speed sensor tone rings are integral to the front halfshafts. Refer to FRONT DRIVE
HALFSHAFTS article.
On AWD vehicles, the rear wheel speed sensor tone rings are integral to the rear halfshafts. Refer to REAR
DRIVE HALFSHAFTS article.
On FWD vehicles, the rear wheel speed sensor tone rings are integral to the wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Refer to REAR SUSPENSION article.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
ANTI-LOCK CONTROL
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
73III Automotive Meter
105-R0057 or equivalent
Flex Probe Kit
105-R025B or equivalent
Rotunda Active Wheel Speed
Sensor Tester
105-R0110
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Principles of Operation
Standard ABS
The standard ABS module manages anti-lock braking to maintain vehicle control during deceleration.
When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the ABS module does a preliminary electrical check and, at
approximately 20 km/h (12 mph), the hydraulic pump motor is turned on for approximately 1/2 second. During
this time a buzzing or humming noise may be heard and a vibration maybe felt in the brake pedal. This is a
normal condition. Any malfunction of the ABS disables the stability assist and the ABS warning indicator
illuminates. However, the power-assist braking system functions normally.
The ABS module monitors and compares the rotational speed of each wheel. Wheel speeds are measured by the
wheel speed sensor, which electrically senses each tooth of the sensor ring as it passes through the magnetic
field of the sensor. When the ABS module detects an impending wheel lock, the ABS module commands the
hydraulic pump motor on and commands the hydraulic control unit (HCU) to open and close the appropriate
solenoid valves to modulate the brake pressure to the individual brake caliper(s). Once the affected wheel(s)
return to the desired speed, the ABS module commands the HCU to return the solenoid valves to their normal
position and normal base brake operation is restored.
In extreme cold conditions (temperature less than -25°C [-13°F]), the ABS module will briefly operate the
hydraulic pump motor when the accelerator is pressed. This is done to warm the brake fluid.
Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD)
On initial application of the brake pedal, full pressure is applied to the rear brakes. The ABS module then uses
wheel speed input to calculate an estimated rate of deceleration. Once vehicle deceleration exceeds a
predetermined threshold, the ABS module closes the appropriate isolation valves in the Hydraulic Control Unit
(HCU) to hold the rear brake pressure constant while allowing the front brake pressure to build. This creates a
balanced braking condition between the front and rear wheels and minimizes the chance of rear wheel lockup
during hard braking. As the vehicle decelerates, the valves are opened to increase the rear brake pressure in
proportion to the front brake pressure.
A slight bump sensation may be felt in the brake pedal when Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD) is active.
If ABS is disabled due to DTCs being present in the ABS module, EBD will continue to function unless the
DTCs are for wheel speed sensors or the HCU. When EBD is disabled, the ABS warning indicator and (if
equipped) the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) warning indicator will be illuminated.
ABS with Traction Control, Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Roll Stability Control (RSC)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
The ABS module with traction control and roll stability control (RSC) performs the same functions as the
standard ABS module. It also performs additional functions specific to traction control and RSC.
Traction Control
When the drive wheels lose traction and begin to spin, with vehicle speed under 100 km/h (62 mph), the ABS
module commands the hydraulic pump motor on and commands the HCU to open and close the appropriate
solenoid valves to modulate the brake pressure to the brake caliper(s) while simultaneously sending a request to
the PCM over the high-speed controller area network (HS-CAN) bus to reduce engine torque to maintain
vehicle traction. The PCM accomplishes this by minor incremental timing changes and fewer fuel injector
pulses until the ABS module ends the request. The request ends when the driven wheel speed returns to the
desired speed. After the vehicle speed exceeds 100 km/h (62 mph), the traction control is accomplished only
through the PCM torque control.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The electronic stability control (ESC) system constantly monitors the vehicle motion relative to the intended
course. This is done by using sensors to compare the steering input and the yaw rate sensor with that of the
actual vehicle motion. The ESC system monitors information from the throttle position (TP) sensor, the steering
angle sensor module (SASM) (steering wheel angle and rate of change) and a yaw rate sensor (integral to the
stability control sensor cluster) that measures changes in vehicle direction. If the ESC system determines from
all these inputs that the vehicle is unable to travel in the intended direction, the system adjusts the brake torque
at specific wheels in response to direct measurement of the vehicle motion and reduces engine torque to allow
the vehicle to follow the intended course.
When the ESC system activates, any of the following can occur:
A rumble or grinding sound much like ABS or traction control
A small deceleration or a reduction in the acceleration of the vehicle
The ESC indicator flashes
If the driver's foot is on the brake pedal, a vibration will be felt in the pedal much like ABS
Roll Stability Control (RSC)
The roll stability control (RSC) system constantly monitors the vehicle motion relative to the intended course.
This is done by using sensors to compare the steering input and brake application with that of the actual vehicle
motion. The system does not activate when the vehicle is traveling in reverse; however, the standard ABS and
traction control continue to function as usual. The RSC system monitors information from the wheel speed
sensors, the TP sensor, the steering angle sensor module (SASM) (steering wheel angle and rate of change) and
a roll-rate sensor (integral to the stability control sensor cluster) that measures changes in vehicle motion. If the
RSC system determines from all these inputs that conditions exist for a potential roll-over event, the system
adjusts the brake torque at specific wheels in response to direct measurement of the vehicle roll motion and
reduces engine torque to make the vehicle more stable. By adjusting brake torque, the system can reduce the
cornering forces and, therefore, the total roll moment acting on the vehicle.
When the RSC system activates, any of the following can occur:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
A rumble or grinding sound much like ABS or traction control
A small deceleration or a reduction in the acceleration of the vehicle
The RSC indicator flashes
If the driver's foot is on the brake pedal, a vibration will be felt in the pedal much like ABS
If the event is severe enough and the driver's foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal will move to apply
higher brake forces. A whooshing sound can also be heard from under the instrument panel in an event
this severe
Some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake pedal when the system checks itself. The brake pedal
moves when an active test of the brake booster is run. During this test a small amount of pressure is generated at
the master cylinder, but no pressure is generated in the brake calipers.
Stability/Traction Control Switch
The stability/traction control switch is hard wired to the instrument cluster module. The instrument cluster
module communicates the stability/traction control switch status to the ABS module via the HS-CAN bus.
The stability/traction control switch allows the driver to control use of the stability control/traction assist
system. This is independent of the ABS function, which cannot be switched OFF by the driver. The stability
control/traction assist system status is indicated by a light in the stability/traction control switch. When the
stability/traction control switch is set to OFF, the system is disabled below 60 km/h (37 mph). The system will
automatically restore to full functionality every time the vehicle speed exceeds 70 km/h (43 mph) or when the
ignition switch is turned to the OFF position and back to the ON position. However, the stability/traction
control switch OFF indicator remains illuminated until the switch is pressed. The ABS function continues to
work as designed unless the yellow ABS warning indicator is also illuminated. Normal braking function always
occurs, unless the red brake warning indicator is illuminated.
Stability Control Sensor Cluster
The stability control sensor cluster consists of the yaw rate sensor, roll-rate sensor, lateral accelerometer and
longitudinal accelerometer. The lateral accelerometer measures the acceleration which corresponds to the force
involved when the vehicle slides sideways. This acceleration has 2 forms. The first is the centrifugal
acceleration which is generated when the vehicle travels around in a circle. The second is the acceleration due to
gravity. On level ground there is no contribution from this acceleration. However, if the vehicle is parked
sideways on a bank or incline, the sensor measures some lateral acceleration due to gravity even though the
vehicle is not moving.
The longitudinal accelerometer measures the acceleration corresponding to the force involved when the vehicle
moves forward and rearward in the horizontal plane, along the centerline of the front and rear wheels.
The yaw rate sensor measures the relative vehicle motion about the vertical axis through its center of gravity.
The roll-rate sensor measures the rate of rotation along the front to rear horizontal axis.
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
The steering angle sensor module (SASM) measures the rate of rotation of the steering wheel by monitoring the
steering wheel rotation ring as it passes through the sensor gap. The SASM uses the HS-CAN bus to transmit
information to the ABS module about whether the steering wheel is being turned left or right and how far it is
being turned.
ABS Module Configuration
A new ABS module must be configured after installation. Refer to Programmable Module Installation in
MODULE CONFIGURATION article. If installing a new ABS module with RSC, the module must also be
calibrated.
ABS Module Calibration
NOTE:
The installation of a new stability control sensor cluster does not require ABS
module calibration.
The ABS module must be calibrated if any of the following is occurring or have occurred:
A new ABS module has been installed.
A new HCU has been installed.
A new steering wheel rotation sensor has been installed.
The ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster flashes once every 2 seconds.
Follow the scan tool directions for ABS module calibration. The ABS module should be configured before it is
calibrated. Calibration is required for the ABS module to learn the "at rest" or "zero" position of the stability
control components. If a DTC is set for any stability control component, the DTC must be cleared before
carrying out the calibration procedure. The ESC warning indicator will flash after clearing the DTCs that are
associated with the stability control system. If a DTC is retrieved after calibration, refer to the ABS MODULE
DTC CHART .
Stability Control Sensor Cluster Calibration
When a new stability control sensor cluster is installed, the cluster must be calibrated. Follow the scan tool
instructions for the calibration procedure. When carrying out the cluster calibration, the vehicle must be on a
level surface, must not be moving and the ignition switch must be in the RUN position.
Inspection And Verification
1. Verify the customer concern by applying the brakes under different conditions.
2. Verify the base brake system operates correctly by pressing and releasing the brake pedal with the
ignition switch in the OFF position. If the stoplamps do not operate correctly, refer to EXTERIOR
LIGHTING article. If the stoplamps operate correctly, proceed to the next step.
3. Verify the base brake system operates correctly. If any concerns are present, address them before
continuing with any ABS concerns. Refer to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
If the base brake system operates correctly, proceed to the next step.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
4. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Electrical
Base brake system
Brake booster vacuum
hose
Brake fluid level
Hydraulic control unit
(HCU)
Steering components,
suspension components
and tire size
Steering angle sensor
module (SASM)
Tire pressure
Tire size or mismatched
tires
Wheel and tire sizes
ABS module
Battery junction box
(BJB) fuse(s):
15 (40A)
50 (10A)
57 (40A)
71 (10A)
Brake fluid level switch
Brake on/off (BOO)
switch
Smart junction box
(SJB) fuse(s):
34 (5A)
35 (10A)
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Stability control sensor
cluster
Stability/traction control
switch
Wheel speed sensor
5. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
6. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
NOTE:
The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power
and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
7. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article, No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
8. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
refer to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
9. Carry out the network test.
If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article.
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
10. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the ABS module, the instrument
cluster and the steering angle sensor module.
11. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the ABS MODULE DTC CHART , the Steering
Angle Sensor Module DTC Chart and/or the Instrument Cluster Module DTC Chart. For all other DTCs,
refer to the Master DTC Chart in MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC MODULES article.
12. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, go to Symptom Chart.
ABS MODULE DTC CHART
DTC
Description
B1317
Battery Voltage High
Source
Action
NOTE:
Battery voltage above 16 volts will cause
DTC B1317 to set. Verify battery and
ABS Module charging system condition prior to
diagnosing this DTC.
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
B1318
Battery Voltage Low
NOTE:
Battery voltage below 10 volts will cause
DTC B1318 to set. Verify battery and
ABS Module charging system condition prior to
diagnosing this DTC.
Go to Pinpoint Test A .
NOTE:
If other DTCs are present, REPAIR them
before installing a new component.
B1342
ECU is Faulted
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the ABS
ABS Module module self-test. RETRIEVE the DTCs. If
DTC B1342 is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
B211B
B2477
C1095
C1096
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CHECK for water intrusion into stability
control sensor cluster connector C3037.
REPAIR as necessary. If OK, INSTALL a
Satellite ECU is Faulted
ABS Module new sensor cluster. REFER to Stability
Control Sensor Cluster. CLEAR the DTCs.
CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake
pedal not applied.
CONFIGURE the ABS module. REFER to
MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If
Module Configuration Failure ABS Module DTC B2477 is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module. REPEAT the
self-test.
ABS Hydraulic Pump Motor
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Circuit Failure
ABS Hydraulic Pump Motor
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test B .
Circuit Open
NOTE:
If other DTCs are present, REPAIR them
before installing a new component.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
ABS Module at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the
DTCs.If DTC C1115 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
C1115
ABS Power Relay Output
Short Circuit to Battery
C1140
The ABS module receives brake fluid level
information from the instrument cluster over
the high-speed controller area network (HSCAN) bus. The instrument cluster receives
the brake fluid information from the smart
junction box (SJB) over the medium-speed
Hydraulic Base Brake Failure ABS Module controller area network (MS-CAN) bus. This
DTC indicates that a low fluid level
condition exists or there is an issue with the
brake fluid level switch, wiring, instrument
cluster or HS-CAN bus.
If there are other HS-CAN bus DTCs
present, REFER to MODULE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article
to diagnose the HS-CAN bus.
If there are no HS-CAN bus DTCs present,
VERIFY that the brake fluid is at the correct
level and ADJUST as necessary.
If the brake fluid level is OK, REFER to
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC),
MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING
CHIMES article to diagnose the red brake
warning indicator and the brake fluid level
switch.
C1145
C1155
C1165
C1175
Speed Wheel Sensor RF Input
Circuit Failure
Speed Wheel Sensor LF Input
Circuit Failure
Speed Wheel Sensor RR
Input Circuit Failure
Speed Wheel Sensor LR
Input Circuit Failure
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test C .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test C .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test C .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test C .
NOTE:
If other DTCs are present, REPAIR them
before installing a new component.
C1185
ABS Power Relay Output
Circuit Failure
C1194
ABS Outlet Valve Coil LF
Circuit Failure
CLEAR all DTCs. RETRIEVE DTCs. If
ABS Module DTC C1185 is retrieve again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If C1194 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
ABS Module If only DTC C1194 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
C1198
ABS Inlet Valve Coil LF
Circuit Failure
ABS Module
C1210
ABS Outlet Valve Coil RF
Circuit Failure
ABS Module
C1214
ABS Inlet Valve Coil RF
Circuit Failure
ABS Module
C1222
C1233
C1234
C1235
C1236
Speed Wheel Mismatch
Speed Wheel LF Input Signal
Missing
Speed Wheel RF Input Signal
Missing
Speed Wheel RR Input Signal
Missing
Speed Wheel LR Input Signal
Missing
ABS Module
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If C1198 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
If only DTC C1198 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If C1210 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
If only DTC C1210 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If C1214 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
If only DTC C1214 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test D .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test D .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test D .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
C1242
ABS Outlet Valve Coil LR
Circuit Failure
C1246
ABS Outlet Valve Coil RR
Circuit Failure
C1250
ABS Inlet Valve Coil LR
Circuit Failure
C1254
ABS Inlet Valve Coil RR
Circuit Failure
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If C1242 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
ABS Module If only DTC C1242 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If C1246 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
ABS Module If only DTC C1246 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If C1250 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
ABS Module If only DTC C1250 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
ABS Module If C1254 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
If only DTC C1254 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
C1278
C1279
C1280
C1281
C1282
C1288
Steering Wheel Angle 1 and 2
Signal Faulted
Yaw Rate Sensor Circuit
Failure
Yaw Rate Sensor Signal Fault
Lateral Accelerometer Circuit
Failure
Lateral Accelerometer Signal
Fault
Brake Pressure Transducer
Main/Primary Input Circuit
Failure
C1329
ABS Outlet Valve Coil RF
Circuit Excessive
Temperature
C1330
ABS Outlet Valve Coil LR
Circuit Excessive
Temperature
C1331
ABS Outlet Valve Coil RR
Circuit Excessive
Temperature
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test E .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test F .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test F .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test F .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test F .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test G .
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new HCU. REFER to Hydraulic Control
ABS Module
Unit (HCU). CALIBRATE the ABS module.
FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the
calibration procedure. CLEAR the DTCs.
CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake
pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
ABS Module
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
ABS Module new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
C1332
ABS Outlet Valve Coil LF
Circuit Excessive
Temperature
ABS Module
C1333
ABS Inlet Valve Coil LR
Circuit Excessive
Temperature
ABS Module
C1334
ABS Inlet Valve Coil LF
Circuit Excessive
Temperature
ABS Module
C1335
ABS Inlet Valve Coil RF
Circuit Excessive
Temperature
ABS Module
C1336
ABS Module
ABS Inlet Valve Coil RR
Circuit Excessive
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Temperature
C1404
Traction Control Valve Rear
Circuit Failure
ABS Module
C1410
Traction Control Valve LF
Circuit Failure
ABS Module
C1446
C1516
C1517
Brake Switch Circuit Failure ABS Module
Roll Rate Sensor Signal Fault ABS Module
Roll Rate Sensor Circuit Fault ABS Module
C1527
Traction Control Rear Valve
Circuit Excessive
Temperature
ABS Module
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If C1404 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
If only DTC C1404 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If C1410 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
If only DTC C1410 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
Go to Pinpoint Test H .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
Go to Pinpoint Test F .
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
If any other DTCs are present, REPAIR
those DTCs first. CLEAR all DTCs. TEST
DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph)
and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
RETRIEVE DTCs.
If the DTC is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
C1528
Traction Control LF Valve
Circuit Excessive
Temperature
C1530
Dynamic Stability Control RF
ABS Module
Valve Circuit Excessive
Temperature
C1531
Dynamic Stability Control LF
ABS Module
Valve Circuit Excessive
Temperature
C1730
Reference Voltage Out of
Range (+5 V)
ABS Module
Dynamic Stability Control
Valve RF Circuit Failure
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
ABS Module If C1957 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
If only DTC C1957 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
C1957
ABS Module
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
C1958
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
CLEAR all DTCs. TEST DRIVE the vehicle
above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT
at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If C1958 is retrieved again along with one or
more other ABS valve coil DTCs, go to
Pinpoint Test A .
Stability Assist Control Valve
ABS Module If only DTC C1958 is retrieved again,
LF Circuit Failure
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW
the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT
the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
NOTE:
REPAIR all other DTCs prior to diagnosing
this DTC.
C1963
C1991
Stability Control Inhibit
Warning
Module Calibration Failure
This DTC is for information only. CLEAR
ABS Module all DTCs. INSPECT the stability control
sensor cluster mounting surface for damage
and foreign material. REPAIR or CLEAN as
necessary. INSPECT the stability control
sensor cluster for correct installation. REFER
to Stability Control Sensor Cluster.
NOTE:
If other DTCs are present, REPAIR them
ABS Module before diagnosing DTC C1991.
Go to Pinpoint Test I .
C2769
C2770
Longitudinal Acceleration
Sensor Electrical Failure
Longitudinal Acceleration
Sensor Plausibility Failure
U0073
Control Module
Communication Bus Off
U0115
Lost Communication with
ECM/PCM - Secondary
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test F .
ABS Module Go to Pinpoint Test F .
REFER to MODULE
ABS Module COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article
to diagnose the HS-CAN bus.
REPAIR all other DTCs first. If DTC U0115
is still present, REFER to MODULE
ABS Module
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article
to diagnose the HS-CAN bus.
REPAIR all other DTCs first. If DTC U0126
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
U0126
Lost Communication with
Steering Angle Sensor
Module
U0155
Lost Communication with
Instrument Panel Cluster
U1901
U2050
U2051
is still present, REFER to MODULE
ABS Module COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article
to diagnose the HS-CAN bus.
REPAIR all other DTCs first. If DTC U0155
is still present, REFER to MODULE
ABS Module
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article
to diagnose the HS-CAN bus.
NOTE:
If other DTCs are present, REPAIR them
CAN Network #2 Comm Bus
ABS Module before diagnosing DTC U1901.
Fault - Receive Error
Go to Pinpoint Test J .
CONFIGURE the ABS module. REFER to
MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
CLEAR the DTCs. RETRIEVE the DTCs
and VERIFY successful module
No Application Present
ABS Module configuration. If DTC U2050 is retrieved
again, INSTALL a new ABS module.
REFER to Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Module. CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the
self-test.
CALIBRATE the ABS module, follow the
directions on the scan tool. CLEAR the
DTCs. CARRY OUT the ABS module selfOne or More Calibration Files
test. RETRIEVE and RECORD any DTCs. If
ABS Module
Missing or Corrupt
DTC U2051 is retrieved again, INSTALL a
new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module. CLEAR the
DTC. REPEAT the self-test.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR MODULE (SASM) DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Source
B1317
Battery Voltage High
Action
NOTE:
Battery voltage above 16 volts will cause
Steering Angle DTC B1317 to set. Verify battery and
Sensor Module charging system condition prior to
diagnosing this DTC.
(SASM)
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
B1318
Battery Voltage Low
SASM
NOTE:
Battery voltage below 10 volts will cause
DTC B1318 to set. Verify battery and
charging system condition prior to
diagnosing this DTC.
Go to Pinpoint Test L .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
If other DTCs are present, REPAIR them
before installing a new component.
B1342
ECU is Faulted
SASM
U0155
Lost Communication with
Instrument Panel Cluster
SASM
U2050
No Application Present
SASM
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the SASM
self-test. RETRIEVE the DTCs. If DTC
B1342 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new
SASM. REFER to Steering Angle Sensor
Module (SASM). CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
REPAIR all other DTCs first. If DTC U0155
is still present, REFER to MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article
to diagnose the HS-CAN bus.
CONFIGURE the SASM. REFER to
Programmable Module Installation in
MODULE CONFIGURATION article.
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the SASM
self-test. If DTC U2050 is retrieved again,
INSTALL a new SASM. REFER to Steering
Angle Sensor Module (SASM). CLEAR the
DTC. REPEAT the self-test.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DTC CHART
DTC
Description
Source
Traction Control Disable
C1093
Instrument Cluster
Switch Circuit Failure
-
All Other Instrument
Cluster Module DTCs
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test K .
REFER to INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE
CENTER & WARNING CHIMES
article.
Instrument Cluster
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
No communication with
the ABS module
The red brake warning
indicator is always/never
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
ABS module
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Brake fluid level
Action
REFER to MODULE
CONFIGURATION article to
diagnose the no communication
concern.
RETRIEVE all DTCs and REFER to
the ABS MODULE DTC CHART .
If no DTCs are present, REFER to
Diagnosis and Testing in
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
on
The yellow ABS warning
indicator is always/never
on
The traction assist indicator
is never/always on
ABS false activation, ABS
too sensitive, ABS
activates on normal stop
The traction control system
cannot be disabled
Instrument cluster
Brake fluid level
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
ABS module
Instrument cluster
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Traction control
switch
Front wheel speed
sensor tone rings
Chafed wire
insulation or
pinched wire
Rear wheel speed
sensor, excessive
variance in air gap
between wheel
speed sensor and
sensor tone ring
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC),
MESSAGE CENTER &
WARNING CHIMES article.
Instrument cluster
ABS module
Open or shorted
wheel speed sensor
circuit
RETRIEVE all DTCs and REFER to
the ABS MODULE DTC CHART .
If no DTCs are present, REFER to
Diagnosis and Testing in
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC),
MESSAGE CENTER &
WARNING CHIMES article.
RETRIEVE all DTCs and REFER to
the ABS MODULE DTC CHART .
If no DTCs are present, REFER to
Diagnosis and Testing in
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC),
MESSAGE CENTER &
WARNING CHIMES article.
INSPECT both front wheel speed
sensor tone rings for damaged teeth.
INSTALL new as necessary.
INSPECT the wiring harness from
the front wheel speed sensor knuckle
to the frame and from the rear axle to
the frame. REPAIR or INSTALL
new as necessary.
INSPECT both rear wheel speed
sensor tone rings for damaged teeth.
INSTALL new as necessary.
Go to Pinpoint Test C .
INSPECT the rear wheel speed
sensor tone rings. INSTALL new as
necessary.
Rear wheel speed
sensor tone rings
Wheel speed sensor
Go to Pinpoint Test D .
Instrument cluster
Circuitry
Traction control
switch
Go to Pinpoint Test K .
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: DTCs B1317 and B1318 - Battery Voltage High/Low
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The operating voltage required to operate the ABS module, hydraulic valves and pump motor is between 10 and
16 volts.
Fused ignition voltage is supplied to the ABS module from battery junction box (BJB) fuse 50 (10A) along
circuit CBB50 (YE/OG). Fused battery voltage is supplied to the ABS module from BJB fuse 57 (40A) along
circuit SBB57 (RD) and BJB fuse 15 (40A) along circuit SBB15 (WH/RD). Ground is provided for the ABS
module along circuit GD121 (BK/YE).
DTC B1317 Battery Voltage High - If the voltage supplied to the ABS module exceeds 16 volts during
the ABS module self-test or normal operation, with vehicle speed greater than 5 km/h (3 mph), DTC
B1317 will be set.
DTC B1318 Battery Voltage Low - If the voltage supplied to the ABS module falls below 10 volts during
the ABS module self-test or normal operation, with vehicle speed greater than 5 km/h (3 mph), DTC
B1318 will be set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Charging system
ABS module
PINPOINT TEST A: DTCs B1317 AND B1318 - BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH/LOW
NOTE:
Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring
terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
A1 CHECK FOR RETURNING DTCs
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Clear ABS Module DTCs
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self-Test ABS Module
Carry out the ABS module self-test. Retrieve and record all ABS module DTCs.
Are DTCs B1317 or 1318 present?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to continue
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
diagnosis of the charging system.
A2 CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between the positive and negative battery terminals with key ON engine OFF
(KOEO) and with the engine running.
Is the battery voltage between 10 and 13 volts with KOEO and between 13 and 17 volts with
the engine running?
YES : Go to A3.
NO : REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to continue
diagnosis of the charging system.
A3 CHECK THE ABS HARNESS AND MODULE FOR WATER INTRUSION
NOTE:
The battery and battery tray need to be removed to access the ABS
module connector.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ABS Module C135
Inspect the ABS module connector and module for water intrusion.
Is there any evidence of water entry?
YES : CLEAN the connector and dry it with low pressure compressed air. INSPECT for evidence
of water entry and REPAIR as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the
brake pedal not applied.
NO : Go to A4.
A4 CHECK THE ABS MODULE POWER CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: BJB Fuse 15 (40A)
Disconnect: BJB Fuse 50 (10A)
Disconnect: BJB Fuse 57 (40A)
Fig. 1: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between:
ABS module C135-1, circuit SBB15 (WH/RD), harness side and BJB fuse 15 (40A), circuit
SBB15 (WH/RD), output side.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
ABS module C135-25, circuit SBB57 (RD), harness side and BJB fuse 57 (40A), circuit
SBB57 (RD), output side.
ABS module C135-30, circuit CBB50 (YE/OG), harness side and BJB fuse 50 (10A), circuit
CBB50 (YE/OG), output side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : VERIFY BJB fuses 50 (10A), 57 (40A) and 15 (40A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the affected
circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
A5 CHECK THE ABS MODULE GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & ABS Module C135-13 & C135-38, Circuit
GD121 (BK/YE)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and:
ABS module C135-13, circuit GD121 (BK/YE), harness side.
ABS module C135-38, circuit GD121 (BK/YE), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to A6.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD121 (BK/YE). CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the
brake pedal not applied.
A6 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION
Check ABS module C135 for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminals.
Connect: ABS C135
Make sure the ABS connector seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
YES : INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure.
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not
applied.
Pinpoint Test B: DTCs C1095 and C1096 - ABS Hydraulic Pump Motor Circuit Failure/Open
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
Fused battery voltage for hydraulic pump motor operation is supplied to the ABS module from battery junction
box (BJB) fuse 15 (40A) along circuit SBB15 (WH/RD). Ground is provided for the ABS module along circuit
GD121 (BK/YE).
When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the ABS module commands the HCU pump on for 100 ms
(±6 ms) and is then commanded off. After 6 ms, the ABS module will read the voltage that is being generated
by the HCU pump. If the voltage indicates the motor is spinning at less than 500 RPM, there may be a locked
motor. If this condition is detected 4 times, DTC C1095 is set. The pump motor is checked for an open circuit 2
seconds after the most recent successful pump motor off command. If the pump motor feedback remains greater
than 0.75 volt for more than 50 ms (±6 ms) after these conditions have been met, DTC C1096 is set.
DTC C1095 ABS Hydraulic Pump Motor Circuit Failure - If a short to voltage or ground is detected, if a
locked up pump motor is detected or if there is an internal failure of the ABS module, DTC C1095 will be
set.
DTC C1096 ABS Hydraulic Pump Motor Circuit Open - If a short to voltage, a short to ground or an
open is detected or if there is an internal failure of the ABS module, DTC C1095 will be set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
HCU
ABS module
PINPOINT TEST B: DTCs C1095 AND C1096 - ABS HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR CIRCUIT
FAILURE/OPEN
NOTE:
Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring
terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
B1 CHECK THE ABS PUMP MOTOR
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Is the ABS pump motor running all the time?
YES : INSTALL a new ABS module and hydraulic control unit (HCU). REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module and Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU). CALIBRATE the ABS
module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure. CLEAR the DTCs.
CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 CHECK ABS MODULE PUMP MOTOR OUTPUT COMMAND (PUMP_MTR)
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger ABS Module
Toggle the PUMP_MTR output command ON.
Does the ABS pump motor run for approximately 2 seconds?
YES : TOGGLE the output command OFF. CLEAR the DTCs. CHECK the yellow ABS warning
indicator while driving the vehicle (brakes must not be applied) above 32 km/h (20 mph).
If the yellow ABS warning indicator does not illuminate, the system is operating correctly at this
time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs.
CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
If the yellow ABS warning indicator illuminates, RETRIEVE the DTCs.
If DTC C1096 is retrieved, go to B6.
If DTC C1095 is retrieved, INSTALL a new HCU. REFER to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU).
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure.
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
NO : TOGGLE the output command OFF. Go to B3.
B3 CHECK THE ABS HARNESS AND MODULE FOR WATER INTRUSION
NOTE:
The battery and battery tray need to be removed to access the ABS
module connector.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ABS Module C135
Inspect the ABS module connector and module for water intrusion.
Is there any evidence of water entry?
YES : CLEAN the connector and dry it with low pressure compressed air. INSPECT for evidence
of water entry and REPAIR as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the
brake pedal not applied.
NO : Go to B4.
B4 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB15 (WH/RD) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ABS module C135-1, circuit SBB15 (WH/RD), harness side and
BJB fuse 15 (40A), circuit SBB15 (WH/RD), output side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : VERIFY BJB fuse 15 (40A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB15 (WH/RD). CLEAR the
DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
B5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD121 (BK/YE) FOR AN OPEN
Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance Between ABS Module C135-13, Circuit GD121 (BK/YE),
Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ABS module C135-13, circuit GD121 (BK/YE), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new HCU. REFER to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU). CLEAR the DTCs.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure.
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD121 (BK/YE). CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the
brake pedal not applied.
B6 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION
Check ABS module C135 for:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminals.
Connect: ABS C135
Make sure the ABS connector seats correctly.
Clear the DTCs.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure.
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not
applied.
Pinpoint Test C: DTCs C1145, C1155, C1165 and C1175 - Wheel Speed Sensor Input Circuit Failure
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The wheel speed sensors generate a square wave signal that is sent to the ABS module. The wheel speed sensor
circuitry connects to the ABS module through 2 wires and a connector at each wheel speed sensor. When the
ignition is turned to the RUN position, the ABS module carries out a self-test to determine if the sensors are
functional. Voltage is supplied to the active wheel speed sensors from the ABS module. The wheel speed sensor
ground is supplied by the ABS module.
Wheel speed sensor DTCs will automatically clear when a successful test drive is carried out. A successful test
drive should include speeds above 32 km/h (20 mph) and at least one ABS stop.
DTC Description
DTC C1145 RF Wheel Speed Sensor Input
Circuit Failure
DTC C1155 LF Wheel Speed Sensor Input
Circuit Failure
DTC C1165 RR Wheel Speed Sensor Input
Circuit Failure
DTC C1175 LR Wheel Speed Sensor Input
Circuit Failure
Fault Trigger Condition
If during the ABS module on-demand self test
or during normal operation, if the ABS module
detects an open, short to ground or voltage or a
defective wheel speed sensor input circuit, the
appropriate DTC will be set. These DTCs are
usually set by a damaged sensor or a circuit
fault.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Connector water intrusion
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Wheel speed sensor tone ring
Wheel speed sensors
ABS module
PINPOINT TEST C: DTCs C1145, C1155, C1165 AND C1175 - WHEEL SPEED SENSOR INPUT
CIRCUIT FAILURE
NOTE:
Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring
terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
C1 CHECK THE ABS HARNESS AND MODULE FOR WATER INTRUSION
NOTE:
The battery and battery tray need to be removed to access the ABS
module connector.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ABS Module C135
Inspect the ABS module connector and module for water intrusion.
Is there any evidence of water entry?
YES : CLEAN the connector and dry it with low pressure compressed air. INSPECT for evidence
of water entry and REPAIR as necessary. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and
CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
NO : If the active wheel speed sensor tool is available, go to C2. If the active wheel speed sensor
tool is not available, go to C4.
C2 CHECK THE ABS MODULE OUTPUT USING THE SPECIAL TOOL
NOTE:
The front wheel speed sensor connectors are located behind the fender
splash shields.
Connect: ABS Module C135
Disconnect: Suspect Wheel Speed Sensor
Connect the special tool to the wheel speed sensor connectors.
Key in ON position.
Select the correct system polarity on the special tool and turn the special tool power switch to the
ON position.
Is the module output LED illuminated?
YES : Go to C3.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
NO : Go to C6.
C3 CHECK THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT WITH THE SPECIAL TOOL
Raise the suspect wheel until it can spin freely. Refer to JACKING AND LIFTING article.
While monitoring the special tool, slowly spin the suspect wheel.
Is the current level LED illuminated green and do the sensor output LEDs illuminate and
flash?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT at
least one ABS stop.
NO : If the current level LED is illuminated green and the sensor output LEDs do not illuminate or
if the current level LED is illuminated red, INSTALL a new wheel speed sensor. REFER to Wheel
Speed Sensor - Front or Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h
(20 mph) and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
If the current level LED is illuminated green and the sensor output LEDs illuminate green but do
not flash, INSPECT the wheel speed sensor tone ring and INSTALL new if necessary. If the tone
ring is OK, INSTALL a new wheel speed sensor. REFER to Wheel Speed Sensor - Front or
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY
OUT at least one ABS stop.
C4 CHECK THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE:
Both circuits must be checked for each DTC.
NOTE:
The battery must be connected to carry out this test.
NOTE:
The front wheel speed sensor connectors are located behind the fender
splash shields.
Disconnect: Suspect Wheel Speed Sensor
Key in ON position.
For DTC C1145 , measure the voltage between ground and:
ABS module C135-3, circuit VCA05 (GY/VT), harness side.
ABS module C135-4, circuit RCA19 (VT), harness side.
For DTC C1155 , measure the voltage between ground and:
ABS module C135-27, circuit VCA03 (VT/WH), harness side.
ABS module C135-28, circuit RCA17 (YE), harness side.
For DTC C1165 , measure the voltage between ground and:
ABS module C135-10, circuit RCA20 (BN), harness side.
ABS module C135-11, circuit VCA06 (WH/OG), harness side.
For DTC C1175 , measure the voltage between ground and:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 29
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
ABS module C135-35, circuit RCA18 (BN/GN), harness side.
ABS module C135-36, circuit VCA04 (BU/OG), harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and
CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
NO : Go to C5.
C5 CHECK THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE:
Both circuits must be checked for each DTC.
Key in OFF position.
For DTC C1145 , measure the resistance between ground and:
ABS module C135-3, circuit VCA05 (GY/VT), harness side.
ABS module C135-4, circuit RCA19 (VT), harness side.
For DTC C1155 , measure the resistance between ground and:
ABS module C135-27, circuit VCA03 (VT/WH), harness side.
ABS module C135-28, circuit RCA17 (YE), harness side.
For DTC C1165 , measure the resistance between ground and:
ABS module C135-10, circuit RCA20 (BN), harness side.
ABS module C135-11, circuit VCA06 (WH/OG), harness side.
For DTC C1175 , measure the resistance between ground and:
ABS module C135-35, circuit RCA18 (BN/GN), harness side.
ABS module C135-36, circuit VCA04 (BU/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to C6.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and
CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
C6 CHECK THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
Both circuits must be checked for each DTC.
Disconnect: ABS Module C135
Disconnect: Suspect Wheel Speed Sensor
For DTC C1145 , measure the resistance between:
ABS module C135-3, circuit VCA05 (GY/VT), harness side and RF wheel speed sensor
C160-1, circuit VCA05 (GY/VT), harness side.
ABS module C135-4, circuit RCA19 (VT), harness side and RF wheel speed sensor C160-2,
circuit RCA19 (VT), harness side.
For DTC C1155 , measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 30
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
ABS module C135-27, circuit VCA03 (VT/WH), harness side LF wheel speed sensor C1502, circuit VCA03 (VT/WH), harness side.
ABS module C135-28, circuit RCA17 (YE), harness side LF wheel speed sensor C150-1,
circuit RCA17 (YE), harness side.
For DTC C1165 , measure the resistance between:
ABS module C135-10, circuit RCA20 (BN), harness side and RR wheel speed sensor C4262, circuit RCA20 (BN), harness side.
ABS module C135-11, circuit VCA06 (WH/OG), harness side and RR wheel speed sensor
C426-1, circuit VCA06 (WH/OG), harness side.
For DTC C1175 , measure the resistance between:
ABS module C135-35, circuit RCA18 (BN/GN), harness side and LR wheel speed sensor
C440-1, circuit RCA18 (BN/GN), harness side.
ABS module C135-36, circuit VCA04 (BU/OG), harness side and LR wheel speed sensor
C440-2, circuit VCA04 (BU/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to C7.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and
CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
C7 CHECK FOR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
Fig. 5: Checking Circuits For Short
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the suspect wheel speed sensor pins, harness side, with the meter in
the 10 megaohm range.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to C8.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and
CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
C8 CHECK THE ABS MODULE OUTPUT
Connect: ABS Module C135
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 31
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Measure the voltage between the suspect wheel speed sensor pins, harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : INSTALL a new wheel speed sensor. REFER to Wheel Speed Sensor - Front or Wheel
Speed Sensor - Rear. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT at
least one ABS stop.
NO : Go to C9.
C9 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ABS C135
Check the connector for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminals.
Connect: ABS C135
Make sure the ABS connector seats correctly.
Test drive the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph), carry out at least one ABS stop and verify the
concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure.
TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT at
least one ABS stop.
Pinpoint Test D: DTCs C1222, C1233, C1234, C1235 and C1236 - Wheel Speed Sensor Input Signal
Missing/Mismatch
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The wheel speed sensors generate a square wave signal that is sent to the ABS module. The wheel speed sensor
circuitry connects to the ABS module through 2 wires and a connector at each wheel speed sensor. When the
ignition is turned to the RUN position, the ABS module carries out a self-test to determine if the sensors are
functional. Voltage is supplied to the active wheel speed sensors from the ABS module. The wheel speed sensor
ground is supplied by the ABS module.
Wheel speed sensor DTCs will automatically clear when a successful test drive is carried out. A successful test
drive should include speeds above 32 km/h (20 mph) and at least one ABS stop.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 32
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
DTC Description
DTC C1222 Wheel Speed Mismatch
DTC C1233 LF Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Fault
DTC C1234 RF Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Fault
DTC C1235 RR Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Fault
DTC C1236 LR Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Fault
Fault Trigger Condition
When the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h
(12 mph), if the ABS module detects a
difference between wheel speed sensor
signals, DTC C1222 will be set. DTC C1222
can also be set by damaged tone rings,
mismatched wheel and/or tire sizes or
driving the vehicle on one or more deflated
tires
When the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h
(12 mph), if the ABS module does not
receive a signal from the wheel speed
sensor, the appropriate DTC will be set.
These DTCs can also be set by an excessive
wheel speed sensor-to-tone ring air gap or a
damaged tone ring
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Mismatched tire sizes
Wheel speed sensor tone ring
Wheel speed sensor
ABS module
PINPOINT TEST D: DTCs C1222, C1233, C1234, C1235 AND C1236 - WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
INPUT SIGNAL MISSING/MISMATCH
NOTE:
Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring
terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
D1 RETRIEVE ABS MODULE DTCs
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Retrieve and record all ABS module DTCs.
Are DTCs C1145, C1155, C1165 or C1175 present?
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test C .
NO : Go to D2.
D2 CHECK THE ABS HARNESS AND MODULE FOR WATER INTRUSION
NOTE:
The battery and battery tray need to be removed to access the ABS
module connector.
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 33
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: ABS Module C135
Inspect the ABS module connector and module for water intrusion.
Is there any evidence of water entry?
YES : CLEAN the connector and dry it out with low pressure compressed air. INSPECT for
evidence of water entry and repair as necessary. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph)
and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
NO : Use the DTCs recorded in the previous step.
For DTC C1222 Go to D7. For DTCs C1233, C1234, C1235 and C1236, if the active wheel speed
sensor tool is available, go to D3. If the active wheel speed sensor tool is not available, go to D6.
For all other DTCs, Go to the ABS MODULE DTC CHART .
D3 CHECK THE ABS MODULE OUTPUT USING THE SPECIAL TOOL
NOTE:
The front wheel speed sensor connectors are located behind the fender
splash shields.
Connect: ABS Module C135
Disconnect: Suspect Wheel Speed Sensor
Connect the special tool to the wheel speed sensor connectors.
Key in ON position.
Select the correct system polarity on the special tool and turn the special tool power switch to the
ON position.
Is the module output LED illuminated?
YES : Go to D5.
NO : Go to D4.
D4 CHECK THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
Both circuits must be checked for each DTC.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ABS Module C135
For DTC C1233 : measure the resistance between:
ABS module C135-27, circuit VCA03 (VT/WH), harness side and LF wheel speed sensor
C150-2, circuit VCA03 (VT/WH), harness side.
ABS module C135-28, circuit RCA17 (YE), harness side and LF wheel speed sensor C150-1,
circuit RCA17 (YE), harness side.
For DTC C1234 : measure the resistance between:
ABS module C135-3, circuit VCA05 (GY/VT), harness side and RF wheel speed sensor
C160-1, circuit VCA05 (GY/VT), harness side.
ABS module C135-4, circuit RCA19 (VT), harness side and RF wheel speed sensor C160-2,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 34
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
circuit RCA19 (VT), harness side.
For DTC C1235 : measure the resistance between:
ABS module C135-10, circuit RCA20 (BN), harness side and RR wheel speed sensor C4262, circuit RCA20 (BN), harness side.
ABS module C135-11, circuit VCA06 (WH/OG), harness side and RR wheel speed sensor
C426-1, circuit VCA06 (WH/OG), harness side.
For DTC C1236 : measure the resistance between:
ABS module C135-35, circuit RCA18 (BN/GN), harness side and LR wheel speed sensor
C440-1, circuit RCA18 (BN/GN), harness side.
ABS module C135-36, circuit VCA04 (BU/OG), harness side and LR wheel speed sensor
C440-2, circuit VCA04 (BU/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to D8.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and
CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
D5 CHECK THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT WITH THE SPECIAL TOOL
Raise the suspect wheel until it can spin freely. Refer to JACKING AND LIFTING article.
While monitoring the special tool, slowly spin the suspect wheel.
Is the current level LED illuminated green and do the sensor output LEDs illuminate and
flash?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT at
least one ABS stop.
NO : If the current level LED is illuminated green and the sensor output LEDs do not illuminate or
if the current level LED is illuminated red, INSTALL a new wheel speed sensor. REFER to Wheel
Speed Sensor - Front or Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h
(20 mph) and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
If the current level LED is illuminated green and the sensor output LEDs illuminate green but do
not flash, INSPECT the wheel speed sensor tone ring and INSTALL new if necessary. If the tone
ring is OK, INSTALL a new wheel speed sensor. REFER to Wheel Speed Sensor - Front or
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY
OUT at least one ABS stop.
D6 CHECK THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT
NOTE:
The front wheel speed sensor connectors are located behind the fender
splash shields.
NOTE:
The battery must be connected to carry out this test.
Connect: ABS Module C135
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 35
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Suspect Wheel Speed Sensor
Fig. 6: Checking Wheel Speed Sensor Output
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
For DTC C1233 :
connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between LF wheel speed sensor C150-2, circuit VCA03
(VT/WH), harness side and LF wheel speed sensor C150 pin-1, component side.
connect the automotive meter between LF wheel speed sensor C150-1, circuit RCA17 (YE),
harness side and LF wheel speed sensor C150 pin-2, component side.
For DTC C1234 :
connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between RF wheel speed sensor C160-1, circuit VCA05
(GN/VT), harness side and RF wheel speed sensor C160 pin-1, component side.
connect the automotive meter between RF wheel speed sensor C160-2, circuit RCA19 (VT),
harness side and RF wheel speed sensor C160 pin-2, component side.
For DTC C1235 :
connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between RR wheel speed sensor C426-1, circuit VCA06
(WH/OG), harness side and RR wheel speed sensor C420 pin-1, component side.
connect the automotive meter between RR wheel speed sensor C426-2, circuit RCA20 (BN),
harness side and RR wheel speed sensor C420 pin-2, component side.
For DTC C1236 :
connect a fused (5A) jumper wire between LF wheel speed sensor C440-2, circuit VCA04
(BU/OG), harness side and LF wheel speed sensor C440 pin-1, component side.
connect the automotive meter between LF wheel speed sensor C440-1, circuit RCA18
(BN/GN), harness side and LF wheel speed sensor C440 pin-2, component side.
Key in ON position.
Measure the current while slightly rotating the wheel, using incremental turns.
Does the wheel speed sensor output switch between the low state (4 to 8 mA) and the high
state (12 to 16 mA)?
YES : Go to D7.
NO : INSTALL a new wheel speed sensor. REFER to Wheel Speed Sensor - Front or Wheel
Speed Sensor - Rear. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT at
least one ABS stop.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:06 AM
Page 36
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
D7 CHECK FOR CORRECT TIRE SIZE AND AIR PRESSURE
Make sure all tire sizes are correct and matching.
Make sure all tire pressures are correct.
Clear the DTCs, drive the vehicle and carry out the self-test.
Is DTC C1222 still present?
YES : Go to D8.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20
mph) and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
D8 CHECK THE ABS MODULE ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ABS C135
Check the connector for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminals.
Connect: ABS C135
Make sure the ABS connector seats correctly.
Test drive the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph), carry out at least one ABS stop and verify the
concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module.
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure.
TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT at
least one ABS stop.
Pinpoint Test E: DTC C1278 - Steering Wheel Angle 1 and 2 Circuit Faulted
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The steering angle sensor module (SASM) (also known as the steering angle sensor module) monitors the
steering wheel position when the slotted-wheel in the sensor passes through the optical field of the sensor.
Fused ignition voltage is supplied to the SASM from smart junction box (SJB) fuse 34 (5A) along circuit
CBP34 (VT/BN). Ground for the sensor is provided along circuit GD115 (BK/GY). The steering wheel angle
(in degrees) is sent to the ABS module along the high-speed controller area network (HS-CAN) bus, circuits
VDB04 (WH/BU) and VDB05 (WH).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 37
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
DTC C1278 Steering Wheel Angle 1 and 2 Circuit Faulted - If during normal operation or the ABS
module on-demand self test, the ABS module does not receive the steering wheel rotation sensor input or
if the input received does not agree with the input from other sensors, DTC C1278 will be set. Also, a loss
of sensor power or ground will cause DTC C1278 to set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Fuse(s)
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SASM
PINPOINT TEST E: DTCs C1277 AND C1278 - STEERING WHEEL ANGLE 1 AND 2 CIRCUIT
FAILURE/FAULTED
NOTE:
Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring
terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
NOTE:
Overtightening of the steering angle sensor module (SASM) fasteners may
deform or damage the sensor housing, possibly resulting in faulty operation.
NOTE:
Make sure that the SASM is mounted securely to the column with 2 fasteners. A
loose sensor or missing fastener may result in incorrect sensor operation. Make
sure that the sensor connector is mated securely to the harness connector.
Before proceeding with electrical testing, make sure that the vehicle battery is
fully charged.
E1 CARRY OUT THE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ABS Module Calibration
Carry out the ABS module calibration procedure following the scan tool directions.
Test drive the vehicle.
Retrieve and record any ABS module DTCs.
Are any DTCs retrieved or does the calibration procedure indicate a fault?
YES : If DTC C1277 or C1278 is retrieved or the calibration procedure indicates a fault, go to E2.
If any other DTCs are retrieved, go to the ABS MODULE DTC CHART .
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not
applied.
E2 MONITOR THE SASM PID (SWA POS)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 38
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger ABS Module
Monitor the SWA POS PID while rotating the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise very
slowly.
Does the PID move in intervals of 1 degree?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not
applied.
NO : Go to E3.
E3 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE SASM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SASM C226
Key in ON position.
Fig. 7: Measuring Voltage Between Steering Angle Sensor C222-1, CBP34 (VT/BN), Harness
Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between SASM C226-1, circuit CBP34 (VT/BN), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to E4.
NO : VERIFY SJB fuse 34 (5A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit CBP34 (VT/BN).
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure.
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
E4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD115 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 39
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance Between Steering Angle Sensor C222-4, GD115 (BK/GY),
Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between SASM C226-4, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E5.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD115 (BK/GY). CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool
directions for the calibration procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the
brake pedal not applied.
E5 CHECK CIRCUITS VDB04 (WH/BU) AND VDB05 (WH) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and:
SASM C226-3, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
SASM C226-2, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Are the voltages greater than 6 volts?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool
directions for the calibration procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the
brake pedal not applied.
NO : Go to E6.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 40
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
E6 CHECK CIRCUITS VDB04 (WH/BU) AND VDB05 (WH) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and:
SASM C226-3, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
SASM C226-2, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to E7.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool
directions for the calibration procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the
brake pedal not applied.
E7 CHECK CIRCUITS VDB04 (WH/BU) AND VDB05 (WH) FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
The battery and battery tray need to be removed to access the ABS
module connector.
Disconnect: ABS Module C135
Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 41
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
ABS module C135-5, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and SASM C226-3, circuit
VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
ABS module C135-6, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and SASM C226-2, circuit VDB05
(WH), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to E8.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool
directions for the calibration procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the
brake pedal not applied.
E8 CHECK CIRCUITS VDB04 (WH/BU) AND VDB05 (WH) FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between SASM C226-3, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and SASM
C226-2, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : INSTALL a new SASM. REFER to Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM).
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure.
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool
directions for the calibration procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the
brake pedal not applied.
Pinpoint Test F: DTC C1279, C1280, C1281, C1282, C1516, C1517, C2769, C2770 - Stability Control
Sensor Cluster Fault
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The accelerometer (lateral and longitudinal) and the yaw rate sensor are contained in the stability control sensor
cluster. The sensor cluster measures the vehicle acceleration and yaw rate, then sends the signal along a
secondary high-speed controller area network (HS-CAN2) bus to the ABS module, circuits VCA23 (BU/WH)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 42
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
and VCA24 (GN/OG). Fused ignition voltage is supplied to the sensor cluster by smart junction box (SJB) fuse
35 (10A) along circuit CBP35 (YE/GY). Ground for the sensor cluster is provided along circuit GD151
(BK/GN).
DTC Description
Fault Trigger Conditions
If, during normal operation or the
ABS module on-demand self test the
ABS module detects an open circuit,
a short to voltage or a short to ground
on one or both of the HS-CAN2 bus
circuits, the appropriate DTC will be
set. Also, a failure of the sensor
cluster will cause the appropriate
DTC to set.
DTC C1279 Yaw Rate Sensor Circuit Failure
DTC C1281 Lateral Accelerometer Circuit Failure
DTC C1517 Roll Rate Sensor Circuit Failure
DTC C2769 Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Electrical
Failure
DTC C1280 Yaw Rate Sensor Signal Fault
DTC C1282 Lateral Accelerometer Signal Fault
DTC C1516 Roll Rate Sensor Signal Fault
DTC C2770 Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Plausibility
Failure
If, during normal operation the ABS
module does not receive the sensor
cluster input, or if the input received
does not agree with the input from
other sensors, the appropriate DTC
will be set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Stability control sensor cluster
PINPOINT TEST F: DTC C1279, C1280, C1281, C1282, C1516, C1517, C2769, C2770 - STABILITY
CONTROL SENSOR CLUSTER FAULT
NOTE:
Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring
terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
NOTE:
The yaw rate sensor, roll-rate sensor, lateral accelerometer and longitudinal
accelerometer are integral to the stability control sensor cluster.
NOTE:
Make sure the vehicle is sitting on level ground, at a complete standstill and is
not on a hoist before calibrating the stability control sensor cluster.
NOTE:
Make sure the vehicle is sitting on level ground, at a complete standstill and is
not on a hoist before carrying out this pinpoint test. Any vehicle movement will
result in false values for this test.
F1 CARRY OUT THE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 43
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ABS Module Calibration
Carry out the ABS module calibration procedure following the scan tool directions.
Test drive the vehicle.
Retrieve and record any ABS module DTCs.
Are any DTCs retrieved or does the calibration procedure indicate a fault?
YES : Go to F2.
NO : The system is operating correctly. The condition may have been caused by an incomplete or
inaccurate stability control sensor cluster calibration.
F2 CHECK THE SENSOR CLUSTER MOUNTING AND MOUNTING SURFACE
NOTE:
The sensor cluster is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear
seat.
Key in OFF position.
Inspect the sensor cluster mounting and make sure that the nuts are fully seated and tightened
correctly. Inspect the mounting surface for damage, corrosion or dirt.
Were the sensor cluster nuts tightened incorrectly or a significant amount of corrosion or dirt
found or the mounting surface damaged?
YES : CLEAN and TIGHTEN the nuts to correct specification. CLEAN or REPAIR the mounting
surface as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. RECALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan
tool directions for the calibration procedure. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to F3.
F3 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE SENSOR CLUSTER
Disconnect: Stability Control Sensor Cluster C3037
Key in ON position.
Fig. 13: Measuring Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between the sensor cluster C3037-2, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and
ground.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 44
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
YES : Go to F4.
NO : VERIFY SJB fuse 35 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit CBP35 (YE/GY). CLEAR the
DTCs. RECALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. REPEAT the self-test.
F4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD151 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between the sensor cluster C3037-5, circuit GD151 (BK/GN), harness side
and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F5.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD151 (BK/GN). CLEAR the DTCs. RECALIBRATE the ABS module.
FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure. REPEAT the self-test.
F5 CHECK CIRCUITS VCA23 (BU/WH) AND VCA24 (GN/OG) FOR AN OPEN
NOTE:
The battery and battery tray need to be removed to access the ABS
module connector.
Disconnect: ABS Module C135
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 45
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between:
ABS module C135-8, circuit VCA23 (BU/WH), harness side and stability control sensor
cluster C3037-3, circuit VCA23 (BU/WH), harness side.
ABS module C135-9, circuit VCA24 (GN/OG), harness side and stability control sensor
cluster C3037-4, circuit VCA24 (GN/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to F6.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. RECALIBRATE the ABS module.
FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure. REPEAT the self-test.
F6 CHECK CIRCUITS VCA23 (BU/WH) AND VCA24 (GN/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Stability Control Sensor Cluster C3037-3
& C3037-4
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and:
stability control sensor cluster C3037-3, circuit VCA23 (BU/WH), harness side.
stability control sensor cluster C3037-4, circuit VCA24 (GN/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to F7.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. RECALIBRATE the ABS module.
FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure. REPEAT the self-test.
F7 CHECK CIRCUITS VCA23 (BU/WH) AND VCA24 (GN/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE:
The battery must be connected to carry out this test.
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 46
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 17: Measuring Voltage Between Ground & Stability Control Sensor Cluster C3037-3 &
C3037-4
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and:
stability control sensor cluster C3037-3, circuit VCA23 (BU/WH), harness side.
stability control sensor cluster C3037-4, circuit VCA24 (GN/OG), harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. RECALIBRATE the ABS module.
FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : INSTALL a new sensor cluster. REFER to Stability Control Sensor Cluster. CLEAR the
DTCs. RECALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration
procedure. REPEAT the self-test.
Pinpoint Test G: DTC C1288 - Pressure Transducer Main/Primary Input Circuit Failure
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The ABS module monitors the brake pressure transducer in combination with other brake inputs; wheel speed
sensors, stoplamp switch from the PCM over the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) bus, lateral
accelerometer from the sensor cluster. The pressure transducer signal is used by the ABS module for various
diagnostic routines as well as to determine system functionality. The pressure transducer is located inside the
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) and can be monitored via the master cylinder pressure (MC_PRESS) PID. The
PID should correlate closely with system hydraulic pressure. When the vehicle is at rest without input from the
brake pedal, this PID value should be at or close to 0 kPa (0 psi). However, due to factors such as vehicle age or
minor discrepancies in manufacturing, PID readings may have some variability. If the transducer signal reads
above 620 kPa (90 psi) when other inputs indicate the system should not be pressurized, DTC C1288 will be
set. If the transducer requires service, a new HCU must be installed.
DTC C1288 Pressure Transducer Main/Primary Input Circuit Failure - If during the ABS module self-test
or normal operation the ABS module detects an open, a short to voltage or a short to ground in the
transducer, DTC C1288 will be set. Also, if the transducer input does not match the information received
from other sources, DTC C1288 will be set.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 47
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Brake pedal binding
Air in the brake hydraulic system
Fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system
High-speed controller area network (HS-CAN) bus
Brake on/off (BOO) switch
HCU
PINPOINT TEST G: DTC C1288 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCER MAIN/PRIMARY INPUT CIRCUIT
FAILURE
NOTE:
Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring
terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
G1 CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTCs
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Using the scan tool, clear the ABS module DTCs.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self-Test ABS Module
Retrieve and record any ABS module DTCs.
Is DTC C1288 present?
YES : Go to G2.
For all other ABS module DTCs, go to the ABS MODULE DTC CHART .
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20
mph) and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE and RECORD any DTCs.
G2 CHECK THE MASTER CYLINDER AND PEDAL FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Press and release the brake pedal.
Does the brake pedal smoothly travel to the stop and then return automatically when
released?
YES : Go to G3.
NO : INSPECT the brake pedal and master cylinder for obstructions and foreign material that may
cause a binding condition. REPAIR or INSTALL new as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the self-test.
G3 CHECK FOR AIR IN THE BRAKE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Select PARK.
Start the engine.
Press and release the brake pedal several times.
Does the brake pedal move smoothly and evenly through the length of it's travel?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 48
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to G4.
NO : REFER to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to continue diagnosis
of the brake hydraulic system.
G4 CHECK FOR FLUID LEAKS IN THE BRAKE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Visually inspect the brake hydraulic system for brake fluid leaks.
Are any leaks found?
YES : REPAIR as necessary. BLEED the brake system, REFER to BRAKE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION article. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
NO : Go to G5.
G5 MONITOR THE ABS MODULE BRAKE ON/OFF (BOO_ABS) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger PCM
Monitor the BOO_ABS PID while pressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Does the PID agree with the brake pedal position?
YES : Go to G7.
NO : Go to G6.
G6 MONITOR THE PCM BRAKE ON/OFF (BOO) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger PCM
Monitor the BOO PID while pressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Does the PID agree with the brake pedal position?
YES : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose the HSCAN bus.
NO : REFER to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article to continue diagnosis of the BOO switch.
G7 MONITOR THE ABS MODULE MASTER CYLINDER (MC_PRESS) PRESSURE PID
Firmly press and release the brake pedal while monitoring the ABS module MC_PRESS PID.
Does the PID increase with increased brake pedal pressure and decrease with decreased
brake pedal pressure?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20
mph) and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE and RECORD any DTCs.
NO : INSTALL a new HCU. REFER to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU). CALIBRATE the ABS
module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure. CLEAR the DTCs.
CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
Pinpoint Test H: DTC C1446 - Brake Switch Circuit Failure
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information. Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Instrument Cluster for
schematic and connector information.
Normal Operation
The ABS module monitors brake pedal position in combination with other brake inputs; wheel speed sensors,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 49
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
brake pressure transducer, lateral accelerometer from the sensor cluster. The pedal position signal is used by the
ABS module for various diagnostic routines as well as to determine system functionality. The Brake Pedal
Position (BPP) switch is located inside the stoplamp switch and can be monitored via the brake on/off
(BOO_ABS) PID and should match the actual brake pedal position. The ABS module receives the BPP switch
information from the PCM over the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) bus.
DTC C1446 Brake Switch Circuit Failure - If the brake pedal switch status from the PCM is not received
by the ABS module due to a failure of the BPP switch or the HS-CAN bus, the ABS module will set DTC
C1446. The ABS module uses a pressure transducer inside the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) to verify
the brake pedal switch status message from the PCM. When the vehicle is at rest without input from the
brake pedal, the pressure transducer value should be at or close to 0 kPa (0 psi). However, due to factors
such as vehicle age or minor discrepancies in manufacturing, readings may have some variability.
Possible Causes
Wiring, terminals or connectors
BPP switch
HCU
ABS module
PINPOINT TEST H: DTC C1446 - BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT FAILURE
H1 CHECK THE RED BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR
Observe the red brake warning indicator while turning the ignition switch from OFF to RUN.
Key in ON position.
Does the indicator illuminate for a short time and then go out?
YES : Go to H2.
NO : If the red brake warning indicator remains illuminated or does not illuminate at all, go to
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING CHIMES article to
diagnose the red brake warning indicator.
H2 CHECK THE ABS MODULE MASTER CYLINDER PRESSURE (MC_PRES) PID
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - ABS Module
Monitor the MC_PRESS PID without pressing the brake pedal.
Does the PID display 0 kPa (0 psi)?
YES : Go to H3.
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test G .
H3 CHECK FOR COMMUNICATION DTCs
Review the DTCs retrieved and recorded during Inspection and Verification.
Are DTCs U0073 or U0115 present?
YES : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to diagnose the HSMicrosoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 50
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
CAN bus.
NO : Go to H4.
H4 MONITOR THE ABS MODULE BRAKE ON/OFF (BOO) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - ABS Module
Monitor the BOO PID, while pressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Does the PID agree with the brake pedal position?
YES : The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20
mph) and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop. RETRIEVE and RECORD any DTCs.
NO : Go to H5.
H5 MONITOR THE PCM BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BOO) PID
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger - PCM
Monitor the BOO PID, while pressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Does the PID agree with the brake pedal position?
YES : REFER to MODULE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK article to continue diagnosis of
the HS-CAN bus.
NO : REFER to EXTERIOR LIGHTING article to continue diagnosis of the stoplamps.
Pinpoint Test I: DTC C1991 - Module Calibration Failure
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The ABS module must be calibrated whenever a component specific to the roll stability control (RSC) system is
disconnected or a new component is installed.
DTC C1991 Module Calibration Failure - If the calibration procedure does not finish or if the ABS
module looses the calibration information, DTC C1991 will be set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
ABS module
Stability control sensor cluster
Steering angle sensor module (SASM)
PINPOINT TEST I: DTC C1991 - MODULE CALIBRATION FAILURE
NOTE:
The RSC indicator flashes when a system calibration is required. Calibration is
required after certain DTCs are cleared.
NOTE:
Make sure the vehicle is not on a hoist and is sitting on level ground before
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 51
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
carrying out ABS module calibration.
I1 CHECK FOR DTCs
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Self-Test ABS Module
Retrieve and record any ABS module DTCs.
Are other DTCs retrieved along with C1991?
YES : Go to the ABS MODULE DTC CHART .
Some of the pinpoint tests recommend ABS module calibration prior to any further diagnostics. In
this case, go to I2.
NO : Go to I2.
I2 CALIBRATE THE ABS MODULE
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: ABS Module Calibration
Carry out the ABS module calibration per the scan tool instructions.
Does the calibration complete for all of the RSC sensors, and does the RSC indicator stop
flashing and turn off?
YES : Go to I3.
NO : Go to I4.
Some concerns cause the calibration not to complete. If sent here from another pinpoint test, return
to that pinpoint test for further diagnostics.
I3 CLEAR DTC C1991
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: Clear ABS Module DTCs
Using the scan tool, clear the DTC.
Does the DTC clear?
YES : TEST DRIVE the vehicle above 32 km/h (20 mph) and CARRY OUT at least one ABS stop.
REPEAT the self-test.
If sent here from another pinpoint test, return to that pinpoint test for further diagnostics.
NO : Go to I4.
I4 MONITOR THE ABS MODULE SASM (SWA POS) PID
Key in ON position.
Enter the following diagnostic mode on the diagnostic tool: DataLogger ABS Module
Monitor the SWA POS PID while rotating the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise very
slowly.
Does the PID move in intervals of 1 degree?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 52
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
YES : Go to Pinpoint Test F .
NO : Go to Pinpoint Test E .
Pinpoint Test J: DTC U1901 - CAN Network #2 Communication Bus Fault - Receive Error
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The ABS module communicates with the stability control sensor cluster along the secondary high-speed
controller area network (HS-CAN2) bus, circuits VCA23 (BU/WH) and VCA24 (GN/OG).
DTC U1901 CAN Network #2 Communication Bus Fault - Receive Error - If the ABS module does not
receive an expected message from the stability control sensor cluster or the message received does not
agree with other sensor inputs, DTC U1901 will be set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Stability control sensor cluster
ABS module
PINPOINT TEST J: DTC U1901 - CAN NETWORK #2 COMMUNICATION BUS FAULT- RECEIVE
ERROR
NOTE:
Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring
terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
J1 CHECK CIRCUITS VCA23 (BU/WH) AND VCA24 (GN/OG) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE:
The battery and battery tray need to be removed to access the ABS
module connector.
NOTE:
The battery must be connected to carry out this test.
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: ABS Module C135
Disconnect: Stability Control Sensor Cluster C3037
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 53
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 18: Checking Circuits For Voltage
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between ground and:
stability control sensor cluster C3037-3, circuit VCA23 (BU/WH), harness side.
stability control sensor cluster C3037-4, circuit VCA24 (GN/OG), harness side.
Is any voltage present?
YES : Go to J2.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake
pedal not applied.
J2 CHECK CIRCUITS VCA23 (BU/WH) AND VCA24 (GN/OG) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 19: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between ground and:
stability control sensor cluster C3037-3, circuit VCA23 (BU/WH), harness side.
stability control sensor cluster C3037-4, circuit VCA24 (GN/OG), harness side.
Is the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to J3.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake
pedal not applied.
J3 CHECK CIRCUITS VCA23 (BU/WH) AND VCA24 (GN/OG) FOR AN OPEN
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 54
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between:
stability control sensor cluster C3037-3, circuit VCA23 (BU/WH), harness side and ABS
module C135-8, circuit VCA23 (BU/WH), harness side.
stability control sensor cluster C3037-4, circuit VCA24 (GN/OG), harness side and ABS
module C135-9, circuit VCA24 (GN/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to J4.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake
pedal not applied.
J4 CHECK CIRCUITS VCA23 (BU/WH) AND VCA24 (GN/OG) FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Fig. 21: Measuring Resistance
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between stability control sensor cluster C3037-3, circuit VCA23 (BU/WH),
harness side and stability control sensor cluster C3037-4, circuit VCA24 (GN/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
YES : Go to J5.
NO : REPAIR the affected circuit(s). CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake
pedal not applied.
J5 CHECK THE SENSOR CLUSTER MODULE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 55
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Install a known good sensor cluster. Refer to Stability Control Sensor Cluster.
Connect: ABS Module C135
Carry out the ABS module self-test. Retrieve and record any ABS module DTCs.
Was DTC U1901 retrieved?
YES : INSTALL the original sensor cluster. INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) Module. CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions
for the calibration procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal
not applied
NO : Fault corrected. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not
applied.
Pinpoint Test K: The Traction Control System Cannot Be Disabled
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Instrument Cluster for schematic and connector
information.
Normal Operation
The traction control switch is hard wired to the instrument cluster, traction control system status is indicated by
an indicator in the instrument cluster. When the driver deactivates the traction assist system, the instrument
cluster sends a message to the PCM and the ABS module over the high-speed controller area network (HSCAN) bus. The traction assist system will remain deactivated until the driver pushes the switch again or until
the ignition switch is cycled.
The instrument cluster sends a reference voltage to the stability/traction control switch along circuit CCA15
(YE/GY). When the switch is pressed, the reference voltage is momentarily grounded through the switch along
circuit GD116 (BK/VT).
DTC C1093 Traction Control Disable Switch Circuit Failure - DTC C1093 will be set if the
stability/traction control switch is pressed for more than 2 minutes during normal operation, is pressed at
all during the instrument cluster on-demand self test or if there is an open circuit, a short to voltage or a
short.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Traction control switch
Instrument cluster
PINPOINT TEST K: THE TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM CANNOT BE DISABLED
NOTE:
Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring
terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
K1 CHECK CIRCUIT CCA15 (YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 56
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Disconnect: Traction Control Switch C2355
Key in ON position.
Fig. 22: Measuring Voltage Between Stability/Traction Control Switch C202-7, Circuit
CCA15 (YE/GY)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between stability/traction control switch C2355-7, circuit CCA15 (YE/GY),
harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 9.5 volts?
YES : Go to K2.
NO : Go to K4.
K2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD116 (BK/VT) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 23: Measuring Resistance Between Stability/Traction Control Switch C202-1, Circuit
GD116 (BK/VT)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between stability/traction control switch C2355-1, circuit GD116 (BK/VT),
harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to K3.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD116 (BK/VT). CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 57
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
K3 ISOLATE THE STABILITY/TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH
Measure the resistance between stability/traction control switch C2355 pin-7, component side and
pin-1, component side while pressing and releasing the switch.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms with the switch pressed and greater than 10,000 ohms with
the switch released?
YES : Go to K6.
NO : INSTALL a new stability/traction control switch. REFER to Stability/Traction Control
Switch. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
K4 CHECK CIRCUIT CCA15 (YE/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: Instrument Cluster C220
Fig. 24: Measuring Resistance Between Stability/Traction Control Switch C202-7, CCA15
(YE/GY) & Instrument Cluster C220-22
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between stability/traction control switch C2355-7, CCA15 (YE/GY),
harness side and instrument cluster C220-22, circuit CCA15 (YE/GY), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to K5.
NO : REPAIR circuit CCA15 (YE/GY). CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal operation.
K5 CHECK CIRCUIT CCA15 (YE/GY) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 58
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 25: Measuring Voltage Between Stability/Traction Control Switch C202-7, CCA15
(YE/GY) & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between stability/traction control switch C2355-7, CCA15 (YE/GY), harness
side and ground.
Is any voltage present?
YES : REPAIR circuit CCA15 (YE/GY). CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for normal
operation.
NO : Go to K6.
K6 CHECK THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
Check instrument cluster C220 for:
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminals.
Connect: Instrument Cluster C220
Make sure the instrument cluster connector seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new instrument cluster. REFER to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC),
MESSAGE CENTER & WARNING CHIMES article. CLEAR the DTCs. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not
applied.
Pinpoint Test L: DTCs B1317 and B1318 - Battery Voltage High/Low
Refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article, Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and
connector information.
Normal Operation
The voltage range required to operate the steering angle sensor module (SASM) is 8-16 volts.
Fused ignition voltage is supplied to the SASM from smart junction box (SJB) fuse 34 (5A) along circuit
CBP34 (VT/BN), ground is provided along circuit GD115 (BK/GY). The module communicates with other
modules along the high-speed controller area network (HS-CAN) bus, circuits VDB05 (WH) and VDB04
(WH/BU).
DTC B1317 Battery Voltage High - If the battery voltage is higher than 16 volts for more than 100 ms,
DTC B1317 will be set.
DTC B1318 Battery Voltage Low - If the battery voltage is lower than 8 volts for more than 100 ms,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 59
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
DTC B1317 will be set.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Wiring, terminals or connectors
SASM
Charging system
PINPOINT TEST L: DTCs B1317 AND B1318 - BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH/LOW
NOTE:
Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring
terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
L1 CHECK FOR RETURNING DTCs
Connect the diagnostic tool.
Key in ON position.
Carry out the SASM self-test. Retrieve and record all SASM DTCs.
Are DTCs B1317 or 1318 present?
YES : Go to L2.
NO : REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to continue
diagnosis of the charging system.
L2 CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between the positive and negative battery terminals with the key ON and the
engine OFF (KOEO) and with the engine running.
Is the battery voltage between 10 and 13 volts with KOEO and between 13 and 17 volts with
the engine running?
YES : Go to L3.
NO : REFER to CHARGING SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article to continue
diagnosis of the charging system.
L3 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE SASM
Key in OFF position.
Disconnect: SASM C222
Key in ON position.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 60
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 26: Measuring Voltage Between Steering Angle Sensor C222-1, CBP34 (VT/BN), Harness
Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the voltage between SASM C222-1, CBP34 (VT/BN), harness side and ground.
Is the voltage greater 10 volts?
YES : Go to L4.
NO : VERIFY SJB fuses 34 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit CBP34 (VT/BN). CALIBRATE
the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure. CLEAR the
DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
L4 CHECK THE CIRCUIT GD115 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
Key in OFF position.
Fig. 27: Measuring Resistance Between Steering Angle Sensor C222-4, GD115 (BK/GY),
Harness Side & Ground
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Measure the resistance between SASM C222-4, GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
YES : Go to L5.
NO : REPAIR circuit GD115 (BK/GY). CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool
directions for the calibration procedure. CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the
brake pedal not applied.
L5 CHECK THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR SASM
Check SASM C222 for:
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 61
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
corrosion.
pushed-out pins.
spread terminals.
Connect: SASM C222
Make sure the ABS connector seats correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
YES : INSTALL a new SASM. REFER to Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM).
CALIBRATE the ABS module. FOLLOW the scan tool directions for the calibration procedure.
CLEAR the DTCs. CARRY OUT the self-test with the brake pedal not applied.
NO : The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT (HCU)
Material
Item
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C (US); CPM-1-C (Canada)
Specification
WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 62
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 28: Exploded View Of Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W707402
2
-
3
4
5
6
7
8
2286
2C286
2A335
2C304
2263
2C293
Description
Hydraulic control unit (HCU) bracket-toframe bolts (3 required)
HCU bracket-to-HCU bolts (3 required)
(part of 2C286)
Master cylinder rear brake tube
HCU
Master cylinder front brake tube
HCU bracket
RF brake caliper brake tube
RR brake caliper brake tube
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 63
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
9
10
2C294
2264
11
-
LR brake caliper brake tube
LF brake caliper brake tube
ABS module electrical connector (part of
14290)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's
specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been
previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY
MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on
Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information,
consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE:
Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled
onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube and the air cleaner assembly. For additional information, refer to
INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION AND FILTERING article.
2. Remove the battery and battery tray. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING &
CABLES article.
3. Disconnect the ABS module electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the 6 brake tube fittings.
To install, tighten the brake master cylinder tubes to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
To install, tighten the remaining tubes to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
5. Remove the 3 hydraulic control unit (HCU) bracket-to-frame bolts and the HCU.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-HCU bolts and separate the HCU from the bracket.
To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
NOTE:
Make sure the HCU and ABS module are clean and free of any brake fluid
or foreign material before separating the components.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 64
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE
Fig. 29: Exploded View Of Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
2C219
2
-
Description
ABS module
ABS module screw (4 required) (part of
2C219)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. The anti-lock brake
system (ABS) module can be damaged if exposed to these charges.
NOTE:
Do not allow any brake fluid or foreign material to enter the mating side of the
anti-lock brake system (ABS) module or damage to the solenoids can occur.
1. Remove the hydraulic control unit (HCU). For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit
(HCU).
2. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
NOTE:
Visually inspect the ABS module terminals for damage before installation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 65
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR - FRONT
Fig. 30: Exploded View Of Front Wheel Speed Sensor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W500010
2C204 RH/2C205 LH
3
-
Description
Wheel speed sensor bolt
Wheel speed sensor
Wheel speed sensor electrical connector
(part of 14290)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 66
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS & TIRES article.
Remove the retainers and position the fender splash shield aside.
Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
Disconnect the 6 pushpin fasteners.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt and the wheel speed sensor.
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
NOTE:
The wheel speed sensor harness must be routed as shown or damage to
the harness during vehicle jounce and rebound can occur.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Fig. 31: Identifying Wheel Speed Sensor Harness
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR - REAR
NOTE:
All wheel drive (AWD) shown, front wheel drive (FWD) similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 67
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 32: Exploded View Of Rear Wheel Speed Sensor With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
2C190
W500010
3
-
Description
Wheel speed sensor
Wheel speed sensor bolt
Wheel speed sensor electrical connector
(part of 14A005)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS & TIRES article.
2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 68
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the harness routing brackets.
3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor harness from the brackets.
4. Disconnect the pushpin fasteners.
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and the wheel speed sensor.
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
STABILITY CONTROL SENSOR CLUSTER
Fig. 33: Exploded View Of Stability Control Sensor Cluster With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W707142
2
3C187
3
-
Description
Stability control sensor cluster nuts (2
required)
Stability control sensor cluster
Stability control sensor cluster electrical
connector (part of 14A005)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
When installing a new stability control sensor cluster, the sensor cluster must
be calibrated. Follow the scan tool directions for the calibration procedures.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 69
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The sensor is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear seat.
1. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
2. Remove the right rear scuff plate. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM &
ORNAMENTATION article.
Position the carpet aside.
3. Disconnect the stability control sensor cluster electrical connector.
4. Remove the 2 stability control sensor cluster nuts and the stability control sensor cluster.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
STABILITY/TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Edge shown, MKX similar.
Fig. 34: Identifying Stability/Traction Control Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
13D730
7804302
Description
Stability/traction control switch
Instrument panel center finish panel
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 70
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the OFF position if disconnecting the
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator electrical connector.
Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute.
2. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to INSTRUMENT
PANEL & CONSOLE article.
3. Depress the 4 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch from the instrument panel center finish
panel.
Fig. 35: Depressing Tabs & Removing Stability/Traction Control Switch From Instrument Panel
Center Finish Panel
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR MODULE (SASM)
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Vehicle Communication Module
(VCM) and Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) software with
appropriate hardware, or equivalent
scan tool
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 71
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
Fig. 36: Exploded View Of Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3F818
3
-
Description
Steering angle sensor module (SASM)
bolts (2 required) (part of 13D774)
SASM
SASM electrical connector (part of
14401)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the clockspring. For additional information, refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM article.
2. Remove the 2 steering angle sensor module (SASM) bolts.
3. Disconnect the SASM electrical connector and remove the steering wheel rotation sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. If the arrow on the SASM ring and the arrow on the sensor housing are misaligned and/or the straight
ahead position of the sensor is not known, follow these steps to align the sensor prior to installing the
sensor:
1. Orient the front wheels in the straight-ahead position.
2. Connect the SASM electrical connector.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 72
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Vehicle Dynamic Systems - Edge & MKX
3. Connect the battery negative cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY, MOUNTING
& CABLES article.
4. Carefully rotate the sensor clockwise until it stops.
5. Rotate the sensor counter-clockwise 2-1/2 turns.
6. Using the scan tool, read the SASM position PID (SWA POS). The PID should read approximately
0 degrees. If not, repeat the procedure.
7. Disconnect the battery negative cable. For additional information, refer to BATTERY,
MOUNTING & CABLES article.
8. Disconnect the SASM electrical connector.
NOTE:
Slight rotation of the SASM ring is allowed to align the 2 arrows.
2. Make sure the sensor ring arrow is lined up with the SASM housing arrow as shown and position the
sensor into the multi-function switch housing.
Fig. 37: Making Sure Sensor Ring Arrow Is Lined Up With Absolute Steering Angle Sensor
Housing Arrow
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Connect the SASM electrical connector.
4. Remove the 2 SASM bolts.
Tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in).
5. Install the clockspring. For additional information, refer to SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
article.
If the SASM was aligned using the scan tool, DTCs will be present in the restrains control module
(RCM). Using the scan tool, clear the DTCs in the RCM.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:01:07 AM
Page 73
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - Edge & MKX
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Air cleaner bolt
Air cleaner outlet pipe-to-air cleaner cover clamp
Air cleaner outlet pipe-to-throttle body (TB) clamp
9
5
5
lb-in
80
44
44
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION AND FILTERING
The air intake system consists of the:
air cleaner inlet.
air cleaner element.
mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
air cleaner outlet pipe.
The air intake system:
cleans intake air with a replaceable, dry-type air cleaner element.
measures airflow and air temperature with the MAF sensor.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION AND FILTERING
Refer to the Introduction - Gasoline Engines article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
INTAKE AIR SYSTEM COMPONENTS - EXPLODED VIEW
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:25:01
11:24:57 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Intake Air System Components With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
9Y432
6758
3
9C632
4
9C632
5
9F805
6
14A464
7
9661
Description
Vacuum tube
Crankcase vent tube
Air cleaner outlet pipe-to-throttle body
(TB) clamp
Air cleaner outlet pipe-to-air cleaner
cover clamp
Air cleaner outlet pipe
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector
Air cleaner cover
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:24:57 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - Edge & MKX
8
9601
9
9628
10
11
9A600
N606678
Air cleaner element
Air cleaner tray assembly-to-air cleaner
cover clamps
Air cleaner tray assembly
Air cleaner bolt
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures in this article.
AIR CLEANER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe from the air cleaner.
To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Remove the air cleaner bolt.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
NOTE:
No tools are needed to remove the air cleaner assembly. Removal should
be carried out using hands only.
4. Separate the 2 air cleaner feet from the rubber grommets and remove the air cleaner assembly.
NOTE:
Make sure that the 2 air cleaner feet are seated into the rubber grommets
under the air cleaner assembly.
NOTE:
The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered
air from entering the engine.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
AIR CLEANER OUTLET PIPE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube and vacuum tube from the air cleaner outlet pipe.
2. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe-to-air cleaner cover clamp.
To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe-to-throttle body clamp.
Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:24:57 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered
air from entering the engine.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 11:24:57 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
2008 BRAKES
Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Front parking brake cable bracket bolts
Front parking brake cable floor plate bolts
Front parking brake cable-to-control nut
Parking brake control nuts
Rear parking brake cable bracket bolts
Rear parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts
Rear stabilizer bar link nut
Wheel speed sensor bolt
Nm
23
23
23
23
23
23
35
7
lb-ft
17
17
17
17
17
17
26
-
lb-in
62
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake and actuation system consists of the following components:
Parking brake cables
Parking brake control
Parking brake shoes
The parking brake system is a mechanical system that activates a shoe-and-drum parking brake within the rear
brake disc.
The parking brake system is cable-actuated and controlled by an independent pedal-operated parking brake
control. The parking brake control applies tension to the front parking brake cable and conduit. The front
parking brake cable is coupled to the LH rear parking brake cable and conduit which is coupled to the RH rear
parking brake cable. The parking brake cable and conduits actuate the parking brake levers, engaging the
parking brake shoes with the parking brake drum and hat assembly. The parking brake warning indicator is
located in the instrument cluster. It illuminates to signal the driver that the parking brake is applied or to signal a
low brake fluid condition. The warning indicator system is diagnosed in INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC),
MESSAGE CENTER, AND WARNING CHIMES article.
The parking brake cable system tension is self-adjusting.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
PARKING BRAKE
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:48
10:08:44 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Principles of Operation
Parking Brake System - The parking brake system is an independent cable-actuated system controlled by an
foot-operated parking brake control that is not self-adjusting. When the parking brake control is pressed, tension
is applied to the front cable and is applied to the brake shoes through the equalizer and the rear parking brake
cables. To return the system to the released position, the parking brake control is pressed a second time.
Inspection and Verification
NOTE:
Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, make sure the red brake warning indicator
is functional. Refer to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC), MESSAGE CENTER, AND
WARNING CHIMES article.
The first indication that something may be wrong in the brake system is a change in the feeling through the
parking brake control. The parking brake not holding on an incline or dragging after being released are also
indicators of system concerns.
Check the operation of the parking brake system with the vehicle on a hoist and the parking brake control fully
released. Check for any damaged cables and install new components as necessary. Carry out the brake system
diagnosis.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Mechanical
Front parking brake cable and conduit
LH rear parking brake cable and conduit
Parking brake control
Parking brake cable equalizer
Rear parking brake shoes and hardware
RH rear parking brake cable and conduit
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and Go to Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Condition
Possible Sources
Action
REPAIR or INSTALL new parking
brake components as necessary.
REFER to Parking Brake Control,
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Rear brakes drag
The parking brake
does not apply
INSPECT the brake calipers as
necessary. REFER to Diagnosis and
Testing in BRAKE SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION
article. REPAIR or INSTALL new
components as necessary.
CARRY OUT the Brake Booster
Component Test. REFER to
Diagnosis and Testing in BRAKE
SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
CARRY OUT the Brake Master
Cylinder Component Test. REFER to
Diagnosis and Testing in BRAKE
SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article.
Brake caliper guide pins
Brake caliper
Brake booster
Front parking brake
cable
Parking brake control
Parking brake equalizer
Parking brake shoes and
hardware
Rear parking brake
cables
Go to Pinpoint Test A.
Front parking brake
cable
Parking brake control
Parking brake control
release handle
Parking brake return
springs
Parking brake shoes and
hardware
Go to Pinpoint Test B.
The parking brake
will not release
INSPECT the brake caliper guide
pins. REFER to Diagnosis and Testing
in BRAKE SYSTEM - GENERAL
INFORMATION article. REPAIR or
INSTALL new components as
necessary.
Brake master cylinder
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH,
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH,
Parking Brake Cable - Front or
Parking Brake Shoes.
Parking brake
component
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Rear parking brake
cables
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Parking Brake Does Not Apply
Normal Operation
When the parking brake control is applied, tension is applied to the front parking brake cable. This tension is
applied to both rear cables through the equalizer. The tension in the rear cables pulls on the parking brake shoe
actuators and applies the parking brakes.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Front parking brake cable
Parking brake control
Parking brake shoe actuators
Parking brake shoes and hardware
Rear parking brake cables
PINPOINT TEST A: THE PARKING BRAKE DOES NOT APPLY
A1 CHECK THE PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Press the parking brake control pedal.
Does the parking brake control move?
YES : Go to A2.
NO : Go to A3.
A2 CHECK FOR BROKEN CABLES
Remove the rear brake disc. Refer to REAR DISC BRAKE article.
NOTE:
Have an assistant press and release the parking brake pedal to help
isolate disconnected cables or cables that do not move.
Inspect the following items for damage and correct connections:
Cable equalizer
Front cable
LH rear cable and return spring
Parking brake control
Parking brake shoe actuators
RH rear cable and return spring
Is any damage found or are any components disconnected?
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
YES : CONNECT the component(s) or INSTALL new parking brake component(s) as necessary.
TEST the system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL new parking brake shoes. REFER to Parking Brake Shoes. TEST the system for
normal operation.
A3 ISOLATE THE PARKING BRAKE CONTROL AND FRONT PARKING BRAKE CABLE
Disconnect the return spring from the equalizer.
Relieve the tension in the parking brake cable by loosening the equalizer adjustment nut until the
rear cables can be disconnected from the equalizer.
Disconnect both rear cables from the equalizer.
Press the parking brake control pedal.
Does the parking brake control pedal move?
YES : Go to A4.
NO : Go to A6.
A4 ISOLATE THE REAR PARKING BRAKE CABLES
Remove the rear parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts and disconnect the rear parking brake
cables from their actuators.
To install, tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
While holding the cable conduit, attempt to slide the LH and the RH cables inside their conduits.
Do the cables slide freely inside their conduits?
YES : Go to A5.
NO : INSTALL new rear brake cable(s). REFER to Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH and/or
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH. TEST the system for normal operation.
A5 ISOLATE THE PARKING BRAKE SHOE ACTUATORS
Remove the LH and RH parking brake shoes. Refer to Parking Brake Shoes.
Attempt to move the LH and RH parking brake shoe actuators by hand.
Do the actuators move?
YES : INSTALL new parking brake shoes. REFER to Parking Brake Shoes. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : INSTALL new parking brake shoe actuator(s). REFER to Brake Caliper Support Plate in
REAR DISC BRAKE article. TEST the system for normal operation.
A6 ISOLATE THE FRONT PARKING BRAKE CABLE
Remove the parking brake control adjustment nut and remove the front parking brake cable from
the parking brake control.
Attempt to slide the front parking brake cable inside the conduit.
Does the cable slide freely inside the conduit?
YES : INSTALL a new parking brake control. REFER to Parking Brake Control. TEST the
system for normal operation.
NO : INSTALL a new front parking brake cable. REFER to Parking Brake Cable - Front. TEST
the system for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Pinpoint Test B: The Parking Brake Will Not Release
Normal Operation
When the parking brake control is fully applied and the pedal is pressed a second time, the ratchet mechanism
and return spring in the parking brake control cause the tension on the parking brake cables to release. The
springs on both rear parking brake cables and the spring on the equalizer provide the force necessary to return
the system to the released position.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
Front parking brake cable
Parking brake control
Parking brake shoe actuators
Parking brake shoes and hardware
Rear parking brake cables
PINPOINT TEST B: THE PARKING BRAKE WILL NOT RELEASE
B1 CHECK THE PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Press the parking brake control pedal.
Does the parking brake control move?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : Go to B2.
B2 ISOLATE THE PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Release the parking brake cable tension at the parking brake control adjusting nut.
Disconnect the parking brake cable at the parking brake lever.
Press the parking brake control pedal.
Does the parking brake control move?
YES : Go to B3.
NO : INSTALL a new parking brake control. REFER to Parking Brake Control. TEST the
system for normal operation.
B3 ISOLATE THE FRONT PARKING BRAKE CABLE
Disconnect the return spring from the equalizer.
If necessary, relieve the tension in the parking brake cable by loosening the equalizer adjustment
nut until the rear cables can be disconnected from the equalizer.
Disconnect the LH and RH cables from the equalizer.
Verify that the front cable can slide freely in the conduit.
Does the cable slide freely in the conduit?
YES : Go to B4.
NO : INSTALL a new front cable. REFER to Parking Brake Cable - Front. TEST the system for
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
normal operation.
B4 ISOLATE THE REAR PARKING BRAKE CABLES
Remove the rear parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts and disconnect the rear parking brake
cables from their actuators.
To install, tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
While holding the cable conduit, attempt to slide the LH and the RH cables inside their conduits.
Do the cables slide freely inside their conduits?
YES : Go to B5.
NO : INSTALL new rear brake cable(s). REFER to Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH and/or
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH. TEST the system for normal operation.
B5 ISOLATE THE PARKING BRAKE SHOE ACTUATORS
Remove the LH and RH parking brake shoes. Refer to Parking Brake Shoes.
Attempt to move the LH and RH parking brake shoe actuators by hand.
Do the actuators move?
YES : INSTALL new parking brake shoes. REFER to Parking Brake Shoes. TEST the system for
normal operation.
NO : INSTALL new parking brake shoe actuator(s). REFER to Brake Caliper Support Plate in
REAR DISC BRAKE article. TEST the system for normal operation.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
PARKING BRAKE CABLE ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:
Cable tension is adjusted in 2 locations, the first location is at the parking brake
control, the second location is at the parking brake cable equalizer. The tension
must be adjusted equally at both locations.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
NOTE:
The dimension will vary depending on the amount of cable stretch. New
cables require cycling the parking brake control 5-10 times to remove the
cable slack.
2. Adjust the parking brake control adjustment nut as shown.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Adjusting Parking Brake Control Adjustment Nut With Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Adjust the parking brake cable equalizer adjustment nut as shown.
Fig. 2: Adjusting Parking Brake Cable Equalizer Adjustment Nut With Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Fully apply the parking brake pedal 3 times to verify correct operation of the parking brake system.
With the parking brake cable in the fully released position, brake drag should not be present.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
PARKING BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR SWITCH
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 3: Exploded View Of Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
3
15A851
-
Description
Parking brake warning indicator switch
screw (part of 15A851)
Parking brake warning indicator switch
Electrical connector (part of 14A005)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch screw and the switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Exploded View Of Parking Brake Control With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
2760
2
-
3
4
W707144
2454
5
15852
6
2853
7
-
Description
Parking brake control
Parking brake control adjustment nut
(part of 2853)
Parking brake control nuts (3 required)
Parking brake control pad
Parking brake switch electrical connector
(part of 14A005)
Front parking brake cable
Front parking brake cable-to-control nut
(part of 2853)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the parking brake control adjustment nut.
3. Remove the front parking brake cable-to-control nut and position the front cable aside.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Remove the 3 parking brake control nuts and the parking brake control.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Adjust the parking brake cable. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Cable
Adjustment.
PARKING BRAKE CABLE - REAR, LH
NOTE:
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles shown, front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 5: Exploded View Of Rear LH Parking Brake Cable With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W708004
W708004
Description
Parking brake cable front bracket bolt
Parking brake cable middle bracket bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
3
2A635
4
W500021
5
-
6
7
8
W520414
W500010
2C190
LH parking brake cable
Parking brake cable-to-support plate
bolts (2 required)
Parking brake cable equalizer (part of
2853)
Rear stabilizer bar link nut
Wheel speed sensor bolt
Wheel speed sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Relieve the tension in the parking brake cable by loosening the equalizer adjustment nut.
Fig. 6: Locating Equalizer Adjustment Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the LH parking brake cable from the equalizer.
4. Squeeze the tabs and disconnect the LH parking brake cable from the bracket.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the wheel speed sensor aside.
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
All vehicles
6. Remove the 2 parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts and disconnect the cable from the lever.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the stabilizer bar link nut and position the stabilizer bar link aside.
To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
8. Remove the parking brake cable front bracket bolt, middle bracket bolt and the parking brake cable.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Adjust the parking brake cable. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Cable
Adjustment.
PARKING BRAKE CABLE - REAR, RH
NOTE:
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles shown, front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles similar.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Exploded View Of Rear RH Parking Brake Cable With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
W708004
W708004
Description
Parking brake cable rear bracket bolt
Parking brake cable middle bracket bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
3
4
2A635
W708004
5
W708004
6
W500021
7
8
9
10
W520414
W500010
2C190
RH parking brake cable
Parking brake cable front LH bracket bolt
Parking brake cable front RH bracket
bolt
Parking brake cable-to-support plate
bolts (2 required)
Rear stabilizer bar link nut
Parking brake cable equalizer (part 2853)
Wheel speed sensor bolt
Wheel speed sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Relieve the tension in the parking brake cable by loosening the equalizer adjustment nut.
Fig. 8: Locating Equalizer Adjustment Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Disconnect the RH parking brake cable from the equalizer.
4. Squeeze the tabs and disconnect the RH parking brake cable from the bracket.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the wheel speed sensor aside.
To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
All vehicles
6. Remove the 2 parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts and disconnect the cable from the lever.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
7. Remove the stabilizer bar link nut and position the stabilizer bar link aside.
To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
8. Remove the 4 parking brake cable bracket bolts and the parking brake cable.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Adjust the parking brake cable. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Cable
Adjustment.
PARKING BRAKE CABLE - FRONT
Fig. 9: Exploded View Of Front Parking Brake Cable With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Item
1
Part Number
2853
2
-
3
W708004
4
W708004
5
W520201
6
-
Description
Front parking brake cable
Front parking brake cable-to-control nut
(part of 2853)
Front parking brake cable bracket bolt
Front parking brake cable floor plate bolt
(2 required)
Parking brake cable equalizer adjustment
nut
Parking brake control adjustment nut
(part of 2853)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING
AND LIFTING article.
2. Remove the parking brake cable equalizer adjustment nut and disconnect the front cable from the
equalizer.
3. Remove the LH front seat. For additional information, refer to SEATING article.
4. Remove the LH front door scuff plate. For additional information, refer to INTERIOR TRIM AND
ORNAMENTATION article.
5. Remove the parking brake control adjustment nut.
6. Remove the front parking brake cable-to-control nut and remove the front parking brake cable from the
control.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the front parking brake cable bracket bolt.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
8. Remove the 2 front parking brake cable floor plate bolts.
To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
9. Remove the front parking brake cable.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Adjust the parking brake cable. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Cable
Adjustment.
PARKING BRAKE SHOES
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 BRAKES Parking Brake Actuation - Edge & MKX
Fig. 10: Exploded View Of Parking Brake Shoes
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
2648
2L642
Description
Parking brake shoe
Parking brake shoe return spring
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the rear brake disc. For additional information, refer to REAR DISC BRAKE article.
Remove the parking brake shoe return spring.
Remove the parking brake shoe.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Check the parking brake for normal operation.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:08:44 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES
Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Left front halfshaft assembled length
671.8 mm (26.44 in)
Right front halfshaft assembled length (all wheel
632.4 mm (24.89 in)
drive [AWD])
Right front halfshaft assembled length (front wheel
605.4 mm (23.83 in)
drive [FWD])
LUBRICANTS & CAPACITIES
Lubricant
Specification
Front Halfshaft Inboard Constant Velocity (CV) Joint
Constant Velocity Joint Grease
(from 3A331 kit)
Front Halfshaft Outboard CV Joint
Constant Velocity Joint Grease
(from 3A331 kit)
Capacity
295 g (10.41 oz)
130 g (4.58 oz)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Nm
Ball joint pinch nut
Catalytic converter support bracket bolts
Front stabilizer bar link nut
Front wheel hub nut
Intermediate shaft bearing support bolts (AWD)
Intermediate shaft bearing support bolts (FWD)
55
20
90
350
40
40
lb-ft
41
15
66
258
30
30
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
The front drive halfshafts consist of the following:
Inboard and outboard constant velocity (CV) joints connect to a splined shaft. Driveshaft bearing retainer
circlips retain the CV joints to the splined shaft.
A front axle wheel hub nut that secures the splined outboard CV joint to the wheel hub.
Lubed-for-life CV joints use special CV joint grease requiring no periodic lubrication.
A boot repair kit, 3A331, which includes the boots, clamps and grease is available.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:28
10:09:24 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
On the LH side, the inboard CV joint is retained in the differential side gear with a 33 mm (1.29 in) retainer
circlip. This circlip is oval in shape when viewed at the end. Install a new circlip every time the halfshaft is
disconnected. On the RH side, a 30 mm (1.181 in) driveshaft bearing retainer circlip retains the splined inboard
CV joint to the intermediate shaft. This circlip is round when view at the end. Install a new circlip every time
you disconnect the halfshaft from the intermediate shaft.
The halfshafts are splined on the outboard stub shaft to drive the wheel hubs. They are retained in the wheel
hubs by special wheel hub nuts which also control the wheel bearing preload. The LH halfshaft is splined on the
inboard stub shaft and is retained in the differential side gear in the transaxle by a circlip. The RH halfshaft has
internal splines which are driven by the intermediate shaft. The intermediate shaft has a circlip on the outboard
end and is retained inside the inboard stub shaft. The circlips must be installed new whenever they are removed.
The intermediate shaft is retained in the transaxle differential side gear by bolts that go through the intermediate
shaft support bearing. The intermediate shaft also goes through the power transfer unit (PTU) on all wheel drive
(AWD) vehicles. The outer seal of the PTU must be installed new whenever the intermediate shaft is removed.
Halfshaft Handling
CAUTION: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft only by the inboard or outboard
constant velocity (CV) joint or damage to the component may occur.
Handle all halfshaft components carefully during removal and installation and during various component
disassembly and assembly procedures. Do not overangle the CV joints. Damage will occur to an assembled
inboard CV joint if it is overplunged outward from the joint housing. Never use the halfshaft assembly as a
lever to position other components. Always support the free end of the halfshaft. Do not allow the boots to
contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. Handle the halfshaft only by the interconnecting shaft to avoid
pull-apart and potential damage to the CV joints. Excessive pulling force on the interconnecting shaft between
joints of the halfshaft will result in internal joint damage. Axial loads used in assisting removal must be applied
through the inboard joint housing only. Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact will cut the boots from
the inside without evidence of external damage.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFTS
Refer to DRIVELINE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HALFSHAFT - RH
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Remover, Front Wheel Hub
Tool Number
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 1: Identifying Halfshaft With Torque Specifications - RH
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
3N404
W712481
W520213
3B438
Description
Wheel hub nut
Ball joint pinch bolt
Ball joint pinch nut
Stabilizer bar link
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
5
6
7
W520214
3A423
3A427
Stabilizer bar link nut
Lower arm
Halfshaft assembly
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Remove the front tire and wheel. For additional information, refer to WHEELS & TIRES article.
NOTE:
Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
3. Remove and discard the front wheel hub nut.
Fig. 2: Locating Front Wheel Hub Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the stabilizer bar link nut and position the link aside.
Fig. 3: Locating Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the ball joint pinch bolt from the knuckle and separate the lower control arm.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 4: Locating Ball Joint Pinch Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Fig. 5: Separating Halfshaft From Wheel Hub Using Special Tool (205-D070)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Support the knuckle with a suitable jackstand.
7. Pull the knuckle outboard and rotate it toward the rear of the vehicle.
8. Use a brass drift to strike the right side halfshaft in the indicated area and separate the RH halfshaft from
the intermediate shaft.
Fig. 6: Identifying Right Side Halfshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
9. Remove and discard the circlip from the intermediate shaft.
Fig. 7: Identifying Circlip From Intermediate Shaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install a new 30 mm (1.181 in) intermediate shaft circlip.
Fig. 8: Identifying Circlip From Intermediate Shaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Pull the right side inboard joint outward to make sure the circlip is locked.
2. Align the splines on the right side shaft with the intermediate shaft and push the stub shaft in until the
circlip locks the shafts together.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 9: Locating Pushpins
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
4. Rotate the knuckle into position.
5. Install the ball joint in the knuckle and install the pinch bolt and nut.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Fig. 10: Locating Ball Joint Pinch Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Position the stabilizer bar link and install the link nut.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 11: Locating Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Using a suitable tool, install the halfshaft in the wheel hub.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Locating Halfshaft On Wheel Hub
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The
nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto
the wheels. Wheel bearing damage may occur if the wheel bearing is
loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE:
Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
8. Install a new front wheel hub nut.
Tighten to 350 Nm (258 lb-ft).
9. Install the front tire and wheel. For additional information, refer to WHEELS & TIRES article.
HALFSHAFT - LH
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Remover, Front Wheel Hub
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
equivalent
Remover, Halfshaft
205-241
Remover, Halfshaft (Plate)
205-290
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Slide Hammer
100-001 (T50T-100-A)
Fig. 13: Identifying Halfshaft With Torque Specifications - LH
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
W520213
W712481
3N404
W520214
Description
Lower ball joint pinch nut
Lower ball joint pinch bolt
Wheel end nut and washer assembly
Stabilizer bar link nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
5
6
7
3B438
3A423
3A428
Stabilizer bar link
Lower arm
Halfshaft assembly
REMOVAL
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to JACKING &
LIFTING article.
2. Remove the front tire and wheel. For additional information, refer to WHEELS & TIRES article.
NOTE:
Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
3. Remove and discard the front wheel hub nut.
4. Remove the ball joint pinch bolt from the knuckle and separate the lower control arm.
Fig. 14: Locating Ball Joint Pinch Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the stabilizer bar link nut and position the link aside.
Fig. 15: Locating Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 16: Separating Halfshaft From Wheel Hub Using Special Tool (205-D070)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Support the knuckle with a suitable jackstand.
7. Pull the knuckle outboard and rotate it toward the front of the vehicle.
Fig. 17: Locating Jackstand
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Using the special tools, remove the halfshaft from the transmission.
Fig. 18: Removing Halfshaft Using Special Tools (100-001), (205-241) & (205-290)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove and discard the circlip from the stub shaft.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 19: Locating Halfshaft Circlip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install a new stub shaft circlip.
Fig. 20: Installing New Stub Shaft Circlip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
CAUTION: The sharp edges on the stub shaft splines can slice or puncture the
oil seal. Use care when inserting the stub shaft into the transmission
to avoid oil seal damage.
NOTE:
After insertion, pull the halfshaft inner end to make sure the circlip is
locked.
3. Push the stub shaft into the transmission so the circlip locks into the differential side gear.
4. Rotate the knuckle into position.
5. Install the ball joint in the knuckle and install the pinch bolt and nut.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 21: Locating Ball Joint Pinch Bolt
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Position the stabilizer bar link and install the link nut.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Fig. 22: Locating Stabilizer Bar Link Nut
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Using a suitable tool, install the halfshaft in the wheel hub.
Fig. 23: Locating Halfshaft On Wheel Hub
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground.
The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is
lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE:
Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
8. Install a new front wheel hub nut.
Tighten to 350 Nm (258 lb-ft).
9. Install the front tire and wheel. For additional information, refer to WHEELS & TIRES article.
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT - FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Seal Protector, Rear Axle Shaft
205-816
Fig. 24: Exploded View Of Intermediate Shaft - Front Wheel Drive (FWD) With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
5G288
Description
Exhaust converter bracket
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
2
3
4
5
3K183
W500235-S
W500131
5G288
6
W500210
Intermediate shaft assembly
Bracket-to-block bolts (2 required)
Bracket-to-block bolt
Exhaust converter bracket
Exhaust converter bracket bolts (2
required)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft - RH.
2. Remove the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts.
Fig. 25: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Remove the bolts from RH catalytic converter support bracket.
Fig. 26: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the intermediate shaft bearing support bracket-to-block bolt.
5. Carefully remove the intermediate shaft while supporting both ends of the intermediate shaft.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 27: Identifying Intermediate Shaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove and discard the circlip from the outboard end of the intermediate shaft.
Fig. 28: Locating Intermediate Shaft Circlip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install a new 30 mm (1.181 in) circlip on the outboard end of the intermediate shaft.
Fig. 29: Identifying Circlip From Intermediate Shaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Position the special tool over the halfshaft oil seal.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 30: Identifying Special Tool (205-816)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Position the intermediate shaft in the transaxle and engage the intermediate shaft splines with the
transaxle side gears. Make sure the circlip is locked in the gear.
4. Install the intermediate shaft support bracket-to-block stud bolt.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Install the RH catalytic converter support brackets and bolts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Fig. 31: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket & Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts.
Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 32: Identifying RH Catalytic Converter Support Bracket Bolts
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Install the right halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft - RH.
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT - ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)
Fig. 33: Exploded View Of Intermediate Shaft - All Wheel Drive (AWD) With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
W500235-S
2
3K183
Description
Intermediate shaft support bracket bolt (2
required)
Intermediate shaft assembly
REMOVAL
NOTE:
The intermediate shaft seal in the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) must be replaced
whenever the intermediate shaft is removed. For additional information, refer to
TRANSFER CASE - POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) article.
1. Remove the right halfshaft assembly. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft - RH.
2. Remove the 2 intermediate shaft support bracket bolts and the intermediate shaft.
3. Remove and discard the circlip from the outboard end of the intermediate shaft.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 34: Locating Intermediate Shaft Circlip
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Install a new 30 mm (1.181 in) circlip on the outboard end of the intermediate shaft.
Fig. 35: Identifying Circlip From Intermediate Shaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install a new intermediate shaft seal in the PTU. For additional information, refer to TRANSFER CASE
- POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) article.
3. Position the intermediate shaft in the PTU and engage the intermediate shaft splines with the PTU gears.
4. Install the 2 intermediate shaft support bracket bolts.
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Install the right halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft - RH.
CONSTANT VELOCITY (CV) JOINT BOOT
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Installer, Constant Velocity Joint
205-343 (T95P-3514-A)
Boot Clamp
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 36: Exploded View Of Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
Description
Low profile large inboard boots inner
clamps (serviced in 3A331 kit only)
Low profile small inboard boots
(serviced in 3A331 kit only)
Intermediate shaft boot clamps (serviced
in 3A331 kit only)
Outboard boot outer clamps (serviced in
3A331 kit only)
Outboard constant velocity (CV) joint
boots (serviced in 3A331 kit only)
Inboard CV joint boots (serviced in
3A331 kit only)
DISASSEMBLY
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
1. Remove the halfshaft assembly. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft - RH and Halfshaft - LH.
2. For the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint, remove and discard the boot clamps.
3. Remove the inboard CV joint retaining ring.
Fig. 37: Locating Retaining Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not let the roller bearings fall or damage to the component may
occur.
4. For the inboard CV joint, carry out the following:
Remove and discard the retainer circlip.
Slide the boot away from the CV joint.
Fig. 38: Identifying CV Joint & Snap Ring On Halfshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Using a suitable 3-jaw puller, remove the CV joint.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 39: Identifying CV Joint Using Suitable 3-Jaw Puller
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Remove and discard the inner CV boot.
Fig. 40: Locating Inner CV Boot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
The outboard CV joint is not removable from the halfshaft. The boot must
be removed or installed from the inboard CV joint side of the shaft.
7. For the outboard CV joint, carry out the following:
1. Remove and discard the boot clamps.
2. Remove and discard the boot.
Fig. 41: Identifying Boot Clamps & Boot
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Do not mix the boot clamps.
1. Lubricate the outboard CV joint.
1. Pack the outboard CV joint with grease from the kit.
One-third of the grease must be installed in the joint with the remainder placed in the boot.
2. Spread the remaining grease evenly inside the boot.
Fig. 42: Identifying Outboard CV Joint & Boot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Position the boot so the rib on the boot is located in the groove of the shaft.
Fig. 43: Locating Boot In Groove Of Shaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Position the outboard halfshaft boot and the outboard boot clamps.
1. Position the boot.
2. Position the boot clamps.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 44: Positioning Boot Clamps
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the outboard CV boot clamps.
Fig. 45: Identifying Outboard CV Boot Clamp
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Position the inboard clamp and boot.
Fig. 46: Identifying Inboard Clamp & Boot
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
6. Install the CV joint and snap ring on the halfshaft.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 47: Identifying CV Joint & Snap Ring On Halfshaft
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Fill the inboard CV joint housing with grease from the kit.
One-half of the grease must be installed in the joint and the remainder placed in the boot.
Fig. 48: Locating Inboard CV Joint Housing
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
CAUTION: Do not let the roller bearings fall or damage to the component may
occur.
8. Position the CV housing on the CV joint.
Fig. 49: Locating CV Housing On CV Joint
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
9. Install the retaining ring.
Fig. 50: Locating Retaining Ring
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
10. Position the inboard halfshaft boot and clamps.
Position the boot in the housing groove.
Position the boot clamps.
Fig. 51: Locating Boot Clamps & Housing Groove
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
11. Set the halfshaft assembled length to specifications. For additional information, refer to
SPECIFICATIONS .
1. Measure the entire assembly length.
2. Push in or pull out on the inner joint as necessary to adjust the halfshaft assembled length.
3. Hold the inner joint to prevent the assembled length from changing and insert a small flat-blade
screwdriver between the boot and the joint to equalize the pressure.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 26
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 52: Identifying Halfshaft Length Measurements
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
12. Install the boot clamps.
Place the lever arm to the closed position and use a soft-faced hammer to close the tabs.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 27
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 DRIVELINE/AXLES Front Drive Halfshafts - Edge & MKX
Fig. 53: Placing Lever Arm To Closed Position & Use A Soft-Faced Hammer To Close Tabs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
13. Install the halfshaft assembly. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft - RH and Halfshaft - LH.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:09:24 AM
Page 28
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
2008 SUSPENSION
Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Brake caliper anchor plate bolt
Brake flexible hose bracket bolt
Driveshaft bolts
Engine roll restrictor heat shield nut
Engine roll restrictor-to-subframe bolt
Exhaust flexible pipe nuts
Front lower bumper-to-subframe nuts
Halfshaft nut
Lower arm-to-frame forward bolt
Lower arm-to-frame rearward bolt
Lower ball joint nut
Lower steering shaft coupler bolt
Outer tie-rod end nuts
Power steering fluid cooler hose bracket bolt
Steering shaft coupler bolt
Shock absorber lower nuts
Shock absorber rod nut
Shock absorber upper mount nuts
Stabilizer bar bracket bolts
Stabilizer bar link upper and lower nuts
Subframe nuts
Subframe support bracket bolts
Subframe support bracket nuts
Wheel speed sensor bolt
Y-pipe clamp
Nm
133
20
70
11
103
40
9
275
150
80
55
25
48
9
25
225
115
30
63
90
133
90
133
7
40
lb-ft
98
15
52
8
76
30
203
111
59
41
18
35
18
166
85
22
46
66
98
66
98
30
lb-in
80
80
62
-
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
FRONT SUSPENSION
The front suspension consists of the following components:
Wheel bearings
Wheel hubs
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:57
10:48:52 AM
Page 1
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Wheel studs
Lower arms
Stabilizer bar
Stabilizer bar brackets
Stabilizer bar bushings
Stabilizer bar links
Shock absorber and spring assemblies
Wheel knuckles
The front suspension system incorporates a strut assembly that takes the place of the upper arm and ball joint.
The strut carries out the function of a shock absorber and is encompassed by a coil spring. The strut and spring
assembly supports the weight of the vehicle and is also the pivot point for the steering spindle. This system uses
a lower control arm and ball joint for the lower (unloaded) pivot point of the steering wheel knuckle. The
stabilizer bar and links are included to control lean/sway during turns.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
FRONT SUSPENSION
Refer to SUSPENSION SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WHEEL BEARING AND WHEEL HUB
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Pinion Bearing Cone Remover
205-D002 (D79L-4621-A) or
equivalent
Installer, Wheel Hub Bearing Cup
205-147
Remover/Installer, Wheel Hub Cup
204-020
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 2
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Stop Plate
205-117
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Wheel Bearing & Wheel Hub
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
1104
3B625
1215
2K005 LH/ 2K004 RH
3K171 LH/ 3K170 RH
Description
Wheel hub
Snap ring
Wheel bearing
Brake disc shield
Wheel knuckle
REMOVAL
NOTE:
If removing the wheel hub, the wheel bearing must be replaced.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle.
2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 3
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 2: Pressing Wheel Hub From Wheel Bearing Using Special Tool (205-117)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in
the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
3. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
Fig. 3: Pressing Inner Wheel Bearing Race From Wheel Hub Using Special Tool (205-D002)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the special tool, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Fig. 4: Pressing Outer Wheel Bearing Race From Wheel Knuckle Using Special Tool (204-020)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 4
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
INSTALLATION
1. Using the special tool, press the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
Fig. 5: Pressing Wheel Bearing Into Wheel Knuckle Using Special Tool (205-147)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
2. Install the snap ring.
3. Using the special tools, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Fig. 6: Pressing Wheel Hub Into Wheel Bearing Using Special Tools (205-117) & (205-147)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
4. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle.
WHEEL STUDS
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 5
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 7: Exploded View Of Wheel Studs
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
Part Number
1107
1104
Description
Wheel stud
Wheel hub
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel bearing and wheel hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub.
2. Using a press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel bearing and hub assembly.
Fig. 8: Removing Wheel Stud From Wheel Bearing & Hub Assembly
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made by the
original wheel stud.
2. Using a press, install a new wheel stud.
Fig. 9: Installing New Wheel Stud Using A Press
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
3. Install the wheel bearing and wheel hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and Wheel
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 6
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Hub.
LOWER ARM
Fig. 10: Exploded View Of Lower Arm Components With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part Number
3A423 RH/ 3A424 LH
W520213
3B438
W712481
W520214
W712734
Description
Lower arm
Lower ball joint nut
Stabilizer bar link
Lower ball joint bolt
Stabilizer bar link nut
Lower arm-to-frame forward bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 7
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
7
Lower arm-to-frame rearward bolts (2
required)
W712850
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
Remove and discard the stabilizer bar link lower nut.
Remove and discard the lower ball joint nut and bolt.
Remove the lower arm-to-frame forward bolt and spacer.
Discard the bolt.
5. Remove the 2 lower arm-to-frame rearward bolts and the lower arm.
Discard the 2 bolts.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
1. Position the lower arm and loosely install the 2 lower arm-to-frame rearward bolts.
NOTE:
Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
2. Loosely install the lower arm-to-frame forward bolt and spacer.
3. Install the lower arm ball joint bolt and nut.
Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
4. Install the stabilizer bar link lower nut.
Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
5. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
6. With the weight of the vehicle resting on the wheels and tires, tighten the lower arm-to-frame forward
bolts to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
7. With the weight of the vehicle resting on the wheels and tires, tighten the 2 lower arm-to-frame rearward
bolts to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
8. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES
article.
STABILIZER BAR AND LINK
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 8
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Tool Number
Tie-Rod End Remover
211-105 (T85M-3395-A)
Fig. 11: Replacing Bar & Link With Torque Specifications (1 Of 4)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Part Number
W712802
5486
5484
5494
W520214
3B438
W520214
W712481
W520213
W711889
-
Description
Stabilizer bar bracket bolts (4 required)
Stabilizer bar bracket (2 required)
Stabilizer bar bushing (2 required)
Stabilizer bar
Stabilizer bar link upper nut (2 required)
Stabilizer bar link (2 required)
Stabilizer bar link lower nut (2 required)
Lower ball joint bolt
Lower ball joint nut (2 required)
Outer tie-rod end nut (2 required)
Lower steering shaft coupler bolt
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 9
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 12: Replacing Stabilizer Bar & Link With Torque Specifications (2 Of 4)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
12
W708229
13
W712858
14
W712858
15
W712858
16
W712733
Description
Front lower bumper-to-subframe nut (6
required)
Front subframe mounting nut (2
required)
Front subframe mounting nut (2
required)
Subframe support bracket bolt (4
required)
Subframe support bracket nut (2
required)
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 10
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 13: Replacing Stabilizer Bar & Link With Torque Specifications (3 Of 4)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
Part Number
17
5F262
18
W705443
19
20
9451
9451
Description
Exhaust flexible pipe isolators (2
required)
Exhaust flexible pipe-to-exhaust Y-pipe
nut (2 required)
Gasket
Y-pipe clamp
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 11
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 14: Replacing Stabilizer Bar & Link With Torque Specifications (4 Of 4)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
21
Part Number
6C038
22
W700101
23
24
25
26
W711843
W711787
W711918
4K357
Description
Roll restrictor heat shield
Roll restrictor heat shield nuts (2
required)
Roll restrictor-to-subframe bolt
Power steering cooler hose bracket bolt
Driveshaft bolts (4 required)
Driveshaft assembly
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 12
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE:
If replacing only the stabilizer bar bushings, proceed to Step 23 of this
procedure.
All vehicles
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
2. Remove the lower steering shaft coupler bolt and disconnect the coupler from the steering gear.
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. Index-mark the relationship of the front subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations.
4. Remove the 4 pin-type retainers and the RH fender splash shield.
Fig. 15: Locating Pin-Type Retainers On RH Fender Splash Shield
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Remove the 3 pushpin fasteners, the 7 screws and the front splash shield.
Fig. 16: Locating Push Pin Fasteners & Front Splash Shield Screws
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 13
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
6. Remove the 3 RH front lower bumper-to-subframe nuts.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the 3 LH front lower bumper-to-subframe nuts and separate the lower bumper from the
subframe.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Remove the power steering fluid cooler hose bracket bolt.
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
9. Loosen the Y-pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
10. Remove the 2 nuts and separate the flex pipe from the Y-pipe assembly.
To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
11. Index-mark the driveshaft, remove the 4 bolts and position the driveshaft aside.
To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
All vehicles
NOTE:
Use the holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while
removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nuts.
12. Remove the stabilizer link upper and lower nuts and the stabilizer links.
Discard the nuts.
To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
13. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts.
To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
14. Using the special tool, separate the outer tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles.
Fig. 17: Separating Tie-Rod Ends From Wheel Knuckles Using Special Tool (211-105)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 14
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
15. Remove the 2 lower ball joint bolts and nuts and separate the lower ball joints from the wheel knuckles.
Discard the bolts and nuts.
To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
16. Remove the upper nut, loosen the lower nut and remove the engine roll restrictor heat shield.
To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
17. Remove the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe bolt.
To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
18. Using a suitable jack, support the subframe.
Support the subframe in the center rear area of the subframe.
NOTE:
During installation, the subframe brackets are loosely installed with the
support bracket bolts. Align the index marks made in Step 2, then tighten
the rear subframe nuts prior to tightening the support bracket bolts.
19. Remove the 2 nuts, 4 bolts and the subframe support brackets.
Discard the nuts and bolts.
To install, tighten the nuts to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
To install, tighten the bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
20. Remove and discard the 4 subframe nuts.
To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
21. Using the jack, lower the subframe approximately 76.2 mm (3 in).
22. Remove the 4 bolts, 2 stabilizer bar brackets and bushings.
Discard the bolts.
To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
23. Remove the stabilizer bar.
24. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
25. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. For additional information, refer to SUSPENSION
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
WHEEL KNUCKLE
Special Tools
Illustration
Tool Name
Remover, Front Hub
Tool Number
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) or
equivalent
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 15
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Remover, Tie-Rod End
211-105 (T85M-3395-A)
Fig. 18: Exploded View Of Wheel Knuckle With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
Part Number
3K171 LH/ 3K170 RH
2C204 RH/ 2C205 LH
W500222
W711889
Description
Wheel knuckle
Wheel speed sensor
Wheel speed sensor bolt
Tie-rod end nut
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:52 AM
Page 16
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
5
6
7
3K176
W520216
W712981
8
2248
9
10
11
12
13
1032
3N404
14
W713856
15
W520216
Tie-rod end cotter pin
Lower ball joint bolt
Lower ball joint nut
Brake caliper anchor plate bolts (2
required)
Brake caliper and anchor plate assembly
Brake disc
Halfshaft hub seal
Halfshaft hub washer
Halfshaft nut
Lower shock absorber flag bolts (2
required)
Lower shock absorber nuts (2 required)
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
NOTE:
Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
2. Remove the halfshaft nut, halfshaft hub seal and halfshaft washer.
Discard the nut, seal and washer.
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the wheel speed sensor aside.
CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the
brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and position the caliper and anchor plate assembly aside.
Support the caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire.
5. Remove the brake disc.
6. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:53 AM
Page 17
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 19: Pressing Halfshaft From Wheel Bearing & Hub
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
7. Remove and discard the tie-rod end cotter pin and nut.
CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel
knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result.
8. Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle.
Fig. 20: Separating Tie-Rod Ends From Wheel Knuckles Using Special Tool (211-105)
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
9. Remove the shock absorber lower nuts and flag bolts.
Discard the nuts and flag bolts.
10. Remove the lower ball joint bolt, nut and the wheel knuckle.
Discard the bolt and nut.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the lower ball joint bolt and nut.
Tighten the nut to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
2. Install the shock absorber lower nuts and flag bolts.
Tighten to 225 Nm (166 lb-ft).
3. Position the tie-rod end and install the nut and cotter pin.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:53 AM
Page 18
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Position the wheel speed sensor and install the bolt.
Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Install the brake disc.
Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 bolts.
Tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft).
Using a suitable installation tool, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION: Do not tighten the halfshaft nut with the vehicle on the ground. The
nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered
onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel
bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE:
Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
8. Install the halfshaft hub seal, washer and nut.
Tighten to 275 Nm (203 lb-ft).
9. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
10. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. For additional information, refer to SUSPENSION
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
SHOCK ABSORBER AND SPRING ASSEMBLY
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:53 AM
Page 19
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 21: Exploded View Of Shock Absorber & Spring Assembly With Torque Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
Part Number
-
2
W704790
3
W713856
4
5
6
7
W520216
W708004
2078
Description
Shock absorber and spring assembly
Shock absorber upper mount nut (4
required)
Shock absorber lower flag bolts (2
required)
Shock absorber lower nuts (2 required)
Wheel speed sensor harness clip
Brake flexible hose bracket bolt
Brake flexible hose
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:53 AM
Page 20
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove and discard the 4 shock absorber upper mount nuts.
To install, tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft).
2. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to WHEELS AND TIRES article.
3. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt and disconnect the hose from the shock absorber.
To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor harness from the shock absorber bracket.
5. Remove the shock absorber lower nuts, flag bolts and the shock absorber and spring assembly.
Discard the nuts and flag bolts.
To install, tighten to 225 Nm (166 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. For additional information, refer to SUSPENSION
SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION article.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
SHOCK ABSORBER AND SPRING ASSEMBLY
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:53 AM
Page 21
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
Fig. 22: Exploded View Of Shock Absorber & Spring Assembly With Torque Specification
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part Number
18K001 LH/ 18045 RH
18061
3K036
5A307
5310
18183
W520215
Description
Shock absorber
Jounce bumper
Dust boot
Spring lower seat
Spring
Spring upper mount and seat
Shock absorber rod nut
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING: Do not apply heat or flame to the shock absorber or strut tube. The shock
absorber and strut tube are gas pressurized and could explode if heated.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Keep all body parts clear of shock absorbers or strut rods. Shock
absorbers or struts can extend unassisted. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: The coil spring is under extreme load. Care must be taken at all times
when removing or installing a loaded spring. Failure to follow this
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:53 AM
Page 22
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: The coil spring is coated with long-term corrosion protective paint. Do not
damage the paint during component servicing or spring failure may result.
CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service
expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or
equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as
specified during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly. For additional information, refer to Shock Absorber
and Spring Assembly.
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
2. Position the shock and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
3. Compress the spring enough to relieve the tension on the shock and spring assembly.
CAUTION: Do not use an impact wrench on the shock absorber rod nut or
damage to the shock absorber may occur.
NOTE:
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Use the holding feature to prevent the shock absorber rod from turning
while removing the nut.
While holding the shock absorber rod, remove and discard the rod nut.
Remove the shock absorber assembly and spring lower seat.
Remove the dust boot and jounce bumper.
Remove the shock absorber upper mount and spring upper seat.
Carefully release the tension on the spring compressor and remove the spring.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the lower spring seat, jounce bumper and dust boot onto the shock absorber.
2. Position the shock and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
3. Install the spring, shock absorber upper mount and spring upper seat.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:53 AM
Page 23
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
4. Align the arrow on the upper mount perpendicular to the center of the shock absorber lower mount.
Fig. 23: Aligning Arrow On Upper Mount Perpendicular To Center Of Shock Absorber Lower
Mount
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
5. Compress the spring enough to relieve the tension on the shock and spring assembly.
6. Position the end of spring within 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in) of the upper spring mount.
Fig. 24: Positioning End Of Spring With Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
NOTE:
Before tightening the shock absorber rod nut, position the end of the
spring within 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in) of the step on the lower spring mount.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:53 AM
Page 24
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
2008 Ford Edge SE
2008 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Edge & MKX
NOTE:
Use the holding feature to prevent the shock absorber rod from turning
while installing the nut.
7. Install the shock absorber rod nut.
Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Fig. 25: Positioning End Of Spring Step With Specifications
Courtesy of FORD MOTOR CO.
8. Release the tension on the shock and spring assembly.
9. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly. For additional information, refer to Shock Absorber and
Spring Assembly.
Microsoft
Friday, September 25, 2009 10:48:53 AM
Page 25
© 2005 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.